《One Piece: God of Space》


 Chapter 1 Genji Changnuo

    <h4>Chapter 1 Genji Changnuo</h4>


    Under the blue sky, a group of seagulls flew over, and the sound of cooing echoed directly over the sea.


    But right at the edge of the sea, on the beach, there is a different scene.


    The golden sandy beach is directly connected to the coastline, and the woods behind it are so lush that they seem to grow to the sky.


    On the beach, under a sun umbre, a child who looked to be about five or six years old was lying here leisurely basking in the sun. He waspletely naked and only wore a pair of short beach shorts underneath.


    However, there were five or six burly men standing behind him, and two or three girls were serving him.


    Here, the little boy looks particrly leisurely andfortable, as if he is not disturbed by worldly things at all.


    "Your Highness, is the sun too strong? Should we find another ce to provide shade?"


    While the little boy was concentrating with his eyes closed and still eating fruit in his mouth, a maid standing next to him asked in a low voice and cautiously.


    The little boy opened his eyes slightly, without any expression. He just nced at the other person, then continued to close his eyes, and then said slowly, "Then you go and stand behind, go to the shade under the tree, and I will continue." Stay here and get some sunshine."


    The three maids looked at each other, and they all saw helplessness in each other''s eyes. The sweat on the foreheads of the burly men behind them could not stop falling.


    But after hearing what the little boy said, several of them didn''t dare to leave. They could only continue to stay here and serve him.


    However, for the little boy lying here, the thoughts in his mind have traveled an unknown number of miles, but his body is still lying here.


    Despite the enjoyment on his face, he is speechless now. It has been several years since he came to this world, and he still hasn''t figured out what the specific situation is. Why does it suddenly feel like traveling through time?


    He still remembered that he was still eating in the restaurant, but suddenly, when he woke up again, he had turned into a child being held in someone else''s arms?


    But it has been several years now, and I have already adapted to the current environment. But I have to say that the air environment here is really indescribably good.


    The little boy''s name is Genji Nagano. He is a prince of the Toru Kingdom in this world, and he is also the only prince of the Toru Kingdom.


    The old king didn''t have a son until he was 70 years old, so he doted on him very much. No matter where he went, he always had a few bodyguards with him.


    Just like now, he almost doesn''t have to worry about anything, he just has to y happily every day.


    But Chang Nuo doesn''t seem to be very satisfied with all this. Although he has been here for a few years, he may not have figured out which world this is? Why did you evene here?


    For him, he has long been tired of living this boring life every day, but for a former hard-working office worker, this kind of life is actually the kind of life he dreams of.


    The Kingdom of Tru is not particrly big. It is surrounded by the sea, and the overall national economy can only be considered average. But Changnuo has never paid attention to these things. Putting aside the issue of age and these tiring tasks, The old king wouldn''t leave it to him at all.


    Lying on the beach under the scorching sun can almost be regarded as synonymous with enjoyment. Every day life is so boring and boring, but due to his young age, he does not need to do many things.


    The only thing I can do now is to enjoy the delicious food and drinks every day, and there is no need to worry about the future anyway.


    "Master Genji, there seems to be someone in the sea?"


    While Chang Nuo was still immersed in thinking about life, the maid next to him shouted slightly loudly to the sea ahead.


    Chang Nuo, who was living a boring life under this shout, sat up in an instant, and then looked curiously towards the sea.


    As far as the eye can see, there is indeed a person floating there vaguely on the seashore. There is a floating board under him, slowly floating in this direction.


    After watching for a while, Chang Nuo turned his head and looked at the few burly men behind him. Those few people were still standing there withpletely unmoved expressions.


    Chang Nuo was speechless, looking at them helplessly shouting, "Can''t you move? Go and save people quickly?"


    After hearing the order, several people quickly took off their clothes, and then rushed into the sea.


    After a while, while waiting for someone to rescue them, these sturdy men put on their clothes as quickly as possible. They continued to stand behind Chang Nuo, and they never said a word from beginning to end.


    Chang Nuo stepped forward and took a look at the man he rescued from the sea. Although he looked like he was dying, looking at the rising and falling chest, it was certain that the man was not dead yet.


    In this out-of-the-way ce, there was such a guy floating on the sea. Chang Nuo was still very curious, and then he told the maid, "Bring some food over here!"


    "Sir, this man seems to be a pirate! Should we not rescue him?"


    The maid noticed the other person''s appearance, especially the clothes on her body, and quickly said to Chang Nuo.


    "Pirate??"


    Chang Nuo was stunned for a moment. After staying in the country for such a long time, he heard the word "pirate" quite often. Although he felt it was very familiar, he didn''t pay too much attention to it.


    But now a living pirate floated out in front of them, which really made them look forward to it.


    The little guy didn''t care so much. He smiled and continued, "Hurry up and get your things. What are you doing with all the nonsense? There are so many people here, are we still afraid of him?"


    When the enchanting maid standing next to her heard this, she seemed to think it was really like this. Then she didn''t pay too much attention and came over with two fruits.


    The guy lying on the ground was nothing more than a lot weaker. Although he had been staying in the sea, this person did not drown, he just fainted slightly.


    Chang Nuo squatted next to the pirate, raised the corners of his mouth, and then patted his face with his hand. Although it was not very hard, it still made the other person slowly open his eyes.


    When the pirate opened his eyes and saw a child squatting next to him, he slowly closed his eyes again, and then weakly said, "Is there...is there...anything to eat!"


    Hearing this, Chang Nuo immediately smiled, and then put the two fruits that the maid had brought over to his mouth.


    This guy suddenly looked like a wild beast. He looked like he was dying just now, but when he saw the food, he sat up instantly, grabbed the apple and started to wolf it down.


    Others were squatting next to it, or standing nearby and watching quietly. The impact brought by this pirate did not show any image at all. I wonder how long he has been hungry?


    After a while, the man finally seemed to have some strength, but hey directly on the ground again with his eyes open, looking at the blue sky above, and said to Chang Nuo with a sinister smile on the corner of his mouth, "Thank you so much, little guy." You saved me, otherwise I might have died in the sea, so lucky! But how can I thank you?"


    "Then how do you want to thank me?"


    Chang Nuo also smiled and asked.


    "What an interesting little guy! In that case, how about you let me eat you?"


    The pirate lying on the ground suddenly turned his face, revealing a twisted face, staring at the child Chang Nuo and said such words directly.


    The smile on his face could no longer be called a smile, it almost turned into a look of fear.


    When he suddenly saw it, Chang Nuo was really shocked, but what followed was a sigh.


    Chang Nuo stood up and looked at the pirate who had already stood up and sat on the ground. After sighing, he said to the burly men behind him, "This guy is hopeless!"


    "Ahaha..., do you know who I am? I am a pirate..."


    The pirate recovered a little strength and stood up slowly, but he was still a little weak. However, Chang Nuo was a little curious. Where did this guy get the confidence to face so many people and still have the mood to say such a thing? ?


    But at this time, the maid standing behind him hurriedly stepped forward to hold him in her arms, and took a few steps back. The sturdy men also hurriedly stood in front of him, shouting at Nova. He shouted, "Genji-sama, you better hurry up and get to the back. Pirates don''t have any humanity at all."


    "You have the time to chat, can you go up and deal with the person first?" Chang Nuo said with a speechless expression.


    At this moment, he didn''t feel nervous at all. Not to mention that there were many people on his side. Of course, it was also because of this. The other party was only one person, and he looked so weak. Anyway, no one knew where he had the confidence to say it. In this case?


    After receiving the order, these sturdy men immediately began to rush forward, preparing to beat up the weak pirate, but the next scene surprised everyone.


    The pirate moved his hands, and his body began to emit blue light. The surrounding flowers, nts and trees seemed to have received the response and began to attack them directly.


    "Genji-sama, be careful, he is a devil fruit user..."


    One of the burly men shouted to Nova, his voice also showing tension.


    "Devil Fruit??"


    Chang Nuo now has 10,000 thoughts running through his heart. What is going on now? I have been here for a few years. Is it possible that this is a world in anime?


    Regarding Devil Fruit, the only thing he could think of was that this thing would only appear in the world among pirates, right?


    But the few burly men in front of them have obviously begun to fail each other now. Although that guy is very weak, he is a Devil Fruit user after all. It is really a bit impossible to kill the other person at this time. !


    The maid hugged Chang Nuo and ran towards the back quickly. However, although Chang Nuo, who was in the woman''s arms, enjoyed this feeling, she still said speechlessly, "Put me down, why are you running?"


    The maid thought she had heard wrong, and said "Ah" with a questioning look on her face, and then said nervously, "Master Genji, there is a pirate behind you, and he is the kind of person who ate the legendary Devil Fruit. We are now We need to go back quickly, otherwise..."


    "It''s okay. Put me down quickly. Although that guy is a Devil Fruit user, he is so weak at the core. It''s hard to say whether he can stand up?" Changnuo finally said a little angry.


    When I came to this world, everything was like a dream. Now I finally did something passionate, and the other party was still so weak, why did he run away?


    The maid felt that Chang Nuo was angry, so she stopped and put it down.


    In Nova''s eyes, the opponent is so weak now. If he doesn''t take advantage of this time to deal with it, after he recovers all his strengthter, no one in this group will be able to get out alive!


    Moreover, he didn''t want to know the side effects of the Devil Fruit very well. Looking at the unfamiliar look on the other person''s face, it was obvious that he had just eaten it not long ago, and he couldn''t even use it well.


    There were just a few ordinary burly men, but he had already exhausted the boss''s efforts. He hadn''t killed any of them yet, but had only trapped one, and there were two or three others who were dealing with him.


    Seeing this situation, Chang Nuo shouted directly, "What are you all still doing? That guy is afraid of sea water. Get him into the sea quickly, otherwise you will all die in a while!"


    After hearing this, the remaining three sturdy men rushed forward instantly. Although they knew that they could not defeat the opponent, it was true that as Chang Nuo said, the opponent was very weak now. If they rushed up together, there would be some opportunities to do it. Kill each other.


    Facing the enemies that rushed up at once, the pirate still had a smile on his face. It was obvious that he didn''t take them seriously. However, when one of them hugged this guy, he was just about to continue using his demonic abilities. At the same time, the other two had already begun to push him towards the seaside.


    He had justnded on the beach, and the sea was right next to him, so anything that took a little effort could be done directly.


    Three people surrounded a weak Devil Fruit user. For ordinary people to witness such a thing, it was simply a miracle.


    But what a coincidence, this kind of thing did seed!


    Although the pirates immediately controlled the wood and tied up the three of them, the key was that at this time, he was too weak to stand still and stepped directly into the sea water. In an instant, he fell down as if exhausted. Going down, the wood that originally bound everyone disappeared in an instant.

 Chapter 2 Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 2 Devil Fruit</h4>


    Now the pirate was lying weakly on the edge of the sea, and all the things that restrained those people had disappeared. It was only at this moment that these people believed that what Chang Nuo said was indeed true!


    The pirate lying in the sea could only roll his eyes angrily at this moment, even though he no longer had the strength to speak.


    Chang Nuo walked over slowly. Worried that he would still be able to survive after the sea water receded, he directly ordered the few big men who had just fallen down, "Kick him into the sea water again. This bastard, I will kill him." He saved me, but he didn''t expect to want to eat me? I''m really not a thing..."


    These bodyguards also lifted the guy''s arms and legs without hesitation, and then threw them into the deep water.


    Now that there was nothing to worry about, Chang Nuo also started to walk into the water, with a sinister smile on his lips. He looked at the people standing behind him and said, "Go and get my fruit te, and give me another one." Come here with the knife!��


    "Genji-sama, just let me do this kind of thingter. There is no need to dirty your hands!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, the bodyguard behind him hurriedly said.


    "What nonsense are you talking about? Just do it!" Chang Nuo said.


    The others did not dare to say anything at this moment and could only do as they were told.


    After everything was done, Chang Nuo had a sinister smile on his face and slowly approached the pirate lying in the water. He kept mumbling, "I never expected toe to the pirate world." , Howe I haven��t discovered this in the past few years since I came here? I don��t know if it will be useful to give me such a good thing at this crucial moment?��


    But after all, Chang Nuo showed no mercy. If he couldn''t kill this guy on the shore, the key was to do it in the sea.


    Everyone else was watching quietly, fearing that something unexpected would happen, but Nova stepped forward and stabbed the knife directly into the opponent''s chest without mercy. At this time, the pirate couldn''t make any reaction anyway. It''s just like a cooked duck in the sea, and you can''t just let others do it!


    When the knife was stabbed, even the maid behind him screamed in surprise, as if she had never experienced such things!


    But at this moment, Chang Nuo was not in the mood to care about other things. After the knife prated the pirate''s chest, he quietly observed the movement of the fruit te. As the pirate began to vomit blood from the corner of his mouth, after a while, It had already begun to sink towards the water.


    Although he was very unsure in his heart, Chang Nuo directly picked up the fruit te. There were several kinds of fruits on it, such as bananas, apples, etc., and he stared directly at it.


    Then, the results he wanted did begin to appear.


    Among the fruits in the fruit te, one of the apples began to slowly change, as if it had been weathered. The red apple slowly turned into a withered state, and then formed a circle shape attached to it. above.


    And the color and texture are the same as that of rotten wood.


    "Genji-sama, what''s wrong with this apple?"


    A bodyguard behind him immediately shouted.


    They have never seen any devil fruits. Even in the Toru Kingdom, few people have seen these things, but they didn''t expect that they would appear in front of Changnuo like this.


    Changnuo did not reply to the other party, but stared at the apple that had transformed into a devil fruit in front of him in a daze, with a look of anticipation welling up in his heart.


    But before he could prepare to be surprised, a voice suddenly came out in his mind: "Ding, congrattions to the host for turning on the system, would you like to turn it on?"


    As soon as these words came out, Chang Nuo froze on the spot, and the little stars in his eyes could already be seen from the outside.


    The group of people behind him are still curious, what happened to him as an adult?


    It was just a matter of killing one person, and the key point was that he showed such a joyful expression. It was really puzzling for them?


    But how could this group of people understand Chang Nuo''s excitement at this moment?


    After the words in his mind came out, Chang Nuo felt that the Devil Fruit in his hand seemed to have lost its fragrance. He quickly retreated to the coast. He had forgotten all about killing the pirates just now.


    The feeling of killing someone for the first time made him a little nervous, but in the end, the Devil Fruit that came out first had dispelled this worry, and now the sudden sound made himpletely ignore what just happened. matter?


    "Hurry back to the pce, we don''t want to stay here anymore!"


    Chang Nuo ordered loudly to the group of people.


    He can''t wait to open the door to the new world in the future, but because he is worried that some kind of mutation will suddenly appear in his body, he has to choose to go back quickly.


    It''s only a few miles away from the pce, so you can get there quickly by walking.


    The group of people following him all thought that Chang Nuo was excited because he was holding the mutated apple in his hand, so the others didn''t say anything and hurriedly followed behind him and started running towards the pce.


    But before the halfway mark, Chang Nuo was already so tired that he could only let the bodyguards start carrying him and continue running back.


    But in the pce at this time, the people inside were also having headaches. There were many men wearing white robes with the word "justice" standing in the pce. They didn''t know what they were talking to the old king.


    Chang Nuo had juste back, and he already guessed who the other party was just by looking at them. After all, since he already knew where in the world he wasing to, he guessed who they were. Naturally, it is not difficult to guess, which force does the person who carries the word justice on his body belong to?


    But now he couldn''t care about these things. As soon as he arrived at the pce, he couldn''t wait to rush towards his room, but how could the figure that just appeared disappear so quickly?


    "Chang Nuo, why are you running so fast?"


    When the old king saw his soning, he didn''t even care about the navy and ran towards his son with a smile.


    But at this time, Chang Nuo still held the devil fruit in his hand. As the old king shouted, everyone in the navy began to turn their attention to the child.


    But with just one nce, these people already recognized what he was holding.


    "Devil Fruit??"


    A voice in the navy shouted in surprise, and other people''s eyes began to slowly turn from the child''s face to what he was holding in his hand. Even when the old king just ran to Nova, Somewhat surprised and some curious.


    The old king obviously knew this thing, but in just a moment, the joy of seeing his son disappeared instantly, and all that was left was a frown.


    He is not doing this to his son, but because there is a navy here. It is difficult for his country to get such a good thing, but he turned his face and the other party is now staring at him like a wolf, so he definitely cannot keep it.


    "Tell me, little one, where did you get this?"


    The speaker was a man who looked to be in his twenties. He looked quite strong physically, and the expression on his face could make people shudder.


    "Chang Nuo, this is Rear Admiral Sakaski."


    The old king said calmly, but he was also a little regretful, but he still introduced it without any concern.


    "It turns out to be Mr. Sakaski. You were really rude just now. I picked this thing up at the beach. It looks a bit ugly, so I won''t let Mr. Major Generalugh at it."


    Chang Nuo lowered his posture, bowed respectfully, and spoke in a respectful tone.


    But in his heart he was thinking, "Mad, I didn''t expect to meet Akainu here. This thing is really a dog!"


    The other party frowned directly, obviously not wanting this matter to end like this, but when he was about to continue asking, another person behind him directly interrupted him.


    This man was also wearing a robe of justice, but he looked a little dark. Looking at this man''s aura, he was obviously much more powerful than that Sakaski.


    He stepped forward, patted Sakaski on the shoulder, and then said with a serious face, "Do business first."


    As soon as he finished speaking, he turned to look at Chang Nuo, with a slight smile on his face, and said in a rough voice, "I didn''t expect you to have such good luck, so take good control of what you have in your hands and use it to protect you in the future." national."


    "Well, don''t worry!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    The other party said such a sentence, which at least proved that this newly obtained thing would not be snatched away by others. The old king also showed a happy smile at this moment.


    "Father, if you continue to talk about business, I will go in first!"


    Chang Nuo looked at the old king and spoke directly in a childish voice.


    How dare the old king let his son stay here for a moment now? He hurriedly said, "Yes, yes, hurry in."


    Even Chang Nuo, who had already walked out of the crowd, could still feel that at least two or three eyes were still staring at him from behind him.


    This feeling of being out of control is really ufortable!


    It wasn''t until he was far away that Chang Nuo felt that no one was paying attention to him anymore, and he felt a little relieved.


    However, none of the people in the hall were easy to deal with. Sakaski even ran towards the general who blocked him just now and said, "General Zefa, what the little guy was holding just now looks like it should be... It��s a natural devil fruit, why...?��


    "Can''t you figure out what''s going on now?" Zefa said with a serious face.


    Hearing this, Sakaski didn''t say anything else. He naturally knew what was the most important thing here now, and as a major general, even though he had ideas about something, he couldn''t say anything in the end.


    However, the old king heard the conversation between the two people very clearly. After all, in the age of the navy, even if they said such words in their own country, the old king would not dare to say anything!


    The whole person could only stand there helplessly. Zefa stepped forward and said, "King Genji, regarding the navy''s operation, we are just informing you in advance. I hope you can understand."


    "Well..., it''s okay, as long as it doesn''t affect our Kingdom of Tru and other people living a normal life, I hope you won''t hurt other people this time!"


    The old king said with a smile on his face, this is a weak country, even as a king, there is nothing he can do.


    "King Genji, our navy has always been fair and strict in doing things. We will never kill innocent people indiscriminately. You can rest assured about this. However, the incident caused this time is rtively big, so I hope you can keep it strictly confidential and not leak it. Any hint of anything!" Sakaski said.


    "Don''t worry, we are well aware of this kind of thing, and we will never leak anything about it. You can just take action."


    Even in the face of such usations from these people, the old king still did not dare to say anything disobeying, and he had to nod and bow from time to time.


    Even if the country''s strength were half as strong, he would not be able to do this.


    Zefa had always had a cold face. After receiving the old king''s answer, he turned around and left. Others also nced at the old king, then turned around and walked out of the hall.


    After everyone left, the old king sat on his throne, but there was no expression on his face and he could only sigh helplessly.


    Seeing the departing figures of the navy, he knew that things might not end so easily this time, but what could be done?


    However, Changnuo, who returned to the room, was now eager to learn about other things. Even the Devil Fruit he had brought back was ced beside the bed.


    Sitting on the bed, Chang Nuo took a deep breath, closed his eyes, and recalled everything that had just happened in his mind, and it disappeared in an instant.


    "System, system..."


    Chang Nuo started shouting in his mind, as if he was afraid that the other party would run away.


    If you stood next to him at this moment, you could almost hear Chang Nuo''s heartbeat. He sat nervously and uneasily, quietly waiting for the reply from the voice in his mind.


    After a while, a voice finally began to appear in his mind, saying, "Does the host want to open the system?"


    Although the mechanical sound does not sound very beautiful, to Chang Nuo, this sound is simply like the sound of nature.


    Without the slightest hesitation, Chang Nuo hurriedly said, "Open it..."


    After Chang Nuo''s voice fell, a mechanical voice appeared again, "The system is opening, please wait..."


    What followed was that a blue vortex seemed to appear in front of Chang Nuo''s eyes, and the overall look was deep and mysterious.


    The vortex was spinning constantly, as if something was about toe out. In less than a while, Chang Nuo seemed to appear in another world, but in this space, everything around him was suspended there, as if Provide him with options directly.


    As the system was perfected, the mechanical voice came again, "Answer, the system has beenpleted. The world where the host is located is the Pirate World, and this system is the Wanjie Mall, which can provide equivalent items in the Pirate World for exchange."

 Chapter 3 System

    <h4>Chapter 3 System</h4>


    Now Chang Nuo is almost dumbfounded. All the scenes in front of him are like science fiction, which is really too exciting.


    Everything seems to be illusory, but everything feels so real. After all, suddenlying from the original world to this world, everything already feels too illusory, but what appears now makes him even more confused about where reality is. ?


    But despite this, Chang Nuo was still quite nervous and excited, and asked with a slightly trembling voice, "What does the Wanjie System do?"


    "Answer, the host can purchase Wanjie products ording to its own situation, or exchange them with equivalent items. The mall includes items, abilities, skills, as well as self-protection and self-attack."


    Listening to this mechanical sound, Chang Nuo was deeply immersed in it,pletely unable to extricate himself.


    The most important thing is that this thing actually fell on me. I am very happy just thinking about it. The important thing is that as a prince of a kingdom, if I use money to buy things, this thing is probably very simple.


    After staying in the system''s space for a while, the excitement began to slowly dissipate. At the end, Chang Nuo asked curiously, "System, is there any initial reward, or a novice gift pack or something like that?"


    "Answer, all items in the system mall need to be purchased with money. Do you want to use one Bailey to open the novice gift pack?"


    "One Bailey?" Chang Nuo was stunned for a moment because when he was five or six years old, he had almost never encountered anything that needed to be purchased. Now he didn''t know how to calcte the expenses in this square world, but suddenly Suddenly, he remembered that in the world of One Piece, all expenses were settled using Bailey.


    Thinking about it, I felt a little excited and immediately said, "Start..."


    Although he doesn''t have a Bailey, the key point is that there are too many valuable things in this room, and the mall does not have to use Bailey to exchange. Items of equal value can also be exchanged, which is equivalent to all items. As long as it is exchanged directly for In the mall, the expenses he incurred will be directly disyed.


    Before Changnuo exited the space, he saw the bnce disyed on the space, with the remaining Bailey being 353.4 million.


    Apart from being surprised, Chang Nuo was also quite curious. What on earth was there around him that was worth so much?


    But as soon as he thought about it, he immediately realized one thing, that was the devil fruit next to him!


    But it''s toote now. The system will identify the items closest to him that belong to him and exchange them for use.


    Until now, he still didn''t know what happened to his devil fruit? Which series does it belong to? But one thing that can be confirmed is that the Devil Fruit must be rted to the nt system, or nts.


    I was still thinking about such a good thing. Even if I don''t use it, it would be nice to give it to others.


    But now everything is toote, but Changnuo is not discouraged anymore. Now he looks expectant. He wants to see what is in the novice gift bag?


    As the sound of Bailey being consumed sounded, a golden door suddenly appeared in front of him. When the door slowly opened, the system voice sounded again, "Congrattions to the host for getting an initial gift package. Do you want to open it?" "


    When he saw this thing, it was glowing with golden light. No matter how you looked at it, it looked like a valuable item. Chang Nuo quickly said, "Open it..."


    "Congrattions to the host for receiving a One Piece World Package, which includes the top three colors of Haki and the Sixth Navy training method."


    The sound of the system sounded, but at this moment, Changnuo was not very happy or surprised. The most important thing was that among the words prompted by the system, there was a huge bracket at the end, which contained another item, that is Keep running 10km, do 500 push-ups, and 1,000 frog jumps every day for ten years.


    Although these things are not tooplicated, the key point is that people now have requirements that they need to maintain it every day. The key point is that for him as a child, running 10km a day can kill him, let alone what will happen next. Push-ups and frog jumps.


    Is this a gift package for newbies, or torture for newbies? This thing is really a question for discussion.


    Chang Nuo was dumbfounded after seeing these things. Thinking about his life in the next ten years, he would be in dire straits.


    But at the same time, he also understands that the people in this world are all strong perverts. If he doesn''t work hard, he may not know what he will be like in the future.


    He is pretty good now. At least the old king is still in good health. He doesn''t have to worry about anything in recent years. But if in a few years, the old king bes ill, then this country will be in his hands. How should Iplete this handover task?


    After thinking of this, Nova smiled. Although the novice gift package given by the system was a bit abnormal, it was not uneptable.


    After exiting the system space, Changnuo smiled bitterly and looked at the empty bed next to him. The Devil Fruit had long since disappeared. Although he had been prepared for it, he suddenly felt a little disappointed.


    But at this moment, the old king suddenly pushed open the door and walked to Chang Nuo. He asked with great concern, "Chang Nuo, where did the devil fruit go?"


    Because I still don��t know what the function of that thing is, and what type it belongs to? The old king was afraid that his son would be in trouble if he ate another useless Devil Fruit.


    Chang Nuo smiled, and then said, "Don''t worry, Dad, your son didn''t eat that thing. It''s just that it was left here with us. My son felt that it should be a disaster, so we threw it away."


    "Throw it away, throw it away. This thing is indeed a scourge. For a country like ours, we cannot afford the conflicts caused by this thing."


    The old king said with lingering fear, not feeling at all that his son was deceiving him.


    The Toru Kingdom belongs to the South China Sea region in the world of One Piece. It can almost be said to be the weakest among the four seas. Changnuo is quite clear about this in his heart.


    Ever since I knew that I was in the world of pirates, at least one thing is certain, that is, the weakest among the four seas is the South China Sea, but the strongest existence should be the East China Sea!


    But as the weakest South China Sea, it has advantages and disadvantages. The advantage is that when you stay in this South China Sea, you rarely encounter so-called pirates. But the disadvantage is also obvious, that is, every time a piratees, almost They can plunder a country.


    "Dad, what were those people from the Navy doing here just now?"


    Chang Nuo asked curiously.


    The old king thought for a moment, then smiled and said, "It seems that it is unclear where exactly the Pirate King''s wife is in our country, and their navy wants to arrest her, so I came here to inform her."


    "One Piece''s wife?"


    Chang Nuo couldn''t help but start shouting. When he learned about pirates before, he almost always used the Age of Discovery as the time standard, but he had never learned about this time point, how many years, etc. .


    He didn''t expect that when he learned about the pirate world, it would already be at this time?


    But this is also good. At least it proves that the protagonist of the future pirate world has not been born yet, so in the future, there will be much more space for him to y and disy.


    But he was so excited that Chang Nuo didn''t want to meddle in these nosy things. What he wanted to do now was to seize the time to enrich his ten years. Thinking about it made him go crazy.


    "Dad, starting from tomorrow, my son must start exercising. My son must be a strong man. At least from now on, we cannot be bullied by others, and we cannot let anyonee to our country to act unscrupulously." Chang Nuo said seriously.


    When the old king heard his son say this, he was really happy. The white hair on his head seemed to have turned ck at this moment. He grinned and patted Chang Nuo on the shoulder. He said, "Good son, if you have an idea, as long as you want to do it, then do it well. Now that I am old and strong, I will not let you take over this mess in the short term."


    "Looking at what you said, I can live for at least another 20 years!" Chang Nuo said with the same smile.


    Let��s not talk about what kind of situation this dad is in, but for Chang Nuo, aftering to this world, his dad is very considerate of his situation.


    He had never seen his mother since he was born, and Chang Nuo saw everything the old man did.


    In fact, there are not many people in the huge pce. The Kingdom of Tru is not only very poor in terms of military strength, but also very poor in terms of economy. Almost all of them are in a state of not having enough to eat and starving to death.


    The country has always been like this, and has never had any good development. After all, no country in this world has it better. But being in the South China Sea, there is not only no good way out in terms of economy and trade, but also in other aspects.


    Before reaching this position, Chang Nuo didn''t want to worry too much. All he could do now was wait, and he could only talk about the specific situation in detail in the future.


    Starting from the second day, Changnuo had gotten up early to start preparing. He was now fully prepared to face the next challenge.


    Fortunately, the Tru Kingdom is rtively safe andplete, and there is no need to worry about anything happening. But even so, when Nova was running outside, the old king sent a few people to follow him, for fear that something would happen to him in the middle.


    His routine every day was almost the same. He got up early in the morning and ran a 10kmp around the forest. For this child, it almost took a long time to run.


    Under such intense exercise, especially in the past few days, after finishing the exercise on the first day, he didn''t want to get up at all the next day, and even felt like giving up, but in the end he persisted.


    After a month of this, the usualziness that I felt every day seems to have eased a lot. I can at least run 10km a day and end it in one breath.


    Day after day, year after year, Chang Nuo repeats the same actions every day. Even the people in the pce don''t understand why they choose to abuse them in this way even though they can live a very leisurely life. Own.


    But his performance was also appreciated by many ministers. At least he could see a perseverance in him that refused to admit defeat and was not so weak. In terms of perseverance, Changnuo has won everyone''s praise. recognized.


    But this situation did notst for several years.


    In the seventh year, the old king''s health was getting worse day by day. After all, by his current age, the old king was already over eighty years old, and it was normal for his health to reach this level.


    After Changnuo finished exercising, he gradually began to get involved in these state affairs. At least in the Tru Kingdom, there was nothing worthy of special attention.


    After all, this is how this country has always been.


    They are poor, have no trade, no economy, and almost nothing, but because of this, no one cares about them.


    But everyone understands that if this continues to develop, what will the country look like? Now it has begun that the people are in dire straits, even worse than before.


    Five years ago, the structure of the entire world had changed. The Pirate King was executed in Rogge Town, but his words before his death shocked the entire world.


    Many pirates have also appeared one after another in the South China Sea. Even in the Kingdom of Tru, where pirates are not seen all year round, pirates appear one after another in the sea.


    This led to a serious decline in the economic strength of the entire kingdom.


    Fortunately, most pirates areposed of ordinary people. The strength of the kingdom''s only army can inhibit most pirates.


    But sometimes we encounter rtively powerful beings, and heavy casualties are inevitable.


    The Age of Discovery has now arrived, and many people''s dream is to be pirates. This has resulted in the entire Kingdom of Tru bing destitute.


    Chang Nuo had already discovered all this when he first came into contact with state affairs, but the current situation was still a bit difficult for the entire Tru Kingdom to achieve the prosperity of the entire nation, at least in the short term.


    But for Changnuo, who has modern thinking, it may not be very difficult to deal with all these matters, let alone that he also has a system.


    In the eighth year, Chang Nuo is now 14 years old, and it is also the seventh year of the Age of Discovery.


    Changnuo is now about 1.8 meters tall, with a well-proportioned and strong physique. Even though he has not participated in any affairs in the kingdom, his lofty status has still attracted the attention of most people in the entire kingdom.


    The old king could only lie in bed dying every day and ignored the outside world. Apart from exercising and dealing with the affairs of the country, Chang Nuo spent most of his time by the old king''s side.

 Chapter 4 The Kingdom of Tru

    <h4>Chapter 4 The Kingdom of Tru</h4>


    Times are changing rapidly, and even the Tru Kingdom now has to admit that it is too weak.


    There are a total of about 60 countries in the South China Sea, and the Kingdom of Tru can only be regarded as a very inconspicuous country among them.


    On this day, after Chang Nuo finished his run, he just arrived at the pce hall. At this time, there were already many people below waiting for his arrival.


    As soon as he sat on the throne, one of the old men below began to say, "Your Highness, the coastal areas of our country have been affected by pirates almost every month recently. Should wee up with a better n regarding this matter? "


    "The national funds are limited, and the distance between the Kingdom of Tru and the coastline is too long. With our current military strength, we simply cannot take care of any ce!"


    Chang Nuo also looked helpless, at least for now.


    The fourteen-year-old Chang Nuo gave them the impression that he was very mature and stable, and he considered all aspects of everything well. Even for old men like them, he was very convincing.


    Although listening to their reports, this kind of thing didn''t happen once or twice, it happened almost every time they discussed it. Changnuo has been thinking about these issues in the past year or two, and they should indeed be focused on solving them now.


    At the same time, looking at the depressed looks of the group of people below, Chang Nuo sighed helplessly, and then said with a slight smile, "I already have some ns regarding these things in our kingdom, and I may need your help in the future. , make a good overall statistical budget."


    "Your Highness, if you have anything to do, just ask. We will do our best to serve the country and the people. It''s time for us old bones to make our final contribution." A thin old man standing at the front said.


    "You are all heroes of our Kingdom of Tru. Next, my opinion is to nt all kinds of flowers and herbs in the entire Kingdom of Tru to create our own Kingdom of Tru. Characteristic attributes.��


    Chang Nuo stood up, walked a few steps down, and said to them.


    There were more than a dozen people standing in the entire hall. Everyone looked at each other, not understanding what Chang Nuo meant at all.


    Chang Nuo could also tell that he didn''t exin too much. Instead, he took out a bottle of unknown liquid from his pocket, but the exquisite decoration on the bottle made everyone look very interested.


    Chang Nuo just sprayed it, and in less than a while, the entire hall began to be filled with fragrance.


    Smelling this smell, everyone couldn''t help but sigh.


    "This is the scent of tulips. This thing is called perfume. It is actually avable in other countries, butpared to this, it is far, far behind. I have the method to make these. At present, in this country If you grow food, it may be snatched away by pirates soon. Instead of that, it is better to grow something that they cannot take away at all.


    This is also an idea I have conceived before. After everyone has nted vani, the remainingbor will be responsible for making the entire perfume. At that time, we will sell all these things overseas so that all countries can feel it. It is a specialty of the Tru Kingdom in the South China Sea. "


    Chang Nuo continued to say with a smile.


    No one has raised objections now. They are all old and mature. Regarding what Chang Nuo said, this group of people can naturally guess what the future benefits will be.


    "Your Highness, if the people actually do this, wouldn''t the source of food be lost?" said the old man standing in front.


    "Don''t worry, Mengxi. I have already considered this matter before. From now on, everyone will be responsible for nting flowers and nts, and they must send people over to tell them how to nt them. After the harvest season, let them nt them. All the stamens are picked and sent here. We can pay a certain fee ording to the specific situation, and they can be exchanged for food or other daily necessities.


    If you don''t want these things, you can also pay a certain amount of money. This is what we can do, let all perfumes be made directly in China, and provide those adult men with a job. Only in this way can this country slowly start to move towards Prosperity. "


    Chang Nuo said with emotion. Others had already begun to nod, and they still agreed with the way Chang Nuo said it.


    For this country''s special situation, this is indeed what should be done. Even if we do worse in the future, it will not be worse than the current situation.


    Now Novacks nothing but money. Once all these things are in ce, at least whatever she wants will be satisfied.


    Almost everyone else agreed with such remarks, and no one had any objections.


    This country is too poor and weak, not to mention that in such an era of great exploration, if you want to preserve a country''s economy and people''s lives, you naturally need a good leader to participate.


    Although Nova is only fourteen years old, for these old men, he has be a very suitable candidate for king.


    "Your Highness, I feel that I am getting old. From now on, I will leave it to you young people. It is time for us to follow the old king and retire. It is time to give up our position and leave it to these young people to fight."


    Just when the two parties had just reached an agreement on the future n for the entire country, one of the ministers stood up and said tactfully.


    In fact, as they said, the ministers in the entire hall are almost all sixty or seventy years old, the same age as the old king. They have worked hard all their lives in this Tru country.


    At their age, it should have been time to enjoy peace and happiness, but because this country is too weak, it has led to the current state.


    Chang Nuo is not unreasonable. They have no nostalgia for this position, but Chang Nuo cannot do this.


    "You have sacrificed everything for this country. It should have been a time for you to enjoy peace and happiness. However, this country is now like this. It may take at least a few years to fully develop. So in the next time, I still hope that If you can bear to wait for another two years, after a group of new people have been trained, I, Chang Nuo, promise that I will definitely let you live a long life."


    Chang Nuo walked in front of everyone, bowed respectfully again, and spoke in a sonorous, powerful and serious tone.


    "Your Highness is polite. We just feel that our ability and energy are insufficient, and we are afraid of worrying about His Highness''s ns. However, if His Highness needs us, we will definitely stick to our posts even if we die."


    Chang Nuo felt deeply after hearing this. After all, although these individuals did not make much difference in this country, they were still an indispensable group of people for this country.


    "That''s it for today! Everyone, go back first. As for the nning, I will arrange for other people to carry out it, and your help will be indispensable." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    In this pce under the dome, these old men don''t know what to say. After all, they are already quite old. They naturally know how far their abilities can reach. The other party has already said this, so they must be sure. They have their own practices to arrange.


    After ending themunication with those ministers, Chang Nuo immediately chose to return to the old king. After all, the old man was still his father no matter how much he said it, and some things that should be done still needed to be done.


    Now the old king''s face was full of vicissitudes of life, and the wrinkles on his face were almost tight together. However, when he saw Novaing over, he still held up his body, smiled, and shouted in a weak voice, "Come on Chang Nuo." Already..."


    "Dad, how are you feeling today?"


    Chang Nuo sat directly on the bedside and asked softly with a smile.


    "It''s good. At least there are no problems recently." The old king smiled, and then said with frustration, "Just take over the position of king tomorrow. From now on, the Kingdom of Tru will be handed over to you."


    "What are you talking about? After this period of time, the kingdom will still be waiting for you to preside over it. I am just helping."


    "I know my father''s situation very well. There is no need to say suchforting words. It is enough to live to this age. I just want to leave this huge country to you and it is still in such a dpidated state. Dad I feel guilty in my heart." The old king said with a smile with tears in his eyes.


    "Don''t worry, my son will definitely make the Tru Kingdom prosperous in the future, and it will never remain like this." Chang Nuo saidfortingly.


    "You have been different since you were a child. Dad believes in you. But from now on when pirates are rampant, dad will still..."


    Before he could finish his words, Chang Nuo picked up a crystal ball ced on the bedside of the old king and put it directly in his hand. Then with just a little effort, the entire crystal ball turned into powder in an instant.


    Seeing this scene, the old king was not surprised. Originally, what he was most worried about was that his son might not be able to guarantee his own safety. Now that''s better.


    The old king smiled and continued happily, "I see. If you feel pressured in the future, just join the World Government."


    "Don''t worry about the future. These sons will do it. Rx yourself. Since you don''t want to worry, then take a good rest. In the future, your son will definitely let you see a stronger Tru Kingdom." Changnuo smiled at him. The old king saidfortingly.


    "That''s good, but dad can''t see it anymore, but our Toru Kingdom is not without its merits."


    As the old king spoke, his hands began to tremble, and he took out a piece of parchment from under the pillow, and he didn''t know what was drawn on it.


    "This is a treasure map that has been kept in the pce. Now it is handed over to you. You can follow the things on it to pursue it in the future." The old king said.


    Now this is indeed of no use to him, so leaving it to Chang Nuo is the best choice.


    The Kingdom of Toru is different from other countries. There are no so-called nobles in this kingdom. Almost all of them are poor. In recent years, due to the pirate incident, the people have been in dire straits.


    Chang Nuo took the treasure map and didn''t pay too much attention to the things on it. Instead, he stillforted and said, "I will just ept the things. Don''t worry about the rest. My son is still here for everything."


    Chang Nuo understood that the current old king''s body would definitely not be able to support it for long, but even so, it would not disappear at any time.


    The arrangements for the entire country had already started two years ago. His so-called perfume idea was indeed a very good choice. After all, even if food is grown in this country, it is very likely that it will not be able to survive in the end. of.


    But nting flowers and nts is different. For outsiders, this thing has almost no effect.


    There is almost no money in the pce now. How to maintain the operation of such arge country is the main consideration next.


    The two chatted for more than half an hour, and Chang Nuo walked out with a sad look on his face. His father''s body really couldn''tst much longer. ording to Chang Nuo''s estimation, it would onlyst two months at most.


    But as soon as he walked out of the door, a guard hurriedly ran over from outside.


    The moment they saw Chang Nuo, the guard hurriedly bowed and saluted, and said respectfully and panicked, "Your Highness, arge number of pirates have appeared in Nanniwa Port. Master Junhe asked us to inform you as soon as possible. I hope you can Get an idea!��


    Faced with this sudden incident, Nova looked calm. Seeing the nervous look of the guard who came over, Chang Nuo directly said, "How many troops are there now?"


    "Your Highness, there are currently about 500 people in Nanniwa Port, but there are a lot of pirates, about 1,000."


    "Let''s go, I''ll go over and take a look too."


    Changnuo continued to say calmly, Nanniwa Port is not very far from the pce, and the country itself is not particrly big. ording to Nova''s current speed, it can be reached in about half an hour.


    At Nanniwa Port, the two parties were almost confronting each other. Standing at the front was a young man who looked about 20 years old, with fierce and stern eyes.


    This person is Junhe, the most loyal person in the kingdom, and he is also considered particrly powerful in terms of strength.


    When Chang Nuo was ten years old, he had already begun to train a number of people, using the training of the Sixth Form of the Navy at that time, and informed them about the practice of domineering, but the number of people in the end was not veryrge.


    But even if Junhe is one of them, he is also the most powerful one.


    Facing the seven or eight pirate ships in front of him, Junhe didn''t feel nervous at all, but he also clenched his fists. Such a huge pirate group was really intimidating.


    The most important thing is that no one knows the purpose ofing to the Tru Kingdom.


    "What''s going on now?"


    Junhe was watching the arrival of the pirate ship, but suddenly a voice sounded behind him. When he turned his head and looked over, Changnuo had already appeared behind him.

 Chapter 5 Thousand Pirates

    <h4>Chapter 5 Thousand Pirates</h4>


    Hearing the sound, Junhe immediately turned his head.


    When he saw Chang Nuo''s face, he immediately said respectfully, "Your Highness, why are you here?"


    "Such a big thing has happened. What if I don''te?" Chang Nuo said speechlessly.


    Junhe took a deep breath,ughed directly, and then said with a serious face, "The other party has eight ships in total, and it seems that there should be about a thousand people. It is also a challenge for those of us."


    ��It��s good to keep them all this time because the country is short of construction personnel.��


    Chang Nuo said with an indifferent expression.


    Junhe and the others no longer knew what to say. What on earth was his Highness thinking?


    As the fleet got closer and closer, most of the five hundred people in the army were a little panicked. After all, they were almost all a group of people who had never experiencedbat.


    The one at the head of the fleet has a skull and crossbones logo hanging on it. As it gets closer, it looks more and more obvious.


    But before the army could react, the opponent''s artillery shells had already hit.


    "How are you doing with the skills I taught you before?" Changnuo looked at Junhe and asked.


    "I''ve almost learned it, but didn''t you say that I can''t use it in front of others?" Junhe asked with a puzzled look on his face.


    "It doesn''t matter if they are at your own doorstep. If you capture them all, we will really need them for the next construction of the country!" Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    The two people behaved extremely calmly without any panic, but the group of people behind them werepletely different now.


    Among them, there are dozens of people who behave exactly like the two of them. The most important group of people are those trained by Chang Nuo in the past few years.


    The cannons on the pirate ship kept roaring, but their uracy was a little too bad.


    The artillery fire roared for a long time, but in the end no one on his side was injured. This made the soldiers who were a little scared at first began to feel braver.


    "I''m watching here. You go and capture them all. If there is resistance, it doesn''t matter if you kill them. But try to keep these pirate ships intact. Our country is rtively poor, so these things are still worth a lot. money.


    Don''t kill people if you can. If you train these people well, they will be the mainstay of our country in the future. Chang Nuo said directly to Jun He next to him with a sinister smile on his face.


    Junhe alsoughed, and then replied forcefully, "Yes..."


    After he finished speaking, he looked directly at the group of soldiers standing behind him and shouted loudly, "After training for so long, it''s time to show off our own skills. Everyone, follow me..."


    After Junhe finished speaking, he was the first to rush forward, followed by dozens of people, none of whom were timid.


    Under everyone''s gaze, as soon as they reached the edge of the coast, they all jumped into the air and ran toward the pirate ship through the air.


    At this scene, not to mention the pirates on the opposite side, even the remaining hundreds of soldiers behind them were all stunned.


    These people were those who were specially selected from the army before Chang Nuo and were rtively young and physically strong.


    For these soldiers, such a scene is simply a fantasy. They have never seen such a situation. The group of pirates is actually the same. When they see a group of people flying in the sky, these individuals Most of the guys were scared to death.


    "Fire the guns, don''t let them get close to the ship..."


    The group of pirates could no longer hold back, but one of them still started to shout loudly andmand.


    But the oue of the matter has been determined, and this is not something that can be solved by just the number of people.


    There were arge number of pirates, and cannonballs were flying all over the sky, but in the end, almost none of them were encountered.


    Junhe and a group of peoplended directly on these pirate ships. One by one, it was almost as if they were in an uninhabitednd. They were all invincible and no one could stop them.


    Even their so-called pirate captain looked pretty much the same in the end.


    But just when everyone thought it was going to end, suddenly there was a person on the boat jumping directly to a height of 100 meters, and the speed was much faster than they could use the Navy Six-style shave.


    "Devil Fruit??" Chang Nuo stood on the periphery and watched. This was obviously not normal. You could even tell at a nce that it was the effect of the Devil Fruit.


    But he is just one person, and for so many people, it does not require much effort.


    The key is that this guy identally started charging towards Changnuo.


    "Do you know who I am? I am a jumping person with the jumping fruit. Uncle Defa Mo is also..."


    This guy yelled while jumping. He was wearing a robe and looked like a second-rate guy. Moreover, this guy didn''t seem to realize that he was in the same situation at all.


    When theynded on the sand, the pirate captain keptughing and taunting them.


    But the moment hended, a foot stretched out from nowhere and kicked him directly in the face. Before he could stand still, he had already flown hundreds of meters away.


    This time, the soldiers who stayed behind and watched were all stunned. They were even more shocked than when Jun and the others flew into the sky just now.


    Chang Nuo moved hundreds of meters in an instant, and with just one kick, he had already knocked the opponent''s captain unconscious, which was really surprising.


    "I thought he was such a powerful person? I didn''t expect him to be so weak!"


    Chang Nuo was speechless. There really was no one he could use to practice with him. Even after eating the Devil Fruit, he was still weak.


    However, such a rare Devil Fruit has actually been encountered twice in my own country in the South China Sea. This group of pirates has actually obtained such a rare thing.


    In less than 30 minutes, the opponent''s pirate group of thousands of people have been beaten to pieces. If it weren''t for Chang Nuo''s order to preserve the pirate ship, it would have been about ten minutes. It has ended.


    Jun He used Moon Step to fly back from the sky. When he stood in front of Chang Nuo, he said with a smile on his face, "Your Highness, the matter has been resolved."


    "Very good, let them check the supplies on the pirate ship. As for these people, take them back and take a good look at them. They will be used next." Changnuo said calmly.


    There is no surprise at all for this result, and I even think it should be natural. After all, I have put so much effort into cultivating these individuals. If in the end I can''t even deal with a group of pirates, it would be a bit unreasonable.


    "Your Highness, there are a lot of good things on board. Would you like to take a look at them?" Junhe said.


    "There''s nothing to see. Just sort out all the valuable things and send them to the pce. As for the remaining things, especially this ship, take off the pirate g on it and use it for civilian use from now on." Changnuo said.


    "Okay, Your Highness."


    "By the way, control that guy well, Devil Fruit user, there will be some use for him next." Changnuo said with a smile.


    The main reason is that he already understands the nature of the devil fruit on the other party. It is almost a scum and has no effect at all.


    In less than an hour since I came here, everything has been finished, which is really beyond everyone''s imagination.


    Chang Nuo himself couldn''t help but sigh. He didn''t feel like fighting at all.


    After Chang Nuo left, the whole crowd started to be lively, especially the soldiers who had done nothing. Everyone was discussing the changes just now.


    Junhe himself was also a little surprised. He had already guessed that Changnuo''s strength should be quite high, but no one saw how the other party acted just now, and it ended up like this.


    A Devil Fruit user cannot even take a kick, he is too weak.


    "Go and serve that guy well. Don''t let him die. ording to His Highness''s instructions, these people will still be of great use in the future." Junhe shouted directly to the soldiers.


    "yes����"


    Everyone''s uniform voices were sonorous and powerful.


    After seeing the power of these people, their inner sense of honor also rose collectively.


    "Let go, uncle. Do you know who I am? I am a devil fruit user. Jumping..."


    "Bang..."


    Before the tied pirate captain could finish his words, Shunhe kicked him directly in the face. Still thinking carefully about the state of Changnuo''s kick just now, he still shook his head helplessly.


    "You bastard are like this now, how dare you talk about being a devil fruit user?"


    Junhe whispered with a speechless expression.


    "Sir Junhe, everyone and everything has been cleared. A total of 951 pirates, eight pirate ships, a shipload of food, and arge amount of gold, silver and jewelry were captured."


    While Junhe was still standing there thinking, a soldier ran over and started reporting.


    "All the gold, silver and jewelry will be sent to the pce. As for these pirate ships, they will be remodeled and the pirate gs on them will be taken off. They will be used as cargo ships for our country from now on."


    Jun He said calmly, he also began to imitate Chang Nuo''s more arrogant look.


    There were 500 people guarding nearly 1,000 people at the scene, which looked quite funny and funny.


    But at this time, no one among the pirates had any unusual thoughts.


    After all, his own captain was already captured in front of him, so what did he have to struggle for?


    The main reason was due to the other party''s strength. The appearance of those dozens of people really made them a little scared.


    Not long after we went to sea, we had already met such a group of people. They were really a bit of a loser.


    The surrounding people all gathered around one by one, watching the scene in front of them with interest. After all, such things are rarely seen in the Tru Kingdom.


    All themon people''s fear of pirates seemed to have disappeared at this moment.


    Junhe specially led these pirates to walk very slowly, just to let the people of his country see that today''s pirates are just like this, and that their country has the ability to protect the safety of its people.


    Changnuo intends to start cultivating a group of young people. After all, after the future of this country is handed over to itself, some things and thinking still need to start to change as soon as possible.


    Now for the surrounding countries, their Kingdom of Tru can be considered to have some simple self-protection capabilities, but if you want more, it is probably still early!


    Just one monthter, a rtively big thing happened in the Kingdom of Tru, that is, the old king died. No one was more hurt by this incident, even Chang Nuo had this idea.


    The old king is now 85 years old, which is a normal death of old age, and he was extremely peaceful before leaving.


    As his only son, Changnuo naturally seeded him as king.


    "Lord Genji, you will need to take over the position of king tomorrow. It would be better for you to rest early tonight!"


    In the middle of the night, Chang Nuo stood alone outside the main hall, looking up at the starry sky above his head. What was he thinking in his mind?


    But at this moment, a maid behind him began to remind him.


    Chang Nuo nced at the other party, but did not say anything. Instead, he continued to look up at the stars. To outsiders, he might be missing his father, but only he himself could understand the real situation.


    The news of the old king''s death could not reach all the people on the fifth day, but what made them clear was that a new king was about to appear in the Kingdom of Tru.


    Every citizen is looking forward to Chang Nuo''s next performance, whether he can lead his kingdom to be prosperous and powerful.


    Bearing all the pressure, Chang Nuo did not go to sleep in the middle of the night, but stood here looking up at the stars.


    After staying for a long time, he seemed to already know his mission. He did not choose to escape. He just smiled slightly and then started walking towards the ce where he lived.


    From now on, no one from above will protect him, and all creation can only be carried out by himself.


    Early the next morning.


    The entire pce is almost at its busiest. Whether it is the group of old ministers or the fledgling talents, they are all waiting for someone.


    Chang Nuo appeared at the end, wearing apletely different king''s attire from the past, with a golden crown on his head. At the age of fourteen or fifteen, he was still a little immature, but overall he looked very imposing.


    When he walked into the main hall, everyone began to salute respectfully, which could be regarded as congrattions to him as the new king for ascending to the throne.


    Chang Nuo stood under the throne and looked at the chair above quietly. He had done this before. When he was acting as an agent for the country before, he almost sat on it without any rules, but this time he sat on it. But it''spletely different.


    The people below remainedpletely silent, no one opened their mouths to speak, and they waited quietly for what was toe next.

 Chapter 6 Demon Sword Muramasa

    <h4>Chapter 6 Demon Sword Muramasa</h4>


    "call����"


    Chang Nuo exhaled suddenly, and then began to walk up with long strides.


    The moment he sat down, everyone below bowed to the end and shouted together, "See Your Majesty..."


    Chang Nuo was still a little ufortable with it, but at this moment, the system that had been silent made a sound at this moment.


    "Ding, congrattions to the host for ascending to the throne. To express congrattions, the system has specially sent a gift..."


    Chang Nuo was still in a state of confusion just now, but now he has begun to be shocked. He did not expect that he would be the king, and the system could actually give him items. This thing is really surprising.


    Then he came back to his senses, looked at the ministers below, and said with a smile on his face, "You are all wee, just as before, this kingdom is not my own, but belongs to everyone''s joint efforts. I You are just a leader, but you are the ones who really need the actual operation. Furthermore, this country will still need a lot of help from you in the future."


    Chang Nuo finished speaking respectfully, then stood up and saluted everyone.


    The ministers below were all a little surprised, but when Chang Nuo saluted, everyone bowed to the end again.


    It can be said that this time ispletely different from before. The other party is already the king and the leader of the country. When people give gifts, they think highly of them.


    "Everyone, the road ahead will be difficult, and it may not be as smooth sailing as we imagined. I hope you can all go hand in hand. I hope the future Tru Kingdom will be what we imagined." Changnuo stood up and said again. .


    "Your Majesty, the Kingdom of Tru will definitely be what we want to see in the future, otherwise my subordinates will be the first to refuse to agree."


    Junhe said directly and carelessly.


    "You have the nerve to say this. From now on, you will be responsible for the security of the entire Tru Kingdom. The heavy responsibility on your shoulders will be very high. I hope you can live up to this position and the trust of the whole country." Changnuo said softly.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. As long as my subordinates are here, I will never let any piratesnd on thend that belongs to our Kingdom of Tru." Junhe changed his yful smile just now and said with a serious face.


    Chang Nuo smiled, which was regarded as acknowledging the other party''s attitude.


    There are indeed many things we will face in the future, so Changnuo ns to talk about the things directly today.


    "Everyone, I believe you still remember the n I said before. From now on, all the ces along the coast of the Kingdom of Tru will be nted with flowers and grass. Our country needs to create its own brand and ensure that domestic , more than half of the people can have their own jobs and ie.


    Now that the n has begun to be implemented, everyone must have begun to understand that the construction of a perfume factory ten kilometers away from the pce has begun half a month ago. This is only the first step. There is still a lot we have to do in the future, which may involve to textiles or other things.


    Therefore, in the future, everyone''s burden will not be light. For the sake of the country and the people, I hope that you can take your work more seriously in the days toe. "


    Chang Nuo said loudly, anyway, the construction of perfume factories is not a secret in the country. Most people are already aware of it, and most people are already looking forward to having a job of their own in it.


    It''s just that Chang Nuo''s true thoughts are not just that. After he has money, he will at least be able to buy various things from other worlds, and he won''t have to worry about anything else.


    What he has to do now is to quickly develop the country for the better. After all, this kind of thing is the top priority. As for his own affairs, Chang Nuoke has never considered that far.


    "Your Majesty the King, if your n is true, the food of the people will be a big problem. The food supply of other surrounding countries is not very sufficient. How should we solve this problem?" An old man below asked.


    Changnuo smiled, and then said directly, "Don''t worry about this, Mr. Dongwa. I have also considered these things. After all, once the people change their flowers and nts, food issues will definitely be the first choice they face. So you don��t have to worry about that at all. ��


    "So where should the people''s foode from?" Dongwa continued to ask.


    "Master Dongwa, Your Majesty the King, I have begun to purchaserge quantities of food from other countries, so you can rest assured about this." Junhe walked out and said.


    "I think with the current situation of our country, it is better to join the World Government directly. This will at least protect us from pirate attacks in the future!"


    While everyone was discussing, a middle-aged man who looked to be in his forties stood up and spoke to everyone.


    He has a mustache and looks very smart.


    Changnuo smiled and said, "You are indeed right. Joining the World Government can indeed deter pirates in some respects, but the key question is, have you ever thought that the group of people behind the World Government wille to us?" What do you want?"


    The man who was speaking just now was stunned for a moment. He didn''t think about it that much. He just felt that the deterrence of the world government would at least make his country much safer.


    Everyone else also thought about it, and Dong Wa said with a serious face, "The World Government will never engage in any loss-making business. Let''s not talk about whether there is anyone who can help us in the South China Sea. To be fair, their annual sky gold is enough for us. The standard of living in our country has dropped yet another level."


    "Dong Wa is right. Our country is already like this. If we add the offering of gold from the sky, then our national life will be almost unnecessary. By then, why do we still need pirates toe and plunder?" Chang Nuo Also said.


    The middle-aged man who just spoke suddenly became silent. He could only look at everyone nkly. From his heart, he did not have any bad thoughts, but he thought that this method might be more correct. .


    But he never thought about the issue of heavenly gold. It is true that the country has reached this level. If it continues to squeeze the people, then the country will almost exist in name only.


    "Okay, everyone should follow the previous process first. Now the entire country''s poption has been collected. The first batch must meet at least 20% of the country''s employment needs. We will find ways to improve the rest in the future. The current economic situation in the country." Chang Nuo stood up and said.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    No one has refused now. No matter what the situation is, they all want to see where Changnuo''s performance will be next.


    Soon after, almost everyone in the Tru Kingdom knew about the decision made by the current king.


    But for ordinary people, few people raised objections, and they were even very happy with such things.


    At least they no longer have to worry about their own livelihood. They can grow flowers and nts. One person can at least operate several acres ofnd. The food obtained from thesends is almost enough for the whole family.


    After all, the ratio of exchanges has been clearly stipted at the beginning, and the climate here is indeed very suitable for nting flowers and nts. At the same time, there is no definition of which varieties need to be nted!


    Suddenly, the entire Tru Kingdom was caught up in a new round of nting ns.


    Everyone is in full swing. Even people from other countries whoe here are curious about what is going on with the people in this country.


    But for Chang Nuo, the only advantage he has now is that as long as he has money, food can be directly supplied continuously. With the system, the so-called food can be almost as much as he wants.


    In the pce hall, after Chang Nuo exined the details to everyone, including how to make it, he quickly left the hall.


    Now he has begun to be quite curious, what exactly did the system give to him after he became the king?


    After returning to the room, Chang Nuo couldn''t bear it anymore and closed the door directly. Then he sat on the edge of the bed and began to feel everything in the spiritual world.


    But when he opened the system space, he was quite surprised!


    "System, where are the things you gave me?"


    Chang Nuo shouted directly in the spiritual world.


    "Answer, the items given away by the mall system this time are for a lottery. The host can click to enter the lottery. The internal settings include all the items of the Wanjie Mall. The details depend on the host''s personal luck."


    The mechanical sound of the system sounded, but Changnuo was a little speechless. Just give something away, why do you need to draw the lottery yourself in the end?


    So far, anything is better than nothing. Changnuo was not discouraged and shouted directly, "Open the lottery..."


    As soon as the voice fell, the style of the entire system space changed. The original sky blue space interface has now turned pink.


    And there is a button in front of him, as if he can get everything by pressing it.


    Without saying a word, Chang Nuo directly pressed the red button. As the space screen above his head kept rotating, when it finally stopped, even Chang Nuo couldn''t help but marvel.


    What is frozen in front of him is actually a long sword, a tachi to be precise, and the name of the tachi is already marked on it. Almost everyone who has watched the anime knows that this thing is the demon sword Muramasa.


    Chang Nuo naturally knew the function of this thing, and it was a pretty awesome existence, but he didn''t expect that the so-called Ten Thousand Realms Mall System could really transmit things from other worlds to his side.


    After he came to his senses, Demon Sword Muramasa stood upright beside Chang Nuo''s bedside.


    The faint red scabbard and the hilt of a special material emit a faint red light, making it obvious that this thing is not simple.


    The most important thing is that it exudes an evil aura, which makes people shudder even if they get close.


    Changnuo stood up and grabbed the demon sword Muramasa. Suddenly, a special aura spread directly throughout his body, as if he was establishing a connection with himself.


    Chang Nuo was quite surprised. He didn''t expect that the system could actually create such a good thing, and that it could directly allow him to establish the rtionship between master and servant.


    "Now that you have appeared in this world, you and I will be together from now on. In this world, I will definitely live up to your reputation!"


    Chang Nuo carefully looked at the demonic sword in front of him and continued to mutter something.


    But after all, the key is that I don''t know any swordsmanship at all. Even if I have such a famous sword, there is nothing I can do if I don''t know how to use it.


    After thinking of this, Changnuo suddenly remembered that there were more than 300 million in expenses in his system space. When should he wait for more at this time?


    Chang Nuo ced the demon sword beside the bed and entered the system space again. He calmly shouted directly to the system, "System, is there a more powerful way to use swordsmanship!"


    As soon as the voice fell, the words "Feitian Yujianliu" suddenly appeared on the blue screen in front of him.


    But looking at the amount of money required below, Chang Nuo, a poor guy, suddenly felt intimidated.


    But this time it was not impossible to buy it. The overall price of Feitian Yujian Style was actually 500 million. This thing was really beyond his imagination.


    I originally thought that the 300 million in my ount would allow me to squander it for a while, but I didn��t expect that just a book of swordsmanship would turn me into a pauper in an instant. The key is that the cost is not enough!


    With a slight sigh, Chang Nuo exited the system space directly, and then stared at Muramasa who was lying calmly on the bed.


    "Don''t worry, I will definitely let you see you again soon!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    Demon Sword Muramasa seemed to have felt Chang Nuo''s thoughts. It originally emitted a faint red light, and the light on its body began to slowly disappear until it finally turned into an ordinary sword.


    The overall length of the demon sword Muramasa is about one meter, and the length of the de is also about 70 centimeters. If he really gets the flying sword style, Changnuo can at least make a big improvement in his strength.


    But now he is a pauper and has no effect at all. But at this moment, he suddenly remembered what his father gave him before he died.


    That''s a treasure left in one of these parts of the country!


    Although I don''t know what is hidden in this treasure, at least what my father gave me before he died will definitely not be so empty.


    After thinking for a while, Chang Nuo felt that it would be better to take practical action. He opened his pillow and took out the roll of parchment. The specific location was clearly recorded on it, and even the specific mountain tops were clearly marked. .


    This time the treasure is obviously not in the sea, but on a high mountain, and it is in his own country.


    After reading it, Chang Nuo was a little curious, why was his cheap dad unwilling to open it until the end? What is hidden inside is really unclear.


    But ording to his understanding of the One Piece world, there are many ces where he can get enough money, but at least he needs to reach his strength before he can start looking again.


    Anyway, almost everything arranged by the country is now in an orderly manner, and you don''t need to worry too much. The only thing left is to sell the first batch of goods outside after theye out, but this process is estimated to be at least It takes a year.

 Chapter 7 Meeting Garp by chance

    <h4>Chapter 7 Meeting Garp by chance</h4>


    At present, the entire country''s pce treasury contains less than 200 million beli at most. For Changnuo, this amount of money can only supply the food needs of the domestic people.


    Therefore, even if the strength cannot be increased, Chang Nuo will not have any bad intentions with those things in the treasure house.


    After looking at the treasure map for a while, Chang Nuo was a little surprised, because the ce names and ces marked on it were obviously within his own country, but the key point is that Chang Nuo has not even left the capital of this kingdom since he was born. Have been out there, let alone know anything about other things outside.


    After thinking about it in this small room for a long time, Chang Nuo stood up, picked up the demon knife and walked out of the room.


    "Ask Junhe toe over and see me, and tell me that I have something to ask him."


    Chang Nuo directly gave instructions to the maid who was standing guard at the door of the room.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    Now that all the details of the matter have begun to develop, it is natural to make a treasure map. It is not necessary at this time because it will not be used in the future anyway.


    After returning to the pce hall for almost half an hour, Junhe walked over quickly.


    When they first met, Junhe immediately shouted respectfully, "Your Majesty the King, I heard that you are looking for me here?"


    "Yes, I would like to ask, do you know that there is a ce called Zhiwu Mountain in our country?" Chang Nuo asked directly.


    "Your Majesty the King, I have never heard of the ce you mentioned. I don''t know why you suddenly asked about this?" Junhe said.


    Chang Nuo did not hide anything and directly took out the treasure map that the old king left for him and handed it to the other party.


    Junhe nced at it, and then he was a little confused. He said to Changnuo, "Your Majesty the King, this should be Batl, the ce closest to the Kingdom of Roja in our country."


    "Is it far from here?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "It''s not very far. After all, our country is only so big, but it will take at least a day to get there."


    Junhe said directly, and Changnuo seemed to have an inexplicable sense of familiarity with this ce name, but after thinking about it for a while, he still didn''t understand where it was?


    "Come here tomorrow morning, and we''ll go together then." Chang Nuo ordered.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    Despite this arrangement, Chang Nuo''s tasks still have to continue every day.


    It''s just that running, push-ups and frog jumps have been with him for so many years. For him now, it doesn''t even take half an hour toplete them.


    It''s only a ten-kilometer journey. If I had used my own abilities, I would have solved it in two minutes.


    But he won''t end it so perfunctorily. This kind of training, at least many things must be done seriously.


    The next day, almost at dawn, they were already sailing on the boat. On this wide seaside, this was also the first time Chang Nuo left the pce.


    His expression looked very calm, but his heart had already begun to be restless.


    After all, in this world of One Piece, what most people yearn for is freedom, but can this kind of freedom really exist?


    Along the way, they almost always followed the coastline, and at the same time they were able to understand the living conditions of the people in various ces. At least wherever they looked, they almost saw people living in dire straits.


    It is precisely because of this that Changnuo wants to change the current situation of this country.


    The ship they are on now was still used by those pirates at that time. This ship looks quite big. It will definitely not be a problem to amodate three to five hundred people. The most important thing is to change the g of this ship. After a while, he looked much more domineering and majestic.


    However, those who originally belonged to the owners of this ship are now almost all engaged in the most basic construction work within the royal city''s territory.


    "The feeling on the sea is so good. After things heree to an end, I also want to go out and have a good sightseeing." Chang Nuo said to himself while standing on the bow of the boat.


    "His Majesty the King will definitely do it. At least we will all believe in you. The future of the country is in your hands!"


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, a maid behind him said with a smile.


    Chang Nuo enjoyed this feeling very much. He turned to look at the maid, and said with a slightly raised corner of his mouth, "The future of the country is in the hands of all of us. If I just rely on myself, I may not be able to do much in the end."


    "His Majesty the King said it is true, but Lina is still honored to be able to follow His Majesty the King." said the little maid.


    "I hope everything is as we imagined. In this case, at least we won''t have to worry about the future for a lot of time." Chang Nuo said softly.


    This time, there were about 50 people who followed, and each of them had their own division ofbor. Changnuo didn''t want to make things too ostentatious this time, so it was good to move forward in secret like this.


    But everything is not as simple as I imagined. Even in this calm South China Sea, there will still be unexpected surprises.


    Just when they were not even halfway to their destination, a naval warship came towards them. The seagull g was flying on the mast above. It could be seen clearly even from a long distance away.


    The most important thing was not the mast, but the shape of the naval warship, which made Chang Nuo start to feel surprised.


    "Your Majesty the King, a naval warship is found ahead. What should we do?" Jun He quickly ran up and asked directly.


    "Don''t do anything. Rememberter, no matter what happens, you must not expose your abilities!" Chang Nuo said with a serious face.


    In fact, Junhe has always wanted to ask why, even now, after training for several years, Changnuo still has not given an exnation to these people.


    Chang Nuo stared at the navy warship that was about a kilometer ahead. The shape of the dog''s head made him feel at a nce who should be sitting on it.


    "Do your best to avoid the navy warship, and try not to have any contact with the people on it." Chang Nuo ordered again.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    "I didn''t expect it to be Garp? It''s really surprising that I can see Vice Admiral Iron Fist of the Navy here!" Chang Nuo stood on the bow of the ship and continued to watch, then whispered to himself.


    He doesn''t want to have any conflict with the other party now, or even meet him. After all, he still doesn''t know what will happen, and why the other party wants toe to the South China Sea is still unknown.


    The navy warship was almost head-on with the ship they were on, but under Chang Nuo''s instructions, the huge ship began to slowly turn to the other side.


    When the two ships approached, they cleverly avoided each other.


    But things can''t end so easily. Just when they were all about to breathe a sigh of relief, a middle-aged man in a suit stood on the ship where Chang Nuo was, or on the deck to be precise.


    The robe of justice was draped on his back, which looked particrly obvious. With his strong muscles and this square face, Chang Nuo had already confirmed that this was Vice Admiral Iron Fist Garp when he discovered it.


    "Wow haha... It turns out this is not a pirate ship. I almost beat him to pieces with one punch just now. It''s a good thing I didn''t do this!"


    Garp stood on the deck, not paying attention to the eyes of others, andughed directly.


    Chang Nuo was speechless, but he still stepped forward and said respectfully, "Mr. Navy Vice Admiral Iron Fist, Mr. Garp, I really didn''t expect that I can still see you in the South China Sea. It really makes me feel lucky." .��


    "You little guy actually know me?"


    Garp asked curiously, but there was no malice in his eyes.


    "Of course I know you, but you may not know me here. I am Changnuo, King of Tru. When I was very young, I heard my father often mention you. I didn''t expect to see you today." Changnuo Said with a smile.


    When Garp first appeared, Junhe and others were on guard, but after listening to the chat between the two, they began to let down their guard.


    Garp became even more curious. He looked at Chang Nuo and asked curiously, "I didn''t expect you to be the king of this country at such a young age. It seems that the burden on you is not very small. Is your country not doing well now?"


    "Excuse me, Lieutenant General Garp, for your concern. I believe that things will get better in the Kingdom of Tru in the days toe."


    "Haha, you little guy is really interesting. Do you want toe to the navy and work under me?"


    Garp looked directly at Changnuo and asked.


    Chang Nuo even rolled his eyes. The other party poached so tantly, which really made people speechless.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, if Changnuo were not King Tru, he would be very happy or willing to follow you, but as you can see, there are also many Chinese behind me who are waiting for me to lead them to live a good life. It seems that your request cannot be met this time!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Well... that''s what you little guy said. After all, your country is really not that good. It''s too poor. If you feel that being a king is not fun in the future, you can go to the navy to find me. I will definitely reserve one for you. Good location,�� Karp said with a smile.


    "Lieutenant General Lao really cares about me. If there is an opportunity in the future, I will definitely be willing."


    "Where are you going? Let''s see if it goes smoothly. I can protect you for a while!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Garp asked directly.


    "Excuse me, Lieutenant General, for your concern. Your Majesty just wants to take a look at the current situation in the country to help you understand how to respond and solve it next."


    Before Chang Nuo said anything, Junhe opened his mouth and spoke directly at this moment.


    Garp''s eyes were fierce for a moment, staring directly at Junhe, who was talking, but only for a moment.


    Then he returned to his original appearance, still smiling and wearing a dog-head hat.


    After Garp observed the people on the ship for a while, he then said to Chang Nuo with a smile on his face, "In that case, I will leave first. I believe we will see you again in the future."


    No one else has figured it out yet, what does this old man mean? Could it be that he came to his own ship just to convey these few words?


    But something that surprised Junhe happened next. Garp directly stepped on the moon steps and instantly flew into the sky, and then galloped all the way through the air, heading towards the navy warship where he was.


    It was only then that Junhe finally understood why Chang Nuo had not allowed people like him to show their abilities from the very beginning.


    If the guess is correct, these training methods and abilities must be inseparable from the navy?


    Back on the warship, as soon as Garp sat on the chair, an impatient voice appeared behind him, shouting, "Garp, if you want to leave in the future, can you tell me in advance?"


    "Crane, don''t be too nervous, I just went over to take a look." Garp said with a serious face.


    "Did you discover something?" He asked directly.


    She could sense from Garp''s expression that the other party''s ship might not be as simple as she imagined, so she began to ask with a straight face.


    "The people on that ship are not simple. I didn''t expect that this small Tru Kingdom could actually have such fighting power?" Garp said.


    "What do you mean by that? Could it be that they are all Devil Fruit users?" Crane asked worriedly.


    "No, it''s just that I suddenly noticed that their physical training structure is very powerful, and it can even bepared with the best of our navy." Garp said directly.


    "So this is what you''re talking about! For people in many ces, as long as they strengthen their training, they can almost do it. What''s so surprising about this kind of thing?" He said indifferently.


    "You don''t understand even after I told you. It seems there is no need to talk to you about this anymore. Maybe we can meet that little guy again in the future. He is really an interesting person."


    Garp said with a slight smile, and then ignored the matter.


    After all, many times it is true as He said, if other people follow the training methods properly, they can also reach the status of those in the Navy.


    He is not sure whether what he saw is right or wrong, so he just went to the other party''s ship to test it out, but the final result seems to be almost the same as what he thought.


    But Garp doesn''t care too much about these things. As long as the other party is not a pirate, then even having such strength is normal for a country.


    After all, he also understood very well that if a country did not have a few powerful beings, it would be almost one-sided in dealing with pirates.

 Chapter 8 Treasure?

    <h4>Chapter 8 Treasure?</h4>


    On the Kruja, the ship where Changnuo and the others were, everyone was still looking confused, looking at the navy warship that had begun to move away.


    Jun He walked up to Chang Nuo and asked, "Your Majesty, do you know the old man just now?"


    "Of course I know him. He can be said to be the ceiling of strength in this world. More importantly, he is currently the most powerful person in the navy." Chang Nuo raised the corner of his mouth slightly and praised without hesitation. .


    "Really or not? But from the looks of his subordinates, he doesn''t look very powerful?" Junhe said with a surprised look on his face.


    "You know Hammer, this old man is quite ferocious, and his opponent''s perception is very strong."


    After hearing what Chang Nuo said, Jun He''s eyes darkened. He wanted to ask something but didn''t know how to say it. Seeing that Chang Nuo didn''t seem to care about it now, Jun He hesitated for a while and asked, "Your Majesty, Is the method you used to train us rted to the navy?"


    Chang Nuo smiled, then patted the opponent''s shoulder directly, and this time, he said without any taboo, "You are right, the training method for you is the training system that the Navy has never spread to others, and it is also the Navy''s training method. The most powerful among them are the six-style skills."


    "I see����"


    Only then did Jun He understand why Chang Nuo had not allowed them to show their strength to outsiders. Even the training results of their No. 100 people had reached such a level, let alone those who stayed in the navy. Training achievements.


    There was no surprise at all. Junhe just had some questions, where did he, His Majesty the King, get these things from when he was ten years old?


    But the key now is not the time to ask these questions. However, he only needs to know that he is loyal to the country and loyal to His Majesty.


    "Stop thinking about it and set off quickly. We haven''t even walked half the way yet, and we don''t know if we can get there before dark." Chang Nuo said directly to Junhe.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    Chang Nuo, who had regained hisposure, looked at the slowly moving ship, but was thinking about why Garp came to the South China Sea. This ce was far away from their naval headquarters. It could be said that it was quite a distance. As far as the old man is concerned, there is definitely something going on when hees to this ce.


    The South China Sea is weak as a whole, and there are not arge number of pirates. It would not be possible for the strongest navy toe to this ce. More importantly, the South China Sea has few countries that have joined the World Government, so there is no need toe here. stroll.


    "It seems that the old man''s purpose ofing here must be rted to Batl."


    After all, this is the birthce of the Pirate King''s son, and the burial ce of the Pirate King''s wife.


    Others don''t know the rtionship between Garp and Pirate King Roger, but Changnuo, who has the Eye of God and already knows the overall situation, is quite clear about the rtionship between the two.


    The treasure indicated by the treasure map is also in Batt, but the Pirate King''s wife also stayed there. If there really is no certain connection, is it possible?


    At least that''s what Chang Nuo has been thinking all along. As the king of this country, Chang Nuo still knows more or less what Batl''s situation is.


    The year-round poption of this ce is only about 20,000, and most ces are surrounded by mountains. Although it is also connected to the sea, this ind does not have many ces for human survival.


    During the continuous sailing process, Chang Nuo was not in any mood to enjoy the surrounding scenery, but this time, he took a stroll along the coastline of his country.


    The whole country is not particrly big, and it only takes a day by boat, not to mention that the current sailing speed is extremely slow. It is not an exaggeration to say that it is and of palm.


    When it got dark, the maid who had been staying beside Chang Nuo reminded her, "Your Majesty the King, Batl Ind is expected to arrive in about ten minutes. Master Junhe asked me to inform you here!"


    "Are you here?" Chang Nuo asked with a sigh.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King, but it is already dark now. Shall we spend the night on the ind first?"


    "Let''s spend the night first. Let''s inform them and stop five miles away from Batt Ind. Don''t disturb the residents of the ind." Chang Nuo ordered.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    Chang Nuo finally came out. He didn''t want to disturb the residents of the ind again when it got dark. After all, a ship suddenly passed by. At such a specific time, it was likely to be mistaken by the residents of the ind. I think pirates, if this is really the case, will definitely cause them to panic.


    It was already dark anyway, there was enough space on the ship for everyone to rest, and there was no need to do other things.


    the next day.


    Early in the morning, Chang Nuo had already led everyone and began to move towards the location marked on the treasure map.


    The entire Batl Ind area is not very small, or in other words, it still has arge area.


    But most of the ces are high mountains and forests. The ce where everyone chose to go ashore this time has been specially designed to avoid the people living here.


    Walking in this dense forest, Changnuo asked curiously, "Junhe, are you sure you can find the ce so early?"


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King. If there is nothing wrong with the treasure map, the specific location should be not far ahead." Junhe said.


    Some people have been walking for several hours now. Except for those who stayed on the boat, there were almost 20 people who came with them.


    In this huge ind, it is still very difficult to determine the location just by relying on a treasure map that doesn''t look like much.


    Especially since this group of people are now walking in a dense forest, it is almost impossible to confirm their direction.


    After nearly an hour, the sweltering heat of staying in the forest was almost unbearable.


    "Junhe, didn''t you say we were almost there? What is the situation now?"


    Chang Nuo couldn''t help but shout directly.


    "Your Majesty, this forest seems very strange. So far, I find that we have been circling in circles. I don''t know what is going on?" Junhe said with a helpless look.


    The sweat on everyone''s foreheads has begun to slowly decrease at this moment, and the sultry environment makes everyone a little manic.


    There is no need for Junhe to say the words anymore. Changnuo has already discovered it himself. After all, it feels a bit weird here.


    Changnuo took a serious look at the situation around him. He had already said this. Only then did he realize that there were no sounds of birds in the surrounding area, and it was even as if there were no living creatures living at all.


    "Your Majesty, please take a rest first. I will take the people to the tree to take a look. What is the situation?" Junhe said respectfully.


    "No, don''t separate. It seems a bitplicated here!" Chang Nuo said directly.


    After the voice fell, Chang Nuo walked straight to a big tree whose top was almost invisible. It was at least ten meters in diameter, but Chang Nuo had seen this guy more than once. It seemed that all their actions revolved around Do the same with this tree.


    "System, can you find out what''s going on?"


    "Answer, I''m very sorry to the host. This system is the Wanjie Mall system and is not responsible for other situations."


    Chang Nuo was speechless. Facing this situation, it really put them in a dilemma.


    But he could feel that there was definitely an area in this ce that he hadn''t noticed yet.


    No matter what, it is impossible for it to appear without reason, so the same is true for this ce.


    Since the system is no longer useful, then at least you should be more careful.


    "Your Majesty, have you discovered anything here?" Junhe looked at Chang Nuo and walked up to ask.


    "We don''t have any clue yet."


    Chang Nuo said directly, and then asked, "There is such a ce in our Kingdom of Tru. Is it possible that no one knew about it before?"


    "Sorry, my subordinates have not paid attention to this matter." Junhe said with his head lowered.


    "Forget it, let''s find a way out quickly." Chang Nuo said helplessly.


    "Your Majesty, how about we just cut down these trees?"


    A soldier stepped forward, swallowed and said.


    "No, these trees are too big. It can''t be done at all. Even if it is done, I don''t know how long it will take." Junhe said.


    "What he said may have some truth. There is currently no good solution, so let''s try this first." Chang Nuo said.


    "But Your Majesty, we didn''t bring any tools before we came here. We relied on manpower, so there probably isn''t a good way." Junhe persuaded.


    "It doesn''t matter..."


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, a sword suddenly appeared in his hand, and his whole body suddenly became fierce.


    "Muramasa, it''s up to you whether you can go out next." Changnuo said to the long sword in his hand.


    After the words fell, Chang Nuo slowly pulled out the demon sword, and his eyes began to turn red.


    Although he didn''t learn any swordsmanship, just relying on his own strength, for Changnuo, using the demon sword Muramasa was enough to chop down the giant trees in front of him.


    Junhe and others were a little surprised and at a loss when they saw their King''s current state.


    The aura brought by Demon Sword Muramasa made even these specially trained people look fearful.


    "What on earth is this?"


    Some soldiers couldn''t help but ask.


    "I think it''s better if we stay away."


    "Your Majesty is indeed your Majesty, but it''s different."


    Everyone has their own words, some are fearful, and of course some are admired.


    But Chang Nuo didn''t hear a word.


    He concentrated on feeling the demon knife in his hand. This bloodthirsty desire that made it difficult for him to control was really too strong.


    Being the first time he felt this knife, Chang Nuo could only say with a cold smile, "Since you have recognized me as your master, you should obey my orders..."


    The de of the sword kept trembling as he spoke. If Chang Nuo hadn''t held it tightly, it would have flown out by itself.


    The entire forest was almost filled with the evil aura of Demon Sword Muramasa.


    Chang Nuo held the handle of the knife tightly, trying hard not to let it escape from his control.


    But even so, the stalemate between one man and one sword continued, and each of the soldiers who followed them stayed far away, for fear of hurting themselves.


    Even Junhe, the strongest among these people, hastily retreated to other ces, far away, quietly watching the situation ahead.


    The whole processsted for almost half an hour. In the already sultry forest, the sweat on everyone''s foreheads had already flowed to an unknown amount.


    During the stalemate, Chang Nuo struggled to maintain the status quo, and his physical exertion was far greater than that of the others.


    But this is not without any manifestation. At least after the stalemate for about half an hour, Yaodao Muramasa has begun to slowly rx.


    Until the end, the evil aura that originally exuded from Muramasa seemed to have disappeared at this moment.


    He quietly let Chang Nuo hold it in his hand, acting extremely normal. The bright light on the de was enough to reflect the dignity and extraordinaryness of the other party.


    "Muramasa, since you and I are partners, I promise to let you embark on your journey from now on and make you famous in this world."


    Seeing that Demon Sword Muramasa hadpletely stopped now, Chang Nuo raised the corners of his mouth slightly and praised him.


    As soon as he finished speaking, Muramasa seemed to have felt Changnuo''s words, and the de shook slightly again twice.


    A spiritual weapon will y a vital role in increasing one''s own strength.


    Feeling the environment here, Chang Nuo was already out of breath, but those people behind him were still waiting for him.


    Facing the current situation, Chang Nuo had almost no strength at all. After all, in order to suppress this demon sword just now, his entire body had been exhausted to a great extent.


    Seeing that it is already afternoon time, if they don''t go out quickly, they don''t know how long they will stay in this sweltering forest, especially after nightfall. If the risks are revealed, then this group of people is very likely to... No one made it out alive.


    Even though Yaodao Muramasa has be peaceful now, none of the soldiers dare toe close.


    Chang Nuo didn''t pay attention to the performance of these people. He directly put the knife across his middle and looked forward with bright eyes, especially at the ten-meter-thick tree in front of him.


    As he raised the knife and lowered it, it was just a normal sh, but the ten-meter-thick tree in front of him was directly prated by the light of the knife.


    Just after the light of the sword prated the big tree, everyone seemed to hear the crisp sound of broken ss. Before the big tree fell, the sultry heat of the forest suddenly disappeared, and there seemed to be a breeze blowing around them.

 Chapter 9 The face of the treasure

    <h4>Chapter 9 The face of the treasure</h4>


    Immediately afterwards, what appeared in front of everyone seemed to be no longer the original forest.


    "Your Majesty the King, there is a road ahead..."


    Junhe shouted loudly, and he could hear the excitement in his voice.


    After all, they have searched here many times, but they have never found a road in front of them. However, when the big tree began to slowly fall down, all the surrounding scenes seemed to have changed to another. Fan.


    Chang Nuo had naturally noticed this change. He nced at the road ahead, then turned to look at the big tree that was still falling.


    During the fall of the huge tree, it was unknown how many other trees had been broken, but the moment this tree fell to the ground, there was a huge movement, and even the ground began to shake.


    Jun He hurriedly ran to Chang Nuo. Looking at the fallen tree, he couldn''t understand why all the problems that troubled these people were solved when the tree fell.


    "Your Majesty the King, what is going on?"


    Junhe was curious and asked respectfully.


    Chang Nuo was actually a blind cat trying to fool a mouse. He didn''t even understand what the situation was. But he had indeed noticed this huge tree several times before, but he did not expect that after the tree fell, the barrier that originally troubled everyone would disappear.


    "I''m not very clear! It seems that this treasure definitely has an unknown side. If there is more money, then our entire Kingdom of Tru will have a much easier life." Changnuo said with a smile.


    "What His Majesty the King said is that now that the barrier has been opened, we should be able to arrive before dark," Junhe said.


    "Then it''s better to set off quickly. We''ll study the specific reasonster." Changnuo smiled and patted Junhe on the shoulder.


    No one can exin the changes in this area in a short period of time, and they don''t understand it very well. After all, this situation does not feel like man-made, but the ce here is definitely not as simple as it seems.


    A path almost two meters wide has now appeared in front of everyone, and no one knows where it connects, but ording to the treasure map, "Open the barrier and the treasure wille."


    Based on this sentence alone, it is already certain that this road should lead directly to the location of the treasure.


    But no one knows yet whether there will be other dangers on the road ahead.


    Chang Nuo put the demon sword Muramasa into the scabbard, stroked it all over, then hung it on his waist and walked forward.


    "Your Majesty, please let me walk in front. I don''t know if there are any other dangers on this road." Jun He looked at Chang Nuo who was walking in front and said hurriedly.


    "Don''t worry, your life is life, and so is mine. There is no need to be too polite between us. At least my strength should be slightly higher, so just let me go in front."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty the King, you really think about us..."


    "From now on, whatever His Majesty the King asks me to do, I must do it without saying a word..."


    "Only such a King is worthy of our following..."


    After hearing what Chang Nuo said, every one of the soldiers behind him was so excited that they burst into tears and spoke words of praise without hesitation.


    But as they moved forward, the big tree behind them that had been cut down began to slowly disappear.


    But for the group of people who had gone farther away, no one could notice this silent disappearance.


    "Your Majesty, you have worked hard for so long, do you want to take a rest?"


    After the group of people walked for nearly an hour, Junhe rushed to Changnuo and asked.


    "No need, let''s end this trip quickly. Besides, this consumption is nothing to us?" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    Junhe smiled, and then continued to follow Chang Nuo.


    The trail they were walking on was so long that they had been walking for an hour and still hadn''t seen the end of the road.


    Moreover, the trees on both sides are extremely tall, but from a feeling point of view, something weird has been discovered.


    Although this Batl Ind looks very big on the surface, it is already weird that these people can walk for an hour at their speed.


    And from the beginning to the end, these people feel that they have been walking up the mountain, but it is an hour''s journey, no matter what, they should have reached the sky, but now something is wrong, and it feels like they are going in circles.


    Finally, after walking for ten minutes, Chang Nuopletely realized that something was wrong. It seemed that he had encountered the same situation he encountered at the beginning. The atmosphere here felt very strange, and it waspletely difficult to distinguish between east, west, north and south.


    "Junhe, use the Moon Step to go to the sky and take a look. What is going on?"


    Chang Nuo said directly and seriously.


    It was just a treasure. In the end, it actually cost so many people so much effort. But now, to everyone, it seems like they have fallen into a bottomless pit and cycle.


    After hearing the order, Junhe stepped on the moon steps and ran to the sky step by step. When he looked down, everything seemed so normal.


    But on the other hand, they walked an hour''s journey, but it seemed like they had only walked a few miles.


    After jumping down, Jun He said to Chang Nuo, "Your Majesty, the location shown on the treasure map is not far above us, but we walked for nearly an hour and only walked five miles. On either side of the road."


    "We can''t wait anymore. Let them wait here first. You and I will go directly from the air. I want to see what kind of situation is going to be able to trap us for nearly a day?" Chang Nuo was already a little angry at this moment. , and his tone was not as calm as it was at the beginning.


    The key point is that this ce is still in our own country, and no one knows at all. What is the situation here?


    As a so-called treasure passed down from an unknown generation of kings, he couldn''t believe that no one hade to explore it until now.


    In addition, and the most important point is, why did the Pirate King put his wife in this ce, so he must know a lot about it.


    Almost all of the ten or twenty people stayed in ce and waited. Changnuo took Junhe and also flew towards the top of the mountain on moon steps.


    After reaching the sky, Changnuo also nced down, and what he found was almost the same as what Junhe found.


    This area was almost full of weirdness, and everyone had no idea what was going on. So much time was wasted just by walking in circles.


    Ignoring those people behind, Changnuo took Jun and the two of them and started directly from the air towards the top of the mountain.


    The distance was not particrly far in the first ce. The two of them could reach and even stand on the top of the mountain almost quickly by walking in the air. From the edge, they could still see the people staying on the path at the foot of the mountain.


    On the top of the mountain, Chang Nuo couldn''t help but frown. This ce was very different from what he imagined. It waspletely unimaginable.


    There are no trees or weeds here, it ispletelyposed of stones, and you can even overlook the entire mountain at a nce.


    The most important thing is because the so-called treasure trove has a panoramic view and nothing suspicious is found.


    Is it possible that everyone has spent so much effort and ended up with nothing in the end?


    "Your Majesty, I searched around and it seems that there is no ce to hide here at all, let alone any treasures?"


    After Junhe walked around for a while, he returned to where he was and looked at Changnuo and said directly.


    "The things protected by kings in the past are definitely not that simple. If the location is correct, then it must still be here." Chang Nuo said.


    But he was also beating the drum in his heart. After all, the top of the mountain is so big, but the location shown on the treasure map is exactly here. But at a nce, there is really no ce that can be called a space where something can be hidden.


    But even so, the two of them were still not discouraged and started to separate directly and continued to search.


    The space on the top of the mountain is not particrlyrge. Within a moment, they hadpletely checked it carefully, but they still didn''t find any clues!


    "Mader, could it be that the things guarded by kings in the past are just a trap? There are no ghosts here, and I don''t know what they are guarding? No one hase to take them for so many years, so there must be nothing." Changnuo scolded angrily in his heart.


    The most important thing is that this ghost ce is really far from what I imagined. I came here to check it out with full of joy, but the final ending is actually like this?


    "Your Majesty, the inspection has beenpleted, but there is indeed no possible entrance or the like. Is there something wrong with the treasure map itself?" Junhe asked doubtfully.


    "Oh~, I don''t know the key. When dad gave me this thing, we didn''t even ask about it!" Chang Nuo said helplessly.


    "So what should we do now?"


    "What else can we do? Just go back!" Chang Nuo calmed down and said directly.


    Anyway, there is really nothing to be found here. Instead of wasting time here, it is better to go back and think about how to make money.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he sat down directly on the top rock. After all, he had worked hard for so long and started to prepare to return after taking a rest. But sometimes people''s luck is like this, it always happens inadvertently. Appear.


    Just as he sat like this, Chang Nuo suddenly felt that the stone under his butt suddenly fell down, and the whole stone seemed to be suspended.


    Junhe also discovered this. After the two of them looked at each other, they both started to say nothing, and the joy on their faces expressed everything.


    "It seems like this thing is under your feet. Move this stone away and take a look..."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his lips.


    Junhe directly lifted a stone without feeling tired at all. However, when the stone was moved away, the two of them discovered that the entire mountain was almost empty, and all the stones were almost suspended in the surroundings.


    Because of the problem of too much time, it looks no different from a normal mountain from the outside.


    "Your Majesty the King, let me go down and investigate first..."


    "No need, there shouldn''t be any danger here, just go down."


    Chang Nuo said, and he took the lead and started jumping down.


    They just opened a hole. Looking down, it was almost bottomless, and it was quite dark inside. No one knew what was inside.


    But there is no need to think too much now. The only thing that is certain is that there is definitely good stuff down there.


    However, even if the two of them jumped into the mountain, some unknown object inside caused the suspension, causing the two of them to be suspended at the same time.


    "Junhe, lean on the edge of the mountain and start to go down slowly. Be sure to pay attention to your own safety."


    Chang Nuo shouted directly and seriously.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Now the two of them have no idea what is going on inside? We can only rely on this method and slowly start to explore downwards. What exactly exists under the mountain? So far no one really knows.


    But just looking at the current situation, the only thing that is certain is that there are definitely unusual items down there.


    From Chang Nuo''s perspective, it is not surprising that any situation exists in the One Piece world. After all, various situations can happen at any time while staying here.


    As the two of them continued to explore down the rocks on the edge of the mountain, although it was still pitch ck, at least they could still feel the unusual movement vaguely.


    After reaching the bottom, the scene in front of him directly overturned Chang Nuo''s cognition.


    Other than that, Junhe waspletely stunned on the spot. The key to the so-called treasure is that the thing in front of you is almostpletely iparable to the one next to it!


    "Your Majesty, what is this?"


    Junhe couldn''t help the doubts in his heart and looked directly at Changnuo and asked.


    However, at this moment, Chang Nuo was stroking this dark guy with his whole body, and the shock in his eyes was almost self-evident.


    Now there is no need to say anything more, he already knows exactly what this huge thing under his feet is.


    A huge capacity that can upy the entire mountain, but it is not the so-called money, but the weapon that most people in the entire One Piece world are pursuing...


    "Junhe, it seems that we have be prosperous this time, but in the end we don''t know whether it is a blessing or a curse. After we go out, we must not let anyone know about the things inside. If the news leaks out, our entire Kingdom of Toru, I��m afraid they will all be in the mes of war!��


    Changnuo said with a stern expression, his voice did not contain any emotion at the moment. He had already sensed the importance of the matter. How could the king who had been guarding him for generations hide such a big guy in the mountain!


    "Your Majesty, what on earth is this?" Junhe couldn''t help but ask.

 Chapter 10 Ancient Weapon—Pluto

    <h4>Chapter 10 Ancient Weapon��Pluto</h4>


    In this dark environment, the two of them couldn''t see the whole thing clearly. It was normal for Junhe to have such doubts.


    Chang Nuo didn''t say it out loud, but he already felt like he was dreaming.


    It is really unimaginable that the Pluto weapon that everyone is pursuing actually exists in the Kingdom of Toru.


    No matter what you think, you shouldn��t? How could such an inhospitable ce like the South China Sea store such a vital thing?


    There is almost no rust on this thing. A giant ship almost made of steel is disyed at his feet. For the technological products of this era, the appearance of this thing is really puzzling!


    "You don''t need to know the origin of this thing. At least for the time being, for you, me, and the entire country, all it can bring is disaster!" Chang Nuo said with a frown.


    "Then what should we do now?" Jun He asked in disbelief.


    "Go out and bury this matter here first. When our country has enough strength, take him out. At least it will make our entire countrypletely different." Chang Nuo said.


    "Okay, Your Majesty..."


    "It seems that Pirate King Roger also knows about this matter. I really didn''t expect that this thing is actually here?" Changnuo said to himself in his heart.


    That is to say, after just one nce, Changnuo immediately took Junhe and started flying upward.


    Needless to say, the maic influence produced here is emanating from this ship.


    Such a huge steel ship, let alone one that could have been built hundreds of years ago, even now, Chang Nuo has reason to believe that it is definitely a product that transcends the times.


    Finally, the two of them climbed up. They looked at each other and saw serious expressions in each other''s eyes. Junhe hurriedly blocked all the rocks where he should be. From the outside, it looked like , still the same as before, without any change.


    Standing on the top of the mountain again, Chang Nuo sighed slowly and looked into the distance. The restlessness and uneasiness in his heart were directly reflected on his face.


    "Your Majesty, do you need to send someone to guard us in the future?" Junhe asked.


    "No, just leave it like that. This thing has been left here for hundreds of years without being discovered. If we guard it too deliberately, we won''t have the ability to deal with it if someone else discovers it!" Chang Nuoshen He took a breath and said calmly.


    "Understood, Your Majesty."


    "Let''s go, start going back now, and don''t disturb the people on the ind during the whole process." Chang Nuo said.


    Originally, I came here with great joy and wanted to see if there were any treasures? It was originally expected that it might be a pile of gold filling the warehouse, but now it seems that it is such a useless item.


    At least for the current situation of their country, it has no effect at all at present. On the contrary, it will cause great disasters.


    royal pce


    After experiencing this incident, Chang Nuo and others never mentioned a word about their treasure hunting experience when they came back.


    Slowly, two years have passed since this incident. During these two years, Changnuo continued to exercise as usual every day toplete the tasks provided by the system.


    At least during this time, I must quickly get what the system has given me. Three-color domineering, this is the most important thing in this kind of world.


    Chang Nuo in the room looked at the now dark hand. This thing is now almost hundreds of times harder than steel, and whether it is in terms of strength or speed, the current Chang Nuo isparable to his former self. I don��t know how many times stronger than it was already.


    At this age, Chang Nuo has officially grown to sixteen years old, and his height has reached about 1.9 meters. He is a handsome young man.


    Now he wears aristocratic clothes every day, but without the crown and short hair, Chang Nuo looks particrly handsome.


    However, in the past two years, the entire Tru Kingdom has almost begun to undergo earth-shaking changes.


    Perfume trading has swept the entire pirate world from the beginning. Although the price of a bottle of 50,000 beli is daunting to many people, the goods are still not avable in many ces.


    Just a product of perfume has already made the Kingdom of Tru a lot of money, and it has also changed the living conditions of the residents of the entire kingdom.


    Nowhere in the kingdom can one see the sameck of food and clothing as two years ago.


    At least each of their faces began to be filled with smiles. The low cost allowed them to create such expensive goods. As for the cost price of a bottle of perfume, I am afraid it does not exceed one hundred beli at most, and this thing is the most expensive in the entire Kingdom of Tru. , the daily production amount is enough for the entire pirate world.


    However, relying solely on one perfume processing factory is not enough to support the improvement of the living standards of the entire nation. Therefore, after the first year, perfume processing has begun to be a side business, and the real main business is the Changnuo system. Among the textile machines purchased.


    Nowadays, the cloth made from the entire Toru Kingdom cannot be found anywhere in the entire pirate world.


    Is that just because of the cloth, or is it more because all the silk threads used for textiles are purchased from the system space?


    "Your Majesty, Your Majesty..."


    In the room, Chang Nuo was feeling his armed domination, but at this moment there was an urgent knock on the door of the room.


    After looking at his iron-ck hands, Chang Nuo immediately put away his domineering energy. After the ck domineering energy on it was slowly withdrawn, the whole hand immediately returned to its original appearance.


    "What happened? Are you so anxious?"


    Chang Nuo opened the door and looked at the maid outside and asked.


    "Excuse me, Your Majesty the King. The news just came back from the National Guard said that a ship of goods shipped seven days ago was snatched away by a group of pirates. Lord Gogoya and Lord Junhe, please let mee over and ask you about this. My opinion!" the maid said anxiously.


    "Have you found out that any pirates stole it?"


    Chang Nuo still asked calmly, without any expression on his face, as if this matter had nothing to do with him.


    "Your Majesty, I didn''t tell you the specific situation, but Lord Junhe is waiting for you in the pce hall right now!"


    "I understand, I''ll go there now." Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Seeing Chang Nuo''s smile, the maid felt as if she was a nymphomaniac. Her nervousness immediately disappeared, and instead she stared at the king in front of her with admiration.


    Chang Nuo didn''t say anything nonsense. After looking at the other party, he started walking towards the pce hall.


    A ship''s worth of goods can be considered rtively nearly a week''s ie for the people of the entire Kingdom of Tru, so there really is no room for loss.


    Even though his face remained calm, Chang Nuo was still very curious in his heart.


    But in this era, it is not a surprising thing to think about the goods being robbed on the sea!


    After all, in the era when pirates were rampant, apart from the navy, almost all pirates were left on the sea. Where did the cargo shipse from?


    As soon as he reached the main hall, Chang Nuo saw Junhe walking back and forth in the room, and the uneasiness in his heart was already reflected on his face.


    "Your Majesty, you are here..."


    Although Junhe''s face was very anxious, when he saw Changnuo''s arrival, he calmed down his emotions and said hello respectfully.


    "Where is Gogoya? Isn''t she in charge of the merchant ship? But such a big thing happened on the merchant ship, why can''t she be seen?" Chang Nuo asked calmly.


    Junhe lowered his head in obvious embarrassment, but clenched his fists, clearly looking angry.


    "Your Majesty, Gogoya was worried about His Majesty''s me. When she got the news, she had already ordered an investigation. Which group of pirates did it? I can''te here for the time being, so I came to consult, Your Majesty. Your opinion!" Junhe said.


    "There is nothing going on in the kingdom now, and it seems that someone is specifically targeting our country to prepare a ship. Let Gogoya apany me and go to the sea to have a look." Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty, let me handle this matter. The current Tru Kingdom cannot do without you!"


    "Needless to say, you stay here. Protect the citizens of the entire kingdom. Your strength is not weak, so don''t let me down."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    He is indeed not angry about the cargo ship being robbed. This ispletely unnecessary for him.


    However, the total value of the goods on an entire cargo ship is at least several billion Baileys, which is also arge mary value. Naturally, it is impossible to give up like this for no reason.


    "Your Majesty, if you don''t want me to apany you here, as for the matter of guarding the kingdom, the group of people below are already very strong and can take on such a task!" Junhe said again uneasily.


    "I don''t worry about them, so it''s better for you to stay in the kingdom. I won''t be out for long this time, so just stay well." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Junhe reluctantly agreed.


    For Chang Nuo, if it weren''t for the incident in the Tru Kingdom, he would no longer know where he is now. For him who has always longed for life at sea, staying in the country is indeed boring enough.


    "By the way, where is Gogoya now? Let her find a ship and set off quickly. Don''t wait until we find the ce. Our goods will be gone long ago." Changnuo said again.


    "Your Majesty, don''t worry, your subordinates will go and prepare now."


    Junhe said and hurriedly left the pce.


    "The world of One Piece belongs to my era, Changno, and it is beginning toe."


    Chang Nuo was now in the main hall, smiling and talking to himself.


    For Chang Nuo, this country now carries too many things for him. Since he has be the king of this country, he naturally has to pay attention to everything rted to him.


    Now that the entire country has almost stabilized, it''s time to go out and take a good look at what this world looks like.


    The world of One Piece is full of unknowns, but for now, the time is only 1908 in the Pirates'' Calendar, and many wonderful people and things have not yet appeared, let alone other things.


    Sitting on the ground, Changnuo began to think about the protagonists of the pirate world in the future. He was 7 years older than the protagonist Luffy, and Ace was five years older. Therefore, at this time, the entire pirate world was not It didn''t feel as exciting as it did at the beginning of the plot.


    But it is precisely because of this that the so-called excitement is nothing more than what you create.


    As he thought more and more, Changnuo instantly felt how boring and boring the world of One Piece was at this moment.


    Chang Nuo was traveling. In the Lokaka city where the royal pce belongs, almost half of the people came out to see him off. They learned that His Majesty the King was going to travel far, and everyone was very excited in their hearts.


    The most important thing is that this time their King is preparing to go to sea because of the loss of his country''s goods.


    Both sides of the street are now crowded with people, and everyone''s eyes are so innocent. For those children, looking at Chang Nuo, this is simply their biggest idol.


    The carriage slowly passed by both sides of the street. Along the way, Chang Nuo kept saying hello to the people. The king''s guards followed behind. These people are now the strongest in the entire kingdom.


    As the entire country bes stronger and stronger, the strength of the National Guard of the Kingdom of Tru has be much stronger than the same type of naval forces.


    This time the departure was from Nanniwa Port, and Gogoya had already prepared the ships needed to go to sea.


    After several years of development, the Kingdom of Tru has be much richer than before. At least now, the king''s exclusive ship can still be built very luxuriously.


    It''s just that Chang Nuo has never seen this thing before since it was created.


    Looking at the huge ships docked in the port, at least a hundred meters long in front and back, and the g of the Kingdom of Tru hanging on it, it looked so solemn and solemn when it swayed in the wind.


    "Your Majesty the King, this is your exclusive ship. So far, it has not been named yet. Please give it a name first!"


    Junhe said with a smile on his face.


    There were two people standing behind him, ready to record, so that this scene could be left to posterity.


    Chang Nuo stared at the big ship in front of him, thought for a moment and then said, "Let''s call it the National Ship..., the True National Ship."


    "Very consistent..."


    Junhe was stunned for a moment, and then said excitedly.


    "Stop talking about this, where are the Gogoya people?" Changnuo looked directly at Junhe and asked.


    "Your Majesty, Gogoya is a little afraid to face Your Majesty and is standing behind the crowd." Junhe said.


    But after hearing this, Chang Nuo''s face suddenly turned cold, and he said with an angry voice, "If everyone is like this, how can we maintain the country? It''s not terrible to make mistakes, the key is not to dare to face it, this is ridiculous ?"


    "Sorry, Your Majesty, I will ask Gogoya toe over now."


    Seeing that Chang Nuo was angry, Junhe didn''t dare to say anything else, so he could only bow and speak quickly.

 Chapter 11 Leaving the Kingdom

    <h4>Chapter 11 Leaving the Kingdom</h4>


    Changnuo watched Junhe leave, and he couldn''t help but feel angry. He didn''t show much concern about the goods being robbed, but he was very dissatisfied with the attitude of the person involved.


    After a while, Junhe directly pulled a girl who looked about twenty years old out.


    She lowered her head and didn''t dare to say anything.


    "After what happened, is this your attitude?" Chang Nuo said angrily.


    "I''m sorry, Your Majesty. It''s all my fault. The goods were robbed this time. Gogoya is willing to bear any punishment."


    Gogoya knelt directly on the ground, never daring to raise his head.


    "I put you in charge of shipping matters because I trust you. Even if anything happens, this is something I should consider.


    Now that the goods have been robbed, the first thing to consider is to trace them quickly, instead of hiding behind them like you. If you are like this in the future, how will the country do it? "


    Chang Nuo roared directly, and Gogoya, who was kneeling on the ground, couldn''t help but shed tears.


    Jun and a group of people stood nearby, and no one dared to talk to him. This was also the first time they had seen their King look so angry.


    Gogoya put his hands on his knees and bowed his whole body to the ground. Tears kept falling on the ground. Seeing this scene, Changnuo could only sigh helplessly and did not say anything excessive.


    "Get up, are everyone ready?" Chang Nuo said to Gogoya.


    "Everything is ready and waiting for His Majesty the King to board the ship and set off at any time..."


    Gogoya stood up and said quickly.


    "Let''s go. After we get on the boat, tell us everything in detail. I want to know the whole process." Chang Nuo said, then turned around and started heading towards the boat.


    Hearing this, Gogoya could only follow behind him quietly.


    As for the things that should be prepared on the ship, they have already been prepared. There were not particrly many people on board this time, but the King''s Guard still went with about fifty people.


    As the sails rose, the originally stationary National began to slowly start.


    The people standing at Nanniwa Port all stood there and waved to them.


    After getting on the ship, Chang Nuo stood on the deck. At this time, he felt particrly rxed. At least at this moment, he did not have to bear the heavy responsibility of the entire country.


    "His Majesty����"


    Gogoya walked to Chang Nuo and shouted softly.


    "Tell me, what happened when the goods were robbed?"


    "ording to the message from the people who came back, the robbery of the goods this time was entirely due to pirates. There was a problem from the Upside Down Mountain. At that time, we happened to meet a group of pirates who were preparing to go to the Grand Line, so this happened. The problem."


    Gogoya said.


    "Have you confirmed which group of piratesmitted the crime?" Chang Nuo asked calmly.


    "It''s the red-haired pirates..."


    "them!!"


    Chang Nuo was a little surprised and surprised. He didn''t expect toe into contact with a group of guys like Shanks so soon!


    But think about it, he is a pirate, no matter what, he still mainlymits robbery, so how can he expect other people to behave better?


    "Okay, don''t worry anymore. In that case, it doesn''t matter if we take a trip to the Grand Line." Changnuo looked at Gogoya and said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, you don''t me me?" Gogoya asked in surprise.


    "There''s nothing to me for this. Encountering pirates is unavoidable. Besides, the other party''s power is beyond your control," Chang Nuo said.


    "Thank you for your understanding, Your Majesty, but how should we recover that batch of goods now?"


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment, then raised the corner of his mouth slightly and said with an indifferent expression, "Why should we chase them back? We don''t know where they are. In this vast sea, it is simply impossible to find a group of pirates. First, Let��s go! Let��s take a look along the way. ��


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    Upside Down Mountain is a key ce connecting the four seas. It is also the only way to go to the Grand Line from the Four Seas, and there is no room for negotiation.


    If the country is rtively developed, its strength reaches a certain level, or its technology reaches a certain level, it can also be crossed directly through the windless zone. In that case, at least half of the distance can be savedpared to reaching the Upside Down Mountain.


    It''s just that the risks on the sea are much stricter than in other ces.


    Chang Nuo stood on the deck and looked at the undting sea. Perhaps it was this feeling of anticipation that made him feel that the sea was particrly beautiful now.


    At least in the South China Sea, it is a rtively safe area.


    The entire National was also built with a wooden structure, and the front and rear spans were veryrge. The giant ship, which was a hundred meters long, was rtivelyrge among the ships sailing in this era.


    It is driven by three sails, and at least 50 people are needed to operate the ship.


    In addition to some ces to rest and eat, there are many entertainment venues throughout the country, including swimming pools.


    Even from a long distance, you can clearly see the whole picture of the national number.


    The g of the Kingdom of Tru is shaped like a moon and is hung from the top of the mast. No matter which direction you look at it, the National is definitely a more luxurious and majestic ship.


    But traveling in this vast ocean, the space for all of them to move is almost exclusively on this ship.


    "Your Majesty, which direction should we proceed from next? Should we go to Upside Down Mountain first or go to other ces?" Gogoya asked.


    "Did you bring the record pointer?"


    "Record pointer???" Gogoya obviously didn''t understand what Chang Nuo said.


    Hearing this, Chang Nuo already felt the ignorance of this woman Gogoya. As the leader of the entire country''s shipping team, in the end he didn''t even know the record pointer?


    "Forget it, go back and find another ce to buy another one. In thend of the four seas, you only need apass, but on the Grand Route, thepass ispletely useless. You can only rely on the record pointer to reach the next ce. These are all for you You need to know more about things in the world that you need to know in the future, and don''t act like you don''t know anything like today!" Chang Nuoy on the recliner and said directly without caring.


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    Gogoya was immediately speechless when he was told that. He didn''t know how to answer. After all, he really didn''t know these situations.


    But this time they went to sea, they felt that they could indeed learn a lot.


    The ship is drifting in the wind, and the speed of this movement is simply ridiculously slow. It would be better if the wind is strong, but in such a quiet and windless situation, it can almost only stay here without moving.


    Fortunately, the purpose of this trip to sea is not very strong. Is it possible that we really want to recover that batch of goods? This situation is almost a no-brainer.


    Pirates are not like countries that can maintain their habitat in one ce for a long time. They can wander wherever they go, and there is no fixed location. It is still quiteborious to find them.


    But luck is always hard to say. If it really happens, it can only be regarded as good luck.


    "Let them exercise well when they need to exercise, and rest well when they need to. There is almost nothing on this ship. Wait until it docks, and then think of other ways. Then replenish energy supplies. Come out and let them Learn more." Changnuo said to Gogoya leisurely.


    Now Chang Nuo''s perception of sight, sound and color can directly reach ten kilometers away. He can detect whether it is safe on the sea with just a little seriousness.


    "Okay, Your Majesty."


    In fact, the whole ship felt quite boring. After all, in the first day or two, it was probably out of curiosity and expectation that I felt a lot of fun. But after a long time, that feeling almost disappeared.


    After sailing for three to five days, what I saw on the sea was still the same as before. There were no special circumstances, and not even an ind was seen.


    Chang Nuo was lying on the deck chair on the deck, with a look of despair on his face. He had no pursuit at all, because the scenery he could see now was almost the sea and the sky, without any refinement or harmony. In terms of aesthetics.


    Gogoya was also lying on the deck. She had not been out to sea very often, or at all. She just asked him to be responsible for shipping matters. But this trip for so long made this big girl feel the same. Very tired.


    "Gogoya, why do those pirates like the life at sea so much? Do you find it boring?" Changnuo askedzily.


    "Yes, Your Majesty, life at sea is indeed boring, and you can''t eat well or sleep well." Gogoya said with the sameziness.


    "What do you think the situation is today? The weather has suddenly be so hot and muggy? Are there any instructions from the navigator?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Your Majesty, the navigator already saidst night that we may need to sail for two or three days to get to the upside down mountain. There will be no special weather conditions in the four seas, but..."


    Before Gogoya finished speaking, the sky began to change color, and dark clouds swept directly in their direction.


    And it wasn''t just dark clouds that swept over, there were also huge waves dozens of meters high.


    "Your Majesty, please enter the cabin quickly. It is too dangerous outside..."


    After discovering this scene, all the soldiers who were originally veryzy suddenly became energetic.


    The scene in front of them made them feel that this life''s journey had beenpleted.


    At this moment, the huge ship also began to turn around, and then prepared to start moving away from the waves, but at this moment Chang Nuo stood up and shouted angrily, "What is the navigator doing? How can you turn now? Tell him to face the waves head on." Otherwise we will all die next!"


    Chang Nuo was speechless. This navigator was probably not even a third-rate navigator, and he didn''t even understand the most basic and simple principles.


    I don��t know how these people got here on this journey.


    After receiving the order, the bow of the ship began to slowly straighten, and then faced the oing huge waves directly.


    The width of this huge wave can no longer be seen, but for them, it has been boring for several days. Now, whether they are alive or dead, at least it has aroused thepetitive mentality in their hearts.


    Even Chang Nuo was like this. He stood on the deck and looked at the waves in front of him with his eyes attentively.


    It was no longer necessary to study why the waves came, and the dark clouds overhead made it clear that there would be strong winds and heavy rain.


    "Go tell the navigator that no matter what happens next, the bow of the ship must keep moving forward." Chang Nuo said slightly seriously.


    For the people of the Tru Kingdom, they had always been poor and could not even afford a boat, let alone sail on the sea.


    It''s already amazing to be able to sail the boat to this position, let alone face such huge waves.


    "Everyone, get ready, quickly put down the sail, and then hold on to what you can hold. Don''t be washed away by the waves." Chang Nuo shouted again.


    The group of soldiers behind them were all ready to wee theing waves, and everyone''s expressions showed meticulousness.


    This huge wave is at least thirty meters high. Although their ship is rtivelyrge, in the face of such a huge wave, just one blow is likely to cause their entire ship to shatter!


    Everyone at the back began to climb up the mast in a panic, and then cut the ropes holding the sails. Seeing that the huge waves were getting closer and closer, the anxious look on everyone''s face was perfectly reflected. .


    However, the navigator who was at the bow of the ship controlling the rudder waspletely confused at this moment. It was the first time for him to encounter such a big wave, and he had no idea why his king wanted to directly ride on the wave.


    Changnuo stood at the forefront of the deck alone, and then summoned the demon sword Muramasa from the system space, staring at theing waves ahead.


    He didn''t pay attention to the expressions of those behind him, and he didn''t even notice Gogoya''s shout.


    When the waves and the National were about to collide, Changnuo yelled, "Draw your sword and strike..."


    Almost in the blink of an eye,pletely beyond the range of human vision, the demon sword Muramasa, who was still in the scabbard, was instantly pulled out of the scabbard, and a huge sword light instantly prated the entire wave.


    In the eyes of everyone, whose jaws almost dropped to the ground in surprise, the wave was directly split into two. Due to the failure to control the force, a gap was cut directly in the seawater within a few miles in front.


    The National was able to pass through this wave without any danger, but because the water that had been cut open by the sword light was now gathering rapidly, the entire hull of the National began to shake violently under such circumstances. got up.


    Fortunately, after a while, the ship began to calm down.

 Chapter 12 The Invited Navigator

    <h4>Chapter 12 The Invited Navigator</h4>


    Watching the huge wave begin to slowly recede, the entire crew on the National Ship suddenly began to rx and fell to the ground one by one, with no intention of getting up.


    Even the navigator on the bow of the ship felt as if he had lost half his life at this moment.


    However, those soldiers who followed, after seeing Chang Nuo''s powerful sh, the little stars in their eyes were almost ready toe out.


    This was also Chang Nuo''s first time using a move from the Feitian Sword Style. Even he himself did not expect that he would be able to disy such a huge power.


    The moment the sword shed through the waves, even he was startled.


    "Your Majesty, you are really amazing. I was scared to death just now!"


    Gogoya was so frightened that he knelt down on the ground. The fear in his eyes was very obvious.


    "Okay, it''s okay, but after today, you need to hurry up and find me a navigator. It''s best not to let such a third-rate navigator go to sea. There''s no telling how big things will happen in the future."


    Chang Nuo was speechless. The navigator on his ship was simply too inferior.


    "Your Majesty, you are really amazing..."


    "That''s right, Your Majesty is indeed extraordinary..."


    Listening to the praises of the soldiers behind him, Changnuo shouted helplessly, "Hurry up and check if anyone else is in trouble. Check to see if everyone on the ship is here!"


    "yes����"


    The voices of dozens of people speaking in unison suddenly lit up the sea area.


    "Gogoya, where are we now?" Changnuo asked.


    "Your Majesty, thepass was broken in the impact just now, and now I don''t know exactly where it is!" Gogoya said in a low voice with some embarrassment.


    Chang Nuo was even more speechless. He really couldn''t say anything more to this group of people. It was simply too speechless.


    "Tell me about it, is there just apass on this ship?" Chang Nuo asked again in disbelief.


    After hearing this, Gogoya stared at Chang Nuo carefully and nodded in fear.


    Chang Nuo suddenly pped his head. This was the first time he went to sea in his life and he encountered this kind of thing. Without apass, it was really a dream to find a ce to dock in such a big sea.


    But their luck won''t run out so quickly, and it can be said that they are so sleepy that theye to the pillow.


    While the two were still entangled, a pirate ship suddenly appeared on the sea in the distance.


    And they are still moving quickly in the direction where they are, and my group doesn''t even need to look for them!


    "Cheer up, it looks like thepass is here!" Chang Nuo said with a sinister smile on his lips.


    Gogoya got up from a cold andy on the railing, then looked in the direction Chang Nuo said.


    At this time, the pirate ships in the distance still seemed quite small to them. If they didn''t look carefully, they would have been almost suppressed by the horizon.


    "Your Majesty, they are pirates!"


    Gogoya said worriedly.


    "It''s hard to tell if they are not pirates. Now that we have finally met a group of them, we are really looking forward to it!" Chang Nuo said with an expectant look on his face.


    He became extremely excited, and even the soldiers behind him were gearing up. How could these people be afraid of pirates now? They are all eager to start meeting each other.


    As the distance between the two ships got closer and closer, the g on the pirate ship could be clearly seen. There was a huge skull painted on the sail. Before they even got closer, they had already started to prepare. fire.


    But now it would not be as they wished. When the distance was close enough, Changnuo disappeared in an instant, and when he reappeared, he was already on the pirate ship.


    There were about forty or fifty pirates on the ship. Among them, the pirate captain standing on the front deck was still shouting directly to the others, "Young men, it seems that a big business hase in today. Hurry up and shoot me..."


    "Ship...captain..."


    The younger brothers shouted with some trembling. After all, just as they approached the other people''s ship, an unknown person came to their ship. The key was to sit in the original position of their own captain.


    The stupid-looking pirate captain turned his head impatiently and was about to curse when he heard his little brother calling him, but when he saw someone sitting in his ce, his whole body changed. He suddenly froze in ce.


    "Who are you??"


    The pirate captain looked at Changnuo and asked curiously.


    "I am the captain of the ship opposite. You just wanted to attack us with cannons. Shouldn''t we settle the score now?"


    Chang Nuo sat there and said with a smile on his face.


    "How did he get here just now?"


    The pirate captain directly pulled the boy next to him and asked in a low voice and curiously!


    "Captain, the other party just appeared here suddenly without even seeing where he came from. It seems that the other party is probably a Devil Fruit user?"


    The crew member said to the pirate captain.


    "Many other pirates also ran to the deck with knives, and a group of people surrounded Changnuo.


    The pirate captain seemed to gain some confidence after seeing this situation. He shouted directly and arrogantly to Chang Nuo, "You are only one person. There are so many people here, how can I be afraid of you?"


    "Then look behind you again?"


    Changnuo continued to smile.


    When the pirate captain turned around and looked in the direction of the Country, more than a dozen people were already in the air, running towards this side.


    This scene didn''t scare them to the point of peeing. The more arrogant look they had just now made their eyes pop out at this moment.


    "Captain, it seems we can''t defeat these people?"


    "You don''t need to tell me! I saw it myself!"


    The pirate captain immediately started yelling at the crew, then looked at Chang Nuo sitting in his seat with a smile on his face, and said somewhat tteringly, "Are you a pirate too?"


    "What did you say?"


    Chang Nuo looked calm, and the dozen guards who were originally on the National had now jumped onto the deck.


    Everyone on the pirate ship immediately gave up resistance and threw the knives on the ground with a crackling sound.


    "What kind of pirate group are you?"


    "Ah, our pirate group is called the Barlow Pirates. My name is Barlow. I am from the West Sea Country. I am going to the New World. There are 51 people on the ship and almost 30 million Baileys worth of gold and silver jewelry. Are you here? You can take it all if you like, but please leave some food for us.��


    Changnuo asked what the other party''s pirate group was called. The captain named Barlow exined the situation on the entire ship very clearly, without omitting anything, for fear that the other party would be dissatisfied.


    Changnuo stood up and smiled. He was very satisfied with the other party''s attitude, and he didn''t have a bad opinion of pirates.


    Hearing that people had said this now, it made his group of people look like pirates, but even so, Changnuo still smiled and said to his guards, "Captain Barlow has already exined it so clearly, why not?" What are you doing in a daze? Let��s go and take back the 30 million beli money first.��


    "yes����"


    The guards were also very happy and they started to search the whole ship excitedly. It was estimated that as long as it was valuable, even a pair of underwear would not be spared.


    Chang Nuo stood on it. After a while, the guards who went to search came back with arge box full of jewelry in their hands.


    "Your Majesty, it is indeed 30 million beli. This is the only valuable thing on the entire ship." said the guard.


    "It''s good. At least we didn''t waste time on this trip. It''s really fast to make money this way!" Chang Nuo stood there and started to think about it.


    Now the pirate captain named Barlow, looking at the other party holding his treasure, felt as if his lifeblood had been taken away. Even though his expression and facial features were twisted together, he did not dare to say anything.


    "Where is the navigator on your ship?"


    Changnuo asked, looking at Captain Barlow.


    "Navigator???"


    Barlow was stunned once again. With his height of six meters, he looked very funny and funny.


    Before Chang Nuo could ask again, Barlow said nkly, "I am a navigator..."


    "you??"


    Now it was Chang Nuo''s turn to be surprised, but he still asked, "How did you escape that huge wave not long ago?"


    For this small boat, which is only a dozen meters long, the huge wave of more than 30 meters just now might be able to knock it directly into the bottom of the sea with just a little residual power.


    But judging from the appearance of the other party, it seemed that no one was injured, and there was nothing special about the ship.


    "You said it was the wave just now? It really shocked me. I didn''t expect there to be such big waves in the four seas. It seems that the closer you get to the Upside Down Mountain, the greater the climate change will be." Barlowughed. said.


    "Am I asking you this?" Chang Nuo said with a speechless expression.


    "The wave just passed by like that. Anyway, it wasn''t anything big. It was just rushing up along the waves. Originally, we were still dozens of kilometers away, and we just followed the waves to get here." Luo said.


    "It seems that your Barro Pirates have nothing to do. From now on, you might as well be my navigator." Chang Nuo said with gleaming eyes.


    The other party''s navigation skills must be better than his own navigator. I don''t know much. The main reason is where he is going next. Changnuo really doesn''t believe in the other party''s ability.


    "Haha, don''t be ridiculous, I''m a pirate..." Barlow said with a smile.


    "This is His Majesty the King of the Tru Kingdom, and the underground strength is very strong. With His Majesty, you can at least go anywhere in the world, unlike you who lick blood every day."


    A guard standing next to Chang Nuo said.


    "His Majesty??"


    Barlow looked at Chang Nuo in disbelief. In his impression, almost every king he had ever seen had a fat head and big ears. Not to mention that the king was so young, and his strength alone made him look very handsome. He was in disbelief.


    Barlow turned his head and nced at Changnuo''s National, with a very reluctant expression on his face, but now was it his turn to make a choice?


    "What is your aspiration?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly thought that the entire pirate world likes to chase dreams, so he subconsciously asked directly.


    This sentence obviously made Barlow a little at a loss. Dream? It seems like he really doesn��t have this thing!


    "If it''s a dream, it might just be to find my brother who has be a pirate!"


    Barlow thought for a while and then said.


    "It is indeed a very good ideal, but based on the strength of you people, let alone going to the Grand Line, you will probably be killed by others halfway." Changnuo said with a smile.


    "Huh? What you said makes sense, but I still want to stick to my own opinion!"


    Barlow continued.


    "What''s so good about your little broken ship? Isn''t it just to find your brother? Come and be my navigator. At least this ship can go anywhere in the sea in the entire pirate world."


    Chang Nuo said, but looking at Barlow''s eyes now, he was obviously looking at his crew members.


    So Chang Nuo continued to smile and said, "As for them, if they are worried, they can directly arrange work above."


    The main reason is that the people in the entire Tru Kingdom have almost no sailing experience, and they have no control over many things on the ship.


    Just like how much effort it took to remove the two sails in the first ce, everyone was in a hurry.


    So now he has a preliminary understanding of the sailing skills of the people on his ship, and he really feels that it is difficult to take on such a big responsibility.


    Not to mention that more ships will appear in the future. The Kingdom of Tru will definitely not remain in its current state. Therefore, navigation skills need to be improved to at least many levels to meet the country''s future needs.


    It''s rare to meet one today. As long as the other party doesn''t have much influence, it doesn''t matter if they get it on your ship.


    The pirates are not without their merits. Sometimes, at least their survival and emergency skills are much better than those of their own.


    "Captain, since His Majesty the King has said so, shouldn''t we really consider it?"


    "That''s right, Captain..."


    The crew below also began to persuade Barlow that at least if they stayed on the National, they would no longer be pirates and would not have to worry about survival every day.


    In fact, for Barlow, he has begun to feel a little loose now. Changnuo just wants a better navigator. After all, the next journey is still unknown. He relies on his current navigator to let him The whole person felt very insecure.


    After experiencing the big storm before, such a small boat could actually survive, which is enough to illustrate the overall skills of Barlow, a rtively short man.


    In this vast sea, without a qualified navigator, even a ship as long as a hundred meters long like the National is likely to capsize in a storm.

 Chapter 13 Upside Down Mountain and Countercurrent

    <h4>Chapter 13 Upside Down Mountain and Countercurrent</h4>


    We are still in the Four Seas now. If we were to go to the great sea route in my impression, it would probably be cold by now.


    Seeing that Barlow was still hesitating, Changnuo continued to smile and asked, "Do you have any reward money now?"


    Upon hearing this, Barlow instantly became energetic, and then said arrogantly, "The amount of the reward I am offering is 300,000 Baileys."


    "Doesn''t that mean you are just a small mobile money bag? But with your strength, you probably won''t have to wait until you arrive at Upside Down Mountain, and you will have already been captured by others to exchange money."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    "Yes, Captain, you forgot about the two bounty hunters we met a few days ago. We almost died!"


    The two crew members looked at Baluo with prayerful faces. It was rare that they had such a good ce to stay this time. Although a group of people also wanted to take risks, it just seemed that it might be much safer this way.


    How could Barlow not understand this thing? However, he also needs to give himself a higher level for many things and be responsible for these brothers.


    They are not extremely evil people in the first ce, they just have a hard life, and they finally choose to be pirates.


    Barlow thought for a while, then stood respectfully in front of Chang Nuo, bowed directly and said, "Barlow, the captain of the Barlow Pirates, from today on, I am willing to be your navigator, my majesty."


    It is normal to see Barlowpromise. After all, due to the powerful group of people, there is almost no choice for these pirates.


    Chang Nuo just wants to find a navigator as soon as possible and leave this ghost ce. As for the future, we will talk about itter. Anyway, there is no need to worry about anything happening to them.


    But among this group of people, Chang Nuo was quite unexpected.


    Although their entire pirate group is very weak, they still do quite well in other aspects.


    Whether it is in terms of catering or sailing skills, he has almost crushed those on his own ship.


    When they set off again, the ship that originally belonged to the Barro Pirates, just after Chang Nuo casually drew his knife, the entire ship became torn into pieces and then sank to the bottom of the sea.


    When the pirates saw this scene, they who were still a little cautious suddenly began to be more honest.


    On board the National, Chang Nuo continued to lie on the deck chair and be a leisurely salty fish. With Barlow and the others joining them, at least they no longer had to worry about which way to go.


    The voyage was quite smooth along the way, at least for now.


    From the South China Sea to the Upside Down Mountain, we did not experience any special conditions. However, when we saw the Upside Down Mountain, everyone on the boat began to be surprised.


    The backward flow of sea water ispletely intertwined on the top of a mountain. The entire Upside Down Mountain seems to be at least a thousand meters high, but for everyone, this situation is the first time for everyone to meet.


    Chang Nuo, as a man who had received decades of popr science in his previous life, looked at the scene in front of him and his views had beenpletely overturned.


    Although we had already known the reverse direction of Upside Down Mountain before, this situation was really surprising.


    "Your Majesty, this mountain is really a wonder, but why is it flowing like this?"


    Gogoyay on the side of the ship and watched all this, asking with a look of shock and curiosity.


    "You ask me, how did I know? I didn''t expect that the ce connecting the four seas is indeed quite spectacr."


    Chang Nuo couldn''t help but sigh and said.


    "Your Majesty the King, we are going to start crossing the Upside Down Mountain next. Are we going to enter the Great Channel directly, or are we going somewhere else?"


    Barlow quickly ran over and asked Chang Nuo.


    "Are you sure about crossing Upside Down Mountain?"


    Chang Nuo looked at Barlow and said, after all, this thing is the top priority.


    "Your Majesty, I am still somewhat sure about this. There should be no problem. Although the water is flowing backwards, except for the current being a little more turbulent, everything else is no different from a normal ce!"


    After hearing what Barlow said, Changnuo finally let go of his worries. Although he was not worried about being in danger, the key point was that the ship was very valuable and his country was really too poor.


    "Barlow, we don''t need to enter the Great Channel for the time being. Let''s go to the East China Sea first. I heard that the Pirate King was executed in a town in the East China Sea. It''s so close anyway, so it doesn''t hurt to go and take a look." Changnuo said.


    "Really? You really should go take a look!"


    Barlow also said with anticipation. After all, after bing a pirate, the biggest obsession in the hearts of all pirates is whether they can be the Pirate King.


    This is the supreme position in the world of pirates, and it can also lead an era.


    Even though they are no longer pirates now, the thoughts in their hearts still remain.


    "What should be done specifically next? Just tell everyone that even if the ship is destroyed, no one can be injured or fall into the sea." Chang Nuo suddenly faced Barlow with a serious look on his face. said.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty."


    Barlow responded with the same earnest and solemn expression. Changnuo''s mentality of thinking about people like himself instantly captured Barlow''s loyalty.


    But facing an upside-down mountain with such a shape, even Barlow found it a bit difficult.


    But for him with so many years of sailing experience, he could only return to the bow of the ship, work hard to control the rudder, and stare meticulously ahead, for fear of making any mistakes.


    Because if something goes wrong here, it is very likely that everyone will fall into the sea.


    Even for the trust of everyone, Barlow always kept his hands on the rudder. The huge rudder looked almost uncoordinated in his small body.


    Each of the other members of the original Barro Pirates was doing what they should do, and each of the dozens of guards was standing ready.


    Even Chang Nuo himself was filled with excitement.


    Not to mention that many people like to be pirates. This sense of adventure is simply amazing.


    As the National began to slowly approach the current range of Upside Down Mountain, everyone could clearly feel that the ship was elerating.


    "Quickly furl the sails, everyone grab everything you can and don''t let yourself fall into the sea!"


    Barlow stood on the bow of the ship and shouted directly.


    Those who had already stood on the mast and were preparing to furl the sails jumped directly from above. Every four people controlled one sail. After jumping down, the sails were naturally raised to the top.


    Next, they no longer need to use the sails to move forward. The reverse current of the upside down mountain is enough to support them to continue to move forward quickly.


    As they got closer, many people hurriedly grabbed something on the boat that could hold them in ce, for fear of falling into the sea.


    On such a huge sailing ship, the rudder, which controls the direction of the entire ship, bes extremely flexible in Barlow''s hands.


    And at such a fast speed, it can also get stuck directly into the reverse flow of the Upside Down Mountain, which is not wide.


    After entering the waters of Upside Down Mountain, Barlow let out a sigh of relief. Even for such an experienced man, this moment felt like he waspeting with himself.


    "The boat is going up the mountain..."


    Gogoya clung to the railing tightly, but he still screamed with excitement on his face.


    Chang Nuo was also very excited. This kind of thing that haspletely subverted scientific theory is indeed very unique and surprising to others.


    But while everyone was enjoying the beautiful scenery in front of them, Barlow ran to Chang Nuo anxiously. Before Chang Nuo could ask when, Barlow directly said, "Your Majesty, our ship is the king''s." The ship is too huge. When we reach the top of the mountain, the currents from all four directions will converge at that ce. I am worried that the ship may not be able to withstand the huge water pressure, and the keel may break at that moment."


    Chang Nuo hesitated for a moment, and then said, "Now that we have reached this point, there is no way out, why don''t you just say, keep moving forward, I will solve it when the timees!" Chang Nuo said seriously.


    But now we are about to reach the top of the mountain. The water collected from all over the world has formed a water column soaring to the top. For this ship built entirely with a wooden structure, it is really possible that it will not be able to pass this level. .


    From a distance, Upside Down Mountain does give people a beautiful feeling, but when you get really close to it, it is full of dangers. As long as you are not careful, even a strong person who falls into the water will probably be in danger. It will most likely be cool.


    Chang Nuo stood at the front, touching the shaped faucet extending from the main keel, and then gently ced his hand on it.


    Immediately afterwards, Chang Nuo''s hand touching the main keel began to turn ck instantly.


    The armed domineering force instantly spreads along the arm to the main dragon skeleton, and there are more specific ces to maintain the structural stability of the main dragon skeleton.


    As the ship continued to move forward, Changnuo looked at Barlow who was controlling the rudder and shouted, "Just move forward, don''t worry about the rest."


    Barlow didn''t reply, but the firm look in his eyes said everything.


    He was holding on to the rudder of the ship with both hands, and his eyes were fixed on the ce where the four seas gathered above him. He was now almost in a state of direct struggle.


    As it suddenly rushed to the top of the mountain, the huge National was instantly crushed by the water and made a creaking sound. If it weren''t for the armor protecting the keel, the ship would probably have begun to fall apart at this moment.


    But in the end, they managed to survive without any danger and began to slowly enter the East China Sea.


    Chang Nuo, who felt this scene, subconsciously felt in his heart that when he had moneyter, he would definitely buy a cruise ship from the system space. Not only was this wooden ship too slow, but it was also not useful.


    Just now they were running upwards rapidly, but now they were running downwards rapidly. Everyone on the ship didn''t know what to say.


    Changnuo looked helpless, and Gogoya also realized that his ship seemed a bit big, and the keel on the hull was not made of particrly good materials. But for a rtively poor country like the Tru Kingdom, This ship can be considered to be built with all the efforts of the country.


    When the boat dived rapidly downward along the current, the huge ssh directly caused an impact.


    Fortunately, everyone managed to get through the Upside Down Mountain safely in the end. Chang Nuo couldn''t help but take back his hand and sighed slowly.


    As the aura of armament dissipated, the keel on the ship returned to its original state.


    "Your Majesty, you really scared me to death just now!" Gogoya said excitedly with tears in his eyes.


    It''s not just her who looks like this now. Except for the guards, most of the people behind her have almost the same look and expression.


    "Young boys, there''s a big boating ahead. Get on board..."


    Just as the National Ship sailed into the East China Sea, there were already more than a dozen ships around, and the key point was that the gs hanging on each of them were exactly the same.


    It seems that this group of people''s luck is not very good. They just passed the Upside Down Mountain and encountered arge group of pirates.


    "Your Majesty, he is a pirate..."


    Gogoya said while looking at the dozen ships ahead.


    Moreover, the opponent''s rhythm and shouts ofing to grab things can be heard even from such a distance.


    "Everyone is ready to fight..."


    The guards behind him had begun to shout, and the guns on the ship had begun to point at the pirate ships.


    "Don''t fire, what if the ship is damaged?" Chang Nuo said leisurely.


    Everyone else was already speechless, especially Barlow and the others who had just joined two days ago.


    It was a bit difficult for them to understand what their Majesty, the King, was thinking. Faced with so many pirate ships and so many pirates, he could still have such thoughts?


    "Your Majesty, I understand that I will go and pull the pirate ship back right away."


    One of the guards said respectfully.


    From before, they had understood that as His Majesty the King, he was never willing to let go of the opportunity to make money. The dozen or so pirate ships in front of them could be worth hundreds of millions of beli, no matter how hard they said it. Different As for the previous Barro Pirates'' ship, it was too far from the shore and there was no need to consider it again.


    The key is that the group in front of them is different. They are originally on the East China Sea, and they are not particrly far from Rogge Town where the Pirate King was killed.


    The guards understood and each one showed a smile. Let''s not talk about the problem of their own goods being robbed by others before. At least they can rob the pirates'' money every time theye out, but how is this possible? Of course, you have to grab the boat together to enjoy it.


    Before they have experienced powerful people, at least everything they do now, everyone is full of confidence in their hearts.


    "Be gentle when you go there, don''t damage the ship, and leave all their navigators to me. Our country iscking in this area now!"


    Chang Nuo had a sinister smile on his face. He was already here anyway, so he would naturally take action to deal with the pirates when he encountered them.

 Chapter 14 Demon Pirates

    <h4>Chapter 14 Demon Pirates</h4>


    But before they started to take action, the pirate ships had already begun to move closer quickly. It is estimated that this group of people had the same idea as them, and they did not want to directly shoot the ship to pieces and lose it in the end. The value of this ship.


    So they relied on the crowd, and many pirates were already standing on the deck shaking their heads and shouting.


    When they saw that the distance was getting closer, dozens of guards immediately jumped into the air, stepped on the air using moon steps, and quickly flew in their direction.


    But when the group of pirates saw this scene, they were not surprised as expected. Instead, they calmly began to mobilize their guns to attack.


    Chang Nuo saw all this in his eyes. These pirates were obviously not like the Baro Pirates he had seen before. They looked more like a group of well-trained and battle-experienced people.


    On thergest ship, one of them was wearing a ck robe and a ck hat like a western cowboy. He stood quietly at the front, staring calmly at the group of guards who had flown past.


    Chang Nuo felt that the other party might not be as simple as he thought. The expression on the other party''s face didn''t seem like he was confident because of therge number of people.


    "Have you found all the pirates with bounties that I asked you to find before?" Changnuo asked, looking at Gogoya beside him.


    "We''ve found it, Your Majesty. The one opposite is called the Devil Pirates, and the captain is Camoron, but he should be on the Grand Line. I don''t know why he appears here?" Gogoya reported.


    "Devil? How much is the bounty??"


    Changnuo asked again.


    "Your Majesty, the reward for the Camoron is..." Gogoya said and began to look through the reward order in his hand. After looking for it for a while, he continued, "Your Majesty, the reward for the other party is 50 million beli!"


    Gogoya couldn''t believe what he saw. In this era of great pirates, the bounty of 50 million Baileys was already considered extremely high.


    It''s not like when the protagonist started, his pirates had already exceeded 100 million. In this era, pirates who have exceeded 10 million are almost all at the level of big pirates.


    Chang Nuo looked forward with great interest. He was not in a hurry to take action. Anyway, he was not worried about his guards being easily subdued by the opponent.


    This Camoron can have a bounty of 50 million. Without much thought, you can already guess that the opponent is a Devil Fruit user. However, why did the person who was originally on the Grand Line suddenly appear here?


    With doubts, Chang Nuo still looked ahead calmly. The soldiers who were walking on the air in the sky were all very energetic. Although they had not been close to their ship for a short time, they were not afraid. Can be damaged by some projectiles.


    "Captain, the methods of use of these people are somewhat simr to those of the navy. Could they be figures in the navy?"


    On the pirate ship, a man with a vulgar look and extremely long hair walked out from behind Camoron. He licked his lips and spoke respectfully to Camoron.


    "Let''s take a look first. Judging from their appearance, they should not be the navy, but they probably have something to do with the navy. They are just a bunch of bastards. There is nothing to worry about."


    Kameron showed a disdainful smile, looked at the guards who had been preparing to rush over, and said to the people behind him.


    "I got it Captain."


    The long-haired man showed a sinister smile and stared at the guard flying over, as if he had malicious intentions.


    Simrly, Chang Nuo used his sense of sight to discover something strange in the other party''s ship. There was a very powerful energy body on the pirate ship. It was really difficult to guess the other party''s attitude and purpose ofing to the East China Sea in a short period of time?


    "You guys stay on the boat and I''ll go over and take a look."


    Chang Nuo smiled and then disappeared on the National Ship in an instant.


    Appearing again, Chang Nuo stepped on the water at an extremely fast speed and instantly headed towards the ship where Camolong was.


    But just when he appeared on Camoron''s pirate ship, a huge knife shed directly at him.


    Fortunately, Chang Nuo reacted quickly and jumped twice in an instant to avoid Camo Dragon''s first attack.


    "Snoring, snoring, snoring..., you really didn''t expect that there are still strong people?"


    Camolong stared at Chang Nuo who had just boarded the boat, with a strange smile on his face.


    He was holding a huge long knife in his hand, and judging from the attack power, Chang Nuo felt that the opponent was at least as powerful as a vice admiral.


    "Is it an honor or an honor to be called a strong man by a pirate? The bounty is 50 million beli. This is really a lot of money. I wonder if you are willing to follow me to the Navy Headquarters? Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    "Snoring, snoring, snoring... You are really ridiculous. If you want me to go to the Navy Headquarters, I have to see if you have the strength. If you have the strength, what''s the harm in going with you?"


    Camolong still had a look of disdain on his face, looking at Chang Nuo and continuing to say with a smile.


    "Then let''s wait and see!" Chang Nuo said.


    The two people looked at each other calmly. As for the other personnel on the pirate ship, they were hiding in different ces to watch the game between the two.


    Camolong didn''t have the slightest bit of surprise on his face, he looked very calm, as if he was sure of victory.


    "For many years, no one has dared to challenge me. You are the first one. I have been chasing stronger power on this sea. Then let me see what you mean by waiting and seeing. Like?"


    Kameron said directly with a sinister smile.


    As soon as he finished speaking, the big knife in his hand shed directly at Chang Nuo. The powerful force caused a rtively long gap to open on the deck of the entire ship.


    Although he dodged quickly, Changnuo still felt quite distressed. After all, he felt that the ship should be his own asset. Now that it was destroyed like this, it would definitely shrink a bit.


    The idea is this. Chang Nuo does not underestimate the man in front of him. Although he is rtively powerful, these things are given by the system. Chang Nuo does not have much practical experience. This time can be regarded as a big experience. Chance.


    As Camoron raised the long sword again, Changnuo did not sit still and wait for death. However, he also did not pull out the demon sword Muramasa in his hand. Instead, he wanted to use fists and kicks to subdue the seemingly powerful man in front of him.


    He rushed forward as fast as he could, using the Sixth Navy skill. When Camoron was about to force himself, Chang Nuo shouted loudly, "Finger grab..."


    A finger quickly moved towards the door facing Camo Dragon.


    Feeling such a state, Camolong directly drew his knife to retreat. This most basic attack could only y a tentative role for them.


    Although the finger gun is rtively powerful as a single target attack, it is single-targeted and does not have particrly strong attack conversion attributes.


    As one attack failed to hit the opponent, Changnuo quickly began to retreat, and what followed was that Camolong suddenly shot out countless small spikes.


    Chang Nuo didn''t pay attention and was almost pierced by spikes all over his body.


    And these things are not as simple as imagined. As the spikes pierce his body, Chang Nuo clearly feels that his physical energy is declining, and his eyes have begun to sway.


    "Snort, snore, snore..., since you already know that I have a bounty of 50 million Baileys, why don''t you go and investigate who I am? I am the stinging person of the Devil Fruit Superman series, and I am exuding... The spikes also have a hallucinogenic effect."


    Camolong burst outughing, because now Chang Nuo would probably have a hard time standing up, let alone fighting him.


    Changnuo was also annoyed by his carelessness. He had already guessed that the other party might be a Devil Fruit user, yet he was still so careless.


    This is all due to his seriousck ofbat experience. Sora has a rtively strong strength, but the key is the difference inbat experience.


    This injury perfectly exined his shorings, but even though he was injured, Changnuo still tried hard to persevere, at least not letting himself fall, otherwise, he would definitely have no chance.


    Camolong is indeed a rtively powerful person, but his shorings are also obvious. He can''t find anyone to fight with him for a long time, which makes him a little arrogant and does not put Changnuo at all. Inside the eyes.


    Changnuo used up thest bit of strength in his body and directly pulled out the demon sword Muramasa. A powerful and sharp aura instantly swept the entire sea area.


    "Flying Sword Style��Dragon Nest sh��Bite..."


    Chang Nuo disappeared from everyone''s eyes in an instant, not even leaving a shadow. But the powerful sh that followed almost shattered the entire ship.


    What he wants to do now is not to attack Camo Dragon. After all, Changnuo knows very well that as a Devil Fruit user, ording to his current ability, the opponent cannot be killed in one hit, otherwise it is very likely to meet him. He died on the spot.


    That''s why he chose to destroy the ship directly. After all, under such circumstances, as a Devil Fruit user, the first thing Camolong must do is not to let himself fall into the sea. No matter what, he will definitely choose to go first. retreat.


    In just such a moment, Changnuo jumped into the sea water. The sea water can not only make the Devil Fruit user incapacitated, but also lose the strength to resist. It is also thest step to release the Devil Fruit user''s ability. In a good way.


    Chang Nuo, who jumped into the sea, began to sink slowly from the sea surface, but those sharp spikes on his body. But it slowly disappeared under the corrosion of the sea water. In less than a while, Chang Nuo was spitting out blisters, and then he struggled to swim upstream.


    Fortunately, he hadn''t eaten a devil fruit before, otherwise he might not know what he would have be now.


    Lying down on the nks of the broken ship, Changnuo began to pant continuously. There were many pirates who fell from the ship in the sea water at this moment.


    Camolong stood on another ship and stared at Chang Nuo angrily.


    Even he was a little surprised by the opponent''s attack just now. He didn''t expect that he could unleash such a powerful attack power. It was really underestimated.


    The other guards who were originally attacking the ship have all retreated back. It ispletely useless to continue to entangle at this moment, and there are so many pirates that there is no need to fight head-on.


    More importantly, the opponent''s captain''s strength is not clear yet. Although it is said to be a thorn fruit, no one really knows to what extent it has been developed.


    Chang Nuo regained some of his strength and stood on the wooden board in the water looking at Camolong, a smile slowly began to appear on his lips.


    The other party really taught him a lesson inbat today, and made him understand very clearly that if he wanted to make waves in the future, the prerequisite was that he could understand the other party well enough.


    Although Camolong''s eyes were quite angry, he stood there and did not say anything.


    Back on the National, Changnuo seemed to have no intention of entangled with the other party anymore. Gogoya, who was standing next to him, was staring at his Majesty the King with a worried look on his face.


    "ready to go����"


    Chang Nuo directly and calmly ordered the people next to him.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Gogoya replied worriedly, and then began to signal Barlow to set sail.


    Barrow stood at the bow of the ship, turned around and shouted to the people behind him, "Raise the sails and set sail..."


    As the words fell, everyone began to prepare for departure in a hurry.


    The group of pirates on Camoron''s side seemed to understand it tacitly, and no one attacked again.


    Especially Kameron, he now knows very well how much strength the opponent still has, but he has not shown it at all now. Just thest blow has shown such huge power, let alone that he has recovered now. For Chang Nuo, who has a good mind and a little physical strength.


    He didn''t want to take a group of people like him to take risks. Although the other party''s ship was rtivelyrge, it didn''t seem to have many valuable items. Camolong just treated his ship as a lesson and didn''t go there again. Confused about this incident.


    "Your Majesty, are you okay?"


    Gogoya looked at Changnuo worriedly and asked.


    Seeing that the distance between him and the pirates was getting farther and farther, Chang Nuo finally couldn''t hold it back and passed out directly on the deck.


    Although the sea water has weakened the attack of Camorosaurus, the toxins left in the body are still there. It has remained in its original state just now, and it is nothing more than holding on.


    Now at least they don''t have to worry about this situation anymore. The pirates didn''t chase them, which surprised them all.


    But what they didn''t know was that the Demon Pirates of Camoron didn''t care about the three melons and two dates on their ship, but instead cared more about what was hidden under the water where they were.


    If it weren''t for the things buried underneath, Camolong probably wouldn''t have let everyone on board the National go.

 Chapter 15 The Beginning and End of Rogge Town

    <h4>Chapter 15 The Beginning and End of Rogge Town</h4>


    Chang Nuo''s sudden fainting caused everyone on the ship to panic, and Gogoya froze in ce, daring not to move.


    The two parties had been fighting for only a short time, but His Majesty the King had already been so seriously injured. Others began to sigh that the strength of the Camoron was indeed very powerful.


    When he woke up again, Chang Nuo was almost fine. Besides, no matter what the situation, Chang Nuo would only be seriously injured at most, and he would definitely not die. After all, there was still a bug in the system.


    Chang Nuo slowly opened his eyes and looked at the blue sky and white clouds above his head, and the huge ships floating in the wind on the sea.


    "I was careless..."


    Chang Nuo continued to lie on the spot, and these words suddenly came to his mind.


    After all, he was indeed careless this time. For such a simple reason, he had to make himself covered in scars in order to gain experience.


    But after experiencing this incident, Chang Nuo finally understood one thing. When he has money next time, he will first buy himselfbat experience points. At least no matter what the situation, he will not be so passive and passive. main idea.


    Maybe this situation will happen again next time, or some special circumstances may happen due to my carelessness.


    The key is that now he has no expenses, and only the tens of millions of Baileys left on the ship are of no use to the system except to buy some food.


    "Your Majesty, you are finally awake..."


    Gogoya squatted next to Changnuo''s reclining chair and shouted with tears streaming down his face.


    Ever since Chang Nuo began to fall intoa, Gogoya had been standing by him almost all the time, not daring to blink, for fear that something would happen to his Majesty the King. If that happened, he would not be allowed to be disturbed by anyone else when he returned to the kingdom. It was torn into pieces.


    "What''s wrong? How long have I been unconscious?" Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    "Your Majesty, you slept for two days this time. Gogoya was scared to death!"


    Seeing Gogoya crying, Changnuo smiled with relief, and then began tofort him and said, "Don''t worry, I''ll be fine."


    "Is everything going to be okay? After you passed out, your whole body started to turn green. Even the ship''s doctor felt that you were hopeless!"


    Chang Nuo''sfort was a bit better. After hearing Chang Nuo''sforting words, Gogoya cried even harder.


    The other guards standing behind all had gloomy expressions on their faces, fearing that something might happen to their King, and the self-me on their faces was clearly reflected.


    "I''m fine, don''t worry." Chang Nuo sat up and said, then looked around and asked Gogoya, "Where are you now?"


    "Ah? Let me ask!"


    Gogoya was obviously stunned, and then started walking in the direction of Barlow.


    Looking at this stupid Gogoya, Changnuo closed his eyes helplessly. He really couldn''t imagine how he left the shipping matter to such a woman in the first ce.


    After Gogoya ran to ask Barlow, he quickly ran back, and then said to Chang Nuo, "Your Majesty, we should be almost at Rogge Town now!"


    "Okay, I get it!"


    Chang Nuo was still thinking in his heart at this moment, why did Camolong let these people go, and why did such a powerful man stay in the East China Sea upside down mountain?


    After other people on the ship saw that Chang Nuo had woken up, those who were originally members of the Barro Pirates now began to show off their free style, and even roped in the National Guard belonging to Chang Nuo. The guards shouted wildly together and yed and drank.


    Although they were not pirates, Chang Nuo did not stop them. After all, this method was a good way to vent the boring life on this ship.


    The only serious person on the ship so far is probably Barlow. He is the navigator on the ship and needs to control the course and direction of the entire ship. Although it can move forward automatically depending on the wind, there is a slight error on the sea, so the distance Your own destination, the distance of error may be very far.


    The key is that there is no so-called navigation here. If you miss it, you won''t know where it went.


    Almost two hourster, Gogoya stood on the deck and shouted, "We''re here..."


    Chang Nuoy on the recliner and opened his eyes slightly. The ind in front of him was clearly disyed in front of everyone.


    Those who had been drinking immediately stopped the lively atmosphere. They had been on the ship for seven or eight days, and now they suddenly sawnd, and they were really ufortable.


    The port of Rogge Town has now docked an unknown number of ships, including merchant ships and, of course, more pirate ships.


    They were almost parked side by side, and the pirate gs on them could be seen from a distance.


    Although there are rtively few pirates in the East China Sea, Rogge Town is their only andst supply station when preparing to enter the Grand Line.


    No matter how many pirates appear on this ind, it is not an exaggeration. The era of great pirates has already quietly arrived, and the number of pirates in the four seas has even exceeded the number of navies.


    The pirates whoe here are almost tacitly understood by every pirate group. No one will choose to directly fight or have conflicts here. Of course, there are some exceptions.


    "Your Majesty, can I go for a walk after we get ashore?" Gogoya asked cautiously.


    "No problem, but don''t run around. People like you who have no strength. There are too many pirates here, and they will be kidnapped by whichever pirate group you choose."


    Chang Nuo said calmly that since he came here, he definitely wanted to take a walk, but for Gogoya, Chang Nuo''s words instantly made her nervous again.


    It��s not that she doesn��t understand anything. After all, she has seen so many pirate ships on the sea. What kind of situation might it be like in Rogge Town?


    "Then let''s go with you..."


    Gogoya said softly.


    "Notify everyone that some of them will stay on the ship, while others will go down to replenish the supplies needed on the ship." Chang Nuo said.


    "Okay, Your Majesty..."


    Although many of them are not interested in the Pirate King, or even have no interest at all, since they have arrived in Rogge Town, everyone still wants to see the ce where the Pirate King was executed, and what the length of the Pirate King is. What does it look like?


    One person leading an entire generation of men does make people have some expectations, otherwise they would not have turned around ande to this hellish ce.


    Rogge Town does not look particrly big from the outside, and it is just a small ind, nothing more than a military base of the Navy here.


    But the difference is that the guards in Rogge Town are veryx, at least for now.


    There are so many pirate ships outside, not to mention the ind, but the navy here has actually done nothing, which is enough to show how bad the security in Rogge Town is!


    As the 100-meter-long ship docked at the port, it immediately attracted countless people to watch.


    Most of them are almost pirates. Just looking at their eyes, you can already tell how much this group of people desires this ship.


    Most of the pirate ships docked here are almost only a dozen meters long, and even a slightlyrger wind wave can directly overturn them. For the country that suddenly arrived and was nearly 100 meters long, it was considered This is thergest ship that Rogge Town has ever received.


    The group of people standing at the edge of the port of Rogge Town all hadplicated thoughts in their hearts.


    "Captain, this ship is quite nice, and it doesn''t look like a pirate ship. Should we rece our ship?"


    A tall and thick-looking man at the edge of the port stared at the National with a confident face and said to the man next to him.


    "Don''t cause trouble here for now, otherwise it will be bad if we attract the navy. After hees out, we will wait outside."


    The so-called captain showed a sinister smile and said to this tall and thick man.


    In fact, there are many people who have this idea. For these pirates, which one is willing to give up the meat that has already reached their mouth?


    As the National slowly docked, the huge size of the ship was revealed to everyone.


    Just after docking, the ship had begunying decks to connect to the edge of the port.


    Chang Nuo slowly walked down with a group of people. Facing so many pirates at the port, he didn''t have any so-called fear.


    "Brother, your ship looks pretty good. Do you want to share it with us brothers?"


    As soon as Changnuo got off the boat and was about to walk forward, a middle-aged man who looked rather short-sighted came out. He was holding a long knife in his hand and shaking it constantly, as if to highlight his position. .


    "Ask, do they all have ideas in this regard?"


    Chang Nuo tilted his head and said to the guard captain behind him.


    Before disembarking, these guards had already begun to wear uniform bluebat uniforms, making everyone look energetic.


    These clothes are all fabrics made by the mechanical spinning machine that Changnuo got from the system space. They are customized ording to the measurements. At least from the appearance, they are quite domineering.


    After receiving Chang Nuo''s order, the guard captain looked fiercely and looked directly at the pirates around him and asked loudly in a bad tone, "Anyone who has the same idea as him cane forward. At least we can discuss it. How about Distribution issue?��


    "Haha..., we still like your attitude.


    have a thought? It is estimated that the purpose of the people here is the same. Your ship is too eye-catching and is not suitable for your rtively low-key behavior. It is better to leave it to the elders to take charge of it for you. "


    Someone in the crowd suddenly said such words, which immediately caused a roar ofughter among the crowd of at least a thousand pirates.


    "Captain Haruya, are they all nning toe over and share the news?" Changnuo asked, tilting his head.


    "Your Majesty, these people do seem to have this intention!" Zhiya said with a grin.


    Suddenly, another scene seemed to appear in Chang Nuo''s mind, and a sinister smile appeared on his face. He stopped restricting the guards'' actions and began to ignore the matter.


    "Then you all stay here and entertain us well. Those pirate ships are quite nice. When the timees, we can remove the sails and auction them on the spot. This will save us the trouble of looking for a ce." Chang Nuo thought for a moment and smiled. said.


    Now that this group of people have gone out to sea and want to make money without breaking thew, robbing pirates is probably a good way out.


    Zhiye, the captain of the guard, immediately understood what Chang Nuo meant. After all, he had been following him for so long. He also knew very well that he, as the King, did not understand the thoughts of His Majesty the King too clearly.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he began to move forward, with Gogoya following behind. As for the king''s guards, almost all of them stayed where they were.


    Not far after walking out, the crackling sounds of fighting began toe from behind.


    Although the pirates are numerous in number, their overallbat effectiveness is far inferior to those of Camoron.


    "Your Majesty, Rogge Town is a naval station. Is this really okay for us to do?" Gogoya asked.


    "What is there to worry about? We are not pirates, let alone the navy. This is nothing more than a conflict between a country and pirates. The navy wants this, so how could it say anything else?" Changnuo smiled. said.


    "So that''s it..."


    Gogoya finally began to feel relieved.


    Chang Nuo would not know at all that this conflict with the pirates would happen in the near future, and the entire navy headquarters would be very aware of what happened.


    But how can he care about these things now? The most important thing is making money.


    Robbing pirates is much faster than doing business. There are still many pirates on the entire sea, and some pirates even have as much money as the entire country.


    And in this process, not only will you be loved by the people, but you will also not cause or vite other people''s bottom lines.


    At best, he is simr to a pirate hunter. It would be nice to catch a few pirates for fun.


    The streets in Rogge Town are not particrly wide, but themerce on both sides looks very prosperous. Pirates are indeed hateful in some aspects, but for a ce like Rogge Town with a naval garrison, they No matter what you do, you will almost always pay the corresponding funds.


    "You first apany the others to purchase the supplies needed on the ship. There is almost no need to worry about safety here. I will go to the center of Rogge Town to have a look, and then we will meet on the ship."


    Changnuo looked at Gogoya and said.


    "But Your Majesty, didn''t you say there are many pirates here?" Gogoya asked.


    "Don''t worry now. Captain Haruya is cleaning up pirates at the port. Those who stay in Rogge Town will naturally get the news and go there, so don''t worry too much about this kind of thing now."


    "All right����"


    Gogoya had already heard the meaning of what the other party said, which was to get rid of his people and go to other ces.


    She didn''t ask too much about other things, and then followed Barlow and started walking in other directions.

 Chapter 16 The revolutionary army appears

    <h4>Chapter 16 The revolutionary army appears</h4>


    Chang Nuo stood there, watching Gogoya and his party walking further and further away, but his face showed extreme calm.


    "I''ve been following you all this way, shouldn''t Ie out and meet you?"


    Chang Nuo was still looking at the direction in which Gogoya and his party were leaving, but a voice suddenly sounded.


    He probably didn''t even know who he wasmunicating with, but he still said it anyway.


    In a dark backside of a house, not long after Chang Nuo finished speaking, a man wearing a cloak and a shoe sole-shaped tattoo on his face came out.


    The man who walked out had a firm look in his eyes and gave people a sense of calm and self-power.


    After the powerful momentum is disyed, even Chang Nuo can detect a different experience.


    "You are indeed a young hero. Would you like to find a ce to chat?"


    The visitor spoke directly, and Chang Nuo just smiled and did not respond to the other party''s words, but he did not object at the same time.


    The two of them walked side by side like this, without anyone saying a word. Chang Nuo knew very well what kind of role the man walking next to him was, and what kind of identity and status he had now.


    It didn''t take long for the two of them to reach the beach directly. With the sound of the water hitting the rocks on the shore, the two of them stood on the edge at the same time.


    "King of the Kingdom of Tru, I don''t know why you came to this ce in the East China Sea?"


    The man looked at Chang Nuo without any expression and asked in a very calm voice.


    But at this time, Chang Nuo smiled directly and started to ask the same question, "Didn''t the leader of the revolutionary army alsoe here? Of course, I don''t know if our purpose is the same. I just came here to take a look at the excitement. I don��t know what your n is?��


    When the other party heard Chang Nuo speaking, his expression was stunned for a moment, and then turned calm. He was very curious and also started to be on guard. Looking at Chang Nuo, he asked in surprise, "You actually know my identity?"


    "I know, I must know this kind of thing, and I know far more than you think. But I didn''t expect that I would see you on such an asion and time, which is really surprising. "Chang Nuo said.


    Facing this person, although Chang Nuo was a little surprised, he was not too surprised.


    Because the person standing in front of him now was Long, the leader of the revolutionary army. After seeing the tattoo of the broken shoe print on the other person''s face, Chang Nuo already knew the other person''s identity.


    After all, in the entire pirate world, he is the only person with such a tattoo on his face.


    Chang Nuo really didn''t expect that in such a small ce as Rogge Town, he would meet Long, the famous leader of the revolutionary army in the future. The surprise was definitely a bit unexpected.


    But simrly, Chang Nuo can also say with certainty that the current dragon is definitely not as powerful as it will be when the official plot develops in the future.


    But even so, the opponent''s strength still cannot be underestimated.


    Long looked at the sea calmly,pletely confused about the little guy standing in front of him.


    For the outside world, let alone knowing about himself, even the Revolutionary Army is an organization that only knows very few people now.


    But the young man in front of him actually told the truth and even knew his identity!


    "King Tru, what do you think of the revolutionary army?" Long asked calmly.


    "Generally, an organization can''t achieve anything big. It talks about ideals, but it''s just based on the pain of others!"


    Chang Nuo began to evaluate the organizational nature of the revolutionary army based on what he knewter.


    But the facts are almost the same as what he said. After all, the Revolutionary Army is an organization that others don''t know much about, but as Chang Nuo, who has the Eye of God, these things are really not worth mentioning.


    Even in many cases, the revolutionary army will use all avable human resources,pletely regardless of the consequences.


    ��King Tru, do you think it��s really okay to say these words in front of me?


    The revolutionary army has its mission. Now the world is dominated by pirates and the navy has nothing to do, so I want to build one that can allow everyone to live in a world without conflict! "


    Long said affectionately, trying to use his words to influence Chang Nuo.


    "How long has it been since you visited our country? The Tru Kingdom is not what you think. I have no objection to the revolutionary army.


    Likewise, I have no interest in joining your revolutionary army. Since you have been following me from the direction of Upturned Mountain until now, is it possible that you just want to chat with me? "


    Chang Nuoughed directly and asked.


    "If possible, I hope your country can also be an ideal ce for our revolutionary army! King Tru."


    When Chang Nuo heard this, he couldn''tugh even if he wanted to. He waspletely speechless. Long''s thoughts were simply too naive and innocent.


    But just for such a thing, Changnuo has no feeling at all, let alone any ideas, and now he has almost no exnation.


    "Mr. Long, I think you can still develop your power in the East China Sea and the North Sea. As for the barrennd in the South China Sea, you don''t need to consider it."


    Chang Nuo refused without even thinking about it.


    However, Long was not angry, but stared curiously at the young man in front of him.


    At the age of fifteen or sixteen, people already feel that this little guy is very extraordinary. If he can really win over his camp in the future, it will definitely be a big help.


    Chang Nuo didn''t want to talk to this guy anymore, he just took one more look at him, then turned around and started to leave.


    After he disappeared around the corner of the street, Long was still standing there, but now there were several more people around him.


    "Why did you just let this little boy go?"


    A man appeared with a huge face that waspletely out of proportion with his body. In other words, he couldn''t be called a man at all.


    If Chang Nuo was still here, he would definitely be able to recognize who this person is at a nce.


    The King of the Human Demon Kingdom, Ambrio Ivankov, is also a person with Devil Fruit abilities, and his strength cannot be underestimated.


    At the same time, everyone else standing next to him can be regarded as a hero of the revolutionary army so far, and they will also be resounding in the future.


    The few people standing here were all staring at Long. After all, they also discovered Chang Nuo identally. After a little investigation, they found out that the other party was actually the king of the Tru Kingdom in the South China Sea.


    But a few people were still very surprised that a king could have such strength.


    Long didn''t rush to answer Ivankov''s words, and looked at the rough sea quietly.


    After a while, he began to say calmly, "We can''t keep each other!"


    As soon as Long said these words, several other people also showed a look of astonishment. Not to mention how powerful they are, just speaking of Long''s strength, he can already surpass countless people in the entire pirate world, let alone target. to a child.


    At fifteen or sixteen years old, Chang Nuo was indeed a man as big as a child to them. Even if he had some strength, to what extent could he reach it?


    After Chang Nuo left Long''s side, he was still thinking about the tattoo on Long''s face. Although they only chatted for a few words, he could still feel the aura emanating from Long''s body.


    A person is walking on the streets of Rogge Town. Because the fight between the guards and pirates at the port has attracted almost half of the people in Rogge Town to watch, so the streets are almost deserted at the moment. Someone was walking back and forth.


    Rogge Town can be said to be small and pitiful. Without walking very far, they already saw the execution tform where the Pirate King was executed in Chang Nuo''s memory.


    A high tform made purely from an iron frame seemed to be only five or six meters high. At most, there were only two or three people standing on it, and a staircase spiraled up to it.


    In front of the execution tform was the only square in Roger Town. Chang Nuo stood in the center of the square, looking directly at the execution tform, as if he had seen the scene before Roger''s death.


    The sky is bright and clear now, but for Chang Nuo, it seems as if he can feel the gusts of dark wind.


    The main reason why Roger Town is called the ce of beginning and end is because Roger started here and finally died here. As a pirate king, he left an immortal myth to the world during his decades of career.


    As long as Chang Nuo stood alone in the center of the square, there were two people standing on the roof of the third floor not far away observing.


    Wearing the uniforms of naval justice, they stared intently at the only figure standing in the square.


    At this moment, Chang Nuo looked a little thin, but his expression was still very natural.


    "Colonel Kakuku, King Tru has caused so many things here, should we just ignore it?"


    One of the two marines standing on the high tform said.


    "Yulu, how many times have I told you that we should take care of those who should be in charge of us, and don''t ask about those who should not be in charge of us. Pirates have flooded Rogge Town in recent years. Although this is the navy''s base in the East China Sea, the key point is We are seriously short of troops. How can we fight against those pirates if we only rely on us? Since someone is willing toe forward, let them do it. "


    Colonel Kakuku, who was standing in front and leaning against the fence, said with an indifferent expression.


    He is now also full of curiosity about Chang Nuo standing in front.


    A king from a country located in the South China Sea would actually choose to join in the fun ande to the East China Sea to watch the execution tform of the Pirate King! This kind of thing is really surprising.


    This is really the only situation that has happened since the death of the Pirate King!


    "Colonel Kakuku, do you think King Tru has an ulterior motive? Should we go and investigate?"


    Yulu asked. He really wanted to test Changnuo''s situation. After all, Rogge Town was his home ground.


    "If you have that idea, just go by yourself! I don''t have so much time now. Instead of being so tired, I might as well go back and have a good rest. It''s rare that someone will help us clean up the pirates this time, so it''s a pleasure to rx !��


    Colonel Kakuku didn''t pay attention to what Yulu said at all. Although Jano was not the king of the country that joined the World Government, the key person was also a king. How could they investigate just because they said they could?


    After finishing speaking, Kakuku had no intention of staying here any longer, and prepared to return to the room with a leisurely expression. He seemed not to care at all about what was happening outside.


    Countless people are already lying on the spot at the port, and each of these guards holds a stack of wanted posters in their hands, tying up all the pirates who currently have bounties on them. .


    And as long as they determine which person has the reward amount, they will directly put the reward order on that person''s head or body.


    Anyway, it was convenient to stay here. By the end, the guards had begun to divide into several teams, and many of the remaining personnel on the ship also began to participate.


    Some of them went directly to the pirate ship to search. They looked like real pirates. Whenever they encountered something valuable, no one in this group could put it down.


    And for these dozen pirate ships, the amount of gold, silver and jewelry that can be collected is really not a small amount.


    In addition, those lying on the ground have abined bounty amount of tens of millions. Therefore, following this wave of His Majesty the King, for this group of people, not only can they get an improvement in strength, but more importantly, they can Increase your opponent''s actualbat experience.


    There really isn''t much to see in Rogge Town. The ce looks just average now. Although there are a lot of things sold, most of them are basically supplies for the sea.


    This town has almost relied on pirates for its development until now. Judging from the luxurious architectural style around the square, it has proved everything.


    After staying in the square for about half an hour, Changnuo started to move. After all, he had been watching for long enough. He felt that he was a man who had talked to Roger, the Pirate King.


    Although the other party is dead, the content of the conversation is a spiritual connection.


    If it were before, the entire square would have been the ce with the highest concentration of people, but now it was empty. People were standing everywhere at the port.


    They were all quietly observing the National and everything the guards on it did. Some were cheering and others were sad.


    After the Thousand-Handed Pirates were finally caught by those with bounties on their bodies, no one else dared to say a word, let alone anyone who dared to rush forward and challenge them again.


    At least fifty or sixty people were now tied up in a group, escorted by five or six guards, and started walking towards the front.


    The people from Rogge Town who were watching the excitement and finding it too troublesome were also following behind, wanting to see the excitement.


    It is true that since the execution of Pirate King Roger here, although the entire Rogge Town has attracted many pirates, there has never been such arge-scale fighting incident as now.

 Chapter 17 Domineering and Domineering

    <h4>Chapter 17 Domineering and Domineering</h4>


    The guards are doing their own thing, and the Toru Kingdom now looks like a real pirate.


    As for Chang Nuo, after leaving the execution tform in the Central Square, he started touring the entire Rogge Town.


    It is indeed quite prosperous here. Compared to my own country, even the Royal City is not so prosperous.


    The advantages are obvious, but so are the disadvantages. After all, this ce is too small and has almost nothing to see.


    But just like this, Chang Nuo suddenly thought that the original protagonist was in the East China Sea. If he went over to take a look now, it should be okay?


    Anyway, we have already reached this position. If we go there, it won��t take much effort.


    But how can things be so good?


    These people have just left the country for only seven days.


    Just when Chang Nuo had the idea of ??going to see the protagonist, the sound of "porlu porphyr porphyr..." came from his arms.


    When Chang Nuo took out the thing in his arms, it was a thing that looked like a snail with a crown on its head.


    This is Changnuo''s exclusive phone bug. As a small creature that was cultivated together, from birth, the snail-shaped phone bug canmunicate no matter how far apart it is, almost simr to the function of a mobile phone.


    Chang Nuo pressed a small bulge on the outer shell of the phone, and heard a "hup..." and a voiceing from the other side.


    "Your Majesty, are you His Majesty the King? I am Junhe, the head of the guard Junhe..."


    Junhe''s voice came from the other side, with a worried look on his face, and the phone bug also imitated the other side''s expression.


    Changnuo didn''t seem to realize anything yet, and said in a calm tone, "It''s me, Junhe, what''s going on here?"


    "It seems that it is really His Majesty the King. I have important things to report to you..."


    "Speak slowly, you are already the captain of the king''s guard. Can you not be so panicked when something happens?" Chang Nuo said with a frown.


    There is no need to say more now, Chang Nuo has already felt that something must have happened to the kingdom, but he is not sure yet what it is.


    Junhe tried to calm himself down, and the phone bug also took a deep breath.


    "Your Majesty, the Royal Kingdom hasunched an attack on the Tru Kingdom, and the other party has invited pirates to participate. The country is currently unable to support it." Junhe said as calmly as possible.


    "Investigate clearly why the Royal Kingdom attacked?"


    "Your Majesty, the matter has been investigated. The main reason is that our kingdom has developed rtively smoothly in the past two years, so this situation has urred. In addition, the pirates invited by the Roja Kingdom now have many devil fruit ability users. They Indiscriminate attacks on the kingdom have even begun.��


    Junhe still said eagerly.


    "How far have wee now?"


    "Your Majesty, the Royal Kingdom is still operating normally, and it is blocked by our army at the border. However, the pirates are different. They have started in various ces. From yesterday to now, they have caused us huge losses." Junhe said .


    Chang Nuo listened, and then tried to pretend to be calm and said, "Dy them for a few more days..."


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    After hanging up the phone, Chang Nuo''s eyes were red with anger and he no longer had any emotion at all.


    He stood there, his whole body already bing extremely angry.


    Then he picked up another phone, and when the call was connected, Changnuo said in a cold voice, "Arrange everyone to get on the boat, let''s leave as soon as possible!"


    Just after saying this, he hung up the phone, then turned around and started heading towards the port.


    But at this time, the guards had already begun to escort the pirates with the reward amount, and set off towards the naval base. With the issuance of this order, they seemed to realize that something was wrong, and they did not even want the reward amount, and directly took them away. The earth is bound there.


    When Chang Nuo arrived at the port, there were still quite a lot of people gathered here. Not to mention the pirates, there were already countless people from the aborigines of Rogge Town who came to watch the fun.


    Walking to the edge of the port, Changnuo quickly arrived on the ship without any pause. However, the procurement and personnel, including Gogoya, also rushed back to the ship as soon as possible.


    Although they don''t know what happened, considering such an emergency, something special and abnormal must have happened.


    "What happened to your Majesty?"


    Gogoya asked in a panic.


    "The Kingdom of Tru was attacked just after I left for two days!" Changnuo said angrily.


    The hands ced on the railing have crushed the wooden railing to pieces.


    Gogoya knew the seriousness of the situation as soon as he heard it, and ran directly to Barlow without caring about anything else, shouting anxiously, "Barlow, hurry up and set sail..."


    Everyone else was still in a state of confusion. They didn''t know what happened, whether there were bigger piratesing, or because of something else. But now they could only follow the instructions and set off quickly.


    When I came to this Rogge town, I didn��t even study it carefully and carefully, but now I was already so anxious to set off.


    If they had known this was the case, they wouldn''t have taken another step in this direction?


    As the sails fell, the National had begun to travel slowly, and gradually disappeared on the sea level in the eyes of everyone''s doubts.


    None of the pirates who had been captured before were able to escape in the following time, and all of them had been captured by the base adjutant and his men.


    So far, what was originally a good trip in Rogge Town ended in a farce.


    Chang Nuo didn''t have the time to manage other matters, so he directly ordered the ship to speed up and cross the upside down mountain.


    It took them two days to reach Rogge Town from upside down mountain, but now they don''t even need a day. After all, Rogge Town is almost the closest stop to upside down mountain.


    However, after returning this time, they were a little surprised that Camoron and his pirate group were still here. They did not leave, but they seemed to be dragging something between the several ships!


    And what is certain is that the drag of this thing is rtively huge. At the same time, there are several pirate ships vignt about the surrounding situation to prevent any unexpected situations from happening.


    Chang Nuo has no intention of fighting with these people now, but it is no longer a question of whether he thinks about this thing, but whether the other party is willing to let them pass.


    The moment the National was not close to the pirates, the Devil Pirates'' artillery fire began to spray intensively towards the National.


    The guards on the ship had to go out again to prepare for the battle.


    Everyone was greeting the cannonballs in mid-air, or kicking them away one by one.


    However, as he got closer and closer, the moment Chang Nuodang saw Camolong, his whole body seemed to glow like a demon, and his voice was cold and gloomy as he shouted, "Camolong, I am not in the mood to be here with you today." Make trouble, I don��t care what you do, but I want to cross the Upside Down Mountain now, if your pirate group dares to stop me again, then don��t me me for being rude!"


    "Snoring, snoring, snoring... I really didn''t expect that this guy like you would dare toe here. Now that we have got our things, do you think we will..."


    Before Kamolong finished speaking, Changnuo, who was in a bad mood, immediately drew out the demon sword Muramasa, and the powerful evil aura seemed to directly devour everyone.


    Although Camolong had seen the world before, he was still a little surprised when faced with this kind of sword power. For a fifteen or sixteen year old boy, it was impressive to be able to disy such strength.


    "I didn''t expect you to have such a good sword in your hand. It seems that you are also a swordsman, but it would be nice to leave this thing to me for safekeeping!"


    Kameron had a sinister smile on his face, as if he had already made up his mind.


    With the confidence of winning for the first time, Camolong naturally had nothing nice to say to Chang Nuo. The most important thing is that he has now got what he wants, and he doesn''t have to worry about time at all.


    So many people in the Demon Pirates were all staring at the National Ship, their eyes full of ridicule, and theughter and curses were endless.


    Chang Nuo didn''t want to talk nonsense at all. He nned to use all his strength directly and never give the other party any chance again.


    The armed domineering energy spread directly from the hands to the whole body, and the whole body was like ck steel. Until this moment, Camolong was a little scared.


    Other people on the ship may not know what domineering means, but Camolong simply doesn''t want it.


    What surprised them was not just this. Changnuo jumped directly to the pirate ship where Camoron was. When the other pirates were about to rush over, Changnuo just made a look, and the entire Demon Pirates group waspletely destroyed. members, most of them fainted directly to the ground.


    "Overlord color!!!"


    Camoron was now extremely shocked. If he could go back to two minutes ago, he would never dare to stop Chang Nuo again.


    If a person can use his domineering power to such an extent, what else can he do if he can''t surprise people?


    Camolong already has some regrets, but now he can only bite the bullet.


    I don��t know how many people there are in the entire Demon Pirates, but now there are only about a dozen people who can stand up or move.


    However, when these dozen people faced the guards on the King, almost all of them had no ability to resist.


    "Camoron, you hurt me because of your carelessness before. Now I want to know, what else can you do?" Chang Nuo said in a cold voice.


    On this blue sea, there is no wind at the moment, but it can make Camolong feel like falling into an ice cer.


    "Don''t think that just because you are domineering is a big deal, the key is your ability!" Cameroon said.


    "Then you can wait and see to your heart''s content now. Since the previous battle is not over, I don''t care if I waste some more time and let you have a good experience!"


    Chang Nuo said with red eyes, he looked like a real devil at this moment.


    However, on board the National, Gogoya began to hurriedly give instructions: "What are you still watching? His Majesty the King personally stepped forward to fight and bring up a portion of all the fruit varieties prepared in the cabin!"


    There are no guards on the ship at the moment. They don''t know what happened? Why is it so difficult to bring out fruits and sacrifice them?


    Gogoya didn''t exin much, but since she had given the order, someone would definitely do what he said.


    Changnuo didn''t show any mercy this time, and kept turning on the Haki of Knowledge, sensing Camolong''s every move from beginning to end.


    Camolong also wanted to use the long knife in his hand to cover up his demonic abilities as before, so as to achieve the effect of killing him with one blow.


    But how could it go as he wished this time?


    When Chang Nuo came up, he held Muramasa across his chest. After gathering his momentum, he softly shouted, "Draw your sword and kill..."


    As soon as the voice fell, a horizontal de pierced through directly. Even though Camolong was careful, arge part of the brim of his hat was cut off.


    "Prickly Fruit - Thousand Pine Needles..."


    Camolong instantly used his Devil Fruit ability. From his palm, in just an instant, it shot out like thousands of silver needles, and the prating power of each one directly prated the hull.


    However, he didn''t just do this action once, but under the circumstances, Chang Nuo was able toplete all evasive abilities in an instant.


    "We don''t need to look at it. His Majesty the King''s strength is beyond our imagination at all, and that Camolong is really powerful and terrifying. He can use the Devil Fruit ability so well. Now seize the time to be yourself." things.


    The Demon Pirates have been here for so many days, so there must be some big treasure. His Majesty the King is anxious to finish the matter and transport it to the National, and we will talk about the rest when we go back..."


    Chief of the National Guard also started shouting to other guards.


    Anyway, there is no one who is awake on the ship. Since they are all unconscious, and he cannot intervene in the battle of his own king, instead of watching here, it is better to take advantage of this time to take away everything that can be taken away.


    There are more than a dozen pirate ships here, and even a search might take a while. But when the first pirate ship started searching, one of them screamed.


    "Captain Haruya, there are a lot of good things here!"


    A guard shouted excitedly!


    Zhiya ran down quickly with two or three people, and the scene in front of them really surprised them.


    The various gold and silver jewelry piled up throughout the cabin instantly made their eyes start to light up.


    There was at least a billion beli worth of treasure on this ship. More than a dozen people were very excited, and they had even started to pack it up.

 Chapter 18 Superman Space Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 18 Superman Space Devil Fruit</h4>


    The National is still quite far away from these dozen pirate ships, but these pirate ships are almost all connected together. While they are fighting over there, they have already started looting here.


    In less than half an hour, dozens of guards hadpleted collecting all the treasures.


    "Captain of the guard, there is a huge log about a hundred meters long behind their boats. Should we also pull it back together?"


    One of the guards ran up to Haruya and said.


    Zhiya has actually discovered it, but they can''t transport that thing back at all now. If they still have time, they should be able to get this kind of thing back slowly, but the main problem now is that these people don''t have time.


    "Pack up all the treasures and take them away. As for the tree, everyone should leave it alone. We don''t have time to deal with these things." Zhiya shouted.


    However, at this time, Chang Nuo was still fighting fiercely with Camo Dragon. Chang Nuo had already been able to defeat Camo Dragon, but he did not do that. Instead, he acquiesced in what his guards did.


    After all the guards carried all the treasures back to the ship, Changnuo asked in a calm voice, "Camoron, do you want to fight again? I don''t have that much time to y with you now. If you don''t let go, take over." When Ie down, I can only take your 50 million beli head back!"


    Camolong was somewhat out of breath. He had no idea that the little guy in front of him, whom he hadn''t seen for just two days, would actually be so powerful now?


    Of course, he also saw the other party plundering the treasure on his ship, but what could he do?


    "Let''s go! If we meet again next time, I will definitely kill you!"


    Camolong said the most cowardly words in the most ferocious tone, and Changnuo didn''t care about it. He had already wasted half an hour here, and he couldn''t think of staying any longer.


    As soon as Changnuo left, Camoron immediately sat down on the deck of the ship, and big beads of sweat began to flow down his forehead.


    Is it true that Chang Nuo��s Sixth Navy skill can��t deal with Camoron? But the sword skills of Feitian Yujian style can directly kill the opponent.


    Changnuo didn''t want to push Camolong to death. Otherwise, if he chose to die together in the end, he might be fine, but others on the National Ship would not know what would happen to him!


    No one understands the ultimate power of the Devil Fruit. Changnuo doesn''t dare to gamble on it, so he can just take the other person''s money away.


    Camolong just watched the people on the National Ship disappear on the Upside Down Mountain, and he had no personal ability to stop them.


    As soon as they climbed the Upside Down Mountain, Gogoya couldn''t wait to ask, "Your Majesty, why do you want to keep Camolong?"


    "We don''t have time to target so many people now. The most important thing is that I don''t want the navy and the world government to pay attention to us!" Changnuo said.


    For a big pirate like Camoron, if he dies, it will definitely attract the attention of other pirates, as well as the attention of the world government and the navy.


    Let alone the fact that our country is still in its infancy and has not even grown its hair yet, how can we fight with others?


    Gogoya seemed to understand this truth for a moment. No matter what kind of thing he did, the final oue would be to keep a low profile first.


    Changnuo has already understood this truth. He knows better than anyone what kind of situation there is in the world of One Piece.


    If he was asked to abandon a country and be a pirate, Changnuo might really be unscrupulous, but now he has too many people waiting for him behind him.


    Although the Tru Kingdom is not a very big country, it is also a ce where he must wait when hees to this world.


    In this world, there are only two ways to improve your strength, one is to train hard, and the other is to use devil fruits.


    But this time, the attack on the Tru Kingdom was a wake-up call to Chang Nuo.


    "Your Majesty the King, we really got three good things from the Demon Pirates..."


    Zhiya brought three people with him. Each of them held a small box in his hand. He himself said to Changnuo with a smile on his face.


    On this deck, Chang Nuo looked at them with curiosity, especially when he saw the size of the three boxes. Chang Nuo said inadvertently, "This thing, can''t it be a devil fruit?"


    "How did your Majesty know?" Zhi was obviously shocked.


    "What is there to know about this? For you to say it like this, it already exins everything. It''s not like I have never seen the size of Devil Fruit before!" Changnuo said with a slight smile.


    "That''s what your Majesty said, but I have never seen these three devil fruit types before."


    After Zhiya finished speaking, he opened all three boxes.


    What came into view were indeed three Devil Fruits, and each one had a different shape.


    Especially the one in the middle, it seems to be glowing with blue light!


    "Is there any mention of this kind of thing in the Devil Fruit Encyclopedia?"


    Changnuo asked Gogoya next to him.


    "Your Majesty the King, the one on the farthest side has been found. He is the cigarette fruit of the Superman series. It can be said to be the most tasteless of chicken ribs. The one on the far right is the iron fruit of the Superman series. It can absorb everything it touches. It turns into steel, and the one in the middle is not even in the Devil Fruit Encyclopedia!"


    Gogoya started reporting directly.


    Especially when talking about thest one, Changnuo was a little surprised. There was no Devil Fruit even in the Devil Fruit Illustrated Book, which was indeed a bit surprising.


    The Demon Pirates of Camoron don''t know where they got these things from. Anyway, these things now belong to the Toru Kingdom.


    Changnuo stepped forward and looked at the Devil Fruit in front of him with some curiosity. Apart from the Iron Fruit, the other two didn''t even know what the Cigarette Fruit was. They were indeed useless.


    But this devil fruit with a faint blue light gives people an eerie and cold feeling. From the appearance, it is obviously not simple.


    Changnuo slowly put his hand on it, then closed his eyes, and asked the system in his mind, "System, can you tell what series of devil fruits this belongs to?"


    "The system needs to pay a corresponding fee of 10 million beli to answer the answer. Do you want to pay it?"


    The voice of the system came, but it actually asked for money. Changnuo was speechless, but he still said, "Pay!"


    "Ding..." sounded, and the originally small ount bnce was even more pitiful at this moment.


    "The answer is that the Superman in the Pirate World is a space fruit. It has powerful space abilities and can perform space defense, attack and movement. After awakening, it can travel through space, fold space, and even travel across the world."


    After the payment was made, the system''s voice sounded again, but this time it waspletely different.


    Chang Nuo didn''t know what to say now. He didn''t expect that he was so lucky. He had been thinking before that he would work hard to increase his strength in the future and never touch any devil fruits.


    But the thing in front of him has exceeded the limit of Devil Fruit, and he really doesn''t know what to say.


    He made a lot of money on this trip. Although a ship of goods was robbed, it was nothingpared to the gold, silver and jewelry he grabbed this time, let alone three Devil Fruits, one of which was A superhuman space fruit with space abilities!


    "What''s wrong? Your Majesty."


    Gogoya saw something was wrong with Chang Nuo''s expression, so he hurried forward and asked.


    "ah?"


    Chang Nuo was still immersed in fantasy. He immediately reacted after hearing the sound, with a slightly embarrassed expression on his face.


    "Are you okay, Your Majesty?" Gogoya asked again.


    "It''s okay, I just thought of something." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    As soon as he finished speaking, he directly picked up the devil fruit. The blue light looked a bit scary, butpared to the future, what are these?


    "Your Majesty, we are still not sure about the power of this devil fruit. Are you thinking..."


    Gogoya was a little surprised. He had already seen that his Majesty the King probably wanted to eat the Devil Fruit!


    "It doesn''t matter. As for the remaining two devil fruits, you can see if anyone is willing to eat them. If there is no one, you can put them up for auction in the future!" Changnuo said with a smile.


    "Okay, Your Majesty, but have you really thought about it? After eating the Devil Fruit, it means bing apletendlubber!"


    Gogoya said still a little worried.


    "Yes, Your Majesty, we have no objection to you eating a Devil Fruit, but this Devil Fruit is not even in the Devil''s Manual. If it is a bad Devil Fruit, then it will not be avable to you in the future. Another chance to change!��


    Haruya also stepped forward to persuade, saying that they all knew that a person could only eat Devil Fruit once in his life, and no matter what the oue was, he would have to bear it.


    The key is that these things they learned were all told to them by Changnuo. Otherwise, ording to the situation in the Toru Kingdom, how could these people know everything about Devil Fruits?


    Changnuo didn''t say anything and just smiled, but in front of everyone, he opened his mouth and took a bite of the blue-light Devil Fruit.


    "vomit����"


    Just after biting it, Chang Nuo suddenly felt a churn in his stomach. Whether it was the taste or the smell, the Devil Fruit waspletely uneptable.


    Although he almost retched, the Changnuo man swallowed the bite.


    After eating, Chang Nuo''s face turned green. He sat on the deck, breathing heavily. As for the remaining half of the Devil Fruit in his hand, he threw it away.


    However, others were not surprised when they saw this scene. Chang Nuo had already told them that all the Devil Fruit needed to be taken was one bite.


    The key is that after eating it, the so-called space ability of the Devil Fruit seems to have no feeling for the current Changnuo!


    Changnuo felt happier just sitting there thinking about the devil fruit with space ability.


    "Your Majesty, how do you feel?"


    Gogoya and Haruya both stretched their heads and looked at each other, wanting to know what the other person''s experience was like after eating a devil fruit.


    "You two are so curious. There are two Devil Fruits over there. How about you two eat one to taste it?" Changnuo said with a speechless expression.


    "I don''t need it anymore. I n to reach the top with my own strength in the future. I will definitely not eat things like Devil Fruit!"


    Zhiya shook his head quickly and said.


    "This tastes really good. It''s much worse than the most disgusting food in my imagination." Chang Nuo sighed and almost rolled his eyes.


    "What ability?"


    Gogoya looked expectantly and asked.


    "You guess?"


    "Can you just say no, Your Majesty?"


    Chang Nuo has no intention of telling anyone about this ability at all. Who knows what kind of people he will meet in the future? Now hide everything so that you can win with one blow.


    Although it is clear that there are rtively powerful beings in the entire pirate world, the key question is what kind of strength the leading figures in the world government have. This is not clear at all.


    This mystery is the biggest doubt guing Chang Nuo.


    So for him now, even though he already has the spatial ability of the Devil Fruit, he will not deliberately use it.


    Facing the two people''s questions, Chang Nuo just smiled slightly, and then said, "I don''t feel anything yet. Let Barlow hurry up and start going back. Everything the country faces is still waiting for us to go back and solve it."


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    In this way, no one knows what kind of devil fruit Changnuo ate? What kind of abilities have you acquired?


    Even among the people around him, no one could understand him clearly.


    The National still started sailing on calm seas. Although the process was not very fast, the atmosphere now had apletely different feeling from before.


    ording to their overall guess, it would take at least five days to sail from the Upside Down Mountain to their own country in the South China Sea. However, during these five days, they could only find out what the entire Tru Kingdom would encounter through the phone bug.


    ������������


    However, at this moment, the Kingdom of Toru is under heavy siege from the Kingdom of Roya and dozens of pirate groups.


    Even thend of the royal city now has to send more people to deal with pirates. As for the Royal Kingdom, there is no need to worry too much.


    It is precisely because of this that they can only deal with pirates. In less than two days, the entire Kingdom of Tru has lost two inds.


    Although the development in the past few years has caused earth-shaking changes in the economy of the entire Kingdom of Toru, and in terms of personnel strength, it is also stronger than that of the Kingdom of Roya, but it cannot stand it. It has to resist dozens of pirate groups at the same time. Stress issues.


    In a country with a small poption, coupled with the current war, most of the people have begun to fear.


    The good thing is that almost all the nts nted around the entire Kingdom of Tru are flowers and nts, which are not of high value and will not be damaged by them. Moreover, most of the people in the entire kingdom are concentrated in the royal city. .

 Chapter 19 Angry Group Killing

    <h4>Chapter 19 Angry Group Killing</h4>


    The battle between countries may be more humane, but these pirates have no such concept at all.


    Almost everywhere they went, they burned, killed and looted, which had a very serious impact on the overall economy of the Tru Kingdom. At the same time, no one knew how many people had died at the hands of the pirates.


    Junhe and the remaining members of the King''s Guards were resisting the pirates'' invasion one by one, but the manpower of several hundred people was ultimately limited.


    ording to their statistics, there are about 40 pirate groups that have invaded the Toru Kingdom so far, and there are nearly 7,000 to 8,000 people in number.


    This has had an almost severe impact on them, and they are still struggling to deal with it.


    During the five days of Chang Nuo''s return journey, news woulde from the royal city almost every two hours, but every time the news was almost infuriating.


    On the one hand, Junhe began to arrange people to retreat to the royal city, and on the other hand, he also had to organize people to resist the pirates and the Royal Kingdom. The hardships involved were indeed unimaginable.


    The Kingdom of Roya began to attack the Kingdom of Tru, which happened to be when Changnuo and the others arrived at Rogge Town. Although the return trip only took five days, within these five days, many things were enough to operate.


    But the good thing is that by the time they had attacked the hintend of the kingdom, the giant ship National had already appeared in the territory of the Tru Kingdom.


    When he appeared at Nanniwa Port, no one greeted Changnuo this time. He only learned through the phone that there are at least 30 pirate groups remaining in the kingdom. Their whereabouts are still unclear. , but the only thing that became clear was that their purpose was the pce.


    "Porlu porphyr..."


    Changnuo picked up the phone and dialed Junhe directly. After the other party connected, Changnuo asked seriously, "Where has the Roja Kingdom reached now?"


    "It''s Your Majesty..."


    There was a noisy sounding from the other side, but from the sound it could be heard that it was not Junhe, but rather other guards, who seemed to be quite excited.


    The phone bug also imitated their expressions, which was particrly exaggerated.


    "Your Majesty, we are currently guarding the Royal City. There are almost three thousand pirates outside. They are currently preparing to attack the Royal City. Jun and the guard captain are currently resisting the attack of the Royal Kingdom."


    Hearing the voiceing from the other side, Chang Nuo suddenly felt like he couldn''t breathe. What he had been worrying about for the past few days finally happened.


    The pirates have actually attacked the royal city, which means that most of the other ces have fallen. It has been less than three years since this country was handed over to them. Such a situation is really a dereliction of duty on their part.


    Chang Nuo''s face was cold. He even felt that his good temper before had disappeared at this moment. He thought that he could not bear to kill the other party even after he made a mistake. He did not expect that his low profile would cause such a big disaster. .


    After getting off the boat, Chang Nuo didn''t wait for anyone and quickly left towards the royal city.


    The guards following him all rushed towards the royal city.


    As for Gogoya, she stayed on the King. After all, the total treasure on board now totaled 2 billion beli. If she left again, wouldn''t there be no way out if pirates came over? there is none left.


    ording to Chang Nuo''s current speed, Nanniwa Port is only 10 minutes away from the royal city. Moreover, the anger in his heart has be overwhelming and he can no longer hide it.


    He has no intention of letting anyone go who hasmitted crimes in his own country!


    As soon as they arrived at the edge of the royal city, they already saw a fierce gunfire confrontation between the two parties. The sound of gunfire could not be heard. There were literally thousands of pirates standing under the city, and everyone had an expression on their face as if they were determined to win. .


    Changnuo saw that there were indeed several Devil Fruit users among the pirates. Although they were not very powerful beings, they were enough to cause some damage to his guards.


    It has only been three days since the war began, and the entire country has be what it is now. Chang Nuo is really unable to ept it. After all, they have been trained for so long, but the overall actualbat experience is too much. Worse.


    Kong has great strength, but in actualbat experience against the enemy, these guards seemed like ordinary people holding up guns, with no idea where to shoot.


    Looking at the pirate''s appearance, Chang Nuo''s expression instantly turned gloomy. The demon sword viger was already feeling the anger in his waist. The entire de began to emit red light, and the de that was ready to be drawn out was almost formed. It looks like a tornado.


    As Chang Nuo began to slowly enter the battlefield, the guards and people standing on the tower saw this scene and immediately began to roar. Everyone had excitement on their faces. No matter what the reason was, at least they themselves His Majesty the King is the spiritual symbol of the entire country.


    Chang Nuo stood directly in front of the pirates, and the momentum of thousands of pirates could not suppress him alone.


    "You bunch of bastards actually dare to enter my country, so from today onwards, I, Genji Changno, as the king of the Toru Kingdom, dere you to be punished by death..."


    When Chang Nuo said the word "death penalty", the people in the entire royal city became excited.


    The royal city has a city wall that is almost five meters high. In addition to the guards, there are also many people who havee to help. Now everyone is staring down. They want to witness how powerful their king has be. To what extent.


    Of course, there are many people who are worried about this.


    Hundreds of guards also jumped directly below, all ready to start a fight to the death, but just when they were about to start, Chang Nuo shouted loudly, "All of you, retreat, and protect the people in the city as your important task. These individuals You bastard, just leave it to me alone..."


    Chang Nuo said in a cold voice, staring at the thousands of people in front of him as if looking at corpses.


    The demon sword vige was shaking around his waist, and he could no longer hold back his bloodthirsty desire.


    Chang Nuo gently put his hand on the handle of the knife and stood there without moving anything, but a gust of wind came out of thin air, and then Chang Nuo disappeared in an instant.


    When they reappeared, they saw the pirates falling to the ground one by one, and before they could react, their whole bodies were already torn apart.


    The entire royal city gate instantly turned into a blood-stainednd, and all the pirates who saw this situation were not afraid and frightened.


    There were so many pirate groups who were originally full of confidence, but all of them wanted to leave here in an instant.


    But since everyone is already here, how can it be so easy to leave?


    "Young men, there are many of us now, don''t panic, all of them rush forward for me. By then, the countless treasures in King Tru City will be ours. We have already reached this point, there is no way out!"


    Just when the other pirates were about to run away, a loud voice sounded, tempting them with money, which gave them a littlefort in their hearts that originally wanted to leave.


    Chang Nuo''s whole body was now red-eyed. His behavior waspletely indiscriminate. No one could see his trajectory clearly. He could only see rows of people falling down.


    This time he had no intention of leaving anyone behind. Since they had done such a thing in their own country, there was only one way waiting for them, and that was death.


    The people and guards standing on the city wall now can be regarded as the first time to see His Majesty the King so brave. One person cane and go freely among these thousands of people. Although the scene is bloody, for these people watching the battle, it is indeed It is the most enjoyable kind of visual appreciation.


    After the guards on the National Ship arrived, they were about to rush forward when they were stopped by other guards, and what Chang Nuo said was told to them again exactly as they were.


    In less than five minutes, almost seven or eight hundred of these thousands of pirates were dead, but in this short period of time, they also began to think of a better response n.


    Fortunately, they are not a pirate group at all. The interests among them must not have been distributed evenly before, so there is some grudge in their hearts, which prevents them from cooperating perfectly.


    Although they are still rtivelyrge in number, there are still some weaker pirates who arepletely frightened and are slowly starting to retreat.


    For these pirates, they are nothing more than profit-oriented, but now they have to face heavy losses, and they still give priority to saving their lives.


    But now that we have reached this ce, it is definitely impossible to withdraw.


    Chang Nuo stopped in the crowd of pirates. There was not a trace of blood on his body. He was still the same as when he came here before, but his eyes turned dark red, looking quite strange and terrifying.


    After absorbing so much blood, the Demon Sword Vige has be quite strange. The blood-red light on the de, although alluring, makes people feel scared.


    After seeing such a terrifying and weird scene, and at the same time feeling the powerful strength of the so-called King Toru, the remaining pirates no longer care about how much money they can get this time, and they all start to get involved one by one. run.


    There are at least two thousand remaining pirates, all of them scared out of their wits. Even those pirates with devil fruit abilities will end up looking the same.


    Chang Nuo was not in a hurry to chase them, there was no need anyway.


    Looking at the mess behind him, with not a single intact body but all in pieces, Chang Nuo also frowned and suppressed his nausea.


    This was the first time he had encountered such a wanton killing.


    "Go and capture all those people. How these people are destroying our country will use their lives to build it for us in the future!" Chang Nuo stood there and looked at the pirates who had begun to leave and scatter. He shouted to his guards in a calm voice.


    "yes����"


    Hundreds of voices suddenly sounded, and they had been waiting for this moment.


    If there weren''t too many ordinary people before, they couldn''t let go at all, for fear that something would happen again, otherwise they wouldn''t let this group of pirates attack the royal city.


    Now that it''s okay, these guards can let go and have a good fight.


    As for the Roja Kingdom, they will probably retreat soon after receiving the news of the pirates'' defeat.


    After the pirate left, this matter did not end, but was just the beginning.


    Chang Nuo has never thought about invading other people''s countries. It''s good to keep his own ce. The key is that there are so many people who don''t like it and insist on doing some tricks, which makes him very ufortable and dissatisfied. .


    There are currently about 3,000 people in the Kingdom of Toru who have started training in the Sixth Form of the Navy, but only four to five hundred people have actually mastered the First Form or above. Thinking about it now, all of these things must be taken up next. Agenda, a powerful country cannot rely solely on itself as the king.


    Not all the consequences of the Royal Kingdom''s attack are bad. At least it has highlighted internal problems involving management, military and other aspects. All of them have been disyed in front of us and will be left to future management. will y a big role.


    Now thend of the royal city ispletely safe. Many joint pirate groups have fallen apart, and there are still king guards behind them to arrest them. So at least all the people in thend of the royal city no longer have to worry about their own safety.


    As the gate of the royal city opened, countless people swarmed out, everyone was shouting, and many people began to spontaneously go out to pick up corpses. Those things were too unsightly in front of the royal city.


    Chang Nuo liked the enthusiasm of these people very much. At least three years ago, each of them had more expressions of indifference andck of desire for life. They hadpletely lost confidence in their future life.


    But looking at it now, the smiles on everyone''s faces arepletely unfalsifiable.


    As life bes more and more prosperous, Changnuo''s support from the entire Tru Kingdom has reached an unprecedented peak.


    Even though he is only fifteen years old, at least for the old king who has been king for decades, there are still a few people who still remember his name.


    "Long live your Majesty..."


    "Long live your Majesty..."


    The voices came like an overwhelming wave, including women and children, especially those children whose admiration for Chang Nuo was simply too high.


    In the world of pirates, it is almost extremely difficult for women to make money, but it is different here. There are two huge factories, one is responsible for making perfume, but most of them are hard work, so perfume Factory manufacturing is dominated by men, but textile factories are different. Almost all of them are women.


    When the country is so wealthy, the next main purpose is to strengthen the entire poption!

 Chapter 20 Naval Headquarters

    <h4>Chapter 20 Naval Headquarters</h4>


    For the first time, Chang Nuo felt the importance of strength, but this was not enough.


    There are as many strong people in this world as there are carps crossing the river. If you don''t pay attention, you don''t know what kind of unexpected situation will happen.


    Seeing so many lovely people, Changnuo felt an inexplicable sense of pride from the bottom of his heart.


    at the same time


    In another ce, it is full of dense buildings, especially the one at the front that seems to be at least a hundred meters high, with the eye-catching word "Navy" hanging on it, and the Navy''s logo in the middle.


    The logo is a seagull holding a scale in its mouth, symbolizing absolute justice.


    There are watchtowers everywhere, and the edge of the coastline is filled with giant cannons.


    This is a huge ind on the seashore, but its interior ispletely different from other inds.


    Inhabited here is the navy headquarters that will be known as the three major forces in the One Piece world in the future and the strongest single entity.


    All the people living here are navy and their families. Of course, the navy''s family members who can live here must have very high positions in the navy.


    The entire Navy Headquarters looks like a water-tight iron barrel. Just a nce at it makes people shudder, and it is a solemn ce.


    But at this moment, in the middle building, a group of people are sitting here, with serious expressions, talking about something.


    Everyone''s sitting posture is different. Although it looks a bit like a meeting, the picking of the nostrils and the eating are not at all what a meeting should look like.


    "Garp, you bastard, can you stop eating it?"


    In a quiet environment, the crisp sound of Garp biting biscuits should not be too obvious. It ispletely out of proportion to the more serious environment now.


    But because of this, the middle-aged man sitting at the top with a pigtail and a pair of sses looked directly at Garp and yelled angrily.


    This man is Sengoku, now the marshal of the navy, a super powerful man.


    There was a goat standing next to him. After hearing Sengoku''s roar, he also looked at Garp with a sarcastic look.


    "Warring States, what do you say about your business, does it have anything to do with my eating?" Garp said with an indifferent expression.


    "You still have the nerve to say that you are talking about something now, can you be more serious?"


    Warring States was so angry that he didn''t know what to say.


    Now there are more than a dozen people in a room, all watching the excitement, but their expressions all show indifference.


    "Can you please stop arguing about such trivial matters? Marshal Warring States, please hurry up. We all have things to do!" He said directly and helplessly from the side.


    Otherwise, it looks like the two of them will be arguing for a while.


    This kind of thing has bemonce.


    Warring States was also aware of this matter and ignored Garp''s behavior, which could not affect anything anyway.


    But at this time, Warring States still asked, "Garp, you will take the position of admiral this time. There is currently no one more suitable for you in the navy. Don''t shirk it this time."


    "Forget it. There are too many things to do as a general. I feel like I can''t bear it. It''s good to be a lieutenant general. As for the general, you can let He do it!"


    Garp said while maintaining a look of disdain on his face.


    "Garp, you old guy, can you please stop throwing things on my head?" He looked at Garp angrily and shouted, and then said to Sengoku, "Besides, there are several candidates for generals now! Is it possible that these three alternate generals, Lieutenant General Akainu, Lieutenant General Kizaru, and Lieutenant General Aokiji, cannot meet your needs?"


    However, these three people are now sitting at the scene. Except for Lieutenant General Sakaski, Akainu, the other two people look indifferent.


    "Forget it, we''ll talk about the generalter. Let''s talk about other things now."


    Sengoku immediately started talking about this topic, and then his expression began to change, and his whole person becamepletely serious.


    However, behind Warring States, a piece of white paper clearly disyed Chang Nuo''s head, and all the details were also disyed here.


    Looking at Warring States''s appearance, the others began to look a little more serious, at least they were no longer as unformed as before.


    Garp also looked at Sengoku with interest.


    Warring States nced at everyone, and when he saw that everyone had begun to calm down, he began to say leisurely, "Have you seen the person behind me! Genji Nagano, the king of the South China Sea Tru Kingdom, as a South China Sea country, they The country and region should have beenpletely poor, but in recent years, the king of this country has abruptly changed this situation..."


    "I''m talking about the Warring States Period. Isn''t it good that our country has improved? It shows that this little guy is quite capable! Why would you bring such a thing here?"


    Garp said it directly without showing any mercy to Sengoku.


    "Garp, you bastard, can you just listen to what I have to say?"


    Zeng Guo immediately became angry again, and looking at Garp''s appearance, he was furious.


    "That''s right, Garp, since the Warring States Marshal has spoken out, there must be something hidden!" He also said.


    "Let''s stop arguing and let Marshal Warring States finish his words quickly. I still have things to deal with here, so don''t dy these things..."


    Sitting opposite Garp, a man who looked to be in his thirties, wearing a yellow suit, said directly with his mouth tilted.


    Kizaru''s opening of his mouth attracted everyone''s attention in an instant.


    Warring States stood up and looked at everyone present with a speechless expression. Then his expression became serious and he said, "What we need to care about now is not the economic strength of his country, but their capabilities in other aspects!"


    After Sengoku finished speaking, he directly took out a phone bug. His two eyes glowed and were projected onto the wall. Then, all the scenes of the fight between the guards and pirates in Rogge Town were shown before Changnuo and the others.e out.


    This kind of phone bug belongs to the projector type, and there are quite a few types of phone bugs. However, those with projection like this are almost only avable to some rtively powerful people in big countries.


    When the projection appeared, everyone sitting here became uneasy. Even Garp, who looked indifferent, was now watching it seriously.


    They couldn''t believe what they were seeing.


    Mainly because the King''s Guard of the Kingdom of Tru actually uses the Sixth Form of the Navy?


    For the current navy, this thing has only just begun to be popr in two years. But now it is actually seen in the military of other countries and the Navy Type 6 is seen. How can this thing not shock them?


    "Is it Zefa?"


    Garp asked Sengoku with a serious look. This kind of thing can be regarded as the current trump card of the navy. If it spreads, it is uncertain how much impact it will have in the future?


    The reason why Garp asked if it was Zefa''s problem was mainly because this man was a naval admiral before, and he created all the six naval skills.


    However, the navy as a whole is not yet familiar with this skill. It is not surprising that other countries have used it in actualbat.


    Warring States sat down slowly, and after thinking for a while, he began to say leisurely, "It shouldn''t be Zefa. This thing has been poprized in the entire naval force since two years ago, but the other party''s familiarity with these skills is likely to be far more than In the past two years, it is precisely because of this that this emergency meeting was held today to discuss who should go over to check what is going on next?��


    "There is no need to say more about the skills of Marine Type 6. These people must be using them. Whether it is from the finger gun or the moon step, these things can be clearly seen. At least they are exactly the same skills as Marine Type 6. , but most of them seem to have more than one skill. How are these people trained? Is it really necessary to investigate carefully in the next step? "


    Lieutenant General He said directly and to the point. After all, the opponent is already so familiar with the navy''s training trump card. If he does not study it carefully, then the navy''s crisis is likely to arise.


    "Marshal Warring States, no matter where these people got these skills, my suggestion is to directly wipe out everything they know. If they are allowed to develop, how can they be repaid in the future?"


    Sakaski said directly with a fierce look. This is almost how he dealt with things.


    "It''s better to investigate first. After all, we don''t know what the situation is on the other side. We have all seen the development of the Tru Kingdom in the past few years. Who is willing to ept this task next to see what this country is like? what''s the situation?"


    Warring States said directly.


    No one else had anything to say, including Garp, who had nothing to say at the moment.


    In his impression, he did meet Chang Nuo once, and he already felt that something was wrong at that time. But now that this matter was brought up, he felt that something was wrong.


    The key point is that it was two years ago. If these situations had been discovered at that time, they might not have been so passive.


    "Garp, you should be rtively familiar with that side of the South China Sea, so why don''t you go over there and see what''s going on?"


    As soon as Warring States finished speaking, Garp immediately stood up and said loudly with a dissatisfied look on his face, "No, I have to rest next week. How could I still go to such a far ce? No one is watching my lovely and well-behaved grandson yet. Let the others be!��


    Garp''s refusal seems to have be a normal thing for everyone, and this time it is dealing with a national matter different from the pirates. Even if they send anyone there, they cannot use force tantly.


    Warring States looked helpless. He knew that Garp wouldn''t go and asked specifically, but after looking around in his eyes, he really couldn''t choose anyone who was more suitable.


    The entire venue was silent for a while, and Akainu mmed the table and said, "Since no one is going, I''ll go over and take a look. I want to know what kind of abilities this King Tohru has?"


    "No, this is not against pirates. If we get involved in other people''s national affairs, those old men from the World Government will cause trouble for us." Sengoku refused.


    Everyone here knows very well what kind of situation Sakaski is in. They only have the justice of existence in their hearts and don''t care about the lives of other people at all.


    But in the entire naval base, Sakaski is indeed the only man with absolute justice.


    It is precisely because of absolute justice that he often distorts the justice in his heart. This is why Warring States is unwilling to let him go.


    No one in the room of more than a dozen people answered, until finally everyone''s eyes were fixed on one person, who was still leaning on the chair with his eyes closed, as if he didn''t care at all about this matter.


    "Qingzhi, everyone else has something to do and you seem to be fine, right? I''ll leave this matter to you. Don''t act rashly this time. Find out the situation in this country first!" Warring States said.


    "Hey, hey, hey... Marshal of the Warring States Period, I also have something to do, okay? Don''t leave such boring things to me."


    Qingzhi quickly opened his eyes and looked at everyone and said.


    "This matter has been settled, you are the one who has been appointed as the general general..."


    In the Warring States Period, there was no choice but to say it directly.


    There is not even a general in the naval base now. The only general, Zefa, left two months ago. They really can''t choose the right person now. Qingzhi was originally on the list of candidates for general. One, and it��s the most promising one. It��s pretty good to use this incident to push the boat forward.


    Hearing what Sengoku said, Aokiji didn''t know what to say anymore. He could only let out a breath of cold air and said in a leisurely voice, "Forget it, for the sake of the navy headquarters, let me go there." !��


    The most dissatisfied among them should be Sakaski. He is also one of the candidates for general, but he didn''t expect that just such a small thing has already decided the candidate for general.


    The others didn''t say anything. Anyway, the matter has been settled.


    "Aoji, the Kingdom of Toru reported the situation yesterday. The neighboring Kingdom of Roja is attacking. No matter what the situation is, you must not get involved in the war between countries. You just go to understand the situation." Take action."


    Warring States once again specifically ordered.


    He cannot let his navy get involved in other countries'' wars, otherwise, he may not know what kind of trouble there will be.


    "Marshal Warring States, the opponent already possesses the Six-Style Navy Skill. What if another one with domineering poweres out? What will I do then? I won''t be in danger!"


    Qingzhi said the most cowardly words in the most leisurely tone, but everyone still knew his strength quite well.

 Chapter 21 Kingdom War

    <h4>Chapter 21 Kingdom War</h4>


    When Qing Zhi said this, others were not iprehensible. A country has undergone such great changes in just a few years, and even the Navy''s six-style skills have been learned. Two domineering people should also be able to do so. It''s not something impossible.


    "It''s so scary. What if our Lieutenant General Aoki Pheasant dies there after we pass?"


    Kizaru tilted his mouth and turned his head to smile at Aokiji.


    "Kizaru, can you please stop making sarcastic remarks here? It''s just a country in the South China Sea. There''s nothing to worry about!"


    Akainu said in a cold voice.


    "Okay, let''s decide the matter like this first. Qingzhi, let me emphasize this matter again. You cannot get involved in their country''s war. And after it is over, try not to take action if you can. Otherwise, if someone else is If we seize the handle of our navy, then it will be difficult to say." Warring States said again.


    "Hey... I know Marshal of the Warring States Period..." Qingzhi answered nonchntly.


    At present, Chang Nuo has no idea that the Navy already knows about them. The key is, what can he do even if he knows?


    Now that he has begun to lead the King''s Guards out, Changnuo is no longer worried about others knowing about this matter. They do not belong to the countries that join the World Government, so naturally they do not need to worry about it.


    Aftering to this world for so many years, he has a rtively clear understanding of the rules.


    But now the entire Toru Kingdom is still hurriedly extinguishing the mes of war.


    But the only good thing is that since those pirate groups were destroyed, the progress of the Roja Kingdom haspletely stopped, and there are still faint signs of retreat.


    In the pce, Chang Nuo sat at the top, looking at the people standing below with a very serious expression on his face.


    Different from before, most of the people standing below are young people now. Following the old king, a group of officials from the older generation have now begun to slowly retire, and the power has been handed over to these people.


    "Losta, as the current person in charge of the entire business, can you tell us about the current overall business situation?"


    Chang Nuo looked at a man about 30 years old standing below. He wore a pair of sses and a more formal suit, and he had apletely gentlemanly attitude.


    Luosta took two steps forward, took out a small book from his pocket, and then said respectfully, "Your Majesty, the current business of our country is mainly perfume and cloth, and after nearly two years of development, With the development, the perfume business has spread all over the world, and on the Grand Route, there are also channel agents who are responsible for the sales of our perfume. The other is cloth. Now it has just begun to open up sales channels all over the world, but it is not particrly obvious at the moment.


    Nowadays, the entire perfume production staff, including flower and nt cultivators, has reached about 120,000 people, and the overall revenue of perfume has remained at an average of 5.5 billion beli per month, which ispletely enough to support domestic economic expenses. As for cloth, it has just begun. , the monthly profit is almost maintained at around 1.3 billion beli, and it is just the beginning.


    As for the next step of nning, I think we should start to expand beyond the four seas. I hope your majesty can give me some advice? "


    Listening to Luosta''s report, although he was still very unfamiliar with business nning and couldn''t talk about important ideas at all, he couldn''t help but work very seriously and carefully. Changnuo didn''t pay attention to the process.


    Now there is no need to worry about the attack of the Roja Kingdom. What is left is to support the economy. I am afraid it is not enough to rely on these two alone.


    Chang Nuo sat there and pondered for a moment, thought for a moment and then said, "I have never thought about this aspect of the perfume business before, but how much is the inventory currently?"


    "Your Majesty, the inventory of perfume has reached nearly one million bottles, which ispletely sufficient for our kingdom''s current digestion level."


    Losta said.


    This thing is now a high-end product. If you want to sell it in the world, it will take a lot of effort. After all, most of the really rich people are outside the world.


    "Regarding this matter, your Ministry of Commerce should n carefully. In the future, our domestic business will definitely not only have these two types. We will train all people with business acumen. We will talk about the other thingster." Chang Nuo said.


    "Your Majesty, what are you going to do this time..."


    Gogoya was curious and wanted to ask, but in this situation, what she wanted to say was swallowed back in the end.


    "The Ministry of Commerce wille up with a n as soon as possible, including the overall situation of the domestic poption, geographical distribution, age brackets, employment and living security, etc...


    In addition, be prepared for expansion. Next, I decide to take over the Royal Kingdom, so I must be prepared for things in advance.


    Starting today, you need to be very energetic. "Chang Nuo stood up and said seriously, the determination in his voice also made other people''s blood boil.


    Not only that, Chang Nuo��s words surprised everyone. The Kingdom of Roya was muchrger than the Kingdom of Tru, but Chang Nuo actually said that he wanted to win over the other party?


    A group of people were suddenly at a loss and had no idea what their Majesty the King wanted to do.


    "Your Majesty, do you want to dere war on the Kingdom of Roja?"


    Luosta asked with some confusion.


    "What? Don''t you think it''s possible?"


    Chang Nuo''s tone was very serious. After all, since this kind of thing has happened once, it is likely to happen again in the future. Chang Nuo will not allow the Royal Kingdom to affect his ns again.


    Although the overall national strength has now improved, it still maintains its previous pedantic state, and there is still a big bend in the fundamentals of thinking that has not been reversed.


    "Your Majesty, Luosta fully agrees with your wishes. It''s a pity that he doesn''t have much ability. Otherwise, he would definitely follow your Majesty to the Kingdom of Roja." Luosta said with great emotion.


    Chang Nuo smiled politely after saying this. After all, it was good to have someone who supported him.


    Besides, he had already thought of a response n before making this decision. Since the Kingdom of Roya can fund the pirates toe and attack their country, it mainly means that their own strength ispletely insufficient.


    Now that the entire King''s Guard has arrived at the border, the next n is probably to enter the Kingdom of Roja directly.


    But changing a country''s inherent mindset is not as simple as imagined.


    "Losta, how much money do we have left now?" Chang Nuo asked directly.


    "Your Majesty, your Majesty just made statistics here and found that there are still about 3 billion Baileys that we can use now. This is the amount of money that can be used freely after we have put aside our national life." Losta said.


    Chang Nuo sat in his seat and thought for a moment. Now the entire country still has so much money that can be mobilized. In addition, there are nearly 2 billion Bailey funds on the country. Let alone want to win this battle. Almost everything can be done.


    "Losta, please go ahead and arrange the next n, mainly for the Kingdom of Uroa. After we take over, at least we can quickly get the country back on track, and we won''t be in a hurry to do things by then." Changnuo said .


    "Okay, Your Majesty..."


    Luosta adjusted his sses and said.


    "That''s all for today. As for the rest, we''ll discuss it then." Chang Nuo said directly.


    Now, things about the Royal Kingdom are almost clear, and there is no need to worry or care about other situations.


    In the entire Toru Kingdom, the current strength of the overall strong men is not very weak. Shunhe at least has the strength of a vice admiral, and for others, most of the six skills have been mastered to one or two.


    The current Toru Kingdom is definitely no longer as submissive as it used to be.


    After Chang Nuo left the pce hall, he went directly to the pce garden.


    Here, not only is the environment more elegant and quiet, but the most important thing is that this is his own back garden, and no one wille in at all.


    But despite this, Changnuo still felt uneasy and directly used the visceral color to sense the specific situation around him. After confirming that nothing happened, he slowly withdrew the visceral color perception.


    Rather than saying that this is the entire back garden, it is better to simply say that it is a piece of virgin forest behind the pce.


    I won��t say the exact size of the area, but a rtivelyrge square was built inside.


    Standing in the middle, Chang Nuo''s main purpose ofing here today is to get used to the ability of the Devil Fruit in his body.


    He has lost his life of contact with sea water, and what he hopes most now is to quickly master all the skills that the Devil Fruit can produce.


    But without even thinking about it, how could this thing be solved overnight?


    With a little force on his right hand, sky blue color appeared on his hand, but he really had no idea about these gadgets, let alone how to control the power of space.


    But since he can''t figure it out and can''t let others know, Changnuo still has the biggest trump card, which is the system in his body.


    Entering the system space, Chang Nuo felt the blue space that he had not been in for a long time. This kind of mechanical science fiction ce really gave him an unprecedented sense of security.


    "System, do you have a detailed introduction to the capabilities of Space Fruit?"


    Chang Nuo asked directly. He now fully believes that this is the system space, and it is almost an omnipotent existence.


    But just when he was still confused, the system''s voice jumped out directly, but this time it was not a voice but a prompt sound plus some information disyed on the panel in front of him.


    The capabilities and training methods of the Space Fruit are introduced in almost detail above.


    And the most important thing is that Changnuo discovered that the method of training space devil fruit is mainly based on training mental power, and the direction of the development of devil fruit can be controlled based on the strength of mental power in theter period.


    The space fruit has all-round effects such as defense, attack, and movement. After the fruit''s ability is awakened...


    Seeing that the abilities after awakening from the Devil Fruit were not introduced at all, Changnuo was a little disappointed, but these early things were enough for him to digest.


    Especially the mental power cultivation method mentioned just now really makes Chang Nuo a little confused. The cultivation method of seeing and hearing color is also based on mental power, and even Bawang color Haki is also the same. Now he can''t measure the spirit at all. What level of human cultivation is considered appropriate?


    He was a little embarrassed standing there, but he still subconsciously tried the ability of the space fruit. To what extent did it reach?


    He stood there and waved his Devil Fruit effect, and his abilities swept out instantly. A sky-blue barrier shape suddenly appeared in front of him. This thing was almostpletely transparent, giving people the feeling that there was no defense at all. Strength, let alone the so-called attack power?


    But is it really that simple? Obviously impossible!


    But on the same day, Gogoya sat in the courtyard and looked at the newspaper that had just been delivered to him. To everyone''s surprise, the headline in the newspaper was about the situation in his country.


    "With the special fighting method of the Toru Kingdom, all the pirates in Rogge Town were captured..."


    Just when he saw the contents of the headline above and then looked at the situation below, Gogoya was so frightened that sweat began to form on his forehead.


    The main reason was that she remembered Chang Nuo''s previous reminder that all the methods practiced by the King''s Guards were naval skills. If they were leaked, they would most likely be hostile to the navy.


    But now it was shown openly in the newspaper. She didn''t believe that only she had received one copy of it.


    After confirming the contents, Gogoya hurried towards the pce.


    At this moment, Changnuo was still practicing and learning his Devil Fruit abilities, and didn''t even notice what was happening outside.


    It can be said that the entire Kingdom of Toru is in great chaos now. Except for the royal city, pirates and wars in other ces have not stopped at this moment, but all this has almost no impact on the lives of the people.


    The people in the Kingdom of Tru now barely rely on farming for their livelihood. They were already extremely poor before, but now they rely on two factories, which is enough to support the living expenses of the entire country.


    After two years, these two factories have not only developedmerce in the Sihai area, but have also begun to gradually spread towards the Great Sea Route. Not only that, they have also driven the development of themercial economy around the factories, making the country more prosperous. The people, relying closely on the interactive economic strength brought by these two factories, arepletely self-sufficient.


    Gogoya had been standing outside the door of Chang Nuo''s room in the pce until night. When he saw Chang Nuoing back, Gogoya rushed forward instantly.


    His face was serious and nervous, and he did not have the image of someone in charge of shipping.

 Chapter 22 The arrival of the blue pheasant

    <h4>Chapter 22 The arrival of the blue pheasant</h4>


    Chang Nuo nced at Gogoya who was standing in front of him, especially her nervous look. She had been waiting here for a long time.


    "what''s going on?"


    Chang Nuo opened his mouth and asked directly. It was so dark now that he couldn''t see the person''s face clearly, but with the light in the courtyard, he could still see the other person''s expression clearly.


    "Your Majesty, what happened to us in Rogge Town has already been published in the newspapers, and I think the navy should also have discovered it!" Gogoya said nervously.


    "Go back and rest early! I''ve known about this kind of thing for a long time!"


    Chang Nuo had indeed guessed a long time ago that as Rogge Town is the Navy''s base in the East China Sea, it is normal for many people to pay attention to it.


    "But Your Majesty, don''t you need to worry about this matter?" Gogoya asked again.


    "Don''t worry about the Navy. ording to normal time, it is estimated that the Navy will send people to investigate in the next few days. Regarding this kind of thing, even if it is exposed, there will be no problem." Chang Nuo still said calmly .


    "I see."


    Gogoya put down the stone in his heart and sighed.


    But in the middle of things, she always felt that her Majesty the King must be hiding many things from these people, but it was difficult to ask too many things.


    Chang Nuo just smiled slightly and said in a calm voice again, "Go back and rest early. Don''t worry about other things."


    "Then Your Majesty, you should also rest early!"


    Looking at Gogoya''s leaving figure, Changnuo still didn''t take this incident seriously.


    Since he could drag his own King''s Guard out for a walk, he naturally wouldn''t worry about being discovered by the navy.


    Aftering to this world, he has understood everything in detail. Is he not the only one who knows the Sixth Form of the Navy?


    Zefa has now left the navy. As a former naval admiral, Changnuo knows very well what the other party wants to do next.


    But he still can''t guess who will be sent to the Navy Headquarters base and in what form. Anyway, his response n has already appeared. No matter whoes, the result will not change much.


    This time, Chang Nuo had no intention of going to the Royal Kingdom''s front line, so he could rest assured leaving all this to Junhe.


    In the entire Luo Ya Kingdom, Chang Nuo did not believe that someone could be summoned who was more powerful than Jun He.


    Although the area of ??the Roja Kingdom isrger than that of the Tru Kingdom, the overall military numbers are almost the same.


    Although the weapons are pretty much the same, the Kingdom of Roja is almost deficient in other aspects.


    The most important aspect is food supply. Changnuo has a system that can provide unlimited supply as long as there is money, but the Kingdom of Roja is different.


    The king who just took office, in order to enjoy himself, almost made the entire country miserable, and the people were full ofints. Among them, this kind of thing was the mostmon a year ago. Many people in the Kingdom of Roja wanted to join the special army. Of course, some of the Lu Kingdom has indeede over.


    Most people have heard about the treatment and living standards of the Tru Kingdom, even some members of their army, and have no intention of going to war.


    Chang Nuo came up with a more damaging method on the battlefield. He used the system space to create hundreds of thousands of leaflets, all of which were sent to the front lines for distribution. Suddenly, the entire Kingdom of Roja was began to fall into serious disputes.


    Sometimes fighting does not necessarily require the use of force, and other aspects can still proceed normally.


    From the beginning to the end of the fight, Chang Nuo did not appear once. Junhe led the king''s guard to attack the royal city of the Royal Kingdom in less than five days.


    This is already the closest position to the west of the Kingdom of Roja. If the royal city is captured again, the Kingdom of Roja will never appear again in the entire pirate world.


    The area of ??the Tru Kingdom has increased. This is not just an increase innd area, but more importantly, the number of citizens has nearly doubled. In this era, this is the most important thing.


    If you want to be the overlord of a party, the first thing you need is your own territory, and the second is the number of people in the country. As long as the number of people increases, there will be enough people to train, at least you don''t have to worry that the next generation will not have strong people.


    The war has been going on for the sixth day, and the overall situation in the country has stabilized. At least it will never be the same state again. The economy among the people has also begun to show an upward trend.


    However, just as Changnuo continued to familiarize himself with the ability of his Devil Fruit, he suddenly opened his eyes and smiled slightly towards the sea.


    This was still in his back garden, and then Chang Nuo began to move directly towards the seaside.


    With the growth of mental power, the system of seeing, hearing, and color is already in an advanced form, but it is now more maturely used.


    He had already guessed that guests wereing without any special perception.


    After leaving the pce, Chang Nuo came to the seaside area. This is the beach closest to the pce. This was where he first obtained the system.


    After observing the surroundings, Chang Nuo sat on a fallen dead tree on the edge of the beach, waiting quietly, looking towards the sea in the distance.


    But the reality was exactly what he thought. After a while, a man came slowly on a bicycle on the beach.


    Under the bicycle, when the wheels rotated to every ce, the sea surface would automatically form ice to support his entire weight.


    "Hey..., little brother, I would like to ask, how should I get to King Tru''s pce?"


    As soon as Qingzhi rode his bicycle ashore, he saw Chang Nuo sitting in the distance and resting, so he asked with a leisurely look.


    "I wonder what you''re talking about here?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    Aoki Pheasant is almost two meters tall, at least a head taller than Chang Nuo.


    As soon as hended, Qingzhi put his bicycle down there, and then walked to sit next to Chang Nuo.


    He sat therezily, listening to what Chang Nuo said, with a look of indifference, but he still said, "I came to see your Majesty the King. I want to ask you something, so I don''t know about you. Can you take me there?"


    Qingzhi had seen Chang Nuo''s appearance before. At least that photo was taken recently. How could he not figure out who the big boy in front of him was?


    It''s nothing more than a set of words. Anyway, the purpose ofing here is just to understand the situation!


    "It''s okay, but it''s just that it seems a little inappropriate for the Vice Admiral of the Navy Headquarters toe in this way?" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    It''s not like he doesn''t know Qing Zhi, even if he doesn''t know him, but the way he crosses the sea, he can even guess who the other person is with his feet.


    "Ouch... I didn''t expect you to know me. It''s really surprising!" Qing Zhi said stillzily.


    He didn''t have any curiosity about how the other party knew his identity, but now that he has reached this point. There are many things that no longer need to be said tactfully.


    Chang Nuo is also very curious. Even though he has never been to this world before, Chang Nuo still has a good impression of Qing Zhi. Among the navy, he is one of the few people who can please him.


    The two of them sat together on a dead tree, and their conversation was very rxed, and the conversation was normal, even as if they were two old friends who hadn''t seen each other for many years.


    On this beach, with the sea breeze blowing, it is not very hot. The most important thing is because Aokiji has the ability of frozen fruit.


    "General Aokiji, are you interested in apanying me to visit our Tru Kingdom?" Changnuo asked with a smile.


    "It''s too troublesome. If possible, I still want to lie there and have a good rest for a while, but since His Majesty King Tru invited it, it doesn''t hurt to go and take a look." Aokiji said.


    "Perhaps there is something that can satisfy you. After all, after returning to the Navy Headquarters, you still need to report on the situation in our country. Changnuo should naturally take you to visit."


    Chang Nuo''s leisurely words made Qing Zhi be serious. Did he not expect that the other party had already realized the purpose of theiring?


    Of course, everyone who should be surprised has already been surprised once. Aokiji would not think that the king of the Toru Kingdom was just rxing here, and he met him by chance.


    At the same time, he also developed a strong curiosity about this Tru Kingdom.


    Appearing again, the two of them were already walking on the streets of the royal city one after another.


    Along the way, people kept saying hello to Chang Nuo, shouting "Hello, His Majesty the King..."


    "It seems that you are very respected by the people in this country. I really don''t know how you, little guy, did it?"


    Qingzhi also saw this scene and asked curiously.


    He doesn''t know how many countries he has visited like this, but the key is that none of them can do the same as Changnuo.


    The simple emotions of the people are definitely not fake. In this case, it either means that this king is really powerful, or that he is very good at winning people''s hearts.


    Ten years ago, Aoki Pheasant also came to this country, butpared with now, it waspletely different.


    The most important point is that even though he was staying at the Navy Headquarters, he had heard a lot about the specialties of the Tru Kingdom.


    "Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant, the emotions of the people are very simple. What they want is not thatplicated. They just want to have a stable living environment, a ce where food and clothing can be provided, and a rtively harmonious and free country.


    It''s just that I''m working hard to give them everything they want. It''s being developed now, and maybe life will be better in the future.


    But all these things also need to establish a path for someone to bear the burden of moving forward. Otherwise, how can we ensure that these can continue? "Chang Nuo said.


    As he spoke, he kept saying hello to the people around him.


    This street is not particrly wide, but the flow of people is veryrge. At a nce, there are almost all kinds of shops.


    Now most of the people in the entire Kingdom of Tru have been concentrated in this royal city, which has turned into an economic cycle, and arge number of businesses have begun to sprout everywhere.


    Just one decision can change the fate of most people.


    "You are indeed right, but why haven''t you thought about joining the World Government? Then there is no need at all..."


    "You want to say why I don''t serve those Celestial Dragons?"


    Before Qing Zhi finished speaking, Chang Nuo took over directly.


    You can even clearly see the dissatisfaction on his face.


    Changnuo nced at Aokiji and continued, "By joining the World Government, you may not be attacked by anyone in name, but the key problem is that the sky is high and the emperor is far away. We are in the South China Sea, and like our Kingdom of Tru. If a small country is attacked by pirates or other countries, I''m afraid that the entire country will be gone by the time you finish discussing it.


    In addition and the most important point, I will not allow my citizens to send heavenly gold to those Tianlong people every year. Instead of doing this, why don''t I strengthen my own strength?


    But maybe there will be ideas in this regard in the future. Nothing is static, the premise is which one is more beneficial to us. "


    Qingzhi may have nodded in recognition, but at the same time, he felt that the little guy in front of him seemed to be a little too dangerous.


    "As a navy, you naturally have your own responsibilities to do, but for us as a small country, what you want to do is not that simple, and growing up is not that easy.


    In a peaceful corner of the South China Sea, all I can do is to provide these people with better living conditions and a more stable living environment.


    But now you have seen it, and you must have received the news a long time ago. The Kingdom of Roja next door has united with pirates to attack our country, which has also made us miserable and made the people''s lives miserable. "


    Chang Nuo said it again, but Qing Zhi''s face turned green and red upon hearing these words.


    It��s not like he doesn��t know the specific situation. Someone has already reported the matter. Now the Kingdom of Toru has attacked the capital of the Kingdom of Roja. ording to the current situation, in less than five days at most, the Kingdom of Roja will bepletely destroyed. Disappear into this world.


    But he didn''t say anything until the end, but he was already full of infinite curiosity towards the little boy in front of him.


    "So what are you going to do about the future direction of this country?"


    Qing Pheasant asked directly for the first time.


    "Let''s just live with it. When everything is settled, at least take a good rest for a few years. Otherwise, I''m afraid your world government will be dissatisfied. Once the CP departmentes to investigate, I guess it won''t be as easy to talk to as you?" Chang Nuo He said with a smile.


    "I didn''t expect you know quite a lot, but this is not very good!"

 Chapter 23 Invitation

    <h4>Chapter 23 Invitation</h4>


    Having only been exposed to this for less than two hours, Aokiji felt that what the little guy next to him already knew really surprised him. Such a remote country actually knew about the CP department of the World Government, and it seemed that he also knew about it. s method.


    Even if you don''t want to believe this kind of thing, there is nothing you can do about it.


    "Why are you so sure of these things?" Qing Zhi asked.


    "Is there anything I said? I''m afraid you, Lieutenant General Aokiji, are quite clear about the World Government''s intelligence department, from CP0 to CP9. I guess I don''t need to say more about their moral character, right?


    But I also believe that whether it is the World Government or your naval headquarters, no matter how important the matter is in our Kingdom of Tru, you will have no time to take care of it.


    The situation on the sea is changing, and the great era of pirates ising. How many troops do you think we have to deal with things on our side? "Chang Nuo looked at Qing Pheasant with a sinister expression.


    Next, he needs to wee the advent of the era of the four emperors on the sea. At the same time, it is estimated that the Shichibukai era will alsoe soon. The real great era of pirates has just begun. This is the main reason why he is so confident now. reason.


    Qing Zhi was really getting more and more worried as he listened. Chang Nuo seemed to have everything in his hands, which gave him a very bad feeling.


    But now that the conversation has reached this point, Aokiji has no intention of continuing the boring conversation. He asks seriously and directly, "Does your training method here seem familiar?"


    "The Sixth Form of the Navy has officially be a required course for naval training two years ago. It can break the limits of the body in terms of attack, defense and movement. Ifbined with domineering, it can definitely be the navy''s biggest trump card. Am I right? "


    Chang Nuo spoke out his words again without any attempt to hide them. Qing Zhi''s heart was as heavy as iron and he didn''t know what to say.


    The only thing he can think about now is whether there are people from the Toru Kingdom in his naval headquarters.


    But Chang Nuo''s next words directly rejected his idea.


    "Don''t worry, Lieutenant General Aokiji, these things are noting from your navy headquarters. Our Kingdom of Tru was a rtively poor country two years ago and we simply did not have the ability to send people to high-level positions in your navy.


    In addition, and most importantly, I very much hope that your Navy Headquarters can give you an exnation for what you did to our Kingdom of Tru in the next few years.


    If the Warring States Marshal is not willing, I myself would not mind making this matter public. Then the majesty of your navy will decline. This is definitely not a joke in this era of great pirates! "


    Changnuo directly began to threaten, mainly talking about what happened in the Tru Kingdom ten years ago.


    On Batl Ind, the ce where the son of the Pirate King once came, more than two thousand pregnant women were killed because of such an incident. This waspletely the most tragic incident in the history of Batl Ind.


    Qingzhi was also one of the people involved in that incident. Naturally, he knew exactly what Changnuo meant by what he said.


    But the two of them were walking on the street, and there were many people''s eyes around them. It was difficult for Qingzhi to express his feelings. He finally understood that beforeing, Warring States repeatedly exined that no matter what happened, in Tru The kingdom is a ce where no action is allowed?


    Qingzhi, who had always beenzy, suddenly became serious at this moment, and his eyes did not conceal his murderous intention towards Chang Nuo.


    "Vice-Admiral Aokiji doesn''t have to look at me like this. Of course, I''m more optimistic about Vice-Admiral Aokiji. Saikai O''Hara, I think you are still very impressed. What the Navy has done in recent years is somewhat surprising. Are you disappointed?" Chang Nuo continued to say provocatively and with a smile.


    "Oh my, it''s really a headache. I didn''t expect that little guy like you actually knows so many things. Isn''t this really embarrassing?"


    Qingzhi continued to have the samezy look as before, but looked at Changnuo seriously.


    These were supposed to be navy secrets, but I didn''t expect them all to be known to this fifteen or sixteen-year-old kid in front of me. Qingzhi''s previous prediction of Chang Nuo became more and more obvious.


    "I did not intend to use this information to ckmail the Navy Headquarters, but what happened on Bartl Ind in my Kingdom of Tru, your Navy must give an exnation for this matter!"


    Chang Nuo looked directly at Qing Pheasant domineeringly, and the domineering look in his eyes was already a bit ready toe out.


    If it weren''t for the people around, maybe they would have started to be released by now.


    "Oh my, it''s up to the Warring States Marshal to do this. I''ll just be responsible for conveying it when the timees. I can''t make promises no matter how many things I do. It''s really a troublesome thing."


    Qing Zhi saidzily.


    On the surface, he didn''t seem to care about this, but in fact, he had already begun to think about it in his heart.


    What happened on Batl Ind can be regarded as a shame for the navy, and it is the kind of news that must never be made public.


    Now that the King of Tru Kingdom is talking about this matter, he naturally has some confidence.


    Qingzhi is very aware of the current situation in the sea as a whole, and just as Chang Nuo said, the sea is changing, and the Navy headquarters cannot spare any power at all to return to the small country of the South China Sea.


    Chang Nuo was a little proud, after all, Qing Pheasant''s attitude might represent the attitude of the entire navy.


    He is not so arrogant now that he feels that his country can fight against the entire navy. If it hadn''t happened to catch up with the era of great pirates, it is estimated that his country would have been defeated several times just because he was familiar with the six-style naval skills.


    It is precisely because of these reasons that Changnuo is not worried about the Navy Headquarters sending people to investigate.


    "Lieutenant General Aoki hase a long way to work hard. He will stay in our country for a few days and take a look at our local customs. By the way, he can also guide the future national seeds we are currently cultivating."


    Chang Nuo and Qing Pheasant had already arrived at the entrance of the pce. Seeing that the other party had no intention of leaving in a short time, he opened his mouth and said directly.


    "It''s rare to have some leisure time, so I won''t disturb His Majesty King Tru."


    "Look at what you are saying. I think it won''t be long before you can be the general of the entire navy. This is the supreme position of the navy. There will be many ces where the lieutenant general can be troubled in the future." Changnuo said with a smile.


    "I wonder where your Majesty the King got this news from? You seem to know a lot?" Aoki Pheasant finally began to ask the questions in his mind.


    From the moment I first came here, all my rhythms seemed to be under the control of the other person. Whether I was talking or doing things, I always felt like I was standing naked in front of the other person.


    Qingzhi had experienced so many things, but only in front of this sixteen or seventeen-year-old boy, he showed a more cautious attitude.


    Or because I came here, no matter what I said, I was suppressed. After all, I was also a vice admiral. Facing a little guy, the feeling of being seen through was really ufortable.


    When I came here, from the moment I stepped into the territory of this country, I seemed to have an extra pair of eyes on my head. Even this person who usually behaves rtivelyzy showed a very disliked expression.


    Chang Nuo smiled, not that his goal has been achieved, at least in his own country, this is his home court, and he will never be led away by others.


    "I know a lot of things, even more than you can imagine, but so what?"


    Chang Nuo spoke very simply, and they were already in the pce as soon as he spoke.


    Before Aokiji could ask any more questions, a guard came out from the side and said respectfully to Chang Nuo, "Your Majesty, Jun and the guard captain have led the army to attack the capital of the Kingdom of Roja. The guard captain sent us a message. I want to consult here, is the next step to rush in directly or what should I say?"


    "Hey..., it''s already going so fast." Chang Nuo looked at the guard and said, then turned to Qing Pheasant and said, "Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant, are you interested in going over there to observe?"


    "I don''t have any objections. It doesn''t hurt to go over and take a look?" Qing Pheasant said.


    Anyway, the purpose of hising here is to investigate the situation of the Tru Kingdom''s army. It is estimated that the best time to witness it is on the battlefield.


    "Tell Captain Junhe to wait for now. I will take our Vice Admiral from the Navy Headquarters to observe." Chang Nuo said to the guard beside him.


    In fact, these things have already been arranged. If Junhe wants to consult on these issues, he can do it through the phone bug. There is no need for another person to pass the message through.


    No one can figure out what the King of his own family has in mind. Now the battle against the Roja Kingdom is already guaranteed, and there is no possible crisis at all.


    But Changnuo had his own ideas.


    When he first didn''t know that it was Aokiji who came to investigate, he had already thought of countless ways. Even thest thing he wanted to face was Akainu, but he also believed that the Navy Headquarters would not send this guy here at all.


    The fastest way to get from here to the capital of Roja Kingdom is by boat, which will take at least nearly two days.


    However, it only took Junhe five days to attack the opponent''s capital. Almost no one from the soldiers of the Royal Kingdom encountered along the way stopped him.


    In this way, we arrived at our destination naturally and smoothly.


    In fact, if they were willing, they would be able to rush directly into the Royal City of King Roja without much effort at all.


    Among the dozens of countries in the South China Sea, the strength of the Royal Kingdom is not too bad. Although it is not outstanding at the same time, it is still somewhat remarkable in other aspects.


    This time when he went to the Royal Kingdom, Changnuo had almost brought the high-level officials of his country with him. The most important thing was to witness the situation this time.


    As the National Ship started to set off, Junhe and others who were able to reach the capital of the Royal Kingdom directly this time were already waiting.


    This time, the total number of troops sent by the Kingdom of Tru to attack the Kingdom of Roja was only about 10,000. The other party''s country and poption were muchrger than theirs, and the number of troops was also muchrger than theirs.


    The difference is that after the King of Roya Kingdom took office, he was opposed by almost all citizens, even the army, who always lived in endless deductions.


    After just seeing the living conditions of the Kingdom of Toru, even the Kingdom of Roja, which has arger army, has almost no resistance from its army. They directly open the city gates wherever they go, and there are even many ces that have begun to wee Toru. The kingdom''s army arrives.


    Therefore, in terms of the whole journey, Jun and the others had no impact at all, and they had already arrived at the capital of the Kingdom of Roja.


    ������������


    Two dayster, when Chang Nuo appeared here with Qing Pheasant, people saw a rather incredible scene on the city wall.


    Under the witness of everyone, the people standing on the city wall were not actually troops, but most of them were pirates.


    They used the people in the city as shields to prevent Junhe and others from entering.


    However, outside the city gate, there was no trace of any war intrusion. It can be said that from the beginning to the end, none of the troops brought by Junhe were lost.


    In the past five years since the new king of the Kingdom of Roya took office, the damage that has been done to the entire Kingdom of Roya is probably beyond description in words.


    The National Ship arrived directly at the capital of the Royal Kingdom. When he saw the scene on the city wall, Chang Nuo actually smiled.


    "What do Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant think of this matter?" Chang Nuo looked at Qing Pheasant with a smile on his face and asked.


    "Your Majesty, most of the troops in the city have been controlled now. However, the number of pirates inside is estimated to be beyond our imagination." Junhe said standing next to Changnuo.


    "What exactly is going on? Why are there so many pirates in the Roja Kingdom?"


    "Your Majesty, these are all rted to the King of Roya Kingdom. Most of the pirates heree from the West Sea. The overall number of pirates is almost 8,000. There are only two pirate groups, and there are many powerful ones among them. .


    When they first came to our country, they decided that as long as they could conquer the Kingdom of Toru, all the treasures in our king''s pce would be given to these pirates. That''s why so many pirates appeared to help the Kingdom of Roja. "


    Junhe frowned and said respectfully.


    "What do Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant think about this matter?" Chang Nuo once again put the question to Qing Pheasant.


    "Oh, King Tru, don''t ask me about this kind of thing. I''m just here to watch, and I won''t help you!"


    Qing Pheasant saidzily.


    "Are you ready?"


    Changnuo looked at Junhe and asked.


    The other party immediately understood, and a mischievous smile appeared on the corner of his mouth.

 Chapter 24 A plan to trick only one person

    <h4>Chapter 24 A n to trick only one person</h4>


    It took so much effort to finally get Vice Admiral Aokiji from the Navy Headquarters here. Naturally, he was not just here to watch.


    We are already prepared for this, how could we just ignore it so easily?


    "Lieutenant General Aokiji, although I don''t expect you to take action this time, I just want to trouble you about something. There are so many pirates in the city, I wonder if you can use your strength to break the city gate? "Chang Nuo said.


    "This is a troublesome matter. It would be bad if our marshal finds out." Qing Zhi saidzily.


    "Lieutenant General, I misunderstood. I didn''t ask you to hurt anyone. I just wanted you to help me break the opponent''s city gate. This shouldn''t be a big problem for you, right?" Chang Nuo said again. Said once.


    "ording to the strength of you people, it shouldn''t take much effort to open a city gate, right?"


    Qingzhi was not stupid, but he didn''t realize where exactly what happened? But I can always feel that the little guy in front of me seems to be cheating me.


    Seeing that Aokiji was still hesitating, Changnuo said in a deep voice to Junhe next to him, "Next, take down Royal City at all costs. By then, all the pirates will not need to leave any one behind. Kill them all." .��


    "Your Majesty, those people..."


    "War will inevitably cause losses. Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant doesn''t want to, so we have to do this!" Chang Nuo said with a sad face.


    "Okay, it''s just a door. I''ll just help you." Qing Zhi listened to what Chang Nuo said and looked at the other party''s appearance, and said with helplessness.


    I have enjoyed good food and drink here these past few days, and even doing such a thing did not vite what the Warring States Marshal said when he came.


    Destroying a door doesn''t hurt anyone, so it won''t have any special impact.


    Hearing that Qing Pheasant had agreed, Chang Nuo''s smile immediately blossomed.


    Then he looked directly at Junhe with a look that you knew, and Junhe began to slowly retreat back.


    Just when Qingzhi was about to take action, several people not far from them were facing him with phone bugs.


    Not to mention how he could be a general, Qingzhi just pressed it on the ground, and instantly the frost began to spread towards the door.


    However, they are about a hundred meters away from the gate, but this distance is not a problem at all for a person who is about to be a general.


    The entire gate of King Roja''s capital was sealed by ice in just an instant. When the ice shattered, nothing could stop the people of the Kingdom of Tru.


    Of course, at the moment when the gate shattered, hundreds of the King''s Guardsmen on moon steps, and many others who were moving quickly, all rushed to the city wall in an instant.


    The people who were held hostage were also rescued in an instant.


    As for the pirates, at least none of them on the city wall could survive.


    However, every scene was recorded by the phone bug.


    This was Chang Nuo''s n. Early the next morning, the newspaper delivery gull had already started sending information about today''s situation.


    And it also upied the headlines of newspapers.


    The news that "The Kingdom of Roya in the South China Sea was upied by pirates, and the Navy Headquarters Admiral is working with the Kingdom of Toru to rescue the Kingdom of Roya." instantly aroused everyone''s curiosity.


    The key is the scene where Aoki used his power to break open the gate of Royal Capital. A whole photo was disyed directly on the newspaper.


    Whether it is the newspaper headlines, the content, or even the photos, everything has proven the authenticity of the incident.


    Especially the photo of pirates holding people hostage highlights the authenticity of this matter.


    The reason why Chang Nuo did this was to provide him with a prerequisite for upying the Royal Kingdom.


    First of all, the pirates captured the Kingdom of Roja. Their purpose of attacking the Kingdom of Roja was just to save the people here.


    The appearance and action of Qing Pheasant only increased the authenticity of this matter.


    After all, this thing is the best proof for the associate general of the Navy Headquarters.


    The witnesses, evidence, facts and experiences are all disyed here. Even though the Kingdom of Roja has now be the territory of the Kingdom of Tru, no one from the outside world dares to raise objections.


    Even if it is the World Government, he cannot hold an objection to this matter.


    Chang Nuo just wanted everyone in the world to know, otherwise Junhe would have been able to lead his people and directly invade the capital of the Royal Kingdom as early as the beginning.


    I stayed for such a long time just to wait for this n to appear.


    Chang Nuo had every reason to believe in his own judgment. Even if the Navy Headquarters sent anyone here, the final oue would not change in any way.


    Even Akainu, who is the most difficult to talk to, may be a hundred times moreplicated than Aokiji, or even easier to talk to.


    Akainu is a person who upholds absolute justice in the navy. He will never allow pirates to threaten in this way.


    Now all these goals have been achieved, and Qingzhi doesn''t even know that he has been used by others.


    "Losta, count how many Baileys there are in the entire Royal Pce of Loya. When the timees, all of them will be used by the people of Loya Kingdom." As soon as Changnuo walked into the city gate, he shouted directly to Losta behind him. arrive.


    The key point is that before the king''s capital has been defeated, he has already begun to think about how to divide the money next. Even Qing Pheasant, who has always been rtivelyzy, looks at Chang Nuo with contempt.


    Luosta walked forward gracefully, pushed the frame of his sses with his hand, and said in a very gentlemanly manner, "Don''t worry, my Majesty, I am still willing to do this kind of thing."


    "We are determined to win the royal capital now, and there are probably no obstacles. As for the Devil Fruit users in Royal Royal City, Jun and you are responsible for capturing them all, and keeping them all alive will be of great use to me then. Changnuo said to Junhe.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    "What do you want those Devil Fruit users to do?" Aokiji asked curiously.


    "Of course they must be executed. These people have already caused me to lose many soldiers. Naturally, I need to pay the price they deserve." Chang Nuo said directly.


    It''s just that he didn''t say the purpose of doing this. In this world, there are really countless people with devil fruit abilities. Although no one knows where these devil fruitse from, the current Changnuo has at least One thing that can be done is to control a killed Devil Fruit user and the location where his Devil Fruit descends.


    Since possessing the space ability, Changnuo has been able to control a space barrier. Although this area is not veryrge, it ispletely sufficient overall.


    Qingzhi looked at the little guy next to him. It was a bit unbelievable that he had already done such a trick at the age of sixteen. It was estimated that when he saw the newspaper, he would go crazy.


    Aoki appeared in the Royal Kingdom and saw the fighting style of the troops of the Toru Kingdom. The most important thing that shocked him was that almost all of these people were trained in the Sixth Form of the Navy. In addition, they were fighting Team cooperation is much stricter than that of the Navy.


    A country that was in such a state of ruin could develop to such an extent in just two or three years. The green pheasant is really unimaginable. What will this little guy be when he grows up?


    What he was more curious about, and the main reason why he had been following Chang Nuo, was to understand how Chang Nuo knew so many things about the Navy Headquarters and the New World.


    The people in the Kingdom of Roja did not resist as expected, especially those in the royal city. Some of them even danced and celebrated that Chang Nuo had brought the army to liberate them.


    After all, in order to prepare for this time, he spent a lot of money to create a single page of the Kingdom of Tru, so that each of them could understand the benefits they could enjoy after bing a citizen of the Kingdom of Tru.


    Although the Kingdom of Roja does not belong to the World Government United Nations, in some respects, the people in the World Government are still very concerned about the situation in the South China Sea.


    This time, if the Kingdom of Tru merges with the Kingdom of Roja, it can be thergest country in the entire South China Sea region.


    It''s just that the Kingdom of Roja is like this now, and it''s probably not sure how long it will take to recover.


    At least it will take more than two years for him to be what the Tru Kingdom is now.


    Mainly because its poption andnd area are muchrger than those of the Tru Kingdom.


    "Mr. Aokiji, I wonder what you think when you saw the guards of my Kingdom of Tru today?"


    Chang Nuo asked as he walked and looked at Qing Pheasant.


    In this city of the Royal Kingdom, the two of them seemed to be walking in their own country, without any sense of disobedience.


    Qingzhi was even more stunned. He didn''t expect that this little guy would actually ask him such a question?


    It is true that he originally wanted to investigate the situation of the army of the Kingdom of Tru, and what he discovered this time has surprised him. The navy''s sixth-form skills seem to be used more skillfully here, and the training method seems to be better than The training method in the navy is more effective.


    After thinking for a moment, Aokiji said leisurely, "That''s pretty good. I hope you can maintainw and order here and prevent pirates from appearing in the South China Sea. This is your greatest ability."


    "I think you can rest assured on this point, at least in the realm under my jurisdiction, such a situation will not happen." Chang Nuo said.


    "Oh, you said I encountered such aplicated thing this time, how should I report it when I return to the Navy Headquarters?" Aoki said with a troubled expression.


    "So what if I tell the truth?" Chang Nuo asked curiously.


    "Didn''t you say it before? It''s just that this time when you merge the Roja Kingdom into the Tru Kingdom, the World Government will definitely send people to observe you, and the CP you learned about will most likelye to your country. ." Qing Pheasant said.


    "Is this the kind of thing you are talking about? There is no need to worry about it. At least in our country in the South China Sea, there is nothing worthy of the world government''s attention. In the end, at best, they just want us to join the world government. If there is nothing special If you join, you will join. Anyway, there will be no loss to our country."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    "I remember that this is not what you said two days ago? I didn''t know who said it at that time. After joining the World Government, it was to serve the group of Celestial Dragons and hand over the heavenly gold. It is very likely that it will lead to a more serious situation in our country. People are in dire straits?��


    Qing Pheasant closed one eye and squinted at Chang Nuo with the other eye.


    "Does Lieutenant General Aoki feel that the Tianlong people are short of money? They are undoubtedly the most superior in terms of life. At least in terms of money, there is definitely no need to worry. When the timees, I will give them two rare objects, and it will be natural It can rece the existence of gold in the sky." Chang Nuo said.


    "I really look forward to what your little guy will be like in the future, and even more to how far this country will develop in the future. But in this process, I don''t want you to be able to touch the bottom line of the Navy Headquarters. By that time, you can be safe in a country. I can��t help you.�� Qing Pheasant said.


    "I''m not as boring as you think. I''m quite content staying in this quiet corner. There''s no need to argue with your navy headquarters." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Then this is best."


    Qingzhi now really wants to know, what kind of strength is King Tru in front of him? Is the other party a devil fruit user?


    From the time he came here to the present, he had never seen Chang Nuo take action in a week, and his behavior was extremely normal. This was what made Qing Pheasant feel abnormal.


    Unknowingly, the two of them had been following the army, and now they had reached the front of King Roya''s pce.


    There was no resistance from the army along the way, it was just some pirates causing trouble.


    But after arriving in front of the pce, almost all the pirates who had been causing trouble had been arrested, including those with devil fruit abilities among the pirates.


    But this pce gave everyone a very bad feeling.


    If you look at it through sight, hearing, and color, you can sense that there is a very evil aura in the pce, as if it should not exist in this world at all.


    "Do you feel it?" Chang Nuo asked with a serious look at Qing Zhi beside him.


    "Of course I feel it. I have a very bad feeling."


    Qingzhi put away hiszy look and said with the same serious face.


    "Junhe, arrange for everyone to retreat immediately. Without my order, no one is allowed toe within 500 meters of the pce. Let everyone enter the first-levelbat readiness state and get up to 12 points."


    Chang Nuo shouted directly to Jun He who was standing not far away, and then looked at Luosta and said in a low voice, "Luosta, arrange for the people in the city to evacuate, and you must use the fastest time to do this." You must do it well.��

 Chapter 25 Natural Dog

    <h4>Chapter 25 Natural Dog</h4>


    No one understood what happened. Although Junhe believed in his Majesty the King, he was still stunned after hearing these words.


    "What are you doing in a daze? Take the time to prepare." Chang Nuo yelled again.


    It was not until this moment that everyone realized that the matter had indeed developed to a very serious level. Level 1bat readiness was not achieved even when attacking the Royal Kingdom.


    Even Aokiji, as a marine, had a sense of color that made him a little frightened. What was hidden in the Royal Pce in the Kingdom of Roya?


    At this moment, all the guards of the Kingdom of Tru who had been besieged here all began to retreat quickly, and Luosta began tomand these guards, so that the people outside the pce began to leave this ce.


    Now none of them know what is hidden in the pce, but the only thing that is certain is that the things in the pce must not be simple.


    The release of powerful energy directly makes people shudder.


    Junhemanded all the guards and immediately began to assist Luosta in helping the people retreat.


    However, at this moment, a blue smoke began to emit from the pce. The huge smoke began to spread in all directions, and all the people in the pce began to run out as if they were desperate.


    "Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant, have you seen anything?" Chang Nuo asked seriously.


    "It should be a Devil Fruit, and the ability of the Devil Fruit has not been controlled yet. If this thing breaks out among the people, no one in the entire city will be spared." Aokiji also said with an embarrassed look.


    I came here just to investigate the matter, but now the situation is serious enough that I may have to take action.


    "Junhe, Luosta, hurry up and arrange a retreat..."


    After Chang Nuo shouted, he started to prepare to rush inside.


    As the smoke continued to fill the air, those who had not escaped from the pce fell to the ground one after another. Those who had already started to run out began to scramble towards the outside.


    "King Tru, this matter seems a bit troublesome. This is a matter between your two countries. It is not convenient for me to get involved too much." Qingzhi wanted to stand here and watch at this moment. After all, he really cannot participate in the affairs between the countries. Fight.


    All he can do now is to help those people avoid suffering. As for the rest, Qing Pheasant really can''t do it.


    Chang Nuo didn''t force it but just smiled and said, "I hope Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant can ensure the safety of these people. As for the rest, I think our King''s Guard is capable of solving it."


    But after all, at this time, a dog-like creature jumped out of the pce. The reason why I say this is because this thing is simply astonishingly big.


    When he stood up, he was almost as tall as a building. He was about 20 meters tall, and the smoke emitted from his body made it impossible to describe him as a dog?


    "Help..."


    "Who can help me����"


    Suddenly, those who were preparing to escape from the pce were yelling as they ran.


    "Mad, what on earth is the King of Loya doing? He''s actually feeding Devil Fruit to dogs!" Changnuo looked at the situation in front of him with some anger.


    Fortunately, this thing doesn''t know the ability to control Devil Fruit at all, so it can''t use it with its own strength.


    But now that the characteristics of this creature are known, there is no need to worry about other things.


    The demon sword Muramasa instantly appeared in the hands of Chang Nuo. Qing Zhi looked at it with some curiosity. He wanted to see this person who had trained the country''s king''s guard to be like this. So what kind of strength did their king have?


    But when the demon sword appeared, Qing Pheasant was still a little surprised.


    As a person who has lived for decades, Qing Pheasant can tell at a nce that the knife in Chang Nuo''s hand is not simple.


    Chang Nuo directly stepped on the moon steps and flew up, and then he was two hundred meters away from the huge wolf dog in an instant, and then a sword sh flew out instantly.


    The powerful force didn''t even take a second to prate this huge creature. But what happened next was beyond everyone''s imagination. After the sword light prated the creature instantly, it seemed that it was not harmed at all.


    "Natural fruit?"


    Chang Nuo waspletely speechless. If he were not here, his guards and the people would have died who knows how many times.


    A wild creature with natural energy, and it can''t control the demonic energy emitted by its body. The key is natural energy, and ordinary people''s attacks are useless! Now in the entire Toru Kingdom, Shunwa is the only one who can skillfully use Haki.


    But faced with such a situation, even if he has domineering power, there is nothing he can do. He cannot get close to this huge creature, so everything is in vain.


    The people in the city had begun to evacuate in an orderly and rapid manner with the cooperation of the King''s Guards. However, they all turned around and saw this huge creature. No one said that they did not feel fear.


    The Roya Pce came up with such a thing, and Chang Nuo had reason to believe that after this guy couldn''t control the Devil Fruit ability in his body, everyone in the entire pce was probably already cold.


    "I didn''t expect this guy to be a swordsman! But if he didn''t have domineering power..."


    Qingzhi looked at Changnuo who was fighting, his eyes full of admiration, but at his age, if he could kill the domineering force, that would be the ultimate way to end the battle.


    But before he finished speaking, he already saw Changnuo''s arms turning ck, and his domineering aura instantly attached to Muramasa.


    "Dragon Nest sh-Bite..."


    A sh with domineering power flew out instantly.


    The ck sword light once again flew towards the huge canine creature.


    The other party seemed to have felt the threat and started yelling at Chang Nuo.


    And apanied by the blue smoke, it rolled towards Changnuo.


    But at this moment, the sword light has already attacked the opponent.


    Just one blow of the knife caused this huge creature to fall to the ground instantly.


    With the death of this canine creature, the Devil Fruit ability originally attached to him also dissipated instantly.


    At this time, the entire pce area hadpletely turned into a dead silence. No one survived, and every one of them even maintained the panic look they had before they were alive.


    Originally, I had just started to feel the huge umtion of energy, which should be this thing, the devil storm formed after eating the devil fruit, but at this moment, there is no need to worry about other things.


    The matter between the Kingdom of Toru and the Kingdom of Roja is now over.


    In the end, no one from the royal family of the Royal Kingdom came out alive.


    "The flying sh is really surprising!" Qingzhi said to himself.


    No wonder he was so surprised. Even though the dog had eaten the Devil Fruit and didn''t know how to control it, the aura and energy it exuded were definitely not something that ordinary people could deal with.


    For those who use swords, flying shes arepletely beyond the scope of swordsmen. To be precise, the current Changnuo ispletely a swordsman-like figure.


    To have be a swordsman at such an early age is something that countless people cannot achieve in their lifetime.


    However, Qing Pheasant didn''t know that this level of strength was just scratching the surface for Chang Nuo.


    After the battle with the dog, Chang Nuo jumped down from the air. Now that the Kingdom of Roya no longer poses any threat to all of them, they only need to take over the territory belonging to the Kingdom of Roya with their heart.


    But for everyone, this attack on Royal Capital was indeed a thrilling one.


    But the good thing now is that things are finally over.


    This time the battle will make the headlines of the entire newspaper.


    "Thank you very much Lieutenant General Aokiji for everything you have done for us!"


    Chang Nuo slowly walked up to Qing Pheasant and said to him.


    "It''s really rare. What King Tru said is really a bit ufortable. I was just a spectator, but I didn''t expect King Tru to be really surprising!"


    Qingzhi said calmly andzily.


    "I didn''t expect that the Lieutenant General could say such a thing. In front of you, this is nothing more than wielding a sword. There is no real harm. It is nothing more than self-protection." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, now that the matter in the pce has been resolved, do the people in the city still need to retreat?"


    Junhe stepped forward and asked Changnuo respectfully.


    "No need for now, you and Luosta will count how many aboriginal people there are in the Roja Kingdom. Follow the rules of the Tru Kingdom. It must be urate to the number of people in each family. Also, It��s about their living conditions and current situation. In the future, these will also be our own citizens. Don��t treat them with any mentality." Changnuo said.


    "Okay, Your Majesty."


    "Now it''s time for you to deal with your country''s affairs. I have learned everything I came here to know, so I won''t bother you here anymore. It''s time to return to my naval headquarters to report on this incident. journey."


    Qing Pheasant also stepped forward and said.


    Chang Nuo, no matter what, the other party is still the master of the country, and the attitude and understanding that Qing Zhi should have still need to be abided by.


    "Why are you in such a hurry? Lieutenant General Aokiji rarelyes to our Kingdom of Tru once. After a few days of good rest, let us do our best asndlords and entertain the Lieutenant General well. After all, this time on your side, too It helps us a lot!��


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "It''s no longer necessary. Your ce is now a ce of right and wrong. It would be better for you and me to leave as soon as possible." Aoki Pheasant still said.


    As Qing Zhi said this, he was already preparing to leave, not giving Chang Nuo any chance at all.


    Now that I have understood what I need to understand this time, I can give an exnation when I go back, which at least means I havepleted the task.


    Watching Qing Zhi leave, Chang Nuo showed a sessful smile on his lips.


    The real fun is yet toe, where are we now?


    "Losta, Lieutenant General Aokiji came to our Kingdom of Tru to help us rescue the Kingdom of Roja. We must do a good job in publicity to tell others about the friendly rtionship between us and the navy." Nuo said to Luosta who was now standing next to him.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, everything has been arranged now, and there will definitely not be any problems." Losta adjusted his sses and said.


    "Let''s go and take a look at this luxurious royal pce of the Royal Kingdom. Maybe we can move the location here in the future. It feels pretty good."


    Chang Nuo walked in front, looking at the entrance of the pce where corpses were still lying on the ground. The luxury of this ce was countless times better than where he lived now.


    "Your Majesty, do you want us to clean up the pce first?" Losta said.


    "Is it necessary to care about such a thing? Living in this world, if you want to live well, the first thing you have to do is not be afraid of anything. Luosta, as a business leader, you will have to face too many things in the future." Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty, I have remembered it."


    Luosta stopped and said respectfully.


    He didn''t pay much attention to it. No one was going to clean up the things in King Roya''s pce now. Most people had already gone to maintain order.


    Although almost no one in the entire Roja Kingdom objects to the invasion of the Tru Kingdom, there are still many people who want to take advantage of the chaos.


    Chang Nuo stepped over the corpses and then walked towards the pce with domineering steps.


    Here, what you can see with every step you take can only be described as luxury.


    For a ce as poor as the Roja Kingdom, it takes a lot of hard work from the people to build such a pce.


    The highest point of the entire pce is about a hundred meters tall. The facade of the building is somewhat simr to the European style, and the columns that appear in front of you are shocking.


    Just stepping into the pce gate and seeing the marble paved on the ground, even an inexperienced person can feel how expensive it is.


    The ground was polished as smooth as a mirror, and no trees were nted on both sides of the road. Instead, it turned into an unusuallyrgewn square.


    The greenwn makes people want to go up there and just lie down and have a rest.


    The road under your feet goes straight forward, and the details in every frame are quite extensive. And this road extends from the main gate of the pce to the main hall.


    This distance was at least about three hundred meters away, and because of the demonic ability released by the big dog, the whole road was almost covered with corpses.


    No one has a detailed count of how many people there are, but there must be at least a thousand people.

 Chapter 26 Royal Palace

    <h4>Chapter 26 Royal Pce</h4>


    The corpses in front of him no longer caused any shock, at least to Chang Nuo.


    Perhaps he has begun to gradually adapt to such an environment. After all, aftering to this world, he has to face these things frequently. For him, he cannot have a heart of kindness at all.


    So he still stepped over the corpses and slowly began to walk towards the pce hall, while Luosta followed with a few people.


    If it weren''t for the presence of so many corpses, the scenery of this pce could be said to be perfect, but even if there were so many lying on the ground, it would hardly affect the beauty in this aspect.


    However, after entering the pce, everyone was astonished by the luxury inside. The same circr dome, but at least fifty meters high. In the wide hall, even the sound of breathing began to echo.


    The throne at the top of the hall, it doesn''t take much thinking to know that this must be the exclusive ce for King Roya.


    The golden seat is obviously made of pure gold. A huge red gem is iid on the top of the seat. It is almost two meters wide. It is no problem to seat two or three people.


    The walls on both sides of the pce, including the pirs, are all decorated with gold. Just the decoration of the pce hall would be impossible toplete without billions of beli.


    As a country with a veryrgend area, the Kingdom of Roja has always been in dire straits of living conditions for its citizens. It is really unimaginable. What is the level of extravagance of this king?


    There are no corpses in this hall. They must have run out, so it looks particrly elegant and luxurious.


    The top dome of the pce is entirely made of ss. The light shines down along the ss, making the pce look magnificent as a whole.


    "Your Majesty, this ce is so shocking!"


    Luosta looked like he had never seen the world before and said with emotion.


    "I don''t know how many people''s flesh and blood these things are made from. It''s really surprising. But now I''m more curious about one thing, that is, how much money is there in this king''s treasury?" Changnuo smiled. said.


    "Your Majesty will make the statistics as soon as possible and submit them to Your Majesty at that time."


    Losta said.


    "What do you think about moving the pce to this ce in the future?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "It''s not impossible. It''s just that the two ces are far apart. I think the location of our Tru Pce is better. The Nanniwa Port has been established and perfected. After that, all themerce began to be concentrated in that ce. However, it is different here. It��s not that convenient inparison,�� Losta said.


    "You''re right, it''s a pity that such a wonderful building is missing." Chang Nuo said with a slight sigh.


    "The business content I nned before will be implemented in this area as soon as possible in the future. After staying here for two days, we will hurry back.


    Let��s sort out the ns we need to make in the future from beginning to end. I don��t require that cities like Jiluo and Gucangli be like ours now within two years, but at least within two years, all the people��s survival problems must be solved. The question, as to what should be done next, is something you must consider.


    You must give me a n before you go back. You are not only the country''s money bag, but more importantly, you are the god who maintains the lives of the people. "


    Changnuo said calmly to Luosta with no expression on his face.


    However, after the other party heard this, he looked cautious, but inside he was filled with excitement and other emotions.


    This is a big project, and even Lossta has to treat it with caution. Fortunately, he and his people have already been considering these things before, and now they are just making some slight changes based on the actual situation of the country.


    When Luosta was recognized by Chang Nuo for the first time, he was just the person responsible formunicating with the outside world in the pce. Chang Nuo liked this guy''s cleverness and brains, and directly made him go from the lowest level to a top cadres of the country.


    But the facts have proved that Changnuo''s overall decision-making was not wrong, and Luosta has indeed demonstrated his value in the Tru Kingdom.


    From the beginning of the country''s poverty to the present, earth-shaking changes have been achieved in more than two years. Although all the nning was issued by Chang Nuo, Luosta was the implementer from beginning to end, and there are many aspects All have exceeded Changnuo��s early forecasts.


    Now that Luosta heard that His Majesty the King had achieved such a mission, he no longer felt the anxiety and excitement he felt at first, but felt more of a sense of responsibility and responsibility.


    Luosta rarely pushed up the frames of his sses. He crossed his hands on his waist and bowed respectfully. He said in a calm and soft voice, "Your Majesty, don''t worry. I will definitely make aparison for you in the past two days." Satisfactory nning.��


    "You have worked hard on this matter, and the country will not forget what you have done. All the hard work will be paid back to you in the future."


    "Your Majesty is serious," Luosta said quickly.


    Chang Nuo looked at the hunched-over Luosta and patted his shoulder with relief. Luosta was nearly ten years older than Chang Nuo, but his thinking could make everyone surrender.


    "Let''s go and take a look at what the King of Roya Kingdom looks like, and let others look for him. I don''t know where he died at this time?" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "King Roya? Your Majesty, the big fat man lying on the ground in front of the hall just now should be King Roya!"


    When Luosta heard what Chang Nuo said, he immediately thought about it.


    After all, when I came in just now, I noticed that the big fat man lying there who waspletely dead, and the crown on his head, was obviously not someone else. Moreover, there were no people in the pce hall, and it was obvious that almost all of them died. Outside, as for their king, a guy with little strength, it is naturally impossible to run faster than others.


    "Really? Then we''d better take a look quickly..."


    Chang Nuo was really as curious as a child at this moment. When he came in, he really didn''t pay much attention to the people lying on the ground. Anyway, they were in the main hall now. Walking out the door is just a matter of a few steps.


    But when I walked out, I saw a fat man who looked to be at least five or six hundred pounds lying on the ground. The clothes he was wearing were made of cloth made in his own country.


    He was decorated with such luxurious decorations, especially the crown on his head, which was iid with more than a dozen huge gems.

 Chapter 27 The newspaper that shocked the world

    <h4>Chapter 27 The newspaper that shocked the world</h4>


    As for the big fat man''s face, no one wanted to see it. He was dead now anyway, and Chang Nuo didn''t even think about taking onest look at him.


    I have never seen what he looks like before, and I don��t want to know about it now. It��s just that I know that the other party is indeed dead, which is more important.


    After Chang Nuo knelt down and looked at it for a while, he confirmed his true identity and rolled his eyes in contempt.


    "I really don''t know how this guy has survived all these years. As a king, it would be quite shameful for him to die if he has brought his country into such a horrible state.


    Luosta, this guy still has some valuable things on him. He won''t need them since he''s dead anyway. Remember to put them into the treasury. "Chang Nuo turned his head and said to Luosta who was standing behind him.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, I will definitely do a good job." Luosta said with a smile.


    When Chang Nuo said such words, several people behind him, including the guards, were a little surprised. No matter how quiet he was, he was still the leader of a country. Although he failed now, his identity has not been lost.


    A person has just died and his body has not yet cooled down. If you start to treat him like this now, it is really satisfying.


    Outside the pce


    "Jun He, captain of the guard, there are too many people who are unwilling to go back and want to see our King. How should we deal with this kind of thing?"


    On the streets outside the pce, people who were originally nning to evacuate to the royal city, because after the big dog died and there was no threat, all began to ask to return to where they lived, but now the streets are still overcrowded, and there is no one He had a hostile mentality, but instead he had a huge smile on his face.


    Each of them is looking forward to seeing the face of His Majesty the King of Tru Kingdom, at least to let them remember what the king who came to save them looks like?


    When Junhe heard his subordinates report this matter, the expression on his face was generally helpless.


    Before this, except for encountering this kind of situation in the royal city of my own country, I had never thought about or heard of it in other ces.


    Especially when their country has just been upied, it is indeed surprising that ordinary people still have such great enthusiasm.


    Junhe was also very helpless. He had already seen this scene, but he could not directly let the guards disperse the enthusiasm of the people.


    After thinking for a while, Junhe could only say to the guards below, "Let''s do this for now! But we must pay attention to maintaining order and not let any problems ur to these people. There is also a high possibility that there will be people in the crowd who are unfavorable to His Majesty the King." People, you must also pay attention to these things."


    "yes����"


    Junhe turned to look in the direction of the pce. He also wanted to take a look there, but as the captain of the king''s guard, he still needed to understand the priorities of the matter clearly.


    Especially for Junhe, on the surface he is just the captain of the king''s guard, but in fact he is almost equivalent to the general of the entire country, responsible for supporting the deployment of the entire country''s army.


    The burden on him is also very heavy. In this country, as far as he feels, the most powerful person in the country besides His Majesty the King should belong to him.


    "Geju,e here..."


    Junhe shouted while looking at a young man standing not far away who was chatting.


    After hearing the sound, the other party hurried over and shouted respectfully, "Captain of the guard, what are your orders?"


    "How are the captured pirates doing now? His Majesty the King specifically ordered that those with Devil Fruit abilities must be well controlled."


    Junhe looked at each other and asked directly.


    "Don''t worry, captain, these people arepletely under control and have all put on restraint cors. They are all in cages now, and there will be no idents to any of them.


    Ge Jue replied seriously.


    "How many people have been confirmed to have devil fruit abilities? What are their abilities?" Shunhe asked again.


    "Captain, these things have been confirmed. A total of eleven Devil Fruit ability users have been captured in the entire Roja Kingdom. ording to interrogation statistics, these people are all from the West Sea. The Devil Fruit abilities have also been recorded in detail and can be submitted at any time. Over to you and Your Majesty." Ge Jue stood at attention and replied.


    "You must not be careless. The more this timees, the more careful you must be before telling them to be more alert." Junhe said.


    Each of those pirates has already put on a neck cor, and this thing is made of fine steel. It can even be said that it cannot be made with the current technology. It also incorporates the characteristics of sea tower stone, which canpletely suppress demons. The ability of those with fruit abilities.


    In addition to its own hardness, the inside is equivalent to a bomb that can explode at any time. Changnuo also spent a lot of money to buy it from the system space.


    The main reason for purchasing these gadgets is to deal with Devil Fruit users. Now they are consideredmbs to be ughtered, but no one knows whether some special situations may happen next.


    On the surface, everything is going very smoothly, but in reality, no one dares to guess what is going on.


    The Kingdom of Roja is different from the previous Kingdom of Toru. There are already many nobles in this country, and almost all of them are the king''s confidants. They usually squeeze and treat the people harshly when doing things.


    But when the war broke out, all those so-called nobles disappeared overnight.


    No one can guarantee whether they will have any backup in the end, but in a ce like the South China Sea, Junhe fully believes in the strength of His Majesty the King, and it is enough to dominate this area.


    But even so, he is still meticulous in doing things and does everything to perfection. This is the kind of result he wants.


    ������������


    It''s time for the next day.


    The lively thing these days is not the Tru Kingdom, but the Navy Headquarters Base.


    Because the Toru Kingdom attacked the Roya Kingdom, the newspaper finally turned to save the citizens of the Roya Kingdom. The key was the blue pheasant attached to the photo. Even the World Government waspletely helpless when it saw this kind of thing.


    The moment the newspaper appeared, the news almost spread throughout the pirate world.


    The newspaper office spared no effort to copy these things. At this moment, whether it was the pirates, the navy, the World Government, or other countries, they all knew that there was a country like the Toru Kingdom in the South China Sea.


    Moreover, it was clearly marked in the newspaper that "we are forever friends with the Navy."

 Chapter 28 The navy fell into the pit?

    <h4>Chapter 28 The navy fell into the pit?</h4>


    The newspaper this time can be regarded as causing a thousand waves with one stone. The newspaper not only contained information about the friendship between the Toru Kingdom and the Navy, but also included photos of King Toru and Aoki Pheasant chatting.


    The most important thing is that there is no way that Changnuo will miss this opportunity to promote its own country. The various advertisements above are also shy. Anyway, in this era, few people are aware of this marketing method.


    But those people at the Navy Headquarters base are all dumbfounded now.


    Aokiji hasn''t returned to the Navy Headquarters base yet, but now the phone bug in his arms has rang countless times.


    ����������������


    In the naval headquarters base.


    "Wow haha����"


    There was augh that couldn''t stop. Garp looked at Warring States. The moment he saw the newspaper, he couldn''t help butugh.


    "Garp, you bastard, can you stopughing! Don''t you want to go back to your hometown in Donghai? Get out of here and don''t let me see you again."


    Sengoku yelled angrily.


    However, Garp continued to smile and eat as if nothing had happened. The newspaper in his hand was still there. The most conspicuous ce was the photos of Changnuo and Aokiji.


    "I didn''t expect that a group of us old guys would be tricked by a little king this time. The key to rescuing the country controlled by pirates is that our Navy''s associate general also participated. The little guy made a good calction, and now it is estimated that Even the world government is having a headache, and even so, they can��t say a word.��


    Garp said with a smile, but he also admired the other party''s scheming. Taking over a country and not being criticized by everyone outside was the most brilliant method.


    The key is that as soon as this newspaperes out, the Navy Headquarters Base is equivalent to having an agreement with the Kingdom of Toru. The Navy Commodore is involved in the war. No matter how you look at the Navy Headquarters Base, you will not be able to escape this time.


    "Garp, what do you think we should do now? Before I left, I specifically told Aokiji that no matter what happens, he must not participate in the battle between the two countries. But look at the current situation. It was announced so obviously."


    Warring States said still somewhat angrily.


    "What''s the use of pursuing these things now! Instead of that, why not see what the little king wants to do? I think this matter is definitely not an ident. The whole thing is like a big chess game for us to jump into. ." Karp said.


    However, for Chang Nuo, when he first went to Rogge Town and did not restrict the abilities of his subordinates, his purpose was to send someone from the navy to prove the trust between his country and the navy headquarters. There is a friendly rtionship between them, but although things have changed qualitatively now, the final oue is what they want to see.


    Even this time the war between the two countries has pushed this matter to a peak.


    So now the entire naval base is in aplete headache, and thest thing they want to see is this kind of thing.


    The Navy Headquarters itself pursues absolute justice and does not favor any country or force. But now that this incident has urred, the bnce of this so-called absolute justice has tilted.


    In any case, this matter has a rtivelyrge impact on the navy, but they have nothing to do. After all, the era of great pirates has arrived. All major forces on the sea have gradually merged, and the era of pirates has also begun. It has developed to its peak.


    The navy is already exhausted just to deal with these pirates, let alone deal with the Tru Kingdom where the sky is high and the emperor is far away.


    The South China Sea itself is the weakest among the four sea areas. Even if something like this happens, the Navy headquarters base can only suppress the matter.


    But in the office of Marshal Sengoku at the Navy Headquarters, Garp and Sengoku looked at each other, probably feeling unspeakable pain in their hearts.


    Garp doesn''t care, but the Warring States Period is really full of troubles now. As a wise general, he really doesn''t have any good ideas at the moment.


    "I will go back tomorrow. This matter will not have much impact on the navy. I believe King Tru will not make any excessive moves. He will wait until the pirate situation is stabilized. Just go deal with it," Karp said.


    "It can only be the."


    Warring States also said.


    But what they didn''t know was that in the following days, the Tru Kingdom''s business development path had reached a rapid speed.


    All merchant ships hang the g of the Kingdom of Tru and the g of the navy and sail on the sea. Even if they encounter pirates, they don''t have to stay away. Even if they pass by them, few pirates dare to attack them.


    This thing is the purpose of Changnuo. Business is the economic lifeline of this country. This is the cheapest and simplest way to maximize benefits.


    Because after this incident, let alone whether other neighboring countries had any thoughts about the Tru Kingdom, in terms of strength, they did not dare to make any move.


    Since the Kingdom of Roja was upied, the entire Kingdom of Tru has be thergest country in the South China Sea.


    The poption of the entire country also belongs to thergest among all countries in the South China Sea.


    The Tru Pce was still the same one as before. Chang Nuo did not choose to use the more luxurious Luo Ya Pce.


    Instead, he chose to demolish the whole ce and put all the valuable things into the pce treasury.


    If they really use the pce of the original Kingdom of Roja, let alone the possibility of being criticized by people with ulterior motives, the things in front of them will not be of any benefit to them.


    The Royal Pce of Tru is close to the coast, and the royal city has be the core area of ??economic development of the entire Kingdom of Tru. These things cannot be abandoned.


    Changnuo doesn''t have the same idea as King Roja. It''s really useless to live in such a luxurious ce. Instead of doing this, it''s better to improve the country''s economy.


    But most kings have not considered this kind of thing, or have no such concept at all.


    These people hardly cherish the throne that has been passed down, otherwise their country would not have be so impoverished.


    One month after this incident ended, the first major meeting was held in the Royal Pce of Tru.


    There were a lot of people participating in this big meeting, almost a hundred or so people.


    The Kingdom of Tru also began to n to carry out special reforms of its own country.

 Chapter 29 Public Meeting of the Kingdom

    <h4>Chapter 29 Public Meeting of the Kingdom</h4>


    Early in the morning.


    The entire periphery of the pce is now filled with people, almost all of whom are ordinary people. Of course, there are also guards maintaining order.


    After the Kingdom of Roja became the Kingdom of Tru, all the people are now looking forward to this meeting. After all, this time will be the moment that changes their destiny.


    Not only the Roja people, but also the original Toru people attach great importance to it.


    There are even many people who have traveled thousands of miles toe here just to learn about the content of this meeting as soon as possible.


    Such a prosperous situation is impossible to see in any country in the pirate world.


    The surrounding people are always crowded, and more and more people areing here.


    Chang Nuo, who was staying in the pce, naturally knew what was going on outside, but now overall, he was a little helpless.


    But before this meeting started, he had already arranged a national live broadcast, but not many people were standing in front of the live broadcast.


    Junhe was the person in charge of the security of this conference. He stood on the wall of the pce and shouted directly to the people below, "Everyone, I am Junhe, the person in charge of the King''s Guard. His Majesty ordered that all personnel are not allowed to enter the pce." It''s so crowded that His Majesty has ced live broadcast stations in every area, where you can intuitively see the live broadcast of this pce meeting."


    Because most people didn''t know anything about the live broadcast station before, so they crowded in front of the pce.


    After hearing this, Jun and the king''s guards under hismand also began to exin.


    The whole processsted for more than half an hour, and the crowd began to slowly disperse. As for those who still refused to leave, they had no choice but to reset a live broadcast station in front of the pce.


    Different from the live broadcast using phone bugs, these things are purchased by Changnuo from the system space, which can at least maintain sufficient stability.


    After all, they can''t get a phone bug that can live broadcast at all now. The key is that this thing needs to be cultivated from an early age, otherwise it will bepletely unusable.


    Such arge area in the pce hall is now filled with tables and chairs. This meeting may be a bit long, and they are not allowed to stand and chat.


    Many unfamiliar faces appeared in this meeting. Changnuo presided over it himself, and Luosta was responsible for the content of the meeting. They had been discussing things for several days, so naturally they needed to be carried out slowly.


    Everyone who is sitting here is concentrating and maintaining a high spirit.


    They didn''t chat with each other or even make eye contact. They were all looking forward to Chang Nuo''s arrival and the official start of their new national journey.


    The meeting is scheduled to start at 8 a.m., and everyone inside and outside the pce is now protected by the King''s Guards.


    And because the Tru Kingdom has always been on the headlines of newspapers recently, even those newspapers in the New World have peopleing to search for hot news.


    Changnuo''s residence.


    "Your Majesty, the meeting is about to begin. Are you ready?"


    Outside the room door, the servants and maids shouted softly.


    Not long after she finished speaking, Chang Nuo opened the door. He looked very different today.


    Standard king''s clothing, a white uniform, a light yellow shirt lined with a white bow tie, and it lookspletely custom-fitted, making Chang Nuo look quite elegant at this moment.


    Wearing a golden crown on her head, there is no so-called gem iy, but it looks elegant and elegant.


    "Has everyone arrived yet?"


    As soon as Chang Nuo opened the door, he directly asked the maid who was bowing her body to salute.


    "Your Majesty, everyone has arrived and is currently waiting for Your Majesty to go." the maid said.


    Not only did they arrive, those people had already started to go before dawn at 6 o''clock in the morning, sitting there waiting for the meeting toe.


    After listening to what the servant said, Chang Nuo nodded slightly, and then took out another pile of paper from the room, which was almost as thick as a book.


    "Take it with you and let''s go there too!"


    Chang Nuo directly handed the information in his hand to the maid, and then said calmly.


    Even Changnuo attached great importance to this meeting. After all, it involved the country''s future nning, and such an opportunity did note every time.


    Now that the initial stabilization of the country has beenpleted, thenprehensive economic development will begin. As long as moneyes in, the rest will not matter at all.


    Outside, whether it is the live broadcast venue in the royal city or the original Kingdom of Roja, the live broadcast stations in every city are already crowded with people, and they are all protected by the army to prevent overcrowding and damage. .


    All the people also put down what they were doing and ran to the live broadcast station to watch. They all wanted to know what benefits woulde to them next?


    The key is that although every ce is a bit crowded, it is surprisingly quiet, and no one will argue about whether they are in the front or behind.


    And before 6 o''clock in the morning, the live broadcast content had already started. The pce hall was empty at first, and finally full of people, waiting until the meeting is about to start.


    The people were feeling anxious. After all, they didn''t know what benefit this would have to them.


    However, in the nearly month of publicity, everyone has already understood that the content of the meeting is mainly aimed at the future direction of the country.


    "It''s His Majesty the King..."


    "His Majesty the King has appeared..."


    ��


    In the eyes of everyone, Chang Nuo walked into the pce hall dressed in king''s clothes and elegant. In an instant, all the people shouted for him. This was also the first time for many people to see the king of their country.


    Although he is very young, no one looks down on him.


    In the pce hall, as soon as Chang Nuo appeared, everyone stood up immediately and everyone saluted respectfully.


    When he arrived at his seat, Chang Nuo smiled and said, "Everyone, get up! Today''s content is a bit long, and it is a meeting in front of all the people of our country.


    I hope everyone can stop talking nonsense today and all decision-making meetings will bepleted and implemented at the agreed time. "


    "Yes, Your Majesty, I will definitely abide by the principles of this meeting." Luosta said respectfully.


    Chang Nuo walked to his seat and sat down directly. At the front of the entire hall, there was a camera. This thing was much easier to use than a phone bug.


    Not only are high-definition images presented, but the sound is also synchronized, and there is no need to worry about being interfered by anything.


    After Chang Nuo sat down, the others began to sit down one after another. Everyone was upright and had meticulous expressions on their faces.

 Chapter 30 The King’s Public Speech

    <h4>Chapter 30 The King��s Public Speech</h4>


    This is a live broadcast meeting for the whole country. If you are not careful, you may attract criticism.


    It was also the first time for Chang Nuo to do such a thing, but overall he looked very calm and indifferent.


    "Your Majesty, this is the content to be discussed at this meeting in ordance with your request."


    Gogoya yed the role of a secretary this time and looked very stylish.


    Wearing standard professional attire, with a bun, a white shirt on the upper body, a hip skirt with ck stockings, and five-centimeter high heels, he looks very elegant and professional.


    "Just put things down first. Sit aside and be ready to record things at any time." Chang Nuo replied in a low voice with a smile.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    After Gogoya retreated and sat there, Changnuo sat upright and straightened his current clothes, looking more mature.


    Then there was no need for him to say anything more. The people below started pushing the camera in front of him and stopped about five meters away.


    Now all the live broadcast screens outside are showing the appearance of His Majesty the King.


    At this moment, no one spoke, it was quiet, and even the sound of breathing and heartbeat could be heard.


    Changnuo coughed twice, and then with a smile, he waved and said hello, "Hello, people of the Kingdom of Tru. There may be many people who don''t know me. So let me introduce myself first. , I am Genji Nagano, the king of our Toru Kingdom, an ordinary person living in the same ce as everyone.


    I am honored to be the king of this country, and I am even more fortunate to have you as my people. This is my honor and my responsibility.


    More than two years ago, when I became the king of this country, I thought with all my heart that in the future I must let my people live the prosperous life they want, at least to ensure that you can, in your future life, No more worries about food, no more worries about warmth and coldness, no more worries about safety.


    As the king of Tru, today, we are opening the first national live broadcast meeting of our Tru country. The purpose is to let you know that we can bring you the life you want in the future, and how should we do it?


    Whether you are an original Toru citizen or a Roja citizen who has just joined this big family, from now on you all belong to the same identity, that is, you are a member of the big family of our Toru country.


    It is you who have given us rights, status and honor. To this end, all of us will spare no effort to create the living conditions that our Kingdom of Tru deserves.


    For this reason, I am willing to solemnly swear here that the people will be the most important thing that our country of Tru puts first. As the king of Tru, I am also willing to advance and retreat together with you.


    Of course, we are also very grateful for your expectations for us. If there are shorings in the future, we also hope that the people in front of the live broadcast station can give timely corrections and replies. "


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he sat where he was and nodded directly to show his courtesy.


    However, other people sitting in the main hall were already shocked and dumbfounded. How could a king of a country say such a thing? The key is to face the people of the country.


    It''s just that they don''t know at all what''s happening outside now?


    After the words of His Majesty the King in their eyes fell, almost the whole country was silent for a moment, and then there were sudden shouts in front of every live broadcast station.


    They all shouted directly about their Majesty the King, and most of them were even moved to tears.


    It��s no wonder that they behaved like this, especially the previous Roja nationals. They have been treated in such inhumane ways for who knows how many years. Now that they havee out of such a devilish life, they suddenly feel as if they have entered heaven. His Majesty the King is actually so amiable and willing to put them first. This is what makes everyone feel moved.


    The king personally took the initiative tomunicate with them and introduced himself. Indeed, many people had never seen their king before, but after this time, the image of Changnuo had been deeply imprinted in their minds.


    Such words of encouragement, not to mention these ordinary people, even the soldiers who were responsible for guarding the live broadcast station, were all moved and confused.


    The first public appearance has already caused such a sensation. Even the reporters from other countries and the Grand Line had a look of shock on their faces.


    They must have met many more people than thesemon people. At least one thing that is certain is that among so many countries, Changnuo is definitely the only king who can say such a thing.


    The reporters kept taking pictures and flipping the phone bugs in their hands. In addition, others also started tomunicate with people at the headquarters through the phone bugs.


    However, after Chang Nuo finished speaking, the photographer began to quickly retreat back with the camera, and the screen locked onto the entire pce hall again.


    This time, after the king spoke first, it was fully confirmed that the meeting had officially started.


    The solemn scene also made everyone watching start to be quiet, for fear that they would miss something if they didn''t listen carefully.


    After sorting out all the emotions, the meeting finally began to officially begin in the main hall.


    "This is the first national meeting of the Kingdom of Tru. Let me first talk about the introduction and rules of the meeting.


    First of all, the person who led this meeting was our great King of Tru. A total of 176 people participated in the meeting, and the content of all the meetings was broadcast live to the entire Kingdom of Tru.


    The following meetings will focus onprehensive discussions, and everyone must remain quiet until the topic of discussiones up. "


    Luosta stood up, looked at everyone and said loudly, he was the host of this meeting, so he was naturally qualified to say such a thing.


    No one sitting there spoke. It goes without saying that these rules were exined to them. However, it was just the first time for them to participate in such a formal meeting, which made some people feel excited and uneasy.


    In addition, there were too many people watching this meeting outside. In some respects, the number of people watching this time was not only the citizens of the Tru Kingdom, but was also broadcast to other countries by other reporters.


    The key is that the content of this meeting does not need to be hidden or kept secret. It does not hurt even if people from other countries know about it.


    "It seems that everyone has no objections. If this is the case, then I will announce that the first national meeting of the Kingdom of Tru will now officially begin..."


    Seeing that no one spoke, Luosta shouted loudly.

 Chapter 31 The direction of the meeting

    <h4>Chapter 31 The direction of the meeting</h4>


    After Luosta''s words fell and he paused for a while, Chang Nuo sat down and began to say leisurely, "The purpose of hosting this meeting today is mainly for theprehensive development of people''s livelihood issues in the future, considering that many people may not have experienced rted things. , so the content of this meeting will start from the simplest ce.


    First of all, the first question is about the overall arrangements of the former Roja nationals who have just integrated into our big family.


    The citizens of the former Tru Kingdom now have enough living standards and conditions to have enough food and clothing, and they also have their own jobs and responsibilities.


    The country has now developed its own brand and economic resources, so the new members of the family will be our top priority next.


    Now, let Minister of Commerce Luosta talk about the national economic site nning of the former Kingdom of Roya. "


    Changnuo looked directly at Luosta and said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    Luosta said respectfully, then turned to look at everyone and stood up. Then he took the draft paper that he had prepared before and said loudly, "Following the order of His Majesty the King, during this period, we have already begun to sort out the information about the former Roja citizens." overall nning situation.


    The total poption of the original Kingdom of Roja was 27.68 million, of which about 25.25 million were unable to meet the daily needs of food and clothing. They were severely economically poor and backward.


    The arrangements for this group of personnel in the future are as follows..."


    What Luosta said was almost like a report, not only to Changnuo, but also to the entire Toru Kingdom National Association.


    After all the reporting questions were finished, the citizens outside did not know what to say, and even stood there dumbly.


    Starting from today, they at least already know that their Tru Kingdom will have many more processing nts, which will include wine, beverages, tobo, food, household utensils... and a series of other products to choose from. Jobs and factories.


    For them, the most important thing is, and for the Tru Kingdom, this meeting is essentially the biggest propaganda.


    And it��s the kind of publicity that can be done without any money at all.


    At least it can let the outside world know that there will be bigger moves in the Kingdom of Tru next.


    The citizens of the entire country are not as excited as they imagined at this moment. Everyone is holding back their restless hearts because they want to continue listening and know which options are better for them and their future life choices.


    But even though there are so many factories to be built, with so many citizens, it still seems like a drop in the bucket.


    Fortunately, the current territory of the Tru Kingdom isrge enough to amodate this series of developments.


    After Luosta finished speaking what he wanted to say, everyone else was taking notes seriously, as if they were afraid of missing something.


    The people who came here to participate in the meeting were not only the former citizens of the Kingdom of Tru, but also the citizens of the Kingdom of Roja who had just surrendered, as well as the original army leaders.


    They can be happy with their current life, at least it no longer has the same wandering life as before.


    This meeting is of vital importance to everyone. There is no distinction between them, and most of the participants are young people.


    Their thoughts will be more jumpy, and their ability and degree of handling things are much higher than those of older people.


    Now that the leaders are already there, you need to do things down-to-earth these days, and there is no need to worry about other things at all.


    There is a n above, but all you need to do below is a n.


    This operation of the Tru Kingdom has indeed refreshed everyone''s understanding of national politics, and this kind of open and transparent current affairs politics has made those people full of expectations for their future lives.


    But while their meeting was going on, there were people in other ces thousands of miles away watching the live broadcast simultaneously.


    ������������


    "Wei Wei, why are you here? Didn''t I agree that my father has something to do today, so you can go out and y by yourself first."


    In the same pce, there was a little girl who looked to be only seven or eight years old. She had long blue hair and looked very kawaii.


    She ran in quietly and suddenly appeared next to a middle-aged man who looked to be in his forties.


    At this time, several of them were also watching the live broadcast of the meeting in the Special Kingdom.


    But the live broadcast they saw was nothing more than a broadcast of the video footage from the live broadcast station in the Kingdom of Tru.


    The little girl named Wei Wei smiled and asked curiously, "Father, what are you looking at?"


    "Father still needs to take a good look at some big things in other countries. You go out and y with them quickly. Don''t stay in the room and disturb us."


    The middle-aged man who spoke also wore a crown on his head and wore ck clothes. He looked very extraordinary.


    This is basta, a desert country, and it is also an unavoidable scene in the plot of One Piece.


    It belongs to thergest country on the Great Line, and it is not formed in the form of an ind. However, thend area of ??this country is muchrger than the current Kingdom of Tru.


    The king who speaks is Kobra, a man who currently holds absolute power.


    "Father, if I don''t want to make any noise, then I''ll take a look too!"


    The seven or eight-year-old girl said coquettishly.


    However, there was not only the king in this room at this moment, but also several princes and ministers.


    Faced with this situation, Cobra didn''t want to miss any link, so he could only smile helplessly, then hugged the little girl and sat on the seat next to him.


    At this moment, the first meeting of the Tru Kingdom was in progress, and almost every word spoken made him, the king, deeply moved.


    After all, such a situation is too rare. A country can announce the political affairs it will run next, which ispletely unexpected by the kings of other countries.


    What I didn''t expect is actually far more than that. It''s more about people''s nning for the national economy. This is the top priority, including how many people should be corresponding to the establishment of each ce, and how many years will it take for economic development? These times must be urate to within a rough range.


    These things are things that the kings of these countries have never dared to think about. Cobra has always believed that as long as the lives of the people in his country are better, then he, the king, has done a good job. However, he did not expect for a long time that a person in this country would The countries in the South China Sea are actually able to handle national affairs in such detail.

 Chapter 32 Targeting people in this country

    <h4>Chapter 32 Targeting people in this country</h4>


    The people in the room were staring at every move on the screen, including the details of everyone''s words and actions, all listening carefully.


    However, in the center of the screen, the King of Toru Kingdom, Changnuo, has always been sitting. At the age of 16, he gives people a very mature and stable feeling.


    ��What��s the poption of our country?��


    Cobra suddenly asked the people sitting behind him. He had never thought of such a thing.


    The several ministers behind him also looked at each other, and they already knew the answer without thinking too much.


    "Your Majesty, our country''snd area is toorge, but most of it is desert. In terms of poption, it may not be asrge as the Kingdom of Tru."


    A minister behind Cobra said bravely.


    However, when he said this, even he was probably embarrassed.


    ��Study carefully, a country run by a teenager has surpassed our country that hassted for thousands of years.


    I have to say that this broadcast of the Trudeau National Conference can also make us feel deeply! "


    Cobra did not me the minister behind him, after all, he had never thought of such a thing.


    Looking at the people talking freely on the screen, Cobra already felt ashamed.


    "Dad, what are you looking at?"


    Weiwei, who was sitting next to Kobra, finally asked in a low voice the question in her heart.


    She couldn''t understand everything she saw in front of her. She couldn''t even understand what the other party was saying?


    "Wei Wei, look good, this will definitely be the king who will lead an era. Even my father was deeply touched when he saw this."


    Kobra said calmly and emotionally.


    "Your Majesty, I believe that the national conditions of the Kingdom of Tru are very different from ours, and many things cannot be covered in one article."


    As soon as Cobra finished speaking, the minister behind him who had spoken just now opened his mouth to speak again.


    "Do you think I know what you are talking about? The key question is not at all."


    Kobra said, turned to look at his daughter Weiwei, and said with emotion, "King of the Toru Kingdom, Genji Changno, I have met his father twice. This little guy became the king at the age of fourteen. This year At the age of sixteen, he has already cleaned up the mess left by his father in order. Not only that, but the country''s economy and military are no longer what they were before.


    It can be said that under his leadership, the Tru Kingdom will soon be the most powerful country in the entire South China Sea. "


    "Dad, are you serious?"


    Wei Wei asked with surprise.


    "Well..., it''s just a matter of time." Kobra said with a smile.


    "Don''t worry, Dad, Weiwei will definitely be stronger than the other party in the future."


    Seeing the serious look on Wei Wei''s face, Kobra smiled happily, and then continued to look at the content on the screen.


    Another ce.


    In a dark-looking room, several old men were also looking at the scene in the Tru Kingdom in front of them.


    Every expression was not very good, but at this time, an old man with a goatee opened his mouth and said directly, "Let CP2 go and inform the King of Toru Kingdom to let him join the World Government."


    "I really can''t believe that such a shrewd king can appear in such a weak ce in the South China Sea? Should we let cp0 investigate first to see what is going on in this country?"


    As soon as the old man with the goatee finished speaking, another bald man wearing a white robe and holding a long knife also spoke.


    "It seems that the wife and children of Roger the Pirate King were in this country back then, right?" Another old man with a mustache said.


    "Yes, I am quite impressed with this matter. The wife of Pirate King Roger is indeed in the Toru Kingdom." The bald old man holding the knife said.


    "It''s better to just let the CP tell them to join the World Government, and leave the rest alone for the time being." The old man with the goatee said again.


    "Then let''s do it!"


    The old man with a mustache said nothing more, and several people acquiesced to this attitude.


    This national meeting of the Kingdom of Tru did indeed attract the attention of kings from many countries. Of course, some seriously reflected on their actions, while others felt that the Kingdom of Tru existed just to attract attention.


    Everyone has a different opinion, but their vision cannot determine the future direction of the Tru Kingdom.


    The meeting continued, and almost only two things were discussed throughout the morning.


    Chang Nuo hardly said anything during the whole process, just to watch everyone''s attitude. Most of the people on the field were young people, and everyone was full of motivation.


    He just dropped the topic, and Losta made all the arrangements.


    After all, they had already discussed the issues to be discussed in this meeting before. The purpose of holding such a meeting this time was to let the people of the country know how the prosperous era that wille next will proceed.


    Chang Nuo didn''t know that there were so many people outside watching his country''s meeting, but it all didn''t matter.


    Even the old men in the World Government have already considered the issue of joining the World Government, but for the current Toru Kingdom, joining the World Government is not a problem.


    After all, the national economic level is now rising. After joining the World Government, it is nothing more than a matter of paying the heavenly gold. But for the following Toru Kingdom, the advantages of joining the World Government will be much greater than now.


    After all, when sailing your own goods on the sea in the future, you no longer have to worry about being plundered by pirates. After all, you can directly summon the navy to fight behind your back.


    This is the biggest benefit of joining the World Government. The heavenly gold provided is nothing more than a protection fee.


    But all this is just a drop in the bucket for the current Tru Kingdom, and the regtions for heavenly gold are not just gold, silver and jewelry. Goods can also be used instead, provided that the group of people at the top can satisfy it.


    "Your Majesty, should we take a break at noon before proceeding?"


    In the main hall of Tru Pce, Luosta Zhan looked at Chang Nuo and asked in a low voice.


    "That''s it for this morning. Regarding economic andmercial development, we will inform you immediately. The relevant person in charge must seize the time to implement it as soon as possible. The matters discussed in the morning will be here first, and we will continue to discuss other matters in the afternoon.


    Let''s break up the meeting first. If any of you don''t understand something, you mustmunicate with Losa Tower as soon as possible. Don''t make mistakes again. In our country, leaders will never allow such low-level mistakes. "


    Chang Nuo also stood up and spoke directly to everyone in the hall.

 Chapter 33 The Pirate Who Made a Mistake

    <h4>Chapter 33 The Pirate Who Made a Mistake</h4>


    They have been meeting all morning, and the people outside have also been watching all morning. For these people, every thing they want to discuss involves their own real interests.


    However, the contents of these meetings that are actually broadcast live are actually irrelevant. What really needs to be strengthened are those things that cannot be broadcast.


    Before this public meeting, many people had already begun to study a number of issues, most of which included military and political issues, and there were also discussions on issues that may arise in the future.


    Most of these things are aimed at the real-time politics and military strengthening theories of the entire pirate world.


    It only took half a month since the Roja Kingdom merged into the Tru Kingdom. The military and politics of both sides have been integrated. It is unknown how many people in the middle cooperate.


    But what can be confirmed now is that Junhe has begun to search for some soldiers with good physical fitness and suitable for training among the entire army, and all of them are training ording to the National Guard training method.


    It is estimated that within a few years, the entire Tru Kingdom will be able to look down upon the entire South China Sea.


    Although they can do this now, they are not so anxious. Recuperating their energy is the most important issue.


    At present, the entire Kingdom of Toru has an army of about 500,000, but the number of soldiers who can actually reach the selection of entering the guard is not particrlyrge, but even 10,000 people arepletely enough.


    In the one-day meeting, almost all the future patterns have been decided. The people can really feel the prosperity of their country now, and they spare no effort to cooperate with the issues issued by the above.


    In the following time, the Kingdom of Tru almost entered the era of production.


    But there is one more thing that needs to be dealt with in the meantime.


    Those were the pirates with Devil Fruit abilities that they encountered when the Toru Kingdom conquered the Royal Kingdom.


    ������������


    The third day after the meeting.


    Chang Nuo met Jun He, the captain of the national guard, alone in the pce hall. This meeting could be ssified as absolutely confidential.


    It''s not that the meeting is not confidential, but the content of their conversation is the kind that must not be spread out.


    "Shunhe, how are you dealing with the pirates with Devil Fruit abilities now?" Changnuo asked calmly, standing next to Shunhe.


    "Your Majesty, they are all in the prison in the royal city now. Each of them has been wearing a restraining ring. I can guarantee that there will never be any trouble." Jun He said respectfully.


    "I asked you to investigate their devil fruit abilities before. Have you found out all of them?" Changnuo asked again.


    "Everything has been researched and put on this piece of paper for Your Majesty to take a look at!"


    Shunhe respectfully took out a piece of paper from his pocket, which was filled with dense content. It almost covered all the captured pirates with Devil Fruit abilities, and what their Devil Fruit attributes were.


    After watching for a while, Changnuo couldn''t help but sigh, "17 Devil Fruit users! Where did Xihaie from so many things?"


    "Your Majesty, my subordinates have also interrogated this matter. Several of them were almost purchased through auctions, and the rest were all obtained by luck or robbery." Junhe said.


    "Bring all these people secretly to the secret room in the back mountain tomorrow. The whole process cannot be seen by any other unrted person!"


    Chang Nuo suddenly said with a serious face.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Although Junhe didn''t understand why, he didn''t ask and could only follow Changnuo''s request.


    It''s just that when Changnuo looked at the Devil Fruit abilities of the 17 people on this paper, some of them were indeed quite useful, but most of them were almost useless Devil Fruits.


    The best one among them is probably the superhuman petrified fruit.


    His ability can turn everything he touches into stone. This thing will y an almost vital role in the future infrastructure construction of the country.


    As for the other Devil Fruit abilities, none of them were worthy of his attention anyway.


    But in terms ofbat effectiveness, the abilities of these devil fruits are not useless, and they will always have their own unique existence.


    Now for the Toru Kingdom, or for Changnuo, there is not a shortage of Devil Fruits in the country. In the original Roya Pce, they have found six Devil Fruits, although the quality is not very good. But overall it''s pretty awesome.


    Changnuo''s idea is very simple, that is, to convert all these devil fruits into the strength of the country. Each devil fruit has its own unique existence, and it can naturally be used.


    A dozen Devil Fruits, even for a country on the Grand Line, possessing so many at once is considered a luxury, let alone in and all over the world.


    Chang Nuo looked at the list in his hand again. If these things were reced by Bailey, this country would be rich for a while.


    But what theyck now is not money, but the ability to n for the future.


    Early the next morning, Shunhe had already led a team of guards and secretly moved all 17 pirates with Devil Fruit abilities to the back hill. In this ce behind the pce, there was no one at all. No one wille. Although there are no guards, the only way to get to this ce is from the pce.


    Chang Nuo slowly came over at noon. Some of these pirates were scared to death and no longer had the original majesty and domineering power.


    This so-called secret room in the back of the pce is just built in a cave, and the area below is very wide, even if it can amodate 10,000 people, it will not be a problem.


    When Chang Nuo arrived, Jun and his group bowed directly and saluted. As for the pirates who had been restrained, they could only bembs to be ughtered.


    They had no ability to resist and could only stay there obediently.


    This person was tied to a rope, and everyone had a restraining cor hanging around their neck. There was no sign of possible escape.


    None of these people take the crimesmitted by the Tru Kingdom seriously, and now they are just struggling to survive.


    Changnuo nodded to Jun and the group of people, and then looked at the pirates who were bound there with a half-smiling expression.

 Chapter 34 Extracting Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 34 Extracting Devil Fruit</h4>


    There are no windows in the entire underground chamber, and there is only a long passage leading here. Even if you don''t speak, the sound of breathing can echo inside.


    Chang Nuo took a look at this group of people. These guys had killed their own soldiers at that time. At least nearly two hundred people were lost in their hands.


    "Junhe, let the others go out first. Let''s stay and have a good chat with these guys." Changnuo said to Junhe with a smile.


    In fact, before Junhe could say anything else, the guards had already started to leave.


    Then the two of them and that group of people were the only ones left in the entire underground secret room.


    The silence in the air was terrifying. Junhe had no idea what his Majesty''s n was. Why are these people brought to this ce?


    "It seems that you are the little king of the Tru Kingdom, right? I warn you to let me go quickly. My uncle is a big pirate on the Great Channel now. If I know that you imprisoned me in This ce, then your entire country, will be facing disaster!"


    Before Chang Nuo could say anything, a rtivelyrge pirate with a huge scar on his face shouted to the two of them in a fierce tone.


    "I asked you to prepare fruits in advance, have you brought them all?"


    Changnuo ignored the other party and looked directly at Junhe and asked.


    "Your Majesty, these people have killed many of our soldiers, and two of them even ughtered our people. Do we still need to give them fruit?" Jun He said reluctantly.


    "You''ll know in a moment..."


    Chang Nuo said with a half-smile.


    With such an expression, Junhe was even more confused, unable to guess at all what his Majesty the King was thinking.


    "Haha..., hurry up and bring the fruits to the uncle. I miss these things after not eating them for a long time. I didn''t expect that you little guy is quite good. Just let the uncle go and give him 100 million beli. Before I will no longer pursue the matter, uncle!"


    At this time, another pirate with a big beard was talking to himself andughing.


    They didn''t seem to have any idea what they would face next.


    However, the other pirates all had the same expression, full of disdain, apanied by an expression of indifference.


    "Boy, let me go quickly. I will remember your favor from now on. If your Kingdom of Tru encounters any danger, I will be willing toe and help you as long as you give me money!" That Scarface just now The man said again.


    "Shut up. If any of you opens your mouth to speak again, he will be the first to die."


    Chang Nuo said angrily, the key is that in this underground secret room, their roaring voice is really noisy, and the sound keeps echoing here, which is really annoying.


    "Junhe, bring all the things here. No matter how surprised you are by what you see next, you must not let out a word after you walk out of here."


    Changnuo said to Junhe with a serious face again.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Although Junhe was confused and had no idea what was going on, he still nodded seriously.


    But at this time, a blue light suddenly emitted from Chang Nuo''s body, and a protective shield like a barrier suddenly appeared in the entire secret room and underground pce.


    Suddenly, everything outside, including the sound itself, disappeared, and what was left seemed to be an independent space.


    "This is����"


    Junhe was surprised, but he didn''t dare to make a sound.


    "Which one has the lithification ability?"


    Changnuo looked at Junhe and asked directly.


    "this����"


    Without thinking, Junhe pointed directly at the scarred man who had been talking before.


    At this moment, the pirates also realized that something was wrong.


    The scarred man stood up and shouted directly, "Bitch, what on earth do you want to do?"


    "Junhe, kill him!"


    Chang Nuo said in a cold voice.


    Junhe just paused, and then without any hesitation, he was in front of the scarred man in an instant.


    Now that these pirates have been bound by Devil Fruit abilities, they have no ability to resist at all, and are even worse than ordinary people.


    Junhe prated the other person''s heart with just one finger.


    The scarred man, who was so arrogant just now, has now turned into a corpse.


    However, Chang Nuo''s eyes were not on their pirates, but instead focused on the rows of fruits not far away.


    All kinds of fruits are ced here just for this moment.


    After Jun He killed the scarred man, he followed Chang Nuo''s gaze with curiosity and looked at the fruits.


    But the next scene directly overturned his three views.


    On top of the originally ordinary fruit, a bunch of bananas instantly changed its original color, bing earthy yellow with a circr texture, and directly attached to the banana.


    Changnuo walked slowly to the banana. Is this thing still a banana? It haspletely transformed into a devil fruit.


    At this moment, the other pirates began to feel uneasy after seeing this scene. This thing was the first time in their lives that they encountered someone who could directly extract the existence of Devil Fruit from others.


    Jun He opened his mouth in surprise and his eyes almost fell out of his head. He finally understood why Chang Nuo said just now that no matter what happened, he must not say anything after going out.


    If this matter were to be revealed, such serious consequences would definitely not be something their Tru Kingdom could bear.


    "King Tru, we know we are wrong, just give us a chance. No matter what your orders are in the future, we will definitely do whatever you want..."


    The bearded man who looked arrogant just now quickly knelt down and begged for mercy and shouted.


    The prayer in his voice, mixed with fear, made even his words tremble.


    Chang Nuo was not in the mood to deal with these guys, and now he was already immersed in his own n.


    Although I had spected before, I never thought it could actually be done to such an extent.


    This ability can be called heaven-defying. There are countless Devil Fruit users in the entire pirate world, and there are many powerful ones. However, the emergence of this situation will definitely subvert the entire pirate world in the future.


    When a Devil Fruit user dies, the fruit''s ability will be attached to a nearby matching fruit, but this is not absolute. It may be said that one or two out of 100 will make this choice.

 Chapter 35 Space Ability “Exile”

    <h4>Chapter 35 Space Ability ��Exile��</h4>


    But now that we have the space barrier, it ispletely different. The devil fruit ability can only be attached to fruits within the space, otherwise there is absolutely no way to break through this space barrier.


    "Junhe, what do you think of this thing?" Changnuo smiled, picked up the devil fruit in his hand and handed it to Junhe.


    "Your Majesty, I feel like I''m in a dream right now. I didn''t expect you to be able to extract the Devil Fruit?


    And the blue light around here shouldn��t be the same..."


    Junhe didn''t finish his words, but he left some questions.


    Chang Nuo didn''t shy away from him at all. After all, the two of them could be considered grown up. Although Jun He was a few years older than him, he had been protected by him almost since he was a child.


    Changnuo smiled and said, "Yes, this is the Devil Fruit ability, but it''s just different from what you imagined.


    Regarding the matters here, including my own abilities, I hope you will not tell anyone about it no matter who you meet in the future. Our country is still too weak and cannot bear the impact of some rumors. "


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, Junhe will definitely keep it secret and won''t let a third person know what happened today!"


    Junhe replied with a serious face.


    "Devil fruits are a good thing, but there are too few of them!" Changnuo said to himself.


    "Your Majesty, these people...?"


    Junhe nced at the other pirates, then opened his mouth and asked Changnuo.


    "Kill it. There are two animal-type ability users here, which are pretty good. You can eat themter if you like, but I suggest you don''t because the abilities of these two animals are too weak.


    If there is a chanceter, I will find a few good ones for you and distribute them to your subordinates. Although they are not top-notch Devil Fruits, the overall situation is pretty good. "


    Changnuo said leisurely, not taking the group of pirates seriously at all. Now that others are not dead, they have already begun to discuss the act of dividing people''s abilities.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Junhe could no longer hold back his excitement. Although he had never thought about obtaining Devil Fruit abilities before, his Majesty the King had already begun to take the lead, so naturally people like him should not be left behind.


    He didn''t have any hesitation about these pirates. Anyway, it was so easy to kill these pirates who were worse than ordinary people. It couldn''t be easier.


    In less than a while, the fruits in the underground secret room began to change one after another. 17 people finally transformed into 17 devil fruits, and none of them escaped.


    Although these things are not top-notch products, overall they are better than nothing.


    After sorting all the Devil Fruits together, Junhe looked at Changnuo, and then directly asked, "Your Majesty, how do you deal with these corpses?"


    Chang Nuo nced at the 17 corpses on the ground, then directly removed the current space barrier, and stretched out his left hand directly in the direction of those people. At this time, he saw that these people were all covered with a slight blue color. of light.


    "exile����"


    Chang Nuo shouted these two words softly, and then all the corpses disappeared immediately.


    However, at this moment, in a certain corner of the sea, corpses fell directly into the sea one by one.


    The ability of the space fruit has unlimited possibilities. If the ability of the devil fruit is developed to the extreme, Changnuo can already run rampant on this sea.


    Junhe encountered too many surprising things today. Now that he knew that his Majesty the King had Devil Fruit powers, the way these dozen corpses disappeared was not so incredible.


    There are more than a dozen Devil Fruits ced here, plus the remaining Devil Fruits in the pce, the entire Toru Kingdom now has nearly 30 Devil Fruits. Although half of them have no effect, the remaining part can be used continuously. It''s enough to build a rtively strong team.


    In fact, this is already considered very few. For somerge pirate groups, there are at least a hundred people in a pirate group with Devil Fruit abilities. Even among the Yonko Pirates in the future, the number of people with Devil Fruit abilities will be at least 100. The number has even reached thousands.


    But now the resources of the Tru Kingdom are limited, and they cannot expose themselves too early. They may encounter some more difficult problems in the future.


    Among the current Devil Fruit abilities in the Pirate World, Superman-type Devil Fruits have the most abilities, followed by animal-type Devil Fruit abilities.


    As for these natural devil fruits, they are almost all the kind that can be encountered but not sought.


    After walking out of the underground pce gate, Chang Nuo walked in front and asked Jun He directly behind him, "How far has your domineering practice reached?"


    "Your Majesty, the armament-colored Haki can now be attached to weapons, but the seeing-and-hearing Haki is not yet in ce. Sometimes you can only slightly perceive something, but for more specific things, it may still take two years. Only then can we do it." Junhe said with his head lowered.


    "You have not been exposed to Haki for a long time now. From now on, you will be more than just the captain of the King''s Guard. The country has now reached this moment. You need to seize the time to train more talents. The entire army has been chosen by you. In the future, the application of domineering power must be poprized, and this thing may very well be the key to your final survival."


    Chang Nuo said seriously, there are almost only a handful of people who can practice domineering in the four seas. Even in the first half of the great route, there are only a few people who know domineering. However, in such a quiet corner of the South China Sea, it has begun. Putting the practice of domineering on the military''s agenda.


    Haki training is definitely more practical than devil fruits. In the future, there is almost a huge difference between those who have learned to use Haki and those who have not learned how to use Haki against enemies in the future.


    It is precisely because of this that Changnuo has paid more attention to this kind of thing from the beginning.


    Junhe naturally knows the importance of this matter, but now that this country is being watched by so many people, even if it wants to conductrge-scale training, it still needs to be considered in all aspects.


    "Your Majesty, I feel that the entire country currentlycks a more suitable training venue. After all, you have said before that the practice of the Sixth Form of the Navy and the practice of domineering must not be known to other countries or people with intentions. But now the country Is it possible to achieve a rtively secret ce, but my subordinates haven��t found it yet?��


    Junhe said helplessly.

 Chapter 36 Uninvited Guest

    <h4>Chapter 36 Uninvited Guest</h4>


    Junhe was able to say this, but Changnuo did not refute it, but actually understood it quite well.


    If the Tru Kingdom wants to develop, then someone will naturally notice such a powerful military force. Having a few hundred people should not be a big problem, but if it has tens of thousands of such troops at once, let alone the world The government can''t sit still. Even the navy may not agree to such a thing.


    "First find a ce to learn some basic things. You canmunicate with Luosta about this matter and choose a rtively private ce. In up to a year, I will find a ce for you that is more private and will not be discovered. , provided for you to use for training.��


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and said.


    Now that it was a ce that could not be discovered by anyone and still had enough space for so many people to train, there was only one ce that Chang Nuo could think of, and that was Sky Ind.


    Sky Ind is a very special ce, and it has enough privacy and space.


    "Your Majesty, this time we have selected people of the right age from the army for training, but the number is a bit toorge. The key is that even if all of our national guards serve as instructors, we may not have enough manpower!"


    Junhe said with some embarrassment.


    "Then let all the National Guard be dispatched. A total of 500 people will be enough to guide these people in the early stage. There is not much time left for us. The ces where we need to fight in the future may exceed your imagination.


    In the era of great navigation, the situation is unpredictable. Although we live in the South China Sea, what we will face in the future is definitely not as simple as you think. Chang Nuo said with a sigh.


    "yes����"


    At first, Junhe wanted to retort. After all, after all the national guards were withdrawn, no one would be able to protect his Majesty the King. But then he thought about it, why does his king need protection from people like himself?


    He is already the strongest among everyone in terms of strength, and it doesn''t matter whether he is protected or not. In the South China Sea, there is no particrly dangerous guy at all.


    "The current space capabilities still need to be improved before we can build a space channel..."


    Chang Nuo looked ahead and couldn''t help but think.


    In the following time, the Kingdom of Tru appeared on the headlines of newspapers almost frequently. In this era of great pirates, a country in a quiet corner of the South China Sea could be in such a state, let alone the kings of other countries, even those great pirates Everyone is quite curious.


    But these things reported in the newspapers are almost what the Kingdom of Tru wants them to see.


    The entire Tru Kingdom, whether it is infrastructure construction or other aspects, has now begun to proceed in an orderly manner.


    In addition, the economy it has driven has even exceeded everyone''s expectations, and the entire country has begun to develop in a good direction.


    Now there is no need for Changnuo to arrange other things. The country''s shipbuilding industry, papermaking industry, and other retail industries are all blooming, and everyone is scrambling.


    ������������


    But then, there were several uninvited guests in the Tru Pce today.


    They were all wearing suits and ties, as well as a pair of ck sunsses. Everyone was dressed almost the same, looking like a gangster.


    The faces of this group of people were all meticulous and showed no expression at all. The leader seemed to be at least about two meters tall. He was still a little thin overall, but the aura of a strong man could still be seen at a nce.


    This was half a year after the end of the first national meeting of the Kingdom of Tru. The sudden appearance of outsiders like them, let alone the people of this country, even though they had already appeared at the gate of the pce, the guards guarding the pce No one was curious or surprised.


    After all, in the past six months, the Tru Kingdom has weed countless businessmen from various ces, and they are also scrambling for fear of missing the opportunity to make money.


    "I''m sorry, everyone, the pce is in front of us, so it''s not convenient for you to visit. You can go to other ces."


    At the gate of the pce, the guard said to several people patiently and respectfully.


    After all, there are too many tourists in this ce, and sometimes you can meet several in a day, so they are not surprised and say it in a good voice.


    But these six men in suits still had cold expressions after hearing what they said.


    The two-meter-tall man took off his sses, looked at the guard with cold eyes, and then kicked him out calmly. The guard who was talking cheerfully just now was lying on the ground in an instant. of a corpse.


    The other three people guarding the door were stunned for a moment after seeing this scene, but then the two-meter tall man did not intend to let them go. In just a moment, the three people fell to the ground at the same time.


    They seemed to be fearless and still maintained their original expressions. They did not say a word from the beginning to the end and acted so domineeringly.


    They did not leave after killing the people, but started walking directly towards the pce.


    But it was impossible to hide this kind of thing. After everyone else in the pce found out about it, they all rushed out.


    But the people who stay in the pce now are almost all ordinary guards with little strength. They have not been trained and trained. As for the previous king''s guards, they have already left the royal city and gone to other ces to train more. people.


    Although not all of them have left, at least the areas guarding the outer areas of the pce are now filled with ordinary people, holding guns in their hands on guard.


    So in front of these people, these people are almost no different from ants.


    The moment they rushed out, several people had already started fighting mode. Not only were they highly powerful, but two of them were also Devil Fruit users.


    When facing nearly 70 soldiers rushing over to shoot, one of them directly used his demonic ability, and many bubbles began to emerge from his body in an instant, and when these bubbles began to spread to the surroundings, at any time The moment a person touches it, the bubble explodes immediately, and its power is no less than that of a cannonball.


    Without knowing what was happening to the soldiers, the team of more than sixty or seventy people was almost wiped out in just an instant.


    However, such a loud explosion also attracted other people in the pce.

 Chapter 37 Cp2’s arrival

    <h4>Chapter 37 Cp2��s arrival</h4>


    At the same time, more and more soldiers began to attack them, but the expressions of a few of them remained exactly the same as when they first came in, without fear or any joy, anger, sorrow, or joy.


    These six people were like robots. After the incident was over, they elegantly arranged their suits.


    Just as they continued to walk forward, a ck figure quickly rushed over and quickly swung his leg directly at the two-meter tall man in the lead.


    But despite this, the tall man blocked it easily.


    "Domineering? I really didn''t expect that such a person could appear in a small country like the South China Sea. It''s really surprising!"


    The tall man at the head finally started to speak, but there was still a disdainful smile on his lips.


    Haruya suddenly appeared and revealed that he knew how to use Haki.


    Although the first attack was easily dispelled, Haruya rushed forward instantly, with armed haki attached to his legs, and attacked them again.


    He jumped into the air quickly on the moon steps, and then fell suddenly. He wanted to use this method to directly jump down, but hepletely underestimated the characters standing in front of him.


    The tall man took two steps back, and at the same time, a man wearing a red tie walked up behind him.


    Just when Zhiya hit the opponent directly, he already felt something was wrong.


    The opponent clearly felt the attack but had no intention of evading it. He didn''t even use his hands to take all of Haruya''s attack with his own body.


    When the attack hit the ground, the te bricks on the surface were shattered and flew away.


    After the dust went up, Zhiya saw that the man under his feet was covered in armed domineering energy, and his whole body becamepletely dark. His legs were already submerged under the stone bs, but it seemed that he had not been harmed at all. .


    Haruya was just about to retreat, but the man with the red tie below him instantly grabbed his leg with his right hand, and then punched Haruya directly in the stomach with his left hand.


    Even though he reacted quickly, Zhi immediately used both hands to protect his body, but he still did not escape this strong impact.


    The man with the red tie just punched him, and he was knocked away and hit the wall behind him.


    At this moment, even the wall had been hit and cracked.


    When Zhiya fell, he was already vomiting blood. The obvious serious injury even made him unable to stand up again.


    These people are already the most powerful existences he has encountered so far, the kind that are so powerful that no one can match them.


    "Who are you? Why did you force your way into my royal pce?" Zhiya asked weakly.


    "We are cp 2 here to find your king, Genji Nagano."


    The tall man standing at the front said in a cold and mechanical voice.


    "Boss, why are you talking so much nonsense with an ant? Just go up and trample him to death." The man in the red tie smiled sinisterly, and then slowly moved towards the direction where Haruya was squatting.


    The expression on his face now means that he wants to y. These people don''t care at all about the purpose of theiring here.


    But the governance in front of them also made these guys a little interested. After all, it is still very rare to see people using domineering in the world. The key is that since they saw it here today, although a person''s strength is not considered It''s very strong, but I can barely y with myself.


    When the man with the red tie walked up to Zhiya, he said with a smile on his face and a look of disdain, "You ants in the South China Sea! It''s rare that you gave us a pleasant thought today, so now I will give you thest gift." Cheng is ready!"


    With a wicked smile on his lips, he said that he was about to use his ability. A pure white bubble instantly appeared on his hand, and then just when he was about to put the bubble into Zhiya''s body, it suddenly appeared Someone grabbed his hand instantly.


    "Is it possible that all Cp2 guys are like you? I really don''t know what those five old men from Woxing are thinking. Why do they train you useless trash?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly appeared, with a look of disdain on his lips and began to mock them.


    "His Majesty����"


    Zhiya shouted weakly, his voice almost inaudible.


    "Who are you?"


    The man with the red tie who had looked arrogant just now suddenly turned cold as he looked at Chang Nuo and asked in a low tone.


    "Come here, send me for treatment and go for treatment..."


    Chang Nuo ignored the red tie man''s words and shouted somewhere else.


    At this time, two people jumped out of nowhere and arrived at Zhiya''s side in an instant. Then they picked him up and started to leave.


    But when they were about to leave, another one of Cp2 stopped directly in front of the three of them.


    "Interesting little guy, you must be King Tru, right? I didn''t expect that you actually know about the Five Old Stars. Tell me, how did you know about it?"


    The tall man came over, wearing sunsses on his face, without any expression, and asked calmly.


    Chang Nuo looked at the corpses on the ground in front of him. He had lost a lot of people this time. He didn''t look angry, and he still had a smile on his face.


    Seeing the tall man walking towards him, Chang Nuo''s originally rtively calm face instantly turned into a violent state.


    "Cp2? Since you dare toe to my country, or evene to my pce to kill people, are you ready to die?"


    Just when the man with the red tie was wondering if there was something wrong with King Toru''s brain, Changnuo''s entire body disappeared in an instant, and they didn''t even notice each other''s movements when they used their Haki.


    When he appeared again, he appeared directly next to a short man who blocked Haruya and the three of them.


    His reaction was very fast. Chang Nuo kicked him directly in the head, but he subconsciously used his right hand to block. However, Chang Nuo''s current mood can be imagined. Even though he had already generated strong strength, Even if he blocks it, it will fly dozens of meters away in an instant.


    The two people who were supporting Zhiya immediately disappeared from this area with Zhiya after seeing this state.


    After something happened here in the pce, the whole ce was quickly sealed off, and all news was contained within the pce.


    "What an interesting little guy. After so many years, I never thought that someone would dare to resist the CP department!"


    The man in the red tie didn''t seem angry, Chang Nuo''s appearance seemed to bring him unlimited passion.

 Chapter 38 Space Boundary

    <h4>Chapter 38 Space Boundary</h4>


    Chang Nuo looked at the look of several people. Even though the man with the red tie said so, it was really him who should be angry now.


    "Tell me, how did you know about the Five Old Stars of the World Government?"


    The tall man took two steps towards Chang Nuo and asked in a cold voice.


    "First tell me the purpose of youring here. Woxing asked you toe here, right? It should be to inform me to join the World Government?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile still on his face.


    "That''s right..."


    "That''s enough. Now that the matter has been conveyed, shouldn''t it be up to me, King Tru, to bring a little fun to you?"


    Chang Nuo said with a provocative look.


    "Huhuhu..., it''s interesting..."


    The tall man said with a smile.


    "Seal the pce and prohibit anyone from disturbing mymunication with the adults in the CP department."


    Chang Nuo didn''t know who he was talking to, and no one responded.


    Then Chang Nuo looked at the tall man and said, "There are the treasures of the Toru Kingdom behind the pce. I wonder if you are interested in going and taking a look? After all, my pce is the only ce where I live now. If it is damaged, then But it��s not good!��


    Chang Nuo''s sessive provocations were quite obvious. A subordinate behind the tall man looked at him worriedly and whispered, "Boss, if we make things worse, it will have an impact on us..."


    "Huh, no one will care about this barrennd in the South China Sea!"


    The tall man said disdainfully.


    "Since there is no problem, pleasee with me..."


    Chang Nuo smiled and said politely.


    The mountain behind the pce must pass through the pce, without any exception.


    After all, Chang Nuo often has to practice there. These guys are still good choices as whetstones, although I don��t know what the opponent��s strength is?


    "Gogoya, you came just in time. Inform Junhe to prepare fruits for the CP adults and ask him to deliver them to the back mountain as soon as possible."


    As soon as they reached the door of the pce, Gogoya suddenly appeared, making Chang Nuo smile and say.


    "Ah?" Gogoya didn''t understand what it meant yet, but seeing that Chang Nuo had begun to lead several people in another direction, he could only whisper, "What''s going on?"


    But she was not stupid, and she realized something instantly. She could only startmunicating with Junhe through the phone bug, and then informed the other party of the situation here, mainly about fruits.


    After passing through an arch, the outside ispletely different.


    There are all big trees here, and what appears in front of you is a long staircase, leading directly to a huge tform where Chang Nuo usually practices.


    It''s extremely quiet here, not even the chirping of birds.


    Among the six CP department personnel behind Chang Nuo, except for one of the guys who was seriously injured by Chang Nuo''s kick and was a little weak, everyone else''s eyes had a certain determination to win.


    The tform is a venue of almost more than 20,000 square meters, which is more than enough forbat needs.


    And it''s quite a distance from the pce, so there''s no need to worry about idental injuries.


    "Where''s the treasure?"


    The tall man walked behind Chang Nuo and asked impatiently after walking for so long.


    "You haven''t reached the ce yet, why are you in such a hurry? The World Government has trained you, so you won''t be able to endure even this little time, right?"


    Chang Nuo said with a hint of sarcasm.


    But this group of people didn''t care at this time. Anyway, everything that followed was insignificant.


    Walking on this long and narrow path, Chang Nuo walked in front and a few people followed behind. For the CP people, there was no need to worry at all. They had enough confidence in their own strength.


    Everyone has their own little thoughts. Changnuo forced himself to hold back his inner anger. Facing these people, he was notpletely sure, but now that he had reached this point, there was no way out.


    "I wonder what I should call you?"


    As Chang Nuo was walking, he suddenly asked curiously.


    "CP2 Division Chief, Olvia Omoro."


    The tall man said directly without refusing.


    While chatting, they were still walking forward and seemed to have a rtively rxed atmosphere.


    "You, the king, talk too much nonsense. Where is the treasure?"


    The man in the red tie asked impatiently.


    "Wait a moment, eat some fruit first..."


    As soon as he finished speaking, Junhe appeared in the square with a few people and various fruits in his hands.


    "Your Majesty, what you want..."


    Junhe said respectfully next to Changnuo.


    "Take them down, don''te up without orders..."


    "But Your Majesty..."


    "Nothing to worry about, just obey orders!"


    Changnuo suddenly turned his face, looked at Junhe with a gloomy expression, and said in a cold voice.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Junhe had no choice but to bow and say, and then started to prepare to leave.


    "I really didn''t expect that the small Tru Kingdom would have so many masters. It seems like we need to send people from other CP departments over to take a look?"


    The man with the red tie said to Chang Nuo with a smile on his face.


    "Then it''s better to wait until everyone leaves here before we discuss it..."


    Chang Nuo''s voice was no longer the same as before, with his back turned to these people and an angry look on his face.


    As soon as he finished speaking, he stamped his right foot down suddenly, and a sky-blue barrier suddenly rose up across the square.


    "Devil Fruit?"


    The tall man looked at the barriers rising around him and was very curious, but there was no worry in his tone.


    One of the members even ran to the edge of the barrier to try it out. After an attack was carried out, it immediately turned into stone and there was no ripple at all.


    "Boss, this barrier is very weird..."


    After the tall man heard this, a sinister smile appeared on his lips, and he didn''t look too surprised.


    "King Tru, what do you mean? Do you still want to start a war with our CP department?"


    The man in the red tie asked directly.


    Chang Nuo slowly turned around and looked at the group of people, with a half-smile on his lips, and then said in a flirtatious tone, "It''s really interesting what you said. If you don''t do anything when youe to our Tru Pce, just kill us." With so many soldiers, is it possible that in your eyes, you really think that the entire world is under the control of your world government?"


    "In that case, why are you talking so much nonsense?"


    The face of the man with the red tie turned from the smile just now to an instant coldness, and countless bubbles began to emit from his body, and under his push, these bubbles all flew in the direction of Chang Nuo.


    Others continued to watch quietly.


    Chang Nuo was calm at all and had a slight smile. He didn''t take the red tie and the blue one seriously.

 Chapter 39 The beginning of the battle

    <h4>Chapter 39 The beginning of the battle</h4>


    The spatial ability devil fruit suddenly showed its power at this moment.


    All the bubbles disappeared the moment they approached Changnuo. However, at this moment, hundreds of kilometers away on the sea, explosion scenes kept appearing.


    However, there was a pirate ship sailing on the sea. At this moment, the people on the ship were already frightened and overwhelmed.


    They never imagined that there would be such a terrifying and strange scene on the West Sea.


    The man in the red tie who was fighting had now noticed something was wrong. All his demonic abilities seemed to be contained, and he could not touch the opponent at all.


    The group of people who were destined to win finally showed shocked looks at this moment.


    "What exactly is this kid''s Devil Fruit ability?"


    The man in the red tie said angrily.


    "Superhuman space ability, I didn''t expect that this devil fruit would finally appear after a hundred years!"


    The tall man had a wary look on his face, with indescribable shock on his face. He understood this thing very clearly. After all, those people above who formed the CP department wanted to get one of the geometric devil fruits. it is this.


    "Everyone, stop looking,e together and take down the opponent!" The tall man directly started shouting orders.


    "Muramasa..."


    When Chang Nuo saw that these people were already in serious mode, he also shouted directly.


    Then Demon Sword Muramasa appeared from nowhere and floated quietly in front of Chang Nuo.


    "When youe to my Kingdom of Tru, you actually dare to kill my soldiers. Since you are here today, then stay here and use your lives to atone for your sins!"


    Chang Nuo held the demon sword Muramasa in one hand and pointed at them with the other hand and said directly in a cold voice.


    "What are you still doing? Take it down..."


    After the tall man shouted loudly, he quickly rushed to Chang Nuo''s side and started to attack directly.


    If the ability of the space system is used well, it will be much more powerful than the natural system, and it may even bepletely unsolvable.


    The tall man kicked Chang Nuo with a domineering kick, but Chang Nuo standing here seemed to be a mirror image. His attack went directly through Chang Nuo''s body. Even though he was already equipped with domineering power, in the end, it was not even possible. It has no effect at all.


    Only now did they start to look serious. When several other people saw this, they all rushed forward.


    At this moment, in the pce, at the ce connected to the back mountain, hundreds of people were fully armed and standing. Each of them was wearing a mask, a uniform white mask, with only two eyes exposed.


    They are also wearing uniform ckbat uniforms. The purpose of this group of people staying here is not to let anyone disturb their Majesty the King.


    The battle inside is still going on, and no matter how loud the noise is, those on the periphery can''t hear the slightest sound.


    However, Chang Nuo, who stood there and was attacked by them for several minutes, suddenly smiled, and then slowly pulled out the demon sword Muramasa in his hand. The powerful and sharp aura once again filled the enchantment space.


    "Everyone, be careful, this knife is not simple!" The tall man began to warn these people.


    There were actually only five of them who could participate in the attack. The other one was seriously injured by Chang Nuo''s blow before, and now he didn''t have much resistance at all.


    "King Tohru, is it possible that you want to go against the World Government?" Seeing that he couldn''t defeat the opponent, the man in the red tie threatened directly.


    "You don''t need to tell me this. This time, your purpose ofing here has been achieved. Joining the World Government is something that has been decided before. This does not have much effect on me, but since you havee to inform me, let''s go with the flow. I will still do it.


    But you dare not act recklessly in my country and hurt my soldiers. This is the worst decision you have ever made in your life!


    Besides, whether it��s life or death, what does the final oue have to do with the Kingdom of Tru? "


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    "King Tru, I advise you to stop being stubborn. As long as you go back with us, I can guarantee that no one in the Tru Kingdom will suffer any loss. If you continue, the entire Tru Kingdom will be destroyed." I will be buried with you for your stupidity!"


    The tall Omoro began to say threateningly.


    "Is your CP department all like this? You start to threaten when you feel that you can''t defeat it, but have you realized another problem, that is, in the South China Sea, if you die, it seems that it will not have any impact on our Kingdom of Tru. What loss?


    Or, who can prove that you disappeared in the South China Sea? "


    Chang Nuo was not moved at all and still said with a smile.


    He doesn''t want to talk nonsense with these people at all now. The demon sword Muramasa has already been pulled out. If he doesn''t harvest it, there is no way he can insert it back again.


    After possessing the spatial ability, his sword skills have broken through at least two levels.


    Changnuo started to umte strength, and there was no need to use the Haki blessing at all. None of the opponents had natural devil fruit abilities, so there was no need to expend too much energy to fight in the beginning.


    This time it was not just a simple battle. Chang Nuo wanted to use these people to hone himself and test the extent of his current strength.


    The fact that Omoro can be the leader of cp2 shows that the opponent''s strength is certainly not simple.


    Normally, I train alone and have no chance to test myself. However, this time they came to my door, so I don''t need to worry too much about it.


    Omoro has now realized the seriousness of the matter. Although Wu Laoxing ordered his people toe over and let the Toru Kingdom join the world government, there was no time limit for them toe. They were already dyed. If there was a problem, There really aren''t many people who would consider the Toru Kingdom.


    Nanhai is already rtively weak, so for a character to appear who canpete with the CP department is simply a fantasy.


    So for this kind of thing that is impossible to happen at all, other people will not think about it at all.


    Chang Nuo grasped this point, and if the problem of the corpse is properly dealt with when the timees, then this matter can be solved without anyone noticing.


    "Kova, let''s deal with King Tru, hurry up and find a way to open this barrier!"


    Omoro ordered.


    There is nothing he can do now. The other party''s ability to control space ispletely beyond what they and others can handle.


    The most important thing is that if the spatial ability is used properly, it is equivalent to a person who is not domineering dealing with a person with natural abilities.

 Chapter 40 Another carelessness

    <h4>Chapter 40 Another carelessness</h4>


    Chang Nuo was never in a hurry from beginning to end. He always wanted to see what tricks this group of people coulde up with. Anyway, this group of people are nowmbs to be ughtered.


    No matter how bad the final result is, even though they are rtively powerful, if their own space barrier is not removed, these guys will not even think about leaving this ce.


    From the first nce, Omoluo and the others seem to be together very often, and their cooperation ispletely wless.


    For a few of them, even a natural-type Devil Fruit user like the Admiral would most likely fall into the hands of these people. However, except for one of their original six people who was seriously injured, the other one had to find a way. There are only four people left who have walked out of this barrier.


    The strength of the four of them cannot be underestimated. So far, only two of the six have demonstrated Devil Fruit abilities. The other four still don''t know what the situation is?


    Changnuo no longer wanted to talk nonsense with them. After umting his power, he waved the demon sword Muramasa directly and shouted "Flying Sword Style - Long Xiangshan..."


    Suddenly, nearly a dozen sword lights began to fly towards these four people in an instant.


    The speed was so fast that if these people weren''t very experienced in fighting, just this move would be enough to kill them.


    Long Xiang sh attacks from bottom to top, and canunch ten attacks instantly. It is so powerful that it can tear the earth apart almost instantly.


    Omoluo arrived not far from Changnuo in an instant. After using his knowledge and knowledge to sense his own danger, he quickly began to retreat, and then he saw ten sword lights attacking towards him and the others.


    The sword glowed blood red, and ten sharp de sh marks were directly formed on the floor of the marble b.


    "Boss, you didn''t expect this kid to be a swordsman?"


    The man in the red tie shouted in surprise.


    No matter how much they thought about it, they never considered that King Tru was such a powerful man?


    Even if the opponent doesn''t have Devil Fruit abilities, just relying on the current swordsman''s swordsmanship is enough to fight them.


    "Don''t talk nonsense. The opponent''s attack is very sharp. If you are not careful, you will die. Be very alert. Our main goal is to contain the opponent until we find a way to break the barrier. He will suffer in the future!"


    Omoro''s eyes were cold and his expression was very angry, and he gave orders directly to everyone.


    When he finished speaking, everyone turned on the serious mode, which was different from the seriousness just now. At this moment, they seemed to have begun to gather all their strength.


    Omoro also began to change. He was still a normal person, but now it seemed as if something was about to burst out of his body. The perfect suit on his body also burst apart.


    After everything was over, Changnuo discovered that this guy Omoro was actually a Devil Fruit user, and he was also an animal-type Devil Fruit.


    "Silver Moon Wolf, the Animal Devil Fruit Phantom Beast, it seems that we really caught a big guy today!" Changnuo looked at Omoro, and a smile began to appear on his lips.


    He has also seen the Devil Fruit illustrated book. This thing is definitely one of the best among animal devil fruits.


    Being able to be the leader of CP, I have already guessed that the other party is definitely not simple, but I didn''t expect that he would hide such a backhand.


    Then other people must not be as simple as they think!


    The abilities of these people have now been determined. The first one is the man with the red tie. This guy''s devil fruit ability is the superhuman bubble fruit ability. He can create bubble-like things and produce violent explosions. Using Shock waves attack enemies.


    The second one is the guy who was seriously injured when Chang Nuo came up. As for the Devil Fruit ability he used, it has not been discovered yet. From the time he was injured until now, he has no way to take action when he gets into the water, so he can only sit next to him.


    As for the third one, who is now Omoro, an animal phantom species, Changnuo has reason to believe that the remaining three people are definitely Devil Fruit users.


    But while Chang Nuo was still thinking, his body suddenly seemed to be out of control, and even the demon sword Muramasa in his hand fell to the ground instantly.


    In this situation, Omoro rushed up instantly and punched Changnuo directly in the abdomen.


    This time he did not attack the air, but actually attacked Chang Nuo.


    This attack directly sent Chang Nuo flying backwards for more than ten meters. Fortunately, when the attack was about to reach him, Chang Nuo instantly regained consciousness and protected his body with armed domineering.


    But even so, for a strong man like Omoro, his attack was enough to seriously injure Chang Nuo.


    After Chang Nuo fell to the ground, he slowly stood up and squatted down. He still couldn''t help but a trace of blood flowing out of the corner of his mouth.


    Now we have figured out the status of at least one of the other three people.


    Being able to use mental attacks is really hard to guard against!


    "Mader, you are so careless. You have advised yourself so many times, but in the end you still made such a low-level mistake!"


    Chang Nuo squatted on the ground in some pain, but what made him more painful was that he had already walked such a long way and absorbed so many lessons, and he still had not long enough to remember. He had clearly reminded himself before that no matter what he encountered in the future, What kind of person should not only go all out, but at least raise the highest level of vignce.


    However, facing the early attack from this group of people, Chang Nuo was obviously a little arrogant and ignored the detail of defense, which was taken advantage of by the enemy.


    If it weren''t for his current strength, Omoro''s attack just now would have been enough to kill him.


    "While the other party is injured, go ahead..."


    Omoro shouted quickly.


    He didn''t want to miss such a good opportunity now. Although the opponent had the ability of the Space Devil Fruit, they could also see that Chang Nuo''s actualbat experience was much weaker inparison.


    Chang Nuo squatted on the ground and took a deep breath, then slowly stood up. At this time, they had already rushed over.


    "barrier����"


    A blue light curtain suddenly appeared around Chang Nuo, blocking the rest of them directly from his body.


    But he seemed to have too much confidence in his space fruit. The moment Omoro rushed up, he directly transformed into the form of the Silver Moon Wolf and attacked the space barrier with a w. Originally, Changnuo considered the barrier to be an absolute defense. Several cracks appeared instantly.


    Although these cracks are slowlypounding, if the opponent attacks faster, then even if he hides behind this, he will still not be very safe.


    "Muramasa..."


    Following Changnuo''s shout, Demon Sword Muramasa, who was still lying on the ground, instantly flew towards the barrier.

 Chapter 41 Space Mirror

    <h4>Chapter 41 Space Mirror</h4>


    After holding the sword again, Changnuo slowly inserted Muramasa into the scabbard, staring at one of them with stern eyes.


    Chang Nuo will never make the same mistake again, but the guy who knows how to attack mentally should indeed be considered the most difficult one.


    Therefore, all Changnuo''s attacks will be focused on that one person.


    The opponent looked at Chang Nuo and wanted to use spiritual attacks again, but Chang Nuo, who was already prepared, had already discovered this result.


    "Double Dragon sh..."


    Chang Nuo instantly removed the protective barrier and drew his sword twice in session.


    This time ispletely different from before. Double Dragon sh is a rtively powerful existence in Feitian Yujian style.


    After drawing his sword twice, two flying dragons suddenly appeared in the entire area, and he headed directly towards the number that could use spiritual attacks.


    But at this moment, Changnuo was not in a hurry to put Muramasa into the scabbard. Instead, he was watching the two flying dragons flying out, his attack trend.


    This attack was only aimed at one person, the man who knew how to attack mentally. He was no longer calm at this moment and hurriedly began to retreat, but his speed was not as fast as Chang Nuo''s attack.


    Just when the opponent was preparing to use a strong defense, Chang Nuo instantly inserted the sword into the scabbard and shouted "Long Ming sh..."


    This ispletely different from the previous attack. All the previous attacks were drawing and shing, but this time it was inserting the knife, and using the rapid inserting skill to erupt with ultrasonic waves to disrupt the enemy.


    After inserting the knife, the ultrasonic waves emitted by Long Mingshan instantly made these people squat down and cover their ears.


    After all, Long Mingshan is the ultimate ultimate move in the Feitian Sword Style, and he has demonstrated this swordsmanship to its fullest at this moment.


    After the opponent stopped defending, the two dragons instantly prated the man who knew how to attack mentally.


    Although after the attack prated, this guy seemed to be fine. At the moment when others were stunned, he began to slowly fall to the ground. There was no trace of scars on his body, not even blood.


    "die����"


    After seeing hispanion fall, Omoro could no longer control himself. Silver Moon Wolf''s eyes were already glowing with blood-red light, and several other people did not hesitate to use Changnuo''s attack with all their strength.


    This time, every time Omoro attacks, a strong light emanates from the wolf ws, and every attack can cause several deep cracks to appear on the ground.


    If it weren''t for the ability of the space system, Chang Nuo wouldn''t dare to have a head-on confrontation with such a person.


    Moreover, the entire space is filled with arge number of bubbles. Once he touches any of these things, there will be a series of explosions.


    In other words, the man in the red tie used this method to control Chang Nuo''s next actions.


    The other two people are not idle either. The speed of the two of them is as fast as lightning and flint, and every attack is powerful and sharp.


    Faced with such cooperation from the four people, Changnuo could only use the ability of space to stay here for defense.


    But continuing on forever is definitely not an option. Now he can only watch like this temporarily so that he can find out the ws between these people.


    Everyone''s attacks seemed to be extremely sharp at this moment, and they were using all their strength. Even if Chang Nuo made any mistakes, the opponent could be killed on the spot.


    But when the ability is activated, the Chang Nuo in front of them is no longer himself, but belongs to a space mirror. The real Chang Nuo has long been hidden behind this space.


    The attacks by Omoro and otherssted for nearly ten minutes, and Changnuo also stood there for nearly ten minutes.


    Seeing how several people were panting, each of them was now afraid. After all, these people didn''t know much about the space-type Devil Fruit abilities, but in this state, their attacks had almost no effect. .


    When using space skills, Chang Nuo himself has already revealed a big shoring, that is, he is in a state of nothingness and others cannot attack him. But at the same time, he cannot attack others at all and can only maintain his original position. The state stood quietly in ce.


    But the moment they stopped, Changnuo suddenly moved, and Muramasa, the demon sword in his hand, quickly pulled out again.


    Seeing this scene, Omoro immediately shouted, "Get away..."


    The others seemed to be frightened and began to scatter in an instant, and began to use their domineering force to defend themselves.


    The key is that Chang Nuo did not intend to give them a chance this time. As soon as one of them opened his defense, Chang Nuo was already in front of him, with a smile on his lips, as if lying in his ear and saying "Goodbye..."


    The original new red color of the Muramasa in his hand was suddenly attached with domineering energy. In the state of armed domineering blessing, Chang Nuo swung the sword with his right hand, pressed his left hand on the back of the sword, and directly prated the opponent''s throat from top to bottom.


    Even though this guy has used armed Haki to attach to his body, the final result is still ineffective.


    Although this knife did not cut off his head, it still made him cover his neck uncontrobly, and blood began to flow out quickly from his fingers.


    Seeing this, the other people no longer had any chance tomunicate, and their attacks werepletely useless against the other party.


    "Kova, how''s your search going?"


    Omoro shouted angrily and helplessly to hispanions who were looking for a way to break the barrier.


    "Boss, all my attacks have no effect on this barrier! I am speeding up my search now!"


    Kova also looked anxious and kept testing the surroundings of the barrier. He didn''t miss any ce.


    Omoro felt that facing Chang Nuo this time was the most ufortable thing in his life. He couldn''t attack him. He had already lost three people on his side. Although the other party was also injured, at least it didn''t seem to matter for now. look.


    However, he never considered that even if the barrier was broken, they would not be able to leave the Tru Kingdom at all.


    The people standing outside were now waiting in full formation.


    Junhe stood in front of these people, always sensing every move inside with his sense of sight.


    Whenever anything happens, he will rush in with this group of people without hesitation.


    People outside are not aware of what happened here, and even the dead soldiers in the pce have already begun to deal with it.


    Even the ground is now spotless.

 Chapter 42 Heavy damage

    <h4>Chapter 42 Heavy damage</h4>


    The battle between the two parties hassted for almost half an hour. Although Chang Nuo suffered some injuries, as long as he is handled properly, this injury will not hurt him.


    But Omoluo and the others are different. Now they have be ants on a hot pot.


    "King Tru, do you really n to do this to such an extreme extent?"


    Omono asked in a cold voice.


    "Do you think there is any use for me to stop now? I don''t think you, the leader of CP, can choose to let us go after leaving my country. Instead of worrying about your future life, it is better to let you stay here. It��s pretty good here.��


    There was a sinister smile on Chang Nuo''s lips, and he looked quite evil.


    "Boss, why bother talking nonsense to this guy? As long as you kill him, the barrier will be broken. When the timees, we will definitely let this country bury him with him!" the man in the red tie said fiercely.


    "Haha..., don''t you think it''s funny when I say this? Do you really think that''s all I have here?"


    Chang Nuo said directly with a smile, because the other party only knew how to say harsh words, and he didn''t know how many times he said it from the beginning to now, but the final result is still here without the slightest change, it is just for fun. .


    The man with the red tie also knew that if he did not crack the opponent''s spatial ability, it would not matter how long they stayed here. On the contrary, when they were tired, a casual blow from the opponent might kill them.


    "Guike, please stay close to me from now on. Don''t act rashly to seize this kid''s weakness and kill him with one strike!"


    Omoro didn''t want to think about other things anymore. The king obviously didn''t want them to leave here.


    When using the color perception, he had already discovered that there were many strong people outside. Although he was very surprised, the most important goal now was to seize the time to deal with this little guy in front of him. As for what to do then, he could only Let��s look at the situation.


    After receiving Omoro''s order, the man in the red tie seized the opportunity and moved towards him as soon as possible.


    The man named Kova no longer devoted himself to finding the exit of the barrier, but instead moved closer to them.


    Of the six people who came with Cp2, two are dead and one is seriously injured. There are only three of them left, and the little guy on the other side doesn''t know when he will attack. Suddenly, they, a group of strong people who once thought they were self-righteous, Everyone has already felt the crisising.


    "You really don''t think that the Space Power Devil Fruit can only be used for defense, right?" Changnuo suddenly looked at the remaining three people with a smile on his lips and said.


    There was nothing wrong with the other two people, except that Omoro''s face suddenly turned pale. These two people didn''t know the situation, but as the CP leader, he naturally knew too much.


    The old guys above gave them the main task of all CPs, which was to find those devil fruits, including the abilities of the space fruits. This leader had already known it.


    The superhuman space devil fruit is definitely a bug-like existence among devil fruits, apletely despairing ability.


    In this mountainside, the intensity of the attacks within the barrier was so great, but not even the leaves on the outside of the key barrier moved.


    Omoro had obviously begun to panic. At first, he thought that the other party only knew the defensive function of the Space Devil Fruit, but now it was obvious from the other party''s words that this was not the case.


    This made him a little nervous.


    "Ghost Guest, suppress the opponent''s actions. Kova is responsible for assisting side attacks. Don''t let the opponent have room to fight back..."


    Omoro hurriedly began to give instructions. As long as the other party could not use attacks, they would at least have hope of survival.


    He didn''t dare to bet now. If Chang Nuo really knew the ability to attack in space, then for these people, there would be only one way to go and that was to wait for death.


    After the two received the order, they quickly began to besiege. The man in the red tie began to release a kind of bubble that had never been released before. This time it was colorful and at least three meters in diameter.


    "Both of you, please stay away. I will use this to die with him today and break this barrier for you."


    The man in the red tie held the huge bubble above his head, as if he was ready to die with Chang Nuo.


    But things have reached this point, how could Chang Nuo allow him to release such a thing in his own territory.


    But just when he was about to take action, the man named Kova rushed forward instantly.


    Until now, Chang Nuo has not learned about the opponent''s abilities and can only passively activate the defensive state.


    "jump����"


    After Kova''s attack failed, Changnuo instantly used space jump. This is a short-distance space jump method, and unlike teleportation, jumping can allow him to appear anywhere in this space.


    "Small����"


    "Dragon Nest sh-sh..."


    Before Kova opened his mouth to remind him, Changnuo appeared directly behind the man in the red tie, and with a roaring voice, he started to draw his sword.


    The moment his knife fell, Omoro appeared beside Chang Nuo at the same time.


    Changnuo, who was currently under attack, had no way to defend himself. He could only let Omoro''s silver moon wolf form attack him with one w.


    They used the man with the red tie as the price to hit Changnuo hard again.


    This attack was not without mercy. Three deep, bone-visible wounds suddenly appeared on Chang Nuo''s chest.


    Moreover, his whole body also hit the edge of the barrier heavily. The moment he fell to the ground, Chang Nuo, who was only sixteen or seventeen years old, endured the pain and his hands began to tremble uncontrobly.


    This attack was probably the closest he hade to death. If it hadn''t been for years of practice that had greatly improved his body functions, I''m afraid he would havepletely burped this time.


    But even so, he could only endure this attack.


    The remaining two people had no sympathy at all for the fact that theirpanion was dead. They were ring with anger at Chang Nuo, who was seriously injured and leaning on the edge of the barrier. The only thing that could give them any idea was to kill the other party quickly. As for The rest can only be understood slowly after looking back.


    The man with the red tie who had always been arrogant on the other side was now dead.


    Trading one of his own serious injuries for the death of the other person may be a good deal in some senses, but for Chang Nuo, this time he still underestimated the other person.

 Chapter 43 Healing body drawn by lottery

    <h4>Chapter 43 Healing body drawn by lottery</h4>


    He obviously had such a huge advantage, but he ended up like this in the end. But all thebat experience was tempered in the battle. He had no regrets about this injury.


    But once this happens now, it may be difficult to control the next situation.


    He didn''t have any super recovery ability, so he could only endure the pain and continue to deal with the next two people.


    "Hufufu... I''ve lost so many people, but I''m still not dead. Is it really surprising?"


    Omollo still maintains his werewolf form, because in this form, he is at his strongest whether attacking, defending or moving.


    He didn''t see Chang Nuo like this. He was already getting carried away because of a small victory. Instead, he kept an alert and nervous expression. Even though Chang Nuo was seriously injured now, he still looked that cautious.


    "I''m not dead yet? Isn''t it too early to be happy?"


    Chang Nuo said weakly.


    His face had begun to turn pale, and the wounds on his body were bleeding uncontrobly. Junhe, who was standing outside, sensed what was happening inside, and instantly came to the edge of the barrier and looked inside. state, but he couldn''t go in.


    Even if he stood on the outside and yelled, he wouldn''t be able to hear it from inside, and what was said inside could not be heard outside at all!


    "That''s what you said. How can you possibly kill the two of us now when you look like this? King Tru, you just need to capture him without mercy!"


    Kova stood aside and said with the same smile.


    Now that it has be like this, for them, it seems that they have a chance to win.


    Changnuo leaned on Muramasa, the demon sword, and stood up with difficulty. He realized that he didn''t have much time. If he couldn''t solve it as soon as possible, then there was a real possibility that those who would greet him would be taken away by them.


    Although his own people are outside, the strength of these two guys means that if they want to run away, the group of people probably won''t be able to stop them.


    The most important thing is that once they go out, they will definitelymunicate with people outside through the phone bug. This is the main reason why Changnuo doesn''t want the barrier to spread at all.


    Once he falls into aa, this barrier may naturally disperse. At that time, not only himself, but also the country may fall into endless war.


    Chang Nuo held the knife. No matter what the situation was, he must keep these two people in the barrier.


    "System, is there any medicine that can quickly heal wounds?"


    Changnuo began tomunicate with each other in the system space in his mind.


    He is not fighting alone at the key point. He is a bug himself. With the system, he can be said to have immortality.


    No matter what the situation is, as long as you have money, other things don''t matter at all.


    Although Chang Nuo is now so seriously injured, Chang Nuo is not worried at all, but dealing with two people with such a seriously injured body may be really difficult or even impossible.


    "Answer, if the host itself is seriously injured, you can purchase rted rapid self-healing capabilities. You have a bnce of one billion and fifty million beli remaining in the system space. Do you want to choose randomly?"


    The mechanical voice of the system came over, but now was the time to think about it. He already looked helpless and had no choice at all. At this point, the system actually asked him to make a random selection?


    He had already known that this thing was purely equivalent to a lottery. Over the past few years, he had no idea how much money he had invested in it. In the end, even men''s underwear came out, which made him vomit a mouthful of blood. On the ground.


    This so-called lottery method is really too deceptive and has no effect at all. When he first started buying the fully automatic textile machine, he had already tried it again, but he didn''t expect that what came out was a set of women''s underwear. Since then, he has been full of distrust of the word random.


    But now he has to deal with the two people in front of him at the same time. He has no time to choose carefully. He can only endure the pain and frown and answer "Agree..."


    After saying these two words, Chang Nuo paid no attention to the content inside, but thought that no matter how bad luck was, a bandage with the worst healing properties would not appear.


    Just by taking a nce, Changnuo had already discovered that the system space directly cleared his bnce to zero, and then began to spin something simr to a turntable.


    Standing outside the barrier, Junhe was so angry that his hands werepletely covered with armed domineering energy. He hammered the ground anxiously, and the entire marble b became cracked inch by inch under his punches.


    But he just couldn''t get in. Seeing that his Majesty the King had be like this, this helpless feeling came directly to his heart.


    However, Omoro inside the barrier looked at Changnuo, who had been silent for a long time, and stopped maintaining the form of the Silver Moon Wolf.


    After returning to his own appearance, he waspletely shirtless. He took out a pair of sunsses from somewhere and continued to wear them on his face.


    "King Tohru, you should have epted your fate by now! Wouldn''t it be better to just stay like this?"


    Omoro seemed to already feel that he had a chance to win, and the other Kowa also felt the same.


    But at this time, Chang Nuo suddenly stood up and the wounds on his body were healing rapidly. This scene instantly made the two people''s nerves tense again.


    None of them thought about what happened, why did it suddenly be like this?


    Among the Devil Fruit abilities in this world, it is not that there are no abilities that can heal oneself quickly, but the king in front of him has obviously eaten the Devil Fruit''s space-based ability, and it is impossible to have other abilities.


    But now that the facts are before their eyes, it will have no effect on them to think about it.


    "Omoro, I wonder who you were talking about just now?"


    After Changnuo stood up, he raised his head and looked at the tall Omoro with a strange smile on his lips.


    In fact, he is also confused now. He has always behaved randomly, but this time he actually did something for him that he couldn''t believe.


    After the roulette wheel in the system space ended, it involved abilities rted to healing ability, and finally it was fixed on the fairy body in the world of Naruto.


    Not to mention the billion Baileys this time, even if it is 10 billion or 100 billion, this thing ispletely enough.


    Why not say that this unexpected gain and loss made him extremely surprised, because the moment he got it, Chang Nuo already felt like he was dreaming?

 Chapter 44 The End

    <h4>Chapter 44 The End</h4>


    Suddenly gaining the most powerful bloodline ability in the Naruto world, Changnuo sometimes felt like what he would be in the future.


    But first of all, the body''s self-healing ability is really not something to be boasted about. The wounds on the body after such serious injuries are healing at a speed visible to the naked eye.


    And in other aspects, especially physical fitness, I feel like I have endless energy in my body.


    The use of spatial abilities is almost a mental drain. Even if there is no systematic ability in the future, Changnuo already feels that with the current situation, he can be invincible in the entire pirate world.


    Omoluo felt like a fool at this moment. He was obviously hurt so badly, but now he was full of life. He really didn''t know what words to use to express his inner shock.


    Just now, the two of them looked determined to win, but now, Omoro couldn''t help but start to take two steps back.


    "It seems that the matter should be over. Thank you very much for the lesson you taught me this time!"


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then the whole person disappeared in an instant.


    He has now mastered the ability of space jumping to a high level. As long as it is within a limited range, he can ignore all obstacles and reach anywhere he wants in an instant.


    The previous physical consumption coupled with the mental consumption now, Omoro''s entire fighting spirit has been almost ttened.


    Regarding the sudden appearance of Chang Nuo, this experienced guy suddenly made a mistake.


    Chang Nuo suddenly appeared behind him and punched him directly in the chest.


    Moreover, his fists were still attached with armament-colored Haki. A powerful impact directly caused Omoro to hit the edge of the barrier from the middle position.


    As for Kova, this guy is now dominated by fear.


    The once arrogant CP department has now be a lost dog.


    But this time Chang Nuo did not intend to kill the two people directly. Instead, with a smile on his lips, he directly removed the barrier space that blocked them.


    The moment the barrier disappeared, Kova wanted to take advantage of this opportunity to escape quickly, and even his boss began to ignore him. But the moment the barrier dissipated, Junhe had already discovered Kova''s thoughts.


    He rushed forward in an instant and before Kova could leave, he kicked him out, and then took out a restraining ring from his waist.


    Kova''s strength should be higher than that of Junhe, but he had no intention of fighting at all, so he was suppressed by Junhe with one move.


    After subduing Kowa, Junhe got up and ran to Changnuo. He asked with worry and concern, "How are you, Your Majesty?"


    Because he had clearly seen that His Majesty the King had been seriously injured just now. Although he acted as if nothing happened now, the damage to his clothes during his lifetime was enough to prove the extent of their battle just now.


    Chang Nuo just smiled and said, "Do you think I''m in trouble?"


    Junhe was stunned, but he didn''t say anything more and just stared at him curiously.


    "Take these three people down and interrogate them about the World Government. I want to know more from them. If you can''t find out, just tell me and we can just bring out the Devil Fruit!"


    Chang Nuo said that he didn''t have much hope for these people. Three of the six people who came were dead and now only three were left, one of whom was still seriously injured.


    Although Omoro was not willing to give in at all, now he knew very well that there was no way at all.


    After taking down these people, Junhe took out a golden telephone bug from Omoro''s arms. Junhe looked curious about this rtively novel guy.


    Just when he was about to test it, Chang Nuo suddenly appeared beside him and snatched the thing instantly.


    "Junhe, don''t press this thing randomly. Do you know what this is?"


    Changnuo said calmly that he did not me Junhe, but wanted to educate him about the function of this thing.


    "Your Majesty, this thing should be a phone bug, right?" Junhe asked doubtfully.


    "You are right, this is a phone bug, but it is different from ordinary ones. The golden phone bug, its function is to summon the Navy''s so-called demon-ying order, which is ten warships, and there are also ten lieutenant generals participating. Massive attacksing in.


    As long as you press it, the navy will automatically know the location and conduct an indiscriminate attack on our royal city. "


    Changnuo said.


    After Junhe listened to these words, cold sweat began to break out on his head. He did not feel that His Majesty the King was deceiving him. After all, he had never seen such a perverted phone bug. He could have such a big one. The power can also be imagined.


    And although the identities of these people are not clear to Junhe, it can be judged from their strength that they are definitely not ordinary people.


    Things can finallye to an end now, but their surprises and surprises are yet toe.


    Two of the fruits that were originally sent here have quietly changed.


    Especially one of the apples has a light yellow pattern with a circr texture on it, which looks very extraordinary.


    This light yellow devil fruit should be the guy who knows how to attack the mind. As for the other one, it is used by the man with the red tie.


    These two devil fruits are already two of the more powerful ones in the devil fruit series, especially the superhuman psychic devil fruit, which is a mental attack and has a huge effect even on Changnuo.


    In the current pirate world, apart from the Time Series Devil Fruit, this is the only other ability that can attack Changno.


    Chang Nuo himself did not expect that he would achieve such a huge harvest this time.


    So when he faced the fruit of the soul, his whole face showed an unprecedented seriousness. After all, no matter who this thing is given to, the prerequisite is that it must be a trustworthy person.


    Fortunately, the guy before didn''t have very strong control over his psychic abilities, otherwise it might have been a different scene at this moment.


    If this thing is cultivated properly, it may not be a problem to dominate a sea area and even surpass the Four Emperors. After all, almost no one can stop such a thing.


    A mental attack ispletely invisible. No matter how strong your vignce is, you can''t escape this bug-filled existence.


    After watching for a while, Chang Nuo suddenly felt that his decision just now seemed a bit hasty. Why should these people be left behind?

 Chapter 45 Analyzing the Situation

    <h4>Chapter 45 Analyzing the Situation</h4>


    He knows too much about this world. Isn''t it necessary to pry some words from these guys? If something unexpected happens then, it won''t be worth it.


    At this time, the three Omoro people have been put on restraint cors. They can''t show their strength at all now, so they can only sit there seriously.


    Chang Nuo nced at it, then stamped his right foot on the ground, and the original boundary space appeared again.


    "His Majesty����"


    Junhe was a little confused. Before he could figure out what was going on, Changnuo slowly walked towards Omoro.


    "Huhuhu... It seems that King Tru has changed his mind?"


    Omoro said with a smile.


    "You''re right, I changed my mind, because I suddenly discovered that I know most of the things you know, and there is no need to learn anything more from your mouths.


    But I can talk to you about these things, and it can be considered as somepensation before you die. "


    Chang Nuo knelt down and said calmly.


    Junhe consciously walked directly to the edge of the barrier and began to observe the surrounding situation. Although there would be no danger at all if he stayed here, no one could guarantee that nothing would happen.


    "Tell me, what do you know?"


    Omoro no longer had his initial arrogant attitude. He was already waiting for death anyway. Instead of struggling, why not listen to what the other party wanted to say?


    "Omoro, from some aspects I have to admire your CP department. It is true that the CP department directly epts the orders of the World Government. Of course, rather than saying this, it is better to say directly that you only ept the orders of those five old men. .


    Let me tell you, apart from the Space Series Devil Fruits that the Five Old Stars ask you to look for, the rest should be surgical fruits. So during my time there, there must be other Devil Fruits for you to look for, right? "


    Chang Nuo asked with a smile. He had noticed the surprise on the other person''s face.


    Omoro didn''t say anything now, but his expression said everything.


    He didn''t know where the other party knew the information, but Chang Nuo was not wrong.


    "Your Majesty King Tru, it''s really surprising that a small country in the South China Sea can actually learn about things in the New World?"


    Omoro said with a surprised smile.


    "New World? I haven''t heard of this term for a long time, and I don''t know what the current situation has be.


    But I believe that the most powerful people on the sea now should be the Whitebeard Pirates. The remaining members of the Rocks Pirates should have be extremely powerful one by one.


    All of this now is probably enough to give your world government a headache. It��s still unclear how the situation in this pirate world will develop in the future. If you can live well, you might actually be able to take a good look at the changes in this world. "


    "It seems like I won''t survive, right?"


    When Omoro heard what Chang Nuo said, the look of surprise on his face had diminished a lot. He no longer cared how the other party knew so many things about the new world.


    But from the other party''s words, I have got an important message, that is, I may not be able to get out of here.


    But unlike others, Omoro faced and epted such things calmly, without any nervousness or uneasiness.


    "Junhe, help give the adults in our CP department a ride. It will be more enjoyable!"


    Changnuo shouted directly to Junhe who was standing at the edge of the barrier.


    His eyes have been staring at Omoro''s expression, wanting to see what the other person''s ns are now.


    Junhe received the order and showed no mercy at all. The two men were already seriously injured, but now the matter could be solved directly by just moving his fingers.


    Of the six people from the CP department, only Omoro was left. The two looked at each other without any hatred in their eyes.


    "Come on,ing out this time really made me feel surprised that Nanhai, which I thought was weak, could still have such a powerful existence like you. But if your existence is known to the world government, I can guess what happened. What state? "


    Omoro said with a smile.


    While he smiled, Chang Nuo alsoughed, and said in a calm tone, "You are right, if our strength is known to the world government, then even I can''t imagine what might happen.


    But Omoro! In two years at most, what can we do even if the world government knows about our side? The situation on the sea will definitely be fixed within two years. Let alone the World Government, who among the nine major departments of your CP cane and stop us? "


    Omoluo was suddenly stunned. The other party actually knew all the departments of CP, but he felt relieved when he thought about it. After all, even the Five Old Stars knew about it, so what was there to be surprised about knowing how many departments CP had.


    "Why are you so sure that the situation on the sea will change drastically within two years?"


    Omoro asked with no expression on his face and his voice was low.


    "The new world is just such a big ce, and the pirates are restless. Everyone wants to be the new Pirate King. They all want to know what the One Piece is?


    Therefore, in this state, the ce where the ind of Ravdru is located will definitely be a battleground for their big forces.


    None of the big pirates today are confident that they can find this thing directly, and no one can decipher the historical text.


    It is estimated that the most correct thing your world government has done is to kill everyone in O''Hara, otherwise what will happen next will be even more beyond your imagination.


    Among the pirates in the new world now, the Whitebeard Pirates have upied a ce, and I am afraid that no matter what kind of pirates they are now, they can no longerpete with them.


    The other pirate groups probably don''t have much effect. On the road to the king''s hegemony, as I said just now, the remaining members of the Rocks Pirate Group will definitely have a ce. As for thest seat, it''s not yet clear who will win. It can be known.


    The only thing that is clear is that those at the Navy Headquarters simply do not have the time and energy to deal with what is happening in the Sihai area, otherwise there would not be so many headaches for them. "


    "Thank you so much for letting me know!"


    Omoluo really expressed his sincere thanks this time. He understood what Changnuo said, but this time he connected everything together, which made him feel how scary the little guy in front of him was.

 Chapter 46 A bite of the devil fruit

    <h4>Chapter 46 A bite of the devil fruit</h4>


    In fact, Junhe, who was standing next to Changnuo, looked confused. He couldn''t figure out what the two people were chatting about.


    He had never even heard of the word New World, let alone other things.


    Although he did not understand, Junhe was still writing down these words carefully. After all, following his own king, he could believe that Changnuo would definitely take him into these ces, and the South China Sea would definitely be the most powerful ce in the future.


    "Omoro, tell me, do you have any wishes before your death? If possible, I wouldn''t mind helping you realize it!"


    Changnuo asked with a smile.


    Omoro just smiled softly and shook his head slightly. He never thought that he would have such an ending, so there was no unfulfilled wish at all.


    "Since you don''t have any wishes, I don''t mind telling you one more thing before I die. There is an overlord on the Five Old Stars that you worship!"


    Changnuo finished speaking with a smile, and then directly put his hand on the other person''s head. In just an instant, Omoro''s entire body disappeared into thin air.


    All that fell to the ground was a restraining cor.


    This is Changnuo''s space attack ability, and it is also one of the more powerful ones currently, space dposition.


    He can directly crush any object into a state of nothingness. In this world, it is impossible to find any information about him.


    But when Omoro disappeared, Changnuo felt a little empty in his heart. He didn''t know why he felt like this. It might be difficult to meet an opponent who could match him.


    But he is not a pirate. If there are no ties behind him, Changnuo may not mind leaving Omoro''s life, but it is different now. There are too many people standing behind him. Regardless of emotion or reason, Changnuo will You can''t gamble on this. One person''s life can change the peace of mind of a country. Even if he is an acquaintance, he will not be polite or hold back at all.


    Those people from the CP department were still lying on the ground one by one, but they had long since lost their breath. They should be considered a group of very powerful beings in themselves.


    But their shoring is that they are too arrogant. Although they show the rigor in treating the enemy physically, the key is that they underestimate the enemy in their hearts and never face it. Otherwise, how could even Changnuo today be able to fight against so many enemies? How can anyone win so easily?


    After all this was over, Chang Nuo sighed, and then slowly stood up.


    His expression waspletely different from before.


    The serious expression made Jun He, who was standing next to him, feel tremendous pressure.


    However, after Omoro died, his Devil Fruit ability instantly attached to the fruit next to him.


    "Shunwa, just take Omoro''s animal-type phantom beast devil fruit and eat it. I''ve told you about the devil fruit before, don''t betray my trust!"


    Chang Nuo said seriously.


    It''s not like Junhe doesn''t know what the so-called animal type devil fruit is like! Now His Majesty the King actually asked him to use it, which indeed showed his trust in him.


    Although Junhe was a little excited after hearing this, he still remained calm. He knelt down directly on his knees, looked firmly in his eyes, and said with a serious expression, "Your Majesty, I will definitely live up to your Majesty''s trust!"


    "We have known each other for so many years, I still believe you on this, but you also know that after today''s incident is revealed, everyone who knows about it will be informed.


    Our country should not be able to bear the consequences he has produced and brought! "


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes and took a deep breath and said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Junhe said firmly.


    "Go ahead and eat that Devil Fruit. This guy haspletely failed to bring out the full potential of this Devil Fruit. Don''t let me down."


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said.


    Junhe walked to the fruit and picked up the Devil Fruit that seemed to be slightly emitting a purple light, with a look of nervousness and anxiety on his face.


    Then he closed his eyes and took a sharp bite, followed by the sound of vomiting.


    After a while, when his eyes were dull and he was about to take a second bite, Chang Nuo next to himughed and shouted, "Have you forgotten what I told you before? You only need one bite of the Devil Fruit." .��


    "Ah? Is that so?"


    Junhe looked at a loss. Now if he was asked to take a second bite, he probably didn''t have much courage.


    In Cp2, six people came, five Devil Fruit users, and five Devil Fruits appeared, which was pretty good.


    "Take the Psychic Devil Fruit away. The remaining Devil Fruits will be found by some more trustworthy people and let them eat them directly!"


    Changnuo said.


    He doesn''t like these things at all. The most important thing is that these things cannot be leaked out. The CP department''s investigative capabilities can be regarded as top-notch in the world.


    But it is consistent with what Chang Nuo said. As long as there are two more years, the world government and navy will know that this matter was done by their own country, and then they will have nothing to do in the end.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Junhe shouted loudly.


    Now he felt that he was full of power, and he felt like he couldn''t use it up.


    But it will take at least a few months for this guy to be familiar with Devil Fruits before he can slowly understand them.


    After all, almost all Devil Fruits can only be developed through actualbat.


    "Let''s make arrangements to set off in three days to the Holy Land of Mariejoia, and notify all surrounding countries to solemnly inform us that our Kingdom of Tru will join the World Government. We have built up the momentum this time, and it will be of great use in the future. "


    Changnuo casually removed the surrounding barrier space, and then calmly said to Junhe.


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    Chang Nuo looked at the remaining corpses lying on the ground, and then blue light emitted from each person again.


    "exile����"


    They were the same as the group of pirates they had solved before. The bodies of these people instantly appeared in the sea hundreds of miles away. It is estimated that if no one found it, they would have to wait for the end of being fish-bone.


    "Your Majesty, what should I do with that golden phone bug?"


    Junhe asked.


    "Oh! I would have forgotten about it if you didn''t mention it. This thing is of no use to us, and it''s troublesome to hold on to. But it''s quite valuable. Just take it with you after three days. After I go to the Holy Land Mariejoia, I can hand it over to other pirates and let them auction it off, and I can make some money."


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and said.

 Chapter 47 Join the World Government?

    <h4>Chapter 47 Join the World Government?</h4>


    After saying that, the two people started walking back directly, but on the way, Junhe still couldn''t help asking, "Your Majesty, what are the New World and One Piece?"


    "A new world! This is the second half of the Great Line, and it is also where the truly strong gather. Those who can survive here are almost all the strongest among the strong.


    As for the one piece, this thing has always been called a great secret treasure, but until now, no one knows what is actually inside.


    The only one who knows about him is the team of Roger the Pirate King, Rafdru. This ce called the Ultimate Land is where he is stored. "


    Changnuo said as he walked.


    "Big secret treasure? Doesn''t that mean a lot of money?"


    Jun and Hzi both cried out and said excitedly.


    "What are you thinking about? No one knows the final appearance of One Piece. If it is really a lot of gold and silver treasures, do you think that after the death of the Pirate King, his crew members lived in such a mess?"


    Chang Nuo said with a speechless expression.


    "I''m sorry, Your Majesty, I have almost no understanding of these things!" Junhe said awkwardly.


    "We will set off in three days. Then I will take you to see what the Grand Route looks like."


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    Last time, I wanted to go directly to the Grand Route for a tour, but in the end I didn''t expect that the Royal Kingdom''s attack would ur, which dyed the matter.


    This time going to the Holy Land Marie Joa happened to be a better opportunity.


    No matter how you go, you have to pass through the Grand Line before you can go there.


    The current Toru Kingdom is not afraid to join the World Government at all. Before, the country was so poor that it could not afford the heavenly gold. But it is different now. The family has enough food, so they can still worry about such things!


    But if he wants to join the World Government, the king of this country must go to Victory Mariejoia to pay homage to those Celestial Dragons. This is the only choice.


    Changnuo has already figured out these situations. Although they don''t want to do this, they can''t fault it now.


    Junhe apanied Chang Nuo down the long steps. The key is that the tform above is still in a mess, and the shocking scars caused by the battle are still left in the open space.


    The CP department waspletely wiped out this time. To outsiders, there was no movement. The Tru Kingdom still maintained its original appearance.


    The next thing they need to deal with is to go to the Holy Land Mariejoia to negotiate.


    Everything in China is currently developing steadily, but there is still a long way to go before we reach the ideal goal.


    But despite this, the current development of the entire Tru Kingdom is enough to make other surrounding countries jealous.


    Since the defeat of the Roja Kingdom, no surrounding country dares to challenge the authority of the Tru Kingdom.


    However, after residents of other countries around the country learned about the national treatment of the Kingdom of Tru, many people near the border have begun to move closer to this country.


    They racked their brains and even squeezed their heads to join this country and abandon their original national life.


    Regarding this situation, Changnuo did not refuse, but weed the arrival of these people.


    For a country, the economy cannot exin everything. Poption growth means that the economy can grow rapidly. What they do now is almost all external life, and the country��s internal management is almost seamless, not even We need the National Guard so that the country can be safe and sound.


    Thergest country in the South China Sea is not just determined by geography.


    ������������


    After learning that the Kingdom of Toru was going to join the World Government, many people at the bottom still didn''t understand. After all, for them, joining the World Government meant paying high fees, but they never thought about these fees. There is no need for these people toe out at all.


    Forced to have no choice, the day after announcing its intention to join the World Government, the entire Tru Kingdom began to issue notices about the benefits of joining the World Government, and that the costs provided to the World Government did not need to be borne by anyone.


    After receiving such notice, the nervousness of those people was relieved. After all, many people had experienced such a thing.


    A country close to the Kingdom of Toru, the Kingdom of Solbe, is a member of the World Government. Itsnd area is directly adjacent to the Kingdom of Toru. Now many people from the Kingdom of Toru havee from there.


    The way the Sorbei Kingdom handed over the heavenly gold was almost unlimited extortion and exploitation of their own people, which caused resentment among the people in the country. However, as a member of the World Government, those high-ranking nobles are the masters of the entire country.


    The reason why some people are worried is because the Toru Kingdom, which feels rtively good, suddenly announced that it will join the World Government, so they may still face the same problems as before.


    But after the announcement was sent out, these people began to slowly choose to believe in this country.


    ������������


    After the third day, Chang Nuo appeared here again at Nanniwa Port.


    Different from what appeared before, this time Chang Nuopletely set out as a king and headed for the Holy Land Mary Joa along the Great Channel.


    This time they did not choose the cumbersome National, but instead chose a smaller and lighter ship.


    The length of this ship is about fifty meters, which is already a lot smaller than the National, but it may be much better in other aspects.


    Standing at the port, Chang Nuo turned to look at Gogoya and asked, "Are everything ready?"


    "Your Majesty, everything here has been prepared. Among them, 50 bottles of rose perfume you arranged, 2,000 sets of exquisite clothing, a golden scepter representing identity, and some other supporting items have all been prepared. You ce it on board.��


    Gogoya picked up a small notebook in his hand and began to report.


    "Your Majesty, I also want to go with you this time. How about letting me go outside to see the new world together?"


    Luosta stood here, looking at Chang Nuo expectantly and said.


    Changnuo smiled, then patted Luosta on the shoulder, and said earnestly, "There will be many opportunities for you to go out in the future, but this time, the country has not yet stabilized. After the economy improves, you can go whenever you want."


    "That''s right, Luosta, this time we go out with His Majesty for fun. If there is a chance next time, I will talk to Your Majesty and take you out personally!" Junhe said with a smile.


    "I see����"


    Luosta said with a disappointed look on his face.


    "Now that everyone is in ce, let''s set off quickly! I really want to see what the Holy Land of Mariejoia looks like now!"


    Changnuo said.


    This is the second time Chang Nuo has left the country, and this time he has a clear goal unlike before. All that remains is to move towards the destination.

 Chapter 48 Filibuster

    <h4>Chapter 48 Filibuster</h4>


    In fact, for them, if it was better, they wouldn''t need to start from Upside Down Mountain at all. After all, it would be equivalent to a long detour.


    However, their technology is not developed yet. Sea Tower Stone is a crucial thing for sailing on the sea in this world. After all, with this thing, you can directly cross the windless zone.


    But they don''t have it now, so they can only start from the starting point step by step.


    If they can cross the windless zone, then they can directly enter the Grand Line without having to worry too much at all.


    This time the navigator on the ship is still Barlow. Since this guy changed his identity as a pirate and became their navigator, he no longer has the dream of being a pirate. After all, he can only stay here. Enjoy a rtively quiet and high-quality life.


    The sea surface was almost the same as what we had encountered before we set out. The sea surface was quite calm and there were no obstacles in it.


    When they appeared in Upside Down Mountain again, they still couldn''t help being shocked when they saw the scene of water flowing backwards in front of them. After all, this was indeed andscape that subverted the three views.


    "Notify Barlow to slow down the ship when we get down to the Grand Ler. There may be something unexpected ahead of us!"


    Changnuo ordered to Junhe next to him.


    "OK."


    Standing in ce, Chang Nuo wondered if he would encounter that huge whale. After all, that guy had been here 50 years ago since the official plot began, so he must still be in this ce now.


    Although no one else understood it, everyone''s eyes widened when the ship began to sail rapidly towards the Grand Route.


    Because in front of them, there was a fish bigger than their entire boat. Although it only poked out its head, from a distance, it really looked like a mountain.


    "Your Majesty, be careful..."


    Junhe instantly jumped to the bow of the ship and started to prepare for an attack.


    Changnuo was speechless. After finally meeting the first guy who officially appeared in the plot, Junhe actually behaved like this.


    "Come down, it''s okay, don''t whine!"


    Changnuo shouted directly to Junhe.


    Junhe was stunned for a moment, and then he thought of what Changnuo told him to inform Barlow when they were going up the mountain, and he seemed to understand something instantly.


    He hurriedly ran to Chang Nuo and asked with some confusion, "Your Majesty, did you already know that there would be such a big guy here?"


    "Let''s talk about it when we get here. I''m also looking forward to how big this thing is?" A smile appeared on Chang Nuo''s lips.


    Because he had been prepared in advance, Barlow had already started the deceleration mode when the boat started to descend, so the boat started to stop slowly when it was still fifty or sixty meters away from the huge whale. Came down.


    Everyone on the boat now ran to the edge of the boat and looked at this huge guy in surprise.


    The opponent just opened his eyes and his eyes were already as big as half their ship.


    "Wow... this guy is really big!" Gogoya couldn''t help but sigh when he got close to this huge whale.


    Everyone else''s eyes also showed shock.


    For many of the people here, they have almost never been out of their own sea areas. Except for the original group of Barlow and others, they may have wandered many ces. None of the king''s guards brought out by Chang Nuo followed them. It��s like seeing the world.


    Even King Chang Nuo couldn''t help but get excited when he saw this huge creature.


    When he watched this anime before, he had no idea about this whale at all, but now when he saw the real big guy, it made him feel how small he was.


    "Your Majesty, this thing is really big!"


    Junhe stared at the guy in front of him intently.


    "This must be big. This thing is thergest ind whale in the entire sea. Although it is not thergest creature in the world, it can still be regarded as one of the best." Changnuo said.


    "Woo..."


    While they were still admiring it, the ind whale made a sound. For such a big guy, the vibration of the sound caused waves in the entire sea.


    The Abri, which was so close to them, felt like it was about to disintegrate.


    "Your name is Rab, right?"


    Chang Nuo stood on the bow of the boat and shouted directly to the huge whale.


    When Chang Nuo finished speaking, the huge whale, which had some dull eyes, slowly looked towards them.


    The other people on the boat were instantly shocked when they felt this scene, and many of them were so frightened that they were at a loss what to do.


    If this thing opened its mouth, it could swallow their ship directly into its belly.


    When Labu looked at Changnuo, his head moved slightly, but it directly caused waves in the sea water, causing the small boat to almost hit the mountain.


    If Barlow hadn''t reacted quickly, they would have all fallen into the sea by now.


    "Your Majesty, do you know this guy!" Gogoya looked at Chang Nuo in surprise and asked.


    "It''s not like we know him, I just heard about him before." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    After saying this, Rab seemed a little excited, but among the pirates from all over the world who entered the Grand Line, who wouldn''t recognize it?


    After all, this ce is a ce that must be passed through. It is estimated that no one in the world will be impressed by this big guy!


    As he spoke, Rabpletely stretched his huge head out of the water. This whale as big as an ind really gave people a sense of oppression.


    At this moment, everyone on the boat focused their attention on His Majesty the King. After all, he was the cause of this thing. If anyone is not careful, they may all be buried in the belly of the fish.


    Changnuo looked at Rab blinking. Although he didn''t understand what he was talking about, he could at least understand it somewhat.


    "You don''t have to doubt it. I''ve heard your name elsewhere, but I''m just very curious about you. Do you want to go to sea with me? I can also look for the person you want to find!"


    Chang Nuo stood on the bow and shouted loudly.


    Although Rab is a whale, he can understand what humans say.


    Currently, Chang Nuo does not have the ability to hear the sounds of all things. This requires a certain level of domineering power.


    But Changnuo believes that he will be able to reach this level in a short time, and it shouldn''t be a big problem if he can barelymunicate with a whale.

 Chapter 49 Eternal Record Pointer

    <h4>Chapter 49 Eternal Record Pointer</h4>


    After Labu heard what Chang Nuo said, there was some hesitation in his eyes. Then he shook his head directly, causing a huge wave in an instant.


    "Your Majesty, please don''t talk to him anymore, please. If we continue talking, everyone on this ship will be chilled!"


    Gogoya was so frightened that he sat on the deck with tears in his eyes. It was obvious that he was dominated by fear.


    Others were also a little frightened, and even Junhe was a little at a loss when faced with such a thing.


    Chang Nuo was the only one whoughed out loud.


    "Let''s start, the mission is still important, this whale,e back and talk when we have a chance!" Chang Nuo smiled and ordered the people next to him.


    Now how can these people have the intention to stay here? One or two of them are seizing the time to leave this ce. Facing such a huge guy, even if they sneeze next, they will probably be able to make their small boat instantly sank in time.


    Barlow already wished he could use his hands and feet together. He even wished he could have two wings on the ship and fly away from this ce quickly. After all, it felt too dangerous to him.


    Just a few words of conversation had already made them feel in danger of life and death. If they continued to chat, this whale could kill them all if they were not careful.


    "Goodbye, I''ll talk to you again when I have the chance. Of course, if you are willing, you can go to the Tru Kingdom in the West Sea to find me!"


    The ship had already started sailing, but Changnuo still shouted to Labu without giving up.


    Not long after they left, an old man who looked to be in his fifties stood out before he could reach his head. His eyes were cloudy. He waited until the ship disappeared from sight, and then slowly began to disappear. In Rab''s huge head.


    Their voyage this time is not an adventurous voyage. At best, it is just toplete a mission. It does not have the same experiences as the protagonist when they set foot on the Grand Route.


    Besides, on the sea at this time, especially in the first half of the Grand Line, there were not as many pirates as expected.


    But if you can meet one or two along the way, you are very lucky.


    After all, the sea is so big, and the chance of encountering a small pirate ship is indeed not very high.


    "Gogoya, where does the record pointer we got now lead to?" Changnuo asked curiously.


    "Sorry, Your Majesty, the record pointer we got can only go to basta. This is the only eternal record pointer we can buy on this great route."


    Gogoya said.


    This time, Gogoya followed him out, dressed in apletely different style than before.


    It ispletely made ording to the kind of royal sister style that Chang Nuo likes. A white shirt and hip skirt, plus ck stockings and high heels, a long ponytail, and a ck sses frame show that the other party is already interested in this voyage. Full of expectations.


    After all, a capable king like Chang Nuo is unthinkable in many ces.


    However, Chang Nuo noticed a key word, that is, the eternal record pointer actually leads to the country of basta. Chang Nuo was quite impressed by this ce.


    In addition, Chang Nuo seemed to have thought of something suddenly!


    "Junhe, after arriving in basta, we will stop there for a week. During this period, I need to give you a task. It must bepleted by then!"


    Chang Nuo''s face suddenly turned serious, even surprising others around him.


    Gogoya didn''t expect that just by mentioning the name of the country basta, he could make His Majesty the King show such an expression.


    Junhe put away the smile on his face, looked serious, and said firmly, "Please give me your Majesty''s orders!"


    "In thend of basta Pce, there is one thing that is very important to us, and that is the things stored on Batl Ind. This ce has a historical record. I need you to destroy the content on it. Do you have confidence? "


    Anyway, the people standing on the deck of the ship are all his close confidants, and there is no need to hide them.


    Although Gogoya was very curious as to what exactly Bart kept, looking at the expressions on the two of them, it was not difficult to guess that this thing must be very important.


    Of course she couldn''t guess it, but the seriousness on Junhe''s face was already evident.


    "Your Majesty, don''t worry, your subordinates will definitely do it!"


    Junhe said seriously.


    "Don''t be too anxious. After all, that thing is stored in the pce. Besides, this order is not dead. Just do your best!"


    Changnuo suddenly felt rxed and said to Junhe with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, you once said that thing is rted to the life and death of our country. Even if I die, I will definitely do it!" Junhe said.


    "Then let me wait and see!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    During the subsequent voyage, the group encountered almost no obstacles. After all, their route was directly to basta. Although they encountered several inds in the middle, these things had almost no effect on them.


    There is no shortage of supplies on the ship now, so you just need to go directly.


    However, as the Toru Kingdom is a country that frequently makes headlines in newspapers, there are almost no secrets left when Changnuo and his team set out.


    Before arriving in basta, the country had already begun to make full preparations.


    In the pce of basta.


    "Minister Zuo, where are they expected to be now?" Kobra asked looking at a man about his own age but with a fat head and big ears.


    "Your Majesty, the King of the Kingdom of Tru estimates that it will take another two days to reach our basta, but we are not sure whether they will stop in our basta?" said the fat left minister.


    "Don''t worry! They will definitely stop at this ce. After all, they need to go to the holynd of Mariejoia. The eternal record pointer leading here is only owned by us in basta!"


    Cobra said with a smile on his face.


    "But Your Majesty, how could their small country in the South China Sea know about the eternal record pointer?" Minister Zuo said again.


    "You are wrong. If they don''t know, do you think this country can carry out such arge maritime trade, even including the navy, and still be able to silence the other party?"


    Cobra didn''t believe that the other party didn''t have any wisdom. Judging from past newspapers, the Kingdom of Tru was definitely not as simple as imagined.

 Chapter 50 Sea Cat

    <h4>Chapter 50 Sea Cat</h4>


    In the Royal Pce of basta, preparations have been made to wee the young King Tru.


    After all, ording to the country''s situation, the current Tru Kingdom can be said to be a country that they all miss.


    Good economic development and solving the problem of people''sck of food. After searching the scriptures, this is the real purpose of Kobra.


    After all, he was right about one thing. The eternal record pointer leading to the holynd of Mariejoia was found only in basta on the entire Grand Line.


    It can even be said that only their pce has such a thing.


    That''s why Kobra dared to say such words, the other party would definitelye here.


    However, there is no need for him to say more about these things. Chang Nuo will definitely arrive here.


    After all, when ites to Pluto''s weapon, that thing is lying quietly in his own country, and the only ce where this thing is recorded is in the basta Pce.


    Although there is only one person left in the world who can understand these historical texts, Chang Nuo cannot guarantee that things will proceed ording to the original n.


    His appearance is likely to change the course of the pirates, so naturally the hidden dangers of this thing need to be eliminated in advance.


    If he hadn''t gone to Mariegio this time, he wouldn''t have been able to remember such a thing.


    That''s why he made such a decision to let Junhe go and solve this hidden danger that may arise in the future.


    Although no one knows what the Tru Kingdom will develop into in a few years, they must at least nip everything that could threaten them in the cradle.


    Chang Nuo didn''t have any so-called whims. He just wanted to maintain the stability of his country. When he learned that Pluto weapons actually appeared in his country, Chang Nuo himself was shocked.


    But since things are already like this, although there is no chance to change, at least you must do what you can do in advance.


    Two days after the first voyage, the huge desert country of basta appeared in front of everyone''s eyes.


    It is different from the ind countries we saw before. This is a truly huge country.


    It''s just that when you stay here, you can see at a nce that it is almost in a desert state, and the light yellow sand has extended to the seaside.


    And there are not many green trees on it. This is the Great Sea Route. Even if the two countries are not far apart along the way, their climate and environment have changed dramatically!


    "Your Majesty, this Grand Route is really ufortable. It was extremely cold there yesterday. It''s only been a while now, but it''s really too hot here!"


    Gogoya appeared wearing a sun hat, and the buttons of his shirt had begun to reveal his underwear.


    Not to mention her, everyone else had the same idea.


    "Where are we now? The reason why the Grand Line is famous is because it is the area where everyone dreams of sailing. It is also full of uncertainties that so many people have appeared to challenge themselves." Chang Nuoy Said leisurely on the recliner.


    There was a sun umbre on the deck. Changnuo was wearing only beach shorts, shirtless and huge sunsses. He was lying in the shade, drinking an iced drink and talking leisurely.


    There are not many things you can do while sailing on the boat, other than leisurely drinking tea and looking at the sea.


    "Your Majesty, ever since we entered the Grand Line, I have noticed that a bird has been following us above us. I don''t know if it is my hallucination or something, but I always feel that he has never flown above our heads!"


    Junhe was also leaning on the deck, talkingzily.


    "You read that right, that bird has indeed been following us, not from the beginning of the Grand Line, and it has been following us since we set off!"


    Changnuo turned sideways, opened one eye slightly, and said to Junhe who was lying in the shade.


    As soon as these words came out, Junhe immediately jumped up, looking closely at the bird in the sky that had been observing people like him, and his alert look immediately appeared.


    "Don''t be nervous. We didn''t do anything else anyway, so just follow along. There are countless countries in the world looking at us now, so don''t worry about them!"


    The corners of Chang Nuo''s mouth raised slightly, he picked up the drink in his hand and took another sip, and then said leisurely.


    "Do we really not care?" Gogoya also asked.


    "It doesn''t matter, just watch it!"


    Chang Nuo seemed to pay no attention to this matter. For them, it was not easy to catch the seagull above their heads. They could catch it directly with just a little effort.


    But this ispletely unnecessary. After all, they are sailing on the sea. Even if this seagull disappears, it is estimated that before long, something hidden in other ces may appear to observe people like them.


    It''s just the newspaper''s methods. You can tell what these things are for with your eyes closed.


    Hearing what Chang Nuo had said, the other two people didn''t pay too much attention to it. It was just like His Majesty the King said, just watch it, it won''t affect it anyway!


    "Your Majesty... what a big cat!"


    Not long after they started chatting, other people started shouting.


    Changnuo couldn''t help but sat up curiously, took off his huge sunsses, and saw that there was indeed a big lucky cat on the side of their sailing path.


    The pure white body and the slightly raised hand seemed to be greeting them.


    This thing seems to be at least fifty meters tall. The height on the sea is already twenty or thirty meters, not to mention that part of it is still on the bottom of the sea.


    To ordinary people, this scene may seem a bit scary, but to these people on the ship, they are more just curious, and really have no other thoughts at all.


    No fear, no surprise.


    Everyone just feels that it is strange that such a creature can actually appear in the sea. For most people who have never been to the sea, this is indeed something worth appreciating.


    This scene indeed attracted everyone''s attention, but having experienced something as big as a rabbi before, this thing seemed a little too small.


    "so cute!"


    Gogoya said with a smile on his face while he was working on the boat.


    "What did I think it was? It turned out to be basta''s specialty sea cat. Continue sailing." Changnuo said.


    After saying that, Chang Nuo continued to lie there without paying any attention to Haimao''s appearance.

 Chapter 51 Entering Alabasta

    <h4>Chapter 51 Entering basta</h4>


    At least one thing is certain, now we have indeed entered the situation of basta.


    This thing is a specialty of basta. Chang Nuo didn''t expect to see this guy this time, but it was normal when he thought about it.


    "Your Majesty, should we disembark at the Rapeseed Flower City in basta? Or directly disembark at Albana, their royal capital?" Gogoya asked.


    "Rape flower?"


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and then said directly, "Let''s just stop here. It''s just a good time to see the customs and customs of basta and get a good understanding of the situation in this country."


    "Okay, Your Majesty, I will make arrangements right away!" Gogoya said.


    In Chang Nuo''s impression, rapeseed flowers seem to be a ce rich in perfume, but ording to the current state of basta, let alone perfume, they probably can''t even grow flowers!


    But at the same time, he also thought of an idea. As of now, his country''s business cannot be carried out on the Grand Route. After all, the cost is too high. If there is an intermediate base country for sales, then Such costs can be greatly reduced.


    After thinking for a while, he stopped thinking about it. After all, it was too hot here. He already wanted to jump directly into the sea water to take a good shower. But for him who has eaten the devil fruit, the sea water is not suitable for him. They are almost always deadly.


    The weather in basta is not ordinary, and there is a strong dryness in the heat. Even if I stay in a cool ce, my lips will still be dry after a while.


    The ship travels very slowly in such a ce. After all, it relies on wind power to propel it throughout the entire journey. However, in basta, wind is almost a luxury item.


    As night approached, the group of them finally arrived at the location of the rapeseed flowers. It was almost as expected, but of course it had a huge port.


    There are many ships docked here, and if you look carefully, there are also a few pirate ships among them.


    But now they still have the energy to take care of this. After finally starting to dock, they all started to run down impatiently.


    Having lived on the ship for so long, although the supplies prepared are still sufficient, on the other hand, eating only a few kinds of food every day will always make people feel bored after a long time.


    "This is the rapeseed field!"


    Chang Nuo looked at the buildings in front of him that looked like slums. There really was no aesthetics at all. Evenpared to his own Tru Kingdom, this ce was simply inferior to the extreme.


    Not to mention that the wind and sand are particrly strong at night. There are only two bustling trees leaning on the coastline. At a nce, there is nothing but sand.


    "Your Majesty, this should be the rapeseed field. It seems we can only spend tonight here. We will start heading to Albana tomorrow!"


    Gogoya arranged and said.


    "We can only do this for now. I still feel more at ease onnd. I want to find a ce to rest today! We will talk about tomorrow''s affairs tomorrow."


    Chang Nuo just wants to find a ce to have a good rest and taste the delicacies of basta.


    After all, I have already learned about the specialties here before, such as scorpions, centipedes and the like, especially scorpions. They are the same size as lobsters. I guess they taste pretty good!


    "Your Majesty, since we have arrived, should we inform basta''s garrison here first to avoid any misunderstandings?" Junhe reminded.


    "You are right to remind them about this, then go and tell them." Chang Nuo said.


    "Let''s walk forward first, find a ce to stay, and have something to eat along the way." Gogoya said.


    Chang Nuo looked at this dpidated rape flower city. They were almost all built at different heights. At a nce, it seemed that the road in front of him was straight upward.


    Just using the color of knowledge to perceive thendscape of the entire city, almost everything was imprinted in Chang Nuo''s mind.


    The wide road beneath your feet is filled with sand. The wind and sand have swept to the edge of the city. For this ce, it is estimated that it may not be long before it bes uninhabitable.


    But the people here don''t seem to realize this at all, but even if they have realized it, what effect will it have?


    It��s hard to imagine what basta was like before. For such a huge country, and for a country with a history of thousands of years, its initial appearance was definitely not what it is now!


    It''s only night now and the sky is not yet dark, and there is a lot of light overall, but the stars in the sky have begun to loom.


    The city doesn''t look like any streets, and there aren''t many people walking on the roads.


    When a group of people from Chang Nuo appeared here, the aboriginal people stared at them with curiosity. Perhaps it was because they were used to seeing pirates, so they were not interested in the sudden appearance of Chang Nuo and others dressed in formal clothes. There was such a curious demeanor.


    As the king of Tru Country, Changnuo''s appearance in basta this time is equivalent to his mission to this country. The crown and king''s clothes on his body naturally need to be worn, because what he always represents is belonging to the country. The image of his own Toru Kingdom.


    As for the other king''s guards, they walked in neat steps, and Gogoya had already started to put on a coat.


    It''s getting closer and closer to night, and the temperature difference between day and night in this ce is quiterge. It was already extremely hot during the day, but now the breeze is blowing, and there are already waves of chills.


    It is because of such formal attire that many people stop and watch.


    But what was beyond their imagination was that not long after they got off the boat and walked, there was already a group of soldiers waiting in front. They held long guns in their hands and stood there neatly and divided into two small groups, maintaining a weing posture.


    Before these people arrived, the leader of the team had already ran quickly towards the front. When he saw the clothes Chang Nuo was wearing, the middle-aged man immediately respectfully shouted, "King of basta." Guard Captain Lan Mo wees His Majesty the King of Tru Kingdom..."


    Jun He was instantly on guard. He had not notified the basta country of his and his others'' arrival in advance, but now that people had begun to wee them, people with a discerning eye had already noticed that something was wrong.


    Chang Nuo was quite indifferent and said with a slight smile, "His Majesty Lao Kobra really wees you. Not notifying us in advance seems rude on our part..."


    "King Tru is very polite. Our Majesty has said that he hopes that after King Tru has a good rest, he can go to our Albana capital pce. Your Majesty will definitely host a banquet in his honor!" Lan Mo said with a smile.


    "I wonder how Captain Lan Mo knew the whereabouts of His Majesty the King?" Jun He asked with a serious face.

 Chapter 52 Princess Alabasta

    <h4>Chapter 52 Princess basta</h4>


    Junhe followed this time, but as the captain of the King''s Guard, although His Majesty the King is powerful, the key is that as a subordinate, he still needs to eliminate all dangers for his King!


    "Junhe, the King of basta is so weing. You don''t have to be like this. It''s our mistake toe without warning. Captain Lan Mo''s wee is already an unexpected surprise. You don''t need to know so much about other things!"


    Changnuo looked at Junhe and said with a smile on his face.


    For such a big country, it is quite normal to have such small means.


    "His Majesty King Tru is generous, but I, basta, should still respond to this matter."


    Captain Lan Mo said and took out a newspaper directly from his pocket.


    Although it is not on the home page, there is a specific route for their voyage.


    The newspaper this time is not a particrly big newspaper, but just some guys who exist to attract attention.


    The seagull that had been following them overhead was still flying near them. This feeling of being watched suddenly made Chang Nuo not feel particrly good.


    "Captain Lan Mo, our Majesty is already tired. I wonder if we can find a ce to rest first and wait until tomorrow to discuss other matters?"


    Gogoya walked to the front and said to Lan Mo with a smile.


    "What I''m saying is, His Majesty King Tru is here to invite you. Your ce of stay has been arranged for you. If there is anyck of hospitality, please forgive me!"


    After listening to what Lan Mo said, Chang Nuo just responded with a smile.


    It is impossible for everyone on this ship to go over. Except for the National Guard personnel participating this time, Barlow and others must stay on the ship. Otherse down to replenish supplies or take a rest. It is time to rest at night. At this time, the ship still needs to be guarded.


    Although this rape flower city looks dpidated, in such a city, people can still see an incredible scene.


    Under the leadership of Lan Mo, Chang Nuo and his party came to a ce that looked like a manor.


    The modern architectural style ispletely different from those seen before.


    This ce ispletely on the back side of the mountain, not affected by wind and sand at all, and the entire manor is covered with green trees and flowers, making it look like two different worlds exist.


    "His Majesty King Tru, this is the vacation pce of His Majesty the King. By the order of His Majesty the King, we are specially hosting you to stay here today!"


    Lan Mo said respectfully.


    Now the servants in the entire manor have arrived at the door and stood in two rows, and everyone is extremely respectful.


    "I will go to Albana tomorrow. It seems I must thank King Kobra!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, King Tru, you are wee!"


    Lan Mo continued to walk in front and received them respectfully, fully reflecting what a big country should be like.


    But before they entered, they saw a seven or eight-year-old girl running inside instantly.


    Junhe was about to make a move, but was stopped by Changnuo.


    As for Lan Mo, this guy didn''t notice anything different at all!


    After Chang Nuo entered the pce, Lan Mo stayed outside and said respectfully to Chang Nuo, "Your Majesty, King Tru, if you have any further instructions, you can directly call the servants. I will do the same." Working as your escort outside."


    "Thank you, Captain..."


    Junhe smiled and thanked him directly. As for Changnuo, he just looked back and didn''t say anything.


    As a king, his own style must be maintained.


    The entire pce is a two-story structure. The upper floor is the living area. As for the lower floor, it is a veryrge hall with a height of at least ten meters. A huge chandelier hangs directly above the dome.


    After Lan Mo and the others exited, the entire pce was guarded by members of the King''s Guards of the Kingdom of Tru. In the hall, servants began toe over with meals one after another.


    "Your Majesty, after working so hard for so long, it''s better to eat something quickly!"


    Gogoya said to Chang Nuo who was sitting on the sofa.


    "Okay, little girl staying over there, do you want toe over and have something to eat?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly didn''t know who he was talking to, and Gogoya was a little surprised.


    "Come out, His Majesty the King has already spoken..."


    Junhe looked seriously behind a pir not far from them and shouted in a low voice.


    "What happened?" Gogoya still didn''t understand what happened.


    But at this moment, a little head with blue hair began to slowly poke out from behind the originally calm pir.


    Junhe rushed forward instantly, and just as he was about to take action, Changnuo immediately said, "Stop Junhe..."


    After hearing the order, Junhe immediately retracted his stretched out hand.


    "Come here! You know how to run around at a young age, so you are not worried about your father?" Chang Nuo said with a smile as he looked at the head sticking out.


    "you know me?"


    the little girl asked curiously.


    "Your Majesty, do you know her?" Gogoya asked almost at the same time as the other party.


    "You two, we will face many people and things in the future. When doing things, we must look at all the details thoroughly.


    No matter in terms of clothing or appearance, he can appear here naturally. Who do you think he will be? "


    After Chang Nuo''s words, the two of them were stunned. Jun He looked at the little girl carefully. Regardless of the clothes he was wearing or his exquisite appearance, it was clear from every aspect that the girl was not an ordinary child. !


    "Come on, Princess Weiwei, you must be hungry too, right?" Chang Nuo shouted again in a soft voice.


    The others were immediately confused and didn''t understand what happened. Why would their own King''s Refrigerator say such a thing?


    "Weiwei???Princess???"


    Gogoya felt that he had seen it wrong. This ce was at least 100 miles away from Albana. It really surprised them that the princess of basta would appear here!


    "How do you know me?"


    Weiwei nervously walked to the opposite side of Chang Nuo and asked curiously again.


    "It''s very simple. Judging from your appearance, you should be very familiar with this ce. Coupled with your clothes and the color of your hair, it is not difficult to determine your identity." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Amazing!!"


    Weiwei said with admiration.


    "Everyone, sit down, eat quickly, and then have a good rest."


    Chang Nuo looked at several people and said.

 Chapter 53 Talking about marriage?

    <h4>Chapter 53 Talking about marriage?</h4>


    Weiwei was not polite and sat directly opposite Chang Nuo. Looking at the dishes on the table in front of her, her stomach had already begun to growl unsatisfactorily.


    "How did you get here?" Chang Nuo asked, taking a bite of food.


    "I followed Lan Mo. I heard from my father that King Tru wasing, and he often mentioned your name, so I was very curious and wanted toe and see what you look like.


    Then he secretly followed Lan Mo! "


    Weiwei said while eating.


    She looks like she hasn''t eaten in a long time, which is both cute and helpless.


    Gogoya and Junhe looked at each other with surprise in their eyes. It was really admirable that a little girl could do such a thing.


    Just after they had eaten for a while, a quarrel suddenly broke out outside. Under the leadership of the guards, Lan Mo appeared in the hall anxiously.


    The moment he saw Weiwei, Lan Mohuai was delighted and breathed a sigh of relief.


    "Princess Weiwei, how can you walk out of the pce? His Majesty the King is already worried to death!"


    Lan Mo said respectfully and helplessly to the child Weiwei.


    "I''m sorry, Uncle Lan Mo. I was just too curious so I came here. I have nothing to do now!" Weiwei said with a smile while eating a lot of food in her mouth.


    "Sorry, Your Majesty King Tru, the appearance of our princess may have disturbed you, I will take her away right now!" Lan Mo said quickly.


    "No, just stay here tonight! Let''s go to Albana tomorrow morning." Chang Nuo didn''t mind, just said with a smile.


    "Huh?? Is that okay?"


    Lan Mo asked in disbelief.


    "If you are worried, you can stay outside today." Junhe stood up and said.


    "Sit down and have something to eat together?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "No, Your Majesty, we have our own things to do. Since Princess Weiwei is here, I may be disturbing you a lot. I hope you can forgive me." Lan Mo said respectfully.


    "You''re wee, Princess Weiwei is quite cute. She can have some fun if she stays here!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Uncle Lan Mo, just tell your father that I will go back tomorrow, so he doesn''t have to worry!" Weiwei said with a smile.


    Lan Mo also had a look of helplessness on his face. He could only walk out and pick up the phone and start reporting.


    Everyone in the basta Pce was anxious now. Cobra stood at the door of the pce with an equally anxious look on his face.


    But at this time, a middle-aged man hurriedly ran over, holding the phone and shouting, "Your Majesty, we found it..."


    After Cobra heard this, he hurriedly took two steps forward, supported the other party and asked, "Where is Weiwei?"


    "Your Majesty, Princess Weiwei followed Lan Mo and secretly ran to the rapeseed field. She is now in the pce over the rapeseed flower, with King Tru." The middle-aged man said.


    "This girl..."


    Kobra looked angry on the surface, but he suddenly breathed a sigh of relief.


    At least now I know where the person is, so I don''t have to worry too much.


    "Your Majesty, Lan Mo has said that King Tru will take Princess Weiwei to the royal capital tomorrow morning. He also led a team of people to guard the outside of the pce, so you don''t have to worry." The middle-aged man said again.


    "Huh..., that''s it, let Lan Mo keep an eye on Weiwei, and don''t let her run around anymore." Kobra took a deep breath and said.


    The anger in his tone has now disappeared, and he is satisfied as long as he knows that his daughter is fine now.


    At this moment, in the pce in the rapeseed field.


    After everyone ate, they all sat quietly on the sofa. They didn''t have any good entertainment tools, so they could only watch with big eyes and small eyes.


    "You don''t look very old, do you?"


    Weiwei suddenly said this to Chang Nuo, so that Chang Nuo didn''t know how to answer.


    "Our King is only seventeen years old this year. Not only is he very good in appearance, but also in abilities and other aspects. Maybe after a few more years, you can tell your father to marry our King!"


    Gogoya sat aside with a smile on his face and said jokingly.


    "I think this proposal is quite good, but I''m a little young!"


    Junhe also stayed aside and mixed in.


    "Can you two stop being such beasts? She is still a child, so don''t say such things in front of her!" Chang Nuo looked at the two of them speechlessly and said.


    However, a scene that surprised them came. Weiwei stood up and walked to Chang Nuo to take a look. Then she pursed her lips and said, "You look pretty good. I have heard my father talk about you many times. I must have I have the ability, maybe after a few years, their suggestions won��t be impossible!��


    "Ahem..."


    Hearing this, Chang Nuo couldn''t hold back and choked on his own saliva.


    What he said to this little girl was so shocking.


    Although Weiwei in front of her looks very cute, as a man who is about to be an adult, he really has no interest in such a young girl.


    "Haha... Your Majesty, I think you can really wait a few more years. After all, Princess Weiwei will inherit such arge country in the future." Junhe couldn''t help but smile.


    Even Gogoya, who was sitting there, started covering his mouth and startedughing.


    Everyone wasughing, except Chang Nuo, who was sitting there feeling at a loss.


    Thinking about what Weiwei will look like in the future, it would really be good to marry her as his wife. After all, basta is also a big country, but at least Changnuo has no such thoughts now.


    "Gogoya, hurry up and see if the bedroom is ready. Let''s go to bed early. Don''t think about these things every day!" Chang Nuo stood up and said.


    He didn''t want to discuss this matter with these people anymore.


    "What happened to your Majesty the King?"


    Princess Weiwei looked at Chang Nuo who had already stood up and left, and curiously asked the two people next to her.


    She acted heartless, but the first impression she left on others was already like this, and she really didn''t know how to change her image next.


    "Your Highness, perhaps our King is shy. If you want to marry our King in the future, the first thing you need to do is wait a few years until you grow up!" Junhe said with a smile.


    "That''s right, Princess Weiwei. Our King is a handsome young man who is rare to see. In the future, I really don''t know if anyone in this world can surpass his masterpiece. And with the help of His Majesty the King, basta We will definitely be able to get rid of the current state of poverty," Gogoya said.

 Chapter 54 Difficult Child

    <h4>Chapter 54 Difficult Child</h4>


    Their trust in His Majesty the King has reached an infinite level. The Kingdom of Tru has changed the current state of the country in just over two years from such a barren state before, so it would be great for basta to have such a good If this country really had the support of His Majesty the King, it would definitely not be like this in the future.


    Although most of what the two said were joking, and they were joking to a child, as the princess of basta, she took everything into her heart.


    The situation in the country of basta was not because she didn''t understand anything at a young age. On the contrary, he had always seen his father''s hard work in running the country.


    "Is what you said true?"


    Weiwei stood there, no longer yful as before, but asked Gogoya seriously.


    The two people who had already stood up and started preparing to go to bed sat down again with curious faces after seeing Weiwei''s appearance.


    In this spacious hall, two adults were talking about such a thing around a child. If others saw it, they would think they were going to kidnap it.


    Gogoya smiled, and it was obvious that although the other person was a child, the expression on his face could not be faked.


    "Little Princess Weiwei, which aspect are you referring to?" Gogoya asked with a smile.


    "Is it possible to get basta out of poverty? Now the whole country is no longer what it used to be. Many people have begun to have insufficient food to eat. I see that my father''s hair has turned white because of this matter. He is young, so I also want to do something for him that I can do." Weiwei said these words sincerely with tears in her eyes.


    "What I just said is indeed true. Since your father can often mention our King, it means that he still agrees with and approves of our King''s decision-making and abilities.


    Maybe you don��t know that when we were in the Kingdom of Tru two years ago, it was not even as good as your basta now. But now if you look at our entire country, it haspletely changed its form. It has its own industry and the country��s Although the people are not wealthy, at least they no longer have any worries about food, clothing, housing and transportation.


    They usually have their own jobs and goals to strive for. They no longer have to worry about the safety of living in this country, let alone what to eat for their next meal.


    At least when we walk on the streets now, we can see the joy from the hearts of the people of our country. This is what our King is doing and making decisions. "


    Gogoya spoke in detail not tofort the other party because she was a little girl, but because she actually told her current feelings in the country where she lived.


    Perhaps the Weiwei in front of her didn''t have much idea about this aspect, but she could still hear whether what Gogoya said was good or bad.


    "Little girl, in fact, you don''t need to worry about these things now. Anyway, our King is going to Albana tomorrow. Your father willmunicate and understand in detail by then," Junhe said.


    "I decided, I want to marry him..."


    Weiwei''s words directly made the two of them even more stunned, and she said it so firmly as if they had already struggled in their hearts.


    "Haha..., little Weiwei, we should wait until you grow up to talk about these things. Don''t make a decision so early now. Besides, our King is much older than you!" Gogoya said with some embarrassment. .


    What he said before may have been just a joke, but now it seems that the little girl has a serious expression, and it ispletely inappropriate tough like that again.


    "I''m not young anymore and I can ask him to wait for me for another ten years at most. As long as it can change our current situation in basta, I have no objection even if he is willing to marry me now!" Weiwei said firmly.


    The scene in front of them really made the two people sitting here dumbfounded. They really couldn''t imagine what kind of curse this little girl was under. She ran so far and insisted on marrying His Majesty the King just because of a meal!


    "Gogoya, you are the one who picked this matter up. You will have to solve it yourself from now on. I have to go to bed first!"


    Junhe felt this atmosphere and hurriedly prepared to run away.


    Gogoya stayed there alone and watched Junhe''s leaving figure. He wanted to call him out, but he didn''t know how to open his mouth.


    The key is that she can''t just leave here alone. There is a little girl staying here. Looking at her expression now so pitiful, it really makes Gogoya wonder what to do?


    "Xiao Weiwei, let''s go to bed today. We have been floating on the sea for so many days. Let''s have a good rest."


    Gogoya quickly changed the subject.


    No matter how much you say, this is just a little girl. For such a young child, if she just finds a topic, the other party will already ignore what she just said.


    But she obviously underestimated Weiwei who was standing in front of her. The other person stared at Gogoya calmly with big tearful eyes, and there were simply not too many words she wanted to express in her eyes.


    "That Weiwei! Look, what I said about you marrying His Majesty our King doesn''t count, and what you said doesn''t count. When you return to Albana, you can ask your father about it. Opinion, when your fatheres tomunicate with our King, this matter will be possible, right?" Gogoya said helplessly.


    "But what should I do if I don''t want my father to know?" Weiwei said directly.


    "Then there''s nothing we can do about it. You have to know that our country is a long way from you. It takes almost half a month. Besides, we are just staying here for a while, and we can''t stay here forever. !" Gogoya said.


    "But the people of our country can''t wait. I heard from my father that the oases have disappeared faster and faster in the past two years, and there are fewer and fewer ces to grow crops." The tears that had been swaying in Weiwei''s eyes finally fell. He came down and looked at Gogoya with a whimpering look and said.


    "I really don''t know why you brought up such a topic just now?" Gogoya said to himself, speechless.


    But she still looked at Weiwei with a smile on her face, took a deep breath, exhaled it suddenly, and then said leisurely, "Weiwei, regarding the things you said, after all, our two countries are too far apart. The details will not be announced until tomorrow." After the Albana Pce, let our King and your father have a goodmunication. This kind of thing is not something you and I can decide. No matter how long we talk, we can''t reach a result."


    "I see����"


    Weiwei suddenly wiped her tears and said with a smile on her lips.


    "Now that you understand, let''s go to bed."


    Gogoya already felt grateful that he had finally gotten rid of this little girl.

 Chapter 55 Departure to Albana

    <h4>Chapter 55 Departure to Albana</h4>


    Early the next morning.


    Finally, he finally had a good night''s sleep, and he didn''t have to deal with the bumps and bumps on the ship. The key was that Chang Nuo, who was used to life on the ship, was really a little ufortable with this sudden feeling of lying on the bed.


    It wasn''t until thetter half of the night that he began to fall asleep slowly. When he woke up, the sun was already high.


    As soon as he walked down the stairs, Chang Nuo found that the servants had prepared a table of breakfast, but almost all of it was ordinary food. But even so, for ordinary people in basta, this was already a rare treat. See the delicious food.


    "Your Majesty, morning..."


    Gogoya changed her dressing style from yesterday. Today she wore a miniskirt and only a tube top on her upper body, but she also wore arge coat and a hat.


    Chang Nuo watched the girl greet him, and then looked at her current outfit, and asked curiously, "What''s going on with you?"


    "Of course I''m getting ready to go after dinner. The weather in basta is too hot. If you don''t take good protection, your skin will be easily burned. That''s why I dressed up like this today." Gogoya also made a special circle. said.


    "Where''s Shunhe?"


    "He is outside now. Lan Mo and the others have prepared the carriage. They will start preparing to leave after you have breakfast." Gogoya said.


    "Ah~~~"


    As soon as Gogoya finished speaking, Chang Nuo let out a huge yawn.


    He was not used to sleeping on the shore all of a sudden, so he didn''t get such a good rest at all.


    Of course, seeing the food on the table, I have no appetite to eat it now.


    "Is everyone else ready? Shouldn''t we go by carriage this time?" Chang Nuo asked directly.


    "No, I have discussed it with Junhe and we still go by boat. As for the carriage prepared outside the door, it is for Her Royal Highness Princess Weiwei." Gogoya said with a smile.


    "Okay, no need to eat breakfast, let''s go." Chang Nuo said and started to walk outside.


    But at this time Gogoya directly grabbed him and said meaningfully, "Your Majesty, you still need to have some breakfast, or I will take us to eat on the road for you!"


    Looking at this woman''s appearance, Chang Nuo felt sleepy and didn''t want to speak, so he could only let her operate.


    Then I saw Gogoya skillfully starting to pack these breakfasts. After putting everything away, I saw Changnuo who looked tired and was still yawning, with a bright smile on his lips.


    It''s just that for King Tru at this moment, he wants to get to the ship as soon as possible, then lie down on his big bed and have a good sleep again.


    After all, it would take at least four or five hours to get from here to Albana, basta, without a break. I really don��t know what to do!


    Seeing that Gogoya had finished it, Chang Nuo didn''t say anything, then turned and walked towards the door.


    The temperature in basta in the early morning is still a little cool, but the sun has already risen very high above the head. The strong and dazzling light is particrly annoying to this person who has not yet woken up.


    Chang Nuo took Gogoya out of the gate of this ce, and there were already two teams of people waiting outside.


    Junhe arranged people like himself neatly and had already started to get up to greet his Majesty the King.


    Lan Mo also stood with them, and when Chang Nuo walked out of the room, they started to look respectful.


    "His Majesty King Tru, I am d that you can get up so early. basta Guards Lan Mo will apany you to the Albana Pce." Lan Mo bowed respectfully and said.


    "You''re wee, doesn''t it mean that we have already arranged for us to go by boat, and you will take Princess Weiwei back to Albana in a carriage?" Changnuo askedzily.


    "It was originally like this, His Majesty King Tru, but Her Royal Highness Princess Vivi wants to apany you by boat to Albana, so I can only make arrangements ording to our princess''s instructions."


    Lan Mo said respectfully that for him, there was no choice now. He also said that he would go by carriage. Now, including his escort, they could only take a boat to Darbana.


    For the Abby, it is no problem to amodate these people. Besides, the distance from sea to Albana is much faster than walking bynd.


    "Good morning, King Changnuo~"


    Just when Chang Nuo was still confused, a voice came directly from not far away. He opened his eyes slightly and turned his head to take a look. The image of Weiwei at this moment was really a little surprising.


    She ispletely different today from yesterday. She has a huge ponytail and the clothes she wears are very refreshing, but for such a small girl, this outfit is obviously not suitable for her.


    "Junhe, everyone on the boat should be ready, right?" Changnuo ignored Weiwei and asked, looking at Junhe standing next to her.


    "Your Majesty, everything is ready and waiting for you to board the ship and set off."


    "Now that everything is ready, let''s go! I am already looking forward to meeting the king of basta." Changnuo said


    Although he didn''t talk to Weiwei, the other party didn''t mind. Instead, she still jumped up to his side, as if she had known her for a long time.


    Chang Nuo still looked sleepy, and he had no energy at all. Not to mention a little beauty walking beside him, even if a big beauty like Gogoya was walking beside him, he didn''t want to take a look.


    "King Changnuo, how do you feel aftering to our basta to stay for a night?"


    Weiwei followed Chang Nuo with a smile on her face.


    Chang Nuo just turned his head and nced at the other person, then continued walking forward.


    Weiwei did not give up and continued to follow him without any unnecessary actions or words.


    Lan Mo stood behind, looking at the princess''s appearance, and that the other king actually treated his princess like this, which made him helpless and angry.


    What is helpless is that Her Royal Highness the Princess is not willing to apany them there at all. What is angry is King Tru''s current performance and attitude!


    But what can he do even if he is angry? The other party was a king, so it was understandable that they didn''t want to talk to their princess, and they couldn''t say anything else.


    The other most important thing is the king''s guard of the Kingdom of Tru, which has always surprised him. Each of these people seems to be extremely powerful. Even if he picks one out at random, Lan Mo doesn''t dare to say that he canpete with them?

 Chapter 56 The Missing Navigator

    <h4>Chapter 56 The Missing Navigator</h4>


    The long and narrow road goes from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the mountain, and it can be considered a straight road to the port, without considering the possibility of any turns.


    Even when they were standing outside the pce halfway up the mountain, they could already see their own ships.


    The Abby docked quietly at the port of the rapeseed field. In this huge port, the Abby seemed to be of a very ordinary size.


    Several of the pirate ships they saw when they came here yesterday evening are still parked here. They are not worried at all, and they are not hiding at all.


    For basta, although the country is rtively weak, the country''s army is still remarkable. If this state is ced in its own Nanniwa Port, Changnuo will definitely not ept it.


    No matter what form pirates appear in their own country, from the moment they fly the pirate g, it already means provocation and deration. When approaching the port of their own country, no matter how powerful they are, it will attract a lot of trouble. Controversy and even panic among the people.


    But now in this country''s port, which is still the most important port in this country, several pirate ships are docked here quietly, without causing any soldiers from this country toe to hunt them down.


    Even Lan Mo, who had already seen these pirate ships, seemed to turn a blind eye and did not take this matter seriously at all.


    "Your Majesty, Barlow has note back since he left yesterday!"


    As soon as the group of people walked onto the ship, one of the crew members hurried to Chang Nuo and said to him anxiously.


    Now it seems that everyone has returned and the navigator has not yet appeared, so the ship will not be able to move at all.


    "What''s going on?" Chang Nuo suddenly became alert and asked as he looked at the man with two bare arms.


    "Your Majesty, we don''t know the situation here either. Barlow and Feit went down to purchase supplies yesterday, but when we woke up in the morning, we found that they still hadn''te back."


    "Chris, why didn''t you tell me about this in advance?" Shun Kazuya asked with a serious face.


    "His Majesty King Tru, how about I ask them to go and search for it?" Lan Mo said.


    "Have you ever contacted me using a phone bug?" Gogoya asked.


    "I''ve contacted him, but I haven''t contacted him since morning. I don''t know what happened?" said a shirtless Chris.


    "His Majesty����"


    "I''ll take a carriage to Albana. You can stay here with the people and search for it."


    Chang Nuo was not in a very good mood at the moment. This kind of thing had already happened early in the morning.


    Barlow has been following him for more than a day or two. It has been more than half a year since he conquered the other party. He does not believe that this guy will suddenly leave without saying goodbye ande to this strange basta. He must have encountered something unimaginable in the process. to things.


    "His Majesty King Tru, there is a problem with your crew in basta. We will handle the matter. We promise to find your crew member as soon as possible."


    Lan Mo said with a frown.


    "No need, Captain Lan Mo. Now that the navigator is away, we can only take a carriage to Albana. I''m afraid I''ll have to help you along the way." Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Your Majesty, I''ll leave matters here to my subordinates," Junhe said.


    The mission had been arranged beforeing, but now it seemed that the only thing to do was to find Barlow first. Although Junhe was reluctant at all, it was definitely his own mission.


    Rapeseed Field is such a big city. As long as you use the color of sight to perceive, it won''t take long to find the location of Barlow. Unless he is dead now, then these people are helpless.


    "King Changnuo, why don''t we just wait for your crew member?" Weiwei asked softly.


    "It''s not necessary for the time being. They may have their own matters. Since we havemunicated with your father in advance, no matter what, we must go to the Albana Pce today. This is credibility." Changnuo said seriously.


    "Is this so? But I don''t think my father would mind this kind of thing!"


    Looking at Weiwei''s cute look, Lan Mo said, "Your Royal Highness, this matter is not a matter that His Majesty the King does not mind. Since they have beenmunicated in advance, His Majesty King Tru and His Majesty the King are no longer representatives of each other. It representsmunication between the two countries, so there can be no mistakes in things agreed in advance.��


    "Junhe, stay here to take care of things, and then go to the basta Pce as soon as possible." Gogoya said softly.


    Because he has sensed that His Majesty the King seems to be in a very unhappy mood, and now he can only use this method to tell others to hurry up and deal with the remaining matters here.


    Jun He nodded. After Chang Nuo had just stepped off the boat, he had already begun to look serious. He frowned and ordered to other members of the King''s Guards, "In one hour, Barlow must be found. No matter whether the other party appears, No matter what the situation is, if you encounter a special situation, you don��t need to report it and it will be handled directly as an emergency.��


    "yes����"


    More than twenty members of the King''s Guards answered together.


    In this field of rapeseed flowers, Junhe did not believe that anyone would dare to detain Barlow. Although he was not strong, as a former pirate captain, he still had some inherent strength.


    Since he was able to stay up all night, either something happened to him, or he encountered someone more powerful than himself.


    No matter what the oue is, it still needs to be investigated in the end. During this period, the most uneptable thing for the Kingdom of Tru is betrayal.


    Anger can already be felt from Chang Nuo''s expression. No matter what the situation is, as a core navigator on the ship, it is absolutely uneptable for them to suddenly appear in such a state.


    No matter what the situation is, the people on your ship may be your partners, and they are also talents of your own country. In this ce where nothing matters, Chang Nuo will never allow any idents.


    But now I can only sit on this carriage like this. Although it is not asfortable as a boat, it can only be like this in the end.


    The most important thing is that you need to endure the hot weather in basta.


    On the carriage, Chang Nuo and Weiwei were riding in a carriage together. The carriage was all white and made of iron frames. It was also pulled by two white horses in front.

 Chapter 57 Kidnapping

    <h4>Chapter 57 Kidnapping</h4>


    This is already a high-end reception. Although the speed is not fast and it is much farther than taking a boat, you can intuitively feel the specific situation of the country of basta along the way.


    Because what you can see along the way is almost the same as the state of the Tru Kingdom in the previous two years, and the people are all in a state of poverty.


    "I heard that your country is going to join the world government?" Weiwei, who was sitting on the carriage, asked without anything to say.


    "Yes."


    "Why do all countries want to join the world government and have to pay high heavenly gold fees every year? I really don''t know what it is for?"


    Hearing what Weiwei said, Changnuo smiled, and then said, "If I remember correctly, basta doesn''t need to hand over heavenly gold, right?


    Besides, many times managing a country is not as simple as you think. For example, joining the world government is not something everyone wants to do, and sometimes they have no choice but to do so.


    But on the other hand, if a country develops economically and politically, joining a world government may have more advantages than disadvantages for them, just like our country.


    Now the entire country has just started, but we have no choice when ites to development. After joining the world government, at least our country''s economic development can take a big step forward. "


    "Why is it like you said?"


    Facing Weiwei''s words, Changnuo thought for a moment and said, "After joining the World Government, although we need to pay heavenly gold every year, it is indeed a huge expense, but it is precisely because of this that we have free For naval use, at least there is no need to consider safety issues when sailing on the sea.


    Most pirates would not take such a big risk to rob a ship flying the World Government g.


    Another and most important point is that our goods can open the door to the Grand Route and can directly cross the Red Continent. What do you think of this exnation? "


    "So it can still be like this? It feels so profound!"


    In fact, Weiwei still didn''t understand the meaning of these words. She didn''t have ess to this level at all, so naturally she was confused about these words.


    ������������


    In the rapeseed field, Junhe had directly ordered all the members of the King''s Guard to disperse. Their mission was to find the missing navigator Barlow within an hour.


    But one hour was indeed too urgent for them, but the rapeseed field was just that big. They only needed to start searching ording to where Barlow might appear. As long as they found a clue, the rest of the matter would be easily solved.


    Barlow is a rtively short man, so his appearance and characteristics are almost obvious. As long as you ask around, it doesn''t take long anyway, and you can still have some impression of the person you have met.


    The King''s Guards thus began aprehensive search, but at this time, Barlow had already begun to suffer inhuman treatment.


    "Have you thought about whether to notify your partners and ask them to bring 10 million Baileys over? In this case, it will be good for you, and it will be good for us. "


    In an abandoned house, Barlow had been beaten to a state of disgrace. He and another person were tied to a pir, and four or five people were sitting next to them.


    There is no need to go into detail. Judging from the clothes of these people, you can tell what kind of work these people are engaged in.


    Junhe''s previous guess was quite correct. In the end, Barlow was caught by the pirates. The former pirate captain had been beaten all night and still didn''t say a word.


    "Captain, why don''t we just go and rob the ship? Why do we need to catch this guy here and ask for 10 million Baileys?"


    One of the thinner guys among the pirates opened his mouth and asked in confusion.


    "What do you know? With such a big ship on board, if basta''s army is attracted by then, wouldn''t we be able to escape by then?" The captain, who was blind in one eye, said unceremoniously Said directly.


    "Ten million beli is about the same. It''s enough for us brothers to enjoy themselves for a while. Looking at their boats, these people should be considered quite rich."


    Another man wearing what looked like a beret said with a smile on his face.


    They were chatting freely here about what it would be like after getting 10 million, but they didn''t know what kind of ending was waiting for them now.


    Although Barlow had been beaten all night, and his originally chubby face now looked like a pig''s head, there was an imperceptible smile on his lips.


    After following his king for such a long time, he naturally knows what the strength of Chuan Chuan and others is, so as long as he is still alive, he is not worried at all.


    "You guys have been chatting for so long, and you asked me to notify this and that, at least give me the phone bug, right?" Barlow leaned against the pir and finally started to speak.


    After hearing this, the blind captain looked at the other people with curiosity, and asked with a kind of hatred, "Didn''t you give him the phone bug?"


    "Captain, it seems true, but he has never asked us for it before?" The man wearing a beret said directly.


    "You bastards, you''ve been doing this for so long and you''ve ended up like this. If this guy hadn''t spoken out, when would we have gotten the money?" the blind captain yelled angrily.


    The group of boys below saw that their captain was now angry, and hurriedly began to search for Barlow.


    Until finally, I found a phone bug wearing a crown, and pressed it directly in front of Barlow.


    "Porlu Porro..., Porlu Porlu..."


    As the phone bug started ringing, after a while, the phone bug croaked directly, and then a roaring voice came from the other side, "Barlow, where are you bastard now?"


    Barlow recognized the other party''s voice and smiled with a swollen face, but the pirate next to him punched him in the face and said with a low smile, "I asked you to speak!"


    "Barlow, are you in trouble?"


    Junhe''s voice came from the phone again, but he didn''t know that the moment the other party turned on the phone, he had already sensed Barlow''s position with his sense of sight.


    "The so-called Barlow in your mouth is now in our hands. With 10 million Baileys, go to the Crimea Tavern to find us, otherwise yourpanions will have to die here."


    The captain who is blind in one eye. He grabbed the phone directly and shouted to Junhe.

 Chapter 58 The group is destroyed

    <h4>Chapter 58 The group is destroyed</h4>


    This kind of threat is really useless to Junhe, but when facing the phone bug, Junhe still deliberately showed concern.


    But in reality, Junhe had already begun to summon all the King''s Guard members and quickly moved in another direction.


    Their actions were uniform, they did not even make any noise, and they avoided the sight of all the crowds. They quickly disappeared in ce and began to move in the direction directed by his hand.


    "Don''t hurt ourpanions. We are preparing 10 million Baileys now, but we must ensure the safety of ourpanions. Now I need Barlow to say something." Junhe said directly while sprinting quickly.


    "No problem. As long as you prepare Bailey, yourpanions will never be in any danger. Even we can give you a good guarantee on this."


    While the one-eyed pirate captain was speaking, Junhe himself was directing everyone to move forward quickly. He was running at the front, leading everyone to move quickly in one direction.


    The right hand is responsible formanding, and the left hand is responsible for holding the phone bug, while still moving quickly whilemunicating with the other pirates.


    While keeping the phone open, he quickly moved to Barlow''s location.


    Until the end, Junhe stood in front of a dpidated house and said to the phone bug with a smile, "Bailey is ready. It''s at the door where you are now. Juste out and get it!"


    After the captain, who was blind in one eye, heard this, he immediately became puzzled and said to the phone bug with some dissatisfaction, "Do you think we really don''t dare to do anything to yourpanions? How dare we take this Are you trying to trick me with something?"


    "If you are worried, why don''t you open the door ande out to take a look?"


    One of them was really a little doubtful, and then he opened the door of the broken room, but the group of people standing in front of him made him stunned for a moment.


    "Ship...captain..."


    This was the man who looked rtively thin. When he opened the door and saw Junhe and others, his legs couldn''t help but started to tremble, and he couldn''t speak anymore.


    "What did you guy see?"


    The man in the beret pushed him away, and when he looked out the door, he acted no different from the thin guy just now.


    Junhe looked at the two people, looked at the phone bug with a serious expression, and said directly and coldly again, "If you touch our people in the Tru Kingdom, there is only one ending..."


    Before they could finish speaking, Junhe rushed forward in an instant. Even before they could react, the man wearing a beret had already prated the entire house.


    This house was almost made of wooden boards, without any obstruction, and was instantly prated by the man in the beret.


    As for the remaining people, including the captain who was blind in one eye, Junhe had already appeared in the room before they could react.


    Looking at Barlow who was now beaten into a state of disgrace, Junhe didn''t look good at all. He said to Barlow, "After all, I was a captain before, and now I''m like this bear!"


    "I don''t want to either..."


    Barlow said with a swollen face, and there was a hint of regret in his eyes.


    He originally wanted to go shopping and finally found a tavern, but he didn''t expect that he had already been knocked unconscious and brought here before he had even had two sses of wine.


    "Now can we tell you how to solve the problem? 10 million Baileys, you really dare to think about it. Regarding pirates, we in the Kingdom of Tru have always been the ones to rob others. When will it be others'' turn to rob us?"


    Junhe showed a murderous smile and stared directly at the captain who was blind in one eye.


    The other party''s group waspletely underwhelmed in front of so many people. After Junhe and Barlow walked out, through the damaged wooden boards, the blood seeping out of the room had already flowed outside.


    "You''d better exin yourself to His Majesty the King when you go back. As a navigator, I can''t see you at the critical moment. I really don''t know how you became a pirate captain before?"


    Junhe didn''t mean to me, but Barlow''s current behavior really left people speechless.


    Let��s not talk about whether this guy��s sailing skills are good or bad. The key point is that he is now a member of the Tru Kingdom, and naturally he cannot tolerate other piratesing to evaluate or humiliate him.


    "I''m sorry, I really caused trouble to you all this time." Barlow apologized.


    "Okay, as long as everyone is fine, go back and set off quickly. His Majesty the King has already started moving towards Albana. Don''t dy His Majesty''s n then." Junhe said again.


    "Yes, Junhe-sama."


    Barlow said.


    Now this guy has to be supported by others to walk. He was beaten so badly that he couldn''t recover at all in less than half a month.


    That group of pirates was quite unlucky. They had to catch people from the Toru Kingdom when they had nothing to do. But now it is bad luck. The entire pirate group did not catch anything in the end, not even the pirate ship. It has been sunk by them on this rapeseed port.


    It wasn''t really a big deal in the first ce, it was just a little troublesome to do.


    Changnuo and his party were still walking slowly on the road in basta. Although it didn''t look very beautiful, the journey was considered smooth and smooth.


    After nearly four hours of walking for a hundred miles, it was not until noon that I finally saw Albana, the royal city.


    Compared to other ces, Albana is much more lively, and the height of the city wall outside is at least a hundred meters high.


    But standing here and looking at it at a nce, except for this city, the rest is desert and barren, without any green life at all.


    With the white carriage and the protection of a team of people behind it, Chang Nuo and his party immediately attracted the attention of all the people as soon as they entered the royal city.


    Everyone on the street turned their eyes towards him, and everyone''s eyes were full of curiosity.


    It is mainly simr to carriages like this. Every time they travel, it is almost done by adults in the pce, or kings of those countries whoe to basta or rtively famous beings.


    However, from Chang Nuo''s perspective, the only thing that can be determined is that the country of basta is really poor.


    Thend of the royal city is like this. Not to mention those remote areas. To what extent will it be.

 Chapter 59 Alabasta Palace

    <h4>Chapter 59 basta Pce</h4>


    basta can be regarded as thergest country in the first half of the Great Line. It has developed over thousands of years to the present. This king has suddenly yed his good cards to pieces.


    ������������


    But that''s it, there are always people with bad intentions among these people.


    "President, do you want to see me if you have something to do?"


    On an upper floor near the street, a man with horizontal scars on his face was looking through the window at Chang Nuo and his group who were walking through the crowd below.


    At this time, a dark-looking girl with straight bangs walked into the room and asked respectfully to the man sitting there.


    "Robin, did you receive the notice sent by the World Government yesterday?"


    If Chang Nuo saw the person speaking, he would definitely be able to recognize who this person is at first nce.


    After all, this guy is the most difficult person the protagonist will encounter in basta in the future. Sand Crocodile Crocodile, a man naturally born with the Sand Fruit. In terms of strength, he can only be regarded as average, but in terms of wisdom, this guy is It can definitely be regarded as one of the best in this world.


    "President, are you talking about the things that may be mentioned about the Shichibukai at this World Conference?" Robin asked, holding a document in his hand.


    "Yes, that''s it. When I received the news yesterday, many pirates were already ready to take action. But what do you think about this matter?" Crocodile asked.


    "President, this matter has advantages and disadvantages for us. If we agree to the World Government''s invitation, then if anything happens to the World Government in the future, we must participate unconditionally. However, the advantages are also obvious, at least in this vast world. No matter what is done at sea, the world government and the navy will not get involved."


    Robin said analytically.


    "Joining the Shichibukai is not as simple as you think. At least one big thing is needed to attract the attention of these people, so that the quota for the Shichibukai may fall to us.


    But there are still four months until this world conference, and we still have enough time to operate. Crocodile picked up a cigar and lit it.


    "I don''t know what you want to do, President?"


    "The main purpose ofing to you this time is to ask, are you sure that the clues to the ancient weapon Pluto are here? Don''t end up in vain, otherwise why would we go to the Shichibukai? This kind of reception Restricted things!" Crocodile asked with cold eyes.


    "There is no 100% possibility of this kind of thing, but there is a high possibility that it exists in the current Kingdom of basta, but the specific location is not yet clear?" Robin said.


    "It''s very possible. I want to do something big to attract the attention of the world government. What do you think of King Tru who came here this time?" Crocodile had a sinister smile on his lips and looked down. The convoy that was preparing to pass by looked at it and said.


    "President, I can''t make a judgment on this kind of thing. I believe you already have your own ideas." Robin said with a smile and respect.


    But when the convoy passed by, Chang Nuo seemed to know something dangerous, and then he raised his head and looked directly upward. His eyes and Crocodile''s eyes happened to meet each other, and the two of them looked at each other like this. It didn''t end until the convoy started to move away.


    "Let''s put it another way. It seems that this little king is not as simple as we thought?"


    After a look, Crocodile said with a smile.


    The World Conference is held every four years, but this year happens to be the year when the World Conference needs to be held. The time is fixed on July 1st, which is nearly four months before the start of the World Conference, but Changnuo has He didn''t pay attention to this kind of thing, and he didn''t pay attention to it. Maybe he knows now. Or maybe it��s not clear at all.


    But maybe what he didn''t expect was that the system of the Shichibukai in the pirate world would actually be proposed during this world conference, and it was finally implemented.


    The group of people began to move slowly towards the pce. The moment he saw Crocodile, he had already recognized the other person''s identity, but in basta, he was not very familiar with these things at all. Heart.


    The reason why I was able toe to the pce was to solve things that might cause hidden dangers to my country in the future.


    Chang Nuo still has some impression of the historical text, but where it is stored may need to be observedter, or Kobra may be asked directly.


    Before the convoy arrived at the pce, the entire pce had already begun to prepare for the weing ceremony. The princes and ministers of the basta country had now upied the outside of the pce to wee and wait.


    Each of the two parties has its own thoughts and ns, but for basta, the purpose is very simple. They just want to seek the economic development model of the Tru Kingdom.


    "King Changnuo, in front of us is our pce in basta. I wonder how itpares to yours?" Princess Weiwei asked with a smile on her face.


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and smiled, but Gogoya next to him said directly, "My Tru Pce does not look as big as yours, and it is not as luxurious, but our King is used to it. So now it��s still the same as before.��


    "But your country is so rich now, why don''t you build a better pce?" Weiwei asked again.


    "Before the people of the country be rich, how can they bother to rush to repair a new pce, and there is no need for this thing at all. Besides, the ce where we live now is quite good, so why bother to rece it." Chang Nuo directly said Said with a smile.


    basta''s pce doesn''t look like anything special from the outside, but the terrain is much higher than other ces, and there is a pce green space on it, which makes it feel more leisurely andfortable.


    The most important thing is that in this country that is extremely short of water, the Royal Pce of basta has a water feature waterfall. It is inevitable that so many people in this country will not believe in the king!


    "His Majesty King Tru, our pce has arrived."


    As soon as the carriage arrived at the gate of the pce, Lan Mo stopped the carriage and said respectfully to Chang Nuo.


    The meaning of these words is obvious, that is, he needs to walk from here to the pce hall. Although it is somewhat disrespectful, it may also bring some customs and habits of their country.


    Chang Nuo didn''t hesitate too much. He just smiled and got out of the carriage.


    After three or four hours of jolting, I felt quite refreshed when I suddenly came down.

 Chapter 60 Communication between Kings

    <h4>Chapter 60 Communication between Kings</h4>


    The ministers outside who weed Chang Nuo were already waiting. As soon as he got off the carriage, a man who looked to be in his thirties and slightly fat walked over.


    He walked up quickly to greet him with a smile on his face. As he walked, he shouted, "Bafetus, the left minister of the Kingdom of basta, on the order of His Majesty the King, hase specially to wee His Majesty the King of the Kingdom of Tru."


    Baphotus said with a smile on his face, and his whole body was extremely respectful.


    "Uncle Toss, Weiwei is here too!"


    Princess Weiwei saw that Bafitus was only chatting with Chang Nuo, and she was a little dissatisfied as she stood up on the carriage and shouted to him.


    "Princess Weiwei, you are back too! It''s better to go in quickly. His Majesty the King is already very worried about you."


    Bafetus said with a smile, and then continued to turn his head respectfully to look at Changnuo, who was only sixteen or seventeen years old, and said with a smile on his face, "His Majesty King Tru, our Majesty is already waiting for you inside. Pleasee inside." !��


    "Good work!"


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, but his eyes had already begun to look around the entire pce.


    As he spoke, at this moment, Junhe and the members of the King''s Guard came running over quickly and uniformly from a distance.


    Taking the sea route is much closer than traveling onnd. Although we set off nearly an hourter, we arrived at the ce in almost the same time.


    "Your Majesty, my subordinates arete..."


    Jun He quickly ran to Chang Nuo, lowered his head respectfully and said.


    Behind him were more than 20 members of the King''s Guard. Their uniforms and firm expressions made everyone at the entrance of the pce sigh.


    "It''s okay, it''s great if you cane. How is Barlow?" Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Your Majesty, Barlow is recovering now and is fine." Junhe said.


    "Now that we''re here, let''s go in together."


    With that said, Chang Nuo walked directly in front and started walking towards the pce.


    Bafitus is still curious about who this sudden group of people are.


    Lan Mo also saw what the other party was thinking, so he said calmly, "Minister Zuo, these people are the King''s Guards of the Kingdom of Tru."


    "I see!"


    After Bafeitus finished speaking, he quickly followed Chang Nuo.


    Although he was curious, he didn''t pay too much attention. It would be unreasonable for the king of a country to travel without a group of people around him.


    The interior of the basta Pce was not as expected. The floor paved with stone bs had been for who knows how many years. Some of the stone bs were even cracked and the edges werepletely weathered.


    But for a big country with a history of thousands of years, traces of history can still be seen on it.


    Every step you take, you can feel a strong sense of history. This kind of thing is also found in some ces in the Tru Kingdom.


    Cobra is already waiting in the pce. As the king of this country and also the host, he cannot travel far to greet him. However, at the entrance of this huge pce, Cobra is already standing here. .


    A long way away, Chang Nuo had already spotted the figure of the other party. Kobra was almost the same as what he remembered, but he looked much younger.


    After Weiwei saw her father, she quickly ran towards him, shouting "Dad..." as she ran.


    Looking at Vivi throwing herself at Cobra, Changnuo smiled and continued walking in his direction without any pause.


    "Your Majesty, are you really attracted to that little girl?" Gogoya asked Chang Nuo in a low voice.


    "I said, what are you thinking about? She is still a child, even if she falls in love with you, she will not fall in love with her!" Chang Nuo said with a speechless smile.


    As soon as he heard these words, Gogoya was stunned for a moment, and then his face began to burst with crimson, and smoke seemed to be sprayed out of his nose and ears. He wanted to find a crack in the ground and get in quickly after hearing these words.


    "Haha~, Gogoya, I think His Majesty the King is pretty good, and if someone likes you, you need to seize the opportunity!"


    Junhe looked at Gogoya who was stopping there, and when he got very close, he smiled and whispered.


    Now that they were staying in someone else''s pce, they were naturally not as free as they were in other ces. Gogoya didn''t think about it anymore, and strode quickly to keep up with Chang Nuo.


    "Weiwei, why are you running around when you have nothing to do? Do you know how worried your father is about you?"


    Before they even got close, everyone had heard Kobra''s angry voice, and even in front of so many people, they had already begun to reprimand their daughter.


    This also proves the extent of an old father''s worries. After all, a seven or eight-year-old girl can run hundreds of miles for nothing. In this era, if you are not careful, you may fall into the hands of pirates. The process in between It indeed highlights a very dangerous situation.


    "I have nothing to do, Dad, you don''t have to worry. Besides, you are back now and you are still in front of so many people, so you can save some face for me."


    Weiwei said urgently in a low voice.


    While talking, Chang Nuo had already walked up to them. Facing Kobra, Chang Nuo didn''t show the slightest sense of nervousness.


    But after hearing Weiwei''s voice, Changnuo smiled and said, "Little Princess Weiwei, now you know how to save face?"


    "Hmph~"


    "King of the Toru Kingdom, Genji Nagano!"


    Facing Weiwei and humming, Cobra didn''t say anything. Instead, he looked at the teenage boy standing in front of him seriously and spoke in an equally serious voice.


    Changnuo smiled and nodded. At this time, Kobra suddenly changed his expression andughed directly, "King Changnuo, I am Neferutali Kobra, the king of basta. I am d that you cane to us. country, and thank you even more for taking care of Weiwei these two days."


    As he said that, Kobra directly stretched out his right hand, and Changnuo also stretched out his right hand. The two shook hands with each other and stood in front of the main hall of the basta Pce.


    Others stood behind. No one recorded this scene, but it will definitely be recorded in the history of basta in the future.


    "I have already heard the name of King Kobra of basta. It is indeed an honor to be received by you today." Changnuo said politely.


    "King Changnuo, maybe I should say this. Of all the recent newspaper headlines, the Kingdom of Tru has ounted for half of the country."


    Kobra said directly with the same expression and a smile.


    The verbalmunication between the kings of the two countries at this moment was almost only at a tentative level.

 Chapter 61 Identity

    <h4>Chapter 61 Identity</h4>


    Theck of in-depthmunication only means that they are not familiar with each other yet.


    "Dad, can you guys stop standing here while chatting? There are so many ces in the pce hall, why can''t we sit down and chat?" Weiwei said directly while standing beside her, already a little dissatisfied.


    "What I''m saying is, King Changnuo pleasee in~"


    "King Kobra please~"


    The two of them were polite and then started walking towards the main hall.


    The interior decoration of basta''s royal pce is not as luxurious as expected, but the simple and solemn architectural momentum still makes people feel majestic.


    After both of them sat down, Gogoya and Junhe stood directly behind the sofa where Chang Nuo was sitting. The servants in the pce also immediately brought fruits and snacks.


    "The Kingdom of basta has existed for thousands of years and is currently the oldest country in the world. I never thought that I would be lucky enough to be here as a guest today," Chang Nuo said.


    "King Changnuo is too polite. Although basta has existed for thousands of years, you have also seen that the entire country is no longer what it used to be. After it is in my hands, I, Kobra, will not be as big as King Changnuo." I feel very guilty for being able to directly change the current situation of the entire country with my own power." Kobra did not lie, but expressed his inner thoughts.


    "King Kobra, what you said is wrong. Our Kingdom of Tru has reached a point where we have no choice but to make other changes in the end. Your current state of basta is better than ours before. I don��t know how many times.�� Chang Nuo said.


    "You must have seen this along the way. Compared with the current basta Kingdom and the current Tru Kingdom, even people who don''t follow you can understand that the changes in the Tru Kingdom in the past two years have be It is the happiest country among the four seas, let alone the country on this great shipping route.


    After all, especially when I saw the first meeting of the country you held before, the topics you discussed and the words you said have a great effect on me, but after all, the national conditions of the two countries are different. , we also wanted to copy it directly in many aspects, but in the end we werepletely unsatisfied. "Cobra said a little frustrated.


    "Dad, it''s not the time to discuss this yet. It''s already noon. Can we eat first?" Weiwei stood up and once again spoke directly to the two of them.


    "Didn''t you see that I was chatting with King Changnuo? The food will be readyter." Kobra said helplessly, then turned to look at Changnuo and said, "I''m sorry to make youugh. I am just a daughter. Normally I really doted on him too much, so I let him be so presumptuous, and I hope King Changnuo doesn��t mind!��


    "It doesn''t matter, this is good." Chang Nuo said, picked up the water ss in front of him and started drinking directly.


    But then, Weiwei looked at Kobra and said loudly in front of everyone, "I will marry King Changnuo in the future. He will definitely not mind my little temper now!"


    "Pfft~"


    The water he had just drank had not even reached his stomach. After hearing this, Chang Nuo was so shocked that he spat it out, and even his nose began to flow out.


    Last night in the pce over there, a few people were chatting and joking. It didn''t matter. The important thing was what was the asion now?


    When the kings of the two countries met, even Cobra was a little unbelievable when he heard this.


    "Princess Weiwei, you can''t say this here, otherwise they will take it seriously. Now it involves diplomacy, and this is not the time for us to joke and chat." Gogoya was also speechless, squatting down and whispering to Weiwei said.


    ��I��m not kidding, I have been thinking about it all night yesterday and I have been thinking about it all day today.


    King Changnuo is very likely to change the status quo of our country. For the sake of this country, what''s the harm in marrying him? "Weiwei said again.


    "Weiwei..." Kobra''s expression became serious, and his voice unconsciously reached two decibels.


    Cobra was so angry that he probably had a heart attack, but he still said in a good voice, "About national matters, my father willmunicate with King Changnuo. This is a matter of diplomacy between the two countries, and it is not what you think." It��s so simple, and dad is also the king of this country, so I should be responsible for everything and it has nothing to do with you.��


    Chang Nuo looked at the father and daughter with interest. Although what Weiwei said was a bit shocking, it was indeed quite interesting.


    This sudden atmosphere instantly made the entire pce hall quiet for a while.


    Others didn''t know how to open their mouths, and all of them acted extremely embarrassed.


    Especially for people from countries such as basta, their expressions are not very good. After all, the sudden words of their princess are still shocking.


    This kind of asion is not an ordinary time for joking. The kings of the two countries are discussing things. Although Princess Weiwei is rtively young, if she says such words at this time and is taken seriously by the other party, then in the end she will really Some are difficult to handle.


    "Sorry, King Changnuo, this child Weiwei~"


    "It doesn''t matter." Chang Nuo smiled.


    After he finished speaking, he looked at Princess Weiwei, and the smile on his face retracted. He looked slightly serious and said, "Princess Weiwei, do you know what aspects I will be involved in if two countries establish diplomatic rtions?" ?


    You must have never understood these things. Once our Kingdom of Tru establishes an alliance with basta, there will beprehensivemunication and understanding in the economic, political, financial and even military fields.


    This is not something that can bepletely changed by just saying a word or doing a certain thing as you imagine. The premise of establishing an alliance is that it is beneficial to both parties, or even the kind that maximizes the benefits.


    Your father knows this very well. From the moment we sit here, we represent not just individuals, but an entire nation.


    There are tens of millions of people behind us. Every word and deed of the two of us determines the future destiny of the entire country. Do you still think that the union of two countries is as simple as you think? "


    "King Changnuo is right. The two of us do not represent individual identities at this moment, but from the perspective of two countries." Kobra recognized what Changnuo said at this moment.


    The group of ministers behind him also nodded.


    The group of people before had never thought of such words. After all, for them, Chang Nuo''s arrival did have the idea of ????cooperation between the two countries, but they only considered economic issues.


    "King Kobra, it''s indeed noon now. Let''s have dinner first. After dinner, we can discuss other issues in depth." Changnuo suddenly said with a smile.

 Chapter 62 National secret?

    <h4>Chapter 62 National secret?</h4>


    It''s already noon, and the meal hasn''t started yet, so there''s no need to discuss other things.


    Cobra also smiled. After all, this was the beginning of alleviating the embarrassing aspect just now.


    "King Changnuo said that we should eat first, and then we can discuss the rest in detail." Kobra also said directly.


    No one cares about what Princess Vivi said now, even Cobra himself seems to have never heard it.


    To them, what Weiwei said was just childish talk and no one would care.


    As for what the parties involved think, no one cares.


    Everyone stood up together and walked directly towards another hall.


    After going around a few corners, a room that didn''t look very big appeared in front of everyone.


    Although this ce is not very big, it shouldn''t be a big problem to amodate a hundred people.


    In this room, whates into view is a dining table more than ten meters long, with a variety of food already ced on it.


    Chang Nuo and Kobra sat at both ends of the huge rectangr dining table, while the others sat down casually.


    In fact, such a feast is just a formality. The people sitting here may not even be able to eat the meal in the end. Even if there are so many delicious food on the table, for them, they cannot let go at all. The kind of hands and feet.


    Eating is just eating. No one said a word during the process, and there was no toasting or anything like that. The whole thing was very polite and elegant.


    Changnuo is inherently more delicate and handsome, and with the king''s crown and elegant-looking clothes, he is quite different from Kobra.


    As a member of the royal family, you still have to perform where you should.


    It was an awkward meal. No one said a word during the whole meal, let alone Chang Nuo and Kobra. Even Princess Weiwei, who always talked a lot, seemed rtively quiet during the whole meal.


    Half an hourter, after finally waiting for the meal to be over, without even taking a break, Kobra called out to Chang Nuo and said, "King Chang Nuo, it''s a rare trip to basta for you. Why don''t I show you around?" How about a visit to our pce?"


    "King Kobra is very polite. Since you invite me like this, then as a junior, I should naturallyply." Changnuo said with a smile.


    This was actually his opportunity. Although the historical text in his previous impression was in this pce, he really couldn''t remember the specific ce. He just took this opportunity to go over and take a good look.


    When starting to set off, Changnuo even made a special look at Junhe. Without the need for words, the other party already knew what his Majesty the King was thinking.


    There were about ten people in basta, from the king to the ministers below. However, Chang Nuo from the Kingdom of Tru brought Gogoya and Shunhe with him.


    The entire pce in basta is rtivelyrge. No one understands what King Kobra is thinking. It is obvious that the two of them have just met for the first time and have been in contact for less than two hours. It''s so kind that one really has to think about it.


    After walking out of the pce hall, Kobra and Changnuo walked side by side. As for the ministers and entourage behind them, they were at least ten meters apart.


    The two kings in front took this opportunity to talk about things, but as for those behind them, they naturally did not want to disturb them.


    "King Kobra, I wonder what your views are on joining the World Government?" Changnuo said as he walked.


    None of them are in the mood to appreciate these beautiful scenery. Let��s not talk about whether they are there or not. Even if they are, everyone has their own thoughts in their hearts and they are not in the mood to think about and watch these surroundings. thing.


    From Kobra''s side, Changnuo can at least get some inside information about joining the World Government. Although he already has the Eye of God and can see the overall situation of the entire pirate world, as a bystander and an actual person in this world , what he experienced waspletely different, and he didn''t even know how many changes there were.


    Kobra did not hide it. He turned to look at Chang Nuo, then thought for a moment and said, "The world government ispletely different now from before. It has even deviated from the track we expected before. For many countries, It is said that joining the world government is not a wonderful beginning, but even a nightmare.


    The World Government currently has a total of 175 member states, but the number of countries in the world alone has reached nearly 300, not to mention those countries on the Great Route before and after.


    There are nearly more than 500 countries in the world now. However, among these countries, those who are willing to join the world government have more or less benefited from it. However, for those poor and down-and-out countries, joining the world government , which means having to pay a high amount of heavenly gold fees. For such a country, just this fee can plunge their entire country into a quagmire.


    Although it''s not clear why you insist on joining the world government, I think you should have your own reasons and reasons. "


    What Kobra said is more pertinent. Even though he is a member country of the World Government, the only difference is that this country is the only country among all the countries that are members of the World Government that does not need to pay the heavenly gold fee.


    As for the reason for this, Chang Nuo is very clear and understands it, but even because of this, this huge country is still in a state of poverty after hundreds of years of development.


    Long beforeing to basta, Chang Nuo had been wondering why the ancestors of basta''s kings were unwilling to choose to be Celestial Dragons hundreds of years ago. This position belonged to the ceiling-level existence in the entire pirate world. , has upied the pinnacle of all humans since birth, but among them, what exactly basta protects is still unknown.


    But everything is definitely not as simple as it seems on the surface. basta must have secrets that he doesn''t know about.


    The original plot also didn''t tell anything about the events in between. I''m afraid this secret answer still needs to be understood in the future.


    However, in the face of what Kobra said, Changnuo did not exin too much. As for why he chose to join the World Government, despite the pressure from the World Government, it was on the one hand, and the other was the benefits he enjoyed after joining the World Government. Those treatments.

 Chapter 63 Royal Palace Cemetery

    <h4>Chapter 63 Royal Pce Cemetery</h4>


    Since the Tru Kingdom wants to start developing, many things it will do in the future will naturally not bypass the World Government. Even if its own country begins to expand in the South China Sea, without the trump card of the World Government standing behind it, then for Tru For the Kingdom, it is difficult to aplish many things.


    "King Kobra, what do you think is the most dissatisfying thing about basta?" Changnuo suddenly asked directly.


    This topic is very sensitive and troublesome for basta. If it weren''t for the fact that the Kingdom of Tru, under the leadership of Changnuo, has changed the status quo of history, Kobra probably wouldn''t pay much attention to him. Good impression.


    "There is nothing dissatisfied with basta as a whole. The people of the country are united and their beliefs are unified. It''s just that I want to do all this better. As the climate in basta bes worse and worse, the original oasis has be It has gradually turned into a desert, so if we want to seek opportunities to improve the current people, I wonder if King Changnuo has any better suggestions?" Cobra said.


    "I don''t know the national conditions of basta, but from what I saw along the way, the people of basta are simple and honest, but what theyck is an opportunity. If King Kobra doesn''t mind, wait until I return to Tru After the Kingdom, we can cooperate economically.


    When the timees, our Kingdom of Tru will openrge-scale enterprises in your basta, recruit ordinary people from basta to work, and drive your country��s own economy. However, when the timees, your country will need to protect and coordinate in terms of security. That won��t happen. How does King Kobra feel? "


    Chang Nuo obviously knew that Kobra was still a little defensive about him. He was unwilling to speak out clearly about many things, and even kept many things under wraps. But he knew his own affairs well, so Kobra would not be arrogant. To the point where I feel that my country ispletely invincible.


    That''s why Changnuo started to bring up this topic. As a preconception, he believed that Kobra would never refuse this request.


    The Kingdom of Tru''s current development is mainly aimed at the Four Seas area, but the things that belong to the Great Line have not prated at all. If basta is used as a springboard, what they want to get is at least higher than the Four Seas area. Ichiban.


    sbastan does not need to pay heavenly money. Likewise, his authority in the entire world government is much higher than that of other countries.


    In this state, if you want to open up the market for the Grand Route, basta can indeed be the best choice.


    Regardless of whether it involves the first half of the Grand Line or the second half of the New World, in terms of doing business, basta does have unique conditions.


    "I don''t know how King Changnuo ns to do these things, but I am very interested in knowing it in advance?" Kobra asked.


    "Why don''t you find a ce to sit down and have a good chat. If you think you need other people''s consent, you can also ask the princes and ministers to participate in the discussion." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Okay." Kobra said.


    Although he has begun to express his agreement, there is not much joy on Cobra''s expression. He wants to give people a feeling of uncertainty. At least when facing this king who is only a teenager, Cobra may They will unterally think that their qualifications are more advanced, and there is no way they can bepared with a teenager.


    "Junhe,e here!"


    Now that they were talking about business, Changnuo suddenly shouted to Junhe who was about ten meters away behind him, then looked at Kobra and said, "Sorry, King Kobra, I''ll go to the toilet first and wait until Ie back." When the timees, let��smunicate better.��


    "no problem."


    As Cobra said this, he had already begun to feel happy in his heart.


    The reason why he went to such great lengths to wee King Tru, Changnuo, was that the ultimate purpose was to promote the country''s economic development. Before he even raised it, the other party had already raised the topic. Cobra naturally Already starting to rejoice.


    But what he didn''t know was that after Changnuo left the sight of these people, he appeared in another ce with Junhe in an instant.


    He used space jumping to take Junhe and suddenly appeared in an unknown area. This ce was full of tombstones, but what was certain was that it was still within the scope of the royal pce of basta.


    "Junhe, the thing I need you to do is in this area, but under which tombstone it is, you need to find it yourself and don''t make any noise. That thing is a boxy object. , you probably can��t understand the text above, and he��s in the tomb.


    After I found it, I tried to find a way to rub the text on it. I didn��t rush to destroy it. I only remembered this when I came here. The historical text cannot be destroyed at all.


    If things are not urgent, try not to choose to act at night. The basta Pce is not as simple as you think. "


    Changnuo said quickly.


    In his impression, basta''s strength is not as simple as it seems on the surface, but he still doesn''t know the deeper things.


    Even if the royal pce of basta is covered with the color of knowledge, the dangers that may arise from recognition are still not felt.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, your subordinates will definitely do a good job in this matter!"


    Junhe said with a serious expression.


    "You can only rely on yourselves for the next thing. I can''t provide any help. You must find this thing. After the text is rubbed, find me and talk about other things." Chang Nuo said.


    "OK."


    Chang Nuo looked around and after confirming that nothing was going on, he took Junhe out of the cemetery again.


    No one would have thought that the king of basta would ce a historical text in the cemetery, but this item is indeed one of the more important parts of the historical text.


    What he recorded was not a simple thing, but about the location of the ancient weapon Pluto.


    The matter ended soon. Junhe had already imprinted the ce in his mind. The pce in basta was such a big ce. For him, if he wanted to find the cemetery he had just used space to jump to, It''s not too difficult.


    It''s just that the difficulty is that His Majesty the King actually allows him to move during the day. This is the situation that makes him a little confused.


    But since Changnuo can say such things, there must be reasons for his worries, and Junhe will not refute any doubts.


    Sinceing back, Junhe began to simte specific action ns in his mind. There were more than 20 members of the King''s Guard who came with him. If they all took action together, it would only take half an hour to search the entire cemetery, but No matter how much I think about it, I know that this matter cannot be so easy and simple.

 Chapter 64 Business Cooperation

    <h4>Chapter 64 Business Cooperation</h4>


    Chang Nuo reappeared and had a good chat with Kobra. If it weren''t for Princess Weiwei being too young, Kobra would probably marry her to Chang Nuo.


    Ignoring what was going on behind him, Chang Nuo apanied King Kobra to the pce hall and began to continue the topic he had not finished talking about just now.


    The ministers of the Kingdom of basta were all apanying him, and all of them were eager to know something.


    Originally, it was just to go to Mariejoia to perform the ceremony of joining the World Government, but I didn''t expect to encounter such a thing in the middle.


    Sometimes it has to be said that King Kobra of basta has a very keen sense of smell in some aspects.


    After everyone sat down, Chang Nuo and Kobra faced each other. No matter how they discussed this time, in the end it was just a preliminary agreement between the two kings. As for more detailed things, these would need to bemunicated slowly by others in the future. .


    "His Majesty King Tru, His Majesty the King has just mentioned that you are interested in reaching preliminary economic andmercial cooperation with the country of basta. I wonder if it is convenient for you to tell me the details?"


    The left minister of basta opened his mouth and asked.


    After Gogoya heard this, he quickly took out a notebook, holding a pen in his hand, and began to prepare to record what his king would say next.


    The other party also prepared a video phone bug for recording.


    After everything was ready, Changnuo looked at the others, then sat up straight and said, "King Kobra, as I mentioned just now, our next two countries, Tru Kingdom and basta, are only in economic terms. The exchanges do not involve the country��s military, politics, or people��s livelihood.��


    Kobra listened and nodded directly.


    "That����"


    Just as Weiwei was about to say something, Kobra immediately covered her mouth, his eyes filled with dissatisfaction.


    "Little princess, this is not the time for nonsense and nonsense. We either leave or sit here and don''t talk." Gogoya reminded with a smile.


    Although these words sounded unpleasant, no one in basta thought that what Gogoya said was wrong.


    In such a formal asion, it was already against the rules for Princess Weiwei to appear here at such a young age, and more importantly, she interrupted the other king when he was speaking.


    "Sorry King Changnuo, please continue."


    Cobra didn''t take into ount Weiwei''s little mood and said with some embarrassment.


    "It''s okay King Kobra, then I''ll continue." Changnuo smiled, not minding what just happened.


    "Regarding the economies of the two countries, we can build rted enterprises in basta, which can include perfumes, handicrafts, cloth and other rted products currently produced by the Kingdom of Tru, and strive to meet the employment and living security of 50% of the citizens of basta within five years. .


    To this end, we can provide information about your country''s infrastructure construction, environmental transformation, seawater desalination projects and other basic livelihood projects that are beneficial to your country.


    Correspondingly, basta needs to assist the Kingdom of Tru in creating sales channels and cargo security for the Great Line and the New World.


    The enterprises we build will work in ordance with your country''s taxes andws. For the specific infrastructure costs required, basta can deduct taxes or pay directly. As for the remaining matters, relevant domestic personnel can be asked Communicate and process. "


    Chang Nuo directly recounted the matter in slightly detail.


    Gogoya who stayed next to him kept recording, but Junhe behind him was already stunned.


    Although he is the captain of the king''s guard, he has been following Chang Nuo, so he can understand these things more or less clearly.


    At present, although the reputation of the Kingdom of Tru has increased in terms of business, there are no sales channels on the Grand Line. After all, the transportation costs here arepletely disproportionate.


    Originally, they were still thinking that the main purpose of joining the World Government was to be able to exercise sales rights on the Grand Line. However, in this case, for them, it would greatly save transportation costs and save a lot of people in terms of safety.


    If this is the case, both countries will indeed be able to maximize their benefits.


    This kind of business speech, especially the development of the economic system between countries, haspletely entered another field dominated by the bourgeoisie.


    Not to mention the people here in the Tru Kingdom were more surprised. Even the princes and ministers in basta were all looking at the fifteen or sixteen-year-old boy in front of them with an expression of surprise.


    No one could have imagined that at such a young age, they could master the formal affairs between countries so skillfully. Even those who have lived their entire lives have never thought that they would leave such a good thing to others.


    But it''s different now. A small Tru Kingdom is actually willing to put its domestic production economy into other countries, but the return it needs is just for safety.


    It is very iprehensible that it is too one-sided and does not take this issue into consideration from the essence of the matter.


    For the country of basta, it can at least solve the current situation of people''sck of food, but the benefits of the Kingdom of Tru are obviously greater.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, several ministers from basta quickly withdrew to a rtively distant ce, and thenmunicated in low voices.


    Cobra was also lost in thought. What Chang Nuo said was not unattractive, especially the current state of their country. If they really have these supports, they will definitely be able to change the level of the national economy.


    With such a huge temptation, the reason why Cobra is still pondering is mainly because he thinks that his country can digest these problems?


    "King Changnuo, what you said is indeed of great help to our country. Today, since we have talked about the preliminary intentions, as for the remaining details, your country will send people in advance. Let��smunicate in detail.�� Kobra thought for a moment and then said.


    He can feel the benefits these things bring to his country, but for the Tru Country, it seems that the benefits are much greater than his own country. Cobra understands very well, if this is not the case, why would the other partye? Invest in your own country?


    In fact, for Changnuo, these things do not require much investment at all. Thergest human resources are all in this country, and they can also develop all economic undertakings on the great route. This is The first thing he had to consider.

 Chapter 65 Historical text

    <h4>Chapter 65 Historical text</h4>


    The products manufactured by the Kingdom of Tru can bepletely digested in the four seas. Only the countries on the Grand Line cannot touch this area because of the cost of human transportation.


    "What King Kobra said is that we are only reaching a preliminary consensus on these things that can be considered in the early stage. As for the remaining things, we can only let the people belowe and have a goodmunication." Changnuo smiled. Said.


    "Um...can I say something?"


    Princess Weiwei looked a little aggrieved and looked at the others without daring to open her mouth and asked.


    "What do you want to say?" Kobra asked.


    "I would like to ask King Changnuo, these things you just mentioned seem to be only useful to the people of our country. They do not seem to have much benefit to our country as a whole?" Weiwei asked.


    "Maybe you don''t understand yet. You will understand these things only after you really start to get involved in national affairs." Chang Nuo sighed and said with a smile.


    "Weiwei, what King Changnuo said this time will have huge benefits for our country, and you have ignored an issue. Our country is not just a piece ofnd, or our royal family, the foundation of the country It''s those people. As long as their lives are better, it means that this country has bepletely different." Kobra began to say earnestly.


    "Really? But he hasn''t said anything about the profit sharing after the sales of those goods?" Weiwei asked curiously.


    "Weiwei."


    Kobra roared seriously.


    When Chang Nuo saw this, his face turned cold.


    Cobra quickly stood up and said helplessly to Changnuo, "I''m sorry, King Changnuo. Weiwei is not sensible. I hope you can forgive me."


    "King Kobra, you need to know that if our Kingdom of Tru is willing to choose to cooperate, it is estimated that any country on the Grand Line will agree to this method!" Gogoya stood up and said what Changnuo did not say. The remarks.


    "Sorry, I understand!" Kobra apologized to Chang Nuo again.


    "Now that the previous matters have been settled, let others discuss the remaining matters. I will go and take a rest first. I hope we can have a good start." Changnuo stood up and said with a smile.


    "Okay, Lan Mo, lead King Tru back to have a rest." Kobra shouted towards Lan Mo at the door.


    Before leaving, Chang Nuo nodded politely.


    After Chang Nuo and others left, Kobra was speechless and looked at his daughter helplessly. If what she said just now was because of Chang Nuo''s concern, then there would be no need to continue talking about this matter.


    "Dad, it seems I didn''t say anything wrong, right?" Weiwei said with an aggrieved expression, as if she thought she had said something right.


    "National affairs are not as simple as you think. You are still young now. You should understand it in a few years when you have more exposure."


    Cobra did not me Weiwei and said in a very calm tone.


    "Your Majesty, we just discussed it. What King Tru said ispletely feasible. If everything is implemented, it is indeed expected to change the current situation of our people in basta within five years."


    Minister Zuo came over at this time and spoke to Kobra respectfully.


    "I understand, let''s discuss it carefully next. If someone from the Tru Kingdomes to contact us, we will see who is more suitable to send over to negotiate." Kobra said.


    "Dad, is it possible that we can''t do what King Tru said? Why do they have toe to our country to do it?" Weiwei asked again.


    "If our country had this strength, we would have started doing these things long ago. It is precisely because we do not have this strength that we need to cooperate with the Kingdom of Tru." Kobra said.


    "alright, I got it."


    "There''s one more thing you need to know. Although you are still young, every word, every move you make, after sitting here, represents our entire country. No matter what happens in the future, don''t use your words. It will cause huge losses to the country, and may even cause a war between the two countries. I hope you can understand this." Kobra said again with seriousness.


    "They shouldn''t be that stingy, right?" Weiwei asked.


    "Princess Weiwei, it seems that you have not learned about the specific situation of the Tru Kingdom. King Changnuo has only been in power for two years, and now he haspletely changed the situation of the entire country, and he was previously in a neighboring country. The Roja Kingdom had also be the territory of the Tru Kingdom half a year ago.


    Many things are not as simple as they seem on the surface. Countries only talk about interests and not other things. "Minister Zuo said.


    "Bafetus is right. Don''t think that King Trues to look down on others because he is rtively young. After observing him for so long, he is definitely a very extraordinary young man." Kobra praised without hesitation. .


    "I wonder if there will be a chance to visit Tru Kingdom in the future. I would like to know what is so great about him?" Weiwei said with a smile.


    "Bafitus, regarding the cooperation with the Toru Kingdom, you can start making preparations as soon as possible. It is very likely that the Minister of Commerce of the Toru Kingdom, Losta, wille to learn about the other party''s information in advance. It will be convenient then. We responded promptly," Kobra said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty," said Minister Zuo.


    As a rtively intermediate location in the first half of the entire Grand Route, basta has a hugend area. It is indeed the best candidate for the Kingdom of Tru to choose to cooperate, but it is certainly not the only one.


    After all, on the Grand Line, most countries are members of the World Government and will almost always agree to cooperate with any country.


    Changnuo is not in a hurry about these things. The Kingdom of Tru is currently developing rapidly. In the short term, he can choose a station on the Grand Route. It can also be eased for a few years before proceeding.


    Chang Nuo, who returned to the ce arranged for him to live, did not lie down to rest. Instead, he began to observe the situation in the entire basta Royal City with his own sense of knowledge and domineering.


    As his strength grows, he can now control everything within a ten-kilometer radius.


    What worries him more is the current Sand Crocodile Crocodile, which has actuallye to the country of basta in this timeline.


    The only thing that can be exined is that Robin, who currently understands the text of history, has now be his subordinate.


    Although Chang Nuo didn''t care much about these people, he had at least exined that the historical text of the basta Pce must be dealt with as soon as possible.

 Chapter 66 The Four Emperors Pattern is Established

    <h4>Chapter 66 The Four Emperors Pattern is Established</h4>


    Sitting in the room, Chang Nuo has been thinking about the next thing. The first task at the moment is to quickly find the location of the historical text.


    Although everything has been confirmed, the follow-up is not particrly clear so far.


    While he was deep in thought, Gogoya suddenly opened the door and walked in. He said to Chang Nuo, "Your Majesty, this is today''s newspaper. I think you will be more interested in the contents."


    Gogoya said, holding a thick stack of newspapers in his hand.


    "What makes me..."


    Before Chang Nuo finished speaking, he had already seen the content disyed on the front page of the newspaper.


    The first page is impressively "The new world''s sea pattern is dposed, and the era of the four emperors has officially arrived!"


    When he saw this content, Chang Nuo smiled and took it with interest.


    At this point in time, this matter should indeed have happened. I wonder what the new world is like now?


    Nowadays, the level of curiosity about this kind of thing is very high. The only thing that can be thought of is a fight between them. But the strength has really reached this level, and there is no need to start a big fight at all.


    "Gogoya, close the door. Let me take a closer look at this more interesting thing." Changnuo said with a smile.


    "oh!!"


    After Gogoya turned around and closed the door, she went straight to sit next to Chang Nuo. She didn''t read the content carefully just now, but this kind of thing is really not verymon in the new world.


    Especially with such big news now, things about the new world that are rarely exposed to usually be the front page of the entire newspaper this time.


    Chang Nuo looked at the photos of several people on the front page. Their names were attached below, and even the amount of the reward was marked.


    The first one is a white beard. This obvious sign can be seen at a nce. Moreover, in the entire sea, he is already the undoubted emperor, and no one can shake his status.


    Big Mom, who is ranked second, already looks much happier. As for the remaining two, Kaido and Shanks, the overall trajectory is exactly the same as the original n, with no difference at all.


    The appearance of everyone here is very recognizable. Being able to put these people on the front page of the newspaper is indeed a major event in the pirate world.


    With the formation of the Four Emperors, one can already imagine how lively the new world will be, at least that''s what it looks like now. At the same time, one doesn''t know how many pirates will flood into the new world in the future.


    "Your Majesty, who are these four people?" Gogoya asked.


    "Half a year ago, a batch of our goods was robbed, and it was this guy who did it." Chang Nuo said, pointing to Shanks''s head.


    "Doesn''t that mean the other party is very powerful? But what are the Four Emperors?" Gogoya asked again.


    "The New World is very big, much bigger than we imagined, but under such circumstances, there are several groups of them in the waters of the New World, carving up the area belonging to the New World, and even the navy cannot participate. What do you think?" Chang Nuo said.


    "So powerful? It seems that I can''t get the goods from our ship?"


    Chang Nuo was speechless. Is now the time to consider this matter?


    The red-haired pirates have now be one of the four emperors of the new world, which already shows how strong the other party is. Let alone goods, even if it is other things, they will note back now. .


    Chang Nuo looked at the newspaper and fell into deep thought. He did not expect that such a big change would ur in the new world at this time?


    But then there were more questions. The appearance of the Four Emperors must have been decided years ago. As for why it was only reported now, no one knows.


    The news is big news, but for them, these things are currently out of their reach in a short period of time, so naturally they don''t need to pay too much attention.


    What Chang Nuo can think of is that the Shichibukai system may also being down!


    Thinking about the current time, this year happened to be the year of the World Conference. Changnuopletely ignored these things and threw them behind him. He had never thought of these issues before.


    After all, whether it is the New World or the Grand Line, they are simply not essible to the Tru Kingdom at this time.


    "Your Majesty, what''s wrong with you?"


    Gogoya asked, looking at Changnuo who was deep in thought.


    "It''s nothing, I''m just thinking about something." Chang Nuo said, lowered his head and read the newspaper again, and suddenly a wicked smile appeared on the corner of his mouth and said again, "It seems that not only will there be changes in the new world, but also changes will ur on the great route. It will appear soon!


    For the development of our Kingdom of Tru, the next few years will be a golden period. "


    "Why do you say that? Your Majesty."


    ��In the new world and the Grand Line, not only the world government will be overwhelmed, but even the navy no longer has the intention to worry about the affairs of the world. We must step up our pace andyout.


    I will inform Luostater and tell him to step up his efforts to handle everything. The next era that belongs to our Kingdom of Tru is about toe. "


    Chang Nuo stood up suddenly and even said with a little excitement in his heart.


    "Okay, Your Majesty, but what should I tell Losa?" Gogoya asked.


    "Just inform him directly that the time hase!" Chang Nuo said in a low voice.


    The New World has been divided up by the Four Emperors. Both the Navy and the World Government are probably in a state of distress at the moment. Most of their military strength should be stationed in the New World. As for those on the Great Line, their strength The powerful ones will definitely be transferred back, so as for the remaining ones, they are either people fishing in troubled waters or trying to make money.


    Chang Nuo became more and more excited as he thought about it, wishing he could go to the new world to make a fuss, but he knew the seriousness of the matter. When others were worried, it was the beginning of his own fortune.


    After being excited for a while, Chang Nuo put away his expression and moved his heart, and became calm again. He sat there and started reading the contents of the newspaper.


    Although he has a clear understanding of what will happen in the future, he really doesn''t know much about how those four guys became the four emperors.


    But it can be seen from the contents of the newspaper that these four people are really fierce!


    It''s just that ording to Chang Nuo''s current strength, if he had to fight with these guys, he probably wouldn''t be a match for ten of them.

 Chapter 67 Shichibukai System

    <h4>Chapter 67 Shichibukai System</h4>


    After all, thebat experience is there and there is no way topete with it.


    But for them now, they arepletely out of reach. Changnuo will not be stupid enough to travel from all over the world to the New World to provoke others!


    Chang Nuo read such a thick stack of newspapers for nearly half an hour. After it was over, he sighed and leaned on the back of the sofa.


    Everything in the new world is still a bit far away for him. At least in recent years, Chang Nuo will not consider that area of ??the new world.


    Being able to gain a foothold in the world first is the short-term goal that needs to be achieved. Changnuo understands that its situation is not as good as imagined.


    "Your Majesty, Luosta''s reply said that it is necessary to start preparations for the fourth volume?" Gogoya asked doubtfully.


    After all, she is not involved in any political affairs, so she has no idea what the so-called Fourth Volume is?


    Chang Nuo was silent for a moment after hearing this. The fourth volume is a n to startrge-scale exploration and transfer of mineral veins in other countries, because it consumes too much manpower and material resources, and if other countries are involved, it can easily lead to various wars. .


    But now that things have reached this juncture, there is no longer any time to wait for them to hesitate!


    "Reply to Luosta and tell him to be careful and start with the entire South China Sea countries." Chang Nuo said.


    "Okay, Your Majesty." Gogoya said seriously.


    After Gogoya finished speaking, he left the room directly. Changnuo sat here alone, picking up the newspaper with interest and staring at the head of the four emperors.


    There is still a long way to go, and this time is just the beginning.


    the next day.


    Early in the morning, as soon as Chang Nuo walked out of the door, the scene in front of him immediately surprised him.


    Kobra was already waiting at the door. Looking at it like this, he didn''t know how long he had been standing at the door.


    "King Kobra, why are you here??"


    Chang Nuo said with some surprise.


    Although he didn''t get up very early, it wasn''t toote either. But how could he not be surprised when he saw Kobra at this time?


    "Haha..., King Changnuo, I am naturally waiting for you here!" Kobra said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, King Kobra has been waiting for you for nearly half an hour." Gogoya said with a smile.


    "King Changnuo, have you read yesterday''s newspaper?" Kobra asked.


    "After seeing it, I was a little shocked, but I think it''s quite normal. Besides, what happened in the New World will not affect the first half of the Great Route, let alone the Sihai area where we are." Changnuo said directly without thinking. Speak up.


    "That is indeed what you said, but at least on the surface it is, but from other aspects, whether it is the four sea areas or the first half of the Grand Route, there may be many more problems. Kobra said, then looked at Chang Nuo and said again, "How about dining together?"


    "Okay!" Changnuo did not refuse. This time he also wanted to learn from Kobra some secret issues about the World Government, as well as possible problems on the entire Grand Line.


    Kobra has been the king for so many years. Although he does not manage his country very well, Kobra is still better than Changnuo in terms of sensitivity in many things.


    The breakfast preparation is rtively ordinary, almost like a family meal.


    But it is such a simple meal that can directly bring the distance between the two people closer.


    There were three people sitting at the dinner table, Kobra Changnuo and Weiwei.


    While eating, Kobra suddenly raised his head and looked at Changnuo and asked, "What do you think of what happened in the new world this time?"


    "How can you look at it? Anyway, just look at it like that. These things will not affect our Kingdom of Tru in a short time. Although the navy will transfer its elite troops to the new world, the pirates staying in the four seas will not So powerful as imagined.


    The only thing that may be more influential is that it may create arger wave of pirate groups. If it is not controlled, the number of people who will be pirates from all over the world may be unimaginable. "Chang Nuo said.


    "You are right, these things will indeed happen, but the situation in this world is very likely to change. A few days ago, I received information about the World Government meeting issued by the World Government to start on July 1 this year. Among them, there is a decision , which is to let all world government member countries vote to decide whether to use pirates to punish pirates.


    Maybe you don��t know about this, and we don��t know much about the more detailed things in it. It seems to be about the decision of King Shichibukai! Kobra said as he ate.


    "No matter what the situation is, using so-called pirates to punish pirates will not be believed by anyone. Instead, it will give somerger pirates greater rights and a broader development area.


    If it is true as you said, the pirate decision of the Shichibukai is established, then the world will be even more chaotic. "


    After hearing what Chang Nuo said, Kobra nodded. He agreed with this decision. After all, he had the same idea.


    Using pirates to punish pirates sounds ridiculous. If it can really be realized, this kind of thing is the most incredible thing.


    The main reason why the pirates are so honest and haven''t made any big noise is because they have no rights. If the so-called pirates of the Shichibukai are established, they will not only have rights and status but also strength. All in all, legal robbery will inevitably cause untold harm to other people and the country.


    "What you said makes sense, but the key is that the group of decision-makers in the world government must agree. There are only more than three months until the next world government meeting. During this time, many things are not the world at all. Government-affiliated countries can say they don��t agree if they don��t agree,�� Kobra said.


    "So what? Since you can''t change this situation, why don''t you think of other ways?


    After the establishment of the King''s Shichibukai, those who are most likely to suffer are those of you who are in the first half of the Grand Route.


    As for the New World, which has long been carved up by thoserge pirate groups, and the Four Emperors pattern has been established, there is naturally no ce for them to gain a foothold, so the ces they can consider may only be in the first half of the Grand Line. "


    Chang Nuo said directly with a smile.

 Chapter 68 Crocodile

    <h4>Chapter 68 Crocodile</h4>


    "Isn''t he just a pirate? What''s so scary? We in basta have 600,000 Kingdom troops. How can we worry about a pirate?"


    Weiwei said with disdain as she looked at the two of them.


    "The power of pirates is sometimespletely beyond your imagination, especially the four emperors in the new world. None of them can destroy a country by one person! In front of them, no amount of quantity can change the poor quality of the army. The problem.


    Whitebeard, as possessing the Shock Fruit, can change the terrain with one punch. Hundreds of thousands of troops are just like ants in front of him. As for the selection of Shichibukai personnel, although there are not such powerful beings, they have a Strong strength, there is no doubt about this. "


    Chang Nuo said directly without even raising his head.


    After finishing speaking, he put down his chopsticks with some satisfaction, then picked up the paper towel on the dining table and wiped his mouth. He looked at Princess Weiwei and continued, "Do you know how powerful this world can be at its peak?"


    After hearing this, Weiwei shook her head. As a child, she had never even been out of basta, so how could she possibly know what the so-called power meant?


    But she was quite interested in hearing what surprising things this boy who was only a few years older than herself could say.


    Cobra was also curious, and at the same time he put down his chopsticks, picked up a tissue, wiped his mouth and looked at Chang Nuo in front of him.


    "Currently, there are only a few people who are rtively powerful. Most of their abilities are concentrated on Devil Fruits. After eating some Devil Fruits, they can directly cause the instant destruction of a country. This is like Whitebeard.


    He is called the most powerful man in the world. This topic is not unfounded. Even between Roger the Pirate King and Whitebeard, the two did not dare to fight head-on. In the end, it was just Just evenly matched.


    But for a country, the first priority is to protect the safety of its citizens. Ask yourself, have you done that?


    It''s just that those things are too far away from us, and they are not things we need to consider at all now. Do your own thing well, why should you care about these! "


    Chang Nuo changed his tone and looked directly at them and said with a smile.


    "Whitebeard is really as powerful as you say? Then he can do whatever he wants?"


    Weiwei asked with her eyes widened.


    "I don''t know the specifics. After all, I haven''t been to the New World, but from some aspects, if he wants to do something, I''m afraid he really has a chance to do it." Chang Nuo said.


    Even if he is familiar with these things, Chang Nuo will not reveal that he knows too much, because it ispletely unnecessary.


    But while they were chatting, in a quiet ce, Jun and a man were searching for something in the cemetery in the pce.


    And this time he was not alone. There were several people watching around, always observing what was going on around him.


    Junhe walked around this ce alone, not missing a beat, searching carefully for something that might be relevant.


    But this cemetery is really not small. If he only relies on himself, he doesn''t know how long it will take to finish it.


    But this kind of situation can only be done by one person. Junhe searched for each other next to the tombstones, and at the same time tested the condition of the ground under his feet with his feet.


    Now that he has eaten the Devil Fruit and has the ability of the Silver Moon Wolf, his sense of smell and hearing have exceeded the limits of human beings by many times.


    You can get feedback on the situation below the ground by chopping your feet.


    So even if he were to explore the entire cemetery here alone, it would not be a very strenuous task.


    I came here early in the morning and searched for nearly half an hour. Fortunately, there were almost no guards around. As long as it didn''t cause too much noise, no one woulde here at all.


    "Jun and Captain, someone ising!"


    While he was still searching, a member of the guard who was observing at the edge shouted to Junhe in a low voice for the first time.


    After hearing the sound, Junhe''s face suddenly became serious, and then he disappeared into a cemetery in an instant.


    He hid in a rtively private ce, and the others also hid, wanting to see who woulde to the cemetery at this time without any problems.


    But while they were observing, two people came to this royal pce cemetery quietly and somewhat furtively.


    The person who came was not wearing the uniform of a pce guard, and he might not be a member of the pce at all. They were twopletely unfamiliar faces, a man and a woman.


    "It''s him����?"


    Junhe was hiding in the dark, and suddenly he saw the man''s face. Who is this guy? He knew very well that there was currently Crocodile Crocodile with a bounty of 81 million Baileys.


    As for the other person, there is no need to think too much. The only woman who can follow Crocodile to this ce is Robin.


    Jun He did not miss each other''s every move, and the others were always keeping orders. As long as there was any trouble, they would rush directly to subdue the two of them.


    It is obviously not the first time these two guys havee here. Looking at their rtively skillful walking route, it is obvious that they have been here many times.


    Thinking of what Chang Nuo had said, Jun He''s face was as gloomy as snow, and even murderous intent had begun to show.


    He didn''t believe that these two people came to worship anyone. If their purpose was the same as his own, then Junhe would never let them leave this ce alive.


    In the sight of these people, Crocodile led Robin very skillfully to a tombstone. He looked around and then touched the part of the tombstone that was supposed to bury the dead. In the ce, a long tunnel appeared.


    After the two people entered, Junhe appeared quickly, and he followed directly in without waiting for the door to close.


    As for those people outside, they continued to observe every move outside.


    "who����?"


    In the underground space, as soon as Crocodile walked in, he seemed to feel a figure moving quickly in front of him.


    He nced around the underground pce, his eyes expression was very cold and he was very wary.


    "President, what happened?"


    Robin stood next to him, looking at Crocodile''s expression at this moment, his face also became serious, but he still asked with some doubts.


    "Did you feel something was wrong just now?" Crocodile asked in a low voice.


    "President, please don''t scare me. This ce is also the cemetery of all the kings of basta. When you say this, it suddenly makes people feel a little scared."


    Robin said with a smile on his lips.

 Chapter 69 Seriously injured with one punch

    <h4>Chapter 69 Seriously injured with one punch</h4>


    He didn''t take Crocodile''s words to heart at all. After all, he stayed in the underground pce, a ce where few people usually came, let alone such a secret ce.


    Perhaps Crocodile also felt that he was dazzled, so he continued without paying too much attention, "It''s okay, let''s go!"


    However, at this moment, Junhe had already reached the deepest part of the underground pce, and in the main hall of this huge underground pce, he had already discovered what his Majesty the King had asked him to look for as soon as he entered.


    A square historical text is ced in the hall of this underground pce. It is about five meters high. After hundreds of years, except for a little dust on it, there is no other sign. .


    The most important thing is the text on it. Even after so many years, it is still clearly visible, as if it has not experienced any weathering and corrosion.


    Before Crocodile and the others came down, Junhe quickly found a ce where he could hide his figure. He wanted to see what the hell these two guys had in mind?


    Crocodile led Robin and walked straight towards the historical text. When he saw the square historical text in front of him, Crocodile couldn''t help but get excited in his heart.


    "Robin, please exin what''s above!"


    Crocodile asked anxiously.


    "There is no way to exin all the words above, but most of them are still clear. It mainly talks about the location of the ancient weapon Pluto, but there are many words that I haven''t studied thoroughly until now. It will take at least a while."


    Robin said with a smile. She touched the boxy historical text with her hand, as if she was feeling the charm of the words on it.


    Junhe, who was hiding in the dark, heard that the historical text that Robin said was about the ancient weapon Pluto. His whole body seemed to be uncontrobly excited. His eyes instantly turned red and he clenched his fists. .


    "Who is it? If you have the guts to hide here, why don''t you dare toe out?"


    Crocodile felt something strange again and instantly looked in the direction of Junhe.


    Although he saw nothing, he still roared in that direction.


    It''s just that this time Junhe didn''t intend to evade anymore. He jumped down from the top of the underground pce with red eyes.


    When he found out that someone was really staying here, Crocodile could no longer hide his shock. He was even curious about the identity of the other person?


    But when he saw Junhe''s red eyes, even Crocodile realized that something didn''t seem right.


    "Who are you? Why do you stay in this underground pce?" Crocodile asked.


    "Before you ask me, should you first exin the purpose of youring here? I didn''t expect you, little girl, to be able to recognize the historical text? It''s really surprising."


    Junhe''s evil smile, coupled with his red eyes, gave people an overall eerie feeling.


    "Since you don''t want to give your name, then you will..."


    As soon as Crocodile was about to use his ability, Junhe disappeared from the spot instantly. When he reappeared, he punched him in the stomach with a domineering attitude.


    The powerful impact instantly caused Crocodile to fly dozens of meters away, and then hit the wall hard beforeing to a stop.


    But at this moment, a huge and deep human-shaped dent has appeared on the wall.


    With his domineering attitude, Crocodile at this time is not Junhe''s opponent in any aspect. Even a natural ability user will have no effect on being beaten passively.


    "Krokdal, do you feel that in the first half of the Grand Line, natural abilities were already invincible?" Junhe said with disdain on his face.


    For a rtively famous pirate like Crocodile, his abilities, including every move he makes, have long been announced, and there is no privacy at all in terms of his strength.


    Seeing this scene, Robin was so surprised and panicked that he even lost control of his body and sat directly on the ground.


    She was very clear about the abilities Junhe used just now. These were obviously the skills he saw used by the navy when he was a child. They couldn''t be said to be exactly the same, but they were almost the same.


    The fear in her heart directly defeated her reason. Robin sat on the ground and did not dare to move. She even felt as if her life hade to an end.


    But when Crocodile came down from the wall at this moment, blood was already flowing from the corners of his mouth, and he looked injured at first nce.


    In the first half of the Grand Line, the natural Devil Fruit ability was indeed invincible if one did not understand Haki. But now Crocodile''s ability is in the Kingdom of Toru, even a random member of the King''s Guard is invincible. You can have a good time with him.


    Not to mention Shunhe, who is the captain of the king''s guard, the most powerful man in the Toru Kingdom besides Changno.


    "Who are you?" Crocodile asked again.


    "You don''t have to worry about who I am, but what I can tell you next is, when lifees to the end, why do you have to think so much?"


    Junhe is really murderous at this moment. He has seen the appearance of Pluto with his own eyes. However, this guy is following in Pluto''s footsteps, which will definitely bring unimaginable crisis to his country.


    Although he doesn''t know what Pluto is, Junhe knows very well what his Majesty the King said. If the news about Pluto is leaked, the Kingdom of Toru will bepletely reduced to a scorched earth!


    "Krokdal, the bounty is 81 million Bailey pirates. Use your life today to please me for a while!"


    Jun He''s coldughter came out. When he originally thought Crocodile could use hard steel, he didn''t expect this guy to fly over with a sand de, and he quickly escaped from here.


    He didn''t hesitate at all, and even hispanions gave up and ran towards the top of the underground pce.


    Once on the ground, there is no way to do anything. If the basta King''s Guards are attracted, no one will be able to exin why they are here.


    Junhe was not in a hurry to chase the guy, and even didn''t want to chase him at all. Now Robin, who can understand the text of history, has been paralyzed here in fear. Whether Crocodile is still at the scene ispletely unimportant now. .

 Chapter 70 The Hardness of Historical Text

    <h4>Chapter 70 The Hardness of Historical Text</h4>


    Junhe calmed down his inner emotions, and his eyes began to change from blood red to normal color. Facing Crocodile who had already escaped, he just showed a mocking expression.


    Looking at Robin who was still sitting on the ground, Junhe slowly walked in her direction.


    "Can you understand the historical text?" Junhe asked in a cold voice.


    Robin was in a panic at the moment. He could no longer hear any sounds from the outside world, and even his body could not help but tremble.


    But she still nodded obediently to express her approval of this matter.


    "Read what''s above!" Junhe continued to ask in a cold voice.


    "I..., I...can''t recognize...the whole thing!"


    Robin said tremblingly.


    "Just tell me the location of the ancient weapon Pluto above, and you don''t need to worry about the rest." Junhe asked.


    "The South China Sea...an ind shaped like a wine jar."


    Robin said, she didn''t know what the man in front of her wanted to do? Whether she had the same purpose as Crocodile, but in order to survive, she could only tell the truth.


    Junhe thought about the shape of Batl for a while. After a while, his face turned pale, mainly because what Robin was talking about was Batl Ind.


    "Bang..."


    After confirming that what the other party said was true, Junhe went up and pped her on the shoulder without any sympathy, instantly making Robin unconscious.


    Junhe looked at the woman lying on the ground, took out the paper he had prepared in advance, and began to rub the text on the historical text.


    After everything was settled, Junhe tried to use the Devil Fruit ability to directly destroy the huge historical text in front of him. However, when the wolf''s ws touched it, Junhe discovered that the hardness of the historical text was The degree waspletely beyond my imagination.


    Such a powerful force attacked it, but not even a trace was left behind. How could such a hardness not shock people?


    But after thinking for a while, Junhe directly hugged the waist of Robin who was lying on the ground and passed out, and quickly moved towards the entrance of the underground pce.


    When they walked out of the underground pce and came to the cemetery grass above, Junhe did not find Crocodile. The guy must have already started running away.


    Aftering out, he did not shout loudly, but only made a retreat gesture. The members of the King''s Guard who came over instantly began to disappear in ce.


    However, outside the pce at this moment, Crocodile was clutching his stomach and running away as fast as possible.


    Not only did he get nothing during this trip, but he also lost Robin. The key was to meet such a powerful being. Although he was very angry inside, he also knew that now was not the time to show off.


    ncing back in the direction of the pce, Crocodile started walking in other directions without looking back.


    In the pce, Chang Nuo and Kobra were still sitting there chatting. Now they were not only talking about the country, but also started to talk about other topics.


    But just like this, the distance between the two has indeed be much closer, and even jokes havee out.


    Junhe took Robin, who had been captured by him, directly back to the Abili, and under the care of several people, he threw it directly into one of the rooms.


    Just in case, Junhe ordered someone to put a restraining cor on her.


    "You guys stay here. If she wants something to eat, give her something to drink. But the only thing is that you are not allowed to leave this room, even to go to the toilet. You all need to follow me. If this woman runs away, If it falls, you guys won��t have to stay here anymore!��


    With the seriousness in Junhe''s words, the few members of the King''s Guard who followed him naturally understood how important this woman was.


    Any one of them can crush Robin, let alone five people guarding here. If it is true that five people can''t even look down on a woman, then it would be really embarrassing for this matter to spread.


    Besides, there are more than five of them on this ship now. There are at least fifty or sixty people on the ship''s entourage and operators. Although Robin has the Devil Fruit, he can''t use any of his abilities now.e out.


    "Jasmine, you are responsible for taking care of the woman inside. Before His Majesty returns to the ship, try to meet all her requests as long as they are not excessive. "


    Junhe shouted while looking at a girl standing on the deck nearby.


    "Huh?? Me?"


    This little girl named Jasmine was obviously at a loss. She was brought to the ship by Gogoya, and in some respects she was also Gogoya''s maid.


    "You don''t need to do anything else. You just need to handle it when these big men can''t do it." Junhe said.


    "Yes, Master Junhe..."


    Jasmine said respectfully.


    The other members of the guard didn''t have any objections. Although they didn''t know what happened, it shouldn''t be easy for Jun and Lord to trouble them to arrest him personally and also personally order the guards.


    Robin in the room had huddled up in panic. After boarding the ship, she had already guessed who the other party was?


    No matter how unintelligent Robin is, the name of Tru Kingdom has be very famous in the past six months.


    But what he is more curious about is why the people of the Tru Kingdom would arrest him?


    Robin is now about the same age as Chang Nuo, only about a year older than him at most. His overall skin looks quite dark, but his delicate facial features are indeed quite good.


    She was squatting alone in the corner of the wall, and she was constantly thinking about how to leave this ce. After all, this was how she had been living her entire life.


    But this time waspletely different from usual. Before, she met almost all pirates, but this time she met a country''s guard, and the opponent''s strength was beyond her imagination. In her impression, Crocodile She has already encountered rtively powerful beings, but in the hands of this group of people, she couldn''t even survive a punch!


    "What are you thinking about? Don''t worry,e over and have something to eat!"


    While Robin was still thinking, Jasmine walked in with a te of food.


    Looking at Robin squatting in the corner, Jasmine said in a very calm voice.


    "Can you let me go?"


    Robin looked at Jasmine and suddenly opened his mouth and said this.

 Chapter 71 The Caught Robin

    <h4>Chapter 71 The Caught Robin</h4>


    She put on a pitiful look, but Jasmine just smiled, and her voice was still sweet and said, "This can''t be done! Besides, I don''t have the strength to let you go. Lord Junhe has already given instructions, But don��t worry, they are all very good and will never do anything to you!��


    "Then may I know why you arrested me?"


    Robin asked again.


    "I don''t know about this kind of thing, but our King is very good. Even if you are a pirate, he may not hurt you. The navigator on our current ship was also a pirate before. ! Look, it��s fine now.�� Jasmine said with a smile.


    Robin suddenly fell into deep thought. She had always relied on her ingenuity and a mind that no one believed in, and she had ovee the dangers she had experienced over the years one by one. But the situation she encountered now, Completely different from before.


    While Robin was deep in thought, Jasmine said softly to her, "Eat something quickly, otherwise it will get cold."


    The biggest advantage of the restraint cor is that it suppresses the ability of the devil fruit. The ability user can still live independently like ordinary people, and will not be paralyzed like the sea tower stone.


    After arranging the tes, Jasmine nced at Robin with another smile, then turned around and left.


    Robin was still huddled in the corner, perhaps so that she could find somefort and security.


    No matter what choice she made in this small room on the ship, Robin was certain of one thing, that she would never get out of this room.


    Recalling the scenes in the past, Robin''s always strong defense waspletely broken at this moment, and tears still flowed down somewhat unsatisfactorily.


    After Jasmine came out, she looked at the people guarding the door without saying a word, and she also had no sympathy.


    As the morning passed, Chang Nuo and Kobra chatted for a long time, but most of them just talked about family matters and did not discuss any national affairs.


    After noon, Chang Nuo stayed alone in the room. As soon as he sat down, he softly shouted toward the door, "Come in!"


    Junhe stayed outside, but didn''t knock on the door.


    Chang Nuo had already sensed the other party. When he was sure that everything was okay, he started shouting


    Then, when the door to the room opened, Jun He walked in with a calm face. When he saw Chang Nuo, he bowed respectfully and said, "Your Majesty, the thing has been found."


    "Have you made any rubbings?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    "The thing is here..."


    Junhe said, and then took out pieces of paper from his arms.


    The historical text is toorge to be printed on a single piece of paper, so it can only be processed in batches.


    After taking them all out, Junhe deliberately put them in their original appearance.


    Looking at the dense content on it, and the words that he didn''t recognize at all, Chang Nuo stood up and looked at the content.


    "System, scan text and trante..."


    Chang Nuo directly shouted to the system in his mind.


    As soon as he finished speaking, the system prompt suddenly appeared, "Ding..., the scan ispleted, and the interpretation requires 10 million beli! Do you want to pay for the trantion?"


    "Grass!!!!"


    Chang Nuo couldn''t help but started scolding him. How could he still ask for money in such a situation?


    "Pay~"


    In the end, Chang Nuo had no choice but to confirm silently.


    "Payment sessful, trantion sessful!"


    Chang Nuo ignored the system prompts and looked at the tranted content. It indeed contained the contents of the ancient weapon Pluto.


    What has been recorded from the beginning is not only the origin and manufacture of ancient weapons, but also their power, and more importantly, the location recordedter.


    This thing can''t be more detailed. Chang Nuo clenched his fists when he saw it.


    "Your Majesty, we encountered an unexpected situation today. The sand crocodile Crocodile also appeared in the underground pce. His subordinates escaped after seriously injuring him. They only caught a woman who seemed to be able to interpret the content on it!"


    Seeing that Chang Nuo had been staring at these things for a long time, Junhe said directly.


    "Really? Where is he now?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "There are people watching on the Abby now," Junhe said.


    "You did a great job this time!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "But Your Majesty, my subordinates were not able to destroy the historical text. That thing is too hard. Even if I use all my strength, I can''t get even the slightest scratch on it!"


    "It''s normal, otherwise this thing wouldn''t have existed for thousands of years!"


    Chang Nuo didn''t mind because of this matter. After all, if the historical text could be destroyed, it would be gone eight hundred years ago.


    "Your Majesty, this thing...?"


    "It doesn''t matter, now you have done a very good thing. Currently, there is only one person in the world who can interpret this thing, and she is the woman you caught. Let''s go over and have a lookter.


    Your mission has beenpleted. As for the rest, there is no need to worry about it for the time being. "


    Chang Nuo was talking when he suddenly felt the movement outside, so he said calmly, "Someone ising. You go back first. I will go to the ship to take a look after the problem here is solved."


    "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    As soon as Jun He''s voice fell, the door of the room was pushed open directly. With the help of the push, Jun He disappeared into the room.


    The person who walked in was Weiwei. As soon as she came in, she could not wait to look at other ces in the room.


    "I clearly heard a sound in your room just now? Why is there no one there?" Weiwei asked curiously.


    "How did youe?"


    Chang Nuo said while still cleaning up the historical text rubbings spread on the ground.


    "Why can''t Ie? This is my home. Is there any ce I can''t go to?"


    Weiwei opened her mouth and sat down on the sofa.


    " stand up����"


    Chang Nuo scolded her directly, because at this time, sitting under Weiwei''s butt, there was something that Chang Nuo had ced there.


    Facing such a little girl, even if Chang Nuo didn''t want to say anything, he couldn''t help it at this moment.


    This was also the first time in the past few days that Chang Nuo showed such an expression. He was obviously angry with the inexperienced little girl in front of him.


    But Weiwei didn''t seem to care at all. After getting up, she looked at the historical text rubbings that Chang Nuo had packed away, and wanted to grab it directly to see what it was.


    But before she could touch them, Chang Nuo angrily shook the rubbings in his hand. In an instant, all the rubbings turned into powder.

 Chapter 72 Changnuo’s anger

    <h4>Chapter 72 Changnuo��s anger</h4>


    This time, Weiwei was really frightened.


    "Although this is your basta pce and your ce is right, the moment I move in, I have the temporary rights here.


    With your unscrupulous behavior, could it be that you want the Kingdom of Tru to start a war with you, basta? "


    Chang Nuo was extremely angry at the moment and said it directly and coldly.


    His eyes were filled with murderous intent, and he really couldn''t ept this little girl''s behavior.


    However, at this moment, Weiwei was so frightened by Chang Nuo that she was at a loss, with tears welling up in her eyes.


    "Why are you so fierce?"


    Weiwei said aggrievedly.


    "Sorry, His Majesty King Tru, Princess Weiwei is not sensible, I hope you can forgive me!"


    As soon as Weiwei finished speaking, a figure slowly appeared behind her and said respectfully to Chang Nuo.


    The man who suddenly appeared was a man in his forties or fifties. Changnuo could confirm that at least he had not seen him before. Even when he appeared, he did not sense his figure at all!


    Although it has been guessed for a long time that the Kingdom of basta is not as simple as imagined, at least it has been confirmed at this moment!


    "I, Genji Nagano, as the king of the Kingdom of Toru, have my own way of acting. I hope basta will not do anything to disappoint me again in the future."


    Chang Nuo made it obvious that he didn''t want this situation to happen again.


    Not to mention Princess Weiwei, even King Kobra would not dare to enter his room so casually.


    The middle-aged man standing opposite Chang Nuo lowered his head from beginning to end, expressing his respect.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, the middle-aged man bent down again and said with an apologetic tone, "I, the country of basta, promise you that a simr situation will not happen again!"


    At this moment, Weiwei was already crying. She had no idea what was going on.


    Changnuo''s face was cold but he didn''t say anything else, which was thest trace of face left to basta.


    "Let''s go, Princess Weiwei."


    The middle-aged man looked at Weiwei in a calm voice and said.


    He didn''t feel that King Tru did anything wrong. Since the royal pce of basta had allowed King Tru to live in this room for a short period of time, everything in the room belonged to him during this period. They were in charge of management, and their own princess entered the room directly without permission, and there was no respect at all in terms of words or behavior.


    Chang Nuo didn''t feel that he was overdoing it by arguing with a child. As the king of a country, he was on an equal footing with the king of their country, so he naturally needed to have his own majestic existence.


    After the middle-aged man left the room with Princess Weiwei, all the respectful expression on his face disappeared, and the rest began to show doubts.


    "Princess Weiwei, you did something wrong this time. I hope you can remember this lesson and don''t let your country fall into war. Your father has told you before that your words and deeds at this time, But they all represent your country."


    The middle-aged man said calmly and seriously, staring sharply at the little girl in front of him.


    "Uncle Mengkegu, why do you think he is hurting me? Why should he be hurting me?" Weiwei said with tears.


    "That''s because others have this strength, but our basta country does not!"


    The middle-aged man named Meng Kegu said.


    "What strength?"


    Weiwei stopped crying and looked at the middle-aged man curiously, as if he had no idea about this kind of thing.


    "Don''t worry about these things. Now you should go back quickly and stay in the house to reflect. I hope you can change your personality in the future and don''t let something like today happen again." Mengkogu said.


    After saying that, Mengkegu disappeared from Weiwei''s side in an instant. This time he just came to see what this little girl was going to do. But unexpectedly, he discovered an incredible scene.


    The King of Tru Country turned out to be a secretive young man. If it weren''t for the other party''s anger, he really wouldn''t have been able to find out about all this.


    When Mengkogu appeared again, he was already outside the door where Kobra was. After thinking about it, he slowly walked forward and knocked on the door of the room.


    "Which one?"


    Kobra''s voice came from the room. Even though he asked, the door was opened directly next.


    "Mengkogu! Why did youe here today?" Kobra said unexpectedly with a smile on his face.


    Mengkogu is currently the armymander of the basta country, and he is almost the most powerful person in the entire basta country.


    But this kind of person rarely stays in the royal city in normal times, and more often than not, no one knows where he will be at all.


    "I just suddenly wanted toe back and see you. I just happened toe over to catch up with you."


    Mengkegu also said with a smile.


    "Come in quickly, we haven''t seen each other for a long time, we really should have a good chat."


    Kobra said as he walked towards the room, then turned his head and looked again and said, "Where have you been during this time?"


    "Yudi, I went to Yudi to take a look around. When I first came back, I heard that the King of Tru Country in the South China Sea came to visit us, so I was curious and went to take a look. Unexpectedly, I met Weiwei there. !��


    When Mengkogu said these words, there was no smile on his face, but a serious look on his face instead.


    Cobra, who had just sat down, looked at the other person''s expression, as if he felt something was wrong, so he calmly asked, "Did you notice anything wrong?"


    "Yes, it seems that little girl Weiwei needs some good discipline. If I hadn''t gone over today, I don''t know what would have happened?" Mengkegu said.


    "what happened?"


    When Cobra heard that she was a daughter, his face immediately lost control and he began to ask questions.


    He was just a daughter, and he was ready to give everything to her. Of course, he also knew what kind of character his daughter was, but when he heard these words, he was still suddenly shocked.


    "I haven''t figured out the specific situation. It''s just that she went to the ce where King Tru lived privately, and said what she said without thinking at all. This made the other party very angry, and she even proposed to do it again. Once this happens, we will start a war directly."


    Mengkogu sat down directly as he spoke, facing Kobra and speaking naturally.

 Chapter 73 Hidden Strength

    <h4>Chapter 73 Hidden Strength</h4>


    After all, Weiwei is someone else''s daughter and the princess of the entire basta. No matter what, it is not her turn to manage it.


    Kobra frowned and thought for a moment, then took a deep breath and let it out suddenly, saying with a slightly helpless tone, "I haven''t properly disciplined this little girl for so many years. I really don''t know how she developed such a character. .��


    Mengkogu smiled, and then his expression immediately became serious. He looked at Kobra and asked again, "What do you think about King Natru?"


    "He is very smart and capable. He is able to transform his country from poverty to such a development in just two or three years. He is an extraordinary young man." Cobra didn''t understand. What does it mean, but still say it directly.


    "I''m not talking about his governance, but other aspects. What do you think?"


    "Other aspects??" Cobra asked directly, thought for a moment, and said, "We don''t have much contact with other aspects, but he is still very good in conversation. He is polite and polite. At his age, Even as a king, I can��t do this.��


    "It seems that you still underestimated the other person. Don''t say that you can''t reach his level at this age. Even now, I''m afraid you can''t reach his level." Mengkogu said.


    "What do you mean?"


    Cobra waspletely confused at this moment. He didn''t understand what Mengkogu meant?


    "I''m not referring to his governance, nor his etiquette, but this king is very hidden,pletely beyond our imagination. His strength should be stronger than mine, or even... Even the people in their country are unimaginably powerful.


    I just happened to go over and saw a scene. Originally, King Tru was supposed to meet their king''s guard captain in the room. The other party was able to leave quietly, and the other party''s strength, even I almost didn''t notice, but the king inside It''s even too strong.


    If I hadn''t been irritated by Weiwei, I probably wouldn''t have been able to tell that the other party had such great strength. "


    Mengkogu thought and said, after all, he had seen the scene just now. As the most powerful person in basta, he sometimes had to admit that the other party was indeed much moreplicated than he imagined.


    Cobra suddenly fell into deep thought, and his expression was not as natural as before.


    "If what you say is true, then what is King Tru hiding?" Kobra asked cautiously.


    "On this point, you need to explore it carefully, and I can''t participate."


    Mengkegu said, picked up the fruit on the table and started eating.


    Even though Cobra saw this scene, he didn''t say anything. The two had been friends since childhood, and if there was no Mongolia in this country, it might have be something else now.


    "Mengkogu, even if King Tru has some purpose, we can only continue this time. After all, what he proposed has an important impact on our country. "


    Cobra said with some embarrassment.


    Now, even if he knows that King Tru is a vicious man, he can only think so. After all, this cooperation between the two countries can indeed greatly improve the current state of basta.


    This is an indisputable fact. In the past two days, all the princes and ministers of basta have been doing calctions, and the final decision is to rmend full cooperation with the Kingdom of Tru.


    Although Meng Kegu had no contact with these matters, how could he not know the content of the negotiations between them.


    "The King of Tru Kingdom is quite a good person, but we are just guessing here. So what if the other party is very powerful? At least in terms of personality,pared to the kings of other countries, he is already I don��t know how much better it is.��


    Mengkogu was just telling the truth. If it were another king encountering Weiwei''s situation again, he would probably have pped him in the face.


    Therefore, Chang Nuo is already considered to be the kind of person who tries his best to exercise restraint.


    "Forget it, I''ll go over and apologize in personter!" Kobra said helplessly.


    "You don''t n to leave soon after youe back this time, right?" Kobra looked at Mengkogu again and asked.


    "Let''s take a look. Now that the New World has been divided by the Four Emperors, the first half of our great route may not be as quiet as imagined. For this reason, I think you should prepare in advance. "Meng Kegu said.


    "Yes! We have already guessed this ending, but what can we do?"


    Looking at Cobra''s appearance, Mengkogu really didn''t know what to say.


    ������������


    While they were chatting, Chang Nuo had already used space jump to leave the pce.


    Although he has left now, there are two members of the King''s Guard guarding the door, prohibiting anyone from entering.


    After all, his current departure was a secret action, and he didn''t want anyone to know where he was going.


    The Abili is now docked quietly at the Albana Port. There are not many ships docked side by side. Even the port where it is docked is not very big. It is estimated that five or six Abili can park it. The port is fully upied.


    Back on the ship, others were rxing and working, but no one was prepared for the sudden return of His Majesty the King.


    As he slowly walked onto the Abby, he was instantly seen by the guard members guarding the ship.


    "Your Majesty the King..."


    Several people shouted respectfully.


    "Junhe shouldn''t be back yet, right?" Changnuo asked with a smile.


    "Jun and the captain haven''te back yet. I wonder if His Majesty has anything to do with the captain. Let''s contact him directly!"


    "No need, where is the woman he brought back?" Chang Nuo asked.


    It''s normal that Junhe hasn''t returned here yet. After all, the guy just came out of the pce for a few minutes, and he just followed him and left shortly after. But for a person who uses space to jump and run with two legs, I don''t know how big the difference is.


    After hearing what Chang Nuo said, the two escort members hurriedly gave guidance and said, "Your Majesty, the people brought back by Jun and the captain are in the room in front."


    The Abri is a two-story ship, so ording to the guard''s guidance, Chang Nuo can clearly find out which room he is referring to?

 Chapter 74 I know everything

    <h4>Chapter 74 I know everything</h4>


    Looking in the direction of the room, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and walked directly towards the room without saying anything more to the guard.


    When the two guards saw this situation, they did not open their mouths. Instead, they stayed in their positions and continued to observe the surrounding situation.


    Standing at the door of this room, Chang Nuo paused for a moment, and then knocked on the door politely.


    After waiting for a while, there was still no movement in the room. At this time, he slowly opened the door.


    Whates into view in the room is just a bed without any decoration. On the table towards the entrance, there is aplete lunch box, but there is nothing missing in it.


    Robin was still staying in the corner at this moment, maintaining his movements for so long, just to find a better sense of security.


    Chang Nuo walked in slowly and saw Robin squatting in the corner. He didn''t say anything immediately. Instead, he opened the door directly to prevent the other party from mistaking it for other bad things.


    While opening the door, Chang Nuo began to exin, "Nicole Robin was born in O''Hara, West Sea. He is known as the son of the devil. He was wanted by the Navy at the age of eight and has a bounty of 83 million Baileys. He is also the current The only person in the world who understands the true text of history."


    After Robin, who was squatting in the corner, heard what the other party said, the fear in her eyes became more and more obvious. After all, when she first came here, she thought no one knew her, but now, the other party has investigated all her identities. Clearly, when he no longer understood the specific situation, all Robin had was fear.


    "Don''t wonder how I know this, and I''m not even remotely interested in your bounty, nor in you or myself. It''s just that you know too much about some things, so you''re here! "


    Chang Nuo turned around, took two steps in Robin''s direction, then sat directly on the chair in the room, looked at the other person and said.


    "What exactly do you want to do?"


    Robin asked shakily.


    "You must have deciphered the historical text in the basta cemetery, right?"


    Chang Nuo asked calmly and curiously.


    "Historical text? Is it possible that you arrested me because of this incident?"


    "Maybe it is, maybe it is not, but I don''t want the things recorded above to be spread. The ancient weapon Pluto, I already knew where he was a few years ago, but what can I do? Do you know why I have to Coming to basta?


    My initial purpose was just to destroy that piece of historical text, but in the end I discovered that the historical text is harder than we imagined.


    But thinking about it from another perspective, since the historical text cannot be destroyed, then wouldn��t it be enough to destroy a person who understands the historical text? You say so, Robin! "


    Chang Nuo''s calm words sounded like a bolt from the blue to Robin''s ears.


    The other party is different from those pirates. The purpose of catching him is just to exchange for the bounty, but their purpose is very clear, just to kill him.


    Thinking of this, Robin couldn''t help but start sobbing, and a feeling of fear and powerlessness instantly filled his body.


    "Who are you?"


    Robin still mustered up the courage to ask. From his clothes, Robin could tell that the man sitting in front of him was definitely not simple. After all, he was the only one in the room from morning to now.


    Except for Jasmine who came twice, the rest of the people just stood guard at the door. He was the only one who entered the room and talked to himself.


    "Me! I am the king of the Tru Kingdom, and the ce recorded in the historical text is within my country." Changnuo said with a smile.


    From the outside, Chang Nuo gave people the impression that he was a gentle and easy-to-get-together kind of person who could make the other person put down their guard. But now Robin didn''t feel this way at all in his heart.


    "Why, why did I do nothing and so many people wanted to kill me? What did I do wrong?"


    Robin stood up suddenly, looked at Chang Nuo sitting in front of him, and roaredpletely.


    "You know, sometimes you are not guilty at all, but what you know has made it the starting point of crime. O''Hara is like this, and you are like this too. There are too many people in this world who don''t want to Let the secret be made public, but you insist on studying the contents of the historical text. Even if you know these things, what can you do?


    What can we do if we thoroughly study the nk 100 years of history?


    In this world, there is only one more important thing, and that is strength. As long as you wait until you are strong and fear no one, no matter what you do, no one will say that weakness is the original sin.


    The Kingdom of Toru understands the truth very well, which is why I will choose to destroy the historical text at all costs.


    If the news of the existence of the ancient weapon Pluto is known to the navy or the world government, even if it is known to the pirates, can you imagine what kind of disaster will happen to our Kingdom of Tru?


    O''Hara has learned a lesson from the past, and there is no way I would let my kingdom face it again. "


    Chang Nuo''s expression was also full of gloom, but he still said calmly.


    The guard standing outside did not hear a single word. After Changnuo entered the room, he had already used space enchantment to block all sounds and perceptions.


    "Why do you know about O''Hara? That''s not what you should be..."


    "You don''t mean that it should be blocked by the navy. No one in the world should know about it? Why do I know so clearly?


    To tell you the truth, I know a lot more than you think, including how you survived. I know this.


    What happened in O''Hara didn''t just happen to you. In the same year, our Kingdom of Tru was also staged a massacre by the navy that was no less than that of your O''Hara, which is the Batl Ind you see.


    Just because the wife of a pirate king was there, more than 2,500 pregnant women on the entire ind were ughtered. So what is the final reason? It is because we are weak, have no strength and no status, so we face such a choice.


    What you think you see is just what you see. What you can''t see, the darkness and filth behind it, is far more serious than you think. "


    Chang Nuo said, his whole person was still extremely calm, but he was still very angry inside. He was angry not only about this world, but more importantly about the rules of this world.

 Chapter 75 O’Hara’s Secret

    <h4>Chapter 75 O��Hara��s Secret</h4>


    Chang Nuo calmly clenched his fists, but he didn''t know which direction to use his strength, so he could only bury all his resentment in his heart.


    Robin can be regarded as a person with the same problem. The destruction of O''Hara and the massacre on Batl Ind are just a hint of this dark world.


    Seeing Chang Nuo''s appearance, I don''t know why. Robin didn''t seem to have the initial fear in her heart. She slowly sat on the edge of the bed, suddenly feeling some sympathy for the king of the country sitting opposite.


    "Although your country has suffered the same treatment, at least you still exist. You have made this country countless times better than before. But what about O''Hara? He has beenpletely lost in history. , who still remembers this ce now?"


    Robin whined.


    "So this is what I want to do. When I gain a certain level of strength in the future, I will definitely rewrite the rules of this world. At least I will not let the rich gain power, the powerful gain power, and the powerful Destroy all sentient beings." Chang Nuo said domineeringly.


    As he spoke, the domineering aura on his body unconsciously radiated out, and everyone on the ship staggered. Most of them fell unconscious in just an instant, except for the king''s guards. Now, I am still trying hard to stay awake.


    This is the only way that can prate the space barrier. At this time, Junhe also happened to rush back to the ship, and he could already feel such a huge momentum as soon as he came back.


    Bawang said that this was the first time Junhe had experienced the pressure of domineering.


    It''s not that he didn''t know what happened, but he was shocked that His Majesty the King could actually use such a huge power of Overlord Color?


    "Seal the surrounding area and no one cane near!"


    Junhe immediately shouted to all the members of the King''s Guard.


    The others didn''t need to say anything, they already felt the seriousness of the situation and immediately began to disperse around, not just on this ship.


    Jun and I stood guard outside the room where they were, fearing that this matter would spread.


    Just look at the four emperors of the New World today to know how big a sensation the Overlord''s Haki can cause.


    The World Government and the Navy will never tolerate the appearance of such a powerful person. If the domineering domineering spirit of one in a million people appears in the person of His Majesty the King, then as a group of subordinates, they should naturally protect them with their own lives. .


    The two people in the room looked at each other, and they could see angry expressions in each other''s eyes. After all, what they had experienced was almost the same.


    "Will you kill me?"


    Robin asked suddenly. This was a topic he was very concerned about now, but from what Chang Nuo said just now, he felt the same anger towards the navy, which inexplicably brought him closer to each other.


    "Don''t wander around from now on. I will let them take you to the Tru Kingdom. Live there well from now on. Don''t think about leaving. Otherwise, for the sake of the country''s security, I will do whatever it takes and I will really kill you." !��


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes, sighed and then said calmly.


    After getting this answer, Robin finally breathed a sigh of relief. At least this time, he didn''t have to worry about the end of his life.


    Although they had never been to Tru Country, she had read about some of the developments there. If they really lived there, at least they would no longer have to worry about the feeling of living a wandering life.


    After a moment of silence, Robin suddenly smiled and said, "Okay!"


    "After you go to Toru Kingdom, study your Devil Fruit abilities. Don''t worry about how much impact it will have there. You can already be a doctor at the age of eight. If you find the past boring, you can be responsible for education in the future!"


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and made arrangements.


    Robin is a genius that O''Hara rarely sees in a century. At the age of only eight, he has already mastered all O''Hara''s knowledge. That ce has always been famous for literature, and it can be regarded as a cultural holy ce in the entire pirate world.


    "Aren''t you worried that I, a pirate, will lead the people of your country into mischief?"


    "What about pirates? The real worry in this world is never pirates. Take a good rest and don''t think too much during this time. Don''t show your face when you stay here, let alone cause us any trouble. .��


    Chang Nuo said in a calm voice.


    "Can I ask you something?" Robin suddenly said.


    "Just tell me what you want to ask!"


    "I want to go back to O''Hara. Is that possible?"


    "reason?"


    ��There are still many secrets there that are impossible to discover, and I want to take those things away with me.


    I used to be a pirate and wander the sea, but it seems that there is no need for it now, right? "


    After listening to what Robin said, Chang Nuo smiled slightly. He didn''t refuse, but he didn''t express his agreement clearly either.


    Robin himself probably doesn''t know why he has always been wary of everyone, but he can''t be wary in front of Chang Nuo. Not only because of the other person''s appearance, but also because he looks very quiet. It feels like it doesn''t make people wary at all.


    "Let''s wait and see! At least we can stabilize first. This time we are going to Marigio to attend the ceremony to join the world government. July is the world government meeting. At least during this period, there will be no time for anyone to apany us. You go over there.


    However, after July, we still have our own ns and ns, so you should go back to the Tru Kingdom directly. After all the previous things are settled, I will let someone take you there with me. "


    Chang Nuo said, after all, taking her to O''Hara was something that could be done easily, but at this moment there was really no way to do it.


    Although O''Hara has been destroyed for more than ten years, pirates and navy still go to the ind from time to time, constantly searching for all information about O''Hara.


    But despite searching over and over again, they didn''t get anything valuable on such arge ind.


    Chang Nuo believed what Robin said. The things that O''Hara can exist are definitely rted to literature.


    However, what the entire Tru Kingdomcks most now is not only strength, but also knowledge rted to literature.


    Although Changnuo can purchase these things through the system space. The key is that someone needs to answer it.


    After being poor for so many years, few people have had any exposure to cultural knowledge. There is still a long way to go in the future, but at least the dawn is in front of us.

 Chapter 76 Give a place to stay

    <h4>Chapter 76 Give a ce to stay</h4>


    The entire ship is now on alert outside, but the atmosphere inside the ship has rxed a lot.


    At least Robin wasn''t as cautious and fearful as he was at first, but he was still a little uneasy.


    She sat on the edge of the bed and looked at Chang Nuo face to face. As a king, not to mention that the two of them were about the same age, Robin still had a good impression of him after spending such a short time together.


    "What kind of country is the Kingdom of Tru?"


    Robin asked suddenly with some anxiety.


    Changnuo smiled and said, "The Kingdom of Tru is a very ordinary and ordinary country. No matter how I exin it, it may not reach the level of reality. Besides, the entire Kingdom of Tru is in the midst of constant changes. , I don��t know exactly how far it has reached. When you arrive, you can observe it with your own eyes."


    "Aren''t you afraid that I will cause dissatisfaction with the World Government or the Navy after I go there?"


    Listening to Robin''s words, Chang Nuo said nonchntly, "What''s the harm in being discovered?"


    "I am an ominous person. It seems that I can be discovered by others no matter where I go..."


    Robin began to talk about her past,pletely letting go of her guard against Chang Nuo. This was perhaps the most rxed and secure time she had felt in the ten years she had been on the run.


    The current Robin has no quality at all in terms of clothing or hairstyle. His skin has been tanned during the period of time he spent in basta. It can be said that the whole person has no sense of beauty at all.


    Chang Nuo listened patiently to her recounting her past, and every scene of the past waspletely retold.


    Robin shed tears. This was due to her unwillingness to live in the past, and more importantly, she felt helpless and lonely living alone.


    Looking at Robin''s appearance, Chang Nuo didn''t make any expression or attitude. After the other party spoke for nearly ten minutes, he finally started to stop talking about his past.


    At this time, Chang Nuo just saidfortingly, "The past is in the past. There is no need to hold on to it anymore. A new chapter can be opened in the future."


    After saying that, Chang Nuo waved his hand, and the space barrier that enveloped the room disappeared instantly.


    Even so, Robin, who was sitting on the bed, didn''t feel anything unusual. However, when the space barrier was removed, Junhe, who was standing outside the door, sensed everything that happened in the room in an instant.


    He was very aware of His Majesty the King''s methods, so he didn''t react much. He just nced in the direction where they were and then continued to guard his position.


    "Junhe,e in!"


    Chang Nuo sat in the room and shouted outside.


    "His Majesty����"


    When he walked to the door, Junhe stood outside and shouted respectfully.


    "Find five members of the King''s Guard and send her to the Kingdom of Tru." Changnuo said.


    Junhe was stunned for a moment when he heard this, and then looked up at Robin who was sitting on the bed looking at him. He hesitated for only a moment and immediately replied, "Yes, Your Majesty."


    "The other thing is to make arrangements. We will start setting off tomorrow morning and we will not stay in basta." Changnuo said again.


    "Should we notify other people in the country toe to basta for docking?" Junhe asked.


    "No need for now. Our Kingdom of Tru is not in such a hurry yet. Let''s wait for a while, at least wait until we return from Mariejoia to discuss it." Changnuo said.


    "Okay, Your Majesty, I will take care of it immediately!" Junhe said.


    They originally nned to stay in basta for a while, but they didn''t expect that the matter would be solved so easily. Now there is no need to stay here any longer.


    After all, the living experience in this ce is not as good as expected. Not to mention that the environment here is rtively hot. More importantly, Changnuo feels very ufortable living here.


    "Just stay here and don''t run anywhere! Wait for our King''s Guard members to send you back." Chang Nuo turned to Robin and said.


    "I see!"


    As soon as Robin finished speaking, Chang Nuo disappeared from his seat in an instant, as if he had never appeared before.


    Robin''s eyes were shocked for a moment, but she turned to look at Junhe who had brought her over. He didn''t seem to be surprised or shocked at all. It was obviously not the first time this happened!


    "He is a devil fruit..."


    "Don''t know what you shouldn''t know. Although I don''t know what His Majesty the King told you, although the Tru Kingdom is rtively cheerful, there are some bottom lines that must not be touched. What we hate most are betrayers!" Junhe He looked at Robin and said with a cold voice.


    He doesn''t have a good impression of this woman yet. Not to mention that she was a pirate before. Junhe has already started to be wary of this woman since she was able to know the text of history and threaten his country.


    "I just want a ce to live, and I don''t have too many other ideas!"


    "I hope so, stay here well, someone will escort you directly to the Tru Kingdom at night." Junhe said.


    Then he turned around and left without any facial expression.


    Robin didn''t mind the other party''s attitude. Anyway,pared to those he had interacted with before, Junhe already had a better attitude.


    Thinking about the sadness he had experienced in the past ten years, Robin, who was sitting on the bed, showed a rare smile.


    Changnuo, who returned to the basta Pce, sorted out his emotions. Sitting on the sofa, he picked up the previous newspaper again and looked at the photos of the four emperors on it. Then he put it on the table in front of him and pointed at it with his fingers. There was constant beating on it.


    He thought for a while, but at this time, the guard standing outside the door gently knocked on the door where he was.


    "What''s up?"


    The voice came from the room. The guard outside did not open the door, but said directly through the door, "Your Majesty, King Kobra of basta sent someone to invite you over!"


    "I know, just a moment."


    Chang Nuo said, then slowly stood up and tidied his clothes.


    Even if Kobra doesn''te to look for him, Changnuo will choose to find him. After all, he will leave soon, and business is more important.


    Before leaving, I must ask Cobra about the eternal record pointer that directly reaches Mariejoia. If there is no such thing, there is no telling how long it will take to reach that ce.

 Chapter 77 Farewell

    <h4>Chapter 77 Farewell</h4>


    After staying for only a few minutes, Chang Nuo opened the door to the room and saw the servant sent by Kobra standing at the door.


    "Hello King Tru, our Majesty the King invites you to the hall."


    The servant said respectfully after seeing Chang Nuo.


    "No problem, just lead the way!" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    Hearing this, the servant smiled respectfully, and then began to walk in front quickly to lead the way for Chang Nuo.


    Although I have been here for two days and visited the basta Pce once, the rules are still here after all.


    As the king of the Tru Kingdom, Changnuo represents his country in every word and deed. Even if he knows how to take these routes, and even if they are not far away, he must need the servants of the Kingdom of basta to follow him, in case something happens. Some bad things, if no one else is around, it will be really hard to exin.


    When Chang Nuo followed the servant to the door of the basta Pce, the servant said respectfully, "His Majesty King Tru, His Majesty is already waiting inside. Pleasee inside..."


    Chang Nuo didn''t even look at the other party, and then began to walk towards the pce hall.


    As soon as he entered the door, Kobra saw Chang Nuo arriving and immediately stood up from the throne to greet him.


    There were only three people in the hall, one was Cobra and the other was Princess Vivi. As for the remaining person, he was the basta armymander Mengkogu.


    "King Changnuo, you are here. I wonder if it will disturb your rest?"


    Kobra stood up to greet him and said with a smile.


    Mengkegu did not continue to sit there, and stood up to greet him with a smile.


    Only Princess Weiwei, a child, continued to sit in her original position, almost ignoring Chang Nuo''s arrival.


    "King Kobra, look at what you are saying now. There is nothing to disturb you. Even if you don''t send someone to find me today, I will need toe to you next!"


    Chang Nuo said with the same smile.


    "Looking for me?? Is there something wrong?" Kobra asked quickly.


    "It''s just some small things, but I don''t know why King Kobra came to me for this?"


    Seeing the smile on Chang Nuo''s face, Cobra suddenly felt a little embarrassed, but he still hurriedly smiled and said, "King Chang Nuo, please take your seat first..."


    Following Kobra''s guidance, Changnuo was not polite and sat opposite Mengkogu.


    After calming down some of his emotions, the smile on Cobra''s face disappeared. What remained was some embarrassment and embarrassment. Looking at Chang Nuo sitting there, Cobra bowed directly and said apologetically, " King Changnuo, I apologize to you for Weiwei��s recklessness at noon, and I hope you can forgive me!��


    Seeing this scene, Chang Nuo also quickly stood up and helped Kobra, and said with a smile on his face, "Is this what you are talking about? I have almost forgotten it, so don''t pay too much attention to it. Besides, my tone at the time was not It��s not very good, and I hope Princess Weiwei can forgive me!��


    When Chang Nuo finished speaking, he looked directly at Weiwei who was sitting on top.


    At this time, Weiwei didn''t seem to forgive Chang Nuo, and turned her face away from him angrily.


    "King Changnuo, there is no need to be like this. This matter is all Weiwei''s fault, but I promise that this kind of thing will never happen again!" Kobra said swornly.


    If Chang Nuo spoke out his inner thoughts at this moment, he would probably be able to spit on Kobra''s face.


    Chang Nuo stood there and thought to himself, "Your daughter is like that. If she is not properly trained, she may be something like that in the future!"


    But he would not say these words at all and continued with a smile, "King Kobra''s words are too serious. Princess Weiwei is better. At least she is cute and has character. She just needs to write a lot of things." Strengthen your way of conducting yourself in the world.��


    "I will definitely do this. The main reason I invite you here this time is to apologize to you in person. I hope you can forgive Weiwei for her mistake." Cobra said again.


    "Don''t worry, I don''t care about these things at all."


    "King Changnuo, what happened this time is indeed our basta country''sx supervision of Princess Weiwei. I hope this incident will not affect the emotions and cooperation between our two countries."


    Mengkegu stood up and said with a smile.


    Chang Nuo was quite curious about this guy, and he had always been thinking before, why when he was at the door and came in, he didn''t sense the other person''s existence with his own sight and appearance?


    "I wonder who this is...?"


    Changnuo looked at Kobra with a puzzled look. Although he had met him once, he didn''t know who Mongkogu was.


    "Haha..., I''m sorry, I forgot to introduce King Changnuo. This is Mengkogu, themander of our basta national army, and the most powerful one in our current basta country." Cobra He quickly said with a smile.


    "It turns out he is the armymander. I didn''t recognize him when we met before. I hope you don''t mind!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "It should be my fault that I didn''t introduce myself properly when we first met. I hope King Tru doesn''t mind." Mengkogu said.


    "Sit...sit~, don''t stand here chatting all the time. Now that the previous misunderstandings have been resolved, it''s time to have a good chat. King Changnuo just said that he has something to ask me about. I wonder what the situation is?" Cobu said Ra said to both of them at the same time.


    After sitting down, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said, "What I n to tell you is to prepare for farewell. Let''s start setting off tomorrow morning. After all, there are many affairs in the country. The earlier we arrive at Mariejoia, the sooner we can get there." To resolve these matters, we also need to return home quickly to deal with some more important situations.


    Of course, regarding the issue with basta, we need to wait until we return to the country to discuss the operation and operation with the minister in detail. Only then can we send envoys to basta to negotiate more detailed business. "


    "Is King Changnuo so anxious? I''m still thinking about whether we can set off to Marijoa in a month or two. It just so happens that the World Conference will be held by then and King Changnuo can also participate!" Kobra He asked with some surprise on his face.


    "It''s not that I don''t want to. The main reason is that in such a big country, there is no one who can preside over affairs now. If we go back early and wait for the country to stabilize, then it shouldn''t be a problem toe out for a month or two."

 Chapter 78 Robin’s identity (two chapters in one)

    <h4>Chapter 78 Robin��s identity (two chapters in one)</h4>


    Chang Nuo was already refusing in words and out of words. It was already some time, and he had no interest in attending any world government meeting. This thing had no effect on him at all.


    And after reading the newspapers of the past few days, Chang Nuo had already guessed what the content of this world government meeting was discussed. It was just a bit of talk, and there was nothing worthy of further study and discussion.


    Cobra knew that he probably wouldn''t be able to stop Chang Nuo from going to Marigioa this time. Besides, he didn''t even think about stopping him.


    "King Changnuo, do you really not n to attend the World Government Conference? At least at that time you can get to know the kings of all the countries under the World Government, which will also facilitate the development of the so-called economic and trade you talk about." Kobra said .


    "There is no need for this now. The development of the Kingdom of Tru is currently progressing rtively quickly. There is no need tomunicate with them for the time being. Maybe we can have a good chat with them until the World Government Conference in the next four years." Changnuo said.


    "Well, although I don''t know what you think, let''s have a grand banquet tonight. It can be regarded as our practice for you. We look forward to the friendly cooperation between our two countries." Kobra said with a smile.


    "Regarding this, when I return to the country, I will naturally arrange this matter as soon as possible to promote economic and trade exchanges andmunication between our two countries." Changnuo said with the same smile.


    Cobra seemed to have already realized that Chang Nuo was about to leave. He didn''t hold back too much. He just took a box from a table next to the throne, then stood up and walked to Chang Nuo and handed it to him.


    "This is the eternal record pointer leading to Mariejoia. After a good banquet tonight, I don''t know when the next time we will meet is." Cobra said with some reluctance.


    "As long as there is fate, we will be able to meet sooner orter. There is no need to worry about this kind of thing. In the future, the exchanges between our two countries will definitely be closer, and there will definitely be frequent opportunities to meet."


    Chang Nuo stood up, took the box, and said with a smile.


    He would not refuse such a good thing, Marie Joa''s eternal pointer. This thing is something that cannot be bought on the market at all, and it can be considered a rtively precious thing.


    Although this is the case, if you want to reach Mariejoia, you can just set off ording to the distance of the Grand Route with any record pointer, and you will almost reach there in the end.


    But with the eternal record pointer, it can at least save them an unknown amount of distance. If they follow the protagonist''s route in the future, it may take more than half a year to get there, at least half a month at most now.


    ��������


    the next day.


    Setting off early in the morning, Kobra got up early and personally delivered Chang Nuo to the gate of the pce.


    When leaving, many people came out to watch Albana, the royal city.


    Most people already know that the Kingdom of Tru will cooperate with their own country in the future, although they don��t know what aspects of cooperation will be? But some of them often read newspapers, and some of them still know about the country in the South China Sea.


    "King Kobra, just send it here. I will always have to walk the rest of the way alone!"


    Chang Nuo stood at the entrance of the pce, looking at Kobra and others who had already sent him out, and said with a smile.


    Today''s Chang Nuo ispletely different, wearing a handsome white suit and bow tie. If they didn''t know that he was a king, many people would think that he was apletely polite gentleman.


    Many people followed Kobra to send them out, and many princes and ministers had already participated. It was also an expression of Kobra''s emphasis on the cooperation between the two countries.


    "King Changnuo, I won''t say too much. Have a safe journey. If you pass by basta when youe back, we will have a good chat then." Kobra said with a smile.


    "Don''t worry, King Kobra, I will definitely do it."


    As Chang Nuo said, he saluted Kobra in a very gentlemanly manner, then turned around and walked to the white carriage that had been prepared.


    I have been in this country for four days now, which is already a fruitful experience for Changnuo.


    Thismunication with basta will definitely ensure a steady flow of money for the Kingdom of Tru in the future.


    But at least for now, this situation is not very obvious.


    "Junhe, Robin is sent away, right?"


    On the sailing ship, Chang Nuo asked while lying on the rocking chair on the deck.


    "Already gone, but I don''t understand why you want to keep that woman? She should be a danger to our country even if she exists for one day!" Junhe said with some confusion.


    "That woman will be of great use in the future, and the use she will keep will be great. The most important thing is her knowledge.


    If you don''t know something, this woman became O''Hara''s doctor when she was eight years old, an absolute wise man.


    For our country, we will not only develop force in the future, but also need knowledge. Do you understand this? "


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "O''Hara?? Is it the once famous ce of learning in the West Sea?"


    After Gogoya heard this, he came over curiously and looked at Chang Nuo and asked.


    "how do you know?"


    Chang Nuo was also a little curious. For someone of Gogoya''s age, he probably didn''t know that!


    "I have lived in Xihai for several years. Naturally, I have heard of this ce, but I have never visited it. Later, I heard that there was a natural disaster in that ce and no one survived!"


    Seeing Gogoya''s somewhat regretful look, Chang Nuo and the other two were really speechless.


    ��It is indeed the ce you are talking about, but O��Hara did not encounter a natural disaster, but a man-made disaster.


    The Navy''s Touching Demon-ying Order directly turned the entire O''Hara into a dead ce, and Nico Robin was the only one who survived. "


    "Son of the devil!!"


    Hearing what Chang Nuo said, Gogoya shouted in surprise again.


    "Is it necessary to be so surprised when you hear this name?" Junhe looked at Gogoya helplessly and said.


    "What do you know? When I was only eight years old, I was already wanted with a bounty of 83 million beli. This is the youngest person in the entire history, and the bounty is astonishingly high!" Gogoya said excitedly.


    "So what? The reward amount can tell everything?"


    "Junhe, don''t tell me. The amount of the bounty can really determine everything in many cases. Nico Robin''s knowledge, especially in the study of historical texts, is enough to worry the world government and the navy."


    Chang Nuo suddenly opened his mouth and said.


    "Your Majesty, ording to what you said, the woman I broughtst time was Nico Robin, the son of the devil?"


    Junhe suddenly realized that he had never worried about a pirate before, but after hearing it from His Majesty the King, he now felt that that woman was so extraordinary?


    Gogoya also looked at Changnuo expectantly, and the two of them looked more curious.


    "You are right that the woman is Robin. The woman you call the devil''s son has been offered a bounty of 83 million Baileys since she was eight years old. But so what? For me, I never care about these things. , instead of paying attention to this, why not think about how to deal with those Celestial Dragons after thinking about Mary Joa?"


    Chang Nuo leaned directly on the recliner and swayed leisurely as he spoke.


    "Dragon people, this is indeed a rtively big problem." Gogoya also said with one hand holding his chin.


    They are all very clear and understanding about Mary Joa. Who in this world doesn''t know the name Tianlong?


    "Gogoya, have you sent all the information to those Tianlong people who asked you to send people to investigate?"


    Chang Nuo asked calmly.


    "There is no specific information about other people yet. There is only information about the woman Verbona who was investigated before. The others have not been investigated for the time being. Besides, aren''t we mainly visiting her this time?" Gogoya asked.


    "What use can she be! Forget it, let''s wait until Mary Joaes to tell us the details."


    Chang Nuo didn''t care about these things. It didn''t matter whether the items he carried on the ship were given away or not. They were just for some form of expression.


    In the current holynd of Mariejoia, the ghost knows which Celestial Dragon has the final say. Anyway, there are almost thousands of Celestial Dragons. Changnuo doesn''t want to kowtow to so many people. This is a ce that damages his face.


    But if you go to Mariejoia, you will have to face these things sooner orter. The people living there are all those Celestial Dragons. You may not know how many people you need to meet if you turn your face.


    With the Eternal Record Pointer in hand, the road to Mariejoia is indeed much faster than expected. At least there is no need to worry about any detours in the middle. It leads directly to the other side in a straight line. The rest ispletely out of their consideration. .


    "Your Majesty, can I go to the Chambord Inds nearby? I heard that it is the most prosperous ce in the entire Grand Line!"


    Gogoya asked expectantly.


    "There''s nothing to see there. If you encounter a Celestial Dragon, you have to kneel down wherever you go. It''s really frustrating."


    Chang Nuo yawned and said nonchntly.


    "At that time, let Junhe apany me. After all, you need to enter Mariejoia, but we can''t enter that ce. I''m afraid it will be boring to wait for you outside. Instead of that, it is better to go to Shampoo. Circle.��


    "Gogoya, if you want to go, go and don''t drag me along!"


    As soon as Gogoya finished speaking, Junhe, who was sitting next to him, immediately raised objections.


    He didn''t want to follow this woman to visit the Chambord Inds. Junhe was not that curious.


    "Why are you so excited? Apanying me is giving you a chance. Aren''t you curious about what''s in the Chambord Inds? It''s called the most prosperous ce. Isn''t it nonsense?" Gogoya said again without giving up. .


    "It is indeed the most prosperous ce, but the same ce is also the most chaotic ce on the entire Grand Line. That ce is beyond your imagination. On the entire sea, the darkest and dirtiest ce is also the ce of Chambord.


    It''s just that we didn''t have much time this time, otherwise I really wanted to go to Fish-Man Ind and see what the beautiful mermaids there look like! "


    Chang Nuo leaned on the recliner and closed his eyes and began to imagine the state of Fish-Man Ind. It is estimated that every man would have such thoughts.


    "Your Majesty, where exactly is Fish-Man Ind? I''ve only heard of it, but no one has ever gone there ande back, let alone talked about this issue." Junhe asked.


    "The Fish-Man Ind starts from the Shampoo Land. He coats the ship from the Shampoo Land 10,000 meters underwater. As long as the navigator has outstanding abilities, he can almost reach the Fish-Man Ind under the sea.


    For those pirates, the only way to the new world is Fish-Man Ind. "


    Changnuo still said leisurely with his eyes closed.


    "Mishman Ind!! I''m also looking forward to it." Gogoya said.


    "So since there is a fish-man ind 10,000 meters underwater, doesn''t it mean that the legendary sky ind 10,000 meters above the sky should also exist?" Shunhe suddenly asked.


    "What you said is right. After we arrive in Mariejoia this time, the only ce we must pass on our way back is Sky Ind. No matter what happens next, Sky Ind will be our key ce next." After Changnuo heard the word Kongdao, his eyes suddenly opened, and then he sat up directly and looked at Junhe and said with a gloomy face.


    "Your Majesty, I wonder what you mean by this...?"


    "Junhe, didn''t you say that the country didn''t leave enough space for you as a training base? For the future security of the Tru Kingdom, I had already considered the safest ce in this world when you raised this question. And the ce where no one disturbs us is the empty ind. After we return, we will go and search for the empty ind.


    I think with our strength, we should have no problem controlling that ce. "


    As Chang Nuo said, he continued to lie down with his eyes closed, and leisurely began to rock the rocking chair again.


    It''s still a bit early to say this now. I have already made ns in my heart about the content.


    But in the next trip, it is so boring anyway, Changnuo has already nned tomunicate with Junhe about this matter, at least let him prepare in advance.


    There are not many things to do, and they are not asplicated as imagined, but no one can guess what will happen next, somunication in advance is particrly important.


    With the sea breeze blowing gently on my face, I felt the atmosphere on the sea. The endless horizon and the scorching sun above my head. Except for the seagulls flying past from time to time, there was no beautiful scenery on the sea.


    They could only sit on the deck and chat, which was the fastest way to kill time.

 Chapter 79 Kaido was seriously injured! (Two in one chapter)

    <h4>Chapter 79 Kaido was seriously injured! (Two in one chapter)</h4>


    Junhe sat there alone and thought. He had no idea about these things. Whether it was Fish-Man Ind or Sky Ind, these things just existed in legends to him.


    Gogoya sat aside. She didn''t understand what His Majesty the King meant, but she still asked, "Your Majesty, if you follow what you said, wouldn''t it be a big target for us to go to the empty ind?" ?��


    "The Sky Ind has always existed in legends, mainly because no one has been there for a long time. Now there are only two ways to the Sky Ind. One is through a sea area called Gaya Ind below the Sky Ind, where there is a sky. If the current catches up, it can take us there directly.


    The other way is to enter Sky Ind through Upside Down Mountain. However, this ce is almost something you can only encounter. Who knows when you will be able to get there?


    Therefore, the most convenient and fastest way for us is to go directly to Gaya and use the location of the ind above the sea current. "


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes and said it directly without thinking.


    Junhe''s questions coupled with all the previous inner thoughts, he finally asked directly with some curiosity, "Your Majesty, why do you know so much about the Grand Line, and you seem to be very clear about the New World?"


    "That''s right, Your Majesty!" Gogoya also started to ask doubtfully.


    It was Chang Nuo''s turn to be in an embarrassing situation. After all, like these two people, he had almost never left the Tru Kingdom, and every time he came out, one of the two people would definitely be brought with him.


    Chang Nuoy there and continued to close his eyes and roll his eyes out of inner embarrassment. After a while, he said, "I can go anywhere in the entire sea if I want to close my eyes. So if I want to understand, there is almost no difficulty." !��


    Gogoya was still confused, but Junhe waspletely different.


    He knew that His Majesty the King was a Devil Fruit with space abilities, so it wasn''t that strange to be able to jump through space.


    "Do you understand what His Majesty said?"


    Gogoya asked Junhe nkly.


    "Well, I understand, maybe you will understand it in the future."


    Shun Kazuya didn''t intend to tell anyone about this, but the admiration in his eyes was already evident.


    Changnuo also understood that he could only tell them in this way. It was impossible to tell them that he had the Eye of God and understand the entire process of the entire pirate world, right?


    This answer to the two people''s inquiries was considered impable.


    Devil Fruits with space-based abilities have almost infinite possibilities, but Changnuo has not yet reached the ultimate level of development capabilities of this Devil Fruit.


    The more advanced Devil Fruits you want to awaken, the difficulty is almost beyond everyone''s imagination.


    In the world of pirates, even the natural devil fruits can actually achieve the second stage of awakening. However, in the many years that this devil fruit has existed, the power of awakening from natural devil fruits seems to have never appeared.


    The Superman space devil fruit can be regarded as the top existence among the entire Superman series of devil fruits. If you want to awaken the power of the space devil fruit, at least with Chang Nuo''s current ability, it ispletely impossible to do it.


    "Junhe, I always feel that you two are hiding something from me?"


    Gogoya came close to Shunhe, her mouth almost touching his face and whispering.


    "What are you thinking about? How could we hide something from you? Don''t think too much and take a rest." Junhe quickly started to change the subject.


    "You two, stop muttering there. How far is it from your destination now?" Chang Nuo asked boredly.


    "I can''t tell right now that there are no small inds or the like in the surrounding area. It was estimated that it would take half a month to get there. Now it has only been four or five days of walking. There should be more than half of the distance left!" Gogoya said.


    "There is one ahead..."


    Chang Nuo was about to leisurely prepare to say that there was a small ind not far ahead, but suddenly, he directly sensed that there was something very dangerous on that small ind, and the degree of harm was far beyond their imagination.


    He stood up suddenly and quickly leaned on the edge of the fence. His eyes kept looking forward, at a small ind that could not be seen with the naked eye.


    "Gogoya, tell Barlow to turn and start sailing to the right to avoid the area ahead..."


    Changnuo suddenly shouted directly at Gogoya.


    Gogoya was stunned for a moment, but he immediately started to get up and follow Chang Nuo''s instructions.


    Junhe also quickly got up and climbed to the edge of the fence, and also used the color of knowledge to start sensing forward. However, his strength was not as good as Changnuo at all, and he could not sense anything about the ind above.


    "Your Majesty, what happened?"


    Junhe asked worriedly.


    "Kaido!!!" Changnuo said to himself, and then started to ask with some confusion, "Why is he in the first half of the Grand Line?"


    "Kaido?" Junhe also repeated.


    Seeing the alert expression on Chang Nuo''s face, Junhe immediately became alert.


    "It''s been discovered, Junhe, tell Barlow to set off the boat to the west. You don''t need to wait for me for the time being." Changnuo said with a frown.


    "Your Majesty, if you don''t want me to apany you, if you are here alone...!"


    "If I want to leave, no one in this world can stop me. Just follow the orders. Your most important task next is to protect the safety of this ship."


    Changnuo directly interrupted what Junhe was about to say, and then said with a slight smile.


    What Changnuo said was not wrong. With the spatial ability of the Devil Fruit, as long as he didn''t show off his strength, no one in this world could keep him.


    "Your Majesty, don''t worry, your subordinates will take good care of the people on board!" Junhe said seriously.


    "I hope it''s as you said!" Chang Nuo smiled.


    As soon as he finished speaking, a huge stone flew towards the Abby.


    The size of the stone was almost as big as his entire ship. Chang Nuo stood on the bow of the ship without any panic and waved his hand casually. A blue light curtain appeared in front of his body. The huge stone came and hit the light curtain. At that moment, it disappeared directly.


    But when the boulder appeared again, it had already deviated from the ship by about 500 meters, and then fell heavily into the water.


    The others didn''t know what happened, so they could only do what Chang Nuo ordered.


    In this way, it can be regarded as directly deviating from the route to Mariejoia, but there is nothing that can be done.


    After solving the problem with the boulder, Changnuo also disappeared on the ship.


    When he appeared on the ind, he saw this huge figure, which was indeed no different from what he had guessed.


    In front of him was an extremely tall and burly man with ck hair shawl, a pair of long dragon-like horns, a beard as long as a dragon''s beard on his mouth, and a dragon scale tattoo on his left arm. The upper body is naked, with an It also looks quite domineering.


    "Uuhahahaha... I really didn''t expect that an ant would dare to appear here?"


    Kaido''s voice sounded quite rough, and his powerful aura directly pressed on Chang Nuo.


    "Mr. Kaido, I don''t mean to offend you. I don''t know where I offended you. Please forgive me!"


    Changnuo directly made a gentleman''s salute, and then endured Kaido''s suppressed momentum.


    The entire ind is not particrly big, but Kaido is the only one on the ind. Either he is waiting for something, or there is something that others don''t know exists here.


    It''s just that Chang Nuo never imagined that the four emperors of the new world would actually appear in this ce?


    Chang Nuo raised his head and took a look. The scars on Kaido standing there were obviously new, and he seemed to have been seriously injured!


    "Boy, having the courage toe face to face with me, Kaido, is enough to gain my approval, but it is not enough to escape from death easily. I didn''t expect to meet you. I don''t want to expose this ce yet, so... Only by asking you to die can I feel more at ease."


    Kaido opened his eyes that looked bigger than a cow, and said to Chang Nuo with a stern look and a ferocious expression.


    As soon as he finished speaking, Kaido''s attack rushed directly towards him.


    With just one punch, the hilltop where Chang Nuo was originally located was instantly leveled to the ground.


    Such a powerful attack is really a bit unttering.


    Facing such a person, even Chang Nuo couldn''t help but frown.


    Although he possesses space system abilities and has improved hisbat experience in the past two years,pared with someone like the other party, he is obviously not even the slightest bit worse.


    Fortunately, Chang Nuo dodged rtively quickly, so there was nothing to talk about with someone who started fighting right away.


    But taking advantage of this opportunity, Changnuo also wanted to know how much he weighed. Seeing an opportunity, he quickly used his ability to jump in space and punched Kaido.


    But such an attack was instantly blocked by the opponent, and the two parties'' Haki directly shed. Kaido''s Haki was ck, while Changnuo''s Haki was blue.


    The thunder and lightning caused by the conflict between the overlord color and the domineering energy began to spread around the ind in an instant.


    The seawater around the ind has even been forced back by the momentum of the two people, and the shocked look in Kaido''s eyes at this moment was also expressed unabashedly.


    He didn''t expect that the little guy in front of him could possess a domineering aura that was unique among millions of people. The key was that he was still so strong!


    "Boy, I didn''t expect that your strength is quite good. It''s really surprising that someone like you can appear in the first half of the Grand Line!"


    Kaido showed a sinister smile, with the corners of his mouth raised slightly, but his expression looked even more frightening at this moment.


    "Mr. Kaido, I didn''t mean to offend. I didn''t know you were here, and I hope you can forgive me. For this reason, we are willing to offer a thousand jars of fine wine to express our apology."


    And after leaving here, he will never talk about meeting Mr. Kaido! "


    Chang Nuo''s eyes were wary, his fists clenched but he still said respectfully.


    Times make heroes. Changnuo understood this truth very well. In terms of strength, he was no match for Kaido.


    He can dy it for a while now, at least to ensure that the personnel on the Abby can evacuate outside the safety zone.


    He didn''t expect that he would meet Kaido in this ce. This was the biggest crisis he had ever encountered in his life. He couldn''t get through it and had to fight hard.


    "Ahem..."


    After both parties stopped their hands, Kaido suddenly coughed violently at this moment. Looking at him, it was obvious that he had been seriously injured, and he didn''t know who in this world could hurt him so seriously.


    Chang Nuo saw everything, but he had no rush or idea to take action at this moment.


    Looking at the entire pirate world, Kaido''sbat power has exceeded many people''s imagination. Even if he is seriously injured now, Changnuo has no confidence that he can inflict serious damage.


    "Boy, do you think I will believe your nonsense? But I like your attitude, Mr. Kaido, but I didn''t expect that little guy like you actually knows me?"


    Kaido''s sharp eyes stared directly at Changnuo standing in front, as if the other party would directly kill him if he said something wrong.


    "Kill..."


    As soon as Kaido finished speaking, a figure suddenly appeared from his side and attacked Kaido at an extremely fast speed.


    Several powerful attacks hit Kaido''s back in an instant, tearing apart the earth with them.


    Kaido didn''t even dodge, he still stood there, as if these attacks had no effect at all when they fell on him.


    "Junhe, step back..."


    Chang Nuo shouted anxiously when he saw this scene.


    When the figure fell, a man in the form of a human wolf stood behind Kaido. This wolf had a blue mane, blood-red eyes, a mouth and fangs. It also exuded a faint blue light, and had two hands. His sharp nails were at least 20cm long, and he stared directly at Kaido standing there with a prepared expression.


    "Mr. Kaido, I''m very sorry. This is my subordinate. Please forgive me for my rudeness!"


    Junhe''s appearance was something Changnuo didn''t expect.


    "Uuhahahaha, the animal type phantom beast, the wolf fruit, is in the form of the Silver Moon Wolf. It''s really surprising. When did such a character appear on the Grand Line? From now on, why don''t you two follow me, Kaido!"


    Kaido looked at the two of them with a smile and said.


    Changnuo stood there and took a deep breath. Junhe also came to his side at this moment.


    "Why are you here? Didn''t I ask you to escort them away from here?" Chang Nuo asked with a cold voice.


    "Barlow has already taken them away. I am worried about His Majesty''s safety, so I came here."


    As Shunhe spoke, he began to be wary of Kaido who was standing not far away.

 Chapter 80 Sinking the Island with One Move

    <h4>Chapter 80 Sinking the Ind with One Move</h4>


    Kaido''s huge height gave people a sense of oppression, which made them feel suffocated.


    Faced with such an injured person, Chang Nuo couldn''t think of any better way.


    "Act ording to the opportunity!" Chang Nuo whispered to Junhe. Now it was not a matter of ming him for why he came over suddenly.


    After finishing speaking, Changnuo turned to look at Kaido again, and said in a rather respectful tone, "Mr. Kaido, we don''t have any good impressions of the New World. We would rather stay in our quiet corner. At the same time, we are very grateful to Mr. Kaido." It��s an honor for both of us to be invited.��


    "Then you are going to refuse my invitation?"


    Kaido''s voice suddenly turned cold, and his aura became even more intense.


    Changnuo quietly observed the scars on Kaido''s body. The repair of the scars on Kaido''s body was rapidly recovering at a speed visible to the naked eye. With such a powerful physical ability, if they spent a little more time with him, then the two of them would There is no way out.


    "If it''s rejection, I wonder what Mr. Kaido means?"


    Chang Nuo stared at the other party quietly, and the aura of king on his body was also exuded at the same time, and the domineering aura between the two parties collided with each other.


    The collision between the momentum directly produced a bursting sound, and the seawater at the edge of the ind was once again forced back.


    "What if I say, join or die?" Kaido said.


    "If we weren''t forced like this, then the two of us would have to fight to the death to experience Mr. Kaido''s strength!"


    Chang Nuo did not give in at this moment, his eyes were cold, and he once again strengthened his domineering look.


    At the same time, the demon sword Muramasa slowly appeared next to him. Perhaps at this time, Muramasa had also sensed the danger his master was encountering. The sword was emitting red light, which was actually much more powerful than before.


    Changnuo had already guessed why Kaido was seriously injured. He must have juste out of Impel Down City, otherwise he would never have imagined who could beat him like this at this time.


    "You actually dare to challenge me, so I will satisfy you for once today!"


    Kaido directly raised his right hand, coupled with his huge figure, but fortunately there were no weapons around Kaido, so he could only rely on his own strength to fight.


    The only difference is that even though Kaido is a Devil Fruit user, he does not dare to show his true form at this moment. Once he attracts the navy due to this situation, even though he cannot be killed, he can still cause unlimited damage. trouble.


    Chang Nuo really couldn''t understand that this guy had be like this just after he became the Fourth Emperor. The key was that he had already met him in just a few days.


    "Junhe, retreat to the air..."


    Just when Kaido was about to attack the two of them, Changnuo shouted directly to Junhe.


    At the same time, he directly grasped the demon sword Muramasa, and the aura on his body instantly transformed into another form, and his eyes turned bloodthirsty red.


    "Flying Sword Style - Nine-Headed Dragon sh..."


    This was the strongest attack Chang Nuo had ever exposed. Facing Kaido on the opposite side, he no longer had any reservations.


    Although it is unclear whether this move has any effect on him, one thing that can be confirmed is that with the blessing of this domineering force, the attack of this move can be infinitely increased.


    Chang Nuo''s figure seemed to be still standing on the same spot, because the speed of movement was too fast, and no one could even react with their eyes, but all his attacks had been transmitted at this moment.


    Nine-headed Dragon sh is a fast attack method, but its shoring is also rtively obvious, that is, it needs to umte power before attacking. Although the time in this aspect is not very long, for those who can use fast attacks, this One move is enough to kill.


    Kaido''s size is rtivelyrge, which can be regarded as his biggest shoring. Of course, no one can match him in terms of strength, but in terms of movement speed and reaction ability, Changnuo has an unknown number of times the advantage.


    When the Nine-headed Dragon sh move appeared, Kaido had already felt something extraordinary, and then directly applied Armament Haki on himself, and used the Observation Color to sense it.


    "One cut..."


    No one noticed Chang Nuo''s figure, and a sh quickly moved from bottom to top, directly attacking Kaido''s waist.


    But even with the protection of armed domineering, this sh instantly caused a huge wound on Kaido''s waist.


    But for someone his size, it was probably just scratching an itch.


    Even so, an attack that could hurt him was enough to make Kaido angry. He had been injured before and his strength was greatly reduced, but he didn''t expect to encounter such a difficult guy again.


    "Two cuts...nine cuts..."


    In just an instant, nine consecutive attacks directly filled the emperor of this new world with scars.


    He knew that it would not kill him, but if there were many such attacks, it would be enough to make Kaido retreat.


    But Changnuo''s attack from beginning to end was not aimed at Kaido, but at the small ind at his feet.


    After the Nine-headed Dragon sh ended, Kaido was still preparing to capture Changnuo, but the entire ind under his feet began to slowly copse.


    With just one move, nine shes, an ind was destroyed.


    "His Majesty����"


    The moment the ind copsed, Changnuo was still standing on the ind, and Junhe was so frightened that he shouted.


    "Boy, I remember you!"


    Kaido''s voice still came out at the moment of copse.


    However, at this moment, Chang Nuo also appeared in mid-air.


    "Your Majesty, are you okay?"


    Junhe asked anxiously.


    "What can happen? Anyway, something almost happened."


    Changnuo sighed with lingering fear.


    Being able to escape this time was purely a fluke. If those attacks really hit Kaido, the wounds might be more serious than the current ones, but the final result did not have much obvious effect.


    "Is this the Yonko Kaido of the new world? But now he will probably drown under this seabed!"


    Stepping on the moon steps, Junhe said with some joy.


    "What are you thinking? Even though he is a Devil Fruit user, you still have to look at what Devil Fruit abilities he has. The animal type fantasy beast is in the form of a fish fruit and a blue dragon. It is the top devil fruit in the animal type. Plus Due to his own strength, this time we are both concerned about him, and it will be another headache in the future."


    Changnuo sighed again. He knew very well that Kaido would not die if he fell into the sea. Even his men were like this, so how could this guy be different?

 Chapter 81 Marie Joa

    <h4>Chapter 81 Marie Joa</h4>


    "Your Majesty, after returning home, I will definitely step up my training and will protect your Majesty''s safety from now on!" Jun He said seriously.


    "Don''t worry, let''s do this for now! It''s better to go back quickly. I don''t know if the other party has clearly seen the g of our country?"


    Chang Nuo already had a look of embarrassment on his face. This time, he hadpletely offended a boss-level existence. He was already filled with darkness about the bright life in the future.


    The two of them stood in the sky, looking at the sea water below that had begun to gradually calm down, with thoughtful expressions on their faces.


    No one expected that they would meet such a guy on such a peaceful journey. Is it really a surprise?


    Of course, for the Tru Kingdom, which has always been smooth sailing, things in the future are definitely not as simple as imagined.


    This time I managed to sneak away, but if I encounter him againter, I don��t know what will happen.


    However, Kaido, who was staying in the water at the moment, could still maintain his original appearance. Apart from being unable to move due to the side effects of the Devil Fruit, he could still breathe when he was in the water.


    The ability of the Fish Fruit is enough to ensure that he will not drown in the sea. This is Kaido today.


    Changnuo and Junhe stepped on the moon steps and quickly approached their Abby.


    Those on the ship also looked forward to it, and even after sailing out of a safe distance, the overall speed of the ship had slowed down a lot.


    After a long time, I don''t know who on the boat saw the two returning figures and shouted directly, and others also followed suit and shouted happily.


    When the ind where Kaido stayed was silent just now, everyone had seen it. Even though they were far apart, they could naturally hear such a big ind sinking into the sea with a roaring sound.


    As soon as theynded on the boat, Chang Nuo behaved as before, while Jun He was just slightly panting.


    "Your Majesty, are you okay?"


    Seeing the two of them returning safely, Gogoya couldn''t help but shed tears of excitement, mainly due to the fear just now.


    He didn''t know what dangers there were on the ind before, but not long after they left, when the first attack ttened a mountain, everyone realized that there was a terrifying person on the ind.


    "Okay, everything has been resolved, don''t worry." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    But now he was starting to feel anxious. When he looked up, there was no g of their country on the mast.


    ��Where��s the g??��


    Changnuo looked at Gogoya in surprise and asked.


    "That''s right, where''s the national g?" Junhe couldn''t help but get excited.


    "I''m sorry, Your Majesty. We encountered strong winds two days ago, so we took it down when we were furling the sail. Maybe they forgot to install it. I''ll give you the order right now!"


    Barlow said quickly.


    "Haha..., Junhe, now it''s impossible for that guy to know which country we are from!" Chang Nuo suddenly became happy.


    At least you can be sure that this time it will not have any impact on your country.


    If Kaido knows about the situation in his country, no matter whether he has the intention to deal with people like him in the future, it is always a risk lurking in the dark.


    The smile on Junhe''s face became obvious. He quickly walked to Barlow and hugged the little man.


    "Barlow, you have really done a good thing this time. Stop pretending to be the national g and quickly follow the direction of the eternal record pointer and head towards Mary Joa." Junhe said with a smile.


    Everyone else is confused now. They don''t know what happened?


    But the two of them didn''t say anything, and others wouldn''t bother asking.


    The incident of meeting Kaido passed perfectly. Even though more than two hours had passed, Chang Nuo still couldn''t help but feel panicked.


    It''s not that he hasn''t encountered anything. If hees into contact with the other party, he can ept it no matter what the situation is. If he can''t beat him, he can at least run away. But if someone cares about his country, then ording to Kaido''s strength, to What can you do to resist when the timees?


    Lying on the lounge chair, Changnuo was basking in the sun leisurely on the surface, but countless thoughts were already swirling in his heart.


    At least this time he has made up his mind to do something!


    ������������


    Ten dayster, Marie Joa was already in sight. It was located at the top of the Red Earth Continent. Even though it was a hundred miles away, his location could be clearly seen.


    It is a ce like this that makes countless people in the worldin. It houses the biggest worms in the world, but everyone dares to be angry but dare not speak out.


    The current near Mariejoia is very calm, there is no wind at all, it is almost infinitely close to the state of a windless zone.


    The closer you get to the Red Earth Continent, the more obvious this feeling bes, and there are countless outposts and hidden sentries outside this ce.


    "Let me inform you, everyone must not cause any trouble during this period!"


    Chang Nuo stood on the edge of the ship and gave instructions to the people behind him.


    He didn''t want to cause a bigger crisis by identally causing some trouble.


    There is a port directly connected to the sea below Mariejoia. The long steps can almost reach the end at a nce. I am afraid that even if I walk up, I don''t know how much effort it will take.


    After approaching the port, the navies standing guard at the port immediately began toe up for inspection.


    As the ship approached the port, a huge horizontal nk on the ship connected to the port tform below, Chang Nuo slowly walked down with Junhe and Gogoya.


    "Who are you?"


    A navy voice on the port asked sternly.


    "The Tru Kingdom of the South China Sea, I have been invited to join the World Government!" Junhe said and directly handed over an invitation letter he had received from the group of CPs before.


    This thing is the best pass.


    After the navy member took it, he opened it and read the contents. After confirming that there was nothing wrong, he directly said, "Who is your king? How many people do you n to go up? All weapons must stay here."


    The other party''s words instantly made Junhe a little angry, but he still remembered what his king said before, that no conflict should ur in the Mariegioa area.


    He slowly calmed down his emotions, directed towards Chang Nuo and said, "This is our King, I wonder what else you have to do?"

 Chapter 82 Enduring external humiliation

    <h4>Chapter 82 Enduring external humiliation</h4>


    After Junhe finished speaking, Changnuo waved directly, and he immediately stopped what he wanted to say.


    Chang Nuo looked at this thick-looking navy man, smiled slightly and said, "It''s my first timeing to Mariejoia. I don''t understand many of the rules, but please forgive me if I''m offended!"


    A polite remark from a gentleman, the navy immediately seemed a bit condescending, but at least it won his favor.


    This member of the navy carefully looked at King Tru in front of him. Although there was disdain in his eyes, he finally smiled and said, "When you go upter, you will encounter many Tianlong people. You need to kneel down every time you see one." Salute, I am worried that if you, a person who has never been here before, recklessly contradict the Tianlong people, you may be killed."


    "Thank you very much for informing me!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Hurry over there."


    After the marine finished speaking, he started walking in other directions with the two people behind him.


    Junhe didn''t understand very much. He looked at Changnuo and asked directly, "Your Majesty, aftering to Marigioa, why are you so respectful to the navy they are guarding?"


    "It''s just a matter of two sentences, and it doesn''t cost us anything. We are just going through the motions. The most important thing is to implement this matter.


    If the country is not strong enough, then we can only do this. If you all have strong strength in the future, then this Mary Joa will be just like that. "


    Chang Nuo said as he walked up the steps.


    This huge step seems to go straight to the sky. However, from the sight, the road in the middle of the step can indeed run automatically. Each step is slowly moving upward. The key is that as their status, they can only walk On both sides of the road.


    The road in the middle is specially provided for the use of Tianlong people, and this thing is not electric. There are countless ves below him, pulling this huge step.


    Junhe also understood what His Majesty the King was thinking, so he could only put down the helplessness in his heart, and then walked up the steps on both sides.


    As they went higher and higher, they were almost touching the clouds, and the people and boats below looked extremely small.


    However, for them, the road leading to the Holy Land Marie Joa was only about half the journey.


    No one appeared up and down the entire steps, and three figures appeared alone on this long uphill slope.


    Coming to this Mariejoia, no matter what they do, it will only bring them endless humiliation. This is a necessary step for every country that joins the world government.


    So for the kings of other countries, if it hadn''t been for a world government meeting, they wouldn''t have run to this shabby ce at all.


    After walking for nearly half an hour, the three of them finally climbed to the top of the steps. Changnuo and Junhe didn''t care, but as a Gogoya who didn''t have much strength, she would have been exhausted and panting. If it weren''t for In the middle, Junhe has been helping her go up, and now he probably can no longer hold on.


    Standing at the top, whates into view is a group of magnificent buildings, luxurious white buildings, connected together. As for the area further back, it should be the residence of the so-called Tianlong people.


    You can''t use the perception of sight, hearing, color and color arbitrarily here. After all, there are countless people with super strength. If they are noticed by others, it will be tantamount to setting themselves on fire.


    "Your Majesty, this ce looks really grand!" Gogoya gasped.


    "At least half of the wealth umted in the entire world for hundreds of years is here. It is normal for such a building group to appear." Changnuo said with a smile.


    "It''s so morous on the outside, but so dirty on the inside, it really doesn''t interest anyone at all!" Junhe said angrily.


    "Junhe, no matter what situation you encounter aftering here, the most important thing is to suppress your emotions. Don''t show this expression at every turn. It doesn''t matter outside, but he can''t do it here." Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    "Let''s go, let''s take a good look at what those people who stand at the top of the world are like?" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    The huge steps lead up to a huge square, and the ground is entirely paved with white jade, connected to the white building in front. The majestic atmosphere is no longer enough to describe the ce where the Tianlong people live.


    The weather in this ce is quite hot right now, so you can only see a few people walking back and forth in the entire square. Other than that, you can''t see any unusual behavior at all.


    Not to mention the Tianlong people wearing oxygen masks every day, Chang Nuo felt that he came at the wrong time.


    It wasn''t until they got closer to this building that seemed to have six or seven floors that there were slowly more people here, some wearing navy uniforms and some other things.


    "Hello, I would like to ask, how to get to the World Government Office?" Chang Nuo directly stopped a walking navy and asked.


    "I don''t know. Find it yourself."


    The thin marine didn''t even look at them and refused directly.


    This attitude of the other party changed Chang Nuo''s good temper to another one in an instant.


    But in the end, he still suppressed the idea of ??taking action and tried to maintain a calm mind.


    It wasn''t until this moment that he turned on his sense of perception. The entire scene of Mariejoia instantly appeared in his mind, and he could clearly perceive which ants were moving inside.


    "His Majesty����"


    "It''s okay." Chang Nuo smiled, then looked at another passage ahead and said directly, "I didn''t expect to meet an acquaintance today. It''s really surprising."


    With that said, he led the two of them directly towards the passage over there.


    Even though people wereing and going on both sides, they didn''t pay attention to anyone''s expression or attitude.


    Until they came to the door of a seemingly huge room, the outside was entirely decorated with mahogany, and no one knew what was going on inside.


    Chang Nuo stood at the door and knocked twice. After the sound came from inside, he opened the two doors directly.


    What came into view was arge group of people, as if they were holding a meeting.


    "Who are you?"


    The man sitting closest to the door was wearing a robe of justice. After seeing the three people, he opened his mouth and asked.


    "Hey, Lieutenant General Qing Pheasant, no, I should be a general now. It''s been a long time since Ist saw you. I guess you haven''t forgotten me, right?"


    As soon as he entered the door, Chang Nuo had already spotted Qing Zhi sitting in front. He still had the samezy look, his thighs were crossed, and his carefree image really matched his current expression.

 Chapter 83 Arrogant Tianlong people

    <h4>Chapter 83 Arrogant Tianlong people</h4>


    "Oops, I didn''t expect King Tru to be here too. It''s just that it will take more than two months for the world government meeting to be held. It seems like you are here a little early?"


    Qingzhi still sat there and saidzily.


    "He is the king of the Tru country in the South China Sea?"


    Another person sitting next to Qing Pheasant looked at Chang Nuo and asked.


    "We are holding a meeting here. I wonder what King Tru is here for?"


    The navy who was the first to speak just now opened his mouth and asked coldly.


    "Don''t speak in this tone. We came here to be invited by the World Government to join the World Government. We will need some funds to support you in the future!"


    Chang Nuo immediately mocked the other party without hesitation.


    There were at least a dozen people sitting in the room. Without thinking too much, they already knew what they were going to discuss. It was nothing more than about the meeting held by the World Government in more than two months.


    But this time he happened toe to this ce by chance.


    But no one would have thought that this group of navy people, who would not be treated well outside the navy, would actually go to Marie Joa for a meeting?


    "If you join the World Government, just join the World Government. Then why are you here?"


    "Boring, I really don''t know what you are thinking. I must not be able to find the ce. Did I juste across you?" Chang Nuo said with a smile again.


    "Oops, it''s another headache. You guys have a good chat here. I''ll take him there!" Qingzhi stood up and said to everyone helplessly.


    Seeing that someone was willing to take him there, and that he was also an admiral in the navy, Chang Nuo smiled and did not say anything else.


    After going out, Gogoya stayed at the back and closed the door of the room.


    "Don''t you need a meeting, General Qing Pheasant?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    "There''s nothing to talk about. It''s just a few things that I''ve been tired of listening to for a long time." Qingzhi said.


    "Congrattions to you for bing a general now. I hope you can help me in other aspects in the future!"


    Hearing Chang Nuo''s words, Qingzhi suddenly showed a helpless expression. He said with emotion, "I''ll be grateful if you don''t make trouble for me in the future. Just because of what you didst time, You don��t know how much I got scolded when I came back!��


    If you think about it, you will know that it was just the scene where the Kingdom of Toru used the blue pheasant to open the gate of King Roya''s city. It was also by borrowing this newspaper that the Kingdom of Toru was able to seal off those Youyou from neighboring countries as quickly as possible. Everyone said.


    Aokiji was indeed scolded a lot after he came back, but it was not a particrly big deal. Anyway, wars between two countries were verymon. In the end, the navy was nothing more than giving Aokiji Just a rification.


    "I''m really sorry about what happenedst time, but in the end, for us, there was nothing we could do. Our Kingdom of Tru was too weak, so we could only use your name as General Aokiji to say that this time we can give You brought a lot of good things." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "I don''t want the things anymore. Finish your work quickly and go back to your country. Also, don''t cause anything to happen in Mariejoia!" Aokiji reminded.


    "Do not worry!"


    Having someone I know well makes things much easier. At least I don''t have to run back and forth to look for this ce.


    But on their way there, Chang Nuo finally met a man wearing an oxygen mask. The momentum with which he walked was enough to exin everything.


    Fortunately, this time they were followed by a general. When they walked directly over, the man with the oxygen mask looked at Qingzhi indifferently and asked, "General Qingzhi, who are you bringing behind you?"


    "Bokuroi Saint, why do you have so much leisure ande to the front for nothing?" Aokiji still lookedzy, not to mention seeing these Tianlong people kneeling down, he just Don''t even bother to say hello.


    "I quite like that girl, just follow meter!" Bokuroy said with a lustful smile, staring directly at Gogoya''s body.


    "That''s not okay, Saint Bokuroi. I''m here now to join the World Government membership." Aokiji said.


    "What country?"


    Bokuroy''s eyes then turned to Chang Nuo, and he asked with disdain.


    "Saint Bokuroi, we are the Kingdom of Tru, a country in the South China Sea. It is really unexpected to see the saint for the first time."


    Chang Nuo bowed directly and said with a smile on his face.


    "I like this. Tell me, how many Baileys will it take for you to give this woman to me? Besides, I like women from your country. She is a blessing to your country. Take her back and be my 57th I have a good wife."


    Bokuroy continued to maintain his lewd smile, and his entire head was already inside the ss cover. If he were in another ce, Changnuo couldn''t guarantee that he wouldn''t kill him.


    "Saint Bokuroi, aren''t you afraid that I will report you for this behavior? There have been clear orders before that you, as Celestial Dragons, are not allowed to do anything to members of the World Government''s participating countries!"


    Qingzhi said directly, already looking a little impatient.


    "Huh, there''s still a time when I can''t get the woman I like!"


    After Bokuroy finished speaking, he took his two henchmen and walked in the other direction.


    But as he was walking, a blue light floated out from Changnuo''s fingers hidden in the dark, and then attached to Bokuroy''s body.


    No one noticed this scene, not even Qing Zhi standing in front.


    The blue light just shed by and then disappeared, as if it had never appeared at all.


    The Tianlong people who leave will not feel any difort. If they can make the other party feel it, then that''s okay!


    "General Qing Pheasant, are all Tianlong people like this?" Junhe suddenly asked.


    "Oh, that''s about it!"


    Qing Pheasant sighed and spokezily.


    "It''s better to settle the matter here quickly, and then we can return to our own country." Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face.


    "Everyone is already here, and the World Government Conference will be held in more than two months. Since you have chosen to join the World Government, is it possible that you will not participate?" Aokiji asked curiously.


    Aokiji has long guessed that the Toru Kingdom will definitely join the World Government. After all, his country is not as simple as it seems on the surface, and Aokiji is very clear about these.

 Chapter 84 No chance with the world government

    <h4>Chapter 84 No chance with the world government</h4>


    When Chang Nuo appeared here, Aokiji didn''t show any surprise. Even if he didn''t want to join the World Government, then ording to the character of the World Government, he would definitely find a way to get him to join.


    After staying in the navy for such a long time, Aokiji is very clear and understanding of the World Government''s methods.


    The procedures for joining the world government are not thatplicated, and are even much simpler than imagined.


    Under the leadership of Aokiji, they just took two detours. The ce where the agreement to join the world government was signed was not even three square meters in size. It felt like the front desk of a hotel.


    Not only does it look low-grade, but it is also an act of contempt for these world government countries.


    "Okay, the ce is here, you can just sign an agreement here!"


    Qing Zhi said with azy smile.


    Looking at the scene in front of him, Chang Nuo couldn''t stop smiling from his originally smiling face, and he began to be increasingly angry in his heart.


    "General Aokiji, don''t tell me that such an important matter as joining the World Government can be solved right here?" Changnuo asked in a low voice.


    "Then what else do you want? This has always been the process!"


    Chang Nuo sneered directly after hearing this, and then walked to the ce where the person looked like he was still sleeping.


    The other party''s eyes were rtively small, and at a little distance, it was impossible to tell whether his eyes were open. When the other party saw Chang Nuo, he casually asked, "Which country''s king is the king? What''s his name?"


    "The Kingdom of Tru, a country in the South China Sea, I am the king!"


    "Sign this agreement and that''s it."


    The woman with squinted eyes handed over a piece of crumpled-looking paper as she spoke. The color on it was obviously uneven. She didn''t know what she had done with this paper before.


    Some of the writing on it has been covered in stains, making itpletely unclear what is written.


    "Are all other countries like this?"


    Chang Nuo turned his head and nced at Qing Pheasant and asked.


    "I don''t know, I''ve never encountered it before!"


    Qing Zhi saidzily.


    Chang Nuo stood there and took a deep breath, suppressing the anger in his heart, but some things couldn''t be suppressed no matter what.


    Being able to be a member of the World Government so casually, and having to pay a high amount of heavenly gold every year, here as the king of a country, he is not taken seriously at all, and is even treated like a ything. Drink away.


    "So this is the world government? It''s so disappointing!"


    Chang Nuo nced at the woman with narrowed eyes, turned to Junhe and said, "Let''s go!"


    "Your Majesty, this thing...?"


    Gogoya wanted to call him out one more time. After all, he spent so much effort to get here, just to join the World Government, but now he didn��t sign anything, didn��t get anything, and was just ready to leave. Isn��t this a period of time? All your hard work was in vain?


    "It seems like the world government can''t tolerate us, so why bother to be shy and continue to join them?" Shunhe also said with a slight sneer.


    As a general, Qingzhi just stood there, shaking his head helplessly at the way the staff member handled things.


    "You must think carefully. Although the World Government will not force this matter, once you go back, there will definitely be peopleing to ask you to join the World Government. Why bother getting angry over this matter?"


    Listening to what Qing Pheasant said, Chang Nuo was finally angry. He looked at him with cold eyes and said, "As long as the situation we encountered today changes even slightly, I will not hold the current attitude. As a naval admiral, I will I believe you have your own opinion.��


    After saying that, Chang Nuo turned around and walked outside.


    Thest thought left to him by the World Government disappeared in an instant. Before, he thought that joining the World Government would be beneficial to the development of his country''s business and economy, but now that he sees this situation, he no longer has any good feelings about it.


    There are so many models for business development. In this dark world of pirates, there is no need to choose an aboveboard path.


    Qingzhi did not stop Chang Nuo from leaving, nor did he say anything. After all, this kind of thing had nothing to do with him.


    When he reached the square paved with white jade, Chang Nuo looked back at the World Government, which represented the top power in the world. The anger in his eyes made him want to be ttened.


    "Your Majesty, what should we do next?" Junhe asked.


    "What do you think of this ce?" Chang Nuo asked with a slight smile.


    "I don''t think so!"


    "But when wee here this time, is it really okay to leave hastily like this?" Gogoya suddenly asked.


    "With so many countries joining the World Government, why do we have to make ourselves a target? Well, aren''t Bastan just ready to cooperate with us?" A sneer appeared at the corner of Chang Nuo''s mouth.


    "But Your Majesty, what if the CP department of the World Governmentes over again?" Junhe asked worriedly.


    He still remembers how strong the CP group was, and he still doesn��t know what kind of people willeter?


    For the Kingdom of Toru, the biggest advantage at present is that it is rtively far away from the World Government. If it were not for the earlier incident with the Kingdom of Roja, few people in this world would have heard of this country.


    Chang Nuo seemed to have made a n, and sneered and said directly, "Let''s talk about it when we get back. Whether or not we add the World Government, there is no big change for us. However, the other party''s attitude made me very annoyed. After boarding the ship Tell Ba Luo to leave as soon as possible, and I will take you to experience some more exciting things at night."


    Junhe looked confused, and then followed the figure of His Majesty the King without any further hesitation.


    Going down the long steps seemed particrly easy. After arriving on the boat, everyone else watched the three return with expectant expressions.


    However, the only word left to wait for is "Start sailing..."


    Except for the three of them, no one knew what happened, but Chang Nuo nced at Mary Joa above the red earth continent again, with a slight smile on his lips, as if he was nning something.


    This departure can be regarded as aplete break with the world government. Almost all previous ns have been disrupted. However, this rhythm is for the Kingdom of Toru to slightly change its strategy and direction, and It won''t affect the overall situation.

 Chapter 85 Stealing the Celestial Dragon Treasure House

    <h4>Chapter 85 Stealing the Celestial Dragon Treasure House</h4>


    This time, the Abby did not return along the original route, but set off in another direction from the Grand Waterway.


    This is something they have nned before. When the timees, they will go directly to the area where the empty ind is located. This is their most important strategic nning direction.


    In the evening, almost nothing could be seen on the sea, and the ship could only rely on the power of those sails to move forward independently.


    "Your Majesty, are you looking for me?"


    Junhe gently opened the door and walked in. After closing the door, he looked at Changnuo and asked.


    "Didn''t you alert others?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, no one has been disturbed!" Junhe said seriously.


    "I''m going to a ce with youter. There may be some dangers. I''d like to ask you in advance if you''re willing?"


    Listening to what His Majesty the King said, Junhe said directly and seriously without any hesitation, "Your Majesty, even if you ask your subordinates to die, I will never frown."


    "It''s not that serious. He was insulted too much in Mariejoia today. I will take you to get him back." Chang Nuo said directly with a smile.


    He doesn''t want anyone to know his ability now. The only person in the whole world who knows about his space ability is Shunhe. Even when he met Kaido on that small ind, Changnuo faced such a huge danger. , and did not choose to expose it.


    As for the remaining people who knew his abilities, they have long since passed away.


    Although Junhe didn''t know what his king was up to, now that he had said this, he had a look of expectation on his face.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, blue light condensed directly on his right hand, and then a blue vortex suddenly appeared in front of him.


    The thoughts inside the vortex are very deep and they are constantly spinning. No one knows which direction the other end leads to.


    "Follow me and jump over together."


    Changnuo said and jumped directly into the whirlpool. Junhe also jumped in without the slightest hesitation.


    As the two people entered, the vortex slowly began to close, and the room returned to silence, but the two people hadpletely disappeared.


    The space ability of Devil Fruit has been developed a lot by Changnuo, and what is disyed now is just one of them.


    This type of jump is a long-distance jump. He had already put the other end on the Celestial Dragon Bokuroi before, just to wait until night to visit Marie Joa.


    When he was in Mariejoia, Chang Nuo had already used his observation color to observe almost the entire situation in Mariejoia. At that time, he didn''t notice that there were any particrly powerful people above him, so he was so relieved to take him with him. Junhe jumps over there.


    The space transmitted quickly, and two people appeared again walking directly from the vortex, but they appeared in a bedroom.


    The Celestial Dragon Bokuroy, who had looked down on the two of them during the day, was currently fast asleep on the bed.


    Junhe was afraid that he would cause some noise and wake the other party, but Changnuo didn''t seem to have such worries at all.


    This group of Tianlong people actually wear ss covers even when they sleep, which makes people feel sick just looking at them.


    Walking to the guy''s bed, Changnuo directly used his space ability to wrap Bokuroy''s head. Within a while, he began to struggle violently, but the final result was still the same.


    Chang Nuo waited until the other person suffocated to death before letting go. He didn''t feel any guilt but felt very rxed.


    Junhe stood aside, looking at His Majesty the King''s methods, and he didn''t know how frightened he was in his heart.


    After all, the people lying on the bed are Tianlong people. If one operation is not done well, the incidents and disputes caused will be beyond their imagination.


    "A piece of trash." Changnuo looked at the dead Bokuroy and said with a disdainful smile.


    "Your Majesty, you killed the Celestial Dragon!"


    Junhe is still in shock.


    This is the inherent thinking in their hearts. The sacred and invible concept of the Tianlong people has always been imprinted in their hearts.


    But after seeing this scene, although Junhe felt very satisfied, the things that followed were really scary.


    "What''s there to worry about? Who would know it was us? Let''s go. We''re already here. Our journey of nearly a month cannot be in vain."


    Changnuo said, but Shunhe didn''t understand what he meant. When he first saw Bokuroi''s death, he thought that His Majesty the King came here just to kill someone. Now it seems like something It''s much more than that.


    Changnuo didn''t talk too much with Junhe, and directly grabbed his shoulder and re-entered the space jump. When he appeared again, he was already in a warehouse.


    However, both of them were stunned by the scene in front of them.


    "here it is??"


    Chang Nuo waved it casually, and a light blue barrier instantly enveloped the entire room, fearing that if Jun and this guy waited a moment, they might be tempted to attract other guards.


    "Can you please stop making such a fuss? This is the warehouse of that guy just now. I don''t know how much money there is here." Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Your Majesty, I have never seen so much gold, silver and jewelry piled together in my life. The cost here is estimated to be at least hundreds of billions of beliries, right?"


    Junhe couldn''t help but said excitedly.


    "What do you think we bring all these things back? Didn''t this set you up for nothing?" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "It''s not in vain, it''s not in vain, but how can we take these things back?"


    While excited, Junhe suddenly asked curiously.


    Chang Nuo''s smiling face suddenly showed a speechless expression, and then he said leisurely, "Don''t you know what abilities I have?"


    The warehouse in front of me is at least thousands of square meters and is at least ten meters high. However, in this room, from the corner to the middle, it is filled with gold, silver and jewelry, and all kinds of things are endless.


    The thing ced at the front is a crown, and there are even many things packed in the box. Every thing in it is a rare treasure to outsiders, but here it is. It''s such a random pile.


    However, this is only the assets of this one Celestial Dragon. There are thousands of Celestial Dragons in the whole of Mariejoia, so one can imagine theirbined assets.


    "What are you still doing? Wait until you go back to see what''s good about these things." Chang Nuo said.


    In fact, there was no need for him to bring Junhe here at all. Maybe he just wanted to find someone to share this exciting joy.


    Junhe listened to what Changnuo said and quickly stood behind him.


    Then Chang Nuo waved his hand again, and the entire space barrier began to shrink until all the treasures were covered. In an instant, not even a single Bailey was left of all the jewelry in the room.


    Even the dust on the ground has been cleaned up by him.

 Chapter 86 Someone suddenly appears

    <h4>Chapter 86 Someone suddenly appears</h4>


    In the huge warehouse, a room full of gold, silver and jewelry had all been cleared away in just such an instant.


    And during the whole process, there was no movement.


    "Your Majesty, if we follow this method and directly loot the entire Mariejoia, wouldn''t we be rich?"


    Junhe said with excitement.


    "What are you thinking? This ce is not as simple as you think. Not to mention that the admirals are here now, Marie Joa itself has a very powerful existence.


    It��s already great to be able to do this, so let��s go back first! "


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    With such a simple way to obtain arge amount of money, other people with this kind of spatial ability would definitely not let it go easily. Changnuo didn''t want to do this. It would be great to be able to solve one.


    Junhe''s inner greed was infinitely magnified at this moment, but he was not a person who didn''t know anything. If he had the ability to get the money at this moment, he would also need to have the ability to spend it in the future. , this is the time to show your ability.


    "Your Majesty, when I came here just now, I found that there seemed to be something good in that Bokuroi room!"


    Junhe said.


    "Then why didn''t you say it before?"


    "I didn''t dare to speak before. You started to take action as soon as you came up. Just when I was about to speak, you just dragged me over here." Jun He said a little aggrieved.


    "Did you find anything good?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile after hearing this.


    They were not in a hurry to go back now. After all, it was sote at night that even if they wanted to leave, it would only be a matter of seconds.


    The main reason why I don''t want to take the property from other ces is because I don''t want to make this matter too big.


    The most important thing is that Chang Nuo knows very well how many strong people there are in this so-called Holy Land Marie Joa, and the powerful personnel in the CP department are also here, not to mention the top figure.


    "Your Majesty, I really didn''t see clearly."


    Junhe smiled, but at this time, Changnuo didn''t give him a chance to say anything else. He looked at his shoulder again and arrived in Bokuroy''s room in an instant.


    The main reason was that the room was too dark when they came just now. After killing this guy, the two of them had no chance to go into the room to see other things.


    But aftering here this time, I realized that the Tianlong people''s bedroom is really not ordinary!


    "Junhe, whatever it is, put it here, and then we''ll pack it up and take it away together."


    Chang Nuo said softly, for fear of disturbing the people outside again.


    I don��t know how many people are standing outside this room now, and no one knows what their strength is.


    They don''t want to disturb the people outside now. If this is the case, they don''t know how much trouble it will cause next.


    Junhe didn''t speak, just nodded, and then began to search for things in the entire room.


    "Take me with you..."


    Just when the two of them started to prepare, this sentence suddenly appeared in Chang Nuo''s mind.


    The hand that was preparing to take action was instantly lowered, and his expression became wary of the surrounding situation.


    With the help of the faint light, Junhe saw His Majesty the King looking like this, and naturally began to be on guard.


    "I''m at the door. Take me out. I''m willing to be your most loyal servant..."


    The voice appeared again, and Chang Nuo couldn''t help but frowned. The two of them were secretly acting like this, but they were still discovered by others at this time.


    But listening to the voice, the other party didn''t seem to be trying to embarrass them, but instead felt like he wanted to ask for help.


    "Bokuroi is dead. If you want to go out with me, just open the door and walk in. Don''t let anyone find out!"


    Chang Nuo stood there and muttered quietly.


    He believed that since the other party could detect the two people, he would definitely be able to hear their subtle movements.


    Sure enough, the moment the voice fell, the door to this room slowly began to open.


    Then a thin-looking man climbed in wearing chains.


    After Junhe saw the personing, he immediately wanted to start and prepare to take action, but at this time Changnuo immediately came between the two people, blocking Junhe from moving forward.


    "Search Bokuroy for the key?"


    Changnuo said to Junhe.


    "No need to waste your efforts, the key to control us has been thrown away long ago."


    The man lying on the ground said in a leisurely voice.


    Not only was his body covered with iron chains, he also had something around his neck that emitted blue light dots from time to time, and his hands were controlled by sea-floor stones.


    There is almost only one answer to the fact that such a person can appear in Mariejoia, that is, a ve.


    "Why did you be like this? And why were you able to find us?"


    Chang Nuo''s eyes were sharp and he was wary of this guy. If he might have said something wrong, Chang Nuo wouldn''t mind giving him a ride with his own hands.


    "I am Abona, the former deputy leader of the Sunshine Pirates. I was captured and sold here two years ago."


    The man named Abona whispered.


    "Now you have two choices. The first is that you have discovered us now, and you should understand the ending that awaits you.


    Another point is, as you said, give me your loyalty and I will take you out. "


    Chang Nuo no longer wants to waste any time. Now that everyone has been discovered, no matter where they are, it is a rtively dangerous signal for them.


    Without any hesitation, Abona immediately lowered his head and said with some excitement, "I am willing to offer my loyalty to my master, and please take me out of this hell on earth."


    Changnuo smiled slightly. As for Junhe, he was taking the time to pack up the things in the entire room.


    Regardless of whether the boxes on the shelves were useful or useless, he ced them all on the ground.


    Chang Nuo slowly squatted down and touched the green thing on Abona''s neck with his hand.


    With only a "click" sound, the cor around Abona''s neck broke.


    However, the blue light dots on the cor were still shining.


    This is what controls them. As for the chains on their bodies, it is not a problem for a few people.


    For the first time, he felt like he had regained his freedom. Abona was so excited that he almost couldn''t control his emotions.


    He stood up, his mouth open, the expression on his face was very excited, but at this moment he also knew that he could not make any sound.

 Chapter 87 Arbonne

    <h4>Chapter 87 Arbonne</h4>


    But as the chains on his body began to slowly fall to the ground, even when he stood up, he looked unkempt. In this dark night, it was impossible to see what his face looked like.


    "Is it done?"


    Changnuo turned his head and asked in a low voice towards Junhe.


    "It''s done, Your Majesty."


    The empty space in the room is now filled with various small boxes and exquisite furnishings. At least now they don''t want to measure the value of these things. Time is not very abundant for them.


    "Abona, let''s go back in a moment. As for the seastone handcuffs on your hands, the two of us can''t help you get rid of them now, otherwise the noise caused will be too great."


    Chang Nuo said in a low voice.


    "What the master said is true, Abona understands!"


    There is nothing dissatisfying for him now. Since taking off the cor, he has felt like he has been reborn. The words of his new master moved him even more.


    Chang Nuo waved his hand casually, and the collected items that were originally on the ground disappeared instantly. As a neer, Abona did not feel any surprise. This matter should be taken for granted.


    "We don''t have much time now, hurry up and go!"


    Chang Nuo said to the two of them, then waved directly, and the blue vortex in front of him appeared again.


    Before Abona left, he nced at Bokuroyi who was lying dead on the bed. The anger in his eyes made him want to go up and cut the body into pieces, but he would not choose to do that again now. .


    Junhe was the first to jump into the whirlpool. Abona looked back and jumped in soon after. As for Changnuo, he left a gift here before leaving.


    Their ship has been sailing, and it has been out of Marigioa''s control for a day now, and it is not going in the original direction. If it weren''t for the signal to be received in the room, Changnuo estimates that There is no other way, just use the power of space to jump to this ce.


    The three of them appeared again and had returned to the room on the ship. This moment was true freedom.


    In just an instant, they had jumped hundreds of kilometers. As for anything that happened on Mariejoia, no one would think in their direction at all.


    The ship had already left in the morning, and no one would think about the people on the ship in the Kingdom of Tru, which was hundreds of kilometers away.


    After returning to the room, Chang Nuo finally saw Abona clearly with the help of the light.


    The other party was a man of about thirty years old. He looked very thin. Without clothes to set off his thinness, he would have turned into skin and bones.


    His face is dirty, his hair has been draped over his shoulders, and is very messy, covering most of his face. The gray clothes on his body are not sure if they are the original color, or if they have not been changed for a long time. .


    Abona is still wearing sea-floor stone handcuffs now, but judging from his appearance, this guy doesn''t look like someone with devil fruit abilities at all.


    After all, the ability of Hailou Stone can directly make Devil Fruit users copse to the ground, let alone stand up andmunicate normally.


    "Your Majesty, isn''t it too risky for us to take such a person away?" Junhe said.


    "Don''t worry."


    Chang Nuo said, and then looked at Abona, who was now disheveled, and did not immediately remove the sea-floor stone handcuffs on the opponent''s hands.


    "Now you can introduce yourself well. This ce is at least hundreds of kilometers away from Mariejoia and ispletely out of control there. If what you tell us is true, then you will be free from now on. , live in this world again!" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    After finishing speaking, he sat directly on a chair behind him, wanting to wait quietly for the answer Abona gave him.


    Junhe also looked curious and looked at each other with some caution. After all, this person was of unknown origin. Even a ve above Mary Joa might have a special identity.


    Abona understood that he needed to exin his process properly, and he did not refuse. For the sixteen or seventeen-year-old guy in front of him, Abona was very grateful to be brought out by the other party.


    Marigio''s several years of ve life had worn away almost all the edges and corners of his body. Leaving that ce had be his biggest extravagant hope of staying there, but even this extravagant hope could not be more elusive.


    Abona slowly knelt on the ground, but at this time, Changnuo said directly to Junhe next to him, "Look at him, he was once a hero, give him a chair, I don''t want this behavior to be The life he will be used to in the future.��


    Junhe didn''t say anything and directly picked up a chair and ced it behind him. Abona still looked shocked.


    He has indeed be ustomed to this look. After all, kneeling is something that he must do almost every day. Even except when sleeping, his face can be facing upwards. The rest of the time, his whole face is always facing upwards. on the ground.


    "Sit down, we don''t have that many rules here, but I still hope you can exin your situation truthfully next. You should know what it means to take you out of Mariejoia? This is definitely not a cost-effective business! "


    Junhe said with a serious expression.


    "My name is Abona. I was originally a member of the Grand Line. I have been sailing on the sea since I was born. It can be said that I have been a pirate since I was born. I started sailing independently on this sea when I was fourteen years old. ,


    At that time, the entire sea was not as rampant as it is now. At that time, what we were chasing was only freedom and adventure.


    It was not untilter that a dozen of us formed a pirate group called the Sunshine Pirates. But at that time, we were almost always walking on the road to the new world, and we never thought of hurting anyone.


    Twelve years ago, just because I helped Roger escape once, the Navy started to put a reward on my head. The amount of my reward was 170 million beli.


    My captain at that time was named Mengfu. Of course, he was also killed by the current Marshal of the Navy and the then Admiral Zefa in subsequent actions.


    Four years ago, we were all captured by the navy, but on the way back, we met the current Celestial Dragon Bokuroy.


    That''s why we have what you see today. All my partners couldn''t stand the suffering and passed away one after another in the past few years. I am the only one left, lingering on. If I hadn''t met you, the master, I would probably be the worst. I can only hold on for two more months. "

 Chapter 88 Abona’s Strength

    <h4>Chapter 88 Abona��s Strength</h4>


    Abona said with an angry expression, and the veins on his face were already exposed. If he were not too weak now, the domineering power he showed would definitely exceed the imagination of the two of them.


    Seastone handcuffs can not only suppress Devil Fruit abilities, they are also harder than any handcuffs made of any material.


    "You don''t have to call me master from now on. I''m not interested in such a title. I''m not one of those scumbags from the Celestial Dragons.


    I am the king of the Tru Kingdom in the South China Sea. From now on, you can call me the same as them. "


    Changnuo said.


    "As youmand, my lord."


    Abona stood up and shouted respectfully.


    "Now let''s talk about your strength. You can stay outside Mariejoia to detect us in the room, and you can also directional sound transmission. What''s going on?"


    The reason why Chang Nuo was so curious was because he looked at the other person as if he was not a Devil Fruit user at all, but he was able to achieve abilities simr to those of a Devil Fruit.


    "Your Majesty, my strength should be between the Vice Admiral and the Admiral. I am not a Devil Fruit user, but as long as I have cultivated Haki to a certain level, it will naturally be possible." Abona said.


    His strength is between a lieutenant general and a general. This kind of strength cannot be underestimated, but he never thought that the final oue would be to be a ve of the Tianlong people.


    However, Junhe heard something contradictory from his words, and asked directly without any concealment, "Since you said that you have such high strength and are not a Devil Fruit user, why were you willingly epted?" Trapped in Mariegio?"


    "The cor around his neck is an explosive cor. Even if it has domineering power, it has no effect. As long as it exceeds the prescribed range, it will explode directly.


    I resisted in the beginning, and the scars on my body are the best proof. They threatened the lives of ourpanions at that time. In the past few years, I could onlypromise like this, but even so, I Thosepanions disappeared one by one before my eyes. "


    Abona said.


    "Okay, let''s get rid of the sea tower stone handcuffs on your hands first. As for the rest, I want to have a good rest today. When I return to the Tru Kingdom, I can recover from all the physical problems. I want to take revenge in the future. If so, there are plenty of opportunities." At this point in time, Chang Nuo no longer wanted to talk about other things.


    The demon sword Muramasa appeared in his hand in an instant, and quickly drew the sword. Before they could react, the seastone handcuffs on Abona''s hand fell to the ground in an instant.


    Even after the sea floor stone handcuffs fell, Abona still behaved the same as before. He now no longer had any belonging, and his heart was filled with the desire for revenge.


    "Junhe, take him to a room to rest. We''ll talk about the rest until tomorrow."


    Chang Nuo ordered.


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    Junhe did not refuse. Although he was still wary of Abona, he would not be too harsh on anyone his Majesty trusted.


    "Let''s go, take a good rest first, and celebrate your freedom tomorrow!"


    Walking next to Abona, Junhe said with a smile.


    "Good work."


    Arbonne said.


    No one on the entire ship has noticed anything wrong so far. Not to mention whether they are asleep or not, even those responsible for keeping watch have not noticed anything unusual.


    After Chang Nuo came back with two people, only the moment when the sea-story stone handcuffs on Abona''s hand fell off attracted the people around him. They didn''t even realize that there was an extra person on the ship. people.


    The night passed quietly, and the next morning, the first ce where the dispute broke out was not the Abri.


    On the holynd of Mariejoia, following a scream, those who went there discovered that a Celestial Dragon had died in their room.


    But in the end, the way they handled it was to let all the ves apany him to death, which could be regarded as suppressing the matter.


    After all, there is no trace of them that can be traced, and even until now, no one knows that the treasure house of Bokuroi, the Tianlong people, has beenpletely emptied.


    No one would doubt the Kingdom of Toru who had already left in the morning.


    Because after another night of sailing, the Abby no longer knew how far away it was.


    The newly arrived Abona slept in his room until noon. This was the best sleep he had had in the past few years. There was no one to disturb him and he felt no pressure, which made himpletely immersed in sleep. among.


    It wasn''t until noon that Junhe went to call Abona, which was also to celebrate his new life.


    But when Abona appeared in front of everyone, everyone''s eyes were full of surprise. When did there suddenly be an extra person on the ship? No one, not even the guards, knew this.


    "Junhe, take Abona to take a good bath and change clothes. Why are you still looking like this now?"


    The moment Abona appeared, Changnuo saw that he was still wearing the same clothes as yesterday. His unkempt appearance had not changed at all. He was still dirty and exuded an unpleasant smell. He frowned and said .


    "Sorry, Your Majesty, I will do it now."


    Junhe said quickly.


    I really didn''t think about so many things when I sent him back yesterday. After all, it was already getting sote. I really ignored this guy''s unkempt appearance.


    After the two left, everyone else in the kitchen was still talking about it.


    There are several galleys on the entire ship. After all, to provide food and amodation for so many people, one is definitely not enough.


    Chang Nuo was not in a hurry to move his chopsticks. The dining table was now filled with food and wine, just waiting for Abona to arrive again.


    "I''m sorry you got scolded!"


    After Abona followed Junhe out of the kitchen, he said to him with a guilty look on his face.


    "Huh? It''s true that I didn''t do it right, and His Majesty was right?" Junhe said with a bored look on his face.


    "That''s it!"


    "I forgot to remind you yesterday, so it''s not toote to remind you now. I don''t want to hear about His Majesty''s strength from other people!"


    Junhe suddenly changed his expression and spoke in a serious voice.


    "Don''t worry! I understand."


    Abona still spoke in a very calm tone.


    "There is a shower room in front of you. If you feel small, you don''t have a Devil Fruit anyway, so you can jump into the sea."


    Junhe said with a smile, and then said with some envy, "It''s really unpleasant to be andlubber. I''m already starting to envy you."


    "Are you also a devil fruit user?"


    Abona was obviously also a little surprised, because he didn''t feel anything unusual about Junhe since the contact yesterday.


    "It''s better not to worry about this and go take a shower quickly. I''ll prepare clothes for you and leave them at the door. Then you can go directly to the restaurant and move faster."


    With that said, Junhe immediately headed in the other direction. There were a lot of clothes on the boat, whether for men or women, and these clothes were very high-end.

 Chapter 89 Kizaru Arrives

    <h4>Chapter 89 Kizaru Arrives</h4>


    When I was in Mariegio, I nned to give it to someone I could chat with if I met someone with whom I could chat. However, I didn''t expect that they would already start leaving Mariejoia as soon as they arrived.


    This is indeed something that no one expected, but Mary Joa''s attitude haspletely destroyed their determination to join the world government.


    At least their harvest this time was quite sufficient. Although they took a little risk, it waspletely proportional to their ie.


    It is estimated that if Bokuroy''s gold, silver and jewelry were released, the ship might not be able to fit them.


    Changnuo put all these things in his own space, and no one except Junhe knew it at all.


    Nearly half an hourter, Abona came out of the shower. When he appeared in the restaurant again wearing the clothes provided by Junhe, everyone immediately showed another look of surprise.


    Even Chang Nuo, who was sitting in the first ce, had toment that people still need people to rely on clothes.


    Abona did not tie up his hair, and all the hair hanging down to his shoulders wasbed back.


    The face is still a little thin, but the charm of a mature man still makes Abona full of domineering.


    Under the handsome suit, even those who had just met him suddenly did not dare to confirm that this was the ve he brought back from under the Mary Bridge?


    "Your Majesty~"


    Abona walked into the restaurant. This time, he saluted Changnuo respectfully and shouted.


    "Sit down, let''s celebrate your new life today, and wee to join our big family in the Tru Kingdom. When you stay here from now on, you need to forget all your previous identities, and don''t bring any past hatred or thoughts with you."


    Changnuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    Abona replied.


    "Hello, my name is Gogoya. I am now the king''s secretary. I hope to take good care of you in the future!"


    Before Abona sat down, Gogoya immediately stood up and performed etiquette, saying with a smile.


    "My name is Barlow, navigator. From now on we will be partners. Don''t be too formal."


    said the short Barlow.


    The other people also stood up one by one, and then introduced themselves enthusiastically.


    They have no curiosity about Abona''s identity. No matter what he did before, they naturally don''t need to worry about the previous things now that they have boarded the ship.


    Although no one in this group knew anyone, the key was that they behaved honestly and enthusiastically, not at all like the treatment a person who had just joined this group should receive.


    Abona was very moved when he saw this atmosphere. He instantly remembered the scene of the banquet he had with his friends.


    Everyone is sitting together like this, the table is piled with food. A group of people have no worries or pursuits. They just want to sail carefree on the sea. This is where they are most satisfied.


    But now, it has only been a few years, and he is the only one left to move forward alone. Fortunately, looking at these people in front of him, he has some recollection of the past.


    He straightened his clothes, then bowed to everyone and said, "My name is Abona, I am a swordsman. I am very happy for your warm reception."


    "Abona, you are actually a swordsman??"


    Gogoya asked in surprise.


    "What''s wrong?"


    "His Majesty the King is also a swordsman, what a coincidence!"


    Gogoya said with a smile on his face.


    "Sit down quickly, or the food will be cold if you don''t wait a while." Chang Nuo didn''t say anything as he sat there, he just opened his mouth and said.


    Looking at the delicious food on the table, Abona tried his best to restrain his current hunger and still acted normal.


    "Abona, don''t be polite. His Majesty the King has arranged these in advance, so you can just eat them." Junhe said, sitting opposite Abona.


    "Thank you, Your Majesty. Then I''ll be wee." Abona said with a smile.


    As for his appetite, the next step was to subvert everyone''s three views. Changnuo and his group almost didn''t eat anything. As for the rest, they all fell into Abona''s belly.


    Moreover, his belly was already stretched out as if he had been pregnant for ten months. Not to mention the image he had maintained before, even the subsequent image had probably been lost.


    But after everyone finished eating, Abona stood there and took a sharp breath, and then his bulging belly deted at a speed visible to the naked eye.


    "This is??"


    Junhe looked surprised at this scene.


    "What''s so surprising? Isn''t this one of the six navy styles? Or your skills are not up to par. Practice it after you go back." Chang Nuo looked at him with a look of disgust and said.


    "Your Majesty, do you know?"


    Abona was also a little surprised. Why do people from these South China Sea countries actually know the Sixth Form of the Navy?


    "What''s the point? You''ll find outter." Junhe said with a smile.


    "Come on, Arbonne, let''s talk on deck for a while!"


    Changnuo called to Abona who was chatting with Junhe and said.


    "Are you a swordsman??"


    As soon as he reached the deck, Chang Nuo asked directly.


    "Yes, a swordsman," Abona said.


    "It''s really surprising." Chang Nuo smiled.


    "I heard that His Majesty is also a swordsman? I wonder if I can let Abona see it?" Abona said.


    Chang Nuo, who was already lying on the recliner, just wanted to know about Abona''s situation, but now, the other party actually asked him to show it off.


    But sailing in this boundless sea, there is not much to do, so it doesn''t hurt to perform.


    Anyway, it was so boring along the way, so it would be nice to test Abona��s strength!


    But as soon as he stood up, Abona immediately became alert and said, "Your Majesty, someone is approaching quickly!"


    Chang Nuo immediately turned on his sense of sight. In his perception, there was indeed a person approaching quickly, but now the perception had no effect. After all, the other party had already appeared on the bow of his ship.


    The extremely fast speed gave people no time to react. After a golden light fell, a man who looked to be in his forties suddenly appeared above the deck.


    The man was wearing a yellow striped suit and a red tie. If not for the expression on his face, this man would give others the impression of being a very gentleman.


    "I wonder why General Kizaru came to the Abery?"


    Although Chang Nuo was a little surprised, he didn''t show too much surprise.


    Although the arrival of Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters was unexpected, it was still reasonable.

 Chapter 90 Mary Joa’s Lost Things

    <h4>Chapter 90 Mary Joa��s Lost Things</h4>


    The entire deck of the Abby was filled with an atmosphere of tension in an instant.


    Abona stood still, but his whole body was already getting ready to attack.


    Fortunately, Junhe, who was standing next to him, patted his shoulder at this time and shook his head slightly at him.


    "Ouch, what a scary group of people!"


    Kizaru looked at Chang Nuo with no expression on his face. Instead, he looked at the other people seriously.


    The ship was still sailing, and Kizaru, the admiral, had no intention of getting off the bow.


    "General Kizaru, could it be that you wanted to go somewhere and got tired beforending on our ship?" Changnuoy down on his recliner without caring, shaking his body and looking at the station. Kizaru said there.


    "King Tru, something happened on Mariejoia. Some things were stolen. I wonder if I cane to your ship to take a look?"


    Kizaru finally smiled at this moment, but it was more like a threatening word.


    Although Abona is standing in front of him at this moment, even if the Tianlong people from before appear here, it is estimated that no one can recognize his current appearance.


    He has changed his appearance, and now even when facing the navy admiral, he does not bow his head or fear in the slightest.


    For others, however, it''s more rxed andfortable.


    Chang Nuo was lying on the rocking chair and did not take this matter seriously at all. The others were even less clear about what happened. Although there was suddenly an extra Arbonna on the ship the next day, they did not do anything. Suspicious, after all, His Majesty the King knows the other party.


    Facing the arrival of Kizaru, he was an admiral after all, and Nagano lookedzy. Only Gogoya stepped forward and said with a smile, "Mr. Kizaru, why don''t youe down and have a ss of water?"


    "What a troublesome bunch of people."


    Kizaru said with a bitter look on his face, but he also did not refuse Gogoya''s invitation.


    "General Kizaru, I wonder what Marijoa lost? Is it worth your while toe so far to chase us?"


    Chang Nuo continued to speak leisurely.


    "Well~, it''s nothing. I just lost some small things. You guys have only left during this period. The people above asked me toe and take a look. It''s just a cutscene. King Tru doesn''t mind."


    Kizaru sat down and said with a smile on his face.


    Gogoya also served a drink at the same time, and then stepped aside to listen to the chat between the two.


    "Of course I don''t mind. At present, two of the three generals of the Navy have been contacted. I really don''t know if it should be considered an honor for me!"


    "Looking at you like this, you don''t show any honor!"


    Kizaru said.


    In his eyes, Chang Nuo''s behavior at this moment did not seem like he was being weed.


    "By the way, King Tohru has arrived in Mariejoia for some reason, but he didn''t join the World Government in the end?" Kizaru said again.


    "Is it possible that you really don''t know about the situation of not joining the World Government? General Aokiji was with me at that time, and he knows best about any situation encountered." Changnuo said.


    "Then why did you leave in such a hurry?"


    Hearing Kizaru''s questioning look, Changnuo immediately sat up and looked at him calmly.


    "General Kizaru, don''t say this casually. When did we leave Marigioa in a hurry?


    Since we are insulted by joining the World Government, it is natural that we should leave. Is it possible that we should also take a walk around Mariejoia to see those high-ranking Celestial Dragons who kneel down every step they take? "


    Changnuo was not only expressing the reality, but more importantly, he was mocking Kizaru.


    "Are all young people today so scary? Don''t they save us any face by talking?" Kizaru said with a helpless expression on his face.


    "General Kizaru, all of us adhere to the principle of living in peace and harmony, and do not want to cause too much trouble for ourselves. You should know better than we need to say more about Mariejoia''s situation.


    His Majesty the King was humiliated in Mariejoia and then chose not to join the World Government, so it makes sense for us to leave by boat.


    The most important thing is that we left Mariejoia yesterday morning. I don��t know if something was lost there. When was it lost? "


    Shunhe stood there, frowning and looking at Kizaru sitting there, questioningly.


    One sentence instantly left the admiral speechless. The time did not match up at all. All the things they were investigating were lost at night. So based on time, they had already left Marigioa. The scope of jurisdiction is hundreds of kilometers away, and it is impossible for him to appear in Mariejoia again.


    "Who is this?"


    Kizaru immediately changed the subject and looked at Abona and asked.


    "Groot, our royal swordsman of the Kingdom of Tru, can he also attract your attention, General Kizaru?"


    Chang Nuo asked as he sat there.


    "I am Groot. I wonder if General Kizaru has any questions?"


    Abona asked directly following Chang Nuo''s words.


    "Don''t worry, I''m just here to take a walk and bezy. I have no other intention at all. King Tru doesn''t mind."


    Kizaru said with a smile on his face instantly.


    Because he knew very well what was lost in Mariejoia. If so many items were lost, if they were all on this ship, they would definitely not be like this.


    Not to mention that those things can fill the entire cabin, even if they are stacked on the deck, they probably won''t be able to fit them.


    However, there were not many people who could arouse suspicion about this matter. When he came, Qingzhi reminded him that the people in the Tru Kingdom were not as simple as they thought.


    But if you attack a country without evidence andpletely destroy it, let''s say that if one person steps out, then the reputation of the Navy and the World Government will plummet.


    As a naval admiral, Kizaru knew this very well.


    He didn''t want to make the rtionship too rigid. He just came to investigate and didn''t pay much attention to other things.


    Looking at the expressions of everyone, Kizaru also knew that he would never gain anything from this trip. Even their performance waspletely wless, and he would not consider putting that matter on their heads. .


    "Since General Kizaru is here, let''s take a good rest. It''s a pity that we have just had a meal, otherwise we would definitely invite the general to have lunch with us."


    Chang Nuo showed a regretful expression and made a tsk-tsk sound in his mouth.

 Chapter 91 The cautious Kizaru

    <h4>Chapter 91 The cautious Kizaru</h4>


    Kizaru is probably in a mood right now, wishing that the people aboard the Abili were all pirates, so that he could attack directly without any scruples.


    Changnuo''s face from head to toe did not treat him as a naval admiral at all. His constant ridicule and sarcasm made Kizaru''s already unhappy heart even more unhappy.


    The reason is that because I am a fast runner, I came here to investigate the affairs of the Tru Kingdom fleet, but I did not expect thating here would bepletely in vain.


    But facing Chang Nuo, Kizaru could only make azy look and said, "His Majesty King Toru is too polite. There will be a chance for such a thing sooner orter. It is indeed rare to rx. After running so far here, give me His Majesty King Tru wants to say hello, isn��t it because we didn��t even have a chance to chatst time?��


    Chang Nuoughed directly when he heard this, because thest time they met was yesterday morning, a group of people were having a meeting, and they only met briefly, and there was really no contact or chat in the middle.


    "General, I wonder if you would like to take a look on the ship? Otherwise, we are afraid that we will not be able to clear ourselves of suspicion!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    This is the biggest advantage of preserving strength. Not only does it prevent people within your own circle from knowing, but also outsiders have no way to know.


    Although there is now one more person who knows his strength, Chang Nuo believes that they will not tell these things at all.


    Kizaru is now a bit stuck. The opponent is the head of a country, so he is naturally not afraid of him as a naval admiral. Even if he doesn''t give him face, Kizaru ispletely helpless about this matter.


    "It''s really embarrassing!"


    Kizaru was quite speechless and helpless. He didn''t want to explore anything inside now, but since he was already here, if he didn''t do anything, he didn''t know what others would say when he went back.


    But now that the other party has shown this attitude, Kizaru can only show his helplessness. Abby''s number is not particrly big. As early as when he came here, Kizaru had already used the Haki of Insight to explore all the ces. Although there was a lot of gold and silver jewelry on the ship,pared to what was lost on the Mariejoia, it was just a drop in the bucket.


    "General, if we don''t investigate, then it will be inconvenient for us to keep you here for a long time. You have so many things on your side, and it is impossible to dy your pursuit of Mary Joa''s affairs. We also hope that you can find her as soon as possible. Murderer, let us at least get rid of one suspicion!"


    Chang Nuo said with a leisurely smile.


    "That''s right. Things are really troublesome now. Sometimes I really envy you. You have be the king of a country at a young age and you are still so rxed andfortable. I really don''t know when the next time we meet will be. I��m already looking forward to it!��


    Kizaru said with a smile.


    "Don''t worry, there will definitely be a chance. At least I can guarantee this!"


    "Then let''s wait and see."


    Kizaru stood up with a smile, and then his whole body turned into a stream of light and flew in the other direction.


    But when he left, the hull suddenly shook slightly. Most people would not pay much attention to this kind of thing. After all, there are too many cases of hull shaking on the sea, and even a small wave may cause it. cause this result.


    But wouldn��t it be great if that was really the case?


    "The effect of the Shining Fruit is great, its speed is unmatched, and most importantly, it''s so cool!"


    Changnuoy on the recliner and looked at Kizaru leaving just now and said leisurely.


    "Your Majesty, I didn''t expect that someone could catch up after we were already so far away!" Junhe also said.


    "Admiral of the Navy Headquarters? Has he climbed to this position now! It''s really hard to imagine. If I remember correctly, this guy should be a disciple of Navy Admiral Zefa, and now he is on an equal footing with his master!"


    Abona thought about the other party''s situation and said.


    "You are right. He is indeed a disciple of ck-Wrist Zefa, but the only thing you said wrong is that the former has now left the navy, and thetter should have just taken up the position not long ago."


    Changnuo said.


    "It seems that the Navy has also undergone great changes in the past two years." Abona said.


    "Abona, since you have been in the New World for so long, you should know the situation in the New World very well. Do you want to tell us about itter?"


    Junhe looked at Abona expectantly and asked.


    "I want to listen too, I want to listen too~"


    Gogoya also came forward and looked at the two people curiously.


    "Your Majesty, the damage to the hull should have been left by the admiral when he left just now. We must find a ce to repair it!"


    While they were still chatting excitedly, Barlow hurried over and said.


    "Is there something wrong with the main keel?"


    Chang Nuo said a word, and everyone''s eyes turned towards him.


    This thing is no joke, especially on this endless sea. If the ship sinks, no one will be able to get ashore!


    "Your Majesty, how do you know there is something wrong with the main keel?" Barlow also asked in surprise.


    "You don''t need to know this kind of thing anymore. The guy moved his hands and feet when he left. It seems that he was very dissatisfied with the chat we just had!" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "But Your Majesty, the main keel is damaged, which means that the ship can no longer be used. So what should we do?"


    Barlow said.


    "Let''s walk first. If we encounter any pirate ships along the way, wouldn''t it be possible to continue to the next stop?"


    Chang Nuo still said calmly.


    Even if he was angry in his heart, he could do nothing about it. The admiral of the Navy Headquarters was now someone they could not afford to offend.


    But Chang Nuo never expected that Kizaru would be such a narrow-minded person.


    In this vast sea, the main keel of a ship is damaged. This is really a serious matter.


    Because a ship with a wooden structure like the current one isposed of one piece of wood from front to back. The bottom one is like a beam. This is the main keel of the whole, and then the ship is formed from it. The shape and space of the ship, and any other damage can be repaired, except the main keel.


    Now that everyone has sailed on this ship, the people on the ship will have a great understanding of the concept of the ship. Others have begun to panic, but they did not expect that His Majesty the King would be so calm and still He was still lying on the recliner and started to rock.

 Chapter 92 Nine Snakes Pirates

    <h4>Chapter 92 Nine Snakes Pirates</h4>


    Fortunately, Kizaru didn''t do anything too wrong before leaving. Although the main keel of the ship was damaged, their ship could still go to the ce they wanted to go if they didn''t encounter any strong winds and waves.


    This is nothing more than adding a risk to everyone. Maybe when that timees, we can only think of other ways.


    Although one ship was lost, the suspicion of what they did in Mariejoia waspletely cleared. The admiral of the Navy Headquarters had alreadye to investigate personally. Naturally, others would not consider it again and left this matter to them. on the head.


    "Just do whatever you have to do. Don''t waste your time here. Barlow, hurry up and start looking for a ce where you can repair or buy a ship."


    Chang Nuo still said with an indifferent expression. It is true that now that there are so many gold and silver treasures in his pocket, he naturally does not attach too much importance to the value of a ship.


    "His Majesty����"


    "Oh, by the way, Abona, now that the ship is like this, then naturally I can''t show my sword skills anymore. I''ll just wait until I have timeter." Chang Nuo said leisurely while lying on the deck chair?


    "Your Majesty, this is not what I am talking about, but a ship ising towards us!"


    Arbonne said.


    Where Chang Nuo looked, there was nothing at all. Now he had begun to doubt how far Abona''s knowledge and color domineering energy could sense.


    Moreover, this thing is also a swordsman. If he is a shooter, it should be very good to have this ability.


    Today''s ships always make a creaking sound when sailing on the road, giving people the feeling that the ship will sink directly to the bottom of the sea in the next second.


    But no one on the entire ship cared about this kind of thing. Now that the hull was damaged, it was natural to change its direction and set off to another ce.


    However, at this moment, more than ten kilometers away from them, a boat pulled by two huge creatures was slowly approaching their direction.


    The sails on this ship sometimes have almost no effect, and they are all dragged by the two huge creatures. The entire body of the ship is covered with red paint. From a distance, it looks very delicate and beautiful.


    On the sail is a symbol of nine snake heads, and a huge word "snake" is clearly written on the jib.


    "Sister Hancock, are we really going to ept the Navy''s invitation and be the Shichibukai?"


    At this time, on the big ship being pulled by two huge snake-like creatures, a woman with long green hair and a headrger than the two normal people squatted on the ground and looked up at a enchanting woman sitting on the deck. said.


    Boa Hancock is known as the most beautiful woman in the pirate world. In terms of appearance alone, she can indeed reach this level.


    His noble temperament is clearly highlighted even when he is sitting here.


    He has a good figure, ck hair, and exquisite facial features, but the thing sitting under his butt is not a chair, but a huge snake coiled there.


    All the people on the boat were women, at least at first nce, there were no men.


    Boya Hancock, as the future Pirate Empress, or she already is now, had no expression on her face and said very calmly, "Granny New said that joining the Shichibukai this time will do a lot of good for our country. It will have a great impact. At least in the future, whatever we do will be legal. The Navy and the World Government will not cause us any trouble during this period.


    What''s even more disgusting is that if either the Navy or the World Government is in trouble, all members of the Shichibukai must go! "


    "Sister, ording to what you said, wouldn''t we have lost all our freedom?" Sonia said.


    "Roughly the same!"


    Hancock is also a little frustrated, but if there is really a bnce between the two, she will definitely choose the former. As the leader of a country, she has the responsibility and obligation to protect those under her.


    "But there is really nothing we can do now, Sonia. My sister doesn''t want this either, but Granny New has already said it before, and we think he is right about this matter.


    I just don��t know if this is a Navy trap? "


    The person speaking at this time was a rtively fat woman. Her expression was actually simr to that of Sonia just now. There was a rtively long tongue sticking out of her mouth, which was exactly the same as a snake.


    The only difference is that his hair is orange and his head is normal size, but his body is much fatter.


    Everyone was listening to Groud''s words. The women guarding the surroundings on the deck also turned their heads to them at this moment. Seeing Her Majesty the Queen in their eyes, they were so cautious that they didn''t know how much they were showing up.


    "Grud, don''t listen to what Granny New said. That olddy is not good enough and wants to impose all this on me. I don''t know what she thinks." Hancock said.


    "But didn''t my sister ept this matter?" Sonia said directly with a smile.


    "Shut up, this is just what I want!"


    Hancock showed a proud posture, his head slightly raised, looking contemptuous of others.


    This is her character. At the same time, at this moment, the person responsible for the lookout shouted down, "Be on guard, there is an unknown ship ahead, and it is moving quickly towards us!"


    As the words fell, the women below quickly rushed to the deck one by one, all looking in the direction of the Abby.


    Sonia passed directly over the crowd. When she saw the Abery, she turned to Hancock who was sitting on the big snake in the back and shouted, "Sister, it seems that a merchant ship is passing by, should we take action?"


    Hancock stood up directly from his original sitting position, followed by Groud, and at the same time stood on the deck and began to look at the Abery.


    In their sight, the Abby at this moment was already a fat sheep waiting to be ughtered, and it was also the key topleting their mission to sea.


    "Give me the order to capture this ship. This mission of sailing to the sea is over!"


    Hancock shouted to everyone.


    They don''t care at all who is on the other side''s ship now. As long as they are not from the navy or the World Government, they are all targets.


    Even these women have begun to be eager to try, and they are no different from the men in their eagerness.

 Chapter 93 The most beautiful woman in the pirate world

    <h4>Chapter 93 The most beautiful woman in the pirate world</h4>


    Almost all the women on a ship have bows and arrows in their hands, either on their backs or in their hands. The other weapon they hold is a spear.


    In this pirate world that is tending towards modernization, the weapons they all use are still rtively primitive, but how powerful they are can only be known after trying them.


    As the two ships got closer and closer, the people aboard the Abby were not worried at all. Many people had even begun to gather on the deck, ready to seize the other party''s pirate ship at any time.


    There are currently about 80 people on the Changnuo ship, including 20 of the King''s Guards who are following them. Each one of them is extremely powerful. Those who can follow must at least be able to use Haki, otherwise If you follow me, it won''t be of any use.


    Chang Nuo continued to lie quietly on the rocking chair on the deck, looking at the ship ahead with his eyes open.


    As early as when he could sense the other party, Chang Nuo was already a little surprised. He had never expected that he would encounter the Nine Snakes Pirates in this inhospitable ce.


    "Your Majesty, as this is the first battle, I hope that Abona can take action this time!"


    Abona stood next to Changnuo''s rocking chair and said respectfully.


    But before Chang Nuo could say anything, Junhe immediately said with some dissatisfaction, "Abona, you have just joined the kingdom. There are some things that you cannot fight for. As the captain of the King''s Guard, I, like this kind of task, It��s our responsibility!��


    "Captain Junhe, let me step forward just once. His Majesty the King saved me. I must show my worth!" Abona said again.


    "you����"


    "You two, stop fighting. Can''t you just stay here quietly? Don''t do anything. Take a good look at each other. On the other side is the most beautiful woman on the entire sea. Let me pass by you first. Let��s talk about addiction. ��


    Chang Nuo looked carefree and leisurely, directly interrupting the two people''s continued argument.


    Now he wants to see her wholeheartedly, so what does the so-called most beautiful woman in the pirate world look like? How could he be disturbed by these two guys?


    "Your Majesty, how do you know that the other person is beautiful? I have never heard of such a thing!" Junhe asked.


    "If you are asked to take care of so much, please let me know. Don''t do anything if nothing happens, but be sure to protect yourself. These women are not as simple as you think." Chang Nuo said.


    "Your Majesty, do you know this person here?" Abona asked in surprise.


    "I know a hammer. Stay here and listen to my orderster. Don''t hurt the harmony between the two parties. We have to borrow someone else''s boat to get to a safe ce!"


    Chang Nuo was lying on the rocking chair, knocking on the armrests with both hands, and speaking in a slow voice.


    Others have now begun to wonder, what happened to His Majesty the King? Could it be that because the other person may be beautiful, he bes like this?


    "Your Majesty, the opponent is the Nine Snakes Pirates. It is the only country on the Grand Line that is dominated by pirates. The most important thing is...the opponent''s country is dominated by women, and they hate all men they see!"


    Gogoya was a little jealous, holding a notebook and wearing ck sses frames, and introduced Chang Nuo seriously.


    "You came toote with this news. You already knew it from the beginning. Boya Hancock, the pirate captain of the other party, is also the empress of the Daughter Kingdom.


    And the other party currently also has Haki, knows armaments and knowledge, and has Overlord Haki. He is also a Devil Fruit user and has the ability to turn people into stone. "


    Chang Nuoy there and said leisurely.


    Several other people were speechless when they heard this. Howe His Majesty the King seems to know everything? They usually stay together. They really don''t understand when they came to understand these things.


    "Okay, we will meet soon. Everyone, get ready to meet the savior who can help us next!"


    Changnuo smiled slightly, then stood up andy on the guardrail, supporting his head with both hands, and quietly looked at the pirate group in front of him who was not far away.


    At this moment, everyone on the Nine Snakes Pirates was surprised. Why did the other partye straight towards their ship? It was as if no one noticed the people on their side.


    "Sister, should we attack with artillery fire first?" Sonia asked.


    Everyone in the Nine Snakes Pirates is now on standby, and everyone is ready to attack.


    "No need for now!"


    Boya Hancock stood there, her eyes no longer the same as before. The most important thing was that she found that the people on the other side''s ship seemed to being for people like herself.


    They didn''t panic at all. From what they had seen and heard, they realized that there were not many people on the other side, and they were still lying on the deck guardrail looking towards them.


    Hancock didn''t know why, but there was always a bad feeling in his heart.


    The distance between the two ships is only about a mile. If you have a good vision, you can vaguely see the figures on the other side''s ship.


    On the Abby, because they had received the order from His Majesty the King, all of them did not maintain any fighting status. Instead, after learning that the other party was from the Daughter''s Kingdom, many peopley on the fence around the ship. Everyone looked at each other expectantly.


    "Abona, you are a swordsman. After joining us, you have nothing to give as a gift. From now on, I will give you this sword!"


    At the edge of the deck, Chang Nuo casually threw a long knife to Abona, which he had just purchased from the system space. The key is that what he purchased this time was the supreme sharp knife in the One Piece world.


    Because the current state of the world cannot be changed, the knife he purchased disappeared many years ago, and there is nothing wrong with it reappearing here now.


    But the price of this thing is indeed not cheap. One knife has already consumed more than 200 million beli. At least Changnuo is an absolute rich man at this moment. The gold and silver jewelry he owns, it is not worth buying another 100. question!


    It''s not that he has to act like a rich man. After all, this guy is now his subordinate, and he still needs to be given the welfare status that he should be given. Otherwise, how can he expect his position to be sacrificed?


    Not knowing what kind of situation he would encounter next, Changnuo thought about arming Abona.


    During the short period of getting along, Abona slowly began to gain his trust.

 Chapter 94 Boarding the Pirate Ship

    <h4>Chapter 94 Boarding the Pirate Ship</h4>


    After suddenly taking the knife, Abona was confused. He hadn''t even reacted yet. Where did his Majesty the King get a weapon and throw it to him?


    "Your Majesty, this..."


    Abona was a little embarrassed and wanted to say something, but at this time he only heard Chang Nuo say: "The supreme sharp sword Dawn is suitable for your status as a swordsman. Although I don''t know your attainments in swordsmanship, if you can''t do it in the future, If you be a great swordsman, this weapon will really lose face."


    "The supreme sharp knife!!"


    Abner was already a little at a loss. As a swordsman, he naturally understood the weight of the sword in his hand!


    So when he learned the name of this knife, he was quite surprised.


    The whole person''s eyes are no longer looking at the opponent''s pirate group, and they arepletely attracted by the weapons in their hands.


    "Your Majesty, Abona will definitelyplete the mission you have given us!"


    When no one noticed, Abona knelt directly on the deck, knocked his head tightly on the ground, and shouted loudly with respect and gratitude.


    Jun just nced at them and showed a kind smile, without observing too much.


    Chang Nuo also smiled, and then said, "Get up! This matter is not as serious as you think."


    "His Majesty not only saved Abona''s life, but was also willing to trust Abona so much. Everything I did was deserved!"


    Abona continued to speak excitedly.


    "Okay, get up quickly and don''t let the other party feel how harsh we are."


    Changnuo finally couldn''t help but said directly. His eyes had never left the ship of the Nine Snakes Pirates, and he really didn''t have much thought to turn around and deal with Abona.


    The two ships are now getting closer and closer, and people on both sides can clearly see each other''s faces, but they have not fired at each other. For Hancock''s group of pirates, they probably didn''t think about it. Want the other person''s life.


    Then the people on Changnuo''s side were even more different. When they saw that there were indeed women on the other side''s boat, everyone almost abandoned the boat and wanted to go up and enjoy it.


    "Oh, these are two big snakes!"


    Gogoya stood there and looked at the two snakes pulling their boat, and couldn''t help but be surprised and sighed.


    "This pirate group is really different. Your Majesty, do you need your subordinates to go up and investigate first?"


    Junhe asked calmly.


    "Let''s talk first and then talk!"


    Changnuo is not so anxious now. Although the ship has been partially destroyed by Kizaru, it will not fall apart immediately.


    The Kuja Pirates.


    On the boat here, the women were also carefully watching the people on the opposite boat.


    For these people, they have no idea what the g flying on the Abby belongs to. It is a merchant ship or something belonging to a certain country. They don''t care at all.


    For them, as long as they are not ships of the Navy or the World Government, it has almost no impact.


    It is because of this mentality that the people on the Nine Snakes Pirates have no feelings at all about the Abri, which has gradually begun to get closer to them.


    "Sister, none of the people above them seem to be afraid?"


    Groud saw that the people on Abby''s ount were all interested in admiring the beauties on them.


    The two ships are now only about 50m apart, so the shouts of the people on the ship can now be heard clearly.


    It''s just that the distance between the two ships is still getting closer. How could Hancock not notice it!


    She had already sensed that something was wrong. The people above her were acting too calmly. Generally speaking, whether it was a ship from a certain country or a merchant ship, their first reaction when seeing a pirate would be to either take a detour or leave. There was fear on her face, but in her eyes, the people on this ship didn''t seem to care at all whether they were pirates or not!


    "Queen Snake Princess, they have all entered our attack range, do you want to start attacking now?"


    Just when Boya Hancock was still hesitating, a woman standing on the deck shouted loudly towards her.


    But now there is no time to hesitate, the ships on both sides are about to get close to each other.


    On the Abery, Chang Nuo looked at the situation and turned to Junhe and Abona and said, "Let''s go! Go and see them, remember not to do anything casuallyter."


    "Okay, Your Majesty."


    The two said together, and then directly followed their Majesty''s figure and quickly moved to the ship of the Nine Snakes Pirates.


    Only then did Hancock realize that his feeling was correct. The people on the other side''s ship were even stronger than he had imagined.


    Chang Nuo led the two of them and jumped directly to the pirate ship. ording to their current strength, all the people on the entire pirate shipbined were probably not enough to kill three people.


    At this time, the Nine Snakes Pirates were not as powerful as they imagined, and even Chang Nuo had overestimated their expectations.


    "Boya Hancock?"


    After Changnuo jumped on the boat, he walked directly to Hancock, mainly staying here to be able to recognize him at a nce, with his iconic clothes and beauty.


    I had watched it in the anime before, but I didn��t expect that after seeing her in person this time, she was indeed the same as I imagined. As the most beautiful woman in the pirate world, she can definitely bear such a title.


    The woman in front of her has fair skin and is at least about 1.8 meters tall. Her body is very well-proportioned, especially the golden proportion of facial features in appearance. It is simply the best arrangement of the Creator.


    The entire pirate ship was on full alert. As long as they made the slightest move, these people would rush up and fight like them.


    Especially Groud, who was standing at the front. This fat girl looked to be about the same age as Chang Nuo. She was holding a spear in her hand, pointing directly at Chang Nuo, with fierce and firm eyes.


    "Grud, please step back first!"


    Hancock walked up to Groud and gave him instructions.


    Behind Chang Nuo stood Junhe and Abona, especially Abona. The look in his eyes and the aura exuding from his body at this moment had even overwhelmed the people on the entire pirate ship.


    "Are you Boya Hancock?"


    Changnuo asked again looking at the beautiful woman standing in front of him.


    "You came here specifically to find me? What is your purpose?"


    Hancock still maintained his arrogant aura, as if speaking condescendingly to Chang Nuo.

 Chapter 95 The angry domineering look

    <h4>Chapter 95 The angry domineering look</h4>


    "She is indeed pretty good-looking, with exquisite facial features and a perfect figure. She is the most beautiful woman in the pirate world."


    Changnuo smiled and looked at Hancock in front of him.


    "How dare you tease my sister!"


    "If I were you, I would definitely recognize the facts. ording to your current strength, any one of the two people behind me can destroy your entire pirate ship. But I am not interested in these things, and so are you. What a coincidence.


    Next, let me borrow your ship. Our Abby is now damaged and may not be able to sail tond. There are almost eighty people on our ship. We will board your ship until we find a ce to rece it. "


    Changnuo listened to Sonia''s angry voice and spoke directly.


    Hancock is not unreasonable. The most important thing is that he can clearly understand the current situation. The opponent''s strength is indeed as he said. I am afraid that any one person can destroy the entire pirate ship now.


    "Why do you know me? Who are you?" Hancock asked.


    "The Kingdom of Tru in the South China Sea is upying your ship now. I hope you can cooperate well." Chang Nuo said.


    "I am a pirate, and I will notpromise so easily even if I die."


    Hancock''s expression immediately turned cold as he faced Chang Nuo, and she shouted loudly, "Captive''s Arrow..."


    Hancock used his Devil Fruit ability and put his left hand to his mouth. When he pulled it out, a huge red heart shape appeared. Then he pulled the heart shape directly with his right hand. When he let go, the whole heart shape appeared. The heart shape immediately turned into countless pink flying arrows.


    However, the target of his attack this time was not Chang Nuo, but everyone currently on the Abri.


    "careful����"


    Junhe suddenly shouted, but it was still toote.


    It only took a moment. In an instant, all the people on the Abby were turned into stone statues and stood there.


    Their faces still maintained their original expressions, and they didn''t even have time to react.


    "court death!"


    Chang Nuo stood on the spot and shouted angrily, his domineering aura instantly sweeping across the entire area.


    Everyone on the Nine Snakes ship fainted to the ground in just an instant, leaving only Hancock and the three sisters standing there.


    But the Overlord''s color did not fail to impact them. Both Groud and Sonia used their weapons to lean on the ground, struggling to support their huge bodies, for fear that they would also fall to the groundter.


    "Overlord color!!"


    Hancock''s face was full of shock. Although she was not greatly affected, sweat began to form on her forehead at the moment when her domineering color started to shine.


    Although he had sensed how powerful the other party was, he never expected that the other party''s overbearing domineering energy had been used to such an extent.


    "It''s indeed a domineering color!"


    Abona stood behind him and couldn''t help but mutter to himself with the corners of his mouth slightly raised.


    "Hancock, hurry up and unpetrify them, otherwise, I will use your entire daughter country to pay the price for this!"


    Chang Nuo said in a cold voice.


    He knew that if the petrification was lifted within a certain period of time, it would not have any impact on them, but if the time was extended, no one was sure what would happen.


    "Let the people on this ship go, and I will help them unpetrify them!"


    Hancock''s voice started to tremble a little as he said.


    He didn''t want to use the lives of people like himself to pay for this mistake of his. The other party''s strength was beyond her imagination. At the beginning, she just wanted to use the truth of those people to contain Chang Nuo, but the result was beyond her. The range that can be tolerated.


    "I had no intention of disturbing you, I just wanted to treat your ship as if it had found a rtively nearby ce to dock. I can forgive you for your unreasonable behavior this time, and afternding, I can also pay you 100 million beli aspensation. "


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "good."


    Hancock said.


    There was no choice for him now, but just when he was about to undo the petrification, Sonia, who was standing behind him, suddenly shouted, "Sister..."


    "Little girl, I advise you not to do stupid things. As long as my Majesty gives orders, I don''t mind letting you reunite in another ce!"


    Before Sonia could say anything, Abona had alreadye to his side without knowing when. The entire knife was already ced on the opponent''s shoulder. Although he did not pull it out, this aura belonged to a swordsman. , instantly made Sonia��s eyes zed over.


    "stop����"


    Hancock quickly pushed Sonia away and looked at Changnuo with worried eyes.


    "Abona, you and Junhe go back to the boat first. I want to talk to them alone about something!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile with the corners of his mouth raised slightly.


    "Then please be careful, Your Majesty!"


    Junhe said.


    These two people are not worried about their majesty''s safety at all, especially Junhe, who is very aware of his majesty''s abilities.


    When he first fought against the CP, Junheko saw with his own eyes that his Majesty''s Devil Fruit ability was just like a natural fruit. No attack could hurt him at all.


    The two of them looked at each other. Although they didn''t know what Chang Nuo was up to, they still jumped back to the Abili very wisely.


    Watching the two people leaving, everyone on the ship was now in aa, Chang Nuo sat on the stool on the deck without any politeness.


    "Can we start untying it?"


    Changnuo asked with a smile.


    Hancock looked at his two sisters with a look of helplessness on his face, and then used the same move again. When the captive arrows hit the petrified people on the ship again, they seemed to feel nothing and continued Maintaining the image of smiling and chatting as before.


    For them, time is equivalent to standing still. During this period, there is no change. Even the hand that was originally stretched out still moves ording to the established trajectory, without feeling any difort or surprise.


    "Now that it''s untied, tell me, what do you want?"


    Hancock licked his dry lips and asked with a little fear in his heart.


    This is the end of rtively low strength. The Pirate Empress of this period ispletely inferior to that of theter period. It is not an exaggeration to say that she is too weak to be pitiful.


    I originally thought what kind of situation he would reach, but after he came up, he discovered that these women didn''t even know how to use their domineering power? I really don��t know how they were able to be invited by the navy to be the Shichibukai?

 Chapter 96 The Hoof of the Heavenly Dragon

    <h4>Chapter 96 The Hoof of the Heavenly Dragon</h4>


    Perhaps the current timeline is too early, and as a result, many pirates are not as strong as they imagined, as seen now.


    Hancock''s strength was really far behind what he imagined, but after hearing what the other party said, Changnuo straightened his clothes and said with a smile, "I don''t have too many ideas, I just want to It''s just a matter of borrowing a boat, but you don''t need to be too hostile. I know your experience. We are not interested in these things, and of course we will not tell them.


    As long as today''s incident passes and we all live in peace from now on, just pretend that nothing happened. What do you think? "


    "Do you think I still have a choice now?"


    Hancock is very dissatisfied, but what can he do if he is dissatisfied?


    "Then I''m going to trouble you next. Oh, by the way, I forgot to mention one thing. I have a way to remove that thing on your back. Are you interested?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly turned his head and said to Hancock with a smile.


    But how can the three sisters still be in the mood tomunicate now? When they heard Chang Nuo say these words, the three of them all turned pale. With pale expressions and dull eyes, there was no need to think too much. , already know what their inner fears are like.


    "Hey, hey, hey, don''t look at me with this expression. It''s just to repay your help. Or, if you want to repay me in the future, how about you consider bing my princess?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly said with a smile.


    After saying that, he went directly into the system space and spent nearly 200 million Baileys to buy three bottles of something that could repair their scars.


    Chang Nuo knew that the most fearful thing for these three sisters was that they were worried that others would see the Tianlong horse hoof prints on their backs. This thing was exclusive to ves. Abona also had this thing on his body, but people didn''t care about it. As if he didn''t mind at all.


    "Why do you know so much? Who are you?"


    Hancock asked with a trembling voice.


    After Chang Nuo got on the ship, Hancock had already felt that this man, who was about the same age as him, knew too much about them. He even seemed to be like the people around him, the three of him. The matter has never been told to anyone. The key is where did the guy opposite know about it?


    This kind of thing makes people think about it with horror, and Hancock is certainly no exception.


    She desperately wants to know the answers to everything, and doesn''t want anyone to know that they were once ves of the Celestial Dragons. This is also the most painful point in their lives.


    "Well~, what can I do if I know? Didn''t I juste back from Mariejoia? I found something with a Tianlong. Your names seem to be recorded on it, but it has been burned by me. Besides, That is, I also...killed that Tianlong man.


    Abona is his ve, but now that I have taken him out, he can only follow me well from now on. I wonder if you are satisfied with this answer? "


    Chang Nuo immediately started talking nonsense, blending truth and lies together, and after all, he could create an answer that he could exin perfectly.


    "Did you kill the Celestial Dragon?"


    Hancock asked in surprise.


    The eyes of the two girls next to him were also dull, and they couldn''t believe that this thing was true.


    "How do you think our ship was damaged?


    Less than half an hour ago, Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters chased here to check the news. In the end, to no avail, he secretly destroyed our hull, so we ended up looking like what we are now. Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "I heard they called you Your Majesty just now! Are you the king of the Tru Kingdom in the South China Sea?"


    Groud seemed to have a good impression, staring at Chang Nuo and asked.


    Chang Nuo was still sitting on the stool at this moment, looking at the three people standing there quietly. Not one of the unconscious people on the entire ship had woken up. As for the people on the Abby, all of them had piercing eyes. Stare this way.


    "Let them all get on board! Your ship won''tst long."


    Hancock looked at Chang Nuo and did not answer Groud''s words. He began to return to his previous arrogant state, but his personality seemed to be different from before. His words were full of calmness and gentleness. state.


    After she finished speaking, she turned around and walked in the other direction. The huge snake was also lying there because of its domineering look. Hancock just wanted to go over and see the condition of that guy.


    As for his two sisters, they both stared at his sister with curious and surprised faces. When had his sister spoken to a man so softly, and even more so casually agreed to the other person''s request?


    Chang Nuo smiled. Let''s not talk about anything else. From the first moment he saw this woman after boarding the ship, he was indeed full of affection. Just from the appearance, Hancock was definitely in the minds of all men. goddess.


    Although there may be some shorings in her character, after understanding her life past, one can basically sympathize with her current state.


    "What ind is closest to here?"


    Changnuo asked, looking at Groud and Sonia with a smile.


    "You''re talking about this! Well..., it should be the closest to our daughter''s country. It should take about three days to get to our ce from here. In our impression, it takes almost two days to get to the nearest ind, but there is no one there. No one to live in, let alone any recement ships.


    Then the next inhabited ind is far away. I''m afraid it will take at least seven days to arrive. "


    Sonia looked at Changnuo and said quickly.


    Chang Nuo didn''t even understand it himself. The two parties were clearly at war with each other just now, but now the people on their side were still lying on the ground and had not woken up. Now they seemed to be very familiar with each other.


    Groud also had the same expression. He didn''t care at all about what happened just now, and he was full of affection for the man in front of him.


    "ording to what you said, it''s a bit of a headache! This matter will be more troublesome to deal with." Chang Nuo said with a sigh.


    While he was still chatting, Junhe had already started to pack up and move towards the ship with other people on the ship. This time it was a good opportunity to catch up, mainly because the people on their ship were I brought a lot of women''s clothes here, but now they have no use in bringing them back. They can just be given as meeting gifts to these women in the Daughter Kingdom.


    Moreover, they needed to move a lot of things. In addition to the things mentioned on the ship, there were also some daily food and the like, but there were not particrly many gold, silver, and jewelry.

 Chapter 97 People on a Boat

    <h4>Chapter 97 People on a Boat</h4>


    Now no one will be polite to these pirates, each and every one of them seems to have returned to their own home.


    Hancock watched all this, but didn''t say anything in the end. Although she hated these men, she couldn''t do anything about it.


    However, the two Groud sisters are having a good chat with Chang Nuo now, without any hostile behavior at all.


    However, those lying on the ground were still lying on the ground. Only three people in the entire Kuji Pirates were still able to chat.


    Hancock stood on the deck. The snake that belonged to his mount was still lying peacefully on the ground. In her eyes, the people on the Abery were moving towards their ship one by one. Things, even with a look of disgust, she could only do this.


    On the ship, Junhe was still wary of Hancock. The other people on the ship were busy moving things. Although the Abby would not sink in a short time, the people on the ship already regarded it as a ship that was about to sink. After receiving the treatment, everyone hurriedly began to move the items one by one to the Nine Snakes pirate ship.


    After thest person boarded the ship, Junhe took inventory again, then walked to Changnuo who was chatting with two women and said, "Your Majesty, everything has been prepared andpleted, and there are many people."


    "Okay, then get ready to go!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    At this moment, the fainted members of the Nine Snakes Pirates are also waking up one after another. Although they are still a little shaky after standing up, the first moment they wake up, they are all on guard immediately and holding the weapons in their hands. Get ready to attack.


    If Hancock hadn''t still been standing on the deck, the conflict between the two sides might have escted again.


    "Why don''t we start? We''re on my ship, so please don''t give us any orders!"


    Hancock walked next to Chang Nuo, and happened to hear what he was saying to Jun He, and he immediately became angry and said.


    "Why bother with this kind of thing? Now we can be considered as people in the same boat. Anyway, your boat has such a big space. When we get to the next stop, the two parties will be in peace."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Hancock stood there hesitating, wanting to say something, but in the end he still didn''t know how to open his mouth.


    "Sister, King Changnuo doesn''t have any bad intentions. Besides, after we send him to his destination, they will pay the corresponding fees. I think this is good!"


    Groud stood up and said.


    "Grud, what benefit has this man given you? Don''t forget that we are in this together!" Hancock said.


    "Don''t divide us so clearly. If your daughter country can provide us with a ship, then we can also make discoveries on our own. In such a special situation, it is not what we want."


    Changnuo said.


    "There is an ind only two miles away from here. We can only send you there. You can figure out what happens by yourself."


    Hearing what Hancock said, Jun He didn''t have a good expression. He looked at each other seriously and coldly and said, "Do you think we are negotiating terms with you now? Please don''t bring your status to be equal to ours." , if you talk to our Majesty again with the same attitude, I don��t mind letting this ship be the private product of our Kingdom of Tru!��


    "Junhe, we are all a group of girls. Don''t speak so harshly. We will spend a long time together in the future. In the future, I may be the princess of King Tohru you call me!"


    Changnuo was reprimanding Junhe on the surface, but everyone could understand the underlying words.


    Can such words be called a reprimand? He was talking leisurely all the time, speaking so slowly, with a smile on his face, and didn''t take what Junhe said at all seriously.


    Two people, one is a good person and the other is a bad person, but the size is still just right.


    "Let Barlow control the direction of the ship and check the nearest ind to us, especially the one where the ship can be found. If that doesn''t work, go directly to the Seven Waters Capital." Changnuo said to Junhe again. Said once.


    "No, we don''t have that much time to apany you. The Capital of Seven Waters is too far away from here. I hope you won''t go too far!" Hancock said coldly.


    "That''s right, King Changnuo. It will take at least half a month to reach the Capital of Seven Waters from here. People in our country are still waiting for us to go back. If it takes a long time, it will definitely cause them to worry." Sony Ya also said.


    "How about we go to your country?"


    Chang Nuo touched his chin, thought for a moment, and said with a smile on his face.


    "But our country does not allow men toe close, otherwise my sister will be angry." Sonia said.


    "Your Majesty, why bother talking nonsense to these people? In the worst case, you will die with them."


    Every one of the women who had woken up on the ship cast angry looks, especially when they heard that Chang Nuo was going to their country, each and every one of them couldn''t help their anger and shouted directly at Hancock arrive.


    "Are they a little too noisy? If that doesn''t work, how about letting them sleep again?" Chang Nuo said with a smile to Hancock.


    The opponent himself was already in fear and embarrassment, and now he was even more caught between his subordinates and the unbeatable Chang Nuo.


    She could only stand there and clenched her fists, frowning but not saying anything.


    "Junhe, tell Barlow to move towards the nearest ind. If you encounter other ships on the way, just dock close to them. We can''t embarrass these people too much."


    Changnuo said.


    "Okay, Your Majesty."


    "After all, there are differences between men and women. Tell them not to walk around casually on this ship." Chang Nuo ordered again.


    Junhe nodded, and then began to follow the instructions.


    "You should be satisfied now, right?" Chang Nuo looked at Hancock and said helplessly.


    The other party is nowpletely like a little girl. She has no opinion or even any thoughts of resistance. She understands how powerful the other party''s group is and can only maintain the status quo for the sake of the people of her own country.


    "Do you really have something that will erase the scars on our backs?"


    Hancock asked cautiously, his voice was not very loud and he was afraid that others would hear him.


    A shy look was also reflected on her face at this moment, and she looked quite cute.


    Being able to say this sentence already represented that she had mustered up the courage, and even the matter itself was thest thing she wanted to face.

 Chapter 98 Pleasant Voyage

    <h4>Chapter 98 Pleasant Voyage</h4>


    Now I no longer care about how Chang Nuo knows the secrets about them, but the things behind them have indeed been bothering them for many years. Even though they feel a little embarrassed, they still have no choice but to ask.


    The two sisters Sonia and Groud standing next to Chang Nuo also stared at him expectantly, licking their lips constantly, also looking forward to getting a definite answer.


    "It''s not the time to discuss this matter yet, but what I can tell you is that since I have said it, it is true, and you don''t have to have any doubts." Changnuo said with a smile.


    "ok, I get it."


    After listening to Hancock''s words, Sonia looked around and asked in a low voice, "King Changnuo, this matter is very important to us. I just want to confirm again, can you really do it?"


    "Don''t worry, I won''t mind giving you things when we dock." Chang Nuo said with a smile again.


    Smiles suddenly appeared on the faces of her two sisters. The trouble this matter caused them was no longer something that could be measured by money.


    As the Kuja pirate ship began to sail away, the Avery was nowpletely empty. All valuable things on it had been emptied, leaving only an empty ship that was about to sink at some point.


    But before the Nine Snakes pirate ship started to set off, the Abby, which was still in good condition, was instantly prated by a sword that shot into the sky. Under the eyes of everyone, it went straight from the bow to the The stern of the boat slowly split into two halves.


    Immediately afterwards, it began to sink into the sea water, leaving no trace at all on the sea surface.


    "Wow. Abona, you are really amazing!!"


    On the deck, Junhe kept shouting and patting Abona''s shoulders, feeling extremely shocked.


    Although they had already understood that Abona''s strength might not be simple, this was just the first time they took action, and they were already convinced.


    Not to mention the people from the Tru Kingdom, even the people from the Nine Snakes Pirate Ship were all dumbfounded at this moment.


    With one knife, the entire ship waspletely split into two halves. This kind of strength was already beyond their reach.


    "Abona, with the help of the knowledge and color, this sword has indeed reached its peak!"


    Chang Nuo couldn''t help but walked over and praised Abona without hesitation.


    "Your Majesty, I have heard Captain Junhe mention that you once killed an out-of-control natural devil fruit dog with one knife, and most importantly, you once destroyed a small ind with a knife. At least this One thing I can��t do right now, in Arbonne��s opinion.��


    Abona said respectfully to Chang Nuo.


    "You really can''t hide anything!"


    Changnuo looked at Junhe who had lowered his head now and said with a speechless expression.


    They have only been in contact for a day now, and they have told each other so many things in such a short period of time, which is really surprising.


    Chang Nuo doesn''t care about such things. Anyway, they are already partners from now on, and it doesn''t matter if they know more or less.


    Hancock and others standing behind him on the other side of the deck were also observing the movements of these men at all times.


    Although the Kuja Pirate Ship is not very small, they can hear the chatting on both sides of the deck very clearly even if they stay here.


    "Sister, they are really strong!"


    Groud''s eyes were already straight. She saw the whole knife that Abona swung just now, and now she said in shock.


    It''s not that others didn''t see it, Hancock also saw all this in his eyes, and was even a little grateful for the choice he made before.


    At least not going against this group of people was the wisest choice she made just now.


    "Sister Hancock, what do you think of King Tru''s strength?" Sonia asked.


    "These are not things you worry about, just do your own thing and don''t worry about them!"


    Hancock said angrily.


    This ship, which had never been lively, had so many people joining it, and there were so many women from the Daughter Kingdom. At first, the two parties were somewhat hostile, but after getting along for less than half a day, no matter whether it was in the cabin or On the deck, everyone has begun toe alive with the sound of theirughter.


    The king''s guards in Changnuo were allughing and chatting, and there were even at least two or three women from the Nine Snakes Pirates sitting next to each of them.


    They were talking about the development of their country in the past two years, and both were praising their King. The other party was also telling about their life as pirates at sea over the years. Anyway, the two sides are now enjoying each other happily, and there is no distinction between them. .


    Chang Nuo was happy to see this scene. As for Hancock, he could only force the two Sonia sisters to stay with him with a look of helplessness on his face.


    There are almost more than a hundred members of the Nine Snakes Pirates on this ship. In addition to the seventy or eighty people on the Avery, a team of one or two hundred people is on this ship. No matter how you turn around, it will be Can see each other.


    As the sky gradually darkened, Chang Nuoy on the rocking chair on the deck and said leisurely to Gogoya next to him, "Order all personnel in the Tru Kingdom to sleep on the deck at night, and do not disturb the group of people." woman!"


    He didn''t mean to say this to anyone, he just thought it would be better.


    But even though the voice was not loud, it was still heard by Hancock who passed by identally.


    Gogoya smiled. He felt that his Majesty must have fallen in love with the other party''s queen, so he behaved like this.


    Hancock is now seventeen or eighteen years old, just in his prime, and Gogoya also quite approves of this incident.


    "Your Majesty, why don''t I tell them after dinner in the evening? People on both sides are preparing for the banquet now, so at least we should wait until after dinner!"


    Gogoya asked with a smile.


    "You can just arrange this kind of thing yourself." Chang Nuo said.


    No matter who made such a decision on this matter, Changnuo at least would not make some things too absolute.


    Because so many people have joined, almost all the defense work on this ship has been handed over to these people from the Tru Kingdom.


    Junhe stayed in the watchtower at the top of the mast, always observing the changes around him.


    Abona stayed on the quietest roof of the ship, quietly enjoying the freedom that belonged to him, and trying hard to listen to the sound of the sea, which was a long-lost call to him.

 Chapter 99 Lively atmosphere

    <h4>Chapter 99 Lively atmosphere</h4>


    At night, it waspletely dark. It was almost impossible to see even one''s fingers on this huge sea, let alone the direction.


    But at this moment, there was a different lively scene on the pirate ship.


    One or two hundred people on the ship were crowded on the deck. Although the area of ????this deck was not veryrge, it seemed very crowded to amodate two hundred people, but at this moment, no one among them cared about this kind of thing.


    Chang Nuo and Hancock were sitting at the front, and there were people sitting beside and behind them. At this moment, each of them was either holding a wine jar or eating meat. For this moment, this It is the freedom that everyone longs for.


    Originally, there was more food on board the Abby. Although the Nine Snakes Pirate Ship was not as rich as imagined, this banquet was held with most of the food for the first time.


    Most of the women in the pirate group are wearing women''s clothes taken from the Abby. They all look quite elegant and elegant. Even the two Sonia sisters have their own exquisite clothes. .


    On the deck, everyone wasughing andughing, and now they probably no longer differentiated between men and women. At the end of the drink, they were all hugging each other, and the image of arms around each other was no longer distinguishable.


    These people from the Tru Kingdom have probably had the most fun today since they first went to sea. After all, they are apanied by so many women. However, for these people from the Daughter Kingdom, they all hated men before, but after they really came into contact with them, , only to discover that male creatures are actually much more interesting than imagined.


    Even while eating, there were many women taking notes, outlining in detail the scenes of ying with men.


    Changnuo didn''t drink much, he just watched the excitement of this group of people quietly. Except for Abona, even Jun and the captain of the king''s guard had been pulled into the crowd by Gogoya and started drinking. .


    "It''s really rare to see such a pleasant scene. I think you guys feel the same, right?"


    Chang Nuo looked at the excitement of the group and asked Hancock next to him with a smile.


    There is a huge light shining down above the deck, so the entire deck looks as bright as day, and there is no dark scene.


    Hancock turned his head and nced at Chang Nuo, who was almost the same age as him. Whether it was because she drank a little wine or for some other reason, her face suddenly turned crimson.


    "Can you tell me something about your country?" Hancock asked shyly.


    Both parties have been staying for a day, and they have already started talking about the things that should be discussed. Hancock did not stop his subordinates frommunicating with the men of the Tru Kingdom. Although they were a little angry at the beginning, they After all, he couldn''t stop such a thing.


    These people in the Tru Kingdom are all enthusiastic and unrestrained, without any etiquette, but they will not break the rules either.


    Changnuo felt Hancock''s gaze, raised the corner of his mouth and smiled, and finally organized his words and said, "If you are interested, you can take the time to go and take a look. Your ship has the ability to cross the windless zone and reach As for the Tru Kingdom in the South China Sea, it won��t take long. Maybe by then, you can change your career as a pirate and create a warm country of your own. At least you don��t have to worry about whether you have a good meal or not. "


    "The Daughter Country is a martial arts country, and no one can calm down and do business. The country itself is a small ind with small resources. This is the only way we can think of, and we have always been a country based on pirates. It is estimated that Your approach doesn''t suit us very well," Hancock said with a smile.


    But I have to say, this woman smiles really beautifully!


    The surrounding sea water rippled with the lights emitted from the boat, and the gentle sea breeze also blew everyone''s heartstrings.


    Chang Nuo understood that the daughter country could not achieve the same specifications and models as theirs. There were only tens of thousands of people in the entire country. What they had always inherited was to implement the pirate model to achieve domestic economy and development.


    This is a long-standing habit and the most fundamental reason why they practice martial arts.


    "Why did you pass through this sea area when you returned to the Tru Kingdom?"


    Seeing that Chang Nuo didn''t speak, Hancock asked again.


    "I want to go somewhere, so I may have to pass by here, otherwise how could I meet you?"


    What Chang Nuo said immediately made Hancock''s face turn red again. She was already a little nervous and didn''t know what to say.


    Fortunately, no one noticed their state at this moment. The remaining people had already started singing and dancing, and most of them had already drank. The only one who was probably watching them was Abo, who was on guard at the top of the mast. ept.


    In fact, this ship is sailing in the sea, sote at night, there is no need to worry about encountering any danger at all. There are not many coincidences in the world that can allow other pirate ships to experience this ce.


    However, Abona does not like this lively atmosphere now. Perhaps the four years of imprisonment have made him more eager for freedom, but this atmosphere will remind him of his past life.


    No one would force this guy. He could only sit on the mast alone, holding the dawn that Chang Nuo gave him in his arms.


    "Hancock, you should have received news about the Navy''s Shichibukai, right?"


    Chang Nuo turned to look at the woman who was having random thoughts and asked curiously.


    "Ah~!! Yes...yes!"


    Facing Chang Nuo, Hancock was particrly panicked at the moment, but the other party just looked at each other and smiled.


    He knew the mentality of this woman very well, and he did not expect that he would probably pick up a wife when he came out this time.


    Changnuo smiled and said, "The Navy and the World Government created the Shichibukai. It should be mentioned at this year''s World Government meeting. There is a high probability that it will be passed. If you still want to make a living as a pirate, then join The Shichibukai is indeed a very good choice, and it can umte a certain amount of wealth for you in a short period of time."


    "But if something happens to the World Government and the Navy, we must also apply unconditionally!"


    Hancock said.


    "What''s there to care about? When the Navy and the World Government need to use you, it means that their prestige has begun to decline seriously. The only people who can cause this result are just a few people in the New World, but They are not stupid either. If nothing happens, these people will not take the initiative to cause trouble for the Navy and the World Government. "


    Chang Nuo said, reaching for a ss of wine in front of him and drinking it.

 Chapter 100 Departed Course

    <h4>Chapter 100 Departed Course</h4>


    What was ced in front of him was a small cup, unlike other people who drank wine by holding a jar or holding arge bowl.


    Hancock, who was next to her, was also thinking about what Chang Nuo said, and the Granny New that she had previously remembered had said almost simr words to her.


    Sitting there, Hancock''s expression gradually began to calm down. She did not turn her head, but said directly, "I hate those people in the World Government. Even thinking about working with them in the future is disgusting!"


    "What about those people behind you? And how should you exin to those people in the country?" Chang Nuo said.


    Hancock was deep in thought and didn''t speak. Others had fallen to the ground. Regardless of whether they were men or women, they had all fallen asleep on the ground and no one thought about getting up.


    For the current weather, it doesn''t matter even if you lie on the deck. Even on the sea, it is a bit hot at the moment. With the sea breeze blowing through your body at night, this should be regarded as the mostfortable massage.


    "Go to rest early, it''s gettingte!" Chang Nuo reminded.


    "how about you?"


    "I''ll stay here! It''s better to leave those rooms to your own use." Chang Nuo said.


    Anyway, she didn��t know what Hancock was thinking, but in the end she got up and started walking towards her room.


    People lying all over the floor had to look every step they took to make sure they didn''t step on anyone else''s body. Those lying on the deck were always leaning on the edge. If it weren''t for the guardrail, they would have fallen into the sea.


    Junhe, the captain of the King''s Guard, was also drunk and unconscious at this moment, and there were only a few people on the ship who could stay awake.


    As soon as Hancock left, Abona, who had been staying in the room above the mast, appeared directly beside Chang Nuo and said curiously, "Your Majesty, you seem to be interested in this pirate empress?"


    "Can you see this?" Chang Nuo said with an unabashed smile.


    ������������


    the next day.


    The sky had begun to get brighter. At this moment, everyone was still lying on the deck. I don''t know who screamed, and the drunk people suddenly started to stand up in a daze.


    The shout was from a woman''s voice. She hurriedly ran to the deck and shouted to Sonia, who had just stood up unsteadily, "Sir Sonia, the Nine Snake ship is actually sailing in the direction of our country."


    Everyone was drinking on the deck the first night, and no one was controlling the ship. However, the ship was different from other ships. Others only used sails to sail forward. The key is that there was a boat in front of it. Two huge creatures, when there is no wind, they will quickly pull the boat forward. No one expected that when no one is steering, these two guys will actually move straight towards the direction of the daughter country. With.


    Sonia suddenly woke up. This ce was only a few days away from their country, and she never expected that she had already reached this ce.


    Awakened by the shock, all those who were lying down were now awake.


    Everyone stood up in a daze and asked what happened. After finally learning the answer, to everyone in the Tru Kingdom, this seemed to be nothing at all, but the people on the Daughter Ind reacted like this. Something is already different.


    After hearing the noise, Chang Nuo and Hancock also walked out. They did not live together. Chang Nuo slept in the room next to Hancock that night. This was the original residence of the two Sonia sisters. The ce was specially set aside for him.


    When they came out, Changnuo asked Barlow with a serious face, "What happened?"


    Barlow, who had been looking indifferent just now, immediately said with a guilty expression after hearing what His Majesty the King said, "Your Majesty, yesterday I waited for no one to check the course. When I woke up in the morning, I found that the ship had automatically moved towards my daughter. We are heading in the direction of the ind and are now approaching the edge of the calm zone."


    "Which ind is closer now?"


    "Your Majesty, we are almost close to the windless zone. There are no inds closest to it now. But the closest one, I looked at it, it should be the Navy''s Judiciary Ind. It will only take a day to get there at most."


    Barlow nced at the map in his hand and said.


    Daughter Ind is located in the windless zone on the edge of the entire Grand Line. For Chang Nuo, he does not want to go to this ce now.


    But now the people on the Nine Snakes ship are all pirates. It is estimated that before they get close to Judiciary Ind, they have already begun to be attacked fiercely by the other party.


    This question seems rather embarrassing. Although Changnuo is the king of the Tru Kingdom, those people who stay on such a ship don''t know who is who. After all, few people have seen him.


    "Hancock, what do you think about this matter?" Chang Nuo turned his head and asked Hancock, who was standing beside him without speaking.


    After a night, Hancock''s expression obviously changed. His eyes looked confused when he looked at Chang Nuo.


    "It will obviously be farther from Daughters Ind from here, but if you proceed through the windless zone, the time to reach Daughters'' Ind will be much shorter, but inparison, it is indeed rtively close to Judiciary Ind. Other than that, There is no way to go outside, and even the nearest ind will probably take at least half a month to reach," Hancock said.


    "The Empress said yes, we have missed the first uninhabited ind. As for the following ones, we have deviated too far from the course. Either we can only enter Amazon Lily through the windless zone, or we can only take a detour. Justice Ind goes somewhere else,�� Barlow said.


    Chang Nuo stood there and thought for a moment, then took a deep breath and shouted to Abona, who couldn''t see anyone at all, "Abona, look carefully around to see if there are any merchant ships or pirate ships passing by."


    Although Abona didn''t know where he was, the next second he heard the sound, he immediately appeared above the highest directional mast of the entire ship, and then turned on his Sense of Knowledge to sense the surrounding situation.


    The people from the Toru Kingdom who came over couldn''t understand why His Majesty the King had to choose this way. Wouldn''t it be good to go directly to Daughter Ind?


    But Hancock seemed to be the only one to notice these things. His eyes showed great emotion, and at the same time he had another view of the man in front of him.


    In this ce where birds don''t poop, let alone pirate ships and merchant ships, even two seagulls have not appeared in the sky.

 Chapter 101 Heading to Amazon Lily

    <h4>Chapter 101 Heading to Amazon Lily</h4>


    No one thought that just after sleeping all night, the course would deviate so far. It would definitely be unrealistic to turn around again. They could only start looking for surrounding ships in the current way.


    "Where do you want to go?" Hancock asked quietly.


    "Gaya Ind!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "It would take about a month to sail back and forth like that!"


    Listening to Hancock talking to himself, Changnuo smiled slightly and said, "It''s better to find a ce to put us down first. It has dyed your time for so long and it can no longer affect the national economic life of your country."


    "It''s okay, King Changnuo. Our Nine Snakes Kingdom still has food for at least half a month, so we don''t have to worry about the situation in the country in the short term." Sonia squeezed forward and said to Changnuo with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, if possible, we can also pay a certain fee to the Nine Snakes Pirates and just ask them to send us to the designated ce?" Shunhe also said.


    "No����"


    "This is a good idea. We don''t want more this time, just 500 million beli!"


    Before Changnuo could say anything, Groud patted Junhe on the shoulder and shouted.


    Others have no right to speak at all now and can only stare here.


    "Sister, we have said that we will take things back no matter what. If King Tru is willing to pay, we should be able to ept it, right?" Groud asked Hankuke.


    However, this woman didn''t know what she was thinking right now. She stood there nkly and didn''t listen to them at all.


    It''s just that if Groud and Sonia agree to this matter, Hancock will not have anyints.


    The other members of the pirate group seemed to be rtively satisfied and didn''t care too much about this matter.


    After being in contact with these men for a day and a night, theypletely rxed the minds of these women. As they had never been in contact with men, they were also full of affection for these people in the Tru Kingdom.


    "Your Majesty, my subordinates have checked and found that there is no sign of any ship within a radius of 50 kilometers. I am afraid that we will either go to Judiciary Ind, or we can only go to Nine Snakes, or we will directly take a detour to other ces."


    While they were still chatting, Abona jumped down from the top and stood next to Chang Nuo and spoke respectfully.


    "Okay, I get it."


    Now that it has reached this point, Chang Nuo can only be helpless. If he can encounter merchant ships or other ships in the middle, at least he will have a way to leave.


    But in this situation, it is already a bit difficult to get off the ship of the Nine Snakes Pirates.


    He is already thinking about whether to buy a cruise ship from the system space, but if it appears directly now, everyone will be suspicious.


    Hancock, who had been silent and dreaming, finally woke up. Although she did not notice the content of their chat just now, after waking up, he suddenly shouted directly, "Everyone, the course is set for Gaya Ind, we are Also go out and browse the Grand Line to increase your experience."


    Hancock''s sudden speech caused everyone on the ship to fall into a daze. Everyone could not believe what they heard.


    After all, such a thing is really amazing, a pirate sending the king of a country, and it''s still such a long distance.


    The two Sonia sisters also looked at their elder sister in disbelief, which could be seen from the surprised look in their eyes.


    Although they raised such questions before, they were just joking and talking to themselves, but they didn''t expect that it would actually be like this now?


    These people in the Tru Kingdom were all in disbelief, and even felt that they had heard wrongly.


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes and looked helpless, but there was really no better way now.


    "Are you really going to do this?"


    Changnuo asked looking at Hancock.


    It''s only been a day since they got to know each other, and the other party is already willing to do such a thing, so how can they not shock others?


    However, Hancock showed the attitude of a little woman at this time, looked at Chang Nuo with a smile, kept touching his two index fingers, and said a little shyly, "Anyway, there is nothing going on in the country, and we just want to go see it." Look, what it looks like on the Grand Line."


    Listening to what Hancock said, Chang Nuo had no choice but to say, "Enter the Nine Snakes territory first, I have something for you!"


    "Ah? What?"


    Hancock asked, stunned for a moment.


    "You''ll know when we get there!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    They have acquiesced in this kind of thing, especially the Nine Snakes Pirates. They now have endless trust in Hancock''s orders.


    Let alone going to Nine Snakes Ind now, even if you log in, others probably won''t have much objection.


    The ship continued to move forward, and the speed of the two sea beasts in front was obviously much faster than normal use of sails.


    After everyone on the ship received such a reply, they started a new round of banquets again. Before they woke up from the wine of the previous day, a new round of banquets had already begun.


    I don''t know who is the pirate between the two parties. They are all so unruly, and no one cares about what they do at this time.


    He drank so happily that hepletely forgot about other things.


    While everyone was immersed in joy, only Abona stayed at the top and observed the surroundings vigntly. His expression did not show the joy he imagined, but he was still doing what he should do seriously.


    Now that the route to be taken has been nned, before the banquet started, the women on the Nine Snakes ship quickly put up the sails, and the rest relied on the two sea beasts to pull the huge ship forward.


    Without the sail, the entire ship could only rely on two huge sea beasts to pull it. However, theck of sails could be clearly felt, and the speed of the ship increased again.


    In less than half a day, we have entered the windless zone. The difference here is indeed much different from what we imagined. The windless zone is really just like its name, there is no wind at all. If a sailboat enters such a ce , almost all of them can be said to be difficult to move forward.


    But if the windless zone is just like this, it would be better, but the so-called windless zone is not as simple as imagined.


    When you stick your head out, you can clearly see the changes in the sea water

 Chapter 102 The secret of crossing the windless zone

    <h4>Chapter 102 The secret of crossing the windless zone</h4>


    Many people were already lying on the edge of the boat, looking down at the sea below.


    The huge figures below are so big that some are as big as an ind. However, there are simply countless such things in this ce.


    "It''s amazing. This is the windless zone! I''ve only heard of it before, but I didn''t expect there to be so many big guys here?"


    A guard from the Tru Kingdom stood on the edge and said with emotion.


    "You just know? This is the case in the Windless Belt. Otherwise, why would other pirates enter the Grand Line through the Upside Down Mountain? The main reason is because of these things in the Windless Belt. There are at least hundreds of them in any one of them. Meters long, some even reach tens of thousands of meters, which ispletely beyond our imagination!"


    A female member of the pirate group alsoy on the edge of the fence and said to the guard next to her with a smile.


    "Is it possible for you to live in a ce like this? And how do you prevent them from attacking you every time youe out?" the guard asked curiously.


    Now he is not the only one asking, but many people elsewhere are already listening with their ears pricked up, and they all want to know what kind of technology they use to safely cross the windless zone.


    At present, apart from the navy and the world government, this kind of technology can only be possessed by the Nine Snakes pirate group for pirates. Even the four emperors who are crisscrossing the great sea route also need to be obedient in the windless zone. of obedience.


    This is the Grand Line, the windless zone that belongs to everyone, a ce where no one can die without even leaving a scumbag behind.


    On the surface, Jun and Ming were sitting there chatting with others, but in fact they were listening with their ears pricked up, and they were still chatting with others with a smile on their face.


    However, when the pirate girl who was chatting heard this question from the guard, she was stunned for a moment and then said dullly, "This is how we live! I don''t know the details!"


    "I see, it''s just that you are really powerful. If we can cross the windless zone, then the distance to the Grand Route can be shortened by at least half." The guard said with a smile.


    There are many guards who ask such questions, but they have no purpose and are just curious.


    Moreover, the words everyonemunicated could not be hidden from Chang Nuo who was sitting on the deck drinking tea, let alone Hancock who was sitting next to him.


    "Don''t you want to know how to survive the windless zone?" Hancock asked with a smile.


    Now the three sisters and Chang Nuo were sitting on the edge of overtime, eating and drinking, chatting, but when faced with Hancock''s sudden question, Chang Nuo just smiled.


    There is no need for others to remind you what to do about this kind of thing now. Regardless of whether they have mastered the technology or not, today''s Tru Kingdom cannot directly pass through the windless zone. If this kind of thing spreads, their country will You will face a more severe situation than having the Sixth Form of the Navy.


    "Hancock, it''s best not to talk to other people about this problem. Being able to cross the windless zone is the biggest bargaining chip in the hands of the Navy and the World Government. If this technology is mastered by others or other countries, can you imagine? The final result?"


    Chang Nuo said leisurely while drinking tea.


    "But didn''t we spend it like this? And for the Navy, there is no possibility of hiding this kind of thing!"


    Sonia said with some doubts.


    "Although the navy has mastered the method of crossing the windless zone so far, they also have a fatal w, that is, in the windless zone, all they can do is sail, but if they fight in the windless zone If so, at least ording to their strength, they can��t do it now.��


    Listening to what Chang Nuo said, Hancock also thought about it seriously, and then asked in disbelief, "Is it possible that the reason why the Navy asked us to join the Shichibukai some time ago was also because of this?"


    "Perhaps so. With your current strength, it may be difficult to join the Shichibukai, but in the Windless Zone you can sail and fight freely. This is an unpredictable strength for the World Government. "


    Changnuo said, but his words were not without purpose. ording to the current strength on Daughter Ind, if they want to join the World Government, their strength is not even as good as Crocodile, let alonepared to other People.


    But one of the main reasons why the World Government can invite them is because of the problem of the windless zone.


    In Changnuo''s impression, the main reason why he was able to join the Shichibukai was that some of them had grudges against the Four Emperors, such as Crocodile. This guy''s purpose all along was to provoke Shiro. Beard, then not to mention others.


    In such a troubled time, the world government and the navy do not want to cause any trouble, so it is logical and natural that Daughter Ind will be the candidate for the Shichibukai.


    In this windless zone, even a being as powerful as a naval admiral with transcendent strength is likely to cause him to perish in this ce. The risks involved can be imagined.


    The monsters in the windless belt are beyond everyone''s imagination, but no one has been able to see their true faces, but they still linger above everyone''s heads.


    "King Changnuo, how do you know these things?" Groud asked curiously while eating.


    "There are only a few ways to safely cross the windless zone. Hailou Stone has the power to radiate the sea. As long as it is assisted by technology, he can naturally sail in this sea, even in the windless zone. It doesn��t matter, but for you, the way to survive the windless zone safely is to train Neptune-types that can listen to you, right?��


    Chang Nuo asked with a leisurely smile.


    The other members of the pirate group don''t know, but the three Hancock sisters know very well that all this is exactly what Changnuo said. The reason why they can safely survive the windless zone is because they can tame this kind of sea king. sea ??beasts, allowing them to sail freely in the windless zone.


    But the three Hancock sisters were still a little surprised that this kind of problem was pointed out so pointedly.


    This may be a secret to outsiders, but this ship is originally pulled by the Sea King ss, and its level is not low. You can know it with a little thinking.


    Being able to survive the windless zone safely is a secret that is not spread even to Nine Snakes Ind. Although they have already guessed that the navy can survive the windless zone safely because of the Hailou Stone, but the specifics No one knows what happened.

 Chapter 103 Purpose?

    <h4>Chapter 103 Purpose?</h4>


    It''s just that all of this has been seen through by the king of the Tru Kingdom in front of them, and he can also tell the reasons. How can this not surprise them.


    "King Changnuo, I feel like you know everything. I wonder if I can ask you about the purpose of your trip to Gaya Ind?" Sonia asked.


    "That''s right. That ce is obviously far away from your South China Sea. I''ve heard of this ce before. It seems to be a paradise for pirates on the Grand Line?"


    Groud also said.


    No matter how hard they try, they still have no idea why Chang Nuo would choose to go to a ce that is a city of sin.


    But from the other party''s expression, Hancock had already interpreted other meanings.


    She turned her face to look at her two younger sisters, and said with a slightly serious expression, "This is another country''s national affairs, you two should not be so curious to ask questions!"


    "Yes, onee-sama!"


    The two strange-looking sisters just lowered their heads, not even daring to eat. Although Hancock did not reprimand them, they had already thought of other things at the critical moment.


    "Why do you want to go to Nine Snake Ind first? It''s obviously a long way from our destination?"


    Hancock''s emotion expressed at this moment was already a little guarded. Although she had a good impression of Changnuo after getting along with her for the past two days, after all, it involved the security of her country, so she still frowned and asked.


    "As for this, you don''t have to worry. Since you have chosen to send us to Gaya Ind, you naturally cannot allow some special situations to ur in your country."


    "I wonder what you mean?"


    Hancock asked curiously after listening to what Chang Nuo said.


    Chang Nuo didn''t say anything else. He stretched out his hand in front of Hancock, and saw blue fluorescence wrapped around his hand. In the next second, a huge gem suddenly appeared in the empty palm.


    This scene made the three women stunned for a moment, and Groud was even more shocked and said, "Ability user?"


    "I have 500 million beli here. You can send it back to the people on your ind first, so that they can be self-sufficient for at least this period of time and save you from having to owe you any favorster!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    "Are you really willing to pay us?"


    Sonia asked in disbelief.


    "Do you think I need to lie to you?"


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, the three women looked at each other, and their initially wary expressions slowly began to rx.


    But during this boring voyage, when the three people were chatting and talking, a sword shot up into the sky instantly. Before anyone else could figure out what happened, Abona had already jumped out of the water. And Qi was carrying a thigh that was many times bigger than him.


    "I''m sorry, everyone, I just couldn''t hold back and jumped into the sea to take a bath, but I didn''t expect this guy to keep staring at me, so I couldn''t help but bring it up for you to eat!"


    After Abona jumped on board, he smiled at all the surprised people.


    "You bastard, do you know that I was looking into the water just now and you almost cut me, do you know that?"


    Gogoya roared at Abona.


    "Sorry, sorry!! It was really just an ident!"


    Abona said with a smile.


    "It''s really big. We can really have an extra meal tonight!"


    "Master Abona is so powerful, he was able to carry such a big guy out of the water!"


    "Lord Abona is domineering..."


    ��


    After being surprised for a while, thepliments on the boat started toe one after another.


    Abona didn''t pay much attention to thesepliments, and directly threw the huge leg on the boat. The moment it was lowered, the entire hull tilted slightly.


    Everyone was stunned by this scene. Such a big guy could be carried up easily. From this, we can also see how strong Abona is!


    "Amazing!"


    Sonia looked at all this with emotion. Killing a sea king directly in the windless zone, and still under the water, already made the two sisters dumbfounded.


    "Haki!! Can you teach the people on this ship how to practice Haki?"


    Hancock blushed with embarrassment and asked Chang Nuo who was sitting opposite him.


    "Yes, yes, that''s awesome!"


    Sonia also hurriedly followed.


    "Don''t you know how to be domineering?" Chang Nuo asked in surprise.


    "No, we only have the practice method of seeing and hearing Haki on the ind. My sister once identally activated Overlord Haki, but there is no training method for Armed Haki!"


    Groud said.


    "Yes, so we have been practicing the knowledge and knowledge haqi for a long time, but there is no foundation or recognition for themon sense of armed color haqi. We don''t know how to do it. The previous king also went out to look for this. On the one hand, it��s a cultivation method, but it��s still like this in the end.��


    Hancock said.


    "The things you mentioned don''t seem to be difficult." Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "You mean you are willing to teach us?"


    Sonia asked excitedly.


    "It just so happens that we have about ten days left to sail together. It doesn''t hurt to teach you on the way. I can even ask them to write down their cultivation experience, and then you can take it back to your ind. At least It can also increase your strength." Chang Nuo said.


    He doesn''t care at all about all these things, it''s just a way of cultivating domineering. This kind of thing is difficult to find in the first half of the Grand Route, but in the second half of the Grand Route, almost most people know it, but they can''t encounter it. That��s all.


    After hearing that the other party had agreed, Hancock immediately showed his feminine attitude, and the other two women were also grinning happily.


    If they had the blessing of armed domination, their strength would be at least one or two levels higher than it is now.


    Why not do it in this situation? Changnuo does notck these cultivation methods, and he believes that the people on Nine Snake Ind and his people will not conflict at all. If they can talk better in the future, Maybe all men from the Toru Kingdom can directly enter the Nine Snakes Ind.


    Although I just think about it, who knows what the future will be like, but this time Chang Nuo does have some thoughts about the woman in front of him. He is not a pure second-hand like the future protagonist.


    Besides, this does not cause any loss to the Tru Kingdom, but it can make a good ally.

 Chapter 104 Professor Armed Color Dominance

    <h4>Chapter 104 Professor Armed Color Dominance</h4>


    After getting Chang Nuo''s answer, several people were filled with excitement. Even Hancock, a usually indifferent woman, showed a sweet smile at this moment.


    Even if they get nothing from going to sea this time, being able to learn how to practice armed domineering is already the biggest gain for them.


    The ship is still sailing quickly in the windless zone. The speed of the two sea beasts here is obviously much faster than in other sea areas. The scenery on both sides is changing rapidly, and they are not under any attack.


    Sailing forward in the windless zone, there is no need for any lookouts to check whether the surroundings are safe along the way. Everyone only needs to lie there quietly to reach Nine Snake Ind safely.


    In fact, you can also use this method in subsequent voyages. At least you don''t have to worry about any safety and it is faster.


    "By the way, why are you willing to help us like this? Do you have any thoughts about my sister?" Sonia suddenly looked at Changnuo and asked with a smile.


    When Groud heard this, he quickly moved his face towards her. Unlike Sonia''s big face, her face was more focused on her belly.


    Hancock did not stop his two sisters from asking questions and looked to the other side, but his big ears were listening to the answer Chang Nuo was going to give next.


    Faced with the gossip between the two women, Chang Nuo had no intention of hiding anything. He opened his mouth and said leisurely, "How about letting your sister be my princess another day?"


    "Really? I really want a man like this to confess his love to me!!"


    Groud was suddenly moved to tears, looked at Sonia and said.


    After hearing this, Hancock''s face turned red to the back of his ears, and even his neck showed a crimson color.


    She was about to faint from these words, she didn''t know where to put her little hands, and her little heart was so excited that it almost jumped out of her chest.


    It was the first time a man confessed like this. The key was that she didn''t have any intention of rejecting it.


    "The banquet is about to begin!! Our king is going to marry your empress and be his princess, and he can get drunk again today!"


    The people here have not reacted yet, but Junhe who was staying elsewhere has already shouted loudly at this moment.


    Everyone on the ship was just silent for a moment, and then immediately burst out into shocking shouts.


    The parties involved were not yet excited to this extent, and their group of people had already begun to celebrate. The matter had not yet been revealed, but to them, it seemed that it had officially begun.


    Chang Nuo looked at the now lively crowd with a speechless expression, but he just smiled and said nothing.


    Gogoya walked out of the crowd and walked slowly to Hancock. She squatted down and sat on the deck and looked at Hancock who was so shy that he didn''t know what to say. She also smiled at the corner of her mouth and took the He picked up the other person''s hand and asked kindly, "Are you willing to be our Princess of King Tru?"


    "King...Princess!!"


    Hancock''s nervous words could not be clearly articted. It was better that no one answered him at first, but now someone has squatted in front of him and asked such words, obviously wanting him to give an answer.


    She looked at her two sisters. The two women were still hugging each other and crying, and they also wanted such answers and treatment.


    Everyone on the ship was hiding behind the deck or behind the building. They stuck their heads out one by one, listening carefully to the answer Hancock was about to give. Even Abner, who was sitting at the top of the mast, He was also using his sense of knowledge to sense the situation of the two of them.


    However, Hancock, who was receiving everyone''s gaze, gnawed his fingers nervously at this moment. He raised his head slightly and looked at Gogoya who was staring at him. After she nodded slightly, everyone eximed again. got up.


    However, as the person involved, Hancock felt everyone''s gaze at this moment, and his face, which was already red, turned red again. It is estimated that his heart was beginning to be unable to bear her nervousness and shyness, and the little girl was immediately shocked. Hancock, who had a woman''s mentality, fainted on the spot.


    However, the shouts of the people on the boat also attracted the sea kings on the seabed to stick out their heads one by one. After these huge creatures raised their heads, most of them were already a hundred meters high.


    The crowd, who had been excited just now, suddenly became speechless after seeing the countless Neptunes raising their heads.


    Only Abona, Junhe and others who were sitting in the highest position suddenly became alert.


    But while he was enjoying the wonderful Changnuo, and he was beginning to fantasize about what the child would be called in the future, these guys suddenly stretched out their heads, and this beautiful fantasy was immediately shattered. He was speechless as he looked around at the tall buildings. Those Neptune types were quite annoyed and angry.


    "roll����"


    A cold shout rang out, Chang Nuo angrily scolded these sea kings, and then the waves of overlord-colored domineering energy suddenly dispersed, but this time he deliberately controlled the release ability of his overlord-colored color.


    No one on the boat felt the momentum, but those sea kings began to fall into the sea water one by one in an instant, and the sea water started to scatter after their huge bodies hit it. Even the ship was in this windless zone. All of them have already begun to suffer.


    And although the two sea beasts pulling the boat were not affected by Overlord Color, Chang Nuo''s momentum also shocked them. They had never thought of beingzy, and at this moment they started pulling the boat even more vigorously. He ran out quickly.


    This time, everyone could clearly see the overlord color. After all, when they first released the overlord color when they first came into contact, most of the people in the Tru Kingdom had already been petrified in ce. All the members of the Snake Pirates had lost consciousness in an instant, but now these hundreds of people were staring at this scene, and the disbelief on their faces had already made them doubt their lives.


    "What''s this??"


    A member of the King''s Guard asked the person next to him and said in a dull voice.


    "Overlord and domineering!!"


    A woman in the Nine Snakes Pirates said that although she didn''t know anything else, she had witnessed this kind of thing once.


    "Overlord color is indeed a rtively powerful force!" Junhe couldn''t help but shook his head and said.


    This was not the first time that he had seen his Majesty use this ability, but it was only the second time.


    The only person she saw using it more often was Gogoya. She had already encountered it once more than half a year ago, but she didn''t know it clearly at the time.

 Chapter 105 The appearance of Nine Snakes Island

    <h4>Chapter 105 The appearance of Nine Snakes Ind</h4>


    The scene disyed by Chang Nuo instantly left everyone at a loss of what to say. Moreover, His Majesty the King is so powerful, and only those in the King''s Guards knew about it.


    Before, they only knew that their King was great, but they never thought that he could be so powerful!


    Instantly making countless sea kings faint, this scene has subverted their perception of strength.


    "Sonia, take Hancock inside and take a rest!"


    Chang Nuo was still sitting on the recliner where he was, and said leisurely to Sonia next to him, who was opening his mouth in surprise.


    After hearing this, Sonia still stared at the shaking Changnuo with her eyes wide open in disbelief, but she still quickly said, "Okay, okay!"


    They haven''t even realized what happened yet, but the ship has already passed through the fallen Neptunes, and everyone is stunned. This kind of thing ispletely like a dream, and it also makes them first I learned for the first time what it means to be powerful.


    The Nine Snake Ship, which was originally preparing to hold a banquet, waspletely silent at the moment, and no one could believe that this was true.


    Many people were still muttering to themselves and watching in surprise at the amazinglyrge sea kings that were already floating on the windless sea surface, without concealing their surprise at this moment.


    This is the first time they have seen this kind of scene. One word can make so many sea kings fall, which canpletely subvert their cognition.


    Of course, after being surprised, everyone returned to their original state and continued their banquet.


    After it got dark again, they could finally vaguely see what Nine Snake Ind looked like now. It was not a very big ind, but it couldn''t support the many connections between the inds.


    The characteristics of Nine Snake Ind are very obvious. There is a nine-headed snake-shaped sculpture hundreds of meters high at the top of the entire ind. It can be seen very clearly from a distance.


    It is considered to be a standard windless zone on the edge of the Grand Line. This ce is almost among the safest and most dangerous areas of the Grand Line. The reason why it is said to be the safest is because outsiders can hardly touch this ce, and it is also the most dangerous. Because there are so many Neptunes here that it��s terrifying.


    Even those people on Nine Snake Ind usually can only rely on this ship to sail. When they have nothing to do, they can only stay on the ind for training.


    Their n has been instilled with the rule of the supremacy of force since they were born, so when they face someone more powerful than themselves, they will always have a reluctance to admit defeat, but in the same way, if they encounter someone with whom they have a friendly rtionship, , and for extremely powerful characters, they will show a different scene.


    As the Nine Snakes ship slowly approached, the edge of Daughter Ind gradually began to glow with fire. They must have known that Her Majesty the Empress was back, so they all stood at the port to greet her.


    However, at this moment, Hancock, who had been unconscious on the ship, also woke up.


    She walked to the edge of the deck, her expression looking very helpless, and her eyes looking at Chang Nuo were different.


    "Princess, are you awake?"


    Members of the Tru Kingdom who were also lying on the edge of the fence saw Hancock approaching and quickly turned around to say hello.


    He was still about to say something, but after hearing this, Hancock''s face immediately turned red again.


    "Junhe, order us to go down. After docking, no one of the male members of the Tru Kingdom will be allowed to disembark. You and Abona will supervise this matter. No one, including you, shall disobey this order."


    Seeing that Hancock hade out, Changnuo directly faced him and gave serious instructions to Junhe who was also standing on the deck.


    After these words were shouted out, many people didn''t understand, but after all, there were more people in the Nine Snakes Pirates on the ship. When they got this order, the women on the ship had already started to exin to others.


    Only in the end did they finally understand why their King ordered so!


    Hancock watched all this quietly. He was a little embarrassed before and didn''t know how to open his mouth, but now he didn''t need to say anything anymore. The order had been issued. At least he would not be embarrassed again. .


    "How do you know the rules of Daughters Ind?"


    Although Hancock was very moved by Chang Nuo''s order, she was also curious, why did the other party know about her daughter''s restriction?


    Faced with such a question, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said, "Nine Snake Ind has remained like this for so many years, and it must have its own thoughts. So if this is the case, why should we bother it anymore, in case it causes trouble? Riots will be very detrimental to your management!"


    "Master Changnuo is such a considerate person!"


    "I really want to find a man like Lord Changnuo!"


    ��


    In an instant, such heart-warming words instantly captured the women of the Nine Snakes Pirates on the ship. How could a man who was so smart and powerful, and most importantly handsome, not make their hearts flutter?


    "Thank you very much for understanding us so well!" Hancock said shyly.


    "No need to thank you, but can I sit on the shore for a while? Staying on the boat for so long makes me feel like my body is going to be broken!" Chang Nuo said helplessly.


    Hancock covered his mouth and smiled. There shouldn''t be much problem for one person to enter his Nine Snake Ind, but if so many people are allowed to enter at the same time, even she, as the queen of Nine Snake Ind, will probably have to endure a lot. criticism.


    The two sea beasts pulling the ship slowly docked and pulled their heads directly to the shore. Each of them was breathing heavily, as if they were going to die in the next second.


    The women who were preparing to greet them at the port all shouted loudly, "Mr. Hancock...Mr. Hancock..."


    Although this is just an ind country, and it is extremely small, with a poption of only ten or twenty thousand people. Compared with the Kingdom of Tru, it is even the same as Batt Ind, but the people here recognize Hancock. It''s really not that high.


    The ship docked on the shore, and Hancock showed his previous proud appearance again. He walked at the front with his head held high and prepared to disembark. Fortunately, because the sky was rtively dark, the people below could hardly see the image of the ship.


    Mainly because at this moment, the edge of the deck is already full of men from the Tru Kingdom, and they are all staring at the group of people from the Daughter Kingdom like wolves and tigers!

 Chapter 106 Abona’s acquaintance

    <h4>Chapter 106 Abona��s acquaintance</h4>


    As the women of the Nine Snakes Pirates began to walk down, a familiar face in the crowd also walked down at the same time.


    Gogoya was wearingpletely different clothes from them, but she also followed them down. Moreover, she was the only woman on the ship who came with them. Jasmine, who had apanied them here before, had already followed Robin. Returned to the Kingdom of Tru.


    All the men lying on the fence looked at the departing figure with envy. Chang Nuo stayed at the end and was not in a hurry. After all, he definitely needed tomunicate with others before talking about other things.


    If we follow him rashly, we don��t know what special situations will happen.


    Just after the members of the Nine Snakes Pirates got off the ship, the originally bustling port became quiet in a short time.


    All of them looked towards the boat. They were also curious about what the men on the boat looked like. For most people, they have never seen what a man looks like. However, there are not many people who are rejecting him, and most of them are just curious.


    Themunicationsted for about ten minutes. Sonia returned to the boat again, looked at Chang Nuo with a smile on her face and said, "Sir Chang Nuo, my sister asked you to go down and said that I would take you into the daughter''s ind together!"


    "Have they all beenmunicated?" Chang Nuo asked a little worriedly.


    "We have alreadymunicated with each other. Granny Niu is opposed to it, but the others have no objections. Now that my sister is the king of this country, Granny Niu''s words don''t count anymore!" Sonia said.


    "That''s okay!"


    Changnuo said with a smile, then turned to look at Junhe and said again, "You are not allowed to get off the boat!"


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, your subordinates will definitely take good care of them!" Junhe said respectfully.


    They only restricted this group of people from walking off the boat, but they did not restrict the women from Daughter Ind walking up from below, but tonight was destined to be a sleepless night.


    When Chang Nuo followed Sonia''s steps, the women on the other side of the port automatically gave way to a long passage. Everyone stared at Chang Nuo with curious eyes, for fear that the other party would appear to be next. It''s like running away in seconds.


    But they were not curious about the man walking past now, because there were many more on the boat behind them.


    After Chang Nuo, Hancock and others left this ce, none of the women on the port left. When everything settled, a group of women began to run towards the ship like wolves and tigers.


    This scene made the men lying on the deck of the ship extremely happy. Their already silent hearts werepletely awakened at this moment.


    "It''s a party!!"


    The men on the boat began to shout loudly. They had already arrived at this ce. There was no shortage of food at all. If it was impossible, they would jump into the sea and catch two sea kings. The food would be enough for any number of people.


    Anyway, Abona, who is rtively powerful among the crowd, will not get off the boat. For such a thing, he does not mind doing it twice.


    Women rushed to the boat to see what the man on it looked like. It was a small Nine Snake boat, and within a short time the crowd was already crowded.


    However, standing at the port, there was an old woman who looked to be in her fifties or sixties. She was tapping the ground hard with a cane and yelling angrily at the group of women who had already boarded the ship.


    The key is that now no one cares about her at all!


    But just as he angrily hit the ground with his cane and shouted angrily at the group of women, a man''s figure suddenly appeared in front of him.


    "You...you are...Gloriousa...the eldest sister??"


    Suddenly this man appeared, Abona. He didn''t like the lively atmosphere, and he didn''t like the feeling of so many women surrounding him.


    But while he was observing, he identally discovered Granny New who was organizing crutches and scolding those women. When he saw it for the first time, he already felt that the face was extremely familiar, so he vited the rules and jumped directly. Get off the boat ande over to confirm.


    Granny New was about to curse again, but when faced with the man who suddenly jumped next to her, the man directly called her name. It was obvious that he must be someone she knew.


    Granny New looked at Abona carefully for a while, then her eyes became blurred, and tears were already welling up in her eyes. She said in a trembling voice with disbelief, "Are you that boy from Abona?"


    "It''s me, Sister Croliosa, it''s me!"


    Abona''s lips trembled, his body couldn''t help but tremble, and tears burst out of his eyes.


    He didn''t expect that he would meet an acquaintance in this ce.


    "It''s really Abona, why are you here too?"


    Granny New was crying, and the crutch in her hand had been thrown aside. She looked at Abona in disbelief and asked.


    No one knew what was going on with the two of them. Not even the women and men on the boat looked in their direction. There was no time to take care of such a thing now.


    "It''s really little Arbonne, it''s really little Arbonne..."


    Grandma Niu repeated it over and over again, her lips trembling so much that she didn��t know what to say next.


    Abona also had the same expression, stretched out his trembling hands, and said loudly with trembling lips and tears, "It''s me! It''s me!"


    Granny New couldn''t believe it. She didn''t know how many years had passed since she had no memories of the past, but with the sudden appearance of Abona, the memories of the past resurfaced before her eyes.


    Abona also began to show his excitement at this moment. It was really like meeting the person closest to him. Abona did not have the state of almost no contact with people before. A tall man , kneeling on the ground in front of a woman who was not even 1.3 meters tall, crying bitterly in her arms.


    This moment was his truest expression of emotion, as if all the bitterness and suffering had be worthwhile at this moment.


    It��s not like no one saw the performance of the two, at least Junhe, who had been paying attention to everyone on the ship. When he saw Abona jumping off the ship, he wanted to step forward to stop it, but finally saw it. During this scene, Junhe didn''t say a word and allowed the other party to jump off the ship. As long as they reached the port, it would probably not have any impact on them.

 Chapter 107 Granny New

    <h4>Chapter 107 Granny New</h4>


    It was precisely because I didn''t restrain Abona too much that I saw this scene in front of me.


    Although Junhe was a little surprised by this kind of thing, he was not too surprised. Abona was much older than him and had lived on the Grand Line for many years earlier. Although about his history, Abona It doesn��t tell much, but meeting one or two people on this great voyage or in the new world is not a surprise at all!


    At the port, Abona and Granny New were hugging each other and crying. I am afraid that only they themselves can understand the story between them.


    After being moved by each other for a while, Granny New pushed away Abona, who was still crying, and asked curiously, "Why are you on Nine Snakes'' pirate ship?"


    "Sister Guluoliosa, this matter is a long story. Ever since Brother Guluo''s ident, I followed Brother Limo to re-create the Sunshine Pirates, but five years ago, He was caught by the navy andter became a ve of the Celestial Dragons. It was not until a few days ago that His Majesty King Tru killed the Celestial Dragons that he took me out with him."


    Abona said without any secret.


    To Granny New, Abona even revealed the fact that Chang Nuo killed the Tianlong people, which shows how much he trusts her!


    "Kill the Celestial Dragons!!!"


    Granny New had a look of shock on her face. This kind of thing was much more surprising than when he met Abona.


    You must know that in this world, the Celestial Dragons have been at the top of the world since birth. Even Roger, who had be the Pirate King before, took a detour after meeting the Celestial Dragons and did not choose to kill him in the end.


    Since Granny New has been alive for so long, this is the first time she has heard about the Tianlong people being killed!


    "Is what you said true?"


    Granny New asked in disbelief.


    After hearing this, Abona was about to nod, but suddenly he seemed to think of something. He seemed to have said too much. If such a thing as killing the Tianlong people was leaked, it would be very serious. How much of a sensation it caused is unknown.


    "Abona, before you said this, have you thought about how to exin it to His Majesty?"


    While Abona was still thinking about how to reply, Junhe had already appeared directly in front of the two of them. He had a serious expression, a low voice, and clenched his fists. Now he was ready to attack, and he was just waiting. The other party gave an answer.


    "Junhe, I..."


    Abona stood up suddenly and didn''t know what to say. He was speaking quickly just now and had no intention of hiding anything, but after the matter was revealed, he felt a little afraid.


    Granny New also stood up and looked at the little guy who had juste out. The other person''s expression and Abona''s attitude said everything.


    "Abona, who is this??"


    Granny New asked calmly.


    "Sister Guroriosa, this is Shunwa, captain of the King''s Guard of the Toru Kingdom, and my currentpanion!"


    Abona said with a smile.


    "Abona, don''t forget what you promised His Majesty the King? It''s only been a few days now, and it seems that you have forgotten about it. It seems that you have not thought about the seriousness of the matter?"


    Junhe said with a heavy voice.


    "I''m sorry, it was indeed my slip of the tongue this time. I will personally find His Majesty to rify to him, but I believe in Sister Guluoliosa, and I also hope that you can believe her."


    Abona exined.


    "Let''s go! Regarding what you are talking about, we will go directly inside andmunicate it in front of King Tru in your mouth."


    Grandma New looked at the scene and she really felt that what Abona said to her was a bit serious. The most important thing was that it would affect the rtionship between theirpanions. This is what Grandma New now doesn''t want to see.


    Grandma Niu has always taken the rules of Nine Snakes Ind much more seriously than anyone else. Now she actually took the initiative to invite two men into the confines of this daughter''s country. If others knew, how surprised would it be? one thing.


    But now he still considers so much. Abona is the person he has grown up with. She doesn''t want her, the person she is closest to, to have any idents, so she has no choice but to break her own rules.


    Junhe did not refuse such a thing. Even if Granny Niu disagreed, he would bypass everyone and directly enter the scope of Nine Snakes Ind. After the news of the Tianlong people being killed spread, Junhe had reason to believe that this was definitely the case. One of the most important events.


    Although it is still unclear what Granny New''s identity is, she has just started walking towards the territory of Nine Snakes Ind. Abona followed obediently behind her without staying on the ship at all. That look of indifference.


    Junhe followed behind, his eyes always looking forward, and he would never turn his eyes to other ces. Since he already knew the rules of this country, it was already rude to step in, and even more so. More than anything else, Junhe didn''t want to embarrass his Majesty the King.


    However, Granny New, who was walking in front, did not dwell too much on this matter. Instead, she changed the subject and chatted with Abona about his affairs while walking. The two of them were talking andughing.


    At least in the past few days on the ship, Junhe had never seen Abona looking so happy.


    The area of ??Nine Snake Ind is not particrlyrge, but the royal pce where Hancock lives is just at the northernmost point of the entire port. They used to be equivalent to crossing the width of the entire ind. Even so, for the speed of three people It didn''t take long to reach the door.


    Today has be an unexpected situation for the entire Nine Snakes Ind. The female soldiers guarding the gate of the pce saw Granny Niu, the most difficult to talk to on the entire ind, for the first time. Today she actually brought a man with her. The look in their eyes There is disbelief on your face, and you are even more shocked to hear that your empress has be someone else''s princess.


    "Lord Loliosa, what are you...!!"


    A woman guarding the gate of the pce looked at Granny New in disbelief and asked.


    No wonder they were surprised. Granny New was the most old-fashioned existence in everyone''s eyes. They were definitely surprised that something like this happened today.


    "Open the door, we are going in to find Snake Lady." Granny New said directly without even exining.


    "I''m sorry, Lord Croliosa, Lord Snake Princess has already ordered that no one is allowed to enter the pce at this moment, including you!"


    said the guard.

 Chapter 108 Anger again

    <h4>Chapter 108 Anger again</h4>


    Granny New, who had always been rtively strong, now looked at the guard with a calm expression.


    Although she broke the rules this time, she still attaches great importance to these rules in her heart, especially now that Hancock has brought the man to the pce, and even asked the guards to guard here and not allow anyone to enter. , I still don��t know what happened inside.


    She took her crutch and knocked it on the ground, and said directly with a serious expression, "Open the door. As for the rest, I will tell She Ji personally! As for her bringing the man into the pce, I can ignore it. The key point is It��s that we have other things to say now.��


    "I''m sorry, Gu Luoliosa..."


    Before the guard beauty finished speaking, Grandma Niu''s crutch hit the ground hard this time, and a shock wave spread out instantly. The two people didn''t pay attention, and they were directly hit by the shock wave. Although they staggered and did not fall, they The respect in his eyes was clear at a nce.


    After all, Granny Niu was the previous king of the Nine Snakes Ind. Although she didn''t spend as long in the country as she did on the sea, there was no doubt about her strength.


    Junhe was also shocked when he felt the aura from the other party. He had experienced the feeling of domineering aura once or twice.


    After shaking the two of them away, Granny New said in a slightly calm tone, "I will go in and exin this matter myself. You don''t have to worry about anything happening!"


    With that said, Granny New took Junhe and Abona directly, opened the door of the pce and walked in.


    After entering the pce, it ispletely different from the outside. There are no guards inside. Except for the three Hancock sisters, no one can enter at all under normal circumstances.


    Of course, today must be excluded.


    Because Chang Nuo is staying in this pce at the moment.


    ��������


    In the pce at this moment.


    As soon as Chang Nuo came over, Hancock had already dismissed everyone, including his two sisters, who were now outside. They were the only two people left in the pce hall.


    The two didn''t talk too much. The moment the door closed, Chang Nuo sat down directly, and then a blue light glowed on his hand. He just waved it casually, and countless people appeared in the hall. of gold and silver jewelry.


    These things he got from Marie Joa, but what he took out this time was just the tip of the iceberg.


    But even so, Hancock was extremely shocked. There were far more things in front of him than when they went out to rob pirates or merchant ships.


    "What are you doing??"


    "What I said to you beforeing here, since you are going to send us to Gaya Ind next, naturally we need somepensation for you."


    Chang Nuo said it very casually.


    "I''m not talking about this thing, but what your ability is...??"


    Hancock asked in surprise. This Devil Fruit ability was obviously something she didn''t know about.


    Chang Nuo smiled and didn''t say anything. However, the faint blue light appeared in his hand again. Within a moment, it appeared on a small table next to his seat. Three blue bottles.


    This bottle is not particrly big. It is essentially three transparent bottles, but the potion inside is blue.


    "This thing is something that can erase the scars on your body. How about it also be regarded as my betrothal gift to you?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly changed his tone, smiled and looked at Hancock who was admiring the jewelry in that ce and said.


    The sudden confession made Hancock pause for a moment, and then everything from his heels to the back of his ears turned red. The panic in his heart resurfaced at this moment.


    "This this����"


    Hancock was speechless for a moment, his mind went nk, and he didn''t know what to say at all.


    But just when they were immersed in fantasy, the door of the hall where they were was suddenly pushed open, and not even the two Sonia sisters could stop Granny New from breaking in.


    I was still immersed in fantasizing about Hancock. After I was suddenly awakened and saw this scene, I was filled with grief and anger. I immediately went up to strangle Granny New''s neck, and shouted angrily, "Olddy, can you pay attention to the time?" !��


    But this time, Granny New was not manipted by Hankook as she usually did. She fiddled with the other person''s hand at will, then stood up after it fell to the ground.


    Seeing this scene, Hancock already felt that Granny New must have something important toe here, otherwise she would not have appeared in the pce hall with such an attitude.


    But the fact is exactly as Tao said. After Granny New fell to the ground, she looked at Hancock without saying much. Even when she saw Chang Nuo, she didn''t have the surprise or surprise she imagined.


    Because immediately behind her, Abona and Junhe appeared, and the two Sonia sisters also stood behind with embarrassed faces.


    "Junhe, what happened?"


    When Chang Nuo saw the two of them appearing here at the same time, he already had a bad feeling in his heart. Leaving aside Abona''s situation, as far as Jun He was concerned, Chang Nuo believed that the other party would not disobey him easily. Themand.


    But now there must be something happening between the two of them that they don''t know about now.


    Junhe nced at the others, then bowed respectfully and said, "Your Majesty, Abona told this Gulo Liosa about Mariejoia''s affairs!"


    As soon as the voice fell, Chang Nuo''s overlord-like domineering energy began to erupt uncontrobly. Even the few people standing next to him had to withstand endless pressure.


    This is the power of Bawang''s domineering energy. It can not only act as a deterrent, but also more importantly, it is coercive. An attack that can instantly make the opponent feel huge pressure.


    Abona withstood the pressure and took two steps forward. He also bowed his body and lowered his head. He said apologetically, "I''m sorry, Your Majesty. I said it inadvertently. I''m really sorry for this, but I still feel sorry for it." Please believe that Gu Luoliosa will not tell that matter!"


    "Abona, do you still remember what I said when I brought you out?"


    Changnuo roared angrily, and his domineering aura strengthened once again. Even the floor on the ground could no longer withstand the pressure and cracked. The two Sonia sisters couldn''t bear such domineering aura. , with such strength, he fainted directly.

 Chapter 109 The strong man of the previous era

    <h4>Chapter 109 The strong man of the previous era</h4>


    The scene immediately fell silent, and no one dared to speak at this moment.


    Seeing Chang Nuo''s anger, Abona realized that he had made a mistake and said the wrong thing. Then he took two steps forward under the pressure and fell to his knees in an instant.


    Junhe was also hunched over, and now she didn''t even dare to take a breath. Hancock was even more frightened and didn''t know what to say. This feeling of being dominatedpletely made her sluggish.


    "King Tru, I have heard of you, but please believe little Abona, he just said it unintentionally, and please believe me, I will never step outside the scope of Nine Snakes Ind again in this life, and I am willing to I hide that news in my heart and never bring it up again.��


    Granny New was not affected by the domineering attitude at all, but she spoke respectfully.


    What she respected was not the king''s status, but the fact that Chang Nuo had done something that everyone wanted to do but didn''t dare to do.


    Looking at Granny New''s appearance, Chang Nuo sighed slightly, and then took back the domineering aura he exuded. It''s not that he didn''t understand that the old woman in front of him was a top product of the previous era, and her strength was so powerful that it made people despair. , but since the other party can say such things, what reason can he have not to believe it.


    "Get up Abona, let''s get over it, but you have to remember that you only have this one chance!"


    Although he had begun to feel relieved and did not hold anyone responsible, Chang Nuo still warned him solemnly.


    "Yes, I remember this!"


    Abona said respectfully.


    "Gloriousa, a strong man from the previous era, it''s such an honor!"


    Chang Nuo said and made a gentleman''s salute. This scene instantly surprised several people, including Hancock.


    "you know me?"


    Granny Niu propped up her crutches and stared at the man in front of her curiously, but she also asked seriously.


    "I''ve only heard of your name, but I didn''t expect to be lucky enough to meet you today!"


    Changnuo said respectfully again. ording to Changnuo''s understanding of the old woman in front of him, her man is probably the most powerful person in the navy. Otherwise, she would not choose to return to Daughter''s Ind directly for the rest of her life. Get out, because her identity has been spected many times before.


    Although he is not very sure, Chang Nuo still believes that Gu Luoliosa, a top figure in the previous era, should have an inseparable rtionship with Vice Admiral Garp of the Navy, and may even be the grandmother of the protagonist in the future.


    Changnuo is now quite interested in Granny New.


    "I really didn''t expect that I, a dying old woman, have already retired to this ce where no one has shit. It''s really surprising that someone can still remember me after so many years. The key is that it''s a man at such a young age!"


    Granny New said with a smile.


    The scene just now was officially over, no one mentioned it anymore, and the atmosphere returned to calm in an instant.


    "Old woman, don''t you usually take the rules of Daughters Ind very seriously? Why did youe in with two men today?"


    Hancock never gave up any chance to hit Granny New, and this time it can be said to be an absolute heavy blow.


    Because men are not allowed to go to the ind, this is a rule passed down from daughter ind. Even after giving birth to a child with another man, the boy can only be sent out, and the daughter can stay on daughter ind and continue to live.


    This has always been a custom on daughter ind, which can also be said to be a rule.


    As the previous national emperor, Grandma New has always insisted on implementing things in this regard, and she takes it very seriously.


    It''s just that today''s unexpected situation was something she had never thought about before, but what time it was now, she didn''t want to embarrass Abona, and more importantly, she heard about Chang Nuo killing the Tianlong people. The incident, just this news, had already made her throw all the rules behind her.


    The two Sonia sisters are still lying on the ground at this moment, and no one can care about them. Now several people are shocked by Chang Nuo''s performance, and Granny New understands better what it means to kill the Tianlong people.


    Now Hancock was the only one standing there. She didn''t know what happened? I don��t know why Granny New, a woman who has always respected the rules of Daughters Ind, broke the rules today?


    But looking at the atmosphere at the scene, you can feel the subtlety without saying anything more.


    Granny New didn''t pay attention to Hancock''s words. She kept her eyes on Chang Nuo. She was full of curiosity about the young man in front of her.


    "Gloriousa, I believe that you will not tell anyone about what Abona said. This is just because I believe you. But Abona, no matter what kind of rtionship you had before, this matter At this point, I don��t want this to happen again.��


    Changnuo said leisurely, and after finishing speaking, he patted Abona''s shoulder directly. He just patted the other party''s shoulder, but the ground he was standing on had already begun to crack at the moment Changnuo made his move. .


    Guluoliosa and several others could only watch quietly, and in the end could not say any words.


    He originally came here in a good mood, but it was already like this in less than half an hour. Chang Nuo didn''t want to say anything else. He just turned his head and nced at Hancock and said, "The things on the table are just... Just apply it on your back and the rest will disappear naturally the next day.��


    After saying that, Chang Nuo walked out of the pce hall without even looking back.


    Seeing this, Junhe hurriedly followed behind.


    There were only five people left here and two people were lying on the ground. Abona looked remorseful, and Granny New also sighed.


    "What happened?"


    Hancock asked doubtfully, why did he suddenly be like this when he was fine a second ago? She wanted to know the answer to this urgently now.


    But among the people in front of her, no one wanted to tell her the whole story. Even if he wanted to know, he still needed someone to tell her!


    Abona stood there quietly. Granny New didn''t even bother to talk to Hancock. She just walked up to him and said softly, "Abona, don''t pay too much attention to this kind of thing. Isn''t it in the past now?" !"


    "Sister Guluoliosa, His Majesty the King trusts me very much. Although we have only been in contact for a few days, His Majesty the King''s trust in me cannot be greater. It seems that I have really let him down this time!"


    Abona said reproachfully.

 Chapter 110 Memories of the Past

    <h4>Chapter 110 Memories of the Past</h4>


    Grandma Niu looked at the jewelry there. Even though she was holding it in her hands, she still couldn''t arouse the slightest interest. It was rare to see an old friend from the past, but she didn''t expect that it would end like this?


    After Abona finished speaking, with a look of remorse and a tired body, he then turned around and started walking towards the outskirts of the pce hall.


    "Abona..."


    Granny New shouted, but looking at the other party''s lonely figure, he didn''t know how tofort her at this moment.


    The two of them could only watch Abona leaving, but they couldn''t say anything in between.


    It wasn''t until Abona disappeared from the sight of the two of them that Hancock looked at Granny New calmly and asked, "Grandma New, what happened?"


    "This is a very serious matter, more serious than you can imagine!"


    Granny New said with a slight sigh.


    "But what happened could actually make King Changnuo so angry? The scene just now really shocked me!" Hancock said.


    "Don''t say it''s you. Even though I have lived for so many years, I have never seen someone at this age who can use his domineering color and domineering energy to such an extent. It is really puzzling!"


    Granny New still said in disbelief.


    "Have you known Abona before?"


    Listening to Hancock''s question, Granny New did not refuse to answer. She slowly found a step and sat there, recalling in her mind how she had just met Abona.


    At that time, Granny New looked rtively young and beautiful. She had just left Nine Snakes Ind for a few years. They were sailing on the Grand Route and discovered Abona''s body on a newly captured pirate ship. figure.


    It''s just that Abona was only about two or three years old at this time. Faced with this kind of thing, he could only stare at this group of adults with wide eyes.


    It was because of his cute appearance that Granny New held him in her arms and took him back to her pirate ship.


    In the time toe, people on the entire ship taught him how to fight. With the arrival of Abona, the atmosphere on the entire ship gradually began to change a lot.


    It''s just that the pirate ships at this time are not all women, but more of them are a group of men, but they respect Granny New and everyone.


    "Sister Groliosa, can I also participate in the next battle?"


    Abona, who was five or six years old, said to Granny New with a serious face.


    At this time, the dozen or so people sitting around on the deck of the ship allughed heartily after hearing this, but Abona didn''t care about these things.


    "Abona, you are still young. When you grow up, you can fight with us. Now you can still learn more fighting skills. Only by learning more can you find a way out!" Granny New said with a smile. She said like a mother.


    "I am no longer a child. I will definitely be a more powerful pirate than you in the future. Please don''t underestimate me!" Little Abona said confidently.


    "Yes, yes, I believe Abona will definitely surpass us in the future, but at this point in time, do you know what you should do?" Granny New asked with a smile.


    "I know, I should go to training, I can''t hold everyone back!"


    Abona looked serious and solemn, and shouted to everyone in a sonorous voice.


    "You are right. Only after you be a strong man can you dominate the entire sea. By then, no one will dare to bully you, and you can also protect us." Granny New smiled. said.


    "Don''t worry, Sister Guluoliosa, I will definitely protect you and Uncle Guluo from now on!"


    Abona showed a sunny smile, then turned towards the stern of the ship and started to train.


    After he left, the people sitting on the deck began to show helpless expressions.


    "Leosa, it''s great that little Abona has such a heart, but we are going to the new world next, and it will be difficult to guarantee our own lives by then. Do we really have to take him with us?"


    A rtively rugged man sitting on the deck showed a helpless expression, looked at Guluoliosa and said softly.


    "Guro, is it possible that we just abandon Abona like this? He is still so young, how is he supposed to survive after leaving?"


    Granny New said with great reluctance.


    "Liosa, it''s not that we don''t want to take him with us, but you also know the situation in the new world. Now for us, there is no particrly good way. If it doesn''t work, look at the one who gave him to the navy. how?"


    Guro said.


    "No, Abona must not join the navy. This will make all the future dreams of this child disappear. It is better to take him with him first. The specific situation will be discussedter." Granny New said in refusal.


    How could anyone in this group of people want to send such a young Abona away? They have been following this group of people since the little guy was two or three years old. They have already regarded this little guy as their own. They have already experienced the cruelty of treating their biological sons countless times in this world, but life is not something they can do whatever they want!


    "Start setting sail, goal, new world."


    Guro could only reluctantly agree with the answer, then stood up and shouted loudly.


    In this era, the so-called Pirate King Roger has not even started to go to sea, and he doesn''t even know where he isughing. But just like this, the strong man in this era is already beyond everyone''s imagination. There are much more.


    There are even more powerful people from the older generation than those who came during the great era of pirates, and they are much stronger.


    The Rocks Pirates, a man who has always upied the throne of the New World, has never let anyone down. He has directly turned the entire New World upside down. Even if the Navy and the World Government unite, in the end he can''t get anything from him. benefit.


    Needless to say, the other pirate groups are already incredibly strong.


    It is precisely because of this that thepetitive pressure of pirates in this world is much greater. No one will work hard for the title of Pirate King. They need this freedom of navigation more.


    This is today''s Age of Navigation. Even in the era of great pirates in the future, there have never been a few people who were as powerful as they were at that time, but they were not able to conquer the entire sea.

 Chapter 111 The former Snake Queen

    <h4>Chapter 111 The former Snake Queen</h4>


    In Granny New''s memories, Abona stayed with them until she was 15 years old, but after that, Granny New began to leave quietly alone, and has since lived in seclusion on Daughter''s Ind, almost never leaving this ce again. step.


    She sighed with emotion about all this. She didn''t expect to see the little guy from her past after so many years. It would be a lie to say that she was not surprised.


    It was because of this situation that Granny New was willing to vite the rules of the entire Daughter Ind and bring Abona to this pce.


    There are still two people lying on the ground, and the cracks on the ground still exist in the huge hall. Now it is quiet and only the sound of breathing can be heard. Hancock just sits there quietly, listening to Granny New''s story With their past.


    This is a version that Hancock has never heard before, and it is precisely because of this that she is full of curiosity about Granny New''s past.


    "I didn''t expect that after so many years, I would be able to see my old friends again. I really miss the old days!"


    Granny New said with emotion.


    This was also the end of her historical narration. Hancock just listened attentively, and she did not interrupt what the other party was saying once.


    "Granny New, what did Abona tell you that made him so angry? It seems that his bottom line has been involved?"


    Hancock asked still curiously as he recalled what had just happened.


    "Hancock! It''s better that you don''t know some things. Regarding Abona, he did something wrong indeed."


    Granny New sighed again and said.


    "What''s all the fuss about? Could it be that King Chengnuo really killed the Celestial Dragon?"


    Hancock said with a look of disgust.


    "how do you know??"


    Granny New suddenly stood up in surprise, looked at Hancock and asked with a serious face.


    Her sudden momentum made Hancock startled. The key is that such Granny New is almost rare to see on Nine Snakes Ind. Although as the previous king, Granny New''s status has been seriously reduced now, but Hancock is still willing to take direction on many things.


    "What''s the matter?"


    Hancock asked in surprise. She just said it casually. She didn''t expect Granny New to have such a big reaction.


    "Who told you those words you just said?" Granny New asked.


    "King Changnuo told me personally. He even made fun of me. Could it be that it was not a joke?" Hancock''s expression began to change.


    She didn''t dare to think about the details, and she didn''t even think about it at all. An ordinary person actually dared to kill a Tianlong. For everyone in this world, this kind of thing would probably be a big deal if it was spread. It''s a fantasy.


    But Hancock, who is standing here today, looks at the serious look of Granny New standing above him, and can no longer tolerate her not believing it.


    It wasn''t until this moment that Hancock realized that when he first met Chang Nuo, what the other party said, and at the end of the rtionship, none of them actually meant to deceive her?


    Although it is somewhat unbelievable, Hancock has no choice but to believe it now.


    Because the news she received was so shocking, Hancock didn''t even stand upright and sat directly on the ground. The nk look in her eyes still reminded her of what she had experienced when she stayed in Mariejoia. Hurt.


    The scar on my back is also aching faintly now. It is not my body that hurts, but the suffering in my heart.


    For a man to be able to do this, Hancock''s already shaken heart seemed to be pulled by a force at this moment.


    The pile of gold and silver jewelry on the ground, plus the three bottles of blue potion on the table, recalling what Chang Nuo said when he put down the potion, "This will be your betrothal gift as my princess!"


    Thinking of this ce, what was left on Hancock''s face was not only shock, but also a hint of blush.


    Granny New seemed to have discovered something. She walked up to her with a helpless expression and ced her crutch heavily on the ground. The powerful voice immediately brought Hancock back to his senses.


    "Hancock, you are now the Snake Lady of Nine Snakes Ind. You have your own mission for some things. Don''t let men influence your thoughts!"


    Listening to what Granny New said, Hancock didn''t take it seriously at all. All the things he had just experienced had now been forgotten, and the rtionship between the two gradually deteriorated.


    Hancock''s face gradually turned cold. He looked at the short old woman in front of him and said in a cold voice, "I am so beautiful. No matter what happens to Nine Snake Ind in the future, I think they will all forgive me, but you Why is this old woman still here!"


    As soon as he finished speaking, Hancock kicked Granny New, and she flew out of the pce hall in an instant.


    Granny New did not resist. This kind of attack was not even a tickle to her. Some things always needed to find an ending point, so as not to make the two parties more embarrassed.


    Leaving in this way may be at least the best way for him.


    At least he no longer had to look at anyone''s eyes. As a failed king, although he had great expectations on Cook, he still would not stop this girl from pursuing love or freedom.


    For Granny New, Chang Nuo''s performance has shocked her. Even if she stayed in the previous era, she could reach such a level of strength at this age. I am afraid that even the dead captain of the Locks Pirates , it is estimated that it is out of reach.


    This is just a judgment on the impact of the first meeting. Granny New can actually understand the other party through newspapers. There are more inner things.


    Although Nine Snake Ind is located in a windless zone, newspapers are rarely delivered here, but asionally newspapers will be delivered here by mistake. This kind of thing is not unheard of.


    He had learned more or less about it from the newspapers. Although it was quite a while ago, the freshness of it still allowed him to understand some things about the outside world.


    Perhaps the most pitiable thing now is the two Sonia sisters. From the beginning to the end, the role yed by the two of them is to lie on the ground. Amid a domineering and domineering look, the two of them are still asleep so far, and even even Their dearest sister was also sitting there at the moment, holding three blue medicine bottles in her hands. She had probably already thought of the names of her future children.


    Hancock''s expression at this moment waspletely full of love. For her age at this moment, this kind of expression may indeed be a bit early.

 Chapter 112 Junhe’s Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 112 Junhe��s Devil Fruit</h4>


    Chang Nuo, who left the pce hall of Nine Snake Ind, did not have any curiosity about this small country. He walked directly along the avenue in front of the pce and walked straight towards the pirate ship.


    He has no interest in breaking the rules of this ce. Besides, this kind of thing ispletely unnecessary for him.


    At this time of night, the entire Daughters Ind is quite lively, and the main avenue is also full of peopleing and going.


    As Chang Nuo walked over, he didn''t know how many people were looking at him. Some even wanted to touch him, but they knew clearly that the man in front of them was brought in by their empress. He was behaving politely. Above, it��s not too much.


    "Your Majesty, are we on a pirate ship now?"


    Jun He, who had been following behind without speaking, suddenly walked forward quickly and asked Chang Nuo.


    "No, just find a ce to rest and chat. Let''s wait until tomorrow morning."


    Chang Nuo said calmly. There was no anger in his eyes now, and he had even forgotten about Abona.


    However, not far away from them, Abona has been following behind him silently. Although Chang Nuo no longer cares about what he said, this guy is still in deep self-me.


    "Shunhe, how is your Devil Fruit training going?" Changnuo asked, suddenly changing the subject.


    Mainly because he raised his head and nced at the moon hanging in the sky. It was big and round at the moment. This reminded him that Junhe''s Devil Fruit was called Silver Moon Wolf. Maybe it had something to do with the moon?


    "Ah~? Your Majesty, I haven''t had time to practice this thing yet. I originally wanted to go back and get familiar with it, but I have already learned the basicbat skills." Junhe said awkwardly.


    "Let''s go and find a hidden ce. I also want to know what kind of changes your ability will have under the moonlight. Maybe there will be unexpected changes for your future growth!"


    Chang Nuo said with a curious look on his face.


    "yes!"


    After what the other party said, Junhe''s sense of expectation immediately burst out.


    In a ce about two or three miles away from the port, on the edge of the coast, there will be no one here. The windless zone has only one advantage. There will be no waves in the sea water here.


    Although there may be unexpectedrge creatures underwater, right now, the two of them don''t care about these things at all.


    "Quick, let me see the effect of your Silver Moon Wolf?"


    Chang Nuo shouted impatiently.


    Junhe didn''t hesitate at this moment, and instantly released himself to release the devil fruit ability, and his whole person had transformed into a werewolf in an instant.


    But when it first converted into human-wolf mode, the hair on Silver Moon Wolf''s body was still ck, except for the ring of hair on its neck that was white.


    But under the moonlight, in less than 30 seconds, the entire Silver Moon Wolf had turned silvery white, and its size was also slowly increasing.


    "Your Majesty, I already know what the Silver Moon Wolf is capable of under the moonlight!"


    Junhe looked at Changnuo next to him with excitement, and said such words with a huge wolf mouth, and his eyes began to look at his body from time to time.


    "what''s going on?"


    Chang Nuo sat on the stone and carefully observed his every move. Especially when he heard the other party talk about his abilities, Chang Nuo became even more curious.


    "Your Majesty, the Silver Moon Wolf, a phantom beast of the Wolf Fruit Fruit, can be immortal under the moonlight!"


    Junhe said excitedly.


    "Oh~, that''s awesome..."


    Chang Nuo did not hide his inner feelings at all, but the next second he changed into something else.


    The main reason was that he didn''t believe what Shunhe said. Before the other party noticed, the demon sword Muramasa had already shed his shoulder.


    "ah!!"


    Junhe was suddenly startled, and his body couldn''t stop jumping back dozens of meters.


    "Your Majesty, what are you doing?"


    Junhe shouted in fright.


    But in Chang Nuo''s eyes, the demon sword Muramasa had already cut into his shoulder, but at this moment Junhe seemed not to feel the slightest pain, and the scar on his shoulder seemed to have never appeared before.


    If it was just an ordinary sh, Changnuo wouldn''t be so surprised. The key is that he used Haki in the attack just now, but now, Junhe didn''t show any signs of it.


    "It''s true! I didn''t expect Silver Moon Wolf to have such abilities?"


    Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty, you really shocked me, but your ability is really good."


    Junhe is quite satisfied with himself now. Under the moonlight, as long as he doesn''t fall into the sea, he is almost invincible.


    I had never thought that this kind of devil fruit could have such a great effect before. Even Changnuo was quite shocked when he saw this situation.


    But since he is a phantom beast, there must be some secrets that others have not discovered.


    Being able to be injured by domineering under the moonlight, but still able to remain intact in the end. Needless to say, Silver Moon Wolf''s abilities. As long as they are developed properly, even Kaido''s abilities may not be able to do anything to him under the moonlight. harm.


    But if it were not under the moonlight, then his attack strength should be at least ten times weaker.


    After both of them sighed, Changnuo said leisurely, "Okay, don''t show off here. When you go back, take good control of your Devil Fruit ability, and don''t waste such a good thing in the end."


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, I will definitely do this kind of thing well."


    Junhe waspletely immersed in his invincible state at this moment, and what he said to Changnuo was just perfunctory.


    Chang Nuo has naturally discovered this kind of thing, but his younger brother has grown up now, so as the boss, he always needs to teach him some lessons.


    He was still sitting on the big rock, and his eyes suddenly turned sky blue. Then he just stretched out his hand and pushed forward, and a transparent square instantly restrained Junhe.


    "You see, even if you have an immortal body under the moonlight, once you are controlled by others, your abilities will be almost useless!"


    Chang Nuo said with a speechless expression.


    Junhe didn''t understand what was happening at all. For just a moment, he felt that his body waspletely out of control and was directly imprisoned.


    This kind of feeling without the slightest sense of attack and confinement ispletely impossible to guard against.


    It wasn''t until this moment that this guy''s expression began to soften slightly.

 Chapter 113 Proposal

    <h4>Chapter 113 Proposal</h4>


    It''s no wonder that he is in such a state. It is normal for him to expand naturally when he suddenly has such a powerful power at this moment.


    After scolding Junhe slightly, Changnuo released the ability that restrained him.


    After regaining his free body, Junhe quickly returned to his original shape without the swelling feeling just now, and then ran to Changnuo''s side with a smile on his face.


    "Come out!"


    Before Jun He could say anything, Chang Nuo opened his mouth and shouted calmly.


    Junhe was stunned for a moment, and then began to look around cautiously.


    Then a figure walked out of the woods behind him, and with the appearance of Abona, Junhe suddenly let go of his inner vignce.


    Seeing that the other party still looked remorseful, Junhe walked to one side silently.


    Abona slowly walked to Chang Nuo and said apologetically, "Your Majesty, I understand my mistake!"


    "What happened in the past is in the past. Now our strength is not strong enough. Sometimes we must be strict with ourselves. We are already partners. I also hope that you can forgive me for what I just said to you. Maybe it was in my tone. There was some anxiety and anger.��


    Chang Nuo said calmly, there was no me in his tone, but he felt a little embarrassed.


    When he was in the pce hall, what Chang Nuo said and did really brought him to the edge of anger. When he came out and thought about it, these were really not that big of a deal.


    After hearing what his Majesty said, Abona med himself even more and lowered his head throughout the whole process. This man in his thirties had probably never shown such a mentality when facing his previous captain.


    "Thank you for your understanding, Your Majesty. Abona will definitely take this as a warning."


    Hearing what Abona said, Changnuo stood up, smiled, and patted the other party''s shoulder with his hand, indicating that the matter was indeed over.


    The three of them chatted like this until midnight, and the conversation was quite enjoyable. They all knew what was happening on the Nine Snakes ship. With so many men and women, if something unexpected didn''t break out between them, that would be A ghost.


    Therefore, they did not choose to return to the ship, leaving a rtively rxed andfortable space for those of them. Sitting here and chatting was a very good choice.


    But this state onlysted until midnight. While they were still chatting, the group of guards belonging to the Daughter Kingdom had already found this ce.


    They moved very quickly, holding torches in their hands and moving quickly in the direction of the three of them.


    After arriving here, a group of people were panting.


    One of the women, who seemed to be about 2 meters tall, looked at Changnuo anxiously and shouted in a very nervous tone, "King Changnuo, His Majesty is seriously ill and is now lying on the bed unable to move. Master Groliosa asked me toe to you and tell you that you have a way to cure her!"


    As soon as these words came out, when the three of them were still chatting happily, Abona and Junhe suddenly showed worried looks, especially Junhe. He had never heard that His Majesty the King was still alive. Do you know medical skills?


    "Let''s go, I''ll go over and take a look, you two go back to the boat and n the next trip."


    Chang Nuo slowly stood up and said to the two of them with a smile.


    How many of you have thought about Hancock''s current state and what serious illness caused it? It could only make him sigh helplessly.


    The two of them did not refuse the arrangement of His Majesty the King. Chang Nuo followed the women and began to move quickly towards the direction of the pce.


    After arriving here, the group of guards naturally stayed outside the pce, and Chang Nuo was left alone to walk inside.


    The two Sonia sisters had already woken up. When Chang Nuo appeared, Sonia hurriedly pulled him and walked inside quickly.


    As he walked, he shouted, "Sister, Your Majesty King Changnuo is here!"


    Hancock in the room had a distressed expression on her face, and big drops of sweat kept falling on her forehead. But when she heard Chang Nuoing, she sat up instantly, showing aplete look of panic. A confused look.


    But when Chang Nuo stood in front of the bed and looked at Hancock who was wearing pajamas, the shy expression on her expression revealed a look of helplessness in an instant.


    Needless to say now, with my toes, I have already thought about why the other person became like this.


    "Chang...Changnuo...King!"


    Hancock, who was lying on the bed, shouted shyly.


    Chang Nuo was not polite at all. He sat on the edge of the bed and nced at the two Sonia sisters who were still standing there.


    The two looked at each other sensibly, and then walked out obediently, even the door to the room was closed tightly.


    "How do you feel now?"


    Changnuo asked, looking at the other party with a smile.


    "It''s getting better, but...but why did you get here?"


    Hancock asked still shyly.


    Changnuo smiled and shook his head, and put his hand on the other person''s forehead to feel it. At this moment, Hancock was like a good girl, without any image of a national emperor. She sat there nkly without moving. Yu Changnuo put his hand on his forehead.


    "Hancock!"


    "ah!!!?"


    Hearing Chang Nuo''s call, Hancock suddenly froze and raised his head slightly to look at the other party.


    "Let''s get married and be my most beautiful bride. From now on, you will only belong to me. This is the testimony of our love."


    The moment Hancock raised his head, he began to have endless reveries.


    Even the details of getting married have been considered, facing such an outstanding man. The king of this country has no resistance at all.


    She looked at the man sitting next to her with piercing eyes, as if she was waiting for him to confess his love in the next second.


    In such arge room, there were only two people left, big eyes staring at small eyes, and as the ambiguous atmosphere gradually increased, Chang Nuo did not refuse the other party''s kindness.


    He gently kissed Hancock''s forehead, and whispered in his ear, "How about bing my princess from now on?"


    Although he had said these words in front of the other party before, and even gave out the betrothal gift, this time in such an ambiguous scene, Chang Nuo mentioned this issue again.


    Anyway, we have been together for so many days, and we have already thought about what we should have. In some respects, Hancock can be regarded as a very good woman.


    However, Hancock didn''t have the slightest intention of rejecting him. He bit his lip, nodded slightly, and then hugged the other person directly.

 Chapter 114 Gaya Island

    <h4>Chapter 114 Gaya Ind</h4>


    To be precise, these two people are not very old now, so it is a bit early to talk about this kind of thing.


    But for this era, 17 years old is already an adult, Chang Nuo has already reached this age, and Hancock is just one year older than Chang Nuo.


    The two people in the room did not do anything out of the ordinary, but Hancock''s so-called serious illness disappeared overnight.


    On the second day.


    Changnuo has left gold, silver and jewelry worth at least 500 million Baileys to the daughter ind. This money is enough for people in this country to live for a month or two without worrying.


    The next thing they started to prepare was to prepare for the next stop.


    Hancock has not yet started boarding the ship. At this moment, the port is already surrounded by many women. They are shouting loudly. Although most of them are shouting for their own king, the key is that some of them are shouting to the men on the ship. .


    There is no need to say anything more. The current situation is very clear. Something must have happened on the ship yesterday that moved everyone.


    As the Nine Snakes ship began to slowly set sail, everyone on board was ready to leave.


    Now they are preparing to set off to the next ce, which is also their ultimate goal after going to sea this time.


    The ship is still so crowded, but the voyage is rtively far this time, so living on this ship is not as convenient as imagined.


    The people are still the same group of people who came back before, and the boat is still the same boat pulled by two sea beasts.


    But this trip was much more exciting than the way back. The king''s guards on the boat began to teach the women on Nine Snakes Ind about the experience of practicing armed domineering. This was something that had been promised before. .


    The people who were originally from the Tru Kingdom are now almost like a family to the people on Nine Snakes Ind. Everyone has regarded them as partners. The most important thing is that everyone''s name for Hancock has long been changed.


    From the moment they set off, when Junhe was the first to open his mouth to wee Hancock aboard, he personally shouted, "Wee the princess..." From this moment on, everyone else''s titles began to change.


    Even those people on Nine Snakes Ind were a little surprised, but they were not surprised at all when they saw the two people''s tired faces.


    The destination they are heading to this time, Gaya Ind, is already quite far away from Nine Snakes Ind, and without an eternal record pointer, it is indeed a challenge for them to cross half of the Grand Route. No small challenge.


    But after sailing for half a month, the outline of Gaya Ind finally began to appear in front of everyone. This is a ce that no one else has been to. The name is familiar, but the geographical location seems quite unfamiliar.


    "Your Majesty, Gaya Ind has arrived!"


    On the Nine Snakes ship, Junhe walked up to Changnuo who was chatting with Hancock and said respectfully.


    In the past half month, I have encountered a lot of things on the road. At least crossing the Grand Line, no matter how I walk, I will always experience some dangerous situations.


    Chang Nuo picked up the tea cup, took a sip slowly, and then said calmly, "Within two hours, take over the main ce on Gaya Ind!"


    Now they are sitting on a pirate ship. As long as they appear here, it means that they are all pirates and there is no national boundary at all.


    In this ce where birds don''t shit, the mostmon ces are pirates. Although the ind is not very big, it is simply a paradise for sin.


    It can even be said that from top to bottom, inside and out, this ce has been upied by pirates for nearly a hundred years.


    Gaya Ind is in such a situation. If Changnuo doesn''t want what outsiders know about what he does next, he can only use force to take over the entire ind.


    However, Junhe who was standing aside obviously did not understand what it meant, but Hancock stood up and shouted loudly, "Everyone in the Nine Snakes Pirates, follow them into Gaya Ind. Within two hours, use Take over the entire ind by force! "


    Hancock''s domineering power instantly swept across the entire ship, and wherever his voice reached, everyone else roared loudly.


    "I must have understood you correctly, right?"


    After Hancock finished shouting, he turned around and continued to sit opposite Chang Nuo, saying with a smile on his face.


    Chang Nuo smiled and said slightly, "I understood that correctly!"


    Jun He stood nearby with an embarrassed look on his face. The key was that he and His Majesty the King had lived together for so many years and had grown up together. They were not as good as a woman they had just been in contact with for less than a month.


    Abona suddenly appeared from nowhere, patted Junhe on the shoulder, and said with a smile, "Don''t think about it, let''s go quickly!"


    The port of Gaya Ind is almost full of pirate ships, with various shapes and styles, and even the gs on each ship are different. You can imagine how many pirates they have staying here.


    This is a ce where no one from the Navy or the World Government normally has jurisdiction. As long as they don''t make too much noise, the Navy is not willing toe here.


    It seems that the pirates and the navy have alreadymunicated, but in such a mixed ce, many people from therger pirate groups also stay here, which is why the navy does not Dare, or don��t want to clean up the reasons here.


    As the Nine Snakes ship slowly approached the port, other pirates staying at the port also discovered that the Nine Snakes Pirates at this time did not have a great reputation. They mainly sailed in the windless zone. , so as far as they know, no one among the pirates on Gaya Ind in the middle of the Grand Route will pay attention to this matter.


    But a pirate ship pulled by two sea beasts can still attract everyone''s attention. There were only a few people in twos and threes at the beginning of the port. By the time the pirate ship approached, at least nearly two people had gathered in the entire port. About a hundred people.


    Almost all of these pirates look weird, and none of them are attractive, but no one dares to say whether there will be any powerful beings in this ce.


    The life of a pirate is nothing more than adventure, but no one who stays here is innocent.


    "Hancock, after we send you here, you can go back directly. There are many things left that you don''t need to participate in. You can just leave them to them when the timees." Chang Nuo said gently to the person sitting opposite. Hancock said.


    "I have never asked you before, why did you choose toe to Gaya Ind??"


    Hancock asked with some doubts.


    "Perhaps you will know these thingster!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.

 Chapter 115 The person who controls the entire island

    <h4>Chapter 115 The person who controls the entire ind</h4>


    Hancock didn''t want to know too much about what the man in front of him had done, but being able to be the emperor of a country meant that she was not without merits. At least it could be seen that Chang Nuo and his party chose this ce to be as different as they had imagined. Simple.


    But after hearing what Chang Nuo said, Hancock could only stop talking, but she did not give up on what she had said.


    Although the area of ??Gaya Ind is not veryrge, there are indeed many pirates on it, if you count them carefully. There are at least five thousand pirates on this ind.


    "Junhe, Abona, you two, with the King''s Guard, must gather all the pirates in one ce within two hours. Anyone who encounters resistance will be killed on the spot!"


    Chang Nuo saw that the ship was approaching the port. He stood up domineeringly and shouted to the two people over there.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    All the while everyone was just sailing on the boat. Didn''t experience anything. For such a long time. The bones in these people''s bodies have already begun to ache. Now it''s rare to encounter something where you can fight. Each of their eyes had be fierce.


    As the ship just docked, those who stayed on the shore saw so many beauties on the ship. They all looked at them directly and even whistled from time to time.


    But then they met their fate, that is, Hancock made a gesture and everyone turned to stone in an instant.


    "Abona, we can drive in from both sides as a team."


    As soon as they reached the shore, Junhe patted Abona on the shoulder and said with a smile.


    "No problem, let''s see who of us reaches the central city first. How about the loser treating the winner to a drink?"


    "I agree!"


    Junhe said with a smile.


    There is almost no pressure on this group of people to deal with the people on the ind, because those rtively powerful beings are almost all at the level of big pirates, but in this ce where nothing matters, they don��t believe in the so-called big pirates. will be concentrated in this ce.


    Gaya Ind is small and pitiful. There is only one town on it called Mogu Town, but in fact it is just a few dozen businesses. Most of them are mainly pirates and a group of people living here. .


    ording to the strength of Abona and the group of people from the King''s Guard, two hours is considered a rtively long time for them.


    Therefore, within even an hour, the entire Demon Valley Town was alreadypletely under control.


    Changnuo and Hancock walked leisurely on the streets here. On such a huge road, no one could be seen now!


    All the pirates have been gathered in one ce, and even the merchants living here, almost no one can escape.


    Chang Nuo didn''t want to see them at all. When he arrived here, he just nced at them and then walked in another direction.


    "Hancock, we are going to the next stop, and we may have to say goodbye from here."


    Chang Nuo was on this street and said to Hancock with some reluctance.


    "Huh? Next stop?"


    Hancock didn''t understand what Chang Nuo meant at all.


    "Okay, don''t think too much. Since you are already here, there is a lot of money on those pirate ships. Let''s just collect them and take them back. We may have to stay here for a while, and there are also I have my own things to do, so I definitely can''t take care of you recently," Chang Nuo said.


    "I see."


    Hancock said.


    Now it is estimated that the most speechless group of people are the people living on Gaya Ind. A group of people suddenly rushed out without any warning and directly used powerful force to gather them all in the center of the town. A little more After saying a few words, he was already beaten to a state of disgrace. If he was strong enough and resisted a little, he was massacred on the spot.


    This group of pirates never figured out why, suddenly someone would loot this ce?


    In the center of the town, there was arge group of people standing there, but only about ten people were standing around. They were all standing on the roof or other ces to observe every move of these pirates.


    "Everyone, we don''t have any ill intentions, we just have some things to do. Just stay here for a while and don''t move or resist. We don''t have any thoughts about your lives, but the choice is now yours. In the hands of others, the right of life and death is held by us, I hope you can distinguish the importance."


    Abona stood on the highest roof and shouted coldly at these people. When the voice fell, he shed forward with one knife at a time. In the next second, the buildings that had been built one after another were , a crack that was hundreds of meters long appeared in an instant.


    The pirates, who were still a little restless, all obediently shut their mouths after seeing this scene.


    But there was one person among them who shouted directly to Abona, "I am a member of the Don Quixote family. Do you want to go against Domingo?"


    "So much nonsense!"


    Abona didn''t even bother to respond to him, and just stabbed him casually. The man who was still talking one second was already dead and dismembered the next second.


    This decisive execution made all the remaining pirates present tremble.


    Domingo was already considered a great pirate in the new world during this period, and even perfectly created the Don Quixote family. ording to this period, Domingo should have be the king of Dressrosa.


    In the eyes of the new world or those big guys, Domingo should be considered a rtively powerful figure, but in this section of the Grand Line, there are very few people who can hear his name, not to mention that they don''t care at all. Whose long promise is menco?


    Now all they have to do is to make these pirates shut up and stay in this ce, at least not letting anyone know their next n.


    There are so many pirates gathered here, and there must be quite a few other people of all kinds among them. Even reporters from other countries must be among them.


    But now all of them have only one identity, that is, pirates! Coming on a pirate ship, no one will regard them as a national force, or in other forms, but will only think that it is caused by the involution among pirates.

 Chapter 116 Ready to go

    <h4>Chapter 116 Ready to go</h4>


    Therefore, this situation is already a good cover for their identity. The Navy and the World Government will not consider the Kingdom of Toru at all.


    But now that the opportunity hase, the next thing naturally needs to be done.


    If you want to go to Kongdao, there are actually not many ways that Changnuo can do.


    There is such a thing as system space, but it doesn''t take much effort to go up to a height of 10,000 meters.


    Standing on the edge of Gaya Ind, Changnuo raised his head and looked upward. Above the white clouds he could see was their inevitable destination this time.


    Hancock stood behind him in confusion. Now she realized that she could not understand the man standing in front of her. Even though he had been sailing for more than half a month, he never knew that Changnuo came to Gaya Ind. Purpose.


    However, the other party had already begun to control everyone on the ind as soon as he came to this ce, and now he came to the beach regardless of it.


    "Hancock, that''s where we''re going next..."


    As Chang Nuo said, he stretched out his hand and pointed directly towards the sky.


    Just a finger, but at this moment there is nothing in the sky except white clouds.


    Hancock didn''t understand the reason at all, and asked with some confusion, "Could you be talking about the empty ind?"


    "Yes, that''s the purpose of going this time!"


    "But isn''t Sky Ind a legendary ce? How could such a thing really exist!"


    Hancock asked iprehensibly.


    "Hancock, Sky Ind does exist, and we need to go up this time. To be honest, Sky Ind is of great use to me. From now on, you will be our Princess Tru, and there are some things that are important to you. I don��t have to hide it either.


    The Devil Fruit ability I possess is a superhuman space ability. After arriving at Sky Ind, I will build a space channel connecting the Toru Kingdom. If you think it is possible, I can also connect a channel to you, at least For the future, even if we no longer be pirates, there will still be smoothmunication between the two countries. When the two of us meet, we can reach each other quickly.


    What do you think? "


    Chang Nuo asked with a smile and attentiveness, staring at the other person with piercing eyes, and the emotion in his eyes seemed strange even to him.


    Hancock only heard thest words, and didn''t care about the front ones at all, and his face turned red again.


    For Hancock, no matter what Chang Nuo said or did at this moment, it was right. As long as it was something he wanted, this woman would do it without hesitation.


    Hancock nodded without hesitation. Now that the two of us are here, there is no need to hide it.


    But after being sweet for a while, Hancock suddenly returned to his normal appearance. He looked at Chang Nuo with confusion and asked, "Where is the empty ind specifically? None of us know how to get up there?"


    "Don''t worry. Since you can say such things, we will naturally have our way, but we still need to work hard for you. The identity of the Tru Kingdom cannot be exposed. Those pirates will be left to you for the time being. In two days, You can go back directly in an hour."


    Changnuo said.


    "Don''t worry, we''ll leave this ce to us, but we don''t know when you can see us again once you leave, so you must pay attention to your own safety."


    Hancock said worriedly.


    She understood the strength of the man in front of her, but for a woman who was already in love, no matter how strong she was, she could not stop her concern.


    They arrived at Gaya Ind in the morning, and an hour or two have passed now. Both Junhe''s people and Changnuo''s preparations have been put in ce. As for what they will do next, The thing is to head towards the direction of Sky Ind.


    After handing over everything to the Nine Snakes Pirates, all the people of the Toru Kingdom were evacuated from it. Those who had no strength in Barlow directly robbed a pirate ship and started heading towards the Toru Kingdom. Depart in the direction you are in.


    There are only a dozen people left here, and Changnuo will take Junhe, Abona, and the dozen or so king guards, all heading towards the empty ind.


    As evening approached, everyone had gathered at the seaside location where Chang Nuo was located. Every one of them was full of expectations, and their hearts were also full of questions. How to get to the empty ind was the biggest problem.


    But these guyspletely ignored the strength of their King. Indeed, ording to Changnuo''s current development of Devil Fruit abilities, it would be quite difficult for him to directly use space to jump to an empty ind with an uncertain target.


    If they didn''tnd on the empty ind along the way, wouldn''t they just fall into the sea?


    The most important thing is that there is sea water on the empty ind, which can also make people with abilities such as thempletely lose all actions.


    "Junhe, have everyone arrived?"


    "Yes, Your Majesty, everyone is here now. The number of people we have prepared for going to Sky Ind this time, including you, is a total of 19 people. The other members of the King''s Guard will all escort Gogoya and the others back to the Kingdom of Tru. ."


    Junhe reported.


    This has already been the beginning of a turning point in their lives. Everyone is paying great attention to it. Even Abona, who has just joined, has a stern look at this moment. He also wants to see what the legendary Kongdao is like. of.


    But for so many of them, the key to reaching the empty ind is that there is no ship yet, which makes this group of people confused.


    Changnuo looked back at everyone and asked firmly, "I don''t know what will happen when I go to Kongdao. If you are worried, you can stay directly and return to the Tru Kingdom. I will never Will be med!"


    "Your Majesty, please be able to trust the people brought out by your Majesty. Even if they die on the journey, no one will frown!"


    Junhe shouted loudly.


    Seeing this momentum, Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then said in a calm tone, "The next step will be an opportunity to change the destiny of our Kingdom of Tru. I hope everyone can work together this time."


    Jun He smiled knowingly. After all, they were friends since childhood. They had already nned and set what would happen next.


    The only problem now is how to get to the sky ind at an altitude of 10,000 meters.

 Chapter 117 Arrival at Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 117 Arrival at Sky Ind</h4>


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he turned around and looked in the direction of the sea. Since everyone had decided to take this step, it was time for everything to begin.


    When everyone was feeling confused, a dozen bamboo dragonflies suddenly appeared in Chang Nuo''s hands. The key was that these things looked very ordinary, and no one could feel anything unusual.


    This thing was purchased by Changnuo from the system space. It can fly tens of thousands of meters at a time, but the key is that this thing is one-time use. Once they cannot reach the sky ind this time, then what will happen next? , facing almost falling into the sea.


    "Junhe, give this thing to everyone!"


    Chang Nuo didn''t turn around, but calmly shouted to Junhe.


    Junhe waspletely confused, but he still followed the instructions of his Majesty the King, and even gave one to Abona.


    Just when everyone was wondering, Chang Nuo took the lead and ced the bamboo dragonfly on his head. Then when he let go of his hand, the bamboo dragonfly naturally floated above his head and began to spin rapidly.


    In less than a moment, Chang Nuo had slowly left the ground and was suspended about 3 meters above the ground.


    "Wow~"


    Everyone''s faces were filled with disbelief at this moment. They never thought that this thing could actually lead them to fly. Anyway, this pirate world is already incredible enough, and it is normal for more incredible things to happen.


    But this bamboo dragonfly is very expensive. Although it is only a one-time thing, the price of a single thing has reached tens of millions of beli, and it is still the kind of thing that does not guarantee after-sales service.


    "You are still in a daze, hurry up, we will go straight up after it is done."


    Chang Nuo looked at everyone with a speechless expression. Is this thing really that difficult to understand?


    Driven by curiosity, others began to slowly put bamboo dragonflies on their heads, but then, this feeling made them feel really good.


    The feeling of flying is something that ordinary people cannot experience. Even Abona felt that he was dreaming.


    "This thing is a one-time use and can only fly to about 10,000 meters. However, it has reached the location of the sky ind at about 7 kilometers from the ground. Everyone must remember it and must not separate under any circumstances. ! ��


    When everyone was already suspended two or three meters above the ground, Chang Nuo began to give serious instructions to everyone.


    "yes����"


    More than a dozen people answered together, and then they saw figures flying directly into the sky.


    Even though they were flying in mid-air, these people kept their formation and started to move forward. Even Changnuo was not sure whether there was an empty ind above his head at this moment. In addition, and most importantly, there was an ind above his head. White Sea, Sky Ind is also located on the White Sea above the White Sea.


    The White Sea is also the same as the sea. It has the power to incapacitate those with abilities. But before flying, Chang Nuo had already considered this problem.


    As long as he can determine the location of the empty ind, he can lead everyone to directly move through space without worrying about falling into the so-called sea.


    For them, at an altitude of 10,000 meters, especially with the powerful cold wind above, if they are not careful, these people may be blown away directly by the wind, and the consequences are unimaginable to anyone.


    So when they encountered strong winds, they held hands one by one and continued flying upwards.


    "Abona, if you are not afraid of the sea water, go ahead and confirm whether the thing above your head is the white sea!"


    Changnuo shouted loudly towards Abona.


    In this howling wind, Chang Nuo found it hard to understand how the future protagonist pirate group could enter an empty ind thousands of meters away in such a huge storm, and still drive a boat.


    The incredible luck is really enviable.


    Abona flew at the forefront, but then the humidity in the air became thicker and thicker, until in the end it felt like he couldn''t breathe.


    In the end, he had no choice but to retreat quickly and directly report what happened above.


    "At a height of three thousand meters, there should be no problem!"


    Changnuo said to himself, then looked at the group of people holding hands, and also went directly to grab the clothes of Junhe and Abona, and a blue light instantly covered everyone.


    When they appeared again, the scene in front of them hadpletely changed into something else.


    There was a clear sky above our heads, and there was no strong wind at all. It felt like bathing on the beach.


    And wherever they looked in front of them, everything was shaped like a bunch of white clouds.


    Although we have reached Sky Ind now, we are in the outermost area of ??Sky Ind.


    The feeling this ce left them with was indeed very refreshing and refreshing.


    "Is this an empty ind?"


    Abona couldn''t help but eximed directly.


    "Abona, you must trust His Majesty from now on. What His Majesty says must be right, but this empty ind looks different from what you imagined, and I''m already a little excited inside!"


    Junhe said with some excitement indeed.


    Everyone else also had a look of shock on their faces. No one could have imagined that there was actually an ind above the sky.


    The appearance of this sky ind only subverted their knowledge. Changnuo had already known about this thing for a long time, but looking at thisnd suspended in the sky, he felt that it was too strange.


    "Everyone, please be careful. The energy of the bamboo dragonfly is about to be exhausted. You can stand on those white clouds in front. Get closer first and count the number of people!"


    Chang Nuo shouted to everyone.


    This is also the most important thing. The number of people must be kept intact. After all, everyone was too panicked just now, and there was no way to count the number of people in mid-air. Who knows if someone will be left behind?


    In today''s pirate world, even staying on an empty ind almost always requires a ship to navigate. If you only rely on your legs to move, many ces are still difficult to get to.


    Fortunately, the strength of these people was quite good. They kept finding jumping points that they could use their strength to gain strength, and soon they arrived at the iconic gate of Sky Ind.


    There was no one who paid the fee in Chang Nuo''s impression, and no guards could be seen here. It was just a gate cut out of white clouds.

 Chapter 118 Ganfu

    <h4>Chapter 118 Ganfu</h4>


    The current sky ind looks sparse and ordinary, without any noble look. Even at the gate, there is not even a guard. It seems that because no one has been here for a long time, their vignce has been rxed to the extreme. .


    A group of people walked in swaggeringly, but the only thing that existed in their impression was still here, and that was a huge lobster staying here!


    "Your Majesty, what a big lobster! Can this thing be eaten?"


    One soldier shouted excitedly.


    The main reason is that this lobster is so big, at least as high as two or three stories, and its body length is hundreds of meters. It is aplete giant. If this thing eats meat, this group of people can probably Been eating for two or three days.


    Facing such a big guy, others were quite surprised, but this express shrimp obviously seemed to be able to understand human speech.


    After the guard yelled, Express Shrimp seemed to have seen a demon. He didn''t even look towards them and disappeared in front of everyone.


    "This thing runs pretty fast!"


    Junhe looked at the disappearing shrimp and suddenly said with emotion.


    Everyone who wants to eat him probably thinks so, and Chang Nuo is no exception.


    Thinking about such a big guy is a delicacy!


    But the express was scared away. Now if they want to reach the real ce of Sky Ind, they probably can only go there on foot. Fortunately, all the white clouds here are solid. Stepping on them is almost the same as stepping onnd, just soft. But it still feels pretty good.


    "You guys! We don''t know how much time we can save by sitting on this guy''s back!"


    Chang Nuo said speechlessly for a while.


    "The key is that it''s a pity that that thing has escaped now!"


    Junhe both started to speak withughter.


    What hemented was not that people like him didn''t get on the express shrimp, but that they didn''t catch him and let everyone have a feast.


    "Everyone, please be carefulter. Kongdao still has their strength. Don''t be careless and get knocked down. It would be bad."


    Chang Nuo began to shout in warning.


    Although I don��t know what the situation is like on the Sky Ind now, the people on the Sky Ind do have some strength. The most important thing is that they can fly!


    Everyone nodded understandingly. No ce should be underestimated, especially a ce like this that has never had many records. Two powerful people might suddenly appear.


    When they walked into the gate, all the scenes here were reflected in front of them. The white clouds seemed to be a spiral road leading directly to the top, and in the middle was the water connecting to the White Sea.


    Although the sea water here is different from the one below, the abilities they exude are almost the same.


    In this team, not only Changnuo and Shunhe are Devil Fruit users, there are also several among these guards who are also Devil Fruit users. Once someone falls into the sea, ording to the rapid river here, It''s almost cool.


    The entire river spirals upward for a distance of two to three thousand meters, giving everyone the impression that there is still a lot of distance to go.


    This is just the first step to the sky ind. The real sky ind is still far above them.


    Immediately afterwards, they walked all the way on the white clouds. Nothing special or unexpected happened. Everyone was full of expectations and curiosity about this ce. They chatted with each other without feeling bored at all.


    "Abona is responsible for observing the surroundings, Junhe is responsible for being on guard, and the others are moving forward quickly!"


    Changnuo began to shout orders.


    He didn''t want the people who came this time to encounter any unexpected situations. Even though they might be much stronger than Kong Dao, no one could guarantee whether any unexpected situations would happen.


    Abona and Junhe nodded immediately and started doing what they should do at the same time. At least within the scope of this empty ind, the precautions needed in the early stage must be there.


    As we walked up the road, we were able to walk more than half of the way and it was quite peaceful, and nothing special happened.


    But good luck can''t always be maintained. Just as they continued to walk up, Abona suddenly raised his fist directly and made a stop. Junhe could no longer wait for the other party. After talking too much, he started shouting "Everyone on alert!"


    Not long after, a man riding a flying white horse and wearing a suit of armor appeared in front of everyone. Of course, he came alone.


    Even so, facing this man who suddenly arrived, everyone was on guard and ready to attack.


    "Who are you? Why did youe to my Sky Ind territory?"


    Ganfuor shouted directly to the Changnuo group, and the spear-like thing in his hand seemed to be preparing to attack.


    Appearing on such a mount, Chang Nuo recognized him in just a moment.


    It''s just that at this time, Ganfu''s beard had not turned gray yet and his hair was all ck. He looked to be about 50 years old. The aura he exuded looked very impressive, but his strength was far inferior to everyone present. For example, it is impossible to defeat even a guard.


    Facing the other party''s inquiry, Chang Nuo silently took two steps forward and said with a smile on his face, "I''m just here to look for something. I don''t want to have any dispute with Kongdao!"


    "People from Qinghai, what are you looking for in Kongdao? Treasures?"


    Ganfuer asked coldly again.


    "We are not interested in many things about Kongdao. You can maintain your original life, or we can use force to directly suppress the entire Kongdao."


    Junhe immediately acted on guard and looked at Ganfuer with a serious voice.


    "Junhe..."


    Chang Nuo called him, signaling him not to continue talking.


    Changnuo didn''t want to do anything to Kongdao. He just wanted to use this area, or directly incorporate Kongdao into his country''s territory.


    Changnuo looked at Ganfur with a smile and said again, "I am Genji Changnuo, the king of the Kingdom of Toru in the West Sea. Is it possible that I can''t even be a guest on Sky Ind now?"


    "Didn''t you expect to be the king of a country?"


    Ganfu was talking to himself, but he understood the meaning of Junhe''s words just now. The other party''s purpose was probably not as simple as imagined.


    Until now, his eyes were on guard. If he saw something was wrong, he could attack at any time.

 Chapter 119 Young Enelu

    <h4>Chapter 119 Young Enelu</h4>


    But at this moment, Chang Nuo slightly released his overlord lust, without thinking of using it to directly suppress Gan Fuer.


    But just like that, the flying white horse he was riding fell directly onto the white clouds in an instant, and even Ganfu fell down without being able to stand firm.


    At this moment, he finally realized the terror of the group of people in front of him, and his inner guard and panic became more prominent.


    "What exactly do you want to do?"


    Gan Fuor still sat up unwillingly, looked at Chang Nuo and asked.


    But at this time, he didn''t have the thought tomunicate with Ganfuer anymore. He waved his hand directly, and the two guards behind him immediately stepped forward, dragged the other person up and started walking forward.


    "Your Majesty, who is this old man?"


    Junhe asked curiously.


    "You and I both came here together. You don''t even know how I know?"


    Changnuo said speechlessly, but after turning his head and taking a look, he continued, "This guy is Ganfu, the god of Sky Ind!"


    "Don''t you know him? What''s wrong with him?"


    Junhe walked directly behind and muttered something.


    Ganfu still didn''t understand what happened. The strength of these people was indeed beyond imagination, but why they came to the empty ind and why they drove him directly towards the empty ind. He still didn''t know all this. , but the only thing that can be done now is to follow them and continue walking forward to see what they are thinking.


    After officially arriving at the empty ind, the scene in front of them was refreshing for everyone.


    There are many various buildings on the empty ind in front of you, but most of them are still made of white clouds, but this unified color and shape does look very beautiful and elegant.


    Moreover, all kinds of strange traffic on the empty ind also attracted their great interest, but none of them left directly to investigate, but still stayed here to watch.


    The image of a group of people in Changnuo is easy to distinguish. Almost everyone can tell at a nce that they are definitely not from the empty ind. Therefore, after they first entered, many people''s eyes were attracted by this group of people. Come over.


    Not to mention that they were dragging the current Sky Ind God Ganfuor behind them, which surprised everyone even more, but no one stepped forward to say anything at this time.


    "Let you steal things, let you steal things! I''ll beat you to death next time I see you, a foreign waste, something like the Sangmen Star."


    "Guoguo, what''s the point of talking to someone like this trash? I think hitting him will dirty our hands!"


    A group of people from Changnuo just walked onto this road that should be regarded as a street. They were met by four or five children. They were bullying a big boy who looked about thirteen or fourteen years old. They were sitting and cursing. .


    But the beaten boy lying on the ground never said a word from beginning to end.


    Just standing here and looking at it for a few times, the fourteen or fifteen-year-old boys who were beating people just stared at Chang Nuo and shouted, "What are you looking at? You are outsiders again. You are really nothing." , I don��t know what you are doing on our empty ind?��


    Several children left directly after scolding, leaving only the one lying on the ground. He slowly sat up and wiped the blood from the corner of his mouth. He didn''t say a word from beginning to end, as if he was mute.


    Chang Nuo walked over and slowly squatted down to look at this dirty big boy. His clothes were all in tatters and he didn''t even have a pair of shoes that fit his feet. He was aplete beggar on an empty ind.


    "Junhe, bring some food over here!"


    Changnuo shouted leisurely to Junhe who was standing behind him.


    Without any hesitation, Junhe directly asked for some food from the guard and handed it to Changnuo who was squatting on the ground.


    The big boy who sat up was wiping the blood that spilled from the corner of his mouth, but his eyes were also curiously staring at Chang Nuo, who was squatting on the ground and looked a few years older than him.


    "This is something unique to Qinghai. You can try it and see if you like it!"


    Changnuo took the piece of bread handed over by Junhe, then ced it in front of the boy sitting on the ground and said.


    "Don''t pay attention to me. They all say that I am a Sangmen star and will bring bad luck to those whoe in contact with me!"


    The injured boy sitting on the ground refused directly in a calm tone.


    "May I have your name?"


    Chang Nuo asked again without giving up.


    "Enilu!"


    After the big boy finished speaking, he stood up and prepared to leave without taking anything from Chang Nuo''s hand.


    But the moment he said his name, Chang Nuo was stunned for a while. He never thought that the legendary Enel was actually so old now and looked several years younger than himself. Got it!


    Before I came to the sky ind, I was still thinking about whether the natural fruit on the sky ind would stay here, but at least it seems now that this thing has not been eaten by Enel. .


    When he thought of this, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and stared at Enelu who had left.


    "Let''s go, let''s find a ce to rest first, and we''ll discuss the detailster!"


    Chang Nuo stood up, still looking at the direction in which Enilu left, with a slight smile on his lips and said to Jun He next to him.


    "Your Majesty, how should we find a ce to rest in this ce?"


    Junhe asked curiously. The key was that no one on the ind seemed to wee them.


    "Isn''t there that guy at the back? If I remember correctly, there should be a shrine on Sky Ind. The area is quiterge. Let''s go there first today and observe the terrain of the entire Kong Ind." Chang Nuo He said leisurely, then turned to face the other direction and said, "Abona, you are responsible for sensing where the ce is with your sense of sight, and then leading them to rest there!"


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    Abona held the knife of Dawn in his arms, nodded and said.


    Ganfu still didn''t understand the purpose of these guysing here. They didn''t show any strong desire. The key was that they seemed to be quite familiar with the terrain of this empty ind, which made him feel very familiar. Surprised and puzzled.


    How could Chang Nuo exin these things to him? After speaking, he walked straight in the direction where Anilu left.


    Sky Ind is still very bright now, and the sun is still hanging overhead. It is estimated that it will take at least several hours before it gets dark. Chang Nuo is like this, walking alone on the street to observe the specific conditions on both sides.

 Chapter 120 Enel’s Ability

    <h4>Chapter 120 Enel��s Ability</h4>


    The mary unit currently used on Sky Ind is the same as that used on the sea below, and Bailey is widely used as currency settlement.


    As for the currency in theter period, it should be a currency that was re-established after Enel became a god.


    Walking on this long street, the rate of turning heads was very high. Everyone stared curiously at this man from Qinghai, but at the same time, they were also very hospitable and did not discriminate against foreigners. Appear.


    Even when you walk into a store, the store boards will warmly wee you and even introduce your own products thoughtfully.


    Although the sky inds will not wee outsiders for many years, asionally one or two will appear, and sometimes there may be many. After all, there is more than one sky ind, and the sky inds in the entire sky are connected together, adding up to less It is said that there are twenty or thirty empty inds.


    But most of the sky inds are dominated by ind clouds and have nond at all. Only in this ce will there be a holynd with soil as the main area.


    Chang Nuo wandered around this ce alone, trying to understand the overall structure of Sky Ind first. When it was almost dark, he finally spotted the figure of the big boy Anilu.


    Now this guy is lying alone on the white clouds. Fortunately, the weather in Kongdao is still rtively good. It is like spring all year round, and there is no too cold or hot weather. Moreover, the softness and heat preservation of the white clouds make him If you sleep on it, even if it gets colder at night, it won''t cause much harm.


    The area where Elnilu is located is already very close to the periphery of the entire sky ind area, and even closer to the holynds with mud forests.


    When he saw Enilu''s figure, Changnuo turned around and walked into a restaurant. After ordering two meals, he walked out directly.


    When he came to Enelu''s side, the little guy seemed a little wary, but after all, after having a good impression of the first meeting, Enelu didn''t have much resistance to Changnuo.


    "Little guy, why are you here? Judging from the look of you, you probably haven''t eaten yet. I happened to buy an extra portion. Let''s eat some together!"


    Changnuo also sat directly on Baibaiyun, then took out the meal he had bought in advance and handed it to Enilu who was lying there.


    Seeing Enero at this period, Changnuo finally understood why he chose to use that method to give back to everyone on this empty ind in theter period.


    When a child who is not taken seriously and is often bullied grows up and bes powerful, his inner desire for revenge has been infinitely amplified.


    After Changnuo handed a portion of the meal to Enelu, he picked up his own portion, sat next to him and started eating without saying a word.


    Seeing this image, Enelu didn''t say anything else, and he didn''t even refuse Chang Nuo''s kindness this time.


    The two people are sitting here. In terms of appearance, they look like two people of different sses, but they can stay here quietly and have dinner together.


    After a while, Enilu finally wiped his mouth with some satisfaction, turned to look at Changnuo, who was still eating elegantly, and said without any warning, "Thank you for the dinner. This is the best meal I have received in all these years." , the best meal I��ve ever had!��


    "You''re wee. Since we can meet, it''s fate. My name is Genji Changnuo. You can also call me Brother Changnuo, or call me Your Majesty like everyone else!


    I am the king of a country in Qinghai below. I am 17 years old. I should be older than you! "


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "My name is Enelu, I am 14 years old!"


    In a simple sentence, the two of them got to know each other. Although Enel had already said his name before, he just said it casually at that time. This time it was considered a formal introduction to himself, but he still felt quite good. OK


    But then Enelu said, "Don''t get so close to me in the future. The people who are closer to me are all dead. They all say that I am a disaster. No one is willing to y with me or even apany me." There aren��t many people chatting!��


    Enelu said with some frustration.


    "Why should you care about other people''s opinions about some things? Do what you want to do. This is the most perfect life. We still have a long way to go, so we don''t have to think like this!"


    Changnuo didn''t mind what Enelu said. Instead, he still smiled and saidfortingly like a brother.


    For Enilu, who has never had any friends, the feeling Chang Nuo gave him at this moment was indeed very warm and made him happier.


    "Can you tell me what Qinghai looks like?"


    Enelu asked suddenly.


    "sure!"


    Changnuo said with a smile, then hey directly on the white clouds, put his hands behind his head, looked at the stars in the sky, and then said leisurely, "Qinghai! It''s a big, big area. The sea area ispletely endless. In addition, there are many things in Qinghai that are not found on the empty inds. The area is also many timesrger than the empty inds. There are many strong people and many interesting people. Likewise, There are also many partners, each of whom has a distinct personality.


    I live in Qinghai, but sometimes I envy the leisure andfort of your ind life. Of course, this may not be possible for you. There is always something to pursue in life. "


    Chang Nuo said, then turned sideways and looked at Enilu there, and asked casually, "Enelu, what is your dream?"


    "I want to go to the moon. It is a dreamy ce. I have heard people say it before, so I have been holding on to this dream. When I was young, I wanted to create something that could go to the moon, but that Sometimes, I just left for a while, but I was identally knocked over by someone else, which ultimately caused serious consequences.


    At that time, all the people in the vige disappeared overnight. It was probably caused by that thing. As a result, this is the reason why no one on this empty ind wants to see me. They all think that I am a leader. An unlucky sign! "


    Enelu said sadly.


    "Things of the past have passed. There is no need to think about those things anymore. It is always good to have ideals!"


    Chang Nuo once againforted the other party and said.


    But through this chat, Chang Nuo at least knew one thing, that is, when Enel was a child, he caused everyone on the entire Bikakong Ind to disappear. The fundamental reason was exactly what he thought. Same thing, that''s Enel, a creative genius from birth.


    After all, in theter period, this guy was able to create a flying golden ship by himself, which was enough to prove the extent of the other party''s creative ability.

 Chapter 121 Control of Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 121 Control of Sky Ind</h4>


    The two of them justy on the white clouds and chatted. Even though it was getting dark, it didn''t matter to them now.


    Unknowingly, the two of themy directly on the soft white clouds and fell asleep happily.


    In Chang Nuo''s view, Anilu''s life is a bit pitiful. At only nine years old, he has created an existence that can destroy an ind. After he was nine years old, he wandered here. Until now, he has not made any friends in the past four or five years. When ites to any close friend, everyone has regarded him as a scourge and looked on with cold eyes. This led to the distortion of the mind of this young child in the end.


    Sometimes I have to admit that Enel''s ability is simply beyond everyone''s imagination.


    The original plot did not introduce the situation about Enel at all. It only told that when he was young, he had killed everyone on the ind. But now that the other party said these words, Enel is indeed He has an extraordinary presence.


    This time when he approached Enero, Chang Nuo got a preliminary understanding of him. He was not as bad as he had imagined, and was even many times better than expected.


    If this guy were in the hands of the World Government, he would most likely be as good as their greatest scientist.


    But now that he has been discovered by himself, he should naturally use this rtionship to cultivate him into the kind of talent that is most beneficial to his country.


    This is the first day on Sky Ind, and it has already achieved an unexpected happy ending, at least for Chang Nuo.


    Junhe here.


    Abona and two of them, with a team of guards, apanied Ganfur to what they called the Shrine. This ce waspletely built on a piece of earth continent. The size was not particrlyrge, but the so-called There are many priests.


    Ganfu was not restrained, but at the same time he did not dare to resist. He still did not understand what the purpose of these peopleing to the empty ind was? Along the way, I could only carefully observe every move of these people.


    At first, Ganfuor thought they were just looking for treasures, but after following these people to the pce where they lived, everythingpletely changed his mind.


    These people have no nostalgia for treasures, but they keep looking at the surrounding environment along the way, and even n the specific situation while walking.


    Although it was somewhat surprising, Ganfuer didn''t say anything else from beginning to end.


    After entering the shrine, there were about forty or fifty people in the entire shrine. Everyone was wearing white robes, with two small wings on the back of the clothes as decoration like those on Kongdao.


    "Abona, sense the situation around you!"


    Junhe said to Abona.


    After entering the pce, Abona immediately turned on his perception state, while other guards stood guard beside him.


    Theirbat rules are based on the team, and the training rules are also based on the team, so every time when others are exploring, the remaining people need to be in a state of preparation to prevent sudden and unexpected events. Unexpected situations happen, especially in such a rtively unfamiliar environment.


    Upon hearing this, Abona looked domineering and immediately spread within a radius of two kilometers. After confirming that there was no danger, when he withdrew his senses, he said to Junhe next to him, "It''s still rtively safe here, so just stay here." There are dozens of people in this ce!��


    Junhe nodded after hearing this, and then began to observe the appearance of the priests.


    In fact, the people on the other side are also very curious, why did Ganfu bring this group of strange people here?


    "Everyone, I havee to thend of the shrine in ordance with your request. Although I don''t know what your purpose is ining to Sky Ind, please don''t hurt anyone on Sky Ind!"


    Ganfu looked at the group of people and said tactfully.


    Although he is the most powerful being on Sky Ind, after all, he is still not enough in front of these people.


    Even if you really put it all together, the final oue may only arouse the anger of others.


    "I heard His Majesty said your name is Ganfuer, right? The purpose of ouring here is very simple. At least we don''t have to worry about harming anyone on the empty ind!"


    Junhe stepped forward and said calmly.


    "Thank you very much, but I also want to know what is the purpose of youring to Sky Ind?" Ganfuer asked again.


    "Take over the management of Sky Ind!"


    Abona didn''t have such a good temper and just spoiled the other party. He took two steps forward and said in a cold voice.


    "So that''s how it is!"


    Ganfu was not too surprised. He had seen the world. When these people appeared on the ind, he could already feel it from their names, and from Chang Nuo''s self-introduction, he could already feel it. Can learn some information.


    As the king of a country, he will definitely note to the empty ind to travel to the sky for no reason. He definitely has his own purpose.


    But during the process of following him, he saw Changnuo asking his subordinates for food to give to Enelu, and Ganfu felt that the man should be pretty good.


    "Since you already know our purpose, I hope you can stay here well today. After tomorrow, our Majesty should have a good discussion with you. Regarding the future situation, wee to this ce not to hurt anyone. But Sky Ind is very important to us, and we hope you can cooperate!"


    Seeing that Abona had revealed the purpose of these people, Junhe could only helplessly start to speak.


    Beforeing here, Chang Nuo had already told them to avoid conflicts in the Kongdao area and try to avoid them. After all, they would be regarded as belonging to the same country from now on.


    It is now imperative for them to take over Sky Ind, and they also have too much confidence in being able topletely rule it.


    Not to mention the entire Tru Kingdom army, with their current people, it is no longer a problem to rule this small sky ind, which is not particrlyrge.


    Junhe has always maintained a gentle and elegant image, trying his best to make himself feel to the other party without any predatory intentions.


    But if the other party really doesn''t cooperate, he will use all the means he has at his disposal without hesitation.


    After all, in this era where pirates are rampant, any kindness is full of irresponsibility to one''s own people.

 Chapter 122 Fruit from the Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 122 Fruit from the Sky Ind</h4>


    The priests in the original shrine looked at each other in confusion, not knowing at all what kind of situation they were in now.


    But from the conversation between the two parties, we can understand a lot of things.


    They were not fools. In just a moment, they had fully understood that these people were here topete for control of the sky ind.


    "My lord, who are they?"


    Finally, a priest couldn''t hold back and started to ask Ganfuor loudly.


    "From now on, everyone will obey their orders. No one is allowed to resist or make any unnecessary resistance. I will personally exin the specific matters to everyone tomorrow."


    Ganfu said calmly.


    His current thoughts do not contain anyplicated emotions, but he just wants to at least stabilize these people before meeting Chang Nuo, so as to avoid any conflicts.


    Ganfuer knew very well about the strength of the people on Sky Ind, and he did not want any ident to happen to any of his priests.


    "From now on, everyone will take a break in shift three. All matters will be discussed in detail after His Majestyes over tomorrow."


    Junhe immediately started shouting orders to his people, not paying attention to the priests in the shrine at all. They could just leave the matters belonging to Kongdao to themselves. Junhe believed that Ganfu would be able to handle it properly, and then Conflict issues may arise.


    The fact is exactly what he said. Ganfu brought all the priests together. Although they didn''t know what they were talking about, everyone could imagine what kind of result he would tell them.


    The people on both sides were in peace, and they waited until dawn the next day.


    Just after dawn.


    Changnuo, who was sleeping on the white clouds, felt such afortable environment. This was the first time in his life that he had lied in such an open-air environment, but lying down and resting in this ce was much better than on a boat.


    After waking up, Chang Nuo sat up and stretched directly, but when he turned his head and looked over, Enilu had already disappeared.


    Chang Nuo didn''t have much doubts. Just when he was about to stand up and go to find Jun and the others, Anilu came out from nowhere, holding a lot of wild fruits in his hand.


    "Brother Changnuo, are you awake?"


    Enel said with a smile on her face.


    It seems that afterst night''s chat, Enilu seems to have opened his heart to Chang Nuo at this moment, and his whole person at least looks a lot brighter.


    But he was still wearing the tattered clothes, and he didn''t even wear a shirt at all. He appeared here shirtless and wearing a pair of tattered trousers and bare feet.


    The tattered clothes that were originally worn on the top were now used to wrap the fruits picked from who knows where.


    "Where have you been?"


    Chang Nuo asked curiously.


    "Let''s eat something first, brother. I just ran to the Holy Land. There are many strange things there, and there is also this kind of delicious fruit. Give it a try."


    Looking at Enilu''s appearance, Chang Nuo couldn''t help butugh.


    But he did not refuse the other party''s kindness. Although the clothes wrapping the fruits looked tattered and a little dirty, the fruits inside had obviously been washed with water.


    Changnuo simply sat down on Baibaiyun again, picked up something like a green apple and started to bite it.


    It is estimated that few people eat fruit on the empty ind, so even if they bite into something that is more sour than sweet, it can make them feel fresh and delicious.


    "You couldn''t be more likely to have grown up eating this stuff these past few years, right?"


    Looking at Enilu''s rtively thin figure, Chang Nuo raised his head and asked directly.


    "Fortunately, not entirely. I just eat this asionally. There isn''t much to eat on this ind. Most of the time I go to the sea to catch fish."


    Enel said without any concern.


    "It doesn''t matter. Now that you have recognized me as your eldest brother, I will definitely let you eat and drink well from now on!"


    Chang Nuo directly rubbed the other party''s messy-looking hair, smiled and said kindly.


    It''s just that these green apples are really hard for Chang Nuo to swallow. Even the sour taste in his mouth as soon as he bites them is already a bit difficult for him to ept.


    In today''s huge empty ind, Enelu is indeed the child with the worst life.


    "Brother, why don''t you eat?"


    Enilu watched Chang Nuo pick up a green apple, but he just put it to his mouth and took a bite, leaving the rest untouched.


    But the food he ate already looked very delicious, so he had some doubts as to whether what he was looking for was not in line with the other person��s appetite. It was rare for an elder brother who could talk to him to appear and bring some joy to his boring and sad life. A glimmer of light, Enelu was very worried about something like this happening, so he asked with a sudden expression.


    "Don''t think too much. I''m just not hungry. Eat quickly. I''ll take you to a ce after eating!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    At this moment, Enelu does seem to be physically stronger, which may be rted to the fact that he has been living alone, but more importantly, he is still rtively thin, and he doesn''t even look like he has any flesh on his body.


    But in terms of appearance, Enelu''s image now is quite different from that of a few yearster, especially the long earlobes, even without the gold earrings, they still hang above the shoulders.


    As soon as he heard that Chang Nuo told him to finish his meal quickly and was willing to take him to other ces, Anilu immediately started to devour the apple. He didn''t even spit out the core of the apple. He just started eating the apple in one bite. .


    In less than a while, there were only two or three apples left in the original pile. He raised his head and nced at Chang Nuo, smiled sheepishly, and then picked up all the remaining three apples. He took it in his hand and handed it to Chang Nuo.


    It was probably because there were too many apples stuffed in his mouth. After whining for a long time, Chang Nuo didn''t hear clearly what the other party said.


    The key is that Chang Nuo still knows the meaning of his move quite clearly.


    "You can just eat these things by yourself. Don''t pay too much attention to me. Now that you''ve eaten everything, let''s go!"


    Chang Nuo stood up with a smile, still holding the half-drawn apple in his hand.


    There is nond and no nts in this empty ind. There are only some trees in the so-called holynd, and now they have be holy ces in the empty ind. Ordinary people cannot set foot in it at all. For them, To say that I can taste the taste of fruit in this life is already a fantasy.

 Chapter 123 Sky Island Shrine

    <h4>Chapter 123 Sky Ind Shrine</h4>


    Enelu stood up quickly as he spoke, without wasting any time. As for his worn-out coat, he continued to wear it after taking the remaining fruits into his hands.


    Chang Nuo looked at him like this, smiled slightly, and ignored it.


    "Where are we going? I am very familiar with Sky Ind!"


    Enelu hurriedly began to introduce.


    "There seems to be a ce called the Shrine here. I wonder if you know it?"


    Chang Nuo turned his head and asked with a smile.


    "That''s the ce you''re talking about! Of course I know. I''ve been there several times, but the people there often don''t let me go there. But a few times I''ve sneaked into that ce. It''s thergest on the entire Sky Ind. A ce like this!��


    Enelu said in introduction.


    "I didn''t expect you to be really familiar with this ce, so let''s go, I''ll take you there this time!"


    Chang Nuo said, and then started walking directly in front.


    It is still quite far away from the shrine. Although the sky ind is not particrly big, it will take at least about an hour to get there on foot.


    It is a ce like this that can amodate Chang Nuo''s previous overall arrangement.


    "Brother, why do we go to the Shrine? No one there is a good person, at least I think that''s the case!"


    Listening to Enilu talking to himself, Chang Nuo felt that this little guy could be considered a chatterbox, but when he thought about it, it was true. For a person with such an active mind, it was normal for him to be a chatterbox.


    Facing a life alone, suffering the cold eyes of everyone, and still being able to stick to the status quo, even if he bes the god of this empty ind in the future, he still does not choose to kill anyone. In terms of character, Enelu can be regarded as A very good kind of person.


    Now he just needs a correct guidance, without a sense of right and wrong, andcks mutual help among friends. There is still a long road ahead for him.


    "Enilu, have you ever thought about bing a strong person?"


    While walking on the road, Chang Nuo turned his head and looked at Enelu, who was following behind him, always thinking about it.


    "Strong?"


    Enelu directly touched his chin with his dirty little hands, as if he was thinking deeply, and then said nkly, "What''s the use of bing a strong man?"


    "After bing a strong person, you can protect the people you want to protect and do many things you want to do. At least when you are helpless in the end, your strength will also be able to protect the things you want to protect."


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    "Then I have decided that I will be a strong man in the future. I will definitely find a way to help you, brother!"


    Enelu said with some assurance.


    While they were talking, they had already reached the edge of the lush woods. As they walked forward, the rest was allnd.


    This is the holynd among the people of Kongdao, an ind that came up from 10,000 meters below. Compared with the white clouds of Kongdao, this ce is almost out of ce, but because of this, this ce, whether it is woods or other , has be a forbidden area in everyone''s mind.


    After all, the presence of something like dirt at such a high ce is indeed enough for generations of Sky Ind people to protect it.


    Standing on the edge of these woods, it is really refreshing to see such huge trees growing in this ce.


    "Brother Changnuo, follow me this way. I know a more convenient and faster way. There are too many traps in this ce now, all set by the Sandians. If you are not careful, you may be trapped. We''re going to die in the woods!"


    Enelu said quickly, and then ran directly in front, starting to guide the way for Changnuo who was standing there motionless.


    "Enilu, don''t go so fast, I''ll take you thereter!"


    Chang Nuo nced around, just feeling curious about this ce for no reason. Then he looked at Enelu jumping up and down and shouted directly to him.


    The other party was still standing on the root of a huge tree. He was surprised when he heard Chang Nuo calling him. While he was dazed, Chang Nuo had already arrived in front of him in an instant, and then grabbed his shoulders, and the two of them directly Disappeared in ce.


    But the moment they disappeared, two people rushed out from where they were originally.


    These two people were bare-chested, had dark skin, and looked very strong. Their hair was tied into a small braid, and they were wrapped in something simr to animal skins. If it weren''t for the things on their feet, they would have walked out. If you do, you will most likely be considered a savage by others.


    The two guys were wearing something unknown on their feet. It looked a bit like skates, but it could keep the two people suspended in the air, and there was the sound of wind blowing toward the ground from below.


    "Wei Bai, didn''t you say you just found two people here, and why are they suddenly missing now?"


    The man wrapped in an animal skin apron, holding something simr to a mace in his hand, looked at another man with dark skin and a spear in his hand and asked.


    "You ask me? How could I know that I could hear someone talking here just now, but they seemed to disappear in an instant!"


    The man named Weibo said.


    "It''s better to ignore this matter for now. If we continue to stay here, the group of priests will probablye againter. Shouldn''t we leave first?"


    "Brahham, can you be like this every time youe out? It''s just the priests. I feel like they won''t show up at all today. Yesterday, I sneakily ran to the shrine and took a look. A group of people havee from Qinghai, and they are all living in the shrine now, so they probably won��t be able to take care of us!��


    Weibo said with a serious expression.


    The specific purpose of these two men who came to this ce is not clear yet, but looking at their eyes, you can already tell that these two are definitely weaklings!


    But the things on their feet are indeed very good. They can put a person who is not an ability user in a flying state. This is probably a lot more for the bonus on attack.


    But now no one would pay attention to these two people at all. Changnuo and Enilu had arrived at the gate of the shrine in just a blink of an eye.


    The white clouds are still used for processing and transformation here, but it is obviously different, because after the white clouds are processed, the hardness seems to be quite high.

 Chapter 124 Gan Ful’s question

    <h4>Chapter 124 Gan Ful��s question</h4>


    The difference from before is that there are now two people from the Toru Kingdom standing guard outside the shrine, especially at the gate.


    The moment Chang Nuo appeared, they immediately bowed their bodies and shouted, "Your Majesty..."


    "Are everyone in there?"


    Changnuo asked.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    After listening to what one of the members of the King''s Guard said, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and was about to start striding towards the inside.


    However, Eniru, who came with him, was still staring at the boss at this moment. He had no idea what was going on. He was clearly staying on the periphery just now, so why was he suddenly at the gate of the shrine?


    But looking at the appearance of his brother Chang Nuo, he was surprised and he hurriedly followed him. The two people guarding the door did not stop him.


    As soon as we walked in, in the huge courtyard, the priests were still enjoying the sun leisurely, without any sense of restraint.


    This group of people just basked in the sun leisurely, without any sense of crisis or difort. They seemed to be staying in their original homes, one by one. The key is that there were so many people around to protect their safety.


    But as Chang Nuo walked into the courtyard, the Tru Kingdom personnel who were responsible for guarding this group of priests all respectfully shouted "Your Majesty..."


    It wasn''t until the voice came out that the priests, who were leisurely andfortable, finally had some reaction. They stood up one by one and looked at the teenage boy who came over, their eyes full of curiosity.


    Abona and Junhe who were in the house also walked out after hearing the noise, followed by Ganfuer.


    This time was considered a formal meeting. After watching the two people walk out, Chang Nuo asked directly, "Did anything happen?"


    "Your Majesty, nothing happened. Ganfuer is very cooperative with us, and he didn''t sleep all night yesterday in order to wait for you!"


    Junhe said standing at the front.


    Of course, Chang Nuo had noticed Gan Fuer walking behind the two of them. He looked haggard now, and it seemed that he had not rested all night.


    "Let''s talk after we go in!"


    Chang Nuo nced at the people around him. The priests who stood up had no expression on their faces and did not feel any sense of honor or disgrace because of the issue of control of Kongdao.


    The expressions of these people seemed as if that was how things should be, and it didn''t matter who was in power anyway.


    After reading it, Chang Nuo began to walk towards the main hall. As for Enelu who followed him, he was a little at a loss. He didn''t know whether he should go in or stay here, but he saw the appearance of the priest here. , Enilu still felt sour in his heart.


    There is no special shape in the main hall of the shrine. It ispletely white. Even the furniture, sofas and the like are made of white clouds. There is no sense of ws at all, but it does give people a very good feeling. It has a solemn look.


    This ce is not like the royal pces of the countries below. There is no ce to sit in the middle of the top. Instead, there is a huge statue, and she is dragging a purple devil fruit in her hand. This thing is everywhere. People had already discovered it when they first came in, but no one has touched it until now.


    As soon as Chang Nuo walked in, he stood there and stared at the statue in front of him. To be precise, he stared at the devil fruit in the hand of the statue.


    "Your Majesty, it seems you have noticed it too?" Abona stepped forward and said with a smile.


    "The Thunder Fruit is one of the natural devil fruits with the strongest attack power. Are you interested?" Changnuo looked at Abona and said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, don''t be ridiculous. I have no interest in this kind of thing."


    Abona quickly refused and said.


    "How could there be a Devil Fruit here? When I came here yesterday, I thought I had seen it wrong. But when I took a closer look, I realized that it was indeed true!"


    Junhe said with a wry smile.


    "Leave it for now, this thing will naturally have its use in the future!"


    Changnuo said calmly with a smile on his face.


    The natural thunder fruit, if developed well, can definitely be a super powerful being, and it may dominate the entire One Piece world.


    But for Chang Nuo, no matter how good this thing is, it has no effect on him at all. A person can only use one fruit in his life. No matter how good or powerful the thing is, it has no effect at all when ced in front of him. any effect.


    Regarding this, everyone is well aware of this.


    In the main hall of this shrine, there is such a good devil fruit, but no one on the entire ind has touched it. It cannot be said that they are ignorant, it can only be said that these people have too high a belief in the gods. .


    The so-called statue of a god in front of him is an image of an angel, a seraph. The key is that it is a woman, but it has to be said that the sculpture of Xu Xushui is indeed too lifelike.


    Chang Nuo ignored these things. He turned around and looked at other conditions in the hall. There was not much space in this ce. Forty or fifty people would be enough to fill it.


    There are only a dozen chairs ced on both sides of the main hall. These things are obviously made of Baibaiyun. Their pure white appearance blends in with the entire building. It is not clear how they made these things. In terms of hardness andfort, everything has been achieved.


    There were only four people standing here. Chang Nuo did not choose a chair to sit down. Instead, he turned around and looked at Ganfuer and asked, "I don''t know the purpose of our visit. Have they told you?"


    "I''ve said it, I''ve said it, but I don''t understand why you people from Qinghai want control of Kongdao?"


    Ganfu asked in confusion.


    This is also a question he has been thinking about all night. After all, the sky ind is 10,000 meters away from the Qinghai below. For ordinary people, no matter if they are careful or not, they will be shattered if they fall down from this height. Even if they are super strong, Even those who are extraordinary cannot escape this ending.


    It is very inconvenient for them to go up and down the empty ind. Why do they have to spend so much effort to get here and then fight for the control of the empty ind? Gan Fuer also wants to know urgently.


    It was precisely because he had some doubts that he asked directly. After all, this was likely to involve the happiness of living in Kongdao in the future.


    Although I know that my strength is not as good as theirs, but even if I want to abdicate, I still need to give myself a more reasonable exnation.

 Chapter 125 The Golden Land of Shantora

    <h4>Chapter 125 The Golden Land of Shantora</h4>


    Faced with Gan Fuer''s question, Chang Nuo didn''t want to say much, but since he wanted to control this ce, the next process arrangements must be done well.


    He looked at Ganfuer leisurely and said, "You can be the god of this empty ind in the future, and you can also form autonomous management, or in other words, our Kingdom of Tru will carry out a better optimization method.


    At least Kongdao can no longer worry about food resources or other resources in the future, and the Tru Kingdom can carry out talent transportation, resource education, and security.


    I understand that disputes have been constant in Kongdao for 400 years. For this reason, we can also mediate, so that the people of Kongdao can live without any worries. What do you think of such conditions? "


    Such conditions are already very good for Ganfu. He has been the god of Kongdao for decades, and the people of Kongdao are almost like his children. As for who will be in the future? Ganfuer didn''t have much obsession with managing this empty ind.


    But Changnuo mentioned resolving the 400-year-old dispute on the empty ind. This is what makes Ganfu more excited.


    From his birth to now, Sky Ind has not been as peaceful as imagined. From time to time, wars break out between Sandians and Sky Ind aborigines. This is already a scar left over from the history of Sky Ind, and between the two parties There was no consultation at all.


    As for the other things, they can all be considered as additional items. What Gan Fuor recognized more was Chang Nuo��s attitude at this moment. Although he didn��t understand the division of forces in Qinghai and the form of the country, since the other party was the king of a country, and he was surrounded by Being able to bring out so many powerful beings is enough to prove how powerful the opponent is below.


    "King Changnuo, I can agree to the conditions you mentioned, and they are indeed very desirable for our current Kongdao. But how can you prove that you can do these things? "


    Ganfur asked.


    Although he saw that Chang Nuo''s group was rtively powerful, he still had some doubts about these things.


    Although Kongdao is not big, the connected area plus Baibaiyun can be considered arge area. The Sandians have always been at odds with Kongdao. This has happened for hundreds of years. How could it be possible because of one person? Can the sudden appearance of this situation change the situation?


    Chang Nuo didn''t want to talk too much nonsense and said directly, "As for how to solve and deal with it, that is our business. The next thing you have to do is to start publicizing our situation to all the aboriginal people of Kong Ind, and to empty the ind." We will tell you about the actual control of the ind and the subsequent nning issues in detail in theing days, and we hope to provide us with better cooperation in the days toe."


    "I hope so!"


    Ganfuer was not depressed, and even said calmly that the other party''s attitude, words and deeds, and even his future ns were more in line with what Sky Ind needed now.


    Apart from this holynd, there is nond on the empty ind. They cannot grow food and rely more on the Baibai Sea to survive. If the other party is indeed capable of ensuring future life, then this empty ind Does it matter who has the final say on the ind?


    But Ganfu''s atmosphere really impressed Chang Nuo. Although Sky Ind is not a country now, and the poption living on it is not veryrge, but from another perspective, Ganfu here can be regarded as quite a person. For a king of a country to be able to hand over his country so casually and grandly requires considerable inner strength.


    "Now that the matter about the empty ind has been finalized, let''s arrange the specific work!


    Junhe, lead a team of people and give you three days to mark out all the topography and detailed locations of the entire Kongdao. In addition, there is and of Shantora in Kongdao. This ce is marked as a key point. He is in It was an ancient city more than 800 years ago, and all the buildings in it were made of gold.


    Explore the currentnd area of ??Sky Ind, the areas that can be developed, and the size of the inds formed by those ind clouds, and lead the lithification ability users to try to see if they can transform all these ind clouds into ones that can provide training. site. "


    Before Chang Nuo finished speaking, Jun He''s eyes started to shine. It was really hard for him to imagine what an ancient city made entirely of gold would look like. He couldn''t help but drool just thinking about it. The living thing flowed out.


    This thing was hard currency, but he had never thought of it before, nor was he curious about how his Majesty the King knew about it!


    But before he could finish his fantasy, Changnuo hit his head with his finger and said with a speechless expression, saying with some dissatisfaction, "Put your little thoughts aside for now. Your ideas will alle true in the future, but Now let��s do the things in front of us first, and can you just give me an answer?��


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. I will spend three days here toplete everything as soon as possible. I will never betray Your Majesty''s trust!"


    Junhe stood up straight and said seriously.


    Looking at the other party''s current state, Chang Nuo is rtively satisfied. Everything has just begun when hees here. Everything has not been scrutinized. If you are more rigorous in the early stage, there will always be no mistakes.


    And as a future military base, this ce must bepletely controlled by oneself to be considered safer.


    "Ganfu, as the original God of Sky Ind, all your positions will not change. If possible, I also hope that you can be an official of the Kingdom of Tru and assist everyone in managing the people on Sky Ind, and your subordinates Those priests can continue to perform their original duties. At that time, it will just be a matter of refining these things. What do you think?"


    Changnuo looked at Ganfu. There was no need to say more about the other person''s prestige on the sky ind. Although he was not very strong in terms of strength, he was really good at personnel management and interpersonalmunication.


    How could Ganfuer refuse these things? Originally, he had nned to raise such a question, but he didn''t know where to start. But now that the other party has said it, Ganfuer naturally didn''t refuse.


    With a smile on his face, he said, "Leave these things to me, don''t worry, as long as it is beneficial to the people of Kongdao, I, Ganfu, will definitely do it!"

 Chapter 126 Mission

    <h4>Chapter 126 Mission</h4>


    Seeing that Gan Fuor agreed, Chang Nuo alsoughed directly, mainly because everything went much smoother than expected.


    As long as Ganfuor can ept the entire sky ind, then for them to have the management rights of the sky ind, more than half of the sess will be achieved.


    "Since you have agreed now, then it will be equivalent to one of our own. As for the so-called job title, we don''t have to discuss too much next.


    But you still need to do the next thing. Your main thing is, first, to count the information about all the current aborigines on Kongdao. I need the specific number of people, the nature of their work, and their living conditions!


    Second, we should publicize the fact that the Kingdom of Toru has management rights and dominance over Sky Ind, so that the people will recognize our existence in their hearts.


    We need to give immediate feedback on how the people of Kongdao feel about the change of leaders, educate their minds, and talk about the benefits that our control and management can bring. "


    Chang Nuo said leisurely to Gan Fuer.


    This step is also the most important factor in ruling the Sky Ind. When fighting foreigners, you must first settle the domestic affairs. At least let these people believe in their country from the bottom of their hearts. Then it will be more convenient for subsequent management and other things.


    Ganfuer thought about it for a moment, and this kind of bloodless method directly changed his concept of ruling a ce.


    From the beginning to the end, all the people on the Sky Ind have never experienced any war or chaos. They still have their original way of life, and even have better future life scenarios, which can indeed make their already peaceful people unable to mention it at all. Any thought of resistance.


    For the people living on the empty ind, it doesn''t matter who rules the empty ind. As long as it has no impact on their lives and can even improve their quality of life, this is what they are more concerned about.


    And all this time, except for the chaos caused by the Sandians on the empty ind, the rest of the time is almost peaceful, and no special situations will ur.


    Regarding these two requirements, Ganfu believed that he waspletely able to fulfill them without any impact, so he readily epted them directly.


    Facing Ganfor''s nod, Changnuo looked at Abona in the next second.


    Abona''s strength waspared to the strongest one besides himself, so thest mission was considered a rtively difficult one.


    "Abona, I''ll give you half a month to find out where the Sandians are. Your knowledge and experience on Sky Ind can help youplete this task to the maximum extent possible.


    Try not to cause disputes at that time, but at the same time, we don''t want any special situations to arise. We can use force to deter if necessary.


    At that time, you can ask the chiefs of the Sandia people toe to see me and talk about their demands. Your main purpose in the past was to shock and convey, and you don''t need to do the rest.


    Another point is that there are huge creatures on the sky ind that are beyond our imagination. There is no need to kill them. Once they are found, they can be controlled together and then notify me. "


    Abona can easily understand these topics. Their stay here yesterday was not without merit. At least they had a brief understanding of Kongdao''s current personnel structure. The most important thing was to understand the division of forces.


    Junhe has been chatting with all the priests from the beginning, and has learned a lot about the situation from their mouths.


    And currently, neither the Sandians nor the aborigines of this empty ind are involved in this ind made of mud.


    Seeing that several people were silent, Chang Nuo said seriously again, "Everyone has half a month. I hope that after half a month, you can hand in an answer sheet that satisfies me!"


    "I will, Your Majesty."


    Junhe spoke first.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King, I will definitelyplete the task as soon as possible!"


    "Although I am older, I am confident that I am still capable ofpleting the tasks assigned by His Majesty the King!"


    Ganfu also opened his mouth and said directly.


    Things were resolved so perfectly. From the time they arrived at Kongdao, it took less than a day for them to perfectly resolve all possible disputes.


    The actual control of Kongdao has also beenpletely controlled, which is a happy thing for everyone.


    Although Ganfu didn''t sleepst night, he also learned what he wanted to know.


    I have some preliminary understanding of the Kingdom of Tru, especially about His Majesty the King in front of me!


    Now that the tasks have been assigned, everyone in each team has already begun to do what they should do in full swing.


    Junhe led this group of people and began to measure the area of ??the entire Sky Ind step by step, and recorded everything he saw. These willter be used asndmarks to map the airspace of the Sky Ind. area.


    In fact, these things already existed before Sky Ind, but the map involved in Sky Ind was not so detailed. Now that the ruling power has been changed, these things will naturally need to be changed.


    For the people of Sky Ind, Ganfuer''s reappearance directly announced an explosive news!


    In just one day, all the people on Kongdao have learned that the ruler of Kongdao has been reced by someone else, and Ganfuo has lived up to Chang Nuo''s expectations.


    When all the aborigines on Kong Ind first received the news, they were mostly shocked, but they did not take any substantive actions. Most of them were curious about their next lives after the change of rulership. Will there be any impact?


    Ganfu led all the priests and the police on the ind, and began to go door to door to collect statistics on everyone, and informed them about the situation of the new ruler of the ind. Most of the people did not have any resistance, and even faced this kind ofck of resistance. I don''t have the slightest feeling about changing the rule, and I''m even less interested in it.


    But when everyone learned about what Chang Nuo had promised, the look of anticipation on everyone''s faces was indeed particrly obvious.


    The total poption of Sky Ind is approximately 8,000, and these are only the aboriginal people. As for the Sandians, the data is still unknown for the time being.


    After the incident was notified, all the people on the empty ind only had a lively life for two days, and then returned to their normal lives, because they did not feel the slightest change in rulers. Life was still the same as before, and it was nothing more than the gods above. Has be someone else.

 Chapter 127 Sandia’s Lair

    <h4>Chapter 127 Sandia��s Lair</h4>


    Everything went smoothly without any obstacles. For Kongdao, even if the ruler was changed, they didn''t have any big feelings. Life was still the original life, and Kongdao was still as peaceful as ever.


    Junhe and his people began to observe the situation of the entire sky ind, especially starting from the soil under his feet.


    He brought a total of ten people, and the rest were taken away by Abona, because facing the Sandians, there was no need for so many people to apany them forward. Abona could deal with them as a group alone. It''s enough. There is no need for so many more people to help out.


    But observing the entire ind is not as easy as imagined.


    But at least for this group of people, they are still quite looking forward to it.


    "Captain Junhe, you said that His Majesty said that there is a ce here where arge amount of gold is stored. Even the buildings are made of gold. Is this true? "


    During the boring measurement, a young man from the King''s Guard approached Zi Junhe with a curious look on his face and asked with the same expectation.


    Others have already heard about this matter. Everyone''s mood is different, but one thing can be confirmed in general, that is, this group of people is quite excited.


    Junhe also had a smile on his face. Looking at everyone, he couldn''t help but start chattering and said, "Your Majesty will definitely not lie to us. It seems that it is a ce called Shantora... Shantora, where It is rumored that it was an ancient capital 800 years ago, and it was all made of gold. Not only the buildings, but also other things were like this, so the gold in this ce may make us, the Kingdom of Tru, make a huge fortune!"


    "Really or not, where is Shantara?" the guard asked.


    "You said this, how could I know? If we don''t have to visit the entire ind next time, won''t we be able to find this so-called Shantora ce by then?"


    Junhe said with a smile on his face.


    As soon as these words came out, everyone who was still in the boring measurement life seemed to have been given a shot of blood at this moment. They began to run forward tirelessly. They wanted to end the exploration of this area as soon as possible. Then move on to the next unknown ce.


    "Jun and Captain, let''s not waste time now. His Majesty has only given us three days. We must use these three days to explore the entire ind. All of us have already started to make preparations!"


    A guard stood up and shouted directly.


    There are 11 people in total, and it is enough time to explore this area for a while.


    Although they are not very good at using the color of sight, at least a few of them can use it to sense things, and there is still no problem at all within a hundred meters of the surrounding area.


    Everyone was working in full swing, and they didn''t even want to stop and rest when it got dark. They just wanted to explore the ce they wanted to find as soon as possible. The gold everywhere made this group of people stay there just thinking about it. They drooled, they really couldn''t imagine what that situation was like!


    Abona''s side ispletely different. His power of knowledge and color has even surpassed Chang Nuo''s. Although thetter didn''t put much thought into this aspect, it already exins everything.


    For this small sky ind, his knowledge can even directly cover all ces.


    Looking for the Sandianir is just a matter of thought.


    So he walked straight in the other direction with five or six people. There was no sign of being anxious on the way. After all, Chang Nuo only gave him half a month, and he had no intention of taking anything too seriously on this matter. impatient.


    "Lord Abona, if we encounter resistanceter, can we attack?"


    "That''s right. ording to what the priests said, the Sandians are very difficult to get along with, and they might pop out of nowhere and start attacking us. But His Majesty asked us to try not to have any disputes!"


    Several guards began to talk to each other, and Abona walked in front alone. It was not that he had not thought about these problems, but it was still a little early for them.


    The area where the Sandia people live is also on this piece of dirt, but through perception, he can check that the number of people in this group is not veryrge, and it is estimated that there are only about two hundred people at best.


    But in the face of the guards who followed him, Abona could only say leisurely, "Just follow. We went there to negotiate this time, not to make trouble. Besides, I am here. By then, everything will be fine." If you really meet those stubborn people, even if you kill them, His Majesty the King will probably not have any objections!"


    "That way I''ll feel relieved!"


    The guard said with a smile.


    As Abona walked, he sensed the surrounding situation with a sense of dominance. He did not show any arrogance. In such a strange ce, especially when he was in the main hall of the temple, he saw the seraphim holding a With his natural Devil Fruit, he naturally wouldn��t think that there wouldn��t be any strong ones on the empty ind!


    But Sky Ind is only such a big ce, and no matter how slowly they walk, they have reached the outskirts of the Sandian area in two hours.


    The life here can almost be described as miserable, and the houses we live in are almost the same as those produced hundreds of years ago.


    As soon as they appeared here, several people suddenly rushed out with weapons. They confronted the people brought by Abona.


    "People from Qinghai? What are you doing here?"


    Weibo, who was the strongest, stood in front of him with an unknown weapon and asked in a wary tone.


    "I need to see your n leader!"


    Abona said calmly.


    The entire peripheral space where the Sandians live is covered with huge trees and vines. It is really difficult to find their location without using the Haki of Knowledge and Information to sense their whereabouts.


    Originally, the priests and policemen on the empty ind only totaled about a hundred or so people. For a group of people who didn''t know how to be domineering, it was really difficult to find this ce with just a hundred or so people.


    It is not difficult to find such a secret ce, but no one would have thought that this ce could actually be inhabited, let alone such arge group of people.


    If the crowd is separated, even if they find their location, there will be no way to transmit the information.


    But this time the Sandians encountered apletely different existence.

 Chapter 128 Sandia Clan

    <h4>Chapter 128 Sandia n</h4>


    Abona appeared here, maintaining the same posture as before, with his hands surrounding Dawn, the supreme sharp knife. From the moment he got it, he never left his body. He would put it next to him even when he was taking a bath. .


    This image made Wei Bai and the Sandians who rushed out not sure how to view it.


    But they are not as easy to talk to as the people on Kongdao. They all look like savages. Especially when they heard that Abona was looking for their n leader, Weibo''s eyes immediately showed that he was ready to attack.


    But in Abona''s opinion, this little thought had no effect at all. He stood on the spot, slowly pulled out the long knife in his hand, and just shed towards the side where he was, and a sword light shot out instantly. Suddenly, within a hundred meters of sight, all the trees, no matter how big they were, fell down in an instant.


    The force of this scene can indeed have a great effect. As the leader of this group of people, Weibo has discovered the strength of the opponent in just a moment, and his group of people is not someone who can match it at all. .


    Not only Abona, but the guards who followed him were also eager to try. After all, His Majesty the King said that there should be no armed conflicts as much as possible, but he did not say not to show off!


    One of them directly concentrated his armed domineering energy on his hand, and then punched the one-meter-thick tree next to him. With one punch, the lower half of the tree exploded, and before the tree above fell down, At this moment, other people rushed up one by one, whether with their hands or feet. Anyway, the moment the big tree did not fall, it had already turned into dregs and fell to the ground.


    After seeing it, Wei Bai clenched his fists and the spear-like weapon in his hand was trembling. He had no idea that the people who came here were so powerful.


    "We are ordered by His Majesty the King toe to see your n leader!"


    Abona said calmly again.


    "I don''t know what you guys have to do, I''m willing to convey it on your behalf!"


    Weibo kept his expression firm and looked at the group of people in Abona and said.


    "Currently, the ruling power of the entire Sky Ind is in the hands of our King. He is willing to coordinate the peaceful coexistence between you and the people on Angel Ind, so let mee over to meet your n leader and discuss specific matters then!"


    Arbonne said.


    "Change of people?" Wei Bai and the other friends who came with him were a little surprised. When did Kongdao change its owner?


    But now that they see the strength of this group of people, they can''t help but believe that the Sandians can''t even parry, let alone the so-called priests on Sky Ind, all of whom only know how to eat to make them fat. , without any strength at all, how can we resist this group of people?


    "How can I trust you?"


    Weibo said again warily.


    "ording to our strength, do you need to believe it? Don''t be kidding me. If it weren''t for the order of His Majesty the King, facing you people, we would go straight through. I''m afraid that none of you Sandians would be alive. , is there any need to waste more words with you here?"


    Abona said coldly.


    Although the words didn''t sound very nice, what he told was also true. He didn''t want to cause any disputes when he came here this time, but he didn''t want the other party to know what was good and what was bad even now!


    The strength of people like myself has been demonstrated, and they have seen what they should see, but if they are still insisting on their ideas, it ispletely impossible.


    Hearing what Abona said, Weibo sighed suddenly, and then said to the friends who came with him, "Put down your guard and take them over!"


    "Wei Bai, we still don''t know who these people are. Is this really going to happen?"


    A young man who followed Wei Bai asked unconvinced.


    "Do you think you have the power to stop them?"


    Weibo looked over with a cold look, instantly leaving the other person speechless.


    It was so smooth that Abona and his party didn''t encounter any obstacles and went directly to the Sandian people''sir.


    This ce is almost consistent with what we imagined and guessed before. The site where this group of people lived should be the ruins of hundreds of years ago. Some houses have even tilted down, but there are still people living here. It is obvious that it has It is a ruins, but I didn��t expect that a group of people have lived here for hundreds of years.


    Fortunately, there is a small stream here that runs directly through the middle of the area where they live. For the Sandians, the mostcking thing here should be food and other resources. They have received this kind of thinking and education since they were young, and they have grown up happily. He looked like a savage.


    Abona followed Weibo as he walked inside. Everyone he met along the way, including children and women, looked at Abona and his group.


    Whether it''s in terms of clothing or appearance, the two of them arepletely ipatible with each other.


    "You have been living here all this time, why haven''t you ever thought about going out to live?"


    On the way, Abona looked at Weibo who was walking in front curiously and said.


    "Apayado is our homnd, that''s why we live here. As for the people on Angel Ind, they are a group of bandits who upied our homnd 400 years ago, which is why so many of us are huddled together. We are struggling to survive in this ce, so no matter which generation we belong to, we will focus on regaining our own territory!"


    Weibo walked in front and said fiercely.


    However, Abona behind him smiled and shook his head.


    Perhaps the ce Apayado did belong to the Sandians before, but it ispletely different now, and it will bepletely taken over by the Tru Kingdom in the future.


    "Brother Weibo..."


    "Wei Bai..."


    "He''s back!"


    ��


    As they got closer and closer to their base, they met more women and children. Weibo was obviously very popr here, and everyone kept saying hello.


    Abona can believe that if there is no n leader above, the entire Shandia people will probably obey Weibo''s orders.


    This is probably because of the issue of strength. ording to this backward ce, generally whoever is strong and can bring everyone a sense of security can naturally be the next n leader.


    Whether it was the woman or the group of children, everyone was curiously looking at the peopleing from Abona and his party. Each of them was quite curious, but they were not ignorant.

 Chapter 129 Communication and Coordination

    <h4>Chapter 129 Communication and Coordination</h4>


    Some people in Abona are still on alert, ready to respond to emergencies that may arise.


    Under the leadership of Wei Bai, they came to a house that looked rtively good. This house was covered with nts and looked green and beautiful, but the ground looked very green. Moisture.


    I don��t know how they can survive in a ce like this and continue to live here. I��m afraid no normal person would choose such a life!


    "Chief, we have a visitor!"


    Weibo stood at the door and shouted respectfully. It was only at this moment that Abona realized that this group of people did not refer to themselves as n leaders, but called the leader here as chief.


    He and the few people behind him stood here waiting quietly. Other Sandians quickly gathered around, but more of them were women and children. Maybe the other men should go out and look for them. Food went.


    This group of people are all curious about the purpose ofing here, especially the children. They are even more curious about what Abona looks like in these clothes. However, others are also starting to remind them. , something like Qinghai people.


    At the door, even Wei Bai was waiting respectfully. After a while, an old man who looked to be in his seventies slowly walked out of the dpidated house. From the looks of it, he must have lived in such a humid ce. For too long, the body doesn''t look so strong.


    "Chief..."


    The moment the old man walked out, everyone saluted and shouted to him respectfully.


    "Little Wilber! Did you call me out for something?"


    After the old chief came out, he saw the arrival of Abona and the others at the first sight, but he still turned his head and asked Weibo calmly.


    "Grandpa Chief, I''m not looking for you, it''s these Qinghai people who are looking for you!"


    Weibo also pointed his finger at Abona, but the people here remained unmoved and watched the two people chatting quietly.


    After confirming that it was indeed Abona and the others who came to look for him, the old chief took two steps towards their location with a somewhat shaky cane.


    His expression was not as good as expected, and it could even be said that he was treating her with a cold shoulder. When he was still five or six meters away from Abona, the old chief asked in a cold voice, "I wonder if you Qinghai people woulde to see me?" whats the matter?"


    "People from Qinghai? Don''t divide everything so clearly. Your ancestors are also from Qinghai. If you are so rude, I don''t know how you became the chief of this tribe?"


    Abona said with the same sneer.


    "You are looking for death..."


    As soon as Abona''s voice fell, a young man who couldn''t hold himself back wanted to rush over, but he was stopped by Weibo and pushed to the ground in an instant.


    Everyone else was watching this scene nkly, and even the old chief was a little surprised and surprised.


    Weibo and the other three people in his group have witnessed the strength of this group of people with their own eyes. For them, it is impossible to match them. The attitude of this group of people has been expressed before the critical point. There are still people above them suppressing them, otherwise It is estimated that these Sandians have long since disappeared.


    The old chief seemed to realize something at this moment, and his tone began to calm down and asked, "What do you mean you came to see me?"


    "Grandpa Chief, they are now the rulers of Sky Ind. It seems that Ganfu has given up the throne. These people havee to you to meet with their King to discuss how the people on Angel Ind can coexist peacefully with us. !��


    Before Abona opened his mouth to speak, Weibo spoke directly first.


    However, as soon as these words came out, the old chief lost hisposure. He mmed the crutch in his hand to the ground, and he was immediately on the verge of rage. He shouted angrily at Abona, "What''s there to discuss?" , that group of people has upied ournd for more than four hundred years, and the two sides havepletely formed a fight to the death. What is there to talk about? No matter who is in charge of Kongdao now, it belongs to us Sandians. , no one can take it away!��


    Faced with the attitude of the old chief, Abona unexpectedlyughed. He looked at everyone present. There were about a hundred people, and this should be considered the majority of the entire Sandian people. They are all here. As for the remaining three melons and two dates, you can urately find where everyone is by using your senses.


    At this point, Abona took two steps forward and asked leisurely, "It seems that your attitude is that you are unwilling topromise andmunicate with His Majesty me?"


    Abona''s expression looked very indifferent, but Weibo discovered at this moment that the five or six people following him had soared in momentum and were ready to fight.


    The old chief was about to say something, but judging from his angry look, he would definitely not have anything nice to say, but at this time Weibo rushed directly in front and said first, "Grandpa Chief is willing to discuss with your Majesty the King. But now that Grandpa Chief is very old, he still allows us to discuss it!"


    Many other people still don''t understand what Weibo means. Why did they suddenly give up the pride of the Sandians?


    But at this time, the other two people who had followed him to witness the strength of Abona and others, one of them also stood up and said to his tribe, "You have to believe Brother Weibo, this is definitely the best for us. side!"


    "He ispletely betraying our people at this time. Even in hundreds of years, we have never surrendered to those guys on Angel Ind. What is there to discuss?"


    At this time, a woman also stood up and pointed directly at the Sandian who just spoke and shouted.


    But most of the people present were watching the excitement. They wanted to know what the situation would be like in the end.


    The main reason is that in their impressions, their understanding of strength is not too strong. The most powerful ones are their ancestors, and even the current Kongdao Ganfu, their understanding of the word "powerful", They are all in a rtively vague concept.


    After Weibo heard these words, his face became even paler. He was afraid that if the other party failed to negotiate a dealter, he would directly destroy all the people here. This would definitely be called annihtion for the Sandians. disaster.


    With the strength of these people, how could he stop these people? His mind kept thinking, hoping to think of a more suitable method.

 Chapter 130 The new chief of the Shandia clan

    <h4>Chapter 130 The new chief of the Shandia n</h4>


    The entire Sandia tribe has now begun to discuss this matter. Everyone has begun to express their own different opinions, but most of them hope to integrate into a better living atmosphere.


    At least I don''t have to stay here anymore, living a life without enough food and clothing.


    "Little Wilber, what on earth are you doing?"


    The old chief''s angry voice finally came out. When Wei Bai stood in front of him and spoke, the old man was already very dissatisfied. Especially when he said such words, the old chief became even more angry.


    He really couldn''t imagine why the person he thought was the most suitable sessor would be in this state now. What on earth could have changed his mind like this?


    All along, the Sandian people''s goal has been to fight for their ownnd. No matter who the ruler is at this time, it cannot stop their determination!


    "Grandpa Chief, can we go inside and have a chat with you?"


    Weibo said with an embarrassed look on his face. His biggest idea now was to quickly get the old man into the house and then exin to him the current situation.


    The guys on Angel Ind are not fools. They have quietly handed over the control to others, which must mean that the other party has sufficient means and capabilities.


    Now that people have found their own ce, and they are super powerful, how can the Sandians, the only ones who exist, stop them?


    "I would like to hear what you want to say, if you can''t give me a satisfactory answer. Weibo, we are not done with this matter!"


    The old chief nced in Abona''s direction, and walked directly into the house with an angry look on his face.


    Weibo also hurriedly followed, while the others continued to wait outside.


    Abona did not show the slightest sign of anxiety. He watched the performance of this group of people as if nothing had happened. Others had also begun to take back their guard. After all, at this time, if they could avoid causing trouble, they would not cause trouble, but if something really happened If so, then they really don''t mind wiping out all the Sandians.


    Everyone outside was staring at Abona and the others quietly, but inside the room it was already a different scene.


    "Weibo, tell me why you did this?"


    As soon as he entered the room and closed the door, the old chief couldn''t help but asked angrily.


    "Have you ever gotten to know them? I have seen with my own eyes that any one of them can destroy our entire Shandia tribe. What are we going to use to fight against? And what they said is very clear, but they just let us go over and negotiate. , maybe we can get what our tribe wants.


    Now go out and see how many people are still willing to live in this ce. 400 years ago, there are only so few of our tribe left. Is it possible that we still can��t let go of our grudges and hatreds?


    Beforeing, the other party had already said that if we did not agree to negotiate, then they would not mind directly clearing us Sandians. The group of people on Angel Ind have now made apromise and transferred the right to rule. Let it go, do you think they will think about these issues?


    Whether it is for the survival of our Sandia tribe, or for future life, I also hope that you, Grandpa Chief, can participate in this matter, and at least listen to what are the conditions they give? "


    Weibo said respectfully.


    What he said is absolutely correct. Although these people have always wanted to take back theirnd, there have been fewer and fewer Sandians. By the time they pass on to the next generation, it is estimated that there will not be many people left in the entire tribe. indivual.


    Now is there an opportunity for a turnaround, which at least allows them to no longer live in such a ce, so Weibo doesn''t want to give up, nor does he intend to give up.


    The old chief turned his head and nced at Wei Bai. There was still anger in his eyes, but it was much better than before.


    He didn''t know the purpose of this group of people before, and he didn''t know the strength of the other party, but now when he heard this, the old chief also realized something.


    After the room was quiet for a while, the old chief sighed suddenly, looking a little depressed. He slowly sat on the chair, looked out the window, and then said leisurely to Wei Bai next to him, "You go." Well, from now on you will be the chief of the Shandia people. I am old now, so I will lead the people to live a good life from now on!"


    "Grandpa Chief, I..."


    "No need to say anything else. We, the Sandia n, have been fighting with the people on Angel Ind for hundreds of years for thisnd. Maybe it''s time to end it!"


    The old chief said directly.


    There was a lot of vicissitudes in his voice. After all, from childhood to now, for decades, the biggest idea for him was to take back thend that belonged to them. But everything the Sandians have done over the years, in the end None of it could be implemented, and even now my people are facing the risk of genocide.


    "Grandpa Chief, I will definitely do everything well!"


    Wei Bai bowed down directly and said respectfully.


    Weibo himself is a person who is unwilling to admit defeat, but the situation is stronger than others. At this moment, even if he does not think about himself, the entire n is tied behind him. If he makes a slight mistake, he believes that the other party will Personally, I won��t be soft-hearted at all.


    It was precisely because of this idea that Weibo was willing to do such a thing. At the same time, he also wanted to know what better conditions the other party could create for his tribe!


    When Weibo raised his head, the old chief was lying on the bed without knowing it, and he didn''t even want to turn his face.


    This time''s decision really made the old chief very sad. He had been chasing his life-long goal, but at the end of the day, he had not realized even the slightest hope. However, now another ending has appeared.


    Wei Bai slowly exited the room, and the moment he gently closed the door, everyone''s eyes and eyes were focused on this young man.


    The moment Wilber, who was all dark and shirtless, turned to look at everyone, he took a sudden breath, as if he had made up his mind, and shouted directly to everyone, "From today on, I am Sandy." The chief of the demi-humans!��


    When the other Sandians heard this, they immediately became quiet while they were whispering to each other. Everyone''s face was filled with disbelief, but it was rtively normal after thinking about it.


    Weibo was originally the Sandian people''s default candidate for the next chief, and now that something like this happened, they didn''t find it too strange.

 Chapter 131 Golden Bell

    <h4>Chapter 131 Golden Bell</h4>


    For this Sandian people, who originally only had one or two hundred people, they had always believed in the rtively powerful existence among them.


    So as long as they are strong, anyone can be the chief.


    Abona and the group of people were still watching quietly. In just a short time, the chief candidate had changed. He was not too surprised, because Abona had no idea about the affairs of this group of Sandians. care.


    "Now that you have be the chief, should I choose toe with us next?"


    Abona said in a calm voice.


    "I will. I don''t know if I can tell you the location. I''ll settle my people here first, and then I can go to your ce on my own!"


    Weibo said.


    Abona smiled slightly, and then said directly, "It is in the current shrine."


    After finishing speaking, Abona turned around and started walking in the direction he came from, but as he walked, he said, "As a friendly reminder, the time given by His Majesty the King is only half a month. Within half a month, if you Sandy If Chief Ya does note, it will be deemed that you have given up voluntarily, and if there are still disputes in the sky ind area in the future, we will not deny it and will use force to resolve all matters!"


    Weibo looked at the back of Abona who had left. Listening to what the other person said, his fists clenched unconsciously.


    Weibo and the Sandians were very disgusted with the sudden appearance of these Qinghai people, but what if they were disgusted? The strength of the opponent is there, and in the early stage, it has shocked everyone here with its own ability. If you are not an opponent, you are not an opponent. You also need to understand your position clearly within a certain period of time.


    Weibo had no reason not to believe that if he was unwilling to negotiate, people like him would still be allowed to remain in this state.


    But those tribesmen who didn''t know the truth all showed angry expressions at this moment. They Sandians have lived on the empty ind for hundreds of years. How has this situation ever happened?


    Especially for their always warlike nation, this conversation was simply humiliating!


    But Abona, who has already gone a long way, would still care about these problems!


    Another ce.


    "Captain Junhe, what kind of nt is this thing? It grows so tall!"


    On Junhe''s side, a group of people gathered around a huge vine and looked up. This thing waspletely as far as the eye could see. At such a high altitude of 10,000 meters, this huge vine didn''t know how far it had grown. To what extent?


    "It''s indeed quite big, but this thing is quite strange. You must mark it in detail on the map logo you make!"


    Junhe also said with a little emotion, but after all, their work must be carried out.


    This ce is surrounded by ruins, but it is hard to tell which era they are from. The only thing that is certain is that this ce has existed for many years.


    This is already their third day on this empty ind, and there is not much time left for them to continue to waste.


    The ten guard members started to climb towards the huge vine out of curiosity, wanting to test how high it was and whether there would be anything else on it.


    Junhe was calmly observing the situation around him. He was holding the map of the previous sky ind in his hand. Although it was not refined enough, for this group of people, having the previous map was at least very useful for doing many things. Much simpler.


    Seeing the group of people still climbing up happily, Junhe did not me them. Although they were given three days toplete the task, there was still one day left, and the entire ind had already been explored. That''s almost it. Now that we''re here, there''s nothing wrong with rxing and having fun.


    "Captain Junhe, would you like toe up and take a look? The view here is really good!"


    One of the team members who climbed to the top was almost invisible from the height. He stepped on a leaf and shouted to Junhe who was still observing the surroundings below.


    The huge leaves of this vine arepletely unaffected even if two or three people stand on it. Such a huge nt is almost rare in the world of pirates.


    That''s why this group of people are so curious and want to climb up to find out.


    Junhe also heard the call and smiled slightly without saying anything else.


    He didn''t have so much free time to climb to such a high ce. His eyes were always staring at the ruins. Those team members had forgotten about the gold, but in this guy''s mind, there was always his Majesty the King. That thing you said!


    "Tabaru, guess what I saw?"


    The guard who climbed on the top looked at something in front of him and shouted to hispanion standing on the leaf below with a surprised look on his face.


    At this time, they had already climbed above the clouds and could no longer even see clearly the crowd standing on the ground.


    For this group of young men in their twenties, it is normal to have such curiosity.


    On top of the vine, a huge golden clock was disyed in front of everyone. He was hanging on the branch of the vine. Just looking at the weight, this thing could be worth at least tens of billions of beli, and it waspletely astonishingly big. That kind of thing.


    The few people who climbed over with them all stared dumbly at the golden clock above their heads, and one even rubbed his eyes in disbelief. This thing was probably the biggest they had ever seen since they were born. of gold products.


    No wonder they were surprised. Such a huge thing was a miracle for everyone, not to mention that these things were products that existed hundreds of years ago.


    Before they started to set off, they had received news that even the ancient buildings in thend of Shantora on Kongdao were made of pure gold, but they had never seen anything gold along the way, but this time these people Completely convinced from the bottom of my heart.


    With such a huge discovery, these people did not move any hands or feet, and did not even think about touching it. They started jumping directly downwards,nding urately on the vine leaves below each time, until they panicked. Reached the lowest base.


    Jun and this guy are also having the same sweet dream, and now they have begun to walk into the ruins, kicking the stones lying on the ground with their feet, as if something unexpected will appear in the next second. Same.

 Chapter 132 Naturally, it’s the Thunder Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 132 Naturally, it��s the Thunder Fruit</h4>


    The people above jumped down quickly, but the people below also began to observe the surrounding situation.


    Junhe stayed among the ruins. He felt that this ce was almost the same as what His Majesty the King had described, so he wanted to take a good look at the overall situation here.


    As the people above jumped down quickly, they came to him as quickly as possible and told what happened above. After hearing these words, Junhe finally began to smile.


    Thend of the shrine.


    While staying in the shrine, Chang Nuo did not choose to do anything else. He stayed here almost the whole day without taking a step out.


    However, the one who has been staying here with him is Enilu, this little guy of thirteen or fourteen years old. Now even when facing the priests, he is not nervous at all, and even behaves very calmly.


    This time, for the first time, he knew how capable the man standing in front of him was?


    "Enilu, what are you looking at?"


    In the main hall of the shrine, Changnuo looked at Enelu who was standing in front of the angel statue and asked.


    The other person''s eyes were always staring at the angel at the top, or he should be staring at the thing in the angel''s hand.


    "Brother Changnuo, I heard other people say that that thing should make people very powerful, but there is a demon living in it, so it has been left here without anyone using it. Is it true?"


    Enelu turned his head and looked at Changnuo curiously and asked.


    "They are right. That thing can indeed bring people unparalleled abilities, and at the same time, it can also make people lose something. But for you now, it is best not to think about this, if it is too early. , it won��t do you any good. Make good use of these few years to strive to make yourself stronger, and then you can acquire this ability. I think there should be few people in this world who can limit you. of freedom!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Enelu ispletely different now from when he first came here. At this moment, he is wearing a white long coat, and his hair has been washed. After passing the cleaned Enelu, he really looks like a person at this moment. Quite a handsome young man.


    There is a big difference from the previous image, but for him, this image seems to be very unustomed, especially wearing clothes that he has never worn before.


    But nothinges without adaptation. Although Enelu is not adaptable, he is still working hard to ept this kind of life.


    "Can I really be stronger?"


    Enelu lowered his head in disbelief and said.


    The scene of being bullied all the time, including the self-me for his mistake in causing all the people on the ind to disappear, still lingers on this young boy.


    Chang Nuo stepped forward, smiled and gently ruffled his hair, and then said in a friendly voice, "As long as you are willing to be stronger, no one in this world can stop you. The key is you." What do you think about the future?


    Don''t let your previous life limit your future. You must always believe that you are the best, maintain a proud attitude, and nothing in the world can be hard for you. "


    Chang Nuo was very sincere to this little guy. The most important thing was that he was indeed a great talent. It would be a waste to give up like this.


    Chang Nuo just learned about the innate ability to perceive color, knowledge, and sight today.


    Eniru''s current knowledge haspletely surpassed that of Junhe. He can intuitively feel things within a one kilometer radius in his mind, but for him, he has no idea what these things are at all. What happened, so for this special change, he identified this as the heartwork.


    It''s a pity that Anilu has not received any training at all since he is staying on the empty ind. If he had been trained since he was a child, then at this moment, he would probably be able to surpass everyone in the King''s Guard without relying on any ability.


    It was precisely because of this situation that Chang Nuo began to pay attention to this little guy.


    Enilu still believed in Chang Nuo''s words. Although the two had only been in contact for two days, for Enilu, Chang Nuo was the only one who was willing to get close to him and didn''t mind what he had done to him before. The people who happened to him were willing to give him food and teach him how to do things. This feeling of being recognized made Enilu feel from the bottom of his heart that Chang Nuo, who was standing in front of him, was the most trustworthy person. .


    At this time, Enelu has not yet developed any great hatred towards Kong Dao, and he does not even have any resentment towards the children who bullied him. However, Chang Nuo understands that this should be the reason why he has always transferred what originally belonged to Bika. The lives of his friends on the empty ind and the vigers all rested on his shoulders.


    But I don''t know when thest day started, the power that sealed him was loosened, but it is estimated that developments like the original plot will never happen again in the future.


    In the main hall of the shrine, the two chatted for a while, but they just talked a little bit. Regarding the natural devil fruit ability, if you eat it now, if you want to practice it in the future, you will probably have to pay at least ten thousand dors. Just work twice as hard.


    Especially when ites to the practice of domineering, natural ability users cannot feel any physical damage at all. Over time, it will create a psychological sense of self-confidence. Once this happens, they will not be able to practice armed domination. It''s almost nonsense.


    Chang Nuo had no idea about cing the Thunder Fruit here, and even the people in the King''s Guard had no idea. They mostly wanted to rely on their own strength to achieve more things.


    Of course, not many people on the entire Sky Ind knew about the Thunder Fruit staying here. Even if they knew, they would not go and eat this thing, otherwise this thing would not be around today.


    Arriving in the courtyard, Chang Nuoy down directly. This lounge chair made of soft white clouds is infinitely morefortable than the one I made down there.


    Enelu stood aside. He didn''t know what to do now. Anyway, from now on, he hardly started to worry about food, and slowly began to integrate into this kind of life with more people.


    All this was just the beginning. In this huge courtyard, apart from theming back frompleting their mission, there were only two people leftmunicating and chatting.


    In the meantime, Chang Nuo also went to tell Anilu about the situation in other ces without any secret, especially about the following navigation and science and technology issues.

 Chapter 133 Sky Island Data

    <h4>Chapter 133 Sky Ind Data</h4>


    A few dayster.


    At this moment, a group of people were sitting together in the main hall of the shrine. This time, it was considered a simple meeting on the empty ind.


    Chang Nuo sat at the top, and the angel statue behind him looked very conspicuous.


    He nced at all the people sitting there. Except for Junhe and Abona, the only ones left were Ganfor and his priests.


    There are about ten people in the entire hall. Ganfuer nowpletely regards himself as a member of the Tru Kingdom. He has no special pursuit of the highest position. As long as the people on the Sky Ind live a better life, this is important to him. More important than anything else.


    So far, no one from Sandia''s group hase, but the reason why they haven''t opened their mouths in this meeting is to wait for them toe.


    After all, there are still three empty seats left in this hall, which are reserved for them.


    "Your Majesty, the Sandians are here..."


    While they were still waiting, the King''s Guardsmen at the door came in and began to announce.


    Then I saw Weibo appearing at the door with two people.


    This is really their first timeing to this ce. The biggest dream of these Sandians has always been to get all thend back. After all, this is their ancestral territory.


    But when he stepped into this ce, Wei Bai first saw Chang Nuo sitting in the first ce, and he was quite surprised in his heart, mainly because he was too young now.


    Looking at his teenage age, it waspletely unimaginable to him that he could have such a powerful being like Abona under hismand.


    "Since you are all here, sit down. The main purpose of convening this meeting today is not only to n the future form of Sky Ind, but also more importantly, about the peaceful coexistence of Angel Ind and Sandian people. Way."


    Chang Nuo sat there and looked at Wei Bai who was standing at the door and said leisurely.


    "This is His Majesty the King of Tru Kingdom, Lord Junhe, Captain of the King''s Guard, Lord Abona, and the rest you should know, Lord Ganfor."


    A priest sitting on the outermost side stood up, straightened out his slightly protruding belly, and began to introduce.


    "Weibo, the chief of the Sandian tribe."


    Weibo introduced himself, and then sat directly in his seat with a domineering look.


    The other two people behind him also followed him and sat down together.


    "Now that everyone is here, let''s talk about other situations first. As for the issue of Sandia and Angel Ind, we will leave this discussion until the end!"


    Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty, the terrain of the entire Sky Ind has been mapped out. It is evenrger than the terrain we have seen before, with a total area of ??150 square kilometers, of which thend area is almost 20 square kilometers. The rest are almost all within the area of ??Angel Ind.


    The other is the Baibai Sea, which connects almost all small sky inds. As far as the currently known sky ind range is concerned, there are almost 13 inds in total, almost all of which areposed of ind clouds.


    Now all of them are based on Angel Ind, and the other is Apayado, an ind that came up along the sky current 400 years ago. The details have been mapped in detail. "


    Junhe stood up and began to report. This was his mission in the past few days. He had almost visited the entire ind, and more detailed things had been mapped.


    As for thend of Shantora above Apayado, the matter of gold here has not been disclosed, but many people on Kongdao still know it.


    The geographical area of ??Sky Ind is indeed beyond everyone''s imagination.


    This data was not only for Ganfu, but also Wei Bai, who was sitting next to him, was slightly surprised after hearing it.


    It''s not that they don''t understand this kind of data, but after hearing it today, they were indeed a little surprised.


    The Tru Kingdom, which had just arrived at Sky Ind for only four or five days, now knew Sky Ind in such detail. This efficiency really made them a little embarrassed.


    After Junhe finished speaking, he sat down directly, and then Abona stood up as well.


    He also has tasks in the past few days, so now he also needs to start reporting on his own tasks.


    "Your Majesty, there are two tasks in total. One of them is about the Shandia people. Now their tribal chief has stayed here. As for the remaining thing, that is the investigation of the empty ind that you arranged before. Large creatures on the.


    It is a huge python with a body length of about 600 meters. ording to what the Sky Ind people call him, this thing is called the God of Sky Ind. It does not have particrly powerful attack capabilities. It is usually found in Apa. activities in the sub-region. "


    "It''s pretty good, everything is done well."


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then praised the two of them.


    After all, these two people belong to his own people. As for what happens next, that is what Ganfuor needs to exin.


    Seeing that the other two people had begun to report, Ganfu also stood up. He straightened his clothes and said, "Your Majesty, the total poption living on Sky Ind is 8672, but the Sandians are not here. ording to the data, almost all of these people live on Angel Ind.


    The other thing is about notifying everyone about the change of rule. The people on the empty ind are not too disgusted with this matter. They just need to maintain their original lives, so next, Your Majesty can start doing what you want to do. things. "


    Ganfuer''s report was very simple. For Chang Nuo, what he did was the most important. Other things could be done at any time.


    But he also knows that in the past few days, Changnuo has been using his knowledge and knowledge to begin to sense the situation on the entire Sky Ind. But the fact is that as Ganfu said, the people of Sky Ind are indeed There is not much resistance.


    The three of them, Wei Bai, sat nearby and listened obediently. The data they heard this time was also of great use to them. At least they could confirm that there were only two Sandia people left. There are about a hundred people, but there are actually so many people on Angel Ind.


    And from what these people said, it obviously seemed that it was arranged by King Tru sitting in front of him, but I don��t know what he did to get these data?


    He does not believe that these data are false. At least being able to sit here shows the authenticity of what the other party said.

 Chapter 134 Arrangements by the Sandia Clan

    <h4>Chapter 134 Arrangements by the Sandia n</h4>


    It can be regarded as a simple report before, at least to exin the previous mission situation.


    Weibo just sat there quietly and watched. He didn''t make any movement, but the two people behind him seemed to be unable to sit still.


    The three of them have been left here since they arrived, which has made them feel a little ufortable.


    But after listening to everyone''s report, Chang Nuo tapped his fingers on the armrest of the chair he was sitting on, and his mind was already filled with thoughts.


    When he saw Wei Bai sitting there, he directly asked calmly, "Chief of the Sandians, do you have any ideas about the future nning of Sky Ind?"


    "We just want to go back to the ce that belongs to us. Apayado has always belonged to us Sandians. Apart from these, we think everything else can be discussed!"


    Weibo hadn''t opened his mouth to speak yet, but the man sitting behind him, who looked to be in his thirties, couldn''t help but stood up and said seriously to Chang Nuo.


    "Locamo..."


    Weibo turned around angrily and looked at the people who had followed him. He had already made his ns when he came, and everything was done ording to the situation. He didn''t expect that his people had already done such a thing just after the beginning.


    ��Your Majesty the King, regarding the Sandians, our initial thought was indeed the ce Apayado, but I don��t know what your thoughts are?


    Since you have asked us toe over for negotiation, you must already have your own ideas, right? "


    Weibo looked at Chang Nuo and said directly.


    "Apayado, don''t think about it. I can tell you things clearly this time, but since I have informed you toe over to negotiate this matter, naturally everything in advance has been considered.


    Regarding the arrangements for the Sandians, in the future you can choose to live on Angel Ind, or find you a small empty ind for all of your tribe to live. The Kingdom of Tru will also provide you with corresponding jobs and money, and more will be announcedter. Will trade directly with Sky Ind.


    But the specifics still need to depend on the arrangements of you Sandians! "


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Weibo, how can we agree to such a thing and let us live with those guys on Angel Ind? How is this possible!"


    The thirty-year-old Locamo said again, and his tone was much harsher than before.


    Everyone looked at his angry look, and no one interrupted, including Gan Fuer and the priests, who just sat there quietly and watched.


    "Locamo, I am the chief!"


    Weibo finally couldn''t help but roared angrily. His eyes were fixed on Locamo. After all, he knew very well the danger ofing here this time. If they couldn''t reach an agreement this time, then the people who greeted him from Sandia would still be there. Don''t know what the situation is.


    Chang Nuo stared at them with interest, without any sign of urgency.


    "Your Majesty the King, we Sandians are willing to follow your arrangements, but we hope to have an independent area that belongs to us. We have lived on Sky Ind for so many years, and we don''t want to go to any small Sky Ind. I don''t know. Is it possible to have a ce of our own in Apayado that doesn��t require too much space..."


    "no!"


    Before Wei Bai finished speaking, Chang Nuo refused directly.


    For the Toru Kingdom, the next Apayado has extremely strong strategic significance, and it is impossible to give in to this kind of thing.


    Weibo was speechless immediately, but Locamo behind him looked proud.


    "Ganfu, you know the situation best on Sky Ind. I will leave it to you to arrange the living space for the Sandians. After all, the people on Angel Ind are different from the Sandians. You must know the hatred between us best.


    Also, I don��t want to see any surprises in this matter! "


    Chang Nuo stared at Wei Bai, and his tone gradually became colder.


    Changnuo really didn''t pay much attention to the Sandians, who numbered more than one or two hundred. If they really didn''t understand current affairs, then naturally he wouldn''t have to talk about other things.


    "Your Majesty, the feud between Sandia and Angel Ind has been going on for a long time. Since they don''t want to stay away from Apayado, they can move other small inds here to give them a better ce. A ce to live!��


    Ganfu stood up directly and said.


    He didn''t want anything unexpected to happen to the Sandia people in the end, and so far, Ganfuor didn''t understand what the people from the Tru Kingdom wanted to do.


    But anyone with a discerning eye can tell at a nce that the other party is probablying for Apayado on the empty ind.


    Looking at the current tough attitude, only Ganfu understands, and Wei Bai also understands that no one can take away this ce in Apayado from them.


    "Abona, how long do you think it will take toplete this?"


    Chang Nuo looked at Abona, not actually asking for his opinion, but to hand over the task to him.


    ording to Abona''s strength, it does not take much effort to move the ind cloud of a small sky ind to this position.


    "one day!"


    Abona said seriously.


    "Then do this. I wonder what Chief Sandia thinks?"


    Changnuo asked again.


    "Yes, but as soon as we leave Apayado, our people will have no food supply. I don''t know this..."


    What Weibo is most worried about is this situation, but now there is obviously no room forpromise, so on this basis, what Weibo wants to do is to give priority to ensuring the survival of his own tribe.


    Otherwise, just giving the Sandians an ind without any source of food would be almost the same as seeking death.


    This was hisst concession, otherwise there would be no room forpromise.


    The other party has already found its home base, which means that their strength has reached this level. The sky ind is only such arge area, and it is no longer the time to choose by yourself.


    "As for what you said, there is no need to worry. We can provide the Sandians with enough food for half a year. After half a year, all the materials you need to live will need to be obtained through your ownbor.


    Regarding this, I don��t know if you can ept and recognize it. "


    Changnuo said.


    "No problem, I ept it on behalf of the Sandians."


    Weibo said helplessly.


    This is already the best result, otherwise what choice would there be?

 Chapter 135 The obliteration of overlord color

    <h4>Chapter 135 The obliteration of overlord color</h4>


    No one expected that this trip to the empty ind would be resolved so smoothly.


    Everyone got the original result they wanted. For Kongdao, nothing was lost, and overall the advantages outweighed the disadvantages.


    Ganfuer understood, and Weibo also understood that the centuries-long battle between the Sandians and Angel Ind was nowpletely over.


    It seems that no one has lost anything in this matter, and everyone has gained endless benefits. For them, this is already a rtively perfect solution.


    Now that the situation regarding the Sandians and the aboriginal people on Angel Ind has been resolved, the next thing that naturally needs to be resolved is the Tru Kingdom''s n on this empty ind.


    Changnuo was not worried about being known by them, because from Kongdao to Qinghai, few people in Kongdao knew about this kind of thing.


    Changnuo picked up the surveying map that Junhe gave him. Many things were described in detail on it, especially in terms ofnd. These things were marked even more clearly.


    But in the future, as a training area for 10,000 or more people, these things naturally cannot be too few.


    "Your Majesty, your subordinates have already mapped out the area we will need for our future training ground. Now this forest can remain as it is. We just need to develop the Shantora area."


    When Chang Nuo picked up the map, Jun He already knew what the other party''s purpose was and immediately stood up and started talking.


    Shantora was originally an ancient city. There were not many nts there, and it could be considered a barrennd. Overall, it was a ce that could be cleaned up in the most time-saving andbor-saving manner.


    "How many people can be amodated in the calction?"


    Chang Nuo asked calmly.


    However, Weibo and Ganfu, who were sitting here and listening, were already a little confused about all this. They didn''t know what themunication between the two people was.


    But the only thing that is certain is that the reason why the Toru Kingdom wants to take over the sky ind must have something shady going on.


    After hearing Chang Nuo''s question, Junhe thought for a moment and said, "Everything within a ten-kilometer radius of Shand can be used for development. At the most, it can amodate about 50,000 people."


    Every two square kilometers can amodate 10,000 people for training. This kind of space ispletely enough, and what Junhe said is not wrong.


    And the entirend of Shantora is located on the edge of Sky Ind, which is rtively hidden.


    Changnuo thought for a moment and nodded. 50,000 people werepletely enough for the early Tru Kingdom. After all, to support such a huge family business, you really need to use your brain.


    The overallnd area of ??the sky ind is sufficient, let alone 50,000 people. Even if 500,000 people are transported to the sky ind area for training, the venue here ispletely sufficient.


    Weibo didn''t understand much else, but one thing he had heard clearly was that there would be at least tens of thousands of troops stationed on this empty ind in the future, and the purpose of the Tru Kingdom choosing the empty ind was for training army.


    Ganfuer has also thought about this situation. He had never thought before that the other party''s purpose in choosing to take control of Kongdao was actually in this regard, but this did not have any impact on the lives of the natives of Kongdao. The impact, anyway, the benefits are already here.


    Both of them consciously did not raise any objections, because it would be useless for them to raise them now. Since they have now fought for control of the empty ind, they will naturally not let this kind of thing go easily.


    The two of them didn''t say anything. Locamo, who was sitting behind Weibo, started acting like a monster again at this time.


    He stood up angrily and looked at Chang Nuo and said directly, "This is the ce for us Sky Ind people. Do you n to move all the people from your country to this ce?"


    Just as he was about to negotiate and discuss the next issue of personnel allocation and cement, Chang Nuo was thinking about how to deal with the future, but when he suddenly heard this guy''s voice, he was instantly furious.


    Now that they have taken control of Sky Ind, I didn��t expect that someone would dare to stand up and oppose it at this time! He stared directly at the other person with a fierce gaze, and in the next second, his overbearing lust was directed at him alone.


    When no one else was in any condition, Locamo fell directly to the ground in an instant and made no sound anymore.


    Such powerful overlord-colored domineering energy directly acts on a person, and if the person is not yet powerful, when the full overlord-colored domineering energy is applied, it can even crush him into a pulp in an instant.


    "Chief Wilber, this kind of thing can only happen once. If it happens again, I don''t mind helping you manage it myself, Sandians!"


    Weibo was still stunned. He watched his own person fall beside him. The key was that he appeared like this without any warning.


    Facing Chang Nuo''s cold voice, he had no idea what words to use to express his shock at this moment.


    In his understanding, no matter how powerful a person is, it is impossible to kill someone with his eyes, but now this kind of thing haspletely appeared in front of him.


    This scene can be regarded as a warning to the Sandians, and it can also be regarded as a warning to Ganfuor and the priests behind him.


    No one dared to say anything else at this moment. There was even a priest who started to tremble.


    Although Wei Bai was angry in his heart, he could only say respectfully, "I will definitely restrain the other tribesmen!"


    "We are going to be a family from now on. I don''t want our rtionship to be too rigid. I will give you everything you want, but at the same time, I also hope that some things will not cross our bottom line."


    Changnuo once again looked around at the crowd and said, people like Luo Kamo are definitely not a minority in the entire Sky Ind, and he has no intention of taking care of these people one by one.


    Once a one-time deterrent is in ce, it can also be regarded as a warning to them.


    Obviously, the warning this time was quite adequate. Originally, the Kingdom of Tru only wanted an Apayado and was not interested in other ces at all. The two parties were in peace, which is what they both wanted.


    After all, after arriving at Sky Ind, what the Toru Kingdom did was always just a deterrent with force and did not hurt anyone, but this time it was really shown in front of them.

 Chapter 136 Space Transmission Channel

    <h4>Chapter 136 Space Transmission Channel</h4>


    This is the first time Chang Nuo has lost his temper since he came to Kongdao, and he is still very angry.


    The entire scene was silent for a long time, no one dared to speak or do anything else.


    After seeing everyone quiet down, Changnuo continued to say to Junhe, "Prioritize the nning of the site area. The specific facilities, including buildings, can all be cut and processed by Bai Baiyun. It must be done within three months." After taking care of all the matters, I will directly open the personnel channel in three months ande here to start formal training."


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, I willplete the task within three months!"


    Junhe stood up and said seriously.


    Although three months is not a long time, it is indeed enough for them. It is just a training ground of ten square kilometers. For those who have Devil Fruit, it is nothing more than a little troublesome, but not strenuous.


    "Your Majesty the King, if there is anything you need help from our people on Angel Ind, just ask!"


    Ganfur said.


    "There are not many requirements for the time being, but you must make it clear to everyone that from now on, Apayado will be an absolute restricted area, and no one is allowed to set foot in this area.


    Another issue is about trade. After three months, all materials began to be transported here regrly, and then the trade problem began to be gradually solved.


    So for the Angel Ind location, you need to pick out an area where you can buy and sell items. "


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and then said to Gan Fuer.


    The one or two hundred people on Weibo''s side wouldn''t have any effect at all. If it weren''t for the fear that it would cause fear on Angel Ind, Chang Nuo wouldn''t mind killing this group of people directly.


    Weibo himself understood this idea very well.


    In this ce, he had no right to express any opinions, and he had no choice at all. He could only obey other people''s arrangements, but he didn''t know whether his future life would be good or bad.


    "Your Majesty, they all have missions here, so what should I do?"


    Abona, who had been silent and had been sitting there watching them take the task, finally couldn''t help but stand up and speak directly.


    "There is really one thing that you need to do. Junhe has marked the location of Shantara. You and others must collect and sort out all the things inside. We will just take it back then. The other thing is to The golden bell is left behind, it is something that the Sandians believe in."


    Chang Nuo said, isn''t this just the beginning of taking advantage of the gold in Shantora, since no one would use it anyway, so why not take it back directly?


    "Thank you, His Majesty the King, for your understanding. Wherever we Sandians can be used, Weibo will never refuse!"


    After Chang Nuo''s words, especially when he finally left the golden clock behind, Weibo was already moved. They had been looking for this thing for hundreds of years but could not find it, and now they have heard the news about it. And the other party is willing to return this thing to me, which exins everything.


    "It doesn''t have to be like this. If you Sandians want a job, you will be responsible for guarding the gate of Sky Ind from now on. Although few people wille here, it is inevitable that some fish will slip through the. What do you think? Can youplete this task?"


    Changnuo asked with a smile and calmly.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King, we Sandians will do this from now on. You will never be disappointed."


    "Your strength is too weak. In the future, I will ask them to take time to train you people from Sandia. Don''t underestimate the position of the gate. It is not as simple as you think."


    Faced with Wei Bai''s promise, Chang Nuo spoke directly.


    This ispletely like giving a sweet date with a hammer, taking advantage of people''s hearts to the extreme.


    Although he killed one of the other party''s people, the guy was purely seeking death. Weibo didn''t mind this kind of thing. After all, in such a scene, any wrong words could cause disaster.


    Everyone else also understands that in any case, the viin dies because he talks too much.


    Weibo had seen with his own eyes that the strength of the King''s Guardsmen was much stronger than his own. Now that he could get a promise from Chang Nuo, for these aggressive people, it was already great. Couldn''t be better.


    Wei Bai showed joy and immediately said respectfully, "Thank you, His Majesty the King!"


    "Go back andmunicate with Ganfuer carefully. There are two roads to Sky Ind. During this period, it is very likely that you will encounter existences that you cannot stop. You only need to report at that time.


    The other thing is, tomorrow we will lead you Sandians to assist Abona in finding your golden clock. All gold except this thing will be arranged and sorted by Abona. "


    Changnuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King!"


    Weibo said.


    "Everyone is starting to prepare to do their own things. In the future, you will not only face opportunities, but also certain challenges. Whether it is the Sandians or the people on Angel Ind, what we will do in the future It means peaceful coexistence, taking life a step further, not creating unnecessary disputes, and making Kongdao what it should be.


    From now on, you will all be my people, and I will treat everyone equally. However, in the Kingdom of Tru, the most forbidden thing is betrayal, and I hope you can know it. "


    Chang Nuo stood up and said seriously.


    These words have already begun to summarize this meeting, because after saying this, themunication content of this meeting has been resolved.


    The content has even been arranged for three monthster. However, Chang Nuo will not leave this ce in a short period of time and the most important things have not beenpleted yet.


    That is to build a space teleportation array that can connect the Tru Kingdom and Sky Ind in the future. This is the most important thing to ensure everyone.


    As for the structure of the space teleportation array, this thing requires other things to assist, but for him who has the system space, it is nothing more than something that can be done with money.


    You can even directly purchase the teleportation array, but if you clearly have the strength in this area, why should you use the one in the system? The key is that the price required is a bit high.


    After the meeting, Wei Bai and Gan Fu had left the ce, and the entire hall returned to its former tranquility.


    "Junhe, which ce do you think is suitable for cing the portal?"


    Changnuo thought for a moment and asked.


    After all, this guy has traveled all over the ind, and he must know which ce is more suitable.

 Chapter 137 Ways to Improve Strength

    <h4>Chapter 137 Ways to Improve Strength</h4>


    The sky ind is just the first step in their military n. There are still many steps to take. Even though they have now gained control of the sky ind, in fact, it will take at least another year topletely control the personnel here. , or even a chance of several years.


    It goes without saying that the role of the portal is the most important part of all ns, and it is the one that cannot make any mistakes.


    Everyone understood this, so after Changnuo said this, Junhe had already started to think about it.


    On Sky Ind, a ce that can ce this thing must not only consider safety, but more importantly, it must be secretive. No one knows what Sky Ind will develop into in the future, but what is certain is that people wille to Sky Ind one after another in the future. There are definitely not a few people in this position.


    "Your Majesty, what do you think of Shantora?"


    Junhe thought for a while and said it directly.


    Changnuo was still staring at the map in his hand at this moment. The content disyed on it included the markednd of Shandora. It was generally considered good to be close to the edge of the sky ind.


    The location of the portal must not be on Angel Ind anyway, so Apayado, which can host a ce that is both private and safe, is indeed a very good choice.


    "Go and take a look in the next two days. As an ancient city, Shantora can be built with gold to its current level. I''m worried that there must be something we don''t know about.


    At the edge of Shantora, find a location where a portal can probably be built, and then face other people there and start building a residence for the group of people who wille in the future. "


    Chang Nuo put down the map in his hand and then said leisurely.


    "Your Majesty, do we need to keep the matter of the portal a secret from the people on Sky Ind?" Junhe asked.


    "This thing ispletely unnecessary. If people from Kongdao want to go down to Qinghai, it''s not as easy as you think!"


    Chang Nuo said, then slowly stood up and took two steps towards the door.


    Looking at Anilu who was working hard in the courtyard at the moment, Changnuo turned to Junhe and said again, "From now on, that little guy will stay with you and bring him out properly. From now on, this guy''s use will be to us." It might be huge!"


    After hearing this, the other two people stood up at the same time and began to look towards the courtyard. The other person now was no longer the dirty little guy they saw before.


    Junhe and Abona really couldn''t understand. How could His Majesty the King fall in love with such a thin boy?


    "Your Majesty, he...?"


    "Can you see that when you are only nine years old, you can unintentionally kill everyone on the ind?


    Have you ever seen someone who can build a flying ship with just one person? "


    Facing Junhe''s question, Changnuo directly started to ask questions.


    The former one is something that has actually happened, but as for thetter one, it will take several years before it appears.


    "I have heard about this child. The priests mentioned him when they were chatting the day before yesterday. He single-handedly turned the entire Bikakong Ind into a ruin, and all the people on the ind died!"


    Abona crossed his arms, looked at Eniro who was exercising in the courtyard, and said the same to Junhe.


    "Why didn''t I hear about it?" Junhe once again wondered.


    Enel has been staying in the templepound in the past few days. He already lives here. Almost no one on Angel Ind knows about his affairs. It is precisely because of this , Enero became the reason why everyone stayed away from it.


    Many people think that he is a evil star. Being in contact with this kind of person for a long time will not do them any good, so even among children, not many people like him.


    He is a rtively pitiful little guy.


    "Then he will be left to you, and you will train him well. Now you should understand what I just said!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    How could Junhe dare to refuse at this moment? Now he had a look of curiosity on his face, and he couldn''t wait to know what the little guy who was exercising could do to make His Majesty the King treat him like this.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. In two years at most, I will train you to be a master who can navigate the sea."


    Junhe said directly and confidently.


    "You are still one step away from the strength of a vice admiral. My requirements for you are not high. I need to see you reach the level of an admiral within five years. There are many things that will be needed in the future. You are not allowed to ck off!��


    Facing Junhe''s careless look at the moment, Changnuo said helplessly.


    This is not just for Junhe, but also for himself. So far, if there is no ce where Changnuo''s strength can be reasonably reflected, ording to his own feeling, if he faces the admiral of the navy, he should Not a problem either.


    But we won''t know what the specific situation is until we meet each other.


    So he doesn''t know much about himself, but there are still many areas that need to be strengthened.


    "Your Majesty, that is the strength of a general you are talking about!! How many people in the whole world are so strong now?"


    Junhe said with an aggrieved look.


    Of course he knew what Chang Nuo''s so-called general-level strength was, but if he was really asked to do it, such a thing would be really difficult.


    "Junhe, there are two ways for you to improve your strength now. One is to strengthen your domineering practice. As long as you cultivate your domineering power to the point where it can be attached to weapons, you will have fully reached the level of a lieutenant general.


    Armed domineering is the key to survival in this world, so you must be strict with yourself on this point.


    Regarding the application of your own armed color Haki, it can be said that it has reached the extreme level. In the past two years, you have made up for all the shorings in this area. In addition, I have learned how to practice Haki in the aspect of seeing and hearing. I told you in advance, as for how to do it, it depends on you.


    Another point is your Devil Fruit ability. Up to now, you probably haven''t developed even one-tenth of its ability. But in the future, you can only explore it slowly by yourself. I hope you won''t let me disappointment.


    From today on, the management of Sky Ind will be handed over to you. As for those people on Angel Ind, you don��t need to worry too much. From now on, some supplies will be sent up regrly every month. I will only set up the space portal in the early stage. Make him one-dimensional.


    So during this period, I hope you will not disappoint me. "

 Chapter 138 Enel in training

    <h4>Chapter 138 Enel in training</h4>


    Changnuo talked for a long time, and his ultimate purpose was to tell Junhe that his next task was indeed very heavy.


    Of course Junhe himself understood that his expression was no longer as yful as before, but remained serious.


    "It seems that His Majesty the King has high hopes for you!"


    Abona stood aside and said with a smile.


    "I know what I should do. After the Kongdao military base is established, my subordinates will train hard day and night and control the troops of the Kingdom of Tru well."


    Junhe said with a serious face.


    "Then I''ll leave this to you. Hurry up and find the location of the portal. After setting up these things, I will return to the Tru Pce first. As for the follow-up matters, we canmunicate with youter."


    Chang Nuo said, and then began to move towards the direction of Ainilu in the courtyard.


    Junhe stood there obediently and began to think about his inner thoughts.


    "It seems that you have a long way to go with the tasks on your shoulders. It is really possible to be a general in five years!"


    Abona said this without any hint of joking.


    He is very aware of the current situation. Shunhe''s potential is quite huge. Even among pirates in the New World, it is not verymon to have people like him.


    Junhe listened to what the other party said and just smiled without replying.


    Why doesn''t he understand? It''s just that there is no huge pressure on him now.


    All hecks is time. As long as the timees, Junhe believes that he can do what His Majesty the King said.


    In the courtyard.


    Enel is currently undergoing basic training. ording to his age, it is the best time for training. Everything can only be done step by step.


    The main goal of his current training is to enhance his own abilities. As for other things, he can only leave them behind. Only after he has gainedbat experience and physical strength can he proceed with the next step of nning and training.


    At present, in the entire Toru Kingdom, almost all those who are preparing to go to Sky Ind for training havepleted all basic preparations, and the remaining things only need to startrge-scale training.


    "Enilu, how do you feel about these two days of training?"


    As soon as he walked into the courtyard, Chang Nuo looked at Enilu who was doing push-ups and said with a smile on his face.


    However, the other party did not stop his movements at this moment. He just raised his head slightly and said with a smile, "I''m just a little tired, but I feel very fulfilled!"


    "You are doing very well. I believe you will be able to surpass everyone in the near future."


    Chang Nuo sat on the stone bench next to him, quietly watching the other person still sitting and doing push-ups, but his face was indeed very satisfied with what Anilu was doing now.


    At least in Chang Nuo''s view, Anilu''s character is remarkable and he is very kind. Even though people on Angel Ind still have many misunderstandings about him, in this little guy''s heart , without the slightest resentment.


    "Enilu, I will leave Sky Ind in a few days. How about I let the guy standing over there teach you your future fighting skills?"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    But after hearing this, Enilu stopped what he was doing. He stood up quickly, looked at Chang Nuo in disbelief and asked, "Are you leaving?"


    "It will take at least a few days. There is a big country waiting for me down there. I can always stay here!"


    Chang Nuo said while still maintaining a smile.


    "Then can I go back with you?"


    "The sea is too dangerous and your current strength is too low. Practice hard and it will take up to three years. Then I will personally take you to our country!" Chang Nuo said.


    Enelu suddenly fell into deep thought. For this thirteen or fourteen-year-old boy, it seemed as if something was missing at this moment.


    Junhe and Abona also walked over at this moment. Looking at the stunned Eniro, Junhe said, "Even my current strength is already a bit of a hindrance to His Majesty. If you follow him, If we go together, in order to protect you, he will probably be injured. Are you willing to see such a situation? "


    After hearing this, Enelu shook his head quickly, with a look of confusion on his face.


    He looked at Chang Nuo sitting there quietly, and licked his dry lips before he could speak.


    "The sky ind is very important to us. In the future, this ce will be a military base for our country and will also be the biggest trump card of our entire Kingdom of Tru. I hope you can stay here during this period, at least until you After we be stronger, we can fight side by side by then!"


    Changnuo said.


    His words were full of emotion. Even if Enel wanted to get out of this empty ind, he didn''t know what words to continue speaking at this moment.


    "I will be here from now on, and you will learn from me well. When you are strong, you can protect our King, and you will not be in vain for his trust in you.


    Not many people on the entire Sky Ind can set foot here. His Majesty the King has ordered that the entire Apayado will be an absolutely forbidden area on the Sky Ind. Even the natives of the Sky Ind cannot set foot here even half an inch.


    But you can stay here in the future. Can you think of the reason? "


    Junhe said.


    "Brother Changnuo, I have decided that I will be a strong man from now on. I will train hard and practice hard. I will definitely protect you in the future, at least I will not let anyone bully you in front of me."


    Enelu didn''t know if he heard what they said, but he suddenly shouted.


    This not onlyes from Changnuo''s trust in him, but also from Changnuo''s recognition.


    Since the destruction of Bika Kong Ind, Changnuo was the first person to appear in front of him and recognize him.


    For this recognition, Enelu was willing to obey the other party''s instructions.


    "Well done! I believe you can stand at the top of this world in the future and fulfill your dreams!"


    Chang Nuo stood up and patted him on the shoulder, and said with a smile.


    "Yes, I will!"


    Enilu showed his silly smile again, then hurriedlyy on the ground and continued the training just now.


    Keep these basic trainings to restore all your muscles first, and then start training other aspects. The first thing you need to do is definitely start with the six-style skills. This is also the easiest way to practice domineering. kind of link.


    He has never wanted to be stronger as he did at this time. Armed Haki itself is a kind of beyond the limits of his body, and it requires constant training to reach this level.

 Chapter 139 Underground Golden Palace

    <h4>Chapter 139 Underground Golden Pce</h4>


    Everyone can believe that as long as they have faith, stick to it, and rely on it as a source of motivation, then Enel will be able to directly train Armed Haki in less than a year.


    Such a persistent young man is very rare, and Junhe can''t help but have a feeling of approval towards him.


    ��������


    The scene changes.


    On top of the ruins, it is overgrown with weeds and trees, but you can still see the history of civilization thousands of years ago.


    This is Shantora, a ce full of gold.


    There are at least 50 people staying here now, most of them are Sandians. Each of them is shirtless and wearing primitive clothes, but everyone is still searching these ruins seriously.


    Everyone was not even willing to give up any rubble or broken bricks, and would always check any ce that could be lifted up.


    This task belongs to Abona, but this guy Junhe actually appeared here. He was very curious about what kind of gold would exist in Shantora. Although he had seen the Golden Bellst time, even though it had already He was extremely shocked, but ording to His Majesty the King, the buildings here were even made of gold.


    It wasn''t just him who was curious, everyone else was wandering around in the ruins tirelessly as if they had been given a shot of blood.


    The ruins of 800 years ago are not as small as imagined, and the area is surprisinglyrge. In addition, after hundreds of years of wind and rain, this ce has already changed its original appearance. .


    In a ce overgrown with weeds, no one knows what will happen next second?


    Take the huge golden bell, for example. He is now thousands of meters above the sky, and the huge vines directly brought him into the air. If it weren''t for the fact that the members of the King''s Guard were more curious before, they wouldn''t have discovered it at all. to this huge thing.


    "What are they looking for?"


    Next to Chang Nuo, Enilu also followed. They all wanted to know how far it could reach this time, and Chang Nuo still had his own ideas about the gold.


    "Gold, they are looking for buildings made of gold!" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "But those things are not here? More things are underground!"


    Enelu opened his mouth and said directly.


    "How do you know?" Chang Nuo suddenly became interested and asked curiously.


    "I have been to this ce many times. I once identally entered an underground pce. Everything there was made of gold, and every pir was amazingly big. I don''t know whether it was gold or not. In the end, There is also a square stone about 5 meters high in the middle.


    The most important thing is that there is a big snake living there. I almost got eaten by himst time. "


    Enelu said with some lingering fear.


    His expression didn''t look like he was lying, and there was absolutely no need for him to lie. These people had already started searching on the ground. Although this ancient city 800 years ago was rtivelyrge, it would not let fifty people Several people searched for nearly half a day, but no trace of gold was found.


    The title of "Golden Country" definitely does not mean that it only exists outside.


    "Orochi?"


    Chang Nuo said to himself. He recalled that after the official plot began, the gold that the protagonist took out from the belly of the big snake couldpletely confirm the authenticity of what Eniro said.


    Now the ground ispletely in ruins, and this thing only came to Sky Ind 400 years ago with the soaring sea currents. So in the 400 years of this ancient city 800 years ago, Chang Nuo doesn''t believe that no one hase here. this ce.


    In the end, it was just a matter of Nnd identally discovering thend of gold. So based on these circumstances, it is already obvious that gold exists in the underground pce.


    "Do you remember where the entrance is?"


    Changnuo asked with a smile.


    After hearing this, Enilu suddenly became energetic and immediately raised his hand to point to the right side of where they were standing.


    There are no ruins there, and everything is lush and lush with forests. However, Ainilu pointed in the direction of Chaozhou with certainty. Changnuo could only smile and said, "Let''s go! Take me there to have a look!"


    "But that ce is very difficult to get down to. I identally fell in therest time, so I discovered these things."


    Enel said.


    "It''s okay, you just need to bring the directions. I will take you there myselfter."


    With what Chang Nuo said, Anilu didn''t have any worries and ran quickly in that direction.


    Although Shantora is an ancient city, it is impossible for any building to be built with gold. This situation is obviously unreasonable. If Apayado is originally a country, then this kind of thing can still be said. past.


    A pce that can be built with gold, you don''t need to think too much to know what the prosperity of this dynasty will look like. Even now, the Tianlong people dare not say that they can build a pce with gold.


    There are more and more mysteries in all this, but for the current Tru Kingdom, none of them care about these things.


    As the two of them continued to move forward, their steps hadpletely entered the forest. Apart from the huge trees, there was no trace of any ancient city in the surrounding area.


    "Enilu, since you have discovered the underground pce before and you don''t have a ce to live anyway, why don''t you stay there?"


    Chang Nuo asked curiously.


    "Brother Changnuo, have you forgotten what I just said? There is a big snake inside, which is the God of Sky Ind, so I was afraid of being eaten by this guy when I stayed there, so I never dared toe here again. Been to these ces.��


    After Chang Nuo heard this, he suddenly remembered that people had indeed mentioned the existence of this snake just now. And he specifically asked Abona to search for this big guy.


    Now he should be lying quietly in the corner of Apayado, somewhere. For him, maybe his hometown is the golden pce.


    Even the snake is probably still there now. As for theter development of the plot, it should be that Enelu turned over the entire golden pce, and then used the gold in it to start smelting it into a flying ship.


    ording to theter stage, not to mention the protagonists and others, even those who are soy sauce can lift a golden pir from above. It can be judged that the golden spaceship did not use the gold of the entire golden pce at that time.

 Chapter 140 Golden Lion

    <h4>Chapter 140 Golden Lion</h4>


    The gold on the empty ind has always been ignored by people. Even now, no one in the big world knows what is here.


    It is estimated that except for the Pirate King Roger, no one would believe that there is a golden country above 10,000 meters in the sky.


    Others are still searching tirelessly for the ruins of the ancient city of Shantora, mainly because they want to learn the whereabouts of the gold.


    Except for the golden clock that has been discovered so far, they have begun a carpet-like search for the rest, but in the end they did not find a few gold items.


    But just so many things have been found from those ruins, which is enough to exin how much gold is worth here, and even the extent of the prosperity of this era.


    While others were still searching, Chang Nuo had already followed Enilu to an area nearly one kilometer away. This ce was already far away from thend of Shantora andpletely iparable with the ancient city.


    But as soon as he arrived here, Enilu pointed forward and pouted and said, "This is the ce, but I fell from herest time, but it was already two years ago, but now it seems The entrance to the cave seems to be gone!��


    Looking at Eniro, he didn''t look like he was lying. There were no traces of this ce. It was already covered with fallen leaves. Next to him, he had almost reached the edge of Apayado, and there was already an abyss below.


    If an exit appears in this ce, the final oue is really possible.


    "It''s right here!"


    Chang Nuo sighed, and then he saw that the domineering energy spread out instantly, and the entire area, including the underground space, was already within his perception.


    The final result was just as he imagined. There really was a lot of space underground. It would have been difficult to discover it if you didn''t sense it carefully.


    "Let''s go! I''ll take you in."


    Changnuo looked at Enelu with a smile and said.


    He put his hand on the other person''s shoulder. The hole he said before actually still existed, but it was blocked by something. In addition, it was covered with fallen leaves, so it lookedpletely different from the outside. Couldn''t find anything.


    Chang Nuo directly used space jump, ignoring all obstacles. The two people appeared with a white light and disappeared instantly.


    When they appeared again, what was disyed in front of the two of them was a huge golden door.


    This door is at least ten feet high. Looking at this situation, you have no idea how heavy it is.


    Fortunately, this door opened a weak gap. It was only a weak gap from the perspective of the whole door, but it was not a problem for two people walking at the same time.


    The top of the golden gate is all a shape outlined by some lines. The lines outlined on the gate are more exquisite, and there are some strange patterns on it, but overall it is very shocking.


    Normally, in this underground pce, sunlight cannot shine in at all, but in this underground world, it appears as bright as day, and these light sources are reflected from the golden door.


    There are two huge golden lions ced in front of the gate. Judging from the weight, they must have reached at least dozens of tons. If these things were moved to the real world, they would probably be the world''s richest man.


    The area at the door is not particrlyrge, only about fifty square meters, but even so, his entire floor is made of gold. For hundreds of years, except for some dust on the ground, the rest Nothing manifests itself.


    This is just standing in front of the gate of this pce. The scene inside has not been entered yet, but now it is enough for Chang Nuo to feel how the word "shock" is written.


    He stepped forward, stretched out his right hand, and slowly ced it on the dusty golden lion statue. This statue was almost two meters high, and it was also lifelike in terms of carving. .


    All of this seemed so unexpected, and it made him feel for the first time what the real rich world was.


    "System, analyze how much is the golden lion in front of you worth?"


    Changnuo directly entered the system space and started asking. His right hand was still tightly ced on the two-meter-high golden lion statue. He was not only sighing with emotion, but also touching the feeling of truly having money.


    "Answer, the golden lion statue can be exchanged for Pele and is worth about 5.5 billion. Would you like to exchange it..."


    After hearing the specific answer, Changnuo did not answer the system''s answer. Instead, he exited the system space and quietly looked at the huge golden lion in front of him.


    Just such a lump of gold is already worth 5.5 billion Baileys, and there are two more here, not to mention the contents inside.


    This thing is probably enough to make him the richest man in the world, but once so much gold flows into the market, ording to thew of currency exchange, the purchasing power of the pirate world can be greatly reduced in an instant.


    "Brother Changnuo, what''s wrong with you?"


    Enelu, who had been staying behind, looked at Changnuo''s appearance at the moment and asked curiously and worriedly.


    Hearing the sound, Chang Nuo suddenly came back to his senses, and then said with a smile, "It''s okay, I just feel too shocked. I didn''t expect so much gold to appear here. It''s really surprising!"


    "Is that so? But there are many more inside?"


    Enelu said casually.


    He didn''t know what the value of these things was. After all, these things were not valuable on the empty ind. No one even cared about these things at all, even if they were discovered, it didn''t matter.


    But he doesn��t know the price of this thing below. A subject with an absolute market, but it is impossible to sell so much gold!


    "Enilu, have you ever told anyone about the situation here?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly thought of this topic, and then opened his mouth to ask.


    "No, there is a big snake here, so since I left here that time, I have nevere down again. Others are not very good to me, so there is no need for me to tell them about the situation here!" said.


    "It seems that you have already walked inst time, so let''s go in and take a look."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    After the words fell, he reluctantly let go of the hand touching the golden lion. He already wanted to convert this thing into Bailey and store it in the system space.

 Chapter 141 The History of Kongdao

    <h4>Chapter 141 The History of Kongdao</h4>


    If all the gold in this ce is converted into Bailey and stored in the system space, Changnuo feels that he can really be a god at once. In the future, let alone in this pirate world, even to any ce. He can be a god-like existence.


    It is impossible to sell such arge amount of gold in the world of pirates. A small amount is fine, but such arge amount is almost unthinkable.


    The two of them haven''t walked in yet, but the gold at the door is enough to make people stunned.


    Chang Nuo walked in front, and Eni Lu followed behind somewhat obediently. After all, in his impression, there was a big guy inside, and his own strength was not that good. If he rushed in, he would be bitten by someone. If you bite it into your belly, then this thing is not very good.


    There is a gap in the entire door, enough for two people to pass through. The thickness of this golden door is at least 1 meter, and with such a huge thickness,pared with the golden lion, this thing must be at least tens of billions of shells. Li, and it''s just one of the doors.


    For an ordinary person, even if such a golden gate is ced here, he has no way to take it away.


    The thick golden door seemed extremely precious at this moment.


    However, after just walking in, there was no candlelight underground in the golden pce. However, relying on the sparkling gold and silver jewelry and the degree of reflection of the gold in this spacious hall, all the scenes in the underground pce were vaguely visible.


    After this scene appeared in front of Chang Nuo, he already had some doubts about life. Such arge amount of gold was really unbelievable.


    "Brother Changnuo, be careful there is a big guy here!"


    Enelu stood behind and reminded softly.


    Although there are some ces where you can''t see the end of this empty hall, when you came in, Changnuo had already used his knowledge and knowledge to sense the scope of the entire underground pce. There are no living creatures here. I''m afraid that the god of the sky ind The huge python should be on the periphery now.


    The entire underground is very quiet, so quiet that even the sound of breathing can be heard echoing, and the sound of every step here is particrly clear.


    This golden pce is bigger than anyone''s imagination, and even the entire pce is already under Shantora. However, the entrance to the underground pce is one kilometer away from that ancient time.


    The pce is still a little dark, but you can still clearly see the golden pirs that are tens of meters high. The diameter of this thing is at least 3 meters thick. Anyone who can get it in the pirate world will definitely be an absolute rich man. people.


    Not only is this pce built with pure gold, there are also some gold products in the pce, including chairs, decorations and a series of other things.


    Each pir has apletely different shape. Just standing at the gate, you can already see such a scene. Chang Nuo slowly began to walk forward, and kept looking at the surrounding situation.


    "It seems that these golds are not made by human beings. The only ones who can achieve this level should be the golden fruits!"


    After looking around, Chang Nuo finally understood. After all, there was so much gold. Even if a kingdom devoted all its efforts, it would be impossible to find so much.


    All he can think of now is this possibility, but the Golden Fruit cannot create gold out of thin air. It can only mobilize the gold hidden underground in this world, and then condense it into what you see now. This state.


    But even so, in this pirate world, gold products still have their price.


    In such a splendid underground golden pce, the total amount of these things can definitely make Chang Nuo take offpletely.


    He was still thinking that the gold and silver jewelry he got from Mariejoia would be enough to make him fly, but he didn''t expect that it was in this underground gold pce that he really subverted his three views.


    Not to mention my future self, even in the future Tru Kingdom, I am afraid I will never have to worry about any money matters.


    "Brother, what are you observing?"


    Enelu looked at Changnuo who was in a daze and asked worriedly.


    "It''s nothing, but seeing the state here reminds me of what this prosperous city was like hundreds of years ago."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Anyway, no matter what, they have declined by now, and there is no information left at all. There is only this empty pce left, and I think it''s nothing!"


    Enelu said with a confused look on his face.


    "I still left something behind!"


    Chang Nuo said, and then began to stride towards the front of the hall.


    The reverberating sound produced by each step can be clearly heard. The entire underground pce, including the floor under the feet, is made of gold. However, in the center of the hall, there is something out of ce.


    Because he ced a cube of historical text that was almost 5 meters high by 5 meters wide.


    Just aftering down, Chang Nuo had already sensed the existence of this thing. At the beginning of the official plot, this huge historical text was on the ruins of Shand. If you think about it, you can understand that this must be theter Anilu. After bing a god, in order to clear out this golden underground pce, he threw that huge thing out.


    Not far behind this historical text is a huge staircase, which extends to a height of about 10 meters, with a golden seat ced on it.


    Moreover, there are four gold sculptures standing on both sides of the seats. As far as the eye can see here, except for the historical text, everything else is made of gold.


    The amount of gold is sorge that it ispletely unbelievable. Changnuo no longer needs to care about the amount of gold at this moment. Anyway, from now on, everything here belongs to him.


    Including the historical text ced in front of the two people.


    "Brother Changnuo, what is written on this?"


    Enelu also saw the text on the history text and said.


    The words engraved on it are very clear and have not been polished by the years and are quite neat and perfect. Compared with the historical text in the basta Pce, this piece of text already looks much fresher.


    "Enilu, this thing is called a historical text. It records a lot of things, but almost no one knows this kind of writing now." Changnuo said leisurely.

 Chapter 142 Ancient Weapon Sea King

    <h4>Chapter 142 Ancient Weapon Sea King</h4>


    He knew very well what the above content was about, but he still didn''t care about these things now. The historical text clearly had two more rows of text in the corners, and it was also the writing pen left by the Pirate King here.


    But this point left Chang Nuo speechless. Why didn''t the other party ask for the gold here aftering here?


    But sometimes when I think about it, I understand that in such arge underground pce, it is enough for them to just grab a few things and squander it, and there is no need to think about these things.


    "System, interpret the contents of the historical text!"


    Chang Nuo started shouting about the system directly in his mind. As his system bnce dropped by more than 10 million, the historical text in front of him seemed to have begun to change versions, directly transforming into text that he could understand.


    However, this thing is exactly the same as what exists in basta, and it also records the appearance of an ancient weapon. The only difference is that the ancient weapon introduced in this thing is actually from Fishman Ind.


    "Ancient Weapon Poseidon, King of the Sea!"


    Although Chang Nuo had known about it before, the text reflected in it was too detailed. Even when this kind of weapon appeared, the above records were very clear.


    The main reason why I spent 10 million Baileys to decipher the historical text is to find out what is written on it?


    As for what form the so-called King of the Sea Poseidon appears in, Changnuo is less clear than others.


    After seeing the specific content clearly, Chang Nuo waved his hand, and the entire huge historical text was immediately covered with ayer of light blue light, but the next second, this huge historical text disappeared directly between the two. in front of people.


    Chang Nuo was not very interested in this historical text. He was mainly interested in the huge underground gold pce.


    "System, evaluate the value of the entire Golden Pce?"


    Chang Nuo once again began to call out the system in his mind. He was still quite curious about the value of these things.


    After all, the things here can only realize their normal value if they are exchanged into the system space. Otherwise, if you get so much gold from the outside world, you really don��t know where to find a better ce to sell it.


    "Answer, the value of the entire underground gold pce is approximately 1235.3 billion beli. Do you want to recharge?"


    After Chang Nuo heard such a huge amount, his expression did not change at all, but the waves in his heart hadpletely blossomed.


    "Recharge the entire underground gold pce, and convert all the original foundations into stones to support the ground."


    Chang Nuo said in his mind with a smile on his lips.


    But Enelu, who was standing aside, looked curious after seeing this scene, but what followed immediately shocked him.


    I saw that the underground golden pce at this time had gradually turned petrified starting from the gate, and then spread to the top throne. All the furnishings were exactly the same as before, even the patterns on it were missing. changed.


    Enelu sat down on the ground in fear, but Changnuo was still in his mind, looking at the constantly beating recharge amounts.


    The whole processsted for almost a minute, until the entire original golden pce turned into apletely petrified state. The so-callednd of gold here may bepletely gone in the future.


    It can''t be said that there is no gold on this empty ind, at least there is still a lot of stuff in the big guy''s belly.


    "Brother Changnuo, what exactly happened here?"


    Enelu looked at Changnuo who was still standing there with some horror and asked.


    But the other party waspletely unaware of what he said at this moment, and the whole person was still immersed in the system space.


    As the mechanical sound of the system space appeared, the feeling of taking off on the spot was no longer enough to describe his current state.


    "Congrattions to the host for sessfully recharging more than one trillion yuan. He will be a VIP member of the Wanjie Mall system in the future. Member rewards have been distributed, please check in time!"


    The mechanical sound was so beautiful that Changnuo couldn''t feel anything else at all.


    There are more than one trillion beli in the ount bnce. These things are enough for him to do whatever he wants in this world. If he is not the king of a country, he really wants to be a pirate at this moment and control this world.


    Fortunately, he didn''t like life on the ship, otherwise he might have had such an idea, but that was enough for now.


    With so much money to spend, no matter what he does in the future, he can no longer worry about other things like before.


    The scene was silent for a while, and Chang Nuo slowly began toe back to his senses. But when he saw Enilu sitting on the ground, he suddenly asked curiously, "Why are you sitting on the ground?"


    "Brother Changnuo, are you okay? I just called you many times! But you didn''t listen to a word. I was almost scared to death!"


    Enelu said with tears in her eyes.


    He was really frightened by the scene in front of him just now. The entire underground golden pce suddenly turned into stone. His most trusted elder brother did not know what happened at this moment. A person''s helplessness made him be Such a look.


    Facing Enilu''s words, Changnuo walked to him and knelt down next to him. He smiled slightly and said, "I''m sorry for making you worry. There''s nothing going on here. Let''s go."


    When the two of them appeared in Shantora again, Abona and his group were still looking for the gold left here. As for Jun and him, they had already started to do what they wanted to do.


    The Sandians who stay here are much more diligent than expected, and everyone is meticulous in their work. At least they are much better than before.


    "Abona, there''s no need to look for it. Let all of them start going back!" Chang Nuo walked up to Abona and said.


    "Your Majesty, has something happened?"


    Abona asked doubtfully.


    Although I have been searching for most of the day, I haven''t found much, but I haven''t found anything.


    That''s why Abona asked with some confusion when faced with Chang Nuo''s sudden words to stop.


    "It''s no longer necessary. What we need to do now is to end the matter on the empty ind quickly and then return to the country. As for the gold here, there is no need to look for it."


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Although Abona didn''t know what happened, he didn''t ask too much. Since His Majesty the King had already said such words, he could just follow them.

 Chapter 143 Construction of the Portal

    <h4>Chapter 143 Construction of the Portal</h4>


    It has been a week since they arrived at the Sky Ind. In addition to the days of sailing on the sea, nearly two months have passed since they left the Tru Kingdom.


    So now that the Sky Ind matter has been dealt withpletely, all that needs to be done now is to quickly set up the space portal. When I return to the Tru Kingdom, I can open the other connected door and then directly open the official portal. The journey to the empty ind military base.


    Two dayster.


    "Junhe, are you sure the location of the portal is here?"


    Chang Nuo looked around and asked Jun He who was standing next to him curiously.


    There are lush trees all around, and not far from the front, you have reached the edge of Apayado, which is also the edge of the entire sky ind.


    "Your Majesty, this ce was carefully selected by your subordinates, and considering the surrounding situation, this is the best location that can be chosen, not only because it is secretive enough, but also because this location is right in the middle of our building. Directly behind the military base, if people from outside need toe to this ce, they must pass through the entire military base.


    From a safety perspective, it is more appropriate for my subordinates to choose this ce. "


    Junhe said.


    "What does Abona think?"


    Chang Nuo turned to look at Abona who was holding Dawn in his hands and asked.


    "Your Majesty, I don''t understand this thing, but ording to what Captain Junhe said, this ce is indeed a good choice!" Abona said.


    Seeing what the two people said, Chang Nuo looked forward, pondered for a while and then said, "Since you two think so, then just choose this ce."


    Chang Nuo didn''t care too much about this kind of thing, but for the space portal, the importance of this thing no longer needs anyone to mention it.


    Now that the position has been determined, Chang Nuo did not hesitate too much. After observing the surrounding terrain, ayer of blue light began to appear on his entire body, and his eyes also turned sky blue. state.


    The surrounding flowers, nts and trees seemed to have been blown down by the strong wind, and began to tilt in all directions.


    Seeing this situation, the two Abonas hurriedly retreated some distance in other directions, fearing that something incredible would happenter.


    Chang Nuo stared at the position in front of him, his two palms crossed with each other, two blue rays of light shot out from the palms of his hands in an instant, and then they all condensed at a position about fifty meters in front of him. After that, the two spaces began to rotate rapidly, and within a minute, a huge vortex was formed there.


    This vortex is just like Changnuo''s usual long-distance space jump. The inside is ck and the outer edge is blue light. But the difference this time is that this space vortex is particrly huge, but with The eerie feeling when I woke up was also more obvious.


    When the whirlpool first formed, the nearby flowers, nts and trees had all been uprooted and swept in. What is certain is that none of them fell down, but the specific location is unknown. .


    The two Abona looked at the scene in shock. There were no king''s guards around, and they were the only two people left here.


    Originally, the Sky Ind was located 10,000 meters above the sky, but the moment the space vortex began to form, arge number of dark clouds began to gather above the head, and there were lightning and thunder. Everything was converging in this direction, even if Ordinary people staying on Angel Ind can also see the strange scene in Apaya Toshantora.


    Although ordinary people don''t know what happened, what is certain is that such a strange situation can ur at an altitude of 10,000 meters. It is definitely not as simple as what you see in front of you.


    The power of space at the edge of the space vortex is also slowly disappearing. If there is nothing to block it, then this space vortex willpletely disappear soon, and the so-called space portal will not be established at all.


    After the whole processsted for 15 minutes, the space vortex had begun to gradually take shape. Although the vortex was still a vortex and had not changed much in shape, at least the soil and trees on the edge were not attracted in anymore.


    This is enough to show how stable this thing is.


    Chang Nuo stood still with his previous light, and his eyes were still sky blue. He continued to stabilize the space vortex with his left hand, raised his right hand towards the sky, and shot about 100 meters above the ground. There, a ck space crack suddenly appeared, and then a huge and pure ck object fell down.


    The moment he fell, the entire ground shook violently. This huge thingnded just above the space vortex.


    This is like a huge door, about 50 meters high. It has a pure ck appearance with many runes appearing on it at the same time. Above the top of this huge door is a huge suspended sphere. What material is it made of? I''m afraid no one knows it clearly, but this thing is floating quietly at the top.


    After the space doorpletely fell, the power of space outside the dissipating space vortex began to slowly shrink, until it was finally connected to this huge door.


    This thing is something Changnuo purchased directly from the system space. The price is a bit expensive, more than 20 billion Baileys each, but for Changnuo, who is now a rich man, more than 20 billion is already It��s not that much money!


    When all the dust settled, all the flowers, nts and trees within a radius of 50 meters had turned into bare soil, and everything was attracted into the space vortex.


    Abona and Junhe watched all this nkly. The situation in this scene was enough to subvert their three views.


    Although they had known before that the Devil Fruit eaten by their King was the power of space, this method of directly constructing the portal really shocked the two of them.


    It is estimated that it is impossible for any ordinary person to calm down at this moment. For the two people who witnessed all this with their own eyes, being able to see the construction of a space portal with their own eyes, this half hour allowed them to appreciate What is wonderful.

 Chapter 144 Sky Island Military Base

    <h4>Chapter 144 Sky Ind Military Base</h4>


    This space portal stood quietly in ce without making any sound. There was still a ck vortex spinning in the middle. If you look at it from the outside, the inside of this thing is full of weirdness.


    Even being close to this ce can make people feel a lot of pressure.


    After Chang Nuo finished all this, the blue light on his body began to slowly disappear, and his eyes returned to their original appearance.


    The surrounding flowers, nts and trees were swept away and only a piece of barend was left. The construction of the entire military base had not even started yet, but as a space portal for transporting personnel, this thing must bepleted as soon as possible. good.


    The entire military base will be handled by the personnel of the Kingdom of Tru next. As for the people on Angel Ind and the Sandians, they have their own way of life and work. The ce of Apayado, that is, from today on From now on, it has officially be a restricted area for all of them.


    When everything was settled, Chang Nuo still stood there admiring his work. Except for this space portal, there was nothing around him.


    Junhe was shocked for a while when he saw this scene, and then he hurried to his Majesty the King and asked curiously, "Your Majesty, is this the portal?"


    "That''s right, this n is for two-way transmission. After returning to the Tru Kingdom, I will directly build one as soon as possible, so the nning of the military base here needs to be handed over to you. After the nning ispleted, after the people from the Tru Kingdom arrive, I hope to build the entire military base in three months."


    Chang Nuo said that he had nned all this time in detail, and Junhe himself also understood that after all, all these matters had beenmunicated before, so there were no unexpected situations.


    "You said before that other people can ess the Sky Ind. Should we directly seal the entire Sky Ind?"


    Junhe suddenly thought of this question and asked.


    After all, the military base of the Kingdom of Tru will be rted to the life and death of the entire country in the future, and it must not be known to the outside world no matter what the circumstances.


    They no longer n to join the World Government, so everything they do must be done carefully.


    Although the country is developing at full speed, there are some things that not everyone can consider in full. If any detail goes wrong, it will be a fatal blow to them.


    Chang Nuo thought for a while and then said, "There is no need to block the empty ind. Not many people below will be able to get up here. Even if they can, for those who take the risk, maybe you don''t have the confidence to do it." Can you beat them? As for those who don''t need toe up through the sky current, I guess you have no power to resist them at all!"


    "Your Majesty is right. I think the most important thing now is to control the personnel on Sky Ind. From now on, Apayado must be an absolute forbidden area." Abona also said.


    "The rtionship still needs to be maintained well, Junhe. You will be responsible for the affairs here from now on. Kong Ind is not useless. If there are better talents, they can be included in the army." Chang Nuo said with a smile. .


    "I understand, Your Majesty!"


    Junhe said.


    "Send people to guard the space gate. We will need to do this in the future. The most important thing now is to prevent danger. So far, this thing has been randomly transmitted, and you can''t tell where it will go, so at this time you have to Pay more attention." Chang Nuo said.


    "OK."


    After listening to Junhe''s reply, Changnuo smiled slightly, and then began to look at the portal carefully.


    Unexpectedly, a gadget can be worth more than 20 billion beli. Although the cost is not particrly high for him now, on the other hand, the price of this gadget is already quite expensive.


    However, this thing is already a lot cheaper for him. After bing a member of the mall system, the price of this thing has been half. However, so far, he still has one member''s gift package that he has not opened. On this empty ind , Changnuo would not do such an uncertain thing before many things werepletely determined.


    Now that things on Kongdaozi have finally begun to settle down, it''s time to leave the kingdom after being away from the kingdom for so long.


    The construction of the portal has been set up, and this is already the biggest purpose ofing to Sky Ind.


    When I came to Kongdao, I spent two days to determine the issue of governance, another three days to resolve the dispute between the two tribes on Kongdao, and half a month to stabilize the entire Kongdao people. idea, and at the same time determined the establishment of a military base to create a portal belonging to the Tru Kingdom, all within a month.


    This is already rtively fast, and for Sky Inders, most of them have not seen what the current ruler looks like so far.


    But life on the Sky Ind is really not that good. Although they live a rtivelyfortable and peaceful life, their quality of life is simply terrible.


    "Let me inform you that an air ind meeting will be held in three days. It will include material distribution, personnel distribution and other matters. We will have all of them resolved and implemented by then. I will return to the Tru Kingdom first in three days. Jun and you are solely responsible for the specific situation of staying here!"


    Next to the portal, they have been standing here studying for nearly 20 minutes. Anyway, most of the things they need to know are already known, and most of the things that need to be done have been done. The only thing left is to solve the finishing work. There are almost no problems.


    The most important thing is about the distribution of supplies here. Since I have decided to be the ruler of this empty ind in advance, what I said before still needs to be implemented.


    Fortunately, there are not many people on the entire empty ind. The total number of more than 8,000 people is simply something that should not be too simple and easy for Chang Nuo.


    Spending some money can not only maintain a rtionship and make others grateful, but also allow the other party to directly help you with your work.


    Although the things on the empty ind cannot be sold to outsiders, the key is that they can be used in your own country!


    Speaking of this, Junhe stood aside and nodded without much hesitation. His Majesty the King must definitely leave the Sky Ind. As for when the space portal is sessfully established, whether it is going to the Sky Ind or special The Kingdom of Lu is just a blink of an eye, and there is no need to worry too much at all.

 Chapter 145 Material Distribution

    <h4>Chapter 145 Material Distribution</h4>


    The portal established on Sky Ind is like this now. From now on, four members of the King''s Guard will take turns to guard it every day, observing the surrounding situation day and night.


    In fact, for Sky Ind, these people don''t need to be so cautious at all. After all, outsiders cannot enter, and people on Angel Ind here will note here.


    It can be regarded as a sparsely popted ce where birds don��t poop.


    Two days have passed since the incident, and Chang Nuo is already ready to leave. Now he only needs to deal with the remaining matters. Basically, the matter on Kongdao hase to an end for the time being.


    The main hall of the shrine was already full of people at this moment. Chang Nuo sat at the top and looked at the people who had arrived, including the Angel Ind and Sandiya people, as well as a few people on his side.


    The main purpose of letting theme this time is to distribute supplies. Since the Sandians have left their original ce of residence, they have lost the basis for their survival. So what happens next? Material support must be put on the agenda.


    "I have no other intention of letting youe here today, just to arrange things for the future.


    Currently, in the backyard of this ce, various foods have been piled up, including staple meats, fruits and a series of products. Sandians can receive them ording to their actual needs, and they will not have to worry about not being able to afford food in the future. of this kind of thing.


    From now on, the Kingdom of Tru will transport arge amount of supplies here every once in a while, so you don''t have to worry about life-rted matters.


    In three months at most, the Kingdom of Tru will build amercial economy on Angel Ind or a separate ind. At that time, some daily necessities will be sold. This is also for the living arrangements of the people on our empty ind. .


    I don��t know if you have any objections to material matters? "


    Chang Nuo stood up again and looked around everyone and asked.


    "I wonder if what you said is true? Can we just collect it or do we need something else?"


    Weibo stood up quickly. This thing was what he was most concerned about. After half a month, the food of the Shandia people has long been at the bottom. If this matter is not put on the agenda, then their family will People will face the situation of having no food to eat.


    He looked particrly excited, not to mention him, and the two people who followed him were also the same. Ganfu from Angel Ind also smiled. After all, these things were the price of Chang Nuo''s promise to rule Angel Ind.


    Facing the other party''s questions, Junhe stood up and said, "I will be responsible for the issue of resource allocation from now on. If you have any questions about this, you cane to me.


    Now let me exin clearly the distribution rules this time.


    The Shandia n had already made a promise, so they could provide half a year''s food supply free of charge, which would include staple foods, meat, and fruits.


    As for Angel Ind, we will provide mainly staple foods, and we will also provide three months'' supply of fruits and meat.


    But after this period has passed, all of you will need to rely onbor to enjoy this kind of thing.


    Weibo, you, the Sandia n, will be mainly responsible for the entrance to the sky ind. Although there are very few peopleing, this kind of thing cannot bepletely guaranteed.


    In addition, your strength is too weak. In the future, you can take time to bring two people over to participate in training. This is also what His Majesty wants. "


    Junhe directly arranged the Sandian people, and they did not raise any objections. They were just guarding the gate of an empty ind. This was extremely easy for them. Everyone understood that in the They believe that many people can indeede to Qinghai, but this situation may only happen once in ten or 20 years.


    It is precisely because of this situation that the guard responsible for the gate of Sky Ind is already worthy of the Sandia n.


    "Captain Junhe, our Sandia n has no objections to this matter, and we will definitely guard the location of the Sky Ind Gate in the future, and we will never let anyone else enter from the outside!"


    Weibo said respectfully.


    "Ganfu, Junhe has already exined the mission and specific situation of the Sandia n. As for Angel Ind, we can still maintain our original life. We will not force or mind about this.


    But in the future, life on Angel Ind can be maintained by exchanging items of the same price or collecting them for work.


    You can also sort out the shellfish from the Sky Ind, including blowing shells, volley shells and other shellfish, as well as other specialties from the Sky Ind.


    We will also directly transport these things to the Tru Kingdom for sale, so you can make preparations in advance so that every Sky Inder can experience their own high-quality life. "


    Changnuo said to Ganfuer.


    "I understand, Your Majesty!"


    Ganfur said.


    "For more detailed details, you canmunicate with Junhe at any time in the future. I will not stay on the ind for too long, and he will be responsible for everything more.


    In the future, as a partner of a country, Sky Ind can enjoy independent autonomy and is not bound by the general direction of the Toru Kingdom. However, I still hope that you can understand each other better in the future. "


    Changnuo said with a smile again.


    No one else had any objections. Everyone else knew very well that the king of this kingdom would definitely not stay on the empty ind for too long. As for their actual purpose, these people no longer wanted to study it.


    The content of the meeting itself is not much, and the rest just needs to be slowly adjusted over time. Changnuo does not expect that he can perfect everything in just one month. Now he just needs to slowly Just be satisfied slowly.


    Sky Ind has its own natural barrier. As long as their original life is maintained, it will be the greatest benefit to the Tru Kingdom.


    In a ce with more than 8,000 people, as long as there are no disputes, everything will be fine.


    This meeting is probably the most satisfying one for everyone. After all, the issue of material distribution was discussed, so the first thing everyone wants to see is probably the materials they call stacked in the backyard. This is what everyone is more concerned about. s things.


    The people who are most concerned about it are probably the three people from the Sandia n. They were almost hungry before they came. It is rare that what they promised before will be realized now. Naturally, they should be better than the group of people on Angel Ind. Much more excited.

 Chapter 146 Distribution Standards

    <h4>Chapter 146 Distribution Standards</h4>


    As soon as the meeting ended, everyone could not wait, led by Junhe, to the backyard of the shrine.


    This is apletely open space with no yard at all, but the overall space is still rtivelyrge.


    But at this moment, the whole ce ispletely filled with supplies, including staple food rice and noodles, vegetables and meat, and some fruits.


    Most of the things are things that these people living on empty inds have never seen before.


    Whether it''s rice or vegetables and fruits, everything is packaged, and these are all things Changnuo purchased directly from the system space.


    In terms of daily life, these things have covered all supplies. The overall height of the pile is about ten meters, which is nearly 1,000 square meters at least. For the people on the entire empty ind, these supplies are enough to live for half a year. Long.


    "Master Junhe, are these things for us?"


    Wei Bai looked very excited at the moment, and tears were about to burst out of his eyes. For such a rough man, this scene was probably something that even he himself could not have imagined.


    These things that they had never seen before made them extremely excited.


    Not to mention those fruits and vegetables, even if it is piles of rice, people like them rarely see it.


    "These will all be yours from now on. You just need to remember one thing. These things are gifts given to you by His Majesty the King, so the peace of this empty ind in the future will be guarded by you. We only need Apayado This ce serves as the military base of the Kingdom of Tru, so you can keep it in mind for the overall safety of Kongdao in the future."


    Seeing the excitement of this group of people, Junhe looked around the crowd with a smile and said.


    "What you said is what we should do. From now on, the safety of Kongdao will be left to me. I will definitely not cause any trouble to His Majesty the King!"


    Ganfu also said with a smile.


    Now everything is developing in a good direction. After all, when these people saw this batch of supplies in front of them, their eyes were already shining.


    There are very few families who can have enough food for every meal on Sky Ind. The most important thing is that the resources on Sky Ind are not sufficient. There are no living products such as rice and noodles at all. Theypletely rely on free food. They live on the sea, but such a huge ocean makes it impossible for them to even set foot in the middle ground, let alone meet their daily needs.


    Even these priests were all drooling, and the excitement in their hearts could not be increased.


    So at this moment, they all began to express their loyalty. No one was curious about how these things came to the empty ind. What was important was that they could at least have a delicious meal.


    "Don''t be so excited. There is a lot of work to do next. Your Majesty has already ordered that all these things be distributed based on head.


    Weibo, just be responsible for your Sandia n. The distribution standards have also been determined. Each person will receive a bag of rice, a basket of fruits, a basket of vegetables and ten kilograms of meat per month for half a year at a time. dosage.


    The ones on Angel Ind are also distributed ording to equal portions, but the amount you receive is for three months. Ganfu is responsible for ensuring that everyone can get their own share. "


    Junhe started to give instructions.


    Each bag of rice here weighs 150 kilograms, and a basket of vegetables weighs about 30 kilograms, not to mention meat.


    The supplies piled here are enough for their survival, and it is even infinitely better than their previous life.


    How could this group of people refuse now? This thing has exceeded their imagination. For a family, they simply can��t use so much food in a month. It��s just that the arrangement is to let them eat well. standards.


    This is still based on the capita standard, not the family standard. For almost every family, such a standard can feed them for half a year or more for a year and a half or more.


    "Sir Junhe, as for the distribution, you can rest assured that we will definitely be fair and just and will not let anyone get more or less." Ganfu said.


    "That''s right, Lord Junhe, don''t worry, we know it well!"


    One of the Sandia n also said with a grin.


    "Now that you''ve said that, what are you still waiting for? Take it away quickly! As for the meat, vegetables and fruits, His Majesty has already said that they have abilities attached to them. As long as you don''t open the packaging, you can leave them there for as long as you want. This problem will arise.��


    Junhe said.


    Because each of these things has a weakyer of space power attached to it, just to prevent the mutation of these foods, it can be regarded as a rtively careful operation.


    "What are you still waiting for? Jun and the adults have already said it, why don''t you move back quickly!"


    Weibo looked at the two people who were still stunned and said.


    It wasn''t until this moment that they began to react, and then one person carried at least a hundred kilograms of cargo, which felt like it weighed nothing, and quickly ran towards the ce where his tribe was.


    Relying only on the three of them, we don��t know when we will move, but this is also an unavoidable choice, because not everyone cane to Apayado. If it is not for a meeting or special circumstances, They are not allowed to enter, but it is already very good to be able to allow the three of them to transport back and forth.


    There are quite a few priests, and there are more than twenty priests staying here, but if they are responsible for the supply of seven or eight thousand people on Angel Ind, it is really a bitborious andplicated for them.


    But although it is painful, it is also enjoyable.


    This can be regarded as a direct use of such a small amount of supplies to win over the hearts of the entire Sky Ind. At least in their future understanding, the Kingdom of Tru or His Majesty the King is indeed a person worthy of trust and support.


    In the future, if we use some other means to use our brains, Changnuo can even be the belief of this group of people. If this happens, it will be a very scary thing.


    In fact, the final result was exactly what they thought. After everyone received their supplies, they were so moved that they shed tears.


    At least what he did at this moment, His Majesty the King, whom they had never met, won everyone''s unanimous favor.


    However, these people in power did not embezzle anything from the middle. Everyone was distributed ording to the standards. Regardless of whether they were poor or rich, at least what they got in their hands was the same.

 Chapter 147 Leaving Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 147 Leaving Sky Ind</h4>


    The current Sky Ind is in a happy mood as a whole, and everyone has put aside their prejudices against each other. No one from the Tru Kingdom showed up this time, but it was praised by the entire Sky Ind.


    But now it is time for Chang Nuo to leave Sky Ind. It has been exactly one month since he has been on Sky Ind. It is also time to leave here and return to his own country.


    The trip to Kongdao is now over. This time he is not leaving, but the official beginning of everything.


    The Tru Kingdom can also start its own formal n. After returning to the country, Changnuo will begin to develop its own economic and military ns. At least in the next 3 to 5 years, it willplete its initial goals and understanding. .


    Outside the main hall of the shrine.


    "Brother Changnuo, do you really want to go back now? Why don''t you stay for two more days!"


    Chang Nuo has already begun to prepare to leave. Now, the entire shrine hall is already crowded with people. Ganfuer brought his group of priests, and Weibo also brought two members of his Sandia n. They saw each other off, but the only one who was crying a little was Enelu.


    The little guy''s face was full of reluctance, with tears already covering his face. He didn''t care about his image at the entrance of the courtyard. Looking at Chang Nuo who was about to leave, he asked with some reluctance.


    Anilu has now begun to flourish on the entire Sky Ind. At least in terms of treatment, it has been many times better than before. After a month on the entire Sky Ind, no one has ridiculed it anymore. In other words, he dislikes his origin.


    "Enilu, it''s not like I won''te back after I leave this time. I estimate that I will definitelye back in three months at most. By then, whether youe here or you go to the Tru Kingdom, I think you will be able toe back." There��s no big problem anymore.��


    Chang Nuo smiled and patted the other party''s shoulder and said.


    "Is what you said true?"


    Enelu asked again.


    "Of course it''s true, but I have to train hard during this period, at least to reach the standard I want to see. The world is going to be big in the future, so work hard to change yourself. I believe you can do it."


    Changnuo said seriously.


    He has also taken special care of Enelu. Although this guy is two or three years younger than him, from another aspect, this guy''s mind and understanding are indeed terrifying.


    In just one month, he haspletely touched the threshold of the knowledge and knowledge. Although he may have had this reason before, so far, the application level of this knowledge and color has surpassed Junhe.


    Although so far, there has not been much outstanding performance in other aspects, but relying on the other party''s hard work mentality, everyone believes that it won''t be long before he can be a strong person in the eyes of others.


    While everyone else was looking at Enilu, he seemed to have made some huge decision. He wiped the tears on his face and said firmly, "Don''t worry, Brother Changnuo, I will definitely be yours." The strong man in my eyes will definitely be able to help you in the future!��


    "I''m really looking forward to that day!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    "Your Majesty, if you don''t want to bring two more people back with you, just you and Abona, what if along the way..."


    "What? Do you not believe in His Majesty''s strength? Or do you not believe in my strength?"


    Before Junhe finished speaking, Abona looked at him with a dissatisfied expression and said.


    After hearing this, others also had bright smiles on their faces.


    Indeed, just as Abona said, his strength is much stronger than Junhe. This time the two of them go back. If they don''t encounter special circumstances on the Grand Route, they will definitely not encounter any opponents.


    The most important thing is that they are just returning and don''t want to get involved in any trouble.


    "Okay, there''s no need to say more. We should meet soon. Now hurry back and try to perfect everything as soon as possible. I will leave Kongdao to you. I hope that next time we meet, It can be much better than it is now.��


    Chang Nuo looked at everyone and said directly.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty. I will handle Angel Ind properly and will never distract His Majesty the King!" Ganfuor said.


    "Even at the gate of Sky Ind, we will definitely fulfill our guard duties as soon as possible!" Weibo also said.


    "It''s good that you have such a heart. Next time, when the military base on Kongdao is established andpleted, I will bring some wine to have a drink with you!" Changnuo said while looking at everyone with a smile.


    "We are waiting for His Majesty the King!"


    Ganfu said with a smile on his face, stroking his beard.


    Now he no longer has the armor attached to his body as he first saw. Instead, he is wearing more casual clothes, and it seems that he has begun topletely take over the overall mission of Angel Ind.


    But his flying horse still often follows him around.


    Everything seems to bepletely on track. In just one month, everything has achieved the results Changnuo wanted, and it went smoothly beyond everyone''s imagination.


    "Looking back, you put the video equipment in a corner of Angel Ind. When something happens in the country, you can let them know in time. I will leave it to you here for now. I hope that when I see you next time, you will be a little stronger than you are now. Stronger."


    Changnuo patted Junhe on the shoulder and said with a smile.


    The other party had a simple smile on his face, or to be precise, an embarrassed smile. Faced with these words spoken by His Majesty the King, he really didn''t know how to respond.


    "Your Majesty, it''s gettingte, let''s leave quickly!"


    Abona couldn''t stand it any longer. Looking at them who were still chatting, he asked directly.


    "Okay, everyone, take care!"


    "Your Majesty the King, walk slowly..."


    Everyone bowed and shouted together.


    When they raised their heads again, the two of them hadpletely disappeared from sight. Even though they had doubts in their hearts, no one said anything.


    For them, they have only seen His Majesty the King get angry once, and he didn''t even move his hands. He killed one of the Sandia n instantly with just a look. The strength of the other party was beyond guessing. , even Junhe, who has been following him, doesn''t know what the extent of his Majesty''s strength is.


    Let alone them, Chang Nuo himself probably doesn��t even know. He can only feel that his strength should be about the same as that of a naval admiral, but he has not studied deeper things, or has never fought such a thing at all. .

 Chapter 148 Infinity Cruise Ship

    <h4>Chapter 148 Infinity Cruise Ship</h4>


    On Changnuo''s side.


    He took Abona''s arm, and now both of them had started to fall freely in mid-air. The howling wind and white clouds quickly disappeared from both sides of their faces.


    Abona looked nervous and frightened. He looked at Changnuo in disbelief and shouted, "Can you be more reliable! If this thing falls, it will die!"


    "Haha..., what''s there to worry about?"


    Changnuoughed without taking it seriously.


    Falling directly from an altitude of 10,000 meters, if there wasnd below, the two of them might be able to survive with their abilities. However, in that vast sea, the most important thing is that there is andlubber here, so if they fall, they will almost die.


    Abona Moon is speechless and helpless. Now she is in this position. Her tension and roaring have no effect at all. Now she can only pray that there will be a good ending when she falls.


    And he still remained the same, with his arms around Li Ming. The knife was almost inseparable from him. To this extent, he was not willing to let go, even if he died, he would stay together.


    Falling from an altitude of 10,000 meters to the sea, based on the free fall time, it took them almost 50 seconds to fall. During this period, it was enough for them to think about it.


    In order not to separate, Chang Nuo was still holding Abona''s shoulders, but the other party was determined to hold on to the long knife in his hand, and did not show much.


    After smiling slightly, Changnuo instantly entered the system space and shouted directly, "System, buy a smart yacht!"


    "Answer, is the host chosen randomly?"


    "Choose randomly!"


    Chang Nuo said it directly without any concern.


    How much money can a yacht cost him? For the more than one trillion beli in the current ount bnce, these things are just a drop in the bucket.


    By the time they could see the seaside, Abona was beginning to feel a little nervous. Fortunately, the vast expanse below was all the sea, with no inds at all possible, and they still stayed at such a high altitude to look at it. , so when you reallynd on the sea, you still don��t know where you will be?


    "Your Majesty the King, it seems that the two of us can only hope for happiness!"


    Abona said with an embarrassed smile.


    The howling wind from both sides was still blowing in the ears of the two of them, and even the hair had begun to stand up, especially Abona, whose hair had reached his shoulders. At this moment, his whole person had no image at all. Word.


    It wasn''t until we were still two to three hundred meters away from the sea at most that we saw a silver-white cruise ship on the vast sea.


    The thingsing out of the system space just look a little different, and they''re still directly below them.


    After seeing the specific crash site, Changnuo immediately pulled Abona and disappeared in an instant. When he reappeared, he hadnded firmly on the cruise ship.


    The other party was still in shock. He had already sensed that there were no ships at all under the sea, but when he got closer, there was actually a ship under his feet, and it still looked like this.


    Not to mention that he had never seen a ship like this before, even Chang Nuo himself was quite surprised.


    But the good thing is that now that we have a ce to stay, all that''s left is to start heading back to our own country.


    After arriving on the ship, Chang Nuo couldn''t wait to observe the appearance of the entire ship.


    The overall length of this ship is about 120m, and the width is at least about 20m. Not to mention in the world of pirates, even in his previous life, this thing is still a giant. .


    At the top of the cruise ship is a luxurious swimming pool. The position where theynded just now is at the edge of this swimming pool.


    And the level of luxury inside is simply beyond everyone''s imagination.


    After seeing that all the sofas and seats were made of leather, Changnuo was already a little skeptical about how much this thing was worth. Is it possible to get the best one by himself if the system said it was random?


    But when he entered the system space to check, this thing was actually worth more than 30 billion beli. But now that things have reached this level, it ispletely useless to worry about these amounts.


    From the beginning of recharging to now, he has directly wasted nearly 100 billion beli. Of course, this cannot be said to be a waste, but at such a consumption rate, the Tianlong people may not be able to keep up!


    "Your Majesty, what is this?"


    Abner''s face was full of curiosity and shock. The ship he saw before him waspletely like being in heaven. It was so different from the ship in his impression.


    "I didn''t see the g of the Tru Kingdom on it. This thing belongs to us."


    Chang Nuo said disdainfully.


    He can only use these words to cover up the embarrassment in his heart. Let alone the Toru Kingdom, even with the technology in this world, it is not possible to create this thing.


    "Wee the owner to your private cruise ship. As a first-levelnding party, you have the right to name this cruise ship!"


    When he first entered the interior space of the cruise ship, sounds began to be heard from the cruise ship. What surprised Changnuo was that the system sound used by this thing was actually a Chinese system. Abona next to him looked confused. , I didn��t hear clearly what was said above at all.


    But for Changnuo, thisnguage already has an inexplicable sense of familiarity and intimacy as soon as ites out.


    "From now on, your name will be Wuwu!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    "The system has been entered, and the Infinity cruise ship is ready tounch. The first series ofnder are also requested to go to the core of the cruise ship to confirm their identity!"


    The sound of the cruise ship appeared again. The key is that they don''t know what the core of this ship is now. They can only start to find it slowly, but ording to normal understanding, this thing should generally be Position at the bow of the ship.


    However, Abona didn''t understand what this meant at all. He even looked unfamiliar with these words. He was even more curious that his own king could know such words.


    He didn''t want to separate, so he could only follow Chang Nuo in confusion, wanting to know what this thing was?

 Chapter 149 Super Technology Battleship

    <h4>Chapter 149 Super Technology Battleship</h4>


    The entire ship is now parked quietly on the sea. Fortunately, the sea is calm at this moment, and nothing special happens.


    Following the mechanical prompts on the ship, Chang Nuo began to walk directly along the middle passage towards the front of the ship.


    Everything inside is mechanically built, and the entire ship is now in its initial state, so no matter where Chang Nuo goes, the door next to it will automatically sense its arrival and open.


    Along this long walkway, when you reach the front of the ship, as thest door opens, you will see the state of ultra-modern science.


    This is the frontmost position of the entire ship, and it is also the core of the ship.


    There are no extra buttons on this ship, everything is disyed in the form of holographic projection.


    Especially on the rudder at the front, there is a blue light ball with a diameter of about 50 centimeters. It is suspended above the rudder and rotating quietly, but the speed of rotation is not particrly fast.


    All text disyed on the surrounding hull is reced by Chinese characters, full of high-tech feel. For Changnuo, this thing is simply a dreamlike existence.


    But just after he entered, the prompt sounded again, saying, "First sequencer, please ce your right hand on the rudder suspension instrument to log in with your palm print."


    Following the prompts, Chang Nuo looked at the blue ball of light suspended on the rudder, and without any hesitation, he directly ced his right hand on the blue ball of light.


    As soon as the palm was ced, the originally blue ball of light began to slowly change from light red to deep red from its original appearance.


    Until the system prompts "The first sequence of login is sessful, Infinity is at your service. Do you want to choose holographic character projection?"


    "yes����"


    Changnuo said standardly.


    When the voice just fell, at the bow of the ship, next to him, a holographic projection figure slowly condensed from the feet to a slightly glowing blue figure.


    The image of a woman appeared on the holographic projection, and she seemed to be about 20 years old. The overall dress was very strict, and it made people feel very professional.


    "Hello, firstnding sequencer, I am the Infinity System. From now on, I will serve you. No matter where I am on the ship, you just need to open your mouth!"


    The projected beauty has no entity, but in terms ofnguage, movement, and expression, she is almost the same as the real person.


    "From now on, you''d better call me His Majesty the King. There''s no need to call me the first series ofnder." Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King! Do you need to change my initial title?"


    The Endless System said again.


    "Then let''s call Hai Ling. Now let''s set off to the Kingdom of Tru. During the process, we will introduce the functions of this ship!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Sorry, the Infinity is currently unable to sail in any direction. His Majesty the King, please enter this world map!"


    Hai Ling System said.


    "map?"


    After hearing this, Chang Nuo was stunned for a moment, not understanding anything at all.


    He didn''t expect that the system didn''t match these things for him, but gave him a boat simr to Xiaobai, so he couldn''t start sailing at all.


    In desperation, Changnuo once again entered his system space, and then confirmed that he had purchased an overall map of the pirate world, which was also an electronic version of the information. This map alone had already cost him nearly One hundred million Baileys.


    If you say you don''t feel bad, you''d be lying. The key is that this thing is worth 100 million, which is really an exaggeration.


    After getting the map, what appeared in Chang Nuo''s hand was something simr to a memory card. The key thing was that he hadn''t seen much of this thing before a space automatically popped up on the ship, which happened to match the storage card. The contents of the card.


    Without even having time to look at him again, Chang Nuo reached out and put the memory card in.


    After the mechanical sound in front stopped, the red ball of light that was originally suspended on the rudder began to slowly change its form, and suddenly the sphere equivalent to the entire pirate world was disyed on it.


    Their current location shows a ce emitting red dots of light. With this gadget, at least wherever they want to go, they can reach it just by saying a word.


    "This world map has been entered. His Majesty the King can assign the Infinity at any time to reach wherever you want to go."


    Hai Ling stood nearby and said.


    "Go to the Kingdom of Tru!" Changnuo said.


    "Received, nning the route!"


    After Hai Ling finished speaking, the spherical object on the rudder began to rotate, and slowly extended from the light point where they were now to the location of the Tru Kingdom.


    After seeing this scene, Chang Nuo suddenly had an idea, that is, if hemanded the ship to go to Ravdru, wouldn''t it be the ce that all pirates dream of, and he could reach it without needing anything at all?


    But that thing is at the core of the new world, and now he won''t go looking for this kind of excitement.


    "Your Majesty the King, the route nning has beenpleted. Do you want to sail?"


    Hai Ling said.


    "Set off!"


    Changnuo said.


    He only focused on himselfing in, and didn''t even notice Abona who had been following him. At this moment, he waspletely locked out. Not to mention entering the core ce, he couldn''t even enter every door. He could only wait obediently on the periphery, hugging his knife and looking at the sea in the distance.


    After all themands werepleted, the Infinity finally started to slowly start. For such a big guy, the speed from 0 to 100 took much longer than expected.


    But no matter what, this thing is definitely many times faster than those ships driven by sails.


    "The Endless has started sailing. The current speed is 15 knots. It is expected to reach 60 knots in three minutes. The whole journey is expected to take five days and eight hours to reach the location of the Kingdom of Tru."


    Hai Ling began to say.


    "Then let''s introduce the functions of this ship?" Chang Nuo said.


    "The Infinity cruise ship is 124.6 meters long. It is powered by conventional micro-nuclear power. It is five-axis linkage power and can amodate 500 people at the same time.


    The entire ship adopts the most advanced intelligent system, has independent attack capabilities, has absolute defense, and can move forward invisibly..."

 Chapter 150 All-round strength improvement

    <h4>Chapter 150 All-round strength improvement</h4>


    Changnuo stood there with his hands behind his back, quietly listening to Hai Ling introduce to him the capabilities of the cruise ship that he spent tens of billions of dors to buy.


    She basically introduced it in detail, including specifications and so on. Chang Nuo didn''t know much about most of the things, but she could tell that it was very high-level.


    As for whether it can attack independently, it doesn''t matter. The key is that this thing can also move forward invisibly, which is more awesome.


    A nuclear-powered cruise ship is indeed quite nice.


    After listening, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said, "I understand."


    But in these words, he also noticed a key issue. From here to the Tru Kingdom, you can actually pass through the windless zone directly, and there is no need to start from the upside down mountain. So in terms of time, it is only It takes a little more than five days to get there.


    But what made him feel even more miserable was that this ship did not provide food supplies, and he had to do everything by himself.


    But with so many functions already avable in the early stage, why bother to demand too much perfection? After thinking about it, he felt relieved.


    Currently, the entire ship is moving forward rapidly. It is automatically changing directions and can automatically detect the situation ahead.


    Compared with those ships that sail forward, there is almost no bumps on this ship, and there is almost no feeling of shaking.


    It may only be possible to feel the shaking experience except in the case of strong winds and waves, but at least in the current state of rapid advancement, there is not much difference between walking in the cabin and walking onnd.


    Or maybe they have already begun to slowly adapt to life at sea.


    There are many rooms on the entire ship, almost fifty or so. The hull is built on three floors. Whether it is the upper deck or the lower cabin, the design of every part is very in ce and exquisite.


    Ignoring these things, Chang Nuo walked out of the core control room, and then came to the outer deck. Looking at Abona who was blowing the sea breeze, he also walked to sit next to him.


    "What are you thinking about?"


    Changnuo looked at Abona who was in a daze and said.


    "Why, it''s just that suddenly, it seems that I can''t find the direction!" Abona said calmly.


    "Why can''t you find your direction? It''s just that you haven''t set a goal for yourself. For example, bing the best swordsman in the world, or fulfilling other ideals in life, is this okay?"


    "I have no interest in bing the best in the world. It''s just a false name. Why should I care about these things!" Abona said.


    "If you have to find a reason, then don''t let down the knife in your hand!" Chang Nuo patted his shoulder and then stood up and walked to the edge.


    The water around them is moving very fast, and the speed of the ship is indeed the same as expected. It is many times more powerful than those sailing ships.


    Abona was still sitting there thinking about what Chang Nuo said. The knife he had been holding in his arms was also spread out on hisp at this time. He quietly looked at the knife Chang Nuo gave to him. Dawn, the supreme sharp sword, seemed to have regained a trace of emotion in his originally indifferent eyes.


    At night.


    Chang Nuo was alone in arge room. When he was lying on the bed, he leaned on the bedside and his thoughts had already entered the system space.


    In the past two days, he has not had time to check what the big gift package was after he became a member. Now that he has a rare leisure time, he just wants to see what impact this thing can have on him.


    In the system space, a red gift package exclusive to members was quietly ced there. Changnuo didn''t know what good things could be obtained at all, but considering that he had invested trillions, it wouldn''t be too bad.


    "Open the membership gift package..."


    Chang Nuo stood there and shouted directly.


    As the voice fell, the red box slowly began to open. When the box was opened, the whole thing disappeared instantly, and then the big blue screen directly disyed "Congrattions to the host for receiving a membership gift package. The content of the gift package - spiritual power level Add 3, the overlord color''s domineering energy will be improved by one level, the armed color''s domineering energy will be improved by one level, the knowledge color''s domineering energy will be improved by one level, and all other abilities will be improved by one level..."


    Seeing this, Chang Nuo couldn''t help but breathed heavily several times, and his heartbeat had elerated rapidly. The ability of this thing wasparable to his own state of cultivation for ten years.


    Just such an improvement has already made his strengthpletely leap forward. Now he can''t believe what he is seeing.


    In the 11 years since he got the system, except when he first got it, which made him so excited, the other time was now.


    It can be described as thrilling. He really can''t imagine what level he will reach after all his abilities are upgraded to a higher level.


    "Can the host integrate the abilities given by the system?"


    "Fusion!"


    How could Chang Nuo refuse at this moment? He immediately shouted without any hesitation.


    Now he can''t wait to feel the current situation.


    There was no feeling at all during the fusion process, as if these things did not exist at all, but after he exited the system space, he began to carefully look at his current abilities.


    All of this is still like a dream, everything seems to have feelings but also seems not to have any feelings.


    But after the mental power was integrated, Chang Nuo could clearly feel that his hearing and vision had been enhanced many times.


    He stood up from the bed and looked at himself now. The first thing to study should be the improved domineering energy.


    With a thought in his mind, the armed domineering energy spread from his fingers to his entire body in an instant, which was obviously apletely different concept from before.


    The current armed domineering color directly covers the clothes from ck, which means that in ordinary battles, if the opponent is not strong, even the corners of his clothes will be difficult to shake.


    Chang Nuo stretched out his hand and clenched his fist, feeling the domineering influence at this moment. He even felt like he was invincible in the world.


    The whole body is full of inexhaustible strength. The strength of the body has been many times stronger than the original physique after the previous integration of the immortal body. Coupled with the fusion of armed color and domineering at this moment, this feeling has be even more powerful.

 Chapter 151 The Naval Fleet in the Windless Belt

    <h4>Chapter 151 The Naval Fleet in the Windless Belt</h4>


    The armed domineering aura rose, and a fierce aura lingered directly in the room, which was even more obvious in this closed room.


    "Your Majesty the King, the ability you are using is about to exceed the load that the ship''s room can bear. I hope you can regain your momentum!"


    Just when Chang Nuo was still feeling his own power, Hai Ling suddenly appeared in his room at this moment, and then said to Chang Nuo respectfully.


    "ah?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly questioned. He was not surprised at the projection that suddenly appeared in his room. He was only confused that he had caused such a situation just by condensing his armed domineering energy. He couldn''t understand it at all.


    "His Majesty the King, I have told you before that the exterior of the Infinity can withstand huge impacts, but the interior is very fragile. I also hope that you will not use your abilities at will in the cabin during the next journey!"


    Hai Ling spoke again, with the same tactful and respectful tone.


    "ok, I get it!"


    Chang Nuo said helplessly but with a smile.


    He is very nervous about this newly acquired cruise ship, and he doesn''t want this guy to have any problems at all.


    Anyway, there will be many ces to learn about your own strength in the future, and there is really no need to rush to show yourself at this moment.


    After he finished speaking, the sea spirit projected by the system on the cruise ship disappeared in the next second.


    The ship was still sailing, and Chang Nuo, who was bored in the room, could only lie on the bed and sleep.


    For a ship that can sail like this, there is no need to worry about encountering any danger at all. When it encounters danger, it will automatically turn invisible to avoid any possible dangerous behavior.


    The invisibility of this ship is very simple. Its appearance is all made of special technology. As long as it finds a ship sailing on the sea or other situations, it will automatically project the nearby sea water to be invisible. It is almost invisible from the outside. Any possibility arises.


    But if you use the perception of sight, hearing and color, you can still perceive the existence of this thing. It is only hidden on the technological level or the level of sight. On the perceptual level, it is stillpletely unreservedly disyed in front of everyone.


    But even in this way, he has achieved very good abilities. At least when sailing on this sea, he can reduce the danger to less than one percent, and he can bepletely invincible to all ships across the entire sea.


    A few dayster in the morning.


    Now the ship has begun to cross the windless zone, but its speed remains at its original state. No one here, even the Sea Kings, will choose to attack him.


    Invisible or not, in addition, he canpletely iste the perception of the Neptune type, and can emit a state simr to that of the Sea Tower Stone, which is quite unexpected.


    On the deck at the front, Changnuo and Abona were lying here quietly to bask in the sun, and feel the sea breeze blowing in the windless belt while sailing at a fast speed.


    "Hai Ling, how long will it take to reach the destination?"


    Chang Nuo, who was lying down, shouted directly.


    After such a long time, Abona has learned some of the functions of this ship. He is not too surprised. He is still lying on the deck chair, without even opening his eyes.


    When Chang Nuo''s voice fell, Hai Ling''s figure suddenly appeared next to him, and said with respect and a smile, "Your Majesty the King, it is estimated that it will take about ten hours to reach the Kingdom of Tru. Please wait patiently here!"


    "I didn''t expect it would take so long?"


    Chang Nuo was already speechless. After all, there was no chef on the ship, so the two of them could only cook by themselves. After eating each other for several days, they were already tired of it.


    "Your Majesty the King, this is already going very fast. If we cross directly from the Upside Down Mountain, we probably won''t be able to reach the South China Sea in less than a month and a half!"


    Abona said as hey aside with his eyes closed.


    "yes!"


    Chang Nuo said leisurely, and Hai Ling was already standing between the two of them.


    "Is there any music? Put on some music and listen!"


    Chang Nuo said boredly.


    "No problem, Your Majesty the King, but we found more than ten naval ships 10 kilometers ahead. Do you want to turn on the stealth state?"


    Hai Ling said respectfully.


    As soon as these words came out, Chang Nuo and Abona sat up instantly, and at the same time activated the Haki of Seeing and Hearing to sense the surrounding situation.


    But the final result was exactly as Hai Ling said. About 10 kilometers away from them, in the windless zone, ten naval warships were heading side by side towards the South China Sea, and the people on them seemed to There is also something extraordinary in terms of strength.


    Compared to the Infinity''s speed, these Navy warships felt like they were parked in ce.


    But they were still quite curious about their sudden appearance here.


    "Hai Ling, turn on the hidden mode and get closer to the navy warship to see what they are doing?" Chang Nuo ordered.


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    A cruise ship that was in good shape one second, and the next moment a pure white light shield began to rise from the bow of the ship, and then all the surrounding sea water was cast on it. If it is in a still state, No one could spot the ship at all.


    Apart from the waves caused by the propeller behind the cruise ship, it ispletely impossible to see the specific state of the cruise ship.


    The distance of 10 kilometers is not particrly far for them. The Infinity also deliberately moved closer to the ten naval warships, but it did not get particrly close.


    Through the protective cover, Changnuo and Abona could clearly see what the ten naval warships looked like now.


    Everyone on their boat was chattingzily, and so many people didn''t have the slightest sense of crisis.


    However, ording to the specifications on naval warships, there are about 500 people on each ship, so these ten naval warships have almost the specifications of 5,000 people, which ispletely the standard of the Demon ying Order.


    So many naval warships suddenly appeared in this windless zone, and they almost reached the South China Sea after passing through this windless zone, so their purpose of staying here has yet to be confirmed.


    "Hai Ling, slow down and sail!"


    Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty the King, with so many navy warships staying here, there must be something happening that we can''t imagine?"


    Abona said directly.


    "Based on your experience, what do you think will happen?" Chang Nuo said.


    No matter what the situation is now, the ten naval warships in front of us are still very obvious.

 Chapter 152 Return

    <h4>Chapter 152 Return</h4>


    The two people stood on the edge of the deck, quietly watching the ten slowly moving naval warships. The distance between them was about 300 meters, and they werepletely within the range of other people''s cannonballs.


    But at such a long distance, no one can see the existence of the Infinity as long as they don''t use the perception of sight, hearing and color.


    "Abona, what do you think this group of people are going to do in the South China Sea? It seems it''s not as simple as we thought?"


    Chang Nuo pressed his hands on the railing, looked at the dozen or so warships with a solemn expression, and spoke in a low voice to Abona next to him.


    "Although I don''t know much about the South China Sea, with these navies dispatching on such a scale, something big must have happened!" Abona said.


    Indeed, the navy dispatched such arge-scale operation, which was simr to the level of the Demon-ying Order, and it headed straight for the South China Sea.


    Although there are many countries in the South China Sea that you can visit, this situation is worth considering.


    "Hai Ling, avoid them, let''s set off!"


    After watching for a while, Chang Nuo felt that there was no need to study further. Looking at the direction of this group of people, they must be heading to the South China Sea, but the specific situation can only be determined at that time.


    "Your Majesty, do you want your subordinates to go to their ship to inquire about it?" Abona asked.


    "Do you think this is necessary? Why should you care about such insignificant things?"


    Chang Nuo said directly with a smile. He didn''t pay attention to those people at all, and there was no possibility of even treating them as the same thing.


    This is not because he is arrogant now, but because he has this strength, he canpletely ignore other people''s actions.


    The Endless caused a ssh of water when it left. Immediately there were two people on the navy warship. They began to look in this direction. They didn''t know what they were looking at, but looking at the undting water ssh, several of them frowned. He also wrinkled tightly.


    In this windless zone,pared with the speed of the Infinity, those naval warships were just like an adult walking with an ant following behind.


    In a short time, the naval warship had disappeared from the Infinity''s sight, and they were heading straight towards the Kingdom of Tru.


    Anyway, they don��t know the countries those navy warships are going to. When the current pirate situation is so severe, the navy would actually send such arge number of personnel to a barren South China Sea area. This is what makes thempare. Unexpected ce.


    They didn''t stay in the windless zone for long, and soon they appeared directly on the rough South China Sea, where there were still familiar smells and familiar scenery.


    Compared with the windless zone just now, the wind and waves here are obviously much higher, butpared with the Grand Route, this is already rtively calm.


    Although the wave height is almost 1 meter, for the two people staying in the Endless, the wind outside does not affect thefort inside at all.


    "Your Majesty the King, there is still one hour of sailing time from the destination of the Kingdom of Tru. Do you have any instructions at this moment?"


    As dusk approached, the sun in the sky had already hung directly on the sea. At this moment, Hai Ling appeared directly in front of the two of them and said respectfully to Chang Nuo.


    "Are you here already?"


    Chang Nuo took a deep breath and spoke slowly to himself.


    "Your Majesty the King, we expect to arrive before dark. If there is no instruction, the Endless will dock directly at Nanniwa Port!"


    Hai Ling said.


    "Then let''s do this, connect the wireless video, inform Losa, and we''ll talk about the restter!"


    Changnuo said.


    Already approaching the territory of his own country, Chang Nuo could no longer sit still on the ship. Even though it was already dark, he still chose to walk directly to the deck so that he could see his own country at a nce before dusk fell. look like.


    It has been almost three months since he left. During these three months, he almostpletely let go of the current Tru Kingdom, leaving all matters big and small to Luosta alone to handle.


    If there are no special circumstances during this trip, ording to preliminary estimates, Changnuo will not set foot outside the South China Sea for at least three years.


    Next, we will start to win steadily, and everything will start to move steadily. If we want to expand the country''s economy and strength, we just need to stabilize the South China Sea first.


    "Is this your country?"


    Changnuo was still standing on the deck, blowing the slightly cool wind, and was thinking about what to do next. Abona didn''t know when, he walked out from behind, and asked with a curious look on his face. road.


    Although it is already dark, when approaching the port, the entire Nanniwa is now brightly lit at night.


    Luosta, who had been contacted before, was now gathering people at the port to wait. The clothes everyone was wearing seemed quite formal at this moment.


    The Endless slowly approached the Nanniwa Port. It was not until it was approaching that those on the shore saw a huge ship slowly approaching the port.


    Different from human control, the Infinite System operates intelligently, which is many times more precise than human control. It is less than 1m away from the entire port shore, and it stopped steadily and headed towards the port. On the deck, at this moment, a telescopic bridge was slowly and mechanically created directly leading to the port, making it easier for the two people standing on the deck to get down.


    "Wee to the return of His Majesty the King..."


    Before anyone even started to go down, hundreds of voices sounded at the port.


    After their voices fell, Chang Nui slowly walked to the front of the deck, and then walked towards the port.


    Abona followed behind, curiously looking at everything around him step by step, including the people in front of him. To him, everything seemed so strange.


    "Greetings to His Majesty the King, Your Majesty Luosta, wee His Majesty the King back!"


    Luosta was originally at the front of the crowd. When Chang Nuo just walked down, he walked up quickly and shouted respectfully.


    With the light of the port, you can see the people standing on the port at this moment, but Chang Nuo does not look particrly happy.


    However, everyone else at the port had a smile on their face. Fortunately, nomon people were involved at this moment, otherwise we don��t know what kind of chaos it would be.

 Chapter 153 Work Report in the Palace

    <h4>Chapter 153 Work Report in the Pce</h4>


    Standing at the edge of the port, Chang Nuo looked at so many people with a smile on his lips.


    The current Nanniwa Port looks exactly the same as it did a few months ago. There is almost no difference. However, the number of ships in the port has increased significantly. This has shown that Losta, the Minister of Commerce, has achieved great results in the past few months. Very good.


    "Get up and send someone to guard the Infinity. Everyone else should go back! Follow Luosta back to the pce."


    Chang Nuo said to Luosta who was hunched over.


    "Okay, Your Majesty the King!"


    Luosta said with another gentlemanly salute.


    The pce is still the same as before. Even though it has been away for more than three months, it still maintains its original appearance without any changes.


    It was already dark, and there was no scenery at all, but the lights on both sides of the corridor in the pce still looked veryfortable.


    It is now almost 8 or 8 o''clock in the evening. Apart from everyone else, only Chang Nuo and Luosta are staying here in the pce hall.


    They sat looking at each other. The most important thing was to understand the changes in the country in the past three months.


    After the maid brought two cups of tea, as the door of the pce hall closed, the entire pce became quiet.


    "Let''s talk about what happened recently!"


    Chang Nuo picked up the teacup, took a sip of water and said to Luosta who was sitting opposite.


    "Your Majesty the King, your Majesty has sorted out all the things that have happened in the past three months, and everything is here. I will tell you the whole story first, and you can take a look at itter if you take the time. , everything from the past three months.��


    As Luosta said, he took out a portfolio directly from his hand. There was a thick pile inside, which seemed to contain everything he had done in the past three months.


    Luosta put this thing on the table between the two of them, then straightened his cor, sat up straight and said, "Since you left, all the institutional things in the country have begun to be implemented.


    The factories that were originally nned to be built in those areas of the Royal Kingdom are now all put into operation, and all roads in the country are also under construction.


    Because of the previous public meeting, all businessmen from the four sea areas have gathered in the past two months. All have begun to gather at Nanniwa Port and Trova Port.


    The country''s economy has also been growing rapidly in the past few months. At present, all our main targets are economic and people''s livelihood issues, and all officials are meticulously pursuing these things.


    So far, 86 new factories have been added in the country, and nearly 5 million domestic employees will be employed in the same batch. It is expected that by the end of the year, the number of new factories that can be added at the same time should be about 200, which can provide employment for the remaining people. Almost 10 million people.


    In addition to the economic factory types we have discussed before, it now includes upstream and downstream enterprises, and all of them have now begun to bepleted and implemented.


    In addition, the most important thing is that the contents of the fourth volume of discussions have been fully implemented, and researchers have involved 15 countries surrounding the South China Sea.


    The one with the mostplete feedback so far is Crimea, a world government member country located next door to us. We have already discovered that this country is rich in various mineral resources, and the poption of this country is not very dense. Therefore, it can be used as our first choice for the content of the fourth volume in the next step. "


    Luosta talked for a long time, and Chang Nuo just sat there. I don''t know if he listened carefully. Anyway, he just listened like this for a long time.


    After Luosta finished speaking, he sat there quietly, his eyes always fixed on His Majesty the King, and he behaved very rigorously.


    In this quiet pce, the sound of Chang Nuo drinking tea has echoes. Ever since he got the system''s membership gift package, he can hear even the rxed breathing of Luosta opposite him while sitting there. It''s clear.


    "These are all good things you said. Tell me about the problems you have encountered in the past few months?"


    Chang Nuo asked nonchntly.


    "Your Majesty, the only problem now is that domestic factories and other things are developing too fast, resulting in ack of funds!"


    Luosta lowered his head slightly and said.


    As the Minister of Commerce, he controls the economic lifeline of the entire country. It is not an exaggeration to say that he is the money bag of the entire country. But now the entire country actually talks about the problem ofck of money from his mouth. It is estimated that it would have been reced by another king. He already started to get angry.


    But Chang Nuo was not like this. He still drank tea with a disapproving look on his face and even leaned leisurely on the sofa.


    Luosta was even more embarrassed when he saw this situation. He really couldn''t understand what the teenage king sitting in front of him was thinking.


    If it is said that the other party does not understand these things, it is simply impossible. After all, it was under the guidance of His Majesty the King that he took this step and became what he is now, so the other party still maintains this state. I definitely still didn''t hear what I wanted to hear.


    Luosta swallowed a mouthful of saliva, and said again nervously, "The domestic economy is now fully recovering. The early industry is not enough to support the entire country''s economic situation. In addition, and most importantly, the people of the original Royal Kingdom. The tight provision of food and clothing has already reduced the treasury of the Kingdom of Tru a lot.


    In the past few months, the kingdom''s industrial ie has almost remained at around 25 billion beli. ording to the current n, by around March next year, the country''s monthly ie should exceed 130 billion beli! "


    Luosta said, his eyes were staring at His Majesty the King during every word he said, and he did not dare to let go of any movement or expression.


    But the more rigorous he was, the more nervous he became, wondering whether he could not figure out what his Majesty the King was thinking.


    But all this is not his illusory self-feeling. In this country, he, Luosta, can be regarded as a very human minister, and these things are what he should do.


    But in the end, everything he said still didn''t let Chang Nuo hear what he wanted to hear. Although he reported only normal work, he didn''t even say a word about topics other than normal.


    After another pause for a while, probably after being quiet for a while again, Chang Nuo finally slowly raised his head, and then slowly ced the teacup on the table.

 Chapter 154 The Minister of Commerce’s little thoughts

    <h4>Chapter 154 The Minister of Commerce��s little thoughts</h4>


    After the tea cup was ced on the table, the atmosphere in the entire hall continued to remain quiet, and Chang Nuo stared at Luosta silently.


    Aftersting for almost a minute, Luosta felt restless. He couldn''t help but stand up and stood aside respectfully, with his head lowered and his hands folded in front of him.


    "Losta, do you know why you are asked to be the Minister of Commerce?"


    Chang Nuo finally spoke. Although the words he spoke were casual, for Luosta, he couldn''t help but cross his hands tightly. Thinking back to what he had done in the past few months, it seemed that there was nothing wrong with it. ce?


    "The reason why I became the Minister of Commerce depends entirely on His Majesty''s trust!"


    Luosta thought for a while and could only say this.


    "You are right, you do need my trust. In your position, you can already be regarded as the one who knows the most things and has the biggest tasks in the entire Kingdom of Tru.


    But how have you been doing it for the past three months? "


    Chang Nuo asked in an increasingly cold voice.


    "Please give your Majesty''s instructions!"


    Luosta said respectfully again.


    "It really doesn''t matter how much money a country can earn from industrialization at the moment! As long as it can maintain the basic life of the people, you may do some things quite well, but in other aspects, you may not be doing as well as you imagined. ?


    All the princes and ministers in the kingdom smell of alcohol, including you. Is this what you should do at a time like this?


    And about the fourth volume, how did I arrange it before? It is not allowed to be used unless there are special circumstances, but how do you do it?


    In the past three months, you have never reported to me any major or minor events that urred in the Kingdom of Tru. Is it possible that this country is so peaceful?


    If Ie back in a few months, tell me what the Kingdom of Toru will look like? "


    Changnuo said leisurely, his voice began to be calm again, but the me in his words was particrly obvious.


    It can already be seen from Luosta''s expression.


    He was already very nervous at this moment, his hands were holding each other tightly, and beads of sweat were slowly starting to flow from his forehead.


    Standing on the spot, Luosta swallowed a mouthful of saliva and suppressed the nervousness in his heart and said, "Your Majesty, I just don''t want to disturb His Majesty when he goes to the World Government. Furthermore, there is nothing special happening in the Tru Kingdom. As for the fourth volume, it''s just Your Majesty feels that the time hase, and this is indeed your fault. Please forgive me!"


    Chang Nuo looked at the other party quietly. He didn''t mind that the other party had some small thoughts. No one could be perfect, and he knew this very well.


    Luosta is definitely a talent, and he is a very smart talent. What the Kingdom of Tru needs most now is such a person. As long as he can control everything in his own hands, he can go wherever he wants in a fixed space. Chang Nuo can be indifferent even if it beats.


    Just like this kind of thing now, Chang Nuo doesn''t mind what the other party hides, let alone the other party''s little thoughts.


    "Putting things together regarding business nning and deployment, we will leave for basta in half a month. You can stay there then!"


    Changnuo said leisurely, then leaned directly on the sofa and put his feet on the coffee table in front of him.


    Upon hearing this, Lossta became nervous again. He didn''t know what happened, so he quickly knelt down on one knee and said, "Your Majesty, I shouldn''t be so petty. I am originally from the Crimean country." , but this country allowed all my parents to die there, and this is why Your Majesty will use the fourth volume n. Please forgive me!"


    "Do you think I care about these things? It''s just for the country of Crimea. It''s not a big deal. It will always be faced in the future anyway.


    I don��t care if you have some little thoughts wrapped up in your job scope, but there are some things I hope you can understand. There are some things I can give you that you can do, and don��t even think about the things I don��t give you!


    It''s okay to want revenge, no problem, but the prerequisite is that you can do everything meticulously. So do you think you have achieved such meticulousness?


    you have not!


    Furthermore, I��m not asking you to go to basta just to have fun there. Arrange all the business ns, familiarize yourself with all the things we have alreadymunicated in the early stage, and then you can take over in basta. , to open up the great sea route market, I hope you won��t let me down again! "


    Chang Nuo leaned on the sofa and turned his head to look at Luosta who was kneeling on the ground and said without any expression on his face.


    Although he didn''t me him too much this time, the attitude in his words was obvious enough. Losta was a very smart person, otherwise he wouldn''t have been allowed to sit in this position.


    If the other party doesn''t know how to restrain himself this time, then he won''t need to continue to participate in many things in the future!


    Although there are not many smart people, if you screen them, there will always be some.


    Luosta knew very well that his Majesty the King was just giving him a warning this time. Those little thoughts before had been clearly seen by others, and no matter how much exnation he gave now, it would probably have no effect.


    "Thank you for your understanding, Your Majesty. I will never make such a mistake again in the future!"


    Losta said.


    "Making mistakes is not terrible. The terrible thing is not being repentant. Being able to reach this position means that I trust you. You can do many things freely, but the premise is that you can keep everything clean. I think you should understand this if.


    Get up, sit there and have a nice chat about basta! "


    Changnuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Luosta suddenly felt relieved, and at the same time, the eyes he looked at His Majesty the King were filled with admiration.


    He didn''t expect that he could have his Majesty the King say such things after doing something like this.


    For many people, he has risen from being an unknown person to bing the chief minister of a country. This is almost a dream-like existence for many people, but it actually happened to him.


    Luosta stood up from the ground, and then continued to sit where he had just been sitting. The two were facing each other. Although Chang Nuo acted veryzy, at this time Luosta already felt that he looked pretty good.


    Chang Nuo is very clear about today''s country. If you want to control these people, you naturally need to give them a sweet date with a hammer. You can''t kill them all. People with small thoughts are not scary, so just let him go. He can start from scratch all by himself. Everything is done step by step, so for the king of a country, he still has a hammer to use?

 Chapter 155 Things from the Tianlong people’s treasure house

    <h4>Chapter 155 Things from the Tianlong people��s treasure house</h4>


    Even though Luosta had sat down now, his hands were still folded together, and his whole person looked very urgent and panicked.


    "Don''t be so nervous. What happened before is in the past. I don''t want to pursue it, but before you leave, you must not leave a mess in our Kingdom of Tru. Since you have the heart to do such a thing, then You have to find a way to settle this matter for me!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Luosta nodded and said.


    "Now let''s talk about other things. I have alreadymunicated with King Cobra of the Kingdom of basta. Next, you can formte a more suitable n. basta is mostly a desert country, and theirnd area isrger than ours now. The Kingdom of Toru is muchrger, but there are not as many people as our Kingdom of Toru.


    The only main purpose of choosing to cooperate with them is that the forces behind basta canpletely be a windshield for us on the great route. The next thing you have to do is to formte a business n based on the number of people in their country.


    I also made a draft before I came back. You can just pick it up from the Port Endless tomorrow.


    There are some general contents that have been nned, but more detailed things need to be brought over by you to discuss in detail.


    This time, no matter what the circumstances, we must find a way to capture 80% of the ports in basta, and establish amercial port that can be exclusively used by our Kingdom of Tru.


    As for the specific content, you will bring people over to understand it in detail and then make a specific n. And this time will not be given to you for too long. What you can do is to make the country of basta within two years. Start our business n. "


    Changnuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty, but is it possible that the area we will target then will only be limited to the first half of the Grand Route?"


    Luosta asked doubtfully.


    For this group of people, they already know the structure of the entire pirate world very well, especially Luosta. As the Minister of Commerce of the Kingdom of Toru, he must know these things well. After all, everything in the future must be nned within the scope of business, so These are what he must do.


    Changnuo was indeed quite satisfied with being able to talk about such a topic, but he still said, "You decide these things yourself and do what you want to do. Whether it is in the first half or the second half of the Grand Line, you own it." Do this as your core task, and someone will help you solve the rest!"


    The meaning of this saying is already obvious, that is, do what you should do, and you don''t need to think about other things, or even worry about them.


    Luosta smiled slightly and looked a little embarrassed, but he didn''t say anything else at this time.


    Chang Nuo retracted his legs from the coffee table, then sat upright and said again, "You don''t have to worry about future expenses. The other thing is to quickly find someone who can take over your stay in the Tru Kingdom within this half month." Regarding the matter, if you go to the pce treasury after tomorrow afternoon, I will probably give you a surprise."


    "Okay, Your Majesty, I will make sure toplete the handover within half a month, and I will definitelyplete the tasks you assigned!"


    Luosta pushed up the frame of his sses and said.


    "Then let me wait and see. It''s gettingte. Go back early. Before you leave, you must give me a practical n!" Chang Nuo said.


    After saying that, Chang Nuo ignored this guy and turned around and walked out of the pce hall, then walked in the direction of where he lived.


    Luosta was still standing alone. He couldn''t figure out why this happened. He could only sigh and do what His Majesty the King arranged.


    He didn''t resent anyone about this, but instead felt rxed.


    Thinking of the bad things in Crimea, Luosta smiled slightly, maybe he had guessed something!


    ������������


    Early the next morning.


    Life here is still the same as usual. Changnuo got up early and started holding a meeting, which was simr to the ancient court meeting.


    After all, he has been away for several months, and one cannot just listen to what Losa says. A country needs to be involved in all aspects.


    The Kingdom of Tru and the Kingdom of Roja have just merged less than a year ago, and there are still many things hidden in it. Although there are not too many major problems, it is already enough of a headache for them.


    All regions have implemented the same system, but with so many people, there will always be ups and downs, and it is impossible to cover every aspect of everything.


    After the meeting, Chang Nuo came to the pce treasure house alone. It was simr to a room filled with shelves. The key was that the entire warehouse was empty, and Mao couldn''t see anyone.


    But fortunately, the space in the warehouse is stillrge enough. Ever since he obtained the assets of the Celestial Dragons from Mariejoia, Chang Nuo has never once seen what is in there, but after thinking about it, he can tell that it must be all Some valuable goods.


    Now that they have returned to their own country, Chang Nuo naturally does not need to hide anything in this warehouse!


    He directly emitted a blue light, covering the entire room, and then the originally empty warehouse was filled with gold and silver treasures at this moment.


    Because there are so many things, the whole warehouse looks a lot fuller instantly, but we still don��t know how much these things are worth?


    But there are also many good things among them. The boxes that Bokuroy put in his room, although he doesn''t know what they are, after all, it was dark when he took them away. Didn''t see clearly at all.


    But now when I put it in front of me, I can see it very clearly. Each box has exquisite carvings on it, and the size of the box makes it look like the things ced there must be valuable.


    After all, there were enough boxes. Chang Nuo picked up a red wooden box and turned on the switch. When he opened it, he saw what was inside.


    "I didn''t expect it to be a devil fruit!"


    Chang Nuo said to himself with a slight smile on his lips.


    Although I had already guessed it, I didn''t expect that the box actually contained Devil Fruits. The key was that there were quite a few of them. At a nce, there were more than twenty.


    But we can only go back and study the specific functions of Devil Fruits slowly.

 Chapter 156 Eliminating Devil Fruit Side Effects

    <h4>Chapter 156 Eliminating Devil Fruit Side Effects</h4>


    In the entire warehouse, there are more than twenty small boxy boxes like this scattered on the ground. The number can be said to be veryrge, but to the Tianlong people, these things are just ythings.


    Not many of them are so stupid as to eat these devil fruits. If they want to be so strong, it will have no effect at all. Anyway, they don''t have to worry about being harmed.


    Now that we have stood at the top of this world, these Devil Fruits are already dispensable, and you can''t swim after eating them. This ispletely worth the loss for this group of people who were born at the top.


    So these Devil Fruits ced in front of you, since they can appear in Bokuroy''s room, it shouldn''t be a very simple thing.


    He just picked up a box, which contained devil fruits. Changnuo put him on the ground and picked up another one. As expected, there was still the same thing inside.


    As for the gold and silver jewelry scattered on the ground, he didn''t care at all about how much they were worth.


    But the number of these Devil Fruits can indeed greatly increase the current domestic strength.


    Changnuo looked at the boxes pretending to be devil fruits scattered on the ground, and casually put them directly into his space ability. He had to make the best use of everything.


    Moreover, he still has a devil fruit in his hand that gives him the most headaches. It is a psychic devil fruit that he obtained from CP2 before. Great impact.


    If it weren''t for the fact that he couldn''t eat the second devil fruit, Changnuo would have really been able to eat it directly.


    "Use the second Devil Fruit?"


    Chang Nuo looked at the gold and silver jewelry there, and something suddenly came to his mind!


    Then he smiled and disappeared into the king''s treasure house in an instant.


    When Chang Nuo appeared again the next moment, Chang Nuo had already returned to his room. There was still a maid standing guard outside. It might as well be said that this maid was here to provide services.


    In the room, Chang Nuo directly opened the door and said to the little girl at the door, "Gogoya should havee back, right? Then she wille see me tomorrow morning!"


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King!"


    After hearing what the other party said, Chang Nuo closed the door of the room andy directly on the bed. Immerse yourself in the system space.


    At present, he is looking miserable. As of now, he does not have any teacher to guide him. The only thing he can rely on is his own system space. Although no matter what he does, he needs to spend money, but he can''t stand it now because he has so much money. ah!


    "System, tell me how to eat the second Devil Fruit?"


    Chang Nuo asked categorically, as if this system was already omnipotent.


    He had to think so, after all, the things created by this system had refreshed his outlook on things, and it was understandable that something like this suddenly happened now.


    The entire big blue screen in the system space is constantly rotating, as if thework is disconnected.


    It wasn''t until after waiting for a while that therge screen in the system space began to disy a text "500 billion Baileys, eliminate the side effects of the former Devil Fruit, and you can continue to eat the next Devil Fruit!"


    After a brief text, Chang Nuo was speechless and even vomited blood.


    He had just received more than one trillion beli, and now he had lost most of it for no reason. Just because of the answer to such a question, he had already started to make trouble with his mouth open.


    But he was really curious. There didn''t seem to be anything wrong with him paying 500 billion Baileys to eliminate the side effects of Devil Fruit. After all, it was worth the effort to improve his strength.


    Now the Kingdom of Tru is not as short of money as imagined. The gold and silver jewelry in the king''s treasury can be worth at least more than 100 billion beli. Solving the immediate urgent need is definitely not a big problem.


    The most important thing is that ording to the current situation, the Tru Kingdom will only have a window period of two or three months at most. The financial resources will naturally roll inter, so there is no need to worry too much at all.


    Chang Nuo hesitated in the system space for a long time. He didn''t know whether he should pay such a high price. 500 billion Baileys could even support him to be the top figure in the world.


    Although space devil fruits are apparently invincible, there are still certain ws for those who are rtively powerful.


    Among the four emperors, Whitebeard''s real fruit can easily break the space barrier, so the space-based Devil Fruit ability is not as invincible as imagined.


    After struggling for a while, Changnuo seemed to have made up his mind. He took a deep breath and shouted on the big screen of the system, "Deduct 500 billion Baileys and eliminate the side effects of the Space Devil Fruit!"


    In fact, after this side effect is eliminated, it is nothing more than being able to use the second Devil Fruit, but the side effects caused by the second Devil Fruit cannot touch sea water.


    But this is enough. Maybe when I have more money in the future, I can really remove all the side effects of Devil Fruit again.


    But how often can this happen?


    The entire pirate worldbined is probably not enough to eliminate the side effects of devil fruit abilities several times.


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, the system bnce disyed on the screen suddenly changed to only more than 500 billion beli left, but this waspletely enough for him at present.


    But after eliminating the side effects of the Devil Fruit in the system space, Changnuo felt almost nothing.


    After all, the side effects of the Devil Fruit can only be manifested when ites into contact with sea water, and it has no effect on itself under normal circumstances.


    But now that things havee to this point, Changnuo must immediately want to try to see if his Devil Fruit side effects are really lifted.


    Until it got dark and it was almost midnight, Chang Nuo kept a lot of energy. With a wave of his hand, a space vortex appeared in front of him. When he jumped in, he appeared on the beach in the next second. .


    In this dark night, the sea water hit his face with slight wind and waves, and Chang Nuo tentatively touched the edge of the sea water.


    He only dares to go to this extent now, for fear that if he waits for a while and the side effects are not relieved, he will fall into the dark sea water and drown, which will be more gain than loss.

 Chapter 157 The second devil fruit eaten

    <h4>Chapter 157 The second devil fruit eaten</h4>


    He tentatively went to touch it, and his body was still squatting on a huge stone.


    He hadn''t touched the sea water for who knows how long, and he felt the cool feelinging from his fingertips. The next second, he couldn''t help butugh.


    Sitting on the big rock, Chang Nuo was speechless with the excitement in his heart. He took a deep breath and then slowly exhaled it.


    With a smile on his face, Chang Nuo slowlyy on the big rock and looked at the stars in the sky.


    At this moment, he already felt extremely rxed and at ease. Without the side effects of the Devil Fruit, everything seemed so beautiful.


    During most of the night, hey quietly on the rocks by the sea, feeling the sea breeze and looking at the stars above his head. Everything seemed particrlyfortable.


    But he spent such a high price not just for the enjoyment of this moment. After enjoying it, he still had to face the reality that woulde next.


    As daybreak approached, Chang Nuo quietly returned to his room. What he now had to face was not only the affairs of a country, but also ns for the future.


    Now that the entire country has begun to get on the right track, everything is developing in a good direction. The reason why he wants to establish a military base on the empty ind is not to rule the world or anything else. The most important thing he wants to do now is to be able to To ensure the safety of the entire country, but with the growth of strength, the demonic aura in his heart has long been revealed.


    I don''t know since when, Chang Nuo has gradually be dissatisfied with the current status quo of the country. He wants to expand the territory of his country so that he can have greater rights and status.


    This mentality is also gradually increasing with strength.


    In the room, even though it was almost dawn, Chang Nuo was not in any mood to sleep. He could only lean on the edge of the bed with his eyes open and think about the next thing.


    I don��t know how much time has passed, but the sky outside has begun to light up slightly, but in the room, beside Chang Nuo, who is lying next to me, I don��t know when, I have put the spiritual fruit next to me. Since it has already Deciding to take this step, whether it is good or bad, he needs to bear the heavy responsibility of the future.


    Looking at the Devil Fruit next to him, it really didn''t look very good, but its potential energy still made Chang Nuo find it hard to refuse.


    Sitting up straight, Changnuo held the huge devil fruit in his hand and looked at it carefully, but what could he see in the dimness of the room?


    "Click..."


    Chang Nuo still closed his eyes and took a bite with a frown. He didn''t feel embarrassed at all. The reason why he showed this expression was because the food was too unptable.


    After experiencing the state of mind when he ate the Devil Fruit for the first time, he still couldn''t hide the nausea in his heart when he ate it again.


    Sure enough, it was the same as before. I took the first bite and swallowed it without chewing, but what followed was a nauseating feeling.


    But this time, he resisted the urge to retching, and then ced the devil fruit with only one bite on the bedside.


    But the demonic power in the body suddenly awakened at this moment, and now it was not just the demonic power that was awakened!


    Fortunately, there was no one outside the room, and the room was already in chaos.


    Nine chains emitting blue light suddenly extended directly from Chang Nuo''s back, and they continued to destroy everything in the room.


    The moment he ate the psychic devil fruit, Changnuo clearly felt a huge change in himself!


    Even the immortal body given to me by the system before had already stimted its potential unconsciously.


    The fruit of the mind itself is a way to enhance mental power and can control the opponent or attack through willpower, but what is shown now ispletely beyond his imagination.


    With these nine chains on his body, Chang Nuo can clearly understand what they are. All the gadgets in the Naruto world have now been brought out.


    He only thought that the immortal human body was just a way for the system to give him a quick cure, but he didn''t expect that it would be brought with him along with the added abilities.


    If Chang Nuo''s impression is correct, these nine chains should be a kind of sealing technique chain that belongs to the immortal body''s exclusive Vajra seal. They are emitting blue light and should belong to his space power!


    But Chang Nuo really doesn''t understand why this situation is triggered now.


    But what surprised him was more than that. Seeing and hearing the domineering power seemed to break through the shackles at this moment, and he didn''t know what level he had been promoted to in an instant.


    But at this moment, Chang Nuo didn''t feel as good as he imagined. After eating, he didn''t make any sound, but his eyes were red when he stayed in bed, his face was full of pain, and his body was full of pain. The veins and blood vessels have burst out unconsciously, and the whole room seems to be unable to bear his strength at this moment.


    Chang Nuo maintained his only sanity. He also felt that if he continued, not only this room might not be saved, but also the safety of other people might be endangered.


    Then he directly borrowed the power of space and ran to another ce in an instant.


    This is a huge square, where he fought CP Two before. The traces of the previous battle here have long been repaired, and it is far enough away from the pce, so he does not have to worry about getting hurt again here. Other people''s situations arise.


    But even so, Chang Nuo still endured the pain and took out a phone bug from his arms. Hey on the ground with his left hand on the ground and pressed the button on the phone bug with his right hand.


    As the phone bug rang, after a while the phone bug finally started to make a sound.


    "Abona, immediately lead people to seal off the backyard of the pce. No one is allowed toe near!"


    Chang Nuo frowned and shouted directly with a painful look on his face. He was afraid that his spirit would be out of control in the next second, and it might be toote to say these words.


    After he finished speaking, he fell directly onto the square!


    But the man had fallen, but the chains behind him did not stop dancing. They began to slowly grow from Chang Nuo''s back, and then the ends were waving non-stop, and everywhere they went, every ce was crushed instantly.


    Even this newly repaired square became devastated in less than an instant, and even the huge trees near the edges became shattered the moment they were touched.

 Chapter 158 Immortal human body ability stimulation

    <h4>Chapter 158 Immortal human body ability stimtion</h4>


    The back garden of the pce seemed to have turned into ruins at this moment, and the originally t square was now in ruins.


    Themotion caused was also very loud, and even attracted people from other parts of the pce. However, Abona, who received the notice, appeared in the backyard of the pce as soon as possible.


    It''s just that it''s the first time I''vee to this ce. Many people are not very familiar with him, and even more of them are strangers.


    Haruya, the current captain of the pce guard, also appeared here for the first time. He had already eaten the devil fruit with Shunhe before, and it was the bubble fruit.


    No one knows exactly what happened in the back mountain, but such a big movement has already attracted the attention of many people.


    Zhiya had just arrived here, and there were still a lot of people following behind him. They all appeared in full gear, with equally solemn expressions on their faces.


    But when they first appeared in front of the back mountain, Abona hugged the knife in his hands and stood there meticulously.


    "Your Majesty has an order that no one is allowed toe near the back mountain!"


    Seeing such arge group of peopleing, Abona said in a cold voice.


    Although he had never seen these people, he could already guess by looking at their clothes that these should belong to the Kingdom Guard, because the clothes they wore were exactly the same as those of the previous King''s Guard.


    Although he recognized the other party, the other party did not know who he was. Zhiya had a serious expression on his face, ready to attack at any time, and then asked in a cold voice, "Who are you? Why do you appear in this ce?"


    "Abona, from now on, I should belong to the swordsmen of the kingdom!"


    Arbonne said.


    "Do you think I will believe what you say? Get out of the way!" Zhiya said coldly again.


    Abona didn''t want to exin too much to the other party, and he didn''t want to make the matter too big. He casually took out a phone bug from his pocket.


    Now the sky has begun to light up slightly. With such a big movement, other people in the pce have already begun to pay attention to this matter. Fortunately, it did not cause panic among other people.


    Abona directly picked up the phone and rang the phone, but the person he called this time was Shunhe who was far away on the ind.


    After waiting for a long time, a voice began toe from the phone, and a somewhat sleepy voice asked, "Is it His Majesty the King, or who is it?"


    "I am Abona. There is something important right now. I need you tomunicate with a captain standing opposite me. It is a very urgent matter!" Abona said seriously.


    The expression of the phone bug also began to imitate the one on the opposite side. At first, he waspletely stunned, but then the expression of the phone bug began to be serious.


    "I''m Junhe, who''s standing opposite?"


    Junhe seemed to have sensed that something was wrong when he stayed on Kongdao. His Majesty the King had only been away for a week. Why did he feel like something big had happened now?


    He was not sure what the specific situation was, but he had no doubts about Abona''s words!


    "Captain Shunhe, I am Haruya, the captain of the pce guard..."


    "what''s going on?"


    Junhe stayed on the ind and asked in a serious voice!


    "There is a serious situation in the pce, but the stranger standing in front of me now said that His Majesty the King has ordered that no one is allowed to go near the back of the pce!"


    Zhiya also said with a serious face.


    After all, no one knows what is going on with the hugemotion happening now, but after all, this is in the Tru Pce. As the pce guard, they naturally have the authority to enter anywhere.


    "In an emergency, listen to Abona for now. If you are still unsure about the situation after two hours, you can force your way in then!"


    Junhe said.


    To be honest, he doesn''t have too much trust in Abona now. This kind of thing has already happened when they just arrived in the Toru Kingdom. With two hours of free time, Junhe already trusts him. Arbonne''s.


    "Yes, Captain Junhe, I understand..."


    Haruya said, and then gave the phone bug back to Abona.


    "Although we can now simply confirm your identity, Jun and the captain have already said that we only have two hours. If we are not sure what happened inside, we can only force our way in!"


    Haruya said with a serious face.


    He didn''t dare to confirm other situations now. Before Abona could say anything, he turned to the people behind him and said, "Send someone to check whether His Majesty the King is in his pce!"


    "yes����"


    A group of people and one person were confronting each other like this. Abona continued to hug the long knife with his unconcerned hands, his face was calm, and he didn''t mind at all how they looked at him, but he kept his guard tightly. On this only channel.


    The two parties were also in a stalemate like this, but at the top of the mountain, it was apletely different scene.


    After eating the Devil Fruit, Changnuo seemed to be out of control, but now the situation has eased slightly.


    He was lying on the ground and had long since lost consciousness, but each of the nine chains extending from his back continued to lengthen due to the blessing of space capabilities.


    However, the degree of explosion of these chains has beenpletely alleviated, but now they are still suspended in the sky above the entire square. Although the floating is rtively slow, the aura created at this moment can still be felt intuitively.


    The sky has begun to gradually lighten up, and it is no longer as dim as before. Moreover, this huge square is nowpletely quiet, and the nine chains still maintain their original appearance and are always suspended there.


    Chang Nuo was lying on the ground in a state of embarrassment at this moment, and seemed to havepletely passed out.


    However, no one has set foot here at this moment.


    Such a big movement, not to mention the people inside the pce, may even hear some noise outside the pce, and it is even difficult not to arouse their imagination. Now that the country is in a troubled period, the control of public opinion and turmoil is particrly important. important.


    Haruya, the captain of the pce guard, has dealt with many such emergencies. Not long after the news first appeared, he had already begun to block the entire news, not to mention the people outside the pce, even those in the pce. Almost none of these people knew what was going on.

 Chapter 159 Confrontation in the Back Mountain

    <h4>Chapter 159 Confrontation in the Back Mountain</h4>


    In the blink of an eye, two hours have passed. Now the sky has begun to fully light up, and the early morning sun has begun to rise slowly. The entire backyard of the pce is now on high alert. .


    Because just an hour ago, Zhiye had already received the news that their King was not in the room. However,bined with Abona standing in front of him, it was not difficult to guess that His Majesty the King should be in the back mountain. .


    For the entire Kingdom of Tru, the importance of Changnuo is self-evident. In the past few years since he became the king, he has been praised by people all over the country and has be a famous figure in this country. A belief!


    As the captain of the pce guard, Zhiya has been waiting patiently for two hours. However, the number of the king''s guard behind him is also gathering more and more, and now, it has increased to more than a hundred people.


    Looking at the time, Zhiya himself was already running around in a hurry, so when the time limit was reached, Zhiya couldn''t wait to stand directly in front of Abona and said in a cold voice, "Two hours have passed now. Come on, make way for me!"


    "No, His Majesty the King has ordered that no one is allowed to step even half a step into the back mountain!"


    Abona was still the same as before. From the beginning to the end, he did not move a step. He even maintained the same posture. He always hugged the long knife in his hands, and then said to Zhiya calmly.


    Abona has always sensed everything that happened on the back mountain tform in his mind. He has always used his knowledge and knowledge to sense Changnuo''s situation. When he first came here, he was really nervous and even got down. I was shocked, why did my King be like this?


    But it wasn''t until he regained hisposure that his anxious heart slowly rxed.


    At the same time, he also knew that Chang Nuo was currently unconscious on the tform square, but the aura exuding from his body could still make people shudder. Even if he stood in this position and used the domineering power of seeing and hearing to perceive, Abona did not know this. What kind of feelings does ite from.


    So facing Zhiye, Abona didn''t want to talk nonsense or talk too much, he could only do as he was told!


    Zhiye could no longer bear it at this time. He once again asked in a cold voice, "To give in or not to give in?"


    "Your Majesty orders, don''t give in even an inch!"


    When Abona looked at the other party, his aura suddenly burst out. He no longer cared about what he had just done. He took the dawn in his arms directly and put his other hand on the handle of the knife. He seemed to be preparing for it in the next second. Same as fighting.


    But at this time, the members of the King''s Guards all tensed up their nerves, and they were all ready to fight. For this group of people, although they are not Abona''s opponents individually, but for this group of people, For more than a hundred people, Abona would definitely be overwhelming.


    The situation had reached a very serious moment, but at this time, Gogoya had already rushed over early in the morning. She had already sensed something was wrong and rushed to the direction of the back mountain.


    As soon as they arrived, they could already see the tense situation between the two of them. They instantly walked between Abona and Haruya and asked with a serious face, "What happened?"


    "You are here just in time. His Majesty the King has ordered that no one can step even half a step into the back mountain!"


    Abona said to Gogoya who happened toe over.


    "Captain Junhe told me to leave two hours for you. As the king''s guard, we have the right to enter the back mountain to check the situation that may threaten the country and His Majesty!"


    Haruya said in a cold voice.


    "Stop talking to both of you, you are all our own people now, why do you have to act like this?" Gogoya yelled angrily.


    She turned her head and looked at Abona again, and asked with the same serious voice, "Tell me about the above situation, at least let them and us rest assured that nothing can be solved by just opening your mouth. Do you know what this means?" ?You cannot understand the importance of His Majesty the King to the Kingdom of Tru!"


    "His Majesty the King is fine, you don''t have to worry about this, but there are some things that we cannot let you know. We will just wait here, waiting for His Majesty the King toe down!"


    Abona began to withdraw his guard, and then continued to hug Dawn with both hands, standing quietly.


    "Who is he?"


    Haruya couldn''t help but frowned and asked Gogoya directly.


    "This is His Majesty''s man, a very powerful swordsman!"


    Gogoya said helplessly.


    Now at least he knows the identity of the other party and understands that he should be regarded as one of his own. But for Zhiya, in this country, in addition to obeying the orders of his Majesty the King, the rest is to obey Jun and the armymander. ''smand.


    Since the other party hasmunicated before, leaving two hours for Abona, but now that the time has passed, the whereabouts of His Majesty the King are unknown, and they are not aware of the above situation. As the governor responsible for the safety of the pce, he hase He said that the person standing in front of him now is probably in trouble.


    "Everyone is ready..."


    Haruya raised his right hand that was already clenched into a fist, and the others immediately began to prepare for battle, with Armed Head Haki instantly attached to their fists.


    When Abona saw this scene, he knew that the next step was really not good, but the key was not to hurt the other party. Now he waspletely in a dilemma, especially when he saw hundreds of people using armed haki at the same time. At that moment, I was suddenly shocked.


    After all, in a small ce like the Land of the Four Seas, it is indeed incredible for so many people who can use Haki to appear at the same time.


    "Zhiye, let''s take a look at the situation first. What do you want to do like this?"


    Gogoya saw the attitude of their group and quickly began to question them.


    "Gogoya, now is no longer the time to talk about this. His Majesty the King''s whereabouts are unknown, and such a big thing happened in the back mountain. If we can''t go up to check, this kind of thing will never be done. Jun and the armymander have also given orders. If If this situation continues, it will definitely be difficult for us to exin in the future!��


    Haruya said seriously.


    But just as he finished speaking, the phone in his pocket rang.


    Zhiya nced at Abona, who was still standing calmly, and then slowly took out the phone bug from his pocket.


    When I first opened it, there was already an anxious voice from the other party asking, "How is the situation now?"

 Chapter 160 Space Storm

    <h4>Chapter 160 Space Storm</h4>


    You don''t need to listen carefully to know who this voice belongs to. Junhe was asking at this moment. Even if he stayed on the empty ind, from the time Abona contacted him tomunicate, he waspletely unable to speak again. Fall asleep and be in a state of anxiety.


    Zhiya had a helpless expression on his face. He didn''t know how to answer, but he still stood at attention and said seriously, "Commander Jun and the army, Abona is still blocking the front, and keeps saying that it is His Majesty''s order and no one is allowed to enter." Back Mountain, and Gogoya is here too!��


    The phone bug showed an urgent expression of frowning. After staying for a while, the other party''s voice came over and said, "Give the phone bug to Abona..."


    Zhiya did not refuse, and directly reached out and handed the phone bug with a crown in his hand to Abona, who was standing there calmly.


    "I am Abona..."


    Abona said directly after getting it.


    Then he looked at everyone and turned around and walked a few dozen meters away toward the mountain.


    "You''ve left the crowd, let''s talk!"


    Abona said still calmly.


    "What happened?"


    Junhe asked.


    Although he did notpletely believe Abona, he had already thought about a lot of things during the two anxious hours of staying on the empty ind. Abona may not be as unbearable as he imagined, and His Majesty the King Junhe is still very clear about his strength.


    The reason for asking such a question is because so far only the two of them know about the strength of His Majesty the King. Therefore, at a critical moment, it should be normal for Changnuo to contact Abona.


    Abona stood silent for a moment, frowning, but still sensing the situation in the square on the mountain, and then sighed and said, "It''s more serious than we thought. I''ve never seen this happen!"


    "What did you sense?" Junhe asked again.


    "Your Majesty, it seems that you have taken two Devil Fruits..."


    "What did you say����?"


    Junhe yelled directly over there. He didn''t know much about the side effects of Devil Fruit. The key was that His Majesty the King told him about this thing, but the other party used two Devil Fruits. How could he think about this thing? The impossible happened.


    He couldn''t believe what Abona said now, and his mind was full of doubts, so he yelled and asked directly like this.


    "I don''t dare to confirm now, but His Majesty the King is fine. He just seemed to have fainted from fatigue, and the aura emanating from him made me afraid to get close, so you''d better tell them. Just wait here until His Majesty the King wakes up."


    Abona exined.


    "I see!"


    Junhe didn''t consult too much, but when he heard that His Majesty the King had nothing to do, he finally felt relieved.


    No one knew how long this state shouldst. After Zhiya received Junhe''s instructions again, he didn''t force Abona too much, let alone ask to go up the back mountain to check.


    Now there is no longer one person guarding this ce, but more than a hundred people guarding the entire back mountain at the same time to prevent anyone from appearing in this ce.


    At this time, an hour or two had passed, and no one felt tired. However, Chang Nuo, who had been in aa on the mountain, finally started to move his fingers.


    The nine chains behind him began to spread instantly, and then inserted straight into the surroundings of this huge square. They were evenly distributed, and then a blue light curtain instantly filled the entire square.


    Every chain was connected to this ce, but in the end, these chains were able to break away from Changnuo, forming apletely different scene, just like an umbre opened here.


    Chang Nuo still hadn''t regained consciousness, but he was suspended in mid-air, exactly halfway between the ground and the top of the barrier.


    He was lying t and suspended there, but a storm had gradually begun to form within the barrier. In the huge barrier, a tornado-like appearance swept through the entire ground. The ground was already in ruins. , at this moment, along with the gravel and floor tiles, they began to rotate unscrupulously throughout the entire barrier space.


    But as the central area, Changnuo''s location seemed to be the center of this whirlpool and was not affected at all.


    Abona has been observing and sensing the situation in the square on the mountain. Until now, he still hasn''t figured out what happened? What is His Majesty the King doing that can actually make such a big noise?


    Fortunately, now that there is barrier protection, the internal space storm has not affected the external situation. It is estimated that even Chang Nuo himself cannot understand what happened.


    Why there were such big changes in the state of two Devil Fruits, even in a sober state, he might not be able to understand this kind of thing.


    This space storm did not stop in a short period of time. Itsted for nearly a whole day. The group of people standing under the steps at the foot of the mountain also stayed below for a whole day. No one was there. Leave on the way, or go get something to eat or something.


    Although they don''t know what happened, now is definitely not the time to study these situations.


    Abona can really feel the power of the space storm in the square above the mountain. Even if he goes in now, he may not be able toe out intact.


    This can be regarded as a preliminary judgment on the strength of His Majesty the King. He had only been exposed to the ability of space jumping before, and he waspletely unable to exin and understand the rest.


    After all, everything seemed too weird and unbelievable, and even beyond his cognitive understanding.


    But now the entire country is still operating normally. Even if Chang Nuoes back or does note back, the country will not cause any problems in a short period of time.


    Although the Kingdom of Tru is not as powerful and beautiful as imagined, among all the countries in the world, this country can be said to have entered the forefront. Whether it is in terms of life or strength, it can definitely do anything. It''se to this point.


    However, he is not standing still, more is being developed, and everything is moving forward in an orderly manner.

 Chapter 161 Devil Fruit Fusion

    <h4>Chapter 161 Devil Fruit Fusion</h4>


    On the edge of the back mountain, at this long staircase, a group of people from Abona are still guarding here. Their expressions are meticulous. They have been there since dawn until the sun has set.


    The initial anxious expression was no longer on everyone''s face, reced by a serious look, and they all stood in ce.


    Chang Nuo on the summit square has regained consciousness at this moment, but he is still unable to control his body and can only enter the system space from his consciousness.


    He was speechless as soon as he entered here. He had never thought that after eating a Devil Fruit again, it would have such an effect. He had clearly confirmed these things with the system space repeatedly before, and it cost him so much. The price was huge, I didn''t expect that it would lead to such a result.


    "System, what exactly is going on?"


    Changnuo stood in the system space and looked at a huge blue screen in front of him and said.


    "Answer, this is a normal problem caused by the fusion of two Devil Fruits, and the Psychic Devil Fruit is constantly increasing the intensity of your spiritual consciousness. It is initially estimated that it will still take two hours toplete. Please wait patiently! "


    Looking at the words on the screen, Chang Nuo really didn''t know how to respond to these words. He himself didn''t expect how much noise it would cause. Even though he was conscious now, he still didn''t notice that the lines extending from the square were chain.


    The key is that he is now in a space storm, and what was originally a square has now turned into a bottomless abyss after a day of space storm erosion. Except for the ce where he is suspended, there is no other ce. The ce has long been dpidated. If it were not for the protection of the barrier, it is estimated that even their royal city might be an abyss-like existence.


    Time passed quietly. An hourter, the space storm in the entire square has now begun to slowly weaken, and all the suspended soil has begun to slowly fall.


    Chang Nuo was still suspended in mid-air, but as the space storm weakened, his own body was slowly falling towards the ground.


    After the new soil was re-umted to the original ce, the t square had now turned into a huge pit. All the soil had covered the surrounding areas of the barrier, so the ce where he was suspended had be a pit at least 20 meters deep. A deep, swirling pit.


    As the space storm weakened, he himself was slowly falling downwards, and the aura on his body was now bing more solemn. If it weren''t for the barrier, the overlord-colored domineering energy in his body would have already begun to cover the entire body. area.


    Because as the space storm falls, blue lightning has begun to erupt in the entire barrier space. These are purely the unintentional release of the Overlord''s domineering energy. Without using any consciousness, the Overlord''s domineering energy has reached such a level. , Abona, who stayed on the periphery and kept busy with things inside, always had a bad feeling in his heart.


    He looked up solemnly, and his calm expression began to turn into a frown. He didn''t know how to exin the scene he saw in front of him. His Majesty the King''s power had made him re-recognize it. Let��s take a look at the appearance of the powerful person in this world.


    "Everyone is on heightened alert. The situation on Your Majesty''s side is about to end!"


    Abona immediately shouted to everyone.


    At least he felt that the situation above was about to end. After all, the space storm that hadsted for a day had now gradually weakened, and it was weakening very quickly.


    Although Zhiya was not as powerful as Abona, he at least understood a little bit. After hearing what the other party said, he immediately shouted to the group of people he had brought, "Be careful!"


    Although it had only been one day, Gogoya had already told Zhiya a little bit about Abona, which gave him some preliminary understanding of Abona!


    After all, he is the captain of the pce guard, and his people will definitely not obey Abona''s orders, so after Abona finished speaking, Haruya once again began to emphasize to his people.


    At this moment, the aura of everyone who had been holding on for a whole day burst out again.


    For those escorts, many of them didn''t know exactly what they were doing here. They only knew that something terrible seemed to have happened on the top of the mountain, but even so, these people were still meticulous.


    However, at the top of the square at the top of the mountain, Chang Nuo had already regained consciousness and was still observing the surroundings.


    When he first felt the storm in the surrounding space, he was really shocked. He had no idea that this thing was caused by himself.


    It''s just that until now, I still can''t control this body. However, I can still move my fingers, but I can''t makerge rotations.


    As time began to slowly dissipate, the ces where Chang Nuo could move gradually increased. From the beginning, he could only move his fingers, but now he can make a fist with his entire hand, but more ces are temporarily inessible. Just coordination.


    At present, he has not yet determined what the harvest will be like this time. Judging from the current situation, after eating the Devil Fruit this time, he will definitely achieve a qualitative increase in his strength.


    Putting aside everything else, the Psychic Devil Fruit itself is its own ability, not to mention that it has also stimted the ability of the immortal human body itself. This thing is purely an ident, but it has to be said that if it can be controlled well in theter stage, What this thing can bring to me is definitely beyond imagination.


    But when he was still thinking about these things now, he was still suspended in mid-air with his eyes closed, and he could only rely on the domineering power of seeing, hearing, and color to perceive the surrounding situation.


    He didn''t have any impulsive thoughts about this time, but the price he had to bear was indeed a bit heavy, but even so, even if someone was against him now, there was no way to get close to his body.


    Fortunately, there are no special circumstances around here. Even if he has persisted for a day, at least he is likely to have a better ending next time.


    All this was just what he thought for the time being, but no matter what, after eating the second Devil Fruit, the changes in his body had begun to gradually develop in a good direction.


    He didn''t worry too much about these things, but he felt quite helpless when there was already such a bigmotion the second night after he came back.

 Chapter 162 Power

    <h4>Chapter 162 Power</h4>


    No matter how he thought about this kind of thing, he would never have guessed that after the side effects of the previous Devil Fruit had been eliminated, eating a new Devil Fruit would actually cause such a big noise!


    Anyway, no one can do this kind of thing, so no one has experience in this situation, or it is just his wishful thinking.


    After eating the second Devil Fruit, other people will not be able to withstand the power, causing the body to explode directly. For him, being able to enjoy the power of the second Devil Fruit is already quite awesome. .


    As an hour passed slowly, Chang Nuo gradually began to ept the control of this body, but his body still began to slowly fall downwards.


    When he finally reached the ground, Chang Nuo directly took over control of his entire body and stood slowly and steadily on the ground.


    When he regained control of his body, the moment he opened his eyes, blue light glowed directly in his eyes. At this moment, the entire barrier space was filled with blue lightning, and the overlord''s domineering energy seemed to have begun. Uncontrolled spread.


    Fortunately, this time the barrier canpletely suppress the overlord''s domineering ability, and people outside can''t feel any abnormality at all at this moment.


    In the entire space, blue lightning was raging around. The dust that had already fallen on the ground began to sink under the influence of Overlord Color Haki. The Overlord Color Haki was as heavy as a thousand pounds, and even Can cause substantial attack impact.


    This was just the current one. Changnuo was quite surprised by the improvement in his strength. He didn''t expect that the Devil Fruit he ate this time would directly make his domineering color reach the top position.


    I''m afraid there are only three people with overlord-colored Haki that can cause substantial damage in the entire pirate world at present, but it is because of this situation that Chang Nuo feels quite surprised.


    Because the other two kinds of domineering energy can be obtained through acquired cultivation, but there is no way to cultivate the overlord color domineering power. After receiving the overlord color domineering power given by the system, Changnuo never thought about overlord color domineering. The domineering lust can be raised to such an extent!


    But now that everything is in front of us, it is not the time to get excited anymore.


    The blue light in his eyes began to slowly dissipate, but his originally ck eyeballs were transformed into a form simr to sky blue. From the appearance, Changnuo lookedpletely weird and handsome.


    For such changes, it is not a strange thing in the world of pirates. Changnuo himself did not notice these situations anyway, and it had no impact on the body and could not feel it at all.


    However, the domineering domineering energy in the body has begun to seem uncontroble at this moment,pletely unscrupulous in this space. It is also very likely that it is because of the blessing of the spiritual devil fruit that the current strength is too strong. For the time being, I haven''t had the experience to better control this strength, so I can only let it be unleashed.


    As for other abilities, Chang Nuo doesn''t know how to experience them now in this dark state.


    Chang Nuo stood at the bottom of the deep pit, slowly raised his right hand, and observed his current changes. Fortunately, there were no special changes in his body. The most significant changes were in enhanced abilities.


    But now he can clearly feel the effect of increased strength. He can now release a blue ball of light about 30 centimeters in diameter. After putting it away, he slides his right hand in front, and the entire space in front of him seems to be folded. And these things can already be seen with the naked eye.


    Even though his strength has reached a very high level now, hisbat experience is still far behind.


    But there is still a long time toe. In theter process, you just need to slowly start to hone your current abilities.


    He had also thought about purchasingbat experience directly from the system space, but once such a thing was actually purchased, the impact would be far more terrifying than he imagined.


    After all, everyone''sbat experience will always have advantages and disadvantages. Once such a state is formed, it is difficult to change the original mentality.


    As he stood there for nearly half an hour, the release of domineering domineering energy in the space finally began to slow down, and gradually began to stop releasing it.


    Chang Nuo himself had quite good control over the domineering power of the overlord. It was just that this time the domineering power of the overlord suddenly increased, which made him feel a little ufortable. This caused the domineering to leak out. However, this situation will only need to be adjusted for a period of time in the future. Time will definitely not happen again.


    After all the dust fell to the ground, Chang Nuo raised his right hand above his head. Starting from the top, the chains that were deeply inserted into the ground began to sink into the palm of Chang Nuo''s hand one by one from the top of the barrier. .


    Until finally, the entire barrier shrank in his hands, and all that remained on the top of the mountain was dust on the ground and a circle of gravel.


    The originally good square has now turned into a huge pit. It is estimated that there will no longer be any need to repair this square in the future.


    After taking back all the things, Chang Nuo looked around. Even in the dark night, his eyes with a faint blue light could still see everything clearly in such a dark night.


    This may also be the change caused by eating two Devil Fruits, but the overall situation is also developing in a good direction.


    Now there is no need to say anything else. After eating the Superman Mind Fruit, at least what has been shown so far is that there is an extra diamond chain that the immortal body can control. In addition, there is a sudden increase in the domineering power of the Overlord. In addition, now The blue eyes that can look into the dark night all tell the story of the benefits Chang Nuo has received at this moment.


    The key is that there are more ces. He has not had time to do in-depth research at all, but the only thing that can be confirmed is that these things are not as simple as they seem.


    Since Overlord Color Haki can be improved, then the Knowledge Color Haki and Space Ability, which are also controlled by mental abilities, may be improved many times at this moment.

 Chapter 163 Strength?

    <h4>Chapter 163 Strength?</h4>


    He has no extra time to worry about these things now, and his own changes will always be revealed one by one in theing days.


    As long as he has been up there, the group of people below have been standing there for as long as they did. They all tensed up and were all on guard against the surrounding situation.


    "Thank you for your hard work, everyone, please go back and rest!"


    Abona, Zhiya and the others, who were still on high alert, did not notice that Chang Nuo suddenlynded next to them.


    Even Abona, who had been paying attention to the situation above, did not realize that His Majesty the King had arrived next to him.


    Chang Nuo suddenly arrived and spoke to everyone in a gentle voice.


    "Your Majesty... Your Majesty!!"


    Zhi was suddenly startled, and Chang Nuo''s sudden appearance made him a little suspicious.


    But now that people are indeed standing in front of them, people have begun to make them not believe it.


    Abona was also a little surprised in his heart. A second ago, he was clearly observing his Majesty the King staying on the top of the mountain. Even though he knew that the other party had space capabilities, he had no way of finding out how he got here.


    "It''s all hard work. Let''s go back and rest first. I''ll have a chat with you in two days. The other is Abona. During this time, you can get familiar with the situation in the Kingdom of Tru. There will be things arranged for you next. you."


    Chang Nuo said calmly, not paying any attention to the surprised looks of the group of people.


    Abona was surprised, and then when he heard what Chang Nuo said, a slight smile appeared on his lips.


    "Understood, I will get familiar with the affairs of the Tru Kingdom in these two days!"


    Arbonne said.


    "Your Majesty, are you okay?"


    Gogoya suddenly rushed out and stood in front of Chang Nuo and asked with concern.


    Although she didn''t know what exactly happened, she could still think of something when she saw the group of people in such a alert state.


    "Come back tomorrow morning, there are some things you need to do!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    Gogoya also started to smile and said.


    "It didn''t cause much of a sensation, right?" Changnuo looked at Zhiya and asked.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, this matter has been suppressed from the beginning. Even in the pce, no one knows what happened!"


    Zhiya said seriously.


    "You take them back first. After three days, we will count the current number of national guards and report to me then!"


    Changnuo said.


    The National Guard is different from the army. The army is mainly carried out by ordinary people, but the Guard is basically a select group of people who exist. They are also a group of people who will be trained in the entire country. They currently stay in the entire country. Almost all of the nearly 10,000 people in the Toru Kingdom are training in the six naval skills. As for the cultivation of domineering, they are now gradually in progress.


    At present, themander of the national army, Junhe, is not here, so such a task naturally falls on Zhiya.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King, my subordinates will provide you with the data in the next two days!"


    Zhiya said seriously.


    "Your Majesty..."


    "We''ll talk about the restter, so go back quickly!"


    When Gogoya was about to say something else, Changnuo refused with a smile.


    Abona stood by with a calm and interested expression. He seemed to know all this in advance.


    Seeing His Majesty the King like this, Gogoya could only pouted and stopped talking.


    "Come to me tomorrow, and we''ll talk about itter if you have any specific questions!" Chang Nuo said to Gogoya again.


    After everything was said, Chang Nuo disappeared instantly from their sight.


    It was as if this person had never appeared here before, not even touching the dust under his feet.


    In fact, this is indeed the case. Changnuo also discovered this. With the fusion of the Mind Fruit and the Space Fruit, what he can do now is like a god.


    Even if he is stepping on the ground, as long as he is willing, his body can always be suspended above the ground, or even suspended above the sea water. It is not a problem at all.


    Even though everyone has left, everyone is still staring nkly at the ce where Chang Nuo left just now.


    With this kind of visual impact, except for Abona, none of the other people had shock written on their faces. They had never seen His Majesty the King with such great power before!


    It is true that Chang Nuo has never used his spatial ability in front of others, and others have no way of knowing about it.


    Even now that this group of people have seen this scene, in their life creed, they don''t know how to exin the scene they just saw.


    "Your Majesty the King, what you just did was..."


    Gogoya looked at Abona and asked in a dazed tone.


    Zhi also cast a curious look, and he also wanted to know what the situation was.


    But in the end, Abona still maintained his original state, holding the long knife with both hands, smiling slightly at the corner of his mouth and saying nothing.


    Although everyone is curious, at this moment everyone, including Gogoya, can only keep this matter in their hearts.


    ����������������


    the next day.


    At this moment, the sun has already risen above the treetops, and people in the entire Tru Kingdom have already started to get up and get busy.


    The economic development of the Royal City is now considered the most prosperous ce in the entire country.


    Just around this royal city, more than twentyrge-scale factories have been built. The huge flow of people they attract has indirectly or directly promoted the economic development of the entire royal city.


    Nowadays, you can find dining, entertainment, and ces to rx almost everywhere. Compared with the previous slightly dpidated royal city, it has beenpletely changed from head to toe.


    Fortunately, all of this now has a gradually improving system, and everything no longer requires him, as the king, to personally manage it.


    However, when others were busy, Chang Nuo slowly woke up from the room.


    After such a long period of suffering the day before, a good sleep was what he wanted most.


    Although there was nothing too tiring, the fatigue from the two Devil Fruits still made him feel extremely hard.


    As soon as he woke up, he took a deep breath and then sat up and stretched. His room was not particrly big, but rtively speaking it was pretty good.


    After getting up, changing clothes... and getting everything done, as soon as Chang Nuo opened the door to the room, he saw Gogoya standing in the yard.

 Chapter 164 Identification of Devil Fruits

    <h4>Chapter 164 Identification of Devil Fruits</h4>


    Chang Nuo was not surprised at all, but the other party was already surprised.


    When I saw His Majesty the King yesterday, it was too dark and I basically didn��t pay much attention to it, but now it lookspletely different.


    His Majesty the King seems to have changed in temperament. Although his clothes are still the same as before, the faint aura exuding from his whole body makes people feel very majestic, especially when you see Chang Nuo''s eyes now When seeing the color, Gogoya was a little afraid to confirm whether this was His Majesty the King.


    "What''s wrong? You look surprised?"


    Chang Nuo stood at the door and said with a smile on his face.


    "Your Majesty the King, your eyes...?"


    Gogoya asked doubtfully.


    "It''s okay, doesn''t it look pretty like this?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    "Um����"


    Gogoya nodded subconsciously. Although Chang Nuo looked a little weird now, this weirdness mixed with handsomeness really made people unable to take their eyes away. Especially for women, this kind of lethality is simply not too powerful. Big.


    At this moment, Chang Nuo is wearing a blue id casual dress with a white background, lined with a ck engraved shirt, with gold stripes on the cuffs. There is no decoration on the whole body. The only thing that can be regarded as decoration is probably the belt. .


    Chang Nuo was wearing a pair of ck slim-fitting ceremonial trousers, paired with a ck belt with a flowing gold color, which made Chang Nuo look particrly slender in figure at this moment.


    His height itself is already sufficient. For most women, there is no resistance to such a man.


    Looking at Gogoya''s little appearance, Chang Nuo couldn''t help but sigh helplessly, then turned to the maid next to her who was working and saluted and said, "Xiao Ju, ask them to bring some over as soon as possible, and send it to this courtyard. Okay." , you should go down and rest first!��


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King."


    The maid named Xiaoju said, and then slowly began to walk outside.


    After the little maid left, Chang Nuo walked directly to the courtyard, found a chair and sat down.


    "Do you know what I''m looking for you for?"


    Changnuo asked.


    "Sorry, Your Majesty the King, I really don''t know!"


    Gogoya said it simply, and she had no doubts involved.


    Facing Chang Nuo sitting here, Gogoya was actually a little curious, but she really didn''t know what was going on when His Majesty the King came to her at this time.


    Chang Nuo didn''t waste any more words and waved his right hand. Suddenly, more than twenty small boxes were neatly ced on the table in the yard. These exquisite wooden boxes were perfectly made. As for the contents inside, all of them were They are all devil fruits.


    "These are all Devil Fruits. Your next task is to confirm the types of these Devil Fruits, mark each item, and then paste it on the outside of the box!"


    Chang Nuo said slowly.


    "Evil...Devil Fruit...?"


    Gogoya really couldn''t believe that he was able to obtain so many Devil Fruits at once. For this country, this kind of thing was almost like a dream.


    Gogoya is one of the few people in the entire country who has seen the Devil Fruit Illustrated Book. Of course, no one knows where he saw the Devil Fruit Illustrated Book. At least in the Kingdom of Toru, there is only one such thing. Ben put it there.


    However, Chang Nuo himself has never looked at this thing. After all, it has no effect on him. Since someone already knows about it, it would be good for him to study it carefully.


    Although Changnuo can identify the types of these devil fruits through the system, the key thing is that it costs money. After identifying these devil fruits, Changnuo will at least need to spend tens of millions of Baileys in the system. He can It''s not generous enough to spend so much money on something like this.


    Gogoya was stunned and shocked. It was indeed unbelievable that His Majesty the King suddenly produced so many Devil Fruits.


    Gogoya walked to the table and slowly opened a box with an expression of disbelief. But when she saw the appearance of the items inside, she was convinced that what she saw was indeed true.


    At least being here today is not a dream but a fact!


    "Your Majesty, where do these devil fruitse from?"


    Gogoya asked curiously.


    "Don''t worry about this for now, just tell us the types of these Devil Fruits and mark them!"


    Changnuo said.


    Even if these things are ced in the courtyard, Changnuo doesn''t have to worry about being seen by others, because in his courtyard, except for the maid Xiaoju, almost no onees here.


    That��s why they put these Devil Fruits in front of us so arrogantly. However, once the actual functions of these Devil Fruits are confirmed, the next fate of these Devil Fruits will be that they will appear directly on the empty ind in the future. After all, only when others use it can its greatest value be realized.


    Currently, there are nearly 30 people who possess Devil Fruits in the entire Toru Kingdom. Although most of them are ability users without much use, fortunately, each Devil Fruit will always have its own advantages. Don''t worry, these things arepletely useless.


    Gogoya picked up a box and looked at it carefully, and then said directly to Changnuo who was sitting there, "The devil fruit I am holding now is the animal type devil fruit Cat Fruit, which belongs to the agility category. Able to move at extremely fast speeds and possessing super jumping abilities.


    But among the animal devil fruits, this one has not mutated, so in the end it can only be an ordinary animal devil fruit. "


    "That''s pretty good, find something to write it down on and leave it there."


    Changnuo said.


    He didn''t have high expectations for these Devil Fruits themselves. After all, it was difficult to find truly powerful and outstanding Devil Fruits.


    There are so many types of Devil Fruits in this world, covering all aspects. Even the number of Devil Fruits recorded in the illustrated book has reached more than 30,000, let alone those that have not been recorded in the illustrated book.


    In terms of abilities, most people would choose to use some of the better Devil Fruits themselves, and it would be impossible for them to appear in ces like these.


    But after getting this batch of devil fruits from Mariejoia, Changnuo really didn''t believe that there weren''t some awesome ones in them.

 Chapter 165 Business Development Plan

    <h4>Chapter 165 Business Development n</h4>


    Gogoya turned her head and nced at Chang Nuo, full of curiosity in her heart, but she still did what the other party said.


    It''s just that he didn''t prepare these things this time. However, Changnuo also didn''t have any anxious thoughts. It was just the beginning, and as for these devil fruits, he was not particrly anxious to send them out.


    Within a short while, all the small boxes containing more than twenty Devil Fruits had been opened, and Gogoya gave a brief introduction to each one. However, these Devil Fruits were almost all of the animal and superhuman types. .


    It''s normal to think about it. Even the Celestial Dragons can''t have too many good things. Although these Devil Fruits are not the most awesome ones, rtively speaking, they can also enhance their own strength.


    The appearance of each thing always has its purpose, and it will not be useless in the end. For these twenty-odd devil fruits, he also has his own mission.


    "Put them all away and sit here together and have something to eat?"


    Chang Nuo said leisurely to Gogoya.


    "No, Your Majesty, after I finish the work here, there are some other things I need to do!"


    Gogoya said with a smile and refusal.


    "That''s okay!"


    Changnuo did not invite him again. What he said before was just polite. Now that the abilities of the twenty dozen Devil Fruits have been confirmed, there is really no need to keep Gogoya.


    After everything was settled, Chang Nuo still stayed in the courtyard. He did not leave this ce for a whole day, and he was always nning the next ns and arrangements in his heart.


    There is no need to prove one''s own strength now. It only requires more running-in and familiarity. Changnuo does not want to interfere too much with external affairs.


    The country has developed to this level, so the next step is to do some detailed work in ce.


    The general policy in the early stage has been set. The first thing the country needs to recover is the economy. At the very least, it must ensure that all the people of the Tru Kingdom will not starve to death. However, this is only the first step. ording to the current situation Well, it has indeed beenpleted.


    The opening of hundreds of factories in the country, and the development of economic employment, have slowly begun to transform the country. Although it is not yet enough for everyone to live an ideal life, it is indeed an improvementpared to the previous few years. Yearster, it''s been many times better.


    But just like this, rtively speaking, it is still far from enough!


    Ten days have passed.


    During these ten days, Chang Nuo hardly moved at all. He either stayed in his room or in the courtyard every day, and began to be familiar with his current abilities.


    What he was most worried about was that his domineering aura was still out of control. This was the ultimate reason why he didn''t go out.


    But after waiting for ten days and realizing that nothing happened, I started to walk out of where I was.


    For more than three months, Chang Nuo still had high expectations despite not seeing what his current country would look like.


    In the pce hall.


    Chang Nuo and Luosta looked at each other in confusion. They were the only two people in the huge space.


    Luosta stood at the bottom respectfully, and Chang Nuo did not sit on the chair. He also stood at the bottom with him.


    "Your Majesty, we are ready to go to basta to discuss cooperation. I wonder if you have any other arrangements?"


    Luosta asked respectfully.


    "I don''t have too many questions. It''s just that if the development of stan is good, it will have a great effect on us. You need to weigh this yourself. It will be very difficult to open up the market for the Grand Route. , but it will also bring us great benefits.


    You have a long way to go this time, and I hope that even though you are so far apart, you can do as well as if you were in your own country! "


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, Luosta will be loyal to you no matter where he is!" Luosta bowed and said.


    "This time it may take a long time, at least three years to stay there. However, within these three years, I hope you can implement all the conditions there. This will be beneficial to our future domestic development. It will y a big role," Changnuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Changnuo has already taken everything in hand and looked at the contents of this cooperation with basta. This time he directly ns to transfer nearly half of the factory types in the entire Tru Kingdom to basta. It can also be regarded as the start of an all-round economic battle.


    As for the factories remaining in the country, it is enough to meet the needs of the world, and there is no need to expand and develop.


    "On the Grand Line, you will definitely not just stay in the country of basta. When you meet some more virtuous and talented people, you can also attract them all to our own country. How to do it then? Leave it all to yourself and I believe in you.��


    Changnuo said.


    "Okay!" Losta said, and then asked again, "I wonder if there is anything I should pay attention to after going to basta, or something I need to send a message to the King of basta?"


    "No, King Kobra probably doesn''t want to hear what I have to say, but while developing their country''s economy, everything must be based on our own country. Wait until basta''s economic system is fully implemented. , we willmunicate about other situations."


    "yes����."


    This time, the person who chose to go to basta to negotiate this kind of thing was only Lossta who was more suitable for the entire Tru Kingdom. Although he was full of ambitions, on the other hand, this guy was The ability to do things is still very good.


    He doesn''t mind if a person is ambitious. Ambitious people will have greater motivation and ideas are the best. He doesn''t even need to worry about him getting into trouble, because if these things can be done, they will definitely be solved.


    At least that''s the case from the current perspective.


    The two people chatted for nearly half an hour about the situation in basta. In fact, there is no special situation in that country. They just need to implement all these things.


    Everyone has their own purposes and interests. For Changnuo, cooperation with the country of basta is nothing more than finding a ce that can act as an agent for processing nts, and relying on basta''s status in the world government to achieve I will ask for more benefits in the future.

 Chapter 166 Alabasta Targeted

    <h4>Chapter 166 basta Targeted</h4>


    Changnuo doesn''t care at all what basta will be in the future. The only thing he cares about now is the interests of his own country. In fact, as a king of any country, he should understand this.


    Kobra didn''t have any outstanding performance as a king, but on the other hand, he has been a king for so many years, and he still has sufficient control over people''s hearts.


    He should understand such a thing, but even so, he has nothing to do. This is a win-win policy for both countries, and basta cannot refuse it anyway.


    As for when other countries begin to improve and improve in the future, then at that time, the economy can almost be directly used to check and bnce the lifeline of this country.


    Luosta stood here obediently, listening carefully to what his king said. Everything he used now was given by the other party. And for this kind of business management, although the talent is there, it is Changnuo who has really applied it. Make points.


    "Losta! I don''t want basta to be rich, so after we get there, even if all industrialization ispleted, I need you to build various entertainment venues including casinos. It''s best if you can Let��s borrow some money from them in advance. Do you understand if you don��t know this?��


    Changnuo said leisurely, with an undetectable smile on his face.


    Luosta stood there nkly. He didn''t understand at all what his Majesty the King meant. He was clearly allowed to pass because it was not to promote the development of the country of basta, but why did he say this? if?


    It was precisely because he didn''t understand that Luosta asked nkly, "Your Majesty, I wonder what your purpose is...?"


    "Who will work when they are all rich? We used to give them hope, not a high-quality life. I just hope that people in this country can work hard to have three meals a day. When all we have to do is feed them.��


    Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty..., will this cause dissatisfaction in the basta country?"


    Luosta asked in surprise.


    "Dissatisfied? How can you be dissatisfied if you don''t steal or rob? What we have to do is to provide them with financial support and ensure that they have three meals a day. But at the same time, what we need to do is to consume them spiritually, but in the end The choice is only in their own hands, and no one will force them.��


    What Chang Nuo said waspletely based on the experience he received in his previous life. If he wanted to get a group of people to work for him steadily, then all he had to do was not to bulge their pockets, but not to treat them badly.


    This is life, give them expectations and make them despair. Otherwise, if everyone is full of money, who would have the heart to work hard?


    Luosta nodded with some vague understanding. This was the first time he hade across this kind of topic in his life, but as someone who has been in business for so long, although he could not understand this kind of topic for a while, in the end he would carefully understand it. If you refer to it, you will always get unexpected results.


    However, for Luosta, he didn''t know what words to use to express this experience. He could only stand there and not know what he was thinking.


    "Do you think this method is a bit too vicious?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    "No, it''s just the first time I''vee across such a topic. I need some time to understand this!" Luosta said.


    "You will set off with your people tomorrow, and I will ask Barlow to apany you there. After that day, wait until everything is settled, and thenmunicate the situation here through the phone bug, and then let me see your ability !��


    Chang Nuo walked up to him, patted him on the shoulder and said.


    Luosta''s expression was very solemn at the moment. With such a heavy responsibility on his shoulders, he didn''t know whether he couldplete it perfectly.


    After all, the country of basta is different from the Kingdom of Tru. He doesn''t know the specific situation of that country, let alone whether this country can be what he wants.


    Despite this expression, Luosta still said respectfully, "Your Majesty, I will definitely do my part."


    "Go, wait until the dust settles on your side, the Kingdom of Tru will usher in a new wave of reforms. The hope of all this may fall on your shoulders. The responsibilities and burdens will also be given to you. I hope you Don��t let the people of this country down!��


    Changnuo did not use his identity to tell the other party this time. Instead, he used the entire Tru Kingdom to press on the other party''s shoulders.


    Luosta is very capable and knows how to adapt, but this guy is too ambitious, but Changnuo is confident that he can control this guy.


    For Luosta, even if he has ambition, if his strength does not match his ambition, there will be no room for maneuver at all.


    Now Changnuo wants to give him this opportunity to go out and show himself.


    After Luosta left, a smile instantly appeared on Chang Nuo''s face, and his sky-blue eyes looked very strange at this moment.


    It''s not that he doesn''t believe in Luosta, on the contrary, he trusts the other party very much, so he chose to leave this matter to him. It is not only giving him a chance to perform, but also an inspection of him.


    The Kingdom of Tru is now beginning to solidlyy its foundation before starting to build on top. The entire country is now considered to be prosperous.


    In addition, and most importantly, after the country''s strength has increased, it is no longer necessary for the people to nt flowers and nts.


    After all, this kind of industry is not a long-term solution. In the short term or within a few years, Changnuo can use its own system space to purchase food products. If itsts for a long time, if one day the king of his country is not here, then these people How to survive?


    After all this industry was transferred to basta, the country began to officially move on the right track.


    "His Majesty����"


    Not long after Luosta left, another person appeared at the door of the pce again.


    This man also looks like a gentleman, wearing a suit, but he is not as delicate as Losa, and looks very strong.


    "Comoro,e in!"


    Chang Nuo stood in the center of the hall and shouted to the man standing at the door.


    This man is the next Minister of Commerce of the Tru Kingdom, and the man who will seed Losa Tower.


    But unlike thetter, Comoro is not as ambitious as Losta. Although he may not be as capable as Losta, in many aspects, Comoro canpletely defeat his opponent.

 Chapter 167 Minister of Commerce

    <h4>Chapter 167 Minister of Commerce</h4>


    After Comoro heard what Chang Nuo said, he walked in slowly.


    He doesn''t wear sses or anything like that. Although he looks more like a gentleman, in his heart, it''s more fitting to say that this guy is a warrior.


    "Your Majesty, all the work of Minister Lossta has been handed over!" Comoro said.


    ��What��s the current funding gap?��


    Changnuo asked directly.


    He doesn''t understand anything now, and Changnuo can still let Comoro do the same thing that Luosta can do. Even if he doesn''t understand, it doesn''t matter. At worst, he will put more effort into cultivating him when the timees.


    The key is that in just three months after the country was handed over to Losta, the country''s profit has already reached tens of billions of beli per month, and now there is still arge deficit.


    Although these expenses are not due to Luosta''s greed, the key is that this person is too ambitious and takes too far at one time, which leads to these situations.


    "Your Majesty, we have calcted it yesterday. Minister Losstad has started more than 250 factories at the same time. Now it can solve the problem ofrge-scale personnel work in the entire country at once. But simrly, the cost this time is also It has reached nearly 300 billion beli, and so far, the funding gap is at least close to 120 billion!"


    Comoro said respectfully.


    "120 billion!"


    Chang Nuoughed to himself.


    This number is no longer small. At present, the entire food economy of the Tru Kingdom relies on the Changnuo system. Fortunately, there are still sufficient funds in the system to provide for the survival of the country. But if there is no system, , if Luosta proceeds like this, it will be a devastating blow to the entire kingdom.


    "Your Majesty, do you want the factories that are currently under construction to be temporarily suspended until the kingdom calms down and then continue?" Comoro asked.


    "No, since we have already started building things, there is no need to stop. It will cause a serious loss of the country''s credibility, which is more than worth the loss for us!


    Let all projects continue first, and the other is the road construction in the entire kingdom. This issue should also be implemented as soon as possible. From now on, as the Minister of Commerce, you must manage the people below.


    I don��t ask you to do well, nor do I ask you to do it fast, but you must take every step steadily and don��t rush for quick sess. This is also my warning to you.


    There should be enough funds in the pce treasury for you to use now. After all these things are implemented, we will see the rest. "Chang Nuo said.


    Building so many factories at once would indeed be of huge benefit to the Tru Kingdom, but it would take at least a year for this benefit to be realized.


    These things can not only slowly boost the entire domestic economy, but may also be a cash cow for the entire country in the future.


    Luosta''s mistake was that he should not have taken such a big step at once without observing the economic situation of the entire country, causing the country''s capital chain to break. When the timees, these factories can no longer proceed as scheduled, which will directly damage the country''s credibility. began to decline, and most people began to distrust the Kingdom of Toru.


    Comoro was not too happy about what Chang Nuo said about the sufficient amount of money in the pce treasury. Instead, he asked with a sad face, "Your Majesty, there is one more thing to report to you. Minister Luosta said three months ago , regarding the Crimea Kingdom project that has already been started, do we need to suspend this project now?��


    "Did anything happen over there?"


    Changnuo asked.


    "Not yet!"


    "Stop for now. The current focus is to develop the domestic economy first. As for getting involved in other countries, we will not consider it for the time being. ording to the current situation, we can only wait until one or two yearster!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    The content of the fourth volume is not only for the resources of other countries, but more importantly for the intelligence of other countries, especially the current entire South China Sea area. Among these dozens of countries, there are indeed many good things, but because In this way, the overt and covert battles are constantly going on.


    ording to the current Toru Kingdom, there is no need to have any disputes with neighboring countries. Changnuo is rtively clear about this kind of thing.


    At least the current era of great pirates has just begun to arrive. Many things have gone too far and can easily be a thorn in the eyes of the world government and the navy. This is something he is rtively clear about.


    "Comoro, are you sure that everything will be settled within half a year?" Changnuo asked.


    "There is no problem with this." Comoro said.


    "Go ahead, I look forward to seeing what you do next!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Now for His Majesty the King, there are too many things to do, but if everything needs to be dealt with by himself, then he will not have time to practice at all. This is the current development of the Kingdom of Tru ording to the model, everyone can give him enough power. For Changnuo, he only wants the results and does not care about the process.


    Even more often, he only needs a time toplete all tasks within this time. After the task ispleted, he only needs to report a result. As for what the process is like, he doesn''t care.


    The simpler point now is that Changnuo does not need to face too many people at all, only a few people. As for how they do it, that is their own business.


    This is essentially the management model of arge enterprise. A country is nothing more than an enterprise, just a little bigger. As long as these things are controlled well, then this country will move on to a perfect path.


    But there are still many things to meet him next. The space passage between the empty inds has reached the point where it needs to be established without dy.


    The kingdom''s biggest trump card at present is that it needs to increase its strength. Only in this way, no matter what situation happens in the future, the entire Tru Kingdom can deal with it calmly.


    This is not only the most difficult step, but more importantly, it is also the mostplicated step.


    Facing such an empty pce, Chang Nuo turned his head and took a look. After all, this was the ce where he grew up, and he had a rtively deep feeling for it.


    After looking around, the next moment he was instantly lost.


    Appearing again, he was still standing on the back hill, on top of the square that had turned into a huge pit.

 Chapter 168 The establishment of the space gate

    <h4>Chapter 168 The establishment of the space gate</h4>


    This back hill looks exactly like the ruins, but you can''t tell that this ce was once a square of tens of thousands square meters.


    The rubble piled up around it, forming a huge pit in the middle, but even so, this ce can be regarded as the most secret and safe ce to build the Space Gate in the entire Tru Kingdom.


    But the noise caused by the construction of the space gate is too great, and it is almost impossible to hide this kind of thing.


    Chang Nuo stood on the rubble. After thinking for a while, he immediately stretched out his right hand. Blue light was wrapped around his hand, and it shot out from his hand in the next second.


    A vortex shape slowly began to form above the deep pit in the middle of the pile of rubble in front of him, and the area of ??the ck vortex was also expanding at the same time.


    After all, building a space portal is already the most important thing in the Kingdom of Tru.


    This is considered a very important part of all ns.


    As the ck vortex slowly expanded, dark clouds began to gather in the sky, apanied by the sound of lightning and thunder. Not only could it be seen from the pce, but even the entire royal city, everyone was watching quietly at this moment. Looking at the dark clouds gathering above this ce.


    And unlike the time at Kongdao, all the dark clouds were hovering in the sky and formed a funnel-like shape.


    Lightning kept shing in the middle, and the roaring sound was endless.


    Many people are curious about what happened. After all, the power of thunder is only concentrated in this area, and other ces are not affected in any way.


    But as this kind of thing started to happen, the guards in the pce, led by Haruya, began to gather here one by one.


    But when they didn''t arrive, Abona appeared directly in front of everyone, stopping them from moving forward and saying, "Your Majesty is doing something very important, we don''t want to go!"


    "Abona, are you sure this was done by His Majesty?"


    Zhiya asked in disbelief.


    Now, except for Junhe and Abona, no one in the entire kingdom knows the extent of His Majesty''s strength, but no one has ever underestimated him.


    Most people know that the Six Types of Navy skills and domineering training methods currently spread throughout the kingdom are all from the hands of His Majesty the King, but they have never imagined what level of strength the King has achieved?


    However, after nearly half a month of contact, Zhiye also believed in Abona and did not have any doubts.


    "Captain Haruya, you should know what happened on the top of the mountain in three days at most. What you need to pay attention to now is not this ce. The movement this time is too great. What you need to do is to eliminate the royal city as soon as possible. Everyone who can see this scene is surprised in their hearts. Give them a reasonable exnation.


    The other thing is to pay attention to the areas around the royal city, those who may pose a danger to the country. After seeing this scene now, it is inevitable that some bad actions will ur. Another point is that when we came back, we encountered more than ten warships of the navy. , their purpose is to determine their location in the South China Sea. Make sure these people don''t see what''s happening here! "


    Abona immediately began to speak.


    These matters are easy to solve in their own country. The biggest headache for Abona should be the ten naval warships. It is still unclear what their purpose is in arriving in the South China Sea, but they can indeed pose a certain threat now.


    Haruya didn''t talk too much. He turned around and began to give instructions to those who wereing towards him, repeating the same words.


    Everyone performs their duties and does what they should do.


    But it is indeed toote to say this now. Everyone aboard the ten naval warships is observing what is happening in the Kingdom of Tru at this moment. Although the distance is far away, after all, it is endless on the sea and the rotating sky. The funnel cloud can also be seen in detail and clearly for them.


    "What is that ce?"


    On a navy warship, a man wearing a robe of justice looked at the funnel cloud hovering in the sky in the distance and asked directly to the person behind him.


    "Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel, that direction should be where the Tru Kingdom is, but I don''t know exactly what happened?"


    said a guard standing behind him.


    The flying squirrel has a mohawk on his head, and his long dark purple hair is tied back into a bun. The mustache is also dark purple. Wearing a lc striped suit, a dark blue shirt, and a white tie. He was wearing a white navy coat with "Justice" written on it, two medals hanging on his chest, and ck leather shoes on his feet. With a ck saber slung around his waist, he looks very brave and domineering.


    He stared at the situation ahead seriously. On the sea of ????the Four Seas, it is impossible for such weather to ur. There must be other things that would cause such a state.


    "Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel, should we go over and take a look?"


    Next to the flying squirrel stood a man who was also wearing a robe of justice, but with the epaulettes on his shoulders, he was obviously several levels lower than the flying squirrel. He was wearing the standard uniform of a navy general.


    The guy standing nearby was also a little confused, and then he opened his mouth and asked directly with a serious face.


    "Inform other warships to continue moving towards the mission location, and our ship will go over and take a look!" Flying Squirrel said.


    "Yes, Lieutenant General!"


    The guy standing next to him said directly.


    As for why they came to this ce in the South China Sea, no one knows what their mission is, but what is certain is that they are definitely noting for a certain country.


    After the flying squirrel''s order was issued, the entire ship began to deviate from the sailing formation of the ten warships, and then a single ship began to move towards the Kingdom of Tru.


    "I really don''t know what this guy Flying Squirrel is doing. It''s necessary to take care of that kind of thing. The golden phone bug hasn''t been found yet, so he still has the heart to do such a thing!"


    On another navy ship, a man with a cigar in his mouth and a big toothy smile said with an almost invisible smile.


    "Lieutenant General Huoshaoshan, it seems that it has something to do with that dark cloud, so Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel went over to take a look!"


    A general behind Huo Shaoshan said.


    However, now among these ten naval warships, everyone has a different view on this matter.


    But most people have one attitude.

 Chapter 169 Establishment of Space Channel

    <h4>Chapter 169 Establishment of Space Channel</h4>


    They came to thend of the South China Sea not wanting to cause trouble, but for the entirend of the South China Sea, these ten naval warships can definitely travel anywhere without any obstruction.


    The strong military strength can already prove everything.


    There are about 500 people on each warship, adding up to more than 5,000 well-equipped troops, and there are ten vice admirals. With this kind of strength, even in the new world, not many people dare to To provoke.


    "Notify me, get to the location of the golden phone bug as soon as possible, and quickly solve this mission. I''m still waiting to rest and sleep when I get back!"


    A woman on another warship shouted domineeringly.


    "Yes, Major General Peach Rabbit!"


    ��


    ������������


    However, in thend of King Tru''s royal city at this moment, many people from the army have begun to tell the people that the cause and result of this incident did not have much impact on them. After all, the current kingdom''s army still has a lot of influence. However, in his own country, this sentiment quickly evaporated.


    However, there is a person in the royal city at this moment. He is blind and leaning on a cane, but he looks up at the dark clouds on the mountain behind the pce. Although he cannot see it, he can feel it in his spiritual world. All the scenes to get there.


    But even when he was walking on the street, no one knew him.


    At this moment, in the mountains behind the pce, dark clouds swirled with lightning and thunder, and from time to time, lightning began to fall downwards. The target points of their attacks were all in this ck vortex.


    The huge ck vortex began to spread, and everything around it was swept into it.


    Especially the rubble that was scattered around before was all cleaned up one by one.


    But at this moment, the other ce is not sofortable!


    At the other end of the space gate above the sky ind, all the gravel attracted by the front end was ejected from this end at this moment. The two escorts standing at the front end werepletely confused about what was going on, but from Tru The rubble attracted by the kingdom was now falling towards them like raindrops.


    Faced with such a scene, the two people guarding the space gate of the empty ind quickly reported the matter. After all, they werepletely unable to understand what was going on.


    However, at this moment, in the mountain behind the pce, Changnuo was hurrying to build this teleportation gate, and it was built on this gap.


    As the ck vortex began to growrger, more and more things around it were sucked in.


    However, the construction speed this time is much faster than that on the empty ind. Although it will not bepleted in the blink of an eye, at least in terms of time, it may be more than twice as fast as that on the empty ind.


    In less than 20 minutes, the entire ck vortex had begun to gradually take shape, and the rest began to add the frame of the teleportation gate to stabilize the teleportation channel.


    But the difference from Sky Ind is that the teleportation channel this time is many timesrger than Sky Ind, and the overall height must be at least nearly 100 meters. In addition, the area of ????the ck vortex is alsorger than that of Sky Ind. The one on the other side of the sky ind is nearly three times bigger.


    The main reason is that Chang Nuo thinks that in the future, there will definitely be more than one space channel established. As the Tru Kingdom is its base, it is not known how many ces this space channel will connect to in the future, so naturally it will be all at once. Build sessfully.


    As the dark clouds in the sky continued to approach, Chang Nuo suddenly raised his left hand, and then a huge ck portal fell from the sky.


    Just stuck directly in the circle of the ck vortex, the power of space that was still spreading was suppressed within the scope of this space gate in less than 30 seconds.


    As the dark clouds in the sky began to slowly dissipate, as the only space channel in the Tru Kingdom, it was now considered a perfect sess.


    The ck space gate with a ck vortex in the middle is much weirder and more serious than if it were empty.


    But in such a ce, there is no need for any guards to guard it. After all, the only way to get to this ce is through the pce.


    If other people are more powerful, they can indeede over the sea, but once they set foot in this ce, those in the pce will be able to discover it immediately ande to solve it.


    The Space Gate is not something that anyone can use at will, at least for now. No matter how powerful it is, it is impossible to transmit it directly to the area where the Sky Ind is located through the Space Gate, which can be regarded as adding ayer of protection to this thing.


    As the dark clouds dissipated, the strange situation suddenly began to disappear. Even the navy ship sailing on the sea began to feel a little surprised when looking at the dissipated dark clouds.


    After all, it would take at least two hours to get to the Tru Kingdom from where they were, even if it was a navy warship.


    However, for the people in the Kingdom of Toru, since they have been persuaded by the Kingdom''s army in the early stage, no one pays attention to such things now. It may just be a topic for discussion after dinner.


    Looking at the now sessfully constructed space passage, Changnuo stood there looking at his masterpiece with some satisfaction. After all, this thing was unique in the pirate world.


    Of course, building a space channel cost him tens of billions of Baileys in an instant, but this kind of thing ispletely necessary for the Kingdom of Tru.


    "It looks like it''s been done up there. Are you interested in taking a look?"


    Abona, standing at the foot of the mountain, asked Zhiya with a smile.


    "Really? I don''t know if His Majesty the King will agree?"


    Zhi was also looking forward to looking at the scene above. After all, he had no idea what was going on. But at this moment, his whole body was already driven by curiosity, and he wanted to see what was going on on the top of the mountain.


    "The next thing is prepared for you, so there will definitely be no problem going up!"


    Abona said


    Others didn''t know what it was, but he knew it very well.


    It''s not the first time I''ve seen this thing, but staying at the foot of the mountain, I don''t have the same shocking feeling as standing next to it.


    He had already witnessed the establishment of a space channel on the Sky Ind for the first time. Although he was a little curious as to why the time was much shorter this time than on the Sky Ind, he was also curious as to whether it was really possible to receive a one-time pass. Arrive at the location of the empty path in an instant.


    To what extent the Space Gate can be used, Abona is much more curious than Zhiya.

 Chapter 170 Navy warships arrive

    <h4>Chapter 170 Navy warships arrive</h4>


    Driven by curiosity, the two people walked up the steps side by side, and then began to head towards the top of the mountain.


    Even before we reached the top of the mountain, we could already see the huge door from a long distance away.


    The swirling vortex above still shocked Zhiye, who had never seen such a sight before.


    "Abona, what on earth is your Majesty doing?"


    Zhiya asked in surprise.


    Abona continued walking upward without any pause, and then said as he walked, "If this thing is true, it will definitely overturn the entire world!"


    Abona himself did not dare to confirm, so he could only say this.


    For him, building a space channel that can directly reach the ind from the Kingdom of Tru is already incredible.


    Even after seeing the space passage gate established on the empty ind, he still maintained a skeptical attitude in his heart.


    "Turning the world?"


    Zhi also didn''t understand the meaning of what he said, but just looking at the ck vortex in the middle of the huge portal above his head and thinking with his feet, he could already guess that this thing was definitely not as simple as imagined.


    When the two people walked up, what was in front of them was an extremely tall thing, a huge space channel with a height of 100 meters. This thing, let alone people, could pass through it at this moment, even arge sailing ship. Go straight in without any hindrance.


    "You are here! Do you want to try to go over and have a look at the situation on the other side?"


    Chang Nuo looked at his masterpiece without looking back at the two people who had alreadye over, and then said with a slight smile on his lips.


    "Your Majesty, can this thing really lead to the Sky Ind?"


    Abona asked doubtfully.


    "Sky Ind? Can it be reached directly from here?"


    Zhi also couldn''t believe what he heard.


    "Go and have a lookter when you have time. Abona, a navy warship ising towards us. The two of you and your men should go over and deal with it!"


    Changnuo said.


    He didn''t know since when, his knowledge, color and domineering energy could directly cover almost the entire country. This distance could even reach hundreds of kilometers, let alone 10 kilometers.


    As long as it is within range of oneself, it can be sensed even subconsciously.


    "Okay, Your Majesty, the two of us are going right now!"


    Arbonne said.


    Abona has long known that the Navy has ten warships wandering in the South China Sea. They were still in the windless zone when they encountered them. ording to time, they should have entered the South China Sea area by now.


    If ten warshipse at the same time, then I may have some trouble for them, but if only one shipes, it is not a big problem.


    Haruya was still opening his mouth wide, looking at the space portal in front of him. It was so huge that it was impossible to see everything at a nce, especially on top of this mountain top. Fortunately, there were various mountains around it. , staying in the pce, raising your head, all sight lines are blocked by the mountain. From the outside, you can''t see the space portal in front of you at all.


    The reason why Zhiya was shocked was because he was attracted by the depth of this thing. Such a huge ck vortex, even standing next to him, already gave people a chilling feeling.


    "Let''s go! The navy warships are about tond on our country''s territory soon, so hurry up and take a look!"


    Abona said while looking at Haruya who was still looking shocked.


    "oh����"


    Zhiya didn''t even turn his head and replied directly, but his eyes were still staring at this huge space portal.


    There is even some reluctance to start preparing to leave here. Something like this not only makes people feel scared, but also makes people feel curious.


    The naval warships sailing on the sea did not stop because the dark clouds in the sky dissipated. Instead, under themand of Flying Squirrel, they continued to move towards the Kingdom of Tru.


    From the beginning, nothing could be seen, until the shadow of the Tru Kingdom slowly began to appear in the sight of the ship. They walked directly along the ce where the dark clouds just spread out.


    Navy warships are alreadyrge ships, but when they came to this ce for the first time, they couldn''t find any port at all, so they could only move directly to the nearest ce on the shore.


    But at this time, Abona Kazuji had also appeared with the pce guards at the ce where they were about to dock.


    Two hundred people were waiting here. Haruya and the pce guards wore the same clothes, all ckbat uniforms. Every guard behind them stood side by side with their arms crossed until the navy warship appeared in front of them. in front of.


    For a navy warship, even before it docked, he had already seen so many people waiting for him on the shore, and the flying squirrel''s expression gradually became serious.


    After all, in his understanding, when he came to this ce, there would be no one at all. But now there are so many people waiting, which can only mean one thing. Among the other people''s crowd, there are He possesses a rtively powerful hegemony of knowledge and information, but for thend of the four seas, these things should basically not appear.


    But now a small Tru Kingdom can actually predict the docking position of their naval warships in advance. How can this not shock people?


    "Notice down, everyone is ready to fight!"


    Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel shouted to the adjutant next to him.


    "Ready to fight!"


    The adjutant then shouted loudly to everyone on the ship, and then all the muzzles of the guns were aimed at Abona on the shore, where the group of people were.


    But for ordinary soldiers, they can''t see the people on the shore at all. They can only point the muzzle in the direction of the shore based on their feelings.


    Flying Squirrel stood alone on the deck, staring ahead with a serious expression. He now wanted to know what secrets existed in the Tru Kingdom.


    After all, during the previous meeting of the Navy Headquarters, Aokiji had already mentioned that the Toru Kingdom was not what everyone saw and must be monitored more closely.


    A country that can allow its general to say such words definitely has a side that no one knows about it.


    And the other party didn''t look like he was joking, he was extremely serious and serious when he spoke.


    Flying Squirrel at least thinks so at the moment. He has known before that the entire Tru Kingdom has even begun to imitate the navy''s training model, and some aspects are even earlier than them. Therefore, the internal situation of this country is definitely worthy of their navy''s training. More detailed exploration.

 Chapter 171 Swordsman

    <h4>Chapter 171 Swordsman</h4>


    Now that the ship has reached this position, it is simply impossible to turn around or change other directions.


    But now that we are here, what needs to be done still needs to be done.


    The naval warships continued to approach the shore. Although they would not approach the shore directly, at least they could go ashore at any time.


    "Abona, do you recognize the people here?"


    On the shore, Zhiya looked at Abona curiously and asked.


    "There are so many people in the Navy, how could I know them all? Maybe when I came into contact with the Navy, this guy might just be an unknown person!"


    Abona said with a smile.


    Fortunately, the flying squirrel didn''t hear this, otherwise he might have had to lose his temper.


    "I see, I don''t know why these guys came to our country for nothing?" Zhiya said speechlessly.


    "Okay, don''t say such things here. People are going tond soon, so hurry up and shout!"


    Abona nced at Zhiya and said.


    Zhiya stood aside and sighed, then took two steps forward with a helpless expression, his expression gradually became serious, and shouted to the naval warship that was about to dock, "This is the boundary of the Toru Kingdom, and the navy warship has no reason to do so." Don��t dock!��


    Afraid that the other party wouldn''t hear, Zhiya repeated it again.


    But the first time he shouted, the other party had already heard it and just ignored it.


    Flying Squirrel continued to insist on his opinion, and then ordered the navy warship to continue to move towards the shore, and the ship was already on alert and might start an attack at any time.


    Abona''s smile just now gradually disappeared. He had no good impression of the navy, but now that he had warned the other party, the other party still looked disdainful, which made him quite annoyed.


    He walked directly to Zhiya without saying anything else. He hugged the dawn in his hands and held it directly in his right hand at this moment.


    Without saying any more warning, Abona instantly pulled out the long knife in his hand and shed in the direction of the navy warship.


    A strong sword light burst out instantly, but Abona''s attack did not target the naval warships, but only attacked their sides.


    This can also be regarded as an early warning.


    But such a warning is indeed a bit big. At least two kilometers of seawater were directly divided into two halves at this moment. When the seawater closed, even the navy warship was a little unstable. Many soldiers on it were a little unstable this time. Amid the shock, they fell directly to the ground, and a few of them failed to stand still and fell directly into the sea water.


    "Swordsman...!!"


    Flying Squirrel was instantly shocked. He had never expected that he would meet such a powerful person while staying in the South China Sea.


    "Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel, do you need to order an attack?"


    The adjutant shouted with some urgency. After all, the other party had already taken action. If he didn''t take action at this moment, it would be unjustifiable.


    After Abona struck the sword, he directly put Dawn back into the scabbard, and then stared at the situation ahead with solemn eyes.


    The lust of seeing and hearing began to reverberate on the ship, and even the voices on the ship could still be heard very clearly.


    "Zhiya, tell everyone to prepare to fight!"


    Abona said in a serious and cold voice.


    "Ready to fight!"


    Zhi also became serious, the expression just now waspletely forgotten, and now the rest have begun to enter the duel state.


    The flying squirrel on the navy warship had an equally serious expression. He looked coldly in the direction of the shore and did not choose to order direct firing.


    What surprised everyone was that the flying squirrel jumped into the air on moon steps and ran in the direction where they were.


    But before hended, the flying squirrel directly pulled out the long knife from his waist and shed in the direction of Abona in an instant.


    The red sword light also flew towards where they were at this moment. ording to the flying squirrel''s current strength, there would be no one on the shore who could be his opponent except Abona.


    Even in the face of such a situation, Abona didn''t even frown. He instantly pulled out a beam of light from Dawn in his hand and shed it out. The next second, Dawn continued to return to the scabbard.


    But the moment the two sword lights collided in the air, a powerful impact broke out.


    "Vice Admiral, do you want to start a war?"


    Haruya shouted in a cold voice.


    The king''s guards behind him are now ready for battle. As long as Zhiya in front says a word, they will rush to the naval battleship without hesitation and then ruthlessly kill them.


    The flying squirrel didn''t make any reply, fell to the ground, teleported, and softly shouted "Shave..."


    In the next second, he disappearedpletely and reappeared, with the entire knife already appearing next to Abona''s neck.


    But in such a short period of time, Abona had already pulled out Dawn and stood directly in front of Flying Squirrel''s knife.


    Seeing that the blow was unsessful, the flying squirrel was about to retreat when Abona also hit the opponent directly in the abdomen with a very fast speed.


    This time he received a solid kick, and the flying squirrel was kicked away a long distance.


    Abona had no intention of letting the other person go just like that. He rushed forward again in an instant. He raised the knife in his hand and was about to end the other person''s life. At this moment, a familiar voice came to his ears: "Let them go." leave!"


    Chang Nuo was sitting in the pce, and his casual words could be heard more than ten miles away. He had already applied his domineering energy to such an extent.


    The battle on the beach has always been in his perception, and he has not let go of even the smallest movements.


    Abona was quite shocked when he heard the sound, but he still put away the long knife in his hand and immediately retreated to Zhiya''s side.


    Flying Squirrel did not have it so easy. When he came to and in the South China Sea, he could be injured by what they called indigenous people here. This was simply his biggest shame since he became a vice admiral.


    He slowly stood up at the beach, and the long knife in his hand had been put back into the scabbard. He looked at the other party with serious and cold eyes. Although he didn''t know why the other party retreated in the end after clearly being able to kill him, but at this moment He would never look down on these people again.


    After standing up, he no longer looked as arrogant as before, at least he would never underestimate the people in front of him again. No matter where the navy went, he had never been treated like this. The key is that this time he was really in their home. After being warned, they continued to go ashore. The Kingdom of Toru is not a member of the World Government, and they canpletely refuse to abide by the World Government''s treaties.


    "Abona, why did you let him go?"


    Zhiya asked a little confused.


    "Your Majesty''s order, I can''t do anything about it."


    Abona said with a frown.

 Chapter 172 Sound transmission more than ten kilometers away

    <h4>Chapter 172 Sound transmission more than ten kilometers away</h4>


    Abona himself didn''t understand why Chang Nuo''s voice reached his ears. The other party was obviously observing every move here.


    But things have reached this point now, why can''t we just take action and directly eliminate the opponent?


    The flying squirrel not far away also stood up, dusted himself off, and then stared at Abona seriously. He was quite surprised toe out this time.


    However, the sailors on the ship were all shocked and dumbfounded at this moment. No one could have imagined that the famous Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel in the navy would be defeated by others in such a small ce in the South China Sea?


    "It''s really surprising that people like you still exist in the South China Sea!"


    The flying squirrel took back the long knife in his hand, took a few steps towards Abona with a serious look and said.


    "Fighting without telling us, is it possible that today''s navy is like this? Or does your navy want to go to war with our Kingdom of Tru?"


    Zhiya directly stole Abona''s words and asked directly in a cold voice.


    "Hmph~"


    The flying squirrel showed a disdainful smile. He had never thought that such a small country would dare to challenge the naval power. Something that he had never encountered before actually encountered it today.


    "I think your Kingdom of Tru has something unknown that is enough to threaten the World Government and the security of the entire world. ording to the relevant regtions of the World Government, our navy has the right to go to your country to check it out!"


    The flying squirrel said still in an upright tone.


    He had already felt that the ce where the swirling dark clouds caused such a big movement just now should be on the edge of the Tru Kingdom. Now, no matter what, driven by curiosity, he had to go in and check it out.


    Originally, I wanted to use force to directly make the other party obey, but now my own strength is not as strong as the other party, so I can only use this method to force the other party to take a step back.


    But when the flying squirrel said this, Abona smiled nonchntly, and then said leisurely, "You are talking about the relevant regtions of the world government, but our Kingdom of Tru has joined the world government some time ago. ?


    Since you have not joined the world government, then naturally you don''t need to pay attention to your so-called world government-rted regtions. "


    The flying squirrel didn''t know what to say. No one dared to say such words in any country in the entire sea world, but this time they really encountered it.


    The other party did not join the World Government, which made them quite embarrassed. He was really speechless for a moment.


    "Is it possible that after looking at the situation in your country, the World Government will need to step in in the end?"


    The flying squirrel suddenly changed his tone, and the murderous aura on his body suddenly appeared. He did not want any country to appear that could threaten the navy. If his own strength was not good enough, it would probably take a few more hours to let other navy warshipse over at the same time.


    "Vice Admiral Flying Squirrel, do you really think that you can do whatever you want in our Kingdom of Tru? Or do you really think that we dare not kill you? Or, in the South China Sea, your ten naval warships can form a Can the scale of the Demon-ying Order ensure that you can get out of this ce safely?"


    As soon as Flying Squirrel finished speaking, Chang Nuo, who was sitting in the pce hall, suddenly opened his mouth and said angrily, and the sound also directly spread to Flying Squirrel''s ears more than ten kilometers away.


    Staying at the beach, the flying squirrel immediately started to turn his head and look around, but to his surprise, he did not find anyone speaking, because no one in front of Abona and others showed signs of opening their mouths to speak.


    So the only thing he can think of now is that there is a more powerful person behind the Tru Kingdom!


    "This will never end!"


    The flying squirrel didn''t show off anymore. Although he was a little angry, he still turned around and walked back to the warship directly on the moon steps.


    After standing on the deck, the flying squirrel stared at Abona and others for a while, and then shouted loudly, "Return..."


    Everyone on the entire warship has seen that their general is extremely angry at this moment, and no one will touch the other''s brow at this moment.


    One by one, they could only do as the flying squirrel said.


    Even after getting on the ship, Flying Squirrel still couldn''t hide his anger. He clenched his fist in his right hand and held his left hand on the railing of the warship. The strong strength had even deformed the wooden railings on it, causing several shapes to appear. A very deep fingerprint.


    But now even his anger was of no use.


    This time, their navy warship came to the Kingdom of Tru, and the whole thing was a disappointment.


    Abona and the others who stayed on the shore waited until Flying Squirrel and their navy warship disappeared on the sea level. Only then did theyplete their mission.


    This confrontation can be regarded as the Kingdom of Tru''s first frontal charge against the navy.


    But no one knows what they will face next, whether there will be some more powerful opponents at the Navy Headquarters.


    But now even if they give the Navy those ideas, the Navy headquarters does not dare to send troops inrge numbers. The New World has already put a time bomb on their heads. These people understand what the trade-offs should be.


    If they were staying on the Grand Route, they would most likely face an attack from the Navy Headquarters at this moment. Unfortunately, they were located in a ce all over the world, with the sky high and the emperor far away.


    Even though they have ten naval warships sailing in the South China Sea, not everyone on them is extremely powerful. Anyone with a general''s talent can easily destroy these warships.


    Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel did not imagine that the retreat would be the end of the matter. Not long after returning to the ship, after they disappeared, Flying Squirrel directly picked up the phone and began to inform others about what happened here. people.


    Ten naval warships sailed in the South China Sea. This is their biggest trump card and courage.


    But when he took the phone and told what he had experienced, the person on the other side calmed down for a moment and then said, "Haha..., Flying Squirrel, this matter is no joke. I didn''t expect that you, who has always been meticulous, could actually do this..." If you tell such a joke at this time, there are still people in thisnd of the South China Sea who can beat you, so don��t be ridiculous!��


    "You bastard! Do you think I''m joking at this time?"


    The flying squirrel was even more angry now. He didn''t expect that even his own people didn''t believe this kind of thing.


    But such thoughts are normal. After all, even after he came to the South China Sea, he had never thought of it. There will be someone who can surpass him in terms of strength.

 Chapter 173 Council Department

    <h4>Chapter 173 Council Department</h4>


    At this moment, it would take at least three hours of sailing for other naval warships to reach where the Flying Squirrel was, so through the phone bug, they could not understand what exactly happened at that time.


    Although the group of peopleughed a little at first, after hearing the flying squirrel''s serious and angry words, they all fell into deep thought.


    It''s not that they don''t believe Flying Squirrel, after all, they have heard the news that Flying Squirrel has received.


    Each of these ten naval warships has a naval admiral on board. When they reach their position, they can naturally know a lot of things that others don''t know.


    Although they had all heard that the Kingdom of Tru was not as simple as it seemed, no one cared about it.


    How powerful can a small country in the South China Sea be, no matter how powerful it is?


    After the flying squirrel cursed at the phone bug angrily, he hung up directly. Their main mission goal when they came to the South China Sea was not the Tru Kingdom, but the group of CP Two who had disappeared. To be more precise, it was for Came looking for the golden phone bug.


    Having already reached the position of lieutenant general, it is not that Flying Squirrel cannot distinguish the priorities of things, but this time the humiliation suffered in the Tru Kingdom, the expression on Flying Squirrel''s face has proven that it is impossible to just do this. It��s easy to give up.


    So even after leaving, the flying squirrel still sat angrily on the deck, still looking in the direction of the Tru Kingdom, which had disappeared.


    Including his adjutant, no one on the entire ship dared to approach the current vice-admiral, for fear that the other party would vent his anger on themter.


    The duel between Flying Squirrel and Abona was witnessed by everyone. His swordsmanship, which he was proud of, was defeated directly and openly, and it took such a short time.


    Everyone on the ship had nothing to do right now, and they wanted to lick the floor directly, for fear that they would be scolded if they did anything slightly unsatisfactoryter.


    But Abona and Zhiye had already begun to lead the team back. Along the way, Zhiye was chattering like a man possessed by a chatterbox.


    Although he had heard that Abona was a swordsman before, this time, he really felt how powerful the opponent was.


    This group of people came in a hurry when they came, and they were running all the way, but when they went back, there was no need for this.


    For them, the journey of more than ten kilometers can only bepleted in one or two hours, even if they just walk.


    "Abona, that sword strike you made at the beginning was so handsome. I didn''t expect you to be a swordsman. It''s really surprising!..."


    Zhiya kept talking, but Abona seemed not to hear it and still walked forward slowly and hurriedly.


    "Zhiye, I remember that the king didn''t leave the pce, right?"


    Abona ignored what Zhiya said to him, but he kept a deep mentality along the way, always thinking about where his Majesty the King was staying to convey the message to him. Could it be true? Do you want to stay in the pce?


    It was because of things like this that he had been thinking about it since he came back.


    Zhiya was suddenly startled after hearing this. He still didn''t understand what Abona meant?


    "Abona, it seems that His Majesty the King has not left the pce at all, right? But why do you ask so?"


    Zhiya asked.


    "Just talking!" Abona turned his face and said directly.


    Abona really can''t imagine how powerful his Majesty the King is at this moment. If he is really standing in the pce and canmunicate with them from a distance of more than ten kilometers, then what level of domineering power he has seen and heard, I don��t know how far they have reached?


    After the navy warship disappeared from the Toru Kingdom, Chang Nuo, who had been staying in the pce hall, slowly showed a smile.


    However, he also knew the purpose of the ten warships of the Navy ining to the South China Sea!


    Unexpectedly, after such a long time, the World Government and the Navy came to investigate matters rted to CP.


    It is precisely because of such a long time that Changnuo has forgotten how to deal with the golden phone bug at that time.


    After all, he remembered that this thing was given to Junhe. As for how the other party did it, he really had no memory at all.


    "Your Majesty, this is what you asked for. I have brought it to you."


    Outside the pce hall, Gogoya slowly walked in holding a pile of documents and said.


    "Why is there only this little?"


    "Your Majesty the King, what is currently ced here is thend information of the entire country. As for other things, it is still behind!" Gogoya said.


    "These are far from enough. Let''s take everything else to the main hall. Also, let the Council of Ministers hold a meeting in the main hall tomorrow. Remember to have someone make a census of all the situations in the entire country." Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty, I wonder what your purpose is for doing this? These things should be done by dedicated people!"


    Gogoya asked curiously.


    "Do what you should do, and I willmunicate the rest with the Senate." Chang Nuo said.


    The Senate Department is a very special department in the Kingdom of Tru. There are not many young people among them, which is equivalent to the civil servants of the entire country.


    Moreover, there are approximately 100 people in the entire Senate Department, and the average age is almost 40 years old.


    It can also be regarded as the mostplicated and difficult department to enter in the entire Toru Kingdom.


    Most matters in the country are almost decided through the Senate, which will implement public voting rights. This is also a department established by Changnuo two years ago.


    With their presence, this part of the pressure on him as the king has been greatly reduced. In the entire country, the only ce where he can make decisions so far, except for the Ministry of Commerce, is the military.


    But Chang Nuo only targeted the guard team, which included the pce and national guard teams, which numbered about 20,000 people, and could be considered the most elite force in the entire country.


    As for the remaining four to five million troops in the kingdom, they are also directly managed by the Council of Ministers.


    It can also be said that 100 of them are equivalent to half a king.


    For such a thing, no one in the entire country and ministers refused to object. After all, in a certain aspect, this not only increased their real power behavior, but also found the best and most effective solution for the people. .

 Chapter 174 Decision-making Meeting

    <h4>Chapter 174 Decision-making Meeting</h4>


    The powers exercised by the Council of Ministers are mainly aimed at people''s livelihood matters and nning various important domestic affairs. As the king of this country, Changnuo is only responsible for the country''s development direction, military development, economic development and foreign exchanges.


    Therefore, after encountering major events and changing the country''s national policy, Changnuo needs tomunicate with the Council in advance so that they can prepare files andmunicate them to the people of the country.


    This n can be said to be effective. Even if the king of this country makes a major decision-making error, it will not change much for the people of the country.


    There are currently only three most important departments in the entire Kingdom of Tru, namely the Council Department, the Commercial Department and the Guards. Thetter two are directly controlled by the king of this country, so their development speed is astonishingly fast.


    "His Majesty the King, is it necessary to notify other people when convening a meeting of the Council of Ministers?" Gogoya asked.


    "No need, this time the Experience Council will participate!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty."


    Gogoya said respectfully.


    After finishing speaking, Gogoya ced the pile of information in her hand directly in the main hall, but as soon as she left, Abona and Abona were already back here.


    And he still watched Gogoya leave this ce with his own eyes.


    As soon as he entered the gate, Abona Kazuji respectfully shouted "Your Majesty!"


    "It''s good to be back. I just have something to talk to you about next."


    Changnuo stood up from his seat and walked a few steps down, and then said to Zhiya, "You need to gather all the Kingdom Guard personnel at the back of the pce within a week. I will take you there when the timees." Let��s go to the next ce!��


    "Is it Sky Ind?" Zhiya asked excitedly.


    "You will know this matter by then." Chang Nuo said.


    "Your Majesty the King, if they all leave the kingdom, what will happen to the security of this country?"


    Arbonne asked.


    "Now is not the time to worry about this. The kingdom also had no strength before and has existed for hundreds of years. Besides, in the past two years, the kingdom does not n to have any conflicts with the outside world, so it can only take advantage of the opportunity. During this period of time, start to recharge your batteries." Chang Nuo said.


    "If that''s the case, then I''ll go with them when the timees! Anyway, there''s nothing special about staying in the kingdom." Abona said.


    "It''s still early for you to talk about this matter. There are indeed tasks for you next. You need to stay here and take good care of yourself. We''ll talk about the restter." Chang Nuo said perfunctorily again.


    "Your Majesty, what about the navy warship?" Zhiye asked.


    "They have their own things to do when theye to the South China Sea. Besides, our Kingdom of Tru also belongs to a country. Now is not the time to let anyone ughter us." Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Although he doesn''t want to have any conflict with the navy now, if the other party goes too far at this time, he doesn''t mind a direct battle.


    He didn''t believe that the navy at this moment had any ability to deal with things in the world, so it was because of this that Chang Nuo didn''t take them seriously.


    Or maybe it''s because after his strength has improved, all of this has be rtively insignificant. Just relying on his own strength ispletely enough to destroy those ten naval warships, so why should there be anything worth worrying about?


    After hearing this, Zhiya took a deep breath and said, "Your Majesty, I understand."


    "Zhiya, in addition to summoning the Kingdom Guard this week, take a day to take Abona to Clearwater Bay. The rest of the work there will be left to you."


    Changnuo said to Zhiya that thest words were for Abona.


    For Abona, who had just arrived in this country less than half a month ago, all of this sounded so strange that he could only turn his head slightly and look at Zhiya with a look of help.


    "Abona, Clearwater Bay is the shipbuilding base of the Kingdom of Tru. Almost all craftsmen from the entire kingdom gather there. This is an important ce for our entire Kingdom of Tru to develop its navy andmercial transportation in the future." Zhiya said.


    "Okay, if nothing happens, you should hurry over. The other thing is to send people to keep an eye on those navy warships. If anything happens, just report them in time." Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    ��


    At present, the entire country is proceeding in an orderly manner, but Chang Nuo is very aware of the drawbacks.


    If it weren''t for the existence of the system in this country, ording to the current development model, no one knows how many people would have died of starvation. Therefore, in response to this situation, tomorrow''s Senate meeting will be held.


    This will be another major change for theing Toru Kingdom.


    So far, Changnuo has only been king for three years. He has changed the state affairs twice in three years. This is already considered very diligent. If the people cannot ept it, it will be embarrassing enough.


    the next day.


    At this moment, except for one aisle in the middle of the pce hall, tables have been set up in all other ces, and everyone''s ce, including tea, has been ced.


    The collective participation of everyone in the Senate at this meeting is enough to prove the importance of love.


    Most of the things mentioned in the first national meeting were almost participated in by the Council, but this time they also discussed the feasibility of the next n internally before starting to inform the whole country.


    This time the meeting was not broadcast live. Instead, it was more secretive and conservative. Except for Chang Nuo and the members of the Senate, no one from the entire Kingdom Guard would approach.


    Only Chang Nuo knew the importance of the meeting. The most important purpose of cooperating with basta and cing nearly half of the business n there was to change the existing economic status of the Tru Kingdom.


    The first thing to do is to get rid of all the current economic shorings in the entire country. Once this kind of thing is tolerated on arge scale, it is likely to lead to the entire country being unable to make ends meet.


    At this moment, Losstar has also begun to leave for the country of basta, and there are about 20 people from the Ministry of Commerce apanying him. Their main purpose in the past was to re-n to the country of basta in ordance with all the current ns in the Kingdom of Tru. Among them, it can be regarded as a step-by-step demonstration.

 Chapter 175 Another Policy Reform

    <h4>Chapter 175 Another Policy Reform</h4>


    Everything is within the prediction, and there is no deviation from the trajectory at all.


    Everyone in the pce hall was now solemn. Chang Nuo had already arrived early. Most of the people sitting below were in their forties, and of course there were a few younger ones among them.


    Each of them sat upright and looked at Chang Nuo who was sitting on top without a smile.


    "The Senate meeting held this time was a bit rushed, and there was almost no time for everyone to prepare. However, there is not much time left for the Kingdom of Tru, so convening this emergency meeting today can be regarded as a meeting of the Kingdom of Tru. Another change follows.


    During this period, you can raise any questions you have at any time and startmunicating on this matter. The King''s Secretary Gogoya is responsible for recording, and the Minister of Consultation Meng Ge is responsible for coordination.


    This meeting is expected tost for one day, and sufficient time will be left for everyone to discuss.


    But regarding the previous issues, I will briefly throw out two of them now. You can discuss them first. I will need to get your voting results in half an hour.


    The first topic is that regarding the various issues that the Kingdom of Tru will face in the future, simply relying on the current national army to maintain it will definitely not be enough to achieve a certain effect, and it will easily confuse the vision by then, so what I am raising now , that is, the entire Kingdom of Tru will implement two internal and external military reform ns in the future. Internally, it will be called the National Guard, and externally, it will be called the National Army. All mechanisms will be reformed. As for the n, I will leave it to you. Have discussions.


    The second topic is about the current legal issues in the country. I have produced a legal dictionary. Gogoya will send it to all of youter. You can browse it briefly and roughly. You will need to give it to me in half an hour. reply.


    The answer I need is whether you agree or disagree with this point of view, and the other is toe up with your suggestions for the next n of the Kingdom of Utru.


    I need to get urate answers to these two topics in half an hour, and then we can discuss the following questions! "


    Chang Nuo sat at the top and said directly to everyone.


    This time, his expression was very serious throughout. After all, all ns have begun to be fully rolled out. Whether in terms of business ns or military ns, they have now achieved steady victory, so for some domestic Stable work must be done now.


    If not, it will be difficult for the entire Tru Kingdom to ept such a thing if it is a mess externally and is not stable internally.


    So after Chang Nuo finished talking about these two topics, the entire hall immediately became as noisy as a vegetable market, but Chang Nuo, who was sitting in the upper position, didn''t mind such a lively atmosphere.


    Everyone expressed their opinions enthusiastically, and the first topic was easily epted. Without even thinking about it, they had unanimously approved it. Now the moreplicated issue is the second issue. No one had expected that His Majesty the King would suddenly need to change the entire country''sws.


    But what they didn''t expect was that the legal texts that Chang Nuo brought out were all so novel, and they all felt dazzled.


    How can Changnuo have such great ability? It just spent millions of Baileys and purchased it directly from the system space.


    Stabilizing the country is the most important direction of development in the next two years. The Kingdom of Tru does not n to take any action within two years. Now the most important things have begun to be carried out in an all-round way. From the economy, military and people''s livelihood, these are all things that need to be paid attention to and implemented. Something thates down.


    Two years may not be a long time, but for the Tru Kingdom, it ispletely enough.


    Chang Nuo is now 17 years old. Even in two years'' time, he will only be 19 years old, so there will be many things he can do in the future.


    The reason why we chose to hold such a meeting suddenly now is because the business aspect has begun to make considerable progress, but in terms of the domestic people''s livelihood, it is stillgging far behind.


    During the whole day''s meeting, more than a dozen topics were discussed, ranging from basic matters concerning people''s livelihood to situations nned for the future.


    In fact, most of them are beyond the reach of themon people. The only difference is that in the following days, the people of the entire country began to resume growing food, and they can also directly grow fruits. In short, the entire country will grow in the following days. , began topletely ban those crop fields where flowers and nts were grown.


    After all, this kind of thing is not a long-term solution. It is enough to persist for one or two years to allow the domestic economy to recover slightly.


    The most important thing is that in the next nning, the important n of the Ministry of Commerce is to transfer the entire perfume industry to basta. Of course, the fresh water purification system will also be used to directly irrigaterge areas ofnd throughout basta for nting. The types of flowers and nts needed for perfume.


    In order to encourage all people to start growing grains or other fruits and vegetables, the taxws have been regted to basically achieve tax exemption for farnd, and even have the economic effect ofpensation.


    Because the current perfume storage capacity of the entire Tru Kingdom is rtivelyrge, they can make full use of this opportunity to fully acquire thend for flower cultivation.


    Of course, all this is just to n him out in today''s time. As for the actual implementation, I''m afraid it will take at least a while.


    Not only the people need time to rx, but the entire country also needs time to settle.


    It is not difficult to imagine how much of a sensation this matter will cause when ites out!


    But even so, these are things that the entire country should be doing, and they need to be done well.


    In the midst of rapid development, we also need to strive for victory in a stable manner. The shorings have already been revealed. For long-term ns, sometimes it is necessary to cut through the mess quickly.


    Chang Nuo also pretends that long-term pain is not as good as short-term pain. After all, in other countries, it would be pretty good if people can get less than half of the food they grow on an acre ofnd, but in this country it is not. No onepetes with them, and there are no nobles in the national team. This can be regarded as the most valuable asset left by the old king to Changnuo.

 Chapter 176 The mysterious space passage

    <h4>Chapter 176 The mysterious space passage</h4>


    The main reason why Changnuo had to endure the pain and directly carry out the national economic reform was that he did not want the entire country to rely too much on the system in the end.


    All grain purchases are provided by the system, which also gives Changnuo a sense of security.


    Now that the country has developed to this point and is no longer what it used to be, it is time for the means of providing change to start working.


    When the meeting was discussed in the evening, Meng Ge, a middle-aged man in his forties, stood up. He was originally the old king''s most capable man, and he was also considered the mainstay among the country''s civil servants.


    "Your Majesty the King, you have proposed so many ns this time. How long does it take for our Council to notify you? And regarding many detailed issues, we cannot all agree on them in a short period of time.


    Especially in terms of nationalws, many things require different rules based on the actual national conditions.


    In addition, in terms of people''s livelihood, if the country vigorously subsidizes them to restore their original farnd and abandon the current flower cultivation, then the country will spend a lot of money in a short period of time. I wonder if His Majesty the King has considered this? "


    Meng Ge said slowly.


    Because this was a day-long meeting, the most important thing is actually these two aspects. As for the other detailed standards, as long as they feel reasonable, they can be passed. It��s just that these two things are different. One thing takes too much time. The length needs to be customized ording to the actual national conditions, and the other involves Bailey��s expenditure. These two things can be subversive policy reforms for the entire country.


    They have been sitting for a day, and the answers to these questions are not just considered now. Chang Nuo smiled naturally and said, "Minister Meng Ge has considered it veryprehensively, but all the shorings of the kingdom have now been revealed. In front of others, there is no need to care too much about this at this moment.


    Taking advantage of the fact that the kingdom''s economy is currently developing, it is an opportunity that all citizens can ept to solve all the problems at this time. If once the country is really developed and finalized, then it will carry out national reform. It will have a huge impact on the country. "


    "What His Majesty said is to solve all the shorings at the forefront. This is indeed the best option at the moment. However, I don''t know if the people will be able to ept the transfer of more than half of the economy to basta." Meng Ge said.


    "For this point, Minister Meng has no need to worry. The country''s economic industry is enough to support the people in the country. There are too many factories, which is not very good for us, but moving to basta is different. At least it will allow us to open up a new market, and most importantly, moving to basta will y a great role in the stability of the country." Changnuo said.


    "I hope it will be as His Majesty said. After I return, I will study the content of this meeting more carefully and provide a n as soon as possible. Then I will ask Your Majesty to review it!" Meng Ge said.


    Although the Senate can almost decide major domestic affairs, they dare not let go of too much determination in matters such as national reform.


    As the minister of the Council of Ministers, Meng Ge has sometimes not understood what His Majesty the King has done since Chang Nuo became the King of the Kingdom of Tru, but he almost agrees with it. After all, the development of this country to the present has brought great changes to everyone. You can see it all, no matter how bad it is, it is at least much better than before.


    Therefore, almost no one objected to the requests put forward by His Majesty the King. However, the purpose of this group of people''s existence was to make the issues raised by His Majesty the King more detailed and directly implement them on the people.


    This kind of development is the easiest one for everyone to ept. The Kingdom of Tru has reached the present step by step. It can be said that it has reached the critical point of development. Even with this change, there is no guarantee that it will be sessful in the future. There will be no new points of change in the next few years.


    But every change can always make the country make rapid progress again!


    Even though the meeting was over, the entire pce hall was still full of lively atmosphere. No one in the Council left. Taking advantage of the excitement, they gathered together in twos and threes and began to discuss the topics of today''s meeting.


    The most important thing is that there is a lot of content today. At least nearly 80 reform points have appeared, and each of them will be full of unlimited benefits for the people, and it can also be regarded as a major change in the previous policies. .


    Chang Nuo was happy to see them like this, able to work so hard that they could forget food and sleep, but he was even more looking forward to having a better answer sheet handed in.


    I did only mention the general policy, but more importantly, I relied on these people to start to detail the n. Although the reform ns have been put forward, the key is to implement all the ns with so many concrete reports. It is estimated that there will be no one or two. It''s simply impossible toplete in a year''s time.


    Just the most important reform of people''s livelihood will take at least half a year to arrange, and it also needs to appease the emotions of all the people and let them know the benefits of doing so to these people?


    ��������


    A weekter.


    Chang Nuo stood on the hill behind the pce, with the huge space portal in front of him.


    The ck vortex is still full of weirdness, and makes people feel like falling into an abyss. For those who see it for the first time, an inexplicable sense of fear has already filled the whole body.


    However, he was not the only one staying here at the moment. Standing behind him all the way to the foot of the mountain, tens of thousands of people were waiting in a long queue to enter.


    Zhi Ye stood behind Chang Nuo, with a serious expression on his face, and his whole person was meticulous. Everyone behind him was wearing uniforms and ckbat uniforms, which gave him apletely different style at this moment.


    Everyone who saw the space portal at this moment had almost the same expression, not only full of surprise but also full of horror.


    After all, people who saw this kind of thing for the first time, including strong men like Abona, were shocked and surprised, let alone these people.


    Each of these people was carrying a huge ck backpack containing personal daily necessities. After stepping through this door, everyone understood that it would be impossible toe back within two years.


    But none of them refused and now went to live in another ce. The concept of protecting the country has been deeply nted in their minds.

 Chapter 177 Heading to Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 177 Heading to Sky Ind</h4>


    This long line of people had already arrived at this ce before dawn.


    They all received the same special mission, and these people had been notified a few days ago.


    However, no one knows about this special mission, but everyone already knows in their hearts that for their current strength, the only special mission is training.


    Tens of thousands of people walked from the mountain to the foot of the mountain, all dressed in ck uniforms and carrying a big ck bag. Such arge number of people did not attract anyone''s attention.


    Not to mention the people in the royal city, not even anyone in the pce noticed.


    They set off under the cover of night and were already waiting here early in the morning.


    Haruya stood at the front and shouted directly with a serious expression, "His Majesty the King, Morode Shang Haruya, the captain of the Royal Pce Guards of King Tru, is here to report that the Kingdom''s special forces should have 11,500 people, but the actual number is 11,500. Please give instructions." ����


    Chang Nuo stood here, silently paying attention to everyone behind him, and then said in an equally high-pitched voice, "They are all future pirs. The entire Tru Kingdom will be in your hands from now on, and the families behind you will , the people will rely on your hands in the future to build a safe country.


    It��s just that for now, your strength is still insufficient, so starting from today, each of you will ept a special task and be what the people of the Toru Kingdom expect, and be a person who can protect your family. , a warrior who protects the kingdom and protects his own share of honor!


    Today, I, Genji Nagano, as the king of the Toru Kingdom, will personally see you off. When you return, I hope that each of you can bring back a warrior who can make the kingdom safe and secure in your hands! "


    Chang Nuo''s words not only raised his voice, but also used the domineering power of knowledge to directly spread the words. Even people standing at the foot of the mountain can clearly hear at this moment that his own king is standing at the top. His Majesty''s words.


    Every soldier is very excited at this moment. They are not afraid of hardship and fatigue, and it is already a great honor for them to receive a word of praise.


    Not to mention participating in a training mission, and having His Majesty the King personally see them off. For this group of people who have their King as their ultimate goal and belief, the expressions on their faces are enough to express any emotion.


    But in order to keep quiet, no one in the long queue opened their mouths to speak.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he took out a phone with a crown from his pocket, and then pressed the button on it. After a click, Chang Nuo said in a serious voice, "Jun He, prepare to greet, From now on, these people will be left to you!"


    The phone bug immediately showed a serious expression, and then a voice came and said, "Don''t worry, Your Majesty, Junhe will live up to the trust of the kingdom!"


    From the beginning to now, no one has stepped through this portal after it was built, but this does not hinder its safety.


    At this moment, in front of the empty ind space portal, Junhe has taken the king''s guards who are staying here, standing in two rows one by one to guard here. Everyone''s face is meticulous, and the same expression is also full of expectation.


    After more than half a month of nning, Kongdao, a ce that originally belonged to thend of Shantora, has now be something else.


    Although everything has not been built yet, the current appearance is enough to be used as a military base for training in the future.


    Moreover, the underground golden pce originally discovered has now fully achieved its greatest use, which is to serve as a logistics reserve for the entire military base in the future.


    After everyone was ready, Changnuo faced Zhiya, stepped forward and patted him on the shoulder. He said with a smile, "I look forward to your transformation and return. I will personally wee you back when the timees!"


    "Your Majesty, we are all a little embarrassed by what you said!" Zhiya scratched his head and said with a smile.


    "Okay, let''s go quickly! After you get there, there are still a lot of things waiting for you. I will also take time to go and have a look. After you get there, you can''t bezy. You are now from the entire country. The people��s expectations of you!�� Chang Nuo said.


    "Yes, Your Majesty, I will live up to the kingdom''s trust!"


    Haruya immediately straightened up and shouted loudly.


    "Set off!"


    Changnuo shouted to all the Kingdom Guards standing there.


    After they returned, this group of people had all changed their names. However, their name was the Tru Kingdom Special Forces, which would be the country''s biggest weapon.


    Of course, this country will never be the only one with such a few people. For the entire Kingdom of Toru, it has huge resources and strong popr support, and the young people who are practicing the Sixth Form of the Navy in the next game are also at this moment. They are all getting ready to go. This group of people who go to the sky ind to practice are just for the practice of domineering. They need an absolute fighting space. However, on the sky ind, the battle mode of the group of people is very simple, that is, against each other.


    After they are almost there, the next group of people who need to go to Sky Ind can follow directly.


    Chang Nuo walked to the huge space portal and put his hand directly on the ck door. As blue light shone directly in his hand, the entire space portal immediately lit up.


    However, the ck vortex in the middle is spinning even more fiercely at this moment. If only a small amount of items usually pass through it, there is no need for the king of Changnuo to personally take action. But now he is facing tens of thousands of people. In order to Just in case, he directly used his own ability to strengthen the space channel.


    "Everyone, follow me and let''s go!"


    Haruya shouted loudly.


    Then he took direct steps and jumped into the space vortex with meteoric strides.


    Because there is a deep pit of more than 20 meters under their feet, but a suspended wooden board has been built on it long ago, and it leads directly to the whirlpool of the portal.


    As Zhiya walked in first, everyone behind him followed in an orderly manner, stepping into the space vortex step by step.


    But for them, only the first person to step in feels the deepest.


    In this space vortex, they did not stop at all, as if they had just stepped out with one foot in front, and they had arrived at the base of Sky Ind in an instant.

 Chapter 178 Military Base

    <h4>Chapter 178 Military Base</h4>


    When Haruya walked out first, Shunhe stood right in front of him with a smile on his face.


    "Captain Junhe..."


    As soon as Haruya came out, he saw Shunwa''s appearance, and he suddenly became excited and shouted,


    This kind of space travel made him feel really different and at ease. One second he was in his own country, and the next second he was on an empty ind that they had never dared to imagine.


    "Zhiya, I didn''t expect you to be the first one toe out. It''s really surprising!"


    Junhe said with a smile.


    "Hurry..."


    Jun He hadn''t finished speaking yet, and the troops that followed him had already walked up. It was still time to talk.


    Junhe knew very well how many people wereing this time, so he hurriedly said, "Hurry forward, let''s not block the road here!"


    "Yes Yes Yes����"


    Zhiya also said.


    When he first arrived at Sky Ind, he was already so ecstatic that hepletely ignored the fact that there was arge army following behind him.


    In fact, everyone was quite excited when they firstnded on the empty ind. Before arriving, they already knew the location of this mission. Although the word "empty" was unfamiliar to them, some of them had heard of it. these things.


    Unexpectedly, in just the blink of an eye, they have arrived at this ce 10,000 meters above the sky. For those of them who have barely even been out of the country, they probably don��t even think about practicing in the past few days. It would be great to be able to get familiar with the environment of Sky Ind.


    As more and more troops gathered behind them, the faces of everyone who arrived on the empty ind were filled with joy, and many people even started to get excited and didn''t know what to do.


    But as themander of the army, Shunhe kept a different look after therge troops behind him started toe up.


    The whole person stood on the edge seriously, looking at each of these special forces who came up. For them, it is too early to get this title.


    The main reason why he maintains a serious expression is because after all, as the highest official who will manage them in the future, he needs to always pay attention to his own image and majesty!


    However, this scene did get a reply. The group of people who had juste up were all surprised and excited when they saw the face of their armymander, and immediately began to obediently continue to move forward at an orderly pace.


    In addition, there are more than 20 kingdom guards who have been staying on the empty ind. They stand in a row of ten people and wait directly at both ends of the space portal. The domineering force exuding from their bodies is enough to intimidate these novices.


    However, even if there was such a big movement in thend of Shantora, no one on the entire Sky Ind felt it at all. All of them had started not allowing anyone to set foot in Apayado three days ago. In the past half month, both the Angel Ind and Sandian people have been helping these people build the sky ind military base in an orderly manner. Although it has not beenpletelypleted yet, the key is to increase the number of tens of thousands of people at once, and each person has a little With a little effort, the entire military base can bepletely perfected.


    Moreover, it is not easy to find building materials on the empty ind. You can just use Ind Cloud to cut them to create a beautiful and warm base living space.


    "Guota, you lead the team to arrange for all the people who areing to arrive at the ce where you live. After everything is sorted, everyone should gather in the square!" Junhe shouted to the team standing in front of the Kongdao gate. the guard shouted.


    The group of people standing on the right side immediately turned to the left neatly. The leader of the group gave a respectful military salute to Junhe and then shouted "Yes..."


    "Junhe, brother, isn''t Kongdao beautiful? I''m really looking forward to going around the entire Kongdao now!"


    Haruya stood next to Shunwa and chuckled quietly.


    "Don''t me me for not reminding you. The only area with trees on the entire Sky Ind is the area where we can live and move. No one is allowed to step into other ces without orders. If you want His Majesty the King to know where you are now, If you think about it, you will be in trouble!"


    After hearing what the other party said, Junhe said with a speechless expression.


    "Is this still the case? I originally wanted to take a stroll, but it seems that this wish cannot be fulfilled!" Zhiya said with some frustration.


    "This kind of thing is not necessary. There will be a break every month in the future, and supplies need to be delivered to Angel Ind from here. If you are interested, it doesn''t matter if you go over for a walk then!"


    Junhe said with a change of tone.


    "Really? Thank you so much!"


    "Don''t thank me so early. You can''t just go wherever you want in the entire Kongdao area. When His Majesty the King left, he had strict orders that prohibited us people from disturbing the original life of Kongdao unless Except for special circumstances, I don''t believe that His Majesty the King didn''t warn you before you came here?" Junhe said.


    "That''s true, but everyone has already arrived at Sky Ind. Sometimes I really want to visit other ces."


    Haruya said with a grin.


    "We''ll talk about it after a while. It''s better to get these guys settled quickly. We''ll talk about other thingster," Junhe said.


    "okay!"


    With the guidance of the guards who were already living on the empty ind, each group of people who came to the empty ind began to slowly get their own room. Although it was not a house for one person, the dormitory only had only There were four people in a room, and it wasn''t just bunk beds. What surprised them even more was that their beds were all made of white clouds, and even the house was pure white. For these young guys who had never seen the world before, , as soon as they arrived in the room, they all excitedly threw away their backpacks behind them, then jumped directly onto the bed made of white clouds, andy down leisurely for a while.


    For them, they have never experienced anything with this level of softness. Coming here does not feel like training, but more likeing here to enjoy.


    The soldiery on the bed with his eyes closed, feeling thefort of this moment. For these young guys, this kind of thing can only be seen in dreams.


    "It''s reallyfortable. I didn''t expect this thing to be sofortable. If I pack all these things back to my country, even if they are sold, they will probably be worth a lot of money!"


    A soldier lying on the bed made by Bai Baiyun said leisurely with his eyes closed.


    "What are you thinking? His Majesty the King has long issued an order prohibiting products made by Baibaiyun on the sky ind from flowing into the world below!"


    Another voice sounded directly, and the speaker was the Guota who had just arranged for everyone to live.

 Chapter 179 Personnel Registration

    <h4>Chapter 179 Personnel Registration</h4>


    The reason why he said this was because this group of people had already thought about this eight hundred years ago. Such loose and soft things can definitely be very powerful for the people in the pirate world below. Hot items.


    At the same time, they did not quite understand why their King would say such words.


    It is normal for this group of people not to understand. For the Toru Kingdom, the main reason why Changnuo issued such a strict ban is to worry that if too much of Sky Ind''s products are leaked out, it will easily expose the Toru Kingdom''s presence on Sky Ind. It has information about military bases.


    After all, almost everyone in this world now thinks that sky inds only exist in fantasy. Once these things are really applied in real life, sky inds will be a ce that many people pursue and choose, even the navy and the world government , and probably don��t want to let go of the existence of this ce.


    In fact, the Navy and the World Government may have known the location of the Sky Ind for a long time. It is simply because it is too troublesome to get up and down, and the gain outweighs the loss in doing anything, so they are unwilling to own such a ce.


    But now this ce can be regarded as a treasurend of gold and silver for the Tru Kingdom. It can continuously provide powerful talents to the Tru Kingdom.


    When you stay in your own country, you can''t avoid outside observers, but it''spletely different when you stay here.


    Even though the current Sky Ind suddenly had more than 10,000 people, which was much more than the aborigines, no one outside knew about the changes that had happened on the Sky Ind at this moment.


    They still maintain their original way of life and rhythm. For ordinary people, Apayado is essentially a restricted area. Now it is nothing more than a stricter ban. Anyway, most people have almost never been to this ce. Whether it is banned or not , has no impact on their lives at all.


    But after all, there are so many people on Sky Ind, and it is impossible to hide it for a long time. As an aboriginal Sky Ind person, the first one to know is Anilu.


    He now hangs out with Jun and them almost every day, and is also undergoing high-intensity training every day.


    When he finished today''s training, as soon as he walked into the military base, he was instantly attracted by the lively and noisy sounds.


    Ming Ming already knew that many people woulde here next, but suddenly standing here and watching so many people wearing ck clothes appear, Anilu was still a little unbelievable.


    I was obviously fine when I woke up in the morning, but why did I suddenlye back in a circle and there were so many more people?


    Not everyone knows about the space portal, at least Enelu is not aware of this situation yet.


    "Everyone, get ready to assemble!"


    Zhiya stood in the center of this huge training ground, holding a loudspeaker in his hand and yelling.


    Almost everyone within a radius of one or two kilometers could hear him, because he shouted loudly through a loudspeaker. Although not everyone could hear it, it could be heard by the guy who controlled the microphones of the entire military base.


    He stayed in the control room and after Zhiya finished shouting, he repeated the other party''s words again.


    Most of their training content is also in these aspects. In addition to the training of the Sixth Form of the Navy, most of them are training gatherings and team operations.


    So in less than two minutes after the order was issued, tens of thousands of people quickly rushed towards this huge training ground.


    "Stop standing there stupidly ande with us!"


    While Anilu was still surprised by these people''s performance, Junhe happened to pass by him, then nced at him and said.


    "Jun and brother, what''s going on?"


    Enelu asked doubtfully.


    "You will knowter, gather quickly!" Junhe said again.


    "Yes...!" Enelu answered loudly.


    At this moment, when I was lying down and carefully observing the team of tens of thousands of people, I could clearly notice that there was a group of people who were also wearing ckbat uniforms, but the only difference was that they also wore peaked caps on their heads. It stands out among the crowd.


    And they were not standing in the middle of the line, they were all standing in front of the crowd.


    In less than three minutes, the originally noisy and turbulent training ground becamepletely quiet. Tens of thousands of people were divided into hundreds of rows. The distance between each person was just right. Looking from the front, it was almost Only the figure of one person can be seen.


    Haruya stood at the front of all the groups. He also put on a ck peaked cap at the moment, and then faced the front of the training ground, where the g of the Toru Kingdom was already flying.


    There were three rows of teams of hundreds of people standing behind Haruya. Each one was wearing a ckbat uniform and a ck peaked cap. In terms of image, they werepletely different from the team of tens of thousands of people behind him.


    Junhe led a group of people from Eniro from the outside and slowly began to walk towards the training ground. Except for a few people who needed to guard the space gate, everyone from the Tru Kingdom who came to the Sky Ind Military Base, Now they are all gathered here.


    When he reached the front of the crowd, Junhe stood at attention with a very serious expression, and then slowly took out a ck peaked cap from his waist and put it on his head.


    "Reporting to themander of the army, Toru Kingdom''s special military major general Haruya, former pce guard captain, has been ordered by His Majesty the King to lead the Toru Kingdom''s special forces to report to you!"


    Zhiya''s voice was high-pitched. He stood on the spot and took a step forward. Then he saluted a military salute and shouted loudly.


    In the huge training ground, you can barely hear the wind at this moment. Although it is not so quiet that you can hear a pin drop, at least you can''t hear any noise.


    Junhe also returned a military salute and said with a serious expression but crisply, "Start reporting."


    "Reporting to themander of the army, there are 11,500 peopleing to the Kongdao military base for training this time, including 500 instructors and 11,000 people participating in the training. At present, all the people have arrived, please give instructions!"


    Haruya said in a high-pitched voice again.


    "Okay, Kongdao Military Base epts your registration!" Junhe said with a serious smile, and then began to look at the tens of thousands of people behind.


    It would be a lie to say that this scene was not shocking. There are tens of thousands of troops and they are so uniform. Even the navy may not be able to find many people with such a training scale.

 Chapter 180 Investment in Alabasta

    <h4>Chapter 180 Investment in basta</h4>


    The most excited person now is probably not Junhe, but Enelu who is standing behind him.


    This guy has been very nervous and uneasy since the first time he saw so many people, let alone now, standing in front of everyone, reviewing his army like a king.


    "Everyone, I don''t want to say anything more. You all know me. After all, we have not been together for a day or two. I guess His Majesty the King has already said what I need to say beforeing here. I am not here for you to enjoy. Qingfu''s.


    Now that the entire Kingdom of Tru has begun to develop in an all-round way, His Majesty the King is working hard to improve our living environment, so what we can do is seize the time to train the ability to protect His Majesty the King, the entire country, and the people living in this country.


    You are all still too weak now, so in the next time, you will gradually be divided into groups of 20 people, and each group will have an instructor specifically responsible for you. In the next two years, you will Live and train in this 10,000-meter-high altitude.


    I hope you will not disappoint the expectations of the people of the entire country, let alone the expectations of His Majesty the King.


    Do you have confidence..."


    Junhe didn''t roar louder, but directly picked up a speaker. Although his own voice was not very loud, after it was transmitted through the speaker, the sound was also full of seriousness.


    Even the people standing at the very back and in the corner could hear his voice very clearly and truly, because as soon as he finished speaking, everyone immediately shouted "Have confidence..."


    The sound of tens of thousands of people shouting together suddenly resounded throughout the world. This thing was much louder than the sound of a trumpet.


    Because of this loud roar, even people staying in other ces on the entire sky ind could hear it to some extent.


    The slightly stronger ones began to look in the direction of Shantara, but most people still remained quiet.


    Each of the soldiers who came to Sky Ind knew their mission. They had already endured such arduous training before, let alone cultivating a higher level of domineering.


    Almost all people whoe here have mastered one of the six naval styles, which is already outstanding among the military.


    The Kingdom of Toru is different from the World Government Navy. The six skills practiced here are not hidden after joining the army. Anyone can choose among them for training. This is also to screen out some people, as long as they are good in these aspects. Anyone who can excel can join the special forces to practice more advanced domineering methods.


    When the recement takes ce in two years, these people who are practicing domineering in the tunnel will have achieved sess, and then the army of the Kingdom of Tru will begin to gradually renew in the future.


    As for those who are not able to be members of the special forces, they will gradually be police officers who can only manage domestic security. I believe that by the time the official plot begins, the entire Toru Kingdom will also have a certain say in this world. .


    It''s just that all this can only be done gradually and cannot be done all at once.


    However, in the next month, all the good news began toe one after another.


    The first is the development of business. After Luosta and his people arrived in basta, the other country indeed sent Minister Zuo to receive them. Even Cobra attended the discussion meeting between them in person.


    It has begun to establish amercial scale starting from basta, and gradually began to establish a radiation range of factories throughout the country.


    Taking Rapeseed Port as the starting point, nearly two hundred projects of various sizes have been nned for the construction of the perfume construction site, including textile factories, clothingpanies, fast foodpanies, snacks, beverages, and steel, etc., which is almost as fast as the Kingdom of Tru. The number of factories in your own country.


    After all of this was discussed, construction of the rest almost began, and the nned project period for these things was five years. During these five years, they could gradually improve everything.


    In addition, the factory built by the country of basta for the Kingdom of Tru provided a huge discount in the early stage, because in the early stage, let alone taxes and the like, it was enough to ensure that the entire basta could live a life of food and clothing. Worthy of others.


    In addition, the Kingdom of Tru is also responsible for building the infrastructure of the entire basta, so everything is proceeding in an orderly manner.


    After receiving this information, all the people in the entire country of basta have begun to get excited. Although they are not very clear about many things, they can at least know something about how these people from the Tru Kingdom can bring them. A life of subsistence and sufficient ie is already very satisfying.


    But living in this country full of yellow sand, there are also many things that need to be ovee.


    In the main hall of basta Pce.


    Now the two parties were sitting on both sides looking at each other, and Kobra also joined in. He sat on his king''s throne and didn''t say a word the whole time, just quietly looking at all these things.


    "Minister Zuo, we have been discussing all infrastructure construction matters for three days now. It is time for all of us to make a statement. I wonder what your country''s opinion is?"


    Luosta sat at the front and said to the slightly fat Minister Zuo.


    "Minister Losstadt, our Majesty the King hasmunicated with His Majesty the King of your country at the beginning. The Kingdom of Tru is building a project here, and our basta National Army will provide you with all security matters, and in theter business. We will provide as much help as we can in terms of sales, but all our country can do in the early stage is to providend. For this reason, we can also directly reduce all projects and taxes for the five years of the factory project.


    But within five years, the Kingdom of Tru must provide necessary assistance for the construction of infrastructure projects in the country of basta, including seawater desalination projects, environmental restoration projects, and infrastructure construction projects that have been discussed with His Majesty the King before. ����


    Minister Zuo also talked about it carefully for a long time. They had already studied these things hundreds of times, and even before the people from the Tru Kingdom came, they had almost memorized these words.


    Its purpose was to deal with the current situation, but what they didn''t expect was that the Kingdom of Tru would make such a big move this time and actually open more than two hundred projects in its own country at the same time. This number of projects, Even King Kobra was quite surprised.

 Chapter 181 Rapeseed Port

    <h4>Chapter 181 Rapeseed Port</h4>


    At the beginning, Kobra even thought that the Kingdom of Tru could build nearly 20 engineering projects in his country, which was worthy of him, and he even thanked the other party countless times in his heart.


    But this time Luosta opened his mouth to talk about the entire n within five years. When he heard it, everyone present was really shocked.


    In fact, on the way here, Losta had alreadymunicated and negotiated with the more than 20 people who had followed him to the Ministry of Commerce, and it could be regarded as a preliminary feeling for the bottom line that basta could provide. Now the other party can tell the five-year exemption. The tax revenue during the year has been considered to have met their preliminary requirements.


    And the other party seemed to have already directly supported him.


    While exempting from taxes for five years, although they require the construction of infrastructure facilities, even if they don''t talk about these things, Luosta still needs to prepare these things in advance.


    Rainfall in the entire country of basta is very scarce, and most of the country is desert. If you want to developrge-scale business here in the future, you must use this country as your business base and improve the environment here. Less.


    The most important thing is that the other party is willing to provide troops for free to protect everyone''s safety. This is almost simr to what His Majesty the King mentioned when he came here.


    Luosta sat there and smiled slightly. What they wanted most was not these things, but something that the other party didn''t care about at all, which was to use their own abilities to promote the products of the entire Tru Kingdom, along the Great Line. market.


    Otherwise, they would not go to such great lengths and choose to cooperate in all aspects with the country of basta.


    "Minister Zuo, we have been chatting for so long, and your condition is obviously not sincere enough, so let''s first talk about more conditions that the Kingdom of Tru can offer.


    First, in the next five years, our country will invest more than 150 billion beli in project construction costs in basta every year, and at the same time strive to solve the problems of 1.5 million people in the entire basta country every year. Regarding employment opportunities, I don��t know what the oue will be. How can Minister Zuo look at it? "


    "150 billion beli!"


    Hearing what Losa said, even Kobra, who was sitting at the top, felt a little surprised.


    What is the concept of 150 billion beli? The entire country of basta does not know whether it can produce such arge amount of expenses in five years, let alone the expenses that need to be paid.


    But a minister of the Ministry of Commerce just said a word and directly confirmed the annual investment of 150 billion Bailey. This shocked the entire basta, not to mention the king, and all the princes and ministers below.


    But the conditions mentioned by Minister Zuo are already the bottom line that their country can offer. For such a poor country, there is really nothing better that can be offered.


    "I wonder what kind of conditions Minister Losstadt wants from our basta country?"


    Kobra, who had been silent all this time, looked at his ministers, who were all silent, and when they started to discuss, he finally couldn''t help but ask directly.


    He didn''t want to speak at this time. After all, the two parties were still in the process of negotiation. As a king, once he opened his mouth to speak, he was alreadypletely vulnerable.


    But there is nothing that can be done about it. The bargaining chips in the negotiations have been increased so much that basta has no chips to throw out again. They can only be at a disadvantage and let others raise conditions.


    Luosta smiled again, then stood up and saluted Kobra respectfully, and said, "His Majesty King Kobra, our request from the Kingdom of Tru is very simple, that is, the port of Rapeseed Flowers. From now on, It is used by the Kingdom of Tru and has the right to dispose and operate this port."


    "That''s it?"


    Minister Zuo, who was sitting opposite him, was suddenly shocked by the news and somewhatpletely surprised.


    For basta, which has always been barren, a port ispletely useless. In addition to the usual docking of ships, it also needs to be on guard against the piratesing from the port.


    Moreover, due to the economic depression of the entire country, the Rapeseed Port has long been different from what it once was. It is now in tatters. Even people in our own country are toozy to clean it up. Now that the other party has invested so much, they only added one Rapeseed Port. The conditions at Huagang Port really surprised all of them.


    Facing Minister Zuo''s face, Luosta smiled sinisterly at the corner of his mouth.


    This is aplete look of sess. People in this country do not realize the importance of a port, but for the Kingdom of Tru, which has been doing business nationwide a few years ago, the importance of a port can almost be It goes without saying that controlling a port means almost controlling the economic lifeline, especially to survive in such a maritime era.


    Cobra frowned and sat therepletely silent. He couldn''t understand the purpose of Losa''s request.


    As the leader of a country, although it was not easy for Kobra to understand the purpose of Losta''s request, he always felt that there must be some circumstances that he did not know about.


    But for someone who doesn''t understand business, I''m afraid it''s impossible to guess the purpose of doing this even if he tries hard.


    A huge port not only has a strongmercial effect, but can also y a great deterrent role in the military.


    The port in the Land of Rapeseed Flowers is thergest port in the entire country of basta. If themercial economy here is really developed in the future, this port will definitely be the absolute vitality.


    Although Cobra has never been able to figure out what aspects are involved, the other party''s conditions have been put forward, and everyone is waiting for his reply. In the end, he can only say helplessly, " I agree to Minister Losta��s request!��


    "Thank you King Kobra. In the next agreement signed by our two countries, we will clearly indicate all these things. In the fastest time, I think it will only take two months at most. We can All-round construction work has begun, and I hope you can help us!"


    Luosta smiled and said to the princes and ministers sitting below.

 Chapter 182 Blind Gambler

    <h4>Chapter 182 Blind Gambler</h4>


    Until now, none of these princes and ministers of the Kingdom of Barabastan have realized what they have lost?


    But Losta was alreadyughing in his heart at this moment. He never thought that the people of basta could be so stupid.


    The five-year tax exemption is enough for them to save a lot of expenses. In addition, the Kingdom of Tru is assisting basta in infrastructure maintenance. It is not their job to do it. It is nothing more than providing some simple training and some simple equipment only.


    More work must be done by people from basta''s own country. The Tru Kingdom and his party came here, but there are only 20 people. More work needs to be done by people from basta''s own country.


    Now that things have been negotiated, Luosta will naturally not add other conditions. In the following days, he only needs to start construction from the Rapeseed Port, and then everything else can be carried out in an orderly manner.


    In the first half of this great route, basta was located at a ce where allmerce must pass. If they had some business acumen, the country would not have developed into what it is today.


    Even though the Toru Kingdom has now begun to fully cooperate, as the top figures in this country, including King Kobra, they still maintain their original status, a group of mediocre and ipetent people, but relying on the power of their ancestors Meng Yin was able to achieve his current position. It was in the hands of this group of people that this country began to slowly be dpidated.


    The business negotiations in basta have been fully implemented. After the results of the negotiations were reached, Losta informed Changnuo immediately through the phone.


    However, after receiving the news, Changnuo also immediately began to arrange for all people and machines to move towards the country of basta.


    Thisrge kingdom suddenly started a state of general mobilization. Of course, there were also many skilled workers who all started heading towards basta. If they only relied on their people who knew nothing to support these industries, If you want to achieve your goal within five years, you probably don��t have to even think about it.


    However, the whole country is now in a different situation. Less than half a month after the meeting, the Senate has begun to issueprehensive notices.


    The fertile fields that were originally used to grow flowers and nts were all eradicated in an instant.


    Although the Kingdom of Tru did not give these people a certain amount ofpensation, the key was to directly exempt them from any taxes generated by farming. This was enough to make all the people who farmed thend grateful.


    Let alone any other requirements, I probably wouldn��t even think about such a thing now.


    Almost everything is prospering and growing, and everything in the country, including infrastructure construction, is proceeding in an orderly manner.


    This country, which is booming in development, has not attracted anyone''s covetous attention. At least the people living in neighboring countries have begun to sneak into this country one by one.


    It is this kind of living environment that can ignite their hope in life, so they will not be afraid of any threats and move towards this country with their families.


    However, although the Kingdom of Tru has not begun to pose a threat to other countries, it is also happy to ept people from other countries who have fled or want to improve their lives to integrate into their own country.


    More urate and true information has now been released to every household, and interest registration has begun to be popr. As for those from outside, they can only be counted as second-ss residential users. They can only contribute to this country in the future or they originally If the country is merged into the Kingdom of Tru, then this group of people may be a type of residents.


    After a month of hard work, Chang Nuo finally began to step out of the Tru Pce where he had been staying.


    He didn''t take anyone with him, and without even informing anyone, he quietly arrived at the royal city outside the pce.


    To know how your country is developing, you need to look at the overall situation of this royal city. After all, this represents the most prosperous economy in the entire country.


    The cargo ships docked at the port havepletely confirmed the current state of this country.


    Nanniwa Port has now been expanded again, almost five or six timesrger than before. At least nearly two hundred 50-meter giant cargo ships can dock side by side. Even so, this huge port location is still in short supply.


    Changnuo''s first stop was at this port. He wanted to see what level ofmercial development his country had reached now.


    Coming here to take a look is indeed the best proof!


    There are rows of cargo ships docked at the port, plus the cargo ships that are stilling towards this side in a steady stream. The gs hung on each ship arepletely different, and almost all represent the gs of each ship. The country''srge-scalemercial body, this ce brings together all merchants from all over the world. After all, the Kingdom of Tru has now be the birthce of all sources of goods, and ensures that every merchant can make a lot of money.


    After observing for nearly half an hour, Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then began to walk slowly towards the main street of the Royal City.


    The previous architectural style is still maintained here. Although it is a bit dpidated, the crowds of peopleing and going on this main street can still reflect the prosperous scene here.


    In the entire world, I am afraid that no country can reach such an extent!


    "Come and see,e and see, there is a blind man here who has won many games in a row..."


    Not long after Chang Nuo entered the street, he saw a dozen people in the crowd quickly heading towards a casino.


    So far, this country has not restricted this kind ofmercial economy. This is the public''s leisure time, and there is no need to ban entertainment venues.


    But when he heard the people on the other side running and shouting, Chang Nuo always felt a little familiar.


    But for a moment I really couldn��t remember where I had thought of such a thing?


    But following curiosity, he also began to follow this group of people into the casino.


    At this moment, the casino, which is almost 100 square meters, is already crowded with lively people. Even if they can''t see it, they still want to feel the lively atmosphere.


    But right in the middle of the crowd, a small man who looked like the owner of the casino on the roulette table was already sweating on his forehead. Although he was wearing a straight suit, he was facing the person sitting on the roulette table. He really didn''t know how to deal with the middle-aged man with a cane in front of him!

 Chapter 183 A smile

    <h4>Chapter 183 A smile</h4>


    At this moment, the blind man sitting in front of the roulette table in the casino was holding an upright crutch in his hand. His eyes were obviously injured by external forces, but under such circumstances, he still chose to sit. Gambling takes ce here.


    Perhaps to outsiders, this situation is impossible to happen at all, which is why so many peoplee to watch.


    This middle-aged man does not have any timidity. Although he is blind, at this moment he has a lot of chips in front of him, and it can make the entire casino people break into cold sweats, because if the opponent continues to win, they will I''m afraid this casino will all be lost in the hands of this blind man.


    "Why haven''t you started yet?"


    The entire casino was silent, and just as they were getting ready to watch the excitement, they heard the blind middle-aged man sitting in front of the roulette table speaking unhurriedly.


    At this moment, as a person in the casino, how can he dare to continue ying with this blind guy? He has not won more than a dozen games, but has been winning here all morning.


    "That... that..., I... our casino has run out of money..."


    The casino owner hesitated and said that this kind of thing was a p in his face, but he still stubbornly said it.


    No oneughed at him at this moment. Even the group of people who came to watch the excitement only felt sorry for him and were curious about this blind man''s abilities.


    A person who can win even the casino owners and say such words, I really don��t know what kind of identity he is?


    "Hehehe... It doesn''t matter. Since you have no money, why don''t you deceive me, a blind man. Anyway, I can''t see. I have encountered such a situation in other ces, but in the end they all just started to grab it. Come on, you have met a more civilized person!"


    The blind middle-aged man said with a smile.


    In fact, he had been observing the casino owner opposite him, trying to see what kind of tactics the other party would use in the end. However, he had won all morning, and the other party did nothing excessive other than tampering with the gambling table. Behavior.


    As for things like tampering, you will encounter it in any casino, and it haspletely be a rule in the industry. It will not affect this blind middle-aged man in judging a person''s quality.


    However, the casino owner smiled awkwardly and said, "It doesn''t matter whether you win or lose. This is what happens on the gambling table. If you have the ability, you can take away everything here. His Majesty the King has taught us to be honest and trustworthy. In this special situation, In the Lu Kingdom, I don��t want to be looked down upon by others because of something like this, so it doesn��t matter if I lose!��


    "That''s right, no one isughing at you anyway. If you keep it open in the casino from now on, we wille here often in the future."


    ��


    Just after the casino owner finished speaking, a group of people standing around watching the excitement began to boo. They also admired the character of the casino owner.


    ��What an interesting country!��


    The blind middle-aged man said with a smile.


    After saying that, he slowly stood up, then turned around and started to explore the road ahead with his crutches, and walked towards the door without turning his head.


    Even the chips on the gambling table, he didn''t touch any of them and kept them there as they were.


    The casino owner probably understood what the other party meant, and bowed in the direction the other party was walking. It wasn''t until the blind middle-aged man walked out of the casino that he slowly stood up.


    Chang Nuo stood here and saw all this scene. His heart had already been filled with excitement at the moment he saw the middle-aged man.


    He didn''t need to think too much about who this guy was, but he never thought that such a powerful person would appear in his own country. The ident was definitely unexpected, and he had never even thought about it. Case!


    The blind middle-aged man walked in front, and Chang Nuo followed behind with interest, keeping a distance of about 10 meters. They followed in a tacit understanding without any special actions.


    "Although the old man is blind, his heart is not. It seems that His Majesty King Tru has something to do with the old man?"


    The two of them were in a stalemate like this for nearly 20 minutes. It was not until they reached a ce where there were rtively few people that the blind middle-aged man started to stand where he was. The crutch he was tapping in his hand also stopped and stood. He started talking leisurely on the spot.


    The distance was not very far to begin with, so Chang Nuo could naturally hear what the other party said, and even though the blind middle-aged man in front had stopped, Chang Nuo continued to walk forward.


    "I wonder if you would be interested in buying you a drink?"


    Changnuo said with a smile on his face.


    He didn''t think that the other party wouldn''t be able to discover him. This kind of thing was simply nonsense. The main reason why he chose to follow him all the time was to see the other party''s attitude. After all, this was the most important thing.


    Chang Nuo recognized this blind middle-aged man the first time he saw him. Isn''t this man Yixiao who will be a naval admiral in the future? He is an extremely powerful being.


    But as for his origin, no one knows the situation, and no one even knows and understands where hees from.


    But the only thing that is undeniable is that this person is full of justice. It is not the so-called absolute justice, but he only recognizes the ideals he insists on in his heart.


    Yixiao smiled at the corner of his mouth, and then slowly turned around to face the seventeen or eighteen-year-old young king. He raised his head slightly without caring, but in his mind he could only see the outline of the other person''s body, and There is no specific look.


    "I heard that the Kingdom of Tru hasunched itstest industry. I wonder how your wine will go?" Yixiao said.


    "Maybe it should be pretty good, at least I haven''t drank it, so I thought Mr. Yixiao might as well try it if possible!"


    "Hahaha... It seems that I came here to meet the old man, which is really surprising!" Yixiao said.


    "Then I wonder what Mr. Yixiao means?"


    What Chang Nuo showed at this moment was quite respectful, not the level ofpliment, but the respect of a young man for his elders.


    "Since His Majesty the King has already begun the invitation, I am naturally willing to taste it, and I also want to look forward to it!" Yixiao said with a smile.


    Although there are peopleing and going on both sides of this ce, not many people will pass by it at this moment. At leastpared to the main street, this ce is much quieter.

 Chapter 184 Future Expectations

    <h4>Chapter 184 Future Expectations</h4>


    None of the passers-by noticed that His Majesty the King suddenly appeared in this ce. They just regarded it as two random people walking around.


    After receiving Yixiao''s urate answer, Changnuo slowly began to smile, and said very politely, "Mr. Yixiao, please..."


    Although the other party cannot see, he can still feel this kind of thing. Changnuo knows the other party''s strength better and does not treat the other party as a blind person.


    The two people walked side by side on the road. Yixiao still started to tap the road ahead with the crutch in his hand. The walking process was not very fast, but nothing could stop him.


    While walking on the road, Chang Nuo asked curiously, "Mr. Yixiao, what do you think of the current Tru Kingdom?"


    "It''s very good. I have been to many countries. At least in the Kingdom of Tru, I feel that the people here are simple and honest, and everyone has a kind smile.


    I have heard of you before. You are indeed very capable to govern a country to what it is now! "


    Yixiao said without hesitation.


    "Excuse me, but the way this country looks now is still very different from my ideal. At least in a short period of time, it will be difficult to achieve the ideal look. Although they have begun to smile with satisfaction, but in this world We don��t know how many people are living in misery.


    However, my strength is limited, and I can only do this to ensure that the more than 20 million people in my country can live the kind of life they want.


    As the king of this country, all I can do is to make them more hopeful in their future lives, happier and more harmonious at home, and safer and more stable in the country.


    There is still a long way to go in the future, and we still don��t know what will happen? "


    Changnuoughed at himself and said.


    What he is saying now is not too modest. The development of the entire Kingdom of Tru so far has indeed not reached the conditions he wants. Even thend of the royal city still looks a bit dpidated. Although everything has been It was mentioned in thest meeting with the Senate, but it still needs time to develop.


    The most important thing mentioned in the meeting was the development of the real estate industry. In the next few years, the entire royal city will be filled with high-rise buildings. At least this core ce will look full to outsiders. Incredible look.


    Yixiao walked along the street with Chang Nuo like this. After listening to what the other party said, he raised his head slightly to feel the surrounding environment, and then an undetectable smile appeared on his face.


    "It''s great that King Toru has this kind of mentality. If the current world government could have your kind of mentality, then the whole world would definitely not be like this now.


    If the world government does not act as a navy, it also does not act. The sea is overrun with pirates. No country can actually consider the people like you. It is really a pity! "


    Yixiao said with some frustration.


    Changnuo could already sense Yixiao''s contempt for the world government and navy from the other party''s words, but the world was indeed as he said now, with almost no action from top to bottom, and wars sweeping the world almost every day. There will always be incredible things happening in unknown ces.


    "I still don''t know what kind of food Mr. Yixiao likes to eat?" Chang Nuo suddenly changed his tone and said.


    "Haha!! It''s not just a day or two since I came to the Tru Kingdom. I arrived here a month ago, so I have tasted a lot of delicious food here. I just don''t know how the food in the Tru Pce is?"


    The reason why Yixiao said this was to test, what is King Tru next to him like?


    But the next sentence surprised him instantly.


    "Since Mr. Yixiao has this idea, the delicacies of the Royal Pce of Tru must be perfectly presented in front of you. There is still a little time before noon. How about we walk and let the pce do the work while we do it?" Chang Nuo smiled. said.


    Hearing that the other party did not refuse, Yixiao smiled again and said, "Okay!"


    The distance from here to the pce is only a dozen miles. For the two of them, even if they run a hundred times back and forth, they will not feel any fatigue. This distance is not enough for either of the two to reach such a distance. The distance is only a moment.


    Chang Nuo did not pick up the phone tomunicate with the people in the pce. Instead, he said softly in front of his face with a smile, "Important guests are visiting today. Let them prepare some special meals!"


    "What a powerful strength!"


    Yixiao said, he was already a little shocked at this moment. King Tru would be such a powerful young man. He had never thought of this before.


    ording to Yixiao''s strength, he could fully feel that Chang Nuo''s words were not meant for him. How could Yixiao not be shocked when he saw that Se Haki could be used to such an extent?


    "Mr. Yixiao, I have made arrangements here. We will chat while walking, and then we can enjoy the delicious food in the pce directly when we wait," Chang Nuo said.


    "It''s really helpful to His Majesty the King!" Yixiao said.


    "There''s no hard work. If you think the Kingdom of Tru is okay, Mr. Yixiao must stay longer, at least let us enjoy our friendship asndlords. Of course, if you think the scenery of the South China Sea is better, or more suitable If you live by yourself, you can settle down directly, and at least you can see how far the Tru Kingdom will develop in the future?" Changnuo said.


    "This matter should really be considered carefully!"


    Yixiao did not refuse, even the meaning behind the words was just in deep thought.


    Seeing Yixiao''s pensive expression, Changnuo smiled slightly. He was not in a hurry to directly pull this guy into his camp. He might even get a counterproductive state. He shouldmunicate slowly first. When talking about feelings, the other party will probably have their own thoughts and considerations. At that time, they may be able to achieve the level they want without even having to say it themselves.


    Neither of them might be in a hurry about this matter, but for Yixiao, he felt that King Tru, who was walking beside him, was indeed very deep in his heart and much stronger than he imagined. The key was to show his strength at his age. It shouldn''t look like that at all. This is what Yixiao values ????more.

 Chapter 185 Chatting with each other

    <h4>Chapter 185 Chatting with each other</h4>


    Since Yixiao hase to the Kingdom of Tru, Changnuo naturally has no idea of ??letting go. For such a powerful person with a sense of justice, no matter what method he uses from now on, Changnuo will keep him in his own country.


    It''s just that when you first make contact, you naturally need to leave a better impression on the other party.


    The two of them just chatted with each other, not talking about whether to stay or not, but just chatting about everyday things.


    Unknowingly, the two of them had arrived at the gate of the pce. Everything here seemed so peaceful, but yet so lively.


    After reaching this ce, Yixiao stopped in a rare step. He seemed to be sensing everything in the entire pce, and then continued to walk towards the inside.


    For the people walking on the street, many may not know His Majesty the King, or they may have only seen him. Suddenly he appears alone on the street and others dare not recognize him, but it is different at the gate of the pce. Everyone knows His Majesty the King of this family. When Chang Nuo first appeared here, the doors on both sides were already fully opened, and the guards at the door also saluted respectfully.


    "Mr. Yixiao, this is our pce. It may not be as luxurious as imagined, but I still hope that Mr. Yixiao can give me some advice!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "It doesn''t matter, I can''t see anything with my eyes anyway, it doesn''t matter what it looks like." Yixiao said.


    "The Kingdom of Tru has existed for nearly 400 years, and this pce has also existed for hundreds of years. Everything now looks more historical, butpared with modern houses and buildings, It feels like an antique." Chang Nuo said.


    "His Majesty the King really likes to joke. Even though I can''t see anything, I can still feel the different atmosphere of this pce. I wonder what your Majesty the King''s ns are for the future?"


    Yixiao directly changed the topic and asked.


    At this point in time, the two of them still haven''t asked how they knew each other''s identity. It''s as if they had known each other for a long time. No one would pierce thisyer of window paper and continue chatting about ordinary things. topic of.


    But as soon as this topic came up, Chang Nuo was obviously stunned for a moment. He didn''t know how to say it. After all, no matter whether he said it or not, he didn''t know what the other party was thinking.


    But after hesitating for a moment, Chang Nuo said calmly, "Maybe in the future my idea is to change the world!"


    A very simple sentence, but it made Yixiao burst intoughter, andughed very loudly.


    This made Chang Nuo very confused as to what kind of strange situation could make him express such a state of mind.


    "I wonder if after eating, can we go to the mountain behind to observe the secrets of your Tru Kingdom?"


    Yixiao suddenly raised his head and looked in the direction of the mountain behind.


    However, what is ced over there is a space portal. For ordinary people, this kind of thing may not be visible at all, but for a man like Yixiao who has extremely powerful knowledge and domineering, there will be no obstacles in the middle. , preventing him from exploring that ce.


    Perhaps Yixiao had already observed these things when he first came to this country, but there was no chance toe to the pce at all. But now that he had a rare opportunity, he asked directly without probing.


    "No problem. As long as Mr. Yixiao is willing, you cane in and out of any ce in the Tru Kingdom at any time."


    Chang Nuo didn''t take this kind of thing by surprise, and he didn''t refuse it at the same time. The expression on his face looked very calm, as if he had already been prepared.


    Now he is also looking forward to it. After all, no matter how hard he hides what happened in the Tru Kingdom, the news will always be leaked. The only thing he can do in the future is to nip all these things in the cradle in time and make himself as safe as possible. The secret will be known to the worldter.


    The space portal on the back mountain is indeed the biggest secret in the entire Toru Kingdom, but now that it has been discovered, it is no longer a secret, and it can also be used as a bargaining chip to keep the other party in your country. , how could Chang Nuo not be willing to take the other party to see it?


    Yixiao could think that the thing in the back mountain he sensed was definitely an unusual ce, but he didn''t know what was mixed in it.


    The reason why I took the liberty to ask this is because I want to learn something from the other party''s words.


    "I didn''t expect that His Majesty the King would really take me to that ce? This should be the most secret ce in your Kingdom of Tru, right?" asked Yixiao.


    "Mr. Yixiao is right. This is indeed one of the most secret ces in our entire Kingdom of Tru, but there is nothing difficult to show to the outside world. Now that Mr. Yixiao has mentioned it, it is natural that he should take you there to see it. Just a moment!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "It''s really an honor, and I''m even more excited!"


    Yixiao does not belong to any force at present. He is just a wanderer wandering in many countries in the world. With his own strength, he can go anywhere without any hindrance, but the only one who can make him feel surprised is this country.


    When he first came here, he had already felt that there were many puzzling secrets in this country. How could a teenage king turn a poor and messed up country into a developed country in just a few years? To such an extent, what kind of king is it that can make all the people worship him as a person of faith?


    So with all these questions in mind, I stayed in this royal city for nearly a month.


    The longer he stayed in this ce, the more Yixiao discovered that this country was essentially different from other countries, that is, as a decision-maker, they almost always consider the lives of the people.


    Even when I first arrived, I heard that most of thend in this country was used to grow flowers and nts. Yixiao was even a little unhappy, saying that most of the top officials in this country were bastards. But after two days of contact, I discovered that at the beginning At that time, this country was not only too poor but was often invaded by pirates. As the country slowly began to be stronger, this situation was also decreasing year by year.


    nting flowers and nts is also a helpless behavior. After all, not only can these things be exchanged for corresponding food and Bailey, but they can also avoid being coveted by others.

 Chapter 186 VIPs from Royal Palace of Tru

    <h4>Chapter 186 VIPs from Royal Pce of Tru</h4>


    But less than half a month after arriving here, the new national reform policy had been issued.


    Not only will all the people be allowed to restore fertilend to grow food, and the flowers and nts that have been nted will bepletely banned, but the state will also pay corresponding amounts to maintain all their lives during this period.


    This kind of thing is simply impossible to see in other countries. The country will also give money to the people, and the leaders of most countries will almost endlessly deprive people. The feeling here seems to be much warmer. .


    Because the national reform policy issued half a month ago contains not only legal documents, but also the conditions for sentencing for this country, and also eliminates the thoughts of many people with bad intentions.


    Especially the punishment for pirates is almost more serious, but this country has banned all capital punishment.


    One month has allowed Yixiao to understand so much about this country, and he has even felt the deepest chord in his heart.


    Until now, with his powerful knowledge and knowledge, he had been able to explore all the surrounding ces, but the Kingdom of Tru still gave him many unsolved mysteries.


    When we walked to the main hall of the pce, the ce had turned into another scene with exquisite furnishings and red carpets. This was obviously preparation for the highest level of reception.


    "Your Majesty the King, you are back!"


    Gogoya stood in front of the hall, wearing a professional short skirt and shirt. Thebination of high heels made her temperament clear.


    Now she is fully qualified as a qualified secretary to the king, and she can handle everything in an orderly manner.


    On the street, the person who Chang Nuo used to directly use the Haki of Knowledge was Gogoya, and everything here was prepared in advance.


    "Is everything done?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Your Majesty, everything is ready, you and the distinguished guests can go directly!" Gogoya said.


    "You take Mr. Yixiao to the restaurant first, and I''ll go back and change clothes first." Changnuo said, then turned to look at Yixiao, and said with a smile on his face, "Mr. Yixiao, I''ll go back and change clothes first, and I''ll go backter." When we get to the restaurant, you can follow Gogoya and invite him inside!"


    "Your Majesty, there is no need to be polite. You should do your side of things first!" Yixiao said.


    Mainly because the clothes Chang Nuo wore when he went out today did not have any image of a king at all. He wore them very simply, giving the impression that there was no difference except that the material of the clothes on his body was slightly better. .


    With that said, Chang Nuo nodded directly as a courtesy, then turned around and started walking in the direction of where he lived.


    He left all the situations at the scene to Gogoya, a woman, to handle, but at this moment Gogoya was also a little embarrassed.


    After getting the information from His Majesty the King, she immediately began to prepare all this non-stop, and arranged many people to deal with this matter. After all, everyone was curious about what kind of distinguished guest the King spoke of. of.


    After all, in the few years since Chang Nuo became king, he had not entertained anyone, let alone such a major banquet.


    Even the other people who had been staying in the pce had never heard of the distinguished guest he mentioned, so everyone spent almost all their efforts on entertaining this first distinguished guest.


    But the smile at this moment did not look like a distinguished guest at all in Gogoya''s eyes, and he looked a little sloppy.


    He has short ck hair, a beard around his mouth, and an "X" shaped scar on the left side of his forehead that extends to both eyes. Has a tall figure. Wearing avender kimono, a ck and purple belt, a purple scarf around his neck, white gauntlets on his hands, bandages on his arms, and wooden shoes on his feet.


    His eyes were always closed, and he was holding an upright crutch in his hand. Anyone with an eye could tell at a nce that the other person was a blind man.


    Although he was curious in his heart, Gogoya did not show any expression of disdain. Instead, he smiled and said in a sweet voice, "Pleasee in, VIPs!"


    "You''re wee, just ask me to smile. I''m just a blind man who can''t see. I can''t be called a distinguished guest!" Yixiao said with a smile.


    "Mr. Yixiao is really joking. Since His Majesty the King became the leader of the entire Kingdom of Tru, you are the first person he calls a distinguished guest, and he is also willing to invite you to dine in the entire pce. This has already been reflected. Your identity and position!" Gogoya said.


    "This is just because your Majesty the King looks down on old people. I am just a good-for-nothing old man. What ability can I have to be a distinguished guest?"


    Yixiao said with a self-deprecating smile.


    But even if the other party said such words, Gogoya still maintained enough respect. All the other servants who were busy, when they saw the two of them arriving, none of them were surprised, and they all started to stand on the carpet. Both sides bowed to greet each other.


    This is the ceremony for treating distinguished guests. After passing through the main hall, there is a huge dining table that can seat about 30 people, and it is still rotating.


    It was already filled with exquisite food, but even so, the huge table only had two seats, front and back. This was obviously a lunch specially prepared for two people.


    ��It smells so good, it really makes people look forward to it!��


    As soon as he walked into the restaurant, he smiled and sniffed twice, and then said with satisfaction and expectation.


    "Mr. Yixiao, please take a seat. You can enjoy all the delicious food today, and the chefs in the pce are looking forward to your evaluation of this meal." Gogoya said with a smile.


    "There is absolutely no problem with this. Now that we have arrived at this location, let me taste it. How is the food in King Tru''s pce?" Yixiao said.


    Although he was blind, the key point was that he didn''t need anyone''s help at all. He walked straight to the dining table and sat on the chair.


    But he still knew the basic etiquette and politeness. After sitting down, he did not move his chopsticks immediately. At least he had to wait until the host came over before he could taste the delicious food here without being rude. .


    As the king''s secretary, Gogoya took two steps back when he saw Yixiao sitting down. He stood on the edge and carefully looked at the unprepossessing guest sitting in front of him.

 Chapter 187 Table Etiquette

    <h4>Chapter 187 Table Etiquette</h4>


    Yixiao had been sitting here for less than two minutes when Chang Nuo had already changed his clothes and reappeared here.


    This time he was wearing a standard king''s attire, which could be regarded as a form of attaching importance to the existence of Yixiao.


    After all, for him, no matter what kind of clothes he wears, as long as he can sit here and eat, it is enough to prove his identity and status, but he is not willing to do this. Since he has already arrived in the pce, then what he should have Respect is still needed. No matter in terms of form or etiquette, Changnuo wants to do this matter more carefully and seriously.


    "I''m really sorry, Mr. Yixiao, for keeping you waiting even though I''ve already invited you over!"


    When he first arrived here, Chang Nuo hurriedly smiled and said.


    "Don''t be too polite, I should be the one thanking you. Facing the delicacies on this table, I can''t enjoy such good things in other ces!"


    Yixiao said with the same smile, but he sat there without standing up, and Chang Nuo didn''t care at all about such a thing.


    However, the attitude of His Majesty the King not only surprised Gogoya who was standing next to him, but also all the other maids who participated in the service had their eyes widened.


    In their impression, Chang Nuo rarely cares about someone so much, and he is very indifferent to many things. But today, they didn''t expect that he would be so caring about an ordinary blind man. This kind of thing is still theirs This is the first time I have encountered this situation since I came into contact with His Majesty the King.


    As the two of them talked, Chang Nuo walked directly to the opposite side of Yixiao and sat down. Then he looked around the entire dining table and said to Gogoya who was standing next to him with some dissatisfaction, "Go to my room and bring my father to the table." Bring out the fine wine that Wang has collected for decades, and today I want to have a good drink with Mr. Yixiao!"


    Gogoya was obviously stunned for a moment, but after just asking, she immediately bowed and nodded and said, "Yes, Your Majesty..."


    The reason why she behaved so unexpectedly was because she had no idea when His Majesty the King would still have the fine wine in his collection. Furthermore, in her impression, the old King did not seem to drink at all, let alone Not to mention collecting these things?


    But since the other party had already said so, Gogoya could only go to his room and take a good look first.


    In fact, after returning to the room, Changnuo had already purchased two bottles of wine from the system space and ced them on the table in his room before changing clothes. This wine was indeed aged for dozens of years. If it goes well, I am afraid that the entire Pirates There is almost no such good wine in the world, which is enough to prove how much he values ??the middle-aged man in his forties or fifties in front of him.


    "His Majesty the King does not need to be so polite. This old man is just a blind man. How can he be so virtuous that His Majesty the King can treat him like this!"


    Yixiao said with some shame.


    After all, I have only been in contact with this little king for less than three hours, but during this period, the other party has already achieved a level that I recognize in terms of conversation and etiquette. Now even eating is enough. Attention to detail.


    Whether the other party does it intentionally or unintentionally, it can at least reflect the value that Yixiao can achieve here.


    "Mr. Yixiao, there is no need to be too modest. Since you are all here, you are naturally my guest. It is rare to have such a good chat with Mr. Yixiao. Naturally, I should prepare some wine to express my fate and friendship with Mr. Yixiao."


    Chang Nuo sat there and said with a smile.


    He was not in a hurry to move his chopsticks, and at this time, he was not in a hurry at all. The drinks had not been served yet, and the official plot had not yet begun.


    "His Majesty the King is so affectionate, it really puts me to shame, but since I have already said this, I will no longer be polite."


    He said with a smile, and then directly picked up the chopsticks ced on the dining table. The maids standing not far away, ready to serve, were all curious about how the blind man was eating, but no one came forward at this moment.


    After all, His Majesty the King, who was sitting on the main seat here, had not yet opened his mouth, so they could only stand there and wait.


    Chang Nuo smiled and saw that the other party had already picked up the chopsticks. Then he quickly turned the round table and turned a fish in front of him and said, "Mr. Yixiao, this is a fish unique to our kingdom. It has no bones or spines in its body." , you can enjoy this delicacy with confidence!��


    "Thank you for your work..."


    He smiled without being polite, then picked up the chopsticks and pinched it. Moreover, he had no image at all when it came to eating. The chopsticks almost caused half of the fish on the te to go down, and then he directly cut the piece of fish off. He stuffed the fish into his mouth with big mouthfuls, not caring about the ce where he was.


    "Oh~, it''s really delicious!"


    Yixiao didn''t have any image at all at the moment. His mouth was stuffed with a mouthful of food, but he still raised his head and shouted excitedly.


    And looking at this look, I don��t know how long I haven��t eaten for a long time. It may be that these foods are too delicious, which is why the other party behaves like this.


    Just after Yixiao finished speaking, Gogoya had already taken a bottle of wine from Chang Nuo''s room. Of course, these were things that had been prepared in advance. When she opened the door and entered, she had already found the table. There is a bottle of wine on it. Considering the character of His Majesty the King, this thing must have been prepared in advance.


    Just as Gogoya hurried over in a hurry, Changnuo looked at her like this and said with a smile, "Since we are all here, quickly open the wine and fill it up for Mr. Yixiao."


    Although no one could understand why His Majesty the King would entertain this blind man and use such grand etiquette, it didn''t matter if they didn''t understand, the key was that he could do things.


    Gogoya unpacked the box, and then took out a bottle of wine that could be easily seen to be many years old. The inside looked slightly yellowed due to time, and they didn''t even have the pattern on it. Saw it.


    After Gogoya opened it, a strong aroma of wine instantly rushed through the entire restaurant. Smile, who was still chewing his food, was instantly attracted by the aroma of wine.


    He stopped chewing and began to poke his nose in the direction of the drink in Gogoya''s hand.


    Seeing this scene, Chang Nuo felt that the matter had indeed been settled.


    "Don''t use such a small wine ss, give Mr. Yixiao arger bowl!"


    Seeing Gogoya picking up a small wine ss and preparing to pour wine, Chang Nuo suddenly smiled and said with a hint of helplessness.

 Chapter 188 The secret Yixiao wants to know

    <h4>Chapter 188 The secret Yixiao wants to know</h4>


    After hearing this, Gogoya changed to a slightlyrger wine ss, but this time he used a goblet, just to let the other party enjoy the feeling of drinking arge sip of wine at once.


    After pouring the wine, Gogoya continued to withdraw and step aside.


    "Mr. Yixiao, please have a taste..."


    Chang Nuo sat opposite and said leisurely.


    So far, he hasn''t moved his chopsticks, just quietly looking at the blind man sitting in front of him.


    It seems that the man sitting opposite is much more attractive than the delicious food on this table.


    But the fact is true. You can eat a table of delicious food at any time. If you don''t have it, you will have to make a new one. But if you miss this powerful man in front of you, you may never have it again.


    Without any unnecessary nonsense, Yixiao directly picked up the wine ss and took a sip.


    "It is indeed a rare good thing!"


    After finishing the drink, Yixiao said with appreciation.


    In less than 20 minutes, all the food on the table had turned into empty tes. However, from beginning to end, the king of this country, Changnuo, did not touch the chopsticks in front of him, let alone taste the food. A delicious meal.


    But he was extremely happy at the moment, and a feeling of sess had already filled his heart.


    Everyone else was confused as to why His Majesty the King would entertain such a slovenly middle-aged man. This man could not live up to the requirements of a distinguished guest in terms of appearance or etiquette.


    Now that not only the food is finished, but also the bottle of exquisite wine has disappeared, leaving only a smile that is leaning on the armchair, leisurely enjoying the aftertaste of the feeling just now.


    "Thank you so much for your hospitality today. This is the best meal I have ever had in my life, and it is also the best wine I have ever drunk!"


    Listening to what Yixiao said, Chang Nuo slowly showed a smile and said, "Mr. Yixiao said that if you like it, I can give you two bottles of fine wine, but it may take a few years for this kind of delicious food on the table to satisfy you regrly. After all, this country has not yet been able to protect itself as imagined, and when the people are still hungry, as a ruler, naturally, he cannot be rich in food and clothing for every meal!"


    "Having this understanding is enough for me to think highly of His Majesty the King. From now on, I will also wait and see whether the future development of this country can achieve what you ideally want!" Yixiao said.


    "I hope so! But who can say for sure what will happen in the future?" Chang Nuo said,


    "Now that I''ve finished eating and drinking, I wonder if His Majesty the King can take me to see what''s behind? I''m still very curious in my heart!"


    Yixiao said with a smile that eating was just a formality, what he really wanted to know was what was on the mountain behind.


    "No problem. Since Mr. Yixiao is so interested, we should go take a look."


    Changnuo stood up and said, then turned to look at Gogoya standing aside and asked, "Is Abona here?"


    "Your Majesty, Abona arrived 20 minutes ago, and he is waiting for you in front now!" Gogoya said.


    "Okay~"


    Chang Nuo said, then continued to look at Yixiao and asked, "I wonder if Mr. Yixiao is ready?"


    "Hehehe~, I don''t have anything to prepare, so just set off!"


    After saying that, he also stood up, then leaned on the crutch in his hand, stood there and took a deep breath.


    He had eaten too much just now, and now he looked the same, at least there was no change from before eating.


    "Since sir is ready, what if we go there right now?" Chang Nuo said.


    "Very good!"


    After saying that, the two of them started to walk out of the restaurant one after another, leaving only the maids and Gogoya standing there in confusion.


    After they left, one of the maids looked at Gogoya and asked, "Sister Gogoya, what is going on?"


    There are five or six maids standing here, and the expressions on their faces are full of doubts. It''s just that because of the presence of His Majesty the King, it''s hard for them to ask. But it''s different now. Everyone has left, so naturally they should Ask.


    "Don''t ask me about such things. I don''t know why His Majesty the King would invite such a person, but you just need to know that there is a reason for everything His Majesty the King does!"


    Gogoya looked at the maids standing here with a slightly serious expression, and had clearly told them not to think or talk too much.


    Although the royal pce of a country is the safest ce in the country, it is also the most dangerous ce in the country.


    Because here, whether it is words, deeds, or other aspects, you need to abide by the specific rules here.


    Changnuo started to head towards the back mountain with a smile, but as soon as they walked out of the backyard fence, Abona was already standing here waiting.


    When he first appeared here, Abona immediately bowed respectfully and shouted, "Your Majesty!"


    "What a powerful strength!"


    When Yixiao first saw Abona, he couldn''t help but said it directly.


    "This is Mr. Yixiao. He is a little curious about things in the back mountain, so he asked you to apany him to the back mountain today to have a look." Chang Nuo said?


    "I wonder who this young man is?"


    Yixiao suddenly asked Abona.


    "Abona, I always feel that I have seen the same Mr. Yixiao somewhere?" Abona said.


    "Maybe! I''ve been to too many ces over the years, and maybe a few of them look familiar." Yixiao said.


    "Abona is now the swordsman of our kingdom. He is also the most powerful being in our kingdom so far, and he is also the person I trust the most!" Changnuo said with a smile.


    "I don''t think this is necessarily the case!"


    Yixiao said to Chang Nuo with a smile, because he thought that such words were not reliable at all.


    "Now is not the time to study these things. Let''s chat while walking!" Chang Nuo said to Yixiao.


    At this point in time, it is indeed not the time to discuss who is more powerful. What use can a single powerful person do? Only when a country bes strong can it be truly powerful.


    While talking, the three of them began to walk side by side towards the long steps leading to the top of the back mountain. Stored on it was the top-secret space portal in the entire Tru Kingdom.


    As the three of them walked while talking, time passed very quickly. In less than 20 minutes, the three of them had reached the top of the mountain.

 Chapter 189 Personnel training at the air island base

    <h4>Chapter 189 Personnel training at the air ind base</h4>


    It''s still the same here as usual, a huge ck vortex is still spinning in a hundred-meter-high portal.


    After the space portal was established, Chang Nuo has never stepped into it once. As for what has be of the empty ind now, no one knows.


    People over there will hardly pass on any information now, not just because it''s not necessary, but because it would also be a waste of their energy.


    Standing in front of this space portal, Yixiao couldn''t see anything, but he felt that in front of him was a huge and strange ce.


    Even though he has no eyesight, everything around him is disyed in his mind. He is full of curiosity about it all, because he has already discovered this thing after he first came to this country. The depth and weirdness behind it This feeling made him so curious that he wanted toe and take a look.


    "What on earth is this?"


    Yixiao asked with a serious expression.


    He can feel that this thing is not simple, but he doesn''t know what it does? So I can only use this to ask directly.


    "This thing is a space portal. As long as this thing is built in another ce at the same time, he can reach any corner of the world at any time."


    Chang Nuo said without any concealment.


    Abona actually had the same idea as Gogoya and the others from beginning to end. Why would His Majesty the King lead a stranger to such a confidential ce?


    But the only thing that is different about him is that he can feel the strong strength of the other party, and the strength is so strong that it ispletely superior to himself.


    After Yixiao heard this, he began to slowly open his eyes, but only the whites of his eyes were exposed. He really wanted to see what the so-called space portal in front of him looked like, while maintaining the shock in his heart. , also full of curiosity.


    "Space teleportation? It seems to be a space devil fruit! It has been developed to this extent?" Yixiao murmured to himself.


    "I wonder if Mr. Yixiao is interested in going over and taking a look?" Chang Nuo asked again.


    "If possible, I really want to know where is the other end of this so-called space portal?"


    Facing Yixiao''s questions and curiosity, Changnuo did not refuse at all. Instead, he directly raised his hand, and a sh of blue light hit the frame of the space portal, and then the originally ck vortex became even deeper at this moment.


    "Mr. Yixiao, since you are so interested, we might as well go and have a look together. I hope Mr. Yixiao can give some pointers then!" Chang Nuo said.


    "I can''t give you any advice now!"


    He said it with a smile, but what he said really came from the heart.


    He has never encountered a space devil fruit before, and the ability of this thing seems very weird.


    Saying that, he smiled and walked directly into the teleportation space.


    The remaining two people followed closely and walked in.


    When he appeared again, the scenery in front of him hadpletely changed into somethingpletely different.


    After walking out of the space portal, the two guards guarding here found out that they were strangers. They were immediately on alert. However, before they started preparing to attack, Chang Nuo had already followed them out. .


    "It''s His Majesty the King!"


    one of the two guards yelled.


    They were still very familiar with His Majesty the King, but the person in front of them should havee out with their King, so they immediately put away their guard and stood respectfully.


    "Your Majesty the King!"


    When the three of them walked side by side to the guard, the two of them bowed respectfully and shouted.


    "Thank you!" Chang Nuo responded with a smile.


    Yixiao was tapping the ground with the crutch in his hand, and his sense of knowledge had begun to spread throughout the area.


    Now the world of Sky Ind has beenpletely disyed in his mind, and he can see the extent of the other party''s shock from his expression.


    What shocked him was not only the empty ind area, but more importantly, in his perception, not far away, tens of thousands of people were training intensively.


    "It seems that this ce is not as simple as imagined, but I never thought that this ce would be on an empty ind!"


    Yixiao said with emotion.


    "Is it possible that Mr. Yixiao has been to Sky Ind before?"


    Abona asked curiously.


    "I''ve been here once, but it was many years ago. The sky ind now seems to havepletely changed into apletely different scene, which is really surprising." Yixiao said.


    "This is indeed surprising news. I didn''t expect that Mr. Yixiao would actuallye to Sky Ind!" Chang Nuo said with some surprise at this time.


    Because in his impression, there were probably only three groups of people who had been to Sky Ind, but it was rtively normal. After all, as a person who had traveled all over the world, it was not a particrly unexpected situation for Yixiao to have visited Sky Ind.


    "Your Majesty the King, what really surprised me was not that this space teleportation directly reached the Sky Ind. I didn''t expect that the Kingdom of Tru still had the strength to amass tens of thousands of troops here as a military base. The strength of these people isparable to Ordinary soldiers in the Navy are much stronger!"


    Yixiao said with emotion.


    It''s not that he was so emotional. The main reason is that almost all those in the navy who can master the Sixth Form of the Navy have be instructors or lieutenants. The remaining ordinary soldiers are just slightly stronger in physique and have no special experience.


    And those kind of people are almost always caught inrge numbers. Even in the current Tru Kingdom, those ordinary armies are now beingpletely reced.


    As there are more and more young people in the army, the strength training each of them receives is also the six-type naval skills. However, as long as they work hard and master one or two, they can be directly selected until now. Be a member of the special forces at the training base on Sky Ind.


    This military reform has been recognized by everyone. Although the cost is many times greater than that of the previous army, it is still fully affordable for the current Kingdom of Tru to maintain the development and operation of the army. down.


    Especially for the special forces training of more than 10,000 people on the sky ind, their consumption has basically caught up with the consumption of the nearly 500,000 domestic troops.

 Chapter 190 The fatal flaw on the empty island

    <h4>Chapter 190 The fatal w on the empty ind</h4>


    Thend of Shantora at this moment ispletely iparable with what it was before.


    In just over a month, it has turned into a different scene. The establishment of the entire sky ind military base ispletely refreshing.


    When I first arrived at this ce, I no longer even needed to use my sense of sight, hearing, color, and the sound of training was already deafening.


    Those who are themanders do not shout directly with their own loud voices. Instead, everyone holds a rtivelyrge speaker in their hand, and each sound can almost prate the entire training venue.


    The training method here is not very simple. More than 10,000 people are divided into more than 500 teams. Each team has only about 20 people, and is equipped with an instructor. The overall training methods are almost the same. .


    Changnuo and Abona slowly walked towards the training ground with a smile, because the space portal is located directly behind the entire Sky Ind military base. After all, this is the ce leading to his own country. A guard can definitely be the tightest in this area.


    As soon as he reached the edge of the training ground, Chang Nuo saw apletely different scene.


    There are at least a thousand people training to lift a ratherrge stone. In addition, there are other people running around the entire venue. Anyway, the training methods and training rhythms of each team are almost different, but The only thing they have inmon now is that they are doing a lot of physical exercise.


    The training method of armed color domineering is nothing more than surpassing one''s own physical limits. Every instructor has mastered this method of training, and everyone uses their own simplest method to train the people in their team.


    More than a month will not have a very good effect, but for those who can be selected into the special forces, each of them has a physical strength that is hundreds of times higher than that of ordinary people, and the navy''s six-type skills are even more A lot of preparation has been made for them in advance.


    Not many people noticed the three people appearing here, but it wasn''t that everyone didn''t see it.


    The three people were walking around the edge of the training ground, but within a short time, Junhe had already led several people and quickly ran towards their direction.


    When he confirmed that what he saw was His Majesty the King, Junhe was suddenly surprised, then ran up quickly and shouted respectfully, "His Majesty the King..."


    "We''re just here to take a look. Don''t mind. Just keep doing what you have to do!" Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "It''s been so long, Shunhe!"


    At this time, Abona walked up and patted the other party''s shoulder and said.


    "Why do you have time toe here today?" Junhe asked Abona in a low voice.


    "This time it is His Majesty the King, apanying Mr. Yixiao!"


    Listening to what Abona said, Junhe subconsciously looked at the blind middle-aged man, and he could tell who Abona was talking about at almost a nce.


    After all, there were only three of them here, and the man in the middle looked very strange and had never been seen before.


    "As expected, they are a group of very energetic young people, but I have never thought that the Kingdom of Tru has such an unknown side?"


    Yixiao sensed the entire area with his own sense of knowledge, and he was directly shocked by what happened in this ce.


    The model of unified training and training for tens of thousands of people. Although it is a bit inexperienced in many thingspared to the navy, the ability to conduct suchrge-scale personnel training under the noses of the world government and the navy is enough to prove the future of the Kingdom of Toru. What the achieved capabilities will look like.


    "Mr. Yixiao, this is the biggest military secret that currently exists in our Kingdom of Tru. I wonder what Mr. Yixiao thinks after seeing all this?" Changnuo said with a smile.


    When he came here, he didn''t even try tomunicate with Junhe, because his people were always his people, and the other party could understand even if he didn''t chat for a short time.


    Yixia sighed, then ced the crutch in his hand directly on the ground, pressing both palms on the end of the crutch.


    "There is a problem with the training model. Although the ideal results can be achieved in the end, it will be dyed by at least one year.


    The navy''s training model inherently has certain disadvantages. If it can be improved, it will definitely be a country that the world''s governments and the navy will be afraid of in the future! "


    Yixiao said it directly,menting directly on what he felt in his words.


    The whole process here has been going on for a month. In fact, Changnuo had already discovered some problems when he first came here.


    With the help of what the other party said, he even more believed that Yixiao was the person he was looking for.


    "Junhe, where is the training manual I gave you?" Changnuo asked doubtfully.


    After all, directly training such arge-scale army does not have any experience with the previous personnel of the Toru Kingdom. This is different from the result of training individuals. When tens of thousands of people are trained at one time,plete nning and Leadership and coordination capabilities.


    So before that, Changnuo had already purchased a manual on how to practice domineering and other methods in the pirate world from the system space. This is probably the mostplete and convenient one.


    But after arriving here, Changnuo found that no one followed the instructions he had set before.


    "I''m sorry, Your Majesty, the training manual you gave me is now practiced by Enel alone ording to the contents!"


    Junhe lowered his head and said with some embarrassment.


    "Why is this happening?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Your Majesty, the method in the training manual does require a lot more speed and strictness for current training, but for these people who have just arrived on Kongdao Ind, high-intensity training is very easy. Let them cause the soil and water environment to be unsuitable.


    The oxygen level on Sky Ind is much thinner than that below. Large-scale cultivation methods can easily cause side effects to many people. Regarding this, my subordinates and others are also seizing the time to find a solution! "Junhe said.


    "Hehehe~, this little guy is right. Sky Ind is indeed a very good choice as a military base. It is not only secretive, but more importantly, it will not be interfered by any external factors. However, its shorings are also very good. Obviously, the oxygen at an altitude of 10,000 meters is simply not enough to supply so many people forrge-scale cultivation on the sky ind."


    Yixiao said with a smile.

 Chapter 191 Invitation from King Tru

    <h4>Chapter 191 Invitation from King Tru</h4>


    Only then did Chang Nuo finally begin to understand, because the manual he gave did require arge amount of oxygen consumption, but for the onlynd on the empty ind, it was indeed difficult to directly supply such arge number of people. Do intense training.


    The main reason is that they are not adaptable at all, but as a native of Sky Ind, Anilu, he has no such side effects at all, so he is very suitable to follow the entire training manual.


    Just when Chang Nuo frowned and started to think of a solution, Yixiao smiled again and said, "There is really a solution to this problem, but the way to get it is a little troublesome!"


    "Please tell me sir!"


    Chang Nuo suddenly rxed his brows and asked with some expectation.


    "There is a kind of sea coral on Fish-Man Ind that can automatically emit oxygen. One of these things can be at least as strong as 1,000 trees. There is also a white sea on Sky Ind itself. As long as these things are nted here, then this problem will naturally be solved. It''s easy to solve." Yixiao said.


    "Thank you, Mr. Yixiao, for informing me!"


    Chang Nuo never expected that he originally wanted to bring the other party over to see the hidden situation in his country, so that the other party could see his sincerity, but he did not expect that just bying here, he would help his country solve the problem. Such a big problem.


    In fact, no one had thought of this kind of thing before. After all, since the establishment of the Kongdao military base, Changnuo has note up to it once.


    But now that the problem has arisen and was discovered at such an early time, all problems have been prevented as early as possible.


    "Your Majesty the King, there are still many things and problems involved in the Sky Ind as a military training base. I think you should consider these things in advance. It seems that they have received a lot of intensive training on the ground. Come on. You probably went to Sky Ind to practice your domineering spirit, right?"


    Yixiao asked directly.


    "Yes, Mr. Yixiao. It was because he was worried about being discovered by outsiders that he chose Sky Ind as a military base for training. However, the existence of these problems was not discovered before. Thanks to Mr. Yixiao foring here this time!"


    Chang Nuo said respectfully again.


    "Indeed, Mr. Yixiao is really a thank you this time!"


    Junhe also said respectfully beside him.


    "The old man observed it and found that the aborigines on the empty ind did not seem to be affected in any way. His Majesty the King did the right thing in this regard, but once the oxygen content on the entire empty ind is increased, then for their personnel, It will cause inconvenience to their lives. After all, they have adapted to the current living environment, so I think it is better for His Majesty the King to consider these aspects in advance!"


    Yixiao talked about these problems, because as soon as he came up, he felt the quality of life on the entire Sky Ind. Compared with the first time he came to the Sky Ind, it was much better. This meant that the Kingdom of Tru was upying the Sky Ind. After that, he did not do anything excessive to the indigenous people, which he quite recognized.


    "Regarding this issue, I think Mr. Yixiao should worry more. His Majesty the King has enough capabilities to directly cover the entire area and will not affect the indigenous people living on the empty ind."


    Abona said with a smile.


    "The most important thing now is not these things. I think Junhe has not done a good job in many aspects. I wonder if Mr. Yixiao has any ideas after seeing these troops. They only survive to change the future environment. , if Mr. Yixiao doesn��t mind, you can take up a general position here and help train some of these young people who have not experienced anyrge-scale battles!��


    Chang Nuo suddenly asked directly with a smile.


    Even though he was belittling Junhe in his words, the other party was not angry at all. He was just a little confused as to why His Majesty the King valued the blind middle-aged man in front of him so much.


    The most important thing is that none of them know what Yixiao''s current strength is? The highest-ranking member of the Toru Kingdom''s army is Shunhe, but his position was so high that in the end he was only a lieutenant general, at least for the Toru Kingdom.


    But His Majesty the King invited him directly and gave him the rank of general, which was equivalent to directlymanding the entire army of the Kingdom of Tru.


    Not to mention others'' doubts, even Abona, who came with the two of them, was a little surprised by the decision made by His Majesty the King.


    However, as the person involved smiled, he did not say anything at this moment. He had already felt before that this little king of the Tru Kingdom could lead him directly into such a confidential military base, and he would definitely find a way to stay in the end. He didn''t like it, but he didn''t expect that the other party would say such heartfelt words.


    Although the generals of the army in the Kingdom of Tru do not have the status of the admirals of the navy, this is already a great existence for a country.


    Chang Nuo stood there, staring at Yixia quietly, trying to get some answers from the other party''s words. At least this time, he could say what he wanted to retain the other party deepest in his heart. After all, the preparations had been made. He knew so much, even though they had only known each other for half a day, he had already put all his trust in this moment.


    "Your Majesty, although it''s not that I don''t believe Mr. Yixiao, but directly giving him the position of general, isn''t it a bit...?"


    Junhe didn''t know what to say in the middle of his words. In fact, his meaning was very obvious. He was mainly worried about whether the other party had the strength to hold this position. He had to have at least the strength and ability to manage so many people below. Let others know.


    Abona also had the same idea, but he didn''t know how to speak at this time.


    Now no one has aplete understanding of the blind man in front of them. They have never even understood each other. They have just met each other once. They have not even spoken three sentences to each other in total. That is why there is such a situation. idea.


    Changnuo didn''t pay attention to what Junhe said. Instead, he stared at Yixiao seriously. His most urgent mentality was at this moment, because he wanted to get a more certain answer from the other party, which was naturally very important.


    But after waiting for a long time, Yixiao suddenly asked, and asked very seriously, "Your Majesty the King, I wonder if I can ask you a question. If the Kingdom of Tru has enough strength in the future, what do you want to do most? What?"

 Chapter 192 General with a smile

    <h4>Chapter 192 General with a smile</h4>


    Faced with this sudden question, Chang Nuo didn''t really know how to answer it for a moment.


    Now this question is just a false proposition. The answer Yixiao wants is definitely not what he wants to do in the future, but what he can do!


    Changnuo didn''t hesitate at all and said directly, "The world is too chaotic now. Maybe when I have the ability, I just want more people to live in a stable environment, at least to ensure that they can live in a stable environment." There is no way to guarantee that one can live a stable life in this condition. After all, no one dares to say what the world will be in the future.


    If you have some ability, then protect the people around you. If you have a lot of ability, then protect a country. If everyone around you has a lot of ability, then what''s the harm in protecting the world in the future? "


    Chang Nuo''s domineering words caused the overlord-colored domineering energy around his body to begin to overflow uncontrobly, especially when blue lightning surrounded his body,pletely forming the look of a living god.


    "Haha... It''s really rare to hear such domineering words, but I will remember these words today. If you are very capable in the future, I would like to see how you protect this world.


    But today, I will ept your invitation and be the general of the Kingdom of Tru, and I will protect this world with you! "


    Yixiao was silent for a moment, thenughed loudly and wildly, without taking the people next to him seriously at all, and he directly epted Changnuo''s invitation to be the country''s first general.


    As soon as these words came out, Chang Nuo was stunned for a moment, as if he was shocked by this sudden surprise. Then, the smile on his face directly made his facial features distort.


    But he was the only one who was happy, and the others didn''t understand what happened at all? Why is it so simple? Suddenly our country has a general who is also the military leader of the entire army.


    Abona was not clear about this situation, nor was Junhe, and it was even less clear who came with him and heard these words.


    They looked at each other one by one, trying to figure out what happened from each other''s expressions.


    "Your Majesty, this...?"


    Junhe now has a look of doubt on his face. He really wants to know what happened? It had only been a month, and suddenly for some reason such a weird person appeared.


    Yixiao didn''t show any strength now. Abona only guessed that the opponent should be stronger, but he really didn''t know anything else.


    Chang Nuo excitedly spun around twice, the smile on his face no longer concealed at all, and his excitement was beyond words.


    "Mr. Yixiao, thank you very much for joining our family in the Kingdom of Tru, but you can rest assured that the words I said today as King Tru will naturally be realized in the future when I have the ability."


    Chang Nuo suddenly took a deep breath and said calmly.


    He is still excited in his heart, but hepletely agrees with what he said at this moment. Although he does not think that he is a very good man, he still admits that he is definitely better than other kings in terms of the major issues of right and wrong. Much more has been done.


    "Being able to see this scene is also a blessing for me. Since I have chosen to join the Tru Kingdom, I will need your Majesty''s guidance in the future!" Yixiao said politely, bending down.


    He is now much older than the people around him. Even Abona is at least a dozen years younger than him. Whether in terms of qualifications or strength, Yixiao will definitely be the leader of the army in the future. son.


    The confused people are still confused. A group of people still haven''t understood why His Majesty the King is so excited now, and why he made a very strange person be the general of the entire country in an instant. With such a position, he can be regarded as the person with the highest strength and power besides the king.


    "Mr. Yixiao, although I am very excited for you to join our country, there are some things that I am afraid you will need to do again!" Chang Nuo said.


    "I understand that this kind of thing should be done naturally, so I don''t know what kind of ce should I choose next?" asked Yixiao.


    "Junhe, call everyone together. Today I want to grandly introduce to everyone the future general of the special forces of the Kingdom of Tru. Then you and Abona will get ready to face the next challenge!"


    Chang Nuo said seriously.


    Now the two of them finally understood that His Majesty the King wanted to gather everyone together, and then let the two of them have a duel with Yixiao, who had just be a general, to show off each other''s strength.


    But it''s normal to think about it this way. After all, the two of them are already considered to be the strongest in the army. If a general suddenly appears in the air, then naturally he should crush the two of them in terms of strength.


    Although Junhe showed some doubts, he did not refuse. He also wanted to know what level of strength the blind middle-aged man standing in front of him had.


    After receiving the order, Junhe waved directly to the people behind him to activate the emergency call order, asking everyone to gather here.


    "Abona, Mr. Yixiao is also a swordsman. In terms of strength, you can learn from itter and let him guide you. It will be of great help to you in the future!"


    Chang Nuo said seriously to Abona next to him.


    "Your Majesty, I''m sorry, I''m just a little older. Abona''s strength has reached a very good level. If we were to guide you from here, I''m afraid I really don''t have that ability!" Yixiao said with a smile. .


    "Mr. Yixiao... I should be called General Yixiao from now on. I hope you can give me more adviceter. The fact that you can be called a strong man by His Majesty is enough to prove your strength and ability to take on the responsibility of guidance." Abona smiled. said.


    He didn''t feel that what His Majesty the King said was hurtful at all. After all, in this world, there were indeed many people who were stronger than him. There might be someone who could suppress him in any corner of the world.


    Junhe has no right to speak at all now. Abona''s strength is higher than him. And indeed, as Abona said, His Majesty the King has never praised others in terms of the other party''s strength. This time he can rarely think so. This blind middle-aged man has a rtively strong smile. This kind of thing obviously allows them to think that their King has known him in advance.

 Chapter 193 Yixiao’s display of strength

    <h4>Chapter 193 Yixiao��s disy of strength</h4>


    "Ding~"


    While they were still talking, a huge ringing sound instantly swept through the area.


    When they heard this sound, all those who were still preparing for training immediately dropped what they were doing and quickly moved to the center of the square to gather.


    The gathering process was a little slow this time, mainly because many people were not in this area. They were receiving another kind of training in other ces, so by the time everyone gathered, ten minutes had passed.


    Although this is the case, this organization is already quite fast.


    All these scenes were disyed in Chang Nuo''s eyes with a smile. Faced with such a state, tens of thousands of people dressed in uniform and marching in neat steps, it was absolutely shocking no matter which angle you looked at it.


    And at the front of the team, there is a big boy who is familiar to Chang Nuo. This is today''s Anilu. He looks a little dark at the moment, but after more than a month of training, this guy''s courage, He is obviously much stronger than before, and the muscle lines on his body are also very obvious, but his facial expressions have begun to gradually change to what he will look like in the future.


    Especially the pair of big earlobes, which now reach almost to the shoulders, are particrly weirdpared with the others.


    In fact, most of the soldiers present are in their twenties, and each of them is radiant. Although the heights of some of them are somewhat different, at least in terms of the uniformity of the team, they are still It makes people feel refreshed before their eyes.


    "Report, report from arge team. There should be 1,000 people in the team, but there are actually 1,000 people."


    "Report, report from the second brigade, the number of team members should be 1,000, but the actual number is 1,000..."


    ��


    All the people here were divided into more than 500 teams, but they were divided into 11 brigades, each with 1,000 people. This was also the number of people theyter prepared for fighting as a group.


    Among the more than 20 people, there is an instructor who is also their leader and has the right tomand the team alone. Even if there is no topmander among them in the future, each team will be able topletebat tasks independently.


    Yixiao stood there and felt the reports of all their teams. He still admired Chang Nuo for his management of this point. After all, the military management specifications like this were many times more powerful than the current navy.


    In this world, there is not only a navy under the World Government, but also a powerful army. However,pared to the navy, the army is basically a group of crooked people. Compared to the navy, they can almost Ignore it.


    But facing the tens of thousands of people in front of them, it can give people a sense of the momentum of an army of 100,000.


    "Your Majesty, all the troops have been assembled. Please give instructions..."


    After Junhe saw all the teams reporting, he walked straight up to Chang Nuo, saluted with a military salute and said.


    "General Yixiao, let me introduce you first. You will need to teach them a lessonter, so this time I can only push you to the front of the stage!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "This is what I should do, Your Majesty, you''re wee!" Yixiao said.


    "Junhe, let''s go there!"


    Chang Nuo''s expression instantly became serious, and then he said calmly.


    Just like this, following a group of people, they began to move toward the front of the team of tens of thousands of people.


    Even though many people have seen His Majesty the King appear here, although they are still excited in their hearts, no one speaks at this moment. The entire training ground is still quiet and only the sound of the wind can be heard.


    When he reached the front of all the teams, Chang Nuo stood at the front, looking at the team of tens of thousands of people. Their eyes remained consistent, all looking straight ahead. Everyone stood very straight, as if they could not feel anything at all. Any exertion is normal.


    Chang Nuo stood there, closed his eyes for a moment, and then suddenly opened them. He instantly exuded an aura that enveloped the entire venue.


    His eyes were still sky blue at this moment, but the aura exuding from his body made people feel very gentle.


    After seeing the spread of domineering power, Chang Nuo slowly showed a smile, and then said in a soft and calm voice, "I''m sorry to disturb everyone''s practice, but there are indeed more important things today. Gather everyone here, all soldiers I have seen your hard work in cultivation, so in the end I just want to say, thank you for your hard work!


    But the most important thing today is not these. Next, the most important thing is to introduce you to someone. "


    Chang Nuo said, then took two steps back, came to the side of Yixiao, then pointed at him and said to everyone again, "This is Mr. Yixiao, and he will be a general of the special operations forces in the future!"


    As soon as these words came out, everyone was shocked. They had no idea that this sudden person would be the one who would rule them in the future, and they had no sense of recognition for this stranger they had never met before.


    Changnuo used his knowledge to be domineering. Even though his voice was very small, his voice seemed to be speaking in everyone''s ears. Everyone had many doubts in their hearts, but no one in these teams opened their mouths to speak at this moment. , let alone the so-called whispering state.


    "Mr. Yixiao, please introduce yourself next!" Changnuo said to Yixiao with a smile.


    "It should!"


    He said with a smile, then took a few steps forward with the crutch in his hand. His movements were very slow, but all the soldiers could understand that this new general would be blind?


    "Everyone, my name is Yixiao. Today, I can win the favor of His Majesty the King and be a general of the Kingdom of Tru. From now on, I will naturally be a member of the Kingdom of Tru, and we will advance and retreat together with you in the future."


    It was just a short sentence that didn''t mean much, but then he did something that no one expected.


    That was when a blind man suddenly exuded a powerful aura, which instantly covered all the soldiers present. It seemed as if a thousand kilograms of weight had been added to their bodies. They were all suppressed and squatted on the ground, and some even fell to the ground. Already lying on the ground.


    Until this moment, Junhe and Abona finally understood why His Majesty the King was so respectful to a blind man, and why he was able to personally invite him to be a general of the special forces!


    Just relying on this strength, he is indeed the best choice to be a general.


    The key is to rely on this ability to allow this group of people to be familiar with armed domineering as quickly as possible in the future.


    The current intensity is a bit low for everyone. As long as the oxygen content of Sky Ind increases and they can adapt to more intense training, coupled with the blessing of this unique gravity fruit, it will indeed be able to greatly improve Shorten the progress of this group of soldiers.

 Chapter 194 Challenges in Military Bases

    <h4>Chapter 194 Challenges in Military Bases</h4>


    Yixiao just said a word, and he immediately started to show off his abilities. At least in terms of strength, he must be recognized by everyone, otherwise even if he has be a general who leads this group of people, in the end, he will still It won''t get anyone''s approval.


    However, this scene really shocked everyone''s hearts. With one move, thousands of people in the audience were instantly killed. Although they were unprepared, this strength was enough to make everyone pay attention.


    Seeing that no one could stand safely on the entire field, even the group of people watching from behind were all extremely surprised.


    It''s not their fault. From the first time they saw Yixiao, this group of people subconsciously thought how powerful a blind man could be?


    "Where did your Majesty the King find this fierce man?"


    Junhe said somewhat muttering to himself.


    "Don''t think about it. You can''t figure out what His Majesty has done. Mr. Yixiao is indeed very powerful. Let''s cooperate wellter. Just don''t let the two of us be too embarrassed!"


    Abona said helplessly.


    Now the two talents finally knew why their King would find such a blind middle-aged man to serve as the country''s general. This strength is indeed transcendent, and even the two of them feel tremendous pressure.


    Yixiao just released his power, at least to show everyone his ability, and then began to take back the gravity he had released. The soldiers lying on the ground stood up one by one with shock on their faces.


    "I''m sorry to use this way as a greeting for our first meeting. Although I feel sorry for you, I hope you can remember that our country will face many things in the future. You are just the first batch, but you are also the first batch. They will definitely not be thest group of people to join this force.


    ording to what His Majesty the King said, from now on you will protect this country and protect the people. After wearing these clothes and getting this honor, what we have to do in the future is at least worthy of our own conscience, worthy of the people, and worthy of His Majesty the King!


    The next mission training will be more rigorous, but for the future, I believe that His Majesty the King should be able to take us directly to the entire sea, and wherever he looks, all the people will praise him.


    In front of His Majesty the King, tell me loudly if you can do it? "


    Yixiao said these words calmly and seriously before any of them got up, or even before the team stood in order. During the period of speaking, the group of people below also stood in fullpliance with the previous standards.


    At this time, as thest words fell, no one looked down upon them. They all shouted loudly, "Have confidence..."


    Chang Nuo stood behind and watched such a deafening scene with a smile on his face. He would never think that his choice was wrong. This time, he really picked up a bigger treasure.


    At least so far, with the addition of Yixiao, the entire Toru Kingdom can be considered to have the ability to protect itself in terms of strength. At this moment, whether it is facing the navy or any pirates, even the Yonko Pirates, then at this moment The Kingdom of Tru also definitely has the power to fight.


    The powerful force disyed by a smile instantly conquered everyone present. From the soldiers'' confusion at the beginning, to their admiration now, no one would question the special forces general standing in the center of the field, let alone People question the vision of His Majesty the King.


    "Abona, keep what you just said in mind. Just let yourself go and fight after a while. Don''t worry about destroying anything."


    Changnuo said leisurely, then looked at Junhe, and then continued, "Junhe, the same is true for you. The two of you must show your strength without reservation. This will be the best for you." A vivid lesson!��


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    The two people answered together. They did not retreat at all. Instead, they felt inexplicably excited at this moment, especially for Junhe.


    Since thest time he met Yonko Kaido, Shunhe clearly felt the slim gap between himself and the strong man. Even though he had been forcibly training himself during the time since he came back, he also wanted to see , where have you reached so far?


    "Everyone retreat to the perimeter of the field and leave the space in the middle free!"


    Changnuo shouted to everyone present in a soft voice. Using the power of seeing and hearing color, everyone could hear clearly.


    Although they were a little confused, the team quickly began to disperse around the venue in small groups.


    After reaching the edge, each team still stood in a very standard manner. The remaining training ground was at least two square kilometers in size, which waspletely enough for a battle between three people.


    But in order to prevent idents from happening, this situation is not enough.


    Chang Nuo crossed the crowd and walked directly to Yixiao. He smiled politely and said, "General Yixiao, let''s see how you perform next!"


    "Hehehe~, don''t worry, Your Majesty the King!"


    Yixiao didn''t feel any pressure at the moment, and still said with a smile on his lips.


    But then, Chang Nuo walked directly past him to the center of the field, with a serious expression and his body began to emit blue light. His eyes were even bluer at this moment.


    "The power of space��the edge of infinity..."


    Chang Nuo shouted softly, and then a barrier instantly emitted from his body, directly covering the empty field.


    This barrier is not as simple as it seems. Chang Nuo has even thought about leaving this barrier here from now on.


    The endless edge has made this space barrier infinitely magnified. People who stay in it can''t get out of this barrier no matter how they run. Therefore, inside, they can release any attack as much as they want, and it will not affect To those on the periphery.


    After doing all this, Changnuo instantly appeared outside the barrier, and then shouted to Abona and Junhe, "It''s your turn."


    The expressions of the two of them were obviously a little excited at this moment. Without any hesitation, they rushed directly into the boundary area, and the smile behind them also walked in slowly at this moment.


    Now even the most ignorant people have discovered what they are facing this time. The soldiers around them all look very excited, because such a scene is probably not seen many times in this life.

 Chapter 195 Gravity Fruit Ability

    <h4>Chapter 195 Gravity Fruit Ability</h4>


    They were very vague about Abona''s strength, but they were quite clear about their general Junhe.


    "You guys, please take a closer look. This is a duel between our special forces general, the lieutenant general, and the kingdom''s swordsmen. The strength of each of them is beyond your imagination. You missed this." This time, I don��t know when I will see such a wonderful scene in my life, so don��t blink your eyes while watching it!��


    At this moment, the instructor of an unknown team opened his mouth to shout, and then the other instructors all had serious expressions on their faces and began to reprimand and shout at the team members behind them.


    In fact, there is no need for them to say more. Everyone has a steelyard in their heart. Putting aside the issue of watching the excitement, it is indeed rare to see such a thing.


    Chang Nuo walked to the edge. He didn''t know when someone had moved a chair over. He sat on it without any hesitation and watched the duel quietly.


    This kind of thing is not only of great help to those soldiers, but also a great learning experience for him. After all, so far, his strength is enough, but he stillcks some experience in battles.


    The distance between the three people who entered the space barrier is not particrly far, but this is just how it seems to outsiders.


    The internal space has been stretched countless times by Chang Nuo using the power of space. Even though they look very close from the outside, from the inside, the distance between the three people is at least about a hundred meters.


    "Space mirror..."


    Chang Nuo also noticed this inconvenience while sitting where he was. After all, from the outside, the distance between them seemed too close, and he couldn''t really feel what he saw.


    So he waved his hand, and something simr to a mirror suddenly appeared in every area. However, from the inside, everyone could intuitively feel the atmosphere of the battle they were fighting.


    Space mirroring is one of Chang Nuo''s mostmonly used methods, and the person sitting in front of them now is very likely not the real person.


    This state isbined with his impression that the Hokage can use the power of space. He can hide his body in another space anytime and anywhere. No matter what method others use to attack, it is impossible to hurt his body. a pattern.


    As the spatial mirror rises, the people inside can directly affect the people outside, whether in terms of speech or movement momentum, but this influence cannot cause substantial harm.


    "General Yixiao, I really hope to be merciful next time, but this time I really want to thank His Majesty the King for giving us the opportunity, otherwise we really won''t be able to find an opportunity that allows us to know how much we can achieve!"


    Junhe said seriously.


    "You two don''t have to be modest. I am just a few years older. You already have this strength. I hope you will be merciful in the future!" Yixiao said modestly with a smile.


    "Then let me go first. General Yixiao will pay attention."


    As Abona said, he was on full alert and did not make any further moves. The opponent was very powerful and he did not believe that he could simply hurt the opponent.


    The dawn in his hands, the scabbard flew dozens of meters away in the next second. Abona held the knife in both hands and lunged forward, but his hands still maintained the posture of drawing the knife, but there was no scabbard behind him. There is also a powerful force hovering on the sword at this moment, and he has begun to gain momentum.


    This is just a tentative force in the early stage, but even so, Abona still goes all out.


    Since the opponent''s strength has been recognized by Chang Nuo, it is estimated that no matter which aspect you look at, it will definitely not be as simple as what you see in front of you.


    "I''m here too, General Yixiao!"


    Junhe roared loudly, and then his whole person quickly changed into a different scene. The ckbat uniform on his body waspletely broken at this moment. What he now showed was a standard werewolf image, except for the neck. Except for the white mane, the rest of it ispletely ck.


    Seeing this scene, all the soldiers couldn''t help but be surprised. This was the Lieutenant General who had been training with them, and was also the leader they had the most contact with. However, they did not expect that the Devil Fruit of their Lieutenant General was actually This form?


    The fingertips of Junhe''s two wolf ws can now extend at least about 30 centimeters, and each one looks extremely sharp.


    "Hehehe~, you two don''t have to be polite to me!"


    Yixiao said, then took a few steps towards them. At this moment, the crutch in his hand was directly held in his hand, instead of being ced on the ground, and he began to explore the condition of the road ahead.


    Abona took the lead in preparing to attack. The long knife in his hand turned into a stream of light along with his figure at this moment, and he attacked Yixiao at super fast speed.


    Junhe was also not to be outdone. After transforming into a werewolf form, he was far beyond his normal self in terms of physical function and speed and strength.


    The next second, he also started to fly directly in the direction of Yixiao.


    Facing such powerful attacks from the two men, Yixiao was not as rxed andfortable as before, but instead became serious.


    Abona''s strength is already close to that of a general, let alone Junhe, who is at the level of a lieutenant general. If the two of them join forces to attack, even Yixiao, who has the ability of a general, is likely to be hit hard if he is not careful. .


    When he was getting close, a de of light flew out from Abona''s hand and instantly began to tear the earth apart, and it was not far away from Yixiao.


    "Nice attack!"


    Yixiao had a serious expression, but he did not take this tentative attack seriously. When the sword light approached him, it passed him directly in the next second.


    But Junhe followed closely, and his attacks also followed.


    "too slow!"


    Yixiao sensed Junhe''s attack in his mind, and the wolf ws in the form of a werewolf were attacking towards his neck, but before his actual attack arrived, he had already sensed the trajectory and direction of the attack in advance.


    Without the slightest hesitation, Yixiao took a step back and instantly pulled the crutch in his hand upwards, saying "Gravity - Hell Brigade..."

 Chapter 196 Gravity Knife—Tiger

    <h4>Chapter 196 Gravity Knife��Tiger</h4>


    The next second, Junhe and Abona seemed to have a heavy weight on them, and they were instantly pressed to the ground. However, when the gravity fell, Abona relied on his ownbat experience and ability to quickly transfer to the gravity. The ce that could not be reached, but Junhe, who had rtively little actualbat experience, was instantly pressed to the ground. Even the ground had cracks and was still sinking.


    "Bang..."


    The ground that was cracked just now instantly formed a huge hole, and Junhe was directly pressed under the ground.


    At the same time, Abona once again quickly attacked Yixiao from another angle, but the difference this time was that when the attack was about to hit, the bright dawn in his hand was instantly covered with armed domineering energy, and the next second A ck de shed out.


    Faced with such a shing blow, even a powerful Yixiao would not be able to withstand it directly.


    He could only give up Junhe, who was suppressed by gravity, and then moved two steps sideways.


    This time the sh directly caused a huge crack in the earth, but fortunately there was a barrier on the outside to protect it. Although it would not directly attack the outside, due to the influence of the mirror image, it was still on the attacking end. The soldiers were shocked.


    "With the power of seeing and hearing Haki cultivated to the point of predicting, it seems that there is almost no suspense in this battle!"


    Chang Nuo, who was sitting on the outside, watched everything in the field with great interest, but he stillmented on the excitement of this battle from time to time.


    In the field, after Junhe was not suppressed by gravity, he quickly jumped out of the crushed hole, but his body was covered with dust at the moment, and huge scars could be seen on his body, and some of them were even damaged. You can see the bones inside.


    Even so, the scars on his body healed quickly under Silver Moon Wolf''s ability.


    This month, he has not been idle. He has been working hard to adapt to his own strength every day. Now he has achieved a little sess, although he is not as immortal as under the moonlight under such circumstances. But at least it can quickly increase its own recovery ability.


    "Junhe, if you don''t serve snacks, it will be embarrassing this time!"


    Abona shouted towards Junhe who had just jumped out.


    "You don''t need to say more, I know!"


    Jun He was a little unconvinced, but he had also recognized the reality. The blind middle-aged man standing opposite him was no match for him at all.


    But faced with this situation, Junhe still refused to give up. He speeded up his speed again and began to attack Yixiao vigorously.


    Not only that, his whole body has begun to be covered with armed domineering, his eyes have turned red blood red, and the 30 cm long wolf ws on his fingertips are constantly waving as he moves quickly. , every attack from his hand almost fell like raindrops.


    If this kind of attack is among the crowd, it can be regarded as arge-scale t-A attack, but for ordinary people or people with rtively weak strength, this kind of attack is indeed very effective, but for a person with knowledge, knowledge and color, , and after cultivating to a state where you can predict the future, this kind of attack bes useless.


    Yixiao just stood there. So far, he couldn''t even pull out the staff and sword in his hand. Although he wouldn''t be able to resist Junhe''s attacks, every attack was about to hit him, and he was directly hit by it. Gravity pressed to the ground, and under the influence of ability, there was no need to pay too much attention.


    "The speed is there, but the strength is not enough!"


    A wall of gravity formed around Yixiao,pletely enveloping him in it, allowing Junhe''s attacks to fall, but without causing any harm to him.


    During Junhe''s attack, Abona did not do anything. He stood on the spot and the de was still covered with domineering energy, and he began to umte his own strength.


    At this moment, it was as if a weak tornado had rolled up around Abona, and all the dust nearby was swept up at this moment, and began to spread rapidly towards the outside.


    "One cut..."


    Abona holds the knife in his right hand, and presses his left hand in front of the handle. The entire attack is a horizontal sh, and the speed is so fast that even Chang Nuo, who is sitting on the outside and observing, has already felt the space beingpressed for a moment. a feeling.


    He could feel it even if he was on the periphery, not to mention Yixiao who was fighting. He could directly feel the next situation of this attack.


    So now that he didn''t pay much attention to Junhe, he directly took out the staff sword in his hand again. The difference was that this time he directly pulled out the entire sword, and the aura on his body also happened at this moment. Huge changes.


    "Gravity Knife-Tiger..."


    Following the direction in which Abona struck, Yixiao swung his sword and struck directly.


    However, this kind of sh does not have any sword light. Instead, it directly uses the powerful gravity ability, which directly causes the surrounding space to begin to distort.


    And this kind of attack can even attack outside the barrier. When Chang Nuo saw this state, he could no longer sit down. After all, there were thousands of soldiers behind the shing attack.


    He did not get involved in the battle between several people in the space. He quickly moved to the direction of the attack, stood in front of everyone, and raised another barrier out of thin air.


    "The art of space - folding..."


    Chang Nuo quickly released the power of space with both hands, instantly creating a barrier that was nearly a kilometer long, and the space folding of this barrier could reach a distance of at least ten kilometers.


    Although it does not affect the viewing effect of these people, it can directly make the group of people staying here safe.


    "Oh~, His Majesty the King is so powerful~"


    ��


    Although this group of people have not experienced any particrly big battles, they are still aware of this kind of attack. Being able to have His Majesty the King appear here in person and create a defensive barrier already shows how powerful this attack is.


    In fact, for these people, everyone is very nervous and excited. After all, it is indeed rare to see such an attack.


    From Jun and his side, although every attack seems not very aggressive in Yixiao, there is something worthy of praise from others, that is, in terms of speed, none of the soldiers standing here observing can even It can be seen that the other party has moved.


    Not to mention the attacks falling like raindrops. It would be difficult for all of them present to deal with such a thing.

 Chapter 197 Meteor Falling

    <h4>Chapter 197 Meteor Falling</h4>


    While a group of people were sighing, they still watched the battle inside intently.


    Yixiao is worthy of being a general. This strength is enough to make the entire pirate world proud, and in this world, those with higher strength than him probably cannot exceed double digits in total.


    His Gravity Sword Tiger attack is not like an ordinary swordsman''s attack. He just uses the staff sword in his hand as a medium to activate his Devil Fruit ability.


    Chang Nuo also saw some clues. If this gravity fruit is handled properly, it will definitely be a heaven-defying ability.


    This thing can definitely be the top-level existence among the entire superhuman devil fruits. Although it may not be enough in some aspects of space ability, sometimes its effect is so great that it can directly destroy the entire pirate world.


    It��s just that it��s difficult to awaken!


    Abona''s entire body waspletely affected by gravity at this moment. After all, this gravity could even distort the surrounding space, let alone manpower to withstand such an attack.


    But when Yixiao attacked the opponent, the defense around his body was severely reduced. Even Junhe, who did not seem to be very aggressive before, now felt as if he had found an opportunity.


    Abona was restrained in ce, unable to move, and was even pressed to the ground. He tried hard to hold on to his final dignity as a swordsman, after four years of silence. The potential in the body is once again stimted.


    But the strength is like this, this is a battle that ispletely crushed.


    Although Junhe found an opening and prepared to attack, the next moment he felt that his idea waspletely wrong.


    "Gravity-Meteor..."


    How could Yixiao not sense Jun He behind him? Although he was a little inferior in strength, sometimes at critical moments, he could still cause some fatal damage to himself.


    As a man with such richbat experience, it is impossible to miss any detail.


    As hisst move fell, it seemed to everyone that this move was no different. There was no defense or attack. It was purely to scare the opponent.


    But they couldn''t figure out why Junhe still stood there and didn''t attack. He just raised his head and looked up nkly.


    When everyone outside the venue followed Junhe''s gaze, they all screamed in fright.


    "Meteorite..."


    ��


    With a loud shout, everyone saw several huge meteorites falling from the sky towards them quickly.


    This kind of attack almost subverted all their views. They had never heard of the method of summoning meteorites from the sky to attack, let alone seeing it before.


    The meteorite was quickly hitting the area where Sky Ind was located. At this moment, he was suppressing Abona''s smile and letting go of his own restrictions on this move.


    They have no interest in fighting anymore. At least the moment the meteorite appears, it means the battle is over.


    Not only is it enough to prove that this blind middle-aged man has absolute strength, but it can alsopletely prove that the other party does have the ability to intimidate.


    How can anyone be dissatisfied now? Not to mention Junhe and Abona, most of the people who saw this scene had their legs trembling.


    "You are really good at causing trouble!"


    Chang Nuo said with a speechless expression.


    Anyway, now that the other party has withdrawn the gravity knife attack, he simply withdraws the defensive space folding, and then looks at several meteorites that begin to fall rapidly from the sky.


    This kind of attack is trivial to him, but if this thing falls on an empty ind, it is very likely to sink the ind directly.


    It was not only the people present who were panicking, but also the aboriginal people on the empty ind. They all raised their heads and looked at each other. They were not panicked at all. What they showed in their eyes was just helplessness and despair.


    This kind of attack is like a natural disaster. In any world, let alone the world in the sea, this kind of attack is insurmountable for ordinary people.


    However, if such a meteorite falls from the sky, it will take at least nearly 30 seconds. Although the ability is great, the charging time is too long. During this period, anyone with strength can counterattack.


    Chang Nuo reluctantly removed the space barrier. The two of them, Abona, were now inplete embarrassment, and the other party didn''t even touch a corner of his clothes.


    They are no longer interested in the falling meteorite, because these two people believe that their king is absolutely capable of blocking this attack, and it is certainly impossible for this thing to fall into their military base.


    So until now, these two people have lowered their heads and looked disappointed, but thinking about it, it actually doesn''t matter!


    "General Yixiao, this move looks really happy!" Chang Nuo walked forward with a smile and said.


    He was not in the mood to pay attention to the two rtively depressed people now. Anyway, he should be able to get out of this haze in a while.


    "It''s just that this attack will probably require the help of His Majesty the King. I don''t have the ability to stop the meteorite from falling!"


    Yixiao said cheerfully. On the surface, he said so, but this kind of thing is nothing more than deceiving others.


    Chang Nuo knew very well what the other party meant. He just wanted to test whether his own strength as His Majesty the King could stop the attack he unleashed.


    The Gravity Fruit can be aggravated or lightened. It can make meteorites fall and naturally levitate them. Others may believe Yixiao''s words about this situation, but Chang Nuo knows it all too well.


    But he didn''t rify these words. He just said with a smile, "Mr. Yixiao, this exhibition is really wonderful. Not only did they learn a lot, but I was also deeply touched!"


    While speaking, Chang Nuo raised his right hand, and a blue-ck vortex appeared directly in the center of his palm. Then just when the meteorite was about to fall, the entire vortex seemed to directly cover the entire sky.


    But this process onlysted for a second or two. After the space vortex dissipated, there was no trace of the meteorite left!


    Abona and Junhe seemed to have known about it for a long time and were not too surprised by this incident.


    But now the tens of thousands of soldiers standing around had their jaws dropped to the ground in surprise. His eyes were already bulging, looking at the scene in front of him in disbelief.

 Chapter 198 What kind of monster is this?

    <h4>Chapter 198 What kind of monster is this?</h4>


    For them, they had already begun to despair in thest second, but what they saw in the next second almost made them even more unbelievable!


    "What kind of monsters are these? One can release meteorites, and the other can actually destroy meteorites silently!"


    One of the soldiers murmured to himself, not hiding the surprise in his heart.


    "Snapped!!"


    As soon as he finished speaking, someone pped him hard on the back of his head. Then the person standing next to him looked at him fiercely and said speechlessly, "Who are you calling a monster? The one who did such a thing is a He is our King, and the other one is the general of our kingdom!"


    "yes!!"


    The guy who was beaten didn''tin at all. He quickly stood up straight and saluted the military salute.


    Because the person who beat him was their instructor, although this guy was also shocked and surprised inside, his expression was just joy.


    There is such a powerful person in our country, and more importantly, His Majesty the King is even more powerful. This is what is exciting.


    In the middle of the square.


    "Your Majesty''s methods really amaze me. I didn''t expect it to be the fruit of superhuman space ability, and it has been developed to such an extent by Your Majesty!"


    Yixiao said with appreciation.


    The reason why he used this move was to confirm whether the thoughts in his heart were true. The main reason was that when the barrier was raised, there was already rtive doubt.


    Abona''s initial attack could definitely tear apart half of the empty ind, but this attack actually didn''t even go out of the barrier. The only thing he could think of was that the space where the three of them were in had nothing to do with the outside at all. rtion.


    The moment he used the Gravity Knife Tiger, he became more convinced of the doubts in his heart. After all, this kind of attack is impossible to defend against with any physical force, especially when facing the soldiers so close at hand, but this move Attacking it, it seemed like everything was lost in the sea.


    Now that he is convinced of what he is thinking in his heart, the most emotional thing about Yixiao is that the little king in front of him actually has such a powerful strength, and the armed domineering energy on his body is even more terrifying.


    The ck space vortex actually adds a domineering effect, which can instantly obliterate all falling meteorites, and the opponent appears veryfortable and rxed.


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said, "Thank you, General Yixiao. There are still many ces where I need your guidance in the future!"


    Feeling Chang Nuo''s courtesy, he raised his head slightly with a smile, opened his eyes to reveal the whites of his eyes, and said with some regret, "It would be great if I could still see the outside world at this moment. At least I could see what His Majesty the King is like now." What does it look like!��


    "It''s good that you can''t see it. Almost all the troubles in this world start when you see it. The external appearance of everything is the same. Only by feeling it with your heart can you know the true meaning of something!" Changnuo said! arrive.


    "Hahaha~, His Majesty the King is absolutely right. I never imagined that after being blind for so many years, I still couldn''t see clearly than His Majesty."


    Yixia took a deep breath and let it out slowly, then said with a smile.


    "How long do you two n to stay like this? This time is not a setback for you. It is nothing more than the result of a mutualpetition. Why should it be like this?"


    Chang Nuo looked at the two people with their heads lowered speechlessly. Although they looked embarrassed, no one was injured.


    After speaking to them, Changnuo continued to look at Yixiao and said, "I really made youugh. But from now on, I will leave Junhe to you. I hope to see him excel in the future!"


    "Don''t worry, Silver Moon Wolf, the phantom beast species of Wolf Wolf Fruit, still has great potential for future development. It only needs another one or two years to get used to it, and it is estimated that it will be able to excel."


    Said with a smile.


    "Hehehe~, are you telling the truth? But I have tried many ways, but I still can''t seem to find the way forward?"


    Hearing what Yixiao said, Junhe immediately became energetic and approached each other with a smile on his face and said.


    "Now is not the time for you to think about this matter. The noise caused just now is too great. Hurry up and send a few people to notify Ganfu and let them start to calm the emotions of the people on the empty ind!"


    Changnuo looked at Junhe and said.


    Although they do not need to personally exin this kind of thing to the people of Sky Ind, it is still necessary tomunicate with Ganfu and other priests so that they can convey the situation on their behalf, at least not to let the aborigines have any Panic mentality.


    In fact, there was no need for them to call people. Such an important thing happened here. Ganfuer''s group of people, including the Sandians, were already rushing here quickly at this moment, and they couldn''t care less. The question of any restraining order goes directly into Apayado''s territory.


    Because the changes in this month can be clearly felt by everyone. Not to mention eating things that have never been eaten before, the current quality of life on the entire Sky Ind has also improved a lotpared to before. grade.


    Most of their daily tasks are to go out to the sea to fish for shells, exchange money, and then go to the Sky Ind Supermarket on Angel Ind to make purchases.


    Therefore, these people have truly felt the benefits brought to them by the arrival of the Tru Kingdom.


    Not to mention the grassroots people who have already felt this benefit, even Gan Fuer, a ss figure who was originally an empty ind, has also felt the great benefits.


    Life on Kongdao is still the same as before. It''s just that the ce where the priests live has been changed. But in exchange for it, they not only get endless benefits, but also the future peace of the entire Kongdao.


    So after this scene happened, they began to rush towards thend of Shantora in Apayado regardless of everything.


    Here, Junhe has already begun to order people to spread towards the outside, just to prevent anyone froming in, and not wanting to spread the matter here directly.


    But it''s normal to think about it. If such a big thing happens here, they will definitely send people over to see it.


    But this time it really caused everyone to panic. The panic was not only because of the problems in the Tru Kingdom, but also because of where those meteorites came from and how they disappeared!


    But now the military base has begun to gradually restore stability. They saw a wonderful battle in all the videos, and also saw an incredible scene. It is estimated that in the next time, the real devil who belongs to them will The journey has just begun.

 Chapter 199 Worry

    <h4>Chapter 199 Worry</h4>


    Although the battle between the three people has ended, Yixiao, the general''s position, is now firmly seated here.


    No one has any doubts or objections about this. After all, the powerful strength has overwhelmed the entire audience, and no one can have a trace of doubt or dissatisfaction in their hearts.


    It''s just that hisst move was indeed a bit arrogant, and the panic it caused was a little more serious than imagined.


    While everyone was nervously busy with their work and training, there was a teenage boy standing there, his jaw still on the ground, his eyes bulging, looking at the scene in front of him in disbelief. .


    This person is Enelu. This is the first time in his life that he has seen a battle between strong men. But it is not only his first time in this life, but also others. Unexpectedly, in a short period of time, It has been enough to show the kind of strength that makes everyone despair.


    The attacks between the three people seemed to be able to kill everything in an instant. Even Shunhe, who was the weakest, the final attack was jaw-dropping.


    "So this is a strong man? He is really handsome!"


    Enelu stood there, still maintaining a shocked state of mind and said.


    "Where is this? Battles between truly strong men are almost life-and-death. They are just a challenge between strong men. There is also His Majesty the King protecting everyone. Otherwise, this kind of attack will definitely subvert Your imagination!��


    As soon as Eniro finished talking to himself, a man walked out directly behind him and patted him on the shoulder, saying with a smile on his face.


    Looking at Zhiya''s expression, Eniru asked with some doubts, "Brother Zhiya, do you think it''s possible for me to be such a powerful person in the future?"


    Zhiya smiled slightly. He would not deny the little guy in front of him. It had been more than a month since he arrived. The most important thing was that Enel was currently his direct subordinate.


    "Do you know where this general came from?"


    Zhiye asked directly, looked at the other party and shook his head. Zhiye continued, "When they were fighting just now, I learned that General Yixiao was directly entertained by His Majesty the King. At that time, no one understood why His Majesty the King would Find a blind man, and His Majesty the King even personally hosted a banquet with the highest etiquette in the royal pce. From the appearance, who can tell that the blind man is a strong man?"


    "Brother Zhiya, what do you mean?"


    Enelu asked confused.


    "I just want to tell you that His Majesty the King''s vision is much better than you think. His Majesty values ??you so much, so your future will not be lower than anyone else''s in the future, provided that you practice well yourself."


    Zhiya said with a smile, still resting on the other person''s shoulder.


    No one among the aborigines on the entire sky ind knows that there is arge military base on their sky ind. I dare not say that in the future, at least in the early stage!


    The people on Angel Ind and the Sandians are now slowly beginning to ease the rtionship between the two tribes. The two teams of Sandians, Wei Bai and Ganfu, are quickly heading towards thend of Shantora. They started to move forward, but when the two of them met together, they could see the urgency of the matter in Fang Fang''s eyes.


    "Ganfu, why are you here too?"


    Weibo asked without any curiosity, but with worry on his face.


    "What happened just now has caused panic among the people on Angel Ind. I don''t know how the people in Tru Kingdom are doing now. Why is this happening? I can''t care about any restrictions at this time. Let''s go and check the news first. talkter!"


    Ganfuer rode his Pegasus and said as he ran.


    "It seems that we want to go together, but there is no news inside yet. You must have seen the scene just now, and you still don''t know what happened inside!" Jun He was worried. said.


    "It''s better to go in and take a look first!"


    Ganfu said, but when he was just about to start taking Wei Bai to operate inside, nearly 20 people appeared in the woods instantly, each of them was wearing ckbat uniforms, and their expressions were extremely solemn.


    "Everyone, you should go back. By the way, let''s talk to your tribesmen and tell them that there is nothing going on here in Apayado, so that they don''t have to worry!"


    Junhe came here quickly with a group of people, and he already knew the route of this group of people. Regardless of whether he had to use his knowledge or his haqi to perceive it, after all, their route was the same.


    People on both sides of Weibo were not surprised when they saw Junhe''s sudden appearance, but Ganfu was a little worried and asked curiously, "So everyone is fine, but I don''t know what happened over there?" We clearly saw a huge meteorite falling just now, and we thought something was wrong with you all!"


    "That''s right, it doesn''t matter if the noise you usually make is a little louder, but the noise this time is too big!" Weibo also said.


    "I''m sorry everyone, but things here haven''t caused anymotion. I hope you can calm down other people''s emotions when you go back. In addition, the next batch of supplies should arrive in three days. Then we will still follow the same rules. We will Send it to Angel Ind personally!" Junhe said.


    Now their purpose is very clear, that is, to make the two pairs of people in front of them retreat quickly and not let him enter the territories of Apayado.


    They don''t want the military base in Apayado to be exposed. Although it doesn''t matter if the people on Kongdao know about it, it may cause panic. For maintaining the original life system of Kongdao, this situation is simply not possible. There''s no need to let them know.


    Although the managers of these empty inds already know the situation of the military base, they only know about the establishment of this aspect. No one knows the specific content.


    Jun He had already spoken to this point, and Ganfu and Ganfu were not ignorant. The two of them looked at each other, and then said with a smile, "Then I will wait for the good news from Jun He." !��


    "Don''t worry, you should go back quickly to calm everyone down and don''t let them cause panic!"


    Junhe said with a smile.


    "Then we''ll leave first. If we are needed then, just give us your orders directly!" Weibo said.


    After they finished speaking, they started to turn around and leave, but the two groups of people began to walk outside together. And the speed is not as fast as when it came.


    It wasn''t until they disappeared into the woods that Junhe began to lead people slowly towards the direction of the military base.


    Even if the affairs of the military base are kept strictly confidential, this situation cannot be hidden for too long. Although not many people go to Apayado, after all, the fire cannot be suppressed. Reveal some clues.

 Chapter 200 Military System Planning

    <h4>Chapter 200 Military System nning</h4>


    However, when both of their teams had not yet left thend of Apayado, both of them had pensive expressions on their faces.


    "Have you noticed that people seem to have changed their appearance now?"


    Weibo asked Ganfuer with some doubts.


    "I have noticed it a long time ago. It seems that there is definitely something in Apayado that they don''t want us to know. I don''t know whether it is good or bad for Sky Ind! Maybe it was the so-called one they originally helped to establish. The base has now officially begun operations, but how did these people get up here?"


    Ganfuer raised his head, took a deep breath and sighed.


    "When I first heard that they were going to build a base here, I didn''t understand what they meant. But from now on, it seems that there is something we don''t know about, and it''s so big. If there is no meteorite, there is no such thing. It seems that from now on, we will not be able to go in there and observe the situation at all!"


    Weibo said with a slight smile.


    The two of them don''t have so many thoughts about what is going on inside now. After all, they just need to stay here safely. If they are not allowed in, they will not be allowed in. Anyway, their current life is quite satisfactory, as long as they can continue to maintain it, but one People''s curiosity is always unstoppable, but they are just curious.


    These two people were not so curious that they insisted on going in to find out. They were blocked outside before they even entered. Without even thinking about it, they knew what the level of strength inside was!


    This is the military base.


    After Junhe settled all the matters, he quickly rushed back here.


    However, at this moment, Chang Nuo was already waiting for him in the room.


    There were several other people in the room. Before Junhe came, they had hardly discussed other things, just chatting about home affairs.


    Especially this time, the blow to Abona was a little bit bigger. Although he had no intention ofpeting for the world''s best swordsman, this battle made him see his own shorings and he was able to learn from the middle. Great lessons learned.


    Yixiao began to point out each other''s shorings without hesitation. After all, they are all partners from now on, and the exchanges between them will definitely only increase.


    "Your Majesty, I''m back!"


    Junhe walked in and looked at the three people sitting there. He was different from Abona. Even if he failed, he did not show any signs of discouragement, nor did he show any signs of failure.


    It was just that at the moment of failure, he showed some unwillingness. Once he went out, his whole mood changedpletely.


    "Sit down as soon as youe back. It''s rare for us toe up this time and just arrange things here."


    Chang Nuo raised his head slightly and said.


    This room is actually abat conference room. All the tables, chairs and benches inside are made of Baibaiyun, but the difference is that they are not only carved with exquisite patterns, but also painted with different colors.


    There are only four of them in the conference room now, which can be regarded as a high-level gathering of the entire army.


    Because except for Shunhe, the lieutenant general, the other personnel have the highest status as instructors. Haruya, the captain of the pce guard, has the same status and responsibilities as instructors at this moment, which is no different from others.


    After Junhe sat down, Changnuo took out a piece of information from somewhere and ced it t on the table.


    "This is the future military reward and punishment system, and there are also major restrictions on military rank. This matter will be left to General Yixiao to handle. The army must not only have a variety of talents, but also need to provide They have enough avenues for advancement..."


    Chang Nuo spoke for more than half an hour this time. He did not imitate the system model of the navy, but instead became more innovative, a management rule in this world.


    Each army is divided into teams of 20 people, led by the rank of second lieutenant. A regiment of one hundred people ismanded by the rank of major, and a division of one thousand people ismanded by the rank of major general.


    The other biggest point is that an army of ten thousand people is under the direct jurisdiction of the general.


    Each team of 20 people needs a variety of talents, and their training model has also begun to conduct special training based on personal strengths, and does not continue to follow the original specific n.


    The army formed in this way will be able to achieve maximum results whether it is advancing, retreating, attacking or coordinating operations.


    However, as the person who initiated this matter, Chang Nuo, although he did not directly conduct military training, from the perspective of his position in the army, he directly controlled the operation of the entire army as themander-in-chief.


    In the future, the Kingdom of Tru will never be what it is now. ording to everyone''s n, a group of soldiers will be admitted for training every two years on average. Then when the official plot begins, the Kingdom of Tru will have the ability to break up with any force. wrist.


    The time has now reached Haiyuanli 1512, and there are still eight years until the official plot begins. By that time, the Kingdom of Tru has definitely developed into a force beyond everyone''s imagination.


    But this country will not only maintain the status quo during this period of time, but it will only take greater action if it has sufficient ability to protect itself.


    The three people sat there quietly, listening to what His Majesty the King said. Not only did Junhe and Abona feel incredible, but even the smiles who had experienced many things were inevitably shocked at this moment.


    Such a meticulously nned arrangement can also establish a military hierarchy as a system to coordinaterge-scale operations and individual operations between small teams. Even the navy may not be able to do this at all.


    Moreover, each team is divided into captain and deputy captain. A team of 20 people needs to have two second lieutenant ranks. Each team of 100 people needs to have various functional operations. The division of each military rank is different, which also determines their participation and jurisdiction. to what extent.


    This model has just begun to operate now. For tens of thousands of people training, each soldier has his own strengths and weaknesses. The main purpose of this centralized training is to allow everyone to maximize their potential. That side of.


    The information on the table already introduces the situation this time in great detail, and this kind of thing is indeed the best venue choice for staying in this military base now.


    In the future, suchrge-scale and data-based arrangements will definitely not be limited to the military. All aspects and levels must be controlled well, so that the entire country can gradually reform into a country that is developing rapidly and moving towards the top power. An iron barrel moving forward.

 Chapter 201 Changes in Enelu

    <h4>Chapter 201 Changes in Enelu</h4>


    What this country needs to reform now is not just the projects in the military. Everything is already proceeding in an orderly manner. The big framework has now been fully implemented, and some details can be gradually improved from the middle.


    None of the three people had any objections to the things Chang Nuo proposed this time. As a swordsman, Abona was not responsible for managing the army, but General Yixiao and Junhe were rtively aware of these matters. People know very well what this kind of refinement will turn into in the end.


    "Everything here is really perfect for the management of the entire army. It can effectively avoid the sudden urrence of any situation!"


    Yixiao said directly.


    "Don''t worry about this kind of thing for the time being. The Kingdom of Tru will definitely not only have such a few troops in the future. By then, there will still be a lot for you to worry about. But the tens of thousands of people staying on the empty ind now will be in the future. They will be the backbone of the country. I hope that when you train their skills, you can give them more leadership skills. When the next batch of personneles up, you can at least ensure that there is a continuous supply of functional generals in the army." Chang Nuo said.


    "My subordinates will definitely take responsibility for this matter!" Junhe said.


    Today can be regarded as the happiest day of Chang Nuo. Not to mention that he has recruited a very powerful General Yixiao. Of course, this is also the most important thing. In addition, he can refine the rules of the army. Find out the cause and nip it in the bud in advance. In short, everything is moving in the right direction.


    The chat between the four peoplested for almost three hours, all detailed issues were solved one by one, and many imaginable or unexpected questions were also raised.


    As for the problem of low oxygen content on the sky ind, Changnuo has already thought of a way to deal with it, and the solution is quite easy and simple.


    When Sky Ind entered the evening time, Changnuo was alone in the training venue andmented the changes in the past few years. In fact, what he wanted to do more was just have a good time. If it weren''t for the fact that there was a There are still so many people in such a big country. He estimates that he will simply be a rich man now, live well in this world, and experience the experience of life.


    But now that life is like this, change is something that cannot be changed, so what can be done naturally is to make yourself stronger and make the people under you stronger.


    "Brother Changnuo..."


    Standing in the center of the training ground, while Chang Nuo was looking up at the stars in the sky and thinking about something, a voice came directly over.


    Turning his head to look over, he saw a big boy with a silly smile walking quickly towards him.


    Everyone can see the changes in Enelu in more than a month. A little guy with a natural sense of knowledge and an extremely flexible mind. If he could receive a better education, he would definitely not be what he is now. What a look.


    For this little guy, Chang Nuo always had a strong impression on him no matter where or when he met him. He might even train him to be a general of his country in the future, but the only thing that was certain was that this little guy''s future would definitely be unlimited. The quantitative kind.


    Seeing that the other party hade to his side, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and asked, "It''s already sote, why don''t you go to bed?"


    "Huh? I just finished training and I''m not sleepy yet!"


    Enel said with a smile


    "How do you feel after more than a month of training? Do you feel that you have made some progress?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Speaking of which, that''s amazing. I am now under the management of brother Zhiya. He has begun to teach me how to practice domineering. But now I am asked to practice six skills. Although it is difficult, I feel that it is quite good. It��sfortable, and I must master all the six skills within two years, and cultivate domineering, and I will definitely be able to help you, Brother Changnuo!��


    Seeing Enilu talking excitedly, Chang Nuo smiled slightly. This little guy is indeed very perseverant and learns how to deal with things very quickly.


    After thinking for a moment, a blue light suddenly shed in Chang Nuo''s hand, and then a thick book appeared directly in his hand.


    "Electromaism, you must read this book carefully. It will be of great help to you in the future. If you don''t understand anything, you can ask other people, or you can ask me when Ie over. I look forward to reading it. The day you transform."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    It is now clear that Chang Nuo still intends to let the Thunder Fruit belong to Enelu in the end. Although the natural fruit is rtively powerful, the most important thing is to cultivate it the day after tomorrow.


    No matter how powerful your talent is in the early stage, it will have no effect if your efforts in theter stage cannot keep up.


    This month can be regarded as a test given by Chang Nuo to the other party. He is not only smart but also has such tenacity and perseverance. Chang Nuo is rtively satisfied with the other party''s current performance.


    The ability to develop the Thunder Fruit can be reached to a great extent, but if you don''t understand how to do these things, then in the end you can only simply release electricity.


    This time I took out this book on electromaic mechanics, which has almost gone from the initial application of electricity to theter electromaic transformation, so the final aggressiveness is definitely different from the early stage.


    "Brother Changnuo, what is this?"


    Enelu obviously didn''t understand and asked with some confusion.


    "This thing will be very useful in the future. If you don''t want to go to the moon, study this thing carefully. You can definitely go up to the moon with it in the future!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    It is easier to get the opponent in this way. After all, the current Devil Fruit cannot be used by him. Once he eats the Devil Fruit in the early stage and then carries out other training in theter stage, he will need to pay at least ten more efforts in the future than he does now. Just work twice as hard.


    "Can you reach the moon? But is this kind of thing really possible?" Anilu asked still in disbelief.


    "Is it possible that you still don''t believe what I say? Take it back and take a good look at it, but you can''t dy your training. After you understand this book thoroughly, I will give you a better gift!" Chang Nuo said.


    "I don''t need any gifts. When the timees, I hope you can let me go down there and have a look. Reaching the moon is my goal, but I still want to go to Qinghai to see what the strong people there look like." Yes!" Enel said with a smile.

 Chapter 202 Two years

    <h4>Chapter 202 Two years</h4>


    "You should cultivate your abilities first. Then you can go anywhere you want, let alone the moon, even to any corner of the sea in Qinghai. You can''t go anywhere, but this The premise of everything is that you have this strength, and after you stay here for two years to train, I will let you live in the Tru Kingdom." Chang Nuo said directly.


    What he said was not to deceive the other party. The purpose of spending so much effort in cultivating a little guy was not just to enable him to have a rtively strong strength and then be able to help him.


    "Don''t worry, Brother Changnuo, I will definitely impress you within two years!" Enilu said seriously.


    Today''s Enilu ispletely different from before. He has a cheerful personality and a tenacious will. You would never have imagined that before, he would be a child who was bullied everywhere. In the night of this ind, Changnuo It also began to guide his values. After chatting for more than an hour, the matter was finally settled.


    After saying goodbye to Enelu, Chang Nuo raised his head and looked at this huge vine. Its height seemed to extend to the sky. Anyway, you couldn''t see its top at all from below.


    In the next second, Chang Nuo had reached the upper leaf in an instant. Such a huge leaf would not shake at all even if he stood on it.


    From this ce, you can almost overlook the entire sky ind, and it is almost 1km above the ground.


    The reason why Chang Nuo came to this ce was naturally to prepare for the next training.


    At one point in Tengman''s area, Chang Nuo waved his right hand, and then a sh of blue light directly covered that area.


    Then a ck, square, iron-like object appeared in the gap.


    This ce ispletely covered by this huge ck hole. If it were not caused by a strong external force, it would be impossible for him to fall out.


    But this ck, boxy thing was not as simple as it looked. After it appeared, its four ends began to glow with red light, and then the four corners extended like dragon heads, and began to move outwards. Exhales green gas.


    These gases began to spread rapidly downwards, and wherever they passed, flowers and nts began to grow rapidly.


    Not only that, those who were resting at the military base fell asleep quickly as if they were in aa after being exposed to these green gases.


    This thing is to provide oxygen and increase the oxygen content of the entire sky ind area, thereby ensuring that this group of people will not have any problems during training.


    After doing all this, all that''s left is to return to your own country.


    On the empty ind, everything is now fully prepared, and the general Yixiao naturally stayed here, not only to supervise everyone''s training work, but also to use his Devil Fruit ability to increase their training methods.


    The Gravity Fruit has excellent advantages for this kind ofrge-scale practice. As long as it is controlled properly, they can at least improve their status by at least five timespared to the current practice method.


    After returning, Chang Nuo directly apanied Abona to the top secret location of another Tru Kingdom under his jurisdiction.


    There are a lot of people here, and everyone is running back and forth, holding something in their hands and looking very panicked.


    However, on the sea next to this ce, two ships without sails have quietly docked, and their materials are not made of wood.


    This is now another military base of the Tru Kingdom. The difference is that it is just building ships.


    The South China Sea is a ce with the most craftsmen and the most skilled craftsmen in the entire pirate world, and most of the shipbuilding craftsmen have now been attracted to this country.


    Not all ships are made of steel, at least arge part are only built of wood.


    The reason why it is said to be a secret military base is because this ce cannot be known to outsiders so far.


    In the pirate world, the city of Seven Waters is most famous for shipbuilding. The key is that the top shipbuilders there are also people from the South China Sea countries.


    Everything seems to be going on in an orderly manner, at least in this huge Clearwater Bay, which can definitely serve as a key point for the Kingdom of Tru to move into the world in the future.


    ������������


    Two yearster.


    Time has flown by quietly. After two years of changes, the Kingdom of Tru has be apletely different scene.


    Thend of the royal city has begun to be filled with high-rise buildings, and the dpidated buildings that were there before have been canceled long ago.


    People with devil fruit abilities can build houses at a speed that is unparalleledpared to ordinary people. It is now apletely modern city, close to the port, and there is a building hotel with a height of more than 200 meters, Nanniwa The port has now expanded more than ten timespared to two years ago, and three navigation routes have been built in the port to fully ensure that any ship can dock at the harbor here.


    No one in the world is unaware of the current development of the Tru Kingdom. Regardless of their food, clothing, housing, transportation, or other things, at least everyone in this country will always get something belonging to the Tru Kingdom.modity.


    This is the development of this country today, a leapfrogging country across eras.


    Not only the royal city, but also other ces in the entire country have turned into a different scene.


    From the beginning of the country''s development to the present, the country''s total poption was only more than 26 million people. Over the past few years, it has slowly changed, and so far the country now amodates nearly 40 million people.


    Most people actually migrated to this ce from other ces. Real estate development has also attracted many businessmen from other countries, including some wealthy people.


    The reason is not only that themercial development of this country is very mature, but more importantly, this country is very safe. In the past few years, not only has there been no pirate intrusion, but there has not been any special incident in the country.


    The current poption of the Royal City has reached one-fifth of the country''s poption. The original city walls outside the Royal City have long been removed and reced by buildings.


    It seems that this ce is no longer in the same era as other countries. Everyone is surprised that this situation has happened. Now there are not only pedestrians walking on the streets, but also people riding bicycles, and even cars have appeared.


    This is what has changed over the past two years.

 Chapter 203 The Development of the Kingdom of Tru

    <h4>Chapter 203 The Development of the Kingdom of Tru</h4>


    In the past two years, the earth-shaking changes in the entire Tru Kingdom have not only been reflected in the current economic level, but other major changes have also urred.


    No one in this country will worry about food and clothing, no one will think about security, and no neighboring country will dare to provoke this country.


    But there is also something that makes the neighboring countries more distressed, that is, most of the people in their countries have already begun to flee or move to the Kingdom of Tru. Even if this happens, even if the army stops it, it will not have much effect.


    Neighboring Crimea, a member of the World Government, has only had less than 5 million people left from its original poption of 13 million. Not to mention the heavenly gold handed over every year, even therge area of ??domestd , have begun to be nted without anyone.


    Moreover, almost all those who stayed in the country were rtively disciplined and had difficulty moving, and there were also people such as the country''s nobles. Not only were they incapable of working, but they also added to the burden on the entire country.


    It would be better if only the people of Crimea came here. The key point is that there are many people in their army who came here secretly. But everyone who has heard about the life in the Kingdom of Tru, one by one For many people living in poverty, their greatest ideal in life is to be an official citizen of this country.


    Because even if theye to this country, these outsiders can only be regarded as B-ss household registration. They cannot join the army or participate in politics. Of course, apart from these aspects, their lives are almost the same as ordinary people.


    The Kingdom of Toru did not encounter any hardships during this period. At least as its reputation grew, countless people in the entire pirate world were staring at this country. If it were not for the fact that it was located in this barren area of ??the South China Sea, it would probably be It has long been envied by other countries or other people.


    Now this country''s products have spread to the New World. All the products produced from the basta base have sales channels that are used in the New World and the first half of the Great Line.


    Even beyond everyone''s imagination, the sales volume in these two ces is actually many times greater than the sales volume in the entire Four Seas Land.


    While the Tru Kingdom is making money, basta''s infrastructure has nowpletely transformed into apletely different scene.


    Especially the area close to the rapeseed flowers has now beenpletely covered with green shade, and the desert condition ispletely alleviated.


    Although other ces farther away still maintain their original appearance, this at least gives the people of the entire country of basta some hope.


    Without the pursuit of Crocodile in the original plot, it now seems that this country is not as unbearable as imagined.


    However, the number of people in the Shichibukai is still the same as before. This has not changed at all. Perhaps in terms of the overall situation, it still remains the same.


    The sea has also calmed down in the past few years, without the restlessness before, let alone the dangerous state before.


    Although the South China Sea is the weakest area among the four seas, now because of the Kingdom of Toru, a naval military base has begun to be built on the South China Sea, and it is not too far away from the Kingdom of Toru. It ispletely a choice. It was built on a small ind that was not very big.


    There are about 500 people in this military base. Normally, only one ship goes sailing, and there is no dangerous situation. After all, the most sailing ships on the sea here are merchant ships, and there are not even two pirates in sight.


    It is now the year 1514 of the Haiyuan calendar, and all the situations on the sea have stabilized, but new pirates are still joining the world every day, and bounty orders are emerging one after another.


    With the development of the times, the currency in today''s pirate world is also depreciating rapidly, at least it is no longer like it was a few years ago. This is indeed due to the great contribution of the Toru Kingdom. Their business has spread throughout the entire pirate world. They range from snacks to shipping freight, and now the quantity and types of products sold in the entire country are constantly updated, and different products may be released every two days.


    For people in this world, the royal city of the Toru Kingdom and the rapeseednd of basta in the entire pirate world have nowpletely turned intomercial holy ces. The key is that they are still one family.


    Constantly changing their business models and constantly updating their business products is what makes them so popr and loved by everyone.


    And every time a new teames over and sees the current Toru Kingdom, they can''t help but sigh.


    The ce filled with high-rise buildings is refreshing. Where Nanniwa Port is located, any businessman will feel as if he has entered another world when he gets off the boat.


    Those businessmen who oftene here can see a different country every time theye here. Whether it is from the heart or from other aspects, they feel that this is the real holy ce to live.


    Therefore, with the increasing number of businesses, the flow of peopleing to live here is increasing. Most businessmen from all over the world have begun to choose to own a house of their own in the Kingdom of Tru and then live there for a long time. Here, and started to develop his own business.


    The economy drives the economy, and once the cycle is started, there is no limit.


    When all the merchants from all over the world gathered here, somethingpletely different immediately appeared here.


    Thend of the Royal City has nowpletely turned into a business paradise. Business people can be seen almost everywhere on the streets. They maye from the North Sea, the West Sea, or even the East China Sea. You might as well see more peopleing here.


    That is to say, today''s model has driven the development of the entire economic cycle, making the entire Tru Kingdom lookpletelymercialized. When they came, they also drove domestic economic demand.


    Although the Kingdom of Tru does not need too many external goods, when every merchant sends out his own ship, he will always bring something with his own local characteristics when hees back. As the country''s people As they be richer and richer, all the things they carry will soon be exhausted here.


    The ces where people live today are no longer what they used to be. Even those people who live by the sea and just farmnd now live in small western-style houses. The subsidies provided by the state make them feel the beauty they have never experienced before.

 Chapter 204 Agreement

    <h4>Chapter 204 Agreement</h4>


    If you take a tour of this country now, everyone can feel the different beauty. And this country has only developed for a few years so far?


    Changnuo has only been king for five years. Now, at the age of 19, it can be said that he has been worshiped as a god by the entire country, an omnipotent god.


    The country''s organizational structure is all changing. Although there is no guarantee that any official will notmit corruption, so far, the country has developed to this time and everyone has done a good job.


    However, basta, which is also amercial ce, does not have this situation. Losstar maintains the operation of themercial economy here, but it does not start to vigorously develop real estate enterprises like its own country. The most important thing is that it is simply impossible to stay here. There is no need. Once the economy here is fully circted, it will do more harm than good to them.


    Simrly, the Kingdom of Tru is now driving rapid economic growth in basta, and has developed their entire country by nearly half, but for the people of this country, many things are not as they expected.


    When a person doesn''t have enough to eat, his or her thoughts are very simple, what should he eat for the next meal? But when a person is able to eat a full meal, they start to think about many things. .


    basta is a cooperative economy of the Kingdom of Tru. So far, the number of processing nts here has grown to more than 130. Although the tax exemption for five years can allow these businesses to develop rapidly, but They also paid these costs for building infrastructure projects.


    But it still can''t stop some domestic ministers from gossiping. After all, in their opinion, the Tru Kingdom has made too much money in their country, but the people in their own country can only maintain food and clothing.


    With the development of mentality, many people have begun to join in the protest against themercial entities of the Toru Kingdom. The majority of people''s wish is to let the country of basta directly take over all industrial facilities, thereby directly transferring the Toru Kingdom to Get out there and develop these things yourself.


    As the king, Kobra is exhausted every day. How can he not covet themercial facilities in basta now? However, there is an agreement between them, exempting any taxes within five years, and the Kingdom of Tru will assist his country in building infrastructure. facilities, and donated the Rapeseed Port as a condition, but it has only been two years, and many people across the country have begun to raise a wave of opposition.


    In the main hall of basta Pce.


    There is already a group of people staying here. Almost every minister here was a minister who had participated in the negotiations with the Tru Kingdom. All the agreements with you were passed with one vote, and these people were also involved.


    However, two yearster, these people stood in the pce hall again, all of them with frowns on their faces, including Kobra who was sitting on top.


    "Your Majesty the King, when we exempted the industries of the Kingdom of Tru from taxes for five years, it seemed like a major misstep for our country. Should we think of any way to stop this now?"


    A middle-aged man with a fat head, big ears and a round belly stood below and said.


    He has probably said this kind of thing more than once. However, facing the Tru Kingdom''s factories here, they receive billions of beli''s in revenue every day. For their entire country''s annual ie, it is only less than For a country worth 100 billion beli, this kind of jealous behavior is really irritating everyone''s heart.


    Kobra sat on it, also frowning. How could he not know these situations?


    Now the entire Rapeseed Port has been expanded by the Kingdom of Tru to be more than ten timesrger than before, and there is an endless stream of ships docking at the port from various countries on the Grand Route every day, even those guys from the New World. Come often.


    "We have made an agreement with the Kingdom of Tru. If we unterally break the agreement now, the impact on us will be too great. It will only be five years of tax. After all, their country is helping us build the entire country''s infrastructure. basta can��t do this kind of thing like crossing a river bridge!��


    Kobra took a deep breath and said calmly.


    "Your Majesty the King, we have not said that we will burn down the bridge across the river. Otherwise, we might as well take back the Rapeseed Port. This will at least greatly increase part of our country''s ie!"


    Another middle-aged man with a beard and a white robe said respectfully.


    "That''s right, Your Majesty the King, we should not have given up the port to them in the first ce. If we relied on that port for development, our country would be able to earn at least tens of billions of beli every year."


    The middle-aged man with a round belly said again.


    "Let''s leave this matter as it is for now. Then Minister Zuo will try to see if he canmunicate with Luosta!"


    Kobra said.


    "Your Majesty, I have alreadymunicated with Minister Luosta about this matter before. The other party just said that things should be done in ordance with the agreement and there is no room for negotiation!"


    Minister Zuo also stood up in embarrassment at this moment, and said with an embarrassed look on his face.


    Whatever His Majesty the King is thinking about now, he has already tried it before. Although the country''s economy has improved now, and most things no longer require money from their pce, for this country, it has already been disguised. Ruled by the Kingdom of Toru.


    A country can use business to develop its economy to such an extent, and so far it has controlled less than half of the country''s people. After all, if these people leave their factory now, they don''t know how many people will starve to death.


    Not to mention ministers like them, even Kobra is clearly aware of this matter. The country that was already in poverty before has finally recovered some blood. If it falls out with the Kingdom of Tru, it will suffer the most in the end. I''m afraid it''s still them.


    Kobra looked embarrassed, facing so many ministers'' advice, but he really had no choice. Regardless of emotional or rational aspects, the Kingdom of Tru was fully prepared in advance, and everything was on a single agreement, and It is stamped with the national seals of two countries. If this kind of thing causes a war between the two countries, it is estimated that even the World Government will not be able to participate.

 Chapter 205 Development Two Years Later

    <h4>Chapter 205 Development Two Years Later</h4>


    Nowadays, the development of the Kingdom of Tru depends on its dominant economic position. Anyone can understand that the once weak country in the South China Sea has now grown into a giant.


    Regardless of whether the other party has the ability to protect themselves, relying on today''s business can put them in an invincible position.


    It is conceivable that the meeting at the basta Pce ended on bad terms, because they did not think of a better solution, and everything could only proceed as it is now.


    In fact, for them, even after five years of the tax-free system, they will still be able to suppress this group of people.


    After all, although all infrastructure projects are free in the early stage, the agreement clearly states that it is free in the early stage, but in theter stage, the entire basta country needs to pay from the tax system or directly pay in cash.


    No matter how high the taxes and fees they charge, they will never be able to satisfy the construction of these basic projects.


    Luosta is well versed in business acumen. Beforeing here, he hadpletely put what Chang Nuo said into his mind and used it to ponder it all the time.


    ��If you want the people of a country to be obedient, then let them earn money but not be able to save any expenses, and keep them in a constant state of food and clothing and hunger. Once these people have money, no one will Be willing to work.��


    This passage has been with him to this day, and it is also something he practices the most.


    In the country of basta, Losstar is known as providing some benefits to its workers. Not only does it build amusement parks, casinos, and even some messy ces, so that these workers can truly feel the benefits of life.


    But the disadvantage is that the funds they just received every month, in addition to being able to meet the food and clothing life of the family, are all handed back.


    It''s not that Losta has to be like this. After all, these things are just here. If they can withstand the temptation, they canpletely save their own funds. For a poor ce like basta, there are many opportunities. Few people have umted or obtained what they want.


    At least they can taste a different taste of life here. Fruits and vegetables from other countries are things they have never tasted in their lives.


    Development started from the ce of rapeseed flowers, so as the most prosperous ce in the port, thend of rapeseed flowers has now be the city of perfume. Even though they are far apart, thend of rapeseed flowers today ispletely the same as him. The name is the same, and the light fragrance spreads directly and even dozens of kilometers away.


    The merchants standing at the port looked at the workers who were carrying goods back and forth, especially the crescent-shaped marks on the boxes they were carrying. This was a mark exclusively for business in the Kingdom of Tru, and it was also a kind of permission. It turns out that just seeing these things is enough to make these businessmenugh.


    Because every time a shipload of goods is shipped back, these things arepletely equivalent to a shipload of arms sales for those wealthy businessmen.


    So even those pirates would choose to purchase goods from here when they have nothing to do. Everyone maintains a tacit understanding, and no one will choose to cause trouble in amercial ce.


    Among these pirates is Domingo, who is mainly engaged in underground business. However, the only ce they can choose to purchase goods is basta. The Kingdom of Tru in the South China Sea prohibits anyone flying the pirate g as a means of doing business. The Lord''s pirate ship enters.


    Now it is enough to prove how rapidly these businesses and industries under the Kingdom of Tru have developed. The most important thing is what kind of profits these valuablemodities can achieve.


    Any cargo in a ship can bepared to arms, and the profit-making effect of this thing is simply shocking to everyone.


    In the Kingdom of Tru.


    Nowadays, the poption living in the Royal City has exceeded 8 million. The dense flow of people has made this citypletely surpass the number of people living in any country in the world, and has even surpassed the number of some smaller countries.


    The country of Crimea next to them only has 5 million people left, so the poption of one of their cities is alreadyrger than that of their country.


    All ces have been changed, and the only thing that has not changed is the current Tulu Pce.


    Today''s pce is still the same as before, without any changes. It is only separated by a river, and there is a modern urban society on the opposite side. However, it still has that simple historical style.


    "General Yixiao, regarding the next batch of people going to Sky Ind for training, do you think these people can meet the next training needs?"


    On the side of the pce hall, Chang Nuo and Yixiao were facing each other in the room.


    There is no one here now, only the two of them started to discuss things.


    It may not be easy for others toe back to Kongdao Military Base, but General Yixiao cane back anytime he wants.


    Holding this thick stack of lists in his hand and understanding the six skills they currently have mastered, Yixiao didn''t know what to say at this moment.


    After all, the number of people this time is toorge. Compared with the more than 10,000 people who were selected before, there are actually as many as 50,000 people who need to be sent this time. In terms of scale and quantity, there are definitely Enough to put the military base on Kongdao to good use.


    "Your Majesty the King, there is no problem in amodating so many people at the Sky Ind military base, but once so many people enter the Sky Ind, they will definitely not be able to hide it from the aborigines on the Sky Ind. By then, there will be a lot of information about this. It may expose the military base on Kongdao to those people.��


    Yixiao asked worriedly.


    "General Yixiao, there is no need to worry too much. Whether the air ind military base can be leaked is no longer important. Now the training of the first batch of personnel is about to bepleted. The country has enough toplete whether it is from amercial aspect or other aspects. For self-protection, the military base on the air ind only requires normal training. After all, it is impossible for too many people to go up there at one time. Even if the military base is known to people from other countries, we can rush there as soon as possible. Above the empty ind.��


    Changnuo said calmly.


    "Since His Majesty the King said this, I understand. It is indeed that I think too much. The location of the empty ind is not essible to anyone."


    Yixiao said with a smile.

 Chapter 206 Personnel Training Costs

    <h4>Chapter 206 Personnel Training Costs</h4>


    He has been back many times in the past two years, and has witnessed the development of the entire kingdom. For the little king sitting opposite him, Yixiao has begun to recognize the other''s ability from the bottom of his heart.


    But all this is so easy to say, but when ites to doing it, it is not as easy as imagined.


    This time, 50,000 people were transported to the Sky Ind for training at one time. This scale is really huge, and in terms of material requirements, it is also a rtively big test for the entire Tru Kingdom.


    The training cost of an army of 50,000 is at least nearly 500 billion beli every year. This kind ofrge-scale training basically guarantees that everyone��s annual consumption is about 50 million beri. Therefore, in this way, the world Except for the world government, almost no other country in the world can be responsible for such arge consumption.


    Of course, they have already taken this into consideration. Now the annual fiscal revenue of the entire kingdom has reached nearly two trillion beli. This may not seem to be a big deal in terms of expenditures for these personnel. But so far, the entire country still needs to build warships. In addition, there are also local troops and officials that need to spend money. Even now, the funds of the entire Tru Kingdom are not as abundant as imagined.


    "General Yixiao, it''s just that so many people suddenly appeared on the empty ind. Regarding training matters, we still need to n carefully!" Chang Nuo sat there with his eyes closed and thought.


    He was mainly considering whether the personnel who would join this kind of special forces in the future needed to be re-screened, because so far, as long as they mastered a six-style skill, they could enter the special forces for the next step of training, but with the changes in the entire kingdom The number of people has increased. So far, more and more people have mastered this skill. Even within the nned time, many people have mastered several six-style skills at the same time.


    "Your Majesty, regarding what you mentioned, I will make arrangements directly with them after I return in two days. My initial n is to let Lieutenant General Haruya stay, and Lieutenant General Deco will return directly to the kingdom. Jun and quasi-general will alsoe back when the timees. After all, with the development of the kingdom, there are more and more ces that other countries are jealous of. With management specifications of more than 50,000 people, Lieutenant General Zhiya and Lieutenant General Moshank, Bringing a thousand people is enough to handle their training." Yixiao said.


    As for the two people he mentioned, Lieutenant General Moshank and Lieutenant General Deco, these are outstanding figures among the special forces in the past two years. After being on the ind, it didn''t take even half a year for them to master the knowledge Haki and the armed Haki. After the subsequent development, they have be existences that are out of reach for many people in the entire army. .


    But they are not the only two who have been promoted to lieutenant general. A total of five lieutenant generals have appeared in the army in the past two years, including Haruya, the original captain of the pce guard. His strength has actually been recognized for a long time. It''s just that he hasn''t improved in other aspects. In two years, he has fully integrated his Devil Fruit ability, and in one fell swoop he became the most powerful being among all the lieutenant generals.


    This guy Junhe has been transformed in the past two years, and his strength is not the same as before. His devil fruit ability has been developed to an extremely powerful existence. Even when facing a naval admiral, he can have the power to rival him, but when ites So far, the entire Kingdom of Tru does not have that many militarymanders, so they can only be candidates for a quasi-general first.


    In fact, in the past two years, the biggest surprise to Chang Nuo should still belong to this guy Anilu. He is indeed quite smart, even smart enough to make everyone feel surprised and surprised.


    He always smiles indifferently to things, but he is already quite impressed by Enel''s performance.


    From the beginning to the present, Eniru haspletely mastered all the skills of the Six Styles. Not only that, but Eniru, who is only 16 years old now, has also made some achievements in armed color domineering. What surprised everyone the most It��s just seeing, hearing, and domineering.


    This guy himself is a person born with the domineering power of knowledge and knowledge. After systematic training, his domineering power of knowledge and knowledge has already surpassed that of the current would-be general Shunhe.


    But while training, he will not forget to study the electromaic mechanics that Changnuo gave him. Although this guy doesn''t know what the purpose of learning this thing is, for Junhe, who has followed Changnuo for a long time, As well as themander Yixiao who has a better mind, they all understand what His Majesty the King means.


    After all, such a move is already obvious, and for all of them, this is indeed a very suitable one. In two years, Anilu has long been different from its original appearance, and now it has gained everything. People''s recognition gradually began to move towards what he thought was a strong person.


    For this group of more than 50,000 people who went directly, when they return afterpleting their studies, it willpletely mean that the Kingdom of Toru has a pair of rtively hard wings and has the absolute power to protect itself in this pirate world. .


    Even now, the power of the Toru Kingdom has surpassed any of the four emperors groups. Even the navy and the World Government will not easily touch the reverse scale of the Toru Kingdom at this moment. They can only Just like with the Yonko, it would be nice if both sides remained silent.


    After all, the current Kingdom of Tru is doing particrly well both in terms of military and political aspects. The development of a country to this level is indeed worthy of the collective thinking of all other kings.


    But the development of this country to this day is not due to any one person.


    In fact, for this country, Changnuo only participated in important decisions and did not worry too much.


    The country''s Senate has gradually evolved from more than 100 people to nearly 500 people now. It has gradually transformed from old people to young people. Every time policies that can benefit the country and the people are mentioned, they will be the first to do so. When the timees, all these policies will be implemented as soon as the signature is confirmed.


    This enables this country today toplete all nning needs as quickly as possible, both in terms of management at the highest level and implementation at the lower levels.


    Although not every official is as honest and honest as imagined, most of them are rtively good at least so far.

 Chapter 207 The Returned Person

    <h4>Chapter 207 The Returned Person</h4>


    After two years of perfecting the system, this country''s legal system can now be regarded as the most perfect country in the entire pirate world, and it is also the most stringent country in the legal system.


    Any fight between persons is prohibited within the country. Anyone who disobeys will be detained, and in serious cases, they may even be expelled from the country.


    Moreover, legal provisions are not only applicable to people in one''s own country, but also apply to foreign businessmen. As long as the whole person is in this country, he must act in ordance with the rules of this country.


    Concerning these matters, even those who havee to the naval base to station troops in the South China Sea, there are no exceptions.


    It is because of such strictws that this country has now be everyone''s ideal paradise.


    Of course, with the development of this country so far, there are so many things that attract the envy of others. Not to mention that the countries nearby are very angry with them. Even the big pirates in the new world, including some people in the World Government, They are all extremely jealous of this rich country.


    But after all, it is a country and does not belong to a force. The people in the world government will at least restrain themselves, but at the same time, they will do another thing. So far, the Kingdom of Tru has not joined the world government. , the world government has already begun to pay attention to this already fat country.


    The world government can at least have some ideas, but the countries next to it can only look at it with envy, but no country dares to take even a step outside its own country.


    With the loss of people from neighboring countries, thebined poption of the five of them is probably not asrge as that of the Kingdom of Tru. This is the stark gap now.


    Moreover, the warmth and policies brought by the Kingdom of Tru to those who fled or wanted toe here from other countries made them instantly full of goodwill towards this country, and even regarded it as their own unique country. Many of them are already willing to sacrifice their lives.


    At the same time, the strength of unity is also making a huge contribution to the country''s economy.


    Today, the Royal Pce of Tru has begun to implement full martialw, mainly because the more than 10,000 people who havended on the sky ind will return to their own country today. This is also the day when they begin to show the results of their training.


    Everyone will choose toe back. They can return to their families for reunions. Of course, they can also take a look at how prosperous the country is now. However, more than a thousand of them have also been discussed before. When the next group of teams enters , they also need to go back to serve as instructors.


    So at this moment, in the back hill of the pce, Chang Nuo and Yixiao, and Abona standing not far away, are all waiting here to personally wee these special forces who havee back from thousands of miles away and trained hard for two years.


    All this is just the beginning, there are still many things left.


    On the empty ind.


    "All of you, please restrain your excitement and don''t make any small moves for me. When you go backter, His Majesty the King will be waiting for you at the other end of the gate. In two years, don''t let His Majesty the King make any small moves. Look at us, show your most heroic side!"


    Junhe stood at the forefront of the training ground and shouted directly.


    This time, he did not have any speakers or microphones, and relied directly on his own voice and his domineering power to release.


    We have reached this moment, and the scene is not quiet. Each of them is quite excited at the moment, and whispering to each other happens from time to time.


    Two years have been enough for this group of people to undergo major changes. They no longer have the same immature aura as before. If an ordinary person stood in this venue and felt their majestic momentum, they would probably be immediately impressed. He was so frightened that he fell to the ground.


    This is how they were treated as the first batch of people. It was a great honor for them to be greeted by His Majesty the King himself.


    So far, the weakest among this group of people can almost bepared with a lieutenant colonel in the navy. At least being able to master armed color haki is enough to reach their level. It is nothing more than understanding of armed color haki.


    After Junhe''s words came to light, the restless hearts of the group of people slowly calmed down, and the venue began to slowly return to a quiet state.


    They all understand that as the first batch of people, they will be the backbone of this country no matter what in the future, especially in the past two years of selection, five lieutenant generals have emerged from this group of people. , more than a dozen major generals, more than 20 senior colonels, more than 50 lieutenant colonels, nearly 100 majors, and almost everyone else has the rank of lieutenant.


    This is how they were treated as the first group of people, but in future work, if these people want to get a higher position, they can only rely on their own strength or military merit.


    "Lieutenant General Zhiye, Lieutenant General Moshank, ordered everyone to start preparing to set off towards the teleportation gate as a team. Everyone should remain silent. No one is allowed to make any noise, and no one is allowed to leave the team!"


    Junhe spoke leisurely to the five lieutenant generals standing in front of him.


    He now has the status of associate general and is fully qualified to order this group of people.


    The five people collectively took a step forward and said in a high-pitched voice, "Yes~"


    "Let''s start!"


    Junhe shouted to everyone, and then starting from the first row, everyone began to line up in three teams in an orderly manner and set off towards the location of the teleportation gate.


    The only one who is special here is Eniro. This guy is not from the Toru Kingdom. He essentially exists on an empty ind. However, this time the order is to let all the Toru Kingdom personnel go back first. This guy Now I feel a little embarrassed just standing there, not knowing whether to stay or go together.


    At this moment, he seemed to have matured a lot, and he still held the thick electromaic mechanics book in his hand. After several years, the book still looked the same as before, but it was just a little dirty.


    "Enilu, you will set off with uster!"


    Haruya walked up and patted his shoulder and said.


    "Can...is it okay?"


    Enelu asked in disbelief.


    After all, he also saw the order this time. But from the lines of the words, he was indeed not from the Tru Kingdom, but for him, he was also looking forward to seeing what the city below looked like.

 Chapter 208 Preparing for the Journey

    <h4>Chapter 208 Preparing for the Journey</h4>


    Zhi also understands Eniro''s mood at this moment. After all, everyone else has to go back, but for this little guy, where is his home?


    "Don''t worry, it''s absolutely fine. Don''t forget that Kongdao is now also the territory of the Tru Kingdom. You are also a member of this country, so you can naturally go back. And don''t forget that His Majesty the King is looking forward to you, and I don''t have it anyway. Family, just stay with me when the timees!"


    Haruya said gently.


    "Okay!! Thank you so much, Brother Haruya."


    Eniru immediately jumped up with excitement. He had not experienced this feeling of family for who knows how many years. Especially Zhiya''s words touched the heartstrings in his heart.


    "Stop getting excited and let''s go, otherwise we won''t be able to go back when the space portal closester!"


    Haruya rubbed his head and said.


    "Yes, yes, let''s go quickly!"


    Enelu excitedly began to follow his team and walked towards the portal.


    With such arge crowd, even if they pass through the portal, it will take them at least nearly half an hour to pass. After all, there are so many people, and it may take a lot of time to walk through one by one.


    The teams all started to move forward in an orderly manner, with the overall pace consistent. Each team was led by its own instructor.


    They were divided into teams of 100 people each, and there was at least one major in front of each team. Although everyone was quite excited, they did not express themselves too much at this moment.


    As the first person walked into the portal, when he appeared again, he could already see his Majesty the King and the generals guarding the portal, waiting for them to return.


    Although not many people greeted today''s return event, the glory emanating from them cannot be erased by anyone.


    The outside of the pce remained as usual. No one thought that at this moment, the pce was preparing to wee these warriors who had returned from training.


    They will all be the patron saints of this country and travel to every corner of the country.


    As groups of people walked out, everyone had expressions of joy on their faces as soon as they walked out.


    After all, after two years, when they appeared in their own country again, they werepletely different from before, and each one of them had be an outstanding being.


    They are now the pride of their families and the pride of the entire country. In the future, these people can show their talents and be warriors of the entire country.


    After everyone came out, the first thing they saw was His Majesty the King standing in front of the portal. When each team came out, the first thing they had to do was to salute and move forward. This was equivalent to a small military parade. , while also emphasizing the moment of this country��s rise.


    In the past two years, this portal has now changed into something else. Although it is not enough to amodate more than 10,000 people, at least it is no problem to amodate thousands of people at the same time.


    As each group of people came out, the general in charge in front of them began to lead them towards the back mountain, and then began to gather towards the foot of the mountain.


    Because a square has been built at the foot of the mountain that can amodate at least 100,000 people, it can also be called an absolute military parade venue.


    Almost an hourter, after confirming that everyone had returned, Changnuo directly closed the space channel. After all, there were only two people guarding the space channel on the empty ind at this time. If some ident urs, they may not be able to react in time and can only close the space channel directly.


    Before this group of people came back, the Tru Kingdom had already transported supplies to Sky Ind for nearly three months. In a short period of time, there was no need to worry about the quality of life on the entire Sky Ind.


    Now that they are given a rest period of one month, the entire country will probably need to stand in front of others and be the overlord of their own area.


    Tens of thousands of people stood neatly at the foot of the mountain. No one opened their mouths to speak. It was so quiet that only the wind could be heard.


    Chang Nuo stood on a high tform, which was almost two meters high. Facing the t ground below, he could overlook all the people.


    On the main podium, Chang Nuo stood at the front. Next to him was General Yixiao, and the five lieutenant generals behind him were all neatly arranged behind him.


    This time is not only a weing ceremony, but also a grand military parade.


    "I''m d that you all are back. This is an honor that belongs to you, and it is also an honor that belongs to the country. In the future, the safety of the Tru Kingdom, as well as the safety of the people, will be in your hands.


    There will be bigger storms waiting for us in the future, but just because you are standing here today, it already means we have seeded.


    After several years of hard training, I believe you have achieved something. In the days toe, you can have a good rest. One monthter, the journey to the Toru Kingdom will officially start! "


    Chang Nuo said loudly, as the first group of people walked off the sky ind, their performance had exceeded expectations. Each one of them exuded a different light at this moment, and this was the glory attached to them.


    After a speech, there was no sound below. Just by looking at their expressions, you can tell how excited everyone is at this moment.


    From the beginning of training the Sixth Form of the Navy to the present, this group of people have received training for more than two or three years. Within this period of time, they have aplished feats that most people cannot aplish. Not only do they have leadership and methods The above credit lies more importantly in their own efforts.


    The weing ceremony and military parade did notst long. Everyone understood that the biggest idea of ????this group of people now was to go back and rest quickly, and by the way, take a good look at what their country has be now. Naturally, no one will do it again. If there is no dy, everything that needs to be said has already been conveyed on the empty ind. Everyone in the army is also familiar with the system.


    Next, we are waiting for theplete debut in a month. In addition, there are still candidates who are ready tond on the sky ind. It is conceivable to what extent the Kingdom of Toru will transform in the next few years. ?


    It''s just that the secret training of the army cannot be kept hidden from the World Government. But after this group of peoplee back, what can they do even if they know?

 Chapter 209 Deterrence Display

    <h4>Chapter 209 Deterrence Disy</h4>


    One monthter.


    As 50,000 people entered the empty ind again, the empty ind that had been silent for a month became lively again.


    But it''s not just Kongdao that''s more lively. The Tru Kingdom is ushering in a more lively time.


    At this moment, this country has beenpletely under the spotlight. Reporters from various countries, including those from the New World, have alle over. This is mainly because the Nanniwa Port is not open to the public today, but there is still a channel left for Merchant ships pass.


    Because at this moment, hundreds of warships have appeared continuously in the port, each with the g of the Kingdom of Tru hanging on it. Arge number of people have gathered in the port, and it has even reached the point where the crowd is overcrowded.


    On the high-rise buildings near the port, every floor is also crowded with people. Because they can''t squeeze in, many people even choose to risk their lives and run to some more dangerous areas. Even the branches are now hung with Full of people.


    Despite the police''s support, it still could not stop the enthusiasm of all the people.


    As early as ten days ago, the Kingdom of Tru had already issued a notice that the naval era of this country woulde, and decided to debut the military power of this country today.


    In the past two years, the development of the Kingdom of Tru has be amon concern of the New World, the Great Line, and even all countries in the world. At that time, many people were stillughing at the Kingdom of Tru for making money in vain. He has no ability to protect himself at all, but he did not expect that in such a short period of time, a naval fleet that would scare all surrounding countries would appear.


    These ships all sailed into the harbor the night before. In front of them were ten giant steel ships. Each giant ship was built with twoyers. There was a rtivelyrge space on the deck, but at the same time, there was also a ship that looked mighty. A mighty cannon.


    It is different from any other ship in the current pirate era. It ispletely forged with steel. Looking at the entire world, this technology is probably only avable to the Vinsmoke family in the North Sea, but it is also fundamentally different from them.


    These giant steel ships are all built with engines and driven by propellers on the bottom. In today''s era, this is already considered an incredible piece of science and technology.


    "Big news, big news, hurry up and turn my news into a live broadcast. There is a huge movement in the Tru Kingdom. Report it to the president quickly!!"


    "The news I asked this time must be released as soon as possible. This is big news, big news that can definitely change the world today!..."


    ��


    The reporters standing on the shore were filming one after another, and some of them had even started live broadcasting. For the Toru Kingdom, this incident would be known to all countries in the pirate world in less than an hour.


    With the power of self-protection, what we need to do now is to use deterrence to stop everyone from being jealous of the Kingdom of Tru.


    It''s only 6 o''clock in the morning, when the sun starts to shine, the ce is already full of people, and the news has even spread to every corner of the new world.


    Dark ce in front of screen.


    "Hey... I really don''t know what our hidden partner wants to do now? But the shapes of these things are really weird? "


    As a burst ofughter came out, a man with blond hair, wearing sunsses, wearing a pink feathered coat lined with a white shirt and cropped pants underneath, sat on a chair with his legs crossed, and a pair of pointed shoes looked particrly special at this moment. obvious.


    "Joker, what makes you so happy?"


    At this time, a guy who looked like he had a thick nose and was wearing a green coat walked in. A big hunchback with two lines of runny nose walked in and asked.


    "It seems that there is another ce in the world that can cause headaches for the navy! It really makes people look forward to it!"


    Domingo''s face was full of expectation at this moment, but he was still talking leisurely.


    A guy who can do both ck and white can obviously feel that something is wrong with the Tru Kingdom now. The other party can make such a big noise, and it is definitely not limited to showing a few ships.


    He is not the only one who has such emotions now. There are countless people who came to watch this scene early in the morning.


    Whether they are from the navy or other countries, even the big pirates in the new world are watching them all.


    After all, this live broadcast covers almost half of the world. Anyone with some ability in the New World is watching the happenings at this moment.


    Among them are the red-haired Shanks, the four emperors who seem to have just woken up from drunkenness, Kaido, and of course Whitebeard, who is currently called the strongest man in the world.


    These people can see that, naturally including the world government and the navy, they are also observing every move here.


    Each of them is trying to figure out what the hell is going on in the Tru Kingdom.


    This country can now be said to have be something that everyone knows about. Even if they don��t know about this country, they will definitely know about this country��s trademark and g.


    Their trademark is a crescent moon, but their g is a sword with two bunches of wheat on the hilt.


    Because the products of this country have been sold all over the world, it can be regarded as letting everyone know about the existence of this country through this aspect.


    But the reason why this time caused such a big stir is mainly because in the weakest South China Sea, the mere emergence of such a powerful economic power, and more importantly, the early military power disyed at this moment, has already made everyone excited. Shocked.


    Although so far, the protagonists of the Toru Kingdom have not appeared yet, but relying only on those few giant steel ships is enough to sustain the scene for this period of time.


    In fact, these are the most dazzling steel giants. The remaining ships basically still need to rely on sails. After all, there are only two years to build ten warships, which is already amazing, and this is still The result of the joint efforts of many people.


    Compared with these big steel guys, those ships built with sails and wood can be built almost every two or three days.


    What''s more important is that its cost is rtively low. A warship made of steel costs nearly 100 billion beli. This thing is simply a pile of money.


    But they are only made of wood and only cost more than 100 million. Even so, these ships are sufficient for cruising.

 Chapter 210 The Shocking Tru Kingdom

    <h4>Chapter 210 The Shocking Tru Kingdom</h4>


    Everyone watching this live broadcast wants to see what the Toru Kingdom''s n is next?


    After all, the navy has already intervened in the South China Sea, but this country is still able to activate such a powerful military force. The hundreds of wooden sailing warships alone are enough to reflect the opponent''s strength, let alone ten steel ones.


    As more and more people gathered, the originally very vast Nanniwa Port was already blocked by water. Not to mention reporters from other countries broadcasting live broadcasts, even the big reporters from every ce in the Kingdom of Tru''s own country were blocked. What is now disyed on the screen is the live broadcast content here.


    For many people, this has been a sleepless night. Since early in the morning, all the live broadcast stations have been full of people. They did not crowd each other, but just stood there obediently, waiting quietly. The highlight momentes next.


    After everyone waited for nearly two hours, as neat steps appeared, a passage began to slowly open up outside the port. This was already a passage that was squeezed out under a rtively tight situation.


    Because at this moment, tens of thousands of people were running neatly on the streets of the royal city. They were still wearing ckbat uniforms and ck berets on their heads. Just the level of domineering disyed by this was enough to make people Feeling extremely safe.


    The person at the head of each of their teams was currently wearing the same uniform as the navy, but his running pace was consistent with that of the people behind him.


    Everyone was shocked by the scene in front of them, including the people of the Kingdom of Tru, because they had never noticed that there were so many troops in their country, and they still seemed to be so powerful.


    These troops were five people running side by side, and the team stretched for at least several kilometers, mainly because there were people wearing ckbat uniforms in front, and there were countless people wearing military greenbat uniforms behind them, and they were also marching behind. With a neat pace, he started to move towards this direction.


    At this time, the port was already quiet. Everyone stared at this scene nkly, and they no longer knew how to express the emotions in their hearts.


    This can be considered a rtively punctual time. At 8 o''clock in the morning, everyone showed up here on time.


    All the troops gathered at the port at this moment. There were about 500 people standing in front of each warship, but nearly 1,000 people were standing in front of the giant steel ship.


    This is the number of people that was originally nned.


    Each steel giant ship is equipped with 1,000 personnel, half of whom are logistics personnel, including offensive weapons, course operation logistics staff, supply personnel, inspection personnel, etc., to maintain the operation of the entire warship.


    Those troops wearing military green uniforms had begun training on these warships a long time ago, and their purpose was just for this moment.


    The glory of these people is no less than that of the special forces wearing ckbat uniforms. Each one of them also exudes glory. In future sea operations, although the contributions of these people are hidden under the sea, they are also indispensable. .


    "Gu... This is really unimaginable. A country in the South China Sea can actually achieve this level. It seems that this time it will be a headache for the navy!"


    In the new world, as a flock of seagulls flew by, an old man with a white beard hanging a bucket of water on the deck of a 100-meter-long ship and still drinking wine was looking at the screen in front of him andughing and teasing. said.


    Whitebeard actually didn''t pay much attention to this kind of thing, he was just a little curious.


    The most important thing is that they have often received goods from this country in the past two years, so they were a little curious about the situation in this country, and then they unexpectedly saw this scene in front of them.


    This is currently recognized as the strongest man in the world. His eyesight is definitely notparable to that of ordinary people. It can be seen just through the screen that the military power of this country''s army has even surpassed the naval force. of those people.


    After drinking a bowl of wine, Whitebeard continued to stare at the screen in front of him. There were already many people sitting around him.


    In fact, these people are not even interested in these things. They just see their fathers watching with gusto, so theye over to join in the fun.


    "Dad, why do you feel like you care about this country?"


    At this time, Marco, the captain of the first team with a blond punk head who looked like a pineapple, asked curiously.


    "That''s right, dad, what''s the point of paying attention to a small country in the South China Sea?"


    At this time, another tall, dark-skinned, shirtless man asked roughly.


    Others also had questioning expressions at this time, wanting to get some answers from each other.


    However, at this time, Whitebeard smiled directly, picked up the wine bowl in his hand again, drank it hard, and then said with a serious expression, "Can''t you see that those people in ck clothes in this country, everyone The strength may even be as good as some of you. In such a state, it is probably difficult to find such troops in the New World, let alone in the world.


    If those people left by the Navy in the New World were to fight against them, they might not even be able to touch their bodies! "


    After listening to Whitebeard''s words, the others finally began to show a hint of seriousness, staring intently at the screen in front of them.


    These things made them a little unbelievable. How could a small country in the South China Sea have so many powerful people?


    It''s just that doubts are doubts, and they still believe what Whitebeard said.


    "Dad, can what you say be true?"


    Marco asked again confused.


    "Gu..., boy, not only are you mistaken now, but even the old men in the World Government are probably mistaken now. The navy has probably started holding meetings on how to deal with the current situation. , when they have a headache, this country is not as simple as it seems."


    Whitebeardughed and said, he really wanted to see the faces of those in the navy now.


    Although he was smiling on the outside, he was also shocked in his heart. A ce in the South China Sea that had always been unknown had now evolved into such a state, which really caught everyone off guard.

 Chapter 211 Trol Kingdom Army

    <h4>Chapter 211 Trol Kingdom Army</h4>


    Nowadays, reporters from all major media are all swarming here. There were already many reporters who stayed in the Tru Kingdom, and now they are rushing here again one by one.


    But maybe if you look carefully, you can also notice that there are not many seagulls lingering on the ship or elsewhere in the port.


    This time, the Kingdom of Tru really made a big international news, which even caught everyone off guard.


    No matter how much the outside world is paying attention to the developments here, no one dares to dy the moment of honor that belongs to the Kingdom of Tru.


    This time can be regarded as the first time to show its military power to the outside world, and it can also be regarded as announcing something to the world.


    All personnel have gathered in front of the battleship. Each of them stands there upright, and everyone is also looking forward to and waiting.


    In less than 20 minutes, a carriage slowly walked out from the pce gate. Whether it was a carriage or a horse, they were all made of pure white. Especially the gilt work on the carriage made it look so special to outsiders. Noble and grand.


    However, behind the carriage, what followed at the moment was a car that was made entirely of machinery. It was more simr to an off-road vehicle in appearance. All the tops were open-top. General Yixiao and Junhe, the quasi-general, were sitting there. Behind him, there were also four lieutenant generals, including the Minister of the Council of Ministers, the Minister of Commerce, and all the top officials of the country who also appeared in this ce.


    From the moment they first appeared, the atmosphere in front of the live broadcast stations across the country has now be lively. Most people began to shout continuously to express their excitement at the moment.


    Both sides of the street also automatically gave way to a wide road. Everyone was staring at the motorcade this time. The businessmen who came here to invest or buy houses also showed great excitement.


    No one had thought before that the Tru Kingdom would actually show up with such a powerful force, and it would directly start to show off its powerful military power to the outside world. Even people in their own country had never thought that their country would be so powerful? Therefore, this sense of expectation is even much stronger than that of outsiders.


    Nanniwa Port has be orderly under the maintenance of the police force. There are not many restrictions on domestic and foreign reporters. The only requirement is that these people are not allowed to enter the port directly. In the face of such a powerful force, , they don''t need to worry about any possible dangers at all, the security duties only need to maintain order on the scene.


    After all, at this moment, everyone in the world is staring at the grand event of the Tru Kingdom. The most excited people should be the people belonging to this country, but there are also people who are frowning at this moment.


    In the naval headquarters base.


    "Why is it the Tru Kingdom again? What is going on? Suddenly there is such arge military force. What are the military headquarters over the South China Sea doing? Such a big thing has happened, why has no one been there until now? Have you discovered it?"


    In the conference room, a conference room that can amodate ten or twenty people, the main wall is currently ying the grand event of the Kingdom of Tru, and the screen is facing the hundreds of battleships and the people standing in front of the battleships. force.


    For these rtively powerful people, it can be seen at a nce whether the people on the other side have any strength, and they are definitely not like ordinary troops.


    The Warring States Marshal stood at the front, pping the table angrily and shouting. None of the people sitting below dared to speak out, but there were still a few people sitting there leisurely, as if this was the case. It has nothing to do with them at all.


    The sheep standing at the top now has an extremely serious expression. For the navy, this matter is definitely explosive news for them. There is no doubt that a huge steel nail has been inserted into their backs, and There is no way to deal with it yet.


    "Have you sent anyone to investigate what is going on in this country? Why can a situation that did not appear on the Grand Line actually appear all over the world?"


    General Sakaski is the only one among these people who is the most angry except Marshal Warring States.


    He was also staring at the picture disyed on the screen, and said angrily at this moment.


    "Ouch~, I have mentioned it before, this Tru Kingdom is not as simple as we thought, but I didn''t expect that just two yearster, the strength of the other country has already improved to such an extent. It is really surprising. !��


    Qingzhi sat there and said leisurely, his expression did not change at all about what happened here, it felt like he was just watching the fun.


    "This group of young people looks really scary. Didn''t the Kingdom of Tru arrange people from the military department to investigate? If I remember correctly, at least five or six groups of people have been sent there from the beginning to now, right? Why is there no news about this kind of army?"


    Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters also spoke leisurely at this moment.


    For the entire conference room, everyone looked like they had a headache at this moment. Although the two of them behaved more leisurely and even spoke more rxedly, the expressions on their faces seemed more solemn at the moment.


    After all, for the Navy Headquarters, all their thoughts are now focused on the new world. Even on the Great Line, there are not many powerful beings, but now such a powerful country has arisen in thend of the four seas. How can this not make them angry?


    "Now is not the time for you to prioritize this discussion. Please give me a n and tell me how to deal with it?"


    The Warring States Marshal roared angrily again.


    "Let me take the troops there. I said at the beginning that they could not be left behind. Now they have be a scourge and we can only solve them as soon as possible!" Sakaski said.


    "Pa~"


    After hearing what Sakaski said, the Warring States Marshal angrily pped the pile of paper in his hand on the table, and then said to him, "Can you have some brains? If you know how to beat every day, you won''t Let��s take a look at the situation in other countries first?��


    After saying that, Marshal Sengoku took a deep breath angrily, and after waiting for his expression to soften a little, he continued, "The information in my hand was just sent by CP0 of the World Government, the leader of the army of the Kingdom of Tero.


    Especially the one on the first one. The general of the Kingdom of Tru smiled. This name must be familiar to you, Garp, right? "


    Warring States looked at Garp and asked helplessly.

 Chapter 212 Tru National Navy

    <h4>Chapter 212 Tru National Navy</h4>


    Garp was sitting there leisurely, with apletely idle look on his face. When he heard what Sengoku said, he suddenly sat upright.


    Because the name was indeed familiar to him, looking at the pile of information on the table, Garp immediately stood up and took it over to him.


    When he saw the character shown on the first page, Garp''s expression said everything.


    "I didn''t expect it was really him? Why did this guy appear in the Tru Kingdom? And he could be a general there?"


    Garp said in disbelief.


    "Who is he? How can he surprise you all?"


    Sakaski asked.


    "Strong man, there is an extremely powerful person. The Navy has sent him many invitations over the years, but I didn''t expect that in the end this guy would choose to stay in the small country of Tru Kingdom. I really don''t know what he is. What do you think?"


    Marshal of the Warring States Period also said this.


    "With a smile, a person with gravity fruit ability is even more powerful than a general. He is an extremely difficult person to deal with!"


    Garp said with a frown.


    "Then what should we do next? It seems that we need to send someone to contact King Tru first. At least we need to understand first, what exactly does this little guy think?"


    Lieutenant General He who was sitting aside said leisurely.


    "This is the only way we can do it in a short period of time. In the four seas, our navy cannot put too many troops there at all. Otherwise, there will definitely be no way to solve it in the New World!" Warring States thought for a moment and said.


    "They are indeed a group of terrible people. I think we should take a closer look now to see how their performance was carried out. We will have to wait until their incident is over to discuss the details!"


    General Kizaru said with an indifferent expression,


    "There are quite a few people showing up this time. It''s already over 50,000 people. It seems like we''ve really suffered a lot this time." Qingzhi sat next to him and said with his eyes closed.


    Anyway, this group of people are in a state of distress now, and everyone''s expression is deeply frowning, but the Tru Kingdom has not officially started yet, and it is just to reach this level. It has made all forces around the world feel surprised and crazy.


    However, as the party concerned, in the Tru Kingdom, at this point in time, King Changnuo had just arrived at Nanniwa in his carriage.


    This ce can be described as a sea of ????people. The crowd is so crowded that even the police who maintain order can no longer stop it.


    But the good thing is that the crowded crowd still barely made way for them to pass.


    Those who appeared this time were the ones with the highest status and status in the entire kingdom.


    When Chang Nuo first appeared here, the crowd suddenly became quiet, and all the reporters focused their cameras on theing His Majesty the King.


    Chang Nuo''s outfit today can be regarded as the most solemn outfit he wore except the day he first became king.


    The standard king''s dress is all made of silk, with a bright yellow dress jacket and a pure white shirt underneath. It is rare to see him wearing a standard crown on his head, and he slowly walks into the port in a white carriage.


    As for the generals, lieutenant generals and even princes and ministers who followed behind them, no one paid attention to their appearance.


    But for those outsiders watching the live broadcast here, the senior leaders of the Tru Kingdom still pay more attention to and pay attention to it.


    But the crowd was quiet for a while, and then began to erupt into an overwhelming sound. Everyone was extremely excited. However, the main reason why there were so many people today was because the factories in the entire royal city were all Work stopped, and everyone wanted toe over to witness this moment in history.


    The podium has been prepared in advance in the port below. This is for this group of senior leaders. There are even almost 20 chairs ced in the back. The middle position certainly belongs to their Majesty the King. It looks quite The noble white seat is quietly ced in the most high-end position at this moment.


    On the avenue, the carriage Chang Nuo was riding in was followed by about a dozen vehicles, each of which was an open-top elongated vehicle. The clothes they were wearing were very different from usual. Such a formal asion required facing The whole world naturally needs to show the momentum of a big country.


    "Bang~bang~bang~..."


    ��


    As this group of people entered one after another, the salute ced at the edge of the port also fired nine times in a row. In addition, arge number of balloons that had been prepared in advance began to slowly fly into the sky.


    In fact, this ceremony has been prepared for nearly half a year, and preparations for today''s events have already begun. However, this time, no matter what, their requirements must achieve the effect they expected in advance.


    Because this time we are facing not only the citizens of our own country, but also the big foreign forces who are staring at us eagerly. At this moment, we must make a deterrent of our own country and make them feel the truth all at once. The military power of the kingdom.


    After these vehicles stopped, Changnuo took the lead and walked towards his seat under the guidance of the service staff arranged in advance.


    As for the rest, everyone already has their own ce there.


    This is just a simple entrance, the official opening has not started yet, but for everyone, this is already a rtively exciting and exciting ce.


    There were quite a few people apanying this event, because more than one person would need to go on stage to give a speech next. As a general of the Kingdom of Tru, Smile naturally could not avoid the opening speech of this grand event, so General Junhe also had to give a speech. Need to be involved this time.


    But he is no longer just a quasi-general. When Junhe first came back, his identity hadpletely changed into a general of the Toru Kingdom. Besides him, there was another person who was Abona.


    With the painstaking study of the past two years, he has be one of the great swordsmen just by relying on his swordsmanship. However, so far, he has not had a duel with the world''s number one swordsman, Hawkeye, but this does not affect the opponent at all. exert one''s own strength.


    In the beginning, his strength was alreadyparable to that of a general, but he was slightly deficient in many aspects. However, in the past two years, he had at least dozens of duels with Yixiao, which also brought him growth and development. Great help came.

 Chapter 213 Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 213 Tru Empire</h4>


    Abona also stayed in the position of general. These are the positions that have been specially reserved. The remaining ones are almost all ministers and concubines from various departments in the country. They can only witness this historical moment. There is no such thing here. Any right to speak and make suggestions.


    The three people are wearing the same clothes at the moment. This is their characteristic general clothing, but it ispletely different from the navy. The three people are wearing extended military coats. The coats are blue and ck and look quite domineering. The cor and cuffs, It shows a blue stripe shape, and the rest of the body is almost the same color. There is an epaulette on the shoulder, but the epaulette has a gold national g pattern, and there is a gold badge on the left chest, and there is a gold hanging on it. Yellow ribbon.


    All three of them are dressed up like this, which is refreshing and gives people a domineering and majestic feeling.


    After all, sitting here can make people feel the supreme majesty. This is the specially made style of this general uniform.


    In fact, in addition to the style of generals, the clothes worn by lieutenant generals are almost the same, except that there are no ribbons and badges on the shoulders.


    Chang Nuo walked to his seat first and began to sit down. The others followed closely and sat in their own seats.


    However, there are not many decorations on thisrge podium. The only thing that can be regarded as decoration is probably a podium standing at the front, and the other ones are microphones and camera equipment ced around it.


    "Go forward bravely and you will be invincible."


    "Go forward with courage and be invincible."


    ��


    When everyone was just sitting there, the soldiers standing in front of the battleships in the port were all shouting these words in unison, and in terms of this momentum, they had already covered the restless crowds above. sound.


    With such a magnificent scene, even the businessmen from other countries were not in a hurry to leave. They were all quietly admiring the feat at this moment.


    For the people of this country, this scene can indeed be exciting for everyone. After all, they are the most proud of them at this moment.


    After all the soldiers below shouted in unison several times, an old man who looked to be at least seventy or eighty years old began to slowly walk up from under the podium. He was wearing an official uniform that looked like it belonged to the previous era. Clothing, but those who know it should be able to clearly understand that this is indeed the service of the old king of the Kingdom of Toru.


    However, the person who came up could be regarded as having worked hard for the country all his life in this country. Mengxi was the original left minister, and the position division was exactly the same as in other countries. However, when Chang Nuo became the king, all positions were transferred to him. Reformed again.


    This time, he could be regarded as representing the older generation in participating in this important asion, but because of his inconvenience, he stayed until the end.


    "Your Majesty is ready!"


    Gogoya walked through the crowd, walked to Chang Nuo and whispered.


    "Are the drafts ready?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Everything is ready. Now put it all on the podium. As for the three generals, I''m afraid they will have to improvise on the spot!"


    Gogoya said with a slight smile.


    After she finished speaking, she quickly stood aside. After all, on such an important asion, everyone''s every move was seen by the whole world. It didn''t matter what it was like normally, but at this moment, everyone must maintain the utmost attitude. A calm state.


    Chang Nuo stood up from his seat, then took a deep breath, stepped through the crowd, and walked to the front of the podium.


    As the king of this country, he is naturally the first person to speak and speak. The main reason why he prepared a draft is because what he said this time will be recorded by everyone, and will be recorded by everyone. Everyone in the world can see it.


    No matter you say anything wrong, you will have reasons to be criticized by others. Although from today on, the Kingdom of Tru no longer has to worry about any safety issues, there are some things that you should pay attention to. Image is still very important after all. of.


    They are now at least two to three hundred meters away from the soldiers standing in front of the battleship, but from this angle, they can overlook everyone''s condition, but they can''t see their faces clearly.


    "Ahem..."


    Chang Nuo cleared his throat next to the podium, but the microphone was turned on at this critical moment, and everyone could hear the voice of His Majesty the King clearly.


    But they didn''t have any thoughts about this. They were all looking forward to what His Majesty the King would say next?


    In front of all the live broadcast stations across the country, the cameras have switched to Chang Nuo''s speech. He first looked down at the contents of the draft. He had not read it much before, although he still let them proceed ording to his own wishes. Writing, but there are some things that he really doesn''t know how to express.


    After staying for about a minute, Chang Nuo finally raised his head and used his hand to hold the microphone in front of him, adjusting it to an optimal position. The row in front of him was full of various cameras, although he couldn''t sh lights broke out, but this time the speech was not only held by the soldiers in front of them, but also by many ordinary people present. More importantly, the countless people behind the video were watching.


    "On this sunny day, I am very happy to be in this position, and at the same time I will personally watch you ascend to the glory that belongs to this country. Not only am I watching, but the people of the entire country, and even the people of the world, They were all watching intently.


    July 15, 1515 in the Haiyuan calendar, today will be a moment for our Kingdom of Tru to attract worldwide attention, and it will also be a moment for the entire country to show its true power to the outside world.


    It has taken several years for the Kingdom of Tru to develop from its initial appearance to the present. Only the people of our own country know the pain and suffering of these past few years, but I believe that in the future, we will Will live better.


    So today is not only the time when our Navy of the Kingdom of Toru is established, but more importantly, from now on, the Kingdom of Toru is officially changed to the Empire of Toru! "


    Chang Nuo spoke loudly, and the voice through the microphone directly spread throughout the world.


    The ministers sitting behind him were not too surprised. After all, this matter had been discussed in advance, and now it was just a matter of making it public.


    But all the people watching were silent for a while, and then they began to burst into thunderous apuse. The people watchingter also made the same move.

 Chapter 214 Speech to the whole world

    <h4>Chapter 214 Speech to the whole world</h4>


    For a country to change its name, it is often equivalent to starting over. But for a country that is experiencing rtively good development momentum, changing its name means that they have reced a more powerful management model.


    "True Empire~"


    "True Empire~"


    ��


    The crowds of people behind them were all shouting loudly collectively. They didn''t understand what it meant to change a kingdom into an empire? But it''s just that these people are so confident in their King, no matter what they say or do, they always feel that everything is right.


    In fact, in the current pirate world, there are many countries called empires, but most of them are self-proimed. They have no strength and no outstanding performance. They are just to satisfy their own desire for oral pleasure. .


    But in this country, the performance ispletely different. At least they have now achievedprehensive development in military, political andmercial aspects. In the future, they will not just build an ordinary empire, but willprehensively develop into an integrated empire. A super powerful country that integratesmerce, military and politics.


    Changnuo stood on the podium and continued to speak for nearly ten minutes. Anyway, these contents had been edited in advance. They were nothing more than encouragement and some things for future nning. It also allowed the people of his country to understand a little bit about this country. true intention.


    At the end of the speech, Chang Nuo put down the speech in his hand, then stared ahead with a serious face, and continued, "The Kingdom of Tru can be what it is today, not because of us, but because of all the people in the country. It is you who have given us With the support of this country, now that the Kingdom of Tru''s naval force has been established, their mission will be to use their own lives to protect every inch ofnd that belongs to this country and every citizen of this country. Every glory of this country.


    For this reason, not only can they use their lives to protect it, but as King Tru, I will also use my own life to protect everything now.


    Of course, in terms of safety, businessmening from other countries can at least be guaranteed not to be attacked by any pirates or other forms of attacks in the South China Sea. As long as they arrive in the South China Sea, they will be protected by the power of the navy of that country. . "


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he waved to the people behind him who were watching him.


    But no one can see it now. Whether it is the people at the scene or those watching the live broadcast at the back, they are all moved to tears at this moment. For the first time, they feel the warmth that belongs to the country. Xin belongs to the care of the king of this country.


    Especially when he said that the duty of the navy is to protect everything in this country with his life, and that he, the king, can also use his life to protect anyone today, this is the voice that has been suppressed by this country for a long time, all at this moment. burst out.


    After staying for a while again, Chang Nuo smiled and turned to look at the three generals of the Tru Empire. The three of them immediately stood up with understanding, and then took a few steps forward.


    Standing in front of the microphone, Changnuo once again said domineeringly to everyone, "Now, these three people behind me will be the future generals of the Tru Empire..."


    As the words introducing them rang out, all the video cameras were focused on the three of them, allowing them to directly experience what it felt like to be a celebrity in the world.


    Everyone has a serious expression at this moment, and they arepletely meticulous. Although the three people have the same clothes, Yixiao still maintains the appearance of holding a staff and knife in his hand, and Abona still maintains his old habit, with his hands folded around the knife in his hand. At dawn, only Junhe looked ahead with a serious expression.


    Among the three of them, Junhe is rtively weak so far. Although he canpete with everyone else, his strength has not reached the level of a general. ording to his strength, it will take at least one to two years. It takes time and good training to achieve this level.


    But it doesn''t matter now. The strength of the associate general is enough for them to be fearless in the South China Sea.


    In fact, this narration not only informed the identities of the three of them, but also described their work content and responsibilities.


    As the general general, General Yixiao is mainly responsible for the external security of the kingdom. Junhe is mainly responsible for all security patrols in the entire sea area of ????the Toru Kingdom, and is responsible for protecting the lives and safety of coastal citizens.


    Abona is a special military general. There is no special military arrangement here, so he is just briefly introduced to let the people of the whole country know that there is such a person.


    ����������������


    "Oh, hey, hey, hey, I didn''t expect it to be them?"


    In the corner of the new world, a guy with two huge horns is sitting in a cave, holding a huge wine sk in his hand, drinking wine, looking at the content on the screen, andughing and shouting.


    This person is the Yonko Kaido. When he first saw Chang Nuo''s appearance, he always felt familiar, but he couldn''t remember where he had seen him before. But when he introduced Jun and this person, For a moment, Kaido immediately remembered what happened on an unknown ind more than two years ago.


    But I didn''t expect that just two yearster, when I saw him again, he would be in this state?


    But at this moment, there was no anger in his heart, and he was even full of joy. If nothing else, at least what the other party was doing now was enough to give all of them a headache for the navy, their mortal enemy.


    However, in another ce at this moment, there is another pirate giant, who is also lying on the bed and staring at the small screen next to him. This is also the scene of Toru Kingdom.


    "Mom, I didn''t expect that such a person could appear in the South China Sea. Do we want to go over and negotiate?"


    "Owen, this matter was brought up quite well. Find a daughter of about the same age and let the king of the other party marry us. Find someone to go over and inform us, mamamama~"


    Charlotte Lingling said with an expectant smile, this is another Yonko in the pirate world, a very powerful existence, but her idea is indeed too beautiful.


    So just after she finished speaking, another son standing aside, who looked quite a bit older, stuck out his tongue and said, "Mom, based on his current status, he will definitely not agree to this marriage. ?��


    "Mamamama~, you are right. I don''t know much about the other people. The key is that I still have a little impression of the guy named Yixiao. I didn''t expect that this guy actually went to the Tru Kingdom to be a general. The navy invited him many times. Does this mean that the strength of this country cannot be underestimated?"


    Charlotte Lingling frowned a little, scratched her head with her hands and said.

 Chapter 215 The pattern of four emperors and one emperor

    <h4>Chapter 215 The pattern of four emperors and one emperor</h4>


    Yixiao can be remembered by so many people mainly because of his own strength, but to everyone, Yixiao also belongs to the strong man who has risen in the previous era.


    When Big Mom first saw Yixiao, she behaved almost exactly the same as those in the navy. It could even be said that she behaved almost the same as everyone who knew Yixiao.


    No one thought that a super powerful person who had risen in the previous era would now be willing to sumb to a small country in the South China Sea.


    idents are bound to happen, after all, no one has ever thought of such a thing.


    But one thing, except for the navy, everyone''s attitude is almost the same, that is, now that the Tru Empire has risen, and there are such super powerful people in the country, the navy''s future troubles will definitely not stop at present.


    "Mom, should we go over and have some contact? After all, the most delicious packaged desserts you eat here are all made in your country!"


    Charlotte Dafu said.


    "Mamamama~, let''s go over and take a look. Let Katakuri go over and take a look. What is the attitude of the Toru Kingdom towards us? "


    Big mom thought for a moment and said.


    Katakuri, who had been standing aside without speaking, finally took a step forward at this moment. His eyes were very serious, but no one could see his expression at this moment. A scarf directly covered half of his face. His face was already covered.


    "Mom, if you can, I suggest you wait for a while beforemunicating about this kind of thing. After all, the Tru Empire has just begun to show its power today. The Navy and the World Government will definitely be nervously watching each other''s status during this period. , if this time passes, it will definitely cause the navy to intercept us, and may cause unnecessary disputes."


    "That''s right, Mom, I think Katakuri is right this time. Let''s wait for a while before talking!"


    As soon as Katakuri finished speaking, the guy with the long tongue immediately followed suit.


    "Then let''s wait for a while, mamamama~."


    Big mom said with a smile.


    Among the four emperors, this woman can be said to be the least smart one, but she is very powerful, and with her many children, her strength cannot be underestimated, and she finally became the fourth emperor.


    Although the other four emperors are also very powerful, they themselves or around them always have people who make suggestions. The only difference is here.


    The attitude shown in the outside world is almost different in every ce, but as the person involved, no one in the Tru Empire cares about this kind of thing now.


    This grand disy of one''s own country''s military power is actually to iste the thoughts of those who are already jealous of their country''s business.


    The most envious person among them is probably the Monkey D Dragon with the marks of broken shoe soles on his face.


    After the development of the Revolutionary Army in the past few years, they can naturally be regarded as something that should not be underestimated. Therefore, a year ago, they had already begun nning to capture the Tru Empire, a machine that can make money. This will be of great benefit to their future development. It''s very important, but I didn''t expect that when I just had this idea and started to implement it, this country had already begun to act inconsistently withmon sense.


    In fact, among the hundreds of thousands of people watching behind this grand event, there were already a few forces from other countries and the revolutionary army.


    For these guys who had their own ulterior motives, this review indeed gave them all a great force of deterrence.


    In less than half a day, newspapers all over the world have begun to fly. Even those who don''t understand the situation here are reading the contents of the newspapers one by one.


    Regardless of whether the content in the newspaper was modified or not, the most important one attracted everyone''s attention.


    "The world structure is divided again, and the four emperors and one emperor have officially begun to keep pace with each other. How should the navy deal with this unexpected situation?"


    This newspaper headline can be said to have instantly refreshed everyone''s understanding of the South China Sea, the weakest sea area.


    Everyone has always believed that strong people should exist in the new world, because that is the area where they can develop, but they did not expect that they can appear in the world, which shocked everyone. powerful country.


    In fact, the country that was most touched by this news was probably basta.


    Originally, the princes and ministers had already begun to suggest ways to take over the factories in the Tru Kingdom, and even the Rape Flower Port, but as soon as the news came out, all their thoughts werepletely wiped out in an instant, not only It is the king of this country, and even the princes and ministers, including a group ofmon people who have been making a fuss, are all excited at this moment, and no one dares to mention this matter.


    After this incident, everyone has clearly realized that the current Tru Empire has be a behemoth beyond everyone''s imagination.


    After the newspaper came out this time, no one questioned the authenticity of the Tru Kingdom and the pattern of four emperors and one emperor. At this moment, no one, including the navy, opposed such a situation.


    However, this time after the force was used as a deterrent, the benefits ushered inpletely exceeded everyone''s imagination.


    The business of the Tru Kingdom has almost reached its peak for a while. Even if all the factories are running 24 hours a day, the supply of most goods is still in short supply.


    Because today''s merchants are pulling goods from the Toru Kingdom, for most pirates, no one dares to intercept them.


    Throughout the entire South China Sea area, warships belonging to the Tru Empire are patrolling the sea all the time. After all, they are only targeting this area of ??the South China Sea.


    The hundreds of warships led by General Junhe were constantly swaying on the sea. Suddenly, there were almost no pirates in the South China Sea, where there were rtively few pirates.


    However, in the following time, Chang Nuo''s actions shocked everyone''s jaws.


    "The South Sea Tru Empire will ept any country to be part of the Tru Empire from now on. As long as the leader of this country is willing to merge his country into the Tru Empire, his family will enjoy a life of glory and wealth without real power."


    The content of such a sentence even directly triggered civil strife in every country in the South China Sea.

 Chapter 216 Fighting without bloodshed

    <h4>Chapter 216 Fighting without bloodshed</h4>


    Two months after the Navy was officially established.


    Now all the emotions of the country''s people have basically stabilized. Each of them is proud to be a citizen of this country and to be able to have such a stable life now.


    For them, the strength of the country is more important than anything else. With the gathering of people''s hearts, arge wave of young people are pouring into the next wave of conscription in the Kingdom of Tru. Everyone''s biggest wish now is to be a soldier of this country. , used to guard everything in this country.


    Their idea is very simple, and it is because of what Changnuo said on the podium when the navy was first established.


    But at this moment in the pce hall.


    Changnuo was sitting on the king''s throne, and there were also several people sitting below him. Three of the current generals of the country, even the minister ofmerce and the minister of consultation, and even officials of all sizes, were almost all having a serious meeting in this hall. s meeting.


    However, the nearest smile directly and seriously asked Chang Nuo at this moment, "Your Majesty the King, do you know that because of your previous words, the surrounding countries are now experiencing civil strife. ording to statistics, there have been at least five countries. Now it haspletely fallen into civil strife?"


    What Yixiao said mainly refers to Chang Nuo''s proposal a month ago that any country can be merged into the current Tru Empire. Once merged into this country, they will enjoy all the benefits of the Tru Empire, including work and life. Safety and security, etc.


    These words can be called murderous. All the surrounding countries have issued strict bans because their people have flocked to the Tru Empire before. Anyone who crosses the national border will be killed. Such The content has caused extreme disgust among many people. They also want to live in a more suitable country. After all, they are only separated by a line. The living standards of the two countries are not at the same level at all.


    But because of his words, all the people began to rebel against the national government, and even the army participated.


    It is precisely because of this incident that so far, three neighboring countries have submitted documents of surrender and merger to the Tru Empire, and they arepletely voluntary.


    In other words, this country has conquered three countries without any bloodshed, without dispatching a single soldier. It only relies on a word and the premise of giving them future life prospects. This is just the beginning. So for There are simply countless people in the country who yearn for this kind of beautiful life.


    Chang Nuo sat on his throne. He understood Yixiao''s mood at the moment. This general only wanted absolute justice in his life, but he never expected that special wars would break out in other countries because of his king''s words.


    "General Yixiao, remember when you first joined the Tru Empire, we talked about how many people we would be willing to help when we have the ability. In this situation, you have also seen that the Tru Empire It has not provoked any war, and has always been willing to protect them as its future mission. The reason why such a situation urs in neighboring countries is not because the people are living in dire straits, which makes them rise up to resist.


    Now it includes the Kingdom of Nubia, the Kingdom of Kolha, and the Kingdom of Tumei. They have just cleared the road that blocked their development. From now on, they are willing to recognize themselves as part of the Tru Empire, so the people of this country, we are also willing Treat them as you would treat your own people.


    The Tru Empire also needs to develop in the future, but although we are strong now, once a war breaks out, it will bring greater disaster. The Kingdom of Crimea is a member of the World Government. No matter what the circumstances, once a war breaks out, If we attack them, the World Government and the Navy will definitely get involved, but if civil strife breaks out in these countries and they voluntarily join the King Toru Empire, even the World Government has no right to intervene in such a situation. "


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    It''s just that when he said that other countries can enter the Tru Kingdom and enjoy everything in this country, he didn''t do anything.


    Abona is a special military general, and this matter is almost entirely handed over to him.


    Yixiao also understands that this is indeed the best and simplest way to resolve disputes, but the way it is done makes people feel too despicable.


    All civil wars in their countries were instigated by the Tru Empire. In addition, they also provided offensive weapons to civilians. However, no one from the Tru Empire participated in the attack, which does not make them People from other countries find any fault to criticize.


    "General Yixiao, from the beginning of the civil war to the present, the number of deaths in the Kingdom of Nubia is only about 500, and most of them are members of the royal family. When the civil strife broke out in the country, everyone including the army directly rebelled. However, those The nobles had already left the moment they received the news. The current Kingdom of Nubia had submitted a surrender decision to our Tru Empire to voluntarily merge into this country three days ago.


    This scene is what all the people want to see. They are even excited that they are about to join our country. The whole country is now filled withughter andughter. Isn��t this a result that everyone wants to see? ? "


    Arbonne said.


    "I feel like I should have some say in this matter."


    Minister of Commerce Meng Ge stood up and said with a smile.


    "I wonder what Minister Meng Ge has to say?" asked Yixiao.


    "His Majesty the King has already made arrangements to minimize the casualties of the people in the surrounding civil strife countries, so when the civil strife began in their country, the Tru Empire had already provided them with medical drugs worth nearly 5 billion beli, and even before that, We have already nned to build factory projects in these countries to provide and stabilize the normal lives of the people in these countries.


    Before they were there, each family could only eat one meal a day, especially the people in the Kingdom of Nubia. Because of the harsh treatment by the leaders, many people had starved to death at home, and in addition to the years of Disaster, the country''s poption has gone from a poption of more than 11 million to less than 7 million people. However, this figure onlysted about three years. "


    After hearing what Minister Meng Ge said, Yixiao could only sigh helplessly. How could he not know about this kind of thing.


    It is precisely because of this that he just wanted to question Chang Nuo and did not get angry because of it. In the future, they will experience more and bigger wars.

 Chapter 217 Rule

    <h4>Chapter 217 Rule</h4>


    How could Yixiao not know the darkness of this world? Otherwise, he would not have blinded his own eyes because he did not want to see the darkness of this world.


    Although he did not agree very much with this approach, he did not object to it. When Chang Nuo''s words first came out, he had already thought of such a result. In several neighboring countries, there is a huge gap between the rich and the poor. It is too obvious that the treatment provided by the Kingdom of Tru to its citizens is almost the highest in the world. How could it not make people from other countries have the urge to integrate at this time?


    But just because of a word,rge-scale civil wars broke out in five surrounding countries, but this is only the early stage. If all the surrounding countries are included in the bag, what will happen to the remaining countries in the South China Sea? Do it?


    "General Yixiao, maybe you have a little grudge against this kind of thing. I will exin it to you personally next, but what we need to discuss now is what should be done after the three countries choose to merge into the Tru Empire. Question, people from all departments are here today. I hope that in the next meeting, you can all put forward some reasonable suggestions and solutions.


    The totalnd area submitted by the three countries this time is indeed beyond our imagination. Thebined area of ??the Kingdom of Nubia, the Kingdom of Kolha, and the Kingdom of Tumei is evenrger than our current Tru Empire. It has nearly doubled. Regarding thesend and resource issues, we need to treat them carefully in the future, especially since the national sea defense of the entire country has been seriously extended. In this regard, General Junhe will propose a more rational solution.


    In addition, the Ministry of Commerce needs to seize the time to arrange the basic life of the people in these three countries, and first allocate enough supplies for these people to live for half a year, so that at least no one will go hungry after they join the empire. .


    The Council of Ministers should take the time to count the poption and register everyone. In the following time, I don''t want anyone to bex about this matter.


    General Abona gives priority to taking charge of the original armies of these three countries to see whether they should be disbanded or merged into the current Trudeau Empire Police Guard! "


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    The people in these departments who were named all stood up and answered respectfully. This meeting itself was centered around making adjustments and improvements to therge areas ofnd andrge poptions that were suddenly merged into the three countries.


    This is also a big challenge for the entire country in the short term. The poptions of the three countries have been almost calcted before. Although they are not asrge as the current poption of our own country, they add up to nearly A poption of 20 million is equivalent to directly increasing half of the country''s poption.


    But those responsible for poption management are almost all handled by the Senate.


    On the surface, this department is just the Consultative Department, but in fact, there are too many and huge departments under it. Among them, the Poption Resources Management Department is also among them and is finally implemented with reference to their integrated opinions.


    Everyone feels the challenge of this matter, so everyone has a serious expression on their face. Even though three countries have been merged into their own country, what they are showing at this moment is not joy, but a sense of gratitude. Some responsibilities.


    "Your Majesty the King, this old man can do something!"


    After raising a question at the beginning, Yixiao opened his mouth again.


    After all, everyone sitting here has their own tasks, but he, the general, does not have any task assignments. However, Yixiao also wants to directly participate in such things for the country and the people.


    But at this time, Chang Nuo smiled directly and said, "General Yixiao, don''t worry, I''m afraid there are more important things waiting for us next.


    Three countries were merged into the Tru Empire at the same time. In response to these situations, the World Government should not let it go. Presumably, after our country''s military power was demonstrated two months ago, the World Government should have sent people here long ago. ording to the time, we should be able to get here in the near future. When the timees, we will need General Yixiao to apany us! "


    "That''s true, but I don''t know who wille over?" Yixiao also nodded.


    After all, one of the countries involved in the civil strife this time was Crimea, and for this country, the Tru Empire also provided the most weapons. There were also people from the outside involved inmanding the battle, but no matter where it came from, If you think about it, it has nothing to do with the Tru Empire.


    The people fighting the war were the people of their own country, and the Tru Empire did not send a single soldier or general. Even though the World Government was angry, there was nothing they could do.


    Moreover, the biggest headache for the World Government is the civil strife in other countries. If the King of Crimea does not seek help, even the World Government has no right to interfere in other countries'' internal affairs.


    But if it can be observed at this moment, the generals of the Navy Headquarters have already driven naval warships and rushed towards the South China Sea.


    Now that everything in the Tru Empire has begun to be made public, arge number of developments in the country have begun to be mentioned directly, including the construction of domestic train tracks and domestic automobile manufacturingpanies. For this country, it will simply be a cash cow from now on.


    Now they no longer have to look at anyone''s expressions to do things, and can develop their own strength and influence with absolute stability. Now even the navy does not have much actual jurisdiction over this ce where the sky is high and the emperor is far away.


    As for the naval headquarters they established in the South China Sea, it ispletely like a decoration at the moment. Even here, they stay on this ind to eat, drink and have fun every day, without worrying about the safety of the outside world at all.


    The Tru Empire has at least dozens of warships sailing in the South China Sea every day, and they insist on eliminating any pirate forces in this sea area.


    The purpose of their stay here is almostpletely useless, and even if they travel, it will not be of any use. After all, after going around the sea, no one is willing to pay attention to them.


    Perhaps staying in other sea areas, these military personnel can still make some money, but here, you need to pay for even food.


    The power of the Toru Empire prevented them from having any thoughts of confrontation. Even though the Navy Headquarters had asked them to closely monitor every move of the Toru Empire, they were warned before their ships arrived at their territory. The sound has already been heard.

 Chapter 218 Comparison of Strengths of World Governments

    <h4>Chapter 218 Comparison of Strengths of World Governments</h4>


    At this time, there is more than one ship heading towards the Tru Empire.


    So far, not to mention the navy''s two warships, even the Big Mom Pirates of the New World have also sent ships to start heading towards this country.


    However, they are all rtively backward because at this moment in the Toru Kingdom, there are already a few people wearing masks, ck coats, ck suits and ck top hats, and they are now walking in the royal city of the Toru Empire. on the street.


    As they walked, they almost didn''t look at any of themercial streets around them. Instead, they just started walking forward.


    There were about five or six people in their group, their goals were very clear, and they were constantly observing the movements of the entire area while walking.


    "Boss, we have visited the entire Tru Empire during this period, and we didn''t find any special ces?"


    The man with a smiling face on the mask was constantly sensing the surrounding situation using his sense of sight. After he finished sensing, he began to speak to the tall and thin man walking in the front.


    "Don''t let down your guard. There must be something we don''t know about this country, including how their warships are manufactured and where their troops are trained. We must observe this carefully!"


    The tall andnky captain said.


    But they obviously underestimated the situation in this country. When these people first entered the royal city, they were already under the observation of others.


    They are not the only ones with the power of knowledge. The domineering power of General Yixiao is probably not surpassed by a few people in the entire pirate world. In essence, they have already begun to deal with people who may be sent by the world government. Therefore, they are almost always on alert when observing the entire royal city.


    So at this moment in the pce, Chang Nuo and Yixiao were sitting across from each other, drinking tea with each other, with a slight smile on their faces.


    "It seems you have noticed it?"


    Changnuo picked up the teacup with a smile on his lips, looked curiously at Yixiao sitting opposite and asked.


    "I have noticed it, but I didn''t expect them toe so fast. The strength of these people cannot be underestimated. I wonder how His Majesty the King should respond next?" Yixiao began to ask.


    "Let them investigate carefully. Anyway, the space transmission channel has been hidden by me in the space barrier. Even if they stand in front of them, I''m afraid they won''t be able to see it. The only ce left is nothing more than a shipyard, but at this moment Abona has been there for a long time, and it doesn��t matter even if they discover something, as long as they don��t take away the core information!��


    Chang Nuo said with an indifferent expression.


    "Haha~, it seems that His Majesty the King has already thought that they woulde here to investigate?"


    "If you know enough about the World Government, you will know that they will never let any force that can threaten them appear. Unlike the pirates, we have our own fixed ce to live, so they will definitely understand at all costs. What secrets are hidden in the Tohru Empire today?


    But now the situation in the sea is unpredictable, and the new world is enough to make them anxious. For us, it is nothing more than investigation and stabilization.


    I believe that in less than a day at most, these guys will not find any more important news. They will naturallye here, and then they will definitely invite us to join the world government again. "Chang Nuo said.


    "Why is His Majesty the King so confident?"


    Yixiao asked curiously.


    Although he has been in this country for more than two years, what makes him more confused is that the king sitting in front of him seems to know everything well. No matter what kind of situation he encounters, he always remains calm and calm. Attitude, and more importantly, he has figured out all the thoughts of the world government and navy.


    Even for Yixiao, who has lived for decades, it is impossible for Yixiao to handle such things in such a perfect way, let alone for a young king who is less than 20 years old.


    In fact, I have wanted to ask this question a long time ago, but the opportunity was not suitable. It was rare to find such a good opportunity, so Yixiao would not let go of the doubts in his heart.


    At the same time, he also wanted to know to what extent this little guy''s inner understanding of the world had reached.


    "General Yixiao, there are many times when thepetition between the two forces is not about strength, but more importantly, brains.


    A very important part of the reason why our country chose to establish a navy during this period of time and begin to dere its own strength is because thend of the four seas is not a ce that the navy and the world government focus on.


    Because almost all the strong people whoe out of here will flock to the new world. The emergence of the Tru Empire has nothing more than caused a lot of difort to the other party.


    So far, the World Government only controls the navy and the army. However, the army can almost be ignored. Their strength is not as strong as imagined, but the navy''s total strength is only about 1.5 million, but these Almost all of their forces have to be separated, including the Grand Line and the New World, which upy the main areas of their forces. There are only some rtively weak ones.


    The number of troops with absolute strength in the navy is about 200,000. The reason why they are called absolute strength mainly reflects that they have learned one of the six naval skills.


    But these people not only have to safeguard the rights and interests of the world government and the Tianlong people, but also maintain the stability of the four seas. If they are scattered, more than one million troops will not be enough for them.


    The status of the four emperors in the new world is stable, and each of them can destroy a country by one person. Their strength is enough to attract the attention of the world government. The navy will also gather all its heavy forces into the new world. Once someonees The abnormal behavior of one of the four emperors in the end is enough to cause headaches for the navy and the world government for a while.


    It''s just that our appearance caters to the interests of the Yonko Pirates. After all, our Toru Empire is equivalent to a sharp de standing on the back of the Navy and the World Government. It canpletely make them rx their mentality a lot. management of the new world, thereby strengthening the constraints on the first half of the great route and even the four seas. "

 Chapter 219 The need to join the world government

    <h4>Chapter 219 The need to join the world government</h4>


    Changnuo took a sip of water and leaned directly on the back of the sofa. Then he nced at it and smiled, and continued, "The world government doesn''t want to be attacked from both sides, so what it can do is very simple. After all, we belong to the state. In addition, we The Tru Empire is mainly based on business, and they will definitely find a way to get us to join the world government as a member country.


    But this group of people will not ignore the overall strength of our country, and may even let us go when we face a war between the Yonko pirate ships in the future.


    So in the next time, the World Government CP personnel whoe here will definitely invite us to join the World Government and agree to our requests. "


    "You just said world government, but what about the navy?" Yixiao asked.


    "Navy!! As for the Navy, there may be things that interest you in the future, so let me give it a try. However, I will need to trouble you, General Yixiao, to negotiate with these CP personnel next. Got it!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Then what is His Majesty''s attitude towards joining the World Government?"


    Yixia paused for a moment, then opened his mouth and asked directly.


    "Join, why not join? It''s just that some topics need to be discussed in advance. When negotiating, we need two things. First, the Tru Empire must be a first-level member of the World Government and will not ept any supply of gold from the sky. , and enjoys the ability for ships flying the g of the Tru Empire to pass directly through the Red Earth Continent without any hindrance.


    Second, the personnel of the Tru Empire have the right to give priority to recruiting the navy under special circumstances at sea.


    Third, the world government needs toe up with the technology to allow free passage of the wind-free zone in the real estate market.


    If we agree to these three simple requirements, we don''t mind joining the world government. As for what the remaining General Yixiao wants, you can just think about it at that time, but these three points are our bottom line! "


    Chang Nuo suddenly turned serious and said.


    In fact, what he really wants is to be able to cross the Red Earth Continent. This will bring a lot of convenience to the Tru Empire. At least he can travel from the South China Sea country to the new world, saving at least a month of time.


    Moreover, the degree of danger has also been greatly reduced. At present, if they want to conduct business, they can almost only travel through Fish-Man Ind. The losses caused by such a price are too serious.


    However, as for the technology of Hailou Stone, this thing has been mastered by the Tru Empire for a long time. They are just using this method to find a gimmick. If they suddenlye up with this technology in theter stage, they will be affected by the world. Government suspicion.


    As for the matter of recruiting the navy anytime and anywhere under special conditions, it is more than nothing. Anyway, it is nothing.


    Yixiao sat aside and listened quietly to these demands. No matter which one, it was an absolute shame for the world government.


    In the decades he has lived, he has traveled around almost the entire pirate world. So far, even the country of basta has been treated very harshly if it wants to pass through the Red Earth Continent, and sometimes even Even if it is slightly unsatisfactory, passage will be prohibited, but now if the Tru Empire proposes these conditions, it is really possible that the World Government will directly agree.


    Yixiao did not reject the matter proposed by His Majesty the King. He just smiled slightly and said, "Then this matter will be left to the old man. What are the details? Let''s see the attitude of the world government then!"


    "We don''t have to join the world government. It doesn''t make much difference to us whether we join or not. Now that the country has this strength, they should be anxious, not us."


    Changnuo said that although the current Toru Empire alone is not proportional to their strengthpared to the World Government and the Navy, one thing that can be confirmed is that in this world, the forces that cannot deal with the World Government will But there are too many to count.


    Especially the Yonko pirates in the New World, plus there is a revolutionary army wandering back and forth outside. Compared with them, the attitude of the Toru Empire is already the best.


    "I wonder if His Majesty the King has any other arrangements?" Yixiao asked.


    "There is no special arrangement. If the world government agrees to our request, then let them directly inform the entire world through the World Economic News that we need to be able to do decent projects, and their world government and navy must not be involved in matters rted to Tru Empire anything.��


    Chang Nuo said again.


    "Then I understand!" Yixiao said and stood up directly. Just as he was about to leave, he stopped and said, "I will definitely handle this matter."


    After saying that, Yixiao walked out of the area where the two people were discussing, and then walked outside.


    Even though the person had left, the expression on Yixiao''s face was not so easygoing during the process. After all, the people he had to face this time were not ordinary people, and Yixiao could feel the difference in strength between them.


    Even though he now has the strength of a general, how many people in this world havepletely surpassed the strength of a general?


    Chang Nuo was sitting here thinking quietly. He also knew a lot about this kind of thing, so he had already kept up with the follow-up arrangements.


    These masked people came to their own country. Judging from the attire they wore, it was already known that they definitely belonged to the World Government CP personnel, and their strength could only be stronger than the other.


    But this time, no matter what purpose they came with, this country has already been fully prepared.


    During this period of time, as long as the other party does not do anything too extreme, the Tru Empire will not directly wipe out all of them even in the end.


    However, this time, as long as no bigmotion is made, Changnuo is still willing to have a friendly negotiation. The Tru Empire needs to survive, and the World Government needs to be stable. It''s almost like each wants to get what it needs.


    After all, for the Toru Empire, the request made this time is not too much. If the world government and the navy want to stabilize the situation in the South China Sea and the four seas, no matter what request the Toru Empire makes, as long as it can be within the scope they can achieve. Inside, absolutely no problems will arise.


    Changnuo believes that the World Government, if he wants to join, will eventually agree to these requests. After all, these will not cost them much, but they can stabilize the Tru Empire. A sword hanging above their heads was already a much better deal inparison.

 Chapter 220 CP personnel appear again

    <h4>Chapter 220 CP personnel appear again</h4>


    The few CP officers outside were still walking on the street, but as they kept observing the situation in the country, they did not find anything special or different.


    In their perception, except for those factories, they did not notice any difference, and even everything seemed normal.


    "There''s no need to explore anymore, let''s go! The other party''s people have already been waiting for us!" The tall and thin man wearing a pure white mask walking in front said in a serious voice.


    "Boss, but the task assigned to us by the superiors has not beenpleted yet. What should we do when we get back?"


    asked the man with the smiley mask.


    "Do you think they will let us get all this useful information? The Tru Empire dares to do this, which shows that they are indeed capable in this area. It is useless to consider other things now. Go directly to the pce. , Let��s express our intention ofing here this time!�� the tall and thin man said again.


    "What if they don''t ept it by then?"


    Another man with a mask with several patterns on his face said.


    "Everything will be discussed when the timees. We can''t make any decisions here, and everything will be reported to the higher-ups. Also, try not to have any conflicts in this country. They are not like us in other countries. Maybe they are really brave. Do it!


    Cp two The group of people disappeared. It was previously judged that it might be rted to the Tru Empire, but there is no evidence, so you should be more cautious next time. "


    The tall and thin man warned the people following him.


    "What are you afraid of? Do they really dare to attack us?" The man wearing a smiling mask said disdainfully.


    "I dare not say whether I will take action or not, but there is no need to make things too rigid. The people above have also said that we only have three tasks when wee to the Tru Empire, to explore the opponent''s training ground for soldiers, and to find where they build warships. Shipyard, and the other is to let them choose to join the World Government. Apart from these three tasks, don''t create any extraneous problems!" said the tall and thin man.


    "It''s really boring. I can no longer y like other countries. I really don''t understand how this Tru Empire suddenly became so powerful?"


    The man wearing a patterned mask said speechlessly.


    "That''s right, the people above don''t know why they gave us this mission. It''s obvious that Cp 4 is the one doing these things, why do they want us toe over!" The smiling masked man also said quite dissatisfied.


    But while they were talking, a man jumped up and down from the front. Of course, he also had a mask on his face and a pigtail. Anyway, I wasn��t sure whether he was a man or not. I could tell from the clothes on his body. The other party should be.


    He jumped up to everyone, with some excitement on his face, and shouted mischievously, "How good is this ce? I like the food here so much. Boss, what do you think we can control the king of this country?" Then won��t we be able to eat delicious food every day?��


    This weird personality instantly made several other team members a little dissatisfied, especially the way the other party spoke made them feel like it was an insult to their ears every time they heard it.


    But this tall and thin leader had a serious face at the moment, and his eyes through the mask were very cold.


    After he watched the man with pigtailsing over and heard what the other person said, his whole aura changed, and he warned him sternly, "Be honest with me, don''t you think Are we invincible in the world? Or do you think that as a CP member of the world government, no one in this country dares to do anything to you? Do you believe that if you don��t have this status, just by what you say, it is estimated that next You will never leave this country alive!"


    "Ugh, hahahaha, boss, when did you be so timid?" the man with braids said directly mockingly.


    "He''s not wrong. If you don''t have this kind of status, I can guarantee that you will never be able to leave this country alive!"


    Just as the braided man''s sharp voice came out, General Yixiao had already appeared here from who knows which direction.


    He held a cane in his hand and wore his own blue-ck general uniform. He walked over slowly without any smile on his face.


    The braided man who was still smiling just now, now his expression turned weird when he saw the smileing out.


    Not to mention the braided man, even the tall and thin leader was on guard at the moment. He had not noticed how the smile appeared just now. The country''s generals had alreadye into his sight, but No one was aware of it, and they even activated their knowledge and domineering skills to sense the dangerous situation around them throughout the whole process.


    Although the tall and thin man had noticed someone waiting for them before, he didn''t realize how the other party came?


    "Wee to the Tru Empire, but this is not the ce to talk. Please follow me to the pce and sit down."


    He said politely with a smile, and then his whole body suddenly burst out with overwhelming momentum towards the braided man. He warned again in a calm voice, "When youe to the Tru Empire, please respect thews of this country and don''t say anything you shouldn''t." If you say anything, and do things you shouldn''t do, when entering the territory of the Toru country, all personnel must only act in ordance with thews of the Toru Empire. Your strength is indeed rtively strong, but this strength is not limited to the Toru Empire. among."


    What Yixiao said was a warning and a self-expression, letting them understand that when theye to this country, they don''t just do whatever they want in other countries.


    "General Yixiao personally greeted us, which really ttered us. But don''t worry, I will definitely restrain my subordinates. As for the legal issues in your country, since we have entered this country, we will naturally start from this country. the country��s system.��


    The tall and thin man said with a smile.


    Anyway, no one can tell whether his expression is a smile or not.


    "This is best. Pleasee with me!"


    With a smile, he started walking directly towards the pce.


    It is not far from the pce gate, and even taller people standing here can see it directly.


    Although after two years, the royal city has be quite prosperous and expanded dozens of times, the ultimate goal of these guys is to go to the royal pce.


    The tall and thin CP personnel did not refuse. The generals of their country had alreadye out to greet them in person, giving them no chance to refuse at all.

 Chapter 221 Negotiating Conditions

    <h4>Chapter 221 Negotiating Conditions</h4>


    In a short time, Yixiao had led several people to a strange ce. This was not the royal pce, and it was already hundreds of kilometers away from the royal city.


    As early as the moment they entered the pce, apletely transparent door directly led them to another ce.


    Chang Nuo had specially arranged everything.


    The purpose is to avoid endangering the security of the country when a conflict urs, and dragging them to an uninhabited area is the best choice.


    It was clear that they had just entered the pce, but the scene in front of them suddenly became extremely deserted. Within more than ten kilometers around this ce, not even two figures werepletely in the state of a desert ind.


    "General Yixiao, what is going on?"


    The tall and thin man said with a shocked expression.


    The expressions of other people are not much better either. Everyone is curious about what is going on?


    But at this time, he only smiled and said leisurely, "Don''t worry, it''s just that it''s more suitable for us to discuss some things here!"


    "Ugh hahahaha~, such a powerful method, it can make people move such a long distance instantly, it is really surprising, but I don''t know what kind of devil fruit ability this is, or is it a high-tech method?" The braided man looked strange. said with a smile.


    "Now that you are all here, let''s talk about the purpose ofing to our Tru Empire, or what the world government wants you to do here?"


    Yixiao didn''t pay any attention to the braided man''s look, but directly asked the tall and thin man with a serious look on his face.


    "The people above asked us toe over and notify your country to join the world government!"


    The tall andnky man said bluntly.


    "Yes, there is no problem with joining the World Government, but His Majesty the King has three requirements. First, our Tru Empire needs to be a first-ss franchise country, and does not need to hand over any heavenly gold, and it also needs to open the Red Earth Continent to the New World. However, no one has the right to inspect the passage of the world and must let it pass wherever the g of the Trudeau Empire is hoisted.


    Second, by flying the g of Trudeau,mercial ships must have priority to recruit the navy whenever they encounter any problems on the sea.


    Third, the world government muste up with sea floor stone technology that can pass through the windless zone.


    In addition to the above three points, the World Government and the Navy are not allowed to interfere with any matters rted to the Tru Empire. I wonder if the World Government will agree to these points? If it is agreed, we will continue the discussion. Anyway, the Tohru Empire does not need to choose to join the World Government. "


    While Yixiao was talking leisurely, the braided man was jumping around restlessly behind him, and from time to time he would move quickly behind Yixiao, trying to see if the other person was really as blind as the legend said.


    But after he finished speaking, Yixiao instantly pulled out the staff knife in his hand. With the blessing of the devil fruit, the braided man who was still jumping was instantly pressed directly to the ground by gravity, forming a A huge and deep hole has been opened, and no one knows whether he is still alive or not.


    Facing the sudden attack, everyone except the tall and thin man remained alert.


    "I''m very sorry, General Yixiao. Regarding these issues raised by your country, we will give feedback to the superiors. After all, we have no right to make such a decision. As for the rude behavior of my subordinates, it is also due to myx discipline!"


    As he said that, the tall and thin man lowered his head slightly to express his apology. Only then did he smile and put away the power in his hands. After inserting the stick knife back, the braided man jumped up from the hole instantly.


    As soon as he jumped up, he started to attack Yixiao in the next second, but then the tall and thin man moved him instantly and kicked him directly in the abdomen. His whole body was rubbed along the ground for nearly 10 years. A distance of hundreds of meters.


    The ground, which was originally full of weeds, was now directly rubbed with a deep and long scratch by his body.


    But despite this, after the braided man stopped, the next second he ran over vigorously, as if these injuries had no effect on him at all?


    In this case, even Yixiao was seeing such an invincible existence for the first time, but it was definitely a devil fruit.


    While the tall and thin man kicked hispanion away, he turned around and lowered his head apologetically, and then said with a smile on his face, "I''m really sorry. This behavior of my men really makes me feel embarrassed, but about Tru I really can��t agree to these requests made by the empire, but I canmunicate with the higher-ups then. As for whether the higher-ups agree or not, that��s not something I can decide!��


    The tall andnky man''s attitude made him feel a little surprised even when he smiled. When did people under the World Government have such an attitude? The usual attitude of being arrogant and not taking anyone seriously is their proper attitude, so maintaining this kind of respect now really surprises others.


    However, this kind of ident did notst even five seconds. The tall and thin man suddenly changed his tone and asked, "General Yixiao, we really have some questions about the Tru Empire. I don''t know whether to ask them or not, but if we don''t ask, I feel very ufortable inside, mainly because I want to know where your troops of tens of thousands of people were trained?"


    "True Empire''s military secrets, noment!"


    The other party''s method is indeed very untechnical. If it is so straightforward, how can Yixiao answer it.


    But the other party was not discouraged at all. As he spoke, another one of the CPs, the guy who had always maintained a pure white mask, did not say a word from the beginning to the end, but at this moment he quickly moved to Yixiao. Next to him, and as quickly as possible, he touched his body with his hand.


    But in the process of touching, Yixiao instantly pulled out the staff knife in his hand. Under the influence of the gravity fruit, the surrounding space was instantly distorted. But even so, the words between the two people and the behavior of the tall and thin man were still unclear. , which still made General Yixiao feel a little less vignt.


    Although the knife had been drawn out, the pure white masked man''s speed still allowed the other party to touch his body.


    In just such a moment, Yiyi smiled as if he was uncontroble. He put the knife in his hand back into the sheath, and hallucinations began to appear in his senses.


    It wasn''t until this moment that the tall and thin man showed his ghostly smile.


    "Hohohoho~, it''s really hard to deal with. If you weren''t blind, the water cat would have made you fall into a hallucination long ago. I didn''t expect that you would be so strong as we are!"


    The tall and thin man tilted his head and said with a smile on his face.

 Chapter 222 Showdown

    <h4>Chapter 222 Showdown</h4>


    But I can''t see their expressions, and I don''t know how twisted they are under the masks at this moment.


    The braided man jumped up to them again, circled around Yixiao a few times, and then said with a yful face, "Ah? How did this guy be like this? It seems like it was done by a water cat again. Well! Then, will we be able to ask what we want to ask next?"


    "Shut up, if you keep talking, I''ll make you fall into an illusion!" The man in the white mask said in a low voice.


    "Okay, you two, stop making trouble and quickly ask what we want to ask. That''s what we need to do."


    The tall and thin man suddenly looked at the two people with a serious face. After feeling their boss''s gaze, the two people immediately returned to a calm expression and stopped chattering.


    Seeing that the two people had calmed down, the tall and thin man walked to Yixiao with a serious expression and asked with a solemn expression, "Tell me, where is the military base of your Tru Empire? And how do you train those soldiers? That kind of ship of yours Where is the construction technology? And the strength of the other two generals?"


    A series of questions were asked by the tall and thin man without any hesitation. He felt that the other party waspletely under his control, at least at this moment.


    After all, the ability of the man in the white mask is a psychedelic fruit. It is a bug-like existence among Devil Fruits. Anyone who is touched by him or even looks into his eyes can escape the control of this Devil Fruit''s ability. .


    That''s why he asked these questions directly without any scruples, without taking the content of the previous chat seriously.


    But they ignored a very important issue, that is, they originally entered the pce, but why they suddenly appeared in this ce, none of them thought about it.


    So after he asked the question, Yixiao suddenly smiled, and then he opened his mouth and said directly, "I wonder if you have anything else to ask?"


    As he spoke, Yixiao suddenly took a step forward, and his whole body was in an attack state. At this moment, the staff sword in his hand was half drawn again, waiting for the other party''s answer.


    But when they sensed something was wrong, the five CP personnel who came over had already begun to retreat a long distance in an instant. Everyone started to be on alert.


    "You...why are you okay?"


    The man in the white mask asked with some confusion.


    I guess several other people also wanted to ask this question, but at this time, the man with the braids mocked the man in the white mask with some pride and said, "Ah! It seems that your ability is not very good sometimes. I didn''t expect that you would fall off the chain at the critical moment." , it really makes people feel a little embarrassed!"


    Facing the braided man''s ridicule, the man in the white mask turned gloomy. His fists were clenched tightly, and his teeth were gritting. He began to recall which aspect he had failed to do just now. He had clearly touched. When ites to the other party, why is it still like this?


    "This is really giving me a headache!"


    The tall and thin man sighed and said, then he put away his guard and said to Yixiao, "I''m really sorry just now, but I just wanted to experience the strength of the generals from the Tru Empire. I hope you don''t mind. Let''s take over." Come down, let��s talk about joining the world government!��


    Just thinking about the problem in one brushstroke, Yixiao didn''t have any ideas at the moment.


    "There is no problem in joining the world government, but we have to let other peoplee over and talk to us about this matter!"


    Yixiao had a serious expression, and then he took out the knife in his hand. It looked like he was just waving it casually, but he softly shouted "Gravity Knife - Tiger..."


    The moment the voice fell, the gravitational field in front was immediately greatly affected. Even the earth began to crack at this moment. However, the strength of the other people was obviously not as simple as it seemed. The tall and thin man pulled up the side. The man in the white mask had moved out of the attack range in an instant.


    But the man with the braids was not so lucky and was directly attacked, but at this time, none of theirpanions were worried about such a thing.


    The remaining four people quickly surrounded Yixiao. Now that the situation has been discussed, there is no need to continue chatting at all. The two groups also began to engage in an imminent battle.


    "Be careful, this guy''s strength cannot be underestimated. Please wait a moment one by one and be sure not to die!"


    The tall and thin man shouted to several otherpanions casually, the disdain in his eyes was already obvious.


    He didn''t believe that with the power of five people, they wouldn''t be able to defeat a blind man in the end.


    The first attack was over. In the end, it only hit a man with braids. But from their expressions, no one looked sad.


    Sure enough, within a short while, the braided man crawled out from the ground again. Apart from a little dirt on his body, nothing unusual was found, not even injured.


    Feeling the current situation with his own experience, Yixiao finally felt some inexplicable pressure. The people on the other side were obviously all Devil Fruit users, and each one was weirder than thest.


    Among these five people, there is also a swordsman. He looks like a mute. He wears a ck mask with some white stripes showing on it. Among these people, he is the only one who looks rtively normal. .


    This group of people has definitely provoked the wrong opponent. Yixiao''s knowledge and domination can already predict the future. Even if there are many of them, what use will they have? As long as they are in an invincible position, they can always think of ways to deal with these people.


    Five people formed a circle with Yixiao in the middle. The man with the pigtails was the first to attack. He rushed forward suddenly, and the pigtails on his head instantly turned into something like a straw, flying quickly in the direction of Yixiao. passed.


    But such an obvious action could not cause any kind of attack at all.


    Before he arrived, Yixiao thrust the knife in his hand into the ground and shouted, "Gravity Knife - Endless Hell..."


    In an instant, a 10-meter radius around Yixiao sank directly into the ground. Only the ce where he stood was left, with a cylinder-like earth support under his feet. Everything around him sank into the ground. The pit suddenly became It became like an abyss, and it was impossible to see where the bottom was.


    But this attack only brought the braided man in. The other people began to retreat the moment they felt it. This time, they were separated by nearly two hundred meters.


    "Shui Mao, you stay on the outside. You have the weakest attack power and no defense. Don''t let that old man take advantage of him. Otherwise, he will kill you!"


    The tall and thin brother shouted leisurely to the man in the white mask next to him.

 Chapter 223 The surprising fruit of time

    <h4>Chapter 223 The surprising fruit of time</h4>


    Up to this time, this group of CP personnel did not seem to regard the general Yixiao as their opponent at all, and even made fun of him. In other words, they were too confident in their own strength.


    Yixiao was standing alone at the top of the bottomless pit, with only one pir under his feet, but he was not too anxious, and his expression and attitude were almost the same as those of the tall andnky man.


    "Everyone, I think the people in the World Government asked you toe here because they didn''t want to start a war with our Toru Empire, right?"


    Yixiao directly inserted the knife in his hand into the scabbard, and asked the people around him with a natural expression.


    "I wonder what General Yixiao is talking about? The World Government does not have any thoughts of war with the Toru Empire, but there are some things that need to be investigated clearly!"


    The tall andnky man said.


    "Since everyone is already here, why bother saying such hypocritical words?" Yixiao said.


    But after he finished speaking, he pulled out the knife in his hand again, but this time it was different from before. He raised the whole knife directly high, and then suddenly dropped it and inserted it into the scabbard. This scene had a huge impact on the surrounding people. Personally, I was a little surprised and didn''t understand what the other party meant.


    But at this moment, the tall andnky man as the leader had already discovered that something was wrong. In just a moment''s reaction, he shouted directly to several other people, "Quick, kill him..."


    Although several other people didn''t know why, they still rushed forward together.


    It''s just that at this moment, a gravity space has been formed around a small area with a radius of at least 100 meters. Even if this group of people is rtively powerful, they will still be affected a lot within this range.


    Except for the man in the white mask who ate the psychedelic fruit, everyone else started to smile instantly.


    In fact, others still don''t understand why they are so anxious, but in less than ten seconds, several people discovered something that shocked them at the same time, that is, five or six meteorites appeared above their heads, heading towards them. He fell towards himself.


    This scene made even the rtively powerful beings like them feel dumbfounded. At the same time, they finally understood why their captain asked him to start besieging this blind man.


    At this moment, the tall and thin man no longer tried to hide his strength at all. He put his two hands together, and as they slowly pulled them apart, a clock was suspended between the two hands, and with a swinging sound, when the tall and thin man A person shouted softly, "Timeg..."


    The entire area was suddenly covered by a colorless light wave. For the next second, everyone kept their original movements, and some people were even suspended in the air without falling.


    Even the meteorites that are about to fall from the sky will remain suspended there without making any movement as long as they reach the designated area.


    The Superman Clock Fruit can also be regarded as a bug among Superman fruits. It is not an exaggeration to say that it is a time fruit. The only drawback is that this thing has its own limited range and can stop time.


    Although time has stopped, everyone can still maintain their consciousness. After Yixiao felt this state, his first feeling was that he was really too careless this time.


    This kind of fruit ability simply makes other people despair, and this thing is much more powerful than any natural fruit ability.


    A thing that can stop time without being affected by itself, this thing can definitely kill everything instantly.


    After time stopped, let alone attack, even defense was impossible.


    However, Devil Fruits with such bugs also have their own absolute ws, which is that in the process of exerting Devil Fruit abilities, a person with Devil Fruit abilities is no different from an ordinary person.


    It was precisely because of this situation that the tall and thin man took out a dagger from his arms, but he was standing on the edge of the abyss. At this moment, he could not jump over, after all, there was still dozens of meters away.


    While the Devil Fruit was being developed, even the moves he had learned before werepletely useless at this moment. This seemed to be the most helpless part of this Devil Fruit.


    However, the people staying in this ce are not just Yixiao fighting them alone, there are also several people hiding in the dark.


    Changnuo, who was hiding in the space, felt a wave of emotion when he saw this situation. He had a space fruit and was already a bug-like existence. He didn''t expect that the time series of devil fruits would appear. No wonder the other group of people were so confident. in this country now.


    "Abona, go and test the edge of this time devil fruit''s ability..."


    At this moment, Abona was also pulled by Chang Nuo and hidden behind the space. The two of them would not be attacked in any way. The purpose was to see what this group of CP personnel wanted to do.


    And for the first time when Yixiao was attacked by a psychedelic fruit, Changnuo secretly helped him directly to unravel these illusions.


    Although these CP personnel may all have shorings in terms of strength, if their Devil Fruit abilities are taken individually, they areparable to generals. It is rtively normal to think that the hidden personnel of the World Government can have this strength.


    Abona did not refuse Chang Nuo''s arrangement. The next second he jumped out of the space, and then shed directly at the tall and thin group of people.


    The ck sword light carried domineering power and began to sweep towards their group of people along the ground. However, when it was about 100 meters away from these people, the sword light stopped directly at this moment and remained maintain the original state.


    It can also be determined from this that the opponent''s time fruit control ability is within a 100-meter radius of him. Otherwise, it will not cause a wider range of effects.


    "I really didn''t expect there to be someone else here?"


    The tall and thin man smiled disapprovingly, but the man in the white mask who had been standing outside suddenly shouted at Abona.


    Although this guy''s Devil Fruit ability is very good, the key is that he has no real strength. Let alone a general, I am afraid that as long as he can find a way to suppress the Devil Fruit ability, even an ordinary person can kill him.


    But for Abona and Changnuo, who watched their performance throughout the whole process, they have almost figured out the abilities of these people.


    Abona didn''t even look at the opponent. After understanding the opponent''s ability, he directly moved quickly in his direction, closed his eyes tightly, and used the Haki of Insight to sense its location.

 Chapter 224 Who is Strong and Who is Weak?

    <h4>Chapter 224 Who is Strong and Who is Weak?</h4>


    The white-masked male Kong has Devil Fruit abilities, but his own attack attributes are not strong, and it can even be said that there is no such thing at all.


    But his Devil Fruit ability is indeed a bug for ordinary people, especially forrge-scale attacks in the army, it can definitely cause serious and fatal effects.


    This reminded Chang Nuo, who was hiding behind the scenes, of what he used to be like. It was the first time he fought against CP personnel. There was also such a person on their side, but so far, the opponent''s Devil Fruit had already been in his. On the body.


    He didn''t expect to encounter the same person this time, so the only thing Changnuo could think of was their personnel arrangement. If it weren''t for the fact that these people were too powerful and too arrogant, the team between them would be If the cooperation level reaches the level of the members of the special forces team of the Toru Empire, even if this group of people can deal with one Yonko, it probably won''t be a big problem.


    But their mistake is that everyone likes to fight alone and is eager to show that they leave the weakest one at the end so that others can take advantage of it.


    The tall and thin man had obviously discovered this, but now he was on the verge of death, and both attacks were already suspended there. If he removed the power of time at this moment, not only would the meteorite above his head directly hit his team members, but they would also be suspended. The attack from Abona on the periphery will also fall on them.


    However, if the power of time is not removed, the man in the white mask who is just outside the power of time will have almost no hope of survival.


    "Abona, don''t kill him!"


    Changnuo stayed in the hidden space and used the power of the psychic fruit to directlymunicate with Abona who was preparing to attack.


    His de was ready to chop the opponent''s head, but in the next second it was slightly deflected. By the time a stream of light hit him, more than half of the white masked man''s shoulder had been cut off in an instant.


    "ah����!!!"


    Listening to the man in the white mask falling to the ground and covering his shoulders, he kept shouting. However, his life was not in any danger at the moment. He had only suffered some serious injuries.


    Abona was still on the periphery watching the situation inside. If Yixiao was not surrounded by abyss at this moment, he was alone inside, and the tall and thin man with the time fruit ability did not have any other strength after releasing the ability. It is estimated that this general will also die directly in the hands of the opponent.


    But as this scene appeared, the tall and thin man inside was obviously a little angry. He held a dagger in his hand and stared at Abona standing on the outside with increasing intensity, as if he wanted to kill him directly in the next second.


    But the ability of the Time Fruit not only affects the people on the periphery, but also affects the situation when he stays inside. Except for himself, all other attacknguages ??can be affected to varying degrees.


    Even if he stays inside and yells to the outside world, his voice will still stay within the scope of the power of time.


    At the moment when he was still angry, the smile that had been in the power of time suddenly disappeared.


    The tall andnky man didn''t even notice this. He was still looking at Abona on the periphery, but other teammates who were affected by the time could not believe what they were seeing.


    In less than ten seconds, Yixiao had already appeared outside the control of the power of time.


    What he only controls is the power of time in this space, and it cannot affect the normal operation of other spaces. That''s why at the moment when he wasn''t paying attention, Chang Nuo directly used the power of space to drag Yixiao from another space.e out.


    When the tall and thin man turned his head and angrily prepared to attack Yixiao, he realized that the other party was not here now. In the process of confusion, Yixiao was already standing on the periphery, looking at the situation of several people inside.


    "Haha~, General Yixiao, it seems that there should be nothing wrong with you!"


    Abona smiled and started walking in the direction where the smile came from.


    From the beginning to the end, Chang Nuo was hidden in the space and did not show his face. After all, if he participated, the nature would bepletely different.


    The tall andnky group of people are nowpletely trapped. Two attacks have been suspended above their heads. Once he cancels the scope of the power of time, these attacks will also fall directly on them.


    Abona is no longer what he used to be. That domineering attack can seriously damage them, not to mention the meteorite attack suspended above their heads.


    "Abona, this old man is really careless this time. I didn''t expect that the other party could actually possess the power of time and the superhuman clock fruit. I really don''t know where the world government got so many good things from?"


    There was no smile, and his face remained solemn. If it weren''t for a rtively deep abyss around him, he would have definitely died at the opponent''s hands at this moment.


    "General Yixiao, what should we do with these people? They are still restless aftering to our Tru Empire. I really don''t know what they are thinking?"


    Abona asked in a cold voice.


    The Toru Empire has developed to this point. Although it knew that it could not bypass the World Government, it did not expect that the other party would be so casual and dare to directly target the imperial generals in its own country.


    At this moment, the tall and thin man no longer looked as arrogant as before. He walked to the edge of time, stepped out, sighed deeply, and said to the two people not far away, "Two generals, Our CP department does not want to have any disputes with the Tru Empire. As long as General Yixiao removes his meteorite attack, I am now willing tomunicate with the people above on the conditions you just mentioned!"


    "Do you think the Tru Empire is a ce where you cane and leave whenever you want? You are still talking so lightly now. I really don''t know who gave you the courage?"


    Abona said with a mocking look on his face.


    "Is it possible that you really want to fight to the death with the World Government? If you, the Toru Empire, canpare with the World Government, it''s nothing!"


    "Now the initiative is in our hands, but youring to the Tru Empire to do whatever you want will arouse the dissatisfaction of our King, so in addition to the conditions just now, add another one, that is, after the world government agrees, through World Economic News informs the whole world!��


    Yixiao opened his mouth and said directly.


    I had already thought that the two parties would definitely have disputes and fights. For the current Tohru Empire, there is really no need to get too stalemate with the World Government. The strength of this group of people is still here. Changnuo does not have any power now. The idea is to kill them directly. This kind of thing will not be of any benefit to the Tru Empire.

 Chapter 225 Negotiation

    <h4>Chapter 225 Negotiation</h4>


    After hearing Yixiao''s words, the tall and thin man realized that since the other party was willing to give in, there was really no need for him to bother with others.


    More importantly, how did Yixiao leave the scope of the power of time just now? This is what makes the tall and thin man more confused. So it can only mean one thing. His power of time cannot trap the two. Individuals, maybe there is something hidden behind this that they can��t expect.


    Under the mask, the tall and thin man licked his lips and reluctantly picked up the phone in his arms. He didn''t know which one to call anyway?


    But after a while, the tall andnky man took a few steps towards them and said, "The higher ups have agreed to your request, and will notify the World Economic News to designate the Tru Empire as a first-level franchise country. You don''t need to By paying the heavenly gold, we can also open a passage to the Red Earth Continent for you, and at the same time, ships flying the g of the Tru Kingdom can pass without obstacles, but Hailoushi''s technology is not good!"


    "Then we willmunicate after seeing the contents of the World Economic Report. You just stay here and take care of yourself!"


    Yixiao didn''t say anything. Whether Hailoushi''s skills would be given to them or not could only depend on their own performance. Anyway, his time power would not have the slightest impact on the people of the Tru Empire.


    "etc!!"


    Seeing that the two of them were about to turn around and leave, the tall and thin man shouted directly at them.


    The power of time cannotst forever. For these people, they can only block Abona''s attack with their instantaneous ability, but for the meteorites above their heads, it can still kill them.


    "What else have you not said? We have the patience and are not in a hurry. I hope you can think it over yourself!" Abona turned his head and said.


    "Hailou Shi''s technology cannot be given to you. Although I don''t know where you got the information from, but since you can bring it up, you should be able to think that even if we all die here, Hailou Shi''s It��s impossible for the technology to be leaked, so you shoulde up with some other reasons, and I��ll try to see if I canmunicate with the boss again!��


    The tall and thin man said.


    "Are you sure?" Yixiao also turned to look at the tall and thin man and asked.


    "Yes, as long as you provide a reason and there are no big problems, we canmunicate!"


    The tall and thin man said again.


    "That teammate of yours is dying now, but the dignity of our Toru Empire cannot be trampled on by anyone, especially as a general of the Toru Empire like me, our Toru Empire can do without Hailoushi''s technology, but he can''t!"


    "Huh? I didn''t expect it to be so simple. If you want to take this useless thing, just take it away!" The tall and thin man obviously just wanted to protect himself at this moment. As for the man in the white mask, he only has the power of the psychedelic fruit. , the key point is that it doesn''t y a big role. Being able to rece a few people present with him alone can be consideredpletely worthwhile.


    "Abona, take the people and leave!"


    Yixiao said, and then used his own ability to directly remove the power of the meteorite suspended above these people''s heads.


    Abona stood there with a puzzled look on his face. You are a general when you smile, and I am obviously the same. Why would a general ask me to do such a thing? Especially the guy lying on the ground who is now half dead. What use can this person be?


    The key is that His Majesty the King will not let him kill him, which makes Abona a little curious.


    But curiosity was curiosity, and he did not refuse other things. The guy lying on the ground with half of his shoulders missing could no longer even scream. His whole face was pale, and of course he couldn''t be seen. What does his face look like?


    But at this moment, the person was lying there upright, and the next second it seemed that he was about to belch.


    After thenky group of people stopped being attacked by meteorites above their heads, the next second he suddenly withdrew the power of time, but the braided man had been staying at the bottom of the pit, but the next second he appeared instantly and withstood Live this huge attack from Abona.


    Although I don''t understand why this guy didn''t die, it is clear that he has just been attacked. One second he was still underground, and the next second he was pulled up to withstand such a huge attack. Although this attack did not directly kill him, it still made him feel ufortable. He kept yelling.


    Because at this moment, his whole body had been divided into two parts starting from the waist, but there was no blood flowing out from the wound. When other teammates spliced ??the two parts of his body together, this man maintained his previous appearance. It looks like a lively and energetic tiger.


    "It''s really troublesome!"


    Abona picked up the white masked man who was still dripping with blood. He didn''t know whether this guy could insist on returning to the pce for treatment. For a guy who was about to die, he really didn''t understand why Yixiao was so stubborn. Want this thing?


    "Now that you are free, please leave the Tru Empire and don''t do anything else in our country, otherwise you will not have any chance to leave this country. Another thing is, since we have joined the World Government , I hope that our Tru Empire can also obtain the rights of the countries that join the World Government!"


    Yixiao stood there and said with a cold expression.


    "You can rest assured about this. Since you have joined the world government, you will naturally be one of our own from now on. However, one thing worth reminding is that I hope that your Tru Empire will not go too far in the future and maintain your status quo. This world has so far , or the world government has the final say!��


    The tall and thin voice said with the same sneer.


    "Abona, let''s go!"


    Yixiao turned to Abona, who had already picked up the man in the white mask, and said calmly.


    They did not choose to enter the space directly, but instead walked forward step by step.


    But the faces of the group of CPs standing behind them suddenly turned cold at this moment, and even all of them were extremely angry. However, the reason for this group of people''s anger was not that they had lost theirpanions, but that they did not expect Tru now. The empire is so powerful that even a few of them can''t deal with two people?


    "Captain, the water cat has been taken away, what should we do next? I suggest using the Demon-ying Order directly to wipe the entire Tru Empire off this map!"


    The man in the red striped mask said to the tall and thin man.


    "Are you stupid? Do you think the current Toru Empire can be solved with just a demon-ying order? Or do you think their navy is really just a decoration? Those warships of theirs have been studied by the people above, and even the technology The level of development is no worse than the navy��s technology!��


    The tall and thin man said coldly.

 Chapter 226 The Secret of Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 226 The Secret of Devil Fruit</h4>


    Hearing what their captain said, this group of people are even more angry now. As the most high-end team in CP, they will always get such arrogance wherever they go. They have always been the only ones with high standards. He spoke to others angrily, but this time he was forcibly put in a fight by the two of them!


    The tall and thin man stood there and took a deep breath. He had no intention of letting this matter go, but what could he do at this moment?


    Everyone understands that neither the world government nor the navy can sendrge-scale troops to fight the Tru Empire. Even if a few of them die here, this situation will not happen in the short term.


    Now we can only endure this silently and look for opportunities to counterattack them!


    With a smile, the two of them disappeared from the sight of the tall and thin CP people, and the next second they appeared in the pce.


    Changnuo had already prepared for them, and this time it was a near miss. No one expected that CP 0 members would be so powerful. Compared with the previous CP two, they were simply not on the same level. above.


    The two of them were no longer surprised when they just appeared here. On the contrary, it would be a surprise if they really walked back to the pce.


    "Your Majesty, hurry up! This guy on my shoulder is going to die soon!"


    As soon as he came back, Abona quickly put the guy on his shoulder on the ground, then stood up and shouted to Changnuo who was sitting there.


    "No hurries?"


    Chang Nuo said nonchntly, but at this moment, Gogoya had already walked up with a te of fruit in his hand.


    After she put the te of fruit on the table, Changnuo just nced at her slightly, and Gogoya started to walk outside in a sensible manner.


    Anyway, there is no need to worry about the guy lying on the ground dying like this for a while, but with the bleeding and serious injuries, he will definitely not be able to hold on for long.


    "I wonder why your majesty insists on this person? Now that he is dying, does your majesty have other ns?" Yixiao also asked curiously.


    After all, thest condition attached was this guy, but the order was requested by His Majesty the King sitting in front of him. Even Yixiao, who had traveled through most of the pirate world, couldn''t understand his thoughts at the moment.


    "Perhaps General Yixiao will understand next!"


    Changnuo said leisurely, and then his right hand glowed with blue light. With a slight tap of his fingers, the surrounding area was suddenly enveloped by a blue barrier.


    Amidst the curiosity of the two people, Chang Nuo casually flicked the guy lying on the ground still wearing a white mask. The blue light spot in his hand suddenly turned into a transparent space arrow. In an instant, In the meantime, the guy who was still breathing slightly turned his head and fell to the ground,pletely stopping any signs of life.


    Immediately afterwards, one of the fruits ced on the table, one of the grapes, began to change color in an instant. The colorful purple light directly turned the fruits in the entire tray into apletely different scene!


    Seeing this scene, Abona''s face was full of disbelief. Although he couldn''t see the scene in front of him with a smile, he could still sense the changes in the Devil Fruit.


    "His Majesty the King is actually able to extract Devil Fruit!!"


    The smile that had always been calm was nowpletely shocked.


    Not to mention Abona, who was standing aside. His jaw had dropped to the ground, his eyes had popped out, and he could not be described as surprised in his heart.


    "I''m afraid you haven''t learned about the properties of Devil Fruits yet. Sit down, I''ll take this opportunity to tell you about it!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    While speaking, he had already begun to remove the space barrier around him, and he was still sitting calmly on the sofa. He didn''t pay too much attention to the Devil Fruit on the tray at the moment, but he still reached out and took one. He put the unmutated apple to his mouth and started to bite it.


    The two people sat across from him with expressions of disbelief on their faces. They had seen a lot about Devil Fruits and knew a lot about them. However, being able to extract Devil Fruits was really the first time. Seen for the first time.


    "Your Majesty, who else knows you have this ability?"


    Yixiao asked quickly as soon as he sat down.


    "Don''t worry. Apart from the two of you, only Jun and General are the only ones who know about this matter. In fact, this situation is very simple. You just don''t know enough about Devil Fruit. If you understand it, it is probably for you." It''s also possible that it can be done.


    The specific nature of Devil Fruit cannot be studied and understood yet, but what I can tell you is that when any Devil Fruit user dies, the Devil Fruit in his body will most likely attach to the nearby matching fruit. This kind of The fruits may be apples, bananas, or grapes, but the fruits attached to each devil fruit are almost different.


    Moreover, the ability of the Devil Fruit can only be transferred within a specific space. This is why before obtaining the Devil Fruit, you must first set up a space barrier. I believe you will be able to understand this! "


    Chang Nuo leaned on the sofa and said leisurely.


    "No wonder there are so many Devil Fruit users in the Toru Empire!!" Abona sighed. Although he still couldn''t understand this kind of behavior, for those Devil Fruit users who appeared in the Toru Empire, this method It can be considered a rtively good exnation.


    After all, a small Toru Empire has a lot of Devil Fruit ability users so far. This kind of situation is rare even in the New World. Such a hard-to-find thing seems to have no effect in this country. , a rough calction by light devil fruit users shows that there are nearly a hundred people in this country so far, which is a very unusual situation in any country.


    Yixiao sat there stroking his sword in his hand. After Chang Nuo''s exnation, he hadpletely understood it. After all, he had experienced many things, and he was not surprised by such a situation. Combined with these Words, he now fully believes that this situation will happen.


    "Now I still have something unclear. I wonder if I can ask His Majesty the King for advice?" Yixiao asked.


    And he looked very solemn at the moment, even trying hard to calm down the thoughts in his heart.

 Chapter 227: Diverting trouble to the east

    <h4>Chapter 227: Diverting trouble to the east</h4>


    "Abona, the Navy Headquarters doesn''t know which general came to the South China Sea. You should apany Junhe to have a look. No matter what means are used, they will not be able to enter Crimea for at least two days. The current situation between the two countries The handover is ongoing and I don��t want to cause any trouble.��


    Chang Nuo did not reply to Yixiao''s words, but instead spoke directly to Abona who was sitting next to him.


    "What if there is a conflict between the two parties?"


    "What else can we do? You canmunicate Junhe''s position through the phone bug and send two steel battleships there. The necessary force deterrence is still necessary for the Tru Empire at this moment!"


    After listening to what Abona said, Changnuo smiled slightly and said again.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!!"


    After receiving the order, Abona started walking towards the perimeter without any hesitation.


    Now they know everything that happens in the South China Sea, especially when the navy sends a general to the South China Sea. When they first entered the South China Sea, they couldn''t hide it from anyone except those who didn''t know how many people were on the ship. In addition, we have even figured out where the ship has arrived, how big it is and how many people are on it.


    At least in the South China Sea, few people have seen the arrival of the admiral.


    After Abona left, Changnuo picked up another fruit, took a bite of it easily, and said while eating, "General Yixiao, what if I said that I ate two Devil Fruits and had two powers? Do you believe it?"


    Because Changnuo no longer needs to wait for Yixiao to say it clearly, he already knows what the other party wants to ask?


    It''s nothing more than why Changnuo was able to help hime out of the illusion when fighting CP0, and also cracked the opponent''s attack method in an instant.


    "So that''s really the case!"


    Although Yixiao had doubts before, thinking about it, this kind of thing is impossible. After all, one person cannot eat two Devil Fruits. This is a topic that everyone knows.


    It''s just that what Chang Nuo said now still makes him feel incredible, but if this kind of incredible is umted for a long time, it will be normal.


    After all, from the beginning to the present, the king of the Toru Empire has brought them too many incredible things. Now even if someone says that he has eaten two Devil Fruits, Yixiao is only slightly surprised by such a thing!


    "The Kingdom of Crimea has begun to submit a merger agreement to our country, so what should we do next? This country is adjacent to our territory and has arge area. If we take over this country now, the Tru Empire will almost It already upies one-third of the South China Sea��snd area, and management requires a lot of effort!��


    Yixiao did not dwell on the topic just now, but directly changed another topic and started talking.


    "This has been arranged in advance. The Kingdom of Crimea does not have a particrlyrge number of people today, but the advantage of this country is that they are basically located in the ins, which is very suitable for use as a food nting base in the future to protect the country. With the grain ie of the people, the entire country has now begun to develop mechanized production. For such a vastnd, it can be used as the granary of the entire Tru Empire in the future."


    Changnuo said.


    "I understand, there isn''t much going on in the Tru Empire now. In two months, I''ll decide to go to Sky Ind to increase the training level of those soldiers!"


    Yixiao''s right hand touched the handle of the knife twice, and then said leisurely.


    "Okay, but there is one more thing you need to do when the timees. There is a devil fruit on the sky ind, a natural thunder fruit. When you arrive, give this thing to Eniro and start assisting him in training. Two yearster I hope to see a guy who can hold up a world!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    So far, he has not changed too many of the original rules of the pirate world, but this thunder fruit seems to have a great fate with Enel in every aspect, and this thing is very important to Enel. , can also provide him with great help.


    "I will do it. I have already guessed His Majesty the King''s n before. It seems that you have been honing the little guy''s character and basic strength before, but now you can indeed achieve this level! "


    Yixiao said with the same smile.


    In just two months, the five countries surrounding the Tru Empire have all been merged into the Tru Empire. In such a short period of time, the originalnd area of ??the Tru Empire has now increased by nearly four. Times, it haspletely be thergest empire in the South China Sea.


    The reason why Abona and the others were asked to block the admiral''s progress was to prevent this group of people from reaching the Kingdom of Crimea. This country is still considered a member of the World Government, and they had nned to use this country before. They began to contain the Tru Empire, but no one expected that the civil war in a country could be ended within a month.


    It''s normal to think about it. The living conditions that the Tru Empire has given to today''s people have long been the envy of the people in neighboring countries, not to mention that they now have the opportunity to join this country and enjoy the life experience of their country''s citizens, and they can Living in a ce where there were no pirates at all, and where no one died of starvation, attracted not only ordinary people, but also young people who were bing soldiers in this country.


    There is no one who does not want to yearn for a better life, and no one wants to live endlessly in this deprived world. So all they can do now is to gather together and be a pile of dry firewood. After others throw torches over, this group of ordinary people can also light up a world.


    Although the Kingdom of Crimea is stronger than several other countries, the exploitation over the years haspletely reduced the credibility of their government. Those who are capable or powerful are those in power who are involved in depriving ordinary people of their lives. , have all been eliminated by the assassins sent by the Tru Empire. As the wave of resistance grows stronger, the weapons provided by the Tru Empire have fully demonstrated their value.


    Among these countries, the Tru Empire has arranged for reporters from every newspaper to go there, not only to record the lives of the people living here, but more importantly, to record the resistance process of these people, with the purpose of leaving a significant mark. Evidence, so that everyone will not me the Tru Empire for the root of their rebellion.

 Chapter 228 Interception of Navy Ships

    <h4>Chapter 228 Interception of Navy Ships</h4>


    So now, in just two months, the regimes of the five surrounding countries have all been overthrown, and they are still in a state of being overthrown by the people of their own country.


    When this happens, even the world government has no right to interfere in the internal affairs of a certain country, and they voluntarily proposed a merger agreement with the Tru Empire, lifting their original state status andpletely merging it into the Tru Empire.


    However, the urrence of such things has not led to any economic decline in the Tru Empire so far. Even because of the annexation of arge amount ofnd area and the influx of arge number of people, the business development of the Tru Empire has suddenly resumed. Take off again.


    Today''s national finances support the lives of the citizens of these original countries. It is no longer a problem. Even relying solely on domestic industry andmerce is enough to maintain the national economic level of the entire country and reach a rtively high level in the world. of a level.


    But this is just the beginning!


    At this moment above the South China Sea.


    Abona and Junhe each stood on the deck of a giant steel ship, heading in the same direction together. Behind them were nearly ten warships. These were all sailing warships about the same size as the navy. , all made of wood, and the periphery along the edge of the hull is also covered with gun ports.


    It''s just that the two steel battleships use engines for continuous rotation and propeller propulsion, which puts him far ahead of the ships behind them.


    The purpose of what they wanted to do this time was to intercept the two shipsing from the Navy Headquarters. Everyone had already thought that these two ships were definitelying for the Kingdom of Crimea, and the surrender of the other country had beenpletely blocked. It messed up the navy''s justpleted deployment, so now it costs so much to send a navy general here.


    The situation in the South China Sea is now enough to give them a headache. The purpose of once again recruiting the Tru Empire to join the World Government is to prioritize easing the situation on the Tru Empire''s side.


    But alleviation is alleviation. The Tru Empire had already guessed their thoughts, so they sent these two people with their troops to stop the naval admiral who came to support the Kingdom of Crimea.


    Standing on the deck of the bow of the ship, Abona was vignt and kept using his knowledge and knowledge to sense the position of the two navy ships. In this vast sea, although he already knew the direction of the two ships, if it really happened It is really not an easy task to find it.


    Therefore, for this reason, Abona can only activate the full sense of domineering.


    "Admiral Abona, should we slow down our sailing speed first? The fleet behind us has not caught up yet!"


    In the process of sensing, an adjutant walked behind Abona and asked him respectfully.


    "No, continue sailing at full speed. We haven''t found the other party yet. Inform them to sail towards the border of the Crimean waters. At that time, no matter what, they must stop these two naval ships in the waters of the Crimea country. outside!"


    Abona said seriously.


    "Yes, General."


    After the adjutant received the order, he immediately took the next step.


    As for the fleets at the rear who had received orders, they collectively began to turn the rudder in another direction, leaving only the two ships of Abona and Junhe to continue sailing.


    At present, no one among them is sure who the admiral is. In addition to the above orders, the two of them must directly block it at all costs, at least they must let the navy stop them within the agreed time. Ships cannot enter any part of Crimea.


    Two hourster.


    This can be considered to be before dark, the sun has quietly set, and you can still see something hazy above the sea.


    But in a certain area of ????the sea, two naval warships were sailing leisurely. At this time, the sentry responsible for observation suddenly whistled below and shouted, "There are two huge ships directly ahead, everyone be on guard!!" "


    The words of the observation sentry instantly caused a sensation on the entire ship. Everyone immediately enteredbat mode. Then many people began to gather on the deck. Some of them were still holding binocrs in their hands and looking ahead. Case.


    In addition, some soldiers began to run towards the inside and shouted, "General Sakaski, the two ships directly in front are heading towards us quickly. It is too dark to observe the situation of each other, but it can be roughly identified as The giant steel ship of the Tru Empire!��


    This thing is so recognizable. The deck on the head is almost a sharp triangle, and there is an almost 10-meter-long steel thorn extending from the front end. This thing is only used to receive wireless signals. In fact, it does not Too much attack power.


    But precisely because of this, the giant steel ships of the Tru Empire are clearly identifiable.


    In the navy battleship room, the serious person sitting there at the moment is the navy admiral Akainu. No one probably expected that the navy would send this guy here!


    "What''s there to panic about? I want to see what those guys want to do?"


    Sakaski stood up with a fierce look on his face. After all, he has not been exposed to any situation in the Tru Empire so far. Even the four emperors of the New World and any group of forces he has had conflicts with. The only one is The Tru Empire, which had been on par with the Four Emperors a few months ago, had a rare chance to see what the other party''s qualifications were.


    Walking to the deck, Sakaski quietly looked at the ck shadow in the distance. The people who were originally standing on the deck were now at least 1 meter away from him, mainly because the general''s momentum was too high, and No one wants to get too close to him.


    Perhaps because the two teams were too far away, they could only see a blurry ck shadow. By observing the outline through the telescope, they could indeed tell that it was the steel giant ship of the Tru Empire, and it was heading towards where they were. direction to sail over.


    Sakaski did not have such a good temper. At this moment, his body was already flowing withva. After the soldiers around him saw it, they hurriedly moved further away.


    The magma is not only flowing, but also dripping drop by drop towards the deck. Every time it falls, a small ck smoke rises from the deck. This ship is made of wooden structure anyway. If it drips for a long time, it may not need anyone else to do it, then the ship can be set on fire by himself.


    "General, the other party hasn''t shown its intentions yet, so you can''t take action directly!"


    Behind Sakaski, a man also wearing a robe of justice said quickly when he saw this situation.

 Chapter 229 Confrontation with the Navy

    <h4>Chapter 229 Confrontation with the Navy</h4>


    The guy behind said a word, and instantly reminded Sakaski, who was standing in front and was preparing to attack, that this guy who can be an admiral is not without merit.


    "The South China Sea Tru Empire Navy Fleet is patrolling here, all ships should stop for inspection!"


    Before the two giant steel ships arrived, the huge loudspeaker on the top of the ship had already begun to sound, which could be regarded as a disguised warning to the other party.


    Even when they were about three to five hundred meters away, the huge top-level searchlight began to shine over them. Such a strong light could almost illuminate the entire sea area as bright as day.


    The powerful light instantly blinded the people on the two naval battleships. Sakaski on the deck suppressed the anger in his heart. Now it is estimated that if someone behind him hadn''t reminded him, he would have fired by now. The attack had already been directed towards the opponent.


    "The South China Sea Tru Empire Navy Fleet is patrolling here, all ships should stop for inspection!"


    The battleship where Abona was on made a loud noise again. How could they not know who the other party was?


    This kind of thing is obviously impossible. No matter what the reason is, in the next time, they will at least control this group of people in this sea area until noon the next day.


    By then, after the Crimean Kingdom and the Tru Empire sign a merger agreement, even if this group of people arrives, they will have no effect!


    "All personnel are on alert. If their two ships make any movement, fire directly at me!"


    Sakaski shouted angrily to the adjutant behind him.


    "General Sakaski, the Warring States Marshal has reminded us before he came to try not to have any conflict with the Tru Empire. If you do this, it is likely to cause a war?" the adjutant behind him said again.


    "We are now in the South China Sea. I am the highestmander here. Marshal Warring States just said to try his best. He did not say that we cannot attack in dangerous situations. Now the other party has blocked our door. Please tell me what to do. ?��


    Akainu stared angrily at his adjutant, waiting for what he would say next. If he was not satisfied, a reprimand would definitely be necessary.


    The adjutant had no choice but to do what Sakaski said.


    "Everyone is ready for battle, waiting for the general''s order, ready to attack at any time!"


    The adjutant began to give instructions to the people behind him, and everyone entered a state ofbat readiness.


    However, his ship was the only one that entered the attack state. As for the other navy warship, it was still in its original state, but the person sitting on it was an old acquaintance of Chang Nuo.


    It is estimated that they themselves did not expect that as the most powerful Vice Admiral in the Navy, Garp would not take his own battleship, but also followed here!


    They could all hear the shouts from the battleship next door where Sakaski was on the ship, and even some soldiers on the ship had begun to prepare for battle.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, should we also enter a state ofbat readiness?"


    The speaker was a beautiful woman. She looked about eighteen or neen years old. She was very slender. She was also wearing a navy robe of justice. She had a knife hanging on her waist. She had a ponytail and was wearing red clothes. , at least in terms of appearance, she is definitely a beauty.


    "Taotu, why are you so anxious about this? Just drink tea here. They can''t fight. The Tru Empire is probably blocking our progress. Even if we pass this level now, there will be others next. Trouble awaits us!"


    Garp was talking as he ate, not taking the situation outside seriously at all.


    "Why are they blocking us?" Peach Rabbit asked.


    "You ask me how I know? It probably has something to do with the civil war in the Kingdom of Crimea. Why don''t we just sit down and eat a little together and leave the rest to Sakaski?"


    Garp raised his head slightly and said disapprovingly.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, Lieutenant General He asked you toe here instead of her, didn''t you want to be so leisurely?" Taotu said helplessly.


    After all, people are already beside me now, and they are still blocking the tasks of people like me, but as the most powerful person, he doesn''t have any opinion on this kind of thing?


    "Taotu! What do you think we can do without eating? Is it possible to go up and fight with others? You have thought too much about this kind of thing. Is it possible that the other party doesn''t know who we are? We can also send two warships Coming here has already shown that the other party did it intentionally. We still don��t know who the leader of the other party is, so there is no need to draw conclusions so early." Karp said.


    "What about our mission?" Peach Rabbit asked.


    "Mission? The main purpose of Sengoku asking us toe here is to show it to the other World Government member countries. At least it proves that our navy is still more concerned about the affairs of the member countries. But if it really can''t get through, at least we can still have a reason. !" Karp said.


    "Forget it, let it be what you love!"


    As Gion spoke, he also sat down, then picked up the fruits and biscuits ced on the table and ate them.


    Everyone above is like this, how can she do this?


    However, the other ship was still confronting each other at this moment. As it slowly began to approach, the size of the two giant steel ships was fully disyed in everyone''s eyes.


    And they are always on alert, with all attack attributes already enhanced. As long as the other party may make any attack, these people will sink these two naval warships to the bottom of the sea without mercy!


    As the sky gets darker and darker, except for things within the range of the light, almost everything else can no longer be seen clearly. Sakaski is still standing on the deck, quietly looking at the two steel battleships that are getting closer and closer. .


    When the two parties were indeed close enough, the searchlights on the two battleships were instantly extinguished, and a general of the Tru Empire stood on the deck of each battleship. This formation not only did not intimidate those who were watching all this. Sakaski even made him look a little excited!


    "True Imperial Navy battleship, we are the headquarters of the Navy''s Admiral Sakaski. If there are no problems, please evacuate quickly and do not dy our official duties in the South China Sea!"


    On the ship where Sakaski was on, the adjutant also started shouting back with a loudspeaker.


    Anyway, at this moment, even if the situation is tense, no one will take the lead.

 Chapter 230 Another purpose?

    <h4>Chapter 230 Another purpose?</h4>


    With the help of the weak light, the two parties can still see each other''s faces. After all, the distance between the ships on both sides is only about 50 meters at the moment. Such close contact is difficult for such arge ship to pay attention to. A collision may ur.


    But the giant steel ship of the Tru Empire has no worries about being hit by a wooden ship. It should be worried about the other party''s.


    It is precisely because of this that Admiral Sakaski''s expression is as ufortable as eating shit. He can''t hit the opponent, and it''s boring to scold him. He can only stand up and ept other people''s inspections. This kind of situation can''t be said anywhere in the world. Even in the new world, we have never encountered such a situation.


    "I''m sorry everyone, the Trudeau Empire Navy patrols the South China Sea freely, and all ships need to be inspected, including you!"


    Abona stood at the bow of the ship, smiled and shouted in the direction of Sakaski.


    At such a close distance, there is no need to use a microphone or speaker at all. On this calm sea, there is no need to be so formal about what can be done by just moving your voice.


    "We are a general warship of the Navy Headquarters. The South China Sea Empire has no right to conduct any inspections. Get out of the way quickly and don''t dy the Navy''s mission."


    The adjutant next to Sakaski once again shouted directly.


    "We have encountered what you said a few days ago. They also said that they were warships from the Navy Headquarters, but in the end they turned out to be a ship of pirates. That''s why we checked like this. I hope Can you all cooperate!"


    This time there was no need for Abona to open his mouth to shout, a guy next to him had already said it seriously.


    During this period of time, for the people on the Tru Empire side, they were in no hurry. They could dy it for a while, but they couldn''t wait to think of other solutions.


    Anyway, you don��t have to bear any consequences when ites to quarrels. At worst, you can just apologize openly in the end. The most important thing is that this method is more time-consuming and canplete the task. It is simply the best of both worlds.


    But Sakaski didn''t seem to have that much patience, and kept his eyes serious on the other''s two boats from head to toe. When Abona and Junhe showed up, he had already recognized each other''s identities.


    After all, at this moment, the photos of the people above Lieutenant General Toru are still hanging in the office of the Navy Headquarters.


    Although they already have information about these people, there is nothing that can be clearly investigated about the strength of these people. After all, so far, they can only record the strength of General Yixiao of the Tru Empire, and the others It''s just a mystery so far, but being able to keep pace with General Yixiao is enough to prove that the opponent''s strength is not much weaker.


    Especially when two generals of the Tru Empire appeared together at this moment, one can imagine the pressure on the navy.


    On another naval battleship, Garp sat on a chair on the deck, leaning there quietly, as if watching a show, not worried at all about the confrontation between the two parties.


    But Taotu, who was also standing next to him, had a look of doubt on her face and asked iprehensively, "Lieutenant General Garp, the other party actually has two generals here. Should we get involved?"


    "Participate? No need, our side has been locked by the opponent for a long time. Just stay here and let Akainu deal with it alone." Garp said leisurely.


    "locking??"


    Taotu was even more confused and even a little anxious.


    The navy headquarters battleship was intercepted. This kind of thing had never been heard of since she joined the navy, but this time it could make an admiral and the strongest person in the navy feel helpless. It was really unbelievable.


    "This country is now incredibly powerful, but they seem to have suddenly be stronger. There are many things that need to be investigated, so at this time, there is absolutely no need to have any conflict with the other party!"


    Karp said.


    "Then no one is investigating?"


    "I really don''t know how He guided you? Do you think the Navy and the World Government haven''t thought about the things you thought about? The World Government had already noticed that something was wrong with this country a year ago, but until now, what No useful information has been found, and there is no information on how their giant steel ship was built."


    After listening to Peach Rabbit''s mindless words, Garp said with a speechless and helpless expression.


    "Don''t they know?" Gion said a little aggrievedly, but then he started to say, "Why are you always investigating other people? Wouldn''t it be better to just investigate the King of the Toru Empire?"


    From Gion''s point of view, it is indeed understandable to be able to say such a thing, but the key is that the issues he considers are always from his point of view.


    Garp suddenly nced curiously at the woman standing next to him, then startedughing, and said speechlessly, "In your eyes, do you think that the King of the Tru Empire should follow us?" Are all the other kings you see the same?"


    "Is not it?"


    Peach Rabbit asked in confusion.


    "If it were really that simple, then do you think that ording to the character of the World Government, this guy can survive until now? But not only is he living well now, but he has also developed his country from a barren area to what it is today. It only took six years for it to look like this. Do you know how long it took for the current world government to develop? It took almost 800 years. Have you ever thought about why?"


    Garp sighed.


    "Then they didn''t investigate the weakness of the King of the Toru Empire?" Taotu asked again.


    "About this King of the Toru Empire, Genji Nagano, senior people have discussed it many times. So far, we have never seen the other party take action, but there is no doubt that the other party is definitely stronger than you think. Too many, he is simr in age to you, but definitely above you in terms of strength.


    A smile that can win over even the navy can win him over as a general in his own country. Not to mention his extraordinary courage, but this courage to recognize people has surpassed the existence of too many people.


    You haven''t deliberately understood this guy. In the beginning, the Tru Empire was just a small, barren and weak country. But if you look at what it looks like now, which country can bypass the other country? "

 Chapter 231 A quarrel between the two parties

    <h4>Chapter 231 A quarrel between the two parties</h4>


    Garp said calmly that he and Chang Nuo had only met once, but the calmness that emerged from the other party surprised him at the time.


    Thinking back to the past, Garp paused for a moment. Then when he came back to his senses, he looked at Peach Rabbit and continued, "We visited this country many times back then. And there are many navies who are very interested in this country." impression.


    At that time, the Tru Empire was almost the same as other countries. Many people lived a life of hunger and barely had any decent clothes, let alone any fishing boats on the coast.


    In such a country, even pirates cannot be born. This is only a scene of about ten years.


    Six years ago, the Tru Empire weed a new king, the current one. The moment he became the king, he had already defied all opinions and directly changed the country''s existing development method with a tough attitude, using all his strength to To rewrite the history of the Toru Empire using methods that no one can imagine.


    It''s just that not many people paid attention to all this. It wasn''t until the war between the Tru Empire and the Royal Kingdom three years ago that they gradually entered the navy''s field of vision, mainly because of one thing that made everyone A situation that no one expected has appeared in this country. "


    "You''re talking about the Sixth Form of the Navy, right?" Gion suddenly interrupted.


    Because she didn''t know anything else, she still had some impression of this aspect.


    "Yes, it was because of this matter, because in the navy at that time, there were not many people who mastered these six-style skills, but in the Tru Empire, there were already many people who could master one or more of the six-style naval skills. Used in various ways.


    It is precisely because of this that the Navy has begun investigating this country three years ago, and the World Government has also participated in it. It can be said that all the situations in this country are already well known to everyone, but why is it so strict? Under the supervision of the Communist Party of China, this country was still able to emerge a few months ago!


    Not only does it have a powerful army, but more importantly, it also has a powerful fleet. Such a state has really shocked the world government and navy. "


    Peach Rabbit stood next to Garp and listened to what he said. For this big girl, she could indeed hear some things about the Tru Empire, but mostly just because of buying products from this country. She had never heard anything about it. I never thought that this country could hide so many things. It went from being a poverty-stricken country to an existence that is now feared by the navy and world governments.


    She had never thought that one person could develop a ce to such an extent, but she was also curious, what did this man who could develop a country to such an extent look like?


    But thinking about it, Taotu suddenly asked, "Lieutenant General Garp, I remember you said at the beginning that we couldn''t reach the mission execution ce at all. What is going on?"


    "Don''t you see? They have been quarreling now, and the other party has not made any substantive inspection, nor any other unnecessary actions. It is obvious that it is just to block time. Behind this, there must be something happening that we don''t know about. .��


    Garp adjusted his chair to a lying position and looked at the stars in the sky nonchntly.


    "Then you''re not worried about them fighting?"


    "You can''t fight. Although Sakaski has a bad temper, he can still distinguish the serious from the serious in this ce. The Tru Empire is different from the pirates we have encountered. The people in them are very smart. No matter what they do, Nothing can arouse criticism from others, as if everything is done naturally and naturally.��


    Garp slowly closed his eyes. He no longer wanted to listen to the quarrels between those people.


    Because everyone on the two ships was ming each other at this moment, but there was no substantive action.


    Although Admiral Sakaski has a hot temper, he is not mentally retarded. He has already understood the tricks yed by the other party. He was angry for a while at first, but now he has returned to the cabin to have a good rest. .


    The same is true for the Tru Empire. There is a delicate bnce between the four ships on the two sides, and no one will take a step forward or backward.


    But at the same time, although there may not be a war, all preparations must still be done.


    The dozen or so warships that had originally deviated from their course to the Crimean waters were now quietly approaching them under the cover of night.


    In the blink of an eye, the night passed quietly.


    At the moment when the sky was slightly bright, the two parties had already seen each other, but what could they do now? But there were only two people standing on the deck, looking at each other. The rest of the people were lying upright on the deck and sleeping.


    The two parties had been scolding each other all night, and were already exhausted by now. Moreover, they blocked the two ships and parked them here for the night as they wished.


    In fact, for the navy''s fleet, it really doesn''t matter whether they sail or not. The most difficult thing to stop is probably after dawn.


    Everyone is well aware of this, so as the sky was slightly brighter, Abona and Junhe were already sitting together. In the cabin, in front of them there was a pile of about the same diameter. A disy screen of about 50 centimeters can also obtain some domestic information at the fastest speed through wireless transmission.


    The group of people from the Kingdom of Crimea who submitted the agreement have already started to set off. As long as they block the whole morning, it means they are done.


    By that time, there will no longer be a Kingdom of Crimea in the world, and all that will remain is the Crimea region of the Tru Empire!


    So when it waspletely light, the people on both sides stood on the deck again. At this moment, Sakaski no longer maintained the calmness of the previous night.


    Because just now, he had received a call from the Navy Headquarters, requiring him to reach the Kingdom of Crimea within the morning, and he could use any method!


    At least after getting the reply from his superiors, Akainu still had some confidence.


    But it was only one night, and at this moment, the sea waspletely different from what he knewst night.


    Because at this moment, in the sight of all of them, a row of Trudeau Imperial Navy patrol battleships had appeared in everyone''s sight.

 Chapter 232 Deterrence

    <h4>Chapter 232 Deterrence</h4>


    Sakaski, who was already full of anger, could only suppress his inner anger after seeing this scene.


    The number of assembly personnel on the opponent''s navy warships is almost the same as the staffing on our own side. The overall configuration of the ten Tru Empire navy warships has even vaguely surpassed the level of the Demon yer Order on the navy''s side.


    With a size of nearly 5,000 people, these two naval warships canpletely cause a direct and devastating blow. Not to mention that there are admirals on this ship, even Garp, who has the most powerful navy, is of no use.


    The other party is not an ordinary person, and there are also two generals of the Tru Empire standing here. Even though their strength is slightly insufficientpared to the topbat power of our own side, they can''t stand up to therge number of people on the other side!


    "What exactly do you want?"


    Sakaski suppressed the anger in his heart and looked at Abona standing on the opponent''s deck and asked.


    But Abona was not in a hurry to reply to his words. Instead, he slowly raised his right hand.


    At the same time as he raised his hand, the guns of all Tru Empire ships werepletely aimed at these two naval warships, especially the two giant steel ships standing under their feet, located on the front deck. The two huge cannon muzzles werepletely aimed at them.


    After everything was prepared, Abona said leisurely with a slight smile, "General Akainu, we have no other intentions. We just need a routine inspection. The most important thing is that the Tohru Empire is ahead. There are military exercises going on in the sea area, and all ships in the South China Sea are not allowed to approach!"


    This kind of words was what Chang Nuo had just informed them about in the morning, and with this kind of words, dying it all morning would definitely not be a problem.


    When Sakaski heard this, his outer body couldn''t bear the anger inside. He clenched his fists, but magma was still dripping from his fingertips.


    This scene cannot be hidden from anyone, especially in broad daylight. Even if they are 50 meters apart, everyone can see them clearly and are even ready for battle. As long as Sakas If General Ji makes any unusual move, the Tru Empire will directly fire back without mercy.


    "General Akainu, the Toru Empire''s military exercises will continue until about 12 noon. At that time, you can do whatever tasks you want toplete. If the situation is more urgent, please inform us. In the South China Sea area, especially The soldiers of the Lu Empire are willing to help you aplish what you want to do."


    Shun Kazu also stood on the deck and began to speak to the angry Sakaski.


    "Wow haha... Where is that guy from Yixiao? Why didn''t he show up?"


    While the two parties were stillmunicating, Garp walked out with a sleepy look on his face. He didn''t even have the buttons on his body fully buttoned. He walked directly to the deck and started shouting to Junhe from the Tru Empire.


    Yesterday, because the sky was rtively dark, Abona did not pay too much attention to who was on the other boat, but when he heard this voice and saw this face, his expression was already quite serious. Surprised, I didn''t even think about it, that I would see each other again in this situation.


    However, Garp was in the same state. When he turned to look at Abona, his eyes seemed to be filled with unspeakable words.


    The first time I saw Abona''s photo was on the day when the Tru Empire established its navy a few months ago, Abona was sitting in the seat of the Tru Empire general.


    Garp never thought that his former acquaintance would actuallye to the Tohru Empire, and looking at his current changes, he really felt like he waspletely different from before.


    "It''s really surprising. I didn''t expect it to be Mr. Lieutenant General Garp. If His Majesty the King knew about this matter, he would definitely ask me to say hello to you!"


    Junhe said very respectfully and with a slight smile.


    Although the two of them had met each other several years ago, at least in his life, the one who heard the name of the strong man the most was Garp standing in front.


    And his namees from the mouth of His Majesty the King, the most powerful man in the naval era, Iron Fist Garp who can make all pirates fearful.


    "Wow haha~, you actually know me, so don''t stop us. Our navy still has tasks to do next, so don''t let both sides lose face!" Garp said.


    "I''m really sorry, Mr. Lieutenant General Garp. The Tru Empire is conducting arge-scale military exercise, which is expected tost until around noon. Please wait patiently here for a while. After it is over, I will personally inform you Apologize!" Junhe said while still maintaining a respectful manner.


    "Huh~" Garp sighed directly, with a very helpless expression. He couldn''t fight at this time, and he couldn''t talk to the other party. It would be okay if they had more people, but the key is that the two ships are really helpless. The kind that confronts the opponent.


    If the strength of the strong ones here could directly crush the opponent, all this would be easier to say, but they all know that in terms of strength, it is impossible to directly crush them, and more importantly, there must be strong ones waiting behind them. .


    For the Tru Empire, no matter how slow it is, one day is enough to get here, but their navy is different. If the war falls into a stalemate, it will bepletely disadvantageous for them, and if the new world knows that all over the world The earth is at war with the navy, and the stability of the new world that has been managed so hard to maintain will be disrupted by the situation again.


    "Kabaqiu, there seems to be something unknown hidden in the sea ahead. Fire a shot over there to see if there is anything unexpected?"


    Junhe stood on the deck and said leisurely to the adjutant behind him.


    "Yes, General Junhe."


    This was something that had been arranged a long time ago. After receiving the order, the giant steel ship they were on was originally facing the two navy ships. At this moment, it began to slowly rotate towards another distant sea surface. .


    "Bang~!!!"


    A huge sound sounded, and the waves were suddenly bombarded hundreds of meters high by this giant cannon. The attack range was also 1 kilometer away. Such a huge attack can be regarded as a deterrent to everyone in the navy, at least it can make this group of people clear. They knew that the Tru Empire was not as unbearable as they imagined.


    When Sakaski saw this scene, his face turned pale, but he could only show helplessness.


    If it weren''t for the fact that he was now in the South China Sea, Sakaski might not mind having a big battle with this group of people.

 Chapter 233 Garp’s Secret

    <h4>Chapter 233 Garp��s Secret</h4>


    Junhe didn''t say anything unnecessary, and directly showed them the power of the navy''s steel giant ship. This also warned these people that they were not allowed to leave any area of ????the sea area at least before noon.


    A naval admiral, the most powerful man in the navy, has been blocked here by people from a country so far. It would bepletely false to say that he is not angry.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, what should we do now?"


    Peach Rabbity on the railing and turned to look at Garp who was lying there with a look of urgency.


    "s~!"


    Garp sighed, then slowly sat up, staring at Abona helplessly.


    "Don''t do anything here. They are different from pirates and people from other countries. If there is any attack, these people are likely to start a war directly. I will go there first!"


    Garp said helplessly, then suddenly jumped up and stepped in the air, running towards Abona''s position.


    After all the personnel of the Tru Empire saw this scene, they immediately became alert, and even the muzzles of the guns were all pointed in the direction of Garp.


    "Let down your guard!"


    Abona shouted directly.


    He knew that Garp didn''t intend to start a war when he came over, it was probably just for a chat.


    The moment he finished speaking, Garp had alreadynded on the deck of the giant steel ship at Abona''s feet.


    And stared at Abona with aplicated expression.


    "TH-2 retreats 500 meters, and all other fleets remain on alert!"


    Abona ordered and said to the adjutant next to him.


    After he said these words, with just a look, other people behind him had already moved a chair, because there was already one here, and the chair that was moved was obviously for Garp to sit on.


    After Vice Admiral Karp came up, the security personnel on other decks consciously began to retreat to another direction.


    In fact, people on the Navy side are also very curious as to why their Vice Admiral ran to the other side''s ship. Not only did they not start a fight, but the other side actually ordered a retreat?


    But on the giant steel ship TH-2, Garp opened his mouth and didn''t know what to say, but finally asked, "How did you end up in the Tru Empire?"


    "There is nothing that cannot be run away. His Majesty the King saved me and gave me such an important responsibility. Staying here may be the best choice."


    Abona had no unnecessary expression and looked very calm when he said these words.


    "Why don''t you wait a little longer? I have alreadymunicated with the Tianlong people and I will pick you up in a few days..."


    "Are you talking about entering the Impel Down City? Then can you think of a way to get me out? Don''t be kidding me. I am a pirate and you are a navy. If you had this ability, the eldest sister would not have been so far. Being trapped in that small ce and unwilling to take a step all his life, your son wouldn��t still know who his mother is!��


    Abona said with a sneer on his face, without giving the other party a chance to say what he said.


    In fact, for Garp, he also had a bitter look on his face. Taking Abona out of the hands of the Celestial Dragons was what he was already doing. As long as he sent it into Impel Down City, there was no guarantee that he would be able to do anything else. Let him live the rest of his life there without any torture.


    But it''s toote to say anything now!


    "Did you kill the Tianlong people?"


    Garp asked suddenly, but his tone was not angry, but he was just a Celestial Dragon, and if he died, he would die.


    Abona didn''t want to say anything more, especially when he recalled the scene of that night, it was almost likest night.


    Seeing Abona deep in thought and not speaking, Garp asked again, "What is the situation in the Tru Empire? Why do so many strong men suddenly appear? Do you have a special military base for training?" These people? And what kind of strength is Genji Changno?"


    This time, Garp came not only to chat about old friendships, but more importantly, to explore the strength of the Tru Empire. The family rtionship between the two is no longer easy to resolve. After all, the gap between them is still there. Garp is not interested in this. This thing is even more helpless.


    "Ah?"


    Abona sneered again, his eyes full of disdain and said, "Don''t ask about the Tru Empire. Even if I tell you, what will happen? The Tru Empire does have military bases. But it is impossible for any of you to guess where this ce is? It is even more impossible to find it. It is a ce that no one in the world has thought of.


    The other thing is the strength of His Majesty the King. You have never seen him take action, and neither have I. As for the extent of his strength, who can guess such a thing? "


    "Abona, have you ever thought abouting to the Navy again? I will definitely give you the position of Lieutenant General. Why do you want to get involved in the affairs of the South China Sea?" Garp said earnestly.


    The main reason is because he believes that the Tohru Empire''s thoughts are definitely not as simple as they appear on the surface. Whether it is from a military ormercial perspective,bined with the current actions of the other party, it is definitely not as easy to satisfy as seen in the eyes.


    Almost every move of this country today is well known by the Navy. In addition to not knowing their core military secrets, they also have no idea about the future direction and mentality development of this country. The navy has already made preliminary spection and nning.


    Otherwise, the navy admiral would not be sent to the South China Sea to support the Kingdom of Crimea this time.


    In Garp''s understanding, he felt that in the future, whether it was the World Government or the Navy, they would definitely go to war with the Tru Empire. It was just a matter of time.


    Abona took a deep breath and said, "The Tru Empire is much better than you imagined, but you have never looked at this country seriously. If you can, I suggest you take some time back and don''t treat yourself as a naval officer." Coming here as a general can also give you a real feel for the current state of the country. As for the navy you mentioned, I think it is better to forget it. It is a ce without any human touch at all. It is better to stay in this country and do Something you can do.��


    "It''s all up to you! I really don''t want to see that one day in the future we will be on opposite sides." Garp shook his head slightly and said.


    "If you have such thoughts, you might as well take care of your son. He is now the leader of the Revolutionary Army. The World Government and the Navy must have started to pay attention to it a long time ago, right? You are already on opposite sides. I really don''t know the future. What will you do when faced with it?" Abona said with a slight smile.

 Chapter 234 Heading to the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 234 Heading to the Tru Empire</h4>


    Garp, who was directly criticized by Abona, didn''t know what to say better.


    Where is the time now to teach others a lesson? His son has be the first person in this world to fight against the World Government and the Navy, which can be regarded as a hidden thorn in his heart.


    For a long time, Garp didn''t know how to face or speak, so he could only stand up silently and said with some frustration, "Go back! Although I don''t know what the hell your Tru Empire is doing? But I hope we won��t do anything to embarrass each other in the future.��


    "Don''t worry, old man!"


    Abona said with a smile.


    After the two parties were safe, they quietly maintained the status quo. The two naval warships could only choose to dock here, but everyone could guess what the other side would do when they started to release the ship. The matter has been done long ago, why do we need to wait for people like myself to deal with it?


    It''s not that the navy is timid, the most important thing is that it can''t go to war with it now. No one has figured out the specific situation of the Tru Empire. Do they still have hidden strength? No one knows this. The chaos on the sea has finally calmed down. Once the navy or the world government starts a fight with the Tru Empire, no one will be left alone in the future. I''m afraid those guys should be active again one by one.


    When the two sides were in a stalemate until noon, the warships on the Tru Empire side began to slowly retreat, without saying hello to the people on the navy at all. All the fleets began to turn around, leaving only two lonely navy warships docked here. .


    "General Sakaski, are we still going to the Kingdom of Crimea?"


    On the naval battleship, an officer next to Sakaski watched them leave and asked Sakaski, who was sitting there without saying a word.


    "Why go there? Everyone has already left, which definitely proves that the Kingdom of Crimea probably no longer exists. What''s the use of going there now?"


    Sakaski said angrily.


    "Then...should we turn around and go back?"


    The man asked again, but his voice was already a little cautious.


    "Huh~"


    Sakaski sighed angrily, but before he could say anything, Garp from the other ship shouted directly to them, "Do you want to go back first, ore with us to the Tru Empire?" Take a walk?"


    "Lieutenant General Garp, what time is it now, do you still want to visit the Tru Empire?"


    Sakaski stood up angrily and stared at Garp.


    But his anger was not directed at the other party, but was angry that nothing had been done this time. Furthermore, in terms of status, although Sakaski was a general,pared to Garp''s identity and status , I''m afraid there is still a big difference.


    "Wow haha~, Sakaski, why are you so angry about this incident? Don''t you want to see what the Tru Empire has be now?" Garp said.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, do we really want to visit the Natru Empire?"


    Hearing the shouting, Taotu asked expectantly.


    "It''s not that far anyway. We''re not pirates. This country probably won''t refuse us to go. We just went there for a stroll. We''ve been at sea for so many days. It would be good to go down and replenish supplies. "Kapu said with a smile.


    "Really? I heard that there are many good things in the Toru Empire. Then I can go shopping!" Taotu said excitedly.


    Anyway, the two ships have already begun to follow behind the Tru Empire warships. It only takes one day to reach the Tru Empire from here. It will be dark at most when they arrive. Anyway, since they have already arrived. When youe here, you naturally need to take a good look at this ce that even the giants of the New World are curious about.


    As a naval admiral, Sakaski convinced himself that he should go and investigate what was going on in this country, but in fact it was just his inner reluctance that made him choose to go with Garp.


    Although he was powerful, he could not control his inner thoughts. After all, the Tohru Empire was different from the Four Pirate Emperors. Evening here would not affect anything. Anyway, he could just go back and find a reason to get over.


    In addition, the Toru Empire is amercial city, and most of the things they use and entertaine from this country. It is no exaggeration to say that the Toru Empire has gradually taken control of the entire pirate world. Nearly 10% of capital flows.


    Evening time.


    It waspletely dark, but the port was still as bright as day.


    The docking of the two navy warships did not attract anyone''s attention. Even the merchant ships that came together, no one paid attention to them.


    After all, in the South China Sea, the safest ce for merchants is the patrol fleet belonging to the Tru Empire. This is the fundamental reason why there is no sign of pirates in the entire South China Sea.


    After the two naval warships docked, there were not many people who disembarked. They were just some officers on the ship who followed them away.


    The remaining people continue to stay on the ship. The way Nanniwa Port is built at this moment, it is not an exaggeration to say that it is the most prosperous port in the world.


    As soon as they got off the boat, a group of people were already a little stunned. The country in front of them had developed to a point where they had to be surprised.


    After disembarking, there is only one road that can lead to the inside, and from here, you can only enter the Tru Empire through the State Hall.


    There are hundreds of single-passage passages, and there are two staff members standing in front of each passage. But by night, at least nearly half of the passages have been closed to traffic.


    Garp walked in the front, Peach Rabbit followed closely behind, and was still looking at the surrounding situation.


    As they entered the gate that only allowed one person to pass at a time, the personnel from the Tru Empire smiled and said to Garp, "Hello, distinguished Mr. Navy, you need to wear Tru Di to enter the Tru Empire." A specially-used bracelet will not have any impact on you, but for Devil Fruit users, it only limits the ability of the other party, so please cooperate with me."


    As she said that, the beautiful staff member standing here took out a simr ck bracelet, but this thing was not particrly big. In terms of the exquisiteness of its production, it was still a rare thing.

 Chapter 235 Suppression Bracelet

    <h4>Chapter 235 Suppression Bracelet</h4>


    But there are simply too many of these things in the Tru Empire. Every businessmaning in or traveling from other countries must wear this bracelet when entering the country.


    Garp nced at the other party and asked with some confusion, "Do all outsiders entering the Tru Empire have to wear this thing?"


    "Yes, Mr. Marine, this is a mandatory requirement of our country. It is to prevent people with Devil Fruit abilities from causing harm to this country. And after carrying this thing, you can freely enter and leave public ces in the Rentru Empire. And it will not be blocked." The beauty staff said again.


    "Haha~, then take it with you. It''s already getting sote. Is there any ce we can arrange a ce to stay?" Garp asked.


    "Mr. Navy, the tallest building next to us is a hotel. After you put on the bracelet, you can go and stay on your own!"


    After hearing what the staff said, Garp didn''t dwell on it anymore. He just looked at the hall carefully. It was just a passage.


    But the entry and exit management in this country is so strict, and there are indeed some things that they have not thought of.


    Garp stretched out his hand and let the other person put the bracelet on his hand, but this thing did not make him feel any difort. On the other hand, it was no different whether it had or not.


    But now that he has brought them all, the people behind him naturally have no reason to refuse.


    There were several Devil Fruit ability users apanying them, and they were quite surprised when they brought them along.


    "This thing can actually suppress Devil Fruit abilities without affecting people''s normal behavior?"


    Sakaski didn''t know what to say at this moment. How could the other party''s technology reach such a level?


    "It won''t affect you at all, so just leave quickly. It''s already so dark. Find a ce to have a good rest. We''ll talk about the rest tomorrow morning." Garp said as he walked ahead.


    Others did not pay too much attention to this kind of thing, but after they left the port hall, they began to feel gradually shocked by what they saw in front of them.


    In the world of One Piece, it is already sote at night, but so many people can still be densely packed on the streets. It is impossible to see such a lively ce in any other country.


    The overall modern buildings and high-rise buildings are all in front of you, and therge-scalemercialplex looks refreshing.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, is it so lively here?" Taotu said in disbelief.


    "It''s really lively!"


    There is no happy expression on Garp''s face at this moment, and the faces of the group of people following him are also extremely serious. Even Sakaski, a man, has already felt the influence of the Tru Empire from his life here. It is indeedpletely different from other countries.


    "Hello, distinguished naval lords, I am the receptionist at the Tru Empire Wee Hotel. You can call me Xiao Mo. By the order of the lord of the empire, your rooms have been prepared. You cane with me!"


    Just when they were still shocked by the current changes in the Tru Empire, a man wearing a suit and tie and a top hat looked very polite and spoke to them respectfully.


    "Which adult arranged it?"


    Karp asked.


    "I''m sorry, I can''t tell you about this, but the rooms have been prepared for you. If possible, I hope you cane with me!"


    The waiter said respectfully.


    "General Sakaski, is there a conspiracy in this?"


    The adjutant asked, looking at Akainu.


    "There''s nothing to worry about, let''s go!"


    The first person to take the lead was actually not Garp, but Sakaski. Although he was also shocked by the changes in the Tru Empire, after all, when he came to this country, this ce looked like a barrennd. , let alone the people who can live a prosperous life, a ce where people often starve to death, suddenly bes like this, no matter who you are, you can feel shocked.


    The group of people arrived at the hotel, and the signboard at the door read "Tru Imperial Wee Hotel". This can be regarded as a proper national-level hospitality ce.


    But after walking in, they felt what luxury was. The decoration inside waspletely magnificent, and this building was all built by Devil Fruit users. The interior decoration was also extremely luxurious, and it was not particrly far from the port. At a far distance, it is also considered to be the tallest building in the entire Tru Empire.


    "Can I ask how much it costs to stay here for one night?" Taotu asked the waiter curiously.


    "It''s 150,000 beli every night here." The waiter said.


    "That''s okay. With so many people, 150,000 Baileys is not a lot!" Taotu said to himself after calcting.


    "Sorry, I probably didn''t make it clear. It''s 150,000 beli per person per night!" the waiter said again.


    "Are you sure you''re not joking?"


    Taotu waspletely shocked. It cost 150,000 beli to stay here for just one night. This thing could bepared with robbery.


    Others were more or less shocked. Taotu looked at the smile on the other person''s lips and curiously asked again, "How many people can stay in your hotel?"


    "So far, in addition to the specially reserved rooms, there are still 800 rooms in use, and the rooms you have here today were reserved in advance by the Emperor. Otherwise, I am afraid that by this time, there will be no more. Got it!" the waiter said.


    "Stop talking so much, arrange a dinner for us first, and then lead us to the room!" Sakaski said seriously.


    "Okay, Mr. Marine, please follow me!"


    The waiter said, directly making a gesture of invitation, and began to guide them in the direction.


    Here, it haspletely achieved a modern urban appearance. The whole hotel uses an elevator to rise, and the elevator space is almost the same size as a room, and the height is about 6 meters. Staying here will not make people feel ufortable. Any depression.


    The entire second floor of the hotel is a dining area. Here you can see extremely luxurious dining tables with delicacies already ced on them. Not only the exquisiteness makes people drool, but the smell also makes them sigh with emotion about this ce. How are the delicacies made?

 Chapter 236 The ability of the bracelet

    <h4>Chapter 236 The ability of the bracelet</h4>


    Let��s not talk about whether these people came here in vain this time. Just talking about what they learned was enough to shock them.


    After eating, these people determined their own rooms. Everyone had a separate room. But after they got the room card, almost everyone changed their clothes in unison, and then walked out of the hotel.


    No one will deliberately observe them here. As long as they don''t cause trouble here, nothing will happen naturally. The empire will not send special personnel to monitor them.


    Here, each of them has their own fun to watch. The one who is more out of the ordinary is probably the only woman here, Taotu. She seems to be quite curious about the impact of this modernmercial structure. Although she is a rear admiral, But Peach Rabbit still seemed to be full of curiosity about all this.


    She was walking alone on themercial street, constantly looking at everything around her, whether it was clothing stores or other things, always looking at it with curiosity.


    In this kind of ce where you can''t even see your fingers outside, the light in the Royal City is like daylight. Even against the light, the entire Royal City looks quite prosperous and lively.


    "I didn''t expect that this ce would change so much in just a few years? And when did the poption be sorge?"


    Garp was wearing a short-sleeved shirt, big slippers and shorts, walking on the street as if nothing had happened.


    He was not like a woman like Taotu, who just wanted to know what this country had be like, but he had to say that the scene in front of him really made him feel the difference in this ce.


    "Brother, it seems like you are a foreigner, right?"


    As soon as Garp finished what he said, a vendor next to him shouted curiously what he said.


    "What''s the difference between me and you?" Garp suddenly asked curiously.


    "It''s nothing different, it''s just a bracelet on your wrist. The person wearing this is either a businessman or an outsider!" the merchant said with a smile.


    "So that''s it?" Garp nced at the bracelet on his hand and said with a nonchnt smile.


    But then he looked at the merchants and asked curiously, "How do you collect taxes in this country when you do business here?"


    "Collecting taxes? There is no such thing. ording to His Majesty the King, our business is called petty bourgeoisie. As long as it does not affect the city''s appearance, we are allowed to operate at will and do not charge any taxes. However, management fees still need to be paid. Yes." The vendor said with a deeper smile.


    "Management fee? Isn''t this thing simr to taxes?" Garp said speechlessly.


    "Look at what you said, brother, we can earn more than 300,000 beli a month, but the stall management fee only needs to pay 1,000 beri every month. If this were left in other countries, 300,000 beri would be enough." 50,000 is already very impressive, and the most important thing is that His Majesty the King still sends people to train our technology, but there are some rtively mandatory requirements."


    The vendor paused here, but it directly aroused Garp''s interest.


    But in the expectant eyes of the other party, the vendor said again, "When doing business in the Royal City, especially snacks like we do, it is strictly forbidden to pollute the road in the Royal City. After you finish doing business, you must leave the ce where you are. You are not allowed to leave until the area is cleaned!��


    "So that''s what you''re talking about! But if you don''t pay taxes, how will he, the king, get the money?" Garp asked.


    "Money? You are looking down upon our Majesty the King. The Kingdom has a dedicated Ministry of Commerce. Their main role is to nmerce and build factories. Now all goods produced and exported abroad are state-owned. In such arge country, In the financial economy, His Majesty the King naturally looks down upon our small money." The vendor said with a smile.


    "It seems you know a lot about this country?"


    "Too many to count. I have lived in this country since I was a child, so I must know something about this ce." The vendor said.


    "Then you know what this country is like..."


    Before Garp finished speaking, the rubber-like bracelet in his hand began to glow red and began to tighten gradually.


    There was no need to wait for him to finish speaking. Garp had already realized that the bracelet on his hand was not as simple as he thought.


    I had never paid attention to this thing before, and just regarded it as a sign of outsiders, but I didn''t expect it to have such a function!


    "Let''s go, let''s go. Your wristband is already red. Don''t think about things you shouldn''t think about, and don''t ask things you shouldn''t ask. Our country is very friendly. I hope you can take a look at our country honestly. The development and excitement.��


    The vendor also saw the glowing red bracelet on the other person''s hand, and the next moment he already knew what it meant.


    After all, these people have been trained before taking up their posts, and they are also very clear about the function of the Toru Empire''s bracelets. Especially when they encounter people who have some bad intentions for the Toru Empire, the bracelets will automatically Sensing his thoughts and creating restraints and warnings.


    Garp did not continue to ask any more questions. Instead, he began to study the bracelet on his wrist carefully. However, after he tugged on it, he couldn''t help but frown.


    Because ording to his strength, he didn''t break this thing at once. Even if it was an iron chain or a steel lock, it would not be possible for this situation to happen.


    As he pulled hard, the bracelet on his wrist once again glowed red, and one direction of the bracelet began to sh with colorful lights. For those who came here for the first time, they had no idea. What does this thing mean?


    But while he was walking and studying, a group of about 20 policemen ran over at the fastest speed. Everyone immediately stopped Garp vigntly, as if the other party had done anything dangerous again. They will not hesitate to raise their guns to attack.


    "This gentleman, pleasee with us! You are now being investigated for violence involving the removal of identification bracelets, as well as inappropriate remarks!"


    A policeman standing in front, wearing a beret on his head, stared at Karp seriously and said.


    "Wow haha~, it''s all a misunderstanding. Please don''t mind. I just wanted to test the hardness of this bracelet, but I didn''t expect that it attracted you!" Garp said with an embarrassed smile.

 Chapter 237 Three Years Later

    <h4>Chapter 237 Three Years Later</h4>


    From the moment this group of people appeared, Garp already knew the function of the bracelet. This thing not only can limit people with devil fruit abilities, it can also limit an outsider''s attitude towards this country. More importantly, this I don��t know what kind of material the thing is made of, it is extremely hard, and even if you use brute force, it will attract the police.


    Looking at Garp''s smiling face, the dozen or so people who came over were also meticulous. After all, almost every time they met, they were people who said such things.


    "You don''t need to say these words now. We are just conducting a routine investigation. Could you pleasee with us?" said the policeman standing at the front.


    "I know your general Abona!"


    Garp was already a little unhappy. After all, these people were too high-minded and didn''t take his exnation seriously at all.


    "Then wait a moment!"


    The policeman at the front said, and then took out a phone bug from his arms. He didn''t know who to call anyway, but after chatting for a while, he quickly ran back and said seriously to Garp, "Forget it this time." But the bracelet in your hand is a sign of outsiders in this country. I hope you can take it seriously. This thing will not be damaged, but if you pull it with brute force, it will explode when it reaches the limit. Even if You are a rtively strong person, at least it is certain that you will definitely not be able to save this hand!"


    After the policeman finished speaking, he waved his hand and told everyone to start retreating.


    Garp stood there helplessly. He didn''t know that there were so many rules here. It felt like a living discrimination against outsiders.


    It was already so disappointing that he was not in the mood to go shopping anymore. Anyway, there wasn''t much meaning in shopping anymore.


    But the lively atmosphere on this main street will not stop just because someone is missing.


    This group of navy just rested here for a night and witnessed what the Tru Empire looks like today.


    At noon the next day, they had already hurried back to the ship. After starting the voyage, all the people who went to Tru Countryst night had gathered together.


    Garp was still the same, lying there eating snacks, not taking this group of people seriously at all, let alone his own image at the moment.


    Sakaski looked serious. He looked around at everyone and said, "Tell me about what you saw and heard yesterday?"


    "I think the Tru Empire is great. You don''t have to worry about anything dangerous happening on the street, and there are a lot of delicious and fun things to do!"


    Taotu said with some unfinished meaning.


    After a night of shopping, she didn''t know how many Baileys she had given away, but what she got in exchange was arge bag of things, and even when she came back, someone else helped carry them onto the boat.


    But after she finished speaking, no one paid attention to her. The deputy general sitting next to Sakaski thought for a moment and said, "We can''t find anything at all. As long as it exceeds a certain limit, it will be over in less than a while." If someonees over, they will not conflict with us, but we are prohibited from entering some other areas!"


    "It''s like this group of people can predict our location in advance. No matter how we go, we will be stopped by them in the end!"


    Others started to say the same thing.


    "Wow haha~, the problem was with your bracelet yesterday. I have also encountered this situation. I didn''t expect this country to have such thoughts. It is indeed quite good!"


    Garp, who was lying on the lounge chair,ughed.


    Perhaps thisughter was to cover up his embarrassmentst night. After all, it was the first time he encountered such a thing which made him speechless.


    Sakaski''s face was livid, and he himself did not get any valuable information. Although the bracelet can inhibit Devil Fruit abilities, it does not affect the other strengths of Devil Fruit users.


    But even so, Akainu also encountered a simr situation to them.


    After finally going to this country, everyone just took a look at the current changes in this country, but in the end no one got useful information. For this group of people who often hover on the edge of war, This trip did seem a bit frustrating.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, you will be responsible for the next report to Marshal Warring States. I don''t want to report such a shameful thing!" Sakaski said angrily.


    "This is your general''s business, I won''t care about it!" Garp said.


    "Hmph~"


    Akainu was stunned for a moment, feeling as if he had already guessed what Garp would say, but he still snorted and jumped back to his battleship.


    A naval admiral, a being with the most powerful navy, came to the South China Sea for a mission. He didn''t even see the appearance of the mission and had already started to rush back in despair. This kind of situation even in the new world, It''s impossible to appear, but he really did appear here.


    If they were in the new world, they could fight even if they met the Four Emperors, but this time they were facing a country. Without the forced order of the world government, if the navy casually attacked a country, it would be directly andpletely Affecting the future credibility of navies and world governments.


    It''s not that they don''t want to take action, but it''s just that if they take action, it will be of no use. No one dares to confirm what kind of ending it will end up with.


    But this incident has awakened them, at least letting these people know that the Tru Empire is not as weak as they thought.


    ����������������


    The boring time is always short-lived. Whether the navy stays here or leaves, the Tru Empire continues to develop as usual, without any changes or other circumstances due to anything.


    Time continues to change, but nothing can stop the development of the Revealed Empire.


    Unknowingly, three years have passed since the early stage. During these three years, the Tru Empire has maintained a low profile. Even though spies from the navy and the World Government have been wandering around this country, they did not dare to make any mistakes. moves and extraordinary actions.


    In three years, it was not only the business and military of the Tru Empire that changed, but more importantly, the country''snd area.


    So far, almost half of thend in the South China Sea is under the control of the Tru Empire. All the methods are the same as the previous annexation of the Nubian Kingdom, which is to allow these countries to voluntarily join their own forces and start to merge thend areas. But it also brought many civil wars and innocent casualties, but this is the most suitable one for everyone.

 Chapter 238 Tohru’s Secret Revealed

    <h4>Chapter 238 Tohru��s Secret Revealed</h4>


    After letting Cp Zero go three years ago, the Tru Empire has be a veritable world government affiliated country, and has also been recognized by the world government as a first-level affiliated country. In order to stabilize the situation of this country, they made a request, The world government almost all agreed, except of course Hailou Shi''s technology.


    After bing a member of the World Government, although it will be restricted in some aspects, it will bring iparable benefits. At least in the expansion of this country, it can be justified a lot.


    The most powerful country in the South China Sea, and even the most powerful single country in the world, this is already recognized by all countries in the entire pirate world.


    Even pirates do not dare to plunder supplies belonging to the Toru Empire, but any merchant ship flying the g of the Toru Empire will be avoided by all pirates as much as possible.


    After three years of development, Toru Empire''s business has almost reached a point of disorderly expansion. In just three years, almost 40% of the entire pirate world''s funds havee from Toru Empire. Flow through hands.


    This situation has long made the world government jealous. After all, this country has earned so much, and in the end, it does not need to hand over a dime of heavenly gold. This is what makes them angry.


    At the same time, almost half of the CP department under the World Government is in the Toru Empire. The purpose is to investigate the unknown side of the Toru Empire.


    However, during the past three years, they did investigate.


    But the results of the investigation made everyone feel like their tongues would drop to the ground.


    Navy Headquarters.


    Still the same, the image of the seagull looks so pure and fair.


    However, in the conference room at this moment, whether they were lieutenant generals or generals, everyone had gathered here. There were almost a hundred people, and everyone was sitting quietly, maintaining the sense of shock in their hearts.


    Even Garp, who had always been doing nothing, felt like the sky was falling after he got the news!


    "What do you think of this news? The World Government sent out so many departments, and it took so many years to finally get the location of the Tru Empire military training base. Tell us what you think!" Sengoku stood on top and frowned. said.


    Because just now, he had announced the situation of the Tru Empire to everyone. What no one expected was that the military base of the Tru Empire was actually located on an empty ind above the Grand Route. This really surprised everyone. , then the next situation that arises is how these people got up.


    With this question, the first person to raise it was He. She had a ponytail and no trace of vicissitudes of life could be seen in her old age.


    "Has the World Government investigated how they got to the Sky Ind? And is this news true?"


    "The news has been confirmed. Their military base is indeed on an empty ind. As for how everyone got up there, it has not yet been investigated, but there will definitely be a result that we can''t think of." Warring States closed his eyes and took a deep breath. Said in one breath.


    Now the New World has finally been stable for several years. They have used so many methods to kill all their living power outside the New World. But unknowingly, what everyone did not expect was actually behind them. A country''s strength gradually increases, and to a situation where they may be out of control even if they fight alone.


    As soon as these words came out, everyone suddenly became uneasy. After investigating for so many years, they finally obtained the opponent''s military base information, but it was almostpletely useless to these people.


    The higher-ups like them all know that Sky Ind is a ce where these people can also reach if they go up to it. However, if arge number of key people go up, they can only think about it, and it is impossible to do it at all.


    It is precisely because of this that these people are so surprised. How did the Tru Empire achieve this level?


    "You all tell me your opinions. The Tohru Empire has indeed yed a big role. No wonder there is no news at all after so many years of investigation." Warring States asked again when everyone was silent.


    "But what can we do now even if we know it? We can''t get to the sky ind at all. Even if one or two people go up, what role can it y? Since the other country can let so many members enter the sky ind, It has been proved that people have a way to control the way to the empty ind, and it is also a way forrge-scale people to go up.


    Has the World Government told you how they found out the secret of the Trudeau Empire''s Sky Ind military base? "


    Garp opened his mouth and asked.


    "I didn''t say it, because after the news came out, no Cp member could get out of the Toru Empire alive." Sengoku said.


    "These bastards now dare to openly kill people from the World Government?" Sakaski said with a serious expression.


    "The Tru Empire is currently a first-level member country of the World Government, and it has been announced before that the World Government does not allow anyone to explore everything in this country, so even if they kill CP members, the World Government can only Treat it as if you don��t know, or don��t have this matter!��


    Lieutenant General He replied to Sakaski''s words.


    "I feel that now is not the time to worry about these things, but how to curb the development of this situation. The military strength of the Tru Empire is getting stronger day by day, and now it is no longer under the control of the world government and navy. The most important thing is that it is Located in the South China Sea, this country has a stricter and more confidential management system than the four emperors at sea, and in terms ofbat methods, it is not inferior to the navy at all.


    What''s more important is the opponent''s advanced science and technology, which has disrupted all steps of our navy. Even if the navy ces military bases in the South China Sea, it has no effect. It is time to attack it from the source. "


    The Warring States Period also mentioned it.


    He is one of the top two. The World Government can''t solve this kind of thing, so it can only put all the pressure on the Navy.


    Because if the situation at hand is not handled well, it may trigger a war. The Tru Empire has exceeded all their expectations. They originally thought that this country''s army of only 10,000 or 20,000 people couldpete with the navy, but now the feeling haspletely Exceeded all expectations.

 Chapter 239 Control

    <h4>Chapter 239 Control</h4>


    After several years of development, giant steel ships have gradually begun to appear in the South China Sea, and the scale of reforms from generation to generation is no longer what it used to be.


    "Can we rely on their power, or use them to fight the Four Emperors? So as to reduce the gap between the two parties?" Aokiji suddenly opened his mouth and said.


    "Hey, hey, Aoki! You don''t think the people in my country are fools, do you? One is in the South China Sea and the other is in the New World. Do you think they will conflict with the Four Emperors over such a thing?" Admiral Kizaru said with a smile.


    "You all, stop arguing. Can you say something useful during the discussion now?" Warring States rubbed his head angrily. This time, things were indeed troublesome enough.


    The map of the Tru Empire hanging on the back nowpletely upies more than half of all the countries in the South China Sea. Compared with thend area of ??the Tru Empire in the first ten years, the current Tru Empire is at leastrger than before. It''s nearly 20 times bigger.


    Such a distinct territory directly prated deeply into the hearts of all the people attending the meeting here.


    "What did the World Government say? Since this matter has been thrown onto the Navy''s head, what do they mean and n?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "Those guys, let us send someone here who can investigate the details of this country in detail. The most important thing is to investigate the secrets of how they went to the empty ind to establish a military base, and also to mobilize them to build those steel giants. The secret of the ship!" Warring States said with a headache.


    "I think this point is almost unnecessary to think about. We have been there once a few years ago. The level of external defense there is simply beyond everyone''s imagination. Not only do they have to pass through and be hurriedly guarded by them in the South China Sea, all ships can only rely on Any ship that docks at other locations in the port will be regarded as a pirate or a person who may threaten the country, and will be taken away by the local police. However, when entering from the port, outsiders must wear something simr to a sea tower stone. A special bracelet with high performance, this thing has a positioning effect, and it is impossible for anyone to sneak into their senior management." Karp said.


    "Is it possible that our people haven''t investigated the information about the King of Tru Empire?" Aokiji asked.


    "Not to mention investigating their king, investigators can''t even get close to the pce. The management system of this country ispletely different from other countries. Many things do not require the king''s intervention at all. ording to the CP report, anyone who enters the pce No one cane out alive." Warring States said.


    "ording to what you mean, can I understand that the World Government asked us to send someone who can enter the pce to check the situation?" He asked.


    "Yes."


    Hearing Seng Guo''s urate answer, everyone else suddenly fell into deep thought. It is almost imaginable how difficult it is for such a huge force to get directly close to the leader.


    Not to mention targeting a being that is more powerful than the Four Pirate Emperors, even if the Four Pirate Emperors want to send someone to sneak into the opponent''s side, it is almost impossible, let alone a situation like this?


    "Sengoku, from the look on your face, it''s obvious that someone has already been chosen?" Garp asked.


    "The World Government has decided to let Peach Rabbit go!"


    Warring States said helplessly.


    "no!!!"


    As soon as Warring States'' words came out, Lieutenant General He was immediately dissatisfied. She mmed the table and stood up, refusing and shouting with an angry expression.


    Peach Rabbit is not only his apprentice, but He has always treated Peach Rabbit as his own daughter since he followed her. For such a dangerous task, their world government actually made a decision without even thinking. Treat them as the same thing.


    "He, don''t worry. If I agree, won''t I just announce it this time?" Warring States said helplessly.


    "No matter what the situation, Taotu must not do such a thing, otherwise I will never be done with you!" Crane said angrily.


    Taotu has now be a vice admiral of the navy, and her strength is not what it used to be. Even if she is sitting in this conference room now, he can hear the quarrel between the two clearly.


    Today''s Toru Empire is full of puzzling doubts for the navy and the world government. Even the four emperors know what their subordinates are like and how much territory they upy. This is something that the navy knows very well. But this country Different from the strict management, strong military and economic strength, this is what gives everyone a headache.


    Warring States did not answer the angry words spoken by He. He just sat there calmly and began to think about the next response n.


    In three years, the Toru Empire has now undergone another major change,pletely making it impossible for others topare with the Toru Empire five years ago.


    Although many high-rise buildings remain the same as they were three years ago, at least this city area has expanded several times. Not only does the capital have better employment opportunities, but the welfare benefits here are better than in other cities. Many, most of the poption has begun to flock here.


    However, the biggest change that this country has made in the past three years is that the number of factories in the country has not increased again, but has remained at the stable number three years ago. As for allmercial development projects in the past three years, it has All started to be ced among other countries.


    On the surface, the Tru Empire is still the same as before, and itsnd area has not expanded much. But in fact, after three years of development, the number of countries actually controlled by the Tru Empire has reached at least nearly 20.


    All the countries in the South China Sea are basically under the control of the Tru Empire. There is no rush to merge them all into the Tru Empire. The main reason is that they do not want to arouse too much fear from the world government and navy.


    Maintaining the current status, anyway, all defenses in the South China Sea are carried out by the Tru Empire. The Navy and the World Government will not send arge number of personnel to investigate the situation of other countries. This makes the Tru Empire feel like it is standing still. a feeling of.


    That is to say, because those countries are now under the jurisdiction of the Tru Empire, all the current factories have been ced in other countries.


    With the unlimited increase innd area, at least nearly 100 ports have been added to the entire South China Sea zone, and the measures implemented at each port are the same as those of the Tru Empire.


    They just kept their original names, and their actual control had long since evaporated.

 Chapter 240 Windmill Village

    <h4>Chapter 240 Windmill Vige</h4>


    Today''s Tru Empire looks like a modern city, and its business, economy and trade have be more and more developed. It is no exaggeration to say that it is the world''srgest economic power.


    It''s just that now it''s thousands of miles away from the Tru Empire.


    This is just a small town, a vige built near the sea. There are not many people living here at all.


    But at this moment, a figure slowly walked out of the space from a hidden ce.


    Chang Nuo walked out of this space, but no vortex appeared. When hended on the ground very lightly, his footsteps did not even touch the ground.


    Three years have passed, and the years seem to have left no trace on his body. He still has sky-blue eyes, a height of about 1.9 meters, and a medium build. However, he is not wearing his own aristocratic clothes, just very simple clothes. , wearing a white shirt on top, with golden patterns on the cuffs and cor, and even the front buttons were not buttoned. On the bottom, he wore ck casual suit pants, paired with a pair of ck leather shoes.


    Such an image is almost ordinary in this world and can no longer be ordinary.


    Although people havee to this remote and remote ce, the noble atmosphere in their bones still lingers.


    For him, this was an extremely unfamiliar ce, so the moment he arrived at his side, Chang Nuo immediately activated his Sense and Knowledge Haki to sense it.


    All the information in this area was immediately printed in his mind.


    With light steps, Chang Nuo walked in the woods, but the grass under his feet was not stepped on. If you look carefully, you can find that the other person ispletely suspended on the ground.


    Walking through the woods, every two steps he took, he would be a hundred meters away in the next second, and so on, he would be out of the woods in less than a while.


    When he appeared, what was disyed in front of him was a vige. Not many families lived here. There were two huge small windmill buildings built on the small soil slope high up.


    This is Windmill Vige, where the future protagonist is born.


    In three years, he has been to many ces and witnessed what the world is like. His improvement in strength has allowed him to be fearless of any spatial obstacles. As long as he knows the general direction and distance, he can travel directly without any obstacles. This way.


    This time, he just wanted to see what the future protagonist''s ce would look like.


    Today''s Chang Nuo can be regarded as a god-like existence in this world''s strength. With just one hand of space ability, no matter how powerful there is in this world, he can at least escape if he cannot defeat him.


    After arriving at the outskirts of Windmill Vige, the ce seemed very peaceful and peaceful, without the noisy and lively atmosphere of staying in the Tru Empire.


    Perhaps living and retiring in this ce is indeed a very good choice. It is quiet and far-reaching, and the scenery is so beautiful. Being close to the edge of the sea and feeling the setting sun makes people feel rxed and happy.


    The vige itself is not very big, and there are only so many people in a vige. If an outsider suddenly appears, anyone can recognize it.


    Chang Nuo didn''t hesitate at all. Based on what he saw and his domineering perception, he went straight to the only tavern in the vige. From today on, he officially started toe into contact with the characters in the future official plot.


    There weren''t many people working around, but it was really lively in this tavern.


    Pushing open the half-covered door, you can see that the entire tavern is not very big, with only a few tables. Facing the door is a small bar with dozens of types of wine on it, and there is also a viewing area. A beautiful woman who looks slightly older than herself by two years.


    The moment he entered, a big man who looked like he had drunk a lot of wine shouted, "Mackino, we have a guest!"


    The little girl standing at the counter didn''t know what she was thinking with her head down, but when she raised her head and saw Chang Nuo, she immediately showed a warm smile, ran out and greeted him with a smile and said, "Hello guest, Wee, what would you like to drink?"


    "Just have some of it!"


    Chang Nuo said with the same smile.


    The girl Maginot is almost exactly the same as the character in the original plot that I remember, and the clothes she wears are also the same color, but the only difference is that she feels the other person''s warm smile in person, which makes people feel quitefortable.


    "Brother, it looks like he is a foreigner, right? When youe to this bar, you must order the Rum Salud. This is the most popr drink in our vige. You must try it!"


    The big man who just opened his mouth to speak looked at Chang Nuo and started to introduce with a big smile.


    "Well~, Taluk, let the guests choose. Maybe the person we like doesn''t like it?" Maginot shouted to the big man with a smile.


    There were only two or three people in the entire tavern at this time. Except for the big man, the others were drinking by themselves and chatting with each other. At a nce, it was clear that these people must be the same person. Inside the vige.


    Changnuo walked to the edge of the bar and sat directly on the high stool. Hey on the bar and propped up his head with one hand. He smiled and said to Maginot who was busy inside, "Just one." He said it, even though I don��t know what it tastes like, at least I can taste it like this!��


    Maginot was suddenly stunned, not because of the wine the other person ordered, but mainly because of what the other person saidter that made her confused.


    But after being stunned for a moment, Maginot returned to her sweet smile and said, "Okay, please wait for the guests."


    "Wait a minute, can you tell me about the situation here?"


    Chang Nuo looked at Maginot who was busy and suddenly came up with this idea and asked.


    "Then I don''t know what the customer does? How did hee to Windmill Vige?" Maginot asked while pouring wine.


    After she finished speaking, she smiled and held up a transparent ss wine ss with half a ss of wine already in it, and then gently ced it in front of Chang Nuo.


    The wine is light red, but most of it is almost transparent white. It''s hard to evaluate what it tastes like without tasting it.


    But no matter what, the wine in this ce is definitely not particrly expensive.


    "Me? Maybe I''m a businessman, but I felt too bored so I walked around. I didn''t expect to see such a beautiful ce, so I stopped to take a rest!" Changnuo picked up the wine ss and said with a smile. .

 Chapter 241 Elegant Environment

    <h4>Chapter 241 Elegant Environment</h4>


    He doesn''t like drinking as much as the pirates, but sometimes he doesn''t refuse this kind of thing. It''s just that when he stays in his own country, he still has his responsibilities and identity as the king. When he has nothing to do, he almost doesn''t drink. Will touch these things.


    But now that everyone has reached the scope of this kind of asion, they naturally want to taste the taste of this ce.


    Maginot had nothing to do anyway. At this time, there were no guestsing, so she didn''t mind having a good chat with the strange man in front of her.


    The main reason is that the person is handsome, so he doesn''t mindmunicating. Perhaps it is also because the other party ising from outside, andmunication can also let her understand the situation outside.


    Changnuo has sky-blue eyes. He looks so handsome to outsiders at the moment, and whether he speaks or behaves, his etiquette and gentlemanly style still make others feel veryfortable.


    He is not as bold and uninhibited as a pirate, nor is he as carefree as an ordinary person. The moment Chang Nuo arrived, the biggest feeling that gave Maginot was that his temperament was not at all like that of an ordinary person or a pirate.


    "So you are in business? It just doesn''t look like you. You are not as smooth and cunning as those in business, and you are not as unruly as pirates. We usually have many peopleing here, strangers. There are a lot of people out there, but you are the most elegant person I have ever seen."


    With a sweet smile on her apple face, Maginot looked at Chang Nuo and spoke directly.


    "Thanks to your praise, maybe I''m not as good as you thought."


    With that said, Chang Nuo drank half a sip of the wine in the ss. There was no special expression or any special feeling. The wine was not as good as expected, but it is estimated that many people would like it for them. That��s all.


    "Looking at you, you shouldn''t be from Donghai, right?" Maginot asked.


    "No, it''s quite far from this ce. I just happened to pass by here and saw it was quieter here, so I stopped for a while."


    "Yes, Windmill Vige is indeed very quiet, but sometimes it is also very lively. It''s just that the guests came at a very bad time today. Windmill Vige is usually very lively, especially in this tavern. If nothing happens, everyone People will rx here, and everyone is happy." Maginot said with a smile.


    "I feel it. To be honest, Windmill Vige is reallyfortable. There is no hustle and bustle in the city. If you stay here for a while, it should be quite good to rx!" Changnuo said.


    "Sir, would you like to have another drink? It''s a rare asion for you toe here. How about treating this drink as my invitation?"


    Maginot said with a warm smile.


    While Chang Nuo was talking and slowly tasting the wine in his hand, he had unknowingly finished half the ss of wine. Although it had a bitter taste,bined with the quiet environment here, sometimes he could really drink it. Different beauty.


    Chang Nuo put the cup on the bar and paused for a moment. He didn''t feel that the wine was not worthy of him, but he just felt that it was not interesting to just chat and drink.


    "No, but thank you for your kindness!"


    Changnuo said with a smile, and then he took out a golden bead from somewhere. At first nce, he knew it was pure, and then he put it on the bar and said, "Thank you very much for chatting with me this time. I I want to go to this vige for a walk first and take a good breath of the air in this environment. Is there anything taboo in this vige?"


    "Well~ Guest, just treat it as my invitation this time. You can walk anywhere in the vige, there is no ce that you can''t go to!"


    Maginot was not greedy. Although she looked at the golden beads in front of her, she still handed them over with a warm smile on her face.


    "That''s it, I''ll treat them to a drink!"


    Chang Nuo said, then slowly stood up and left the bar. The golden beads were still on the bar, but he began to slowly turn around and walk towards the door of the pub.


    There are no high-rise buildings in Windmill Vige, almost all of which are two-story buildings. Its south and east sides are directly close to the sea, and its west side is close to the forest. However, at a nce from the north, except for two windmills with more conspicuous signs, Others are just some green grass, but this kind of visual sense gives people an extremely enjoyable experience.


    "Mackino, who was that guy just now?"


    After Chang Nuo left the tavern, the big man who was already a little drunk staggered to the bar, sat on the bar chair, and then asked curiously.


    After all, these people all saw the golden bead that the other party handed over before leaving. They were not jealous of this thing, but they were just curious about the other party''s identity.


    "Taluk, why do you want to inquire about the guest''s identity, but he doesn''t seem to be from here. ording to what he said, he should be from other sea areas!" Maginot said still smiling.


    "I don''t mean anything else, but this guy is pretty good-looking. Anyway, you don''t have a boyfriend now. Do you have a crush on him?"


    The big man suddenly changed the topic and said with a slightly teasing tone.


    "What are you talking about? I won''t give you a drink next time!"


    Maginot pretended to be angry and said.


    "Sorry, sorry~, just pretend I didn''t say it!" the big man said quickly with a smile.


    Outside.


    Chang Nuo strolled along the paths of this windmill vige. The only failure was probably this road. It was simply paved with gravel, and there was even mud in many ces. These roads were not repaired in an exquisite way.


    But such a small shoring cannot affect the beauty of the entire windmill vige. The ce close to the sea is also so elegant. Most of the people living here live by the sea. Such a beautiful ce is indeed a bit forgettable. return.


    This ce is like a paradise. For a person who has lived in a cumbersome big city for a long time, not only has he been spiritually cleansed at this moment, but more importantly, he can forget all his troubles and lose everything at the same time. The idea of ??chasing fame and fortune.


    But this time he came not to see what this windmill vige is like, but to know what the future protagonist has be now.


    But even though he had such a goal, he waspletely attracted by the environment here unknowingly. Such a rxing andfortable ce made him forget all his goals and thoughts.

 Chapter 242 Frost Moon Village

    <h4>Chapter 242 Frost Moon Vige</h4>


    There is a row of seats near the edge of the sea, which is probably specially set up in this vige.


    Chang Nuo walked to the bench and sat down slowly. Then a ceramic-like musical instrument appeared in his hand.


    Perhaps only at this time can we think carefully about what mission we came to this world with? He didn''t believe that it was that simple, or that he could live his life in a muddle.


    When he put the ocarina to his lips, the only music he could think of was the song "The Original Scenery of His Hometown" that he heard in his previous life.


    As the clear voice sounded, perhaps mixed with some emotion, and began to be radiated by the psychic Devil Fruit ability, before he knew it, many people were standing behind him.


    Including those who came out of the tavern, everyone listened to this song intoxicatedly.


    But then, for everyone, the quiet atmosphere suddenly became noisy.


    "Ace, wait for me~"


    The small vige itself was quiet and elegant. Following the shouting, two teenage children quickly ran towards it.


    Chang Nuo turned his head and nced. He could tell that the one running in front was slightly older and much stronger. At sixteen or seventeen years old, he knew without even thinking that he was Ace, the son of the Pirate King. As for the one behind him, he had a personal plot. The characters of the protagonists are very simr.


    Originally, Chang Nuo was attracted by the beautiful environment and had forgotten the purpose ofing here, but he didn''t expect these two guys toe to him so quickly.


    The other vigers seemed to have been used to it for a long time, and were not surprised at all by the appearance of these two people.


    Everything seemed so smooth, but when they discovered it, they had already disturbed other people in this quiet vige. The people who ran out to the tavern to listen to Changnuo''s music also ran back one by one. Maginot was left standing alone at the door, looking at the two children running towards them.


    Chang Nuo looked at the two running people with great interest. At this moment, in Chang Nuo''s eyes, the strength of these two people was as strong as the five scum, and even the scum had overestimated them.


    But all the images are almost the same as before, without any change.


    After a while, the two people started running into everyone''s sight.


    "Mackino, give me a drink quickly, I''m over 17 years old, haha~"


    Ace, who was running at the front, shouted with a smile as he looked at Maginot standing at the door.


    This scene looked quite funny. Chang Nuo just watched quietly without getting up or making any unnecessary movements.


    Ace rushed directly into the tavern, followed by Luffy, who also ran directly in.


    Maginot nced in the direction of Chang Nuo with a smile, then turned around and walked in directly.


    He had already seen everything he needed to see when he came here, and he didn''t think aboutmunicating with the future protagonist Luffy. He even didn''t even bother to chat with such a little brat.


    The East China Sea is the ce with the fewest pirates in the four sea areas, but it also has the most powerful people in the world.


    Windmill Vige is also the first stop of Chang Nuo''s trip. It''s good to see the two protagonists in the future. There is no need to change the original development process.


    But just as he was about to leave, a voice suddenly came from behind and shouted, "Mr. Guest, this is our specialty from the East China Sea. You can try it here!"


    Maginot''s sweet voice came from behind. Changnuo subconsciously turned his head and nced at the other person, then smiled and said, "Thank you for your kindness, at least you don''t need it now!"


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, his entire figure was instantly hidden in the space. In Maginot''s eyes, there was no shadow of the other party here at all. If she hadn''t been standing here, she would have even felt that this was a dream.


    But in the world of pirates, there are too many unexinable problems, and there are also too many weird things. It is not that Maginot has never seen the world. Seeing that the other party has left, the te of food in his hand is still there. In his hand, he just smiled in the direction Chang Nuo left, then turned around and continued back as if nothing had happened.


    Changnuo didn''t want to leave too many impressions on the other party, and he didn''t have any feelings for this ce. He just felt that he was suddenly exposed to such an elegant environment, which made him very rxed andfortable. But he also knew very well, but It''s just a ce for me to stop and rest.


    Now that we have seen the future protagonist, there is no need for Chang Nuo to stay here any longer. It would be useless tomunicate with those two brats in the end.


    Appear again.


    He was now in an even morepletely unfamiliar ce, but it was not particrly far from Windmill Vige and was still within the scope of the East China Sea.


    He just wanted to see how the people in the future protagonist group were living now, so as to satisfy his inner curiosity.


    This ce ispletely different from the windmill vige I just experienced. Although it is also just a vige and it is also close to the sea, it does not have such an elegant environment and the number of people living here is muchrger than that of the windmill vige.


    The same technique, the same movements, walking on this street very familiarly, everyone here seems to not know each other, everyone is only doing the work in their hands, and does not care about the people around them at all. Attitude.


    Following the direction he sensed, Chang Nuo arrived in front of a gym in a short time.


    The door here ispletely open, and you can see the scene inside when you stand at the door. There is nothing special about it.


    However, there are still a group of children inside who are learning. They keep hitting the wooden swords in their hands. In terms of basic kung fu, they can be considered decent.


    "Brother, there is no need to stand at the door and watch. If you are interested, you cane in and take a look!"


    While I was watching, a man who looked about 50 years old walked out of the room with a smile, a ponytail and a pair of sses. He didn''t look like a man with extremely high qualifications. A man with strong swordsmanship.


    "I''m sorry, I came here unknowingly. Looking at the swordsmanship being wielded inside, I couldn''t help but take a second look!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.

 Chapter 243 Koushiro

    <h4>Chapter 243 Koushiro</h4>


    Chang Nuo was quite impressed by the guy who walked to the door. The master of the future protagonist Zoro was also a powerful swordsman, but he just voluntarily lived in seclusion in this remote ce in the countryside.


    I don��t know if the other person is deliberately keeping this smile on his face, or is he trying to hide something? Those small eyes and slightly raised forehead give people the impression of an honest image.


    Koushiro did not show any aura of a strong man. He even looked like an ordinary person standing in the group. If he had not known each other at all before, then the person standing here now was just a swordsmanship teacher.


    "Brother, since it''s fate to be here, how about youe in, have a cup of tea, and have a good chat?" Koushiro said with a smile on his face.


    "Then excuse me!"


    Chang Nuo was not polite, followed the other party''s guidance, and then began to walk inside.


    The children who are now sparring with each other in the entire courtyard are almost all around eleven or twelve years old. It seems that these children have been learning swordsmanship for at least one or two years, and at least their mutual performance is still very basic.


    "This teacher''s teachings are not very good. Don''t make meugh!" Koushiro said with a smile and narrowed his eyes.


    "Very good, at least in terms of basic skills. If they continue to work hard in the future, maybe there will be a world''s best swordsman?"


    Chang Nuo looked at everyone and said.


    It''s just that I didn''t see Zoro among the future protagonists in my eyes. At least that guy''s recognition is ridiculously high. He has green hair. No matter which direction he looks from, he can be recognized at first nce. feature.


    But there is no trace of him among the children who are practicing. ording to the current timeline, Zoro should be around 16 years old. He should not have left the gym at this time. He is working hard to be stronger. Of age, I don��t know if I can see the other party this time.


    When Koushiro heard Changnuo''s words, he still kept his original smile, without any hint of pride or joy, and then asked curiously, "I don''t know where I saw it, I can have a world''s first ce here." Great swordsman? Those who be masters all look like this. They are just doing it to keep fit. As for bing the so-called great swordsman, these are just illusory imaginations."


    "Senior, there is no need to say such words. No one can say for sure what will happen in the future. Time will tell everything!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Pleasee inside~"


    Koushiro made a gesture of invitation, and then shouted in the other direction, "Tim, bring over my treasured tea!"


    Chang Nuo nced in the direction he called, not paying too much attention to the person he called, and then followed him into the hall inside.


    This is a room that doesn''t look particrly big, and there aren''t too many ornaments in it. The most important thing is the various knives ced on the knife holders on both sides. They are all arranged in order from long to short. The rest Yes, it''s just a small coffee table in the middle of the hall.


    There are no chairs here. The entire hall is paved with straw mats. Two straw mats are ced on both sides of the coffee table, which is still the way a samurai kneels.


    Koushiro walked to the coffee table and quickly knelt down there, then made a gesture of invitation. Changnuo did not refuse and knelt down in front of the other party as well.


    However, at this moment, there is a newspaper ced on the coffee table that seems to be from an unknown date. But on the front page of this newspaper, a huge picture is disyed in front of Chang Nuo. Because the person in the picture is himself, I guess Even he himself didn''t know when this was photographed.


    He was wearing a more formal king''s attire, and he was sitting there upright. He was probably secretly photographed by someone else one day. He thought this picture looked more handsome, so he used it as the cover.


    Before Changnuo could sit down, Koushiro hurriedly put the newspaper on top and put it below. However, he had already noticed this when Changnuo first came in. The two of them still looked at each other tacitly.


    "I wonder what senior thinks a sword is?"


    When he first sat down, Changnuo looked at Koushiro sitting in front of him with a smile and asked.


    "A handy weapon? Or a tool for killing? Or a partner! The sword in his hand depends on who is holding it, not what he is!" Koushiro said with a smile.


    "Yes, maybe the sword represents justice, or maybe it represents evil. It really depends on who is holding it!" Chang Nuo also smiled slightly and said.


    During the first conversation between the two, the young man named Tim, about 20 years old, came over carrying a teapot.


    When he came to the two of them, he knelt down gently on the ground, then poured a cup of tea for each of them, then gently ced the teapot on the table, stood up respectfully, saluted, and then slowly Withdrew.


    "Brother, try our tea which is not very good!" Koushiro said as he picked up the teacup.


    "Senior is really polite!"


    Chang Nuo said, also picking up the teacup.


    "I wonder why little brother came here? The East China Sea is also a remote and remote ce. It is also known as the weakest ce in the world. Why do youe all the way to ask for advice?" Koushiro suddenly changed the subject and asked .


    "It''s just a walk around with nothing to do, but the East China Sea is not what you said. The weakest sea area in the Four Seas is not the East China Sea. A few years ago, it still belonged to the South China Sea, and that was the weakest. In one ce, the East China Sea is just a ce where there are more powerful people hidden.


    Didn��t you also choose to settle down in this remote Donghai? "


    Chang Nuo looked at the other party with a smile and said.


    Both of them knew each other''s identities, and now they were just pretending to be confused.


    But the words are also testing each other, especially Koushiro, who is almost always very strict when facing this unexpected guest.


    Koushiro didn''t answer Changnuo''s words, but smiled all over his face. He didn''t understand what the other party meant bying here.


    In addition, and most importantly, although Koushiro is in this quiet town, he usually pays attention to the situation in the world, especially the current Nanhai Tru Empire, a small country that only takes a few years to , has risen rapidly, and can stand on an equal footing with those big pirates in the new world.

 Chapter 244 Sauron of the Future Protagonist Group

    <h4>Chapter 244 Sauron of the Future Protagonist Group</h4>


    Although the attention was due to attention, Koushiro didn''t have too many thoughts, but suddenly the other party was already here, how could he not be surprised?


    As soon as Changnuo arrived at Shuangyue Vige, Koushiro had already observed the other party. He could clearly sense the sharp aura exuding from Changnuo, which was not something ordinary people could possess.


    The two of them were sitting here drinking tea and chatting slowly, but neither of them revealed each other''s identity. It was just a simplemunication between a host and a guest, not even touching on the core.


    Chang Nuo did not ask the other party about the secrets of swordsmanship, and the other party also did not ask about the situation in the South China Sea. They just drank tea and chatted about ordinary things, but they seemed quite rxed andfortable with each other.


    After chatting with each other for nearly half an hour, Chang Nuo had been looking forward to the green-haired guy finallying back.


    He looked in a hurry, not knowing what he was looking for, but the three long knives in his waist seemed particrly obvious.


    The 16-year-old is almost 1.7 meters tall, which is considered normal in terms of height. However, with the strength in front of him,pared with a truly strong man, he is extremely weak.


    Sauron''s arrival was not polite at all. He rushed in in a hurry, and then began to look for the swords ced on the sword holder, and took them out one by one to check.


    Hepletely ignored the existence between the two people and did not even look at each other.


    "Zoron, what are you looking for?"


    Koushiro didn''t show any anger, he still shouted towards Zoro with a smile on his face.


    "Ah~, teacher, you are here! And who is this guy?"


    Zoro turned his head suddenly. When he saw the two guys sitting there, he was startled, but he still opened his mouth to ask.


    This look made Koushiro shake his head helplessly, and then said, "Aren''t all your swords at your waist? Why do you need to turn over the swords on the sword rack?"


    "I saw a group of pirates just now, and they wereing towards us quickly. I didn''t want Ichimonji to be stained with the disgusting blood of those people, so I came here and got a new one!"


    Zoro said anxiously.


    "It seems that you now have the belief that you will win? Are you sure about this situation?"


    Koushiro asked curiously, but he also did not say too many words of worry or dissuasion. Since his apprentice was willing to stop the pirates, he naturally had no objection.


    "Don''t worry, teacher, I won''t have any chance of retreating unless they step on my body!"


    Zoro said firmly.


    Chang Nuo just sat here and watched, and from time to time he picked up the tea cup in his hand and drank. This thing tasted much morefortable than drinking wine, at least it could embody a lot of leisure andfort.


    After Zoro finished speaking, he casually took a knife from the knife holder, and then quickly ran out. The room continued to be quiet, and only two people were left here.


    "I''m so sorry, little brother. That person just now was my apprentice. This look really made meugh!"


    Koushiro sat there on his knees, lowered his head, and said apologetically.


    "It doesn''t have to be like this. Stay here. I am a guest and you are the master. There is no need to be humble, senior. It''s just that your apprentice is now alone to face the pirates. So aren''t you worried?"


    "There is nothing to worry about. He will always take this step in the future. He must not need my help every time in the future! It is time to grow up."


    Koushiro took over what Chang Nuo said and replied with a smile.


    "I really envy him to have a good master like you, senior!" Chang Nuo said with a smile as he picked up the tea cup.


    "Everything is fate, and there is nothing to show off or be proud of!"


    Koushiro''s words conveyed a sense of vicissitudes of life, and Changnuo could feel the other person''s mood at the moment.


    "Why don''t you take a look at how the other party performs?" Chang Nuo said suddenly.


    But before Koushiro could refuse or agree, Changnuo just glowed with a faint blue light on the palm of his right hand and pulled it in the air beside them. Then, Zoro immediately appeared in that space and quickly moved towards The mirror image of running on the beach.


    "It''s indeed a good idea!" Koushiro said with a smile on his face.


    He was not at all surprised by this situation, and even took it for granted. This was not an emotion that ordinary people could express. It is estimated that more than 90% of the people in this world saw this situation, and their first reaction and reaction would be He was very surprised, but Koushiro, who was sitting in front of Changnuo, showed unusual calmness.


    Chang Nuo looked at the other party carefully, and already knew the other party''s identity, so what the other party had seen and experienced was definitely many times higher than his own.


    For a swordsman of such strength to be able to hide in this small ce, there must be some shady secrets in it.


    Chang Nuo didn''t have the slightest interest in asking about all this, but now he was watching Zoro''s every move in the suspended screen with great interest.


    The other party has now begun to show extremely terrifying road-crazy behavior. He was obviously running towards the seaside, but just after turning a corner, this guy already ran in unknown direction.


    The sea was clearly at their feet, but even in this situation, it still couldn''t stop him from running towards it.


    "Ha~, you really made meugh!"


    Of course Koushiro knew his apprentice''s idiotic behavior, so he smiled to show his embarrassment.


    "I think it''s quite interesting!"


    Chang Nuo also smiled. He was notughing at the other person, he just felt that such a person was indeed quite interesting.


    All the performances of this guy are almost consistent with the character shown in the future plot. He has no politeness, acts recklessly, and does not use his brain, but he has that perseverance. This may be the real thing about him. reflected value.


    After drinking a ss of water, Changnuo was still looking at Zoro in the picture with interest, while Koushiro was staring at Changnuo sitting opposite him with interest.


    As soon as Changnuo put down the tea cup, Koushiro immediately picked up the teapot and poured a cup gently.


    Koushiro was very curious about why the other party came to this ce in the East China Sea, and even more curious about why the other party paid so much attention to his idiot apprentice.


    But nothing was shown. He was just curious about how Chang Nuo achieved his current status at this age.

 Chapter 245 Fate

    <h4>Chapter 245 Fate</h4>


    Chang Nuo was still looking at Zoro who was running. If this guy didn''t have anyone to guide him, let alone running to the beach to deal with the group of pirates, he might not even be able to find his way back.


    Although there are pirates on the East China Sea, most of them are just ordinary people who have no choice but to choose the path they finally choose. Nine times out of ten, they are only slightly stronger than ordinary people, but overall they can still be considered weak and pitiful.


    In fact, this kind of thing is nothing worth watching at all. After looking at it for a while, the mirror light curtain was still there, but Changnuo had turned his head back to look at Koushiro opposite.


    "Senior, have you ever thought about living somewhere else? Maybe it can be morefortable!" Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "I''m old andte. It''s good to stay here. If I just end up like this and live the rest of my life, I can be considered carefree!"


    "Why is this necessary? Some people cannot escape the arrangement of fate after all. No matter where they are, there are some things that need to be faced. It is definitely impossible to avoid them."


    Chang Nuo said, picking up the tea cup in his hand and taking a sip, while waiting for the other party''s exnation.


    "It doesn''t matter what fate is. It''s nothing more than the constraints imposed on oneself. There''s no need to worry about it or worry about it too much." Koushiro said with a bitter expression.


    "maybe!"


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he no longer studied the other party''s thoughts. He only needed to know that the person sitting in front of him was definitely a being whose strength was not inferior to that of a general. The so-called best swordsman in the world, Hawkeye, might not be as powerful as the one sitting in front of him. There is no match for this person.


    The two of them had been chatting in a very respectful and rigorous manner. From time to time they talked about off-topic topics. Koushiro looked more restrained. He was always curious about what this man who suddenly came to visit meant.


    But Chang Nuo''s appearance was that he just came to this ce identally and did not deliberately arrange anything. However, no matter from the eyes or behavior of the other party, it didn''t look like he came to this ce identally.


    However, while they were chatting, Zoro in the mirror had been instructed by someone unknown and was now standing in front of the iing pirates.


    And while the other party was in the process of plundering, they started fighting without saying a word.


    But none of the two people drinking tea focused on that at the moment.


    In the room, they looked at each other and chatted for nearly two hours. During this period, they just talked about a few things.


    No one would mention the identity of the other person or even ask to introduce themselves at all, not Koushiro, nor Changnuo.


    They know each other well, so why bother to lift thest fig leaf?


    "I really bother you this time. If there is a chance in the future, I really hope that I can sit here with you and have a good chat. Regarding the issue of swordsmanship, this trip is not in vain, at least. Taught me a lot!��


    Chang Nuo smiled and stood up and saluted respectfully towards the other party.


    Although they chatted about a few things, Koushiro did not hide his clumsiness during the critical process, and most of his experiences in swordsmanship had been informed to Changnuo.


    Seeing the other party''s polite look, Koushiro stood up and quickly joked, "You''re too polite, it''s just a chat."


    "I have disturbed you for such a long time. It is time to leave. If there is a chance, I really hope you can go to the South China Sea and sit for a while!"


    Although Chang Nuo didn''t say it clearly, he believed that the other party could understand.


    "Maybe there will be a chance!"


    Koushiro said.


    Changnuo smiled and nodded again, and then began to walk towards the door. Koushiro followed closely behind him, weing him with courtesy, and naturally sending him off with courtesy.


    But as soon as he went out, the green-haired kid who was running rampant had already ran back, but he looked obviously slightly injured. At least the blood stains on his body, judging from his energetic appearance, should not be his.


    "Huh? Why are you still here?"


    Zoro, who had just run back in a hurry, looked at Chang Nuo who had just walked into the courtyard, and asked directly in confusion.


    "Zoron, don''t be rude!"


    This time, Koushiro rarely narrowed his eyes and smiled, and then scolded him with a serious face.


    "It doesn''t matter!"


    Chang Nuo didn''t mind this situation, but stared at Sauron with interest.


    "I''m so sorry!" Koushiro said respectfully.


    "It''s a very interesting little guy. I will definitely see you again in the future." Changnuo looked at Zoro with a smile and said, then turned to Koushiro and said again, "Thank you for the hospitality!"


    With that said, Chang Nuo seemed as if he had never appeared before. Not even the dust on the ground had changed, and he had disappeared without a trace.


    And this time, Zoro also disappeared directly in front of Koushiro. Looking at this scene, his eyes were wide open. He was so surprised that he even forgot to breathe.


    "Teacher Koushiro, who is this person?"


    Zoro asked nkly with a dull expression.


    Only at this moment did he feel the mystery that the other party gave him, which was already beyond words.


    Koushiro was not too surprised. Instead, he looked at the group of disciples who were training in the courtyard. After a long pause, he began to say leisurely, "A strong man, even a strong man of an era, is so powerful that he can defeat others of the same age." People cannot see the existence of its back, and it is so powerful that it can make people despair."


    Listening to what Koushiro said, Zoro licked his dry lips, with an expression of disbelief on his face.


    "Is what you said true? How could it be so exaggerated?"


    "Haha~, work hard. When you reach this age, you can be half as capable as others!"


    Koushiro said with a smile.


    "Asshole! I want to be the world''s greatest swordsman in the future, how could I lose to such a person?"


    Seeing Zoro''s determined expression, Koushiro smiled slightly and said nothing, then turned around and walked into the house.


    For him, the current goal is only swordsmanship. Only people with strong swordsmanship can be considered as this guy''s goal. As for others, they have no idea at all.


    Although he did note into direct contact with Changnuo this time, Koushiro did not think that the king among the four emperors and one emperor who could control such a powerful force was just an ordinary person.


    After just two hours of meeting and contacting each other, all that was left to him was a sigh.

 Chapter 246 Sea Restaurant

    <h4>Chapter 246 Sea Restaurant</h4>


    The trip to Shuangyue Vige was just to show his face and would not have any impact on the people here. Even Zoro onlymented what his teacher said.


    After all, he had no idea about Chang Nuo''s so-called strength. All he wanted to have was his achievements in the sword, and he was not interested in other things.


    After today, I will continue to live the same life from now on without any change.


    However, after Chang Nuo left this ce, the next ce he needed to appear waspletely different from the previous two.


    Although this ce looks like a remote country and is also close to the seaside, the only difference is that the lives of the people here are not as good as imagined.


    So he didn''t even go down this time. He just hid in the void and looked down.


    The people here were still living in dire straits, but Chang Nuo was still a little surprised and surprised when he saw the fish-man for the first time.


    After all, just like what I learned in the previous life, this time I actually saw the ghostly appearance of this group of people.


    The ce where Nami is located is indeed extremely poor. The people do not even have a perfect ce to live. Some houses even have big holes, but there are still people living inside.


    Chang Nuo has no intention of helping. Chang Nuo has no idea of ??changing the original process and just maintains the current status, which is quite good.


    The little girl today is only thirteen or fourteen years old. She does not have the beauty she had in theter period. She is just a very ordinary child.


    Chang Nuo really couldn''t imagine how this mysterious girl would survive the torment of the past few years.


    After only ten minutes, Chang Nuo stopped observing any situation in this ce, because it was boring for him. Rather than doing so, he might as well change a ce and taste the delicious food.


    All the children from these big families were sent here one by one. In a way, someone has been nning all of this decades ago, but I don��t know why they chose this method?


    Appear again the next second.


    Sea Restaurant Barati, this is a boat thatpletely imitates a fish. The difference is that it is always fixed in this ce, but the size of this boat can indeed be called a restaurant.


    The length from front to back is about a hundred meters, and the width from left to right looks like 70 meters. The middle floors are restaurants that arepletely connected together.


    At this moment, there are almost three pirate ships parked around the restaurant. After all, the people this ce can entertain are not many normal people. They are either pirates or navy, and businessmen are almost rare.


    "Wee, guest!!"


    Entering from the position of the fish head, before entering the door, a loud and enthusiastic voice came over.


    It would be better if it was a beautiful woman''s voice, but the key point is that this is a pretty rough man.


    As soon as I entered the door, I bumped into this sturdy man who looked about two and a half meters tall. He was holding a spat and a wok in his hands. He had dark skin, was shirtless on his upper body, and was wearing an apron underneath. For aparison For Chang Nuo, who likes to pursue exquisiteness, just seeing this scene is a bit hard to swallow.


    More importantly, the long hair on the opponent''s legs should not be too obvious.


    The space of the restaurant is rtivelyrge, and the number of guests inside is not too small. After all, there are three ships outside, and no matter how small it is, there can be at least about a hundred or so people.


    "Hello guest, are you here for dinner?"


    The dark-faced burly man asked with his face almost leaning towards Chang Nuo.


    "Stay away from me!"


    Chang Nuo said with some disgust.


    "Nani? No problem! As long as you are here to eat, then you are God. What do you want to eat?"


    The man quickly took two steps back and continued talking with a smile.


    "Paddy, you bastard, can youe back and cook? It''s too busy in here to see you?"


    Hearing someone calling him, this sturdy man named Paddy grinned at Chang Nuo, showing two rows of big teeth, and said with a smile, "Uncle, please wait a moment, I wille back and cook for youter." Food on the table!��


    Chang Nuo was really speechless. Although the chef in this restaurant was not that likable, the whole restaurant was indeed quite good in terms of hygiene, but this ce was a little noisy.


    Those pirates ate, drank, and kept banging the table and shouting,pletely ignoring the eyes and opinions of the people around them, and just enjoying themselves and having fun.


    And there are currently not many empty seats in the entire restaurant. You either have to eat close to those pirates, or you can only choose to stay outside!


    "Are the guests here for dinner?"


    While Chang Nuo was still looking in other directions, a boy who looked to be about fourteen or fifteen years old came over. At this time, he had already begun to wear a ck suit and tie, and he looked very young. He looks like a gentleman.


    But the tone and expression of the other person''s words were not very ttering. This guy looked aloof and had a cigarette butt in his mouth. The key was that he started smoking at this age, which really made people dislike him.


    Today''s Sanji is almost the same as he was in theter period. He has curly eyebrows, a crisp suit, and ck leather shoes. He has a very mature atmosphere, which is somewhat unrted to his current age.


    "Are there any quieter seats?"


    Changnuo said nonchntly,


    "There are only a few ces, just find a ce to sit!" Sanji said.


    This is such an experience with no service attitude. I really don��t know how this ce can be called a restaurant? If he weren''t curious about the characters in the future protagonist group, Chang Nuo would really not want to stay here for a second.


    "Move a chair outside. I see you have quite a lot of space outside. I''ll just stay outside and eat today!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    "I''m sorry, guest, this restaurant does not provide these services!" Sanji said as usual, not caring whether Chang Nuo ate or not.


    After all, in his opinion, Chang Nuo didn''t look like someone who couldn''t afford to eat and was still very hungry, so he didn''t care or care at all.


    But just when he said he didn''t want to do it, a man with only one leg came out of the kitchen. The other leg waspletely supported by a wooden stick. He walked over staggeringly, and then He pped Sanji on the back of the head and yelled, "Go behind and help!"

 Chapter 247 The Taste of Barati Restaurant

    <h4>Chapter 247 The Taste of Barati Restaurant</h4>


    Sanji had almost no temper at all. He nced at the old man, then turned around and started walking towards the back.


    "I''m sorry, guest, if you think it''s noisy here, I''ll personally move a table for you outside. I wonder what you want to eat here?"


    Zhepu said.


    With two golden beards, only one leg, and a white hat about 60 centimeters high on top, Chang Nuo recognized the other party''s identity at a nce.


    The chefs in the entire sea restaurant are almost all pirates, but in a ce like this, they are not powerless and live the life they want. They open a restaurant every day and do a small business on the East China Sea. There are no particrly big pirates, and the Navy turns a blind eye to restaurants like this. Normally, as long as nothing big happens, no one is willing toe and take care of it.


    On the other hand, the food cooked above is really delicious, which is why even the navy wille over for a walk when they have nothing to do.


    "Make me whatever you want!"


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and said.


    This ce is not as good as he imagined. It is a mixed ce. Maybe this group of people have been together for a long time, so they feel the extremely lively atmosphere, but for a first time visitor To the people here, everything here feels like they are in a sinful ce.


    Zhepu did not refuse Chang Nuo''s request, and then moved a small table and a chair to the door of the restaurant. Although it was not inside the house, it was at least much quieter and more beautiful than inside.


    Not long after, Sanji came over with a te full of fish, and a bowl of rice in the other hand, but he was still holding a cigarette in his mouth, and no one knew it. Surprisingly, no ash fell into the dishes.


    Changnuo watched Sanji put the food in front of him casually without even saying hello. This scene directly made him frown, but thinking about it, it should be rtively normal. After all, almost all the people they served were It''s a pirate.


    He was not hungry, he just came here to satisfy his curiosity, but he still picked up a piece of fish with his chopsticks and put it in his mouth.


    The food here is not as perfect as expected, or maybe the food he has been eating in the pce is really good, so it is regarded as the most famous sea restaurant Barati by others, but in Changnuo''s eyes That''s it.


    After just one bite, he ced his chopsticks directly on the table, and then quietly admired the sea water in the distance.


    The four sea areas are almost the same, but the East China Sea appears to be more peaceful, with no strong winds or waves, and the sea here does not have a salty smell like the South China Sea.


    The Pirate Kinges from the East China Sea, and the future Pirate King alsoes from the East China Sea. Garp is from the East China Sea. The key is that so many people havee to the East China Sea. No one has thought about what actually exists in the East China Sea that will make so many people The stronge to this ce.


    Even the big pirates in the future will be willing to run here one by one. The pirate Camolong I met a few years ago is alsoing towards the East China Sea. Maybe there is something in this that I don��t understand. The ce.


    But his current task is not to work on these things for so many years, and it is also time to rx.


    "Guest, isn''t the food delicious? Leftovers are not allowed here!"


    While Chang Nuo was still looking in the distance, Sanji ran out again without knowing what was wrong. Then he just took a bite of the fish and rice without moving. He looked at Chang Nuo curiously and somewhat angrily. said.


    "Can you get me a drink?"


    Changnuo didn''t pay attention to what Sanji said before. Instead, he looked into the distance and spoke calmly again.


    "You~!!"


    Sanji was speechless. What the other party said was apletely different matter. But since he is still sitting here, then I am naturally the guest''s request, and I need to go no matter what. satisfy.


    So in less than two minutes, Sanji walked out again with a blue drink in his hand. It looked like there were ice cubes in it and a straw on it. Anyway, it was done quite well. .


    Chang Nuo picked up the drink and took a sip. He didn''t even use the straw on it. After all, he had already seen the environment of this ce. He didn''t know if anyone else had used this straw. Chang Nuo didn''t even want to go to this cup. touch.


    "I haven''t touched the rice, so take it away. It can save you some money. Also, the fish is not as delicious as expected. The meat is too old and it is really hard to swallow!"


    After putting down the cup, Changnuo still said calmly, without even looking at Sanji.


    "Asshole! You are the first one to say that the food we cook here is not delicious. What is it about you that is not delicious?"


    "Is there another Sanji eating the King''s meal?"


    Before Sanji finished speaking, Paddy, the big man who had been standing at the door to greet him, ran out again. Now the two of them were standing around Chang Nuo, and Paddy even looked fierce.


    Then he said again, "Guest, I hope you can pay for this meal first!"


    "Huh~"


    Chang Nuo took a deep breath and exhaled it slowly. He was really speechless about the people here. He really didn''t know why he came to this ce with such high expectations.


    "You two, go back here and you don''t have to work anymore?"


    Zhepu came out and pped Paddy on the body. Naturally, Sanji next to him did not escape the old guy''s big hands.


    "Guest, remember to pay for this meal!"


    Paddy said something fiercely, and then started to walk inside.


    Chang Nuo sat there and shook his head. He really couldn''t understand these people. This kind of ce was really too chaotic.


    "This is food money!"


    Chang Nuo casually took out about 20,000 beli, and then gently ced it on the table. Regardless of whether he ate the meal this time, at least the other party was in business, even if the service was very unsatisfactory. , but now that you are here, you need to abide by the corresponding rules.


    Zhepu was about to say something, but in the next second Changnuo waspletely lost here. If it weren''t for the fact that the fish on the table had already been eaten, Changnuo would have been as if he had never been here before. Even the chairs made by the other party are still cold, and there is no good temperature at all.

 Chapter 248 Stepping into the new world for the first time

    <h4>Chapter 248 Stepping into the new world for the first time</h4>


    Zhepu stood there nkly for a moment, looking quietly at the ce where Chang Nuo was sitting just now.


    His daze was interrupted until Sanji appeared again. Sanji looked at the empty seats and the fish that had only eaten one bite, and said angrily, "This bastard, you still haven''t eaten this thing." over!"


    "Asshole? Do you know who he is?"


    Zhepu sighed and said helplessly.


    "Who is this guy? It feels familiar, but I still can''t remember it!"


    "I told you once, three years ago, a ce that shocked the whole world! It was also the ce where I was born!"


    Zhepu said sadly.


    This "Red-footed Zhepu" was originally born in the South China Sea. To be precise, he was originally born in the Kingdom of Tru in the South China Sea. He only left the country where he was after bing a pirate.


    He was pursuing his own ideals, and had visited all the ces in the world, and even traveled a long distance along the Great Sea Route. But in the end, fate made him choose to settle down in the East China Sea.


    But it was such a guy. When he saw the newspaper of the Kingdom of Tru, it was the first time that the content of their country had appeared in the newspaper. His current king appeared in the East China Sea area. From then on, Zhepu Almost every time there is a newspaper, it will pay special attention to the current state of its own country.


    After the saying "Four Emperors and One Emperor" came out, the joy in Zhepu''s heart was almost beyond words. No one could understand his mood at this moment. Even though he had left his country for decades, when he saw that the country was now strong and powerful, In this state, even when the navy and the world government were helpless, Zhepu burst into tears with excitement.


    But he didn''t expect that he would actually see his Majesty the King today, because his appearance had already been deeply imprinted in his mind.


    Standing there, Zhepu showed no emotion, but tears flowed out unsatisfactorily.


    Sanji stood quietly on the side, looking at Zhepu''s appearance. This was the first time he had seen the old man shed tears.


    Sanji knew this old man very well. After all, they had lived together since childhood. He also knew that Zhepu himself was born in the South China Sea. But after his mention, Sanji finally remembered who that young man was. .


    "Could the guy you''re talking about be the king of your original country?" Sanji asked still in disbelief.


    "That''s right, I didn''t expect that at such a young age, the Tru Empire is indeed in the hands of a very capable person!" Zhepu said, wiping his tears.


    "Then why don''t you go back? ording to you, that country should have be a very remarkable existence by now!"


    "It''s amazing. It''s indeed quite amazing now. Across the entire sea, no matter who you are, you need to give a thumbs up when talking about this country. Any move that urs can be big news that overturns the entire world!"


    Zhepu took a deep breath, and suddenly a smile began to appear on his lips.


    This is a kind of pride thates from the heart, a kind of pride for one''s own country.


    "ording to what you said, I would also like to visit this country if I have the opportunity in the future." Sanji said with a yful smile.


    "As long as you don''t be a pirate, you can probably go to this country anytime. But if you be a pirate, I''m afraid you won''t even be able to step into the entrance of this country!" Zhepu said, patting the other party''s shoulder.


    "Is it really that exaggerated?" Sanji said in disbelief.


    ��Did that bastard give you any money??��


    Just when the two of them were chatting, Paddy ran over quickly with a spat, and then shouted while running.


    The group of guys staying in the hotel to eat are already very familiar with this ce. If they didn''t have this kind of character, they probably wouldn''t be willing toe here to eat, and they can watch the excitement while eating. This is the most interesting part.


    Zhepu and Sanji looked at each other, and both expressed their helplessness towards Paddy. No one said anything and then started walking straight inside.


    Paddy still didn''t give up and ran outside to take a look, but now he couldn''t see anyone else. He could only m the table angrily and shout, "It seems like this bastard really didn''t pay!"


    Even if he shouted like this, no one would pay attention to him, because Chang Nuo was already far away from here at this moment.


    Because he has already arrived in an unfamiliar sea area at this moment. With his own abilities, he can go almost anywhere in this world at will, and he can do it by just thinking about it.


    But this ce ispletely different from before. After all, he has just appeared in this area, but the weather here is indeed a bit uneptable. There are dark clouds in the sky, and the sea water below is like a stick. Like stirring, the huge whirlpool seemed to swallow everything.


    Before I watched it for a minute, it was already raining heavily in the sky, but this raindrop seemed to weigh at least a ton. It was really unimaginable. What would this new world look like?


    Yes, Chang Nuo has indeed appeared in the new world this time. After all, he has never set foot in this ce before. It is rare that he now has rtively free time to take a stroll and take a look at the world.


    The weather in the New World has always been a nightmare for all sailors, but this thing only exists in fantasy, but the reality is that it is more terrifying than fantasy.


    This ce is so terrifying. Everything changes in an instant without the slightest warning. The sky may be clear one second, and there will be thunder and lightning the next.


    Fortunately, Chang Nuo is hidden in space. Even if he imagines it, he doesn''t have to worry about falling into the sea.


    After feeling the enthusiasm of the new world, Chang Nuo once again hid in the space and walked towards other ces.


    Appearing again, the wind and waves here seem to be much calmer, and they are not even much different from thend of the four seas. The only difference may be the undercurrents hidden under the sea, but for ordinary sailing ships, Say, it won''t have much impact.


    Changnuo was suspended above the sea, and he seemed to be walking on the sea. He used his knowledge to begin to perceive everything around him. The new world is not like thend of the sea. A small ind may appear from time to time, but in In this ce, there is not even a hair within a hundred kilometers.

 Chapter 249 The Whitebeard Pirates in the New World

    <h4>Chapter 249 The Whitebeard Pirates in the New World</h4>


    But within his range of perception, there was nothing within a radius of a hundred kilometers. At least he could sense the existence of a particrlyrge ship.


    When he came to this new world, he didn''t even know where he was floating to. After all, through space travel, he could now go anywhere at will. He might have traveled thousands of miles in one step, and he was in such a prosperous area of ??the new world. , it is absolutely normal for a ship to appear within the sensing range.


    However, the ship he was sensing waspletely different. Chang Nuo smiled with interest. However, he did not hide in the space and stepped directly on the water towards him.


    The distance Changnuo takes each step may be more than ten meters, or hundreds of meters, or even thousands of meters. The distance between each step is different, but during each step, he is jumping through space.


    He was walking on the sea like this. If he could be seen at this moment, everyone would be stunned. This is no longer a question of strength.


    Not long after, a huge ship about 150 meters long and at least 30 meters wide appeared in front of Chang Nuo. The shape of this ship was built to imitate a whale. It was a huge three-masted sailing ship. Whale The mouth is white, and the waist at the back is painted with blue spray paint. The entire ship looks huge to everyone.


    However, the people sitting on the boat at this moment have also spotted Chang Nuo''s figure 1 kilometer away.


    The other party walked calmly on the sea. It was not difficult for the people on the ship to find the other party.


    The most important thing is that Chang Nuo never thought of hiding his figure.


    On a huge ship.


    "Sons, it seems we have a guest. Those with lower strength can go down first!"


    The white beard sitting on the bow shouted in a low voice to the people ying and ying over there.


    Whitebeard is sitting on the deck with his back leaning against the wall. His body is already covered with nder. With such an image, it is hard to believe that he is hooked up with the strongest man in the world.


    But this deck is indeedrge enough, at least one to two hundred square meters, and there are many people ying on it. Dozens of people are also on the boat, chatting and having fun.


    But as soon as Whitebeard''s words came out, everyone was stunned for a moment, and then the powerful people began to fully activate their alert state.


    "What happened to Dad?"


    The person who spoke was a very strong man with a transparent armor-like thing on his shoulders. This guy didn��t need to think too much, and he already knew that he should be Qiao Zi, the captain of the third division of the Whitebeard Pirates. A man who possesses the Superman type Diamond Devil Fruit.


    "A guest has indeed arrived!"


    The pineapple-headed Marco said, and his eyes followed the white beard''s gaze, because Chang Nuo, who was staying on the sea at the moment, could hardly see any figure from their sight.


    "Where are the guests?"


    Halta looked around. He was the captain of the 11th team of the Whitebeard Pirates. He looked very small, just over 1 meter tall. He was holding a yellow sword in his hand. He looked like this. Almost everyone who doesn''t know him treats him like a child.


    "Marco, let them all return to the cabin, and you stay to entertain them together!"


    Whitebeard opened his mouth and said.


    He could feel that the other party did not have any intention of fighting, so he said such words, but the reason why he let all his sons return to the cabin was mainly because he didn''t know what to deal with next.


    Although Whitebeard is the fourth emperor, the other party is also called the first emperor. After three years, Changnuo left them only endless mysteries. No one knows what kind of king the Toru Empire is. Strength, a seasoned guy like Whitebeard would never judge an opponent''s strength based on age.


    Just the fact that the other party can walk on the sea calmly is enough to prove that the other party is much stronger than imagined.


    "Dad, is this really necessary?"


    Said the pineapple-headed Marco.


    "Now I don''t know what the other party''s purpose is foring here? It''s always right to make more preparations!"


    Whitebeard said with a sigh.


    "Dad, it seems that you are overthinking. No matter what kind of opponent we face, we can''t abandon dad and hide in the cabin alone. This is not in line with our ideals." Hartaughed. said.


    The same is true for everyone else. No one is willing to hide in the cabin. The unity of the Whitebeard Pirates is still rtively strong.


    But until now, except for Whitebeard and Marco, no one has discovered Chang Nuo''s current figure.


    There was nothing visible at least from the sea level, let alone such a long distance away.


    "What should we do now, Dad? They don''t seem to want to go down!"


    Marco said with a smile.


    "Oh~, forget it, that''s it!"


    Whitebeard also showed this smile and said.


    After all, the opponent did not show any fighting consciousness, but it was a bit surprising to suddenlye to the new world.


    Even Whitebeard was surprised that he could meet the most mysterious person in this ce this time.


    Changnuo instantly advanced hundreds of meters with every step he took. In less than a few seconds, he appeared in front of the Whitebeard Pirates, but he was still a hundred or two hundred meters away from the ship.


    But now, he did not use the space to move forward again, but walked calmly on the sea, moving step by step towards the huge sailboat in front of him.


    Whitebeard did not continue to sit there. Instead, with Marco''s help, he stood up and began to take a few steps towards the bow deck.


    When they saw theplete figure of Chang Nuo, the rest of the Whitebeard Pirates were now extremely shocked. Everyone thought they had seen it wrong, and some were even rubbing their own breasts. His eyes once again looked in the direction of Chang Nuo.


    "Emperor Tru? Why is he here!"


    Halta shouted in disbelief. Others actually had the same question.


    When he was still about 100 meters away from the ship, Changnuo stopped moving forward, and then his whole body slowly began to rise into the air, until he stayed at the same position as Whitebeard, and continued The rising body began to stop.


    It all seemed so casual, even natural.

 Chapter 250 The most powerful man in the world

    <h4>Chapter 250 The most powerful man in the world</h4>


    No one on the Whitebeard Pirates'' Mobydick spoke at this time, and everyone collectively remained silent.


    They are different from other pirates, or people from other forces. It can be said that everyone under the Yonko Group is familiar with the face of Changnuo. After all, as Emperor Toru who can stand alongside the Yonko and even his own captain, he ispletely It''s worthy of their attention.


    "I came to the new world rashly. Without knowing the direction, I never expected toe to this sea area. I sensed your presence in it. When I got closer, I realized that it was the old man with the white beard who took the liberty to disturb me. , I hope the old man doesn��t mind!��


    Chang Nuo was suspended in mid-air, bowed his head politely, and said to the white beard in front of him.


    "Gu~, boy Tru, the moment I saw you, I was also shocked!"


    Whitebeardughed and said, but he didn''t know whether it was because of his illness or other reasons. Anyway, afterughing, he looked like he was panting. Marco, who was next to him, also hurriedly stepped forward and said "Dad, you shouldn''t have too many mood swings now. You''d better sit there quickly!"


    "It doesn''t matter, I won''t fall down at this moment!" Whitebeard turned his head and looked at Marco and said with a smile.


    But in Chang Nuo''s eyes, White Beard is not an ordinary tall guy, and this guy doesn''t know what he eats to grow up.


    Seeing that he was at least five or six meters tall and had an unusually strong figure, the other party was not even wearing any clothes on his upper body and was shirtless, but no one cared about it at this moment.


    After he finished talking to Marco, he turned to look at Changnuo again, still smiling and said, "Boy Tru, what are you doing in the new world?"


    "Maybe it''s for a stroll, or maybe it''s to take a look at the situation here, or maybe it''s for other reasons, who knows?


    But after seeing you this time, it��s not a waste of time toe here. At least it��s good to be able to witness a living legend. "Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Gu~, interesting little guy!"


    "Is it possible not to invite me? I am so lucky to be here. Will the old man just let me float here?"


    As soon as Whitebeard finished speaking, Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "I still like people to call me daddy. This old man seems to make me old. Boy Tru,e up here!"


    Whitebeard said breathlessly.


    At this time, the opponent''s body obviously looked a little weak, and his health was simply terrible.


    "It''s better to call me daddy, but it''s not easy toe here if you have the chance. But there is one thing I want to say in advance. I don''t want the navy and the world government to know that I am wandering around the world. I don''t know if you mind. mind����?"


    Chang Nuo didn''t finish what he said, but how could he hide such a thing from Whitebeard, the strongest man in the world? He turned his face to look at the people behind him, and then said, "I don''t mind that much!"


    With that said, Chang Nuo hadnded gently on the Moby Dick. At this time, there were at least hundreds of people standing on both sides of the deck. No one, including Marco, opened their mouths to speak.


    Even they haven''t understood the meaning of what Chang Nuo just said.


    But the moment Chang Nuo stepped onto the deck, a burst of momentum burst out in the next second. No one was affected, but there was a person behind the crowd who instantly fell to the ground.


    "I''m sorry, old man. I didn''t hurt him, but it''s not a good thing to keep an eyeliner under your control!"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    "One is missing, and another one wille next. It''s better to just leave one who is more familiar."


    Whitebeard said slowly.


    He didn''t know that there were people from the navy or the world government in his pirate group, but this kind of thing was definitely unavoidable. It wasn''t a bad thing to leave one or two behind. Anyway, he never thought about it. The world government is forced to carry it out and so on.


    "Asshole, this is our Whitebeard Pirates. Is there anything we can''t do ourselves?"


    At this time, a shout came from the crowd, obviously dissatisfied with Chang Nuo''s actions just now.


    "Old man, would you mind letting me show off my youthful arrogance?"


    Chang Nuo looked at Whitebeard who was slowly sitting there and said with a smile.


    "Forget it, these sons are rtively weak. Boy Tohru, you have already shown your abilities. Your domineering color and domineering energy are already stronger than that guy Shanks. I really don''t know how you can practice at your age. ?��


    Whitebeard said.


    Hearing this, even Marco couldn''t hide the shock in his heart, let alone the others. How powerful should a man be if his father admits that he is powerful?


    The key is that the other person still looks so young!


    "Dad, please sit down first and I''ll hang up the bottle for you!"


    Marco said helplessly.


    "It''s better not to do it. We have a rare guest. Sons, we are going to have a banquet!"


    Whitebeard said weakly. He wanted to shout out loud, but at this moment it was obvious that he was unable to do so.


    Chang Nuo also looked helpless when he saw this situation. The strongest man in the world was so weak at this moment, which really made him unable to arouse the slightest interest.


    After all, in his impression, Whitebeard was still a rather favorable guy, but seeing this image now, it felt like he was about to burp his farts.


    "I said, I just want to see what it is like to be called the most powerful man in the world. I don''t want to see an old guy who is about to belch his fart!"


    Changnuo said with a smile and a speechless expression.


    But just after saying this, when their captains were about to get angry, Chang Nuo suddenly took out a bottle of blue potion in his hand, and then swung it in the direction of Whitebeard.


    This bottle of white potion suddenly floated in front of Whitebeard. The bottle was not particrly big and only contained two or three drops at most, but his blue and faintly glowing potion still looked like it at this moment. Weird and strange.


    "King Tru what does this mean?"


    The pineapple-headed Marco was still a little angry because of what Chang Nuo said just now, and his tone was not respectful at all.


    "Marco, stand back. Boy Tru is right. I can''t be considered a so-called strong man now!" Whitebeard said.


    "Dad, that''s definitely not the case. You are definitely the strongest in our hearts at any time, and no one can upy your position!" Qiao Zi, the captain of the third division, who is often not very smart, also said.

 Chapter 251 Domineering and Domineering—Pressure

    <h4>Chapter 251 Domineering and Domineering��Pressure</h4>


    Chang Nuo looked at their father-son affectionate look, with a smile on his face, and said to the person next to him, "Can you bring a chair over? Is this how you treat guests?"


    "Are you considered a guest?"


    The person who said this is almost like a cannon fodder. You can''t even see what he looks like on his face, and he doesn''t know where he got the courage.


    "Go get him a chair."


    Marco opened his mouth and said.


    "Drink it. This thing can at least keep you alive for a few more years. The taste should still be rtively refreshing. Try it!"


    Chang Nuo looked at White Beard''s appearance, then smiled and said to him.


    Because there was a small bottle of potion suspended in front of Whitebeard at this moment. For a person of his size, this thing was not even as thick as his little finger.


    Marco didn''t believe it, so he was about to take the medicine bottle and check it, but with his outstretched hand, he couldn''t touch the thing at all. Even the bottle of medicine was already suspended there, but when Marco stretched out his hand, he couldn''t touch it. When it passed, it passed right through his palm.


    "Old man, try it!"


    Changnuo ignored Marco and still said to Whitebeard with a smile.


    "King Tru, what on earth do you mean?"


    The other people on the pirate ship became dissatisfied, and even looked at Chang Nuo fiercely.


    About ten minutes have passed since the conversation, but the chair still hasn''t been brought up. Even though this matter has been mentioned, it''s still the same.


    Whitebeard didn''t have Marco''s attitude. He reached out to pick up the small blue bottle suspended in front of him, and it fell into his hands urately.


    The thing was not big. Whitebeard did not hesitate at all. He unscrewed the cap and poured it in. However, his sons standing next to him were a little surprised and shouted "Dad!!"


    After shouting, everyone even stared at Chang Nuo fiercely, as if if the other party made the slightest move, they would rush forward without mercy and all rush forward to fight for their lives.


    The main reason is that Changnuo has not shown his strength to the outside world. Although everyone admits that this emperor can be on an equal footing with the Four Emperors, it depends more on the strength of the Toru Empire, not the strength of his King Toru. .


    "Why are you so nervous? If I want to harm you, there is no need for me to use such small means. Do I really think that you can be invincible in the world?"


    Chang Nuo looked around at everyone and said leisurely.


    "Gu~, I feel really refreshed!!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Whitebeard immediately burst intoughter. The effect of this medicine was indeed so powerful that most of his energy had been restored in an instant.


    In fact, Chang Nuo canpletely cure all of Whitebeard''s current conditions, but this thing has no good effect on him, and there is no need to do such a thing.


    "Dad, how do you feel here?"


    Marco quickly stepped forward and asked.


    "It feels good, at least it''s much morefortable than before!" Whitebeard said with a smile.


    "Marco, please check daddy quickly!"


    "That''s right, Marco, check it out quickly~"


    ��


    A group of people were talking to each other, as if they were afraid that Chang Nuo would do something here.


    "Dad, rx and let me check..."


    "No need, don''t you still know your physical condition? Go start preparing for the banquet and entertain boy Tru." Whitebeard said.


    "We don''t know the other party''s purpose yet, so we still need to be more cautious, Dad!"


    Sachi, the captain of the fourth division, said.


    "Dad, I always feel that this guy seems to be unkind. Why do you have to hold a banquet to entertain him like this?"


    The person who spoke this time, Chang Nuo, was really impressed. Not only was he impressed, but the other person was definitely very familiar.


    The future ckbeard Teach has already emerged, but this guy who hides deeply has indeed reached the extreme in his mind.


    Faced with theck of hospitality from everyone, Chang Nuo did not feel anxious. Instead, he still stood there leisurely, with an elegant posture that was in stark contrast to them.


    "s~"


    Chang Nuo finally sighed helplessly. He really couldn''t stand other people''s criticism of him. After all, as a strong man, he still had the dignity of being the king of a country.


    Along with their chirping sounds, Chang Nuo''s originally blue eyes suddenly glowed, and then he slowly closed his eyes and whispered in his mouth, "Shut up!"


    With just one sentence, the overlord''s domineering energy burst out along with the Psychic Devil Fruit. In an instant, the entire ship dropped nearly one meter and sank under the sea. The huge pressure made the entire ship seem to be unable to bear it. It started to chirp.


    This time, the overlord-colored domineering energy did not directly act on the soul, but instead acted to intimidate the pressure from the next level of attack.


    He was just a domineering domineering person. He used coercion to make those with lower strength instantly lie on the deck of the ship. They couldn''t even raise their heads. His face came into close contact with the deck. Some people were even below. The deck has even cracked, and even those with strong strength are hunching over. Even Marco, the captain of the first team, is also supporting the ground with his hands, as if he is bearing a heavy weight on his shoulders.


    "Boy Tohru, this is the Moby-Dick of my Whitebeard Pirates. Don''t hurt my lovely sons!"


    Whitebeard made a sound directly, and then punched Chang Nuo. His fist collided with the air, and the space suddenly began to crack like a mirror, and then powerful force rushed directly towards Chang Nuo.


    "The Art of Space - Recement..."


    Chang Nuo''s right hand glowed with a faint blue light, and something like a barrier immediately formed in front of him. However, the function of this thing was not to block the attack caused by Whitebeard, but to directly rece the space behind it. It is equivalent to the front attack directly passing through the space where Chang Nuo is, and then spreading directly towards the back.


    This is just like a person who has the ability to attack nature, it has no effect at all.


    But on the huge sea behind him, the sea seemed to be pushed down by something to a depth of nearly 20 meters, and then a huge wave began to sweep away into the distance.


    "Old man, your attack might cause great harm to ordinary people!"


    Changnuo said with a slight smile, and then the whole person disappeared instantly and reappeared, with a huge screen directly fixing the huge wave that had formed a tsunami.


    Such a powerful force, for ordinary people, it is estimated that it can be turned into powder with just one punch.

 Chapter 252 Communication with Whitebeard

    <h4>Chapter 252 Communication with Whitebeard</h4>


    Whitebeard''s attack is indeed quite powerful. The title of the strongest man in the world is not given for nothing. It is not too easy for him to destroy a country with his bare hands.


    Just relying on this hand can cause a huge tsunami, and the opponent does not use all his strength. It is hard to imagine how powerful this guy would be if the opponent was at his peak?


    After blocking the waves from spreading into a tsunami, Changnuo returned to the Moby-Dick again.


    Those people who were lying on the ground unable to move have all stood up. The group of people who danced the most happily just now are all lowering their heads and keeping silent. Even though Chang Nuo is standing here and looking around them, Including the captains of other divisions, some could no longer bear the domineering look in their eyes and lowered their noble heads.


    Whitebeard was not angry because of what just happened, but he still sat where he was. From this collision, he at least understood that the young man standing in front of him could definitely be called an emperor among the four emperors. .


    For the Whitebeard Pirates, when the Four Emperors and One Emperor first came out, they were inevitably ridiculed by many people, especially when they saw these newspapers, even Marco couldn''t help but startining, Nanhai What kind of powerful people can appear in this ce.


    But in the memory, Whitebeard just said one sentence, "No matter whether King Tru is strong or not, at least the national strength shown is enough to deserve such a title!"


    Since the Four Emperors and One Emperor did not even oppose the pirates, then naturally the others would not have any objections.


    Back to the present, Chang Nuo didn''t pay too much attention. Instead, he tilted his head again, looked at the other people on the boat, smiled and said leisurely, "I wonder if you can bring me a chair?"


    This time, no one objected. Soon, a chair was sitting under his butt, and it was facing the white beard sitting on the edge. Even though he was sitting on the chair, he was still tall in terms of height. It is said that he is still much shorter than Whitebeard.


    "G~, boy Tru, this is really shocking. Are you interested in being my son?"


    Whitebeard said with a smile.


    "Huh? Forget it, old man. Looking at you like this, you don''t have a few more years to live. Forget it about being your son. But if the Whitebeard Pirates encounter problems in the future, I can do my best to help you."


    Changnuo said with a smile, but then he rolled his eyes and continued, "Perhaps when your father fails one day, or the Whitebeard Pirates encounter a huge crisis, as long as your sons are willing to join our Toru Empire , I wouldn��t mind helping you out once!��


    "King Tohru, I think you should stop saying such things. The Whitebeard Pirates will never encounter the situation you mentioned no matter what!" Marco stepped forward and said with a serious expression.


    "It''s better not to speak too early. You know the situation of the old man with white beard better than anyone else. He also knows it well. Although the potion I gave him can extend his life for at least three years, the key is that this thing can only The effect of the first time, so as for what will happen in the future, who can know?


    At least one thing that can be confirmed is that as long as there is a problem on your side, old man, who will be themb to be ughtered in the ughterhouse of the New World? "


    Changnuo said leisurely, without saying anything or expressing any attitude, he just wanted to express this truth.


    Whitebeard has been traversing the sea for so many years, he can definitely understand these words, and other people who are more understanding can also understand these words.


    But after the shock just now, none of the minions and the captain of the small team opened their mouths to express any objection at this moment.


    "Don''t you think you underestimate our Whitebeard Pirates too much?" said Bista, captain of the fifth division.


    "How do the Whitebeard Piratespare to the Rocks Pirates?"


    Chang Nuo didn''t pay attention to the other party, but looked at Whitebeard seriously and asked.


    Whitebeard sat there, under everyone''s gaze, he took a deep breath slowly, the corners of his mouth twitched, but then he said, "Boy Tru, I already understand what you said, but living in this sea Come on, why bother thinking about the future, at least live a happy life now."


    After Whitebeard finished speaking, he turned his eyes to his sons, then smiled and shouted loudly, "My dear sons, get ready for a banquet!"


    Chang Nuo understood that the other party just wanted to use this way of changing the subject to relieve the rather heavy atmosphere at the moment.


    However, those people also followed the performance at this moment, and each one began to shout, and shouted with excitement, "The banquet is going to be held!!"


    The deck, which was originally rtively quiet, returned to a huge lively atmosphere at this moment.


    However, they all left the deck one by one and went to the rear to make work. Only Changnuo and Whitebeard were left facing each other on the entire Noda deck, as well as Marco standing next to him.


    After all the people had left, Whitebeard''s smiling face finally turned gloomy at this moment.


    His performance just now was nothing more than a shot in the arm for those people. As someone who has experienced it, he knows the specific situation better than anyone else.


    There is no eternal position of the Four Emperors, there is nothing more than the intimidation of being more powerful.


    If it weren''t for Whitebeard''s presence here, how many people in the Whitebeard Pirates would be willing to join him?


    "Boy Tru, if I have the chance, I really want to see how far your future growth potential can be? But I believe your goal will definitely not stop here, right?" Whitebeard said calmly. .


    "No matter what, it''s fine, but some things are not as simple as imagined. This sea is destined to never calm down in the future. Who can be alone in this whirlpool? Who will be eliminated first? ?��


    Chang Nuo said equally calmly, with no expression on his face, as if everything didn''t matter.


    No one knows, what is he thinking in his heart at this moment? Marco stood nearby, also thinking about what Chang Nuo said, always feeling that it meant something.


    It''s just that now is the time when two big guys are chatting, and he doesn''t want to interrupt in the middle. Even in Marco''s feeling, Chang Nuo didn''t juste to this ce randomly. There must be someone he thinks in the middle. What you want to do, or what you want to ask.

 Chapter 253 Back Garden

    <h4>Chapter 253 Back Garden</h4>


    On the surface, the Whitebeard Pirates seem to be peaceful now, and everyone behaves very respectfully and politely, as if they are a very harmonious big family.


    But Chang Nuo knows very well that these people can only behave like this as long as Whitebeard is alive. Once Whitebeard dies, how many people can maintain their current state?


    But in the new world, I have to say that the Whitebeard Pirates are indeed a breath of fresh air.


    Everything that needs to be said about the previous topic has been said. Such a heavy chat content is really not suitable to be expressed at this time.


    So next, Chang Nuo''s expression changed, and a blue light instantly appeared in front of Whitebeard, but what appeared next was jars of wine, almost twenty jars in total.


    These things are countless times better than what they are drinking now, at least for now.


    Changnuo did not get these drinks from the system space, but brought them from his own country.


    "Since I identally came to the Moby Dick this time and chatted for so long, I naturally can''te empty-handed. This is made by our country. You can try it. You can be sure that it will be better than what you are drinking now, old man." It''s much better." Changnuo changed the subject and said with a smile.


    "Gu~, then I will ept this thing, but it is much more than other things!"


    "Dad, you are just getting better now, so you can''t drink too much!"


    Whitebeard had just happily epted the wine that Chang Nuo had given him. Before the crucial point reached his mouth, Marco next to him had already started to give advice.


    "Marco, you also know about dad''s situation. There is nothing serious now. You still have to drink a little when it''s time to drink!" Whitebeard said.


    "From then on, the maximum is one bowl of wine per day."


    Marco said helplessly.


    "Sometimes I really envy you for your leisurely and carefree life. It doesn''t have to work as much as we do every day!" Chang Nuo said with some envy at this moment.


    "Gu~, you can give up everything, but everyone''s destiny is different. You have your own way to go, so envy is useless. Most people probably envy a life like yours. "


    Whitebeard said with augh.


    "Perhaps so, let''s not talk about the rest. I don''t like to drink alcohol normally. What do you think if I don''t have a good drink with the old man today?" Chang Nuo said with a smile to White Beard.


    "no problem!"


    How could Whitebeard refuse at this moment? He epted it happily.


    In the following time, a grand banquet was held on the entire Moby Dick. This was Chang Nuo''s first time in the new world, and he was able to make friends with a group of people.


    The Whitebeard Pirates are indeed a very nice ce. Theymunicate and chat with each other very casually, and there is no need to care about any negative image impact.


    This meeting between Chang Nuo and Whitebeard was not known to anyone except the pirate group. Even after the banquet was over and Chang Nuo left, no one else dared to say a word.


    After all, as soon as Chang Nuo left, White Beard''s expression had already changed. He knew very well how big a deal it would cause if the king of the Tru Empire of South China Sea suddenly ran to the new world to meet him. The sensation will also elerate the navy and the world government''s desire to cause trouble.


    Marco even warned anyone not to tell anyone about anything that happened today, especially what they saw and heard today.


    The new world is indeed a very good ce, where all the strong people gather and thepetition is cruel, but it is an area full of opportunities and future.


    It''s just that today''s new world is not suitable for the Tru Empire toe, or at least in recent years, they are not suitable for participating in anything in the new world.


    The pattern of the Four Emperors has been established. If another big force is added, it will definitely make the new world even more turbulent.


    At this time of development, the entire pirate world is rtively calm and stable except for the South China Sea. No other ce is as perfect as imagined, especially the West Sea and the North Sea.


    In the past few years, the revolutionary army has begun to advance by leaps and bounds, and has continuously begun to conquer cities and territories. The methods used are actually no different from those of the World Government. In many aspects, they still imitate the behavior of the Tru Empire, making the entire The people in the country began to have civil strife, and in the end they epted it easily, but imitation is imitation, and they were seriously targeted by the World Government and the Navy.


    But these are all things for the future.


    After Chang Nuo left Whitebeard''s side, he had already left the new world. It was just a matter of taking a look at that ce to familiarize himself with the environment. There was no need to stay in the new world for a long time.


    But when he appeared again, he hade to an extremely familiar ce. This ce now belonged to the back garden of the Tru Empire, or to be precise, it belonged to his Changnuo back garden.


    The Amazon Kingdom of the Grand Line, also known as the Daughter Kingdom.


    Nowadays, people in this ce almost no longer need to be pirates, and they can fully meet all the needs of their lives. Behind the pce, a small space channel of about 10 meters high has also been established. The only difference is , this space channel leads to the location of the sky ind, using the sky ind as a transit toplete the supply of living materials to this country.


    But there are more found here, almost all of which are ordinary daily necessities, and those products belonging to the Tru Empire appear here, which has greatly improved the lives of the people here. .


    Nowadays, even if Changnuo walks on the street openly, no woman will have any objection. The rules of this ce have been slowly rewritten by Changnuo. After several years of development, the daughter country has Each of these women found a partner one after another, but due to the rules of this country, almost all of those born were girls who stayed here, while boys were taken away by their men.


    But this situation may notst long. Sooner orter, all the rules here will be rewritten.


    The pirate empress is now Princess Snake of the Toru Empire. This fact has been known to almost everyone in the Toru Empire. No one objects to His Majesty the Kinging together with a pirate. After all, in their knowledge Among them, His Majesty the King is already a god-like figure. As the faith of this country, whatever Chang Nuo says is right.

 Chapter 254 A powerful newcomer to the empire

    <h4>Chapter 254 A powerful neer to the empire</h4>


    Changnuo stayed in the daughter country for nearly a month, and then began to return directly to his own country.


    The official plot of One Piece is about to begin, so we will start nning everything for these things.


    Today''s Toru Empire almost looks the same every day, and the changes every day are beyond everyone''s imagination. The Toru Empire''s naval steel battleships have also transformed from about ten to almost fifty now. This power is in In the entire world, it has be a presence that cannot be underestimated. Even the Navy of the World Government, the Toru Empire can already achieve head-on strength.


    Today, the Toru Empire has be the actual controller of the South China Sea, and business development has spread throughout the pirate world.


    Nowadays, the fiscal revenue of this country can not onlypletely saturate the needs of the entire country, and even the entire South China Sea, but now the king''s treasury is already filled with gold, silver and jewelry, and even the treasury has been expanded by more than a dozen. The assets belonging to the country have now reached nearly 10 trillion beli. If all this money is converted into his own system space, he can directly create one to rival the power of the entire world.


    Anyway, everything is proceeding in an orderly manner. For the Tru Empire, it is no longer important whether or not it has its own king, it is more of a symbol.


    As the official plot begins, there will be many things to do next, and the Tru Empire has just begun to take the first step in facing the challenge of the entire world.


    Although there is a lot of money in the treasury of the Tru Empire today, it has not achieved the ideal goal for this country. In fact, almost all of the more funds are invested in military training. Every special forces member goes from training to It will take at least 50 million Baileys to take shape. The first batch of more than 10,000 people, the second batch of more than 50,000 people, and now the third batch has already begun training.


    Especially the third batch of personnel has reached nearly 100,000 people, not to mention the fourth batch of personnel who are about to participate. A new group of troops appears every two years on average, and the fourth batch has assembled the entire All the better people of the South China Sea.


    Although the training conditions of the special forces are now higher than before, for the nearly 200 million people in the South China Sea, it is initially estimated that the fourth batch will be able to participate at least nearly 300,000 people.


    The good thing is that now the Tru Empire does not necessarily need to bring all its personnel to the sky ind for training. Just staying in the South China Sea and enclosing a restricted area is enough to achieve this level.


    As for the sky inds, it is expected that in the next year, they will all be nned to be general training areas, and even serve as the military core area of ??the entire Tru Empire.


    In another year at most, the Toru Empire will be fully capable of arm wrestling with the World Government''s navy. Although it is currently weaker than the World Government''s navy, overall, it is already It canpletely crush the strength of the world government navy.


    After all, in the Navy, there are not many of their own people who have cultivated Haki. It is already good to have 150,000 people out of ten. Not to mention that the people in the Toru Empire who can cultivate Haki can almost catch up with this. number.


    In the royal pce of the Tru Empire.


    At this moment, there were five or six people sitting in the pce hall. Except for Chang Nuo, these people were all top-level figures in the army.


    Needless to say, the original three generals, and a rtively unfamiliar person appeared here. He sat next to Junhe. There were two people sitting on the sofa. Abona and Yixiao sat together. Nuo was sitting alone on a sofa. As for the other side, Enel actually appeared here at the same time.


    Today''s Enel is no longer what he used to be. After eating the Devil Fruit, ording to the electromaic mechanics that Changnuo gave him before, after three years of growth, Enel has long since transformed into a truly powerful being. .


    But the image is still the same as before, and it even looks a little weird.


    The most unfamiliar person among the crowd was probably the thin but tall man sitting next to Junhe. He was dressed in a gentleman''s dress and looked like he could not bepared to a strong man.


    But this is the person who joined the Trudeau Empire army from another country four years ago.


    This man''s name is Mo Sank, and he is also a Devil Fruit user. The only difference is that the Devil Fruit ability in him was not given to him by the Toru Empire, but that he has possessed this Devil Fruit since unknown time. , has a rtively low-key and introverted personality. Even though he has strong strength, he still doesn''t bother to show it in front of others.


    After their country was merged into the Tohru Empire a few years ago, Junhe discovered that this guy had great strength, but at that time he had no strength at all, and there was nothing remarkable about it, and he had no idea about the application of Haki. , so afterpleting the practice of domineering in the past few years, his strength has already risen to several levels.


    The bird fruit is a phantom beast in the form of a phoenix. It is a flying animal type fruit that is much rarer than natural type fruits. Even its level of nobility is already higher than that of Marco, the captain of the Whitebeard Pirate Ship.


    In addition to being rtively introverted in character, Moshank usually doesn''t like tomunicate with others, which may also be rted to his own experience.


    This guy is 35 years old, but he still doesn��t have a wife. Not only that, this guy almost lives in istion from the world, with no friends or rtives around him. In the past few years, he has begun to slow down. Slowly integrated into the Tru Empire army.


    Perhaps everyone here looked at him without any discriminatory attitude, which made him feel a little more confident.


    The moment he first came into contact with this guy, Chang Nuo himself was a little surprised. Why did he feel inferior despite having such great strength? This is what makes people a little confused.


    So as for the other guy Eniro, he is now 20 years old. No one knows what his specific strength is. Even after eating the devil fruit, this guy trains so much every day that it is almost scary, and he is so self-disciplined. A guy who has already be a role model in the army.


    Although Eniro already has the strength of a general, he is still only a lieutenant general in the Tru Empire.

 Chapter 255 Heading to Lafdru

    <h4>Chapter 255 Heading to Lafdru</h4>


    Although he is only a lieutenant general, this is enough for Eniro. After all, apart from his ability and strength on the training ground, he does not have much merit to be able to be a country''s lieutenant general. , this is enough to show his strength and ability to be recognized by others.


    The reason why he appeared in the pce hall was mainly because of the uing arrangements, which should involve this guy.


    Chang Nuo leaned on the sofa and crossed his legs. He nced at everyone and said, "The great era ising. We should also prepare in advance. The military n is urgent. Where should the Tru Empire start in the next direction?" , this needs to be taken into consideration in advance.��


    "Is His Majesty the King preparing to start a war?"


    Yixiao asked worriedly.


    "I have no idea about this, but the world will definitely fall into a more chaotic state in the future. Abona will now introduce the current situation of the world, so that everyone can understand in advance the possibilities we will face in the future! "


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    Today, Abona has begun to take charge of intelligence collection. This kind of thing will be crucial to future development. Naturally, Changnuo will not give up on this shoring and has already arranged everything before.


    Abona did not stand up. Instead, he nced at the people around him and began to say seriously, "Now the world pattern has been finalized. Everything around the world is in chaos except the South China Sea. The revolutionary army has begun to emerge, especially in the North Sea. As well as the West Sea region, more than 15 countries have fallen into war. The most disgusting thing is that the revolutionary army used some methods of the Tru Empire to plunge all these countries into civil war, and then used their own principles to To make the people of these countries believe in themselves, the North Sea is particrly serious. At least ten countries have fallen.


    Thend of the West Sea has also begun to make people miserable, and the number of pirates is increasing day by day, which has led to some countries now beingpletely controlled by pirates.


    As of now, there are 57 countries in the North Sea, and there are currently 46 countries in the West Sea. There is currently no more reliable data on the East China Sea, but as of a month ago, there are 36 countries in the East China Sea. The countries that have joined the world government are among the four seas. In addition to the Tru Empire, there are still 112.


    Most of the strength is currently concentrated in the Grand Line and the New World. ording to the current situation, it is estimated that in a few years, whether it is the navy or pirates, there may be some big moves.


    As for the next policy, I suggest that we start to enter the Grand Route. Whether it ismercial or military, it can most effectively alleviate some of the pressure generated in the country. "


    Abona said it very simply, but he just briefly introduced the situation of the power of the four seas. They don''t know much about the forces in the New World and the Grand Line now.


    "Your Majesty, I don''t agree with this matter. Now the navy and the world government have strictly monitored our country. They are afraid that any actions of our country will affect their rule. If they want to develop an absolute power that belongs to us, Power, there must be a big event ahead, so that we can have such an opportunity, otherwise the navy or the world government will definitely deal with our country in a more rigorous way."


    Junhe said.


    "The World Government is not that scary. The strength of the navy is only that much. What do we have to worry about?"


    Enel said.


    "Do you really think that the world government and navy are what we see?" Yixiao suddenly opened his mouth and said.


    He is the oldest and most experienced person here, so he is indeed qualified to ask such questions.


    "What if not? Can we just wait like this?" Enelu asked.


    "I wonder what your Majesty means?" Moshank asked.


    As soon as his words came out, everyone''s eyes immediately focused on Chang Nuo.


    The young king sitting in front of them has convinced them both in terms of strength and brains. Whether it is the decisions or reforms he has made, this country can be something else with its rapid development. scene.


    Changnuo smiled slightly, put away his raised legs, sat upright and looked at everyone and said, "Are you interested in taking a look at Rafdru, the pirate king''s treasure? What exactly is it?"


    "Nani????"


    The five people sitting there suddenly showed expressions of surprise on their faces. They did not understand the sudden change of attitude of His Majesty the King, let alone what he meant by these words.


    "I have always had a question, why did Roger, the Pirate King, do this? If Ralph Drew has the treasure that everyone is paying attention to, why are the crew members of the Pirate King still living such a poor life, and why did he die before his death? Roger would utter such words. What does this thing mean?


    We don��t understand many things, so we can��t explore the reality of this world. Why does the world government try its best to prevent everyone from exploring the nk 100 years of history? All this stuff we still don''t know.


    The Tohru Empire is indeed what Junhe said. If it wants to develop, it must have a big event before it can take more effective steps forward. However, there is no sign of where this big event wille from.


    That''s why I want to take a look, what exactly is on this One Piece treasure? But what I can tell you is that this thing will definitely not be any gold or silver treasure, it is more likely to be a secret that cannot bemunicated! "


    Chang Nuo said seriously.


    He already knew what the situation was like, but he was just curious about what was recorded in the current One Piece treasure. Was it the nk 100 years of history, or something else? But the only thing that was certain was that , once these things are revealed, they will definitely create the possibility of subverting the world.


    "This ce, Ravdru, has only been reached by the Pirate King Roger alone in the past 800 years. How can we go to that ce?" asked Yixiao.


    "If you are willing to go, you will know in the future, but I don''t know what you mean?" Chang Nuo asked again.


    "Your Majesty, if all of us go, what will happen to this country?" asked Arbonne.


    This is the most realistic thing, because if you want to go to Rafdru, even Changnuo can only rely on the Infinity. Although you can reach that area with your own ability, it is impossible to find Rafdru. Lu this ultimate goal!

 Chapter 256 Set off to explore the treasure of One Piece

    <h4>Chapter 256 Set off to explore the treasure of One Piece</h4>


    "Don''t worry about things in the Tru Empire for the time being. Even if there is an emergency, we can return here as soon as possible and explore the unsolved secrets of this world. Wouldn''t it be more interesting?"


    Changnuo said with a smile. After all, he had already started thinking about this matter a few years ago. Using the Infinity, he went directly to Rafdru, the final secret of the Pirate King world. From the moment he knew he could go there, he was already curious. Here What is the secret of existence?


    Now it is rare that the entire country has begun to calm down, and there is no need to think about expanding the country''s regions. The rest just needs to be done slowly.


    "Is it possible that His Majesty really has a way to go to Lafdru?" Yixiao asked with some doubts.


    "Don''t worry about this, Mr. Yixiao. Rafdru''s location has been known for a long time. It''s just a matter of seeing when we have time to go there!" Chang Nuo said.


    "When do we leave?"


    Eneru said with obvious excitement. He has been in contact with them for a long time now and already knows about Rafdru in the pirate world. However, they have no interest in this kind of treasure, but it is also rare. Naturally, Enelu didn''t want to miss the opportunity to travel.


    "If everyone has no objections, let''s prepare. We will set off in half a month." Chang Nuo said.


    In fact, no one has any objections. Even a smile is quite expected. After all, the secret of One Piece has troubled people all over the world for so many years. For this secret, no one knows how many people have been buried in the sea. Among the ten pirates , all nine of them regard the One Piece as their ultimate goal to go to sea. Perhaps some are going for the One Piece treasure, which may be gold and silver treasures, and some people may go because they regard this thing as their goal.


    But no matter what the reason is, One Piece, a thing that only exists in Rafdru, has made countless people crazy, and caused countless people to lose their lives in the seabed.


    Therefore, they all maintain a certain degree of curiosity about this thing. Since they have the opportunity to know what is there, these people will naturally not mind it.


    There are quite a lot of people nning to go this time. After all, in addition to these few people, there are other people on the ship who need to apany them. Even if they are taking the Infinity, then they will probably need at least nearly two people to go to Lafdrew. It can be reached only after Yue, and this time the Infinity does not n to go through the Red Earth Continent. Instead, it ns to travel directly from Fish-Man Ind to the New World. This is also the route specially arranged by Emperor Tru.


    However, leaving half a month is enough time for them to get started. After all, going to Raffdrew is of great importance, and not everyone is qualified to participate. So even the people who went there this time were almost all very trustworthy people from the Tru Empire.


    Even if they find out the secret of Rafdrew One Pieceter, is it possible that they really dare to reveal it to the world?


    Thinking about it, I know it is impossible. Once this matter is conveyed by the Tohru Empire, then not only will it face threats from the navy and the world government, but more importantly, the four emperors of the new world may not be able to One would be willing to let the Tru Empire go.


    Until now, no one has dared to touch the secret treasure of the Pirate King. Didn��t the former Rocks Pirates know about it? Which of the four emperors has ever thought about this? Let��s not talk about the red-haired Shanks among the four emperors. He has probably witnessed the true face of One Piece. As for the other three four emperors, each of them is the existence that supports the new world. Are these people really not there? Interested, to find out what this thing is?


    Anyone who uses their brains should be able to guess it. The Rocks Pirates have probably discovered the true identity of the Ralf Drew One Piece, but for them, no one dares to publish its contents. Come out, because if this happens, even they themselves may not dare to guess what kind of situation they will face.


    That''s why Changnuo nned to take these people this time to explore the true veil of One Piece.


    Half a monthter.


    The Infinity cruise ship shed its cloak of invisibility and then revealed its true form at the port.


    In the past few years, he has actually been existing on the South China Sea, but for the same few years, he has been invisible, and no one can see him, even few people in this country. Able to notice or know of the ship''s existence.


    The people who are now preparing to board the ship have already appeared here early in the morning. No one noticed it, and no one knew about it. They seemed toe and leave quietly.


    This time there were a total of 36 people participating. Except for the top brass in the army, the rest were almost all the apanying two chefs, Gogoya, and some people responsible for other trivial matters.


    After all, there is no need for any navigators on this ship. The system possessed by the Infinity is enough to allow them to avoid any risks.


    It''s just that this departure can be regarded as a perfect trip for them. There is nothing on the great route ahead, but after arriving in the new world, even the Infinity needs to abide by the navigation rules andws of the new world.


    On the ship, most of them had never been to this ce before. It was their first time to see such luxurious decoration. No one was not surprised, except of course the blind man Yixiao.


    On the Infinity cruise ship, except for the core control room, almost all other ces can be entered and exited at will. Anyway, there are so many rooms here that almost everyone can have one. At least there is no need to worry about theck of any entertainment facilities on the ship.


    "Sea Spirit, locate the new world of Ravdru, and set off from the Fishman Ind via the Grand Route!"


    As soon as he got on the boat, Chang Nuo started talking directly.


    "The system has received it and is locating the new world Ravdru!"


    The system sound on the ship rang mechanically, and everyone on the ship could hear it. However, less than ten secondster, the mechanical system sound once again prompted "The location of Lafdru in the New World has been determined, and non-stop is expected throughout the journey." It will take 65 days, the navigation has been confirmed, and thender can modify the navigation route by himself!"


    "Let''s go~"


    Following Changnuo''s order, the Infinity slowly began to automatically reverse and sail. The initial speed was not particrly fast in the early stage, but when it became more and more stable, the speed of the entire cruise ship had already begun to reach nearly 50 knots. about.

 Chapter 257 A different sun

    <h4>Chapter 257 A different sun</h4>


    Going to the Grand Line in the windless zone saves more than halfpared to the road.


    On the Grand Line, the Infinity sailed almost directly in the direction of Fish-Man Ind. After all, the road to the Fish-Man Ind had to pass through the Chambord Inds, but for this ce, Changnuo was really quite confident. Curious, the group did not go to the Chambord Inds to take a look when theyst went to Mariejoia. Even though they are so close, this situation cannot be missed this time.


    There is nothing memorable or interesting in the first half of the Grand Line. The only ce that might be considered rtively good is probably Shampoo Land.


    The Infinity went there almost in a straight line, without stopping at any inds in the middle. The supplies on the ship were enough for a month. Fortunately, there were not many people going there this time. On the huge cruise ship, there were or various substances that need to be consumed.


    on board.


    "Your Majesty, would you like toe down and have a swim together?"


    Gogoya stayed in the swimming pool, wearing a bikini, and shouted to Changnuo who was lying on the edge of the swimming pool basking in the sun.


    There are several people basking in the sun side by side. Even though he usually has a serious smile on his face, he is still lying here side by side, but the only difference is that there is a bowl of noodles in front of him. I don''t know what''s wrong with this guy. , after finishing the meal, he insisted on eating another meal, as if he had something to think about.


    "Your Majesty, beauty Gogoya invites you to go swimming!"


    Junhe was lying there, turning his face to Changnuo and talking.


    "Why don''t you go?"


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes and enjoyed the sun bath leisurely, unwilling to even open his eyes.


    "I would like to, but after eating the devil fruit, I can''t touch any sea water, otherwise I would have jumped in!" Junhe said.


    "This is not sea water, nothing will happen if you jump in!"


    "Really, Your Majesty?"


    Enelu asked with excitement on his face.


    "This makes me want to go swimming. I don''t know how long I haven''t swum. Now I have almost forgotten how to swim?" Moshank also said.


    "All the filtered water here is fresh water, and all the impurities in the seawater have been removed, so you don''t have to worry about any impact when swimming here. The effects of seawater on ability users have long been deprived. At this time, you can still Don''t you want to have fun?" Chang Nuo said leisurely.


    "Ha!! Then I can''t wait!"


    Enelu shouted loudly, but he was only wearing a pair of beach shorts at the moment. After hearing these words, he couldn''t bear it anymore and jumped up from the lounge chair and jumped into the water.


    When he first jumped into the water, Enelu drank two mouthfuls of water subconsciously, but when he finally realized that he was not affected, he started to scream in surprise after swimming out of the water.


    None of the Devil Fruit users present are like this. After all, they all live by the sea. Let alone swimming, even taking a bath is sometimes difficult to do. Normally, water is used to wipe the body when taking a bath. It is also a great torture for them sometimes.


    But this time it was different. There was a huge swimming pool in front of them, where they could have a good swim. It was not just Anilu who was excited. Junhe and Moshank were also excited at the same time.


    Especially Moshank, this guy didn''t know when he ate the devil fruit. He didn''t care about the shirt on his body and jumped in as well.


    The most ufortable thing in the swimming pool at the moment should be Gogoya''s. I was swimming well here, but I didn''t expect that after these big men suddenly jumped in, the originally calm water surface has now be unstable. poverty.


    ��What a disappointment!!��


    Gogoya said speechlessly, then started to grab the handrail next to the swimming pool and climbed up, wearing a swimsuit and lying directly on the sun lounger next to Changnuo.


    "I said, can you pay attention to the impact? There are all men on this ship, and you are the only one dressed so sexy. What if it makes people uncontrobly restless?"


    Chang Nuo said leisurely with his eyes closed.


    "I would never have such an idea. Since His Majesty the King has already proposed it, it seems that only His Majesty the King can do this kind of thing?"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Yixiao, who was lying not far away, also started teasing.


    "Is it possible that His Majesty is getting restless?" Gogoya said with a teasing look on his face.


    "I asked you two to have a good time in the sun. This beautiful weather makes you think there are dark clouds!" Chang Nuo said speechlessly.


    "Why are you so shy! His Majesty the King is already an adult!"


    Gogoya''s voice was muttering, and he justy there, turning his head, looking at Chang Nuo who had his eyes closed, and said with a smile.


    Gogoya was only three years older than Chang Nuo. At this moment, he exuded a mature scent. With his fair skin and slender figure, he was already the dream lover of most men.


    "Oh~" Chang Nuo sighed helplessly. He really couldn''t stand the other party''s provocation, so he could only sit up and turn his head and look at Gogoya lying there.


    This woman just wore a swimsuit, and sometimes she looked vaguely visible, but this didn''t attract Chang Nuo at all. After all, there were women in the house.


    But on this vast sea, a group of men can''t talk about such a special topic directly, and they are not like the pirates who talk about everything openly!


    "Hai Ling, where is the next ind?"


    Changnuo could only open his mouth to change the topic and called Hai Ling, the system of the Infinity cruise ship.


    The second after the voice fell, Hai Ling slowly appeared in front of several people and respectfully said to Chang Nuo, "Your Majesty, it is estimated that we will reach Lolosi Ind in one day''s journey."


    "What is this ce?"


    "Your Majesty, I know a little bit about this ce. It is an uninhabited ind, but it is called a breathing ind. Anyway, many people go in and nevere out!" Yixiao followed.


    "Your Majesty the King, do we need to dock at Rolosi Ind?" Hai Ling asked.


    "No need, just move forward!" Chang Nuo said.


    After all, there is no use in docking on an ind with nothing. People like them don''t need to go through any more experiences. Instead of doing this, it is better to continue moving forward and find a more reliable ce to stop and take a walk. It''s what they want.

 Chapter 258 Chambord Islands

    <h4>Chapter 258 Chambord Inds</h4>


    In the first half of the Grand Line, they could directly ignore any maic field and do not need any navigation, heading directly towards the Chambord Inds, saving at least two months of travel in the middle.


    But even so, it would take at least about ten days for them to reach the Chambord Inds. Although they did not need to dock at any inds during this period, they still needed to buy supplies and continue moving forward after arriving there. OK.


    But on this ship, they don''t have boring trips every day. At least they are much morefortable than those pirates.


    The Shampoo Inds are also called Bubble Ind. Although it is an ind, it is not made of soil, but an ind formed by the growth of redwood trees.


    This ce ispletely different from all other inds. No matter how you pass through the first half of the Great Line, you must pass through this ind before heading to the New World. The huge redwood trees seem to have grown to the sky. Every tree The height is at least close to 1 kilometer.


    Each ind is named ording to the redwood tree number, ranging from No. 1 to No. 79, and the area of ??each ind is not particrlyrge, but if connected, it still has a veryrge area.


    Each area has its own independent nning. Of course, this ce will not restrict anyone froming. Over time, this ce has also formed awless zone. The Celestial Dragons, pirates, navy and ordinary people are here. The dark zone already belongs to this ce. Synonymous with the people who can live here, no one is as simple as they seem on the surface.


    The Endless slowly began to move closer to this side. On the big tree on the edge of where they were approaching was written 41. The number was veryrge and painted with white paint. It could be seen clearly from a distance.


    The Shampoo Inds have always been a transit point for pirates on the first half of all great routes. No matter which direction theye from, the final gathering ce is in this connected ind.


    But it must be mentioned that thendscape of this ind is extremely exquisitepared to other inds in the first half of the Great Route.


    "Your Majesty the King, the scenery here is so beautiful. Can I also go for a walk?"


    On the deck of the Endless, Gogoya asked excitedly and expectantly.


    Nowadays, the Infinity has turned on the invisible state, and it is almost difficult for ordinary people to detect it from the outside. However, if you look carefully, you can still see some clues in the water sshing behind him.


    As the ship began to slowly dock and moored at the edge, many people had gathered on the deck, and everyone began to look at the scenery of this ce curiously.


    Most people were looking up at the huge redwood tree, and they were sighing from time to time.


    "Everyone can go upter, but at least two people are allowed to go up. No one is allowed to go alone. You only have one day!"


    Chang Nuo began to give instructions.


    There is no need to leave anyone on the ship at all. Anyway, as long as the Infinity can activate its self-defense while they are gone, no one will be able to get close to the ship.


    "Are you interested in apanying me to a ce? There will probably be someone there who will surprise you all!" Chang Nuo once again said to the generals standing beside him.


    "I wonder who His Majesty the King is talking about who can surprise us all?" Yixiao said.


    "I haven''t heard of anyone staying here in the Chambord Inds? Can your Majesty reveal it first?" Abona asked with the same smile.


    "Let''s go! We''ll know when the timees!"


    Chang Nuo said, and then jumped directly from the edge of the ship''s deck.


    In Land No. 41, there are still many ships docked at the edge, but most of them are pirate ships. Even if there are pirates whoe here at this time and prepare to go to the new world, there are also many pirates, but in this time Among the many people, how many can sessfully cross the sea and reach the new world?


    But this is obviously not something they should focus on.


    After everyone got off the boat, so many people did not set off together. Almost all of them started to move towards other ces in twos and threes.


    Changnuo led four people with the strength of generals and began to move forward with a clear goal and direction.


    Here, thend will start to bubble upward at any time, and all these bubbles will gather above the Shampoo Inds, about 500 meters away, and then begin to burst.


    A group of people had no intention of hiding their identities, and just walked alone on this leisurely andfortable road.


    Their appearance did not attract anyone''s attention, and no one even noticed them, but not everyone would not pay attention, at least when they just walked out of No. 41, they had already walked towards them. It looked like a dozen people.


    In this ce, fights are almostmon. As long as they are alone or are not seen as strong by others, their fate will be to either be captured and used as ves, or to be directly extorted for money. Anyway, the big fish eats the small fish, and the small fish eats the shrimp. This situation is almost everywhere in the Shampoo Inds.


    "Ahaha~, it seems that there is a new person on this ind!"


    "Captain, judging from their clothes, they should be quite wealthy?"


    "I didn''t expect that we could make a fortune before we left? Guys, take them down!"


    The person who spoke was a man who looked like a pirate. He was wearing a captain''s robe behind him, a ck hat of an unspeakable shape on his head, and a big beard. He didn''t look like a good guy!


    The six Changnuo people were walking here, facing the mor of those in front, all of them showed curious expressions.


    "Your Majesty the King, it seems like someone ising to rob us ahead?" Yixiao said with a smile while leaning on his cane.


    "I wonder who gave these people the courage?" Junhe shook his head slightly and said with a smile.


    Now they were still about ten meters away from them, and these pirates began to eagerly draw their long knives from their bodies, and a group of people quickly surrounded them.


    Then the guy on the periphery who seemed to be the pirate captain began toe towards this direction with a pace as if he didn''t recognize his rtives.


    A few people didn''t say anything, they just wanted to see what the other party wanted to do next.


    In thiswless zone, only strength and fists can decide everything. However, this situation often urs in almost the entire pirate world.

 Chapter 259 Abona’s Fear

    <h4>Chapter 259 Abona��s Fear</h4>


    "Your Majesty, let me solve it!"


    It was rare and rare for Moshank to say this. After all, this guy usually had a meticulous expression, which made him almost non-existent at ordinary times.


    "Moshank, do we still need to deal with this kind of person?" Junhe said.


    "Ahaha~, guys, we are the Bearded Pirates, and we happened to be passing by today. We are so destined to meet you, should we pay some price for this fate?"


    The bearded pirate captain walked over with a cheerful and fierce look on his face.


    "Anyone really dares to be a pirate these days? Moshank, please solve it and don''t waste our time."


    Chang Nuo looked at the bearded guy speechlessly, not only because the other person''s face was ugly, but more importantly because the other person''s tone of voice could smell a sour feeling even from a distance.


    Everyone even doubted how this guy became a captain. With such a loud tone, it is estimated that waves could be felt within a 10-meter radius.


    "Huh? Solve it?"


    The bearded captain had just finished saying this, with an unquestionable look on his face, and his expression was even full of provocation.


    "Leave it to me, Your Majesty!"


    Mo Sank walked out with a serious face. The dozen or so people surrounding them could almost be ignored. For Chang Nuo and the others, the appearance of this group of people was just a small episode.


    I didn''t even bother tomunicate with them even with two extra sentences.


    The bearded pirate captain seemed to sense something was wrong. Why was the other party''s expression so calm, but then he was speechless?


    Moshank just stayed in ce, waved his palm forward, and a ming feather prated directly through his whole body. Even a surprised expression or cry was not heard, and the whole person was instantly annihted in the original ce.nd.


    Everything happened in an instant. Just one feather made the other party still maintain the same expression as before. Then, Moshank once again sent out more than a dozen feathers from his body, all of which were urate. Hit the dozen pirates surrounding them.


    This group of people still maintained their standing posture, and even the expressions on their faces did not change. Everyone seemed to be frozen.


    After doing all this, Chang Nuo didn''t even have the desire to nce at him, and just started walking forward.


    After everyone had passed, a gust of wind blew, and the group of pirates instantly turned into ashes, leaving not even a trace behind.


    This is today''s Moshank, Phoenix Fire, which can evenpletely surpass the ability of the natural fire fruit. With powerful mes and precise control, and after several years of training, Moshank''s strength has long been Above the general.


    Especially the devil fruit''s fire ability can even reach a higher temperature than Admiral Akainu''s rock berry fruit.


    A small episode was inadvertently erased without the slightest trace. It was as if those people had never appeared, and without even any greeting, they hadpletely disappeared from this world.


    After this incident was over, they didn''t stop at all and continued walking forward. For some of them, at this time, they turned their heads for fear that they wouldn''t even be able to remember what the other person looked like.


    After walking out of the ind No. 41, the number on the next big tree was already disyed in front of several people.


    Ind No. 15 has clear and conspicuous words marked on the top. All the inds in the outer circle are inds withrge numbers, and all the inds in the inner circle are small numbers. Although I am not sure how these things are marked, I just However, the existence of the archipgo in this project area may have been hundreds of years old.


    "This ce is indeed the darkest ce. I never imagined that such a ce could exist under the nose of the Navy. Now the Navy''s inaction has reached this level!" Yixiao sighed.


    "Mr. Yixiao, why should you mind this kind of thing? There are too many dark ces in this world now. Maybe one day, when the Tru Empire has enough strength, we may be able to shine our light on everyone in this world. A corner." Junhe said with a smile.


    "You are right, and I really hope that day cane sooner."


    "Don''t worry! All this wille sooner orter. After all, shining light on the whole world, these things cannot be aplished by just a few of us. From now on, if you work together, I believe that the Tru Empire will be able to achieve this level. .��


    After hearing what Yixiao said, Changnuo nodded in approval and said.


    "Although I say this, I can already smell a disgusting smell before I get inside." Abona said with a slightly serious expression, then turned to look at everyone and said, "The group of Tianlong people appeared in front of us. Things, should we take a detour?"


    "Then what''s there to worry about? Can they still eat us?" Junhe said.


    "Dragon people!! The worms in this world." Yixiao said.


    "Your Majesty the King, although I am very reluctant to say this, we are unlikely to be exposed too much during this trip. It would be better to go around if we can!" Abona asked.


    "No need, just leave like this, wait until we meet again." Chang Nuo said with a slightly raised corner of his mouth.


    He has nothing to worry about, so what if he meets a Celestial Dragon? Is it possible that they really dare to let themselves kneel down to them? This kind of thing is almost universally understood.


    "Abona, ording to the status of His Majesty the King and the current status of the Tru Empire, even the dragon people cannot ask us to do anything. Even if the navy admirales, how can they do it? Besides, , the Toru Empire is a first-level member country of the World Government, and has the authority not to bow to any Tianlong people." Junhe agreed.


    Hearing this, Abona could only frown and said nothing more. Even though he was now so powerful that even the admiral could not do anything to him, his past experiences seemed to have formed a kind of feeling in his heart. Obstacles, even if this obstacle is not removed in time, may hinder his future progress.


    During the four years of being a ve to the Celestial Dragons, Abona experienced pain that no one else could see. Hispanions left him one by one in front of him, but even so, he still couldn''t see anything from the Celestial Dragons'' side. At the dawn of time, so what if we have great strength? In Mariejoia, even the generals have no guarantee of victory.


    Not to mention Abona, who was not so powerful back then.

 Chapter 260 The arrogance of the Tianlong people

    <h4>Chapter 260 The arrogance of the Tianlong people</h4>


    For those present, only Changnuo and Junhe knew that Abona was once a ve of the Tianlong people. Others did not know, and the two of them would never tell this matter, but now they looked at each other His expression was clearly not what a general of the Tru Empire should have.


    Changnuo was still walking straight ahead. It didn''t matter even if he met the Tianlong people. He seemed to be fearless anyway. At the same time, he was not worried that he would be discovered by the navy when he was traveling. They were not marines. Even if thieves go to the new world, the navy can''t do anything about it.


    The original purpose of entering the new world from Fish-Man Ind was to prevent the World Government and Navy from discovering it, which would cause unnecessary trouble. But at least along the way, they began to face these things calmly. , people like myself have not done anything shameful, so why should we be afraid of all this.


    But even if they are not worried about being discovered by the navy or the world government, they still don''t want to do anything extra. There is no need to make their trip known to everyone. Once discovered by those reporters, I am afraid the whole world will know that the emperor of the Toru Kingdom has left. My own country still carries the generals of the Tru Empire with me. On the cusp of such a storm, I don''t know how much public opinion it will need to arouse.


    But now that everyone has arrived at this ce, there is no use thinking about those things anymore.


    Everyone followed His Majesty the King and walked forward step by step.


    The Shampoo Inds is indeed a very elegant ce, and Site 15 looks even more so. Except for the huge redwood tree, the rest are undtingwns. Except for the roads, thewns are always there. Bubbles began to bubble toward the outside, and all of them were suspended one by one until they reached the top.


    Here, they have no extra steps and are moving forward with a very clear goal.


    But not long after, they had already reached the middle of Site 15, which are residential areas with a lot of people. However, almost all the pedestrians on the road in these ces were kneeling, and no one was still standing. The street The width is not veryrge. Among the people kneeling there are ordinary people, pirates and even some wealthy businessmen who may not know their identity. However, they are kneeling in the same direction, that is, two people in clothes are slowlying from the street. A man wearing white clothes and a huge ss dome on his head.


    The two celestial beings were riding under people. One looked taller and braver, but he was lying on the ground with all four limbs wrapped in chains. There was also an explosion hanging around his neck simr to the one he encountered when he rescued Abona. Something like a cor.


    As the two ves crawled, the chains on their bodies rubbed against the ground, making a harsh sound. However, the Celestial Dragons riding on them did not feel anything about it.


    On this street, inparison, the few standing people are in sharp contrast to those kneeling. Their appearance can be spotted even from a distance.


    "You don''t seem to enjoy living here that much? It seems that no matter whether you are a person from the dark world or a person of all levels, they will have a different face whenever they encounter this kind of situation. It is really ridiculous to say it!"


    Junhe looked at the two Tianlong people with ss covers on their heads who were walking slowly over, and said helplessly.


    "Isn''t this the world? A being who has been at the top of mankind since birth. The Celestial Dragons can ignore any rules of this world. The world''s shorings and bugs are really funny to watch!" Mo Sank Also said.


    "Let''s go, don''t cause too many things here." Chang Nuo nced in the direction over there and said.


    They didn''t have to go in the direction of the Tianlong people. They just walked across the street in another direction. They were now about two hundred meters away from where the Tianlong people were. Chang Nuo had no idea of ??causing trouble and just crossed the street. He passed through without trying to attract the other person''s attention.


    But the reality waspletely different from what they thought. The two Celestial Dragons wearing ss masks on their heads seemed to have already focused their eyes on them. The moment they just crossed the street, these two guys had already discovered .


    And one of them looked at the slightly younger Tianlong and said to the people next to him, "Oh~, I didn''t expect there are still people standing, and they dare to ignore our existence!"


    "Holy Tismoa, these despicable reptiles dare to walk in front of us, they really should be taught a lesson!"


    The Tianlong man next to him also said the same.


    Under the same clothes, they all have ugly faces. They don''t take anyone seriously at all. Their aloof appearance is their usual right.


    "It''s really despicable. It''s all your fault for crawling so slowly for nothing!" Tismoya sat on this man''s back and kept stepping on his shoulders with her feet, and said angrily while stepping on him.


    Seeing that Chang Nuo and the others were almost crossing the street, Tismoya took out a golden pistol directly from the drugstore, then ced it in front of him and began to aim at Chang Nuo and the others.


    "Sage Mokalon Lin, do you think I can hit them from such a long distance?" Tismoya said with a smile on his face.


    "It''s really hard to say this. Then you need to see your own strength?" Mokalonlin said.


    "Bang~"


    As Tismoya pulled the trigger in his hand, the pistol in his hand suddenly burst out with bullets, flying towards their direction.


    The distance between them now is only about 150m, but in fact, ording to this distance, it is impossible to touch the pistol in this guy''s hand. Let''s not talk about whether it can hit such a distance. What''s the harm?


    It''s just that this move of the other partypletely angered Chang Nuo. He was very dissatisfied with the Tianlong people. Now he dared to do such a move to him in public.


    Although the bullet did not hurt any of them, Chang Nuo, who was still walking, had almost begun to leave the sight of the two Tianlong people. But at this time, Chang Nuo unexpectedly turned back. And started to move towards the two Tianlong people.


    This scene was something that none of the kneeling people had expected. Although these people did not dare to turn their heads, they still turned their faces and looked towards them. Everyone was talking to themselves about the identities of these people and why they were here. It didn''t matter if he didn''t kneel in front of the Tianlong people, and he even dared to run rampant and walked directly towards this side.

 Chapter 261 Let’s have a good chat

    <h4>Chapter 261 Let��s have a good chat</h4>


    But it is not that there is no one among these people who does not recognize them. At least among the kneeling people, there are a few who can''t help but tremble after seeing the true face of Chang Nuo and his party. .


    "Emperor Tru of the South China Sea!!!"


    One of them started shouting uncontrobly. Although the voice was not loud, there were still a few people nearby who could hear it.


    The reputation of King Tru of the South China Sea has been spread throughout the pirate world, not to mention staying in a dark ce like the Chambord Inds. As long as anyone lives here, no one is well-informed.


    But these two Tianlong people seemed not to be the same thing at all, but the guys in suits behind them were all on guard and quickly ran forward to block the two Tianlu people. before.


    "This group of despicable reptiles actually dare to stand in front of us Tianlong people."


    Tismoya roared loudly, and then looked at a guy wearing a suit and sunsses, holding a long knife in his hand, and some guys whose faces couldn''t be seen at all, shouting, "Bess, go kill these despicable people." reptile!"


    "I''m sorry, Saint Tismoya. We can''t do this. The only thing we can do is to hope that you two can leave as soon as possible!"


    The man named Bess opened his mouth and said leisurely.


    There was no fear or emotion in his tone, it was as if he was speaking like a robot.


    But after hearing this, these two Tianlong people couldn''t listen. In front of them, who had always been in a superior position, there were actually a few people who were disrespectful to them, which made them particrly annoyed.


    "You dare not go up, Mokaron Lin Sheng, use the phone bug to call the navy headquarters and ask them to send the navy admiral!" Tismoya said.


    "Don''t worry, Saint Tismoya, I''ll start calling right away." Mokalon Lin said, still smiling.


    Tismoya was still unwilling to be left alone at this moment. He picked up his pistol again and shot in the direction of Chang Nuo.


    The group of people kneeling on the ground had begun to retreat slowly. They were crawling on the ground and moving little by little. Especially the people who were closer to the two Tianlong people were desperate to escape. Same.


    Changnuo led a few people and began to slowly continue to approach the two Tianlong people. Mokaronglin had also used the phone bug in his hand to call the nearest admiral of the navy headquarters, and the moment the other party received the notification , and was already rushing towards this side quickly.


    On a naval warship near the Shampoo Inds, Kizaru happened to be here, so the moment he received the notice, his whole body turned into a stream of light and began to fly towards this side.


    "Your Majesty the King, how do you n to treat these two Tianlong people?" Yixiao asked calmly as he followed behind.


    "How else can we deal with it? There shouldn''t be any problem if we just teach him a lesson. Now is not the time to fall out with the navy!" Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Since His Majesty has this idea, let his subordinates take the lead." Mo Sanke took two quick steps forward and said over Chang Nuo.


    However, just as he was speaking, this guy Tismoya had already fired several shots in their direction. Although his shooting skills were not very good, the bullets could still whistle from some people''s ears. Pass.


    As the people on both sides got closer and closer, when they were less than 50 meters apart, the two Draco guys were still chatting with each other with smiles on their faces, not taking this matter seriously at all. .


    "Holy Tismoya, don''t say that I haven''t warned you. The other party is the king of the South China Sea Tru Empire, a being who can be on an equal footing with the navy and the Four Emperors. Now please leave first, and we stay to stop them!" Behind the Tianlong people! Bes said again.


    But his voice was still as calm as before, and there was no emotion in his words.


    "You''re such a useless waste, I''ll talk to my father about itter. It''s such a shame to be such a useless waste!" Tismoya looked at Bess and said.


    As one of his own dogs, he dared to have stage fright in the end, which made him, the Heavenly Dragon Sage, a little embarrassed.


    Now there are almost a dozen men in ck suits standing in front of the Tianlong people. Each of them is meticulously guarding the Changnuo people who areing here. For them, there is no trace of fear on their expressions. , almost all of them are robots without the slightest emotion.


    "Moshank, get rid of these people in front first, and let memunicate with the two Heavenly Dragon Saints."


    As Chang Nuo walked, he said to Mo Sank who was walking in front of him.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King."


    As Moshank spoke, he raised his right hand slightly, and then a series of fire feathers flew out towards the group of men in suits standing over there.


    But this group of people is not without any strength. The moment these fire feathers came over, the people in front had already started to dodge quickly, but even so, there were more than a dozen men in ck suits. It waspletely destroyed in just an instant.


    Even if they wanted to stop it, it would have no effect at all. Everything was nned.


    At least after dealing with these dozen people, the two Tianlong people staying behind felt a little scared when they saw this scene.


    "Bess, stop them, you bitch, hurry up!"


    Tismoya was already a little frightened, not only shouting to Bess who was standing next to him like a robot, but also to the man who was also shouting and kicking his feet.


    "Why are you leaving in such a hurry? You are a Tianlong, no matter how bad you are? We won''t kill you, but you just attacked us, and you want to leave now. It seems a bit unreasonable, right?" Chang Nuo walked up to calm down. Said slowly.


    However, at this moment, reporters hiding in other ces had already filmed this scene, and even the words between them had been recorded, making it a live broadcast.


    However, the scene that happened today, no matter what, will definitely be the focus of news in the entire world. The incident of the South China Sea Tru Emperor Hard Steel Tianlong will definitely cause a huge wave of public opinion for a while.


    But this is just the beginning.


    Tismoya no longer had the same arrogance as before, but after hearing the other party say that he did not dare to kill the two of them, every bit of confidence seemed to be gradually regained.


    He doesn''t know who Emperor Tru of the South China Sea is. Staying in this ce, no one can harm the existence of the Tianlong people.


    Because from the beginning to now, there is only one person who has really targeted the Tianlong people, and that is the Golden Lion Shiji who was once imprisoned in Impel Down City.

 Chapter 262 Don’t mind obliterating the other party

    <h4>Chapter 262 Don��t mind obliterating the other party</h4>


    Now, only Bess was left beside the two Tianlong people. However, the other party had no intention of taking action. He stood obediently without moving at all. He even began to ignore the two Tianlong people. Life and death, as if everything has nothing to do with him.


    Chang Nuo and his party were still slowly approaching the two Tianlong people, but when the distance was less than 3 meters away, the other party finally began to show a state of panic on his face, and he kept stepping hard. The fear in the eyes of the ve at his feet was already reflected.


    "Mokaronlin, stop here and stop him!"


    Tismoya saw that the skinny guy Mokaronlin was riding was actually running faster than him. His expression was no longer frightened, and he started shouting at him angrily.


    Mokaronlin didn''t seem to hear this. He asked the ves under his feet to crawl faster while still kicking hard with his feet. But even if the people behind him walked slowly, they could still keep up with their climbing speed.


    "Hey~, no matter who they are, don''t touch the Tianlong people~"


    Just when Changnuo and the others were about to approach Tismoya, a voice came directly over, and then as a golden light fell in the middle of the people on both sides, the figure of Navy Headquarters General Kizaru began to slowly Revealed.


    "General!! Kill them quickly!!"


    When Saint Tismoya saw Navy Kizaruing over, he immediately felt that Kizaru had be the most kind person to him.


    Faced with such a situation, this guy yelled at him at the top of his lungs. Because he was too angry, the expression on his face began to gradually be distorted.


    "It''s really been a long time since west met? Think about it, it must have been several years! General Kizaru!" Changnuo said leisurely.


    "How scary!! I didn''t expect that the little guy I met back then has grown into such a behemoth." Kizaru also said.


    Today, the other party still maintains his original appearance, wearing yellow clothes and a pair of burgundy sunsses. His outfit and personality are still the same as before, except that his mouth seems to be more crooked when speaking. Some.


    "It''s really an honor. At least in terms of life, he is not as casual as General Kizaru. He can go wherever he wants when he has nothing to do. It''s really enviable!" Changnuo said with a smile.


    "I don''t know why you came to the Shampoo Inds?" Kizaru asked.


    Chang Nuoke was not in a hurry to answer, but at the same time, at least a dozen warships began to rush towards this side of the sea. Everyone was on alert. These dozen warships Above, there are not only various vice-admirals, but also the remaining two admirals. Their goals are very consistent, and they are all heading towards the Chambord Inds.


    Today, the Toru Empire is no less dangerous than the Four Emperors. From some perspectives, it is even more dangerous than the Four Emperors of the Sea. Although it has always performed well and is a first-level member country of the World Government, every one of them Almost everyone knows that the Tru Empire is not as unambitious as they see in front of them.


    At least so far, many secrets belonging to the Toru Empire have not been investigated even by the World Government.


    After they learned that the Chambord Inds were probably upied by the King of the Tru Empire of the South China Sea and several generals apanying him, Marshal Sengoku, who was staying at the Navy Headquarters, could no longer sit still. No matter whether the result was true or false, he had already Let all the vice admirals and generals of the navy headquarter go to the Shampoo Inds as soon as possible.


    But even so, it would take at least nearly half a day for them to rush over at the fastest speed. During this half day, if they want to do anything, they have probably alreadypleted it.


    However, the one who feels the most ufortable right now should be Admiral Kizaru on the Chambord Inds. Now he really doesn''t want to face this group of people. He can''t beat them, and he can''t say it. The key fault is still on his side. .


    "Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters, the Celestial Dragons attacked our Majesty the King with guns. Should we give an exnation for this matter?" Shunhe took a step forward and said with a serious face.


    "Ah haha~, Kizaru, kill them quickly, do you still want us Tianlong people to give an exnation?"


    Tismoya had already begun to leave in no hurry, and he spoke quite arrogantly.


    Kizaru himself didn''t want to face such a pig teammate. In such a situation, being able to keep others from being angry was the best he could do. If the other party really wanted to take action here, he would only rely on him as a general. To what extent can it be achieved?


    "He''s a bit verbose. How about asking him to shut up first?" Chang Nuo asked with interest.


    The Admiral of the Navy Headquarters has not responded to a word said by the Tianlong people since he came here. He didn''t even bother to look at the two of them. This guy Mokaron Lin is quite interesting, even if he sees When the admiral of the Navy Headquarters arrived, he still didn''t stop at all and continued to run in the other direction. That is, this guy Tismoya still stayed here and was arrogant.


    Kizaru touched his head with a headache, and said reluctantly, "The Tianlong people can''t move! Otherwise, it will cause big trouble."


    "Forget it, I won''t care about this matter anymore. I''ll keep an eye on this kind of pig from now on. I''m still in a good mood today. If I meet this kind of guy again next time..."


    Changnuo said, and stretched his face toward Kizaru with a provocative expression, and continued, "I don''t mind killing him!!"


    As soon as these words came out, Kizaru, who was originally looking embarrassed, was stunned for a moment, and then turned cold.


    But he didn''t say anything in reply, he just stood there calmly. Even for the Tianlong man behind him who was scolding him, he wanted to kick him mercilessly. At this time, others threatened him. It has been said to my ears, and I haven''t learned a lesson yet. If I hadn''t been a Celestial Dragon, I might not have survived to adulthood.


    There were many people watching this scene, and some even came from other ces to kneel on the ground. Everyone watching this performance was interested. What they saw in front of them was different from those who were hiding in the dark and peeping. The person has a smile on his face.


    The reporters even sent the news to their newspapers as quickly as possible. The big news headline the next day was probably about this incident.

 Chapter 263 Blackmail Bar

    <h4>Chapter 263 ckmail Bar</h4>


    Now that their group should have been discovered, they have been discovered. Both the World Government and the Navy have already known that they are currently in the Chambord Inds. This person who should not be in this ce is here. Time appeared here, causing an uproar, which was inevitable.


    Chang Nuo didn''t think much of the Celestial Dragons. After all, it was not time to go against the navy and the World Government so far. If the Celestial Dragons died, the impact would really be great.


    "Let''s go!" Chang Nuo turned to face the crowd and said.


    After saying that, he took the lead in taking a step back and walked back in the direction he wanted to go.


    Their good interest and mood have long been wiped out by them. Abona has gained a lot this time. After all, he can face the Tianlong people and make such a move. All he can maintain is a grateful attitude. .


    Among the people among them, it is estimated that only Junhe and himself can understand that the reason why His Majesty the King is able to achieve this level is all for his future path.


    The others didn''t say much, turned around, and began to slowly follow Chang Nuo away.


    But this scene of facing hard steel has been filmed long ago. Such a shocking scene, even themon people and other pirates kneeling on the ground, the excitement in everyone''s heart at this moment is no less than that of their own actions. Such a thing.


    The Tianlong people have been standing at the top of this world for too long. Everyone in front of them can only keep kneeling. Sometimes even raising their heads to look at them is a huge sin, but this time, it makes such a big mistake. Many people saw it directly. A person actually dared to have such an arrogant attitude towards the Tianlong people and spoke threatening words without mercy. This was what excited them.


    As the admiral of the Navy Headquarters, Kizaru just watched the other party and the others leave silently, but the inadvertent sweat on his forehead was enough to prove that he was panicked in his heart. The real panic was not that the other party dared to He did not dare to go against the World Government and the Navy, but directly did some unimaginable things to the Celestial Dragons in front of him.


    If this situation really happens, not to mention his dignity as an admiral, it will definitely cause majormotion in the world in the future.


    At least it can be proved to the outside world that the Tianlong people are not sacrosanct existences. They, the worms of the world, can also be obliterated and can also be despised.


    "Kizaru, as a navy, why don''t you obey my orders? Why don''t you kill these low-grade reptiles?"


    Up to now, Tismoa was still yelling angrily, and he had even transferred his anger to the admiral who protected him.


    Kizaru nced helplessly, and said with the same cold eyes, "I hope you can maintain this attitude in the future. I think you should consider how to exin this matter to Wu Laoxing!"


    After saying that, Kizaru continued to look at the backs of Changnuo and the others who had begun to move away from the crowd.


    He was curious, what was the purpose of the other partying to this ce? It is impossible for a person with such power and status to suddenly appear in the Shampoo Inds after being silent for several years.


    But if he were to catch up and ask, this situation would be even less likely to happen.


    The news that Emperor Tru of the South China Sea appeared in the Chambord Inds slowly began to spread from one to another, and this matter began to be deified, including how he despised the Celestial Dragons. Being praised endlessly by others.


    After getting out of the sight of others, Abona quickly walked to the front on this quiet and uninhabited path. Now he was already his own, and there was no need to hide anymore.


    "Your Majesty the King..."


    Before Abona started speaking, his body had already begun to slowly kneel down. However, Chang Nuo just nced at him. The other person''s already bent body was slowly and uncontrobly standing upright. body.


    "The Toru Empire has no etiquette in this regard. Don''t let this kind of thinking upy your ideas. In the future, I still count on you to be the world''s greatest swordsman. Stay in the Toru Empire and stay by my side. I hope you can maintain The dignity that a strong man deserves will never let you lower your head at any time or anywhere."


    Changnuo patted Abona on the shoulder and said seriously.


    After saying that, he directly walked around the other party and continued to walk forward. Junhe followed him, and he also patted him twice on the shoulder. Although Moshank didn''t understand what was going on, he still followed suit. I took two pictures of the person in front.


    Blind Smile really showed a knowing smile at this moment. Although he was not like the others, when he walked to Abona, he still paused slightly and did not express any words, but this was enough to prove everything.


    As for the two people following him, they had no right to make any statements about their country''s generals.


    Abona seemed to be relieved, and his originally silent expression slowly began to smile, and he turned around and followed quickly.


    This time is not just a plot point, but more importantly, it is for Abona to release his inner fear, at least not to let the previous treatment of the Tianlong people form an obstacle in his heart.


    No. 13, this ce is a rtively lively ce. There are peopleing and going on the streets on both sides. Although many people know Changnuo, few of them have seen it. Even though a few people swaggered past them. No one will feel fear or familiarity after passing by.


    The people following were always curious as to where His Majesty the King was taking them. Now that they had arrived at the center of the Chambord Inds, they still had no intention of staying.


    But until they came to a strange ce, judging from the door, this ce was not a particrly luxurious ce. Although it did not look very shabby, it could be seen at a nce that this ce had existed for many years.


    "I''ll treat you all to a drink today. If you want something to drink, just say it."


    Changnuo stopped in front of a bar. The key is that the name of this bar really makes people want to have wild thoughts. ckmail Bar. You can tell at a nce that it is not a good ce, but in the Chambord Inds, no matter where it is, it is probably not the best ce. There are some good things out there, but it''s still surprising that such a bar is named so tantly.


    "Your Majesty, this ce doesn''t look as good as expected?" Junhe said.


    "I''m more interested, I can''t wait!" Yixiao seemed to have discovered something, a smile appeared on the corner of his mouth, he raised his head slightly and rolled his eyes.

 Chapter 264 Acquaintance

    <h4>Chapter 264 Acquaintance</h4>


    To other people, this ce doesn''t look that good, and it can be said to be average. There aren''t many bars like this in the True Empire. There''s nothing surprising about staying in this ce, at least other ces. People would think so.


    The door is not so luxuriously decorated, it just has a few words hanging on it, but it is this ce that attracts them.


    "ckmail Bar" seems to outsiders to not let people in just hearing the name, not to mention that the environment of this ce is not as good as imagined, but it is in a mixed ce, and no one can survive here. Does strength exist?


    "Let''s go in and take a look at this ce that we have only heard of by name but never seen before!" Chang Nuo said with some anticipation.


    It is estimated that except for a smile, others did not understand what it meant, but even so, seeing that His Majesty the King had begun to walk inside, the remaining people also began to prepare to walk inside.


    But just before they entered, there was a sudden shout of "How dare youe here to drink if you don''t have money?"


    As soon as he finished speaking, a figure flew out of the room in an instant, and thennded heavily on the ground. It seemed motionless anyway, and no one knew whether he was alive or dead.


    People on both sides of the street seemed to be used to this, and no one was surprised, except for the guy who was lying on the ground after hiding for a while.


    There is no curtain at the door of the bar, it is just a door, without even the slightest decoration. When the door is opened, there are quite a lot of people sitting in the room, but no matter how you look at it, sitting here The images of people are almost all pirates, without any exception.


    The entire bar is not particrly big. There is a counter about 3 meters long next to the door. There are various drinks behind it, but in fact these things are not very famous. Even the drinks of Tru Empire are here. Everything is on disy.


    Chang Nuo took a look at the situation in the entire bar. At this time, the proprietress of the bar was still lowering her head to organize her wine cab, and she had not noticed the arrival of their group.


    "Have a ss of Winster, preferably on the rocks!"


    Changnuo stood by the counter and spoke directly.


    At this time, the woman who was still arranging the wine cab finally raised her head. When she saw Chang Nuo, she wondered if her eyes were wrong.


    After being stunned for a moment, the woman at the counter immediately smiled and said, "Brother, this wine is not cheap!"


    "Then from what perspective do you think I am a person who is rtively short of money?"


    "I''m really sorry. I am indeed short-sighted."


    The woman at the counter said, then she started to pick up a bottle of wine from behind and poured it into the ss, added two ice cubes to it, slowly put it on the bar, and said, "This ss is for you." , just apologize for my inappropriate words just now!"


    This woman looks about 40 years old, but she looks like a woman in her thirties. Her skin is also very well maintained. From her age, this woman should be considered a stunning beauty in their time. Although he looks good in appearance, his image is informal.


    She looked at the group of peopleing over, then took out a cigarette from her pocket, lit it, and began to puff forward slowly.


    "Would you like to have a drink too? Mr. Yixiao!"


    Xia Qi looked at the blind man and said with an even bigger smile.


    "Haha~, Beauty Xia Qi still looks the same! Nothing has changed, but I didn''t expect that after not seeing each other for decades, you would actuallye to Xiangbodi and open a bar. It''s really quite surprising. Surprised!" Yixiao said with a smile.


    "Well~, if it''s unexpected, we should be surprised. I didn''t expect that an old guy like you would actually run to the Tru Empire. Before, we thought that the justice in your heart should join the navy. Until we watched an issue before The newspaper really shocked us!" Xia Qi said.


    "What? If you join the Tru Empire, you can''t exercise the justice in your heart?"


    Chang Nuo sat on the bar chair in front of the bar, took a sip of the Wenmut in his hand, looked at Xia Qi with interest and asked.


    "You must never say such words. Emperor Tru of the South China Sea. It is our honor for you toe to our store. Besides, you have already caused such a big disaster just after you arrived at the Chambord Inds. Is it possible that Cheng Cheng is not worried about the difficulties from the World Government and the Navy?" Xia Qi said while smoking.


    "Do you think I would worry about this kind of thing? Stop joking." Chang Nuo said.


    "It seems like they know each other?"


    The people standing behind Chang Nuo were all quite surprised. Not to mention that Xia Qi actually knew Yixiao, and His Majesty the King seemed to know him too, so this trip seemed not to be that simple. ?


    Junhe seemed to be interested in him. Someone who could meet Yixiao and make General Yixiao be so polite to others could not be an unknown person in the entire pirate world.


    "When youe to Shampoo Land, you shouldn''t be nervous, but the Navy and the World Government are probably extremely nervous. This time themotion is a bit loud. It is estimated that tomorrow''s news headlines will be Your figure!" Xia Qi said with a smile.


    "I didn''t do anything bad? I didn''t vite the rules of the world government. Even if it bes the headlines, it shouldn''t matter, right?" Changnuo said.


    "Then you don''t have to worry. After you group of top-notch people leave the Tru Empire, they will take this opportunity to see how you arrived at the Sky Ind Base?" Xia Qi said, leaning forward slightly.


    The low-necked clothes themselves look even more seductive and charming at this moment. Although the age is here, the MILF still has charm.


    "This is not something you can worry about. Is there an old guy here?" Chang Nuo asked straight to the point.


    "He? I don''t know where he is? Besides, I don''t have the ability to restrain him." Xia Qi said.


    "That''s really a pity. I rarelye to the Chambord Inds once, and I want to see what this so-called legendary figure looks like? I didn''t expect it to be a pity!"


    Chang Nuo put down the wine ss in his hand and said with a slightly mncholy expression.

 Chapter 265 Invisible Bat

    <h4>Chapter 265 Invisible Bat</h4>


    He put his hand on the bar and kept tapping the stone countertop with two fingers. Everything around him seemed to be quiet instantly. There was no sound at all. Even the people drinking in the bar, one by one. They all kept their original movements and stopped.


    Xia Qi could only look at this scene in shock, but he didn''t want to say more or make any unnecessary moves.


    "I said, if you want to take pictures or record, can you share the time and asion? Don''t say I didn''t warn and remind you. If there is another time, I won''t minding to see you directly!"


    Chang Nuo spoke leisurely in the direction of the corner, his tone was unhurried and even without any expression, he was still tapping his two fingers.


    Everyone else, including Junhe, instantly became serious and remained vignt.


    At the same time, Chang Nuo followed his finger down again, and the entire bar continued to return to a noisy state. Everything seemed as if nothing had happened, but in the top corner of the bar, a figure slowly appeared.e out.


    It''s just that it''s not a human here, it looks like a bat, and it''s the kind of bat that can be invisible.


    After he showed his body, he quickly flew outside, never daring to stop at this ce again.


    However, in other ces, I don''t know how far apart, several people in a room looked at each other, and they all saw shock in each other''s eyes.


    Invisible bats are something they specially cultivated. This thing has no strength or even any vital signs. All the news and newspapers have always said. Everything was done in this way, and it had never been discovered before. Unexpectedly, this time it was an exception.


    In the past, even if they wanted to obtain information about the navy or any of the four emperors, they had never failed, but this time it was an exception.


    Inside the bar.


    "It''s better not to do this little trick next time. The world''srgest newspaper organization really has to make people feel sad sometimes!"


    Chang Nuo said to Xia Qi calmly.


    "What a powerful method. I didn''t expect that I didn''t realize it. Is there something there?"


    Yixiao took a deep breath and said.


    "Don''t worry about this kind of thing. It only happens once or twice. As long as it doesn''t happen again in the future, there will be no problem!"


    Chang Nuo was still looking at Xia Qi and said.


    "Maybe there won''t be any more in the future, but my strength is really impressive. You can discover such things." Xia Qi said.


    "There''s no way. I don''t know how many of the Tru Empire exist now. They even exist in my Sky Ind military base. How can people endure this kind of thing?"


    As Chang Nuo spoke, he stared straight at Xia Qi at the bar, as if he wanted to know some answer from the other party.


    In fact, people on both sides of this matter knew it very well. The reason why Changnuo came to this ce this time was not just for the original right-hand man of One Piece, Pluto Rayleigh, who was staying in the bar, but more importantly, for what was in front of him This woman.


    As a woman who has been known to have the strongest intelligence in the pirate world, countless people are curious about how she obtains information. But in the end there was almost no way to detect it.


    But as the number of contacts increased, I gradually became able to understand what kind of methods this woman used.


    Xia Qi appeared calm on the surface, but in fact, she was already extremely shocked in her heart. She didn��t know the ability of invisible bats too well. Although this thing didn��t have any attacks, it could move and hide almost anyone. No one with strength can detect it.


    But things on the surface still need to be passable, so she can only smile in response to the people in front of her.


    "Now that you''re all here, you can order whatever you want to drink. I can still afford the cost!" Chang Nuo said to everyone.


    "Have a bottle of Camlet!"


    Enelu shouted loudly, this guy has really trained to look like an alcoholic now, I really don��t know who he learned this state from?


    Others were no longer polite. After finding a table to sit down, one by one they also began to sit there and slowly taste and enjoy.


    "Xia Qi, we haven''t seen each other for 20 years. That guy should be doing well now, right?" Yixiao asked, picking up the wine ss.


    "There is nothing good or bad. In the end, he is still the same. The Navy and the World Government already know about his existence. As long as this old guy doesn''t do something outrageous and excessive, they should not care about him!"


    Xia Qi said while still smoking.


    This woman is not as simple as she seems. Although she is just a bar owner, she was a powerful presence in the entire pirate world decades ago.


    Everyone knew who the two were talking about, and even the main purpose of theiring here this time was for this guy. Although Xia Qi said that the intelligence agency he was in charge of was also the purpose of Chang Nuo''sing here this time, this situation was almost It''s dispensable. After all, the invisible bat thing is a very secretive event for others, but for him, this thing has no solution.


    "Having said that, sometimes it''s good for you to enjoy life like this. At least the old guy still has you by his side." Yixiao said.


    His expression was not so natural when he spoke. It was obvious that he should have known the Pirate King''s group a long time ago, but there was nothing surprising about this situation.


    On this sea, anything can happen and any situation can happen. The more you see and hear the more you will naturally be ustomed to strange things.


    But in this small tavern, this topic obviously sounds a bit deep.


    Xia Qi also fell into the past scene. At least at that time, Yixiao''s appearance was quite handsome, and the two of them were about the same age. This was what everyone didn''t expect about the man in front of him who looked to be in his thirties. The woman''s actual age is already over fifty. Anyway, the Guachano in it has begun to be slowly tasted.


    "Oh~, I think you should leave quickly. The navy, including the marshal and other generals, are already heading here. It probably won''t take long to get here."


    Xia Qi suddenly woke up and said to Chang Nuo with a helpless smile.

 Chapter 266 The arrival of the naval force

    <h4>Chapter 266 The arrival of the naval force</h4>


    Chang Nuo''s expression remained calm after hearing this, as if this matter had nothing to do with him.


    After Xia Qi was discovered by others of her skills, she didn''t exin too much. The other party was able to find her side in this situation. This is enough to prove that people already understand it well. Instead of exining too much, it is better to just smile and let go.


    "Well~, Xia Qi, you are overthinking this. What will happen even if people from the Navy and the World Governmente? Our Trul Empire has not done anything excessive. Even if the Navy Marshales, it will not do anything to us. There will be no impact!"


    Chang Nuo didn''t speak. Instead, Yixiao, who was sitting next to him, opened his mouth and said.


    "That''s right!" Xia Qi said with a slight smile.


    It was quite leisurely andfortable for them here, as they should eat and drink, but the other side was not sofortable.


    Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters had a bitter look on his face ever since Chang Nuo and the others left. More importantly, he had an expression full of helplessness.


    Although the people around him were still kneeling on the spot, the Tianlong man behind him was also pressing hard from the beginning to now.


    "Kizaru, why did you let those guys go? Now even the Celestial Dragons can''t order you?"


    Tismoa said, still in a state of anger.


    But the big guy lying on the ground at his feet had his head lowered to the ground, but the corners of his mouth were smiling slightly.


    After all, it is almost too rare in this world for a Tianlong to be so angry.


    Mokaronlin ran quite fast. After Admiral Kizaru came over, his expression was still as calm as before. He had already noticed that things were not as simple as imagined. In terms of status, Generally speaking, Mokaronlin may not be as tall as Mokaronlin, but from the perspective of the identity of the Tianlong people, the two are indeed simr.


    Perhaps they have been in high positions for too long, and these Tianlong people have no respect for the people below. Even though his strength is as strong as the trash of Tismoa, he still dares to directly reprimand the navy admiral in public.


    Kizaru stood there, listening to every word with his ears. Anyway, he could say whatever he wanted with his mouth, and in the end it would have no real effect on him.


    "Are you even listening to me?!"


    Tismoa shouted to Kizaru again.


    But this time he finally responded. He turned his head and tilted his mouth and nced disdainfully, and then his whole body instantly turned into a stream of light and disappeared in front of this guy.


    As a naval admiral, although he does not have to maintain a state of special respect for the Tianlong people, their more responsibility is to protect this group of scum. When he can''t stand listening to it, he can only leave. Anyway, the danger has been eliminated now. Need to stay here any longer.


    Because his next more important thing is to find out what happened to the Tru Empire and his group when they came to the Chambord Inds.


    Being able to be a naval admiral is not only achieved in terms of strength. The sense of crisis still needs to be preserved at all times, so next he still needs to understand what the purpose of this group of people is here.


    He didn''t believe that the Tru Empire was so far away from here, and that Chang Nuo and his team were so powerful that they woulde here to travel without any trouble.


    In fact, after Admiral Huang Yuan arrived at the Chambord Inds, the most panicked people had already appeared. All the docked ships on the inds around the Chambord Inds were preparing to set sail one by one.


    Since the Admiral came to this ind, all the pirates on it have been extremely nervous, not to mention that now that Navy Kizaru has been scolded like this, in order to vent his anger, the oue of this group of pirates can be imagined. .


    In fact, after Kizaru disappeared, he did not go to look for Changnuo and the others. Instead, he came to the seaside and looked at the pirate ships that were about to set off. Suspended in the sky, he tilted his mouth and said leisurely, "Everyone, have you been exposed?" Have you ever kicked?"


    "Admiral Kizaru is here..."


    ��


    Suddenly, everyone, whether they were on the boat or not, ran quickly in other directions.


    Most of the pirates on the ship even started to jump into the sea. Although they were able to reach this ce and proved that they were rtively powerful, after all, the one standing in front of them was Kizaru, the general of the Navy Headquarters. A super powerful existence.


    The Kizaru in the sky was like a cat chasing a mouse and did not rush to attack them. He just watched them flee in all directions. But then, he stretched out his right hand, and golden light began to condense on his fingers, and then moved towards those Pointing in the direction of the pirate ship, a stream of light suddenly appeared from the fingertips.


    Under such circumstances, the huge pirate ship turned into an explosion scene in an instant. Just one attack was able to cause such damage. Anyway, he didn''t know if there was anyone in the ship. The only thing he needed to know was the pirates. That''s it.


    Less than two hours after Chang Nuonded, the Chambord Inds were already in chaos. Almost everyone knew that Emperor Tru of the South China Sea had arrived at this ce, and even knew that he was drinking leisurely in the ckmail Bar. .


    The naval base located on the Chambord Inds, their personnel have already been guarding the outside of the bar, standing in a row with guns, fully armed, for fear of letting go of anything that can pass by. .


    On the sea, more than a dozen naval warships are also quickly gathering in this direction. Anyway, judging from the time, it should not take long to arrive. Everyone''s expression is indeed as if they are facing a formidable enemy.


    Those news guys are also rushing to flock to the Chambord Inds. People who didn''t pay attention before are now trying their best to squeeze into the center of this situation.


    But no matter who they are, everyone or anything is almost concentrated on the periphery of this bar. No one from the World Government or the Navy has stepped into the bar.


    However, the group of people inside were still eating and drinking leisurely, but at the same time, they were also always observing the state of the entire outside world.


    This time, the Shampoo Inds have be a gathering ce for countless powerful people. At the same time, it is estimated that it is the burial ce of many pirates.


    After all, Chang Nuo didn''t want to make too much noise at first, but the moment they showed their faces, this kind of thing becamepletely unstoppable.

 Chapter 267 The Surrounded Bar

    <h4>Chapter 267 The Surrounded Bar</h4>


    In the bar, which was originally a lively atmosphere, after such amotion, now they were the only ones left inside. When the other pirates came outside and started to surround them, everyone had already disappeared.


    This group of people didn''t even pay after drinking, but under such circumstances, Xia Qi didn''t care about the issue of more or less profit.


    But the atmosphere outside seemed a bit strange. After the pirates in the bar ran to the door, no one in the rear row of soldiers stood outside to stop them. They still aimed their guns in the direction of the bar''s exit, for fear of passing by. The same goes for any target person.


    Not to mention ordinary navy soldiers like them, there were even many men in ck suits among them. Some of them were wearing masks and some were just standing there. ording to the division of forces, there was no need to think too much. I already knew that these should be the CP personnel of the World Government.


    There is another existence that everyone is familiar with, and that is CP Zero who appeared in the Tru Empire before. These guys also stay here very seriously, but they wear masks on their faces and cannot see. What kind of expressions did they have?


    Inside the bar.


    "Brother Chang Nuo, there are already people from the Navy gathered in front of you, why don''t you just hide for a while?"


    Xia Qi said with a smile on her face.


    "Why should we hide? On the contrary, you should hide, right? After all, as former pirates, the key is that there is a bigger pirate hiding here, so we don''t care!"


    "Haha~, you don''t have to worry about this. The World Government and the Navy have known that he is here a long time ago, but it''s just that everything is fine under the agreement between the two parties."


    Xia Qi said happily.


    "Your Majesty the King, why don''t I go out and deal with it first? This will affect our mood too much!"


    As soon as Xia Qi finished speaking, Mo Sank came over and said directly.


    "Why go out and argue with them? What do you think they will do if we stay here? It''s just that if youe here and stare, you have to pay attention. You should eat and drink. At worst, a few more people wille in after a while!"


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    "His Majesty the King is right. The Tru Empire is a first-level member of the World Government. No matter what the situation is, we don''t need to worry too much, at least for the moment." Yixiao also said.


    "Then I understand!"


    Moshank said and slowly sat back in his seat. Others had no such idea. They were still sitting there eating and drinking. However, there were only two guards at the door staying there. There were no other special circumstances. Appear.


    "Junhe, let the others know that if nothing happens, they can all go back to the ship and let Hai Ling open the defensive barrier. The rest is just waiting for us to go back."


    Changnuo turned to Junhe and said.


    It doesn''t matter to them now. After all, there are still dozens of people on the ship. Although the ship is invisible, for those powerful people in the navy, this invisibility will certainly not have much effect.


    ording to the speed of the navy, it will only take two hours at most to reach the Chambord Inds. By that time, I am afraid that only by opening the defensive barrier can they be safe.


    "Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Junhe said, and picked up the phone bug that belonged to the Tohru Empire. It had a crown on its head, spiral shapes on its body, and was slightly yellow.


    Now when wee here, since everyone carries one in their hand when traveling, it is also tomunicate in time whether any special situations will ur.


    In a ce like Xiangbodi, a ce where good and bad people are mixed, Changnuo has reason to believe that nothing will happen to any of the people he brought except Gogoya. Although his strength is not as good as these generals, on the other hand In other words, their strength is almostparable to that of Lieutenant General.


    At the same time as they received the news, everyone began to let go of their wandering mood and began to return to the Infinity in a concentrated manner.


    As soon as they returned, Gogoya immediately began to remove the invisibility state and activate the defensive barrier as ordered by His Majesty the King, and then docked next to Ind No. 41.


    "When will that Rayleigh guye back?"


    In the bar, Yixiao asked impatiently.


    They have been here for more than half an hour, but at this time, they still haven''t seen the person they want to see, so they can''t help but start talking.


    He didn''t just want to say this for himself, but he also asked it for Chang Nuo who was sitting next to him.


    The purpose ofing here is to find Rayleigh. The direction they set out this time is to go to Rafdru. So far, the only person known to have seen the real One Piece treasure is Rayleigh, so it��s a lot easier for a group of people toe here. The reason why there are so few is because of this problem.


    The cigarettes in Xia Qi''s hand were almost never extinguished one after another, but she still maintained her elegant posture when smoking, holding a cigarette in one hand and a drink in the other. After spitting out a smoke ring, Xia Qi helplessly He said, "I really don''t know where that guy is, but if the estimate is correct, he is either at the poption auction, or he has been auctioned away. I guess he will have to wait until the evening toe back."


    "Haha~, he is indeed a very interesting person!"


    Chang Nuo suddenly remembered this scene and couldn''t helpughing.


    "I wonder what the little brother wants to do with him?"


    Xia Qi asked.


    "There is nothing special. We are just starting our trip to Loughdrew, soe here now to find Mr. Reilly to learn some information."


    Changnuo said leaning on the back of the bar chair.


    "This is really shocking news, but I''m sure that guy Rayleigh won''t tell you. After living with him for so many years, he has never told anyone about Rafdrew''s situation. Pass.


    Even though I had never heard of such a thing, I once asked him out of curiosity, but in the end he just shook his head and never mentioned it. "


    Xia Qi said while smoking.


    "I''ve thought about it. That''s not what I''m asking about. I''m just curious about how many people have read the content of Rafdru?" Chang Nuo said.


    "I do know this. Although there were more than a dozen people who went to Rafdru back then, there were only four people who finally saw the secret of Rafdru. Since then, they have disbanded the pirate group, and everyone All divided.


    Roger also voluntarily surrendered to the World Government because of such a thing. The rest of the people were all in a corner. Maybe Barrett was the only one who was not too peaceful, but he is also in Impel Down Prison now. Could it be that he also has the idea of ??bing the Pirate King? ? "


    Xia Qi asked with some confusion.

 Chapter 268 The Secret of Rafdru

    <h4>Chapter 268 The Secret of Rafdru</h4>


    Xia Qi herself was a little confused when she said this. The king of the Toru Empire is still young. At this time, if he doesn''t manage a good country, why should he seek the treasure of the Pirate King?


    She even couldn''t understand what the other party meant at all, but she could only ask curiously.


    Changnuo put the empty wine ss in his hand there, and then said leisurely, "I''m not interested in One Piece or anything like that, but I''m just a little interested in Ralph Drew. What is the treasure that is pursued by the world? This is That��s what I��m more focused on.�� Changnuo said.


    Hearing this, Xia Qi took a deep puff of the cigarette in her hand, then picked up the wine ss next to her and drank it all in one gulp. After a while, Xia Qi said seriously, "At this time, whether it is a pirate or a navy, even if it is Even the world government cannot allow others to discover the ultimate secret of One Piece. Once this secret is made public, it will most likely cause chaos in this world."


    "You are thinking too much. The secret of Raff Drew will never be spread from our mouths. The Tru Empire is not yet confident enough to directly be a public enemy of the world." Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Although he still doesn''t know what the secret of Ravdru is so far, one thing is certain, that is, there will definitely be no gold or silver treasures in this ce. It is more likely that it is the history that has disappeared for 100 years. .


    Even though they had guessed this oue, some of them were still preparing to go there with full interest, but this time they probably didn''t have much hope of meeting Pluto Rayleigh, the original right-hand man of One Piece.


    They have all been waiting here for so long, and after another hour or so, the Navy and World Government personnel at the door were already crowded. Even the Navy Admiral and his group who came from the Navy Headquarters had already started to set foot. Within the area of ??the Shampoo Inds.


    It can be said that they came in force this time. Those wanted pirates who were not strong or famous were like rats crossing the street. I wish I could grow a pair of wings and fly out of this area immediately.


    Marshal Sengoku of the Navy Headquarters walked in front, followed by Sakaski and Aokiji, and even others followed one after another. Vice Admiral Garp of the Navy Headquarters also appeared in the crowd, and everyone else There were almost no Vice Admirals left.


    The current lineup ispletely like going to war with a certain big force. I am afraid that even if the Four Emperorse to this Shampoo Inds, they will not cause such a big sensation.


    Newsbirds and reporters from all walks of life followed and filmed the entire process as quickly as possible, recording everything. Some newspapers even wanted tounch a direct online live broadcast so that everyone could see this. An inspiring scene.


    It has only been half a day since I came here. The newspapers in various newspapers around the world are being copied at the fastest speed, and one by one begins to be sent out quickly. The news birds flying in the sky , and began to publicize and report this matter to the outside world for free.


    It is estimated that the whole world will be in a huge sensation due to this matter within the next day.


    The archipgo where the project is located is originally a ce where good and bad people are mixed, and almost everyone from all forces participates in collecting intelligence here. After all, it is a gathering ce for pirates, and it is also the only ce that can lead to the turning point of the new world. It is definitely a good ce to collect intelligence here. Two choices.


    The navy group began to set off towards the destination in a mighty manner. Wherever they went, all the shops on both sides of the street had their doors closed, and almost no one even appeared on the street.


    After the Navy Headquarters Admiral Kizaru began to clear out the pirates in the surrounding waters, he finally felt a little calmer. Such a big movement was almost the first time since the death of the Pirate King for more than ten years.


    In less than 20 minutes, the ckmail bar was already crowded with people outside. Whether it was the navy or the World Government personnel, they all maintained the highest level of alert. They did not dare to miss anything inside, but no one directly Go in.


    But the people inside were still leisurely andfortable, continuing to eat, drink and chat regardless of the situation outside.


    The people outside had been waiting there for several hours. The physical fatigue was nothing, but the mental exhaustion was somewhat unbearable for them. The long-term high psychological pressure caused many people to faint directly on the spot. past.


    This group of people didn''t know what they should do, but facing such a powerful group of people, whether it was the navy or World Government personnel, their urgent emotions never stopped.


    After the marshal of the Navy Headquarters brought a group of people over, this sense of oppression slowly made them rx.


    "I didn''t expect to be here. These guys really know how to find a ce!"


    Garp looked up at the door sign of the ckmail Bar. It was obvious that he knew what kind of people existed in this ce.


    "What should we do now? Didn''t I go in directly?" Lieutenant General He also asked.


    "Let them all retreat and let''s go in and take a look!"


    Marshal Warring States looked distressed at this moment. He really didn''t want to face this kind of thing. Once any conflict broke out between the people on the other side, there was no telling what kind of disaster it would turn into.


    Although there are so many people here, and even the top navy''s topbat forces havee over, but for this group of people. There is no certainty of victory.


    No one will underestimate thebat effectiveness of their Tru Empire, let alone because the other party only has so many people here. Just let your guard down. One can''t handle it well. It''s not just the war between the navy and the Tru Empire that has been triggered. More importantly, it will directly trigger a new round ofrge-scale war in the entire pirate world.


    Not everyone in this world is willing to live in this kind of poverty, but they just suffer from theck of a better opportunity. For example, these guys from the Revolutionary Army hide in an unknown ce almost every day. Living a hidden life every day, after arge-scale war breaks out in the world, these restless guys will rise one by one.


    This is what the world looks like now. What everyone is waiting for is just an opportunity. Just like when Roger, the Pirate King, died, he can start the era of great pirates with just one sentence.


    Therefore, when ites to this matter, both the navy marshal and the navy admiral are extremely prepared.

 Chapter 269 We are legal

    <h4>Chapter 269 We are legal</h4>


    Let alone Admiral Sengoku, even Sakaski, who has always had the most fiery temper, has not said a word since he got off the ship until now.


    They are not fools. The main purpose of why so many people came this time is to prevent any special and dangerous situations from happening.


    When he learned that Emperor Toru, one of the Four Emperors, had appeared in the Shampoo Inds, he even had a direct confrontation with the Celestial Dragons. Although he had already met an unfamiliar Celestial Dragon, it was only half an hourter. , the Tianlong people have issued strict orders, prohibiting anyone from leaving the Mariejoia area.


    They also want to prevent the Toru Empire from identally killing the other party because the Tianlong people are looking for trouble. Then the Navy and the World Government will have to dere war on the Toru Empire under any circumstances. Otherwise, the impact will definitely not be what they can bear and ept now.


    It can be said that after the Tru Empire and his team came here, they could directly cause turmoil in the entire pirate world. In addition, the other party was not a so-called pirate but the leader of a country. The more important person is the world. For government-affiliated countries, no matter in terms of identity or status, people are free to go wherever they want, but they are also in a rtively sensitive topic area.


    Marshal Warring States stood at the door of the bar and looked inside the door. In fact, the expressions of people outside could also be seen from inside the room. The door of the bar was not closed at this moment, and even those who stayed outside could still see the people inside. state.


    The entire street has been taken over by the navy at this moment. The navy with rtively low strength has note close to it for a month. Those who cane here at least have some strength.


    "Marshal Warring States, should we go in and have a chat?" Qingzhi asked.


    "That''s right! Everyone is already here, and it''s rare that theye together like this. There''s no point in staying at the door. Why don''t youe in and have a drink?"


    As soon as Qingzhi finished speaking, the voice inside had alreadye out before Sengoku, the naval marshal, even opened his mouth.


    "These bastards!!"


    After hearing what he said, Sakaski''s expression was a little angry and serious. He had nothing to do with causing so much trouble for people in the navy like himself.


    "Go in and take a look. I haven''t seen this person until now. Where is this person who can change the situation in the Chambord Inds?" Marshal of the Warring States Period said.


    The guards at the door remained motionless. The only people walking inside were the Warring States Marshal and the three navy generals, plus some other navy vice-admirals. They did not believe that the Tru Empire would dere war with the navy at this time. What''s more, It is impossible to do it directly in such a ce.


    Everyone has already arrived at this ce. There is only some embarrassment between the two parties in terms of their respective forces, but in other aspects there is no ovep at all.


    Xia Qi in the room covered her head with a headache. She didn''t want to get involved in any vortex of right and wrong. She just opened a bar here and sold her information when she had nothing to do. But now it was obvious that the whole People have entered the whirlpool and cannot escape.


    Marshal of the Navy Sengoku walked in the front and was the first to step into the bar. Although the space in the bar was not particrlyrge, it was definitely not a problem to amodate forty or fifty people.


    The moment they came in, Mo Sangke and Jun, who were still drinking, all stood up and stared at the group of people who came in with serious expressions.


    Although it is true that the two parties will not start working directly, sometimes superficial work still needs to be done.


    Just at this moment, the two sides seemed to be at war with each other. Chang Nuo, as the party involved, still sat leisurely on the chair, picked up the wine ss, and looked at the group of people who came in with interest.


    "General Aokiji, it''s really been a long time since west seen you? Didn''t you expect Lieutenant General Garp to be here too?" Changnuo said with a smile and said hello.


    "It seems that your Excellency is His Majesty King Tru, right?" Marshal Warring States asked.


    After hearing this, Chang Nuo slowly put the wine ss on the bar, then slowly got down from the chair that was almost 1 meter high, took two steps forward, looked at the Warring States Marshal and said, "Today is really... I was a little ttered, it was hard to believe that even the Marshal of the Warring States Period came in person, and there were so many unfamiliar faces.


    The three top marshals of the navy, and even the strongest man in the navy, Lieutenant General Garp, came over! "


    As he spoke, Chang Nuo continued to look at the people behind him, and then said again with a somewhat surprised expression, "I didn''t expect that Lieutenant General He also came here?"


    Saying hello to each of them, Chang Nuo seemed to be familiar with them all. Even the navy who came in all started to frown.


    "You must be Genji Nagano, King of the Toru Empire, right?"


    The Warring States Marshal looked at Chang Nuo and asked.


    Facing this guy, Chang Nuo put away his yful smile and looked calmly at the man with only a pigtail in front of him. The marshal''s military uniform he was wearing did look mighty and domineering.


    After looking at him for a while, Chang Nuo began to smile slightly and said, "Is it an honor or misfortune to be known by Marshal of the Warring States Period?"


    "Can you tell me your purpose ofing here? Or what exactly do you want to do?"


    "Isn''t it a bit rude to ask so many questions at the beginning? We are not pirates! And we have not done anything against the World Government. No matter where we appear, the World Government and the Navy must not be able to control this. Right?" Chang Nuo replied to what Warring States said.


    This sentence immediately made everyone speechless. What they said was right. They were not pirates. The key point was that they did notmit anything. They just came to this ce. There was nothing wrong in the process. Apart from not respecting the Tianlong people, there seemed to be nothing wrong. Inappropriate.


    However, as a first-level member country of the World Government, the Toru Empire does not need to kowtow to the Tianlong people. Whether it is speaking or doing things, Changnuo is meticulous and leaves no ws for them.


    This sentence seems to make these naval generals make a fuss. Warring States is standing here and doesn''t know what to do next?


    After all, they spent so much energy toe here, not just because they wanted to chat with each other, but they had already been criticized by others just after they started meeting, and the people on their side didn''t have anything to say. .

 Chapter 270 Terrible

    <h4>Chapter 270 Terrible</h4>


    The people behind Warring States also looked like bitter gourds at this moment. They really didn''t take any issue. They had even discussed this issue beforeing.


    The main purpose ofing here is to prevent these guys from being provoked by the Tianlong people and beating each other to death with a p. This ispletely possible.


    "King Tru, youring here has caused quite a stir. I guess you will be on all the news headlines starting tomorrow!"


    Garp stood up and said.


    "I''m not interested if I don''t make the headlines. I was just going on a good trip, but you guys made it so confusing!" Chang Nuo said.


    "If someone else is traveling, do you think they can attract such a big movement from our group? Tell me, if the Tru Empire is not staying here, why are you wandering around with nothing to do?" Garp said again.


    "I said to Mr. Garp, after staying in one ce for a long time, you have to go out for a walk. Now that the people in the country are well fed and clothed and don''t have to worry about life at all, then I, the king, should also It��s time to put down the burden on your body and go out for some fun. It��s almost time for you, too. At such an old age, it��s good to go out and have fun.��


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    What he said was not just for one person. So many people were listening to it. Lieutenant General He, Marshal Warring States, and Garp were all of the same age, so naturally all three of them were included in it.


    "I have always heard that Emperor Tru is an extremely mysterious person, but today I saw that he is just a glib little guy!"


    The Warring States Marshal said.


    "I didn''t expect that after so many years, we haven''t seen each other, but they are still the same!"


    Sitting aside, Yixiao has been listening to their conversation, but now the other party has pointed the finger at His Majesty the King. As a member of the Tru Empire, naturally he cannot stand idly by.


    He also stood up and took two steps this way. Although he couldn''t see the faces of this group of people, the outline of each person appeared in his mind.


    "Huh~"


    Warring States sighed directly when he saw Yixiao. Behind him, whether it was Garp or Lieutenant General He, their expressions were not very good.


    After all, they have already known Yixiao for a long time. This guy has never been bound to any force. Even though the Navy and the World Government invited him many times, he never had any interest until he joined the Tru Empire.


    Seeing his face again now made the three of them familiar with Yixia feel quite emotional.


    "From the moment I learned that you joined the Tru Empire, I was still very curious about what you were thinking. But now it seems that you have indeed found a ce where your ideal is!"


    The Warring States Marshal said with some regret.


    "Maybe so!"


    Said with a smile.


    "It''s not that we don''t have wine in our little shop. You don''t have to stand here and chat. If you can, wouldn''t it be nice for me to invite you to have a drink today, sit down and have a good chat?"


    Xia Qiy on the counter of her bar and said to so many people present with a smile on her face.


    This woman is the only outsider and the only one who can invite them to sit down. After all, this is a small shop. Regardless of emotions or reasons, it is the most appropriate thing for Xia Qi to say this.


    "It seems like you''re having a good time here."


    Warring States nced at Xia Qi and said.


    They are all from the older generation, the strong men of the previous era. Almost everyone knows each other, otherwise there would not be so many people gathered here today.


    The chat between the two forces, including the generals beside them, has be a bit redundant. In the circr space in the bar, the three generals of the Navy are sitting together, followed by a few more reserved and nervous vice-admirals, who are actually sitting in front. There are only three people.


    This moment is probably the highlight of this ckmail bar. After all, it is now regarded as the top existence in the entire pirate world. Even they may have never thought that so many people can stay here.


    After everyone sat down, Xia Qi didn''t need to do anything. Whether it was the Navy or the Lu Empire, they had their own people pouring the wine directly. Anyway, looking at the current situation, they were still rtively calm and easy-going. .


    "I don''t know if I can ask again, what do you and your group mean? After all, based on your current status, you cannot be ssified as ordinary people!"


    The Warring States Marshal sat there and asked again.


    "Even if you know it, what''s the harm? Come out for a trip to get some fresh air, and want to see what this world is like. After all, the farthest distance we have traveled so far is only to Mary Jo Ya, so now I want to change to a fresher environment and go shopping.


    You don��t have to worry too much next. Our next step may be to go to Fish-Man Ind to have a look, and then to the New World. Maybe we will alsomunicate with people from the big forces, but no matter what , it is estimated that it will not touch any of the rules of the game established between the navy and the world government. "


    Chang Nuo said with a leisurely expression, but every word he said made the other party nervous.


    What does it mean that the next step is to go to the New World and maybemunicate with the big forces in the New World?


    Don''t make this too obvious. Apart from the navy, aren''t the remaining major forces in the new world the Yonko Group?


    But the key point is that almost all the top leaders of the Navy are here. If you want tomunicate with the Navy, can''t you just sit here and chat now?


    As a wise general in the Warring States Period, he would naturally not think that the other party was just joking.


    "Do you know that it is very dangerous for you to do this?"


    While Sengoku was still thinking about countermeasures, Admiral Sakaski, who was sitting in the back, said directly with a serious expression.


    The reason why the Warring States need to think about it is that the other party ignores their existence at all, let alone offends the navy and the world government, but the other party has developed to such a powerful point, every word they say and everything they do Every matter requires specialized people to study and think about countermeasures.


    But Sakaski said something so brainlessly. This is probably a problem that none of the senior leaders in their navy have thought of.


    "General Akainu, is it really okay for you to interrupt themunication between your marshal and our King like this?"


    Abona raised his head and questioned Akainu.


    "Oh~, it''s really a troublesome thing!"


    "Such a horrible group of people, I don''t even want to stay here. I really don''t know what they think?"


    Aokiji and Kizaru both had helpless and sighing expressions on their faces, talking to themselves.

 Chapter 271 Pluto Rayleigh

    <h4>Chapter 271 Pluto Rayleigh</h4>


    The bar, which had already calmed down, felt tense again at this moment. People on both sides were also wary of each other. Although they both knew that no one on both sides would start fighting, this kind of squabbling The battle probably still needs to be fought for a while.


    But at the moment when all the quarrels were not ready to start, a person walked out of the bar again. This time, everyone''s eyes from both sides were focused on him.


    The man has silver-white hair and a beard of the same color. He should be about 1.8 meters tall and has a medium-to-slender build. He is wearing a white robe with a gray-ck lining. Although he looks rtively older , but the spirit is still very full


    "Hey~, I thought I was in the wrong ce, but I didn''t expect it to be so lively here today?"


    Rayleigh saw this scene as soon as he came back, and he was a little shocked in his heart.


    Although the door and the streets were almost full of marines, he never thought that these things would be rted to his little ckmail bar.


    So when he came in, he was suddenly stunned. He never thought that he would encounter such a situation.


    As soon as he stepped in and said this, Rayleigh''s expression began to look at everyone present. He knew most of the people here, but regarding the Tru Empire, although Except for a few people he didn''t know, the others had more or less been seen in the newspapers.


    "Pluto Silbasraili, after waiting for so long, I finally met the real person!"


    Chang Nuo raised his head and stared at the other party seriously, and said with a slightly raised corner of his mouth.


    "Haha~, Emperor Tru specially waited for me, an old guy. This is really a problem that I didn''t expect!"


    Reilly said.


    "Everyone is already here, sit down and let''s have a drink and chat for a while?" Chang Nuo said.


    Anyway, there were a lot of empty seats in the bar at the moment. Although the atmosphere was extremely peaceful and mixed with a lot of weirdness, Reilly did not refuse the invitation. Instead, he directly found a chair nearby and sat down.


    Everyone in the navy was staring at the two of them. Except for those people who worked hard every day, the others seemed to be as miserable as eating smelly dog ??shit.


    The two generals, Aokiji and Kizaru, were sitting next to each other. They were yawning one after another. They had no interest in drinking here. Instead of having this time, they might as well go to other ces for entertainment. Ichiban.


    But now more and more powerful people have gathered in this ce. It is estimated that by the time they reach tomorrow, the four emperors among the pirates may be sitting here.


    When Reilly sat down, the atmosphere at the scene once again fell into calm. No one spoke, including the Warring States Marshal.


    None of them knew what a better topic to start, and they couldn''t afford to talk about it, but sitting here and stalling for time was not an option anyway.


    "Why are you so quiet? Since everyone is here, why don''t you open your mouth and say a few words? Is it possible that the wine here is not good? But it is indeed true. After all, I once drank a kind of wine, although it was not It��s quite expensive, but at least it��s popr with everyone. I still remember his name to this day, Rumsaru, it��s quite a good one.��


    Chang Nuo picked up the wine ss and said leisurely. No one understood what King Tru said, but at this moment, one person clenched his fist unconsciously.


    Garp was a little angry for a moment. Suddenly he pped the table and asked with a serious expression, "Did you go to the East China Sea?"


    "Garp, what are you doing?"


    Lieutenant General He asked quickly.


    Warring States just sat there without saying a word, and his expression even became serious. From the name of the wine Chang Nuo said, he had also drank it before, but this thing was only a specialty of the Kingdom of Goa, or that he It is just one made by Donghai Windmill Vige itself.


    "What do you mean, Lieutenant General Garp? It''s just a bottle of wine. If you like it, it''s okay to buy you a drink even if I stay here?"


    Changnuo still said leisurely, not taking Garp''s anger seriously at all.


    But at the same time, he waved his hand casually, and a bottle of red wine suddenly appeared on the in table. Looking at thebel on it, Rumsa Road was disyed, and there was also abel on the bottle. A trace of residual warmth.


    However, in the East China Sea Windmill Vige, Maginot just picked up the bottle of wine and wiped it, but the wine in his hand disappeared in the next second. At the same time, a golden bead fell on the ground.


    This is not the first time he has seen this thing. After all, thest time Chang Nuo came over for a drink, he paid for it with a gold bead. There were too many weird things among pirates, but she would never have thought of it. The wine in his hand has now floated thousands of miles away.


    "Garp!!"


    Seeing the appearance of this bottle of wine, Capton was a little agitated, but at this time, Navy Marshal Sengoku immediately stopped him and yelled loudly.


    The atmosphere at this moment suddenly rose to the extreme, and the two parties might even start fighting directly without paying attention.


    "Lieutenant General Garp, it''s just a bottle of wine, why do you mind so much? Not to mention the East China Sea Windmill Vige. I have been there once, but I still remember the smile of the little girl at that time. It was a ce with a beautiful environment, but for me You don''t even bother to do these things to threaten a vice admiral.


    Having said that, I don��t have that big ambition, of course, maybe it��s just not in front of me. If one day your navy and the world government are rotten from the head to the soles of the feet, maybe some unexpected things will happen to me, but at least for now No idea in this regard. "


    Chang Nuo said while holding a wine ss and drinking.


    Now that he had almost made his words clear, even Rayleigh, who was sitting not far from him, was staring at Chang Nuo in surprise.


    It only took a few years for a little guy to achieve such a status. Everyone present was older than him, but no one dared to underestimate the other person in this ce at this moment.


    "Then what exactly do you want to do? I don''t believe that you, a majestic Emperor of Tru, would wander around in the new world for nothing?" Sengoku asked in a cold tone.


    "The South China Sea is just a small ce after all. I just want to take this opportunity to travel around the sea and see the true face of this world." Chang Nuo said.


    But obviously no one would care too much about this, and some might even not believe it at all.

 Chapter 272 The sense of oppression between the two parties

    <h4>Chapter 272 The sense of oppression between the two parties</h4>


    But it didn''t matter whether they believed it or not. What mattered was Rayleigh. His hand holding the wine ss was very steady, but the other hand ced under the table trembled slightly.


    What the other party said was that he wanted to know the truth of this world, but there were only a few people in this world who knew the truth. However, apart from himself, one of them was in the prison at the bottom of Impel Down City, and the whereabouts of the other one had long been unknown.


    Rayleigh didn''t want to be too obvious, and even pretended to be calm, but no one present had ever experienced anything.


    "His Majesty Emperor Tru, I have also learned about the current situation in your country. I have to say that in many ways, you are indeed an outstanding monarch. You can manage a country into what it is now in just a few years. With your appearance, I''m afraid I won''t be able to find anyone as beautiful as you in the whole world.


    But sometimes, I hope you can maintain this concept and protect the people from any harm. No one wants a war. "


    Warring States said many things, but the purpose was very simple, that is, he hoped that the other party would never cause trouble here.


    The archipgo where the project is located is too close to where the Tianlong people are, but the little guy in front of him is not as simple as imagined. So far, his own strength itself is a mystery, but there are so many strong men under hismand, even if any I''m afraid even one of the four emperors can''tpare.


    Nowadays, many CP departments under the World Government are almost all dealing with the Tru Empire. The purpose is to know the secrets of their country and tomunicate with the navy in real time.


    "Don''t worry, Marshal Warring States. I don''t dare to say anything else. At least you stay in the position of Marshal. Our Tru Empire will not do anything, or even do anything that goes against the World Government and the Navy. But sometimes I hope you won��t target it too much. As a first-level member country of the World Government, I��m afraid I need to talk more about the tricky things we have done in the past few years.


    You are right. It has taken me a few years to develop a country into what it is today. So do you think that if I take another ten years to develop, then it is possible that even your navy will not be included? In your eyes? "


    Chang Nuo''s voice suddenly sounded cold, and the provocation in his tone was very obvious.


    The bar, which was already filled with the smell of gunpowder, felt more like a fire slowly approaching.


    "Hahaha~, the purpose of being in the bar here is not just for drinking, why do you guys have to be so tense and chatting?"


    Reilly looked at the two people''s appearance and hurriedlyughed and said.


    Xia Qi, who was standing aside, also twisted her body and walked over with a bottle of wine. When she walked to Chang Nuo, she slowly bent down and filled the empty wine ss.


    "Brother Changnuo, you are all the top figures in this world in terms of strength. You must not have any conflicts in my small shop, otherwise I will have nothing to live up to in my future life."


    Xia Qi''s self-deprecating words slowly began to clear up this rather embarrassing atmosphere.


    "Young people are really different? When we were this age, we didn''t even dare to contradict the teacher''s words. Now, at this age, people have the courage to say these words directly. It''s really scary!"


    Kizaru sat there leaning on the back of his chair and said with an indifferent expression.


    "Can you be normal?"


    Akainu said with a cold expression.


    "We''re just here to join in the fun. They can talk whatever they want. It doesn''t have much to do with us anyway!"


    Qing Pheasant also said.


    "Three generals, isn''t this atmosphere too tense?"


    Lieutenant General Taotu, who was apanying her, felt such a depressing atmosphere and asked in a low voice to the general sitting not far from her.


    Anyway, the voices of these people chatting are very low, but even so in this quiet atmosphere, no one can actually hear it!


    "Did you see what ability the other party used just now?"


    Lieutenant General He sat next to Garp and asked softly.


    The main thing is to ask why an extra bottle of wine from the East China Sea appeared out of thin air just now. Although they have already analyzed the possible abilities and strength of King Tru before, there has never been a better definition. .


    After all, so far, few people really know what the opponent''s strength is.


    The only rtively close contact was probably with the flying squirrel who fought against Abona a few years ago. After all, even at such a long distance, the opponent could use the color of knowledge to transmit sound to his ears. Although Many people can do it, but the main thing is to look at the distance.


    But this time they could indeed intuitively feel that King Tru could pull out a bottle of wine from the East China Sea thousands of miles away in front of them.


    "It''s not sure yet, but this situation should undoubtedly belong to the space system!"


    Garp said cautiously.


    No one of them dares to be sure now, because they can''t be sure unless the people on both sides directly go to war, and they will know after a fight.


    It''s just that this kind of topic only exists in the mind, just thinking about it. Who dares to be the first to take action at this moment?


    The main purpose of theiring here is to prevent the other party from suddenlyunching an attack. At that time, it will lead to a result that no one expected, so it is impossible for them to do anything here.


    When the other partyes, among these few people, except for knowing the strength of Yixiao, most of the others are still at a loss about their strength.


    Let��s not talk about how well the Tru Empire has kept this aspect of confidentiality, but at least they don��t think that the other party is just bluffing.


    The Warring States Marshal sat there seriously and seriously, with a cold expression on his face. This was the first time in his life that he was threatened by a little guy. However, the other party was not an ordinary existence. This kind of Even as a marshal, he could only ept the threatening words silently.


    "King Tru, although you have your own freedom and power no matter where you go, and the navy and the world government cannot manage it, after all, your identity and strength are here. During the next voyage, I hope to be able to send Having a naval personnel following you will at least provide great convenience in many aspects!"


    The Warring States Marshal sat there and thought for a long time before speaking.


    No matter what the situation is, what you can do now is to control the purpose and direction of the other party''s voyage in the new world. More importantly, you need to know what the other party is going to the new world for?

 Chapter 273 The Overlord’s Color and Coercion

    <h4>Chapter 273 The Overlord��s Color and Coercion</h4>


    If these things are not understood clearly, if the Toru Empirees into contact with one of the Four Emperors of the New World, it will have a strong impact on both the Navy and the World Government in the future.


    "Marshal Sengoku, don''t you think what you said is a bit excessive? Why do we, the Tru Empire, need to bring people from your navy with us when we are traveling in the New World?"


    Abona opened his mouth and asked.


    "That''s right, we haven''t had enough shopping yet, we still need to take your people with us."


    Enelu was also sitting next to him and talking.


    "It doesn''t matter. If you are willing, you can bring one with you. Who do you want to send to follow us?"


    Changnuo raised his right hand to stop the people on his side from talking anymore, and instead stared at Warring States with interest.


    "I wonder how about letting Lieutenant General He or Lieutenant General Garp apany us?" Sengoku asked.


    "What do you think? We haven''t sailed in the New World so far, and we don''t know what will happen on the roads below. Both of them are considered older now. If something goes wrong, who''s the one? of?"


    Chang Nuo said with some rejection.


    "If you can''t do this or that, why don''t you pick someone yourself!"


    Sakaski stood up and spoke again.


    "General Akainu, don''t show too much anger. It won''t be toote to say this after you be the marshal one day. Of course, I also believe that this kind of thing will probably not happen for many years."


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    "What do you mean by that?"


    Changnuo looked at Sakaski and did not speak anymore. No matter in terms of chatting or other aspects, it was not the turn of a naval admiral to interrupt.


    Before any of the generals on his side opened their mouths, Sakaski was already in a state of being unable to hold himself back.


    Changnuo was still sitting there, but then from his eyes, he instantly released a lightning-like domineering aura, heading towards Akainu in a very targeted manner.


    "Coercion����"


    Changnuo drank it gently in his mouth, and a powerful force swept directly to Akainu.


    Others did not feel anything strange, but at this moment the marble b under Akainu''s feet cracked instantly, and the crack instantly extended to a radius of about 5 meters.


    When other people saw this scene, they immediately began to be shocked. Not to mention the vice admirals, even Garp, who was the strongest in the navy, was a little unbelievable that someone could actually use the Overlord''s Haki to such an extent. !


    "King Tru, we have no other intentions. Do you want to start a war?"


    Marshal Warring States asked in a cold voice.


    The hands he ced on the table at the moment were already pressed deeply under the wooden board.


    "Don''t mind it too much. It''s just that we don''t want to be interrupted by others in our chat. Sometimes we need to give some appropriate deterrents during the negotiation process. We don''t want anyone to think that our Tru Empire is such a weak chicken. , even if you want to start a war, before starting a war, you need to weigh whether both sides can ept this kind of loss?"


    Changnuo said nonchntly, and then directly removed the domineering domineering force that was pressing down on Akainu.


    Although the domineering Haki just now did not cause any harm to Akainu, and the opponent did not even bend down, this kind of attack would not cause particrly substantial damage to Akainu who has the strength of a general.


    But this time it''s not as simple as injury, but a matter of face.


    After being freed from the restraints, Akainu''s angry body suddenly began to flow withva, as if he was going to fight Changnuo in the next second.


    But as a king, how could he personally deal with such a thing? Anilu, who was behind Changnuo, stood up immediately with a young and energetic body, his body shing with lightning, and even the surrounding tables and chairs began to be affected.


    "Enilu, I can''t fight anymore, you''ve spilled the wine with this look!"


    Moshank raised his head and said helplessly.


    "Ah? Then I''m really sorry!!"


    Enelu hurriedly said with a smile.


    The lightning shing on his body had disappeared at this moment.


    "Natural Thunder Fruit??"


    Seeing this scene, the people on the navy side became uneasy again.


    One of the natural devil fruits with the strongest attack power, I didn��t expect it to be in the Toru Empire!


    They could not hide the expressions of surprise in their hearts and faces. After all, this situation was too rare.


    "King Tru, it doesn''t have to be like this. We just came here to chat on the way to the new world. After all, you are also the king of a country. I think you should be able to understand this situation. As long as you are willing, let anyone apany you. It will be all right."


    The Warring States Marshal took a step back and said.


    All they want to do is to know where this group of people want to go, who they want to see or what they want to do. No matter who the navy sends, even if there is only one person, even Garp, as long as the other party wants to do something If he moves, I''m afraid he won''t be able to escape unscathed.


    This is an extremelyplex and dangerous job, but it is a necessary measure for the navy. Is it possible that they need to drive a ship to follow them?


    When they arrived, they had already noticed the cruise ship that revealed the empire. It was obviously not something that sailboats like them could keep up with.


    "I''m not particrly picky about this kind of thing, and I can understand your navy''s thoughts. It''s just that we don''t want to find a man to apany us on the ship during the next trip. If you are willing, you can let Taotu Just let the Lieutenant General apany you."


    Changnuo said.


    "no!!"


    Lieutenant General He stood up immediately and retorted.


    A few years ago, the Navy had already had this idea and asked Taotu to go to the Tru Empire to check it out. At that time, it was also because of Lieutenant General He''s efforts to stop it. In the end, the n began to be shelved. Unexpectedly, the other party I mentioned it again today. Everyone knows what kind of job this is.


    If nothing happened, then there would almost certainly be nothing wrong with the entire journey, but if the Tru Empire made something that they did not want the navy to know, then the people who went to the navy on this trip would definitely nevere back.


    Everyone knows this. Taotu herself is sitting here, watching this scene happen, she feels a little overwhelmed.


    But now that everything has developed to this point, although no one wants to see it, someone still needs to participate.


    "I would like to..."


    Peach Rabbit stood up and said.

 Chapter 274 The most beautiful woman in the navy

    <h4>Chapter 274 The most beautiful woman in the navy</h4>


    Even now, Momotu can still be regarded as the most beautiful being in the navy.


    Especially with her current image, she is the lover that many men dream of.


    "Peach Rabbit, do you know what this mission means?"


    Lieutenant General He roared angrily.


    However, no one interrupted at this moment, even the Warring States Marshal closed his eyes helplessly.


    "I don''t agree. Even if you want to go, I will go with you!"


    At this time, a man wearing yellow clothes and a navy justice robe stood up. From an image point of view, this guy was a bit unttering in appearance, but at least his courage wasmendable.


    "Jiaji, what are you doing?"


    Peach Rabbit asked.


    "I want to go with you. It''s useless what you say."


    Jiaji said with a firm expression.


    "This is a mission. Were you traveling around the world? Stay at your naval headquarters."


    Peach Rabbit said.


    "I don''t care anyway, as long as I go wherever you go, I will never put you in danger. Even if something happens, I will definitely stand in front of you!"


    Jiaji''s thoughtful words had nothing to do with his appearance.


    But this was just his wishful thinking. As for the Tru Empire, Moshank took a sip of wine, put it on the table, raised his head and looked in the direction of the navy and said, "Your navy regards our Tru Empire as What''s going on? Now it''s be a bargaining chip in the quarrel between you two lovers?"


    Not many people know Moshank. He and Eniru are the same. They have just appeared in the eyes of the navy, let alone have any knowledge of their abilities. Even their identities are not yet known. confirm.


    Hearing what had been said here, Sengoku had no choice but to say, "That''s it. Lieutenant General Peach Rabbit will apany you on your next trip. I hope King Toru can protect our little one." It��s a girl!��


    "As you said, we are not going out to fight and kill. We don''t have to worry about any dangers during the journey. We will definitely return the fat and white ones you raised to you."


    Changnuo tapped his fingers lightly on the table and said.


    "so be it!"


    After the Warring States Marshal finished speaking, he stood up directly. The half ss of wine poured in front of him was still the same as it was at the beginning.


    Except for Aokiji and Kizaru, the wine sses of the other people who came over were also silent.


    As Warring States stood up and prepared to leave, the other people behind him also stood up one by one. But just as they were about to leave, Chang Nuo suddenly shouted, "Lieutenant General Garp, it''s rare to bring someone from the East China Sea." A bottle of fine wine, you can take it back and taste it!"


    "Don''t worry, we have a lot of them here!"


    Garp said expressionlessly.


    "Taotu, if anything happens, you must inform me in time. No matter where you are, I will definitely arrive as soon as possible!"


    Jiaji looked at Taotu who was still sitting there with some reluctance and said.


    The Warring States Period was actually quite helpless. So what if so many people came here? In the end, there was still no way to deal with them. The most important thing was that there was no reason to do anything to them.


    As a first-level affiliated country, the Tru Empire has too many substantive rights. Not to mention their navy, even when the World Government wants to use its brains, it probably needs to weigh its own capabilities.


    In less than a while, the Warring States Marshal had no choice but to lead everyone away, leaving only Taotu and the navy at the scene.


    But the navy guards guarding the door did not evacuate. They were still on alert, observing everything here at all times.


    The purpose is as if they are afraid of what will happen to these people in the Chambord Inds.


    Taotu is not a shy girl, but a rather carefree woman, but the atmosphere just now was too depressing, so he didn''t open a word from the beginning to the end.


    Now that everyone has left, the oppressive atmosphere has also dissipated, but facing such a group of strangers, this girl is still a little ufortable.


    "They''ve all left, why don''t you leave?"


    Lei Li looked at Chang Nuo curiously and asked.


    "They just left, why did you follow them and leave?" Chang Nuo said.


    "It seems to make some sense!"


    Reilly said, turned his head and started to look at Yixiao. The expression on his face was really unbearable and he startedughing and said, "When we heard that you joined the Tru Empire, we were really shocked. This thing Things really surprised us.��


    "You are already quite old. It is rare to find a ce to rx, unlike you, who lives sofortably every day!" Yixiao said.


    "Haha~, what you said is true, but now you have also seen that although life is rtivelyfortable, the key is that freedom has beenpletely restricted!" Reilly said.


    "Even if you stay here, I''m afraid no one can restrain you. It''s just that you have put a shackles on yourself. Are you interested ining to the Tru Empire together?" asked Yixiao.


    "Forget it. I''m a pirate, and like you said, I''m already so old. How can I have any ideas to fight hard anymore?"


    "What Mr. Lei Li said is wrong. What does it mean to be old? Is it possible that Cheng Cheng doesn''t want to do something more exciting for the rest of his life?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "The ambition and fighting spirit have long been gone. Time has smoothed out all the edges. Being able to live quietly in a ce like this is already a rtively good choice." Reilly said.


    "It allows a person to stay quietly in one ce, and then there are only a few situations where he will be chased, or restricted, or... he is hiding a big secret!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Where are you going?"


    Rayleigh''s expression suddenly became serious. He had wanted to ask just now, but the navy was here, so he didn''t have time to ask.


    Now the other party has said everything so clearly that he can guess it without even thinking about it.


    As one of the few people left who knew what existed in Ravdru, Rayleigh did have a say.


    "I just wanted to take a look, because there were so many things that happened to Roger that people couldn''t understand, and everything in this world seemed to be revolving around that ce.


    Although I am not a pirate, I am still very curious about that thing! "


    Chang Nuo said calmly.

 Chapter 275 The End of the Journey to Shampoo Islands

    <h4>Chapter 275 The End of the Journey to Shampoo Inds</h4>


    After making sure he got the answer he wanted, Reilly stood up silently and took two steps inside, but finally stopped after walking to the side of the bar.


    "Are you sure this thing will be of use to you?"


    Reilly said.


    "Not sure, but one thing is for sure, this thing will definitely be useful to the future of the Tru Empire!"


    Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty the King, if we want to know what it is, we can go see it ourselves, so why do we have to go around and ask him?"


    Arbonne asked.


    "That''s right. If the other party says it now, then there won''t be much expectation!"


    Chang Nuo turned to them and smiled.


    Taotu, who was sitting far away, was listening to the conversation between the people on both sides. She waspletely confused and couldn''t even understand a word.


    But there seemed to be some things that he felt were quite clear, but he didn''t dare to confirm them specifically.


    Pluto Rayleigh, a vice-captain who once served as the right-hand man of the Pirate King. He definitely knows more secrets than other people on the Pirate King''s ship. However, it is not difficult to see from his serious expression that the news of some things seems to be once revealed. It will be very serious when ites out.


    Chang Nuo could imagine and understand that this time he just came here to have a chat and take a look at what the so-called Pirate King''s left and right hands looked like.


    Now that I have drunk and watched, I have been in this ce for three or four hours, and there is really no need to continue.


    They chatted with each other for another nearly 20 minutes. This time, the trip to the Shampoo Inds was considered a perfect end. Although there were a lot of obstacles in the middle, fortunately everything went through normally.


    Reilly also understood what they were thinking. At the same time, Changnuo also learned something about Ravdru. As the end of the new world, a ce that makes people feel that it can''t be more terrifying. If you want to achieve something, The Pirate King naturally needs to pass through many obstacles in order to obtain the supreme honor of this pirate world.


    Originally there were six people here, but now it''s better. When we went back, there were seven people. Taotu was still wearing her navy clothes. I have to say that this woman''s figure is indeed in excellent shape.


    Returning to No. 41 again, the Infinity is still here quietly, but there is a transparent protective cover on it, and it is obviously still in a defensive state.


    With the arrival of their group, the group of people on the ship who had been in a state of anxiety finally felt a little relieved. When they saw so many navynding on the ind, everyone''s biggest fear was to worry about the two sides. People started fighting in this ce. Although they maintained enough confidence in their Majesty the King and the country''s generals, after all, this was not the ce where the Tru Empire was located.


    It is inevitable that they will have such thoughts. There are almost tens of thousands of naval forcesnding on the ind this time. It is estimated that they are all frightened and incoherent at this moment. This is actually normal. There are so many pirates on the ind. In less than half a day, everything has disappeared


    No matter where this group of people ran to, at least today was a hell trip for them. I don��t know how many children died directly in the sea because of this incident, let alone How many people were directly arrested and imprisoned in Impel Down City? No matter what the oue was, it was not a good choice for them.


    "Huh~"


    Watching Chang Nuo and his group walking towards this side from a distance, Gogoya, who was on the Infinity, slowly exhaled. He had been in a high-pressure and tense state for nearly three hours, and even if I felt unsafe just sitting there.


    Everyone else on the boat also maintained the same state. This time it was said that it brought them an unprecedented sense of crisis, but at least they did not hear the huge noise in the morning, which meant that the people on both sides were still polite. status.


    "Hai Ling, His Majesty the King is back. Open the defensive barrier."


    Gogoya is the only person besides Changnuo who can control this ship. He is also a second-levelnder and has nearly 80% of the ability to control this ship. Except for some core or dangerous ones, Gogoya is the only one who can control this ship. Except for the unavablemands, most system functions can be used normally.


    Coming back again, the woman Taotu was probably more surprised. It was her first time to see this kind of cruise ship, and it was muchrger than the warships of their navy.


    It is understandable that there are no sails. After all, the differences in technology in this world are really outrageous. Being able to build such a cruise ship is not something that should be too surprising.


    What surprised him was when did such high-tech talents appear in a ce like the Tru Empire?


    "Your Majesty the King, you are finally back. We have been worried for several hours!"


    Gogoya hurriedly came forward to greet him and said to Chang Nuo.


    "Are all the supplies that need to be purchased ready?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "It''s almost done, but what General Junhe said was too urgent, so there were a lot of things that had been purchased that I didn''t have time to bring back!" Gogoya said.


    "It only takes a few days. Materials are not particrlycking." Changnuo said, then turned to look at Taotu who was following him, and once again said to Gogoya, "I''ll leave that woman to you." Come on, give her some clothes, I don��t want to have another sailor on my ship!"


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    Gogoya had already noticed Peach Rabbit, who was wearing a robe of naval justice. It could be seen clearly from a distance, but it was too conspicuous.


    After finishing speaking, Chang Nuo walked directly towards the deck.


    Justing up, Taotu also took a look at the situation here. At least the people on the boat were not particrly crowded. It seemed that they hade well prepared. They did not bring too many people with them, but they were on a ship in Nuo Da. Such a small number of people seems to be too few.


    "Vice Admiral Momo Usagi of the Navy Headquarters, my name is Gogoya, nice to meet you!"


    Gogoya stepped forward and said with a smile on his face.


    She has known this woman for a long time, and even met her once in the past few years. Taotu is no longer a big secret in the Tru Empire. After all, she has already been to the Tru Empire once, so in the Tru Empire Many people often have a pretty good impression of him.


    Taotu no longer had the same restraint as before. After all, the boss of his own force and the leaders were all there just now, so everything was not so casual, but it was different now.


    "It seems you know me? I just don''t know if there is food on the ship?" Taotu asked directly when he came up.

 Chapter 276 Departure from Fish-Man Island

    <h4>Chapter 276 Departure from Fish-Man Ind</h4>


    She doesn''t have the slightest bit of restraint now, and she even acts as if everything is natural.


    Of course, that''s all she could do on this ship.


    Gogoya stared helplessly at the woman in navy clothes, but then said, "ording to His Majesty the King''s instructions, youe with me to change clothes first, and I will take you to have something to eatter." !��


    "That''s okay!"


    Peach Rabbit opened his mouth and said, while following Gogoya''s steps, his eyes were still looking at the whole ship. At least when he came here, he had to take care of his own safety first, even though he knew that he might not be those people. opponents, but the preparations still need to be made in advance.


    But every step he took, Taotu could find something different. This ship was very different from any other he had ever seen. Not to mention the level of luxury on it, just the decoration on the entire deck. The space is not made of any wooden structure.


    As he continued to move forward, Gogoya took Taotu directly to a room. This room didn''t look that small. After he entered it, he directly opened a wardrobe, which was filled with a dazzling array of clothes and all kinds of clothes. Almost all kinds of clothing are avable here.


    "Wear whatever you want. These are mine and have almost never been touched. Pick whichever one you like!"


    Gogoya turned his head and said to Peach Rabbit who was following behind him.


    While looking at the other person''s face and speaking, his eyes also moved downwards unconsciously, especially when looking at the tall and tall mountain peaks. At the same time, Gogoya also restrained himself from ncing downwards. Maybe it was a woman. The natural inferiorityplex made Gogoya feel a little ufortable inparison.


    "Are these all yours?"


    Taotu asked in surprise.


    After all, there are at least hundreds of clothes hanging in the closet, and each category is almost different in style. And which woman naturally doesn��t like to dress up, so when he saw this situation, there was something in his eyes. Feelings of envy.


    After being in the navy for so many years, Taotu rarely wears anything other than navy uniforms.


    "Wear whatever you want. I don''t know how long it will be until the next stop. I''ll prepare other things for you then."


    Gogoya said.


    "Then I won''t be polite!" Taotu said.


    The two women in the room were discussing changing clothes. However, Changnuo and the others, who had just returned to the ship, had no interest in staying on the Bobo Inds.


    On the lounge chair at the edge of the swimming pool, Chang Nuo rested his head on his hands. Several other people were also sitting there honestly. No one told them about the series of events that happened today.


    "Is everyone here?"


    Chang Nuo didn''t know who he was talking to, but at this moment, a figure suddenly began to appear around him. Hai Ling appeared next to him illusoryly, and said in a sweet and respectful voice, "Your Majesty, everyone is currently here." We��re all here, shall we start setting off?��


    "Start heading towards Fish-Man Ind. Don''t go too fast on the road. Let''s enjoy the scenery of the seabed. When entering an area without light, remember to turn on the searchlight."


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    Hai Ling''s mechanical voice has be much better now. At least in a certain aspect, it has be more and more like a normal human voice.


    After she replied, she slowly began to disappear next to Chang Nuo, and then the protective barrier on the entire ship began to open instantly. It waspletely transparent and no one could even feel the existence of anything.


    When the ship started to move, the way it drove this time waspletely different from before. Although it was still moving forward, the draft was obviously getting deeper and deeper this time, until the sea water began to cover it. The height of the entire ship, and immediately, the Infinity waspletely submerged into the sea water.


    But even so, the ship will not be affected at all. He has an independent oxygen supply. Even if he stays here for a year, I am afraid he will not cause any difort due to oxygen problems.


    "Wow!! It''s time to dive into the water!"


    Enel was lying on the edge with some excitement. He had been staying on the sky ind all this time, and he would probably never experience such a scene at any time in the sky at a height of tens of thousands of meters.


    Now they have begun to slowly sink towards the sea, and the surrounding area has beenpletely enveloped by sea water. Most of the people on the ship are all Devil Fruit users. If there is a problem with the protective barrier at this time, it is estimated that there will be no problem. It''s really be a big problem.


    "Your Majesty, is it really okay for us to take a navy with us this time?"


    Arbonne asked.


    "Actually, I also want to ask this question. After all, we don''t know what will happen at the end of this voyage. If we take a navy with us along the way, we always feel that if everything is known to the navy, will it be harmful to us? Very disadvantageous?"


    Junhe also said.


    None of them were in the slightest mood to watch the fish swimming around in the sea, but they were still quite concerned about this matter.


    After all, suddenly a stranger came to the ship, and they still didn''t know the details of the other party. Even in terms of strength, this woman was not particrly strong. If she caused trouble or did other small tricks for them, this would be enough. Make these people miserable for a while.


    "I think the reason why His Majesty the King wants to take the navy girl with him is mainly because he doesn''t want to cause too much trouble in the future. ording to the current strength of the Tru Empire, the navy and the world government cannot be so confident that we can continue to move forward safely. OK."


    Yixiao sat there and said.


    "Haha~, you don''t need to think too much. No matter what the situation is, the Tru Empire is now fully capable and capable of dealing with it. Although it really doesn''t want to cause too much trouble, after all, the road ahead is still a bit boring. Wouldn��t it be better for us to be apanied by a navy and such a beautiful woman?��


    Moshank suddenly changed his previous appearance andughed loudly.


    Even standing there and shouting by himself seemed a bit abrupt. Everyone''s eyes were drawn over and they cast a look of contempt at this guy who was smiling with his mouth wide open.


    "Is this guy sick?"


    Junhe asked with his eyes widened.


    "I feel the same~"


    "Okay, don''t think too much. Now is not the time for us to have a showdown with any force. We should deal with our current situation. There is no need to add some troubles to ourselves. Since the Navy is willing to let people follow us, then let them Just follow.


    Who knows what will happen during the rest of the journey? "


    Chang Nuoy there quietly looking at the fish swimming in the water above, and said in a calm tone.

 Chapter 277 The outstanding problems of the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 277 The outstanding problems of the Tru Empire</h4>


    Although the entire ship had sunk below the surface of the sea, this did not affect their sightseeing scenery. Even the Infinity''s speed on the seabed was not particrly fast, leaving enough space for them.


    "It seems there is a guest on the ship!"


    Yixiao sat there, as if he suddenly felt something, looked towards the other direction of the ship and said.


    "Huh?? What kind of guest?"


    Junhe looked over, but didn''t find anything, so he asked with some confusion.


    "General Yixiao, do you feel this


    Inside the Endless, near where the supplies were piled, a box moved slightly at this time, and then two eyes began to appear from the two holes on the side of the box.


    After all, the Infinity can conduct external reconnaissance, but when ites to the interior of the ship, there is no way to know if anything else has gotten in.


    The two of them knew clearly that there was an uninvited guest on the ship, but at this moment no one showed any alert or anxious look. Instead, they still sat here with a leisurely look and began to discuss.


    After listening to what Chang Nuo said with a smile, the corners of his mouth raised slightly and he said, "It''s hard to tell yet. It''s probably a superhuman devil fruit, but I want to know how he got up?"


    "So you understand now that the entire country is already in the process of expanding its strength and is not even aware of such small things. If itsts for a long time, this will be a great damage to the Tru Empire. .��


    Changnuo said.


    "After returning home, my subordinates must resolve simr matters like this as soon as possible!"


    Junhe stood up and said respectfully.


    If nothing else, it''s because His Majesty the King has begun to feel dissatisfied. Although his expression is still the original leisurely look, the attitude in his tone can be clearly heard.


    Abona also stood up. This kind of thing has indeed caused some drawbacks in the Tru Empire. After all, most of them have not experienced actualbat so far, but the strong strength has caused some people to gradually expand. .


    "I wonder if His Majesty the King has any better ns for the future?" Yixiao asked directly.


    "It seems it''s time to put that Devil Fruit from a few years ago to use!"


    Changnuo said.


    But after these words were spoken, several people sitting next to him were obviously surprised. They didn''t even know what the King was saying.


    "It seems that His Majesty the King is nning to let them start a new training mode in an unconscious state?"


    Yixiao said with a slight smile.


    "It''s just that so far, I haven''t found any more suitable candidate. This is what gives me a headache. In fact, this kind of problem has already appeared and it is still unresolved to this day. As a king, I also have a lot of problems. Big responsibility.��


    Chang Nuoughed at himself and said.


    "Your Majesty~"


    "Your Majesty the King..."


    Chang Nuo''s words of self-me instantly made them all feel at a loss. Even under such circumstances, everyone stood up. Even if they smiled, they felt a little embarrassed at this moment.


    After all, as generals of the Tru Empire, they are the ones who directly manage the army no matter what the situation. The country''s troops are in a rtively swollen state. They have not expressed their position enough for His Majesty the King to start to reflect. Such a situation is unlikely to be seen anywhere.


    So they all had the same expression, and their self-me was probably more serious than ever.


    "Your Majesty the King does not have to be like this. This is my fault. I have never thought about how to implement this matter. After returning to the country, we will naturally put such things as a top priority!"


    Said with a smile.


    "If this matter is not resolved, it will be left to His Majesty the King to deal with it!" Abona followed.


    "It''s all my fault, I hope your Majesty will punish you!!"


    Junhe walked forward with his head lowered and said with a look of remorse.


    "It seems that we should reallye up with a response n next, otherwise we don''t know when this situation wille to an end!"


    Moshank said with a sigh as well.


    The scene of each of them ming themselves happened to be witnessed by Gogoya and Taotu who had just been driven out. At this moment, no one on the deck dared to speak. They all lowered their heads and waited. Following the next reprimand from His Majesty the King.


    "I didn''t expect that the legendary Emperor Tru could actually do this!"


    Taotu looked at all this, and for some reason, he also thought of those people in the navy.


    This force is also facing such a problem. Everyone is proud andcent, and almost all of them have their nostrils turned upward. There has been such a self-examination once upon a time. The navy has maintained its current development status for so many years, regardless of Is it someone from above or someone from below? Isn��t everyone always like what they say?


    But who has ever looked for the root cause of the problem, and who has begun to look for such a solution?


    Taotu felt the same way about this scene, because he was also such a person before. After gaining some strength, he hardly paid attention to many people. But now among the group of people in front of him, none of them stand on the same side. This side is at the top of the world''s strength, but it is still a rare thing for people to be able to self-examine.


    However, the outsider staying in the cabin at this moment is stillcent. At least he has escaped the navy''s blockade and saved his small life.


    Little did he know that because of his incident, everyone outside stood up straight and waited for scolding. Anyway, it was estimated that his fate would not be particrly good.


    "On this trip, at least we can see our own shorings. The country has just started to develop in just a few years. It is normal that we do not take into ount some things, but the next things we do still need everyone to work together. , it��s not toote to find out now.


    On the road ahead, you all have a long way to go. At least what you carry in your hands is not only your personal life, but also the honor and disgrace of the country, the lives of the people, and the future of the soldiers.


    I''m afraid we will encounter a lot of problems during the next voyage. Please give us a satisfactory answer after you finish this trip and return to your country. "


    Chang Nuo sat up and said calmly.

 Chapter 278 Guests on the Endless

    <h4>Chapter 278 Guests on the Endless</h4>


    The others just stood there after hearing this. Anyway, what Chang Nuo did this time was enough to make them ashamed.


    "What are you still waiting for? There are already guests on the boat, why don''t you invite them out quickly?"


    Junhe turned his head and shouted to the guards standing on the edge.


    After receiving the order, the three people quickly activated the Haki of Seeing and Hearing to perceive. This kind of thing could actually be avoided, but it was because of their negligence and carelessness that they did not know that there was an extra person on the ship.


    However, among the cargo in the cabin, the two eyes in this box were still smiling, as if everything was fine.


    But as the footsteps approached, the moment the door opened, five or six people stared at the box on the ground, with even angry expressions on their faces.


    This time they werepletely embarrassed. With so many of them, in the end they were unable to prevent an outsider froming in. Although I don��t know how he got in, he is indeed here now. Anyway, It''s their responsibility anyway.


    "This bastard!!"


    The man closest to the door said angrily, and then no one stopped him anyway. He rushed forward and kicked the cardboard box.


    With a loud shout of "Ah~", others began to surround and kick him mercilessly.


    When it appeared again, several people brought this guy to the deck, but this guy had already turned into a pig''s head, and he was so beaten that even his mother couldn''t recognize him.


    As soon as a few people let go, this guy fell down directly on the ground. He didn''t know what the origin of this group of people was, but from the moment when others hit him, this guy had clearly realized where the ship was. People are definitely not something you can mess with.


    Taotu walked over quietly, then sat on a chair as if nothing had happened, staring seriously at the guy who was kneeling there and being beaten into a state of disgrace, and said, "Morux, bounty of 81 million Baileys, superhuman transformation A person with fruit abilities, a native of Nurkia in the West Sea, what I said should be right, right?"


    "First tell me how you got on this ship? If you tell me well, you may be spared your life. If you can''t tell me why, then you can just go out and feed the fish!"


    Junhe said with a frown.


    "I..., I came in with the cargo. The ship looked pretty good, so I changed it to the cargo and came in together."


    Said the man named Morux.


    He doesn''t dare to exin it properly now. After all, facing his own trial will probably cost him his life no matter what.


    "Hai Ling, throw him out!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly, so in the next second, before Morux could react, he was already in the sea water.


    There is only one fate facing him, and that is to disappear into this sea.


    Although the dive is not very deep, it is at least 500m away from the sea surface, so Morux was instantly crushed by the sea water when he just came out.


    "s~"


    Chang Nuoy there and sighed, because at this moment, the scenery outside was almost invisible. Under the dim vision, how could there be any scenery to appreciate?


    Taotu sat there, and the other person''s sofa immediately created another image for him, and everything seemed so indifferent and calm.


    "Your Majesty the King, you will encounter an underwater waterfall five kilometers ahead. Please sit tight, as the Infinity will experience some bumps and speed up!"


    Hai Ling''s voice came out, but she herself did not appear, and was conveyed directly through the voice control system on the entire ship.


    "Underwater waterfall???"


    After Enel heard this, he quickly climbed to the edge again and began to observe the situation outside with great efforts. Now he was not the only one who was more excited, but others also had the same expression.


    Junhe was the most extreme. He was almost lying on top of the protective barrier, watching all this seriously.


    As the current sharply strengthened, everyone could clearly feel that the ship was moving rapidly at this moment, and what was different from before was that the voyage was not so stable. Although it was not very bumpy, it was not very bumpy inparison. It was indeed much moreplicated before.


    "Wow~, look, there is really a waterfall!!"


    Enelu shouted loudly.


    In the end, Chang Nuo couldn''t hold back his curiosity. He turned his vision outside and looked at the waterfall flowing down. This thing on the bottom of the sea was simply spectacr.


    The water flowed down, almost simr to the scene seen outside, except that it was darker here and the water flow was more turbulent.


    "I never thought that nature could have such a creation?"


    Chang Nuo said with the corners of his mouth raised slightly.


    "Although this ce is beautiful, seven out of ten pirates died here. It is estimated that there are no one knows how many pirates are hidden under this waterfall at this moment!"


    Said with a leisurely smile.


    "I just don''t know if the mermaid down there looks good or not?" Moshank put his chin in his hands and said thoughtfully.


    "Can you be more normal? Although I also want to say such things, the key is that there are so many people!"


    Abona also opened his mouth to speak.


    "No way, Abona, you have been in the New World for so many years, have you never been to Fish-Man Ind?"


    Moshank asked.


    "Anyway, I don''t have much of an impression. I guess I was only a few years old when I came here. Who would still remember it after such a long time?" Abona said.


    "Hurry up! We are going to fall!!"


    Junhe grabbed the railing with his hands and looked at the ship that was about to sink into the waterfall in the deep sea. He immediately started shouting.


    After all, they had never experienced such a thing. When they saw such a terrifying scene, they all couldn''t help but be nervous. This had nothing to do with their strength.


    It purelyes from the fear that arises in the heart.


    "Mermaid???"


    Chang Nuo was lying there, still holding a piece of fruit leisurely in his hand, and he began to imagine what a mermaid looked like.


    But in the process of his fantasy, the entire ship had entered the waterfall in the deep sea, and was falling downwards at an extremely fast speed. The hull had even begun to tilt slightly, but this situation would also happen to the Infinity. By making corrections as quickly as possible, no matter what the situation is, the power of the system will always be much stronger than any human power.

 Chapter 279 Deep Sea Waterfall

    <h4>Chapter 279 Deep Sea Waterfall</h4>


    At this moment, the Infinity is falling downwards at an extremely fast speed, and the surrounding area is nowpletely dark. If you rely only on human power, you will not be able to discern any direction in such a deep sea, let alone how to control the ship. The ship''s course will not collide with the rocks on the seabed.


    The direction from the Shampoo Inds to Fisherman Ind has a 70% mortality rate. From this point of view, it does require great courage and navigation experience to determine.


    Because in such a deep sea, at a depth of one or two thousand meters, no matter how powerful you are, it has almost no effect at this moment, especially for those with Devil Fruit abilities. Once the hull is damaged, the only fate they will face is death. .


    The people on the edge of him were all very nervous. Now it had nothing to do with their strength. Some of them even had cold sweat on their foreheads.


    If this ship hadn''t been able to sail automatically, the Tru Empire might not have been able to find a navigator who could sail in such an environment. It could also be said that this trip was heading towards hell.


    In fact, this is almost the same for most pirates. Every time they cross Fishman Ind, they are almost like sailing on the edge of hell. Not only do they need to understand the various rules of navigation, but they also need to know the direction of the currents. , and even need toe up with a n to deal with an underwater waterfall that suddenly appears like this.


    Of course, for those big pirates in the new world. Almost every navigator can handle such a job, but for those who came from the first half of the Grand Line or even from the Four Seas, this ce canpletely be their graveyard.


    Although the Infinity is protected by a barrier, the harsh sound of the whistling water on the outside can still be heard very clearly and clearly when staying inside. Therefore, during the process of falling downward, there was only a trace of residual light in it. At this moment, everything has be a state of darkness shrouded in progress.


    The distance to the deep-sea waterfall is not particrly far. It has only dropped to about two or three thousand meters. The hull has gradually stabilized. The Infinity does not need human control and will automatically move forward ording to its own navigation direction, so even if there is no In the case of lights, there is almost no need to worry about any possible safety issues.


    After stabilizing, those who were originally nervous instantly rxed and leaned against the railings. There were even a few who began to breathe heavily, not to mention them, even those who came with them. Vice Admiral Momotu of the Navy Headquarters also had some sweat on his forehead.


    However, these rtively powerful people are not as good as a woman without strength. Gogoya never showed any panic from the beginning to the end. Everything seemed to be very calm, and hey there leisurely and admired quietly. Looking at the beautiful scenery of the underwater waterfall, even though nothing could be seen in the end, at least this woman''s mentality was not generally good.


    "Are you okay?"


    Gogoya asked, looking at Peach Rabbit.


    "Haha~, what can I do? It''s just that it''s a little sultry in the deep sea!"


    Taotu said stiffly.


    "The Infinity has an automatic oxygen supply system and a constant temperature setting within the protective barrier. Nervousness is just nervousness. There is nothing to be embarrassed about."


    Gogoya said with a smile on his face.


    Taotu suddenly became speechless. She didn''t know how to answer such words. After all, she didn''t know that much about this ship.


    "Can you introduce to me one of the special abilities of this ship you mentioned?"


    Peach Rabbit suddenly changed the subject and said.


    She originally followed this group of people to get to know them, and now it happened to be a better opportunity. Taking advantage of this situation, she started to inquire about some basic information about these people.


    "What are you talking about? I think you don''t need to think about this. The entire ship is operated by an intelligent system, including navigation, and does not require human control. But what I can tell you is that the Infinity has no attack power. But it has absolute defensive capabilities.��


    Gogoya said, theny there leisurely.


    "How did the Tru Empire create such a product?" Taotu thought with a solemn expression.


    Now that we have entered calm waters for navigation, we no longer need to worry about any waves or special circumstances.


    But it was also at this time that all the lights on the entire ship were turned on, and two huge searchlights began to appear directly in front. Even in the deep sea where you can''t even see your fingers, the light of the searchlights can reach at least more than 500 meters away. .


    When sailing in such a ce, the transparency of the sea water is almost the same as outside except for being a little darker. Except for some fish or other creatures, there are no waves in the sea water and no any Impurities.


    As the lights began to appear, all the lights inside the hull were also turned on. The lights on the deck at this moment were quite warm and harmonious.


    "Nuro, can you cook deep-sea fish?"


    Enel, who was lying on the edge of the deck, began to shout towards the inside.


    After all, in such a deep sea, there was no one in the room at this moment. There were only more than thirty people on the ship, but now almost all of them were lying on the entire deck and began to admire the situation outside.


    This man named Nuro looks slightly fat and wears white clothes, but this guy is truly the king''s chef.


    After hearing Enilu''s shout, Nuro took two steps in his direction and said thoughtfully, "I think there should be no problem. I just don''t know how sea fish tastes?"


    "Then how about we grab two and taste them?"


    Enelu said obviously excited.


    "I think this proposal is quite good, but how should we capture the key point?"


    Junhe also stood up and started to suggest.


    Both of them had already said this, and the faces of the Trul Empire''s entourage, who had not seen much of the world, began to show excited expressions.


    Although almost all of them live by the sea, almost all the fish on the sea have been eaten, but these guys have almost never seen the deep-sea fish that live a few meters below. But thinking about it, it should be considered a rather surprising thing. Exciting things.


    Seeing that they were all eager to try, Nuro stopped dying and shouted to everyone with a calm expression, "As long as you can catch them, I will definitely cook you a satisfying meal!"

 Chapter 280 Two abilities?

    <h4>Chapter 280 Two abilities?</h4>


    But in this deep sea, not to mention those with Devil Fruit abilities cannot get out, but what if those without Devil Fruit abilities can get out?


    If you go out one second, you will probably be crushed to pieces by the pressure of the sea water the next second. We just got out a person with a transformation fruit, but in the end, the moment he just went out, he was not drowning because of eating a devil fruit. And death, the water depth of only 500m has already caused the whole person to explode on the spot.


    That''s not to mention that we are now in a deep sea of ??about 5km.


    "General Yixiao, do you think there is a way to drag in the fish outside?"


    Chang Nuo, who was lying there, also said with interest.


    "This kind of thing is really difficult to do. If the movement isrge, I don''t know if the Infinity can withstand it. If the movement is small, it really won''t have much effect."


    Said with a smile.


    "Hai Ling, can the defensive barrier of the Infinity be able to bring in outside creatures?"


    Changnuo said.


    As soon as he finished speaking, the next second the Infinity system Herington appeared next to him, and he opened his mouth and said, "The Infinity defensive barrier is almost very simr to the coating of the Shampoo Inds. The only difference is that even if the defensive barrier appears He will also repair rtivelyrge cracks in an instant, and there will be no situation that could threaten the ship.


    However, under the water pressure of more than 5,000 meters deep, it is still not rmended that you make too much noise. If there is a problem with the system and the defensive barrier cannot be repaired immediately, the Infinity will also be silent. In this deep sea! "


    Hai Ling''s words were not only meant for Chang Nuo, but also for others.


    Such huge water pressure in the deep sea will indeed cause what he said. Although the system is much more powerful than human power, sometimes some problems may ur. Once problems ur under the deep sea of ??more than 5,000 meters, , then it is really a huge disaster for everyone.


    "I think it''s better not to eat it! Just listening to it makes you feel dangerous?"


    Enelu said nkly.


    "What are you worried about? Hai Ling also said just now that as long as it doesn''t cause too much noise, there will be almost no problem." Junhe said, then quickly walked over and patted Enilu on the shoulder, with a hint of sinisterness in the corner of his mouth. He said with a smile, "Hurry up and use your electricity. When you see a bigger fishter, just knock him out and drag him in!"


    "How did you drag it in?"


    Enelu asked with a speechless expression.


    "I don''t remember that you used a thunder chain before. It shouldn''t be a problem to drag it in, right?" Junhe asked.


    "What are you talking about? The Thunder Chain is used for super attacks. I haven''t controlled it well yet. If I identally destroy the system on the ship, do you want us all to be buried under the sea? !��


    Enelu shouted loudly.


    He would rather not eat these things now, and it would be good to keep some expectations. But ording to what Junhe said, if one operation fails by then, it is very likely that all the people like him will be wiped out.


    "Hey~, stop arguing, I saw a very delicious fish, this guy is definitely delicious!"


    As the two of them quarreled, Nuro was lying on the defensive barrier, his eyes always staring at the fish swimming past. But within this group of fish, there was a fish that seemed to be at least 20m long. Fish, this thing is all silvery white, no matter which direction it looks from, it is absolutely delicious.


    "Enilu, hurry up, stun that thing quickly?"


    Junhe shouted excitedly.


    "You can''t be serious, right? What if something happens?"


    Enel said reluctantly.


    "One chop~"


    While the two of them were still arguing, Abona pulled out the long knife slightly without saying a word. As a ray of light burst out instantly, the white long knife that was still ying happily was The fish immediately dispersed into two sections in the next second.


    "Awesome, Abona!"


    Junhe shouted as excitedly as a child.


    But after killing it, the key question is how to drag it in.


    It is impossible to kill without restraint in this deep sea, but in the end it is still not possible to taste it, which is really a bit frustrating and ufortable.


    But at this moment, Chang Nuo also stood up curiously, then adjusted his clothes, then walked directly past Yixiao and stood at the edge of the defensive barrier.


    Everyone was focusing their attention on His Majesty the King at this moment. They did not believe that His Majesty the King woulde to see the excitement.


    The person with the most attentive eyes should be Taotu. People from the outside world have always been full of endless curiosity about Emperor Toru. They are not only curious about the strength of the other party, but more importantly, they are curious about what kind of person the other party is.


    Now that she has a rare opportunity to have such close contact, she can naturally feel the other person''s situation very well.


    "Nuro, now I am also looking forward to what the taste of your cooking will be like? But is this fish that has been broken into two pieces really useful?"


    Changnuo said to Nuro, who was wearing white clothes.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King! The temperature outside in the deep sea is extremely low. Even if it is broken in two, there will definitely be no problem."


    Nuro said.


    "Well, since it''s a rare trip, I should naturally eat something that I can''t usually eat!"


    Changnuo said with a slight smile. Yixiao, who was lying there, couldn''t sit down at this time. He also started to stand up and watch the performance of His Majesty the King.


    The moment Chang Nuo started to get serious, he raised his right hand slightly and faced the big white fish that had been broken into two sections and was still slowly descending. Everyone originally thought that he would use the power of space to directly drag it. Come over, but the next scene instantly made everyone''s eyes widen.


    Because in the next second, a golden chain suddenly appeared in the center of Chang Nuo''s palm, and it quickly shot out towards the fish outside the barrier. In just the blink of an eye, the big white fish broke into two pieces. Already tied up.


    "This is???"


    Junhe looked at this scene in stunned silence, still remembering what Abona said a few years ago, "His Majesty the King seems to have eaten two Devil Fruits!"


    Everyone was shocked by the situation that suddenly appeared in front of them, and even the other people who followed were a little at a loss.


    Anyone would think of this kind of ability as a Devil Fruit. It would be impossible to have such an ability no matter how hard you think.

 Chapter 281 The Road to Fish-Man Island

    <h4>Chapter 281 The Road to Fish-Man Ind</h4>


    The people who were most shocked at this moment were almost all the people from the Toru Empire. Taotu had never understood the strength of Emperor Toru before, and he didn''t even know what his abilities were.


    This time it was just the opponent showing it, but looking at this style, she didn''t know what kind of devil fruit power it was, but this situation was different for the people in the Toru Empire.


    Everyone''s reaction was very strong, but most people were almost stunned in ce, with their mouths open, their jaws almost dropped to the ground, and their eyeballs bulging. It was hard to believe what they were seeing. everything.


    Abona was slightly better. After all, he had seen this situation once before, but that time he only saw it in his own perception. Although he could not help but be surprised when he saw this situation with his own eyes, But it''s not exaggerated to a certain extent.


    Almost all the people following him now know what kind of fruit power their King has. Before, it was a space-based Devil Fruit power, but now there is another kind of power that is inexplicably added. This is what surprises them.


    For such a difficult problem, even a smile standing next to him couldn''t control the exaggeration on his expression. With two Devil Fruits concentrated on one person''s body, I''m afraid only this person has appeared in the entire pirate world from history to the present. Pass.


    However, as the person involved, Chang Nuo did not notice the expressions of the others at this moment, and still started to pull the half-length white fish outside towards the board.


    In less than a moment, when the fish approached the deck, it passed through the defensive barrier of the outside world as if passing through a light curtain, and smoothly dragged the huge fish in with a distance of more than ten meters. .


    Deep-sea fish almost all have the same virtue. In addition to the fact that the body looks edible, the long head is simply unbearable to look at. Fortunately, there is no fish head now, but the blood on this fish is also slightly blue. The condition, the lines between the muscles, you can tell at a nce that this is definitely gourmet food.


    "What''s wrong with you?"


    Chang Nuo turned his head and looked at the exaggerated expressions of everyone and asked curiously?


    "Oh, nothing!"


    Junhe was the first to step forward, but at this time, the power of the King Kong Blockade emitted from Changnuo''s hand had now beenpletely withdrawn.


    "Why are you all so surprised when your Majesty the King disys Devil Fruit powers?"


    Peach Rabbit looked curiously at Gogoya who still looked shocked and asked softly.


    "There are some things you don''t understand, but I don''t think anyone will tell you why!"


    Gogoya said calmly.


    "It seems that there are secrets in this that outsiders don''t know?" Taotu thought to himself.


    "Nuro, it depends on your performance next."


    Chang Nuo turned to shout to Nuro, who was wearing white clothes, but then he seemed to be worried about something, and asked calmly again, "Hai Ling, how long does it take to reach Fish-Man Ind?"


    "Your Majesty the King, it is estimated that it will still take nearly three hours to reach Fish-Man Ind. However, there are estimated to be about 1,500 Sea Kings ahead. Should we avoid them and advance?"


    Hai Ling''s figure appeared directly and then said respectfully.


    "Howe there are Neptunes here?"


    Taotu suddenly said in surprise.


    Chang Nuo nced at the other person, and even felt that this woman was indeed a bit ignorant, but he did not say anything to her. Instead, he said to Hai Ling, "Keep moving forward, no need to take a detour!"


    "Your Majesty the King, there are now three passages to choose from from Fish-Man Ind. Next, you will be shown the holographic projection. You can choose a path to move forward!"


    Hai Ling said again, but while she was speaking, she waved her hands forward. At this moment, Hai Ling''s whole body began to gradually project a map simr to a scan, including their location and the way to the fishmen. The road in the direction of the ind.


    ording to the road ahead of them, it is expected that they will reach a deep strait in a short time. This ce is very simr to a road that the protagonist will walk in the future. As for the other two passages, there is no specific reason now. Yes, but no path looks that easy.


    At this moment, there is the Red Earth Continent directly above their heads, and the Fish-Man Ind is also located vertically below the Red Earth Continent. If one wants to reach this ce, his mortality rate is almost the same as that of reaching the Sky Ind.


    But it is a ce like this that makes all pirates flock to it.


    Under the illumination of the searchlight, this area of ????the sea has now be a graveyard of pirate ships. You can hardly walk far and you can see countless pirate ships that have quietly sunk here. It is estimated that the pirates above At this moment, I have been scraped and eaten by countless fish.


    Some of the damaged pirate ships have begun to grow covered with moss and coral, and even many smaller fish are lingering on these wrecks. As for pirates, there are no traces of them here. .


    The Deep Sea Cemetery is probably built specifically for pirates. Starting from the deep sea waterfall, without professional navigators, all pirates will most likely hit the ground directly. However, the coatings that protect them, It will also be unable to withstand such a powerful impact and will be shattered directly.


    "Hai Ling, just head down from where the trench is!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Your Majesty the King, do we need to notify before we go to Fishman Ind to prevent unnecessary trouble?" Moshank suddenly asked.


    "No need, Fish-Man Ind is under the rule of Whitebeard, and I have some friendship with the old man. As long as we don''t cause trouble, there shouldn''t be any big problems!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Old man???"


    Taotu was already wondering if she had heard wrong, and even wondered if the White Beard that Chang Nuo mentioned was the same person as the White Beard that she knew?


    The key point is that the Fish-Man Ind mentioned by the other party is under the rule of Whitebeard, but who in this world can be called Whitebeard?


    "As expected!" Yixiao said softly.


    He was not surprised at all, and even felt that all these things were taken for granted. He did not find it surprising that His Majesty the King did anything that could surprise people.


    "Then if we go to Fish-Man Ind, we can y with the mermaids on the ind?"


    Enelu said with excitement.


    But what follows is the contempt of others. Even if you have such thoughts, don''t speak out so openly. Not all men are on board.

 Chapter 282 Neptune’s Waiting

    <h4>Chapter 282 Neptune��s Waiting</h4>


    It is true that almost all men living on the shore are full of curiosity about the mermaids living in the water, so every time there is a mermaid auction in the Chambord Inds, his price is almost always higher than the auction price of the same type. hundred times.


    "Looks like he''s here? I just don''t know if he can be like Joeyboy before?"


    "But he''sing..."


    "Do we still need to greet?"


    "No need, the time may not be up yet..."


    "It''s just that we don''t have much time..."


    ��


    During the voyage, others on the deck were ying around, but at this moment, Chang Nuo''s expression suddenly became dignified and serious.


    This time, he passed directly by the Neptunes on the deep sea bottom. The ship had functions simr to conch stones, so he was not worried about the Neptunes attacking. But what he didn''t expect at all was that among these Neptunes, There were actually quite a few silently watching him.


    "Your Majesty, what''s wrong?"


    Mo Sank looked at the current Chang Nuo, with something obviously wrong on his expression, so he asked worriedly.


    "Nothing!"


    With just a simple sentence, Chang Nuo dismissed him directly, but what he heard in his ears should be themunication between the sea kings. Although he didn''t understand what the meaning was, why was Joey Boy here? Mentioned in their mouths?


    Chang Nuo slowly walked to the edge of the defensive barrier, keeping his eyes on the group of sea kings.


    "He seemed to hear us talking!"


    "Probably not?"


    ��


    Chang Nuo watched these sea kings quietly. Even though he could hear their words, Chang Nuo did not show it to them. He just stood here and used the faint light to see their shallow figures clearly.


    In this deep ocean wave, he really couldn''t imagine thatmunication between Neptune species could be so simple.


    But the ship was still sailing, and there were countless pirate ship wrecks piled on the seabed on both sides, each of which looked shocking.


    "I''m back!"


    Changnuo tentatively used his mind fruit ability to directly convey what he wanted to say in his heart. He just wanted to confirm whether he could reallymunicate with these Neptunes.


    But then, although there were about 1,500 Neptunes, their huge figures almost upied the entire sea area at this moment.


    After the sound spread, almost all the sea kings looked at the ship. Fortunately, almost everyone else was ying and ying there, and no one really noticed him.


    But even so, with a smile that kept sitting upright, he still discovered many clues that others could not see.


    Mobuto Gion''s eyes were always fixed on this mysterious man.


    But she ispletely different from Yixiao. What Yixiao observes is something she cannot see at all.


    The moment he saw all the Neptunes looking towards him, Chang Nuo was convinced that his voice could indeedmunicate with them. This kind of thing was scary enough just thinking about it.


    "Are you back?"


    In the darkness, a voice came directly to Chang Nuo''s mind. Without thinking too much, he knew it was a Sea King-like voice in the dark area.


    Changnuo didn''t panic at all, but calmly used the fruit of the soul again to convey, "Can you tell me about the past?"


    "There will be a chance! There will be a chance..."


    The other party''s hollow voice began to repeat this sentence back and forth, and all the Neptunes concentrated on swimming towards the opposite direction of the Infinity.


    It wasn''t until they finally disappearedpletely that the Infinity began to slowly sink into the strait.


    Changnuo thought about the original plot carefully. The protagonist should have encountered these sea kings when he was near Fish-Man Ind, but he encountered them in the sea area of ??about 5 kilometers. Anyway, all the unsolved mysteries are too much. There is no need to dwell on just one aspect of the matter.


    The Infinity has now begun to slowly descend towards the trench. Even the light from everything around it is almost invisible. In this narrow trench, the Infinity is still slowly starting to move forward.


    As it became pitch ck again, coupled with the straits on both sides, the entire ship began to regain a silent atmosphere. It seemed a little depressing and urgent at the moment. They were all people who had never experienced these things. When I suddenly came into contact with these things, the curiosity at the beginning slowly turned into a bit of fear now, but this is still rtively normal.


    "Your Majesty the King, the deep-sea fish just now is ready. You and others cane in and have a meal!"


    Just when the atmosphere was getting extremely bad, Nuro walked out and opened the door and shouted to everyone on the deck.


    Although the atmosphere was not as lively as before, it was not so scary that everyone was not even in the mood to eat. At least at this moment, everyone''s emotions began to rise again, and one by one began to run inside.


    "Just now, were youmunicating with those Neptunes?"


    When he saw that the person had almost entered, Yixiao suddenly asked.


    He couldn''t be sure, but he was still observing the situation of the group of Sea Kings, so when all the Sea Kings focused their attention on the ship, the strong sense of oppression, even if he had the strength of a general, Men are a little weird.


    Therefore, he was more sure that Changnuo was not just watching the Sea Kings standing on the edge of the deck, but wasmunicating in a way he didn''t know.


    "What are you thinking? How could I have that ability?"


    Changnuo said with a slight smile to relieve his embarrassment.


    "It seems that the old man is overthinking!"


    Yixiao did not continue to ask further, but stood up directly, leaning on the crutch in his hand, and walked slowly towards the direction of the restaurant.


    There is no need to ask too thoroughly about some things, as long as you know them.


    Chang Nuo stayed alone on the deck, but he was not alone here either.


    Gion held a dish of deep-sea fish in her hands, and while everyone else was still eating, she slowly walked out alone.


    At the moment, she was wearing Gogoya''s clothes. Although the overall fit was rtively good, at least in some aspects she was much bigger than Gogoya, and the overall figure was highlighted, which gave her apletely different feeling.


    "His Majesty King Tru, why don''t you go in and taste the deep-sea fish dishes for yourself?"


    Gion walked over and said in a sweet voice.

 Chapter 283 Let’s dance and see

    <h4>Chapter 283 Let��s dance and see</h4>


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and was not in a hurry to reply to what the other party said. Instead, he stared at the other party with interest.


    Gion is wearing a rtively slim-fitting or tight-fitting shirt, but it is a little too big in some parts, causing some things to be vaguely visible on the buttons of the shirt. He is wearing a hip-covering skirt and ck stockings on his lower body. Wearing a pair of ck high-heeled shoes, this scene has the professional atmosphere of Gogoya, but in terms of temptation, she is much higher than the other person.


    There are no extra decorations on the face, the bangs arebed, the temples hang down, and a bun is tied behind, but the excess hair is still in a curly shape.


    Chang Nuo has hardly admired this woman since she has been on the ship for so long. As the most beautiful woman in the navy, she is worthy of her reputation at first nce. Although she may not be as good as Hancock in overall terms, every one of her A woman always has her own unique charm.


    After a long career in the Navy, Gion not only possesses the tenderness of a little woman, but also has a mighty and domineering side.


    "I''m not very hungry yet, but I didn''t expect you to be the first one to be served!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    It wasn''t like he was the only one who wanted to bring it out. There was actually a long queue behind him, but almost everyone was lying on the edge of the corner and peeking at the two of them carefully.


    Not to mention that young people like them are a little curious, even if they are older, even though they are still sitting in the restaurant and eating deep-sea fish dishes inrge chunks, Shenwen Sebaqi is still open at this moment to observe the situation above. , not allowing myself to miss any detail.


    Gogoya''s expression was not that good-looking. She could still see the chatting situation of the people above through a gap at the corner. She was the only woman on the whole ship, and she had already thought of the connecting road, but she didn''t The thought that Cheng Yaojin actually came out halfway made her feel quite ufortable.


    "Let''s go, let''s go back and eat quickly. Otherwise, if we let His Majesty the King know about itter, we will get a scolding!"


    After Junhe watched for a while, he nced at Gogoya, who was standing there a little unhappy, then directly put his hand on Enilu''s shoulder and started to drag him inside.


    Outside, Changnuo was still sitting quietly on the chair, and Gion was also staying there quietly. None of them opened their mouths to eat this so-called deep-sea fish dish. Anyway, Gogoya, who was staying far away, didn''t even think about it. I can''t hear the chat between them.


    So after watching it for less than a minute or so, Gogoya had no choice but to return to the restaurant.


    But in Changnuo''s mind, Gion was a standard vice admiral, and his aura should always be majestic and domineering, but at this moment, he felt like a little bird, making him never feel that anything good would happen.


    "It takes almost half a day to get on this ship. How do you feel?"


    Chang Nuo opened his mouth and asked.


    "It''s good. At least when I stay here, I feel the freedom I''ve never had before. I don''t need to worry about anything on the sea anymore."


    Gion said with a smile.


    Anyway, this woman still looks pretty when she smiles. He doesn''t stick to details, and he doesn''t feel nervous or serious when he speaks.


    Chang Nuo turned his head and nced at the other person, and behind him he just said calmly, "Sit down!"


    "I heard from the headquarters that your military base is built on an empty ind, but how did you get there?"


    Gion asked with some curiosity. After all, these things couldn''t be hidden at all. He felt that the other party must know it, and even if he asked it out, it wouldn''t have any impact.


    So after saying these words, Gion always stared at Changnuo''s expression to observe every move of the other party and find some starting points from the subtleties.


    "Ha! It seems that the Navy and the World Government have been searching for several years and still haven''t found the answer. I really don''t know whether I should praise them orugh at them, but the military base that allows them to discover Sky Ind is, in some ways, It''s pretty good.


    But what can you do even if you know it? "


    Chang Nuo still said calmly, without any wave of emotion on his expression. It was exactly what he said. What would happen even if the other party knew the oue of these things?


    "Then what is your pursuit? Do you just want to dominate the South China Sea? Based on my observations in the past few hours, I think you are not such a person!"


    Gion sat there, leaning slightly forward towards where Changnuo was sitting, holding his chin with his right hand, and still spoke gently.


    "Can youe and see me dance?"


    Changnuo suddenly changed the topic, and he changed it so quickly that even Gion, who was sitting there, didn''t react for a moment. With her mouth slightly open, she didn''t know what to say at this moment. This man Her form and speaking style werepletely beyond her understanding of the matter!


    "Is it a bit difficult?"


    Changnuo asked again.


    "I''m not embarrassed at all, but are you sure you really want to be here?"


    Gion''s tone suddenly raised slightly, and he said with a sweet smile.


    "Ha~, that seems to be right, I''ll look back when I have time!" Changnuo said with a slight smile, then looked at Gion''s face with a sweet smile, and said again, "Sometimes, there are some questions you can ask, and some The question was really inappropriate. If the navy wanted to know any news or answers, Warring States would naturally ask them in person.


    On this ocean, there are so many topics that you can��t think clearly about or can��t understand! "


    "this����!!"


    Gion suddenly didn''t know what to say, but now the other party had stood up and started walking towards the restaurant.


    Even though I have achieved such perfection, it is impossible to get even one answer I want from these people, whether it is Gogoya who has no strength, or others who have strength, in the end , once a key question is asked, they will either change the subject or remain silent.


    Therefore, the doubts brought to her grew more and more as time went by.


    She was curious about almost everyone on the ship, eager to know the secrets between everyone, and even more eager to know the secrets of this country. Now Gion had no feelings at all for these people. Staying here is more just toplete the mission.

 Chapter 284 The pirate ship that was easily solved

    <h4>Chapter 284 The pirate ship that was easily solved</h4>


    Sailing in the deep sea, in this calm water bottom, except for the darkness all around, the rest is no different from sailing on the sea.


    Sometimes it even feels like sailing on the sea in the dark night. There is no difference overall. The living space on the ship is still the same, but you don��t need to stay underwater for too long to reach your destination directly.nd.


    After everyone has eaten the delicious deep-sea fish, everyone is now about two thousand meters away from the location of Fish-Man Ind.


    So far, the depth they have sailed to is almost 8 kilometers. It is still pitch ck here and there is no sense of direction at all.


    Sometimes Chang Nuo was curious about how those pirates controlled the direction to Fish-Man Ind.


    After all, in such a situation without any markers, it is not too difficult to keep sailing, let alone in such darkness.


    Outside the ship, even with the powerful light of the Infinity, the visibility is only about a hundred meters. Fortunately, the entire ship does not require human control. Otherwise, relying on them, I am afraid that even if it takes more than ten years, Yearster, there won''t be a better navigator.


    At this location, the Infinity has begun to gradually speed up. After all, there is no scene to enjoy around. Except for some weird-looking guys, there is nothing left. Moreover, these deep-sea fish are all extremely aggressive. , and it also looks quite huge.


    At leastpared to Neptune King Lei, these guys were nothing, and there was no need to worry about being attacked by them while staying on the ship. Therefore, during the rest of the voyage, everyonepletely ignored the situation outside the deep sea.


    "Dear His Majesty the King and everyone, it is estimated that the Infinity will take 20 minutes to reach the entrance of Fish-Man Ind. Please be prepared in advance!"


    The mechanical voice of the Infinity system shouted. At this time, everyone was still chatting with each other leisurely. Of course, some people had already started to go to bed.


    Staying under such a deep seabed, apart from the excitement and curiosity at the beginning, will bring more and more infinite depression as time goes by, and the depression in the deep sea can even make some people with a bad mentality People immediately copsed.


    "Are you going to Fishman Ind?"


    Junhe suddenly asked with some expectation.


    "Didn''t I just say that we will arrive at Fish-Man Ind in twenty minutes!"


    Gogoya looked at Junhe with contempt and said.


    "Mermaid, mermaid..."


    Enelu suddenly began to fall into imagination, and the expression of nymphomaniac on his whole face was immediately obvious. Such a change in personality, Chang Nuo could see it from head to toe.


    In his impression, this guy should not be like this. Why did he learn everything so quickly after following him, and why did he not even let go of this aspect?


    At this moment, even those who had fallen asleep quickly got up after hearing the sound, and then all ran to the deck one by one and began to gather, still lying on the railing.


    They always started staring forward. Although it was still dark, it could not stop the enthusiasm of this group of people.


    The only difference is that as we get closer and closer to Fish-Man Ind, the surrounding seawater is not as dark as imagined. Instead, it gradually begins to have a glimmer of light. Even as we get closer and closer, this light bes brighter. The degree is bing more and more obvious, and it feels like it has begun to rise towards the sea.


    Ten minutester, the entire deep sea has now begun to look like it is only about 500m deep from the sea. There is almost no need for the Infinity to turn on its headlights, and it ispletely possible to directly observe the surrounding situation.


    The light of Fool''s Ind shines all around, and even the prototype of Fool''s Ind has begun to be gradually visible.


    "Is that Fishman Ind? I didn''t expect it to be in a bubble?"


    Enelu asked doubtfully while lying on the edge.


    "We are almost there. What are you still doing? What we will face next is a country. Everyone should maintain their own image and don''t lose the people of the Tru Empire!"


    Abona shouted in a stern voice to the people lying on the edge.


    His Majesty the King just talked about military appearance and discipline. How long has it been? A group of people began to be unable to contain their curiosity, and theyy on the edge watching without any image or even caring about the image.


    Although sometimes this situation is indeed understandable, in many cases what they need to consider is their own identity. After all, unlike pirates who are free and unrestrained, they are the guardians of a kingdom, and all of this must maintain the dignity of a country. dignity.


    Changnuo sat there and didn''t say anything, or even smiled in response. But after Abona''s voice came out, both Junhe and Enilu, who were lying there with admiring expressions on their faces, Everyone, including the others, immediately stood up straight and began to gather towards the widest side of the deck as quickly as possible.


    "Everyone maintain your own image, and don''t insult the national prestige of the Tru Empire when you go out. If you don''t go near any area, you can do whatever you want, but now it has begun to act like a mission to other countries. You must always maintain your dignity as a soldier in front of others!"


    Abona once again severely reprimanded everyone, this time even Junhe was directly reprimanded.


    "A guy is here. What does General Yixiao think we should do?"


    Chang Nuo sat there and sensed the surrounding situation, and said with a slightly raised corner of his mouth.


    Because the other ship is not too far away from them at this moment, although it cannot be observed with the naked eye, the outline of the other ship can be clearly known through perception.


    However, the moment he sensed the other person''s figure, Chang Nuo already knew who this guy was!


    "In this area, we met people from Fish-Man Ind. I don''t think we are suitable to take any measures!"


    Said with a smile.


    "Maybe I have a different view, and maybe you should know it next time!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile. Then no one knew what he was doing. He just raised the patient''s faint blue light in the palm of his right hand. But at the same time, about five hundred meters away from them, a huge ship appeared. The pirate ship also formed a blue light around his coating.


    pression����"


    Chang Nuo''s right hand, which was originally outstretched, was clenched tightly the next second as if apanied by some kind of power.


    Gion has been observing Changnuo, and he also can''t figure out what the other party is doing, but after all, a huge pirate ship hundreds of meters away from them haspletely fallen into pieces at this moment. In this state, no matter how many people were on the ship, they would have been turned into dregs by now.

 Chapter 285 Fishman Island

    <h4>Chapter 285 Fishman Ind</h4>


    In such a deep sea, the knowledge of ordinary people has almost no effect. Normally onnd, they can perceive things within a radius of 1km, but in this deep sea, being able to perceive 100m on the bottom of the sea is already very good.


    In fact, the only people present who could sense these things were General Yixiao, and the remaining Eniro and Abona.


    Afterughing, he just shook his head slightly and did not say anything. However, Abona and Enelu, who were standing over there, all looked at their Majesty the King in unison.


    Neither of them understood why they would do such a thing. Not to mention the strength of the other party, they already had some doubts about this behavior.


    Gion is even more confused, but she has learned to read people''s expressions. At least he can see other people''s expressions. This series of things is definitely not as simple as what he sees.


    But at this time, she couldn''t say anything doubtful.


    Perhaps for Chang Nuo, killing a ship in such a deep sea is just something he can do casually, but he doesn''t know who the unlucky guy is. Anyway, there is no need to think about what the other party is. Who it was, I didn��t even see half of its face clearly from the beginning to the end.


    Anyway, this is fine, the whole person has disappeared into this world without knowing it, without any pain or fear, everything just happened so fast.


    After this was done, the appearance of Fool''s Ind was fully revealed in front of everyone, especially the direction of the entrance.


    At this moment, the Fish-Man Ind felt like a huge balloon to everyone. The entrance had only one direction, and it was still extending and protruding outwards, making it look more like the entrance of a balloon.


    Near the edge of the entrance, there were almost a dozen murlocs standing outside. Each of them was wearing armor and holding a spear in his hand. At a nce, it was obvious that he belonged to the army of this country.


    "Your Majesty the King, we are about to enter Fish-Man Ind. Do you have any instructions?"


    Hai Ling''s figure appeared, standing next to Chang Nuo and asked respectfully.


    After all, the entrance to Fool''s Ind was already disyed in front of them, and such a huge cruise ship was also disyed in front of the opponent''s eyes.


    This was an open and honest entrance through the main gate. Even if there were guards at the door for interrogation, everything seemed so normal.


    At the entrance to Fish-Man Ind, there are now at least hundreds of ships docked nearby. For such an underwater world, most of their ie relies on pirates, so for the country of Fish-Man Ind, they It won''t deliberately exclude anyone.


    But now this ce also belongs to Whitebeard''s territory, and generally almost no pirates dare to act recklessly here.


    As the Infinity slowly began to approach, thisrge and high-tech ship immediately attracted the attention of all the guards.


    Many people began to look over here in unison. After all, as this behemoth approached, they could also see it very clearly and clearly.


    At the front end of the entire entrance, there is also a huge bubble. Compared with the huge bubbles in the entire Fish-Man Ind, this thing is much smaller. The whole thing looks like a gourd, but this ce is indeed used for everything. Dock the boat.


    The Infinity entered the bubble directly, and what came immediately was as if it were docked on the sea. There was endless air above, and the huge bubblepletely isted this area from the seawater behind it.


    All the fishmen guards over there quickly ran towards the port, and then began to direct a huge ship to dock.


    It''s just that the Infinity doesn''t need them to direct it. It stops in a systematic manner and automatically stops when it gets close to the shore.


    As such arge ship docked, beads of sweat began to appear on the heads of the guards on Fish-Man Ind. After all, they had no impression that such arge ship could appear, and it already looked like this from the outside. Luxurious, something was obviously wrong.


    For these people, almost all they see are various pirate groups. Almost no country orrge force wille to Fish-Man Ind. What they see more are all kinds of pirates. With such a big shiping this time, we don��t know how many pirates will appear on it?


    But the key is that they really think too much!


    After docking, the defense barrier of the Infinity opened automatically. Everyone on the ship felt that they were in this ce, as if they were suddenly on the sea again. The only difference was that they were just on top of a huge bubble.


    Even so, the sun still exists in the sky, or you can feel where the sun is.


    Everyone was surprised to see this scene at a depth of 10,000 meters under the sea!


    "This is Fish-Man Ind? Is it really different from what you imagined?"


    Gion spoke first.


    She looked at the appearance in the sky. Although she knew that she was still in the deep sea, this state hadpletely lost the depressing feeling before. It was more like she had returned to the normal sea world. If all the scenes here were If you don''t look up, there is almost no difference between the rest and the sea.


    "Your Majesty, do you still need to leave any personnel on duty on the ship?"


    Abona walked to Changnuo and asked.


    "I don''t think it''s necessary. Let''s go down and experience it. It''s a rare trip. After all, Fish-Man Ind is a rare ce for us to visit."


    Chang Nuo opened his mouth and said, "Anyway, there is really no need to keep anyone on duty here. The Infinity is not like other pirate ships thate up and leave at the drop of a hat!"


    So now that we havee to this ce, we naturally need to satisfy everyone''s curiosity and feel the charm of the 10,000-meter-deep seabed, or at least let everyone feel the scenery of Fish-Man Ind.


    "Okay, Your Majesty, I will make arrangements right away."


    Arbonne said.


    In fact, the people who were following on the ship at this time were all looking forward to it. After all, they didn��t know who would stay on the ship next. Each of them was looking forward to going down and taking a look, but if there was someone They had to carry out the orders, but they just felt a little ufortable inside.


    But as His Majesty the King''s order was issued, the ship, which was somewhat silent, began to change into a different scene the next moment.


    Although everyone always remembers that they belong to the Toru Empire and must maintain their own image in formal asions, at this moment, although they did not shout, their faces were filled with excitement and joy. , you can still see clearly.

 Chapter 286 Entrance

    <h4>Chapter 286 Entrance</h4>


    The people on the boat looked excited, but they didn''t know that the guards standing under the boat in charge of the entrance to Fish-Man Ind were still panicking inside at this moment.


    This group of people didn''t have much strength, so they could only stay prepared, fearing that there would be a particrlyrge number of people on the ship flooding into the Fish-Man Ind.


    There is nothing wrong with being so vignt. In any case, they belong to the front line. Theye into contact with too many pirates of all kinds. Fish-Man Ind was not like this a few years ago. If it weren''t for Whitebeard, His arrival brought Fish-Man Ind into his territory, and now this ce still leads a miserable life.


    The pirates who have the strength toe to this ce are not the leaders of one party. There is definitely no way to defeat them just by relying on these guards. In fact, everyone knows and understands this.


    on board.


    "Mr. Yixiao, you have been to so many ces but have you ever been to this Fish-Man Ind?"


    Changnuo stood on the edge admiring the scenery at the entrance, and asked Yixiao next to him in a calm tone.


    "I have indeed been to many ces, but I have never been here before. Once we just walked around the periphery of Fish-Man Ind, and this was the closest we got to this ce!"


    Yixiao said with some emotion.


    After all, in this world, whether it is the Four Seas, the Grand Route, or even the New World, Yixiao has indeed been to many ces, but whether he has been here or not, it doesn''t matter anyway.


    A staircase on the deck began to slowly extend downwards, and did not stop until it touched the ground.


    Everyone can also officially enter the Fish-Man Ind directly from here and feel the different world environment.


    "Princess Otohime, who was lucky enough to meet Fish-Man Ind back then, doesn''t know what she has be now after so many years."


    Yixiao said with some expectation.


    But after hearing this, Chang Nuo shook his head helplessly.


    ording to the timeline, this woman has probably been dead for a long time, and she probably has almost no bones left.


    But he didn''t say it directly. Once he stood here and said this kind of thing, wouldn''t it feel like he was predicting the future?


    "Then let''s go. Maybe there will be unexpected gains if youe here today?"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    As the first person walked out, Chang Nuo slowly stepped on the steps, and the people behind him also started to follow down one by one.


    Although the number of people was not particrlyrge, when the guards below saw the faces of the group of people above, one of them was so frightened that he sat on the ground without any control.


    Although they are 10,000 meters under the sea, they don''t know everything. At least ording to the information in recent years, even at this 10,000 meters deep sea, they are rtively clear about some things.


    To them, Chang Nuo''s face seemed as if they had seen it yesterday, but in fact, everyone knew the actual situation clearly.


    The reason why they had seen this face before was through newspapers. It was just a joke between a group of people, but they didn''t expect to see a real person appear now, which made them feel scared.


    "There must be a fee here, right? Gogoya will handle this matter!"


    Chang Nuo turned to Gogoya who was following behind him.


    He didn''t believe that this ce was just a simple stop. Otherwise, what would Fish-Man Ind rely on to survive?


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    Gogoya said.


    Their original paths were not the same. Changnuo did not stay and wait for Gogoya. Instead, he led others to continue walking forward. As for Gogoya, there were other people guarding him.


    After a group of people came down, everyone who followed them walked in neat steps and exuded domineering majesty. It really made the guards guarding the Fish-Man Ind feel a different atmosphere.


    "Excuse me, how much does it cost to park here for a day?"


    Gogoya walked up to these strange-looking fish-men and looked at their stupid looks, so he said with a helpless smile.


    But after he opened his mouth and finished speaking, he stayed for a while and the other party still didn''t give any reply. He just turned his head and looked in the direction of Chang Nuo, not caring at all what the people standing beside him wanted to do.


    "Do you want to charge a fee?"


    A soldier in ckbat uniform stood behind Gogoya and asked.


    The tone was quite impatient. After all, they wanted to see the scenery of Fish-Man Ind after entering, instead of staying here to see these weird-looking fish-men.


    Although they don''t have any discrimination in appearance, they are really a little bit ugly in appearance. Who makes them look too ugly? If a group of mermaids were put here, the result might not be the same at all.


    This voice also directly attracted their attention, and several fishmen said tremblingly, "No... no... no need, you... youring here has already made the entire fishman ind feel a great honor!"


    Listening to the answer of one of the fishmen, although the words were quite respectful, the Tru Empire was not a person who liked to take advantage. Gogoya even frowned helplessly, and then said again to ��How much exactly?��


    "It costs 5 million beli to dock for one day!"


    Facing the other party''s anger, one of the fishmen said quickly.


    For fear that the other party would be dissatisfied at this moment, they have no idea of ????offending him.


    Gogoya finally heard the answer he wanted and did not bargain. Then he took out a bag of treasure and threw it into the other party''s arms.


    Everything was done smoothly, and then he turned around and started to leave, leaving only this group of confused murlocs.


    Everyone looked at each other with big eyes and small eyes. One of them, who seemed to be the leader of the murlocs, shouted to the others, "Everyone gather, we must protect this ship no matter what the situation is today, even if we die." , and we can��t let this ship suffer any damage!��


    "yes����"


    Everyone answered together, and they were also very clear about the stakes involved.


    So after giving the instructions, the jumping fish man started to produce a phone bug from his arms and reported to it.


    Even though the Toru Empire came to Fish-Man Ind with no special thoughts and was just passing by here, ording to the current situation of the Toru Empire, it is no longer their small Fish-Man Ind. An affordable price range.

 Chapter 287 Be prepared

    <h4>Chapter 287 Be prepared</h4>


    This group of people acted very seriously and immediately set up a cordon 10 meters away from the ship at the port. Almost a dozen people were standing guard here, for fear that some special situation would ariseter.


    The leader, the jumping fish man, took out his phone andmunicated with someone. The moment he put it down, he began to stand here prepared.


    There is only one passage from the port to the entrance of Fish-Man Ind. If you want to enter the ind from other ces, you will almost encounter great obstacles.


    The entire ind is divided into severalyers of bubbles. The whole ind is divided into about fouryers. The outermostyer is filled with air in the middle. The distance between the two sides is about 50m. At such a long distance, no matter whether any boat enters the fish from other directions, Within the scope of the human ind, the coating on the whole body will be broken immediately.


    But there is a distance of about 100m between the second and third floors, and this distance is almost full of seawater. For a pirate ship that has lost its coating, once it enters this seawater-filled In the mezzanine, most people without strength will probably drown directly in thisyer.


    Changnuo led a group of people and walked in from the entrance openly. Although there were not particrly many people in front of him, there were still quite a few. In a ce like this, almost all the people walking around were pirates of all kinds. .


    Although the number of pirates is rtivelyrge, they have not done anything excessive. Of course, not everyone will maintain their current status.


    "It''s really surprising. I didn''t expect that there would be such a world at a depth of 10,000 meters under the sea?"


    Gion said with some surprise.


    Although she is a Vice Admiral, she has never been to such a ce before. Following the crowd this time has increased her knowledge a lot.


    "Junhe, inform them that they can move freely and take a good tour of this ce, but the prerequisite is not to vite all thews here, let alone insult the dignity of the Tru Empire!"


    Changnuo turned to Junhe and said to him.


    When he said this, Chang Nuo did not deliberately hide that the people following behind him were rtively close to each other. Each and every one of them was listening. Although their faces still showed a calm look, their hearts were already deep. They were beginning to be happy, but when Junhe, the direct leader, did not speak, the group still maintained the original team status and moved forward.


    "You should all have heard this, right? You will have to weigh up what you should and shouldn''t do at that time. Then you will be free to move around, but you must return to the ship to assemble after one day!"


    Junhe turned around and shouted to everyone again.


    "yes����"


    Everyone shouted in unison.


    But these people are only a dozen or so. Most of theme to this ship to hold various jobs, including chefs, logistics and other personnel. The only thing that is undeniable is the strength of each person. None should be underestimated.


    The passage to the entrance of Fish-Man Ind is quite long, about 1 kilometer in total. In addition to the ten-meter-wide road at their feet, there are waterways of about 100 meters on both sides, which are also direct ess. This is the only location within Fisherman Ind where boats can sail.


    "Brother Changnuo, do you think the mermaids from Fish-Man Ind are as beautiful as in the legend?"


    Enelu asked excitedly.


    He had been asking questions all the way, and he had always been in a state of anticipation. He didn''t even look tired after sailing for such a long time.


    "I''m not talking about you kid. His Majesty the King has never been to this ce. As for what the mermaid looks like, we''ll find out after we take a good look at itter!"


    Junhe put his arm directly on Enilu''s shoulders and said with a smirk on his face.


    "What does General Yixiao think of things like mermaids?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly turned around and asked.


    "How else can you see? The old man is just a blind man. He can''t see what he looks like anyway. The skin on the outside has no effect on the old man."


    Said with a smile.


    Changnuo patted his head helplessly. Why did he want to tell this old man who didn''t know how to be funny?


    But then he still said to himself or to the people next to him, "Do you think that if we can allow the people on Fish-Man Ind toe and live in the Tru Empire, how much benefit will it bring to us in the future?"


    "Really?"


    Enelu suddenly shouted in surprise.


    "I think it''s pretty good. The Tru Empire doesn''t have any outstanding navigators, but Fish-Man Ind is different. Their survival characteristics allow them topletely control the movements of any ocean currents, and they can indeed cultivate arge number of talents for the country. !��


    Yixiao also said quite satisfied.


    "But whether it is a fishman or a mermaid, it is easy for everyone to catch it after arriving on the shore, and its loyalty cannot stand the test at all. This will cause difort to us in every aspect. A little pressure!��


    Arbonne said.


    "You can rest assured about this. It''s just a preliminary thought. As for the actual implementation, it may not be as easy as we thought. But if Fishman Ind is included in the jurisdiction of the Tru Empire, it will be a big deal for us. It is true that the advantages outweigh the disadvantages and it is worthy of careful consideration and discussion.��


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    But he already had other thoughts in his mind at the moment. At least everyone had arrived at Fish-Man Ind, so he could just think about it slowly.


    For fishmen, their various abilities, whether it is mobile attack or defense, are almost all superior to humans. As long as they can receive good training, their strength will not be as low as what they see in front of them.


    From a long-term perspective, the advantages of fishmen on the sea are far greater than anyone onnd. However, these ideas did not start to be considered by Chang Nuo when he came here.


    At least he had thought about this situation during the voyage. The only thing that caused him concern was Whitebeard. After all, this ce still belonged to his territory.


    "Fish-Man Ind is a member of the World Government. Regardless of your thoughts or actions, I suggest you not do it!"


    Just when Changnuo and the others had just finished talking about this topic, Gion opened his mouth to warn these people.


    She was always paying attention to this group of people, especially when such an idea was raised, Gion''s heart suddenly tightened. This kind of topic has not been raised in the navy, but in the end it was opposed by everyone. .

 Chapter 288 Shichibukai Jinbei

    <h4>Chapter 288 Shichibukai Jinbei</h4>


    But she never thought that people from the Tru Empire would be able toe up with such an idea just after visiting Fish-Man Ind.


    Changnuo turned his head and nced at Gion without saying anything. Instead, he continued to get lost in his own thoughts.


    "I hope you can remember your identity in the future, and don''tment on anyone unscrupulously, let alone have any ideas about giving advice to His Majesty the King!"


    Shunwa suddenly warned Gion with a cold voice.


    "you����"


    Gion was immediately speechless. Others also ignored this woman and continued to move forward without any heed or suggestion.


    "It seems that Fish-Man Ind already knows that we areing!"


    Abona looked forward and said to the people next to him as he walked.


    "How did you know we wereing?"


    Moshank asked.


    Although this guy is now stronger than a general, his knowledge and color domineering is almost as good as Junhe''s. Both of them are quite outstanding in their weapons and colors, but they are too weak in terms of knowledge and color domineering.


    Of course, no one is perfect at everything.


    "How should we do it?"


    Yixiao also sensed a group of peopleing towards him, and spoke to Chang Nuo in a slow voice.


    "Just keep it like this. Now that the other party is here, can''t we just face him directly?"


    The corners of Chang Nuo''s mouth raised slightly, so what if the other party came.


    It''s just that the people who came this time surprised him a little.


    They had just walked out of the passage. There was still a long way to go, but at this moment a group of people was already moving towards them quickly.


    Now the distance between the two parties is only about two hundred meters. The other party is led by a rtively fat man. Simrly, the other party is also a fish man, but his whole body is blue and his head forms a triangle. , no neck at all.


    This is a shark fishman. Even though they have never seen him before, many people present still recognized him. Currently, Shichibukai Jinbei is the most powerful person in Fisherman Ind.


    However, there was another person who came with him who looked familiar.


    Changnuo even recognized the identity of the other party at a nce from a distance, Jozi, the captain of Whitebeard''s Third Division, the guy with the superhuman Devil Fruit diamond ability.


    Jinbei and the group of people hurried over very quickly. When he saw the appearance of Changnuo and the group of people, he was stunned for a moment, and then he hurriedly saluted and shouted, "Jinbei from Fishman Ind, I''m here." Please forgive me for the dy in greeting Emperor Tru!"


    "Jinbei? Doesn''t this seem to be the name of the Shichibukai?"


    Junhe asked Abona next to him with some doubts.


    "I told you to read the newspaper more often when you have nothing to do, but now it''s better. Don''t tell me that you don''t know that one of the Shichibukai is a fishman?"


    "You really don''t know? So there is such a thing!"


    After listening to what Abona said, Junhe was surprised and sighed again with emotion.


    Chang Nuo looked at the other person up and down and stayed there for about 30 seconds. The other person was still bowing his head and body.


    But with how fat he is, it''s almost impossible to tell even when he''s hunched over.


    "Kai Xia Jinbei, today we have met a real person for the first time. Don''t be too polite. We just came here for a stroll and to see Fish-Man Ind."


    Changnuo said with a slight smile, then looked to the side and said the same to the captain of the third division of the Whitebeard Pirates, "I didn''t expect to see you here. How are you doing, old man?" "


    "Thanks to your concern, my father mentioned you a few days ago. I didn''t expect to see you so soon!"


    Jozi said equally respectfully.


    "Haha~, we will also go to the New World next. If we have the chance, I really want to see the old man. But next, I still want to see the scenery of Fish-Man Ind now. At least for men, they are looking forward to it. Look at what the mermaid here looks like!��


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind has already prepared a banquet at the pce. Emperor Tru can go with us. Then he will naturally invite people and beauties from the ind toe and dance."


    Jinbei opened his mouth and said.


    He hasn''t gotten to know this person''s character yet, but from these two sentences, he feels as if the other person ising for the mermaid.


    "It is indeed Neptune. I wonder how Princess Otohime is doing now?" Yixiao asked.


    But when he asked this question, Jinbei''s face suddenly fell, and he even became slightly serious, but he still asked curiously, "Do you know our Princess Otohime?"


    "We know each other!"


    "I''m sorry to tell you that Princess Otohime was assassinated five years ago."


    Jinbe said, with a bitter look on his face.


    He knew the identities of these people in the Tru Empire, so he naturally recognized who Yixiao was.


    After hearing the news, Yixiao tried his best to open his eyes, but it was still just a circle of whites.


    "I''m sorry for mentioning such a thing. I don''t know the reason for this, so please apologize!"


    "General Yixiao doesn''t have to be like this," Jinbei said.


    "That''s it for now. Let''s take a tour of Fish-Man Ind first. As for the pce banquet, we''ll have to wait for three hours." Chang Nuo said.


    "Okay, His Majesty King Tru!"


    Jinbei said respectfully again.


    As Jozi was following him, he almost didn''t say anything from beginning to end. He was probably just helping out.


    Chang Nuo just led the people around them and started walking towards the Fish-Man Ind. They were the most distinguished guests that the entire Fish-Man Ind had weed in recent years.


    Looking at the backs of these people, Jinbei had a bitter look on his face, mainly because of the opponent''s strength. If something unhappy happened to him on Fish-Man Ind, he was worried that these people would do something like other pirates. Let them do the unexpected.


    "Don''t worry, he''s not what you think!"


    Jozi saw Jinbei''s confusion, so he opened his mouth and spoke.


    "By the way, he and dad seem to know each other?"


    "Of course I know him. He had a fight with dad back then!"


    Jozi said, recalling the duel between the two people at that time in his mind. Just one move directly made theter Whitebeardment, "At such a young age, it seems that I am old now!"


    "Isn''t he above the Four Seas? When did he go to the New World?" Jinbei suddenly asked in shock.

 Chapter 289 Light and Darkness

    <h4>Chapter 289 Light and Darkness</h4>


    As the Shichibukai on the entire sea, Jinbei has always been paying attention to the situation on the entire sea. He has even analyzed every force. The whereabouts of the more famous figures are almost always reported in newspapers.


    But ording to what Qiaozi said, the emperor who stayed in the four seas had actuallye to the new world to meet one of the four emperors of this world. This kind of thing made him dare not believe it.


    Not only that, once this matter spreads out, it will definitely cause explosive news. The meeting of the four emperors with the emperor will cause the navy, the world government and other forces to be wary.


    "We don''t know the specific situation, but Dad doesn''t want all of us to tell about this matter, and he even wants us to forget it.


    The shock produced by it may definitely exceed your imagination! "


    Jozi said with some lingering fear.


    "You said he fought with dad? So how strong is this emperor as the king of the world?"


    Jinbe asked again, even deliberately lowering his voice.


    Jozi did not answer, but shook his head slightly, and then whispered with a serious expression, "Don''t discuss this matter, the other party''s strength can definitely be worthy of the title of God King!"


    There is no need to say more now, Jinbei fully understands.


    After all, for everyone, Emperor Tru can be regarded as the most mysterious figure in the past few years. The most mysterious thing is what is his strength?


    It''s just that no one has been able to test the depth so far, but judging from Qiaozi''s expression, this is definitely a man who hides very deeply.


    "I think I should inform King Neptune first. The rest can only be discussed at that time. I still hope that you can contact dad. If anything happens, I can also hope that he can show up in time. one time!"


    Jinbe said with a frown.


    "I see."


    Jozi said, but when he got the answer, Jinbei had already strode in another direction.


    On Changnuo''s side.


    The group of people walked swaggeringly on the streets of Fish-Man Ind. The overall feeling here waspletely different from that onnd.


    Although in many ces there is no difference from the above except for the types of people, the architecture, speaking styles and the currency used, but it is limited to this street and the remaining differences in many ces are already very obvious.


    Especially the intersecting roads in mid-air. Although the whole thing is made of bubbles filled with sea water, this mode of transportation gives people a different appreciation experience.


    "The mermaids on Fish-Man Ind don''t seem to be as beautiful as expected?"


    Enelu said in frustration as he walked.


    "All you see are mermaids over 30 years old. Men are called mermaids, and women are called mermaids. Only those under 30 years old are considered mermaids. Those over 30 years old have already grown two legs, so It��s nothing to see, don��t you know this bit ofmon sense?��


    Abona said with a speechless expression.


    "is that so?"


    "I really don''t know what you watch every day?"


    Seeing Enilu''s expression, Abona no longer even thought of talking to him.


    "Junhe, there is a piece of historical text on the edge of Fish-Man Ind, which is the front left direction. You can go over and make a rubbing of itter."


    Changnuo thought about this, then turned to Junhe and said.


    "Really!!! I''ll go thereter!"


    Junhe said quickly.


    He had seen the historical text, so it was most appropriate for him to go. Although he already knew roughly what would be recorded on it, Chang Nuo still had some curiosity.


    Anyway, everyone has already arrived at this ce, so it shouldn��t be a problem to understand the things on it. Besides, no one in Fish-Man Ind pays attention to this thing.


    "Your Majesty the King, how do you know that Fish-Man Ind has a historical text?"


    Gion walked forward and asked curiously.


    "Although there are many secret things in this world, I don''t mind telling you some today."


    As Chang Nuo said, the people who followed him all pricked up their ears, wanting to hear about the secret things in this world. Even the older Yixiao became serious at this moment. .


    For a long time, everyone, even those who followed Chang Nuo, were equally curious about one thing, that is, His Majesty the King seemed to know everything. Taking this opportunity, they also wanted to know more about it.


    Chang Nuo ignored everyone''s expressions and said leisurely as he walked, "Many people are looking for the nk history 800 years ago. In fact, in these 800 years, the entire world has probably undergone earth-shaking changes." Variety.


    But there is one ce that has definitely not changed, so this ce is today''s Fishman Ind. Being under 10,000 meters under the sea is his greatest guarantee. So naturally there will be many things in this ce that can reveal the history of hundreds of years ago.


    Many people have never thought about what is the significance of the existence of a world government and a navy? Could it be that pirates began to appear 800 years ago? Such a thing is obviously impossible.


    The secret of Rafdru may not be a treasure, but more likely a piece of news that reveals these things.


    It is very possible that Ravdru''s secret may involve overthrowing the World Government and the Draco. In that case, what would you think? Gion. "


    Changnuo called him very affectionately. Gion, who was standing next to him and was preparing to listen carefully, raised his head and looked into his eyes. For a moment, his whole body seemed to be greatly touched. The other person''s sky-blue eyes were direct. The impact of barrier-free was in her heart.


    No one answered, and Gion also did not answer. Changnuo continued, "This world may not be as beautiful as we imagined, and there will be a lot of darkness in it, whether it is pirates, navy, or World government, even the king of each country.


    Darkness may appear in every corner, but light may also appear at the same time. Everything cannot be summarized. I will not deny everything about a person just because he is a pirate, let alone because a person is a navy. , to affirm everything about him.


    Things often have moments of prization. Only with careful attention can we see the essence of a thing. The so-called light and darkness actually depend on other people''s views and opinions. "

 Chapter 290 Mermaid Cafe

    <h4>Chapter 290 Mermaid Cafe</h4>


    What Chang Nuo said was actually to talk about the so-called justice in their hearts.


    The person who can best understand these words should be Yixiao. He can see right and wrong, good and evil, more thoroughly than others.


    But before others started to ask questions in confusion, Chang Nuo suddenly opened his mouth with a slight smile and said, "We''re here!"


    Following their gazes, everyone began to raise their heads to check, and the "Mermaid Cafe" had begun to appear in front of everyone.


    Just one sentence had sessfully diverted everyone''s attention, and Enel even asked, "What is this ce?"


    "This is the ce where you want to see the mermaid! If you don''t all want to see it, then just go and have a look together!"


    Chang Nuo said, and then began to walk in front of everyone.


    Not only others were looking forward to this ce, but he himself also wanted to see what the beautiful mermaid looked like.


    I guess a normal man would have such thoughts.


    The only one who was not very satisfied was probably Gion. He only listened to half of what he said just now. As soon as he turned around, everyone lookedpletely different.


    So she was a little angry, but she didn''t say much, and then followed directly.


    The Mermaid Cafe is located right in the center of the bustling streets of the entire Fishman Ind. The facade doesn''t look particrly big, but the interior space is quite spacious.


    The flow of people around here is muchrger than that of other ces, and there is no distinctivendscape at the door, but the moment you first enter, everyone feelspletely different.


    There are still many humans appearing on Fish-Man Ind at this time. Whether they are pirates or businessmen, there are at least tens of thousands of humans on the entire Fish-Man Ind.


    Whether they are fishmen or mermaids, they can face or see many humans every day. They are not surprised or vignt at all when these people suddenly appear.


    Mermaid Cafe, the outside and the inside are simply two worlds.


    Even twopletely different worlds. As soon as they walked in, the researchers saw two very beautiful mermaids, which werepletely different from what they saw when walking on the street.


    The images of these two mermaids are just like a human young girl and an old woman. Not only do they look sweet with smiles, but their upper bodies are almost the same as humans, except that their lower bodies are fish. However, ording to the species of fish Different colors of the lower body will also appear different colors.


    "Wee all guests to the Mermaid Cafe."


    ��


    There are six mermaids in two rows, each one is exquisite to the extreme, especially the one standing in the front, who has long blue hair with slightly curls, and is wearing a ck suspender suit on the upper body. Although I don��t know what it looks like inside, but There is indeed a blue fish tail underneath him, and every fish scale on it reflects the light above his head.


    "This is the mermaid!!"


    Enel followed behind and looked at these two rows of mermaids. Let��s not talk about what they looked like, but just this image appearing in front of everyone did give people a different feeling.


    "Ah? Guest, you can admire it but you can''t do it!!"


    The beautiful mermaid standing at the front faced the guy Eniro and took two steps back in fear.


    "Snapped����"


    With a loud noise, Enilu immediately fell to the ground, and his face came into close contact with the entire ground.


    "I''m really sorry for disturbing you."


    Moshank said politely.


    However, the mermaids standing in front of him looked a little nervous and at a loss.


    The mermaid standing second among them pointed at Enelu who was lying on the ground, and asked with some anxiety, "Is he supposed to be okay?"


    "Haha~, don''t worry, nothing will happen!"


    Moshank said with augh.


    "Who told you that nothing would happen? You actually hit me with your domineering attitude!"


    As soon as the front heel Moshank finished speaking, the back heel Anilu jumped up suddenly, pointed at Moshank and shouted loudly.


    "You still have the nerve to say that you are a natural ability user. Can I beat you without domineering?"


    Moshank asked with a speechless expression.


    "Oh! That seems to be true!!"


    Enelu scratched his head and said.


    "Don''t make a fuss, it will take away the mood ofing here." Abona said looking at the two of them.


    "But I want to know one thing now. Is the Mermaid Cafe for coffee?"


    Changnuo suddenly opened his mouth and asked the beautiful mermaid standing at the first ce.


    Such a polite and handsome man attracted these people immediately. The first mermaid standing at the corner of his mouth immediately cracked a smile, and then said very kindly, "Oh no! You can do anything in the mermaid cafe. Including eating some pastries, shellfish, etc., there will be no problem, especially the pastries here, the taste is quite good."


    In fact, the reason why I asked about this mermaid was mainly because he appeared once in the plot, but I never expected that the plot characters who should only appear six yearster are already so old now.


    But think about it, Kemi was almost able to walk at that time, which was obviously a sign that her legs were about to grow. Now she looks only seventeen or eighteen years old, which is about the same age at this time.


    "But this is our first timeing to Fish-Man Ind. Please arrange a better seat for uster and introduce the special delicacies here!"


    Changnuo asked with a smile.


    "No problem, guest, you can rest assured and leave it to me." Kemi said.


    "Does the Mermaid Cafe have any special programs?"


    Enelu followed behind and wanted to do something, but looking at Moshank''s expression next to him, he silently retracted his hand, and then asked Kemi with a yful smile.


    "Yes, there is, but the performance is not at this time. I''m afraid we will have to wait for several hours before it can be performed. If the guests have room, they can wait here."


    Kemi said.


    "Does it still take so long? It''s really boring!"


    Enelu''s head drooped instantly. He originally wanted to watch a wonderful performance, but now it seemed that there was no hope.


    Under Kemi''s guidance, several people came to a ce simr to a booth. The surrounding space could amodate at least 20 people, but there were only a few people left this time.


    Since Gogoya never followed them, he must have gone out for a walk on his own. There really wasn''t much point in following them, so he could only start wandering in an orderly manner.


    The interior decoration of the Mermaid Cafe can be said to be extremely luxurious. This kind of decoration is probably one of the best onnd. Even today''s Trul Empire Pce is much worse than this ce in terms of decorative beauty.

 Chapter 291 King of Fishman Island

    <h4>Chapter 291 King of Fishman Ind</h4>


    The decoration of the entire Mermaid Cafe is mostly decorated with shellfish, and more parts are polished with pearl powder, which looks veryfortable.


    When a few people sat down, Kemi stood nearby, holding a menu and casually opened two pages. Then he looked at them and said, "The specialty of our ce is mainly mousse, and there are also some other types of pastries. It includes meals and snacks, but there is no fish or meat. I wonder what you would like to eat?"


    "Just bring some food. I wonder if your store manager is here?"


    Chang Nuo leaned there and said casually.


    "Huh? The store manager doesn''t seem to be here. Does the customer have anything to do with her?" Kemi asked.


    "What do you think our biggest gain will be from our trip to Fish-Man Ind?"


    Changnuo suddenly turned around and asked Yixiao beside him.


    "I really don''t know about this, but your Majesty must have your own motives for asking the store manager of this ce, right?"


    Yixiao''s hand never let go of his crutch, he sat there holding it with both hands at the same time, feeling the surrounding environment and said.


    "Is there something special about this store manager?" Abona also asked.


    "We''ll find outter."


    Chang Nuo said, for him, what''s the point of visiting a mermaid cafe? The purpose ofing here is nothing more than to meet the store manager.


    But now everything has just begun, and it will be a long time before it ends.


    Kemi felt that something was very wrong with this group of people, so she did not continue chatting. She turned around and asked others to bring some pastries. Then she started eating secretly andmunicated with others about what she had seen and heard. matter.


    It''s just that the manager of the Mermaid Cafe didn''t wait, but a bigger person came.


    Originally, the soundproofing effect of this mermaid cafe was quite good, but the sound outside was too noisy. The group of them knew what was going on without going out.


    Outside the coffee shop, in mid-air, a man was wrapped in a circle of bubbles around his waist, with a huge whale riding underneath him, and then slowly began to fall in this direction.


    He wears a crown on his head, has aqua blue eyes, and has a red nose. The figure is stronger than the average mermaid, with thick and fluffy orange-red wool curly hair and beard, his arms have me-like tattoos, his body is covered with thick body hair, and his wrists wear metal armguards iid with gems.


    With such an image, you already know the other person''s identity without even thinking about it.


    King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind, Jinbe probably went back to tell him the news about this immediately. He came to greet him in person because he was worried about special circumstances happening.


    There was amotion outside, and many people had gathered in front of the store. Everyone was looking up and shouting from time to time.


    Neptune''s appearance was not without someone following him, at least Jinbei was following him.


    This already represents the highest ceremony in this country, and at least it proves the importance Neptune attaches to this matter.


    Being able to bother the king of a country to greet him personally is a kind of ceremonial respect in itself.


    Even the mermaids in the Mermaid Cafe couldn''t help but started running out one by one. No one knew why Neptune suddenly appeared here?


    "Your Majesty the King, do you think this Neptune is a mermaid or a fishman?"


    Gion sat directly opposite Changnuo and saw Neptune floating in the air slowly falling through the ss behind him, and asked curiously.


    After all, on this Fishman Ind, fishmen and mermaids belong to two types, and they arepletely different types.


    In fact, the most striking feature is also very obvious. Except for a tail, mermaids are almost the same as humans. However, fishmen are different. They are actually very different from humans in terms of body shape and appearance. It''s too huge.


    Some women may have many legs, or many arms, and even their face may still be simr to their own species.


    Therefore, on the Shampoo Inds, the price of mermaids in auctions is many times higher than that of fishmen.


    "What are you talking about, Neptune? He is a standard mermaid, nothing more than a merman."


    Chang Nuo didn''t even turn his head and started toment directly.


    "So there are men among mermaids? They are so ugly!!"


    Enel was lying on the edge of the ss, clinging to it and looking at the situation outside.


    "Don''t we need to go out?"


    Moshank asked.


    Chang Nuo did not answer, and he was not in a hurry now. Although King Neptune of Fishman Ind came in person, he did not pay as much attention to this matter as he thought.


    Or maybe it''s because this ce is still under Whitebeard''s jurisdiction, so he feels a little confident.


    But it��s normal to think about it. Ever since Whitebeard took over this ce, this ce ispletely different from before. Although safety cannot be guaranteed 100%,pared to the chaotic scene before, today��s Fool''s Ind is indeed a dream state.


    "There are two things on Fish-Man Ind that I''m more interested in, but today I don''t know if I canplete these two ideas?"


    Chang Nuo said to himself with the corners of his mouth raised slightly.


    Others did not pay attention. After all, Neptune had already arrived at the entrance of the Mermaid Cafe at this time, and under the leadership of Jinbei, they were already preparing to walk in.


    But for such a big Neptune, it seems quite difficult to enter the entrance of the Mermaid Cafe.


    Apart from anything else, this guy''s character is not generally good. At least as a king, this kind of situation really shouldn''t happen.


    Otherwise, how could the current Fool''s Ind still experience that series of turmoil in the future? The ce that has endured for hundreds of years may not have allowed them to taste the bitterness and bitterness they should have.


    Neptune at the door looked at the door that was smaller than himself. He tried several times but still couldn''t get in. In addition, there were so many citizens watching outside, and he was embarrassed to continue crowding in. I could only stand outside slightly embarrassed.


    Seeing this, Jinbei walked in alone. At this time, there was almost no one else in the Mermaid Cafe. After all, most people had already run out to watch His Majesty the King appear here. This kind of curiosity and rareness can indeed Get their attention.

 Chapter 292 Deep Sea Dragon Palace City

    <h4>Chapter 292 Deep Sea Dragon Pce City</h4>


    Jinbei walked in with his fat body, and some of Changnuo''s people were leaning against the window, almost in the most conspicuous position when entering the door, so they could be seen at a nce as soon as they entered.


    Jinbei stood at the door, took a deep breath and let it out slowly, then walked towards Changnuo with firm eyes.


    "Emperor Tru, King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind is here to greet you personally!"


    Jinbe stood there and shouted respectfully.


    At this moment, there was no expression on his face that a strong man should have, and his head was slightly lowered. Perhaps it was because he was too fat. For everyone, they could only see his eyes looking down, and his head seemed not to move at all. .


    Sitting on the outermost edge is Gion. She doesn''t know why, but she seems to be more nervous than the people in the Toru Empire. After all, the Toru Empire ispletely different from ordinary countries, and her mission this time is also In order to understand what the Tru Empire and his party want to do in the new world? Who should I contact or what things should I do?


    Fish-Man Ind is a ce that has never been invaded in thousands of years. Once the other party reaches any cooperation with this ce, it is very likely that the navy will fall into greater passivity.


    "No problem, we''ll be there in a moment, but I wonder if you can invite one more person?"


    "I wonder who His Majesty Tru is talking about?"


    After listening to what Changno said, Jinbei raised his head slightly and looked at the other person and asked.


    "Xia Li, the manager of the Mermaid Cafe!"


    "is her?"


    "Yes, I wonder if King Neptune can agree to such a request?" Chang Nuo said.


    "There is no problem with this. I can also make decisions for our King, but I don''t know why His Majesty Tru would invite a person and the coffee shop manager who he has never met before?"


    In fact, Jinbe is not the only one who wants to ask this question. Others are also curious. What ability can one person and the coffee shop manager have to make the world of pirates a leader who can rival the navy in power? You have such an attitude To invite an unknown mermaid?


    But these people in the Tru Empire are all obsessed with their own Majesty the King. No matter what point of view the other party puts forward, the final result will definitely have his own intention.


    "Then let''s go, don''t keep King Neptune waiting."


    Saying that, Changnuo stood up directly, but suddenly he seemed to have something unfinished, and said to Jinbei with a smile, "If you can trouble the Mermaid Cafe, we can go to Ryugu Castle to perform together." "


    "Your Majesty Tru can rest assured on this!"


    Jinbei smiled and said that he had already thought of this kind of thing.


    But for this Shichibukai, even though he is the strongest one on Fish-Man Ind, he still can''t see through the fact that the young man in his twenties standing in front of him has great strength, but all this He looks so easy-going and can''tpare to a strong man.


    As everyone stood up one after another, Gion, who stood upst, had words all over her face. She also urgently wanted to know, what on earth does Emperor Toru want to do now?


    No matter what, everything is definitely not as simple as it seems.


    However, the Navy does not have much information about Fish-Man Ind, let alone the situation of the owner of the Mermaid Cafe.


    From the very first moment he came to this cafe, Changnuo''s goal was very clear. From the beginning to the end, he wasing for one person, which gave Gion a different kind of worry.


    What''s so good about the owner of the Mermaid Cafe, or what''s different about him, but it''s still unclear at the moment.


    King Neptune at the entrance of the Mermaid Cafe is now standing at the door constantly greeting the people around him. The huge whale next to him is currently suspended in the air, and the other person''s eyes are still staring at the coffee from time to time. The situation inside the hall.


    Until a few people began to slowly appear at the door. Although Neptune had already been prepared in his heart, and he had already learned about Emperor Tru''s situation before, he still asked him to see the real person today. I couldn''t help but feel shocked.


    Or is it because the other party is too young, and I never expected that at this age, he would be on par with the most powerful people in the world, and in some aspects, he has evenpletely surpassed them.


    "I assume you are His Majesty Emperor Tru here, right?"


    Neptune looked at Chang Nuo who was walking at the front and asked respectfully.


    "You are also the head of a country. You, King Puton, don''t have to be so restrained. Coming here in advance without informing Fish-Man Ind is already disrespectful to you. Since we have all met now, let''s treat it as the Tru Empire''s respect for Fish-Man Ind. A friendly visit to the Ind of Man would be great.��


    Chang Nuo''s expression remained unchanged, the corners of his mouth raised slightly, and the people behind him all maintained a slightly serious state. From the moment their Majesty the King began to speak these words, it already meant the beginning of diplomatic rtions between the two countries.


    In fact, these words surprised even Neptune. The situation of Fish-Man Ind is very embarrassing. If they were in the water, they would indeed have arge or absolute right to speak. But now in their own country, one It really made him feel a little overwhelmed that such a powerful person could still say these words.


    "Haha~, what Emperor Tru said is absolutely true, but this is not a ce for chatting. Dragon Pce City has prepared a feast, and Emperor Tru is invited to go!"


    Neptuneughed and spoke. Although his words were not as respectful as before and he was very easy-going, his body was still a little uncontroble and fearful.


    "His Majesty King Loughnipton is here to greet us personally. I don''t know the specific location, but I hope you can lead us in advance!"


    Abona stepped forward and saluted Neptune with some respect.


    "Of course this is what it should be!"


    Neptune said.


    At this time, Jinbei had already walked over with a few things simr to small corals, and then started to hand them to everyone and said, "This thing can create something simr to the entire Fish-Man Ind bubble. With this, you can directly levitate into it." Dragon Pce City.��


    "No!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly. The next second, a transparent step appeared out of thin air in front of everyone, and the direction it extended was towards the Dragon Pce City.


    No one who saw this scene could remain calm, that is, the generals who had been following Chang Nuo, felt that this should be a matter of course, and everyone else felt that they were dazzled.

 Chapter 293 Space Stairs

    <h4>Chapter 293 Space Stairs</h4>


    After all, in front of so many people, a step that looks like transparent ss seems to extend to the sky.


    It''s not that Chang Nuo likes to show off in front of so many people. The key is that he really doesn''t like to wrap a circle of bubbles around his body and float forward in mid-air.


    "Follow me!"


    Chang Nuo said, not paying attention to other people''s eyes at all, and stepped directly on the steps he created using his space ability.


    The feeling is actually the same as stepping on ss, and there are even some thoughtful guardrails on both sides to prevent it from falling suddenly after walking into the air.


    The overall material is exactly the same as ss in every aspect, but Gion is the most surprised by this ability.


    So far, even after staying with him for nearly a day, Gion still hasn''t figured out what kind of Devil Fruit ability King Toru has?


    It was only two times that he showed his abilities. Although each time gave people a different shock, no matter from which angle, these two abilities seemed to be irrelevant.


    But after thinking about it, others started to follow Chang Nuo''s footsteps and walked upwards.


    As thest person steps onto the steps, they take a step up, and the steps behind them will naturally disappear.


    As if all this had never happened, the entire steps connecting the sky were about two meters wide. Even Jinbei, who was born and raised on Fishman Ind, followed their steps and started walking up, without choosing to go with Neptune. Like a king, it is wrapped in a circle of bubbles and slowly floats upward.


    "If I remember correctly, you should be Vice Admiral Momo Usagi of the Navy Headquarters, right?"


    Walking at the back, Jinbei looked at Gion and asked doubtfully.


    Because he already had this problem when they first met, but he didn''t ask it out due to the situation. It was rare that both of them camest this time, so Jinbei directly addressed the questions in his heart. asked.


    After all, when he became a Shichibukai, Jinbei also visited the Navy Headquarters base. He would have some impressions of the people at the Navy Headquarters.


    "You''re right, but so what?"


    Gion did not refute, but admitted generously.


    "I''m overthinking it, sorry!"


    Jinbe smiled politely and nodded, but he opened his mouth to say something apologetic.


    If nothing else, at least he now understood to some extent why this woman was following this group of people. It didn''t take much thinking to know that this kind of thing must be the work of the navy.


    But for the Tru Empire, with such a strong strength, there is no reason why they should not know the identity of this woman, but the other party did not mention it, so there was no need for him to mention it again.


    Dragon Pce City is located at the highest point of the entire Fish-Man Ind. Not only is it the highest ce in terms of geographical location, it is also the only ce that can enjoy all-weather sunshine.


    However, this ce is just like its name. The entire Dragon Pce City is a building surrounded by a huge dragon. From the appearance, the construction of this golden dragon probably took a lot of time and money, but forparison For the wealthy Fishman Ind, perhaps these things are nothing.


    "Your Majesty Toru, this is the Dragon Pce City where the royal family of Fish-Man Ind lives. Perhaps because of the arrival of His Majesty Toru, our ce will look particrly dazzling today. Even after living there for so long, it still looks like it today. There are so many differences.��


    Neptune said as he rode thergest whale and walked side by side with Changnuo.


    "It is indeed a very majestic building. I never thought that Fish-Man Ind could have such an engineer. It really opened my eyes!"


    Chang Nuo said, but what he said was not apliment. The entire Dragon Pce City looked really majestic from this angle. Even on the surface of the sea, I am afraid that there are not two such buildings, but there are 10,000 buildings under the sea. It is indeed surprising that such a ce can be built under m.


    "Haha, His Majesty Tru is so polite."


    Listening to the other party''s praise, the pride in Neptune''s heart immediately showed again.


    But the periphery of Ryugu City is different from other ces. Almost all the buildings on the periphery here are in the sea water. The purpose is to prevent outside pirates, especially those with Devil Fruit abilities, from directly entering this ce.


    The only people who can pass through are the residents of Fish-Man Ind, and the rest can only rely on the giant flounder outside Dragon Pce City to take them there.


    This huge flounder is at least 20 meters wide and 50 meters long. It carries a huge bubble on its back. Its entire back is almost like a square. Not only that, it is also filled with seats.


    But people have reached this position now. Even if the entire Dragon Pce City is irrigated by seawater, Changnuo does not need to take this so-called flounder there.


    The dignity due to the strong is still needed.


    Just when King Neptune was about to say hello and let the group go to Flounder''s Back, a circr channel with a diameter of about 3 meters suddenly appeared on the outside of Ryugu City, which was originally filled with sea water, and all sea water was blocked. on the periphery of this circr channel.


    Not only that, the steps under Chang Nuo''s feet continued to spread towards the direction of Dragon Pce City.


    The appearance of this scene has made no one feel surprised. The strength of Emperor Tru is still a mystery to everyone, but with the means in front of him, no one will be surprised. How dare you underestimate this young man.


    Since the opponent was able to show the strength to reach the sky out of thin air, now it seems a bit natural that he can create a channel in the water out of thin air.


    The interior of Dragon Pce City is still extremely dry. There is no seawater irrigation here, but there is a seawater zone about two hundred meters wide on the outside. The rest inside is apletely different space.


    When hepletely entered the steps in front of Dragon Pce City, Chang Nuo''s own spatial abilities began to dissipate directly, because there was no need to use any abilities here.


    But the moment he came up, the entire structure of Dragon Pce City appeared in Chang Nuo''s mind, which contained almost everything in the entire Dragon Pce City. He probably knew exactly how many people there were.

 Chapter 294 Mermaid Performance

    <h4>Chapter 294 Mermaid Performance</h4>


    Fishman Ind is not particrly big, but it is not particrly small either.


    Ifpared with those onnd, Fish-Man Ind can bepared with a simr country. The poption here can reach four to five million people, and there are still no humans.


    The only disadvantage is that the level of crowding in this ce is much higher than onnd. However, the reason why such a huge country can maintain its current status is obviously not only because of the geographical advantages they upy.


    At least it can be seen from the current Dragon Pce City that Fishman Ind is indeed a paradise.


    As long as the king can bear it well, fainting can be regarded as beneficial to an invincible position in any era.


    "Your Majesty King Tru, pleasee inside!"


    Jinbei ran to the front and hurriedly guided Changnuo.


    Neptune was already walking ahead at this time, and he looked a littlecent along the way. He wanted to lie on the whale under him.


    Who knows what this whale is thinking in his heart at this moment. Such a huge lump is sitting on his body. Even though there is a circle of rtivelyrge bubbles under his body, the weight seems to be half that of this whale. .


    "What direction is that way?"


    Changnuo stretched out his hand curiously and pointed to the right.


    "Oh! You said over there, the highest ce is the Hard Shell Tower, which is also where our mermaid princess lives."


    Jinbei said in the direction that Changno pointed.


    "I see!"


    Although Chang Nuo felt something simr there, he didn''t dare to confirm it. Although there was some impression in his mind, after all, so many years had passed and many things had long been forgotten.


    "I wonder if His Majesty Tru discovered something is wrong?"


    Jinbe asked cautiously.


    "It''s nothing, I just feel a little curious. If possible, I wonder if Mr. Jinbei can take us around the entire Ryugu Castle in the next time?" Changnuo suddenly asked.


    "Well..., if your Majesty has no objections, I would like to take His Majesty Tru to have a tour of the Dragon Pce City!"


    Jinbei said helplessly.


    "Thank you very much, let''s go!"


    When Neptune returned to his ce, he seemed to be apletely different person. He suddenly became rxed andfortable. From time to time, he would hum some little songs. Perhaps he was treating himself as his own king in such a leisurely andfortable way. Others There is no need to worry about things.


    "Your Majesty Tohru, the ce we are going to in a moment is the banquet hall in Ryugu City. It is almost filled with sea water. If it is possible to do itter, I hope you can ride on the Flounder. After all, it is only in the You can enjoy the perfect mermaid performance over there.��


    Jinbe reminded him.


    "Mermaid show?"


    Chang Nuo hadn''t started to say anything yet, but after hearing these words, Enilu suddenly became excited.


    But before he could say the next words, Moshank, who was standing next to him, suddenly burst into mes in his hands, staring at each other evilly with his eyes. In just that moment, Enelu seemed to have fallen into hell. Generally speaking, he looked excited just now, but now he quickly retracted his head.


    "If this is the rule of Fish-Man Ind, it''s okay for us to abide by it!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Although most of the entire Dragon Pce City is surrounded by bubbles, there are also quite a few ces that are almost entirely in the sea.


    As humans, they don''t have much hope. After all, the two people are of different types. They are mermaids. Under such circumstances, they must live more in the water.


    But so far, the first ce to go is definitely the main hall of Long Engineering. At least we have to chat here for a while before starting to n for the next game.


    Following Jinbei''s guidance, there was a long walkway in front of him. Except for the pirs, everything else on both sides was covered with sea water. In other words, only the passage in front of him could lead to the inside, but almost everything else was filled with water. Full of sea water.


    From this aspect, Dragon Pce City canpletely iste any ability users.


    After all, sea water is their biggest weakness, but as mermaids, they have probably taken precautions against all this a long time ago.


    A group of six or seven people walked and watched the situation on both sides. They were more curious about this ce. As people who have always lived onnd, they faced this unknown life and this kind of life that they had never experienced before. Most people''s states of the species they have seen are almost the same.


    However, at this moment, in the main hall of Dragon Pce City, many people are already waiting here, and there are even many familiar faces among them. It is estimated that when they see itter, it will be another lively scene.


    "It''s such a pity. If they came with us, they might be able to take a look at the beautiful scenery here."


    Enelu said to himself.


    "Can you please stop chattering here and forget what His Majesty the King told you before leaving? No matter what, please maintain the image of belonging to the Tru Empire!"


    Moshank looked at Enelu and said with a serious face.


    "Brother Moshank, I didn''t do anything extreme, I was just feeling emotional. You can see almost the entire Fishman Ind from this angle. It''s a pity that Jun and Brother can''t see all this. .��


    Enel said.


    "You two, stop chatting. You are going to the pce in a moment. Don''t disturb His Majesty the King''s ns with your image!"


    Abona suddenly appeared behind the two of them and said with the same serious face.


    Moshank was okay. He had already realized this situation, but Enel was a little dangerously aggrieved.


    Looking down from this angle, although there is still a thickyer of sea water in the middle, you can almost see the entire Fishman Ind. Although you can only appreciate the general scene, at least you can see it from a standing distance. From this top position, the area that can be seen is indeed huge.


    Walking out of the passage, what is disyed in front of everyone is an extremely luxurious pce. The King''s Pce of Dragon Pce City is simply the ultimate in art from any angle. There are even many ces on it made of gold, and there are also dragon shapes on the pirs. Engraving.


    The width of this hall is at least about 50 meters, and the length is at least two hundred meters, but it is such arge ce, and there are only a few people standing in it.

 Chapter 295 Navy Headquarters’ Speculations

    <h4>Chapter 295 Navy Headquarters�� Spections</h4>


    As they arrived, the people in the hall immediately came to greet them.


    "Long time no see! His Majesty King Tru!"


    A clear and loud voice suddenly sounded, and a man with pineapple-yellow hair walked over quickly and shouted with a smile.


    "Hey~, Marco, I didn''t expect you to be here?"


    Chang Nuo was obviously a little surprised. Although he had already seen the captain of the third division in front, he did not expect that the captain of Whitebeard''s first division was also here.


    Although I don''t know if he has just arrived or has been here for a while, at least he has indeed seen the other party''s figure in this ce.


    "Marco? Captain of the Whitebeard Squadron! In the form of an animal-type bird-fruit phantom-type phoenix, Moshank, the opponent looks a lot like you!"


    Abona turned to Moshank next to him and said.


    "I''ve heard about each other, but I didn''t expect to see him here today!" Moshank said.


    "He is also a figure that cannot be underestimated. Among the captains of the Whitebeard Pirates, he is probably the only one who has reached the level of a general!"


    Abona said, still looking at the other person with his eyes.


    After Marco greeted him, he first greeted Changnuo with a smile on his face, as if the two had known each other for a long time.


    But it had only been about two months before, and they had just had a drink together.


    But after saying hello, Marco looked behind Chang Nuo with a serious expression.


    "Mr. Yixiao, it''s been a long time!"


    Marco''s respect for Yixiao was much more respectful than that for Chang Nuo.


    This immediately aroused everyone''s curiosity, because the other party was bowing and smiling at the moment, with a meticulous expression, and had maintained this posture until the other party spoke.


    "It turns out to be Marco! It''s been so long."


    Yixiao said with a slight smile.


    "So you all know each other?"


    Neptune also came over at this time and asked with the same doubts.


    "Before I joined my father''s pirate group, Mr. Yixiao once saved my life. I didn''t expect to see him today after so many years."


    Marco said with emotion.


    "I didn''t expect you to have such a rtionship? It''s really surprising!" Chang Nuo also said.


    The atmosphere, which was rtively solemn in nature, seemed to have be much more rxed at this moment. Everyone seemed to be at home, and they all began to feel familiar with each other.


    But at the very back of the crowd, there was a woman who was a bit out of ce. She stood on the edge, deliberately staying away from everyone, holding a ck phone bug in her hand.


    Gion always observes everyone''s appearance. This is also his mission, so every time he discovers a rtively important situation, he uses the special phone bug in his hand to startmunicating with the Navy headquarters.


    "Taotu, so before I report, I must pay attention to my own safety. You can say whatever you can report without worrying about them being able to hear it. But if you encounter something that you think is confidential, then don''t open your mouth. , don��t think this group of people won��t notice anything!��


    Among the phone worms, a voice that sounded like Lieutenant General He was giving careful instructions.


    "I understand, I will definitely pay attention to this matter!" Gion said.


    In fact, who doesn''t know about her little tricks like this? It''s just that she doesn''t bother to pay attention to it. Everything she sees now, even if she reports to the Navy Headquarters, it doesn''t matter. She just says it. Anyway, it doesn''t matter.


    But at this moment in the Navy Headquarters, Marshal Sengoku was sitting in his office, and sitting next to him were Garp and Lieutenant General He.


    The three of them stayed together, and Garp was still the same as before. His mouth seemed to have never stopped at all, and he kept eating the biscuits in his hands.


    "You have also heard what Peach Rabbit reported this time. Based on the previous reports, what kind of fruit power do you think King Toru has?"


    The Warring States Marshal sat there and asked with a frown on his face.


    "It''s hard to tell now, but no matter which aspect you look at, the opponent''s strength has absolutely nothing to do with his age!"


    Lieutenant General He said.


    "Garp, can you stop eating?"


    While discussing such an important matter, Garp still looked like it had nothing to do with him and kept eating. The Warring States Marshal who was sitting there with a frown suddenly had a bad opinion.


    But how could Garp pay attention to these things? He ignored Marshal Warring States'' roar and continued to stuff another biscuit into his mouth.


    But after finishing the piece in his mouth, he did not continue with the next step. Instead, his expression looked quite serious.


    "I think the most likely thing is that he has the superhuman Space Devil Fruit ability!"


    Garp said with a serious sigh.


    "Tell me what you think?"


    The Warring States Marshal asked.


    "It is still unknown. As the most mysterious figure in the entire sea, Emperor Tru hides too deeply, but it is rtively normal to think about it. In most cases, he has so many people under hismand. People with strong strength really don''t need to do it themselves at all.


    But he was able to build a military base on an empty ind. As for how these people came up on arge scale, we have discussed it many times, but in the end we were rejected by our own conclusions, so the only final It is possible that Emperor Toru possesses the ability of space fruit.


    But all of this is just spection. Last time Taotu said that Genji Nagano could create a chain out of thin air from his palm and extend into the sea. We still don''t know this kind of thing now, after all, we have never witnessed it with our own eyes.


    But among the currently known Devil Fruits, apart from the Chain Fruit, it��s really hard to imagine any other fruit that can create such a scene, but..."


    "But the key point is that the Devil Fruit you mentioned is in the navy now, so there is no way it will appear in the Tohru Empire, right?"


    Before Garp finished speaking, Lieutenant General He directly took over what he said.


    Garp nodded immediately.


    It''s okay not to say this. The moment this topic was opened, everything seemed to fall into a fog again, whether it was themunication between them or the investigation between the world governments, but in the end there was undoubtedly the same result. , the king of the Tru Empire, remains a mysterious being.

 Chapter 296 Xia Li who can predict

    <h4>Chapter 296 Xia Li who can predict</h4>


    Over the past few years, the navy and the world government have used many methods to investigate the situation in the Tru Empire, but this country has always given them the feeling of being like an iron barrel.


    Although there is quite a lot of information investigated, once ites to the Tru Empire Pce, no matter what kind of investigators they are, they all enter a difficult situation.


    Marshal Sengoku sat there and sighed. After all, after Gionmunicated with them through an encrypted phone bug just now, everyone could imagine who was leaking information about the empire and transmitting information in this way. No matter from which angle, the other party There is no reason why such a thing cannot be discovered.


    "Let Momotu pay more attention to himself, but during this time, he must understand what abilities Genji Changno actually has?"


    Warring States opened his mouth and said to Lieutenant General He.


    ��������


    In the Dragon Pce City.


    "His Majesty King Tru, before you came, I was still reporting the situation here to my father. My father said that when you enter the new world, you muste to our ce and sit for a while!"


    Marco said with a smile.


    Everyone is still standing here. The main part of the chat is just themunication between the Tru Empire and the Whitebeard Pirates. As for the fish-man ind, they are standing there and watching quietly.


    "If there is no problem, there will be no problem in visiting the old man then."


    Changnuo said with a slight smile.


    "Your Majesty the King, has it been possible that you have already been to the New World?"


    Yixiao asked curiously.


    "I went there once before, but I came back not long after." Chang Nuo said.


    "Everyone, how about we go directly to the banquet hall and chat while eatingter? After all, we can have a good chat if we have something to wait for a while."


    During theirmunication, a catfish mermaid wearing extravagant clothing and two beards hanging from the corners of his mouth came over and spoke to them respectfully.


    "That''s right, everyone, the Flounder Restaurant is ready." Jinbei also said.


    This time, no one refused. There was a huge flounder parked not far in front of them. Anyway, since they had already started to talk about things, it would be the same to talk about things at the dinner table.


    But just when they were about to board the flounder, a woman who looked very mature and charming floated over with a circle of bubbles around her body.


    She has short ck hair that covers the right side of her face, cold blue eyes, pale skin, and a rather plump bust. The front half of the tail is dark blue, the back half is white, there is a dorsal fin on the lower waist, a pair of small fins near the tail, and the tail fin is crescent-shaped. Wearing a dark purple hooded top, only the middle button was buttoned, exposing her cleavage and belly, and she was wearing purple nail polish and red lipstick.


    In just this moment, Chang Nuo had already looked at the other party''s appearance.


    Charlie, the manager of the Mermaid Cafe on Fish-Man Ind, is also the reason why Chang Nuo stops here.


    This woman is about 3 meters tall, which is slightlyrger than an ordinary mermaid or fishman. But no matter what, in terms of appearance and figure, she is definitely an ice-cold beauty.


    Chang Nuo was already preparing to board the Flounder Restaurant, but when he saw the other partying, he immediately stopped.


    Although Xia Li is rtively famous on Fish-Man Ind, not many people pay attention to it, but because this time, even the senior officials of Fish-Man Ind are all looking at the woman who came over.


    "I have predicted that I wille this time, but there are some nks in the predictions. This really caused me a lot of confusion. I wonder if His Majesty, Emperor Tru, can tell me the reason?"


    As soon as Xia Li arrived, she stopped in front of Chang Nuo. The distance between the two was only 1 meter, and she said in a soft tone.


    Many people were suddenly confused. What is going on? Can the other partye up and ask such a thing?


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then said, "Maybe it''s because God doesn''t want you to know what will happen next, but since we have met this time, it is better to wait and have a good chat."


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he turned around and continued walking towards Flounder.


    The others didn''t say much, they just followed behind and walked towards the back of this huge flounder.


    Xia Li stayed where he was, looking at the young man walking past with a calm expression. Although he didn''t know what would happen this time, he had indeed made predictions beforeing here this time, but everything seemed to be like this. nk.


    As everyone had boarded, Flounder began to slowly move towards the banquet restaurant.


    "Xia Li, what exactly is going on?"


    Jinbe walked forward and asked with a puzzled look on his face.


    "I don''t know, but I can''t tell whether it''s a good thing or a bad thing. In short, I always have a bad feeling about myself."


    Xia Li''s eyes were still looking in the direction of the flounder, and he still remained doubtful as he spoke.


    "Don''t worry, Emperor Tru won''t do anything to you, let alone Fish-Man Ind.


    If he really has that idea, even if we stay here, we probably won''t be able to stop him at all. Besides, Emperor Tru is not the kind of person you think. "


    Marco walked forward, patted Jinbei on the shoulder and said.


    "Marco, it''s rare to see you speak so highly of a person. I heard that my father spoke very well of him before, but what exactly is all this about?"


    Jinbe asked. He had asked the captain of the Third Division Jozi this question before, but the other party did not answer.


    It was a rare opportunity to have this kind of opportunity, and naturally Jinbei would not let him go and ask Marco.


    "Father has already ordered many things. Emperor Tru''s situation must not be leaked. But don''t worry, Fish-Man Ind is still under dad''s jurisdiction. Emperor Tru will not do anything excessive."


    Marco said with a slight smile.


    He was not sure about this kind of thing. After all, they had only met once. As for what kind of person Emperor Tru was, what could he tell after being in contact with him once?


    "I hope so! But Marco, what do you think Emperor Tru asked Charlie toe here for?"


    "prophecy."


    "prophecy??"


    Jinbei repeated it, but for him, this was really the only thing he could think of. Basically, everyone knew about Xia Li''s prophecy ability on the entire Fish-Man Ind, and there were no other particrly outstanding performances. Apart from a mermaid cafe, I really don''t think that Xia Li has any qualifications to make a powerful force on the sea care about him.

 Chapter 297 Banquet Hall

    <h4>Chapter 297 Banquet Hall</h4>


    Xia Li stood aside and listened. When she heard that the conversation between the two involved herself, she immediately frowned.


    "You said he invited me because of my prophetic ability?"


    Xia Li opened his mouth and asked.


    "It is estimated that this is the only reason, otherwise what else could there be?" Marco said.


    "Let''s see when the timees. If it doesn''t work out, we can only give dad a call." Jinbei said.


    "Just talking about this, how are Jozi and I going to get there? You are fishmen and can go directly through the water, but we can''t!"


    Marco asked, suddenly changing the subject.


    "There''s still flounder, don''t worry."


    Jinbe said, and not long after, a huge flounder appeared again in front of everyone''s eyes. Although the overall size was not as big as the one that had just set off, this one looked not small.


    There are only two people from the Whitebeard Pirates who came here, so even if this one is smaller, he ispletely worthy of respect.


    "Oh~, there really is one, let''s go there first and see you in the banquet hallter!"


    Marco smiled and said hello to King Neptune who was standing not far away and wasmunicating with the left minister.


    As the two set off again, the people remaining in the entire hall were all people from Fish-Man Ind. Except for a group of guards, the rest were almost all their own people.


    But at this moment, everyone''s mood seems to be extremelyplicated, because they have been guessing, what is the purpose of Emperor Truing to Fish-Man Ind?


    As early as a few years ago, everyone had known that as a first-level member of the World Government, the Tru Empire even had the right to directly pass through the Red Earth Continent, but it had to risk such great danger and trouble to divert to Fish-Man Ind. , even a fool can understand that it must be for something on Fish-Man Ind.


    But what can I do now even if I know?


    The banquet restaurant in Ryugu City is muchrger than expected. Even such arge flounder seems too small here. I am afraid that a 40- to 50-meter-long flounder can amodate at least ten or twenty people here. .


    It was pitch ck underneath them, but they could still see the tall stage in front of them, with a huge shellfish ced in the center. Anyway, the specific situation was almost the same as in the impression.


    Chang Nuo and his party were the first to arrive at this ce. When they saw this kind of banquet restaurant built in the water, it was really strange.


    "Your Majesty the King, you seem to have different ideas about the manager of the Mermaid Cafe who camest?"


    Changnuo stood at the forefront of the entire Flounder and looked at the banquet restaurant. Yixiao behind him walked slowly to his side and asked on crutches.


    The other group of people were all lying on the edge of the bubble looking outside. Although it was still dark here, many decorations could be vaguely seen.


    "He has a great effect on our country. This woman can make 100% predictions."


    Chang Nuo said calmly, but his expression showed that he was determined to win.


    "I see!"


    The moment he heard the news, Yixiao''s expression suddenly tightened, but it only stayed for two seconds, and his body rxed and he said.


    Having the ability to predict is equivalent to having an extra eye in the future. You don''t have to think about small things anymore. As long as you can know big events in advance, then the Tru Empire is equivalent to an absolute bug.


    Although Changnuo already knows what will happen in the pirate world in the next three years at least, he only knows the plot that should be included in the rhythm of the plot development. However, with his arrival, the situation in the sea haspletely changed into Another situation.


    So now when we talk about possible things in the future, the taste is already very different, so since he wants to maintain his state of being a prophet, Xia Li, who has the ability to predict, has be an absolute first choice.


    If a person who can control 100% urate prophecies is ced on the sea, I am afraid that any force will want to get this person as soon as possible.


    But as for how to make here to his country willingly, Chang Nuo has already made his own ns.


    But after receiving the news, Yixiao already felt how important this matter was.


    "Your Majesty must be interested in more than just that woman. I''m afraid you have some ideas about the entire Fish-Man Ind, right?"


    Yixiao asked seriously.


    "Didn''t we discuss it before? If possible, forming a fish-men unit would be a very good decision!"


    Changnuo said.


    "But you think Neptune will agree to our request?"


    "He will agree." Chang Nuo said.


    During the chat, another flounder carrying Mark and the others swam over quickly, and happened to be juxtaposed with the flounder they were originally staying with.


    But what no one expected was that with the arrival of the flounder, the bubbles on his body actually merged with the bubbles on the flounder under their feet,pletely turning into arger venue.


    It''s just that at this moment, the people at Fish-Man Ind''s home haven haven''t arrived yet, and the only ones staying here are just some servants.


    The two bubbles were connected, and Marco began to walk towards them with the same serious expression.


    Ignoring anyone, he walked straight to Chang Nuo and asked in a slightly respectful voice, "Your Majesty Emperor Tru, I wonder if I can know what your purpose is ining to Fish-Man Ind?"


    "So what do you think?"


    Chang Nuo didn''t even turn his head, his eyes were still staring straight at the huge stage in front of him, and he said in a calm voice.


    "Currently, Fish-Man Ind is under the jurisdiction of Dad. I hope His Majesty Emperor Tru can look out for Dad''s sake and not do anything too extreme!"


    Marco said, his whole body bent directly towards Chang Nuo.


    Everyone''s eyes were attracted at this moment. Jozi, who was on the other flounder, saw this scene, raised his hand slightly and put it down again for some reason.


    "If I say that I can create a living habitat on the sea for Fish-Man Ind, what do you think?" Chang Nuo said.


    "this???"


    Marco was suddenly a little surprised. Whitebeard had never thought about this topic before, but he was already old after all. As a pirate, he did not have a fixed habitat. Once he promised this, if he was not well protected, it would make people appear. Those fishmen on the ground suffered greater losses.

 Chapter 298 The deal with Whitebeard

    <h4>Chapter 298 The deal with Whitebeard</h4>


    But the person in front of him is different. As the king of the Tru Empire, Changnuo, almost anyone who understands the situation in the South China Sea can clearly know that there is only one person left who has the final say in the entire South China Sea area, and that is the man in front of him.


    Marco didn''t feel that what the other party said was exaggerated at all. If the other party was willing to do it, this kind of thing could definitely be done.


    But what he is wondering now is, what is the purpose of the other party choosing to do this?


    "If I don''t tell you about the old man''s situation, I think you know it better than anyone else. From now on, the entire sea will never be as quiet as it is now. How can Fish-Man Ind be able to get rid of it? There are some things that I won''t say, but the old man also understands."


    Chang Nuo said, fearing that if he made such a move today, Whitebeard, who was in the new world, would definitely not raise any objections.


    Even if the Fish-Man Ind is now under his jurisdiction, Chang Nuo can be absolutely sure of this kind of thing.


    "I understand what Your Majesty said, and I willmunicate with Dad about this situation!"


    Marco said, all the doubts in his tone had been answered. Is there any force on this sea that doesn''t know the military purpose of Fish-Man Ind? However, so far, the residents of Fish-Man Ind are too prejudiced against humans, so there is no proper solution to this matter so far.


    He also really wants to see how this person who can dominate the South China Sea solve the problem?


    "Does Mr. Yixiao think so too?"


    Marco asked, suddenly smiling again.


    "I have no right to refuse His Majesty the King''s decision, but what happens next on the sea is indeed very likely to be what His Majesty said." Yixiao said.


    "I see!"


    Marco stopped talking, but he still looked a little gloomy.


    As the most powerful person in the entire Whitebeard Pirates group besides Whitebeard, he makes almost all decisions on most operations of the entire pirate group. Whitebeard is just a symbol of the cohesion of their group. .


    Regarding the situation on the entire sea, Marco also understands that this situation will notst long.


    No matter which of the four emperors falls first, the chaotic situation on the entire sea wille again.


    "Marco, the old man and I have reached a deal. The old man must have told you about this. The world in the future will not be as simple as you think."


    Chang Nuo turned his head and smiled at Mark who was standing there. His words were not threatening at all.


    Previously on the Whitebeard Pirates, Changnuo had already reached a certain cooperation agreement with Whitebeard in the future, but I''m afraid only the three of them knew about this matter.


    Marco nodded slightly. When Whitebeard told him, Marco already understood what it meant.


    Whitebeard is simply worried that, with his current deteriorating health, once he lets go, the entire Whitebeard Pirates will lose their protection at the moment, whether it is the sons under his name or those under his jurisdiction. Those areas will be the next areas to be swept by war.


    Although Marco didn''t know what method Chang Nuo used to get Whitebeard to agree to the agreement between them, one thing that is undeniable is that the development of the Tru Empire in recent years has indeed progressed in front of everyone''s eyes. Where it is said to be, the development in recent years has left everyone speechless.


    "Everyone, I''m really sorry to keep you waiting for so long."


    As soon as the previous words fell, the dark banquet hall immediately became brighter. King Neptune stood on the stage and apologized to the people on the two flounders in front of him.


    Jinbei rushed over. He did not stay with Neptune, but swam directly towards the two huge flounder.


    Sometimes I have to say that many people envy the life of others. They can not only survive on the shore, but also breathe freely in the sea. Such unique conditions allow them to be much stronger than humans.


    Two huge flounders are connected together, and the entire space above has be muchrger. Moreover, with only a few people staying here on this fish of several hundred square meters, it does seem much spacious.


    Jinbei walked directly through the bubble and entered inside. Neptune below did not say anything. As the lights began to sh, what followed was the preliminary program that everyone was looking forward to.


    One after another, the beautiful mermaids were holding tes in their hands, but these tes were also wrapped in bubbles, and then swam quickly towards them.


    A dinner party can be said to have the characteristics of Fish-Man Ind, but everyone''s thoughts are also exploding unconsciously.


    Whether it was wine or food, the group of mermaids were consuming it quickly while dancing with their graceful figures. The scene now looked like what aplete banquet should look like.


    "Your Majesty Tru, I wonder if these features of Fish-Man Ind make you feel okay?"


    While eating, Jinbei knelt on the ground and respectfully asked Changnuo who was sitting in the front.


    Now there is a rectangr dining table in front of them, which is about 10m long and 2m wide. However, most of the delicious food in Dashu is ced in front of Changnuo. Not to mention the taste, just looking at these shapes is already pleasing to the eye. .


    Chang Nuo didn''t answer in a hurry. He used the chopsticks in his hand to pick up a piece of meat from the fish in front of him, and then slowly put it into his mouth.


    ��Sitting here feels like a kind of enjoyment. What��s on sale are not only the beautiful dances in front of you, but more importantly, the delicious food in front of you.


    Fishman Ind is a ce that can really rx people to the extreme. If I were not the king of a country, I would be willing to live in such an elegant ce for a long time. "


    Changnuomented.


    To Jinbei''s ears, this kind of evaluation was already considered a very advanced one, and could even directly elevate Fish-Man Ind to a higher level.


    But before he opened his mouth to reply with words of thanks, Changnuo''s expression changed slightly and he said again, "If your Fish-Man Ind didn''t have so many people who like to do some little tricks, it would probably be more perfect. "


    Jinbe waspletely confused. If he didn''t understand what the other party said, even Marco, who was sitting at the same table to eat together, was also a little confused.

 Chapter 299 Poisoning

    <h4>Chapter 299 Poisoning</h4>


    Chang Nuo gently put down the chopsticks in his hand, then raised his right hand slightly and patted it on the dining table. Then, three portions of delicacies that had just been served naturally floated about 50 centimeters above the table.


    "Take it and check it out. You actually dare to drug the Tru Empire. It seems that the other party has the idea to destroy Fish-Man Ind!"


    Changnuo said lightly.


    No matter how much you think about this kind of thing, you can know that it is definitely not done by Neptune and others. Then there must be a different group of people in this pce.


    Their main purpose is to cause chaos and achieve their own goals.


    After hearing what Chang Nuo said, Jinbei suddenly stood up with a look of disbelief on his face.


    Neptune and others who were eating, drinking and having fun below did not notice what happened to the flounder floating in the air. They were still talking and amusing themselves.


    "Your Majesty Tru, are you sure there is such a thing?"


    Before Jinbe could say anything, Marco immediately asked nervously.


    "Yes, Your Majesty Tru, there will never be such a person on our Ind of Fools? How can you prove it?"


    Jinbe asked.


    "Take it for a test and you will know!"


    Chang Nuo still said calmly, not angry or angry because of this matter.


    There was no way he could tell this group of people that he heard it from the heart of the mermaid who brought these ingredients through the power of the psychic Devil Fruit!


    "Jinbei, no matter what, you, Fool Ind, must give an exnation about this matter, otherwise, you need to think carefully about weing the wrath of the Toru Empire in the future!"


    Abona stood up, frowned, and spoke to Jinbei in a cold and serious voice.


    "You can rest assured that if such a thing really happens, Fish-Man Ind will definitely give an exnation, but they will also allow us to check it out first."


    Jinbei said, he didn''t think that Emperor Toru would casually frame him, and his whole expression remained serious and respectful. If this kind of thing happened, even if Whitebeard stayed here, it would not be a good oue.


    With that said, Jinbei reached out and picked up one of the three ingredients suspended there, and then started to move quickly in the direction of Neptune under everyone''s gaze.


    The people who stayed above could clearly see that Neptune, who was still smiling at first, suddenly turned serious in the next second. Even the ministers sitting next to him stood up one by one.


    Now this kind of thing can be said to be an internal matter of their Fish-Man Ind. It is not convenient for the Tru Empire to get involved, but it is just a good banquet, but it has be boring because of this matter.


    But those mermaids who didn''t know the situation were still dancing happily at this moment, their graceful figures twisting briskly in the sea.


    "Your Majesty the King, what kind of people do you think will attack us on Fish-Man Ind?"


    Yixiao asked.


    "It''s hard to say for now, but the only thing I can think of is that their Fish-Man Ind is not as harmonious as we imagined. They probably want to use our hands to clear some obstacles in their eyes."


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, continued to pick up the chopsticks and began to pick up the dishes in front of him.


    "The royal family of Fish-Man Ind will never do such a stupid thing. We, the Whitebeard Pirates, can guarantee this!"


    Marco opened his mouth and said.


    "Marco, don''t make sarcastic remarks here. Do you think His Majesty the King will still nder them?"


    Moshank''s eyes were cold and he looked up at Marco sitting directly opposite him with a serious expression and said.


    "No, I don''t mean that. I just hope you can allow them to investigate this matter clearly."


    Marco lowered his head and said good things about Fool''s Ind while maintaining a respectful expression.


    "Don''t make the atmosphere so rigid. Eat and drink when you need to, but other things are fine."


    Changnuo said with a smile while eating.


    As the leader of a country, he has not yet begun to develop into a state of anger, and there is no need for others to be so anxious.


    "Your Majesty the King, you will never tolerate such a thing. You dare to attack us now. If you see it, you must find a way to find out the person behind the scenes!"


    Arbonne said.


    "It''s not interesting to discuss these things now. Just follow what His Majesty the King said, let''s give Fishman Ind a chance to self-examine first, and we''ll see the restter!"


    Said with a smile.


    At this time, it is estimated that except for Chang Nuo himself who was still in the mood to eat here, no one else picked up the chopsticks ced on the table. The words in their expressions were obvious as they looked at each other.


    Gion is the most rxed one. At least after this incident, she will think that this is rtively good news for the navy. After this incident, it will be difficult for the Toru Empire to have any cooperation problems with Fish-Man Ind. .


    It''s just that this woman has obviously underestimated the ambition of Emperor Tru.


    As for Fish-Man Ind, in less than five minutes from the beginning of this incident, arge number of people began to run in, and everyone who participated in the banquet, including the chef, was all tied up. Take away.


    The dancing mermaids had no idea what was going on. They could only stop and watch so many troops take away all the people inside. The atmosphere in the entire banquet hall was extremely bad.


    As the king of Fish-Man Ind, Neptune personally directs all this, and Jinbei stands aside to assist. Jinbei will even personally check every person he takes away, just to see who is behind this matter.


    "Come up and sit for a while. I can have a good chat with you about some things."


    Chang Nuo gently put down the chopsticks in his hand, picked up the drink on the side and took an elegant sip, and then said calmly.


    But he didn''t say this to the people sitting here. Instead, his voice was directly conveyed to Xia Li, who was sitting in the water at the bottom.


    This seemingly beautiful mermaid is still sitting there in her proud state. The only difference in appearance is whether she is holding wine in her hands or not. The red wine is swaying back and forth in the ss. He looked like he was keeping strangers away from him.


    But although Chang Nuo''s words were rtively soft, they could still reach the other party''s ears clearly.


    The red wine ss that was still shaking suddenly stopped at the next moment. Charlie raised his head in disbelief and looked at the flounder.

 Chapter 300 Conditions for joining the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 300 Conditions for joining the Tru Empire</h4>


    Anyway, there is already a lot of noise down there. Even King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind is constantly giving orders at the moment. Xia Li is really sitting there doing nothing.


    She didn''t refuse the other party''s invitation, but she didn''t make any timely reply. She just put the shaking red wine ss in her hand gently to her lips, then took a big sip, and then began to slowly Get up.


    "Enilu, sit down and give me a seat!"


    Chang Nuo looked at Enilu, who was sitting next to him with an innocent look on his face, and said with a smile.


    "Huh? Oh! Okay!"


    Enelu didn''t understand, but he still did as Chang Nuo said and moved towards Moshank''s position, leaving enough space to put it there.


    Next, while everyone was puzzled, Xia Li instantly jumped into the bubble, and then sat elegantly in the original position of Enero.


    He was already sitting next to Chang Nuo, but even if the other person was sitting there, his huge figure still required others to look up to see the other person''s face.


    "I wonder why His Majesty King Tru asked me toe here?"


    Charlie sat here and lit the pipe in his hand without speaking.


    "What a big body!!"


    Enelu said, because at the same time that Xia Li sat down, the huge tail directly hit Enelu''s body. Although it did not cause any harm, it at least pushed the guy towards the direction of Moshank. Pushed through.


    The key is to just say what you say. Those restless eyes are still looking back and forth at others.


    "Can you turn your eyes in another direction?"


    Xia Li was a little angry, and his whole person seemed to have changed in an instant, and sharp fangs began to appear in his mouth.


    Such a big change in attitude really shocked Enelu in terms of momentum.


    "Tell me, what''s the reason for asking me toe here?"


    Xia Li turned around and asked Chang Nuo again.


    "100% prophecy. Have you ever thought about joining our Tru Empire in the future? We will give you a better development tform by then."


    Chang Nuo said directly.


    "Sorry, I just like life on Fish-Man Ind and am not interested in the outside world!"


    Xia Li took a puff of cigarette, exhaled it slowly, and said calmly.


    This topic has been discussed beforeing back. After all, the key to being able to have such a powerful person target him is that he has nothing outstanding other than his ability to predict.


    But facing the other party''s invitation, Xia Li couldn''t directly refuse it openly, but he could only say this.


    Life on the sea is a yearning for most people on Fishman Ind, but this yearning often results in many fishmen or mermaids being in danger or even dying outside.


    Chang Nuo was not surprised when he heard the rejection. He even felt that everything happened so logically and that the plot and script should develop ording to this ending.


    But nothing is static, and Changnuo will not get angry because the other party directly refuses. Instead, he raises his head with interest and looks at the calm and proud face of the other party who is smoking.


    "If you stay in the Tru Empire, this country can promise you a condition. As long as it is achievable, you can choose whatever you want."


    What Chang Nuo said, even the smile sitting next to him couldn''t believe it. Such conditions can almost be regarded as supreme. A condition that can allow the Tru Empire to achieve such influence. You can guess it just by thinking about it.


    But at the same time, Gion, who was sitting on the outermost edge, was even more curious about what kind of identity and ability Xiali had that allowed Emperor Toru to offer such generous terms?


    Even Marco was a little unbelievable. Although he knew some of Xiali''s situation, he would not let such a big country and such a powerful king agree to an arbitrary condition proposed by the other party.


    Not to mention they were surprised, even Xia Li was caught off guard. As a condition of the Tru Empire, even if Xia Li proposed to let the Fish-Man Ind float above the sea, the Tru Empire might try every means to achieve this. matter.


    Faced with the other party''s words, Xia Li himself showed an expression of disbelief and sat there smoking a cigarette. Although his expression was still arrogant and calm, he no longer knew how to deal with the panic in his heart. Express it.


    The few people apanying the Tru Empire all bowed their heads and remained silent. They couldn''t understand why their King would make such an important decision, and they hadn''t discussed it with anyone in advance.


    But even if Chang Nuo himself made such remarks without consulting anyone, the people sitting next to him would not put forward any refutation.


    "To be honest, this condition is indeed the biggest one I have ever heard of, but I want to know why His Majesty Tru would like a mermaid like me?"


    Charlie asked.


    "I have never paid much attention to the so-called mermaids or fish-men. Fish-Man Ind is also such a good ce. Perhaps one of your conditions can directly change the future appearance of the entire Fish-Man Ind." Changnuo said.


    "That''s why I said that your conditions are indeed tempting, but I think staying on Fish-Man Ind may be my best choice." Xia Li still insisted on his own thoughts.


    None of this seemed to be negotiable at all. The other party always maintained that arrogant face and never looked down at them from the beginning to the end.


    She was not even willing to ept such conditions, so Chang Nuo had given her enough face.


    But what Xia Li didn''t know was that his inner thoughts at this moment had already beenpletely interpreted by Chang Nuo sitting next to him.


    Whether it is internal or external factors, controlling the other person''s inner thoughts is almost equivalent to controlling that person.


    Chang Nuo was not in the slightest anxious. Anyway, it was still a mess down there. In such a rare quiet atmosphere above, it was better tomunicate slowly.


    "Actually, I can also predict, but I don''t know how urate the simrity between the two of us can be."


    Chang Nuo suddenly opened his mouth and said.


    Others looked at their King in disbelief. Even Xia Li lowered his head and started to look at King Tru who was sitting next to him.


    "Haha~, His Majesty King Tru is really quite humorous."


    Xia Liughed directly, as if he only thought the other party was joking about this matter.

 Chapter 301 I can also predict

    <h4>Chapter 301 I can also predict</h4>


    It is estimated that no matter who it is, hearing Chang Nuo say such things will feel incredible, and even make fun of others.


    But facing Xia Li, Chang Nuo said with a slight smile, "If I were to predict, your half-brother will die in three years!"


    "you����!"


    Xia Li suddenly became angry. Although he was not interested in his brother and didn''t even have any good feelings at all, he would actually say such a thing.


    In fact, her anger was just because she was unable to refute. She had already known this predetermined result from the moment when she had nothing to do and liked to make prophecies. However, when it was said from the other party''s mouth, the following was still a bit difficult to conceal. Angry and shocked.


    "What else do you want to know? You want to know how the Fishman Ind will be destroyed in the future? Or what kind of turmoil will happen on the sea? Or what will your next fate be? We can also chat, When the bubble of Fish-Man Ind bursts, what kind of dilemma will the residents of Fish-Man Ind face?


    All of this may be said. What I can do is much greater than you think. For example, if I tell you a condition, as long as you put it forward, I can even make the decision to make Fishman Ind appear in a world with a real sun. Surviving in this ce allows you to live like normal humans without any discrimination or harm.


    Or you canpletely ept that the future Fishman Ind will be what you fabled! "


    Changnuo said leisurely, and every time he said it, there was always a strange smile on his face.


    Xia Li was sitting next to him. Whenever Chang Nuo said those words, every word pierced her heart directly like a sharp sword.


    From the initial anger, not even a minute passed before and after, Xia Li''s expression hadpleted the expression from struggle to shock to fear, all of which were reflected in her alone.


    The hand that was still holding the pipe now began to tremble unconsciously when it was ced on the table. Regarding this huge mermaid, no one else realized how powerful the other party was.


    But Chang Nuo borrowed the fruit of the spiritual system, and now it haspletely hit every pain point in the other party''s heart, and the haze of fear directly enveloped her whole person.


    "Your Majesty Tru, Fish-Man Ind is now under the management of my father. Please don''t always say such things!"


    Marco stood up with a serious expression. Although he never understood the purpose of this group of peopleing to Fish-Man Ind from the beginning to the end, from the words spoken by the other party, he was not sure whether they were threats or threats. Something else.


    "Marco! Your Majesty has opened his mouth to speak. Please keep the original situation and don''t interrupt at will."


    Moshank was sitting opposite, and his body was already burning with red mes.


    "Brother Moshank, can you tell me in advance before doing this kind of thing?"


    Enelu shouted directly.


    Because he was the closest to Moshank at the moment, and the two of them were almost next to each other, so when the mes suddenly burned on the other''s body, Anilu was immediately affected.


    Even though it was a natural devil fruit, this kind of terrifying and panic-inducing mes still scared Enelu.


    "Animal type devil fruit, bird fruit, phantom beast type phoenix form, maybe you really can''t see enough here!"


    Abona also opened his mouth directly, his expression and words were cold.


    Even Marco and Jozi, who were sitting opposite them, were already on alert, but they had to admit that staying here to fight against these people opposite them, with just the strength of the two of them, was indeed useless. role.


    "Your Majesty the King, I wonder what you just said...?"


    Yixiao also started to ask. He was not standing in anyone''s position, he just wanted to know the causes and consequences of these things.


    "Mr. Yixiao, do you think it is necessary for the Tru Empire to have a dispute with a small fish-man ind? As for what will happen in the future, we can only roughly guess what it will be like. We must know the causes and consequences of these things best. , Mrs. Charlie should know best, right?"


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    The other party can still hear these words now. Xia Li is still wrapped in fear, thinking about what Chang Nuo said just now.


    "What exactly do you want?"


    Charlie asked tremblingly.


    "Come to Tru Empire, I think you are very good in many aspects, otherwise we wouldn''t have spent so much effort to go around to Fish-Man Ind and enter the new world!"


    Chang Nuo directly raised his head and looked at the other person''s face and said.


    "Is this why you came to Fish-Man Ind?"


    At this moment, Gion stood up in confusion and suddenly asked.


    She really wanted to report this news directly to the Navy Headquarters, and even wanted the Navy Headquarters to conduct a thorough investigation to find out what kind of magic power Xiali of Fish-Man Ind had that could make the emperors from all over the world go to Fish-Man Ind in person. You can also invite someone to a certain ce and put forward a condition that no one can refuse.


    But although the bubbles on the back of this flounder are hundreds of square meters in size, within this range, no matter how quietly you speak, it is impossible for these people not to hear it.


    Chang Nuo ignored the other party''s words and kept looking calmly at Xia Li, who was sitting next to him.


    He believed that this woman would never refuse what he proposed. Even if it was just a condition for her, Xia Li would not refuse the treatment proposed by the Tru Empire.


    "Why does this person have to be me?"


    Charlie asked.


    "Perhaps you don''t know. There is a saying that it''s a crime to hold a treasure in your arms. You don''t have the strength to protect everything you predict and know now. This is your crime."


    Changnuo said.


    Now a group of people have gradually understood something. Emperor Tru did not hesitate to spend such a high price toe to Fish-Man Ind, but he did not expect that he only came here for a woman.


    But they are right to have this idea. When Chang Nuo originally nned toe to Fish-Man Ind, it was for this woman. At the same time, if possible, he would not mind directly building an army of fish-men, but now it seems that time is running out. A little early.


    But there is nothing wrong with nning and arranging some things in advance. Changnuo likes to do things in advance. Fish-Man Ind does not have the ability to protect itself. Although it is protected by Whitebeard, how long can this protectionst? ?

 Chapter 302 The future ownership of Fishman Island

    <h4>Chapter 302 The future ownership of Fishman Ind</h4>


    King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind understood this situation, and so did Whitebeard who was staying on the sea.


    Both parties now know that they are just using the name Whitebeard to scare past pirates. Once any problems arise with the Whitebeard Pirates, the first to suffer will definitely be the new world of Fish-Man Ind and the Great Road. The first half is where it connects.


    By this time, a group of people were chatting, and the following things were almost over, and the entire banquet hall once again returned to a quiet atmosphere.


    But this banquet obviously could no longer go on. King Neptune and Jinbe stood below and looked up at Flounder.


    As a type of mermaid that can live in the water, they can still hear clearly even if they are chatting above the water.


    The two of them still thought that it was because of the banquet that the people above had such serious expressions, but they did not think about other aspects at all.


    On flounder.


    Xia Li looked at Chang Nuo quietly. After staying for a long time, he seemed to have made some decision. He sighed deeply and said, "I ept your invitation and will go to the Tru Empire next. And I can do things ording to your instructions, but I hope His Majesty King Tru can fulfill the condition you just promised."


    "No problem, but I''m curious, how will you put forward this condition? Or what kind of conditions will you put forward!"


    Changnuo said with a slight smile.


    "Perhaps it''s too early to say this now. I''ll mention it to youter when I think I can take it out."


    Charlie rxed and took a slow drag on his cigarette.


    "It seems that we have a new member joining. It''s such a joyful thing. Shouldn''t we have a drink to celebrate?"


    Enelu picked up the wine ss and asked everyone with a smile.


    It''s just that none of them are in the mood to go drinking with him now. Even though the atmosphere has calmed down, the tense situation just now is still imprinted in their hearts.


    The entire Fish-Man Ind is currently under Whitebeard''s jurisdiction. However, the Tru Empire has not notified anyone on Whitebeard''s side that it will pick up people directly from Fish-Man Ind. In some respects, it is not possible at all. Don''t give them any face.


    Both parties are the top forces in the world, so these details should be done in ce.


    Marco sat there glumly, and Jozi next to him had the same expression, but so what?


    Changnuo raised his head and looked at the two of them sitting there, tapped the table with his fingers, and then said calmly, "In the future, it may be better for Fisherman Ind to be under the jurisdiction of the Tru Empire. After the new world , I will go up and tell the old man personally."


    "This is indeed a good point, but should wemunicate with King Neptune first?"


    Abona asked suddenly.


    "King Neptune will not have any objections. He understands the stakes involved. As for the next question of whether he will agree to it, Xia Li, I will leave this matter to you.


    And in the short term, there is no need for you to go to the Toru Empire. You can stay on Fish-Man Ind and wait for you to finish the things at hand. When the timees, just notify the people of the Toru Empire toe and greet you. "


    Chang Nuo said, and then slowly looked at his right hand. A blue-ck light suddenly appeared in the center of his palm. Then, he directly ced his palm on Xia Li''s fish tail.


    Touching the fish''s tail itself was a great disrespect to them on Fish-Man Ind, but at the moment, Xiali didn''t mind because he could clearly feel that the other party must have his own purpose in doing so.


    But it was not only the people of the Toru Empire who heard all this, but also Gion, who was currently sent by the navy to supervise them.


    She listened to all the conversations and had a preliminary understanding of why the Tru Empire took a detour to Fish-Man Ind. She didn''t expect that such a group of people came to this ce with their hearts in mind, just for a woman. .


    Although Gion couldn''t understand the kindness and ability of the other party, during the chat, she also got a preliminary understanding that the greatest ability of this woman named Xia Li sitting here is prophecy. She can predict what will happen in the future and make predictions. To 100% uracy.


    In this way, once this woman falls to the side of the Tru Empire, the impact she may have on the navy and the world government is almost self-evident.


    After all, if he only predicts the Utru Empire, then no matter what the Utru Empire does in the future, he will be able to do it before others for who knows how long.


    Even if there is a war between the two sides, the other side can prepare in advance ording to the actual situation. Let''s not talk about whether the current Tru Empire has the ability topete with the navy, but this way of predicting the other side''s actions ispletely possible. It can be said to have the eyes of God.


    Of course, Gion was not the only one to understand the situation this time. The two members of the Whitebeard Pirates also understood it. Although they had known about Xia Li''s prophecy ability before, no one knew about this kind of thing. Attention, now it seems, reveals that the empire has taken all the advantages and has not even given others time to consider.


    Knowing that someone with such ability joins our country, not to mention the generals like Yixiao, even the people in the entire country will probably not put forward any opinions. On the contrary, they are full of confidence in the two races of mermaids and fishmen. feel.


    But it would be great if things went as smoothly as they predicted.


    The banquet was over. Regardless of whether we were full or not, things had be like this. But as the king of Fish-Man Ind, Neptune still needed toe out and express his attitude on this matter.


    In the main hall of Dragon Pce City.


    Now in the entire hall of Novo University, there are several chairs on both sides. Neptune is sitting on it with a bitter look on his face. Although he has tried his best to find out the mastermind behind this incident, the key is to be involved in this incident. Everyone involved in the matter has been prepared in advance.


    Before they could ask any questions, they were all dead.


    Being so smart and targeted, and inviting Chang Nuo to the banquet, not many people knew about the whole process, let alone such careful arrangements in such a short period of time.


    Almost everyone can think of these people in their own hall, but although there are not many people who know about this matter, they are also not very few.

 Chapter 303 Cooperation

    <h4>Chapter 303 Cooperation</h4>


    The atmosphere in the entire hall once again fell into silence. Jinbe stood alone next to Neptune, his face drooping, and he could clearly see a slight frustration and anger from this incident.


    But as a king, Neptune''s endurance is rtivelyrge.


    He walked slowly down. When he was about two or three meters away from Changnuo, Neptune bent down and said apologetically, "I''m really sorry. I didn''t expect this wonderful banquet." It will eventually evolve into this result. All this is because Fish-Man Ind did not deal with it in advance. I hope His Majesty Tru can forgive me!"


    "King Neptune, you don''t need to be so polite. No one from any country can serve this country wholeheartedly. There will always be a group of ck sheep, so why bother?"


    Changnuo said with a slight smile.


    He didn''t even stand up, just looked up at the huge mermaid in front of him.


    "Yeah??"


    Neptune felt rxed after hearing this, but he still asked quickly with some doubts.


    "The Fish-Man Ind is your internal affairs. It is not convenient for us to participate in any way. However, I can remind you of some things. It is time to check the guard troops of your kingdom."


    "Your Majesty Tru means that there is a problem with my kingdom''s garrison?"


    As soon as Changnuo finished speaking, Jinbei hurriedly stepped forward and asked respectfully.


    "Is it possible that our King will still deceive you? You must know that among the current major forces, if any of the other four emperors'' forces stay here and encounter this kind of situation, then what will happen to your Fool''s Ind? I��m afraid there��s no need for us to say more about your current state, right?��


    Yixiao opened his mouth and said.


    Jinbei had no doubts. What they said was indeed correct. But if another big force stayed here, it was self-evident what kind of result they would receive.


    Just thinking about it for a moment, Jinbei''s head started to break out in cold sweat. Then he once again bent down and said to Changnuo, "Thank you for your understanding, Your Majesty Tohru. This time, Fishman Ind will definitely deal with it for you as soon as possible." An answer!��


    "No need. As for your country''s affairs, you can just solve them by yourself. What happened is in the past, but we have agreed before that after the banquet here, you will take me to visit the entire Dragon Pce City. For this reason, I still want to go Take a look."


    Changnuo said with a slight smile.


    "There is absolutely no problem with this. As long as His Majesty Tru is willing to go, we can go anywhere in Dragon Pce City."


    King Neptune said quickly.


    They don''t have the slightest intention of being dissatisfied now. Now that they are encountering this kind of situation, they can still talk about such topics with people like themselves, which proves how broad-minded the other party is.


    Furthermore, Changnuo is the king of the only country in the entire sea world who came to enter the Fish-Man Ind.


    For the royal family of Fish-Man Ind, isn''t this the result they most want to see?


    "By the way, King Neptune, if possible, the South Sea Tru Empire can establish a permanent cooperative rtionship with Fish-Man Ind in the future."


    Chang Nuo dropped a bombshell before the other party couldpletely rx.


    Neptune and Jinbei werepletely shocked and stood there looking at each other. Even the slimy mermaid and Minister Zuo were also full of disbelief.


    This kind of thing ispletely a good thing for Fish-Man Ind, but from another aspect, if this matter is not handled well, it may be another kind of disaster for this ce.


    So King Neptune was not in a hurry to reply. Instead, he turned around and looked sideways at the two captains of the Whitebeard Pirates sitting over there.


    Especially Marco''s expression now, he canpletely represent the current attitude of the Whitebeard Pirates. The other party can say such words directly in front of him. I don''t know whether it is because of fear or other things.


    Marco was just drinking his own wine at this time and didn''t even pay attention to the conversation between them. However, after all, Fish-Man Ind now falls under Whitebeard''s jurisdiction. Even the king Neptune did not dare to do so. Making too big a decision rashly.


    "I will tell Mr. Whitebeard. If you are worried that after the Whitebeard Pirates retreat, it will cause security problems on Fish-Man Ind. By then, the Toru Empire can establish a military base here. All Isn��t the matter solved perfectly?��


    Changnuo also looked at Marco. The other person''s current state was obviously pretending not to know about this kind of thing. He didn''t want to participate, and the key was that he had no idea of ??participating.


    "This!! I wonder if we can be allowed to discuss it?"


    Neptune asked cautiously.


    "This is natural, but what I can tell you in advance is that if we reach a cooperation with the South Sea Empire, then in the future, whether it is a fishman or a mermaid on Fishman Ind, I can go to the sea to see the real sun.


    Moreover, all residents of Fish-Man Ind will be protected by the Tru Empire whenever they go out to sea, but the prerequisite is to stay in the first half of the Grand Line as much as possible. "


    Changnuo spoke slowly, which could be regarded as creating a dream for them. After all, seeing the world above the sea is the lifelong wish of most residents of Fish-Man Ind.


    Although this ce is under the protection of Whitebeard, many pirates or other forces can only proceed secretly in the end. The damage to Fish-Man Ind is not particrly great, but once they leave Fish-Man Ind, they will be greeted by Most of them are dead or missing.


    After all, the price of a fishman is almost equivalent to the price of a devil fruit.


    The terms of this negotiation are not unreasonable, and just this one item canpletely sway King Neptune.


    In fact, the moment the other party proposed cooperation, Neptune could no longer suppress his inner restlessness. He wanted to directly agree, but he could not imagine the consequences of this matter. There was no reply from the Whitebeard Pirates. , Marco sat therepletely ignoring this matter, so that he had no idea what the Whitebeard Pirates'' thoughts were.


    If the two forces do not deal with each other, and the Tru Empire does not realize what it said by then, Fish-Man Ind willpletely fall into darkness.


    Therefore, in a situation where he already has protection, although another protection can bring him a longer-term and more effective way, and the idea proposed by the other party ispletely in line with the current situation of Fish-Man Ind, this matter even as a fish-man Neptune, the king of the ind, also did not dare to make a decision directly.

 Chapter 304 Viewing Dragon Palace City

    <h4>Chapter 304 Viewing Dragon Pce City</h4>


    Chang Nuo said that what he proposed was just a condition, but this condition contained too much content.


    For the residents of Fish-Man Ind who have been under the deep sea for a long time, the temptation of this condition is not unreasonable.


    But Neptune and Chang Nuo had just met for the first time, and the contact time between the two was only about two or three hours, so based on this situation, he did not dare to agree rashly.


    Not to mention whether the Whitebeard Pirates have expressed their opinions, as far as the situation in Ryugu City is concerned, they are looking forward to the future life in their hearts, but they are also full of fear of the sun above the sea.


    "Your Majesty King Tru, Fish-Man Ind is still under the jurisdiction of my father. Is there anything wrong with what you did?"


    King Neptune led Jinbei and Minister Zuo into the main hall. At this time, Marco, who had been silent for a long time, finally opened his mouth to ask.


    "Don''t worry, the old man won''t have any objections. After all, haven''t you said everything? I will exin the situation to him personally after I get to the new world."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    He was very confident in this matter, and even knew that Whitebeard would not care too much about this fish-man ind in the deep sea. If it were not for the kindness in his heart ofpassion, the white beard, a ce of right and wrong, would not Beard didn��t want to get involved at all.


    The main reason why Changnuo knew that Fish-Man Ind was under Whitebeard''s jurisdiction but still wanted to cooperate with the other party was because he saw Fish-Man Ind''s ability to live in the sea. It will y a crucial decision in terms of the military development of the Lu Empire.


    From a military perspective, Marco is the only person other than Whitebeard who can control the Whitebeard Pirates. It is impossible for him to be unaware of this situation.


    But as a pirate group, they do not have the time, energy or ability to use Fish-Man Ind to do anything. On the contrary, the situation of the Tru Empire ispletely different.


    "Can I know why the Tru Empire did this? Or what is your purpose in cooperating with Fish-Man Ind?"


    Gion continued the topic and asked.


    "As a navy, you should not get involved in the affairs of the Tru Empire. Another point worth reminding is that you are just a person sent by the navy to follow us, and you are not here to tell us what to do."


    As soon as Gion asked a question, Abona responded coldly.


    "Regarding the situation and n of Fishman Ind, during the next sailing time, Moshank, you have drawn up a n. The specific situation can bemunicated and coordinated with Junhe."


    Changnuo said.


    "You haven''t discussed this matter with dad yet. Isn''t it inappropriate to say this?"


    Qiaozi, a naive guy, also cast a look of disdain and asked helplessly in his tone.


    "Your Majesty the King, should we go back and discuss this matter carefully?"


    Yixiao asked.


    "It should be discussed carefully, but we don''t have much time left for us now. We can only leave the conditions here, and the remaining decisive issues can only be dealt with by King Neptune himself. ." Chang Nuo said.


    "I understand."


    Fishman Ind can be said to be a very secret and necessary ce in the current world. Geographically speaking, it is just below the Red Earth Continent, connecting the New World and the first half of the Great Line. the core ce.


    At the same time, it has 10,000-meter-deep seawater as a natural barrier. Unlike the empty ind, they have absolute self-protection conditions on the seabed.


    We can even put it another way, after the fishmen on Fishman Ind undergorge-scale training and be an army, theirbat effectiveness will not be inferior to that of any country''s army in the world.


    In the main hall, it fell into a quiet atmosphere again after a while. Everyone had their own concerns, and everyone was waiting for the answer that Fish-Man Ind could give.


    Nearly half an hourter, King Neptune and Jinbe finally came out. As king, Neptune did not step forward to answer the conditions that Chang Nuo had just proposed. Instead, Jinbe came over.


    He tidied up his clothes, stood not far away from Chang Nuo with some respect, and said, "His Majesty King Tru, after we had a discussion just now, we feel that there is no way to agree to His Majesty Tru''s request for the time being, but our King His Majesty feels that His Majesty Toru or the Toru Empire in the South China Sea will be Fish-Man Ind��s best ally at any time.��


    "oh??"


    Chang Nuo raised his head and smiled slightly, as if he was not too surprised by the other party''s reaction. After weighing the pros and cons, they still chose the former. I guess Marco had already thought of this, so he didn''t think much about this topic. Go ahead and say any other objections.


    "Now that it''s been decided, let''s do it. Just pretend that I haven''t mentioned it before. However, I''m also interested in Dragon Pce City next. I need you to take me for a walk next."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile, but the expressions of Mo Sanke and Abona next to him were not as good as expected.


    Enelu still maintains that mentality so far. Anyway, he doesn''t know much about the things involved. He can do whatever His Majesty the King of this family tells him to do.


    It is estimated that the only person who could understand what was going on was a smile. He did not say a word or show any expression during the whole process.


    However, as everyone has been following Chang Nuo for such a long time, they already know a little bit about His Majesty the King. He would not ask to see a ce like Dragon Pce City, even in a luxurious building. It may arouse the other person''s curiosity so much.


    So for everyone, there may be a ce that they don''t know about.


    The topic Jinbe just mentioned made him a little scared. He was afraid that the other party, King Tohru, would suddenly have some bad emotions. However, after he said these words, the other party''s behavior was almostpletely different from what he thought. .


    Not to mention that Jinbei was a little confused, even Marco and the others were also very confused. After all, they were stillmunicating about the future ns of Fish-Man Ind just now, and now they just ignored it so readily. This kind of The huge reversal made them feel quite helpless.

 Chapter 305 Mermaid Princess

    <h4>Chapter 305 Mermaid Princess</h4>


    Although they were all a little surprised, Jinbei still remained calm. His face changed from slightly frightened to a smile in an instant and said, "Since His Majesty King Tohru has this heart, Jinbei should guide him."


    Although Dragon Pce City looks huge on the surface, it only has a few ces. Most of the ces are almost in the sea, just like the banquet hall.


    If you want to get there, it��s almost impossible to see this scene without taking a Flounder ride.


    But there are still many ces in Ryugu Castle that are within the bubble. As long as you are willing to go there, you can reach them directly without any problem.


    Even though Dragon Pce City is such a big ce, there is only one ce Chang Nuo wants to go to.


    This time it was not just Jinbe who took the lead, but Neptune, the king of Fishman Ind, also followed, introducing every ce in detail, even the king''s treasure house was directly disyed in front of everyone.


    Although they oftene to Fish-Man Ind, Marco and the others have never visited Dragon Pce City. They have already seen it anyway, and it doesn''t matter if a few more people visit.


    Along the way, Dragon Pce City looked like this, nothing special, but until we reached the end, it was apletely different area.


    A building with a height of almost fifty meters has an oval shape on the top, and the overall outside building is also cylindrical. The height of the door alone is almost 10 meters high.


    But this ce feels different to everyone, because there are now almost a dozen weapons of various kinds iid on his door, and even the scars left on the wall are clearly visible.


    "Emperor Tru, this ce is called the Hard Shell Tower, and it is where my daughter lives!"


    Neptune said, but the negative and depressed feeling in his words could still be clearly disyed.


    "But why are there so many axes on it? And what are these scars?"


    Enelu asked curiously.


    "This kind of thing needs to start from a few years ago. Princess White Star has not left this room for several years since she entered it. There is a guy named Daken on Fish-Man Ind. I don''t know where he came from. After obtaining a Devil Fruit, whatever he throws at will can fly towards the person he touches, no matter where they are.


    It is for this reason that there are so many scars here. "


    Jinbe said.


    "How can there be such a person? It''s really too much!"


    Gion stood behind and muttered quietly.


    "I wonder if I can meet the mermaid princess you talk about?"


    Changnuo asked, looking at King Neptune with a smile.


    "this����!!"


    Neptune was obviously not happy. He looked at the scars on the wall, fearing that something simr would happen againter.


    "Are you worried that the mermaid princess will be injured when so many of us are present?"


    Abona asked suddenly.


    Jinbei also nced at the other party, and then nodded to His Majesty the King.


    That is to say, as others said, so many powerful people are staying here, no matter how bad it is, it is impossible for a mermaid princess to be injured. Once this situation spreads, how will the Toru Empire go? Do?


    As the huge door slowly opened, the scene inside the entire room began to gradually appear.


    This huge room does look very high, and the interior space is also quite huge, but it is just a ce with only a bed in the middle and nothing else.


    But after the door was fully opened, a little girl hiding behind the bed slightly raised her head and looked outside. At this moment, she waspletely disyed in front of everyone.


    Her fair and pink face looks like she is only eleven or twelve years old.


    "Father..."


    When the little girl in the room saw the door open, the first thing she saw was King Neptune, and she immediately got ready to fly out with joy.


    But the Fool moved rtively fast in the water. In this situation without water, he could only stagger over slowly like a child.


    At such a young age, Shirahoshi has alreadypletely inherited the height of a man as big as Neptune. Even now, the opponent has reached a height of at least 5 meters.


    In fact, such a big body and cuteness are already a little bit different, but in terms of appearance, Shirahoshi does look pink and cute.


    "Baixing, father is here to see you."


    Neptune''s face was full of kindness at the moment, and he walked inside with a smile on his face.


    "Princess Shirahoshi!"


    As soon as Jinbe walked in the door, he bowed respectfully and shouted respectfully.


    It was also the first time for Marco and the others to see the mermaid princess, but their impressions were almost the same.


    That''s how such a small girl grew to such a big size. Although she looks very cute,pared to the other mermaids on Fool''s Ind, this little girl seems a bit out of ce.


    "They met..."


    "Yes, they finally meet!"


    "We met..."


    "I''m already looking forward to it."


    ��


    In the hard-shell tower, the moment Chang Nuo first saw Bai Xing, the Neptunes in the sea began tomunicate with each other one by one, and some of them started to get excited.


    Themunication between them may be very simple, but no one can hear it at this moment.


    In the hard-shell tower at this moment, Bai Xing had just greeted his father Neptune cordially, and then looked at the group of people standing at the door. For a man who had been staying in this room almost since he was five or six years old, For the little girl among them, she seemed a little afraid of these strangers at this moment.


    "Father, Boss Jinbei, who are these people?"


    Bai Xing asked in a low voice with some curiosity.


    She didn''t dare to speak too loudly, for fear of disturbing the people standing at the door.


    Hearing what his daughter said, Neptune also nced at the door, and then said with a slight smile, "These are the people of the Tru Empire in front of me, especially the one in the front is Emperor Tru, who is currently above the entire sea." One of the most powerful forces."


    "What about the old man with the white beard?"


    "Can''t be so rude!"


    As soon as Shirahoshi said these words, Neptune frowned slightly and scolded him with a smile.


    After all, there are two squad captains of Whitebeard standing here at the moment. If the news spreads, it will not be a good situation for them on Fish-Man Ind.

 Chapter 306 The sense of familiarity between strangers

    <h4>Chapter 306 The sense of familiarity between strangers</h4>


    But even if the two people heard it, it didn''t seem to matter. After all, they were standing at the door at the moment. They all listened to what Bai Xing said, but no one would reallye out to argue with the child.


    Although the mermaid Shirahoshi is a bit huge physically, after all, he is just a child in age. No matter which direction you look at it, what he shows is nothing but weakness and cuteness.


    "Does it feel familiar?"


    Chang Nuo said, and then started walking inside.


    Because he found that Bai Xing''s eyes were always on him from the moment Neptune introduced him, and the emotions revealed in his eyes were notpletely unfamiliar.


    The reason why Chang Nuo said this was because he had already felt the other person''s thoughts through his mind fruit ability.


    Neptune looked confused. It was clear that his daughter almost never went out when she stayed here. Why would King Tru say such a thing?


    But what surprised them even more was that Bai Xing did not refute what Chang Nuo said, but instead nodded seriously.


    "What''s happening here?"


    Enelu stood behind and asked in a low voice to Moshank who was standing next to him.


    "Don''t ask me, I''m still wondering!"


    Moshank''s expression was almost the same as that of the others, and none of them showed surprise.


    "His Majesty King Tru, on your side...?"


    Neptune wanted to ask something, but the key was that the words were on his lips but he didn''t know how to ask. He could only pause in mid-sentence, and then looked at Chang Nuo with doubts.


    "Can I have a few words with you alone?"


    Chang Nuo walked up to Bai Xing and faced the other person''s huge height. He stood below and didn''t even reach his waist.


    But just like that, he looked up at Bai Xing and asked.


    The little girl did not respond immediately. Instead, she looked directly at Neptune, trying to get an answer from him.


    But as the king of Fish-Man Ind, Neptune is nowpletely confused. He can''t give any better reply at all. His eyes are full of doubts, and he can''t figure out what the Tru Empire wants to do.


    "Your Majesty the King, I think we can let them chat for a while first!"


    Jinbei said seriously.


    Although he didn''t understand the Tru Emperor in front of him, he believed that such a huge force would not be able to do anything to a mermaid princess on Fish-Man Ind.


    Anyway, the moment he got the affirmative answer, Chang Nuo immediately emitted a faint blue light, which just wrapped him and Bai Xing together, making it impossible for outsiders to hear anything they said.


    People outside were watching nervously, but they could only see the two people opening their mouths, and more importantly, the smile on the lips of the little girl Bai Xing, but no one could hear what they were talking about. , even if they use the Haki of Knowledge, their perception range ispletely nk.


    Only ten minutes passed, and the two of them returned to their normal state. However, there was nothing abnormal in the words theymunicated during this period.


    After Chang Nuo was released from the space constraints, he still smiled and said to Bai Xing, "In the future, maybe when you have an idea and want to take a look at the sun outside, you can call me through the thing I gave you, and I wille to take you in person. How was your outing?"


    "I really want to go, but there is a very dangerous guy outside. I really want to see my mother, but all this..."


    "Don''t worry, that guy is dead, and there won''t be another threat to you in this world!"


    Changnuo''s voice was very soft and calm, and he spoke slowly and directly.


    After all, when he was in the sea before, Changnuo had used his space ability to instantly dismember a ship, and the person on top was Vanda Deken who had the target fruit.


    Although it was just an idental encounter, the two main purposes ofing to Fish-Man Ind this time were to directly help one of them solve the trouble.


    Although the location of Fishman Ind is very good, it is definitely not what Chang Nuo wants. Compared with Sky Ind, Chang Nuo may even prefer thetter.


    "Your Majesty King Tru, can what you say be true?"


    Jinbe asked doubtfully.


    "I think it should be the ship that His Majesty the King directly obliterated when he was at a depth of about 7km under the sea, right?"


    Yixiao recalled what they had seen and heard at that time. It was only when His Majesty the King mentioned it just now that he thought of a ship that had been solved not long ago.


    Because after that, none of them had seen His Majesty the King take action, let alone help the little mermaid princess solve the trouble. The only thing they could think of was the time before entering the bottom of the sea.


    "So you''re talking about the ghost ship! There seems to be a guy with four arms on it!"


    Enel said.


    The natural Thunder Fruit spreads much faster in seawater than onnd. So from another aspect, for this guy who has had the domineering power of seeing and hearing since birth, his perception may be better when he is on the seabed than when he is onnd. It''s even clearer onnd.


    "That''s him, Vanda Deken. I didn''t expect that he had been dealt with by His Majesty King Tru."


    Jinbei said with some gratitude.


    "Really???"


    King Neptune was still a little unbelievable. Why did the other party juste to Fish-Man Ind and help him solve such a big trouble? Whether this was intentional or unintentional, the rest needed to be understood too much.


    "Perhaps it''s also because of the fate between Bai Xing and I. We happened to meet each other on the way here, so we solved it directly. "


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Then can I go out?"


    Xiao Baixing asked still a little timidly.


    "Of course you can go out. From now on, you can go wherever you want to go and see the world you want to see. No one can stop you anymore!"


    Changnuo said.


    "But I really want to see my mother. ording to what you said, I can go directly."


    "should be!"


    Listening to what Little White Star said, Chang Nuo nodded and said, King Neptune is still in disbelief. He doesn''t understand why Vanda Deken, who has always been afraid of Fish-Man Ind, was so easily solved by the other party?


    "In that case, I really appreciate His Majesty King Tohru, otherwise Shirahoshi wouldn''t know how long he would have to stay here."


    King Neptune bent down and said thanks.

 Chapter 307 Leaving Fish-Man Island

    <h4>Chapter 307 Leaving Fish-Man Ind</h4>


    Chang Nuo looked at the other party quietly and did not reply. At the same time, he raised his head again and looked at Bai Xing standing there, and a smile suddenly appeared at the corner of his mouth.


    The n toe to Fish-Man Ind this time has beenpleted perfectly. Not only has he obtained Xia Li, who has the ability to predict, but more importantly, he can gain a good impression in front of the future Sea King.


    However, Chang Nuo was a little confused as to whether Bai Xing was the King of the Sea or not.


    After all, through conversation and other methods, the possibility of Shirahoshi being Neptune is not as great as imagined.


    But it doesn''t matter now. Everyone has been on Fish-Man Ind for such a long time and has done almost everything they need to do. Now it''s time to leave.


    After staying for nearly two hours again, Fishman Ind now has no idea of ????cooperating with the Tru Empire. Although Changnuo didn''t mind this matter, he also knew that this time period was not a good opportunity.


    When major changes ur in the world of pirates, Changnuo has every reason to believe that by then he may not need to mention this matter again. Fool''s Ind will naturally consider the issue of his own safety in the future.


    You can only rely on time to see everything again. What should happen will always happen.


    It''s just that this time the person who poisoned him at the banquet still didn''t give a result in the end, but as Chang Nuo, who knew the development of this matter, he could only smile slightly at this situation, even though he knew what was going on behind the scenes. Who did it, but there was no need for him to point out at this time.


    The excitement of the future can only be put in the future. It doesn''t make much sense to solve everything now.


    On the main street of Fish-Man Ind, of course, it can also be said that it is on the passage leading to the outside. There are not many fish-men or mermaids that can be seen here, except for King Neptune, Jinbe and Shirahoshi who are seeing each other off. Apart from the princess, the only other people sent off were a group of soldiers from Fish-Man Ind.


    They were sent to the outside. Neptune kept saying words of thanks along the way, but Bai Xing seemed to have known each other for a long time, and stayed by Chang Nuo''s side like a sister.


    Of course, one was walking on the ground and the other was walking in the water, and they were chatting happily.


    "I really want to go out with you and see what the world on the sea is like?"


    Bai Xing stayed in the water, leaned out half of his body, and said reluctantly to Chang Nuo who was about to leave.


    However, Neptune was watching from the sidelines. He looked nervous now, fearing that his daughter would be abducted by the other party if he was not carefulter.


    Changnuo naturally knows what Neptune is thinking now, but now everyone has been sent to the outermost edge, and if he goes further, he can reach his ship.


    Others had already boarded the ship and had been waiting there for quite some time.


    "Perhaps there will be a chance in the future. I can promise you that after three years, I will take you to the sea and see the outside world for yourself!"


    Changnuo said.


    "His Majesty King Tru, I don''t know if the two of us can go to the New World with you. I''ll just go to visit my father and then get off the ship."


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Marco, who was standing behind him, stepped forward and said embarrassedly.


    "Hey, hey! Why did you say it so casually? Now take our boat and go up together. But how did you two get here? "


    Enelu suddenly asked with some dissatisfaction.


    "Haha~, there are only two of us staying here. The others have already started to set off. I was originally thinking of taking a pirate ship and going aboard together, but now I have met you. Isn''t it okay to just drop by and go together? "


    Marco said with augh.


    "King Neptune, I am going to the New World next, and I just happen to apany them there. Since there is no problem with the safety of Fool''s Ind now, and Princess White Star has also walked out of the Hard Shell Tower, I have been waiting to leave for a while. .��


    Jinbe said the same to Neptune.


    "What? Jinbei, are you leaving too?"


    Neptune suddenly asked in confusion.


    "There are some things that need to be dealt with in the new world. I will tell you the details when Ie back."


    Jinbei said respectfully.


    "Okay then~"


    Neptune did not say anything else to persuade him to stay. Jinbei was now the captain of the Shichibukai and the Sun Pirates. What happened to him was indeed not something Neptune could understand.


    But at the moment when everyone was about to leave, Chang Nuo quietly handed Princess Bai Xing something simr to a bracelet. This thing was simr to iron, but it was surrounded by a circle of iron, and the top It is filled with many carving patterns, but its interior is bright red, and at the same time it is always emitting a faint red light.


    "What is this?"


    Bai Xing asked curiously.


    "Remember, you are not allowed to take it off under any circumstances. This thing will activate its self-defense mechanism the moment your life is threatened."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Bai Xing was now in the water, and his exposed height was almost exactly the same as Chang Nuo''s, so Chang Nuo looked at him calmly.


    But how can the other person understand so many things? He is just a child. Even if he understands a little more than others, she is still a child.


    Just because Bai Xing can''t understand many things doesn''t mean that others can''t understand it either.


    The importance of a thing that can automatically activate a defense mechanism when it is in danger is self-evident. Although it is not known to what extent it can defend against attacks, the fact that such a thing can appear in this world is already considered a miracle. So precious.


    However, this thing is also not from this world. Changnuo just thought of such a thing and redeemed it from the system space.


    His defense ability can almost prevent the four emperors from getting close to this little girl, and the defense time is enough for Changnuo to rush to Shirahoshi''s side.


    A group of people were chatting with each other, but the moment Chang Nuo gave out the gift, everyone''s eyes were still attracted by this thing.


    "Don''t worry, brother Changnuo, you gave me this thing. I will never take it down no matter what the circumstances are."


    "That''s good. I have to leave first. When you think about what I said, just speak directly to this bracelet. I can hear you."


    Chang Nuo said, then smiled at Bai Xing.


    "Are we going to leave like this? We obviously just chatted for a short time, so we can''t stay for a few more days?"


    Bai Xing''s tears welled up in his eyes, and he asked with a rather reluctant look.


    "Just think that I''m sorry this time. I can''t stay too much time. I will pick you up and take you to the South China Sea. Then we can have a good chat."


    Chang Nuo said, then took a step back and started to turn around and walk towards the Infinity.

 Chapter 308 Declaration of War on the Navy

    <h4>Chapter 308 Deration of War on the Navy</h4>


    The moment he started to set off, Shirahoshi''s tears also fell when the other party turned around. Marco, Jinbe and the others also followed behind the other party immediately, heading towards the luxurious-looking cruise ship. Go up.


    "He wille back. From now on, can''t we just stay here and wait?"


    Neptune stepped forward and said to Bai Xing, who was still in the water and looking eagerly in the direction of the Infinity.


    "Well~, he wille!"


    Bai Xing said seriously.


    Neptune could only stay and watch until the Infinity began to slowly move out, and then when it opened the defensive barrier, it broke through the protective bubble of Fish-Man Ind at a very fast speed.


    As of now, the trip to Fish-Man Ind ispletely over. They have not visited too many ces, and they have only visited two ces that they targeted.


    After all, this ce is not particrly big. Although the poption living there is rtivelyrge, it is more because the ce where they live is too crowded.


    Onboard the Infinity.


    The moment Marco and the three of them came up, their expressions were almost the same as those of many people who came to the ship for the first time. That was how far the Tru Empire had developed to be able to build such a high-end cruise ship.


    But this kind of surprise is not reflected on his face, it is just as he puts it in his heart and takes a good look at the ship.


    "Your Majesty, please eat some fruit here!"


    Gogoya walked up to Changnuo, who was sitting there admiring the beautiful scenery of the deep sea, then elegantly ced a fruit te next to his seat, and said elegantly with a smile.


    When he put this thing down, Gogoya left consciously.


    Because the only people sitting on this deck are those from the Tohru Empire, and the two members of the Whitebeard Pirates, including Jinbei, are all staying in the cabin to admire it.


    "Your Majesty the King, there seems to be something we don''t know about during this trip to Fish-Man Ind, right?"


    Yixiao opened his mouth and asked.


    "That''s right, I also think that Your Majesty, your visit should not only be for Mrs. Charlie?" Moshank also said.


    They had all had doubts about this from the beginning, but they were always embarrassed to ask when outsiders were present on Fish-Man Ind.


    "You know what you should know. Even if you inform the navy directly, there is no problem. It''s just that there are some things you shouldn''t know. I hope you can stay in it honestly. If you know everything at that moment, you What do you think will happen to you?"


    Chang Nuo did not answer the questions from the people on his side. Instead, he calmly looked towards the direction of the room.


    "This woman! It''s really troublesome to follow us!"


    Arbonne said.


    "What''s the trouble with me? I was originally sent by the Navy to monitor you, and I got your consent for this. Now what are you saying that I can''t hear?"


    The moment Abona finished speaking, Gion walked directly out of that shadowynd, and then looked at Changnuo with an unconvinced face and asked.


    Until now, Gion has never remembered those reminders about Lieutenant General Tsuru, and even still looks a little superior.


    This is actually not in line with her character.


    "Take out the phone bug in your hand andmunicate directly to Warring States!"


    Changnuo said calmly.


    "what do you want to do?"


    "Just get through and I''ll tell him the rest."


    "No, Marshal Sengoku has already given the order, not tomunicate without a specific time." Gion said.


    "ignorance!!"


    Abona was a little angry and took a phone bug with a crown directly from his hand, then handed it to Changnuo and said again, "Your Majesty the King, this canmunicate directly to the Navy Headquarters."


    As a first-level member country of the World Government, the Tru Empire naturally has the right tomunicate directly with the Navy Headquarters, but they have never used it.


    But this time, what Gion said and did was indeed a bit excessive. In any case, he was just on the ship alone. If it weren''t for the support of the navy behind him, he might have died countless times by this time. .


    "Porluporluporlu~"


    ��


    As the phone bug started calling, Gion''s expression on the side did not look so natural. She did not expect that the other party actuallymunicated directly to the Navy Headquarters about this matter.


    She didn''t even think about what she had done wrong this time?


    "Wow~"


    A clear voice, the phone bugmunicated directly, and a voice came directly from the other side and asked, "Navy Headquarters, who is on the other side?"


    "King of the Tohru Empire, let Admiral Sengoku get through!"


    Chang Nuo said in a calm voice.


    "Marshal Warring States doesn''t have time now. They are holding a meeting. If you need tomunicate with Marshal Warring States, you can call backter."


    With that said, the other party began to prepare to hang up thismunication, but Chang Nuo would never give him such an opportunity.


    Even though they were thousands of miles away, Changnuo instantly became cold and said, "If you don''t want the Toru Empire to go to war with the navy, and you can''t hear the voice of the Warring States within 30 seconds, then in the next three months, the whole sea will be in chaos. stand up!"


    "You actually dare to threaten the Navy Headquarters. I really don''t know where you got the courage?"


    After the other party finished speaking sarcastically, he still hung up the contact without any hesitation.


    However, at the moment of the Endless Number, as the phone bugmunication ended, a monstrous momentum instantly rose. Changnuo was on the verge of anger, and his eyes instantly turned sky blue. All the people within 1km of the deep sea were The creatures all rolled their eyes collectively at the next moment.


    Although there was no impact on the ship, at this moment everyone could see the anger in the heart of His Majesty the King.


    Even with a smile, he didn''t know what words he should use to suppress the emotions of His Majesty the King at this moment.


    "Junhe,municate with the empire, summon TH battleships, and notify the World Economic News, announcing that the Trudeau Empire will not ept any naval jurisdiction from today on, and no naval forces are allowed to station in the entire South China Sea.


    And solemnly dered to the navy that war would begin! "


    Especially thest two words, Chang Nuo almost couldn''t suppress the anger in his heart and roared.


    At this moment, no one dared to refuse. Junhe stood up directly and solemnly replied, "Yes!" with the courtesy of a general.


    "What exactly do you want to do? Is it possible that you want to see the now peaceful sea fall into a state of war again because of your anger?"


    Gion is already a little scared. He can feel that the other party is not joking at all. Everyone knows that once there is any conflict between the Toru Empire and the navy, the next new world willpletely break away from the shackles of the navy. Thewless era It wille again.

 Chapter 309 The turbulent navy conference room

    <h4>Chapter 309 The turbulent navy conference room</h4>


    The movement on the deck immediately attracted Marco and others who were staying in the cabin.


    Everyone gathered on the deck as soon as the incident happened, but when they saw the atmosphere at the scene, the group of people all fell into a daze,pletely unaware of what happened. The king of the country is in such a state.


    This is the Navy Headquarters.


    The guy who had just hung up the call with Chang Nuo still kept a look of disdain on his face and continued to y with his toys in his hands.


    "Who called just now?"


    At this time, a marine who was not far away, wearing a robe of justice, came over and asked curiously.


    "It turns out to be Colonel Pemo. Just now it was a guy who imed to be the king of the Tru Empire. He insisted on letting Marshal Warring Statese over tomunicate. He also said that if he didn''tmunicate with him within thirty seconds, he would directly dere war with the navy. I didn''t know this guy. Where does the confidencee from?��


    The naval soldier was still speaking in a mocking manner, but the next second, the colonel named Pemo punched him directly in the face, and then roared with some anger and shouted, "You bastard, just Wait for the sanctions!��


    With that said, Peimo could no longer care about anything else and hurriedly ran towards the Navy Headquarters conference room as quickly as possible.


    In the conference room at this moment, Marshal Sengoku is sitting at the head and starting to discuss other things, and almost all the vice admirals and admirals of the Navy Headquarters are here, all discussing the New World and the pirates on the Grand Line. situation.


    But at the moment before they started talking, the door of the conference room was instantly knocked open, and even a door fell directly to the ground.


    Faced with this sudden situation, everyone stopped talking. No one showed anger at this moment, and looked at Pemo who ran in from the direction of the door with a surprised look on his face.


    "Colonel Pemo, if you can''t give a reasonable exnation this time, then you will be punished!"


    Akainu was standing, probably reporting something or something. Faced with the sudden interruption, he shouted angrily in a rather low tone.


    "Warring States~ Marshal Warring States, something big has happened. Emperor Tru of the South China Seamunicated directly to the Navy Headquarters for some unknown reason, but was ridiculed by the operator. Now the other party has threatened that if you don''tmunicate and reply within 30 seconds, , then we will wait for the Tru Empire to dere war directly with the Navy!"


    Pemo spoke breathlessly. He knew how urgent the matter was from the moment he opened the door. But when these words were spoken, everyone in the conference room stopped breathing,pletely unable to believe what they heard.


    "What happened?"


    Sengoku asked with a serious expression.


    "I''m very sorry, Marshal Warring States, I don''t know about this." Pemo said.


    "It seems that there must be something wrong with Taotu, please contact me quickly!"


    Lieutenant General He was the first to be anxious. He stood up suddenly and stared at Warring States angrily.


    "The Tohru Empire has such a strong tone. How dare you challenge the navy with this little strength now?" Akainu said disdainfully.


    "Shut up. The most important thing now is to figure out what happened. Why did the Tru Empire make such a statement? Once the war starts, not only will the authority of the navy be seriously affected, but more importantly, the stability of the new world. Once a war breaks out over the Four Seas, the New World will bepletely out of control."


    Sengoku also looked at Akainu with some anger and said.


    "What are you still doing? Hurry up and get through to King Tru and ask what happened?"


    Garp also said sternly.


    What happened this timepletely disrupted the rhythm of this meeting. Although they have controlled most of the situation in the Tru Empire, this time it ispletely different. They can tantly dere war directly. They just know that the navy will not be able to do so at this moment. Dare to prepare for war blindly and directly.


    The New World needs stability. None of the four emperors are good at it. Nowadays, most of the navy''s forces are too scattered. Once arge group of forces starts to dere war, the entire world will be in turmoil.


    Warring States was also quite helpless, and then other operators hurriedly connected the phone, and under the witness of so many people, began to call Changnuo.


    The original meeting had to be interrupted because of this. Now on this sea, although most of everything is still decided by the world government, the world today has indeed been divided into several parts. Even though the Tru Empire''s current strength and The navy is still far behind, but if problems arise in the current situation, the status of the world government may also be seriously shaken.


    The Navy is even more worried. After all, judging from some of the situations reported by Gion, it seems that the Tru Empire has already been in contact with Whitebeard, and some unknown rtionship has been established between the two huge forces. Cooperation.


    It is precisely because of this that Marshal Warring States had to pay attention to what the other party said.


    Being able to directly propose a decision to go to war is enough to prove the seriousness of the situation this time.


    As the phone call started, everyone stood up and watched nervously, and even some of the weaker ones did not dare to take a breath.


    From the time Chang Nuo showed this attitude to the present, there have not been 30 seconds from beginning to end. Just when the time was approaching, and even Yu Junhe had begun to prepare to notify the Tru Empire, the phone bug originally wearing the crown, At this moment, it started to ring.


    "Your Majesty the King, this is a call from the Navy Headquarters!"


    On the Infinity, Abona said in a low voice.


    Gion could only stand aside and watch. Seeing that the other party suddenly showed such a serious attitude, she immediately didn''t know how to tell what happened next. She didn''t even think aboutmunicating with the Navy Headquarters again. Don''t dare.


    Because from the moment Changno burst into anger, Gion finally understood what the purpose of the Navy Headquarters asking him toe over. It was not the so-called supervision of the other party''s actions, but to report the other party''s whereabouts to the Navy Headquarters at any time. That''s it.


    "Connected, I would like to see what Seng Guo wants to say at this moment?"


    Chang Nuo said in a still cold voice.


    At this time, even Enilu, who had always been naughty, also showed anger on his face at this time. The big event that was originally nned to be discussed, but because of the appearance of such a woman, everyone''smunication was directly interrupted.

 Chapter 310 Personal communication between the Navy and the Warring States Period

    <h4>Chapter 310 Personalmunication between the Navy and the Warring States Period</h4>


    Abona did not refuse and rang the phone with the crown.


    At the moment the call was connected, no one opened their mouths to speak, and they all remained quiet.


    The same was true on the other side. The two sides were in a stalemate for about 30 seconds before the other side''s voice began to be heard from the phone worm and said, "I am Marine Sengoku. Is the other side King Tohru?"


    "His Majesty����"


    Abona shouted, then took a step back respectfully, keeping no one within 1m of the phone bug from touching it.


    Chang Nuo walked forward slowly, a devilish smile suddenly appeared on his lips. Instead of being angry just now, he said calmly, "I thought your navy was so powerful that you couldn''t even make a phone call?"


    "Don''t get me wrong, I will definitely give you an exnation about this matterter. Now can you tell me why you asked me tomunicate with you?"


    The voice of the Warring States Marshal on the opposite side came over and said.


    "Oh? You want to get down to business so soon? But before talking about this matter, can you tell me who your Lieutenant General Peach Rabbit came with and what is the purpose?


    Exploring the military secrets of the Tru Empire? Or do you want to do something shady? If you don''t mind, we can help you train it! "


    Changnuo said.


    "I wonder what happened?"


    "You dare to say that you don''t know? I won''t tell you how many messages he has conveyed to you along the way. But is it possible that staying on this ship and not obeying the rules is the style of your navy? If you insist on doing this next time If so, then it will be revealed that the empire will not mind causing chaos in the entire sea!"


    Saying this, Chang Nuo unknowingly began to enter a state of anger again. The navy''s behavior is disgusting no matter how you look at it.


    It''s a pity that such a beautiful woman like Gion, who didn''t know what kind of ecstasy was given to her by the Navy people, was willing to take such a big risk to do such a thing.


    "This guy dares to threaten our navy now! I really don''t know where the confidencees from?"


    In the naval conference room, Sakaski''s voice spoke directly and without hesitation, and Chang Nuo who was standing opposite could naturally hear such words.


    Even other people heard it clearly. He always wanted to smile steadily. At this moment, he finally couldn''t hold back his body sitting there. Then he stood up suddenly and said in a cold voice, "So, since the navy does not believe in the Tru Empire With this strength, if Jun and General still do what His Majesty just ordered, we, the Tru Empire, will be reminded of the war that belongs to the sea!"


    "Yes~"


    Junhe shouted in response seriously.


    At this moment, it was the call from those on the opposite side who were once again surprised. Without warning, they began to directly want to start a war. Regardless of their strength, this situation was indeed enough to give the Warring States Marshal on the opposite side a headache.


    "King Tru, is it possible that you really n to do this?"


    The voice of the Warring States Marshal came over and said.


    "All this depends on your attitude. Don''t always make yourself superior. There are many people in this world who are dissatisfied with the navy. I would like to know how many people there will be after the war between the Tru Empire and the navy begins. All forces besieged the navy at the same time?"


    Chang Nuo frowned and his words were very cold, as if the matter was settled directly.


    "Oh~, tell me, what do you want?"


    The atmosphere in the conference room at the Navy Headquarters once again dropped to freezing point. Although Sakaski clenched his fists in anger, he had already realized from what he just said that the Tru Empire was not joking.


    Everyone knows what the current situation on the sea is like, and no one dares to say what will happen.


    So no one in the entire conference room dared to open their mouths at this moment, because they still don''t know what the specific situation is? What exactly caused these senior leaders of the Tru Empire to make such remarks.


    "I don''t want to ask for anything, I just want to tell you that there are some things that your navy should not touch my bottom line, otherwise the Tru Empire really doesn''t mind starting a world war."


    Chang Nuo said, and then hung up the phone.


    The atmosphere on the ship and the atmosphere in the conference room fell into a state of silence, especially in the conference room of the Navy Headquarters. Almost all the people stared at each other and dared not open their mouths.


    "What do you think about this matter?"


    Warring States stood there with his two fists clenched and pressed directly on the rectangr table in the conference room. He raised his head and looked at everyone, exuding unparalleled domineering power.


    But those people standing behind were almost staring at each other with big eyes and small eyes. Even Lieutenant General He didn''t speak at this moment, but at this time Sakaski turned to look at Warring States and said, "I think it should be It��s something that happened on Fish-Man Ind, and ording to the characters of the people in the Tru Empire, it��s definitely not because of Lieutenant General Peach Rabbit.��


    "Fishman Ind?" Capton suddenly asked.


    "Akainu is right this time. King Tohru must havee to warn us because of the problem of Fish-Man Ind. It seems that we need to seize the time to investigate this Xia Li. What is the identity of the other party? How can Tou let Tohru The Empire is willing to start a war to divert our attention."


    Sengoku also shouted seriously.


    In this conference room, there are almost all senior leaders of the entire navy headquarters. Everyone who can sit in this position is not only outstanding in terms of strength, but of course everyone is not a fool.


    Some topics only require a little digging for everyone to understand. Chang Nuo is indeed smart enough, and the key is that people in high positions like them also understand.


    This meeting itself was held to study the situation of Tru Empire''s trip to Fishman Ind. From beginning to end, they mentioned several key names, the most important of which was Xia Li.


    Just an ordinary resident of Fish-Man Ind can actually allow the most powerful force in the world to travel thousands of miles to bypass Fish-Man Ind. There is definitely something hidden in this that they don''t know about.


    Although Gion has reported the detailed process and even told the story of Xia Li, a woman who can understand the problem of prediction.


    Facing them in the middle of the meeting, the Toru Empire suddenly used the Gion issue as a warning and threat.


    However, ording to the mind of Marshal Warring States, a wise general, he was able to quickly separate out the most important point from these things. At the same time, he also understood that what the empire said was nothing more than a warning to them, so that they should not stretch their hands too far. .


    But this is something that no one expected. What is the charm of this Xiali that can make the Tru Empire have such an attitude?

 Chapter 311 The Purpose of Emperor Tru

    <h4>Chapter 311 The Purpose of Emperor Tru</h4>


    Onboard the Infinity.


    The reason why Changnuo was angry was actually to use Gion as a topic to warn the navy. He knew that this kind of thing must have been reported to them, so the only way to make them feel better was in this way.


    But only one of the people who could guess what was on His Majesty''s mind smiled, and the others were confused. They really thought it was all because of the woman sent here by the navy.


    As a lieutenant general in the navy, Gion now looked aggrieved, with tears already welling up in his eyes. He looked quite touching.


    She felt that she really couldn''tmunicate with the people in the Toru Empire, so she just nced at everyone, and everyone still maintained the same look and appearance. In desperation, Gion''s lips trembled twice but did not say anything, and then He suddenly turned around and started walking towards the cabin.


    Gogoya and everyone else on the ship were all afraid of waiting for His Majesty the King to be angry, so they hurried to the cabin to do their own things, and the entire deck suddenly became quiet again.


    From this moment on, no one dared to eavesdrop at this time. Now they are still at a depth of several thousand meters under the sea. Except for the lights on the ship, everything else is in a dark world.


    All other irrelevant people have left, and now only the six of them are left here.


    They were quiet for a while, and then they smiled and then frowned and asked, "Your Majesty, are you not worried that the navy will still go to Fish-Man Ind to check the situation?"


    "It doesn''t matter. Xia Li is not the ultimate goal of our trip to Fish-Man Ind. I''m afraid I''m the only one in the world who knows about the secret."


    Changnuo said.


    "What on earth is going on?"


    Enelu asked curiously.


    "Your Majesty the King, Fish-Man Ind has obviously rejected our cooperation. How should we redefine this issue in the future?"


    Moshank said suddenly.


    Junhe didn''t say much during the whole process. After all, he didn''t follow him in the end. Instead, he went to the Sea Forest alone to print the historical text of Fish-Man Ind.


    So he didn''t know what happened throughout the whole process, and what kind of person could attract such attention from His Majesty the King.


    Chang Nuo was not willing to tell these things, but he could feel that General Yixiao must also know something.


    Everyone else was in a state of confusion. This time they entered Fish-Man Ind in such an upright and open manner, it was actually for the purpose of making a dangerous move.


    The only information recorded that Princess White Star is Poseidon, the god of the sea, is currently in Chang Nuo''s own space. Apart from him, the only person who can know the content is probably the original Roger. Those people from the pirate group.


    But he also had enough reasons to believe that except for Rayleigh, the right hand man of the Pirate King at the time, who could know the news, it was impossible for anyone to know about the other pirate walls.


    A weapon that can save or destroy the world, or even a person who canmunicate and summon people like Neptune, such an existence is definitely not allowed by the world government.


    But so far, Bai Xing has not shown any signs of being Poseidon, the god of the sea. I am afraid that all of this will take a rtively long process to develop.


    This time when we entered Fish-Man Ind, we had already met the people and established a rtively good rtionship. From now on, we only need to do this step by step, and everything will naturally fall into ce in the end.


    "Your Majesty, there seems to be a huge guy 2km ahead?"


    Enelu opened his mouth and said.


    Chang Nuo simultaneously conducted self-perception, and within this range of perception, he immediately imagined a huge figure. This guy was almost two hundred meters tall, and with his huge size, he waspletely walking on the seabed.


    "I didn''t expect it was him!"


    Chang Nuo suddenly smiled, and then said to himself leisurely.


    "Is it possible that His Majesty the King knows him?"


    "The great entrance to Mianjin, the legendary god of the sea."


    Changnuo said in reply to this smile.


    "That said, I''m a little impressed."


    Said with a smile.


    They didn''t seem to be surprised at the appearance of this guy. After all, it was not surprising for anything to happen in the underwater world.


    Thest time Chang Nuo killed Vanderdeken, he didn''t feel the existence of this guy at all, but he didn''t expect that in the process of ascending to the new world, he would be able to see him in this ce.


    Although this big guy is clumsy and has no use at all, but if he can be called the God of the Sea, then he must have something that he doesn''t know about.


    At this moment, Mian Jinjian was walking forward slowly with his huge body. His eyes, which were almost as big as a small boat, looked around from time to time. As he walked, he was still shouting, "Master Daken, Where are you?����"


    But as the Infinity began to slowly approach, the great Daoist Mianjin also showed no fear at all. After all, staying at such a deep seabed, there were probably not many people who would be his opponents.


    So even if he saw a huge cruise ship approaching, not only did he not panic at all, but he began to block the ship directly in front.


    Even though he was blocking it there, the great Mianjin didn''t even have the slightest intention of destroying the ship. Instead, the moment the Infinity stopped, this guyy on the Infinity''s defense barrier with his huge mouth open. Asked "Have you seen Lord Daken?"


    The docking of the ship also attracted the attention of the people in the cabin. Moreover, the ship had more than one deck. Changnuo and the others were on the third floor of the cruise ship. However, there were two decks directly in front and one behind. But the functional areas are different in each ce.


    The huge face of Da Rudao almost covered half the size of the ship. For those who have never seen this guy before, seeing this face for the first time is indeed a bit scary.


    "Have you seen Lord Daken? I can''t find where he is?"


    Dairudo Mianjin opened his mouth again and asked.


    "Your Majesty the King, do you need your subordinates to go up and kill him?"


    Moshank raised his head and looked at the huge face, then turned to look at his Majesty the King and asked.


    But at this moment of Chang Nuo, everyone felt differently, because at this moment, his eyes had begun to emit a faint red light. This was something that no one had ever seen before, and at the same time, they could not understand it. What exactly did he want to do.


    Because at this time, Changnuo had already begun to activate his psychic devil fruit ability.

 Chapter 312 Meeting the Sea God Mianjin

    <h4>Chapter 312 Meeting the Sea God Mianjin</h4>


    Changnuo began to activate his psychic devil fruit ability. After all, in this world, the power of this devil fruit ispletely a bug, and if it is handled well, it can even be invincible.


    With a faint red light in his eyes, he raised his head and stared at the great entrance to Mianjinmi. The moment the other party saw him, the originally dark eyes began to glow with a faint red light.


    "Master Daken is no longer here. Please stay with me from now on. I will give you what you want to eat and also give you safety. How about that?"


    Chang Nuo raised his head and asked in a gentle voice.


    Several other people watching this scene could no longer sit still. They stood up one by one to see what happened to their King and why such a big guy said such words so calmly.


    When Mianjin heard this, he felt like a friend he hadn''t seen for many years. He quickly stood up straight and began to nod slowly. However, the faint red light in his eyes at this moment still did not dissipate.


    "Is it really possible? But why would Lord Daken leave me alone?"


    Mianjin asked curiously.


    The other party''s current mind is just like that of a child, and he doesn''t even have any opinions on many things at all, but his strength is beyond doubt.


    Dairudo Mianjin saw that a sea god who could control the existence of sea water could definitely be the overlord of the sea if he could be cultivated well.


    It''s just that so far, all his deeds have not been reflected at all, and all that is left is such a big shell.


    Facing the other party''s question, Chang Nuo slowly smiled, and then continued to say calmly, "Master Daken is dead, so you just need to follow me from now on. He asked you to listen to me whatever I say. From now on, I He is your only master!"


    "Master? I''m just hungry. Can you give me something to eat first?"


    Mianjin said a little aggrieved.


    He no longer seems to be interested in Daken''s death at all, and his mind is already thinking about how to eat.


    But as the other party''s thoughts began, the red light in Chang Nuo''s eyes and the light in the other party''s eyes began to disappear. Even so, Mianjin did not show any strange look, and still felt that Chang Nuo was already his. The owner is average.


    "What''s happening here?"


    Moshank asked Abona next to him in a low voice with some doubts.


    Now he is not the only one who is confused. Others are even more confused and can''t figure out what happened?


    Long ago, Chang Nuo had already used the ability to create a special chain with the palm of his hand. Even if they already knew that His Majesty the King possessed the power of two devil fruits, they would never bring this matter up again. Think about this.


    So this is what makes them more confused.


    "Can you find the South China Sea?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly asked.


    "Nanhai? There should be no problem!"


    Mianjin answered immediately.


    "After you finish eating, you can go directly back to the South China Sea from the Fish-Man Ind. I will arrange for others to pick you up there." Chang Nuo''s tone was simr to an order, not even the slightest hint. Give the other person objections.


    This time Changnuo used one of the abilities of the Psychic Devil Fruit, which was to change the other person''s inner thoughts and at the same time change his thinking and memory, making the other person feel like he should be like this as quickly as possible.


    In such a situation, there is no weakness, and it is impossible for the other party to return to his previous thoughts no matter what state he is in in the future.


    Mianjin stayed there and scratched his bald head with his hands, and then did not say a word of rejection. His big eyes were still staring at the ship. After a while, he began to ask leisurely, "I can''t follow you." Let��s go together?��


    "No, we still have important things to do. You can either choose to stay around Fish-Man Ind, and we will ask you to go back with us when we return, or go directly to the South China Sea, and someone will pick you up then."


    Changnuo said.


    "Okay, then I''d better wait for you here. I don''t know how to get to the South China Sea."


    Mianjin said with a grin, and then gradually began to smile.


    "Hai Ling, let''s continue setting off..."


    Chang Nuo said something out of thin air, and then the Infinity started up again and started to leave forward.


    The only person left at the scene was the gigantic Mianjin Mian. He stared with big eyes as the Infinity began to slowly leave. He did not follow him, but had a look of anticipation on his face.


    Even though they had gone a long way, they could still vaguely see the huge figure of Mianjin Jian when they looked back. Everyone on the ship was still wondering, what on earth happened?


    "Your Majesty, what is that big guy?"


    Junhe finally couldn''t help the doubts in his heart and started to ask.


    Several other people were also waiting for answers. As for those standing on other decks, they could not hear the chatter above and could only stay below and watch curiously. Even Gion did note closer. Although everyone My heart is full of doubts, but there are probably only five people who can know the answer at this moment.


    "Orudo Mianjin is a legendary sea god who has the ability to control sea water."


    Chang Nuo spoke calmly without exining too much.


    Others just want to know what''s new. Even if they know so much, what''s the use?


    But this trip didn''t give them the feeling of peace after all. The main expectation of everyone at the moment was to see what the new world was like. For Mianjinmi who was so big in size, these people felt nothing after being fresh.


    Anyway, it won��t be long before we forget about this, and by the time we meet again, we will probably start to get to know each other better.


    In this deep sea, Chang Nuo and his party did not encounter so many things in the same sea like the protagonists in theter period. Now they just surfaced very calmly, and did not encounter any bumps or special events during the process. situation urs.


    It should be said that the only difference is that the undersea currents in the New World are obviously much stronger than those in the first half of the Grand Line. The seawater around the hull is flowing very fast, and the Infinity is almost entirely swimming against the current, and always maintains If there is a slight mistake in precise control, then his ascending position may not be ideal.


    In the cabin.


    In a room, two people belonging to the Whitebeard Pirates were sitting in a room. There was a TV, air conditioner, and various novel gadgets in this room.

 Chapter 313 Only listen to one person’s orders

    <h4>Chapter 313 Only listen to one person��s orders</h4>


    Jozi was sitting on the chair next to him, and Marco was lying on the bed, but their eyes were very consistent, and they were all looking at the TV screen that was being yed.


    "Marco, did you notice the behavior of that big guy just now?"


    Jozi asked curiously.


    Although the ship has been far away for a long time, the doubts in Jozi''s heart have never dissipated. After all, when Mianjin first came into contact with the ship, a faint red light emitted from his eyes, which obviously did not feel normal. .


    "It may be the devil fruit ability. I don''t know what kind of devil fruit it is, but it can actually allow Emperor Toru to control such a huge guy."


    Marco frowned and said, he had already discovered this kind of thing, but some things were not easy to ask.


    Until now, everyone is curious about what abilities the legendary Emperor Tru has. Even if he is standing next to him and can see him perform it, in the end, all this is still unknown.


    Jozi stood aside with some surprise. In his understanding, he really couldn''t imagine what kind of devil fruit Emperor Tru had eaten. Not only from the first time he saw it, but also from what Marco said, he had even doubted whether the abilities of the Devil Fruit he knew were real?


    "What exactly is going on?"


    Gion was also a little stunned. Even after these things had passed, she still couldn''t hide the surprise in her heart.


    After all, I have seen Chang Nuo use his ability before, twice. Each time it gave people a different feeling, and this time it was even weirder.


    From her status, she could naturally tell that Changnuo used the power of Devil Fruit on Ayatsumi this time, but she didn''t know exactly what kind of power it was.


    But this group of people in the Tru Empire seemed to have taken this weird thingpletely seriously. No matter what His Majesty the King did, they would all think it was absolutely normal.


    Therefore, in this deep sea, no one will raise objections. As for the four outsiders, how they understand it is their business.


    "Jinbei, you should know that big guy just now, right?"


    Marco asked with some confusion as he saw Jinbei frowning.


    Because from the moment the big guy showed up, Jinbei had been acting extremely abnormal. He even wanted to go up and say something directly many times, but in the end he was stopped by the entourage on the ship.


    "Meet, the Great Poseidon!"


    Jinbei said calmly.


    "Is there something you haven''t told us yet? What exactly is this Great Entrance Path?" Marco asked.


    "Oh~, I''ll tell you again when I get the chance."


    Jinbei shook his head. He didn''t want to say these words, but he was very curious about the things that happened in Mianjin at the Great Entrance Road. These things basically only existed in the secrets of Ryugu Castle. In addition to the kings and ministers of Ryugu Castle in the past, It was almost impossible for outsiders to know, but he could see just now that Emperor Tru seemed to already know the identity of the other party the moment he saw him for the first time.


    It wasn''t just these that made his expression change, but the fact that the other party was able to control this guy, Oindo. For those Devil Fruit users above the sea, as long as Mianjin can listen carefully to one person''s orders, and in the future When their strength reaches a certain level, they can even create a nightmare of their own.


    Others may not know these things, but Jinbei knows this big guy very well, but since that is the case now, Jinbei doesn''t want to get too involved in these things.


    None of the people at the top came up with any ideas. Anyway, it is not unusual for a monster to appear in their own country. Even if it appears in the South China Sea, it is estimated that no one will have any special problems. sense of fear.


    The Infinity is still slowly rising towards the sea. Now every inch it walks is already several times more dangerous than staying in the first half of the Grand Line. The ocean currents here are not like what they have experienced before. Calm, but there are invisible risks.


    The sea water washed away quickly along the entire defensive barrier, so fast that everyone couldn''t see clearly what was ahead. Rows of air bubblespletely blocked everyone''s sight.


    Before reaching the sea surface, they have already begun to encounter such a strong ocean current. In fact, the speed of the Infinity is already quite slow. After all, it ispletely upstream for them.


    They don''t even know the weather in the new world above their heads at this moment. What kind of climate they will encounter ispletely like a lottery.


    Although the entire ship is now moving against the current, the rising speed is still very fast inparison. Although it is not rising in a straight line, for the pressure of the ship, this willow disease will not cause any substantial harm, as long as it does not touch If it encounters a reef, it will hardly cause any problem damage.


    Although separated by a defensive barrier, the sound of the rapid collision of ocean currents from the outside world is still particrly noticeable inside. Let alone staying in the boat to have a good rest, even the sound of two nearby peoplemunicating ispletely lost. Covered, the sound is not harsh, but it can bepletely deafening.


    Fortunately, this situation will notst long. The ocean currents on the seafloorst for about five minutes, and the overall situation has entered a rtively gentle interface.


    Staying at this depth, although the field of vision is still greatly obstructed, you can still vaguely see a glimmer of light, at least you can be sure that it is only about two thousand meters away from the sea surface.


    After the deafening sound disappeared, everyone suddenly sat there rxed. Changnuo sat leisurely, and then pressed his finger on a button at the front of the seat, and the entire chair began to slowly move backwards. Come on.


    At the same time, Chang Nuo said somewhat leisurely, "Wait a while for everyone to get ready. The new world is still about 15 minutes away at most. Use your abilities. The sea may not be calm!"


    Although I have only been to the New World once, the weather changes in the New World are really incredible. Some things are even impossible to see twice in this life.


    But ording to guesses and estimates, the weather above our heads was not as good as imagined.


    But no one else has been to the new world, except for Yixiao and Abona.

 Chapter 314 Phoenix Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 314 Phoenix Fruit</h4>


    While they were still expressing doubts, General Yixiao was sitting there and said in the same leisurely voice, "You should really follow His Majesty the King''s instructions. You may encounter somethingter!"


    "What on earth are you talking about? Even if we reach the surface of the sea, is it possible that there are still people who dare to do harm to us?"


    Enelu asked curiously.


    "It will definitely not be people who are disadvantageous to us, but I guess you must have heard of the weather in the New World, and we are waiting to wee the baptism that the New World brings to us."


    Abona also said with a smile.


    "Is it that mysterious? I don''t believe it!"


    Enelu pouted and said with a nonchnt look on his face.


    But at the moment when he finished talking to himself, a mechanical voice began to sound on the Infinity, saying, "Everyone, please prepare, we will appear on the surface of the New World in five minutes, please be prepared. ... "


    He was reminded three times in session, and the Infinity also began to move towards the sea at an extremely fast speed. For those who have never entered the new world, they are almost full of curiosity and expectation for it, but it is estimated that only those who have been. People in the new world understand that this ce is really a ce of survival of the fittest.


    "10, 9, 8, 7..."


    The system''s beep began to sound as it approached the sea. At the moment when it finally reached one, the ship was being retracted and was directly pushed to the sea surface by the huge sea pressure. The entire ship was even thrown up to a height of nearly two meters. .


    But the moment they came up, the scene disyed in front of everyone could be described as terrifying.


    Because hail is falling on the sea at this moment, but this huge hail is simply unimaginable. The diameter is at least 1m away. The moment the huge gravity falls into the sea,yers of water sshes are also built on the sea. .


    "Could this be the legendary new world?"


    Enelu''s eyes widened, looking at the situation in front of him in disbelief.


    "What''s happening here?"


    Everyone on the deck was in disbelief when they saw this. This huge, dense hailstone no longer looked like falling from the sky. Instead, it looked like it was thrown directly towards them from a distance.


    The entire sky was pitch ck at the moment, and I waspletely enveloped in their sight, but in the farthest sight area, there was still a clear sky, as if these hailstorms existed just to wee their arrival!


    "Hai Ling, remove the defensive barrier!"


    Chang Nuoy there leisurely and shouted.


    Now that we have arrived at the New World, why do we still need to use the Infinity to stop these attacks? There are obviously so many people on the ship, so it would be nice to let them deal with it on their own.


    The moment his words fell, the transparent barrier on the entire ship dissipated invisible in the next second. However, facing the dense hail, everyone could only deal with it by themselves.


    "Your Majesty, are you not afraid of damaging the Infinity?"


    Junhe shouted with a speechless expression.


    "Instead of saying this, it''s better to deal with it quickly. Your Majesty is testing your abilities. When you arrive in the new world, you will naturally use your own body to adapt to the weather in the new world. You can''t just rely on the system on the ship for everything!"


    Abona said with a smile, his whole aura now changed into something else.


    The hailstones in the sky seemed to be heading towards them. The huge ones fell densely one after another, and each one looked quite big. If an ordinary person, just one would be enough. Can be smashed directly into meat patties.


    "The next step is the task assigned to you. Don''t let any of these hailstones touch the Infinity. Just treat it as a game that we came here toplete."


    Chang Nuo still spoke leisurely.


    As if watching the excitement is not a big deal, there are countless dense hailstones in the sky, and they are still falling one after another.


    "I''d better do it first!"


    Moshank walked in the middle, and the moment his voice fell, his body started to burn with mes.


    In less than three seconds, Moshankpletely turned into a bird with red mes burning on its body. With a cry, Moshank flew directly up.


    This is his Devil Fruit, the animal-type phantom bird-fruit phoenix form.


    An ability that can be even more powerful than nature-type fruits, withplete and absolute immortality, can be regarded as the top category among animal-type devil fruits.


    A phoenix burning with red mes flew into the air. As he raised his head and screamed suddenly, the mes on his body suddenly turned into a sea of ????fire. Wherever the mes went, all the hail that fell in the sky turned into rain, and even At the moment after melting, all the rainwater is directly evaporated.


    "Ouch!! Marco, if I remember correctly, this should be the phoenix form of the bird fruit, right?"


    Jozi asked, his eyes widening.


    "Indeed, I didn''t expect the other party to be so terrifying." Marco said with the same emotion.


    "It seems that the Toru Empire is much stronger than imagined!" Jinbei said.


    The three people have their own emotions. After all, it was previously revealed that although the empire is equally ssified as the Four Emperors and One Emperor, the empire is originally located in the four seas. Not many people think that their strength can be very strong, but as they see From what I heard, the Tru Empire now reflected in front of me is definitely worthy of this title.


    Everyone stayed below and was stunned to see it. Even those who followed the Tru Empire themselves raised their heads and looked up with interest.


    "Hey!! Mo Sank,e down quickly and let us show you!"


    Enelu shouted loudly, as if he was afraid that the other party would steal his title.


    But it is true that even Junhe feels eager to try. After all, this trip to the new world requires him to prove himself no matter what.


    The mes emitted by the phoenix still swept half of the sky. Although it could directly destroy all the hailstones, it also created unimaginable high temperatures. Staying on the ship felt like being burned on a fire. .


    This scene seems so exciting for everyone, but a general-level strength to deal with these falling hailstones is somewhat overkill, but it is indeed very efficient.


    The Infinity is still moving forward, but it seems that it will not be long before it can get out of this hail area. The two guys who are somewhat eager to try can''t wait, but the existence in the sky seems to be unwilling toe down.

 Chapter 315 The temperature of the new world

    <h4>Chapter 315 The temperature of the new world</h4>


    The dark clouds above the head were slowly dissipating, and not a single huge hailstone fell, but it is estimated that the people below were not thinking as much as these hailstones falling.


    Moshank''s ability was too powerful, causing the entire ce below to be burned by him. Even the powerful me light made the people below unable to lift their heads.


    "Moshank, you guy,e down quickly. Do you want to roast us to death?"


    Junhe shouted loudly upwards, and Enelu next to him also shouted in agreement.


    This time, the other party finally heard it, and the mes that filled the sky began to slowly return, until they finally disappeared on a phoenix.


    Moshank hovered in mid-air for a while, and then began to return towards the Infinity, but the hail in the sky also fell immediately at this moment.


    The huge size does not appear to be any smaller even when it is close to the edge.


    The moment Moshank recovered his body, the huge hailstone above his head fell directly, but this time no one went to smash it directly. Instead, the smile that had been sitting there was just in his hand. The crutch hit the ground, and the huge hailstone that was about to hit the Infinity suddenly floated only about 1 meter away from the hull.


    The same thing happened with the densely falling hailstones. At this moment, everyone felt unprecedentedlyfortable. At least they were still in the heat just now. At this moment, because of the suspension of the hailstones, they felt an instant sense of coolness.


    General Yixiao only shook his hand slightly, and the hailstones that were originally suspended there suddenly left the range of the Infinity and fell into the sea.


    Such a scene also immediately attracted the interest of others. Shunhe did not turn into a werewolf form, but his right hand was now a furry wolf w. Part of his body began to use the devil fruit ability, and his hand began to wave continuously. Those in the sky The huge hailstones that were about to fall turned into snowkes and began to fall downwards with a series of w strikes in mid-air.


    As the hull began to slowly leave the range of the dark clouds, there were still huge hailstones behind them that continued to fall towards the sea. However, the ce where they were now was already clear and clear, and within the surrounding perception space, not even a single person could see them. None of the birds.


    "So this is the new world? It seems that except for the changeable weather conditions, it is no different from the world around the world!"


    Junhe said leaning on the edge of the fence.


    "The reason why the new world bes a new world is not just because of its weather problems, but more importantly, it is where all the powerful people gather. Almost half of the powerful people in the world stay in this world, which is suitable for The survival of the poor is his eternalw.��


    Arbonne said.


    "I don''t think it''s anything. Most of the powerful people you mentioned don''t include us?"


    Junhe said with a grin.


    "Let''s talk. The weather is too hot. I''d better hide inside the house."


    While chatting, Chang Nuo stood up slowly, stretched and said.


    "The outside is indeed not a pleasant ce to stay, and I have to return to the cabin!"


    "I feel the same..."


    Moshank said the same thing, and the three of them seemed to agree on the same thing. Junhe and Enilu looked at the performance of these three people, and they were also speechless.


    It doesn''t matter that His Majesty the King and General Yixiao say it''s hot. The key question is, what qualifications do you, Moshank, have to say such a thing?


    But even if they thought so, a group of people had already begun to walk into the ship building one after another.


    Staying on the deck now, it is true that you can only get the zing heat of the sun. As long as there is nothing wrong with your brain, you probably won''t stay on the deck, but the two of them don''t know whether it is because of the Devil Fruit''s ability or other problems. Anyway, I still feel a little happy staying here, looking at the surrounding scenery.


    The New World is actually simr to the Land of the Four Seas. When there is no wind, the water is still sea water. It is the same color and stretches as far as the eye can see. There is no difference at all.


    But it''s just because of the word "New World" that it feels a bit fresh to them.


    Everyone else who was staying on the deck also returned to their rooms. At least there was air conditioning to cool them down. It was hot outside anyway, and the temperature was probably at least 60 degrees.


    At this time, the sea water on the sea surface began to smoke continuously because of such a high temperature, as if it would boil in the next second.


    As for the ce where they appeared in the new world, they probably don''t even know it themselves. The Infinity has an automatic navigation system. Before the next destination is determined, it will only move in the direction of Rafdru.


    in the room.


    Marco, Jozi and Jinbe were chatting in a room, but at this moment, a light curtain was projected into the room instantly, and the three more vignt people suddenly showed their alertness.


    But when they saw a projection-type figure, their wariness began to slowly dissipate.


    "Mr. Marco, His Majesty the King invites you to the living room on the top floor, and you can arrive in time!"


    The sudden appearance of Hai Ling really startled the three grown men, but it was not that they had never seen it before. As a system on the ship, although these people could not understand it, they at least knew that this thing could be used at any time. Appear anywhere next to any of them.


    "Did you say why?"


    Marco said, still wearing his pineapple head.


    "I''m very sorry Mr. Marco, His Majesty the King didn''t say anything specific!" Hai Ling said.


    "I think you should go over there. It seems like I have something to ask you!" Jinbei said.


    "Okay, I''ll go over now!"


    Marco said, although he was a little confused, he quickly put on his clothes and started walking outside while shirtless.


    When he arrived at the top floor, it was a ce surrounded by ss. Except for some supporting steel frame structures, the rest of the internal structure was also made of tempered doubleyer ss. Even if he stayed here, All have a pleasing feeling.


    You can have an unobstructed view of the sea outside in this kind of room. The living room is almost surrounded by sofas, with a rtivelyrge coffee table in the middle, with fruits and other drinks piled on it.


    In the entire huge living room, the air conditioner is on continuously. Even if it is hot outside, at least there is a hint of coolness in the room.

 Chapter 316 Sudden Attack

    <h4>Chapter 316 Sudden Attack</h4>


    It is almost impossible to navigate on this sea, and the water in some ces has begun to boil due to the high temperature. I really don��t understand what the weather in this new world can be like.


    In this area, it is almost cloudless at first nce, and the sun seems to be close to the sea. Even if you stay in the cabin, with the cooling effect of the air conditioner, this sultry atmosphere still makes people feel Difficult to maintain.


    The Infinity was already sailing forward at the fastest speed, but even so, being in such a hot environment still made everyone feel bored.


    Marco pushed open the door to the living room on the top floor. The environment here was much morefortablepared to the one below, but it still couldn''t stop the scorching heat from the outside.


    At least the moment the door to the room was opened, the heat from outside the room also swept through the entire room immediately.


    "His Majesty King Tru, are you looking for me?"


    Marco asked with a smile as soon as he came in.


    Chang Nuo was the only one here, and he was still sitting leisurely on the sofa, quietly looking at the scenery of the sea outside.


    "Tell me where the old man is and we can go directly there!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Dad, they are currently on Mokya Ind. From here, at the current sailing speed, it will take at least five days to arrive?" Marco said.


    "Mokia Ind?"


    Chang Nuo muttered. He had never heard this name in his memory. It was obviously a strange and unfamiliar ce.


    But all he knows is the things that the protagonist group has experienced. It is normal to be a little unfamiliar with ces that he has not experienced before.


    Chang Nuo sat on the sofa, with his thumbs crossed and tapping the other hand, and he fell into a state of thinking.


    In terms of size, the New World is muchrger than the first half of the Grand Line. But on the other hand, the New World is full of crises.


    "Hai Ling, divert to Dressrosa. Let''s go over there and take a look."


    Chang Nuo suddenly sat up straight and began to shout orders.


    ording to the specific situation and route, Dressrosa is only about two days away from them. The reason why they want to go to that ce is because there are people who need to see it next.


    This time, there was no sound from the Endless ship, but after determining the route, the entire ship began to quickly change direction,pletely turning a 90-degree turn in another direction.


    "Dressrosa? What are we doing there?" Marco asked doubtfully.


    "Sit down first, let''s chat for a while, and then I''ll tell you what the purpose of the past was."


    Changnuo said.


    Marco was also not polite and sat directly on the sofa opposite Chang Nuo. On the coffee table in front of them, a ss of ice water appeared directly as if out of thin air.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he continued to immerse himself in thinking. The new world was a very unfamiliar ce for him. Although he would not worry or consider safety matters, he still needed to have other things to do.


    But if everything goes smoothly like them, then the development of this plot will be absolutely meaningless.


    In this hot weather, there is no one on the deck outside. Fortunately, the ship has an automatic scanning system, which will report immediately if it encounters a dangerous situation.


    "Marco, you..."


    "Bang..."


    Before Chang Nuo could finish his words, the entire ship suddenly shook violently, and a huge red rm of "woo~woo~" began to erupt on the ship.


    It had been less than an hour since they arrived in the new world. Unexpectedly, even though they had sensed the surrounding situation with Haki, they still didn''t find any clues.


    "Hai Ling, what happened?"


    Chang Nuo quickly stood up and began to question loudly.


    "Your Majesty the King, the Infinity was attacked inexplicably. ording to the attack trajectory, it should havee from a position 15km to the left. The specific attack object was a huge stone."


    Hai Ling''s figure suddenly appeared, and he began to report anxiously.


    "First report the damage to the ship?"


    "Dear His Majesty the King, the port side deck of the Infinity is currently severely damaged, and it has not yet threatened the nuclear power generator behind the deck!"


    As soon as the voice fell, other people were already running over quickly, everyone wanted to see what happened. Even though the weather outside was still above 60 degrees, there were already more than a dozen people standing on the deck.


    Especially that huge stone, which has now directly smashed through the entire deck, creating a hole with a diameter of at least 3 meters, which looks really shocking.


    Standing in the living room on the top floor, Chang Nuo could also see the huge hole in the plywood. The darkness extended directly to the innermost part, and lightning sparks appeared from time to time in the hole.


    "What happened?"


    On the deck, he could not see anything with a smile. He could only roughly perceive this situation, but he could not understand the more specific content.


    "General Yixiao, it seems we are under attack!"


    Moshank said with a serious expression.


    "The new world is so weird. Did rocks start falling from the sky?" Enelu asked.


    "Stop talking and be careful!"


    After saying this with a smile, the whole person instantly pulled out the staff and knife, and a powerful force of gravity surged instantly. Then in their sight, a huge stone with a diameter of at least 10 meters was moving towards it at an extremely fast speed, even sparking. Then they fell over.


    This scene is almost like General Yixiao''s meteorite attack, but everyone can clearly see the direction of the trajectory of this attack.


    It was because they had all rxed their vignce before, and the defensive barriers on the Infinity were also being lifted, so this time unknown people took advantage of the loophole.


    But the 10m huge stone with sparks on it wasing towards them like a meteorite. At this moment, everyone really started to prepare for the battle.


    The gravity of a smile directly caused the stone to float about 50 meters above the entire ship. But then, more and more meteorite-like things flew towards this side, and there were already nearly twenty or thirty. Block shape.


    Regardless of the hot weather, everyone stepped onto the deck, with angry faces on their faces and on full alert.

 Chapter 317 Unperceived Attack

    <h4>Chapter 317 Unperceived Attack</h4>


    While everyone was on guard, they were all curious about what kind of person actually dared to attack here. They had no idea what they were thinking.


    But who dares to think about such a thing now? Everyone is already on alert. Even Jinbei, Jozi, and Gion who are on the boat have begun to assist them in their defense.


    The defensive barrier on the Infinity was also opened immediately, but facing so many attacks haspletely exceeded everyone''s imagination.


    What is even more difficult to imagine is the two people standing in the living room.


    Marco listened to what Hai Ling just said word for word, especially because it was unimaginable that he could throw such a huge stone directly for more than ten kilometers and attack at such a fast speed.


    This kind of strength level no longer requires any imagination, you canpletely guess what level the opponent has reached?


    This power may not even be achieved by the Four Emperors. However, facing the attack at this moment, Shunhe directly activated his full Devil Fruit ability. He ran in the air and used his sharp ws to directly attack those who were attacking. The meteorite was chopped into pieces, and as it fell into the sea piece by piece, it also caused huge waves.


    Such an attack is even more violent than any cannonball attack, and for ordinary ships, just such an attack can turn arge ship into powder in an instant.


    "What are you still doing? The Infinity''s defense barrier can''t withstand such a big impact, so everyone goes all out to stop those attacks!"


    Standing in the conference room, Chang Nuo smashed the ss in front of him with an angry punch, and then shouted to those who still felt a little idle.


    As soon as these words came out, several generals instantly moved to the outside of the defensive barrier. As for the remaining people, they also did what they should do to resist.


    Jozi also activated his own abilities and wanted to use his shoulders to carry the falling meteorite, but as he jumped into the air to block a piece of it, his whole body was directly hit by the huge force and hit the pure steel interface of the ship. Jozi A dent was made by the force of the smash.


    "Hai Ling, position your attack!"


    Chang Nuo said with a frown.


    "I''ll go over and help too!"


    As Marco spoke, he suddenly transformed into a phoenix wearing sses and flew out.


    The strength of the attacker this time can be guessed by everyone. With such a powerful force, and the courage to attack so tantly in the New World, in their impression, in addition to the Yonko Kaido, there are also It''s really hard to imagine how anyone could do such a thing.


    After all, the power of being able to throw stones is definitely not something ordinary people can possess. Even the Four Emperors Kaido and Changnuo have reason to believe that he cannot do this.


    "Navy? Or world government?"


    Chang Nuo raised his head and looked at the meteorites flying over one after another, and unconsciously began to think about who was targeting them.


    But from the current point of view, the Navy definitely has no reason to do this, and the World Government may not dare to do so, but how many of the pirates in the New World know that they are here?


    It''s just that no matter which angle you look at this matter from, the first thing you need to do is to avoid the situation in front of you.


    Since the other party can have such a strong strength, they don''t know why they are here.


    "Your Majesty the King, we have determined the location of the attacker. What we can determine so far is that he came from 16km southeast. Does the Infinity need to go directly?"


    When Hai Ling appeared, she immediately stood next to Chang Nuo and spoke respectfully.


    "elerate and start moving towards that direction with all your strength."


    Chang Nuo said, his expression looked very solemn.


    He was quite curious, who would attack them and for what purpose?


    It is estimated that all this can only be determined after seeing the person.


    If you cling to this ce and fantasize about it, you probably won��t even be able to imagine what kind of person he is.


    16km in the southeast direction, this distance is actually within Changnuo''s perception range. But what makes people a little confused is that at this distance, they did not sense any abnormal existence.


    When this happened, Chang Nuo himself began to have doubts.


    The moment this group of attacks first came out, he had quickly expanded the range of attack perception.


    But these sights and sounds seemed to be gone forever.


    There is no abnormal situation within a hundred kilometers around, not even an ind.


    But it was precisely because of the emergence of this state that he felt that the opponent''s strength was not as simple as imagined.


    What kind of ability is it that can actually block the perception of seeing, hearing, color and domineering power? Even if you put this on his side, he can only imagine his ability to use space enchantment.


    This can indeed block the direct perception of seeing and hearing the Haki.


    But in this new world, it is indeed difficult to imagine what kind of existence can do this.


    The moment the Infinity received Changnuo''s order, it quickly turned again and began to move toward the southeast.


    Others are still busy dealing with the meteorites that continue to fall from the sky.


    It has experienced almost hundreds of attacks before and after, but it is still rtively good until now and has gradually disappeared.


    Although these attacks were handled properly by all of them one by one, this time they vividly taught everyone a real lesson.


    When everyone returned, most people''s eyes were still focused on the deck of the ship that had been smashed through, a hole that looked so shocking.


    This can also be regarded as the first time that the Tru Empire has been actively attacked, and it can also be regarded as a severe p in the face of all of them.


    The outside temperature is still over 60 degrees, but none of these people have begun to dislike it. They collectively stand on the deck and look into the distance, everyone is gearing up, and they are angry and confused.


    Seeing that everything had been settled, Chang Nuo jumped down from the broken window in the living room on the top floor.


    He also personally took a look at the hole on his beloved ship. All of this could only exin one thing in the end, and that was that he had never shown the world the true power of the Tru Empire from beginning to end.


    Although all this sounds so absurd, it is very real.

 Chapter 318 The Despised Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 318 The Despised Tru Empire</h4>


    For a long time, the Toru Empire was known as the Four Emperors and One Emperor.


    It even has the strength topletely match the navy, but for most people, all this is not clear at all.


    None of these four emperors in the new world were paved with their own hands and countless lives, so they are the strongest pirates in the minds of all pirates.


    But the Tru Empire is almost theplete opposite. They have only demonstrated their own powerful strength. They have never had arge-scale battle or the ability to demonstrate their existence. They have be an emperor who scares others only by relying on the current strength of the country. like existence.


    It��s not just now that people can be provocative. For a long time, Chang Nuo of the Toru Empire became the emperor. This kind of thing has been criticized by others. After all, this existence that can be on par with the four emperors, so far, No one knows how powerful he is.


    Everyone on the Infinity had very solemn and angry expressions.


    Gion, who was standing aside, quickly hid behind him and took out the small ck phone bug in his pocket to report to the Navy Headquarters.


    The New World area they are currently in is not particrly far from the Navy Headquarters.


    If we go all out and head here, in terms of time, we can probably reach it in just one day.


    But if they had waited until they arrived, things here would probably have been over by now.


    "Your Majesty the King, why can''t I confirm the other party''s location?"


    Yixiao said with a more solemn expression. He could know where the attack wasing from, and could even see the approximate distance.


    But he just couldn''t confirm the identity and appearance of the other party. What was the obstacle? Even Yixiao, a person who has seen a lot of the world, couldn''t figure it out.


    The Infinity is still moving forward, but everyone can still fully feel the anger emanating from their own King.


    So among these people, no one dared to open their mouths except for a smile.


    The distance of 16km didn''t take long for them, but what everyone looked forward to and wanted to see the most was who was attacking them.


    However, before they even got close, the people attacking them here were probably even beyond their imagination.


    On a boat that was either big or small, there was a woman sitting on the shoulders of a huge tall man.


    To be precise, she is an old woman. Their image is even a bit unttering.


    This guy of huge height has a white beard that curves upward in the shape of a crescent moon on his face, but is thinner and longer. He is tall, fat, ugly, with mucus always flowing from his nose, and has thick lips. He is taller than Whitebeard, has a lot of flesh on his upper body, but his legs are very thin. His hair grew to his legs, and his hair on both sides was tied into braids. He had three shocking scars on his body, as if Weibull had experienced that his entire left hand and head had been chopped off or chopped off, but it looked like he had been chopped off again. It was rough and sewn up.


    The appearance of the other woman is even more difficult to look at directly. She looks to be at least sixty or seventy years old, but her clothes are simply more coquettish than those young girls.


    Even though he is so old, he still wears dark lipstick and heavy makeup.


    The biggest feeling when people look at it at first nce is probably disgust.


    "My good son, keep throwing. As long as we deal with these guys, we will be famous in the whole world, and then we will have countless wealth."


    The old woman sat on the tall man''s shoulders and said in a stern voice.


    Especially her expression, it can be said to be a perfect interpretation of what exaggeration means.


    "Mom, I''m hungry, can you eat something first?"


    This huge guy said naively.


    While he was talking, the mucus in his nose was almost flowing into his mouth.


    No matter how you look at this person, you feel something is abnormal, but the ship they are standing on at this moment is still full of stones.


    The ship doesn''t look particrly huge, but it is filled with rocks and feels like it will sink to the bottom of the sea in the next second.


    The old woman on the shoulder gave this huge guy a sharp look, and asked with some dissatisfaction, "Don''t just eat and drink all day long. Throw all the stones under your feet at them. After this is over, old man." Mom will take you to eat delicious food."


    "Really, Mom?"


    "Of course this is true, you are my good son."


    The expression on the old woman''s face suddenly changed, and she spoke with an evil smile, but it felt so disgusting and exaggerated.


    This woman''s height is only about 1m6, but with such exaggerated expressions and words, the big guy under him has no objections.


    So after the old woman finished speaking, the guys quickly got up and continued to pick up the stones on the bed and threw them away.


    When each stone was thrown out, the force was astonishing, and sparks even started to appear in the air.


    So what we saw on the Infinity was caused by their operations.


    When all the stones under his feet were thrown away, the big guy looked at the old woman naively and asked, "Mom, all the things have been thrown away, can I eat something?"


    "You''re a useless piece of trash, you just know how to eat."


    The old woman said with an angry look, because in his perception, he had clearly sensed the situation on the other party''s ship.


    Ji, an old woman, never dreamed that the people in the legendary Trul Empire, which had always existed, would be so powerful and be able to defeat such an attack so easily.


    But this kind of strength is just a first try, and it has not achieved the final showdown.


    "Wilb, those guys wille over in a while. You are responsible for dealing with them, because these guys are going to kill your dad. You haven''t seen your dad yet. If it happens at this time, Wouldn''t that be bad?


    Mom took you to so many ces just to meet his old man. Now I heard that the other party is going to challenge your father, and he is very powerful. If he seeds then...! "


    As the old woman said this, she immediately started to perform appropriately, with two tears streaming down her face.


    The olddy at this time really looked pitiful. I have to say that the acting at this moment is really quite spot on.


    "Is that so? I''ll kill themter."


    The big guy named Wilbu said naively.

 Chapter 319 Edward Wilbur

    <h4>Chapter 319 Edward Wilbur</h4>


    When Wilbu said this, he didn''t have any murderous intent, and he didn''t even show any state that a strong person could show.


    But no matter what, the other party is indeed an extremely powerful person now, so powerful that it ispletely unimaginable.


    For the Infinity, the distance of 16km is just a ce that can be reached in about ten minutes under full eleration.


    However, due to the damage to the hull, he could not sail at the fastest speed as before, and it took him about 15 minutes to get to the same ce.


    But no matter how slow the Infinity is, it will definitely be much faster than Wilbu''s ship.


    But after sailing such a long distance, the weather was still at a high temperature of 60 degrees. At this moment, the weather began to feelfortable again.


    After all, the weather is the biggest feature of the new world, and the strong are nothing more than an afterthought.


    "Your Majesty the King, a ship appears in the sight ahead."


    "I can see it!"


    As soon as Jun He finished speaking, he was directly pushed back by Chang Nuo''s deep voice.


    We have already reached this point, how could we not see it?


    Because although the ship in front of them is not particrly big, it is not very small either. Almost all the people on the ship are frowning, because even though these ships are in front of them, from a perceptual perspective, they are still unable to perceive the Haki. Anything on this ship.


    Obviously everything is already in front of you, but the key thing is right there, but it is still nk in perception.


    "What exactly is going on?"


    Enelu also asked with some confusion.


    They were not the only ones at the scene, there were also Gion and two members of the Whitebeard Pirates from the navy who came with them.


    "Wilb??"


    Marco was the first to speak, and he even couldn''t believe what he was seeing.


    It can be said that he is not too familiar with this guy.


    Even he had known the other party''s identity many years ago and had always imed to be Whitebeard''s son. However, only he and Whitebeard knew the specific facts.


    "Marco, do you think that if I kill him, what will Mr. Whitebeard think?"


    Changnuo turned to look at Marco with a half-smiling expression and asked.


    In fact, he had already recognized the other person when he saw him for the first time. After all, Wilbu''s expression was too obvious and conspicuous, and the two white beards hanging on his face were indeed clearly visible. , and the most important thing is the old woman who is following him next to him. These two people have always been in cahoots with each other.


    But I have to say that the opponent''s strength is indeed strong, especially this guy Wilbu. As early as more than ten years ago, he was able to severely injure Navy Admiral Iron Fist Zefa and even break one of the opponent''s arms.


    No matter which angle you look at it, Wilbu''s strength will definitely not be as naive as what you see in front of you.


    Chang Nuo''s words instantly made Marco frown, and he could only say helplessly, "Is it possible to reveal that His Majesty the King knows about this person?"


    "I didn''t know it before, but when I heard it from your mouth, I already remembered it. There are not many people in the New World who can im to be Whitebeard''s son. This guy can severely injure the Admiral of the Navy Headquarters many years ago. I��m afraid there won��t be many of them in the new world.��


    Chang Nuo calmed down at this time and spoke in a leisurely tone.


    But at this time, he was no longer allowed to continue chatting. Will, who was staying far away, patted his chest, and then spit it out from his mouth. A huge fireball quickly hit them.


    Wherever the fireball went, even the sea water began to evaporate a lot, and even the smoke was not seen.


    On the originally calm sea level, just because of the attack of a fireball, the seawater under his fireball instantly disappeared to a depth of nearly 20 meters.


    If such an attacknds on a ship, it can dismember the ship in an instant.


    "Now is not the time to discuss these matters. Since the other party dares to have an idea to take action, then you need to be a witness. Even if the old man with white beard has any ideas, I am afraid it will be of no use today."


    Chang Nuo said, looking at the attack with a fierce expression.


    Then blue light emerged directly from both hands, just at the moment when the fireball was about to attack the hull. A blue protective shield immediately appeared in front of the entire ship.


    The next second, a huge fireball flew directly through the hull to the rear and fell into the sea water.


    As the fireball fell, a huge vortex immediately formed in the middle of the sea water.


    Obviously, all the seawater immediately began to gradually evaporate under such a high temperature, and formed a vortex there at an extremely fast speed.


    "What a powerful me!"


    Moshank was a little surprised by the other party''s performance, and even began to sigh with emotion.


    But the next second, Mo Sank took the lead to rush out of the Infinity, and his whole body suddenly turned into the form of the original phoenix.


    He was flying in mid-air, and as his wings pped, countless fire feathers on his body began to shoot towards the ship where Wilbu was sitting.


    Each plume of fire began to be mixed with scorching heat, and the two parties began to use fire as an attack.


    But Chang Nuo knew very well that Mo Sanke would never be his opponent.


    How could a guy who was able to severely injure an admiral many years ago act so naively?


    Mr. Bajin, who had been sitting on Wilbu''s shoulder, jumped off Wilbu''s shoulder as quickly as possible when he saw the opponent starting to attack, and then shouted to Wilbu in amanding tone, "Be good." Son, kill him quickly, and after that, I will take you to find your father."


    "Okay, Mom."


    As Wilbu spoke, he raised his head and looked at Moshank flying in the air. His originally naive expression and eyes suddenly became sharp at this moment.


    It was as if his previous performance and status were all disguised.


    "Moshank, retreat,e back."


    Marco shouted quickly.


    Everyone looked at the current battle situation with a look of urgency. But obviously the two of them haven''t officially started yet, but the fire feather in front is just a test.


    Because the moment these ming feathers swarmed towards Wilbu, they were stopped directly about 50 meters in front of him.


    There seemed to be an invisible barrier around him, directly blocking everyone''s attacks.


    This method is more simr to the power of space used by Changnuo. If this situation continues, it will only be a matter of time before Moshank will be defeated.

 Chapter 320: Strength beyond the Four Emperors

    <h4>Chapter 320: Strength beyond the Four Emperors</h4>


    Wilbu''s strength was something that no one had expected, even Chang Nuo, who was standing here watching the battle.


    Moshank has the strength of a general, and in terms of fire attack, there are probably only a handful of people in this world who can surpass him.


    But right here, the attacks of the me feathers emanating from his body were unable to touch the opponent''s body at all in the end.


    There was a sharp contrast between Moshank in mid-air and Wilbu who was blocking the attack. The attack and defense between the two parties also directly caused a powerful explosion scene.


    The surrounding seawater also directly formed a vortex shape.


    The attacks caused by Moshank directly formed a vacuum zone, and the surrounding air seemed to have begun to solidify.


    But Wilbu seemed to deal with these attacks extremely easily, and he didn''t even use his full strength or strength at all.


    The attack level of the me feathers is almost continuous. As long as Moshank''s physical strength can support it, the attack power of the me feathers can even continue until his strength weakens.


    But at the moment when the attack continued, Wilbu, who was defending, directly held up the defensive barrier with one hand, retracted the other hand and clenched it into a fist, and then volleyed directly towards the mid-air. Moshank punched suddenly.


    Although this punch seemed unremarkable, even a little funny on this fat man, anyone with a discerning eye could see that a wave of air quickly swept through Mo Sank''s whole body.


    "The overlord''s domineering aura envelops the attack!!"


    Changnuo''s eyes have reached the edge of extreme anger, and he can directly attack with domineering aura. Currently, there is only one person he knows in the entire pirate world, and that is the Vice Admiral with the strongest navy at present. Cap.


    But probably no one expected that such a powerful guy would appear in this world.


    After being swept away by the entire attack, Moshank''s figure in the air immediately began to be unstable. As his wings waved twice again, his whole body instantly returned to its original state, and he quickly fell towards the sea. go.


    It was easy to see from his falling form that blood had slowly begun to seep from the corners of his mouth, and his whole body seemed to be out of control at all.


    "Mosanke..."


    Junhe and Enelu shouted together.


    They even wanted to rush out and bring Moshank back, but the current situation did not allow them to make any unnecessary moves.


    But at the moment when everyone''s eyes were red, Moshank, who had already touched the sea water, fell directly onto the Infinity in the next second.


    He struggled twice, stood up with difficulty, and covered his chest with his hands. A trace of blood from the corner of his mouth continued to flow out.


    "Si, take General Moshank back and get him treated properly."


    Chang Nuo shouted in a low voice.


    "Sorry, Your Majesty the King, I couldn''t..."


    "There are some things you don''t need to say anymore, I can see them!"


    Chang Nuo directly stopped what Mo Sanke wanted to say next, and the replyer with the same deep voice said.


    "Huh huh huh... I didn''t expect that the legendary Emperor Tru and his group were like that? It seems that there is a huge differencepared to my son!"


    The old woman standing next to Wilbu said with a sinister smile on her face. At such an old age, her voice was so high-pitched that it made people feel goosebumps falling off her skin.


    "Mom, I''m hungry. Can we go eat something first?"


    asked Wilbu, standing next to him.


    "You bastard! We are doing the right thing now. When we get it done, we will be able to eat whatever we want in the future."


    "Really, Mom? It''s really my fault. This matter should be settled first!" Wilbu nodded and said.


    "Well~, even if you are wrong, mom won''t mind. After all, mom is the one who loves you the most!"


    The old woman next to Wilbu said.


    While talking, he pretended to love and protect his son, as if he had everything in mind for him.


    But when Will heard this, he was moved and his nose ran down. When he turned his eyes to the Infinity again, his eyes were no longer as honest as before, but more ferocious and domineering.


    "These two bastards, I''m going to kill them!"


    Enilu shouted directly, the lightning on his body had already shot out, and the next second he started to prepare to find him in a desperate posture.


    "return!"


    Chang Nuo roared directly with a solemn expression.


    He is not angry now, but if these peoplee up, they may not even be able to hurt the other party''s skin. The former navy admiral, Zefa, had one of his arms broken without touching the opponent in the end. This was more than ten years ago, let alone the opponent''s current strength.


    "Your Majesty King Tru, you don''t have to care about anyone else''s thoughts. Just go ahead and do it. Even if dad knows about it, he won''t say anything."


    Marco lowered his head slightly and said.


    He knew the identity of these two people very well. The old woman Miss Ba Jin had always imed to be Whitebeard''s favorite woman. And he also called the guy with the same beard shape as Whitebeard, Whitebeard''s son, Edward Wilbur, who is currently known as Whitebeard II.


    The reason why Chang Nuo waited for so long without making a move was because he wanted Marco next to him to nod. No matter how others didn''t know, he and Marco both knew that this guy was probably Whitebeard''s own. Biological son, although nothing has been confirmed, but even under this situation, Chang Nuo still does not hope that because of this incident, the entire Tru Empire will fail to carry out other ns in the future.


    No matter what the situation is, the Whitebeard Pirates can only maintain a friendly state in recent years.


    This is already a question that Changnuo has already thought about.


    Even if the guy in front of him wants to get rid of him, it will be an easy task, but it may not be possible in terms of face.


    But once word spreads that this guy seeded today, the risks that the Tru Empire, as the emperor of the world, may face will be beyond everyone''s imagination.


    The image of a powerful empire that has been established for a long time is likely to copse at the first opportunity.

 Chapter 321 Fight in person

    <h4>Chapter 321 Fight in person</h4>


    Chang Nuo called Enelu directly, and closed his eyes helplessly. Then he suddenly opened his eyes, and a light of blue and red suddenly appeared in them.


    Then, in everyone''s sight, the Tru Emperor slowly floated about 5 meters high on the Infinity, staring at him with a serious face.


    This guy is estimated to be the most powerful opponent he has ever encountered in his life. Based on the strength he has shown so far, he can at least determine that the opponent has reached the level of a Yonko.


    From the beginning to now, Emperor Trunuo has never shown all his strength to the outside world. Even the generals who are following him only know that His Majesty the King is very powerful, but How powerful it is, no one dares to judge.


    Gion itself has always been standing behind him. When seeing Wilbu''s current strength, the Tru Emperor still directly started preparing to fight in person, which already showed that the other party was ready.


    Originally, her biggest task when she came to this ship was to investigate how powerful Emperor Tru was, and who they woulde into contact with in the new world?


    This has just begun. In less than two days together, God has directly given such a good opportunity to judge the strength of Emperor Tru and whether he is worthy of his current title.


    "Junhe, during the battleter, find a way to get the shining red thing ced on their ship."


    Chang Nuo was suspended in mid-air and spoke calmly.


    Things havee to a point, and now that you need to show your strength, you naturally need to maintain a calm mind.


    This is not only a demonstration of the strength of one''s own country, but also a demonstration of one''s own capabilities.


    He knew that many people were watching, but he didn''t mind. He even wanted to use the people left here in the navy to spread his strength, so that at least everyone would no longer despise the Tru Empire in their hearts.


    "Your Majesty! Don''t worry about this. Even if you die, you will definitely get the things on the other party''s ship back!" Junhe said with a serious expression.


    "General Junhe, what His Majesty the King is talking about is probably the thing that causes everyone to use the color of sight and unable to sense their movements. This thing is a great hindrance to us."


    Yixiao, who had been standing there with a serious expression, also started talking.


    After all, this matter involved something beyond their imagination, the item on the other side''s ship that was glowing with red dots.


    No matter from which point of view, it is definitely not a high-tech product, but I am not sure what kind of substance it is, but in short, it can hinder the progress of everyone next.


    "Don''t worry, General Yixiao. Enelu and I will assist General Junheter!"


    Arbonne said.


    Three general-level people besieged Miss Ba Jin, an old woman. If they couldn''t do this, they would really have no shame in living in the world anymore.


    "Wilb, my good son, just go up and kill them."


    The old woman standing on the boat opposite shouted directly to the big guy Wilbu.


    "Don''t worry, Mom."


    Wilbu said, and then directly picked up the big knife on the bed.


    The shape of this thing was almost the same as the big knife in Whitebeard''s hand. Then, as Wilbu clenched his hands, a ck aura emitted from his hands, and the domineering aura swept over the big knife in his hand in an instant. There is also a hint of red domineering on it.


    If you are not strong, you will not know what this means at all, but Changnuo, who is suspended in mid-air, knows very well that this should be an attack mode mixed with overlord-colored domineering. So far, in the entire pirate world, it is also Only Garp controls it.


    Although it is a bit surprising how this guy learned about this situation, for a person with system capabilities, although it is a bit difficult to deal with him, it is not impossible.


    Wilbu picked up the big knife in his hand and started shing in the direction of the Infinity. He didn''t know if he was just relying on strength or other abilities, but at this moment the entire sea seemed to be cut open.


    Even a swordsman like Abona who specializes in swordsmanship couldn''t help but frown when he saw this scene.


    The opponent is obviously not an expert in this field, but he can already achieve the level of a great swordsman just by relying on ability or strength.


    "The Art of Space~Infinite Folding."


    While the opponent was shing with the knife, Chang Nuo was suspended in mid-air, his hands crossed directly, and then he clenched them with all his strength.


    The next second, blue transparent light swept across the entire sea surface instantly.


    So at the moment Wilbuunched his attack, the furthest distance of his attack was only about 1 meter in front of the Infinity, and he could no longer move forward.


    The moment the first attack was blocked, Changnuo disappeared in mid-air in an instant. The moment he appeared again, with the same form of domineering on his feet, he kicked towards the opponent.


    This kick is also an attack pattern apanied by armed-color Haki and entangled with Overlord-color Haki.


    Even without using any abilities, this kick can probably break a mountain into pieces.


    The reason why Wilbu is as strong as he is today is not only because of his powerful attacks, but also his powerful defense and reaction capabilities.


    This strong contrast does not match his somewhat naive and silly appearance at all, as if he is a genius or machine born specifically for fighting.


    With a kick, Will immediately stopped him with his right hand holding a big knife covered with domineering energy. However, the impact between the two directly caused the surrounding seawater to drop nearly 20 meters in an instant, thus forming a Waves simr to tsunami waves began to spread in all directions.


    Even though the Infinity was two hundred meters away from the battle site between the two of them, the impact of the attack between the two of them at this moment caused seawater to pour directly into the hull.


    Fortunately, the Infinity has system self-awareness, and this can only be achieved by self-draining.


    Even when faced with this kind of attack, others still stared intently at the battle ahead.


    On the ship where Wilbu was on, Bajin 4 didn''t know whether it was because of fear or hiding. He hid in the cabin as quickly as possible. Even if the attack was so powerful, it did not have any impact on the ship. .


    It can be seen that in terms of physical fitness, Wilbu has definitely be the pinnacle existence in this world.


    Even when Whitebeard was young, he might not be able topete with this guy.

 Chapter 322 The Art of Space—Folding Barrier

    <h4>Chapter 322 The Art of Space��Folding Barrier</h4>


    Chang Nuo was not surprised or surprised at all by being able to have such attack and defense strength.


    After all, a person who can directly apply the domineering domineering power in an attacking state, how could his strength be so small?


    This time the collision did not produce a state of thunder and lightning that filled the sky like the previous collision of the two overlord-colored domineering auras.


    But there was an invisible wave that instantly began to sweep through the surrounding area.


    However, at this moment, the battle between the two people was no longer just watched by people from both sides.


    The Whitebeard Pirates also started projecting this live broadcast, but this time the real-time picture was produced by Marco.


    It didn''t even matter whether they saw it or not. I don''t know since when, two seagulls began to hover above their heads. This incident is probably not going to get rid of the status of a big news.


    The collision between the two parties itself had caused the seawater to sink nearly 20 meters, but now the surrounding seawater began to quickly gather towards them.


    Now that we already knew that the other party was a Devil Fruit user, we could just get him into the sea water and almost everything would be done.


    But such a naive Wilbu seemed to already know Chang Nuo''s thoughts and intentions.


    His right hand continued to block the attack brought by Chang Nuo. His left hand had begun to clenched his fist and punched him in the direction. With a wave of air rising into the sky, Wilbu even wanted to imitate the previous attack on Mo Sang. The method of defeating him, but to his surprise, this attack prated directly through the opponent''s body.


    "Spiritual Thorn~"


    Chang Nuo drank it gently in his mouth, and then a mental power attack headed towards Wilbu''s head.


    He couldn''t dodge this kind of attack at all, but when the attack entered the opponent''s body, Chang Nuo realized that his thinking seemed to be too simple.


    Mental attacks had almost no effect on Wilbu. Although he was a little surprised, thinking about it, he could understand that it was normal for the opponent to be in such a stupid state that he could not attack.


    Although it has no effect on Wilbu''s attack, it can also dy the coordination of his entire body.


    So Chang Nuo immediately withdrew his leg, then turned around in the air and kicked the opponent directly in the abdomen as fast as possible.


    Even though it felt like even a kick to his fat belly wouldn''t have much real effect, the kick still sent Will flying nearly ten meters away in an instant.


    However, this kick can also directly make him fall into the sea, and he will see the moment he breaks away from the hull and falls towards the sea.


    Wilbu once again exceeded everyone''s imagination and floated above the sea.


    Under his feet was a white cloud-like thing.


    In other words, this thing directly supports him and floats above the sea.


    At this moment, everyone on the Infinity was dumbfounded.


    After leaving the ship he was on, Yixiao could clearly sense the figure and situation of the other party.


    "Marco, I have heard all the things His Majesty told you just now. I hope you can tell the truth who the other person is?"


    Yixiao asked in a cold and heavy tone.


    "I really hope you can tell the truth. ording to themunication between His Majesty the King and you, it means that His Majesty the King and Captain Whitebeard must have a friendship that we don''t know about. The matter is of great importance, and the strength of the other party has obviously exceeded Our imaginations.��


    Abona also turned his face and asked.


    "Gu~, guys over there, boy Tohru, what do you want to do? Just do it. You don''t need to care about what I, an old man, think!"


    Just as they finished asking, a man with a white beard on the phone that had been ced in Marco''s hand opened his mouth and said.


    They didn''t expect that Marco was actuallymunicating with Whitebeard about the situation in real time, and what the two said was heard by Whitebeard.


    "With your words, it will be much easier for us to do things."


    He said with a smile, and then his expression suddenly turned serious, and he ordered and shouted, "Jun and General, what are you still doing in a daze? Go and destroy or take the things on the other party''s ship."


    Wilbu, who is currently rtively powerful, has been driven to other locations by His Majesty the King of their family. Only one old woman, Ba Jin, is left on the entire ship. Especially the items ced on the other side''s ship canpletely iste the perception of seeing, hearing and color. If this thing is here, um, ah. For the Tru Empire, the man with the strength of a general, Yixiao, was almost lost.


    "yes!!!"


    Junhe shouted loudly, and Abona and Eniro nodded at the same time.


    "Marco, my dear son, if necessary, you can also assist the True boys."


    The phone bug with a white beard expression opened his mouth again and said to Marco.


    Although his tone sounded a little vicissitudes of life, in the end he still made such a decision.


    At the same time, Junhe, Abona, and Anilu flew towards the ship where Ba Jin was in an instant.


    Their main goal is to capture the red thing on the top of their ship.


    When Wilbu saw someone heading towards his mother, he was instantly angry and prepared to go back to support, but Chang Nuo was now standing between him and the ship.


    The whole person was also suspended above the sea, looking at each other''s every move seriously.


    "If you dare to hurt my mother, I will kill all of you!"


    Wilbu said viciously.


    "The Art of Space ~ Folding Barrier!"


    Chang Nuo''s arms spread out instantly, and a blue light instantly swept across the entire area, just in time to iste Wilbu from the ship.


    Although it is not clear so far how strong this guy is, and it is not sure whether such a space defense solution can stop the opponent.


    But Changnuo directly used the highest spatial barrier barrier that it could use. The folding barrier could have unlimited range. Even if the opponent''s ability was really higher than that of the Four Emperors, he still believed that at least in a short period of time, it would not be possible at all. It is impossible to rush out of this enchantment space.


    "Confinement!"


    Chang Nuo once again released the power of space. In just an instant, the space around Wilbupletely solidified. From the outside, a transparent square could be seen trapping Wilbu inside.


    "You bastard! Go to hell."


    Wilbu shouted angrily, and continued to exert force.


    But Changnuo didn''t just do nothing there, he immediately started the next attack.


    Wilbu in the transparent block began to struggle with all his strength, and you could see cracks beginning to appear in the space, and his arms were fully mobile in less than three seconds.


    The powerful force can directly tear apart the entire space, which really surprised him.

 Chapter 323 The Phantom Beast Kirin Form

    <h4>Chapter 323 The Phantom Beast Kirin Form</h4>


    A man who can tear apart space just by relying on his strength. This kind of power is probably impossible for Whitebeard to do when he was young.


    But the guy in front of him is doing it, and the space to imprison the other party is only for a few seconds, but these few seconds are enough for Nuo to carry out the next operation.


    "The Art of Space ~ Space de!"


    Chang Nuo opened his mouth and shouted softly again, then kept his hands in the same position, sped his hands together and shed towards him.


    Suddenly, a transparent light de began to move towards the opponent. During the process, the space was almost cracked, forming a dark hole.


    "Ah!! Bastard, I''m going to kill you!"


    Will roared loudly, and his body immediately began to burn with orange mes. The sword in his hand was no longer used at this moment. Instead, relying on the ability of the mes, it actually burned all the power of the space that imprisoned it. of nothing.


    Behind them, Jun and a few others were quickly preparing to snatch the things ced on the roof of the boat, but Miss Bajin, who had always been timid, walked directly to the top of the boat with a weird smile on her face.


    Originally, they were not wary of this old woman, and she did not look like a very powerful being at such an old age.


    But the moment he stood up, Marco on the ship in the distance immediately shouted, "All of you, be careful. Although I have never seen Miss Ba Jin take action, he and his father are from the same period, and they are also Locke." The crew members on the Si pirate ship must be stronger than you think!"


    "So it''s Marco? I didn''t expect to see you here!"


    miss Ba Jin turned his head and nced at him after hearing the other party''s shouting, and said with a slight disdain on his lips.


    As soon as these words came out, the three of them immediately understood that people who were at the same time and in the same boat as Whitebeard should not be underestimated in any aspect.


    Shunhe has almost always listened to His Majesty the King telling about pirates. Especially when he learned that three of the four emperors were still on the same boat, he had already endlessly thought about the strength of the opponent''s ship. How powerful she was, but she didn''t expect that this woman was once on the same boat as the Four Emperors. Miss Ba Jin would definitely not be as rxed as it seemed.


    "You two be careful, I''ll test it first!"


    As the most powerful among the three of them, Abona instantly pulled out the Dawn in his hand. He just blinked and saw that Kung Fu had disappeared. He reappeared and shed directly at the old woman''s neck.


    At this moment, Abona showed no mercy and wanted to directly kill the opponent with one strike, but the next scene made them truly feel the gap between themselves and the strong man.


    Miss Ba Jin didn''t even move an inch, he just stood there, his hands suddenly filled with armed domineering energy, and he caught Abona''s fatal knife with just one hand.


    Abona hadn''tnded yet, but looking at the other party''s calm look, he realized something was wrong.


    Not even the Four Emperors could follow his attack so easily, but they still didn''t know what kind of abilities the woman in front of them had.


    "Thunder Sword~"


    Seeing that Abona''s first attack had been frustrated, Eniro reacted instantly. The lightning on his body suddenly gathered in his hand, forming a long sword about 3 meters long. In an instant, he started to move towards the opponent. Physical attack away.


    Junhe also began to besiege. In this way, the two sides were evenly matched. Even if the strength of these three people individually was not as strong as this old woman, the three of them together could carry out cyclic attacks at three distances: far, middle and near. Even though it is impossible to say that there is a 100% chance of winning for a person with the strength of a general to deal with a Miss Ba Jin, it is possible to at least dy their schedule at this moment.


    However, what Chang Nuo encountered here was almost the same as them. Wilbu''s strength was already so strong that it made people feel abnormal. Even the space de with super strong attack power had no effect on the opponent''s body.


    I don��t know how he grew to such arge size and how he cultivated?


    The wounds caused by the space technique on the opponent''s body had returned to their original appearance at a speed visible to the naked eye in just a few seconds, without even a drop of blood falling.


    Chang Nuo kept frowning and went all out during the continuous attacks.


    The so-called Whitebeard II in front of him is different from any opponent he has seen before. The opponent does not have much brains, and the psychic devil fruit cannot cause much harm to him.


    But his powerful recovery ability and endurance, and more importantly, the me ability that the opponent can exude, almost always feel despair to ordinary people.


    The animal type devil fruit, the unicorn form of the giant deer fruit of the fantasy beast type, not only has super recovery ability, but more importantly, it also has super attack power.


    Seeing that his mother was already involved in the battle, Wilbu waspletely in a state of confusion. At this moment, he probably couldn''t tell the difference between friend and foe.


    Arge amount of mes began to emerge from the palm of his hand. The orange-red mes caused the surrounding seawater to boil instantly. He could float above the floating clouds under his feet. At this moment, he hadpletely transformed into a different look.


    At this moment, scales slowly grew on the huge body starting from the feet, until finally two unicorn horns appeared on the head, and the white beard now seemed to have turned into a me-shaped beard.


    "Hai Ling, start staying away from this sea area immediately!"


    Gogoya shouted loudly. Although he had no strength, he had been following His Majesty the King for so long, so he could clearly understand the form of this attack. Moreover, she was the only one on this ship who could order the Infinity to start. People who do it.


    Moshank, who was already injured, also came up when the ship started sailing. He still looked a little weak physically, but at least it did not affect his actions in a big way.


    Although I don��t know what the final oue of this battle will be? But this incident directly attracted worldwide attention.


    At this moment, there was not even a trace of wind on the surface of the deep sea. Wilbu''s image at this moment waspletely different from before, and Chang Nuo still looked a little calm.

 Chapter 324 Space Dharma

    <h4>Chapter 324 Space Dharma</h4>


    The Space Devil Fruit is like this, it''s very easy to defeat and trap the opponent.


    Wilbu''s eyes were red, and the saliva from his mouth had begun to slowly flow out, lookingpletely like a demon.


    But the opponent''s strength has almost skyrocketed at this moment, but facing this situation, this is the result Chang Nuo really wants.


    "What a disgusting form!"


    Chang Nuo sighed and looked around. The other party had already started to be serious, so naturally he couldn''t fall behind.


    Immediately afterwards, Chang Nuo showed an unprecedented seriousness, and the surrounding space seemed to have begun to be changed by him.


    Chang Nuo, who was standing in front of Wilbu, was growing rapidly in height at this moment, and his body shape had transformed from being only about one or two meters tall to being almost the same as a giant.


    "Space Dharma!"


    Chang Nuo shouted with a serious expression, this thing was still based on his own impression of the method of cultivating immortals, but it has never been applied in actualbat.


    After all, no matter what kind of danger he encounters, no matter how bad the situation is, these generals in his lifetime will always give priority to blocking him.


    But now his general has his own thorny problems, and the guy he can face is a powerful and abnormal figure.


    How does Wilbu exist? And how he cultivated to such a powerful state, even in the pirate plot in his impression, he is still a mysterious character.


    Just relying on his own strength in the early stage, he was able to break the iron fist of the most powerful general in the navy, the iron fist that he relied on for survival and pride. This has confirmed the strength of the opponent and how powerful he is. .


    Chang Nuo, who is more than thirty meters tall, is actually almost the same as the protagonist in theter stage when he turns on the third gear. He is many times stronger in terms of attack power, but many times weaker in terms of reaction speed.


    All attacks were carried out almost simultaneously, but in any case, Chang Nuo did not intend to end the next battle in the fastest way.


    It is rare to find a very good training opportunity. This kind ofbat experience cannot be learned at any time. It is not only the training between life and death, but more importantly, finding an opponent who can match it in this world is really too difficult. Disaster.


    No matter which one of the Four Emperors who can rival him moves, it will cause turmoil in the entire sea, which ispletely different from this guy in front of him.


    But then, the defensive strength generated by the opponent directly exceeded his imagination.


    Those ck scales on Wilbu''s body can be said to be invulnerable. Coupled with the opponent''s terrifying recovery ability, this person is simply terrifying and perverted to the extreme.


    Sometimes I really don''t understand that a woman with Miss Ba Jin''s character would not instruct this guy to do something more extreme.


    Of course, more extreme things have already been done.


    Wilbu had turned into a beast at this moment. Without any sense, he started to rush towards Changnuo quickly. He wanted to resolve the battle as soon as possible and then help his mother.


    But the battle on Miss Bajin''s side was not ideal. Even if three people besieged an old woman on the other side, the strength of the three generals seemed to be a bit difficult.


    Fortunately, the other party may be a little older, and Jun and the others now have sufficient fighting experience. Three people versus one person does not seem to be very easy, but it is not tooplicated.


    Miss Ba Jin has not yet shown his demonic fault ability. It is still unclear whether he has it, but from the perspective of this domineering force, it is enough to prove how powerful the opponent is.


    No one in the Rocks Pirates is simple. Three people in one ship have be the most powerful Yonko on the sea. So what can the strength of the remaining people be like?


    And at the beginning, these three people were not the most powerful on this ship, but they have still achieved such results so far, and the others can naturally take care of themselves.


    How could Chang Nuo be in the mood to take care of them now? Wilbu on his side had already rushed over with all his strength, with ck scales on his body, auspicious clouds under his feet, and the surrounding seawater seemed to give way to him.


    "Today, let the people in this world see the power of the Tru Empire!"


    Chang Nuo roared angrily, and then his right hand immediately turned ck, and was also wrapped in the overlord-colored domineering energy, except that his side was ck and blue. With the arrival of Wilbu, the two fists suddenly collided together.


    "Bang~"


    The sound of the collision resounded directly through the sky, and the seawater on both sides quickly began to spread towards the surroundings. The sound of thunder suddenly sounded in the sky, and countless domineering lightnings began to emit from all around them.


    The fist collision between them seemed like a volcanic eruption, causing the sea water to instantly form a tsunami and start to spread rapidly in all directions.


    "What a heavy force!"


    Chang Nuo frowned and began to think inwardly. Although he has not taken a step back so far, and the other party has done the same, in terms of strength, Chang Nuo is alreadypletely at a disadvantage.


    After all, people can shatter space just by relying on their own strength, let alone using fists to collide directly now.


    Space Faxiang was nearly 30 meters tall, but even so, he still couldn''tpete with the guy in front of him in terms of strength. Chang Nuo was also quite shocked.


    Immediately afterwards, the two of them retracted their hands at the same time and began to prepare for the next wave of collision.


    Chang Nuo raised his fist high, twisted his body into an arch shape, and began to attack him again with his deep fist. The powerful speed even caused mes to appear on his fist.


    Not only that, the space around the fist has begun to gradually break up, forming fragments. The entire space seems to be still, and slowly begins to break apart.


    Wilbu did not retreat at all, and there was no rationality in his eyes. He also weed the fists and started to collide with them again.


    "Bang!!!"


    "Bang!!!"


    ��


    The two of them directly engaged in closebat, shing fists with each other. No one could count how many times they fought. Even the weaker ones aboard the Infinity, who were several kilometers away, had already begun to cover their heads. He closed his ears andy on the ground in some pain.


    As for the powerless Gogoya, Marco was always protecting her, otherwise he would have been able to kill her just by relying on the impact of the collision between the two.

 Chapter 325 A powerful practitioner

    <h4>Chapter 325 A powerful practitioner</h4>


    The originally calm sea surface was no longer calm at this moment, and the noise caused by the battle could be heard even dozens of miles away.


    But not only that, the battle between the two has even begun to spread to the surrounding sea areas.


    In a ce like the New World, the war between two such powerful people has be the focus of countless people''s attention.


    Newspapers were also printed one by one, and the navy was also rushing towards this side quickly.


    Even many big guys in the new world wanted toe over to see what was going on. Except for the Whitebeard Pirates, who had no movement, every other big pirate group wanted toe over and join in the fun.


    However, the battle between the two will definitely not be resolved in a short while. Although no one knows the extent of Chang Nuo''s strength? Of course, he himself also wanted to confirm.


    Although Wilbu is a rtively good practitioner, there is no need for Changnuo to spend too long in such a remote ce in the New World and cause too much noise.


    However, the other party is nowpletely like a demon. He haspletely lost his mind, and his powerful power is constantly venting out.


    It is precisely because of this that Wilbu does not have strong logical thinking ability, and all fighting seems to be just instinct.


    "Mr. Yixiao, who do you think will win in the battle between the two of them?"


    Marco emitted blue mes and stood in front of Gogoya, but Wild Mountain looked at the man standing next to him with a curious expression and asked with a smile.


    "It''s hard to determine the oue yet. His Majesty the King''s strength, even though we have been in contact for so long, we still don''t know how powerful he is!"


    Yixiao said calmly.


    "It''s really hard to say. The devil fruit phantom beast possessed by Wilbu not only has powerful attack capabilities, but also has powerful defense and healing capabilities. In addition to being abnormal in governance, it can be beaten in this world. I��m afraid not even a single hand can get past him.��


    Marco said.


    "It seems that you know this guy very well?" Gogoya asked curiously from behind.


    "Beyond the Yonko, how strong do you think he is?" Marco didn''t turn his face, but directly answered Gogoya''s question.


    "But what can we do now? We can''t keep watching like this!" Gogoya asked with a smile.


    "Let''s leave it like this for the time being. We have no way of interfering with His Majesty the King. Wilbu''s strength has indeed exceeded all of our imaginations. This is the first time I have seen such a powerful defensive capability."


    Yixiao was quite emotional. Although he couldn''t see what was in front of him, he could still sense the aura exuded by the opponent''s strength.


    In the ocean of the New World, you can meet any kind of people.


    Wilbu''s reputation actually shocked all the powerful people many years ago.


    After all, he could have severely damaged the admiral more than ten years ago, let alone his current opponent.


    The reason why not many people know about it is mainly because the Navy and the World Government have almostpletely suppressed this information, although no one knows what their intentions are? Coughing a guy is almost like a ticking time bomb.


    For such a powerful guy, not to mention the equally powerful Miss Ba Jin, it has been so long since the battle started for this woman. Three generals have dealt with her alone, and she still looks like she is not falling behind. It''s really disappointing. People have some doubts, how did the Rocks Pirates select these people?


    But the battle is still going on. The only difference is that Wilbu and Changnuo have begun to gradually move away from this area.


    Chang Nuo even kept guiding this guy to leave quickly in other directions, just to prevent him from causing serious harm to his people when he breaks out of the space barrier.


    In the struggle between the two of them, every attack can even destroy a small ind. Even if they stay on the sea, all the creatures in the sea under their feet can disappear.


    Even though Wilbu has such arge body, no matter his movement speed or defense speed, every item looks staggering, and all offense and defense arepleted in the blink of an eye.


    The scales emitting ck light on the body, even if they stand there motionless, make some people with weaker strength helpless.


    "Roar!!!!"


    At this moment, Wilbu looked like a human or a ghost. He had two huge horns on his head and his body was covered with scales. He yelled directly in the direction of Chang Nuo.


    At this moment, the opponent''s space distance was still around 30 meters. The two of them did not suffer any injuries during the attack and defense. On the contrary, they became more and more energetic as they fought.


    Immediately afterwards, two huge guys were like streams of light on the surface of the sea, and the impact of each collision could cause the greatest ripples.


    But what is the true extent?


    What stayed outside was just a mirror battle. The real Changnuo was hiding behind this space at the moment, sitting on a transparent chair under his buttocks, quietly watching the battle outside.


    All this is like a bystander, I''m afraid if you give him a handful of melon seeds and sit here, he can slowly eat them.


    What has always been shown in front of people is the problem of spatial mirroring. Even those who are around them, no one understands it.


    After all, this is hisst life-saving trump card. Although his strength in this world isparable to those on the top tower, no one knows what is hidden behind.


    While the two of them were fighting, the battle between the other party had already begun.


    Miss Ba Jin is just an old woman, but her strength should not be underestimated. Although she is not very tall, this woman moves faster than anyone can imagine. Even Enel, who is already known as the God of Thunder, In terms of movement speed, even the sight and sound Haki can no longer keep up with the opponent''s movement speed.


    But until now, the other party seems to be ying hide-and-seek with them, and they have never dealt with it seriously.


    Although the three of them were not defeated by this woman, the pride that had always belonged to them seemed to have been pressed to the ground and rubbed by the other at this moment.

 Chapter 326 I appear

    <h4>Chapter 326 I appear</h4>


    When the battle between the two parties hadsted for nearly two hours, Miss Ba Jin finally began to show signs of fatigue.


    At the same time, Enelu also began to give up the fight. He instantly arrived at the top mast of the ship and took away a red-colored crystal ball-like object ced on the top at an extremely fast speed. .


    The moment this thing broke away from the ship, Yixiao, who was on the Infinity, could directly perceive the specific situation on the ship the next second.


    Miss Ba Jin Zhongshan is so powerful that it is impossible to directly block the simultaneous attacks of four generals.


    "Gravity Knife~Meteor!!"


    The moment he could sense the opponent, General Yixiao didn''t hesitate at all. He quickly pulled out the knife in his hand and began to summon meteorites to attack.


    Moreover, the attack speed this time was obviously much faster. In less than five seconds, three consecutive meteorites began to appear in the sky.


    In terms of individualbat effectiveness, whether it is Wilbu or Miss Bajin, the strength of these two people is definitely at the pinnacle of this world, but their mistake is that they underestimated the strength of the Tru Empire.


    It always felt like this country had nobat experience, yet in the end it was able topete with the most powerful forces in the entire sea.


    But at least this battle can make them clearly see that the reason why the Toru Empire can be the emperor among the Four Emperors and One Emperor is not just a gimmick for others.


    Miss Ba Jin sensed the meteorites that were about to fall from the sky. The old woman no longer maintained her previous appearance, but gave people a ferocious look.


    "You bastards, my son is the biological son of that guy with white beard!!!"


    Miss Ba Jin roared loudly, but at this time Jun and the two who were fighting with him had already begun to retreat in other directions at an extremely fast speed.


    After all, both of them have seen Yixiao use this ability before. There is no need to exin how powerful the attack power is.


    Wilbu, who had been staying far away, also discovered this situation. He was already like a demon, but now he behaved even more terrifyingly.


    "Mother!!"


    Wilbu maintained hisst bit of rationality and looked at Miss Ba Jin in the distance and shouted softly.


    But then, his eyes, which had already be somewhat silent, once again glowed red.


    But this time it waspletely different. Orange mes began to burn all over his body, and sharp ws began to grow on his hands that were originally just covered with scales.


    He just waved suddenly at Chang Nuo, who was more than thirty meters tall not far away, but with the powerful force, the surrounding space began to shatteryer byyer like lens ss.


    This feeling is almost the same as Whitebeard''s Shock Fruit, the only difference is that he uses pure power.


    Chang Nuo was not to be outdone at all, and his entire huge height stood directly above the sea. Then his two arms suddenly straightened, and all his fists began to turn into pitch ck.


    Armed-colored domineeringbined with the entanglement of overlord-colored domineering, the two fists suddenly collided in front of the chest, but in the mouth, he shouted "Power of Space ~ Distortion!!"


    In an instant, the surrounding space seemed to have transformed into another form. Wilbu''s powerful attack flew directly over Chang Nuo and towards the sea beyond.


    The w''s attack directly caused three deep cracks to instantly appear on the sea surface. These marks were not slowly covered by the sea water until more than ten secondster.


    "I have no interest in ying with you anymore. Next, I will let you feel the strength of the Tru Empire!"


    Chang Nuo''s expression was serious, but then, this huge body of more than thirty meters suddenly disappeared, but at this moment, a ck crack appeared in the space.


    This crack is about 2m high and 1m wide.


    Then from this dark crack, a figure slowly walked out.


    However, who could this persone out if not Chang Nuo?


    But the image he came out this time waspletely different from before, because at this moment Chang Nuo was wearing a formal king''s costume. The beige clothes, the cor and cuffs were all made of golden gold rims, and the shirt on the chest belonged to With the cor pulled up, except for the fact that there is no crown on the head, the matching clothes in this life arepletely like a king.


    "It seems His Majesty is angry!"


    On the Infinity, Gogoya watched intently and said.


    "Why do you say that?"


    Gion asked suddenly curiously.


    "Bang!!!!"


    The moment he finished speaking, the meteorite summoned by General Yixiao fell directly into the sea.


    The fall of the meteorite this time waspletely different from the previous ones. The powerful impact instantly caused the small boat they were on to disappear into nothingness.


    Fortunately, Jun and the three of them ran rtively fast, and they were already running towards the Infinity as fast as possible before Yun Shi fell.


    If it wereter, we still don��t know what the oue would be like waiting for them.


    But even so, the three people were still affected by the impact of the falling meteorite.


    Although they don''t know whether they killed Miss Ba Jin directly, they also have no such illusion. The weakness of the powerful attack power is that the movement speed is too slow. When this kind of attack arrives, people will not know it for a long time. Ran somewhere.


    The shock wave caused by the meteorite directly caused a new wave of tsunami to form again, although it is not known whether it will have any impact on normal people in other ces? But now no one can care about such considerations.


    In the already unstable sea of ??the New World, disaster-level situations ur one after another.


    Anyway, no more people care about the life or death of the old woman now. All eyes are focused on Chang Nuo and Wilbu who are further away.


    After Chang Nuo appeared, he walked on the ground with a long sword more than 1m long. This one was the demon sword Muramasa that had been silent for a long time.


    In recent years, his figure has been hidden in Chang Nuo''s space. However, in the situation encountered this time, Chang Nuo also did not want to expose all his strength.


    The entire de of Demon Sword Muramasa seemed to be in a state of excitement at this moment, with a dazzling red light shining from the handle to the de.


    At this moment, he looks extremely evil. Even from a long distance, these people can feel the intelligent aura on the sword. The key is that the demon sword Muramasa has not been pulled out of the scabbard. .


    "What''s happening here?"


    Marco asked curiously.


    "Is it possible that you have done so much research and still don''t know that our King was actually a very powerful swordsman in the beginning?"


    Gogoya asked a little confused.


    "Swordsman???"


    Gion can''t believe his ears now? But in his impression, he really didn''t know who he heard mention that Emperor Tru was a master of swordsmanship.


    But there are probably only a few people who really know that Chang Nuo is still a swordsman and take this matter seriously, not even many people from his own country.

 Chapter 327 The Great Swordsman

    <h4>Chapter 327 The Great Swordsman</h4>


    In fact, when a person bes stronger, everyone''s focus is on what kind of Devil Fruit ability he uses.


    As for the things that were not surprising before, or the abilities that were not very outstanding, others seemed to be shielding themselves and no longer paid attention to them.


    But even so, these people are still confused. Even if Emperor Tru has achieved sess in swordsmanship at his age, how powerful can he be?


    Such a powerful spatial ability can''t do anything to the opponent, let alone just rely on swordsmanship.


    Wilbu''s strength is obviously higher than that of the Four Emperors. Even if it is Hawkeye, the world''s greatest swordsman, I am afraid that under such circumstances, the sh from his hand will not be able to hurt the opponent at all.


    "The aura of King Tru seems to be different from before? It seems to be more powerful now!"


    Jozi opened his mouth and said doubtfully.


    "It''s ability. The Tohru boy you saw before was not him. This one is the real him now!"


    As soon as Qiaozi finished speaking, Whitebeard, who had been watching the situation here through the phone bug, opened his mouth and said directly.


    Just through projection, when Whitebeard saw Chang Nuo walking out of space, even he was a little unbelievable.


    After all, the two of them had fought each other once. Although they were a little confused at that time, they didn��t take it too seriously. But when I saw it this time, even though I was not present, I could still judge some of them. Clues.


    Chang Nuo''s momentum at this moment is indeed much stronger than before, and his entire expression has be much colder. There is not much emotion on his face. Even facing a person as powerful as Wilbu, he still maintains a very strong expression. Peace of mind.


    "I''ve been ying with you for so long, it must be time to end it!"


    Chang Nuo spoke calmly, with a slightly evil smile on his lips.


    Muramasa, the demon sword, no longer needed him to pull it out, and he instantly soared into the sky uncontrobly.


    The powerful evil aura instantly enveloped the entire barrier space.


    Even people outside can feel this fierceness.


    Wilbu took a step back instinctively, his two blood-red eyes still staring closely at Chang Nuo who was standing over there.


    And the other party was still walking towards him calmly step by step on the sea.


    Even though the body is exuding the ultimate orange-red me, the temperature is so high that even the surrounding space can be burned and distorted.


    But now he was facing the real Chang Nuo, and the beast-like evil aura slowly began to disappear.


    The next second, the demon sword Muramasa, which had been hovering around Changnuo, fell directly into his hands.


    In an instant, the sword and the person seemed to merge together. Chang Nuo''s eyes suddenly glowed red, and his body began to exude a coquettish red aura.


    Every time he took a step forward, Xiao Huang''s sea water dispersed automatically as if he felt fear.


    Although it has been suspended above the sea, the seawater under its feet has formed spiral whirlpools.


    Wilbu''s savage aura that had been silent seemed to be growing crazily at this moment. The mes on his body suddenly began to spread, and even the sea water burned at the same time.


    The surrounding air has formed a scorching high temperature, and the space has be distorted, as if General Yixiao was using the Gravity Sword Tiger.


    "Flying Sword Style~Dragon Nest sh!!"


    Chang Nuo borrowed the power of space and took a step forward, and his whole person disappeared in an instant.


    The moment it reappeared, it didn''t even take a second. In almost the blink of an eye, an attack had already been shed out.


    The ck sh struck from bottom to top, and when it hit Wilbu, there was a dull sound of "Hang~". The opponent did not suffer much damage, but the ck scales on his body moved towards him. Three or four pieces fell from the sea, and blood began to slowly drip down from the chest.


    However, in the sky behind at this moment, the originally sparse white clouds have been directly divided into two parts by this sh. The huge traces can be clearly seen almost hundreds of miles away.


    "Great Swordsman!!!"


    Gion''s tone was already so shocked that he was speaking incoherently. Who would have thought that Emperor Tohru not only had such a powerful Devil Fruit ability, but that his own strength was actually at the level of a great swordsman.


    It is really unimaginable that even if this guy started cultivating from his mother''s womb, it would be impossible for him to achieve such achievements by now.


    At a little over 20 years old, Gion could imagine that the two were simr in age, but they were actually very different in terms of strength.


    Gion has entered the navy since she was six years old, and starts endless hard training every day. Despite this, so far, she is still just a swordsman.


    But even so, being able to be a swordsman has already made him a leader. How many people in the entire navy canpete with him?


    But now when he saw the man in front of him, he couldpletely crush him in terms of devil fruit abilities, status, and current swordsmanship.


    This can really make people think that he is apletely abnormal existence.


    Such a powerful sh only left a moderate scar on Wilbu''s body in the end. It could even be said that it only cut off a few of his scales.


    But even so, Wilbu''s face instantly began to show a painful expression.


    Muramasa held the demon sword in his hand, perhaps because of the unprecedented pleasure he felt with this weapon. The blood-red color on the sword became even more intense, and even Changnuo himself looked extremely weird.


    But this knife is just the beginning.


    The mes on Wilbu''s body made it impossible for ordinary people to get close to him. Even Chang Nuo could only approach from another space.


    The scales on the opponent''s body are already much more powerful than the defense capabilities of anything. Even if it is an artifact like the demon sword Muramasa, coupled with the blessing of such a powerful space force, in the end these attacks are still powerful for the opponent. It''s pitifully weak.


    After every battle, Chang Nuo immediately hid his body in a different space, not because he didn''t dare to face it directly, but mainly because even he couldn''t bear the mes emanating from Wilbu''s body.


    "Roar!!!!"


    Because he could not hit his body, Wilbu roared angrily, but even so, shes were still attacking his body from different directions.

 Chapter 328 The Power of Space—Seal

    <h4>Chapter 328 The Power of Space��Seal</h4>


    Even though the domineering power of knowledge in this guy can achieve the effect of predicting the future, his biggest shoring at present is that he has no sense.


    If he were smarter, Chang Nuo would still not be his opponent even if he had super powerful space power.


    Changnuo himself can clearly understand this. If the other party has a high enough IQ, it would be extremely difficult to find someone who can deal with him in the entire pirate world.


    But precisely because of this, the spiritual Devil Fruit, such as the Psychic System, has little effect on the opponent in the end.


    On the sea, because of the battle between the two people, every time the demon sword Muramasa struck, the scars left behind could be considered shocking.


    The traces of white clouds in the sky could not be more obvious.


    The battle continues, even if Muramasa uses the demon sword to attack, it''s just that this time it''s much better than before.


    At least it canpletely make Wilbu start to get hurt, and the blood flowing out of his body falls on the sea drop by drop.


    The mes burning on his body started to cover arge area, but now they have gradually begun to dissipate invisible.


    Wilbu was also like a ferocious beast, struggling in the end. When Chang Nuo could not be found, he used his sharp ws and began to attack randomly without any target.


    The opponent is now at the end of his battle, posing no threat at all.


    "The power of space ~ seal..."


    Chang Nuo once again walked out of a space crack, but this time the attack was different. He directly put the demon sword Muramasa back into the scabbard, and then slowly put the sword into his waist.


    After walking out this time, blue light began to sh in his hands. The power of space and the diamond chains spread from the palm of his hand against the sea towards the direction of Wilbu at an extremely fast speed.


    But at the moment when they were about to make contact, a ck crack also began to appear on the sea surface under Wilbu''s feet, and the other party fell directly into it without any resistance.


    Immediately afterwards, the sea continued to return to its original calm appearance, but there was no sign of the other party.


    This time the attack hadpletely failed. Chang Nuo didn''t even show any surprise, feeling that everything was normal.


    Miss Ba Jin did not use any Devil Fruit abilities from the beginning to the end. Even in the face of such arge attack from Yixiao, in the end everyone thought she was wiped out in the sea. It didn��t take a second thought to know that this situation must have something to do with her. .


    The sea surface once again returned to its original calm state, and the repairs on the sea surface made it seem like this had never happened.


    Except for the white clouds in the sky, which still retain the traces of the battle just now, the rest is almost like a dream, without any records.


    Chang Nuo was suspended in ce, and slowly retracted the diamond chain he had released. He just waved his left hand towards the sky, and the folding space barriers originally arranged also dissipated invisible in the next second.


    This time can be regarded as a victory or a defeat, but no matter what the situation is, the strength disyed by the Tru Empire is enough to be recognized by any force in the world.


    I''m afraid no one will ever think that a country located all over the world is just a power in name only.


    Although it won''t be live broadcast around the world this time, even so, it is estimated that tomorrow''s headlines in all news newspapers will be about dominating the screen.


    Although they were only fighting on the sea and did not have much impact, the problem of tsunamis caused by the aftermath of their battle will definitely be the main situation they will face next.


    After the battle with Chang Nuo, he didn''t have the slightest nostalgia. Wilbu leaving or staying had no effect on him. In this world, Wilbu was still the one who stood at the top of strength.


    Whitebeard, who was thousands of miles away, also saw all this. Even though there was no one else on the boat at the moment, Whitebeard still frowned.


    He knew very well the character of Miss Ba Jin, but all this had not been announced to anyone.


    Back on the ship, the fighting style disyed by Chang Nuo this time directly taught everyone aplete lesson and demonstrated the majesty of an emperor.


    Strength is always the most important thing in this world. If you are strong, even if you are wrong, you will probably be right.


    When Chang Nuo returned to the ship, he appeared in his true form. It was not the same as before. What always remained in front of the stage was a spatial mirror, and he was only hidden behind the scenes from beginning to end.


    Even if someone wants to do harm to him, no matter what the circumstances, it is impossible to cause any harm to him.


    This situation has been the same since Changnuo ate the second Devil Fruit. Changnuo has almost always maintained this normal state.


    In the past few years, almost no one has actually seen me, even the people around me.


    "Your Majesty the King!"


    As soon as they got on the boat, headed by Jun He, everyone lowered their heads, bent their bodies, and saluted Chang Nuo respectfully.


    "How are you doing normally? You''re doing just fine now. There''s no need to act so strangely!"


    The corners of Chang Nuo''s mouth raised slightly and he spoke calmly.


    But even so, the imperial domination he exuded still made them afraid to raise their heads.


    "What exactly is going on?"


    Gion also felt inexplicable pressure. From the moment Changnuo boarded the ship, she was basically like everyone else, keeping her head down and unable to lift it up for some reason.


    So based on this doubt, Gion gently tugged the corner of Gogoya''s clothes next to him, and then asked in a low voice.


    "I''ll tell youter!"


    Gogoya said.


    But her voice was very low, as if she didn''t dare to speak.


    The other three people on the ship who were not part of the Tohru Empire, Marco and Jinbe, all swallowed their saliva inexplicably. This sense of oppression was something these people had never experienced before.


    Opposite the phone bug at this moment, Whitebeard was also watching all this. After Emperor Trunuo appeared, he always felt that this person had changed a lot.


    Although it is clear that this is not the one I have encountered before, the rtively big changes in their personality or other aspects still make everyone a little surprised.


    It''s just that due to the situation in front of them, none of them opened their mouths. They could only wait quietly for Emperor Tru to open his mouth again, as if everyone was waiting for trial.

 Chapter 329 The power that shocked the world

    <h4>Chapter 329 The power that shocked the world</h4>


    Chang Nuo, who originally appeared in front of everyone all the time, seems to be rtively quiet, but overall he feels rtively easy to get in touch with.


    But the one who appears now is more indifferent, so indifferent that he doesn''t even have the courage to let others look at him.


    The ability of the Psychic Devil Fruit not only increased Changnuo''s personal charm, but also allowed him to slowly release his domineering aura.


    These people have either been in contact for a long time or are rtively powerful. If some strange ordinary people were staying next to him, I am afraid they would have been kneeling on the ground by now and would not be able to get up at all.


    From the very first moment he ate the Heart Devil Fruit, he had already begun to experience an uncontroble and rapid increase in his domineering aura.


    In this world, when cultivating Overlord''s Haki, the most powerful ones are only attacks that cause substantial damage.


    But now the Emperor Tru in front of him can build on this to a higher level.


    Although the coercion of the overlord''s domineering energy is not used very often, the overlord''s domineering energy released invisibly can still make many people feel inexplicable pressure.


    Among the people at the scene, except for Yixiao, who was invisible and rtively powerful, they were not affected in any way. Others more or less all felt the fear caused by this invisible pressure.


    "His Majesty King Tohru, now that the matter at hand has been resolved, if it is convenient for you, you can just find a small ind to put us down. At that time, we can just go back to the territory of the Whitebeard Pirates. "


    Marco stepped forward and said.


    "It doesn''t have to be like this. I''d better go with you next time. I also want to ask the old man something."


    Chang Nuo said, and the moment he finished speaking, he began to walk towards the hole on the deck of the Infinity.


    If this thing relies on the people of the current Tru Empire to repair it, it is basically a fantasy.


    Although such high-tech things have not had much impact on the Infinity so far.


    But at least it makes people feel very unhappy in terms of appearance, so the next way to proceed can only be repaired through the ability of the system space.


    Walking to the side of the damaged hole, Chang Nuo stretched his head slightly and looked inside. The inside was still the same as before, with a huge hole disyed in front of everyone.


    Chang Nuo shook his head, and then waved his right hand in the direction of the hole. The hole that was still shing with electric light returned to its original appearance in the next second.


    Although the others were shocked by such a performance, no one opened their mouths to speak.


    "Hai Ling, start setting off."


    Chang Nuo shouted indifferently, then raised his head and looked at the sea in the distance.


    In fact, his stay here made everyone feel ufortable. At least this inexplicable pressure always lingered on their heads, making them maintain a respectful and serious attitude at all times.


    The ship began to move slowly, but the group of people on the deck remained the same as before.


    At leastpared to the situation when we first set out, the atmosphere here was obviously much more serious.


    Chang Nuo didn''t say anything, he just stood there quietly watching the sea in front of him for a while, and then touched the space in front of him with his right hand.


    Then a ck space crack appeared again, without taking into ount everyone''s thoughts. After Chang Nuo walked in, as the space crack closed, another mirror image appeared in front of everyone.


    But this time, what appeared was the same as before. The feeling of pressure that originally made everyone feel disappeared in an instant.


    In fact, this situation is also very troublesome for Chang Nuo, who is the main body. The domineering overlord color is too powerful, causing things beyond his control to begin to leak out. Anyone who stays around him will be affected by this. At first, he stayed in the space. The purpose of using the mirror body to appear to the outside world is to prevent the day when one''s emotions may not be out of control, and the overlord''s domineering energy is too powerful and directly affects other people.


    Even if he stays in the space, although the external mirror''s practical abilities have been reduced to arge extent, Changnuo''s strength is still at the level of the four emperors.


    ording to the current strength ssification, Emperor Toru''s strength has long been above that of the Four Emperors, and has even reached the king stage. However, in the entire pirate world, although the Navy and the Four Emperors are seemingly the most powerful, But everyone who knows knows that there may be a more powerful person hidden in a certain corner of this world.


    This time Emperor Tru walked out of the space he had been hiding in and faced the rtively powerful Wilbu. With this piece of news alone, he was able to dominate the headlines of the news page.


    The facts were as expected. In less than half a day, the whole world had been refreshed by this piece of news.


    "How terrifying is the strength of the emperor of the Four Seas Land?"


    Just such a news newspaper has fallen into the hands of countless people at this moment. Everyone is observing today''s situation with relish. Many big forces also expressed silent sighs.


    The strength of the Toru Empire was based on the strength of this country from the very beginning, which made it possible for them to be the Four Emperors and One Emperor. However, at the beginning, this title was indeed only a blessing to the identity of this country.


    But from this time on, no one will dare to question the fishery involved.


    Whether it was Emperor Toru or the generals under him, their extremely destructive aggressiveness instantly calmed down all the people who were eyeing the Toru Empire.


    The only one who is not surprised at all should be the group of people belonging to the World Government. For them, these things happening are simply a matter of course.


    So from beginning to end, for them, surprise had no effect at all. After all, among those who invested in the investigation of the Tru Empire, the World Government ranked second, and no one probably dared to im the first ce.


    Even if so many people are dispatched to investigate, the royal pce of the Tru Empire will always be a forbidden area for their CP investigators.


    No matter what, in the end no one coulde out after entering. Regarding this point, people on both sides almost tacitly acquiesced that this kind of thing would happen, and no one would mention it to the outside world.


    For those investigators, death is death. Although it has created some value, it is not as great as imagined.

 Chapter 330 Perros’ concerns

    <h4>Chapter 330 Perros�� concerns</h4>


    After the Infinity voyage, newspapers all over the world have been snapped up, and everyone is paying collective attention to this matter.


    After all, just one day ago, they had just received thetest newspaper, which was still about the situation of the Tru Empire.


    The only difference is that thest time the Tohru Empire was the Hard Steel Draco, this newspaper was printed again and again, and all the versions almost fixed the headlines of the newspaper on this picture.


    As long as themon people or other forces who know the existence of Tianlong people have different opinions on this incident.


    The image of the Tru Empire to others waspletely different from the moment the Celestial Dragons appeared.


    Even when many pirates saw this newspaper, they had already begun to take down their pirate gs and wanted to join the Toru Empire in order not to live a humble life in front of others.


    Many pirates do not join this group voluntarily. The reason why they live a life of licking blood on the edge of a knife is simply to survive.


    Many people have simr experiences on this point, unless they are just willing to take risks on the sea, so they hang the pirate g.


    But the more reason is actually that I have no choice but to embark on this road because I can''t survive.


    When the first newspaper came out, everyone was still carefully savoring the grievances between the Tru Empire and the Tianlong people, but they had not finished reading the newspaper. The second one came right after, just one dayter. , the Tru Empire showed everyone the strength of this country.


    The level of surprise in the previous era has not increased yet. When the poprity is rising, all newspapers are still publishing the previous photos and the scene of the entanglement between the Tru Empire and the Tianlong people.


    The previous ones haven''t even been printed yet, but the big news timees again. This time, although there are no more pictures to describe it, for others, it is considered that Emperor Tru has beenpletely remembered.


    The country located in thend of four seas is not as weak as imagined, and has even be stronger than everyone imagined.


    "Mamamama~, this Emperor Tru really likes me. I didn''t expect that the previous things haven''t fallen into ce yet, and a new wave of big news has startedter!"


    The huge cake ind once again heardughter that made everyone cheer. The flowers, nts and trees outside the room were all dancing happily because of thisughter.


    Big Mom was lying on the ground enjoying herself, smiling unscrupulously, still holding thetest newspaper in her hand, and she couldn''t bear to miss any of the words on it. She had read it once,ughed once, and then picked it up again. Those who taste carefully.


    But as he smiled, his expression gradually began to solidify. He really couldn''t bear to miss any of the content in the newspaper, but he found a name on it that she would probably never forget.


    "I didn''t expect it was him?"


    bigmom said with some surprise.


    "Mom, did you find something wrong?"


    asked Charlotte Katakuri, one of the men who had been standing next to him.


    "That''s right, Mom, did something happy happen?"


    Charlotte Dafu, who was standing next to him, also asked.


    "This is a man who calls himself Edward Wilbur. He is so powerful that not even Kaido dares to confront him head-on!"


    "Is there really such a thing?"


    Katakuri asked in disbelief.


    "You don''t understand this. As early as more than ten years ago, Navy Headquarters General Iron Fist Zefa had his arm broken directly by this man. At that time, his strength could be said to be so powerful that it surpassed all of us. It''s just that I didn��t expect that this guy, King Tru, could actually surpass him?" Bigmom said seriously.


    "I also noticed that the newspaper mentioned that Tohru used the Devil Fruit''s space-based ability, and at the end, he also said that he would be a great swordsman. This is indeed a bit incredible, at such a young age. Being able to do so much is really unimaginable.��


    Charlotte Smoothie, the tallest woman standing among the people, said.


    "You can never imagine the achievements of some people. Katakuri, have you ever investigated what Emperor Tru''s goal is when hees to the new world?"


    Bigmom sat up directly, looked at his son and asked.


    "Sorry, Mom. There are no specific investigation results on this matter yet, and few people in the Tru Empire know much about this matter."


    Katakuri lowered his head slightly and said.


    "Ah, Mom, no matter why the other person came to the new world, I think we should invite each other?"


    Charlotte Perros stuck out her big tongue and licked the lollipop on the crutch in her hand.


    This one is the eldest son of Big Mom, but this image does make people feel a little strange.


    Hearing this, BigMom suddenly became interested, scratched his face, and then the smile on his face suddenly increased, and he immediately said to Peros, "Peros, I leave this matter to you, invite Emperor Tru toe. Attend Cake Ind''s annual tea party.


    Katakuri, you are responsible for selecting the daughters who are not yet married. When the timees, Emperor Tru will choose. No matter which one the other party likes, even which ones he likes can be taken away by him. mamamama~��


    Bigmom started to get excited just thinking about it. Shepletely ignored the feelings of the children standing in front of her, and even started to drool over the tea party she was preparing for next.


    "Okay, Mom, let''s get ready."


    Katakuri and Peros nodded together and said.


    After saying that, a group of brothers and sisters began to walk out of Big Mom''s room.


    Standing not far from the door, Peros still stuck out his long tongue and looked at Katakuri walking in front and asked, "Katakuri, you are the only person on our side who hase into contact with Emperor Tru. Can you tell me how you feel first? It will also help me figure out how to get in touch with you in the next step."


    "When big brother said this, I became interested. I wonder if I can listen in?"


    Smoothie walked over and said with a smile on his face.


    "A very scary guy, and this was four years ago. It is not difficult to see from the newspapers this time that even the Navy and the World Government are very afraid of him. My mother''s expression just now said it all."


    "I want to know what his character is like?"


    Perros opened his mouth and asked again.


    He was not interested in the other party''s strength, and he had reason to believe that this time it was an invitation from Cake Ind. In any case, the other party would not be able to attack him directly.

 Chapter 331 Reactions between major forces

    <h4>Chapter 331 Reactions between major forces</h4>


    To be honest, Peros may be stronger in Cake Ind, and he has no scruples no matter what he does.


    But now they were facing someone who had just experienced a battle before, and was so powerful that even their own mother was a little scared.


    So even if he goes to invite him this time, Peros needs to at least know enough about the other party''s situation before he can go.


    Katakuri thought about it for a moment. He secretly went to the South China Sea countries a few years ago and followed the merchant ship there. At that time, Katakuri''s strength was far behind what it is now, but even if In this way, when he faced Emperor Tru, he still felt inexplicable pressure, lingering around him.


    In fact, a few years ago, the Toru Empire was far less powerful than it is now, but its strength wasparable to that of the Four Emperors.


    At first, Katakuri did go ording to Big Mom''s order, hoping that he would choose one of his sisters to marry him, but at that time, Changnuo immediately recognized Katakuri when he saw her. , and even made it clear directly what the other party��s purpose was.


    This idea of ??being able to see through everything gave Katakuri a chilling feeling.


    Changnuo still had a pretty good impression of this guy, whether it was from Katakuri in the original plot or after meeting him now.


    This guy probably has a remarkable personality except for his ugly mouth.


    In terms of strength, it can be recognized by everyone. If it were not for the effect of the protagonist''s halo in the original plot, Katakuri would probably be able to defeat ten Luffies.


    He stood there for a moment, recalling everything about their first meeting, and then looked at his brother and said seriously, "Emperor Tru is different from other people. You don''t need to y any tricks in front of him. He seems to be able to check It''s the same as our inner thoughts. In his eyes, everything seems to have been known in advance as to the purpose of the visit.


    At least this is my feeling, and it is not difficult to see from the newspapers this time that the opponent''s strength has be so strong that we are desperate. At the same time, those who followed him into the new world also include several generals from their kingdom. Human strength is, by every estimate, superior to that of you and me.


    But if I just invite the other party to the cake ind tea party, I think there shouldn''t be any problem. "


    "What kind of person is he that can make you give such a high evaluation?"


    Smoothie asked with a puzzled look on his face. He had never seen his brother who could make such a bigment to outsiders, but her knowledge of Emperor Tru was only limited to newspapers.


    "What kind of person do you think a person who has reached the top of the world in his twenties will be?"


    Katakuri said this calmly without any expression.


    Perros didn''t speak for a long time, and kept twirling his tongue in front of him, which seemed to make the others extremely ufortable.


    "I''ve already told you the matter. It''s up to you to decide how to do it. Anyway, no matter what, just give your mother an exnation."


    Katakuri said, then continued walking forward with a cold expression.


    "Brother Peros, it seems that Emperor Tru is not a very easy to get in touch with?"


    Smoothie said.


    "It doesn''t matter. We''ll discuss the details after we meet."


    Perros said, but he was actually already panicking in his heart.


    Even when facing other people in the sea, Huang would not show such an expression. After all, for these people, bigmom has enough strength topete with them, but it is different when facing this other one. Mr. Emperor Tru Not to mention the strength of the country, even the strength of the individual has made their mother fearful, let alone the strength of a country, even the navy does not dare to act rashly.


    But everything still needs to be done, and even if he doesn''t do it, there will always be other brothers and sisters who do it.


    On the other side of the new world.


    This is just a lonely big ship sailing on the sea. There are also so many people on the ship, more than 20 people. Although it is not a lot, it is not too few.


    Everyone on red-haired Shanks'' ship was gathered together, looking at the newspaper held in the hands of their deputy captain.


    After all, others were eager to know about such a sensational matter. As for their captain Shanks, he was lying there drunk at this time.


    "What is this talking about?"


    When a group of people crowded together to watch, a short, fat man holding a big chicken leg took a bite and asked curiously to the others next to him.


    "Emperor Tru of the South China Sea hase to the new world, and it seems he doesn''t know what kind of bloody storm he will cause!"


    said Jesus, the ship''s sniper.


    "The fact that they came to the new world was announced yesterday, wasn''t it? Why are you still so curious today?"


    Lakilu asked curiously.


    Because when they saw a new newspaper yesterday, everyone was surprised. Emperor Tru, who was in the South China Sea, actually brought several generals from his country to the New World. He was still there. They spected whether it was rted to the battle for territory in the New World, but in the end, their vice-captain reminded them that this group of people must have a different purpose ining to the New World, so this spection was put to rest in the end.


    But Lakilu looked at the group of people staring at the newspaper with equally shocked expressions, so he was a little confused. He was obviously shocked by something yesterday. Why was he still so shocked when he mentioned it again today?


    He only cares about eating what is in his mouth, and does not pay attention to many things at all.


    And with such a big body, he couldn''t squeeze into the crowd. When he saw a newspaper, he could only look at them with shocked expressions.


    "I didn''t expect that Emperor Tru had already done a big thing as soon as he came to the new world. It seems that they can''t wait to show off the power of their country."


    Beckman, the deputy leader of the red-haired pirates said.


    "We all know the situation of Edward Wilbur, but we just can''t imagine how they bumped into each other?"


    Jesus asked.


    "It should be the old woman''s problem. The biggest image the Tru Empire disys to the outside world is that they are very rich. After several years of development, it is estimated that the amount of money has been beyond the imagination of others. That old woman likes money so much, she must be I also went for this aspect, but I didn��t expect that the opponent��s strength would be so strong.��


    Beckman was also very curious, but unfortunately this time it ended too quickly. The record from front to back was only four hours, and he had already defeated Wilbu.

 Chapter 332 Next Destination

    <h4>Chapter 332 Next Destination</h4>


    After all, as the top powerhouses on the sea, if the battle between them is experienced, it is possible for them to fight for half a month, but the gap between the strength of the two parties is indeed beyond imagination. The strongest man in the apex world ended the battle in just four hours.


    No one in their group underestimates Edward Wilbu''s strength. Simrly, they know Wilbu very well, a powerful and almost unscrupulous guy.


    But just because of this, they were shocked that Emperor Tru had defeated the opponent in just four hours.


    Although the newspaper reported that Wilbu escaped in the end and did not suffer much substantial damage, this already exined a big problem.


    This battle did indeed reflect the powerful strength of the Toru Empire. At least they will not let those among the top forces dare to underestimate the strength of the Toru Empire.


    Just one battle can make everyone clearly understand what the Tru Empire looks like today. The Four Emperors and One Emperor were not just used to show off.


    "Why should we pay attention to this kind of situation? It has nothing to do with our pirate group anyway. We should still eat and drink. There is no need to pay too much attention to other things."


    Lakilu said with an indifferent expression.


    Anyway, no matter who enters the new world, he has nothing to do with their red-haired pirates. He is broad-minded and fat, so he is probably talking about such a person.


    But Ben Beckman has a different view. As the core brain of the entire pirate group, this guy has already figured out that the problem is not simple just from a newspaper.


    First of all, since yesterday, everyone has been wondering why the Tru Empire has nothing to do in the South China Sea, so why does it want to go to the New World? They brought so many powerful people to the new world at the same time. What was their purpose?


    All these problems are still unknown. It is obviously a first-level member country of the World Government, but in the end, it actually insulted the Tianlong people in front of so many people and angrily criticized the Navy Headquarters Admiral. This situation does not look like it. This is what a world government member country can do.


    Besides, he didn''t believe that this country would go to the New World to get a share of the pie. Now that everything had been sorted out, the remaining questions would be those that lingered in their minds. .


    "Everyone is getting ready to leave. This time we are going to Beihai. In a short time, we will not be participating in these things in the New World."


    Ben Beckman shouted directly to everyone.


    He is only the deputy captain on this ship, and he can also directly override the captain in certain orders.


    No one had any objections to Fang Da''s order. Although they were a little confused, they started to start the ship and move in another direction.


    Today''s New World is already lively enough. If another Tru Empire is added to join in the fun, not to mention these four emperors on the sea of ??the New World, even the Navy Headquarters and the World Government will probably have a headache.


    But at this time, Chang Nuo, they still maintained the same attitude as before in their previous voyage. The Infinity was sailing quickly on this calm sea and was heading towards the goal they had set beforehand.


    "Gogoya, the guy who informed Dressrosa said we expected to arrive this evening."


    Changnuo was lying on the lounge chair outside, drinking an iced drink leisurely, and then said to Gogoya who was also lying next to him.


    Gion is also lying here. The two of them are almost dressed in the same way. The bikini suits they have worn all their lives look particrly seductive and charming.


    Everyone wears big sunsses on their faces. Although the sky is only cloudy at this time, the temperature makes people feel a bit sultry.


    After hearing what His Majesty the King said, Gogoya immediately sat up and said, "Your Majesty the King, the other party had contacted him an hour ago, and also stated that he woulde to greet him in person."


    "I''m a trash among trash. It''s no big deal if I don''t wee you or not. I''m just curious about some things, so I just went over and asked."


    Chang Nuo said with his eyes closed, without any expression on his face, as if he didn''t care much about this matter.


    "Did you go over to meet Domingo?"


    Gion asked.


    "It''s really troublesome!"


    Chang Nuo said, then slowly opened his eyes, andy there turning his head to look in the direction of Gogoya.


    Theparison between women has begun not to be based on the height of standing, but the height of lying down. From what aspect? This woman Gion is indeed slightly better than Gogoya.


    After just one nce, Chang Nuo ignored the woman. Instead, hey there with his eyes closed and muttered to himself, "Who on earth will be imprisoned there?"


    Although the people on the Infinity are not like the Pirates, who will hold arge banquet and get drunk when they have nothing to do, but the people on the Infinity are also not boring. After all, the entertainment facilities in the cruise ship are always included. There are still quite a lot of them. Most of them usually go to the gym or other entertainment facilities in the room to y when they have nothing to do.


    These modern high-tech equipment almost kept them in a state of lingering. Although this group of people did not have much authority on the ship, they could still enter and exit the rooms of these entertainment facilities at will.


    But for them, the biggest enjoyment every day is to lie here and enjoy the sunrise, sunset and the scenery on the sea. From time to time, they can even appreciate the two beauties on the ship.


    After all, there were too many things that they couldn''t do, and it wasn''t just the people from the Tru Empire on the ship, the two guys from the Whitebeard Pirates and the guy from Fish-Man Ind were all hanging out here every day. Mixed drinks.


    Of course, after a few days of sailing, they gradually became familiar with each other.


    From time to time, we would sit together to drink and discuss other situations. Anyway, we could learn a lot from each other.


    At the end of the previous battle with Wilbur, Mark personally treated Moshank, who had been seriously injured.


    This guy''s Devil Fruit ability has to be said to be quite good indeed.


    But simrly, they now have to follow the direction of the Infinity, and finally they can only reach the Whitebeard Pirates.

 Chapter 333 Dressrosa

    <h4>Chapter 333 Dressrosa</h4>


    Everything seemed rtively normal now and was proceeding in an orderly manner, so by the evening of the next day, they had arrived at a new target location.


    This ce looks like a rocky country, at least from the outside. They are all at least 100 meters above the sea.


    This is the country of Dressrosa. It can even be said to be just an ind, because the country''snd area is not asrge as imagined. Adding up all the area, I am afraid that even the smallest ind in the Tru Empire is now Mostly not.


    But in a ce like the New World, Dressrosa''s reputation has long been known to everyone in the New World.


    The port here is not particrlyrge, and the construction is extremely simple, just a rtively long wooden nk road.


    But connecting the entire ind is a long staircase, which looks somewhat simr to the feeling of Mariejoia where the Draco people live.


    "Dong dong~"


    As the knock on the door rang, Chang Nuo had already stayed in his room and fell asleep.


    What else could I do if I didn''t sleep at this time, but I didn''t expect it to be here so soon.


    But there is no need for Chang Nuo to get up and go to open the door. Gogoya, who is standing outside and knocking on the door, has the right to open the door.


    After knocking twice, Gogoya opened the door and said to Changnuo who was lying on the bed, "Your Majesty, Dressrosa has arrived. Should we disembark now? Or wait until tomorrow morning?" Landing on the ind?��


    "s~"


    Chang Nuo sat up directly. The moment he heard the knock on the door, he waspletely awake.


    Looking at Gogoya standing in front of the bed, in this dim light, he stood upright at the door, and the door of the room was not even closed.


    "It''s better to go now. I don''t know how many people will pay attention to it tomorrow morning."


    Chang Nuo said helplessly.


    "Okay, Your Majesty the King, I''ll go over and make arrangements right away."


    Gogoya said, then slowly exited the room and closed the door.


    At this time, in the port of Dressrosa, even though it was already midnight, there were still a lot of people standing here.


    The one standing at the front is Domingo, the current king here. As for the man next to him, he has a face full of snot and a guy with snot on his body. It is probably disgusting no matter how you look at it. Others They are all members of the Domingo family.


    At least being able to have Domingoe to greet him in person proved how much he took this matter seriously.


    "Oh? I really didn''t expect that the King of Dressrosa, Domingo, woulde to greet us in person!"


    As soon as Changnuo and his party got off the boat, they directly saw their group of people from the Don Quixote family.


    Chang Nuo even pretended to be a little surprised and said.


    "Fufufufu~, it is truly an honor for us to be able toe to greet Emperor Tru."


    Domingo said with a smile.


    While speaking, he had already started to take a few steps forward.


    This was the first time the two people met, and they met in the middle of the night.


    Almost all the people from the Don Quixote family have arrived, and each of them maintains a serious image, obviously attaching great importance to this reception.


    At least it''s not because the Tru Empire is stronger than them, that''s why they are like this.


    "Domingo!"


    Marco stayed behind and muttered to himself, looking at Domingo''s figure.


    The others were also awake and followed him with curious faces.


    At least they also want to know what Dressrosa looks like today? As the Shichibukai Domingo who belongs to the World Government, he is definitely a standout, a guy who was notified by ck and White. Others are also curious about what kind of character this person is.


    Chang Nuo stood there and carefully looked at these members of the Don Quixote family. He was not interested in the other people''s weaklings at all. I was also interested in a little girl, but I didn''t see it this time.


    "I really wee Emperor Tru. Dover has been waiting here for a long time. This is not the ce for conversation. Everyone from the Tru Empire, pleasee to the pce to talk!"


    At this time, the snot-nosed man standing next to Domingo opened his mouth to speak. The snot on his nose was still hanging on his lips, making him look a little nauseous.


    Chang Nuo also didn''t care. As long as the other person didn''t touch him, he could just take a look. It wouldn''t disgust him anyway.


    "Then let''s go!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile, who would turn to Gogoya and say, "You must remember how many of us areing this time, and if you have any doubts about how many of us areing, just kill them all." That��s it.��


    This time, the words were not only spoken to Gogoya alone, but also to those behind them.


    Everyone''s face was confused, but Domingo was sweating on his head at this time. Others didn''t know what was going on, but Domingo himself knew very well. What are the conditions in the country like?


    He did not dare to show too many expressions, and could only say with a somewhat embarrassed smile, "Fufufufu~, His Majesty King Tru can rest assured that as long as any situation arises in Dressrosa, we are willing to take over any situation." price."


    "It''s best to have you say this. After all, our two countries are still rtively good trading partners, right?"


    Changnuo said with a smile.


    The current smile was apletely terrifying threat to Domingo, and he didn''t even know how much the other party knew about his country.


    But looking at the topics and attitudes discussed in the other party''s words, it seems that he is not too interested in people like himself.


    Dressrosa has been the agent of the New World for the Tru Empire for a long time.


    Domingo is not only doing business in the underworld, he also does a lot of property distribution openly. At least when ites to cooperating with the Toru Empire, he is more attentive.


    After all, the prices of the things purchased from the Tru Empire are even much higher than the profits from the arms he sells. There are some rich guys in the New World, although not all of them are. This way, at least they can make a lot of money.

 Chapter 334 Emperor Tru’s Warning

    <h4>Chapter 334 Emperor Tru��s Warning</h4>


    Although everyone in the Don Quixote family was very unhappy inside, they didn''t show any of it on the surface.


    The sudden visit of the Tru Empire made them feel incredible, but they didn''t expect that when these guys came to their first destination in the new world, they actually came to their own Dressrosa.


    Although they were a little confused, they still came out to greet him, but the cynicism between these words was still a bit difficult for this group of usually aloof people to ept.


    After saying these words, Domingo still smiled on the surface, but his words were much less spoken, and he could only walk in front and lead the way.


    Today''s Dressrosa is almost the same as it was in theter period.


    Even in the middle of the night, there were still more people walking back and forth on the street, almost all of which were toys of all kinds.


    The title of "The Country of Toys" started two years ago, but no one can think of how these toys are made, as if they don''t get tired and don''t use any abilities.


    In this way, I can do various tiring tasks endlessly.


    They seemed to have no thoughts or any emotions, but when many toys saw Domingo apanying Changnuo walking on the streette at night, they quickly moved towards this side as if they were not afraid of life and death. Rushed over.


    The guy walking at the front who was covered in thick snot, after seeing this scene, the snot on his body quickly stuck to the ground. For those toy people who had no strength to begin with, they couldn''t move for an instant. The group of videos that followed were also quickly clearing them all away.


    "Huh? What''s going on with these toy people?"


    Gogoya asked curiously.


    Others seemed to have seen some clues, why did these toy people rush directly towards their king without control or orders?


    Chang Nuo didn''t want to pay attention to these things. As for the future matters, he would leave it to himter. In this world, he was not a so-called Virgin-like figure. The life and death of others had nothing to do with him. Dry?


    Ignoring these things, Chang Nuo continued walking towards the high ground ahead.


    It didn''t take long for the Hignds to be revealed in front of everyone. This was a royal pce that didn''t look very luxurious. In some ways, it even looked a bit shabby. I really couldn''t understand Dover. Brother Langming has so much money, why does he still live in this stupid ce?


    But the moment they stepped onto the high ground, a high-pitched voice came over, apanied by a huge man who appeared here instantly from nowhere.


    "Dover, are you back?"


    Such a big guy, but his voice turned like this. The people from the Tru Empire who followed him, except for Enel who suddenly couldn''t hold back and burst intoughter, there was nothing strange about the others. Variety.


    But the moment he heard othersughing, the big man wearing a helmet suddenly showed a different light in his eyes.


    "Pika, why did youe out?"


    Domingo asked.


    "Oh! Sugar has fallen asleep. I felt bored, so I came over to take a look."


    Pika said.


    This guy Chang Nuo is quite impressive. He is a person with stone fruit ability and superhuman ability. He is rtively strong!


    "Domingo, please find someone to take them to have a good rest. I have something to talk to you about?"


    Changnuo said,pletely ignoring Pika standing in front of him. This guy looked huge, but his voice was so hard, no wonder others wouldugh at him.


    Before Domingo could reply to Pika''s words, after hearing what Chang Nuo said, he immediately said respectfully, "Don''t worry, my Emperor Tohru will definitely make arrangements for them."


    As Brother Ming spoke, he already started to signal the cadres behind him to lead them to another ce.


    The people from the Tru Empire did not refuse to directly follow the instructions of His Majesty the King and follow them.


    Gion seemed to be a little reluctant in his heart. He wanted to know what the purpose of Chang Nuo''sing here was? Why do you meet Domingo, the Shichibukai?


    And from the extent of their conversation, it was not difficult to tell that they had known each other a long time ago.


    But after the previous incident on Fish-Man Ind, Gion has rtively restrained herself a lot. She no longer pursues all the answers excessively, and she also knows that she has no right to know these things now, so in the end He could only follow the rest of them and walk in other directions.


    "Those of you who should rest should go and rest quickly. There are some things that you can''t get involved in."


    After everyone left, only Domingo and those members of his family were left on the scene.


    Changnuo still turned to Domingo and said again.


    Everyone was confused in their hearts, but they just looked at their eldest son with their own eyes. But at this time, only the big man asked Chang Nuo in a high-pitched voice, "Where is Dover? Right there!"


    "roll!"


    Chang Nuo scolded lightly, but the next second, the shock wave emitted by himself instantly shook the Pika away more than ten meters.


    The moment it fell, it caused a cloud of dust to rise on the high ground of the pce.


    "Fufufufu~, His Majesty King Tru, there is no need to be angry. These are all my dear subordinates. Please don''t forgive me."


    When Domingo saw this situation, he quickly smiled and said.


    He didn''t dare to offend the Tru Empire for such a trivial matter, and he didn''t even have any thoughts in this regard. Now he just wanted to send these people out of Dressrosa quickly, and he could already thank God.


    This is indeed the truest thought deep in his heart. Although he is thergest merchandise agent of the Tru Empire in the New World, what does this mean?


    "I don''t like to say some things twice, but don''t worry, at least I have no interest in you or this country!"


    Chang Nuo sneered and said.


    "Thank you very much. Since the two of us are chatting, this ce is definitely not suitable. Pleasee over here!"


    Domingo didn''t dare to say any more nonsense and hurriedly walked in front to guide the progress.


    As for the people under him, they all stayed here, looking a little at a loss.


    Pika flew out for a long time, and they didn''t see anyonee over to help him or show any worry.


    It''s just that for the big guy, such an attack is probably just a scratch, and won''t cause any substantial damage, and may not even scratch the skin.


    But this is just a warning.

 Chapter 335 The Secret of Impel City

    <h4>Chapter 335 The Secret of Impel City</h4>


    Looking at the backs of the two people walking in front, the members of the Don Quixote family looked at each other in confusion.


    None of them would move at this time, even if Pika in front was lying on the ground and struggling in pain.


    "It''s so scary! Emperor Toru makes me feel even scarier than the Yonkou Kaido!"


    A man in the crowd with a shark face and high heels opened his mouth.


    There was still some lingering fear on his face. When faced with such a strong man, the expressions maintained by others were almost the same.


    Each of them may be said to bepletely arrogant in normal times, but when faced with a height that they can never reach, they will be so humble.


    "You don''t need to tell me, haven''t you read the news in the past two days? What a terrifying guy!"


    The man in a red robe said with a smile on his face. Perhaps the smile on his face was just to cover up the fear in his heart.


    For a man standing at the top to perform like this, he did not exceed their psychological expectations at all.


    After all, the moment the Tru Empire informed them of the reception, everyone was already prepared to face this special emperor whom they had never seen before. These people not only have expectations in their hearts, but also some apprehension.


    "Oh G! This is how a real man should behave."


    An older-looking guy in the crowd immediately put on a strange pose and said with the same shock and smile on his face.


    "Don''t we have to help a bunch of Pikas?"


    The man with the shark face said.


    "Why are you helping? This guy won''t die. If he looks like this, he''ll be fine after just two days of rest."


    The man in the red robe said something, then turned around and started to leave.


    The others just nced at it and were also ready to leave this ce.


    They didn''t want to face Emperor Tru''s terrifying appearance again. The other party kept a rtively calm expression on the ticket, but as long as they stayed by his side, they could always feel an inexplicable sense of fear, always lingering. on his own head.


    Under the leadership of Domingo, they walked directly up the steps to the highest level of the Royal Pce. This is the highest ce in the Royal Pce of Dressrosa, and it is also the main hall where the country handles various affairs.


    The hignds are different. You can even see the entire Dressrosa situation from here.


    Of course, this ce is not particrly big. The entire country is only a dozen square kilometers.


    Inparison, the country of Dressrosa is not even half the size of Sky Ind.


    Even Apayado on Sky Ind is at least nearly four timesrger than this ind.


    There is no scenery in Dressrosa at night, everything looks extremely dim, and there is almost no noise.


    But at this moment, staying far away, a woman was staring closely at the situation on the high ground with her own eyes.


    Her eyes glowed slightly with purple light. Even though she was almost several kilometers away from the pce high ground, she could still see Chang Nuo standing on the edge of the hall at a nce.


    She looked at the man''s appearance and expression expectantly, as if he was standing right in front of her.


    "Looking at it from the looks of it, he must be with Domingo too?"


    This woman was a little disappointed, even a little lost. He stared carefully at the man standing above the entire hignd, but in the end, he could only say these sad words in his heart.


    Among the pce heights.


    "I wonder why His Majesty King Tru came to Dressrosa?"


    Domingo asked cautiously as soon as he entered the hall.


    He couldn''t figure out what kind of personality the person in front of him had, and even the investigators dispatched had no information at all.


    The situation obtained by the World Government is the same. The people sent here disappeared once they set foot in the ce where the Toru Empire Pce was located. Not to mention any information, not even a single person came out.


    No one felt strange or surprised about this. After all, everyone knew and understood the current strength of the Tru Empire.


    After Chang Nuo entered the hall, he walked straight to the balcony outside. Standing here, he could overlook the entire scenery of Dressrosa. Although he couldn''t see anything, with his perception, almost all the situations in Dressrosa had appeared in his mind.


    "I came all the way around, just to have a look and ask you a question."


    Chang Nuo stood on the edge of the balcony, without even turning his head, still looking forward, and asked in a calm tone.


    "I didn''t expect that such a thing would require you toe here in person. Just tell me. As long as I know, I will tell you the truth."


    Domingo asked, leaning down.


    "You don''t have to answer so cheerfully. After all, the matter I want to ask is likely to involve your wealth and life, as well as the so-called protective umbre behind it. Is it possible for you to stop thinking about it?"


    After hearing this, Domingo froze on the spot.


    Even though he was well-informed, he still didn''t realize what the words of Emperor Tru meant.


    Although he is only a Shichibukai, there are very few people who know the situation behind it. Even among the family members who stay with him and follow him, except for the original one, no one else knows that he has it. What kind of background?


    But facing the words spoken by Emperor Tru, he unknowingly even felt a little shuddering.


    "I wonder why His Majesty the King is asking?"


    "The situation in Impel Down City!"


    Dovero Folk Song asked him cautiously, although he didn''t know what it was like. But after he got out, the other party directly asked such a question, which made him really not know how to answer it for a while.


    Impel Down City is known to almost everyone in the entire sea.


    This ce is almost the end of pirates, the ultimate prison where the naval government imprisons pirates. It is located in the triangle between Marinefando and Judicial Ind.


    So far, only Golden Lion has escaped from inside. The situation inside can be said to be extremely secretive, and it is impossible for outsiders to know anything about the situation inside.

 Chapter 336 Negotiating terms?

    <h4>Chapter 336 Negotiating terms?</h4>


    Domingo was a little confused, why did the other party ask this? Or evenpletely unable to grasp what the other person is thinking?


    The pressure that Chang Nuo can cause by just standing there can be imagined. Even though Domingo is rtively powerful, facing such an existence, he is really powerless.


    Feeling that this guy Domingo hadn''t spoken for a long time, Changnuo turned his head slightly and nced behind him, and said again, "The Don Quixote family has be a Celestial Dragon eight hundred years ago, so we have to Say, you, Don Quixote Domingo, have already be a rtively outstanding one, so don��t try to fool me, what I can know ispletely beyond your imagination.��


    Domingo, who originally wanted to be perfunctory, suddenly had a look of fear in his eyes after hearing these words, and even his already bent waist took a step back unconsciously. .


    He didn''t know where the other party got this information from, but he was certain that it would never be revealed from someone close to him.


    "Domingo, if the news that you are a Celestial Dragon spreads out, do you know how miserable your death will be?" Changnuo threatened calmly.


    "Why do you want to know the situation in Impel Down City? And how do you know my identity?"


    Domingo stood there, tried to calm his mind, and asked pretending to be calm.


    "As for the news I want to know, you don''t have to ask or think about it. In short, knowing too much will not do you any good. You can be afraid of Kaido, but I think you should be more afraid of me. Because Kaido is far away now, and I''m right next to you. If I don''t get the answer I want this time, maybe I don''t mind destroying you.


    From the current perspective, there are many ways to destroy Domingo, such as the entire Dressrosa toys! "


    Chang Nuo turned around with a cold smile on his lips. He didn''t care what the other person thought now, he just wanted to know the answer he wanted.


    The reason why I say so much is to let the other party know that I, the Tru Empire, know far more than you think and can help you up or even crush you to death at any time.


    With the blessing of this threat, Domingo, who was usually arrogant, also felt scared at this moment.


    What he is afraid of is not the opponent''s strength, but the opponent''s brain that can know everything.


    The key points are hard to beat, and you can''t say anything. In the end, things have to be done ording to other people''s ideas.


    "Tell me, what exactly do you want to know about Impel Down City?"


    Domingo sighed suddenly, clenched his fists, then took a deep breath and asked directly.


    "Just tell me the overall situation of Impel City. Of course, I''m not just talking about the situation on the upper six floors, but also other things."


    "I don''t know what you mean by asking this? I only know the situation on the sixth floor of Impel Down City, and I don''t know anything else."


    Domingo said.


    "Do you feel that the person standing in front of you is just a clone, so I can''t do anything?"


    Chang Nuo''s cold smile rose again, he raised his head slightly and asked.


    "Fufufufu~, since you know so much, you should know better. As long as I tell this matter, what will follow will be an endless pursuit. For me, today I will tell you The fact is, I will definitely not be able to survive in the future, and there is not enough benefit, so why would I say such a thing?"


    Domingo felt like he had broken a jar, and he smiled. The fear just now was gone, and he began to talk about his conditions.


    As a country, Changnuo is not afraid that the other party will not negotiate terms, but it is afraid that the other party will not say anything. If you go to investigate, you probably don��t know how much effort it will take. Why do you need to run over and risk a problem that can be solved with just one mouth? How about taking such a big risk to see it?


    "What conditions are required? Just say it. If I can do this, it doesn''t matter if I promise you once. But the premise is that what you tell me is at least true, otherwise I will make your death ugly."


    Changnuo said.


    Faced with this situation, Domingo has begun to feel relieved. The two of them can be regarded as conversationalists, and they no longer have the initial sense of restraint, at least for Domingo.


    What he has here is just a clone. Being able to be seen through at a nce already shows that the other person is still useful to him. Naturally, it is better to indulge when it is time to indulge.


    Throughout Dressrosa, under the darkness of night, many toy people were basically doing various jobs endlessly, as for those toy people who were slightly disabled. It was simply thrown away in an unknown ce by other guards.


    If you knew these toys were real humans, you don''t know how much panic it would cause.


    The snot-nosed man from the Don Quixote family had already quickly run to another ce the moment Domingo left Tohru alone.


    This is just an ordinary room, but the little girl sleeping in the room is not an ordinary person. No one dared to disturb him. Even the second-inmand of the Don Quixote family, the Snot Man, could only stand obediently and guard his mouth.


    However, the other generals and followers of the Tru Empire who came with Chang Nuo were not as honest as they seemed.


    All the cadres of the Don Quixote family have left one by one, leaving only some Cmi. What ability can this group of people have to stop this group of rtively powerful beings?


    They might start to enjoy the night view of Dressrosa on the street. Even if they can''t see it, just walking around like this should still feel a lot morefortable.


    The title of "The Country of Toys" has spread throughout the world a few years ago, and even they have heard a little bit about the toys here.


    Especially with a smile, he could intuitively feel that these toys were not as simple as they seemed on the surface. But at least sitting in other people''s countries, he can''t say anything.


    Once the current Toru Empire gets involved in the New World, it will definitely arouse strong resentment from the Navy and the World Government. This is not a good situation for a Toru Empire that has always strived for stability.


    There is no scenery at all along the coast around Dressrosa, and the only areas where people can live are almost crowded with people. The most indispensable thing in this ce in the New World is people.

 Chapter 337 The shocking existence

    <h4>Chapter 337 The shocking existence</h4>


    Dressrosa is Dressrosa''s business. No matter how this country develops now or what kind of suffering the people are suffering, the Tru Empire will not blink an eye and maintain any sympathy. , It��s not that they don��t want to do it, but they really can��t do it in a short time.


    In the pce, Chang Nuo finally got what he wanted.


    However, Domingo was not as cooperative as expected. The situation inside Impel Down City was almost impossible for outsiders to understand, but Changnuo was a person with the Eye of God. He did not need to know too much about the situation inside. But some things were just unfamiliar to him, and these things were what caused him to turn around and turn to the country of Dressrosa.


    But when it came to the specific situation, Domingo only said, "As for the situation of the entire underwater prison impel city, I only know about the same as you. There are six floors in total, all under the sea. Among them, the most powerful ones are almost all locked up in the sixyers of the seabed. As for the others, even if youe and ask me, I don��t know very well.��


    "s~"


    Chang Nuo sighed slowly and didn''t say too many words. However, when he turned around, red light began to appear in his eyes.


    He doesn''t want to spoil this guy over and over again, so what he can do now is to directly use the devil fruit of the psychic system to control the other person''s thoughts.


    In the following time, Chang Nuo did get the specific situation of Impel Down City as he wished, and the situation inside was much more than what he knew.


    Although I don''t know what kind of secret Domingo holds to threaten the World Government and the Celestial Dragons, Changnuo doesn''t want to know the specific situation now. He just wants to know the inside story of Impel Down City.


    "It''s really surprising, I didn''t expect that guy is still alive!"


    Changnuo said to himself with some seriousness, but Domingo, who was sitting over there, had dull eyes at the moment, his hands were naturally ced on his knees, and his whole person had no expression at all.


    The psychic devil fruit can directly control the other person''s thoughts and even rewrite the other person''s thoughts, especially for such a being with arge disparity in strength.


    Changnuo might just have an idea to make Domingopletely honor him in the future, but what is the key effect?


    Even so, Changnuo did not intend to let Domingo go so lightly. He directly used the Psychic Devil Fruit to prate his spiritual world, leaving more or less some traces in it. Only then did things begin to release the control of the psychic devil fruit.


    After waking up, Domingo still kept smiling. Perhaps it should be said that he continued the smile before he was not controlled. During this period of time, he didn''t know what happened to him?


    All of this seemed to pass naturally. For Domingo, the words he just said were as if time and space jumped directly to this moment.


    "Your Majesty King Tru, this is all I know. If you can, I will help you investigate the restter."


    Domingo raised the corners of his mouth slightly and said with a smile on his face.


    "It''s great that you have such a heart. If there is anything you need to do in the future, I will let othersmunicate with you. But I am very interested in your little girl. Find me a ce to live. ce, remember to ask him toe over and see me after tomorrow morning."


    Changnuo said with a slight smile on the surface, but there was an undeniable seriousness in his tone, and his eyes were fixed on Domingo sitting there.


    The other party was suddenly startled, and then began to smile again and said, "Since His Majesty King Tru already knows, then he must also know how important this little girl is to me. I like it, I like it, everything else is easy to say, but this girl is I can��t give it to you!��


    "It''s not as superficial as you think. Maybe when you enter Impel Down City, I will naturally let this little girle over."


    Chang Nuo said, then turned around and started walking outside.


    Now that I havee here to know the answers to the questions I want to know, I already know almost all the answers. As for the rest, there is no need to think too much about it.


    Domingo is a very treacherous and cunning guy, but I have to say that he is indeed a very good existence. At least in some aspects, Domingo''s actual effect is better than others. Too powerful.


    If it weren''t for the fact that Chang Nuo was rtively powerful, or that the Tru Empire''s strength was far greater than that of the Don Quixote family, the other party would probably not even want to meet him.


    But the news he got this time was indeed enough to shock Chang Nuo for several days. He didn''t expect that those people who should have died long ago are now in Impel Down City. This ce is far from as simple as imagined.


    There are now more questions surrounding this world. Some things are not as simple and easy as they seem.


    But now that everything is known, doing these things is rtively easy.


    the next day.


    At dawn, the entire Dressrosa had already begun to return to a lively atmosphere.


    This country does not have as many people as imagined, and the number of people that exists so far is only about 500,000.


    But even so, in such a small ce, the concentrated residence of these groups has all been condensed together.


    Not many people knew that the Tru Empire hade to Dressrosa, but for the forces outside that had always paid attention to the ship Infinity, everyone was quite confused as to whether they hade to Dressrosa. What to do in a small ce like Sa?


    At least few people in Dressrosa''s own country knew about it, and it didn''t cause the slightest sensation inparison.


    At least the Yonko Kaido, who is rtively powerful in the New World, often sends people to a small ce like Dressrosa.


    In the pce hall.


    Changnuo finally saw a very buggy existence among Devil Fruits.


    The sugar in front of me looks like a little girl of five or six years old, with lovely green hair, wearing a long skirt with white dots on it, a loose red coat, and a hat attached to it. There is a gold-colored crown, and from time to time he holds some snacks or fruits in his hand and stuffs them into his mouth.


    He has a very kawaii face and wears a single-sided spectacle frame on his left eye. I don��t know if it��s because of the shape or something else. At least from an outsider��s perspective, the character Sugar is indeed extremely cute.

 Chapter 338 Childlike Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 338 Childlike Fruit</h4>


    But those who know also know that this woman is now seventeen or eighteen years old. The Devil''s Childlike Fruit will remain in its original state after being eaten. This age will always be with this little girl until she dies of old age.


    The forces sitting in the entire pce hall were directly divided into two sides. The Don Quixote family sat on one side, and the Tru Empire also sat on the other side.


    But for the members of the Cod family who unite in Dressrosa, everyone maintains an expression of readiness.


    They can even be described as very nervous. On the other hand, the Tru Empire seemed much more rxed.


    Strength is the hard currency in this world. As long as you are strong, you can maintain extreme confidence no matter where you go.


    A little girl like this stood nkly in the center of the entire hall, as if she was epting the admiration of others, but she was still eating by herself, not caring at all what other people were looking at her. .


    When he had nothing to do, he hardly read the newspapers, or knew little about the outside world. Apart from knowing the situation of the Don Quixote family, no one would deliberately disclose the outside world to her.


    Even today, facing the most famous person in the world, Sugar himself stood in the center. Except for the people who knew their Don Quixote family, he didn''t know any of the remaining people, and they were even strangers to the extreme.


    "How do you feel General Yixiao?"


    Changnuo stared at Shatang, with a smile on his lips. He turned to look at Yixiao sitting next to him and asked.


    "It''s nothing nice to feel, but this girl''s strength is not low!"


    Yixiao said truthfully.


    "It''s nice to look at, but why are we looking at a little girl?"


    Junhe whispered softly.


    The other people from the Tru Empire who followed also looked curious. They couldn''t figure out what they were doing. Why did so many peoplee to watch a little girl?


    What''s more important is that they don''t know what kind of person this girl is and what kind of strength she has, but they don''t dare to say anything. After all, being able to attract so many people to watch has already proved this. There is something strange about little girls.


    "His Majesty King Tru, this is Sugar. He is the most important cadre of our Don Quixote family."


    Domingo said, sitting on the chair directly opposite Changnuo.


    Anyone can see the pride in his words.


    "Dover, why are so many of you asking me toe here?"


    At this time, Sugar directly asked Domingo in a milky voice.


    "It has nothing to do with him. I just want to take a look at you."


    Before Changnuo could wait for Domingo to speak, he stood up and took a few steps towards Sugar.


    Staring at the other party''s cute face, Chang Nuo even squatted down the moment he got closer and looked at the little girl in front of him carefully.


    Suddenly, such a stranger appeared and kept staring at him. On the surface, Sutang had a smile on his face, and he stretched out his right hand and began to touch Chang Nuo.


    When the people of the Don Quixote family saw this scene, they couldn''t help but raise their eyebrows. Domingo was so frightened that he stood up. He was afraid that Sugar would use his demonster. The moment the fruit''s ability touches the opponent, if it seeds, it''s okay. If it doesn''t, then Domingo may not be far from death.


    But while everyone was in a tense state, Chang Nuo took the lead and stretched out his right hand, held it in the opponent''s hand, and said with a smile, "I can still maintain this look at the age of seventeen or eighteen. The abilities of Devil Fruit are really surprising."


    But it was no longer him who was surprised, but others.


    Everyone on the Don Quixote family''s eyes widened, even Granu''s own eyes widened, looking at the man in front of him with disbelief.


    He really couldn''t understand why his right hand didn''t turn into a toy when someone touched it, and why he couldmunicate with him so normally?


    Other family members also looked towards Domingo, but at this time, no one dared to breathe heavily or open their mouths to speak.


    "You...how are you okay?"


    Sugar asked in shock.


    "Are you talking about why you didn''t turn into a toy when I touched you? It seems that you can consult Brother Ming in the future. We still know too little about the outside world."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile, and then squatted there and looked at Su Tang''s face, and before everyone noticed, a red light shed in his eyes.


    Sugar, who was standing opposite him, was just stunned for a moment, but the next second was no different from his normal appearance before.


    "Why is Your Majesty so interested in a little girl?"


    Enelu curiously asked Abona next to him.


    "Don''t ask me about this kind of thing, I don''t know either!"


    Abona has also been in a state of confusion from the beginning to now.


    Others may not be much better, but they can all see that the little girl in front of them is not as simple as they think.


    After Chang Nuo looked at Sugar''s expression for a while, it was rare that the other party didn''t resent the man in front of him holding his hand. Although everything was a bit unexpected, at least since he ate the devil fruit, this was the only one. A man who can shake hands andmunicate with himself normally.


    Even though he has always maintained his body and age, as time goes by, Sugar''s age and body remain that of five or six years old, but his mind still grows with age.


    After reading it, Chang Nuo stood up and turned to Domingo with a smile and said, "Don''t worry too much. I''ve told you before. What''s yours is yours and no one else can take it away. But in the future, if you If we fall, the situation will be different. Thank you very much for your hospitality today. It��s time for us to set off next. Remember what I told you.��


    Mainly because Chang Nuo looked at Domingo standing with a look of surprise on his face. Although he understood what the situation was that caused him to be surprised, Chang Nuo still kept a smile and talked to him. Communicating.


    No matter how much this guy says, he can be regarded as a being who understands both ck and white, so in some ways, the importance of Domingo is indeed self-evident.

 Chapter 339 Leaving

    <h4>Chapter 339 Leaving</h4>


    If they hadn''t already known how old Sugar was, everyone present would have thought that this little girl was just a five or six-year-old child.


    Both her face and body movements are very childish, and sometimes it is even impossible to imagine what level of strength this little girl will reach. After all, her record is still ahead of her.


    As long as he is touched by his right hand, that person will eventually be a toy to be yed with, regardless of his strength, and no one will even be able to remember who the other person is.


    The bug-like childlike fruit is indeed a waste on Domingo''s side, but there is really no need for them to conflict at the moment, especially for such a little girl.


    All the seeds that should be left behind have been left. As for the future, it is only a few years away, and they are not as anxious as they imagined.


    The people on Changnuo''s side looked at it and saw that the parts that needed to be moved had already been moved. It was like a fruit. nt it first and wait for it to sprout slowly until it bears new fruit in the future.


    After the incident was over, some people from the Tru Empire did not make any stay here. At around 10:00 in the morning, they began to stride away from the pce of Dressrosa.


    The difference from the previous greeting was that this time Changnuo did not ask anyone from Domingo''s group to see them off.


    Especially since the other party''s reputation in Dressrosa is not that good. All the things are hidden in a deep ditch. If these things are taken out one day, it will be really serious if they are seen by other citizens. With this rtionship between the Empire and Domingo, it��s unclear how they will spread rumors in the future?


    But at this moment, in the Pce of Dressrosa, Domingo was still sitting there leisurely.


    After the group of people from the Tru Empire left, he seemed to feel a lot more rxed, and the big stone on his chest fell instantly.


    What Chang Nuo brought to all of them was endless pressure, which was so great that it could make them all breathless.


    "Dover, who was that guy just now? Why is my Devil Fruit ability of no use to him?"


    Granu finally asked the question in his heart. After all, he didn''t have many hobbies. In addition to eating every day, he also liked to study some toys and the like. But this time, when he touched the other person, he didn''t. The other person turned into a toy, which shocked and intrigued him.


    "Fufufufu~, sugar! He is the King of Tru of the South China Sea, and he is so powerful that he is even more powerful than Kaido. And what you see now is just a mirror image. ording to reports, the real Tru of the South China Sea is The moment the emperor appears, all creatures with weak strength will not be able to raise their heads again."


    Domingo said leisurely, his life full of feelings of envy and admiration.


    "Dover, is that guy really as powerful as you say?"


    A high-pitched voice came out, and Pika, who had been staying behind, asked curiously.


    Let''s not talk about anything else. After all, he is the only one among everyone here who can withstand the opponent''s heavy blow.


    At least that''s how it was in front of them, but it''s hard to say how much strength Chang Nuo used, or whether he used any strength at all.


    "He is really an interesting person. I don''t know what he will develop into in the future, but I am looking forward to it! Fufufu~"


    Seeing Domingo talking to himself alone, those people didn''t dare to ask anything else.


    Chang Nuo walked silently in front of the group of people walking out of Dressrosa Pce, and the people behind him were even several meters apart.


    All four of them could tell that His Majesty the King was deeply concerned at the moment, but they did not go forward to consult him.


    The streets of Dressrosa are quite lively during the day, and almost every two people walking on the street bring a toy with them.


    These toys may be in the shape of humans or other animals, but no matter what, they are alive.


    A group of them walked directly on such a street. Changnuo didn''t pay much attention to these situations. Even when a toy man bumped into his leg while walking, he just nced at it. , and don��t have many other ideas.


    It wasn''t until he silently walked to the edge of the sea and saw the Infinity that Chang Nuo silently put away his thoughts, and a smile began to slowly appear on his lips.


    After another voyage, Changnuo had at least cleared up most of the doubts in his mind.


    They now have a lot of time to sail on the sea, and there is no need to worry about the situation in the country. Even if something happens, they can rush back to the country in the next second after a message from the Tru Empire is conveyed.


    Even if you are drifting on the sea, you should just let yourself go out and rx.


    "Did you notice anything wrong with His Majesty the King?"


    After the Endless sailed for a whole morning, Gion asked Gogoya curiously on the front deck of the ship.


    After all, there were only two of them women on the whole ship. Nowadays, there were too many things going on and Gion didn''t want to get involved too much. He just reported the whereabouts of the Toru Empire people to the Navy Headquarters.


    But this time he felt something was obviously different. Aftering out of Dressrosa, he revealed that the emperor''s behavior waspletely different from before. Although he still maintained his original personality in terms of behavior, he was now a People stayed on the top deck and began to show their thoughts.


    It was just because of this that Gion was more curious.


    Gogoya, on the other hand, does not have so many ideas. What thoughts His Majesty the King has are his own business. As a servant, all he can do is to rush over when others are in need.


    So in the end, he just nced at Gion, smiled slightly and said, "We don''t know what His Majesty the King is thinking, and we don''t want to ask, but it seems that he is either encountering something annoying or a rtively happy situation." .��


    "You have followed him for so long, aren''t you curious about what he thinks?" Gion asked again.


    "Why do you have to think about it so much? Besides, such things are not something we can even consider."


    Although Gogoya has talked about everything with Gion, the navy, in the past few days, once some things involve the Tru Empire or His Majesty the King, she always chooses to avoid answering, and puts the matter aside Things start to blur.

 Chapter 340 The next secret trip

    <h4>Chapter 340 The next secret trip</h4>


    In fact, Gion has long since forgotten about the things on this ship, as she was so serious when she first got on the ship.


    After all, after interacting with these people for a few days, I realized that they were not as disgusting as I thought.


    At least the Toru Empire''s behavior may be more in line with the justice in his heart. After all, with the current development of the navy, even their own senior officials don''t know how many bugs there are among the personnel.


    A series of things have led to the fact that today''s navy is not popr with many people, and its majesty on the entire sea is not as high as imagined.


    Although the weather in the New World is weird and changeable, you don''t encounter that kind of weird weather from time to time. At least in more cases, the sea still maintains a calm effect.


    As the Infinity sailed all the way, it wasn''t far from where they reached Whitebeard.


    After all, the New World is only that big, and the ce where Whitebeard is is almost the closest to Fish-Man Ind.


    After almost two days, the Infinity had arrived at the sea area that Chang Nuo had visited before.


    This ce is already within the jurisdiction of the Whitebeard Pirates. On the surface, the Whitebeard Pirates are just a group of pirates, but in fact, from another aspect, this pirate group is almost equivalent to a pirate group. Same as country.


    From many aspects or levels, the management of the Whitebeard Pirates is more humane. Regardless of the country or ind they belong to, their pirates do not charge any protection fees or other rted fees. Basically, most of them are free of charge to protect the living and housing conditions of these people.


    "Marco, where are Mr. Whitebeard and the others now?"


    On the top deck, Chang Nuo was lying there leisurely, holding a ss of drink with ice cubes in his hand and shaking it constantly. He turned to look at Marco who was sitting not far away and asked.


    "Huh? I don''t know the specific location of Dad. The Moby Dick is not fixed at one location, but the general area should be within the surrounding area."


    Marco smiled and said helplessly.


    "I think dad''s ship is not far to the southwest, right? At the current speed, it will probably only take two or three hours at most."


    Jozi sat next to Marco and reminded him in a low voice.


    "I want you to talk more!"


    Marco nced at Jozi and said without wanting to speak.


    A distance of a hundred kilometers. For the people on the Infinity, at least three of them can sense this distance, let alone the Infinity, which has a rtively powerful scanning function.


    "Your Majesty the King, we will meet the strongest man in the world in two or three hours. I''d better go and tidy up my clothes first."


    Enelu was a little excited and said excitedly, the strongest man in the world. After all, this was already a word that was circting in the whole world.


    Whitebeard''s ability is almost universally recognized by everyone, and he is the strongest man in the world. This is also something that is generally acknowledged.


    But just as Enilu stood up, Junhe, who was lying next to him, opened his eyes slightly and grabbed him directly.


    "You can change your clothes, but remember to put on your Lieutenant General Trull Empire uniform."


    Enel was stunned for a moment after hearing this, but after a pause, a smile appeared on his lips and he said. "You don''t need to remind me about this kind of thing."


    "It''s really been a long time since I saw that guy. It''s been so many years before I knew it. It''s really exciting."


    Yixiao said to himself, but these words had already been heard by the people next to him.


    Fortunately, the weather today is quite good. It ispletely cloudy above the head. Although there are some rough waves on the sea, they are not particrly big. Especially when sailing under such conditions, it feels veryfortable. The feeling of rxation apanied by the smell of the waves also gave them all the feeling of anticipation.


    "Let''s go change our clothes too. After all, we are facing different people this time."


    Abona also stood up, adjusted his clothes, and spoke leisurely.


    This meeting is likely to be a more serious scene, and there is still a rtivelyrge seagull following above the head. This guy is just sent by the newspapers so that he can get first-hand information from the Tru Empire as soon as possible.


    But this time it waspletely different. As they went to change clothes, there were not many people on the entire deck.


    Changnuo was still lying there leisurely drinking a drink. Marco and the others not far away were looking out from time to time.


    "I don''t want others to know how to do this meeting. You should understand, right?"


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes and began to speak directly using his mind. However, the person he spoke to this time was the seagull flying in the sky and following them.


    However, at the same time as these words were spoken, a man in a dark room somewhere suddenly received such a message.


    He opened his eyes suddenly and looked at the shining screens in front of him. Although he was puzzled, he still did what the other party said.


    He smiled at the screen and said, "Don''t worry, His Majesty King Tru, our newspaper will never dare to reveal a single word about this matter!"


    With the help of the light of these screens, the guy standing in front of the screen has a face simr to that of a bird, and his body is also covered with many feathers.


    He is the boss behind the current World Economic News, and he is also a Devil Fruit user.


    Since the other party has already spoken, he naturally does not dare to get too involved in this kind of thing.


    These words were not just what he said to the screen, these words could still reach Chang Nuo''s mind through the seagull.


    After saying these words, the seagulls above their heads that had been following them began to turn around and fly in another direction in the next second.


    Chang Nuo just raised his head slightly and looked at the seagull that had flown away. He could already sense the specific location of Moby Dick even from this ce.


    They no longer even need to give any orders to the Infinity. The system''s navigation will automatically start to lock on the position of the Moby-Dick and quickly move in that direction.


    Life on the sea is sometimes very simple, and sometimes it is very dangerous. If you just travel on a sailboat, it will probably take at least about half a month to reach Whitebeard''s territory from Dressrosa. Even if the journey is smooth, the boring and boring life at sea is what makes people most ufortable and helpless.

 Chapter 341 A greeting gift from Whitebeard

    <h4>Chapter 341 A greeting gift from Whitebeard</h4>


    Seeing that it was getting closer and closer to the Moby Dick, everyone on the Infinity who belonged to the Tru Empire had changed into their own military clothing.


    The generals were wearing their proper general uniforms. From this moment on, they returned to their serious expressions. After all, it was the Whitebeard Pirates who needed tomunicate andmunicate this time. Themunication with them was no less than with amunication between countries.


    When everyone was ready to go, the one who felt the most ufortable and confused was probably Gion. She didn''t know whether she should report it or not. After all, if anything went wrong in this matter, the Navy and the World Government would also be affected. A huge impact.


    The ck phone bug was always lingering in her hand. After leaving it there for so long, she didn''t know whether she should notify her of such a thing.


    But in the end, her faith defeated her reason. The moment the phone rang, Gion couldn''t wait to report what she saw and heard this time.


    But the other party just said lightly, "No need to pay too much attention!"


    "Bang!!!"


    It had only been sailing for an hour, and the Moby Dick had not yet been seen. A violent sound came over, and not long after, waves reaching a height of at least 200 meters began to rush towards them quickly.


    Others on the Infinity began to look at all this in horror, but as the admirals, their faces were calm. As for their King, they were still lying there leisurely, enjoying the moment. Sunbathing.


    "Dad, this is really casual. The meeting ceremony to wee us doesn''t have to be so big, right?"


    Jinbei watched with wide eyes. The huge waves had begun to surge towards them. Waves of this height were a fatal threat to any sailing ship. Even a steel cruise ship like the Infinity probably wouldn''t be able to survive it. Such a huge impact.


    Marco had a wry smile on his face, and at the same time he turned helplessly towards Changnuo, who was lying there leisurely. With such an expression on the other side, it was obvious that he was already confident, and the boat belonged to someone else. The other party was not panicking, so why was he so nervous?


    "Your Majesty, let me do it!"


    Abona walked forward, nodded slightly, and then said calmly to Chang Nuo.


    "Abona handles it, who can solve it in the future? We cannot lead to disasters in neighboring countries just because we wee us."


    Chang Nuo still said with a leisurely andfortable expression.


    "It seems that it can only be the old man. General Junhe''s ability is sharp attack. General Moshank cannot control so much sea water in a short period of time. Since the meeting ceremony has already begun, I think the old man should be able to take over. "


    He rolled his eyes with a smile and said with a slight smile on his lips.


    It is true that the Whitebeard Pirates gave such a big meeting gift. I really don��t know what this old man thinks?


    But since he is the king of a country, Changnuo naturally does not need to handle everything by himself. The reason why he takes them on this trip is not only to let them see the darkness of this world, but also to let them experience the reality of the world. Feel the experience.


    Things are always just talk on paper, but it''s not easy toe and see them. The strong people in this world always allow them to gain a lot of knowledge.


    He said that he was going to teach them a lot, but in fact, he could only teach three people.


    General Yixiao and Abona have been on the sea for a long time, but those people who were born and raised in the Tero Empire have never seen the new world, let alone seen it. What does the so-called strong person look like?


    "That''s it. Let me look forward to your performance." Chang Nuo said.


    Abona walked to the front position and faced theing huge waves. He did not panic at all and still maintained the hugging posture before.


    But at the same time, the dawn in his hand seemed to feel the fighting spirit of its master.


    When this huge wave was about to approach, Abona pulled out the Dawn in his hand with just a sh of lightning, and a ck sh shot up into the sky instantly.


    The power of the great swordsman was clearly demonstrated at this moment.


    The two-hundred-meter-high wave was split into two halves at this moment, and the road in the middle could just allow the Infinity to pass safely.


    But everything has passed, but the huge waves behind them are still moving forward. Once this situation is not curbed, it will definitely have a huge impact on the surrounding coasts.


    So while Abona opened a passage, as the general, Smile began to move his hands at the same time, and the power of the devil fruit began to emit from his body. Under the blessing of countless gravity, before those waves started to move forward, At that time, a huge deep pit with almost no end appeared on the entire sea level.


    After the water from those waves poured into the deep pit, it still didn''t make any waves.


    Under the huge gravitational force, these waves calmed down instantly.


    Although there are still some rtively small waves that are still moving forward, these things can''t travel very far and are no different from normal waves.


    Abona''s sword disy immediately stunned everyone. At this moment, the white clouds connected to the sky had been cut into two halves.


    "Another great swordsman!!"


    Gion couldn''t believe what he saw. Although he had guessed before that General Abona of the Toru Empire was probably a swordsman, he had already made full preparations in his heart. When I really saw the opponent''s strength, I still didn''t want to believe it.


    "Sure enough, such powerful swordsmanship!"


    Jinbe couldn''t help but nod in approval. Not to mention anything else, at least the strength of this sword had surpassed him.


    Of course, this can be regarded as a gift in return for the meeting gift given to them by the old man with white beard. Not to mention more, it can at least prove that in addition to the king, others in the Tru Empire are also capable of proving the powerful existence of this country.


    Not long after the waves dissipated, the huge figure of Moby Dick appeared in front of everyone. Although there was still a distance away, his huge body could still be seen, and behind the ship, Nearly four smaller ships followed.


    In addition, not far in front of the Moby Dick, there is also a ship that looks not too big or too small. With the help of perception, you can feel that there are only a few people on the ship. The most important thing is that there are actually a few people on it. There was also an acquaintance inside.

 Chapter 342 Ace comes to the new world

    <h4>Chapter 342 Acees to the new world</h4>


    Chang Nuo really hadn''t thought of this before. It was impossible to imagine that when he first left Windmill Vige, this guy was just preparing to set off. In just three or four months, he had already reached the new world and had such achievements. .


    Also, they had never read newspapers in the past period of time, and it was even less possible for them to know what happened on the sea, especially for such fledgling pirates.


    "Captain, Whitebeard seems so powerful. Why don''t we stop challenging him?"


    "What are you talking about? Everyone is here now, even if you say I have to challenge you."


    The guy who spoke was the guy who came out of Windmill Vige, and Ace had just gone to sea not long ago, but everyone didn''t expect that he had alreadye to this ce, and now he has begun to challenge Whitebeard.


    It''s really hard to believe that such a good thing as the key happened to them.


    The Spade Pirates'' legs were so frightened when they faced Whitebeard''s punch. After all, someone could trigger a tsunami with just one punch out of thin air. How could they not be shocked by this situation?


    No matter how you put it, this group of people is just a group of Karami, and their strength is even more pitiful. For some reason, they have already traveled to the New World. Being able to reach this ce in four months with a sailboat is already impressive. It''s a little unbelievable.


    Ace pretended to be calm. The punch that Whitebeard had just given him had already given him stage fright. However, out of dignity, this guy still had the courage to fight.


    Even when the crew behind him tried to dissuade him, Geely still did not intend to give up this opportunity. He walked past everyone and walked to the bow of the ship and shouted to the Moby Dick where Whitebeard was, "Old man Whitebeard, I''ve been here for two days. Can you tell me whether I ept the challenge or not?" "


    "Dad, this little guy is really disrespectful. How about I go over and teach him a lesson?"


    On the Moby Dick, a Bista wearing a hat and holding two knives stood up and said to the white beard sitting there.


    "Guhahaha~, it''s just a child, why bother. The most important thing now is to wee our guests and my dear son back."


    Whitebeard took a sip of wine and shouted with augh.


    Now everyone has seen a huge shiping from the distance, the overall size is almost the same as Moby Dick, but from their point of view, a ship without sails, how does it make people feel awkward?


    "But Dad, what to do with this annoying little guy?"


    Bista nced at Ace, then turned to Whitebeard and asked again.


    He didn''t dislike the little guy who challenged him, but so far, there weren''t as many piratesing to challenge him as he thought. At the same time, he also admired Ace''s courage for actually daring to challenge him. You cane and challenge the strongest man in the world just after leaving the sea.


    What made him more bored was that Ace had been shouting for two days in a row since he came to this ce. Apart from sleeping, he almost spent the rest of his time shouting for Whitebeard to ept the challenge, and he also wanted to fight. If Whitebeard hadn''t ordered everyone not to act rashly, this little guy would have been beaten so hard that he couldn''t find his way back.


    Now Ace is also forcing himself to find a step to get down. After all, he has been moring for a challenge for two days, but now the opponent has caused such a huge attack with just a punch. This is obviously for him. Shock.


    But little did he know that there was no need to scare such a little guy who had juste out of the sea. It was just Ace trying to put money in his face.


    The Infinity slowly began to approach the Moby-Dick, and the ship Ace was on was not even a fraction of the sizepared to them.


    With the arrival of the Infinity, the entire Spade Pirate Ship stopped shouting and all looked towards the huge ship.


    The unique shape and appearance instantly attracted everyone''s attention. Even those on the Abby Dick began to lie on the fence and watch. The Endless came from afar.


    When the two ships were almost close enough, the Infinity began to slowly stop. However, in the process, the small boat Aishi was riding on was directly added to the middle by the Infinity and Moby Dick.


    The crew members on the ship were all panicked, and some were so frightened that they were about to jump into the sea, but unexpectedly they stopped at this moment.


    "These are all really bastards!"


    Ace cursed angrily and prepared to jump up to fight them. But just as he was about to jump up, two crew members around him hugged his thighs and shouted in a tearful voice, "Captain, we Can we just stay aside for now? The other party obviously seems to being and going, so why should we go out into this muddy water?"


    "Then you can''t be so angry!"


    Ace said still a little angry.


    "But we also need to see the situation clearly. I don''t know the rest of this ship, but at least I know the g hanging on it. This one is called the emperor among the four emperors and one emperor. The existence of the Toru Empire ispletely It was beyond our imagination, and we saw the news two days ago that King Tru came to the new world in person. This must be him, so we gave in this time and went back to recover the rest of the scene. "


    The crew member lying on the ground cried bitterly.


    They had already started to prevent Ace, the captain, froming to challenge Whitebeard. Even these crew members did not understand when their captain became mentally ill? You have nothing to do to challenge the strongest man in the world. Can you, a fledgling little guy like you, challenge him just by saying it is a challenge?


    Restricted by the two people, Ace thought for a moment, then said with a grin, "Okay, let me go, don''t make trouble, and don''t challenge me anymore, but I''m curious, what does this Tru ce look like?" ?��


    "Are you telling the truth?"


    The crew member lying on the ground looked at Ace, the captain, in disbelief, and asked again with some uncertainty.


    "Don''t worry, I will do what I say, let go of your hand!"


    Ace reluctantly confirmed it directly.


    However, on the Infinity at this moment, the moment the ship stopped, Chang Nuo had already stood up from his original lying state.


    This meeting waspletely different from thest time. Thest time they were floating on the water, but this time they said the height was slightly higher.


    After all, there are three decks on the Infinity, and Chang Nuo and the others are standing on the highest ce.

 Chapter 343 The two people we met again

    <h4>Chapter 343 The two people we met again</h4>


    Although the two of them are not absolutely condescending now, after all, Whitebeard is so tall, so even if he is sitting there, Chang Nuo is still at the same level from the perspective of vision.


    After the Infinity stopped, the personnel who followed, including the chef, had already put on their own navalbat uniforms, and stood on the front deck in full standard.


    Chang Nuo slowly walked to the edge of the guardrail, stood there holding on to the guardrail, looking forward, with a smile on his lips.


    As for Marco and Jozi, who originally belonged to the Whitebeard Pirates, they had already jumped onto the Moby-Dick with Jinbe the moment they stopped.


    "Dad, we are back!"


    As soon as he jumped onto the Moby-Dick, Mark greeted Whitebeard with a smile on his face and shouted.


    "Dad!"


    Jinbe also called him the same name. Looking at Whitebeard who was still sitting there leaning against the wall, he showed unprecedented respect.


    Whitebeard looked at the three people who came up, just smiled, and then said, "Juste back!"


    Just for a moment, his eyes returned to the Infinity again.


    "Old man, we haven''t seen you for a long time. Are you okay?"


    Chang Nuo stood on the side of the ship, shouting with a smile on his face. After all, it has been almost half a year since hest came to this ce. Now Whitebeard has not taken the bottle of medicine given by Chang Nuost time. , I look a lot better now, at least I don��t have to sit there with a water bottle hanging all over my body.


    "Guhahaha~, boy Tru, my old man is in very good health now. Even if he is gesticting, there will be no problem for a while."


    Whitebeard shouted with a loudugh.


    "This man is Whitebeard, the strongest man in the world? Why does he lookpletely different from what he imagined? I''m afraid it''s hard to even stand up at such an old age. How can he be the strongest man in the world?"


    On the Infinity, Enel looked at the white beard like this and said to himself with some doubts.


    "This is a strong man from the older generation. When they were roaming the sea, you were not born yet!"


    Abona responded directly and mercilessly. You can''t use someone''s current body to deny everything they had before. This is definitely unrealistic.


    And even though Whitebeard is already very old, the skinny camel is still much bigger than the horse, and he can still dominate the sea just sitting there.


    "Junhe, send us the gifts we prepared in advance for this visit. This can be regarded as an expression of respect for us as juniors."


    Changnuo turned his head and shouted to Junhe who was standing behind him.


    In fact, when they came out of the Tru Empire, they didn''t bring anything with them at all. The reason why they brought some gifts was because Chang Nuo temporarily purchased them from the system space.


    Junhe nodded slightly, then turned around and started walking towards the inside of the cabin.


    Chang Nuo didn''t say anything more to Whitebeard. Instead, he turned to the people behind him and said, "Let''s go!"


    As he said that, a transparent bridge simr to a ss nk suddenly floated in front of Chang Nuo and the others, and it led directly to the Moby Dick.


    His Majesty the King must be walking at the front, followed by General Yixiao and the others slowly followed.


    The other members of the Whitebeard Pirates aboard the Moby Dick were not as disrespectful as the first time, but this time they have maintained their full performance.


    This is a recognition of the strong, including those captains who opposed it, all of them consciously retreated to the back.


    They don''t think that I, Trudy, have nothing to do with running so far and starting a war with the Whitebeard Pirates. Now they just need to watch how their captainmunicates with the other party''s king.


    "Marco, bring some good wine? Today we are starting to prepare for a grand banquet."


    Whitebeard smiled and gave instructions to Marco who was standing next to him.


    Others were quite willing to do such a thing, but among the crowd, there was indeed one person who kept staring at Chang Nuo.


    ckbeard has already shown a very tolerant mind now. With this momentum, it is probably an achievement that most people cannot achieve.


    Chang Nuo also nced at where he was, and walked directly onto the Moby Dick without saying much.


    Several generals behind him also followed, and even Gion, who followed the navy, stood silently behind the crowd.


    "Hey, you guys, I''m here to challenge you. Can you go and reminisce after it''s over?"


    The moment Chang Nuo first stepped onto the Moby-Dick, Ace couldn''t hold back the Spade Pirates below their ship and shouted again.


    After all, the people on both sides seemed to get along so harmoniously. The key was to leave him alone as a provocation, making him feel very humiliated.


    Chang Nuo happened to turn his head and nce at the other person. He was quite fond of this shirtless guy with a face full of freckles.


    "Old man, it seems that if you don''t find someone to ept the challenge, this little guy will be in trouble forever, right?"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his lips.


    "I don''t know where this passionate young man came from, but people with such courage are rare these days."


    Whitebeard said.


    After Chang Nuo took a few steps in his direction, he slowly began to sit cross-legged on the ground.


    But in this case,municating with Whitebeard requires him to raise his head slightly, and the distance is only about 10 meters. After all, that guy is too tall.


    The moment he sat down, a space barrier instantly rose around Chang Nuo''s body, and even his white beard was directly covered within the range.


    As for everyone else being blocked from the barrier, at first, the Whitebeard Pirates suddenly showed their alertness, but the moment they reacted, Whitebeard had already stretched out his hand. He took out his right hand and signaled them not to act rashly.


    As an old guy who has been on this sea for decades, he no longer needs to exin too much to understand that Emperor Tru has no fighting spirit at all. The reason for this must be that he has something tomunicate with him.


    The other members of the Whitebeard Pirates, after seeing their father''s gesture, continued to do what they needed to do.

 Chapter 344 His identity?

    <h4>Chapter 344 His identity?</h4>


    But not everyone is so honest. At least at this time, ckbeard''s eyes are always looking into the enchantment space from time to time.


    "Tell me, it seems there is something extraordinary that can make you take it so seriously, Mr. Tru."


    Whitebeard''s expression instantly became much more serious than before. The leader took a sip from a bowl of wine, ced it on the ground, and then said to Chang Nuo.


    "It may not be such a big deal, and it doesn''t matter to me as much as I thought, but I feel that he might be of some help to you."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile, his eyes always fixed on White Beard''s expression. When the other party didn''t respond, he said again, "Do you know the identity of the little guy below whoes to challenge you?"


    Hearing this, Whitebeard almost didn''t think about it at all. After all, he really didn''t know who Ace was now.


    "I don''t know what you mean by that, boy Tru?"


    "What I''m saying is, stay down there. The guy on the boat is named Ace. Podocas D. Ace."


    Chang Nuo said, and then began to observe the changes on Baibeard''s face with great interest.


    So far, the other party still shows no signs of surprise, not even some curiosity.


    "It seems to be from the D family. I wonder what this has to do with my old man?"


    Whitebeard asked again doubtfully.


    "s~"


    Chang Nuo sighed slightly, and of course he could understand Whitebeard''s thoughts now.


    He was not someone who knew much about Ace''s situation, so in the end he could only exin the matter in detail himself.


    "He is Roger''s son!"


    Chang Nuo pointed out this matter directly.


    "Roger???"


    Whitebeard still looked confused, but this doubt onlysted for two or three seconds. It can also be said that his doubt itself was filled with shock.


    "You mean he is the son of Pirate King Roger?"


    The expression on Whitebeard''s face finally changed at this moment.


    From being shocked just now to looking shocked now, his eyes even widened, and he couldn''t help but turn his head directly down to look at Ace who was shouting towards them.


    "This is the son of the Pirate King. I guess you can''t even imagine it, right?"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile, with apletely sessful look on his face.


    However, at this moment, Whitebeard had mixed feelings in his heart. Although he had been roaming the sea for decades and had various interactions with the former Pirate King Roger, time has passed and everything has disappeared.


    After a while, Whitebeard sighed slightly, but still maintained his strong demeanor and did not study this kind of thing too much.


    Chang Nuo looked at Whitebeard who had returned to calmness. He didn''t expect to meet Ace when he came here this time. This guy had actuallye to this ce. It seemed that the fate in the dark was impossible to escape no matter what. past.


    After the space barrier dissipated in the next second, Whitebeard was able to return to his normal state, but now the Ace under the ship was still screaming.


    "Which of you will go over and challenge me? At least let this little guy retreat from the difficulties!"


    Whitebeard turned his head and shouted to the busy people over there.


    But at this moment, everyone in the Whitebeard Pirates is already busy preparing for the banquet. Each and every one of them has not even heard of them. The only one who is more leisurely should be regarded asing to the Whitebeard Pirates. Fishman Ind Jinbe.


    While others were busy working, he sat not far away and watched all of this quietly without any movement or expression.


    "I''m pretty good at beating this fat guy by myself, so let him go over and challenge me. It seems that no one can escape the destiny''s arrangement!"


    Chang Nuo shook his head slightly and sighed.


    From this point on, the official plot really begins.


    After this battle, everything probably started to develop ording to the original plot. The emergence of the Tru Empire only added a lot of color to the original plot, and the rest did not y a substantial role.


    Whitebeard looked at Jinbei who was sitting far away. No need to say anything now, the other person stood up directly and started to head towards the direction of the Spade Pirates dutifully.


    Later, during their banquet, there were almost endless traces of collisions between water and fire on the sea. Ace''s strength was almost on par with the current Shichibukai Jinbei.


    ording to the current situation, it is estimated that if the fight continues for several days and nights, there will be no winner.


    The two of them were fighting back and forth, but it was a lively scene aboard the Moby-Dick, with everyone eating meat, drinking from big bowls, and enjoying the banquet life.


    As for the fight between the two people, except for some people with rtively low strength who stared with interest, others, including the generals from the Tru Empire, almost didn''t bother to watch the fight between the two people.


    For them, this kind of battle is almost the same as children ying house. Why does it take so long to solve something that can be solved in two minutes?


    "Boy Tru, why did youe to the new world this time?"


    Whitebeard held a huge wine bowl in his hand, narrowed his eyes slightly, stared at Chang Nuo sitting opposite him and asked in confusion.


    The rest of the people were also a little curious to see how Emperor Tru would answer. After all, the question asked by Whitebeard this time did not evade anyone''s thoughts.


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then said, "I''m just looking for something!"


    "I see."


    Chang Nuo didn''t exin anything clearly, but Whitebeard seemed to rx directly at this moment. Even if he didn''t have an answer, he was already tacitly understanding it at this moment.


    There is no need to exin some things too clearly. It is important for both parties to understand each other. As for other things, there is really no need to study them too seriously.


    "You are still very young, and no one can predict what will happen in the future. The former Captain Rocks didn''t dare to do it, Roger didn''t dare to do it, and the same goes for us.


    Invisibly, it seems that a lot of fighting spirit has been lost. Maybe it is the most correct choice to leave some things to you. "


    Whitebeard said calmly, the corners of his mouth already beginning to show a smile that recalled what he once looked like.


    These words seemed to be advice, a handover, and even felt likest words.


    For Whitebeard, the strongest man on the sea, being able to let him say such words has fully demonstrated the recognition of the man sitting across from him.

 Chapter 345 The storm is coming

    <h4>Chapter 345 The storm ising</h4>


    But the other people sitting around were all listening in confusion, and they couldn''t figure out what the two of them were talking about.


    These people didn''t seem to bemunicating on the same ne, although most of the lively sounds behind them were about eating and drinking.


    But each of the several generals in the Tru Empire almost listened to these words in detail in their minds.


    "Old man, there are some things that are more appropriate than leaving them to me, but how you do them is the most important thing."


    Changnuo said.


    "How do you n to get there?"


    "I have my own way."


    "What about the road signs?"


    "This thing ispletely unnecessary. Even if there is no target, it can still pass." Chang Nuo said.


    "Guhahahaha~, why bother talking about these things? When you see it for yourself, you will probably have the answer in your heart. It''s better toe over and have a drink today, and have a banquet that is just for you."


    Whitebeardughed and shouted, and the others all picked up the wine sses in their hands and bumped them directly.


    The lively atmosphere has once again been exaggerated, but how many people are happy and how many are worried?


    He was destined not to stay in Whitebeard''s ce for too long. There was no need to go around to his ce in the first ce. He just wanted toe and take a look at this old guy.


    The most important thing is to have a sense of presence in front of him. Some ns will still need to rely on the Whitebeard Pirates for implementation in the future.


    In any case, the original plot n must follow the previous trajectory, otherwise the n that the empire has been preparing for so many years may reallye to nothing.


    Chang Nuo''s long-standing idea is still to bring all the rhythms into the original plot. At least if he proceeds ording to the routes he knows, he will have a better chance of winning.


    But even among the people around him, I am afraid no one knows about this kind of thing. In other words, even the people next to him, no one knows what the thoughts of Emperor Tru are.


    Even the generals who followed him thought they were just here to take a look at Whitebeard and had nothing extra to do.


    But Chang Nuo has at least understood one thing. The result of their exploration this time is that at least the current four emperors know this kind of thing.


    Simr to what he had guessed before, the establishment of some things may not be as beautiful as he imagined.


    After spending a day aboard Whitebeard''s Moby-Dick, almost everyone was drunk, even Changnuo was no exception.


    Although the person drinking is just a mirror image on the outside, the true self in the inner space also cares about it.


    Early the next morning.


    Now the voyage belonging to the Tohru Empire has begun again, and the battle between Ace and Jinbe on the sea is still going on happily.


    Both of them seemed to be fighting tirelessly, but to these strong men, this kind of fighting was no different than children ying in the mud.


    All of them can be described as weak and pitiful.


    When the Endless really started to leave slowly, Whitebeard stood up in a rare moment and watched them leave directly. There was no joy in the expression on his face, but he seemed very calm.


    It wasn''t until the Infinity slowly disappeared on the horizon that Whitebeard sighed helplessly.


    There were still many people aboard the Moby Dick in the morning who were still awake.


    The most enjoyable thing about being a pirate is that, living in a state of intoxication on the sea every day, at least in the sea area near the Whitebeard Pirates, there is no need to worry about any safety issues.


    "Dad, what''s wrong? It feels like you have a lot on your mind?"


    Whitebeard stood on the edge of the Moby-Dick, facing the rising sun and looking at the Infinity that had disappeared. At this time, Marco''s voice came from behind him, and he asked with a hint of concern.


    "It''s okay, my son!"


    Whitebeard turned his head and looked at Marco slightly and said.


    "Did your side reach an agreement with the Tru Empire before? Or maybe it was their side..."


    "Marco! The storm of the sea will hit soon. Dad is already a long time and won''t be able to protect you for too long."


    Before Marco could finish his question, Whitebeard started talking directly, even as if he was deliberately interrupting his question.


    "Dad, you don''t have to think so much here. Your sons have grown up now, and their strength is not at the mercy of others. We are just pursuing a peaceful life and don''t want to fight with the world, and we don''t have any particrly big problems. The ambition is just to maintain a normal life on our pirate ship.


    Presumably neither the Navy nor the World Government have any thoughts about the Whitebeard Pirates? "


    Marco said.


    "I hope so!"


    Whitebeard knows very well what his fate will be. He has lived a lifetime, and every day he lives is considered to be a big profit.


    When everyone knows that he is the Pirate King, doesn''t Roger have enough strength to get rid of the entanglement of the World Government and the Navy?


    This kind of problem is obviously impossible, so on the day Roger died, the sea was deserted. Except for Shanks now, no one else participated in the past. Everyone understood that since leaving After embarking on this path, their fate has been arranged.


    For these emperors who have almost dominated the sea, their true glory is not to die peacefully on the ship where they are.


    My voyage to the Tru Empire has really just begun. Everything now is just the first step of the n. Various subsequent problems will always appear in a steady stream.


    In Ravdru, where the Infinity''s target is located, all everyone wants is an answer.


    It''s just that there is only one person who can read the historical text, but it''s unknown how many people actually there are.


    Everything is almost consistent with what Chang Nuo guessed. Every one of the four emperors above the sea has witnessed the secret of Rafdru.


    It is because they knew this secret that they were willing to stay in the New World, a ce full of danger.


    Everyone has always longed to be the king of the pirate world. Is it possible that those things don''t have the strength to achieve this level?


    It��s not that I don��t want to do it, but I don��t dare to do it, at least for now.


    Bing the Pirate King is more than just a status, but more importantly, a responsibility.


    Roger used his own death to summon the era of great pirates,pletely revealing the dark side of this world, and at the same time hoping to find a ray of light in this darkness.

 Chapter 346 The Ultimate Secret

    <h4>Chapter 346 The Ultimate Secret</h4>


    Now no one knows how big a sensation it will cause by publicizing Rafdru''s secret, and even what consequences it will cause. It can make so many strong people choose to remain silent. The Pirate King even exposed it at the cost of his life. This is a dark scene in this world, and no one dares to imagine or guess the final oue.


    The Infinity may have begun to head directly in the direction of Rafdru with some kind of mission.


    Everyone on the ship may be the one who breaks this dark age.


    It''s just that it''s too early to say anything now. Even though Changnuo has guessed many endings, he still doesn''t dare to make any remarks until he sees the real object.


    Whether it is One Piece''s right-hand man Pluto Rayleigh or the Whitebeard we see now, they all seem to have colluded and kept this secret to the end. No one has the idea to talk about this topic. They can rely on themselves to explore this ultimate mystery.


    Raff Drew At the end of the new world, what kind of ce is this? Anyway, in today''s pirate era, no one can reach it.


    The power of the Four Emperors seems to be guarding the road to Lafdru in this new world as if it was an agreement. They seem to automatically screen out a person who has not been blessed by strength and willpower.


    Don''t these four people have the strength topete for the so-called Pirate King?


    This kind of thing is obviously impossible. The strength of each of them is beyond the ability of the navy to directly stop, but each of them has a tacit understanding to guard their own territory, even if they have the ability to go to the ce where Rafdru is. road sign, but no one has ever thought about going to that ce to be the Pirate King.


    All the final answers can only be revealed by themselves, and the rest can only be judged by time.


    On the Infinity, as Chang Nuo got closer and closer to the final secret, Chang Nuo seemed to feel as if countless shackles had been wrapped around his body. Both his heart and body felt extremely heavy.


    "General Yixiao, you said that we should get close to the secret of Rafdru, is it right or wrong?"


    In the end, Chang Nuo couldn''t suppress his inner thoughts. He stood on the side of the ship, looking at the sea in the distance, and asked Yixiao who was also standing next to him.


    "There must be no right or wrong in this kind of thing. Even if you just do it, His Majesty the King should give everyone the same feeling. If you dare to do it, how can you question what you think today?"


    Said with a smile.


    "It''s not a so-called doubt, it''s just that we still don''t know what kind of secret exists in Ravdru. Pluto Rayleigh knows it, and it seems that Whitebeard also knows it. Maybe it''s because they know that they are willing to guard it in the end. What can we do to end our remaining lives in a peaceful ce?"


    "I vaguely remember that when I joined the Toru Empire, His Majesty said that when the Toru Empire has enough power, then it will protect the ce it should protect. A force will protect a person. Use all your strength to protect this world.


    This is why Lao Chan is willing to join the Tru Empire, and... Lao Chan believes in His Majesty the King. "


    Yixiao opened his white eyes and said with a serious face.


    As a general in the entire Tru Empire, Yixiao is also the most meticulous. Although he cannot see with his eyes, he knows better than anyone else in his heart.


    His Majesty the King brought these people here to explore the secret of Rafdru. Even though everyone on the ship knew it, no one was discouraged or had other thoughts.


    The moment he met Pluto Rayleigh, Yixiao already felt that their destination might not be as smooth as imagined, but so what?


    "Your Majesty the King, no matter what choice you make in the future? My subordinates will always be willing to follow you. Even if it means death, I will have no regrets!"


    Junhe stood up at this time, with a very serious expression, and took a few steps towards Changnuo. Then he knelt on the ground with one knee, supporting the ground with one hand, putting the other hand on his knee, and lowered his head. He said solemnly.


    "Your Majesty, we all believe in you and believe that you can lead us to a better world."


    Abona also walked forward and sat down and said the same thing as Junhe.


    Needless to say, these two people are already Chang Nuo''s most trusted beings. Jun He grew up with Chang Nuo, and almost all of his strength can be attributed to Chang Nuo''s single-handed guidance.


    As for Abona, he was following his oath, a oath that kept him out of a nightmare ce.


    The deck on the top of the ship seemed more like a conference room at the moment. Everyone on the seats in the circle had a heavy look on their face.


    Enilu and Moshank stood up at the same time, looking at Changnuo with firm expressions, expressing their attitudes without the need for words.


    Although Gion came from the navy, he could already feel the atmosphere and domineering power of the Toru Empire at this moment. He already knew two days ago that the Toru Empire''s destination would be Rafdel, the secret of the Pirate King. ce, but he did not choose to report the matter to the Navy Headquarters.


    In fact, the more important reason is that from the moment she boarded the ship, she was already under the constant shadow of the psychic devil fruit.


    The reason why it takes such a long time is that it canpletely change a person''s thinking, and it can make a person change his original point of view unknowingly.


    Psychic Devil Fruits are not without their shorings. At least for the more powerful people, it takes longer to change their inherent opinions.


    But even so, the ability of the psychic Devil Fruit has indeed be a bug-like existence. Once a person''s inherent thinking is rewritten, even if the Devil Fruit user disappears, the ability he exudes will not weaken.


    Perhaps speaking from another level, who among the people present is not under the long-term shadow of this psychic devil fruit?


    "Get up, I understand everything you said."


    Chang Nuo turned his head and looked at the two people kneeling on one knee, and said with a calm tone and a smile on his face.


    So what if we get the answer? But now they just want a result.


    A result that can rewrite the current world structure.


    It is no longer very important what the ce of Rafdru ultimately exists. What is important is that they need to understand in advance, or to rewrite this result in advance.

 Chapter 347 You guys deal with it

    <h4>Chapter 347 You guys deal with it</h4>


    Chang Nuo is not the only one who has a heavy heart now. The other people who followed are also extremely uneasy in their hearts.


    As the ultimate secret on the entire sea, it would probably take them about half a month at most to reach it directly.


    For them, this distance can already be considered within reach.


    Four days after leaving the Whitebeard pirate ship.


    To be precise, they have now entered the territory belonging to Red-haired Shanks. This is a rtively special area in the New World. At the same time, except for the sea area, there are no inds within at least 500km, only one in the center. The ind of about two square meters can be regarded as the base of their red-haired pirates.


    But this time, the group had no desire to stay. The Infinity was still sailing quickly towards its destination. As for the red-haired pirates who originally belonged here, they were about to leave the new world. range and began to move towards the North Sea.


    After leaving this sea area, the rest of the process is almost straight forward in the direction of Rufford Road. There will be no obstacles in the process, and it is impossible to encounter any pirates.


    Almost all pirates who came to the New World from the Grand Line have been blocked within the sphere of influence of the Four Emperors. For those people, they either join the Four Emperors Group or simply sink into the sea. There may be a third option.


    But on the calm sea, far away from them, a different kind of pirate ship began to appear.


    Even from a long distance, you can see another shape of this ship, and this ship seems to be alive, with a sunflower bow shape, and a smiling face all the time.


    On this ship, Perros stood a little uneasily, and behind him, he was not the only one.


    Smoothie also appeared here at the same time. In addition, there were several other girls standing on the boat. Judging from their appearance, they should all be Big Mom''s daughters.


    "Wow!! Is that the Toru Empire''s ship? It''s really different from the others. It doesn''t even have a sail? It looks really strange. Could it be that the other party''s strength is really as strong as mom said? No matter how I feel, that��s all.��


    Among the Big Mom Pirates, a cute-looking little girl made two circles with her hands directly towards the Infinity, and looked at her eyes.


    The moment they saw the whole picture, they couldn''t help but start cheering in surprise, but the words that followed were not as beautiful as they imagined, and even looked a bit mocking.


    This little girl looks to be only about seven or eight years old, but this image really makes people dislike her.


    "mpe, if you can''t speak, just shut up. If I hear you say such words again, there will be no need toe out with us again."


    Smoothie turned around and looked at his sister with a fierce look on his face.


    mpe is the 36th girl of Big Mom. She is not very strong, but she has always been very vicious. Even the brothers and sisters don''t seem to have a good impression of him.


    Perros had no such idea. His long tongue kept licking the lollipop next to him. He was recovering his health and stared directly at the Endless Number heading towards him.


    This time the Infinity was not only the purpose of their trip, but also the reason why they came with an arduous mission.


    As the sons and daughters of the Big Mom Pirates, none of them know what the consequences will be if this matter goes wrong.


    As for Big Mom, I''m afraid it''s enough for them to bear.


    On the Infinity.


    "Your Majesty the King, this is the ship of the Big Mom Pirates. It seems to being towards us. Do we need to dock?"


    Gogoya said.


    "Let''s take a look at what they want to do. I guess the old woman invited us to eat some cake because she had nothing to do. Maybe she wants to marry my daughter to me because she has nothing to do? It''s not the first time that this has happened. .��


    Changnuo said with a smile, without even raising his head, and continued to taste the processed fruits on the table next to him.


    "Why don''t Your Majesty the King take a look at what Big Mom''s daughters look like? If possible, it would be okay to marry them back?"


    Yixiao said with a teasing smile.


    "That''s right, Your Majesty, we can''t do anything like this if we want it."


    Junhe followed.


    Others couldn''t help but joke as well, with smiles blooming on their faces, and the silent atmosphere on the ship became more rxed at this moment.


    Chang Nuo didn''t refute these words. He began to recall the images of Big Mom''s daughters. In fact, it didn''t mean that there weren''t some good-looking girls, but those two and most of the others were almost crooked.


    So what does it matter if the ticket looks good? Chang Nuo had no intention of doing this at all.


    Bigmom is not as good as others. From time to time, another side of his personality will appear when hees into contact with this bitch. Even his children don''t know what kind of mother they may face in the next second.


    But now the boats on both sides have begun to get closer and closer, but at this time, Chang Nuo stood up directly, turned to Yixiao and said, "General Yixiao, the next thing is left to you. If that old woman invites us If you want to eat cake, you don��t have to rush to refuse, but just say you��ll go there in a month.��


    "Your Majesty the King, the Big Mom Pirates are only two days away from us. Why do we say we can only join after a month?"


    Gogoya asked with some confusion.


    "I don''t want to waste another two days and take a detour to Cake Ind, a ce where birds don''t poop. It won''t be toote to wait until wee back from exploring.


    You guys have to deal with it yourself. I''m going to go back and take a nap first. "


    As Chang Nuo spoke, he began to yawn at this time.


    As long as he doesn''te forward and face the Big Mom Pirates in person, there will definitely be no problems with the rest. Even if he refuses, he only needs to refute them when the timees.


    Now is not the time to directly fall out with these big forces in the sea. Maybe there will be time to take advantage of it in the future.


    Without paying too much attention to the situation, Chang Nuo turned around and started walking directly into the cabin.


    The worries he had been worrying about in the past few days had indeed prevented him from getting much rest. Especially when he was approaching the secret of Rufford Road on the sea, it made him feel a lot of uneasiness.


    Taking advantage of the fact that he was in a rtively good mood for a while, he wanted to catch up on some sleep quickly. As for the rest, he believed that the people on the ship had the ability to deal with those on the Big Mom pirate ship.

 Chapter 348 The bigmom pirates are coming

    <h4>Chapter 348 The bigmom pirates areing</h4>


    It''s not that he trusts his group of people more, but Chang Nuo himself doesn''t want to deal with these matters at all.


    Everyone has already arrived at this ce, and the rest should naturally perform their duties, heading in the direction of Rafdru. After knowing the secret, it doesn''t matter if we continue to discuss the remaining matters in detail.


    Bigmom''s invitation is almost like a lice on a bald man''s head, it couldn''t be more obvious.


    And he did as he was told. After finishing his enrichment, Changnuo walked directly to the room where he was. After extinguishing all the lights, he walked straight to the bed and started to lie down to sleep.


    Although he was domineering and could unconsciously sense everything around him, he really didn''t care about who came.


    But the people above were a little troubled. The people from the Big Mom Pirates were extremely respectful from the moment they approached.


    Gogoya was serving as a receptionist, and the Infinity did not treat the other party as a guard. At the moment it approached, it even stretched out a step and directly connected to the other party''s hull.


    Peros was the leader, followed by Smoothie and his sisters. This time, they did not bring any gifts, but it was just a friendly invitation from a group of brothers and sisters.


    When she felt the Infinity at close range, the younger mpe couldn''t help but open her mouth slightly in surprise and looked at everything around her.


    "What a beautiful ship, it would be great if it was ours!"


    mpe''s words instantly revealed a slight anger on the faces of the two people walking in front.


    "The Tru Empire Endless wees you all. You can visit the ship as you like, but there are some things you cannot say!"


    Gogoya greeted Peros and the others with a smile on his face, looked at mpe who was walking at the back, and spoke in the same friendly tone.


    But this is also equivalent to reminding them what they should say or what they should and should not do. After all, this is not their cake ind. They cannot say what they want or do what they want. of.


    Perros and Smoothie could still hear the threat in each other''s words. Although they had been masters for too long and were not used to hearing such words, they had nothing to do.


    In their perception, there are already many people whose strength exceeds their own. On this ship, even the chefs who cook are almost as strong as them.


    Not to mention the generals from the Tru Empire and the emperors among the Four Emperors.


    "This beauty is really joking! My sister-inw''s words were not thoughtful and offended just now. I will personally apologize to Emperor Toru on behalf of the Big Mom Pirates."


    Perros held the lollipop in his hand, lowered his head with his long tongue out, and said respectfully.


    npe seemed to have felt that she had said the wrong thing. She was standing behind, hiding behind others in a somewhat obscene manner. However, she could only see a smile on her expression, but she could not feel it. No matter how scared she felt, it was as if someone would bear everything for her.


    "There is no need to meet in person to apologize. His Majesty the King has already rested and has not woken up yet. All you have to do now is to deal with our General Smile of the Tru Empire."


    Gogoya said, and then directly led everyone to the Infinity, which was still on the front deck. As for the generals of the Tru Empire, few came out to greet them. They just stood on the edge with a smile. watching them from the railing of the ship.


    Peros also raised his head and nced at them. The leaders of almost every force knew the famous people on the ship. In any case, the revtions in the past few years have revealed that the empire has been on the cusp of the storm. They Almost every move was put on the headlines of newspapers for sale.


    How many people in the entire pirate world don''t know about the situation in the Toru Empire? Anyone who has some strength has almost firmly remembered the famous beings in the Tru Empire in their hearts.


    Perros would not be so arrogant that he did not investigate the situation of the Tru Empire beforeing here. Although he had not read the newspaper before, but this time he epted such an order in a critical situation, he still needed toe and do it.


    From the moment he heard that he would not see Emperor Tru this time, Peros seemed to suddenly let go of the heavy burden in his heart.


    Before they came, there was already a lot of anxiety in their hearts. Even though Peros was the eldest son of the entire Cake Ind, there were times when he still began to have a certain amount of fear in his heart.


    "Brother Peros, the one standing above looking at us should be General Yixiao!"


    Smoothie whispered to Peros, who was also looking up.


    "I understand, let''s go."


    Perros sighed slightly, maybe because his tongue was too long, it was directly on his lips. Unlike before, you can still roll it around your face a few times and then lick the lollipop in your hand.


    At least after boarding the ship, Perros''s expression was almost the same as when he met Big Mom.


    Gogoya looked at the five or six people who came up together. After sizing each other carefully, he started to guide them towards the top deck with a smile on his face.


    No matter what the purpose of this group of peopleing over, she couldn''t participate in them, and she couldn''t even say unnecessary words.


    All Gogoya can do is guide and serve.


    As for the people on the top deck at this moment, except for the smiles and slightly serious expressions, others were still chatting andughing.


    One by one, they were either lying there like Junhe, or they were sitting there peacefully like Moshank, wearing standard military general clothes.


    For them, meeting these people from the Big Mom Pirates is not a big deal. Besides, Big Mom is noting in person, but just letting his eldest sone over. It is enough for the Tohru Empire to have a general receive them. other side.


    No one paid too much attention to it. In fact, there was really no need to pay attention to it.


    After waiting for a while, the figures of Peros and others began to slowly appear at the corner of the stairs. Smoothie was the tallest among them, and the shortest one looked like he was only seven or eight years old.


    But even though they had stepped onto the top deck, these people still did not move at all. Only Gogoya continued to wee these people to their seats.

 Chapter 349 Tea Party at Cake Island

    <h4>Chapter 349 Tea Party at Cake Ind</h4>


    After Peros and the others sat down uneasily, Yiyi smiled at this time and began to slowly walk towards them.


    "His Majesty the King has previously ordered that I will be responsible for all reception matters. I wonder what you are here to do?"


    Yixiao stepped forward and asked directly without any hesitation.


    When Peros looked at the other party, he stood up directly, rolled his tongue twice on his face and then said with a smile, "I just want to invite Emperor Tru to the Cake Ind for this year''s tea party. This is the festival that my mother is most looking forward to." , so I was specially asked toe and invite you!"


    "Tea party? I heard that there will be a lot of delicious food at this festival on Cake Ind? I just don''t know if it''s true?"


    After Enel heard this, he rushed over instantly, his body shing with lightning. After all, he was not interested in managing these things at the beginning. He was still leisurely staying in the swimming pool, but it seemed that the next second As if he heard something terrible, he instantly transformed into the form of lightning from the swimming pool and ran to them.


    "Natural Devil Fruit!"


    Although Smuji had already known that there was a natural thunder fruit user in the Tru Empire, he did not expect that after feeling the oppression brought by him at close range, he still felt a huge shock in his heart.


    Perros turned his head and nced at Smoothie, then rolled his tongue in a circle and said with a smile, "Of course there are a lot of delicious food, so I''m waiting for you toe and taste it."


    "I already know your intention toe. Hugh can also agree to this matter on behalf of His Majesty the King. However, the fastest time will take a month to go. At present, we have things to do, so within a short time , it is definitely impossible to go.��


    Yixiao opened his mouth and said.


    "Is that so?"


    Perros, who had a happy expression just now, calmed down instantly.


    "It seems that mom just asked us toe over and invite us, but didn''t say when exactly we would go. Since we have agreed, doesn''t that mean our mission has beenpleted?"


    Perros stood alone and thought about it. He really didn''t dare to disobey Big Mom''s order, but the question of when to go was beyond his control. At least this mission was perfectly implemented for him. .


    The other sisters could only sit there without saying a word. Smoothie carefully looked at everyone on the ship, and his domineering perception allowed him to clearly see the horrors on the ship.


    But there are some core ces that even he cannot sense until now.


    In fact, after the previous battle with Wilbu, the secrets belonging to the ship they were on had been pulled onto the Infinity.


    Although so far, all of them still haven''t figured out what the patient''s red light is, and what is the item that can iste the domineering color from seeing, hearing, and hearing? But at least for them, it''s good to know that there is such a thing that can iste the domineering power.


    So far, this thing is ced almost at the core of the entire ship and does not expand the scope of the entire ship.


    "Brother, my mother asked us to take them with us when wee here this time! Now they directly say that it will be in a month. Wouldn''t that be very disrespectful to my mother?"


    While Perros was still thinking, mpe, the youngest sitting behind him, opened his mouth to ask uneasily at this moment.


    Perros'' whole body seemed to have been shocked by electricity, and he woke up from his thoughts in an instant. Then he turned to look at his sister and shouted angrily in a low voice, "Shut up!"


    After scolding, Peros turned his head and continued to look at General Yixiao with a smile on his face. His expression waspletely different from the one just now, and he said with a smile, "Please don''t worry about it. Emperor Tru and everyone can enjoy the face cake ind, mom." To save face, the specific time is still arranged ording to your time. I will inform my mother of the specific situation as soon as possible after I return."


    "Regarding this, you can rest assured that the Tru Empire will definitely do what it says. When you go back, you can also tell Big Mom that our King is also looking forward to meeting her."


    Said with a smile.


    "I will tell you truthfully. I''m sure my mother will be very happy when she hears it."


    "I hope so."


    After finishing speaking with a smile, Gogoya once again walked up to Peros and said with a smile, "Everyone, the Infinity has been here for a long time waiting for you. I guess if there is nothing else, I hope you can Go back first, or leave a contact information first, and we will notify you when we go there."


    "Good work!"


    Smoothie nodded and said.


    The purpose of their boarding the ship was just to inform Big Mom of what they had conveyed. More importantly, they were toplete the task assigned by the other party and invite the Tru Empire to go to Cake Ind for a tea party. But now that all the tasks have beenpleted, there is no need to go again. Stay here.


    What Gogoya said was already obvious, that is, eviction orders have been issued. They have their own things to do. Naturally, there is no need to detour to Cake Ind. It will be the same when theye back.


    Perros didn''t bother too much. He held the lollipop in his hand, saluted the generals who were looking at him, and then turned around with a slight smile on his face, taking the few behind him with him. The younger sister started to walk outside.


    Although they were a little surprised not to see Emperor Tru this time, it at least allowed them to face the negotiation process easily.


    After all of them left, Gogoya shouted directly with a helpless expression, "Hai Ling, continue to speed up!"


    The people on Cake Ind continued to dock here, looking at the Endless that had begun to gradually move away from them, everyone had mixed feelings in their hearts.


    Cold sweat broke out on Peros''s back. He had been nervous from beginning to end just now. Although he didn''t see Emperor Tru, the pressure given to him by the generals on the ship was enough.


    Especially a smile that brought him as much danger as his own mother.


    Although Perros is not the strongest among Big Mom''s children, he is at least at the level of lieutenant general. The sense of oppression brought to him by the other party is indeed real.


    From the moment the Infinity left, Smoothie had been standing on the deck watching the departure. He was inexplicably full of curiosity about this ship, and even wanted to explore it, but she also knew this kind of thing. It''s simply not possible.

 Chapter 350 Stealth Advance

    <h4>Chapter 350 Stealth Advance</h4>


    "What do you think is so arrogant about the Tru Empire? They turned a blind eye even to their mother''s invitation. And why should we be so polite to them?"


    At the moment when everyone was silently watching the Infinity leave, mpe, who had been walking on the verge ofmitting suicide, suddenly questioned the two brothers and sisters standing in front.


    Fortunately, they were no longer on the Infinity. Whether it was Perros or Smoothie, they both turned their heads at the same time, with angry and cold faces, staring directly at mpe, a girl who was only seven or eight years old.


    The huge lollipop held in Peros''s hand was crushed to pieces in one hand in his angry state. He didn''t say much, and the long tongue exposed was no longer what it was at first. Always spinning around in front of me.


    "Watch your mouth. Next time, I don''t mind letting you sink into the sea!"


    Smoothie said to his sister in a cold voice.


    "Return!"


    Perros shouted loudly.


    Although mpe was more afraid of the expression andnguage that Smoothie showed just now, she was still a little unwilling in her heart. She muttered to herself, "It is what it is, why don''t you let others say it?"


    "You said it so lightly. Do you know what kind of person King Tru is? If he didn''t have the strength, do you think my mother would let Brother Perose to greet him in person? And the king never came out to meet him from the beginning to the end. Once.


    It seems you should be more careful in the future and don''t let your mouth kill you. "


    As soon as mpe finished speaking, Big Mom Twenty-Six, who was standing behind him, said with disdain.


    Each of these dozens of brothers and sisters has its own distinctive characteristics and personality. It can be said that each one behaves almost differently. Some are taciturn, and some are chatty like mpe. people.


    But there is no doubt that the bigmom gene is too powerful, and every child has be extremely powerful from birth.


    But it is precisely because of this that their personalities have been determined since they were born. Some people like them, and there are also many people who dislike them.


    Under the leadership of Peros, the members of the Big Mom Pirates began to move towards Cake Ind. It can be said that they gained something froming here this time, or it can be said that they gained nothing at all.


    At least for Peros, the task assigned to him by bigmom can be considered a perfectpletion. After all, his mother did not set any time beforeing, so this trip back can be regarded as an exnation.


    These people from the Tru Empire are unwilling to go to Cake Ind. It is impossible for anyone to force them. Even if Big Momes in person, it is probably impossible.


    As Perros, who has always been by his aunt''s side, and as his eldest son, this guy knows exactly what his mother''s character is like.


    But this is no longer important to the group of people staying on the Infinity.


    "Your Majesty the King, why are you unwilling to participate when those people from the Big Mom Piratese over?"


    It was alreadyte at night. Chang Nuo stayed in the room and just woke up and came to the restaurant to start preparing for dinner. At this time, Enilu, who had been sitting there and was a little restless, asked curiously.


    "Eat your food!"


    Arbonne said.


    Facing Abona, Enelu was speechless and began to put away his curiosity.


    Chang Nuo also sat there eating and didn''t make any response. At least it wasn''t the time to meet Big Mom yet. The two parties had already been in contact a few years ago. There was really no need to meet now.


    What''s more important is that their whereabouts are almost always exposed to the eyes of all major forces, and more importantly, the navy and the world government are also closely monitoring them.


    Now they were heading to Loughdrew, not wanting to cause any particr big fuss. Nowadays, those seagulls that have been following have already left one by one. Even the Navy Gion who is staying in bed, under the influence of the Devil Fruit ability, knows what should be reported to the Navy and what should not be reported.


    When the food in front of him was finished, Chang Nuo gently picked up the tissue in front of him and wiped his mouth, and then said calmly, "Hai Ling, how far is it from the destination?"


    "Dear His Majesty the King, it now takes about ten days to reach the destination of Ravdru."


    As soon as Chang Nuo''s voice fell, Hai Ling''s figure instantly appeared beside him, and he kept bending down and answered respectfully.


    "During the following voyage, everyone began to activate stealth advancement, and the objects obtained previously that can shield the domineering power began to cover the entire hull."


    Chang Nuo ordered.


    "Okay, Your Majesty."


    Hai Ling said, and the next second his entire figure disappeared in an instant.


    As the first-levelnder of the entire ship, Hai Ling must obey any orders given by Chang Nuo.


    Even if they advance invisibly, it will not have the slightest impact on their internal lives, and everything even seems to be extremely normal.


    Even standing on the deck, they can see the location of their own ship''s hull. If they don''t go out of their way to know, they won''t have a sense of what state their ship is in.


    It''s just that after entering the invisible state, the speed of the Infinity has elerated a lotpared to before.


    From here to the ce of Lavdru, there is no supply station for them on the way.


    For people in the pirate world, without road signs as navigation, they would not be able to go to the area of ??Ravdru at all, even if they have the eternal record pointer.


    So in the next few days of life, I will maintain the previous state every day.


    The only difference is that there is only a tumbling spray of water visible on the sea at this moment. It can make people feel that a huge creature is moving forward, but it is impossible to tell what kind of thing it is.


    Furthermore, after reaching the current position, how could there be people from the navy or other forces on the entire sea?


    The main purpose of activating invisibility is to prevent special situations from urring and not to be too ostentatious.


    What the navy and the world government are most worried about now is the alliance between pirate forces. Another point is that the secret of Rafdru''s location was discovered.


    Rafdru is the ultimate treasure in this world. Even if you think about it with your feet, you can probably guess where it is. It is not as easy to get in as you think.


    But now that they have arrived at this ce, this group of people can also think that they are not weaker than any force in the entire sea. It is only a matter of time before they know the secret of Rafdru.

 Chapter 351 Rafdru

    <h4>Chapter 351 Rafdru</h4>


    But everything was exactly as they thought.


    Ten dayster.


    Everyone was still lying leisurely on the boat, waiting for the Infinity to start transmitting arrival information, but before all of them had waited, they waited until the Infinity began to send out a red alert.


    The siren began to reverberate throughout the entire ship. The harsh sound instantly woke everyone up. Even if it was only early in the morning, everyone no longer cared about any image and stood on the deck one by one. Go up and start looking around.


    However, after a night of sailing, when I saw the situation in the surrounding waters again, even the rtively powerful Abona, who had been roaming the New World for who knows how many years, couldn''t help but see this scene. Yes, I started to sweat.


    "It seems that we have arrived at the right ce!"


    Chang Nuo was wearing pajamas. At this moment, he didn''t look like a king at all.


    Wearing a white robe, pajamas, and a pair of cotton slippers, he stood on the top deck and looked around.


    But at this moment, the sea surface is already showing pits and pits.


    This ce waspletely inconsistent with their inner understanding. The sea water was undting, and there were countless whirlpools in these gaps. Moreover, the whirlpools seen from their perspective are rtively small, but when they get closer, they will find that no matter which whirlpool it is, it can swallow their entire ship.


    Chang Nuo looked at the surrounding scene very calmly, but the others werepletely different.


    "What''s happening here?"


    Enelu shouted loudly.


    "Why did we encounter such a whirlpool? What happened here?" Junhe couldn''t help but asked with emotion.


    "Ravdru, the whirlpool of water sources in the entire New World, is also known as the birthce of the sea. It has deep-sea horrors that others don''t know about. It seems that all these legends should be true."


    Said with a smile.


    "He is preventing so many people from entering. It seems that most people can only stay outside."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his lips.


    Anyway, it is impossible for everyone with so many people to know what the secret of Rafdru is. Now that we have arrived at this ce, the rest can be explored directly.


    The Haki of Knowledge and Information actually doesn''t have much effect in this ce. This ce feels like the aura emanating from the stone-like thing that was taken from the stomach bed before.


    He was able to directly block any perception of Haki from seeing and hearing. Here, Yixiao, as a general, should be the most restricted. Being unable to see, his only powerful perception had lost all effect at this moment.


    The Infinity is probablypletely unable to continue sailing in this kind of sea area. The deep-sea whirlpools in front of it are one after another, and there is no end in sight.


    The uneven sea surface also makes it impossible to see what the situation ahead is like?


    And apanied by dark clouds and lightning in the sky, it hit the sea directly. Those who are slightly less powerful may fall directly into the sea with just such a lightning strike.


    The situation here can no longer be described as bad, everything is simply bad to the extreme.


    Everything he saw before him had even begun to make Changnuo doubt Roger, who had found the secret of Ralph Drew to be the Pirate King. How did they get there? It is impossible to be in the sea. All these changes now are only because of his arrival.


    If this is really the case, all this can only mean that they came at the wrong time.


    Ravdru is right in the center of this endless sea. It can no longer be regarded as an ind, but perhaps more like a huge whirlpool.


    However, the so-called secret hidden by Rafdru lies in the huge whirlpool in the center. This whirlpool is no longer essible to any ship.


    Facing all this, Chang Nuo showed a slight smile on his lips. Sometimes some things don''t need everyone to know, only a few people need to know.


    "General Yixiao, I will leave this ce to you from now on. It seems that Rafdru does not wee us, so let me go and take a look myself."


    Changnuo said.


    "Your Majesty the King, please let me apany you there!"


    Junhe said with a serious expression.


    "I''m willing to go there too!"


    Abona and Moshank said at the same time.


    "I won''t apany you to participate. I will leave this ce to me. I will definitely not let any problems arise on the Infinity."


    He smiled and felt relieved, but he also realized clearly that he couldn''t feel anything if he moved forward now, and even the past had no effect at all.


    In fact, there is no need to say more, everyone already understands one very important thing, that is, Wilbu and the others seem to have been here before, and the stone currently iid on the ship is already veryrge. Good proves it all.


    Chang Nuo looked around at everyone. In such an environment, except for Gogoya who really didn''t want to go, everyone else''s eyes showed anticipation.


    Who wouldn''t be tempted by a ce like Rafdru, which is known as the secret treasure of the Pirate King? Even if they can''t get anything, a quick look at it can prove that they have been to this ce.


    But this time it is definitely not possible for everyone to go there together. It would be great to be able to let only a few people go there.


    The huge whirlpool at the center was their destination. But even standing here, the huge whirlpool you see is the size of a small sink.


    Everyone understands that the entire sea is now covered withrge and small whirlpools, and thunder and lightning are suspended in the sky. No one dares to guess or think about what kind of situations may ur ahead.


    And they all understand that if they are not strong enough, even if they go there, they will cause trouble for others.


    This time, Anilu was rare and did not ask to follow him. Instead, he stood there calmly and looked at Chang Nuo nkly.


    "Abona and Junhe only need to apany us, and the rest will stay on the ship."


    Changnuo said.


    After the words fell, a space step appeared in front of them, as if it was simr to the skill they had used on Fish-Man Ind.


    But this time it is advanced and suspended above the sea.


    But when these forces approached the edges of those whirlpools, Chang Nuo was a little surprised to find that the space ability seemed to have no effect at all at this moment.

 Chapter 352 The Insurmountable Whirlpool

    <h4>Chapter 352 The Insurmountable Whirlpool</h4>


    The ce of Rafdru has been found, but the things in front of them make it difficult for them to move forward.


    Now Chang Nuo finally understands the role of those road signs. It''s not that, it''s just in what direction is Rafdru? It refers to how to enter these vortex spaces.


    From the very beginning, he thought that these dazzles were just simple whirlpools, but now that he got closer, he discovered that this was just a problem of the gravitational maic field.


    The vortices caused by these gravitational forces can even distort space. Even for Chang Nuo, who has the power of space, everything in front of him seems so incredible.


    After all, even if these things lead them into the dimensional space, the scope of these whirlpool spaces in front of them is too vast, and Chang Nuo does not have the ability to directly reach that area.


    "Your Majesty the King, what is going on?"


    Junhe looked at the distorted space road in front of him, simr to a ss bridge, and couldn''t help but asked in surprise.


    "The gravitational maic field is a maic field that can distort space. It seems that there is only one way to pass it."


    Chang Nuo said with a frown.


    It''s impossible to even perceive the color or domineering power of what''s happening in front of you, let alone be able to find the way forward inside.


    In addition, the impact caused by these gravitational maic fields is no less than that of space distortion. For ordinary people, just these maic field vortices can engulf it instantly.


    Even for powerful people, it may not be as easy as imagined, but now that everyone has arrived, it is naturally impossible to think of quitting.


    "What should we do now? Go back or move forward?"


    Arbonne asked.


    "Since everyone is already here, how can they still exit? Even though the maic field space is powerful, it won''t let our Tru Empire walk to the door without going in."


    Chang Nuo''s face was cold and he said quite domineeringly.


    After hearing this, Jun and the two of them did not dare to say anything anymore, but looking at the endless whirlpools in front of them, even they could not think of any countermeasures.


    Being able to distort the space power of His Majesty the King only shows that the strength of each of these vortexes can almost obliterate them.


    "You two retreat to the Infinity first, and then let me conquer this sea area myself."


    Changnuo said domineeringly.


    After speaking, his body began to sh with endless blue lightning, and he unconsciously began to release his overlord-colored domineering energy.


    Fortunately, both of them had the strength of generals at the moment, so they would not be overwhelmed by the overlord-like domineering aura of the mirror clones released unintentionally.


    "Then please be careful, Your Majesty!"


    Abona said, and the two of them quickly returned along the passage they came from just now without stopping at all.


    The location was not particrly far from the Infinity, only about 500m at most, but they couldn''t wait to go back quickly and notify everyone to evacuate the sea area.


    These two people have been following His Majesty the King for a short period of time. Although they don��t particrly understand the strength of His Majesty the King, it can be judged from the other party��s attitude this time that he wants to take action directly. Forced into the sea area of ????Ravdru.


    The distance of 500m is simply short for two people, and they can reach it without taking a breath.


    The moment they first boarded the ship, before anyone could ask for the reason, Junhe shouted loudly, "Gogoya, order the Infinity to retreat as quickly as possible."


    "What??"


    Gogoya stayed there with a confused expression, and almost everyone else showed the same expression.


    Because there didn''t seem to be any danger in front of them, why the two generals were asked to return as quickly as possible? What happened was unknown.


    In addition, His Majesty the King is still outside at the moment, so Gogoya really doesn''t know how to do such an order.


    "Retreat quickly!"


    General Yixiao yelled immediately.


    "Hai Ling, start retreating as quickly as possible!!"


    Although Gogoya didn''t realize what happened, he still shouted loudly.


    Now that the order has been issued, the Infinity activated all systems at the same time and began to evacuate to a distance using emergency conditions.


    "What happened?"


    The Infinity had already begun to activate and change course, heading in the direction in which it came. At this time, Gogoya began to look at Jun and the two people in confusion and asked seriously.


    "Just watch, don''t ask so many questions."


    Abona said, his expression was very cold.


    However, almost all of their eyes were focused on Chang Nuo on the sea in the distance at this moment.


    "Enilu, tell me about the situation of His Majesty the King in the sea ahead."


    Yixiao said with a serious expression. Here, he could not sense any situation in front of him, and he could not see clearly, so he could only rely on others to interpret it.


    Enelu himself looked confused. Until now, he still hadn''t realized what happened. Why did he leave so quickly?


    "His Majesty the King is still standing there, as if nothing happened?"


    Enel said.


    "His Majesty the King wants to be serious. There are countless maic whirlpools in the sea ahead. Even the power of space can be swallowed up by these whirlpools."


    Abona opened his mouth and said.


    "Doesn''t that mean that this time we can see His Majesty the King show his full strength?"


    Enelu said with some excitement at this moment.


    "Quick, let the Infinity speed up its sailing speed again!"


    Yixiao shouted loudly again.


    The people in the boat went from being confused at the beginning to bing even more confused now.


    It''s not clear at all, why are you maintaining such a cautious attitude when everything is calm except for the whirlpool in front of you?


    "But I can''t order Hailing to perform the core speed. Now this can only be like this."


    Gogoya said worriedly.


    "Everyone started getting ready. I didn''t know what to send next, so everyone got nervous."


    Moshank spoke in a rare opening.


    Others don''t know what the strength of their King is, and they don''t know either, but at least one thing is certain, that is, he knows much more than the rest of the people.


    When Chang Nuo and Wilbu fought before, he probably didn''t even use half of his strength. If the other party wants to be serious this time, he doesn''t know what will happen.

 Chapter 353 The power of space awakening

    <h4>Chapter 353 The power of space awakening</h4>


    On the sea level of Ravdru.


    Chang Nuo was suspended quietly in the air, his eyes glowing with sky blue light, and he kept looking at everything around him.


    Here, although he can''t use the power of seeing and hearing, he at least has another thing, which is the ability of his immortal body.


    Kagura''s inner eye, after Changnuo closed his eyes, suddenly opened the sky-blue light, which instantly spread to the entire sea area.


    This range can cover almost the entire 50 square kilometers, but the difference from seeing and hearing Haki is that he can perceive more detailed things.


    Even the density of those vortexes can be clearly understood.


    It''s just that these are probably not enough. If you want to get to the center now, you have to either get the historical text of the road sign, or you can only use your ultimate strength to seal off this sea area.


    The people on the Endless were leaving quickly, but Chang Nuo, who was not far from the whirlpool, was still standing there fine, but in the next second, his whole person slowly began to disappear.


    Immediately afterwards, a trace began to crack in the space where he was. The moment the ck space crack appeared, the deity walked out again.


    The people aboard the Endless Ship in the distance were watching carefully, for fear of missing something.


    After Motomura walked out, he looked around at the situation, suspended in ce, and took a deep breath.


    "It''s really troublesome!"


    Chang Nuo said casually, and then his body began to slowly rise into the air.


    When it was suspended almost 100 meters away from the sea, Changnuo slowly opened his hands, and the blue space power was constantly coiled between the two palms. Then, the space power began to slowly rise above it. With ck and ck-red status attached.


    Until finally, these spatial powers havepletely transformed into a brighter red.


    The power of space was stabilized by the domineering force of the weapon, and blessed by the overlord-colored domineering energy. Before he started to use it, the sky above his head had already undergone abnormal changes.


    "The power of awakening ~ unbounded space!"


    Chang Nuo shouted softly, and the invisible light burst out in the next second. As soon as it covered the vortexes, a clicking sound could be heard. The maic field vortex distorted the space, but the powerful power of space was there. At this moment, the entire sea area was imprisoned.


    The collision sound between the two almost directly caused the original space to fall into pieces.


    When looking over there from a distance, not to mention whether the pole can be used, it is impossible to see anything inside just by looking at it, as if a huge box is directly covering the sea area.


    Even though such a powerful force of space covers the entire sea area, cracks can still be seen gradually appearing where the vortex is, and the power of the powerful maic vortex is gradually devouring these space forces.


    Chang Nuo frowned, and disappeared in the next second. He used his Kagura Inner Eyes to start to sense the dangers he faced as he moved forward in this dark state. The dangers he might encounter were almost They all make it impossible to make a choice.


    But even so, these spatial cracks are still spreading at a gradually elerated rate. ording to this situation, the spatial progress of this move can onlyst for about ten minutes at most.


    But even so, from a time perspective, it is almost enough.


    Everyone on the Infinity was staring at the situation ahead urgently. They could hear clearly the sound of the collision between the vortex and the power of space, as well as the sound of space tearing apart. To be precise, you can hear this shattering sounding from your ears even if you are hundreds of miles away.


    "Will your Majesty be okay?"


    Gogoya asked uneasily.


    Now no one dares to promise to say such words. Everyone can only stare at the situation ahead seriously. They even dare not take a breath and can only maintain the current status quo.


    Time is moving forward second by second. About seven minutes have passed since Changnuo entered, but there is still no sign ofing out. The cracks in the fixed spaces on the periphery have begun, and they are continuous. Continuing, if it doesn''te out, the space in the entire area will probably copse directly.


    Once this happens, the people inside may not be able to get out no matter how they look at it.


    Abona nervously held Dawn in his hand, and held the other hand on the fence. The appearance of the others was not much better. This time was different from the people and things they encountered. There were so many vortexes twisting and twisting. The terrifying power that came haspletely exceeded their imagination.


    "Click!!!"


    A huge space crack appeared directly. I am afraid that its length can prate at least two or three kilometers away. In the pitch-ck space crack, no one knows what it hides.


    "Your Majesty, why don''t youe out?"


    Gogoya''s anxious tears were about to fall down. He covered his mouth with his right hand and suppressed the anxiety in his heart.


    "Don''t worry, your Majesty the King is so powerful, there will definitely be no problems!"


    Gion stepped forward and saidfortingly.


    "Can''t we think of something?"


    Junhe asked with a frown.


    "Everyone, calm down and don''t be anxious. His Majesty the King must have his own ideas. Everyone just needs to wait patiently."


    Said with a smile.


    But at this moment, he himself was extremely nervous. Although all of this was exined through Enel, it was probably the time in his life that he regretted most that he couldn''t see. He couldn''t sense or see everything in front of him. , everything can only be passed through the vague narration of others.


    "Bang!!!"


    While they were still talking, the space power of the entire area was directly distorted and shattered by the vortex maic field. Just looking at the situation in front of me and the space fragments suspended in other areas, I couldn''t help but wonder. It is difficult to see that at this moment, the sea area has turned into a Shura field.


    "His Majesty!!"


    Gogoya couldn''t help but shouted directly in that direction, but the moment her voice fell, the space on the ship changed instantly.


    The entire sea space copsed, and Chang Nuo also appeared on the Infinity at the same time. No one could bear to be surprised, but at this moment, their King looked in terrible shape.


    Especially the mottled blood stains, covering almost the entire body.


    "leave."


    Chang Nuo said weakly, then stepped on the blood under his feet and started walking towards the cabin.

 Chapter 354 The candidate to become the princess

    <h4>Chapter 354 The candidate to be the princess</h4>


    This scene really shocked everyone, and none of them knew what to do.


    The moment his front heel entered, Junhe immediately started shouting loudly, "What are you still doing? Leave quickly, and the ship''s doctor will follow to see His Majesty!"


    As soon as the words fell, everyone started to do what they wanted to do in a panic.


    For them, they had never seen this scene before. His Majesty the King was actually so seriously injured. They had never dared to imagine it for a long time.


    But when Chang Nuo returned to the room, after Jiang Nan endured the pain and took off his coat, the staggering wounds on his chest and back were directly and shockingly disyed.


    Especially one of the wounds on the chest prated directly to the point where the internal organs could be seen. If this was the case above, it was almost impossible to mention the legs.


    All the injuries in this life were caused by the damage caused by space debris in those moments when space copsed. Even if he stayed in the one-dimensional space, he still could not escape the fate of almost being destroyed.


    If it weren''t for the powerful healing ability of the immortal human body, he probably wouldn''t be able to get out of that sea area at this moment.


    Although the injuries on his body are rtively serious, they are also healing rapidly at a speed visible to the naked eye.


    But when he saw what was inside, he still couldn''t believe it.


    Sitting on the bed, Chang Nuo seemed to have forgotten all the pain, quietly thinking about the scene he had just seen.


    And now he finally understands why the Pirate King is willing to use his own life to unveil such an era of great pirates?


    It''s just that no matter what angle you look at, it''s impossible to leak a single word of the things that exist in Ravdru from the Tru Empire. If this happens, what kind of consequences will they face? This is simply unimaginable.


    What kind of people are behind world government? What kind of existence are the Celestial Dragons? Now that everything has answers, we just need to wait for the answers toe.


    Changnuo has no intention of telling anyone the secret of Rafdru''s existence. He only needs to know it now. As for the big n in the future, even if he doesn''t know who is taking the lead, no matter who the Trudru Empire is in the future, Participate anyway.


    the next day.


    Chang Nuo seemed to have be a normal person. The wounds on his body had long since healed. After changing his clothes, he was still the domineering His Majesty the King before.


    The others stayed in bed all day with little rest or food, and were all anxiously waiting for the situation of His Majesty the King toe out.


    However, ording to their authority, they could not enter the core ce where Chang Nuo''s room was located.


    Everyone could only wait at the door and walk back and forth anxiously. At dawn, they saw everyoneing out of their King, and they quickly gathered around them one by one.


    "Your Majesty the King, are you okay?"


    Junhe asked anxiously with dark circles under his eyes.


    "Your injuries...?"


    Gogoya was about to ask some other things, but looking at His Majesty the King, he seemed to bepletely fine, so he consciously took back all those words.


    "It''s nothing, I''m worrying you all!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "You don''t know, I was scared to death at the time. Why did I stay there for so long?"


    The moment he heard Chang Nuo say that he was fine, Gogoya couldn''t hold back any longer. Tears streamed down his face. He couldn''t control himself and covered his mouth, crying loudly.


    "It''s okay, go back and have a good rest!"


    Chang Nuo patted the opponent''s shoulder and said, then nced at the generals, and just nodded lightly without saying too much.


    Although the people on the boat were all filled with doubts and eager to know the answers, looking at the scene in front of them, it was obviously no longer suitable.


    In the blink of an eye, everyone who should rest had already gone to rest, and almost all the people who came down were concentrated in the living room on the top floor.


    Junhe and Abona sat on one side, Moshank and Enilu sat opposite them, and General Yixiao sat directly in front of Changnuo.


    "His Majesty the King came to us this time to tell us about the situation inside Rafford Drew, right?"


    Yixiao said with a serious expression.


    "About this matter, everything ends here. What kind of situation exists in Rafdru? Maybe everyone will know it in a few years, but in any case, this kind of topic must not be leaked from the Tru Empire. From now on The risks we face may be much higher than imagined.


    So from now on, we will stay in the Tru Empire honestly. In the future, you still need to hurry up and build a qualified army. In terms of logistics, military war preparations, battleships, and tactical training, everyone must submit it after they return. A reportes up.


    Within three years, all these things must be implemented. It will take five years to perfect everything. Our great era will depend on your speed. "


    Changnuo said resolutely, looking at the looks of several people, they all looked meticulous.


    He didn''t say anything about the situation inside Ravdru. He only needed to know about this kind of thing.


    "Your Majesty the King, is there any need for external development in the future?" Junhe asked.


    "No need, but after you go back you may take care of something. I need to make Robin my princess. This matter must be implemented within at least one year.


    Sometimes we have ns and we should be prepared. "


    Chang Nuo said, both eyes were already shining. In the past few years since Robin came to the Tru Empire, he had hardly seen him, and he didn''t know what his current appearance had be.


    In some ways, she was still a demon herself with a bounty of 83 million Baileys on her head since she was a child. However, before starting some ns, all hidden dangers must be eliminated, and at least they must prove that Robin belongs to their side. exist.


    But after these words were spoken, several people were stunned to the point of being frightened. Many of them even had no idea who Robin was?


    A name that suddenly appeared and directly became the imperial concubine was something that they couldn''t ept at all.


    "Your Majesty, what you said is not true, is it?"


    Junhe couldn''t believe it and asked again.

 Chapter 355 Lost Memories

    <h4>Chapter 355 Lost Memories</h4>


    Not to mention Junhe, even General Yixiao, who had always been serious about his words, had an expression of surprise at this moment.


    "But who is that Robin?"


    Enelu asked curiously.


    It is estimated that except for Junhe, who knows him, no one else staying here has met him.


    Robin is currently under the jurisdiction of the Tru Empire Council and works in the Tru Empire Literature Department. The past few years have indeed made her feel the warmth of home in the Tru Empire.


    It was probably impossible for her to imagine that while she was in the Tru Empire, such a big pot would have hit her head.


    "All of you don''t have any doubts. Junhe''s matter will be left to you. I don''t care what you do, but I must get the answer within a year."


    Chang Nuo said, then stood up and started to leave.


    This time it''s not a discussion, but a direct order. How capable is Robin? They are clear. As the only being in the world or on the surface who can understand the text of history, Robin is a must as a member of theter protagonist group if he wants to reach Loughford Road and be able to read the text clearly and urately. An indispensable presence.


    Even after the king left, they still sat there, which was unbelievable at all.


    However, only Junhe knew the reason for this incident. Just when he was about to get up and start leaving, he was dragged back by Abona who was sitting next to him.


    "Tell me something clearly! I''m quite curious now."


    Abona said with a smile on his face.


    "That''s right, Jun and brother, what exactly is going on?"


    Enelu asked.


    "But you have also seen it. When you return to the country after a while, you can go and see it. I don''t know much about it, but I have only seen it a few times."


    Junhe said helplessly.


    ��His Majesty the King went to Raffordulu again, and when he saw the things inside, he came out with this expression, and directly named this woman to be the princess, which shows that this woman��s role is much greater than we imagined.


    Junhe General, tell me what you know. "


    Yixiao said directly and seriously.


    He sees things differently, and he can clearly feel that the main purpose of the woman His Majesty married was to deal with the situation of Rafdru, but so far, he can''t find any clue.


    "Actually, it''s nothing. This person named Robin is a woman brought back from basta a few years ago.


    The only thing I know now is that he is from the West Sea, and he is also the son of the devil. He is offered a bounty of 83 million beli by the navy. The most important thing is that he can read historical texts, his strength is average, and he is quite beautiful. "


    Junhe said.


    "I understand!"


    General Yixiao said, there is no need to understand anything else now. If he can read the historical text, he already knows why his Majesty the King wanted this woman to be the princess.


    But General Yixiao still doesn''t understand. His Majesty the King can clearly understand these ancient texts, so why should he find such a woman? Or do you ept her as a princess so casually?


    It seems that there are definitely situations that they don''t know about.


    But it is enough to know so much now. It can at least allow them to prepare in advance. After all, their main focus will not be on this in the future.


    In the process of traveling to the sea to reach the pirates'' final destination, the Tru Empire has exposed too many shorings. Although these things have appeared in the navy or other forces, as a country that wants to develop, it is more In this magnificent empire, these things are absolutely uneptable to Chang Nuo.


    Different from when they came, the process of going back was much simpler. Of course, they did not forget to go to Cake Ind during this period, but this trip was just to show their faces, and the rest of the things werepletely None of them participated.


    On this voyage, they did not pass by Fisherman Ind again. Instead, they passed directly through the territory of the Tianlong people from the Red Earth Continent and returned to their own country.


    I dropped Gion into Mariejoia halfway through, and it almost didn��t matter what happened next.


    It has been a total of about five months since departure, which allowed them to truly feel the rhythm of life at sea, and also allowed them to know where Lafdru existed. .


    This departure is the beginning of the true journey of the Tru Empire.


    Among the Navy Headquarters.


    "What exactly happened? Why can''t Gion remember everything?"


    In the office of the Navy Headquarters, Marshal Sengoku questioned angrily, but at the same time he also felt quite confused.


    He didn''t think that his subordinates would betray the navy, but he still felt a little incredible and surprised that he hadpletely forgotten all the process of going to sea.


    "It seems that it must be the ability of the Devil Fruit. There are actually people in the Tohru Empire who can use this method of rewriting or deleting memories."


    Lieutenant General He said.


    "It seems that there are indeed many things we don''t know about this country. If we don''t deal with it well in the future, it may be our biggest enemy in the world!"


    Garp sat there, rarely eating anything this time, and said with a serious expression.


    Gion was standing next to a few people, but at this moment he only remembered how he came back. As for other things, he seemed to know nothing about it.


    The whole person felt as if he had fallen asleep aboard the Infinity, and when he woke up, he had reached his destination.


    Nowadays, I have no impression of other unnecessary things, but as the top brass of the Navy, how could they be med for this matter?


    "Who did the Tru Empire meet in the New World? What did they do? What was their purpose? We don''t know anything about this. The only thing that is clear is that he went to Dressrosa, but this What is the purpose of these guys going to this ce?


    In addition, they were followed by Whitebeard''s two crew members on the ship. Did the route go to Whitebeard''s side? The purpose ofing to the new world is still unknown to us, and no one knows what happened. "


    Marshal Warring States said, then he looked at Garp and said in a stern tone again, "Over the South China Sea, which one do you think should be sent to the military base over there next? In the days toe, we must keep an eye on each other. every move.��


    "No one is good for the time being. The Tru Empire ispletely different from the other forces we have seen. The other party not only has brains, but also strength. The sufficient supply of funds has allowed their army to surpass ours in individualbat strength. , once the New World bes lively, how can we still have the energy to take care of the Four Seas Land?"


    Karp said.

 Chapter 356 Nico Robin

    <h4>Chapter 356 Nico Robin</h4>


    It is estimated that no one in the entire navy is willing to set foot in such an inhospitable ce as the South China Sea. Not to mention whether there will be anything going on. If conflicts arise, it is hard to say whether they cane back alive.


    It''s not like the Warring States Marshal has never thought of this kind of thing. The navy haspletely lost control in the South China Sea.


    "I think we can start from basta, and there is also the person on Fish-Man Ind that the Tru Empire pays special attention to!"


    Lieutenant General He said.


    "As I thought, the only way to suppress the Tru Empire at present is to start from their business. The country of basta upies 1/3 of the economic lifeline of the Tru Empire, and this country has been around for a long time. He had already started to get jealous before, so he would send a few people over to help.


    As for the one on Fish-Man Ind, I don��t think it��s necessary to touch it for the time being. Otherwise, if it causes the Tru Empire��s resentment, it won��t be worth the loss for our navy. "


    Warring States said.


    "There is nothing we can do about the Toru Empire now. The opponent''s development speed is really beyond our imagination. If we want to curb itmercially, we can only notify the Shichibukai and let them do something about it."


    Garp said, knowing that this kind of thing was not very feasible, but he still said it.


    As the highest-ranking figures in the entire navy, the three of them speak with sufficient weight.


    But at this time, Gion, who had been standing aside without speaking, looked at Garp in confusion and asked, "As the Four Emperors and One Emperor, the Toru Empire is a first-level member country of the World Government, and merchant ships have priority." The right to summon the navy, I think this kind of thing is not feasible, right?��


    "I think this is a good statement. I will ask the CP personnel of the World Government to inform the Shichibukai to do thister."


    Warring States said.


    This group of people are now in a hurry and seeking medical treatment. The existence of the Tru Empire has put them under considerable pressure. This group of people who have always been in a superior position now feel that the other party is not simple.


    Nowadays, they already know a little bit about the strength of Emperor Toru. At least in terms of personal strength, he haspletely surpassed the existence of the four emperors.


    Just by fighting against Wilbu, he had instantly swept the entire pirate world.


    No one will look down upon the Tru Empire just because it is located in the South China Sea. Whether it is the strength of their Emperor Tru or the strength of their generals, they have been fully demonstrated.


    Onboard the Infinity.


    Although this time he came directly across the Red Earth Continent and did not pass the location of Fish-Man Ind, but because he had already passed the message before, Xia Li from Fish-Man Ind also brought a team of about 100 mermaids and fish-men, and arrived early Waiting here.


    When they were near the edge of the Red Continent, they began to board the boat together, bringing so many people with them. Most of them were almost fishmen, and each of them looked quite strong.


    As for the remaining mermaids, there are also a dozen or so, almost all of them are very beautiful.


    As the pioneers of the Fishman Ind to enter the Tru Empire, they must at least familiarize themselves with the living environment there first. A country that directly controls the situation in the South China Sea will provide the residents of the Fishman Ind with a natural sea. The living ce is still nothing.


    This is also their trip to the Tru Empire, and it can also be regarded as a friendly visit that opens the Fish-Man Ind to the Tru Empire in the South China Sea.


    In the Tru Empire.


    In an office, a tall and beautiful woman was sitting there. Her hair was slightly curly. She was wearing a professional-looking white shirt. She had fair skin and delicate facial features.


    This is Robin today, in his twenties, in his prime.


    Today, he is now a member of the Culture Department of the Tru Empire. He has been drifting in basta and at sea, and his skin is tanned, but now she does not need to do these things anymore.


    You only need to sit in the office every day, n your future teaching ns, and live peacefully in this ce without having to worry about the safety of your life.


    In this country, no one cares about his identity. They only know that this woman was sent by His Majesty the King.


    Everyone treated her with full respect, and at the same time, she felt an unprecedented sense of security.


    It has been five years since she came to the Tru Empire. During these five years, she has fully integrated into this country. He has almost no pursuit of other things.


    Here, she can do whatever she wants, even walking on the street, without having to look at outsiders with the same vignce as before.


    For a woman who has been wandering for nearly ten years, all the life here seems like a dream.


    But now all this is really unfolding in front of him. In the first two years, she was still a little ufortable with the stable life here, but then all these changes made herpletely ept it. .


    "Dong dong~"


    Robin was looking at the materials in his hands in the office, but at this moment, there was a knock on the door of the room outside the house.


    "Robin, it''s me..."


    Hearing the familiar voiceing from outside the house, Robin slowly put down the materials in his hand and stood up.


    Her lower body is wearing a hip-hugging short skirt, and her feet are wearing a pair of ck high heels. The overall appearance is not weaker than what it will be in the future.


    After opening the door, standing at the door was a woman who looked about 50 years old. She was holding something in her hands and looking at Robin who opened the door with a smile.


    "Minister Kasa, why do you have time toe here?"


    Robin asked somewhat surprised.


    This woman is the Minister of Culture, and she is also someone within the jurisdiction of the Council of Ministers.


    Kasa smiled slightly and picked up the things in his hands.


    "It''s been a long time since I''ve seen you, so I asked to see how you are doing now? You''ve just been transferred here, are you still getting used to everything?"


    Kasa asked with a smile.


    "Thank you for your concern. I think everything will be fine if I stay here."


    Robin said with the same smile.


    Theyout of this office is not particrlyrge. Apart from a row of sofas and a coffee table in the corner, the rest is just a desk and a row of bookshelves behind it.


    Behind the blue floor-to-ceiling curtains is the tallest hotel in the entire royal city.

 Chapter 357 Promise

    <h4>Chapter 357 Promise</h4>


    Robin did not live in the Royal City before. After arriving here, although Changnuo had arranged for her to work in the Ministry of Culture, all this still needed to be apanied by the transfer of the Council.


    "Don''t you invite me in to sit down?"


    Kassa stood at the door and looked at Robin standing in front of him and asked.


    "I''m really sorry, pleasee in quickly!"


    Robin apologized quickly.


    Aftering to the Tru Empire, almost all of his life was handled by this woman. Although she was ordered to do things by people above her, this woman really felt like a mother to him.


    Regardless of the big or small details, Casa has almost always handled Robin''s affairs perfectly, at least in the past two years.


    After walking in, Casa looked at this medium-sized office. Everything was so simply decorated, and everything even looked normal.


    "Minister Kasa, I didn''t know that you came here today without preparing many things. I really made youugh."


    Robin turned around and poured a ss of water over and said.


    "There''s no need to be so polite. It''s rare that you''re back in the royal city. I just wanted toe and see you."


    Kasa took the water and said.


    "I think it''s the same everywhere. The city of Moroya where I stayed before was pretty good, but I didn''t expect to be transferred back all of a sudden. To be honest, I''m still a little ufortable."


    Robin sat down and looked at Kasa opposite and said.


    "The Royal City is a good ce. After all, everything here is full of the sense of the times. It is also the easiest ce to develop. The most important thing is that you can asionally see His Majesty the King."


    Minister Kasa stared at Robin across from him with a smile on his face and said, wanting to see the look on the other person''s expression with every word he said.


    As a person who has been there, Robin used to face all kinds of people almost every day. She could tell that something was wrong just by looking at the other person''s words and expressions.


    "When Minister Kasaes here this time, it seems he''s not just looking at me, right?"


    Robin asked with some confusion.


    "Hehehe~, I just came to see you. After all, we have known each other for so many years. I came here just to ask, how do you feel about this country after being in the Tru Empire for so many years?"


    "It''s good. At least I like it here now."


    Robin said, the confusion in his eyes became more intense.


    "You must have met our King before. What do you think of His Majesty?"


    Minister Kassa asked directly.


    This kind of topic is already somewhat obvious. In fact, it was Gogoya who arranged for her toe here to meet before she came. The purpose was to understand Robin''s views on His Majesty the King in advance.


    Now all these things are going on in an orderly manner. As the Minister of Culture, the reason why Casa is still ahead of Robin in terms of title is mainly because the other person is a very educated and intelligent woman.


    Robin was a little confused, listening to the words of the woman sitting across from him, but then he said bluntly, "I have only met His Majesty the King once. Since then, except for on the screen or in newspapers, the rest of the time , but I haven��t heard anything about him.


    What has be of His Majesty the King now? I haven''t paid attention to it for a long time. Besides, as a person, I am afraid that I will never have anything to do with His Majesty the King in this life, right? "


    "That''s not necessarily true! By the way, in all these years since you''ve been in the Tru Empire, have you ever met a man you like?"


    Minister Kassa asked, getting straight to the point.


    "How can I still think about this now? It''s good to live alone sometimes."


    "This is not possible. If it is possible, what do you think of our King?"


    Minister Kassa asked.


    A blush suddenly appeared on Robin''s face. When he first met Tru Emperor Changnuo, the contents of the chat had already been disyed in his eyes.


    His thoughts returned to how he was a few years ago. Although the face in his memory was a little blurry, he could still recall and repair various faces based on the face in the newspaper.


    But with this person who is almost iparable to him in this life, Robin really can''t imagine what kind of demeanor the Emperor Tru is like today?


    Different from the previous ones, when I first came to this country, the Tru Empire was just a developing country. Compared with today, it is simply a world of difference.


    But just a few years have passed, and the entire country has now be something else. This scene has be a dreamlike existence for many people.


    From a small country at the beginning to an empire that actually controls the entire South China Sea, its military strength can even make the most powerful forces in the world fear it. Although it cannot be said that all of this is the work of one person, it can be said that all of this is the result of one person. As His Majesty the King''s Chang Nuo, he has indeed made an indispensable contribution from the beginning to the end.


    With such a man, Robin couldn''t imagine how he could be with him?


    "His Majesty the King is extremely important to the Tru Empire. Not only is he handsome, he is about the same age as you, and he is powerful. He is also able to care so much about the people of the country. Such a man has be the idol in the hearts of all the little girls in the entire kingdom. , this is an incredible destination!��


    Minister Kassa smiled again.


    "You suddenly came here to tell me this matter. What''s the use of saying it? Is it possible that His Majesty the King really likes me?"


    "What if you like it?"


    "If this is really possible, what''s the harm in marrying him?"


    Robin put aside his thoughts and spoke almost in a joking tone. Mainly because of his understanding that Emperor Tru has now be a being that everyone looks up to in this world. Being able to be his princess, What kind of people are needed?


    It was almost unnecessary to think about this kind of thing. He definitely had no chance. But facing Minister Kasa who took such good care of him, Robin still joked and said.


    But it would be better if he didn''t tell the joke. After hearing this, Minister Kasa was stunned for a moment and then stood up suddenly.


    The whole person was immediately a little excited and incoherent.


    "You...are you telling the truth?"


    "Is it possible that what you said is true?"


    Robin said with a slight smile.


    It''s obvious that she still treats this as a joke.


    After all, for Robin, this kind of topic is a joke, and the possibility is the highest. How could two people who have never been in a hurrye together for no reason?


    But Minister Casa no longer cared about what Robin said at the end. He kept an excited look and hurriedly walked out of the room.

 Chapter 358 Determining the time

    <h4>Chapter 358 Determining the time</h4>


    Robin could only sit there and stare nkly at the figure who had walked out, not understanding at all what the other party meant?


    But less than ten minutester, Minister Kasa walked in happily again.


    "Robin, since you have agreed, then you will be ready to be the most noble imperial concubine in the entire Tru Empire."


    Minister Kasa said excitedly.


    Robin suddenly became confused, and his expression was no longer the joking state before. He stood up and looked at the somewhat excited Minister Kasa who stood in front of him in confusion.


    "What exactly do you mean?"


    Robin asked directly.


    "What else can it mean? The main reason I came here this time is to ask you, what do you think of our King? And this time, His Majesty the King personally gave the order to marry you. As a member of the Tru Empire, Imperial Concubine, this matter has beenmunicated to the Council several days ago. The reason why you were transferred back is actually for this purpose.


    The king''s secretary, Gogoya, will personally handle this matter, and General Jun and General will be responsible for rted matters. Since you have agreed, then this matter will be settled.


    I have just reported it to the King''s Secretary. I think the Council will start preparing for His Majesty the King''s wedding in the near future. "


    Minister Kasa said with some excitement.


    But Robin was even more confused at this moment. It was clear that he was just joking, why did it suddenly be real?


    What made him even more confused was why the aloof Emperor Tru would marry him?


    Although all this was unknown, there were already different ripples in her heart.


    "But I''m not prepared for anything now? I don''t even know what happened. Isn''t it inappropriate to make such a rash decision?"


    Robin asked.


    "What else is there to make a choice at this time? His Majesty the King can be said to be the best man in the world, and he has chosen you as the imperial concubine. In other words, you have no choice."


    Minister Kasa said that in his heart, His Majesty the King is undoubtedly the best being among them. Even if the current Emperor Trunuo makes any decision, the people of the entire country will support it without hesitation, let alone today. There is no official imperial concubine in Chang Nuo, and Hancock who stays on the daughter ind is just a person with a bad name so far.


    Minister Kasa has already seen the doubts on Robin''s expression, but how can she refuse now?


    "Can you tell me the specific situation?"


    Robin said with a slight sigh.


    "Now you can stay here with peace of mind, and you can put the work at hand aside for a while. You will definitely not need to do these things in the future. In the past two days, the leaders of the Council Department shoulde to see you. You, by then, they will probably inform you of the specific details."


    Minister Kassa said.


    "I see!"


    Robin said, looking a little at a loss. How could things turn into what they are now without realizing it?


    The most important thing is that she was not prepared at all. She wasmenting that she was suddenly transferred to the royal city, but before her whole body got warm, this situation already happened.


    In this way, Robin, a woman, felt at a loss for a moment.


    "Then you just stay here and I''ll leave first. There are some things I need to report over."


    Minister Kasa smiled and patted Robin on the shoulder, the light in his eyes almost full of envy.


    If she wasn''t too old, she would probably want to participate in such a situation. Such a rare opportunity actually hit this little girl''s head. I don''t know how many people would hide on the wedding day. I cried bitterly at home.


    The king''s intention to marry Robin was currently only being circted among high-level officials. Originally, Changnuo just handed the matter over to Junhe and gave him one year to handle it.


    But I didn''t expect that this girl would actually turn her back and arrange the matter to Gogoya, who even eagerly conveyed it to the Senate.


    This situation is like an order to the Senate. When everyone received the news, everyone put down the work at hand and went all out to do this.


    The first thing that came to mind was to transfer Robin, a woman who was far away in another city, back immediately.


    When they came back, they had already started to contact Casa, who had the best rtionship with Robin. Originally, I just thought about going over and tricking him into telling him something, but I didn''t expect that I could get the matter done on my first visit.


    Everyone in the participating department was very excited at the moment. Next, they all sat together and discussed what should be prepared for the king''s wedding this time.


    However, as the protagonists, they are still drifting on the sea and have not reached their destination.


    It is estimated that it will take at least about five days to reach the Tru Empire from this distance.


    However, everything has been finalized on the South China Sea Continent. The only remaining thing is to finalize another time to perfect everything this time.


    This speed was something no one had expected before. Thest thing they expected was that Robin would agree so quickly.


    But it''s normal to think about it sometimes. Living in a country in the South China Sea, Emperor Tru definitely belongs to an absolutely outstanding man. I''m afraid even a woman would not refuse such an invitation.


    Robin had never thought about such a thing. He just wanted to spend his life safely. She was very satisfied with staying in this country in the South China Sea and just having a ce to stay.


    But this sudden situation has disrupted all the rhythm of her life.


    From the moment Minister Casa left the office, Robin had been sitting nkly on the sofa, and the scene where he first met Chang Nuo kept reying in his mind. In some ways, He is indeed very fond of this guy, and there is a veryrge simrity between the two people.


    But his meeting and contact was limited to this one time. In the years since he came to Tru Empire, he had never seen each other again.


    Just like what she said before, two people who originally felt that they had no connection at all, actually ended up in this situation?

 Chapter 359 Treaty against Alabasta

    <h4>Chapter 359 Treaty against basta</h4>


    On the Infinity.


    Now the entire ship haspletely entered the first half of the Great Route. This speed is already considered the fastest pace. But this time since everyone hase out, it is natural to go and see another one of their strongholds.


    basta is the economic lifeline that carries 1/3 of the Tru Empire. Although it has been managed by Losstar, even though five years have passed quietly, everything is still as nned before.


    Even after five years of development in bastan, all the factories in the Tru Empire still have not paid any taxes. The only reason is to use the previous contract as an excuse to ask the bastan country to start Pay those costs for the construction of basic works.


    In fact, it is revealed that the factories and infrastructure projects built by the empire here are already making the economy of the country of basta grow day by day. Although they cannot get the taxes from those factories, the economy driven by these factories has still made basta a big economy. The Palestinian state is making a lot of money.


    Although it is not as much as the fraction that the Tru Empire received, it can at least make basta many times richer than it was five years ago.


    But at the same time, this country was no longer willing to let so much money flow into the Tru Empire as before, and its inner dissatisfaction had even increased with the bewitchment of those ministers.


    "Minister Losstadt, we have clearly agreed before that we will not charge any taxes from the Tru Empire within five years. After five years, we will follow the normal taxation of the country of basta. Why are you going back on your promise now? "


    In the main hall of the basta Pce, the fat minister Zuo pointed at Luosta and said angrily.


    I don��t know how many times theymunicated and quarreled, but every time Losa acted almost as he was.


    "Minister Zuo, and of course King Kobra, little brother, this time has not passed long. Don''t forget that the Tru Empire also signed a treaty with you. The Tru Empire invests 150 billion beli every year to assist basta. For the development of the country and the improvement of people''s livelihood in basta, all industrial andmercial facilities of the Tru Empire in basta are exempted from tax for five years.


    At the same time, don��t forget that there is another treaty signed, that is, our Tru Empire needs to charge targeted fees for infrastructure construction. However, when the early signing was made, we have already informed you that the implementation of all projects can be carried out by the Tru Empire first. To pay the cost, basta will need to deduct it from taxes in theter period, or directly pay the corresponding infrastructure construction costs.


    So far, these infrastructure projects include road projects, hydropower projects, desert greening and seawater desalination projects, totaling about 150 projects.


    Up to now, the total fees paid for various facilities are about 580 billion beli. ording to the tax treaty signed by the Tru Empire with the country of basta in the early stage, the Tru Empiremercial industry does not need to pay anything to basta under the non-profit status. Tax expenses, under the profit, are based on a fixed tax of 3% per year like basta.


    Calcted based on the current industrial andmercial profits of the Tru Empire in basta,st year''s profit only reached less than 5 trillion beli, and the construction of these basic projects in theter period also included Maintenance, warranty costs, etc. have not yet been calcted, but if the current situation continues to develop, it will only take five years for all these costs to reach a t state. "


    Luosta stared at King Kobra sitting on it with a smile and said with a smile.


    They had already nned this kind of thing, and no matter how many times they talked about it, it probably wouldn''t have any effect.


    Everything has been signed in ck and white. No matter how dissatisfied Kobra and the princes and ministers of basta are, the oue of the facts has been determined, so what if they are dissatisfied?


    Minister Zuo was so moved that he held his chest after what Luosta said. He really didn''t know how to deal with the next words. King Kobra, who was sitting on top, also had the same expression.


    "You said that we have been arguing about this matter fromst year to this year. It is really unnecessary. You have also seen the development of basta in the past few years. The royal family''s current ie should bepared with previous years. Is it going to increase many times? The emergence of the Tru Empire will only make basta a better living environment. It will take us up to five years to directly change all your deserts into oases. .


    Isn''t this what you want? "


    Losa stared at Kobra seriously and asked.


    "You are right. There was indeed a treaty signed before, but can you take a look at the current situation? The Tru Empire is now so rich that it is the envy of all countries in the world, but if you look back at ba In today��s national life in Stan, who��s money in anyone��s pocket has not returned to the hands of your Tru Empire?��


    Minister Zuo asked angrily.


    "I don''t want to discuss the same topic many times. As the Minister of Commerce of the Tru Empire stationed in the country of basta, I often need to rify my position. I also hope that you, the country of basta, can do the same. Think about the problem from your own standpoint, and don''t do such noisy things for nothing. In the end, it will just make everyone feel ridiculous."


    Losta said.


    "Let this be like this, and no one should mention it again."


    Kobra frowned and said calmly.


    He really doesn''t want to discuss this kind of thing anymore. Fromst year to this year, he discussed it almost ten times, but every time it was the same topic repeated, and it ended up being nothing. But I guess if we can''t discuss this kind of topic, we may still discuss it. Being brought up again, even though everyone knows that there will be no better results, this situation is nothing more than an expression of inner anger.


    This time the Infinity came to the country where basta is located, and did not choose to go directly to the royal pce of basta. Instead, it went directly to the Rapeseed Port. This ce has now been built into a very beautiful ce by Lossta. The port is located. After arriving here, the palm trees and various flowers and nts nted on both sides of the port are really hard to believe that it can bepared with the previous desertnd.

 Chapter 360 Princess Tru

    <h4>Chapter 360 Princess Tru</h4>


    At least thest time I came here was several years ago, soing here this time is so refreshing.


    This ce still looks like a desert country, but the whole ce is full of greenery, and it is no longer the same scene as before.


    High-rise buildings have also begun to appear in Rape Flower, and it seems to have begun to develop towards a modern society.


    This ce is currently the most prosperous ce in the entire basta country. 40% of the factories established by the Tru Empire in this country are all in this city. The port is indeed thergest development in this area. The advantage.


    After Chang Nuo and the others arrived in the country of basta, they did not notify the king and ministers of the country, and the group just took a walk around.


    He didn''t even have a meal in this ce, so he turned around and left. Chang Nuo just wanted to see what kind of results Losa Star had achieved in this ce.


    A ce that can carry 1/3 of the economy of the Tru Empire is enough to prove that Luosta is indeed talented in this area.


    As for basta''s thoughts, Chang Nuo already knew about them two years ago.


    King Kobra has always maintained a restless heart. The reason why there is no movement at present is just because of the current strength of the Tru Empire.


    In fact, everyone knows this rtionship well. I just wanted to take advantage of each other, but I didn''t expect that the development of the Tru Empire has far exceeded everyone''s expectations. As a result, the entire basta can only recognize the status quo. .


    Although I would asionally say a few words, in the end these things were almost settled.


    As for the infrastructure construction in basta, what kind of sky-high price will it ultimately reach? This thing is almost entirely decided by the Tru Empire.


    Sailing again.


    On the Infinity.


    "Your Majesty, the Council of Ministers has responded. Ms. Robin has agreed to be the imperial concubine, and the date has been set in two months. The Minister of the Council of Ministers asked me to consult you on who needs to be notified to participate at that time?"


    On the top deck, Jun and Changnuo, who was lying on the sofa, reported softly.


    However, these words directly caused Chang Nuo, who was lying there, to open his eyes instantly and even sit up suddenly.


    "Are you kidding? This matter was not left to you to handle, so why is the Senate Department involved now?"


    "Your Majesty the King, I also want to do it myself. The key is not that I have never done this kind of thing before!"


    Junhe smiled sheepishly and said.


    Chang Nuo looked helpless. He originally didn''t want so many people to know about this matter, but he didn''t expect that it would be better now. It is estimated that after he opens his mouth to confirm the time, almost all the people in the country will know about this incident. matter.


    He raised his head and nced at Junhe. He didn''t say anything more. Instead, he covered his head,y down again and closed his eyes.


    "Your Majesty the King, your previous arrangement was within one year. Is it possible that the time has been shortened to such a short time and you are still not satisfied?"


    Junhe asked doubtfully.


    "Then let''s arrange it this way without forcing Robin?"


    Changnuo asked with his eyes closed.


    "Concerning this, you can rest assured that there is absolutely no force from anyone, everything is agreed by Ms. Robin herself."


    Junhe said quickly.


    "Forget it, you''ve done a pretty good job on this matter, so let''s inform them to prepare."


    Chang Nuo didn''t know whether it was helplessness or other expressions in his heart, but since things had been done to this extent, there was no room for regret.


    Robin is indeed a very good woman in some respects, not only with rich learning experience, but more importantly, the role she can produce.


    The other people sitting next to them were all suppressing their inner thoughts. From the first words spoken by Junhe, these people were listening with their ears pricked up, but in the end they still maintained a calm attitude. With calm expressions, no one opened their mouths to speak.


    They just want to wait and see what will happen, and for them, the most curious thing is what this woman looks like.


    It is estimated that after returning to the country, everyone may not be able to restrain their curiosity and begin toprehensively search for information about this woman.


    After Junhe finished talking about the matter, he felt a little lucky and hurriedly left the deck.


    "How did things go?"


    Shunhe, who had just left the deck, was still there. When he got to the lower level, Gogoya immediately pulled him over and asked.


    "His Majesty has agreed. Next, we will make a selection ording to the time set by the Council of Ministers."


    Junhe said with a smile on his face.


    "Quickly, I''ll notify the Senate!"


    Gogoya was stunned for a moment, and finally the smile on her face became even bigger. She didn''t even care about Junhe standing next to her. She turned around and started to take out her phone and walked in the other direction to notify the country.


    If this incident is publicized, I don��t know how much of a sensation it will cause. The king of the most powerful empire in the South China Sea actually wants to marry a woman who has been wanted by the navy for more than ten years. I am afraid that this kind of thing will indeed be talked about by others in the future. road.


    It is obviously impossible to conceal the existence of those big forces. I am afraid that each of them will be able to get certain information before this matter starts. It will depend on how far the specific situation will develop.


    After the Trud Empire Council received the news, everything began to go smoothly and in a panic. After all, the wedding of His Majesty the King can be regarded as the most grand event in the entire country.


    So in the next time, you can put down everything and the work at hand and focus on preparing for this time.


    Now that the time has been determined and falls within two months, the first thing to do is to start publicizing the role of this matter.


    After they returned, in the past few days, almost all the streets and alleys in the country had begun to hang the image of His Majesty the King, and then the photo that now belonged to Robin was hung next to his photo.


    As for the big forces outside, they must have been unable to hide it. The Tru Empire no longer knows how many of their people there are. The first ones to know must be the Navy and the World Government.


    But regarding this matter, they all seemed to have already made a decision, and each of them had one eye open or one eye closed.

 Chapter 361 Invitation List

    <h4>Chapter 361 Invitation List</h4>


    The sensation caused by this incident definitely exceeded Chang Nuo''s imagination. Although he had already thought about it, it might cause quite a stir, but he would never have thought of the extent to which these guys from the Senate had publicized this incident. ?


    In just a few days, this matter has be the most popr news in the entire Tru Empire. Even the World Economic News is about to start aprehensive report on this matter. The most important thing is to follow and shoot it in real time.


    As the person involved, Robin''s schedule has been almost fully booked these days. Not to mention, he still stays in the office to sort out the information on hand, and the people from the Counseling Departmente to pull him to try on clothes every day. There are already countless.


    Day five.


    Changnuo and his party finally docked at the port of Nanniwa. This return to the city can be regarded as the end of their overseas trip of nearly half a year. Even if the Tru Empire no longer has their presence, the entire country can still be in order. of continued development.


    After arriving at the port, it was still in the morning, and the people on the boat had even begun to rush to get off the boat. The first thing they thought about was probably to see what the future Princess Trudeau would look like. What does it look like?


    But before all of them stepped off the Infinity, a huge billboard about 50m high appeared on the port. This scene could be seen even from several kilometers away. It was a huge billboard. The photo is hanging here at the moment.


    This is why the Council hangs a huge photo for others to see in order to let the people of the entire country know what the future imperial concubine will look like.


    But looking like this now makes people feel a bit ostentatious. The propaganda activities of the Senate Department are really too big. It is estimated that Robin is walking on the street now, even the blindest person can recognize her.


    Chang Nuo looked at the huge photo and just shook his head slightly, but he had to say that just by relying on the image in the photo, Robin could indeed be the image of a goddess in the minds of all men.


    Perhaps in some ways, Robin is even more attractive than the Pirate Queen.


    The wedding of Emperor Toru of the South China Sea has be the focus of discussion in the entire pirate world almost instantly. Whether it is the navy or the powerful pirates, their eyes are also focused on the Toru Empire at this moment.


    In the royal pce of Tru.


    "Your Majesty, this is the invitation list for your wedding this time. Do you think there is anything else you need to add?"


    Federo, the Minister of the Council, has just be the chief minister of the Council of this countryst year. He is only about 40 years old. He is dressed in domineering clothes and has such a sophisticated style of doing things. Each of them is undoubtedly giving He added a bit of color.


    Changnuo leaned on the sofa with a listless look on his face, facing the things Federo brought over. When he opened it, he saw that the invitation content on it covered almost all the major forces in the entire pirate world.


    There are even kings from many countries who are also included in the invitation. The main reason is that the national defense of these countries is almost all partners of the Tru Empire. Even King Kobra of basta is now here. within the invitation range.


    The main reason is that Chang Nuo''s wedding ising soon. In more than two months, even the pirates from the big forces in the new world will probably need a lot of effort to rush over.


    But this kind of thing almost doesn''t matter anymore, and I have never thought about making this matter too ostentatious.


    "Cancel all the lists above. When the timees, we will only need to celebrate domestically. There is no need to invite any of the other major forces and kings of each country."


    Chang Nuo just nced at it and said lightly.


    "But will this cause dissatisfaction from other countries? After all, this is the biggest thing in our Tru Empire today."


    Federo said.


    "Then we will give these cooperating countries a 10% discount on all their goods for the next year. This can be regarded as a demonstration of the great power of our Tru Empire."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Then I will do as you tell me. Do you know if there are other things that need to be paid attention to regarding the wedding?"


    Just as Federo was about to leave, he turned his head again and asked.


    "Just look at the arrangements. Oh, and also ask Robin toe over and see me once in the next two days."


    "No problem, Your Majesty."


    Federo said, then turned around and started walking outside.


    The Tru Empire is now in a lively mood. The king''s wedding has be a topic that everyone must discuss after dinner. What''s more important is that what this wedding brings to them can even exceed everyone''s imagination. .


    In today''s Tru Empire, there is almost no tax to pay, and the country can bepletely self-sufficient by relying only on its own industry andmerce. Therefore, this time for the people of the Tru Empire, all staff have After half a month of vacation, they no longer care about such a small loss. Anyway, their career has reached such arge scale, and a little more or less will not have the slightest impact on them.


    Now everyone is waiting for the wedding day, but this day is only about a month away from them.


    Nowadays, it is not just the Senate Department that is busy. There are also many simr departments that are busy across the country.


    Chang Nuo has no intention of waiting until Robines to see him. Now that things havee to this point, as a man, he should naturally take the initiative.


    Although the Royal City is rtivelyrge, within this range, Chang Nuo can understand the situation of anyone in the entire Royal City just by relying on perception.


    The ce where Robin lives now is a ce specially arranged by the Senate. It is not very far from the pce. Even standing at the high end of the pce, you can overlook the vi where Robin lives.


    During the day, Robin had to face various tests from people from the Senate almost all the time. Not only did he need to test the wedding clothes, but he also needed to exin many solutions to deal with special situations.


    But the good thing is that Gogoya stayed with her almost the whole time after she came back. Almost all the clothes used during the wedding were carefully selected, if not because the time was too short. , I am afraid that the hugeness of this wedding will definitely be recorded in the history of pirates.

 Chapter 362 Peeping at the Future Wife

    <h4>Chapter 362 Peeping at the Future Wife</h4>


    In the days leading up to the wedding, Robin''s job every day was very simple, which was to try on various clothes, trying to create an image that fit the image of Princess Trudeau.


    But today is extraordinarily different. As King Tru, Changnuo, this time he secretly ran out to see what his future woman would look like.


    Although there are scenes of Robin''s future in my mind, the key point is that these are several years in advance, and have already changed the trajectory of Robin''s destiny.


    In Nuoda''s vi, except for the costumers whoe and go, the rest basically belong to those in the pce and the Council of Ministers.


    Chang Nuo was still staying in the pce one second, but the next second he had appeared outside the vi.


    For him, even when facing Robin, whom he was about to marry, he didn''t seem to have the slightest embarrassment or shame about this matter.


    After appearing on the periphery of the vi, Chang Nuo carefully looked at the surrounding environment. It was indeed not very far from the pce, it could even be said that it was only separated by a wall.


    The environment of the entire area is very elegant. It is not an exaggeration to call this a manor. It is possible to build such a luxurious vi area in the royal city. Regarding this, even Changnuo himself may not have thought of it before.


    "His Majesty the King...!!!"


    While Chang Nuo was still carefully observing the surrounding situation, a very strange-looking woman came over and shouted in surprise with eyes full of disbelief.


    "Who are you?"


    Chang Nuo opened his mouth and asked.


    "Your Majesty the King, I am Senator Lofi of the Senate. It is a pleasure to see you here, my Majesty the King."


    Luo Fei is a young woman who looks about 20 years old. Judging from the clothes she is wearing, she does belong to the Senate. Chang Nuo asked this question because she was curious about what she was wearing.


    Wearing a blue robe, the cor and cuffs are iid with gold, and the chest is dotted with the LOGO belonging to the Senate.


    But in Chang Nuo''s impression, most of the members of the Senate are rtively older. Although they have begun to tend to be younger in recent years, at least the little girl who appears in front of him has given people enough doubts in terms of age.


    "A very young senator!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "Thank you very much for thepliment, His Majesty the King, but you are here to see Princess Robin, right? She is inside now, I will take you there!"


    Luo Fei looked at the king in front of him and said shyly with a smile on his face.


    "Can!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly, his eyes no longer focused on the other party.


    Luo Fei seemed to have felt the indifference of His Majesty the King, but she didn''t feel anything. Instead, she started walking forward with a smile on her face, looking back from time to time, for fear that His Majesty the King would not follow. .


    Robin was walking back and forth in the room, constantly choosing clothes. Whether it was Gogoya or those from the Senate, there were so many exquisite dresses hanging here. As the future princess, Robin, these seemed to be all. The same process he had to go through.


    Every piece of clothing here seems to be valuable and very exquisite. I am afraid that if any piece of clothing is put on the market, it will be apetition for others, but after everything here, it seems to be a piece of clothing. Useless and defective products are littered on the ground.


    "Just stay here. There is no need to go in or notify others. You can do what you should do."


    When he arrived outside the vi, Chang Nuo said directly to Luo Fei, who had brought him here.


    Because at this moment, the people inside the house can be seen through the ss. They are changing clothes in the living room of the entire vi. After all, there are so many people guarding the outside, even if they are changing clothes in the living room. , and no other aliens can see it.


    Luo Fei nced at Chang Nuo with some confusion, then nodded respectfully, turned around and started to leave without saying anything else.


    Through the ss, the Robin inside was no longer what he was when he first saw him. The dark wheat-colored skin that he had at the beginning no longer existed only in his memory.


    Today, the other party''s skin is fair, and she is indeed regarded as the ultimate beauty in terms of makeup and figure.


    There were about five or six women surrounding her in the hall at the moment. Everyone was busy with their own things, but basically they were all trying to choose clothes to wear on the wedding day.


    This is not just a grand ceremony for the people in your own country or the pce, but also a major event for the entire world. Therefore, the clothes worn by the imperial concubine for this wedding need to be screened throughyers and finally selected. A piece of clothing that can bring out the majesty of the Toru Empire.


    But as the real protagonist, Chang Nuo, it seems that no one has chosen any clothes for him from the beginning to now. Everything has been done ording to the normal process. It is even as if he has nothing to do with the wedding process. Everything has been ignored. It''s like someone else is arranging the wedding.


    Chang Nuo stood outside and could only see the backs of the people inside through the ss. As for the front, he couldn''t see anything from here anyway.


    The people inside were busy and did not notice the situation outside. Even if anyone turned their head, they might be able to see His Majesty the King standing outside. As for those outside who already knew that His Majesty the King had been here, a Everyone is doing the work at hand honestly.


    Anyway, after staying here for about ten minutes, Chang Nuo didn''t even think about disturbing the people inside, so he just started to leave.


    It wasn''t until nearly ten minutes after Chang Nuo left here that a person in charge came in confused and said, "Did you notice just now that His Majesty the King has already arrived?"


    "What???"


    The few people staying in the living room were all a little shocked, even Robin himself was a little surprised.


    "Did we fail to do anything just now? Could it be that His Majesty left directly because he saw that we did not do well?..."


    One of the women, who looked to be in her forties, was a little confused at the moment. She kept checking the process of her work just now, for fear that there might be a w somewhere that would make His Majesty the King angry.


    But all this was just her overthinking.


    But Robin was sitting there, looking at the scene outside the ss with a slight smile on her lips. She hadn''t walked out for countless days. Staying in this vi, she was familiar with various ritual processes every day, except for Other than that, all that��s left is to start picking out the outfits you��ll need for your wedding day.

 Chapter 363 Representatives sent by big forces

    <h4>Chapter 363 Representatives sent by big forces</h4>


    But all the things that are supposed toe will eventuallye.


    One monthter.


    On this day, everyone in the Tru Empire was happy.


    All streets in the entire kingdom, including factories, were hung with giant banners, and even the fields and countryside were filled with festive rednterns.


    These things are all done voluntarily by the people of the Kingdom of Ru, and they also want to share the joy and celebration of this country.


    Not to mention on the road, you can see those festive objects basically every few meters away. Just relying on these alone has given the Tru Empire a different style.


    Reporters from major newspapers in the entire pirate world also swarmed in, and representatives from major forces also arrived in this country one after another.


    This time the Tru Empire rarely differentiates between pirates, navy and merchants. Although it may have a certain impact on the security of the country, at least this time everyone is safe and can enter the country directly.


    For this wedding ceremony, the Tru Empire has even dispatched nearly 100,000 troops to guard the entire South China Sea area for inspection. As long as everyone in the South China Sea area is involved, as long as they are outsiders, no one can escape. The fate of not being inspected.


    However, at this time, I am afraid that no one wille to the South China Sea to cause trouble at this time.


    Although the Toru Empire did not invite anyone to participate this time, whether it was the pirates of the New World, the current World Government and the Navy, even the kings of the surrounding countries all sent representatives to participate. .


    In fact, everyone has their own little calction and wants to understand the situation here.


    At least this time was the closest they got to the Tru Empire, and these people were naturally unwilling to give up.


    Naval Headquarters.


    "That guy Aokiji should have arrived, right?"


    There are still the same people in the Sengoku office, but this time, in addition to Garp and Lieutenant General He who have been staying here, there are two more people, Sakaski and Kizaru.


    Sengoku sat in his seat and asked Garp who was eating cookies.


    "You ask me about this kind of thing, how do I know? But ording to the time, this time should have arrived, but this time I am very curious about one thing. Since we already know, the person whom Emperor Tru will marry this time , is actually the only devil''s son who survived O''Hara more than ten years ago, and there is currently a reward of 83 million Baileys on him. How to ce the next wanted order?"


    Garp said while eating cookies.


    "A woman who can read the text of history does not seem to be a threat to our navy, but the World Government requires an answer to this matter."


    Warring States said with some mncholy.


    "Don''t me the world government every time. The world government has the ability. Let them handle it on their own. Don''t just me the navy for this situation. We can stabilize the stability of the new world. What we do That��s enough.��


    Lieutenant General He said with some dissatisfaction.


    "What you said, why don''t I know that the current wanted order is issued by the navy. If the wanted order is withdrawn, it will have an impact on our navy. But if it is not withdrawn, what will the Tru Empire think? ?��


    Warring States said.


    "Now that she has be Princess Tru, ording to the temperament of Emperor Tru, she might cause some big trouble. Instead of this, even if she loses a little face, withdrawing the wanted order seems to be a better choice. "


    Garp said nonchntly.


    "Instead of us discussing it here, why not leave this matter directly to the World Government? As long as our navy doesn''t take action, can we change the situation from life or death to only capture alive?"


    Sakaski said.


    "It seems like this is the only way it can be at the moment. As for how to deal with the rtionship between the Tru Empire and the World Government? That depends on them."


    Warring States smiled slightly, this matter was now settled.


    Robin has always been a wanted person, but the image in the photo is already more than ten years ago. Even if he stands there and allows others to move, there are probably a few people who dare to do it.


    There is no need to think too much about the matter. Wrestling others from the hands of the Tru Empire is not a very cost-effective deal at first nce.


    But in any case, at this point in time, it is impossible for the arrest warrant of Princess Trudeau Robin to be spread. For the Navy, it is good to maintain the status quo. At least both sides are pretending to be confused. It seems that both parties have just taken a step back.


    There are still three days left before the wedding, but during this time, the representatives of the pirate groups in the new world have gradually begun to move closer.


    The Four Pirate Emperors also sent their respective representatives to this country. The first to arrive was naturally the Whitebeard Pirates, represented by Marco, followed by the Big Mom Pirates, represented by Katakuri.


    Following closely was the Beast Pirates, who had appeared from the very beginning but had never been heard from.


    Probably even Chang Nuo himself had never thought that the guy from Kaido would actually send someone here to give him a gift. Although he didn''t know what his intention was, since he was here this time, he should naturally be treated as a guest.


    As thest Yonko pirates, the red-haired pirates didn''t have anyone from the entire pirate group, but this time they had gifts delivered to them at the same time.


    The one who came from the navy was General Aokiji from the headquarters. Almost all of these major forces have one thing inmon, that is, there are not particrly many visitors. Basically, one or twoe, at least at this time. Is such that.


    On the South China Sea, whether they are pirates or navy, the degree of tacit understanding still needs to be maintained. No matter what the hostility was before, they are not on their own territory at this moment. The Tru Empire also exists in the form of a country. With many rules of their own, they can only stay in peace here.


    Even though they entered the port one after another and disembarked from the ship, they entered the country together. The only difference was the distinction between the reception staff, but at least when they came to this ce, no one would distinguish them because of their identities. treat.


    As the king''s Chang Nuo, he had no intention of receiving these people at this moment. He could only sit nkly in the pce alone, facing theing events.

 Chapter 364 Preparation before the wedding

    <h4>Chapter 364 Preparation before the wedding</h4>


    ording to all the ns he had in mind, he had begun to proceed in an orderly manner. This wedding was beyond his expectation that it would be so grand.


    But now it''s toote to say anything. There are only two or three days left before the wedding. No matter what the situation is, even if it is beyond the scope of the n, you can only bite the bullet and keep going.


    "Your Majesty, arrangements have been made for the guests from the New World, as well as those from the Navy and the World Government. It''s just that the people from the World Government don''t seem to be so honest."


    In the main hall, Junhe walked in quickly and reported to Changnuo who was sitting there.


    "Observe them carefully and let them go as long as they don''t do anything excessive. The other thing is to strengthen security during this period. It is estimated that there will be arge influx of people from other cities in the next time. The allocation of police The work must be done well by those in the Senate."


    Chang Nuo said nonchntly.


    "OK."


    Junhe nodded, but there was another person standing behind him at this moment, and this person was also the next protagonist, Robin.


    This time, he couldn''t help but specially asked toe to the pce, at least to see what his future husband looked like. Although she had no opinion on the marriage, at least she needed to see it before getting married. What kind of person did you marry?


    After Jun He finished speaking, he stood there nkly. As for Robin standing at the door, Chang Nuo had already discovered the situation of the two people from the moment they came over.


    So Junhe didn''t. When he left immediately, Changnuo nced at the other party helplessly. As a long-term partner, the other party already understood the meaning of His Majesty the King without any words.


    "Come here, sit down and talk."


    Chang Nuo leaned on the sofa and shouted softly.


    Seeing the situation in front of him, Junhe felt that it was really inappropriate to stay here any longer, so he quickly turned around and walked towards the door.


    Robin was standing at the door. Even after hearing the words, he was still a little uneasy. Everyone had alreadye here. Although he definitely wanted to go in, he could only take a deep breath in the end, as if he had made a big decision, and started Walked in slowly.


    Today, Robin is wearing a long ck dress, which is a tight and casual style. Her shawl hair flows directly to anywhere on her shoulders. It is nothing more than a small hairline treatment at the top.


    "Your Majesty the King!"


    Robin walked over and shouted with some anxiety in his heart.


    "sit down!"


    Chang Nuo sat upright, smiled slightly, and said with a little tenderness in his eyes.


    The next two people sat there facing each other, both of them constantly looking at each other. At least now the image of Emperor Tru has indeed been deeply imprinted in Robin''s heart.


    A man who has always been called the best in the world, and now in close contact with him, Robin feels that this is not much different from the contact a few years ago?


    At least the other party''s appearance is still the same as before. The king in my impression still looks brighter, but he has a little more depth in his personality.


    "Why did youe here suddenly today?"


    "I always need to know what the man I want to marry next looks like, right?"


    Robin said with a smile.


    The two looked at each other for a while, and the atmosphere seemed less awkward than it was at first. Robin seemed a little more rxed as he spoke.


    "Now that everyone has seen it, what do you think?"


    Chang Nuo asked with a slight smile on his lips, staring at the other person''s fair face.


    "Just a little curious."


    Robin said, doubts were indeed showing on her face at this moment. After biting her lip, she said again, "I don''t know, can I understand clearly why you want to marry me?"


    "There''s no reason. If I like it, I''ll ask your opinion. If I agree, I''ll get engaged directly. There''s no need to make emotional matters soplicated."


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes slightly and leaned slightly towards the sofa behind him. He said these words very straightforwardly.


    "Haha~, I didn''t expect that His Majesty the King is really humorous, but your answer is indeed a bit surprising."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "It has been so many years since you came to this country. What do you think of the Tru Empire now?"


    "It''s very good. At least it has made me give up the wandering life. I like it here very much."


    Robin said, his expression already filled with warm joy.


    No matter how strange the king in front of him feels, at least Robin feels so safe at this moment. From her youth to the present, only she knows what she has experienced in the process, but now this Everything has changed dramatically.


    Chang Nuo looked at this somewhat pitiful Robin. Although he didn''t like the other person as much as he imagined, at least in the next time, these feelings could be slowly cultivated.


    "If you have anything you want, you can tell me. At least for today''s Tru Empire, if you want to do many things, it is just a matter of effort."


    Changnuo said.


    "No need, everything here is very good. I don''t have any needs. If I say the only need, it is that I hope His Majesty the King will treat me better in the future."


    Robin changed the names as he spoke, with a bit of yfulness in his tone, but this moment made Chang Nuo feel a little embarrassed and at a loss.


    "Ahem!! Well, just stay here today. All the things that need to be done have been done. Then we can have something to eat together."


    Chang Nuo stood up awkwardly, and then said helplessly to Robin who was sitting there.


    "OK!"


    Hearing Robin''s words of refusal, Chang Nuo just smiled. After all, there were only two people left in the entire hall. No matter how strong he was in front of others, or what kind of domineering style he showed, at least at this moment. Emperor Tru looks like a big boy.


    In thend of the royal city, on this straight road leading directly from the port to the Royal Pce of Tru, the guards began to spread almost one after another to the ce where the pce is located. It can be said that they are just rehearsing now, or they can be said to be carrying out security Screening.


    Today, the entire royal city can be regarded as a mixed bag. Although it is not in any dangerous state, as the people from the surrounding cities all crowd into the royal city one by one, this is the road that Emperor Tru must pass. , we still don��t know how chaotic the situation will be.

 Chapter 365 Wedding Arrangements

    <h4>Chapter 365 Wedding Arrangements</h4>


    The wedding day.


    The royal city on this day is destined to be a lively ce.


    Because at this moment, since early in the morning when it was still dark, the entire broad street was already filled with people on both sides.


    If it weren''t for the protection of the police, it would have already started to be chaotic.


    But these people came spontaneously, and each one of them obeyed the police''s instructions to maintain order.


    That''s good. Today''s weather is indeed particrly bright. The weather in October is not as hot as expected, but among these crowded people, you can still see sweat on the foreheads of many people.


    Theye from almost every city, and they all want to take a good look at this wedding ceremony that will be recorded. The trains of the Tru Empire have now begun to pass through every city, even those that are the farthest apart. The city can still reach this area.


    In the pce.


    Changnuo was already well at this moment, and he was packed and ready to go to meet his future princess. However, his image at this moment was almost more majestic and domineering than what he wore when he first became King Tru.


    Wearing a white dress, an embroidered gold-rimmed neckline, and a king''s crown iid with red gems, almost every part of her body has been made to perfection.


    He held a cane made of white jade in his hand, which added a lot of color to his image as a king.


    "Your Majesty the King, everything is ready. Shall we set off now?"


    Minister Federo of the Council of Ministers has already been waiting here, and this ce is still only inside the pce. The people in the peripheral reception area and those standing outside are already impatient.


    "Is everything ready?"


    Chang Nuo asked calmly.


    "Don''t worry, His Majesty the King, everything has been arranged now. General Yixiao and General Moshank are in charge of the guests. Now we are waiting for you to set off to pick up the princess."


    Federo said.


    "Now that everything is ready, let''s start."


    Chang Nuo said, then turned around and started to walk onto the white carriage at the door.


    At this time, the white carriage is most covered with white flowers, and almost every detail has been processed in ce.


    This time, the route to wee the Princess of the Tru Empire would go around almost half of the royal city. This was also to better promote and disy the king and princess.


    This procession alone is estimated to take nearly a whole morning, so starting from their departure in the morning will basically not dy their return at noon and their meal with the guests.


    In fact, the solemn form of this wedding is nothing more than an external disy, at least so that others can clearly know the current situation of the Tru Empire.


    The two white horses pulling the carriage this time can be regarded as two unique creatures. They are not so much white horses as they are unicorns.


    In order to get these two things, Kongdao tried many methods. Finally, with the efforts of Ganfu, they were finally able to find these two unicorns with a long horn hanging on their heads.


    It looks very simr to a horse in appearance, except that it has a long leg on its forehead and two pairs of wings on its back.


    Of course, they believe that only such a gift can be in line with the wedding ceremony between their King and Princess.


    This time the wedding process was not held in the pce, but directly in the Imperial Hotel. It was the only ce that could amodate so many foreign guests.


    That��s why this time��s route basically circled half of the royal city, but the first thing to do was to pick up his princess and then start heading to the ceremony together.


    Everything was going on in an orderly manner, but the moment the white carriage that Chang Nuo was riding walked out of the pce, the cheers of the people outside the pce began to rise one after another.


    A grand ceremony began like this, and gradually opened the curtain.


    Robin on this day waspletely different from her usual appearance. She was dressed in a long white dress with diagonal shoulder straps. Even the people closest to her couldn''t imagine that she couldpare with the dark image before. .


    At this moment, there is no one knows how many meters of red carpet have beenid outside the vi. Now everyone is just waiting for the arrival of the white carriage, and then they will go to the Imperial Hotel together.


    This is not only the king''s wedding, but also the highlight moment of the Toru Empire.


    In this lively and noisy atmosphere, not everyone is so happy. At least there is a group of people who are staying outside silently at this moment, guarding the periphery of the country.


    The ships patrolling back and forth in the South China Sea are now almost all cruising back and forth one after another. The passage of anymercial ships in this sea area was banned more than ten days ago, and most of the country''s troops have already entered. It has reached a state of high alert. After all, as long as this incident urs, if a joke is made, the dignity of the Tru Empire will be greatly affected.


    However, the one most likely to do all of these things should belong to the World Government.


    But all this has already begun, and gradually bes an afterthought. After all, under such circumstances, everyone has reason to believe that the world government cannot do such a stupid thing.


    As the white carriage arrived outside the vi, Chang Nuo, dressed in his exquisite king''s clothes, began to walk slowly inside.


    When he came out again, his right hand was already holding a woman who was likely to be with him for the rest of his life.


    The two of them walked hand in hand in front, followed by a group of entourage. The next and most difficult thing to do was to face the people of the entire country.


    From the moment they boarded the carriage, countless cameras were focused on them.


    In the nearly two months of training before, Robin spent more time epting this kind of expression in the highlight moments of so many cameras. At least everything was done in an orderly manner.


    The carriage started again, but this time there were two people sitting in it. When passing through those wide streets, the people on both sides were almost shouting at the top of their lungs, as if they were afraid that their King would not see them.


    No matter from which angle you look at it, at least the Royal City today is the most lively ce, and the poption concentrated from those cities is estimated to have reached nearly 20 million.


    But along the way, at least to the hotel, everything went smoothly, but the next thing that greeted them was when they really showed themselves.

 Chapter 366 Don’t cause trouble here

    <h4>Chapter 366 Don��t cause trouble here</h4>


    At this moment, the Imperial Hotel really shows his face. A building whose top cannot be seen from below, looks so domineering and brilliant no matter from which angle it is viewed.


    The Imperial Hotel ispletely built in ordance with modern design and is constructed with high-tech peripheral ss machines. The overall height of each floor of the building must be at least 6m, and the total height is nearly 1km.


    Outside such a huge hotel, in front is a square with a height of nearly two square kilometers, and next to it is the country''srgest port.


    It can be said that the construction of the Imperial Hotel has concentrated on some of the country''s most advanced technologies.


    At this moment, the huge square outside the hotel ispletely upied by festive things. A long red carpet extends from the outermost road to the hotel.


    At present, almost all the guests whoe are staying in the square. After all, as for the banquet hall in the hotel, they are also busy making preparations at this moment.


    As the emperor of the Tohru Empire is getting married, and the protagonists have not entered, they, the guests, will hardly step in.


    The hotel is close to the edge of the road. The square is now filled with people, and most of them are people from the empire. The entire square is also surrounded by special forces at the moment. Except for the people they invited, no one can People probably can''t even fly in.


    As the white carriage arrived, Chang Nuo held Robin''s hand and slowly got out of the carriage. This scene seemed to have be a fairy tale, and many people watching had emotions in their hearts.


    "I really didn''t expect that Emperor Tru would be so young?"


    In a corner of the square, a guy who looked like he lived in the Five Great Mountains with two huge ivory tusks hanging around his neck was chatting with another guy next to him who looked young.


    This man looks quite handsome, with a serious and steady face. He has white hair, brown skin and ck wings. He has a wreath-shaped tattoo around his left eye. He has a well-proportioned figure and is tall and strong.


    However, his whole body, including his face, was covered in pitch-ck clothes, wearing a mask, goggles and helmet, and ck double-breasted clothes with two skulls on the cor. Wearing ck gloves, not leaving an inch of skin exposed. There are decorations on his arms and legs, and a long knife hangs on his waist. He looks quite handsome.


    These two people are the representatives sent by the Beasts Pirates now. As a major pirate force in the New World, the Beasts Pirates can allow them to attend such an important wedding this time. This has exined a lot indirectly and directly. things.


    "Jack, who do you think is more powerfulpared to Captain Kaido?"


    The man in ck clothes said.


    "I don''t know who is more powerful between the two of them, but the only thing that is clear is that he is more powerful than you and me."


    Drought Jack of the Beast Pirates, although wearing a metal muzzle on his mouth, still said with a disdainful smile on his face.


    The man standing next to him is Jhin, the third cmity who also belongs to the Beast Pirates. This is an equally powerful existence, but it seems a little less important in this square at this moment.


    "I really can''t believe that the Beast Pirates would actually let you two guyse over?"


    Katakuri of the Big Mom Pirates watched the two of them chatting and unconsciously walked over and began to say mockingly.


    The tension between the two forces instantly started. Originally, they were all old acquaintances, but how could there not be conflicts between the two major forces?


    This moment was clearly reflected. Drought Jack stared at Katakuri with red eyes and said in a cold tone, "Boy, do you want to die?"


    "Haha~, I really want to fight you when I get the chance, but I don''t know what your strength is."


    Katakuri asked.


    "Then I can let you experience it now..."


    Jhin stood there indifferently, watching the quarrel between the two of them with interest. Although he knew that there was already a lot of grievances between the two of them, he didn''t seem to want to say anything at this time. Or to help.


    Drought Jack''s whole body has begun to clenched his fists, and the aura bursting out of him has begun to affect the people around him.


    But at this moment, Chang Nuo had begun to hold Robin''s hand and slowly walked in this direction. Although they were still several hundred meters apart, their every move was actually within the range of others'' perception.


    "I tell you, you two, please don''t have any quarrel today! No matter what grudges you two have, if today affects our King, the Tru Empire will not be polite at all!"


    While these two people were still arguing, a bolt of lightning appeared in front of them out of thin air, and Anilu appeared looming here in the next second.


    However, he himself was not here. Instead, he stayed in the outer area, apanying Chang Nuo and the others. Although he was always following behind, he only discovered these situations in a state of perception, so he used his ability to start warning them.


    "Hmph! There will be opportunities in the future."


    "Then I''ll just wait for you."


    Drought Jack and Katakuri snorted dissatisfiedly at each other. They both understood that no matter how angry they were here, no action would be possible, otherwise they could imagine the consequences themselves. understand.


    In fact, more than one or two people are paying attention to the situation of these two people. Many people''s eyes are also focused here.


    Aokiji, the general of the Navy Headquarters, got an ice cube and sat there with great interest, quietly looking at everything around him.


    In his perception, if all the pirates in the square in front of the Imperial Hotel were gathered together, they would be worth at least hundreds of billions of beli. It was such a scale that made him feel extremely shocked.


    When I first came here, I had already guessed that the Four Emperors might send people over, but when I got here, I discovered that except for the people representing the red-haired pirates who came the least, every remaining pirate group There were dozens, even hundreds, of peopleing.


    Which one of them is not the coquettish one of their pirate group? The Big Mom Pirates sent not only Katakuri, but also five or six other sons and daughters. The Beast Pirates actually asked Kaido to send two of his most capable subordinates, Whitebeard Hai There is no need to say more about the thieves. Apart from Marco, the other person who came this time was apletely unfamiliar face.

 Chapter 367 Robin’s Thanks

    <h4>Chapter 367 Robin��s Thanks</h4>


    But this rtively unfamiliar face seemed extremely familiar to Chang Nuo.


    Unexpectedly, everything started to develop ording to the original plot rhythm. Ace sessfully became the captain of the second division of the Whitebeard Pirates, and has now begun to be reused by this pirate group.


    Maybe it''s because his identity has a great advantage, but I have to say that the little guy Ace''s character is indeed in line with the philosophy of the Whitebeard Pirates.


    It was extremely lively outside the Imperial Hotel today. Chang Nuo was holding Robin in a white wedding dress. No matter from which angle you looked at it, the two of them were such a perfect match.


    Chang Nuo, who is more than 1.9 meters tall, is holding Robin, who is 1.8 meters tall. Almost every step of this scene has been recorded by various cameras.


    This wedding feast was also directly and simultaneously broadcast to various ces throughout the country, and even some ces abroad were broadcast live.


    There are countless newspapers flying in the sky. This time Emperor Tru''s wedding has indeed caused a sensation in the entire pirate world.


    But most of what they know belongs to those powerful beings. It is actually rtively difficult for ordinary people to get ess to this level of information.


    Although the wedding ceremony was very grand, it was extremely simple in terms of ceremony. This kind of thing was nothing more than publicity and notification to the outside world. At the same time, it could let the outside world know the current situation of the Tru Empire.


    On the long red carpet, the two people walked hand in hand side by side, but everything started to pause a little when they reached the side of Admiral Aokiji at the Navy Headquarters.


    Nowadays, Robin''s image ispletely different from before, but his news is always paid attention to by thezy andnky man in front of him.


    Qingzhi sat quietly on a seat made of ice in the square. Looking at the two Robins walking over, his thoughts unconsciously returned to the scene where O''Hara was massacred more than ten years ago. The scene that day.


    When they were only a few meters apart, Robin stopped and looked at Aoki who was sitting there calmly.


    Chang Nuo knew the rtionship between the two very well, so he stood aside without saying a word, and everyone else also focused their attention here.


    "Long time no see!"


    Robin had a slight smile on her face. At this time, she didn''t have the slightest fear. She spoke as if the two of them were acquaintances.


    "I''m d to see youe this far. This affiliation may be the best one for you."


    Qingzhi didn''t stand up, he still sat there, without any emotion, more just caring.


    "Before... thank you very much."


    Robin said.


    "Go quickly, there are so many people paying attention."


    Qingzhi smiled and spoke. After saying these words, he seemed to have put down a heavy burden. Although the smile on his face was very polite, only he knew that after Robin became the Princess of Tru, she Life has just begun a new turning point.


    "let''s go!"


    Robin turned his head to look at Chang Nuo and ignored Qing Pheasant. In other words, now was not a good time to reminisce about old times.


    After all, it is not a good situation for two people to stand here under the eyes of so many people.


    Chang Nuo was very aware of the rtionship between the two and was also very emotional, so he continued to hold Robin''s hand without saying too much and began to walk towards the red carpet.


    Aoki just sat there and stared at the backs of the two people walking forward with some satisfaction, but at this time another navy man who followed him asked curiously, "Admiral Aoki, do you know that woman?"


    "Roughly the same."


    Qing Zhi said casually, without even turning his head to take a look.


    After Chang Nuo led Robin to the door of the hotel, those behind him began to walk towards the hotel one after another.


    The hotel''s door is about 10 meters high and ispletely forged with high-tech information. The moment they approach, the entire door opens slowly and automatically. The service staff inside stand in two rows to guard the door. On both sides, they weed the arrival of His Majesty the King.


    The music in the entire hall also started to sound as they entered, and the atmosphere gradually changed from the seriousness just now to the more lively feeling now.


    For outsiders, they are not at all curious about what kind of woman King Trudi will cause to be the imperial concubine. The only thing they are more curious about is what kind of identity this woman is.


    Therefore, every move about Robin was basically revealed in front of those reporters.


    The moment I only chatted with Qingzhi for a few words, people began to specte endlessly about what kind of rtionship they had.


    It''s not just the navy personnel who have so many ideas about this. Even the Yonko team are all confused and wondering, what is the identity of this Robin?


    They had all done enough homework, but what they could find out about the sudden appearance of Princess Trudeau was almost trivial.


    In the huge hotel, as far as the eye can see, there are tables filled with tables, leaving only a wide road paved with red carpets in the middle. This road leads directly to a huge stage in front, even for such a wedding ceremony, but It''s just that it''s more grand than ordinary people''s weddings, with more guests and higher status, but there aren''t many other changes in form.


    The wedding was very simple and easy-going. At the end of the day, everyone was already tired and exhausted.


    But it was good. On such a perfect day, it was spent without any dangers. No matter whether it was the Tru Empire or the South China Sea region, nothing happened at all.


    This wedding ceremony, which attracted everyone''s attention, also ended quietly.


    However, in the newspapers that were flying the next day, this incident seemed to have be the headline content of all major newspapers.


    Even thergest newspaper in the world like World Economic News, the entire first page of the newspaper is all about the wedding of the Tru Empire.


    The appearance of the wedding haspletely made everyone realize what kind of person the current Princess Tru is, but at the same time, for those who know his identity, one can only shake their heads slightly and sigh, but But he doesn''t say too many words.


    After all, everyone''s mentality is different at this moment. When receiving this kind of news, the first reaction of people who know Robin is that it is incredible. This incredible feelinges not only from her current achievements, but more importantly from her current achievements. His appearance was almostpletely different from what they had seen.

 Chapter 368 The protagonist goes to sea

    <h4>Chapter 368 The protagonist goes to sea</h4>


    When Emperor Toru got married, the news had already spread throughout the pirate world the next day, or in other words, it had already spread before.


    It''s just that no one knows what Princess Trudeau looks like or what her name is. However, the day after the wedding, the newspapers publicized it overwhelmingly, and this moment caused an uproar among others.


    At least in this corner of the world, many people still know the existence of this woman.


    No, in such a desert-filled ce, a strange building was built alone here.


    Crocodile still maintained his previous image, holding a huge cigar in his hand, sitting on a chair, reading the newspaper in front of him.


    "I really didn''t expect that the little follower back then would suddenly be such a big shot. It''s quite interesting!"


    Crocodile said with a smile on his lips.


    Now he has already changed the contents of the original plot. Without Robin, a person who can understand the historical text, he no longer pursues the things recorded in the historical text.


    No one can understand it anyway, so what if they find it?


    It''s just that for him, all this only changed the oue of a future, but the actual process has not changed at all. He is still a Shichibukai, but the difference is that the country he is targeting ispletely different.


    The rise of the Toru Empire also seems to have created a lot of value for him. Now Crocodile is no longer willing to just be a pirate, and also wants to create an empire of his own in the desert.


    The situation on the entire sea is almostpletely different, and everyone''s emotions when facing this kind of thing seem to have changed a lot.


    Above the East China Sea.


    "Inform them that today is free for everyone. As long as you can afford it, you can order whatever you want."


    In the Barati restaurant, Zhepu, who was missing a leg, said to the others next to him.


    Just because of this sentence, everyone showed an expression of disbelief. When did a big man who buttoned up his clothes be so generous today?


    "Old man, is there nothing wrong with you today?"


    Sanji asked dully.


    "What''s wrong? I''m having a lot of fun today, so I started treating everyone to dinner. Do you have any objections?"


    Zhepu hit Sanji on the head with the hat on his head and said with disdain.


    "I don''t agree. It''s only natural to pay for meals. Nothing can stop them from not paying for meals."


    Paddy, who has a burly figure, said.


    "Just do it if you want. Why are you talking so much nonsense? I''ll pay for all the food today."


    Zhepu said domineeringly.


    "That''s pretty much it."


    Paddy said and ignored the matter. Anyway, for him, as long as he paid, it didn''t matter who paid.


    That''s not what Sanji thought. At least Zhepu behavedpletely differently today. He had never seen him so happy. Although it was a bit confusing, what he could think of was that not long ago, the old man saw the newspaper rted.


    A ce like theirs would asionally send some newspapers over. Sanji himself had read this newspaper, and the only thing he could think of was that it was rted to the Tohru Empire.


    He had already known in the early days that the old guy Zhepu was originally from the Tru Empire of the South China Sea. Now that he saw his king getting married, it was normal for him to be so excited.


    Although Sanji had already guessed this, he remained calm and didn''t say much. And as time went by, he became more and more curious about the Tru Empire.


    The key to being able to belong to the old man''s country and to be so highly praised by him is that this country''s reputation has now reached such a high level that it is normal to be curious about others.


    But all of this stops here, and the rest of the development can already proceed at a rapid pace.


    The peaceful life continued like this, and in the blink of an eye, almost three years passed.


    It is revealed that everything in the empire is developing in an orderly manner, and it has begun to deploy its own full-scale n.


    Everything seems so normal now. As the king, Changnuo''s current image is not particrly different from before. He does not have a big beard on his face like other people, but he still maintains a refreshing state. .


    The only difference now is that the person following him is holding a baby who looks to be several months old in his arms.


    But at the same time, in the windmill vige of Donghai, car passengers have begun to stage an alternative journey.


    "Everyone, I''m going to start."


    This is a man with ck hair, about 1.8 meters tall, wearing a red vest on the upper body, blue pants on the lower body, and a pair of slippers on the feet. The only difference is that there is a straw hat on his back.


    The protagonist''s official departure to the sea may not be of much concern to many people, but there are definitely many people paying attention to him at the moment.


    All the processes were exactly the same as the original route. Nothing seemed to have changed. When we first set out on the sea, it was still a small canoe. Not to mention the strong wind and waves, even sitting on it felt a little shaky.


    When Luffy went to sea, all the few people in the vige came out to see him off. From the moment he got on the small boat, it meant that his own destiny began to gradually evolve.


    But the moment he just set out to sea, a huge sea dragon of the Neptune type in the original plot directly exposed half of its body at this moment, with its bloody mouth open, as if it was going to swallow him and the ship together.


    But under the aura of the protagonist, he stretched out his arms in the next second and shouted "Rubber bullets!"


    The arm immediately extended a distance of nearly tens of meters and punched the sea dragon in the abdomen. With just the force of this punch, the sea dragon was directly punched and sank to the bottom of the sea, never to be seen again.


    Maybe it''s dead, maybe it''s escaped, but no matter from which aspect, this sea dragon is definitely a bug in this plot.


    After all, more than ten years ago, he was able to bite off an arm belonging to the current four emperors by himself. Is it possible that he was beaten to death by just one punch from such a little guy today?


    But who would study so much now?


    Anyway, all this has brought enough puzzles to others.

 Chapter 369 Robin starts to set off

    <h4>Chapter 369 Robin starts to set off</h4>


    But after Luffy, the future protagonist, left, the innocently smiling faces in this vige began to show different expressions at this moment.


    All the events are proceeding in an orderly manner, and the contents of the events are almost the same as they have developed to now, without even the slightest change.


    In the Tru Empire.


    "It looks like it''s already started."


    Chang Nuo stayed in the courtyard, sitting on a stone bench, and said with a smile on his lips.


    Sitting next to him at the moment was Robin, holding a several-month-old child in his arms. This was their first child. Of course, it was just a daughter.


    "what''s going on?"


    Robin asked confused.


    "Do you remember what I told you before? From now on, there will be something for you to do that needs to change the entire world. Soon, you will be required to apany me on this matter. This process will take at least nearly half a year. "


    Chang Nuo said leisurely with a smile.


    "I remember you said this, but do you want to go now?"


    Robin asked, her eyes full of reluctance. The main reluctance was the child in her arms, who was only five months old now.


    "Don''t worry, it won''t take long anyway, but you still have to do some things. In this world, you are the only one who clearly understands the text of history. You have only one ultimate goal. Then It��s to guide the guy you��re following this time and let him find the final treasure of the Pirate King.��


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "When to set off?"


    "Just wait a little longer. You can set off in half a month. At that time, I will arrange for Enel to apany you. You just need to wait under the Upside Down Mountain at the beginning of the Grand Route."


    Changnuo said.


    "Well, is there anything else I need to pay attention to?"


    Robin asked.


    "Don''t take action unless you have anything to say. You need to board the ship as a historian. As for your identity, there is no need to deliberately hide it. Of course, I think you should also gain something. It��s a great sense ofradeship.��


    Chang Nuo put his hand on the other person''s shoulder, stroked the child''s little face with the other hand, and said with a slight smile on his lips.


    "After I leave, won''t you go and bring her back?"


    Robin asked.


    "Hancock has her own mission, and living it like that is fine."


    Changnuo said.


    At the beginning of the official plot, all the big guys have begun to n everything in the future. I don��t even know how many people have begun to ce bets on a ship. Those people spent more than ten years to form this n. In the end, although In the end, no one knows exactly how far it will develop, but the Tru Empire will definitely be involved in such a thing no matter what.


    This time the n was not intended to hide anything from anyone. Robin was still in the identity of Princess Tru, at least in terms of safety, which was aplete guarantee.


    Everything went quite smoothly, half a monthter.


    On the Infinity, Robin was sitting alone on the deck, with Enel standing behind him. The two of them stared at the sea in front of them quietly. It had been so many years, and it was the first time that they left independently. South China Sea area.


    "Sister Robin, why do you think His Majesty the King wants you to carry out such a mission? Isn''t the Tru Empire doing well now?"


    Enelu asked a little boredly along the way.


    "There are some things that are beyond our ability to study. Judging from His Majesty''s expression, it seems that this matter is indeed very serious and involves many aspects. He has stayed in this country. We must protect the current stability. That''s all I can do, isn''t it?"


    Robin turned his head to look at Enelu and said with a smile.


    This guy curled his lips indifferently. He was not curious about this kind of thing at all, but for someone with Princess Tru''s status to join a pirate group, it is estimated that if this matter spreads , will make everyone��s jaw drop.


    The destination of their voyage this time is to go to the entrance to the Grand Line, under the Upside Down Mountain, where they will stay on the whale Rab and wait for the arrival of the protagonist and his gang.


    It is estimated that it will take about a month from the time Luffy sets out to sea to reach the entrance to the Grand Line. Everything has beenpletely nned by others, and everything is even done under the eyes of others.


    The rhythm of everything is exactly as expected.


    After the Infinity sent these two people to the whale Rabu, he began to return independently, just throwing these two guys on the back of the whale.


    "Sure enough, it is a very big fish. Although I had already prepared for it before, I didn''t expect it to be so big when I saw it this time."


    Enelu stood on the back of the whale and shouted with emotion.


    "Keep your voice down!"


    Robin said speechlessly, and then shouted to someone out of thin air, "Mr. Kurokas, I know you should be here, but I wonder if you cane out and meet?"


    "Sister Robin, who are you talking to?"


    Enelu looked around and asked.


    But at this time, a lid slowly opened on top of Whale Rab''s head, and at this time, a figure began to slowly crawl out from inside.


    This guy is an old man who looks to be about sixty or seventy years old. He has long been bald on the front of his head and his beard has turned white, but at least he looks very energetic based on his clothes.


    Beach shorts, big slippers, and a short-sleeved shirt on top make this old man look really energetic.


    "Who is this old man?"


    Enelu asked as he looked at the old man who climbed up with a puzzled look.


    "Enel, don''t say that. This is Mr. Kurokas, the former pirate king''s ship''s doctor. All you need to maintain is politeness."


    Robin said.


    "Don''t say that my old man is so nice. He is just a dying man. But you two, let''s not talk about how you know me. I just want to ask you why you came to see me?"


    Kurokas pouted his old face and looked at the two people with disdain and asked.


    "I''m very sorry, Mr. Kurokas. I apologize for the intrusion."


    Robin said respectfully, then took out a letter from his pocket, handed it to the old man in front of him respectfully with both hands, and said, "This is what our King asked me toe and give to you, although I don''t know what is on the letter." content, but he said you should understand it after reading it.��

 Chapter 370 The visitor from Upside Down Mountain

    <h4>Chapter 370 The visitor from Upside Down Mountain</h4>


    Kurokas raised his head and looked at the Robin in front of him. In fact, he had already recognized the Robin''s identity when he came up and saw him for the first time, even though he was curious as to why the Robin woulde to a ce like his. ? But he still directly epted the letter handed over by the other party.


    "Sister Robin, are we here just to find this old man?"


    Enelu asked softly while lying next to Robin.


    "do not speak!"


    Robin nced at Enelu with a speechless and helpless expression, and replied in a low voice.


    Kurokas started to open the letter in his hand without any hesitation, but when he looked at the content above, the old man''s originally calm expression could already clearly feel his breathing bing short of breath. .


    Although the two of them didn''t know what the content of the letter was, a letter that Emperor Tru asked them to send in person was enough to show how important the content was.


    After reading it, Kurokas casually drew the letter in his hand. It turned into a ball of paper in my hand. When I let go of my hand the next second, the ball of paper hadpletely turned into crumbs, drifting with the wind. When blown, these debris are directly scattered in this sea area.


    "I have read the contents and know what you want to do. Since you are here to wait for someone, thene in."


    Kurokas'' tone was no longer as cold and serious as before. Instead, he spoke in a gentle tone as if he were talking to his own family.


    "I''m not telling you, are we going to get into this whale''s body?"


    Enelu asked doubtfully.


    "Are youing or not? If not, you can just stay up there."


    This time, Kurokas''s tone did not spoil Enelu at all, and he directly opened his mouth to reply. After speaking, he began to walk down the path above Rab''s head.


    Robin turned his head and looked at Enelu, who was now looking deted. He covered his mouth and smiled, followed closely behind Kurokas, and then began to enter the body of the whale Rab.


    It didn''t belong to an ind whale. The body was so big that it was beyond their imagination. This guy was even bigger than the Neptune type.


    The space inside the body has beenpletely transformed by Kurokas. It has not only been painted to resemble the outside world, but there is even an ind in the body.


    Following the whale''s breathing, there is still an uninterrupted breeze blowing through his body, so even if he lives in this fish''s body, people will not feel the slightest difort.


    The wide space, coupled with Kurokas''s paintings of the surrounding area, directly make this ce look like a spatial world.


    "Wow! I can''t believe this thing is actually inside a fish. Old man, how on earth did you do it?"


    Enelu looked at the surrounding scene excitedly, and started to sigh with emotion in his mouth.


    But at this time, Kurokas heard this guy call him old man again, and his already irritable expression suddenly became even more irritable.


    While Enel was not paying attention, Kurokas raised his fist and instantly moved in front of him. Although Enel had dared to know the opponent''s move, he was still punched directly to the ground in the next second.


    "You brat! If you want to eat here, then go work for me. I really don''t know how you are still alive today after talking so much nonsense all day long?"


    Kurokas said speechlessly.


    "Sister Robin, don''t you have to work?"


    Enelu asked curiously as he quickly stood up.


    "I remember this sentence. I don''t mind telling themter."


    Robin said with a smile, but Enilu''s expression quickly changed. He hurriedly drooped his face and said listlessly, "Sister Robin, I was joking just now, how can you take it seriously? But don''t worry, I will definitely He can do the work of two people by himself, and he will never let you go hungry."


    "You''re talking so much nonsense, hurry up and work with me, old man."


    Kurokas said in a fierce tone.


    Robin stayed where he was, lying quietly on the lounge chair belonging to Kurokas, leisurely admiring the scenery here.


    Although almost all the scenery here is painted, it has to be said that the space inside the whale Rab is indeed sorge that it makes people sigh.


    But at this time, the protagonist group has just arrived in Rogge Town. It is estimated that it will take at least several days to reach their ce.


    But waiting in advance here is also to prepare for emergencies.


    Three dayster.


    The Upside Down Mountain, which had always been peaceful, finally ushered in its lively atmosphere.


    Starting to slide down quickly from the top of the mountain, there was a boat with a sheep-shaped head, and the people on the boat were shouting, and they all looked frightened.


    Until the boat docked at the edge of Labu, everyone''s reaction was almost exactly the same as the previous result.


    "Wow, what a big fish!"


    Usopp on the ship shouted, trembling with fear.


    But this sound, followed by it, made Rab, who had been in a calm state, instantly open his eyes. When his eyes opened, they were already muchrger than his ship.


    Luffy stared at everything in front of him nkly, and then looked at the bow of the boat that had just been broken by the rapid impact, and he suddenly punched Rabu in the eye with some anger.


    At this moment, everyone else was not calm. Nami, the only woman on the boat, punched Luffy on the head with a grin on her face and shouted in a frightened voice, "Luffy, what are you doing?" ?��


    "That''s right, you are making a fool of yourself. Do you think we have lived too long?"


    Sanji, who had been standing aside, also started shouting loudly.


    As for the other person, the green-haired Zoro, his eyes were also widened, looking at the scene in front of him in disbelief.


    The pained Rab''s eyes were covered with bloodshot eyes, and then he slowly looked towards their ship. While everyone was shivering and hiding aside in fear, he made no other unnecessary movements at this time. .


    After a while, he slowly closed his eyes again, as if he didn''t want to pay attention to this group of people.


    "I was scared to death. I thought it was going to be over as soon as I got out to sea."


    Nami cried.


    "Well! Don''t worry, it''s just a fish, no matter what the situation is? I''ll take care of it."


    Sanji stood up andforted Nami at this time, but the next second, they suddenly began to fall into a whirlpool.


    Rab could understand what humans said, and he didn''t want to pay attention to these guys at first, but as they talked more and more happily, he had no choice but to drag them into his belly, including people and boats.

 Chapter 371 The space inside the whale

    <h4>Chapter 371 The space inside the whale</h4>


    Everything looks very simr, the only difference is that the people waiting inside are different.


    But after entering Labu''s belly, these people did not fall off the boat. Instead, they drove directly in with the boat, so from beginning to end they only entered rtively speaking, following the current.


    "Haha~, everyone, it seems that we have been eaten into our stomachs."


    Luffy stood on the bow of the dpidated ship,ughing and shouting.


    "Bang!!!"


    "Bang!!!"


    "I asked you, can you be more normal? Now that everything has been eaten into your stomach, can you think of a way to get out quickly? Otherwise, when we go out again, we will be a piece of shit."


    Nami said quickly and angrily.


    Everyone else was frowning, but this guy wasughing like a fool, not taking this situation seriously at all.


    The sea current started directly following Labu''s movements and quickly headed towards his stomach. There was no need to think too much in the middle, and there was no possibility of stopping.


    After being lovingly caressed and punched by several people, Luffy suddenly became more honest. Now he began to observe the surrounding situation, but in this throat, everything looked so dark. It''s like driving in a cave.


    He tried to quickly expand his hands, trying to grab everything from a distance of tens of meters, but the throats on both sides were so smooth that there was no ce to put his force.


    "Luffy, can you do it?"


    Zoro shouted.


    "But I can''t grab anything on either side!"


    "I''m going to die, I''m going to die!"


    Usopp huddled in a corner of the ship in horror, holding onto the mast with both hands, for fear of falling down the next second.


    But at the moment when the words just fell, the whole ship suddenly experienced huge bumps, but after the bumps, they docked quietly on the sea surface, but there was no one who knew how many piles were piled in other areas under their feet. Pirate ships, some even have their masts still outside, showing the pirate g.


    The sea water below is no longer as blue as the outside. Instead, it has be a green form, and corrosive liquid has begun to emerge from it.


    No matter how smart your brain is now, you can still imagine that it has entered the stomach of this fish and will probably be a g in a short time.


    "Hey, Luffy, if we don''t think of a solution quickly, we might really die here."


    Zoro shouted.


    "Then why are you still standing there? Hurry up and think of a solution. The ships below have begun to corrode gradually. It is estimated that we will sink before long."


    Sanji said anxiously.


    "It seems that he is indeed dying."


    Usopp shed tears as if his life hade to an end.


    "Then what should we do? We don''t seem to have any good solutions now. We should sit here and think calmly. It looks like it will take at least nearly an hour to corrode the Meili and sink it."


    Nami seemed rtively calm and calm at the moment, and there was still some gentle breezeing from breathing in Labu''s belly, which did not make them directly feel the existence of despair.


    But no matter what, several people understand that they cannot stay in this ce for a long time, otherwise it will be really cold.


    But from the moment they came in, Robin and Enelu, who were also staying in the fish''s belly, had already noticed it, and used their knowledge and knowledge to silently sense the situation on the ship.


    "Sister Robin, do you think His Majesty the King made a mistake? What kind of mission can you aplish by sailing on the sea with such a bunch of weaklings?"


    Elnilu who stayed on the shore could hardly believe that this group of people could be so weak and dare to sail on this sea.


    Robin just smiled slightly as he sat there, then turned to look at Enelu with interest and said, "Now that they are here, your mission should end, so the next mission for me has just begun. Your Majesty, since he has arranged it this way, he must have his intention."


    After saying that, Robin stood up slowly, wearing a long ck dress, which made her fair-skinned woman look so elegant and charming at this moment.


    The most important thing is that the temperament he has cultivated after bing Princess Tru over the past few years haspletely given him a feeling of being extraordinary.


    "Sister Robin, but what about the mission assigned to me underground? I can''t go back alone now."


    Enilu was suddenly confused. How could he possibly go back in his current situation? There is no boat or anything, and you can''t sail with them. For andlubber, it''s like having strength but not knowing how to use it.


    "The Infinity hasn''t gone far, so just follow it when the timees."


    Robin said with a slight smile.


    "Could it be those little guys you are waiting for here? They don''t look very good."


    While the two were talking, the old man Kurokas slowly walked out of the room and shouted to them.


    "You old...doctor, why are you in the mood to walk out of the room today?"


    Enilu shouted. Just now, he almost wanted to call the other party the old man, but when he remembered the other party''s fist, he immediately took it back.


    It''s not that he can''t beat this old man, but it''s really no fun to bully someone here.


    Kurokas no longer cared about what Enelu said. Instead, he slowly walked over and looked forward.


    There was no way they could see the Meili from here. Not to mention how far away it was, the gas corroded from it hadpletely blocked their sight.


    But at this time, Luffy and the others didn''t do anything. After thinking calmly, they began to raise the sails again, and with the help of the weak air flow from Rabu''s breath, they began to slowly push their already damaged ship. The beautiful number is moving forward.


    As long as they pass through the fog in front of them, they can see the existence of the ind in Labu''s belly in front of them. This is probably the first test for them. After all, how can they still maintain the same character as they do now when they be the Pirate King in the future.


    The three of Kurokas stayed at the edge of the ind at the same time, staring at the situation in front with great interest. In the sense of seeing, hearing, and domineering, they had already noticed that they were heading in this direction, so they were concerned about whether they could rescue them. The three people didn''t care at all.

 Chapter 372 Kurokas

    <h4>Chapter 372 Kurokas</h4>


    "Boy, you can leave now. The next thing is no longer suitable for you to participate in."


    Kurokas said leisurely to Enelu who was standing next to him.


    "Why should I leave?"


    Enelu asked.


    "Mr. Kurokas is right. My mission is next. The Infinity wille to pick you up after we leave."


    Robin also said with a smile.


    "All right!"


    Enelu said helplessly.


    Beforeing, his mission was just to deliver Robin safely to this ce, and then just follow them silently. He was not allowed to take action without threatening his life, and his mission period was the same as Robin''s. Consistent.


    Enelu didn''t say anything else, turned around and began to move towards the room where Kurokas originally stayed.


    When they left, the Melly appeared in front of their eyes, and they also saw the ind in Labu''s belly.


    "Luffy, there''s an ind ahead!!!"


    Zoro stood on the watchtower at the top of the mast and saw the existence of the ind through four lines. Why did he shout to Luffy below.


    After passing through the fog in front of me, Zoro actually no longer needs to remind him, because everyone can see it at this moment.


    "Finally no need to die."


    Usopp continued to lean there with tears in his eyes and said motionless.


    The two of them sat on the shore and quietly watched the arrival of Meilihao. It was not until they docked here that dense holes began to appear on the hull. In fact, the supplementary food this time was already too much for the ship. It was considered a fatal blow. Even if it could still sail in the future, the ship could easily be broken in the event of strong winds and waves.


    "Huh? There is actually someone inside this fish''s belly?"


    Several people managed to survive, but the moment they got off the ship, Luffy saw Robin and the others sitting there quietly and leisurely.


    The whole person couldn''t help but said in confusion, and others quickly looked over there.


    None of them noticed that there were other people in this ce before, and looking at each other, they didn''t seem to be in trouble at all.


    "Could it be that people on other pirate ships encountered the same situation as us?"


    Sanji said.


    "No matter what kind of person he is, let''s go over and ask him first."


    Zoro didn''t have so many ideas. Instead, he started walking towards Robin directly.


    Nami and Luffy followed closely behind. As for thest Usopp, he basically stayed beside the Merry timidly, and even looked at the current situation of the ship with some distress.


    "Since there are people here, doesn''t it mean that there is nothing wrong with us? It''s just that we are still in the belly of the fish. I really don''t know what to do."


    Luffy justy down on the ground as soon as hended, not caring whether there was anyone else inside or not, he covered his face with distress and said.


    Sanji nced helplessly at Luffy lying on the ground, shook his head slightly, and began to walk in the direction of Robin.


    Zoro and Nami also came together. Most importantly, they were curious as to why there were other people in such a big fish belly.


    But before they coulde over, Luffy turned his head and watched them walking in the direction of Robin. Only then did he realize that there was someone here. After jumping up suddenly, he rushed in front of Robin as fast as he could. .


    "Wow!! I didn''t expect there to be other people here. My name is Luffy, who are you?"


    Luffy asked directly and carelessly when he came up.


    "I mean, Luffy, we were discussing the matter of someone up here just now. Didn''t you hear?"


    Nami stepped forward and asked.


    "Didn''t hear that!!! Did you say that???"


    Luffy asked curiously as he put his head on his neck.


    At this time, the people who followed werepletely speechless, but Robin sitting there covered his mouth andughed.


    Kurokas, who was standing next to him, stared at this group of people speechlessly, not understanding at all what kind of charm these guys could have?


    ��You guys are so interesting!!��


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Really!! I think you are the most interesting ones. How can you live in the belly of a fish? Wouldn''t it turn into a pile of dung here?"


    Luffy asked, his eyes widening.


    Zoro had a vignt look on his face. He was wary of such a sudden appearance. However, when Sanji, who was standing behind him, saw Robin''s face, his hands trembled unconsciously. .


    A big living person stood here. It was obviously the first time for Sanji to see it, but it felt extremely familiar. He always felt that he had seen the same person somewhere before, but he couldn''t remember it for a while.


    "It seems that you are pirates? And you are just pirates who have just entered the Grand Line!"


    Robin asked, still sitting there.


    "Well! We are indeed pirates. My name is Luffy, the one with green hair is Zoro, the one behind is Sanji, and our navigator Nami, of course, there is one more..."


    Luffy introduced, but turned around and saw that there were only four people standing here. He looked at Nami with some confusion and asked, "Where is Usopp?"


    "He''s probably still on the ship."


    Nami said casually.


    "There are five of us in total, ready to take a look at the sea of ??this world."


    Luffy said to Robin again.


    "What''s so good about this sea? But it''s still like that."


    Kurokas opened his mouth and said directly.


    "Old man, who are you?"


    Luffy suddenly asked in confusion, but the sound of "Bang!!!" that followed immediately made everyone jump.


    "What a rude boy!"


    As soon as Luffy finished speaking, Kurokas couldn''t hold back and punched him in the head.


    "Ah!! It hurts so much!!"


    Luffy immediately fell to the ground and yelled.


    "Luffy, why are you in pain? Aren''t you a rubber man?"


    Sanji asked.


    "Rubber Man can also feel pain. Devil Fruits are not invincible in this world."


    Robin said with a smile.


    She doesn''t mind attacking these little guys now, otherwise she doesn''t know how much trouble they will cause in the future.


    "How can it be?"


    Nami looked at Robin in surprise, even unable to believe these words.


    After all, in her knowledge, people with devil fruit abilities are extremely rare. Ordinary people may never encounter one in their lifetime, and almost all of them exist in legends.

 Chapter 373 Meeting with the Protagonist Group

    <h4>Chapter 373 Meeting with the Protagonist Group</h4>


    But looking at Luffy now, it didn''t look like he was pretending at all. Zoro originally wanted to prepare to take action, but his hands were already on the three knives stuck in his waist, but when he saw Kuroka When Si had no intention of fighting, he let go of his original alertness again.


    "The little girl is right. Don''t think that eating Devil Fruit will make you invincible. There are countless people who have eaten Devil Fruit in this sea area. It is better to be low-key and restrained."


    Kurokas said with a smile.


    "The people on the Grand Line are really different. What they say is hard to understand. Although this is the case, it feels so powerful."


    Luffy sat up and said with a smile as if nothing was wrong.


    "My name is Robin, nice to meet you."


    When Robin spoke, he was still sitting there, but he leaned forward slightly, got a little closer to Luffy, and said with a smile.


    "Robin??"


    Sanji felt confused once again. Why did the woman in front of him seem to have a lingering feeling in his mind, no matter her appearance or name, but that familiarity made him feel strange at the same time. He couldn''t even think of it. Where did you see it?


    "Do we know each other?"


    Sanji finally opened his mouth and asked.


    "Sanji, do you know her?"


    Nami started to be surprised, and then started to look at Sanji with even more confusion.


    Robin leaned there with a look of interest. It was not unusual for one or two of the people in front of him to read the newspaper and recognize her.


    So beforeing here, Chang Nuo had already told her that it didn''t matter whether she had an identity or not. So what if she knew?


    Sanji stood there, his eyes still staring at Robin, but after thinking for a while, he still had no answer in his mind, but his lustful expression immediately appeared in the next second.


    "Of course I have. Didn''t I just meet you? Isn''t she beautiful Robin?"


    Sanji immediately began to transform into another form. At the same time, he didn''t know where he got a drink from. He knelt on one knee with a look of disapproval on his face. He had already begun to release small amounts of water from his health regimen. Star.


    "How are we going to get out? If we don''t leave, the Meili will probably rot in the belly of this fish."


    Nami asked.


    "Beauty Robin, my name is Sanji. This drink can only express my current admiration. I wonder if you can ept it?"


    Sanji didn''t listen to what Nami said at all, he kept looking at Robin and talking.


    "Landful cook!!"


    Zoro next to him said something in an understated way. Regardless of whether Sanji heard it or not, he just turned his head and nced at it and didn''t talk to him again.


    "I''m so hungry! Sanji, let''s eat first, okay?"


    Luffy was lying on the ground, not only yawning, but also grumbling, and his stomach was also growling.


    The key is that no one of them cares about the situation of the Merry now, only Usopp is tinkering there.


    "What an interesting little guy!"


    Kurokas said that he no longer wanted to participate in the world of these young people. Then he put his hands behind his back and started walking towards the ce where he lived.


    "I did bring a lot of delicious food. I wonder if Mr. Luffy would be interested in tasting it?"


    Robin asked with a smile.


    "Where?"


    The moment he heard what he was eating, Luffy jumped up as if he had been electrocuted, and then began to look around her.


    "Haha~, then wait here for a moment!"


    Robin said.


    After finishing speaking, she slowly stood up and brought out a bowl full of food in less than a moment.


    She had brought these things here before. She was originally nning to spend a month here waiting for these little guys toe over. Unexpectedly, she had already arrived in just three days.


    So there is no use in keeping these things here. It is better to take this opportunity to win over some favors.


    "There are so many delicious things, so I won''t be polite."


    "Please don''t be polite!"


    Luffy''s eyes were shining as he said thanks, and Robin just smiled slightly and replied.


    In this ce, everything seemed so casual. I had some doubts before as to why Changnuo would let her wait here for the arrival of these little guys. Let��s not talk about what is special about the other party. Emperor Tru arranged for his woman to apany them on the road, and why they knew that this group of people could directly enter the belly of the whale Rab was enough to shock them.


    As Luffy began to eat, the other people slowly began to let down their guard, and sat around one by one, all of them began to eat inrge chunks.


    Now, except for Usopp, who is still working hard to repair the Merry, the other four people are also sitting here leisurely.


    "By the way, why do you want to go to sea? What are the benefits of being a pirate?"


    Robin asked confused as hey there while they ate.


    "I am a man who wants to be the Pirate King. I only go to sea for adventure."


    Luffy stuffed his mouth full and said as he ate.


    "Bing the Pirate King is not something you can do if you want to. Let''s not talk about whether our strength can support you to the new world. Let''s just say that it is impossible for you to find the way to Rafdru."


    Robin sat upright, put his arms on the support of the recliner, supported his head with his right hand, and said while looking at everyone who was eating.


    It can be said that this sentence was very lethal. Just the next second after the words were spoken, everyone stopped eating and all their eyes were fixed on the current Robin.


    Luffy quickly swallowed the food in his mouth, then sat there with a serious expression, staring at Robin, and asked in a low voice, "Do you know the situation of the Pirate King?"


    "Of course I know, but there aren''t many of them. The treasure One Piece mentioned by One Piece is aimed at Rafdru in the New World. So you probably don''t even know the name of this ce, so how can you be the Pirate King?


    You will encounter many things along the way from now on. Strength is certainly one of them, but the further down the road you go, the more you need to know and understand, otherwise it will just be the road to the new world. , it is possible for you to sink into the sea. "


    Robin said calmly, and what she said was not wrong, but these things were based on her past experience.


    "What is the new world?"


    Nami asked.


    ��A great ce, an area to express yourself.��


    Robin said.

 Chapter 374 Robin’s joining

    <h4>Chapter 374 Robin��s joining</h4>


    In fact, telling them so much has no effect at all, and may even cause a lot of psychological burden on them. The current strength of this group of people is simply too weak to be weak.


    Just relying on their current strength, let alone bing the Pirate King, after entering the new world, anyone might be able to knock them down with just one finger.


    "Well~! Why should you care so much about the future? Let''s wait until the timees. Anyway, our purpose is just to take risks and see the strangeness of this world. What''s the use of thinking so much?"


    Luffy looked unconcerned again at this moment, probably because he was full. He didn''t care about this situation at all.


    It is true that some things are too far away for them. There is really no benefit if theye into contact too early. All things can only grow through hard work step by step.


    "That''s right!"


    Robin smiled slightly. After just chatting for a while, she was already very fond of the little guys in front of her.


    After more than ten minutes, these guys were sitting there having had enough food and drinks, especially Luffy, who was very satisfied and patted his bulging belly.


    No matter how good this ce is, he is still in the belly of a fish after all. After several people had eaten and drank, Luffy started to stand up. After looking around, he turned to Robin again and asked, "You Any idea how we should get out?"


    "Of course I know, just get out of the mouth and Rab will open his mouth."


    Robin said leisurely.


    "Okay, thank you very much for your hospitality this time. We still need to continue our journey. We won''t stay here. It''s just that it''s really fun to chat with you. You can let us know a lot. I wonder if you are interested. Join our ship?"


    "Luffy, don''t be so rash, okay?"


    Luffy just finished speaking, and Nami reminded him.


    "OK!"


    Robin didn''t mean to refuse at all, and answered directly. This scenepletely surprised several other people, but Luffy showed a harmonious smile.


    "Then you really wee Robin to join us. We must have a feast when we get out."


    Luffy said with a somewhat excitedugh.


    Sanji could only stand aside silently and watch all this. Although he liked Robin very much, the doubts in his heart still lingered. He always felt that this woman was a little familiar and a little strange. He always thought He couldn''t tell where he had seen him before, but Sanji was absolutely sure that he was not a simple person in terms of his speech, behavior, and image.


    But it was actually a little early to say these words now. Although there were many doubts in his heart, Sanji did not refuse the sudden addition of a woman on his ship.


    Now that they were ready to leave, Luo Bin no longer hesitated and turned to look at the direction of the room inside. He mainly wanted to remind Enilu who was staying inside, so he followed these people directly. Heading towards the Meili, which was already looking dpidated at that time.


    Everything was so easy and casual, without any obstacles or difficulties, and the integration speed was much faster than expected.


    At this moment, the Meili seemed to be patched up, and the patches and scars on the outside were almost all over the entire hull.


    His entire main keel is still soaked in Labu''s gastric juice. If this situation continues for another one to two hours, I am afraid that the entire ship will bepletely unusable.


    Usopp had never left the Merry ship from head to toe, and he had not even appeared to eat. Until the group came back, he was still doing repair work on the ship.


    "This ship is called Mellie, and it is also our partner."


    Luffy looked at Robin with a smile on his face and said.


    "You are really a goodpanion. After setting foot on this ship, if there is anything I can''t do in the future, I still need your advice, Captain!"


    Robin smiled and looked at Luffy in a sweet voice and said.


    "Robin~, don''t pay attention to them from now on. Each of these guys has their own bad habits. From now on, the two of us will be in the same room."


    Nami suddenly opened her mouth and said at this time.


    "Haha!! This kind of thing really needs to be carefully observed in the future."


    Robin said.


    "I really don''t know how there is such a big fish in this damn ce, and it has already damaged the Meili to this extent."


    As soon as everyone boarded the ship, Usopp''sining voice could be heard from below the deck.


    Others seemed not to care at all, but Robin, who had just boarded the boat, looked at everyone and said leisurely, "Are you interested in knowing more about this fish? Maybe after telling you, it will make you very moved." "


    "Really? What story can a fish have?"


    Luffy asked.


    "The name of this fish is Rab..."


    Robin sat there and talked for half an hour, almost telling these people again exactly what Chang Nuo said to him.


    But while they were talking, they began to slowly move towards Rab''s mouth.


    When they came out of the dark empty space in front, it already meant that they could once againe to Labu''s body.


    The body of the ind whale is really incredible. Its huge body is not even the size of one of Meili''s teeth.


    Several people were sitting there eating and drinking while listening to Robin telling them stories about Rab. Everyone was fascinated and impressed by the promise this guy had made. .


    I didn''t expect a fish to be able to do this, especially Luffy, who acted in awe of this non-human guy.


    After finally appearing on the sea again, facing Rab with such a huge size, Luffy, the male protagonist, once again made the same move as in the original plot and made an agreement with Rab.


    Although all this seems slightly absurd, at least the passionate young man that everyone is familiar with is stillpletely disyed in front of everyone.


    Not long after they left, a deep mark appeared on the sea surface, and the Infinity also turned invisible at this moment and appeared next to Rab.


    But he came this time just to pick up this guy Enero. During the rest of the journey, the Infinity will always be in stealth mode, and the things that were snatched from Wilbu on this ship can also be used. Putting him in a state ofplete invisibility.


    Even if he has the Haki of seeing and hearing, he can''t sense the area where he exists at all.

 Chapter 375 Identity?

    <h4>Chapter 375 Identity?</h4>


    Aboard the Merry.


    Since leaving Rab, the atmosphere on the ship has been lively, not only to wee Robin''s arrival, but also to celebrate that these people have arrived on the Grand Line and embarked on a new journey and adventure.


    "Sanji, hurry up and make something to eat, I''m starving!"


    Luffy was lying on the deck with a hungry look on his face.


    "I know, I know."


    Sanji said helplessly, but when he looked at Nami walking out of the house wearing a bikini, the cautiousness in his eyes suddenly popped out, and he was at Nami''s side in the next second. He asked with a licking face, "Nami, beauty, what do you want to eat?"


    "Mr. Sanji, can you have two iced drinks?"


    Before Nami started speaking, Robin, who was sitting in the shade on the deck, started to ask with a smile.


    "No problem, beautiful Robin."


    Sanji quickly rushed to the kitchen and started preparing.


    But at this time, Namei leaned against the fence with a desperate look on her face, her eyes starting to look lonely.


    This guy Zoro has always maintained his own state, has been training, and has never changed.


    Luffy was lying there quietly waiting for food. Robin, who was closest to Nami, looked at the little girl''s current appearance and asked curiously, "Nami, what happened?"


    "Thepass doesn''t work. I don''t know the next direction?"


    Nami said with a slight cry and a sense of despair.


    "It seems that you did not do any relevant research beforeing to the Grand Line. The reason why the Grand Line is called the Great Line is because it is different from the Four Seas. Using apass here is simply not feasible.


    When walking on the great route, you can only use the record pointer..."


    Robin said, and then a ball-shaped object appeared in his hand. There was also a bracelet underneath it. This thing was almost like apass, just a spherical pointer.


    "Record pointer? What is this?"


    Nami took the record pointer handed over by Robin and asked still with some doubts.


    "This thing relies on a maic field for positioning. The next ind is the direction we want to go next. Every time we go to a direction, we need to wait for the maic force to be full, and then we will appear in the direction of the next ind."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "So that''s it. You''ve been really helpful, Robin!"


    Nami is indeed a natural navigator. Just one or two sentences made her very clear and understandable.


    "Robin, I feel like you know a lot!"


    Luffy, who was lying not far away, sat up and looked at Robin as he sat there, his eyes slightly widened and he said.


    "That''s right, Luffy, I think Robin really knows a lot of things."


    Nami also opened her mouth and said.


    While speaking, she directly put the record pointer Robin gave him on her wrist. Although this thing was not worth much, it was still quite valuable at this moment.


    "Haha~, I don''t know as much as you think. It''s just that I have been sailing on this sea for a long time, so I will know more or less."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "That feeling is already amazing, but now that I havee to this sea, I must conquer this ce in the future. No matter what the situation is, I will never look back."


    Luffy said seriously.


    Seeing how seriously this little guy looked, Robin couldn''t help but smile. No matter what their strength was, at least they felt that staying on this ship was quite interesting.


    "Beautiful Robin, beautiful Nami, let''s drink some iced drinks first, and then we can talk about the rest of the matter slowly."


    While talking, Sanji had already brought two drinks and walked over. There were two slices of lemon ced on top of the cup. There were straws in each of the two colors of drinks, and ice cubes were suspended. At the top, you can tell at a nce that these two things have been made with great care.


    "Thank you very much Mr. Sanji."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Well~! Don''t be polite about this kind of thing. I am very happy to receive such words from beautiful Robin."


    Sanji said with a smile.


    "By the way, Robin, we have be partners. I haven''t gotten to know you in a day. Where did youe from?"


    Sanji suddenly suppressed his smile, and then began to ask with some doubts.


    After all, he had long wanted to know this kind of question. From the first time they met, the familiar feeling had already made him want to say something like this.


    Taking advantage of this opportunity, since we have be partners anyway, it should be no big deal to ask.


    Luffy and Nami, who was sitting next to him, looked at Robin with curious faces. Even Zoro, who had been exercising, put down the heavy dumbbells in his hands and looked at Robin. .


    Even Usopp, who had always had no sense of presence, was walking beside him, sitting there with his head stretched out and listening.


    Robin looked at everyone''s expressions and still sat there with a white smile on his face.


    "I''m from Nanhai, and I have a family of my own. I should be considered a historian."


    Robin said, and was also observing the expressions of these people.


    "South China Sea??"


    Sanji repeated that the woman in front of him was rted to the South China Sea, but for a moment he still couldn''t remember where this familiar feeling came from.


    "Robin, you said you already have a family, why did you choose to be a pirate?"


    Facing Nami''s question, Robin didn''t hide anything. With a smile on his face, he looked at Luffy and said, "My mission is to help the captain be the Pirate King!"


    "Nani~!!!"


    Everyone immediately sighed with emotion, their faces full of disbelief.


    "What''s happening here?"


    Usopp asked with his mouth wide open.


    "That''s right, Robin, what do you mean by that?"


    Nami asked with also bigger eyes.


    "The captain''s goal should be to be the Pirate King, right?"


    Robin was not in a hurry to answer other people''s questions. Instead, he asked Luffy who was sitting opposite him.


    "Yeah! I will definitely be the Pirate King."


    Luffy said seriously.


    "How can it be so easy to be the Pirate King? There are only three people in the world who can understand the historical text, and I am one of them. However, to be the Pirate King, you must go to Rafdru, but there are no historical text road signs to guide this ce. There��s no way to get there.��


    Robin said.


    "Then ording to what you said, there are only three people in the world who can read the text of history. Who are the other two people? And why did you choose us?"

 Chapter 376 Whiskey Mountain

    <h4>Chapter 376 Whiskey Mountain</h4>


    Zoro, who had been staying aside, came over with a serious face and asked.


    "The reason why I chose to join you is very simple, that is, I also want to take a look at the current situation on the sea, and I want to find a group of like-minded people to go on adventures, but I don''t want to be a real disgusting pirate. Maybe in Under the leadership of the captain, we will be a very qualified adventurer.


    As for the other two people Mr. Zoro mentioned who can read the text of history, so far, I only know one, and that is the current King of Tru, Genji Nagano. As for the other person, I am not very clear.


    My hometown is in O''Hara on the West Sea. Just because I can interpret and understand the historical text, it was ruthlessly massacred by the navy more than ten years ago. I was the only one who survived in the final luck. . "


    At the end of the sentence, Robin''s eyes began to show a slight anger, and her past experiences once again appeared in front of her eyes.


    "So that''s it! Don''t worry, I will definitely be the Pirate King, and I will lead you all to fulfill your dreams."


    Luffy said with a smile.


    He didn''t take other things seriously at all. Robin had be his team member anyway. As for the identity of the other party, it was dispensable to him.


    "The other thing I didn''t tell you is that my full name is Nico Robin. I was wanted by the Navy the year I broke the water, and I had a bounty of 83 million Baileys on my head!"


    Robin said with another smile.


    ��83 million???��


    This time it was everyone''s turn to be shocked again. What kind of concept is this?


    Even Zoro, who had always only pursued swordsmanship, couldn''t help but be shocked at this moment.


    "Robin, what you said can''t be true, can it?"


    Nami asked in surprise.


    "What she said is true. Nico Robin is from Ohara in the West Sea. To be precise, he should be from the Tru Empire in the South Sea. He is known as the son of the devil. When he was eight years old, he had a bounty and 83 million beli. "


    Sanji said with a serious expression.


    The moment Robin said his full name, Sanji''s brain suddenly turned around, and he already knew the other person''s identity at the first moment, but at this moment he did not tell the other crew members. .


    Sanji looked at Robin with serious eyes and confusion,pletely confused as to why he came to his ship.


    As early as the wedding of Emperor Tru that year, the Barati Restaurant above the East China Sea also received a newspaper. This was also the reason why Zhepu exempted everyone from meal expenses that day. Out of curiosity, Sanji then Researched it.


    In the end, all he could know was the wedding of Emperor Tru that day, but the heroine above was Nico Robin sitting here now. This is why when Sanji came down to Robin for the first time, I already felt that the other person was very familiar, but I couldn''t remember where I had seen him before.


    Now after what the other party said, Sanji already knew the other party''s identity very well.


    "Sanji, is it possible that you also know?"


    Usopp asked in surprise.


    "Of course I know. It''s not like you who don''t pay attention to everything. At least I have paid attention to these things."


    Sanji said with a smile.


    "I see, but I don''t know why, but I feel so sad all of a sudden!"


    "I''m pretty sad too!"


    Luffy said what he was sad about, and then said the solution directly after that.


    Seeing their weird looks, Nami stood up directly and "Bang~Bang~" gave two people two thunderbolts.


    "What''s going on with you two looking like this? Can you be normal?"


    Nami said with a speechless expression.


    "Robin''s bounty is actually higher than mine. Thinking about it makes me feel so ufortable."


    Toll justy there, his whole person said inplete depression.


    "Is this the same reason for you?"


    Nami asked, staring at Zoro curiously.


    "Can''t you? I haven''t been offered a reward yet. It sounds embarrassing."


    Zoro also said with some frustration, sitting on the ground, holding his three knives sadly.


    "Haha~, the captain and Mr. Swordsman are so interesting!"


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Don''t worry about them, I really don''t know what''s going on in this head every day?"


    After Nami finished speaking, shepletely stopped talking to these two people.


    But during this period, no one noticed that Sanji sighed helplessly at this time. Knowing and not knowing Robin''s identity werepletely different things.


    But the road ahead still has to go on. The ship is still sailing on the sea and continues to move towards the next goal.


    The destination of this stop is exactly the same as mine. Although many things have changed, there seems to be no change in this group of people.


    Whiskey Peak just doesn��t know what they will encounter this time.


    Perhaps this ce should still be the same as before, but many things have begun to undergo major changes invisibly.


    It''s just that with the arrival of the Merry, Straw Hat will be here for a while. In any case, he will have to stay for several days to wait for the record pointer in his hand to be filled with maism and guide him to the next link.


    However, there are actually many people in Whiskey Peak at this moment. Although most of the people here are still bounty hunters, the nature of the people here has changed a lot.


    "Hahahaha~ Mo Lao Mo, I haven''t seen you for a long time. How are you doing theretely?"


    On a construction site that looked like thatched houses, a man who looked about 50 years old smiled and shouted while facing another guy of the same age.


    "Walker, I haven''t seen you for a long time, but recently I often receive escort missions from the Bess Kingdom in the North Sea. It''s rare to stay for a day..."


    ��


    Themunication between the two people has at least let everyone know about their current lifestyle. Unlike the scene of bounty hunters chasing down those pirates, most people here almost rely on basta.merce, from the middle to guide and escort the merchant ships of other countries, as well as the merchant ships of these countries on the great route.


    Although this kind of thing is very hard inparison, at least for them, life is rtively stable.


    After basta''smercial economy develops, although the country will carry out military escort work on the Grand Route, as themercial sector expands, Boss Wang, Stan''s army in one country is simply not enough. With this, these talents Found a more convenient way to make a living.

 Chapter 377 The sudden appearance of the Princess of Alabasta

    <h4>Chapter 377 The sudden appearance of the Princess of basta</h4>


    The Straw Hat Pirates and their crew have officially docked under this Whiskey Peak.


    When the ship docked, you could see this huge sign on the deck, because it clearly said "Wee any pirates!"


    Luffy stood on the head of the repaired Merry, looking at the words written on the sign with a smile on his face, turned to the others and shouted, "This ce is really interesting, and it wees pirates." ce."


    "Go down and take a look, and you''ll know."


    Zoro adjusted his belt, or to be precise, after adjusting his three knives, he stood at the edge of the deck and began to jump down.


    The text on this photo looks like it was written several years ago, and no one has cleaned it up. If it weren''t for the background color of the paint, it might not be visible at all.


    Others did not hesitate at all. Since they wanted to maize the record pointer here, they naturally needed to stay here for at least a day.


    There are currently at least two hundred people living on Whiskey Peak. Most of them used to be bounty hunters, but those days were almost spent licking blood from the edge of a knife. For such a life , in fact, they have long been tired of it.


    After all, most of this group of people are from ordinary people and do not have much strength. When they encounter those powerful children, they have no power to resist at all and can only survive and be ughtered. It is worse to encounter pirates who are slightly less powerful. Living the current escort mission.


    After all, for them, basically no one dared to plunder the goods from the Tru Empire. All they did was to guide the merchant ships in the right direction.


    After such a peaceful day, most people faced the pirates with almost no thoughts.


    Luffy led a group of people and started walking towards the mountain. When he saw the group of people living on the top of the mountain, although the buildings here were not very beautiful, at least the people who stayed here looked good. Sunlight.


    There are not only reckless men living here, but also some girls and children. In some ways, many people have regarded this ce as their home and n to live here stably.


    Faced with the arrival of Luffy and the others, everyone on board had already known about it and had made adequate preparations.


    There was a pirate shiping down the mountain. In fact, standing on the top of their mountain, they could already vaguely see it.


    "This ce looks really run-down? I don''t know why there are so many people sitting there."


    Luffy''s first words immediately started toment as soon as he came up.


    "Maybe it''s just that the ce you live in is better. There are many people in this world who can''t even live in a house like this, let alone live in it. They don''t even have food to eat. The people here are already living in a pretty good way. condition."


    Robin listened to what Luffy said and said to him calmly.


    "Yeah?"


    Luffy turned his head and nced at Robin. Maybe he didn''t quite understand these words.


    For these people living on the Grand Line, their lives are indeed much superior inparison. After all, on such a road, as long as you can survive, you still have some economic conditions.


    But among those countries in the world, especially those countries that join the world to do good things, they pay high amounts of heavenly gold every year. They are overwhelmed by the burden and have long been living like no one.


    "Everyone, you must be pirates, right?"


    Just as the two of them were talking, a sturdy man about 30 years old came over with a smile on his face.


    He didn''t hesitate, and he didn''t even care whether these people were pirates or not. Anyway, he just asked them directly in the end.


    "Yeah!! We are indeed pirates, that is, we saw the sign under you, so we came up directly."


    Usopp said with a fake look on his face.


    "Haha~, which one are you talking about? I don''t know how many years it has been since pirates came here, but you just happened to have arge number of peopleing back from the sea today, and we are going to have a banquet in the evening. It��s time to join in together.��


    This sturdy man had an undetectable smile on his face, but he spoke very enthusiastically.


    "Is there such a good thing? It seems there must be a lot of delicious food."


    Luffy asked quickly.


    "Whiskey Peak was originally just a gathering of bounty hunters like Mr. Swordsman. Captain, you are a pirate!"


    Robin reminded with a smile.


    "Haha~, what you are talking about happened a long time ago. We don''t want to do this dangerous business now. No matter whoes, we will treat them normally. You can rest assured."


    The burly man hurriedlyughed and replied. The smile on his face was basically to relieve the embarrassment at the moment.


    "Robin, why do you know this kind of thing?"


    Nami asked curiously.


    "No matter who they are, it''s still important to eat. If you encounter something inappropriate, don''t you just do it?"


    Luffy said with a smile.


    For such a brainless person, Robin no longer wanted to say anything to remind him. He originally wanted to give a kind reminder, but this careless character couldn''t listen to him at all.


    During the past few days together, Robin had been curious about why Chang Nuo let here in front of this group of people? With such strength and wisdom, how could he be the Pirate King?


    But perhaps it is because of this character that he is able to attract other people around him to participate,e to this sea, and start their own adventure.


    But before they could walk in, a little girl who looked about sixteen or seventeen years old appeared in the crowd and stared at them.


    This little girl has long sky-blue hair that has reached above her waist. She has exquisite facial features and a long ponytail. Just from the clothes on her body, you can tell that she and this group of people are actually... There is a big difference.


    The moment she appeared in the crowd, Robin''s eyes had already been attracted to her.


    For this voyage, Robin had actually made a lot of preparations before arriving. Knowing that he might go to the country of basta, he had to at least get to know the main characters in the country.


    "I really didn''t expect that the princess of basta would actually show up here?"


    Robin smiled slightly and thought to himself.

 Chapter 378 The power of the demon sword

    <h4>Chapter 378 The power of the demon sword</h4>


    Although he was a little curious about why the other party was here, Robin didn''t get too entangled.


    This kind of thing has nothing to do with her. As the princess of basta, it is actually quite normal for her to appear wherever she wants.


    But as a princess of basta, Weiwei has actuallye to this ce and lived there for nearly three months.


    "Uncle Akamo, which country''s merchant ship are you escorting out to sea this time?"


    "Oh! It turns out to be Weiwei! I thought you had left, but I started to wonder again, which country are we escorting?"


    This middle-aged man named Akamo was sitting there drinking and chatting with a group of people. Weiwei walked over and asked with a smile on her face.


    "It''s not that I''m too young to go to sea, so I''m curious toe over and ask you guys, which can satisfy my little inner desire."


    Weiwei said coquettishly.


    Akamoughed, and the others also began tough. They didn''t have any extra thoughts at the moment.


    Akamo even said directly, "This time we are escorting people from the country on the East China Sea. It seems to be called the Kingdom of Zamo, but I don''t know where it is. Our mission is to lead them to ba from the Twin Gorges." Stan country and then send them back.��


    "So that''s it! Thank you very much, Uncle Akamo."


    Weiwei said with a smile.


    Before Akamo could say anything again, and just as he was about to raise his hand to greet Weiwei toe over and have a bite, the little girl had already ran away quickly in the next second.


    When she came to a room, she skillfully took out a notebook from her arms and began to record the contents.


    And the purpose of hising here is very simple, just to investigate which countries the Tru Empire has some cooperation with, at least after his own country may ept the industry andmerce of the Tru Empire, he can continue to maintain these old ones. client.


    Although the idea is good, reality always ps her in the face.


    at night.


    The entire Whiskey Three Peaks has indeed fallen into a lively atmosphere, with everyone staying outside and milling around a bonfire. There was also a huge leg of an unknown creature roasting on the bonfire. Others were sitting on the ground around the bonfire, almost all of them, men, women, old and young, holding wine sses in their hands.


    Luffy and his group also happily participated, and themunication with this group of people was quite pleasant.


    Since everything had been discussed in advance, they naturally didn''t have too many ideas, and during today''smunication process, this group of people had somewhat understood the thoughts about this pirate group.


    Of course, the Straw Hat Captain, who has a bounty of 30 million Baileys, is not without anyone interested in this aspect.


    At least there were a few burly-looking men among the crowd. Although they were holding wine ss shells in their hands, they kept looking at the thinner straw hat captain.


    They seemed to have already made up their minds. After all, in such a lively atmosphere, a group of people began to drink one ss after another.


    The whole banquetsted untilte at night. By this time, almost all the drunk people were already drunk, and almost all the people who were not drunk were already asleep.


    Luffy was almost unconscious from drinking. His exaggerated belly proved how much he had eaten today. Zoro''s situation was not much better either.


    The only two women who can still remain sane are Robin and Nami. They did not participate in drinking any drinks, especially Robin, who has always been on guard.


    Even though they are rtively strong, there are so many people here, and there is no guarantee that there won��t be a few alternative ideas among them.


    But the facts were as he had guessed. Although what happened at Whiskey Mountain was very different from the original plot, at least there would be some unexpected things happening here.


    At this moment, people gathered outside the room where Luffy and his party lived. At least there were about 20 strong men.


    Each of them held knives and other weapons in their hands and began to approach slowly, tapping their feet gently, for fear of causing any noise and waking up the people inside.


    But how can the Erha image of this group of people be as they understand it?


    Not long after he fell asleep, Usopp couldn''t bear to drink too much. He opened the door and was about to stand at the door to pour water. However, at this moment, there were more than a dozen people squatting in the grass under his feet. .


    As the hissing sounds began to fall, one of the guys couldn''t help but pull out the knife in his hand and prepared to chop this guy to death.


    Fortunately, I saw the looks in other people''s eyes and finally calmed down my inner restlessness.


    After Usopp finished solving his own problems, he closed his eyes and silently began to walk towards the room. Several other people were already sleeping there like dead pigs, and even when their feet stepped on him, they did not move at all.


    Robin was sitting on the roof quietly watching everything below. From the moment these twenty people appeared, they had been under his nose.


    A ck skirt canpletely hide his figure in the night. Anyway, he has no intention of going too far to help Luffy. He just wants to see how this group of people can react. When ites to life and death, he must He probably won''t be able to move even half of his body.


    But things may be so fateful. Even when he is drunk, Zoro still maintains the state he has exercised, and his body and muscles begin to control his body uncontrobly.


    Perhaps it was not an exaggeration to say that his current state was sleepwalking. When he walked out of the door, Robin could clearly see the slight ck aura emanating from the other person.


    The twenty or so people who came here saw someoneing out again, and they were wearing weapons. The leader could no longer hold back his inner restlessness and rushed out.


    The dozen or so guys behind him also followed closely behind and began to sh at Sauron with their swords. However, three secondster, these peopley on the ground one by one.


    There was a slight blood mark on everyone''s neck. That''s it. These people probably died before they even understood the situation.


    "It seems like the problem is with the knife in your hand!"


    Robin, who is sitting on top and watching, may not be ranked high in this world in terms of strength, but in terms of knowledge, she can definitely be ranked in the top five.


    It was already obvious at just one nce that Sauron''s current state had absolutely nothing to do with himself, but rather had something to do with the knife in his hand.

 Chapter 379 Everyone was stunned

    <h4>Chapter 379 Everyone was stunned</h4>


    A kind of unconscious self-attack can even reach a level much higher than his own swordsmanship. This is the first time even Robin has seen this.


    But she was not the only one who saw this scene at this time. In the corner of the hut not far from this ce, a girl with long sky-blue hair also covered her mouth and looked at this in disbelief. One scene.


    Perhaps because of seeing the scene in front of her, Weiwei was so frightened that she let out a soft groan subconsciously. After feeling that she had been exposed, she hurriedly covered her mouth.


    But now it felt like it was toote to say anything. Now that Zoro was out of control, his eyes suddenly opened and he looked in the direction of Weiwei.


    But how could he be described as a human being at this moment? There was a faint blood-red light in his eyes, making him feel more like a ghost returning from hell.


    Sauron didn''t even hesitate at all, and in the next second he positioned Weiwei as a being that might cause danger to himself or people like him.


    The whole person had arrived in front of the opponent in just an instant. Even though Weiwei might have some strength, facing this situation, she could only sit on the ground helplessly.


    Zoro didn''t say anything nonsense. He directly raised the knife in his hand in the next second. But at the moment he was about to drop it, a hand suddenly grew out of thin air on Zoro''s back and grabbed him. The hand ready to swing the knife.


    The whole process onlysted a few seconds and caused no movement. Not to mention the original people who originally belonged to Whiskey Mountain, even the Straw Hats staying in the room, these guys were all sleeping. Deadly, without any attention.


    Although Sauron had been stopped, Weiwei was so frightened that she fainted the moment Sauron raised the knife, possibly due to excessive fright.


    After controlling the rampaging Sauron, Robin sighed deeply and jumped down from the roof helplessly.


    She slowly walked to Sauron and carefully looked at the current situation on him. Judging from Robin''s erudite knowledge, she could not exin what the situation in this scene was.


    But no matter from which perspective, a strength content that is not under one''s control can undoubtedly pose a huge threat to oneself and the people around him.


    Although Zoro was restrained, he still turned his head to look at Robin, with no trace of murderous intent in his eyes, and even tried to break free from the big hands that restrained him.


    "I''m sorry, Mr. Swordsman, it seems I can only let you sleep peacefully."


    Robin said helplessly, and then raised his white right hand and just gently ced it behind Zoro''s head, but the next second Zoro fell to the ground limply.


    When he fell to the ground, rows of hands instantly appeared on the entire ground. These hands were connected to the room where they lived, and the messengers sent Zoro towards the room one by one.


    As for Weiwei who fell on the ground, Robin just looked at her speechlessly and sent her to another ce in the same way.


    In today''s ce, if the princess of basta is killed, who knows what will greet these guys next?


    The body of the Yils man justy there calmly, and the blood was still flowing in other directions along the ground. Although the smell of blood was very strong, Robin did not make the slightest move.


    Early the next morning.


    The first ones to wake up were not their group, but those who originally lived on Whiskey Peak.


    It was only early in the morning, and there were already crowds of people outside the thatched cottage where the Straw Hats lived. Almost everyone was pointing and looking at the situation in front of them. Perhaps it was because the sound was too loud and disturbed the rest of the room. of those people.


    After a night, even though everyone was drunk, they were all sober now.


    "Why is it so noisy outside?"


    Nami woke up first and rubbed her eyes with her hands.


    "What can happen so early in the morning? It''s better to take care of yourself first and then get some sleep."


    Sanji also opened his eyes, but he didn''t take it seriously andy down again.


    The ce where Usoppy was closest to the door, and the sound he heard was also the loudest.


    After staying there for another minute or two, Usopp seemed to be unable to stand the noise outside anymore. He stood up angrily, then opened the door and looked outside.


    But what caught his eye was the scene in front of him. Arge group of people gathered around his door, and there were so many corpses lying on the ground.


    Usopp was so frightened that he immediately closed the door to the room. After calming down his excitement, Usopp quickly shouted, "Why are so many people dead outside?"


    "what are you talking about?"


    Nami asked, still a little sleepy.


    "Luffy, don''t sleep, something will happen soon."


    Usopp looked at Luffy lying on the ground next to him, still sleeping soundly, and kicked him in the face while shouting.


    "What are you doing making so much noise so early in the morning?"


    Sanji sat up directly, rubbed his eyes as well, and asked pretending to be sober.


    "There are many people dead outside now, and almost everyone has gathered there. The key is still at our door."


    Usopp said quickly and excitedly.


    "What did you say Usopp?"


    When Luffy heard this, he jumped up suddenly and asked with a very serious expression.


    We have all reached this point, faced with such a noisy sound, and it is so noisy even if we stay in the room, no one else has the intention to go to sleep anymore.


    After Luffy woke up, apanied by a powerful vibrating sound, others woke up one after another.


    As Luffy opened the door again, the scene at the door was still the same as before, but the eyes of all the people watching were instantly focused.


    Zoro also walked out with them, but he did not have the three knives surrounding him. Everyone looked at all this with innocent faces, even Zoro who was involved was also very curious.


    It''s just that now he is just stroking the back of his head that has been aching. Although he is a little confused by what he sees in front of him, he is not too surprised.


    "So it was the green-haired guy who did it? It seems that he is indeed stronger than we thought."


    Among the onlookers, one of the older men watched Zoroe out and said to the others.

 Chapter 380 Left helplessly

    <h4>Chapter 380 Left helplessly</h4>


    Although it has been clearly pointed out who did it, no one has conflicted with the Straw Hats because of this matter.


    "Sexy cook, what are they talking about?"


    Zoro listened to these words with some confusion and looked at Sanji next to him and asked.


    "Green Algae Head, they seem to say you killed these people, but when did you do it and why didn''t you notify me?"


    Sanji''s face was slightly serious. After all, there were ten or twenty people lying on the ground in this ce, but no one knew about the movement caused.


    "What are you talking about? How could we do such a thing?"


    Luffy asked, looking at the onlookers seriously.


    "Captain Lu, this matter does belong to Mr. Swordsman. I saw it with my own eyes. Maybe I can tell you about itter. But now that everything has happened, it must be time for us to leave."


    Robin walked out of the crowd at this time. Today she was wearing rtively refreshing clothes. She only wore underwear on her upper body, but she wore ayer of white transparent gauze on the outside, which may only serve as sun protection.


    Wearing a beige short skirt and strappy high heels, she looks really sexy and tall.


    But now when there is no one to admire the other person''s figure, Zoro is even more confused. Luffy turned his head and nced at Zoro, but didn''t say much.


    Robin had beenmunicating with the aborigines on Whiskey Peak about this matter since early in the morning, at least to let them understand that the fault was not on his side.


    However, the people living on this mountain peak are not as united as they imagined. At least the twenty or so guys who participated in this operation are not weed by others, so they have no reason to fight with this group of people who do not know their strength. pirates fight.


    This also led to their calm attitude even though they knew who had done it.


    "Nami, is the maic force of the recording pointer fully charged?"


    Luffy asked seriously, opening his mouth.


    "Huh? Oh! It''s almost done. It looks like it will only take half an hour at most."


    Nami said a little dull.


    "Now that it''s almost done, pack your things and we''ll start setting offter."


    Luffy finally began to use his wisdom as a captain at this moment. After all, things had happened before him that he had never thought of before. Regardless of whether Zoro did these things or not, what did these people on Whiskey Peak think? But now this is indeed not a ce to stay for a long time.


    As the captain, Luffy can naturally think of this kind of thing. Even if the people on Whiskey Peak don''t think much about them at this moment, they still don''t know what will happen in the next second?


    Staying here is not a better safe ce after all.


    "Luffy, these people are really not..."


    "No need to say more, let''s go first!"


    Zoro hadn''t finished speaking his doubtful words, and when he was about to quibble, Luffy responded directly.


    "Robin, what exactly is going on?"


    Sanji walked down the steps and came to Robin''s side, asking softly.


    "I will tell you after we start setting off. Mr. Swordsman himself may be confused about some things."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Then these people...??"


    "It was indeed Mr. Swordsman who did it, but it can also be said that he did not do it. It''s just that people seem to be a little confused when discussing such a topic now. After all, I was not the only one who saw this situation yesterday."


    Robin said again.


    While talking, the people in the room had already started to prepare their things. I didn��t bring much with me when I came to Whiskey Peak. Now I just wanted to take a casual look, organize the things I brought, and then I was ready to go. .


    None of the people on Whiskey Peak tried to stop them because of this matter. Even though they knew that these people were pirates and even knew that they had a high bounty on them, they were just like ordinary people. ,pletely indifferent to this matter.


    Luffy led a group of people through the crowd with serious faces. The strong men who were originally watching all moved out of the way, until thest Robin started to leave, standing at the front. A strong man subconsciously bowed his head respectfully.


    The group of six people began to walk swaggering down the mountain, but no one opened their mouths to speak along the way. It was obvious that they were still very confused about the situation of the more than twenty people who died.


    "who is it?"


    Luffy, who was walking at the front, had just descended halfway up the mountain when he suddenly noticed that the grass next to him had moved. His arms instantly became longer and they prated directly into the depths of the grass.


    Others were also on guard at this moment, but when Luffy took his hand back, they saw that he was holding a girl with sky blue hair in his hand.


    "Who are you? Why have you been following us?"


    Luffy asked.


    "My name is Weiwei, and I want to take a ride with you."


    Weiwei said with some fear.


    What she was afraid of was not Luffy in front of her, but Zoro standing behind him with a look of nothing on his face.


    But after hearing what the other party said, Luffy also let go of his inner guard, and then asked with a yful smile, "Where are you going?"


    "You should be preparing to set off along the Grand Line. ording to this video, I can pass a good distance with you."


    Weiwei said with a smile.


    "If that''s the case, then fine."


    "Luffy, can you ask about their situation first? Don''t just bring someone up here."


    Usopp said quickly.


    "It doesn''t matter, it''s just a matter of course."


    Luffy said with a grin.


    In this way, as the princess of basta, Vivi officially embarked on her journey with the Straw Hats.


    All the processes are almost the same as the original plot, but of course there are many unimaginable changes.


    Robin walked at the back, looking at everything in front of her, with a faint smile on her face. She didn''t mind at all about such a thing, and she didn''t even say anything about revealing the other party''s identity.


    It was not until everyone got on the ship together, and as the Meili entered the departure state again, that the doubts that had arisen on the deck finally broke out at this moment.


    "Robin, can you tell me what you saw yesterday?"


    Nami was the first toe over and look at Robin and asked.


    However, at this moment, Robin''s image was still the same as when she was on the boat. She was holding a book in her hand, and then she was leaning on the recliner, reading the book quietly, and not paying attention to anyone.

 Chapter 381 Save a country?

    <h4>Chapter 381 Save a country?</h4>


    But now facing the doubtful looks of others, Robin slowly put down the book in his hand and looked at everyone.


    "I did see what happened yesterday. The deaths of those people can be said to be rted to Mr. Swordsman. Of course, it can also be said to have nothing to do with it."


    "What do you mean it''s relevant or irrelevant? What happened?"


    Zoro looked a little anxious. After all, this kind of thing happened to him. As the person involved, he waspletely confused and even had no idea about this kind of thing.


    Robin smiled slightly. Facing the doubts cast by everyone, she could only tell everything she saw yesterday, and even told Suo what she could feel. Long.


    Some of Robin''s own opinions have even been added in the middle. Unlike the first time this matter was brought up, at least this time there is another insider staying here.


    Princess Vivi of basta, while they were listening, she was also listening to these things.


    "I don''t know what happened to you, but the only thing I can confirm is that it was you who did itst night."


    Weiwei also said this.


    After hearing these words, everyone suddenly fell silent, and all their eyes were fixed on Sauron.


    But at this time, Sanji stepped forward and patted Zoro on the shoulder, and said with a very serious expression, "It seems that we need to find a ship''s doctor on the Meili, otherwise if this guy goes crazy one day, he may cause much damage." !��


    "You perverted cook, what are you talking about?"


    Zoro said through gritted teeth.


    "However, Mr. Swordsman''s situation may not be entirely a bad thing. If you can master this power, you may be able to achieve a higher level of swordsmanship."


    Robin suddenly opened his mouth and said at this time.


    "It seems too early to say this now, everything will be left to chance!"


    Zoro said indifferently, but in his heart he was actually more panicked than anyone else. It was not that he didn''t feel anything about what happened the night before. At least after they talked about it, when Zoro went back to get the sword, he had already seen He reached the faint traces of blood remaining on the third generation of his demon sword.


    "I have decided that since you are so powerful, I want to ask you to do something for me now!"


    Weiwei suddenly stood up and shouted to everyone.


    "whats the matter?"


    Usopp asked confused.


    "My true identity is actually the princess of the country basta, but our country is being eaten away by another country, so if you can, I hope you can help me."


    Weiwei said with a serious face.


    "We are pirates, please stop joking and help you. What can we do to help you?"


    Sanji suddenly smiled and said mockingly.


    "Sanji is right. No matter what, we are still just pirates in the end. Besides, we have only known each other for a day!"


    Usopp also said with a confused look on his face.


    "Everyone, I believe you can do it with your strength. The country of basta was originally a very happy country, but since the intervention of another country, today''s basta has bepletely different. All the people People are already filled with resentment. They desperately want to have a free world and no longer want to be bound by this country. I sincerely hope you can help me once."


    Weiwei simply knelt down on the ground and kowtowed in the direction of Luffy with a pious look on her face.


    "Saving a country? It seems so interesting."


    Luffy said as he touched his head.


    "Really? Thank you so much!"


    Weiwei suddenly became excited when she heard Luffy say such words.


    But while she was excited, Nami looked at Luffy with a frown and asked, "Luffy, can''t you understand the origin and process of the matter? Don''t jump to conclusions about anything so quickly."


    "Well, you are right, Weiwei, what country did this to your country?"


    Luffy asked curiously.


    "The Tru Empire has upied our country eight years ago, and is still enving the people of our country. Many people have begun to be unable to bear such suffering. As of now, I have no choice but toe. , please help us."


    Weiwei said sincerely, but Robin just sat there looking at the other person with interest.


    Sanji also felt it was interesting at this moment. Robin looked at Vivi, but he looked at Robin.


    Sanji didn''t want to interrupt and ask any questions at the moment. Robin also wanted to know, what else would the princess of basta say next?


    "True Empire? Don''t worry, I will definitely help you fight them off."


    Luffy said brightly.


    "But why did they invade your country?"


    Usopp directly asked the key point of the matter, looking at Vivi who was kneeling there with a puzzled face.


    Obviously having not thought about this issue before, Weiwei was immediately speechless by this question.


    After staying for a while, Weiwei opened her mouth and said, "They are interested in the position of our country, basta, which can carry their country''smercial and economic operations, so they will use any means to upy the territory that belongs to basta." , and enve the people of our country..."


    Weiwei talked for nearly ten minutes from beginning to end, and even more smeared all the events in the Tru Empire, hoping to use this to directly get these people to help them achieve what they wanted.


    "What a hateful Toru Empire. I must defeat them all."


    When Luffy heard these words, his whole body felt a sense of justice, and he instantly became angry.


    "But Luffy, don''t you think the name of the Tohru Empire sounds familiar to you?"


    Usopp asked again curiously.


    "Have it?"


    "Of course there are some, okay! I always feel like I have heard the name of this country countless times somewhere, but I can''t remember it for a while."


    "Maybe, but I have never paid attention to these things. But no matter what country it is, if it has caused so much harm to other people''s countries, they should be made to pay the price."


    Luffy said fiercely, sitting on the deck, and even began to imagine how to beat others away.


    "Haven''t you heard of the Tru Empire?"


    Robin asked directly with a smile at this moment.


    The reason why I ask such a question is because I want to know how stupid this group of people are? He didn''t believe in people who inherited it. In the end, no one had ever heard of the existence of the Tru Empire.


    After all, most of these people are from the East China Sea. In his impression, there is no country in the East China Sea that has not cooperated with the Tru Empire.

 Chapter 382 The strength of the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 382 The strength of the Tru Empire</h4>


    Facing Robin''s sudden question, Sanji was probably the only one on the whole ship who suddenly shuddered, and then looked at Robin seriously.


    Others were still confused. Whether it was Luffy or Zoro, even Nami was curious as to why Robin would ask such a question?


    "What do you mean by that, Robin?"


    Luffy asked confused.


    "It seems that none of you know the Tru Empire very well. Why don''t you let me introduce you to the situation in this country?"


    Robin was still lying there and smiling slightly.


    "What can I introduce about the Tru Empire? They are just a demon, a demon that eats away at other countries."


    Upon hearing this, Weiwei seemed to be unable to sit still, and wanted to stop the other party from saying anything about the Tru Empire.


    It��s just that any argument she made now was a bit weak, and Robin wouldn��t pay attention to it. He just looked at the ignorant eyes of others and continued, ��The Tru Empire and any country you have seen. They are all different. This country is located on the South China Sea. To be precise, almost the entire South China Sea is controlled by this country.


    There are many reasons why it is different from other countries. First of all, the Tru Empire is a first-level member country of the World Government. It has the authority to travel to the Red Earth Continent, and can be like the country of basta without having to hand over any Gold in the sky, for this situation in the entire world, only these two countries can do it.


    But basta is different, and Princess Vivi must be rtively clear about this. "


    "A first-level member country of the World Government? What can this mean? If you do something wrong, you need to pay the price and humiliate other countries at will. This kind of thing must be beaten down."


    Luffy said righteously.


    "Then have you ever understood the strength of this country?"


    Sanji suddenly interjected and asked.


    "Sanji!!"


    Nami suddenly looked at him with a puzzled face. She didn''t know how to say the words that came to her mouth.


    "Before we do anything, we probably need to measure our own strength. You haven''t paid attention to the Tru Empire in the South China Sea, but I have. The old man Barati was born in that ce, so I don''t know anything about the Tru Empire in the South China Sea. Learned a lot.


    What ispletely different from your imagination is that anyone can crush all of us with just one finger. "


    Sanji said without hesitation.


    "Is it as exaggerated as you said?"


    Zoro sat there with a look of disdain, but it was not him who asked, but Usopp who was sitting next to him asked curiously.


    "For you, what do you think is the most powerful force in the world?"


    Robin asked, holding his head in his hands and looking at their expressions with a smile.


    "navy!!"


    Usopp spoke directly without thinking at all.


    "The most powerful force in the world right now, besides the World Government, is probably the Navy, right?"


    Nami said.


    "Princess Weiwei must be very clear about the situation of the Toru Empire. Let alone a pirate group like ours, even the most powerful pirate group in the world. Do you think they have the ability topete with Toru Empire?" Does the empirepete?"


    Robin asked looking at Princess Vivi.


    Weiwei looked a little pale as she sat there, mainly because every word spoken by Robin made her feel helpless to argue.


    It is true that people like Luffy may havee from a small ce and do not understand many things at all, but as the princess of basta, she knows many things that ordinary people cannot know.


    How powerful is the Tru Empire? There is no need to borate too much on this point. Weiwei has been the woman who has been listening to her since the rise of the Tru Empire until now.


    "Robin, you keep saying how powerful the Tohru Empire is. Where exactly is he so powerful?"


    Zoro suddenly asked.


    "Do you know how old Emperor Tru is? He has been to the East China Sea, and I have seen him once. Just in terms of age, among his peers, he can already crush the entire world."


    Sanji suddenly sighed and sat on the steps of the deck. Facing Zoro''s question, he spoke directly.


    The atmosphere at this moment seemed so awkward. Although the ship continued to sail on the sea, their inner moods had be extremelyplicated.


    Looking at these people, there were still many questions in his heart. Robin began to introduce and said, "The Tru Empire was just a small country from the beginning. But more than ten years ago, the Tru Empire ushered in the current young man. After the king was only 14 years old, the entire country began to develop at the fastest speed.


    Eight years ago, the Tru Empire had be the most powerful country in the Four Seas, and was known as the Four Emperors and One Emperor across the entire sea.


    Three years ago, Emperor Toru used his powerful strength in the new world to prove to everyone in the world the great strength of the Toru Empire.


    Today''s Toru Empire is something that even the Navy and the World Government need to be particrly wary of. It has a standing army of 500,000 people, and one single person can kill our entire pirate group instantly.


    In addition, there may be a huge deviation in the outside world''s perception of the Tru Empire. "


    "Is it really as exaggerated as you say?"


    Usopp asked with his voice already trembling.


    "What she said is true."


    Sanji interjected.


    "Luffy, we cannot fight against such a country!"


    Usopp said.


    "I don''t agree with enving the people of other countries. Even if the other party is powerful, no matter what, I will give him a punch."


    Luffy still said seriously.


    Maybe that''s what he thinks, or maybe it''s because this little guy has never experienced any hardships at all. After all, he has been destined to be a king-like existence since he was born. What can he do about such a thing? Such a big concept?


    Weiwei, who was already a little depressed, was so moved when she heard Luffy say these words again that she burst into tears.


    In this regard, Robin didn''t want to say anything anymore and could only watch the performance of these people quietly. Moreover, just relying on a Straw Hat Pirates to defeat the powerful Tohru Empire would probably create a storm. Sorry.


    Although no one tried to dissuade them from this matter, Princess Weiwei of basta continued to move forward with them, and her performance in the process was the same as that of their teammates. After all, in their current view, sailing on the sea is the most important thing. The whole meaning of life.

 Chapter 383 Zefa’s information

    <h4>Chapter 383 Zefa��s information</h4>


    In the Tru Empire.


    "How are things arranged?"


    In the pce, Chang Nuo faced the ss, looked around, put his hands behind his back, and asked in a calm tone.


    However, right behind him, there was a man wearing ck clothes with a me pattern on his face standing there. He stood there respectfully, and it seemed like he was reporting something.


    "Your Majesty the King, what you arranged before has been done. This guy Crocodile actually stayed on the seventh line we nned for the Grand Route. Now he has been sent to the prison in Impel Down. Everything is as nned. It��s done exactly the same.��


    The masked man standing behind said.


    "Well done. At least let me look forward to it. Will the future be as good as expected?"


    Chang Nuo stood there, still looking at the scene outside the ss, with a sinister smile on his lips.


    He wants to ensure that all developments are the same as in the plot. In this case, everything does not need to be paid too much attention to, and you only need to continue to follow the development of the plot.


    The chaotic timeline that appeared before can only be straightened out one by one. If not, there is no telling where theter timeline will develop, and it may even exceed his expectations.


    Chang Nuo likes to have all these things in his hands, but the key to being able to hold these things in his hands is to guide the protagonist group into all the ns on the sea.


    It''s just that so far, these things have not settled very well for the time being. The opening of big events is what he is most concerned about.


    "The next task for you is to closely monitor the situation on the Whitebeard Pirate Ship and notify me in time if anything happens."


    Chang Nuo turned his head and nced briefly at the masked man and said.


    "But Your Majesty the King, aren''t you and the Whitebeard Pirates...?"


    "There are so many problems. I have never thought about doing anything to this group of people. I just asked you to monitor the movements of the Whitebeard Pirates. But maybe things have happened now!"


    Changnuo said to himself, and suddenly he also thought that what should happen to the Whitebeard Pirates may have already happened, so there is no need for me to continue going.


    ording to the timeline, it will take at least about a year for the big event to start. During this year, some other changes may ur.


    "Forget it, let''s forget about the unnecessary things for now. Then just find a ce to stay in other sea areas. When the navy starts to recruit troops, you can go directly there. With your strength, you must be a general. It should be no problem. Good job Find a ce to create your own identity, there will probably be many ces where you will need it in the future.��


    Chang Nuo looked directly at the masked man and said with a slightly raised corner of his mouth.


    "Join the Navy? This..."


    "You have your own tasks and missions. Your identity has never been seen through by others, so you will exercise your most important side next. The country will face many tests in the future, and some things need to be solved in advance. You prepare yourself."


    Chang Nuo said with a regretful look on his face, and when he heard this, tears were streaming down his mask.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King, your subordinates will definitely do whatever you arrange!"


    The masked man bent down and said respectfully.


    "Go and find a ce that you think is more reasonable. Maybe the New World is also a good choice! I will inform you before we start."


    Chang Nuo raised his hand and patted the other party''s shoulder, saying with a smile.


    "Yes, my subordinates leave first!"


    The masked man said respectfully again, and then slowly began to walk outside.


    As for his identity, it is estimated that only Chang Nuo in the entire country knows it. His general-level strength is now felt everywhere.


    It''s just that this guy can be regarded as the hidden trump card in Chang Nuo''s hand, and his role will be crucial in the future, but for now, everything still seems to need to proceed normally.


    Shortly after the masked man left, another character was once again weed into the pce hall.


    Junhe walked over quickly with joy on his face. Just when he reached the door and was about to pause, Chang Nuo inside the room shouted directly, "Come in, if you have anything to say, just tell me." "


    "Haha! His Majesty the King has discovered it!"


    Junhe opened his mouth and said with a smile on his face. Changnuo was sitting on the sofa at the moment, with his thighs crossed and a newspaper in his hand.


    "Tell me, what''s the happy event?"


    Changnuo asked.


    "It''s not the task you arranged before. More than a year ago, you asked me to investigate the matter about the former Navy Headquarters General Zefa. Now I finally have some clues. A few days ago, someone sent news that he appeared in Beihai. , so I came here to inform you.��


    Junhe stood there and said.


    "Sit together for a while and have a good chat about what you know." Chang Nuo waved his hand and gestured towards Junhe.


    "The former Navy Headquarters General Zefa you mentioned is almost as old as Garp now. For such an old man, coupled with his disability, his strength is estimated to be on par with the Lieutenant General. We Why go to such great lengths to investigate him?��


    Junhe asked with some confusion.


    "The other party created the Sixth Navy skill. What do you think I should do with him?"


    Changnuo raised his head slightly and rolled his eyes at Junhe. After focusing his light on the newspaper again, Changnuo continued, "In terms of strength, he may be considered mediocre, but when ites to teaching ability, this There may not be many people in the world who are more powerful than him."


    Junhe and Changnuo grew up together. Although Junhe was several years older than his Majesty the King, and was not as respectful as he seemed in private, he still listened carefully to these words. .


    At the very beginning, he seemed to have heard His Majesty the King talk about the Six Types of Navy skills, but what he didn''t expect was that these skills were actually created by Zefa.


    Surprised or not, Junhe sat there and asked again with a calm face, "Now that we know where the other party is, what should we do next?"


    "Prepare a boat ande with me tomorrow to meet this old guy in the North Sea."


    Changnuo said.


    "This is no problem, but if we do it this way, will it dy our ns?"


    Junhe asked.

 Chapter 384 The coming war

    <h4>Chapter 384 Theing war</h4>


    After listening to what Junhe said, Chang Nuo stretched out his hands and leaned directly on the sofa.


    His eyes were closed tightly, as if he was thinking about something.


    After staying for a while, Chang Nuo sat up straight again, looked at Jun He in front of him, his expression was slightly serious, and then said, "Everything started to proceed simultaneously, and there is absolutely no room for anything in the n." changes, but the trip to the North Sea still has to go, and this time we have to resolve the dispute as quickly as possible.


    Leave the matters at hand to Abona first. During this period,municate with the Council in advance. The security and stability within the empire will also absolutely not allow any wavering. "


    "What kind of thing is it? That makes you so alert."


    Junhe couldn''t help the doubts in his heart and asked curiously.


    "I feel that there is going to be a war in this world. This will be an opportunity for our Tru Empire to rise!"


    Chang Nuo sighed slightly, and then said in a calm tone.


    "war!!"


    Although Junhe didn''t understand, he at least believed in the words of his Majesty the King.


    "Are you talking about the rtionship between Whitebeard and the Navy?"


    Junhe suddenly widened his eyes and asked again.


    In fact, all the high-level generals are aware of this major event that may happen. Xia Li''s arrival, with the help of her prophecy ability, has indeed put everything in the Tru Empire at the forefront.


    It''s just that some time ago, Xia Li predicted that there would be a war between Whitebeard and the Navy. Regarding such a thing, although they didn''t believe it at first, after all, the two major groups between Whitebeard and the Navy were obviously not as powerful as they were in front of them. You can start a fight as long as you see it, but in the past few years since Xia Li came here, every time he opened his mouth, he had reached a very precise level.


    The reason why Junhe was so surprised this time was because of the prophecy about the war between Whitebeard and the Navy. None of the people who got the news informed his Majesty the King, but now the other party can directly predict it. to what happens next.


    Although Chang Nuo had already told others that he understood prophecies as early as on Fish-Man Ind, most people just took it as a joke.


    Junhe stared at the king sitting opposite him with wide eyes, his face full of disbelief.


    "It seems that you all already know. In this case, the next thing should be much easier to do."


    "Your Majesty the King, don''t you also want to participate in the war between them?"


    Junhe was already so surprised that he was at a loss. This kind of thing was even more unbelievable to him.


    In the battle between the two major groups, ording to the wishes of His Majesty the King, the Tru Empire may also participate in the war.


    "Junhe, it''s not as serious as you think. At least the Tohru Empire will not directly join this war, but at least we must focus on participating. The old man with the white beard has already done so a few years ago. We made an agreement with him, so there are some things we still need to do."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "But Your Majesty, if you get involved in such a thing, will it have any impact on our country?"


    "I have already considered this. We are just participating in it and wrapping up the game at the end. But I have to say that the era of the Tru Empire wille in the future."


    Changnuo looked at Junhe with a thoughtful look and said.


    The amount of information received in one day was so great that Junhe no longer knew how to deal with what His Majesty the King said.


    But at least one thing can be confirmed now, that is, there will definitely be a huge war between the Whitebeard Pirates and the Navy. As the Toru Empire is currently the most powerful force in the world besides the Navy, once the navy''s capabilities are After weakening, this country can indeed rise as quickly as possible.


    Although such a thing sounded like a big risk, Junhe thought for a while and nodded seriously.


    "ording to what you and Xia Li said, this time shouldn''t be too long. I wonder how we should make arrangements next?"


    Junhe asked.


    "We will consider these thingster. You go down first to make arrangements for your trip to Beihai."


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes, waved his hand and said.


    Seeing that there was nothing to talk about next, Junhe could only follow Chang Nuo''s instructions and start going.


    The trip to the North Sea is now considered inevitable. The original navy general Zefa is indeed simr to what they analyzed in terms of strength. After all, he has reached this age and is considered to be on the verge of death, but at the same time, the significance of his existence must be said. There are still big ones.


    No matter what the oue of this trip, Chang Nuo wanted to see this guy. At least he could fight for what he had to fight for. After all, the strength of those under Zefa was not as simple as imagined.


    Although everything has been nned, it is still impossible to keep up with the changes. Besides, time hase to such a tight time now, and Chang Nuo does not want to let any idents happen.


    They won''t visit too many people on this trip. After all, they are just going to meet Zefa alone. I''m afraid they can only continue talking about the specific situation after meeting.


    However at this time.


    The Straw Hats, who haven''t received much attention, have arrived at the next ind.


    This ce, no matter from any angle, looks like a primitive ecological forest. Huge dinosaurs, trees, and saber-toothed tigers, all of which have been lost, can still be seen here.


    The trip to the small garden is destined to end exactly the same as before. There are no surprises in the situation here. Many things may be a little unexpected, but many times they will be forcibly corrected to the timeline.


    Everything went in an orderly manner, and Robin also followed Chang Nuo''s instructions before he came. Almost no matter what kind of situation he encountered, he maintained his original state and never took action once.


    The only difference from before is that in the future, we will not encounter the same situation as Crocodile in the original plot. Although many changes have taken ce in the plot line, the final ending will not be too much. deviation.


    Half a monthter.


    The Straw Hats have officially added another member, and the addition of Chopper has also meant that they have officially begun to move towards the original plot.

 Chapter 385 Things between the two countries

    <h4>Chapter 385 Things between the two countries</h4>


    The only thing that surprised them was the basta country they came to this time. As soon as they entered, everyone felt a huge difference.


    After entering the country of basta, what you see here has changed greatly from the original plot.


    At least these areas near the coastline have all been covered by big trees and green shades. Those dusty and sandy areas, at least in these areas near the coastline of basta, are simply impossible to reappear.


    "Weiwei, where do you n to disembark?"


    On the Meili, Nami had just finished washing her hair and came out, wearing a bikini suit, and asked Weiwei who was sitting on the deck drinking a drink.


    "Is Weiwei leaving?"


    Chopper, the new member who had just joined, was in a furry state. He was lying in the shade all hot, panting heavily and sticking out his long tongue. But after hearing these words, he sat up and looked at Nami and asked. road.


    "Weiwei is the princess of the country of basta. We have now arrived in the country of basta, so he will definitely get off the ship next."


    At this time, Sanji brought another drink simr to watermelon juice, walked up to Chopper and handed it to him, and then said leisurely.


    "Luffy, please stop thinking about it and help me! This country is not as happy as it seems on the surface! I beg you, please help me!"


    Now that they have arrived in the country of basta, Weiwei has almost stopped talking about other matters in the country along the way, but now she brings it up again.


    After all, they had been sailing for nearly a month, and they almost understood each other aspanions, so it was only at this time that she brought it up again.


    Luffy, who was already extremely hot, suddenly froze when he heard Weiwei say such words.


    Sanji and Zoro came here at the same time, looking at their captain with a little worry in their eyes. Even Nami stopped what she was doing and stopped talking.


    "Princess Weiwei, since you have raised such a question again, I want to ask you a question, is that okay?"


    Robin, who had been sitting there, put down the book in his hand and asked.


    "you say!"


    "What was basta like before the Tru Empire came?"


    "This? I was still young at that time, so I wasn''t particrly impressed by these things."


    After hearing what Vivi said, Robin stood up directly and stared at Luffy and Zoro.


    "Let''s not talk about what it was like to be Princess Vivi of basta before the True Empire came eight years ago. Do you still remember what it was like, but let me tell you now."


    Robin changed from his usual calmness and had a serious expression on his face, which even a few others were a little shocked by.


    Immediately afterwards, Robin once again said, "In basta eight years ago, the people of this country were almost living in dire straits. Not to mention having better ces to live like today, basta was full of The entire area is desert, and even drinking water is a rtively difficult task.


    Countless people starve to death every day. It is precisely because of this that Emperor Tru came to this country eight years ago and reached and signed an agreement with King Kobra of basta.


    The content of the agreement includes that the country of basta will providend free of charge for the Tru Empire to build factories. To this end, the Tru Empire needs to solve the problem of survival and employment of the people of basta.


    At the same time, additional conditions were attached. In the country of basta, the Tru Empire paid for the construction of infrastructure facilities, including environmental restoration, basic road construction, seawater desalination projects, etc.


    However, the agreement between the Tru Empire and the Tru Empire is that within five years, the basta country shall not collect taxes from any industry andmerce in the Tru Empire, and after five years, the actual equivalent tax amount will be deducted from the basis of the basta country. Project construction costs and tax fees are carried out every year in ordance with basta national tax standards, which is a 5% tax system.


    Until now, the Tru Empire has built more than 250 factories in basta, built more than 27,000 kilometers of infrastructure roads, and desalination projects have allowed people across the country to freely enjoy water resources. Supporting facilities and environmental restoration issues have turned the endless desert into an oasis.


    It''s just that you members of the basta royal family are jealous of the industries andmerce of the Tru Empire today, that''s why you made such a request.


    Let alone our group of pirates today, what do you think Luffy and the others can do against the Tohru Empire? Just relying on their strength, don''t tell me, you don''t know how powerful the Tru Empire is today?


    The people of this country are all living and working in peace and contentment now, what do your royal family members want? "


    Facing Robin''s questions, Weiwei, who was kneeling on the ground, didn''t know what kind of words to respond to.


    "how do you know?"


    In the end, all the words could only be turned into this question, but it was this question that instantly caused Weiwei''s image in other people''s hearts to copse.


    "Is it possible that what Robin said is true?"


    Chopper asked curiously.


    "That''s right, Weiwei, what exactly is going on?"


    Even Nami couldn''t help but ask.


    "She lied to you. We thought so at first, but now this country has be a colony of the Tru Empire, and the lives of the people are even more miserable."


    Weiwei roared loudly.


    "Whether it''s true or not, we''ll find out if we go over there and take a look. Anyway, they''ve already arrived in the country of basta. Let them feel the atmosphere of this country firsthand. I''m afraid no matter how much you talk about it, it will be more useful."


    Robin restrained his emotions and said with the corners of his mouth raised slightly.


    "That''s right, let''s go over and take a look."


    Usopp said with augh.


    "Weiwei, we have been partners along the way. If this country is really what you said, I will definitely help you without any hesitation, no matter how powerful the other party is."


    Luffy said with a serious expression, then turned around and sat on his sheep''s head, looking towards the sea in the distance.


    Everything cannot be decided by just one word from the person in front of them. Although Luffy usually has a carefree personality, he can handle many detailed matters quite well.

 Chapter 386 My brother

    <h4>Chapter 386 My brother</h4>


    In the end, Weiwei could only sit there helplessly, looking at Robin with some confusion. He couldn''t figure out how the other party knew about the situation between basta and the Tru Empire.


    This kind of thing should only be understood by people from the two countries, but her mistake was that from the beginning to now, she had never learned about the origins of the people on this ship.


    After entering the country of basta, the Meili docked directly at the Rapeseed Port, the country''srgest harbor in Shujing.


    It basically belongs to the most important industrial andmercial base in the entire country of basta. The actual control of this ce is now almost in the hands of the Tru Empire. Although it is within the borders of basta, their country does not Any right to operate any business or industry here.


    It is precisely because of this that the princes and ministers of basta hate the Tru Empire now.


    The main purpose is for profit, because in their view, the country''s infrastructure projects have now be a bottomless pit.


    Even though they have begun to collect taxes and fees rted to the Tru Empire, they discovered in the end that these are still only a drop in the bucket for infrastructure construction.


    If this situation continues to develop, then for the members of the basta royal family, they will only have to watch the Tru Empire make money in their own country.


    The port above Rapeseed Flowers has now be a modern city with many high-rise buildings, which is at least in sharp contrast to other areas of the country in basta.


    It has even be the economic lifeline center of the entire country. The daily ie here is almost equal to that of the entire country, which is much higher than the annual tax revenue of the entire country.


    A group of people walked vigorously on the ground made of smooth rocks. There was nondscape on both sides, and all there were endless shops. Along the way, various hawking sounds continued.


    "Luffy, I think the people in this country live a very good life. At least it''s many times better than where we are."


    Usopp said as he walked away.


    In fact, Luffy himself was watching. After all, everything he saw in front of him had refreshed his outlook on life. Living in this ce was already everyone''s ideal paradise, with wide streets on both sides and dense crowds of people strolling back and forth. No matter where you came from, From this perspective, it doesn''t look like he is being oppressed.


    Weiwei walked at the back alone, her head lowered, and she didn''t say anything from beginning to end.


    In fact, she is the one who knows best. After all, the only people who are truly oppressed and dissatisfied in this country are the princes, ministers and their royal family members. She is jealous of everything the Tru Empire has done in this country, but with the ability of her own country, There is nothing to do.


    "Luffy, you go and take a good look first. I want to take a stroll around this street. I feel like I can buy a lot of clothes again."


    Nami''s eyes began to glow golden, and any nearby shops looked so tall in his eyes.


    "I''ll go shopping by myself too!"


    Sanji said.


    "Robin, do you want to go shopping together?"


    Nami took two steps forward, then turned her head and looked at Robin walking behind alone and shouted.


    "sure!"


    Robin smiled slightly, then turned around and followed the pace directly ahead.


    "I...I''d better go buy some food with Sanji."


    Usopp looked at the slightly awkward atmosphere and instantly started running in the direction Sanji left.


    Luffy walked all the way. Although he looked at the surrounding situation with curious eyes, his heart was also full of many questions. After all, the current basta country is not at all like what Weiwei who was following behind said. .


    "Hey, Luffy..."


    Everything was still such a coincidence, as if it was already destined.


    While Luffy was walking forward with Zoro, a high-pitched voice came over.


    Following the sound, Zoro asked curiously, "Luffy, who is that guy who looks so mean?"


    "My brother!"


    Luffy said with a grin, and the next second he quickly rushed in the direction of Ace.


    "Ace..."


    Luffy shouted as he ran.


    "Bang...!!!!"


    But before he could run over, a person rushed out from nowhere and stepped on Luffy''s face. Without any precautions, Luffy was even kicked away by the kick. A distance of more than ten meters.


    "Straw Hat, I finally found you."


    Before Luffy could react, the figure of the person who kicked him had already appeared.


    This guy is a man with two cigars in his mouth, white hair, wearing a navy justice robe, and smelling of smoke.


    Behind him was a young beauty wearing sses, a long knife hanging on her waist, and also wearing a navy justice robe.


    "Why did you chase this guy here?"


    Zoro looked helpless, and the long knife in his hand was already ready to be drawn out to fight.


    "Luffy, are you okay?"


    Ace hurriedly ran over, because at this time, Luffy''s entire head had been inserted under the stone b, and the ground had even been cracked by this kick.


    "Colonel Smoker, should we capture him directly here?"


    This white-haired man''s name is Smoker, the naval leader of Rogue Town. He ran such a long distance just to catch this pirate who slipped away from under his nose.


    Although the kick had been carried out, the little beauty behind Smoker opened her mouth and asked with some doubts.


    These rookies who have just arrived at the Grand Line do not know the rules of thisnd of rape flowers in what is now the country of basta, but they have been sailing on the sea as navies, so they naturally know what is going on here.


    "Dasi Qi, order the navy we brought here to guard the port outside. The Straw Hat guy will definitely not let him escape this time."


    Smoker said calmly while smoking a cigarette.


    He had no intention of taking Luffy away right here.


    "You bastard!"


    After Luffy pulled his head out of the ground with difficulty, he waspletely on the verge of anger. He turned and cursed loudly at Smoker who was standing there smoking a cigarette.


    But what can he do now? Knowing that he was no match for this smoke man, when he actually stood up, he had already started thinking about how to leave this ce quickly.


    "By the way, Ace, why are you here?"


    Luffy scolded Smoker angrily and then turned to look at Ace with a puzzled look on his face.

 Chapter 387 Others under intimidation

    <h4>Chapter 387 Others under intimidation</h4>


    Arge number of people have begun to watch on the entire street, all watching this wonderful performance in front of them.


    Ace looked helpless, looking at Luffy now, sizing him up and saying, "Now is the time to discuss these things, first tell me who this guy is?"


    The person Ace was talking about was Smoker standing over there, staring at the two of them.


    "Oh, you mean them? This is Smoke Man, the admiral of Rogge Town. He''s so powerful!"


    Luffy said with a look of admiration.


    "Whoever he is now, it''s better for us to leave as soon as possible."


    Ace said with a smile.


    "Straw Hat Boy, I''ll be waiting for you outside. As soon as I let you leave here, I will definitely let you enter Impel Down City''s prison."


    Smoker said with gritted teeth while smoking a cigarette.


    "Then wait until you catch me!"


    Luffy bared two rows of teeth and looked at Smoker with a smile on his face. Did he not care about the other person''s threatening words?


    Smoker also frowned, what can he do now? All he can do is watch the other person''s back as he leaves.


    "Colonel Smoker, why don''t we take this opportunity to take down the Straw Hat boy directly?"


    Dasqi asked with some confusion.


    After all, judging from the situation just now, Smoker could indeed catch Luffy in an instant, but in the end he just stood here without taking any action and said some threatening words. What effect could it have? ?


    Smoker sighed slightly and said, "You think I don''t want to take action? Standing next to him is Fire Fist Ace of the Whitebeard Pirates. Apart from this, do you think you can take action if you stay here? of?"


    "Okay, I get it now."


    Dasqi pushed up her sses frame a little aggrievedly, lowered her head and said awkwardly.


    Princess Weiwei of basta still followed Luffy and started to move forward with Ace. Zoro also followed behind, but he kept looking at Ace.


    "Luffy, I didn''t expect to meet you here. It''s really surprising."


    Ace hugged Luffy''s shoulders as he walked, his arms hugged his neck tightly, and said with a smile on his face.


    "I didn''t expect to meet you here. It''s really unexpected."


    Luffy said with the sameugh.


    "I''ll take you to the front to have something to eat first. Originally I just wanted to stay here for a day, but after seeing your reward orderst time, I guessed that your route might pass through basta, so I''m here I��ve been waiting here for three days.��


    Ace said with a smile.


    "Really? But what are you doing in basta?"


    Luffy asked.


    "I am now the captain of the second division of the New World Yonko Whitebeard Pirates. There is a guy there who betrayed the pirates. I am here to find him and bring him back."


    "Well~, it sounds like it sounds very powerful, but let''s not talk about it now. I will have a good drinkter."


    Luffy said with a grin.


    "Luffy, is this really appropriate for us? After all, that guy Smoker has already chased us here!"


    Zoro stood behind, listening to the conversation between the two, and quickly reminded him.


    "Luffy, this should be your teammate, right?"


    Ace released his hold on Luffy''s shoulders, turned to look at the green-haired Zoro, and then asked Luffy.


    "Well, this is the swordsman on our ship."


    "Hello, it was really helpful along the way. Please pay attention to my younger brother. He usually does things a little unreliably, which makes you suffer."


    Ace said to Zoro and bowed down politely.


    Seeing this scene, Zoro raised his hands and didn''t know what to do. Facing such a polite Ace, Zoro really couldn''t understand what the rtionship between them was.


    "Well~, Ace, there are still several friends on our boat now, but they have all gone to buy other things. After dinner, they muste to our boat to sit for a while, and I will give you a good introduction then. one time."


    Luffy said with a smile.


    "That''s certainly possible."


    "With such a polite person, is it possible that he is really a brother?"


    Zoro stood there and stared nkly at the polite Ace. It was not that he had never heard of it when he went to sea with Luffy before.


    But when he saw the real person today, he was really shocked. It was really hard to imagine that such a person and his captain could actually be brothers?


    "By the way, Luffy, is this also yourpanion on the ship?"


    Ace asked, staring at Vivi in ??confusion.


    The main reason is because he has felt that the rtionship between Weiwei, Luffy and Zoro is not like that between partners.


    "This is Princess Weiwei of basta. She should be considered half of ourpanions now."


    Luffy scratched his head, thought for a moment and said.


    "The princess of basta? It''s really unimaginable."


    Ace said in surprise.


    "By the way, why did you just say that you don''t have to worry about staying here no matter what the situation is? That guy Smoker is staying outside, and he is so powerful that we can''t touch each other at all."


    Zoro asked, looking at Ace with some confusion.


    "He is a natural ability fruit. You are definitely not his opponent now. The reason why I say you don''t have to worry is that the Land of Rapeseed Flowers is the industrial andmercial center of the Tru Empire in basta. Anyone is wee here. , but no conflict is allowed in thend of rapeseed flowers, otherwise the responsible party wille and arrest both parties."


    Ace said.


    "True Empire? Isn''t this the country you were talking about, Weiwei?"


    Luffy asked, turning towards Vivi.


    "What''s wrong?"


    Before Vivi could say anything, Ace looked directly at Luffy and asked with a dull look on his face.


    "You are right. This is the Tru Empire I mentioned. It is a country that can make rules at will in our country of basta."


    Weiwei opened her mouth and said.


    "But I think this is good? At least it not only ensures the safety of the people, but also prevents pirates from entering the country of basta."


    Zoro said.


    Ace stood there and watched the conversation between the few people, with confusion on his face, not understanding what they weremunicating with at all.


    But this kind of thing is not the most important thing now. The important thing is that he met his younger brother. Next, he needs to quickly find a nice ce to have a good meal and two drinks. As for the rest, we can only talk about itter.

 Chapter 388 National conditions in the eyes of outsiders

    <h4>Chapter 388 National conditions in the eyes of outsiders</h4>


    The four of them were walking and chatting, and only Weiwei, who was following behind, felt veryplicated.


    After a while, Ace brought Luffy and Zoro to the entrance of a hotel. The hotel was a three-story building structure, but both the facade and the outer decoration looked quite exquisite.


    Moreover, the outer circle is entirely made of ss. In this situation, in the pirate world, such a hotel is simply the ultimate luxury.


    "Luffy, I chose to be here today. It felt pretty goodst time."


    Ace said with a smile on his lips.


    "It''s okay, you can do whatever you want."


    Luffy didn''t refuse and just followed in.


    At this time, there were not many people in the hotel, but the overall decoration did look quite luxurious.


    After a while, the food was served, and at first, the two of them almost looked like they were devouring it.


    After eating for a while, Luffy leaned back on his chair with some satisfaction, looked at the food in front of him and said, "I didn''t expect the food here tastes really good."


    "right!!"


    Ace looked at Luffy''s expression seriously, with a satisfied smile on his face as well.


    "These are just hypocritical appearances!"


    Weiwei sat there and didn''t actually move her chopsticks from beginning to end, and she was still muttering in a low voice.


    "I think the people here live a pretty good life, why would you say something like that?"


    Zoro asked doubtfully.


    "what''s going on?"


    Ace had already felt that something was wrong from the very beginning. When he heard these words, he was even more sure that he was not wrong. In order to prevent his younger brother from causing any big trouble, his eating-loving expression instantly froze there and asked seriously. Said Sauron.


    "Ace, Weiwei said that the Tru Empire enved the people of basta and forcibly upied this country''s territory. Originally we..."


    "Shut up, Luffy!"


    Before Luffy could finish speaking, Ace instantly felt furious. He frowned and whispered angrily at what Luffy was going to say next.


    As if he had sensed something was wrong, Zoro''s brows began to frown, and the expression on his face suddenly became serious.


    He is not like Luffy, a big brother. Although he usually only shows the potential of dementia, sometimes when ites to the subtleties of some things, Zoro still handles them well.


    When he saw Ace''s current expression, he seemed to have sensed that the essence of the matter was different.


    "Luffy, do you know what the Tohru Empire means today?"


    Ace calmed down his anger and turned into a serious and calm question.


    "I heard Robin say that the Tru Empire seems to be very powerful?"


    Luffy still grinned and spoke as if he didn''t take this matter seriously at all.


    "The Tru Empire is not something you and I can afford to offend. No matter what happens, even if this thing is true, it is definitely not something you can get involved in."


    Ace said.


    "Is the Tru Empire really as powerful as you say?"


    Zoro asked in shock.


    Although they had heard Robin introduce the situation of the Tru Empire before, none of them seemed to take it seriously. After all, these people had nevere into contact with the major forces in this world before. .


    But this moment ispletely different.


    "Ace, do you know this Tru Empire?"


    Luffy also began to suppress the smile on his face, and then asked with full seriousness.


    "I have been in contact with it. Three years ago, I went to the Tru Empire. It was so powerful that it was almost despairing!"


    "I see! It doesn''t have much to do with me anyway. After all, I am the man who will be the Pirate King in the future."


    Luffy then said with a sudden grin.


    "This guy!!"


    Ace stared at his younger brother speechlessly.


    at the same time.


    At this moment, in another ce in thend of rapeseed flowers, Smoker and Dasqi were also staying in other restaurants, but there were several navy soldiers standing outside.


    Smoker sat here with a calm expression, continuing to smoke his big cigar, and looking at the surrounding environment with a calm expression on his face.


    However, as Dasqi who came out with him, she was not as calm as expected.


    "Colonel Smoker, can you tell me about the situation here?"


    Dasqi sat upright and asked seriously.


    "What do you want to know?"


    "Why can''t the navy capture pirates directly here?"


    "In order to prevent conflicts, the Navy does not want anything to happen with the Tru Empire, so within the scope of their jurisdiction, no one from the Navy is allowed to carry out forceful arrests in these areas!"


    Smoker blew out a smoke ring and said.


    He is not dissatisfied with this system. He just said this to show his feelings.


    Facing this area, he showed a lot of helplessness on his face. Even if the pirates were in front of him, in the end he couldn''t directly arrest him.


    Dasqi seemed to understand something from this, but then she still asked weakly, "Isn''t this the country of basta?"


    "What basta? The Tru Empire began toy out everything here seven or eight years ago. Do you think basta can still manage thend of rape flowers at this moment? Everyone knows it well. This ce has long been in the hands of the Tru Empire throughmercial means. Although it still belongs to basta on the surface, and both parties are in a peaceful process, there are some things that only their own country knows. That��s all.��


    Smoker said with a mocking smile of disdain.


    "Doesn''t that mean that the Tru Empire is going too far to take over other countries'' territories?"


    "Dasqi, what you said is exactly the opposite. Apart from the dissatisfaction of the basta royal family and the princes and ministers regarding this matter, have you ever heard of anyints from the people of basta?


    After the Tru Empire came to basta, it not only changed the country''s environment and climate, but everything you see now is actually the masterpiece of this country.


    The country of basta was once a deste desert country. In recent years, the miracles created by the Tru Empire actually shocked everyone who had been to the country of basta.


    After they came here, they not only solved the survival problems of the people of basta, but alsopletely improved their quality of life. At present, the princes and ministers of basta are not satisfied with the status quo. In fact, it is nothing more than If they want to directly take over everything belonging to the Tru Empire in the country of basta, it''s just because they don''t have enough strength. "


    Smoker said analytically.


    "So powerful!!"


    Dasqi said in shock.

 Chapter 389 Weiwei’s request

    <h4>Chapter 389 Weiwei��s request</h4>


    She has never thought about these problems. Although she is a member of the navy, inparison, she has always been in the East China Sea.


    This woman usually rarely cares about other things except practicing swordsmanship, so for the Utru Empire, she has heard of his name.


    Unexpectedly, he learned so much this time. Dasqi was quite fond of the Tru Empire for a while.


    "Colonel Smoker, but what does this have to do with our navy''s worries about conflict with the Tru Empire?"


    "That''s because the Tru Empire once dered war on the navy!"


    Smoker said lightly.


    ��Nani??????��


    Dasqi stood up suddenly, feelingpletely unbelievable.


    In her opinion, the Navy is definitely the most powerful force in this world. Who would have thought that someone would dare to challenge the Navy?


    "What are you saying you are so excited about? Do you think that only the navy is stronger in this world? Wait until you truly see how powerful the Tru Empire is before you say such things."


    Smoker said disdainfully.


    "oh!!"


    Dasqi sat down slowly. She had only heard a little bit about such a big force, and she had almost no understanding of more detailed things.


    Luffy''s side.


    "What are you talking about? The most powerful swordsman in the world may exist in the Toru Empire?"


    Zoro stood up suddenly and looked at Ace in disbelief and asked.


    "Emperor Toru is not only a Devil Fruit user, he is also at the top of the world in terms of swordsmanship. The Toru Empire also has General Abona, who is also a great swordsman. "


    Ace said with a smile.


    "Really!! No wonder when I met Hawkeye, he said that he was not the most powerful being in the world. Now it seems that he is probably not lying!"


    Zoro said with some shock. For him, what he pursues is the position of the world''s greatest swordsman. Now he has just changed his goal and direction.


    "Is it possible that because they are strong, they can invade other countries wantonly?"


    Weiwei''s eyes were almost filled with tears, and she asked with a somewhat desperate expression.


    "We don''t know about other things about your country, and of course we don''t want to know. The Tru Empire will never be as simple as you think. Although my brother is rtively demented, please don''t hurt him in this way. .��


    Ace still maintained a smile, narrowed his eyes slightly and looked at Weiwei and said.


    "Is there no other way to help Weiwei?"


    Luffy asked.


    "The situation in basta is veryplicated. Maybe I can ask about it when I have the chance to see Emperor Tru."


    Ace said.


    "All right!"


    Luffy said, then turned his eyes to Weiwei, looked at her and said seriously again, "I''m sorry, maybe I really can''t help you this time?"


    "I knew you were all the same kind of people!"


    Weiwei finally shed tears at this moment, and then she stood up and left the ce.


    She didn''t even turn around again, and disappeared directly from the sight of the three people.


    Ace sat there, looking at the other person''s back quietly. After a while, he turned to look at Luffy, continued to smile and said, "You must not get involved in the affairs of basta!"


    "Is the Tru Empire really as scary as you say?"


    Luffy asked confused.


    "More than just terrifying, when you reach the end with your own strength, you will be able to clearly understand what kind of behemoth the Tru Empire is."


    Ace said to Luffy with a gentle smile on his face.


    He didn''t want his brother to get involved in this kind of thing. Although he didn''t know much about the country of basta, at least he knew enough about the Tru Empire.


    No matter what mentality the other party had in inviting Luffy to participate in the political affairs of the country of basta, what greeted them in the end was most likely the anger from the Tru Empire.


    "Let''s not talk about those things for now. We have known each other for so long, and I still don''t know how you came to the country of basta?"


    Luffy asked.


    "Didn''t I tell you before? I forgot about it so quickly, but it''s good to see you this time."


    Ace said with a smile, and then asked again, "How long do you n to stay here? After the record pointer is maized, do you still have to wander around for a while?"


    "It''s not easy to judge the time now, at least it will definitely need to wait until the record pointer is full of maism. I originally wanted to take a look at the Tru Empire that Weiwei said when I came here, but now after what you said, I don''t want to Now you know who to trust.��


    "The world''s greatest swordsman really makes people look forward to it."


    As soon as Luffy finished speaking, Zoro said with excitement.


    "What''s wrong with you two? If I have time in the future, I will take you to the Tru Empire to see it."


    Ace said with a smile.


    "So how long do you n to stay here?"


    Luffy asked suddenly curious.


    "Stay here until you leave. After all, there is a navy waiting for you outside. That guy is not something you can deal with now."


    Ace said.


    "By the way, I''ve been wanting to ask since just now, why doesn''t Smog dare to take action here?"


    Zoro suddenly asked doubtfully.


    "There is nothing iprehensible. The main reason is that the Navy does not want any conflict with the Tru Empire, so within the jurisdiction of the Tru Empire, they do not want to create any disputes!"


    Ace said with a slight smile.


    "I see. I didn''t expect the Tru Empire to be so powerful. If I have a chance, I really want to see it."


    Luffy said.


    "Then you can''t go. The Tru Empire is different from other countries. This is a ce that has never weed pirates. Even if you fly the pirate g and enter the South China Sea area, you may be directly obliterated by others, unless you are in special circumstances. If necessary, please report in advance, otherwise it will be really difficult to get close to this ce.��


    Ace said that the most important thing was the situation he encountered when he went to the Tru Empire before.


    If it weren''t for Marco''s leadership, I''m afraid he wouldn''t even know what the Tru Empire looked like.


    But anyone who has been to this country can deeply feel the happiness belonging to the people of other countries. All of this is indeed deeply touching.

 Chapter 390 Golden Lion Shiji

    <h4>Chapter 390 Golden Lion Shiji</h4>


    Another corner of the pirate world.


    At the foot of the Upside Down Mountain, a huge ship that looked like a merchant ship slowly descended from the Upside Down Mountain.


    Everything seemed so casual and felt like it had been done many times before.


    However, the people on this ship were different at the moment. Chang Nuo stood at the bow of the ship and could directly enter the North Sea after crossing the upside down mountain.


    In such arge North Sea area, it is a bit difficult to find someone based on just some information.


    "Junhe, can you determine the specific location of Zefa and his group?"


    Changnuo stood on the deck, looked into the distance, and asked Junhe behind him.


    "Your Majesty, it''s hard to confirm the specific location now. But thest time the news came back, Zefa and the others should be not far from the Kingdom of Dura in the North Sea. I wonder if they will still be there after we arrive?"


    Junhe said.


    "You take them and continue heading towards the North Sea. I will leave beforehand. If you find Zefa in advance, just call me and let me know."


    Chang Nuo said, before Junhe opened his mouth to say anything, he hadpletely disappeared in the next second.


    Junhe looked confused. His Majesty the King left immediately. The key was that the other party didn''t even take away the phone bug, so how should he contact him then?


    But now that everything has happened, Junhe could only sigh, and then shouted to the people behind him, "Move towards the North Sea Dura Kingdom."


    The main reason why Chang Nuo left was because he encountered something interesting.


    That is to say, he did not expect that he would cross the Upside Down Mountain without any problems, and in the end he would actually sense that there would be a character that surprised him.


    When Chang Nuo appeared again, he was alreadypletely on a floating continent. The surrounding area waspletely covered by woods, and the sea could not even be seen below.


    "It''s really surprising. I didn''t expect to meet the golden lion so quickly?"


    Chang Nuo stood at the edge, stretched his head and looked down, and said with a slight smile on his lips.


    But the moment he appeared, there were already more than a dozen unknown creatures appearing around him. They were said to be wolves, but the shapes in front of them looked a bit different, but all of them had red eyes and grinning teeth. Not even afraid of anyone around him.


    "It seems that this old man is the only one who cane up with such boring things."


    Chang Nuo looked at these dozen wolf-like creatures with a mocking smile on his lips, and continued walking in the direction of these creatures without paying any attention to them.


    But they seemed to be fixed in ce, still maintaining the image of grinning teeth and red eyes. But when Chang Nuo walked past their bodies, these things seemed to be like sculptures that had been pieced together over time. status.


    The entire floating ind is not very big, but it is not very small inparison. ording to the current height, it is at least equivalent to being suspended above 8km. If it were not for inadvertently sensing anomalies in the sky, it would have been long. Nuo probably didn''t know when he saw this guy.


    On this suspended ind, the dense woods are filled with countless of the creatures we just encountered. Each one maintains almost the same image. They all have red eyes and grinning teeth. And without any need to say anything, they have already exploded. attack ability.


    For ordinary people or rtively weak people, this kind of creature can indeed make people feel fearful and helpless, but for the top powerhouses in the world, these things are exactly the same as building ants at the feet of giants. Same.


    However, in a huge room at the center of the ind, there was a man with long golden hair sitting there who had lost both legs.


    The golden lion''s eyes were always looking into the distance. He originally wanted toe to the East China Sea to settle matters, but he didn''t expect that a person who surprised him would actuallye.


    At this moment, Golden Lion Shi Ji''s life is probably no longer as magnificent as it was decades ago. What''s left is just a pair of rtively dead eyes. At this moment, he has long lost any desire to fight. The top powerhouse at this moment is just like a tiger with its teeth pulled out.


    Even though he possesses a powerful sense of domineering power, the Golden Lion sensed Chang Nuo''s figure as soon as hended on his territory.


    Although he was quite surprised, in the end he did not move at all and continued to sit here, as if waiting for the judgment of fate.


    In just a few minutes, Chang Nuo had already appeared outside the house. He stood there quietly without taking a step forward, looking at the situation in this area with a stern gaze.


    Both of them can sense each other''s existence, and even know each other''s identity without saying anything. For them, the only way to meet is the door in front of them.


    "Tell me about what you have been pursuing your whole life. You probably don''t even know what you are pursuing."


    Chang Nuo stood at the door and spoke softly. He hadn''t seen him for a long time and directly opened the door in front of him.


    However, the golden lion was waiting inside the room at the moment. There was no hint of anxiety on his expression, and his eyes were slightly closed, as if he was thinking about something.


    The ind suspended in the sky is still moving towards the East China Sea. You can''t even hear the sound of wind here, and the white clouds are floating under your feet at this moment.


    After another stalemate for nearly ten minutes, Chang Nuo still had no idea of ??opening the door in front of him, but the golden lion sitting in the room seemed a little impatient.


    He sat on the bench in the center and could only sigh helplessly, then stretched his right hand forward.


    Shit, the door at the door slowly opened a gap. Until the moment when the entire door was finally opened, the two people were looking at each other from a distance of more than ten meters.


    "Why don''t you stay in your country ande to my ce?"


    The golden lion asked calmly.


    "I just want to see what you are like as a once-famous figure on the sea?"


    "Now that people have seen it, how does it feel to make an impression on you?"


    "It''s okay, but it''s very different from what I imagined. In my mind, the Golden Lion should be more powerful and domineering, not the old guy in front of me."


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly and looked calmly at the golden lion sitting there in front of him.

 Chapter 391 Shi Ji’s Resentment

    <h4>Chapter 391 Shi Ji��s Resentment</h4>


    The Golden Lion didn''t have any special expression when he heard this. He was still sitting there with a calm expression.


    Facing Chang Nuo''s words, after staying for a while, the golden lion just smiled slightly, perhaps mocking his own ipetence.


    After a while, he slowly floated up, and the lower half of his body had beenpletely reced by two swords.


    In this way, he slowly floated to two or three meters in front of Chang Nuo, carefully looked at the other party''s appearance, and then slowly began to say, "When I first heard about you, if I remember correctly, it should be Six years ago, I have to say that your achievements at your age really surprised me.


    Over the past few decades, there have been more and more people wandering on the sea, but what really makes me take a high look is that you are the only one in this world who can develop a small ce to arge scale by yourself. At this level, you are indeed worthy of admiration. "


    "Faced with what you said, I don''t know whether I should be happy or me myself. I never thought that the first person to praise me in front of me would be a pirate, but it doesn''t matter, but I have always The golden lion that countless people yearned for in the past has turned into what it is now. For a dead person, he did not hesitate to use such an extreme method to take revenge on Donghai.


    I have been to the end of this world and have seen the content above, but have you ever thought about why Roger, as the Pirate King, was voluntarily captured by the navy in the end? And why are you willing to use your own death to affect an era of great pirates? "


    "He''s always been like this. The so-called Pirate King''s treasure shouldn''t be as beautiful as imagined, right?"


    The golden lion asked with a smile.


    "Perhaps you can take a look when you have time, but judging from your current state, you have no idea in this regard. How much strength can you still retain in your dying years? I''m afraid you should not be a lieutenant general even if you try your best. Opponent? How can we still control the wind and rain on this sea like before? "


    Changnuo asked.


    "You are right. I have indeed lost all my fighting spirit, and my strength is very different from before. After I came out of Impel City Prison, I have been living for decades. Now I don''t want to do any escaping anymore. It''s just that I just want to bring my life to a close."


    Chang Nuo looked at the golden lion who now had a weathered look on his face. This guy no longer had any of his former domineering power, and all that was left was resentment.


    The conversation between the two people seemed to have been familiar to each other for many years. Theymunicated with each other as if they were friends, and there were not many unexpected expressions on each other''s expressions.


    It is indeed rare to see such a scene at an altitude of almost 10,000 meters.


    "I don''t think the former overlord should hide himself in such a lonely state. There is still a chance for your legs to recover. I wonder if you are interested in fighting for the next era?"


    "I''m old. As you said, the Golden Lion used to be a famous being in the sea, but now I am just an old man who is dying. In terms of strength, I am not as good as before. I am afraid that the new ones who are going to sea now Each of the little guys should be able to crush me under their feet. I no longer want to see such a life. Under such circumstances, sometimes disappearing lonely may also be a good choice."


    The golden lion said with a self-deprecating smile.


    It''s not that Chang Nuo doesn''t understand what the other person is thinking at the moment. For a man who has stood at the top of this world for most of his life, to end up like this is probably not what he wants to see.


    "You are so lonely, and being in the East China Sea is not a good choice. Why don''t youe with me and go to the North Sea? Old guy Zefa probably thinks the same as you. Isn''t it nice for two people to get to know each other? OK."


    Chang Nuo also sat there directly in the air, looking at the golden lion in front of him with interest and asked.


    "It seems to be as I guessed. I had thought before about when you, the little guy, would attack that old guy Zefa, and now it seems that it is indeed the case."


    The golden lion said with a smile.


    "I''m not as unbearable as you think. Although I really want to use Zefa, this guy''s deep-rooted thoughts cannot be changed easily. Since you have already begun to want to die, why don''t you go on a glorious journey? Will you let yourself go from this sea?"


    "It''s true, my biggest pursuit in life is to beat Roger once, but in the end he actually died before me. Old guy Zefa, we have known each other for a lifetime, maybe there really is a chance. Maybe it��s just like you said.��


    The Golden Lion thought for a moment, and although he was a little reluctant in his words, he still epted Chang Nuo''s suggestion.


    For these big pirates who once roamed the sea, each of them had the same thoughts before they died. No one was willing to lie in bed alone and wait for death. All they could do was to Find a suitable opponent and let yourself end peacefully.


    Golden Lion himself also had this idea, but when he was in his twilight years, his strength was already so weak that the so-called strong man could knock him down in one breath. Even though he was a little unwilling, he still wanted to The most appropriate way to end one''s life.


    Nowadays, it is estimated that no one can stop the Golden Lion guy from thinking about his demise. Everyone has reached this point. He has lost all his pursuits. The only thing Changnuo can do now is to use thest life of the Golden Lion toplete himself. Just some ns.


    A man who can roam the sea and is the only man who escaped from Impel Down City Prison, facing the current Emperor Tru''s thoughts, can actually feel it at the first nce. The reason why there is no The reason for rejecting the other party''s request was mainly because the ideas put forward by Chang Nuo were indeed too much for Golden Lion to refuse.


    Compared with such an indifferent ending, perhaps a battle with the former navy admiral Zefa would be more substantial.


    It only took an hour to get here. With just a few ordinary words, he was able to make the once-famous Golden Lion do what he wanted him to do. Chang Nuo was probably considered the best person in history. The first person.

 Chapter 392 The end of the pursuit of the strong

    <h4>Chapter 392 The end of the pursuit of the strong</h4>


    Although Golden Lion had epted this suggestion, he did not start setting off immediately. The entire ind suspended in mid-air continued to move in the direction of the East China Sea.


    But after a while, the golden lion looked at Chang Nuo who was sitting there with some curiosity and asked, "Boy Tru, tell me, you should be considered the most prestigious being in the sea now. If you and I are together, Station, even if you die here, it shouldn''t be worse than falling in the hands of that old guy Zefa, right?"


    "Don''t, don''t, don''t! Don''t ever say such things. You all belong to the strong men of the previous era. It was up to you to solve the problems in the previous era. I have no interest in this matter at all. .��


    Chang Nuo quickly refused and waved, smiling.


    At the same time, I also don��t understand what the brain circuit of this guy Golden Lion is thinking. Is it possible that he often stays alone in the air, causing his brain to be a little stupid?


    "Hahahahaha~!!"


    Golden Lion suddenlyughed, and his face suddenly turned serious. Two swords were tied directly to his legs. It seemed that without Chang Nuo paying any attention, the old guy instantly A kick goes up.


    Even though it is a camel that is almost dying of weight, Golden Lion''s camel is much bigger than a horse.


    The powerful attack instantly emitted a de light, and at such a close range, it flew directly in the direction of Chang Nuo''s neck.


    Even though there was only a distance of two or three meters, Chang Nuo still sat there in the air, facing the attack of the old guy Golden Lion, the expression on his face did not even change at all.


    The whole person was still sitting there leisurely, but the next second a Void Throne began to appear under the body. The second before the attack arrived, Chang Nuo just flicked his fingers in the direction of the golden lion, and then he A blue-white barrier instantly appeared in front of the whole person. The lion''s handunched an attack. The moment it hit the barrier, such a sharp attack seemed to cut directly into the water the next second. Such an attack Not even the slightest ripple appeared.


    Chang Nuo sat there and just tapped his fingers. Myopically, he turned around in a circle. The moment hended, he kicked out a sh with his other leg again, but the same thing happened. The action will lead to the same result in the end.


    Golden Lion saw that such an attack had no effect on the opponent, and could not even make the opponent move his body. Then, he started to use the fruit power with a serious look on his face.


    But the time hase, how could Chang Nuo let him continue like this?


    "Okay! It''s almost time to test."


    Chang Nuo said calmly, but in the next second, powerful Overlord Haki burst out from his body. However, this time he did not use any coercive power. Instead, he directly used the attack power of Overlord Haki.


    The moment the domineering power came out, in this small room, whether it was the floor, roof or walls, cracks began to ur instantly.


    You can feel all this very intuitively. The golden lion itself has been raised, and the right hand has begun to slowly lower itself.


    From this moment on, he had epted his fate. In fact, he had known the man in front of him very well before. After all, from the moment he became the Four Emperors and One Emperor, the Golden Lion had been paying attention to him almost all the time.


    "Sure enough, you are really powerful. With this kind of domineering aura, even before, even Roger would probably not be your opponent!"


    The golden lion sighed and said.


    "There is no need to belittle oneself. Everyone has his own way out and abilities. Just like you, you have used the ability of Piao Piao Fruit to the extreme. You can suspend such arge ind in mid-air. At least this is what I It��s still hard to do.��


    Changnuo said calmly and with a smile.


    "The world from now on will be yours, we old guys are already in the past tense!"


    The golden lion sighed and shook his head. He seemed even more lonely at this moment.


    In the past, a generation of strong men on the sea could evenpete with the strongest men in the world, but now they have be so lonely. It is indeed a pity to analyze it only from the perspective of a strong man.


    This guy''s original purpose was actually the same as Roger''s, which was just to change the current social structure, but in the end he failed.


    After escaping from prison, he now looks more like he is lingering on hisst breath. Not only has his strength been greatly reduced, but more importantly, his mentality haspletely lost its former glory.


    "I will help you find a better sessor for your Devil Fruit. Maybe in a few years I will help you achieve your unfulfilled wish. The era that belongs to you as the Golden Lion hase to an end, but the era that belongs to the Toru Empire has just begun. Just rising.��


    Chang Nuo stood up, with no expression on his face. He waspletely calm and spoke calmly.


    "Thank you very much. I really want to see what the years you are talking about are like."


    The golden lion was not angry at all. Instead, he had an extremely calm smile on his face at this moment. He continued to retreat to his seat as if he was relieved, and said with a smile.


    "Is there anything else you want to say?"


    Changnuo asked again.


    "The world government is not as simple as you think, or even as simple as all of us imagine. There is someone else behind the Tianlong people, one who is so powerful that it makes everyone despair.


    The navy is not without its merits. Maybe you will understand when that dayes.


    Rafdrew''s secret is true. Roger understands it, Rocks understands it, and Whitebeard also understands it. Anyone who has seen this thing actually knows it.


    Tohru boy, if you can, change all the conditions in front of you. The secret of the nk 100 years is actually waiting for others to discover.


    The D family is not an absolute destiny. There are still many unsolved mysteries in this world. It��s a pity that I can��t see all of them..."


    Golden Lion said, sitting there and slowly closing his eyes, the expression on his face had begun to enter a state of enjoyment.


    Chang Nuo has been standing still, but this time it is different. His true self also appeared here at the same time.


    Facing the hero who had roamed the sea for decades, Changnuo gave him full respect.

 Chapter 393 Awakening the power of space ~ annihilation

    <h4>Chapter 393 Awakening the power of space ~ annihtion</h4>


    Immediately afterwards, a powerful blue light burst out from the area where Chang Nuo was located. In less than five seconds, the light had already formed a barrier covering an area of ??more than two hundred meters. .


    "I will remember what you said. The world government is indeed not as simple as we think, but so what?"


    Chang Nuo said to himself, then raised his right hand slightly, and then, the same blue light instantly enveloped the golden lion''s entire body.


    When everything ended, Chang Nuo was suspended on the periphery of the ind, but now the huge ind began to slowly fall downwards.


    The golden lion is still sitting peacefully on his chair at this moment, his expression has not changed at all, but now the golden lion has long since stopped breathing.


    As a former strong man, Golden Lion no longer wants others to know about his end. Perhaps this can be considered a perfect relief for him.


    But such arge ind, whether it falls on the East China Sea or the sea, can cause enough impact to plunge all the people in the surrounding area into disaster.


    "The power of awakening ~ space annihtion!"


    Changnuo is still suspended in mid-air, because with the fall of the golden lion, the ind that was originally suspended at an altitude of 8km has now begun to fall downwards.


    But as Chang Nuo directly used his awakened space power, in just an instant, the space in the entire area seemed to have been frozen.


    What followed was that the ind suspended at an altitude of 8km began to slowly fall downwards like a piece of paper.


    Although the golden lion fell silently in the sky, at least this kind of thing was witnessed by others.


    Being able to fall into the hands of the top powerhouse in the world today, the Golden Lion can be regarded as a glorious curtain call before fate arranges it.


    But even though the Golden Lion fell, his spirit was still firmly controlled by the circles of Devil Fruit in Chang Nuo''s hands.


    The ability of Piaopiao Fruit can actually have a vital impact on a country. Changnuo himself just wanted to take a look at the appearance of the old guy Golden Lion, but he did not expect that he would end up like this in the end. Way to end.


    More than half an hourter, the golden lion''s body and the ind he was on werepletely annihted in this world invisibly.


    For the Golden Lion, this is indeed a rtively good ending choice. After all, in the end, the entire ind and the dust scattered by his body were all above Roger Town, which can be regarded as making him fall in the same ce as Roger.


    As everything has dissipated, the space in front of him has turned into a vast expanse of white. Chang Nuo is still suspended there, closing his eyes and sighing slightly.


    He recalled thest words of the golden lion before his death. The world government was not as simple as imagined, and even exceeded everyone''s imagination. Chang Nuo himself had also been prepared for this kind of thing, and he had the Eye of God. How could he not know that the world government is not as simple as what he sees in front of him?


    When everything was settled, Chang Nuo slightly lowered his head in the original direction of the golden lion''s fall to express respect. Then the moment he raised his head, he started walking in the direction of Junhe who had entered Beihai.


    Thend of basta.


    "Luffy, are these your friends?"


    On the Merry, Ace looked at the only few people on board in disbelief.


    The most important thing is that his eyes are almost entirely focused on Robin. Now except for Sanji who has recognized her identity, the only one left here is Ace.


    Because he had personally been to the scene and seen his existence, and now when he saw Robin again, he couldn''t even believe whether what he saw with his own eyes was real.


    "Yes, these are my partners, the navigator Nami, the sniper Usopp, the chef Sanji, the ship''s doctor Chopper, and finally the historian Robin."


    Luffy said with a grin on his face.


    "Long time no see, Mr. Ace!!"


    Robin looked at Ace with the same smile and said.


    At this moment, the space seemed to bepletely silent, and all the smiles that had been on other people''s faces stopped at this moment.


    Even Luffy''s entire expression turned into one of confusion and confusion.


    "Robin, do you know Ace?"


    Luffy asked in surprise.


    "Of course, after all, Mr. Ace was present when I got married."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Is it true? Luffy''s brother also went to Robin''s wedding?"


    Usopp asked equally surprised.


    "The rtionship seems a bitplicated?"


    Chopper stood there. He didn''t understand everything that happened anyway, so he could onlyment this matter along with others.


    "Ace, what exactly is going on?"


    Luffy asked again.


    In fact, we can''t me them. After all, such news is shocking enough. How could these people never think that the world is so big and the two of them have actually met in the end?


    Zoro was also shocked. He had followed Luffy and Ace since he first entered thend of rape flowers in basta, and he had never heard of such a thing.


    Sanji didn''t feel too surprised, he even felt that everything was the same as it should be.


    "Miss Robin, this is really... so surprising!"


    Ace said nervously and surprised, but then, the expression on his face suddenly changed to a serious state, and his tone lost the respect he had before. He even asked cautiously, "I don''t know why you showed up to me." On my brother��s boat?��


    "I didn''t expect Captain Lu to be your brother. I guess we haven''t thought of this kind of thing before. Maybe it''s fate."


    Robin said, still smiling.


    "What I''m curious about is not this question, but why do you choose to be a pirate with your status?"


    Ace asked seriously again.


    "identity!!!"


    Usopp was the first to be confused.


    Everyone else also stared at Robin, wanting to see how the other person would answer.


    But at this time, Sanji stepped forward and said, "Robin is our partner now. No matter what identity he has, he is still our partner in the end."


    "Sanji is right. No matter what identity Robin had before, he is now a member of the Merry."


    Luffy stood behind and said with a serious face, and then he grinned again and said, "Ace, it''s rare for us to be on the Merry, so let''s have a good banquet, and there''s no need to worry about the rest." Stop worrying too much.��

 Chapter 394 Help him become the Pirate King

    <h4>Chapter 394 Help him be the Pirate King</h4>


    Seeing Luffy like this, Ace didn''t tell Robin''s identity for a while, but at this time, others had already had doubts in their hearts.


    Mainly because Ace had set out on the sea a few years ago, although many of them didn''t quite understand what the so-called Whitebeard Pirates actually meant? But at least they can imagine that even Ace is only one of them, and the rest can guess the size of the Whitebeard Pirates without even thinking about it.


    If a member of the Whitebeard Pirates crew can attend a wedding, what will the person behind it be like? This is almost a no-brainer.


    Everyone ignored this matter. When arge table of food was brought to the deck, everyone sat in a circle and started to eat.


    At this time, Ace stood up and faced everyone and said respectfully and politely, "Thank you for taking care of my ipetent brother along the way. Luffy has always been a bit out-of-touch, so I really asked you to bear with me!" "


    "Oh! No, no, no! You''re too kind."


    Usopp felt goosebumps fall off his whole body when he saw this scene.


    Almost everyone else behaved in the same way, but Ace went on to say, "To be honest, I am happy for my younger brother to have friends like you. Who else can take care of me during the future voyages?" This brother!"


    "Haha~, Mr. Ace, you are really acting like a very qualified brother now."


    Robin said with a smile.


    Everyone else wasmenting Ace''s current polite image, and their eyes would even focus on Luffy, who looked embarrassed from time to time.


    The most important thing is that the personalities of the two brothers are really different, at least in their impressions.


    After sailing all the way here, ording to Luffy''s character, it''s hard to imagine that this polite Ace in front of him could be his brother?


    "Luffy, are you sure this is really your brother?"


    Nami asked a little surprised.


    "That''s right. I don''t think so. How could such a polite person be Luffy''s brother?"


    "I don''t think so anyway. Why are the two people''s personalities so different?"


    ��


    The other people were talking to each other. Anyway, the emotions revealed at the moment were all expressions of shock. After all, what they saw in front of them really made them feel a little unbelievable.


    "Ace, aren''t these friends of mine interesting?"


    Luffy asked with a grin.


    "It''s quite interesting!"


    Ace said.


    "Stop talking, just sit down and eat. It will cool down in a while."


    Sanji opened his mouth and said.


    At this moment, the others began to sit together happily.


    The Meili did not start sailing, but still stayed in this port. After all, there were several naval warships waiting for them outside.


    However, their current happy scene left a lonely person standing there with a miserable look on his face.


    Enel has been alone almost every day since he sailed with them. Although he has obtained a lot of sailing permissions on the Infinity, he now faces Hai Ling at most every day, and almost all the rest he cooks and eats by himself. , and then focus on the Meili.


    This is his daily job. Fortunately, he does not need to sail every day. The Endless will automatically maintain a certain distance from the Melly and will also automatically remind him about the situation ahead.


    So Enelu, who stayed on the ship, spent almost every day besides eating and sleeping, training and perception.


    Just like now, when others are enjoying themselves, although there are meals in front of him, looking at the appearance of these meals, you can tell that this guy probably doesn''t cook much at home.


    From the appearance of the food that has been fried until it is browned and slightly ck, it is impossible to determine what species these foods belong to.


    But this is a simple dinner in Enelou.


    At night, aboard the Meili.


    At this time, almost no one fell asleep. They stayed on the boat in Rapeseed Port and started chatting with each other about each other''s situation, and almost everyone else was listening.


    Ace sat here and told Luffy about the things he encountered after leaving Windmill Vige, and the process of joining the Whitebeard Pirates. He spoke with great emotion, and the others also listened with interest. .


    Especially Luffy, who had been listening, the surprise in his eyes never stopped.


    "Luffy''s brother is talking about a state of great adventure. I''m really looking forward to it!"


    Chopper, this guy, showed a little bit of a star in his whole body. Facing the adventures Ace told about, he almost started to get excited.


    "Ace, I didn''t expect that you have experienced so many things in the past three years, but don''t worry, if I had been on the sea for three years, I would have experienced more exciting things than you."


    Luffy said with a grin.


    "Ace, can you tell us about the powerful men above the sea?"


    Zoro asked curiously.


    "It''s really useless to talk about these things now. Maybe you need to experience this kind of thing yourself to know. If you know too much, it will put a bad burden on you. It''s better not to know."


    Ace said with the same smile.


    Zoro did not continue to ask further. Maybe there were some things, just like Ace said, knowing in advance would not be of much benefit to these newbies, as was the strength of people like himself. In fact, he knows very well that what he is currently in is only in the first half of the Grand Route. How can he fight with others with this strength in theter stages?


    After chatting for a while, a few of them on the Merry began to drag Chopper into a circle, where they were singing and dancing. The only ones left were Ace and Robin sitting quietly not far away. watching.


    It is actually not an exaggeration to say that Luffy and the others are rtively simple. No matter how young Ace is, he has at least survived in the new world of intrigue for several years.


    He had seen many more things than Luffy and the others had ever seen.


    "May I know why you are on this ship?"


    Ace asked Robin with a calm expression.


    "Help your brother be the Pirate King!"


    "Do you think I will believe what you say? Who doesn''t know about bing the Pirate King? But why do you think you can help him achieve it?"


    Ace asked as he sat sideways and stared straight at Robin sitting there.

 Chapter 395 The people accompanying Enelu

    <h4>Chapter 395 The people apanying Enelu</h4>


    Robin didn''t think there was anything wrong with what Ace said. How could he really help him be the Pirate King?


    She could even understand why Ace had such thoughts, but all the words could only turn into a smile after reaching her lips.


    "Ms. Robin, although I don''t understand what the Tru Empire is going to do? But my brother is a rtively simple person, and I hope you won''t hurt him."


    Ace stood up and bowed respectfully towards Robin, sounding very humble in his words.


    "Ace, you can rest assured about many things. There are even many things that you don''t understand at all. Maybe in the future, when you understand these things, you won''t need others to say more."


    Robin said still smiling.


    "I hope so!"


    "Ace,e over here..."


    Ace had just finished sighing to Robin, but Luffy was still dancing hand in hand with them, and then called out to Ace.


    Its harmonious atmosphere seems to be perfect for this moment.


    The pleasant atmospherested until most of the night, but the several naval warships staying on the beach also waited all night. They just stared silently at the singing and dancing Meili in front of them. A group of people always stayed in their own Watched from the deck.


    "Colonel Smoker, I''m afraid it''s not an option if we continue like this, right? I see there are many pirate ships in this port. We can''t just keep an eye on Straw Hat Boy and his group, right?"


    Dusky asked, standing behind Smoker who was sitting there.


    "Order everyone, as long as they don''t leave this sea area, we don''t take action. Moreover, our main purpose ofing here this time is to keep an eye on the Straw Hats. How can anyone else care about them?"


    "But Colonel Smoker, if we leave Rogge Town directly, those people above will definitely criticize you again when they find out!"


    Dasqi said again.


    "I will never allow any pirate group to escape from my hands. This situation will be a great shame for me."


    Smoker was sitting on the deck, still smoking his cigar. The surroundings werepletely surrounded by smoke, but his expression was looking seriously in the direction of the Merry, and his tone was even more serious. .


    It''s really hard for Dusqi to understand the man in front of him. It''s really hard to understand that there are so many pirates who don''t want to catch him but insist on staring at the Straw Hats.


    What Kodasi Qi saw in the end was just the surface. How could Smog, a smart person like him, not understand?


    The person who appeared when he left Rogge Town was the focus of Smoker''s attention.


    "I''ve never seen you take it so seriously before!"


    Dasqi stood behind him and murmured quietly, his eyes still drifting towards Smoker, as if he was afraid that the other party would hear him.


    Early the next morning.


    On the sea today, or rather on the edge of the sea in basta today, there was a scene that made everyone feel weird.


    That is, on this sea, in the early hours of the morning, a heavy fog has risen that is not even visible from a distance of 5 meters. In this country of basta, which has always been short of water, it is impossible to appear at all, but it is still there today. So it appears here.


    Seeing the strange scene in front of him, Smoker stood up in surprise, but the others on the Meili seemed to have seen a savior at this moment.


    "Captain Lu, now is the time for us tounch our attack so that we can avoid having to fight against the navy."


    Robin said while looking at Luffy with a smile.


    "It''s really strange. How could there be such heavy fog in an environment like basta?"


    Sanji also looked at the surrounding environment with a curious expression. At this time, I don��t know how many people were emitting the same emotion. Facing all this, people who know basta will think that this kind of thing is simply ridiculous. An incredible one.


    "It seems that God is helping us. Everyone, we''d better set off quickly."


    Luffy shouted loudly with a smile on his face as he stood on the sheep''s head of the Merry.


    As the sails began to set sail, it was difficult to control the direction anyway, so it could only rely on the navigator''s ability to move forward.


    However, at this moment, on the Infinity that had been following them, there was a man who looked about 30 years old, lying leisurely on the sofa.


    Enelu watched quietly from the side, the expression on his face was full of helplessness.


    "You said you were fine, why did youe here?"


    Enelu asked.


    "His Majesty the King asked me to find a ce to stay, but I can''t tell where exactly this ce exists, so I can onlye and talk to you if I have nothing to do."


    The man sitting there said with a smile on his face.


    This is the masked man who stayed next to Changnuo in the Tru Empire before, but at this moment he haspletely taken off his disguise, and I have to say that overall he feels rtively handsome.


    "You said you could just go back to Sky Ind, but it''s just right for you toe here. Anyway, I''m extremely bored by myself. At least you can apany me to relieve my boredom."


    Enelu said with a smile.


    "So, I am the only one who can think of you at this time!"


    said the man lying there.


    "By the way, Mero, look at the ability you just used. Why haven''t I seen you use it before?"


    Enelu asked with some confusion.


    This man named Mero actually has the same identity as Enel. They bothe from Sky Ind. The only difference is that Mero''s starting point is much better than that of Enel.


    Unlike the people on Sky Ind, Mero doesn''t like to add any wing decorations on his body. This makes him different from the aborigines on Sky Ind in many ways.


    But at the same time, such a move also makes Mero more like a person staying on the sea, with a nk history, and also possesses strong strength.


    Facing Enel''s question, Mero smiled, and then said lightly, "Are you only allowed to have devil fruit abilities, and others can''t have them?"


    "That''s true, but since we have been in contact for so many years, I have never seen you use your abilities. The sudden scene like this really surprised me."


    Enelu said, and then sat directly next to him.


    "The Devil Fruit was given to me by His Majesty the King five years ago. Although it may not be as capable as you, in general it''s pretty good."


    "Can you tell me what the devil fruit ability is?"


    Enel stretched his head and looked at Mero seriously and asked.


    "I think it''s best that you don''t know about this kind of thing for the time being. His Majesty the King has said that my ability will be of greater use in the future."


    Mero said.

 Chapter 396 Reward without content

    <h4>Chapter 396 Reward without content</h4>


    Hearing this, Enelu was stunned for a moment, then withdrew his stretched head, licked his dry lips, picked up the fruit next to him and started eating.


    He didn''t ask too much. Anyway, these things didn''t have much to do with him.


    Almost half an hourter, the heavy fog along the coast of Rapeseed Port began to slowly dissipate. But after this dissipated, how could these naval warships still see the Meili?


    But to everyone''s surprise, Smoker didn''t look as angry as expected, and even still sat on the board and calmly watched everything in front of him.


    Dasqi felt a little confused. The purpose of staying here all night was obviously to prevent the Straw Hats from escaping, but why was their leader Smoker so calm now that everyone had left.


    "Taschi, inform the Navy Headquarters that the Straw Hats attacked the Navy warship and escaped sessfully, and ask them to increase the reward for this group."


    Smoker said calmly.


    "Colonel Smoker, isn''t this a bit inappropriate?"


    Dusky asked doubtfully.


    "Do you know who else is on that ship? I''m afraid not even the people at the Navy Headquarters can guess it."


    Smoker took a deep breath from the cigar in his hand and said with a rather mncholy expression.


    "ah??"


    Dasqi obviously didn''t understand what the smoke man said.


    Smoker didn''t exin too much, he just sighed slightly, his expression still as strong as before, pretending to be calm.


    Now that everyone has arrived on the Grand Line, Smoker will definitely not choose to return to Rogge Town.


    "Colonel Smoker, how should I report to the Navy Headquarters next?"


    Dusky asked suddenly.


    "Forget it, I''d better say it myself."


    Smoker finished smoking the cigarette in his hand and threw the cigarette butt into the sea.


    After his movements seemed smooth and smooth, Smoker stood up slowly. He had been sitting peacefully in this ce all night.


    In fact, it wasn''t that he didn''t want to capture the Straw Hat Kid. The most critical issue was that he was on the naval battleship and looking at the people on the ship, he actually recognized at least two of them.


    Not to mention Robin, even Ace and Smoker who were staying on the boat were not sure that they could win each other.


    Coupled with the forces behind it, even if there is no suchyer of fog covering the sea, Smoker probably will not really attack Luffy and his party.


    The reason why he reported like this was just to give him somefort. In addition, what he was more curious about was what on earth were these people doing?


    So regarding this matter, Smoker had no choice but to startmunicating with the Navy Headquarters, and he retreated to a room alone, telling what he saw and heard when he met Luffy and the others this time.


    It''s only three dayster.


    A seagull flew over the Mellie, and then threw a stack of newspapers directly towards the ship.


    For these seagulls, every newspaper they throw will be thrown onto these boats. The same birds wille here every month to charge them a fixed fee. If they don''t pay, it is impossible to receive any more copies in the future.


    The most important thing for pirates like them is to keep pace with the times and keep abreast of the information on the entire sea. The money for a month''s newspaper is not particrlyrge, so no pirate group will embarrass the seagulls or refuse to pay them. Money and stuff like that.


    As the newspaper fell, Usopp was the first to run forward and pick it up directly.


    But at this time, a bounty report slipped out of the newspaper, which directly excited Usopp, a guy who had never seen the world.


    "Luffy, Zoro, your bounties have been increased! And is Zoro''s first bounty so high?"


    Usopp shouted at them with some confusion.


    After all, entering basta this time did not do anything for Luffy and his party, but even so, the reward amount for the party was still rising.


    After hearing what Usopp shouted, Nami was the first toe over. She asked with a puzzled look on her face, "We haven''t done anything recently, right?"


    "Usopp, where is the bounty? Let me take a look."


    Luffy hurried over and grabbed the bounty orders from Usopp''s hand. When he saw his name on the first one, Luffy was a little excited at first.


    Sanji and others also rushed over together, and they also began to admire the amount of money on Luffy''s bounty. As they started to count the zeros after one, everyone''s eyes widened and their mouths opened wide in the end.


    "100 million Baileys? Luffy, did you do something behind our backs? The reward amount has actually increased so much."


    Sanji asked in surprise.


    "That''s right, Luffy, what exactly is going on?"


    "Zoron, don''t talk about Luffy, your own bounty is 60 million."


    Usopp held Zoro''s bounty in front of him and said.


    "Usopp, do you have mine?"


    Sanji asked expectantly.


    "It seems like there aren''t any, just Luffy and Zoro''s."


    Usopp said, and after Sanji heard this, he immediately fell to the ground with a frustrated look on his face. They obviously walked out of the sea together, why didn''t he offer a reward even to thest cent?


    "There''s actually one from Robin!"


    Usopp was flipping through thest bounty order, but when he saw thest one, Robin''s photo appeared on it, and Usopp suddenly shouted in surprise.


    Others also gathered around and looked up, but what surprised them was that although it was a photo with a reward, it only had Robin''s photo on it, and there was no content underneath.


    "Is there a missing print on the bottom of this thing?"


    Usopp asked curiously.


    "That''s right, what''s going on?"


    Luffy took over Robin''s reward order and said curiously.


    "Luffy, I won''t go with you in the future. I also need to do my own things. You need to walk the next road by yourself."


    Ace walked out of the room at this time. For three days, they almost sailed together, and Ace did not leave the ship.


    But it''s different now. I have already felt the atmosphere on the Meili, and I also understand that my brother''s thoughts now have no effect if he continues to stay on this ship.


    "Luffy''s brother, are you leaving?"


    Chopper asked with some reluctance.


    "Yes, Chopper, I also have my own things to do. If we meet again in the future, just treat it as our brief separation."


    Ace said with a gentle smile.

 Chapter 397 Former Navy Admiral Zefa

    <h4>Chapter 397 Former Navy Admiral Zefa</h4>


    The others were stunned for a moment and stopped studying the issue of the reward order.


    Luffy took a few steps towards Ace and said with a smile on his face, "Then we have agreed that we will go to your so-called new world to find you."


    "That''s for sure. The New World is much more fun than the Grand Line. I will definitely treat you to a good drink when you meet me."


    Ace said as he rubbed Luffy''s head.


    Now it''s time for them to part ways. After all, Ace still has his own mission toplete. It''s enough to get to know the people on this ship through hispanionship in the past few days.


    This side of the North Sea.


    "Junhe, are you sure the other party is here?"


    On a vast sea area, Chang Nuo looked ahead and asked Jun He who was behind him with some doubts.


    "Your Majesty the King, ording to the news, thest time I saw them was here, but now I am not sure whether they are still here?"


    Junhe said.


    This is a vast area of ??the North Sea, and there is no ind within sight. Even if the other party has stayed here before, it is impossible for him to stay here forever.


    It only took them about ten days to arrive at this ce from the South China Sea, but within these ten days, these guys might have gone somewhere.


    After Changnuo left the Golden Lion, he took his Devil Fruit and instantly returned to the merchant ship where they came together.


    After several days of sailing, they finally arrived within the agreed range of the North Sea. However, after arriving here, at least they did not find any abnormality in their perception.


    Even in the sea water, there is nothing abnormal.


    Zefa''s group must have left this sea area long ago. As for which direction they may leave, they still don''t know.


    "Your Majesty the King, do you need to send others to investigate again?"


    Junhe asked standing nearby.


    "It''s not necessary for now. We can first analyze the direction they may go. At least they didn''t encounter them on the way from Upside Down Mountain, which means this direction can bepletely ruled out.


    Going north from their ce should be the territory belonging to the Vinsmoke family. The old guy Zefa should not touch such a brow. Going east should be the territory belonging to the Revolutionary Army group of guys. Now The only thing that can be thought of is that Zefa has led people towards the west and ordered others to turn around and head towards the west. "


    Changnuo analyzed and said.


    "Your Majesty, there is currently only one Lubnilu Kingdom in the west, and there is no other ce."


    Junhe said.


    "Order them to speed up. We don''t have much time tomunicate about this kind of thing. It''s impossible for Zefa and his people to move towards the Vinsmoke family anyway. Now let''s take a gamble and see where they will go. ?��


    Chang Nuo said with a calm expression, his sense of domineering power has not dropped, at least he needs to be able to sense the whereabouts of these guys at the first time.


    Junhe didn''t say anything else, turned around and started walking into the cabin to give orders to others.


    Although this ship is just a merchant ship of the Tru Empire, at least on the surface, the internal power system is at least much faster than ordinary ships. Although it is much slower than the Endless, it is at least faster than the Infinity. It is also much faster than ordinary ships.


    On the vast sea, if you want to find a team of only 5,000 people, if you don''t know the other party''s sailing route, it will be extremely difficult to find the other party.


    Such arge area of ????the North Sea is really not smallpared to the South China Sea. There are more than 80 kingdoms in such a North Sea area. As long as Zefa and his group change the direction slightly, then they will continue to follow. It''s impossible to find it even if youe down.


    "Your Majesty, if you say that we are here just to find Zefa to train people, if the other party doesn''t agree, wouldn''t it be worth the loss?"


    After Junhe ordered the others, he walked to the deck again and asked curiously.


    He did not believe that the former admiral of the Navy Headquarters would be a being who could join the Tru Empire without any conditions.


    After all, he didn''t know anything about General Zefa, so it was understandable to ask such a question.


    Changnuo was thinking about somethingpletely different. He turned his head and nced at Junhe. In fact, he was not absolutely sure about such a thing. He just came here to give it a try.


    Zefa is not the most important existence to him, but when the former admiral of the Navy Headquarters enters the Tru Empire, it will have such a sensational impact. In fact, needless to say, everyone can weigh this weight.


    "Don''t just look at one side of things. You have to know that as a general of the Navy, you can know more things than you think. This time we are going with the certainty of victory, and we will definitely encounter some difficulties. It��s an imaginary thing, but we can only talk about it after seeing it in detail.��


    Chang Nuo said lightly.


    Junhe stayed behind and listened, looking at the sea in the distance from time to time.


    Even though he has now be a general, the cooling domineering energy in Junhe''s body is still a fatal weakness. No matter what methods he tries, the situation has not improved at all.


    The better thing is the improvement of his armament and domineering. After these years, he has entered the state of Liuying. He is not the strongest among the generals. At least he still has no problem in protecting himself in this sea area.


    One dayter.


    In an unfamiliar sea area, a submarine suddenly emerged from the originally ordinary sea surface. ording to the specifications of this submarine, it seemed that it could amodate at least 500 people inside.


    People were alsoing and going inside the submarine, and everyone maintained extreme calmness and seriousness on their faces.


    At the very front of the submarine, sitting on the main seat was an old man with short purple hair. He had dark skin and his right hand had beenpletely reced by a huge iron guy.


    When the submarine floats on the sea, the ss vision in front of you opens instantly. Not far ahead, you can already see a medium-sized ind with the naked eye.


    "Ain, if you can, don''t follow me. Find a better country and stay there. The teacher is old now and can no longer do many things. You can''t let the teacher''s problems drag you down. !��


    The person who spoke such tender words was Zefa, the former Navy Headquarters Admiral, an extremely powerful being.

 Chapter 398 New Navy

    <h4>Chapter 398 New Navy</h4>


    Although he said this, this kind of powerful strength had been broken many years ago. What is left of Zefa today is just a face full of vicissitudes of life, and the whole person seems to have no pursuit in many things.


    Among the strong men of the previous era, Zefa was not only respected by all navies, but also feared by many pirates. But even so, now that he is old, he seems to have lost his goal and direction.


    "Teacher, Ain will not leave you even half a step. It is like this now and it will be like this in the future. Please don''t say this again in the future."


    Ain said loudly with some anger.


    "It has no effect now. The great era of pirates ising. Without strong power, it is impossible to change the world. What can we do just by relying on it?"


    Zefa said frustrated.


    At least at this moment, his eyes are full of frustration. Along the way, he has seen too many things in his life to this age, and he has also felt grief that others cannot feel.


    At least at this moment, the calmness on the sea could no longer suppress the sadness inside.


    "Teacher, as long as there are people around, I believe it can be done. Ain will always be by your side to fulfill all your ideals."


    Ain said seriously.


    Ain is a disciple of Zefa. He looks like he is only a little over 20 years old. He has long blue wavy hair. He wears a blue T-shirt on the upper body, denim shorts on the lower body, and ck high heels, but at least She is also considered a beauty.


    Especially with such a serious look, it made everyone else feel ashamed.


    Zefa sat there and sighed slightly, the vicissitudes of life on his face could not be recorded. He had not had a good rest for a long time. He drifted on this rough sea every day and dreamed of unrealistic dreams every day. At least in this There is no hope left in the seventy-year-old old guy.


    "Teacher, what''s going on here?"


    A man wearing shy clothes standing next to Ain said.


    This guy''s dress and image are more like that of a ninja, with a long knife hanging on his back and his clothes covering his head. Anyway, just from the appearance point of view, he doesn''t feel thatfortable.


    "Binz, the Lubuni Kingdom was once my hometown. I came back this time just to take a look. The rest I n to go back to the New World to settle things with the pirates. There is no hope anymore. At present, The two of you are the most worried. If possible, I really hope you can take them to find a ce to live and stop worrying about anything on the sea."


    Zefa said.


    "Teacher, what happened to you today? Why did you say so many words that are inconsistent with your ideals?"


    Ain asked.


    "I can understand the teacher''s thoughts, but it''s not the time yet. At least let us apany you for a while."


    Binz said seriously.


    "Binz, what are you talking about? What does it mean to apany the teacher for another walk?"


    Ain''s voice was a little angry, but when Binz heard this, it seemed as if nothing happened.


    Zefa was very able to understand himself as a student, so in the end he didn''t say a word during the whole process, he just continued to stare straight ahead with his deep eyes.


    "General, we are following a very fast merchant ship. Do you want to handle it urgently?"


    While the three of them were in a stalemate, a soldier ran over and said respectfully to the three of them.


    This topic sessfully diverted their attention. Perhaps because of the serious topic just now, Ain nced at them and said directly to the person who came over, "Is such a small thing worth reporting? Take me over and have a look!"


    Zefa didn''t say anything, while Binz stared at Ain as he left the cab in front.


    On the merchant ship that came towards them was Chang Nuo and his party. This time heading in this direction also meant that they had made the right bet. They had discovered Zefa and his group at least two hours ago. human existence.


    That''s why they gathered here as quickly as possible.


    "Your Majesty the King, it seems that Zefa''s group is quiterge!"


    Junhe frowned.


    "There are almost 5,000 people, which is certainly a lot. Although Zefa does not do well in many things, he is indeed an outstanding person in terms of management methods."


    Chang Nuo said leisurely while looking at the sea in front of him.


    Although only one huge submarine emerged from the sea directly ahead, at least in other directions, a series of seemingly smaller shark submarines also emerged one by one. This can be regarded as a huge army. At least for those medium and weak countries, these people alone canpletely destroy a kingdom.


    Not to mention those small countries, this group of people canpletely subvert evenrge countries like basta.


    "There is a strong military area ahead, your ship should change direction quickly!"


    While the two were chatting, a shark submarine slowly appeared next to them, and a man walked out from the middle and stood on the submarine and shouted to them.


    Perhaps the people on Zefa''s side don''t pay attention to the environment at all. After all, how much of a threat can a merchant ship pose?


    It is obviously impossible to directly persuade Chang Nuo to retreat after just one soldier came.


    "Let Zefae out and meet!"


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    After the soldiers standing on the submarine heard this, they immediately felt something was wrong. After all, they did not report their family status, but the other party actually knew their general. This situation was obviously considered prepared.


    At the same time, the top cabin cover of the huge submarine also opened at this time, and Ain slowly walked out from inside, standing on the submarine and looking here.


    "Who are you?"


    The soldier who had just persuaded them asked again.


    "Admiral Zefa, is it possible that you have fallen into such a lonely state after leaving the navy?"


    Chang Nuo said, but while speaking, he used the power of knowledge and color to instantly cover the area with his words. This time, he did not deliberately prevent anyone from listening, but instead made it possible for everyone in the surrounding area to hear. .


    Even Zefa, who was staying in the submarine, was suddenly shocked after hearing this.


    The originally silent look in his eyes as he sat there seemed to be summoned by something at this moment.


    "Binz, let''s go out and take a look!"


    Zefa said to the students behind him.

 Chapter 399 Face-to-face communication

    <h4>Chapter 399 Face-to-facemunication</h4>


    Ain stood on the submarine and quietly looked at the ship in front of him, especially focusing all his eyes on Chang Nuo.


    The distance between them now is not very close, almost 300m, but even so, they can still vaguely see each other''s figure.


    As Chang Nuo''s voice spread, many submarines that were already floating on the sea gathered even more in less than a while.


    In less than a while, Zefa and his students also walked slowly to the submarine. With the general''s domineering power of knowledge, Zefa was able to sense all the existences in the entire sea area in an instant.


    "Teacher, you are here."


    Seeing Zefa walking up, Ain said respectfully.


    "It looks like there''s a big troubleing!"


    Zefa sighed and said.


    "Teacher, do you know who the other party is?"


    Ain asked again.


    "That guy from the Tru Empire, I really didn''t expect his overlord of the South China Sea toe to the North Sea and do what?"


    Zefa said to himself curiously.


    "The Tru Empire? Overlord of the South China Sea? Teacher, you wouldn''t say he is the Tru Emperor, right?"


    Ain asked in disbelief.


    "Who else could be there besides him? I''m afraid not even ten people in this world can find such powerful Haki."


    "Then what did he do in Beihai? It seems like he came for us." Binz asked.


    "Let''s take a look first and then tell others not to act rashly. Even us old guys can''t see through this guy''s strength."


    Zefa looked at the ships that continued toe towards them, and said calmly to Binz next to him.


    "Your Majesty the King, could the old man in the front and middle be the Zefa you mentioned?"


    Junhe stood on the deck, looking at the situation ahead, and asked Changnuo curiously.


    Fortunately, the sea was rtively calm at the moment, with no strong winds or waves, and no dazzling sunlight.


    At this time, it is easy for the line of sight to prate a distance of several hundred meters. In addition, with their strength, they will no longer use their eyes to see at all. The blessing of the domineering power of the sight can directly expand their line of sight infinitely. long distance.


    "You are right, that guy is Zefa, but looking at his current appearance, he is already considered senile."


    Chang Nuo said calmly and calmly.


    As the ship under their feet got closer and closer to the submarine they were on, the other surrounding new navy members belonging to Zefa all remained on alert one by one.


    The two parties are not currently in a confrontation, and the people from the Tru Empire have maintained their usual calm.


    The ship under their feet was still approaching, and Zefa looked at their arrival with a serious face.


    Facing these existences that he had never met before, Zefa didn''t have too many emotions in his heart. In some respects, his knowledge and feeling about the Tru Empire was quite good, although he had never been to the South China Sea area. country, but at least there are too many things that I have been exposed to indirectly or directly.


    Although their understanding of that country was only on the surface of the newspaper, they had to admire the country''s growth.


    "Teacher, what should we do?"


    Ain looked at Zefa and asked.


    "There is no need to do anything. I also want to know what is the purpose of this guying to Beihai?" Zefa said.


    Binz, who was standing next to him, was nowpletely on alert in order to prevent the other party from suddenly attacking Zefa. His right hand had even reached behind his back, and his hand was ced on the handle of the knife, as if he would start directly in the next second. It''s like weing a war.


    They don''t have much understanding or concept of the strength of this Emperor Tru, but being able to be on an equal footing with the Four Emperors of the New World in just a few years shows that the opponent''s strength is not as simple as imagined.


    The ship under Chang Nuo''s feet was still approaching slowly, and theypletely ignored the small ships floating on the sea, staring at Zefa alone with dazzling eyes.


    When the distance is close enough, the distance between the two parties is only about 50m, and they can clearly see each other''s faces without even having to look at each other.


    Zefa looks exactly as Chang Nuo imagined. He still has that dark image. Even though he has reached his current age, the level of domineering he exudes can indeed make ordinary people intimidated.


    "Mr. Zefa!"


    After Chang Nuo approached, he immediately made a scene that surprised everyone. He stood on the edge of the deck and bowed his head in the direction of Zefa and shouted politely.


    "Haha~, looking at you like this, you must havee to Beihai to attack me, right? I wonder what the overlord of South China Sea, Emperor Tru, wants to do with me?"


    Although Zefa was smiling on the surface, he was also on guard inside.


    After he finished speaking, the expression on his face immediately returned to its original serious state.


    "I just came here to see what the former naval admiral who once persisted for his ideals has be like now?" Chang Nuo said.


    "Then what?"


    "There is chaos in the world, the navy is doing nothing, and the world government is indifferent. Currently, I think there is no country that can achieve self-sufficiency except the Tru Empire. People live their whole lives and never want to be here. There are too many regrets left in the world, but I don��t know what Mr. Zefa thinks of it?" Chang Nuo asked again.


    After saying these words, they were all confused. Zefa stood there quietly, looking thoughtful.


    "teacher����"


    Before Ain could say anything, Zefa directly raised his left hand, interrupting what the other party was going to say next.


    His eyes and attention were all focused on Emperor Tru across from him. This young man who looked to be in his twenties could not fault anyone in terms of politeness ornguage.


    Not only does he have great strength, but he also supports such a huge country behind his back. Zefa''s eyes also reveal an extremely cautious state.


    "King Tru, just tell the truth. We are already here. There is no need to beat around the bush. What do you want from me?" Zefa asked straight to the point.


    "Since Mr. Zefa has said so, let me tell you straight. I hope Mr. Zefa can bring your people to join the Tru Empire."


    Chang Nuo didn''t hesitate at all, and spoke with a serious expression.


    This is indeed the purpose of hising here. Otherwise, why would he spend so much effort toe here?


    Although Zefa is very old and his strength is definitely far different from before, as a former naval admiral, his influence can still be there.

 Chapter 400 The Rejected Emperor Tru

    <h4>Chapter 400 The Rejected Emperor Tru</h4>


    Those who belonged to the New Navy at the scene, when they heard Emperor Tru say these words, all their expressions showed a state of surprise. In fact, even Zefa himself was like this.


    "Teacher will not choose to join your Tru Empire, you should just go back!"


    Before Zefa opened his mouth to answer, Ain started to refuse.


    "Ain!"


    Zefa called the other party softly, and his eyes began to show a dazed state.


    Just now, he was persuading his two students to find a better development future. The new navy is not stable at all now. They drift on the sea every day, fighting against the pirates, and in the end they only deal with them. Just some small fish and shrimps.


    "Teacher, the new navy is ourmon philosophy, and I won''t allow you to give up like this!"


    Ain said seriously.


    Chang Nuo was not worried about their attitude. Instead, he still stood there and looked at these people quietly.


    Although the strength of the new navy is not as strong as imagined. Although it has an army of 5,000 people, such strength can actually be grasped at sea. Without strong leadership capabilities, any force from the Four Emperors Group can defeat them. destroy.


    As the leader of these new navies, it is impossible for Zefa not to understand this situation.


    They have been sailing on the sea, making small noises. In actual effect, it is nothing more than a pebble falling into the sea, causing a slight stir, but it will soon be calmed down.


    "What conditions do you have for the new navy to join the Tru Empire?" Zefa suddenly asked.


    When these words came out, even the two students next to him were startled. It was obvious that they had begun to identify with each other and began to intend to hand over all the rights in their hands.


    Binz acted indifferently, but Ain waspletely different.


    Her face gradually began to show a slightly angry state. Facing the teacher in front of her, Ain asked directly and without any concealment, "Teacher, what are you talking about? Are you really nning to give up the New Navy?" people?"


    "Your teacher just wants to give them some better development, so why worry about it so much. It''s the same everywhere, as long as you fulfill the justice in your heart."


    As soon as Ain finished speaking, Chang Nuo''s voice came to her ears, and he was standing next to her.


    As if he felt threatened, Ain jumped nearly two to three meters away in the next second, and his right hand instantly emitted a red light and attacked Chang Nuo.


    But with these attacks, the moment she raised her hand, her whole body was already fixed in ce. Apart from Ain being able to blink, her whole body waspletely locked there by space.


    Seeing this scene, Zefa wanted to take action at first, but in the end he suppressed the impulse in his heart.


    The knife in Binzi''s hand had already been partially pulled out, but at this time Changnuo said leisurely, "I don''t want to be enemies with you when Ie here. I don''t even have the idea of ????fighting you at all. It''s just that the ability of the Devil Fruit is somewhat It��s dangerous, sometimes you just need to prepare in advance.��


    "Let Ain go first!"


    Binz said seriously.


    Chang Nuo had no intention of arguing with the other party. He waved his left hand casually, and Ain, who had been fixed, waspletely free again in the next second.


    It wasn''t until this moment that she finally understood the strength of Emperor Tru, who could annihte their entire army with just an understatement.


    The powerful force among the strong canpletely make them all despair.


    "I still said what I just said, let the new navy join the Tru Empire, what can we gain?"


    Zefa asked again.


    "It''s hard to say this now, but what is the purpose of establishing your new navy? Is it just to catch those scattered pirates on the sea? Or is it just to vent the anger in your hearts?"


    Changnuo said, and once again took two steps towards Zefa. The two of them looked at each other almost face to face.


    In terms of body shape, Zefa is a tall and domineering old man, but in this world, strength is not determined by body size.


    Seeing that the other party did not speak, Chang Nuo said again, "Perhaps we have manymon goals, and your goal is just for justice. But for you, where does the true so-called justice exist in your hearts? Everyone Everyone ims to be the embodiment of justice, but what is the final result?


    Until now, who can know how many pirates there are on this sea? Why did they be pirates?


    Some people may just venture out to the sea and experience the feeling of freedom. But most people are actually ordinary people. They may be forced by life, or they may be helpless. The so-called justice cannot beprehensive. What can be reflected in the sea is nothing more than the darkness in this world. It''s just one side, but in this world, how many ces can the sun shine on?


    Navy or world government? Or is it the new revolutionary army now emerging? Or maybe those four emperors on the sea? Who doesn''t unt his justice, but what will be the final result?


    So many things have happened, and the world government has turned a blind eye, and the navy has ignored it. People in many countries are still living in dire straits. Everything needs to have its own meaning. So what does the establishment of a new navy mean to you? What is it again? "


    Changnuo stood in front of Zefa, calmly and with a series of questions, once again making the other party fall into thinking.


    Indeed, what role can the justice they have been pursuing from the beginning to the end actually y in this world?


    In the past few years, the number of pirates has grown like a carp crossing the river. It is no longer possible to curb the development just by arresting one force.


    The capabilities of the new navy are limited. Faced with such aplex and cumbersome state, most of them already feel somewhat inadequate.


    "His Majesty King Tru, you have said so much, so what should the Tru Empire do in the future?"


    Zefa asked the question in reverse.


    "When General Yixiao came to the Tru Empire, I already said relevant things. If you have the strength, then you should protect one person. What''s the harm if you have enough strength to protect the world?"


    Chang Nuo said with the corners of his mouth raised slightly.


    "With Trudy''s current strength, is it possible that he still needs as few people as our new navy?"


    Ain stood aside and asked directly, with a lot of unwillingness in his tone.

 Chapter 401 Conditions for joining

    <h4>Chapter 401 Conditions for joining</h4>


    Listening to what Ain said, Chang Nuo''s expression did not change at all. Instead, he turned his head and carefully looked at the beauty in front of him.


    In the impression, Chang Nuo still has some respect for Ain. He possesses the time-series Devil Fruit that can degenerate people, but his personal evolution ability is slightly inferior.


    "Whether the Tru Empire is strong or not does not depend on one person, but more on the power of unity. In this world, the Tru Empire is not the most powerful existence. Despite this, what we hold in our hands The power is enough to ensure that the people within our jurisdiction have enough food and clothing.


    At least let them live in this country without having to worry about being invaded by any pirates, let alone being deprived by the rulers. Many people can find the meaning of survival in such an environment. Even if you join, you will is treated the same. "


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile on his lips.


    "I have read newspapers about the Tru Empire. Although I don''t know much about you personally, I can still feel that you will never be limited to staying in a quiet corner of that corner. Don''t impose your own ideas on us. , what do you think is the difference between you and those in the World Government?"


    Ain said sarcastically.


    "What an interesting woman! I came here just tomunicate. As for the difference between me and the World Government, this kind of thing is not what I should care about. Others'' evaluations will naturally be left there.


    To be honest, I don''t like your current attitude very much. If I were willing, I could destroy your entire new navy in an instant just by relying on my own power.


    In addition, I would like to advise you, what kind of words you have to say what kind of strength you have. Standing here, you are not their leader. Mr. Zefa, who is the real leader, has not spoken. With your attitude, you can easily be beaten. ! "


    Changnuo said with a smile still on his face, and then focused his eyes on Zefa. There was no need for him to always feel sorry for a little girl.


    But Zefa, who had been watching this scene, suddenly had another thought in his mind.


    He stared at Chang Nuo quietly, and then said with a smile on his face, "There is nothing wrong with the new navy joining the Tru Empire..."


    "teacher����"


    ��


    At this time, it wasn''t just Ain who couldn''t stand, even Binz, another student standing next to him, was shocked when he heard this. But when they were about to be surprised, Zefa directly interrupted them with a look. speak.


    Then he continued what he said above and said, "In the past two years, I have learned a little bit about the Toru Empire, but just relying on these is not enough. If you want me to join the Toru Empire, there is only one condition. I am already so old. , and don��t have a few years to live, what worries me the most is the student in front of me, the only condition for joining the Tru Empire is that you marry her."


    "Teacher, what on earth are you talking about?"


    Ain instantly became angry and couldn''t believe that these words actually came from his teacher''s mouth.


    Chang Nuo was also surprised. He didn''t understand what the old guy in front of him was thinking. He started doing this without saying anything. Sometimes he really couldn''t figure out how their brain circuits worked. Turned?


    But these words have already been said, and Zefa has no intention of taking them back. Changnuo can only smile and say, "I already have a princess, and I am not interested in this kind of thing."


    "I''m not interested in you yet!" Ain looked at Chang Nuo angrily and said.


    "You said you, it''s not me who said this, why are you always angry at me? Besides, I haven''t refused now, is it possible that you don''t want to?" Chang Nuo said.


    "If you have this attitude, then it is impossible for the new navy to join the Tru Empire, which means that our conditions cannot be met."


    Zefa said seriously.


    "Oh~, it seems that this trip was really in vain. Although I really want you to join the Tru Empire and give you a richer environment, it seems that this kind of statement does not make sense here at all. I really look forward to your future His performance, I really don��t know if you will still have the courage to say such things in a few years.��


    Changnuo sighed, and then slowly floated 1m above the submarine. He no longer wanted to talk to this group of people. No matter how much he wanted to invite Zefa to join the Tru Empire, he had to face the opponent''s proposal. Chang Nuo rejected the conditions foring out without even thinking about it.


    "You really take yourself too seriously!"


    Ain was muttering, but who couldn''t hear what she said?


    "Sometimes I really hope you can think about it carefully. Soon, the whole world may be in greater turmoil. What do you think you can do just by relying on you people? It is difficult to realize your ideals. Isn��t it possible that you can do this kind of thing with your mouth? Forget it for today, in the future, the Tru Empire will still wee you."


    As Chang Nuo said, he slowly stepped into the air and began to move towards the ship he was on.


    He no longer has much patience to deal with this matter. For these so-called new navy, they cannot see the existence of despair without going through a big ordeal.


    Rather than giving them a big pie now, it would be better to let them ept the rejection in the future.


    In the current mixed situation of the pirate world, just relying on people like their new navy, I am afraid that they will not be able to create even a single wave in this world.


    Now everyone has seen Chang Nuo and expressed his attitude. The trip to Beihai is not a fruitless one.


    At least I can''t be shy and ask them to join my country. Now Ie to express my attitude, which can be regarded as nting a seed in their hearts that is about to sprout.


    Convincing Zefa now is no longer the most important thing for Chang Nuo to do next. After all, there is something moreplicated in the next thing.


    Now that everything that can be said and done has been done, all that is left is to wait quietly for arrangements.


    After returning to the ship, Junhe didn''t ask any questions. Although he had some doubts in his heart, looking at the attitude of His Majesty the King, he had already spoken and finally took it back.


    From the moment they boarded the ship, the merchant ship beneath them began to slowly leave the sea.


    Only the new navy who were still on the sea were left, at least they could watch the young Emperor Tru leave.

 Chapter 402 Pluto is preparing to see the light of day again

    <h4>Chapter 402 Pluto is preparing to see the light of day again</h4>


    Chang Nuo and the others left without the slightest trace of attachment, and they didn''t even look back.


    But Zefa''s side ispletely different.


    At the moment they left, Zefa was old and still full of energy, but the next second he returned to his previous weak appearance.


    "Sigh~, looking at them like this, they may be the only country that can arm-wrestle with the World Government and Navy in the future."


    Zefa sighed and said.


    "Why do you give them such a high evaluation? We also know a little bit about the situation in the Tru Empire. It''s not as exaggerated as you said, right?"


    Ain asked.


    "You still know too little. Do you think the Tru Empire is powerful? The Navy and the World Government will indulge his current behavior.


    When it first started to develop, the biggest advantage of the Te Empire was that it was located in and all over the world, and everything was developed in a hidden stage. A country that could quietly develop so many powerful military forces, navy and world government No one understands that this is enough to prove the methods of Emperor Tru.


    As the strength gradually bes stronger, in the South China Sea area, even the world government probably did not expect that the other party could develop so fast. After all, I also want to see the embarrassed expressions of those people now. "


    Zefa said with a smile.


    "Teacher, you said that at the beginning, the World Government knew that the Tru Empire was likely to pose a threat, so why didn''t they start taking action at the beginning?"


    Binz asked with some confusion.


    "This kind of thing is not difficult to understand. At first, everyone thought that the Toru Empire was just for business development. From the day they first became the Four Emperors and One Emperor, I guess even the old guys from the World Government , everyone was stunned.


    But things have developed to this point, and the navy and the world government can no longer do whatever they want.


    The powerful forces in the depths and the South China Sea are beyond the imagination of the navy and the world government.


    Not to mention that the Tru Empire emerged as a country, the World Government and the Navy had no special reason to attack them at all. In addition, the most important point is that once they attack the South China Sea area, how could it be done back then? The New World, which is easy to maintain peace, may once again enter a state of turmoil, which will have a great impact on the Navy and the World Government''s goal of controlling the bnce of the New World. "


    Zefa analyzed and said.


    As expected of a man who had served as a naval admiral, all his analysis of these matters hit the mark, and every aspect was just right.


    This is at least his understanding, and it can also represent the understanding among the navy and the world government.


    "Then do you think the guy just said that there will be huge turbulence in the entire sea in a short time is not credible?"


    Ain also opened his mouth and asked.


    "There is nothing credible or untrustworthy. ording to the current strength of the Tru Empire, as long as they are willing to create a big event, then this situation will definitely happen.


    In today''s world, no force canpare with him. The navy has gradually given up control of the South China Sea. Those guys in the New World have begun to be restless one by one. Maybe it will be like what he said. Bar. "


    Zefa said.


    "Now that everyone has left, teacher, we should go to the Lubni Road Kingdom first. As for the rest of the matter, we will discuss it then."


    Binz lowered his head slightly and said.


    "Um!"


    In fact, for Chang Nuo, although this trip to the North Sea did not achieve the desired effect, it was not nothing.


    Through the ability of the soul fruit, Changnuo can discover Zefa''s inner thoughts now.


    As he grows older, he no longer has so much pursuit of the previous things. In fact, what is left is nothing but hatred for this world.


    He believes that the olive branch he threw this time will definitely bring back a big fish for him in the future. On the contrary, if the other party directly agrees to join the Tru Empire, it is very likely that he will be very passive.


    Even though Zefa was once an admiral of the Navy Headquarters and possessed extremely powerful strength, this has long since be a thing of the past.


    Although he still has a veryrge influence today, no matter how great this influence is, it cannot be asrge as the Tru Empire. Cultivating one''s own power is the most important part. No matter what he does in the future Things, at least, will not be restricted by anyone.


    Chang Nuo, who was staying on the boat, looked up and looked at the color of the sky today. It was a blue sky with no other colors except this color.


    The sea and sky in the distance are one color, and sailing on this boundless sea leaves people with only endless emotions.


    "Your Majesty the King, should we return directly to the Tru Empire now, or should we go in some other direction?"


    Jun He, who had been staying behind Chang Nuo, opened his mouth and asked.


    "Go back, but this time you go back by yourself. I have something to doter. After I go back, I will inform others and start working ording to the n. The great turmoil is not far away. This time, the Tru Empire needs to participate no matter what. Get in."


    Chang Nuo said calmly and leisurely.


    "Are you talking about the incident with Whitebeard?"


    Junhe asked doubtfully.


    "Yes, I will take you there to see the next war."


    There was an evil smile on Chang Nuo''s lips, but his tone was still very calm.


    In fact, Chang Nuo has been looking forward to this war for a long time. He wants to know, as a turning point in this world, what extent will the war on top witnessed with his own eyes reach?


    But before witnessing this war, he still needs to do his own things and make all the preparations that need to be done in advance. No matter what, he must make this war reach the level of his ideal.


    "Junhe, when we go back, we can take out our dusty things. That thing has been there for a long time. It has been at least 800 years. It is time to let ite out to see the sun!"


    Changnuo said.


    "How to do?"


    "This is his drawing. Based on this kind of thing, we will build three more ships. We must ensure that these things arepleted within at least two years. After we go back, we will still leave this matter to Abona, but this thing The impact was too great, so we built it on an empty ind."


    As Chang Nuo said, he took out a thick book from his pocket. Each page recorded various parts, including their final assembled appearance.

 Chapter 403 Ancient Weapons

    <h4>Chapter 403 Ancient Weapons</h4>


    Pluto, who has been in the dust for 800 years, should prepare for his next battle. At least in that hollow mountain, he can no longer suppress his momentum ofpeting in the sea.


    When he first met this big guy, Changnuo even thought about selling it directly to the system to exchange for money, and then enhance his own strength, but the price of buying this thing was higher than the price he sold it for. It is even hundreds of times higher. If the two are converted, it is not a good deal at all.


    If you directly purchase a copy of this blueprint now, the cost is actually almost equivalent to the price of buying an Infinity.


    After all, it is about the future hegemony of the sea, and some money still needs to be spent.


    At present, the entire Toru Empire knows the news about Pluto''s existence in this country, and only Changnuo and Junhe beside him know about it. Even so, the next Pluto construction project will belong to the first level of Toru Empire. Top secret information.


    "Your Majesty the King, my subordinates will take full responsibility for this matter and will coordinate with General Abona to ensure that there will never be any problems with this matter."


    Junhe said seriously.


    From the moment he knew that the Toru Empire had Hades, Junhe already knew what this thing meant. Even now that the Toru Empire was strong enough topete with the navy, even so, being able to produce Hades inrge quantities, It can also cause hostility between all other forces.


    After all, this thing can be regarded as one of the three major weapons in ancient times. The fear it can cause to others, every time one is built, is definitely no less than the threat that a top general can cause.


    "I''ll leave the matter to you first, and I''ll leave first. I''ll make things more beautiful when I get back."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile, and in the next second his entire figure began to loom, until finally he disappeared into this space.


    On the verge of a big event, Chang Nuo was full of expectations for what would happen next.


    In the new world.


    Aboard the Abdick, today is the most lively day. Fortunately, there is no one monitoring it. This is mainly because the leaders of the two top forces in the New World meet today.


    Red-haired Shanks led his crew into Whitebeard''s territory, and all the details were almost consistent with the development in the plot.


    But the only difference today is that the moment Shanks first boarded the Abby Dick, subtle changes began to appear in the space. Before they startedmunicating, a figure appeared directly from the space.e out.


    Chang Nuo had already left a space imprint here when he first came to the Moby Dick, so no matter how far apart they are, as long as the space imprint can still exist, he can do it again at any time. Came to this ce.


    "It seems that I came here neither early norte. I didn''t expect that today would be quite lively."


    After Chang Nuo came out, he didn''t even notice other people''s eyes. As soon as Shanks was standing on the boat, he said with a smile on his face.


    Those who were originally on board the Abdic were already shocked by the arrival of the red-haired Shanks, but now they didn''t expect that another Emperor Tru came right after him. They couldn''t figure out what day it was today. .


    At least no matter what, these three people can already hold up half of the entire pirate world, but today they are gathered together here. No matter what kind of thing it is, once it is photographed by those reporters, it will definitely be top news.


    Today was the first official meeting between Chang Nuo and Shanks. They had more or less had some grudges between them before.


    At this moment, everyone on the red-haired pirate group looked shocked. Even their smartest vice-captain, when they saw Chang Nuo appearing, their expressions were extremely expressions. surprised.


    "Guhahahaha~, boy Tru, I didn''t expect you toe today?"


    Whitebeard was still sitting there, and he was also shocked when he saw Chang Nuo for the first time. The two of them, who were calm and calm one second, felt incredible about this guy''s arrival the next second.


    Shanks didn''t speak, but looked carefully at Chang Nuo who had juste over.


    "Old man, I haven''t seen you in two months. It seems that you are in good health."


    Changnuo said with a smile, then turned his eyes to Shanks, looked at him with interest and said, "The red-haired Shanks of the Four Emperors is really rare. So far, the Four Emperors of the entire sea force Among them, you haven��t seen it so far.��


    "It''s really surprising. I didn''t expect to be able to meet the famous Emperor Tru today. It''s such an honor!"


    Shanks said, but there was no expression of honor on his face. Apart from the initial shock, he had a serious look from beginning to end.


    There was no way he could have imagined that if he came to Whitebeard''s territory today, he would be able to meet the guys in the South China Sea.


    I had deliberately avoided himst time, but I didn''t expect to encounter him this time.


    On the red-haired pirate ship, the vice-captain Beckman also showed a serious face, but what can he do now? Now that we have already encountered it, we can only treat it as if nothing happened.


    "It''s really surprising. I didn''t expect that I could see Captain Shanks despite being so far away. It''s worth my trip."


    Chang Nuo said with the same smile.


    "Then why does His Majesty King True here?"


    As he spoke, Shanks'' overlord-like domineering energy suddenly burst out from his body, and he pressed all his aura towards Chang Nuo alone.


    "Oh~, I just want toe and see the old man with white beard. Meeting Captain Shanks here is purely idental, but since I have met him, how can I not say hello? Don''t you think so?"


    After saying thest sentence, Changnuo himself began to emit overlord-colored domineering energy. The collision between the two overlord-colored domineering energies instantly caused lightning and thunder in the entire sky.


    Nowadays, it is not just the crew members of the Whitebeard Pirates. Looking at all this, the red-haired pirates are also a little incredible.


    They had no idea why their captain and Emperor Tru felt so tense when they first met. This thought was probably the question everyone wanted to ask at this moment.


    From the first meeting to now, it onlysted a few minutes. If things go wrong, the two of them may start fighting directly, but they have not been in contact with each other in the meantime. This is confirmed by all the crew members of the Red Hair Pirates. past things.

 Chapter 404 The first time I saw red hair

    <h4>Chapter 404 The first time I saw red hair</h4>


    Emperor Toru and the captain of the red-haired pirates, as soon as they met, they already started to have such a powerful and domineering conflict. This must be something that no one else had thought of.


    But now this group of people can only stand aside and watch, and there is no more action. After all, they are justpeting with each other with domineering colors and domineering, and there is no actual action.


    "It''s enough, you two. I, the Abby Dick, can''t bear your overbearing power, especially boy Tru. I still haven''t settled the debt you causedst time with you."


    Whitebeard opened his mouth and shouted. He is now the only one among these people who has the right to speak. Perhaps he is also the only one who has the ability to stop the two people from officially starting a war.


    After hearing this, Chang Nuo was the first to directly withdraw the overlord-colored Haki he had released, and then Shanks also withdrew it.


    The only difference between the two is that a drop of cold sweat has begun to appear on Shanks'' forehead, while Chang Nuo has no impact at all.


    After all, the person staying on the periphery is not his own body, and cannot be attacked at any physical or spiritual level. Even the pressure of overlord color and domineering energy cannot have the slightest impact on the person in the mirror image.


    "Don''t stand still,e and sit together. The Abdick is not as good as your ship, and the conditions are a bit rough. It''s rare that you twoe together, let us sit down and have a drink."


    Whitebeard shouted with a smile.


    The bottle of potion that Chang Nuo gave Whitebeard a few years ago has expired, and he is still sitting there with tubes inserted into his body, but even so, Whitebeard''s domineering power can still be clearly disyed.


    Changnuo did not refuse Whitebeard''s invitation. There was no ce to sit on this deck. He just sat directly on the ground with his legs crossed about ten meters away from Whitebeard.


    The same goes for red-haired Shanks. The positions where the three of them sit form a kind of triangle, and the distance between them is actually quite simr.


    "I didn''t expect Emperor Tru to be so powerful?"


    Beckman on the red-haired pirate ship said with emotion and surprise.


    It was inevitable that he would be so surprised. After all, as far as he knew, there had never been anyone in the world who couldpete with his own captain in overlord domineering, let alone that there was someone who could surpass Shanks in overlord domineering.


    In fact, everyone else looked shocked at this time. The other crew members on the ship had all seen their captain''s predicament just now. This was the main reason why they had to sigh.


    "It seems that the captain has really met his opponent this time. I didn''t expect that this guy would be so strong at such a young age?"


    Jesus Bu''s face was calm, but his heart was already in turmoil. He looked at them seriously on the Abby Dick in front and whispered.


    "By the way, what kind of Devil Fruit ability does this guy have? Why hasn''t he given any clear information so far? It seems really troublesome."


    A fat man holding a huge chicken leg said while chewing.


    Beckman turned to look at him, sighed slightly, and said, "Now the outside world estimates that the most likely possibility is the space-type Devil Fruit ability, but the overlord-like domineering power of the opponent is so powerful, this really makes everyone... Never thought of it.��


    "In the end, you don''t know whether the other party is an enemy or a friend?" Jesus put one hand on the fence, but his eyes were always staring ahead warily.


    But his idea is obviously redundant. Although red-haired Shanks is the four emperors, in some aspects, if Whitebeard is not too old, he will definitely be the weakest existence.


    Even though he used the three-color domineering power very well, inparison, the level of this domineering power is probably not as good as that of Garp in the navy.


    "You twoe on board the Abdick. Don''t worry about anything for now. You''d better have a drink. We''ll talk about the restter."


    Whitebeard held up a huge wine bowl in front of him and said domineeringly.


    However, at this moment, two jars of wine had been ced next to the two of them from the very beginning. This wine was the same batch that Changnuo gave to Whitebeard before. It is estimated that the other party was reluctant to drink it, so after several months, it was still there. There are so many.


    Shanks still kept a serious look on his face, and he directly opened the seal on the wine jar. He pulled the wine jar with one hand and held it with the other hand. He faced the jar and started to drink heavily.


    Changnuo looked at his image. They were pirates, but as Emperor Tru, he still needed to maintain his elegant image no matter where he was.


    Anyway, he took out a small bowl from nowhere. Chang Nuo poured the wine into the bowl and saluted in the direction of White Beard.


    After finishing the first ss of wine, it was time to start discussing business. The crew members of the Whitebeard Pirates were standing on both sides. Although no one spoke, the serious expressions on their faces could still be seen. .


    "New York, I won''t beat around the bush, you can''t let Ace chase this guy Teach, he is a very dangerous person, and Ace will not be his opponent."


    Shanks said seriously.


    Although his hand was still on the wine jar at this moment, his other hand was already holding the knife at his waist.


    At this moment, Whitebeard also looked at Shanks seriously, without any expression on his face. After staying for a while, Whitebeard said, "Teach vited the rules of the Whitebeard Pirates and attacked his own family. No matter what, he will You need toe back and suffer, how can you just stop when you say stop?"


    "Have you seen the scar on my face? This was created by that guy Teach. I told you many years ago that Teach is definitely not that simple. Ace cannot be his opponent. I We can��t let any problems arise with the captain��s only son!��


    Shanks said coldly again.


    "I am Whitebeard, the king of the sea. If I don''t care if something happens to my own son, how will others view my Whitebeard Pirates in the future?"


    At this moment, all the members of the Whitebeard Pirates could see that their father was angry. They all lowered their heads and did not speak. Maybe they didn''t know what to say at all?


    Shanks also sat there and looked at Whitebeard quietly. All he could do when he came here was to persuade the other party. The only one who really made the decision was Whitebeard himself. After all, Ace was now in On the boat, even though there was a lot of reluctance in my heart, speaking out of it didn''t have much effect.

 Chapter 405 The upcoming agreement

    <h4>Chapter 405 The uing agreement</h4>


    Changnuo was like a bystander, watching the argument between the two. No one from the two pirate groups would get involved in their conversation, and they were all watching on both sides.


    As for the two parties involved, they were actually testing each other. Although Whitebeard''s body was covered with various needles, it did not mean that he had lost his power as a tiger.


    ckbeard has been able to tolerate the Whitebeard Pirates for so long. How can he do things that they can''t see?


    "What exactly do you do to get Ace back?"


    Shanks asked again.


    "Then let''s wait until he brings this guy Teach back. Thest thing our Whitebeard Pirates can tolerate is a traitor." Whitebeard said.


    "Are you just gambling with Ace''s life? He will not be Teach''s opponent. Don''t you know this?"


    Shanks asked.


    "There is no such thing as clear or unclear. As long as the people who fall in love with my Whitebeard Pirates are all my sons, people like Teach who can attack their own friends are absolutely uneptable to the Whitebeard Pirates." Since he can break this rule, he will naturally need to ept the pursuit from the Whitebeard Pirates. No matter when and where, Teach must return here to ept punishment, and there is no room for negotiation."


    Whitebeard suddenly said domineeringly.


    "I don''t agree with you doing this. Ace is the captain''s only son, and I will never allow him to have any problems!"


    Shanks said, and pulled out the long knife directly from his waist. However, at this moment, Whitebeard also took out arge knife simr to the shape of Guan Gong''s knife from behind his seat. Just as the two of them were shing at each other. , Changnuo walked lightly between the two of them.


    Blue light emitted from his body instantly, forming two lines of defense on both sides. When they shed, the de seemed to touch steel. In an instant, two huge attack traces appeared in the sky, and white clouds appeared. Therefore, it has been cut into two pieces, and this attack haspletely achieved a situation where the edge cannot be seen at a nce.


    "Didn''t we agree toe over and talk about things? Why get angry while we are chatting? This kind of thing ispletely unnecessary."


    Changnuo looked at the two of them with a smile and said.


    "Boy Tohru, I''m still chatting with this guy Shanks, why do you want to get involved? Also, why are you here?"


    Whitebeard asked, ring.


    "Old man, you don''t need toe over to question me. The purpose ofing here this time is very simple. That is, the agreement we agreed on before will begin soon."


    Chang Nuo still kept a smile on his face, but the expression on his face already made people feel quiteplicated.


    After Whitebeard heard this, he silently put the knife back, but Shanks still stood there as he was.


    "Shanks, don''t you want to give up?"


    Chang Nuo turned to look at Shanks and suddenly asked in a cold voice.


    After all, the opponent''s knife is still in his hand and has not been taken back. With a serious and cold expression, if the opponent is willing to continue fighting, Chang Nuo will not mind taking action himself.


    "Do not misunderstand!"


    Shanks said coldly, and then put the knife in his hand back into the scabbard.


    Although the two of them only took action once, what shocked them the most was Emperor Tru.


    Emperor Toru dared to step into the middle of the attack between the two four emperors on the sea and directly resolve it. This kind of courage and strength could conquer everyone in an instant.


    Although he has calmed down, Whitebeard''s face is very gloomy, because he still remembers the agreement he made with Emperor Tru.


    However, the main content of this agreement is that after his death, he will take care of the current Whitebeard Pirates. However, the other party came today and directly said such a thing, which made him obviously realize that the Whitebeard Pirates will definitely be next. Something is going on.


    If someone else had said such a thing, Whitebeard would definitely have dismissed it, but now Emperor Tru and his family havee in person, which means that this matter must be more reliable.


    Almost everyone in the Whitebeard Pirates knows that Xia Li from Fish-Man Ind has entered the Toru Empire. However, even the aging Whitebeard who stays here is quite aware of this woman''s ability and can urately predict what will happen next. , this situation was actually familiar to Whitebeard a long time ago.


    But this silent expression onlysted for a while, and then Whitebeard burst outughing. He looked at Chang Nuo with a stern gaze, and then said calmly, "If that day reallyes, I, Whitebeard, will naturally follow our promise."


    "I hope so. Our Tru Empire will definitely go to see you off by then."


    "It really makes people look forward to it. I have been wandering on this sea all my life. I don''t want to be like Roger, but I still need to choose my own path to my final destination." Whitebeard said.


    "You can rest assured on this. Under the witness of everyone, you Whitebeard will be a legend of an era, even as legendary as Roger." Chang Nuo said calmly with a slight smile.


    Everyone else heard it in confusion, but Marco, as the captain of one team, seemed to hear something from the conversation between the two.


    His face was gloomy from beginning to end, because he already knew that his father and Emperor Tru had made an agreement before, but as for what this agreement was, no one except the two of them knew it yet. and know.


    Shanks sat there in confusion, also not understanding what it meant, but still watching the conversation between the two of them with interest.


    "Boy Tru, is this why you came here?" Whitebeard asked as he sat there.


    Changnuo smiled politely, then turned around and walked back to where he was sitting just now, and continued to sit down.


    "This is just one of them. I came here to tell you about another thing. Golden Lion Shiji is dead, and I did it myself."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Ski? When did it happen?"


    Shanks asked suddenly, with an expression of surprise on his face.


    After all, even when the four emperors knew about such a thing, it was enough to surprise them. They simply didn''t know what kind of person Shi Ji was.


    Whitebeard was actually the same, but he seemed to have seen through these things. He was only slightly absent-minded, and then his whole person returned to a calm state.

 Chapter 406 Promise?

    <h4>Chapter 406 Promise?</h4>


    Everyone else, whether they were the crew of the Whitebeard Pirates or the red-haired pirates, were still shocked to hear the news.


    Everyone can know what kind of person Golden Lion Shiji is. A strong man from the previous era, a figure who can evenpete with Whitebeard. Although he has disappeared for more than 20 years, he did not expect to appear again. This was actually the case when the news came out.


    "It seems that the people of the previous era are gradually beginning to take theirst breaths. If nothing happens in the future, the leader of this era should be in your hands. We are all old, and there are also a few old guys in the Navy. With support, Shi Ji��s ending like this is not an insult to him.��


    Whitebeard said with emotion.


    It is true that whether it is White Beard, Golden Lion Shiji, or even the current top brass of the Navy, Warring States and Garp, although they were all top powerhouses in the previous era, they are all disabled now no matter how you say it. The Year of the Candle spans an era, and you always need to draw an end to your life.


    Whitebeard actually doesn''t have much traffic, but he is just worried about how these crew members will deal with themselves after his death. Although they are in the new world, the strength of these people is not particrly weak, but everyone can understand, As long as Whitebeard lives, no one will dare to set foot on Whitebeard''s territory to fight for it.


    Once he disappears, it will bepletely different, and the pattern of the entire new world will bepletely broken. By that time, even if the captains of these squads are not very weak, they will still be unable to withstand attacks from others from all directions.


    It''s just that these things are things for the future. The residual power of the strongest man in the world can still intimidate others without leaving any room.


    Shanks sat there quietly, and the three of them were silent for a long time. Whitebeard was the first to ask, "How were you before Shiki died?"


    "It''s very bad. Aftering out of Impel Down City, not only did he have two broken legs, but more importantly, his ideals were broken. A person without ideas lives almost like a zombie. The glory of the past has long since disappeared. He All I want is to find a more suitable destination in the final stage, but now everything is lost in the sea, which can be regarded as thest dignity of a legendary figure."


    Chang Nuo said seriously.


    "Maybe sometimes I really envy this old guy."


    Whitebeard said, and after a pause, he immediately burst intoughter.


    This kind ofughter may have a sense of self-deprecation. After all, he and Shi Ji are almost the same. As he grows older, his strength has long been inferior to before. Although he is much stronger than Shi Ji now, he is still much stronger than Shi Ji. In the end, the position of the Four Emperors is nothing more than the remaining power of the past.


    "New York, I''m leaving first, but I hope you can think carefully about Ace''s matter."


    As soon as Whitebeard finishedughing, Shanks stood up and turned around to leave, turning his head and saying something to Whitebeard again.


    No one knew what he was thinking at this moment, but then he jumped directly onto his ship without looking back.


    Maybe it was because he felt Whitebeard''sst silent expression, or maybe it was because of other circumstances. Anyway, in the end, Shanks didn''t want to get involved in other things.


    After Shanks boarded the ship, no one in the Red-haired Pirates spoke. Everyone remained silent. Then Shanks looked back at the Whitebeard Pirates. After this situation, the entire ship began to slowly leave this ce.


    "It seems like the rest is for us to talk."


    The moment Whitebeard left Shanks, he had already begun to show a serious expression, and then said these words calmly.


    Changnuo also understood what the other party meant. As soon as his words fell, a space barrier instantly covered the area, and by the way, the other members of the Whitebeard Pirates were isted from the outside.


    Only at this time, Changnuo specially brought in Marco.


    Not only is he the captain of the Whitebeard Pirates, he is also the most powerful one in the entire pirate group besides Whitebeard.


    The deputy''s strength is enough for Marco to participate in this chat.


    At the moment he came in, Marco was still confused, but he didn''t say much. After all, the two people in front of him kept their faces serious at the moment.


    "Can we save him?"


    Whitebeard asked.


    After all, now I can more or less guess what kind of thing will lead to my end. After crossing the sea for decades, Whitebeard''s sensitivity has not diminished with age.


    "Yes, but you can''t. As a person from the previous era, I hope this time I can leave you with a chance to end perfectly."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "Guhahahaha~, boy Tohru, you don''t have to show such an expression. I am Whitebeard. Even if ites to an end, I will still be the strongest person in this sea."


    Hearing his father''sughter and these words, Marco immediately became a little anxious. He turned his head and looked directly at Chang Nuo and asked seriously, "What do you mean by this?"


    "Marco, I want you toe in this time mainly because I want to exin the future. A few years ago, I made an agreement with Toru. Once my Whitebeardes to an end, the Whitebeard Pirates will The group is in your hands. From now on, don��t worry about the pirate group calling itself a pirate group. Join the Toru Empire and let them have a better life. That��s all.��


    Whitebeard said lonely.


    But no matter what, Marco finally understood it. What his father said sounded like hisst words.


    "Dad!!"


    Mark shouted in disbelief. Looking at the haggard white beard, he really didn''t want to believe these words.


    But at this time, Chang Nuo stood up, and a blue pill slowly appeared in his hand. When he walked to Whitebeard, he stretched out his hand and handed the thing directly to him.


    "This thing can bring you back to the state of your youth for a short time. I look forward to what you will look like next."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "It seems that your kid also wants to use this kind of thing to pave the way for your future!"


    Whitebeard asked.


    But he didn''t get angry or show any other expression about this kind of thing. On the contrary, he still looked calm overall.

 Chapter 407 Whitebeard’s former captain

    <h4>Chapter 407 Whitebeard��s former captain</h4>


    Listening to what Whitebeard said, Chang Nuo also didn''t take it seriously. It''s just that the other party has been traveling on the sea for so many years. Regardless of his thoughts or scheming, if converted, he may be much higher than himself.


    This time Chang Nuo did have this idea and gave such a valuable thing to Whitebeard. His purpose was very simple, that is, when the war started, he would use Whitebeard''s ability to weaken the overall naval strength.


    Once that timees, the strength between the Navy and the Tru Empire will have been infinitely equalized.


    In fact, informing Whitebeard of this matter in advance has no impact at all. Let''s not talk about whether Whitebeard can control the development of the situation. For now, Ace is probably already in the hands of ckbeard.


    In fact, even if Changnuo expresses his attitude, the Whitebeard Pirates will not show any special behavior at this time.


    "Now that everything has been given to you, if you want to think so, I''m afraid there is nothing wrong. After all, with your own hands, it is not in vain for us to cooperate with you in weakening the other party''s power."


    Changnuo looked at Whitebeard and said with a smile.


    "I can do this without any problem at all, but one thing, boy Tru, you have to remember, my sons are absolutely not allowed to have any problems. This is myst request to you."


    Whitebeard said cautiously.


    "Dad, we can protect ourselves. Now tell us what happened?"


    Marco stood aside and asked anxiously.


    Whitebeard looked at his son, but just turned to nce at him, and then continued to say to Chang Nuo, "Sister Luo is gone, and now Shi Ji is gone too. The characters who belonged to the previous era have now disappeared. I It seems the time hase for this old guy."


    Listening to Whitebeard''s sigh, Chang Nuo stared at him with a slight smile, and said again lightly, "The strong men of the previous era have not disappeared at all. Another thing worth noting is that your old captain is not dead now."


    This news can be regarded as an extremely important matter. Once it spreads, it may cause an unknown amount of shock in the sea.


    Whitebeard just smiled contemptuously when he heard this, and then said, "Which captain are you talking about?"


    "Is it possible, old man, that you still have many captains?"


    "Are you talking about Rocks?"


    "There is also a seventh floor in the Impel City, which is inessible to ordinary people and the navy. Locks is living there now."


    Changnuo looked at Whitebeard and said.


    Although he couldn''t believe whether this kind of thing was true, Whitebeard corrected his state.


    In his understanding, Rocks had died long ago in the Battle of God''s Ind, but the news conveyed by Emperor Tru in front of him still made him a little unbelievable in the final analysis.


    After all, even if Rocks lives to this day, he is almost 100 years old. For the former maritime overlord, neither the navy nor the world government can keep him alive for so long.


    "How did you know this news?"


    Whitebeard was not too surprised, but asked seriously.


    Because he has been traveling across the sea for decades, he has never heard of this news.


    Inparison, he did not believe that the Tru Empire was so capable and could even explore the situation below the Impel City.


    "You don''t need to know whether the news is true or false. But when the war starts, I will go to Impel Down City first. Is the news true or false? You will know after taking a look."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "That''s true. The navy doesn''t matter. It''s just that the world government feels too mysterious. There are many things that cannot be exined. It is reasonable to find some particrly powerful people." Whitebeard said.


    "Golden Lion Shiji also said this before he died. He said that the world government is not as simple as it seems. There must be something behind it that all of us don''t know. Although I don''t know what he was talking about, but One thing is absolutely certain, and that is that there are extremely powerful people behind the World Government, and this power is so powerful that it can even make you and me despair."


    Chang Nuo thought about what he knew. In this world, the Four Emperors were not the most powerful beings. There were indeed more powerful people, and no one knew how powerful they were.


    But it is conceivable that the ending must be rted to Ralph Drew.


    Chang Nuo still remembers everything recorded on it, but it''s just that it hasn''t been made public yet.


    "Shiki is right. In order to explore the secrets of Rafdru, Shiki personally challenged the World Government. You must have seen it. If you want to change the world, I guess I can only leave it to your hands. Here, you have a lot of people on your shoulders, too, boy Tru."


    With a smile on his face, Whitebeard put the blue pill that Chang Nuo had just given him into his pants pocket.


    Marco just stood there with a confused look on his face, listening to the chat between the two. He couldn''t say a word at all, and he didn''t even understand what was being heard.


    I can only stand there silently and try to understand as much as possible about themunication topics between them.


    The people standing outside were all looking inside carefully, but no matter how loud the noise was inside, they couldn''t hear it.


    Everyone can only stay outside and wait, so that they can inform them of the matter as soon as theye out.


    Chang Nuo''s purpose ofing here can be considered to be perfectly achieved. Regardless of whether other members of the Whitebeard Pirates will join the Tohru Empire in theter period, this kind of thing doesn''t matter anyway.


    What Chang Nuo wants to do is being perfected step by step. At least this time, he still wants to directly cause turmoil in the entire pirate world.


    at the same time.


    The protagonist group that has attracted much attention has now arrived at the bottom of the sky ind.


    Their group had not encountered any major setbacks along the way, and now that they were at the bottom of the empty ind, they were beginning to ept the direction indicated by the record pointer.


    They are different from pirates. They want to make a fortune in this sea, so they naturally need to travel to ces unknown to others.


    Today''s Gaya Ind is no longer what it used to be. Although it is still a gathering ce for some pirates, at least it is not as unscrupulous as it used to be. It is all a pirate''s life.


    The Toru Empire had unconsciously taken over the management of this area a long time ago. Although Gaya Ind is not very big, it is currently the fastest way to Sky Ind.


    For the Tru Empire, which has absolute control over Sky Ind, almost all areas that can enter the location of Sky Ind have exhausted all means to control it.


    In fact, Gaya Ind is currently facing the same situation.

 Chapter 408 The Straw Hats’ New Direction

    <h4>Chapter 408 The Straw Hats�� New Direction</h4>


    Even though this ce is still awless zone where pirates are rampant, most of the shops here are controlled by people from the South China Sea.


    In normal times, they are no different from ordinary people, except that most of the time they are the people whoe here immediately.


    Especially for those who may talk about going to the Sky Ind, these shop owners will try their best to stop them. The purpose is to make them retreat and tell them that there is no such thing as an Sky Ind in the world.


    After a long period of exaggeration, everyone gradually understood that there is no empty ind in this world. However, those who know these things are basically concentrated in the upper-level power people. For these ordinary pirates, whether they know it or not It''s not that important anymore.


    Gaya Ind looks much more prosperous than before. Not only does it have pubs, restaurants, and even several hotels.


    At least those who have always been willing to stay in thiswless zone, each and every one of them, for some reason, still follow the rules here.


    In most cases, they will not attack each other on Gaya Ind. Even if they are pirates, in many cases, most of the people living here are no different from ordinary people. After all, people who can be pirates, more In fact, they are ordinary people. If they couldn''t survive, they wouldn''t choose to take this road.


    Staying on Gaya Ind can at least satisfy their warm life, so in the past few years, the permanent poption on Gaya Ind has also been increasing.


    No one knows whether all this peaceful life will be broken by the arrival of the Straw Hats?


    "Luffy, do you think there really is an empty ind? Even people living here have never heard of it. Is there really no such ce?"


    In the hotel, Nami asked Luffy who was walking in front of her in confusion.


    "Sky Ind?? I don''t think there is one."


    Usopp said.


    "If there really was such a ce, wouldn''t there be a lot of delicious food?" Chopper said with drooling eyes.


    Because until now, no one dares to confirm whether the sky ind exists, and they don��t know from what kind of ce one can get up? But ording to the instructions on the record pointer, their next destination is indeed heading upwards.


    With just this piece of information, they are not sure which direction they should take next.


    "Sky Ind really exists, just 10,000 meters above Gaya Ind."


    When everyone was still confused, Robin said directly and lightly.


    "How do you know? Could it be that you have been to Sky Ind?"


    Zoro asked.


    "I have never been to Sky Ind, but this ce does exist. The only way to get to Gaya Ind is to enter through the sky current. However, this situation is very dangerous, and the chance of sessfully going up is only 100%. It��s just one percent.��


    Robin said, still smiling.


    "Sky current? What is this?"


    Luffy turned his head and asked in confusion.


    "Isn''t this the right time to talk about this now? Robin, why do you know this kind of thing?"


    Nami asked equally curiously.


    "That''s right, Robin." Usopp said.


    "Have you forgotten where Ie from?"


    Robin continued to smile and then opened his mouth to speak.


    "I remember Robin, you seem to be from the West Sea, but you are from the South China Sea!"


    Nami said.


    "Kongdao is now a military base of the Tru Empire. If we can''t go up there, we''ll try our best not to go up there."


    Robin said.


    Sanji was the only one among these people who knew Robin''s identity. He never mentioned this matter from beginning to end, and could only look at each other silently.


    Now after such a long voyage, they have already recognized each other as partners. As for what kind of identities they have? This thing no longer matters to them.


    After all, Ace wanted to reveal Robin''s identity a long time ago, but in the end it was Luffy himself who stopped him.


    Although everyone was shocked when they heard the news, they were not overly surprised.


    After all, along the way, they had gained some understanding of the huge power of the Toru Empire, and they would not be sad because of such things.


    But the moment they heard that Sky Ind really existed, several people couldn''t help but feel a little surprised.


    "It turns out that this is a military base of the Kru Empire. It seems that it is better for us not to go up there. Otherwise, if we are caught by others then, wouldn''t it be impossible to move forward?"


    Usopp said a little guilty.


    "No, since we are already here and the record pointer is pointing upwards, I must go to Sky Ind."


    Luffy said seriously.


    "True Empire? It seems that we have a chance to get in touch with their powerful people."


    Zoro stood nearby and said excitedly.


    "What''s going on with you two? Don''t you feel terrible?" Chopper''s attitude was actually simr to Usopp''s. He would not cause trouble if he could.


    The most critical thing is that life is at stake, and the most important thing is that Robin has proposed that the only way to go up is only a 1% chance of sess, which means whether they can go up is still a question.


    "Robin, the fact that Sky Ind is a military base of the Tru Empire must be a military secret of this country. If you know this, you must know someone, right?"


    Nami winked at Robin and said, showing a ttering look and leaning a little closer in Robin''s direction.


    "If you are not afraid of the danger brought by the soaring sea currents, I can take you to the Sky Ind to have a look." Robin said with a smile.


    "I don''t know how to determine the current of the sky? How to go up?" Usopp covered his head and thought for a moment.


    But while they were thinking, the owner of the restaurant where they were staying quietly walked over.


    He looked at the appearance of this group of people, and then said with a smile, "Everyone, from what you said, it seems that you want to go to Sky Ind? But I do know a little bit about the cliff at the edge of Gaya Ind. There is a guy named Montncoulikai living nearby, and he has been studying this matter. Maybe if you ask him, you should be able to find the way up."


    "Is what you said true?"


    Luffy stood up in excitement. Looking at the hotel owner who was talking, the smile on his face began to twist.


    "Of course, no one in the entire Gaya Ind believes in the existence of Sky Ind, and only Montncoulikai studies this kind of thing every day." The hotel owner said.


    No one noticed when he spoke. Even when he stayed inside and listened to the group of people talking, no one noticed his expression. This was mainly because the owner of the restaurant had his eyes focused on Robin and kept his gaze. With a respectful attitude.

 Chapter 409 How to get up?

    <h4>Chapter 409 How to get up?</h4>


    The few people who got the news were even more excited now, and Luffy could hardly stop grinning.


    Several people also ate in a hurry, looking forward to the next move.


    When they reappeared, several people had followed the hotel owner''s guidance to almost the edge of Gaya Ind, where there were obvious signs of a cliff tearing.


    As for the other half of thend area, it should be just enough to connect to Apayado on the empty ind.


    But when they first came here, they didn''t find anyone there. They just found a very strange-looking building on the edge of the cliff.


    "We must havee to the wrong ce, right?"


    Zoro asked.


    At least they wereing in the right direction. This ce was exactly where the hotel owner said it was. They could also see a building, indicating that someone must live here.


    "I think we are not in the wrong ce. I guess the man named Mont nculikai who lives here should be out for something now. We might as well wait here." Usopp said.


    "Then just wait a minute. It''s very exciting to think that we will be able to enter the sky ind soon!"


    Luffy said with a smile.


    "By the way, Robin, you said Sky Ind is now the military base of the Tru Empire, but how did they get up there?"


    Nami asked suddenly confused.


    Several other people also turned their attention, but Robin walked slowly and slowly to a stone stool, and then sat down gently.


    In response to their questions, Robin smiled and said, "I''m not very clear about this. The fact that the Tru Empire''s military base is on Sky Ind is no longer a big secret. The only thing is how to get to Sky Ind. Not many people know this.��


    "So that''s it. Then when we get to Sky Ind, can''t we investigate it carefully?" Chopper said.


    "Things are probably not as simple as we thought. Although I have never been to Sky Ind, as a military base of the Tru Empire, we are definitely not allowed to go there casually." Robin said with a smile.


    "I think Robin is right about this. It can be called the military base of the Tru Empire, and it will definitely be strictly guarded. But it seems a bit early to discuss these issues now. It is better to think about how to get to the space first." Let��s talk about the ind.�� Sanji opened his mouth and said.


    "As for the soaring ocean current that the hotel owner mentioned, isn''t it quite exciting to think about it?" Luffy said with his mouth open.


    Now he was the only one showing an expectant expression. Others, especially Chopper and Usopp, had already started, lest they could avoid it, and they also said that the sess rate was less than 100%. First, if it flies into the air and then falls down, it will almost end in a burp.


    "I really want to see how powerful the swordsmen of the Tru Empire are. If I can really go up, I must challenge them." Zoro also said with excitement.


    A group of people sat directly at the door of someone else''s house, and it even felt like their own home, chatting andughing.


    As for Mont nculique himself, there is still no news.


    Robin looked at the excitement of this group of people, with a smile on his face and a look of helplessness on his face.


    It was exactly as she said. Even though he had be the Tru Emperor''s concubine, he had never set foot on the Sky Ind in the past few years, let alone how the Tru Empire reached the Sky Ind. ?


    Although I have some spection, I have never witnessed all this with my own eyes.


    Although the space portal in the mountain behind the Tru Empire Pce is not very far from the pce, this ce has almost always been ssified as a forbidden area. Except for a few high-level personnel of the empire who have permission to pass, other people want to Entering the back mountain ispletely inessible without relevant matters.


    Now that Robin has be the imperial concubine, she will not get involved in many institutional matters in the country, let alone wonder about military restricted areas.


    So far, the pace of the Straw Hat Crew''s progress is almost the same as in the original plot, but it is much faster in other aspects.


    Many details have been changed, but their general direction and process are still proceeding ording to the original n.


    On the other side of Gaya Ind.


    "Mero, you said they are going to Sky Ind next. How are we going to get there? Could it be that they also rely on the sea currents rising to the sky?"


    Enelu asked doubtfully.


    After all, his main purpose is to follow this group of people, but ording to the size of the Infinity, it is definitely impossible to reach the empty ind just by relying on the sky current.


    After all, such a huge behemoth cannot bepared with their wooden ship. The Infinity is already countless times heavier than the Meili.


    After Mero, who had been sitting there, heard what Enel said, he was stunned for a moment and then startedughing.


    Then he looked at Enelu with disdain and asked, "What is the purpose of His Majesty the King asking you to follow them?"


    "Protect the safety of the imperial concubine!"


    Enel said directly.


    "That''s alright. Your task and mission is to protect the safety of the imperial concubine. The key is where is Sky Ind? It is the military base of the Tru Empire. Most of the people above know the imperial concubine. You don''t have to worry about her. What problems could arise on the empty ind?"


    Mero said with a speechless expression.


    "Yoshi, Mero, why didn''t I realize that you have such a useful brain before? Then we can just wait down there."


    "You think everyone is just like you. Sometimes you are so stupid." Mero said sarcastically again.


    "Do you want to have a fight?" Anilu stood up and looked at the other party, his body shed with lightning.


    But Mero did not follow his habit. Although he was still lying there, he said with a smile, "It is such a boring life, and I also want to have a more passionate battle, so I will do as you said. "


    Mero''s body began to emit bursts of smoke, but now it was their turn to start fighting. Just at the beginning, Hai Ling instantly appeared in the middle of the two.


    "You two, don''t forget where this ce is? This is the exclusive property of His Majesty the King. If it is damaged by you, the consequences will be quite serious."


    Hai Ling said slightly mischievously.


    One sentence directly shocked the two of them. They originally wanted to fight passionately, but his words instantly extinguished their thoughts.

 Chapter 410 People who know

    <h4>Chapter 410 People who know</h4>


    The two of them didn''t really want to fight. They just stayed on this boat. The boring life made them feel lonely.


    After all, I have to follow a bunch of losers every day, and I really can��t find any ideals or pursuits.


    Especially for people like Anilu, who almost suffers from ADHD, there should be nothing wrong with such a boring life for ten or eight days, but this kind of life has been going on for several months, hiding in the dark every day. The silent monitoring of the situation in front really made them feel irritated.


    But the mission must continue, after all, this cannot be changed.


    On Gaya Ind.


    A group of people sat in front of the house in Montnc for more than two hours, but they still didn''t see anyonee back. It would be a lie to say they were not in a hurry.


    But just when they were getting ready to get anxious, they saw a man who looked tall and thick, with a hairstyle like a chestnut, a diamond-shaped face, a shirtless upper body, and a pair ofrge ck pants underneath, followed by two goris. The guy came back slowly.


    This man is the Mont nculique they have been waiting for, a dark-skinned and strong man.


    However, the two stars following him were holding a huge gold object in each hand. Anyway, just looking at it could already tell that it was valuable.


    Montnc, who had just arrived at the door of his house, immediately spotted these people sitting at the door. Although he was a little confused, he walked over directly.


    "Who are you? Why are you staying at my door?"


    Montnc asked directly.


    The two goris following him also showed wary expressions, and even covered the gold in their hands tighter, fearing that the other party wasing for this thing.


    "You must be Montnc, right? My name is Luffy, and I am the captain of the Straw Hat Pirates. I came here this time to ask about Sky Ind."


    Luffy walked up and said with a smile.


    But at this moment, Montnculique seemed to have heard a joke. He paused and then burst intoughter.


    "Where is the empty ind in this world? Don''t be deceived by others."


    said Montnculiquet.


    "How is it possible? Our record pointer is pointing upward. Sky Ind definitely exists, and Robin is sure that Sky Ind does exist."


    Nami stepped forward, showed him the record pointer in her hand and said.


    Listening to what Nami said, Montnc''s expression, which had beenughing just now, suddenly became serious. Then he looked around at everyone and said, "I don''t know about Kongdao. You''d better go somewhere else to say hello."


    After Montnc finished speaking, he walked directly through the crowd and returned to the room.


    When he entered his home, he looked at everyone''s expressions again when he closed the door, but in the end he closed the two doors ruthlessly.


    The same goes for the two big stars, who followed him in, obviously not saying anything more to the Straw Hats.


    The people staying outside also looked at a loss. It was clear that everyone had found this ce, but the other party was unwilling to pay attention to it. But for them, if they wanted to go to the empty ind, they could only ask the other party for help.


    But now looking at the other party''s attitude, they don''t want tomunicate with their group at all. Even for them who have the halo of the protagonist, they are suddenly in trouble.


    But the halo is the halo, and there is no way it will go out that quickly.


    Just when they were sitting down to discuss, the two goris who originally went in ran out instantly. Seeing that Luffy and his group were still there, one of the goris asked anxiously, "Do you have a doctor here? Dad has fainted." ��


    "I''m the doctor, let me go over and take a look."


    Chopper quickly stood up and said.


    As if they had found a savior, the two goris dragged Chopper directly and started to walk into the room.


    However, at this moment, Mont nculikai waspletely unconscious on the ground, his face was a little blue, and his lips had begun to turn purple.


    In this situation, if it cannot be treated in time, I am afraid that just this one time can kill the other party.


    Luffy and the others also followed behind them. Looking at Mont nculikai lying on the ground, Luffy asked Chopper directly, "What''s wrong with this guy?"


    "It should be diving disease. If you stay in the sea for a long time, it is easy to develop this disease. If it is not treated well, you may die directly. From the looks of it, it is already a serious diving disease."


    Chopper said.


    "So can you save dad here? He also often dives into the water to find gold. The symptoms of this disease were already there two years ago, but now it is more serious."


    said a gori.


    "It can be treated, but after treatment, you can never dive again, otherwise no one can save it when it rpses again," Chopper said.


    "I don''t want to dive anymore. This is already the case. Why should I go diving?"


    Another gori also said.


    From the anxious looks on their faces, they knew how important this man lying on the ground in front of them was to them. Now that he had received the answer, Chopper began to treat him.


    It is very difficult to treat a diving disease like his. Now we can only start to gradually eliminate the excess waste gas in the other party''s body, especially the gas in the lungs. After diving into the water, it was not discharged in time when it came out. If it happens over and over again, it will easily lead to the lungs bingrger and making it difficult to breathe. In a severe form like this, if not treated in time, it is very likely that you will end up belching coldly.


    "Chopper, are you sure about this?"


    Nami asked nervously while standing behind her.


    "Don''t worry, everyone. Fortunately, we''ve been staying nearby, so there shouldn''t be any big problems."


    Chopper said, looking at everyone with a smile on his lips.


    Robin was sitting quietly outside at the moment. She did not stay in the room like everyone else. Simrly, Sanji happened to be sitting opposite him and did not go in with the others.


    After all, the room inside is not particrlyrge. If a group of people squeeze in, it may cause Chopper to improperly rescue people.


    "Robin, I guess there won''t be any danger to us after we get to the empty ind, right?"


    Sanji looked at Robin and said, after all, in his impression, the Toru Empire hates pirates the most, but almost no pirates near the South China Sea area cane out.

 Chapter 411 The place where I first arrived

    <h4>Chapter 411 The ce where I first arrived</h4>


    They are also pirates, and Sky Ind is their opponent''s military base. Regarding this kind of news, Sanji is quite serious.


    "Mr. Sanji, I think there shouldn''t be a big problem. If you are willing to stay on Sky Ind, you can also experience the pace of life on Sky Ind.


    Although Sky Ind is the military base of the Sky Ind, only part of it is the living area of ??the Aboriginal people of Sky Ind. The Sky Ind will basically not get involved in this. The key is whether it can deal with the war when entering the gate of Sky Ind. Go in? It''s hard to say this kind of thing. "


    Robin said with a smile.


    "What kind of country is the Tru Empire?"


    ��If I were to describe it, it should be regarded as everyone��s ideal country, a country where there are no disputes, no need to worry about safety, and people live and work in peace and contentment.


    At least there won''t be any starvation or freezing to death in this country. Everyone has their own ce to live. They don''t have to worry about being ckmailed endlessly by the king or pce ministers like other countries. There are no taxes in this country because The country can be very wealthy just by relying on the industry andmerce that belongs to the empire.


    Perhaps more things can only be experienced by yourself. "


    Robin said.


    Yes, isn''t this kind of life what all people long for?


    Sanji is no exception. He has seen too many intrigues and deceptions and too many people living in dire straits. However, after hearing the story about the Tru Empire from Robin''s mouth, he can indeed do what the other party said. A country that everyone longs for.


    ��Sometimes I really want to take a look!��


    Sanji suddenly smiled and said.


    He was smoking a cigarette in his mouth, looking thoughtful.


    After all, this country is no longer where they can go if they want to.


    "Mr. Sanji, if you wait until Luffy bes the Pirate King in the future, maybe you can have a good experience of life in the Tohru Empire."


    Robin said again.


    "Do you really believe that Luffy can be the Pirate King? But we don''t know how difficult the next road will be. Sometimes it is even beyond our imagination."


    Sanji said seriously.


    "He will definitely know it. You don''t understand many things, and neither do I, but as partners, we really don''t need to understand too much." Robin said.


    Sanji stood there smoking a cigarette and looking at Robin. There were too many things he wanted to ask in his heart, but all the words turned into smoke when he reached his lips.


    There are some things that you only need to know in the end, and there is no need to tell too much to the outside world. Especially for Sanji, it is enough to know things, and there is really no need to tell them.


    While the two were chatting outside, Montnculikai, who was staying in the house, had already woken up.


    After being rescued by Chopper, Montnculikai was no longer as resistant as before. At least he had begun to tell his so-called history and the way to get to the Sky Ind just like in the original plot.


    Moreover, this news has provided great help to everyone, and even the time and ce where the soaring sea currents may appear are clearly stated.


    The route of the original plot development has returned to the historical point here, and even the method of entering the sky ind has not changed at all.


    As the plot has developed to this point, the only thing that has changed is that ckbeard has not appeared. Even Bemy, the spring fruit user they met, still appears here ording to the route in the original plot.


    At least at this moment, the trajectory of the original plot ispletely consistent.


    Early the next morning, Montnculikai personally drove the boat and took the Straw Hats to the location where the soaring sea current appeared. In line with the direction of the original plot, they began to move towards the location of the sky ind.


    Faced with such a situation, everyone was filled with excitement. After all, none of them knew the dangers caused by entering the sky ind in this way.


    But the good thing is that the halo of the injustice plot is still shrouding them. At least at the moment when the sea current rises up, they have begun to move forward steadily to the ten thousand meters position of Kongdao.


    But this time they go to Sky Ind and it will not be the same as the original plot. Now the changes in Sky Ind are really different from before. At least when they entered 7km, the gate of Sky Ind has also undergone huge changes. .


    When they reappeared, the group of people had already appeared within the Baibai Sea, not too far away from the gate of Sky Ind.


    "Is this an empty ind? I didn''t expect that ships can sail above 10,000 meters. I''m really looking forward to it!"


    Luffy sat in his exclusive sheep''s head seat on the Merry, looking at the endless white sea, and said with excitement on his face.


    Others kept looking around, at least at this moment they had created a miracle.


    "Captain Lu, this is just the White Sea, located about 7km away. There is still some distance before we actually reach Sky Ind." Robin said at this time.


    Although she has never been to Sky Ind, she at least knows a lot about the things on Sky Ind.


    After all, this ce now belongs to the family, so it is normal to know something about it.


    "Robin is right. The record pointer is still at the top. It seems that we still haven''t reached the area we are in." Nami said.


    "Anyway, we have reached this position now. It must be a certainty to enter the sky ind, right?" Zoro asked.


    "You said that we will fall when we reach such a high altitude? What should we do if we fall? If we stay at an altitude of 10,000 meters and fall into the sea, wouldn''t we be smashed into pieces of meat and even fished? Eat it?" Usopp asked with some fear.


    There was another little guy who was as scared as him, and that was Chopper. He didn''t feel much at first, but when he heard Usopp say this, his whole body immediately pounced on him.


    "Stop talking, it feels so terrible!"


    Chopper''s nose and tears came out together, and he said with even more fear.


    "Mr. Chopper, you can climb up those white clouds on the Baibai Sea, and you don''t have to worry about falling. More importantly, the white clouds are very soft. You can try it."


    Robin sat there, holding his face with his left hand, looking at Chopper and saying with a smile.


    "Really?"


    The first person to ask this question was Luffy. This guy asked with excitement on his face, but before he could say anything else, he had already jumped up and started jumping to those fixed on both sides of the river. On the white clouds on the side.


    But when he jumped on it, he felt as if he was sitting on a ball of cotton. Not only was he unable to fall, but it also felt soft and bouncy.

 Chapter 412 Today’s Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 412 Today��s Sky Ind</h4>


    Luffy was having so much fun that he even forgot the purpose of his trip to Sky Ind.


    "Chopper, Usopp, you really can''t fall down here, and this cloud is sofortable."


    Luffy stayed on the white clouds and shouted to Chopper and the others on the boat.


    "It seems to be true!"


    Chopper changed his fear just now and became a little excited and a little expectant.


    Afterwards, he stood on the edge of the deck and jumped hard towards the white clouds floating next to him.


    Immediately afterwards, there were three more figures on the continuous white clouds. Several people were jumping there happily, feeling the environment here.


    "Robin, why is this sky ind so strange? Why can''t you fall off even if you jump on these white clouds?"


    Nami asked, confused, walking to the edge of the deck and looking at Robin.


    "I''m not very clear about the specific situation, but Baibaiyun is also a specialty of Sky Ind. This thing can also be called Ind Cloud. Most of the buildings on Sky Ind are made of this. Tru Imperial also has mattresses processed using Shima Cloud, which are indeed soft andfortable.��


    Robin said.


    "ording to what you said, this thing should be very expensive. Why haven''t the outside world heard about these things?"


    Sanji came over with the same puzzled look on his face.


    After all, the Tru Empire started out as a business, with huge products spread almost all over the world, but they have never heard of such products.


    Zoro is purely a martial artist. He has no curiosity at all about these things and is still exercising there.


    There is even a sense of indifference to the situation outside.


    Robin looked at the confused looks of the two of them, smiled slightly and said, "As for the items on the Sky Ind, the empire has had regtions a long time ago, and no items from the Sky Ind are allowed to flow into the outside world. So even if the mattress is made by Kongdao Baibaiyun, it only exists in a very small number of families.��


    "Robin, I really want to know what your status is in the Tru Empire? ording to what you said, these things should only be used by some nobles, right?" Nami said coquettishly.


    The light of money began to shine in his eyes, and Sanji next to him felt goosebumps falling from his eyes.


    "It''s almost as you said! However, there are no nobles in the Tru Empire. Those who can use these things cannot be purchased with money. Nowadays, these Baibaiyun products issued in the Tru Empire only have some generals and ministers. Only then can you have it,�� Robin said.


    "I really didn''t expect this thing to be so valuable? If we get it, wouldn''t we make a fortune?"


    Nami said with some excitement, looking at the white clouds floating all over the ce in front of him, it was already like bundles of money in his eyes.


    If this kind of thing is really cut and sold to the bottom, it is indeed very possible to make a lot of money quickly, but if you think about it, this kind of thing is almost impossible to happen.


    Let''s not talk about how to transport it, just relying on the Straw Hats to enter the sky ind is a huge problem.


    Although they were lucky enough to get to Sky Ind this time, it doesn''t mean they will be so lucky next time.


    After sailing on this white sea for a while, Luffy, who was still ying on the white clouds, suddenly shouted, "Nami, there is a gate ahead. It seems that it is where you will enter the sky ind. Sail there quickly."


    Luffy''s words instantly attracted everyone''s attention, because looking in the direction he pointed, there was indeed a huge gate in the distance.


    This is indeed the entrance to the Sky Ind. The material is alsopressed and made by the guide. The white door gives people a very noble feeling.


    However, there are pedestrians on both sides below the gate, but there is a huge river in the middle, which must also be left for ships to navigate.


    After saying that, the three of them quickly jumped back on the boat, but when they got closer, they discovered that although the word "Air Ind" was written above the gate of this huge sky ind, there was also a sign below that said "No entry unless invited" sign.


    After seeing these words, Nami stood at the front and curiously asked Luffy, "Do we still want to go in?"


    "Everyone is already here and must go in. I''m really looking forward to what Sky Ind looks like."


    Luffy said with a smile.


    "Robin!!"


    Nami turned her gaze to Robin again, looking at the other person''s face, wanting an answer.


    "Go in, wait a moment, and I''llmunicate with them."


    Robin said with a smile.


    After receiving Robin''s guarantee, Nami dared to continue sailing the Meili forward with confidence.


    Because after crossing the gate in front of them, they officially entered the area where Sky Ind is located.


    But everything was not as smooth as expected. For a long time, although few people came to the empty ind, or no one came at all.


    However, there are still Sandians guarding the gate. Their main job and responsibility is basically to prevent anyone from entering the sky ind at will.


    It''s just that after so many years, no one has set foot on Sky Ind, so their management of this aspect has been rtivelyx.


    The Sandians spend most of their time fishing for some wind ms or other shellfish in the Baibai Sea to exchange for money. At least apart from guarding the gate, which can maintain food and clothing, it can also give them a good ie. .


    This is the life of this group of people today, but it does not mean that there is no one guarding the gate.


    At least the moment the Meili was about to enter the gate, a figure instantly appeared on the Meili.


    "No one is allowed to enter thend of Sky Ind without an invitation, and pirates are not allowed to enter."


    The voice was very cold, but beyond their imagination, the person guarding the door was actually just a child less than ten years old.


    But judging from the action of the opponent just jumping on the boat, it is obvious that he still has some strength.


    "Wow!! It turns out to be a little sister. I was really shocked just now. My name is Luffy, and I am the man who will be the Pirate King in the future. We just want to visit Sky Ind."


    Luffy said with a smile, looking at the little girl in front of him, obviously not arousing any defensiveness in him.


    In fact, the moment the little girl came up, Zoro and Sanji were already on guard.


    "No, if you go in, Brother Weber will definitely be unhappy, and I''m afraid he will me me."


    The little girl looked at everyone''s faces and still refused.


    "Webber?? Which one is Webber? I can just ask him personally to say no." Luffy asked.


    "Brother Weber is above the sky ind right now. He won''te down for a while. Even if hees back, I''m afraid it will take two or three hours. If you want to find him, just wait here." The little girl said.


    "What''s your name, little sister?"


    Nami stepped forward and asked.


    "My name is Aisha, how did youe to Sky Ind?"


    The little girl Aisha asked with some confusion.


    After all, as far as she can remember, she has never seen an outsider enter the sky ind through the gate.

 Chapter 413 Gatekeeper

    <h4>Chapter 413 Gatekeeper</h4>


    The main reason why no one is allowed at this gate is because of this.


    Because for them, from Qinghai below to Kongdao, almost everythinging in from this positiones through the Chongtian Sea.


    But no one has set foot in this ce for several years, so these people slowly rxed their vignce.


    But I didn''t expect that today would be like this. A group of upright people would appear here. Although Aisha is just a little girl, at least she knows a lot of things.


    "Since we can''t get in now, little sister, can you introduce us to the current sky ind?"


    Nami asked again.


    Aisha didn''t take much precautions when she heard this. After all, apart from the people on the empty ind, it was her first time toe into contact with those who came from Qinghai.


    The training personnel of the Tru Empire rarely appear outside Apayado. Even the supplies sent are sent to Apayado by regr personnel on the empty ind.


    So at this moment, there was more of curiosity in her heart. While facing Nami''s gentle words, Aisha also let down all her inner guard.


    "Sky Ind? But I haven''t been there for a long time. Today''s Sky Ind is a beautiful ce, but the number of times we go up is limited. Most of the time, Brother Weber takes us up. They are usually very If we are busy, we only have the opportunity when we are free."


    Aisha said a little aggrievedly.


    "Aren''t you from Sky Ind? Why can''t you get up there?" Chopper walked over and asked curiously.


    "It''s so cute. There is actually a talking tanuki."


    Elsa looked at Chopper in surprise and said.


    "You bastard! I''m a reindeer, not a tanuki." Chopper yelled angrily.


    "Reindeer?? But you don''t look like one either."


    Elsa said with a smile.


    "Forget it, my name is Chopper, nice to meet you."


    Chopper smiled and stretched out his hand. In Elsa''s opinion, this look was quite kawaii.


    "So cute, my name is Aisha, I am a Sandian from Sky Ind." Aisha said.


    "Huh? Is it possible that there are multiple ethnic groups on the sky ind?" Chopper asked.


    "No, there are currently only the Angel n and the Sandia n on Sky Ind. ording to Brother Weber, there are many people from Sky Ind on Apayado, but I have never seen them before."


    Elsa said.


    "It seems that the people in Qingdao he is talking about are those at the Trul Empire''s military base."


    Zoro was shirtless, with sweat still dripping from his body and forehead because he had just finished training, and he walked over leisurely and said.


    "True Empire, it turns out you also know about it."


    When she heard Zoro mention the Tru Empire, the expression on Elsa''s face was obviously different, and she still said with a smile.


    "What happened to the Tru Empire?"


    Nami asked with confusion on her face as she looked at Elsa.


    "The Tru Empire is very good! After all, we now rely on the Tru Empire for our food, clothing, housing and transportation. They have given us a lot of delicious food. Brother Weber said that the Tru Empire not only solved the 400-year-old problem on the empty ind War, and at the same time giving us jobs and food, everything in front of us was actually given to us by the Tru Empire, and even the ce we live in is arge ind cloud they brought from other ces."


    Aisha said with some pride, she didn''t care what kind of person the other person was, after all, even if the pirate g was hung in front of her, she probably wouldn''t recognize him.


    "Is the Tohru Empire so good? You must go and see it when you get to Sky Ind." Luffy said.


    "What you can''t see is that Apayado is an absolutely forbidden area on Sky Ind. Except for a few special people, no one can set foot in it. Even if we go to fish for sea shells, we can''t get close to Apayado. Within miles.��


    Aisha said, obviously she was used to this kind of thing. After all, when the Tru Empire came over, she was probably only two or three years old.


    The reason why I have such a reaction is basically what others have told me since I was a child.


    For the new generation of Sky Ind people, Apayado has indeed be an absolutely forbidden ce. Without special circumstances, no one is allowed to set foot on it.


    "So that''s it! I thought I could get over it." Luffy said.


    "Don''t talk anymore. There isn''t much food on the ship right now. Let''s just eat whatever we want."


    While they were still chatting, Sanji brought some food directly. Although it wasn''t anything good, it was still made quite delicately by his hands.


    A few people didn''t use any tables, chairs, etc., and just sat on the floor on the deck, with such arge te of sumptuous food in the middle.


    Aisha couldn''t help but swallow her saliva after seeing this scene. Perhaps it was the dignity of the Sandians that forced her to watch here, but as a member of the Straw Hats, they were not stingy enough to do this. degree.


    "Aisha, sit down and eat something together. Sanji''s cooking is delicious." Luffy said with a grin.


    "Can I?"


    Seeing Aisha''s cautious look, Robin touched his head directly, and then said with a smile, "Just eat it, others won''t say anything."


    "Then you''re wee." Aisha said happily. She was no longer restrained at all. At least for this girl, this group of people now seemed to have be her friends.


    Although everyone is very curious about Sky Ind, they can still only stay at the gate of Sky Ind. Even though they have great expectations, there are some rules that they don''t want to break.


    After all, since you are on someone else''s territory, you still need to follow the other person''s opinions on some things.


    Although Luffy is a carefree captain, it doesn''t mean that he is stupid. At least sometimes, this big boy can still weigh the importance of things.


    Since Sky Ind can be used as a military base for the Tru Empire, there must be countless powerful people here. They juste here to take risks, and there is no need to put themselves inplete danger.


    Indeed, just as Aisha said, after everyone had been waiting here for nearly two hours, a few people slowly began to arrive at the gate of Sky Ind from above.


    It''s not like everyone in Sandia has phone bugs when they stay here, and it''s normal for them tomunicate poorly with each other.


    The group of people who came this time was headed by Weber, a man who seemed to be tall and thick, but his appearance was simr to the original plot. He was still extremely dark and had a small braid on his head.

 Chapter 414 The unclear plan

    <h4>Chapter 414 The unclear n</h4>


    Although he said this, Weber''s strength today is not at the same level as before.


    Although the Toru Empire only asked them to guard the gate of Sky Ind, even if few people can usuallye up, the order here still needs to be maintained.


    But in those free times, Weber and the others would also take people to the military base for some simple training. Even if their strength did not meet the training standards of the Tru Empire, at least based on Weber''s training level, after several years After spending a lot of time training, his strength is at leastparable to that of some lieutenant generals.


    When they arrived at the gate, they had already discovered the existence of the Meili from a long distance away, but this time Weber would not make any unnecessary moves.


    After arriving here, Weber had a serious look on his face. When he saw Aisha staying on the boat, Weber''s face turned even more livid.


    "Aisha..."


    Weber, who was standing on the edge, shouted directly to the Meili with a serious voice.


    At this moment, everyone stood up and stood at the edge of the deck, looking at the peopleing over.


    Luffy jumped directly from the boat and stood next to the dark-skinned and serious-faced Weber. He said with a smile on his face, "My name is Luffy. I came up from below. I want to enter the sky ind to take a look. Since you have already Came here, I wonder if we can get there now?��


    "Brother Weber, are you back?"


    Aisha also jumped down, with a smile on her face, and quickly ran to Weber''s side and said.


    "Do you know who they are? How dare you get on their ship? I told you this every time!"


    Weber looked at Aisha and said angrily, the expression on his face said everything.


    The tough aura exuded by the opponent at this moment even shocked Luffy next to him.


    After Aisha heard this, she lowered her head silently, ming herself for not daring to say any exnation.


    "Why are you like this? Aisha just stayed on our ship for a while, you..."


    "Bang!!!!"


    Before Luffy could finish his words, he was greeted by Weber who punched him in the stomach. The strong inertia instantly sent him flying five to six meters. When hended on the ground, Luffy still had a painful look on his face. Holding his stomach.


    Seeing this scene, everyone else on the ship, especially Zoro, instantly drew out the knife in his hand and began to prepare for a big fight.


    But at this time, the Sandians who were standing behind Weber were also prepared.


    Just when Zoro was about to go up, Robin shouted directly: "Stop!"


    Robin has never shown his strength in front of others. No matter what situation he encounters, he always sits there and watches the show. Although the Straw Hats are her partners, more often than not, Robin remained quiet.


    But at this moment, the majesty that Robin suddenly exuded instantly made everyone stunned.


    After hearing the sound, not only Sauron stopped preparing to attack, but even Weber and the others who were staying below the ship quickly lowered their heads.


    "Luffy, are you okay?"


    After seeing everyone stop, Chopper, who was already at a loss, quickly jumped down and ran to Luffy''s side, who looked in pain.


    "It hurts!"


    After calming down for a while, Luffy said these words in pain.


    "How is that possible?" Nami listened to this in disbelief.


    After all, in their understanding, Luffy is a rubber man, and no matter what the situation, they should not say it hurts.


    But the scene in front of her now really subverted her imagination.


    Sanji stood on the deck, smoking a cigarette with a serious face, watching all this silently.


    Through Weber''s actions just now, Robin can generally confirm that the other party must know him, otherwise he would not have acted like he just did.


    At least it can exin one thing, that is, others must have already known that they came to the empty ind.


    "We have no malicious intent, we just want toe to the empty ind to have a look. Once the recording pointer in our hands is maized, we will leave naturally and will definitely not cause any impact on the empty ind."


    Robin said with a serious face.


    At this time, Luffy was also slowly helped up by Chopper. He himself looked at this scene in disbelief.


    The punch that hit him just now made him confused for a moment.


    "Why is Luffy crying in pain?"


    Usopp also looked at this scene and said in disbelief.


    Zoro frowned even more. Although he did not attack again, he kept his hand on the handle of the knife at his waist.


    "Brother Weber, Luffy and the others don''t mean any harm."


    Aisha also started to speak kind words to them at this time, but Weber didn''t care at all what this group of people were here for.


    After all, just as Robin thought, the people on the ind had already received the news before they arrived at the ind.


    The reason why Weber punched Luffy was simply because he wanted to know what kind of strength these people had.


    "I hope it will be as you said. Sky Ind has its own rules. You can go in and visit, but sometimes there are ces where you are not allowed to participate."


    Weber said, looking at Robin again. Even so, his eyes were still full of determination.


    After finishing speaking, Weber looked at Aisha who was standing next to him again, and this time he said in a somewhat friendly tone, "In the future, you must remember that people who fly such gs on ships are all pirates, and Not many pirates are good."


    "I see!"


    Elsa whispered.


    Luffy didn''t show any anger after receiving this punch. Perhaps he had realized that he seemed to be no match for the gatekeeper.


    Although he didn''t know what kind of ability the other party had, if it hit him, he could actually cause the same attack as his grandfather Garp, but he was still confused. After hearing these words, he jumped on the boat directly.


    "Nami, start heading towards Sky Ind."


    Luffy said seriously.


    But this time there was no one to stop them. Weber and his people stood nearby and watched. At least until they started to move away from the gate of the sky ind, Weber began to say leisurely, "I really don''t know what the people above want to do?"


    "I''m sorry, Brother Weber."


    Aisha lowered her head in shame and apologized.


    "Well~, it''s brother who should be the one to say sorry. His tone just now was a bit harsh, but it''s just like what brother said, they are all pirates, so try to stay away from them in the future.


    But this time the situation is different. There is a person staying above who we cannot afford to offend, although we don��t know what they are up to? But wait a minute and my brother will treat you to something delicious, okay? "


    Weber knelt down, the expression on his face waspletely different from before, and he even said something affectionate.

 Chapter 415 Explanation on the use of domineering

    <h4>Chapter 415 Exnation on the use of domineering</h4>


    Weber''s sudden change of attitude caught Elsa off guard, and she waspletely unable to understand what this guy meant?


    But now she still doesn''t care about these things. When she heard that the other party was willing to take her to eat delicious food, Aisha nodded quickly.


    After all, the only way to eat delicious food here is to go to the top of the sky ind, and only there will be some unexpected delicacies.


    Aboard the Merry.


    "Luffy, are you okay?"


    Usopp asked worriedly.


    After all, everyone could see the pained expression on Luffy''s face at the beginning, and it was obviously not an act.


    "Nothing''s wrong anymore, but it was really painful just now!" Luffy said with a grin.


    He can stillugh now, and even others are sweating for this guy.


    "What exactly is going on? Luffy is not a rubber man, why does he feel pain?"


    Nami asked with some confusion.


    "Devil Fruit users are not invincible! They won''t feel pain. That''s just because ordinary people''s attacks have no effect on Devil Fruit users.


    What Weber used just now was Haki, an ability that can directly harm those with natural Devil Fruit abilities. This kind of thing is not a Devil Fruit ability. As long as a person''s cultivation reaches the extreme, he can burst out armed Haki. "


    Robin sat aside and said leisurely.


    Although these words ignited the hearts of several people present, especially Sauron who always valued strength.


    Originally, he had always had some doubts about Robin''s identity. Although everyone on the boat was all friends, Zoro was the only one who always maintained a certain distance.


    But at this moment, he stepped over everyone and ran to Robin, asking expectantly, "Haki? Tell us what Haki is?"


    Luffy was also a little excited, and even Sanji couldn''t sit still and flicked out the cigarette in his hand.


    Robin looked at them and smiled slightly.


    Instead of talking more, it��s better to practice it directly.


    Robin was still sitting there, and then stretched out his white right hand. Under everyone''s gaze, the white right hand was instantly covered with ayer of ck in the next second.


    "This thing is Haki. There are three types of Haki. The first is the armed Haki that can be used in attack. This kind can not only enhance one''s own defense and attack capabilities, but also directly capture those with natural devil fruit abilities. .


    Nowadays, almost most of the powerful people in the new world can use this method. "


    Robin said, then stood up and walked to Luffy''s side, and then flicked the other person''s head with his dark right hand.


    At this moment, Luffy seemed to have been hit hard, and he immediately screamed again and covered his head.


    At this moment, everyone finally realized how powerful the so-called armed color Haki was.


    "What about the other two types of domineering?"


    Usopp asked curiously.


    "In addition, there is the Haki of seeing and hearing, which can be used to defend and dodge through perception, especially the ability to perceive dangerous situations at very long distances.


    These two types of domineering energy can be achieved by ordinary people through acquired learning, but the third type is overlord domineering.


    This kind of domineering power can hurt the enemy with its momentum, but it cannot be learned through the day after tomorrow. In the end, it can only rely on personal gics or domineering level. Generally speaking, having one among a million people is already very good. .


    Each of the Yonko in the New World possesses Overlord Haki. The most powerful user of Overlord Haki in the New World is known to be the red-haired Shanks, but simrly, he is not the most powerful user of Haki in the world. people. "


    "Shanks??"


    When Luffy heard the name, he instantly felt familiarity welling up in his heart, but he didn''t dwell on it too much.


    Robin was interrupted for a moment, but he didn''t mind at all, and then continued, "Before entering the new world, if we cannot master the use of Haki, then anyone in the new world may defeat us."


    "I see. Robin, since you know how to use Haki, can you teach us?"


    Zoro asked expectantly.


    "Mr. Swordsman, whether it is Armed Color Haki or Sword Gate Cultivation, it is not as simple as you think. Generally speaking, it will take at least a year to cultivate Haki to a state where you can defend yourself against enemies. When the timees, I can leave the method to you, but I��m afraid you will have to learn it yourself.�� Robin said with a smile.


    "Robin, I didn''t expect you know so much!"


    Nami said with a smile.


    "If you have the same life experience as me, you will know these things." Robin said.


    "I see!!!"


    Luffy suddenly said with surprise.


    "Listening to what Robin said, it seems that the new world is really scary. Also, is Robin actually so powerful?"


    Usopp was still immersed in surprise, thinking about Robin''s appearance just now, and opened his mouth in a daze.


    "Hmm~, Robin is really scary."


    Chopper also said.


    "It''s just that I feel safe when I stay with Robin. At least when I encounter danger in the future, I can just hide behind Robin." Nami said with a smile.


    "Don''t say that! My strength is not as strong as you think. It''s just thatpared to the first half of the Grand Line, there are very few people who can use Haki, but it doesn''t mean there are none, at least among the navy. There are many people who can possess domineering abilities.��


    Robin said.


    "It''s better not to talk about these things now, Sky Ind ising."


    Sanji directly interrupted their conversation and said that the main reason was that the white clouds in front of him had changed, and those buildings could be seen further ahead.


    These buildings are almost consistent with what Aisha told them at the gate of the sky ind. The entire sky ind looks very peaceful and peaceful, giving the impression that there are not too many worries.


    At least for them, this is considered as officially stepping into the realm of Sky Ind.


    "Kongdao is so beautiful! I really want to live here for a while."


    Chopper said with eyes shining.


    In their eyes, Sky Ind is indeed beautiful, with a pure white site, and even the architectural structures of the houses are made of white.


    At least for them looking at it from a distance, this was the first time they had seen such a ce.


    Sky Ind has indeed lived up to their high expectations. Every inch of the ce feels particrly different.


    No one stopped talking about the topic just now, and instead focused all their eyes on the front.


    Everyone is still sailing on the White Sea, but it only takes a few minutes to reach the residential areas in front of them from this distance.

 Chapter 416 The Great Prince of the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 416 The Great Prince of the Tru Empire</h4>


    In the Tru Empire.


    Chang Nuo, who had ended hismunication with Whitebeard, had returned to his own country at this moment.


    Inside the Royal Pce of Tru.


    "Your Majesty the King, everything is as you guessed. Ace, the captain of the second division of the Whitebeard Pirates, has been captured by Whitebeard and his men. It is estimated that if it goes ording to what you said, he It should start being sent to the Navy in a few days."


    In the pce, Abona stood there and said to Chang Nuo who was sitting on the sofa.


    He is responsible for all the external intelligence. Since half a month ago, the Tru Empire has begun arranging people to follow Ace all the time, just to know the process and steps of the next development.


    When Chang Nuo wasmunicating with Whitebeard, Ace had already met ckbeard. From a strength perspective, how could Ace be ckbeard''s opponent?


    The other party has been able to hide in this pirate group for so long, and was able to severely injure Shanks, who is now the Four Emperors, more than ten years ago. No matter from any angle, ckbeard is definitely not as weak as he appears.


    This kind of thing can happen, let alone the fact that Chang Nuo knows the rhythm and development of the plot, just relying on the opponent to hide from the Whitebeard Pirates for 12 years, and being able to severely damage Shanks many years ago, among them is Many things have been exined.


    "What''s going on with the Whitebeard Pirates?" Changnuo asked.


    "No news hase back yet, but judging from their appearance, it seems that they have begun to prepare. After all, His Majesty hasmunicated with them before."


    "Next, more people will be sent out. I want to know how other forces will react after knowing this situation? It is estimated that it won''t be long before ckbeard will send Ace to the Navy. I really look forward to the scene then. how is it like."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face. After all, what happened next was what he had nned all along.


    "Then do we need to make any other preparations next?"


    "No need for the moment, leave your affairs to Junhe first, and start paying attention to other situations. There is not much we have to do now, at least before the next incident urs, our Tru Empire needs to maintain absolute calm. "


    Changnuo said.


    The operation of His Majesty the King really left Abona a little confused and couldn''t figure out the reason. However, they were able to judge something from the information they got from Xia Li.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he leaned directly on the sofa and closed his eyes, and began to think about the next n. For this time, Chang Nuo has been preparing for nearly ten years, and all developments revolve around Prepare for what happens next.


    After all, after the top, the pirate world will undergo huge changes.


    This is what he has to consider.


    This side of Sky Ind.


    Luffy and his party slowly docked the boat on the shore. Unlike other ces, there is no port on the sky ind. They can only stop at some diving areas. As for the remaining ten It''s only a few meters away, just jump over.


    However, when they approached the edge, there were actually many people waiting here on the shore.


    As soon as theynded, before they could take a closer look, a child who looked about four or five years old rushed over.


    This is a man who is wearing rtively gorgeous clothes, has exquisite short hair, and has a very handsome and cute face.


    "Mom, you''re finally here!"


    The little boy ran over and jumped on Robin''s body, shouting very affectionately.


    "Mia, why are you here?"


    When he saw the boy, Robin was very surprised.


    As the boy rushed over quickly, Robin hurriedly knelt down and hugged the boy.


    Luffy and the others looked at this scene with dumbfounded expressions, not even fully understanding what was going on.


    "I''ve been here a few days ago. The main reason is that my father said that you should arrive at Sky Ind in the next few days, so I told my mother toe here and wait for you. After all, staying at home is too boring, so I''d better stay with my little mom. We are happiest together.��


    The little boy Mia said with a smile.


    This little guy is Chang Nuo''s eldest son, and the key is that he was born to the pirate empress Hancock.


    They are now almost five years old. Due to Hancock''s identity, Changnuo has not been able to give him a formal identity until now. Fortunately, Hancock does not mind this situation.


    But the rules on the Daughter''s Ind have always been there. All children born, as long as they are boys, must leave with their father. Except for Mia, he is almost universally loved on the Daughter''s Ind.


    Mia has already shown extraordinary talent at a young age, but in this world, Robin''s knowledge is already considered the highest, so many times, Mia will go to the Tru Empire through the space portal. Learn from Robin.


    "Robin, this kid is...?"


    Nami finally couldn''t hold it back and asked curiously.


    Everyone else''s eyes were attracted to this little guy, mainly because no matter from which angle they looked at it, the identity of the other person was not as simple as they imagined.


    Because at this moment, there were several men standing not far away who were probably here to protect Mia.


    "This can be considered my son, but he is the son of my husband and other women."


    When he said this, Robin still looked happy, but to other people''s ears it seemed that it was not the same thing.


    Only Sanji looks rtively normal.


    "I really want to know what the person behind you is like?"


    Nami whispered softly.


    "No matter who is behind him, Robin is our partner, but this little guy is really cute."


    Luffy said with a grin, and then began to walk towards the little guy.


    But before he could get closer, a man in ck appeared from nowhere and stood directly in front of him.


    "Don''t be so guarded, these are my partners."


    After seeing this scene, Robin immediately opened his mouth and said.


    Especially the tone of his voice that could not be rejected. However, the man in ck disappeared in the next second after hearing this.


    The scene just now really shocked the Straw Hats. They could sense how powerful the opponent was without fighting.


    Anyway, no matter what, it is definitely not something they can deal with now.

 Chapter 417 Thoughts on Dominance

    <h4>Chapter 417 Thoughts on Dominance</h4>


    The people guarding Mia had left, and everyone felt a weight of relief on their shoulders.


    Luffy himself wanted to touch this little guy, but unexpectedly Mia suddenly raised his head and looked at Luffy and said, "You must be Luffy, the captain of the Straw Hats, right? My name is Mia, nice to meet you!" "


    "you know me?"


    Luffy asked in surprise.


    "Of course, I know all of Mom''s friends. I also know Nami, the swordsman Zoro, the chef Sanji, and a little tanuki named Chopper, right?"


    "I''m a reindeer, not a tanuki!"


    As soon as Mia finished speaking, Chopper, not far away, shouted.


    "Anyway, it''s nice to meet you all. Since we have arrived at Sky Ind, let me entertain you." Mia said with a smile.


    "Mia, you haven''t said why you ran to the empty ind yet? Does your mother know?" Robin asked worriedly.


    "Mom? She must know, don''t worry about that."


    Mia said with a guilty smile at this moment.


    Robin had been in contact with him for a short period of time, and the look on this little guy''s face made it obvious that he was lying.


    But Robin didn''t want to expose the other person anymore. Instead, he stood up and hugged him in his arms. He said with a doting look on his face, "Be careful to let your mother know the price of sneaking out. You will inevitably get a beating when the timees." .��


    After hearing this, Mia stuck out her tongue and said nonchntly, "I came to Sky Ind, what does she have to worry about? Besides, my father knows that I came to Sky Ind to y."


    At the end of the sentence, Mia whispered directly into Robin''s ear.


    On Nami''s side, looking at the deep love between mother and son, she couldn''t help but curiously asked Sanji next to her, "I always feel that Robin''s identity is definitely not simple!"


    "Oh~, I''ve said it before, why bother with this kind of thing? Think about it, Ace already said that when Robin got married, the Whitebeard Pirates sent representatives there, and they could do it with their feet. Have you thought of something?" Sanji said speechlessly.


    "That seems to be true!"


    Nami said a little embarrassed.


    "Mia, you are entertaining us today, where are you going?" Robin hugged Mia and asked as he walked forward.


    Now they have allnded on the Sky Ind. Fortunately, the people on the Sky Ind now have no resistance to the peopleing from the Sky Ind, especially since the life on the Sky Ind is no longer unknown to thempared to before. How many times.


    The housing architecture here has also changed a lotpared to before. Many ind cloud buildings with two floors or more have appeared.


    This is the first time for Luffy and the others toe to Sky Ind. In fact, it is also the first time for Robin toe to Sky Ind. Although Robin has always known that the location leading to Sky Ind is at the back of the pce. She never set foot there.


    But this time, setting foot on the soft clouds of Kongdao gave people apletely different feeling.


    Now seeing the appearance of Sky Ind, Robin didn''t show much surprise. After all, many people had told him about the appearance of Sky Ind before he came here.


    Now it seems like it''s just a matter of following the direction in my memory.


    "Mom, let''s go to Yun Pce. I think the food there is a little better!"


    Mia pouted and said.


    This ce was built on an empty ind, but the cooking methods were all passed down from the Tru Empire.


    Although the whole structure is still built by Daoyun, the only difference is that this building is almost six stories high, making it the tallest building on the entire sky ind.


    At the same time, it is also a ce that thousands of people on the entire Sky Ind must go to in their free time.


    Let��s not talk about the delicious food. Just the environment inside gives people a feeling of lingering.


    "Mom has never been to Kongdao. It looks like Mia will be needed to lead the wayter."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "no problem!"


    The two people in front, the older one and the younger one, were walking happily chatting with each other, but the key thing was that the few people behind them had bitter expressions on their faces.


    Zoro still had three knives coiled around his waist, and looked around with extraordinary eyes. Before going to the Sky Ind, he had never felt that he was weak, butpared to the strong men on the sea, especially Mihawk, this He was the only swordsman in the world that he had ever fought against, but just bying to a ce like Sky Ind, he had already seen two beings that could make people despair in just a short time.


    What Robin said on the way to Sky Ind has been swirling in his mind. The practice of domineering can increase the attack and defense power dozens of times. For a martial arts idiot, this thing is simply irresistible.


    "Green Algae Head, it seems you are still thinking about domineering things, right?"


    Sanji walked to a position alongside Zoro and continued to move forward, asking as he walked.


    Sanji is probably the one who knows Zoro best on this ship. Although the two of them usually talk about being unforgiving, for the two of them, they are definitely more familiar with each other than Luffy is. Zoro knew better.


    Zoro turned his face, nced at Sanji, and said with a mncholy look in his eyes, "Is it possible that you don''t have any ideas in this regard?"


    "There must be some, don''t tell me you don''t have such thoughts?" Zoro asked.


    After hearing this, Sanji suddenly stopped, but only paused for a moment before continuing to walk forward.


    But at this moment, the expression on his face hadpletely changed. Then he said quite seriously, "Do you know what armed domineering means to a force? There is almost a mutual understanding among the major forces. It goes without saying that it is almost impossible to spread the cultivation method of armed haki or witnessing haki, so who do you think can teach us?"


    When Sanji said this, he immediately remembered his childhood. After all, although he had been living in the East China Sea, he still knew his own life experience quite well.


    Being among the big forces, he can easily understand what these domineering cultivation methods mean?


    For ordinary people, it is impossible toe into contact with things at this level, which is why the possibility of domineering appearing in the first half of the Grand Line is very low.


    Except for the existence of armed Haki in some countries around the world, in the first half of the Grand Line, almost all pirates were at a nk state in the cultivation of Haki. Many of them were even like them and did not know what Haki was at all. What is it?

 Chapter 418 The Empress who came to Sky Island

    <h4>Chapter 418 The Empress who came to Sky Ind</h4>


    Sanji even had every reason to believe that even Robin would not be able to teach them how to practice Haki. After all, once it spreads, something that ordinary people can practice, there is no telling how serious the consequences will be. as a result of.


    But he knew it, but he would not tell others about it.


    "Sanji, it seems you know a lot of things too!"


    Zoro just said calmly, and then a sinister smile appeared on his lips.


    But this smile is only for partners, and there aren''t even many other thoughts.


    Fortunately, the area of ??the sky ind is not veryrge, and after a group of people walked for a while, they were almost at their destination.


    Yun Pce can indeed live up to its name. It is built on a separate empty ind.


    And it has two huge chains that can be pulled directly to prevent this small ind from floating far away in the wind.


    The road into the Cloud Pce is a long and wless looking step. Based on this step, it seems that the Cloud Pce in front is at least two hundred meters in the distance.


    Not only is the building made of pure white, but also the outer decoration and handrails are all made of white.


    The design of Shima Cloud can be various, and as long as the correct processing method is adopted, it can be made into any shape.


    At least the pce in front of you feels extremely luxurious.


    But in fact, not many peoplee to such a ce. After all, the living standards of these people staying on the empty ind have been greatly improvedpared to before. At least at this stage, only one person can enter the Cloud Pce. Just once a month.


    This is why Aisha, who stayed at the gate of Sky Ind, has only been to Sky Ind once from beginning to end.


    It''s just that today''s Sky Ind may not be as quiet as imagined, at least it is still rtively quiet at the moment.


    But as soon as they entered the Cloud Pce, something uneasy happened.


    The Yun Pce Hall is an open hall that seems to be at least 20 meters high. The interior is extremely luxuriously decorated and looks so elegant.


    But before they had time to appreciate it, an impatient woman had already entered from outside the Cloud Pce.


    The moment she first came in, Sanji''s eyes were transfixed, and even the nosebleeds on his face began to slowly flow out.


    "This woman is so beautiful."


    Chopper, the only non-human member of the Straw Hat Pirates, also looked on dumbfounded.


    The main reason is that the woman who came in was Hancock, the empress of Daughter Ind, and she walked in with a serious and domineering face.


    It just so happened that they were still standing in the hall at this time.


    After Hancock walked in, he only looked at the Straw Hats, and then looked directly at Robin.


    At this time, Mia had already stuffed her head into Robin''s arms, as if she was deliberately avoiding Hancock.


    "Mia, I''m already here, where are you going to hide?"


    Hancock shouted in a serious voice.


    "Mia, your mother is already here, is it possible that you still don''t n toe down?"


    Robin asked with a smile.


    After all, they were still facing Hancock at this time, and no one would have thought that this woman woulde over so quickly.


    But think about it, after all, Mia has been away for nearly a day. Although Hancock can imagine that this little guy Mia hase to the sky ind, and there is no need to worry about his safety at all.


    My daughter has a small space channel that can directly connect to the Sky Ind in the morning. In fact, the Cloud Pce where they are located can be regarded as built for Hancock and the others.


    The only thing that Hancock didn''t expect was that this little guy stayed away all night, as if he didn''t even n toe back.


    Mia hid in Robin''s arms, raised her head slightly, revealing a pair of innocent eyes, and her big eyes reflected a different kind of bitterness.


    "You don''t have to look at me, I really can''t be your mother''s boss in this matter." Robin said to Mia with a smile again.


    "Mia,e down quickly!"


    Hancock''s voice lowered his tone slightly, and he took two steps in the direction of Robin.


    Today''s Hancock is very different from the image in the plot. At least the clothes on his body are not as revealing as imagined. Instead, he wears a long skirt directly to the bottom, a red and white skirt, plus a round hair style, and a face. The bangs hanging down in front of his face are all bonus points for Hancock.


    After hearing another call, Mia finally stood beside Robin helplessly and reluctantly, her eyes peeking at Hancock as he walked over.


    "Mia, you came here as soon as you said you would. Why did you stay up all night?"


    "I don''t want to go back, I just want to spend two days on Sky Ind. It''s safe here and I don''t have to worry about any danger."


    Mia said to Hancock with a sweet voice.


    "This woman is so beautiful. I wonder who she is?"


    While Hancock and Mia were chatting, Sanji, who was standing not far away, wiped the nosebleed on his face and asked Robin next to him with curiosity and doubt.


    "You''re such a perverted cook, you can tell right away that you have bad intentions."


    Zoro said, and then started walking directly into the Cloud Pce.


    As he walked, he looked at the environment here. Although the 20-meter-long hall on the first floor was only filled with decorations and did not have any dining tables, almost all of the two sides of the hall on this floor were restaurants. look.


    If Zoro were to walk in such arge mobile building alone, he would probably get lost in this ce.


    "Sister She Ji, long time no see!"


    In the hall, Robin shouted affectionately to Hancock.


    The two of them are now considered a family. Although they don''t have much politeness, they feel very familiar with each other.


    Hancock, who was still angry just now, had a smile on his face after hearing Robin''s words, and asked with some confusion, "These must be your partners, Robin."


    "Yes, you came here mainly for little Mia?" Robin asked rhetorically.


    "Let''s not talk about that now. I will leave Mia with you for now. Wait a moment. I''m going to the pce. Is there anything I need to bring to Michelle?"


    Hancock asked calmly.


    Michelle is Robin''s daughter. She is less than one year old now. Although Robin wants to go back, there are just some things that make her helpless.


    Others began to visit the construction of the Cloud Pce one after another. Nami was the only one who said to stay away and listen quietly to the conversation between the two people.

 Chapter 419 Military Meeting

    <h4>Chapter 419 Military Meeting</h4>


    Nami has always been different from others. She has always been curious about Robin''s true identity.


    But in fact, there is no need to think too much. Everyone can already guess that Robin''s identity is definitely closely rted to the Tru Empire, and whether it is from the other party''s speech, behavior or other behaviors, it is even very likely that he is a special person. A senior figure in the Lu Empire.


    This time Nami was only slightly curious.


    She leaned against a pir in the Cloud Pce, raised her ears and began to listen to the conversation between the two.


    Maybe she doesn''t know that as long as the other person is willing, he can know his movements at any time.


    It''s just that Robin doesn''t mind at all when his identity is exposed.


    Anyway, Changnuo had already said this before joining the Straw Hats.


    Hancock stood there and nced in the direction of Nami, then looked at Robin again.


    "Sister Hancock, you don''t need to bring anything with Michelle. She is still young and there is nothing to prepare for the moment. It''s just that I haven''t seen her for so long and I really miss her!" Robin said with a smile.


    "I''ll take a look at it for you when I get back. It''s already a troubled time, and that guy is probably very busy every day. ording to the n, you should be able to see Michelle here soon."


    As Hancock said, Mia next to her kept lowering her head, even looking like she didn''t even dare to breathe.


    "I don''t want to get too involved in his affairs, although I don''t know what the purpose is? Maybe my sister is the only one who can help her!"


    Robin said.


    "Let''s do this first!"


    Hancockforted Robin with a smile, and then the expression on his face turned serious. She knelt down, looked at Mia, who was still lowering her head, put her hand on her head, and sighed helplessly. He took a breath and said, "Just stay on the empty ind for now. Don''t let me run around if you have nothing to do. I''ll clean up this little thing like you when I get back."


    "Don''t worry, sister, I will take good care of Mia these two days. Before I leave, I will ask others to send him back!" Robin said with a smile.


    "Now he is very troublesome. I will leave him here for two days and I guess he will be back soon," Hancock said.


    "Go and get busy! Don''t keep him waiting. There might be something important waiting for you to do."


    Robin said again.


    "Hmm~!"


    Hancock did not refuse this time, nced at Mia again, and then walked towards the outside of Yun Pce without looking back.


    "Your mother is gone, shouldn''t you put away your little grievance?"


    Seeing that Mia was still lowering her head, Robin asked helplessly.


    "have they gone?"


    Mia raised her head instantly, and the haze that was still hanging on her face a moment ago had disappeared without a trace the next moment.


    When she saw that Hancock had really disappeared without a trace, Mia suddenly showed a smile on her face, then turned to look at Robin and said, "I was scared to death just now, I thought I was going to get beaten again." Woolen cloth."


    "Your mother won''t beat you often, okay?"


    Robin said rolling his eyes.


    "You don''t know, now I have to learn to write, exercise, and a lot of other things every day, and I can''t evene out to y even if I want to."


    Miained.


    "Then what is your dream for the future?" Robin asked.


    "Hmm...? I haven''t thought about it yet. Maybe I will be a big shot like my father, or maybe I can take a good look at the world."


    Mia thought deeply for a moment. For someone of his age, he really couldn''t think of any better ideals. It was more about just ying.


    After all, it��s normal to think about it. How can a five-year-old child have any particrly innocent thoughts? I just want to eat more delicious food, have fun and have a perfect childhood.


    "What a difficult little devil, let''s go. Didn''t you say you wanted to entertain us? I''ll leave it to you now."


    Robin stood up, stroked Mia''s little head with his right hand, and said with a doting look on his face.


    At this moment, Nami, who had been listening in the corner, quickly turned around and started walking in another direction.


    Robin just raised his head slightly and nced in her direction. A smile slowly appeared on his lips, but he didn''t say anything.


    The environment on Sky Ind is indeed extremely beautiful for those who have never been there. It was built before the Tru Empire, and the oxygen content is almost the same as that in the sea below.


    So even if you suddenlye to this sky ind 10,000 meters above the sky. These people don''t feel depressed because of the thin oxygen.


    After so many years of adaptation, the people on the empty ind have gradually begun to ept such an environment. After all, life is nothing more than a piece of chicken feathers. After adapting, everything is still life as usual.


    It''s just that the military base on Sky Ind is very different from before. Now the entire South China Sea is under the control of the Tru Empire, so the substantial role of the military base on Sky Ind has been rtively reduced.


    But the military base in this ce is still maintained. It is nothing more than the stationing of some troops, and there is norge-scale personnel training. It is still concentrated on this.


    But even so, today''s Sky Ind is still used as a ce for the handover between the Tru Empire and several other space portals. Its purpose is to prevent others from directly entering the Tru Empire through the portal to cause trouble.


    In the blink of an eye.


    In the pce of the Tru Empire, Hancock was almost pressed against Chang Nuo. The two of them looked at each other without saying much.


    Although they met asionally, only a few people in the Toru Empire knew that the Pirate Empress was the woman of Emperor Toru.


    Even now that Hancock has given birth to Chang Nuo''s eldest son, this kind of thing is almost only spread among high-level officials.


    "Why didn''t youe to me for so long?"


    As soon as the two people hugged each other, Hancock pushed Chang Nuo away and asked slightly angrily.


    "There are still many people inside. I will talk to you about thister. Let''s deal with the current matters first."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    They are now in the entire pce hall, but the conference room next to the hall is almost full of people at this moment.


    Upon hearing this, Hancock immediately calmed down his expression and nced towards the conference room with the door open.


    There are indeed many people sitting there in the room at this moment, especially those sitting on the edge of the door who can directly see the two of them. Now all of them wish they had not seen anything at all.


    "Am I wearing something too casual?" Hancock asked in a low voice.


    Although he knew that something must have happened when Chang Nuo called him here, he never expected that Chang Nuo would drag him to hold a Trul Empire meeting together?

 Chapter 420 First Class Secret

    <h4>Chapter 420 First ss Secret</h4>


    There was no preparation for this kind of thing in advance, and even the clothes he wore this time were just to give his man some surprises. But under the current circumstances, Hancock''s clothes were indeed not formal enough.


    Just when she felt a little mncholy, Chang Nuo said directly, "It doesn''t matter, it''s fine just like this."


    After finishing speaking, Chang Nuo even touched Hancock''s face, and then said again, "Let''s go, I''m waiting for you."


    "oh!"


    Hancock answered quietly, then silently followed Chang Nuo and started walking towards the conference room.


    Before the two people reached the door, everyone sitting in the conference room stood up collectively and looked forward calmly. Of course, some nced at Hancock from time to time.


    After all, this woman''s appearance is indeed perfect. Even if she has already given birth to a child, Hancock can still be regarded as the most beautiful woman in the pirate world.


    Most of the people here are men. Although they have tried their best to restrain themselves, they still can''t stand the charm brought by Hancock.


    When Chang Nuo walked to the seat at the front, many people''s eyes were still on Hancock. Chang Nuo could only express his helplessness by saying "cough cough" twice.


    The moment everyone came to their senses, Hancock sat down next to Chang Nuo. As the two of them sat down, everyone else followed suit.


    There were about 50 people participating in the conference room this time. This was considered a rare military meeting in the Tru Empire. Although Hancock''s arrival attracted everyone''s attention, it also made many people very confused. doubts.


    They all know that Hancock''s current identity is not only determined by the fact that she is the woman of Emperor Toru. The more important reason is that Hancock is the current Shichibukai and the Pirate Empress. From the outside, A woman who can''tpete with the Tru Empire.


    The reason why this group of people are confused is mainly because this meeting is a milestone moment for the Tru Empire. What is the woman in front of me, a pirate, doing here?


    But Hancock ignored everyone''s expressions and sat down directly.


    Chang Nuo sat there, also looking at the doubts on everyone''s faces, and then opened his mouth and said directly, "I guess you are all wondering why Hancock came here to participate in the meeting? Mainly because he will participate next. when."


    After hearing this, everyone put aside their inner doubts a little. However, Yixiao, who was sitting on the other side, said with a serious expression, "You don''t need to mention the previous matters. I would like to ask His Majesty the King to tell you about the next arrangements."


    During this meeting, almost all the top military generals of the Tru Empire were gathered in this ce, and everyone was looking forward to what would happen next.


    After all, for them, during the years they stayed in the Tru Empire, they had never used their abilities. It was rare for them to hold a military meeting this time, and each of them was already very excited.


    So now even if Hancock is sitting here, no matter in which capacity he is, these people don''t mind at all.


    "Before starting the meeting, let me emphasize one point, that is, no one is allowed to reveal a word in advance about the content of this meeting, even the most trusted person. At the moment when no order is issued, this incident needs to be disclosed. Listed as a first-level secret among the top military officials of the Tru Empire."


    "yes����!"


    Chang Nuo said seriously. The moment his voice fell, everyone stood up and shouted loudly.


    After all, the Tru Empire holds a high-level military meeting. This kind of situation is notmon in this country. He does not need to say more. Since these people can already achieve this position, each one of them is very clear.


    They are already high-ranking military officials of the Tru Empire. Normally, everyone understands the rules regarding the content of these military meetings.


    Since we can bring all these people together, it means that something big must have happened.


    In addition, His Majesty the King could personally say such words, not to mention them, even the expression of General Yixiao had gradually be serious.


    "Everyone, sit down! Charlie will tell you what happens next."


    Chang Nuo said looking at Xia Li sitting in the crowd.


    Although this woman is a mermaid, it does not hinder her movements after leaving the water, but her huge size is too conspicuous here.


    She didn''t even need to stand up, she was already a head taller than the others, and her huge body had obviously be his biggest advantage.


    It''s just that there are still several sses of water in front of him. Although the mermaid can live a normal life after leaving the water, at least to ensure that the body''s moisture is not too dry, it still needs to start to replenish the body''s water loss from time to time.


    Xia Li''s image at this moment is still the same as before. He is dressed in ck and purple clothes, his hair is still nted to one side, and one eye is always covered.


    As the current great prophet of the Tru Empire, although Xia Li does not have any substantive rights, he can at least be respected by everyone.


    And after several years of development, the South China Sea has already set up a separate ind for those on Fish-Man Ind who want toe and watch the world on the sea.


    In this regard, Chang Nuo also began to gradually improve the agreement between himself and Xia Li.


    After hearing the king''s words, Xia Li slowly took out a crystal ball from his arms. There was a wooden tray under the crystal ball, which was covered with a piece of white cloth.


    Everyone''s eyes were fixed on the crystal ball in front of Xia Li. Which one of them didn''t recognize this woman?


    Naturally, you know what the other person is going to do next.


    The uing war between Whitebeard and the Navy is now only known to a few generals at the top of the Tru Empire. The rest of the people are also confused and have no idea where the situation will develop. step.


    Therefore, the current Xia Li was just to demonstrate to them the battle that would happen next.


    After lifting the white cloth, a transparent crystal ss ball was disyed in front of everyone, but at this time, Xia Li nced at Chang Nuo, who was sitting in the front.


    In the next second, there was no need for her to say anything more. Chang Nuo directly raised a transparent blue barrier to cover the conference room.


    "Just do what you want and don''t worry about it getting leaked."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    Xia Li nodded, then ced his hands directly on the crystal ball in front of him, his eyes tightly closed. If you look carefully, you can even see the other person''s body trembling slightly.

 Chapter 421 War in the Crystal Ball

    <h4>Chapter 421 War in the Crystal Ball</h4>


    Xia Li focused almost all his attention on the crystal ball. Under everyone''s gaze, he seemed to have some devil fruit ability.


    Next, the originally transparent and white crystal ball began to emit a different red light.


    As the light began to shine, Xia Li began to slowly open her eyes, but it could be seen from the fear in her eyes that she must have seen something that frightened her.


    The moment he first came into contact with this reality, Xia Li subconsciously wanted to let go of her hand, but how could she let her go at this time?


    Chang Nuo was sitting at the top. The moment he saw Xia Li trying to move his hand, he immediately knocked on the table with his right hand. In an instant, an invisible transparent light directly enveloped Xia Li.


    The ability of the Soul Devil Fruitpletely brought back Xia Li, who was already shrouded in fear, in just an instant.


    Even the opponent continued to use his abilities on the crystal ball as if he was out of control.


    In less than a while, the red light emitted from the crystal ball slowly began to condense into a picture, and even the characters in the picture could be clearly seen.


    This is the next battle at the top. Whitebeard''s voice can be clearly seen by everyone.


    What was different from what they imagined was that Whitebeard''s body had been prated by several holes at this moment, and even the white beard he was proud of had been cut off in half.


    Such a situation made everyone present take a deep breath unconsciously.


    That is to say, General Yixiao could not perceive this scene, and his performance was rtively normal. Who else could escape the fear caused by this scene?


    A future war was unfolding in front of everyone, and the passion shrouded in this kind of war made everyone present start to glow with golden eyes.


    As the top military leaders of a country, the only way they can show themselves is to participate in the war, so they no longer need their king to exin things clearly. They can more or less understand the meaning of the high-level meeting held this time.


    Chang Nuo saw that the time was about the same, and tapped his fingers lightly on the table again. The Devil Fruit ability that originally enveloped Xia Li was withdrawn in the next second.


    But what followed was that Xia Li received the bacsh from this prophecy, and his nose and ears instantly began to bleed outward.


    "Are you okay, Charlie?"


    Mo Sank, who was sitting next to her, quickly stood up and asked.


    "Nothing''s wrong, I''m just a little tired."


    Xia Li said weakly.


    "Then you should go back and rest first. As for the rest, leave it to us."


    Chang Nuo said calmly, then stretched out his right hand, and a blue light instantly enveloped Xia Li''s body, and then hepletely disappeared into the conference room.


    The moment he reappeared, Xia Li had already returned to his room. Although he was still a little weak, he just closed his eyes and sighed deeply.


    Return to the conference room.


    "Next, let Abona talk about this matter first, and then I will arrange everyone''s tasks and priorities."


    Chang Nuo said with a serious expression.


    He looked at everyone around him. This time, there were four generals gathered in this high-level meeting of more than fifty people, and the rest were almost all lieutenant generals. At least this was the arrangement in the Tru Empire.


    With such a huge fighting power, Hancock should be the one who feels the most ufortable and suffocated.


    She is the only person who does not yet belong to the Tohru Empire, but participating in such a high-level meeting, the domineering energy exuded by everyone is actually much stronger than him. Coupled with the atmosphere at the scene, even if As the pirate empress, she possesses the aura of a king, but at this moment she can only watch silently.


    Abona stood up and looked at everyone around him. He knew everyone here, but this time the situation waspletely different.


    "Let me first talk about the situation on my side. His Majesty the King has started nning for this war a long time ago.


    At present, the Tru Empire has sent nearly 30 teams to perform tasks, andbined with the predicted time, this battle will be a very important turning point for our Tru Empire.


    I hope that in theing time, everyone will be able to clearly understand thisrge-scale war.


    ording to the current investigation results andbined with the content of the prophecy, the war between the Whitebeard Pirates and the Navy will be concentrated in the current Navy headquarters, Marinfando, and ording to the current scale of the Whitebeard Pirates, in addition to In addition to his own pirate group of only 1,600 people, he also has 43 pirate groups under his jurisdiction. The total number of people can definitely reach a rtively strong state.


    The starting point of this war will focus on Ace, the captain of the second division of the Whitebeard Pirates. He not only has this identity, but also has another identity, that is, the biological son of Pirate King Roger. "


    Abona said directly and seriously, still looking at everyone, but other people who got the news could no longer close their mouths.


    This kind of news can simply make people''s jaws drop, even General Yixiao is no exception.


    There is no need for others to say anything. Although most people are only in the South China Sea and have never left this sea area, this does not affect their knowledge of the outside world.


    At least that''s the case today.


    Chang Nuo maintained a calm state from the beginning to the end. He had known about this kind of thing for a long time. Was he not surprised by anything?


    Abona paused, and then continued, "In order to deal with the Whitebeard Pirates this time, the Navy will definitely take away the most cutting-edge power in the entire Navy.


    Whitebeard''s Shock Fruit ability can even break space with one punch. As the strongest being in the world, so far he can still im this title alone.


    ording to another team, regarding the investigation on ckbeard''s side who has captured Ace, the captain of the second division of the Whitebeard Pirates, ording to the normal next process, the other party will definitely hand Ace over to the navy. As for the others There has been no particrly big movement in terms of power for the time being, but we cannot rx our vignce, at least this time. "


    After Abona finished speaking, he nodded in the direction of Chang Nuo, and then sat directly there.


    The scene became quiet again, and everyone seemed to be deep in thought.

 Chapter 422 You are still young, wait a few years

    <h4>Chapter 422 You are still young, wait a few years</h4>


    Chang Nuo would not be surprised at all that they could perform like this.


    What happened this time waspletely different from experiencing it with my own eyes.


    "Abona has simply said this. This incident will cause a major turmoil in the world.


    By that time, there will be too many huge forces rising up in the wind, and the revolutionary army is not as peaceful as imagined, so in terms of the following detailed arrangements, I hope that everyone can do their jobs well.


    In any case, this time our Tru Empire must take advantage of this opportunity to quickly develop its own strength. As for the more detailed arrangements, all of us will sit together and discuss them carefully. "


    Chang Nuo sat there and still spoke calmly. Others no longer had any right to interrupt, and all of them could only listen silently.


    After all, the news they came across today was too shocking, and it waspletely beyond what a force could bear.


    The Navy is about to have a battle with the Whitebeard Pirates. Once this matter is publicized, there is no telling how serious changes it will make to the world.


    Such a high-level military meeting does not end with just two sentences. There are at least dozens of links in the middle, and each link is to deal with possible things that may arise.


    Because the times have changed, Chang Nuo is not sure that the next war on the top will be what he imagined.


    By that time, after the real thing happens, there will still be many hidden and unknown forces in this world.


    After all, how far has the revolutionary army developed so far? What are the hidden powers of the world government? As for the so-called navy,nd and air force, so far, they only know that the military is powerful and the army has nothing to do, but there is no substantial conclusion as to which aspect the air force belongs to.


    How will the pirates in the new world react? This series of various problems all troubles everyone.


    Even though the strength of the Toru Empire is now different from what it used to be, it is still not sure that everything will be as I thought.


    After all, as a king, any decision he makes may lead to risks that the country will face next.


    Even though he already knew where the next development rhythm would be, Chang Nuo still didn''t dare to take the risk and rush forward like this.


    All he can do now is try his best to move everything to the historical track of the original plot. In this way, he can always stay at the forefront of things.


    As the king of a country, Changnuo carries more than just himself. There are tens of millions of people waiting behind him. The entire country and the South China Sea region are all looking up to his life. Once he does something wrong, this will happen. He couldn''t even imagine the consequences and risks.


    So when faced with this kind of thing, he must prepare at least a few months in advance and put everything into effect. This is what he should do as a king.


    This side of Sky Ind.


    "So full!"


    In the Cloud Pce, Luffy was lying on a sofa not far from the dining table, his belly had be an extremely exaggerated bulge.


    In fact, he is not the only one who behaves like this, even Zoro, Usopp, and Chopper behave in the same way.


    They were either lying on the sofa or lying on the ground one by one. Anyway, the sight in front of them made these four people speechless.


    At this moment, there are mountains of tes on the dining table, which can fully bear witness to the scene of the few of them eating today.


    Both the service staff and the kitchen staff in the hotel had sweat on their foreheads. Just serving these few people was already causing them a lot of stress.


    "Hey, Sanji, the chef here seems to cook much better food than you."


    Zoro sat leaning against the wall and shouted to Sanji with a satisfied look on his face.


    At this time, Sanji was already sitting there elegantly drinking the drink in his hand. Unlike these people, he had never seen the world and could make himself look like this even after eating a little bit.


    "I want you to talk more!"


    Sanji sat there and frowned as he replied to Zoro''s words.


    In fact, he himself knew that after tasting the food here, Sanji had already discovered that the cooking skills of the chef here were indeed amazing.


    At least much stronger than myself.


    "Mr. Sanji, don''t be too frustrated. After all, the chefs here are only one in a thousand in the Toru Empire. Each of them has cooked in the pce, or been trained there, maybe If you have the chance, you can also go to the Tru Pce and experience the real delicious food there."


    Robin looked at Sanji and said with a smile.


    "Really Robin? When you say that, I really want to go over and take a look." Luffy said as hey there.


    "The food cooked by Sanji is already very delicious, butpared to the food cooked by these people, it may be a little inferior, but I still like it very much."


    Chopper said as he was also lying there.


    "Stop talking, I will definitely be much stronger than them in the future." Sanji suddenly said with a smile.


    "I wonder if everyone is full? If not, we can order more."


    While they were talking, the little guy Mia stood up and walked next to them, especially Luffy. He bent down directly, touched the other person''s bulging belly, and asked with a smile on his face.


    "Mia, will our meal cost a lot of money?"


    Nami asked suddenly.


    "Well, it costs a lot of money, but you don''t have to worry at all, as long as you can eat enough." Mia said.


    "I really want a son like this. He is so considerate."


    Nami listened to what Mia said, then put her arm directly on Robin''s shoulders, and said with a look of dumbfounding.


    After all, such a little guy can be so proficient in the world, and more importantly, he is still so rich. This has made Nami feel that the other person is a perfect little man.


    "Then you have to work hard, but you are still young now. It won''t be toote to talk about this topic in a few years."


    Robin covered her mouth and smiled slightly. Looking at Nami''s cute look, she didn''t know what to say.


    As for the rest of them, they probably didn''t even want to say anything anymore. Usoppy there and kept covering his mouth, for fear of spitting out the good food he had just eaten.

 Chapter 423 Looking for Gold

    <h4>Chapter 423 Looking for Gold</h4>


    Their mealsted from noon to evening. Faced with these situations, the service staff outside the room could only secretly stick their heads out and look at the situation inside the room.


    As for the rest, they didn''t do anything extra.


    the next day.


    The moment everyone gathered together, Luffy''s face was full of energy. All the food he had eaten yesterday had beenpletely digested.


    When he appeared in front of everyone, Luffy was still carrying a straw hat, but he was carrying something in the shape of a bag on his shoulders.


    "Everyone, when I was on Gaya Ind, I heard the chestnut-headed uncle say that there might be a lot of gold on the empty ind. Should we set out on an adventure to find it now?"


    When Luffy first appeared, he looked at the people present with excitement and said.


    After all, when he was on Gaya Ind, he had already seen the chestnut-headed man fish out such a big gold piece from the sea. Because of this, he was full of excitement and wanted to see if he could fish it out of this empty space. Find more gold in the ind.


    But right after he said these words, a group of people looked at this guy as if he were a fool.


    "Luffy, have you ever thought that the Sky Ind has been owned by the Tohru Empire for so many years? Do you think that even if there is gold, it will still be our turn to look for it?"


    Nami said that she has always been a woman who loves money the most, but she is not a very stupid person. Although she also knows that there may be a lot of gold on the empty ind, the appearance of the empty ind now, after a day of Time counts, and I learned a little bit about it.


    Even if gold existed, how could it be the turn of people like me toe and look for it?


    "I really don''t know where this guy came up with his idea?"


    Zoro opened his mouth and spoke casually, with a look of contempt on his entire face.


    "Isn''t it gone? Fortunately, I had a good dream this night. I thought I could go out today and look for gold."


    Luffy asked a little confused.


    "Captain Lu, there was indeed a lot of gold on the Sky Ind, but these things were taken away by the Tru Empire many years ago. Besides, even if they were not taken away, all of this gold is stored in Apaya. There is no way for us to enter this ce as it is a military base of the Tru Empire."


    Robin exined.


    "Speaking of military bases, I really want to challenge the swordsmen of the Tru Empire!"


    After hearing what Robin said, Zoro immediately touched his chin and said expectantly.


    "Don''t think about it. Your strength is too weak. If you stay in a military base, you can pick someone out at random and be enough to kill you instantly."


    The moment Zoro was still imagining, Mia walked out and spoke.


    This sentence did not leave them any sympathy at all, and he even said it with certainty.


    How could these people not understand? After all, the moment they entered the gate of Sky Ind, they were already overwhelmed by the gatekeeper. Even if they didn''t use their brains, they could guess what the opponent''s strength was.


    Zoro''s words were just words. He knew very well how much he weighed.


    "Robin, is it possible that we really have no way to explore the area in Apayado?" Nami asked curiously.


    She actually meant more by asking. She just wanted to see if the gold there was still there. For such a woman who loves money, Nami didn''t want to let go of any detail.


    "I''m really sorry. I''m afraid I can''t even go to Apayado. I''d better spend a few days on the empty ind and then find a way to leave."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Mom, it shouldn''t be a big deal to take them there, right?"


    Mia suddenly opened her mouth and asked softly.


    "Mia, is it possible that you can take us in?"


    Usopp asked quickly.


    "It''s okay to go, you just need to tell Jun and uncle then." Mia said.


    "Yoshi, it''s decided, let''s go to Apaia to see it again."


    Luffy immediately regained his energy and began to walk further and further on the road to death.


    But for them, sometimes being brainless is a good thing. Although Apayado is an absolutely forbidden area on Sky Ind, for a group of adventurous people, the more inessible the ce, the more they want to see it. look.


    Maybe thises from their nature, but Robin is still worried about whether it will bring any trouble to the Tru Empire?


    But now this group of people have shown such expressions. If they refuse again, I''m afraid it will cause unnecessary trouble.


    But just when they were about to go and a group of people were ready, Mia was also excited to take them there.


    But before they could go out, a figure appeared in front of them instantly.


    It can be said that this person is known to several people. After all, this guy appeared directly when he met Mia after arriving on Sky Ind.


    "Apayado is a forbidden area and no one is allowed to go there."


    The man who came had a cold and serious face and spoke directly to everyone.


    "Modun, I have promised to take them to have a look!"


    Mia said in a sweet voice.


    "Your mother will be here soon. You can wait here. After hees, you can tell him in person. Once he agrees, we will not have any idea of ??refusing."


    The man named Mo Dun said with a serious face even when facing Mia.


    The little guy doesn''t understand anything, but he is different. What kind of ce is Apayado? How could a group of pirates be allowed to watch?


    "But they just want to go over and have a look. There shouldn''t be any problem, right?" Mia asked again.


    "There is no room for negotiation on this kind of thing. The Tru Empire Military Base is a national first-ss secret site. Outsiders are absolutely prohibited from entering, let alone a group of pirates."


    Moton said, but looked at Luffy and others sternly.


    For him, the only thing he could feel was that these people had deceived Mia, so they made the other party do such irrational things.


    Even though Mia is just a child, after all, his identity lies here.


    Robin watched all this without saying anything from beginning to end. Even though he didn''t want to take this group of people to Apayado, he didn''t want Mia to lose face.


    "Isn''t there something mysterious about a ce? Why don''t we go and have a look?"


    Usopp asked, his eyes widening.


    It��s not their own ce anyway. For these people, what changes can be made?

 Chapter 424 Accepting Sauron’s Challenge

    <h4>Chapter 424 epting Sauron��s Challenge</h4>


    Facing the confused expressions of everyone, Modun was curious, how did this group of people grow to be so big?


    As the chief guard of the prince of the Tru Empire, Modu''s strength should not be underestimated. With just his own ability, he could kill this group of people. If it weren''t for the fact that the princess was apanying them, Modu might not even be able to look at it. Not willing to take another look.


    Let alone him, this group of people might not even be able to enter the Sky Ind Gate, let alone go to the Trul Empire Military Base so leisurely.


    "I have already said this, and you need to consider the specific circumstances yourself."


    Modu said in a cold voice and ignored the group of little guys. However, the moment he raised his head and looked at Robin, he immediately showed due respect.


    "I think we should not go there. The gold is definitely gone, and it has no use in the past. It is better to stay here and take a good look at the environment of the empty ind. We didn''t do much shopping yesterday, so let''s go out and take a good look today. "


    Nami said with a somewhat embarrassed smile.


    After all, the current atmosphere has be like this. Although it was Luffy who first proposed to go to thend of Apayado, heter strengthened his tone and said that he wanted to go there.


    "That''s right, I think it''s better to stay here. The military base of the Apaya Dostru Empire. It feels so scary just thinking about it." Chopper said.


    "Can I meet your sword master?"


    Sauron went the opposite way with them. What he longed for most was to have a powerful person topete with him. He had already had this idea beforeing to Sky Ind this time. Now that he is here, , naturally shouldn��t be missed.


    At first, everyone thought that Sauron''s words would dissatisfy the other party, but then Mao Dun said with a smile on his face, "This request can be satisfied!"


    At the moment when others were not surprised, Mao Dun shouted directly behind him, "Quironge, don''t you like this too? This little guy has great potential. You should guide him well next."


    As soon as he finished speaking, a person suddenly appeared in the empty ce behind him the next second.


    This guy is wearing the unique ckbat uniform of the Tru Empire. The only difference is that there is a long knife hanging on his waist. He has long hair simr to that of a girl and is tied into a ponytail. He looks quite sharp.


    But the other party''s deep eyes gave people a chilling feeling.


    Just by looking at him, Zoro could see the sharp aura exuding from the other party.


    There is no doubt that he is strong, but Sauron does not have the slightest fear. Even when facing the guy in front of him, he shows more blood and passion.


    "I haven''t seen such an interesting little guy for a long time."


    Queronge looked at Sauron and said with a smile.


    "Me too, it''s really exciting."


    Zoro also showed a smile, and then took out a square scarf from his waist, and then tied the green square scarf around his head. After waiting, Zoro''s eyes also showed the same as the other party''s, not only revealing the powerful fighting spirit It is interesting, and more importantly, it also reveals a sharpness.


    "His Majesty the King once said that in this world, the people who can make him feel good in swordsmanship are one is Hawkeye, who is now called the world''s greatest swordsman, and the other is senior Koushiro who lives in seclusion. I just don��t know how much you weigh now?��


    Quelongge looked at Zoro with a slight contempt and said, although the fighting spirit in his eyes was very high, but his words were very disdainful towards him.


    "Koshiro??"


    The moment Sauron heard the name, he was full of fighting spirit, but the next second he waspletely stunned.


    Isn��t the other person talking about his master? But once upon a time, I had never heard that the other party was powerful.


    But now that it was said from someone else''s mouth, Zoro didn''t feel that the other person was just joking.


    "I see!"


    Zoro suddenly smiled, and his favorable impression of the other party in his heart instantly improved.


    "Zoron, do you really want to challenge?"


    Usopp asked worriedly.


    "Of course, as a swordsman, you must be fearless no matter what."


    "Okay, there''s nothing good about it. Queronge, take this little guy to the small sky ind tform."


    Moton said.


    The small sky ind tform in the world is a battlefield provided by the Tru Empire for these armies. Although it is not particrlyrge, it is protected by a folding space barrier. No matter how big the attack they cause, they will not Let this tform suffer no damage at all.


    "Zoron, be careful."


    Before anyone started to leave, Luffy started to open his mouth to remind them.


    "What do you have to worry about? Your Zoro will definitely not be in any danger, but injuries may be inevitable."


    Mia said.


    There is no need to think about this kind of thing. Since you can challenge it, you have already made preparations to sacrifice yourself. In the battle between Yang Fang, damage will definitely be inevitable.


    "Can we go together?"


    Sanji asked, looking at Moton.


    "It''s okay if you are willing to go. It will probably be over soon anyway."


    Modun didn''t mind and said casually.


    Others are also curious. There is no reason to stay here for this kind of thing. Since it has passed, they can only follow behind.


    The distance between here and Xiaokong Ind is not very close. If you just rely on walking distance, it will take at least half an hour.


    Along the way, Queronge and Zoro chatted happily, not to mention that Zoro told the other party that his master was Koushiro, which made the other party suddenly surprised, but Queronge told Zoro that now special There were at least hundreds of people in the Lu Empire whose swordsmanship level was higher than his own. This incident made Sauron''s eyes widen.


    For a little guy who has never seen the world, so many wallpapers are the goals he is pursuing.


    "I heard Hawkeye say before that the most powerful swordsman in the world today may be Emperor Tru. I wonder if this is true?"


    Zoro asked curiously.


    "It''s probably true. His Majesty the King rarely pulls out the knife in his hand, but the strangeness of the knife can make people feel very scary even if it is within a mile of it, and His Majesty the King never pursues it. These false names, after all, it doesn��t matter to him.��


    Queronge thought for a moment and said seriously.


    Other things don''t matter. Once something has anything to do with His Majesty the King, it must be taken seriously.

 Chapter 425 The strength of the emperor

    <h4>Chapter 425 The strength of the emperor</h4>


    Queronge''s words directly made the little guy Sauron seem to see a different sky, and his passionate passion also opened up at this moment.


    "I really want to meet His Majesty the King you call him, but I don''t know what kind of person he is? In the future, maybe one day I will have to challenge him."


    Zoro said excitedly.


    "You little guy!"


    Quelongge smiled silently, and then continued, "As your strength grows, His Majesty the King''s strength will definitely grow as well. The most important thing is that he is not a few years older than you. So far, our King''s strength has also grown." He��s only 25 years old.��


    "How can it be?"


    Zoro was immediately surprised. It was really hard to imagine what a person who had achieved such an achievement at this age looked like?


    "Our King became a king at the age of 14, and was able to conquer the ocean at the age of 18. At your age, his achievements can already shake up the entire ocean. The title of Four Emperors and One Emperor, It''s not just what others say.


    There are people outside the world, and there is a sky outside the world. His Majesty the King often said this. When we were training, the general would remind us every time he came to speak. We should guard against arrogance and impetuosity when doing things. Don''t think that a little strength can make you invincible. There are more people than you can imagine. "


    Quelonge said as he walked, his eyes full of pride.


    What he is proud of is that he is in the country of Tru Empire, and all these great principles are the result of long-term brainwashing.


    The people following him were all following closely behind. What Queronge said while walking in front could be heard by those behind him.


    Mia was riding on Moton''s neck. For this little guy, he didn''t know how long he would have to wait if he wanted to reach such a long distance.


    However, Usopp in the back heard the conversation of the people in front and said with some surprise, "Is Emperor Tru only in his twenties?"


    "Oh~, I said you don''t read newspapers?"


    Sanji asked with a speechless expression.


    "I asionally read some, but what does this have to do with the Tohru Empire?" Nami suddenly asked.


    "I still know a little bit about the Toru Empire. The country we are in almost relies on the products of the Toru Empire for its operations, and the other side''s doctors are really strong, but I have never heard of their king. ." Chopper said.


    "So, you never read the newspaper. The Tru Empire has been active almost eight years ago. For every issue of the newspaper about the Tru Empire, Barati Restaurant will put a copy there until we When he left, there was already a thick pile in the old man''s room, and there were many newspapers about news in this area posted on the wall.


    I have known about almost everything that happened in the Tru Empire from a long time ago. "


    Sanji said with a sigh.


    "But why is this happening?" Robin asked.


    Sanji raised his head and nced at Robin bitterly, then smoked a cigarette and said, "The old man in B''s restaurant is a member of the Tru Empire. Seeing that his country is gradually developing and changing, he feels homesick in his heart, so That will force him to do these things.��


    "That''s it, but I''ve never heard of it before." Luffy said.


    "The old man feels that he has been a pirate. Although he is not now, he has no face anymore. He will return to the Tru Empire, so he continues to stay in the East China Sea and open his restaurant."


    Sanji said.


    "How scary! Does the Tru Empire hate pirates so much?"


    Chopper asked with his eyes widened in disbelief.


    "That''s not true. It''s just that in the beginning, when the Toru Empire was just the Toru Kingdom, the country was very barren and suffered from pirate intrusions from time to time. In the end, even one ship in this country could go to sea. There are no ships, and a country is so poor that it cannot even produce a single pirate. Can you imagine how poor it must be?"


    Robin asked everyone with a smile.


    "Mom, was our country so poor before?"


    Upon hearing this, the first person to react was Mia, who was sitting on Moton''s neck. He turned around and asked curiously.


    "That''s right, no matter how poor a country is, it shouldn''t reach this point, right?" Nami also asked.


    "Actually, I''m not very clear about the specific situation. It''s just that after I went to the Tru Empire, this country has gradually developed. But there is no way topare that time with now. There are even many ces where there are only Just enough to maintain food and clothing.


    So even after you arrive in the Tru Empire, you will never see such a situation again. "


    Robin said with emotion.


    "She is right. In the early days of the Tru Empire, people starved to death every day. Many pirates were no longer even willing to patronize the Tru Empire because it was too poor at that time.


    Although His Majesty the old King loved his people very much, after all, the country''s strength was limited in the end. Later, after His Majesty the King came to power, a series of various rectification measures and his vigorous and resolute methods gradually changed the original situation. National form, so now, the people of the Tru Empire cannot allow anyone to hear anyone''s dissatisfaction with His Majesty the King, because this is our belief. "


    Modun spoke calmly as he walked. His voice and tone were very low, as if he had been recalling the past.


    "Wow, so my father is so powerful?"


    Mia''s eyes were filled with stars, and she really couldn''t imagine the scene of her father''s tall figure, but for a child, it was really good to have an idol.


    "Father????"


    Nami stopped for a moment and murmured something in her mouth.


    "What is going on?" Usopp asked in surprise.


    "I''m not telling you, could it be that you haven''t discovered that Mia is the prince of the Tru Empire until now?"


    Sanji was speechless at this time. Sometimes he really couldn''t understand how the IQ of these people grew.


    Each and every one of them seemed to be thinking without thinking. As early as the beginning, Sanji had already discovered this matter. Not only did the other party have powerful guards to protect him, but more importantly, he wanted to take them to Tru. Among the imperial military bases.


    Everyone paused for a moment, with disbelief on their faces. Then these guys showed the same attitude and shouted "Nani!!!!!!" in almost uniform voices.


    No wonder they were a little unbelievable, after all, everyone would be surprised that such a thing would suddenly happen to anyone.

 Chapter 426 A woman who publicly admits

    <h4>Chapter 426 A woman who publicly admits</h4>


    Zoro, who was walking at the front, turned his head and nced when he heard the noisy voices of the people behind him, but he didn''t seem too surprised.


    After just a nce, Zoro continued walking forward, but asked in a calm and slightly doubtful tone, "So Mia is the prince of the Tru Empire?"


    "That''s right, now the eldest prince of the Tru Empire!" Quelongge also said with a calm smile.


    Anyway, they don''t have to worry about any dangerous situations. After all, although these guys are obviously pirates, their strength is simply the best.


    Whether it''s Queronge or Mao Dun, both of them are sure to kill them instantly with their own strength.


    "oh!"


    Zoro replied calmly and ignored this matter.


    Luffy and the others behind him all had their jaws dropped to the ground, and their surprised expressions could not go away for a long time.


    But then, Nami suddenly asked, "Mia is the prince of the Tru Empire. I remember Robin once said that this is the child her husband had with another woman. Doesn''t that mean..."


    "You guessed it right. Robin is the only publicly recognized imperial concubine in the Tru Empire. She got married more than two years ago. We have read the newspapers at that time. She is almost the most powerful force in the world. They all sent people there, and Ace went there on behalf of the Whitebeard Pirates."


    Sanji nced at them and said.


    "Nani!!!"


    This time it was good. Before the shock in the front could get over, the shock in the back followed one after another.


    "I really don''t know what you were doing every day in the past? The Tru Empire dominated the headlines of newspapers almost every time in the past few years. Even if you don''t read these newspapers, you should know something about it, right?" Sanji asked.


    "Is it possible that Sanji, you already knew?" Usopp asked curiously.


    "I already recognized each other when we first met. After all, we met through the newspaper. Later I learned that Ace had attended Robin''s wedding, so I was even more convinced." Sanji said.


    "Haha! I didn''t expect Mr. Sanji to have recognized him a long time ago, but there is really nothing worth hiding. When Captain Lu asked about it, I was ready to say it, but I was interruptedter."


    Robin said with a smile at this time.


    Several other people have never thought about this kind of thing. Their long-term partners actually have such a big background?


    But now that things have been talked about, they all ept it calmly, especially Luffy. Although he was surprised just now, he still smiled and said, "We are partners, it doesn''t matter what status we have."


    Although he said this, Luffy''s face suddenly turned gloomy. He lowered his head and then raised it slightly. He looked at Robin seriously and asked, "Then will you stille with us?"


    "Don''t worry, Captain Lu. Didn''t I tell you before that my goal is to make you the Pirate King?"


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Really? Although I don''t know why you believe in me so much, I also believe that I can be the Pirate King in the future." Luffy grinned and looked at Robin with a smile on his face.


    "Looking at Robin makes me feel so reassured!"


    Chopper said movedly.


    "Wouldn''t there be a lot of money in the future?"


    Nami stood aside, and Xiao Jiujiu''s heart suddenly burst out, but she didn''t say such words.


    During the chat, as the pace of several people elerated, they arrived at their destination in a short time.


    The small sky ind tform is almost suspended almost a hundred meters away from the sky ind.


    There is only a lock bridge made of chains to connect here. It is exactly like the floating ind in the world of cultivating immortals. Although it does not look grand enough, it gives people apletely different feeling.


    Although the distance between the entire lock bridge is only about a hundred meters, looking down from this position, if you are afraid of heights, you may not even dare to take a step forward.


    Fortunately, there is not much wind blowing above the sky ind. The lock bridge is suspended there, and it looks stable. Looking at the small sky ind tform from the outside, it is a huge floating ne, and everything on it looks like nothing. It is empty.


    Zoro walked in the front and looked at the surrounding situation, especially the long ropeway, which gave people the feeling that he was trying to ovee the fear in his heart.


    "Let''s go, ahead is the small sky ind tform. The personnel training and battle on the sky ind are almost here." Queronge said looking at Sauron who stopped.


    Zoro turned his head and nced at Queronge. Without saying anything, he walked straight onto the ropeway without even looking down.


    Others followed one after another, and only Usopp and Chopper, who were at the end, walked tremblingly while holding on to the chains on both sides.


    As if he was afraid that he would fall in the next second, he mainly looked down as he walked, and the fear began to arise in his heart.


    Although the Small Sky Ind tform looked the same from the outside, the moment Zoro stepped inside, he realized that there was no one there as it seemed from the outside.


    After entering here, he passed through a light curtain, and there were not only one or two people disyed in front of him. There were hundreds of people training in this ce, and each of them was fighting against each other, punching each other. With just one kick, one can feel the momentum that shakes the earth.


    "This is where you usually train?"


    Zoro asked in surprise.


    The main reason is that the people he saw in the battle did not hold back at all, and all their moves began to attack the opponent''s vital points. How could this still be like training? More like a fight against massacre.


    "Don''t worry, everything you see is just the appearance." Quilonge said with a smile.


    At the edge of the small sky ind, all the seats are ced in a circle. This ce can amodate up to tens of thousands of people at a time. Everyone can choose to y directly, or just stay here to watch.


    For Sauron and others, if they receive two years of training in such a ce, it is estimated that everyone''s strength will reach an unprecedented level.


    Not to mention Zoro who was surprised when he came in, even Robin, who was the imperial concubine of the Tru Empire, was also surprised when he saw this scene when he first came in.


    After all, she had never appeared on an empty ind before. When she saw such a scene for the first time, she was inevitably quite shocked. It was also the first time that he learned about the training methods of the Tru Empire army.

 Chapter 427 Special training venue

    <h4>Chapter 427 Special training venue</h4>


    Although everyone has arrived at the small sky ind tform, it is not their turn to fight now. After all, there are at least four or five groups of people fighting on the site.


    The battle between these people ispletely impossible for ordinary people to capture with the naked eye. Their movement speed and attack speed have reached a staggering level.


    "Amazing!"


    Usopp just sat on the chair outside, watching the people fighting inside. Although he didn''t understand it very well, he couldn''t help but let out a sigh.


    "It''s such an exciting battle, I want to go up there too."


    Luffy stood on the edge and shouted with excitement.


    At this moment, a person suddenly appeared in front of him from an unknown direction. He looked at Luffy with cold eyes and said, "If you want to watch from here, don''t talk. There are no rules at all!"


    "Sorry, sorry, our captain doesn''t understand these rules." Sanji hurriedly stepped forward and said.


    "Captain? Are you pirates?"


    The man who spoke, his eyes became even colder, and the aura exuding from his body seemed as if he was about to take action in the next second.


    After all, this small sky ind tform is not guarded by anyone, and almost anyone who is willing toe in cane.


    But none of the aborigines on the empty ind will run up here for nothing. At most, some young men on the empty ind will asionally run here to watch the battle. This is not a good thing for their young people. , it can be regarded as the only ce where I can choose to vent.


    "Please don''t get me wrong, we are following the prince and concubine of the Tru Empire!"


    Sanji said again.


    After hearing this, the man with cold eyes seemed to realize something at this moment. After thinking for a moment, he said in a slightly calmer tone, "If you want to watch the battle, don''t open your mouth and speak. This is not a circus show you are watching. Don''t affect the audience." The people inside.��


    Before Sanji and Luffy could react, the other party had disappeared without a trace in the next second.


    "What''s the rule?"


    Luffy asked, still a little confused.


    "Don''t think too much about it. If you want to watch it, just watch it here and don''t make any more noise."


    Sanji said rather helplessly.


    "I see."


    Luffy said with a nonchnt grin.


    Anyway, no one knows what he is thinking? Maybe it''s this carefree personality, or maybe it''s because he hides his heart too deeply.


    But the battle inside is still going on. Every punch and kick they make, including the opponent''s attack and defense, the other Tru Empire soldiers who are watching on the stage are all watching extremely seriously. , even for fear of missing any detail.


    Zoro did not stay with Luffy and the others. Instead, he apanied Queronge to the other end of the venue.


    "Aren''t they two people fighting inside?"


    When he first came here, Zoro waspletely surprised, because there were two people fighting in the venue, and their appearance was exactly the same as the people standing on the two small tforms in front of him. The only difference was that The only thing is that these two people have their eyes closed at the moment, as if they can''t feel the situation outside at all.


    "Don''t be too surprised. The two people fighting inside are also them. It''s just different here. The battle here ispletely based on life and death. Even if the people staying in the field die, it will never have any impact. to themselves.


    As for the principle of this, I don''t need to tell you anymore. You will understand it after the battle. "


    Queronge said with a smile on his face.


    Because there are five groups of small circr countertops in front of us, and there are two people standing on each of them at the moment. From this perspective, both sides of the battle will stand on a small tform, and then their conscious figures will appear on the small tform. central square before the endless battle begins.


    In fact, this method has been used in the Toru Empire for several years. The Devil Fruit obtained from the CP also allowed Changnuo to directly create this small sky ind.


    Changnuo doesn''t want to hand over the ability of the psychedelic fruit to anyone. No matter who controls this ability, he doesn''t know what kind of methods the other party will use in the future. Instead of worrying so much, it is better to directly inject these things into a person. among the appliances.


    Of course, this small sky ind does y a very important role. The confrontation between everyone can be carried out at will, and it is just like the actual battle. It is nothing more than that in the end, the people on both sides of the battle will not be injured or injured. It will just die.


    The five teams of people fighting in the middle of the square each seemed to have their own fighting space area. The sounds caused by fighting with each other were not affected. The sights seen by people outside were also frightening. Staying inside and fighting did not affect them at all. The fighting power of each individual''s whole body was almost in an all-out fight with each other from the very beginning.


    In less than a moment, the battle between the two of them ended with a loud sound.


    However, at this time, a huge pit had appeared in the ce where they originally fought. One of them had been beaten into the pit by another person at some point.


    After a while, the two people in the space they belonged to disappeared instantly, followed closely by the deep pit that originally appeared on the ground, which began to slowly heal in the next second.


    Zoro''s face was full of disbelief, but then the real two people on the disk connected to the two people fighting just woke up immediately.


    One of the men, who looked thinner, shouted angrily at the person in front of him, "Jibo, you bastard! Do you know how painful the punch you just punched?"


    The person who spoke was probably the one who was hammered into the pit by another person just now, but judging from the tone and expression of his words, this person waspletely fine.


    The guy standing opposite him could only smile awkwardly and said nothing.


    "What''s going on?"


    Zoro looked at the scene in front of him and asked Quelongge curiously.


    "Didn''t I tell you just now? Although you can''t hurt yourself in the battle here, you will still feel a strong pain, and this pain will still be vaguely felt even after ites out."


    Queronge said with an innocent smile.


    "It seems that this ce is indeed not as simple as imagined!" Zoro couldn''t help but think after hearing this.


    Before speaking, the two people who were originally fighting had already walked off the tform, and they were still talking andughing. Such a fight would not hurt the feelings between them, which was also the main purpose of setting up this special battlefield.

 Chapter 428 Communication on Kendo

    <h4>Chapter 428 Communication on Kendo</h4>


    After they came down, the tform that was originally connected to the venue was now empty.


    Queronge stood behind Sauron, patted him on the shoulder, smiled and said, "Let''s go, it''s up to the two of us to y the rest."


    Zoro had a puzzled look on his face. To be honest, he still didn''t understand what the principle was, and he even seemed at a loss.


    But he couldn''t bear it and Quelongge was already walking in front, so he could only silently follow behind him and walk towards the tform in front.


    This tform ispletely a circr tabletop made of special materials. The overall area is about four square meters. In the middle is a tall cylinder. Above the top of the cylinder, there is a simr It''s like a diamond, emitting a faint pink light from time to time.


    There are a total of five such circr countertops in this row, and the settings on each are the same. There is a fence in the middle of each circr countertop to prevent the two parties from disturbing each other.


    After Queronge found the circr tabletop, he turned to look at Sauron again, and then directly raised his legs and walked towards it.


    Zoro followed closely. When the two of them went up together, Queronge smiled and said calmly, "Hold your hands on this pole."


    Zoro didn''t refuse, and just held it with his right hand, but then something beyond his imagination appeared.


    Because in the next second, the figures of two people instantly appeared in the central square. This was a space that looked quiterge, not like what was seen from the periphery.


    Because people watching from the outside can enjoy the battle between five groups of people at the same time, once theye in, it seems as if the world belongs to the two of them, and there are no factors around them that can affect the decisive battle between the two.


    Moreover, the scenes seen here arepletely different from those outside. More importantly, this ce almost imitates all the scenes of fighting in the outside world. There are mountains, water and woods, but this time they appear in a huge forest. The line of sight between each other will also be somewhat obstructed.


    "Get adjusted first. After all, this is your first time here. How do you feel about it now?"


    Queronge appeared in front of Sauron with a smile on his face and said calmly.


    "What exactly is going on?"


    Zoro asked with a shocked look on his face.


    "This is the method of our King. Don''t underestimate this battle tform. With the construction of this ce, even the power of a general cannot cause any damage to this ce." Quelonge said.


    However, those people watching the battle outside, especially Luffy and the others, as soon as they saw Zoro appear inside, their sitting bodies seemed to be out of control, and they stood up excitedly.


    Several people even walked directly to the edge, lying on it and watching. They seemed to have no interest in the other people''s battles, and most of them looked at Sauron.


    "How did they get in? Did you see it?"


    Usopp asked curiously.


    "We didn''t notice when they passed by. This ce feels so weird."


    Nami asked equally confused.


    "Watch carefully, this is Sauron''s battle."


    Luffy said, looking inside with a serious expression, without even blinking. It''s not like he has never experienced such a situation. At least not long after he came out, when he met Sanji, Zoro was already the same as that time. Hawkeye, known as the best swordsman in the world, had fought such a duel.


    Beforeing to Sky Ind, Zoro had proposed more than once that he wanted to have a decisive battle with the kendo masters from the Tru Empire after going to Sky Ind.


    This time, it is considered to be in line with the opponent''s inner thoughts, and he can have a good fight.


    But as the captain, Luffy would not stop him from doing this, but the worry in his heart still existed.


    From the outside, the battle in the central square looks like these people are just fighting on a tform. They cannot feel the atmosphere inside. The space where these people fight may be on the water, or between some canyons, or even It is possible to fight on any venue, but in order to adapt to attacks between navies, more scenes almost always appear on ships sailing on the sea.


    This can be regarded as a special effort to create all the scenes in front of them. The psychedelic fruit ability is actually connected to each other in their hearts, using the space fruit ability to create a mirror image.


    After Sauron and Queronge stayed in this area for a while, at least while Sauron was familiar with the environment and methods in front of them, the two of them had a tacit understanding and began to retreat.


    "I know that you are rtively powerful, but please don''t hold back. Even if you die because of the sword, it will be an honor for me."


    Zoro wore a ck silk scarf on his head, then pulled out the two knives at his waist and said in an attack form.


    "Interesting little guy, don''t tell me, I actually like you quite a bit."


    Quelonge said with a smile. After the words fell, he slowly put his right hand on the long knife at his waist. Then, a tornado-like shape instantly rolled up within a few meters centered on him. The fallen leaves on the ground were blown several meters away in an instant.


    Just the powerful aura was enough to create such a form. Sauron saw all this and couldn''t help but feel nervous in his heart, but he still held the two knives tightly in his hands and looked ahead sharply.


    At this moment, he could no longer hear any external sounds in his mind, and his eyes were all focused on Quelonge in front of him to analyze any attack that the opponent mightunch next.


    "I am fortunate enough to have the guidance of His Majesty the King himself, and His Majesty has personally created several attack methods. I might as well show them to you today."


    Queronge''s body formed a lunge, his left hand was ced on the scabbard, and his right hand held the handle of the knife tightly. He stared sharply at Sauron in front of him. From a formal point of view, his actions were quite contemptuous of Sauron. After all, Such a weak guy really couldn''t bring himself to use his full strength.


    But from the bottom of his heart, Quelongge was wary of his opponent''s every move. All these fighting methods depended on normal training.


    "Whirlwind~ Draw your sword and sh!"


    Queronge suddenly pulled out the long knife in his hand. The knife he pulled out instantly formed a straight line with his body. Zoro, who originally thought he had no offensive power, realized in the next second that he waspletely wrong.

 Chapter 429 Swordsmanship Collision

    <h4>Chapter 429 Swordsmanship Collision</h4>


    Although the appearance of drawing the sword was unremarkable, in the next second a crackling wind burst out directly from Quelong''s side, which was already mixed with countless attacks at the same time.


    Zoro also reacted immediately. He crossed the knife with both hands and stood it upright in front of him. His aura exploded, and he was like a cow.


    "Double-sword style~Niugui!"


    This time, Sauron did not choose to avoid the attack. Instead, he directly faced it with his own attack, wanting to test how powerful the opponent was.


    Facing this whirlwind, Sauron didn''t know where the courage came from, and he immediately went up with a pair of hard steel swords.


    Immediately afterwards, a bull-headed image rushed into the whirlwind, apanied by a harsh collision sound and Sauron''s cry of pain, but the two knives in front of him were always blocking it, firmly protecting it. I tried my best not to get hurt myself.


    After Luffy and others standing outside saw this scene, a group of people couldn''t help but feel their hearts in their throats.


    Especially Luffy, he tried hard to stay calm, but his hands were clenched into fists.


    "Is Zoro going to be okay?"


    Chopper asked worriedly.


    After all, they don''t know that what exists inside is just a mirror image. Even if Sauron dies inside, it will not affect his true self.


    Their worries depend entirely on the emotions between their partners. When Luffy saw this scene, even though his eyes were about to burst, he still didn''t make any move.


    Zoro, who was dueling inside, waited for the whirlwind in front of him to end. Although he was still standing there firmly, except for the front of his body, which was not damaged, the rest of the body could be described as horrible.


    The clothes on his body, including his back, were all torn to pieces, and there were different scars on his neck and face.


    Fortunately, these wounds were not too big, but his body was still full of blood at the moment, and the knife held in both hands still maintained the defensive form just now.


    Even though he has be what he is now, Zoro''s expression does not show any pain, but he is slightly weaker than when he first started.


    "How many more times can youst like this?" Queronge asked with a smile.


    "Until death!"


    Zoro said through gritted teeth, then slowly put the white knife he held in his right hand into his mouth, bit the handle of the knife directly with his mouth, and then pulled out another long knife from his waist with his right hand.


    The style of the three-sword style is definitely highlighted at this moment.


    When Queronge saw this scene, he just smiled softly. He didn''t mind what method the other party used, but he didn''t mind practicing with the little guy in front of him.


    "Hawkeye said at the beginning that if you want to surpass him, you can only use your life to fill the gap."


    Zoro stood there, the knife in his mouth remained unchanged, but the two knives in his hands began to spin rapidly.


    "Three Swordsman Style~Demon yer!!"


    With that said, Sauron rushed towards Quelonge in an instant, but the opponent still kept his body standing upright at this moment.


    Facing Sauron''s attack, Queronge closed his eyes at this moment, holding the long knife directly in his hands with both hands. The tip of the knife was vertically downward, but the de was facing the direction of his side.


    "Whirlwind~Vortex sh!!"


    The moment Queronge felt Sauron approaching, his eyes were still tightly closed. With a soft drink from his mouth, he directly grasped the handle of the knife with both hands and thrust it hard into the ground.


    Immediately afterwards, a shape that was indeed like a whirlpool appeared around his body in an instant.


    The whole person is in the center of the vortex, but the distance of this vortex can reach a radius of 3 meters.


    This form is not only used for defense, but is also a form of attack.


    Defense and attack are concentrated together. This move can almost maintain an invincible situation when faced with multi-person siege.


    The moment Zoro approached the edge of the vortex, the three knives in his hand began to collide with the power of the vortex emanating from the opponent.


    These whirlpools are all formed by des, and are still gradually expanding.


    The environment the two of them were in was in an airtight forest. As the whirlpool began to gradually expand, Sauron had no choice but to start to defend and retreat.


    After all, he initiated the attack, but now, the whirlpool space around Quelonge began to gradually spread toward the periphery from the original radius of about 3 meters.


    The giant trees they encountered along the way turned into powder in an instant. Even before the tree fell, the flying whirlpool des hadpletely smashed it into pieces.


    The ground where the vortex spread was as clean as if it had been washed by water, and the soil on the ground turned into a deep pit as the vortex spread.


    Feeling this scene, Zoro stopped his defense and attack, and jumped back suddenly. The distance of more than ten meters finally softened the opponent''s current attack.


    "What about this one?"


    Quelonge put away this attack, slowly pulled out the knife in his hand from the ground, and then swung it out at an extremely fast speed. The next moment, the ground suddenly set off countless waves, and an attack simr to a sea wave began. Heading in the direction of Zoro.


    The range of this move is very wide, it seems to be at least about 10m.


    The most important thing is that the attack speed this time is quite fast. Even if Zoro is about 20 meters away from him, he only has two seconds to react.


    Immediately afterwards, when Sauron checked the attack wave, he instantly jumped into the air.


    "Santo-ryu~Hunt!!"


    Sauron, who was already frozen in mid-air, instantly rushed towards Queronge''s direction at extremely fast speeds.


    Not only that, he also brought a powerful attack directly towards Queronge.


    "The reaction speed this time is very good!"


    Quelonge smiled at the corner of his mouth. The knife in his hand was calmly lying in front of him. His right hand held the handle of the knife tightly, but his left hand calmly raised the de.


    The second before Zoro arrived, Queronge just jumped slightly, and his whole body instantly fell back two meters.


    At this moment, Sauron''s attack also came down. The two knives were directly pressed against the ground. The next moment, he attacked again in the direction of Quelongge''s neck.


    But the opponent didn''t seem to have any intention of attacking. He was just defending the opponent''s attack from beginning to end, and retreated slowly and lightly.


    "Is it possible that you look down on me so much?"


    Zoro continued his offensive trend and asked very coldly in his words.

 Chapter 430 The function of the knife

    <h4>Chapter 430 The function of the knife</h4>


    Queronge still kept smiling, then inserted the knife in his hand into the scabbard, and calmly took two steps in the direction of Sauron and said, "So, what do you think of the knife in your hand?"


    "Killing skills!"


    Zoro said sharply.


    "No, the knife is a partner, a life insurance when we enter the battlefield and fight with others, so at any time, the knife in your hand must not leave you, and at the same time, you must not let him get hurt.


    Although he can kill people, he can also protect himself. Sometimes his mistakes should not be borne by hispanions.


    If you were attacking just now and I used the partners in my hands to defend, then at least one of the two partners in your hands would be broken. "


    Queronge changed his smile this time and looked at Zoro seriously.


    He is not onlypeting with the opponent, but also giving guidance to the opponent in thispetition.


    "You are right, the knife in my hand is indeed apanion, but if mypanion breaks, I am not afraid, so I will go with her with my life.


    If you can''t be a strong person, what''s the point of pursuing life? "


    Zoro said seriously, and then started to use the previous attack method again, but this time his expression waspletely different.


    "Three Swordsman Style~One Three Thousand Worlds!"


    This is almost Zoro''s strongest attack move at the moment. His eyes suddenly became sharp, and his entire expression became indomitable.


    If this move continues, either the opponent will die, or you will die!


    After Queronge saw this scene, he became serious. The purpose of his seriousness was not because of how powerful the opponent''s moves were, but because he admired the little guy''s current courage.


    Although fighting on this tform will not be affected even by death, at least it can still make the opponent feel deep fear in his heart, and the pain on his body will be fully reflected.


    "Whirlwind~ Landing sh!!"


    This time, Quelongge directly raised the tip of the knife vertically, holding the handle of the knife tightly with both hands, still keeping his eyes closed.


    But what waspletely different this time was that a dark cloud-like state suddenly appeared above the head. The darkness was like the fear that enveloped other people''s hearts.


    Zoro''s three-sword style technique instantly rushed forward, but the next second, Queronge pressed the sword vertically downwards with force, and all the darkness in the sky suddenly fell down, but what fell was countless. de.


    The powerful attack causedplete coverage of destruction. For Queronge, his future goal is to go to the battlefield. All attack techniques are also applied torge-scale attacks, unlike other swordsmen who are straightforward. Single target attack.


    Massive coverage, after the attack fell, almost no grass could grow within a hundred meters of the entire site.


    However, Sauron, the attacker, was already lying on the ground dying, with almost no good flesh on his body, and even his face had been damaged by countless sword des, making it impossible to look straight at him.


    Luffy and the others were watching this scene from the periphery. Except for Luffy, everyone covered their mouths and tears flowed from their eyes.


    However, Luffy himself also had red eyes and clenched his fists. Perhaps his inadvertent anger directly inspired his own overlord-like domineering energy.


    It''s just that the power is too weak, which just causes the weaker people next to him, like Usopp, to faint.


    At the moment when the overlord''s domineering energy emitted, almost all the people on the small sky ind tform looked at Luffy. They were not affected in any substantial way, but they could feel this kind of influence one by one. The stress of mental turmoil.


    "Zoron!"


    Choppery on the edge crying, tears streaming down his face.


    Sanji stayed there with a frown on his face, and the cigarettes in his hands were one after another. He didn''t know how many cigarettes he had thrown away at his feet.


    The scene before them indeed made them feel extremely shocked. At least in their eyes, their partner Zoro had disappeared into thin air at this moment.


    "Luffy, what are you going to do?"


    Sanji shouted quickly after seeing Luffy''s actions.


    Because at this moment, this guy had already started walking towards the direction of the duel field where they were.


    "I''m going to challenge this guy. He actually dared to kill Sauron. Even if he dies, I''m going to challenge him."


    Luffy said in a cold voice.


    "Luffy, don''t you understand? This is Zoro''s own choice." Nami roared directly, the tears in her eyes never stopped.


    But such a loud noise also caused dissatisfaction among others. The Tru soldiers who were still watching the battle all focused their eyes here.


    The man who hade to remind and warn them before came over again, but this time the cold expression on his face was more serious than the first time.


    "Nami, stop shouting, others areing too!"


    Chopper looked at the man who had slowly walked over and said with great fear in his tone.


    How could Nami care about this now? Luffy continued, walking forward. She could only stand here helplessly and watch, then silently knelt on the ground.


    Robin was not with these people. She had taken Mia in another direction since she came in, but Robin was watching everything that happened in front of her.


    Facing Luffy''s sudden release of domineering aura, Robin felt quite surprised. Even the little guy Mia who had been staying next to him looked at it in disbelief.


    "Your partner seems to have misunderstood something? Why don''t you go over and take a look?"


    Mia looked at Luffy walking forward, raised her head with some confusion, looked at Robin sitting there and asked.


    "Captain Lu has his own ideas, and people here won''t do anything to him."


    Robin said with a smile.


    While talking, this man from the Tohru Empire had already met Luffy. Both of them had cold expressions on their faces. Even though they had reached the opposite position, Luffy was still not touched at all. His only thought now was to leave. Take on this challenge.


    "go back!"


    said the soldier.


    "I want to challenge you too!"


    Luffy''s voice was cold and his eyes were piercing, without any fear at all.


    "We''ll talk about itter when you''re qualified."


    The soldier also had a cold face and said in a low tone.


    The two of them almost didn''t give way to each other, but the soldier was already ready to attack. Once Luffy took another step forward, he didn''t mind attacking directly.

 Chapter 431 Expulsion

    <h4>Chapter 431 Expulsion</h4>


    The two looked at each other next, but no matter how resolute Luffy looked now, his strength was still there.


    "I just want to challenge, can''t I?"


    Luffy asked angrily.


    "Come here, drive them out!"


    The man standing opposite Luffy didn''t even think about saying a word to him now.


    How dare you be so arrogant in your own ce? I really don��t know what this guy is thinking?


    While they were talking, five or six people had already arrived from other ces. When they arrived, they respectfully shouted to the man standing opposite Luffy, "Lieutenant General Deco!"


    "Drive them out!"


    The man named Deco ordered the person behind him with a cold voice.


    "Lieutenant General Deke, they are apanying His Royal Highness the Prince and the Imperial Concubine."


    One of the soldiers behind him warned in a low voice.


    "I know, but the air-to-air military area is not a ce where they can participate yet."


    Deco said again, and when he turned around, he looked at the soldiers behind him with cold eyes.


    There was no need to say anything more. The people behind him understood immediately and did not dare to say any more unnecessary words.


    But at this moment, the angry Luffy punched Lieutenant General Deco instantly.


    It would be okay if he had strong strength, but at this time he waspletely blinded by anger, but it would be great to have such courage.


    Lieutenant General Deco didn''t even pay much attention to the opponent. Faced with the sudden punch, he didn''t even dodge.


    The moment his fist was about tond on his face, Lieutenant General Deco''s normally normal expression instantly turned dark.


    The level of defense of Armament Haki made Luffy''s fist hit it as if hitting a steel te.


    Lieutenant General Deco stood here without even changing his breath. For such a weak attack, he simply chose to ignore it.


    However, the soldiers behind him were stunned for a moment after seeing this scene, and then several of them went up directly.


    When one of them faced Luffy''s uing attack, he chose to punch the opponent in the stomach with a domineering punch instantly.


    The powerful impact caused the rubber man to fly over a dozen meters in just an instant.


    "Luffy!!"


    Nami and the others hurriedly shouted after seeing this scene.


    Sanji looked at hispanion and could only jump lightly to stand in front of him.


    "Leave here, the Tru Empire is not a ce for you to run wild."


    Lieutenant General Deco said to them again in a cold voice.


    However, at this moment, Zoro, who was already dead in the eyes of Luffy and others, followed Queronge with some dejection.


    But the moment he came over, he already saw Luffy being knocked away.


    In this ce, all of them knew that the opponent had an army of one or two hundred people, and each of them was stronger than they imagined.


    Even if he received a punch, he could only endure it silently.


    "Luffy!!"


    After seeing this scene, Zoro shouted quickly.


    Although he doesn''t understand what is going on here? But I still don��t want people like me to cause trouble here.


    After hearing the sound, several other people all turned their heads and looked in Zoro''s direction.


    Not surprisingly, everyone was stunned for a moment. Sanji stood there, leaning against the fence, smoking his cigarette holder and muttering, "This bastard!"


    "Zoron!!!"


    After seeing this scene, Chopper immediately rushed forward, hugged Zoro and cried loudly.


    Nami was still looking confused at this time, and even Luffy, who turned his head to look at Zoro, didn''t know what was going on.


    "What''s wrong with you?"


    Zoro asked with some confusion.


    "It''s not because you''re a bastard. Everyone thought you were dead inside just now, but what exactly is going on?"


    Sanji walked to Zoro''s side and asked with his eyes still filled with confusion.


    "I don''t quite understand the principle. In short, the people fighting inside are not real people!"


    Zoro said.


    "Well~, as long as Zoro is okay."


    Luffy stood up with some difficulty and said with a grin.


    Several people who had been in a solemn atmosphere just now immediately started to smile.


    The only thing was that Usopp was still unconscious and fell to the ground.


    "Since you are all fine, leave here quickly and don''t affect the normal training of our troops."


    Lieutenant General Deco looked at this group of people and said in a low voice.


    "I''m sorry, Lieutenant General Deco. I brought these people in, but the purpose ofing here has beenpleted. I will take them out directlyter."


    Queronge walked up to Lieutenant General Deco, saluted him with a military salute, and spoke in a respectful manner.


    "You guy, can you please stop causing trouble to me in the future? If His Majesty the King finds out about this kind of thing, I will give you two whips."


    Lieutenant General Deco said with an expression of disdain. Judging from his expression, it was obvious that he was quite familiar with Quelonge.


    "Lieutenant General Deco, as an apology, I will treat you to dinnerter."


    "I want to go to Yun Pce to eat!"


    "Isn''t it a little too expensive there?" Queronge asked.


    "Can you just say it?"


    "Okay, no problem. I will make arrangements when I have timeter."


    Queronge said with a smile, then turned and walked towards Luffy.


    Although he didn''t understand what happened just now, Quelongge could guess some of it.


    After arriving at their side, Queronge''s expression gradually became serious, and finally he sighed helplessly and said, "Everyone, let''s go!"


    Luffy looked at Zoro who was intact and didn''t care about the beating he had just received. Instead, he readily epted Quelong''s offer to leave.


    When Usopp fainted on the ground, Sanji directly dragged him on his shoulder with one hand, and left here with the others.


    The three people who came in together before, including Mao Dun, Robin, and Mia, did not go out with them this time. Only these few people left the ce unsteadily.


    The moment they arrived at the door, Zoro turned back and took another look at the small sky ind tform, but the scene at this time was the same as when they first entered. Nothing could be seen from the outside, only an empty ce. .


    "You leave first. I''ll find youter when I have time."


    After Queronge sent them out, he said with a smile on his face and a very gentle tone.


    "Aren''t you leaving with us?" Zoro asked.


    After all, they were people who went in and came out together. Although they only met for a short time, in Sauron''s eyes, Quelonge was still a very good guy.

 Chapter 432 Everyone’s Doubts

    <h4>Chapter 432 Everyone��s Doubts</h4>


    Queronge stood there and smiled slightly, walked up to Zoro and patted him on the shoulder, then turned and walked directly towards the small sky ind.


    No one understands what Querongo means by this? Probably Zoro felt something.


    Zoro looked at the other person''s leaving figure and felt mixed emotions in his heart.


    Sauron has always been pursuing higher attainments in swordsmanship, but from the first encounter with Hawkeye, the best swordsman in the world, to the current encounter with Queronge, regardless of whether the other party has used all their strength, their casual Attacks can cause huge damage.


    This made this green-haired guy who was only 19 years old suddenly fall into a state of confusion.


    After the battle on the small sky ind tform, Zoro was actually very depressed when he came out, but Queronge still gave him a lot of encouragement, which made the little guy quite touched.


    After thinking for a while, Zoro looked at the others, still feeling a little heavy. Fortunately, the appearance of thesepanions gave him somefort in his depressed heart.


    On the small sky ind tform.


    "My lord, why do you want to follow a group of such weak pirates?"


    Moton stood next to Robin and asked. For a person like him, it waspletely unimaginable and iprehensible why, as the imperial concubine of the Tru Empire, she would sail on the sea with a group of pirates.


    Taking advantage of this time, I would also like toe over and ask the other party what he thinks?


    "Modun, there are many things that are not as simple as you think. You only see that they are a group of pirates in front of you, but you cannot see what kind of shadow they have behind them.


    His Majesty the King''s arrangements always exceed all of our imaginations! "


    Robin said with a smile, still holding the little guy Mia in her arms, and the other party was probably too tired from walking in the front, and now she fell asleep peacefully in her arms.


    Looking at Robin, Mao Dun''s originally puzzled expression suddenly became relieved, not because of anything else, but because of the mention of their King from Robin''s mouth.


    For his own king, Mao Dun, like other soldiers, felt inexplicable trust just by hearing the other person''s name.


    No matter what kind of thing it is, as long as Chang Nuo is involved, they will naturally feel that it is necessary to do it.


    "It turned out to be His Majesty the King''s idea. It seems that something great will definitely happen in the future."


    Modu murmured to himself.


    "If His Majesty the King can choose to do something in such a way, he must naturally have his purpose. We, the people, should not specte too much in case it disrupts His Majesty the King''s n."


    As soon as Mao Dunqian Heel finished speaking, Lieutenant General Deco walked out directly and said in a rather serious tone.


    "Why are you here?"


    Modun turned his head and looked at Lieutenant General Deco and asked.


    "haven''t seen you for a long time!"


    Robin sat there, holding Mia in his arms, and said with a slight smile on his face.


    "Emperor''s concubine!"


    Lieutenant General Deco lowered his head slightly and said hello respectfully.


    "No need to be so polite!"


    Robin said, and by the way, he hugged Mia upwards in his arms to prevent him from falling off and falling to the ground.


    "My lord, will this really work this time? Will it affect His Majesty the King''s n?"


    Modun also became serious at this time. After all, everything had gradually started after theynded on the Sky Ind.


    Although Robin didn''t know what purpose Changnuo had waiting for Luffy and the others? But what is certain after thinking about it is that things are definitely not as simple as they seem.


    She couldn''t even imagine why, as Emperor Toru, he would send Luffy to the position of Pirate King? What effect can this have on them?


    Although he couldn''t think through these things, Robin still wanted to try some other things. Then he looked at Mao Dun and said, "Don''t worry about these things. Next, you should do what you should do. Wait until the empresses to Sky Ind." After that, we will start preparing to leave, and you will just make arrangements when the timees."


    "Do I need to go down through the space gate?"


    Lieutenant General Deco asked.


    "No need, just find a way tond vertically from the airway."


    "Isn''t that dangerous?" Lieutenant General Deco said.


    But how could Robin care about this now? The Space Gate is currently the biggest secret of the Tru Empire. This secret will never be made public unless there are special circumstances.


    The Navy and the World Government most want to know how they get to the Sky Ind, but these matters are currently the most strictly managed aspect of the Tohru Empire. How could Robin let pirates like Luffy pass through the portal?


    Even though they are now partners, there is still an inseparable family rtionship above them. The development of the Tru Empire is already the biggest thing in the eyes of all of them.


    "Lieutenant General Deco, I once heard His Majesty the King mention that there seems to be a special kind of octopus on the sky ind. It can be firmly attached to the hull of the ship like a parachute. Even if it falls from the sky ind, there will be no problems. I don''t know. Is this thing true?"


    Robin asked confused.


    "There is indeed such a thing, but..."


    "There''s nothing to worry about, don''t worry!"


    Robin heard Lieutenant General Deco''s worries, so he interrupted him directly.


    However, Lieutenant General Deco was thinking about more than just these things. If something went wrong if Princess Trudeau fell from the sky ind, then he would definitely have an unshirkable responsibility.


    He really didn''t want Robin to take such a big risk and fall directly from the ind, but he couldn''t say these words.


    After staying for a while, Lieutenant General Deco could only nod helplessly.


    Tohru Empire.


    The entire high-level military meeting basicallysted for nearly a day and night. During this period, almost all the details were finalized. Everyone was responsible for all aspects, including the monitoring of other forces, and everyone was arranged to deal with them in different areas. .


    Even if the war begins, not everyone in the military leadership of the Tru Empire will be able to go.


    For these powerful people, staying up all night would basically not be a problem, but everyone could tell how much impact this incident would have on the Tru Empire.


    This also allowed them to understand how much control their King has over the future?


    Just relying on prophecy, one thing has been arranged so clearly. There will always be many changes in the future, but these changes have be inevitable in their actions.

 Chapter 433 Possible accidents

    <h4>Chapter 433 Possible idents</h4>


    As soon as the meeting ended, everyone started to implement the meeting content.


    This time it is not just about participating in the battle at the top, but more importantly, the Tru Empire needs to send arge number of personnel to monitor the situation of other forces.


    The entire pirate world will basically undergo huge changes due to this battle on the top. However, Changnuo must control all this information within a controble range as soon as possible.


    Although the meeting had ended, in the pce hall at this time, Chang Nuo was sitting at the top, and several generals from the Tru Empire were standing below.


    Even though they seemed a little tired, these people still needed to meet up after the meeting.


    In this slightly thin hall, General Yixiao leaned on the crutch in his hand and stood quietly, but the aura of everyone was disyed in his mind at this moment.


    "Your Majesty, if you make such a big move this time, there should be risks involved, right?"


    Yixiao asked.


    This is actually what everyone thinks in their hearts. Now that they have reached this position, everyone basically wants to consider all aspects of things. However, for them, any move made by the Tru Empire will be a big deal. It may lead to irreversible consequences.


    At the high-level military meeting, General Yixiao did not mention these issues, but now is the time to mention these matters. At least this time they may have to face the navy directly, and any order may cause irreversible results.


    ��Although these matters have been thoroughly discussed and all details have been fully considered, there may be changes that may ur during the process, or issues that we have not considered. It really cannot be avoided or considered.��


    Chang Nuo sighed slightly. How could he not know these situations?


    Although they have brought Xia Li from Fish-Man Ind to their own country and can urately predict the urrence of many major events, they still cannot confirm the problems.


    "It seems that we really need to make many preparations by then. Today we have discussed too many uncertain factors, but from which direction these uncertain factors wille, we can''t say, but there is still no problem with His Majesty the King''s decision-making. , if arge-scale war can really happen this time, it will indeed be of great benefit to the Tru Empire.


    Seizing this opportunity will have a vital impact on our entire country. In any case, I still support His Majesty the King''s decision. "


    Junhe said extremely seriously.


    "No one said that they did not support His Majesty the King''s decision, but we should treat this matter with caution," Moshank said.


    ��Next, we can first analyze the possible sources of these uncertain factors, and then break down the rest one by one. By then, we must do everything carefully.


    After all, it is rted to the future development direction of the Tru Empire. If it is not handled properly, it is likely to cause a fatal blow to our country. "


    Chang Nuo said, actually he already had a general direction in his heart.


    At least in his understanding, once he participates in this war, he willpletely break with the Navy and the World Government. The main thing to look at now is, what are the benefits to him after participating in this time and breaking with these two forces? Not as big as before?


    "Your Majesty the King, I think the most likely ce for changes this time is the Navy. We are not yet sure of the Navy''s specific implementation n!"


    Abona was always frowning, as if he had a bad premonition in his heart.


    "You don''t need to say anything. The only things that may cause changes this time can onlye from three directions."


    Chang Nuo said, and the people below all focused their eyes on their King, as if they were waiting for the answer, even General Yixiao was no exception.


    After staying for a while, Chang Nuo continued, "What may happen now will not be on the navy. The most likely thing is the pressure from the world government. The other aspect is the air force among the three naval services. , none of us have ever explored this. What is their air force like?


    The unknown things are the scariest thing. Other things can be put on hold for the time being. The final change that may ur shoulde from the other Yonko in the new world, but this can be done by sending only one person to guard the periphery. "


    "Is it possible that the world government really has an air force?"


    Abona is a little confused. After all, Abona has all the information about the World Government''s investigation. Although there are many things that have not been investigated clearly, the investigation into the direction of the World Government''s air force has been done a few years ago. Preparations have begun, but so far, there has been absolutely no news about the so-called air force of the World Government.


    No one knows whether the World Government has an air force, although they have established the position of Commander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces. But as for where the air force is, the Tru Empire still has no direction at all.


    No one is sure whether this so-called air force exists, but the world government does have an army. On the surface, the strength of these armies is infinitely inferior to that of the navy.


    Based on all this is the origin of their main doubts.


    "Let''s not talk about whether the World Government has an air force, but this at least provides us with an early warning. As for the air force, it will be managed by Enel in the future. It should not cause much damage to the Tru Empire for the time being. The most important threat now is to closely monitor the dynamics of the World Government. No matter what the circumstances, no one must underestimate the behemoth of the World Government.


    Their existence will definitely not be lower than that of the Navy, otherwise the Navy would not only obey the words of the top leaders of the World Government for so many years. "


    Changnuo said.


    "The world government is indeed not as simple as it seems. Among the four emperors of the new world, which one is not a behemoth? What they are on guard against is not the navy. After all, even though the navy is powerful, it has been scattered all over the ce. This behemoth has no influence on The Yonko of the New World do not pose any threat."


    Yixiao now agreed with what Chang Nuo said. Not to mention that he was many years older than them, and he had seen much more experience than these people.


    Although no one knows exactly what the world government is like, the behemoth world government has always existed in front of everyone''s eyes.

 Chapter 434 Hancock’s Mission

    <h4>Chapter 434 Hancock��s Mission</h4>


    Without strong strength, how could the world government possibly be able to stabilize the Celestial Dragons?


    It is estimated that it was directly destroyed by some pirates many years ago.


    "Your Majesty the King, it seems that we still need to discuss these matters carefullyter. Fortunately, it will take some time for this matter to happen. Since all the topics have been mentioned, there are always many things we can do. A ce to prepare.��


    Abona said that he now has a lot of opinions. At least in this case, this guy has used all his abilities to prove himself.


    "No matter what the situation is, as long as His Majesty the King orders, I, Junhe, will not frown. In order to reveal the development of the empire, even if it costs my life, I will do my best."


    Junhe immediately acted seriously, even giving the impression that he was on top of things.


    Changnuo himself still had some alternative thoughts in this silent atmosphere, but after hearing what Junhe said, he couldn''t help but reveal a smile.


    But just like this, Chang Nuo shook his head helplessly, but he already had other thoughts in his heart.


    Facing the others, Chang Nuo said calmly, "Although this incident is likely to be a turning point for the Toru Empire, I still have to thank you all for the next step. Currently, the number of special forces personnel in the entire Toru Empire has reached nearly 500,000 people, plus the personnel currently undergoing training this time, within the next two years, the Tru Empire will be able to create about 1 million special operations forces.


    With this strength, I believe that the country canpete with any force, but this is not what we are proud of. Just like the content of today''s meeting, you can only look at the strength of others after understanding your own strength.


    So far, it is estimated that no one in our country except me has the strength to directlypete with the Four Emperors. In terms of high-level strength,bat is our biggest weakness at present. So while the people below are training intensively, you, as generals The high-level candidates also need to improve their personal strength.


    In terms of future operations, we will mainly rely on and rely on you. "


    Chang Nuo finally got to the point this time, because several people who listened to this had lowered their heads unconsciously.


    The Toru Empire is indeed as he said. The entire country is indeed a bit weak in terms of high-levelbat strength. Althoughpared to any force, the high-levelbat strength in the Toru Empire is outstanding, but it cannot always rely on action for everything. The king''s Changnuo took action personally, right?


    "Let''s discuss the matter here first. There isn''t much left. Everyone, go back and prepare carefully. The specific arrangements for the uing battle will be announced in newspapers. When will the Navy issue an announcement? , we have to make more detailed preparations, and we have already stayed up for a day and a night, so we should go back and rest quickly."


    Chang Nuo sat on it and looked at the people below and said leisurely.


    "Your Majesty the King, if this time things don''t happen as predicted, what can we do?"


    General Yixiao suddenly asked.


    Abona and several other generals suddenly raised their heads and looked at Chang Nuo at this moment, their eyes also full of doubts.


    Although they believed in the prophecies made by Xia Li, sometimes such prophecies may not necessarily go wrong.


    "If this thing cannot happen ording to the prophecy, then we will go ording to the prophecy and try every means to make this thing happen."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Although Yixiao couldn''t see the king''s smile, he could feel the thought of being a king, a feeling that made people think deeply.


    It''s just that as the monarch of a country, Yixiao can understand that some things do require unscrupulous means.


    "I see!"


    General Yixiao said, then turned around and walked towards the outside of the hall with the crutch in his hand.


    The other people seemed to have no doubts and started to turn around and prepare to leave at the same time. But at this moment, Chang Nuo suddenly shouted, "Junhe, please stay for a while. I''ll see youter if I need anything!"


    Others also turned around at the same time, but after hearing His Majesty the King just call Junhe, he continued to turn around silently and prepared to leave.


    Junhe stayed here alone. After everyone left, Hancock also walked in from the side room.


    As of now, she has not rested, nor has she left.


    After all these people left, although Junhe was still here, Hancock had met this guy more times than others, and they were rtively familiar with each other.


    After all, Junhe is responsible for almost all the supplies transported from the Toru Empire to the Daughter Kingdom.


    Today''s Daughter Kingdom is very different from before. Not only are there troops from the Tru Empire stationed on several small inds around the Daughter Kingdom, but many people''s families are also resettled in that ce full of wild beasts.


    "Your Majesty the King, the meeting has been going on for so long, and I have stopped from beginning to end, but it seems that there are no tasks that our daughter country can help with?"


    Hancock walked in and asked doubtfully.


    After all, he came in a hurry to participate in the high-level military meeting of the Tru Empire, but from the beginning to the end of the meeting, there was nothing like Hancock.


    For others, some detailed tasks were arranged, but for her, they were ignored and usually sat there all the time.


    "The tasks you need to do here are very important. Now you still hold the title of Pirate Empress Shichibukai, which will have a vital impact on the Toru Empire.


    At present, not many people in this world know about the rtionship between the two of us, so ording to this situation, all nned routes should still follow the original route. At that time, you only need to lead people to advance City, it can even be said that finding a way to send him to the Impel City is definitely possible as a Qibukai.


    Another point is that after the World Government invites you, no matter what, you must refuse it for a period of time and wait for the notice from us. "


    Chang Nuo suddenly looked serious as he spoke. Even though Hancock didn''t quite understand what he heard, he still nodded seriously in the end.

 Chapter 435 I’ve seen that person

    <h4>Chapter 435 I��ve seen that person</h4>


    Junhe stood alone below. He was still a little embarrassed watching the two people above him behave at such a close distance. He could only lower his head and peek upward from time to time.


    "Junhe, things wille to your sideter. After all the arrangements are made, you go to a ce with me."


    Changnuo looked at Junhe''s idle look below and said speechlessly.


    "Since you guys have something to do, I''ll take my leave first. When the timees and something happens, you can have someone notify me. This little guy Mia is still on the empty ind. I''ll go and take him back first. I''ll wait until something happens. I��ll send it over when it��s almost over.��


    Hancock said, mainly because he saw that Chang Nuo was now upied with all his energy by this matter, and there was no need for him to stay here any longer.


    "There is one more thing I want to tell you. After this war is over, you will begin to announce your withdrawal from the ranks of the Shichibukai, and at the same time end your pirate career!"


    "Is this necessary?"


    Hancock asked confused.


    "It is no longer necessary or unnecessary. Once you announce your withdrawal from the Shichibukai, it will definitely cause a bacsh from the Navy. However, the end of the war is also when the Navy is at its weakest, and they will not cause any harm to you. , retreating to the windless zone is already your best choice at the moment.


    The title of Shichibukai will notst long. I am afraid it will onlyst for a few years at most. After the next world government meeting, this title will probably be obliterated. By then, I am afraid that this matter will be very detrimental to you. . "


    Changnuo exined slowly, but in his mind, it was time to give Hancock a title.


    After hearing these words, Hancock just smiled and said, "As long as it''s your decision, I just need to abide by it."


    "When I go back, I will also inform your people over there to be prepared. The troops stationed near Nine Snakes Ind will temporarily put them all on a hidden ind, and also inform everyone over there not to disclose their information. go out."


    "Okay, I will do this after I get back. You guys should talk about things while I leave first."


    Hancock said, and Chang Nuo didn''t stop him. It''s not the time for the two of them to be intimate with each other yet. When this matter is over, there will be plenty of opportunities.


    In less than a while, only Chang Nuo and Jun He were left in the entire hall, looking at each other. Jun He still looked a little embarrassed.


    Although they grew up together, when faced with this kind of thing, Junhe still wanted tough but couldn''t.


    "Look at you looking like a bird,e with me!"


    Changnuo stood up slowly, looked at Junhe standing below and said.


    On the empty ind.


    "Zoron, what exactly happened during the battle on that tform? Why did you stand in front of us intact despite seeing that something had happened to you?"


    Usopp, who had fainted at this time, the first thing he did when he woke up was to look at Zoro and say.


    He clearly remembered seeing Zoro dead there before he fainted, but the first moment he opened his eyes, he saw Zoro staying beside him and continuing to train. He couldn''t hold back his curiosity and hurried forward. asked curiously.


    "It''s nothing, but I can''t exin the situation inside. All the fighting and pain can be reflected in the body. It''s nothing more than fighting inside. No matter what kind of injury or death you suffer, it will not have any impact."


    Zoro opened his mouth and said while swinging the huge dumbbell with one hand.


    "There is such a magical ce? But how is everything made?"


    Chopper also sat next to Usopp with a curious look on his face. Faced with these questions, he didn''t understand them at first, but now that a group of people have returned to where they live, they naturally need to ask questions.


    "Don''t ask me about these things. I only know that I am standing on a disc tform, holding a pir with a faint red light in both hands, and the next second I appear in a forest, but I didn��t expect that you could still see it during the battle. There are too many things in it that we can��t exin.��


    Zoro said.


    While speaking, he also stopped what he was doing. After all, these things also caused him a lot of doubts.


    But at the same time, he had to admit that the training from the Tru Empire was indeed a very useful thing.


    No matter what kind of battle, it can always reappear intact after the end, but the experiences after the battle can be perfectly left in the mind. If he continues to fight in such a ce every day, Sauron has reason to believe in himself. If you stay there for a year, your strength will definitely improve by leaps and bounds.


    But this was just a thought. After staying for a while, Zoro continued to swing the dumbbell with one hand.


    "This country is really much more mysterious and powerful than we thought? I really want to see their king!"


    Nami sat there and said nkly.


    "Don''t think about it, he is a very young man, only a few years older than us. To be precise, he should be about the same age as Robin."


    Sanji opened his mouth and said.


    "Make it seem like you''ve seen it before?"


    Usopp turned his head and looked at Sanji.


    "I did meet him once, but it happened three years ago. He came to the East China Sea at that time, but I don''t know why he came here?" Sanji said.


    "Really?" Chopper asked.


    "Of course it''s true. You forgot that I said that the old man at Barati Restaurant is from the Tru Empire. This country is also the thing that the old man is most concerned about. That''s how I learned that he had been here at that time. The one at Barati Restaurant is Emperor Toru," Sanji said.


    "Quick, quick, quick! Tell me what he looks like?"


    Usopp asked suddenly impatiently.


    Nami also looked curious. Unfortunately, Luffy was lying on the bed and fast asleep at this time, so he couldn''t hear the conversation between them at all.


    It is estimated that he should have released his domineering energy on the small air tform, and most of his energy has been drained away in an instant.


    This will probably cause such side effects for people who are releasing their domineering energy for the first time.


    Sanji thought for a moment, and then recounted the impression in his mind. Although the memory was a little fuzzy and he couldn''t remember his general appearance, the clothes he wore that day and his temperament were... And the way the other person left was told.

 Chapter 436 The Forgotten Appearance

    <h4>Chapter 436 The Forgotten Appearance</h4>


    Sanji''s memory of Chang Nuo was actually not as clear as he imagined, especially the other person''s face, as if he had forgotten everything inadvertently.


    But no matter what, Sanji still described the other party''s figure and clothes in detail.


    But when these words came out, the first person to be surprised was Zoro, who was sitting and exercising.


    "It seems that I have seen the person you are talking about. He and the teacher chatted together all afternoon. Although I don''t know what they talked about, it is just the same as what you said. I still can''t remember what this guy''s face looks like. What does it look like?��


    Zoro stopped what he was doing and said.


    When he spoke, he looked serious and full of seriousness.


    "Howe you''ve seen it before?"


    Usopp asked with some confusion.


    "Now in some ways I feel like it''s not just the two of us who have met!"


    Sanji smoked a cigarette and turned to look at Luffy who was lying there sleeping.


    "How is it possible that this kind of thing you are talking about is possible?"


    Nami asked.


    "Regardless of whether this matter is true or not, it''s just that Emperor Tru is indeed extremely powerful. From what you said, I vaguely remembered the time I met this man.


    At that time, my master once said that this was an existence that waspletely insurmountable by his peers. He could not even imagine seeing his back. " Zoro sighed slightly, and the memory of that time was also disyed in his mind, but the other person''s face seemed to be covered with ayer of mosaic.


    No matter how he recalled it, in the end what he recalled was just a rough outline.


    "Is it really as powerful as you say? It sounds terrifying." Chopper said.


    "Let''s not talk about this first, when are we going to leave this ce? Now that the maization on the record pointer is full, it should be time to leave."


    Nami said.


    "Let''s wait and see. Robin hasn''te back yet." Sanji said.


    "I guess she won''te back. With such an identity, how can she be with pirates like us?" Usopp muttered softly.


    "Usopp, don''t say anything like this. Robin is our partner, and she will not stop sailing with us just because of her identity!" Sanji said.


    "Are you ready to eat?"


    Luffy, who was still sleeping soundly, suddenly sat up suddenly and asked loudly with sleepy eyes.


    He slept for several hours, which was a result of his very good physique.


    But before anyone else could say anything and felt surprised, Luffyy down directly again, his two noses began to continuously exchange huge bubbles, and his snoring sound also made the others feel speechless for a while. .


    Now that they had all arrived on the empty ind, after staying for two days, Robin slowly began to appear on their side.


    And in her backpack, she already contained the kind of octopus that Lieutenant General Deco specially gave to him. Not only that, she also gave Sky Ind''s unique means of transportation and several wind-breathing shells.


    The rest of the process is the same as in the original plot.


    This is what Chang Nuo said that he must find a way to bring all the plot lines back to the original path, so that everything seems to be within his own n and control.


    at the same time.


    In another ce on the sea, the Infinity was quietly docking here. Enel and Mero, who were on the ship, were extremely bored.


    After all, there is only one ship, and they cannot leave. Although there are quite a lot of entertainment facilities on the ship, each entertainment activity requires certain permissions to open.


    But in the end their only authority was to order the ship to advance, retreat and defend.


    That''s why you feel bored and ufortable when you stay up there.


    "Hai Ling, are you sure this is where their ship will fall?"


    Enel was lying on the sofa and said feebly.


    "Don''t worry. Combining the news conveyed by those on the empty ind and today''s weather conditions, wind speed and other big data shows that the ce where they are most likely to fall is within a two-kilometer radius here."


    Hai Ling appeared directly next to Enelu and spoke with a mechanical voice.


    "The calction is so urate? But what kind of ce is this? After working for a long time, there will still be a naval military base. At that time, if there is a problem, we will have no way to fix it?"


    Enelu asked.


    "I''m not telling you, what are you thinking about all day long? Are you still worried that they will be in danger? Otherwise, what''s the use of a guy like you?"


    Mero said with a mocking look on his face.


    "I want you bastard to talk more and find a ce to have a good duelter. I must let you bastard know clearly what the benefits of being strong are!"


    Listening to Mero''s yin and yang words, Enilu jumped three feet high in an instant, suspended in mid-air, with endless thunder and lightning emitting from his body, as if he was like a god of thunder, and his whole person waspletely wrapped in thunder and lightning. .


    "Enilu, if you continue to destroy the items on the Infinity like this, I will activate the highest authority and contact His Majesty the King directly!"


    Hai Ling suddenly said leisurely.


    Eniru, who originally had a high-spirited look on his face, was instantly like a wilted chicken that fell into the water. He put away the lightning on his body as quickly as possible, and hurriedly burned him with the lightning he had identally released just now. I patted the corner of the sofa with my hand.


    This is not the first time this guy has done this on this ship. The only person who can suppress him every time is Hai Ling''s suggestion to inform Chang Nuo.


    "You''re awesome!"


    Enelu puffed out his mouth and looked at Hai Ling with his eyes raised.


    "That''s all you can do. Day after day, other than making noises, it has no effect at all."


    Mero opened his eyes slightly, turned to look at the frustrated Enel, and said with a slightly raised corner of his mouth.


    "Hai Ling, can you find an ind without people and put the two of us there? I want to give this guy a good electrotherapy treatment."


    Enelu sat up and looked at Hai Ling and asked.


    "No, the only mission the Infinity currently performs is to follow the Straw Hats!" Hai Ling said ruthlessly.


    "It''s so inhumane!"


    After Anelu finished speaking, hey down directly, closed his eyes and began to think. Anyway, he stopped paying attention to anything. The biggest thoughts on this ship every day were just these things.


    Although such days are rtively boring, and Anilu often said that he would find a ce to practice if he had nothing to do, but he knew very well that from beginning to end, he just opened his mouth and said it, which really made him leave this mission. If we go somewhere else, I guess Enelu won��t agree.

 Chapter 437 Ace was caught

    <h4>Chapter 437 Ace was caught</h4>


    Half a monthter, at the Navy Headquarters.


    Today, the conference room is full of people again, and the situation is exactly the same as before. Everyone is sitting there quietly looking at the existence at the top.


    However, in the situation faced this time, even Warring States, as a wise general, has been frowning at this moment, sitting there silently lowering his head without saying anything.


    The same is true for the others. Everyone understands what happened, but this incident ispletely unavoidable for them.


    "This incident is a very big challenge for our navy. Everyone, please share your views."


    Warring States lowered his head and said calmly.


    He didn''t even look at the people present. These navy generals and lieutenants were all waiting for Sengoku, the marshal of the navy, to speak. However, the first words he said left these people speechless. .


    How should this be done? As a naval marshal, you can just say something and let others answer the question?


    After waiting for a long time, those sitting below included the three generals of the Navy Headquarters and the lieutenant generals, but no one opened their mouths to speak.


    In desperation, Sengoku could only raise his head and look at the group of people and asked, "You must all know the matter. Yesterday, that guy ckbeard actually sent Ace, the captain of the second division of the Whitebeard Pirates, to the world." The government, but this time the World Government doesn��t know what��s wrong with its brain, and asked the Navy to directly choose a ce to publicly execute Ace, so what our Navy will face this time is very likely the Whitebeard Pirates. regiment��s attack.��


    "For the sake of justice in the Navy, every pirate deserves to die! But why not just execute Ace directly? Why do we need to execute him in public?"


    Admiral Akainu of the Navy Headquarters said.


    Although he really wanted to let all these pirates die there one by one, once an announcement was made for public execution, the forces they faced this time would indeed be enough to put great pressure on the navy.


    "I guess the World Government wants to use this incident to scare other pirates. At the same time, Whitebeard is now older. We will take this opportunity to directly let him make the choice of ending. By then, using this method, we can also directly get it in one fell swoop. The right to speak in the new world, but this kind of thing is indeed a big challenge for our navy.


    Although Whitebeard is old and his strength may not be as good as before, he is still not something we should underestimate. If he fails, he may be a joke to the whole world watching our navy. "


    Qing Pheasant said.


    "Why should we just inform us of such a terrible thing when the timees? Why do we need to hold this meeting? The decision-making power is all in your hands anyway? With this time, I might as well go and have a good rest." Kizaru He also opened his mouth and said.


    He didn''t want to get involved in such a thing, but now that the matter had fallen on the Navy, some things were inevitable.


    "The purpose of bringing you here now is to discuss the oue of this matter, and the World Government requires that public executions begin in three months, leaving us not much time to prepare."


    Warring States said.


    It could be seen from his frowning expression that this matter was definitely moreplicated than he imagined.


    What is the situation in the Navy? As a naval marshal, he knows very well that what he is thinking about is almost the same as what Chang Nuo is thinking about, that is, he is worried that there will be any particrly big changes in this matter in other aspects? By then, not only will there be major problems affecting the navy, but there will also be structural changes in the world.


    It is estimated that these people will not be able to think of it even if they try hard. The biggest change will happen to the Whitebeard Pirates themselves.


    The thing that Chang Nuo left to Whitebeard, although it gave him a perfect opportunity to choose the end, it could also deal a fatal blow to the navy.


    In any case, as long as everything can return to the origin of the plot, Changnuo has the confidence to make such a decision.


    "It seems that you have been discussing and discussing, but you can''te up with any results. Regarding this matter, the future of the navy has almost been staked, so no matter what, this matter must be treated with caution.


    The three months the World Government left us is definitely too short. We cannot even gather our troops within this time, so how can we resist the attack of the Whitebeard Pirates?


    So what we have to do next is to extend the time as soon as possible. As far as the current situation is concerned, we need to leave at least five months for adequate preparations. "


    Lieutenant General He of the Navy Headquarters shouted seriously.


    "But once this happens, there will be more reactions left for the Whitebeard Pirates. By then, won''t he also be ready?" Sengoku asked.


    "Now the focus of our consideration is not on the Whitebeard Pirates, but on how to deal with this crisis. The most important thing for the Whitebeard Pirates, especially the old man Whitebeard, is these family ties. And so on, they will definitely attack with all their strength when the timees.


    First of all, the next preparation we need to make is to choose where to conduct the public execution, and then start to summon all powerful naval personnel. The rest will be considered step by step. Lieutenant General He said.


    "Vice Admiral He, what you said can be done, but have you considered that once all the cutting-edge capabilities of the navy are brought together, will there be special changes in other ces?"


    Qing Pheasant asked.


    "No matter how big the change is, is it important that the Whitebeard Pirates can lead everyone to attack the navy?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "The next step is to prepare to summon the Shichibukai. This matter will be left to General Kizaru. In short, everyone must be gathered together on the eve of the war."


    Warring States looked at the crowd and said in a serious tone.


    Time waits for no one now, and the time left for them is also very limited, so they must do their best to bring all the power they can during this time.


    At least in this possible duel with Whitebeard, the victory of the Navy Headquarters can be guaranteed to the greatest extent.


    This time is not only a test for the navy, but also a disy of the navy''s strength to the outside world.


    "The world government left this matter to us, why don''t they send someone over?"


    Garp was a little angry for a moment, staring straight at Sengoku and asked.

 Chapter 438 Arrangements of the Navy Headquarters

    <h4>Chapter 438 Arrangements of the Navy Headquarters</h4>


    Warring States faced Garp directly, with an indescribable loneliness in his eyes.


    As for the World Government, they have been guarding this group of people for almost their entire lives, and are extremely familiar with their situation.


    Although the core aspects may not have been touched, these people still have some doubts about the strength of the World Government.


    But since this is the case, the question has been raised, and naturally some people will be dissatisfied.


    Aoki stood up first. Although he still looked a littlezy, his expression was extremely serious and he said, "I agree with Lieutenant General Garp''s opinion. The World Government is clearly instigating this matter, but why don''t they take any pictures?" Peoplee out?


    Or is it possible that they don��t know what kind of people we are dealing with? Once any changes ur in this matter, it will cause a huge blow to the navy. Don''t tell me that as a marshal, you don''t know. "


    "I think so too. I think if two people from the World Government don''t show up, there''s really no way to decide on this matter. It''s really a bit uncertain for us to fight against that old guy Whitebeard!"


    Kizaru said in an equally sinister tone.


    Others have almost no right to speak and can only follow the orders issued from above. However, as admirals, they still have the right to refuse such requests.


    This time they are not facing ordinary pirates. They have been working hard to maintain the stability of the new world, but now they suddenly caused such a big incident. For the navy, this test could have been necessary. to develop.


    Once such a thing is really implemented, they can''t even imagine what kind of war this will be?


    After all, Whitebeard is known as the strongest man in the world. He can easily destroy a country by one person. He can support the title of the Yonko Pirates alone. Without Whitebeard, how can the pirate group be able topete with other pirate groups? Topare?


    "Now is not the time for us to talk about this. I think Warring States, you really should think of a way. Once anything changes in the middle, it will be a fatal blow to us.


    Let''s go back and check with the five old men to see if the World Government will send anyone to assist the navy? Otherwise, if we just rely on the navy to dispatch arge number of troops, how should we protect other ces?


    Not to mention other ces, just the South China Sea area. Once there are no powerful people watching there, I believe that the guys from the Tru Empire will be able to annex the entire South China Sea very soon! "


    Lieutenant General He said seriously.


    "Oh~, why didn''t I know that these situations would happen? But the attitude of the old men in the World Government is very determined. This time, they will all be handed over to the Navy for processing, and they must be put in the newspaper to inform everyone in the world. What is about to be fought will be an unprecedented war."


    Warring States said helplessly.


    As a naval marshal, he has never shown such powerlessness.


    After all, the situation this time ispletely different from before. You can already guess how big the influence of the four emperors facing the new world will be.


    The key is that if other troubles appear in the middle, what kind of experience can the Navy have and how can it cope with it?


    Just this one thing has dragged them into a quagmire. Although the navy is powerful, this is only in general, but Whitebeard can destroy a country by himself. The strong strength is nothing more than what they worry about. fundamental.


    "It seems that we will also need to separate our forces in the future. At that time, we will closely monitor each force, mainly the reaction of these groups after the newspaper issues the notice."


    Akainu said.


    "How can the Navy still have this kind of emergency response capability now? Over the years, the Navy''s strength has been deteriorating. After enjoying thefortable days for a long time, how can they care about these things now?"


    Qing Pheasant saidzily.


    "Even so, these things still need to be done. No matter what, since the pirate has been caught, it is impossible to let him out."


    Akainu said, his expression slightly angry, but he also knew that this matter did not end so easily.


    Even if this group of people wants to imitate the Tru Empire and monitor every force, ording to the current deployment of the navy, it is already extremely difficult to achieve these situations.


    Not to mention the other four emperors currently in the new world, even the revolutionary army that has been threatening the world government, until now, these guys have never found out where their base is.


    But the key point is that the Tru Empire has already figured out the other party''s movements, and every step they take is already under the control of other countries.


    A person who can possess the Eye of God monitors the entire world. Even if there are slight changes, the general direction ispletely aligned with the original plot. With this ability, he has almost begun to gradually control the overall situation.


    "What do you think about setting the execution ce this time at the Navy Headquarters?"


    Sengoku suddenly asked.


    "No! Marine Headquarters Marinefando cannot be used as a ce of execution!"


    As soon as Sengoku finished speaking, Garp stood up and looked at him and said.


    "Give me a reason?" Warring States asked calmly.


    "The Navy Headquarters is an important ce to manage the first half of the Great Line. If a war breaks out, Whitebeard''s ability could destroy this ce in an instant. By that time, what will the Navy Headquarters look like? Have you ever considered it? ?" Karp said.


    "I agree with Marshal Warring States'' opinion."


    Sakaski tapped the table with his right hand and said.


    It is true that this ce is currently the safest ce in the execution ce. At least they can make too many preparations in this ce in advance.


    It''s just that if the execution ce is ced anywhere, the impact will be huge.


    "Garp, I think even if we choose the ce of execution, Marin Fando is the best choice." Lieutenant General He also opened his mouth and said.


    "Then it''s up to you!"


    At this moment, Garp looked very haggard and didn''t even want to deal with this matter anymore. For him, it didn''t matter where he chose. In his heart, he even hoped that Whitebeard could rescue Ace.


    What happened now should be considered the biggest blow to Garp. Whether it was the Navy or Ace, the palms and backs of his hands were all flesh. Maybe he himself didn''t know how to make the choice.


    Even the justice he had always maintained seemed to be worthless at this moment. Maybe he himself didn''t know why he had such thoughts.

 Chapter 439 Green Pheasant’s Sixth Sense

    <h4>Chapter 439 Green Pheasant��s Sixth Sense</h4>


    Sengoku looked at Garp helplessly. He was one of the few people who knew the rtionship between him and Ace.


    In fact, Sengoku didn''t know when he started to know that Ace was the son of Roger, the Pirate King.


    But for these things, he just turned a blind eye and passed by.


    This sudden situation was unexpected for him. It was precisely because of this situation that he didn''t know what decision to make regarding the arrangements for this matter.


    As the smartest figure in the navy, Sengoku could handle almost all matters between the world government and the navy with ease, but this matter made him feel more difficult than ever before.


    "How will this matter be done specifically? Marshal Warring States, you only need to inform us when the timees. As for the process, I don''t want to get involved too much anymore. Anyway, we can''t decide the beginning, process and oue."


    Kizaru said as he stood up and started to leave.


    But at this moment, Akainu stood up angrily, looked at Kizaru who was about to leave, and asked angrily, "The matter is still waiting for us to handle, do you just want to leave like this?"


    "Actually, it''s not just General Kizaru who wants to leave, I don''t want to stay here either." Aoki saidzily.


    "You all should stop arguing and sit down. Can this matter be solved by just a few of us? As admirals, you naturally have to take responsibility for this matter."


    The Warring States Marshal stood up angrily and mmed the table. Listening to the quarrel between them, he couldn''t help but roared with anger in his heart.


    Seeing that their boss was getting angry, Kizaru, Aokiji and Akainu slowly began to calm down.


    After seeing that they had all returned to a calm state, Marshal Warring States continued, "Everything this time will be greatly affected, so no matter what, even if a war breaks out, the Navy must not lose this time."


    "I think the one we should monitor the most is the Tru Empire. I always feel that this country is not as simple as imagined. With this incident, he will definitely make some moves!" Aokiji said.


    "What does the South China Sea Tru Empire have to do with this matter? Those guys in the New World are the focus of attention!"


    Akainu clenched his fists, andva began to drip from his forehead toward the ground, as if he was about to take action in the next second.


    "Everyone, I think the things we should discuss have not yet touched upon external forces. Should we first listen to what the Warring States Marshal should do?"


    Lieutenant General He said.


    "Based on this matter, I decided to mobilize all officers above major and above from all ces to Marinfando in two months. By then, a strong force of 100,000 people will be formed to deal with this crisis. By then, this The content of the protagonist will definitely be the same as when Roger died, and it will be broadcast live around the world.


    In any case, we must not make any mistakes this time. As for the signs that other forces may get involved, they should be contained in the cradle before then. "


    The Warring States Marshal said seriously.


    "I think we should pay close attention to the Tru Empire. I believe that if a war breaks out this time, he will definitely appear!"


    Qing Pheasant reminded him again.


    After all, he is one of the few people among them who hase into contact with the emperor, and he has a pretty good rtionship with Princess Trudeau Robin. Aokiji has always been investigating the secrets of the existence of the Trul Empire, although these secrets have not been revealed to him. He didn''t get a lot of content, but from his eyes, this matter was not as simple as he imagined.


    "Aoji, now we will discuss the matters about the Tru Empireter. The most important thing is that the current situation has reached an imminent time. If I were Emperor Tru, I would not choose to make trouble at this time. I will not do it for the time being. Focus on the Whitebeard Pirates in the New World."


    The Warring States Marshal said.


    "s~"


    Qingzhi leaned on his chair helplessly and sighed. He always believed that his intuition was absolutely right. Of course, in fact, he didn''t need to think that things were definitely like this.


    It''s just that this guy''s third sense is really good, and he can guess the next move of the Tru Empire.


    Although this guy didn''t know where the idea came from, he really guessed what happened this time.


    The high-level meeting on the Navy''s side was also a mess, and the first meeting could be considered a hasty end. After all, the idea that arge-scale war might break out was not something that only one person could guess.


    Everyone here is rtively familiar with Whitebeard''s character. His family was caught by the navy and publicly executed. This kind of thing may not be tolerated by anyone.


    The most important thing is that they have now exposed a fatal w, that is, these guys have gradually underestimated Whitebeard''s strength.


    Even though Ace is now in their hands, so far, no newspaper has dared to publish this matter. In other words, the Navy and the World Government have not yet thought of directly exposing this matter.


    After the meeting, the three members of the Iron Triangle stayed in the office of Marshal Sengoku of the Navy Headquarters. Everyone''s face was not very good-looking.


    Especially for Garp at this moment, there was always a lingering haze on his face, and he no longer even had the same scenery as before. Even with the senbei ced next to him, he did not raise his head again. Have a look.


    "Garp, I know this matter must be very difficult for you, but the key is that we cannot refuse our orders. I hope you will be more sensible by then."


    The Warring States Marshal said in a low voice.


    "I understand that all this path is his own choice, and we can''t make any decisions."


    Garp slowly closed his eyes, but the fists underneath were clenched tightly.


    Although he really didn''t want to say such words, as a matter of position, even if he didn''t want to, he had to say it like this.


    There is already a disharmonious rtionship between the navy and pirates, not to mention that the one caught this time was the son of the former pirate king.


    Ace''s fate has been decided. This is no longer something he, Garp, can decide. Even the marshal Sengoku has no idea.

 Chapter 440 The World Government’s Small Moves

    <h4>Chapter 440 The World Government��s Small Moves</h4>


    The three people in the office returned to a quiet state again, with their heads lowered and silent among each other.


    But both of them also know that after this incident is over, what will it mean even if they win?


    "Garp, have you ever thought about bing a general?"


    Marshal Warring States asked calmly.


    "Let''s forget about this matter. If I wanted to, I would have done it many years ago. Why am I still mentioning these things now that I am so old?"


    Karp said.


    "Warring States, what do you think about this matter?" Lieutenant General He finally couldn''t help but asked directly.


    "It''s not easy to confirm the matter, but regarding Ace''s matter, once the announcement is made, it may not end as easily as imagined. The guys in the World Government only know how to stand behind and make some small moves. On the Navy''s side He can only deal with the Whitebeard Pirates independently.


    Anyway, after this incident is over, regardless of victory or defeat, I will directly step down from the position of marshal. "


    Warring States said with a sad face.


    "Let''s all retreat together when the timees. We''ve all reached this age, and it''s time to make way for those young people."


    Karp said.


    "Why do you two speak so pessimistically? Is it possible that the World Government really doesn''t n to send anyone out this time?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "If the World Government is willing to take action, do you think Sengoku will still have this expression? The oue is already obvious. The World Government wants to see from behind how big the fish that jumps out will be?" Karp said. .


    "We can''t make a conclusion until the oue of this matter, but what do you think about this matter?"


    Sengoku raised his head and looked at the two people and asked.


    "I think that apart from the Whitebeard Pirates, the one most likely to be involved is the Tohru Empire. That little guy seems to have great ambitions, and with such great strength, he may have been willing to just do it for a long time. Surrendered to a ce like the South China Sea."


    Lieutenant General He said.


    "I agree. The guys from the Tru Empire are all terrifyingly powerful so far. On the whole, they arepletelyparable to the Navy, but we still can''t find out what they want to do. What?" Karp said.


    "Before this matter begins, should we send someone tomunicate with the Tru Empire first? Let''s find out what these guys think first?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "No need for the time being, those guys from the World Government should be watching them too. Then we won''t have to worry about it and leave it all to the World Government.


    Now that we have taken over the matter of dealing with Ace, the Navy has directly begun to face the Whitebeard Pirates. If we are distracted to deal with other forces, then the next war will be very detrimental to us. "


    Sengoku frowned and said, clenching his fists. Although he couldn''t understand why the World Government arranged this, he also couldn''t understand what the Toru Empire thought.


    But it is true as he said, the current navy only needs to face the Whitebeard Pirates, and the remaining major forces will naturally be monitored by people from the World Government.


    at the same time.


    In a corner of the South China Sea, two people dressed in ordinary clothes were leisurely rowing a small boat and slowly docked.


    There is nondscape around, not even the shore, just some big trees nted.


    At first nce, the appearance of the two people may be no different from themon people of the Tru Empire, which makes people feel that they are simply ordinary and couldn''t be more ordinary.


    "No. 3, why do you think we spent so much effort toe to this ce? So many people came here to investigate the Tru Empire but nothing was gained. What can we do when wee here?"


    Among the two people, one of them looked a little thin and looked at the guy in front of him with the word three tattooed on his face and said.


    "Don''t ask me about this kind of thing. Just do it ording to the arrangements above. I don''t know what will happen next? But aftering to this country, you still have to be careful."


    No. 3 said, before they even docked, they had already started to be fully vignt about the surrounding situation.


    "Tell me, we are also hidden members of the World Government. Which country are we going to? It''s not the king of that country who will receive us personally. It''s a good thing now. We still need to be sneaky when wee to this ce. I really don''t know why these people assigned us Such drudgery.��


    The thin man said with aining look.


    And while he was talking, he was still spitting. The hand that was still sliding the oar has nowpletely stopped. Only No. 3 is left, who keeps sliding the oar to let the boat slowly dock. .


    "No. 5, can you stopining a little bit? Just from what you said here along the way, do you think I want toe to this hellish ce? We have our own work to do."


    Constantly listening to this thin man from No. 5 fooling around, No. 3 couldn''t stand it any longer. He swung the paddle in his hand into the water, and a stream of water immediately sshed onto No. 5''s face.


    "I''m not saying that you''re not just the two of us now, why are you so fussy about it? It''s just aint, and it''s true that only the two of us havee to do this kind of drudgery. Maybe we wille here like everyone else. But I can��t get out of here.��


    Number 5 continued toin, wiping the water on his face with his hand, not caring about what Number 3 had just done.


    After they got close to the shore, they probably didn''t even know where they wereing from. After all, the closer they got to the royal city of the Tru Empire, the patrols there could be described as perverted, and they didn''t dare to approach that ce directly. , we can only find some rtively remote areas to advance.


    The boat under the feet of the two people began to slowly approach the shore. No. 5 couldn''t help it at first and was about to jump off. The soil on the shore looked rtively hard. When the guy just jumped off, his whole foot fell directly. Fell in.


    When he pulled it out again, his feet were already covered in ck mud with a foul smell. Number 5, who had beenining about his job, couldn''t stand it anymore.


    "Next time you have a job like this, do it yourself, but don''t drag me into it again. What the hell is this ce? It''s really disgusting."


    Number Fiveined, the expression on his face almost distorted.


    If it weren''t for the fact that it was his own leg that stepped into the mud, he would have had the urge to cut it off.

 Chapter 441 Directly improved strength

    <h4>Chapter 441 Directly improved strength</h4>


    No. 3 stood on the bed and silently watched No. 5''s performance. Although the expression on his face was still very calm, his heart was already filled with joy.


    Then he also jumped down, but tried his best to avoid the position where No. 3 fell just now.


    But the results are often unsatisfactory.


    When No. 3 first jumped up, he originally thought that he hadpletely avoided the previous position, which was still a little further away.


    But in this ce, everything on the surface was dry leaves. When he suddenly jumped over, the whole person disappeared in the next second.


    The moment he reappeared, he quickly peeled off the leaves next to him with a look of disgrace, leaving only his head and hands exposed.


    "No. 3, what are you doing?"


    When No. 5, a thin man, saw No. 3 fall in, he did not choose to help immediately. Instead, he asked urgently.


    But when he spoke like this, the smile on his lips made it obvious how proud he was.


    "You bastard! Why don''t you pull me up quickly?"


    No. 3 shouted angrily.


    "Hahaha~,e here,e here! But why are you so careless? This looks like a swamp pit, and you still have to jump into it. The smell of shit makes it difficult to peel off the skin. eliminate."


    Guy No. 5 said whileughing.


    "Yes, yes! Please help me, Master No. 5, to pull me up first, okay?"


    No. 3 said calmly with a smile.


    After hearing this, guy No. 5 felt quite satisfied and directly grabbed the opponent''s hand. In less than a while, the two of them climbed up with a struggle.


    But the moment he came up, No. 3''s expression started to change. He stared directly at No. 5 with a serious look on his face. Even though he was still covered in foul-smelling mud, how could he care about this at this time? He punched No. 5 directly in the face.


    "Hey!! What the hell are you doing?"


    Number 5 jumped a dozen meters away in an instant, looked at Number 3 with a serious and angry expression and asked.


    "Don''t forget, I am yourmander, and you were still in the mood tough when I fell in!"


    No. 3 asked angrily.


    "Oh?? That''s what you''re talking about. Forget it, I won''t argue with you anymore. Just wash it off quickly. The smell is all over your body. It''s really disgusting."


    No. 5 smiled and mocked, not taking the situation just now seriously.


    It is estimated that they are used to this kind of life, and such nonsense has beenpletely wiped out in their memory without even taking a minute.


    "We won''t just let this matter go. I''m going to take a good bath first. Can you take a look at where we are near the shore this time?"


    Number Three said seriously.


    Neither of them have Devil Fruit abilities. Beforeing to this country, they had already investigated the situation in this country. Devil Fruit users have almost no role in this country.


    Rather than doing this, it would be better to let people like them who are not devil fruit ability users sneak into this country. Inparison, it would be much easier to do things.


    No. 3 jumped out of the sea and began to take off their clothes and take a bath in the water. But the key was where theynded. Even they themselves didn''t know where they were.


    However, the key is unfortunately, although they have made full ns and are far away from the royal city of the Tru Empire, but even so, they havee to a ce where they should leaste.


    The ce is not very far away from these two people. At this moment, they have been secretly guarding. How many people are here?


    They were not guarding these two people, but to protect the area here, but they had not found these two people so far.


    In another ce in the Tru Empire.


    In the back mountain of the pce, there is still the original unpretentious cave, but it has been transformed into apletely different style.


    Although there is no decoration at all, at least the ground in this ce has been leveled.


    The overall height is at least about 50m, not to mention the width and depth.


    It is definitely not a problem to amodate 100,000 people in this ce. Although it is a cave, the brightness here is not inferior to that outside.


    However, in such arge ce, only two people walked in slowly.


    Changnuo walked in with Junhe and the former, followed a long step, and walked directly to the innermost position.


    "Your Majesty, what are we doing here?"


    After Junhe followed him in, he finally couldn''t help but ask.


    "What do you think of your current strength?"


    Chang Nuo asked calmly and leisurely.


    "It should be considered the weakest among all the generals." Junhe said truthfully.


    "You are wrong. ording to your current strength, there are even some lieutenant generals who are above you. But as someone who has followed me until now, to be honest, I trust you more than I do. Everyone else is much taller.��


    Changnuo said, without even looking back at Junhe''s expression.


    But the other party suddenly stopped there and did not continue walking. He quietly looked at the figure of the king walking in front, feeling unspeakable pain in his heart.


    Junhe is very aware of his current strength. Although he already possesses rtively good Devil Fruit abilities, no matter how much training he has undergone over the years, his strength seems to have stagnated in the end.


    Although he did have the strength of a general, in the end,pared to other generals in the Tru Empire, he was not even as good as Eniro.


    Although he is very distressed now, there is nothing he can do about it.


    "Stop standing there ande in with me."


    Changnuo walked in front, feeling Junhe who was already thinking about it and said.


    "oh!!"


    Junhe did not refuse. Although he was still thinking about other things along the way, he followed His Majesty the King and walked inside without paying any attention.


    The space seems to get bigger the closer you get, and you even have to keep walking towards the bottom of the steps.


    ording to estimates, they are now at least nearly two hundred meters deep under the sea. This ce usually has almost no oneing in, and it can be considered the safest ce in the Tru Empire today.


    Junhe didn''t understand at all what his Majesty the King was thinking, why did he bring him to this ce?


    But based on this trust, Junhe didn''t feel anything wrong at all.

 Chapter 442 The Secret in the Underground Palace

    <h4>Chapter 442 The Secret in the Underground Pce</h4>


    Beneath the mountain behind the pce is a primitive cave. At the bottom of this cave, almost no one has been here.


    After all,ing to this ce is of no use at all, and whether youe or not doesn''t make much difference.


    But when they reached the innermost moment, a huge bronze door blocked the two of them.


    "Your Majesty, what is this? It seems like it didn''t exist before."


    Junhe looked at the huge bronze door and asked doubtfully.


    "It''s not that it doesn''t exist, it''s just that you haven''t been to this ce before, or you can''te at all."


    Chang Nuo said calmly that they really couldn''t reach this ce. After all, there was actually a space barrier in front of the bronze gate.


    So even if they pass by this ce, they won''t feel anything at all.


    Chang Nuo didn''t say much, he just pressed his hand gently on the bronze door, and the next second the huge door began to slowly open automatically.


    After it was fully opened, the scene insidepletely shocked Jun and the general of the Tru Empire.


    The main reason is because there is nothing else ced here. Not to mention the dozen Devil Fruits ced in the front. These things are not very valuable in the Toru Empire now. After all, people who have Devil Fruit types have already returned them. It was quite a lot, but on both sides of this underground pce, there were more than a dozen people chained up.


    Moreover, Junhe has actually met some of these dozen people. These are CPs or hidden personnel from the World Government. They are more or less people who came to explore the secrets here after entering the pce. There are also some It''s because of the characters who entered the country in search of other secrets.


    But all of these people, without exception, were chained here, and each one of them had no eyesight. Although they were still sitting there, they felt like a walking zombie.


    "Your Majesty the King, who are they??"


    Junhe asked in surprise.


    "These people are all pretty strong. I don''t know what they are thinking in Tiantian''s mind. Why do they insist on exploring the secrets of the Tru Empire?"


    Chang Nuo looked at these dozen people and said with a speechless expression.


    "It''s just that the purpose of bringing me here is to deal with these dozen people, right?" Junhe said.


    That''s not the case, they still have some uses for me, but it''s just not convenient to disy them now.


    As Chang Nuo spoke, a sh of red light suddenly appeared in his eyes, and then enveloped the dozen or so people again.


    These people are not weak in strength, and there is no need to kill each other. In addition, there are only two people in their group who have Devil Fruit abilities, and the others can be considered to have real powers of their own.


    Under such circumstances, as long as the inner defenses of these people can be destroyed, the ability of the psychic devil fruit can directly prate them, and by then, they will be able to cultivate some rtively powerful characters for themselves.


    This is Chang Nuo��s final thought.


    From time to time, he uses his mind and devil fruit abilities to control them. Before long, these people will bepletely reduced to puppets of the Toru Empire.


    "Of course I didn''t bring you here for this matter. It''s just that your strength is too low. You will definitely not be able to improve just by relying on your own efforts. The purpose of bringing you here is to help you."


    Changnuo said quietly, but this time he turned directly to look at Junhe.


    There are only two ways to improve the opponent''s strength. One is to strengthen the opponent''s Devil Fruit ability, and the other is to directly give the opponent abilities through the system''s abilities.


    But now the only feasible way is to enhance his devil fruit.


    Although Shunhe possesses the devil fruit ability of the Phantom Beast, he only relies on himself. Who knows how long it will take for his devil fruit to activate its true original ability.


    Nowadays, if we directly improve through a systematic method, although it may be counterproductive, it can be regarded as the most effective one.


    After hearing these words, Junhe was stunned for a moment. Lenovo did not understand the meaning of what His Majesty the King said.


    But then he became a little excited, even a little at a loss and asked, "How to improve?"


    "It is difficult for an animal type devil fruit to have the power to awaken, but it is not impossible. After the animal type devil fruit ability is awakened, it can even explode with abilities beyond everyone''s imagination.


    Perhaps because this ability is so unbelievable, there has never been any record of an animal devil fruit awakening in hundreds of years of history. This is why the outside world says that the animal devil fruit may have the weakest ability. kind.


    But the fact is exactly the opposite. Once this devil fruit enters the awakening state, its strength will increase at least ten timespared to before.


    At present, there is actually one person in the world who has achieved the awakening ability of the Devil Fruit, and that is the current Pirate Yonko Kaido. His fruit ability can be considered to have been awakened, or it can be regarded as not yet awakened.


    It''s just that the two are just vague. Once the power of the Devil Fruit is awakened, the person who has awakened the power of the Devil Fruit will not have any improvement in strength in the future.


    So even so, after awakening the animal devil fruit ability, his strength can reach the top of this world. "


    Changnuo said leisurely to the dozen Devil Fruits in front of him. Junhe didn''t know if he heard it, but he just stood there with a nk look on his face.


    The dozens of people chained next to them all had gray-white eyes, and their bodies were shrouded in a slightly red light of demonic power, which was always eroding their hearts from time to time.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he stopped his movements and waited quietly for Jun, as a general, and himself to answer.


    Junhe himself is still confused, and he doesn''t know whether he understood it or not.


    But in the next scene, Junhe slowly knelt on the ground, put his hands on the ground, and slowly knocked his head to the ground.


    "Your Majesty the King, Junhe will only be loyal to the Tru Empire and your side from now on!"


    Jun He spoke calmly, and the desire and passion in his eyes hadpletely plunged him into an unknown realm.


    To be able to achieve this position, let alone whether there is a rtionship with Changnuo, Junhe has no choice as far as the other party can give him strong strength.


    At present, there are only a few generals in the entire Toru Empire. Although Junhe is one of them, in terms of strength, in the past few years, there have been many lieutenant generals below him.

 Chapter 443 The expansion of powerful strength

    <h4>Chapter 443 The expansion of powerful strength</h4>


    Changnuo knew about these things, and so did Junhe himself.


    Even though in normal times, Junhe had worked twice as hard as others, but in the end he found that all his efforts seemed to be in vain. He is even more pitifully weak, and even the power of the Devil Fruit that appears in him is quite inferiorpared to other people.


    Even though Abona does not have Devil Fruit abilities, his opponent''s strength is improving step by step, while he alone remains at the same ce.


    Everything here always gave him a feeling of being overwhelmed by a mountain. He was in a high position but his strength waspletely mismatched. Only he knew this kind of pain.


    If it weren''t for the king''s constant care, just in terms of strength, all the lieutenant generals below would have been dissatisfied.


    Although I don��t understand how Chang Nuo is going to do it this time? But for Junhe, there seems to be a voice in his heart that is always persuading him.


    Mysterious trust, this is how this country feels about His Majesty the King.


    After Junhe finished this series of actions, Changnuo slowly shifted his gaze from the Devil Fruit, looked at Junhe slowly, and said with a slight smile on his face, "There are some things you need to know. Everyone has a huge secret. Once this secret is leaked, it will cause a devastating blow to you, me or this country.


    You and I have grown up together since childhood, and you are a few years older than me. When I was a child, I regarded you as an elder brother. Over the years, everyone''s efforts have been noticed, and you are the same.


    There will be more and more difficult things waiting for us in the future, I believe in you! "


    With calm words and the words "I believe in you", Junhe put his head on the ground and slowly shed tears. This was the sadness and pain in his heart, especially over the years, his strength has always remained the same. The overwhelming pressure seemed to bepletely released at this moment.


    "Stand up! No one will ask you to kneel down in the future, and what you kneel down today is not me, but to break the barriers in your heart. From this moment on, I want you to change the original The trajectory of your life, I hope you can live up to the high expectations of the Tru Empire!"


    Changnuo said with a serious expression, and the next moment he put his hand on the other person''s head, and then silently shouted in his mind, "System, deduct 500 billion beli to awaken him to the power of the devil fruit!"


    A solemn and solemn voice sounded in the system space, but at the same time, this voice also sounded in Junhe''s mind.


    "Deduction sessful! The power of awakening is being instilled!!!"


    The mechanical sound of the system sounded. Junhe wanted to raise his head and take a look at His Majesty the King, but before he could think of it, an unknown force began to flow directly from his head throughout his body.


    It was more like an electric current prating directly, and the powerful force instantly pressed his knees on the ground and cracked instantly.


    You must know that the ground under his knees at this moment is not a marble b, but a real stone. It is these stones that have all begun to crack in just an instant.


    "This is the power I give you in the name of God! In the days toe, I hope you can use this power to protect the people you should protect."


    Chang Nuo murmured at the corner of his mouth, knowing that the other party would be able to hear it.


    Especially during this time, the system space can be regarded as thest guarantee for Chang Nuo. He does not want anyone to know this news.


    Using this name to make Junhe feel it is the best exnation for his sudden surge in strength.


    "The power of God!!!"


    A voice sounded directly in Junhe''s drowsy mind. The source of the voice was His Majesty the King. This guy who was almost about to faint seemed to have regained his confidence in the next moment.


    His fists were clenched tightly, and his body began to slowly transform into the form of the Silver Moon Wolf. However, the original ck Silver Moon Wolf with only a white ring around its neck became a pure white one now. A wolf appears.


    This also means that he has begun to undergo all transformations. Even Chang Nuo doesn''t know how far his strength can be improved? After all, no one knows how powerful an animal devil fruit user is when they awaken.


    Even the current Four Emperors and Hundred Beasts Kaido, although he has not yet awakened, his strength is already at the ceiling of this world, let alone what level will he reach after his strength awakens?


    Chang Nuo didn''t want to know, because he firmly believed that Junhe at this moment would not be discouraged because he was not strong, nor would he be overly proud because he was strong.


    Although it has turned into a pure white silver moon wolf, perhaps it can no longer be called this at this time. Instead, it can be called a pure moon wolf. Even if it has passed out on the ground, the energy emanating from every breath is That kind of pressure can directly turn the stone in front of his nostrils into powder.


    It only took about half an hour for all this to happen. Chang Nuo slowly released his hand on this guy''s head. After walking aside, he took a deep breath and slowly exhaled it. At the end, he closed it silently. eyes.


    The moment Junhe woke up again, he had already turned into a human form. The only difference was that he was naked at the moment, and the clothes on his body had disappeared without knowing when.


    When he slowly opened his eyes, Changnuo, as Emperor Tru, still sat there calmly and watched the naked man quietly.


    Junhe had not felt his situation until now. After seeing His Majesty the King, he stood up suddenly.


    After Changnuo sighed speechlessly, he threw out a set of clothes from the system space and said, "It really doesn''t have an image!"


    After hearing this, Junhe realized his current predicament, showed a malicious smile, and then hurriedly put on his clothes.


    However, at this moment, there were two rows of very neatly dressed people standing behind him, each wearing a special mask on their face. They seemed to be one person, with no eyes visible from the outside, and even Nothing can be seen.


    Finally, I can feel the breath that they are still alive.

 Chapter 444 Shadow Guard

    <h4>Chapter 444 Shadow Guard</h4>


    It would be okay if it were just a simple mask, but the faces under these masks, even if you use the knowledge and color haki to perceive, there will be no gain in the end.


    But how can Junhe care about the situation of these people now.


    Now he was filled with endless strength, and even standing there he felt as if his strength was out of control and pressed directly to the ground.


    The already dpidated stones on the ground were once again shattered under his strength.


    "How do you feel about your current situation?"


    Chang Nuo asked leisurely with a smile on his face.


    "Very good, I have never felt so powerful!"


    Junhe said with a smile.


    "Find a ce to get used to it. Don''t release your abilities for no reason. If you can''t control your power, I''m afraid you won''t be able to participate in many things! I''ll leave these people behind you to you, everyone. Their strength is rtively good, and you can tell them anything at will, and these guys have no right to refuse."


    Chang Nuo stood up, walked slowly to Junhe''s side, patted him on the shoulder, spoke in a slow tone, then stepped directly past Junhe and started walking outside.


    Junhe, who felt a slight sense of superiority one second, was frozen in ce the next second.


    Although I don��t understand what your Majesty means? But although the people behind him couldn''t see clearly what they looked like, he could still see the clothes they were wearing rtively clearly.


    When he first came in, he was very impressed by the people tied to the chains. He still remembered the clothes each of these people wore. But when he woke up, there was no one on the chains. At that moment The memory seemed to appear suddenly, but the image of the dozen or so people standing therepletely matched the people who were tied to the chains just now.


    But Junhe didn''t know how long he had spent.


    At least from the moment we entered this cave, until now, three days have passed quickly outside.


    "How powerful is His Majesty the King?"


    Junhe just turned his head and nced at the people behind him, and then looked again in the direction of Chang Nuo, who had disappeared on the stairs.


    In his heart, he was just sighing. After Junhe sighed, he turned his serious eyes directly to the dozen or so people standing behind him.


    After sizing up each other, Junhe suddenly showed a meaningful smile.


    "All of you,e together and give me a fight."


    Junhe shouted quite confidently.


    "Excuse me, is it full strength or...!!!!"


    The masked man standing at the front said without any emotion in his voice.


    "Of course...with all your strength!!!"


    Junhe hesitated for a moment, then said with a smile on his lips.


    The space in the entire underground can be considered huge and boundless. At least it is provided for them to fight in this ce, which is not a problem at all for powerful people like them.


    Junhe probably felt a sense of pride in his heart because of his sudden improvement in strength.


    The moment a dozen people received the order, their originally silent eyes suddenly became sharp.


    The movements of these people were almost uniform, and there was a special training ground in the underground pce. More than a dozen young people were all lined up in a row, and they had moved to the training ground hundreds of meters away in an instant.


    Although Junhe was a little surprised, there was still a disdainful smile on his lips.


    After all, for him, such strength can now be achieved with just a few clicks of his fingers.


    But so what if we do? Just the moment they arrived on the field, more than a dozen people had already formed a circle around it, keeping a very consistent distance from each other.


    This situation is as if these people grew up together, or are essentially one.


    The level of cooperation and tacit understanding between them is not even what humans can have.


    Junhe still has a look of disdain on his face until now. At least he has clearly understood some things among these people. These guys are all members of the World Government. In terms of strength, whether they are strong or weak, even he I have personally caught two of them.


    For him in the past, perhaps the strength of these people was okay, but after the rapid growth in strength, these people seemed to bepletely insufficient in his eyes.


    But how does he know at this moment? The dozen Devil Fruits that had been inside the bronze gate had long since disappeared by this time.


    "Come on, let me see how powerful you are? His Majesty the King seems to value you very much. At least let me feel it first."


    Junhe said with a mocking look on his face.


    But after saying that, none of these people still made any moves. Everyone had a uniform mask. If the clothes on their bodies were of the same color, I am afraid no one would be able to guess who they were. ?


    "If you don''t move, then let me do it!"


    Junheughed and said, and then instantly moved to the side of a masked man. The moment he attacked with a confident punch, the entire time seemed to have stopped.


    The rapid attack and reaction speed havepletely swelled Junhe.


    But then the moment of p in the face came. The moment when the fist was about to hit the opponent''s face, the person who was standing in front of him suddenly disappeared in the next second.


    Junhe''s powerful punch directly hit Loneliness. After stopping, he reacted instantly and faced those people behind him directly.


    But when he turned his head again, the guy beside him was still there, as if he had never left.


    At this moment, Junhe couldn''t help but start to have doubts in his heart. Then, the eyes of the dozen or so people gathered in the circle suddenly turned blood red, and the next second, the armed domineering aura instantly covered their bodies.


    Junhe felt such an atmosphere and jumped up immediately, but followed by a dozen people who also jumped at the same time. It was only at this moment that Junhe finally let go of his pride.


    The sudden surge in strength really made this guy feel infinite expansion. It wasn''t until this moment that he was ready to get serious.


    "Bang!!!"


    Junhe was about to transform into a werewolf form, but in the next second he was kicked away by an unknown kick, and his whole body hit the wall of the cave.

 Chapter 445 Shadow Guard with Ninjutsu

    <h4>Chapter 445 Shadow Guard with Ninjutsu</h4>


    The powerful impact even stirred up a burst of dust. When the dozen or so peoplended, the distance between each of them was about 2 meters, standing straight in a line.


    After hitting the stone wall, Junhe began to put away his proud heart.


    But what he may not have expected is that once these people give an order, it is impossible to stop until one party falls.


    Hidden behind the space, Chang Nuo sat there quietly, watching this wonderful battle.


    Not because of anything else, but because when he left, with a smile on his face, he had already used the soul fruit to sense Junhe''s inner situation at that time.


    Suddenly bing stronger, Junhe couldn''t control the desire in his heart. This time it was good to teach him a lesson.


    "With the ability of two trillion Baileys, it seems that these dozen people created are really good!"


    Chang Nuo said with a grin behind the space.


    These people are already very powerful in nature, at least at the level of lieutenant general, and Changnuo also directly purchased two trillion capabilities through the system space to directly add to these people. The strength of a single entity may not be very strong. It is estimated that most of them are only at the general level, but the cooperation between them allows them to surpass any strong person currently known in the world.


    Junhe stood there staggering a little, his heart already full of disbelief, but at the same time, he also found that this group of people was already a little bit disbelieving, but until now, he also thought that he was just careless.


    Standing on the spot and adjusting, moving his hands and feet, and twisting his neck, Junhe quickly transformed into a werewolf form. This time, the werewolf form had turned pure white. The moon wolf has apletely immortal body, beyond With at least ten times the agility and attack power before, in itsplete form, Moon Wolf can at least reach a height of nearly a thousand meters. Its attack and defense capabilities, as well as its own recovery capabilities, have definitely surpassed those of Yonko Kaido.


    Junhe''s rental strength has skyrocketed, but he does not have the mentality to match this strength. This is his biggest weakness now.


    The most important reason why Chang Nuo wanted to leave this group of people to him was to temper this guy''s pride in the future.


    "There are still two brushes, I really didn''t expect it!"


    An evil smile appeared on Junhe''s lips, and he looked at the dozen or so people standing in front, but he still didn''t take each other to heart.


    But before he knew it, ayer of transparent blue barrier began to surround the entire training ground. Chang Nuo just wanted this guy to know how much he weighed now.


    After possessing strong strength, although Changnuo trusts Junhe very much, there are some things that he has to guard against?


    After all, this guy''s power is already at the pinnacle of this world, and sometimes the heart that continues to expand will never let a person willingly sumb to others.


    While watching, Junhe waspletely ready to go. With a sudden push of his heels, the stone bs on the ground turned into powder in an instant, and he rushed forward at an extremely fast speed. To a dozen people.


    His movement speed is almost as fast as lightning. It is definitely impossible to see it with the naked eye alone. Even the domineering perception of Mingwenshi has almost no effect on the opponent.


    Under a fast speed attack, even if you can use the Haki of Insight to feel the opponent''s figure, there are still times when your brain cannot react.


    More than a dozen people lined up in a row, Junhe still chose to attack the person in the middle directly with one w. In the werewolf form, the fingertips on Junhe''s ws were at least 30cm long, apanied by powerful armed domineering blessings. If you just touch the opponent, it may directly cause the opponent to enter a state of serious injury.


    But at the same time that an evil smile appeared on his lips, the guy in front of him disappearedpletely as before.


    For a person like Junhe who is not particrly powerful in his knowledge and knowledge, this kind of movement speed is almost as if no one has ever appeared in this ce.


    But after his attack passed, the other party appeared in front of him again.


    "Thunder Escape~Thunder Light Pir!!"


    The person on the side instantly created a dazzling thunder beam directly from his side. The moment this scene appeared, Chang Nuo, who was behind the space, suddenly stood up, with a long-awaited expression on his face.


    That''s right, these 12 people have beenpletely transformed into another form by Changnuo.


    The purchase of two trillion Baileys has made almost all of them be shadow-level ninjas in the world of Naruto, andbined with the unique domineering power of the world of pirates, in some respects, these individuals have be more powerful in attacks and other aspects. All be top people.


    Junhe didn''t react to the powerful and dazzling lightning for a moment, but the next moment he knew that he had really underestimated this group of people.


    Another guy appeared behind him in an instant "Thunder Release~ Chidori!!"


    The powerful attack instantly prated Junhe''s body, and a shocking hole appeared in his chest.


    This battle hadn''t evensted three minutes, and Junhe''s current pride could be considered to have been shattered.


    The moment he was attacked, Junhe knelt on the ground with one knee, his hands on the ground, and looked at the hole in his chest in disbelief.


    Blood is also dripping continuously along the hole. Fortunately, it has absolute recovery ability. While the blood is dripping, the huge hole is gradually recovering.


    It''s just that the requirements for fighting are there after all. These dozen people will only stop when one party falls.


    But with this speed of recovery, Junhe is destined to be in a passive beating process in theing time.


    A dozen people are almost in the same form, and their positions can be transferred to each other, and this transfer is almost passive. As long as anyone is under attack, they will automatically transfer to another position.


    This speed is almost simr to spatial teleportation, and it is not affected by brain control and ignores any physical and magical attacks.


    A dozen people have strong coordination abilities, but the only drawback is that they cannot act separately. From the time they were created to the time they died, these dozen people have be one body.

 Chapter 446 Whitebeard’s Loneliness

    <h4>Chapter 446 Whitebeard��s Loneliness</h4>


    The main reason why Chang Nuo wants to build such a team is to use these people to suppress the big forces in the new world in the future.


    But now, Chang Nuo can take a good look at the situation between the two parties.


    In the end, which one is better is a group of emotionless guys, or a guy who has made rapid progress in strength and is more obedient.


    As the initiator of this incident, Chang Nuo stayed behind to watch, without the slightest thought of stepping forward to help.


    However, Junhe, as the person involved, ispletely different now.


    Being beaten by more than a dozen people, even if he had used his werewolf form, he still couldn''t withstand the opponent''s weird and unpredictable attack methods in the end. However, the strongest posture could not be used on his country''s side, even if There are more powerful attacks, but until the end it can only remain passive.


    After the two-hour journey, Junhe''s new clothes, which he had just changed into, had be dpidated after such abuse.


    At least there were no injuries on his body at the moment, but just because of his quick recovery, this guy was always in a state of violent beating.


    The opponent''s dozen or so people still behaved normally, not even a trace of fatigue appeared. Every time after the attack, there would always be a different formation, but there is no doubt that the distance between the dozen or so people every time They are all rtively far apart, just to prevent them all from falling down with one attack from others.


    Junhe looked at these people breathlessly. At this moment, his mind was full of doubts. What on earth are these people? Why are you suddenly so cooperative and so powerful now?


    "What a bunch of monsters. How on earth can we make him stop?"


    Junhe looked around helplessly, feeling confused and helpless.


    "Forget it, I won''t die anyway!"


    After saying that, Junhe copsed to the ground in exhaustion andy there looking at the top of the cave. At the same time, the originally red eyes of a dozen people were immediately extinguished at this moment and returned to their previous dull state.


    Their goal is very simple, that is, it is not over until one party falls.


    Even if the opponent falls voluntarily, the mission is consideredpleted.


    Chang Nuo smiled happily when he saw the end, and then left the ce directly.


    Half a monthter.


    The pirate world, which was already not very peaceful, once again caused waves because of a newspaper.


    However, this turmoil made everyone look forward to it. Not only were many countries in chaos at the same time, but different situations also emerged among each force.


    Ace, the captain of the Second Division of the Whitebeard Pirates, is about to be publicly executed, and the execution will take ce at the Marine Headquarters, Marinfando, on the Grand Line. This newspaper instantly attracted everyone''s attention.


    For them, maybe many people don''t know who Ace is? But it doesn''t matter what identity this person has, the key is the person behind him, Whitebeard.


    This is an existence that makes many people tremble just by hearing the name. But now the Navy and the World Government have openly dered war with each other. Although this newspaper only decided to execute a certain person, the impact it brings is beyond ordinary. Anyone with any brains can guess it.


    The execution time is set in three months. Just this time mark has already made many people crazy.


    New world area.


    Everyone in the Whitebeard Pirates looked gloomy, and many of them lowered their heads, feeling the domineering power brought by their father.


    Even though he had already guessed this, Whitebeard was still filled with anger as he sat there.


    "Marco, inform the Whitebeard Pirates and all their personnel to prepare for the uing war!!"


    After Whitebeard nced at the newspaper in his hand, he calmly raised his head and stared ahead. There was an undeniable idea in his tone and he spoke directly to Marco standing next to him.


    "Dad, I will do thister. We will definitely save Ace''s matter."


    Marco said seriously.


    "Dad, let us go directly. There is no need to wait for the time arranged by the navy to rescue Ace. Can''t we just go directly to the navy headquarters now?"


    The other captains standing not far away said.


    The people behind them were all extremely angry. If it weren''t for the fact that Whitebeard was still here, these guys would have fought the navy directly in the next second.


    "They are not targeting Ace, but your father!"


    Whitebeard said a little lonely, but there was some expectation in his heart.


    This time, he was able to guess the final oue, so when he still didn''t know where Ace was being held? Such recklessness is not in keeping with his character.


    The Whitebeard Pirates and the Navy have always been at peace with each other. Although they only have the name of a pirate, in the end only they know what the Whitebeard Pirates have done.


    "True boy, what exactly do you want to do?"


    Whitebeard murmured to himself that what he was most concerned about now was not the situation on Ace''s side. After all, the official execution day had not yet arrived, and Ace would definitely be in a safe state.


    Even though I don��t know where I will be imprisoned? At least this can still give them assurance.


    But for the old man Whitebeard, so far, the only person he can''t see clearly is Emperor Tru, a person who makes people feel that his thoughts are extremely deep, but he is the only one who can help him.


    While speaking, Whitebeard looked at the blue pill that Chang Nuo had given him before. Marco had also tested it, but in the end the result was that this thing was too weird and could indeed stimte people''s inner potential, but For Whitebeard, as long as he can know the news.


    "Dad, do we need to find some foreign aid for this time?" Marco stood next to him and asked suddenly.


    In the end, Whitebeard just sighed slightly and said in a calm tone, "There is no point in thinking about this matter now. The Navy and the World Government have probably already made preparations. Now outsiders can find it again." how is it like?"


    "Didn''t the Tru Empire promise..."


    "Marco! Don''t expect others to do anything. But after this incident is over, you can join the Tru Empire with those who are willing to follow you. I believe that boy will not treat you badly. Yours."


    Whitebeard said a little lonely.

 Chapter 447 Unnamed Draft

    <h4>Chapter 447 Unnamed Draft</h4>


    It''s hard to guess, but for Whitebeard, the only one that can guarantee the safety of these people is the Tru Empire.


    As long as he dies, can Whitebeard guess what will happen to these people?


    "Dad, what exactly is the agreement between you and Emperor Tru?" Marco couldn''t help but asked curiously.


    After all, it has been almost half a year since I first learned about this matter, and the original agreement between Emperor Tru and Whitebeard even appeared a few years ago.


    But until now, no one in the Whitebeard Pirates knew about it except Whitebeard himself.


    "Since you want to know, let me tell you. Emperor Toru made an agreement with me at the beginning. As long as the Whitebeard Pirates are in a situation that cannot be solved in the future, the Toru Empire will definitely take action to protect the Whitebeard Pirates in the future. members, but as a price, the remaining members of the Whitebeard Pirates need to directly join the Tohru Empire."


    Whitebeard said.


    "Is it possible that he had guessed that something would happen to our pirate group a few years ago?"


    Marco asked in disbelief.


    ��Dad is not very clear about the specific situation, but from the looks of it now, this may actually be the case.


    Xia Li from Fish-Man Ind is now in the Tohru Empire. Perhaps he is not the only one who can understand the prophecy. "


    Whitebeard sighed and spoke in a leisurely tone.


    "Then what should we do next?"


    "Of course it is to save my lovely son! No matter what the cost, our Whitebeard Pirates can afford it.


    And no matter what the circumstances, I will not allow anyone to hurt my sons. "


    Whitebeard''s eyes suddenly became fierce, he turned to look at Marco and said.


    The war between Whitebeard and the Navy is about to break out, and it now seems to have be an indisputable fact.


    Although so far, everyone only thinks that the Whitebeard Pirates have only more than a thousand members, the key point is that they have many affiliated pirates under their name. In fact, the final number will be at least around 10,000. .


    In the world of pirates, this can be regarded as a veritablerge-scale war. Coupled with Whitebeard''s current strength, when one person destroys an entire country, who in the entire navy can stop it alone?


    However, the other pirates in the new world are actually more of a spectator mentality, but among the major forces, there is no such idea at all.


    Whether it was Yonko Kaido or Yonko Big Mom, when they saw the newspaper, all their expressions were filled with surprise.


    After all, this newspaper not only deres war on the Whitebeard Pirates, but also deres war on their new world by the current navy and the world government.


    The major forces see each other very clearly. Although they are not prepared to take action, they also want to look forward to the subsequent results, at least until both sides suffer losses.


    But at the same time, these people are not doing nothing.


    After all, if Whitebeard falls, they may be the next ones to greet him.


    Cake Ind in the New World.


    "Mom, it seems that the Navy is going to attack the Four Emperors. Do we need to do anything at this time?"


    As the eldest son of Big Mom, Perros is indeed qualified to ask such a question.


    After all, he is not the only son staying in the room at this time, most of the other children are also here.


    After all, after what happened this time, the Yonko Pirates, who were once considered arrogant, also felt inexplicable pressure.


    Big mom was lying directly on the sofa, staring intently at the newspaper that had just been delivered to her.


    Especially the column about the navy preparing to execute Ace, the serious expression on her face showed how seriously she took this matter.


    As soon as Peros finished speaking, Charlotte Daifuku stood up from behind and asked in a worried tone, "It seems that the navy has started to attack the four emperors. I guess we should prepare in advance. When the timees, What should we do if a simr situation urs?"


    "It is estimated that our pirate group will never have such a situation? Even if it does, what will happen?" Katakuri couldn''t help but closed his eyes after hearing Charlotte Daifuku''s words, thinking said.


    He would not say such words directly. What kind of character does the Zhejiang Pirate Ship have? This is simply not too clear.


    They will not prepare to start a war like the Whitebeard Pirates just because anyone is caught by the navy. This situation is simply a fantasy for the Big Mom Pirates.


    It was precisely because of this thought that Katakuri didn''t care at all about this matter. No matter what happened, he seemed not to care.


    "It seems that the old guy Whitebeard is really in trouble this time!"


    Big mom''s mouth was serious, but she said calmly.


    "It seems that the Navy has made up its mind to start a war this time? I don''t know what circumstances would make them have such an idea."


    Perros asked.


    "It''s very simple. Today''s navy really needs a war to stabilize its position. At present, whether it is the New World or the Great Line, there are already so many pirates. After bing pirates one by one, they just want to challenge the world government and the The Navy��s confidence, as the World Government��s participating countries are retreating one by one, the Navy must win this battle no matter what.��


    Big Mom said, and then punched the seat next to her. The wooden table and chairs that were still in good shape were shattered under this punch.


    Others did not understand what happened. Even the eldest son Perros stood aside and took two steps back in confusion.


    "Since the Navy wants to take advantage of the Four Emperors, it will obviously not be so easy for him to end this matter. Taking advantage of the uing war, we will make the new world more chaotic!"


    Big mom. shouted loudly to his children.


    Although the navy and the world government are currently powerful, if the four emperors of the new world are added together, it is enough for them to drink. And for these people, it is impossible to win if they want to win.


    However, so far, whether it is the navy or the world government, almost all the powerful people who have appeared in the end are general level. No one will believe in a force that has existed for hundreds of years. They can''t even find a powerful person. , this is impossible even if you think about it.

 Chapter 448 The Revolutionary Army’s Plan

    <h4>Chapter 448 The Revolutionary Army��s n</h4>


    As soon as the news was released, almost every major force had its own response methods, and the tacit understanding between them was as if they had been working together for many years.


    After all, the current behavior of the Navy and the World Government has caused dissatisfaction among many people. It is precisely because of this that after the newspapers came out this time, they all pointed the finger at the World Government and the Navy in a tacit understanding.


    The most striking feature this time is the revolutionary army, which has never appeared.


    These guys are like rats in the gutter every day. Apart from hiding here and there, they just like to do little things.


    Thend of the North Sea.


    This can be regarded as an unknown country. Nowadays, there are countless corpses lying on thend of this country. They either look like ordinary people or are wearing military uniforms. Anyway, in the rain of bullets, everyone They all fell down in rows.


    The scene in front of them is already like purgatory, but the most fundamental reason for this situation is the revolutionary army.


    "Morrie, it seems that we have finally taken over this country, and we can give some exnation to the leader."


    The person speaking this time was a woman. In terms of clothing, if there wasn''t a touch of gauze on her chest, she would have exposed her breasts in front of others.


    This man named Mori is now themander of the Western Army of the Revolutionary Army. The woman speaking is also a cadre of the Revolutionary Army. The same thing is that he is themander of the Eastern Army of the Revolutionary Army.


    The two of them stepped on thend full of corpses and looked at the corpses lying here and there. Their eyes were full of pride, and they almost turned a deaf ear to the smell of blood.


    "Bello, I will give you all the credit this time. I won''t fight for anything in the middle. Although we have captured this small Kingdom of Tia, while the other party suffered losses, our army also suffered a lot. .


    By the way, Boss Long seems to be asking us to go back, so I have something important to inform you. Have you received the news? "


    Morrie said that he had no interest in the woman standing next to him smoking a cigarette. Even the huge and plump figure and round small eyes showed a lonely mentality.


    "Of course I have received the notice from the leader. Although I don''t know what happened, it seems to be quite urgent. All the revolutionary army cadres will be gathered within three days. This kind of thing seems to have been done in a very anxious state. .��


    Bello said while smoking a cigarette indifferently, and then stepped on the corpse under his feet with his right high heel and kept spinning it. In a way, there was not even the slightest bit of humanity at all.


    "Let''s go! It''s toote. I guess Boss Long will be unhappy again!"


    Mori said a little naively, then he just turned his head slightly and nced at Bello, and then he started to walk in the other direction without paying attention.


    This woman was left behind. She did not immediately follow the other person''s footsteps. Instead, she lowered her head and nced at the corpse under her feet. After taking a sudden puff of the cigarette in her mouth, she took it out with her hand. He fell onto the hole that the corpse had stepped on with high heels.


    The true location of the revolutionary army has always been a mystery to the navy or the world government. Perhaps more urately, this group of people has never had a rtively fixed ce from beginning to end. They have always gone wherever they go. Office space.


    But just because of this, more than a dozen countries in the North Sea, which has been the most poisoned, have been captured by these guys one after another. Even some countries in the East China Sea have not been spared.


    The Revolutionary Bureau has always been deeply hated by many countries, but for most forces, it is just a power that is not painful. After all, the Revolutionary Army has never been involved in the Great Line and the New World. However, in the four seas In addition to the rtively powerful South China Sea, in the remaining sea areas, how many rtively powerful people cane out to stop these guys?


    As the current base of the Revolutionary Army, this ce is almost pure white, and this ce should have been buried deep in the sea. I don��t know how many yearster, due to changes in the earth��s crust, it was squeezed out to form an ind.


    The white exterior should be all made of sea salt crystals, and the entire ind is almostpletely covered.


    There is no green nt at all here, and even the huge rock has various holes,rge and small.


    As the base of the Revolutionary Army, most of the top leaders of the Revolutionary Army have gathered here.


    "Chief Long, most of the people have arrived. We only need themanders of the eastern and western armies on the Beihai side."


    The dragon with a broken shoe sole mark on his face was quietly looking into the distance. At this moment, a young man behind him came over and spoke to him calmly.


    "So it''s Sabo? Is everyone here already?"


    Long asked.


    "Not yet. I have informed them that they are expected toe over in the next two days, but others have already arrived here. Shouldn''t we set up a meeting for them first to arrange some tasks?"


    Sabo said.


    "There is no need for this yet. Major changes will ur in the world in the future. Our revolutionary army must take advantage of this opportunity to work hard to develop ourselves and strive to overthrow the rule of the world government in one fell swoop."


    Long looked into the distance and said expectantly.


    "I understand! Then I will let them go back and have a good rest, and then we will start a full meeting in two days."


    Sabo nodded and said, just as he was about to leave, Long said again, "Saab, at this meeting, I will propose that you serve as the Chief of Staff of the Revolutionary Army. It depends on what level you can reach in the future." It��s your own.��


    "I understand, Leader Long, no matter what position I am in, I will always follow the orders of the Revolutionary Army!"


    Sabo said.


    The dragon did not turn his head, still looking into the distance with a calm expression, but in front of him, except for the sun, there was only sea water, and there was nondscape at all.


    Sabo didn''t say much. He slowly took two steps back and then turned around and left. Once again, only Long, the leader of the revolutionary army, was left in the room.


    "Navy, world government! I really want to know what you want to do next?"


    Long said to himself.


    I guess many people want to know the same question. After all, the Navy, the World Government, and the Four Emperors at sea have been living in peace for so many years, but suddenly the two parties have be hostile. This is something that no one has thought of before. Pass.

 Chapter 449 Meeting of the Revolutionary Army

    <h4>Chapter 449 Meeting of the Revolutionary Army</h4>


    In the blink of an eye.


    There are already many people gathered here in today''s revolutionary army base.


    Each of them kept extremely quiet. Although they were revolutionary troops, this group of people did not have any uniform clothing and looked no different from a group of stragglers swimming.


    Sometimes there is no doubt that the strength of this group of people is strong in some aspects. At least in thend of the four seas, it is easy to overthrow those kingdoms.


    "Sabo, when will the dragon leadere?"


    In the room next to the crowd in the hall, a girl who looked to be in her twenties asked Sabo.


    Although she doesn''t look very beautiful, she is still very good overall. At least she has a slender figure, orange hair, and a long dress. Her facial features are not exquisite, but she looks... Extraordinarily cute.


    "Kerra, when will Boss Longe out? How do I know? It''s just that not everyone has arrived yet. Why are you anxious?"


    Sabo nced at Ke and said.


    His main focus now is on those people on the periphery. These people are already the mainstay of the revolutionary army. Almost everyone has the same dream. In fact, the architect of this dream is what they call the Dragon Boss. .


    Kerra listened to what Sabo said, and even though she was already a grown-up girl, she still couldn''t help but pouted and said, "You are so cruel to others."


    "Don''t talk nonsense, okay? How dare I hurt you?"


    Sabo exined.


    He stared directly at Ke''s face, fearing that the other party would misunderstand himter.


    "By the way, do you know why Boss Long summoned them this time?"


    Ke changed her cute face from before and asked with some curiosity and confusion.


    "It''s hard to tell for the time being. It may be rted to the recent newspaper news. It seems that the revolutionary army will also make big moves next." Sabo said with a slightly serious expression.


    "It seems that the war is really about to begin, and I don''t know when it will end." Ke lowered her head and said with a somewhat depressed expression.


    "That day wille!"


    Sabo lightly patted the other party''s shoulder and said with a smile on his face.


    In fact, they already have a rough idea of ??what happened this time. The uing war is indeed the biggest opportunity for the revolutionary army today.


    No matter which side wins by then, the navy will no longer have the intention to take any action against the revolutionary army.


    "By the way, Sabo, do you know anything about the situation in the South China Sea?"


    Ke suddenly raised her head and looked at Sabo seriously and asked.


    "Nanhai? Why do you suddenly want to ask about this ce?"


    Sabo asked confused.


    "Because our mission this time may be rted to the South China Sea, the master informed us that we need to go over and contact the people hidden in the South China Sea, and then tentatively see if we can develop our own power in the South China Sea area."


    Ke said.


    "I don''t believe you haven''t received any news about the South China Sea. It is definitely the most powerful force besides the World Government. Although there are more than 20 countries in the South China Sea, the actual situation is It''s definitely not what you see now.


    I also went to the South China Seast year. All the countries in the entire South China Sea are already under the control of the Tru Empire. In other words, as long as the Tru Empire is willing, there will only be one country in the entire South China Sea.


    Why does Haku want you to go to the South China Sea to develop your power? "


    Sabo asked. The Haku he mentioned was Kerra''s master. As a member of the Revolutionary Army, Sabo could immediately feel that such a decision was absolutely wrong.


    "I don''t know the specific situation, and I have never been to that ce in the South China Sea, but I heard from my master that the countries in the South China Sea will be thest biggest obstacle for our revolutionary army, so we need to make some preparations in advance and learn more about it. The situation over there in the South China Sea," Ke said.


    "I think Haku''s decision this time ispletely wrong. I don''t think the revolutionary army will get involved in the South China Sea for the time being. This will not be of any benefit to us." Saab said.


    "So ording to what you said, what should we do? I think what the master said makes sense."


    Korra looked at Sabo with an innocent face, apparently wanting to get some answers from him.


    Facing Ke''s expression, Sabo could only say helplessly, "As for the South China Sea, I don''t think we should get involved. Boss Long is preparing to find a way to directly contact Emperor Tru, and wants to get it from the other party. Some sponsorship.��


    "Emperor Tru? Why do you want to get sponsorship from them?" Ke asked.


    "Today''s Toru Empire is already the richest existence in the world. No one knows how powerful this country is, but the only thing that can be confirmed is that now, no matter it is the navy or the world government, no force wants to be in the world. This is the time to challenge the other party.��


    Sabo said, then sighed and continued, "It''s just that I think the Tru Empire may also have very big ambitions, but from some aspects, I still quite approve of this country. After all, the people living in this country , God wants other kingdoms toe, so I don��t know how many times better it is.��


    "Really? Although I have heard of this country, I have never been there, and I don''t know what it is like. After hearing what you said, I want to go there and have a look."


    Ke said.


    ��If I have timeter, it doesn��t matter if I take you there.


    But now the meeting looks like it''s about to start, so we''d better get there quickly, otherwise we might wonder what Mr. Long''s temper will beter. "


    Sabo saidfortingly, looking towards the hall outside.


    Almost everyone is here now, except for the things that are farthest away. Themanders of the two armies have not arrived yet, but with so many people gathering here all the time, there are always some hidden dangers of insecurity, so it is understandable that the meeting should be held in advance.


    The incident happened suddenly, and no one would have thought that this meeting would be so urgent.


    But now that things have happened, they can onlye and participate one by one.


    However, just outside their revolutionary army base, in the sky at this moment, on a tform simr to a small empty ind, four or five people were lying here leisurely, drinking drinks and basking in the sun.


    A few people don''t seem to be particrly rxed andfortable. The key is that they have been living like this for a long time.


    "Lieutenant General Haruya, how long do we need to monitor those revolutionary troops here?"


    A man lying there shirtless and tanned turned to another man next to him who also had some discounts.


    This group of people are almost all around 30 years old, but the one lying in the middle is Haruya, the original captain of the Toru Empire Pce Guards.

 Chapter 450 The Tru Empire’s Intelligence Method

    <h4>Chapter 450 The Tru Empire��s Intelligence Method</h4>


    Now he is also shirtless, wearing only beach shorts, and seems to be enjoying this leisurely andfortable life.


    "Grumo, don''t mention this kind of thing in the future. Since His Majesty the King can arrange for us to monitor these guys, it means that he is definitely a threat to our empire. Just watch him carefully."


    Haruya said leisurely.


    "Lieutenant General Haruya, arge group of people have gathered below. Should we go down and take a look at the situation?"


    Four people were lying there basking in the sun, and only one was looking down through the telescope.


    This ce is not at an altitude of 10,000 meters. ording to the specific situation, it is estimated that it is only about 7km at most.


    At this height, people below would definitely be able to discover it if they were aware of it.


    But for people like them, it doesn''t matter. Who would look up at the sky? After all, almost everything that can pose a threat is above the sea.


    Listening to the observer''s words, Zhi also slowly sat up. The muscles all over his body, especially the eight-pack abs on his abdomen, looked absolutely obvious.


    "What''s going on now?"


    Haruya asked, looking at the observers.


    "Lieutenant General Zhiye, we have obtained all the information from the Revolutionary Army. ording to observation, except for themanders of the Eastern and Western armies, almost all other high-level cadres of the Revolutionary Army are here." said the observer. arrive.


    "Oh~, it''s a pity that we can''t observe what''s going on inside the house, and we don''t know what they are talking about." Zhiya said, rubbing his head.


    "Isn''t this quite simple? I heard that the Empire has designed a device that can be used directly to make calls. As long as it is ced on a person, we can directly eavesdrop on each other''s conversations here. You canmunicate directly here. General Abona, I think it shouldn��t be a problem, right?��


    Several people lying there also sat up at the same time, and one of the outermost guys opened his mouth and said leisurely.


    "I have considered the issue you mentioned before, but the general doesn''t think so. He said that we only need to monitor the movements of guys like the Revolutionary Army. There is no need to know what kind of content they have. These things are important to us. It��s not important to the Tru Empire.��


    Zhiya said slowly.


    "Then what is the purpose of ouring here?"


    "You ask me, who am I asking? But judging from the newspapers, big things should happen next, and His Majesty the King will definitely make big moves, so now we must understand the rtionship between each force before these big moves begin. trends." Zhiye said.


    "Bang!!!!"


    While they were talking, the observer who had been standing on the edge turned to look at them. He identally slipped and the whole person and equipment began to fall from their empty ind tform instantly.


    Faced with such a situation, Zhi just nced at it without any hesitation. He just snapped his fingers. In less than a moment, the person and equipment that fell just now began to be hit by two huge transparent objects. The same balloon was slowly dragged up.


    "This guy is really serious. He has fallen down more than a dozen times in the past few days, right?"


    The shirtless man sitting next to Haruya said with a speechless expression.


    Looking at their expressions and Haruya''s skillful movements, it seemed like this was not the first time this happened.


    After the people came up, the person in charge of the observation looked at Haruya with a grateful face, said with an embarrassed smile, "Sorry, sorry! I didn''t pay attention to my foot slipping just now."


    "Can you be more serious next time? Anyway, you are still a major officer now. You are so careless every time. What will you do if His Majesty finds out in the future?" Zhiya said with a look of disgust.


    "Don''t worry, there will never be a next time. This time will definitely be thest time!"


    "I remember you said the same thing a few times before, but doesn''t it happen the same way every time?" Zhiya said.


    "Hey hey hey!!!"


    The observers had no choice but to smile in embarrassment. After all, the small tform they were on was not particrly big, and their daily lives were almost boring. Fortunately, their feelings almost changed every seven days, in order to worry that they were too bored. causing the task to fail.


    They were chatting andughing above. The key was that the meeting below had already begun. Several hundred people were crowded into a hall that was not particrlyrge. Although it was not a luxurious venue, at least this group of people was rtively friendly. Follow the rules.


    The moment Long Cong came over, he stood directly in front of everyone. When his eyes swept over everyone present, they all felt inexplicable pressure.


    "This meeting is rather urgent, so themanders of the eastern and western armies who are far away have not arrived, but now I can''t wait. When theye back, I will tell them in detail again.


    The purpose of letting youe here is very simple, that is, the era of the revolutionary army has begun, and everyone must be full of energy in theing time.


    The goal this time is very simple, that is, half of the countries in Beihai need to be the territory of the revolutionary army..."


    Long stood on top and told these people in detail the process of this time. For everyone, they were quite moved by the courage of the leader of the revolutionary army. Obviously, the strength of their organization is not particrly strong now, but this time It actually took two years to annex half of the country in the North Sea.


    Although these words are a bit fanciful, in thend of four seas, ording to their strength, if they work hard, it is really possible to do it.


    "Chief, our revolutionary army''s current funds are not very sufficient. If everything goes as you said, I''m afraid it will need at least nearly 100 billion beli. But today''s revolutionary army is still short of at least tens of billions. I don''t know about How should this be solved?" said an almost bald guy standing below.


    "Labluo, you don''t have to worry about the funding. I will solve this myself. The rest of you just need to act ording to the n. As for the details of the action, you need to discuss it yourself. I hope you will When the timees to hand in a satisfactory answer sheet, the revolutionary army''s road to sess will be in one fell swoop, let us work together to celebrate the new life."


    Long stood on the podium that belonged to him, speaking words that were confusing to people.


    Or it can be said that this cannot be regarded as bewitching, but more likepleting a self-speech.

 Chapter 451 The mission left to Enelu

    <h4>Chapter 451 The mission left to Enelu</h4>


    While all the major forces are preparing for the war, there is still such an unsuspecting person who is slowly swaying in the first half of the Grand Line.


    The ce where the Straw Hats arrived now can be considered as passing through the Capital of Seven Waters.


    The only difference is that they haven''t encountered any difficulties here. Although there are still cp 9 people here, the difference is that they don''t dare to do anything to Robin now.


    The development process is exactly the same as in the plot, at least many changes have taken ce here, and here, they finally have another partner.


    On the calm sea, Luffy raised the beer ss in his hand high and began to celebrate the new members and the new ship.


    The Meili''s retreat has now ushered in arger ship, the Wanli Sunshine, which is actually more in line with the ns of their group.


    The total length of this ship is about 50m, and the width is nearly 20m. The spaciousness of the entire space has been sufficiently improved.


    At least it seems now that everyone can have their own independent room. On this ship, they can squander their youth unscrupulously and continue to move further.


    "Everyone, let us raise a toast together and wee the two newest partners, Franky and Sunshine. From now on, they will be our partners all the way forward. Let us cheer to the new partners!"


    "cheers!!!!"


    While Luffy shouted a toast, the others raised their sses and clinked them with each other.


    The scene at this moment looked so warm, and everyone had a sincere smile on their face.


    The beginning of a new voyage means that many things are beginning to unfold gradually.


    Two monthster.


    On the Infinity, now only Eniro is left here on this huge ship. After all, Mero has his own mission. He cannot stay on a ship and sail with it for too long. Nearly a monthter, Wu Luo found an uninhabited ind and disembarked.


    However, his mission has only just begun, but Enel''s mission has gradually begun toe to an end.


    "Lieutenant General Eniro, His Majesty the King has ordered that after the Straw Hatsnd in front of the Chambord Inds, it will be up to you to guide the imperial concubine back to the Infinity, and ensure that she will not be harmed."


    When Enilu was bored and his eyes were dull, Hai Ling appeared beside him immediately and spoke to Enelu in a calm tone.


    "Nani? Why do you want to pick him up?"


    Enelu asked curiously.


    "You still need to consult His Majesty the King for details, but this is the order His Majesty gave. At least for now, you must abide by it."


    Hai Ling said.


    "ok, I get it."


    Enelu replied lightly, this boring life has made him suffer every day, I am afraid that a hearty battle is what he wants most at this moment.


    However, as the order was issued, the hat group now began to approach the Chambord Inds. Here, everything was as expected.


    But before approaching the Chambord Inds, they still encountered the protagonist who caused them trouble in the Chambord Inds.


    Today''s Shampoo Inds are exactly the same as before. There is no difference in time, and even the division of the situation is not abnormal.


    The moment the Straw Hatsnded on the ind, their new destiny was already quietly operating.


    "Lieutenant General Eniro, the Straw Hats havended on the Shampoo Inds. You need to start your end mission."


    On the Infinity, Hai Ling once again appeared next to the drowsy Enelu and said.


    "This is just the beginning, there won''t be any danger, just wait for me to take a rest!"


    Enelu saidzily and casually.


    "The news has been notified to you. You still need to pay attention to the matter of the emperor''s concubine."


    Hai Ling said again.


    After hearing these words, Anilu became a little more energetic, and then he instantly activated his domineering perception, and the situation of the entire Shampoo Inds was immediately disyed in his mind.


    When he sensed that Robin was still walking on the street with his friends, he was already a little drowsy, so he fell down on the sofa and started to sleep.


    Anyway, his own mission is just to protect Robin''s safety. There is really no need to be too anxious while the other party is still safe.


    However, as soon as Straw Hatnded on the Chambord Inds, the death-seeking rhythm began to spread rapidly.


    The Shampoo Inds have be a gathering ce for pirates during this period. After all, this ce is the only way to the new world, and there is no room for negotiation.


    All pirate ships need to be coated here before they can go to Fish-Man Ind and reach the new world.


    "Kid, I heard that the Imperial Concubine is among the Straw Hats. What should we do?"


    In a room in the Shampoo Inds, a man wearing a T-shirt with long hair and a blue and white mask with many holes on his face opened his mouth and said to the man next to him.


    This man is the captain of the Kidd Pirates, and he is also the man with the highest bounty among those who entered the Shampoo Inds at the same time.


    "Try to avoid them as much as possible. If you can avoid contact, don''t contact them. As long as we arrive in the new world safely by then, we will not break the profound rules."


    Kidd looked outside through the window, his eyes filled with too much disdain for the Straw Hats.


    "I understand, I will arrange for otherster, and try not to have any contact with them then."


    Kira said wearing a mask.


    "By the way, one more thing. Our purpose this time is just to go to the New World. It seems that something will happen in the Shampoo Inds to prevent everyone from going out. Try not to go out. Wait until the ship is coated and leave as soon as possible. This ce," Kidd said.


    "Is it possible that we don''t have contact with other people? This time is a good opportunity to increase the bounty. I think we should go out for a walk." Kira said.


    Kidd was still sitting there expressionless, looking at the situation outside through the window. In fact, he waspletely unmoved by all this in his heart.


    These two people are from the South China Sea, but almost everyone familiar with the matter knows that the South China Sea Tru Empire has almost controlled the entire South China Sea area.


    It doesn''t even need to be confirmed, but it''s just that the other countries have not legitimately belonged to the Tru Empire.


    Being able to emerge from such a powerful pirate from the South China Sea aroused many people''s doubts at first.


    It wasn''t until the Tru Empire finally issued a reward, and the content of the reward told that Kidd and his group massacred an entire vige in Nanhai, that everyone started to react.

 Chapter 452 Pirates from the South China Sea?

    <h4>Chapter 452 Pirates from the South China Sea?</h4>


    It''s just that there is no way to confirm the authenticity of this matter. The other party has indeed be a pirate. No matter where hees from, Kidd''s bad reputation is already there.


    As for the specific situation, no one knows. Everyone only knows that a pirate from an extremely evil era appeared from the South China Sea, and the bounty is still the highest among all pirates in the new era.


    Kidd was silent for a while, then stood up silently. After a while, he said, "In that case, why don''t we also make a big fuss? Now we are also pirates after all, so let''s make this era more chaotic. .��


    "Haha!!! It''s really exciting." Kira said with a smile.


    Anyway, no one can see his expression at this time. I really don��t know how to evaluate this guy? Even when I usually eat, I only eat noodles.


    Almostpletely different from other pirates.


    The Straw Hats didn''t even have two hours afternding on the Shampoo Inds, but themotion they caused had already begun to grow.


    It''s almost exactly the same as the original plot. It''s still the same ce, the same thing, and the same thing.


    Kidd was even sitting in this human trafficking venue at the same time. He didn''t want to meet Luffy yet, but he didn''t know whether it was fate or other reasons. In the end, it waspletely disyed in front of him, and he was still there. He did something like this before his eyes.


    In less than a while, arge number of marines gathered outside the human trafficking venue, but Kidd didn''t care about this kind of thing.


    Being a pirate means you have to look like a pirate. The moment he walked out, Kid turned his head and nced at Luffy. No matter how he looked at him, he couldn''t figure out what was so attractive about the guy in front of him. of? His strength is simply too weak for him.


    "Kid, it seems that the imperial concubine did note with the Straw Hats?"


    Kira stood next to Kidd and whispered.


    "I''ve already seen it. I''d better go out first and talk about the restter."


    Kidd said calmly and with a smile.


    "We''ll go out on our own, as for them..."


    Kid turned his head and nced at Luffy, then said again with disdain, "Don''t worry!"


    "I know!" Kira said.


    After the words fell, Kira instantly pulled out an offensive weapon simr to a sickle from his waist. It was huge, but the attack distance may not be particrly far, but this huge sickle felt like his own in his hand. The left and right hands are equally flexible.


    He maintained a bow stance for an instant, staring ahead with full vignce. There were at least hundreds of soldiers.


    These marines lined up in three rows, each holding a long gun in their hands. However, as theirmander, that guy was not like other naval officers. Instead, he stood directly behind the crowd, cowering. is there to direct.


    The Tianlong people in the ve trading ground were beaten until they were alive and dead. Now, more and more naval forces have begun to move closer. They are running towards the ve meeting ce one by one like a long dragon.


    "Zoron, let us have a big fight and then take them out properly."


    Luffy shouted excitedly, and then began to rush towards the marines at a very fast speed. However, his body had almost reached the position of the marines, but his right hand remained where it was.


    "Rubber~Giant Pistol!!"


    As he bit the fingers of his other hand, he suddenly puffed his mouth inward, and after blowing a breath, his right hand, which had been staying at the original position, turned into the palm of a giant in just an instant.


    As his right hand began to push forward quickly, the navy that had been staying there to block them all started shooting at Luffy in an instant, but this seemed to have no effect on him.


    With just one push, a huge opening was opened in their defense.


    Needless to say, at least dozens of naval soldiers were directly knocked away by this punch, and the distance was unknown.


    "Haha!! It''s open!"


    Luffy looked at the gap he had opened, with a huge smile on his face, turned his head and shouted to Zoro with a grin.


    "What a bunch of ignorant people!"


    Kidd looked at the scene in front of him, and he no longer had the slightest fondness for Luffy, or in a certain way, he felt that he was a second-rate person.


    But he himself also began to gather strength to prepare for the attack. Kira had already rushed into the crowd of marines first. With the scythe in his hand, more than a dozen marines around him fell to the ground in an instant. on the ground.


    Kidd seems to have special abilities. The ability of the Devil Fruit makes it seem that even if he walks among the navy crowd, they can''t get close to him at all.


    The ability of the Maic Fruit was fully demonstrated by him at this moment.


    If it weren''t for the guidance of a better teacher, he would probably be the same as in the original plot. At most, he would maintain the same fighting power as before, and he would be slightly stronger than Luffy to the death. But now, he is probably just With just one thought, you can instantly kill the opponent.


    He didn''t even have the thought of taking action now. He directly used his ability to disperse the surrounding navy. At the same time, countless bullets began to attack in his direction, but in the end, these bullets were all suspended around him. As more and more bullets were suspended there, they had formed ck spots one by one.


    In the end, Kidd just waved his right hand lightly, and the bullets floating around all returned to the navy in an instant.


    Even the power of these bullets is much more powerful than those fired from a gun.


    "Zoron, that guy is really powerful!"


    Luffy was observing while fighting. At least he had been observing the supernovas that also belonged to the extremely evil era. What would be the strength of each person?


    At least this time, he has clearly understood how powerful these people are in front of him. These are no longer something he can just rely on hearing about, but he can now feel them personally.


    "It is indeed very powerful. Even his subordinate is at least stronger than me."


    Zoro said with the same serious face, and then just pulled away and knocked down the naval soldier next to him who was about to attack him with a sword.


    The seriousness on their faces showed how seriously they took this matter. The other party was just like them, pursuing pirates in the new world.


    However, all pirates have the same ideal, which is to obtain the One Piece, the original treasure of the Pirate King.

 Chapter 453 The Admiral’s Secret Mission

    <h4>Chapter 453 The Admiral��s Secret Mission</h4>


    Both Luffy and Zoro had serious faces. After all, the guy who suddenly appeared in front of them was too powerful. Just by looking at them, they could understand that they would not be their opponents at all.


    "Zoron, don''t worry about this for now, we''d better leave first."


    Luffy shouted, and then directly used his special skills to kick a dozen people away.


    There was another guy who had been following them and was watching the battle between the two parties gracefully.


    This man looked a little thin with a white-spotted hat on his head, and had a rather long-looking knife at his waist.


    Only more than two hours have passed since theynded on the Shampoo Inds, and the whole ind has already been in a state of panic.


    The Straw Hats are indeed synonymous with destruction wherever they go, but this time they did encounter a powerful opponent.


    Less than two minutes after this group of people left the ve trading venue, a golden light appeared directly here. There were still many navy lying on the ground at this moment. In addition, the cup on the ground The signs of destruction looked particrly obvious.


    "It''s really scary! These young people really don''t know how to restrain themselves."


    Admiral Kizaru from the Navy Headquarters came over. Looking at the scene in front of him, he was not surprised at all. Instead, he said with a joking expression.


    "General, they have all started running towards Dock 43!"


    Just as Kizaru finished speaking, an officer lying on the ground next to him struggled to get up and said to him.


    "Okay, okay, I understand, but it''s not an option to leave this kind of thing to me every time, right?"


    Kizaru didn''t care about the feelings of the person lying on the ground, and still said with a leisurely look on his face.


    It''s just that at this time, the guy from the original plot on the other side has already appeared here.


    Each one has a broad belly, a height of more than 5 meters, and a face without any emotion. The peace guardians in the main field appeared for the first time. On this Shampoo Inds, they quickly pacified all the pirates at an almost devastating speed.


    Wherever he goes, every attack is intimidating.


    He doesn''t have many ultimate moves, he just relies on theser beams emitted from his palms. Eachser beam falls on the ground, instantly forming an explosion circle that can cover a radius of about 20m.


    This attack is more simr to the Devil Fruit ability of Admiral Kizaru, but from some aspects, this guy also has huge shorings.


    "Kid, be careful, this is the Shichibukai Tyrant Bear!"


    Kira looked at the peace guardian who suddenly appeared in front of him without any expression, and immediately started shouting at Kid who was walking in front of him.


    "This is not the Tyrant Bear, this thing should be the Peacekeeper, a weapon developed by the Navy''s secret base. Don''t worry about him, let''s go directly!"


    Kidd said domineeringly.


    But before Kira could reply, the Peace Guardian''s voice began to say, "Eustace Kidd, captain of the Kidd Pirates, has a bounty of 500 million beli. His identity has been confirmed, and the attack is urate." ����


    "Bang!!!!"


    Before the Peace Guardian finished speaking, Kidd directly raised his right hand. In an instant, a shock wave directly prated his body. The original huge robot did not even react and just fell apart in an instant.


    "This thing doesn''t seem to be as powerful as imagined?" Kira said calmly and contemptuously.


    "It''s just a pile of scrap metal!"


    Kidd said, without any disturbance in his heart, he continued to walk forward.


    "Captain Kidd is so handsome!"


    At this time, the eyes of the crew members who were following Kidd began to have little stars in their eyes.


    However, at this time, Enelu, who had been staying on the Infinity, suddenly woke up.


    After he looked around for a moment, he instantly turned on the Haki of Seeing, Hearing and Feeling again.


    But when he sensed the current situation on the Shampoo Inds, this guy jumped up in surprise.


    Now he didn''t care about his image at all. He was shirtless and wearing beach shorts, and flew towards the direction of the Shampoo Inds at an extremely fast speed.


    During his flight, there was only a streak of lightning, far behind him.


    "Why did you only sleep for such a short time? So many things have happened in the morning. What on earth are these people doing?"


    Enelu cursed while flying.


    There are at least five pacifists appearing on the entire Chambord Inds at this moment. The attacks they caused each one can be regarded as the top existence among those who do not have armed Haki in the first half of the Grand Route.


    Not to mention being ced in the new world, each of the Peace Guardians is almost as powerful as a lieutenant general. They can carry out long-distance attacks, and their armor made of steel can also make them invulnerable. Anyway, they have almost be bug-like on this ind. exist.


    In the so-called supernova of the new era, only Kidd and his crew made it to the beach unscathed. They didn''t even think about looking back and startednding directly.


    Other pirates do not have such a good fate. Without strong strength, how can they survive in such an environment?


    "Yoshi, these people are actually here. Why can''t I find anyone after searching all over?"


    Admiral Kizaru tilted his mouth and turned his head, looking at Luffy and others who were fighting not far away.


    Now the Straw Hats are all gathered here, without any exception. The attacks between each other have almost no effect on the peace defenders.


    "Is this really difficult? How should this woman deal with it?"


    Kizaru''s eyes were always looking at Robin, who was just leaning gracefully on the tree trunk from beginning to end, quietly watching his friends attack the pacifist, but he had no idea of ??taking action.


    Kizaru also didn''t know about this kind of trouble. Facing this woman, he hoped that she would remain in this state and not take action.


    Otherwise, it would really be a dilemma for him whether to attack or hold back. Although he had received news from the World Government when he came here, intentionally or unintentionally directly obliterating the existence of this woman, but as a naval admiral, he knew very well that What impact might this woman have after killing her?


    But looking at the situation in front of me, it does seem a bit difficult.

 Chapter 454 Mission that must be completed

    <h4>Chapter 454 Mission that must bepleted</h4>


    Although Robin was leaning on the tree trunk, she had already noticed the presence of Kizaru in her perception. Although she couldn''t bear to let her friends bear the risk alone, at least there was really nothing she could do right now.


    "Robin, please, help Luffy and the others!"


    While Luffy and the others were still fighting, Nami ran directly to Robin''s side, shouting with red eyes and tears.


    There is really nothing she can do about the current situation. Luffy, Zoro and Sanji are already the most powerfulbatants in their team, but at this time, these three people can''t even fight against a pacifist. , and was defeated steadily by the opponent.


    If this situation continues, they may not be far from death.


    "Nami, do you know what it means if I do it?"


    Robin asked calmly looking at Nami.


    "But there is nothing we can do now. If we don''t retreat as soon as possible, we may be in greater dangerter." Nami cried.


    "That''s right, Robin, you are the only one who can help us now."


    Usopp also hurried over and looked at Robin with a longing look on his face.


    "I����"


    "You can''t take action! Otherwise, I wouldn''t mind killing you directly."


    Before Robin could say anything, the military general Kizaru came directly in front of the three people in an instant. He looked at Robin''s appearance and said cautiously with a crooked mouth.


    Now if we can directly stop it here, we can indeed avoid a lot of things. Kizaru doesn''t want to cause some trouble for himself for no reason.


    "Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters, it''s really rare to see him!"


    Robin said with a slight smile.


    "Concubine Tru is no less generous. I have only seen you in newspapers. I really don''t understand why you have such a noble status, why do you want to be with these pirates?"


    Kizaru asked with some confusion.


    "As for how I do it, that''s just my personal hobby. Admiral Kizaru must not be able to control this, right?" Robin said again.


    "Admiral of the Navy Headquarters!!"


    Nami and Usopp said together, the helplessness, fear, and panic in their eyes were now fully revealed.


    Nami was so frightened that she copsed to the ground, and the tears in her eyes had stopped flowing.


    The three people who were fighting also saw the situation here, but they had been forced to this point and couldn''t escape at all, so they could only try their best.


    "General Kizaru, is it possible that we can''t let them go?"


    Robin asked calmly.


    The main reason is that Robin understands the current situation very well. Even though his strength is slightly stronger, this kind of strength is no longer far behind the man in front of him.


    "It''s not that I don''t want to let you go, but I don''t have such great rights." Kizaru said with a smile.


    At this moment, peace defenders from other ces also rushed over at this time. It was simply a fantasy to have three people to deal with two pacifists.


    Just one is enough to make them unbearable, let alone the two appearing here now?


    "General Kizaru, leave the people here to me!"


    I originally thought that the person who came here was a pacifist, but I didn''t expect that the other party opened his mouth and said so.


    The expression on his face is no different from that of a pacifist, and even his clothes are exactly the same. The only possible difference is that thetter one is holding a book in his hand, the standard and authentic tyrant Xiong himself.


    Just when Kizaru was about to get confused, the Tyrant Brother had already started to use his own ability to shoot someone flying instantly. However, his movement speed was notparable to that of a pacifist, and his attack methods were also flexible and varied. In an instant, he had alreadyunched one after another. Everything disappeared from everyone''s sight.


    Luffy and Zoro''s eyes were red, but even so, they werepletely powerless. After all, they still needed to deal with the pacifist in front of them.


    In less than a minute, the eight members of the Straw Hat Pirates quietly disappeared and only Robin was left.


    The original direction of the plot began to gradually change at this moment.


    As the original right-hand man of One Piece, Pluto Rayleigh was also quietly watching the development of this scene.


    When he first came here, he already wanted to take action to directly stop everything in front of him, but he had already received special news before the incident happened.


    That''s why he stayed in this ce from beginning to end.


    "Since all my friends are gone, it''s time to leave immediately."


    Luo Bin looked at Kizaru with a smile and said.


    He understood that hispanions would not be in any danger. Everything had been guessed before, and now it was indeed possible to reach this situation. After all, Robin had never taken action from the beginning to the end.


    So based on this situation, Kizaru has no way to take action.


    Wearing a long white dress and transparent high-heeled shoes, Robin elegantly and calmly began to move in the direction of other shipyards.


    "Mr. Kizaru, are you nning to let this woman go like this?"


    Before Robin had just walked out, a fat young man who looked to be in his twenties came over and looked at Kizaru in front of him with curiosity.


    "Hey~, it turns out to be Zhan Momomaru? I thought you were lost." Kizaru said pretending to be surprised.


    "Let''s not talk about that now, how should we deal with this woman? In any case, she is also a pirate. Since she is a pirate, then naturally she should not let her go."


    Zhan Taomaru said seriously.


    "If we kill her, the navy will be in big trouble!" Kizaru said.


    "Then how should you exin the order from the World Government?" Zhan Momomaru said.


    "Ouch! It really gives me a headache."


    "Since you have a headache, let me help you!" Zhan Taomaru said, turning directly to look at the pacifist behind him.


    "Ph1-ph2, execute the highest order and directly obliterate the woman in front."


    After Zhan Momomaru finished speaking, the eyes of the two pacifists behind him immediately changed in the next second, and they immediately began to fly into the air, heading in the direction of Robin.


    Before reaching Robin''s position, one of the pacifists released a goldenser attack directly from his right hand.


    "Bang!!!"


    But before the attacknded, the two pacifists were turned into scrap metal that could only emit sparks in an instant.

 Chapter 455 Recognized Partner

    <h4>Chapter 455 Recognized Partner</h4>


    As a burst of smoke dissipated, two pacifistsy there crackling with electric sparks.


    Then, in the middle of these two guys, a man with muscles and lightning, but only wearing big pants, stood in the middle, somewhat naked.


    What''s even more outrageous is that Enelu only wore a pair of big slippers, which went directly to the earlobes on his shoulders, making this guy look particrly different.


    "Hey! Let''s talk, let''s talk, let''s talk, some things can''t be broken!"


    Enelu put the little finger of his right hand into his ear and took it out, and said with a teasing look on his face.


    "Thank you very much!"


    Robin stood behind and said sincerely thanks.


    But it was this sentence that instantly made Eniro, who was braving the lightning, straighten his body, mainly because he was timid. It was a task that had already been assigned to him, and this task was for the Straw Hats to go directly afternding on the Shampoo Inds. Get Robin back.


    But what this guy did waspletely different. Just to sleep, he almost put the Princess of the Tru Empire in danger.


    If this kind of thing spreads out, Enelu will inevitably receive another scolding and training.


    "Empress, this is what I should do!"


    Enel said with a smile on his face.


    "Old man, who is this guy?"


    Zhan Momomaru stood there and looked at Enelu curiously, his doubtful eyes were directly aimed at Kizaru, and he asked directly.


    "Zhan Momomaru, herees a really difficult guy! I think we''d better go back."


    Kizaru said calmly with a smile on his face.


    He had never wanted to do anything to Robin. Although there were orders from the World Government, he did not care about them.


    After all, once a war actually breaks out, the navy will be at the forefront, but their navy is not the world government.


    Unexpectedly, Zhan Momomaru couldn''t help but get ready to take down Robin when he came up, but Kizaru just turned a blind eye to this.


    "The Tru Empire is not within the scope of restricting me, so that''s the end of the matter, and I will leave first."


    Tyrant Bear stood aside, holding a book with an expressionless face. He only nced at Enelu briefly, and then spoke directly to Kizaru calmly.


    After the words fell, Tyrant Bear just ignored everyone and left here.


    "Old man, I always feel a little weird about this guy? Things have reached this point, and he actually left directly?"


    Zhan Taowanined directly.


    "Never mind him, but ording to the agreement, the Shichibukai does not involve any country''s war. Even I can''t restrain this kind of thing."


    Kizaru said.


    "Is there anything going on with you two? If not, then we''ll leave."


    Enelu dispersed the lightning that erupted from his body and said with an indifferent expression.


    "Is it possible that you want to leave just like that?" Zhan Taowan took two steps forward with a serious look on his face.


    Perhaps it was because Admiral Kizaru of the Navy Headquarters was standing beside him, and in the end he shouted with an unscrupulous look on his face.


    Faced with this situation, Enelu, who had just turned around, faced them again, but this time his expression waspletely different from before.


    "What? Do you really want to start a war? Or do you think your navy has the ability now?"


    Enelu said in a low voice.


    "Zhan Taomaru, let them leave. You have already said this. It is not something I can control. Young people are so scary. It is better to go back and have a good rest."


    Kizaru twisted his mouth and turned his head to look at Zhan Momomaru who was standing in front of him.


    "But if this happens, those old men will probably cause trouble for us again?"


    Zhan Taowan also said full of grievance.


    "I will tell those old men about this matter when the timees. Now it''s better to go and check other ces. Those guys will cause trouble for us every day. I don''t know if they are dead?"


    Kizaru said, those guys he was talking about are the current high-ranking Celestial Dragons, and these people may be the most annoying to today''s navy admirals.


    As the most apex people in the world, the World Government actually had no one to protect them. Instead, they let the navy, which has always been more diligent, deal with it.


    At what point would this matter be unreasonable?


    Enelu looked at the mentality of the two chatting with each other, and could only pout andin before turning around and looking at Robin.


    "Sister Robin, let''s leave immediately. The Infinity is already waiting at Dock No. 40."


    "Okay, are we going back to China directly this time or...?" Robin asked.


    "I don''t know the specific situation. The only thing that may be clear is that we should have ended this mission for the time being." Anilu said.


    "My~all my friends should be fine, right?"


    Robin thought about Luffy and the others. They had been together for more than half a year. He liked the atmosphere of being with this group of people, and he also liked their behavior style.


    By now, Robin has truly regarded this group of people as partners and friends, so the moment he saw them encountering danger, he couldn''t help but feel nervous.


    "Sister Robin, this matter is not something we should worry about, but since His Majesty has made arrangements, I will definitely not let anything end like this."


    Enel said.


    "Huh~! Maybe it''s what you said."


    Robin sighed and tried hard to stay calm, at least to maintain this calm look in front of this group of marines.


    This would not allow the other party to see that the Tohru Empire had indeed begun to integrate into the pirates.


    "I think you should go back and ask His Majesty, he will definitely be very clear about this kind of thing." Enilu thought for a moment and said.


    "I hope so, let''s leave first."


    Robin nced at the two Kizaru who were staying there in Zhongshan. Although they were still chatting on the surface, they had been observing the two people from the Toru Empire.


    Even if you can''t attack the other party directly, you can''t let the other party do things under your nose.


    On the Infinity, Enero and Robin had just arrived on the ship. At this time, there was already a holographic projection disyed on the deck.


    "You are finally back? And you, Enelu. I won''t exaggerate and punish you this time. It''s toote for you."


    The figure in this holographic projection is what they call Emperor Tru. Although the projection is only for the upper body, the domineering power brought by this projection still makes ordinary people feel more pressured.


    "Your Majesty the King???"


    Enelu was shocked when he saw this scene as soon as he boarded the ship.

 Chapter 456 The Empire’s Intelligence Preparations

    <h4>Chapter 456 The Empire��s Intelligence Preparations</h4>


    But from the other party''s words, Enelu could clearly sense that the other party already knew the situation on his side.


    It will be of no use to exin too much now. Instead of exining, it is better to think about how to deal with it next.


    "Chang Nuo, what''s the matter?"


    Robin came up and directly asked about the key point of the matter. She did not believe that as the emperor of a country, he would directly project on this ship for her own sake.


    "There is indeed something arranged. Enelu, you and the imperial concubine will go to the Capital of Seven Waters to wait for orders. There will be very important things arranged for you next."


    Changnuo said with an increasingly serious expression.


    "No problem, I understand. I will definitely get there as soon as possible."


    "You don''t need to hurry up. I have already activated the highest procedures of the Infinity. Then you only need to stay on the ship." Changnuo said.


    "oh!!!"


    Enelu replied with a helpless expression.


    "What exactly happened? Is it rted to my... partners?" Robin asked hesitantly.


    She didn''t dare to say these things in too much detail, maybe because she didn''t want to ept this reality, but there were some doubts in her heart that she had to ask.


    After staying in the Tru Empire for so many years, he has long been a part of the Tru Empire. Although he does not know many secret things about this country, he is also aware of many things that are obvious.


    She can easily understand what kind of abilities the Toru Empire has today, so when she raises this question in her heart, she believes that Changnuo, as the Toru Emperor, will be able to answer her.


    "So this is what you want to ask? This matter may or may not be rted to your partners, but none of this is important anymore. I don''t mind if you admit that a group of pirates are partners. This is me Give you personal space, now you just need to know that there is nothing wrong with your friends, and when you return to the Tru Empire, maybe you will also see a different surprise."


    Chang Nuo said calmly with no expression on his face.


    "I understand. If there is anything you need me to do, just let me know when the timees." Robin said.


    "Hai Ling, we must reach the Capital of Seven Waters within two days!"


    "Okay, Your Majesty."


    Hai Ling appeared directly on the deck, but by the time she appeared, Chang Nuo''s half-length projection had already disappeared.


    "Enilu, what kind of actions do you think His Majesty the King will take this time?" Robin asked.


    "It''s not me, Sister Robin. I''m just a lieutenant general now. I don''t know many things in the country. Only a small number of people can know these things now. Maybe they will know the specific situation when the timees. ." Enilu said aggrievedly.


    He doesn''t dare to say anything now. Even if he knows something, he doesn''t dare to tell it. After all, he knows what the consequences of telling it will be.


    Now all you need to do is wait for instructions. It''s okay. Don''t think too much.


    In the Tru Empire.


    Today, this country is quietly starting to operate its military forces. Except for those routes that only allow merchant ships to pass through the entire South China Sea, the rest of the sea area is forbidden to all human beings.


    However, in these sea areas, almost everything is under control. With such intensive prevention and control efforts, it is probably impossible for even a fly to set foot in these unfamiliar sea areas.


    In fact, this situation often urs for the Tru Empire. It is usually used as a military exercise, and most of the directions are aimed at this situation.


    To mobilize the entire country''s military forces on arge scale, even a fool would understand what is being done.


    But if this situation urs frequently, even during such a sensitive period, it will not cause too many thoughts to others.


    In the pce.


    Chang Nuo stood there with a serious look on his face. Several generals from the Tru Empire also wore their own general uniforms side by side and stood in a row with the same serious faces.


    The distance between them is only 20 centimeters, and everyone''s face is extremely serious.


    "I don''t want to say much. I just want to ask now, are things ready?"


    Chang Nuo asked directly.


    "Your Majesty the King, the intelligence agencies are fully prepared, and the specific movements of the major forces are all under control."


    Abona opened his mouth to reply.


    "The special forces have been prepared and are expected to set off about 10,000 people and 20 warships, including specialbat preparations."


    Junhe said.


    "I am also ready and ready to apany His Majesty the King to set off at any time." General Yixiao said.


    "Security preparations around the empire have beenpleted. All sea areas have been confirmed to be safe, and have begun to expand into the South China Sea all the way to the Upside Down Mountain. All are currently on alert. Standing forces and special forces are jointly on duty, with 150,000 people, and can guarantee the empire at any time. There are no security threats within the scope." Moshank replied seriously.


    "The intelligence team will report the specific situation. You are now the most cutting-edge force, so I don''t want any problems to arise when we are together."


    Chang Nuo looked at Abona and asked without any expression on his face.


    "Your Majesty the King, the intelligence force has now set out with a total of 20,000 troops, and is now strictly monitoring the 36 top forces in the world, ensuring that every force''s movements are reported at all times!


    Today, most of the main movements monitored are concentrated in the New World. Each surveince team has 20 people, all apanied by an Imperial Lieutenant General to ensure the authenticity and uracy of the news, including the safety of the personnel. "


    Abona stood upright and answered meticulously.


    "Using dozens of lieutenant generals toplete this intelligence investigation, the Tru Empire has spent a lot of money this time, but after this incident, our country will usher in a more important moment, so in the future, the intelligence agency The establishment of the agency is urgent, and General Abona should be more attentive in this regard, andbine the experience gained from this intelligence investigation to train the next batch of more urate personnel."


    Changnuo said.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King, we have dealt with this matter as soon as possible. After the empire''s matter ispleted, all intelligence agencies will be established and perfected within two years." Abona replied seriously.


    "It doesn''t need to be said so early for the time being. We already have sufficient experience and personnel. What you have to do is really to improve all the intelligence agencies within the next two years, and it needs to surpass the CP agency of the world government."


    Changnuo said calmly.

 Chapter 457 Begin preparations for war

    <h4>Chapter 457 Begin preparations for war</h4>


    Faced with this request from His Majesty the King, Abona was a little surprised, but he did not object too much and could only nod silently.


    The CP organization of the world government has been established for who knows how long? They have almost controlled most of the power trends in the entire world now, unlike their own country, which only conducts supervision.


    However, the rapid development of the Toru Empire has probably surpassed the understanding of the world government. Therefore, during this period, personnel from the CP department have been trying their best to get in, but in the end, none of them ended up well.


    "Your Majesty the King, there are still ten days until the execution day. When should we set off?"


    Junhe opened his mouth and asked.


    "There is no need to worry about this matter for the time being. It will be the first time that our Tru Empire shows its military power to the outside world. Therefore, when that dayes, I will directly build a space portal. At that time, everyone can set off directly from the South China Sea. That''s it. It will avoid causing unnecessary panic," Changnuo said.


    "I think His Majesty the King''s arrangement is the most appropriate. If we rashly set off directly from the sea, it will definitely arouse the alert of the navy and the world government. It will also cause panic in other countries. Those who use space portals This method is indeed the most convenient and safest." General Yixiao said.


    "Then let''s arrange it like this first. Although we have 10,000 troops to apany us this time, we will also need to make two-way preparations and leave 20,000 troops as reserve troops to be ready to go directly when the timees.


    On the Trud Empire side, especially the patrol in the South China Sea area, this time the special forces and standing forces conduct cross-patrols, which is indeed a very good choice. It is necessary to ensure that every ce that can enter the South China Sea area is fully safe. .


    Not only do we need to pay attention to those whoe down from the Upside Down Mountain, but we also need to pay attention to those who emerge from the windless zone.


    But regarding this, you don��t have to worry too much. The Daughter Kingdom will also send fixed troops to apany the Tru Empire personnel to patrol in the windless zone. As our base camp, we must ensure that nothing happens in the South China Sea area. Arrangements are made by Lieutenant General Level generals must receive all news from the South China Sea Fleet every hour. "


    Chang Nuo said seriously, then turned his gaze to Mo Sank, and said in a low voice, "Although it may not be too long before you leave us this time, I will leave all the safety sses within the national system to you. In this world, I don''t want any problems to arise.


    At that time, you should try your best to cooperate with the domestic Senate staff to ensure the safety of the outside world. At the same time, you must ensure that there will be no chaos inside. Thend police force must be on alert at all times. No matter what the situation is, you must not do anything during this period. The slightest hint of disclosure urs. "


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King. I will definitely stay with the Kingdom when the timees to ensuremunication with all parties and never cause any problems in the country and peripheral areas!"


    Moshank said seriously.


    "Your Majesty the King, if we have so many people here this time, will a war break out directly?"


    General Yixiao asked doubtfully.


    "I can confirm this in advance. We will not directly intervene in this war. Our past is just to finish the matter and try to maximize the impact of this matter." Changnuo said.


    "If you can say that, I will understand! But if there is an emergency, what should we do?"


    "Everything should be done with the interests of the empire first. While protecting others, the first thing we need to protect is ourselves. Deterrence by force may sometimes be the best choice."


    Chang Nuo looked at it and smiled. These words didn''t even pass through his mind when he spoke them, they just came out casually without thinking.


    It is true that Changnuo is the leader of a country, and all interests must go to the country at any time. No matter who he is, he must do it with the most basic operations.


    Considering what happened in the war, no one was sure whether there would be any idents. The reason why so many troops were dispatched directly was to start the process of deterrence by force.


    From now on, they are indeed not involved in this war on the surface, but in fact they have started preparing for the situation many years ago.


    However, the preparations this time are not just words. The current number of troops in the Tru Empire, including the number of special forces, has reached nearly 300,000, not to mention the number of standing troops. So far, the number of troops has almost reached 300,000. It has reached nearly 800,000.


    This is actually quite pitiful for the huge poption base of the Tru Empire.


    Originally, people from more than fifty countries in the South China Sea region were all gathered together. So far, the actual total poption of the Tru Empire is almost 100 million. This poption, especially in recent years, has begun to increase at the fastest speed. The speed increases upward.


    If the Tru Empire is given another 20 years, there is actually no need to do any mental calctions. By then, just the people of one country will be able to conquer the entire world.


    But there are some things that can be done now that must be done. Otherwise, there will be too many constraints on yourself by then.


    "I''ll wait for His Majesty''s orders then!"


    General Yixiao said respectfully.


    The preparations for the war on the top are now in full swing. Almost everyone in the world is focusing on this, but everyone with power is paying special attention to this situation.


    After all, anyone who understands the situation can see that winning or losing this war will determine the future direction of the entire force.


    At this moment, there are many people in Marin, the naval headquarters base, and arge number of people have already begun to gather. Most of these people are wearing naval officer uniforms. The family members of the naval officers who originally lived on this ind had already gathered before the notice was sent out. Evacuations have begun one after another.


    On today''s ind, apart from those preparing for war, the rest are people who have begun to prepare to participate in the war.


    However, in another ce, several people sitting here were all sitting there leisurely andfortably drinking tea.


    "How is the Navy prepared for the situation?"


    The bald one among the five old stars asked with a serious face.


    "There is no need to pay attention to those things. Today''s navy has begun to think of breaking away from the jurisdiction of the World Government. Do you really think that we can''t control them? We don''t know what our identity is."


    The mustachioed Woxing said.

 Chapter 458 Five Old Stars’ Plan

    <h4>Chapter 458 Five Old Stars�� n</h4>


    These five old men were not the only ones sitting in this living room, there were many people standing nearby. Although most of them were wearing suits and ties, there were also a few men wearing masks.


    But except for these five old men who were rtively normal, almost everyone else was listening to their speeches with their heads lowered.


    "Second brother, you are in charge of the military. These matters should be decided by you. Whether it is the navy, army, or air force, you must handle these matters in ce."


    The bald man with a mustache looked directly at the bald guy without any beard, wearing a monk''s robe and wearing a pair of sses and said.


    This man was the one Wu Laoxing always kept close to his side at that time. He kept staring outside with a stern gaze, unwilling to open his mouth to say a word from the beginning to the end.


    After all, the sanctions this time are clearly aimed at the navy, but in fact he himself knows very well that this may also be a restriction on his rights.


    The bald man with a mustache is actually the eldest among these people, but except for being slightly higher in rank and seniority, there is nothing unusual about him.


    This guy is mainly in charge of political and diplomatic matters, but in terms of positions, the five of them arepletely equal.


    The bald guy holding the knife nced at the bald guy with a stern look, and said angrily, "Aren''t all these things arranged by you? What do you want me to do now? I will make a decision this time." Have you ever consulted with me about such a big n? Is it interesting toe here and ask such a question now?"


    "That''s not what Saint Cholba meant, and you don''t have to think too much about Saint Loft. Regarding this n, we are not the only ones to decide. But since things have already happened, we should also consider some things now." Other unexpected circumstances arise.��


    The person who spoke was a person with a red face, his face and hair were almost golden yellow, and he seemed to be the calmest person among the others.


    Although he was wearing a suit, the old man was not wearing a tie, giving him a casual look.


    However, the Saint Cholpa he spoke of was the bald man, and he was also the guy in charge of the political and diplomatic issues of the entire world government.


    Lord Loft, this is the guy who is in charge of the military and always carries a long sword.


    "Holy Corullia, we have said this. There will definitely be a war between Whitebeard and the Navy. We have already considered this anyway. The most important thing now is your intelligence. How are the preparations going?"


    Among the five old stars, Saint Cholpa asked.


    "There are no specific characteristics yet, but all the major spheres of influence in the world are already under our control. Whitebeard''s side has started preparations a few months ago. The pirate ships under his name are all under our control. Everyone is gathering, and ording to preliminary estimates, at least ten thousand people may participate in the war. Regarding this, no matter what, we need to prepare in advance." Saint Corullia said.


    Saint Kolullia is the guy in charge of espionage and intelligence among the Five Old Stars.


    Almost all CP departments are under his control. Among the five old stars, this guy is the one who really holds the real power.


    "What about the Tru Empire? I don''t believe that little guy has such patience. Faced with these situations, he won''t make any small moves?"


    Lofte asked.


    "Now that everything has been said, I will say it bluntly. Among all the forces now, including the Tru Empire, there is no news so far. As long as all the CP personnel who go to this country, in the end, there will always be They will all disappear in that country quietly.


    Several batches were sent out a month ago, but still no one has been able to send back any news. "


    Saint Kolulia took a deep breath and said.


    He has long been dissatisfied with the Tru Empire. Since a few years ago, this guy has been trying every means to squeeze in all kinds of spies into the Tru Empire. But in the end, everyone went in and could note out. But there is not one.


    Not even a single piece of useful information had been sent out, which was what made him most irritated.


    "The Tru Empire has now posed a serious threat to the navy, but it is still unknown to what extent their country''s specific military strength has reached. But now we should find ways to start to curb the growth of this guy, otherwise We don��t know what will happen in the near future that is uneptable to us.��


    Saint Cholpa touched his beard and said thoughtfully.


    "Do you want to ask your Majesty for instructions? How should we treat this country?"


    At this time, another man with curly hair and an ornament on his head said.


    This guy is the one in charge ofw among the Five Old Stars, and he is also the one with the least substantial rights among these people.


    "Saint Siloamia, the matter has not developed to the point where we cannot control it. If we just go and ask the Lord directly at this time, what use will we have?"


    Cholba Saint said.


    "I think we have to guard against the Toru Empire. The other forces, whether they are pirates or the revolutionary army, have been enriched one by one. It can be considered a small fight, but now the Toru Empire has be ours. Threat, the entire South China Sea area is now under the control of the other party, even without asking your Majesty, I think we should try our best to wipe out this country."


    Luofte said seriously.


    His right hand tightly grasped the handle of the knife in his hand, and his body began to exude an aura of wisdom.


    "There is no need for us to do this kind of thing now. Let''s arrange things first. After this war is over, we will focus on the Tru Empire and save the money every day. This is a bit of a worry," said Cholpa Saint.


    "This time I quite agree with the boss''s words. Now, whether it is the World Government or the Navy, it is estimated that neither the World Government nor the Navy has much energy to distract these guys from the Toru Empire. When the timees, let most of the CP personnel go over and investigate about the Toru Empire. The situation makes it easier to hit the opponent directly at once." Saint Corullia said.


    In the words of these people, they did not take the Tru Empire seriously at all. They were even full of disdain, and even said that destroying a country was such an understatement.

 Chapter 459 Arrangements on Nine Snake Island

    <h4>Chapter 459 Arrangements on Nine Snake Ind</h4>


    Perhaps to this group of aloof people, the Tru Empire is just one of the many ants that can jump higher.


    But no matter how high they jump, the final result will not change. They are still just a group of ants.


    Now almost everyone is waiting for the war to begin, and the Navy Headquarters is also on standby, fearing that something special will happen in the next few days, because if this happens, the consequences will be Unthinkable.


    Throughout the entire naval base, you can always see peopleing and going, almost no matter day or night.


    However, Ace, the real protagonist of this incident, is currently chained in a cell. His face no longer has the sunny smile before, and all that is left is a haze.


    Moreover, the cell on the floor where he was located was so eerily quiet that everyone could hear any sound.


    Even if you can hear the clear footsteps and sounds walking in the corridor, no one usuallyes to this ce.


    The ce where they were detained was actually not as bad as imagined.


    In addition to being in a rtively high-level prison cell, at least there is no need to work or suffer every day.


    at the same time.


    The protagonist of the original plot has slowlynded on an open space at this moment. The difference from the original plot is that this guy did not suffer too serious injuries at this moment.


    It was nothing more than being pped by the Tyrant Bear and flying to such a long distance.


    Nothing special happened in the rest.


    After justnding, Luffy carefully looked around and took a look at his own situation. He smiled and then turned around to look at the deep pit he had just fallen into. Everything looked so shocking. , but such an attack actually did no harm to me at all.


    Of course, except for flying in the sky for a long time and being very hungry now, there were no special circumstances.


    In the Princess Ind Pce.


    "That guy does seem to have started tond here ording to the n, but who started this n?"


    Hancock sat in his seat,pletely lost in thought.


    "Sister, should we do something now?" Sonia asked.


    "How is the roving guard team you arranged? The Tru Empire will need to conduct a joint inspection of the windless zone with Nine Snake Ind, but please don''t tell me that the candidate has not been decided yet."


    Hancock turned his head and looked directly at his sister Sonia and asked.


    "You can rest assured about this matter. The personnel are all ready. It''s just that the windless zone is patrolling. The main force at that time can only be people from the Tru Empire. So far, we have been able to select The total number of warriors is only over 200," Sonia said.


    "More than two hundred people are enough. Other specific situations will be subject to His Majesty''s arrangements. The guy has alreadynded on the ind. Everything will go ording to the original n." Hancock said.


    "Okay, onee-sama."


    Sonia stood nearby. In fact, he had already been shocked by Hancock''s current aura.


    The main reason is that there are too many things facing Nine Snake Ind today. There is a Vice Admiral from the Navy Headquarters waiting outside at the moment, with the purpose of allowing Hancock to participate in this war.


    But as Hancock who already knew the situation, she was actually reluctant to participate, but now there were some things that she couldn''t decide on.


    "Bang!!"


    While Hancock was thinking about the problem, the door of the pce was kicked open, but at this time, a woman walking on crutches, only about 1m5 tall, walked in.


    Granny New walked in energetically on crutches. Looking at Hancock who was sitting on the upper seat, she asked directly and loudly: "Snake Lady, why haven''t you set off quickly now? Naval Headquarters The lieutenant generals have been waiting outside for a week, do you know what Zhejiang means?"


    Granny New''s voice directly echoed through the entire hall. He didn''t need to say that, Hancock already understood what was going on.


    "It''s not time yet. When the timees, I will participate. I will take a navy warship to go there. By then, it will only take four days to reach the navy headquarters base. It will not have any impact on us."


    Hancock said calmly.


    "What you said is quite simple? But after this matter is over, how do you want the navy to treat it? Although Jiu She Ind no longer needs to go out to plunder and survive, after all, we are now weak, and some things still need to be done To do it.��


    Granny New said.


    "Granny New, after this matter is over, Kuji Ind will retire from the pirate career, and will directly announce its withdrawal from the Shichibukai ranks." Hancock said.


    "Sister, what do you think?"


    Sonia was shocked when she heard this. After all, this kind of thing has never beenmunicated to others now.


    But Granny New, who had been standing below looking at Hancock, looked unusually calm.


    "You can do whatever you want. Old woman, I already belong to the previous era. I don''t want to interfere with the affairs of you young people anymore. But as the empress of Nine Snake Dao, you also need to do many things. Think about other people on the ind, and if you think that person is really like that and has the ability, then go ahead and do what you want to do.��


    "You won''t me me?"


    Listening to Granny New''s words, Hancock was a little surprised. He originally thought that this old woman would definitely not share the same mind with him. When the timees to tell this matter, she still might not know what she would say about him.


    But what Granny New said now still moved Hancock very much.


    "I don''t want to worry about anything anymore. Also, that kid Mia hasn''te back for so long. Why don''t you go look for him?"


    Granny New, who looked calm one second, changed the subject the next second, looked at Hancock and asked.


    "Mia has gone to his father''s ce now, and it is estimated that it will take at least a month toe back. After this matter is over, I will go and pick him up," Hancock said.


    "Oh~, one by one! Just pay attention to safety when the timees."


    Granny New said, but she still couldn''t get around the topic just now.


    Even though Hancock had never told these people about the possible war this time, Granny New was considered a figure who had traveled across the sea. She could tell at a nce from the newspaper that this matter would happen. means nothing.

 Chapter 460 Another military base of the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 460 Another military base of the Tru Empire</h4>


    After Granny New left, Hancock just nced in the direction she left.


    Today''s Hancock is very different from the original plot. She is already someone else''s mother. As early as many years ago, Hancock has cultivated the domineering power of a true empress. No matter what she says or does, she has everything. All can show the feeling of intimidation on the sea.


    "Sonia, do what you were told just now, and do it quickly. The Nine Snakes Ind will either be calm or on the cusp of a storm."


    Hancock said.


    "Okay, sister-sama, but do we really not need to take care of the little guy who fell on the ind?"


    Sonia asked confused.


    "As long as there are no problems, you don''t have to worry about it. Just arrange for others to handle it when the timees!


    But we must monitor the other party''s behavior carefully next. As long as it does not endanger lives, we at Nine Snake Ind will not be responsible for this matter. Hancock said coldly.


    "Okay, I''ll go down and give you instructions."


    Sonia said, then twisted her fat waist and walked outside step by step.


    Hancock continued to sit there alone. In fact, many of the decisions in today''s affairs were beyond her control. All she could do was to make ns ording to the pre-nned situation. So far, There is no room for maneuver.


    However, Luffy at this moment, even though he has the halo of the protagonist, is just in the same situation as in the original plot.


    As for why Tyrant Bear was photographed on this ind, even Chang Nuo himself can''t exin it until now.


    But for everything now, Chang Nuo wants to directly change it all into the original plot. At least he can control what happens this time. There may be some deviations, but it doesn''t matter anymore.


    At least at this moment, everything that should be prepared in the Tru Empire has been prepared, and everyone is ready to go.


    The only thing left for them now is to wait for the war to really start.


    However, at this moment, there are less than ten days left before the war begins, and thepetition between the various forces has quietly begun.


    In the South China Sea, in a ce surrounded by all the fleets, a huge ck hall stood here.


    This is the space portal. The distance is not very close to where King Tru''s City is located, but on the contrary, it is in the other end of the King''s City.


    This can be said to be a ce connected to the sea, and it can also be regarded as another military secret ce in the Tru Empire besides Sky Ind.


    Clearwater Bay has developed from the Tru Empire in a few years. It has been carrying the Tru Empire''s maritime military development, construction ofrge steel ships, and construction of special equipment. Almost all of their chosen locations are concentrated in this ce.


    This is also the area that the world government has always wanted to explore and study.


    However, just such an area is guarded by nearly ten lieutenants. Giant steel ships are all concentrated in this area. The personnel have already begun to prepare. All that is left is to wait for the top. When the battle starts, they will instantly go to the area where the battlefield is.


    "Lieutenant General Vick, have you checked everything on your side?"


    On the tform near the connection with the sea in Clear Water Bay, a man with a thick beard looked at another man also wearing the uniform of a lieutenant general and asked.


    "I have checked it out in detail several times, and now I am waiting for His Majesty the King''s order, but this time is really torturous. I really want to go forward and fight!"


    The lieutenant general named Vic said.


    Although his face is covered with a beard, his actual age is only in his twenties, because at present, almost all the pirs of the Tru Empire are at this age.


    Lieutenant General Vick''s tone seemed very calm, but his heart had already begun to get excited.


    As soldiers, although they always pursue peace, they still want to win an honor in the frontline war.


    So far, although their Trul Empire has cultivated arge number of troops, they mostly just train their own people for confrontation and patrol the sea areas.


    A realrge-scale war has never started before. It is rare that this time they can either witness or participate in it. All of them have already been extremely excited.


    "It''s rare for Lieutenant General Vic to have such an idea. In fact, not all brothers have the same idea. It''s just that the situation this time is very serious. His Majesty the King and several generals may be involved. Don''t let any trouble happen again. Therefore, all the matters you are responsible for inspecting must be perfect. If anything goes wrong, I am afraid that you and I will not be able to escape the involvement."


    At this time, another person opened his mouth and spoke. He had a handsome face and was handsome, which could be considered rtively handsome.


    Lieutenant General Deco''s words directly made them feel a little ashamed.


    After all, by now, several people''s thoughts have long been no longer on this aspect.


    "Lieutenant General Deco, you can rest assured about this. Everything has been checked over and over again, and there will be absolutely no possible idents."


    Lieutenant General Vick said.


    "This operation is no different from the past. As the first batch of vanguard troops to participate, we must fight off the power of the Tru Empire this time no matter what. Although we may not participate in the war, we may participate in the war in the future. There are too many.��


    Lieutenant General Deco said, staring at everyone with sharp eyes.


    Although he is only a lieutenant general, his strength isparable to that of a general. In other words, if it were not for the current Tru Empire, there would not be much room for promotion in terms of position. Today''s Deco Zhong The general already had the rank of general.


    Others also respect him quite a bit, and they all understand that as long as one of the senior generalses down, the young man standing in front of him will definitely be a general.


    Lieutenant General Deco stood on the seaside, quietly looking at the dozens of giant steel ships lined up in front of him. People were constantlying and going on each ship and began to transport things. All along, the Tru Empire had Such military preparations are no secret.


    But now there is something behind these dozen steel giant ships that they don''t know what''s going on?

 Chapter 461: Great Admiral Lieutenant General

    <h4>Chapter 461: Great Admiral Lieutenant General</h4>


    Separated by a huge portal, there is no need to say more about what is behind it, you can know how strict it is, and this time the war has the participation of the other party, but so far, as lieutenant generals, they have not understood what happened. What kind of things will apany you?


    "Hey! I''m hungry, can you get me something to eat?"


    At the moment when they were stillmunicating with each other, the sea that was originally calm in front of them began to surge.


    Then a huge head popped out of the water. Looking at the people staying on the shore, the huge mouth opened and shouted.


    "This bastard! He actually came out at this time!"


    Lieutenant General Deco said with a helpless expression. They were not surprised by Mianjin''s appearance.


    After all, this thing had already arrived near Clearwater Bay a few years ago, not to mention that they had long known that it was a guy brought back by His Majesty the King.


    The more important reason is that Mianjin is still the current Lieutenant General of the Toru Empire Navy. Although he has a huge body, this guy''s life has not been as easy as imagined in the past few years.


    Especially when they first came to the Tru Empire, the more than ten lieutenant generals who were here to supervise and inspect construction every day, when nothing happened, their biggest hobby should be training such a big guy.


    This kind of thing stilles with an order from His Majesty the King himself, and Mianjin has no right to refuse.


    The only thing that gives them a headache is that this guy eats an astonishing amount of food in a day. Even if the Toru Empire doesn''t have to pay much attention to food now, as long as they have enough food, the only headache is cooking for him. .


    Nowadays, there are hundreds of chefs dedicated to taking care of this guy''s appetite every day, but everyone can see the benefits brought by Mianjinmi.


    With the increase in strength, Mianjin Jian''s current progress can be said to be astonishing. Compared with his past, his level is probably one in the sky and one on the ground.


    "Lieutenant General Deco, this seems to be the third time this guy has said he is hungry today." Lieutenant General Vick said.


    "Let someone prepare it for him. After all, this guy might be involved in the next two days."


    Lieutenant General Deco said helplessly.


    "Lieutenant General Deke, I haven''t seen you for a long time, nor have I seen His Majesty the King. When will he let me pass?" Mian Jinjian opened his mouth and asked.


    "Mianjin, sir! Can you please stop shaking your huge body while you are talking? It will affect our work very much."


    Mianjin opened his mouth to ask Lieutenant General Deco when he saw this. The next second, the soldiers far away on the ship began to shout at this guy.


    After all, as long as the huge body moves slightly, it will cause waves or other subtle vibrations. For those who are inspecting these ships, this is indeed a rather painful thing.


    "Huh? I seem to have done something wrong."


    Mianjin looked at Lieutenant General Deco and asked.


    "Tell me, you are a guy who only eats and causes trouble every day! What are you doing under the sea? How are your recent training results?" Lieutenant General Deco asked directly.


    "It''s so boring to be under the sea. You said His Majesty the King asked me to train an army of fishmen. Now I think it should be almost useful."


    Mianjin said.


    "You still know how to train? s~"


    Lieutenant General Deco said in his heart, sighing helplessly.


    "By the way, Lieutenant General Deco, I recently went to the North Sea and caught a big guy. Do you want to use him to pull your boat?"


    Mian Jinjian suddenly shouted happily.


    "Hey~, I have some ideas about this. I''m quite curious if you can say it from the mouth of a big guy like you and catch a big guy."


    Lieutenant General Deco suddenly became interested and said.


    "That''s it, see you Mianjin. Did you catch something good? Hurry up and take a look."


    Lieutenant General Vick also said.


    "He is in the South China Sea now, but it seems that he cannot enter this area. Even if he is dragged, he cannot be dragged in." Mianjin said aggrievedly.


    "It should be a matter for His Majesty the King. Without special permission, it is difficult for outsiders toe in in the South China Sea today."


    Lieutenant General Deco thought for a moment and then said calmly.


    "Then what should we do? Don''t we still need to go to His Majesty the King?" Mianjin said.


    "You have the nerve to say this? What did His Majesty the King give you the order? It''s okay, don''t leave the South China Sea area, it will easily cause bad things. Forget it this time, but you must follow the order in the future. ." Lieutenant General Deco said.


    "I don''t want to go to the North Sea. It''s just that some time ago, a special thing appeared under the sea and has been circling around this area. Although I don''t know what it is, I came here to chase this guy. Beihai, fortunately we got the things back."


    Mianjin said, and then directly took out a huge thing from the water with both hands.


    No matter how you look at it, this thing should be a high-tech product, with a steel shell and a lot of transparent ss on it.


    However, it is just such a thing, with a length of about 15m and a width of about 3m.


    No matter from which point of view, this guy should definitely belong to the submarine category.


    But there are probably no more than three forces in the entire world that can create such a thing.


    "Lieutenant General Deco, it seems to be a submarine?" Vic said in surprise.


    "You don''t need to say more, I can see it."


    Lieutenant General Deco''s expression suddenly became serious. Clearwater Bay has always been the most important military base in the entire Tru Empire.


    He is different from the Sky Ind. After all, even a bird can hardly get up there, and there are even fewer people who can get up there.


    But the military base of Clear Water Bay ispletely different. It is not only located in the South China Sea, but also as long as the World Government or otherrge forces seriously explore it, it is very likely that they will find this ce.


    But for the Tru Empire, everything in this area is on high alert, but they also have an obvious drawback, which is that they have never deployed underwater defenses.


    "See you in Mianjin, you did a good job this time, I''ll give you extra food today!"


    Lieutenant General Deco took a deep breath and said seriously, since this thing is not from the Tru Empire, it must be something that other forces brought over to explore the situation in this country.


    Now, even with your toes, you can guess that there are huge loopholes in the security situation at Clear Water Bay.

 Chapter 462 Military secrets leaked

    <h4>Chapter 462 Military secrets leaked</h4>


    When Mianjin saw his huge figure and was still there happily, Lieutenant General Deco''s expression was no longer as good-looking as he imagined.


    "Lieutenant General Vic, you should be responsible for the inspection, right?"


    Lieutenant General Deco asked seriously with a cold voice.


    "I''m sorry, Lieutenant General Deco, I will send someone to check immediately!" Vic said seriously.


    He now also understood the importance of this matter. There was actually such a big guy lurking under their noses, which was indeed shocking.


    "I''ll put the inspectionter. Now I''ll report this matter quickly. The other thing is to find technicians to quickly analyze what this thing is."


    Lieutenant General Deco looked at the big guy lying on the ground, full of sense of technology, and it also gave them a lot of bad feelings.


    "I''ll go right away!"


    After Vic finished speaking, he quickly started running and headed in another direction.


    As for Lieutenant General Deco, he looked at the surrounding environment with a serious face, and then looked at Mianzumi with a smile and expectation again and said, "Daichi, let your murloc army check it carefully on the seabed." , confirm if there is anything else?"


    "It''s gone down there. We''ve already checked it several times. It seems like this is the only thing down there."


    Mian Jinjian said nkly.


    "I see!"


    Lieutenant General Deco said, and the next second he took out the phone bug from his pocket. This time, no matter which force it is, it needs to be taken seriously and seriously.


    This situation is already considered a huge secret for a country. Once the matter is leaked, there is no telling what will happen. The most important thing is that it is still impossible to confirm where the source of this thing belongs.


    If the matter is serious, it must be considered serious. After all, this is the biggest military secret of the Tru Empire. If there is a problem, none of them, the lieutenant generals, will be able to survive it easily.


    And it happened under the noses of these people, even if it was an exploration under the sea, this only shows that there are indeed big loopholes in their management.


    After Lieutenant General Decomunicated with the people above him, within half an hour, people started rushing over in a hurry.


    General Abona, who is an intelligence agency, General Yixiao, who is responsible for military attack, and General Moshank, who guards the territory, all three of them appeared here synaesthetically.


    In the special room, Abona looked at the huge structure in front of him. No one was riding on the ten-meter-long submarine, but he was able to sail independently. There are indeed fewpanies in the world that can do such high technology. out.


    "Abona, did you find anything?"


    Moshank looked at this huge thing and asked with some doubts.


    "Generals, this is a sealed submarine that can move forward independently. It has the functions of reconnaissance, exploration andmunication, and the structure inside isplex. If it is inspected in detail, it will probably take at least a month."


    At this time, the person who had been responsible for the inspection, a man wearing a white coat and a mask, came to the three of them and said respectfully.


    "There''s no need to check. Today''s Tru Empire doesn''t have that much time. The main priority is to check theirmunication mechanism and secrets. Is there any situation that may be leaked?"


    General Yixiao said.


    "This thing should belong to the Smoke family in North Haven. Judging from the shape, it definitely belongs to this family." Abona just took a look and said directly.


    The most important thing is that the symbol of the Vinsmoke family is too clear and obvious. In order to highlight their abilities, these individuals are not willing to let go of anything and put their ownbels on it.


    Two sixes are clearly printed on the butt of the submarine. Just by looking at it, you can know where the origin of this thing belongs.


    "Are you sure?"


    Moshank asked.


    "The signs of the Vinsmoke family in the North Sea are too clear, but we cannot rule out whether the World Government deliberately used the signs of the Vinsmoke family for exploration," Abona said.


    "If it really is the Vinsmoke family, it won''t be a big deal. On the contrary, if this thing belongs to the World Government, it will have a great impact on the Tru Empire." Yixiao said.


    All three people understand that there are only a few major forces in this world that have the ability and strength to create such a thing. One is the World Government, one is the Tru Empire, and the other is the insignificant Vinsmo. Gram family.


    Although other forces may also produce such high-end products, overall, these forces are not veryrge, and they are even less likely to provoke the Tru Empire in the current South China Sea.


    "General, I discovered themunication product, and this thing is still talking."


    The man who was wearing a white coat and a mask appeared busy again, shouting excitedly.


    The key is that the three of them have no understanding of this high-tech product. Abona could only ask with some confusion, "ording to what you said, can''t we stillmunicate with each other directly?"


    "Yes, General Abona, there should be someone on the other side who has been receiving the information here."


    The words of the scientific researcher instantly made the faces of several people present turn pale. Such an important military base was actually under surveince by the other party all the time.


    What''s more important is that this thing can actually talk at all times, which means that all themunication between them just now has been answered by the other party.


    "It seems that I have been provoked. As a national security territorial general, I will directly apply to the underground to mobilize 50,000 troops to go to Beihai!"


    Moshank said with a cold voice. He stared at the instrument in front of him that kept shing red dots, and his heart instantly became angry.


    "This matter should be reported to His Majesty the King and see how His Majesty the King arranges it?"


    General Yixiao said, but at the same time he was not as excited as Moshank.


    Although they first knew that their own affairs might be leaked, for them, the most important thing right now is to be eavesdropped by others. Regarding the fact that the Tru Empire will participate in the battle on the top, the battle on the top is still far away. In just a few days, even if the other party can report it to the World Government, the impact on the Tru Empire will not be great.


    As for the leakage of high-tech products, this kind of thing cannot bepletely cracked and solved in a day or two. There will still be enough time to solve it after the war is over.

 Chapter 463 The Vinsmoke Family’s Plan

    <h4>Chapter 463 The Vinsmoke Family��s n</h4>


    While the three generals were still looking worried about this matter, in fact, at the other end, they were watching the scene on the opposite side through the big screen in front of them.


    And all the scenes in front of them are reflected in theboratory of Clearwater Bay in the Tru Empire. They can even hear each other''s words clearly.


    "Father, have we made this matter too big?"


    In a room in Beihai, a rtively innocent-looking beauty stared at the hairy-looking man next to her and said.


    This woman has long pink hair that directly covers her right eye. Her eyebrows on the left rotate counterclockwise. She wears a pink dress with an open cor that goes straight to her belly button. She has a shy figure and looks quite gentle.


    "Reijiu, it seems that this matter will be really difficult to deal with next?" said the guy who looked like a middle-aged man.


    This is the Vinsmoke family base, and the man speaking is Vinsmoke Gaji, the boss of this base.


    Although he also has circled eyebrows, he can only frownpletely at this moment. He originally wanted to design an unmanned submarine and directly explore the high-tech situation in the Tru Empire? But I didn''t expect that this thing had just arrived in this area and had already been discovered by the other party.


    They didn''t find anything at first, but now it''s better. The verbalmunication between the other party has made them know too much.


    Although the Vinsmoke family once unified Beihai, the group of people clearly understood thatpared to the Tru Empire, their family was simply inferior.


    "Father, I think this shouldn''t be a big deal. ording to the current n of the Tru Empire, their biggest focus should not be on these things. At worst, we will find a way to negotiate at that time."


    said Vinsmoke Yuji, standing behind him.


    As the eldest son of the Vinsmoke family, this guy''s mentality is much better than that of his father.


    Vince Mokjiaji left his son behind, still feeling a little mncholy in his heart.


    "From the Vinsmoke family, I think you can hear what I''m saying here, but I''m just wondering if you can have a conversation with me?"


    While the three of them were stillmunicating, a voice began toe from the big screen in front of them.


    However, behind this voice, in less than a moment, images of the three generals of the Tru Empire began to appear.


    The other party''s technical staff are not just freeloaders. In just a short time, they can decipher the functions of these cameras and recordings.


    It has to be said that the high-tech products in this world are very different. This kind of technology is indeed not particrly difficult for a force like the Vinsmoke family that relies on technology to survive.


    Facing the scene in front of him, Vince Mokjiaji clenched his fists nervously.


    Even the children behind him became alert unconsciously.


    "From the Vinsmoke family, no matter what the situation is, I hope you can reply within 30 minutes, otherwise the Tru Empire will not mind sending troops there!"


    On the opposite side of the video, Abona opened his mouth and began to threaten.


    And beside him, the original technicians also began to speed up deciphering the materials about the submarine they obtained.


    Just deciphering the dialogue function on it is not too difficult for them.


    "Father, I think we shouldmunicate directly. It shouldn''t be a big deal. After all, I didn''t get any useful information this time."


    Vince Moke Leju said.


    "I see."


    Gaji looked helpless, but now that everything hade out, he could only do it this way.


    In the royal pce of Tru.


    "The Vinsmoke family! It''s really interesting. I don''t have any ideas yet, but I didn''t expect them to dare to extend their hands here."


    Chang Nuo put down the phone bug in his hand, with a gentle smile on his face.


    He didn''t feel any particr surprise about what happened this time. He didn''t have any thoughts about this family at first, but he just didn''t expect that the other party would jump out so quickly.


    "Your Majesty, do you want to send someone over?"


    Junhe said, standing next to him.


    "As a big family, there is nothing to worry about. It is important to deal with the matters in front of you now, and other things can be sorted outter."


    Chang Nuo said nonchntly.


    For him, what if things are leaked now? Today, the Toru Empire is fully prepared. Even if the other party takes the matter directly to the World Government, it will not have any fatal impact on the Toru Empire''s next actions.


    But now that things have been arranged, no matter what happens next, we naturally need to follow the original n.


    "Although I say that, this incident will definitely have an impact on us. Fortunately, no particrly big secrets were leaked. This also confirms that our current management is loose. We will definitely understand everything in more detail by then. ." Junhe said.


    "Actually, it''s good that things happened earlier this time. It can at least give us a warning. Next, with the cooperation of all the troops, we will find ways to arrange the fishmen troops to go in. At least we must ensure that there must be fish under every boat. Not to mention that it can ensure that soldiers who fall into the water can receive timely treatment, in many aspects, this is absolutely beneficial to our army without any harm."


    Chang Nuo sat directly on the sofa, leisurely picked up a cup of tea in front of him, took a sip, and said calmly.


    "Then do we need to arrange a legion to follow our operation this time?" Junhe asked.


    "No need, just ask the guy from Da Ru Dao to follow him when the timees." Chang Nuo said.


    "Then when are we going to leave?"


    "Tomorrow, there are only ten days left before the real start. At this time, I think I should go and have a good chat with the old man!"


    Chang Nuo had a sinister smile on his face. If he wanted to severely damage the navy and the World Government''s conspiracy, perhaps using the Whitebeard Pirates would be the best option.


    At least at this time, it is necessary to ensure that Whitebeard has sufficientbat power, and it is reasonable toplete all the subsequent matters.


    Junhe stood behind him and looked at the current His Majesty the King quietly. He had no idea what the man sitting in front of him was thinking in his heart, but no matter what, Junhe had never had any other thoughts. .

 Chapter 464 Special Transaction

    <h4>Chapter 464 Special Transaction</h4>


    Countdown to seven days.


    The time for the war on the top is getting closer and closer. Now not only the major forces are observing every move of the Navy and the Whitebeard Pirates, but even ordinary people are waiting every day for what this incident will cause. result.


    Although more people are just watching the excitement, at least in some aspects, it can also determine the living conditions of these people in the future.


    "Boy Tru, we have reached such a critical time now. We are surrounded by Navy inspectors. Aren''t you afraid of being discovered by them?"


    On the Moby Dick, Chang Nuo and Whitebeard were sitting opposite each other. The difference was that this time Chang Nuo actually had some wine for several days.


    There is no way these fine wines could be produced in this world. It can be regarded as Changnuo''s final farewell to Whitebeard.


    "Old man, to be honest, I don''t want toe over at this time. It won''t do us any good if others find out if nothing happens. But now that the day hase, naturally we shoulde over and take a look."


    Chang Nuo picked up the small wine ss in his hand. Compared with the huge wine bowl in Whitebeard''s hand, this thing waspletely different.


    But he just picked up the small wine ss and took a sip, and his words were euphemistic.


    "At this time, you are probably the only one who can still think of me, an old man. We are so destined, why not you be my son."


    Whitebeard said with a smile on his face.


    As the captain of the Whitebeard Pirates, Marco was also sitting next to him. Marco also looked at his father with such a speechless face, but in the end he did not say anything.


    Chang Nuo had long seemed as if he was not surprised by this matter. After all, every time he came here, the old man Whitebeard would always bring up such a topic.


    But this time, Chang Nuo unexpectedly did not refuse. Instead, he smiled and said, "It''s just a title, and it''s not that important now!"


    "You little guy!"


    With a smile on his face, White Beard directly picked up the big wine bowl in front of him and took a few sips. Then he said with a slightly serious expression, "If you want to stand on the top of this ocean in the future, the road ahead will be better than you imagine." It��s much more difficult.��


    "I understand what you are saying, but there are some things that you don''t do and I don''t do. If no one does it, how can we change the current situation?" Chang Nuo raised his ss and saluted White Beard.


    "To be honest, in this world, the only person I can see better is you. You are so young, but you have such a strong strength, and you also have such a powerful force. In the future, there will definitely be chaos in this sea. There is a world for you.


    But I still want to say one more thing. If you can avoid touching the World Government, don��t touch it. He is not as simple as we think! "


    Whitebeard said seriously.


    "Dad, why do you and others say that the world government is not simple, but you have never seen him do anything until now?" Marco suddenly asked in confusion.


    "Some things are too secretive. There are so many things that you don''t know. What you can do now is to maintain the status quo. It''s already good." Whitebeard took a deep breath and said slowly.


    "Old man, in fact, we all understand what you said. There are many ces in this world beyond our imagination. However, even if you be a pirate, won''t it stop you from finding freedom? I am different. Then Let me work hard to find a free sky for everyone, maybe this is my mission in this world."


    Chang Nuo said, in fact, this is the answer he has been looking for. Why did he run into the pirate world without any problems? Is it possible that you just want to spend your life here?


    The answer you seek seems to be rtively simple in the end, that is, let yourself use your limited life to create a better sky for others.


    "I hope it''s really what you said!"


    Whitebeard said, picking up the big bowl in front of him again, pouring a few sips into his mouth,ughing loudly and shouting "Good wine!"


    "Dad, please drink less. Your health is much worse now than before."


    Marco looked at Whitebeard''s appearance and hurriedly persuaded him.


    "Marco, now is not the time to talk about this. It''s rare to be happy today. Boy Tru has brought so much good wine, so naturally it can''t be wasted." Whitebeard said.


    "But we can drink slowly, and we can drink slowly again when this matter is over. There is no need to be so anxious and drink so much at once, right?" Marco asked helplessly.


    "So much good wine is definitely wasted if you don''t drink it!" Whitebeard said, but suddenly he looked at Chang Nuo, his expression instantly turned serious and asked, "Boy Tru, you don''t think you can Are you sending so much good wine here for no reason?"


    "Why do you think so? I just came here to have a chat." Chang Nuo said nonchntly.


    "To be able to achieve your position, there is no need for us to mince words about some things. Let''s talk about it, what exactly do you want to do this time?" Whitebeard asked.


    Whitebeard asked bluntly at this moment, the expression on his face was not angry, but more calm.


    Chang Nuo did not directly pay attention to White Beard''s words. Instead, he tasted the wine he brought leisurely.


    But after a while, facing Whitebeard''s gaze, Chang Nuo gently raised his hand and pointed upward.


    "Guhahahaha~, I agreed to what you said, but only you can see what happens when the timees. I, the old man, can''t guarantee the rest."


    Whitebeardughed and said, the other party only made a slight movement, and he didn''t know if it was a tacit understanding between them or something else. Anyway, he understood everything in just an instant.


    The king of a country, and he has received so much attention in this world, and more importantly, at this special time, he actually traveled thousands of miles toe to his side and sent so many good things, Whitebeard In fact, you don''t need to think too much, you can already guess that the other party must have somethinging.


    Marco sat aside and was the most speechless. He didn''t understand what the two of them were talking about from beginning to end.


    But the only thing that can be heard is that the arrival of Emperor Tru this time is not that simple.


    There must be things that he didn''t know about, which made Marco really curious about what kind of situation allowed such a young man to be able to fight with his father, the most powerful man in the world. On an equal footing!

 Chapter 465 The end of an era

    <h4>Chapter 465 The end of an era</h4>


    But Marco had no right to intervene in the conversation between the two people. In the end, he could only watch silently, retaining the doubt in his heart.


    Above the calm sea, the sun has long been slowly covered by dark clouds, and the sea and dark clouds seem to be connected in front.


    Some dark clouds still shed with thunder from time to time, but there was no strong wind blowing on the sea.


    "Old man, we can be considered friends. If you have anything, you can tell me in advance. No matter what kind of request you have, as long as I can do it, I can definitely help you."


    Chang Nuo said in a slightly low voice.


    "It''s nothing. Old man, I have lived my whole life and have seen too many things in the world. The only thing I can''t worry about right now is my family. Their strength is not very strong. In this new world, if there is no one to support me, , it will be difficult for them to persist.


    It may be there by then, please help me take care of it. "Whitebeard said a little frustrated.


    "I agreed to these things, but some things must have been said before. Even if it is in front of you, I don''t mind saying it to him."


    Changnuo stared at Whitebeard and said seriously.


    Whitebeard smiled softly, and then said, "I can''t control the future, but Ace, this is what you promised me!"


    "That''s no problem!"


    Chang Nuo smiled lightly. This kind of thing was indeed not a veryplicated task for him.


    What everyone sees now is only the Moby-Dick, but behind the Moby-Dick, dozens of pirate ships have begun to line up in a continuous line, and they are connected to each other.


    Today''s Whitebeard Pirates can be said to have high morale. After all, they are the only pirate group to officially face the navy so far.


    Not only that, but headed by Moby Dick, they have never stayed in one position. Although they have been staying in the new world, their next goals are all heading towards Fish-Man Ind.


    There are still seven days left. ording to the current progress, it is expected that all their time will be stuck on the day of execution.


    As they moved forward, Chang Nuo was already hiding in the space, quietly watching these people move away.


    He was quite emotional at the moment, but after feeling emotional, he was looking forward to it. After all, this n has been nned for a long time. No matter what means he uses, his n must be realized in the end.


    Now is not the time for affection between children. After watching these people leave with a solemn expression, Chang Nuo''s originally silent expression gradually turned into a sinister smile.


    "A new era has opened, let you end the chapter of the old era!"


    Chang Nuo said silently until all these ships disappeared from sight, but he didn''t feel any sense of pride in his heart.


    As the distance gradually approaches, time has passed again for four days, and now all the changes in all parties have begun to quietly arise. The first to start to change should be the revolutionary army that has been staying on the North Sea.


    They have always seemed to be unwilling to be lonely. After getting such an opportunity, the smoke of war began to appear in many countries on the North Sea in an instant.


    Nowadays, neither the navy nor the world government has time to take care of the small revolutionary army that is still on the North Sea. Even though their strength is rtively better than that of ordinary pirate forces, at least for now, they still have It is not a force that attracts others'' attention.


    But even so, the current marching speed of the revolutionary army is indeed terrifying, especially led by Sabo. It is almost unstoppable along the way, but any opposition forces that stand in the way almost fall apart among the Qingke.


    Facing those hails of bullets, for these armed and powerful people, these things are no different from decorations.


    But it''s not just that, at least now the hands of the revolutionary army have slowly begun to reach out to the South China Sea. Just after someone entered the Tru Empire with a merchant ship, a little girl got off the ship.


    The moment she entered the country''s port, Ke''s face was full of disbelief. At least here, it seemed that this country was extremely luxurious.


    But her long-standing thoughts of poverty made her look at the tall building hundreds of meters high in front of her and said, "It seems to be another country like other kingdoms. Only the top leaders of these countries will enjoy such good treatment. It must be another country." A guy who ughters people."


    Ke''s disdainful words were not spoken very loudly, but in the territory of this royal city, she might not realize that she would be noticed by others until now.


    Just afternding, Ke leisurely walked directly into thend of Royal City of Tru. Although she was very disdainful of the prosperity of the royal city, as a woman, shopping seemed to be her innate nature.


    Once he entered the area above themercial street of the Tru Empire, he wasining about the cruelty of this country in his heart, while still taking the little Bailey he had and starting to go shopping.


    "I bought this for Saab, I''m sure he will like it!"


    "Boss Long should like this thing!"


    ��


    Along the way, Ke kept practicing self-hypnosis. In fact, the things she bought in the end were all for herself. None of the big and small bags she was carrying were for anyone else.


    But silently, behind Ke, several people were following her invisibly. These people had been following her from the moment shended ashore.


    But up to now, Kerra was probably only focused on shopping, and had even forgotten her own mission, let alone being aware that there were other people following behind her.


    "Hey Sabo, I''vee to this country now, how are you doing there?"


    Kerra walked on the street, holding the phone bug in her hand unscrupulously, andmunicated with Sabo who was far away in the North Sea while walking leisurely.


    It was as if this trip was a trip, withrge and small bags on my back, a phone in my right hand formunication, and a snack in my left hand that I kept eating.


    If you don''t look at it from other aspects, this woman can be regarded as silly and a bit cute, but for those who follow her, she probably has no emotion at all. Anyone who may be involved in the security of this country is, to them, They should all be wiped out in the end.

 Chapter 466 Come with us

    <h4>Chapter 466 Come with us</h4>


    This cute image of Kerra made Sabo on the other end of the phone instantly turn pale, and the cold sweat on his forehead kept flowing down.


    "Kerra, you have arrived in the Tru Empire now? Tell me, what are you doing now?"


    Sabo asked in a low voice, even his voice was trembling slightly.


    He had been to the area on the South China Sea, and he also knew very well what the strength of this country was. Unexpectedly, Kerra came to this country ording to his original n without notifying him, saying If it is not full of danger, it must be fake.


    Kerra was eating when she suddenly faced Sabo''s voice and said in a daze with some surprise, "I am now on the street of their royal city. It does seem quite prosperous here, and there are many delicious."


    "Ke, no matter what, you should hurry up and leave. Don''t stay in their ce, and don''t implement any more so-called ns."


    Sabo''s voice came again, but this time he did seem a little anxious.


    But until now, Kerra still didn''t understand the meaning of what the other party said, and asked with some confusion, "Saab, what''s wrong with you?"


    "Don''t worry about anything now, hurry up and leave!"


    "Why don''t you tell me what happened?"


    Facing Sabo''s angry shouting, Kerra still asked innocently as if she still didn''t understand what it meant.


    However, the people who had been monitoring Ke behind him had already noticed something was wrong at this moment. One of them who was walking at the front turned to the person standing next to him and asked, "Should we take action now?"


    "No, wait a minute. The adults above asked us to confirm who are the revolutionary troops in our country? We can just take them down in one fell swoop."


    The person who spoke looked disdainful. Although he had heard the phone bugmunication between the two, even so, these people still had no idea of ??taking action.


    They still understand that they have to y the long game to catch the big fish.


    But just as Sabo and Ke weremunicating, a man who was rtively luxuriously dressed casually stuffed a note directly into Ke''s pocket while passing by her.


    Naturally, this scene could not escape the watcher''s gaze. Even Ke herself turned to look at the other person at the same time.


    But with just such a look, her leader who was immediately under surveince immediately ordered, "Catch them!"


    This is still on the street of the Royal City. Although it is not a busy day with peopleing and going, at least the street is still full of many people at this moment.


    At the moment when Ke was confused, the key was that before the phone bug in her hand had hung up, five or six people rushed up in an instant, and two of them rushed directly towards the man who gave the address.


    When Kerra saw this scene, she didn''t even have time to hang up the phone bug in her hand, and she started to attack the person as fast as possible.


    "Ke!!"


    The phone bug that fell on the ground was still shouting. The man who sent the note to Ke was taken down by two people in just an instant.


    "Who are you?"


    Ke looked at theing people with a serious and frightened face, and asked with a somewhat angry expression.


    The surrounding foreigners who were still walking slowly while shopping saw the scene of fighting and they all immediately started to retreat. Even so, many people still stopped to watch.


    "Revolutionary army cadres, I really don''t know when you will reach out to our Tru Empire? Next, I hope you will not resist and cooperate with the internal police of the Tru Empire!"


    The leader of the surveince team said, his expression was calm, and the clothes he was wearing were no different from those of ordinary people. Perhaps the only difference was that when he started to arrest him, he had already begun to slowly move towards him. A sign with a police logo hung on his chest.


    "How do you know my identity?"


    Kerra was obviously a little scared now. She was staying in the opponent''s royal city. The key was that she had been discovered by the opponent not even an hour after arriving here.


    As for the identity, it no longer matters. Ke''s biggest thought now is to leave this ce quickly.


    But with just this idea, it is impossible for the few people standing on the other side to make him achieve his wish.


    "Don''t have any extra thoughts. We are not that unkind. Don''t think that only the special forces are powerful in the Tru Empire. You dare not say anything else. At least my strength is among the special forces. ����


    The leader of the team paused immediately as he spoke, raised his head and looked up at the sky at a 45-degree angle, and then continued after thinking for a moment, "Isn''t he the one at the bottom?"


    Everyone else looked contemptuous, especially his teammates. Kerra couldn''t listen to a word from the beginning to the end anyway.


    "Little girl, have you ever thought about going with us? It''s best to avoid too much embarrassment for both of us."


    The squad leader smiled slightly, and hisnguage skills from head to toe still showed a gentlemanly manner.


    At least so far, they have not chosen to take action in front of the crowd. At the same time, no one from the Tru Empire people present supports Ke. As a person who can be arrested by the police force, the other party must have something wrong. known criminal facts.


    So even though there were people around, no one stepped forward to take action. They were just watching the fun anyway.


    Ke stood alone far away from other people, and she was fully prepared. Whenever she encountered a special situation, she would definitely start fighting in the next second.


    "Little girl, have you considered whether you should go with us or if we should take you?"


    The squad leader asked again.


    Even at this time, he still maintained plenty of patience, and there was no sign of impatience in his words.


    "What exactly do you want?"


    Ke finally opened her mouth and asked.


    "Not very good, but I just want you to cooperate with the investigation." The team leader said with a slight smile. Then, the expression on his face suddenly changed to another kind, and he said in a low voice, "You still How about asking us something? We also want to ask what do your revolutionary troops want when theye to our Tru Empire?"


    Ke looked around at the expressions of the people around her, and her inner uneasiness became more and more obvious. At least she could fully understand that there was no way to leave this ce this time.

 Chapter 467 The hand extended by the revolutionary army

    <h4>Chapter 467 The hand extended by the revolutionary army</h4>


    Now let alone leaving, Ke haspletely be a target of public criticism, with so many people surrounding it, and the number of people is increasing.


    In desperation, Ke could only put the things she had just bought on her back on the ground, and her hands and legs were all in an attack position. However, she had always been under protection. At this moment, she was facing such a situation. Many people are actually still confused inside.


    "Little girl, you don''t need to take action. Our Tru Empire is not like your revolutionary army, or unlike other countries you imagine, where wee as soon as wee. Why should we mind so much?"


    The team leader just now said with a gentle smile again, without any sense of aggression at all, more like a big brother next door.


    But Ke had no intention of listening to the other party''s opinion, and still maintained her original state without saying a word. But then, it was no longer her turn to speak or take action.


    The team leader stood there for about ten seconds, looking at the other party as before, but the next second, he softly shouted "Shave!"


    The next second, the whole person appeared in front of Ke. Before the other party could make any reaction, the team leader pped her on the neck, causing her to faint.


    But before she fainted, the only thing Ke was thinking about was why the other party had naval abilities?


    In fact, it is no secret to many major forces that the Tru Empire has these abilities, but Kerra obviously came here without doing any homework on the Tru Empire. This time, she can be considered a good person. Gain a lot of knowledge.


    From the beginning to the end, no one who belonged to the Tohru Empire made too many remarks after discovering that the other party started wearing a police badge. It all seemed sparse and normal, and even most people were a little indignant, and Eager to try.


    After the team leader solved all this, the two people behind him immediately held up Kerra, who was about to faint. Then the team leader turned to everyone and smiled and said gently, "The imperial police''s work affects everyone''s happiness. I��m really sorry for the shopping mood!��


    After saying that, the team leader bowed politely to everyone, very gentlemanly, and everyone present burst into apuse.


    On the streets of this country, you can often see various police officers, either patrolling or making arrests. Anyway, in the end they will try their best not to affect the people around them.


    Regarding this point, the people of the Tru Empire can understand it very well. Although most of the people in the royal city are people who migrated from other sea areas, which of these people has not experienced a war-torn life? At least their safety can be guaranteed here. Even if some minor idents asionally ur, it is still considered to be in paradise for them.


    The captain immediately led the two men away from the ce, but on the way, a young man who followed him curiously asked the captain, "Captain, do we want to hand these two people over to the army directly?"


    "To what army? Is it possible that our imperial police are just decorations? They didn''t detect dangerous elements on the periphery, but they were caught by us as soon as they arrived in the country. If I were to join the special forces, I would definitely not Any thoughtful guy like this will be allowed to enter the empire."


    The squad leader said with some pride, but at the same time, I have to say that this guy''s observations are indeed very considerate.


    "That''s what I said, but are we really going to interrogate them?" The person behind asked again.


    "This is really difficult!"


    The squad leader said that for them police officers, they only havew enforcement rights, but not any interrogation rights. Therefore, at first, they originally thought of waiting until the moment when Ke met with other members of the revolutionary army, and then directly arrested her. Arrest, but I didn��t expect that in the end, I had to arrest him in advance when encountering such a thing.


    A certain country in the North Sea.


    Sabo''s whole heart was no longer here, and he could already guess from the frown on his face that the other party had something on his mind.


    "Saab, what time has it been? Why are you still in a daze?"


    Just as Sabo stood there nkly, still holding the phone bug in his hand, a voice instantly came to his ear.


    After all, not far ahead, the two armies were fighting together. They were both in the hail of bullets, and their partners were falling all the time. But at this moment, Sabo, as the leader, was indeed somewhat ipetent.


    After hearing the voice, Sabo immediately came back to his senses, and even looked longingly at the dragon calling him.


    "what''s going on?"


    Long came over. He also noticed something was wrong. He stared at the phone bug in Sabo''s hand and asked.


    "Kerra was captured in the Tru Empire!"


    Sabo said weakly.


    "How is that possible? Didn''t I already notify him to enter this country from another ce?"


    Long asked with obvious surprise.


    "I don''t know exactly what happened, so now I need to end the war in front of me as soon as possible, and then rush directly to the Tru Empire!"


    Sabo said anxiously.


    Let��s not talk about other things. Even if he sets out from the North Sea to the Tru Empire, it will take at least nearly half a month to arrive, and this does not include any wind and waves.


    By the time he ends the war in front of him, it is estimated that the situation in the Tru Empire has already ended.


    "It''s better to resolve the immediate matter first. I''m sure nothing will happen to Ke over there."


    Long said in a low voice. In fact, he had no idea in his heart, but things have reached this point, and it is impossible for this incident to cause chaos in the war situation in front of him.


    Sabo himself understood this, so he could only vent all the anger in his heart on the enemy.


    His hands changed from the dragon w state to a dark armed color, and his domineering energy instantly covered both arms. He just jumped suddenly andnded in the center of all the enemies. He suddenly grabbed the ground with his hands, and suddenly huge cracks began to appear in the entire earth, and spread.


    In the end, even his brother''sva was directly attracted, and the powerful force destroyed hundreds of enemy troops in just the blink of an eye.


    However, for the entire battlefield, these numbers are just the tip of the iceberg. Anyway, in terms of numbers, the revolutionary army is at an absolute disadvantage. If it were not for the crushing state of high-endbat effectiveness, they would not have the slightest chance. Odds.

 Chapter 468 Let her go

    <h4>Chapter 468 Let her go</h4>


    The war in the North Sea is in a stalemate, but Kerra in the South Sea has gradually woken up.


    No one abused this little girl, but instead treated her with delicious food and drinks.


    Staying in this room gave the team leader a headache. After all, these people did not have any right to interrogate. The key was that the big guy he had finally caught had no intention of letting him out without covering his hands.


    "What exactly do you want to do? Don''t ask me about any topic, I don''t know anything!"


    The first thing Ke did after she woke up was to yell directly at the group of people at the door.


    In fact, they didn''t mean any harm, it was just that a few people stood at the door and felt too depressed, so they were all smoking there.


    Kerra in the house did not restrict her personal freedom. Apart from not being able to leave the room, all the delicious food and drinks were ced there.


    "Captain, it seems that this woman is not an option for us?"


    A thin man sitting next to him said, smoking a cigarette.


    At this moment, the team leader seemed to have an idea. He threw away half of the cigarette butt in his hand, looked at him with curiosity and asked, "Klee, I have a question. I still haven''t figured it out. How did you know that this woman is a revolutionary soldier?" of?"


    The team leader asked with a puzzled look on his face, because when they first knew that this woman was a revolutionary soldier, it was the thin guy next to them who said it.


    "You forgot what I told you. My brother is from the special forces. But I identally looked through his work recordsst time. What was written on them was about those people in the Revolutionary Army, including these people. Photos, so I took a look at them and wrote down all their looks. I didn��t expect that they woulde in handy today.��


    The guy named Klee said.


    "That''s good. As long as he confirms that he is not from our country, everything else is just a trivial matter. Mother Betta will make a mistake again then!"


    The team leader sighed and said, Ganqing was so kind to this little girl, but in the end he was just worried about arresting the wrong person. This reason is really convincing.


    There were four or five people sitting side by side on the steps at the door. These were the members of their entire team, but now they had put on their own police uniforms. They were quite handsome, but they didn''t wear their hats, which was a bit out of ce. a feeling of.


    "Hey! What on earth are you guys going to do?"


    Ke walked to the window,y on the ss, looked at the people sitting at the door, and shouted loudly outside.


    The team leader only turned his head and nced, and then continued to look ahead nkly, not taking what the woman said at all seriously.


    "Captain, don''t you think it''s good for us to do this? Anyway, if we do this kind of fishing every day, there will definitely be some trouble if the people above find out, right?" Klee asked.


    "Don''t worry for the time being. It''s definitely fine. Not all of you want to join the special forces, but it''s not that easy to join the special forces now. When you stay in the country every day, do you think that based on the current strength of the Tru Empire, who can''t? Dare you dare to provoke me with long eyes?


    Besides, even if there are some people who are not very discerning, I am afraid that the war has already started outside. No matter how we turn, it will not be our turn! "


    The team leader said a little aggrievedly.


    "But it doesn''t mean that in the next few days, there will be a joint patrol of standing troops and special forces. By then, maybe we can also participate, right?"


    asked another little guy.


    "I''m not telling you, what are you thinking about every day? Are we a standing force? No, we are just the police, and we are still the weakest group among the personnel selected at the beginning of the army. High-endbat capabilities are all selected into special forces. Among the troops, only those with eptable strength will enter the standing force. Only those with average strength like us will eventually enter the police force.


    But the people above have also said that as long as we stay in the country and can perform meritorious services and improve by leaps and bounds in terms of strength, in the end we can also join the special forces, stand on that tall ship every day, think about a shot Fighting for more than ten miles, you can destroy an ind in just an instant. This feeling should be what we yearn for. "


    The squad leader was sitting here, drawing cakes for the three or four people around him and saying.


    Ke sat alone in the room with a big voice. He wanted to continue struggling to shout, but the key was that no matter how hard he shouted in this ce, the people outside just ignored him.


    She could guess that the opponent was stronger than herself, and could be knocked down by others in a second while on alert. Therefore, there was no possibility of escaping as long as others stayed at the door.


    Unwilling to be lonely and thinking, Ke looked down at the bracelets she was wearing on both hands at the same time. This thing is not a simple thing. The Tru Empire''s special suppression bracelet can perfectly prevent Others willmit crimes.


    "Are Saab and the others in a hurry? It seems like I was really careless this time."


    Ke stayed in the house, thinking about what happened outside, and unknowingly, tears began to flow down.


    Being locked up here also made her fear again, and her mind unknowingly returned to the scene where she was once a ve to the Draco. Now that she was locked up in this small room again, Ke couldn''t suppress it at all. Holding back the fear in his heart, tears began to fall slowly.


    But the few men outside didn''t notice what was going on inside at all. They were sitting here chatting to themselves, looking up at the sky, and chatting about their dreams for the future.


    A group of salted fish basically fantasize about how to stand up every day. Their dream is to be a member of the special forces, and then stand on a tall ship and overlook the entire world above the sea.


    "Let her go, and let her warn the revolutionary army. If there happens again, I won''t mind destroying their entire force!"


    While the team leader was still chatting about their ideals, a voice suddenly rushed into the minds of several of them.


    Several people who were still lifeless just now were looking at each other and looking at each other the next second.


    "Well...it seems...it seems to be the voice of His Majesty the King?"


    Klee opened his mouth and said excitedly. His lips had begun to tremble now, for fear that he might have heard wrongly. He looked at several other people with doubts in his tone.

 Chapter 469 A woman with short IQ

    <h4>Chapter 469 A woman with short IQ</h4>


    Several people looked at each other excitedly, with expressions ofplete surprise on their faces, and one person even started to look around constantly.


    "I told you to look at the hammer! His Majesty the King may be able to talk to us directly even in the pce hall!"


    The squad leader was speechless and pped the guy who just turned around to look around, shouting with hatred in his tone.


    "It was really His Majesty the King''s voice just now, but why did he let us release this woman from the revolutionary army?"


    Klee asked with some confusion.


    "Why? His Majesty the King''s orders must be obeyed unconditionally. Now His Majesty the King will remember our merits, so there is no hurry!"


    The squad leader quickly stood up, roared loudly, and immediately rushed to the door of the room where Ke was being held.


    When the door to the room opened, Ke was huddled in the corner of the room, her face covered with helpless tears, and the fear in her heart had already been infinitely magnified.


    "Are you abusing each other?"


    The team leader looked at Ke''s expression and looked at the others with a somewhat angry expression and asked.


    "Captain, from the time this little girl was caught here to now, we have been together, okay? If we are talking about bullying, it should be you, right? After all, from the beginning to now, you are the only one who has touched her!"


    One of the team members said with a confused look on his face. This little girl is obviously fine and everyone is together. Why does his captain do things so inconsistently?


    "That''s true, but we didn''t abuse her. Why is it like this?"


    The squad leader asked with some confusion.


    "Perhaps he is always like this? This must have nothing to do with us?"


    "But is this really good? If we let it out, will others think we did something?"


    "His Majesty the King just said to release her, but he didn''t say where to release her? Can''t we just send her to the ship and take her away?"


    ��


    Several people looked at Ke and said something to each other, and the words they said seemed to be so out of tune.


    The guest squatting in the corner looked at these people with some fear. Looking at the wordsmunicated between them, the woman felt even more dangerous.


    "You can leave. This is His Majesty the King''s order, but it is only for this time. The Tru Empire is not a ce where people cane and leave whenever they want! I hope you can understand.


    Before leaving, I would like to give you a word of advice. Go back and tell the leader of the revolutionary army that the Tru Empire is not a ce he can interfere with. If the next timees, His Majesty the King will not mind destroying you directly. "


    The team leader no longer struggled with how to release it. Instead, he looked at Ke with a serious face and said.


    "Are you really going to let me go?"


    Ke asked in fear and disbelief.


    "Of course, under normal circumstances, you shouldn''t have any chance, but now His Majesty the King has personally informed me to let you go, and we will personally send you to the ship heading to the North Seater, but remember Come on, this is the first andst time for you," the team leader said.


    "But my mission has not beenpleted yet. If I leave now, I will definitely be scolded."


    Kerra was a typical brainless person at the moment. After hearing this, the team leader patted his head helplessly. They really couldn''t figure out how this woman''s brain circuit worked.


    A woman like this can also be a cadre of the revolutionary army. It is estimated that the revolutionary army is just like this.


    "Don''t force me to do something I don''t want to do. To be honest, if I let you go, if it weren''t for His Majesty the King''s request, you would have absolutely no chance of leaving."


    The captain''s words this time were full of majesty. He really didn''t want to let this woman go in his heart. It was rare to have a chance to perform meritorious service in the country. Although letting him go didn''t matter to these people, at least they could get it. ording to His Majesty''s order, if the other party doesn''t lift her up, they don''t mind arresting her again.


    "I see!"


    Ke stood up tremblingly, with a hint of panic still in her eyes, but at least now she believed that the other party really wanted to let her go.


    "I will remember you."


    Kerra walked to the gate and turned around again to look at the team leader and the others as they spoke, but this time it looked too normal.


    "Klee, you and two people will be sent to the merchant ship heading to the North Sea. Keep an eye on this woman as she leaves. If there is any sign of her staying, kill her immediately!"


    The squad leader said in a low voice, at least he waspletely different from the one who had a kind expression just now.


    "Don''t worry, captain, we will definitely watch carefully!" Klee said.


    But Ke didn''t hear these words. He had already begun to quickly prepare to leave this ce. She didn''t even want to stay in the Tru Empire for a second.


    But the mission in this woman''s heart still made him hesitate. But while he was hesitating, the three people following him had already arrived beside her.


    Facing these three people following behind, Ke felt helpless, so she slowed down and walked slowly on the road.


    "Little girl, our captain has just given an order. If you show any sign of staying, we will directly kill you!" Klee said in a cold voice.


    He really couldn''t stand it. What exactly was this woman made of? Why are you still thinking aboutpleting your mission when you have reached this stage?


    Stay in the pce hall.


    Chang Nuo was also able to observe what happened this time very clearly, but he was quite curious. What on earth did the revolutionary army want to do when they stretched their hands so far?


    But there will naturally be someone to deal with the internal affairs of the Tru Empire.


    Regarding the Revolutionary Army matter, Chang Nuo doesn''t want to make a direct dispute now. There is no need. After the current matter is over, these guys will have plenty of time to deal with it.


    Ignoring what happened this time, Chang Nuo directly began to observe an electronic map in his hand. The location marked here was the Marinvando that would attract much attention next.


    At least in the future, this ce will be a turning point in everyone''s destiny.


    As the time approaches day by day, there are only three days left until the determined date.


    In the past three days, all the forces with ideas have begun to take action, or have begun to rapidly expand their territory, or have taken advantage of this opportunity to do what they want to do.


    Anyway, no matter what, they do it tacitly.

 Chapter 470 The Day Before the War Comes

    <h4>Chapter 470 The Day Before the War Comes</h4>


    One day before the execution day, the situation on the sea has begun to change.


    Among all the major forces, everyone is waiting and watching. At this time, various live broadcasts connected to the execution venue of the Navy Headquarters Base have begun to be debugged. However, in front of the live broadcast venue in each ce, even if it is an execution Before it even started, everyone was already pouring into the crowd.


    There is also the military headquarters base. In order to prevent Whitebeard from suddenly attacking, everyone has been preparing for it three days ago. These few days can be regarded as their most nervous days. Everyone is worried about the possible war that will happen next. Can be clear.


    At least for the people participating in the war this time, they knew exactly what kind of people they would face next.


    From another perspective, the tension of these people has obviously not reached a peak. In everyone''s knowledge, Whitebeard has not made a move for many years. Not only that, Whitebeard''s current age is also his oldest. obstacle.


    Many people are very disdainful of the most powerful man in the world. Maybe as Whitebeard was once the strongest, this title can indeed fit his identity, but from today''s perspective, Whitebeard, after all, He is over seventy years old. As a strong man in the previous era, few people have seen him take action in this era. Therefore, many people do not pay as much attention to Whitebeard under this title as they imagined.


    Even among the navies who came to participate in the war, except for those who are older and who may have experienced the end of the previous era, they are still rtively wary of Whitebeard. However, those young ones who have just joined the navy are looking at him one by one. It seems a little exaggerated.


    The cruelty of war may not have any image in their minds, but with so many people hugging each other for warmth, they are more excited inside. This may be the final reason.


    "Kerby, the war is about to start tomorrow. Let me see how your mentality is today?"


    Among the navy, two guys taking a break from their busy schedule were hiding on a high tower, sitting quietly with each other, and then looking at the sea in the distance and chatting.


    These two people may be familiar to many people. The guys the protagonist met when they first went to sea were not very old in the entire navy. They were all fifteen or sixteen years old. They just look a little bit younger now. Just a little stronger.


    But in terms of charging treasures, these two people are almost like cannon fodder when they enter the normal world. Among those who cane to this ce and participate in the war, which one has strength and is not the top existence of the navy?


    Kebi continued to look at the sea in the distance with a calm face. At this moment, there was no wind on the sea, and there were no waves on the sea. The blue sky and sea water intersected in the distance. Within their sight, All that can be seen is the water except the boats.


    "Borumabel, can you imagine what tomorrow''s war will be like?"


    Kirby asked in a slightly deeper voice.


    Anyway, he is not very optimistic about tomorrow''s events. Even if he wants to participate in the war, he can always imagine that scene.


    With so many people at the Navy Headquarters stationed here, one can tell just from the situation how brutal the next battle will be.


    Kebi is not like others. His childhood experience at least allows him to feel the next breath.


    "Kerby, what are you worried about when there are so many people at the Navy Headquarters? We can just hide behind it when the timees. It was Lieutenant General Garp who originally asked us toe over to watch the battle, and he didn''t ask us toe over to participate in the war. It won''t be far away anyway. Hiding somewhere, watching all this quietly, as long as we don''t take action, it should be no big deal."


    Bell Mabel said with a smile.


    It is true that ording to the strength of these two guys, it is impossible to participate in a war of this scale, but being able to stay and watch the battle is already a very dangerous thing.


    "Borumabel, look at the ce where we are now. It may be a different scene tomorrow. I really don''t know why we are fighting?" Kebi asked with some emotion.


    "These are high-level matters. As soldiers, we work hard to do our own things well. As for other things, there is no need to think too much or take care of them." Bellumeb said.


    "Hey, you two little guys are hiding there and beingzy again. It''s such an emergency now, why don''t youe down and help!"


    While the two were still sitting there chatting, a man under their butt tower who looked tall and thick and wore a navy justice robe stood directly there and yelled at the two of them.


    "You two bastards! What time is it now? Are you stillzy every day? Don''t you see that everyone else is busy?"


    Kebi and Kebi jumped down immediately after hearing the sound, but facing the guy in front of them, they could only lower their heads and listen to the other person''s instructions silently.


    "I''m very sorry, Lieutenant General Katsina!"


    Belumeber saluted with a sincere and serious look.


    "You two little guys, hurry up and help. When the war starts tomorrow, remember to stay far away. It''s okay. Don''t be in front."


    Lieutenant General Kazina''s voice softened slightly, and he looked at the two people with very concerned words.


    He knew very well what was going on with these two guys, so at such an emergency, he was able to give them some advice.


    Tomorrow, no one will have the energy to take care of them. Whether they live or die, they can only depend on their own fate.


    "Don''t worry, Lieutenant General Kazina, the two of us will definitely obey your orders when the timees." Kebi said.


    Facing these two little guys, Lieutenant General Katsina did not say anything more, but before leaving, he turned around and looked at the two people again and said, "Tomorrow''s battlefield is not a child''s y. No one wants to have such a war, find a way to protect yourself!"


    Looking at the departing figure, Kebi didn''t know why, but his heart felt even heavier.


    It didn''t matter to Belumeber. Anyway, he felt that he was just here to watch the battle and not participate in the war. No matter how the opponent fought, he would definitely not be hurt.


    At least that''s how they view it on the periphery. Many people have the same mentality as them, thinking that this war will not affect them at all, which indirectly proves how ignorant they are about war.

 Chapter 471 The Navy’s War Arrangements

    <h4>Chapter 471 The Navy��s War Arrangements</h4>


    In the conference room of the Navy Headquarters.


    As the remaining senior officials at the Navy Headquarters, almost all the lieutenant generals and generals rushed into the conference room.


    Of course, except for a few people who need to be responsible for the outside, they still stay in the front to make arrangements. Most of the others stay inside and begin to ept the dispatches of this war.


    "The war ising. Tomorrow will be a big test for us. After this war is over, no matter whether we win or lose, as the marshal of the navy, I have a responsibility that I cannot shirk. So before the meeting begins, I will announce something directly at that time.


    After this war is over, I will directly step down as the marshal of the navy. This war will also determine many things. The specific battlefield operations will need to be maintained by you. The prestige of the navy must be maintained in this war. type it out! "


    Marshal Warring States stood in the most important position in the conference room, looking at everyone domineeringly and said.


    This conference room is already packed with people, even in the corners there are people with different identities.


    It is also enough to prove how much the navy values ??this war. It would be okay if it wins. The key is that if it loses, the navy will plummet.


    Not only will control of the new world bepletely lost, but the security of the world may no longer be maintained.


    Marshal of the Warring States Period stared at everyone with dazzling eyes. However, all of them were very high-spirited to fight at this moment. In fact, most of the people sitting in this conference room had not experienced any kind of painful war, and most of them had not experienced any kind of painful war. This was the first time for them to encounter such a situation. The usual petty fights between pirates could be consideredpletely over at this moment.


    "Tomorrow''s n has been sent to everyone. It would be fine if the Whitebeard Pirates didn''te, but judging from the current news, this is obviously impossible, so please look carefully at your hands. The n, when the timees, everyone must be sure and protect their positions. No matter what, this time we need to take down the Whitebeard Pirates in one fell swoop."


    Akainu stood up and looked at the people present with a serious expression.


    At this moment, in front of all of them and in their hands, there is indeed a n that does not look too thick. This will also be the key to determining their next victory or defeat.


    "The most reliable news now is that the Whitebeard Pirates have all entered Fish-Man Ind yesterday. It is expected that they will all arrive at the first half of the Grand Line tonight at thetest. The execution time is set for tomorrow. It��s eleven o��clock in the morning, so everyone is getting ready tonight and have a good rest to face tomorrow��s war!��


    Marshal Warring States said this time, he put his hands directly on the table. His hair, which was still ck, now has a lot of white hair.


    "In order to prevent the Whitebeard Pirates from taking Ace away directly from Impel Down City, ten Vice Admirals will be sent directly to Impel Down City tomorrow at the level of the Demon ying Order to bring them over to Impel Down City. Whatever happens during this period In any matter, bringing the criminals to the Navy Headquarters is the most important thing. I hope those involved can understand the importance of this incident." Sengoku said again.


    "How should we deal with the risks that may arise in the periphery this time? Is it possible that our navy should also handle this kind of thing?" Qingzhi askedzily.


    "As for this, you can rest assured that the World Government has deployed secret forces and will find ways to stop all forces that maye to assist the Whitebeard Pirates!" Sengoku said.


    "Secret force? Is it possible that Chengdu has reached this time and still can''t inform us what the situation is like?"


    Qingzhi stood up directly and asked with a slightly serious look on his face.


    "Aoji! You only need to be responsible for tomorrow''s frontal battlefield, and the World Government will naturally control the rest!"


    Garp said in a low voice.


    Everyone present was actually at a loss. As for what kind of special forces the World Government had, they had no idea.


    Now we can only hope and believe the words of these senior people. They have already used all their strength to deal with the Whitebeard Pirates. If other forces join in, they really don''t know how to solve it by then.


    "I wonder if I could ask a question?"


    Kizaru asked, tilting his head and looking at Sengoku in confusion.


    "exin!"


    "So far, has the World Government reported the movements of other forces? Will there be arge force that may assist the Whitebeard Pirate Ship?" Kizaru asked.


    "Let mee over and say this! The CP department of the World Government has sent news that any major force that can threaten this war has almost no possibility of taking action. The other four emperors are still in their own territory. Among the territories, Kaido of the Beast Pirates has now begun to fight for territory, but this will not have any impact on the next war of our navy."


    Lieutenant General He stood up and replied.


    Any news they get now is told to them by the World Government. As for the authenticity of the news, they can only bite the bullet and believe it.


    After all, it is impossible for the World Government to do anything in this matter. The Navy and the World Government are essentially one. If the Navy suffers heavy losses, it will not be a good thing for the World Government.


    "I have finished asking my questions, but as for the arrangements for tomorrow, I took a look at the content above. I think it is better to adapt to changes on the battlefield and not to arrange things too rigidly. So many arrangements have already been made. , if we can��t win this time, it can only mean other things.��


    Kizaru said, his words were not directed at anyone, but thest sentence was actually very suggestive, which meant that he did not believe the news from the World Government at all.


    There are so manyrge forces in the world now, and if any one of them makes a different move, the bnce of the war will most likely favor the Whitebeard Pirates in the end.


    As for the secret force of the World Government they call, in this case, as admirals, none of them have a clear idea of ??what kind of people they are?


    What abilities do they have and what kind of things are they responsible for? This is a nk te for everyone.


    Just relying on the little information given, wanting them to face so many people directly on the battlefield is really irresponsible from some perspectives.

 Chapter 472 Problems in Impel City

    <h4>Chapter 472 Problems in Impel City</h4>


    As the marshal, Warring States stood on top, and he could easily hear the gist of what the people below were saying, but sometimes even though he was the marshal, he felt helpless about it all.


    "Marshal Sengoku, although I believe there will be no idents tomorrow, at least for our group of people, we need to be informed of what the World Government is preparing for? Who are they preparing for in the end?"


    Akainu rarely opened his mouth to ask, mainly because he discovered that something was wrong. In his understanding, the World Government did have special forces, and he did not understand what the situation was like with these people.


    But now just to protect this pirate group, Akainu doesn''t believe that the World Government would send such secret personnel.


    This doubt is not only shared by one person, but other personnel including the three generals want to know this question.


    "There are some things that you shouldn''t know. You don''t need to know. This time our main goal is just to target the Whitebeard Pirates. No matter what means we use, we must ensure the final victory of the navy. No matter what the oue is, I will be the marshal in the end."mitment.��


    Marshal of the Warring States Period said domineeringly. This time he would not give the people below any reason to consult. Maybe he should understand something, so in the end he would resign as marshal in order to win the war. .


    Just because of this sentence, everyone was indeed speechless. After all, Warring States, as the marshal, had already said such words, and they could not continue to ask questions without being polite.


    But the doubt in his heart will definitely not disappear with the wind. The next day is the day when Ace will be executed. These few days are destined not to be so peaceful, let alone those who are lieutenant generals, even if they are... The three generals of the navy were all extremely anxious.


    "Now that everyone has no doubts, let''s start arranging thebat content. Every arrangement before has been implemented by everyone, so this time it is just a repetition.


    So far, the Navy headquarters base has more than 100,000bat troops and nearly 200,000 logistics troops. However, ording to our investigation, the Whitebeard Pirates only have more than 1,600 crew members. Even though Including the affiliated forces, in the end, the Whitebeard Pirates only had a maximum of 10,000 people to participate in this war.


    So we must go all out next, and the main response direction will alle from Whitebeard''s side. Don''t underestimate him in the end because he is older, let alone because Whitebeard''s body is not that strong now. .


    I can say this now, even if Whitebeard is dying, his final strength is definitely higher than everyone here.


    So from the beginning of that day, most of the absolute forces must be suppressed on Whitebeard. As long as this old guy is dealt with, the rest of the things will be rtively easy to handle. "


    The Warring States Marshal stood at the top and spoke, his words full of confidence.


    It is true that in order to prepare for this war, the current Navy Headquarters has a total of more than 300,000 people participating. However, inparison, the Whitebeard Pirates only have about 10,000 people. How can such a scale be possible? Comparable to the powerful force of the Navy?


    But Warring States had no such idea. He was confident, but the fear in his words was still particrly obvious.


    Especially the fear of Whitebeard is even more obvious.


    "Bang!!!"


    Just as Marshal Warring States finished speaking, and not even a minute passed, while everyone was still looking forward to the next work arrangements, the door that originally belonged to the conference room was opened directly, and the sound of hitting the chair next to it directly sent out a powerful vibration. .


    "Marshal Warring States, I''m really sorry, there''s an emergencying from Impel Down City!!"


    Under everyone''s gaze, a guy in navy uniform rushed in as quickly as possible.


    The clothes he wore were no different from those of the navy. To be precise, he was essentially a member of the navy.


    "What happened?"


    Warring States suddenly felt as if something was wrong, and asked directly after the other party finished speaking.


    "Hold~ I''m sorry, Marshal, over there at the Impulse City, the Straw Hat kid broke in somehow. He is now in the Impel City, moving quickly from the first floor to the bottom."


    The clerk who ran in spoke quickly, perhaps because he was too nervous and his words were trembling.


    "Luffy????"


    After Garp heard the name, he stood up immediately, his eyes widened. Different from the gloomy expression before, at this moment he felt shocked again.


    "Garp, it''s your grandson again. What on earth are your family doing every day?"


    The Warring States Marshal angrily pped the table and looked at Garp and roared loudly.


    He really couldn''t believe that someone could actually enter Impel Down City from the outside.


    After all, since records began until now, except for me, a golden lion, who ran out 20 years ago, there has never been a break-in from the outside in Impel Down City.


    But now he actually breaks into a guy in such a period, let alone a guy who is not very strong?


    "Hahahaha~, what do those guys in Impel Down City do?"


    Garpughed loudly, but thisughter was too vicissitudes of life.


    So far, he has only two grandsons in total. One is destined to die in everyone''s eyes, and the other is now running towards death.


    What kind of ce is Impel Down? As long as everyone here can understand it, so from the vicissitudes of hisughter, others naturally have no idea.


    But the destion revealed in the words can actually be felt by others.


    "It''s really surprising. Pushing City was rebuilt, and this was the first one to break in. I''m really curious about how the Pushing City is managed? How did this little guy get in?" Lieutenant General He was a little confused. asked.


    "Is now still the time to discuss these things? Magen will definitely handle the matters in Impel Down. Let''s continue to discuss the next situation..."


    The Warring States Marshal said that he was actually not worried at all about the sudden situation in Push City. Not to mention other things, the warden in Push City was no less powerful than a general. In a way, he is much more powerful than the general.

 Chapter 473 The answer left for Marco

    <h4>Chapter 473 The answer left for Marco</h4>


    In fact, these people were not too worried about the situation in Impel Down City. They were just slightly surprised when they heard someone suddenly entered Impel Down City.


    It was indeed as they thought. From the beginning to now, someone was able to break into Impel Down City. This was definitely an unexpected thought.


    But how could Luffy get in? In Impel Down City, Magen''s strength is absolutely powerful. Another point is that Magen''s domineering power cannot sense the presence of people.


    What kind of situation could such an ident ur this time?


    At this moment, all the processes in the prison were almost exactly the same as those in the original plot. After Hancock put Luffy in, she hadpleted her mission.


    The only difference is that Hancock now doesn''t have the slightest emotion for Luffy, and even just seeing the pirate''s face already makes her feel a little unhappy.


    If it weren''t for the mission requirements nned in advance, Hancock probably wouldn''t even want to see Luffy''s face.


    So after all this was over, Hancock was ready to leave this big prison without even turning his head.


    The whole world of Shichibukai has been summoned by the navy long ago. Are theying here this time to make soy sauce or to actually participate in the war? So far, it is estimated that even the Navy itself does not know.


    "Now that the person has been delivered, does His Majesty the King have any other ns and arrangements?"


    Outside Impel City, Hancock stood on a navy warship, and a very beautiful woman next to him asked directly.


    However, this woman was Gion who had set out to the New World with Changnuo and his group before. Even Hancock himself probably had not thought about it. She finally chose to take over her, and to his surprise, she was a quasi-admiral in the navy.


    "To be honest, I''m really surprised to see you? When did Emperor Trudy actually have someone like you?"


    Hancock''s tone was not so calm, but he was quite surprised when he looked at Gion''s face now.


    When I first thought about it, Gion, who should not have been responsible for summoning the Shichibukai at all, chose to summon Hancock very unusually. However, Gion, who was already a Navy Commodore, no one would move towards other people. aspects to consider.


    But now it seems that this matter has been abnormal from the very beginning. Everything seems to be under the control of a big hand, carrying out various screenings.


    "Hancock, some things don''t have to be what you think. I just admire Emperor Tru''s character. Although this is the first time to help you, it is also thest time! I believe that the movement caused by the push will definitely not Xiao, are you not worried about that guy''s failure?"


    Gion asked with a smile.


    "What''s there to worry about? Whether it seeds or not has no impact on the Tru Empire, and it has no impact on our Nine Snakes Ind. Although sess can be a surprise, failure is not inevitable."


    Hancock said in a cold voice.


    "Although I say that, you still need to hide behind tomorrow''s battle. Don''t let the Whitebeard guy''s attack beat you to death."


    Gion said sarcastically. The two of them seemed to be at odds with each other. They were not a family at all, but they began to get jealous.


    Hancock originally had a cold image, and now it was even more impossible for him to lose his image by a few words from the woman in front of him.


    "You''d better take care of yourself! Don''t wait until the war is over and all you see is your body." Hancock said with a sneer.


    There are not many people on this ship. Although it is a naval warship, the normal reserve personnel should be about 500 people, but now there are only ten or twenty people on this ship. Excluding those who are all working in the cabin, They were the only two people who could walk around leisurely and contentedly.


    Now in their sight, Impel Down City still exists. As soon as this group of people came in, the Straw Hat boy came in with them. No matter how smart they were, they could guess that it must be rted to them.


    The person apanying him could guess it, but as the person in charge of the entire prison, how could he not think of it?


    But what kind of situation is it that makes everyone turn a blind eye to this matter? Instead, he allowed the Straw Hat boy toe to Impel Down and roam around unscrupulously?


    The reason seems to be that no one pays attention to it. Impel Down does not pay attention to it, the Navy does not pay attention to it, and even the World Government has nothing to say about this matter.


    At another corner of the first half of the Grand Line, a series of pirate ships gradually emerged from the sea one by one. As they surfaced, the huge bubbles wrapped around the ship copsed instantly.


    But at this time, all the ships had begun to gradually stabilize their navigation routes. The huge Moby Dick at the front began to take overall responsibility for guiding the navigation of all ships.


    On the deck of the Moby Dick, in such a huge space, so far only Marco and Whitebeard were sitting opposite each other.


    "If you have any questions now, just ask? I will tell you everything I know."


    Whitebeard said with a sad expression. His body was now covered with various needles, as if he would have to ept his loneliness in the next moment.


    "Dad, I just want to know what kind of deal you made with the Tru Empire? What changes will happen if you save Ace this time?"


    Marco asked seriously and seriously.


    After all, these questions have been bothering him for a long time, and he has never had the opportunity to ask them before. As long as Whitebeard makes a decision, Marco will not have any objections.


    But these doubts will gradually be hidden deep in his heart, and these doubts have been bothering him for a long time.


    What role does the Tru Empire y? Why cooperate with the Whitebeard Pirates? What is behind this war?


    All these doubts were the final topic that made Marco burst into doubts in his heart.


    "Marco! I can indeed answer you these questions. The cooperation between the Toru Empire and the Whitebeard Pirates, or just the cooperation with me, Whitebeard, is mainly reflected in this war.


    I don''t feel like Toru is too concerned about other things? I only discovered this after thest time True Boy came to my ce.


    This country and this little guy are definitely not as simple as we seem. You also know what we are asking for this time, which is to ensure Ace''s safety no matter what, and in return, I will use my own life to Let��s explore what exactly is the territory of the world government? "


    Whitebeard said in a long tone, staring calmly at Marco in front of him.

 Chapter 474 Blue Pill

    <h4>Chapter 474 Blue Pill</h4>


    As the captain of the First Team, Marco''s strength is beyond doubt. He will be the next person most able to ept the position of captain of the Whitebeard Pirates. Whitebeard also has high hopes for him.


    "Dad, is it possible that things have to be done this way?"


    Marco asked with a gloomy look on his face. He really couldn''t ept Whitebeard''s statement that he wanted to use his life to explore one thing. After decades of getting along day and night, although they were not biological father and son, their rtionship had be better than this. .


    "You must also know, Dad, I am a person from the previous era. My biggest wish is that my future destination is not to lie on the ship, but to have a grand ending. This is the ultimate destination for pirates who yearn for freedom. , as my son, you don��t have to feel any sadness!��


    Whitebeard said gentlyfortingly.


    "Under such circumstances, can you be sure that Emperor Tru can rescue Ace?"


    Marco shouted in a low voice with some anger.


    He really didn''t believe what Chang Nuo said. If even the Whitebeard Pirates couldn''t do something, why could he, Emperor Tru, do it?


    What we are facing is a war, not a small fight between pirate groups. Anything that cannot be said and done is not a matter of one person''s life.


    "Marco, what do you think Emperor Tru''s strength is?"


    Whitebeard asked.


    "It''s hard to say yet, but judging from his previous battles, his strength is indeed strong, but it''s hard toment on how strong it is," Marco said.


    "From now on, the Whitebeard Pirates will be left to you. If you don''t want to live such a wandering life, going to the Tohru Empire may be a good choice."


    Whitebeard said.


    "Dad, don''t worry, nothing will happen to us this time, except to save Ace! This is definitely not a problem for our Whitebeard Pirates."


    Marco forced a smile, but the tears in the corners of his eyes hadpletely betrayed him.


    What Whitebeard said werepletely hisst words. He no longer had any hope about whether he coulde back safely after setting off this time.


    Basically, he was heading towards the end of his life, but as his son, Marco was indeed in a state of copse at the moment.


    When he finished speaking, Marco couldn''t help but cover his eyes, but tears still flowed from between his fingers.


    He now understands clearly, what does this war mean next?


    But even so, what if we know the result? But it only added to the sadness.


    "Marco, the reason why I tell you these things today is to let you know that the next Whitebeard Pirates will be left to you. In the future, without dad''s existence, the new world may not be the same. It is not as peaceful as you imagined, and it is impossible for the Whitebeard Pirates to return to thefortable life they once had.


    From now on, for everything, you need to rely on yourself and your brothers and sisters to survive! "


    Whitebeard said calmly, as if nothing happened.


    What he said to Marco was no different from ordinary chatter.


    However, Marco was not the only one to hear their words. At least at the corner of the deck, there were two people covering their mouths and trying hard not to make any sound.


    But the tears also flowed down unsatisfactoryly.


    Marco''s body, which was originally sitting there, finally changed to a kneeling position. He covered his face and cried bitterly. Although there was still one day before the real start of the war, the pain still made him feel a little bit. Can not ept.


    "Don''t worry, Dad, I will definitely do everything well!"


    Marco shouted loudly, tears and snot flowing down at the same time, and the expression on his face was like that of a child of several years old.


    "In that case, let us, the Whitebeard Pirates, have a good fight. At least, other pirates or navy in the new world can clearly know the prestige of our Whitebeard Pirates, and also let me Whitebeard can have a legendary ending!"


    Whitebeard raised his head slightly and said with a smile on his face.


    "Dad..."


    Marco didn''t know what to say at the moment, but facing these situations, in the end he could only look at it with an optimistic attitude.


    "What exactly is the trump card of the World Government? Why can you even say such a thing?"


    Marco asked again.


    ��To be honest, Dad doesn��t know, but the World Government has too many cards, and what we may encounter this time is just one of them!


    Truboy must have known something, but he didn''t say it in the end! "


    Whitebeard suddenly felt a little mncholy. Although he had been a pirate for decades and had dealt with the World Government and the Navy so many times, the World Government apparently relied on the Navy as a security support. At least the internal details, As veteran pirates for decades, they still know it quite well.


    What happened to their former captain, Rocks? In the end, it was just announced that Garp and Roger would join forces, but is this really the case? No one has seen it, and everyone can only acquiesce in the end.


    "So what can we do?"


    Marco asked.


    "What you can do now is to protect your brothers and sisters. Even if the Whitebeard Pirates are without me, they will still be able to ride on this sea in the future." Whitebeard''s words were a bit harsh, and he didn''t want to see it. Seeing the expression on his face now that his son, whom he values ??most, looks like this.


    "Don''t worry, Dad, I will definitely do this."


    Marco wiped away his tears while speaking, and said with a serious expression.


    Whitebeard didn''t speak, he just lowered his head slightly and looked at a small blue bottle in his hand. This thing was given to him by Chang Nuo before.


    He looked at the little thing in front of him and seemed to have made some decision in his heart.


    But in the end, he wasn''t sure whether this thing would be useful? From some perspectives, Whitebeard is still willing to believe this kind of thing.


    A small pill can have such a big effect. After raising his head, Whitebeard couldn''t help but sigh.


    The sea in the distance looks so calm. In this huge sea, all that can be seen is pirate ships sailing on this calm sea.

 Chapter 475 The Capital of Seven Waters

    <h4>Chapter 475 The Capital of Seven Waters</h4>


    In the other direction, Chang Nuo stood at the top of the Seven Waters Capital. Looking at the seawater flowing down from the top, he felt like he was standing on the Upside Down Mountain.


    In fact, there is almost no difference between the two situations. This ce can indeed be called the most prosperous venue in the first half of the Grand Line, including the city nning, which can make people feel the artistic beauty.


    Even if you stay in the sky and overlook everything in the Capital of Seven Waters, the tranquility it leaves you is enough to make you feel infinitely perfect.


    After observing for a while, Changnuo began to slowly fall to the ground. Most of the traffic here was above the water, and the overall look was quite spectacr.


    "It seems that the original plot has really changed a lot!"


    As soon as hended, Chang Nuo already met a guy who surprised him.


    "Special...Emperor Tru!!"


    The speaker''s mouth twitched in disbelief. He had two huge horns on his head, and was wearing a yellow spotted top and rtively normal shorts underneath.


    Chang Nuo still has some impression of this guy. He was CP9 in the original plot, but now he is staying here with nothing to do, which means that he and Luffy havepletely missed it in the original plot.


    Or it can be more confirmed, because now that Robin''s identity has been changed, the other party no longer dares to act rashly.


    "If I remember correctly, your guy''s name should be Bruno, right?"


    Chang Nuo looked at the guy in front of him and asked in a faint tone.


    "Why are you here? And why do you know me?"


    Bruno looked at the other party with a look of disbelief and even some horror in his eyes.


    "I didn''t expect that your cp 9 person is still here, which does surprise me!"


    Chang Nuo said lightly, not interested in the people here at CP 9 at all, so what if the other party saw him? It has already reached this time, and the Tru Empire canpletely ignore anyone, let alone this group of CP personnel who are extremely weak.


    "What exactly do you want to do?"


    Bruno said, subconsciously wanting to use his devil power to prepare to leave, but the next second he was even more horrified to find that his devil fruit power waspletely unusable in front of the opponent.


    The devil fruit ability of the Gate Fruit canpletely ignore any obstacles and directly enter a different space. This ability actually belongs to a system of space devil fruit abilities. It is nothing more than that the ability to develop is too weak.


    "The Gate Fruit, one of the devil fruit abilities and space abilities, if developed well, is really good, but the people who use it are terrible!


    I have no interest in you, so you don��t have to worry! "


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile, turned around and walked around the other party. When he walked behind him, Chang Nuo said again, "If I remember correctly, you should have opened a tavern here? I wonder if you can take me there to drink." Two drinks?��


    "no problem!"


    Bruno said that he didn''t know why he couldn''t refuse the other party. Anyway, the other party just made such a request and he agreed directly without knowing it.


    It all seemed so casual, as if the two people had known each other for a long time.


    Bruno may not have any right to refuse at all, so he could only use his strong body and start walking slowly in front.


    However, his so-called bar was not far from where they were, and could actually be seen from where they were.


    The name of this bar is also called Bruno''s Bar. It can be considered a medium-sized venue in the Capital of Seven Waters. The area inside should be able to amodate about a hundred or ten people.


    In terms of space, it is simr to the ckmail bar in the Chambord Inds, but the people inside are rtively more polite, unlike the ckmail bar in the Chambord Inds, where almost all the people inside are making a lot of noise.


    Although the Capital of Seven Waters also gathers all kinds of pirates, at least in some respects, the quality of the people here is higher.


    "what do you want to drink?"


    Bruno asked calmly.


    "Juste here casually. I''m waiting for two people here. Don''t worry too much."


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    After the words fell, Chang Nuo walked straight towards the innermost seat. There was a circr booth. There was no one in the seat. There were not many peopleing to drink at this time, but most of them were. It''s concentrated on the periphery.


    As soon as they sat down, Bruno came over with a ss of wine. The top was sky blue and the bottom was as clear as water. There was also a slice of lemon on the top of the goblet, although I didn''t know what it looked like. of drinks, but just judging from the color, it does make people feel quite good.


    "This is a cup of bruschino, which I made myself. It tastes pretty good to us. Although I don''t know what you like, I can only rmend this!"


    After Bruno brought the ss of wine, he did not show any respect or restraint. Instead, he talked like a friend.


    "This is already very good. I don''t have too many requirements for these things, but having said that, in the CP department, you CP 9 are the lowest level people. If you can,e to the Tru Empire, maybe I can let you Have a better future!��


    Chang Nuo picked up the wine ss and looked at the person in front of him, and said in a calm tone.


    "Maybe there will be a chance! But it''s definitely not possible right now?"


    Bruno said.


    "Oh~, I didn''t expect Emperor Tru to be such a person, young and generous..."


    Through the ability of the psychic devil fruit, Changnuo can directly see through Bruno''s heart, and can even reveal what he wants to say in his mind.


    But listening to the emotion in the other person''s heart, in fact, this is not what many people think in their hearts.


    Once you enter the gate of the world government, many things, ideas and practices begin to be out of your control.


    Chang Nuo is not arrogant enough to think that the World Government is a bunch of trash. At least their hidden strength may even be far greater than the navy.


    "Maybe there will really be a chance!"


    Changnuo replied to Bruno calmly.


    Although these people in CP 9 each have their own abilities, from a practical point of view, aren''t they alreadypletely under the influence of the world government?


    Of course, Chang Nuo was very uninterested in all this. He gently tasted the mixed wine in the wine ss, with a slightly satisfied expression on his face and nodded.


    "You can taste it slowly here, and you can call me anytime if you need it." Bruno said, and then began to slowly retreat to his position at the bar.

 Chapter 476 The Secret of Cp 9

    <h4>Chapter 476 The Secret of Cp 9</h4>


    Chang Nuo was sitting here drinking alone. He didn''t even have five minutes before and after. At this time, several strangers had already arrived at the bar.


    Bruno knew their identities very well. After all, these were their Cp 9 characters, but he didn''t expect that they would alle together at this moment.


    After they came in, it onlysted three to five seconds, and the eyes of a group of people began to focus on Chang Nuo, who was sitting in the back.


    Judging from their expressions, it was not as if Bruno informed themter. It seemed more like they had made an appointment to meet here in advance and identally bumped into this scene.


    The image of a man standing at the front, with a bird on his shoulders and dressed in a suit and leather shoes, is the most in line with the structure of CP personnel currently.


    After all, most of the clothes these intelligence agencies wear every day are of this style. Chang Nuo has a deep impression of him, and he even remembers his name very clearly.


    "what''s the situation?"


    Rob Luqi asked with a bird on his shoulder.


    "Not sure? It just came like this."


    Bruno said calmly. At this moment, he had two bottles of wine in his hand and was ready to start debugging. From beginning to end, this guy''s behavior was very casual.


    "Then what should we do? Should we leave now, or should we go over and say hello?"


    The tall and thin guy with a long nose and a square face opened his mouth and asked directly.


    "Forget it! Our identities have been exposed. It doesn''t matter if we say hello. Even if we don''t say hello, it doesn''t matter. Our mission in the Capital of Seven Waters is over anyway."


    Rob Luqi said, looking at the people sitting inside again.


    "Boom~"


    While they were talking, the door of the bar opened again. With the buzzer on the door of the bar, their conversation was forced to end, and they all looked over.


    "Nico Robin??"


    The guy with a huge head and a zipper-shaped mouth said directly in surprise.


    "It seems you all know me? What an honor!"


    Listening to the other party calling her, Robin smiled sweetly and greeted several people. She didn''t even know who the other party was, and maybe she thought these people should be from the Tru Empire.


    "I really didn''t expect that the CP personnel of the World Government would all gather together!"


    Enelu, who was walking behind, said with a mocking look on his face.


    They have experienced this ce before and don''t know much about what actually exists in the Capital of Seven Waters.


    It''s just that after the Straw Hats arrived in the Capital of Seven Waters, they didn''t stay here for too long. Although most of the processes were the same, at least they hadn''t encountered anything like these people in the CP department.


    "Lieutenant General of the Toru Empire, it is said that he is a natural thunder fruit user. Although he is only a lieutenant general, his strength is alreadyparable to that of a general. It is really an honor to meet you!"


    Rob Luqi nodded and said, as if he was not surprised at all.


    It is true that Emperor Tru has already appeared in this ce. It is normal for someone else to appear in their country.


    "I didn''t expect you to know me, but now is not the time to chat with you. Maybe I wille and ask you for adviceter when I have the opportunity." Enilu said with a smile, then ignored them and walked straight to the innermost part. past.


    Robin smiled and nodded, and then followed Enelu''s footsteps. Under the eyes of several people, they walked straight in the direction of Chang Nuo.


    "I''ll give you two sses of wine first, and we''ll talk about the restter!" Bruno said to his friends.


    As soon as he finished speaking, Bruno skillfully picked up the two sses of wine in front of him and began to walk inside.


    "Should we do something? Is it possible to just watch helplessly like this?"


    asked the long-nosed Kaku.


    "I will inform the leader of CP 9 about the matters here. The rest is no longer our responsibility, not to mention that even if we have that idea, we can''t control it." Rob Luqi said.


    "This time I quite agree with what Lu Qi said. Even if we have this idea, we still need to see how much strength we have. Who is he? That can shock the whole world casually. people."


    Said the weird guy with white hair.


    "We won''t care about the things here for now, but our CP9 mission is over. What''s left is to think about how to hand over the mission when we go back?"


    Rob Luqi said with a serious face, this time the mission ended in a perfect failure, and there was not even the slightest possibility of aeback, so even now in a ce like this, exposing his identity will not have the slightest impact. .


    "Your Majesty the King!"


    At the edge of the innermost booth, Luo Bin and the others had just walked over. Facing Chang Nuo who was tasting the wine, Robin shouted softly with a smile.


    "How are you? Are you okay after not seeing each other for half a year?"


    Chang Nuo gently put down the wine ss in his hand, raised his head slightly, looked at Robin affectionately and asked.


    "Everything is going well. Do you want me to tell you what happened along the way?"


    With that said, Robin sat down directly next to Chang Nuo, the smile on his face never stopped.


    "There''s still someone here, okay! Can you guys pay attention to me? I''ve been sailing with Sister Robin for half a year, and it''s very boring."


    While these two people were still talking to each other, Enilu came over and said with a dissatisfied look on his face.


    It is true that this guy usually stays alone on the Infinity, and the only one he canmunicate with is Hai Ling. The dull and boring life for more than half a year has almost driven this guy crazy.


    "Oh! You''re here too!"


    Chang Nuo said nonchntly.


    "Your Majesty, I have worked hard for more than half a year. Even if I am treated differently, you can''t do this."


    Enelu shouted aggrievedly.


    "Guest, I don''t know what makes you behave like this, but you can just taste the specialties of our bar!"


    Just as Anilu finished speaking, Bruno came over with two sses of wine.


    His tone was friendly and gentle,pletely unrted to his body shape, and even had a business service attitude.


    Maybe if this guy is not a CP person, he will definitely be a good hand in business.


    "You are also quite funny. You are a good person in the CP department. I never expected that your business would be so good!"


    Enelu muttered in his mouth, but he still took the wine ss directly and honestly.


    It was only in the morning at this time, and there were not many people in the bar. They were just sitting there in twos and threes chatting.

 Chapter 477 Begin to welcome the coming war

    <h4>Chapter 477 Begin to wee theing war</h4>


    After Bruno left, the three of them sat here quietly. Robin leaned against Chang Nuo, and Enel could only stay there alone and drink slowly.


    "It''s been a hard period of time. You can go backter and take a good rest at home for two years. You can also spend some time with Michelle."


    Changnuo stroked Robin''s hair and said meaningfully.


    "Huh? Two years?"


    "What''s wrong?" Chang Nuo looked at Robin''s somewhat surprised expression, let go of the hand that was stroking her, and looked at the other person''s face and asked.


    "It''s been two years, but my partners still need to gather together!"


    "So this is what you are talking about, but you don''t have to think about it. Your friends will get together in two years. Each of them is too weak. Now entering the new world, it''s just Cannon fodder, go back patiently and wait for two years, and I will ask them to send you back by then." Chang Nuo said.


    "That''s it! I understand, but do you have anything to do next?"


    Robin now knows almost nothing about the outside world, let alone the war that is about to happen tomorrow. The information she knows is almost exactly the same as what the Straw Hats know.


    It is normal to ask such doubts now.


    "There''s nothing special. You can go backter. Enelu and I still have things to do." Chang Nuo said.


    "whats the matter?"


    After hearing this, Enilu became excited instantly. He immediately put down the wine ss in his hand and began to look at the other party eagerly.


    "You will knowter, now is not the time to discuss these things." Chang Nuo said.


    "Oh, I see."


    "Michelle can already walk. Please keep herpany when you go back. You have a partner who is also in the South China Sea area. Don''t worry about their safety. If you want to see it then, you can go there, but I suggest it''s best Still don��t want it.��


    Changnuo ignored Enelu''s slight disappointment and continued to speak to Robin.


    "Who?" Robin asked nervously.


    After all, she had seen all her friends dispersed with her own eyes. Up to now, no one knew the situation of these people, and it was not even clear whether they were dead or alive.


    "It''s the little civet cat in your team. If you want to see it when you go back, ask others to take you there." Chang Nuo said.


    "OK!"


    Robin did not refuse, but answered this sentence thoughtfully.


    But so far, she doesn''t understand what is the intention behind this matter? Is this matter a game between these big forces? Or there is another theory, anyway, until now, Robin knows nothing about these things.


    In the blink of an eye.


    By afternoon, only Eniro and Changnuo were left standing quietly on the deck of the Infinity.


    The expressions of the two of them were not as happy as expected. Instead, they looked ahead with serious faces.


    The entire ship was also moving forward rapidly. Although they did not need to control the course, it would take at least nearly a day for them to set off from the Capital of Seven Waters and reach their destination.


    Although they are a member of the World Government, and they are still a first-ss country, they have no way to use the general waterway of the navy. Although they use the direction of the ocean current to move forward quickly, this speed is rtively endless. In terms of numbers, the two are actually not much different.


    "Your Majesty, what are we going to do on this trip?"


    Enelu stood on the deck and finally couldn''t help but asked with doubts in his heart.


    After all, no one informed Enilu about this incident. Although he was old, he only knew what kind of things might happen, but he waspletely unaware of more detailed matters.


    "War ising!"


    Chang Nuo said these four words calmly, with a slightly vicissitude in his tone. Although he said it so easily, the actual operation was moreplicated than ordinary people.


    "It seems so!"


    Enelu murmured to himself. He had already guessed it. After all, he had stayed in the Tru Empire for so many years. Even though he didn''t know what happened this time in advance, he didn''t feel the slightest surprise.


    "Then what do we need to do then? Directly participate in the war? Or be a bystander?" Enelu asked.


    "Maybe there are, who knows? We''ll see for details when the timees." Chang Nuo said.


    "Will a lot of people die from this?"


    "Maybe!"


    ��


    The two of them talked for a long time, and the topics theymunicated with each other were actually about the things that needed to be prepared for this war.


    Although the Tru Empire had already made preparations, Chang Nuo still did not have the determination to win this time.


    The main reason is that he simply doesn''t know where the World Government''s back-up force lies. Can Whitebeard be more effective? Or are there other external factors that may affect the oue of this battle?


    This is no longer the time to reflect one''s personal strength, but more importantly, to reflect one''s strategy. What''s the use of being strong? A slight mistake may lead to the annihtion of everyone.


    As time and distance get closer and closer, everyone is actually feeling quite uneasy at this moment.


    The people who are worried are not just Chang Nuo as Emperor Toru, but also Whitebeard, the three navy admirals and the world government who are getting closer and closer.


    Almost every force is paying close attention to what is happening this time, and they are afraid of missing any detail. This war can be said to be thergest war in the past century. No matter who wins or loses, everything will change. The pattern of the entire world.


    Just because everyone understands it, they are even more afraid of the consequences that they don''t expect.


    A corner of the new world.


    "Captain Kaido, what exactly is our mission this time?"


    On the ship sailing in the New World, a huge sailboat with a dragon head on it was starting to move forward at an extremely fast speed.


    But just on top of this ship, Jack, the member of the Beast Pirates, respectfully asked Kaido who was sitting on the ground holding a big gourd and drinking.


    Everyone on the ship is actually waiting for the answer. Anyone with any brain can think of a question, that is, why does the captain of his own captain get up and go to an unknown ce when the Whitebeard Pirates are going to war with the navy?


    Moreover, the entire Beast Pirates were dispatched this time. Kaido the Beast also went out to fight in person, but he did not stop at all along the way and only moved forward in one direction.

 Chapter 478 Yonko Kaido’s decision

    <h4>Chapter 478 Yonko Kaido��s decision</h4>


    Not to mention Drought Jack, a brainless guy who couldn''t figure it out, even Jhin, who was a smarter guy on the ship, couldn''t understand it either.


    "There''s something wrong with that guy Red-haired Shanks. I won''t allow anyone to get involved in this guy Whitebeard''s war."


    Kaido took a swig of wine and spoke directly with a serious expression.


    As the same four emperors, Kaido and Whitebeard may be in constantpetition with each other on the surface, and even fights often ur between the two pirate ships, but one thing I have to admit is that the two pirate groups The captain was once apanion on a ship.


    How can outsiders understand the degree of tacit understanding and understanding between each other?


    Most people know that Kaido the Beast and Whitebeard, the strongest man in the world, once belonged to the Rocks Pirates, but so many years of fighting have made thempletely ignore it. .


    "Captain, is it possible that Red-haired Shanks will also participate in this war?"


    Jhin asked with some confusion.


    Several other people also sat down cross-legged, wanting to wait quietly for the answer.


    "It''s not clear now, but we can''t rule out the reason for this. This kid gives people a very sinister feeling. Even when he was on Roger''s ship, he seemed to be invisible to people."


    Kaido said.


    "I don''t think this should be done, right? As the Four Emperors, it''s impossible for Shanks to directly cause trouble for Whitebeard and the others at this time, right?"


    Drought Jack asked.


    "Many of us have always suspected that Shanks is a member of the World Government, but there has been no evidence at all. Even after he became the Four Emperors, the territory he held was the only one to go to Rafdru. There is nothing we can do to drive this away. Every time we encounter arge-scale battle, this kid will always have a reason for not being there!"


    Kaido said, feeling like he was gritting his teeth at the end.


    He was full of distaste for people like Shanks. After receiving the news that a war might ur this time, as the captain of the Beasts Pirates, Kaido immediately thought of this incident.


    Whether it''s to see off a former partner, or for some other reason? In short, Kaido''s purpose this time is very clear, that is, either to kill Shanks, or to directly prevent the opponent from participating in the battle on the top.


    But things are definitely not as simple as imagined. It''s not like there aren''t smart people on Shanks'' side, at least the other party seems to have noticed something.


    As if the two ships had already agreed on the time, they appeared in a certain ce at the same time. To be more precise, this area should be within the scope of Whitebeard''s previous jurisdiction.


    When they first met, they didn''t go to war as they had imagined. When the two ships got close enough, Kaido stood on his ship and Shanks faced each other, but the expressions on the two people were really different. The feeling that a war is imminent.


    "I never expected that I would meet you here. It seems that my guess was indeed correct, Shanks!"


    Kaido said in a low voice, with a mocking look on his face.


    "I don''t want to waste too much time here. If I rush over now, I can still prevent the war between Whitebeard and the others. Don''t you want to see this scene?"


    Shanks asked seriously.


    "Haha~!! Shanks, if it were anyone else, I might believe this, but do you think you are such a person?" Kaido asked with a smile.


    "I don''t want to have too many arguments with you on this matter, get out of the way!! Otherwise I don''t mind starting a war!"


    "Who do you think I am? I am Kaido!!"


    Hearing Shanks'' threat, Kaido instantly became angry, and the domineering Haki between the two collided with each other immediately.


    The sky between the two ships suddenly showed a scene of red and ck domineering intertwining, but from this aspect alone, as the captain of the Beast Pirates, Kaido is obviously weakpared to Shanks. Not even a little bit.


    "Kaido, onest time, get out of the way!"


    Shanks was a little angry, and his words were much colder. The crew members behind him were all ready, as if they were going to fight in the next second!


    "Captain Kaido, based on the current time, no matter how fast the red-haired pirates are, as long as we can stop them for three hours, they will definitely not be able to directly participate in the war!"


    As the think tank of the Beast Pirates, Jhin reminded Kaido.


    "I see!"


    Kaido replied, without too manyplicated expressions on his face. Instead, he focused all his attention on the red-haired pirates.


    Although Kaido is impatient, he is not in a hurry to take action at this moment. Instead, he quietly blocks in front of the opponent. As long as the opponent does not move, he may not be willing to take action.


    Faced with these situations, Shanks'' only remaining right hand was held directly on the handle of the knife at his waist, and he frowned tightly.


    At the highest point of their ship, Jesus was pointing his gun at the others on Kaido''s ship.


    "Captain, these guys seem to be obviously stalling for time. They don''t have any intention of taking action."


    Ben Beckman reminded Shanks.


    As the vice-captain of the red-haired pirates, he could already see the purpose of the other party''sing here at a nce, but if he wanted to force his way through, he could be sure that a conflict would break out between the two parties.


    Under such circumstances, no matter what, it is definitely enough for the other party tost for three hours, and it may also cause losses to one''s side.


    "We know they want to dy time, but we have no choice now. Looking at Kaido''s appearance, it is obvious that no one is allowed to interfere with Whitebeard''s war."


    Shanks said seriously.


    How could he not see what the other party was thinking, but no matter from which point of view, it was definitely not a better choice to take action directly here now.


    Kaido, as the first batch of Yonko, is said to have immortality. This title is definitely not made by others.


    Even now, in the face of the opponent''s obstruction, I have to calm down and confront the opponent in ss. If the two really start a full-scale war, based on thepetition between their strengths, let''s not say who will win. Losing is just the time consumed in the battle, I am afraid it will take at least about half a month.


    So once this time has passed, if you want to participate in the war, the day lily will have been cold and cold.

 Chapter 479 The war begins

    <h4>Chapter 479 The war begins</h4>


    Meanwhile on the other side.


    The Infinity had already turned on its stealth state and began to move forward at an extremely fast speed.


    As of now, Changnuo and the others are not too far away from the Navy headquarters base.


    "Hai Ling, stop 5km away from the Navy Headquarters base. We don''t need to go then, it''s so close."


    Chang Nuo stood on the deck and looked at the scenery ahead, and began to shout instructions in a calm tone.


    "Your Majesty, why are you so far away? If we approach directly, they won''t be able to detect the existence of the Infinity anyway, right?" Enelu asked with some confusion.


    After all, this ship is different from other ships. Even if it docks directly at the harbor of the Navy Headquarters Base, the other party probably won''t notice anything about it.


    I really can''t understand why I stopped so far away. Even if I watch the battle, there won''t be much to see.


    "We came here just to watch the battle. We didn''t have too many extra thoughts. After everything is done, it''s time for us to take action. But they will definitely break out in arge-scale war ahead. It won''t look good if they are too close."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his lips.


    "So that''s it! But how can we determine when is the best time?"


    Enelu asked.


    "Wait! It''s at least nine hours before the start time tomorrow morning. We have plenty of time here now!"


    Chang Nuo said, but he already had his own n in his heart. After all, when the timees to directly teleport so many troops from the Tru Empire, even with the power of space awakening, it is impossible to do it all at once. of.


    All that can be done now is to wait quietly for the time toe and take a good look at tomorrow''s war.


    This war can also bring a good learning opportunity to the Tru Empire, and at least it cany a strong foundation for the future.


    Nowadays, their country does notck powerful yers, but what theyck is experience inmanding suchrge-scale battle scenes.


    After the Infinity arrived at the designated location, it immediately turned on theprehensive defense and stealth state. Even though it was so close, the navy had no sense at all.


    Chang Nuo stood on the deck, quietly observing the situation ahead, and began to make adequate preparations for the arrival of therge force tomorrow.


    Although the navy has made sufficient preparations and has left behind to prepare for possible unexpected situations, it is estimated that they could never have imagined that the personnel of the Tru Empire who are still staying in the South China Sea could be deployed in an instant. appeared directly in front of the Navy Headquarters Base.


    Early the next morning.


    The naval headquarters base is now on full alert, and all personnel involved in the battle have gathered at the edge of the coast. The hundreds of thousands of troops can be seen very clearly even from this distance.


    The people standing there are all meticulous. There are not just ordinary troops here. There are even several giant troops standing at the end. Each of them is looking at the front with solemn expressions. They have all done their best. Well, be prepared for the possibility of war at any time.


    In the outer area, boats patrolling back and forth are one after another.


    Chang Nuo, who was staying in the distance, quietly stared at all the situations in front of him.


    It''s just that today he is extraordinarily different. After waking up early in the morning, Changnuo has already put on the unparalleled clothes belonging to Emperor Tru, with a crown on his head and a white cloak on his body. .


    After all, the attitude he showed this time did not represent him personally. To attend such an asion and live broadcast it directly to the world, he must reflect the majesty of an emperor no matter what.


    "How are the arrangements going? Has there been any disclosure?"


    At the naval headquarters base, Marshal Sengoku looked anxiously at everything arranged in front of him, and asked the person next to him with some worry.


    "Marshal Warring States, everything has been checked several times. There will definitely be no problems by then."


    said a guy standing next to him in a Marine Justice outfit.


    "Akainu, have you investigated where Whitebeard and the others have gone?" Sengoku turned to look at General Akainu standing aside and asked.


    "It should be here soon. Now all we have to do is wait quietly." Akainu said.


    "Now that everything is ready, let''s take Ace directly to the execution tform!"


    Sengoku seemed to have exhausted all his strength to say this directly, frowning, and clenching his fists as he said.


    The execution tform was located under the Navy Headquarters building. Although it was just a simple tform, it was at least 30 meters high.


    The position of the tform was about 500m from the edge of the sea, but in front of him stood hundreds of thousands of elite naval troops.


    At this time, Ace had already been taken away from Impel Down City several hours ago, and arrived at the Navy Headquarters under the escort of so many people.


    This little guy no longer had the original sharpness, and his face seemed to be covered with ayer of haze.


    His hands were tightly cuffed behind his back by sea-floor stone handcuffs, and his feet were also tied withrge chains. Every step he took seemed to be taking a lot of effort.


    On both sides of him, two executioners were holding one side. Under the restraints of the sea tower stone handcuffs, those with devil fruit abilities would not have any strength at all.


    In this way, they walked directly to the high tform step by step.


    Garp stood in the distance and looked at Ace''s current appearance. The expression on his face was almost the same as Ace''s, maintaining a gloomy expression from beginning to end.


    It wasn''t until the other party waspletely restrained on the high tform that Garp slowly walked up under everyone''s gaze.


    No one said anything at this moment, and even the development of all this felt very normal.


    But at the same time, a pirate ship rushed up from the sea not far away from the bottom of the sea, and then dozens of pirate ships appeared one after another.


    At this time, someone suddenly shouted, "Whitebeard and the others areing!"


    As soon as the words fell, everyone was immediately on alert and ready to attack.


    Even the expressions on the faces of Warring States and others standing in the distance were not as good-looking as they imagined.


    Seriousness and silence almost filled the entire naval headquarters base at this moment.


    The three generals of the navy came to their respective positions one after another, and they were also quietly watching everything in front of them.


    "Ace, daddy is here to take you home!"

 Chapter 480 Here we come

    <h4>Chapter 480 Here wee</h4>


    As thest pirate ship rushed up, which was the one closest to their base, the Moby Dick waspletely disyed in front of everyone.


    Whitebeard still maintained his original posture and sat on the edge of the deck. His body was still the same as before, covered with various needles and tubes, looking old and sick.


    "Dad!!"


    Ace on the high tform couldn''t help but yelled.


    As this sound fell, the atmosphere of the scene was heightened to its highest moment.


    On the Infinity, Chang Nuo watched all of this quietly. This was not done with the naked eye, but directly perceived everything on the scene with the domineering power of seeing and hearing.


    All the scenes, including the sounds, could be transmitted to their ears. Enel also stayed behind and quietly watched everything in front of him.


    If you say it''s not shocking, it''s definitely a lie. These things now, in terms of staffing andbat effectiveness on both sides, can definitely be regarded as the beginning of thergest war in the past century.


    "Your Majesty the King, are we really not going to do anything?" Enelu asked.


    Although he didn''t know much about the war in front of him, at least he knew Whitebeard rtively well.


    Between the Tru Empire and the Navy, everyone in the army knows clearly that there will definitely be a battle in the future, and now it is just sooner orter.


    "The purpose of ouring here today is to watch and observe the war that belongs here!"


    Changnuo said calmly.


    He didn''t care much about what was happening in front of him. If the battle between hundreds of thousands of people before was not exciting, it would definitely be a lie.


    From the moment Whitebeard appeared, all the people watching in front of the live broadcast tform fell silent one by one.


    Some of them may hope that Whitebeard will end directly, but at the same time, many people hope that the Whitebeard Pirates can escape intact this time!


    Everyone stands in a different position, so their considerations are also different, but no matter what, as long as they havee into contact with the Whitebeard Pirates, their evaluation of this pirate group is quite high.


    After all, in the new world, the four emperors are also equivalent to the kings of a country. The area they control is no smaller than some countries, and is even muchrger than many countries.


    After all, so far, the entire New World has been divided equally among the five powers. The four emperors each upy one of the seats, and the navy only upies a small part.


    However, everyone now understands that this war is inevitable.


    However, as the person involved, Whitebeard was sitting on his destination, the Ke, quietly looking into the distance.


    They are at least two hundred meters away from the shore, but relying on these powerful people, their sight range can be extended to a long distance.


    "s~! It seems that this war is unavoidable!"


    Garp sat next to Ace and said helplessly.


    "Is there a way to end this situation quickly? For example, just kill me directly. Grandpa, please help me!"


    Ace looked helplessly at Garp, his eyes full of pleading. He was now restrained by the Sea Tower Stone, and even if he wanted to die, he simply couldn''t do it.


    But facing so many people from the Whitebeard Pirates, Ace really didn''t want to involve them. After all, there were already hundreds of thousands of elite navy troops waiting for them in front of him. This waspletely It was a conspiracy, but he was helpless about such a thing.


    "Ace, grandpa asked you to join the navy, but you refused to agree to it. Now that things have reached this point, what do you think I can do? Do you think I want to watch you leave?


    I have watched you and Luffy grow up since we were little. Do you think I don��t want that old guy with Whitebeard to save you? "


    Garp said in a low voice, trying hard to hide the sadness in his heart.


    But this is his responsibility. Many times, even as a vice admiral or a naval hero, he is simply powerless.


    This is no longer something that can be solved by one person or one of the four emperors. As the absolute top brass of the navy, Garp ispletely superior to the generals of the navy headquarters in terms of real power or ability, and he definitely knows more internal information than anyone else. Too much.


    It is precisely because of this that he would say such a thing, otherwise just a little Ace, with his reliable ability, canpletely let the opponent walk out of the Impel Down City safely, no matter how bad it is, he can let him The other person spends his life peacefully in that ce.


    But after what happened before him, he deeply felt his powerlessness. Even the marshal of the navy probably felt the same at this moment.


    After all, it was not them who influenced the decision this time, and there were probably not many people who knew about this matter.


    "Grandpa, I don''t want to end up like this, and I don''t want my friends to die because of me. Is there any way I can help them?"


    Ace cried and shed tears, repeating what he just said again.


    Maybe he really didn''t know what to say right now, or maybe he really felt infinite regret at this moment, but things were already like this, and all he could do was lower his head and dare not look forward.


    "Ace, my son, daddy is here to take you back!"


    Whitebeard in the distance shouted again, and the rest of the pirates also shouted "Ace, we are here."


    "Everyone...!!!"


    Ace knelt on the ground, his eyes looking helplessly forward, tears falling continuously from his eyes.


    At this moment, he was in the most desperate state in his heart. He had never been so regretful and desperate from beginning to end. Even after learning the news that he was going to be executed, Ace''s heart was not soplicated, even in the face of death. , he is more of just calm.


    As a pirate, the moment everyone steps onto that ship, it is already determined in which direction his fate will fall.


    Therefore, since being caught, Ace has been extremely calm.


    But at this moment, the thing he least wanted to see and the most desperate thing appeared in front of him at the same time.


    But while he was despairing, a man standing on the boat in the distance smiled.


    Whitebeard stood up and pulled out the needles inserted in his body one by one. He looked calmly ahead, with a slight smile on his lips, and said softly, "My lovely son, please wait a moment. Dad will go pick you up right now.��

 Chapter 481 White Beard’s Flat A

    <h4>Chapter 481 White Beard��s t A</h4>


    As soon as he finished speaking, Whitebeard took two steps forward and stood the long knife in his hand directly on the spot.


    The next second, he put his two hands in front of him, clenched his fists hard, and all the Devil Fruit abilities were attached to the fists, forming a white and transparent ring-shaped image directly attached to the fists. .


    Immediately afterwards, Whitebeard mmed his two fists directly to both sides, staying on both sides. There were at least nearly 20 naval warships surrounding them, but the moment his fists touched the periphery, the space seemed to be directly like a mirror. Like broken.


    The cracks spread directly to a few 10 meters away, but when the water came in, the seawater on both sides suddenly changed differently.


    "seaquake!!!!"


    The Warring States Marshal standing at the top shouted loudly, because what happened next directly subverted everyone''s outlook on the battlefield.


    The entire sea turned into apletely different scene at this moment. Waves hundreds of meters high suddenly began to surge towards the Navy Headquarters Base Marin. With such huge waves, most of the powerful people present had Devil Fruit abilities. Or, once the seawater really floods the Navy headquarters, we don''t know how big the impact it will have.


    Faced with this situation, Akainu, one of the three navy generals, did not even raise his eyes, and Kizaru sat there leisurely, as if this matter had nothing to do with him at all.


    The waves had formed, and the waves began to hit them. At the moment when they were about to fall, Aokiji instantly rose into the air, and then directed his hands towards the seawatering from both sides, directly releasing his frozen devil fruit ability.


    The key is that before the people below have started to take action, or even rushed to the battlefield, the main figures on both sides have already begun to test their strength. In just an instant, the sea water that was about to pour into the Navy Headquarters base, He was directly frozen in ce by the green pheasant.


    Even the original image of the sea water is now clearly visible.


    The Moby Dick was at the forefront at the moment, and Whitebeard stood quietly on it. He was not in a hurry to take action.


    After all, this attack was just a test, and there was no thought of using this method to destroy the opponent.


    "You old man, at your age, it''s really hard to let go!"


    After just freezing the waves on both sides, Aokiji was suspended in mid-air. Instead of falling in a hurry, he looked in the direction of Whitebeard and directly released a freezing attack.


    He was still muttering dissatisfaction with Whitebeard, but such a small attack had no impact on Whitebeard at all. He just raised his right hand and used the same move to directly attack Qingqing. The pheasant lightly swung a punch in the direction of the pheasant. The powerful blow directly shattered the opponent''s attack, and he still had enough energy to fly towards the green pheasant in an instant.


    However, such a powerful attack by Whitebeard earlier not only affected the Navy Headquarters, but the Infinity, which was several kilometers away, was also involved in this wave.


    "Your Majesty, isn''t the old man with the white beard too aggressive? He just started releasing his ultimate move. It''s really scary."


    On the Infinity, Enelu said with a shocked face.


    After all, when he first started, he didn''t make any preparation at all, and he didn''t know much about Whitebeard. Faced with the sudden move, even the Infinity was almost swept into the air. Fortunately, there was Changnuo. Stay here and finally solve everything perfectly.


    But despite this, the Infinity still pushed forward nearly two kilometers.


    "What would you think if I told you that it was just the opponent''s level A? Whitebeard''s strength is definitely beyond your imagination. If the Zhenzhen Fruit is awakened, it will not be a problem to smash a country with one punch! "


    Chang Nuo didn''t care too much. The stronger the opponent was, the more excited he became. The scene before him also proved that the war had officially begun. Now that the prologue had begun, the real battle would naturally begin.


    "Your Majesty, is Whitebeard really as powerful as you say?" Enel asked, his tone a little surprised, even a little shocked. After all, he didn''t know much about the new world anyway.


    Especially in normal times, others will ept a series of cultural output about the world, but this guy, apart from training, does almost everything else.


    "Watch carefully! This wares very quickly and will go very quickly. It is estimated that there will be very intuitive results in a short time. But before this matter, I still need to go and do it first. Another thing, you should keep an eye on it here!"


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said calmly, before the other party could figure out what happened, His Majesty the King had already disappeared on the Infinity.


    However, Enelu did not study too much. The current war was the most enjoyable existence for him.


    Although I didn''t fight in the battle myself, I''m afraid I won''t be able to see such a wonderful battle again in my life!


    "I just left as I said, and I didn''t say when I woulde back. It''s true."


    Eneluined wordlessly, then continued, looking forward.


    But at this moment, Hai Ling suddenly appeared next to Enilu. Her expression waspletely different from usual, especially in her eyes. The originally ck pupils hadpletely turned into a mechanical color.


    "What are you doing out here?" Enelu asked curiously.


    "His Majesty the King has previously ordered that while waiting for the war to begin, the entire process must be videotaped. The entire war must be recorded so that others can enjoy it when the timees!"


    Hai Ling said in a mechanical voice.


    "Yoshi. What you said does make sense."


    After hearing this, Enelu made a fist with his right hand and hit it directly on the palm of his left hand. He suddenly said something enlightened, but he then asked, "Then do you know where His Majesty the King has gone?"


    "Do what you have to do! His Majesty the King doesn''t need us to worry about!"


    Hai Ling''s mechanical voice spoke again.


    But they never would have imagined that in less than a while, Chang Nuo would have appeared nearly 50 kilometers away.


    After all, this distance ispletely enough for them. No matter how the subsequent war affects, it is almost impossible to affect this area.


    Although Whitebeard''s Shock Fruit is indeed very powerful, once it reaches a ce 50km away, it actually doesn''t have much effect.

 Chapter 482 The battlefield outside the battlefield

    <h4>Chapter 482 The battlefield outside the battlefield</h4>


    After arriving at this area, Changnuo didn''t even hesitate at all. He floated directly above the sea, and then immediately crossed his hands together, and a blue light condensed directly on his hands.


    The next second, Chang Nuo raised his head slightly, and a huge ck vortex suddenly appeared in the sky. In fact, in this situation, even from a distance of 50km, you can see this scene clearly and intuitively.


    "What''s going on over there?"


    Marshal Sengoku, who was watching the war at the Navy headquarters base, suddenly frowned and raised his head to look at the situation in the distance.


    In fact, there were quite a few people looking into the distance at this time. Whether it was the navy or the Whitebeard Pirates, their eyes were all looking that way.


    The most important thing is that the ck clouds that are constantly circling are not only huge, but there are also a lot of thunder shing inside.


    "Guhahahaha~! It seems that boy has already started!"


    Whitebeard said with a soft smile, not paying attention to Akainu who was attacking towards him.


    But it wasn��t like no one at the scene couldn��t recognize him. What was going on? At least one lieutenant general looked at the scene in front of him and said to the person next to him with a serious expression, "This scene has happened before!"


    "Don''t worry about things so far away for now, take care of the things in front of you!"


    As soon as the lieutenant general finished speaking, another person beside him immediately reminded him.


    Lieutenant General Flying Squirrel only paused for a moment, hesitated, and then continued to stare sharply ahead.


    On Chang Nuo''s side, the process of establishing a space gate is the same every time. Although it is only a matter of time, now that the power of space awakening has been carried out, this time hassted from more than half an hour to two minutes now. solve.


    What followed was the same as before, a portal with a height of 100 meters fell instantly from the huge vortex above the head, and the huge space door was directly fixed here the moment it fell.


    After doing all this, Chang Nuo put his hand on the door frame of the space door. In an instant, the entire space door suddenly lit up with a blue light. In less than a minute, a huge thing like Objects began to slowly pass through the space gate.


    Above the South China Sea.


    Jun He was standing on a giant steel ship, his eyes always staring at the space door in front of him. ording to the original n, his side was the first to set off.


    As the blue light on the space gate lit up, Junhe shouted directly and loudly to everyone, "His Majesty the King has begun to call, the Tru Empire Th-6 battleship has begun to set off at full strength, everyone is ready for the war!"


    "yes����!!"


    The people on the battleship already understood their mission. As Junhe''s voice fell, everyone working on the deck or in the cabin suddenly shouted in unison.


    This war is not unprecedented for this world, but for the Tru Empire, it is the first time in its life.


    Although a lot of preparations have been made in the past, they still need to ept a lot of challenges in their hearts regardless of the actual oue.


    Faced withrge-scale group operations, the Toru Empire has so far only done it in practice. Even if the individual strength is strong, the cooperation between the team is also particrly important.


    As the giant steel ship where Junhe was located roared, the entire warship began to slowly set off towards the gate of space.


    As it began to enter slowly, the tip began to appear from the other end of the space door.


    Two minutester, the giant steel shippletely entered the first half of the Grand Route from the South China Sea area. In this crossing, it directly crossed a distance of nearly thousands of kilometers.


    Appearing in an area not far from the battlefield, everyone on the ship was not surprised as they imagined. There was no curiosity or surprise in their expressions, but instead they all had a serious look on their faces.


    Just like the navy, it is revealed that all the personnel the empire is preparing toe this time can be considered elite troops. Each one of them is extremely powerful. Even if taken alone, any one of them can almost pass through the first half of the great route unimpeded!


    The moment the steel battleship came over, Changnuonded directly on the deck of the ship in the next second. Junhe looked at the king in front of him. There was no surprise in his heart. Instead, he went straight with a serious face. A military salute shouts "Your Majesty the King!"


    "The next area will be left to you! No matter whether the war starts from the beginning or to the end, I don''t want anyone to disturb them! No matter who it is, they must be kept in this 50km Area outside the gate.��


    Chang Nuo said in a low voice.


    This time, he did not allow anyone to participate in the n of the Tru Empire. He had been silently preparing for this time alone for more than ten years.


    The start of the battle at the top has also meant that the structure of this world has begun to undergo major changes, and the ideas that have been long-held can finally be put into practice.


    So far, all of Changnuo''s ns have been carried out ording to his own ideas. Although he has not yet reached hisplete ideal state, at least it is not too far away from the deviation now.


    Now that the battle on top has begun, in the next period of time, it will be the time when the Tru Empire really begins to show its strength.


    But something is different now, that is, he is not the only one to bear all these things silently. Everyone in this country is also inheriting the ideas that belong to the king. They also set their own ideal goals for His Majesty the King. , as his ultimate n.


    Junhe stood on the deck with a serious face and directly replied loudly, "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King, as long as I, Junhe, stay here for one minute, I will never let anyone pass here."


    "It doesn''t take you too long at the moment. ording to normal estimates, as long as today is over, nothing will happen. But things may sometimes have some surprises. Your role is to maintain the outside world, and there will be no There is no possibility of anyone intervening again." Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Understood, Your Majesty the King." Junhe replied.


    Both he and the people behind him all maintained a straight posture, and the expressions on their faces were quite serious. Everything this time was taken seriously, and no one would use this kind of thing to do anything again. joke.

 Chapter 483 The power of the strong

    <h4>Chapter 483 The power of the strong</h4>


    Changnuo is very relieved to let Junhe lead the troops to guard here alone. This guy''s strength has long been different from the past. The only ones who cane here now are the red-haired pirates. With his current ability, it ispletely enough. Can cope.


    Although Chang Nuo doesn''t know what the red-haired pirates are up to? But from his impression, these guys have a lot to do with the World Government. In any case, he will not allow any idents to ur during such a time.


    In this battle, Chang Nuo wants to make a big force like the Navy fall from the altar in an instant!


    "I can rest assured that I will leave the affairs here to you. The shadow guards are all here with you, so in the next time, are there any emergencies that may ur in the periphery? But I will leave it all to you."


    Chang Nuo said again.


    "I understand, Your Majesty, I will act ording to all ns and will never cause you any trouble."


    Junhe said seriously.


    "No matter how much movement there ister, if I don''t call you over, just stay here!"


    Changnuo said, and disappeared directly in front of Junhe in the next second.


    Looking at the endless sea water in front of him, Junhe frowned.


    Even though they are stronger now, the war this time has actually attracted so much attention from His Majesty the King, and Junhe will inevitably follow the other''s emotions.


    Appearing again, Chang Nuo had already arrived on the Infinity. At this time, Enelu had already brought over a stool within a few minutes and was watching the war ahead with interest.


    The moment he sensed the approach of His Majesty the King, Enilu immediately stood up, turned to the side respectfully, and said to Chang Nuo speechlessly, "Your Majesty, you didn''t see it just now, why do I feel that their navy is so big?" , except for Akainu, everyone else is letting off steam."


    Changnuo nced at Enel with a slight smile, then sat directly on the stool moved by Enel, and said in a leisurely tone, "The man waiting for execution on the high tform, he was the son of the original Pirate King, and now he is the Navy The grandson of the hero Garp! Among these admirals, no one is willing to let Ace die here, otherwise he may not know what he will face when the timees. Of course, from the perspective of the navy, the most attentive It''s Akainu.


    If it weren''t for the fact that we were on opposite sides, I would be quite willing to sit down and have a chat with this guy! "


    "Isn''t it true? Is this guy really that good to receive such an evaluation from His Majesty?"


    Enelu asked in surprise.


    "Just watch. If you look back, you''ll probably understand why I said that!" Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    The battlefield at this moment has already begun to lose control. As Whitebeard is the strongest man in the world, many people are already unconvinced by this. Not to mention the three generals taking turns to attack, even Hawkeye, who is the Shichibukai, also Came out immediately.


    The previous attack had no effect on Whitebeard at all, and it was not even possible for him to pull out the needle on his body.


    "The strongest man in the world, as a Shichibukai, is no match for you, but I still want toe and challenge you today. Otherwise, I won''t have a chance in the future. This will be the biggest regret in my life."


    Hawkeye Mihawk carried a big ck knife with a cross on his back, looking at Whitebeard in the distance with a serious expression and said.


    "The greatest swordsman in the world! He is indeed qualified to fight with an old guy like me, but you are right. If this is your inner obsession, if you don''t challenge today, you may not have a chance in the future."


    Whitebeard grinned slightly and said with a slight smile.


    Hawkeye Mihawk didn''t say any more nonsense, and directly drew out the big ck knife from his back. In an instant, a blue light shot directly in the direction of Whitebeard.


    The powerful sword light directly caused a huge crack to instantly open in the frozen sea of ????ice. The distance between the two was more than a hundred meters, but this attack seemed to have no end.


    When the attack was about to reach the Moby-Dick where Whitebeard was, Jozi, the captain of the third division of the Whitebeard Pirates, instantly blocked the ship. Relying on the strengthening ability of his Devil Fruit, Jozi, right The shoulders werepletely covered with ayer of diamonds, using its powerful defensive ability to directly st Mihawk''s sh into the sky.


    "Jozi, get out of the way, I don''t mind fighting him."


    Whitebeard stood above him, slowly pulling out all the needles on his body, then holding his big knife in his hand, he shouted with great force.


    After Jozi heard this, he looked at Hawkeye for a moment, and then retreated obediently.


    "Whitebeard, the title of the world''s greatest swordsman does not belong to me now. There is no need for you to humiliate me with such words."


    Hawkeye Mihawk said with a slightly angry tone.


    "What you said is indeed true. By disabling other people with Devil Fruit abilities, you can be considered the greatest swordsman in the world individually. This is not wrong!"


    Whitebeard said.


    "Since today hase, nothing else will have any effect. Come and take my strongest sword move first. If you can block it, I won''t do anything to you in the next time. One hand."


    Mihawk said, and the ck sword in his hand began to wave again.


    But this time Mihawk''s behavior waspletely different. He held the knife in both hands, and the tip of the knife was facing the direction of Whitebeard.


    As he took a deep breath, he took a strong lunge and took a step forward. At this moment, the aura on his body exploded with unprecedented fierceness. The long knife in his hand was like a right and left arm, and because of his move, This powerful aura directly blocked the sun from the dark clouds.


    "Let me feel the true state of being a strong person!"


    Mihawk roared loudly, and then followed by a ck sword light, even the clouds in the sky were cut in half by this sword, let alone the situation above the sea.


    Within a hundred meters, the attack had arrived below the Moby Dick in an instant, and the ck attack seemed to be able to split the world in half.


    Whitebeard didn''t panic at all. The big knife in his hand rotated in a circle and then suddenly passed around behind him, and then shed straight forward. For a moment, the space in front was once again like a trace of broken ss. , the powerful impact also headed directly towards the navy area.


    But even such a powerful attack this time actually only changed the direction of Mihawk''s attack. The ck sword light deviated from the Moby Dick and continued to move rapidly towards the rear.

 Chapter 484 It’s your grandson again

    <h4>Chapter 484 It��s your grandson again</h4>


    The key is that this time the other two people staying at the rear did not have such good luck. The Infinity had alreadyunched aprehensive ultimate defense, but faced with the sudden attack, neither of them made the slightest preparation. The entire attack passed through It traveled a distance of more than two kilometers and directly hit the Infinity.


    Even though they were already so far apart, the entire Infinity was still moved back nearly dozens of meters on the ice.


    "These bastards!! I can''t stand it anymore!!!"


    Enel was directly knocked down on the deck by this sudden attack. Although he had noticed the opponent''s attack trajectory before, they would not participate in the war this time, so there was nothing special about this kind of thing. Good defense.


    The sudden attack did not cause any damage to the Infinity, and the absolute defensive power was not for nothing.


    But dragging the entire ship back dozens of meters, causing Eniro, who was standing there silently watching the battle, to fall directly onto the deck. Even if nothing happened, the anger in his heart exploded instantly.


    After all, what he has always longed for most is a battle to prove himself, but in the past half a year, apart from entertaining himself, he has not had a chance to do it.


    "Just watch it! What''s the point of taking action now?"


    Chang Nuo was still sitting there steadily, saying with a smile on his face.


    He didn''t mind this kind of thing at all, but as the attacker, Mihawk noticed that something was wrong!


    "I will fulfill my promise and never attack you again, but that doesn''t mean I can''t attack others! This is my responsibility as a Shichibukai!"


    Mihawk said in a cold voice, and then directly put the ck sword in his hand into the scabbard behind his back.


    The battle between them just now has caused the entire ice surface in front of them to shatter, and it has reached arge area of ????the seabed.


    However, at this time, the ice blocks at the top gradually began to break. Due to Whitebeard''s attack just now, all the already fragile ice blocks began to break.


    But one thing that exceeded everyone''s expectations was what happened next.


    A ship unexpectedly fell from the sky, apanied by the yelling sounds of the people on it. It could be confirmed just from the clothes that these people were all from Impel Down City.


    "An interesting thing has indeed happened! It seems that the war will really start next!"


    On the Infinity, Chang Nuo grinned and finally smiled.


    However, everyone on the battlefield was dumbfounded. They did not understand what was happening. In fact, it was exactly the same as in the original plot. From the very beginning, the ship Already frozen on top.


    "Garp, it seems like it''s your grandson again!"


    Warring States stood on the high tform, turned his head and shouted to Garp who was secretly feeling sad there.


    The moment Garp raised his head and looked at the fall, his eyes suddenly flew so high that even his nose couldn''t help but almost fell to the ground.


    "This bastard!!!"


    Garp shouted angrily and stood up. After looking around, he didn''t feel much sadness in his heart.


    "Hey...! It seems like another group of scary people are here, but why is that little guy in there again?"


    Kizaru said speechlessly, and Aokiji beside him also closed his eyes helplessly.


    "What should we do next? Do we really want to kill the other party?" Aokiji asked Kizaru next to him in a low voice. They were still rtively far away from the others.


    "Let''s see then! I don''t want to have too much contact with such terrifying young people!" Kizaru said.


    The two looked at each other and felt something from each other''s expressions. Qingzhi even looked at Garp on the high tform.


    The scene in front of me was indeed shocking. So many people suddenly fell down. In fact, for the more powerful group of people, they already knew what they were up there.


    The hegemony of seeing and hearing colors spreads at will, and the opponent''s presence can be sensed no matter what.


    "Ace, I''m here to save you!"


    As soon as Luffy came up and stood on the huge ice block, he shouted directly to Ace on the high tform.


    The current scene seems to havepletely exceeded everyone''s ns. The most angry person should be Akainu, the Admiral of the Navy Headquarters. All the ns here actually originated from his hands, and the Marshal of the Navy Headquarters did not have too much involvement. Go in.


    In order to deal with this war, Akainu, as a general, has indeed worked hard, but the unexpected arrivals one after another have made himpletely on the verge of anger.


    But at this moment, a huge trumpet sound began to sound in the crowded square of Marin. The Warring States Marshal took a microphone in his hand and shouted directly to everyone, "Now I have decided to start attacking Podoka in advance." Ace, execute!"


    It doesn''t matter if you say this sentence, it immediately makes the tens of thousands of pirates whoe here feel uneasy. There are so many naval soldiers blocking the front, and rushing over now will undoubtedly lead to death.


    But now, indeed, I can''t think of a better way.


    "Ace, I will definitelye to save you!"


    While everyone was still preparing, Luffy, a brainless guy, started rushing towards the crowded area of ??Navy za.


    This charge directly brought along the remaining members of the Whitebeard Pirates. Under such circumstances, they also began to rush inside quickly.


    However, as the leader of the pirates, Whitebeard was not as quiet as he expected. Anyone with strength wanted toe over and get a share of the pie. Those vice admirals all rushed over as if they didn''t care about their lives, especially a few There were two giant lieutenant generals, one of whom swung a sword tens of meters away and instantly wanted to split Whitebeard and the Moby Dick under his feet into two halves.


    Even though the people had begun to charge towards the center of the square, it didn''t mean that Whitebeard didn''t have any strength. He just raised his fist slightly and punched the opponent''s sword directly. A powerful shock wave, once again. Let the space shatter like a mirror.


    But before the opponent started to retreat, Whitebeard jumped up slightly and punched the giant lieutenant general in the abdomen again. The powerful force instantly caused the guy to hit the ice, and then bounced up and fell quickly. Everywhere under Xingtai.


    at the same time.


    Although Junhe was guarding here 50km away from them, he remained on alert.

 Chapter 485 Can you give me some face?

    <h4>Chapter 485 Can you give me some face?</h4>


    Of course, it was not useless for him to stay here. At least after waiting for an hour, he was indeed about to usher in the first existence that he needed to face today.


    The red-haired pirate ship came staggering from here. Even though it had been blocked by Kaido before, it is probably impossible for that tall and thick guy to imagine that red-haired Shanks and the guys would not act ording tomon sense? Passing directly through the Red Earth Continent, without passing through Fish-Man Ind, came to participate in this war in this way.


    "All personnel are on alert. We are waiting. This fish has arrived. No matter what happens next, we must not let the other party take a step forward again!"


    Jun He shouted to everyone in a cold voice. The others either held long knives in their hands or clenched their fists, and they were all guarding here as if facing a powerful enemy.


    A long way away, the people on the red-haired pirate ship also spotted the giant steel ship in front of them. They recognized the origin of this thing at a nce, but they still couldn''t help being surprised.


    "Why are the people from the Tru Empire here?"


    Ben Beckman said a little surprised, even a little unbelievable about this kind of thing.


    The Toru Empire in the South China Sea is thousands of kilometers away from here. The key is that it is no longer a matter of distance. Once there is any change in the Toru Empire, there is no reason why the World Government and the Navy should not know about it. The newspapers should have already started reporting it. But now, Such a situation actually happened?


    Because the space gate at this time has long been taken back by Chang Nuo, now only Junhe and his people are left here together with the steel giant ship.


    "It seems that things are not as simple as we thought. As for how the people from the Tru Empire came here, it doesn''t seem to be very important now. Judging from their posture, they should be blocking our progress. Now they are rushing over directly. , or how to do it? This still needs to be decided by the captain. "


    Jesus said, he had already taken out his pistol from his arms, and he also looked like he was ready to fight.


    "Let''s go over and see what''s going on, but one thing is right. This time the war may not be as simple as we thought!"


    Shanks frownedpletely. He had no idea that after being blocked by Kaido just now, he was already in front of him and could meet another wave of people.


    Moreover, they all know the situation of the Tru Empire to some extent. Just relying on the giant steel ship allows them to identify which force they belong to at a nce, and there can still be people from the other side so far away from the battlefield. existence, this is enough to prove that the Tru Empire has already put its thoughts into this aspect.


    "It seems that we are already approaching. It is difficult to get around this rtionship. ording to the situation just now, the war may have already started. If we are blocked here again, I''m afraid we really can''t interfere in anything over there. hands!"


    Ben Beckman was different from others. He just nced at the situation ahead and already roughly understood the cause and course of everything.


    The Tru Empire could choose toe here from such a long distance, naturally not just because they wanted toe and see the excitement.


    "The other side is just a ship. If it doesn''t work, we might as well start a war!"


    The fat man who belonged to the red-haired pirate group held a huge chicken drumstick in his hand and was eating it while talking. He didn''t even care about the topic of war.


    They kept talking, but the boat under their feet continued to move forward. In the eyes of Junhe and others, they continued to move forward slowly.


    The 50km journey was enough for them to float on the sea for several hours. However, the order Junhe received, although it was stated that they were not allowed to take a step across, did not say that they were not allowed to start a war.


    When the opponent was about 100 meters away from him, Junhe directly raised his right hand with his palm pointed straight towards the sky. In the next second, all the artillery on the entire steel giant ship were aimed at it. The red-haired pirate ship.


    "I really didn''t expect that I would be able to meet the famous Yonko Shanks during my trip here. Is it my honor or misfortune?"


    Junhe shouted loudly from a distance, but there was no expression on his face, as if the two of them had known each other for a long time.


    "I wonder why the Tru Empire came to this ce? Could it be that you also have your own ideas about war?"


    Ben Beckman stood on the deck, waiting for the ship to get a little closer, and then asked directly.


    "I''m not interested in things like war! But I don''t mind letting you stay and chat. After all, the front is too dangerous. It would be bad if I hurt you."


    Junhe had a mocking smile on his face, but his tone was indeed a bit cold.


    "We are not interested in chatting with you here. I wonder if we can make way? We still have our own things to do!" Jesus Bu said.


    "I''m really sorry, everyone. I''m afraid I can say anything today. The only thing I can''t do is to let you walk through this area!"


    While speaking, Junhe lowered his voice a bit again. He didn''t want so much nonsense. If he wanted to start a war, he would just start fighting.


    "Friends of Nanhai, why do you have to say so harshly? I just want to see the situation ahead and have no other special intentions for the Tru Empire!"


    "You said it quite lightly. I still remember that almost ten years ago, when our Toru Empire was just starting out, your red-haired pirates unceremoniously took away a shipment of our goods. Nowe here and say this, Do you think it��s really interesting?��


    The corners of Junhe''s mouth twitched, and his eyes became sharp.


    Facing Shanks'' words, Junhe didn''t even care at all. He just used today''s opportunity to directly talk about the situation ten years ago.


    For the current situation of the Tru Empire, the original cargo was nothing, but for the situation at that time, the cargo of this cargo no longer determined the fate of many people.


    Shanks frowned tightly, and the others had also heard the exchange of words, and everyone had begun to prepare for the battle. Now Shanks''s words were probably all that was missing.


    "I wonder if you can give me some face? After this matter is over, we willpensate you ten times the value of the cargo from the Tru Empire!"


    Shanks directly released his overlord-colored domineering energy, and his tone began to be cold.

 Chapter 486: War with Red Hair

    <h4>Chapter 486: War with Red Hair</h4>


    But the tone was as cold as ice. The moment the Overlord''s Haki was released, the entire red-haired pirate group saw something that they were not sure of. That was that no one on the other side''s ship was affected by the Overlord''s Haki. Affected, everyone was still standing there upright, as if what just happened never happened at all.


    The group of people who were still preparing to go out suddenly turned gloomy after seeing this scene.


    "You want to give others face, but you actually do this trick behind your back. I really don''t know how you, the four emperors, managed to do it."


    Junhe snorted coldly, and his own momentum exploded in the next moment.


    The image of a white werewolf is apanied by a powerful aura. Even without the blessing of the overlord''s domineering aura, he is definitely at the top at this moment.


    "Now, either go back! Or start a war!"


    Junhe shouted domineeringly, and his voice could be heard even two kilometers away.


    Although his voice in the werewolf image was different from before, the cold aura he exuded could still directly make the group of people feel that the other party waspletely serious.


    "Captain, it seems there is no room formunication. When the war begins, the Tru Empire will also be involved."


    Ben Beckman said.


    Shanks kept frowning, staring closely at Shunhe on the other boat, and his right hand had already tightened the handle of the knife at his waist.


    When Jesus saw his captain like this, he immediately raised the gun in his hand and aimed directly at Junhe, themander of this side.


    "I advise you not to meddle in other people''s business. If you don''t leave, we won''t mind going to war directly."


    Junhe warned again.


    But his voice greeted Shanks as he suddenly pulled out the long knife in his hand, and with a sh, he headed directly towards the steel giant ship!


    "If you don''t give face, then what''s the harm in starting a war?"


    Shanks said coldly, although with just his knowledge of the sword, he could directly split the entire steel giant ship into two halves with this sword, but everything was not as simple as he thought.


    Shunhe just stood on the deck, in the form of a werewolf, and suddenly pushed forward with two palms, and a thing simr to a barrier wave began to move directly towards the red-haired pirates.


    The moment the two attacks collided with each other, the sword light from Shanks''s sh was directly deflected in other directions the next moment.


    At the same time, the sea seemed to be divided into two halves, and a ravine with no end visible to the naked eye appeared in front of everyone.


    There was a fierce fight on the battlefield, but the same was true on the outside of the battlefield. Junhe did not choose to indulge the opponent''s temper. On the contrary, after the first attack, he jumped up directly, and his nails in the werewolf form began to grow rapidly. , when he was about 50 centimeters away, Shunwa directly waved an attack, and three attacks simr to shing, immediately moved towards the red-haired pirates.


    But before he could fall, the pistol in Jesus Bu''s hand exploded, and the bullet was urate, hitting Junhe''s head directly.


    In this situation, other Devil Fruit users would probably have burped their butts a long time ago, but after being attacked, Shunhe just fell to the deck, staggered a little, and after arranging his body, the tattoo on his forehead That bullet hole is healing at an extremely fast speed.


    "You can''t even hurt the opponent with a domineering attack?"


    Jesus Bu waspletely shocked, but what came to him was the attack unleashed by the other party.


    But being able to destroy the opponent with just such an attack is simply fantastic. Of course, Junhe also has no such idea at all.


    "General Junhe, didn''t His Majesty tell you that if you encounter a strong enemy, just let the shadow guards take action?"


    Jun and an adjutant beside him warned in a low voice.


    "What time is it now? If I don''t take this opportunity to practice my skills, I don''t know if I will be able to meet such a powerful opponent in the future!"


    Junhe said nonchntly.


    The people behind him immediately understood after hearing this. No matter what, he would be injured at most anyway. Use this rare opportunity to see how much he weighs? It can be considered a pretty good exnation.


    Anyway, in the end, as long as they are not allowed to cross this line, no matter what method is used, as long as they can do it, the mission will bepleted.


    So in the following time, the more anxious red-haired pirates and the first batch of personnel from the Toru Empire began to enter a fighting state.


    But they did not attack each other immediately. They were testing and attacking each other. Only after trying each other''s attack state, they were able to make some simple countermeasures.


    The most surprised person should be Shanks, the captain of the red-haired pirates, but Shunwa''s strength haspletely exceeded his imagination.


    How could he not believe it? The strength of a general from the Tru Empire was actually equal to his own, and even much stronger than him in some aspects.


    Not only is this kind of thing difficult for him to ept, it is also difficult for others to ept.


    "You must be Mr. Ben Beckman, the legendary think tank of the red-haired pirates, right?"


    Needless to say, the people here were fighting. Junhe directly faced Shanks. However, as the vice-captain, Beckman was just about to go over when a person suddenly stopped in front of him.


    Lieutenant General Deco appeared and stood directly in front of Beckman, speaking in a rather pertinent tone.


    Several other people also did not avoid such an ident. The number of people on the red-haired pirate ship was not particrlyrge. The total number of people on the ship was only about two hundred. Without saying much from the Toru Empire, there were nearly 100 people on the entire ship. Although some of the 700 people are just standing troops handling logistics, internal affairs and other aspects, it does not mean that they do not have any strength.


    "I don''t know what to call you? Our research on the Tru Empire doesn''t seem to be like you!"


    Beckman asked after thinking for a moment.


    He quietly looked at Lieutenant General Deco standing in front of him. This ce waspletely above the sea, and the battle between them could only be concentrated on the ship. However, the confrontation on such arge sea was extremely difficult. Sex is so much moreplicated than being on an ind.


    But now all they can do is confront each other, and the real war is about to break out.


    "Mr. Beckman, in terms of the True Empire, I am just an unknown person, so you really don''t need to care too much about my identity!"


    Lieutenant General Deco said with a slight smile on his face.

 Chapter 487 The execution begins

    <h4>Chapter 487 The execution begins</h4>


    Beckman just smiled slightly after hearing this. Although the other party did not reveal his identity, the strength of his confidence was here.


    Far away in another ce.


    At this moment, the Navy Headquarters base has been beaten to a pulp. Countless people are charging just like in the original plot. The only difference is that Garp is standing on the high tform. He is looking into the distance with extraordinary eyes, and With a somewhat serious tone, he said to the Warring States Marshal next to him, "Have you sensed that something is wrong ahead?"


    "I''ve noticed it a long time ago! When that thundercloud appeared, I already felt something was abnormal. Now it seems that fighting has started over there." Marshal Warring States frowned and said.


    "Which sphere of influence can you detect? What''s going on?"


    Karp asked.


    "It''s very likely that it''s another back-up left behind by the World Government. Anyway, it''s hard to be sure right now. We''re at such a long distance. Although my Haki of Knowledge can detect such a long distance, I can''t tell the difference at all. The characters above!��


    Warring States said, his mind was no longer on the current battlefield. No matter from which perspective, since the battle has begun in the front, it is enough to prove that an ident has indeed urred.


    The changes caused by this war are so great that no one is sure what will happen next? And this war is not as simple as it seems on the surface.


    "Wait and see! Someone we didn''t expect will definitely show up!" Garp said seriously.


    However, Ace, who was staying next to him, had been crying silently, watching everything that happened in the war in front of him, which directly made him enter a state of despair.


    "It''s time. Whether it seeds or not depends on what happens next! Garp, I hope you can also be mentally prepared!"


    Sengoku said seriously, looking ahead with a frown, and then loudly picked up the microphone and shouted again, facing the public with a serious tone and said, "Now, let me reveal the secret, belonging to Bodo The true identity of Cass D. Ace is that he is not only the captain of the second division of the Whitebeard Pirates, but more importantly, this guy is a cancer left over from the previous era, the biological son of Gol D. Roger.


    This is a painful lesson of an era, so today, we will start an ending choice just like the Roger era. "


    As soon as the words fell, the crowd that was still fighting and bustling all stopped quietly in the next second, as if this was an oue that no one expected at all.


    Except for a few people, many people were stunned in ce, epting the news in disbelief.


    "Fufufufufufu! It''s really unbelievable. I didn''t expect that we could achieve this level of results in the end?"


    Domingo, who was among the crowd, controlled the Whitebeard Pirates next to him with one hand to kill his own people, and looked towards the high tform with an incredible smile on his expression.


    ��It��s really unbelievable!��


    "How did youe up with this identity?..."


    ��


    For a moment, the atmosphere of the entire battlefield seemed particrly strange, but at the other end of the battlefield, in front of the live broadcast station, the unsuspecting people were more surprised each one.


    Many people could not believe this result, including the big guys who were watching the game in the background. Anyway, it was just one stone that caused thousands of waves. This was not the only thing that was unbelievable.


    Warring States stood on the high tform, looking as if the time had reached an opportunity, so he once again took the microphone and shouted loudly, "Based on this war, let hime to an end and start the execution!"


    This time, they have started to get serious. The two executioners next to them were already fully prepared. Now that they received such a reply, they naturally began to prepare the guys in their hands without leaving any room.


    As the two of them slowly raised the two sharp knives in their hands, the atmosphere at the scene became quiet again. Everyone in the Whitebeard Pirates stopped what they were doing and looked at the actions on the high tform in disbelief. .


    The desperation revealed in their eyes was like clenching their fists.


    ��Get away!!!��


    In an instant, just when the executioner''s long knife on the high tform was about to fall, a look of domineering appeared in the crowd, and the domineering power was instantly released, and the haze rushed over everyone present.


    The scene of hundreds of thousands of people fighting against each other was swept away by this overbearing domineering energy in just an instant.


    After the arrogance, hundreds of thousands of people at the scene began to fall to the ground one after another. Some of those who did not fall to the ground were also holding on to their bodies.


    Especially the two executioners on the high tform fell to the ground in an instant, and the navy also looked in disbelief.


    "I really didn''t expect that someone in the crowd could actually release his domineering aura! This guy must not stay."


    Akainu was still fighting with others, but after feeling this overbearing domineering energy, a powerful threat instantly enveloped his heart. If he didn''t kill the opponent directly when the opponent was so weak, he would be sorry for his rank as a general.


    "Young people are really scary. They have already begun to release their domineering aura at such a young age. It''s really unbelievable!" Kizaru said.


    This time, Luffy directly released the Overlord''s Haki on arge scale. He didn''t feel anything at all, and started rushing towards the direction of the high tform. Although he saved Ace this time, he also set a good example for himself. A powerful enemy.


    A big tree attracts the wind. I guess he still doesn''t understand this topic very well.


    Those in the navy who had not fainted were already rushing toward him like wolves and tigers. The plot has developed so far, and everything is still on track.


    Chang Nuo watched everything here quietly, as if he was sitting in front of the TV and watching everything. Nothing had anything to do with him, but everything seemed so real.


    So far, Whitebeard still has no idea of ????choosing to take action. He is also looking at all this carefully. The big knife in his hand is already eager to try, but he still chooses to wait on the Moby Dick.


    It was at this time that Chang Nuo suddenly frowned and looked up. The sky was still as it was before, and nothing particrly abnormal was found.


    But sometimes the ability of the Immortal Human Body can indeed be clearly and intuitively felt by seeing, hearing, and hearing things that Haki can''t perceive.

 Chapter 488 Don’t forget the agreement between you and me

    <h4>Chapter 488 Don��t forget the agreement between you and me</h4>


    Enelu stood aside and clearly noticed something was wrong with His Majesty''s expression, so he quickly asked, "Your Majesty, what happened?"


    "Looks like it''s already here!"


    Chang Nuo frowned and said, but his eyes were still staring at the sky.


    "What hase?"


    Eniru waspletely confused. His own sense of dominance had clearly been sensed so far, but he didn''t feel anything happening except the situation on the battlefield.


    Of course, except for the dozens of tyrant bears that appeared directly on the battlefield, these things were all made of machinery at first nce. However, it was not that they had not been exposed to this thing before, and the sudden appearance did not make people feel it. Any surprise.


    "Old man, the hidden thing has appeared. The next step is to redeem the agreement between you and me."


    Chang Nuo spoke in a low tone, not particrly loudly, but through seeing and hearing Se Haqi, this voice was directly transmitted to Whitebeard''s ears.


    Enelu had obviously noticed something was wrong, so in the end he didn''t open his mouth to say anything else, he could only watch quietly.


    Whitebeard held a big knife in his hand and stood there quietly. After hearing the sound, he raised his head slightly and looked at the calm sky without any ripples.


    There was nothing unusual in Se Baqi''s perception, but he did not doubt what Chang Nuo suddenly said.


    Looking around, Whitebeard did not find any possible presence of Chang Nuo, although he was a little confused about where the other party was now. But he didn''t dwell too much on it.


    After looking around, Whitebeard lowered his head. At this time, a bottle of blue pills that Chang Nuo had given him appeared in his left hand. Although this thing could restore him to his peak existence, it could also make him His life ended there.


    It ispletely an existence that overdraws all the potential of one''s own body.


    "Marco!"


    Whitebeard stood on the deck and shouted loudly towards Marco who was fighting.


    After hearing the sound, the opponent immediately began to retreat from the battlefield, waving the wings of blue mes, and returned directly to the deck.


    "Dad, what happened?"


    "Marco! You must remember what I told you before. Now it''s time to implement the agreement."


    Whitebeard looked at Marco and said, already starting to exin what the two of them were talking about while sitting on the deck before exining himself.


    Although Marco was mentally prepared, he was still trembling uncontrobly in his heart.


    After hearing this, Marco was stunned for a moment subconsciously. In the end, tears flowed down his face and he asked with a trembling voice, "Is there no other way?"


    "My son! Dad will alwayse to an end. Didn''t I tell you before? When Acees out, take all of them and evacuate as soon as possible!"


    Whitebeard said with a smile.


    Marco knelt directly on the ground and covered his face with his hands in pain. It was still difficult for him to ept this situation. The other captains who were fighting all saw this scene. Although they all showed puzzled expressions, they did not have any A man stops fighting.


    The Navy has also noticed this, especially Marshal Warring States. He can''t understand what happened?


    "Don''t worry, Dad! I will definitely take good care of them!"


    Marco shouted loudly, even showing an unprecedented seriousness.


    "My good son!"


    Whitebeard no longer knew what to say, and could only show a slight smile on his face.


    As a naval admiral, Akainu sensed that something was wrong, and the next second he started rushing towards Whitebeard.


    But no matter how fast he was now, how could he be faster than Whitebeard and take the pill in his left hand.


    The moment the opponent was not close, Whitebeard suddenly began to exude a monstrous aura. The powerful strength waspletely inconsistent with his body. The excess car began to burst out uncontrobly, and the overlord-colored domineering energy was also there. This moment directly swept the entire battlefield.


    Akainu, who had already rushed halfway, quickly jumped back after sensing this situation, but even so, his position was still affected by considerable waves.


    The tyrannical force directly swept the entire ground and sea. Even the members of the Whitebeard Pirates were all lifted into the air at this moment. It was rare to see the navy and pirates in the same ce. .


    Marco, who was closest to Whitebeard, couldn''t help but use his Devil Fruit ability directly after receiving the impact, otherwise this powerful power could tear it into pieces in an instant.


    The Moby Dick under their feet waspletely scrapped at this moment. Fortunately, they were still standing on the ice. Aokiji''s huge freezing ability directly froze nearly 400 meters under the sea. This level was enough for Whitebeard. y well in the next time.


    "Don''t forget the agreement between you and me. Now that I have abided by it, the rest is up to you."


    Whitebeard restrained his uncontroble power, and then began to shout loudly. He was not sure where the other party was, but he could believe that the other party could definitely hear him.


    The battlefield fell silent once again. No one could understand what Whitebeard meant when he said this, but what he meant was actually very clear. That is, this war waspletely his agreement with others.


    The prison inmates who came out of Impel Down City had already huddled together after feeling the aura emanating from Whitebeard just now. They did not want to participate in the war in the first ce, but this time they were just forced toe here, and their strength was They are not very powerful on this battlefield, they are just cannon fodder at best.


    So in the end, under themand of a red-nosed man, they all gathered in the corner of the battlefield, holding a video phone bug. While recording the battle at the scene, they were still looking for a way to escape.


    Surviving in the cracks on the edge of the battlefield is good. No one is paying attention to them now. Anyway, this group of rtively weak people does not pose any threat. It is estimated that as long as they If they don''t take action, no matter the two forces, neither side will have any ideas.


    But who would focus on them at this time? The abnormal behavior shown by Whitebeard has made these people feel incredible. The navy is guessing what Whitebeard wants to do? But just looking at the situation ahead, no one dares to make a judgment.

 Chapter 489 The remnants of the old era

    <h4>Chapter 489 The remnants of the old era</h4>


    Garp on the high tform now seems to be unable to care about Ace beside him. Even Sengoku, who is the marshal of the navy, has noticed that something seems to be very wrong.


    Winning or losing this war seemed to have bepletely indifferent in their eyes. What was more important was to quickly figure out what purpose Whitebeard had.


    Akainu''s initial attack did not seed, but in the end he retreated directly to the edge of the high tform, quietly observing the situation ahead.


    The other two generals also stopped what they were doing.


    So far, the only ones who have maintained a fighting state are probably the robot tyrant bears who have no emotions. Although the appearance of the pacifists has caused a lot of losses, it has not caused much harm overall.


    There was more than one person in the crowd who never participated in the war.


    As the only woman in the Shichibukai, Hancock has been staying behind, observing the progress of the war from beginning to end. Let alone participating in the war, he didn''t even bother to look at her. .


    There was a snake sitting under her buttocks, maintaining her own state from beginning to end. Of course, she was also observing the overall trends of the war.


    When he saw that something was wrong with Whitebeard, Hancock stood up with a serious expression. After taking a serious look at Whitebeard, he looked directly at the snake behind him in a low voice and said, "Leave quickly!"


    "Hehe! Hancock! It seems you have discovered something? Why don''t you share it with me?"


    This thing has a carrot head, is dressed in pitch ck, and has a swollen belly. However, this guy is the Moonlight Moria in the original plot.


    But when faced with such questions, Hancock said in a cold voice, "Get out!!"


    "But it''s really cold! Hee, hee, hee, hee, hee, hee, hee!"


    Moonlight Moria didn''t care about Hancock''s attitude, but continued to smile. However, years of experience told him that this woman was definitely not as simple as she seemed on the surface.


    After Whitebeard gathered all his strength, although there was no difference in his appearance, anyone with a discerning eye could see at a nce that the old man''s appearance waspletely different from before.


    As the only one who knew about it, Marco didn''t feel the slightest joy in his heart even when he saw his father turning into what he was now. Instead, he had a sad look on his face, and tears were still flowing unsatisfactorily.


    The war began to stagnate at this moment. After Whitebeard jumped out of thepletely damaged Moby-Dick, huge cracks formed in the originally thick ice on the sea the moment it fell. .


    "Sengoku, things seem to be very bad."


    Garp said seriously, now it is no longer a question of whether he can save his grandson? The question of whether so many navies need to be saved is fully addressed.


    The aura exuded by Whitebeard is something that Garp, who has always been between friends and foes, knows very well.


    "You don''t need to say more now. Wait a moment. You can''t retain your strength, otherwise the group of people staying on the battlefield will be in great danger." Warring States frowned and said.


    "I understand, and I will do what I should do."


    Garp said seriously, turning his head and ncing at Ace who was kneeling on the ground and staring ahead. There were no tears in this guy''s eyes for a long time. From the first moment, seeing Whitebeard like this was full of tears. Shocked.


    At least in his memory, his father has never been like this. Why is he like this now? No one knows.


    After Whitebeard jumped off the Moby Dick, he stood directly in the center of the entire square. Now he haspletely disrupted the navy''s original deployment n, and now there are no rules at all.


    Whitebeard''s power haspletely exceeded everyone''s expectations. Even General Akainu, who had always been confident, always thought that Whitebeard was already an old man, but his current performance haspletely made him feel To the fear.


    The strength of this man perfectly exins his performance as the most powerful man in the world.


    "I am just a remnant of the old era. There is no ship that can carry me in the new era. But today, I will let you feel the power of the old era!!!!"


    Whitebeard stood in the middle of the entire square, looking around with a serious face. A domineering voice instantly unfolded. Anyone who heard these words had already stopped their hands obediently. action.


    Even the pacifists, who had been in a state of attack, silently stopped what they were doing. It was probably because the people above started to give instructions like this.


    Everyone wants to look at Whitebeard. How far will the next move be? What kind of story will this so-called remnant of the old era create?


    "All members of the Whitebeard Pirates, evacuate from now on!"


    Marco stood on the broken Moby Dick, with tears in his eyes, and shouted loudly and tremblingly.


    Just in contrast to what Whitebeard shouted just now, the members of the Whitebeard Pirates, who were already suspicious, became even more confused at this moment.


    Although they obeyed Whitebeard''s orders, they never questioned Marco''s orders as the captain of the first team. However, these people in the center of the battlefield were all plunged into deep doubts.


    No one could figure out what happened. As the core father of the entire Whitebeard Pirates, he suddenly burst into such great strength. Marco, who was also the leader, suddenly behaved like this.


    "My dear sons, follow Marco''s words and evacuate the Navy Headquarters from now on. This war hase to an end."


    Whitebeard shouted again, repeating what Marco just said.


    "Dad, what about Ace?"


    In an extremely quiet moment, Bista, the captain of the Whitebeard Pirates, opened his mouth and asked in confusion.


    "Dad, you don''t need to worry about me. Get out of here quickly. There is a trick by the navy in this ce, which will be very detrimental to you."


    Ace also shouted loudly at this moment.


    "Ace, even if everyone gives up on you, I will definitely save you, no matter who gets in the way!"


    Luffy also shouted at this time, with a domineering air of indifference and the aura of having to achieve his goal, and he was still walking forward step by step.

 Chapter 490 Something is wrong

    <h4>Chapter 490 Something is wrong</h4>


    The one after another words also put the entire battlefield into a rather strange state.


    But not everyone is afraid of everything. At least at this moment, Akainu, who is the admiral of the navy, stayed for a while and shouted directly to everyone, "What else can you do? But all pirates, There is absolutely no reason to let it go. No matter what happens today, the Navy must win!"


    As he spoke, Akainu''s entire body turned directly into the state ofva, and with an angry expression, he began to punch his fist into the sky.


    With every attack, a stream of magma rushed directly into the sky. As thest fist fell, Akainu shouted loudly, "Meteor Volcano!!!"


    After the sound fell, countless meteorites began to fall from the entire scene, all of which were attacks by Akainu. Huge magma fists fell to the ground indiscriminately. At this moment, no matter whether it was the navy or the navy, Thief, a person with low strength ispletely in fear.


    "If it''s someone else, the execution will begin immediately!!"


    Marshal of the Warring States Period also spoke at this moment, with a rather serious expression.


    When you can''t understand anything, you can only use this method to force out the final answer.


    Upon hearing this, the members of the Whitebeard Pirates were just about to take action. Whitebeard, who was in the center of the battlefield, waved the sword in his hand directly, without notifying anyone or saying a word, and suddenly headed towards He shed down the dividing line between the navy and the pirates.


    With just such a blow, the entire battlefield was directly divided into two halves. A crack with a width of about 10 meters opened directly where the attack passed, and the depth was directly connected to the magma underground.


    "My sons, everyone followed Marco''s orders and began to evacuate back. I don''t want any of my sons to be harmed in this war, so please go back."


    Whitebeard opened his mouth again and said.


    What was originally a good war has now be a one-person war, and people don''t have the slightest fear. Even if one person faces hundreds of thousands of people, he still remains calm.


    "Navy, let me, Whitebeard, fight with you next!"


    After turning his head, Whitebeard looked domineeringly towards the direction of the high tform.


    Immediately afterwards, he punched the ce where the high tform was with his left hand. The powerful shock wave was like entering an uninhabitednd. All the navy and people in the way flew into the sky one by one.


    There was no suspense in this scene, but just when the shock wave was about to approach the high tform, the energy of the entire shock wave suddenly stopped.


    When all the dust fell, the three navy generals were standing upright on the edge of the high tform, using their own devil fruit abilities to offset the opponent''s attacks.


    "What''s wrong with this old man? Why did his strength suddenly increase so much?"


    General Akainu frowned and said angrily.


    Obviously, many investigations have been done before and many things have been confirmed, but now I didn''t expect that the old guy Whitebeard could be so powerful in the blink of an eye.


    Even if three people join forces to block the opponent''s ordinary attack, it is already a bit overwhelming for them.


    "Warring States, did you find anything wrong?"


    Garp stayed on the high tform behind and asked Sengoku next to him.


    "It''s not easy to confirm now, but what is certain is that Whitebeard must have done something to make his strength suddenly increase so high!"


    Sengoku said with the same frown.


    "What should we do now? Is it possible to watch Whitebeard running rampant in the Navy Headquarters?"


    As Garp said, he clenched his fists. Facing the beast-like white beard, he already wanted to go up and suppress the opponent.


    Whitebeard''s casual punch attack has already caused considerable losses to the navy. So in the end, what kind of impact will it have if Whitebeard directly uses his ultimate move?


    But just when they were still thinking about countermeasures, a red me suddenly appeared in the sky, and the light prated directly through Whitebeard''s chest, and the attack seemed to fall from the sky.


    Faced with such a situation, not to mention the people on the battlefield who were confused, even the prisoners who were watching the battle anding out of the city, as well as themon people in front of the live broadcast tform, all showed surprised expressions.


    "Master Bucky, can you tell me what happened?"


    "That''s right, Boss Bucky, what''s going on..."


    ��


    All of a sudden, there was a suddenmotion.


    "Daddy!!!"


    ��


    The Whitebeard Pirates were all so frightened that they broke out in cold sweat. After all, from the perception of Haki, there was no special situation at all. As for this attack, it seemed to have happened out of thin air.


    "Guhahahaha~, I didn''t expect that he actually showed up! I thought he would go there for a while."


    Whitebeard stood thereughing and shouting. The originally t chest now had a big hole like a fist, and this hole directly prated the entire chest. If you look from the front to the back, you can clearly feel it. The fear thates with going to this cave.


    No one could understand what Whitebeard said. Even the Warring States Marshal was confused, but he could guess a little bit.


    After all, before this, the World Government had agreed that reinforcements would appear, but as of the moment the war began, no one from the World Government had appeared.


    Such an unexpected attack, if it was reallyunched by someone sent by the World Government, would really make the navy feel chills in its back.


    "Warring States, it seems the situation is not very good!"


    Garp raised his head and looked up at the sky. The attack was obviously falling from the sky. Although there was nothing in his perception, it could not hinder their experience as an older generation.


    "Perhaps this kind of ending is really good and vigorous, and it leaves no regrets."


    Whitebeard said, silently ncing at the big knife in his right hand, and then inserted it directly into the ground with force.


    Immediately afterwards, Whitebeard turned to look at the members of the Whitebeard Pirates behind him, with a warm smile on his face, and said thoughtfully, "Sons, you must take good care of yourselves in the future. The most important thing is to maintain unity. From now on, You have to walk your own path, and dad can''t apany you all the way."


    "Daddy!!!"


    ��


    The members of the Whitebeard Pirates burst into tears one by one. They probably had guessed what was going to happen, but this war was already full of too many uncertainties, and now this situation is even more... It was a huge surprise to them.

 Chapter 491 A threatening attack

    <h4>Chapter 491 A threatening attack</h4>


    While everyone was still confused, Whitebeard''s hands stretched forward directly, and after clenching his fists, a white light shield began to appear around the fists, and his tyrannical power was also highlighted at this moment.


    While he was using this power, the ground under his feet also began to crack inch by inch. The shock wave also started from under his feet and continued to spread outward. The naval soldiers who were closer were struck by the shock wave again and again. All flew away.


    But if this attack was just like this, it would be too outrageous.


    Whitebeard began to slowly collide his two fists, but as the two fists approached, powerful shock waves swept through the entire Marinfando.


    Even the outside sea, which was trapped by the ice, began to spread rapidly towards the distance because of this powerful shock wave.


    "What on earth is he doing?"


    Kizaru grinned and squinted his eyes, looking at this scene in disbelief.


    The shock wave was like wind, constantly washing everyone''s faces. This hurricane-like shock wave made them, including the generals, almost unable to open their eyes.


    "Warring States, have you figured out what this old guy Whitebeard wants to do?"


    "Now is the time to take care of these things! No matter what he does, this old guy seems to be using his own life to fill up Malinfando. Once he uses it, he won''t even wait for a reaction, and he may sink in an instant. In the sea, hurry up and stop it!"


    Seng Guo was still in the mood to answer Garp''s words. His expression was almost distorted and he started shouting.


    Ace, who was originally kneeling there but was knocked down by the shock wave, now no one is in the mood to pay attention to the other person.


    However, the prisoners who came out of Impel Down City have already huddled up one by one. Most of them have burst into tears. Each and every one of them has even begun to tell hisst words. No matter from which angle you look at it, , everyone feels almost unanimously, that is, the old guy Whitebeard has some kind of mental illness, and nothing has happened yet, but he actually wants to sink into the sea with Marin Fando with his own life.


    "What are you still doing? Stop Whitebeard!"


    The Warring States Marshal who was staying at the top of the high tform turned into a golden Buddha, which was at least fifty or sixty meters tall. He stood in the middle of the Buddha and shouted to the three navy generals in a stern voice.


    This situation is no longer something that people below the rank of lieutenant general can participate in. Even the top experts like them feel shuddering when faced with Whitebeard''s current situation.


    Garp is even a little confused, what is going on with this old guy Whitebeard? Let��s not talk about the issue of execution or not. This thing has not even started yet. How can you, as the opponent��s big boss, start to use the ultimate move directly?


    But now he waspletely helpless. As he watched Whitebeard slowly began to collide his two fists together, the white light that originally appeared on each fist now seemed to have begun to turn into ck.


    ording to their estimates, it would only take a minute at most for Whitebeard to charge up all his ultimate moves. By then, who would be able to stop the opponent from sinking Marinfando into the sea.


    "Ice Age!!!!"


    "Pluto!!!"


    "Eight-foot Magatama!!!"


    The three generals of the Navy immediately worked together. This time was different from the past. Normally, it didn''t matter if they just kept doing it, but this time it waspletely different.


    Faced with Whitebeard''s behavior, even if he couldn''t figure out what he wanted to do? But they could clearly feel how powerful the attack the old man was about to unleash this time would be.


    The three people were directly facing such a powerful hurricane. Although the powerful impact of the shock wave made them unable to open their eyes, at least they could directly spread the attack while determining the opponent''s position.


    The powerful freezing power above the ground quickly spread towards Whitebeard''s feet. Wherever the freezing power passed, almost even the air could condense!


    At the same time, Admiral Kizaru, who was in mid-air, began to emit countless light spots from his hands, and attacked Whitebeard at the same time. As for Admiral Akainu, he chose the middle and directly used the rock berry fruit ability to attack hard steel.


    Sengoku, who was staying at the top, just used his body to directly start to create a barrier. The main purpose was to prevent the next attack from hurting those people who were behind to deal with it.


    The total number ofbatants here is only 100,000, but there are at least nearly 40,000 who are here to help. Their job content is very simple, that is, to assist these hundreds of thousands of people in their daily lives.


    However, they did not have the strength to withstand this disaster. The Navy chose to directly start a top war with the Whitebeard Pirates. However, they did not expect that in the end of this war, they would be a joke.


    The more than 100,000 fighting naval forces now have no idea how much damage they have suffered.


    In the blink of an eye, the attacks of the three navy generals had all begun to focus on Whitebeard''s side. While the other members of the Whitebeard Pirates were roaring at the top of their lungs, the attacks of the three people unexpectedly stopped directly. Nearly 1m in front of Whitebeard.


    Whether it was Aokiji, Kizaru or even Akainu, the attacks of the three people stayed at a distance together, as if there was an invisible barrier in the middle, directly blocking the three people from attacking again.


    Faced with this sudden situation, Akainu, as the person closest to Whitebeard, switched the attack in his hands, and once again mmed his two fists in his direction.


    But Whitebeard was just preparing his own power umtion from beginning to end, as if he already knew that someone would help him.


    At least this time he made the right bet. On the Infinity, Chang Nuo stretched his hands forward, and an invisible force directly enveloped Whitebeard''s surroundings.


    "Your Majesty the King, aren''t we going to take action?"


    Enelu asked with some confusion as he watched his king start to take action.


    "We''ll be on stage in a while! It doesn''t matter whether we take action now or not!"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    Enel was even more unbelievable, but then he showed a serious expression. He also understood that the next war belonging to the Whitebeard Pirates waspletely over, but the war belonging to the Toru Empire had just begun.


    But then, Enelu''s body began to sh with lightning, and his heart was serious and excited at the same time.

 Chapter 492 The End of Whitebeard

    <h4>Chapter 492 The End of Whitebeard</h4>


    On Whitebeard''s side, the three people took turns attacking each other, but they didn''t touch each other at all. Now it was no longer a problem of their abilities, but an issue of being unable to confirm what exactly was going on?


    Sengoku stayed here as a marshal, but Garp''s experience, experience and strength were only worse than those of Sengoku marshal.


    He could see the seriousness of the situation with just one nce, so he who was still on the high tform disappeared in the next second.


    The moment he appeared, Garp had already appeared next to Whitebeard, and his fist moved directly towards Whitebeard''s chest. The moment he approached, the top of his fist suddenly turned ck, and red traces were directly attached to it. above.


    With the powerful strength and the blessing of the overlord''s domineering aura, at this moment, even if there is a hundred-meter-high mountain in front of him, I am afraid it can be ttened by this punch.


    "The power of awakening~infinite folding!!!"


    On the Infinity, Changnuo roared loudly, and a blue barrier appeared directly in front of Whitebeard. He did not choose to directly confront Garp, the old guy''s fist.


    But for Garp, he only had one chance to take action. Seeing that Whitebeard''s energy umtion work had beenpleted, when he punched down, surprisingly nothing happened.


    Moreover, this punch seemed to be unable to touch Whitebeard''s body, or it seemed that the opponent''s body was not in this area at all.


    Anyway, no matter which angle you look at it, it makes Garp''s eyes widen.


    He felt this scene in disbelief. After all, this was the navy''sst chance.


    Whitebeard, on the other hand, calmly pressed his two fists together. The muscles on his arms had already bulged exaggeratedly. The original white color on his fists now seemed to be ck. .


    Powerful power was also generated at this moment. Whitebeard raised his head slightly and looked at Garp in front of him. Whitebeard smiled slightly and said, "We are already old friends!..."


    In the end, Garp only heard this sentence, and the rest he only saw Whitebeard''s mouth moving.


    But then Whitebeard suddenly raised his two fists upwards and shouted loudly, "Infrasonic shock~infinite waves!"


    But their fists were suddenly raised in the sky. Although they could feel obvious fluctuations in their abilities, the next second everyone began to show surprised expressions!


    They didn''t understand at all what Whitebeard wanted to do with this operation? After umting strength for so long, do you know that in the end, it was just for this punch? The key doesn''t have any real effect yet.


    At this moment, everyone paused,pletely unaware of what happened? But the key point is that Whitebeard himself, at this moment, both his nose and eyes have begun to slowly flow out blood.


    "Boy Tru, I''ve done what I promised you!"


    Until the end, Whitebeard roared loudly to show his attitude.


    Of course, these were thest words of his life.


    Because after shouting these words, Whitebeard''s right hand was directly holding the big knife stuck on the ground, and his eyes began to slowly close.


    "What the hell is this old guy doing?"


    Kizaru originally had an indifferent expression, but at this moment he hadpletely changed into something else.


    He has probably never been so shocked in his life. He is obviously the strongest man in the world, but the final ending is like this?


    Everyone in the Whitebeard Pirates also had their eyes widened with disbelief.


    Ace, who was on the high tform, was lying there trembling, his eyes filled with loneliness.


    Whether they are the members of the Whitebeard Pirates or the people from Impel Down who came with Luffy, their performances are almost the same.


    "What exactly is going on?"


    Bucky, with his red nose and snot, eyes wide open and mouth open,pletely expressed his difficulty in epting this situation.


    Warring States, who was staying on the high tform, immediately realized that something was wrong. Whitebeard''s final move was definitely not as simple as imagined. Such powerful attacks were all directed towards the sky, so what exactly existed above his head? unknown?


    But then it totally dawned on him.


    The main reason is because everyone who can possess the hegemony of seeing and hearing perceived one thing at the same time, that is, the sky above has bepletely different at this moment.


    In fact, even if you don''t need to perceive Haki, you can now see it very intuitively.


    In mid-air, various mechanical things have begun to fall rapidly towards the ground. As for what the prototype of this thing is, I am afraid no one knows. What Whitebeard gave his life for is such a behemoth. .


    "Daddy!!!"


    Ace, who was on the high tform, trembled for a while, then roared loudly with all his strength.


    He said that he could not ept such a result at all. Even if he died this time, he did not want to implicate anyone in his sea group.


    But everyone already understands that Whitebeard has fallen silent, and that he still maintains hisst majestic momentum even though he hase to the end of his full state.


    But at this time, while those things in the sky had notpletely fallen, and not even a single part had fallen to the ground, a group of uninvited guests came to the battlefield again at this time.


    ckbeard and a group of people from the original plot appeared here. They talked andughed with each other and didn''t care about the people on Whitebeard''s side or the navy.


    But could it be that they were the only ones who showed up?


    The things that started to fall from the sky began to slowly hit the ground. As the first part fell to the ground, a 10m diameter pit was opened on the ground. However, at this moment, the sky There are countless things on top that are ready to fall.


    All of these things together could still sink Malinfando into the sea.


    Although many members of the navy were injured or killed at the scene, they still did not achieve the casualty results they expected. Now seeing that Whitebeard is dead, the war has entered its final state, but those things that are about to fall in the sky, It was still a disaster for them, even enough to crush the entire naval base into pieces.

 Chapter 493 The Surprise of the Five Old Stars

    <h4>Chapter 493 The Surprise of the Five Old Stars</h4>


    Even so far, no one knows what kind of thing fell from the sky? Why was it that in the end, only Whitebeard could notice that there were so many people present?


    But those people from the World Government who were also watching a live broadcast of a war, when they saw all the power of Whitebeard concentrated in the sky, all the five old stars could not help themselves and stood up directly. body.


    They stared at the screen with expressions of disbelief. Others didn''t know what the situation was, but these guys knew it all too well.


    "Lord Lord Loft, can you tell me what exactly happened?"


    Cholbasheng, the guy in charge of politics, looked at Lovete with an angry look. This guy is mainly in charge of the military. The security of the world government is all concentrated in the hands of the other party. But he didn''t expect that such a situation would happen now?


    "Do you think you should ask me this? Shouldn''t you ask Marshal Kong?"


    Love was also a little angry. He didn''t understand what happened at all. Although he was in charge of military affairs, everyone knew openly and secretly that the military affairs of this guy''s team leader were not simply in charge of one person.


    The Marshal-in-Chief of the World Government''s Armed Forces has been equivalent to directly taking over his position, and can directly bypass anyone to deal with war emergencies in the event of a war.


    "ording to normal logic, the Air Force is the most secretive force of our world government. From the beginning of its construction, many things have been ced on it that can suppress the domineering power of the world. Why can it be so powerful at an altitude of several thousand meters? Others found out? Why did Whitebeard devote his life to directly targeting our Air Force? Shouldn''t these things have a clear result, and then let''s discuss who is right and who is wrong?"


    Saint Siloamia said in a calm tone. He did not make a fuss like the others. Although this incident was very unbelievable, now that the matter has been revealed, what else can they do?


    "What Saint Siloamia said is right, but we need to hurry up and deal with this matter now. It seems that this war is almost over by now. Although the air force will not bepletely wiped out, this time It��s enough to break your muscles and bones, so now we should consider how to suppress the navy!��


    Loft said with a sigh.


    "Sheng Qiolba, why didn''t the back-up man you left behind arrive? It''s already at this time. Logically speaking, you should be able to see the other party''s figure, right?"


    Saint Siloamia turned to look at the guy in charge of politics. His purpose was very clear. He just wanted to ask why the red-haired pirate group that he arranged before had not arrived yet.


    These old men have been standing in front of the screen, quietly admiring the war. As for which side has suffered more damage, they don''t seem to be interested at all. They are more interested in enjoying what this war brings. It��s just a process.


    But in the process of appreciation, these old guys will inevitably have some doubts in their hearts.


    Every unexpected situation that urred could make them feel excited, but they were quite surprised that red-haired Shanks was not found until the end.


    "Didn''t you hear the report that was just passed on? The guys from the Tru Empire seemed to have also participated in this war. I was originally thinking about what these little guys could do, but now it seems that they are good. Most likely, the guys like Kes were kept out by them."


    Saint Cholba said.


    "Sigh~, things are getting more and moreplicated. I don''t have that much thought to deal with these things anymore. The adults have already given instructions, so I will escte this war."


    Lord Loft said, then stood up and left the ce.


    The other people did not stop them in any way. They hoped that things would be as lively as possible. In any case, they would not escape their control in the end. Thest thing they expected was that the air force of the World Government would not take action before. He was knocked down by others.


    However, they were not the only ones surprised.


    On the battlefield, with more and more falling debris, followed by the corpses of various people, it can be said that Whitebeard''s punch destroyed at least nearly 10,000 troops.


    It was only now that Sengoku, as the marshal of the navy, finally understood that the foreign aid mentioned by the World Government before was probably referring to what was falling below this time.


    The world government has three military units. Many people know these things, but as the marshal of the naval force, Sengoku has never seen what the air force looks like? In other words, in his opinion, the world government actually has two branches of military services, one army and one navy.


    But from the current perspective, the World Government''s air force actually does exist.


    "Everyone begins to do their best to stop the things falling from the sky. Other things on the battlefield will be slow down for the time being!"


    Sengoku shouted helplessly into the microphone.


    Not to mention that they had such thoughts, the rest of the Whitebeard Pirates had long since ignored their sorrow. After all, the things falling from the sky were enough topletely annihte them.


    Above the sky, a dense ck mass directly covered them. Not to mention Marinfando, there were at least two inds of this size appearing. This was almost the same as a normal ind falling, and itpletely made them feel that life was passing away at the end. .


    ording to their strength, it is not too difficult to block these falling objects on the whole, but even if they can block them, so what? At least 1/3 of the people present will perish in this fall.


    This number of people is not only the navy, but also includes members of the pirate group with white beards.


    But even in such aplicated environment, there was still one person who rushed towards the high tform regardless of it, as if ignoring any obstacles in front of him.


    But now, even a powerful person would not be in the mood to take care of this little guy. Luffy''s desire to save Ace, even if this thing falls, will not stop him from moving forward at all.


    As the third general of the navy, even Akainu, seeing this scene, could only nce at Luffy with a frown, then jumped up and began to greet the objects that were about to fall in the sky.


    All of them are like this, and no one cares about who the protagonist of this war is anymore.

 Chapter 494 The Fall of the Air Force

    <h4>Chapter 494 The Fall of the Air Force</h4>


    Not to mention other times, at least at this moment the beliefs between the navy and the pirates are exactly the same, although they don''t understand why Whitebeard chose this way to end? No one knew what was falling from the sky.


    It is estimated that except for the top brass of the navy, all of these people arepletely confused.


    However, as the instigator of this incident, Changnuo still stayed in the Infinity and watched all of this quietly without the slightest thought of being anxious.


    Even Enilu, who was standing behind him, was impatient and wanted to rush out right now. However, seeing that His Majesty the King still maintained such a calm expression really made him feel helpless. understand.


    "Don''t be anxious, put down the electric current on your body, don''t affect the operation of the Infinity!"


    Changnuo looked forward leisurely and said to Enilu behind him.


    "Your Majesty the King, why don''t you take action now?"


    Enelu asked doubtfully.


    "It''s not the time to be anxious now. You''ll know after a while." Chang Nuo said.


    Now everyone on the battlefield is urgently dealing with the falling debris from the sky.


    Of course, in this process, all those with lower strength have already been smashed into pieces.


    Even the pacifists in the navy were trying their best to attack the sky with all their strength, but many pacifists were still smashed to the ground one by one during the whole process.


    The parts that fell from the sky quicklynded on the ground one by one like meteorites. In the process, there were also some people wearing silver-white clothes who also hit the ground directly with pale faces.


    For those who were rtively weak in the entire area, unknowingly, countless people werepletely submerged on this battlefield.


    But among this whistling sound, people outside could not hear the slightest wail. The things that could be seen with the naked eye werepletely covered by falling things.


    As for those prison inmates who came out of Impel Down City, it is probably because of the luck of Bucky the Clown that even though his strength is rtively low, there are norge debris falling in his area.


    Even among these prison inmates, no one has been injured or injured so far.


    But today''s battlefield has almost gathered the high-endbat power of the entire pirate world. Just relying on these falling objects is not enough to annihte all of them.


    However, those falling objects in the skysted for nearly ten minutes. During this period, even powerful people such as the three navy generals and Marco and the Whitebeard Pirates, after solving these things, a Everyone started to pant.


    However, the entire Malinfando, as the former naval headquarters base, has already be a ruins on the battlefield at this moment.


    Whether it is members of the Navy or the Whitebeard Pirates, the total number of personnel has now been reduced by at least 1/3. These people were either killed by bombs or fell into huge cracks. Anyway, without exception, in this world The falling equipment of the government air force has caused endless damage to them.


    Those people watching the live broadcast outside were all stunned. They did not expect that the final oue of this war would be like this.


    The losses on the Navy''s side can be said to be the most serious. After all, even if 1/3 of the people are lost, for the Navy, it is equivalent to a direct loss of tens of thousands of troops. This kind of loss can be achieved by the Whitebeard Pirates. can be ignored.


    As of now, people on both sides are still blocked by the huge crack. However, Ace, as the protagonist of this war, was also directly taken away from the tform by Luffy during this incident. However, the overall situation has led to The two of them are still on the navy side.


    Even though there were heavy casualties now, and everyone was exhausted from dealing with what had just happened, they were still inevitably attacked by the next attack if they walked directly through the naval forces so tantly.


    Now that Whitebeard has disappeared, the biggest threat to the navy has long disappeared. ckbeard and a group of people have also appeared here, but they just dealt with the falling objects in the sky. ckbeard is also considered A lot of effort was put into it.


    With the ability of the Dark Fruit, he handles these things in a simple and rough way. Even for him, these things are not a challenge at all.


    "This old guy actually died before I coulde over! How should my n proceed?"


    ckbeard stood in front of Whitebeard, not too far away, quietly looking at this face that he had been familiar with for more than ten years. There was no self-me or sadness on his expression, but more of a feeling of respect for the deceased. Whitebeard''s invective.


    "Captain, now that Whitebeard is dead, should we leave?"


    A sickly-looking guy next to ckbeard asked in a rather nonchnt tone.


    "Uh ha ha ha!!! What''s there to be anxious about now? Let''s just see how this war ends. Although Father Whitebeard is dead, it doesn''t stop us from watching what happens next. Those things!��


    ckbeard said with an indifferent expression, as if he didn''t care at all that this was a battlefield.


    The other side.


    "Marshal of the Warring States Period, Whitebeard is dead, and our mission is over. Then I will not apany you from now on. You can handle the rest by yourself."


    Hancock walked to the side of the Warring States Marshal and said it directly without caring about the other person''s opinion.


    "Fufufufu!! What the Empress said makes sense. Whitebeard has been dealt with, so naturally there will be no more things to do with us Shichibukai. I think the rest should be left to your navy to handle on your own. We shouldn��t have much to do with each other, right?��


    Domingo also came over at this time, and without paying attention to the eyes of others, he spoke directly.


    The battlefield has reached this room. The reason why Hancock wants to withdraw from this area is because he knows the military n of the Tru Empire, so he doesn''t want to stay here anymore.


    As for Domingo, he originally belonged to the Celestial Dragons and knew too much about the secret information of the World Government, so in this matter, he felt that it was definitely not as simple as imagined.

 Chapter 495 Battlefield Rules

    <h4>Chapter 495 Battlefield Rules</h4>


    At least in his opinion, in the end, Whitebeard used his own life to directly attack the World Government Air Force in the sky, but did not save Ace in the end, so this incident already exined many problems.


    The biggest situation is that he knows that Ace will not die in this ce. Combined with Whitebeard''s final words, what exactly is the agreement hepleted with the other party? As long as he thinks more, he can definitely understand the things involved.


    As a guy who understands both ck and white, Domingo is definitely one of the few smart people in this world.


    As a former Celestial Dragon, and knowing so much secret information about the World Government, but still being able to live so carefree until now, this already exins too many things.


    Therefore, his view of the essence of things is definitely not as simple as it seems in front of him. In addition, he has too thorough a grasp of the era of people like the World Government. Faced with the situation that has developed to this state, it has indeed reached the best retreat. opportunity.


    However, as the marshal of the navy, Sengoku actually did not care much about the Shichibukai forcesposed of these pirates, and their life and death did not cause any loss to the navy.


    Facing the two people''s resignations, Sengoku said in a low voice, "The agreement we signed is directly aimed at the Whitebeard Pirates, not Whitebeard as a person! What do you think has been resolved so far?"


    "Marshal Warring States, I don''t have that much time to spend with you here! I don''t believe that the remaining pirates can''t be subdued by the rest of the navy?"


    Hancock said equally coldly.


    "Now is not the time for you to bargain. Either do it! Or quit the ranks of the Shichibukai!"


    Warring States turned his head and looked as if he wanted to kill Hancock.


    Who knew that the other party was not threatened by this aspect at all, Hancock just smiled coldly and said, "Then since the Warring States Marshal said so, I will do as you said, Shichibukai, it''s okay if you don''t do it!"


    Hancock said without showing any mercy to Sengoku. Then he turned around gracefully and started walking towards the edge of the battlefield with his snake.


    Domingo, who had been watching by the side, was a little surprised. In his impression, when did the empress be so domineering?


    But all thoughts were attracted by the sound of the next explosion.


    Luffy and Ace, who were struggling to run in the direction of the pirates, were hit by aser wave directly next to them before they reached the edge. The powerful explosion destroyed them in just an instant. The two of them flew out directly.


    At this time, Ace still had sea-floor stone handcuffs on his hands, and he had no ability to move at all, even if he could not stand firmly.


    He could only rely on Luffy, but Luffy was also a Devil Fruit user and didn''t dare to touch the spot on his hand.


    This time it was the pacifists who directly attacked them. So far, there are at least a dozen such weapons on the entire battlefield.


    However, they all had red eyes and started to prepare to concentrate in the direction of Luffy.


    For the Navy, the war has now reached this point. If Ace can still escape under the nose of the Navy at this time, it will be a great shame for the Navy.


    None of them would let this happen!


    "Pacifists, your ultimate mission is to kill Straw Hat and Ace. You must not let any of them escape this range."


    Zhan Momomaru, who had a watermelon-shaped hairstyle and held a huge ax in his hand, shouted in the direction of Luffy and the others with a high-pitched voice.


    Although there is a 10m wide ravine on both sides, this width cannot block the passage of some rtively powerful people.


    Faced with such a situation, even though they were already feeling extremely tired, Marco still led the captains of other divisions and began to move directly in the direction of Ace regardless of their own safety.


    Not only the people from their Whitebeard Pirate Ship were going with them, but some people from Impel Down City were also going with them. Among them were Shakrok Dar and the original Shichibukai Jinbe!


    But today''s Whitebeard Pirates no longer have the intimidation of Whitebeard. To the navy, they are nothing more than a group ofmbs waiting to be ughtered.


    Akainu, who had always been on the more excited side, now felt calm and calm.


    Facing the pirates who were only about a hundred meters away, he just raised his hand slightly, and then continued to transform into the magma state. With a move of Meteor Volcano, he directly entered the ground-washing state again.


    The powerful force directly put the pirates on the other side of the rift into dire straits once again.


    As a naval admiral, there is no doubt about Akainu''sbat effectiveness. He can instantly kill anyone under the admiral anytime and anywhere, and his strength is even higher than that of an ordinary admiral.


    The war hassted from the very beginning to this time, and it only really became intense after Whitebeard''s death.


    "Tikki, everything happened because of you. Today I must get rid of you, the traitor, for the Whitebeard Pirates!"


    Marco, who flew to the navy side, had already been blinded by anger. He transformed into a phoenix and attacked ckbeard directly at extremely fast speeds.


    Faced with such a situation, ckbeard had no fear at all. In the entire Whitebeard Pirates, except for Whitebeard, there was really no one who could make him afraid.


    ckbeard is definitely a legend in terms of actualbat experience and mentality. He is not only powerful because of his Devil Fruit ability. A man who can create such scars on the face of Yonko Shanks, How could it be possible that he was just an unknown person?


    "Marco, my father is already dead, why are you chasing me so hard? But if you don''t think so, then what''s the harm in having a fight?"


    ckbeard didn''t have the slightest fear, but said with a smile on his face.


    Standing next to him at this moment are his current partners, all of them are witnesses of the times, and they are so powerful that any one of them canpare with the existence of a general.


    Why doesn''t Marco understand? He actually knows most of the people in front of him. As powerful people of an era, the shock these people can cause when they appear on the sea again will actually have to wait until the end of this war. It''s scary.

 Chapter 496 Are you going to just watch?

    <h4>Chapter 496 Are you going to just watch?</h4>


    He couldn''t care about anything anymore, he was just filled with endless anger, maybe it was because of his high confidence in his own strength that he was like this.


    The moment Marco didn''t get close to ckbeard, the Phoenix in the form of blue mes suddenly cut it in the middle, and then a man holding a long knife suddenly appeared behind him and kept holding man in attack mode.


    However, his knife was still stained with a little phoenix me at this moment. For Marco, although this situation did not cause any harm, it could make him suddenly regain consciousness.


    This is where the battlefield is, not just a fight between two people or two pirates!


    Marco, who had regained hisposure, suddenly took off and turned around when he was only a dozen meters away from ckbeard. ck whirlpools began to appear in ckbeard''s hands, as if he was ready to respond to Marco''s attacks at any time.


    "Uuhahahaha!!! Marco, why are you leaving?"


    ckbeard shouted withughter.


    Marco was suspended in mid-air. Although his eyes were still full of anger, at least everything he saw within his field of vision forced him to stop attacking.


    Today, Ace and Luffy are dependent on each other. The key is that both have been beaten to a state of disgrace. Ace''s is slightly better. The key is that Luffy is already in a state of hiding his breath at this moment.


    Perhaps out of human instinct, he would stand in front of Ace every time he attacked. Even though Ace, as an older brother, begged the other party, he still had to resist all attacks.


    Without Bai Zizi guarding the scene, it was impossible to break through the navy''s current blockades just by relying on their squad captains.


    "Warring States! Now that my father is dead, is it possible that this war cannot end?"


    Marco was suspended in mid-air in the form of a phoenix, roaring loudly and shouting in the direction of the high tform.


    The reason is not just for Ace and Luffy. Looking back, he can also see the other crew members who are in dire straits. Now that the Whitebeard Pirates havee over, without Whitebeard, they have all... At an absolute disadvantage.


    Just relying on the pacifists in the navy, they can be crushed like ants.


    The most powerful one among them is currently Marco. What can the rest do, no matter how powerful they are? Or the devil fruit ability is like Jozi, but from an attack point of view, he is really weak. Even a lieutenant general in the navy can directly trap the opponent. The strength of the remaining people, even if they are... The only captains of the team who canpete with each other are the Vice Admirals.


    However, the strength of these people, now that they are no longer protected by Whitebeard, is directly facing attacks from the top brass of the navy.


    Their personnel consumption rate has reached the extreme. If this war is not ended as soon as possible, then the entire Whitebeard Pirates may be in danger of beingpletely wiped out.


    Forced into desperation and seeing so many strong men in front of him, Marco finally had no choice but topromise in this way.


    But faced with Marco''s words, Sengoku had no intention of replying. However, as a naval admiral, Akainu showed a disdainful smile, and passed over the people on the battlefield, heading directly towards Marco step by step. Walked in this direction.


    As he walked away, he said with a mocking look on his face, "Since you have be a pirate, you must be prepared to face this situation. As a pirate, when can you negotiate terms with the navy? If you are allowed to leave today, Who willfort this fallen navy?


    Whitebeard is already dead, do you think there is still hope for you to leave? "


    "Is it necessary?" Marco asked.


    "This is the price you should bear. From now on, just stay here. This will also be your final destination!"


    Akainu said in a cold voice, and his body began to gradually turn intova dripping, and his eyes began to reveal endless enthusiasm. ording to his strength, he has full strength to deal with this guy Marco, as long as the other party does not deliberately escape. Be sure to keep the other person here.


    But as the three generals of the Navy Headquarters, the other two are still sitting leisurely at the top. Now the battle situation has beenpletely determined. Although they are a little confused about what Whitebeard did before, at least there is no Whitebeard now. After the threat, the three generals of the navy did not need to take action at all.


    "Emperor Tru! Dad has already sacrificed his life for the agreement. Is it possible that you just n to watch?"


    Marco roared angrily, looking at Whitebeard''s body still standing there, he really couldn''t control his inner emotions.


    Beforeing, Whitebeard had told Marco the whole story, and ultimately chose to end his life in this way.


    The blue pill that Chang Nuo left for Whitebeard can indeed stimte his strength when he was young, but this does not mean that Whitebeard''s current body can still bear it. This is why after he punched it, hepletely ended up in the On top of this naval headquarters base.


    ��Nani??????��


    ��


    After Marco shouted out, no matter whether it was the people on the battlefield or those watching the battle on the periphery of the battlefield, their eyes almost dropped in shock.


    Why is the Toru Empire still involved in the war between the Whitebeard Pirates and the Navy?


    And the questions they didn''t understand at all from beginning to end werepletely answered at this moment.


    From the very beginning, the war between the Whitebeard Pirates and the Navy has made people feel a lot incredible.


    Especially Whitebeard, as the leader. In the end, the army did not clean up a few, but he sacrificed his life. In the end, he only shot down an unknown object. Although it gave people a sense of Whitebeard''s strength before the end. It is indeed very powerful, but so what?


    After his death, he left the Whitebeard Pirates with nothing but endless harm, and now even the possibility of retreat has disappeared.


    However, this question is not only lingering in the heads of those watching the battle. Even Navy Marshal Sengoku has still not figured out where the starting point of this matter is.


    But this sentence directly broke the rtionship between them. Why would Whitebeard give up all the battles in front of him? In the end, he knocked down something that had nothing to do with him.

 Chapter 497 The Tru Empire appears

    <h4>Chapter 497 The Tru Empire appears</h4>


    Akainu, who was still walking towards Marco, suddenly paused after hearing these words.


    The atmosphere of a fierce battle on the battlefield was suddenly stopped for a few seconds because of these words.


    "Warring States, things seem to be in trouble!"


    Garp looked at Sengoku seriously as he spoke, mainly because they had already mentioned any possible external factors in the previous naval meeting, and the one that made them feel the mostplicated should be the Tru Empire.


    But so far, the personnel monitoring the South China Sea have never conveyed any news. This has essentially made them suspicious. However, the South China Sea is indeed far enough away from Marinfando. Even if the war starts, they wille here again. It''s definitely toote at all.


    ording to the normal conversion of this distance, even the body collection may not be able to catch up, but to be able to make such a deal and let Whitebeard pay his life, then this matter must be approved by Whitebeard.


    How could the Warring States Period not think of this? In the end, he could only clenched his fists tightly and shouted angrily, "Kill Ace first! Don''t affect the execution of the Navy Headquarters this time."


    The two navy admirals, Aoji and Kizaru, who were still sitting leisurely at the same ce, originally wanted to work leisurely until the end of the war, but now the possibility of the situation developing has made them unable to sit still at all.


    Although there were others quickly supporting Ace and Luffy, in the end, their fists were still unable to defeat the four hands. Everyone had been beaten and retreated, and there were also pacifists pressing forward step by step. , the powerful attack has long left them breathless.


    "You all get out of the way, I''ll do it!!"


    A giant about 30 meters tall walked directly with heavy steps, holding a huge ax in his hand, and shouted directly to the navy standing in front of him who was besieging Ace and his group.


    Then he suddenly began to swing the giant ax in his hand, apanied by the roaring wind. Apart from Luffy, who was almost dead, the only one left beside Ace was the captain of the Whitebeard Pirates.


    These three people were already preparing for the end. With a loud "Bang!!" sound, the huge ax seemed to hit the steel te directly.


    The powerful impact even sent the weaker navies on both sides flying away.


    They had given up any hope at first, but it seemed as if a space protective shield had formed above the three people, effectively isting everyone from the outside.


    While others were seeing this scene in disbelief, huge thunder light began to sh on the sea not far away, and the thunderclouds above their heads were also gathering rapidly.


    Immediately afterwards, under everyone''s attention, the Infinity slowly appeared in everyone''s sight.


    Even though most of the sea in front of us is still frozen, when the Infinity began to appear, the ice blocks in front of him began to melt at an extremely fast speed to create a navigation channel.


    Coupled with the attack released by Akainu before, the sea near Marinefando has already melted.


    "Who is that guy? He seems to be much more arrogant than Lord Bucky?"


    "That''s right, how can a child who looks half-grownpare to our great god Bucky?"


    ��


    These people who came out of Pushing City may have stayed in Pushing City for a long time, or they may not understand the situation in the outside world at all. When they saw Chang Nuo starting to appear here, they had no regard for him at all. idea.


    But this kind of stealing the limelight ispletely uneptable to them.


    But look at Bucky''s expression now. This guy''s tears and nose have already flowed all over the floor. He really can''t stand these guys who are always ttering him. What kind of cremation are they nning to send him to? field?


    But hearing that they were still ttering each other and belittling each other, Bucky finally couldn''t bear it and yelled, "Shut up! Don''t say it again."


    "Captain Bucky is so low-key..."


    "That''s right~"


    "I will definitely follow Captain Bucky from now on..."


    ��


    With just such a sentence, I don''t know where these guys were moved. Although they no longer mentioned the situation of this new guy, each one of them began to admire Bucky with tears.


    On the other side, Aokiji frownedpletely. He had already mentioned this matter at the beginning of the naval meeting, but no one paid attention to it at that time, and could only regard this matter as a possibility. risk factors.


    After all, one is in the South China Sea and the other is on the other side of the Great Sea Route. The distance in between requires at least about 20 days of sailing. For the Tru Empire in the South China Sea, it must be impossible to reach here no matter what speed it goes.


    But now he is still standing here alive, and the navy man ispletely unable to express his inner thoughts at this moment.


    "Marshal of the Warring States Period, I once made an agreement with Mr. Whitebeard. I wonder if you can give me some face today? Let them leave here?"


    Chang Nuo stood on the deck, speaking with a leisurely tone and a calm face, but the domineering words in his words directly swept through the entire Marin Fanduo.


    Suddenly, the legendary Emperor Tru had just appeared on the stage, and people who fainted due to the overlord''s domineering energy fell down in rows.


    The Overlord''s Haki is mixed with the ability of the Psychic Devil Fruit, making it far more powerful than the deterrence brought by the pure Overlord''s Haki.


    Even some rear admirals who were slightly less powerful could not bear the power brought by this kind of intimidation at this moment. They tried hard to hold themselves up, but in the end they fell to the ground.


    The naval force of more than 100,000 people has be very few in an instant.


    This time, the only ones targeted were the navy. Whether it was the pirates of the Whitebeard Pirates or the prisoners of Impel Down who followed Red-Nosed Bucky, facing the current situation, Each one of them was even more shocked and confused.


    But even so, the navy currently standing on Malinfando is still calcted in at least ten thousand.


    But just by appearing on the scene, everyone can intuitively feel the strength of Emperor Tru. Originally, all the prisoners in Impel Down City did not know or were not optimistic about Chang Nuo. Now, all thepany''s jaws have dropped. On the ground, his eyes were bulging out, and his nose was covered with snot, which looked quite funny.

 Chapter 498 A sudden attack

    <h4>Chapter 498 A sudden attack</h4>


    In fact, it''s not surprising that they looked like this, but it wasn''t just them. Now that they saw all the major forces outside, they all suddenly stood up and clenched their fists.


    Seeing this scene, these people have begun to wonder, how powerful is Emperor Tru?


    Warring States and Garp frowned and stood together tightly. These two are now the most powerful beings in the navy, but facing a young guy like Emperor Tru, the other party is just an imposing figure. Domineering is enough to make them feel tremendous pressure.


    "Emperor Tru, this time it''s just a matter between our navy and the Whitebeard Pirates, or rather between the navy and the pirates. Why does your South Sea Tru Empire get involved?"


    General Akainu was not intimidated by the Haki, but instead directly questioned him sternly.


    Although arge area of ??the navy has fallen on the scene, only two people from the Tru Empire havee. ording to the current situation, what will happen even if there are two more people?


    "King Toru, if you can''t give a good exnation for this matter today, then you need to consider how the Toru Empire will face the navy and the world government in the future."


    Marshal Warring States also said.


    "There is no better exnation. I made an agreement with the old man with white beard a few years ago, but this agreement has not been realized until today. The old man even paid the price with his own life. Do you think we are special?" Isn��t Lu Empire the kind of person who goes back on his word?


    Now that everyone has stood here, I think it is time to draw a line and discuss the next situation. Is it possible that the Navy still has the idea to start another war with the Tru Empire? "


    "Jie hahahaha!! If the navy starts a war with the Tohru Empire, I, the ckbeard Pirates, wouldn''t mind helping!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, ckbeardughed and shouted towards him.


    "We are having a conversation here, when will it be your turn to interrupt!"


    Chang Nuo looked at ckbeard. The next second, his domineering aura instantly created coercion. The tyrannical force directly sank thend in the direction where the ckbeard Pirates were standing by nearly two meters.


    ckbeard, who was still arrogant just now, fell directly to the ground in an instant.


    "Emperor Tru, just tell me directly, what exactly do you want to do here?"


    Sengoku asked.


    "Let them go and let me take the old man''s body with me. You can do whatever you want with the rest. I, Emperor Tru, will never get involved..."


    Chang Nuo said, but before he could finish his words, someone suddenly attacked him. Fortunately, thanks to his psychic devil fruit, his perception ability was quite strong. In just an instant, a space barrier appeared in front of him. before.


    "Bang!!!!"


    The two collided together in an instant, and even Chang Nuo himself was surprised by the sudden situation, not to mention the navy.


    This sudden attack didn''t even sense the color or the domineering force. If it weren''t for the ability of the Psychic Devil Fruit, the defense could be deployed automatically. This time it would really be possible to defeat the opponent.


    Eniru, who was standing behind him, saw this scene, and the lightning on his body suddenly exploded. His domineering power was very different from usual when he activated his devil fruit ability. He relied more on the energy in the air. Using electric current to sense the opponent''s figure, almost anything that exists between the materials in this world, no matter how fast it moves, cannot escape Enel''s perception.


    Enel, who was still on the ship, disappeared in the next second. Then everyone saw two attacks rapidly colliding back and forth in mid-air. This speed was almost invisible to ordinary people. Anyone with higher strength can see any difference. The person who suddenly appeared and attacked was not from their navy at all.


    After the two fought for a while, they separated from each other and fell to the ground with a sudden explosion.


    It wasn''t until this moment that Chang Nuo was able to see the other party''s face.


    This is a big boy who looks to be about eighteen or neen years old. He is shirtless, wearing only a pair of big beach shorts and a pair of slippers underneath his feet.


    It feels like you have juste back from basking in the sun.


    The only difference is that this guy has white hair, red eyes that glow slightly, and his muscles look very capable.


    "It seems like it''s beyond the plot!"


    Chang Nuo frowned and whispered. He had guessed that something like this would happen before, but he didn''t expect it toe so quickly.


    The other party looks so young, but his strength cannot be underestimated.


    A guy who can collide with Enelu and be evenly matched is enough for people to take him seriously.


    Chang Nuo was still quite surprised to see a general-level strength in a little guy on the other side.


    But what was even more surprising was that he was the only one. Everyone at the Navy Headquarters base, including the general, were all curious about the origin of this little guy. Why help them?


    "You must be Emperor Toru, right? People have always liked topare me with you, saying that you are the strongest among the younger generation, and at my age now, you are already the emperor of this corner of the world. , so today I feel very curious and just want toe over and see what kind of stuff it is."


    The shirtless guy who suddenly came over said with a yful face, facing Chang Nuo, without even taking it seriously.


    But before anyone else could say anything, this guy turned directly to look at Warring States and the three navy generals, with the same dissatisfaction and ridicule on his face and said, "Your navy is really too weak, just like this People can beat you into such a horrible state, I really don��t know why those old men spent so much money to raise you."


    He started provoking everyone when he came up. The identity of this young man not only made others feel confused, but even the Navy Headquarters itself looked confused.


    But what he said directly made Sengoku, Garp and the three generals, and even the ordinary soldiers, feel angry.


    The arrogant attitude was clearly disyed by this little guy at this moment.


    At the age of eighteen or neen, to be able to possess such strength, this guy indeed has something to be proud of.

 Chapter 499 Ancient weapons appear

    <h4>Chapter 499 Ancient weapons appear</h4>


    His arrogant attitude alone can make people feel very unhappy.


    Warring States frowned and looked at this little guy, angry, but he didn''t say anything more in the end.


    "Marshal of the Warring States Period, do you mind if I teach you a lesson?"


    Chang Nuo said with a sense of ridicule on his face. Anyway, the battlefield hase to a standstill. From the moment he appeared, all the hands that were still moving in a lively manner have now stopped.


    Even Ace and Luffy, who were still under attack, were sitting helplessly on the ground. Although the navy was still surrounding them, no one took action because of this.


    "I really don''t know where you got the confidence? A small country in the South China Sea actually dares to challenge the World Government and Navy. It seems that you have beenfortable in that ce for too long!"


    The shirtless little guy said, then turned to look at the people at the Navy Headquarters and said, "My name is Xiao Gangya, code number 15, from the World Government. A few old men think you are really bad, so let me Let��se over and help you.��


    These words are not only a naked provocation, but also dissatisfaction with the Navy. Moreover, at this age, he cannot master a degree well at all. He is now representing the World Government. In essence, there are already some conflicts between the two sides. Now, such a young child was sent to the battlefield to say such words.


    Zeng Guo''s face was livid, and he wished he could just rush up and p this guy to death, but now he also knew that it was not the time at all.


    Chang Nuo didn''t have such a good temper. Facing the other party''s words, he stood there and smiled softly. He didn''t even leave the ce. But the next second, the little guy named Xiao Gang Ya , as if being hit by a heavy object, the whole person flew directly across the battlefield.


    There was a powerful sound of impact, and a deep pit about 10m wide appeared directly where Xiao Gangya was standing just now.


    "You''re talking nonsense, but I don''t know who gave you the confidence?"


    Chang Nuo said disdainfully, and then he naturally stretched out his hands, and a sky-blue light began to glow on the palms. In an instant, a neat row of ck clouds began to rotate in the sky.


    In the middle of these rotating dark clouds, there were all lightning and thunder, each one seemed like a tornado, and it was about to touch the ground. In fact, they were at least 1km away from the main battlefield.


    The Navy still hasn''t figured out what this guy wants to do? But at least in the next second, these people seemed to have understood other truths.


    However, at this moment, in the South China Sea, there are already more than a dozen steel warships sailing side by side on the sea. They are staying side by side in front of their respective space portals. On each one, there is either a general or several middlemen standing. Will.


    The troops preparing to arrive at the battlefield this time have almost upied most of the top leaders of the Toru Empire. The purpose is to demonstrate the domineering power of the Toru Empire through this incident.


    On the battlefield, just as the dark clouds were about to touch the sea, huge space gates all fell side by side on the sea.


    The strange blue vortex in the middle of the space door is constantly rotating, and the ck aura on the door frame is particrly dazzling.


    "Old man, you have done what you have to do ording to the agreement. You don''t have to worry about all the subsequent situations. Our Tru Empire will also abide by our agreement. No matter how much risk we need to bear, the Whitebeard Sea will follow. No one in the band of thieves will die because of this!"


    Chang Nuo stood on the deck of the Infinity, his whole body slowly suspended in the air, and his tone was quite air-conditioned and powerful, and he shouted directly in the direction where Whitebeard was standing.


    Although the other party is dead, what he is expressing now is just an attitude.


    Marco, including the squad captains behind him, had already burst into tears. Facing the current situation, they would not talk about revenge.


    As Marco, who knows the truth best, may have also seen the strength gap between himself and the Navy Headquarters. Continuing to fight will not benefit them at all, and may even destroy the entire Whitebeard Pirates. All fell here.


    Although Ace still had the handcuffs of the seastone on his hand, Luffy, who had regained some of his abilities, was lying next to him. He was also crying silently, and his expression showed all kinds of helplessness.


    "So this is Robin''s man!"


    Luffy opened one eye slightly and squinted at the domineering man suspended in the air. He finally understood how powerful the legendary figure was.


    Chang Nuo, who was suspended in mid-air, still kept his hands outstretched. Five space gates were solemnly falling behind him at this moment. The blue space power emanating from his hands was urately connected to the space gates. .


    From the blue vortex of those space gates, steel battleships began to gradually appear one after another and gradually revealed their figures.


    Until thest steel battleship appeared, let alone the navy headquarters, it was untenable. Even the big guys watching the battle from behind stood up one by one, with eyes full of disbelief.


    "Ancient Weapon Hades!!"


    Woxing was the first to shout loudly, and then the other major forces fell silent one by one, staring closely at the scene in front of them.


    I have to say that Bucky the Clown��s camera work is really good. With just a phone bug, he can make the scene feel as if he is actually there.


    "Asshole! How dare you take advantage of me when I''mpletely defenseless. I''m going to kill you!"


    I don''t know when, the little Gang Ya, who had just been blown away by Chang Nuo''s blow, walked over step by step with an angry look on his face.


    The body was already exuding endless power, and with every step he took, the ground beneath his feet sank a few centimeters.


    But just when he was about to attack, a figure stood directly in front of him. At the moment he appeared, General Yixiao said directly, "As the top military officer of the Tru Empire, there is no need for our Majesty the King to personally take action in such a war." !��


    "Who are you?" Xiao Gangya angrily punched General Yixiao directly.


    He didn''t even want to listen to what the other party said. For him who was so young but possessed such great strength, it didn''t matter whether he listened or not.


    ��I don��t know how high the sky is and how high it is!��


    Yixiao casually pulled out the staff knife in his hand, and in the next second, Xiao Gangya seemed to have a mountain attached to his body, pressing him underground in just an instant.

 Chapter 500 Nothing has strength

    <h4>Chapter 500 Nothing has strength</h4>


    At the moment when the five space gates in the Tru Empire closed, more than a dozen giant steel ships were disyed in front of everyone. However, this time the one who appeared here to lead the team was General Yixiao, and the rest Those who followed, except for Abona, were all lieutenant generals.


    "Marshal Sengoku, our agreement is only for the Whitebeard Pirates, so in the subsequent war between the Tohru Empire, as Nanakurakai we will not participate."


    Hawkeye Mihawk walked to Sengoku and spoke in a calm tone. Then he looked at the Tru Empire and said seriously again, "What follows is just my personal behavior and is not mixed with any naval sentiments." .��


    Warring States understood, but he didn''t say anything from beginning to end.


    However, on the Tru Empire side, Abona also understood very well, and then he jumped off the warship and slowly began to walk forward.


    This is a contest between swordsmen. Normally, the two of them would have no chance of contact at all.


    "Hawkeye is the world''s greatest swordsman. I used to not care about honors in this area at all, but since we met today, I think you should have the same idea!"


    Abona walked to the front, with a slight smile on his face, and asked as if he had met a close friend.


    "The so-called title of the world''s greatest swordsman has long since ceased to exist, but since I saw you today, I do have thoughts in this regard! A pure battle between swordsmen!"


    Mihawk said with some excitement as well.


    However, there was no movement from the navy. Whether it was Sengoku Garp or the three navy generals, they just stared at it, as if this incident had nothing to do with them at all.


    As for the final result of this war, Whitebeard is already dead. No matter from which point of view, this war is already a naval victory.


    The biggest loser is the World Government, but what does this thing have to do with the navy?


    On the Toru Empire''s side, Navy Admiral Shunhe is blocking the red-haired pirates, and a war has already broken out between the two sides.


    The other generals, except for Mosanke, the remaining two have already found their opponents here.


    Xiao Gang Ya was worthy of this title. He had been severely injured by Chang Nuo before, but in the end he appeared again like a normal person. It was the same this time, General Yixiao''s attack seemed to have no effect at all.


    The next second, he jumped out of the hole in the ground intact again, but his expression was just a little more angry.


    On the naval side, those who had not fainted before had begun to gradually clean up the mess on the battlefield. As for those who had fainted, they also began to wake up one after another. The stronger ones quickly cleaned up the mess they were in thebat area. These marines, who are either unconscious or dead, have nothing to do, so they should stay away from this battlefield.


    Anyway, in their understanding, it is definitely open to question whether Malinfando, the former naval headquarters base, will still exist after the battle.


    "Sengoku, isn''t the navy involved in this matter?"


    Lieutenant General He, who had not appeared until now, came directly to Sengoku''s side when they were fighting, and asked directly with a serious look on his face.


    "Xiaohe, what''s going on now has nothing to do with me? Whitebeard is dead, and the Navy''s war is over. As for whether Ace was executed in the end? It doesn''t mean much to the Navy, which has suffered the most losses. It��s not us anyway.��


    Karp said.


    "It''s better to watch carefully. There must be more than one little guy like thising from the World Government. Just adapt to the situation when the timees." Warring States directly interrupted the conversation between the two and spoke with the same serious expression.


    However, on Yixiao''s side, Xiao Gangya''s strength should not be underestimated. Although he is not very tall, he has strong muscles, reaction ability and attack speed that arepletely beyond the capabilities of the naked eye.


    And so far, the opponent has not shown whether he is a Devil Fruit user or not, so even though the opponent is rtively young, Yixia still shows a more cautious attitude.


    "It turns out that he is an old blind man, and he is really toozy to talk nonsense to you!"


    As Xiao Gang Ya said, he started to attack again, but this time he had begun to be smarter and did not choose to attack directly. Instead, he rushed towards General Yixiao at an extremely fast speed while constantly changing He walked around in a straight body shape and circled behind General Yixiao at a speed that ordinary people could not see.


    But what he didn''t understand was that General Yixiao no longer looked at ces with his eyes, but instead used the extremely powerful Haki of seeing and hearing to perceive.


    Even though he was moving very fast, at least in Yixiao''s perception, Xiao Gangya was always just wandering within his circle.


    "Blind man, what can you do even if you can sense me? If the attack can''t keep up, it will have no effect at all!"


    Little Gangya moved quickly around General Yixiao while still taunting him.


    "Gravity Zone!!"


    General Yixiao opened his mouth slightly, pulled out all the knives in his hand, and then pointed the tip of the knife towards the ground, and then an invisible force directly enveloped the surrounding area within a hundred meters.


    In this area, everything seems to be attracted by thend under their feet. The strong gravity can at least make every move within this area extremely difficult.


    Xiao Gangya is a living example of this. Just now, he was looking disdainful and full of ridicule. But after the gravity space was released in the next second, Xiao Gangya suddenly fell to the ground, and his body seemed to be shaking again. It was like a heavy object weighing a thousand kilograms.


    "Sora has a lot of strength, but has nobat experience at all. I didn''t expect that the World Government would only cultivate a group of people who have strength."


    General Yixiao said, then turned around and headed directly in the direction of Xiao Gangya.


    With every step he took, the gravity on the littlemb doubled. But what waspletely different this time was that no matter how much the gravity on him increased, it would not make Little Gang Ya''s body sink into the ground. .


    The powerful force has even distorted Xiao Gangya''s face, at least it no longer looks the same as before.


    But then, how could a little guy with the strength of a general and be released by the World Government only have such a simple power?

 Chapter 501 I won’t thank you

    <h4>Chapter 501 I won��t thank you</h4>


    I saw the little Gangya lying on the ground, his originally red eyes suddenly turned red again, and his body twisted as if out of control, until finally he broke free from all the shackles of gravity, and then ran away in an extremely weird form Out of this gravity area.


    After he went out, his originally distorted figure gradually recovered, until he finally turned into the arrogant look he had just now.


    The appearance of this scene made everyone feel incredible even if they smiled.


    While the two were fighting, the battle between Abona and Hawkeye also officially began. The two were both swordsmen without any Devil Fruit abilities. Perhaps they felt a sympathy for each other, or perhaps it was because they had no opponents for so long. That feeling.


    As soon as they appeared on the stage, Abona and Hawkeye pulled out the long knives in their hands at the same time. As soon as they took action, the sword light directly prated the entire battlefield. The powerful force also made everyone smash their tongues.


    After all, it was still the beginning. Neither of them chose to fight in closebat. Instead, they explored each other''s attack strength from a distance.


    It is a decisive battle between strong men, and every little detail may determine the sess or failure of this battle.


    The Tru Empire and Navy teams all remained in a state of watching the show, and none of them cared about the attitudes of other pirates.


    Luffy and Ace were also directly rescued by Marco and others during this gap. Even the sea screw handcuffs on Ace''s hand were opened directly at this moment.


    But not far away from them, Whitebeard was still standing there alone, holding the sword in his hand. There were not many scars on his body, except for the shocking hole.


    "Captain, is it possible that we still want to join in the fun here?"


    On the side of the ckbeard Pirates, a very strange-looking woman looked at ckbeard and asked.


    "Jie hahahaha!! What''s there to be anxious about now? It has nothing to do with us anyway. Just watch carefully. Thest era has passed, and the next one will belong to the founders of another era. They can all stay here Here it is.��


    ckbeard said domineeringly.


    However, the other person standing next to him stared at ckbeard with disdain.


    Everyone can say this, but who can know what the reality is?


    Chang Nuo stood calmly on the deck. He estimated that Xiao Gangya was not the only one who came here this time. Although this little guy was rtively strong, he was not someone who could crush the entire crowd. .


    Then there must be other people behind him. The World Government is inherently mysterious, and there are countless powerful people hidden behind it. For 800 years, no one knows how big this behemoth is. Degree.


    Although his eyes have been staring closely at the people fighting on both sides, his feeling has already spread to the entire area, just to see what else may exist that he has not discovered.


    However, his domineering power of knowledge, even if it is mixed with the ability of the immortal human body, is tooplicated for the whole Ma Linfan. If you want to screen it bit by bit, there may be doubts among them. It can be solved.


    As a neer to the World Government, Xiao Gangya has shown nothing outstanding so far except for his amazing strength and speed.


    There is no strong actualbat experience, no ability to adapt to changes, and thebat awareness is even worse.


    The whole person ispletely like a powerful person in a package. Everyone has great strength and speed, but he is like an ant in front of General Yixiao.


    However, this guy is like an invincible Xiaoqiang. His strong recovery ability and excellent body are undoubtedly not his current bonus points.


    Although the movement speed is fast, once it enters the gravity area of ??General Yixiao, the speed has be useless. As for the powerful power, it can''t even get close to the opponent''s body, so what role can the power y?


    Especially General Yixiao, an airtight wall seemed to be formed around him, causing Xiao Gangya who came from this world government to feel extremely headache and trouble.


    But his speed is not without any effect. At least he can quickly avoid attacks caused by other dangers.


    On the Infinity, after all the members of the Whitebeard Pirates gathered on the crack, Marco slowly came directly to the side of Emperor Tru.


    There was no gratitude in his heart. After all, in his understanding, this was just a transaction, a transaction that his father paid with his life.


    "Emperor Tru, although we should be very grateful to you foring to the rescue this time, this is just a deal between you and dad. Dad has already done everything he can, even at the cost of his life. , so we won��t thank you.


    But there is one more thing that needs your help, that is, I hope you can get your father''s body back. Members of the Whitebeard Pirates will meet again. Thank you very much! "


    With that said, Marco put aside his dignity as a strong man and slowly knelt down next to Chang Nuo.


    Although his expression and the words he just said were heavy, Marco still couldn''t help crying until this moment.


    This time, although the Whitebeard Pirates'' casualties were lower than those of the Navy, I don''t know how much less? Evenpared to the World Government, the losses are simply negligible.


    But as the leader of the Whitebeard Pirates, Whitebeard died in this battle.


    This is enough to cause the entire Whitebeard Pirates to fall apart.


    But ording to their current strength, they may not even be able to take back Whitebeard''s body. Each of these people understands that even if Whitebeard is dead, the benefits he can bring are definitely not limited to this one. The war is won!


    "Do you think the war is over like this? Or do you think that the Tru Empireing here means that everything can be solved?


    Or do you really think that the old man can cause fatal harm to the World Government''s air force by destroying them?


    To tell you the truth, as of now, the real war has just begun. 50km away, the Tru Empire has already begun to block other back-up forces brought by the World Government. The air force is just one of them, and there are many more behind it. Made it! "


    Chang Nuo said calmly and leisurely. He did not try to deceive Marco, but told him the current situation very seriously.

 Chapter 502 Level 1 Combat Readiness

    <h4>Chapter 502 Level 1 Combat Readiness</h4>


    If you just think that this war has reached the critical point of ending, it is obviously unlikely that it will happen. If the World Government''s air force is destroyed, then as the World Government, other forces will definitely appear on this battlefield.


    Where is the current war? We still don��t know how far away we are from the real end.


    The essence of this war is to end Whitebeard. Although this goal has been achieved for the World Government or the Navy, the price of reaching this level makes them feel too heavy.


    Now the emergence of small steel teeth has exined all this very well.


    Marco didn''t understand anything. After hearing this, he, who was still crying, suddenly began to regain some sense. His brows instantly furrowed and he began to think about everything that had just happened.


    Indeed, as Chang Nuo said, what is the essence of this war?


    "As long as you bring dad''s body back safely, I will follow dad''s request. As long as the other members of the Whitebeard Pirates are willing, we will directly join the Toru Empire and quit the pirate order forever. "


    Marco suddenly knocked his head and shouted directly to Chang Nuo loudly!


    He can''t think of any other way to take away his father. This is thest way.


    On this battlefield, you may face various risks at any time. Marco still remembers what Whitebeard once told him. The strength of the Tru Empire does not only exist on the surface. Their growth in strength so far is a mystery. question.


    From the moment the ancient weapon Pluto appeared on this battlefield, Marco had realized that the waters of the Tru Empire had depths that he could not see!


    "Huh~!!"


    Chang Nuo sighed deeply, then turned to look at Marco, and said calmly, "Get up! I will find a way to take the old man away!"


    The other members of the Whitebeard Pirates were either standing there sadly looking at Whitebeard''s body, or staring quietly at Marco''s current actions, all of which were undoubtedly not determining their next fate.


    Now this war haspletely changed the direction of the entire world. No matter who wins or loses in the end, what Chang Nuo wants is that he is the one who maximizes interests.


    "Enilu, let me know, all serial battleships have entered the first level ofbat readiness, and the Pluto is ready tounch an attack at any time!"


    Changnuo looked directly at the battlefield in front of him and said sternly and seriously. Marco also stood up slowly as he spoke.


    He doesn''t understand what the other party wants to do? But now, as the other party said, the war has just begun.


    After receiving the order, Eniru disappeared instantly. After a minute, people with a discerning eye could clearly see that whether it was the ancient weapon Pluto or those steel battleships, the huge muzzles on each one began to focus on them. It''s definitely Malinfando.


    Naval aspect.


    "Sengoku, it seems that this little guy from the Tru Empire is serious this time, but our navy didn''t take action. Why is he so alert?"


    Garp stood next to Sengoku and asked seriously.


    Since Ace and Luffy were rescued, Garp has returned to the essence of a naval hero. His two grandsons are now almost in a safe zone, so the biggest opponent he can face next should be King Tru.


    Until now, everyone in the outside world finally understood why the Tru Empire established a military base on an empty ind and how they entered this area.


    From the moment the current space gate appeared, all problems began to be solved.


    But facing those steel battleships and the ancient weapon Pluto, after the artillery attack system on each ship was aimed at their location, Garp gradually began to realize that something was wrong.


    Warring States also saw all this in his eyes. Although his eyes were full of doubts, after a while, he seemed to know something.


    "It seems that there are many things behind this war that we don''t know. It''s just that we don''t know about it. How did they know about it?"


    Warring States said with some confusion, this war made people feel more and more confused!


    Many things have long transcended the nature of war, as if there are a pair of invisible hands controlling everything behind them.


    "Sengoku, do you mean that Emperor Toru is vying with the World Government?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "It can only be exined this way. Otherwise, how could Whitebeard discover that there is an air force in the sky that we cannot even detect? And the other party had already promised to fulfill a certain agreement before the attack, so this matter The essence of the matter has changed from the beginning, but we don��t know how far the situation has developed!��


    Warring States said with a sigh, even though he was very smart, this was based on the premise that he knew a little bit about the situation.


    Now the direction of the development of things has made him confused, let alone analyzing the other things.


    "Now I think we should do nothing. Since the World Government is involved, they are the ones who will suffer the most losses anyway. Why don''t our navy sit here and take a good look?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "This is all we can do for the time being. We are no longer absolutely sure. Although the Whitebeard Pirates are not as big a threat as imagined, the reason why they were so alert before was just to target Whitebeard alone, but now they arepletely no the same.


    What we are facing now is the Toru Empire. This is not just a pirate, but a standard national. The other party''s warships and equipment are much better than our navy. Once a war breaks out, this may really be the case. A kind of world war, staying here and doing nothing may be the best choice. "


    Warring States said, turning his head and looking specifically at the location of the three generals.


    In fact, the three of them probably had the same inner thoughts. They sat neatly on the three generals'' chairs prepared for them on the high tform, kicked their legs, and quietly watched the battle at the scene.


    "This time, Garp got the advantage. Both grandsons are fine!"


    Lieutenant General He looked at Garp with some mocking eyes and said.


    "What do you mean I took advantage? What does this matter have to do with me?" Karp asked.


    "Don''t say any more, both of you. No one is paying attention to your grandson''s affairs now. It doesn''t matter whose son Ace is now. The most important thing now is to quickly deal with the mess in front of you. The World Government I don��t know what to think about helping others.��


    Warring States stood in the middle and directly blocked the quarrel between the two people, who were both in their seventies, but this atmosphere seemed to have brought them back to the feeling they had when they were together decades ago.

 Chapter 503 Intensive Fire Attack

    <h4>Chapter 503 Intensive Fire Attack</h4>


    ing!!"


    On the deck of the Infinity, Changnuo was still standing there, and Marco was still standing next to him, but at this moment, he suddenly opened his mouth and said.


    Both Marco and Eniro, who hade back to stay next to him, had doubts on their faces. They felt nothing at all, so why did he say this?


    "Your Majesty, what''sing?"


    Enelu asked doubtfully.


    "Although I have guessed that the world government is not as simple as imagined, I did not expect that they can actually create such high technology!"


    Chang Nuo frowned and muttered to himself in a stern voice, but just as the two people next to him became more confused, Chang Nuo yelled loudly and shouted, "Pluto, 45 degrees southeast, 33 degrees elevation, ten meters away Kilometers, main gun attack, remaining sequence battleships, elevation angle 46 degrees, main gun coverage attack!"


    Already in a first-levelbat state, all the battleships began to turn around in the next second.


    Everyone who was fighting stopped what they were doing.


    Of course, this is only limited to the battle between Mihawk and Abona. More than ten minutes have passed, and there is still no difference between the two of them. The only difference is General Yixiao.


    Xiao Gangya was already panting from exhaustion. Even though he was moving at high speed, he was still beaten bloody by General Yixiao in the process.


    Although Xiao Gangya is powerful, a little guy with no actualbat experience fighting against an old man is like a child fighting an adult.


    Many people on the battlefield heard Emperor Tru''s shouting. Whether it was the camera shot of the phone bug, or the three generals of the Navy Headquarters and the Warring States Marshal. The people who were sitting stood up, and the people who were standing all looked at it seriously. .


    After all, this is the only time Emperor Tru has given orders since the Tru Empire intervened in this war!


    More than a dozen warships, plus the ancient weapon Pluto, focused their guns on the southeast, and this happened to bypass Marinfando.


    This direction is more like heading directly from Mariejoia. Through the ocean currents, they can move in this direction at extremely fast speeds.


    "emission!!"


    Chang Nuo roared again, everything waspletely different from his previous n.


    At least before I came here, I never thought about directly resisting the World Government in this ce, let alone starting a war in this ce.


    But what they can''t sense, the immortal body''s perception ability, can directly and clearly observe the direction over there.


    What''s more important is that the Psychic Devil Fruit has already noticed the actions of these people. From the moment Xiao Gangya appeared, Chang Nuo was always on guard.


    The meaning of the World Government this time is very simple. Originally it just wanted to consume the current strength of the navy and directly destroy the entire Whitebeard Pirates. But now there is another Toru Empire. This time they sent people here to destroy this group. A group of people all stayed.


    All battle sequence states were activated at a distance of 10km. After all the muzzles made a deafening sound, artillery one after another began to shoot at a distance of 10km.


    For today''s naval warships, their artillery range is only two kilometers at most, but now they have discovered that the Trul Empire''s artillery can be densely packed to 10km away. The other is Pluto, which only needs an elevation angle of 35 degrees. You can hit a distance of 10km.


    So if you shoot at the longest distance, this thing can shoot at least 20km away.


    People in the navy were not shocked. How far can they shoot? On the contrary, I am more curious about why Emperor Tru ordered an attack on that sea area where there is nothing?


    But then, in the sea area 10km away, all the light curtains of explosions began to appear, and the sea water also caused huge waves.


    From such a long distance, even those with slightly stronger strength can sense it, and everyone is quite curious and confused.


    The main gun fire gates of the Trul Empire''s steel battleships began to release the shells they brought, and they continued to attack in that direction in a dense form.


    "Your Majesty, what happened?"


    Enelu asked again.


    "It''s not surprising that the other party was able to decipher the secret of Ravdrew in 800 years."


    Chang Nuo was talking to himself, but Enilu had already understood.


    The most frightening thing about Ravdru is that he can''t feel anything around him at all. The domineering power of knowledge, knowledge, and color is of no use here at all.


    Doesn��t the Infinity at their feet also have such abilities? Come to think of it, it was once able to be used by pirates, so it is not impossible for the world government to use this technology.


    "Communicate with Junhe and let hime here. As long as they can block it!"


    Changnuo turned to Enelu and said.


    Anyway, Shunhe has enough people there who can resist the advance of the red-haired pirates, so there is no need to leave so many people there.


    The key is that we don��t know what will happen this time.


    After the first round of gunfire ended, the people over there who couldn''t see but could sense that something was wrong were already aware of something wrong.


    On the sea, at least five ships appeared in everyone''s silhouette. Although the distance was rtively far, Malin Fanduo was on a rtively high terrain, so you could still see some of them at a nce.


    "It seems there are many things we don''t know about the World Government!"


    Warring States said helplessly.


    ��Why don��t we feel these things?��


    Garp also frowned. Not only was he unable to sense it, but more importantly, the other party also had a certain degree of invisibility.


    You really can''t tell it if you don''t look carefully.


    But their invisibility state ispletely different from that of the Infinity. The former is nothing more than using some kind of projection to cover the entire sea surface on the ship, while thetter is directly invisible through a protective cover.


    But no matter what, this is already the cutting-edge technology in this world, and it is definitely impressive.


    It is a pity that the World Government, which has been powerful for 800 years, did not expect that someone would see through it today, and even before they got close, it had directlyunched a sweeping attack.


    This level of attack, especially the ancient weapon Pluto, is indeed just like the legend. One shot can destroy a small ind. The power is powerful enough to be daunting.

 Chapter 504 War with the World Government

    <h4>Chapter 504 War with the World Government</h4>


    In fact, these people only saw the superficial phenomenon. As the ancient weapon Pluto, although everyone had heard of his attack power in legends, no one had actually seen it.


    After this thing was taken out for study before, only itsunch tube could be seen, and it was not known what its missiles were. For this reason, Changnuo also specially learned the power of the system.


    The final result was that the propent of this thing was actually an explosive rock. Although this thing was strictly controlled by the World Government, how could it escape the possession of the Toru Empire.


    Although this intensive artillery fire coverage was not disyed in front of the people on the live broadcast station, it at least allowed them to clearly perceive the current strength of the Tru Empire.


    Those who witnessed this scene with their own eyes could not help but open their mouths.


    If this thing attacks a pirate ship, what kind of effect will it have?


    Five World Government ships were all sunk before they reached this ce. As for what became of the people on them, it is still unknown.


    At least this first wave of shockpletely achieved the effect Chang Nuo wanted.


    In this world, not only strong personal strength can have the right to speak, but also strong national military strength can also have the absolute right to speak.


    This is today''s Trul Empire, an existence that can almostpletely surpass the navy in terms of military strength.


    The powerful power disyed by the Tru Empire waspletely shocking. Including the current navy, their attitude waspletely different after seeing this wave of attacks.


    Whether a country is strong or not has nothing to do with individuals, but depends on the overall military and economic strength. If the Tru Empire dares to participate in the war this time, it means that it is fully prepared, even if it is not done enough in some ces. , but this is enough to illustrate the current strength of the Tru Empire.


    "The war really started!"


    Bucky the Clown was hiding in the corner. Although he was surrounded by arge group of prison inmates, he was still terrified in his heart.


    This is different from the war between Whitebeard and the Navy. This time it haspletely involved the national level. It is nothing more than a war between the Navy and the pirates.


    The two forces are very obvious, and more people are almost willing to support this aspect of the navy.


    But the way the Tru Empire participates in the war is different. One is the World Government and the other is the South China Sea Empire. They are twopletely equal organizations. No matter which side is involved, as long as they find a suitable reason, then their war this time will belong to The righteous side.


    So for those ordinary people, what they see now is just to participate in the excitement, without clearly expressing which side they support?


    But for those countries that have been oppressed, they do not belong to the world government and do not belong to the participating countries. However, the pain left to them by the world government over the years may take many generations to recover from.


    So for the situation of these people, they hope that the Tru Empire can win even more.


    This dense and covering artillery fire is not only hitting the vanguard of the World Government, but more importantly, there are people who can face the threat of the World Government and dare to use force to provoke.


    "You''re really brave. Should we take action?"


    Lieutenant General He stood on the high tform and asked Sengoku and Garp who were standing next to him. Now the Tru Empire has begun to directly go to war with the World Government, and their navy is under the World Government and is also under the jurisdiction of the World Government. They were facing a direct attack on the World Government. This situation was so obvious to them that it would be unjustifiable if they did not take action in the end.


    However, the two of them unexpectedly heard Sengoku say such a sentence. Sengoku even said with some joy, "How do we know whether it is the power of the world government? Besides, I will resign as marshal after this war." The position has nothing to do with our navy, and the World Government has never notified us that other forces will intervene in the battlefield. All this will not cause any losses to our navy, let them fight."


    "Warring States, aren''t you afraid that those old men will cause trouble for you after this incident?" Garp asked.


    "There''s nothing to worry about. Let''s just say it when the timees. Unknown forces have once again intervened in the war. The Tru Empire''s attacks on each other have nothing to do with our navy!"


    "Then can we just stare nkly like this?"


    After listening to what Warring States said, Lieutenant General He asked with some doubts.


    It''s not that they couldn''t understand what Sengoku said. What kind of life has the navy been living all this time? They themselves know best what kind of grudge the World Government has towards the navy. These people on the high tform know better.


    Not to mention the three of them, the three navy generals were watching this scene leisurely one by one. It had nothing to do with them anyway. The war between the World Government and the Toru Empire, even if it broke the sky, would not let it go in the end. The navy has lost nothing, and now it can just watch the excitement.


    "Sakaski! Those forces look a bit like the World Government? Why don''t youe over and help?"


    Kizaru sat there with his legs crossed, his mouth crooked, and with a smile on his face, he turned his head and looked at Akainu and asked.


    "Don''t say these useless words. Do they have the g of the World Government hanging on them? Besides, we can''t see it from such a distance. What does this kind of thing have to do with our navy?" Akainu answered seriously.


    Qing Zhi, who was sitting next to him, looked at the two people speechlessly. In the end, he just looked at them, and then continued to turn his eyes in the direction of Chang Nuo.


    On the Infinity side, Changnuo looked seriously at the area that had just been bombed. Although he had directly sunk five battleships of the World Government, there was no joy in his expression.


    "Be on guard! It''s already here."


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Eniro and Marco next to him had not yet reacted at all, and a powerful attack wasunched directly towards the Infinity.


    The tyrannical power also directly aroused the quick-response defense devices on the Infinity, and all of this happened almost in the blink of an eye.


    This attack is simr to a transparent ball of light, but its size is at least 5m.


    It waspletely like apressed air. After hitting the Infinity''s defense, the sphere immediately exploded. The powerful shock wave even caused the Infinity to slide directly on the ice for nearly 50 meters.

 Chapter 505 Natural Air Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 505 Natural Air Fruit</h4>


    Although the people inside and the hull were not affected, it was enough to prove how powerful the other party was.


    "It''s really interesting. I didn''t expect that you, the little King of Trudy, would find something that I couldn''t detect even if I saw it. I really don''t know where did you get the courage? You actually dared to challenge the World Government!"


    After the shock wave passed, a very thin guy was seen, wearing a pair of pink sunsses and a pure white suit. Even the shoes were white, with a hair style like a dog licking, a slender face, and he was talking while talking. Don��t forget to pat the dust on your shoulders.


    "Who is this guy?"


    Garp on the high tform also asked with some confusion.


    They had seen many people in the World Government, but even Garp had never heard of, or even seen, such a powerful person who looked like this, which really surprised them.


    Warring States frowned. He had a slight impression of this person, but he had only met him once, and he had no idea of ??his identity.


    "We still don''t know his identity yet. We don''t know too much about the things the World Government hides. Don''t rush to take action. Just watch."


    Warring States said seriously, he didn''t want to take a trip into the muddy water at this time.


    It is not difficult to see from the speed at which the opponent was moving just now that the opponent is not only powerful, but is far away from 10km away, but can move in front of them in an instant, and can alsounch such a powerful attack in such a short period of time. Attack, if you think about it, you can guess that it is a hidden figure of the World Government.


    But this time he was not the only one who came over. After the other party finished speaking, another person who looked a little roughernded directly in the center of the battlefield.


    The image of this one is not as good as the guy in the white suit in front. He is wearing a jacket that looks very ill-fitting, with his chestpletely exposed. He has strong muscles and his dark skin. The whole face is almost covered with beard. If you simply describe the other party, you really don''t know how to express it.


    After the Infinity stabilized, the steel battleships behind them all aimed their guns at the guy in a white suit suspended in mid-air.


    "Oh! It''s okay! This boat seems to have functions we couldn''t imagine? It looks pretty good, how about giving it to me?"


    The man in the white suit looked at Chang Nuo again and asked with curiosity on his face.


    "If you like it, why don''t youe over and grab it? It''s yours once you get it."


    Chang Nuo also began to slowly float in the air, speaking in a slightly flirtatious tone.


    ��I don��t know how high the heavens are, and how many years have passed, but no one dares to say such a thing to me!��


    The man in the suit said, he just kicked him casually in mid-air, and a ball of something simr to an air cannon flew straight and quickly towards Chang Nuo''s suspended position.


    But Emperor Toru had no interest in following such a tentative attack.


    Just when everyone thought Emperor Tru was getting carried away, this attack went directly through Chang Nuo''s body without causing any harm to the opponent.


    "It''s interesting! I didn''t expect that this superhuman space fruit, which is rare in a century, could be developed to such an extent by you. I have to say, you little guy is really surprising."


    Although the man in the white suit said this, the expression on his face did not show any surprise or surprise. Instead, he had a look of expectation. These expectations could be seen just from the distorted expression on his face.


    "You''re not bad either. You''re naturally an air fruit. How could such a top-notch devil fruit be in the hands of the world government?" Changnuo said with a hint of ridicule.


    "Grrrrghgggg!!"


    The man in a suit suspended in mid-air burst into incredibleughter when he heard what Chang Nuo said. Although theseughter made people feel ufortable, the other party didn''t care about it and pped loudly with a smile.


    Immediately afterwards, the man in the white suit suddenly showed a serious expression and asked, "You are right, it is indeed a natural air fruit, but this kind of thing has not even been listed in the devil fruit illustrated book, and there is not even a record of it. Why do you know the abilities I use?"


    "Is itplicated? Don''t think that you are the only one who knows everything in this world!"


    Chang Nuo said disdainfully, but he also seeded in arousing the other party''s anger.


    The man in the middle of the battlefield who came with the man in the white suit walked directly to Xiao Gangya without any hurry. Looking at the scars on the other person''s body and still panting, he immediately revealed He said with a mocking expression, "I told you not to run so fast, but I didn''t expect you little guy just wouldn''t listen. I guess if we were a littleter, you little guy might die here."


    "No. 5, don''t speak so harshly. Do you really think this old blind man can trap me? It''s not you who have always said that mybat experience is too poor, so this is not because I want to find someone to practice with. What''s the benefit of this injury? What a fuss.��


    Xiao Gangya tried hard to cover up the scars on his body, and also said to the big man with a look of disdain.


    "You talk a lot, but now is not the time to talk about these things. Guy No. 1 seems to have been angered. I think it''s better for us to stay away, so as not to wait for the blood of the so-called Emperor Tru to ssh on us. All in one."


    The big guy named No. 5 said this very calmly, and it was also obvious that he recognized the strength of the guy in the white suit named No. 1.


    "You all underestimate His Majesty the King. His strength is still a mystery to us. His bottomless ability, I''m afraid you will know itter!"


    Yixiao didn''t pay attention to themunication between the two. I''m afraid the main battlefield is not on their side now, so just watch quietly.


    But he still didn''t hold back and spoke directly to the big man No. 5. Then he put the staff knife he took out into the scabbard, turned around silently, and started walking towards the edge of the battlefield.


    The next confrontation is probably a struggle between two guys suspended in mid-air. Is the hidden power of the World Government more powerful, or is the Toru Empire, which has just emerged a few years ago, more prosperous? Not only the people on the battlefield want to know this, but the forces behind the scenes who are silently observing this war are also watching carefully.

 Chapter 506 I don’t know what to say

    <h4>Chapter 506 I don��t know what to say</h4>


    At this moment, the two of them were still looking at each other. The man in the white suit No. 1 was already gnashing his teeth with hatred, not only because of the other person''s attitude when talking to him, but more importantly, because of the other person''s expression.


    When has this number one, who has always been at the top, ever been treated like this by others? Who wouldn''t be very respectful when seeing him? Even today''s Tianlong people need to salute each other when they see him, let alone these bastards in their eyes dare to float at the same height as themselves.


    "Your mouth is so hard. I hope your life will be as strong as your mouth until the end!"


    After the man in the white suit No. 1 finished speaking, the body suspended in mid-air began to slowly disappear, until finally it was as if this person had never appeared in this world.


    "Grrrr!!! Since you know that I am a natural air devil fruit, I don''t know if you know it, but wherever there is air, I can appear in any area at any time!"


    The voice of the man in the white suit came out again, and no one knew where he was.


    Other Devil Fruit abilities can at least be seen with the naked eye. No matter how fast they are and how domineering they are, they can at least sense the opponent''s figure.


    But this guy is directly hidden in the air. It can be said that the air is his body. Of course, it can also be said that he is directly dispersed in the air.


    "Ridiculous!"


    Chang Nuo was suspended in the air. Although his expression was very serious, this situation did not make him feel panic. Although he was domineering and could sense the existence of this guy, the range was too wide.


    Kexian''s human body''s perception ability is different. He can directly and urately locate the location of the energy source. Although this guy relies on the devil fruit ability to directly disperse his body, it may be the area where the energy is the most concentrated or rtively concentrated. Absolutely This is the exact location of this guy''s body.


    Perhaps because he had been strong for too long, after the white suit could be hidden in the air, he did not choose to attack the Emperor Tru in his eyes directly in a hurry. Instead, he spread out over arge area, hoping to take down the ancient weapon Pluto in one fell swoop. , and the body is slowly covering the entire Hades.


    "Want to know which movement speed is faster? Although Air Devil Fruit can be distributed in the air, sometimes space is faster!"


    Changnuo was still looking forward, and even his body was still in its original position, but in the next second, with a "Bang!!", the man in the white suit suddenly hit the center of the battlefield directly from the natural devil fruit state. Location.


    This is also the direction near where No. 5 is located. The powerful impact even directly caused thend to sink into a deep pit nearly 20m deep and at least 50m wide.


    "This!!! What exactly is this attack?"


    Ace, who had been safe for a short time, looked at this scene with disbelief. The deep potholes on the ground were undoubtedly not introducing him to what the world of the strong was like.


    "You bastard! You''re blocking me!!"


    On Bucky the Clown''s side, he suddenly pped the strong man in front of him, still cursing in his mouth, and holding a phone bug in his hand. This scene in the video happened to be facing the deep pit just now.


    The battle between the two people left everyone present unaware of how the attack was carried out? Not to mention that the eyes can''t see it, I don''t even feel the domineering power of seeing and hearing.


    It waspletely like an invisible attack, filling each other''s minds with deep doubts.


    The key is how this mysterious attack is carried out? Emperor Tru stayed in his original suspended position and did not move. Even the expression on his face did not change at all? But how did the powerful man in the white suit, who came from the World Government, be like this?


    "Brother No. 5, did you discover anything just now?"


    Xiao Gangya was even more surprised. He was already very fast, but he didn''t expect that there was someone faster than him.


    With such an attack method, he probably never even thought about it. Being able to be the number one in their team, you can guess how powerful the man in the white suit is?


    "No need to guess. Superman''s space devil fruit ability is actually the same as the one. So far, not only is it not in the devil fruit illustrated book, but there is no detailed record. The world government has only recorded it. One user''s ability was really poorly developed by the other party, otherwise he wouldn''t have died so quickly!"


    No. 5 said patiently, exining bit by bit to the little guy.


    He didn''t even look at the ce where No. 1 fell, because he could say with certainty that nothing would happen to the man in the white suit.


    This maye from his trust in his partner, or perhaps hispletely indifferent attitude towards this person.


    But things were exactly as he said. After the dust from the huge pit disappeared, the man in the white suit staggered out slowly. At the bottom of the pit, there were still traces of a human figure.


    However, her originally white outfit was now covered in dust, and even her smooth hair was covered in dust.


    The expression on the face of the man in the white suit who came out again was not as good as expected.


    He kept a sneer on his face. After all, there was not even a trace of injury on his body. Apart from being covered in dust, there was nothing unusual about the rest.


    "Grrrrrr!!!"


    After the man in the white suit came out, he looked at Chang Nuo, who was still suspended in the air, with a sneer on his face, and as he became more and more excited, his body began to tremble.


    "Interesting, interesting!!!"


    The man in the white suit said, but then he suddenly clenched his fists, and a vacuum area instantly formed around him.


    Otherwise, he may be the most powerful existence in their department. The natural air fruit can instantly form a vacuum area, which can cause a devastating blow to known life forms. As long as this kind of vacuum The area can cover arge enough area, and everyone on the entire Marin Ind can be wiped out in an instant.


    This has nothing to do with whether you have a Devil Fruit or not. No matter how powerful a person is, they can only persist in this area for a while.

 Chapter 507 Mirror Clone

    <h4>Chapter 507 Mirror Clone</h4>


    The man in the white suit clenched his fists and stared sharply at Chang Nuo, who was suspended in mid-air, as if he had already regarded him as a sure-fire target this time.


    Chang Nuo still kept his original smile. No one knew whether it was a real smile or not, after all, they were so far apart.


    He was also staring directly at the man in the white suit below. He knew clearly that the attack just now could not hurt the opponent, but this attack could directly anger the opponent.


    The ability of the Space Devil Fruit has now been mastered by him to some extent. After awakening the power, as a person who actually controls the ability of the Devil Fruit, he can not only hide in space, but can even create infinite mirror bodies in the outside world.


    Such a situation can not only confuse the opponent, but also directly attack the opponent''s area.


    "It''s really tough to take a beating. I just don''t know how many times this body can withstand it?"


    Chang Nuo looked at the man in the suit and said, his words once again full of provocation.


    "Your feet are so soft. Did you not eat at all in the morning? Are you still the King of Tru? You probably have to eat soft-footed shrimps like those from the South China Sea to grow like you!"


    The man in the white suit also said mockingly.


    Almost everyone watching this war was dumbfounded. Why do two such powerful people always like to bicker? And they still deliberately try to anger each other.


    "All naval personnel, evacuate 500m away, immediately and immediately!!"


    It was not that no one could understand the conversation between the two people. At least Sengoku, as the marshal of the navy, realized something was wrong the next moment.


    But they were not the only ones, Marco and Eniro also issued the same order at the same time, shouting at the Whitebeard Pirates and at the fleet of the Tru Empire.


    Everyone has already felt the invisible storm. The mostfortable people at this time are probably the group of prisonersing out of the city.


    Comparatively speaking, each of them is the farthest away, and all of them are gathered in an inconspicuous ce, and no one will attack them specifically because of their identities.


    "What happened?"


    Our protagonist has already begun to slowly recover. He looked half-dead just now. After such a short period of adjustment, although he is not a powerful person, at least it will not affect his activities as a whole.


    But even so, at this moment, his face was still covered with various scars, and with a bloated face, he looked at Ace next to him and asked.


    "Now is not the time for you to care about these things, obey the order quickly and leave!"


    Ace looked at Luffy and said helplessly.


    To be able to have the rtively powerful people in the Navy, Tohru Empire, and the Whitebeard Pirates all shout out such words at the same time is enough to prove how serious the situation is.


    Everyone stopped talking nonsense and began to rush away in other directions one by one.


    Fortunately, the area on the sea that was frozen by the blue pheasant still maintained a state simr tond. It was not that they had no direction to leave.


    So whether it was the navy, pirates or the Toru Empire, everyone began to retreat slowly. Even Eniro and Marco looked at each other and began to escape quickly from the air.


    People with rtively low strength would not understand what is happening at all? But at this time, the man in the white suit was already on the verge of anger. The power emitted by the natural air fruit had already made the surrounding air stagnant.


    Anyone whoes close to him will almost die of suffocation due to such a situation.


    However, he was walking slowly and step by step towards the direction of Chang Nuo.


    "In the 40 years since I had the power of the Devil Fruit, no one has ever been able to stand up to me. Today, I got kicked here. How do you think I should deal with you?"


    The man in the white suit said with a hoarse and cold voice, his expression had begun to turn pale, and Twilight stared straight at Chang Nuo, who was floating in the air.


    "Just fight, why bother with all the nonsense?"


    Chang Nuo said, and he was suddenly suspended in the air. Two identical versions of himself came out from his original position, with the same abilities as clones. Two of them began to slowly move towards the direction of the man in the white suit. Walked towards him.


    In fact, in the area within 50 meters of the white suit, a normal person''s life can be killed in an instant. However, Chang Nuo, who entered this space, did not react at all.


    "The ability of the Space Devil Fruit can actually be developed to such an extent by him. It seems that this Emperor Tru is really not to be underestimated."


    The man in the white suit thought with a solemn expression. He was not a fool. The other party could instantly change from one body to three, and it was impossible to find any one of them that was real.


    The feeling of seeing and hearing the domineering power has no effect at all. After all, these three Changnuo can detect that they arepletely physical. This scene is considered to subvert everyone''s cognition.


    "Do you want to continue fighting? So everyone from the World Government is like you, only talking but not doing anything?"


    One of Changnuo''s mirror clones walked about 15 meters away from the man in the white suit, and said with a disdainful smile in his eyes.


    "Hmph! I don''t believe that all three of them can be entities!"


    The man in the white suit snorted coldly, then put his hands directly on his chest and shouted, "The air is condensing!"


    In just an instant, the surrounding air seemed to be frozen, and this range directly spread to a radius of 50m. The attack mode is simr to fixing this space, but after all, it is just air condensation, which has no impact on personal actions. No impact whatsoever.


    It''s nothing more than extracting all the breath from the human body at this moment, but the purpose of the man in the white suit is not at all. In other ces, he has used all the air to condense into another state simr to a human form, starting at an extremely fast speed He attacked the other two Chang Nuo.


    But all these attacks prated Chang Nuo''s body, and none of them could actuallynd on him.


    "Is it possible that as Emperor Tru, you are so cowardly? You don''t even dare toe out to fight in your true form."


    The man in the white suitughed and looked at Emperor Tru, who was closest to him, trying to force him to fight in this way.

 Chapter 508 Renren Fruit Angel Form

    <h4>Chapter 508 Renren Fruit Angel Form</h4>


    There is no doubt about the ability of the natural energy devil fruit. It is definitely at the top of all devil fruits. However, the quality of a devil fruit has nothing to do with it. It ultimately depends on the individual''s acquired cultivation.


    But in the face of this provocation, Changnuo was not in a hurry. The mirror clone standing at the front just looked at the man in the white suit with disdain and said, "Everyone has their own abilities. As the natural air fruit ability, Is it possible for you, the one who wants to achieve sess, that you won��t be able to find it yourself?��


    "Gah gah gah!!! That''s true. Is it possible that I can''t find you or the people below you?"


    The man in the white suit smiled sinisterly, staring intently at the mirror clone in front of him, letting out a death-defyingugh.


    "It''s pretty good. This is a good reason, and it can be considered a sess in attracting my attention!"


    Chang Nuo said, the next moment, blue overlord-colored domineering lightning began to appear in the air, and this overlord-colored domineering lightning was only controlled within a range, as if forming a protective cover, the direct range, and That is within a radius of 50m.


    "go to hell!!!"


    The man in the white suit suddenly roared, and the expression on his face began to distort instantly, and then the air in the entire area suddenly began to expand violently.


    As a natural type, every attack released by the man in the white suit can cause enough damage.


    It''s just that this time he happened to meet his nemesis, so he was so embarrassed when facing Emperor Tru.


    When Chang Nuo saw this scene, there was no possibility of frowning. The two devil fruits werepletely suppressed. The air fruit might be very powerful for ordinary people, but it seemed to have no effect on Chang Nuo.


    At best, this thing can only be used in this world, and it is impossible to cross or prate space. Therefore, even in a white suit, the man''s strength has already surpassed that of a general, but in Chang Nuo''s eyes, it is nothing more than this.


    "It''s no fun! Let the other hidden peoplee out together!"


    Chang Nuo looked at the man in the white suit with disdain and said. Next, the overall situation was still the same as the first time.


    The man in the white suit was so domineering in front, but in the next second he flew backwards again. This time the force was much stronger than thest time. He prated directly through the Navy Headquarters building, a very conspicuous huge hole, just like that Show it in front of everyone.


    He didn''t even react at all. This strange attack beyond everyone''s imagination was clearly standing there, but it had already hit him.


    Watching this scene, Xiao Gangya and the other two were extremely surprised. At least No. 1, who was usually super strong in their eyes, had been hit hard twice today without even touching the opponent''s body.


    They have never seen such a situation before. Even during normal training, they are always the only ones injured. Sometimes they can''t even see the shadow of No. 1.


    But now it is rare for them to see it. Xiaogang Ya can also understand the strength of the revealed ce from the side. He has always been proud of his own speed, but now he doesn''t even know how to attack the opponent. He discovered that, at least in his eyes, this was the ultimate in speed.


    But in the eyes of others, this attack was already boring. What they cared more about was what Chang Nuo said during the attack.


    This shows that the world government did not assign the three of them toe here. There must be more strong people behind them.


    As for where are those people? No one on the entire battlefield could observe it.


    "Hahaha! I didn''t expect that there are still people in the world who can sense our existence. People like you can appear in a small ce like the South China Sea. If it is not surprising, it is really a pity!"


    While everyone was observing carefully, a burst ofughter came directly over.


    Immediately afterwards, apanied by a powerful and howling wind, a figure began to slowly appear in front of everyone.


    This is a man with six pairs of ck wings, wearing a very fine ck suit, with crimson eyes, and a head of fine long hair tied directly into a ponytail, but it can be confirmed that the other person is definitely a man.


    He was not the only oneing this time, there were two or three people moving behind him at high speed.


    However, something unexpected happened next.


    Two of the three people who followed brought a woman with them, and it was obvious that they were not invited directly so politely.


    One of the skinny men put his hand on Hancock''s shoulder, with a lewd smile on his face, but at this time Hancock had already passed out, although it was unknown what kind of situation caused her to not Withdrew from the naval battlefield, but now there is no need to say more about these things.


    "Emperor Tru, you are indeed quite powerful. Even that guy who ims to be able to wipe out everything every day was able to be crushed in your hands twice in a row. I really want to see what that guy looks like when he sees me. ."


    The man with wings said, and then suddenly he saluted Changnuo with a sense of enlightenment and said, "I''m really sorry, I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Fei Duo. Although I work for the World Government, I am still a human being." Free body.��


    "I really didn''t expect that Devil Fruits actually have such abilities? Everyone''s fruit has fallen into the form of an angel. It is an absolute phantom beast. It is said that it can control a variety of Devil Fruit abilities? I just don''t know if it is true or not."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    After saying that, the three mirror clones immediately returned to one body. This clone slowly fell to the ground and looked at this guy quietly.


    In some respects, I have to say that Fei Duo, who came here this time, is indeed quite handsome. If he didn''t have a woman''s ponytail, he would be a little more masculine. He would definitely be a god-like existence in the eyes of many women. .


    But even so, his handsome image is enough to fascinate many people.


    "Hmm~, it seems that you still understand the ability of this devil fruit, although I don''t know where you know it from? But..."


    "You bastard! How dare you soil my clothes again, you are absolutely unforgivable!!!"


    Before Fei Duo finished speaking, a huge angry voice came directly from the ruins of the Navy Headquarters building.


    The powerful voice at the intersection was filled with great anger, and the marines who were originally on the high tform unconsciously turned their gazes over.

 Chapter 509 A powerful person in the world government

    <h4>Chapter 509 A powerful person in the world government</h4>


    The man in the white suit began to slowly walk out of the hole he originally crashed into. The original white suit had already be messy.


    If I hadn''t seen his image before, I wouldn''t dare to confirm it now.


    The tattered image has long appeared on the back of the pure white suit. Even the suit that was still well-preserved during his lifetime has been stained with various dusts for an unknown period of time.


    The sses that had been on his face had disappeared in this impact, and what was left was a pair of small eyes that looked like knife cuts. It seemed to everyone that these facial features were simply too deformed.


    This guy was already on the verge of anger and didn''t care about the existence of other people on the field. After walking out of the hole he crashed into, he saw Emperor Tru still standing on the ground. He didn''t care about anything and rushed over suddenly.


    With the extremely fast speed, sonic boom scenes began to appear around him, but the moment he arrived, Fei Duo gritted his teeth and suddenly kicked the opponent in the face.


    How fast it rushes over, how fast it flies back.


    "How dare you interrupt me? Who gave you the courage?"


    Fei Duo said calmly, not even taking the other party seriously at all.


    Seeing now, Changnuo is evenpletely confused about the rtionship between the world government? Who has a high official position and a small official position? What was used to make the conclusion? Is it just based on strength?


    "The annoying flies have disappeared. We can continue to start the next conversation. If you don''t mind, I can even invite you to join the world government. Department T will always wee you. People like you should not just stay in the South China Sea. You have to be humble and be the king of only one country. If youe to our side, you will definitely enjoy treatment that is superior to that of tens of thousands of people."


    Fei Duo looked at Chang Nuo and started to draw a pie, but maybe what the other party said was true. After all, being able to have such strength and still stay in the World Government canpletely exin what benefits the World Government can give them?


    "It''s okay to talk about these things, but can we let her go first?"


    Chang Nuo said, pointing his right hand directly at the unconscious Hancock.


    "This is not possible, this woman is of great use to us!"


    Fei Duo said politely, but the scrawny guy behind him didn''t have such a good intention. Unknowingly, his hand started to touch Hancock''s face.


    With that disgusting expression, Enelu, who had been staying behind and watching all this, was the first to lose control and rushed towards them in an instant.


    But before he reached his destination, Fei Duo just looked at him and made Enel fall from the air instantly. The next moment, he suddenly kicked him in the stomach. It slid t on the ground like this for hundreds of meters.


    The deep ravine on the ground is enough to prove the strength of the opponent.


    In everyone''s eyes, Fei Duo only touched the opponent lightly, but this arrogant power could probably kill half of Anilu''s life.


    The giant steel ships that were parked a few hundred meters away began to spin their muzzles towards Fei Duo''s position one by one.


    If the opponent makes any move, maybe they don''t mind directly destroying the entire naval headquarters base.


    "Who is this person?"


    Lieutenant General He asked doubtfully, they had been in and out of that birdy ce of the World Government so many times, but this time these people appeared one after another, but they looked very familiar, and they even didn''t even meet each other. Never seen it.


    Although they know that the hidden power of the World Government may be very powerful, this time it can be regarded as subverting the Navy''s understanding of the World Government. People with powerful forces like the man in the white suit cannot actually upy a major position in the World Government.


    So what kind of identity will this Fei Duo have? This has to make people doubtful.


    "Didn''t he just say that, Department T, but I have only heard it once and have never seen anyone from their department. I didn''t expect the people in this department to be so powerful? No wonder the World Government Always so arrogant!" Warring States frowned.


    "These people are really incredibly powerful. What''s going on?" Garp asked.


    He has now refreshed his understanding of the World Government. He usually thinks that the Four Emperors above the pirates are already the ceiling of strength, but now he has never expected that a random person from the World Government is already standing on the ceiling. .


    Especially Fei Duo, who appears now, is so powerful that it makes everyone feel desperate.


    "Just to deal with a Toru Emperor, I didn''t expect the World Government to be willing to use hidden power. It seems that the loss of the air force made the World Government very angry." Sengoku said to himself.


    This war is no longer something they can participate in. Any one person can directly wipe out the entire navy. With the extremely powerful Devil Fruit ability, a man in a white suit can destroy an entire country by just one person. This ispletely in the fourth quarter. The stage of the emperor��s ability.


    Changnuo''s expression was still as calm as before. Enelu was hit so far away that he didn''t even look back.


    The whole person stared calmly at Fei Duo in front of him, and the depth of the other person did make people feel a little scary.


    This kind of person''s strength is definitely at the top of the world. With just this ability, he can probably get whatever he wants in this world.


    Even now, Chang Nuo canpletely feel that the other party is definitely the strongest man he has ever encountered so far.


    What was originally a good war on the top haspletely changed in the end. The game chips between the navy and the pirates have nowpletely be the Tru Empire and the World Government.


    On top of Nuoda''s naval headquarters base, the navies taking care of them, including the pirates and even the fugitivesing out of the impel city, were all stunned.


    Not to mention those people who were watching in front of the live broadcast, many of the big guys behind the scenes found it a bit incredible. The world government was popping up in waves, and the navy felt like it had disappeared on this battlefield.


    They were just like spectators, no longer taking action or shouting.


    The members of the Whitebeard Pirates have already retreated to the edge one by one, and some have even returned to the ship. Whether it is the protagonist of this world or Ace who needs to be rescued this time, they havepletely I began to understand the development process of this world.

 Chapter 510 The existence of Department T?

    <h4>Chapter 510 The existence of Department T?</h4>


    Through this war, no matter whether it is live broadcast or seeing these people in person, at least they have a deep understanding in their hearts.


    That is today''s world government. It is indeed still the most powerful behemoth in the world. It is so hidden that everyone can''t help but be shocked.


    People like Fei Duo, including the man in the white suit just now, and what they call the t department cannot help but make others think too much about all this.


    But now Changnuo has no idea about this. Although the other party has begun to invite, the anger in his heart has begun to gradually move toward marginalization.


    Seeing that his woman was in the hands of a wretched man, and the other man was still doing things that made him feel angry, and the thin man had no intention of stopping.


    His restless hands still kept moving back and forth on Hancock''s shoulders and face, sticking out his long tongue, and his saliva seemed to have begun to flow down.


    "Give you another chance and join the T Department. I can guarantee that nothing will happen to anyone in your Toru Empire. Even if you want, these people from the Whitebeard Pirates can be taken away by you, even if they include Luo Jay��s son, this is nothing.��


    Fei Duo asked again calmly, with a slight smile on his face.


    While saying this, Fei Duo also put away the six pairs of ck wings on his back. At this moment, his whole person becamepletely like a gentleman. If it weren''t for his eyes, which were still red, maybe others would really look like this. I believed what he said.


    Although we still don��t know what kind of organization t department is? But judging from the other party''s words and deeds, this department must be quite powerful in the world government.


    Just look at the behavior of Xiao Gangya and the others. This little guy has been acting like an obedient child since Fei Duo appeared. He didn''t even dare to say anything at first, and he stood there straight. , not even thinking of moving.


    This time it can obviously prove one thing, Xiao Gangya and others must know Fei Duo, or know very well what kind of organization T department is.


    "Why are you so confident? Do you think you can definitely beat me?"


    As Chang Nuo spoke, there was no attitude in his words. He was as calm as water. Even Fei Duo couldn''t help but raise his head and stare at him.


    But as soon as he said these words, the thin guy behind Fei Duo''s dishonest hands became dishonest again.


    The tongue that had been hidden deep in the mouth was finally ready to lick Hancock with confidence this time.


    "court death!!!"


    Changnuo was instantly angry, and his loud scolding voice was even mixed with the ability of the Psychic Devil Fruit. The power in that moment was many times more powerful than the Overlord''s Haki. Anyone who heard these two words would be weak. They fainted on the spot. Even if they were as powerful as the three generals, they couldn''t help but cover their ears.


    Fei Duo''s face suddenly became serious, but by this time it was already toote.


    Chang Nuo didn''t know when he appeared next to the thin man, grabbed the other man''s neck, and a sky-blue chain began to spread out of his hand. In an instant, the chain directly covered the thin man''s body.


    The way the immortal''s human body''s diamond chain can suppress the devil fruit''s ability ispletely equivalent to a seal. The seal is simr to the power of the Sea Tower Stone. The opponent suddenly became frightened and kept shaking his body, but at this moment There is no ability to resist at all.


    "The power of the second devil fruit!!!"


    Everyone in the audience shouted loudly, and all the double-doubles showed disbelief.


    Fei Duo finally showed a surprised expression at this time, but the most surprised person should be ckbeard who was watching the battle from a distance.


    Seeing this new ability, this guy''s mouth was already wide open, and his clenched fists rxed again in the next second.


    "How dare you touch my woman? Do you really think the World Government can protect you?"


    Chang Nuo said in a cold voice. The next second, the thin man started from his feet and was slowly cut by the space. This force was like a rotating de, directly cutting off the little flesh of this guy. Come down.


    Along with the wailing sound, everyone in the entire venue began to shudder.


    Even those in the Tru Empire felt that this guy deserved to die, but when they saw this scene, they still felt that His Majesty the King was able to show such a ruthless side today.


    Xiao Gangya, who was staying in the distance, couldn''t help but take a deep breath after seeing this scene. He was also worried about the recklessness of directly attacking Emperor Tru when he first came over.


    It is very easy to kill a person, but to make a person suffer the pain of skinning and cutting flesh really makes everyone feel the ultimate fear.


    Fei Duo stood there and watched this scene quietly. He did not choose to take action, but instead looked at the other party with interest.


    "Hey!! This woman is still in our hands."


    Seeing hispanion suffering such pain, another person who came with Fei Duo directly strangled Hancock''s neck and began to threaten Chang Nuo and shouted.


    "You can give it a try. My woman can be ced with you, but if she loses a hair next, I will let you spend reincarnation in infinite hell!"


    Chang Nuo''s eyes also turned red and he stared directly at the other person. At this moment, his voice was no longer deep and cold, but more like a demonic voice that seemed to emerge from hell.


    Perhaps it stemmed from the fear of red eyes from the very beginning. The guy who spoke unconsciously suddenly let go of Hancock''s hand, and his body couldn''t help but tremble.


    The huge wailing sound still continued toe from the mouth of the thin man. At least this moment could leave a major news to the World Economic News.


    That is, the empress who has been in the Shichibukai will actually be the woman of Emperor Toru. This piece of news may directly overturn the world''s perception.


    But the people present now seem to be no longer surprised at all. They are all just feeling the fear brought by Emperor Tru, including the powerful power of these people from the World Government. They have already been able to do it, and they are already invisible. Bury all the little things.

 Chapter 511 The war is over

    <h4>Chapter 511 The war is over</h4>


    Chang Nuo''s execution of this thin mansted for nearly ten minutes, starting from his feet to his hands, then to his entire body, and finally he waspletely cut into pieces of flesh and fell to the ground.


    The bones of the opponent were still bound by the diamond chains in his hands, and the blood spurting out did not even stain his clothes.


    After doing all this, Chang Nuo released the chain in his hand and let the skeleton fall to the ground.


    Afterwards, Chang Nuo turned to look at the man who was holding Hancock hostage. A powerful aura suddenly erupted, and red thunder and lightning began to emit in the air.


    "give me back!"


    Chang Nuo said in a low voice.


    The other party nced at Fei Duo, and after getting the leader''s permission, he directly delivered the unconscious Hancock to Chang Nuo with some fear.


    Feido didn''t say much. In fact, after bing a strong man, there were many things that he disdained the World Government''s methods.


    Fei Duo believed in this kind of thing, especially the threat of other people''s rtives. This kind of thing might be very useful for ordinary people, but it would probably be of no use to the person in front of him.


    To be able to be the king of a big country like Nuo, Fei Duo had learned a lot about Chang Nuo before. If the other party cared about these feelings, he would not have such a big ambition.


    How could a guy who clearly knew he was restless care about the life and death of the people around him at a critical moment?


    After Chang Nuo took Hancock, he gently touched her face without any ambiguity in his eyes.


    Enelu, who had been kicked away by Fei Duo before, also stumbled directly to Chang Nuo.


    Although there were no obvious scars on his body, Chang Nuo could already feel Fei Duo''s current strength by looking at Anilu''s current shape.


    "Take her down and let the ship''s doctor take a look at her!"


    "OK!"


    "Don''t worry, there''s nothing wrong with your woman, she''s just in a briefa!"


    When Chang Nuo and Chang Nuo weremunicating, Fei Duo directly interrupted and spoke calmly.


    "What exactly is your purpose?"


    Changnuo slowly put Hancock on Enelu''s back and asked calmly while doing it.


    "To be honest, you can''t feel the loneliness in the world of strong men. So when the old guy found me today, I immediately agreed toe directly to this battlefield, just to see you, this special emperor. What is the strength?


    As for whether you can join the t department, actually that''s not what I worry about. A heart-pounding battle, maybe that''s what I want! "


    Fei Duo said eagerly, and he also felt Chang Nuo''s strength.


    At least being able to beat the number one man in the white suit into disgrace was enough to prove that he could be his opponent.


    "Yes, but not here. There are too many things and people here. You must not be able to use them, right? The war between the Navy and the Whitebeard Pirates ended like this. Everyone came back where they came from, and the rest It wouldn��t hurt for the two of us to find a ce to have a good chat.��


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his lips.


    "This is quite good, but after all, this is a navy matter. I can also ask for you, but I hope it won''t take up too much of my time."


    Fei Duo said, and his eyes began to turn to Warring States standing on the high tform in the next second.


    In any case, he is currently the suprememander of the navy. If this kind of thing didn''t have his nod, I''m afraid the matter would have ended, and it wouldn''t have gone smoothly.


    It''s not like they couldn''t hear the conversation between the two, even though they were so far apart, the domineering energy of seeing and hearing still fell on them.


    Both people can feel this very clearly to each other.


    "What do you two think?"


    On the high tform, Warring States asked Garp and Lieutenant General He next to him, and he could at least get some answers from these two friends.


    "You, the marshal, don''t want to do it anyway, and now there are so many uncertain factors on the battlefield. Do you think the navy can fight against the World Government or the Tru Empire?


    Even ancient weapons have been pulled out now. Anyway, you still need to see this matter for yourself. "


    Garp said leisurely.


    "Are you saying proudly that your grandson is safe and sound?" Lieutenant General He asked.


    "Why do I feel like you are always targeting me in this war? Can''t we have a good chat with each other?"


    Garp said, the haze hanging over his head had dissipated long after Ace and Luffy were safe.


    Now at least he no longer has to worry about the safety of his grandson, but there are simply too many more important things than this right now.


    Looking around, everyone from the World Government is there, and the people from the Tru Empire are also watching with eager eyes.


    I''m afraid that after today''s incident passes, the Navy should once again be the pawn of the World Government and start focusing on the South China Sea area.


    But how could the behemoth Trul Empire bepared to today''s navy?


    "You two, stop arguing, I think that''s it!"


    Warring States seemed to have exhausted all his strength to say this, and then he frowned and started to take a few steps forward.


    When he stood at the edge of the high tform, he picked up the seemingly iplete microphone in his hand and shouted with all his strength, "The war is over!"


    Those in the navy were all holding their heads and crying, and some were probably happy that they had survived and were still in the aftermath of the disaster.


    Although this war apparently caused the greatest losses to the World Government, how could their naval losses be so small?


    At least 1/3 of the more than 100,000 troops have been lost. Although the battlefield has been cleaned up before, there are still many corpses lying there.


    Although it has been announced that the war is over, none of the members of the Whitebeard Pirates are happy. After all, Whitebeard is still standing there holding his sword upright.


    "Jie hahahaha!! I didn''t expect to see such a wonderful battle today, but it''s really disappointing that this war ended like this!!"


    ckbeard stood in the distance, watching every move at the scene, followed by his team members. After all, this guy still belonged to the Shichibukai, and the navy didn''t want to have any more entanglements with these guys.


    Now that they have suffered heavy losses, they can only watch this group of people die like this.

 Chapter 512 The whole army retreats

    <h4>Chapter 512 The whole army retreats</h4>


    Not to mention that the navy didn''t want to go, and if they wanted to fight with them, the members of the Whitebeard Pirates who were in mourning didn''t want to cause trouble anymore at this moment.


    They knew very well that if the powerful men on both sides of the Tru Empire and the World Government were not prepared for a thorough duel, this war would not have been resolved so quickly or easily.


    "Emperor Tru!!!"


    After announcing that the war was over, Marco in the distance shouted towards Chang Nuo with tears in his eyes.


    After hearing the sound, Chang Nuo turned his head and just nced at it before turning back to Fei Duo and continuing to say, "We also need to take away the old man''s body!"


    "That''s your business and has nothing to do with me. I just ask you to hurry up and don''t dy our next time!"


    Fei Duo said nonchntly.


    "That''s OK!"


    Changnuo said, and then the impatient members of the Whitebeard Pirates immediately began to rush towards where Whitebeard was standing.


    Most of the people who ran past were almost the captains of the Whitebeard Pirates'' divisions. They were all crying while running. Until they came to Whitebeard''s side, the first thing they did was to kneel down on the ground.


    Seeing that their faces were now pale and their white beards had been missing for a long time, these people knocked their heads on the ground one by one, shedding tears.


    Next, they carefully lowered Whitebeard''s body directly, and a dozen people carefully opened Whitebeard''s body and began to leave towards the edge.


    Now that the war is over, although the navy is very concerned about the oue of this war, for them, in a sense, they have won.


    "Captain Bucky, the war is over, what should we do?"


    In a corner of the battlefield, there were at least hundreds of people staying here with Bucky the Clown. However, this guy seemed to have be their leader. Even at this time, they couldn''t help but ask directly.


    "You bastards! Why are you still standing there, why don''t you run away quickly? It doesn''t matter whose ship it is, just find one first!"


    Bucky shouted loudly, and then he threw down the phone that was recording this moment. He didn''t want to think about any unnecessary things anymore. The most important thing now was to get out of this ghost ce as soon as possible.


    Otherwise, if we don''t take advantage of this atmosphere and environment, and wait until the navy reacts, how will these people have the ability to fight against them?


    After hearing this, a group of people hurriedly started to run towards the edge of the ice.


    "Now that the war is over and people are starting to prepare to leave, isn''t it time to talk about our affairs?"


    Fei Duo looked at Chang Nuo with a sneer and asked silently.


    "There''s nothing to worry about. We can start after I arrange the others. But what I''m more curious about is what kind of ce will you choose? At least you need to find an ind without people. Then there won''t be any In the battle to worry about our future, won��t it be the oue we want whether we win or lose?��


    Chang Nuo asked Fei Duo with a smile.


    "That makes sense. How about I give you another ten minutes? As for the ind you mentioned, you don''t have to worry about it. Whether it''s their navy or the world government, it''s used for this. There are really too many venues!�� Fei Duo said.


    "Then it''s as you wish!"


    Chang Nuo said, and the whole person disappeared in an instant, and when he appeared again, he was already suspended in mid-air.


    Several blue rays of light once again emerged from the palm of his hand, connecting to the space gate. After waiting for the blue vortexes in the space gate to slowly enter a rotating state, Chang Nuo directly began to shout, "The mission is over, the entire army retreats." !��


    This time, for these people from the Tohru Empire, none of them were even addicted. After all, apart from firing a few cannons on the ship, they did almost nothing else.


    They just came to stand and cheer, and the rest of them really couldn''t find any reason. After all, those who stayed on the battlefield and came to the World Government were all so strong and perverted that they were even so strong that they were outrageous.


    There is nothing wrong with retreating now. After all, all the results they wanted from the Tru Empire have been achieved.


    "Return to the space portal, everyone is ready!"


    Abona shouted loudly, then turned towards the direction of the battlefield and shouted again, "Mihawk, the challenge between us is not over yet. When one day we have time toe to the South China Sea area, we will meet you again at that time." Stay with me until the end."


    After saying that, all the steel battleships together with the ancient weapon Pluto began to slowly enter the space portal.


    So far, no one from the Tru Empire who came here has suffered any loss. The worst thing should be that this guy Eniro was kicked hard. Is there any special situation in the rest?


    It was just a waste of some artillery shells, but the World Government lost too much in this war.


    Not to mention the destruction of the air force, five ships were directly sunk immediately after. Such losses would probably be an extremely heavy burden for the World Government.


    The Air Force, which has always been hidden from everyone, is now in a state ofplete destruction without even showing its face.


    Whitebeard''sst move allowed Chang Nuo to truly experience the power that belongs to the strong or the most powerful man in the world.


    Even he might not be able to handle such a situation. One move can even cause the dimensional space to resonate. Even if it is hidden in other spaces, Whitebeard''s use of this move is enough to make Chang Nuo fall on the spot.


    To create such a powerful attack at the cost of his life, if he had been young, Whitebeard could really have be the most powerful person in the world.


    But now Whitebeard can only leave a sigh of relief. After all, from today on, there will no longer be Whitebeard in this world. His end has already destined the end of the previous era.


    A new era has begun, so who will be the king next? People in this era will have their own judgment.


    The warships of the Toru Empire all entered the space gate one after another. Even the ships of the Whitebeard Pirates followed one by one. Even Luffy and Ace were apanying them. The members of the Whitebeard Pirates have all entered the Space Gate, and their next destination will be to directly reach the South China Sea area.


    But they were not the only ones who would take these ships, there were also some other people who also boarded the Whitebeard pirate ship, and one by one used the space door to escape from this sea area.

 Chapter 513 The Embarrassment of Being the Four Emperors

    <h4>Chapter 513 The Embarrassment of Being the Four Emperors</h4>


    It can also be said that there are indeed people who did not leave directly in this way. Bucky the Clown and the people in Impel Down City got a naval warship from somewhere. Although it was a little dpidated, it could at least continue sailing. .


    From the beginning of their retreat, they did not choose to follow therge fleet of ships into the space gate. Instead, they took a direct detour and left the sea area, heading in other directions.


    By the time everything was settled, except for Abona, the admirals from the Navy headquarters who had left, almost all of the remaining ones who came here were on the Infinity.


    Even Junhe, who hurried back, also stayed here, but the time consumed along the way made himpletely miss many wonderful scenes.


    Just when everyone was preparing to leave, he wandered over to this ce.


    The strength of the ship that Junhe is on can be said to be the most powerfulbat power in this battle on the top. On his ship alone, there is no need to say more about Junhe''s own strength. The strength of the shadow guard It''s enough to kill red-haired Shanks.


    In fact, the opponent''s performance at the moment was not very good. They had already sensed it the moment the space could only start to be transmitted.


    Right? There is no need to worry too much about the war with the red-haired pirates. At least everything here has ended. How about where they are? No one cares about it long ago.


    But as the four emperors, the red-haired pirates had already be embarrassed after they werepletely defeated.


    The people on the boat couldn''t look like they were part of the Yonko Pirates at this moment.


    Even the red-haired Shanks'' face was covered with scars at the moment, and the clothes on his body were in tatters.


    The mast on the ship had already disappeared at this moment.


    "Captain, what is the situation in the Tru Empire? Why are there such powerful people?"


    Jesus put ice cubes on his forehead to eliminate the purple bumps on his forehead. Everyone else also had ufortable expressions on their faces.


    "Didn''t you notice? Their individual strength is not very strong, but thebined strength of the dozen or so people in this group is almost the same as that of one person, so the attack power caused by them can be considered ridiculously powerful. !" Beckman said.


    He is also the only person here who is rtively intact. His clothes are still neat and smooth, with no damage at all, and no additional obvious scars.


    Shanks was probably the most seriously injured. As the captain, not to mention the injuries on his face, blood was still flowing from the corners of his mouth, and there was a big hole in the clothes on his chest, and he was obviously burned. look.


    "How many years has it been? Since we became the Four Emperors, it seems that we have never been so embarrassed, right?"


    Shanks said with a bitter look on his face, his brows furrowed and he felt as if he had eaten shit.


    "Why did they leave suddenly? Is there no need to stop us anymore?"


    The fat Lazilu asked with some doubts.


    "The matter is over, so there is no need to stop us anymore. I don''t know how the situation has developed. It is estimated that everyone has evacuated now. Even if we go back, we may not have any effect."


    Beckman said, then slowly stood up and took two steps towards the deck.


    The current ship is in a state of disrepair. Without a mast, it is probably quite difficult to move the ship forward.


    Fortunately, their current location is just above the ocean current between Impel City and the Navy Headquarters. In a triangr area, they can even turn directly to Mariejoia, which at least ensures that they can safely enter the new world.


    This war has refreshed the three views of many people. In their opinion, the Four Emperors are already the most powerful existences, but now after fighting one after another, they have simply subverted their three views.


    The most important thing is to refresh their impression of the world government. Of course, Chang Nuo may have already had a lot of spection about these things.


    Although I didn��t know much about the World Government before, at least the information that Golden Lion Shiji and Whitebeard told him before his death were enough to prove that the World Government is not as fragile as imagined. .


    This time he really confirmed his suspicion. The air force, which can hide in the sky, can directly monitor thend and obliterate the existence on thend anytime and anywhere.


    There are also the T departments that have appeared now, each of which is extremely powerful and abnormal.


    The one who feels the most pressure should still belong to the current Navy. Sengoku may know something, but he never said it at all.


    With such a powerful world government, they have no choice but to make a choice.


    Not to mention that in the current Navy Headquarters, Sengoku and Garp are already as powerful as the Four Emperors, but even with such strength, they are still constrained by the World Government.


    After everyone left, Chang Nuo also took a steel battleship alone. Without any hurry, he took Fei Duo directly on the Infinity and headed in the direction he designated.


    However, this direction is still in the first half of the Great Route, and it can even be said that this ce is not too far away from the Navy Headquarters.


    Judiciary City, Impel Down City and the Naval Headquarters Base are essentially a triangle, plus a Mariejoia. However, this time the area designated by Feido is actually in the middle of these.


    The situation on the Infinity can almost be described as tense. Fei Duo was not the only one who boarded the ship. The man in the white suit, Xiao Gangya, and the people from the World Government who followed them all followed them.


    Especially the man in the white suit before had lost his original sharpness. At first, he didn''t know about Fei Duo''s appearance. Instead, he was too angry and ignored everyone and rushed towards Chang Nuo.


    In fact, he only discovered Fei Duo''s existence when he was halfway through the process, but at this time he discovered that he had already been unable to stop the car, and he happened to hit the opponent''s feet directly.


    So after being kicked away again, the man in the white suity upright in that ce for a long time. It was only after the Warring States Period announced the end of the war that the guy ran out with lingering fear.


    The man in the white suit knows very well the T department where Fei Duo works. To be precise, this organization is really good and he is his absolute boss.


    All of them are those with extremely abnormal strength. Although the man in the white suit is not invincible to anyone, he really can''t resist Fei Duo in front of him.

 Chapter 514 Invalid Devil Fruit Ability

    <h4>Chapter 514 Invalid Devil Fruit Ability</h4>


    The people on the entire ship were moving slowly and harmoniously.


    In the end, Fei Duo couldn''t hold back his arrogant temperament. He faced forward, looked at the sea, and asked with some doubts, "If you be stronger in the future? Or have the ability to challenge the world government, what will you do next?" How to do it?��


    "Isn''t it already obvious that it means nothing to me to challenge the World Government or not? I can just do what I want from now on."


    Changnuo said with a slight smile.


    There were only the two of them at the front, and behind them were Eniro, Junhe and General Yixiao, who were apanying Xiao Gangya, a man in a white suit, and those who came with them. Several people were sitting there drinking and chatting. sky.


    They may be testing each other''s thoughts, or they may be testing other things, but no matter what, they are still chatting happily at the moment.


    Hearing what Chang Nuo said, Fei Duo couldn''t help but smile, then turned to look directly at the other person and asked again, "Do you think you have a chance to win this time?"


    "It has been at least ten years, maybe longer, and I have never shown my full strength. I don''t know what it will be like, but you are very strong. Of course, I will not give in just like that!" Chang Nuo said. .


    "Yes, you and I really have the same idea. For how many years, fighting with those people is just like fighting with a child? The loneliness of the invincibility of the strong has made people feel tired!"


    Fei Duo said thoughtfully, and a look of anticipation began to show on his expression.


    Although he looks like an elegant gentleman now, this guy''s age is probably beyond anyone''s imagination.


    A person who can possess such great strength, possess a very high status and power in the world government, and is not subject to the rules of the world government, how powerful such an existence can be, at least in the eyes of others for now. It''s impossible to know.


    "Who do you think will win between the two of them next?"


    The two people in front were chatting, and a few people in the back were sitting there drinking and watching them chat.


    But things havee to this point. In fact, people on both sides are very curious about who will win next?


    Xiao Gangya couldn''t hold back his curiosity and was the first to bring up this topic and looked at everyone and asked.


    "To be honest, you don''t have to think about it so much now. We probably won''t even be able to participate in the battle between the two of them!"


    The man in the white suit is now number one to be precise. After all, this guy has already changed into a new white suit.


    The tattered clothes before have now been reced by the clothes of the Tru Empire. Although it is still just a suit, it at least looks more formal than his white suit before.


    What he said this time was more pertinent, after all, he had personally withstood the power between the two.


    As a user with natural air devil fruit abilities, No. 1''s devil fruit ability is definitely at the top of the natural devil fruit abilities. The reason why he is so good may be because of his insufficient strength orck of development.


    "As top experts, we don''t know what level their strength will reach. But this time we are lucky enough to have a look, which can be considered very good!"


    General Yixiao suddenly said that he was also very curious about this kind of thing. In fact, he was even more curious about the extent of the strength that his king must have.


    "Just watch this time. Wait for a while. I suggest we stay farther away. Don''t let a random shock wave hurt us by then. It won''t be very cost-effective!"


    Junhe said.


    He doesn''t care about this matter, or it can be said that he has great trust in His Majesty the King. A person who can invisibly improve his strength to this level is enough to subvert people''s three views. When can a person still Can you help others improve their strength? And it can also help others awaken devil fruit abilities. Such an existence is simply terrifying.


    Junhe''s words were not invincible and arrogant. At least in his self-understanding, as he gained more and more experience, this method of helping others improve their strength was definitely not something ordinary people could do.


    "That''s right, why are we worrying so much? Can''t we just have a drink here?"


    As Nilu said, he picked up the ss of wine in his hand, drank it directly, then leaned directly on the sofa, and opened his mouth again and said, "Hai Ling, you have to activate the maximum defenseter, try to get as close as possible to watch! "


    "Lieutenant General Eniro, the system will choose the appropriate distance based on the energy emanating between the two of them!"


    Hai Ling appeared directly and said respectfully.


    "Nani? This ship actually has such capabilities?"


    Xiao Gangya asked in surprise.


    "No wonder the Tru Empire is so powerful? I didn''t expect that even technology would develop to such an extent!" No. 1 said.


    "By the way, why are you guys drinking with us so leisurely? Are you not afraid that your boss will misunderstand you?" Jun He asked with some disgust.


    "Now is the time to talk about these things. We have amon identity this time, so we are bystanders. It''s just a matter of a few bottles of wine. When the timees, I will get you some better ones from the Tianlong people!"


    No. 1 said nonchntly, picked up the wine in his hand and continued to drink.


    The others could only show helpless expressions. Although they followed him this time, it was true that as the number one said, they just wanted to see the challenge between their King and the other party.


    For all of them, they all want to see what a war between the strongest in the world will be like, and what extent will the strong strength reach? This is also what they will pay special attention to next.


    Chang Nuo and Fei Duo stood side by side on the edge of the deck, both admiring the sea water in front of them. Under the rapid speed of the Endless, the scenery on both sides of them was also quickly dissipating.


    In fact, Chang Nuo had been sizing up the other party consciously or unconsciously, but in the end he finally discovered one thing, that is, the ability of the psychic devil fruit could not prate what the other party was thinking at all? Even the psychic devil fruit ability exerted on the opponent cannot get close.


    He was always curious about how this guy appeared? His strength was so powerful and unknown to everyone. Even though he had the Eye of God, Chang Nuo still felt that the person in front of him was full of secrets.


    Of course, this was all a mystery from the beginning.

 Chapter 515 The Island of Justice

    <h4>Chapter 515 The Ind of Justice</h4>


    Especially when he saw Fei Duo for the first time, Chang Nuo felt the very unusual aura on Fei Duo''s body. The powerful power waspletely restrained, making it impossible for anyone to find any ws.


    Along the way, Chang Nuo kept looking at each other, but everything seemed to have no ws.


    The only thing he could know was that the other party had a super powerful animal devil fruit, but how powerful was this devil fruit? So far he doesn''t really know.


    It''s just that before the two people start the decisive battle, there must be a result.


    In this way, after sailing for an hour, an ind finally appeared in front of them.


    It''s just that this ind ispletely different from what I imagined. From a distance, it looks more biased, so a huge stone falls in the middle of the sea.


    It is bare, and there is not even any vegetation growing on it. To be more precise, even if there is some vegetation growing on it, it looks like nothing at all from this angle.


    The overall height of this ind is rtively high, at least about 50m above the sea. Perhaps it is more appropriate to say that it is a tform above the sea.


    As the distance gets closer and closer, the appearance of the entire ind is revealed to everyone. From a distance, this thing looks like a huge stone, but up close, this guy actually looks like this.


    There are some sparsely grown vegetation on it, butpared to this huge stone, they are just nts growing in the gaps.


    There is nothing else at all. The entire ind is directly about 50m above the sea. There is only a step above the sea and the rest of the ind is like a cliff.


    "How is this ce?"


    Fei Duo turned to look at Chang Nuo and asked.


    "It''s a very nice ce, but I''ve never heard of this ind!" Chang Nuo said.


    "It''s normal that I haven''t heard of it. After all, this ce is not shown on the map at all. This ind is called the Ind of Justice. It was moved from the New World eight hundred years ago. The biggest advantage is that the hardness of this ind is very high. Generalrge-scale attacks will not cause any damage to him, so the position left here is usually provided for training by those in the World Government.


    But so far, at least for the past two hundred years, this ce has been used less and less frequently. It may even be that no one has used it for several years or more than ten years. Fei Duo said with a little emotion.


    "This is really surprising. The ind that was moved from the New World? How to do it?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "As someone who has awakened your space ability, you can do it if you want to do it. The situation was exactly the same 800 years ago. The key is that this thing is Ravdru today. The entire ind has been moved here. This is why the bird ce is now surrounded by maic vortexes!"


    Fei Duo spoke calmly, as if he had done all these things.


    But the words were spoken calmly, but the listeners did not think so.


    After listening to these words, Chang Nuo hadpletelye up with an answer, that is, the existence of this ind definitely has an unimaginable origin. In addition, the guy in front of him had also been to Lavdru.


    So where the so-called Pirate King''s final secret treasure, Rufford Road, is located, in fact, the world government has already known what is there. Maybe they don''t care about the content, or maybe they are not worried about being discovered by others. .


    But in any case, Chang Nuo did not doubt the truth of what Fei Duo said?


    The ce of Ravdru is indeed in a deep pit, and everything around it seems as if it has been cut with a knife. Combined with the ind in front of you, all these possibilities are reallyparable.


    "That really makes people look forward to it. How will the next battle develop? But aren''t you worried that the battle between the two of us will level this ind? At that time, it will attract the attention of those old men in the World Government. Not satisfied?"


    Changnuo said with a slight smile. Although he couldn''t explore the other person''s thoughts with the Psychic Devil Fruit, he could still judge the next guess from the other person''s facial expression.


    "Don''t think about it. Let alone bulldozing this ind, so what if you just bulldoze Mariejoia?" Feido still said calmly, without any expression on his face.


    It''s like a robot, with no smile, no expression, and no expression of any emotion.


    "Since you said that, I understand. They can stay here. Can''t we just go up?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Listen to you, this kind of thing doesn''t matter to me!"


    Fei Duo said, and the six pairs of wings behind him instantly appeared. The dark feathers looked so elegant from this distance.


    If his hair hadn''t been so long, he might have looked different.


    Fei Duo slowly pped his wings and floated directly in mid-air. Chang Nuo followed closely behind, floating at the same height.


    The other people on the Infinity also immediately stopped what they were doing, and all of them raised their heads and looked up at the sky.


    The Infinity also stopped directly. Currently, it is still about five or six hundred meters away from the so-called Ind of Justice, but this distance is not the same thing at all for the two of them.


    "Everyone, based on the energy emitted by the two of them, the Infinity will retreat to two kilometers away!"


    Hai Ling suddenly appeared and spoke directly to everyone present.


    How can they have any opinions? In other words, when they couldn''t offer any opinions at all, the Infinity had already begun to slowly retreat.


    The giant steel ship that had followed before, faced with such a situation, began to retreat directly.


    No one knows what will happen next, but with the power of knowledge and domineering, they can well perceive the overall fighting situation on the ind.


    "Hey!!! You guys who are better at seeing, hearing, and domineering can still sense it. How can someone like me sense it?"


    Junhe was the first to be directly dissatisfied. Maybe he had the strength to approach and watch directly, but now he was not given a chance at all.


    "I think so. Is there any way to watch it up close without any possible damage?"


    The big guy No. 5, who had been following Xiao Gangya before, also asked directly.


    He was in the same situation as Junhe. This guy had powerful armed-color Haki, but his shoring was the Haki of knowledge and knowledge, which was a mess.

 Chapter 516 The completely tortured Chang Nuo

    <h4>Chapter 516 Thepletely tortured Chang Nuo</h4>


    Isn''t the purpose of theming all the way this time just to see the battle between them, but to see a hammer two kilometers away?


    People like Enilu and General Yixiao are so domineering and powerful in seeing and hearing things. For them, it doesn''t matter how far away they are. In the end, they still rely on their perception to see.


    But for these people who are domineering and have rtively low strength, this is indeed a headache.


    "I will turn on the Apocalypse screenter. By that time, all the pictures on the entire ind will be disyed here!"


    Hai Ling said, and then something like a projection directly extended from the top of the Infinity.


    There seemed to be a protective shield covering him, and then it began to spread like radiation, and finally the entire ind was directly covered in this area.


    The next moment, the appearance of the entire ind was instantly projected on the hull. Although it was only a reduced version, for these guys who had no knowledge of Haki, it was the only thing that allowed them to see their battle scenes.


    When he firstnded on the Ind of Justice, Chang Nuo had already discovered that the stone on it was indeedpletely different from the other stones. It was extremely dark, as if there was apletely huge piece of steel under his feet.


    Chang Nuo suddenly chopped his foot towards the ground, but as if the whole stone was fully stressed, the powerful force was directly dposed in an instant.


    "No need to test. Normally, this ind will not be harmed at all, so you can rest assured in the next battle!" Fei Duo said.


    "It''s not that there''s nothing to worry about, so let''s start like this!"


    Chang Nuo said. He was still lowering his head. When he suddenly raised his head, a cold color appeared on his face.


    Fei Duo didn''t mind at all, but looked expectantly, and her red eyes suddenly turned red.


    A powerful momentum also filled the entire ind at this moment. In just a moment, the momentum between the two directly forced the sea water back. Wu Jinhao in the distance was also affected by the waves of this momentum.


    This was just their opening dish. The two people were about 20 meters apart, and their momentum was like two shock waves, forming a clearly defined dividing line in the middle.


    The two of them stood with their hands sped behind each other, standing there looking at each other, but at the same time they were not in a hurry to make a move.


    The few vegetation that originally grew on the ind became bare again under the impact of this momentum.


    The ind is not particrlyrge, with an area of ??only two square kilometers at most. The top of the ind is very t, as if it has been polished. This ce can amodate at least tens of thousands of people, but here, today will definitely happen. Stage a battle between the strongest yers in the world.


    Fei Duo maintained a calm state from beginning to end, and even felt that all these things had nothing to do with him. His calm expression did not even cause any disturbance in his heart.


    Chang Nuo was the first to not hold back, and directly released blue overlord-colored Haki from his body. Lightning began to appear from all over his body first, and then, the momentum was instantly mixed with Overlord-colored Haki and began to attack in the direction of Fei Duo.


    Fei Duo said nothing more. After his face became a little serious, a powerful overlord-colored domineering force suddenly burst out from his body. Countless thunder and lightning began to circle over the entire ind. The collision between the overlord-colored domineering energy seemed to make this area The area formed an endless lightning restricted area.


    The overlord color domineering between ck and bluepeted with each other. Not to mention other aspects, at least at the level of overlord color domineering, Changnuo hadpletely taken the advantage at the beginning.


    The advantage was all on his side, and the overlord''s domineering energy immediately covered the opponent, and then enveloped the entire ind.


    The six pairs of wings on Fei Duo''s back grew instantly after Changnuo''s overlord-colored domineering energy covered his own overlord-colored domineering, until the entire wings became about two meters in length, covering the entire body in an instant.


    "Bang!!!"


    Chang Nuo was the first to attack, directly using his domineering legs to kick his body that was covered by six pairs of ck wings.


    With the appearance of the powerful sound, the ground that could withstand ordinary attacks instantly caused Fei Duo''s feet to sink directly into the stone because of this kick.


    "This bastard!!!"


    After kicking him, Changnuo retreated at an extremely fast speed and jumped to a distance of at least 100 meters from Fei Duo. This was mainly because he used so much force with this kick, but the opponent''s body didn''t even move.


    The power of this kick was previously used on the man in the white suit, No. 1, and he directly kicked the opponent into the air. But now, when the same move is used on the man in front of him, it is as if he was kicked on steel. role.


    Apart from making a faint sound, the other party still stood there motionless.


    "Is it toote to still want to retreat now?"


    Chang Nuo had just jumped 100 meters away and had notnded safely when Fei Duo''s voice appeared directly in his ears.


    Moreover, what appeared in the ear was not just in the external space mirror, but in the ear of Chang Nuo himself who was in the dimensional space.


    This is the first time Changnuo has had such a feeling.


    "boom!!!!"


    Fei Duo had been protecting his body with his wings and stayed there motionless, but this guy was able to directly follow the pace of his space ability and instantly caught up with Chang Nuo who was retreating. Then he suddenly waved his wings, and a powerful force The power instantly disintegrated the spatial mirror.


    This time, the powerful force directly caused the sea water on both sides to be pushed outward by a powerful force.


    The sea water on both sides then began to form a huge wave up to a hundred meters high in the distance. However, this was only caused by his power. The Devil Fruit''s ability has not been used at all so far.


    There is nothing wrong in saying that these six pairs of wings are the power of Devil Fruit.


    "I should havee out now, right?"


    Fei Duo said calmly, even though Chang Nuo was no longer on the entire ind, as a strong man, he knew very well that the person he just attacked was not him.


    Some details in the battle can bepletely perceived through power control.


    "It is indeed very powerful!"


    In fact, there was no need for the other party to say anything more, Chang Nuo had already begun to slowly walk out of the space.


    Still the same as the original image, a ck crack suddenly appeared in the original space, and Chang Nuo walked directly in front of him calmly.

 Chapter 517 The impact of punches to the flesh

    <h4>Chapter 517 The impact of punches to the flesh</h4>


    The reason why Chang Nuo appears here this time is simply because he is eager for this battle, and more importantly, to respect the other party.


    Although he was very confident in his own strength so far, the guy in front of him made himpletely unable to guess what level of strength he had reached.


    For a guy who can''t even prate the Psychic Devil Fruit, it''s really hard to imagine how powerful he will be.


    Being able to make his own mirror image disappear in the blink of an attack, Feido is definitely the most powerful being in the world of pirates in Chang Nuo''s impression.


    "That''s great. I hope the two of us can have a lot of fun in the future, but having said that, I won''t hold back any of the attacks below!"


    "bring it on!"


    Chang Nuo said, his eyes suddenly became serious.


    The two men followed closely and disappearedpletely on the spot. Even in the air, the existence of the two people could not be sensed.


    But the only thing that can be felt is the sound of constant collisions. The powerful overlord-colored domineering energy makes the entire sky and sea water filled with thunder and lightning. It feels like a restricted area for humans within a radius of 2km!


    On the Infinity in the distance, a group of people were not only perceiving the situation above with their hegemonic aura, but their eyes were also staring closely at the simted projection on their side emitted by the Infinity system. Even though the two people were No one could be found in the projection, and there were no two people in the perception of Shi Wen Se Haki.


    The two parties looked at each other, and they could feel the iparable shock in their eyes.


    ��BOOM!!!!��


    "Bang!!!!"


    ��


    Now, all these people can hear is the sound of suchrge-scale collisions, and every collision can make the sea water retreat. Even as powerful as the so-called Ind of Justice, it feels like it is crumbling.


    However, as the two parties involved, from the beginning of the battle, no one of them had priority in using Devil Fruit abilities. It was aplete collision of fists and flesh. They moved with each other at extremely fast speeds, and each attack directly Use the overlord-colored domineering energy to wrap around your fist.


    "This matter will not be spread today, so let us enjoy the feast of this kind of battle unscrupulously!"


    Fei Duo''s face was distorted and he shouted loudly, his eyes also glowed red. The next second, the six pairs of wings on his body suddenly stretched out, and the ck suit on his body also disappeared at this moment.


    The whole person was shirtless and started to attack Chang Nuo directly at an extremely fast speed.


    But the next moment, Chang Nuo''s eyes also emitted blood-red light, and his whole body fell directly to the ground, and stopped moving. As the opponent''s fist came, Chang Nuo''s left leg was directly behind him, forming a lunge. After stabilizing his body, Directly use your fist to receive the opponent''s attack.


    Fei Duo seemed to have sensed Chang Nuo''s intention and did not move. The two strong men stood less than 1m apart. Their fists collided with each other at a high speed. The powerful shock wave not only retreated the sea water , even the dark clouds in the sky were all dispersed at this moment.


    Overlord and domineering, they spend their money unscrupulously on this ind. The two of them either use their fists or their faces to directly ept each other''s attacks. The battle between the strong suddenly bes so simple.


    They were all stunned when they saw this picture from a distance. They never thought that the battle could still go on like this?


    But the attack power of each of their punches is enough to instantly kill any lower-level lieutenant general. But with such an attack, when a punch hit Fei Duo''s chest, the opponent suddenly couldn''t help it, and the corner of his mouth started to Spilling blood.


    Isn''t this the case with Changnuo?


    But both of them have extremely abnormal recovery abilities. In such a situation, no matter how serious the injury is, they can recover as before in an instant.


    The crackling sound of collision resounded unbridled in this area. The little steel teeth on the Infinity looked at this scene, and the corners of their mouths began to grin.


    "No. 1, what on earth are these two doing? They fought well, why did they end up like this?"


    Xiao Gangya asked with some confusion.


    "It''s not that they have to fight like this. In the previous situation, each other has already tested each other''s strength. The reason why they chose the simplest way is because they don''t want to move and use their own abilities for the ultimate battle. At that time, the offensive performance will be triggered. It may directly destroy half of the Grand Line!"


    General Yixiao frowned and said, although the two people just maintained this posture to fight, what kind of force did the attack between each other''s fists achieve? If we let these people go up, I''m afraid they''d all be beaten to death with two punches.


    "This blind old gentleman is right..."


    "Do you want to fight? This is our general with a smile!"


    Before No. 1 finished speaking, Jun He looked directly at him and asked with a cold voice.


    "When I said something wrong, but speaking of the matter, even if they keep fighting in the simplest way, this kind of thing is no longer something we can participate in."


    No. 1 didn''t care too much and started analyzing the current situation directly.


    "I don''t know much about this? But I feel like there''s nothing special about their fight? Who is at the upper hand and who is at the lower end? We don''t seem to understand at all."


    The big guy No. 5 who followed No. 1 asked equally puzzledly.


    "Watch carefully!"


    Junhe said, immediately interrupting them and continuing the conversation.


    How could such a fighting moment allow them to continue to be distracted? None of these people wanted to miss a single second.


    "Hahahaha~! So happy! So happy!!"


    Fei Duo shouted excitedly while pumping his fists.


    But as the target and opponent of the attack, Chang Nuo felt that the opponent was aplete pervert from the beginning to the end.


    He was so powerful that he had no bottom. Even if they stayed by his side, it seemed that the two of them were still fighting each other, but he knew very well that they seemed to be no match for this guy now.


    I don''t even have the slightest idea of ??what this guy''s status is in the World Government? With such great strength, how many people can there be in the world government?


    "The recovery power between each other is too fast. It''s really meaningless to fight like this. How about another way?"


    Chang Nuo greeted the opponent''s fist while punching, and then punched Fei Duo on the chest. At the moment when the opponent was suddenly stunned, he opened his mouth and asked.


    Fei Duo had an evil smile on his face, clenched his fists, as if he didn''t hear what he said, and suddenly a dark fist attacked him directly again.

 Chapter 518 The Hidden Function of the Endless

    <h4>Chapter 518 The Hidden Function of the Endless</h4>


    Seeing this situation, Chang Nuo didn''t want to say any more. He directly attacked the opponent''s fist with the same fist.


    The moment the two fists collided together, the huge stone under their feet could no longer withstand the force. Suddenly, a huge crack directly prated the entire ind.


    The strong impact also caused the two people to take two or three steps back at the same time. The huge stone or ind under their feet immediately opened a crack nearly 3m wide in the middle.


    A seemingly ordinary attack with one punch could turn the special stone ind under their feet into this. After they separated, the two of them were breathing heavily between each other.


    "You bastard! You punched me a total of 9376 times, but I only punched 9375 times. Inparison, I punched me once less. How dare you tell me to change the mode now?"


    Fei Duo''s face was distorted and he roared loudly. It was easy to see from his expression that he wanted to return the punch.


    Chang Nuo had a dark look on his face when he heard this. He really couldn''t understand how this guy grew so big. Is it possible that you don��t want to suffer any losses?


    "You can say this about a punch? I really don''t know what you are thinking?"


    Chang Nuo said speechlessly, but Fei Duo no longer wanted to listen to what he said. His wings suddenly spread out, and a powerful tornado instantly covered the entire ind.


    In this strong wind, Changnuo didn''t want to talk about anything else with the other party. Now that he had started to use his Devil Fruit ability, he naturally didn''t want to talk too much about it.


    In any case, the two of them are not friends at present. On the contrary, they are likely to be enemies in the future. Since they are facing such a powerful enemy, Chang Nuo wants the other party to stay directly whenever possible. here.


    "Since you want to y, then I''ll let you have as much fun as you want!"


    Chang Nuo shouted loudly, and then roared angrily again, "Awakening Power ~ Space Blockade!!"


    The next second, nine blue chains began to stretch out from Chang Nuo''s back, and they were instantly fixed around the entire ind at extremely fast speeds.


    When these chains were inserted deeply into the ground, anotheryer of blue light began to appear above them, and the power of space directly sealed the entire ind in this area.


    So far, he has not understood the extent of the opponent''s magic fruit ability. It can be seen from some simple information that the Angel Devil Fruit is definitely a bug among Devil Fruits.


    The most important thing is to what extent the other party has used it. Now he is not sure at all.


    Nowadays, it can only be restricted by blocking the space. At least it can restrain other abilities of the Angel Devil Fruit.


    In the system space, when these two people firstnded on the Ind of Justice, they had already exined all the Devil Fruit abilities in the angelic form of the Human Fruit.


    One has extremely high recovery ability and can control the weather. The most important thing is that this thing is almost immortal after awakening.


    With super powerful Devil Fruit abilities, he can undergo a second stage of awakening, and awaken again to the form of an archangel. He can even manipte space and time, making him almost in an absolutely invincible position.


    Faced with such a perverted existence, although Changnuo didn''t know how far the other party had cultivated this demon, he could at least control it in the early stage and nearly half of the power of the devil fruit could not be released.


    Fei Duo discovered such a thing at the same time, but if he wanted to leave at this time, it was already toote.


    The entire barrierpletely enveloped the ind. The Infinity, which was staying in the distance, could still sense the situation on the ind, but the next moment, all the sight and hearing were suddenly interrupted, and the domineering energy could not prate inside. It was even more blurry and nothing could be seen.


    "What''s going on?"


    Enelu asked suddenly anxiously.


    "Don''t worry, what''s outside should be His Majesty the King''s Devil Fruit power. As long as the outside ability doesn''t disappear, it means there''s nothing wrong with His Majesty the King."


    Abona opened his mouth and said.


    "Doesn''t it mean that we can''t see what''s going on inside? How could this happen when we were having so much fun seeing it?"


    Xiao Gangya asked.


    "Shut up!!"


    Number 1 was a little angry for a moment, and after hearing what Xiao Gangya said, he immediately scolded him.


    His expression began to gradually change from calm to serious, and the muscles in his body began to tighten unconsciously.


    "Hai Ling, is there any way for us to know what''s going on inside?"


    Junhe asked.


    After the words fell, Hai Ling''s projection appeared again, and stood respectfully beside him and said, "General Junhe, there is currently no way to sense the situation inside, but the system can change ording to the energy in the barrier. , these simted battle scenes between two people will definitely have some differences, but overall there will not be much difference."


    "Is there such a good thing???"


    No. 1''s tense body was instantly relieved, and he quickly turned his head to look at Hai Ling and asked.


    "I also want to know what''s going on inside, and I hope you can help exin itter!"


    General Yixiao said.


    As a blind man, he ispletely unable to perceive the content of the projection released on the Infinity, let alone the content of the simtion in this situation.


    "General Yixiao, don''t worry about this. I will tell you everything after the simtion ispleted in a while."


    Enelu said with a smile, everyone was extremely looking forward to seeing the next result.


    "Everyone, the simtion content has been presented, but you need to go to the top conference room to watch it. There will be 3D projection there, and it cannot be disyed in other areas!"


    Hai Ling''s voice came out, but where is there anyone to reply now?


    As these people from the Tru Empire, they must know where the conference room is. After hearing the sound, they didn''t even need to go up the stairs and started jumping in the direction of the conference room.


    The few people who followed them on the 1st could only watch this situation, and then jumped up.


    In the conference room at this time, thergest rectangr table was demonstrating the internal projection calction results.


    The battle between the two made them dumbfounded. Although this was only a simted effect, in fact, based on the ability conversion between the two parties, about 80% of the analysis and calctions could be done.


    Even staying inside to watch the simted battle was enough for this group of more than a dozen people to stay here honestly without saying a word.


    In addition to Enel, he also started to introduce the situation inside in a low voice.

 Chapter 519 Nine-Headed Space Dragon Flash

    <h4>Chapter 519 Nine-Headed Space Dragon sh</h4>


    The battle between the two people on the ind was no longer limited to physical attacks, and the Devil Fruit ability was also directly summoned.


    Although the battle on this ind is still very restricted, at least in some aspects it is rtively enjoyable.


    Feodor''s Fallen Angel Devil Fruit, this Devil Fruit''s ability isparable to a collection of dozens of Devil Fruits. It not only has powerful recovery capabilities, but also almost all attacks and defenses are concentrated together.


    To ordinary people, these people are like gods.


    "It seems that each of the six pairs of wings behind him has an ability, which is really tricky!"


    After fighting for a long time, Chang Nuo was even stunned. The opponent was able to create elemental attacks just by waving the wings on his back.


    Especially in order to receive the power of the opponent''s me attack just now, arge mark was burned on Chang Nuo''s right shoulder.


    Although the scar on the shoulder has long since healed, the burn marks on the clothes are still particrly obvious.


    In the previous fist fight between the two, although Chang Nuo was better than the opponent in terms of speed, he still lost to the opponent in terms of strength.


    Now in terms of Devil Fruit abilities, the power of the Devil Fruit on the opponent is simply a powerful perversion. Not only that, the opponent can also control the abilities of other Devil Fruits. The power exuded from each wing is absolutely powerful to the extreme.


    Especially when he waved his wings directly and emitted the power of fire, this attack was much more powerful than Ace''s burning fruit. The scorching high temperature, even if he stayed in the space on the ind, would It can give people a feeling of suffocation.


    "Muramasa!!!"


    Faced with this situation, Changnuo shouted helplessly, and the next moment, Demon Sword Muramasa appeared directly in front of him.


    This guy was floating there quietly, and his body was glowing with a strange red light, as if his fighting spirit had already been high.


    Standing up from where he was squatting just now, Chang Nuo held the demon sword Muramasa directly in his hand. His body also began to glow with this blood-red and strange color, and almost all the colors in his eyes were covered in blood-red.


    "It''s really interesting. I didn''t expect that there was a backup n!"


    Fei Duo smiled calmly and strangely, as if he didn''t take this situation seriously at all.


    "Flying Sword Style~Nine-Headed Space Dragon sh!"


    Chang Nuo shouted loudly. This was an attack he created bybining the power of space. Using the ultimate move in Feitian Yujian style, the ground where he was originally became empty in an instant.


    The moment it reappeared, almost countless des appeared in the sky, and each de was apanied by the appearance of space cracks.


    This move seemed to have begun to cover half of the world. Even the space barrier he created himself, where there were no chains, began to be filled with cracks due to the attack of this move.


    "It''s this little trick again!"


    Fei Duo stood calmly on the spot, the wings behind his back waved slightly, and his body was instantly inside a protective cover simr to an eggshell.


    He raised his head slightly and looked at the opponent''s attack. Although he thought it was very good, he was still full of disdain for it all.


    But the next second he realized that such attacks were densely packed throughout the entire space. In addition to being unable to prate from under the feet, the entire periphery of the eggshell was almostpletely enveloped by such des.


    At the same time, this is also the reason why he overestimates himself. The moment the powerful force is suppressed, it is apanied by the strange ability of the demon sword Muramasa, the overlord''s Haki and the knowledge''s Haki.


    This attack is enough to be regarded as the strongest attack Chang Nuo has made since he first came to this world so far.


    The protection that covered Fei Duo''s body was simr but could be the same, but it fell apart in just an instant.


    As Fei Duo frowned suddenly, the originally ck wings on his back turned into white forms in an instant. Although all these attacks fell on him, and formed countless scars on his body.


    The most dazzling one should be the main attack. A knife almost prated Fei Duo''s body, but the scars left by these attacks were as if they were lying on a physical object.


    In just an instant, all the attacks on Fei Duo were restored to their original state.


    Even the clothes still maintain their original appearance.


    "How about it? In my angel form, I have the ability to be immortal!"


    Fei Duo said calmly, but his body also exuded a holy light at this moment.


    The changes that appeared on him were not only the wings on his back, but also his eyes at this moment.


    When he opened his eyes, the three circles in his eyes looked particrly obvious. This look was almost the same as Mihawk.


    With sharp bird-like eyes and six pairs of wings on his back, Chang Nuo was simply shocked beyond measure after seeing this scene.


    It wasn''t because of anything else, but because of the other person''s look, he was so impressed.


    The existence hidden behind the Celestial Dragons, or the person behind the World Government, now it all seems to have begun to be clear.


    The battle between them did notst too long, but overall it was not very short.


    The two people fought for nearly six hours, but five of them were hidden in the space. People from the outside could not judge any situation.


    But just when the space barrier dispersed, those people on the Infinity rushed out one by one as quickly as possible.


    But seeing the two people still looking normal, with no particrly big scars except for their clothes, they both felt quite surprised.


    The simtion of being on a ship already seemed a little unreliable to them.


    As soon as he returned to the ship, Chang Nuo said calmly, "Retreat!"


    "country����!!"


    "Enilu!!"


    When Anilu was about to open his mouth to say something, Junhe immediately scolded him angrily, red at him and said nothing.


    Even General Yixiao couldn''t help but nce at the other party. Even though he just rolled his eyes, Enelu seemed to understand something in an instant.


    The others didn''t need to say anything. They all stood there in silence. If His Majesty the King didn''t say anything, how could these subordinates interrupt?


    Fei Duo also followed closely behind andnded on the boat. He looked calm and calm. Except for his shirtless upper body and no clothes, there was no trace of any damage on the rest.

 Chapter 520 Fei Duo’s identity?

    <h4>Chapter 520 Fei Duo��s identity?</h4>


    The guy who followed Fei Duo did not say a word or make any remarks from the beginning to the end. However, when he saw this scene, he silently took out a ck The suit was draped over the other person''s body.


    "I''m very happy this time. How many years have I been sofortable? I hope you won''t disappoint me in the future!"


    Fei Duo smiled evilly and said directly to Chang Nuo who was walking inside.


    "Maybe it will. This will definitely be what you want to see, but I don''t know if you have time to wait!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly, without even turning around, and started walking straight into the room.


    Fei Duo was left standing outside, looking at his back with a smile on his face.


    But in the end, he didn''t say anything more, and he still looked calm and calm.


    "It''s not too far from Mariejoia. Could you please turn around and send me there!"


    Fei Duo said with a smile, then turned around and walked to a sofa and sat down directly.


    The most dissatisfied person at the scene was probably Enel. Although he stared angrily at the guy sitting there, he didn''t say anything in the end.


    The people on No. 1 stood there trembling like mice at the sight of a cat. The deck was once eerily quiet.


    It was not until the end that Enelu shouted helplessly, "Hai Ling, turn to Marigioa!"


    This ce is indeed not very far from Mariejoia. ording to the sailing speed of the Infinity, it can only be reached in half a day at most, so the entire ship is almost spent in silence.


    After sending the opponent to the designated ce, the Infinity began to return as quickly as possible, with almost no stop in the middle.


    Feiduo took everyone including No. 1 and others directly off the ship from Marigioa. At the same time, he nced at the back of the Endless, which had started to move away. This time, from beginning to end, Changnuo stayed in the room without even taking a step out. , let alone farewell.


    But before Fei Duo got off the boat, he still nced in the direction inside, and then said to Jun and a few others, "The Tru Empire in the South China Sea? It''s a very interesting country. I will definitely go and take a look if I have the chance. There What has it be now?��


    After saying that, he jumped down with others.


    After the Infinity was far away, Fei Duo, who was originally calm, suddenly became serious.


    "Let those old guyse over and see me!"


    After saying that, Fei Duo disappeared from the spot in an instant, leaving only a few respectful people kneeling in that ce one by one.


    "No. 1, who is this person?"


    Xiao Gangya watched their boss No. 1 kneel on the ground, and the other two people also knelt down unconsciously, but the doubts in his heart had always been there, so he opened his mouth to ask such a question.


    It''s just that the two people who have been following Fei Duo are still here. No. 1 just gave Xiao Gangya a stern look, and then continued to maintain a kneeling posture. It was not until the other two people left that he rxed with relief. Take a breath.


    "What happened? Why are you like this?"


    The big guy No. 5 also asked in confusion.


    "Just know what you''re supposed to know, and don''t ask about things you''re not supposed to know!"


    No. 1 said, and walked directly up the high steps to Mariejoia without looking back.


    But ording to his status, how could he possibly step up in such a square ce? He did not choose this method. Instead, he walked to the middle position. When he stepped on with one foot, the steps under his feet began to slowly climb upward.


    However, below this step, countless ves are pulling the step hard to start climbing up.


    This is what it means to be a world government rights holder.


    Although No. 1 is a member of the World Government, his treatment is definitely beyond everyone''s imagination. He has such powerful strength. When he reached the top and met the Tianlong people who just came out, the other party saw No. 1''s This face also lowered its head at an extremely fast speed and bowed its body in salute.


    However, as Number One who didn''t even dare to say anything in front of Fei Duo, he just nced at the Tianlong people and continued to walk forward without saying anything.


    As for Fei Duo, after this guy came to a special ce, there was almost no light at the back of the hall. He stayed there quietly, and his eyes immediately changed into three circles of color, like sharp eagle eyes. Look directly at Woxing who is kneeling below.


    This is the Infinity number.


    After leaving Marie Joa, the others couldn''t wait to go directly to the front of their King''s room, eager to know the current situation of their King.


    But when they just came over and were not ready to knock on the door, Chang Nuo opened the door directly and stood there intact.


    "You guys are all staying here, what''s going on?"


    Chang Nuo was the first to ask.


    "It''s nothing, it''s just that everyone is worried about you and want to take a look at the situation!"


    Junhe said.


    "Don''t worry, we''ll talk about the rest after we get back!"


    As Chang Nuo spoke, the muscles in his arms suddenly tightened, and his face instantly turned pale.


    Seeing this scene, the others were about to say something, but Chang Nuo quickly closed the door to the room again.


    A few people outside were left standing there nkly, with countless thoughts on each other''s expressions!


    "Leave here first and let His Majesty the King have a good rest!"


    General Yixiao spoke, and took the lead to walk outside.


    The others looked at each other and looked towards the door, and then followed helplessly.


    As soon as he reached the periphery, he smiled and gave serious instructions: "Enilu, let Hai Ling leave the Grand Route as quickly as possible. Admiral Junhe is responsible for navigation safety, and Admiral Abona is responsible for the naval battleship behind, and endless No. will not apany you!"


    "No problem!" Abona said.


    Today''s steel battleships are not particrly far away from them, and Abona only needs to jump directly over.


    Even after leaving, he didn''t ask the questions in his heart, and he didn''t even open his mouth to inquire about these things at all.


    Anilu also followed General Yixiao''s instructions and quickly informed Hai Ling. After all, in addition to the king on this ship, this guy has a little authority to drive the Infinity forward!

 Chapter 521 The shock after the war

    <h4>Chapter 521 The shock after the war</h4>


    After all the orders werepleted, Junhe walked to the side of General Yixiao with some worry.


    Others also looked puzzled. Why did the smile suddenly appear so vigorously today?


    "General Yixiao, did you discover something?"


    Junhe frowned and asked in a low voice.


    "It''s not easy to confirm right now, but what is certain is that His Majesty the King is injured. To what extent is it specific? I can''t confirm it yet. The only thing we need to know is to leave this area as soon as possible. As long as we return to the South China Sea, we will Nothing will happen.��


    General Yixiao said.


    "Then ording to what you said, shouldn''t we find a ce to take a good rest first?" Junhe asked.


    "This time the war between Whitebeard and the Navy, the Tru Empire did not intend to directly intervene, but there were too many unexpected situations. Although many possibilities have been mentioned in previous meetings, there is still no It is expected that the world government will have such a powerful existence, let alone still staying on the Grand Line, the things that may be encountered in the middle are beyond our estimation!"


    Yixiao said it clearly, and even if Junhe was not very smart, he understood it.


    What they are mainly worried about now is what emergencies will happen along the way. After all, this war has brought too many unexpected situations.


    Especially this time, the Tru Empire is once againpletely on the cusp of the storm. No one knows what special situations will arise if we take our time on the next voyage.


    This time the war haspletely exposed all the hidden people in this world. Whether they are mules or horses, everyone has begun to prepare toe out and take a walk.


    However, the results of this war had already spread throughout the world when Chang Nuo and Fei Duo fought. Regardless of whether those who were paying attention to this war or not, they had begun to understand the news.


    The demise of Whitebeard has be a major headline news for many people, but the strong intervention of the True Empire has be the front page headline of major newspapers.


    Originally, not many people in the New World might have known about the existence of the Toru Empire. After all, no one would pay attention to the situation of the weak in the Four Seas area, but this time it waspletely different. The strong intervention of the Toru Empire directly made them all stunned.


    This time, the Tru Empire is known to everyone. For the first time, many people know that there is actually a country in the Four Seas area that can directly choose the Hard Steel World Government. This is something that many people have not guessed or thought of.


    However, after the end of the war, the naval headquarters base ispletely devastated. Even the original buildings have either copsed or be ruins.


    The cameras of many reporters are also filming non-stop, wanting to know the situation after this war immediately.


    New world.


    A pirate ship had just escaped from the huge whirlpool behind it. A guy on it was sitting on a deck chair and reading the newspaper leisurely. But when he saw the content behind it, he couldn''t help but read directly. Surprised.


    "Kidd, what kind of content did you see that made you so excited?"


    This is the Kidd Pirate Ship, a pirate group that set out from the South China Sea.


    Kira happened to be walking next to him and looked at Kidd who suddenly sat up. He also came closer and asked doubtfully.


    "Take a look!"


    Kidd directly handed the newspaper in his hand to Kira, but the headline of the newspaper read: "Can the rapidly rising Tru Empire withstand the wrath of the World Government?"


    The above is also a clear record of how the empire intervened in the war and the exnation of Whitebeard''sst words.


    All of this is undoubtedly not telling everyone that the Tru Empire is instigating this war.


    Even in the end, even Whitebeard''s death was med on the Tru Empire, and it even packaged this country into an existence that would do anything to achieve its goals.


    "These bastards! Which newspaper dared to write this?"


    Kira looked at the content above, crumpled the newspaper into a ball angrily, then mmed it to the ground and said.


    "Is this kind of thing worthy of your anger? The empire will handle everything. If someone nders you, it means someone is afraid. I don''t think this is a bad thing."


    Kidd spoke unhurriedly, his tone sounded very leisurely, and he did not take this matter seriously.


    "Having said that, if I know which newspaper it is, I will definitely kill them after I encounter it!" Kira said angrily.


    "Now is no longer the time to think about this matter. The battle at the top has made the empirepletely famous. Now the pressure on His Majesty the King and those generals will be increasing. We just have to do our own thing."


    Kidd stood up, looked into the distance, and spoke slowly, then turned to look at Kira and said, "We have arrived in the new world. Where do you think we should go next?"


    "We are pirates now. There is a ce in this world where we should go. We are the freest, right?"


    Kira said with a smile.


    It''s just that no one can see his smile. After all, his entire face is hidden under the mask, and nothing can be seen.


    "Yes, we are pirates, we are free to go wherever we want!"


    Kidd also had a smile on his face.


    The newspaper in hand can be regarded as temporarilying to an end. Anyway, things involving the Tru Empire level are no longer something they can participate in.


    They have their own tasks and their own ideas, and it''s time for all this to happen.


    With news of the war, newspapers spread all over the world in just one day.


    But everyone who saw the news expressed different attitudes.


    A corner of the new world.


    The Yonko Kaido was reading the current newspaper leisurely on the boat. Now he was preparing to return to his hometown. From the moment he blocked the red-haired Shanks, it was impossible for them to return in just one day. Go to where you originally were.


    But just looking at the newspaper, Kaido took a long sip of wine in silence, and then read the content carefully and seriously.


    "This kid, I didn''t expect that in just a few years, he could actually prevent a world-level war!"


    Kaido looked at the contents of the newspaper in disbelief and said.

 Chapter 522 The reaction of the Four Emperors

    <h4>Chapter 522 The reaction of the Four Emperors</h4>


    When he said this, his expression was both disbelief and shock.


    "Captain Kaido, is it possible that that little guy from the Tru Empire really aplished this?"


    Drought Jack asked behind Kaido.


    "Whitebeard is dead! I didn''t expect that there were only a few people on the ship left in the end!"


    Kaido did not answer Drought Jack''s words. Instead, he looked at an illustration in the newspaper. The content of the picture was the ce where Whitebeard stood before he died.


    His back looks so vicissitudes of life, but at the same time it still retains the domineering look of a strong man before his death.


    Saying these words, Kaido, a strong man, couldn''t help but his eyes turned red. I don''t know if it was because of the alcohol or something else? Anyway, then such a big man burst into tears loudly.


    No one on the crew behind him dared to step forward and say anything. Even Drought Jack nced at his captain and quickly backed away.


    Although he doesn''t know why his captain behaves like this? But the only thing he knows is that once Kaido is like this, his temperament will be the most difficult to capture.


    If the other party is in a bad mood and drags someone over to wipe his eyes, that would be bad.


    But what they don''t know is that the reason why Kaido burst into tears this time ispletely different from usual. Whitebeard is both a rival and a friend to him. After all, they were once partners on the same boat, and they took care of each other. We have onlye this far, and now that we see the other person hase to an end, we can''t help but feel sad, which is why we have such emotions.


    "What happened to Captain Kaido?"


    Drought Jack, who left his range, walked to the back and asked the other two people who were also three disasters.


    "Judging from the current situation, it''s either the battle at the top, but the two biggest things happened there. The first was that Whitebeard died, and the second was the one that Whitebeard shot down before he died. What exactly is it?


    It is estimated that these are the two most important points in this battle! "Jhin said.


    "What you said doesn''t seem right? I also read the newspaper. In addition to the death of the old man with white beard, the biggest focus of this battle on the top should be the emergence of the Tru Empire, and more importantly What��s more important is the ancient weapon Pluto, and the mysterious figure who appears in the world government at the end. It seems that the entire war to the end revolves around them, and the navy didn��t even take action in the end.��


    Jack said.


    "Yo!!! Jack, I didn''t expect that you, with your big body, still know how to think. You can already see the key points of many things with just a piece of newspaper!"


    "The most important thing is that the nodes described in the newspaper this time are simply too transparent. You can understand them at a nce, okay?"


    Listening to Jhin''s praise, Jack suddenly felt like he was letting himself go.


    "It''s just that what you said is indeed correct, but you have ignored one thing, and that is the war we are talking about. Although this warsted until the Warring States Period announced the end of the war, everyone knew when it actually ended.


    The moment Emperor Toru participated in the war, it was already proved that this time the matter was over. All subsequent wars were between the Toru Empire and the World Government. The two werepletely different conceptual wars.


    One is between the pirates and the navy. This is a war between the two parties in a purely antagonistic rtionship.


    The other is arge-scale war between a country and the world government. Once such a war breaks out, it is likely to affect the operation of the entire world. By then, both allies and non-allies will most likely be involved together. .


    Now that I say this, you should understand, right? "


    As the smartest being in the Beast Pirates, me Cmity Jin can analyze things clearly with just a newspaper.


    He looked at Drought Jack and asked directly, and his words instantly made the other party unable to find Bei Nan.


    Such a profound topic, for this guy with two huge tusks hanging on his head, he had no idea what it was about.


    "Okay, what you said is right!" Jack said lightly, which could be regarded as a response to Jhin, and it was also a way of ming his own ignorance.


    Jin nced at this guy speechlessly, and then stared directly at his captain.


    Kaido was still sitting there alone, crying loudly and drinking the wine in his hand.


    The other side.


    "I didn''t expect this old guy Whitebeard to end up like this, s~!"


    On Cake Ind, Big Mom is no longer the same as before. She is sitting there with the same sad look on her face. Different from Kaido''s appearance, although she does not appear too sad, at least her heart at this moment is different from usual. Much heavier.


    A group of children stood around her. Just like Kaido, no one came forward to speak.


    But unlike Kaido''s people, his children are all familiar with what kind of person their mother is. What position does Whitebeard have in Big Mom''s heart? This point is rtively clear to each other.


    Although they would quarrel constantly in normal times, and even some disputes often broke out between the Big Mom Pirates and the Whitebeard Pirates, such things could not affect the former partnership between Whitebeard and Big Mom. .


    After at least half an hour passed in silence, Peros, as the eldest son, asked timidly, "Mom, what should we do after this incident? On the side of Wan Guo..."


    "Let''s go ording to the original situation, but we should be more careful next time!"


    Big Mom. said, the main reason why he was depressed this time was not only because Whitebeard was dead, but more importantly, the person from the World Government revealed in the newspaper was an existence that was incredibly powerful.


    Although they had known these things for a long time, and had already faced off against the World Government when they were still in the Rocks Pirates, but after these decades, they did not expect that there would be so many hidden entities in the World Government. .


    This is not good news for pirates like them!


    "I understand mom!!"


    Peros nodded and said, the huge lollipop in his hand seemed a little weak at this moment.


    What was the situation like among the nations in the past? In this ce, they are just pirates on the surface. In fact, it is more appropriate to say that it is a country.


    Not only the nations, but the rest of the Yonko Pirates, except for the red-haired Shanks, can really be regarded as kings worthy of the name.

 Chapter 523 The Revolutionary Army’s Plan

    <h4>Chapter 523 The Revolutionary Army��s n</h4>


    Thend of the North Sea.


    "Iji, in three days'' time, take people and the Vinsmoke family cloning technology to the Tru Empire. Then try to seek forgiveness from the other party. If the Vinsmoke family didn''t deliberately explore the opponent''s military secretsst time! "


    In the hall, Vince Moggaji read the newspaper with a sad face, and then said directly to his eldest son sitting opposite him.


    "Father, don''t I need to do this?"


    Iji was a little confused. He had read the newspaper this time, but he always believed that the Tru Empire in the South China Sea would not have any dispute with the Vinsmoke family in the North Sea.


    "That''s right, father, I don''t think we need topromise at all in this situation. At worst, we can go to war with them directly. Anyway, when the timees, we will directly stand on the side of the world government, and I think the other party will definitely help us!"


    Vinsmoke Yuji said with an arrogant look.


    "Do you think I want this? This time the Tru Empire directly went to war with the World Government, but in the end they left safely. Do you think there was nothing else going on in the middle?


    Judging from the contents of the newspaper, Emperor Tru either had won the war or had reached an agreement with the World Government, so he was able to leave there unharmed.


    Vinsmoke family, do you think you have the ability topete with a country that canpete with the world government and navy? "


    Vinsmoggaji said, then frowned and said again in a low voice, "The ancient weapon Pluto, this thing has already appeared in the Tru Empire. It is estimated that he can take it out now. He must have been analyzing and cracking the ancient weapon." When ites to the construction of weapons, what do you think our Vinsmoke family can do topete?"


    "This time, I think my father is right. We don''t have any big grievances with the Tru Empire. Going to reconcile is the best option!"


    Iji said.


    "If things can be done well this time, and the other party is willing to ept it, test it out, and now add some conditions to see if the Empire can cooperate with the Vinsmoke family. If it is possible, we won''t mind using high-end clones directly. Technology is dedicated to achieving the purpose of cooperation.


    After going there this time, I directly consulted Emperor Tru and said that our Vinsmoke family is not only willing to consolidate the rtionship between the two parties, but is also willing to directly engage in marriage to maintain the alliance between the two parties. "


    Vince Mokgaji said seriously.


    "Father, is it possible that you want Reiju to go and get married?" Iji asked.


    "The situation in the world is changing too fast now. It''s time for the Vinsmoke family to make a choice. With our current strength, I''m afraid even the guys from the Revolutionary Army are no match. It''s time to find a big tree." Tree, lean on it.��


    Gaji said.


    "I agree with my father''s opinion. If I can make a contribution to the family, I have no objection to the marriage."


    Reijiu sat aside without any hesitation, just thought for a moment, and then opened her mouth to speak.


    At least if you can really choose Emperor Tru as your future partner, it will definitely be many times better than marrying other old kings.


    The Vinsmoke family is a serious kingdom in the North Sea, and can even participate in world government meetings, so it is impossible for them to decide the marriage of the children of a kingdom at any time.


    This world is like this. They don''t have any right to choose, but they are lucky to be able to choose a better one now.


    "Since Reijiu doesn''t have any objections, this matter will be settled like this. In three days, you two will set off together. Don''t let any conflicts happen then.


    Especially after this war, the entire South China Sea area will definitely be under martialw. Before going, Iji canmunicate with the diplomatic department of the Toru Empire in advance to prevent any special situations from happening again. "


    Vince Mockaji said.


    "I know father!"


    Iji said.


    "Can Ie with you? I really want to see what the Toru Empire looks like? Take the opportunity to see if the Toru Emperor is really as powerful as the legend!" Yongji asked, looking at his father.


    "No, only the two of them are going this time, and the rest should stay here for me!" Vince Moggaji said.


    Having said this, Yongji could only pouted and continued to sit there.


    Every country has a diplomatic department. Of course, some particrly poor countries definitely don��t have one. When the two countries visit each other, they usually notify each other in advance. Especially for a country as powerful as the Tru Empire, any A sudden creation without priormunication may be regarded as a war.


    Beihai Revolutionary Army.


    "Chief, do you think you should let the people over there in the South China Sea try to see if they can get the design of their ancient weapon Pluto? As long as our revolutionary army can have such a fleet, how far away will we be frompleting our great cause? Isn��t it much more convenient?��


    In the meeting room of the Revolutionary Army, a man with a bear''s face on his head said, however, this guy can also be regarded as a senior official of the Revolutionary Army, and overall he is Terry who is responsible for handling intelligence.


    After hearing what the other party said, the Revolutionary Army conference table suddenly became quiet, and many people looked at Long, wanting to know what the other party thought of this matter?


    Just after the war, all of them had received the news. Combining the contents of the newspapers, it was now not difficult to determine who the secondrgest force in the world was.


    The rise of the Tru Empire in the South China Sea also shined brightly in this war, and the emergence of the ancient weapon Pluto pushed this country to the forefront.


    "I don''t agree with this idea. The hidden extent of the ancient weapon Pluto will definitely exceed our imagination."


    Sabo stood up directly, put his hands on the table, and said with a serious expression.


    "Chief of General Staff, since you said such things, please provide a basis."


    Terry asked.


    "Some time ago, Kerra was captured by the Tru Empire and was released intact in the end. This shows that the Tru Empire does not have any great malice towards the revolutionary army, or that it does not want to be an enemy. Yes, why should we create a powerful enemy for ourselves now?"


    Sabo asked.


    Long sat there from beginning to end, not expressing any opinions. He just wanted to see what the oue of the discussion among the following group of people would be in the end.

 Chapter 524 Fei Duo’s strength

    <h4>Chapter 524 Fei Duo��s strength</h4>


    He has been simting the scenes on the battlefield in his mind now, and he really can''t imagine that the final war has deviated so much.


    But after a while, as the arguments among those people got louder and louder, the dragon sitting at the top still couldn''t hold it back. He came back to his senses and said with a slightly serious look, "Don''t argue anymore. Our ns are not there for the time being." The method looks so far ahead, even if we get the design drawings of Pluto, our revolutionary army does not have so much money to build it! Let��s leave this matter forter, and quickly discuss the situation at hand.��


    In one sentence, the thoughts of everyone present were suppressed. In fact, when they learned about the appearance of the ancient weapon Pluto, all of them had already begun to feel restless.


    After learning about the power of the ancient weapon Pluto, his uneasy heart instantly began to swell.


    But now Long''s words almost extinguished their restless hearts.


    It is true, as the other party said, today''s revolutionary army is actually almost out of food, so what kind of money is used to build such huge ancient weapons.


    This thing will not only have no effect on them, but will increase a lot of burden. Today''s revolutionary army is mainly focused on military operations onnd, and the market conditions on the sea are still rtively less.


    It''s just that after this war is over, the attitudes shown by the major forces arepletely different. At least one thing they can clearly understand.


    That is why today''s Tru Empire has always been considered a showpiece, but it has truly be the second most powerful force in the world.


    In the eyes of all of them, the World Government still ranks first. After all, they also have the navy,nd and air force under their control. No matter how powerful the Tru Empire is? Butpared to the world government, there is definitely a big gap.


    Even if they participate in this war and eventually go to war with the World Government, whether they win or lose, it will not prevent the Toru Empire from being recognized by others for its current strength.


    At this moment, the Infinity is moving forward at an extremely fast speed on the sea, with all its defense engines turned on, and a wind shield has even begun to appear in front of it. The extremely fast speed directly forms a white sea line on the sea.


    Several generals on the deck were personally guarding the ship. They all looked around with serious expressions, for fear of any special unexpected situation.


    In fact, at such a fast speed, there is no risk at all.


    Although it is rtively far away from the South China Sea Empire, if we continue to move forward at this speed, I am afraid that we will be able to return directly to the ce in only two days at most.


    Nuoda''s Endless is just like a speedboat. The only drawback is that it makes the inside of the boat bumpy.


    Chang Nuo, who was still lying on the bed to rest, felt the disturbance, put on his clothes with a speechless expression, opened the door of the room and walked out.


    Seeing a few people standing on the deck, they shouted helplessly, "What are you doing?"


    "Your Majesty the King!!!"


    Junhe turned his head suddenly after hearing the sound, and several other people also came over at extremely fast speeds.


    "Why are you running so fast? Hai Ling, slow down, we are not in such a hurry!"


    Chang Nuo began to give instructions directly, and Hai Ling''s projection did not appear, but the speed of the Infinity''s rapid forward movement slowly slowed down.


    "Your Majesty, are you okay here?"


    Junhe asked again.


    "It''s nothing, let''s sit down and talk!"


    Chang Nuo said and walked directly towards the sofa on the deck.


    After he sat down, several other people were still standing there, with incredible expressions on their faces.


    "Your Majesty the King, if you have any difort, just say it directly. We have contacted the empire and the doctors are already ready, waiting for you to return." Anilu asked with a worried look on his face. .


    "Everyone, sit down! I said it''s nothing, so you still don''t believe me?"


    Changnuo smiled again and said.


    After hearing this, General Yixiao sat down first, and several other people followed suit.


    "Your Majesty, what exactly happened at that time?"


    General Yixiao asked in a low voice.


    "It''s very bad. The opponent''s strength is simply beyond our imagination!"


    Chang Nuo said, directly recalling the battle scene in his mind.


    Fei Duo''s ability can actually prate space and stop time. Such power is simply disappointing.


    Even though he was hiding in the space, Changnuo was still kicked to pieces by Fei Duo. If it weren''t for the fact that he had the power of space awakening and could change any direction at will, he would have been dead at this moment.


    But when the other party showed that look, Chang Nuo already felt that the other party''s strength was not unreasonable.


    The existence hidden behind the World Government has lived for at least 800 years ording to his estimation. Whether it isbat experience, experience or understanding of Devil Fruit, it far exceeds his fantasy.


    Even with the assistance of the demon sword Muramasa, the raging power exploded directly in the entire space, but in the end it could not hurt the opponent anyway, and no matter how powerful the attack was, it already seemed a bit useless.


    But he didn''t tell these people all this. He only told that Fei Duo was indeed very powerful, but did not tell how powerful the other party was.


    You just need to know these things yourself.


    It sounds incredible that Devil Fruit can be awakened in the second stage, but this kind of thing does exist.


    Changnuo doesn''t doubt the authenticity of this kind of thing? But he was also thinking along the way, how to remove Fei Duo, who is so powerful?


    A person is simply a collection of Devil Fruit abilities, and this house is definitely the Devil Fruit at the top of the Devil Fruit tree.


    The powerful strength, ability and resilience are many times more abnormal than natural fruits?


    It can be said that he is a superhuman type, or he can be said to be an animal type. The most important thing is that his abilities can fully support the natural type.


    Fighting with such a person is indeed a desperate state of mind.


    "Your Majesty the King, who is that Fei Duo?"


    Enelu asked.


    "Forget it, don''t mention him now. When you go back, hurry up and build the ancient weapon Pluto. This world may have begun to be unstable, and the world government is likely to target the Toru Empire next." Changnuo said .


    Although Fei Duo didn''t say anything on the surface, Chang Nuo was still able to guess the next n of the World Government. The Kru Empire is the only existence that may threaten their status. How could these guys let such a powerful person go? The country is dangling under his nose.

 Chapter 525 Merger of South China Sea Countries

    <h4>Chapter 525 Merger of South China Sea Countries</h4>


    All this seems calm on the surface, but in theing time, anyone can guess what the Tru Empire will face?


    It would be easier to say that the Tru Empire wins this battle, but the key is that it has failed this time, and the World Government''s means of revenge will soone.


    But the better news now is that the navy has been severely damaged, and it is impossible for the government to directly show its hidden strength.


    Finally, there is a rtively powerful air force that can deal with the Tru Empire, but in the final analysis, this war can be regarded as Chang Nuo''s idea. He directly reached an agreement with Whitebeard to let the other party destroy the World Government''s air force. Everything seems to be fine. It''s done in an orderly manner.


    So in this case, the Tru Empire can have at least two years of rxation.


    This is essentially the same as Chang Nuo''s original n. As for now, it doesn''t matter. Who will be stronger and who will be weaker two years from now is still hard to say.


    A weekter.


    Only then did the Infinity slowly enter the South China Sea. From the beginning of the war to now, the entire South China Sea is almost in a no-navigation state. Except for some merchant ships that havee to the Tru Empire before, the remaining Basically all the ships were forcibly driven away.


    Moissanite alone can manage the security of the South China Sea very well. Special forces and standing forces coordinate patrols. Whether it is steel warships or sailing warships, as long as they are ships that can sail on the sea, all have been was pulled out.


    There are fighting forces in every sea area, especially the locations of the space portals.


    After the navy warships returned from the war, the alert in the entire South China Sea was once again upgraded.


    As for the Whitebeard Pirates who came over, the Tohru Empire only arranged for them to live in the Imperial Hotel, and did not even let them do other things at all.


    Whitebeard''s body also enjoyed extremely high treatment in the Tohru Empire. Although none of the pirates were willing to let others touch Whitebeard''s body, under such an environment, it could be considered Give this old man hisst bit of dignity.


    In fact, just after the war, Junhe and the others had already begun to inform the South China Sea, and now they have directly entered the South China Sea area through the windless zone. As soon as they arrived, more than a dozen warships appeared in the surrounding area and began to escort them.


    The people above didn''t have any extra words to say, they just needed to quietly follow the Infinite Number.


    After returning to the empire, before getting off the ship, Chang Nuo said directly to the people next to him, "We can lift the defense of the South China Sea, so we don''t need to pay so much attention to it next!"


    "Then I will focus on patrolling near Clear Water Bay!" Junhe said.


    "Let''s rx for a while first. The most exciting moment wille next. The true face of this world will soon be overturned. Let''s just look forward to it."


    An evil smile suddenly appeared on Chang Nuo''s face, and Fei Duo''s appearance appeared in his mind again.


    This is the case for them, but things are not easy for the World Government.


    Not to mention the losses of the Air Force, even their reputation has been seriously damaged.


    Only a few days after returning home, all the countries in the South China Sea began to announce their annexation to the Tru Empire one after another.


    Although many major forces are aware of this kind of thing, it can still cause a great sensation after all countries are merged into the Tru Empire.


    The World Economic News can be said to be very busy these days. Most of the shots are turned to the Tru Empire in the South China Sea. There are endless explosive news happening here every day.


    The most important thing is that most of the people in the world are currently attracted here. They all want to eagerly understand what kind of existence the Tru Empire is?


    That''s why we pay more attention to every move of this country''s current development.


    More than fifty countries announced their annexation to the Tru Empire almost simultaneously, and in an instant, the entire South China Sea became a sensation around the world.


    Now, whether overtly or covertly, the Tru Empire has truly be the controller of the South China Sea.


    Although some people had spected before, this area of ????the South China Sea has long been under the control of the Tru Empire.


    But at that time, none of them asked the World Government or other forces for help, so even the World Government could not participate in these situations at all.


    Even now that every country has begun to publicly announce its annexation to the Tru Empire, and even though the World Government is watching with open eyes, he can''t stop all of this.


    In the South China Sea, in addition to the Toru Empire being a member of the World Government, there are at least seven or eight remaining countries that are members of the World Government, but now, without exception, they have all be the territory of the Toru Empire.


    Mariejoia.


    ��I really don��t know what that little guy, King Tru, is thinking, he actually dares to make such a big noise on the cusp of this storm?��


    The one who spoke was Sengoku. He leaned leisurely on the recliner and spoke calmly to Garp who was eating next to him.


    Since the Navy Headquarters base was destroyed in the war, their office location has been moved to Mariejoia. Although it is only a temporary ce, the level of luxury is many times better than their original ce.


    "I''m talking about the Warring States Period, these things are no longer something we can worry about. You should think about it quickly now, who will leave the position of general, and what will the people above do then?"


    Garp said while eating.


    "I have submitted the matter of the marshal. In my heart, I prefer Aokiji, but the old guys in the World Government seem to prefer Akainu, and Kizaru is not interested in this position. The specific situation at that time still needs to be Let��s see what those old guys mean!��


    Warring States said.


    "What did Qing Pheasant say?"


    Garp put down the snacks in his hands, then sat upright and looked at Sengoku and asked.


    "He originally had no interest in this position, but when he heard that Akainu was going to be the marshal, his whole attitude immediately began to change. Now I can''t figure out what he was thinking!" Warring States suddenly changed. Got to be mncholy.


    "Aokiji has a good character. Perhaps his character can lead the navy to a better path. Akainu is too righteous, but the aura in his bones is indeed in line with the background of today''s era. It''s just that But an overly strict attitude may lead to dissatisfaction among people inside.��


    Garp said.

 Chapter 526 The Admiral’s Speculation

    <h4>Chapter 526 The Admiral��s Spection</h4>


    After Garp finished speaking, he continued to hold the biscuits in the bag in his hand, and then said softly, "We are all going to retire anyway, and the rest of the things probably have nothing to do with us no matter who bes the marshal of the navy. Now that we have started preparing for retirement, what are the remaining things to consider?��


    "What you said is easy. The changes in the Navy in the past few decades have been controlled by our hands. It''s not like you don''t know Akainu''s character. Once the Navy falls into his hands, what will it be? , can��t you think of it?��


    Warring States frowned. There were more and more white hairs on his head. Although the navy dered victory in this war, they knew the actual situation better than anyone else.


    Nowadays, the pressure faced by the navy is no longer something that one person can bear. The rise of the Tru Empire in the South China Sea has stabilized the pressure on the navy. The value of their navy has be weaker and weaker. The remaining people will soon It is possible to participate in a real war.


    Once that timees, the only ones who will lose will be their friends or the students they brought out.


    "Now that we have reached this point, why are we still talking about what we are doing? It is better to think about where we should go to rx after this matter is over!" Kaopu said still with an indifferent expression.


    "Want to have a good rest? You don''t have to think about it. I already talked with Marshal Kong yesterday and he didn''t agree with us leaving the navy directly. After all, we control too many confidential documents. Even if we stay in the navy to retire, we won''t be able to Let��s run around.��


    Warring States said.


    "This is the reason why I don''t want to be a general. Being a lieutenant general won''t have ess to too many secrets. Even if you want to leave, you won''t be left with too many things. But it''s different now, the dignified marshal of the navy. Or should we think carefully about what we should do next?��


    Garp said with a smile, but he put down the snacks in his hands again, and asked seriously and curiously, "Speaking of which, this time the Tru Empire is involved in the war, do you think it is possible for those old men in the World Government to be so willing?" Watching?"


    "They don''t even look at it. It doesn''t matter anymore. The important thing is that there is no strong army topete with the other side. It is estimated that a worldwide recruitment will begin next. In a short time, the world government and special forces will There should be no war between the Lu Empire. Before that, we will at least clean up these four emperors in the new world. Otherwise, if we are attacked from both sides, it will be very detrimental to us and the world government!"


    Sengoku analyzed and said.


    "This rise of the Tru Empire seems to be unstoppable!"


    "Yes! A war eliminates the past. In the end, the biggest winner is actually this country. In the end, there is no loss, one soldier and one soldier, but it can make the navy and the world government the biggest losers. And now, even if you want to deal with them, they haven''t. The way is, in two years, we can develop each other and we can develop in the same way.


    In today''s South China Sea, all countries have been unified and merged into the Tru Empire. From a side perspective, that boy has be restless and has even started to act openly. "


    Warring States took Garp''s words and began to analyze them seriously.


    As high-level figures of one force, Sengoku and Garp could obviously see this move of the Tru Empire.


    A country that has begun to publicly annex countries that are members of the World Government is also invisibly pping the World Government in the face. No country has dared to do this before.


    "ording to what you said, why do I always feel that this war is controlled by the Tru Empire behind the scenes? But one thing that is undeniable is that the old guy with white beard probably already knows his final oue this time. That��s why we reached an agreement with the Tru Empire. The only thing we don��t know is what is the content of this agreement?


    Is it possible that they are targeting the World Government''s air force? But if we don��t even know this thing, how does the Empire know about it? "


    Garp asked curiously.


    Let alone him, even Sengoku was shaking his head as he sat there. Although bing a naval marshal would know a lot of things, he had only heard a little about the situation of the Air Force, let alone I never thought about what kind of situation or method the other party would show up.


    But now I finally saw it for the first time. I didn''t expect that these guys and equipment had turned into pieces and fell down.


    "I have to say that that guy from the Tru Empire knows a lot about the World Government''s intelligence. I''m afraid he has even the situation of our navy in his hands. Sometimes it''s really scary to think about it." Sengoku also said with emotion.


    Anyway, all this has nothing to do with the two of them, and they will never appear on the battlefield again in the future. The two existences that are on the verge of decay are just preparing to enjoy their retirement life in the navy.


    Although they began to prepare to live such a leisurely life, the two people would still unconsciously start to discuss the future direction of the world.


    The Toru Empire is now directly annexing the entire country in the South China Sea in this way. Although each country has taken the initiative to request to be merged into the Toru Empire, this will not cause dissatisfaction with the World Government or other countries. But like this The behavior has indeed achieved the purpose of provoking the world government.


    A country can control a sea area alone, and it is impossible for such a terrifying level to appear.


    What''s more, the strength of this country is simply terrifying. Back then, the Vinsmoke family in the North Sea also attempted to control the entire North Sea region. Even though it was a weak family force, in the end the World Government still gave him a seat to appease him.


    So now that the Tru Empire is a first-level member country of the World Government, the World Government ispletely unable to give them anything. Under such circumstances, how can it be possible to negotiate any conditions?


    Of course, now that the Tru Empire has directly annexed the entire South China Sea region, some people are happy and some are worried!


    In essence, the South China Sea has beenpletely under the jurisdiction of the Tru Empire several years ago. This time it is nothing more than a process. It is undeniable that the scope of the next actions may be slightlyrger.


    It is no longer necessary to be a little timid in doing anything as before. Now there is no need to cover up these situations at all. Everything isid out in the open, which can also make the development of the Tru Empire faster.

 Chapter 527 Marco’s Agreement

    <h4>Chapter 527 Marco��s Agreement</h4>


    This time, all the countries in the South China Sea region announced their integration into the Tru Empire, but apart from issuing a statement, there was no actual ceremony, as if it was just a formality.


    Chang Nuo has also finalized it. At present, the world government does not dare to directly attack the Toru Empire. Let��s not talk about whether they have the strength? Just relying on the fact that the new world is once again in an unstable state, he can definitely determine this event.


    Although the navy apparently won the war, the actual losses were much greater than imagined.


    The most important thing is not only the loss of personnel, but more importantly, the loss of their credibility.


    However, as a main body, the World Government cannot directly send its hidden forces there. Once its losses are too great, what can the World Government use to suppress the navy or other armies?


    But all of this Chang Nuo is also ying a game. He is betting on the World Government and the Navy. At this moment, he does not dare to directly target the Tru Empire.


    That''s why I dare to do all these tant things, at least it can reflect the attitude of the Tru Empire today.


    In the pce.


    "Marco, how are things arranged with the old man?"


    Chang Nuo stayed in the pce and looked at Marco who was standing in front of him with a serious look and asked.


    The first thing he did when he came back was actually to solve the problem of the Whitebeard Pirates. Although there are not many people left, there are at least 8,000 people left.


    It is impossible for such a huge group of people to be ced in the Tru Empire. No matter how much this group of people say, they were also pirates before. If they stay here for a long time, without a good exnation, it is still easy to attract people. panic.


    After all, many people here still don''t believe that this group of Whitebeard Pirates can do any good things. Once they are pirates, they will always be pirates. There are some characters in their bones that are simply impossible to change.


    "It has been settled. At least he has been buried in dad''s favorite ce. Having said that, I still have to thank you for your help for all this!"


    Marco lowered his head slightly and said still somewhat sadly.


    "No need to thank you. Although this matter is outside the agreement between me and the old man, it is still a piece of cake for us. It can also be regarded as myst respect for the old man." Chang Nuo said.


    "Although His Majesty the King said so, there are some things I have to ask."


    General Yixiao stood beside him, holding a cane in his hand. He spoke calmly directly in the direction where Marco was standing. Then he took two steps forward and said again, "The measures ahead are the work of His Majesty the King and Whitebeard New York." It��s an agreement between us, but what we do next is an agreement between you and Marco! Now that everything has been settled, I wonder if you are ready to keep the appointment?��


    General Yixiao directly pointed out the words Marco shouted when he was desperate on the battlefield. Changnuo just stood in front and smiled slightly, without saying too much.


    Among the entire Whitebeard Pirates, Changnuo is rtively optimistic about Marco. The strength of the others is not worth appreciating for the Tohru Empire. Even Ace, the son of Roger, the devil The fruits werepletely developed, and from their point of view, there was no harm at all.


    Marco had a dark look on his face. Originally, he didn''t want to mention anything about the previous agreement when he came here. At that time, he was forced to shout out those words.


    But now the other party actually brings it up first.


    "I didn''t say I wouldn''t fulfill this agreement, but many things have not been settled yet. At least I need to wait until they all settle down before I cane here with peace of mind!"


    Marco looked at Changnuo and said.


    "Don''t worry about this matter. You can try the Whitebeard Pirates first to see if they can get together? Without the constraints of the old man, how many people do you think you can control?"


    Chang Nuo had a smile on his face. Although he wanted to keep this guy now, he also knew that at this time, what could he do even if he stayed? On the contrary, it will make the other party feel disgusted.


    Today in the Tru Empire, everything has entered a stable state, and whether or not he should be retained is no longer that important.


    But if he doesn''t experience something more desperate now, then he, a pirate, will never restrain his temper and obey the arrangements of a country.


    "As for the affairs of the Whitebeard Pirates, I don''t want His Majesty Emperor Tru to interfere too much. I believe that my friends will not have differences with each other because of my father''s departure." Marco said seriously and Said seriously.


    "Then it all depends on how you change their minds? I''ll wait and see." Chang Nuo said still smiling.


    He really wanted to see Marco''s abilities, so he didn''t mind whether this guy came early orte.


    "Then I''ll leave first. Thank you again for your help!"


    Marco bowed and said, his heart was veryplicated at the moment, and the only thing he could do was to leave here quickly.


    And he is also the only one among the Whitebeard Pirates who knows what kind of person King Kru is.


    I have been in contact with such people a lot, and even though they are much older than him, I already feel like I can''t help doing many things.


    In this situation, for the pirate who always loves freedom, just staying by the other person''s side seems to have added a huge shackles to himself.


    Chang Nuo didn''t hold back at all, but just looked at the other person''s leaving figure with a cold smile on his lips.


    "Your Majesty, is it really okay to just let him go like this?"


    Junhe came out and asked.


    "His Majesty the King naturally has his own considerations. Now the other party is just a pirate. He has been used to living a free life for many years. If he suddenlyes to the empire, many things may not only be inappropriate for him, but also have the opposite result."


    General Yixiao said in a low voice.


    "If he is willing to leave, just let him leave. Today''s Tru Empire does not mean that he has to do it, but all the countries in the South China Sea have begun to openly merge. We will have a lot of work to do next.


    Especially when ites to the defense of the South China Sea, Jun and you willmunicate with Moshank and do the detailed work. "


    Chang Nuo said calmly, then turned around and sat down, his fingers kept tapping on the edge of the sofa, his head resting on the armrest of the sofa, and his mind was already thinking about other aspects.

 Chapter 528 The problem arises again

    <h4>Chapter 528 The problem arises again</h4>


    Now that it has developed to this point, it is just the beginning for the Tru Empire. There may be much more to do in the future than imagined.


    Junhe walked up to him and asked with some doubts, "Your Majesty, is this necessary? The entire defense in the South China Sea was operated in this way before, and now it needs to be specially strengthened?"


    "This time is different from before. The situation the country is facing now is alsopletely different from before. The Navy and the World Government are very likely to make a surprise attack. It will never go wrong to be more rigorous." General Yixiao said.


    "Now it''s not just these. Things in the basta country must also be resolved as soon as possible. They guys have begun to be restless. Minister Meng reported on the development there yesterday. The overall situation for the year The ie is actually less than half ofst year!��


    Chang Nuo said with a slight sigh.


    "Those bastards! How dare they join us at this time, otherwise we will just destroy their country!"


    Junhe immediately became angry, as if he couldn''t control his temper, he clenched his fists and said.


    "In that case, if you have nothing to do, go over there tomorrow and see what the basta people are trying to do? By the way, I''d like to ask Lossta, who is also the Minister of Commerce, to see where this guy is. What the hell is Bian doing?" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "No problem. I''ll take care of the things at hand and go there. I''ll let King Kobra of basta give an exnation then!"


    Jun He nodded seriously, but when he suddenly thought about other things, he immediately turned into a funny look, looked at Chang Nuo and asked, "What if the other party really does something by then? Do you really want to do it?" Destroy the other party?"


    Hearing this, Chang Nuo suddenly looked disgusted. Even General Yixiao standing next to him had ck lines all over his face.


    "Am I wrong to ask?"


    Junhe asked again with an innocent look.


    "Just do it ording to your own ideas, but basta is not as simple as we thought, but it shouldn''t be a big problem if we made a fuss in the past."


    Chang Nuo said with a sinister look on his face, not having the slightest feeling about this kind of thing.


    But this is not because he has expanded. Nowadays, it is time for many countries to take action.


    "Now that you say that, I understand. I will definitely figure out everything in the past two days."


    Junhe said seriously.


    "There is no need to be so anxious. There are many things that need to be done now. There is no need to waste too much time after that. There are some things that you need to do next."


    Changnuo said.


    ��Are we going to take action against countries outside the South China Sea region?��


    General Yixiao asked.


    "Do you think this is necessary now? Wonderful things are yet toe, but when the timees, it can be announced to the public that the Tru Empire sympathizes with the suffering of people and people in other countries. In the future, it will ept refugees from all countries without restrictions. At that time, it can be The Tru Empire enjoys the same treatment as the people of the country."


    Chang Nuo said slowly.


    "But if this is the case, thend area of ??the South China Sea will be filled up soon!" Junhe asked with some confusion.


    "I already understand His Majesty the King''s intention, but is it really okay for us to be so tant?" General Yixiao asked.


    "Why not? Firstly, we have not vited the rules set by the world government, and secondly, we have not started a war with any country. As long as those who are willing toe, almost all of them are voluntary. This cannot be forced by anyone, right?"


    Chang Nuo turned to look at General Yixiao, with a sinister smile on his face.


    "Should we do this or let the Senate do it?" General Yixiao asked again.


    "I think you don''t need to get involved in this kind of thing. It might be better for the Senate to do this kind of thing. I willmunicate with themter. As for the issue of personnel arrangements, there is no need to consider the vacant vacancies around the South China Sea. It will definitely not be a problem for the ind to amodate 20 to 30 million people.��


    Chang Nuo said, as if he had considered everything that followed.


    General Yixiao didn''t say anything after hearing this. The n had already beenpleted to this point, so how could he say anything?


    This is exactly the same as the scene when the Toru Empire first became powerful, allowing those who yearned for a better life toe to the Toru Empire one after another. Although the empire will invest a lot of money in the early stage, the profits they will create in theter period will also be huge. Amazing.


    Moreover, people who want toe to the Tru Empire to seek a better life are probably already flocking to them in other countries. Those who have spent a rtivelyrge amount of money to live in the Tru Empire directly via merchant ships are so far numerous.


    The advantage of this is that you can directly drain out the foundation of a country without spending a single soldier. Then by then, whether the country exists or not is no longer so important.


    Not only can they reduce their military strength in this way, but more importantly, they don''t need to take any risks. They just need to find condemnation from their country.


    But this situation no longer mattered to the Tru Empire. It had great strength, and even if they were condemned, they would not dare to expose it openly.


    But all this is just the beginning.


    For the two people standing behind this kind of news, although each of them felt that this behavior was despicable and shameless, but now they were standing on the standpoint of a country, and there was no means at all.


    War can indeed be conducted openly and openly, but what is the purpose of this?


    In the end, if it is not to achieve the idealized result you want, sometimes it may even be counterproductive.


    The biggest advantage of the Tru Empire at present is that there are no aristocratic forces in the entire country, but it ispletely different in other countries. Except for the South China Sea area, in which other sea areas are the national forces not controlled by the aristocrats? So even if you use force to remove those deep-rooted things, it will still be difficult to remove them for a while.


    It is precisely because everyone understands the benefits of doing this, including General Yixiao, a very righteous person, and there is no word to stop it.


    The current Tru Empire is starting to n its development in an orderly manner. After all the countries in the South China Sea announced their merger into the Tru Empire, although a huge storm was caused for a while, this country was once again pushed to the forefront, but There is no force that is dissatisfied with the Tru Empire because of this. After all, this situation has nothing to do with them.

 Chapter 529 Visiting the South China Sea

    <h4>Chapter 529 Visiting the South China Sea</h4>


    Three dayster.


    A huge snail-shaped ship appeared directly on Upside Down Mountain. His purpose was not to go to the Grand Line, but to move in another direction.


    There are two numbers 66 on the back of the huge snail, but it is undeniable that the deck in front of him is quiterge.


    The North Sea Vinsmoke family started to head towards the South China Sea ording to all ns. This time the people who came were none other than Iji, the eldest son of the Vinsmoke family, and Reijiu.


    The expressions of the two of them did not look as good as expected along the way, and a newspaper from the Tru Empire fell into their hands almost every half hour.


    From Beihai to now, there has been a thick pile of newspapers just about the Tru Empire dominating the headlines in the past few days.


    Iji''s brows were already furrowed; the development of the matter waspletely beyond his expectation.


    In the past, the Vinsmoke family had never learned about the situation of the Tru Empire in detail. After this war, all kinds of news that suddenly appeared made them feel at a loss.


    Although they had known that the Tru Empire was rtively powerful before, they never thought that one country could directly control the entire South China Sea area.


    It''s not like the Vinsmoke family has never done this before, but the end result was that it almost led to the destruction of the entire family.


    No country has ever been able to achieve such a situation on the surface, but now in reality, there are countries that have actually done this.


    "Reiju, after reading these newspapers, what do you think about revealing the empire?"


    Iji asked seriously.


    There was no expression on his face, only worry about this trip.


    "I don''t have any special opinions. How can a country that can dere war with the World Government care about such a thing?


    However, judging from the current situation, it is estimated that this country will not control the entire South China Sea area for a day or two. Otherwise, it would be impossible for all countries to simultaneously announce the annexation of the special war in just a few days after this war. In the Lu Empire. "


    Reiju said very calmly.


    "Why do you think so?"


    "Why not? The situation in the South China Sea must be simr to that in the North Sea. Although I have never been to this ce, but in such arge South China Sea area, not all countries must be able to receive news about the war. For example, you can In the current North Sea region, how many countries are aware of the ongoing battle on top? How many people are aware of the fact that the Tru Empire in the South China Sea has dered war on the World Government?


    News jam, this should be something that happens in every sea area, but in the South China Sea, it seems that every country and everyone has begun to adapt to such conditions. After all countries began to announce their annexation to the Tru Empire, you see Have there been any riots among the people there? So it can be judged from these aspects alone that the Tru Empire has controlled the entire South China Sea a long time ago! "


    Reiju said analytically.


    "What you said does make some sense, but I still have a lot to worry about this time, but it''s useless to say too much now."


    Iji said, still frowning.


    Before they knew it, they had crossed the Upside Down Mountain, and the entire giant snail began to appear directly within the South China Sea area.


    Facing such a sea area, the general situation is still simr to that over there. Even the color of the sea water cannot be seen to be any different.


    But in such a ce, less than half an hour after they entered the South China Sea area, a South China Sea Navy warship began to gradually move closer to them.


    "Have youmunicated with the South China Sea in advance?"


    Seeing this situation, Reiju immediately asked Iji directly with some concern.


    "Contacted! We were notified when we first set off." Iji said while looking at the navy ship approaching from a distance.


    "Then there must be nothing wrong. It''s better to watch carefully and order others not to allow any movement."


    Reiju said, but the opponent''s warship had begun to gradually approach, and even the faces of the people on the deck could almost be seen clearly.


    "Do you want to stop first? This will save you the chance of a conflict breaking outter." Reiju asked.


    "Then stop first!"


    After Iji finished speaking, he looked at the approaching ship seriously.


    This is not an ordinary wooden ship, but a naval steel battleship belonging to the South China Sea Tru Empire.


    The extremely special shape can be seen clearly from a distance. Although their snail does not have any sails, the shape of this ship ispletely different after all.


    But the other party''s ship doesn''t need these things at all. What kind of items are used to propel it? This is what they have always wanted to know.


    "The Tru Empire in the South China Sea conducts routine inspections. I hope you can cooperate and refrain from any insignificant acts of resistance!


    ����


    In one sentence, he shouted three times from the loudspeaker on the steel battleship, as if he was afraid that the other party could not hear clearly.


    As they shouted, the two ships gradually approached. It was only when the distance was still about fifty or sixty meters that the approaching navy ship began to slowly stop.


    "We are the North Sea Vinsmoke family. This time we came to the South China Sea area to visit the Tru Empire. We have notified your country in advance and hope you can let it go!!"


    Reiju shouted loudly.


    "I''ll go over and take a look!!"


    Iji said and started to activate the suit on his body. When his feet just started to breathe, Reiju hurriedly worked on his arms and said, "Don''t use any force, even if you can''t even activate the suit, save it." Then let the other side think you are going to start a war!"


    In fact, it was exactly as she said. When Iji started to prepare to take off and jump to the naval warship, the people on the ship had already begun to prepare. As long as the other party jumped up, then what would happen next? His will be merciless fire.


    But at this time, a rtively familiar person walked out from the deck of the steel battleship. Lieutenant General Deco stood at the front with an expressionless face. Today''s steel battleship is almost 5 meters taller than their snail battleship. So it''s almost like looking down.


    "The Vinsmoke family? This name is not unfamiliar! I remember correctly, you must have been the ones who visited our Tru Empire military base some time ago, right?"


    Lieutenant General Deco asked with a serious and sinister expression.

 Chapter 530 The whereabouts of partners

    <h4>Chapter 530 The whereabouts of partners</h4>


    Although the war has passed, Lieutenant General Deco is still very concerned about the North Sea Wensmoke family''s exploration of the Tru Empire military base.


    So far, when our country has not had much time to deal with them, we didn''t expect these guys toe to our door on their own initiative?


    "This, I don''t know what to call him? But as for the previous incident, it purely belongs to our Vinsmoke family, but this incident was also unintentional, so this time I came to the Tru Empire to apologize! "


    Iji took two steps forward and spoke in a slightly low tone.


    "Huh? It''s really interesting. Speaking of which, do you think your Vinsmoke family has anything that can attract our Tru Empire?"


    Lieutenant General Deco sneered before asking directly in a low and cold voice.


    The powerful momentum also burst out in an instant. He, who was already as powerful as a general, just used his eyes to intimidate him at this moment, which made the two people on the snail boat take a step back unconsciously.


    They are already at a disadvantage. This is no longer aparison in terms of strength, but in terms of momentum. Each of them represents their own country.


    But Lieutenant General Deco, who has a background in the Tru Empire, is much stronger than the two people who came from afar in every aspect.


    "I hope you can forgive me! We do apologize for our rashness before!"


    Reiju quickly stepped forward, lowered her head slightly and said.


    Lieutenant General Deco looked at the beautiful woman standing opposite. After hearing her voice, his expression softened a lot.


    "Follow us and don''t leave our sight, otherwise you will be in trouble!"


    Lieutenant General Deco said in a calm tone. Compared with the conversation he had with Iji just now, he waspletely different.


    Seeing that the other person had turned around and started walking inside, Reiju breathed a sigh of relief, then turned to Iji and said, "Let''s go, it seems we can only follow behind him."


    "If you find something wrong after arriving in the Tru Empire, you must leave as soon as possible. I will be responsible for blocking them there then!"


    Iji suddenly opened his mouth and said to Reiju.


    "About this matter, I don''t think you should think too much about it. The Tru Empire is such arge area, and we still don''t know where we need to go this time? Just in this South China Sea area, do you think the two of us can escape?"


    Reiju looked at her younger brother with a smile on her face.


    Among the children of Vinsmoke Gaji, Reiju can be regarded as the oldest. Although the other brothers are not very far apart in age, at least they are like this.


    The navy warships on the Tru Empire side did not talk much. After turning around quickly, they began to move forward at an extremely fast speed.


    However, the Vinsmoke family is essentially a country based on technology, so the snail warship behind them is much faster than expected.


    at the same time.


    At Nanniwa Port, Junhe has also boarded the warship directly. As a person heading to the country of basta, this time he is apanied by a giant steel ship. Nowadays, Tru The empire is not worried about any dangerous problems in the middle.


    Such a situation can not only demonstrate the military strength of one''s own country, but also greatly deter the restless hearts of people in countries like basta.


    "Set off!!"


    As Junhe shouted loudly, the steel battleship under his feet began to slowly retreat.


    His trip this time probably won''t take too long, but most of the journey will definitely be spent on the road.


    The country has just experienced a war, and for a long time they did not pay too much attention to the situation in the country of basta. In their view, Losstar has always been a rtively ambitious existence, but even so, when ites to doing things , this guy is pretty good at it.


    In the pce.


    "Your Majesty, the situation has been over for a long time. Do you have any news about mypanions?"


    Chang Nuo sat on the sofa, Robin stayed beside him, lowered his head and asked softly.


    She didn''t dare to make this matter too public. After all, joining Luffy''s Straw Hat Pirates was just a mission. Now she had integrated too many of her emotions into this mission, but she still couldn''t stop it in her heart. He didn''t want to worry about these guys, so he couldn''t help but ask directly.


    "Each of them will have their own experiences. Don''t worry too much. Just stay in the pce and do your own thing."


    Chang Nuo said with almost no emotion, but then he turned his head and looked directly at Robin and asked again, "How is Hancock doing now?"


    "Nothing happened there, Sister She Ji. She returned to the Daughter Kingdom yesterday. She seemed to be in a hurry and didn''t leave any words behind."


    Robin raised his head and looked at the other person and said.


    "It seems that guy has gone!"


    Chang Nuo smiled to himself, but before he started to feel proud, Abona walked over directly.


    When he first came here, he nced at Robin, but what he was about to say stopped right there.


    "You guys chat, I''ll go over first!"


    Robin stood up, smiled and nodded directly towards Abona, then nced at Chang Nuo, and left the ce directly.


    "What happened?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "The Revolutionary Army and their fellows have made some movement, and this time the movement is not small. Because of the war a few days ago, we didn''t pay too much attention to them, but now it seems that they have directly faced more than a dozen countries in the North Sea. Tounch an attack, the plot must be small, right?"


    Arbonne said.


    " I have already guessed that they will do this. This war not only makes the navy and the world government unable to deal with us, but also does not have much energy and spirit to deal with these guys. But having said that, I am also very curious about how they will go. To what extent?" Chang Nuo said with a sneer on his face without caring.


    "But is this really good? The war they created in the past few days has caused many people to die. I don''t know what they were nning?" Abona said.


    "What''s the current situation over the West Sea?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Everything seems to be rtively peaceful. Compared with Beihai, Xihai is much quieter. However, after the past two years of development, the entire Xihai has long been in dire straits, and it can be considered a rtively painful area!"


    Abona said, but he was still a little confused, why did his Majesty the King suddenly mention such a topic?

 Chapter 531 It’s all the fault of the revolutionary army

    <h4>Chapter 531 It��s all the fault of the revolutionary army</h4>


    The doubts in his heart were doubts, and Abona did not hide anything.


    Today''s Xihai country has indeed be what he said, or even more urately, it is simr to the former Tru Empire.


    No matter which country it is, it is basically invaded by pirates and infinitely exploited by the politicians every day. In addition, the heavenly gold handed over to the Tianlong people makes the people of the country who are already impoverished almost even more miserable. .


    "Do you think the country in the West Sea is easy to win? Or does it have any better use value for us?" Chang Nuo suddenly asked.


    "Your Majesty the King, if you do this, our Tru Empire will once again be at the forefront of the storm, and it may have a great impact on our future development and nning."


    Abona said quickly.


    "Why do we have to do it ourselves? Can the revolutionary army also invade Xihai?"


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    Abona paused for a moment, probably not understanding what the other party said, but the next second he saw His Majesty the King picking up the tea cup, and his eyes widened as if he suddenly understood.


    After understanding these things, Abona''s thinking seemed to have opened a door, but at the same time, he also felt incredible about the thoughts of his Majesty the King.


    "How is the situation in the country recently? Is there anything that seems wrong among the people of the merged countries?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "There is nothing special about it. The Council Department had already sent people there when they started to merge, and they had already taken over the ce. For most people, it was just a change of title. It doesn��t have any impact on Cross��s life, and they won��t mind!��


    Abona reported.


    "What''s going on with Admiral Zefa now?" Chang Nuo asked again.


    "The details are unknown. Almost all of them are following underwater submarines. It is rare to get news about them now! It''s just that people from the intelligence department are investigating, and it is expected that there will be news soon."


    "Let''s forget about this matter for now. The members of the Whitebeard Pirates have probably entered the new world now. Find out the news about Edward Wilbur and help them secretly. At least help them find Whitebeard. Those people from the pirate group! Don��t get involved in any other matters.��


    Chang Nuo showed an evil expression, raised his head and looked at Abona and said.


    "I...!! I understand!"


    Abona spoke helplessly.


    It was not that he didn''t know about such a problem. What kind of friction would arise between Wilbu and the Whitebeard Pirates? He didn''t want to know, but he knew as soon as he heard about it that it would definitely not be a good thing.


    "Go back and tell Enel directly that the matter of Fish-Man Ind settling in the South China Sea needs to be put on the agenda as soon as possible.


    The other is to ask the Dao Dao side to cultivate a murloc force of about 10,000 people within two years. As for the specific training process, let him figure it out on his own. Anyway, in these two years We don''t want to make any movement ourselves. Many things will probably be left to you. I hope you won''t disappoint me. Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "I will definitely do it!"


    Abona said.


    At the end, after Chang Nuo exined some other issues again, he was the only one left in the hall.


    He picked up the tea in his hand, carefully looked at the rippling water in the cup, and said with a smile on his face, "This has just begun!"


    Two dayster.


    When Changnuo learned that the Smoke family from Beihai was visiting and came to apologize for thest incident, he did not show any unusual emotions and remained calm.


    It''s just that this kind of thing doesn''t require him to negotiate in the past at all, he just needs to know this matter.


    In the end, we just need to know what valuable things these people brought here, but if we don��t listen, we won��t know. Once we hear it, it��s still the same old routine.


    Marriage?


    This situation ispletely cliche, but for the former Wang family like the Vinsmoke family, this situation does seem to be particrlymon. After all, this is their best way of trading.


    But Chang Nuo really dismissed this situation.


    Currently, the people directly responsible for handling this matter are the Council Department and General Yixiao. Changnuo didn''t even show his face. In the end, he only mentioned one sentence, which was to ask the Beihai Wensmoke family to take out theirbat uniforms. Apart from this condition, there is no need to discuss anything about the production method!


    But few outsiders know about the so-calledbat uniforms of the North Sea Vensmoke family. After all, this family has not had anyrge-scale wars so far, and this kind of equipment cannot be reflected at all at present. .


    So when he made this request, not to mention the staff of the Senate, even General Yixiao was a little confused.


    But in the end, there was no way to refute any opinions. I could only find out that I was the two people from the Merck family who came.


    The ce to receive them was not in the pce hall, but directly at the office of the Council of Ministers. Although it was close to the pce, there was no seaside around him.


    It has to be said that the scale of the construction of this ce isrger than that of the royal pce. It looks majestic. The typical ancient Roman architectural style, with the corridors directly formed by columns, can indeed give othersplete Different feeling.


    The conference venue they received this time was made of an oval dome, which was equipped with various patterns. There were at least several 10m high crystal chandeliers, which vertically descended directly from the dome. Light, under countless light bulbs, directly illuminated the entire hall.


    The entire hall is almost divided into two negotiation areas, with the middle aisle as the dividing line, one on the east and west sides.


    Thergest ce can amodate at least hundreds of people at the same time. However, there were not particrly many peopleing this time, so they simply chose the west side.


    It was the first time that Reiju and I came to the Tohru Empire. From the moment they got off the ship to now, they were almost in a state of shock along the way.


    They had never thought that a country could allow its people to live such a good life. Just from the joyful singing andughter on their faces, they could tell that the other country was not pretending to appear like other countries.

 Chapter 532 The momentum at the negotiation table

    <h4>Chapter 532 The momentum at the negotiation table</h4>


    So when they saw all this, they began to be shocked. They had never encountered a country like this.


    Although this is thend of the royal city, it is definitely the most prosperous and wealthy ce in the entire country, but looking at other countries, how can any country achieve this level?


    After walking into the hall where the negotiation was held, the two of them were led by only two little girls and servants. As for General Yixiao, they had not yet arrived.


    "You two, please take a seat here."


    The little beauty servant led them directly to the seat and stretched out her left hand to directly indicate the location of the seat.


    The two of them didn''t mind other things. After all, they had arrived at this ce, and of course they needed to act in ordance with the rules.


    But before they could open their mouths, the servant asked again, "I wonder what tea you two would like to drink?"


    "This is not important. What I want to know is when will your Majesty the Kinge?"


    Iji looked up directly at the servant and asked.


    "I''m very sorry, we don''t know about these things. You can sit here for a while, and someone shoulde over to discuss with youter!" the servant said.


    "I know!" Iji said helplessly, retracting his expression.


    "Please bring me two cups of coffee!"


    Reijiu sat aside but smiled directly and said to the servant.


    After the other party nodded and started to leave, Iji immediately looked at his sister angrily and asked, "They don''t take us seriously, do they? We have alreadye to their ce, and they actually Are you still pretending that you haven''t seen anyone yet? Do they really think that our Vinsmoke family is easy to bully?"


    "Why are you in a hurry? You have spent so much time getting to this ce, do you still care about waiting for these few minutes?"


    Reiju looked at Iji calmly and said.


    "Although that is said, their attitude is still very unsatisfactory. We have been in the Tru Empire for such a long time. From the beginning to the end, they have not sent anyone to receive us at all. What about the one in the middle? Lieutenant General Deco, this guy feels like he is here to spy on us."


    Iji said still a little angry.


    "Don''t forget the purpose of our visit this time. What we want is not a war between two countries. This time we are here to ask others to forgive us and not to set our attitude so high again."


    Reijiu spoke in a low voice. This was the first time she felt that her brother, who usually looked so mature when he was at her side, became so irritable aftering here.


    This seemed to bepletely different from the Iji he usually came into contact with. Just sitting there for such a short time had already made him a little irritable and uneasy.


    Hearing Reiju''s low and serious words, Iji became angry and rxed suddenly, trying hard to suppress his irritable emotions.


    But what he didn''t know was that this emotion did not originate from himself, but rather came from an imperceptible reddish aura that had filled the entire hall.


    This is what caused Iji''s emotions to be infinitely amplified.


    But the reason why others didn''te was not to make him wait, but because they didn''t care about this aspect at all.


    At the end, General Yixiao walked in first, holding a cane in his hand. He directly sensed the opponent''s position using his knowledge and Haki, walked to the opposite side and sat down.


    Facing the person who suddenly came over, Iji and I stood up at the same time. After all, they knew the man in front of them rtively well.


    No matter what, the frequency of General Yixiao''s appearance in newspapers is still quite high. As a person who has long been famous in the circle of powerful people, General Yixiao''s reputation is very clear to at least the two of them.


    Even if you don��t investigate the Toru Empire much beforeing here, you will be familiar with who the strong people are in this country. However, if you analyze it through the newspapers, you will find that there are many strong people in the Toru Empire, but the reputation of the four generals , still firmly holding down the others.


    "Everyone, sit down! I''m here today, but I''m just a spectator."


    General Yixiao sat there and said directly to the two of them.


    "You mean Emperor Tru wille too?"


    Reiju suddenly showed a hint of surprise on her face. After all, even an imperial general came to participate in person and was a spectator, so it must be proved that their king will alsoe.


    But before their surprise had even begun, they were immediately extinguished by the next sentence.


    General Yixiao looked at the two people and said again, "There are many affairs in the empire at present. His Majesty the King will note here in person, but there will be someone to contact you two!"


    "Oh, like this?"


    The surprise that originally appeared on Reijiu''s face was extinguished in an instant. Although she was a little disappointed, this is indeed a verymon thing in arge country.


    The two of them were able to be received by the generals of the other country, which was already an amazing treatment.


    The three of them sat here again and waited for less than two minutes. They were originally supposed to be waiting for people from the Senate toe, but this time something happened that General Yixiao didn''t expect.


    Gogoya appeared directly here with elegant steps, wearing a long ck dress, ck sses frames, and a long ponytail that looked quite professional.


    Especially the high-heeled shoes under her feet, the movement produced by each step can make others feel the temperament of this woman from a distance.


    After so much time, Gogoya''s personality has changed a lot, especially his current work style, which has matured a lot rtively speaking.


    It is no longer the same as before, no matter what she does, there will always be disclosures. Today, as the king''s secretary, she is definitely outstanding in terms of both overall and details.


    "General Yixiao!"


    Gogoya walked to the side of several people, looked at General Yixiao sitting there and said hello with a smile.


    The other party nodded slightly, but didn''t say anything, or even stood up.


    "Hello, you two, my name is Gogoya, His Majesty the King''s secretary. This time, the Council of Ministers was supposed toe to negotiate with you, but this time His Majesty the King temporarily changed his mind and asked me toe, so I hope to take over. We can have a nice chat when wee down.��


    Gogoya did not sit down. Facing the two people who hade from afar, he stretched out his right hand to express friendship.

 Chapter 533 Conditions for Negotiation

    <h4>Chapter 533 Conditions for Negotiation</h4>


    Although Gogoya extended his right hand in a friendly manner, the person sitting in front of him at the moment was Iji who came from the Vinsmoke family. He was alwayspetitive, but when faced with the hand extended by a beautiful woman, When using his right hand, he waspletely stunned on the spot, not knowing what to do.


    But his eyes kept staring straight at the other person''s face.


    "My name is Reiju, and this is my brother Iji. He has some brain problems, so I hope you can forgive his rude behavior!"


    When Iji did not stand up, Reiju immediately stood up from beside him, and also stretched out her right hand to hold Gogoya''s outstretched hand.


    "It doesn''t matter. None of us would mind about such a thing. Maybe it would be better to talk about the matter directly."


    Gogoya kept a smile on his face and looked at the woman in front of him carefully and seriously.


    As for Iji, who had been sitting there a little at a loss, she almostpletely ignored him. Now he only needed to face a woman. At least in his feeling, this woman could still speak.


    After Gogoya finished speaking, he sat down directly, right next to General Yixiao.


    Reijiu smiled slightly and nodded, and then sat down as well.


    ��This time you havee from afar, and you should be well received, but I think you are the ones who know best the purpose of youring.


    I won��t go into too much nonsense. Regarding thest time the Vinsmoke family visited the highest-level military base of the Tru Empire before the war, you still need to give an answer even if you are here! "


    Gogoya spoke calmly, but the domineering tone revealed in his words still made the two of them shudder.


    This kind of domineeringes from self-confidence, and it alsoes from the suppression of a country. There is no such thing as the so-called domineering domineering situation.


    What''s more important is that there is General Yixiao sitting next to him. Even if the other party doesn''t speak, there is a powerful person staying here with her, and the situation ispletely different.


    This sentence instantly made Iji and I panic again, but they had already thought that there would be a result like today, and all the countermeasures had been prepared andpleted before setting off.


    "What happened before was indeed our fault, but we did not do it on purpose, and we never thought that this out-of-control submarine would actuallye to the Tru Empire area and be able to break into your military base! "


    Reiju said.


    "Do you think, or do you, the Vinsmoke family, think that you can cover it up with such a perfunctory statement? Or do you really think that the Tru Empire is just a three-year-old child who can be yed with by you?"


    Gogoya said, but this time his voice changed directly to a low tone.


    She used her hand to hold her sses frame, adjusting it to the best condition. The expression on her face already made people feel like the ice in winter.


    As a man, Iji couldn''t help but suddenly squeezed his thighs. Faced with this kind of aura, as a person who came to negotiate, he lost any chance in an instant.


    "Secretary Gogoya, as for the previous matter, we have apologized. This time we came here with full sincerity, and we have also exined before that this matter is definitely a misunderstanding, and we Vinsmo The Ke family is willing to actively coordinate with the Tru Empire, and we hope that this matter will not affect the rtionship between the South China Sea Reveal Empire and the North Sea Wensmoke family!"


    Iji stood up, bowed politely towards Gogoya, and spoke calmly.


    Now they are at an absolute disadvantage, and they were unreasonable in this incident, so they can only do this now.


    Reiju also stood up at the same time. Both of their expressions were a little bitter. Once upon a time, did they need to face others like this? But now I have to put down my posture.


    Gogoya sneered after listening to what Iji said, and then asked, "Is this how your North Haven Smoak family apologizes?"


    "If you don''t put forward conditions, as long as our Vinsmoke family can do it, we don''t mind and canmunicate directly!"


    Iji opened his mouth again and said.


    Anyway, they were already prepared beforeing and brought out the human cloning technology of the Vinsmoke family. This was considered a huge hemorrhage for them, or in other words, this was their biggest bottom line.


    They had just started chatting, but they had already pushed each other to the end. After Gogoya heard this, his originally gloomy expression gradually began to smile.


    "There is no special conflict between the South China Sea and the North Sea. I am also willing to believe that yourst action was unintentional. But these things also need to be believed by our King. Moreover, the two of you came from afar, there is nothing special about it. It��s really my fault for entertaining you two!��


    Gogoya''s sudden change was actually a bit difficult for the two of them to ept.


    Such an unruly negotiation made even General Yixiao sitting next to him have a ck line on his face.


    Everyone can already guess that Gogoya will definitely make conditions next.


    Gogoya stood up with a smile on his face. After taking a look at the general with a smile, the other man also stood up directly with a serious face. If one person is a bad person, there must be someone who is a good person.


    "The Truki Empire does not have many requirements this time and does not need you to do anything else, but in the future we still hope to maintain a friendly rtionship between Trukibo in the South China Sea and the Vinsmoke family in the North Sea!"


    Gogoya said, but before Iji and Iji could say anything, or before they started to be happy, Gogoya once again said, "The Tru Empire hopes that you can bring Vinsmoke to the throne." The family has developed the technology of thebat suit and shared it, which can be regarded as a bridge of friendly rtions between our two countries!"


    Iji, who originally felt that nothing was wrong, had not had time to startughing on his face, but after hearing these words, both of their faces instantly turned pale.


    "We can provide cloning technology to the Tru Empire, but as for..."


    "Our country doesn''t need this kind of thing at all. Besides, the Tru Empire has so many troops. It''s useless to ask for that thing!"


    Before Iji finished speaking, Gogoya opened his mouth and spoke again.


    And thenguage this time seems to be much tougher. This thing is no different from Mingqiang.

 Chapter 534 Send troops to Beihai?

    <h4>Chapter 534 Send troops to Beihai?</h4>


    Iji directly clenched his fists. If there wasn''t a general standing next to the opponent, he would probably want to punch the woman in front of him to death.


    "I wonder how you feel about the conditions we proposed?"


    Gogoya looked at the two silent people and asked again.


    "Secretary Gogoya, thebat suit is something our Vinsmoke family has just researched. How do you know about this?"


    Reiju opened her mouth and asked.


    "As for how you know it, there is no need for you to know. Today''s Tru Empire only has this condition. If even this cannot be met, then we should go back to the previous matter."


    Gogoya sneered, and then said again, "Did you know? Last time your Vinsmoke family submarine came to the absolute level military base of our Tru Empire. Whether it is the navy or the world government, they have always wanted to investigate the most. This is the ce, but I didn��t expect you to have such great ability to find this area. This is not good news for our country.


    In other words, in order to hide this secret, what do you think our country should do better? "


    "As a military general of the Tru Empire, perhaps our country will not mind sending troops directly to the North Sea. I don''t know if your Vinsmoke family has the ability to withstand it."


    General Yixiao assisted directly from the side, and a majestic and domineering voice made the two people who came here bewildered.


    From the moment they first arrived in this hall, it seemed that everything was no longer up to them. The dominant position upied by the Tru Empire made the two of thempletely unable to resist.


    Iji clenched his fists, but he did not dare to re at the two people directly. Reiju was also frowning. After all, for the Vinsmoke family, such a condition was simply worse than taking off the boss. It''s still ufortable.


    I just explored your military base, but in the end Mao didn''t investigate it clearly. It was fine that the submarine was taken over by you. But now that Ie to apologize like this, what I receive is not a warm reception, but a step by step response. The threat of pressing.


    Who knows that this family really has this strength? Otherwise, how could the Vinsmoke family be so humble to any country in the world?


    "Can I meet your Majesty the King?"


    Reiju opened her mouth and asked.


    "We still need to consult His Majesty the King about this. After all, there are many affairs in the country today, and it is not something we can do just by saying whatever we want."


    Gogoya said with a smile.


    "We can''t decide on the conditions you proposed this time. We still need to consult in detail on everything. After all, this is too important to our family. Of course, we want this matter to be finally decided. , we can only negotiate with Tru!"


    Reiju said in opposition to General Yijun.


    Anyway, that''s the case now. The other party''s cruel words have been left here. They may not have any means to struggle. The only thing they can do is to look at the other decision they made beforeing here and use themselves as the price. , to protect the safety of the Vinsmoke family.


    Neither of them doubted the truth or falsehood of what the other said. ording to the current public strength of the Tru Empire, the other party does have the ability and strength to directly wipe out their own family, but what they can do now is just to spend time directly. Dying itter will also make it easier for you to find a better countermeasure.


    "Then you can go and have a rest first. We will discuss the remaining matters tomorrow. There are some things that we are not in a hurry for now. I will also directly report your requests to His Majesty the King."


    Gogoya said with a smile, and then said again, "You two can go and see the scenery of the Tru Empire. Someone will take you directly to the Imperial Hotelter. I hope you can have a preliminary understanding of our country." understanding!"


    "Thank you very much. We will discuss the specific matters tomorrow!"


    Reiju said.


    They really couldn''t talk anymore, and it was impossible for the two of them to decide such a big thing.


    Talking about all the things without seeing the real owner is in vain.


    They have never experienced any kind of negotiation. To be precise, neither of them has experienced anything like a negotiation. From the beginning, they have been walking step by step in other people''s paths, following the lead of others. line and walk directly into the opponent''s trap.


    Now it seems that the social experience of these two people is still too shallow.


    "Gogoya! Your performance today really surprised me!"


    After the two left, General Yixiao turned to Gogoya and said with a smile on his face.


    "Haha!! Really? These are what His Majesty the King asked me to say? He said that as a negotiation process between two countries, no matter what the oue is, we must not lose to the other party in terms of momentum. If not, there will be others behind us. The whole country supports us, and the power is enough to make us stand upright in front of anyone!"


    Gogoya said with a smile.


    "Yeah~! The king is right!"


    General Yixiao said that with the passage of time, although he has experienced more and more, and his contact with His Majesty the King has be longer and longer, but many times he is bing less and less clear about His Majesty the King.


    He seems to know a lot about everything, especially in the management of the country. Compared with other countries so far, no one in the entire country has any thoughts of rebellion!


    Not to mention that he couldn''t understand this, there were just as many other people who couldn''t understand it.


    "General Yixiao, this first negotiation is now over. How about I buy you two drinks? There will be nothing to do at the moment anyway!"


    Gogoya said invitingly.


    "No need to report to His Majesty the King?"


    General Yixiao asked.


    "Don''t worry, His Majesty has already guessed the oue. The rest will depend on tomorrow." Gogoya said with a smile.


    "It seems quite shocking. Anyway, I, an old man, have nothing to do at the moment. There just happened to be a new tavern opened in the empire recently. It''s not far from the pce, so just go there!"


    He said with a smile, then raised the crutch in his hand and began to walk sideways towards the outside.


    This time the negotiation was very sessful for them. It also firmly grasped the psychological weakness of the other party, and every step they took guided the other party''s next path, which at least allowed them to affirm one thing. That is, the Tru Empire can now attack them without any control.

 Chapter 535 The second negotiation

    <h4>Chapter 535 The second negotiation</h4>


    They were rxed andfortable, but for these two people from the Vinsmoke family, it felt like a big mountain was weighing on their hearts.


    It sounded nice on the surface, and asked them to take a closer look at the current situation of the Tru Empire. In fact, after the servant led them to the Imperial Hotel, the two of them stayed in the room and never came out at all.


    Of the two people in the room, one frowned more than the other. Iji clenched his fists angrily and punched the bed, but that was all he could do now.


    They didn''t even dare to make any big noises, for fear of causing another misunderstanding from the Tru Empire.


    "What are we going to do now? These guys are obviously trying to push us. How can this be a condition for peace? They are obviously pushing our Vinsmoke family towards a dead end!"


    Iji shouted angrily directly to Reiju.


    "It''s useless for you to get angry now. The key is that we are still in other people''s territory. Now all we can do is ask my father what his views are. Take advantage of this day and seize the time to think of a n to deal with it. Anyway, no matter what We can''t let go of anything again without seeing King Tru.


    From the beginning, we have been led by others, and we are already at a disadvantage in terms of momentum. Now we have finally gained such a little time, and ording to the attitude of the other party, if we do not give a satisfactory answer this time If they answer, they will probably start a war directly! "


    "Just fight! Do you really think our Vinsmoke family is afraid of them?"


    As soon as Reiju finished speaking, Iji roared angrily.


    "Huh~, let''s report the situation here to father first!"


    Reiju sighed deeply, and then said calmly to Iji.


    "That''s all we can do now. We still have to see if we can see Emperor Tru tomorrow. As long as you can sessfully attract the other party''s attention, I think we still have a high chance of happening this time!"


    Iji said.


    Reiju stopped talking. If they want to keep the current conditions of the Vinsmoke family, this is their only choice at present.


    But so far, they don''t understand the character of Emperor Tru at all. In the past, they didn''t pay attention to this country in the South China Sea at all. After all, the distance between the two sides is so far, and there is no rtionship between the two forces. There is no dispute. Although their family is now restricted, this does not mean that their family does not have any strength to deal with it.


    But no matter what, for them, it is impossible for them to agree to the conditions proposed today. Even if there is a direct war between the two countries, thebat uniform already belongs to their family''s biggest secret, and it will also be the family''s biggest secret. Can it be the key to bing the top power in the world next?


    But once this technology is transferred, let alone their strong strength in this world, even the life they may face in the North Sea will not be that safe.


    the next day.


    Negotiations began again, but the difference this time was that the two people were directly introduced to the pce.


    But the moment he stepped into the pce gate, Iji said to Reiju with a look of disgust, "I didn''t expect that a pce in such a prosperous Toru Empire outside would look so shabby!"


    "Don''t talk. Just deal with what your father told you yesterday. Just deal with it directly when the timees. Don''t say it wrong."


    Reiju reminded.


    "What is there to worry about? ording to my father, if the Tru Empire''s demands this time are too excessive, then our North Haven Smoak family will not mind cooperating with the World Government. We will see what he should do then. Go and exin!��


    The corners of Iji''s mouth raised somewhat proudly, as if he hadpletely grasped this negotiation in his hands.


    "Don''t be so confident now. When the timees, the other party has reached such a level at this age. Do you think people will worry about these things? When Imunicated with my father yesterday, I was already thinking about this matter. Since the other party If we dare to start a direct war with the world government, then I guess we will definitely not worry about who we choose to cooperate with?


    You should also change your attitude when the timees and don''t put us in danger! "


    Reiju reminded directly again.


    She really couldn''t figure out where her brother got his confidence? Is it possible that their father brought up the topic of cooperation with the world government? If the other party is most afraid of these, how can it be possible to directly dere war on the World Government?


    Moreover, the World Government suffered the most losses after a war, but not a single member of the Tru Empire who went to participate in the war was injured!


    But she could only say this to herself. After all, when facing her father, many times she couldn''t offer any rebuttal at all.


    While chatting, the two of them had already arrived at the pce hall of the Tru Empire. The decoration and furnishings here were almost the same as they were decades ago.


    Nothing has changed at all, and the construction of the Tru Empire when it was in poverty has been maintained. But even so, no one dares to say that the Tru Empire is poor now.


    The central hall of the pce has only one chair at the top, and the rest is an open space. Only the living rooms on both sides have sofas. But as for this negotiation, it is impossible to let it go. They went to the area over there.


    "You two wait here for a moment, His Majesty the King wille in personter!"


    After they just entered the hall, they kept looking around, when a beautiful servant came over, looked at the two of them, bowed and said.


    "It''s okay, let''s just wait for a while!"


    Reiju smiled and nodded.


    The servant nodded and bowed again, took two steps back with a smile, and then left.


    Only the two of them were left carefully looking at this strange environment that they had never seen before. At least the Toru Empire today is a legend in the minds of many people, but they did not expect that the ce where Emperor Toru lived would be like this. ?


    All they can do now is stand here or walk back and forth in this hall. Even breathing can cause echoes in the approximately 50m-high dome.


    At least at this moment, no one in the Tru Empire is in a hurry to see them. In terms of momentum or time, they want to be the absolute winner. It is not just the momentum that overwhelms them. In terms of time, it ispletely impossible for them to wait. Leaving them already at a disadvantage.

 Chapter 536 The battle for the new navy marshal

    <h4>Chapter 536 The battle for the new navy marshal</h4>


    At the same time, there was already a quarrel at the Navy Headquarters.


    Marshal Sengoku of the Navy Headquarters resigned from his original position as marshal, but now he needs to choose from two generals of the headquarters, but the selection at this meeting is obviously not that simple.


    Although Aokiji is the Admiral of the Navy Headquarters who currently has the highest support for bing Marshal, there is another person who has also received huge support.


    As a naval admiral, Akainu has the support of the World Government behind him, so under such circumstances, the two are almost evenly matched.


    The war has only ended a few days ago, but as the two generals of the Navy Headquarters, they have already started to tense up because of their position as marshal.


    In the conference room.


    There were hundreds of people sitting in the conference room. The office space is still in Mariejoia, so it is not surprising that a conference room can amodate so many people in a ce like this.


    Now almost all the Vice Admirals, Rear Admirals and other senior figures of the Navy headquarters have stayed here.


    As the result of the former marshal''s victory, although it has continued until now, all the formalities and tasks have not been handed over andpleted, and he still needs to preside over this meeting.


    It is estimated that this is the most frustrating time for him to preside over, and of course it will most likely be thest time in his life to preside over a meeting of the Navy Headquarters.


    Looking at the people sitting on both sides of the conference table, Zeng Guo was already very anxious. Originally, only a few hairs were gray due to the war, but now half of his hair has started to turn white.


    Only half a month has passed, and to him it seems like half a century has passed.


    Garp also sat there calmly, and all this now seemed to have nothing to do with him.


    But as people who understand things, they know very well that this meeting is just a formality.


    The position of the Navy Marshal ispletely different now than before. Although most people in the Navy almost support Aokiji, and a small number of people support Akainu, the key is that the people in the World Government almost all support Akainu.


    The quiet conference room was so quiet now that you could almost hear a pin drop.


    They looked at each other, waiting for this meeting to end as soon as possible.


    "About who will be the marshal next, we must have discussed this a lot, but until this time, Aokiji''s support rate is obviously much higher than Akainu. The key is that the leaders above are supporting this Akainu, for the sake of fairness, I still need to follow the opinions of the two of you!"


    Warring States sat on it and said helplessly.


    If it weren''t for the fact that he was more optimistic about Aokiji, and he couldn''t leave the navy at all. After working here all his life, he still misses him a little, then who would be the marshal next has nothing to do with him?


    "I am determined to win the position of marshal of the navy this time. No matter what the situation is, nothing can stop me!"


    Akainu stood up first and spoke directly to everyone with a serious face.


    "You said you can do it, you can do it? So what should I do if I am also determined to get this position? If you really be a marshal in the end, I will definitely be the first to leave the navy!"


    Aokiji stood up without any hesitation, looked at Akainu equally seriously and said.


    "Even if you leave the navy, can you stop me?" Akainu asked fiercely.


    "Then let''s wait and see!"


    Qing Zhi said, but at this time, other people did not dare to open their mouths or say anything at all. Sengoku and Garp looked at each other, not knowing what to say to each other.


    "If that doesn''t work, why don''t we just let them fight and win some marshal?"


    The group of people who had been silent until now suddenly heard a voiceing directly over.


    Everyone''s eyes were attracted, and Gion opened her mouth subconsciously because of her nerves. However, she didn''t expect that everyone''s eyes would suddenly focus on her. For a moment, she felt like she had said something wrong.


    Now the two of them are still arguing and have not been able to find any good solution. Otherwise, it has been several days and they still can''t decide on the candidate for the marshal.


    "I think this is pretty good. I wonder what you think, Qing Pheasant?"


    Akainu asked with a sneer.


    "I don''t mind, maybe that''s the way it should be, then we''ll take care of ourselves whether we win or lose!"


    Qing Zhi looked at the other party and decided the matter this time readily.


    "Do you want to think about it again?"


    The Warring States Marshal asked.


    "I don''t think there is much to test. Then let the navy arrange the ce. Instead of talking about other things, it is better to directly witness the true chapter in terms of strength. What dissatisfaction do other people in the province have?"


    Akainu said, looking around with a serious expression.


    As for what they will do this time? It is estimated that many people don''t care if they want someone. After all, they are already admirals. Many people don''t understand what their next intention is?


    But this time the matter has been finalized. There are no opinions between the two parties, so how can others bring it up?


    At the end of the meeting, when Garp walked past Aokiji, he patted him on the shoulder helplessly.


    Or maybe he already knew something in advance, and patting the other person on the shoulder was just to remind him.


    Anyway, in the following time, the decisive battle between the two generals has attracted the attention of many people, and even many people from the outside world have been silently paying attention to this matter.


    But after all, this is just an internal matter within the navy, and it is a wonderful thing between two countries. It is estimated that we still need to watch the Tru Empire at this moment.


    Iji and I stayed in the hall and waited for a long time. It was not until an hourter that Gogoya appeared first.


    However, there was more than just one person apanying her. In addition to General Yixiao, Moshanke, Eniro and Abona followed at the same time. The powerful lineup made the words they had prepared suddenlye back. Start going offline!


    "I''m sorry, I really kept you waiting. There were some things we didn''t have time toe over just now. It was also my negligence. I didn''t let others inform you. If there is a next time, this situation will never happen again."


    Gogoya apologized directly when he came up, but the smile on his face didn''t look like an apology at all.


    Even his own side seemed too perfunctory, and Enelu stared at the woman in front of him with wide eyes.

 Chapter 537 You can get it in person

    <h4>Chapter 537 You can get it in person</h4>


    Hypocrisy, this word applied to this woman, is simply not too real to the people behind her.


    It was clear that a few people were still together just now, talking about how to exploit the Vinsmoke family, but now they look innocent?


    "It doesn''t matter, we should be here early!"


    Reiju smiled and nodded.


    Iji didn''t have such a good temper. He was already very angry. When he looked at the people who came over, although he didn''t say anything, his expressions were already dissatisfied.


    He clenched his fists with a cold expression on his face, but so what?


    A group of people came directly at once, leaving the two of them who had been waiting for so long, even though they were furious, there was nothing they could do.


    After Reiju said hello to Gogoya, she immediately started to look around, but in her eyes, it seemed that the person she wanted was not there.


    "Where is His Majesty Emperor Tru?"


    Reiju asked with some confusion.


    "His Majesty the King has arrived!"


    Gogoya said with a smile and motioned the two of them to look up.


    At the same time, Chang Nuo didn''t know when he had appeared on the top seat. He dragged his chin with his right hand and stared at the two people with interest.


    The appearance of this scene instantly stunned the two of them who hade from afar. Then they bowed together and saluted. Reijiu was a little overwhelmed, but she still said politely, "Reijiu, the eldest daughter of the Wensmoke family in the North Sea, Entrusted by my father, I specially brought Iji, the eldest son of the Vinsmoke family, to pay a visit to His Majesty Emperor Tru!"


    "No need to be polite, just get straight to the point. They have already discussed the previous matters with you. Next, you just want to see our attitude, don''t you?"


    Chang Nuo said leisurely with a smile.


    "This...this has indeed been said, but our family cannot agree to the requests you made. After all..."


    "After all, I can get these things myself, right?"


    Before Reijiu finished speaking, Changnuo smiled again and looked at Reijiu with a deterrent look.


    As the Emperor of Tru, Changnuo himself does not need to go out of his way to release the so-called overlord''s domineering energy. In his words or affectionate words, he has already revealed infinite majesty.


    Faced with such a situation, the two of them were always at a loss.


    Iji is not as arrogant and angry as he was at the beginning. Maybe he can be calm or angry when facing the general, but now he is really facing the strong man standing on the top of the tower in this world. He is really shocked under the shock. He didn''t know what to say.


    "We are just a small country, and I hope His Majesty Tru can forgive us!"


    Reiju said bitterly.


    "Isn''t the purpose of youring here today very simple? It''s just to apologize for what happenedst time. But this guy Vince Moggaji is really willing to give up. He actually dares to use his own daughter in exchange. I really don''t know. What on earth did this old man think?"


    Chang Nuo said, and everyone else''s eyes were already on Leijiu, eager to get the answer from the other party''s words.


    At that time, the two people on both sides were also extremely shocked. So far, they have not made such a request. They are very curious how the other party knew?


    "Do you think my sister is not good enough for you?"


    Iji suddenly asked fiercely.


    "Ah!"


    Changnuo sneered, and then the pressure of the overlord''s domineering force was instantly blessed on Iji. The powerful force, even if the opponent turned on the battle suit state in an instant, he still couldn''t withstand the strong pressure and fell to his knees directly on the ground.


    "The Vinsmoke family may be able to dominate the North Sea, but don''t forget, this is the Tru Empire in the South Sea. Although I don''t mind what your attitude is like? But sometimes in front of me, you should It��s better to be more honest, right?��


    Chang Nuo still kept a smile on his face as he spoke, and the majesty of the emperor was clearly revealed at this moment.


    No one dares to deny Chang Nuo, the Emperor of Tru. Is there any murderous intention hidden under the smile at this moment?


    "Your Majesty Emperor Tru, please forgive my brother''s attitude just now!"


    Reiju said.


    "You are pretty good, but your brother is just a little bit stupid. The conditions are still the same, and this will definitely not change. After all, this thing is not only useful to you, but also has great research value for the Tru Empire. .


    I wonder if old guy Vince Mokgarji doesn''t know about this situation and wants to use human cloning technology to get rid of us? Do you think this situation is really a problem for the Tru Empire?


    You can directlymunicate with your father, and you can agree or disagree in just one sentence from him, but it only takes half a month to reach the North Sea from the South China Sea. Maybe if we are willing, we can reach the area where the Vinsmoke family is in about ten days. "


    Changnuo said calmly, then sat up straight, looked at the other party again, and said again in a slightly cold tone, "Don''t think that being able to rely on the World Government will do you any good? If they can protect you, The Tru Empire doesn��t mind, but consider the depth of the water on this trip.��


    "You...! Okay! I understand."


    Reijiu seemed to have exhausted all her strength, but it was just a question, but it also made her feel extremely difficult.


    "How about directmunication on the spot? I can also have a good chat with your father. Having said that, it would be good for you to stay in the Tru Empire."


    "Your Majesty the King!!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Gogoya shouted out as if he had heard something extraordinary.


    Changnuo nced at her and said nothing. As a king, he always has his own thoughts and opinions.


    Reiju was also very helpless. She nced at her brother Iji and seemed to understand that she had fallen into a bigger pit this time.


    Emperor Tru was not as easy to talk to as he thought, and he learned much more than he thought.


    Faced with this situation, even if two people stay here, they don''t know how to deal with it.


    But now that they are really asked toe up with this confidential technology, it should be somewhat impossible for the Vinsmoke family to think about it.


    "Your Majesty, it looks like they don''t have any sincerity in apologizing at all. Why don''t you give me half a month and I can go to the Vinsmoke family in person?"


    Mo Sanke took two steps forward and asked Chang Nuo.


    "don''t want!!"


    When Reiju heard this, she quickly shouted out.


    They also figured out the strength of the generals of the Tru Empire and figured it out. Although Moshank did not participate in this war, they were allowed to stay in the country alone and be responsible for national security. They would not do this again. No matter how stupid you are, you can probably guess some.

 Chapter 538 Brother’s Information

    <h4>Chapter 538 Brother��s Information</h4>


    A person who could be so valued by Emperor Tru and let him stay in the country alone. How could such a person be weak in terms of identity and strength?


    But now Reijiu is in a dilemma. On the one hand, it is the absolute secret of her family, and on the other hand, it is the security issue of her family''s survival. Caught in a dilemma, they can''t find any solution that should be able to solve it.


    All the topicsmunicated before seem to have no effect at this moment. After all, the strength is here, and all thoughts have be light and indifferent.


    Reijiu originally wanted to use herself as her ultimate goal, directly at the expense of herself, in exchange for the safety of the Vinsmoke family. However, before such news was revealed, others had already exposed it. Not only did she lose all her The opportunity put himself in apletely embarrassing situation.


    "Connect with the North Sea Vinsmoke family and let me personally have a chat with the old guy Vinsmoke Gazi and see what he really thinks?"


    Chang Nuo said, and as soon as he finished speaking, two men in white coats walked in.


    These are the technical specialists of the Tru Empire today. They were seen carrying a huge screen and ced it in the center of the hall. One of the men respectfully said to Chang Nuo, "Do you want to connect now?"


    "Come on! I also want to see what kind of face this old guy is like."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Okay, Your Majesty!"


    As he said that, two technicians walked in tandem, one was probably debugging the channel, and the other was directly behind to control what no one knew.


    But within a short while, a ck disy screen began to slowly change.


    Until the end, Vince Mokgarji gradually began to appear on the screen, but the other party came up and asked directly, "Is the matter settled?"


    "this����"


    Reiju suddenly discovered that the channel connecting the Tohru Empire to the Beihai side still used the same method as theirs, and even the information wavelength was exactly the same.


    It was as if they had dialed it, and the two of them had to be directly surprised.


    "Vince Moggaji, take a good look. As the big boss of Beihai, you didn''t expect that you would only let your own childrene here?"


    Changnuo shouted with a mocking look on his face.


    "Te��Emperor Tru???"


    Vince Mokjiaji looked at the screen in surprise, his mouth hanging open. Perhaps he had never thought of this happening.


    But after staying for a while, he still pretended to be calm and asked, "How are the two of them doing now?"


    "Don''t worry, I don''t have such a hobby!"


    Changnuo was still sitting there, but Reiju and Iji took a few steps forward and shouted to the screen, "Father, we are fine, but the matter has been settled..."


    "I see!"


    Vince Mokjiaji said, and now he seemed to have known something. He was not as calm as he thought, but he immediately calmed down.


    After all, he was once the king of Beihai, and his magnanimity remains undiminished today.


    "I agree to your request, but the Tru Empire must ensure the safety of my children!"


    Vince Mokgaji said directly and seriously to the screen.


    "You can rest assured about this. Since you have agreed to our request, the Tru Empire and the North Haven Smoak family are friends in an extraordinary sense. These two people will definitely receive the best treatment when theye here as guests. treatment."


    Chang Nuo said with a smile on his face, now he has this thing in his hands.


    At least he didn''t have to spend money to buy it from the system. He was also thinking about not using it as much as possible.


    Anyway, I don��t know what price I will pay in the end.


    Although Iji had heard his father''s answer, he still had a dead look on his face. He might be feeling frustrated or aggrieved, but under the premise of all these things, they couldn''t handle it. of.


    Now that they have agreed, there is naturally nothing to talk about between the two of them. After hanging up the videomunication, Chang Nuo''s face began to shrink from a smile, and he turned to look at his side and said, "Mo. Sanke is responsible for going to the North Sea and taking two technicians with him to confirm the authenticity of this thing."


    "No problem, we''ll set off directly from here in the afternoon."


    Moshank said.


    "You can stay! There is nothing left to do. You all should go back and have a good rest. I will inform you if anything happens!"


    Changnuo looked at Reijiu and said. Iji originally wanted to say something, but Reijiu squeezed his shoulder tightly. In the end, he could only reluctantly acknowledge the matter.


    As for the Lu Empire, except for Gogoya who was slightly dissatisfied, everyone else had smiles on their faces and did not show too many emotions.


    After everyone left, Reijiu stood alone in the hall uneasily. He didn''t know what the other person''s purpose was for leaving him behind. Now that everything has been negotiated, what purpose can the other party have?


    "Come and sit!"


    Chang Nuo stood up, walked down from his seat, and then walked towards the living room next to him. When he was close to Reijiu, he spoke calmly.


    After arriving here, Chang Nuo sat down directly on the sofa and put his feet up on the coffee table in front of him without any appearance. Looking at Reijiu who was still a little uneasy, he just smiled and said, "I won''t be right." How about you, you can rest assured about the rest.��


    "Then why do you want me to stay?"


    "Sanji, Vinsmoke, should be your youngest brother! Or should I say he is your fourth brother?"


    Changnuo asked, but he was also observing Reiju''s expression carefully.


    "Do you know anything about him?"


    "Of course I know. If you want to know, I don''t mind telling you!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Please also tell me your brother''s information, for which I will be grateful."


    Reiju stood up suddenly and bowed deeply, tears seemed to have begun to fall slowly.


    This is probably the closest he has ever been to his brother in his life, so how could he let such news go?


    For so many years, he has been inquiring about the whereabouts of his younger brother, but so far, there has been no news.


    She even thought for a time that her younger brother had disappeared? But now that ites from the other party''s mouth, it will definitely not be that simple.


    This can be regarded as a life-saving straw. Reijiu naturally didn''t want to let go of any news.

 Chapter 539 Getting on track

    <h4>Chapter 539 Getting on track</h4>


    Seeing the other party''s anxious look, Chang Nuo smiled softly, perhaps also feeling emotional.


    But now if he passes the news about Sanji to this woman, then the plot will be on track in the next two years. This is actually what he wants to see.


    But now, the Tohru Empire has developed to this point, and whether the timeline can get back on track doesn''t seem to be that important to him.


    Even now, even if they want to fight for control of the world, Rafdru''s secret does not seem to be as important as imagined.


    But everything is just a gimmick. To what extent will it evolve in the end? These things are actually unknown at this time.


    "I can tell you the whereabouts of my brother, but what can I gain?


    We are two countries. This is not a personal grudge. Everything must be based on interests first, don��t you think? "


    Changnuo asked.


    "Tell me, I don''t dare to represent the Vinsmoke family now, but I can represent myself in all matters. As long as it is something I can do, I will do my best to do it!"


    Reijiu stood up straight, looked at Chang Nuo and said.


    "I haven''t thought about the matter yet. At the same time, I don''t have any thoughts about your Vinsmoke family. You can rest assured about this."


    Changnuo said, but he paused for a moment, and finally thought for a moment, and continued, "I can''t think of any value you can use right now, but the news can tell you that your brother is currently serving as a member of the Straw Hat Pirates. Chef, but you may not see him in the near future, they will not gather until two yearster."


    "I am very grateful to have received this information, but I will not forget the agreement between us. No matter what you have to do, as long as I can do it, I will definitely do it!"


    As Reijiu said that, she turned around and started to leave, but before she left, Changnuo said again, "Say hello to your father for me when you go back. Maybe I will visit him in person if I have the chance."


    "Then maybe my father will wee you too!"


    Reijiu didn''t say this calmly. On the contrary, after hearing what the other party said, she subconsciously clenched her fists.


    There is a meaning in this kind of words, and Reiju can still understand it.


    That''s why this woman said such a sentence before leaving. In fact, from some perspectives, Reijiu still has a good impression of this man. Putting aside the national perspective, Chang Nuo essentially seems to have A more domineering handsomeness, for women like them who cannot control their own destiny, it is indeed a good choice as a destination.


    But now everything seems not to be as I thought, at least the other party has no interest in this aspect at all. However, although there are losses in this trip, there are also gains.


    At least she also got the whereabouts of her brother. Anyway, as for whose hands thebat suit will eventually fall into, it means nothing to her at all. This should be a matter for her father and brother to consider.


    Once the incident with the Smoke family in North Haven was over, there was no longer any external affairs for the current Tru Empire, and life began to gradually be calmer, and they began to continue to develop their own business empire.


    But as Emperor Tru, Changnuo was no longer content with what he was seeing. The despair that Fei Duo had left for him before would probably never be made up for, no matter how long it took.


    A person''s strength is so great that even with systematic assistance, he still hasn''t defeated the opponent. Perhaps it''s because of his mentality after his strength skyrocketed.


    I had always thought that the Four Emperors or the Pirate Kings were already at the top of this world, but as they grew stronger, they discovered that there were at least a lot of powerful people in the World Government who could rival the Four Emperors. .


    The strong strength is self-evident.


    So in the next time, all Chang Nuo can think of is to increase his strength as soon as possible. In this way, he can at least protect his country. Along the way, maybe his path is too easy, which leads to The series of problems we are facing today.


    Perhaps the good thing is that all the problems seem to have urred at the front of the road. If I remove all these obstacles, the road can continue to move forward smoothly.


    But if you want to have strong power, the prerequisite concept is to have sufficient funds. ording to the current economic development conditions of the Tru Empire, although there are sufficient gold and silver jewelry in the treasury, this does not mean that you want to How to use it?


    It involves the livelihood arrangements of the entire country. As a king, while achieving this position, he also needs to be responsible for the people below.


    The consumption of the Tru Empire''s army isparable to throwing handfuls of money into the sea. This consumption rate may bepletely unbearable for any country.


    Even with so manyrge-scale businesses, all of them can only make simple profits.


    This is the main reason why Changnuo is more concerned about the final business situation in the country of basta.


    In fact, the signs of this country have appeared a few years ago, but until now, I don��t know why? Only then will they start to really take action.


    Even if this year''s financial statements are only half of the profits of previous years, this profit is still as high as nearly two trillion Baileys. The speed of this kind of money can already bepared with the fiscal revenue of any country in the world.


    Junhe shouldered the heavy responsibility this time, but he didn''t understand this kind of business economy at all. Even when he came to the country of basta, he just went through the motions and shocked these people.


    After all, ording to the current reputation of the Tru Empire, there is no need for too many and too professional people to go there. They only need to dock their naval warships in the basta country area for one night. The shock of force deterrence is enough to make them restrain themselves. Think of your little thoughts.


    This is the main reason why Changnuo didn''t give him too many tasks before Junhe came here. The only task was to let hime to basta to take a look at the situation.


    The Tru Empire that just ended the war can be said to be the most popr existence in the entire world. Just relying on this name is enough to scare many countries, let alone what special tricks are done under their noses. ?

 Chapter 540 Two Years Later

    <h4>Chapter 540 Two Years Later</h4>


    How could the Trul Empire be willing to be lonely in theing time? In less than half a year, there have been frequent reports of endless battles by the revolutionary army on the other side of the West Sea.


    This caused panic among the people throughout Xihai, and at least this time, the revolutionary army was made to feel frightened even by themselves.


    But now no one will say whether his "" is true or false. An army like the Revolutionary Army cannot stand under the sun, so even if this group of people is a fake Revolutionary Army, they will not be able to express it in the end. any statement.


    In less than half a year, after the Tru Empire began to issue a statement, the message that it could ept people from any area to settle in the Tru Empire actually caused a huge stir when it was first sent out.


    Especially those businessmen who were able to participate in negotiations with the Tru Empire, as well as those workers who came with the fleet, all of them resettled their families in this country as quickly as possible. among.


    Although thend assigned to them was far away from the royal pce or royal city, it at least made them extremely satisfied.


    Being able to be a citizen of the Tru Empire is something that many people dream of. Since the war between the revolutionary army in the West Sea, arge number of people have begun to move towards the South China Sea.


    After all, the two sea areas are right next to each other and the distance is not particrly far, so arge number of people will take the risk and start heading here.


    Sometimes when there are many people, almost all fleets on the sea are one after another, and densely packed people start to set off towards the South China Sea.


    Among the crowd, most of them were businessmen, and one by one they brought their families and started marching vigorously towards the Tru Empire.


    But although the Tru Empire has reduced all taxes on the people, it does not mean that they can still reduce the taxes on merchants. Even so, they are still sharpening their heads and trying every means to start moving forward.


    These people are all too aware of the difference between staying in a fair and reasonable country and a country that only knows about exploitation and unlimited oppression.


    Not to mention that the navy cannot participate in such a thing, the world government doesn''t even bother to look at it, they all understand each other''s routines, but after all, such a situation is voluntary, and it does not harm the territory of any country, even as a Countries that join the World Government cannot ask the World Government toe and participate in such things.


    After all, the people heading towards the South China Sea this time are not just those in the West Sea te who were affected by the Revolutionary Army''s war. There are also many people in the East China Sea and the North Sea who are beginning to work hard to move forward here.


    Even some people from the New World in the first half of the Grand Line had the same idea.


    An unprecedented relocation can copse a country''s economy in just an instant. The vast majority of businessmen or wealthy people have already moved away from their country, so this country only relies on them for survival. Who can the government squeeze to keep their country''s economy running?


    Those who cannot live without it are almost all ordinary people who have no power, no power, and no money. Even the possibility of going abroad to live in another country ispletely blocked.


    But the Tru Empire''s big move this time will always have advantages and disadvantages. Although arge number of people have begun to pour into the country, and the poption economy has begun to prosper rapidly, are there any unknown existences among these people? No one dares to judge now.


    But this is not a good idea. At least before this announcement was issued, the Council had already thought of various ways. Among them, the most practical and effective one should be to give them suppression bracelets to prevent demons. Fruit ability users, pirates, or intelligence agents from the World Government and Navy infiltrated.


    Even if you want to be a citizen of the Tru Empire, you need to stay in this country for at least three years and make substantial economic contributions to this country before you can be epted by this country normally and have your bracelet removed.


    This thing is no different to ordinary people, and it will not have the slightest impact. It is nothing more than using these things to test these people for the past three years.


    Suddenly, arge number of people began to pour into the entire Tru Empire. Although it had a certain impact on the economy, this would be of great benefit to them in the future.


    As the Tru Emperor, Chang Nuo is never idle at all. Among the dozens of treasuries in the Tru Empire, almost all the money has been emptied by him. When he appears again, will he be able to overturn it? this world?


    But all this is now a thing of the past, and only then can others witness everything.


    However, in just two years, everything was arranged and the process was exactly the same as before. The navy had already begunrge-scale recruitment after the battle between Akainu and Aokiji. However, there are countless powerful people hidden in this world. Their navy This time, relying on the so-called victory in the war, it can be considered that in the past two years, I finally made up for my originalbat effectiveness.


    Althoughpared to the navy two years ago, they are still rtively weaker today, but at least theirbat level is almost the same as two years ago.


    But the shorings are also obvious. So far, after two years have passed, the navy''s control over the four seas has almost be quite weak, and the two regions of the South China Sea and the West China Sea havepletely lost its dominance.


    Nowadays, most of their goals are focused on the Grand Line and the New World. The rulers also understand that they no longer have that much energy to control all ces.


    The World Government turned a blind eye to these things, but the Celestial Dragons were the only ones dissatisfied.


    Above the South China Sea.


    A seemingly exquisite ship appeared here in such a swaggering manner that it didn''t even care what other people thought of the ship.


    The entire ship has a pure white exterior, and even the rails are hung in white. Everything looks so exquisite, but it is not particrlyrge, and the overall length is only about 30m at most.


    There are only seven or eight people on the whole ship. Five or six guys in ck suits are controlling the course and mast of the ship. The faces of these guys wearing hats almost all show a state of reluctance. .

 Chapter 541 The Arrival of the Celestial Dragons

    <h4>Chapter 541 The Arrival of the Celestial Dragons</h4>


    But on the edge of the deck of the ship, there was a girl who looked about 20 years old lying down, and next to her there was also a man in histe twenties wearing a white dress.


    The only difference is that this man wears a ss cover on his head, and the image of the Celestial Dragon is clearly revealed at this moment.


    "Brother, I have always heard that Nanhai is very fun and very prosperous. This time you must apany me when youe here and have a good time!"


    The beautiful woman lying on the fence said, smiling expectantly.


    "I''m not telling you, why do we have to run to the South China Sea when we have nothing to do? This is the territory of the Tru Empire. If something happens here, it''s not like some naval admiral can rush over to save the situation!"


    the man said.


    Both of them are indeed Celestial Dragons, but there are also regtions among the Celestial Dragons. Generally, only women with a certain status and identity among the Celestial Dragons are allowed to wear ss covers on their heads, but men are different. They start from birth. You must wear this thing!


    Although I don��t know what the purpose of bringing this is? But at least this is the tradition they have passed down.


    "We just went there to y and didn''t do anything! And before we came here, I also made a point of observing the Tru Empire. As long as we don''t cause trouble here, they won''t expel us or harm us."


    "Wei Mo, don''t be deceived by the other party''s appearance. This country has gone to war with the World Government. Didn''t my father also ask us to go anywhere, but don''te to the South China Sea?"


    "I really don''t know what you have to worry about?"


    This little Tianlong girl named Wei Mo looked at her brother standing next to him with a dull look on her face and asked.


    "Don''t worry, in short, you have to know one thing, that is, we Tianlong people have supreme authority in any corner of the world, but this authority seems to have fallen to the South China Sea area, and it has be very bleak. They estimate that They won��t care about our identities!��


    "Saint Yakel, do we need to turn around and go back? If we go further, we will have already reached the patrol area of ??the Tru Empire Navy, which will be very dangerous for us!"


    A guy in a ck suit and ck hat walked over to where the two of them were lying and said.


    "Don''t I still have your protection? Is it possible that you don''t even have this little confidence?"


    The Celestial Dragon named Yakel turned his head and stared at each other fiercely and asked.


    "I''m very sorry, Saint Yakkel. The safety of you two is our most important mission. We are reaching an extremely dangerous area like the Tru Empire. We hope that you two can reconsider!"


    The apanying guard immediately bowed to the end and spoke respectfully to the two of them.


    He was already panicking as he spoke. After all, he was facing a Celestial Dragon. To them, he might not even be considered a ve.


    "Wei Mo, you heard it, right? It''s very dangerous ahead. Why don''t we turn around and go back? Wouldn''t it be the same if we went to any other country?"


    Yakkel said to his sister with a ttering expression.


    "I don''t want it! I want to go to the South China Sea countries to see, and we now buy a lot of things from the South China Sea countries. I would like toe to this ce and take a good look at what this country looks like? I heard they said there are many good things here. There are many interesting people to eat and have arrived here. If you still don��t go, are you still my brother?��


    Wei Mo pouted and asked angrily.


    "Go, go, go! I''m really scared of you."


    As soon as Yakel looked at the other party''s appearance, he grinned and shouted, saying this rather helplessly.


    After finishing speaking, he looked at the men in suits next to him, his expression immediately returned to seriousness and coldness and said, "I don''t care what you think of, anyway, my sister is going to visit the Tru Empire, and you must ensure her safety. "


    "Yes, Saint Yakkel!"


    Several people looked helpless, but they had no choice but to follow them. What could they do?


    However, when that timees, let alone the eight of them, even ten more people will not be able to protect these two people?


    But these people could only say this, and the bitterness could only be buried in their hearts.


    Two yearster, it was revealed that the empire had once again undergone earth-shaking changes.


    Different from the previous situation, this time it is not the appearance that has changed. The area near the royal city is still the same as before. However, as the country besrger, many people begin to pour into the Tru Empire. To settle down, most of the merchants will actually choose to live in the royal city.


    As a result, this ce can make a lot of money relying on the real estate industry. Thend of the royal city has expanded at least three or four times from its original area. But even so, there is still an endless stream of people starting to move here. keep going.


    It''s as if this ce has be their ultimate goal in life.


    Now in this ce, the number of people gathered or living here can reach at least nearly 30 million. Such a huge number is impossible to reach in any city in the world. Even this number is already higher than that in the world. There are more people in any country that currently exists.


    The streets with peopleing and going are much more lively now than before.


    Here, you can see almost all prosperous cities with tall buildings everywhere, which ispletely refreshing.


    But two years have passed. Today, the South China Sea is no longer as deep and strict as it was originally called. The difference is that it is currently surrounded by the South China Sea. I don��t know when four space gates have been established. These gates They can quickly connect to each other in all directions. At least if there is a war in any ce, people from other directions can rush there as soon as possible.


    "Is this the Tru Empire? I didn''t expect it to look so big!"


    Pure white ships began to gradually appear in the harbor. Wei Mo looked at the ce with many tall buildings in front of her, and her three views werepletely refreshed.


    Until now, the only ce she had been in contact with was Marie Joa. After living in that ce for more than ten years, she had already had enough of the tranquility there.


    Marie Joa is not a ce that everyone can go to, and no one here is short of money, let alone a so-calledmercial street or other forms of situations.


    If you usually want to go shopping, you can just ask the ve to do it. There is no need to move your legs to go there.

 Chapter 542 Arrogant Visitor

    <h4>Chapter 542 Arrogant Visitor</h4>


    The first time he faced such a city, or the first time he faced such a lively ce, Wei Mo fell in love with it in just an instant.


    But so far, they have not disembarked. Everyone on the ship was very nervous. What they didn''t expect was that they didn''t encounter anything along the way and arrived directly at the Tru Empire. .


    "A ce where a group of untouchables live, what is there to envy? I really don''t know what you think?"


    Yakel said with a speechless expression.


    "Would you like to take off the ss cover on your head and feel the air? It feels sofortable to breathe here."


    Wei Mo jumped up, spun in the air, and said with a smile.


    Unlike ordinary girls, Wei Mo dresses up very close to ordinary people. She doesn''t want to be separated from others because of her identity. She wants to live a good and carefree life like ordinary people. His situation is simply a luxury for him as a Tianlong.


    That''s good. He is not particrly old now and does not need to stay in Marigio all the time. It is precisely because of this that she can have so much free time. But as the boat under her feet began to slow down, As they approached the shore, Wei Mo seemed to be a wild horse running wild, not wanting to enter with anyone behind him at all.


    "Wei Mo, can you stop running so fast?"


    Yakel shouted loudly from behind, but as the ship docked, so many people at the port were almostpletely attracted by this guy''s appearance.


    Two of the guards also jumped off the boat and started to move forward with Wei Mo.


    When the people at the port looked at Yakir like this, they all stopped one by one. Even those who were carrying heavy objects put down the things on their shoulders at the same time.


    "This person''s outfit seems to be that of a Celestial Dragon!!!"


    The person who spoke was a man who looked to be in his forties. Although the clothes he was wearing were not very tattered, they did look very dirty. It was obviously due to his work that he was in this situation.


    "Ke Lu, are you sure he is a Tianlong?" asked another worker standing next to him.


    "I am certain that he is a Celestial Dragon. This kind of clothing cannot be found elsewhere. We should kneel down quickly to save the other party from ming uster."


    Facing the Tianlong people, the worker named Kulu subconsciously put down the weight on his shoulders, and then slowly knelt down on the ground with his head on the ground, not even daring to lift it up.


    In fact, many people among them were also in this situation. The moment they saw the Tianlong people, they all knelt down. Itsted for about a minute, and then there was a man who looked somewhat elegant and luxurious, walking with noble steps. He walked over directly, looked at the people kneeling on the ground and yelled in confusion, "What on earth are you bastards doing? Why don''t you work hard and kneel here?"


    "Boss, the Celestial Dragons are here!"


    The worker closest to him felt that he could block Yakkel''s sight with the help of the sack next to him, so he tugged on his boss''s trousers and shouted softly.


    "Dragon people? Are you bastards out of your mind? Do you know where this is? This is the Toru Empire. Get up and get to work."


    The middle-aged boss roared loudly again.


    He thought it was something, but he didn''t expect that it was just a Tianlong who came. If this kind of thing had been left in his own country before, he would have been kneeling on the ground by now, but where is this ce now? How could a country that had gone to war with the World Government kneel down to this so-called Celestial Dragon again?


    If there is still one person in the world who can make him kneel down sincerely, it must be the king of their own country. Emperor Tru has long be the belief in the hearts of these people, no matter what the circumstances, They can protect the safety ofmon people or businessmen like them.


    But most of the workers kneeling here are actually from other countries who have just arrived in this country. Let��s not talk about whether they have a sense of belonging here. But just relying on the name of Tianlongren has already made them develop the habit for half their lives. It may be difficult to stand up straight again.


    Yakkel stood on the deck and watched all this, with a ferocious and angry expression, and then asked the guards next to him, "There are so many untouchables here who don''t kneel down after seeing me? Kill them!"


    "Ya...Ya...Akel Saint!! This is the Tru Empire. Under the influence of King Tru Land, the founders here do not have to kneel to anyone within the jurisdiction of the World Government. If we take action, we will definitely Something very bad has happened!��


    The so-called man next to him was stunned. He was not a super powerful person. It was already pretty good that he could survive in this ce. Why did he bother to provoke him?


    "What are you still doing?"


    Akel asked again, seemingly impatiently.


    But just when others were about to answer, arge group of people appeared here.


    There were about 15 of them in total, their steps were very neat, and they walked directly to the center of the crowd with serious faces.


    Looking around, there are at least hundreds of people kneeling on the ground at this moment. Although those people who have juste from other countries will have a ce to live, most of them want toe to thend of the royal city to fight. Here Not to mention anything else, at least the sry may indeed be slightly higher than elsewhere.


    But they have no experience. They only know that living in the Tru Empire is a kind of enjoyment, but they have never seen the tough attitude and power of the Tru Empire.


    After all, for many ordinary people, it is good enough to have heard of the Tru Empire. As for its previous glorious achievements, there is no way to verify these things.


    "What on earth are you guys doing? Is it possible that you were asked to kneel down when you came to the Taolu Empire? If you feel that kneeling here is more stable, we will not mind sending you back again."


    Among the patrol troopsing from the Tru Empire this time, the wretched one looked like a man in his 30s. After seeing this situation, he became very angry and shouted loudly to the person kneeling there.

 Chapter 543 The members set out again

    <h4>Chapter 543 The members set out again</h4>


    It''s not like he doesn''t understand anything, at least he already understood it the moment he came over and saw the Tianlong people appear.


    In today''s Tohru Empire, all kinds of people will appear. In fact, he was quite surprised when he saw the Tianlong people. These guys were fine. What on earth were they doing in this country?


    After taking a look at the group of people who were still unmoved, the leader began to walk another dozen meters towards the edge of the port, staring directly at the Draconian Yakor standing above the deck. Of course , the other party''s eyes were also fixed on him.


    "If you want to enter the Kru Empire, then follow the rules here and don''t show off your superiority. To tell you the truth, no one in the Kru Empire will be afraid of your majesty. If you do things here, You will receive the same treatment as others, and you may even directly face the risk of being killed!"


    The leader said in a low voice, looking directly at Yakkel.


    Even in a certain aspect, they don''t give the other party any good looks at all. This is no longer the country that allowed others to bully them. Even the Tianlong people who have been in a superior position since birth must abide by the rules when theye here. Thews of this country.


    Yakel was so angry that smoke started to rise from his ears. His face was red, his fists were clenched, and the pistol on his waist seemed to be ready to move.


    "Inform everyone that Nanniwa Port is the image and facade of our Tru Empire. If anyone kneels down at every turn, we will be directly expelled from the Tru Empire and will not be allowed to enter the Tru Empire for life!"


    The team leader shouted directly to the team members behind him once again, while actually looking at the spineless people who were still kneeling on the ground.


    He shouted directly and loudly in a high-pitched tone, and at the same time, he didn''t care about the face of the Tianlong people at all.


    "This bunch of untouchables!!"


    Yakeer stood on the deck and looked at the situation below. Many people kneeling on the ground had already gotten up. Although there were still a few uncontrolled people who were still kneeling on the ground, there were many people kneeling on the ground one after another. Shao was directly towed away by others, and the entire port returned to a busy state again.


    Yakor yelled this sentence through gritted teeth with hatred, and the guards in suits beside him could only lower their heads and remain silent.


    "Saint Yakkel, do we still want to go down and take a look?"


    The man in suit next to Yakel asked cautiously in a low voice, as if he was afraid that the other party would be angry.


    "Where are we going? Do you want me to be with these untouchables? And where is the navy here? Let the navye and destroy this country for me!"


    Yakel asked again angrily.


    "I''m sorry, I already reminded you when I first came in that the South China Sea area is out of the control of the world government and navy. For you, this may be the most dangerous ce in the world."


    "Bang!!!"


    As soon as the suit guard finished speaking, Yakir pulled out the pistol from his waist and shot him directly.


    Facing theirpanions who were lying there straight and with blood gushing out, none of the other guards dared to speak.


    But one of them has already clenched his fist in anger. In this ce in the South China Sea, as long as our people don''t talk to each other, if we beat this guy to death with one punch, then if we push it to the Tru Empire, there will be no one at all. Doubt anything.


    Perhaps since the two Yakels began to enter the South China Sea area, some people in this group have begun to have such evil ideas.


    But after all, the opponent''s identity is still a big knife hanging over their heads. Even though there is such a method, no one dares to take action.


    "Every day is full of nonsense, so why should I support you? You can''t even deal with a bunch of untouchables. It''s really a shame!"


    Yakel looked at the other people standing there with disgust, and also said with disgust. His eyes still retained the arrogance of being a Tianlong, and he did not regard them as people of the same level at all. Come and see, if they disagree, they will directly attack and kill the other party. Even if the people from the Tru Empire below see it, no one thinks there is anything wrong with it.


    But for Yakel, his sister has now entered the Tru Empire. Even though she is a pariah in his eyes and has no respect for him, she can only bite the bullet and start disembarking directly.


    It''s just that the incident just now has been quietly photographed by reporters. In his eyes, this is a unique big news. The Tru Empire''s treatment of the Tianlong people will also be a hot topic in the future.


    There is always no shortage of big news events. In the eyes of many reporters, the existence of the True Empire is essentially a ce where topics are constantly discussed.


    In the royal pce of Tru.


    "Mom, can you not leave?"


    In the backyard of the pce, a child who looked to be two or three years old hugged Robin''s thigh, clinging to it and yelling reluctantly.


    "Michelle, mom is just going out for a while and will be back soon. Just wait here and I will bring you something fun when the timees!"


    Robin patiently knelt down and stroked Michelle''s face, and said with a smile and affection.


    "I don''t want it! If it doesn''t work, how about I go with you?"


    Michelle suddenly grinned, looking at Robin expectantly.


    "Just tell me something, your daughter can''t be thrown away now, and you''re still sitting there!"


    Robin didn''t tell Michelle, but his eyes fell on Chang Nuo, who was sitting beside him, drinking tea leisurely, and asked with a bit of dissatisfaction in his tone.


    "Just go. The Endless will follow you anyway, so let her stay behind and send two people over to take care of her. Anyway, nothing special will happen!"


    Chang Nuo said lightly.


    "No, Michelle must stay here and study hard!"


    I originally thought that Robin would be happier because of this kind of thing, but who knew that she refused directly, with a tone that left no room for error.


    Michelle, a little girl, just stood there obediently, her eyes began to gradually sh with tears. Although she was a little reluctant to leave, she still said, "Mom must have something very important to do, otherwise she wouldn''t be able to do it." Abandon Michelle, but you muste back soon!"


    "Mom will do it!"


    Seeing Michelle''s appearance, Robin couldn''t control himself for a moment, and tears began to flow down.


    Chang Nuo was still sitting there, drinking tea leisurely.


    Two years have passed in the blink of an eye, and Robin now needs to continue to follow her pirate group toplete the remaining tasks. Now this is not just a simple task, but an exnation for her friends!

 Chapter 544 World Government Conference

    <h4>Chapter 544 World Government Conference</h4>


    After saying goodbye to each other, Robin left here directly. This time, the person in charge of escorting was still Anilu. He only needed to be sent to the Shampoo Inds where he originally set out. There was nothing left for him. Two years have passed since the mission. The current Straw Hat Pirates should have simr strength to the original plot. There is really no need to send people to follow them.


    For her, a new journey has just begun, but the same is true for the Tru Empire.


    Now everything is back on track, and everything will begin to be proven by force in theing time.


    "They''ve all left, why don''t youe out? Come over quickly and tell us about the current situation!"


    In the courtyard of the backyard, Chang Nuo still stayed here, sipping tea carefully. After everyone left, he shouted directly in an understatement.


    As soon as he finished speaking, a man wearing a mask appeared in front of him and lowered his head respectfully.


    "I haven''t been out of this ce for two years. Let me tell you about the situation outside now. And I''m curious about what the Navy and the World Government are doing now."


    Chang Nuo picked up a small cup of tea and drank it directly, then raised his head and looked at the other person and asked.


    "Your Majesty the King, the entire sea is rtively calm at present. Since the end of the war two years ago, the navy has not only not reached the level of two years ago, but its prestige and strength have seriously declined in the eyes of the people.


    After the war, less than a monthter, Marshal of the Navy Sengoku announced his abdication. The two generals of the Navy Headquarters Akainu and Aokiji fought in the New World for ten days and ten nights. In the end, Akainu won. Bing the current marshal of the Navy, Aokiji left the Navy directly after losing. The current specific situation is unknown. ording to reliable information, he has joined the ckbeard Pirates.


    Nowadays, all changes in the navy have been concentrated on the New World and the Great Route, and its control over the four seas has been reduced to a minimum.


    There is currently no news about the World Government, but judging from the situation in the past two years, there must be some big move behind the World Government, and there is already information about the World Government with at least 500 people in our Tru Empire. Personnel, it seems likely that the next step will be directed at us! "


    The masked man whispered.


    "It doesn''t matter at all, it''s just the target. Anyway, I''ve already guessed it, but I haven''t left this pce in the past two years, and I don''t know what the situation is like outside?


    Are the guys in the Whitebeard Pirates okay now? "


    Chang Nuo asked with a sneer.


    "Since two years ago, Edward Wilbur has begun to gradually hunt down the remaining members of the Whitebeard Pirates. So far, at least half of the more than 40 captains of the Whitebeard Pirates have died. In his hands, now the Whitebeard Pirates, led by Marco, have all begun to retreat!"


    "Ha! I didn''t expect this guy to be able to hold on. He hasn''t recognized the reality yet, but it doesn''t seem to matter."


    Chang Nuo said, slowly putting down the tea cup in his hand, slowly standing up with interest, and walked a few steps forward.


    Taking a deep breath and exhaling it slowly, Chang Nuo said seriously, "It seems that the real war is about toe, but I just don''t know who will start it first?"


    "Your Majesty the King, General Abona asked me to bring you a message before my subordinatese down. At present, the major forces seem to have begun to be restless. Do we need to directly start upying the Sihai area?"


    The masked man opened his mouth and asked.


    "Sihai? This kind of ce has no effect on us. It doesn''t make any difference whether it exists or not. Now it''s better to look at the reality clearly. In any case, the people from the World Government should probably jump out, right?" Changnuo said leisurely.


    "So what should we do next?"


    "What to do? Don''t do anything now. Nothing has been finalized yet. Why show off so early?"


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    "I understand! I will convey your meaning to General Abona next!" the mask said, and then began to respectfully speak to Chang Nuo again, "The main purpose ofing here this time is, half Months ago, the World Government had already sent an invitation for us to attend this year��s World Government Conference to discuss other matters.��


    "I know, but we can attend this year''s World Government Conference. Of course, I also want to see what those old men want to do."


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly. Although he had already started a war with the World Government, the two sides were now in a state of ipetence.


    It was even clear to each other that the strength between the two might be just one fuse away from each other to start a direct war. However, the World Government still sent an invitation to the meeting, which Chang Nuo actually did not expect.


    But since the invitation has been sent out, what''s the harm in going there next?


    "Has the time been set yet?"


    Chang Nuo turned his head and looked at the masked man and asked again.


    "On July 15th this year, there are still three months until the World Government meeting. Do we need to prepare for an early visit?"


    the masked man asked.


    "Preparation, this kind of thing must be prepared. Please continue to inform us that this time the world''s government meeting will be apanied by General Mozambique. The South China Sea will enter the second level of alert. During the meeting, No one will be allowed to enter the South China Sea area.


    Let the Nine Snake Ind side enter the windless zone for patrol, and the Tru Empire special forces and standing forces alternate to take over as soon as possible to connect the West Sea area. It seems that this meeting is definitely not as simple as imagined. Let''s wait and see when we get down. "


    Chang Nuo still kept a sneer on his face. After thinking about it for a moment, he decided toplete all the arrangements directly.


    In fact, as admirals of the navy, several of them were able to do this well. The only difference was that Chang Nuo could feel that what happened this time was unnatural.


    "My subordinates will go and notify you immediately!"


    The masked man said and disappeared here the next second.


    Today''s Tru Empire does not only have the four generals before, but the ratio is reduced ording to the actual distribution.


    As early as the beginning, they had already set the rules of the army. Each general could be responsible for 10,000 special forces and a steel battleship. However, with the current development, the Tru Empire has long beenpletely different from the past. Same.

 Chapter 545 New Army Regulations

    <h4>Chapter 545 New Army Regtions</h4>


    Before this rule was formted, the Tru Empire was just getting started. No one thought that the current development trend of the country would reach such a rapid level.


    The powerful high-tech capabilities and powerful reserve personnel have pushed the Tru Empire to the forefront one by one.


    Today''s Trul Empire has already started to redistribute it a year ago. The division of responsibilities in the army is actually simr to the previous regtions, but it is still formted ording to the previous scale and form.


    There are three lieutenant generals below the generals, three major generals below the lieutenant generals, almost this management model, and so on.


    Today, the seven new generals of the Toru Empire are indeed in line with the strength of the generals. Invisibly, the military strength of the entire Toru Empire has been greatly adjusted.


    The most important thing is that this division of positions has allowed many people who originally had no hope to work harder.


    Lieutenant general will be promoted to senior general. However, the following positions will undergo many adjustments. The scale ispletely different from before. Today, the military strength of the special forces under the Tru Empire has reached about 700,000, and the standing force has reached nearly two Around a million.


    Thebined poption of the entire Tru Empire is now close to more than 200 million. Coupled with the people who are constantly pouring into the Tru Empire from outside, the total poption is close to 300 million. Such a huge army is actually It already ounts for 70% of the expenses of the current Toru Empire.


    In other words, ording to the situation of the Jintru Empire, he has the ability and strength to go to war with any country or the world government anytime, anywhere. Even so, all these things still need to be carried out in an orderly manner.


    The essential needs of the entire world are also changing. This change is not limited to the world government and navy. The changes in pirates can also exceed everyone''s imagination.


    Since the end of the War on the Top, the Pirate Empress Hancock announced her retirement from the pirate ranks. Of course, she also let everyone know that this former Pirate Empress was actually the woman of Emperor Tru. In an instant, she waspletely separated from the pirates. differentiate.


    So far, no one has mentioned the name of the Pirate Empress at all, and it seems that she haspletely disappeared from this world.


    But the fact is that this is indeed the case. Nine Snake Ind has closed off contact with the outside world since the end of the war. The tens of thousands of people on the ind live the same life as Kongdao. Almost all their food supplies are provided by the Tru Empire. Special delivery.


    Although Nine Snake Ind still maintains its original living habits, and only women still live on the entire ind, the current rules do not prohibit men from entering. At least as far as the current situation is concerned, they live here. Most of the women got married and started careers with some people in the Tru Empire''s army. Whether it was for them or the Tru Empire, it ultimately created a win-win situation.


    The biggest remaining change should be Bucky the Clown. Just like in the original plot, he has been promoted to the Shichibukai. Now he can be said to have changed from a shotgun to a cannon.


    Sometimes, even the navy is quite afraid of the forces on the sea.


    Starting from the few hundred people that this guy originally brought out of the city, in just two years, he has gathered 40,000 to 50,000 people under hismand. Each of these pirates seems to have a bad brain, and theypletely control Ba Ji Fen is like a god. As long as there is an order, these people will go all out to get it done even if they die.


    It is as if he is the one who possesses the Psychic Devil Fruit, and his ability to control people is simply unmatched by others.


    over time.


    A monthter, the most lively ce now should be the Shampoo Inds. Straw Hats once again began to prepare to gather together. Robin''s appearance made her the third person toe to this ce.


    Today''s Shampoo Inds have undergone earth-shaking changes from before. At least the navy headquarters base was not far away. Although this is awless zone, at least the pirates whoe here will be more restrained.


    However, the naval headquarters base waspletely destroyed due to the war. The naval headquarters base in the new world was too far away. This led to the pirates who came here to really make this ce one by one. Awless zone.


    Various battles are taking ce here every day, and the demise of a certain pirate group is also taking ce every day. It is almost amon sight on the Shampoo Inds today.


    Robin had justnded on the ind. She was wearing a ck short skirt and her hair was loose. She only used a hairband to hold her hair up. The sexy short skirt and fair skin could make people stand out even though they were far apart. He immediately focused all his attention on her.


    Even after two years of changes, the Chambord Inds feel almost exactly the same as two years ago, and you can''t even tell the slightest difference at all.


    As soon as we got off the boat, Ind No. 41 appeared in front of us. Is it still the familiar appearance or everything it once was?


    "We have delivered you, then we will go back. You will probably need to go with yourpanions on the next road!"


    As soon as Robin jumped off the boat, Enel stood on the deck and said to her.


    "I know, His Majesty told me beforeing here, but thank you very much for sending me on this journey!"


    Robin showed a sweet smile. Even after being the imperial concubine for so many years, she didn''t have that arrogant aura in her body or in her bones at all. What she had was just a graceful and elegant temperament.


    After saying that, Robin started walking inside without looking back.


    Enelu was just like that. After taking a look at it, he started to order to return directly.


    It is impossible for the Tru Empire to participate too much in the future, but ording to the current name, it is enough. Two years have passed, and if they have experienced tragic lessons and have not made great progress in strength, then they deserve to take over. Can''t move forward aftering down.


    Now that everyone has been delivered, the rest of the things naturally have nothing to do with him. After going through so many things, Enel has now be a qualified general and can lead his troops to do what he wants. Things to do.


    Now he is wearing the clothes of a navy admiral, and his temperament looks quite elegant. As for his strength, what is his strength? Maybe people will be surprised until the day he shows it.


    It''s just that all that can be seen now is the back of him and the boat. One person and one boat sadly disappeared above the sea level, but in the near future, maybe he will really be able to leave his legend in this world.

 Chapter 546 Reunion Two Years Later

    <h4>Chapter 546 Reunion Two Years Later</h4>


    Returning to the Chambord Inds again, Robin looked at everything in front of him, especially the pirates in thiswless zone. Each one of them had already be a trulywless figure!


    Although this ce used to be full of pirates, and it was also awless zone, no matter what, the pirates on the street would not dare to directly use swords and guns. But these people I see now, three Groups of five walked directly on the street, looking at the people on both sides unscrupulously.


    Those who don''t know better think that they are really big pirates from the New World, but in fact they are just some crappy bastards.


    After two years, although all the scenes in front of him are still fresh in his memory, and even all the things that happened when he left here are still fresh in his mind, Robin did not show any signs of anger on the street or elsewhere. stay.


    The whole group began to move directly towards the center of the entire Chambord Inds. He believed that the first stop where his friends would gather would definitelye to this ce.


    After two years at the ckmail Bar, the que on it has somewhat faded, and perhaps it has long lost its former momentum.


    But when she got here, before the Robins could enter, a tall and thick-looking man flew directly over her head and flew out of the bar.


    Although there was nothing wrong with the other person who fell on the ground, the first thing he said after sitting up was, "This woman is only missing the cost of a bottle of wine! Really..."


    When he was about to say something next, an empty wine bottle hit him directly on the head. As the ss shattered to the ground, the big man rolled his eyes and fell to the ground unconscious.


    Robin looked at the other person lying on the ground, smiled slightly, then turned around and opened the door directly and walked towards the house.


    When he first entered, Xia Qi, who was sitting on the bar, was smoking a cigarette and staring at her.


    "Hey! I didn''t expect that the sixth person has already arrived. It seems that it won''t be long before all of you are here?"


    Xia Qi looked at Robin with interest and said.


    "ording to what you said, it seems that five have already arrived? I just don''t know which five have arrived?"


    "There are just a few of you, so you can just go and take a look for yourself when the timees. But when each of themes here, they will think that you will not show up. It is estimated that they will be very happy after seeing you. surprise?"


    Xia Qi said with a smile.


    "I wonder why you have such thoughts?" Robin asked with some confusion.


    "Isn''t it simple? As Princess Trudeau, your identity has determined everything. Have you ever found a wanted order for yourself since you joined them? Isn''t it right for them to have such thoughts and thoughts? ?��


    Xia Qi said.


    "Okay! May I ask where the Sunshine is now? I can just go over and take a look!"


    "Over there on No. 45, I guess all your friends are on the ship now!"


    "Thank you very much!"


    Robin smiled slightly, thanked him, and then turned around and opened the door to go out.


    Looking at the other party''s back, Xia Qi took another puff of the cigarette in her hand with great interest. At the same time, she was very interested in this woman. If she didn''t do this, Princess Tru, why would she drift with a group of pirates? Above the sea?


    She could guess some of these things. Without the permission of the Tru Empire, Xia Qi did not believe that as the imperial concubine, he could freely enter and leave the country.


    But all these things have nothing to do with him at all, but on the other hand, isn''t this ckmail bar already ckmailed by Emperor Tru?


    "Who came here just now?"


    While Xia Qi was still thinking, Lei Li walked out of the room. After arriving, he picked up a bottle of wine, poured himself a ss, tasted it with interest, and asked Xia Qi. Qi said.


    "Who else could it be? The Straw Hats!"


    Xia Qi looked at Lei Li with disgust and said.


    "Looking at your expression, you must be from the Tru Empire, right?"


    "What is that little guy''s n? Why do you want your women to get involved?" Xia Qi asked.


    "I don''t know the specifics, but after he came here, it seemed that everything was under his control, especially when he asked me to be Luffy''s master. In fact, I also have this point. He looked confused, but he didn''t expect that in just a few months, the war on top would break out.


    Now it seems that all this may have something to do with him! "


    Rayleigh''s face also darkened. In fact, he had been thinking about this matter in the past two years. This little guy, Emperor Tru, seemed to have everything in his hands, and even yed with everyone in the palm of his hand. Even people like them from Xianyun Yehe couldn''t escape the other party''s n in the end.


    "By the way, I''ve talked to you before. After the battle at the top, Emperor Tru actually went to war with the World Government. Do you think they will make any move next?"


    "It''s hard to say. We have always thought that the D n might rise, including the Revolutionary Army. But now it seems that things are not at all what we imagined. The Tru Empire is rising at the fastest speed. Two years ago we were able to confront the world government head-on, and now the situation is even more difficult to see through.��


    Reilly said.


    "You are right. This country has risen too fast. Now they have 11 generals, and I have investigated the strength of each one. It is indeed terrifyingly powerful. If nothing else happens, , they should be the ones who canpete with the Navy and the World Government next," Xia Qi said.


    "Isn''t this good? Anyway, it has nothing to do with us now. We are already so old. As people from the previous era, we should not get involved in their affairs anymore."


    Rayleigh suddenly felt relieved. After drinking a ss of wine, a smile gradually appeared on his face. Originally, he was very concerned about the affairs of the Tru Empire, but he still could not guess that the Tru Empire would let his imperial concubine join. What is the purpose of the Straw Hat Pirates? But now that I think about it, it��s true, what do these things have to do with me?


    But sometimes there are many mysteries in these things. Rayleigh knew that Red-haired Shanks chose Luffy, but what is the connection between them? Probably even Shanks himself doesn''t know.

 Chapter 547 Between Partners

    <h4>Chapter 547 Between Partners</h4>


    Robin came to the dock No. 45 that Xia Qi mentioned. In fact, they had never been here before. As for the Sunshine, how did it get here? It doesn��t matter anymore anyway.


    However, from a long distance away, you can already see the bright and new Sunshine, which has not changed at all from its original appearance, and is even the same as when they first went to sea.


    But when I got closer, I discovered that a body almost entirely made of machines, with a strange posture, was painting the boat, while talking and humming a song that others could not understand.


    "Franky, long time no see!"


    Robin stood not far from the boat and shouted to Franky who was painting.


    Hearing the sound, Franky twisted his head mechanically. When he saw the personing, he was first surprised, and then jumped directly to the ground.


    "Robin!!!"


    Franky''s eyes widened and he circled around Robin in disbelief.


    "Why are you so surprised?" Robin asked with a smile.


    "Speaking of inexperience, that''s impossible. We have been here several times, but to be honest, we thought you would nevere to our ship again. It feels really surprising."


    Franky said seriously.


    "Is that so? It seems like it''s because of my identity!" Robin asked.


    "Yes, you are the famous Concubine Tru. After experiencing the events of thest war, we all thought you would not participate again, but we didn''t expect you to actuallye."


    Franky said.


    "I heard that I am the sixth one toe. Who among the first ones came?"


    "Oh, you''re talking about this? The first one toe is Zoro, followed by Sanji and me, then Nami and Usopp. You are already here, and now only Chopper and Luffy are left."


    Franky said with a smile.


    "Chopper! If I had known I would have brought him with me when I came here!"


    "Where is Chopper?"


    After hearing this, Franky was even more shocked. Each of them flew to a different ce. This was what they learned when they first started gathering.


    It is rare to hear such words now, how could it not shock him?


    "Chopper is not at my ce, but he is in the South China Sea area. I have only visited once or twice, and Chopper doesn''t know that I have been there," Robin said.


    "That''s pretty good, at least with you staying there, he doesn''t have to worry about any safety issues!"


    Franky said with a smile.


    "Where have the other people gone?"


    "Sanji has already started to prepare to buy food ande back. Nami and Usopp seem to have gone shopping as well. As for Zoro, this guy probably doesn''t even know where he has gone," Franky said.


    "Haha! I didn''t expect Mr. Swordsman to still look like this after so many years!"


    Robin said with a smile. In fact, from the moment she stepped into the Chambord Inds, maybe this was the feeling of life she was pursuing.


    At least here, she can feel extremely rxed, and the chat between her partners is also so pleasant.


    All the sequences of development are almost consistent with the original plot of Zhang Dong. As of now, the rest has not changed at all.


    Thest one toe to this ce was Luffy. Just like in the plot, he was still sent here by the ship from the Nine Snakes Ind. The only difference is that everyone on that ind did not have any nostalgia and just sent people to the future. Just turn around and leave.


    The Chambord Inds also began to usher in its busiest time. In thiswless zone, with the arrival of pacifists, all pirates fell into panic.


    After this incident was over, the Straw Hats finally gathered again and began to dive underwater.


    In fact, not many people targeted them. Not to mention other things, just relying on Vice Admiral Garp''s rtionship, those who came over actually turned a blind eye.


    Even two yearster, ording to the strength of this group of people, just one general can kill them instantly.


    Not to mention that there are so many naval soldiers apanying them, the topic of household rtions can be discussed in any era and in any ce.


    Just after diving below the water, the group was finallypletely safe, and facing this unknown environment, everyone looked extremely surprised.


    What''s more important is that they met two yearster, which seemed to leave them with endless topics to talk about.


    "Everyone, I''m sorry that I didn''t take action these two years ago!"


    When everyone was gathering on the deck in the middle of the Sunshine, watching them talking andughing, Robin lowered his head and said with a bitter and sad look on his face.


    After all, before they dispersed two years ago, Robin watched them all being shot away one by one. For this reason, he did not take any action, but could only watch quietly.


    So when they gathered together this time, Robin had already thought about what he wanted to do most beforeing, and he must give priority to apologizing.


    But when she said this, everyone in the group froze on the spot.


    "Robin!" Nami shouted softly.


    "We are all partners. Now that we are together, there is no need to mention the past."


    Luffy said directly with a grin.


    "Yes, it''s all done, there''s no need to mention it again!" Chopper said with a smile on his face.


    Others stayed where they were and didn''t say much else.


    "I''m really sorry!"


    As she spoke, Robin''s tears flowed down. Then she raised her head, looked at everyone again and said, "You all know my identity. Although I have be a pirate, I don''t have that much freedom. Just like the wanted bounty. Like the order, no matter what I do, I will not be wanted, but simrly, I cannot participate in many things that directly confront the navy or the world government.


    Once we take action, arge-scale war will most likely break out between the Tru Empire, the Navy, and the World Government. I hope you can understand. "


    "That''s it, I understand."


    Luffy looked serious for a moment, then grinned and said with a big smile.


    In his impression, he still remembered the moment when the war started. Emperor Tru''s momentum was definitely the most powerful one he had ever seen.


    "Robin, don''t say such words in the future. We are all partners and can understand each other. Many things are beyond our control. We all know this. Many times, we are not free. Perhaps we only have experience. You have to experience it to experience it.��


    Sanji looked at Robin and said seriously.

 Chapter 548 Retirement Life

    <h4>Chapter 548 Retirement Life</h4>


    From a certain point of view, Sanji may be the one who can understand Robin best. He is among the big forces and has a lofty status, but many times, whether it is his ideas or methods, he is simply beyond his capabilities. decided.


    In a word, one action may lead to catastrophe, which is almost the mostmon among big forces.


    "Now that we have all gathered together again, there is no need to mention the past things again. Since we can be partners, we should understand each other. There is no need to say more. We can sit down and chat. Talk about what we have experienced in the past two years."


    Luffy said with a grin, but when Sanji heard this, something bad seemed to appear in his mind, and he immediately yelled "No!"


    For a moment, everyone''s eyes were focused directly on him. Robin''s incident passed quietly like this, and no one paid attention to everything that had happened before.


    in the new world.


    On one of thergest navy warships, two old men who looked older were fighting over each other to eat the noodles in the bowls. Judging from the thick pile of bowls stacked next to them, , you can already clearly understand the purpose between the two.


    After retirement, Sengoku and Garp have lived the leisurely life they imagined, and although they cannot leave the navy, such a life is already veryfortable andfortable inparison.


    Although they are staying on a naval battleship, the two of them do not live like other people, patrolling everywhere when they have nothing to do. On the contrary, it is this kind of rxed andfortable life that makes them wander around on the sea without anything to do.


    Even though they have retired, their status can still prevent anyone from giving orders. Even Akainu, who is now the marshal of the navy, almost never gives tasks to the two of them unless it is something that cannot be solved and needs to be done. Use two strong men to suppress the formation.


    "Warring States, it seems that I won again this time, hahahaha!!!"


    Garp looked at the pile of rice bowls on his side, then took a look at the situation on the Sengoku side, and then shouted with a loudugh.


    "What''s so good about you old guy? It''s just started now, and I haven''t even filled my stomach yet, so where is the question of winning or losing?" Warring States said angrily.


    However, the next burppletely betrayed him. Looking at this look, Garp couldn''t help but mocked and said, "If it doesn''t work, it won''t work. Why hold on? Don''t let your old bonese backter." Because it��s not good to eat until you��re stuffed to death.��


    "Old man? I''m very strong now. Do you want to pick a ce and have a fight?"


    Sengoku stood up and asked angrily.


    "Just fight, who is afraid of whom?"


    Garp also stood up directly, with the same angry look on his expression, and the two stared at each other eye to eye.


    "Marshal Warring States, Lieutenant General Garp, thetest newspaper has arrived. Do you two want to take a look?"


    Just when the two of them were at war with each other, a soldier wearing a navy justice uniform ran over tremblingly.


    Looking at the appearance of the two of them, they were actually used to it. This scene would appear almost every day, but even so, the aura exuded by the two powerful men still made them feel a little small.


    "Wait until I finish reading the newspaper and then have a good fight with an old guy."


    Warring States said, and then directly grabbed the thick stack of newspapers that the soldier had brought over.


    But the content disyed on the first page of the newspaper already made him want tough.


    Looking at Garp''s current expression, he said with a mocking look on his face, "Garp, you guy, your grandson has already started to show up, and it looks a bit lively."


    "Nani? Show me quickly."


    Garp shouted, and then he was about to grab it. Sengoku seemed to know his thoughts in advance, and suddenly turned around to avoid Garp''s outstretched hand.


    Although the two men continued to argue, Marshal Sengoku''s eyes did not change as he stared at the contents of the newspaper.


    After a while, when he saw a certain piece of content inside, he stopped avoiding Garp''s outstretched hand and allowed the other party to grab it.


    After Garp watched for a while, Sengoku asked with a serious expression, "Why is Robin involved again?"


    Without thinking too much, Garp also saw this scene, and he was a little surprised when he saw it.


    In fact, for those who knew Robin''s identity, almost all of them showed surprised expressions when they saw this scene.


    No one would believe that Princess Trudeau, who was currently a powerful force in the world, would actually participate in the activities of a small pirate group.


    This situation is a bit unbelievable. Even if they set off together before, maybe they could find a reason in their hearts to get over it, but now it ispletely different.


    "What on earth does Emperor Tru want to do?"


    Garp said to himself.


    "In any case, Robin''s reappearance has proven that the Tru Empire definitely wants to use people like your grandson to achieve what it wants to achieve? But what is this purpose?"


    Warring States said.


    "We have discussed this matter a few years ago, and there was no conclusion at that time. Sometimes I really don''t understand what that guy, Emperor Toru, is thinking about every day? People like Luffy are so low in strength, for their Toru Empire What role can it y?��


    Garp also asked.


    "It seems that there is really no better conclusion now. In short, I don''t know whether it is good or bad. But having said that, the Tru Empire has indeed be the number one enemy of the Navy and the World Government. I guess it won''t be long before... The possibility of war between the two sides is very high!��


    The Warring States Marshal said.


    As a former naval marshal, he is very familiar with the current naval situation. Although he has retired, he can still see through the inner situation at a nce when ites to military and urban matters.


    At least he can see clearly that a war will definitely break out between the Tru Empire, the Navy and the World Government, but where is the key point of this war? In the two years after his retirement, he and Karp had discussed this kind of thing more than once.


    The reason why the Navy wants to concentrate all battlefields in the New World isrgely rted to the Tru Empire.


    Under the current situation, if the Tru Empire wants toe to the New World, it currently has to go through the World Government''s Marie Joa. For the Navy, this is equivalent to directly pushing the World Government to the front.

 Chapter 549 Akainu’s anger

    <h4>Chapter 549 Akainu��s anger</h4>


    Concentrating all the power on the New World will give the Navy a great deal of control over the New World. This is also crucial for them. It will also be able to stabilize the New World because the Whitebeard Sea The bandits disappeared, causing chaos.


    The two old guys on the boat were preparing to have a big fight in a tense atmosphere just now, but after talking about this topic, they sat there gloomily twice.


    Although these things have nothing to do with them, once a war breaks out, these two people will definitely not be able to stay out of it.


    "Sengoku, you have always said that a war may break out between the Toru Empire and the World Government. Where do you think the key point is?"


    Garp asked seriously.


    Although he is strong, he is definitely not as good as Warring States in terms of brains. Sometimes, Garp will first ask himself, his old partner who has been with him for decades, before doing anything.


    Of course, Warring States is not omnipotent. After thinking for a while, he began to say leisurely, "I''m not sure yet, but now the strength of the Tru Empire has grown a lotpared to two years ago. They seem to be waiting for an opportunity. The attack and duel between the True Empire and the World Government in the top battle had alreadyid a certain foundation for the subsequent war.


    I think the most likely chance of war will be at this world government meeting. "


    "World Government Conference?"


    "Don''t tell me you don''t know yet. Those old guys specially invited the Toru Empire to participate in this World Government Conference. In the previous conferences, the Toru Empire just sent people to participate, but this time It was revealed that the empire responded that Emperor Toru would personally participate, so the exciting scenes are likely to be within these two months."


    Warring States said.


    "If this is the case, it is very likely that it is indeed a very exciting scene, and it will probably give Akainu a headache."


    Garp smiled and then said leisurely.


    What happened this time was just analyzed by the two of them here, but they are definitely not the only ones who can analyze this situation. There are also many powerful people and people with outstanding brainpower in the World Government.


    Even the current Admiral Akainu can guess that this world government meeting will encounter many things. In fact, the other party is indeed like this now.


    This World Government Conference ispletely handed over to the Navy for security management. However, Akainu, the current Marshal of the Navy, is sitting in the office with a cigarette and feeling dizzy, looking seriously at the need to attend the World Government Conference this time. list.


    These are the people from various countries who are preparing to participate this time, but the above content really makes him a little confused.


    The first one on the list is the Tru Empire. In their cognition, this is thergest and most restless existence.


    What''s more important is that they don''t have the ability to deal with them directly. However, the second-ranked fish-man ind is actually the fish-man ind that stays on the bottom of the deep sea. Two years ago, when the war broke out on the top and Whitebeard died, the fish-men The indpletely announced the establishment of diplomatic rtions with the Tru Empire in the South China Sea.


    Today, the g belonging to the Toru Empire is still hanging at the entrance to Fish-Man Ind. This thing is much more useful than the protection of a pirate group.


    As long as the pirate group passes here, no one will dare to attack the Fishman Ind. After all, it is 10,000 meters under the deep sea. There are nearly 4,000 special forces and standing troops of the Toru Empire here. people.


    This is not only used to deter pirates from the outside world, but more importantly, it can maintain the security of Fishman Ind itself.


    This is the most troublesome scene for Akainu, because he not only has to face dangers from the outside world, but also faces how to manage those Tianlong people so that they will not attack these people on Fish-Man Ind.


    After all, with the power of the navy, there is no way to restrain those Tianlong people. As the marshal of the navy, he can avoid those scum! But others can''t.


    The World Government Conference was still in Marigioa. No matter what, it was almost impossible to avoid the Draconians. This was a scene that gave him quite a headache.


    Although the purpose of his research has always been to keep this world conference safe, does this dangerous factore from inside or outside? Even now, he still didn''t dare to be sure.


    Looking at the long stack of lists in his hand, after finishing the eggnt in his mouth, Akainu suddenly mmed the list in his hand directly on the table.


    "These bastards!"


    Akainu stood up angrily and cursed angrily, but this was the only way he could vent his inner dissatisfaction.


    But after venting his anger, he could only lower his head again and look at the list this time. His frown could still make people see his anxiety at this moment.


    The meeting of the World Government is held every four years, but every matter is almost the biggest headache for the Navy, because in every previous year, the Tianlong people always have toe up with something more or less, which time again? If it doesn''t make their heads hurt, it can bepletely unmanageable.


    If ordinary people were like this, even a punch to death would have no effect, but these scumbags were born to stand on top of everyone''s heads. This was the main reason why they were difficult to restrain.


    The reason why this time is the biggest headache for him is that Emperor Tru will personally participate in this world government meeting. If any bad-minded Tianlong people jump out to stir up trouble again, even if it is really in front of everyone If the Celestial Dragons are killed in front of people, how can the navy be managed?


    It is estimated that even the World Government may directly settle the matter because of this matter. Otherwise, a war can really break out directly with the Tru Empire?


    This was the main reason why he saw through the matter. This time, the safety that the Navy was responsible for was not an external matter. He only had to be responsible for the scumbags of the Tianlong people not to cause trouble, and that was already a thank you to them.


    Just when Akainu felt that this was a big deal, a Celestial Dragon was ying happily in the Tohru Empire.


    Looking at everything on the street, Wei Mo felt extremely fresh and curious.


    Especially the snack stalls that were right next to each other. When she directly picked up the snacks on one of the stalls, looked at it curiously, and tried to take a bite, then the taste hit his taste buds directly. open.


    Under the gaze of the stall owner and the other stall owners, Wei Mo stuffed the food into his mouth one after another.


    His mouth was full and he was talking iprehensible words.


    You have already eaten like this. How can others hear what you say?

 Chapter 550 Do you want to start a war?

    <h4>Chapter 550 Do you want to start a war?</h4>


    There are at least a dozen or twenty vendors lined up here, and almost everyone''s eyes have been focused on this ce.


    Not to mention the small vendors like them, even the two men in suits following Wei Mo couldn''t help but twitch the corners of their mouths. They had never seen the Tianlong people behave like this.


    "What are you selling here?"


    Wei Mo happily jumped to another stall and asked curiously.


    The main thing is to see this kind of glittering food on the other side of the stall. Just one look at it makes people drool uncontrobly.


    "This is the golden fish invented by our empire. It is supplemented by various dense materials. It has this color after it is made into a finished product. The taste is not very good. Little girl, if you are interested, you can taste one directly. ."


    The stall owner said, after all, a little girl can be apanied by two men in suits, and coupled with the quality of the clothes the other party is wearing, no matter how you look at it, you can be sure that the other party is definitely a rich man.


    So now I don''t worry about how much the other party eats. As long as she is willing, she canpletely let go and taste it.


    In the end, Wei Mo couldn''t resist the temptation. She drooled and pinched a piece. After putting the food into her mouth, a sense of happiness instantly poured into her brain.


    ��It��s delicious!��


    Wei Mo said with stars in her eyes. These foods were something he had never tasted before. Maybe what he ate every day was much better than this, but this was the first time she tasted food of this taste.


    Such things on small vendors are something that big shots like them can''t even see, let alone eat.


    After all the excitement, she had tasted almost all the food stalls lined up side by side. She patted her belly with some satisfaction and was still burping in her mouth. It was really hard to imagine her. Being able to have a rtionship with the arrogant Tianlong people.


    "Hello, distinguished guest, you have spent a total of 12,000 beli this time!"


    "You spent a total of 8,000 beli on my side!"


    "9000 Baileys..."


    ��


    Seeing that Wei Mo, who was a guest, had eaten and drank enough, the stall owners began to quote their prices one by one, with smiles on their faces. This woman alone had brought them so much food today. It��s a pretty good profit, and for this group of people, it��s as good as God.


    "Bailey???"


    Wei Mo looked at them with some confusion, and then asked curiously in a low voice, "Do I still have to pay for food?"


    ��Nani??????��


    The bosses of these hawkers were collectively surprised. What kind of brain circuit did this little girl have? After eating so much, is it possible that you still don��t want to pay?


    But even though the other party said this, the owner of one of the small vendors still smiled and said, "Guests, of course you need to pay for food. After all, this is how we make a living. If you don''t pay, the police will arrest you." Yo."


    In the eyes of the vendors, Wei Mo was just a half-year-old girl. Even though she was ten or twenty years old, her social experience was obviously simr to that of a child.


    Even with such an innocent and cute expression on the other side, they would not say anything too extreme.


    After all, when the other party first came in, looking at the bracelet on the other party''s wrist, it was obvious that the other party was not from his country at all. In addition, the color of the bracelet did not change at all, so that was okay. , indicating that either the other party is stupid, or they really don��t know about this kind of thing.


    After a long time of experience, these small vendors in the Tru Empire have already learned to distinguish whether the other party is really stupid or fake by the color of the bracelet.


    But just when Wei Mo was hesitating and at a loss, Yaker and his people rushed over at this moment.


    He still wears the ss cover with the Celestial Dragon logo on his head. Even from a distance, outsiders can recognize his identity and appearance.


    Yakeer started to walk over slowly with a serious face. When he saw his sister''s appearance, he had always maintained a serious and disdainful face, but the next second he suddenly showed up like a pug. smiled.


    "Wei Mo, why are you running so fast? My brother almost couldn''t find you. You said that if you run away and get lost, how can I exin to those two old guys? Don''t they insist on half of my life? Old fate?"


    Yakeer looked at Wei Mo with aggrieved expression and said.


    "Who told you to run so slowly? It''s just that the food here is really delicious, but they just said that they actually charge money for food. I don''t seem to understand this."


    Wei Mo was still talking excitedly before, but as he spoke, he began to feel aggrieved.


    Hearing this, Yakkel obviously felt that his sister was not that happy. She was still smiling, but her face turned cold instantly, and she raised her head angrily and looked at the vendors.


    "A bunch of untouchables, how dare you make my sister angry!"


    Yakel instantly felt furious, then looked at the people following him, looked seriously and shouted again, "Kill them?"


    Each of these vendors looked like fools, but when their eyes focused on the bracelet on this guy''s wrist, it was already glowing red, which showed that this guy really had murderous intentions.


    But where is this? In the royal city of the Tru Empire, even among them, as ordinary people, no one was timid at all.


    The guards who followed Yakeer all looked at each other and still stood where they were.


    Seeing this situation, Yakkel was angry and instantly pulled out a delicate pistol from his waist, and pointed it at the owner of a small vendor. But just when he was about to pull the trigger, something came from nowhere. One person conveniently grabbed the small pistol in his hand.


    With just a little force, the originally delicate pistol turned into a piece of shriveled scrap metal.


    "The Tru Empire is here, and you Tianlong people cannot be allowed to act recklessly here."


    A picture appeared. A man with a square face who looked very capable was looking at the other party seriously.


    Not far away, a fast team was running towards this side.


    "Asshole! You..."


    "You want to start a war?"


    The men in all directions asked with sneers on their faces.


    As a soldier, in addition to obeying orders and ensuring the safety of the country, the biggest remaining thought should be to participate in the war, so as to get the honor that belongs to him as a soldier. Now, which soldier does not know the desires of the Tru Empire? They are just finding a point of conflict between them. Now, if the other party dares to make any move, he doesn''t mind killing the other party on the spot.

 Chapter 551 Leave this bird place

    <h4>Chapter 551 Leave this bird ce</h4>


    Today''s South China Sea area has long be a world of one side, with strong strength and nowhere to release it. Each one has already expanded and is no longer needed.


    "I''m very sorry. It''s my brother who made you angry, but it''s all my fault. I hope you won''t me me!"


    After Wei Mo heard this, he immediately realized the seriousness of the matter. The other party knew clearly that they were Tianlong people, but their final attitude was still the same.


    This reminded her of what her parents told her when she first started traveling, "You can go anywhere, but don''t go to the South China Sea countries. For us Tianlong people there, there is no difference from ordinary people."


    Now these words have beenpletely confirmed. Even the Celestial Dragons who have always been in a superior position are inevitably threatened by others at this moment.


    So under such circumstances, Wei Mo could only say this, otherwise she couldpletely believe that the other party was not joking at all.


    "Wei Mo, why do you need to beg these despicable humans?"


    Yakkel asked.


    "Brother, don''t say anything now!"


    Wei Mo''s eyes were already full of tears, and his big blurred eyes were staring at Yakeer. He didn''t dare to let the other party do too much, otherwise the scene he would face next would probably make them disappear like this. it''s here.


    "The little girl is quite nice, but you need to know that this is the Tru Empire, not your world government or other countries. Here, no one is superior, and no one is inferior. Everyone Everyone''s status is equal, and they are all working hard for themselves and their families, so no one is noble and no one is humble, at least that is the case in the Tru Empire today."


    The square-faced man looked at Wei Mo and said seriously.


    He felt quite good about this little Tianlong girl. Although he had never seen what a Tianlong looked like before, in this first contact, apart from the fact that the man gave him a bad impression, this little girl still Pretty good.


    After finishing speaking, the square-faced man began to look at the group of men in suits behind Yakkel, and his expression became serious again.


    Then, before anyone else could speak, he said again, "When youe to the Tru Empire, I hope you can abide by the rules of the Tru Empire, especially don''t cause trouble in my area!"


    "Pay!"


    One of the men in suits who followed Yakir turned his head and roared lowly at the others behind him.


    At this time, no one dared to bezy anymore. They hurriedly stepped forward to ask about the price, and then directly threw out a stack of Baileys without even looking at the mary amount on them.


    After seeing this scene, the men in all directions looked at them and sneered, and then shouted loudly to the group of people who had just run over, "Retreat!"


    After the people left, Wei Mo suddenly breathed a sigh of relief, and then patted his chest.


    "Brother, can you please stop acting like this wherever you go? You really scared me to death just now, do you know?"


    Wei Mo looked at Yakel helplessly and said.


    "Hmph! Do you think they really dare to take action?"


    Yakkel still maintained a look of perseverance.


    It''s just that he wears a ss cover on his head. Although his mouth is very tough, his body has already softened.


    "Oh~, let''s not talk about this anymore. Now that we are here, the food here is really delicious. Do you want to try it?"


    Wei Moughed directly, ran forward and took Yakel''s arm and asked.


    "I don''t want to eat the food of these untouchables. Let''s finish shopping and leave this ce!"


    Yakel said.


    His biggest thought now is to leave here quickly, not even wanting to stay for a second longer. As a Tianlong who has always been in a superior position, he has been scolded twice by others when he first came to the Tru Empire.


    The key is that in this situation, he can''t refute the physical honesty and fear at all, which has already made him show enough impatience here.


    Not to mention him, even the people following him had the same idea. Why would he, a Tianlong man, have to provoke each other for no reason? He was used to being arrogant and domineering in other ces, but when he came to this ce, he still... This bird looks like this.


    So they are eager to leave here quickly, go to other countries to show off their power, or do other things, but no matter what the situation, they will not care about safety.


    "Brother, before we came out, you had promised to take me to see the world with you, but it has only been a few days since we came out, and you seem to be impatient already. Do you not love Wei Mo at all?"


    Wei Mo suddenly looked aggrieved and said.


    "ha??"


    The corner of Yake''s mouth suddenly twitched again. After thinking for a while, he could only sigh and said helplessly, "Okay, okay, let''s just visit the Tru Empire this time. Brother promises that we will never do it next time." It��s okay to cause trouble, right?��


    "Okay, okay! Then we are going to have a good meal here. I heard that thend of the Tru Empire Royal City is currently thergest financial venue in the world. Not only does it have a lot of delicious food, but there are also many fun ces. !��


    Wei Mo said with some excitement, then immediately turned to look at the vendors, and asked sincerely, "Everyone, do you know if there is anything interesting in thend of King Tru City?"


    Now the little girl just now had a pretty good attitude, and she also spent so much with them. One of the vendors in his forties who was nearest to him said directly and enthusiastically, "There are a lot of fun things here in the Tru Empire." In this area, except that there is no casino, you can see almost any entertainment facilities. If you want to live, you can also directly choose the Imperial Hotel not far ahead. For entertainment, there will be many of your favorite facilities in the direction of Dongcheng. It is estimated that they can better meet your needs."


    "Wow!! You know so much, thank you very much."


    Wei Mo said with a smile.


    But after she finished speaking, she immediately started to pull Yakel''s arm, and quickly started running in the other direction with the man in the suit following behind her.


    She couldn''t wait to know what fun things there were here. After all, the Toru Empire was his first stop after leaving Mariejoia. She had been trapped in Mariejoia, and she had no idea about anything in the outside world. I feel extremely curious.


    All this may not be because she is ignorant or inexperienced in the world, but maybe it is just her yearning and longing for that kind of freedom.

 Chapter 552 Defense of Fish-Man Island

    <h4>Chapter 552 Defense of Fish-Man Ind</h4>


    Deep sea bottom.


    The Sunshine had already encountered the same situation as before, but no matter what, Straw Hat finally arrived in front of Fish-Man Ind after a while.


    The only thing was that the situation was exactly the same as before. This time they still passed through the bubble to reach Fish-Man Ind, and did not enter from the gate of Fish-Man Ind at all.


    After entering from here, if there was no blessing from the protagonist''s halo in the world, they would have sunk to the bottom of the sea long ago.


    Just relying on the peripheral defense of Fish-Man Ind was enough to annihte their entire army. Under the deep sea, it was even more impossible to reach the location of Fish-Man Ind after the coating on the hull disappeared.


    The structure of Fishman Ind is divided into threeyers. The firstyer is an air structure, which can instantly break the coating of a coated ship. However, the secondyer is filled with a deep sea nearly 100 meters wide. The sea pressure here and the outside world They are exactly the same, and they can all be buried under the sea in an instant.


    But the reality may be that it was such an ident. One by one, they appeared unharmed and directly within the scope of Fish-Man Ind.


    Although everyone passed out on the shore, everyone arrived directly, and even a lifeless light signal appeared on the beach unharmed.


    However, in the Dragon Pce City at this moment, King Neptune was sitting on it. Now that two years have passed, he looks even more bloated.


    Even more iprehensible, he asked a man sitting below wearing the uniform of a Vice Admiral of the Tru Empire, "Lieutenant Admiral Silo, why did the Tru Empire help a group of pirates?"


    "King Neptune, there are many things that His Majesty the King himself has nned. There are too many things that we cannot understand, so as long as everything is done ording to His Majesty the King''s instructions, it will never happen. Any problems arise."


    Si sat there and said seriously.


    He is the person sent by the Toru Empire to be responsible for the security of the entire Fish-Man Ind. In fact, the troops of the Toru Empire stationed here are not particrlyrge. To be more precise, as humans, the people in the Toru Empire are not special. Although there were about four to five thousand troops sent over, the majority were almost all fishmen and mermaids from their Fishman Ind.


    These troops specially trained by the Tru Empire are simply not on the same level as the actual troops on Fish-Man Ind.


    In the past few years, King Neptune haspletely felt the power of the Tru Empire. He only hung the other party''s g at the entrance of Fish-Man Ind, and the time has been reduced in two years. Most of the mermaids have escaped. At least within the past two years, the number of mermaid disappearances on the Fishman Ind, a ce under 10,000 meters deep in the sea, has dropped by at least 90%pared to previous years.


    Previously, this ind was under the jurisdiction of the Whitebeard Pirates. At that time, they did not ask for any return. This time, Trudy Stock also did not require any return. It was just from the Fish-Man Ind. Recruiting troops, but whether to go or not depends on one''s own volition.


    The total poption of Fishman Ind is 5 million, and the number of people who have settled in the Tru Empire or joined the army is now almost 100,000. However, for King Neptune, this poption can provide exactly the same security as now in the future. As a result, he is definitely the willing type.


    After hearing Shiloh say that this situation about these pirates was actually ordered by Emperor Tru, the puzzled expression on his face disappeared in an instant.


    They are 10,000 meters below the sea. Normally, they get almost no news about the situation above the sea. Unless they encounter newspapers brought down from the sea by some pirates, this can be regarded as a good way to understand the situation in the outside world. .


    "So that''s it, I understand!"


    King Neptune said.


    "After all, this time I came from the Tru Empire. His Majesty the King specifically asked me to tell you that the Fish-Man Ind sea base has been established in the South China Sea area, which at least allows the people of the Fish-Man Ind to enter and leave freely. On the inds in the South China Sea.


    The space portal can also be used by people on your side. Of course, you only need to abide by the regtions for outsiders established by our country, and His Majesty the King specially invited Princess White Star to go there. "


    Si said with a smile.


    "Is that so? But we still need to ask Bai Xing''s opinion on this kind of matter, but I think she won''t have any objections. He wanted to go to the sea to see the sun a long time ago, but he just didn''t know if it was safe... "


    "You can rest assured about safety matters. Don''t you still believe in the strength of the Tru Empire? The establishment of diplomatic rtions between Fishman Ind and the Tru Empire did not take ce in a day or two, and our King also attaches great importance to this!"


    Sillo said while still smiling.


    Simrly, he can also understand King Neptune''s thoughts very well. Aftering to this ce for so long, he knows very well what Princess White Star means to this king. Although he has three sons, he only dotes on his youngest daughter. As a father, he can understand such worries.


    "Don''t get me wrong, Lieutenant General Xi Luo. What I''m worried about is that Bai Xing has never been out of Fish-Man Ind. If she suddenly goes out, I''m really afraid that she won''t be able to adapt!"


    Neptune quickly began to exin with a smile. The other party had already talked about the establishment of diplomatic rtions between the two countries, and it was obvious that the topic had been raised to a serious level.


    "This matter can be discussedter. Of course, Princess White Star''s opinion should be respected. The Fish-Man Ind in the South China Sea has been established. Even if King Neptune goes there in person, His Majesty the King will not have any objections.


    It��s just that there are other things to talk about this time. The King��s Underground summoned me back this time to ask me toe over and discuss it with you. The Straw Hats have juste out after two years, so they want to use the venue on Fish-Man Ind. Give them some training and see what level their strength has reached in the past two years? Can they bear His Majesty��s expectations for them? "


    Cillo said.


    "This is absolutely no problem, but I just don''t know what His Majesty Emperor Tru needs to do with Fish-Man Ind?"


    King Neptune asked.


    "We need those guys in your prison. They are of no use anyway. It would be in line with His Majesty the King''s consideration to take them out!"


    Si directly picked up the wine ss in front of her and spoke calmly.


    His words seemed to be like dealing with his own family affairs. At least he could be sure that Neptune would never have any objections to such matters. In the past two years, he had already set all the limits of these people. Find out clearly.

 Chapter 553 The Statue of Emperor Tru on Fishman Island

    <h4>Chapter 553 The Statue of Emperor Tru on Fishman Ind</h4>


    At least for Neptune, there were several guys in the prison, and he had already wanted to kill them himself, especially those who had targeted his princess. Are they alive or dead? Neptune would have absolutely no objections.


    It turns out that a few years ago, the Toru Empire had already helped the Fishman Ind side and captured the people from the Fishman Bay who assassinated Princess Itohime. Everything they did was done smoothly, even the special The poisoning incident when Emperor Lu visited Fishman Ind was also handled by these people at the same time.


    Therefore, the Tru Empire directly cooperated with the Fishman Ind to carry out various eradication of those people in Fisherman''s Harbor.


    For Fish-Man Ind, this simply erased all the pain from their dark side.


    Of course, the Tru Empire does not do this for free. At least among the murloc armies of the Tru Empire now, nearly 80% are from those murloc harbors.


    Among other areas of Fish-Man Ind, the Straw Hats have already begun to gather here.


    They were all surprised by how they arrived. After all, they all fainted on the beach when they first arrived.


    But after they all gathered together, familiar people also appeared here.


    The former beautiful mermaid, the protagonist who directly led to the beating of the Celestial Dragons in the Shampoo Inds, the mermaid Kemi also appeared here at the same time.


    Even though two years had passed between them, they had not seen each other, but the level of familiarity suddenly emerged.


    When they first met, Luffy, as the captain, couldn''t help but shouted worriedly, "Is everyone okay?"


    "Everyone is here, at least it seems like nothing is going on now!"


    Sanji opened his mouth and said.


    Although they separated into two waves, they are now gathered together again. After all, there are only a few people in the whole group, and the numbers of all the people can be aligned at a nce.


    "I''m not talking about you, why don''t you open the good door of Fish-Man Ind, but choose to enter from other ces?"


    Kemi came here with Sanji and a few others, so looking at the appearance of these people, she asked with a look of confusion.


    "Kemi, it''s lucky to have you, otherwise we don''t even know if we would be able to gather together?"


    Nami said excitedly.


    "Tell me, it''s true that you are lucky enough to be able to survive. It''s as if you are favored by God. You can still survive aftering from such a ce. In fact, even us mermaids don''t dare to pass through the bubble. Maybe they all have it.��


    Kemi said with a puffed mouth.


    "Haha~!! Nothing is wrong now. Since everyone is okay, we can start our adventure on Fish-Man Ind."


    Luffy said with a grin.


    "Aren''t there a lot of mermaids?"


    "Sanji, you can''t think about these things now, or you will die."


    Usopp looked at Sanji with red hearts in his eyes, fearing that he wouldn''t be able to bear the stimtion in the next second and would just belch.


    "Let''s eat first, I''m going to starve to death."


    Luffy said as he held his stomach, his whole body deted.


    "Now that you have all arrived at Fish-Man Ind, let me entertain you. There are quite a lot of delicacies here."


    Kemi said with a smile, then looked at Sanji again and said, "There are many beautiful mermaids there!"


    "Yeah????"


    Sanji''s eyes suddenly widened, and his nose seemed to be able to spurt hot air, and his feet began to move a little closer to her position uncontrobly.


    "Haha, let''s go then. The entire Fish-Man Ind is quite big. After dinner, you can also take a stroll!"


    Kemi said, then twisted her mermaid tail and started to move forward little by little.


    The streets of Fish-Man Ind look much livelier now than they did a few years ago. The people walking here are not just mermaids or fish-men, but almost all humans on the sea. They are either businessmen or more almost They are all pirates, but each of them seems to be on their own terms.


    At least in this environment, the fishmen or mermaids did not resist these humans too much, and their chats with each other were all about talking andughing.


    But not long after they walked, in the middle of the cross street in the center of Fish-Man Ind, a huge sculpture caught everyone''s attention.


    The sculpture above shows two people holding hands. The height of the entire sculpture is about 10 meters, which is not particrly tall, but there are a lot of words marked underneath them.


    "Kemi, who is the person on this sculpture?"


    Usopp asked curiously.


    "Emperor Tru!"


    Before Kemi opened her mouth to say anything, Luffy said it directly with a serious look on his face.


    "Ah? Luffy, you know! Yes, this is Emperor Toru, and the one next to him is King Neptune of our Fish-Man Ind. This is also a photo sculpture when our Fish-Man Ind and the Toru Empire established diplomatic rtions. It has been here for more than two years.��


    Kemi asked in surprise. Although he didn''t know why he knew it, he slowly exined the principle.


    "So this is Emperor Tru? He does look very young!" Usopp said.


    "Robin, so this is your man! I didn''t expect him to look quite handsome!" Nami put her arm around Robin''s shoulders and said with a grin.


    "If you like it, I''ll introduce it to youter!"


    Robin asked with a smile.


    "It''s indeed him!"


    "Zoron, have you seen it before?"


    Sanji asked with some confusion.


    "I met, five years ago, but I didn''t pay too much attention to it at that time. I had already guessed it when you were chatting, but now I think about it when I look at the other person''s face."


    Zoro said.


    "He also appeared in Barati. At that time, the old man told me that he was Emperor Tru''s, but the South China Sea at that time waspletely different from what it is now!" Sanji said.


    "Why have you all seen it?"


    Usopp asked.


    "To be precise, it''s not that we have met, but that he has been to our ce. If I remember correctly, he should have been the same age as us now at that time, but his strength was already so powerful that it was impossible to predict."


    Zoro said seriously again.


    The highest realm he has been pursuing for a long time, but after focusing on the sculpture in front of him, it seems that everything has be within reach. It is really difficult for him to imagine what level a person needs to reach before he can reach the highest level in his own life. At this age, he has already dominated the entire sea area.

 Chapter 554 Space Portal

    <h4>Chapter 554 Space Portal</h4>


    The reason why Zoro can still remember it is that his teacher once said that by the other person''s age, if you have half the strength of the other person, you are already pretty good.


    But now he realizes that even at the other person''s age, he lookspletely different now than he did at that time.


    "There''s no need to study this. The Mermaid Cafe is just ahead, and it''s also the most famous ce in the entire Fish-Man Ind!"


    Seeing that these people were lost in thought, Kemi quickly smiled and said.


    "I''m so envious of Robin!"


    Chopper said with tears in his eyes, his eyes almost filled with envy. Being able to have such a powerful man as his backing was indeed something to be proud of.


    Others did not listen to what Kemi said, as if this piece of delicious food was not enough to enhance their desires.


    Luffy was still looking at the sculpture seriously, recalling the scene during the war two years ago in his mind.


    Emperor Tru was able to cause such a big movement just by relying on one person. This kind of strength makes people look desperate.


    "Ahhhhhhhh! Although I don''t know what kind of person this is, it feels like he is indeed quite amazing."


    Brooke, who was still a skeleton, also started to smile and said.


    "right?"


    Hearing this, Kemi seemed to be energetic immediately. He immediately came to Brooke and asked excitedly, and then started to say, "He is very good to our Fish-Man Ind. Now the security of Fish-Man Ind is... Almost all are maintained by the Tohru Empire. In the past, this ce was managed by the Whitebeard Pirates. But at that time, mermaids often disappeared. Although this situation asionally happens now, it is much better than before, at least. The entire Fish-Man Ind is considered to bepletely safe.


    Not only that, in the past two years, the Tru Empire has also specially built a fish-man ind above the sea in the South China Sea area. If we are willing, we can go there and feel the warmth of the sun. If it were not for work needs, I would I��ve wanted to go for a long time. "


    "Mishman Ind under the sun?"


    Nami asked confused.


    "The construction of this thing started a few years ago. The overall scale and form are almost the same as the area where Fishman Ind lives today. When building Fishman Ind on the sea, arge part of the buildings are on the water. Below, the one above the water is called the murloc paradise, and the one below is called the murloc living area.


    ording to the n, a total of nearly 500,000 murlocs can be amodated. All of them have been established a few months ago, and the murlocs are also responsible for safety! "


    Seeing the questions in their hearts, Robin started to introduce directly.


    "So that''s it! A lot of them have gone there before and have nevere back. It must be because the life there is so good that they don''t want toe back."


    Kemi asked.


    "The Sunshine Fishman Base is not particrly far from the human living area, and the Tru Empire has also promulgated relevantws. Humans and fishmen arepletely at the level of friendlymunication. At least there, there is no need to worry about any problems with the mermaids or fishmen. Therefore, there are also many fishmen or mermaids working on the station.


    Of course, the sry for a beautiful mermaid like you, Kemi, is very high there. "


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Really or fake? How many are there?"


    "Basically, they are all performances. In a month, you can earn at least nearly 500,000 Baileys!" Robin said.


    ��Nani???��


    Kemi was not the only one who started to be surprised, others also started to be surprised.


    You must know that 500,000 Baileys a month is a terrifyingly high sry.


    An ordinary person who wants to live a stable life can only consume up to 100,000 beli in a month, and this is still the kind of life that enjoys a rtively good quality.


    It reaches 500,000 Baileys a month, which is already equivalent to an extremely high sry level.


    "Robin, what you said can''t be true, can it?"


    Kemi asked again in disbelief.


    "Today, the poption of the Tru Empire has reached 300 million, and it is still thergestmercial exchange center in the world. It is also the richest country in the world. You should be able to imagine it from this point!"


    Robin said.


    ��300 million????��


    Zoro couldn''t believe what he heard. This number waspletely beyond his imagination.


    A country as big as basta only has a poption of more than 20 million, but the Tru Empire in the South China Sea region can actually have more than 300 million people. This kind of thing is simply unimaginable.


    "Robin, it''s not really as exaggerated as you said, is it?" Nami also asked.


    "The poption of the royal city of our Tru Empire has reached nearly 20 million. The poption of one city is alreadyparable to that of many countries. Maybe you can take a look and feel it if you have the opportunity."


    Robin said with a smile.


    "Ah! Isn''t there a space portal on Fish-Man Ind? How about we go over and take a good look at it this time?"


    Kemi asked suddenly.


    "real����"


    "No! The Toru Empire controls pirates too strictly, so you who are pirates, especially those with bounties on wanted orders, may not be able to get close to the Toru Empire at all. .��


    Just when Nami was about to get excited, Robin instantly extinguished his thoughts with one sentence.


    "Forget it, let''s eat quickly. Maybe we can get there if we have a chance."


    Luffy opened his mouth and said.


    This can be regarded as an immediate end to their idea of ??continuing to chat while standing in the middle of the intersection. At least the image of Emperor Toru is still a very good person in Luffy''s mind.


    But they came here on an adventure and did not want to have any contact with the Tru Empire. Their own adventure has just begun two yearster.


    However, here in Dragon Pce City, it is still the original hard-shell tower. Although Princess Bai Xing no longer has to worry about being persecuted, she still chooses to live in this room.


    The huge body seems to be at least ten meters tall, but that shy face, long pink hair, good figure from a distance, and a huge fish tail undoubtedly do not highlight her noble appearance. temperament.


    Although he can freely enter and leave Ryugu City at any time, and can go wherever he wants in the area where Fish-Man Ind is located, Bai Xing has always preferred to stay here and rarely chooses to step out of this ce. One step to the room door.

 Chapter 555 Neptune’s Thoughts

    <h4>Chapter 555 Neptune��s Thoughts</h4>


    The huge mermaid who had been staying here was now happily packing her parcels. Of course, as the people grew older, her parcels were equally astonishingly big.


    After all, not long ago, Neptune personally came to ask her if she was willing to leave Fish-Man Ind and go to the Tru Empire in the South China Sea to experience the charm of the sun?


    There is no need to ask more questions about this kind of thing. This thing has been her dream since childhood, so without any hesitation, Bai Xing nodded directly in agreement.


    The purpose of packing my bags now is to go to the Tru Empire, not only to see the current Emperor Tru, but more importantly, to feel the beauty of the outside world.


    However, the difference was that Neptune was standing at the door with a depressed look on his face. He was followed by his three sons. The expressions on their faces were also not very good-looking.


    My sister, who has never been out of Dragon Pce City, is now going to the distant South China Sea area. Several people have a look of reluctance on their faces, but the words have been spoken, how can they be undone?


    "Father, if my sister has to leave now, what will happen to the next World Government meeting? Didn''t you say you would take her there?"


    As the eldest son, Prince Shark Star directly reminded him.


    "Anyway, there are still more than two months until the World Government Conference, so it''s okay to let Shirahoshi go out for some fun. Besides, this trip is to the South China Sea area, so it won''t have any impact."


    Neptune said bravely.


    "Then why do we have to be miserable here?"


    The second prince opened his mouth and asked.


    "You''re stupid! My sister has never been that far away. Aren''t you just worried?" said the third prince.


    "Father, I think if it''s just because of these problems, you don''t have to worry. After all, the Tru Empire is our current ally, and if we get there through the space portal, it is said that it only takes a moment. At most, we are worried. Just go over and take a look."


    The eldest prince Shark Star said, and the other two princes followed suit and nodded directly.


    "What you think is too simple. We are two countries after all. It is impossible to just let us use the space portal to reach the Tru Empire. Even in the past, we needed tomunicate with diplomats from the Tru Empire in advance to exin where we were going. Reasons and what needs to be done, otherwise going there rashly may cause dissatisfaction to the other party.��


    After all, Neptune has been the king for so many years, and he has a rtively thorough understanding of these things.


    "We understand, it would be good to let Shirahoshi go there. Then we can deal with the World Government Conference wholeheartedly. When the timees, we must fulfill the mother-inw''s wishes." The eldest prince said.


    "Oh~!! Wait a minute, you guys go to see her off. I heard that there are a lot of delicious or fun things in the Tru Empire. Remember to prepare some more treasures for her before leaving, so that you won''t have enough money by then. "


    Neptune still looked worried, even suppressing his inner desire to stay, and didn''t say much else.


    However, while they were beginning tomunicate, Bai Xing in the hard-shell tower had already prepared the things she needed to carry this time. As a huge shark came out carrying these things, she also appeared dazzlingly in front of several people. in front of individuals.


    "Father, brothers, I''m ready. Should we start preparing to go now?"


    Bai Xing asked curiously.


    But as an old father, Neptune turned his head and nced at his daughter, who was already getting ready. There was still unspeakable bitterness in his heart.


    "Shirahoshi, go over there and y. Come back in a few days. The World Government Conference is about to start. I''m going to take you there with me."


    Neptune suddenly said seriously.


    "Don''t worry, Father, I will definitelye back before the World Government Conference starts."


    Shirahoshi said with a smile.


    "Oh~, forget it, you three just send her there!"


    Neptune looked at his three sons and said helplessly.


    Now it seems impossible for his daughter to stay on Fish-Man Ind. No matter what she says, she wants to go out and see the outside world. It''s not that he can''t stop her, but he can''t bear to stop her.


    Fortunately, going to the Tru Empire, I can clearly know that nothing will happen here, but even though I feel safer in my heart, the unbearable worry still lingers in my mind.


    "Then I''m leaving, father. I''ll see if I can bring you some specialties from the Tru Empire!"


    Shirahoshi said with a smile.


    Then, under Neptune''s gaze, a group of four people slowly left here.


    "Looks like you can do your own thing now!"


    King Neptune was talking to himself, and the worried expression on his face instantly turned into a serious one.


    The look in his eyes was that of someone who could eat someone whole.


    In the prison on Fish-Man Ind, several people are locked in a room at the moment. They are the guys who appeared in the original plot. However, it seems that the food in the prison is pretty good, at least for those who have been here for several years. The guy is still in high spirits.


    Even in prison, the friendly rtionship between several people still kept them in a happy state from time to time. Their words revealed their hatred for human beings, and they even imagined that as long as they left this ce, whatever they encountered would Any human being will destroy them all.


    Vicious expressions would appear directly on their faces from time to time, but such expressions onlysted for a short time.


    "Hahahaha! I really didn''t expect that the great king of our Fish-Man Ind is here. We haven''t seen him for so long, and he looks a lot plumper?"


    As the boss of Fish-Man Ind in the original plot, Hody was still chatting andughing, sitting on the bench in the cell,ughing and shouting outside.


    "Hody, are you hallucinating? How could Neptune be here?"


    Asked a very short fishman standing next to him.


    "King Neptune, you''re already here, why don''t you show up yet? I''ve been with you for so long, and I can feel your scent even from a long distance away."


    Hodi ignored hispanion''s words, but continued to talk to the empty ce outside with a sneer.


    He was sure of his feeling that this ugly mermaid was definitely hiding not far away.


    At this moment, in the shadow of the aisle, King Neptune was indeed standing here. He clenched his fists tightly, and tears were already flowing down his eyes.

 Chapter 556 Coming Again

    <h4>Chapter 556 Coming Again</h4>


    At least whenever he sees Hody''s appearance, he will think of his dead and gentle wife.


    Every time he thought of such a scene, Neptune wished he could just tear Hody Jones and his group into pieces. However, due to his own reputation as a king and White Star''s kindness, as of now, they still Life is intact here.


    After forcibly controlling his emotions, Neptune returned to his previous serious expression, and then slowly walked out of the shadows.


    This time there was no one behind him, but just one person appeared here.


    When several people in the cell saw Neptune actually appearing, they were all extremely surprised. Hody Jones was the only one who could still smile in front of Neptune.


    "Why does our great King of Fishman Ind have time toe here today? Could it be that he wants to see me, the person who once killed Princess Otohime?"


    Hody Jones said defiantly.


    "I don''t want to have to deal with this kind of thing with you. Now I can give you a path to choose alive. Next, it depends on whether you are willing to do it or not?"


    Neptune said in a calm voice.


    In fact, he was suppressing the anger in his heart, trying hard not to show too much anger, or trying hard not to let them see what he was thinking in his heart.


    "It''s really interesting. If you have such a choice, then I would like to hear what it is like?"


    Hody Jones asked.


    "Kill the humans on the ind!"


    "Could what you said be true?"


    Listening to these words, Hody Jones felt as if he had heard wrongly, or maybe the King of Fishman Ind in front of him was going crazy.


    Even several other people had shocked expressions on their faces. Since when did Neptune, a good old man, dare to resist humans?


    "Just tell me whether you guys are willing to do it? If you''re not willing, I won''t force you to do it. Maybe it would be good for you to just stay here until you die of old age."


    Neptune suddenly showed a sneer, looked at the other people with disdain and said.


    "If this is really the case, there is no problem in agreeing to it. We would be happy to provide such services to His Majesty the King!"


    Hody Jones smiled and bowed at the same time.


    Although so far, he still can''t figure out what''s wrong with this king? Why is such a move suddenly taken? But after all, he is a person who has been trapped in a cell for several years, and his information has long been disconnected from the outside.


    They didn''t know what the situation was like outside at all, so even if they agreed, these people found it quite interesting.


    "After several years of not taking action, your strength has been greatly reduced. It''s not that I don''t trust you. It''s just that after you go out, you need to deal with the Straw Hats first. I want to make them all disappear. This box is the poison." , you must have been a member of the Fish-Man Ind army, so you should know what this is, right?"


    Neptune said.


    "Hahaha!! Of course this thing is clear, but isn''t it necessary to kill all humans? Why do we have to target the so-called Straw Hats first?"


    Hody Jones asked.


    "You don''t have to worry about unnecessary things, just let me see your next value!"


    Neptune said, then directly threw down the box of poison in his hand, turned around and left here without looking back.


    The only ones left were Hody Jones and a few people who werepletely confused. They still couldn''t believe whether the person just now was the real King Neptune.


    This kind of personality ispletely different from before. It is really hard to believe that this person is the former king of Fishman Ind.


    "Boss Hodi, what do you think this Neptune is up to?"


    Damo, the smallest shark man, said.


    "Why do you think we still care about this matter now? Since we can go out, why do we still stay here? If this box is really a poison, then who on Fish-Man Ind can be ours? opponent?"


    Hody Jones said with a sneer.


    This guy looked arrogant and arrogant. In his understanding, he only stayed in the scope of their thoughts.


    I even feel that I am the most powerful person in this world.


    Sitting at the bottom of a well and looking directly at the sky above, perhaps these people are the most pitiful frogs in the well.


    But if he really waits for him to go out, what kind of despair may he feel? The fishman bay they were so proud of before has long since lost its original shadow, so how can they talk about their ideal and great cause?


    King Neptune just wanted to use this method to make these guyspletely disappear from the world. This is why he has always been reluctant to leave Bai Xing, but he had no choice but to let her out.


    Tru Empire.


    "It seems it''s time to go out for a walk. Two years have passed. It seems like we really need to face something next!"


    In the pce, Chang Nuo stood on a high balcony, looking at the country at his feet with stern eyes. There was no joy on his face, but he said these words calmly.


    But there was no one around him at this time, and everything seemed so lonely.


    Today''s Toru Empire is already a benchmark of the times and also a representative of the forces, but now it needs to face more than just this series of problems in front of the world government.


    This was just what he was currently thinking in his heart, so after saying these words, Chang Nuo''s figure slowly disappeared from the ce.


    But when he appeared again, he was in a ce he had not been to for more than ten years.


    The sky ind is nowpletely changed. I don��t know how long ago, the area of ??the sky ind seems to have expanded a lot.


    At least in this ce, whether it is oxygen content or other resources, there is almost no difference from staying onnd.


    The military base on Kongdao is still the same as before. The only difference is that the buildings here have long be tens of meters high. From a certain point of view, they can be regarded as high-rise buildings.


    It''s just that the military base on Kongdao is no longer used for training troops, but is actually used to ce some other things.


    The house is still made of white clouds and looks so elegant and creative from the outside.


    Chang Nuo didn''te here just to see these things. Although he hadn''t been here for more than ten years, he still knew everything that happened on the entire empty ind.

 Chapter 557 Kaido appears on the empty island

    <h4>Chapter 557 Kaido appears on the empty ind</h4>


    Kong Dao has not only grown in size as a whole, but more importantly, his defense mechanism is now much higher.


    At least one thing that can be confirmed so far is that if you want to reach Sky Ind, there is currently only one way for ordinary people to reach the sky current.


    But no one cares too much about these things anymore.


    After all, Chang Nuo had his own things to do when he came here this time.


    "You finally came, but you kept me waiting for a long time!"


    At the edge of the empty ind, as soon as Chang Nuo arrived, a rough voice sounded directly, and his tone was also mixed with great dissatisfaction.


    "I''m so sorry for keeping you waiting, Kaido!"


    Changnuo said with a smile. Sitting on a big rock not far in front of him was Kaido, the current member of the Yonko Pirates.


    It is estimated that when other people saw this scene, their jaws would have dropped. No one could have imagined that Kaido of the Beasts would actually appear on the Sky Ind on the Grand Line.


    And the fact that the two people can meet is essentially a huge news.


    "Tell me, why did youe to me?"


    Changnuo also found a rtively t stone and sat there, crossed his legs, looked at Kaido curiously and asked.


    "Who was the person who stood with you two years ago in the World Government?"


    Kaido asked confused.


    "Maybe I guess you don''t want to know the other party''s identity. Even if you know it, what can you do?"


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Why do you think so?"


    "Why not? At least that''s what I feel, otherwise you wouldn''t have made a special trip to contact me ande to such a ce. You don''t have a bottom line in everything, right?"


    Hearing this, Kaido was stunned for a moment. Indeed, it was just as the other party said.


    So what if I know the other person''s identity? In the end, nothing can be changed.


    "What exactly is Wano Country?" Changnuo asked directly.


    The two of them had only met once, but they acted as if they had known each other for many years while sitting here chatting.


    The key is that thest time they met, they started fighting without the slightestmunication ormunication.


    But now the two big guys who belong to this world are just sitting here chatting quietly. Fortunately, they are on an empty ind. Otherwise, there is no telling how big a sensation it would cause if they were below.


    Facing the question raised by Emperor Tru, Kaido just nced at him without saying much. After staying for a while, he asked more seriously, "What agreement did you make with Whitebeard?" ?��


    "It''s been two years since this happened. Don''t you think it''s toote to ask this topic now?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "We all know that guy''s character. No matter what, he was once a partner, but there are indeed many things we don''t know about it.


    Before the captain disappeared, he also called the two of us in. Unexpectedly, now they have gradually begun to disappear! "


    Kaido sat there and sighed, making Fang really unable to tell whether this guy was the person in his impression.


    But sometimes I think about it, how could Kaido, such a violent and impulsive person, stick to a ce like Wano? Even when he went out to fight, he would never let his pirates go out, and most of the time he would do the work himself.


    "There is no use talking about this anymore. You came to me this time just to ask how to face the current world situation next?


    Now I can tell you directly that the world government is indeed not as simple as we think. The navy is just a superficialbat capability, but how deep is the actual water? This is probably not something you and I can determine.


    The person I fought with two years ago was called Fei Duo. I may not be able to tell you his identity now, but you only need to know one thing. You were definitely not my opponent two years ago, but I am with him. There is no way to fight back in front of you, can you imagine? "


    Changnuo''s expression suddenly turned cold and he spoke directly.


    Kaido didn''t seem to have too many surprises, and it was even as if he had already guessed such a result.


    Still sitting there, looking into the distance, his expression was extremely quiet.


    For a big guy who is five or six meters tall, this scene does seem a bit strange.


    "When are you going to take action next? Is it possible that you intend to keep the Tru Empire in its current state?"


    Kaido asked.


    "This kind of thing is probably not something you should worry about. The Tru Empire has its own code of conduct. When to fight and when to make peace. The rules can only be in the hands of the strong."


    Changnuo answered without any hesitation.


    "That''s really exciting, but what I want to know more is how strong you are now? Can you shoulder any of my expectations?"


    Kaido said, then slowly stood up.


    His muscr body, height of five to six meters, and ferocious expression were all on full disy at this moment.


    After standing up, Kaido took advantage of the opponent''sck of preparation and directly attacked Changnuo with a punch. The force was so powerful that even the surrounding flowers and nts were lifted up by the wind of the punch.


    But Chang Nuo, the party involved, still sat there unmoved.


    When the opponent''s fist was almost reaching his face, he just gently raised his hand and punched him.


    The sparks generated by the powerful Overlord''s domineering energy at this moment instantly turned the area within a 200m radius of where they were into a scorched earth.


    However, when you look at the sea below 10,000 meters high and see the scene above, it ispletely shing red and ck thunderclouds. This scene really makes people feel extremely frightened.


    After the fist fight, Chang Nuo slowly stood up, but the stone under his butt had turned into powder when he stood up.


    This time they collided with each other, Chang Nuo was fine, and Kaido was fine too, but the conversation had already ended, so naturally there was nothing more to say next.


    The moment Chang Nuo turned around to leave, he stopped after walking a few steps, turned his back to Kaido and said, "I know there is a big secret in Wano Country, but I don''t know the specific situation. Your daughter Yamato is pretty good." , send it to the Tru Empire, and I will definitely protect you if something happens in the future!"


    "I see!"


    Kaido doesn''t have the domineering power he had before, he even looks like a frustrated paper tiger.


    The four emperors who had made people feel terrified before, but the way they behaved here made people feel shocked.

 Chapter 558 A sudden crisis

    <h4>Chapter 558 A sudden crisis</h4>


    As long as you have an idea, you can be sure that the Tru Empire has already been operating behind the scenes and is ready to deal with major events at any time.


    "Captain, why didn''t you do some things yourself back then? Why did you let us people guard it?"


    Kaido stood there, looking helplessly ahead as he spoke, then suddenly jumped directly from the sky above the ind.


    For ordinary people, jumping from a height of tens of thousands of meters is simply seeking death. But for such a person, who can fly directly from the air, as long as he is not willing, no matter how high the altitude is, it is impossible for him to fall to death. .


    The door to everything seems to have begun to open quietly. Two years ago, two yearster, the situation ispletely different now. Now everyone is looking forward to only this World Government meeting.


    So far, there are still about 170 countries that have joined the World Government, but not every country can participate in the government meeting. Only about 50 people can be selected from among them. When they sit together, , if there is no world government involved, it canpletely determine the direction of the next world structure.


    This world government conference is the focus of everyone''s attention. The countries that can participate in this world government conference have actually been made public for a long time.


    Although the World Government Conference that usually takes ce every four years can attract the attention of many reporters, or rather newspapers, this time it ispletely different.


    The emergence of the Tru Empire directly caused a huge reversal in things this time.


    Everyone was originally thinking that after the war between the Toru Empire and the World Government two years ago, why would it be impossible for the Toru Empire to participate in the meeting this time? But in the end the reality turned out to be exactly the opposite.


    This attracted everyone''s attention to this meeting.


    They are all looking forward to what kind of special circumstances will arise during this process. After all, before the start of every world government meeting, all countries participating in the meeting need to report the participants. The name of Emperor Tru appeared prominently at the meeting. Among the names on the list, this made an already special meeting even more special.


    As for whether this meeting can change the direction of the world? Or what is the hidden content of this meeting? This is what many people in other countries want to know.


    Even as early as the World Government announced the list of countries participating in the conference, reporters from major newspapers had already begun to pour into the Tru Empire. While waiting for the response from the Tru Empire, they began to study this time. The direction of the meeting.


    Almost all the headlines of newspapers have been upied by this aspect. Even the Straw Hat Gang who reappeared two yearster was also disyed in the newspaper content, but this content has long been typed to the back.


    No one cares about how big a storm a small pirate group can cause anymore. They care more about what kind of sparks will happen when the two powerful giants meet now?


    War is both strange and familiar to many of them. It feels far away, yet very close at the same time.


    At least two years ago, the Tru Empire has refreshed everyone''s understanding. No one will ever treat the Sihai region like a weakling. At least they now have enough reason to believe that whether it is the Grand Line or the New The world, in the end, can still only bepared to the four sea regions.


    Of course, it is not just the Tru Empire that wants to cause trouble this time. The revolutionary army, which has been wandering in the North Sea, has now substantively controlled nearly 20 countries. They are now the same as they were two years ago. It is alsopletely different. The expansion of strength also makes this group of people n to follow the footsteps of the Toru Empire, directly upy a sea area, and collide with the World Government head-on.


    In fact, within the past two years, many signs ofpetition between multiple forces have emerged.


    Originally, there were at least dozens of forces that couldpete in this world, including the world government and navy.


    Including the pirate forces, but so far, there are only a few who can really take the first step.


    Inside the Royal Pce of Tru.


    After Chang Nuo returned from Sky Ind, there were already people standing here waiting for him in the hall.


    And they are not alone here. It is very rare for them to see all the current generals of the Tru Empire gathered together.


    As soon as they walked into the hall, 11 people stood side by side. Chang Nuo slowly passed in front of them, then walked to the sofa area and sat down directly.


    "Your Majesty the King, many members of the World Government have recently appeared in the Tru Empire. These people are extremely hidden. At least nearly two hundred have been discovered so far."


    Abona opened his mouth and said.


    He is currently the actual controller of the entire intelligence agency. He has already understood these things. The sources of these people are not only avable now. At least when it started two years ago, the entire Tru Empire has With the entry of the foreign poption, there have generally been a lot of people staying here.


    "What do you mean the others areing?"


    Chang Nuo looked at the other generals calmly and said.


    "Your Majesty, special circumstances have urred in the southeastern sea area of ????the empire. The climate is very different from normal. Near the windless zone, the sea surface has begun to freeze, and the temperature has seriously dropped."


    "The same goes for the northeastern region, but it is slightly better than the southeastern region. However, the sea water there has begun to heat up abnormally, and the fish living in the water have disappeared one by one. So far, they have not Can we find out the reason?"


    "There is a hurricane in the southwest, and it is difficult to control now. What is the cause? In the end, it seems that these things are the same. It seems that a situation targeting the Tru Empire has begun to emerge!"


    ��


    Listening to the reports of more than a dozen people, it is understandable that they are concentrated in one direction, that is, the Tru Empire has begun to face various problems.


    Various incidents ur frequently in the sea area. For arge economic country that relies onmercial support, this has begun to have an extremely serious impact.


    "When did it start showing up?"


    Changnuo looked directly at Enelu and asked.


    "It''s all focused on today. It started in the early morning. It''s not yet easy to tell what exactly happened."


    Enel said.


    "Where is the southwest direction?" Chang Nuo asked again.


    "Your Majesty, at almost the same time, the investigation has begun." General Deco said.

 Chapter 559 King Uranus

    <h4>Chapter 559 King Uranus</h4>


    All reports have now fully proven that things almost all started today.


    But there is really nothing special happening today? Even the generals present did not dare to confirm what the problem was.


    Combined with this reason, these talents will all gather here at the first time.


    Chang Nuo''s face was also not very good. A situation that could target such a vast area of ????the South China Sea at the same time was definitely not possible by manpower.


    "Is it possible that the war is about to start now?"


    Chang Nuo murmured.


    But other people''s faces have begun to show expressions of shock and seriousness. As the generals of the Tru Empire, they have begun to make such preparations all the time.


    Since two years ago, they have felt that the war is actually very close to them. As for where the trigger will ur, no one dares to confirm.


    "Your Majesty the King, I think it is better to deal with these matters as soon as possible, otherwise it is likely to cause panic among the people of the Tru Empire."


    General Yixiao stood up and said.


    "Concerning this matter, you go back first, I want to see what''s going on?"


    Changnuo said, looking directly at Abona, and then said seriously, "Concentrate all the intelligence personnel to the World Government and the Navy, and find out what these people want to do? Especially here in the World Government, no matter what How to get all their movements!"


    "Your Majesty, do you think the World Government is behind this?"


    Abona asked with some confusion.


    "No matter what the reason is or who does it, all preparations must be put first. The situation is the same for all of you. Next, you must be ready for war. Once a special situation urs, you must We need to circle a battlefield far away from the Tru Empire.


    This time, General Yixiao and General Enilu will be responsible for this matter! "


    Changnuo said seriously.


    He must be prepared for this. No matter what happens next, the war that may break out will affect many people.


    Therefore, preparation under this premise is to deal with emergencies. In any case, even if a war urs, the area where this battlefield is located must not be within the South China Sea.


    Then the venue for the next war must be selected in advance, and this is what they must consider.


    "We understand, we will study this issue seriously in theing time, and we will never let the uing war happen within the scope of the Tru Empire!"


    General Yixiao and Enelu said at the same time.


    Everyone else also realized the seriousness of the matter, and they were all prepared at the same time.


    The scene turned, and on a rectangr tabletop, Chang Nuo''s portrait suddenly appeared in the front, and there was a dagger stuck straight next to him.


    In fact, all of Changnuo''s guesses are not wrong. There will be many tests to face next. However, this time various problems have appeared in the South China Sea. In any case, they still need to be solved with the highest priority.


    After this simple meeting of a group of people, Chang Nuo finally understood the whole story. In fact, this was just the beginning.


    After everyone left, Chang Nuo, who had just returned, disappeared directly into this ce again.


    However, the ce he came to this time waspletely different. Instead, he came directly to an area that looked like outer space. His eyes radiated directly to the area of ????lower light. When he stayed here, he said with a slightly serious expression, "If you want to fight, , there is no need to use such means!"


    Although his voice was not loud, he spoke to someone in a very targeted manner.


    In fact, such fighting or methods have long been beyond the understanding of ordinary people.


    But this also reflects the extent of the opponent''s powerful range.


    Just after saying one sentence, all these situations in the entire South China Sea area disappeared in an instant.


    The sea surface once again returned to a calm level. Maybe the other party just gave a warning, or maybe it was because of other circumstances.


    But when Chang Nuo returned to his residence again, his expression was quite serious, even a little cold.


    "Are Uranus, the King of Heaven, and you the same person? It seems that there are still many mysteries that have not yet been solved!"


    Chang Nuo sneered and said to himself.


    He also wanted to know how far this matter would progress? Can my guess reach the ideal range?


    But things have reached this point, and many things have long gone beyond the scope of the original plot, and have even broken the original ideological rules in terms of strength.


    At the beginning, he always believed that the strength of the Four Emperors should be the ceiling of this world, but in the end he discovered that there were many people with king-level strength, let alone those who surpassed the king-level strength.


    In essence, everyone can agree that the 800-year history of the World Government is not that simple, but to what extent is it not simple? Even Chang Nuo didn''t dare to make a conclusion and confirm it.


    Now this situation can be regarded as a thorough and vivid lesson for him. After so many years, it has been difficult to bring a small country that was originally barren to where it is now. As a decision-maker, he may Because of one mistake, it all fell apart.


    "Gogoya,e to the main hall!"


    Thinking about all this, Chang Nuo opened his mouth and shouted.


    After he finished speaking, he sat directly on the sofa. In less than a minute, a cup of tea was suddenly brought to him, and then he silently exited the hall.


    But all the service staff who stay in the pce are carefully selected and ensure that everyone is an ordinary person.


    Only in this case, after transcending the range, they will not hear anymunication words, and they can maintain the secrecy in the pce more effectively.


    Especially within the scope of this hall, no one is allowed to exist within the regional scope. Except for cleaning in the morning or evening, almost no one is allowed toe here during the rest of the time.


    Faced with the embarrassing things happening today, many things are probably beyond the understanding of ordinary people.


    Regarding the problems that have arisen in the South China Sea, even the experienced General Yixiao ispletely at a loss as to the urrence of such things.

 Chapter 560 Planning

    <h4>Chapter 560 nning</h4>


    After sitting here for a few minutes, Gogoya came over slowly, dressed in professional attire and holding a document in his hand.


    "Your Majesty the King, are you looking for me here?"


    Gogoya walked directly to Chang Nuo and stood there and asked respectfully.


    "Are you ready for the World Government Conference?"


    Changnuo asked.


    "I''m sorry, Your Majesty the King, but this matter has not been settled so far. The most important issue is your safety, Your Majesty the King. It has not been discussed yet. It is expected that the escort who will be safer will be fully recovered within the past week. Handle it properly!" Gogoya said.


    "Can such an operation still be possible?"


    Chang Nuo didn''t even know what he heard, but he was immediately amused.


    But then he immediately regained hisposure and said, "Don''t worry about safety issues. Show me the process of the world government meeting now. We will also prepare some materials in advance. I want to take a look at this world government." How exactly did the meeting go?��


    "This is the process that needs to be carried out in the normal regr meetings of the World Government Conference, including the countries that will participateter."


    Gogoya said, directly handing the document in his hand to Chang Nuo, and then continued before the other party opened it, "This World Government meeting is expected to be divided into six items in total, and the meeting venue is still chosen to be in Mariejoia. , 56 countries participated in the meeting. The only difference from previous meetings is that this time the topic of the meeting was not raised. It is estimated that it may be raised between meetings.


    The only requirement of this World Government Conference is that we arrive at least three days in advance, and that security personnel have been prepared there. No more than four people from each country can go there. "


    "I understand, Mo Sank will go with him, and you can follow the rest. The remaining one spot will be given to the shadow guard. For the rest of the apanying people, you can just follow the arrangements."


    Chang Nuo looked at the document in his hand and gave the order without even looking back.


    "I understand, Your Majesty the King, I will arrange it directly like this after I get down!"


    "interesting!"


    As soon as Gogoya finished speaking, Changnuo seemed to recognize something from the list of people participating in the meeting, and said to himself with a smile on his face.


    "What''s the problem, Your Majesty?"


    "Let Abona check out what''s going on in these two countries in the North Sea? I guess they will bring us unexpected excitement!"


    Chang Nuo still said with a smile.


    "Do you think they''ll have a problem?" Gogoya asked.


    "It has nothing to do with us anyway, but this world government meeting will definitely be very exciting. Let us wait and see!"


    "As for what we need to discuss at this meeting, do you need to arrange it in advance?" Gogoya asked.


    "Arrangement? What do you think this World Government meeting has to do with us? I took you there, just to join in the fun, and leave the rest to them to perform. Now the Tru Empire needs to make demands?


    As long as it is something we are willing to do, now we do not need the consent of the world government area at all, we can just do what we want to do. "


    Chang Nuo put the file in his hand directly on hisp and leaned on the sofa.


    "By the way, speaking of this, ording to their feedback, it seems that two Tianlong people havee to the Tru Empire. Does this matter need special handling?"


    Gogoya asked again.


    "As for matters like this, you can just deal with it yourself. No matter who the Tianlong is, as long as he ismitting derailment in the South China Sea, just treat him as a normal overseas person. There is no need to deal with special cases!"


    "But will this affect us..."


    "It has nothing to do with it. What if they die here?"


    Chang Nuo sneered directly, he was not interested in the existence of Tianlong people at all.


    You may need to respect the Celestial Dragons when you see them in Mariejoia, but they have already arrived in their own area, and whether they are Celestial Dragons or not does not seem to be that important anymore.


    "I understand. I will give you instructions next. I wonder if you have any other arrangements?" Gogoya said.


    "n the journey and set the departure time. The rest will be discussedter!"


    Changnuo said.


    After he finished speaking, he justy there and closed his eyes, quietly thinking about all this.


    The country currently has enough strength, and it even has no interest in annexing other maritime countries. After all, such a thing is too conspicuous for the Tru Empire.


    The powerful force that destroys a maritime country can even be described as devastating. Itpletely fails to meet any challenge. On the contrary, it will push its own image to the opposite side of the world.


    Doing something that is not worth the gain is definitely not the result he wants to see.


    As the day of the World Government gets closer and closer, he can imagine that the senior officials of the World Government have probably be ants on the hot pot.


    However, on the side of the World Government, they are exactly as imagined.


    The Five Old Stars are no longer as crazy as they imagined. They stand neatly side by side in the hall. At the highest position is a Void Throne made of unknown material. It is not so much that it is ced there. It would be better to say that he is floating at the top.


    The five old men all lowered their heads, as if they didn''t even dare to raise their heads.


    You can even see a trace of panic in their expressions. It is estimated that for these guys who have always been on top, there will definitely not be too many times like this in their lives.


    There are no lights in this hall, and all natural light from the outsidees in through the ss.


    But even so, this hall still looks extremely dark.


    After several people waited together for a while, they suddenly seemed to feel some movement. They all knelt down to the ground and shouted at the same time, "Lord Im!"


    "What are you guys doing here looking for me? Didn''t I tell you not toe looking for me when you have nothing to do?"


    Im sitting above asked in a low voice.


    The dim light did not shine on his face, and all that could be heard was his voice.


    The bodies of several old guys trembled suddenly. Faced with such momentum, even though they were powerful, they were helpless.

 Chapter 561 The Sensational Mermaid Princess

    <h4>Chapter 561 The Sensational Mermaid Princess</h4>


    A few old guys knelt on the ground like this, showing enough respect in their eyes.


    Love raised his head slightly and asked with some fear of confirmation, "Lord Im, Emperor Tru''s Emperor Genji Changno came to attend the World Government Conference this time. Does he need us to take this opportunity to solve this disaster?"


    "You solve it?"


    The people sitting in the shadows smiled with disdain, but in the end they looked at them and said, "God''s game is not for you to y now!"


    "I don''t quite understand. I hope Lord Im can exin it clearly!" Silohemia asked in a low voice.


    Several other people also raised their heads at the same time, looking at the position above with confusion.


    "Okay, don''t kneel here either!"


    The person in the shadow spoke directly without expressing any meaning.


    After he finished speaking, he disappeared directly into the shadows, leaving only a few old men kneeling here in the entire hall.


    They looked at each other, and they all saw confusion in each other''s eyes.


    They still really don''t understand what the person at the top wants to do?


    But the words have already been said for this purpose. You don''t think you have given them any instructions, and you have not asked them to refuse to do anything. There is simply not too much left in the daydream.


    "Saint Loft, Lord Im, what does this mean?"


    Siloamia asked doubtfully.


    "As the core person who handles the entire politics and diplomacy, you can''t even understand what Master Im means with your wisdom? Now you actually ask me, a person in charge of the military, how can I not be embarrassed?"


    Luofu twitched the corner of his mouth and said angrily.


    "Don''t talk about it here now, just go back and discuss it!" Cholba said.


    None of them dare to make a decision rashly now. After all, it is easy to see from the attitude of the superior just now that they don''t seem to care too much about this matter.


    It''s just that after so much effort, the Tru Empire was finally invited to the World Conference, but now the question of how to operate it is stumping these old guys.


    But what is understandable is that since everyone is here, they will definitely not choose to let this opportunity go. The reason why they came to inquire is that they are worried about causing a big mess in the world and causing a directrge-scale war between the two sides, so they chose toe to inform them first. A sound.


    Tohru Empire.


    There are still nearly three months left before the World Government Conference. For them, no one seems to be in a hurry. After all, the whole journey from their ce to Mariejoia only takes a month at most, and it is different from other ces. The country uses some wooden sailing ships, and the market distance is at least more than two months. Even if they start setting off on the same day and directly use space transfer, you will not worry about the arrival time at all.


    Therefore, this group of people can be regarded as living a rtively leisurely andfortable existence. Although they are rtivelyfortable, today''s Tru Empire has ushered in a more lively moment.


    In today''s Toru Empire country, almost most of the people already know that the princess of Fish-Man Ind ising, and they have already carried out a lot of publicity in the process of preparing to invite the most beautiful mermaid princess in the world, the Empire Each of the major news tforms has publicized it countless times.


    After all, today is the day when the mermaid princess arrives directly, and all of them are looking forward to it. However, the portal from Fish-Man Ind directly reaches Mermaid Paradise, so even if she has already arrived, she still needs to send someone to receive her.


    Aftering out of the space portal, Bai Xing came into contact with the sunlight on the sea for the first time. Everything seemed so incredible to him.


    Every one of the flowers, nts and trees on the ind was something she had never seen before.


    In order to take into ount the residential properties of Mermaid Ind, almost half of the space portal above Mermaid Paradise is under the water, so even if theye here, it is equivalent to being suspended above the water.


    This time, except for a huge whale, the only ones who followed the mermaid princess were two beautiful mermaids, who also came to take care of Shirahoshi.


    The moment several of them emerged from the sea at the same time, when they saw the scenery outside, all three of them couldn''t help but open their mouths.


    After all, this was their first time seeing the world outside the sea, and they were already full of curiosity about everything.


    The scenes here definitely make these people feel like duriansing and going and curious.


    "Princess, is this the South China Sea, a world beyond the sea?"


    A little mermaid following him asked with disbelief on his face.


    "This is the sun, it feels so dazzling!"


    Another little mermaid said the same thing.


    "Actually...well...it''s also my first time toe to the sea. I didn''t expect the outside world to be so beautiful!"


    Bai Xing was a little excited, but still said shyly.


    "It feels so beautiful here! I didn''t expect there to be such a ce in the world, but is it really safe for us to get to the shore?"


    asked a blue mermaid behind him.


    "This...actually I don''t know very well, but this should be the Tru Empire. This is the only country in the South China Sea. There shouldn''t be any need to worry about safety, right?"


    Shirahoshi said.


    "Of course you don''t have to worry abouting here. All subsequent trips will be apanied by Tru Empire military personnel to ensure your safety in all aspects!"


    While the three of them were chatting, a person appeared directly next to them.


    Although half of the Space Gate is in the sea, there are roads on both sides of it.


    However, the three of them were just enjoying the scenery outside and the sun above their heads, and did not notice at all that there were still three people standing on their left.


    But when they first came out to the outside world and saw strangers, both Bai Xing and the two mermaids behind her were instantly frightened.


    "Haha!! I''m really sorry, I forgot to introduce myself. After all, this is the first time I''ve seen such a big mermaid. It''s really beautiful beyond words!"


    The guy in navy uniform who was staying on the shore touched his head with a silly smile and said directly. Then he immediately put down his hands, maintained a military posture at attention, and said with a serious expression, "Molokov of the Seventh Legion of the Tru Empire , the position is Vice Admiral of the Tohru Empire Navy, and I came here specially to greet Princess Shirahoshi. From now on, everyone on your side will be protected by me and my partner throughout the entire process!"


    "Lieutenant General Morokkov, thank you for your help!"


    Shirahoshi nodded directly and asked in a friendly manner with a smile. With his size, he could only look down at the Vice Admiral standing below.

 Chapter 562 Special Office

    <h4>Chapter 562 Special Office</h4>


    Today''s Shirahoshi is about 10 meters tall. He looks like an unusuallyrge mermaid, with pink hair hanging on his fair face. He already looks cute and kawaii.


    The few people who came here were all stunned, and their eyes almost flew out. The moment they saw such a beautiful mermaid, they could no longer distinguish the species. Anyway, the feeling of heartbeat had already followed. The heartbeat is surging.


    "Um...Lieutenant General Morokkov, is this the fish-man paradise?"


    Bai Xing asked cautiously.


    "Yes, it is here, and there is no need to worry about the safety here. The periphery is almost guarded by the fishman army, and even more peripherally are the cruise warships belonging to the Tru Empire, and the people of our country have no idea about the fishmen. Any resistance, so you can rest assured about all of this.��


    Morokkov said seriously.


    "Where is Brother Changnuo?" Bai Xing asked.


    "Chang Nuo??"


    Morokkov was stunned for a moment, but one of the guys following him poked his waist and said in a loud voice, "Lieutenant General, they are talking about His Majesty the King!"


    "Nani???" Morokkov''s eyes almost dropped.


    Probably because until now, he doesn''t even know the name of His Majesty the King.


    Now that he was suddenly shocked, he immediately coughed twice to relieve his embarrassment, and then said with a somewhat embarrassed smile, "Princess Bai Xing, His Majesty the King is currently in the royal city. It is still quite far away from this ce. If possible, We can take a rest here today, and after tomorrow, I will personally take you to see His Majesty the King.


    By then, people across the country will surely be very enthusiastic and wee your arrival. "


    "Really? I''m really looking forward to meeting Brother Changnuo. I haven''t seen him for several years."


    Shirahoshi said.


    "Don''t worry, you will definitely be able to see it this time."


    Morokoff was sweating. Judging from the names between the other party and His Majesty the King, they must be very familiar with each other. If this thing is not protected and the other party is injured, then his good life will probably be over. kind of.


    "Um...Lieutenant General Morokkov, can I take a look at the scenery here?"


    Bai Xing asked shyly.


    In fact, if these three guys hadn''t arrived suddenly, the three mermaids would have probably started swimming here and feeling the world on the sea.


    It''s just that the sudden appearance of people from the Tru Empire made them feel a little restrained.


    After hearing this, Morokoff said that it was still time to refuse. After all, there was indeed no dangerous situation around here.


    He could only sweat and smile and said, "This is the base on the sea established for Fish-Man Ind. Of course you can y everywhere here, but if you need anything, there will be a red one every other section of the ind." Button, you can call us to go by pressing the button when the timees.��


    "Thank you very much! But can I put the things I brought here first?"


    Shirahoshi asked again.


    "Of course, of course, just go and enjoy the surrounding scenery, and we will take care of the rest."


    Morokoff said quickly and seriously.


    The other party didn''t bring many things, it was just a few boxes in total. Although there were three of them now, there were quite a few people who came to greet the person responsible for protection.


    Just outside, there is a steel battleship parked quietly at this moment. All of this is to prepare for the safety of the mermaiding from Fish-Man Ind.


    As several days passed, Bai Xing had long been obsessed with the sea base established for Fish-Man Ind. The links to this ind were not very small, almost the same size as the current Fish-Man Ind.


    But in another ce.


    In a rtively bright-looking room, almost all the surroundings of the room were filled with various materials. The whole room looked quiterge, with a desk at the front and a chair behind it.


    Chang Nuo was sitting there quietly looking at the materials in his hands.


    This is the office that belongs to Emperor Tru. In fact, in normal times, even the generals of the Tru Empire cannot enter this room one by one without permission.


    But this time, as the knock on the door sounded, Chang Nuo raised his head, nced in the direction of the door, and shouted, "Come in!"


    When the door slowly opened, Gogoya, still wearing professional attire, opened the door, walked in, and closed the door again.


    Holding a folder in his hand, he slowly walked over on high heels.


    "Your Majesty the King, the Straw Hats have arrived at Dressrosa. The guys over there have exchanged a lot of secrets with us? What should we do next?"


    Gogoya asked directly.


    "Is it already so fast?"


    Chang Nuo leaned directly on the chair and said with a disdainful smile.


    "Should I make any preparations?"


    "It''s not necessary. I will do a good job in this matter. It''s time for him toe to an end!"


    Changnuo said lightly.


    Indeed, in fact, the information Chang Nuo just read was about the situation in Dressrosa. How could Gogoya need toe to remind this kind of thing? Judging from the time, he already felt that it should have reached this point.


    Domingo, this guy, has indeed provided great convenience to the Tru Empire in the past few years. At least there are many things that they cannot do, but this guy feelsfortable doing them, but now Everything has fallen into ce. Indeed, there is no need for it to exist anymore.


    "Since His Majesty the King has made arrangements, I will directly withdraw the people arranged by the Tru Empire over there!"


    Gogoya nodded and said.


    Chang Nuo did not refuse, but still leaned on the chair, but after a while, when Gogoya was about to leave, he opened his mouth and said, "There should be some generals from the Navying over, right?"


    "Yes, currently Admiral Fujitora!"


    Hearing this, Chang Nuoughed instantly.


    Yixiao has now be the general of the Tohru Empire, and everything has changed a long time ago. The only possibility now is that the current general of the Navy Headquarters, Fujitora, should be a rtively familiar guy.


    "Okay, I understand, you can go out first!"


    Chang Nuo said, in fact Gogoya leftpletely confused.

 Chapter 563 A reminder of waking up from a dream

    <h4>Chapter 563 A reminder of waking up from a dream</h4>


    As soon as the other party left, Chang Nuo directly picked up a phone in his hand. After it rang for a while, when the other party just picked up the phone, Chang Nuo said directly, "Dress" without waiting for the other party to speak. Rosa��s matter is over, and many people have no need to exist anymore!��


    It was just one sentence. Anyway, the other party didn''t say a word from beginning to end. The call just ended.


    As for what happens next, everything is already within his control.


    "Domingo, Domingo!"


    Changnuo sat there, tapping his fingers on the table, and shouted Domingo''s name with interest.


    After saying that, he stood up directly with a smile on his face and began to slowly leave his office.


    When he went out, he realized that this room did not exist at all. It was an office in another space. The door outside was directly connected to the air.


    Appearing again, Chang Nuo was already on the busy street.


    The prosperity of the Tru Empire made him feel quite happy even when he was standing on the street watching this scene.


    After all, everything here was built by himself. Who could have imagined that it only took him more than ten years to build such a prosperous country?


    The city with many high-rise buildingspletely embellishes the prosperity of the Tru Empire.


    Today''s royal city has upied almost half of the former Tru Kingdom. From this, we can see how small the former Tru Kingdom was.


    However, hising out this time was not without purpose. The main purpose was to take a look at the two Tianlong people from Mariejoia. These two guys had been in the Tru Empire for a long time. Although it was okay, They eat and drink every day, but they still cause quite a stir in this royal city.


    Perhaps for the original people of the Toru Empire, seeing the two Tianlong people now was like looking at monkeys. Each of them behaved so strangely, and the fear they once felt had actually disappeared long ago.


    But the two of them are living a carefree life now. In the royal city of the Tru Empire, they eat delicious food from house to house every day. However, they have made some changes during this time. .


    Especially Yakel, this originally arrogant and domineering Celestial Dragon, used to face the entire Tru Empire with disdain, but now, neither he nor Weimo, the two Celestial Dragons, are wearing ss masks. , on the contrary, he wore casual clothes and walked around the streets and started eating.


    "Hmm~, brother, this food is really delicious!"


    In the restaurant, Wei Mo was munching on the food in his hand, his mouth was full, and he shouted directly to Yakeer, who was sitting in front of him and was also eating.


    The majesty of the Tianlong people still exists. At least after they came to this restaurant, the entire hotel only entertained the two of them. This is also the main reason why major hotels now want to let theme, that is, as long as theye here, they will With a lot of money, he will drive away all the others, leaving only the two of him quietly enjoying the delicious food.


    Yakeer looked at Wei Mo, his younger sister, with a warm smile on his face. While eating, he said, "The cooks here are great, better than those in Marigioa." I don��t know how many, but I will get them all back one by one when the timees!��


    "Uh-huh����"


    Wei Mo nodded and said.


    "That won''t work. If we take away all the people here, what will the people in this country eat?"


    While the two of them were still chatting, Chang Nuo slowly walked in, sat directly next to them and said.


    Yakkel was just about to get angry and turned to look at the men in suits who were guarding the door and following him. But when he saw their frightened expressions, they were already shouting angry curses. At the same time, he swallowed the food in his mouth.


    "Who are you?"


    Yakel asked with a solemn expression.


    ��What do you think of our country��s food?��


    Changnuo asked with a smile and calmly, without even answering what Yakor said.


    ��It��s so delicious. Sometimes I really envy the people in this country!��


    "Who are you anyway?"


    As soon as Wei Mo finished speaking, Yakeer once again stared angrily at Chang Nuo and asked.


    "You came to my country and you still don''t know who I am?"


    Changnuo asked, still smiling.


    "Yeah, I know, you are Emperor Tru, I didn''t expect to see you here in person!"


    Wei Mo said while eating.


    Only then did Yakel feel like he suddenly understood. No wonder the guy in front of him looked familiar, but for a moment he couldn''t remember where he had seen him before.


    "Hey, Wei Mo, how can you still eat?"


    Yakel asked as he looked at his sister speechlessly.


    "What''s there to worry about? We came here to eat and didn''t do anything else." Wei Mo rolled his eyes and looked at Yakeer.


    "That makes sense. That''s how it is here in the Tru Empire. As long as they don''t do anything special, we wee everyone here no matter what kind of person they are!" Chang Nuo followed up and said with a smile.


    "In that case, what are you doing here? We have to pay to eat here."


    Yakel asked with a dissatisfied look on his face.


    Although he said this, he was already panicking in his heart. The man in front of him was a ruthless person, and he could directly start a fight with the World Government at the slightest disagreement.


    For such a person, no matter how unintelligent Yakel is, he can guess that he can kill both of them at any time as long as Fang is willing.


    "If you don''t tell me that I haven''t noticed it yet, why don''t you wear the ss hood that is the exclusive symbol of you Tianlong people today?" Chang Nuo asked doubtfully.


    "What ss hood? That thing belongs to aerospace clothing, okay? It ispletely a symbol of the noble status of us Tianlong people!"


    Speaking of this, Yakel immediately said proudly, but in the eyes of the other party, he seemed to be just like a fool.


    "Aerospace clothing?"


    After Chang Nuo heard this, he suddenly felt that there must be more truth behind this matter.


    In fact, many people have always been curious, why do the Tianlong people wear such clothes wherever they go? It ispletely separated from other categories, but in the end there is no moreplete or better exnation.

 Chapter 564 The Curiosity of the Celestial Dragons

    <h4>Chapter 564 The Curiosity of the Celestial Dragons</h4>


    With just one sentence, Chang Nuo suddenly seemed to understand the cause and process of everything.


    At least there are many answers that have troubled my heart for many years. At this moment, I suddenly feel a sense of enlightenment.


    Indeed, isn''t this kind of thing a space suit?


    After sitting there and pausing for a long time, Chang Nuo suddenly burst intoughter.


    The doubts in my heart seemed to suddenly be clear at this moment.


    "A very nice young man. I never thought there would be such an interesting guy among the Tianlong people!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile, and after taking a look, he was about to stand up and leave.


    But at this time, Yakel felt that Changnuo, the Emperor of Tru, was humiliating him with his words, so he also stood up directly, with an expression on his face that looked like he was angry.


    "Oh! I''m really sorry for interrupting your pleasant meal this time, but I will settle the bill this time, as the price of disturbing your meal!"


    Chang Nuo said with a smile, which could be regarded as an answer to the sudden enlightenment in his heart.


    After saying that, Chang Nuo strode out of the hotel in a hurry, leaving only two people with confused faces staying here.


    "Could this really be Emperor Tru? Why do you feel so nervous?"


    Yakkel said with some confusion.


    He didn''t have any personal strength, so he basically didn''t feel much of a deterrent. The several bodyguards guarding the door seemed to be relieved the moment the other party left.


    The sweat on their foreheads already showed how nervous they were.


    With the current tense situation between the Tru Empire and the World Government, no matter what actions the other party makes, they will not be surprised.


    So from the moment Emperor Tru entered the hotel, this group of people had already been on high alert. What they were alert to was nothing more than running away from here as quickly as possible, so as to save the two Tianlong people. The blood was sttering all over himself.


    "I think it''s pretty good. I didn''t expect Emperor Tru to be much more handsome than he looked in the newspaper. If I could marry such a man, I think it would be a pretty good thing!"


    Wei Mo''s words instantly brought Yakor back to his senses. He sat down and looked at his sister who was still eating in disbelief.


    "Wei Mo, what are you thinking about every day? Emperor Tru is already married, okay?"


    "He is a king, and there must be more than one around him!" Wei Mo said nonchntly.


    "You are a Celestial Dragon. Even if you get married in the future, you will either belong to the family of Celestial Dragons, or you will have to marry the other person to Mary Joa. There are no exceptions to this kind of thing, unless you voluntarily leave the family of Celestial Dragons. identity!"


    Yakkel thought for a moment and said.


    He didn''t pay too much attention to such things. It almost didn''t matter what his sister thought. After all, she was still young, and only Emperor Tru could take a liking to her.


    "What''s good for Tianlong people? Living in that circle every day, in fact, I''ve had enough. If there are so many delicious food every day, who would want to stay there? Isn''t it right? "


    Wei Mo asked cutely.


    These words directly made Yakel not know how to answer. Although they had lived a pampered life since childhood, the pain of being a Celestial Dragon destined them to be lonely all their lives. Without friends, they would not be able to do anything at all. Make friends with your friends!


    "Forget it, you''d better eat quickly. After eating, we should consider changing to another ce to y. There is nothing interesting here in the Tru Empire!"


    Akel said with a sigh.


    "That''s right, Saint Akel, the World Government meeting is about to start. I think it''s better for us to leave here as soon as possible!"


    As soon as Yakel finished speaking, a man in a ck suit at the door ran directly in and said to him.


    It is estimated that none of the current group of people want to stay here honestly and live a life of fear every day. This is not the treatment they should enjoy by following the Tianlong people.


    "World government proposal? This kind of thing has nothing to do with me." Wei Mo asked curiously.


    "To put it bluntly, this World Government meeting looks very strange. The Tru Empire was the first to be invited, and it was revealed that the emperor personally participated. This has never happened before, so we thought it would be as early as possible It would be better to leave.��


    The man in the suit spoke directly.


    As people who follow the Celestial Dragons, their IQs seem to be online.


    But anyone who knows about such things can easily guess that in this world government meeting, whether it is the world government or the Tru Empire, both sides seem to be trying to cause trouble. suspicion.


    "I think the people in Tru are very nice just now. They speak so gently, and they even apologized to us for rashlying to us. How could such a person be what you said?" Wei Mo asked, pouting.


    "I think what they said is good. If possible, we should leave this ce as soon as possible. There is nothing interesting in the Tru Empire. I also think it is good to leave this ce as soon as possible." Yakel said.


    "I don''t want it! I heard that the mermaid princess from Fishman Ind will appear in the Tru Empire tomorrow. ording to them, this is an extremely beautiful mermaid. Don''t you want to take a look, brother?"


    Wei Mo suddenly looked at Yakir with a grin and asked.


    "Mermaid princess?"


    Yakor held his chin with his right hand. In fact, he was also interested.


    This news had spread throughout the entire area a few days ago. Many people already knew that the mermaid princess wasing to King Tru City. This thing was not a secret at all.


    Moreover, the news in the Tru Empire in the past few days has basically been reporting on this matter, and there are even some people who have traveled thousands of miles toe here.


    Their purpose was to take a look at what this mermaid princess on the sea looked like.


    "Really, brother? We should at least wait until we see what the mermaid princess looks like before we consider whether to leave here, right?"


    Wei Mo suddenly asked with a smile.


    "That''s right. I''ve been here for so long and haven''t had a good look at what the Toru Empire looks like. At least we should have a look at the mermaid princess and then discuss whether to leave or not."


    Yakkel is only a half-grown child anyway, and the curiosity in his heart still suppresses his only rationality.

 Chapter 565 Special Meeting

    <h4>Chapter 565 Special Meeting</h4>


    It is normal to have such thoughts. As a Celestial Dragon, although there is often no shortage of everything, not everything can be seen.


    Especially in this case, the arrival of the mermaid princess Shirahoshi has already aroused the atmosphere to the extreme. From the moment she arrived, the entire Toru Empire has already magnified this matter infinitely.


    I am looking forward to the people whoe to watch this time, and it is estimated that the royal city can be filled up in an instant.


    And this is indeed the case now. There are obviously many more people on the streets than before. Even amodation venues such as hotels and guesthouses are now full of people next to each other!


    Bai Xing is indeeding to thend of the royal city. For this reason, the Lulu Empire has even built a passage connecting to the sea. This is a road specially provided for the passage of human beings. The width is about 20 meters, and it is not particrly deep water. , directly connected to road traffic as a whole.


    Normally, it can also be used by some small boats, but under the current situation, all boats are prohibited, and almost all the rest are reserved for the Mermaid Princess toe this time.


    It''s just that this kind of thing can only happen on the next day, but Changnuo, who had just rushed back from the two Tianlong people, Yakel, began to urgently summon everyone to discuss with the pce.


    If it was just what Yakel said that reminded him, thenbined with the content above from Rafdru, it all seemed so transparent.


    All the doubts were solved at this moment, and the problems that were not clear before were finally beginning to be understood.


    Especially for the various problems that had urred in the South China Sea before, and the sudden and strange changes in the sea surface climate, he seemed to have some kind of exnation in his heart at this moment.


    After all the notifications are sent out, even if those peoplee to participate in the meeting and wait for all those people to arrive, it actually only takes more than ten minutes.


    With the ability of the Space Devil Fruit, calling for an emergency meeting like this is just a matter of waving your hand and creating a space channel, and then the matter will naturally be solved.


    In the pce hall, Chang Nuo was sitting there quietly, with a folder in his hand and writing something in the other hand.


    At least he needs to express all the situations to bemunicated this time. As for the remaining issues, there is no need to think too much at all.


    In less than a while, ck vortexes began to appear in the hall. As each vortex closed, all the key generals of the Tru Empire gathered together.


    Of course, it wasn''t just the generals who gathered this time.


    "Your Majesty~"


    "Everyone, wait a moment. After everyone has arrived, choose to be in the space conference room to discuss the situation that needs to be notified to you next."


    They who had just arrived were preparing to ask doubtful questions, but Chang Nuo continued to write the materials in his hands without raising his head, and calmly opened his mouth to reject their next words.


    "Space conference room? What needs to start a first-level top-secret meeting?"


    Moshank stood there and asked in a low voice to General Yixiao next to him with some doubts.


    "It''s not clear yet, but it seems there must be something important." General Yixiao said.


    "What kind of thing can make His Majesty the King directly call the space gate to summon us?" Enel also asked curiously in a low voice.


    "Your Majesty the King, the space conference has been prepared. There are still three people who have not arrived yet. Do you need to contact us here?"


    As soon as Eniro finished speaking, before others could start to reply, Gogoya also jumped out of the space.


    After a ck vortex shed, Gogoya appeared in front of everyone respectfully holding a notebook, and lowered his head and spoke calmly.


    "We''ll wait until they are all here tomunicate and ask what happened."


    Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "No problem, Your Majesty the King, but I would like to ask, does office registration need to be activated for this meeting?"


    Gogoya asked again.


    "Go ording to the regtions!" Chang Nuo said.


    From beginning to end, he kept writing on his folder without even raising his head to look at it.


    As the name suggests, space meetings are not held in this space. They open the meeting room directly in a different space. The most important purpose is to prevent others from entering or eavesdropping. This situation is generally used for top-secret meetings.


    The Toru Empire has only opened it once so far, but all the people involved are basically people who can make decisive decisions for the entire Toru Empire.


    However, all the contents of the space meeting, no matter what the circumstances, are not allowed to appear in any paper form to the outside world. The only thing they can know is this meeting, and they only need to use their brains to remember it.


    And they will also add a forcible mark to this meeting to prevent them from speaking out due to reasons that may ariseter.


    After Gogoya received the order, he slowly took two steps back. The notebook he originally picked up and ced on his chest also ced it directly below after taking two steps back.


    "It seems like this meeting is not that simple?"


    General Deke said, and his expression became serious.


    Everyone else seems to have discovered this fact, and no one is guessing what the purpose of this meeting is.


    Anyway, as long as there is a space conference in the end, it means that there is already an existence that can endanger the entire Tru Empire.


    However, the first meeting was purely about military meetings, but this time the 11 generals who had arrived found one by one that everyone had arrived but had not started yet, which only meant that it was not yet possible. Someone other than the military arrives.


    But following their doubts, three ck whirlpools appeared again in the hall. When the people inside came out, this time they finally understood who thest few people in the meeting were.


    The arrival of the Minister of Commerce of the Tru Empire, the Minister of the Council, and the Minister of Security, who now mainly controls the police force of the Tru Empire, has already indicated the arrival of the Supreme Council of the entire Tru Empire.


    The moment the three people first appeared, even the Minister of Commerce was still a little unustomed to it. He felt dizzy and almost lost his bnce for a moment, but Eniro behind him hurriedly helped him.


    After standing still, the guy looked around with his sses on. His confused expression was broken in an instant, leaving only a serious look on his face.

 Chapter 566 Space Conference Room

    <h4>Chapter 566 Space Conference Room</h4>


    The expressions of the other two people who followed also had the same expression. From the initial doubts to the seriousness, one could already guess how serious the next thing would be.


    Almost all the top military and political leaders from the Tru Empire are already here. It is not difficult to imagine what the content of the meeting that will be conveyed next will reach.


    "Looks like everyone is here, right?"


    Chang Nuo lowered his head and continued writing. When he put down his pen, he slowly raised his head, stretched out and asked.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King, everyone involved in the meeting has arrived!"


    Gogoya took a step forward and said.


    "Now that everyone is here, open the space conference hall and enter directly!"


    Chang Nuo said slowly.


    After hearing the other party''s instructions, Gogoya nodded, and then took out an object with a faint blue light from her pocket. As she drew a circle in the air, it appeared out of thin air as soon as she arrived at the gate. In front of everyone.


    Gogoya stepped forward and grabbed the door handle. When he opened it, what appeared was not a conference hall, but a blue vortex.


    This feels both profound and depressing, but after all, there is indeed a conference hall behind it, and almost anyone who has experienced it will understand.


    But for most people, they have never been exposed to the content at all. All senior personnel know what the space conference room is like, but not everyone can participate.


    "The conference hall has been opened, pleasee with me!"


    Gogoya opened the door, shouted directly to the dozen or so people standing there, and then took elegant steps and was the first to step into the whirlpool.


    Others naturally have nothing to hesitate, but none of these three political ministers have experienced such a thing.


    General Yixiao took the lead, leaning on the crutch in his hand, and was the first to go in.


    The so-called conference hall is actually no different from the outside world. There are also various decorations inside, as if it is a conference room established in another ce.


    There is a table in the entire conference room that doesn''t look particrly big, and it can only seat about twenty or thirty people a week.


    There are only some other decorations around, various art exhibitions are hung on the walls, and there are even green nts ced in the corners.


    The entire conference room does not look very big, but as people enter the conference room, it seems to expand. As more peoplee in and out, it slowly begins to berger, and even the conference table besrger. Start automatically adding tables and chairs to get bigger.


    "I''ve only heard about this ce, but I didn''t expect it to look like this?"


    said the Minister of Security.


    "This is a space conference room. We only discuss situations that may harm the country. The first-level files are top secret. Please don''t speak until His Majesty arrives!"


    After Gogoya entered, he stood directly next to the chair at the front. He looked at the people who came behind them and were chatting among each other. He instantly turned into a cold look and said in a low voice. .


    After hearing this voice, this group of senior executives of the Tru Empire who were originally aloof, immediately became honest and well-behaved.


    Everyone quickly sat down in their seats, ced their hands directly on the table, and stared closely in the direction of the front seat.


    "Everyone, some of you have never participated in a space conference. Now let me exin the rules of this conference room."


    Gogoya looked at everyone and spoke directly. He stood there with his hands folded on his waist and looked at everyone with keen eyes.


    After seeing that they did not do anything unnecessary, Gogoya continued to say, "The space meeting is the most secret meeting in the Tru Empire. Anyone who participates in the meeting is prohibited from revealing the content of this meeting to anyone, even the closest people around him." Dear friends, you are not allowed to mention that after the meeting, shackles about the content of the meeting will appear in everyone''s memory, preventing them from saying anything about the meeting room at any time and anywhere.


    And no one is allowed to take notes with pen and paper during space meetings. I hope you will remember this! "


    After Gogoya finished speaking, no one answered. Although I don''t understand why the content of the space meeting needs to be in this way? But they at least understand that since they can start such a high-level meeting, it means that something more important is definitely happening.


    When everyone was ready, Chang Nuo appeared here unhurriedly.


    He slowly walked to his seat, looked around at everyone, then tapped the table with his fingers and sat down directly.


    "Your Majesty the King, what is the purpose of convening such an urgent meeting suddenly?"


    Junhe, who was sitting at the front, asked in confusion.


    "Everyone has arrived, and the content of the meeting will begin. However, this time it is indeed confidential information. I am afraid that there will definitely be a lot of things that require you to work hard."


    Chang Nuo was the first to start smiling and said directly.


    "The fact that His Majesty the King can show such an expression shows that this matter is not a bad thing. He must have something good to share with us, right?" General Yixiao asked.


    "It''s really not a bad thing, but it''s definitely not a good thing. I just suddenly understood a lot, and I''m afraid there will be trouble for you next.


    So regarding today''s meeting, I hope you can keep it in mind that it will most likely determine the future life and death of our Tru Empire. "


    When he finished talking, Chang Nuo''s eyes turned serious.


    The main reason why I was able to keep smiling was because I got the answers and results I wanted.


    Everything can be done in advance. Even though we can''t take any measures at the moment, we can at least make preparations to deal with it.


    For today''s Tru Empire, even if a war breaks out in the future, it can greatly reduce various losses.


    For everyone, they could only look at the king sitting at the top seriously. From the moment their expressions began to change, no one would think that this matter would be simple anymore.


    Being able to involve all high-level officials from both the military and political parties in this meeting is still a bit confusing. What kind of things can directly involve the two departments?


    But they didn''t ask about such things, but it wasn''t impossible to understand.

 Chapter 567 Introduction to the King of Ancient Weapons

    <h4>Chapter 567 Introduction to the King of Ancient Weapons</h4>


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he looked at them quietly. Facing a group of people who were still silent and listening attentively, he closed his eyes and took a deep breath.


    Then he stood up directly, put his hands on the conference table, leaned forward and looked at them and continued, "Enilu, now that you are in charge of the Clearwater Bay scientific research project, you should be sure to build a flying ship, right?"


    "This shouldn''t be a big problem, but I wonder when His Majesty the King will need it? Do you have any special needs?"


    Enelu also asked seriously.


    "The kind that can fly to the moon!" Chang Nuo said.


    "We still need to go back and discuss this matter carefully, and give you an answer as soon as possible!" Anilu said.


    "Your Majesty the King, are we going to build an air force?" Junhe asked directly.


    The eyes of others were instantly attracted. After all, they had seen the World Government''s air force. Although it had been wiped out before they even showed up, such a situation was still out of reach for many people.


    "No, the main purpose this time is to deal with the ancient weapon~King of Heaven!"


    "King of Heaven???"


    ��


    For a moment, everyone was shocked. For many people, they probably didn��t even know what the King of Heaven was?


    "King Uranus? What is going on, Your Majesty?"


    General Yixiao couldn''t help but asked in shock.


    "Is it possible that the King of Heaven has appeared?" Abona also opened his mouth to ask.


    Everyone else also looked curious, from the serious look at the beginning to the more serious and shocked look now. This situation is simply out of reach for them.


    "Now it''s not just the King of Heaven, but the King of the Sea has also appeared, so no matter what, the challenges we face next will be great, but it''s not sure yet whether the thing I know is the King of Heaven, but no matter what , this time we have to go and take a look.


    The ancient weapon Pluto already exists in the Toru Empire, and I think you have seen his power. However, among the ancient weapons, Pluto is at the bottom, so no matter what, we must prepare the King''s response n in advance. Prepare.


    Neptune has also appeared, and is now also in the Tru Empire. The purpose of this meeting is very simple, that is, we need to let you know the ancient weapons we need to face next, as well as the future response and disposal ns.


    The appearance of the King of Heaven has had a great impact on us. The various problems that urred in the South China Seast time are initially estimated to be caused by the King of Heaven. Therefore, I hope that you will be prepared for theing time. "


    Chang Nuo still stood there, speaking with an extremely serious expression.


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King, if any special situation urs, all the troops will be absolutely ready!" Junhe stood up directly to express his attitude.


    "Now I hope His Majesty the King can exin clearly, what exactly are the King of Heaven and the King of the Sea?" General Yixiao asked seriously.


    "Sea King is currently in the Tohru Empire, and he is Shirahoshi, the Princess of Fish-Man Ind, who will appear in the Royal City tomorrow!"


    Chang Nuo said it directly without any further concealment.


    Sooner orter this kind of thing will be known to them. Now that they know it in advance, they can at least make some countermeasures. But what can be imagined is that these people will be quite shocked after getting this answer.


    The reality was just as they said. Surprise was written almost all over their faces, and even Enelu''s mouth was already wide open, feelingpletely unbelievable.


    "Your Majesty the King, we and others don''t know anything about the existence of ancient weapons and their capabilities. I wonder if Your Majesty the King can be more detailed?" General Deke also stood up and asked.


    "I can tell you a little about these things. First of all, there is no need to borate too much about the ancient weapon Pluto. As generals, you should be very clear about all the situations.


    As for Neptune, although it is an ancient weapon, she is indeed a person. Fish-Man Ind will appear once every 800 years, and every time it will fall on the Mermaid Princess. However, as of today 800 yearster, the current Mermaid Ind Princess Shirahoshi , is the candidate for this year��s Sea King.


    Neptune''s ability can control all Neptunes in the world, and the powerful power can cause the world to overturn in an instant. However, as of now, Shirahoshi has not awakened the relevant power, so in response to all this, he has already done this a few years ago. Well prepared, the rtionship between the Toru Empire and the Fish-Man Ind has already determined that the future Sea King will belong to the Toru Empire even after he awakens his abilities.


    As for Uranus, ording to current preliminary estimates, it is very likely that it belongs to the moon, or is other facilities built on the moon. This is not yet clear.


    But the clothes the Dracos wore and the ss oxygen masks hanging on their heads made me guess that these things must be rted to the moon.


    The King of Heaven''s ability is to control the weather and even the regional climate. The various extreme conditions that urred in the waters of the Tru Empire in the past were most likely caused by this aspect.


    Another thing that is certain is that the current King of Ancient Weapons has control over him in the hands of the World Government. "


    Changnuo spoke in a direct and low voice, and began to introduce his knowledge of ancient weapons in a long speech.


    This is not just based on his feelings, but these situations are indeed more in line with reality. When all of this is sorted out, everything seems to be reasonable.


    The expression on the person below began to be serious.


    Can they all guess how things will develop? The World Government controls the King of Ancient Weapons that can control the weather, which means that as long as the other party is willing, it can eliminate threats anywhere in this world anytime, anywhere.


    They were simply too arrogant to be arrogant. Even though they already had the strength of generals, they all felt at a loss.


    At least before, many of them had no idea how powerful ancient weapons were, or what kind of abilities they had. However, judging from this introduction, the ancient weapon Pluto exists in special The Lu Empire actually possesses one of the worst weapons in ancient times. The Sea King can even control all the Sea Kings in the entire sea. What kind of concept is this?

 Chapter 568 The situation 800 years ago

    <h4>Chapter 568 The situation 800 years ago</h4>


    They really can''t imagine how far such an ability can reach? Just relying on one weapon can destroy the entire world, but if it is in the hands of one person, then he canpletely surpass the entire human race.


    Chang Nuo looked at the worried looks on their faces, his tone slowed down a little, and he sat there and said, "Although Pluto is the weakest of the three ancient weapons, one thing that is unknowable is that, among the three ancient weapons, Pluto is the weakest. Among the great weapons, only Pluto can be copied, and other weapons can only be of that kind in the end!"


    "Having said that, the capabilities of the ancient weapons Sea King and Heavenly King have exceeded our imagination."


    Junhe frowned and spoke seriously. Even though he didn''t understand many of these things, he could still hear some other things.


    "Your Majesty the King, you just said that the Sea King is in our Trul Empire. How should we deal with Princess Shirahoshi of Mermaid Ind?"


    Abona asked directly.


    "The questions each of you asked are quite good, and it is true that each of these things has a rtivelyrge impact on the Tru Empire.


    That''s good. We are the first country to know about the existence of Neptune. Even the Fish-Man Ind themselves probably don''t know about the rest. This gives us many opportunities.


    As for the existence of the King of Heaven, this is the ultimate reason for this meeting.


    I hope that everyone can cooperate fully in the future. The King''s ability has been mentioned just now. It is mainly to control the weather. This can directly lead to a devastating blow to an area. But what we can do is to try our best in the next time. To ovee all forms of attacks, this matter can only be handed over to the Ministry of Commerce, the Ministry of Security and the Ministry of Consultation!


    I need the three of you to discuss a better result in the shortest possible way. My suggestion so far is to build arge number of underground caves across the country. When the timees, I will personally build them all into space disaster refuges one by one. Each area must be built in this manner every 20 kilometers, and one is built every 5 kilometers in the royal city.


    The real decisive battle will begin soon. I hope you can be prepared and strive to minimize all losses. This is what the three of you can do! "


    Chang Nuo said seriously and solemnly.


    Let theme here this time, indeed for this purpose, which is nothing more than to build something simr to an air raid shelter.


    However, when the timees, I will go there and directly give space capabilities, so that at least hundreds of thousands of people can live in a small space without feeling crowded.


    This is indeed an imminent situation for them. The King''s attacks have already begun to fall. If they do not have the ability to avoid this risk in the future, even if they can really defeat the World Government, what will happen?


    "Your Majesty the King, the Ministry of Commerce will definitely coordinate all economic capabilities and coordinate this matter with the Council of Ministers as quickly as possible. There will definitely not be any dy in this matter!" The Minister of Commerce stood up with a serious expression. replied.


    "The Security Department will definitely be involved in this matter throughout the entire process to ensure that every area can proceed smoothly!"


    "After the Council came back, they immediately started holding a meeting to use an alternative form toplete this incident perfectly. While doing so, they will never let anymon people discover the purpose of the construction!"


    The two ministers behind stood up at the same time. Everyone had realized the seriousness of the matter and said with the same serious expression.


    "This time, wait for you toe back and give me a n immediately. The Tru Empire mustplete this matter as quickly as possible. At least, it mustplete the construction of this thing within a short time. Even if When arge-scale war breaks out, the influence of the King of Heaven on us will directly reach its lowest level!"


    Changnuo stared at the three of them and said.


    "Your Majesty, how did you discover the existence of the King of Heaven?"


    General Yixiao asked with some confusion.


    Almost everyone who has experienced an era can hear some of the three major weapons of ancient times, but for them, the closest level they cane into contact with should be Pluto, but the other two ancient weapons have not even heard of it. No.


    "Dragon people, two Tianlong people came to the Tru Empire recently. I happened to have nothing to do today. I went for a walk and met these two people. One of them was a man. Anyway, he was quite interesting. From his perspective When I learned that the clothes they were wearing might actually be space suits, I could already roughly guess it."


    Chang Nuo said rtively rxedly.


    It is impossible for him to directly say that there is a construction base on the moon. He has never known what kind of things exist there. But nowbined with the fact that the Tianlong people may be wearing space suits, everything will be different. All things can be solved easily, and you can get the most perfect answer.


    "Space suit? Is it possible that they had reached the moon as early as 800 years ago?" General Yixiao asked in disbelief.


    "We cannot exin many things at all, and we have no way to exin what the situation was like 800 years ago. However, the content of Lafdrew has told us that that era was not as simple as we imagined, but the specifics Where did these ancient weaponse from? It��s still unknown!��


    Changnuo said.


    "ording to this, it seems that there are many secrets in this world that we don''t know at all. In the future, the intelligence department will explore the secrets of this world as soon as possible and strive to have everything in hand." Abona said tightly. Then he said.


    "The news I got today is really shocking. The mermaid princess of Fish-Man Ind is actually a weapon of the Neptune and can control all the Neptunes in the world. It is also possible that there is an ancient weapon king on the moon. What an incredible thing. Now We have already encountered them.


    This may be an opportunity or a challenge for the Tru Empire, but no matter what, we will protect the fruits of ourbor even with our lives. "


    Junhe sat there holding his fists and said.


    Many people actually have a bitter look on their faces, especially those who have just been promoted to generals. In fact, they are not exposed to many things. So what if they are powerful? If it were not for this meeting, I am afraid that hearing such news elsewhere would directly subvert their three views.

 Chapter 569 The excitement of the Tru Empire

    <h4>Chapter 569 The excitement of the Tru Empire</h4>


    After everyone had finished speaking, the entire conference room remained extremely quiet, and the only sound that could be heard was the sound of breathing.


    The faces are getting darker and darker each time, maybe they are summing up their experience, or maybe they are thinking about other things.


    "Since everyone has no questions, today''s matters will end here for the time being. I will summarize and reiterate the important matters next.


    First, the next research project of Clear Water Bay, which General Eniro is responsible for, is mainly aimed at ships that can fly into the sky and can carry at least ten people. At the same time, a set of aerospace costumes simr to those on the Tianlong people are also and developed.


    Second, for the construction projects that the Ministry of Commerce, the Ministry of Consultation and the Security Department are responsible for, we need to seize the time and implement them as soon as possible.


    Third, in the areas that other generals are responsible for, everyone once again strengthens training and is ready for war at any time.


    The era of the Tru Empire ising, but the risks that belong to us have not been eliminated. I hope that everyone can work together! Work together to deal with the risks that may arise next. "


    Chang Nuo stood up again and spoke seriously to everyone.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King!"


    ��


    Everyone stood up immediately and answered in unison.


    The content of this meeting was very simple, or the content of this meeting was very simple. It was originally just to convey the requirements on these things.


    Originally, ording to such a n and development, the content of the meeting did not need to be convened by Changnuo himself. However, most people are not clear about this kind of thing. This method is the simplest, most direct and harmonious. Right.


    the next day.


    This day is probably the busiest day in the entire Tru Empire or the Royal City. Countless people are already on the streets, and even the roofs are already full of people.


    They were all looking forward to it quietly. After all, this time it was the mermaid princess from the legendary Fish-Man Ind who came. They hade into contact with all kinds of mermaids before, but this time the situation waspletely different.


    The mermaid princess who has always been in the legend came to the Tru Empire in person, and with all the previous newspaper publicity, many people have begun to rush here just to see the mermaid princess.


    Noisy sounds can alsoe and go. This time, Shirahoshi''s route to the Tohru Empire was not on the main street of the Tohru Empire. Although it did not cause much impact, most people had already arrived here. He had to take the waterway over the sea, so there was almost no one on the streets of the entire royal city of the Tru Empire.


    "Brother, I''ve been waiting for more than an hour, why hasn''t the mermaid princess shown up yet?"


    In the ce closest to the water among the crowd, six or seven men in ck suits formed a circle. The ones closest to the edge were the two Tianlong people who came to the Tru Empire.


    The area around them is the most rxed area, and other ces have long been surrounded by the people of the Tru Empire. It is even difficult to turn around and breathe.


    Some people who stayed behind were probably suspended in mid-air by the crowd, and their purpose was almost exactly the same.


    Only these two Tianlong people were sitting on the edge of the water. Wei Mo''s feet were even bare and he was soaking them directly in the water.


    "Oh~, Wei Mo, we have only been here ten minutes, how can we have an hour? We should wait patiently now!"


    Yakor spoke in a gentle tone, without showing any impatience, as if he had be ustomed to this kind of thing.


    But his expectant eyes kept looking towards the direction connecting to the sea. Even as a Tianlong, his eyes were full of expectations.


    ing!!!"


    I don''t know if it was someone in the crowd or on the roof, but someone suddenly shouted, and the crowd that had been waiting for this moment suddenly became restless.


    Each of them started to look towards the direction connecting to the sea, for fear of missing anything.


    But in the eyes, the first thing that appeared was a boat. Although the boat didn''t look particrly big, it still felt very conspicuous.


    In front of the boat, half of the murloc troops were suspended in the water. There were at least one or two hundred people moving forward in a row.


    Everyone holds a spear in their hand. Not only is the team uniform, but their eyes are constantly looking around, ready to respond to possible dangers.


    "Princess, there are so many humans here!"


    Behind Bai Xing, one of the little mermaids said.


    This was probably the first time in her life that she had seen so many human beings, so densely packed that she couldn''t even see their heads.


    Bai Xing didn''t have such a good attitude. If it weren''t for the presence of so many people around him, this little girl would have already be nervous and uneasy.


    But they did not stay on the ship. What was ced on the ship was just some luggage they carried with them, and the vice admiral who came to protect them this time.


    "Wow! What a big mermaid..."


    "It is indeed so beautiful..."


    "I feel in love..."


    ��


    As soon as they entered this narrow waterway, the crowds on both sides started shouting loudly.


    They were either admiring the beauty or the size. It was understandable that they were surprised to see such a huge mermaid for the first time.


    "That... Lieutenant General, should I give them some reply?"


    Shirahoshi knocked on the wooden boat in front and gave a cordial greeting to Morokkov, who was standing there in preparation.


    "I think...it''s up to you to do this at your own discretion. There''s no need to reply or anything like that. Just wave your hand."


    Morokoff said.


    After hearing this, Bai Xing immediately began to understand. With a huge body and a smile on his face, he kept waving to the crowds on both sides.


    "Princess White Star..."


    "Princess Mermaid, wee to the Tru Empire!!!"


    ��


    This wave of his hand instantly caused a stir among the crowd, and each of them began to shout at the top of their lungs.


    But it also proves that their enthusiasm can at least make these mermaids who are usually afraid of humans feel extremely friendly.


    Let them also know that human beings are not as scary as they imagined, and there are still many people in the world who are willing to ept groups like them.


    Feeling the scene in front of him, Bai Xing waved his hands vigorously, but tears flowed down at this time.

 Chapter 570 The person who came out to greet you

    <h4>Chapter 570 The person who came out to greet you</h4>


    In her mind, she felt the atmosphere of this scene, which instantly reminded her of what her mother once said.


    Before her death, Princess Otohime was still requesting that Fishman Ind could coexist peacefully with humans, and both sides would definitely ept each other.


    But isn��t this scene in front of me already done?


    The Tru Empire can ept jobs from mermaids or fishmen and enjoy the same treatment as their ordinary citizens. This already means that Fishman Ind has indeed taken a big step.


    "Mother, humans and fish-men can really coexist!"


    Bai Xing held back tears and muttered to himself.


    People on both sides outside were cheering and waving, and he was also waving to people on both sides of the Taiwan Strait. At least this scene seemed so harmonious.


    "Wow! What a big mermaid, and also so beautiful. If I get this mermaid princess, the other guys will probably be jealous to death, right?"


    Akel looked at this scene, and his whole body was already in a state of dementia. He stared at Bai Xing with a stern look in his eyes, and he had already imagined countless scenarios in his heart that would lead her to Mariejoia.


    "Brother, I don''t think what you are getting is the envy of others. On the contrary, it is very likely that you will not be able to leave this ce at all!"


    Wei Mo said with a mocking look on his face.


    "You don''t need to say this, I''m just thinking about it!"


    Yakel said speechlessly.


    Originally, he just wanted to fantasize about it. If it were another ce, he might actually have an idea, but where is this? Tru Empire! A ce that doesn''t pay attention to the existence of the Celestial Dragons at all. If you don''t pay attention, you may die if you stay here.


    If it weren''t for the fact that this ce was quite prosperous and interesting, they probably wouldn''t be able to stay any longer.


    Despite this fantasy, the main reason is that the other party is simply too beautiful.


    But now everyone''s eyes are almost all fixed on Bai Xing, just like a spotlight, allowing this mermaid princess who rarelyes out to be directly exposed to the public''s view at this moment.


    "Mermaid Princess! Looking at him like this, he must be worth a lot of money. An ordinary mermaid is worth two to three billion beli, or even up to 2 billion beli. So this mermaid princess is probably worth at least tens of billions. ?��


    Among the admiring crowd, not everyone is weing him warmly. At least at this moment, there are still people who dare to make such an idea.


    But as soon as he said his soliloquy, it didn''t evenst ten minutes. This guy still stayed here, looking at the approaching Shirahoshi. He didn''t have time to make any real moves at all, but he Already standing beside him were two tough-looking men.


    Aftering to his side, both of them put their shoulders on each other''s neck, showing apletely friendly expression.


    "Hey hey hey! Who are you two?"


    The man who just spoke looked at the sturdy men on both sides with some confusion and asked.


    "What a guy who doesn''t even know how to write the word "death". He has alreadye to the Tru Empire and he still dares to think wrong."


    The man standing on his left, while others were not paying attention and all his eyes were focused on the mermaid princess, punched the other person in the stomach.


    After receiving the impact, this guy also bent over and held his stomach.


    But how could the people on both sides give him a chance? One person held an arm and began to drag him in another direction.


    However, among the many people, this guy was not the only one who had such an idea. At least during this appreciation, the Imperial Police Force arrested nearly a hundred people in total.


    They almost all have the same idea. What''s more important is that this group of people once arrived in the New World. Later, they learned that the Tru Empire was rtively powerful. They wanted to seek a stable life and take another look. Do you have any chance?


    The strength is not very strong, but the ideas are very dangerous. Theypletely ignore where they are, and an idea can be conveyed to the outside through the bracelet on their hands.


    Anyone who has been here for more than three years will not have any idea about this matter at all.


    After all, after a long time, the hearts of ordinary people have long been changed by this environment. The ability of the psychic devil fruit ispletely eptable and has covered the entire country, so as long as people do not wear bracelets, they arepletely capable. Make sure they are part of this country.


    The mermaid princess only traveled through the Tru Empire once, and her final destination was to go to the Tru Empire Pce.


    This is also the purpose of her visit this time. Although the two can be regarded as friends, Shirahoshi still knows that the rtionship between the Tru Empire and Fish-Man Ind still needs to be maintained, especially ording to the current situation of Fish-Man Ind. , has almost no defense ability against the outside world. Although she only stays in the hard-shell tower, it does not mean that she has no understanding of the outside world.


    The existence of the Toru Empire is definitely the most fundamental reason why Fishman Ind can have such a life now.


    An existence that can connect the new world and the great sea route. Now, whether it is pirates or navy, one by one has long been thinking about taking it down. If it were not for the special geographical location of the existence, there would have been many problems already.


    But this time when she went to the royal pce, she was greeted by a being that no one expected.


    Before Hancock appeared at the gate of the pce, even Lieutenant General Morokkov who participated in the escort found it a bit unbelievable.


    Although she is no longer the Pirate Empress, Hancock is still the monarch of a country no matter what. Although she has not yet publicly acknowledged that she is Princess Tru, most people already know about both. The rtionship between.


    Coming out to greet Shirahoshi in this capacity is enough to prove how seriously the Toru Empire takes this matter.


    "Princess Bai Xing, the person in front is the mother of our eldest prince of the Tru Empire. It seems that she should have made a special trip to greet you."


    Morokkov said, but he did not mention the identity of the other party.


    Using the identity of the eldest prince''s mother to tell Bai Xing was very formal, directly avoiding the situation of the other party''s identity, and at the same time not belittling the other party''s identity.


    "Lieutenant General Morokkov, the one in front is the empress of Nine Snakes Ind, and she is the woman I admire the most!"


    Shirahoshi suddenly smiled and said to Morokoff.


    The current situation of the Tohru Empire no longer needs to be introduced by Morokkov. In fact, Shirahoshi also knows some of the many people and interpersonal rtionships within it.

 Chapter 571 Welcome

    <h4>Chapter 571 Wee</h4>


    Morokoff probably didn''t even expect that Princess White Star of Mermaid Ind would actually know Hancock, but this would at least avoid too much embarrassment.


    As the murloc soldiers who had arrived at the Tru Empire Pce, all of them stayed on the outside. Only Morokkov and a group of soldiers were left, and they started to approach the edge in a small boat.


    At the gate of the pce, Hancock and Gogoya were standing here waiting. The only difference between the situation above the sea and on Fish-Man Ind was that the coral bubbles here had no effect at all.


    This means that as a mermaid, Shirahoshi has no way to walk onnd at all.


    So when she swam directly to the shore, the smile that had been on her face now felt a little overwhelmed.


    "Wee to Princess Shirahoshi!"


    Gogoya took the lead and walked directly to the edge, saying with a smile on his face.


    "Hello...hello!"


    Bai Xing shouted shyly.


    "Wee to your arrival. My name is Hancock, and I am also the imperial concubine of the Tru Empire. His Majesty the King has something to do today and is unable to wee you. He specially asked me toe here to receive you!"


    Hancock also walked forward with a smile. Even though half of the other party''s body was still in the water, the one exposed to the sea was still much taller than them.


    "I know you, Empress Boya Hancock."


    Bai Xing grinned sweetly and smiled directly.


    "With this thing, you can float directly on thend. We will go in togetherter and let you taste the delicacies belonging to the special empire!" Hancock said.


    "Will brother Changnuoe back?"


    "He should be back in a while, we can also just wait inside!" Hancock said again.


    After hearing this, Bai Xing smiled and directly took what Hancock handed over.


    This is something that looks like a blue gem. The only difference is that it is a square, but it feels really crystal clear, and it also emits a faint light from time to time.


    The moment he took this thing into his hand, Bai Xing instantly felt that his body was much lighter. With a little force on his tail, his whole body was levitated directly.


    "Princess Shirahoshi!"


    Just after Bai Xing levitated, the two people were not surprised at all, but their faces showed the embarrassment of being unable to follow.


    "You just wait here, or go for a walk. Anyway, you don''t have to worry about your safety here! I guess Lieutenant General Morokkov will let someone take you for a walk, right?"


    "You can rest assured about this. As long as you are in the South China Sea, we will not only protect your safety, but the people around you will also not have any problems."


    As soon as Bai Xing finished speaking, Morokoff said with a smile on his face.


    "In that case, let''s go in first, and I will give you a good introduction to the Tru Empireter. Maybe I believe that the little princess Bai Xing will like it here." Hancock said.


    "Um!!"


    Already suspended above the ground, the most important thing that I was worried about now has disappeared. Before, I was still thinking about how to step directly onto thend, but at least now there is no such thing.


    The murloc paradise built for them ispletely different. All the facilities above are half water and half built. This not only ensures entertainment among the murlocs, but more importantly, allows them to experience life onnd.


    After a mermaid reaches the age of 30, the lower fins will slowly grow two legs, and then they can live onnd without much difference from normal humans. But mermaids are different. They can live almost from birth. Onnd, entertainment parks for such people are better built for them.


    In order to wee this Neptune, Bai Xing''s arrival not only aroused the curiosity of the people across the country, but more importantly, it also attracted the attention of the country.


    Today, the pce gate opens directly on both sides, weing this being from a depth of 10,000 meters under the sea with the highest etiquette. Even during the weing process, every detail reflects the friendly rtionship between humans and mermaids. atmosphere of.


    "Is this the Toru Empire Pce?"


    After arriving inside the pce, Bai Xing was suspended above the ground. He looked at Hankuke and Gogoya who were walking next to him with some confusion and asked.


    "Does it feel less luxurious than you imagined? In this regard, anyone who has been to the Tru Empire actually has the same doubts. After all, to outsiders, the Tru Empire ispletely amercial center. And with a lot of money, an emperor��s pce will not have such a shabby image!��


    Gogoya said with a smile.


    "No no no!! Don''t get me wrong, I don''t have such thoughts, I''m just curious."


    Bai Xing hurriedly exined.


    "It''s okay, little princess. It''s actually normal to have such thoughts. His Majesty the King doesn''t really care about these things. He cares more about the people''s life issues. As for what kind of ce he can live in, from the beginning Since the beginning, he has never mentioned it to anyone.��


    Gogoya said.


    "That''s it! Although this ce is not as luxurious as expected, at least you can still feel the ancient atmosphere here." Bai Xing said with a smile.


    "The life of the Toru Empire in the past was not what it is now. At that time, it was just the Toru Kingdom. Even in the South China Sea, this country was small and pitiful. It was not even qualified to join the World Government. It was only a dozen situation years ago.


    After His Majesty the King became the king, the Kingdom of Tru began to develop rapidly. Until now, the Empire of Tru has almost be a proud existence in the world. The entire South China Sea region has been integrated into one country. The people of this country, every At least one no longer has to worry about food, let alone any safety worries. "


    Gogoya said seriously.


    Not only was Shirahoshi listening to these words carefully, but Hancock, who was also marching together, was also listening carefully.


    Although he knew some of the history of the Toru Empire, he didn''t know the more detailed things at all. After all, the Toru Empire was already rtively powerful at that time.


    But with such a beautiful side, the younger generation has never thought about what the sadness was like in the past.


    ��What was life like in this country before?��


    The person who asked this question was actually not Shirahoshi, but Hancock who was walking together.


    She didn''t stay in the Tru Empire for long, and she mostly stayed on her own Nine Snake Ind.

 Chapter 572 Above the Moon

    <h4>Chapter 572 Above the Moon</h4>


    Nowadays, it is rare to get in touch with the image of the Tru Empire before. Naturally, I want to have a good understanding of this country''s past.


    "So Lord Hancock doesn''t know about it either? I''m also very curious about this. I wonder, Lord Gogoya, can you borate on it?"


    Bai Xing also asked.


    "Don''t call me Sir here, just call me Gogoya. Regarding the past events of the Tru Empire, we can exin the situation to you in detail after we get inside."


    Gogoya said to the two people with a smile.


    Unknowingly, the three of them had almost reached the main hall. In fact, in the pce of the Toru Empire, there were not many rooms that could amodate Shirahoshi''s figure. After she was suspended above the ground, her overall height It was almost 10m tall, and its huge size even surprised the people who came to serve it.


    However, this time the reception might not be in the main hall, but in a garden in the center of the main hall.


    It is surrounded by green trees and flowers, but in the middle there is a circr pool that seems to be at least 50m in diameter. The water in it is clean and crystal clear. However, in the other direction of the pool, there are many servants. But at this moment, he quickly prepared a huge rectangr table.


    "I''m sorry. Today''s banquet may be held here. After all, we need to consider your convenience."


    After the three people arrived, Gogoya lowered his head, bowed to Shirahoshi, and said with an apologetic tone.


    "It doesn''t matter! This ce is pretty good too."


    Bai Xing said without any concern.


    As she spoke, she floated directly above the water, then ced the square blue gem in her hand directly on the edge of the pool, and her whole body slowly sank directly into the pool.


    Gogoya and Hancock were sitting elegantly on the edge of the pool. Their mission today should be to apany this huge mermaid, and almost everything else was neglected.


    However, these three people did not feel bored at all. After Gogoya sat on the edge of the pool, she began to tell them everything she knew about the past of the Tru Empire.


    Everything I have experienced is almost exined in detail.


    However, Changnuo, the Emperor of Tru, does not seem to have such a good desire to control. Ever since he learned about the ancient weapon king, which is likely to exist on the moon, he has already gotten rid of other people and came alone. this ce.


    What no one could have imagined was that there could still be oxygen in this ce, but the situation on the outside waspletely different. Only a hundred meters close to the ground, even normal people could survive here.


    Standing on the moon, Chang Nuo looked at the he was on. Therge area of ??the pirate world was almost all sea water. From this angle, it lookedpletely blue, just like a pearl, quietly suspended in the distant space.


    There is no gravity on the moon. There is no gravity at all. Except that there is nondscape here. It is almost desert and rocky. Under the destion, without any vitality, everything else is It is exactly the same as the ground where I live in the pirate world.


    He looked up and saw that the current ne waspletely different. Here, the domineering energy and the perception of the immortal body were directly developed at the same time, and all situations in the entire area could be sensed almost instantly.


    A long time ago, he vaguely remembered that there seemed to be robots or other things on the moon, but Chang Nuo had not paid attention to these things before.


    But after this incident happened, he even thought about whether the entire civilization on the moon came from an extraterrestrial world?


    Who created all this? Was technology so advanced 800 years ago? What kind of civilization can create one that can directly enter the moon?


    But as he has stepped on this inch ofnd on the moon, all the puzzles may soon appear in front of him.


    Here, Changnuo''s distance is at least several kilometers with every step he takes. Every time he takes a step, thend under his feet is changing the scene. Everything looks so incredible. Even in such a deste ce, it is actually There may also be unexpected urrences.


    It didn''t take long for Chang Nuo to have arrived at the back of the moon. It was apletely dark ce. In addition to using the domineering power of seeing and hearing and the perception of the immortal body, even if an ordinary person was ced here, he would probably have some trouble. The feeling of being unable to move even an inch.


    "How many years has it been? I didn''t expect that someone would still be able to set foot on thisnd!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo arrived on the back side of the moon, a sound came out directly, making it impossible to even feel the direction from which the sound came.


    But then, the dark side of the moon, which was originally dark and invisible, just in an instant, the entire back area began to gradually light up, and the powerful light was just like daytime.


    In the world that is clear at a nce, it is not known how many things exist on the ground that are not human, but most of them are mechanical in appearance, just like mecha warriors, standing there one by one.


    But at the same time, in a certain corner of the pirate world, a person suddenly opened his eyes, like an eagle''s eyes, directly raised his head and looked up in the direction of the moon.


    "It seems that the civilization here is beyond everyone''s imagination? Could it be that the World Government''s air force was built here?"


    Changnuo stood in a ce that looked exactly like a city of science and technology, looking around at the scene and talking to himself.


    "Hahaha! It''s true, I don''t know how many years have passed, but I didn''t expect that someone could actuallye to this ce!"


    After the words fell, this time it waspletely different from before. A person slowly walked out of the door full of technology.


    He looks to be about 50 years old, of medium height, and wearing a white coat. The only shoring is that his head is a little bald, and he doesn''t show much energy.


    Who could have imagined that there are real humans living on the moon, and that in such a ce, there is such a sci-fi technology city.


    "Who are you?"


    Chang Nuo opened his mouth and asked doubtfully.

 Chapter 573 Shocking Information

    <h4>Chapter 573 Shocking Information</h4>


    But when he spoke, the fifty-year-old man opposite him suddenly showed a puzzled expression.


    "You''re not from the World Government?"


    The bald old man asked in surprise.


    "Is it possible that only people from the World Government are allowed toe here? What is the logic of your idea?"


    "That shouldn''t be the case? Apart from the world government, what kind of technology can reach the moon? Not to mention that you still look like a rtively young guy."


    The bald man said, but his expression was just puzzled. After a moment, a smile appeared on his face and he said again, "I don''t care who you are now. I haven''t seen a real person in decades. It sounds pretty good." Old man, what I��m looking forward to is, now that you��re here, don��t leave and have a good chat about the situation below!��


    "You said you haven''t said who you are yet? Why are you in such a ce?"


    "Oh? Are you talking about me? Maybe I don''t even know my name anymore. Maybe someone will call me Vegapunk, or maybe there are other names! As for whether I am the real person? I''m afraid even I can''t tell clearly. !��


    The bald man''s words instantly confused Chang Nuo.


    Vegapunk, this name sounds so familiar, but shouldn''t this person be in the pirate world now? So who is this person in front of me?


    "What do you mean by that?" Chang Nuo asked doubtfully and seriously.


    "I don''t know how many years I have lived. Anyway, every time before I die, I will clone my cells, and my memories will follow them directly. They are exactly the same in the entire base. I already exist. There are more than a hundred of them, and apart from researching and researching every day, I still don��t know what exactly I need to target.��


    The bald old man said with some frustration.


    "Cell cloning?"


    Chang Nuo''s expression suddenly became serious. If this is the case, then many things can be answered. These answers seem to have appeared in front of him, and they all seem to have disappeared.


    If Vegapunk who stays in the pirate world is just a clone of a cell, then the entire world government will definitely have horrors beyond everyone''s imagination.


    "Little guy, since you already know so many problems, you''d better stay here to apany the old men to relieve their boredom. Anyway, after knowing these things, you won''t be able to leave here again, but where is your aircraft? "


    The bald man said with a smile on his face. As he spoke, he suddenly began to explore how Chang Nuo came to this ce.


    At least in his opinion, in the current pirate world, apart from the World Government, which force can build an aircraft? And it''s something that can fly to the moon. This thing can''t be done with just a little bit of technological acumen.


    "Can I go in and take a look?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly opened his mouth and asked.


    "Yes, why not? You''re going to stay here anyway, so there''s absolutely nothing wrong with taking a look here!"


    The bald man said with a smile, but then his smile immediately faded, and he said with a slightly cold expression, "There is no problem if you want to go in, but you need to put on some things next. After youe here, you can be honest." Really do it for me!"


    "Why do you say that?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Is it possible that you think I can let you leave even though you''re already here?"


    While speaking, the bald man directly pressed the red button on his arm. Although he still didn''t know what it was, the eyes of the robots that were stationary around him suddenly began to pop up one by one. A red light.


    This ce is not as simple as one or two robots. Instead, it forms an army of robots. The number is so huge that it even exceeds human imagination. Just doing this, there can be at least 100,000 people here.


    As for thebat effectiveness of these guys? Now is not the time to do research anyway.


    "Don''t worry, doctor, it''s already like this. It seems like you can''t leave this ce!"


    Changnuo smiled and said to the bald man.


    "You are quite sensible, so take it with you next. You should be very familiar with this thing. The sea tower stone handcuffs on the sea. There are not many of them in this ce, but it was thest time I came here. I don''t know who brought them. Got a pair?"


    The bald man said.


    After speaking, he threw Hailoushi''s handcuffs directly to Changnuo without even looking at him.


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and consciously put the sea-floor stone handcuffs on his hands, but even though they were already on his hands, they didn''t seem to be suppressing him at all.


    The bald man just led Chang Nuo towards the technological door.


    In fact, there is a huge mountain behind the gate, and the gate is right on the edge of the mountain.


    There are red lights in the form of stripes above the gate, criss-crossing one after another, and it is indeed full of the technological feel of stars.


    When the bald man walked to the side, he just raised his head. A red light directly scanned the two people, and then came from the microphone above the door, "The scan has beenpleted. Did you invite the stranger toe in?"


    The mechanical sound came directly, and the bald man didn''t even think about it. He opened his mouth and said impatiently, "Open the door!"


    The next moment, the huge door full of technology quickly formed a circle and spread out in all directions.


    Whates into view is a venue that looks like a vast expanse of heaven and earth. The light here is even more dazzling. It is filled with rows of machines full of technology. This kind of thing is hard to find in the Toru Empire, even in the Pirate World. It is impossible to find such a scene again.


    Who could have imagined that such a ce could exist on the moon? Compared with the pirate world, it waspletely two different worlds.


    Such a ce is filled with countless robots, each of them moving quickly, holding something in their hands, or studying other things.


    The moment he first entered, almost everything in the space inside had been disyed in Chang Nuo''s mind. In such a ce, even Chang Nuo, the Emperor of Tru, was directly surprised.


    Before, I had always thought that even if there were machinery on the moon, these things were all abandoned here, but now it seems that things are not as simple as imagined.

 Chapter 574 Moon Base

    <h4>Chapter 574 Moon Base</h4>


    All the robots here arepletely busy, moving back and forth quickly, and most of the time they are holding things inside.


    But as the bald man walked further and further inside, at the very center of the entire factory, a device with an almost invisible head was staying here quietly, constantly moving back and forth here. Those robots were actually running towards this huge thing holding the documents in their hands.


    ��What exactly is this building?��


    Chang Nuo couldn''t help the doubts in his heart and asked curiously.


    "God''s damnation! An extremely powerful offensive weapon, it can destroy a with one shot!"


    The bald man said as he walked.


    "How long did this thing take to be built?"


    "It didn''t take long. It seems to have been built for nearly 800 years, but it''s almost time to end."


    "You said there are many people like you, why do I only see you?"


    "Do you think there is only one base on the far side of the moon? There are many more behind!"


    The bald man''s words once again surprised Chang Nuo.


    When he firstnded on the moon, he had already sensed it, but not much appeared.


    Or maybe those people themselves are hidden deep in the base, but the robots parked on the periphery, one by one, stay there like dead objects, motionless and without any breath of life, they may be mistaken for them by perception. Stone.


    "I''m curious why you have insisted on building this thing for hundreds of years. What is your purpose?"


    Changnuo asked again doubtfully.


    "It doesn''t matter why. In fact, even we ourselves don''t know it, but our mission in this world is to keep researching and to build various weapons."


    "So you are also studying the king of the pirate world?" Changnuo asked.


    "So you little guy knows that thing? It''s just that this thing is not what we study. This thing appeared as early as 800 years ago. At that time, we didn''t have such a good brain at all. In fact, we can see it now These things were developed based on the King of Heaven and Pluto, and these things have evolved and developed until now."


    The bald man exined patiently.


    "You really exined some things that surprised me, but you can spend so much energy building these things here. Sometimes I really wonder, what is your motivation?" Chang Nuo said as he walked.


    He was even looking carefully at this huge thing that, as they said, took eight hundred years to build.


    To be precise, this thing with no end in sight is more like a cannon barrel. The deep and hollow ce at the front end should be the site where the attack isunched.


    "The name of this thing is Heavenly Punishment. It is about 5 kilometers long. The attack range has not been tried so far. The specific power is based on the simtion method. A sudden attack can at least wipe out the entire world below. Moreover, this thing Construction is expected to take up to three years.��


    The bald man said.


    "Why do you have to tell me so much? Are you not afraid that I will have other ideas?"


    Changnuo asked with a smile.


    "Do you think I can still worry about you leaving in this ce?"


    The bald man slowly turned his head, stared at Chang Nuo with a sinister smile and said.


    "Maybe I don''t think so. The high technology here is indeed very good. Do you really think you can trap me just by relying on the robots outside?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly smiled and said.


    At the same time, the sea-floor stone handcuffs on his wrists fell off instantly.


    However, even after losing all his restraints, Chang Nuo was not in a hurry to attack anyone, even the bald man in front of him.


    "How could you possibly break free?"


    The bald man asked in surprise.


    "This doesn''t seem very difficult, does it?"


    "Who are you?" the bald man asked immediately with a serious expression.


    While he was asking this, he also pressed the red button on his arm at a very fast speed. In an instant, all the robots in the entire area suddenly put down the things in their hands, and all of them turned red. , eyes began to gather towards him.


    "It doesn''t matter who I am, but this time I came here and I did get the answer I wanted. To say I''m not surprised is weird. I didn''t expect that there could be such a surprising ce even on the moon. .��


    Chang Nuo said in surprise.


    "Hahahaha, even if you can break free and drive, so what? This is the moon, and there are more robots on it than you can imagine. Do you really think they can only move things?"


    The bald manughed and said, then quickly took a few steps back.


    Immediately afterwards, all the robots began to rush directly towards Changnuo at the fastest speed. It must be said that the moving speed of these things was indeed beyond everyone''s imagination.


    They rushed over one by one like points of light, but what was powerful was not their strength, but their numbers.


    Even in this base, it is estimated that there can be at least tens of thousands of robots staying here.


    Most of their strength is close to that of a major, and their attack methods are slightly single. However, if there are some people with poor strength, they may not be able to match each other individually.


    The advantage of these guys is not only their numbers, but more importantly, simple attacks have no effect on them. These are all mechanical existences. There are many red eyes outside, so there is no rush to do anything. When Chang Nuo kicked one and broke one, they would rush up quickly, pick up all the parts, and reassemble them together.


    If this situation continues, no matter how powerful you are, you may end up exhausted here.


    "s~!!"


    Feeling this huge number, Chang Nuo sighed while fighting, and at the same time, he was also looking for the weaknesses of these guys.


    "Don''t bother, these robots are not capable of autonomous control, and the unity of their operations is definitely not what you imagined."


    The bald man stood not far away, watching the situation here with interest.


    It is estimated that for him, this may be the only fight he has seen in his life. After passing the test, it was a boring job. Suddenly seeing such a situation really made him feel a little excited.

 Chapter 575 Pack it up and take it away

    <h4>Chapter 575 Pack it up and take it away</h4>


    The entire base was filled with a crackling sound for an instant. Every time their attacks hit the ground, they could instantly create a huge crater in the hard ground.


    Even if they don''t understand Armed Haki, their powerful mechanical bodies can still give them the same attack capabilities as Armed Haki.


    "Although I don''t know how long you have been here, whether it is decades or hundreds of years, one thing is certain, that is, you must not have seen a truly powerful person for a long time. Of course, I might as well let you Take a good look.��


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile.


    The bald man was still looking puzzled, sitting there quietly watching the performance. Maybe he didn''t care at all about what the other party said.


    "The power of awakening~space condensation!!"


    Now it no longer matters how fast these robots move? But in the next second, all the robots were fixed in ce at the same time.


    No matter how many there are, it doesn''t matter at all, but after fixing them, I realized how exaggerated the attacks of these guys were.


    Their cross-coordinated attacks are all arranged side by side, and the distance between each robot is exactly the same. In a situation like this, if it falls into the world of pirates, it is estimated that any country can be destroyed in an instant.


    After the space was condensed, all the robots were fixed there, including those preparing to attack in mid-air, which were still suspended in mid-air.


    Chang Nuo ignored them and began to walk slowly towards the direction of the bald man inside with great interest.


    Although these people have been condensed and fixed in space, it does not mean that their thinking has also been condensed.


    Being within space is different from being within time. It can fix all their thoughts, but it can only fix their movements.


    The bald man felt a little frightened at this moment. His eyes kept looking here and there, but he couldn''t change any direction.


    He probably thought of hundreds of ways to escape in an instant, but when he couldn''t move, even 10,000 ways were of no use.


    Chang Nuo walked up to this guy and didn''t think about hurting him. Instead, he touched him with his right hand with blue light. The next second, the bald man was able to move freely.


    Even though he has been staying peacefully on the moon doing scientific research, this does not mean that he does not have the slightest sense of fear.


    The ability of the psychic devil fruit shrouded the bald man directly at this moment, and he was trembling as if he had seen something devil.


    "Give me all the information here!"


    Changnuo said it directly to him calmly.


    "you����"


    "I''m only saying this this time!"


    Changnuo said, his eyes instantly glowed red, and the ability of the psychic devil fruit began to control the opponent in an instant.


    The bald man''s body was unstable due to trembling. After he fell down and stood up again, his eyes were only white, and his limbs were stiff. With Chang Nuo, he began to slowly walk in the other direction.


    Here, there are dozens of huge containers, each filled with blue water, and a huge brain quietly suspended in the middle, which can emit weak lightning from time to time.


    "Is it possible that these things are controlling those robots?"


    Chang Nuo asked directly to the bald man.


    "Yes!"


    After hearing this answer, Chang Nuo instantly grinned.


    I didn''t expect that such a powerful robot army would actually be controlled by just a few brains in the end. But it has to be said that it controls so many robots. It is estimated that these brains are not simple things.


    Chang Nuo walked to one of the containers, his right hand glowed with a reddish light, and then he ced it directly on the ss container.


    But the next second, the brain in the container began to violently release all kinds of lightning, and the potions soaking him began to boil. Within a while, the originally active brain began to sink silently.


    But at the same time, Chang Nuo suddenly had an alternative idea. The next moment, he smashed these ss containers one by one, and their brains withered in an instant.


    Afterwards, Chang Nuo released the space condensed by himself, and all the robots stood steadily on it, and there was no color in their eyes. They all stood there calmly without any movement.


    Walking next to a robot, Changnuo tentatively integrated an energy line wrapped with reddish light into the robot''s body. Through the ability of the psychic devil fruit, the dead robot started to glow again in the next moment. eyes.


    What is different and different is that this robot is like his right-hand man. Just by waving his arms or thinking, the robot willpletely act ording to his own thoughts.


    "And this is a good thing."


    Chang Nuo said directly with a grin.


    Each of these is simply endless wealth, and there are at least tens of thousands of these things in this base.


    As for the outside ones, he had no intention of touching them, and even those in other bases had no intention of causing trouble.


    If you escte the matter directly, it will not be of any benefit to you at that time.


    After going back and forth for about half an hour, Changnuo once again activated all the robots one by one and brought them all into the space at an extremely fast speed.


    The moment he walked to the entrance of the base, Chang Nuo still had some unfinished thoughts. He nced back, smiled and then disappeared from this ce instantly.


    But just as his front heel left, a guy with wings started tond here.


    The appearance of Fei Duo is probably a very surprising surprise.


    He was still wearing a ck suit, with red eyes, and the six pairs of ck wings on his back. The moment he fell, he didn''t even stir up any dust.


    However, looking at the scene in front of him, Fei Duo still looked around, but then, his brows frowned and disappeared instantly.


    Appearing again, we have arrived at the base where Chang Nuo came just now.


    Now in this base, except for a huge gun barrel that is still there, where can you see any robots?


    The bald man was lying there quietly. The traces on the ground could prove that a battle had taken ce here, but what kind of people hade here? Fei Duo didn''t dare to confirm at all.

 Chapter 576 Heading to Mary Joa

    <h4>Chapter 576 Heading to Mary Joa</h4>


    In any case, the sight of this scene immediately caused Fei Duo to burst out with a powerful overlord-colored domineering energy. The momentum was so great that it instantly affected the operation of the entire base.


    The red light above the head shes and the voice of Kon is constantly ringing. Even the existence of other bases can feel this situation.


    "Who is it?"


    Fei Duo looked around with an angry look, but there was almost no trace of it here.


    After all, all the traces on the ground were destroyed by the robots in the end. Even the ss container behind it could be made like this with some strength.


    Looking at the bald man still lying on the ground, Fei Duo suppressed the anger in his heart. After taking a deep breath, the shoulders on his back instantly turned white, and his whole person looked much more holy.


    After all this appeared, he just waved his hand, and a ray of pure white light fell on the bald man. The next moment, the guy began to slowly open his eyes.


    But the first moment he opened his eyes, the bald man seemed to see something that terrified him.


    "Master Fei Fei!"


    "What''s going on here?"


    Fei Duo asked in a low voice.


    "What happened? Didn''t you, Lord Feida,e in person? I didn''t understand what happened at the time, but you actually took action directly! Later..."


    "shut up!"


    Fei Duo instantly didn''t want to listen anymore, and at the same time he also understood what happened to this guy.


    I have just appeared here, but from the other party''s tone, it seems that I have already been here, and everything that happens here is rted to me.


    "Why don''t you get up quickly and see what you have lost? You loser, you are really disappointing!"


    Fei Duo looked at the bald man still sitting on the ground, couldn''t suppress his anger, and started to attack him directly.


    How dare the other party say anything else? In an instant, he got up and went to check the damage this time.


    Not long after running, the bald man wanted to press the red button on his arm, but when he woke up and looked around for a week, he realized that there were no robots in the entire base?


    While the bald man was in a hurry, Fei Duo had already begun to slowly walk towards the entrance of the base.


    After walking out, he could clearly see the where the pirate world was located. It all seemed so close, but yet so far away.


    "Could it be him?"


    Fei Duo looked at the blue and murmured to himself.


    No matter who he was thinking of, Chang Nuo, the person involved, had already returned at this moment.


    They even started sitting at the dining table in the pce garden.


    Thergest dining table is upied by the Mermaid Princess on one end and Chang Nuo on the other side.


    This is just a simple dinner, just to get closer to this mermaid princess.


    As Pluto, the three major weapons in ancient times, since the other two are all real weapons, why is this one the same person? So far I haven''t been able to understand it effectively.


    But today''s White Star Princess looks so ordinary, nothing is much different from an ordinary mermaid. Except for the powerful domineering power hidden deep in this mermaid princess, there seems to be no other difference.


    As for the idea of ??being able to control the Neptunes in the entire sea, it is definitelypletely unachievable now.


    Time also passed in such a quiet month, leaving no special situation for everyone, but in this month, the most outstanding one should be the Straw Hat Pirates sailing on the sea.


    For a while, it can be regarded as two consecutive news headlines. The first one was of course in Dressrosa. As a Celestial Dragon, Domingo, who is also a Shichibukai, quietly met the Straw Hat boy here. Luffy died after the battle, and the entire Don Quixote family was destroyed at the same time, with almost no one alive.


    Anyway, the unanimous view of everyone outside is that they werepletely wiped out by the Straw Hat Pirates, at least that''s what was reported in the Navy''s briefing.


    This put the entire Straw Hat Pirates at the forefront of the storm for a while. No one knew how this guy did all this, but at the same time, no one dared to underestimate this group of pirates who didn''t look good. Thieves.


    In fact, even Luffy and the others were in a state ofplete confusion, especially Luffy. Although he won the battle between himself and Domingo in the end, he was still very weak with his own strength. Clearly, at best, it would result in a lose-lose oue for both Domingo and Domingo. With his own strength, it would be impossible to kill the opponent at all.


    But when they got the news, Domingo and the entire Tangjik family members were indeedpletely dead. People sent by the World Government and the naval forces all confirmed this thing one by one.


    It is estimated that they have about 10,000 mouths at this moment, and they can��t exin exactly how this happened. But to this group of people, this kind of thing doesn��t matter. One more thing, one less thing, for these seafarers Thieves are nothing like that.


    It''s just that the reward amount of the next reward order may be increased a little, and they don''t need to care about other things at all.


    Of course, this kind of thing does not arouse the suspicion of others, but the spearhead of everything is directed at the Straw Hat Pirates, and excessive investigation will have no effect at all.


    After finishing the trip to Dressrosa, all the rhythm returned to the state of the plot, and everything began to enter the formal development process. As for what happened next, there was no need to pay too much attention to it.


    Tohru Empire.


    "Your Majesty the King, preparations have been made to go to Mariejoia. The World Government Conference is expected to be held in 15 days. Are we going to start preparing to leave today?"


    In the pce, Gogoya held a folder in his hand and said respectfully to Chang Nuo.


    "Has Shirahoshi sent it back yet?"


    Changnuo asked.


    "Lieutenant General Morokkov is in charge of this matter, and it is estimated that it has arrived now!" Gogoya said.


    "If there''s nothing wrong with the empire, let''s set off now. I''m also looking forward to seeing the faces of these people. What do they look like now?"


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly, and then asked again, "Is Mo Sank ready?"


    "General Moshank is already waiting on the ship!"


    "That''s it, get ready to go."


    Chang Nuo said that he was now preparing to participate in the long-awaited World Government Conference.

 Chapter 577 Arrival

    <h4>Chapter 577 Arrival</h4>


    As for how this meeting will turn out, they don''t care at all. They are just going through the motions to see their attitudes.


    The kings of other countries had actually started to leave more than a month ago, just because they were worried that they would not be able to catch up with the World Government meeting this time.


    It''s just that this world has been in chaos since it started to be chaotic two years ago.


    The journey was not as safe as imagined. Although the kings of every country were escorted by naval forces, for them, even so, it was not as good as imagined.


    Along the way, the ship of the Tru Empire was extremely high-profile. The g of the Tru Empire on the Infinity was fluttering directly in the wind. Especially after entering the Grand Line, everyone who saw this scene, whether it was Pirates and other people who make a living on the sea began to avoid them one by one.


    But other countries are not as lucky as imagined, especially some rtively wealthy countries, but the king does not exist very well. Even if they are escorted by the navy, they will still be robbed by pirates in the end. More than fifty people Of the kings who need to attend the World Government Meeting, in the end, it would be pretty good if only 45 of them could arrive safely and alive.


    Below Mariejoia, this ce is still the same as before. The only difference is that the towering steps start to move.


    As soon as the Infinity arrived here, the people responsible for guarding the navy had already entered a state of first-level alert.


    They were afraid that something would happen again in this special ce. If one of them was dissatisfied, the two sides would fight directly, or another blind Draco would be killed here. By then, they didn��t know what would happen. whats the matter.


    It only took them about ten days to arrive here, but rtively speaking, they were almost thest to arrive. People from other countries who were supposed to arrive had already arrived.


    Even the earliest ones are already waiting here a month in advance.


    People from Changnuo have not yet started to disembark, but the reporters who have been filming have already upied the port. No matter what circumstances they came through, their authority is only limited to This is the ce.


    Vice Admiral Mole of the Navy Headquarters, who is responsible for the so-called security of the port, frowned from the moment he saw the arrival of the Tru Empire. He really didn''t want to face the existence of this country, an unstable country. factors, it may be a disaster wherever it goes.


    As thending gear ced by the Infinity slowly extended above the port, around this ce, at least seventy or eighty navy personnel began to control the atmosphere of the scene. Each one of them was on standby and alert to the surrounding situation, for fear that There is not the slightest risk.


    "Your Majesty the King, there are still several days before the meeting. Should we directly grab our horse bridge, or should we go to other ces first?"


    On the Infinity, Gogoya opened his mouth and asked.


    "No need, just go up. After staying on the road for so long, find a ce to have a good rest. If you want to go out and y, then go there by yourself. Just be careful when the timees."


    Changnuo said calmly, he believed that with Gogoya''s status as the Tru Empire, even if he ran into the pirate ship, it would not have any impact at all.


    This is the power of backing, a being who doesn''t have to worry about safety wherever he goes.


    After the words fell, Chang Nuo slowly walked down the steps. You can imagine the pressure he brought to the navy below with every step he took.


    Moshank didn''t have much thought, and in the end he just followed him silently. Gogoya was also struggling with whether he should stay here and spend these few days, or go out and have fun. After all, this ce was not too far from the Shampoo Inds, but she felt a little uneasy about leaving like this.


    In the end, reason defeated the mind. After thinking for a while, Changnuo and the others had already disembarked from the boat and walked on the ground. In the end, Gogoya could only keep up with them.


    "His Majesty Emperor Tru, this time the World Government has requested that you cannot carry any weapons. Please put your sword or other weapons on our side first!"


    He was not ready to climb this high step yet. To be precise, he had just gotten out of bed. Before he had walked a few steps, a navy man wearing a robe of justice came to him and said seriously.


    "you sure?"


    Chang Nuo turned to look at the other person and asked in a calm tone.


    "Well... I''m really sorry, at least that''s what it''s stipted above."


    The navy guy''s head was dripping with sweat, but he still had the courage to speak directly.


    "I''m not armed, and neither are they, so don''t think too much about it!"


    Chang Nuo said, and then continued to prepare to leave.


    No one from the navy dared to stop him. He could only watch the three figures walking further and further away with a mncholy look on his face.


    When people had already started to climb up the automatic walking steps, Vice Admiral Mole from the Navy Headquarters walked out unsteadily and pped the guy on the head.


    "You really don''t have any brains. I told you just now not to show your face. Your family is so good, but you actually ask them to hand over their weapons? This kind of thing is impossible even if you think about it!"


    Lieutenant General Mole said with hatred for iron.


    "Lieutenant General, it seems you asked me toe here just now, right?"


    "You bastard! Did I ask you toe to greet me because I asked you toe and ask for weapons from others? Do you dare to ask for those from the Celestial Dragons? This guy is definitely above the Celestial Dragons now. If he gets angry, How do you want us to do it?"


    Mole cursed again angrily, but did not hesitate too much.


    I could only look at the three figures moving slowly on the steps.


    This is the second time they havee to this bird ce, but the treatment this time is a little different. After all, the steps under their feet are only moving steps for the Tianlong people. Now they can also have a good experience.


    But as powerful people, they could feel the pain of being ves because there were countless ves under their feet working hard to pull up the long steps.


    Therefore, the hatred that the Celestial Dragons bring to other people is not just a little bit, but whenever there is any problem with the world government, these Celestial Dragons will probably be eaten by others in an instant.

 Chapter 578 The Provocation of the Tianlong People

    <h4>Chapter 578 The Provocation of the Tianlong People</h4>


    The towering Mariejoia, with the stairs running under the feet, has been here for almost half an hour. It has been exposed to wind and sun along the way, especially in such a hot weather. Standing there and using the stairs to drive automatically The way he did it really made people feel very unhappy.


    But for thosezy and bloated Tianlong people, perhaps this can not only highlight their noble identity and status, but more importantly, it can reflect theirziness to the extreme.


    After finally reaching the high tform, Gogoya looked back at the tall steps that were moving by themselves.


    "Let''s go, no need to look any further!"


    Moshank reminded Gogoya.


    Chang Nuo had already walked a little distance forward, so the two of them quickly followed him.


    Normally speaking, the meeting of the World Government is about to be held, and these Celestial Dragons should rarely appear, but this time it ispletely the opposite. There are already many Celestial Dragons wandering back and forth in the square.


    They were ying or having fun with each other. Anyway, there were at least a dozen of them staying here.


    For outsiders, I really don��t understand. Is it possible that I don��t feel anything when I wear this ss cover on my head on such a hot day? And he was still ying wantonly in the sun.


    It''s just that he doesn''t know who the person he is ying with is.


    "Your Majesty the King, we should go to the hall to report now. The room given to us has been prepared, but the specific location was not informed when we contacted before."


    Gogoya opened the folder in his hand, looked at the contents and said to Chang Nuo who was walking.


    "Where is the hall?"


    "ording to the normal route, it is right behind those Tianlong people, and directly in front is the hall!"


    Gogoya said with some confusion.


    The Tru Empire has also participated in world government meetings before, and Gogoya also participated once. More often, although other unimportant people came, the existence of the Celestial Dragons was never mentioned in the reports every time they went back. .


    "Your Majesty the King, it seems that the existence of these Celestial Dragons is not that simple?"


    Moshank also said with a frown.


    There''s nothing wrong with thisrge group of Celestial Dragons staying here. Let''s not talk about such hot weather and staying under the sun. Under normal circumstances, they shouldn''t be in such a ce.


    "Continue to go!"


    Chang Nuo''s expression was very calm, or he had no idea at all. They were just a group of Tianlong people. Even so, what did they dare to do?


    However, at this moment, upstairs in the hall, through the ss, five old guys were staring closely at the situation in front of them. They wanted to see what kind of Emperor Tru was he had never met before.


    As they got closer and closer, Changnuo and the other three finally discovered what exactly these Tianlong people were ying here.


    There was a guy lying on the ground pretending to be a barking dog, with a crown on his head, and the clothes on his body didn''t look ordinary.


    With a bloated body, even though he was teased by these dragons, his expression still looked like he was enjoying himself.


    As the three people walked over, they were actually having a great time. These Tianlong people didn''t seem to notice them, but just when they were about to walk over, one of them, who looked fat, immediately Start shouting "Untouchables out front!"


    Although the voice fell, the footsteps of the three of them did not stop. Instead, they continued to walk forward unhurriedly.


    At this time, the other Tianlong people who were together finally came to their senses, and all focused their attention on the three of them.


    Two of them even trotted directly in front of them. Only then did the three of Chang Nuo slowly stop and stare at these moths with ss covers.


    "You three untouchables, why didn''t you stop when I told you just now?"


    The fat Tianlong man came up with some panting. Just these few steps on the road were already too much for him to bear.


    "Why didn''t you kneel down when you saw us just now? How dare you walk past us? Who gave you the courage?"


    Another Celestial Dragon standing next to the big fat man asked.


    "Are you sure you''re talking about the three of us?"


    Changnuo asked with a smile on his face, or rather an evil smile.


    "I''m talking about you. If you don''t kneel down quickly, you will die immediately."


    The fat Tianlong man directly pulled out a pistol from his waist, pointed it straight at Chang Nuo and said with a smile.


    "You five old guys, you are just watching the excitement and don''t think it''s a big deal. Do you want to use them to directly provoke a war? Or do you think the Lord Im above you can protect them or you?"


    Chang Nuo said calmly, but the five old men staying on the second floor of the hall were all covered in cold sweat.


    Hearing this is unbelievable, and even more unbelievable how he learned about those unknown things?


    The five old guys looked at each other, and they could see the disbelief in each other''s eyes. Among them, Love directly asked in surprise, "How did Emperor Tru know about the existence of Lord Im?"


    "Let''s not talk about this for now. Let''s first consider how to solve the problem at hand?" Silohemia said.


    However, at this moment, the dozen or so Tianlong people surrounding Chang Nuo were still provoking life and death, especially one of them couldn''t help drooling when he looked at Gogoya.


    "Hey! You haven''t answered my question yet?"


    The fat Celestial Dragon shouted directly.


    As for the king who was teased by them just now, he is looking here with a look of horror. He still knows the name of Emperor Tru, and this guy came from the East China Sea, and he often talks about the situation in the South China Sea. Paying attention.


    Seeing this scene at this moment, the king''s heart is full of admiration. I have never seen anyone dare to be so disrespectful to the Tianlong people? However, today I actually saw him. He was calm and showed a majestic and domineering side inside and out. He waspletely interested in this man.


    "Let''s go! It seems that those old men have no intention ofing down."


    As Chang Nuo spoke, he nced specifically in the direction of Woxing, and then said to Mo Sank in a cold voice, "If you encounter any obstruction again! Kill them!"


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King!"


    Moshank said in a low voice.


    After such words came out, even these Tianlong people were stunned for a moment. When did anyone dare to say such words in Mariejoia? The key is to say it in front of them.

 Chapter 579 Self-massacre

    <h4>Chapter 579 Self-massacre</h4>


    The only person who ever wanted to do such a thing, or was even prepared to do so, was Golden Lion Shiji, but that same time he was sent directly into Impel Down City''s prison.


    Although he was able to escapeter, the pain that apanied him was permanent.


    Now there is actually a person who is more arrogant than him. In front of the Tianlong people, he dares to say that he wants to kill the other person. If this kind of thing can be photographed by reporters, it will definitely be a big news.


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he was about to continue walking forward, but there was still an ignorant Tianlong person standing in front of him.


    The fat Tianlong man behind him directly pulled the trigger of the pistol in his hand, with a ferocious smile on his face, as if he was crazy.


    "BOOM!!!!!!"


    Following the sound of a gunshot, Chang Nuo didn''t even look back, but this time he dodged the attack perfectly.


    Looking at the Tianlong man standing in front of them, a hole had been shot out of the exact center of his head, and drops of blood slowly flowed down his face, until he finallyy on the ground and stopped breathing. Moment. He probably didn''t even understand what happened.


    "What''s happening here?"


    Except for this big fat Tianlong, everyone else began to show expressions of surprise, and even the fear in their hearts began to show.


    But how could things end so easily? The fat Draco pulled the trigger again, and with the sound of another gunshot, another Draco who was close to the three of them fell to the ground again.


    For this group of Tianlong people who are usually worse than pigs, even at this distance, hitting the forehead with a gun is definitely not something they can usually do.


    Not to mention that it was so abnormal at this moment, that the fat Tianlong man actually shot hisrade with a gun. Even if this was known to outsiders, the Tru Empire would not be affected in the slightest.


    "Boss, don''t we take care of this kind of thing?"


    "How to care? Have you ever seen Emperor Tru take action? In other words, what reasons are used to determine that this matter is rted to the Tru Empire? Howe you don''t know that the actual thoughts of the Tru Empire are the same as ours, and they are all fighting for one thing? Are you preparing for a war?"


    Silohemia said with a low expression.


    The expressions on the faces of the other old men weren''t very good either. The key was that before anything was done, two of the Tianlong people on their side had already died.


    The key is that it doesn''t matter if these moths are dead. The World Conference is about to be held. Faced with this situation, public opinion cannot be suppressed. Even if this kind of news is not allowed to leak to the newspaper level, it will still be uncontroble.municated by others within this scope.


    Chang Nuo and the other three walked straight towards the hall,pletely ignoring anything that happened behind them.


    The big fat Draco had a lot of runny nose and tears at this moment, and even yellowish liquid began to flow out from under his crotch. His eyes began to roll up, and his limbs were shaking. His strange appearance made other Dracos even think of getting closer. None, even all of them wanted to stay away from this guy as soon as possible.


    Not to mention that everyone is disgusted to death when they see his current appearance.


    "Bang!!!!"


    While they were still admiring this scene, the big fat Draco raised his gun and shot it through his chin.


    As the ss mask shattered, the fat Tianlong fell to the groundpletely, and blood began to spurt out from his head.


    "Is this the method of Emperor Tru of the South China Sea?"


    The guy from the East China Sea King who was teased by them just now looked at this scene with his eyes straight.


    Facing the death of three Tianlong people in a row, he felt an indescribable joy in his heart. Although this was not expressed on his facial expressions, the happiness in his heart made him confused.


    When several other Tianlong people saw this scene, they once again nced at the backs of the three Emperor Tru who were walking towards the hall, and a sense of fear began to slowly rise on their backs.


    However, the news that three Celestial Dragons died one after another in Mariejoia Square cannot be hidden at all. It is estimated that it will not be long before it spreads throughout Mariejoia. Even to the outside world, anyone who is interested may get something. information.


    This matter will also be the headlines of the next game.


    The three of them, Chang Nuo, walked slowly into the hall. Whether it was temperature or humidity, it was apletely different scene from the outside.


    With automatic ss sliding doors and constant air temperature of 26 degrees, this ce feels like a paradise on earth.


    The key is that they have never been to this ce before, but they have never encountered such an elegant hall.


    This hall has an area of ??almost two thousand square meters, a dome about fifty meters high, and a huge crystal chandelier hanging directly from above. It really looks luxurious to the extreme.


    However, there are still fountains gushing inside, and various decorations are spread throughout the hall.


    "Three of them should be guests from the Tru Empire. Everything has been prepared for you here. Pleasee with me!"


    As soon as they entered the hall, a very elegantly dressed beauty appeared in front of them from the empty hall and spoke to Chang Nuo in a very gentle tone.


    "We have been here for so long and we want to take a good rest. We just need to tell you where we live."


    Chang Nuo said in a calm tone.


    "No problem, His Majesty Emperor Tru, the ce where you will live has already been arranged. Because I am worried that you will not be able to find a specific ce, I will take you there directly!"


    The beautiful woman who came to receive her smiled again and said.


    No matter which angle you look at this woman from, the first thing that is certain is that she is not a Celestial Dragon. The only thing that can be confirmed is that this woman definitely belongs to the World Government and has a certain say in Mariejoia. After all, in Except for the ves in this ce, they are the Celestial Dragons, and the rest are existences that the Celestial Dragons dare not touch.


    No matter which angle he belonged to, Changnuo had already included this person in his perception from the moment he started contacting him.


    The registration of this so-called hall did not take any substantive action. Even after passing through this hall, no one appeared in the hall. However, Chang Nuo did not feel the slightest surprise when the group of Tianlong appeared at the door. People are enough to exin everything.


    When he just came up from the high steps, Chang Nuo had already sensed that the Woxing guys were peeping at them. Combined with the various questions that appeared in front of him, it was not difficult to guess who they were. Want to do something?

 Chapter 580 A woman suddenly appears

    <h4>Chapter 580 A woman suddenly appears</h4>


    Apart from anything else, the ce where Marie Joa lives is really quite nice.


    Whether it is this kind of single-family vi or thendscape here, it is definitely one of a kind in this world.


    The ce where Chang Nuo lives is directly close to the edge of the Red Earth Continent. Here he can overlook the entire sea and even feel the curved coastline. The air is also excellent in the upperyer.


    The fact that this group of people can choose to live in this ce already shows that they have already made various preparations.


    But people really envy this kind of living environment. Although the location is rtively high, it does not affect thefortable environment where they live.


    The ce left for Emperor Tru to live was a two-story small vi. The first floor was a reception hall. It was quite empty but had only one living room.


    There are all kinds of decorative furnishings in the huge room, and the materials of everything are made of various treasures. Even the toilet is made of gold. Even the faucet has a huge gem iid on the handle. .


    The furnishings in this room can be worth at least tens of billions of Baileys. Sometimes I have to admit that the Tianlong people are indeed too luxurious, but for them who are rich, this What else can you get?


    "You bastard! Let you steal my things!!"


    In a dim corner, a pair of eyes stared directly at the location of the vi where Chang Nuo lived, with a malicious smile on his face.


    However, under such circumstances, a breath slowly wrapped around the area where his vi was located along the breeze, which couldpletely make a person fall into this trap without knowing it.


    After all, here, the two Moshanks cannot live with Emperor Tru. This is a division above the level. They have their own special living ce, which is a ce prepared for one person.


    Changnuo, who had been on the ship for more than ten days, had already felt exhausted. After using the Haki of Knowledge and Knowledge to sense the situation in the surrounding area, he found that there was no special impact, and then walked directly to the bathroom. After taking a shower, Iy on the bed and fell asleep.


    But before nightfall, a little girl walked directly into the room in a swaggering manner. This was probably a situation that no one had expected.


    In the early morning of the next day, after Chang Nuo slowly opened his eyes, the first thing he felt was that he felt something different happening next to him.


    The strong vignce also made him jump up instantly, and his naked bodypletely made him stay in ce.


    What was even more confusing was that there was another person lying on the bed at the moment, and he couldn''t be too impressed by the other person''s appearance.


    A Celestial Dragon who had been to the Tohru Empire had already left the country the day after the Mermaid Princess Shirahoshi arrived at the Tohru Empire. However, it had only been two months, and it was impossible. Will forget the other person''s appearance.


    Chang Nuo stood naked on the ground, trying hard to recall what happened yesterday?


    After all, if a living person suddenly appears next to him, he should be able to feel it no matter what. Even if the opponent is stronger, he should not let himself bepletely defenseless.


    But while Chang Nuo was thinking about all this, Wei Mo had begun to slowly open her eyes, and the strong difort made her frown indirectly.


    "Hoo~"


    Chang Nuo breathed out a deep breath. No matter in his heart or on his expression, he was gradually bing angry. He could feel it from himself, and he could guess what happened.


    "Asshole! I''m going to kill you!"


    Chang Nuo said angrily, but at this moment, the other party opened his eyes.


    The two looked at each other. For a big girl, a naked man stood right in front of her. At the critical moment when she lifted the quilt, the same situation happened to her. It was not difficult to see what happened.


    "Bastard!!!!"


    A sound resounded directly through the sky and the earth, and the roar like a ughtering pig could even be heard throughout Mariejoia.


    Chang Nuo, who was standing next to him, couldn''t help but cover his ears.


    After the voice fell, a little girl was left sitting there hugging the sheets and crying deeply, without the slightest image of a Celestial Dragon.


    "Why are you in my room?"


    Chang Nuo could only ask helplessly.


    "You bastard! This is obviously my home, when did it be your ce?"


    Wei Mo shouted angrily while crying.


    "your home??"


    Only then did Chang Nuo realize that the photo hanging on the wall was indeed that of someone else. When he came here before, he was just resting and didn''t notice these details.


    Now it seems that he has been tricked by others from the beginning to the end. From the time he first came to this ce, no wonder Gogoya and the others did not live with him at all. The key is to let them live far away. The reason The give is quite appropriate.


    "I can only say sorry for this. Although I don''t know what happened, it''s best for us to pretend that nothing happened!"


    As Chang Nuo spoke, he casually pulled a sheet from the bed and spoke the words of a scumbag in such a rxed andfortable way.


    The whole thing ispletely free, and it feels like there is no need to take any responsibility. (Whenever such a good thing happens, let me know.)


    Wei Mo was sitting on the bed wrapped in sheets, his body began to tremble with anger, but then, Chang Nuo gradually began to discover a lot of things that were wrong.


    No matter how angry the little girl was, she couldn''t let herself be like this. Wei Mo''s body was shaking rapidly, and blood began to flow from the corners of his mouth. His whole face turned pale, and his lips and ears began to turn purple. .


    "It''s such a sin to step on a horse!"


    Chang Nuo closed his eyes speechlessly and patted his head, but he had no choice but to climb onto the bed again.


    The other party''s heartbeat has stopped, and I don''t know if it''s because of excessive anger, or for some other reason. Anyway, if we don''t get treatment quickly, this girl probably won''t survive for two minutes.


    Although there was no feeling at all from the first injury, the key was that there was no impression at all, but in this helpless situation, Chang Nuo could only pull up the sheets again.


    Laying the other party down, Chang Nuo directly ced his hand on the other party''s heart, and the energy in his body instantly poured into the other party''s body, carefully exploring any situation of the other party.

 Chapter 581 Beating Kaido

    <h4>Chapter 581 Beating Kaido</h4>


    After staying for a while, Chang Nuo closed his eyes and frowned. The situation of the other party was simply beyond his imagination.


    It turns out that being a Celestial Dragon is not omnipotent. Even if this woman does not experience the situation she is experiencing now, it is estimated that she will belch coldly in a short time.


    It can be regarded purely as a walking corpse, the kind that could die suddenly at any time.


    "You have an age of 20 and a heart of 80. I really don''t know how you grew."


    Chang Nuo said speechlessly, but people are like this now. He saw what he should see and did what he should do. He patted his butt and left. He felt that he really couldn''t do that kind of work.


    Then, a ball of blue light appeared directly from Chang Nuo''s right hand, and he pressed it directly towards the opponent''s chest.


    Although it didn''t have much effect, Wei Mo''splexion had recovered a lot at this moment, and his breathing began to be smoother.


    "I''ll find you a heartter, which will be considered aspensation for you!"


    Chang Nuo stood up. Just as he was about to leave, he turned his head and nced at the woman again. He murmured to himself and continued to cover her body with sheets.


    But as soon as he walked out of the room, a gust of wind blew over him, and he realized that he was still walking the bird in the end?


    After putting on his clothes again, there were several people standing at the door. Chang Nuo''s eyes were red. The moment he walked out of the door, a powerful aura suddenly burst out.


    "Asshole! Come out! Otherwise I will destroy your Marie Joa!"


    Chang Nuo angrily shouted directly while suspended in the air. This time he didn''t use any domineering force, he just shouted directly with his loud voice.


    But in the darkness, a man wasughing so hard that he was already lying on the groundughing. He had no intention of leaving. Through his position, he could feel Chang Nuo''s thoughts suspended in the air. .


    After roaring for a long time, Emperor Tru''s name was spread throughout the Tianlong people. The key is that the voice can be heard clearly even if he is standing below Mary Joa. The reporters staying on the shore, one All of them started shooting towards Mariejoia.


    Even though nothing could be photographed, the headlines of the next day''s newspapers must be rted to this time again.


    Chang Nuo watched for a long time with no results, and finally had no choice but to give up. After all, the energy used to maintain Wei Mo''s life could notst long. If he missed it, the little girl would really disappear from this world forever.


    Although this was only a matter of time, his appearance made this matterpletely earlier. If it was not resolved, I would only be able to understand the bitterness in my heart.


    "Your Majesty, what happened?"


    Gogoya stepped forward anxiously and asked.


    As a Tianlong, Yakkel was also standing nearby. He probably knew his sister''s situation very well. He didn''t say a word from beginning to end, even though he knew what happened.


    As a Tianlong, he never bowed to anyone, but this time was aplete exception.


    "Your Majesty Emperor Tru, I hope you can save my sister, even if it costs my life!"


    Yakel spoke in a low voice and lowered his head the whole time. Anyway, he heard from somewhere that Emperor Tru could definitely save his sister. This was hisst hope.


    But his tone sounded very calm. After all, he had tried many such things, and he had already been disappointed with emergencies.


    "No need for you to talk nonsense!"


    Chang Nuo said angrily, even his own people were in no mood to pay attention to him.


    ncing in the direction of the room, Chang Nuo took a deep breath helplessly, and then suddenly disappeared from the spot.


    But when he appeared, he came directly to a battlefield. A huge green dragon was hovering above his head, blocking out the sky and the sun. It looked so majestic.


    The key is that the person he is looking for this time is here, and he has been beaten to a pulp by the other party.


    "Kaido, it''s useful for me to pull this guy over first. Damn it, just stay here for a while and continue fighting after hees back."


    Chang Nuo didn''t have any nonsense at all. He raised his head and said to the green dragon hovering in the sky.


    This girl was Kaido''s true form. Whether it was because he was drunk or because he didn''t see clearly, Kaido didn''t react at all and suddenly rushed towards this side.


    The huge dragon head faced the wind pressure, and as the opponent opened his mouth, a powerful force simr to magma spewed out directly.


    Changnuo himself was already troubled by such troublesome things. Seeing Kaido''s bird-like appearance, he was worried that he had no ce to express his anger, but this guy actually rushed up to him.


    The guy who had just been lifted up and had a bruised nose and face, and couldn''t tell who it was, Chang Nuo directly threw him into the pit again, stood up, turned his head and exuded a domineering look, looked at the huge green dragon rushing down, and was deeply moved. After taking two deep breaths, his whole body jumped up suddenly.


    "I''ll let you drink!"


    "Bang!!!!"


    Chang Nuo said, and the huge fist with the space fell directly from the sky like a mountain.


    Apanied by meteor-like mes, this huge guy was punched directly to the ground at extremely fast speeds.


    The powerful impact even caused dust tens of meters high to rise in this ce, and the huge impact sound was like an earthquake.


    Everyone was watching this scene in stunned silence, especially Luffy and the others who were participating in the battle.


    This is what the protagonist should be involved in, but Chang Nuo came here this time just to rece Luo with a heart. But as soon as he came over, he found that this guy had been beaten to a state of disgrace. If this situation continues, Marijoa''s top That woman is probably going to die.


    Kaido was knocked back to his original form at this moment. He must have drunk a lot of wine just now, and his whole body was beaten to the point of being forced to the spot.


    Although such an attack wouldn''t hurt him too deeply, the pain still threatened to kill half of this guy''s life.


    "Are you dead? If nothing happens, get up quickly!"


    Chang Nuo angrily dragged Luo on the ground, but his words were in vain. So far, the other party had rolled his eyes and fainted without any consciousness at all.


    "Oh! What a bunch of bastards!"


    Emperor Tru, who has always been very civilized, turned on his curse function for the first time today, looking at everything with an unpleasant look.


    But in the process of being angry, my eyes wandered for a moment, and I happened to see a centaur and half-horse woman lying not far away. Fortunately, she was notpletely dead.

 Chapter 582 It’s so noisy

    <h4>Chapter 582 It��s so noisy</h4>


    In desperation, Chang Nuo could only drag one with one hand, open the space vortex and jump directly into it.


    Anyway, don��t worry about it now, at least you need to do the next thing.


    When they appeared again, they were back in Mariejoia, the same ce as before.


    It only took a few minutes to go back and forth, but in these few minutes, everyone looked surprised when facing Chang Nuo who suddenly appeared with two more people in his hand. They couldn''t figure out who he was. What does it mean to bring two people?


    Chang Nuo ignored everyone present and continued dragging the two of them toward the room.


    They wanted to go in and take a look, but at this moment Yakkel ran directly to the door and blocked it. He looked at everyone with red eyes and said, "No one can go in today!"


    Gogoya frowned, but did not force his way in.


    "There are other people inside, but judging from the situation, they are already dying!"


    Moshank appeared behind Gogoya and said.


    "What exactly happened?" Gogoya still had a confused expression on his face.


    "We don''t know yet, at least we can''t confirm it yet!" Moshank said.


    Back in the room, Chang Nuo looked at Wei Mo who was still lying on the bed, with a bitter expression on his face. He threw the Luo in his hand to the ground helplessly.


    Then he turned to look at the dying woman on his left, took a deep breath, threw him to the ground, and then turned his hand with a burst of blue energy and hit Luo''s body directly.


    "This is where?"


    Opening his eyes slightly, Luo looked at his surroundings and subconsciously asked weakly.


    "Now is no longer the time for you to be confused. Get up quickly and save you. Now it''s your turn to do something."


    Chang Nuo said speechlessly.


    "Te��Emperor Tru??"


    Luo''s face was full of surprise, and the little energy he finally recovered was instantly filled with fear.


    She was clearly fighting Kaido in Wano Country just now, but now she was in an unfamiliar environment when she opened her eyes. The key point was that the man in front of her really shocked her.


    "Damn it, can you stop showing that expression? There are urgent things waiting for you to do now. Get up quickly and exchange their hearts!"


    Chang Nuo said with a disgusted look on his face as he kicked Luo who was sitting on the ground.


    "I can exchange hearts, but once I die, the heart will also die. In other words, I just changed the position of their hearts!"


    Luo said nervously.


    "Why do you care so much? Just change it if you are asked!"


    Chang Nuo said impatiently.


    The woman lying on the bed is now dying, and her lips have begun to turn purple again. It is estimated that she will belch in a short time, but this guy is still in the mood to talk about other things here.


    Luo was forced to do business and stood up staggeringly. Now he couldn''t look like he should at all. You can imagine how hard he could be beaten before.


    But he still held the bed with his right hand, spread the fingers of his left hand, and said "room~" directly in his mouth


    In an instant, the entire room was directly enveloped by a blue barrier.


    After all this was done, Luo wandered over to the woman lying on the ground, and then directly put his hand on the woman''s heart. In just an instant, the woman''s entire heart appeared in front of him intact. hands.


    And the whole heart is still beating vigorously.


    Holding the heart, Luo once again walked up to Wei Mo who was lying on the bed, and used the same move with his right hand to directly take out the other person''s heart.


    The difference is that the heart ispletely ck now, and there is no trace of beating from the moment it is taken out.


    "Put this woman''s heart inside her body!"


    Changnuo said with a big head.


    Luo didn''t hesitate at all. He had done such a simple thing countless times. Then, after cing the heart of the woman lying on the ground on Wei Mo''s body, Chang Nuo suddenly stretched out his left hand and directly released an attack. It fell on the woman lying on the ground.


    The opponent''s heart, which was still beating inside Wei Mo''s body, stopped beating the next moment.


    Luo looked at this scene in disbelief, and he couldn''t even figure out what the hell King Trudi was doing in front of him.


    "Okay, it''s none of your business anymore!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly, and finally walked to the bedside and put his right hand directly on Wei Mo''s chest.


    I didn''t have the heart to feel any soft feeling. After closing my eyes, I said directly in my mind, "Resurrect the other party!"


    Immediately afterwards, a blue light prated directly into Fang Fang''s body. As the light spread to Wei Mo''s entire body, a magical scene appeared.


    Wei Mo''s lips, which had begun to turn purple, began to gradually return to rosy.


    The heart that had stopped beating began to beat vigorously at this moment.


    As a doctor, Luo waspletely shocked when he saw this scene.


    A woman who was almost in a cold state has returned to her original state in just a short time. He would not dare to believe that someone else could have such a method in any other ce?


    "Okay, you have nothing to do here anymore, you should continue to return to your battlefield!"


    As Chang Nuo said, a blue vortex instantly appeared behind Luo. Before the other party could say anything or react, Chang Nuo directly kicked the other party into the whirlpool.


    When he reappeared, he was still in the deep pit where he was unconscious before.


    If he hadn''t still had feelings, he would have found that he seemed to be in a dream, passed out in aa, and came back confused.


    However, in Marigioa''s room, Wei Mo slowly opened her eyes, but when she saw Chang Nuo again, her behavior was still the same as before.


    A shout once again resounded throughout Mariejoia.


    But his loud shout this time did not make his rtives outside feel any resistance. On the contrary, they felt very happy for the sounding out.


    "Okay, stop shouting! Such a loud noise is really disturbing."


    Chang Nuo said speechlessly.


    The key is that he is only wearing a sheet around his body, so how can he still look like the True Emperor who is so powerful in the entire pirate world?


    It''s just that although Luo sent him away, there was still a corpse lying on the ground at this moment. Even though Wei Mo was just a little girl, she could still fully feel the changes that had happened to her body.


    After the shouting passed, Wei Mo looked pitiful, with a pair of big tearful eyes, staring straight at Chang Nuo, and subconsciously hugged the sheets tightly to wrap his body.

 Chapter 583 The meeting begins

    <h4>Chapter 583 The meeting begins</h4>


    Anyway, there was no special situation now, and the other party''s body had been healed. Chang Nuo began to take out his clothes from the closet slowly, and started to change clothes directly in front of the other party.


    "Why are you showing such an expression? You''ve already seen everything you need to see anyway!"


    Chang Nuo said speechlessly again.


    Especially Wei Mo''s performance at this moment, covering his face with his hands, but with suchrge fingertips exposed, both eyes could see clearly.


    "Why are you in my room?" Wei Mo suddenly asked curiously.


    "Instead of asking me this question, why don''t you ask them what''s going on?"


    Changnuo said.


    "oh!!"


    After more than ten minutes, the two people slowly appeared in front of everyone. There were people here who were nervous and expecting, and there were also a group of people who came to watch the excitement. Anyway, they were full of melon this time. of.


    "Wei Mo, are you okay!!"


    When Yakel saw the two peopleing out, he quickly ran to Wei Mo and asked in a concerned tone.


    "Is everything okay?" Wei Mo said shyly.


    "His Majesty!"


    Gogoya also hurriedly ran up, looking at his Majesty the King with a worried look on his face and shouted.


    "Who is presiding over this World Government Conference?"


    Changnuo asked angrily.


    "It seems like it''s our Tru Empire? I only found out about itst night. No one informed me about it before!" Gogoya said quickly.


    "Ha! These guys seem to have done a good job!"


    Chang Nuo now feels like he can''t find the end of his anger. He has been yed by others from beginning to end. It seems that he still needs to thank others in the end.


    The Tru Empire, which had never experienced any setbacks, was clearly being yed by the World Government at this moment.


    "Find a ce to live first!"


    Chang Nuo said to Gogoya in a low voice.


    "No, why don''t you just live here! I can go live with my brother or my father!"


    As soon as Chang Nuo finished speaking, Wei Mo opened his mouth and said directly.


    "That''s right, we have a big ce over there. You don''t have to worry about this at all. If you want, you can stay in Mariejoia as long as you want!"


    Yakkel also said quickly.


    Nowadays, the attitude of these two Tianlong people can be described as very good. Compared with many moths, these two can be considered very good.


    In short, not all people in any ce can be shot to death with one shot. There are always good and bad in every ce.


    At least the two people I see now are performing pretty well.


    "Do you still want to find a ce?" Gogoya asked.


    "That''s it for now, we''ll talk about the rest when we get back." Chang Nuo still couldn''t suppress the anger in his heart. Even after such a thing happened, he felt like his head was getting big.


    Have you ever wondered what the purpose of this world government meeting is? But I didn''t expect that someone had already set up a trick as soon as I came here.


    But now is no longer the time to discuss this kind of thing. Although we know who is behind it, that guy is not weak. He only relies on his knowledge and domineering power and cannot sense the other party. However, the World Government meeting is about to begin. There is no need to discuss this kind of thing again.


    The quiet days passed like this again for two days. As the meeting was about to begin, people from all the countries participating in the meeting had begun to arrive one after another. Of course, some of them fell directly onto the sea, and they would never die in this life. May reach this ce again.


    The meeting is about to be held, but everyone participating in the meeting has already arrived at Mariejoia.


    The long steps are still moving automatically. This time there are many national personneling, and there are even those familiar to Chang Nuo.


    Marie Gioia front square.


    "Is this Marie Joa? It looks really luxurious!"


    King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind brought the mermaid princess Shirahoshi to attend this meeting. The moment the huge mermaid appeared, it attracted everyone''s attention.


    Appearing onnd this time, Shirahoshi held the mobile nt in his hand, which was still the same thing given to him by the Toru Empire at that time.


    The sky-blue gem can directly float him above the ground. Unlike the mermaid king Neptune, he has begun to evolve his legs to walk freely on the ground.


    After entering the sea, the two legs will naturally transform into a fish tail.


    "I don''t know how many people built this ce with their lives. This meeting is very important to our Mermaid Ind, so no matter what happens, we must strive for the rtionship between mermaids and humans!"


    King Neptune said.


    "I understand, Father!"


    Shirahoshi said with a smile.


    "What a big mermaid. I am Princess Vivi of basta. I wonder if I can get to know you?"


    While Shirahoshi was chatting with Neptune, a girl with a sky blue ponytail quickly ran over. Looking up at the huge mermaid, he said to her with a smile on his face.


    "Hello, my name is Bai Xing, Ie from Mermaid Ind!" Bai Xing said, facing this sudden little girl, suddenly at a loss.


    "That''s really nice to meet you. You are the first mermaid I have ever seen. You look really beautiful!"


    Weiwei said with a smile again.


    "ah?!!!"


    "The meeting is about to start, let''s go there first. This meeting willst for several days, and you will have enough time to chat by then."


    King Kobra of basta came over and said to the two of them with a smile on his face.


    Nowadays, almost everyone walking in this square is either a king or a princess. Except for the previous Tru Empire, no country has ever sent a representative other than a king.


    They are almost always led by kings when they participate, and they bring their children to participate in this meeting, which can be regarded as increasing their experience and knowledge.


    Many of them came to this ce for the first time, and theirmon sentiments were very concentrated, that is, their first impression of Marie Joa was that this ce was extremely luxurious.


    But among these people, not all are kings, there are also one or two people who look weird.


    As a meeting held by the world government, the conference hall they chose this time is a huge conference room with a height of about 100 meters, with a huge table that is at least 100 meters long. Next to these tables are ced huge and identical heights. The chairs, not to mention other things, can already tell the importance of this meeting just by relying on theyout of the meeting venue!

 Chapter 584 Hosting the Meeting

    <h4>Chapter 584 Hosting the Meeting</h4>


    As the kings and apanying persons from various countries began to gradually enter the conference venue, the originally quiet huge conference room began to gradually be lively.


    Not everyone who stays here has the calmness of a king. There are also many kings who are already arrogant when they firste in. There are even a few who are picking their noses. Some inelegant movements.


    But in fact, even those who can participate in the World Government Conference, most of them juste to join in the crowd to increase the excitement.


    At best, they are just here as a decoration, with no real effect at all.


    However, as the two people from Mermaid Ind came in and looked at the huge mermaid white star one by one, most of the kings began to have stars in their eyes.


    "I must bring this mermaid to my kingdom when I go back! It will look great if I raise this mermaid!"


    As the first person said such words, the other kings also began to argue endlessly. The quiet conference room instantly became noisy, and the whole room seemed to be no different from a vegetable market.


    King Neptune looked at this scene of other kings, and an angry expression instantly appeared on his face. However, for the sake of the peaceful coexistence of Mermaid Ind and mankind in the future, he did not choose to explode any angry thoughts in front of this group of people.


    Bai Xing seemed to have seen through all this, but he just found a seat at the back and sat there.


    "Shut up, you people!"


    As the founding country of the World Government and a first-level franchise country, basta has absolute say in the World Government.


    Weiwei looked at the faces of these people and couldn''t help but feel sick.


    Perhaps it was the economy that the Tru Empire had ced in the country of basta that made his country feel very emboldened, so he roared instantly in front of so many kings.


    But even though they are a first-level member country of the World Government, after all, the strength of this country is ced there, so no king takes this little girl''s words to heart.


    On the contrary, they continued to discuss themselves, and everyone was having a great time chatting.


    "Please keep quiet! The meeting is about to be held. This is not your own country. Don''t be too unscrupulous in makingments here!"


    No one listened to Weiwei''s words, but the roar that followed forced them to quiet down.


    The arrival of Marine Headquarters Marshal Akainu immediately made them shut their mouths obediently, and one by one they began to find their seats and sit down obediently.


    Akainu looked around seriously, and he could see the expressions of all the kings.


    For these kings, he does not have to maintain any good temper at all. After all, for their countries, many kings are also worms in their countries!


    Even many people are simr to the Celestial Dragons, and more often than not, they are even worse.


    There were a total of three chairs ced at the front. Akainu snorted, then turned around and walked to a chair at the edge to sit down.


    He did note to participate in the World Government Conference, but instead came to pay attention to the security issues of this ce. From another perspective, he was nothing more than a participant.


    "Didn''t you say that the meeting has already started? Why hasn''t it started yet? Is it possible that you are just sitting here staring at me?"


    The quiet time is always short, and it is quiet before and after. I have not been there for three minutes, and there is already a bearded king sitting in the middle saying something dissatisfied.


    "That''s right, is it possible that we are here just for fun? Who''s time is not precious?"


    The guy sitting next to him also opened his mouth and said.


    "Shut up! You have so much ability. I hope you can bring it up directlyter. As the host of this world government meeting, if you can still say this when ites, If so, then you can lie down here and listen to the next World Government meeting!"


    Akainu shouted angrily again.


    "President? Isn''t it hosted by the World Government this time?"


    asked King Kobra of basta.


    "It doesn''t seem to be true. I also learned a little bit about it yesterday. It seems that Emperor Tru is hosting the World Government meeting this time, but for some unknown reason, he hasn''t appeared yet!"


    King Neptune of Mermaid Ind said.


    "Toru.Emperor!!!"


    The two kings who were still looking arrogant and shouting just now now lookedpletely stunned.


    Not to mention the two of them, all the kings who participated in the World Government Meeting this time also showed surprised expressions.


    World government meetings have always been presided over by people from the world government side. It will never be the king of a country''s turn to preside over such a thing.


    Even if any king present dared to say that he could preside over such a meeting, then there was a possibility that the next person would be beaten to death. But when they heard that the person presiding this time was actually Emperor Tru of the Tru Empire, a Like an eggnt beaten by frost, it wiltedpletely.


    No one dared to raise any objections, and even the disdain on everyone''s face had disappeared. Now the pressure that the Tru Empire brings to other countries ispletely imaginable.


    Whether in terms of strong economy or strong strength, the other party is enough to crush all existing countries.


    The conference room, which was still messy just now, returned to silence at this moment. Everyone''s eyes even looked expectantly in the direction of the door.


    No one raised any dissatisfaction thoughts. Anyway, there were people eating and drinking tea here. At least no one had their hands idle.


    Even Princess Weiwei of basta is holding snacks in her hands and constantly putting them in her mouth.


    But when she heard Emperor Tru''s name, she couldn''t help but be surprised on her expression.


    They knew about the Tru Empire''s participation in the World Government Conference this time. From the very beginning, the basta countries even specifically inquired about who would participate in this conference.


    After all, in the previous meeting, the Tru Empire only sent a representative. They didn''t say a word from beginning to end, and they didn''t seem to have the slightest opinion on anything.


    But this time the situation ispletely different. As Emperor Tru, he actually participated personally this time. So how can they object when they don''t know the specific conditions they are waiting for?

 Chapter 585 The Tru Empire was criticized verbally and written

    <h4>Chapter 585 The Tru Empire was criticized verbally and written</h4>


    After waiting for a long time, or in other words, everyone has been waiting here for nearly half an hour. Impatient expressions have already begun to show on everyone''s faces, and some people who can''t sit still have even begun to stand up.


    After waiting for such a long time, even Akainu, who was sitting at the top, began to look impatient on his face.


    But at this moment, the door of the conference hall suddenly opened slowly.


    Chang Nuo was dressed in a king''s costume and appeared here grandly.


    Looking around at the people present, some had happy expressions on their faces, while others had strange expressions on their faces.


    "I''m very sorry everyone, I''mte mainly because I overslept!"


    Changnuo walked in the front and middle position, sitting next to Marshal Akainu. When he came up, he directly expressed his apology and spoke affectionately to everyone present.


    But even this reason was too perfunctory, and no king stood up to express dissatisfaction at this time.


    "Who should be sitting next to me?"


    Changnuo turned to look at Marshal Akainu and asked.


    "Representative of the Celestial Dragons!"


    Akainu said helplessly.


    "Who is this bastard? You dare to keep us waiting for so long?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly pped the table and started yelling angrily.


    The group of people sitting below are all staring at the top with speechless expressions. It is obvious that you have juste here, and before you even sat down, you started to me others for noting. What is the reason foring? Do you have such thoughts?


    "His Majesty Emperor Tru can wait a little longer. We are already here anyway, so there is no harm in waiting a little longer."


    King Neptune said to Chang Nuo with a smile on his face.


    "Who on earth dares to ask us to wait for him? I really don''t know where the confidencees from!"


    Chang Nuo once again said dissatisfiedly. He could no longer bear his anger towards the Celestial Dragons. From the moment he arrived at Mariejoia, he had been tricked by others, and even in the next few days During this time, every day was not sofortable.


    Now, after finally waiting for the World Government Conference to be held, there are still people who dare to wait for themselves.


    "It seems that I should be the host of this world government meeting, right?"


    Changnuo looked at Akainu with a smile on his face and said to Akainu who was sitting there with his head propped up on his arms.


    "Hmm~, it seems so!"


    Akainu said perfunctorily.


    "If that''s the case, why are you waiting for them to cause trouble? Let me directly announce that this World Government Conference has officially begun!"


    Chang Nuo said, and as soon as he finished speaking, the hall door of the conference room opened again, but this time it was an old man who walked in.


    The moment Silohemia, a Celestial Dragon, walked in, his whole face was already filled with ck lines. He could have heard Chang Nuo''s abusive voice just now while standing at the door.


    But what if I heard it? Even as a Tianlong, he could only obediently walk to the side and sit down.


    In fact, Akainu should be the most surprised by the appearance of Silohemia. After all, few people present have seen this guy. Except for Akainu, no one else doubts this person''s identity as a Celestial Dragon. But what kind of position does he have? All the kings here don''t know.


    "You old guy! I didn''t expect you to dare to ask me to wait for you?"


    When the other party had just sat down and was still warm, Chang Nuo sat directly on the chair, turned to Silohemia and said dissatisfiedly.


    Although he said these words in a rtively low voice, several people sitting not far away could hear them. Siloamia stared at the other person with apletely arrogant look, wishing that he could kill the other person with a p now.


    But until the end, he still swallowed his anger, took a deep breath, and began to say to everyone, "The world government meeting has begun. Next, ording to the previous rules, let''s talk about the development of each country first, as a world government. The countries that have joined us will definitely receive priority in the future!��


    "We in Goa Kingdom have no objections. We are here just to join in the fun!"


    King Goa of the East China Sea stood up directly and said with a smile.


    With a thin face and a young age, being able to be the first to speak on such an asion already shows how extraordinary it is.


    "Then let me say something first. I hope that the Tru Empire can stop epting refugees from other countries. This has caused many people from our countries all over the world to flow into the South China Sea. Now the country''s poption is very low. Is it possible that this is a special situation? Don��t you feel ashamed, Emperor Lu?��


    Standing up to speak was a tall and thin man with a crown on his head and a ck king''s costume.


    When he stood up to speak, everyone looked at him in surprise. He dared to bring up this topic on such an asion, and in front of the other person.


    "What country is he from?"


    Chang Nuo turned to look at the old man Siloamia and asked.


    "Western Sea Meru Kingdom!"


    Although Siloamia didn''t want to answer Chang Nuo''s question, the other person''s face was almost close to his, so he had no choice but to start speaking.


    Changnuo breathed a sigh of relief when he heard that it was the kingdom of the West Sea. This was indeed the case in theirnd of the West Sea. The few people who had originally been there had already been stripped of all their wealth.


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said, "If your own country has the ability, then you are still worried about being snatched away by other kingdoms? In other words, the word snatched away is not urate. It is because people voluntarily came to our South China Sea Empire. Do you feel like you are being pped in the face when you say this?"


    After Chang Nuo finished speaking, he never stood up, but then he said again, "I hope that when you speak next, you can report your country first, and it is best to introduce your name. We have finished talking until the end, but the key is that we still don��t know who the king of which country is speaking.��


    "Don''t you think what your Tru Empire has done is really too much?"


    King Meru who just spoke asked angrily when he saw Chang Nuo''s attitude and his mentality was about to explode.


    "Marshal Akainu, may I ask, as the host of the World Government Conference, what additional rights do I have?"


    Changnuo turned to look at Akainu on his left and asked.


    The other party must have been afraid of his questions for a long time. A world government meeting has be such an atmosphere just because of his arrival, and he has toe to protect the safety of others.

 Chapter 586: Taking sides

    <h4>Chapter 586: Taking sides</h4>


    What was a naval marshal like him doing at the World Government meeting? The most important purpose is not to worry about Emperor Tru not being able to speak clearly in two sentences, and then p someone to death.


    After all, this is still the venue of the World Government. No matter how bad it happens, such a thing cannot happen under their noses.


    Once word spreads, both the world government and the navy will suffer a serious blow to their reputation.


    "This is my first time attending a world government conference. I don''t know the details very well!"


    Akainu answered directly.


    In fact, it has been made very obvious, that is, whether overtly or secretly, Changnuo, as the Emperor of Tru, is being told that I don��t know about this kind of thing, don��t ask me, asking is in vain, just ask the rest. Those who participated more were better.


    "Old man! What rights do you think I have?"


    Changnuo directly turned his words to Siloamia and asked.


    When Siloamia heard this, his hands under the table began to clenched into fists. Now he really wanted to punch this guy to death. He even had a strong desire to punch this guy to death from where he just walked in. The fantasy started from the moment.


    "As the host of the World Government Conference, I don''t have any privileges. I just mediate the disputes between each country!" Silohemia finally said helplessly.


    "Isn''t there any difference between being a good host and being a bad host?"


    Chang Nuo said that the three people had been whispering to each other, not very loudly, but it also caused dissatisfaction among other kings.


    King Meru was even more angry and asked excitedly, "Emperor Tru, I hope you can give us an answer at the World Government Conference this time!"


    "Okay, this issue is over. You can''t take up everyone''s time because of your personal affairs. The next king will talk first?"


    Changnuo directly turned aside King Meru and looked at the others and asked.


    "If we talk about the Tru Empire, then we in basta hope that the Tru Empire will evacuate those who remain in basta and return everything in basta to us!"


    While others began to remain quiet, Princess Vivi of basta, who was sitting on the second row of chairs, stood up to speak.


    "Weiwei!!"


    King Kobra was instantly surprised and turned around to yell.


    The participants in this meeting were only the king who sat in the first row, but those sitting in the second row were just apanying personnel and had any right to speak.


    Saying that there is now the first one targeting the Tohru Empire, the second person jumps out immediately.


    The other kings who were eager to give it a try also began to have their own ideas. After all, the existence of the Tru Empire in the South China Sea no longer threatened the interests of most people.


    "Are there any other countries? Want to ask questions about the Tru Empire?"


    Chang Nuo''s voice began to gradually be colder, but he still asked in a calm tone.


    "Nowadays, the navy is under huge pressure, but there are too many pirates in the world. The Tru Empire has this strength, and I hope that it can also send your country''s naval forces to assist the navy in jointly maintaining security on the sea! "


    ��


    At this moment, a king who looked unattractive also stood up and spoke directly.


    The other kings seemed to be talking trash, and they started talking one after another.


    For fear of missing some serious questionter, I said everything I thought of and what I didn''t expect at once.


    Moreover, all these problems are directed at the Tru Empire.


    But as everyone knows, the face of Tru Emperor Changnuo, who has been sitting at the top, has gradually turned cold.


    On the other hand, Siloamia, who was sitting next to him, began to raise the corners of her mouth from time to time, staring at the scene in front of her with interest.


    As Admiral of the Navy, Akainu maintained the safety of the meeting here. He began to breathe heavily because he could clearly feel that the seat next to him was starting to get angry.


    Once the opponent makes some move next, what ability can I use to stop it?


    "Have you finished speaking?"


    Chang Nuo suddenly sneered on his face as he listened to the other kings'' condemnations, and began to ask.


    "Can Emperor Tru please give us answers to these questions?"


    Princess Vivi of basta stood up again and asked.


    "King Kobra, can her words represent your country basta?" Changnuo asked.


    Cobra, who had always been silent, didn''t know how to answer the question now.


    It is the first time in history that a world government conference has been held like this.


    So many countries have targeted the Tru Empire, and besides, they are only part of the representatives.


    "Emperor Tru, as the king of the Kingdom of basta, I also agree with the opinions expressed by my daughter Weiwei. I hope that the Tru Empire can evacuate all the people stranded in the country of basta and restore everything in basta. Give us!"


    King Kobra lowered his head and said with a bitter look on his face.


    "Do the rest of you have any opinions?"


    Chang Nuo turned to everyone else with a serious expression and said in a serious tone.


    "The affairs of the Tru Empire have nothing to do with the New World and our country. The country of Dressrosa is not involved in this topic!"


    "The Drum Kingdom, which is on the Great Line, will not participate in this topic and will not make anyments..."


    "Fish-Man Ind does not make anyments..."


    "The Great Route Kizi Kingdom will not make anyments..."


    ��


    Among the more than fifty kings present, more than twenty countries quickly expressed their attitudes. The rest were either waiting and watching, or something really happened.


    "It seems that you have nothing to say. Since there is nothing to say, I should say something next, right?"


    Changnuo said, and then stood up slowly. Marshal Akainu, who was sitting next to him, frowned. He was also on alert, fearing that Emperor Toru might not be able to punch him to deathter. them.


    In fact, all the kings who had just participated in the conversation were beginning to feel a little scared.


    It was almost a matter of course from the very beginning, and with the participation of so many people, they raised their own questions one after another.


    But now, as Emperor Tru stood up in their eyes, they realized one by one that they seemed to be angry. The so-called world government meetings all said that other people were the host, just because their country had this strength, and they didn''t have any Method.

 Chapter 587 Alabasta’s Economy

    <h4>Chapter 587 basta��s Economy</h4>


    Faced with the words of many kings, each request was even more excessive than thest.


    If it is all in ordance with the request of the King of Xihai, perhaps Changnuo, the Emperor of Tru, should think carefully about it. After all, there are not many people in Xihai for him to dig now. It doesn''t matter even if he agrees to such a request. .


    But the idea of ??the basta country on the great route is simply a fantasy. One-third of the economy of the Tru Empire nowes from the business nning of the basta country. Such a huge amount of money was invested in the early stage, and now In fact, they can do whatever they think?


    "Among you, some of you are in contact with the Toru Empire, and of course there are some who have not been in contact with the Toru Empire. Although I don''t know why you came here to provoke the existence of the Toru Empire, but today you canpletely Let me tell you one thing, that is, the problem for all of you ispletely unthinkable!


    As for the countries in the West Sea, you say that the Tru Empire is poaching people from you, but what does this situation actually have to do with the Tru Empire? If our own country is incapable of doing so, how can we still suppress the dreams of others asmon people?


    The reason why the Toru Empire exists is that nothing it does vites the original regtions of the world government. Therefore, even if you put forward such conditions today, on the whole, I can think that you are provoking our Toru Empire!


    As for the country of basta, what was the situation then and what is the situation now? Don��t think that just because you are a first-level member country, you can do whatever you want here unscrupulously! "


    Chang Nuo made cold words and red at everyone, making everyone speechless.


    In fact, it��s not that what the Tru Emperor Chang Nuo said is so reasonable. The key is that he has the powerful strength of the Tru Empire as an endorsement. Things have been clearly arranged. If he can��t solve it, then he will directly threaten him, not to mention that he is still in the world. At government meetings.


    The kings who originally raised the question lowered their heads one by one, fearing that after the world government meeting is over, the Tru Empire will liquidate one by one. What kind of situation can they use to stop it at that time?


    "This is the conference center of the World Government, not the existence of the Tru Empire. Don''t you still know some things? Being criticized by so many kings already shows that the Tru Empire has not done enough in many things. s Bastan was indeed very poor before, but at least the people lived happily at that time, but now they are busy from morning to night, who can still be the same as before?"


    Weiwei stood up and roared with tears in her eyes, and everyone''s eyes were immediately attracted to this little girl again.


    This little girl was so daring that Siloamia, who had been sitting above her without speaking, suddenly gave him a high look.


    "As expected of a descendant of the Celestial Dragons!"


    Siloamia raised the corners of her mouth slightly and said directly in her heart.


    Marshal Akainu, now everyone feels as if a dog has eaten shit. Why is the world government meeting so tense when it is clearly a good meeting? He could clearly feel the anger of Emperor Tru, and the domineering aura of the other party had already begun to spread uncontrobly.


    Although it cannot cause any damage, it is constantly putting pressure on Akainu invisibly.


    The security of the World Government has been fully delegated to him. If any problems arise, the matter will be a big deal.


    Furthermore, there are a lot of reporters under Mary Joa. It is estimated that there must be people on the periphery who sneaked into this meeting. When the news is spread, whether it is the World Government or their navy, there will be no doubt that Caught in a storm of public opinion.


    "Then what do you think we should do?"


    Changnuo stared straight at Weiwei, but to everyone''s surprise, Emperor Tru was not angry. Instead, he sat there directly, supporting his face with his left hand and looking at basta who was standing there with tears in his eyes. Princess.


    "Retreat all the people from the Tru Empire. We don''t need your so-called industry andmerce. We only hope that the people of basta can return to what they were before, so that they can grow up carefree and happily. Maybe that��s what they deserve the most.��


    Weiwei opened her mouth again and said.


    "Gogoya, it''s your turn toe in!"


    Chang Nuo turned his head and shouted directly in the direction of the door of the conference room hall.


    But all the kings of all countries sitting here are extremely curious. What is Emperor Tru doing?


    But as the door opened, Gogoya walked over slowly with elegant steps and stood at the corner of the conference table, which happened to be next to Silohemia.


    "Your Majesty the King, what are your orders?"


    Gogoya lowered his head slightly and asked with some confusion.


    "Tell them about the investigation situation in basta to the princess of basta! At least it can let him know what her ideal so-called national life in basta is like?"


    Changnuo said calmly.


    "No problem, Your Majesty the King!"


    Gogoya said, lowered his head and directly opened the folder he had been holding in his hand, then flipped through it, found a few pages, and ced one page at the top.


    Then he raised his head and nced at King Kobra and Princess Vivi of basta. He lowered his head again and began to read the above content and said, "ording to the polls of the Tru Empire in basta, and the current situation of basta." Report on the living conditions of the people of Stan.


    Today, basta has 11,767,142 people engaged in various jobs provided by the Tru Empire, including industry,merce, navigation, and local measures for the basta country. In addition, it directly drives themercial and economic development of the remaining people, or is engaged in Self-service, business and a series ofmercial activities.


    The initial per capita ie of the basta country was 12,762 beli per year. Until now, the per capita annual ie is 117,653 beli, which is almost ten times higher than before the arrival of the Betru Empire.


    Moreover, in view of the situation of basta nationals, all industries andmerce in the Tru Empire adopt a daily wage work system, ensuring that every basta national has leisure and entertainment time!


    ����


    When talking about thetter, almost everyone has begun to tell the self-reported situation of the citizens of basta. Even in the hearts of most people, the existence of the Tru Empire is simply like a savior, at least it has made their originally boring life more modern. It''s wonderful, and at the same time, I no longer have to worry about not having the next meal as before.

 Chapter 588 Cancellation of the Shichibukai

    <h4>Chapter 588 Cancetion of the Shichibukai</h4>


    Gogoya was neither humble nor arrogant when facing dozens of kings. He spoke fluently and used data to organize everything, clearly allowing all the kings to evaluate the matter together.


    However, when King Cobra of basta heard this, his expression was not as good-looking as expected. Even their princess Weiwei looked at everyone sadly.


    "What she said is not right, it is purely false. When will the citizens of basta be like this?"


    Princess Weiwei was stunned for a moment, then she opened her mouth and shouted loudly.


    "This is the conference room of the World Government, not your home, where you can say whatever you want!"


    Siloamia also said helplessly.


    After all, these kings have never been to the country of basta at all. The Tru Empire used such data to exin it, which is obvious enough to prove some of the things.


    Just when Princess Weiwei was about to say something, Gogoya lowered his head again and took out a thick pile of things from the folder.


    This made the other kings even more curious. This time they were not curious about what the other party wanted to say, but rather curious about how so many things could be taken out of such a thin folder.


    "These are the agreements signed between the Kingdom of basta and the current Tru Empire ten years ago. They have already included everything. The content has been copied. If any of the kings needs it, it can be given to you at any time. Prepare a copy in which everything has been agreed upon, including profit sharing.


    The Kingdom of basta just wants to use this incident to allow itself to have such a hugemercial economy. From ten years ago to now, the Tru Empire has invested a total amount of 35 trillion Bei in the Kingdom of basta. Benefit, so far, even the benefit has not started to ur.


    Even most of the investments are not included in the calction, and all are donated to the local citizens of basta for free! "


    Gogoya opened his mouth again and ced a thick pile of materials on the desk in the conference room. Such a powerful thing stunned the king and princess from the Kingdom of basta.


    "This time the matter ends here. Who is the Trul Empire or the basta country? I think everything has an agreement, and this is a meeting between world governments, not a special one. The Lu Empire and you, basta, are going to argue about interests, so the next world government meeting will continue, and we don��t want anyone to talk about issues that have nothing to do with the government!��


    Chang Nuo smiled directly and said to end the matter between the two countries this time.


    But Princess Vivi of basta clearly wanted to say something else. After all, she had been preparing for this meeting for several years. The purpose was to allow basta to directly have everything ready-made, but she didn''t expect it. I was so well prepared, but in the end I still got this result?


    Even though the body has sat down, the face is still full of unwillingness, and the face is morepletely full of helplessness.


    She even started to look at the little girl from Dressrosa, and even turned her eyes towards the princess of Mermaid Ind whose name she just knew, just to get some help from her.


    But Rebeca, who came from Dressrosa, saw her friend who she had just met looking like this, even though she felt very distressed in her heart, she still didn''t open her mouth to say anything in the end.


    The princess of Mermaid Ind is even less likely to mention any reason. Now the Tru Empire is the most likely to help them in this meeting. Besides, they have still produced such strong evidence, both emotionally and rationally. It was impossible to help this being that I had just met.


    "I, the Kingdom of Dressrosa, would like to make a suggestion first. Since the World Government Meeting has officially begun, I would first request to revoke the existence of the Shichibukai!"


    Dressrosa, now the king, stood up with a tired look on his face and ced his hands on the conference table.


    He looked at all the kings present with a serious and pleading look.


    After all, all matters at the World Government Conference ultimately require voting and resolution. However, matters involving the Shichibukai were approved by public voting at previous World Government Conferences. Now we are announcing the cancetion of the Shichibukai. Invisibly, it was a p in the face for all of them.


    "Old man! As the host of the World Government Conference, the Tru Empire should still have the right to vote, right?"


    Changnuo turned his head and looked at Silohemia and asked.


    The old man took a deep breath, looked helpless and said with disgust, "You have the right to vote!"


    "Since I have the right to vote, then I agree with the decision of the King of Dressrosa!"


    Chang Nuo sat there and said with a smile.


    "Mermaid Ind agrees"


    "Zigu Kingdom agrees...!"


    "..."


    The results of this vote are even beyond everyone''s imagination. When they are held high, the content of this meeting has been decided in this lifetime.


    The decision to revoke the Shichibukai''s decision can be confirmed at a nce to have been passed.


    After all, just by raising their hands, more than half of them can be seen at a nce. Many of them may have been intimidated by the Shichibukai, and for those whomit robbery without breaking thew, it is estimated that many of them have already been in practice over the years. Hate it to the core!


    "Since most people support it, then the first content of the first meeting of the World Government, the revocation of the Shichibukai system that has been established for eight years, is officially adopted!"


    Changnuo stood up and said.


    This is his decision as the host of the World Government Conference. Although no one has recorded all the content of the chat in this conference room, this is his greatest and wisest ce.


    At this moment, there are three record-keepers sitting outside and they are writing non-stop. They are all carefully recording the main content of this meeting. One of them is standing at the front, listening carefully, and starts to ry it to the people sitting there. The people who write there.


    Once these things are unanimously approved, they can be directlymunicated to the world through newspapers!


    He was simpler than anyone imagined. However, when this decision was implemented, the current king of Dressrosa stood there covering his face and crying, just like a child who couldn''t control his emotions. .


    However, Rebeca, who was sitting behind him, was also moved to tears. With the existence of the Shichibukai system, they were probably the ones who were hurt the most.

 Chapter 589 Meeting Again

    <h4>Chapter 589 Meeting Again</h4>


    The whole meeting in the morning actually only discussed this one thing. Every king was very leisurely, and they were not willing to stay in one ce forever.


    A world government conference like this needs to be held for at least five or six days, and some things are discussed in the middle. In fact, a few issues are not discussed at the end of the conference.


    This is why the entire pirate world has remained as it is. The so-called World Government Conference is just a time for all the kings to gather together for fun.


    The morning meeting ended early, and the whole processsted only about an hour and a half. In addition, there were some questions that were discussed between each other, but in the end, the first session was passed peacefully.


    At the end of the meeting, Chang Nuo just walked out of the conference hall and stretched out. When he was about to leave apanied by Gogoya, someone behind him shouted, "Please wait a moment, Emperor Tru!"


    Chang Nuo didn''t even need to turn his head to know who the other party was, but he still turned his head and nced boredly.


    "What''s the matter, Princess Weiwei?"


    "I wonder if I can talk to you alone?" Weiwei asked.


    "I''m very sorry. Our King is already exhausted. What he needs most now is rest!" Gogoya said in refusal.


    "I''ll just take you for a while, it won''t be long!" Weiwei asked again.


    "If what you want to say is about basta''smercial economy, I think you don''t need to. The most important thing is that I''m not interested in talking to you about this!"


    Chang Nuo sneered, said something, then turned around and continued to move forward.


    Weiwei stood there, looking a little at a loss. But before Chang Nuo took a few steps, she shouted loudly, "It''s not because of these things, but because of the promise I made back then!"


    "Forget it! I don''t take it to heart what I said when I was a child. You don''t have to do some things that are too contrary to your conscience. I''m not interested in any of this."


    Chang Nuo didn''t stop at all and said as he walked.


    The basta princess was left standing there nkly, tears flowing out of her eyes once again.


    "Weiwei, are you okay?"


    Reba, who also walked out of the conference room, watched the whole scene. It wasn''t until the other party walked away that she came out tofort Weiwei and asked.


    "I''m fine!"


    "I''m sorry, Weiwei, you may not know the situation in Dressrosa. The reason why I didn''t help you is just because we can''t afford to offend anyone now!"


    Rebeca said apologetically.


    "It''s okay, we all understand, it''s just that we know more about this country than you do!"


    Weiwei said while still smiling through tears.


    Although she is a little willful, she does not understand this kind of international thing. If a person wants to take sides lying down, the premise is to see if he has the qualifications.


    "I have heard all about the situation in the Tru Empire, and I don''t know much about it, so I have no right to speak!" Rebeca said.


    "The Tru Empire is very powerful, so powerful that it can make any country despair!" Weiwei said.


    "I see!"


    Rebekah was a little frustrated. After all, Vivi was the first friend she met here, so she didn''t want to give up this friendship, but there was nothing she could do about the basta country.


    The kings of the following countries all came out one after another, but none of them showed the slightest sympathy. After all, if they sympathized with you, it would be a huge harm to them.


    "Your Majesty the King, we don''t have any demands to make during this meeting. Do we still need to stay here?"


    On the way, Gogoya looked at his Majesty the King curiously and asked.


    In fact, beforeing, she had done all the work, so she was also very confused. After all, the Tru Empireing to participate in this meeting did not seem to be of any benefit to the Tru Empire, and there was no If you have any opinions to offer, why do you have to go to this stupid ce when you have nothing to do?


    "There are some things you don''t see thoroughly enough. Maybe you will know it soon!"


    Chang Nuo said, and suddenly his eyes suddenly looked to the right. Before Gogoya could ask any questions, Chang Nuo had already disappeared.


    "Do you want to take a look at this Void Throne? Or do you want to sit on it and feel it?"


    Appearing again, Chang Nuo came directly to a dim hall. This was the same ce where the five old stars knelt on the ground before. The difference was that the people were different. The same thing was that it was still the same environment as before, and it was so dark that even above The situation cannot be clearly seen.


    As soon as Chang Nuo came over, a voice came directly from above and spoke to him.


    "Throne of the Void? I have no interest in this thing, but one thing I am very curious about is, why did Lord Im behind the World Government ask me toe here?" Changnuo asked with a smile.


    "It''s nothing special, I just want to see what kind of person this influential figure who has stirred up the whole world, Emperor Tru, is!"


    "How do you feel now? Can you no longer find the taste you had two years ago? Do you think so? Feiduo!"


    Chang Nuo didn''t even see the face of the person above him clearly, and even relied on his domineering perception to achieve no results.


    Since you have already guessed it, why go through all the twists and turns?


    "Hahahaha!! It''s still you, but I''m curious about how you found out? What makes me even more curious is, how did you know that there is a person like me in the World Government?"


    Fei Duo jumped down directly, and the six pairs of ck wings behind him instantly retracted to his back. He quietly looked at the man in front of him and asked.


    "No reason? It''s mainly because the two of us have fought before, so I can feel your breath. I can''t sense your existence with Haki, but that doesn''t mean that nothing can detect your appearance!" Chang Nuo said.


    "That''s right. Now that we''re all here, do you want to have a good chat?" Fei Duo asked with a smile.


    "Remember when you were fighting, you said that you never wanted to take a second look at the weak?"


    "That''s the past you''re talking about. I can feel it. In two years, you''ve almost reached my level! I''m really looking forward to fighting this time, seriously!"


    Fei Duo looked at Chang Nuo with an expectant expression on his face and asked quietly.

 Chapter 590 I’ll tell you everything if I win

    <h4>Chapter 590 I��ll tell you everything if I win</h4>


    Chang Nuo ignored the other party''s provocation. Instead, he looked at him angrily, then turned around and directly found a ce to sit there.


    "You asked me toe here just to talk about this, right? I haven''t settled the ounts with you for what happened a few days ago!" Chang Nuo asked coldly.


    "Ha! Don''t say this is better. We are each other. At least I will give you a woman, right? The key is that you can hold a lot of that thing on the moon!" Fei Duo asked speechlessly.


    This sentence directly made Chang Nuo, who had the upper hand, feel embarrassed, but he still asked quibblely, "What are you talking about on the moon that I don''t know at all?"


    "Okay! I don''t n to ask you for it. In today''s world, apart from you, I can''t think of another person who can reach that position. So who else can you say if it''s not you?"


    Fei Duoy directly on the back of the sofa where Chang Nuo was sitting, not far away from his face. With a smile on his face, he stared at the man curiously and asked.


    "Let''s not talk about the past. Just go ahead and ask me what happened!"


    "Isn''t your goal to rule the world? Come back and fight with me. If you win, what will the world do to you? After ruling for 800 years, both the navy and the world government are now rotten to the core. Now, what do you think you can do? It��s only for a hundred or two hundred years, so what should you do with the rest of the time?


    Maybe you haven''t considered this issue at all. Before I ruled the world, I was just like you, full of confidence. But the reality is often not like this. After the entire world was ruled, it onlysted about 150 years, and I lived afortable life. But it has beenpletely broken.


    After all, the world is too big, and after living for a long time, you no longer have any idea of ????managing these things. There is no original passion or original desire. When you get everything, you will find , doing anything in life seems too lonely. "


    Fei Duo looked at Chang Nuo who was sitting there and said in a long tone.


    "What was the situation back then?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Don''t many people want to know what the situation was like 800 years ago? Or maybe they can''t wait to know what the history of the nk 100 years was like? But what can we do if we know this?


    I have been working hard for this thing for nearly 800 years. If you really have the strength, handing over this world to you might be a very good choice! Fei Duo said.


    "Speaking of this, what is your purpose?" Chang Nuo asked again.


    "For no other reason, it has been too lonely for 800 years, and your strength has reached its peak. You can never imagine what kind of life this is like?


    So fight with me next, and as long as you win, I will tell you everything! "


    Feido still had a smile on her lips, without any airs, as if the two of them were chatting about everyday things.


    Although the fruit of the soul cannot prate into the other person''s heart, Chang Nuo can still find that there is no deception in the other person''s expression.


    "To be honest, I have too many doubts now. What is the purpose of building such a big thing on the moon? How did Devil Fruite from? What are the hidden truths in this world? 100 years of nk history, tell the story What is it? Perhaps the answer to all of this can only be obtained from you!" Chang Nuo asked.


    "You''re right, I know everything in this world clearly, but as I said just now, as long as you win, what''s the point of telling you everything I have?" Fei Duo continued to smile. said.


    "Is it possible that if I really win against you, you will be willing to give up control of the entire world?"


    "Ha ha ha ha!!"


    Fei Duo stood thereughing, then his eyes turned serious, and his expression became increasingly cold as he said, "In this world, as long as you can defeat me, who else do you think can stop you? Rule the world. It��s just a matter of time, no one can stop a being who stands at the top of the world, so you should understand!��


    After Fei Duo finished speaking, he turned around and sat down on the sofa opposite him. He leaned directly on the back of the sofa and crossed his legs. Then he said again, "As long as you have enough strength, you can do it here." No matter what rules are set in the world, no one will object to them at that time, and no one will reject them. You can be a god in everyone''s mind, or you can be a devil in everyone''s mind!


    The World Government has indeed be rotten to the core over the years, and the existence of the Celestial Dragons is even more rotten to the core. Do you think I don��t know all these things?


    In fact, what if we know it? But no matter what, the existence of the world government is still actively maintaining the stability of the world. Even if the pirate is rotten to the core, he is still the embodiment of justice. There are many things. Controlling a country and controlling the world is terrible. Completely two different things! "


    Chang Nuo actually had no idea what Chang Nuo said. Maybe it was just like what the other party said. It was just full of enthusiasm at the beginning, but in the end, as time gradually increased, this kind of enthusiasm could continue to... when?


    If I had always existed in this world, perhaps this possibility would not be possible. Once I left or something went wrong, what kind of test would this world face?


    No matter which angle you look at it, this series of things seems to be beyond his understanding.


    It was impossible for him to consider the long distance after hundreds of years, but Chang Nuo still smiled and said, "I believe that I will be able to manage all of this. Even if I leave, I can still make this world a better ce." Keep up a steady development!��


    "Tell me what you think!"


    Fei Duo said with interest.


    "As long as the royal power is concentrated, things like what you said will happen sooner orter, and the world is likely to fall into turmoil again. But what will happen if all these arepletely separated?"


    "Haha!! I have to say, your idea is really good!"


    Fei Duo sat straight up,ughed and pped, looking at the other person''s expression as if he was listening to something funny.


    For an old monster who has lived for hundreds of years, the idea of ??making him so happy rarely exists, but now he is apuding an opponent with interest.

 Chapter 591: Meeting for a battle outside the world

    <h4>Chapter 591: Meeting for a battle outside the world</h4>


    But after the apuse, Fei Duo just sat there and sighed, and then leaned on the back of the sofa.


    "I''m not trying to hit you. Do you know how these countries in the world came to be? Back then, I had the ability to unify the entire world. Why do there still exist so many countries today? You probably have never considered such a thing.


    Back then, I had the same idea as you. I felt that the concentration of royal power was not only detrimental to many people, but more importantly, staying in this position for a long time would keep a person in a state of expansion.


    So at that time, I had already thought about splitting the royal power, letting each person manage an area separately, and began to formte various ns. In fact, it is simr to the current Council of your Tru Empire, but this situation is What can be done?


    After waiting for these rights to be divided step by step, the time does not evenst 100 years, and all the ss solidification appears again, and even bes more serious every time. Even if you use various means, the final oue still cannot be changed.


    So no matter what you think or do, as long as there are people, there will be interests, and where there are interests, there will be sses. sses will cause injustice, and injustice will cause resistance from others. It goes back and forth over and over again, andsts for a long time. , you will find that everything is back to where it started.


    Then he is waiting for the next more powerful person to rise again. His killings can create peace for nearly a hundred years, but what will happen after a hundred years?


    This is why I don��t want to manage this world at all until now. It��s not necessary, and many people even make me feel sick when I look at them. "


    Fei Duo said seriously and solemnly.


    "Is there really not a longer-term way that can at least allow everyone to coexist peacefully?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Yes, of course there is! And there is definitely more than one way to do this. The most real and effective way is to focus all your attention on the outside world and let an imaginary powerful enemy appear in the outside world. At that time, the whole world will bepletely Only under such circumstances can we ensure that everyone is worried about their own survival all the time, and there is no grudge against each other, can peace truly appear!" said Fei Duo.


    "ording to what you said, this is the purpose of the things you made on the moon?" Changnuo asked.


    "As for all the questions, I still mean what I said before, you defeated me, I can tell you everything, you know or don''t know, I can tell you all these things.


    The world government can also give you, beauty, a smooth road, allowing you to feel the darkness of this world, and at least let you live the addiction of the ruling ss! "


    Fei Duo had a bad smile on his face, but it was clear from his words that he really liked the man sitting opposite him.


    Perhaps it was also because of hundreds of years of loneliness that this young man seemed to have found a soulmate with whom he could have a good chat.


    "If you and I want to fight with all our strength, we will definitely not be able to do it here. When I have time one day, maybe I have considered it. We will fight on others and try our best. I estimate that the two of us will be able to fight each other in the morning. The power should be able to destroy the world under your feet now!"


    Chang Nuo thought for a moment and could only say helplessly.


    He really wanted to know the answer to this world, and even more wanted to know why he came to this world? It''s just that there are too many answers in this world that I can''t exin clearly. The only effective and quick way is to let the man in front of me tell me.


    An old monster who has lived for more than eight hundred years probably already knows everything about everything in this world. As his strength bes stronger and stronger, Chang Nuo now knows more and more things. Of course , the doubts brought about also increased.


    Everything he was thinking about now made him feel overwhelmed, but everything seemed to be not far away from enhancement.


    "You are right. Fortunately, you can still think of fighting on others. But this is the existence I am looking forward to. Fighting fearlessly in this world is indeed not in line with me. idea!��


    Fei Duo said with a sessful smile.


    "Today, the world is full of too many doubts for me. Many things are still unsolved mysteries. As my strength increases, these doubts be deeper and deeper. I always feel that there are hands behind this world. Invisible maniption, as for whether that person is you, I��m not sure now.��


    Chang Nuo stood up, took two steps towards Fei Duo and asked.


    "Don''t worry, I''m not that boring. It''s not like you. So many people actually put their hopes on a little guy? Sometimes I really don''t know what you think about it!" Fei Duo said with a smile.


    In fact, Chang Nuo had already guessed that Fei Duo was Yi Mu. There was probably nothing in this world that he could hide from the other party.


    Luffy may be the protagonist in the impression, but in terms of strength, there is no way he canpare with the man in front of him given 100 years, let alone relying only on a rubber Devil Fruit ability. , how big of an attack can it create?


    "I''m going to eat. There is a World Government meeting to be held in the afternoon. As for other things, let''s wait until this time is over!"


    Chang Nuo turned around and started to walk towards the door without even thinking about it.


    But the moment he stepped out of the door, Fei Duo suddenly said loudly and calmly, "We don''t belong to this world, so we don''t need to be too attached to some things!"


    The moment these words came out, Chang Nuo suddenly stopped where he was, but he just turned his head and nced at the back of the other person sitting there, and then continued to move forward.


    No matter what the other party knows now, now is not the time to be too entangled and care about it.


    He couldn''t figure out what the other party''s mentality was like. A monster that had lived for hundreds of years couldn''t figure it out simply based on his current thoughts.


    But as long as the truth wille out one day, he is also looking forward to the next step. When the two people really start the battle, what kind of topics should he learn about if he wins?


    A series of problems are all in front of you. Perhaps after all these problems are solved, all the doubts will be solved.


    But at least these things are no longer what I can think of now.

 Chapter 592 The Revolutionary Army’s Declaration of War

    <h4>Chapter 592 The Revolutionary Army��s Deration of War</h4>


    After returning to the ce where he lived, Changnuo was still thinking about those words, as if they existed in his mind.


    Especially when he left at the end, what did Fei Duo mean by those words?


    It''s just that he really didn''t know all this at first, but it was really not the time to think too much.


    Lying on the bed, Chang Nuo tried hard to control himself from thinking too much. After all, it would be useless to think about things that he could not touch in a short period of time.


    afternoon.


    The World Government meeting began again, but the difference was that this time Changnuo did not participate. Instead, the king''s secretary Gogoya took his ce and continued.


    As for the issues discussed throughout the afternoon, they were actually no different from those in the morning. A group of people chatted for a while, but in the end they were unable to reach any practical results.


    The only difference was that at the end, King Neptune of Fish-Man Ind, as if he had been struggling for a long time in his heart, said directly to them, "As the King of Fish-Man Ind, I am honored to participate in the World Government Meeting this time, but then... Next, I would like to mention one thing, that is, I hope that the murlocs in the future can live together under this world like humans. I also hope that the world government or the kings of various countries can formte relevantws to prohibit humans from catching mermaids. !��


    Neptune said, standing up directly and looking at everyone with a pleading look on his face.


    But the expressions of other people have betrayed everything, that is, all the kings sitting here are like looking at a monkey, and they just regard this incident as a joke.


    "When will Fish-Man Ind be able to be on an equal footing with us?"


    At this time, an unknown king jumped up and asked, and the scene once again fell into embarrassment.


    "Perhaps I think the King of Fishman Ind is right. Why can''t people coexist peacefully? And why do you express such emotions one by one?"


    At this time, a king who was sitting next to that guy, a guy from Beihai, stood up and grabbed the other guy''s neck. With just a little force, the king who was looking so embarrassed just now died instantly.


    Just when everyone was surprised and Marshal Akainu, who was sitting at the top, had not yet stood up, the king from the North Sea instantly took off the hood on his head.


    And his true face was revealed at this moment.


    As the General Staff Officer of the Revolutionary Army, Sabo naturally knew most of the people present.


    "Tell me, each of you only thinks about yourself every day. Is it really that difficult for people to coexist peacefully? The ultimate leader of all this is the world government. As long as you can make a voice or With support, many things will not happen like this, so today, on behalf of the revolutionary army, I dere war on the world government..."


    Sabo looked at everyone domineeringly and said, with a smile on his lips, and he had already taken out a steel pipe on his back.


    "Revolutionary Army? How dare you disrupt the World Government Meeting? I don''t know where you got the courage, but it''s better for you to stay here."


    Akainu was covered inva as he stared at Sabo fiercely and said.


    "There are so many kings here, do you dare to n to start a war here?"


    Sabo asked with a smile.


    Indeed, Akainu didn''t dare. He didn''t want to kill all the kings present because of his ability.


    This scene instantly made other kings start to fear. Perhaps because of fear, they all sat in their seats obediently, and no one got up.


    "Marshal Akainu, I hope that the next time we meet again, it won''t be on such an asion. At that time, you may really be able to keep me, but this time it may not be possible!"


    Sabo said, covering his armed haki with both hands, then smashing the ss next to him and jumping out of the window.


    Akainu did not choose to pursue, but instead directly restrained the magma on his body and quietly watched the other party leave here.


    Silohemia, the five elder stars of the Celestial Dragons, sat there with a serious face from beginning to end and did not move at all.


    Then Gogoya, who exists in the Tru Empire, has no interest in such things.


    It''s just that the revolutionary army suddenly appeared here, everyone was surprised.


    However, the Chief of General Staff of the Revolutionary Army seemed to havee to this ce just to dere war. No one could figure out what his intention was.


    Is it possible that today''s revolutionary army is sorge that it can challenge the world government? Or in all things, do you think you can be as good as the Toru Empire with a little bit of strength?


    "It seems that this meeting is over! As for the matter of Fish-Man Ind, I agree on behalf of the Tru Empire. We will naturally have a better exnation of the remaining matters. But as for the safety issues, I hope The Admiral of the Navy can provide a better guarantee!"


    Gogoya stood up with a smile, first looked at King Neptune and then turned to face Akainu again.


    The appearance of the revolutionary army in Mariejoia is already an international problem for everyone. Why didn''t any of them discover this matter in advance? On the contrary, a king appeared in the conference room and died, and these people seemed to treat it as nothing happened.


    "You don''t need to worry about your country, our navy will handle this kind of thing!" Akainu said in a cold voice.


    "I hope so!"


    Siloamia also stood up and looked at the other party and asked.


    ��������


    "Are you OK?"


    In the room, Wei Mo looked at Chang Nuo who was sleeping on the bed and asked.


    "How did youe?"


    Chang Nuo asked sleepily.


    "I heard that you didn''t participate in the afternoon meeting. I was worried about something happening to you, so I came over to take a look!" Wei Mo asked shyly.


    "It''s okay, I''m just a little tired!" Chang Nuo took a deep breath and said.


    "Are you hungry? Do you want to eat something? I''ll let them do it." Wei Mo asked, looking at the other person with a smile.


    "Forget it! It seems like you have no appetite now?"


    After Wei Mo heard this, he stood there a little disappointed. At this moment, she didn''t look like a Celestial Dragon at all, she was more like an ordinary little girl.


    Chang Nuo sat up and looked at the other person''s face. In fact, even now, he still felt a little guilty. Although all this was not his fault, what happened was always his fault.


    And he also felt that what he just said seemed to really hurt the other person''s heart. Such things had already happened, and he really couldn''t face such a little girl.

 Chapter 593 Battle on the Moon

    <h4>Chapter 593 Battle on the Moon</h4>


    Faced with this woman''s concern, Chang Nuo finally epted it helplessly.


    It''s just that the World Government Conferencested only a few days. Changnuo originally wanted toe to this ce to take a look or explore the reality of the World Government. Unexpectedly, on the first day of the conference, his own The purpose has been achieved.


    Let��s not talk about whether what Im said in his mind is true or false? But what the other party said was very true, that is, as long as he wins, who in the world can stop him?


    Not only did he get all the answers hidden in this world, but more importantly, this method was indeed more in line with his philosophy.


    If the two armies really go to war directly, something particrly serious might happen. Now it seems that this kind of thing is indeed a rtively good choice.


    After the entire world government meeting ended, different riots broke out in the world of pirates again. Newspaper headlines were almost overwhelmingly publicized every day, from the title of the Shichibukai being wiped out, to the fact that the residents of Fishman Ind can live normally in the sunshine. Now, everything seems to be moving towards a better direction.


    But at the same time, over the moon.


    "I really didn''t expect you to ask me out so soon? But are you sure you are ready?"


    Fei Duo stood on this deserted side and quietly looked at Chang Nuo who was standing not far away and asked.


    This is the bright side of the moon, and there are no buildings on it. In fact, even if they fight here, it will not affect anyone.


    Even the bases behind the moon should not be affected in any way. Even if they are affected, Changnuo doesn''t seem to have any objections. After all, these things are not his.


    "It''s not that I''m anxious, but there are too many things I want to know!" Chang Nuo said calmly.


    "Haha!! He is indeed the man I like. To be honest, I have been looking forward to this day for hundreds of years. I have always been in a high position, and the world has longcked the taste of life now. But Your appearance has brought a ray of light into my dark life, but I just don��t know if you will be able to satisfy me next.��


    Feido asked with a smile on her face.


    "Maybe the best thing to do is wait and see, isn''t it?"


    As Chang Nuo spoke, a fierce aura suddenly erupted from his body. In an instant, all the dust around him was swept away, and even the big rocks close to him were all impacted far away.


    "It''s really exciting, let''s indulge in it unscrupulously!"


    Fei Duo did not talk too much nonsense, and then six pairs of wings suddenly appeared. Under the ck form, his eyes instantly turned red, and the whole person began to slowly float above the ground.


    "Let me tell you a fact today. The Angel Devil Fruit stands on the top of the Devil Fruit tree. Or, on the other hand, he is the seed of the Devil Fruit tree. So even if you have Devil Fruit abilities, even if you develop them to You can��t be my opponent to any extent!��


    Fei Duo shouted loudly and disappeared in the next second.


    Changnuo only relied on the perception ability of the immortal human body to conduct detection. The feeling of being released from the opponent''s energy made him instantly take a step to the side, and immediately behind the ground where he was standing just now, there appeared an object at least dozens of kilometers away. Gully.


    The powerful power makes people feel desperate no matter how they look at it. The unparalleled movement speed, powerful attack ability, and amazing recovery power. Fei Duo is like countless powerful people gathered together!


    "The power of awakening ~ space rain!"


    Chang Nuo condensed the power of space with his hands, and his body was suspended in the air for an instant. The blue power in his right hand was suddenly thrown into the air, and attacks like raindrops covered almost half of the moon.


    Immediately afterwards, the power of space like raindrops began to fall quickly toward the ground. Every time it fell, ripples appeared on the entire ground like water waves.


    "Bang!!!!"


    As soon as the attacknded, Chang Nuo suddenly turned around and put his hands in front of him to protect himself. The powerful impact was like a mountain, hitting directly in front of him.


    Fei Duo pped the six pairs of wings behind his back and appeared from nowhere. He suddenly whipped his legs and attacked directly in front of Chang Nuo.


    Fortunately, Chang Nuo had already sensed it before. He put his hands in front of him to protect himself, and a huge crack suddenly appeared in the space where the impact urred.


    But even though he was fully prepared, Chang Nuo was still kicked from mid-air by the opponent and fell to a ce far away that could not be seen with the naked eye.


    After hitting a mountain, the powerful impact ttened the mountain like a missile, and the whole person was finally embedded directly in the mountain rocks.


    "I thought you were careless, but I didn''t expect that after two years of not seeing you, your strength is still like this. No matter how you look at it, it''s really disappointing!"


    Fei Duo was still suspended in the air, quietly looking at Chang Nuo who had flown far away, and spoke directly with a hint of disappointment.


    But just as he finished speaking, nine chains instantly appeared from below the mountain, so fast that they could even prate the space directly.


    Fei Duo sneered as he watched this scene, the ck wings behind his back suddenly waved, and a ck vortex instantly appeared in front of him.


    This thing is exactly like the space gate that Chang Nuo built before. The Vajra blocking power of the immortal body directly prates the vortex, and then no power can be found at the front end.


    But just when Fei Duo was feeling proud, these chains appeared again out of nowhere, as if they were directly guing the two spaces.


    "interesting!"


    Fei Duo finally became serious. After all, in the first battle before, Chang Nuo did not choose to use this power, and he had no idea what the purpose of this thing was.


    The moment the chains came over, Fei Duo turned sideways and grabbed one of them, but before he could react, several other chains instantly began to cover his body.


    "Tianxiang Dragon sh!"


    Changnuo appeared instantly, already holding the demon sword Muramasa in his hand. The powerful attack power apanied by this sword seemed to split the space in two.


    The ck sword light began to prate quickly, and Fei Duo, who was already bound by the chain, definitely had no possibility of evading it.


    At least it is certain that the opponent will not be able tounch the King Kong blockade in a short period of time, and an attack directly prates the entire moon.


    Even people who are staying in the pirate world can see this scene when they raise their heads. A ck straight line on the small moon is so clearly divided, but no one has ever thought that there are actually two people fighting on it.

 Chapter 594 The Divine Skill of Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 594 The Divine Skill of Devil Fruit</h4>


    Such a powerful attack instantly caused the chains that originally wrapped Fei Duo to fall apart, but even so, Chang Nuo could always feel that he had not hurt the opponent.


    He was suspended in mid-air and began to work hard to observe the situation around him. Even a slight vibration in the space would be within the range of his entire perception.


    "It''s a really good sword. Such swordsmanship can definitely subvert my three views. Normally, I am willing to admit you as the strongest swordsman in the world!"


    Fei Duo''s voice came out, but it was not clear which direction it came from. It seemed that the source of the voice was all around, making it impossible to verify.


    "Fei Duo, are you hiding like this? If so, what''s the point of our fight?"


    Changnuo asked mockingly.


    "You''re right. It''s really not my style to hide here and there, but now you are growing faster than I thought? I''m sorry for what I just said to you. I don''t know if it was yourst time. There is no intention at all in the battle, or is it because of other things?


    But since we have already scheduled a battle outside the world today, do you think you are looking down on me a little bit if you use an overseas clone? "


    Fei Duo slowly appeared not far in front of Chang Nuo, looked at Chang Nuo and asked in an indifferent tone.


    "Then you still want me to apologize to you?"


    Chang Nuo stared at the other person with the corners of his mouth raised slightly, and then the mirror clone that spoke began to gradually break into pieces in the next moment, and finally a ck hole began to appear where the original fragments had been.


    The original body appeared in front of him unscathed, and the aura exuded from his body was countless times more powerful than the mirror clone. Even the moment he first appeared, cracks began to appear in the surrounding space just by relying on his aura.


    "Apotheosis!!!"


    Fei Duo looked at this scene with some disbelief, because in his eyes, Emperor Tru had begun to have a space halo, a blue barrier, which had alreadypletely enveloped him. In other words, the other person himself This moment is space, and the surrounding space is also him!


    "What do you mean by that?"


    Chang Nuo asked boredly.


    "Tell me, how did youplete your deification?"


    Fei Duo asked excitedly.


    "What is deification?"


    Now they have stopped fighting. Anyway, this battle is not about taking the opponent''s life!


    Chang Nuo spoke with an expression of ignorance, unable to understand at all what the other party meant.


    "You look like this now. How did you develop the Space Devil Fruit to this extent?"


    Fei Duo asked.


    "Are you talking about the second stage of awakening?"


    "Huh? Maybe it should be!"


    Fei Duo thought for a moment and said.


    Anyway, no matter what the other party says, in the end, as long as you get the answer to the question you want.


    Everyone has different names for strength, so what Changnuo showed was what he called deification!


    "Is it possible that you just want to know the answer so easily? Are there some questions that I should share first?" Chang Nuo asked with a smile.


    "Forget it, if you win, what''s the point of telling you the answers? But before I tell you those answers, you need to tell me first, how did you get to this point?"


    Fei Duo said seriously.


    "no problem!"


    Chang Nuo smiled slightly and spoke in the same indifferent tone.


    The two looked at each other together, and then their figures disappearedpletely. Every time they appeared, there was a crashing sound. In this extremely dark space, it seemed that the entire moon could no longer amodate the two bodies of each other. .


    On the bright side of Nuoda, the two of them may have been on the left side of the moon one second, and appeared directly on the right side the next second.


    The aftermath of the fighting between them directly caused the various mountains on the moon that were originally high and raised to bepletely ttened one by one.


    In fact, the storm caused by their battle has invisibly affected the operation of the pirate world. The powerful force has even begun to cause various waves to rise on the sea. The highest wave can even reach more than a hundred. rice.


    It''s just that they don''t know these things, and the battle between them continues without stopping.


    The two people stopped for thest time, right at the center of the moon. Their fists collided tightly with each other. The powerful impact caused the two people to fall backwards in an instant.


    It has to be said that Fei Duo''s current strength is still much higher inparison, at least it is much stronger when Chang Nuo is in such a state.


    The other party only retreated a mile or two, but our Emperor Tru is no longer retreating. On the contrary, it seems that he was directly knocked out by the impact.


    His whole foot rubbed hard against the ground. The powerful force caused a huge scratch to appear on even a stone ground like the moon.


    The whole person was even impacted dozens of miles away. The moon seemed to have cracked directly at the spot where their fists had collided. A huge crack with no head visible to the naked eye appeared invisibly. in front of the two of them.


    "happy!!!"


    After stopping, Fei Duo roared loudly and kicked his feet hard. His whole body disappeared instantly again, and then appeared behind Chang Nuo who had not yet stopped. He kicked his whole body hard. Kicked directly on the opponent''s back.


    This has nothing to do with reaction ability. The former has not stopped yet, and thetter''s powerful attack power appears again.


    "Bang!!!"


    Chang Nuo received a solid kick on his back. The powerful force instantly made it obvious that several of his ribs had been broken, and his whole body once again began to fly forward uncontrobly.


    Fei Duo came in front of him again, but it was different from thest kick. There was a trace of white dots on his toes, and he shouted "Kill!" at the same time.


    Seeing this scene, Chang Nuo jumped up suddenly, and with the help of this inertia, he kicked his opponent directly with his upper leg.


    ording to the current strength of the two people, ordinary elemental attacks have no effect on them. The powerful attack power once again collided in an instant, and was apanied by powerful overlord-colored domineering.


    In this situation, when you look up from the pirate world, you will see that half of the moon has already turned blood red, while the other half is full of pitch ck.


    ck and red alternate with each other, but it''s just the power of this leg, and they are all going all out.

 Chapter 595 Die together

    <h4>Chapter 595 Die together</h4>


    It is not an exaggeration to say that this battle was an unprecedented battle. After all, in the entire pirate world, there is probably no other person who can cause such power since then.


    However, when the light dissipated this time, the two of themy panting directly on the ground.


    But if you look closely at their legs, you can already see obvious differences.


    The legs of the two people have be irregrly twisted. A collision directly caused the fracture of their respective right legs. Although it did not cause any life impact, such huge damage cannot be short-lived by their own bodies. It took time to recover.


    "Ha ha!!!"


    "Why are youughing?" Chang Nuo rested his head on a big rock and asked Fei Duo, who wasughing.


    "It''s been a long time since I''ve felt this good. I''ve spent hundreds of years forgetting what pain feels like, but now I can still really feel it. Do you know what that kind of relief feels like?"


    Fei Duo said excitedly.


    "Is this guy really mentally ill?"


    Chang Nuoy on the stone speechlessly and closed his eyes, not wanting to talk to the man lying opposite.


    "Do you still have some energy left? If not, then I win!" Fei Duo said with a weird smile.


    "Could it be that the remaining power you are talking about refers to your so-called white angel state?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "You are right, but that is not called a white angel, but a Seraph. It has the ability to recover infinitely and has endless life, but this is also the most painful thing for me!" Fei Duo said.


    "Are what you said true?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Which ones?"


    "If I win, the world government will be given to me!"


    "Yes, there is absolutely no problem. Just give me a better ce to live when I can''t leave this world!"


    "How about Marie Joa? You continue to live in your original ce!" Chang Nuo said.


    "This is pretty good, but what are you going to do to win me now?" Fei Duo asked.


    "Do you know what the power of fifty trillion Baileys looks like?"


    Chang Nuo raised his head and his eyes changed color instantly.


    The white pupils were surrounded by ck circles, which looked strange and mysterious.


    50 trillion Baileys directly made him an absolute strong man. The most powerful Rinnegan among the Hokages waspletely dispersed here at this moment.


    The powerful aura burst out again in an instant, and this time the aura waspletely different from the previous ones. It was full of weirdness and made people feel like falling into an ice cave!


    "What is this?" Fei Duo asked with a frown.


    "The power you don''t know!" Chang Nuo said.


    "Now that you''ve met everything, it seems like you still have some energy left, so why not just let me feel it for you!"


    As Fei Duo said, six pairs of white wings instantly appeared behind him, and the originally broken legs were restored to their original state in just an instant.


    Chang Nuo cannot be like him. The ability of the immortal human body cannot support him to recover in an instant. Although it can guarantee that he can recover to his original appearance within a few hours, the other party''s recovery time in the blink of an eye is really difficult. People feel like gods.


    But relying on the power of space, Chang Nuo can still float in mid-air, looking at each other again.


    "Although I am very happy when someone surpasses me, I also feelpletely threatened!"


    As Fei Duo spoke, his eyes suddenly turned into eagle eyes. The white wings on his back began to emit a holy light, and all the feathers began to be arranged side by side. He stared closely at Chang Nuo floating in the distance, with the corners of his mouth raised slightly, He murmured "Power of Seraph~Purification!"


    The feathers on his back seemed to have no limit, and they began to fly towards Chang Nuo one by one.


    The flying speed of each feather is not very fast, it even feels quite slow, but it is so slow, but it can give people an extremely dangerous feeling.


    He can ignore any obstacles, and even ignore any obstacles, but wherever he has experienced, even the huge rocks on the ground have instantly turned into powder!


    "Shinra Tenzheng!"


    Chang Nuo opened his hands instantly, and a powerful force began to spread toward the periphery.


    This is different from the Naruto world in his previous impression. Just this t A can instantly cause half of the moon to burst out with ripples.


    The Seraph feathers that originally ignored any obstruction were all destroyed by the impact in an instant.


    "Let you have a good dance!"


    The corners of Chang Nuo''s mouth raised slightly, and then he shouted directly, "Tianzhi Zhenxing!"


    Fei Duo just looked up in an instant, but this scene made him extremely frightened.


    The entire moon began to approach the pirate world without restriction, and the extremely fast speed was directly disyed in front of him. This situation could not even be avoided.


    The powerful speed directly washed away his expression. Being blown by this wind pressure, he could not even move his body, and even his whole body began to slowly sink into the stone.


    "Emperor Tru, are you crazy?"


    Fei Duo shouted angrily.


    "Maybe you are the most powerful, but I can still destroy everything."


    Chang Nuo didn''t seem to be affected by any psychological pressure at all, and there was still a smile on his lips. His whole body was like Fei Duo, embedded in the cracks of the stone, and the impact of the strong wind pressure brought him in with it.


    "Is winning or losing so important? So what if you win this time? Stop the attack quickly!"


    Fei Duo shouted loudly again.


    "What are you thinking? Do you think such an attack can be stopped just by saying stop? I''m not that powerful!" Chang Nuo shouted.


    While speaking, there was a look of fear on his face, and the screams rang directly in Fei Duo''s ears.


    Fei Duo was speechless to the point of vomiting blood. Faced with such a situation, the huge moon drove the wind pressure and directly distorted the space. In such a situation, even they can use the power of space, but facing these situations, But there is nothing that can be done.


    "you win!"


    Fei Duo could only shout helplessly, with a helpless expression on his face.


    It''s just that it has been twisted and changed by the wind pressure. No one knows the specific situation.


    In fact, it is enough for him to say such words, and that''s all Chang Nuo wants.


    It took so much effort, but it was just to get him to admit his failure in one sentence, without so muchplexity and effort.


    It mainly depends on what Feiduo thinks. Changnuo has been preparing for this battle for two years.

 Chapter 596 Samsara Eye Illusion

    <h4>Chapter 596 Samsara Eye Illusion</h4>


    But when Fei Duo said he was serious, Chang Nuo, who was also leaning on the moon, suddenly smiled.


    Immediately afterwards, on the moon, he still stayed in the original ce, the whole thing was exactly the same, without any change.


    As for what happened just now, it didn''t happen at all. Fei Duo was still standing where he was standing just now, and nothing had ever changed.


    If it weren''t for the sweat dripping from the other person''s forehead, which was enough to prove the reality of what just happened, no one would believe that the scene just happened really happened.


    "What''s going on?"


    Fei Duo sat directly on the stone with some horror, her legs were still shaking uncontrobly, and she was curious about what just happened as she spoke.


    "Illusion!"


    Chang Nuo raised the corners of his mouth slightly and said directly without any hesitation.


    "How is it possible? I have the power of an angel. It is impossible for someone to control my brain?"


    Fei Duo said in disbelief, but what happened just now was a bloody example. Everything, whether it was touch or otherwise, seemed so real, and his whole person waspletely dominated by fear.


    "Have you seen these eyes? It''s true that you have the ability of the Angel Devil Fruit, but who told you that a person can only eat one Devil Fruit?"


    Chang Nuo asked calmly.


    "What kind of devil fruit is this?"


    Fei Duo asked, but he was rtively calm at the moment, but he still said full of doubts.


    In his heart, he really couldn''t imagine which Devil Fruit was more powerful than the Angel Devil Fruit at the top of the entire Devil Fruit tree?


    Even though I started to recall all the situations just now in my mind, I still couldn''t find the answer to the question.


    "In your impression, how many types of devil fruits are there?"


    "There are only more than 3,000. The rest are almost all artificially created over the years. 90% of the ones that appear on the sea are artificial, and they are made from the moon. Even the fruits on the Devil Fruit tree should not be like this. Great power?"


    Facing Chang Nuo''s question, Fei Duo closed his eyes and sighed, speaking directly.


    "What you just said about admitting defeat, is that still true now?"


    Chang Nuo continued to ask calmly.


    "I have already given up, and I am not a loser. If you want a world government, I can give you this thing. Anyway, I have been in control for 800 years. I have long been impatient with these things. Well, instead of doing this, I might as well give it to you!"


    Fei Duo spoke calmly, as if the existence of the World Government was dispensable to him.


    But perhaps it is just as the other party said, the existence of the World Government may have been a whim back then, but now it has been under control for so many years, and there is no need to hold it in hand anymore.


    "I''ve given you what you want, can you tell me now?"


    Fei Duo asked still doubtfully.


    "No problem. The condition for our battle was that we knew each other''s information. These eyes are called samsara eyes. They are the same as your devil fruit ability and have various additional powers. However, this thing is not a devil fruit ability, so you Don''t get me wrong either.


    I own two Devil Fruits. The first one, as you already know, is from the space series. The second one is also owned by your world government. It is a psychic devil fruit. It has also been developed by me to the level of deification you call it! Developing at this level will create the ability to instantly enter a fantasy world.


    In fact, you have been in this illusion from the beginning. To be precise, from the moment we entered the moon, you have not been harmed at all. "


    Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "There is no use studying this anymore, s~"


    Fei Duoy directly on the big rock behind him. Fortunately, the rock was rtively t. Although there was some dust, he didn''t care at all.


    "Tell me, what is going on in this world?"


    Changnuo closed his eyes slightly and asked seriously.


    After staying in this world for decades, he can finally start to explore this situation, which brings him one step closer to the truth behind this world.


    "Want to know? Then I''ll tell you. I''m not from this world. I live on a more distant. It''s just that 800 years have passed and I have long forgotten what it is like there.


    That year..."


    Feo Duo quietly began to talk about his past. A huge warship began tond in the pirate world. When he justnded, a huge wave directly set off on the entire sea. He used the ship to travel directly through space. Enter this side.


    People who originally lived in this world have never seen such a situation. Such a high-tech thing, no matter from which angle you look at it, is like a god-made thing.


    However, he was not the only one who followed him to the ship, but there were also only a few robots left. When they walked out of the warship that shuttled through space, due to the impact of the space vibration, the entire ship The battleship has long beenpletely unusable, and he can only lie quietly on the sea.


    Later, Fei Duo directly asked the robot to dismantle the entire battleship, and used high technology to build a special battleship. Its shape is now the ancient weapon Pluto. After the other one was built, it was sent directly to the moon. He is also the current king of ancient weapons.


    Coming to this ce from a world full of high technology, the first thing Fei Duo did was to begin to understand the structure of this world. At the same time, he also brought the most high-end thing on the entire at that time, which was the Devil Fruit Tree Seed. It is also because of this thing that this guy traveled through space and came to this at all costs.


    But after he appeared on this, he discovered that the pirate world 800 years ago was even more miserable than they are now. The national monarchs were enving human beings almost all the time. In the lives of each of them, there were many problems. It was possible that the sun would not be visible the next day, and it was also because of these circumstances that Fei Duo felt extremely angry.


    After arriving on this, the space shuttle battleship has been destroyed, so it is equivalent to him beingpletely trapped on this. Rather than doing this, it is better to use his own power to directly overthrow the original tyrant rule.


    This is the D family that everyone refers to today.


    However, Fei Duo did not choose to kill all the royal members of this family directly. In their original state, the ancestors of the Tianlong people actually pursued perfection more than thest, especially the pursuit of fairness in this world.


    Maybe they wouldn''t have thought that 800 yearster their descendants would be living like this, and in the state they hate most.

 Chapter 597 The Origin of Devil Fruit

    <h4>Chapter 597 The Origin of Devil Fruit</h4>


    But for them at that time, the only ce that was not involved was the current Fish-Man Ind. First of all, there was no high technology that could allow them to safely enter the depth of 10,000 meters under the sea, and there was no safe and reliable way to deal with it directly. The mermaid princess of that time.


    This should be regarded as the most powerful force in this world, a Neptune-like creature that can control the entire sea after awakening. These huge guys can even really subvert the entire world.


    But they have always been on the same page. Facing people and the world, Fei Duo did not choose to be too harsh or take other actions, but just maintained the current life behavior.


    It wasn''t until Feido led a group of people to rule the entire pirate world with powerful weapons that the world began to gradually allow the people living at the bottom to have some human rights, and most people also supported their decision.


    Fei Duo did not choose to be the master of this world by himself. Instead, he made those who followed him be the kings of various ces. Within a hundred years, the living index of people in the entire world has almost begun to reach full. Not only that, the world Wealth also began to umte and increase rapidly.


    In order to prevent these kings from having too much personal power, Feodor also specially allowed the kings of more than 20 countries to enter the current holynd of Mariejoia in the next 100 years, and gave them the most respected title, which is today''s Holy Land. Celestial Dragons.


    It is used to limit the ability of each king and prevent the things that happened to the people of the previous country from happening again.


    About 50 years after he ruled the entire world, the Devil Fruit trees had already been nted as soon as he came over, and they had begun to bear fruit gradually.


    The entire devil fruit tree is about 1,000 meters tall and at least 50 meters in diameter. There are various fruit forms hanging on the tree, and the total is about 3,000 meters.


    Fei Duo has already entered an old age at this time, without the beauty or color of his youth.


    So the moment these Devil Fruits appeared, he directly ordered the robots who followed him to go to the top of the tree and grab the biggest one.


    This is the Angel Devil Fruit he is using now, and the whole thing reveals a holy light. At the same time, this Devil Fruit can also be used as the seed of the next Devil Fruit tree.


    After eating the Devil Fruit, Fei Duo gradually began to be young, and from now on, he can live forever and endlessly.


    But all the peace in this world onlysted for about two hundred years. The greed of human nature caused them to not be as good as they imagined.


    Even though all power has been divided to this extent, today, 800 yearster, each of them has be a king of various kinds. What was originally only about 20 countries has now be four or five. Hundreds.


    For this reason, even Fei Duo, who has be the world government, has no more thoughts about this matter. Everything seems to be a reincarnation, and there is no need for him to participate again.


    However, after 800 years, the lives of today''s people have actually returned to their original appearance. People living at the bottom have long lost their human rights.


    Many of them have no dignity or other things. The aloof Tianlong people have once again be the D n.


    Chang Nuo sat there quietly and listened to Fei Duo describing how he arrived here from another ce and everything he had seen and heard in the past 800 years.


    He was not too surprised. After all, he was not from this world. Anyway, such a weird situation had already happened. So what if it happened again?


    It''s just that the evolutionary reincarnation of this world may really be what Feido said, but even though the other party had said so sincerely, he couldn''t help but be curious and asked seriously, "What is the record of Rafdru?"


    "You don''t have to think about those things. This thing is just something recorded by the D family when they were at their most prosperous. In fact, some of the things recorded in it are quite interesting to me!"


    Fei Duo said with a smile.


    "What do you mean by a 100-year gap?"


    "It''s just that the ancestors of the Tianlong people wanted to erase my traces in this world one by one. These things are also my requirements. I am trapped in this world and cannot get out. I don''t want others to know. I don''t belong to this world." Fei Duo said.


    Chang Nuo listened, and all the doubts in his heart were solved.


    It is understandable why Fei Duo did this, but it was just that in the 100 years since Fei Duo came to this world, he used the method of erasing history so that future generations would not be able to remember such things at all.


    Then no one knows what his origin is, and this has nothing to do with the so-called D family before.


    In the past, all the so-called schrs in O''Hara wanted to study what the 100-year gap was like. But just through the so-called historical text records, I am afraid that even in another two hundred years, they will not be able to know what happened.


    Once you understand everything, as long as you know the source of the matter, then the rest of the matter can bepletely reasoned out with your own mind.


    All the doubts were solved in an instant. The origin of Devil Fruit and the nk 100 years of history, these things seemed to be connected together and there was not so much mystery.


    Connected to a nk 100 years of history, which is why no one knows where Devil Fruitse from?


    "Why have the devil fruit trees disappeared now?" Chang Nuo asked curiously again.


    "The Angel Devil Fruit is the seed of the Devil Fruit Tree. When this seed disappears, what do you think the Devil Fruit Tree will be? The lifespan of this thing is not as long as you think, but today''s Shampoo Inds are all in its ruins. Even if the tree is dead, you can still see the bubbles caused by decay!"


    Fei Duo exined.


    The Devil''s Fruit tree was nted next to today''s Mariejoia, which is now the Chambord Inds. It grew on the decaying vegetation of the Devil''s Fruit tree, and it also created such a spectacle.


    Everything is now clear at a nce, and there is no longer any doubt that can bother Chang Nuo.


    Although I don��t understand to what extent the rules of this world operate? But now it may be exactly what Fei Duo said.


    So what if he rules the entire world? Maybe it won��t develop into what it is today in two hundred years!

 Chapter 598 Merger

    <h4>Chapter 598 Merger</h4>


    Everything goes from the starting point to the end point, and then from the end point to the starting point, a cycle of reincarnation, but what will happen in the end?


    As long as humanity iscking, something like this will happen again sooner orter.


    No matter who bes the emperor, the ending is still clearly shown here. Everything turns around and returns to the way it was at the beginning.


    This thing is also a problem that will definitely ur under any monarch in all dynasties.


    "Speaking of which, I''m very curious about one thing. Why do you want to build such powerful weapons on the moon when you are already at a high level and have such great strength?" Chang Nuo asked again in confusion.


    But when he said this, Fei Duo suddenly lowered his head, and after a helpless pause for several seconds, he began to say, "They have alreadye. I guess it won''t be long before I can feel them." !��


    "Who are you talking about?"


    "I''m from my original world!" Fei Duo said.


    "With your strength, you still feel fear? This is really unexpected." Chang Nuo said with a smile.


    "You don''t understand. They have extremely advanced science and technology, and they have mastered the ability to create things like devil fruits. What do you think they can use to fight them in the end? I''m afraid others have the strength you have, but you don''t have the technology others have. But no.


    I can create weapons that can destroys, but others already had warships capable of traveling through space hundreds of years ago. This thing is definitely beyond your imagination. "


    Fei Duo said even more helplessly.


    In order to deal with such a thing, he has been working hard since he became the master of this world, and began to prepare on the moon base for eight hundred years, just to wait for that day toe, and he can still have Something to contend with.


    Although these words may sound fanciful, that''s all he can do.


    "Are you telling the truth?"


    "Of course it is true. I have always been looking for a more powerful existence. In fact, you have brought me many unexpected surprises since you appeared. I have been paying attention to you silently for so many years. , whether in terms of wisdom or strength, you are definitely the best in this world.


    If I hadn''t been looking for you for so many years, I''m afraid I wouldn''t even be able to lift your shoes when fighting with you now. However, their arrival will most likely lead to the direct destruction of the entire world, and I''m not sure what the consequences of this will be. , I can only pray that this situation will happenter. "


    Fei Duo forced a smile and said.


    "You don''t even have a solution, how do you want the world to deal with it? But I''m also curious about when you said they wille?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "Don''t worry. If it''s quick, it mighte tomorrow. If it''s slow, it might take two hundred years. Who can be sure about this kind of thing? But I think the other party wille sooner orter!" Fei Duo said.


    "What''s the use of worrying about this thing? For an uncertain imaginary enemy, sometimes it may be really good, but most of the time it just brings endless pressure to myself." Chang Nuo said, turned around and raised his head, looking up at the top of his head. That blue, during the twenty or thirty years he stayed here, he had long been full of emotions about it all.


    So even if things were true as Fei Duo said, in the end it was his duty to help.


    "Let me know when there are special circumstances!"


    Chang Nuo said, with a sudden force on his feet, he disappeared directly above the moon.


    Fei Duo quietly looked at the position where the other party left just now, and a smile began to appear at the corner of his mouth.


    It''s not that he doesn''t understand why he still can''t defeat the opponent after 800 years? But he could feel that he was rxed now.


    There is a rtively powerful person who can resist theing danger, and the mountain that has been pressing on his head is lifted in half in an instant. This is why he has always said that as long as he is defeated, the world government will let him go. Give the other person a reason.


    The pirate world has returned to its original peace. The battle on the moon has had a slight impact on this side, but the final impact is not toorge. At least everything is still within the controble concept.


    Now that he has defeated Fei Duo, Chang Nuo is not as happy as he imagined, and everything starts to feelplicated again.


    Someone from outside? The key is how does that guy know that he doesn''t exist in this world? He didn''t ask on the moon. Maybe it would be better to let all this disappearpletely into the past history.


    Today''s pirate world has not changed in any way because of these things. They are still sleeping in their sweet dreams. No one will care about how far the situation in the outside world has reached?


    Even today''s Toru Empire maintains its original prosperity and ideals. But when the world government is handed over to them, what should these people face next?


    After Chang Nuo came back, he remained in the same state as before when facing his family or subordinates. For many things, he didn''t bring anything up at all.


    But the things that need to be dealt with now still need to be faced.


    Fei Duo ispletely different. After returning from the moon, the first thing he did was directly summon the Five Old Stars. These are the most powerful guys in the world government at present, and they can be regarded as controlling the existence of the entire world government.


    "Lord Im!"


    When Woxing entered, they maintained the same etiquette as before, kneeling on the ground and not even daring to raise their heads.


    It''s just that today, the so-called Lord Im in their mouth was not as serious as he thought. Instead, he left the Void Throne and walked slowly in front of a few people.


    Eagle-like eyes stared directly at the people kneeling on the ground, and the six pairs of holy wings behind them also unfolded at this moment.


    "Get ready, the next world government will be handed over to the Tru Empire!"


    Fei Duo said with the corners of his mouth raised slightly.


    The moment the five old men knelt on the ground and heard the news, each of them almost thought they had heard it wrong. Their eyes looked at each other. It was obvious from everyone''s doubts that the news this time There is nothing wrong with that.


    "Lord Im, why..."


    "I don''t know why! With Emperor Tru''s strength, he is now taller than me, so what strength do you think you have to stop each other? He can make me fall into an illusion with just one look, and he wants to destroy me. For him, establishing a world government is probably much easier than you think." Fei Duo sneered.

 Chapter 599 The five old stars were shocked

    <h4>Chapter 599 The five old stars were shocked</h4>


    Listening to these words, these old guys simply heard the most unbelievable words in this century. In their eyes, Fei Duo, who was already as powerful as a god, actually said such words from his mouth.


    Emperor Tru is only in his thirties now, but in their childhood impressions, Fei Duo has already looked like this. As for how old he is, no one knows.


    But now that he actually said that he was defeated, it was really hard to ept for a moment. For them, this was not just the fact that the man in front of them was defeated, but the belief in their hearts. It waspletely broken at the moment.


    "Lord Im, do you want to think about this matter again?" Silohemia asked with a frown.


    "What else is there to consider? This matter itself has been discussed before the battle. Winning or losing doesn''t matter to me anyway!"


    "Once the Tru Empire takes control of the world government, how do you think the Celestial Dragons should deal with themselves?" Silohemia listened to what Fei Duo said, stood up and asked loudly.


    "Use you to remind me? You should know better than me what these people have be now? You should bear the greatest responsibility for failing to supervise them well."


    Fei Duo said with a cold voice.


    "Then we understand. If Trudyes to hand over the matter then, we will definitely cooperate fully!"


    Silohemia seemed to have exhausted all his energy to speak. He really didn''t know how to say the unnecessary words. After all, the current world government belongs to others. As for what will be the next result? They have long been out of control.


    If ording to what Lord Im said in their mouths, Emperor Tru was able to defeat the opponent in terms of strength, then any struggle made by these people would be in vain.


    There is no need to worry about other things anymore. If people are really willing to take action, what can the World Government do to stop it?


    But despite saying this, the unwillingness remaining in their hearts can still be seen through their expressions.


    After walking out of the main hall, each of the five old guys felt more ufortable than thest. Standing at the top of this world, they could be considered inferior to one person and superior to hundreds of millions of people.


    But what is about to happen makes them don''t know how to face the rest of their lives.


    "Siloemia, do you think Lord Im is serious?"


    Cholba asked doubtfully.


    He still struggled in his heart, hoping that everything he heard today was just a joke from Lord Im.


    "What are you doing studying this thing? Instead of doing that, why not quickly think about the next response. How funny is it that the Tru Empire epts the World Government? It is estimated that all the newspaper headlines will revolve around this. operation.


    But it is undeniable that this world has definitely had a series of impacts due to this change, and whether this kind of thing has a good or bad impact is definitely not eptable to everyone. "


    Silohemia said helplessly.


    "Let''s not talk about this now, then what should we do next? Is it really necessary to cooperate with the Tru Empire to ept the entire world government and naval military affairs?" Cholba asked.


    "What I don''t understand now is that Emperor Tru is really that powerful and can be much more powerful than Lord Im? The other party can defeat Lord Im with just one look? What does this kind of thing sound like to me? Does it feel so unbelievable?" Love said specifically.


    "Is it possible that you are questioning Lord Im?" Silohemiya asked in a cold voice.


    "That''s not true, but we have all seen the development of the Tru Empire over the years. In any case, Emperor Tru shouldn''t have developed to this extent? His strength has reached its peak." Loft revealed specifically. He said bitterly.


    "Ignore the rest for now. Since Master Yimu has given the order, then we will do as he said. As for those Tianlong people, in the past two days, you, Qiaoerba, have gone to notify them and let them know." All of them, be honest with me, Lord Im is obviously ready to give up on them now!" Silohemia frowned and said as she walked.


    They don''t want to ept this fact now, or they simply can''t ept it for a while.


    But they have no choice or right to choose at all. At least in the minds of these people, this news sounds so weird and unbearable. If Emperor Tru really has that strength, everything will really be the same as Im Same thing.


    One look could defeat the gods in their minds, let alone just them.


    If the other party really uses force to seize the World Government, then the development of things may really turn the entire Mariejoia into a smoke of gunpowder.


    However, such a thing did not happen suddenly as they imagined. At least the Tru Empire was in a calm state for two or three months after Chang Nuo returned.


    Even after he returned, he didn''t mention the so-called agreement with Feido at all. Whether it was the World Government or the Tru Empire, after returning to his own territory, he behaved the same as usual.


    He just spends time with his children every day. As for the affairs of the entire country, they are all in a mature state now, and there is no need for him to do anything anymore.


    Located at the top of the entire Tru Empire, Emperor Tru is now nothing more than the country''s faith, as long as he does not have any problems in the current Tru Empire.


    The people below are busy, and everyone is keeping their peace. Changnuo is not only apanying his children, but also thinking about the next operation of the World Government.


    After taking over, how to suppress the dissatisfaction of other countries as quickly as possible? Or how to suppress the big forces that currently exist at sea? Many things are not as simple as imagined. You can take over directly after making an agreement.


    Many things used to seem much moreplicated and difficult than imagined. If after the battle, we go directly to take over the World Government, what benefits will it bring to the Tru Empire? How to resolve disputes at sea? How to change the current situation in other countries? It is impossible to directly turn the entire world into the state of the Tru Empire family by oneself.


    So in the middle, what Changnuo has been thinking about is how to spread the current model of the Tru Empire to the whole world?

 Chapter 600 The Road to the Pirate King

    <h4>Chapter 600 The Road to the Pirate King</h4>


    About three months have passed quietly since we returned from the moon.


    Chang Nuo stays in the pce every day, evenpletely blocking out news from the outside world. As for where the Straw Hats, who have been the protagonists in the past, have reached now? He is notpletely clear about it now, or even doesn''t understand it at all.


    However, in terms of normal time, if they follow the normal process now, they should almost reach the area where Rafdrew is.


    But things were not as he thought.


    Today''s Straw Hat is indeed approaching, and has even reached a new ce.


    This area is the sea area upied by the red-haired pirates today, and it is also thest obstacle to them before Rafdru.


    "Luffy, are you really ready to reveal Rafdru''s secret?"


    On a small ind, all the members of the Red-haired Pirates are here, as are the Straw Hat Pirates.


    They drank wine and ate meat with each other, which waspletely different from other experiences. After all, they all knew everyone here.


    Red-haired Shanks looked directly at Luffy sitting opposite him and asked with a serious face.


    After these few months, the other party has been called the Fifth Emperor, but does his true strength qualify for this title? In fact, not many people know about it.


    "Shanks, this is something we have agreed on a long time ago, isn''t it? I must go to Rafdrulu. No matter what pirate king is there, I am determined this time. Even if I die inside, I will Don��t back down!��


    Luffy said seriously, then took off the straw hat hanging around his neck, silently held it in his hands, and looked at it carefully.


    "You gave this to me back then, and you have followed the agreement for more than ten years. At that time, you told me that as soon as I reach the strength to see you, I will return this thing to you. Today I can Say, I have done it, and no one can stop us when we get to the road!"


    Luffy suddenly grinned and said, and the team members behind him just sat in silence, and no one interrupted at this time.


    The members of the red-haired pirate group also behaved the same way. None of them had anything to say about what was happening at the moment. They were all looking at each other silently.


    No one on either side was on guard at all. After all, they didn''t need to. After all, they were too familiar with each other. Luffy and Shanks had been friends for a long time. The key is that Usopp''s father was also a member of the Red-haired Pirates, so they were very familiar with each other. There aren''t that many grudges between them.


    "Thank you very much for protecting him all the time. This thing is really important to me. I didn''t expect that you kept the promise you made back then, Luffy."


    Shanks smiled slightly, tears welling up in his eyes.


    For this person who has already shocked the world of pirates, it was really not easy to see this scene, but then he grinned and said, "This thing is more suitable for you now. The road ahead is still Youe to apany him and protect him, this must be the best choice!"


    Luffy paused for a moment, then grinned and said nonchntly, "No problem, I will definitely treat him as life."


    "The world on the sea will undergo major changes next, but to what extent will it evolve? No one knows. Perhaps pirates in this world may gradually be banned, and the sea can return to being a ce where others can live. A safe navigation zone, but for us, this may be another challenge.��


    Shanks said, but his eyes slowly looked at Robin sitting there, the expression on his face seemed to reveal many unspeakable words.


    "What happened? Shanks!"


    Luffy asked.


    "We don''t know many things. Anyway, news hase out that the Tru Empire will take over the World Government in the future, including the naval forces of the World Government will also be included in the scope of the Tru Empire. The world will face another crisis. A shuffle!��


    Shanks didn''t speak, but Beckman, who was behind him, opened his mouth and said seriously.


    ��Nani???��


    The Straw Hat Pirates were all shocked, and their jaws almost dropped to the ground.


    "This kind of thing has never been spread at all? How did you know? There is no war between the World Government and the Tru Empire at all. I don''t believe that you would say such things for no reason. "


    Robin''s expression turned cold for a moment. He was not as surprised as the others. Instead, he stared directly at Shanks and asked.


    "You don''t know many things, but it doesn''t mean that he doesn''t exist. Maybe after you return to the Tohru Empire, you can naturally ask your king about everything. But once again, I want to ask you one thing. Wait until Luffypletes it. After Ravdrew��s adventure, as partners for so long, their lives are in your hands!��


    Shanks said, then lowered his head and said to Robin with a serious expression.


    The surprised expressions of others just now began to change into other expressions, with expressions ofplete iprehension on their faces. What kind of situation would make Shanks say such a thing?


    They don''t know about the high-level things in this world, and they don''t want to know about it. In short, it doesn''t affect their adventure, and it doesn''t matter to them anyway.


    It seems that everything is not that simple.


    "fragrant����"


    "Luffy, now that you''ve made your decision, let''s go and fight hard to see what exactly exists in Raffdru? After you know the truth of everything, the world will tell you the answer next. !��


    Before Luffy could open his mouth, Shanks said with a smile.


    Usopp looked at everyone''s expressions and words, frowned, and looked at other teammates.


    "We sail for adventure. Everyone has his own ideals. We will never be afraid of such things!" Luffy said.


    All their teammates do have their own ideals and missions. As the captain, Luffy, his idea is to be the Pirate King, and Zoro, the deputy captain, hopes that he can be the world''s greatest swordsman. If he has the ability of the Devil Fruit If Chang Nuo is not included, he may really have hope to achieve this wish.


    Sanji''s goal is to find the sea area in his mind to fulfill his ideal of being a gourmet, while Nami wants to draw a map of the entire world''s sea areas. Once she arrives at Lovedrew, she may be the first to fulfill her goal. people.

 Chapter 601 Taking over the world government

    <h4>Chapter 601 Taking over the world government</h4>


    For this group of people, the so-called secret of the Pirate King''s treasure, which Rafdru now calls, does not seem to have much appeal to them.


    What attracted them to start moving forward was nothing more than the original ideals, and the closeness between these partners today.


    "When I see you, I really feel that you have a lot of shadows of the captain of the past. I hope that everything in the future will be as you wish!"


    Shanks said with emotion.


    "Don''t worry, we will definitely do it. The next stop is where Rafdru is. The text of thest historical road sign is right here with you. I wonder if you can let us make a copy?" Luffy asked. .


    "These things have been prepared for you from the moment you went to sea, but are you really ready to do these things?" Shanks asked again.


    "Yes!"


    Luffy thought for a while, and finally said with a smile on his face.


    Shanks sat there, silently picked up the wine jar next to him, and began to drink.


    The other members of the red-haired pirate group may not know the specific situation. It is estimated that Shanks is the only one who knows this kind of thing.


    Among these people, the one with the mostplicated heart is probably Robin.


    Nowadays, she has long regarded these people next to her as her closest partners, but on this basis, she still has her own tasks to carry with her, even though the tasks Chang Nuo has always given him have only remained in these He helps Luffy be the Pirate King.


    But now the expressions of Shanks and others have clearly shown that being the Pirate King does not seem to be that good, or not quite right.


    Everything seemed to be in the same weird state. She didn''t know how to face her inner behavior, let alone how to exin what happened next.


    In thest step of the process, they are about to begin to reveal the answers to the future. The entire history of Raff Drew is now in their hands, and it is only a matter of time to get there.


    After staying on Shanks'' ind for several days, these days may have been the busiest days for them, but from then on, it was up to them to shoulder all the things alone.


    On the sea, the Sunshine had just left Shanks'' territory. Everyone on the ship was gathered on the middle deck. Their expressions were not as good as expected.


    Only Jinbei stayed at the front, controlling the course of the entire ship, while the others stood there with serious faces.


    "Everyone, we are going to reach the real destination next. Along the way, we have experienced various things with each other. I still remember that when we just started, we each talked about our dreams, but now, It seems that I am the only one who is about toplete it, but no matter what, we will be the most friendly partners in the future!"


    Luffy stood at the front and spoke to everyone in a low tone.


    Everyone on the boat has a different expression. Some may be silent, but many are also smiling. They can understand each other, and now they have ovee all difficulties and have reached this point.


    The end is right in front of them. In fact, what they are most worried about is where should this pirate ship go next?


    But now there are many major problems in the world. The revolutionary army has dered war on the world government. There is also ckbeard on the sea. This even more terrifying existence. Although he did not get Whitebeard��s Shock Fruit at the beginning, who knew this guy How did you find this thing in the end?


    The entire new world, I don��t know when, has been turned into muddy water again. The chaos on the sea has been doomed for a long time. No one knows what the next development node will be. situation.


    Rafdru was still in the same situation as before, but when they first arrived at this ce, it really shocked all of them.


    There are countless dangerous whirlpools, and even the most powerful navigator cannot reach them.


    This is still Rafdru today, and nothing has changed at all.


    All that''s left is how to avoid these whirlpools and get inside.


    They have now collected four pieces of historical road sign text. All the road signs connected in series actually record the passable area in the middle of these whirlpools.


    So to be able to reach the most central area of ??Ravdru and see the ce where secrets have been hidden for hundreds of years, the rest is just a matter of time.


    It is a fact recognized by everyone that Luffy can be the Pirate King. In fact, this is just something that a group of weak people believe.


    What can bing the Pirate King bring? And can true freedom be achieved? This has been verified by countless people, and there are probably countless people who have only been to Lafdru. Therefore, the fate here does not seem to be of special concern to the big forces.


    ��������


    "It seems the time hase!"


    In the pce of the Tru Empire, Chang Nuo slowly raised his smile, looked up at the sky, and murmured in his mouth.


    "what''s going on?"


    Hancock asked.


    "It seems that all the preparations I made before were actually boring behaviors. At least looking back now, it is indeed the case. I made sufficient preparations, but in the end things were resolved so sessfully, it always felt like something was missing. Chang Nuo said with a sigh.


    In fact, it was exactly as he said. He had always dreamed of ruling the entire world. He would encounter many difficulties and obstacles along the way, but in the end, the incident was resolved so easily.


    After these few months, although he could not find any more effective way to manage the entire world hundreds or even thousands of years from now, at least he did find it. An easy way.


    "What happened?"


    Hancock asked anxiously again.


    "Next, the Tru Empire will take over all matters of the World Government, including all countries under the jurisdiction of the World Government and the current World Government''s navy,nd and air force. All battles are over. At least within the next hundred years, this world will never be the same again. Any disputes?��


    Changnuo said calmly.


    But he didn''t pay any attention to Hancock''s expression at this moment. He was already at a loss. Facing such a sudden thing, he could only stare wide-eyed with disbelief on his face.

 Chapter 602 Handover Meeting

    <h4>Chapter 602 Handover Meeting</h4>


    Hancock listened to all this in disbelief, including his eyes full of doubts.


    After staying for a while, she still asked in disbelief, "Are you telling the truth?"


    "Of course it is true. Anyway, the time is almost up. Next, we will directly negotiate the meeting time. We willmunicate with the World Government. This can also be regarded as greatly reducing the possibility of war!"


    Changnuo said leisurely.


    "I really don''t know what to say about this incident? I think I should just go over and calm down for a while!"


    Hancock covered her head. The sudden amount of information was too huge, and she seemed to be unable to bear it for a moment.


    It is estimated that this kind of situation is not just hers, after all, there are simply too many people behind who are unaware.


    Not many people know about the World Government, but it is estimated that with the convening of the meeting, then I am afraid that those who should know it will also be in the process of knowing it.


    after one day.


    In the entire Tru Empire Hall, everyone who heard the news behaved just like Hancock.


    Even General Yixiao, who had always been rtively calm, looked around at the others with dull eyes at this moment, wanting to see if others knew the news in advance.


    But everyone else''s expressions were exactly the same, and their dull eyes could express everything.


    Changnuo sat at the top as Emperor Tru, looking around at the dozens of people below.


    These are all the backbone level beings of the Tru Empire, and the things they need to carry next will be much more than imagined.


    "Your Majesty the King, is it possible that what you said is true?"


    Junhe asked still in disbelief.


    "That''s right, Your Majesty the King, you must not joke about this kind of thing?" Gogoya also said in a low voice.


    Everyone else also had puzzled expressions on their faces.


    After all, the Tru Empire has done nothing, why should it ept the World Government?


    Some even feel that His Majesty the King seems to be a little fanciful. They really don''t know what the situation is like.


    "As for the issues you mentioned, they arepletely redundant. No need to think too much. The meeting time has been set. It will be on the 17th of next month. Everyone needs to prepare in advance. There is exactly one full month before everyone goes back. Be prepared, the meeting will be held on Judiciary Ind!"


    Changnuo didn''t give any exnation and just said it again.


    "Your Majesty the King, I wonder if you can exin what exactly happened?"


    General Yixiao asked angrily.


    After all, it would be too incredible for anyone to experience such a thing. Howe this situation makes people feel so impossible?


    "The exnation is simple, as long as the strength can suppress them!"


    As Chang Nuo spoke, his eyes instantly turned into Samsara Eyes. Everyone present, regardless of whether they were strong or not, but in just an instant, they all found that their feet had turned into an endless sea of ????fire, and underneath the sea of ????fire Dashing through the endless magma zone.


    If this situation is just an illusion, they are not unable to break free ording to their strength, but after moving a little, they find that the heat wave under their feet can hit them directly.


    "Do you feel it? This is strength, you can even call it divine power, the power that can control everything!"


    Chang Nuo was suspended in mid-air above the sea of ??fire, quietly looking at the group of people below. Then with just a wave of his right hand, these people who were also suspended above the sea of ??fire instantly began to fall downwards.


    Even if he took any possible measures to escape and ascend to heaven, nothing could be done in the end.


    After all, in front of their eyes, the vast expanse of fire was filled with magma. Even if they could escape for a while, they would still fall into the magma.


    As the illusion was withdrawn, there were still people in the entire hall who started shouting non-stop. Some of the less powerful members of the Council were even paralyzed on the ground. Even General Yixiao couldn''t help but have tears appear on his forehead. Breaking into a cold sweat.


    Until this moment, everyone finally understood that what His Majesty the King said was not wrong. As long as the strength is superior to everyone, what else does it matter?


    "What was that just now?"


    Moshank frowned, his hands still trembling a little, and asked in a low voice to Jun He next to him.


    "Don''t ask me, just control your appearance!"


    Junhe said, holding his hands tightly behind his back, for fear of others seeing any clues. In fact, he was no different from others. Although his hands were tightly sped together, the trembling on his fingers could still be clearly seen.e out.


    The most surprising thing should be General Yixiao. He couldn''t see anything with his eyes, but for an instant he appeared in other people''s illusions at the same time, and he could intuitively feel that the other person had not touched him, but even so, in an instant, In the meantime, he still entered the illusion, that is, the perception process of seeing and hearing color and domineering, and he was directly above the sea of ????fire.


    Not only can it obliterate the opponent''s five senses, but it can also directly obliterate all the spiritual aspects. Such a situation can directly put the person fighting with him in a trembling state.


    With the power of the Psychic Devil Fruitbined with the Samsara Eye, it is no exaggeration to call Changnuo a god.


    Just one look convinced everyone, and no one raised objections, and no one could raise any questions.


    "His Majesty the King, regarding the issue you mentioned about negotiating the handover with the World Government, are you ready?"


    General Yixiao asked with a frown.


    "Everything has been prepared. In fact, this kind of thing has been prepared a few months ago, but during this period, I have been thinking about how to manage the world, even if ites to So far, I still haven''t forgotten my agreement with you.


    When the Tru Empire was still a small country, I once told you that when I be powerful enough in the future, I will definitely let all the people within my scope live the life they want. Maybe now It''s time for me to fulfill my promise. "


    Chang Nuo said with a slight smile on his lips, which could be regarded as an exnation to General Yixiao, the first powerful person to join him from the outside.


    The Tru Empire is what it is today, although a lot of it is due to this rtionship as the king, but as a naval admiral, he has also contributed too much to this country.

 Chapter 603 Unbelievable News

    <h4>Chapter 603 Unbelievable News</h4>


    Everything cannot be smoothed out or extended in one sentence. The establishment of all this is not something that one person can achieve today.


    But the contributions made by everyone who is on the court today are the existence that cannot be erased and forgotten by the True Empire today.


    After hearing these words, General Yixiao held the sword in his hand, smiled slightly, and opened his eyes forcefully. Although only the whites of his eyes were exposed, it could be seen that tears were constantly swirling in his eyes at this moment. .


    Everyone else who has been following for a long time has a lot of emotion in their hearts. They have apanied the Tru Empire step by step to the present, and many people have a strong say in this.


    From a small country back then, it has gradually grown into the most powerful boss in the world. It has only taken 15 years for everything to develop to this day, but during these 15 years, each other has be the most powerful boss in the world. All the experiences and hard work are now followed by joy.


    It was not just Smile who shed tears. The other founding fathers also stood there smiling and wiping their tears. After all, this kind of thing is not a shame. Today, the Tru Empire has be a behemoth in the entire world. They The cautiousness that I have been doing has finally yielded a huge harvest.


    From today on, no one will be able to threaten this country, and they can no longer be afraid of any existence. At least from this day on, everything has quietly changed.


    "Everyone, as the Tru Empire has progressed to this day, perhaps it is exactly what you thought. We have be stronger and have be an extremely powerful and wealthy country.


    The life of themon people is also what we all expected. At least I have fulfilled the promise I made when I first took this position, so that they no longer have to worry about external safety and internal food and clothing, even though there are many things to do along the way. It��s not perfect, but one thing I��m thankful for is that you��ve been with me along the way.


    You are the greatest contributors to this country, and you are also the bridge of this country. Without you, there would be nothing like the Tru Empire today. Now the appearance of the country has changed. Maybe many people cannot remember who you are, but in the future historical records , you will all refresh a new page.


    So you have carried your weight and carried forward to this day. As the king of the Toru Empire, I thank you on behalf of all the people! "


    Chang Nuo said, adjusting his crown, then ced his right hand on his chest, and bowed slowly.


    When this scene appeared, other people in the main hall, including Gogoya who had been staying next to Chang Nuo, all tacitly understood and bowed together.


    But even though it was a simple sentence, the people below had already burst into tears. They tried hard to hide their inner excitement, clenched their fists, gritted their teeth, and tried hard not to let themselves go. This ce is out of sorts.


    Chang Nuo bowed down, and the timested for nearly a minute. When he slowly stood up and looked at everything, his expression smiled again, and he said with great anticipation, "The Toru Empire may be a great ce for you in the future." It is already a small country, and what you carry will directly extend to the entire world. Not only does this country need you, but the world also needs your wisdom and hard work, so in the days toe, you will also need to work hard. !��


    Chang Nuo bowed again, but they didn''t get up at all from their bow just now.


    It��s not that I haven��t gotten up, it��s that I can��t get up.


    The reason why many people bowed down and never raised their heads was because the ground was already covered with tears.


    Although everyone is trying hard to control their emotions, how can this be done by just opening their mouths?


    "Don''t worry, Your Majesty the King. Even if I die, I will definitely fulfill all His Majesty''s arrangements. My wish in this life is to restore peace to the entire sea. As for making the people live more peacefully and contentedly, although I can''t get involved, We can also assist our colleagues in doing this.��


    General Yixiao stood up first, looked up seriously and said directly.


    "I hope you will be in high spirits to wee the next handover of Judiciary Ind. I can also tell you some things in advance. It will not only be the world government participating in the meeting, but also all parties may also participate. , so no matter what, the next n of the Council for the entire world must be made. General Yixiao will lead the other generals and muste up with a more appropriate management method in a short time that does not conflict with the current world government navy. .


    Now that we have reached this point, our next goal is to make all countries and all people live in peace and contentment. Perhaps this is our mission in this world. Chang Nuo said loudly.


    "Yes, His Majesty the King..."


    Dozens of people began to shout loudly together, and their voices echoed back and forth in the hall.


    This is what reflects their more domineering side. As a pioneer of the Standard Tru Empire, what we will see, encounter, and think about in the future is just the beginning.


    As of now, the handover meeting between the World Government and the Toru Empire, which will be held until the 17th of next month, is not only known to the top management of the Toru Empire, but at the same time, the World Government has already started holding meetings.


    This includes all the leaders of the current world government navy, the CP department, and other high-level leaders in the world government framework, all of which are included in the content of this negotiation meeting.


    When everyone got this news, they all doubted whether the news they got was true or false. After all, this kind of words came from the mouths of the five old stars. In the end, even if it was false, they could only take it as true. Go and listen.


    Even though no one knows what happened in the middle, it is indeed a very good choice now.


    Many people''s positions may not change at all, but they will be subject to greater constraints in their future careers.


    When everyone heard the news, they were in a state of disbelief. On the contrary, it made many people more curious about what happened in the middle. This is like a nk 100 years of history, but the key to the nk 100 years of history is still There was evidence to explore, but there was no such thing. Even if it was announced directly, there were no signs of it happening. Everyone seemed to have decided on this matter in an understatement.

 Chapter 604 The Changing World

    <h4>Chapter 604 The Changing World</h4>


    This situation simply refreshed everyone''s outlook. The world government, which had existed for 800 years, suddenly changed its management existence. It was hard for anyone to ept it.


    Like the Senate of the Tru Empire, the internal meetings of the entire World Government seemed very low-key, with almost no one showing a happy expression.


    "I don''t agree. Why did the Tru Empire control us for no reason? The world government has changed its management. This kind of thing is simply a fantasy!"


    During the meeting, someone finally stood up angrily, looked at the superior Five Old Stars, and shouted without hesitation.


    In an instant, everyone in the lower-level conference room focused on him. This guy was wearing a suit and did not have any particrly conspicuous presence.


    It is estimated that many people present do not even know what position he holds.


    Marshal Kong, themander-in-chief of the navy, army and air force, sat in a high position and stared at the guy quietly. Then he mmed the table and shouted directly, "How can you interrupt here? All the things are done are just notifications. What does it say above?" Just do whatever you want!"


    Marshal Akainu sat not far from him, a smile slowly appearing on his lips.


    It is estimated that he is one of the few people who hopes that the world government will change hands.


    At least in the hearts of many people, they have always believed that the World Government is almost a thing that does nothing, and there are still arge group of high-ranking and dictating beings. Now that I have received this news, for the World Government Navy, I still feel that not bad.


    There were a lot of people in their meeting, sitting sporadically in this huge round table conference hall, at least close to four to five hundred people.


    Those who can really support the change of masters of the world government are almost all those departments that are on the fringes of the world government.


    "I know you must have many opinions, but you can choose to keep these opinions or choose other methods. If you have the ability, you can also challenge Emperor Tru. If you all realize that you can defeat the opponent, then this kind of It''s not bad to leave things to you to decide. Even if someone feels that they are not good enough, they can form a team. But in this position today, all you have to do is obey orders.


    On the 17th of next month, a handover meeting between the two parties will be held directly on Judiciary Ind. All people on the list who need to participate must not be absent without special circumstances, and there may be some people participating in the meeting this time that are beyond your imagination.


    Now you only need to know one thing. After the Tru Empire takes over the world government, many of the bad habits that existed before, as well as your unclean hands and feet, need to be prepared. "


    Siloemia sat on the upper seat and said sternly.


    The Five Old Stars themselves have begun to think about retiring. They don''t know whether it is good or bad for the small Tru Empire to directly take over the world government? But no matter which aspect it is, it will definitely not do any good to these five old guys.


    The five people collectively looked around at everyone in the field, just to see their attitudes and performance.


    However, these people also know that even if there are some grasshoppers that can jump out, it will not have any impact on the overall situation.


    "Master Wu Laoxing, we need the truth. What happened? The World Government actually wants the Tru Empire to take over?"


    The guy who was the first to stand up and object just now stood up again and began to question.


    "If you really want to know, you should understand everything at the handover meeting between the two parties." Silohemia said impatiently.


    Others didn''t say much. In fact, many people were still surprised.


    Even though I was leaving, I was still feeling the content of the meeting with some disbelief.


    This time is not so much a meeting as a notification. After all, no one participated in the discussion. It was just a notification order issued directly from the top of the World Government.


    On board the Navy Headquarters battleship.


    "Warring States, it seems that the world is really undergoing huge changes. I didn''t expect that we would encounter it in our lifetime!"


    Garp was not as excited as usual, but instead spoke with a thoughtful look on his face.


    Even though he was only a vice admiral, Garp''s influence on the entire navy was too great, so he also participated in this meeting.


    As a former naval marshal, Sengoku, not to mention, also had the right to be invited in as well.


    However, Sengoku''s performance waspletely different from Garp''s. He had a smile on his face from beginning to end, leaning on the recliner, eating and drinking.


    "You bastard! Just open your mouth."


    Garp looked at Sengoku''s appearance and shouted angrily.


    "What''s there to shout about? Isn''t this kind of thing normal?"


    Warring States said casually, but after he slowly put down the drink in his hand, he sat upright and said again seriously, "However, I can never imagine why the World Government was willing to put its hands in the end when there was no war between the two parties. Transfer power? How can the Tru Empire directly take over a ce as big as the World Government?"


    "This is what I''m thinking about, what is the ability of Emperor Tru? It seems that there are too many things hidden by the World Government that we don''t know about.


    But how did Emperor Tru know something that none of us knew? "


    Garp scratched his head and asked with a frown.


    "What I can guess now is that there should be someone behind the Five Old Stars, and this person definitely stands at the top of the world government''s power, and in terms of strength, he can crush everyone.


    The little guy, King Tru, seems to have been underestimated by us all along. Even though we have attached so much importance to this guy, he seems to know much more than we imagined.


    In any case, being able to have the world government directly convene such a meeting means that this matter is absolutely different. Let''s wait for the handover meeting on the Judiciary Ind next month. Let''s see what will happen. Performance. "


    Warring States sighed and said directly.


    "It''s easy to say that. It seems that we are not included in the list of people who can participate in the next handover meeting?"


    Another Lieutenant General He who was sitting next to the two people opened his mouth and said directly.


    They are now considered high-ranking members of the Navy. Even though they have retired, they are still aloof.


    So it��s not unusual to get the conference roster the first time? However, there were only three or four people from the navy mentioned in the meeting list participating in the meeting, including the current marshal of the navy and three generals. How could there be any extra positions left for them?

 Chapter 605 The Melancholy of the Revolutionary Army

    <h4>Chapter 605 The Mncholy of the Revolutionary Army</h4>


    As soon as Lieutenant General He said his words, the two of them fell into silence again.


    But after just a while, Warring States said directly, "Even if we are not invited, can we still be kicked out by others if we go directly to Judiciary Ind?"


    "Warring States is right! Then we have to find out what happened?" Garp also said.


    In fact, the main reason why Garp wanted to go was because he was worried about his son.


    The Revolutionary Army has challenged the World Government, and now the World Government and the Toru Empire are holding a handover meeting. Although the Toru Empire controls the World Government on the surface, from a certain perspective, it is the World Government and the Toru Empire that Start working closely together.


    In this case, what role can the revolutionary army y? The powerful ones are now all concentrated on one side. As for those in the Revolutionary Army, Garp simply does not believe that they can make any waves under such circumstances.


    If it was just because of the World Government before, provocation would be provocation. If you can''t defeat it, you can at least escape. But the Toru Empire is different. It doesn''t have any bad reputation as a whole. What''s more important is that now it has a great reputation among the people of various countries. The weight is quite heavy.


    "Speaking of Garp, have you noticed anything else wrong?" Sengoku asked suddenly.


    "What?"


    Garp looked up with a confused expression and looked at Sengoku with some confusion.


    "You old guy, even I have noticed that many things are wrong now, what? You lie there and sleep every day without observing."


    Lieutenant General He also opened his mouth and said mockingly.


    "I''m not telling you, what do you two mean?"


    Garp still looked confused, looking at the two people carefully, not understanding what they meant at all?


    "Needless to say, it''s your grandson''s business! Now he has begun to arrive at Rafdru, and he has probably begun to explore the treasure of the Pirate King. But have you discovered some things? Since he entered Rafdru, their The situation upies the headlines of newspapers almost every day, but who takes these photos? Who arranges this kind of thing?"


    Warring States said with direct analysis.


    "Isn''t this normal?"


    "Roger entered Lovedrew. Have you ever seen anyone preach about it?"


    Facing Garp''s brainlessness, Lieutenant General He also said speechlessly.


    "I think there must be two invisible hands in the middle or behind it. We don''t know the specific reason, but since your grandson Luffy entered the new world, everything seems full of ups and downs, but everything seems so smooth.


    He was able to defeat Domingo, escape from Big Mom, and face Kaido, don''t you think the things along the way are incredible to us? "


    Warring States opened his mouth and asked.


    "Then what do you mean?"


    Garp''s expression suddenly became serious, and then he asked casually.


    "It''s very simple. It seems that someone wants to expose the secret of Rafdru directly, but I don''t understand what the meaning of exposure is? The secret hidden there is not a particrly big deal to the Navy and the World Government, unless it is inside And there��s stuff we don��t know about.��


    Warring States said.


    "Then is it possible that the Tru Empire is behind this?" Garp asked.


    "It''s not impossible, but it shouldn''t be necessary if you think about it. Nico Robin is the Princess of the Toru Empire. Many things can indeed be associated with the Toru Empire, but this should not be said.


    Now that the Tru Empire is preparing to take over the world government, in a sense, it has already taken control of the entire world. There is no need to make a fuss about this kind of thing! "


    Warring States said.


    "I feel that many things are beyond our ability to consider. Not to mention this matter, many situations havepletely escaped our imagination. Big eventse out from time to time, which has overwhelmed us. Anyway, we are three Why should a retired old guy still care about too many things?"


    Lieutenant General He said.


    While the three people were chatting, the naval warship beneath them had been sailing on the sea. In fact, the ship did not have an urate target course, but it just kept wandering back and forth in this situation.


    As one of the top three naval officers, a series of changes have urred in the past two years. Even though he is as smart as the Warring States Period, he can be considered a big head. The main reason is that there are too many things that he does not understand.


    The biggest problem today should be what kind of connection exists between the World Government and the Tru Empire? And what is the reason that causes the World Government to directly hand over to the Tru Empire?


    Anyway, while I can''t think about it, I can only wait for the time toe and understand it better.


    The world government is about to be handed over to the Tru Empire. As soon as the news came out, the whole world was in an uproar. Everyone who heard the news was in disbelief.


    Some people even openly scolded newspapers for reporting some false news, but as one newspaper did this, all newspapers followed suit. Not only the newspaper headlines, but the entire newspaper from top to bottom was all about this. kind of thing.


    Then some people began to believe it and were surprised.


    Judiciary Ind is about to host a world government handover conference. In an instant, this ce has be the area that everyone is paying attention to. Even the Seven Waters Capital, which is not far from Judiciary Ind, has be the most prosperous area in an instant.


    The person who was most shocked to receive this kind of news was the current revolutionary army. As the leader of the revolutionary army, Long''s hands could not help but tremble when he held the newspaper in his hand.


    The leaders of the revolutionary army all knew the news one by one. Everyone looked downcast, mainly because they had no idea what the reason was.


    Their struggles are the same as everyone else''s. Everyone is wondering what the Tru Empire has done to allow the World Government to choose such a method?


    "Boss Long, do you think this story is false?"


    Sabo, who had been standing there, asked with doubt in his heart.


    After all, he himself had only just returned from the World Government Conference a few days ago, but within these few days, such a big thing happened.


    "It should be true, but I just don''t know how the Tru Empire did it?"


    Long frowned, took a deep breath, slowly put the newspaper on the table in front of him and said.


    Even though it''s hard to believe, now that the facts are in front of them, they have to believe it whether they believe it or not.

 Chapter 606 Meeting Invitation

    <h4>Chapter 606 Meeting Invitation</h4>


    From the North Sea directly to Judiciary Ind, this distance, even if sailing day and night, will take at least about 20 days to reach. Now they can''t stop anything.


    But at this moment, a huge ray of light shone directly from the outside into where they were.


    As a disk-shaped thing slowly fell, it was like an alien aircraft. It was equipped with lights and could fly horizontally automatically. The high-tech thing fell directly into the territory of the revolutionary army. Inside.


    While others were still on guard, Toru Imperial Enel walked down from the slowly opened hatch.


    "Admiral Eniro of the Tru Empire Navy came to deliver an invitation to the leader of the Revolutionary Army, Long!"


    Enelu stood outside the gate and shouted at the top of his lungs.


    The leaders of the revolutionary army in the room rushed out one by one at extremely fast speeds, and most of them were also on extreme alert.


    "How do you know this ce?"


    After Sabo came out, he asked in a low voice.


    "It''s just the territory of the Revolutionary Army. Do you think you can avoid anyone''s detection just by relying on your abilities?"


    Enelu said with a smile on his lips.


    "Tell me, what are you doing here?"


    Long walked over the crowd and walked out directly, looking at Enelu with the same serious expression and asked.


    "This time, under the order of His Majesty the King, I havee to deliver an invitation letter to the Revolutionary Army. I specially invite you to send representatives to participate in the World Government Handover Conference on the 17th of next month!"


    Enel said calmly.


    "Huh? It''s really interesting. Someone actually sent an invitation to our revolutionary army?"


    "His Majesty the King has said that the world government will be handed over to the management of the Tru Empire. The entire world will usher in a new model. No war or disputes will be allowed in the world. Including you,rge pirate groups are also here. For those who are not willing to ept the invitation, after the handover ceremony of the World Government, the Tru Empire will join forces with the World Government Navy to carry out an all-round attack on everyone within the invitation range."


    Enilu still maintained an indifferent expression, with a slight smile at the corner of his mouth, looking at the leader of the Western Army of the Revolutionary Army who had just spoken, and then his expression suddenly stopped smiling, and said again with a serious face, "You should believe Tru The empire has the strength in this regard!��


    "We have epted the invitation letter, but there are less than 40 days until the 17th of next month. From Beihai to Judiciary Ind, it is difficult for us to guarantee that we can arrive on time!"


    Long directly took the invitation from Enelu and opened his mouth with the same helpless expression.


    "Regarding this, please rest assured. This time it is just you who will be the representative. The Tru Empire will use an aircraft to send you directly there. It will only take an instant for this thing to arrive at Judiciary Ind. All the people who are invited will use it." This way, the premise is that you can find people who will go to represent and participate in the meeting.��


    As Nilu said, he pointed directly at the circr aircraft behind him.


    The size of this thing is only about 5 meters in diameter. For them, how many people can it amodate?


    Perhaps seeing their appearance, Enelu smiled again and said, "This thing is blessed with space fruit power inside, and it can amodate at least a thousand people to participate!"


    "This matter is still open to our consideration, but we will give you a reply as soon as possible. When the timees, the Revolutionary Army will definitely send someone to attend the meeting first!"


    As the leader, Long opened his mouth to speak after weighing the pros and cons.


    "Then I will wait for your answer. Your people will still be waiting here on the 16th of next month. Then we will send people directly to pick you up. You don''t have to worry about any safety issues during the process!"


    As Nilu said, he looked at everyone present. He had already seen the information of these people thoroughly before he came here. Putting aside the issue of whether there was a threat, he just wanted to get along in front of this group of people. Just a familiar face.


    at the same time.


    within the new world.


    A huge cake is disyed in front of you. This is today''s Cake Ind, where the Big Mom Pirates are located.


    As a general of the intelligence agency, Abona also took a flight andnded steadily on the square in front of Cake Ind.


    This is not the first time he has been to this ce. After all, he has been here several years ago and is somewhat familiar with this ce.


    Facing something unexpected, the guards on Cake Ind all felt as if they were facing a formidable enemy.


    Even the children of Big Mom are full of vignce whenever they appear.


    Unlike Anilu, Abona''s actions were very simple and crude. After getting off the spacecraft, he looked at the surrounding environment.


    "True Empire Abona,e and meet Big Mom!"


    After Abona got off the spaceship, he spoke directly to everyone.


    "Can we know why you came here?"


    Katakuri, who looked handsome in appearance, opened his mouth and asked.


    Although he failed at the hands of Luffyst time, everyone who knows him should know very well that Big Mom also has no me, allowing him to still maintain his supreme position on Cake Ind.


    "I''m here to send you an invitation for Big Mom to attend the world government handover meeting on the 17th of the month. And His Majesty the King has said that the Big Mom Pirates in the New World must not be absent!"


    Abona opened his mouth with a cold voice, not wanting to give the other party any rebuttal at all.


    "Who is this guy? He actually came to our ce and is so arrogant?"


    "Shut up!"


    A guy who didn''t look like much opened his mouth to say something, and Katakuri instantly gave him a cold look and scolded him angrily.


    Then he turned to look at Abona and said calmly, "You''d better talk to your mother about these things next. Pleasee with me!"


    Abona nodded slightly, and then started to follow Katakuri.


    Even after leaving, people in the square were still talking about it. Among them, the man who was scolded just now still asked in surprise, "Who is that person?"


    "The Intelligence General of the Tohru Empire, he is also known as the strongest swordsman in the world without the ability of the Devil Fruit!"


    As he spoke, a little girl slowly walked forward and started to speak while facing the backs of the two people who had left.


    "Brynn, it turns out you know each other?"


    the man asked.


    "I''ve only heard of it, but the news and newspapers of the Tru Empire are no longer a secret. They are in high positions, and it is no secret in this world."


    Brynn said with a smile.

 Chapter 607 The Incident on Cake Island

    <h4>Chapter 607 The Incident on Cake Ind</h4>


    The other brothers in the square just looked at each other''s leaving figures. No one else had any thoughts anyway.


    In the room, Big Mom was lying on a chair, looking at the newspaper in her hand seriously and curiously. All the contents above were about the Tru Empire taking over the world government.


    Like everyone else, they have been watching for several days. The key is that they still don��t understand what went wrong. Is the World Government actually willing to give it up?


    But as she looked at it, the woman''s eyes suddenly turned red.


    The next second, she punched the chair underneath her.


    The entire room was shattered by this punch.


    As soon as Katakuri and Abona walked to the door, they immediately felt something was wrong.


    There was a tacit understanding between them, and they jumped aside to avoid the mming door.


    "Mom is sick!"


    Katakuri shouted loudly to Abona.


    "What the hell is Big Mom doing?" Abona asked with a frown.


    "I don''t know the specifics. Usually mothers only behave like this because they can''t eat dessert, but this time ites too suddenly, so I''d better stop it first."


    While Katakuri was speaking seriously, Big Mom had slowly walked out, clenching her fists, her eyes red, and she hadpletely changed into apletely different person.


    With each step of his plump body, he could feel the earth shaking.


    "I absolutely cannot let you go like this, everyone will die!"


    Big mom came out and looked at the two of them with red eyes. Her words were domineering and cold.


    "Big mom. I don''t care what illness you have now, my mission is to deliver the invitation!"


    Abona sneered and walked directly towards her with an indifferent expression.


    Katakuri didn''t stop him, but he just watched the man in front of him step by step closer to his mother, with a look of surprise on his face.


    As soon as he walked up to him, before handing out the invitation letter in his hand, Big Mom immediately punched Abona with a punch.


    In the sh of lightning, Abona pulled out the long knife from his waist without knowing when, and suddenly blocked the impact of the fist.


    Even so, Abona was still knocked back two steps by the punch, but Big Mom had no intention of letting it go. He jumped up again, took off the hat on his head, and instantly turned into a big knife, directly shed down at Abona.


    Katakuri seemed to be standing there watching a y. He didn''t make any move from beginning to end, but just watched quietly.


    After a while, all the other brothers and sisters came to the scene, and they were all observing the battle between the two.


    "Don''t we go up and stop it?"


    Charlotte Dafu asked.


    "Mom''s frequency of illness has elerated a lot. After returning from Wano Country, this kind of thing has be particrly obvious. If we prevent it today, what about tomorrow?"


    Perlos stretched out his long tongue and licked the lollipop and said nonchntly.


    The other children also showed the same attitude. Now, finally, someone came over to help them, so these people showed no signs of taking action.


    "Big mom. If you don''t wake up again, don''t me me for doing anything!"


    Abona resisted the opponent for a few times, and then said directly and coldly.


    "die����"


    Big mom. As if she didn''t hear it, she rushed over again brandishing her machete.


    "I haven''t shown myself off for a long time, I can use you to practice my skills!"


    Abona held the knife in both hands, and his body was in an attack state. The long knife in his hand turned ck in the next second, and the armor-colored domineering covering directly supported his attack.


    When Big Mom. just came over, he disappeared in an instant, but the next thing that appeared was a ck sword light, which instantly directly attacked Big Mom.


    The huge impact also caused the fat woman to fly five or six meters instantly. Even Big Mom, known as the steel balloon., under the attack of this knife, a wound instantly appeared on the body, and blood continued to flow down the shoulder. fall.


    "Mom is hurt!"


    Katakuri said in disbelief. This was also the first time for these children to see their mother suffer from trauma.


    "This time I''m just warning you on the shoulder. If you don''t stop, the next stab will be on the neck!" Abona said coldly.


    However, the next move of Big Mom, who was injured and fell to the ground, exceeded their imaginations one by one.


    His body, which was still fat, began to lose weight slowly under everyone''s gaze.


    Her body was like a balloon deted, and she finally turned into a beautiful woman who looked slim and tall.


    But after all, putting her age there only makes people think about how beautiful she was when she was young.


    The body became thinner, and the redness above the eyes began to slowly disappear.


    Big mom. Her face was pale and she was sitting there weakly.


    "Everything should be fine now, right? Then I will begin to convey our content this time. On the 17th of next month, the Big Mom Pirates must send representatives to participate in the World Government Handover Conference. This is an order from His Majesty the King. , and it is still unconditionally mandatory.��


    Abona said calmly.


    "The Big Mom Pirates will send people to participate!"


    Big mom. Sitting on the ground, with her back to Abona, she spoke weakly.


    "On the 16th of next month, we will send someone to pick you up. I hope you will not disappoint our King!"


    Abona said, then he inserted the knife in his hand directly into the scabbard, sneered, turned around and left.


    He didn''t pay attention to the other people present at all. This was also the deterrent brought by his current strength, and it was also suppressed by the powerful reputation of the Tru Empire.


    "Big Mom Pirates, Katakuri will be the captain next. If nothing happens in the future, please don''t bother me!"


    After Abona left, Big Mom slowly stood up, took a deep breath and looked at her children. Although she was still a little weak, she still spoke domineeringly.


    "Mom, are you okay?"


    Perros asked with a worried look on his face.


    "You don''t have to worry about my affairs anymore, and you don''t have toe to bother me!"


    Big Mom said, covering her shoulders, slowly turning her back to them, and started walking towards the house.


    All the brothers were extremely surprised. What on earth happened? Why did the captain of the Big Mom Pirates suddenly change?


    But they did not dare to raise any objections. After all, among the many children, Katakuri was already the strongest and the most prestigious among their brothers and sisters.

 Chapter 608 The Country of Wano

    <h4>Chapter 608 The Country of Wano</h4>


    Now that he can be the new captain of the Big Mom Pirates, to a certain extent, there is no objection from anyone.


    After all, something has begun to be ced in front of them, that is, the meeting they will participate in next. What is the situation like? Some of them don''t even dare to think about it.


    Once the new captain is decided, the next invitation letter will naturally fall into his hands. There is no possibility of any surprises in this situation.


    However, just like them, there is another person who is also the Four Emperors, but the situation here ispletely different.


    General Yixiao personally sent the invitation letter, but the other party just showed his original expression andughed.


    "We have already delivered the things. Don''t forget to go and participate when the timees. We will send someone to pick you up one day in advance. Don''t let His Majesty the King down!"


    General Yixiao sat there with arge bowl of wine in front of him. Sitting directly opposite him was Kaido, the Yonko.


    The other party picked up a huge wine gourd,ughed and shouted directly, "It''s really helpful for you toe here to inform me about this kind of thing. I will definitely participate in it next time, but we can''t represent Wano Country now." !��


    "Don''t worry about this. His Majesty the King has sent people to notify the kings of all countries. Everyone should be involved by then. As for what you said, there won''t be any problems at all!"


    As soon as General Yixiao finished speaking, the mark on the right chest of his general uniform began to sh. While Kaido, who was sitting opposite, was still confused, he pressed it directly.


    As the button on the chest is activated, it seems to be directly connected to the other party''smunication.


    "General Yixiao, you should still be near Wano Country, right? The current person in charge of this country, Kozuki Momonosuke, directly stated that Wano Country will enter a closed country in the future and is unwilling to participate in this meeting!"


    The sound came from his chest, even Kaido sitting opposite could hear it.


    But the other party''s mouth showed a smile of sess. He wanted to see how the Tru Empire, which was about to dominate the world, would solve the problem in front of him?


    "If they don''t agree, tell each other directly and this country can change its leader!"


    General Yixiao said calmly.


    Now that we have reached this point, Yixiao is very clear that in this position, many things are not as simple as imagined, and the necessary means should appear directly.


    The advantage of doing this is not only to avoid the future troubles of the Tru Empire, but more importantly, to realize their future ideals.


    That''s why General Yixiao behaved so indifferently about this kind of thing!


    The person on the other side hesitated for a moment, and then said seriously, "I understand General Xiaoxiao!"


    "This is not the you I know anymore? When did you do anything to achieve your goals?"


    After hanging up, Kaido asked with a smile on his face.


    "I should make changes in everything. For all the things His Majesty the King has done behind the scenes, which one is not a gamble with his life? Today''s hard-won day, I will never allow it to happen. Anyonees to destroy the peace that this world may have!"


    Yixiao said seriously.


    "I don''t know why? I just think what you people say is quite interesting, but I also admire that guy Emperor Tru. What no one dares to think or do, the other party has actually done it quietly! But it��s normal to think about it. You, a guy who is so young and already has such terrifying strength, are already on a different ne than us!��


    Kaido picked up the wine gourd, took a sip and said.


    "Forget it, I don''t want to talk too much nonsense to you. Over in Wano Country, His Majesty the King has made arrangements before. Many things are not as simple as they seem on the surface. Jun and the general have already passed, so I will go over here to join in. Just join in the fun and learn what the secret is hidden in Wano Country?"


    General Yixiao said, touched the crutches ced beside him, and began to stand up expressionlessly.


    "I don''t think you need to go and see it. Anyway, ording to the current situation, it probably won''t pose any big threat to the Tru Empire!"


    Kaido said calmly, but in the end he took a deep breath and let it out slowly.


    It looked like he wanted to say something but didn''t say it out loud.


    General Yixiao no longer wants to pay too much attention to his side of things. The invitation letter has been sent, and the rest has nothing to do with him.


    Although Kaido usually likes to use force to cause trouble, it does not mean that the other party has no brains, otherwise he may not survive today!


    The country of Wano still seems to be a country in ruins. Although many people have begun to actively repair it, some things have been damaged and it is impossible to repair it again.


    On the ruins of the original Kozuki family in Wano Country, the most annoying Kozuki Momonosuke is gathered here at the moment. He is also the current head of these people.


    The people following him were all servants belonging to the Guangyue family, and the others were well-apanied fur tribesmen. There were quite a few of them, and there were at least hundreds of people gathered here.


    "Messenger of the Tru Empire, I and the country don''t want to participate in anything in the world now, why are you unwilling to let it go?"


    The seemingly young Kozuki Momonosuke, surrounded by the group of people behind him, also asked directly to the Tohru Empire visitor with some arrogance.


    The person who came here was just a lieutenant general from the Tru Empire, and all themunication about the country fell on the lieutenant generals and major generals of the Tru Empire.


    He had just received the order from the general, and at the same time, he also knew that Shunhe had actually been wandering in the surrounding waters, and his purpose was also very clear, that is, the next Wano country must participate in the invitation meeting no matter what.


    Facing this man, even though he was just a lieutenant general, he did not panic at all. He stared at Mitsunosuke with a stern look and said, "This time is not just an order from His Majesty the King, but more importantly, this meeting." It will determine the future direction of the world, not to mention that His Majesty the King is making all the decisions for the sake of world peace, so why can the country of Wano stay out of it?"


    "What your Tru Empire requires is to send a representative there, is that okay with me?"


    There were two long swords hanging on his waist, he looked like a warrior and wore a pair of wooden clogs as he stepped forward and asked.


    Others also looked at it in the same way. Although these people had no intention of understanding things outside of Wano Country, they still saw the scene of Changno beating Kaido violently.

 Chapter 609 The Awakening Person

    <h4>Chapter 609 The Awakening Person</h4>


    A group of people were also staring at the lieutenant general who came from the Tru Empire. In fact, the Tru Empire was also paying close attention to this ce.


    The Country of Wano is a ce that hides great secrets. The only time the Superman Time Fruit appears is here.


    In addition to Kaido''s previous warning, how could this country have a different attitude since the meeting was held this time?


    "I would like to ask, in what capacity do you represent Wano Country? Are you able to answer some questions? Are you able to make certain decisions?"


    Lieutenant General Trudeau asked, staring at the other party.


    "Then what do you want?"


    The cat-bellied snake of the fur tribe suddenly opened his mouth with some dissatisfaction.


    "The King of Wano, or someone who can make any decision on behalf of Wano, and this time is not just a discussion, it is also a mandatory decision for the future direction of world peace!" said the Lieutenant General.


    "Why are you still dissatisfied even though Wano Country has decided to close itself off and withdraw from any decision-making in this world, and must force us to participate? Doesn''t it seem like your Tru Empire is going too far?"


    Kozuki Momonosuke said seriously, his expression lookedpletely different from the child before.


    I don''t know if it''s because I''ve hidden it too deeply, or because I''ve experienced too much, but it feels quite weird anyway.


    "You want to know the answer? Maybe we don''t mind telling you!"


    But just when the lieutenant general was about to open his mouth to say something, a voice came directly from behind everyone.


    Generals Junhe and Yixiao slowly appeared in the crowd''s sight. Their general attires from the Tru Empire looked full of majesty and domineering.


    "General of the Tohru Empire!!"


    Cat Viper frowned and said in a low voice.


    Everyone else''s expressions didn''t look so good either.


    Anyway, there was one of them, and everyone was surprised by the arrival of the two.


    "If you''re not dead,e out. It''s been so many years. Do you think you haven''t had enough fun?"


    Shunhe walked directly past these people, facing the Guangyue family nnd which was still in ruins, with a look of disdain on his face, and shouted mockingly.


    "you����"


    "You can still be discovered? It''s been 20 years since west met, and so many unknown things happened!"


    Kozuki Momonosuke, his small body pointed directly at Shunwa, his expression full of anger, but before he could say anything else, a voice came directly from underneath the ruins.


    After the voice came out, everyone in the Guangyue family was stunned.


    "This is?"


    Kin''emon''s hands were trembling a little, and Raizo next to him also kneeled on the ground.


    Even Kozuki Momonosuke, who looked arrogant just now, his eyes were filled with tears.


    As a strong impact came out of the ground, a figure slowly fell in front of everyone.


    Junhe and General Yixiao behaved very normally, but the other people all had their mouths hanging open.


    "Dad...Dad!!!!!"


    Kozuki Momonosuke looked at the person in front of him in disbelief, his eyes widened, and his whole body began to tremble uncontrobly.


    Kinemon hesitated even more, and then fell to his knees directly on the ground.


    The servants belonging to the Kozuki family all showed the same expression, and finally everyone shouted together, "K��zuki retainers, pay your respects to Oden-sama!!"


    In fact, it didn''t make these people so unbelievable. After all, the scene before them might have been considered deep in their hearts.


    But when this person appeared, many things still surprised them.


    "It''s really surprising. I didn''t expect the time-based Devil Fruit ability to be able to achieve this level!"


    General Yixiao said with emotion.


    "Who says it isn''t? This ce is really not as simple as imagined!" Junhe said with a smile on his lips as well.


    "I don''t know, why do you twoe to our country of Wan?"


    Kozuki Oden slowly walked up to the two of them and asked.


    This guy has a standard samurai image, with a long sword hanging on his waist, and his samurai clothing looks like the standard style of their Wano country.


    The only difference is that this guy is also a general of the country of Wano, so he has all the standard equipment.


    "Father����"


    Kozuki Momonosuke stood there and shouted loudly.


    Kozuki Oden nced at his son, a smile slowly appeared on his lips, but he did not say anything to him.


    On the contrary, when he looked at Shunhe and the two of them, his expression became serious, and he asked rather domineeringly, "Isn''t it possible for Wano to not participate in anything in the world?"


    "You think it''s okay, but are you sure you want to do this?" Junhe asked.


    "What if you''re sure? What if you''re not sure?"


    "If you are sure, then we will go back directly and report the situation on your side. If you are not sure, prepare people to attend the meeting. It is not a mandatory requirement!" Junhe said with a smile.


    "If I heard correctly just now, your decision will be made on the 16th of next month. There is still enough time, so we should give it some thought. We will give you a reply on that day."


    Kozuki Oden said calmly.


    "Absolutely no problem. I really hope you can give me a better answer by then!"


    Junhe said, then turned around to leave, but while turning around, a smile appeared on his face, and he said again, "It''s better to go and see the subordinates you frozen in time. If you don''t untie them quickly, I''m afraid it will really happen." He��s going to die!��


    Oden''s expression turned cold, but he could only watch as the people on the other side began to slowly leave.


    "Hoo~!!"


    Standing there, Kozuki Oden took a deep breath, exhaled slowly, and then began to look at his son with a smile.


    "Everyone, get up. We haven''t seen each other in 20 years. It seems that many of them have aged a lot!"


    Oden looked at his retainers and said in a friendly tone.


    "Sir, when did you wake up?"


    Kinemon stood up and asked excitedly.


    "It hasn''t been long since I woke up, and it''s only been two days. I didn''t expect to hear what happened this time. Let me quickly tell you about the current situation in the world!"


    Kozuki Oden asked anxiously with a frown on his face.


    He looked around at the people present. Almost all of them were his old acquaintances, so there was no need to have any grudges between them.


    Everyone also understands that the time for chatting has long passed. For a person who has just woken up and has encountered such a thing, the most important thing is to be able to understand the current situation quickly.

 Chapter 610 The Power of Time

    <h4>Chapter 610 The Power of Time</h4>


    However, it was impossible to stay in this ruins even if they were chatting. Under the leadership of Kinemon, the group slowly came to a rtively good ce.


    This is the ce where the Hydra general from Wano Country once lived. Although it is not as prosperous as before, from an architectural point of view, this is already the most luxurious venue in the entire Wano Country.


    In the main hall, Kozuki Oden was kneeling at the top, Momonosuke was kneeling next to him, and almost everyone else was kneeling in the two rows below.


    "Let''s put emotional matters in the future. Since everything has been reset, there will be a lot of time in the future. Let''s quickly talk about the current situation, and then talk about Kaido''s problem!"


    Kozuki Oden was the first to speak.


    "Father, now that Kaido has been beaten away by us, he should note back in a short time. Plus you have returned now, I think we don''t need to worry about this issue anymore.


    But the most important thing right now is that the Tru Empire came to send a message to attend the meeting! "


    Kozuki Momonosuke said.


    "Toru Empire???" Kozuki Oden frowned and thought for a moment, then said, "If I remember correctly, shouldn''t this be a small country on the South China Sea?"


    "Sir, perhaps it was indeed the same as what you said 20 years ago, but it was also sixteen years ago that the Toru Kingdom ushered in the current king Genji Nagano. The other party was almost unmatched in terms of strength and control of the country. They have all reached an extreme level.


    He even personally went to war with the World Government two years ago. Although we don��t know the specific situation, the Toru Empire is indeed a behemoth now. Now we don��t know what the circumstances are, but the World Government actually wants to be handed over to the Toru Empire. , however, the purpose of finding us this time is to participate in the handover meeting of the world government. "


    Kinemon said.


    "It seems that a lot of things have happened in the past 20 years?"


    Kozuki Oden frowned again and said.


    "Oden, a lot of things have happened in the past 20 years, many of which I couldn''t even imagine. The situation in the world has already undergone tremendous changes. Whitebeard was killed in the battle, and a new pattern has emerged on the sea. Especially The Lu Empire was just one aspect, but it was also the fastest rising among all the forces.


    I think you should send people to attend this world government handover meeting, and at least get familiar with the uing world situation. Even if the situation gets worse, it cannot be worse than before! " said Cat Viper.


    "Let''s think about it..."


    Kozuki Oden was not in a hurry to make any decision, but instead frowned and started thinking.


    The other side.


    "Your Majesty the King, how do you know that Kozuki Oden is still alive?"


    In the royal pce of the Tru Empire, General Yixiao asked with some confusion.


    Junhe stood next to him. After all, he had no interest in such a number one person at all, and he didn''t know him at all.


    When that guy was hiding, Shunhe was only in his teens.


    Not to mention the Tru Empire, which knew nothing about the outside world.


    Chang Nuo sat on the sofa and looked at General Yixiao. He thought for a moment and said, "I learned about the ability of the time-based Devil Fruit before. When the Superman-based Devil Fruit is developed to the point of awakening, he can have the ability to reverse time and space at once. The disadvantage is that it only has the ability to reverse time and space." It can be used once, and the Devil Fruit user will die as a result.


    For the country of Wano, the most important thing is Kozuki Oden. As their core leader, if you think about it, you know that it is impossible to die. This devil fruit has another side effect, that is, no matter who can reverse time and space, how? Thest ce it appears can only be at the ce where it disappeared.


    Two days ago, people from Abona''s side had already reported that the soldiers of Wano Country who were frozen in time seemed to be showing signs of awakening. As the leader of the Kozuki family, Kozuki Oden had not made any movement. He must have awakened within the scope of his original ruins. "


    Changnuo exined.


    "I see, I didn''t expect there to be such a devil fruit!" Junhe said with emotion.


    "Don''t be overly emotional about this kind of thing. After awakening from the surgical fruit, you can use your own life as a medium to perform surgery that will make people immortal!" Chang Nuo said to the other party with a smile.


    "oh???"


    The two people in front of them were surprised together, but thinking about it, it was never their turn to do such a thing.


    Chang Nuo just treated it as a joke.


    Everyone knows the level ofplexity he will reach when he awakens his Devil Fruit powers.


    At present, there are only a few people who can achieve the power of fruit awakening, and which one is not the pinnacle of one field?


    "Your Majesty the King, despite this, what should we do if Wano Country finally decides not to participate in the handover meeting?"


    General Yixiao asked.


    "This meeting will determine the future direction of the world, whether it is our original concept or our next ideal. If it reallyes to that point, then we must find a way to let them walk on our ideal path of peace. !��


    Changnuo said calmly.


    "I understand!" Yixiao said.


    Although I really don''t want to admit this method, there is really no better choice.


    The content of this world government handover meeting is actually not too much, but almost all of it is focused on the management of the world government and the Tru Empire.


    The kings of all countries are already within the invitation range. To be precise, everyone must participate.


    Among the major forces, everyone who can make decisions has been invited. Therefore, this meeting is not just for one person, but directly affects the entire poption of the world. .


    As for the overall goals and ns of the meeting, Yixiao, as a general of the Tru Empire, was deeply trusted. He had already participated in and understood most of the things.


    Especially the progress of this meeting and the content of the meeting that needs to be discussed at every moment.


    After the people involved in the world government havepleted the handover, they need to make arrangements for almost everything in the world, including many of the issues between these major forces and various countries.


    Now that everything is ready, the suspended tform on Judiciary Ind, which can amodate 100,000 people, will definitely not be a problem.


    In such a ce, a huge conference hall hundreds of meters high has beenpletely constructed in just two days.


    A variety of residential areas have been built and designed to amodate those who areing to attend meetings.

 Chapter 611 Blackbeard’s Thoughts

    <h4>Chapter 611 ckbeard��s Thoughts</h4>


    Judiciary Ind is almost at the center of the first half of the Grand Line, and it is currently the most suitable venue for the handover meeting.


    Now that it was taken over by the Tohru Empire, it only took two days to use the Devil Fruit''s ability to instantly build a building that felt majestic.


    Workersing and going, as well as boats constantly gathering from outside, their most stated purpose is to transport supplies here.


    After all, the exclusive space channel belonging to the Tru Empire is impossible for many people to use.


    Although the Judiciary Ind today has been taken over by the Tru Empire, it also has arge part of the right to use it, which currently only belongs to the World Government.


    Although many of the staff they ced here would not reject the existence of the Tru Empire today, not everyone is so easy to talk to.


    The entire ind has now been transformed. From a certain perspective,pared to the previous Judiciary Ind, today''s ind looks more like a leisure vacation area.


    There are still seven days until the meeting.


    The surrounding areas of Judiciary Ind have already begun to stand ready. The surrounding steel battleships are almost sailing on the entire sea one after another, all of them are vigntly observing the surrounding situation.


    However, the steel battleship ispletely different from before.


    Most of the soldiers responsible for patrols are robots, and these are all transported from the moon.


    Since defeating Feido, the Toru Empire has gained more than just the world government. Perhaps the other party has long been tired of this kind of life and wants to live more freely. So after having someone above it, his daily life has begun Gradually he became more indulgent.


    Even everything on the moon belongs to the Tru Empire. Not only does it include hundreds of lunar bases, but even the scientists on it, not a single one of them is missing, is now the private property of the Tru Empire.


    The existence of these people, from a certain perspective, is almostparable to the current army-like existence of the entire Toru Empire. The Devil Fruit, which has been elusive to others, seems to be easily captured in their hands.


    It can even be directly tested on arge scale. If it were not for the influence of the raw materials, it is estimated that it is not necessarily possible to create an army of Devil Fruits.


    Today''s world does not need too strong a military deterrent. The world government navy and the Trudeau Empire''s army have enough military deterrence. There is really no need to add any more burden to yourself.


    Judiciary Ind.


    Almost every five meters away, you can see a soldier standing there. In fact, this situation does not need to happen again at all. All the major forces and kings of countries in the world are now one by one. They are all on the invitation list, and no one will be stupid enough toe to the Judiciary Ind to cause trouble at this time.


    ������������


    "Hahahaha!! I didn''t expect that our ckbeard Pirates would not be invited to the meeting held by the Tru Empire this time? I really don''t know what those guys were thinking?"


    In the corner of the new world, ckbeard was sitting on a big rock on an ind, with a huge meal in front of him. The other crew members were all staying there, eating and drinking, and didn''t care about anything.


    But ckbeard held the newspaper in one hand and the wine in the other, and said with a smile.


    "That''s right, Captain, the Toru Empire looks down on us too much, right? Everyone dares not to invite us until the end. Even that clown Bucky is on the invitation list. I really don''t know that Emperor Toru What is this guy thinking about every day? We, the ckbeard Pirates, are the Four Emperors of the sea, so we are really losing face!"


    As soon as ckbeard finished speaking, the sick guy sitting next to him opened his mouth to speak.


    "Since we are dissatisfied, why don''t we go over and make a fuss? At least it will prove that we have this ability!"


    "I agree with this suggestion. If possible, it would be nice to make a scene in the past. It makes us, the ckbeard Pirates, seem to be ignored by others!"


    ��


    The entire ckbeard Pirate Ship began to speak one after another. Instead of staying on this ind and being bored, it would be better to find something more exciting to do.


    For people like them, both the World Government and the Tohru Empire are just like that now.


    Maybe they didn''t have much idea about the strong ones, and considering the strength in front of them, they thought it was quite good, especially after ckbeard got the Shock Fruit, almost everyone in the pirate group felt swollen.


    "Oh my! Sometimes I really don''t know what to say to you. In this situation, if it were anyone else, they would have disappeared long ago. I didn''t expect you to dare to get in!"


    Just as the crowd was filled withughter, an inconspicuous guy who had been lying there suddenly opened his mouth with a smile and said.


    The former Navy Admiral Aokiji lived up to his high expectations and joined the ckbeard Pirates. However, he never did anything except lie there and sleep every day, just walking around.


    ckbeard also understands that he has no ability to control these powerful people, and the entire pirate group is almost made up of pieces.


    Even though these people are very powerful, what does this mean? All of their hearts are ced on a better world in the future, and they have no sense of belonging to this pirate group at all.


    As soon as Qing Pheasant said what he said, a group of people immediately started making noise again.


    However, as the captain of the entire pirate group, ckbeard''s expression suddenly calmed down.


    Although his personal leadership skills are not very good, he was able to gather so many people in the end, which proved that his ability was not as bad as outsiders thought.


    "Qing Pheasant, what do you mean?" ckbeard asked.


    "It''s nothing special. Aren''t you curious why the World Government wants to transfer all its power to the Tru Empire? I used to be a naval admiral and I know a lot about the World Government. They are more powerful than you think. Too much."


    The corners of Qing Pheasant''s mouth raised slightly, and he said with some disdain.


    He didn''t care at all what these people did, but since he was already here, there were some things that he still needed to speak out, at least to prove that he was still here after all.


    Anyway, no one knows why he came to this pirate group. It is estimated that even ckbeard himself is still at a loss.

 Chapter 612 The day before handover

    <h4>Chapter 612 The day before handover</h4>


    Others had made appointments one by one with sincerity, but this man was different. He took the initiative toe to her without saying anything, and he was also a very familiar existence to each other.


    "Aoji, I think you are right about some things, but so far, ording to the newspaper reports, the Tru Empire has invited kings from various countries for this meeting, as well as the revolutionary army and Everyone, including the pirates and the Four Emperors, are within the invitation range in the end. Why are we, the ckbeard Pirates, not among the invitees?" ckbeard asked in confusion.


    "It''s not clear about this kind of thing. Maybe you can really go to Emperor Tru and ask!"


    The corners of Qingzhi''s mouth raised slightly, but he still said calmly.


    But ckbeard began to have different calctions in his heart at this moment. If he could not understand the contents of their handover meeting to the end in time, he would never feel relieved.


    But he only had this expression. The other people were all still there, eating, drinking, and chatting happily.


    No one in this group of people cared about this kind of thing. Anyway, the matter did not fall on them. No matter how they yed between the Tru Empire and the World Government, there was no gain or loss for them anyway.


    ckbeard looked at everything in front of him, and his heart began to feel inexplicably full of crisis. He didn''t know how to understand the present.


    ��������


    The day before the handover meeting.


    In the Tru Empire, hundreds of aircraft quickly began to move in the direction of their targets, starting from one ce to pick up those who were preparing to go to the meeting.


    In fact, the kings of most countries have a rather curious attitude towards this kind of thing. From the time he was born to the first time he epted such a thing, no one thought that the world government, which has always been aloof, would one day finally... Hand over all your rights to others.


    So for this incident, most of them were almost in a state of watching a show. There are more than 270 countries. Although more than half of the countries are all members of the World Government, it is among these countries that have shown this There will be more people with this attitude.


    But for those who did not join in, the kings seemed to be a little frightened.


    The country is extremely poor, but not all kings are so miserable. At least a small number of kings want to learn from Emperor Tru, who can eventually develop their small country into arge empire that is proud of others.


    Although everything is just getting started, and the pace is painfully slow, it can at least prove that there are huge differences between countries, and they actually all depend on high-level decision-makers.


    Most kings have been waiting for every aircraftnding early. Simrly, not every king is so wise. There are even several who are still immersed in the gentlend. Even after the aircraft has arrived, they are still a little confused. Reluctantly, I started to pack my clothes and prepare to leave.


    The country of peace.


    In this country that has attracted much attention, almost all the people from other countries who came to greet him were staff, but in this country, there was more than just one person who came to greet him.


    General Shunhe, Abona, Moshank, and Deco, four generals, followed by nearly 5,000 troops, Synesthesia came directly to the country of Wano.


    This is almost a very grand lineup, and the purpose is also very simple, that is, if this country does not cooperate, just change it to another leader. No matter who is blocking the road ahead, then they will not mind. Smooth directly.


    From the moment the aircraftnded, the originally quiet square tform, which was the abandoned ce of the Kozuki family a month ago, has now changed into something else.


    The square that used to be full of weeds now has apletely new look.


    But as soon as the aircraftnded, nearly 1,000 troops appeared in Zhouzhou instantly. Each of them had a knife at their waist and wore standard samurai armor. They seemed to be no longer in the same era as the troops from other countries.


    As the aircraft door opened, Junhe walked at the front, and several generals behind him followed silently, followed closely by the lieutenant generals, and then the troops began to enter the square one by one.


    "Sure enough, the air is different. It seems that those sleeping people have woken up now. I just don''t know what the strength of this group of people is?"


    Junhe looked at so many people gathered in front of him. Not only did he not feel any panic in his heart, but he said with a sneer on his lips.


    "What is this? Who are you?"


    Among the crowd of Wano troops, a man who looked about 50 years old slowly walked out. He walked slowly and step by step not far away from Shunhe and asked.


    He put his right hand on the handle of the knife and stared at everyone who came down with sharp eyes, as if the battle would start directly in the next second.


    "Is it possible that Wano Country really ns to resist?"


    Junhe said with a slight smile on his lips.


    "Are you from Kaido?"


    "Kaido? Isn''t this guy stupid in his sleep?"


    Deco asked speechlessly.


    "Do you want to take action directly?" Mo Sank also asked.


    After hearing this, Shunhe shook his head slightly, then looked at the guy standing in front of him and asked, "Kozuki Oden, you should ask your adults toe out. We don''t have that much time to wait here!"


    "Master Oden has something going on. How can anyone see it?"


    "It seems like there''s nothing to talk about?"


    Junhe said, his aura suddenly exploded.


    The power of the animal phantom beast, the devil fruit, radiated directly to the entire square in an instant.


    Powerful and oppressive, it directly and repressively covers the heads of everyone in the Wano army.


    "stop!"


    At the moment when the war was about to begin, a voice shouted loudly.


    Kozuki Oden stood directly on the top step with his son, shouting down with a serious face.


    Frowning, he tried hard to suppress the anger in his heart.


    What he can imagine now is that the other party really came with the idea of ??destroying the country. If he cannot participate in this meeting as the other party said this time, he can believe that the country of Wano may really be reduced to A ce buried by a war.


    "I went over. I just made some preparations. They don''t know what''s going on!"


    Kozuki Oden slowly walked down the steps with his son Momonosuke, and said as he walked.

 Chapter 613 Kozuki Oden

    <h4>Chapter 613 Kozuki Oden</h4>


    The appearance of Kozuki Oden gradually rxed the already tense atmosphere.


    Moshank stared at the strange man in front of him with a disdainful smile on his face.


    But at least because of the appearance of this person, Junhe directly put away the demonic aura he released.


    "Lord Kozuki, it''s rare for you toe out. If that''s the case, it''s better for us to set off quickly."


    Junhe looked at each other and said with a smile.


    "No problem, but please wait a moment. I''ll go say a few words and we''ll start setting off!"


    Kozuki Oden said seriously.


    The people in the Tru Empire did not express any dissatisfaction, and a simple smile could be regarded as recognition.


    Oden led his son to the side, and Kozuki Momonosuke followed him forward with doubts.


    When they were almost a hundred meters away, Kozuki Oden took a deep breath, and then let go of Kozuki Momonosuke''s right hand.


    "Next, Wano Country will be left to you. No matter what situation you encounter in the future, you canmunicate with them more. The honor of the Kozuki family will also fall on your head. There are some things that you will always be responsible for. It has to be faced.��


    Kozuki Oden smiled and said gently.


    "Father, don''t worry, I will definitely protect this period of time!"


    "I''m not asking you to guard this period of time, but I will leave this matter to you from now on!"


    Kozuki Oden''s words made Momonosuke very confused, and he waspletely unable to understand what his father meant by these words.


    But after thinking for a while, Momonosuke still timidly asked, "Is father going to do something? Or is there a huge conspiracy in this meeting?"


    "There are many things that even my father doesn''t know, but this journey must always be forward, and everything must be done towards the worst n. A person who was already dead suddenly appears now, so for the world government As for the so-called Tru Empire, Wano Country will have a great impact and at the same time pose a great threat!"


    Kozuki Oden said with some mncholy.


    He really doesn''t know what will happen to him once he steps out of the country of Wano on this trip.


    However, at the beginning, as his wife who possesses the Time Devil Fruit, she had already told him the dangers of being reincarnated.


    That is, it can directly put everyone who knows about this matter into panic, and those involved in this matter will also be in a threat zone at all times.


    Combined with the current Tohru Empire''s attitude towards this matter, Kozuki Oden has been wondering whether it is the impact of his return?


    "Father, do you want your son to apany you this time?"


    "Don''t be stupid. The future of Wano is in your hands. Don''t let me down in the future!"


    Kozuki Oden said, a smile slowly appeared at the corner of his mouth, then turned around and started walking in the direction of Xingji.


    This time he went to attend the meeting and was not apanied by anyone. A senior person was directly escorted by arge force and slowly walked into the cabin of the aircraft.


    Jun and several generals were thest ones to enter. They had been observing the soldiers of Wano Country all the time. Even in their arrogance, they were also observing the entire Wano Country. Condition.


    When it was finally discovered that there was indeed no problem, the aircraft began to slowly close the valve until it started to take off.


    In just an instant, he disappeared in front of everyone. From the New World to Judiciary Ind, this distance would only take a few months by boat. Don''t even think about it.


    But now it only takes a few hours to directly reach the sky above Judiciary Ind. However, at this time, the entire sky above Judiciary Ind is already filled with leaders who have been picked up from every ce.


    The current state of Judiciary Ind has surprised people, but no one who knows this ce is not curious about this ce today.


    The powerful high technology allowed them to see flying saucers they had never seen before, at a speed that they could not imagine in their lives, and finally actually appeared in front of them.


    Thendings of flying saucers basically revolve around the periphery of Judiciary Ind. The ground there is marked with circles with crosses drawn in the middle. This is actually to prepare for thending of these aircraft.


    As theynded one by one, almost all the famous people in the pirate world appeared here, even the little-known guys all appeared here.


    The outermost area near the sea is a huge fan-shaped field. Just from its bottom is a road that extends straight to the conference center.


    There are decorated flowers, nts and trees on both sides, which gives people a rxed andfortable feeling.


    The first person to appear in the square was not the king of any country, but a friend from our new world. Katakuri, the current captain of the Big Mom Pirates, led the team, followed by several of his brothers and sisters, rxed Including Perros.


    This time, they didn''t look like pirates at all. Instead, they were dressed like gentlemen. It seemed that they were fully prepared for this meeting.


    Katakuri walked in the front. None of the brothers and sisters behind him opened their mouths to speak. They followed quietly and started walking towards the center.


    Following closely behind him is today''s navy team.


    Akainu, the current marshal of the Navy Headquarters, led the three navy generals and began to walk toward the center with domineering steps and a serious and cold expression.


    And they are only about ten meters away from Fang Fang''s team. Such a situation has probably never happened before, even in this world.


    Which time did their meeting not take ce in a fight? Not to mention that they appeared on the same road in such harmony and were so close to each other.


    Staying outside the fan-shaped square, both sides were almost crowded with reporters from various newspapers. They were either no longer holding cameras to record, or they were directly broadcasting live.


    Such a prosperous situation has caused people in many countries to put down almost all the work at hand and carefully observe what this meeting will bring them.


    Unlike the World Government Conference, at least many ces here are open to the public.


    I don��t mind any newspaper reporters filming here. Anyway, things havee to this point. No matter what happens next? Anyway, this grand event has already started to make the whole world into an uproar.

 Chapter 614 People gradually appear

    <h4>Chapter 614 People gradually appear</h4>


    Immediately afterwards, the kings of other forces followed closely behind.


    Each of them was dressed luxuriously, but not all of them looked like this.


    There was also a king who was dressed in rags. Looking at it suddenly, he thought that an unknown person had gotten in.


    In fact, he is just a king in the Beihai region, but years of war have long exhausted him. The people of the country can''t even eat, so where can they get the money to buy better clothes?


    However, the people in charge of the reception did not look down upon him because of the clothes he was wearing, and there was not even a trace of mocking expression on his face.


    This at least brought a lot offort to his rtively humble appearance.


    Anyone who represents each country will be apanied by one person, that is, the staff currently on the Judicial Ind.


    There were men and women in the middle, each holding a huge sign with the name of the country and the name of the current king on it.


    Although this move made many kings a little dissatisfied, and they even couldn''t figure out what they were doing? But not many people have objections.


    "I didn''t expect that I hadn''t seen this ce in just a few years? Now it''spletely different."


    Among the people who came down, a rough voice shouted directly.


    When this sound sounded, the kings who were closer to him were so frightened that their legs could no longer stand.


    The appearance of Yonko Kaido really made many people feel frightened. His height of seven to eight meters was in stark contrast to them.


    The bewildered look of each of them is perhaps the funniest aspect.


    "Mr. Kaido, I hope you won''t make too much noise when youe here. It will have a bad impact by then, and I''m afraid His Majesty the King will be angry!"


    The little girl who had been standing next to Kaido and was in charge of reception said speechlessly.


    "Why are you saying these things? I just came here to be curious, and I didn''t deliberately threaten them!"


    Kaido said with a smile.


    "Wow haha!!! I didn''t expect to meet a guy like you here. I really don''t understand why the boy from Emperor Tru called you over for a meeting?"


    As soon as Kaido finished speaking, a hugeughter sounded directly.


    "Hey, hey! If I remember correctly, you don''t seem to be on the list for this meeting, right?"


    Kaido''s expression was full of doubts, but he greeted the three people who arrived as if they were old friends.


    Sengoku Garp and Lieutenant General He walked straight towards Kaido.


    Sengoku stepped forward and said with an indifferent expression, "Well!! It''s true that we didn''t exist in the first ce, but those old men from the World Government still gave us a list, so we appear in front of you!"


    "Can this still happen?"


    The three cmities behind Kaido spoke softly.


    "Mr. Kaido, the Tru Empire and the World Government are the organizers. Each organizer has the right and quota to invite, so please don''t be too surprised!" said the little girl in charge of the reception.


    "Forget it, whoes to the meeting has nothing to do with me. I''m just here to join in the fun. After all, I have never participated in such a ceremonial meeting." Kaido also said indifferently.


    "If you don''t mind, then let''s go together. Don''t say you''re just here to join in the fun, we are the same, but we just want to see what this meeting is about!"


    Garp said with a grin.


    "Why are you leaving in such a hurry? If I remember correctly, there is another guy who ising too. Could it be that you don''t want to wait for your grandson?"


    Kaido asked, looking at Garp sideways.


    "Grandson? You said Luffy and the others areing too?" Garp asked curiously.


    "Ah? You mean that kid? He probably isn''t qualified toe here yet!" Kaido said with a sneer, then raised his steps and started to move forward.


    But as soon as the front foot left, an aircraftnded directly on the back foot.


    The person who came down this time was none other than Ace, one of the Whitebeard Pirates, and he was also the current helmsman of the Whitebeard Pirates.


    Phoenix Marco, in a sense, this guy has signed a contract of betrayal to the Tru Empire, but so far it has never been realized.


    Based on this situation, the ownership of the Whitebeard Pirates now falls on Ace.


    All the unpleasantness of the previous war had long since disappeared. Facing Sengoku and Lieutenant General He who were also standing here, the first thing Ace did when he came down was to jump directly in front of Garp.


    "Ace??"


    Even though everyone had already rushed in front of him, Garp still looked at the man in front of him in disbelief.


    "Smelly old man..."


    "Bang!!!!"


    Before Ace could say anything, Garp jumped up and punched the opponent on the head.


    "Smelly old man, what are you doing?"


    Ace covered his head and squatted on the ground, pointed at Garp and shouted.


    "Ah ha ha ha!!!! Sorry, sorry, mainly because I was so excited to see you and wanted to make sure you were the real person!"


    Garp said with an embarrassedugh.


    With this look on his face, even the two Warring States men standing next to him nced at him with speechless expressions.


    "Everyone, this is not a ce for small talk. Before I came here, I heard that a huge hotel has been built on Judiciary Ind, and it is free for those of us participating in the meeting. Why don''t we go there and have a meal together? , and then sit there and have a good chat."


    Phoenix Marco, with a smile on his face, slowly walked up to them and spoke in a gentle tone.


    "Long time no see, Marco. I haven''t heard from you for so long. I thought you had been killed by Wilbu a long time ago!" Garp said with an embarrassed smile.


    It''s just that the more embarrassed he is, the more confusing he is when he says it. Maybe it''s because he is too excited to see his grandson.


    "Okay, don''t say anything else. Just do as Marco said, go over and have a good meal, and we''ll talk about the rest then."


    Warring States also opened his mouth and said.


    Anyway, this scene is not like the words between pirates and navy, but more like themunication between elders and juniors.


    Indeed, even those watching from the outside are always extremely surprised. When did the rtionship between the navy and pirates be so harmonious?

 Chapter 615 Fei Duo’s arrangement

    <h4>Chapter 615 Fei Duo��s arrangement</h4>


    This is only the first day of the meeting, and everyone has already arrived at this ce in an orderly manner.


    Compared with Marie Joa, Judiciary Ind may be more rxed and more solemn. Holding a meeting in such a ce has essentially been discussed in advance.


    ording to preliminary statistics, the number of people participating in the meeting so far can reach at least thousands. Many countries did note alone. There were kings who were happy for this event, and there were also people who were happy for this meeting. Feel the presence of worry.


    Tru Empire.


    "I think everyone should be here already, right?"


    Changnuo sat on his king''s throne, looking at the watch in his hand with interest, then raised his head slightly, looked at Gogoya standing below and asked.


    "Yes, Your Majesty the King, all the people involved in the meeting arrived at Judiciary Ind an hour ago, and no force or country was left behind."


    Gogoya opened the information in his hand and said seriously.


    After hearing this, Chang Nuo was not as happy as he expected. Instead, he sighed a little, and his eyes lost any energy.


    Although everything had started to develop ording to n, it was only when he seeded that he realized that everything was so boring.


    Perhaps the burden that had been weighing on his shoulders suddenly fell, which made him feel no sense of aplishment at all.


    "It seems you are not as happy as you thought?"


    While Chang Nuo was still sitting there mncholy, Fei Duo suddenly appeared in front of him. Not to mention the etiquette, he sat directly suspended in the air, leaning there with his arms folded.


    "I''m going out first, Your Majesty the King!"


    Seeing a strangering, Gogoya was stunned for a moment, then opened his mouth and nodded and said to Chang Nuo.


    "Why are you here?" Chang Nuo asked.


    "I didn''t want to see your next achievements, but I didn''t expect to see you like this. It''s true that reaching this position is not as happy as you imagined, right? But I have been in such an environment for eight years. A hundred yearster, everything will be the same as what I said before. No matter what your original intention is, in the end, your thoughts and ideals will always change." Fei Duo showed an evil smile and stared at the sitting person intently. Changnuo said from the king''s throne.


    "Are you here to watch a joke? But what you saw was just one side!" Chang Nuo said with a smile on his lips as well.


    "Is the rice in the bowl cold? Only you know this kind of thing. You can only feel what it tastes after tasting it. In fact, I am also very curious, how do you want to manage and restrain it?" Those countries and pirates?


    When the meeting starts, I will sit by and watch. At least let me witness the methods of you, Emperor Tru! Fei Duo said.


    "Don''t worry about it, I will do what needs to be done, but I hope you can order your World Government personnel to hand over everything properly, at least after I am free, I can I want to apany you to deal with those extraterrestrial visitors, right?"


    Chang Nuo raised a slight smile on his lips, and looking at Fei Duo''s expression after hearing his words, he immediately felt like he had seeded.


    Fei Duo really didn''t expect that Chang Nuo could really understand his current thoughts. This had always been the case. The only person who could cause him a sense of crisis was the existence from his hometown.


    In the world of pirates, everything has stood at the top of everyone''s mind. Now it is worth considering and thinking about, but it is just this one thing.


    "Am I wrong? Everything built on the moon should be to deal with those extraterrestrial visitors, but you also know that the technology to deal with them may be just a fantasy, it is nothing more than a psychologicalfort, so when you see At that moment, I gradually began to have different ideas." Chang Nuo tapped his fingers on the chair below him, still looking at the other person with a slight smile on his lips.


    "You are right. I do have this idea, so I will hand over the World Government to you. But you don''t have to worry about anything. During the handover ceremony of the World Government, no one will have selfish motives. There are many of these people, and although they are very unbearable, they are not as bad as you imagine." Fei Duo said calmly and disdainfully.


    He made no secret of his purpose, and it had already been seen by others anyway. Since he was too obsessed with this kind of thing, he might as well just reveal it openly.


    Chang Nuo already understood everything when he saw everything on the moon, but he never knew who the objects ced on the moon were created to deal with. After Fei Duo told everythingter, everything was gradually adjusted. It started to be clearer.


    Although it is still impossible to prate the other party''s heart, sometimes more obvious things can be judged just by reasoning.


    "Isn''t that why you came here to talk about this matter?" Chang Nuo asked disdainfully.


    "Oh? That''s not true. It''s just that you made the little girl I went to see pregnant. You have someone responsible for some things, don''t you?"


    Fei Duo said with some gloating.


    "This is my own business, I don''t need you to worry about it."


    Chang Nuo took a deep breath, exhaled it slowly, and said with a helpless expression.


    He had actually considered this situation before, but it was still a little hard for him to ept that it happened so suddenly.


    However, as the emperor of a country, some things will not have any impact even if they are done.


    At least as far as things like this are concerned, that is indeed the case.


    "Next, you always need to give someone an exnation. In addition, you also need to remember that she is a Tianlong!"


    Fei Duo said meaningfully.


    The other party also understands the meaning of telling the truth. He just wants to use this reason and this opportunity to inform Changnuo that not everyone in Tianlong is so bad. If you can give a chance, give it a chance. Don''t be ruthless. Kill them all.


    Fei Duo''s way of praying is different. He uses such an understatement and can achieve maximum benefits. Fortunately, this guy has lived for hundreds of years, but it is really him who cane up with this way. Very talented.


    "Let''s wait until this meeting is over to discuss everything. After everything is done, I will put aside all the interests in front of me, find a ce to live there, and no longer ask about anything in this world!" Changnuo said leisurely.

 Chapter 616 Meeting Seats

    <h4>Chapter 616 Meeting Seats</h4>


    Fei Duo might believe what Chang Nuo said, but for the guy in front of him, he was certain that this would never happen.


    But he didn''t point it out. Anyway, the two people essentially have a cooperative rtionship. They hand over the world government to the Tru Empire, and Changnuo will help him deal with the uing crisis. It''s enough for them to have a tacit understanding between each other. There is no need to Point out anything.


    "I don''t want to say more about the rest, but the people on Mariejoia today should be let go as much as possible. After all, they are all the descendants of my former subordinates. I can only say this, you can do the other things. It��s decided.��


    Fei Duo slowlynded on the ground and said meaningfully.


    Indeed, now that the world government is handed over to the Toru Empire, the most dangerous group should be the Tianlong people. It cannot be ruled out that the Toru Empire may eventually massacre all the Tianlong people in order to stabilize the emotions of various countries. Once By that time, it is estimated that no one can stop it.


    Although Fei Duo had already arranged these countermeasures in advance, he always felt that Emperor Tru did not seem like the kind of person who could be bound by the love between his children.


    "It''s not difficult to let them go. Even as long as you are willing to open your mouth, it is not a problem to solve. However, at least one or two of them need to be taken out, and finally used to calm the anger of the whole world against the Tianlong people. I think you should have nothing to do with this. Give me your opinion.��


    Changnuo thought for a moment and asked.


    "That''s fine. Let alone two, so what if there are 20 of them? They should be punished for what they have done over the years. If I can get your words, at least I feel a lot more relieved!" Fei! Say more.


    "This is something you asked me for extra. I never like it..."


    "You don''t need to say more. I understand your thoughts. What do you need me to help you with?"


    Before Chang Nuo finished speaking, Fei Duo spoke directly.


    This situation really made Chang Nuo very embarrassed, but he still maintained an indifferent look and said, "Now I want to end this era and let everything return to the right track. Then, in my opinion, there will be many unsatisfactory things." Anyone who is willing to participate in this world peace should be included in the erasure list!"


    Chang Nuo said, and threw something directly to Fei Duo. This thing had been ced in his space before, and now he just threw the pot directly to Fei Duo.


    Fei Duo''s face suddenly turned dark when he looked at the content above. These things were not the same at all, they were exactly the same book.


    "You won''t let me help you deal with so many guys by yourself, right? With the strength of your Toru Empire, is it possible that you can''t deal with such little shrimps?"


    Fei Duo asked speechlessly.


    "The solution can be solved. The key is that after it is solved, where do you want me to put the face of the Tru Empire? The World Government has just turned around and started to weaken the whole world. This situation is not very good, isn''t it?"


    Changnuo asked with a smile on his lips.


    The main reason is that the list given here this time does not only include pirates, but even the kings of some countries are in the middle range.


    In this situation, if the Toru Empire started to participate in the World Government as soon as it took over, although it would not have a big impact, it would still make their reputation slightly worse.


    Anyway, there is freebor now, why not use it?


    the next day.


    The World Government Handover Conference was officiallyunched. The entire conference hall was a fan-shaped structure, and the entire conference venue could amodate at least about 5,000 people.


    The seats are arranged in rows and begin to radiate towards the periphery. In every proper position, there are seats for four people. No matter how many peoplee to participate in the meeting, in the end, each force will have thergest number of representatives. , that��s all.


    The rostrum at the front has a total of 15 seats side by side, and all 15 seats are shared between the True Empire and the World Government.


    As people began to gradually enter the venue,bels belonging to their own forces were ced on every seat, and their positions had been nned in advance.


    However, there is also an area that happens to be on the far right. The people who ced the signs in those areas all belong to pirates or others.


    Each team has a person who is responsible for receiving them and guiding them to their seats. In a short time, the entire conference hall has begun to fill up. This is probably the first time in this world that such a grand event has been convened.


    Pirates, navy, world government, kings of various countries, and even the revolutionary army are also within this scope.


    At such a scene, the reporters who were in front of and behind the scenes had already softened their grip.


    What everyone is looking forward to now is what exactly is the Toru Empire going to do?


    Where is the core content of this meeting concentrated? What else do they want to do?


    All the questions are not only surrounding the heads of reporters, but actually the same questions are surrounding the heads of everyone sitting here.


    The entire conference venue was not as quiet as expected. At least many kings were talking andughing here, and the scene was also very noisy.


    What probably surprised everyone was the group of beings sitting on the far right. Whether they were pirates or revolutionary soldiers, they all kept serious expressions on their faces and sat there meticulously without saying a word to each other.


    Sitting at the front, exactly four rows side by side, sat in order the representatives of the Revolutionary Army, Long and Sabo personally participated, and next to them were the current Big Mom Pirates, Katakuri and Peros. The three Smoothie brothers and sisters, next to them were the red-haired pirates, led by captain Shanks, and vice-captain Beckman. Finally, sitting in the back was Kaido and his three gues.


    Behind them is Bucky, a red-nosed man wearing a white robe who looks quite funny, but with his current status, he can indeed sit in this position.


    Although he still carries the name of a pirate, Bucky is no longer what he used to be.


    He controls nearly 30,000 troops and is engaged in the transportation industry on the sea. He is one of the few entrepreneurs who has climbed up from below.


    The others are either the boss of the World Economic News or other big forces involved in various industries.


    They are undoubtedly not the giants on one side, but now they have no choice but to directly participate in this meeting. This kind of meeting may not have much impact on other kings, but for them, it feels more like It is a kind of Hongmen Banquet.

 Chapter 617 The Sensational Appearance of Pirates

    <h4>Chapter 617 The Sensational Appearance of Pirates</h4>


    The entire fan-shaped meeting was divided into seven columns. Among them, the World Government and the Tru Empire each upied one column, the pirates had one column, and the navy had one column. The rest were almost all from various countries. Sitting at the end, even the current giants There are already huge figures sitting there in the kingdom.


    Today''s meeting covers almost all aspects, and the people present are also of all kinds, and almost all of them are gathered together.


    Moreover, there were no restrictions on the content of this meeting. The reporters in the outer circle were already crowded there, and all kinds of cameras, live broadcast tools, and even the aisles were already upied.


    "Boom!!!"


    On the far left side of the rostrum, Gogoya stood there, holding a small hammer in his hand and struck the sound directly. The small copper bell hanging above, which was not a loud sound, directly surrounded the entire conference venue.


    The entire venue fell silent instantly, and everyone looked expectantly in the direction of the podium.


    Immediately afterwards, several people slowly walked out from behind. Each of them was wearing a straight suit and looked quite majestic and domineering.


    With the appearance of the Five Old Stars, the scene fell silent again. There were many people who knew them, especially the kings of the countries that joined the World Government. Most of them had seen these people before.


    Immediately behind him, World Government Navy Marshal Akainu was also wearing a red suit and a white shirt today, but he did not wear a tie.


    Several people entered the venue from the right side of the rostrum, followed by people who entered the venue from the left side of the rostrum.


    In the Trud Empire, the Minister of the Council of Ministers, the Minister of Commerce, the Minister of National Security, and the currentmander of the Navy, General Yixiao, also joined forces and began to walk into the venue. Everyone was wearing their own work clothes. What is undeniable is that this thing looks more domineeringpared to a suit.


    People from both the World Government and the Tru Empire came out at the same time and sat at the seats on the outside. There were five people on each side. As for the seven seats left in the middle, it was estimated that there were people waiting outside. More nervous than those sitting below watching.


    Everyone can guess that Emperor Tru will definitely upy a seat. As for who will sit in the other seats? In an instant, many people spected and thought.


    "Why are there still seven positions? I can''t get these seven people together no matter how hard I try."


    Sitting on the pirate side, Ace, the representative figure, looked at the position in the direction of the podium with a puzzled look on his face and said.


    "It seems that there are many people here that we can''t think of. But even if Emperor Tru has a seat, and the other six are enough to participate, who will be equal?" Marco couldn''t help but said curiously.


    "What exactly does this mean?"


    Sitting in the middle naval seat, Garp also began to frown, and like everyone else, he was a little confused.


    Even the five old stars, who had always been aloof, could only sit on the far right side of the rostrum in the end. Several well-known figures from the Tru Empire actually sat on the far left, with seven seats in the middle, which gave them something to think about. It''s also normal.


    "It seems that a great person will definitely appear today, but I don''t know who this so-called great person is?" Warring States also said in surprise.


    "What kind of characters are there that we can''t imagine? It seems that the biggest highlight of this meeting should be here, right?"


    Lieutenant General He opened his mouth and said seriously.


    The three people stared closely at each other''s positions on the rostrum, just wanting to see who thest few people who appeared would be? These beings who can already crush the world in terms of power can only sit aside as foils in the end. So as for the few sitting in the middle, who will appear in the end? This is the ce that everyone is nervously looking forward to.


    The cameras of the reporters on the periphery were all focused on the position of the rostrum. Even the live broadcast tforms were all aimed at those positions. The huge position in the middle was like a suspended throne. Nowadays, To everyone, this definitely represents great power and strength.


    "Boom!!"


    Gogoya, who was standing on the far left, rang the bronze bell in his hand again, looked at the people in the audience, and shouted loudly into the microphone in his hand, "In the next time, there will be There are a few people who were unexpected to us, so we hope that everyone can sit in their seats and not make any noise."


    "Who is it?"


    Kaido on the far right could no longer sit still. He seemed to feel a familiar aura, so he couldn''t help but stand up.


    The people behind him also stood up when they saw this. Amidst everyone''s puzzled expressions, a man who looked slightly thin and without much energy came out. His hair was all white and he was wearing He wore a ck cloak, but with every step he took, the aura on his body became more and more obvious.


    "Ship...Ship...Captain!!!"


    Kaido stood in his position, staring in disbelief at the man who was gradually approaching not far away, his eyes full of horror and he shouted loudly.


    He was not the only one who was surprised. Starting from the Garp Warring States Period, all those who knew about the existence of the old era on the Navy side stood up in fear.


    Only those in the new era who didn''t know the previous situation looked at the others with curiosity.


    "Who is this?"


    Katakuri could feel the terrifying aura emanating from the other party''s body, and he stood up at the same time, but cold sweat began to break out on his head.


    The whole person was already trembling a little when he spoke. Even if he didn''t know the other person, the moment he appeared, it was like biological suppression, making people feel inexplicably trembling.


    When this person appeared, even Shanks, who had never spoken, began to frown, staring at the other person''s every move with a serious look.


    "Is he still alive?"


    Warring States'' voice was already hoarse, and it waspletely unbelievable that this happened.


    The five old stars also frowned one by one. If they had not known about this kind of thing in advance, even they would probably be surprised this time.


    As the man slowly sat down, his position was only the first seat next to the Tru Empire personnel.


    The appearance of the first person has caused such a big sensation, and the others are even more curious about who will be here now?

 Chapter 618 Pirate Representative Rocks

    <h4>Chapter 618 Pirate Representative Rocks</h4>


    Then, a person began to slowly walk out in the direction of the World Government. However,pared to the former, the appearance of this person made many people feel much more rxed.


    At least many people know that Kong, the currentmander-in-chief of the three armies of the world government, is not as good as the Five Old Stars in terms of status, but hismand ability and military control ability are definitely above the Five Old Stars.


    So today, he represents the world government''s military side and directly bes thest person to appear.


    Next, two people appeared directly from the Tru Empire. One was a stranger to many people. Even the people sitting on the Tru Empire''s side were not sure who the other person was.


    This man looked very strong, wearing a well-fitting blue suit with a ck shirt. Amid everyone''s doubts, he slowly sat on the side of the Tru Empire.


    As for the other one, more people know about it. The mermaid princess of Mermaid Ind slowly floated there, started to move towards this side, and finally sat down on the rostrum.


    Now, there are only three empty seats on the rostrum, and thest person to appear is even more exciting.


    As expected, Emperor Tru slowly walked out from his own direction, but the difference this time was that he was wearing a light yellow coat with nine magatama stars hanging on it.


    The eyes also began to glow slightly, and the samsara eyes appeared on the face, giving people a unique and extraordinary temperament.


    As for the World Government, Feodor has six pairs of white wings on his back and eagle-like eyes. He also appears quite domineering and gentlemanly.


    But when the two people appeared, those sitting on the podium all stood up one by one and bowed politely.


    But neither of them chose to sit on the throne in the center. Instead, they sat directly on the side of the world government side of the throne.


    As for the middle position, it is essentially empty. At least in this meeting, both of them expressed an attitude that no one wants to rule the world, they just want to make the world better.


    Now that everyone was in ce, Gogoya, as the king''s secretary, walked out elegantly. He held a microphone in his hand and stood on the left side of the rostrum. After looking at everyone, he knocked on the suspended microphone again. The little brass bell there.


    "First of all, on behalf of the Tru Empire and the World Government, I would like to thank you all foring to participate in this meeting. The theme of this meeting is divided into seven aspects, and I will introduce them to you one by one next.


    Moreover, the content of this meeting was divided into seven days. The people in the meeting, whether they were kings of various countries, leaders of pirates, the revolutionary army, or even people under themand of the World Government and the Toru Empire, During the meeting, no one is allowed to argue or leave the meeting without any reason.


    Next, I would like to introduce to you the participants on the rostrum. They are Emperor Toru, Genji Nagano, who is now the king of the Toru Empire and is also the leader of this meeting. "


    Gogoya said, Changnuo sat directly where he was and stretched out his hand to signal.


    The people below all politely apuded.


    Even the pirates didn''t fall behind. At least they were very polite this time.


    After waiting for the apuse to stop, Gogoya continued to smile and introduced, "Lord Imafuda, the actual controller of the World Government, has always been the shadow behind the World Government, and is also the founder of the previous world order. Wee! "


    "Crack!!!"


    But this time, everyone in the audience was apuding and wondering. Even the people from the World Government and the Realm Government Navy had expressions of disbelief on their faces.


    At least this is the first time they have heard of such a thing since they have joined the World Government or the Navy for so many years.


    However, since the other party is already sitting in this position, and the five old stars next to him do not have any objections, it can only mean that what they say is true.


    Fei Duo, unlike Chang Nuo, stood up with a smile and saluted them elegantly, waving with a smile on his lips.


    "This can''t be true, can it?"


    A look of disbelief appeared on the face of Kaido, a tall and powerful guy. He had never heard of such a thing before?


    "Captain, judging from your appearance, this person must be real?" Beckman, the vice-captain of the Red-haired Pirates, asked.


    "That''s right, Lord Im behind the World Government!" Shanks frowned, he didn''t even know how to say such a thing.


    Although he has known about this kind of thing for a long time, he has never seen the true face of this so-called Lord Im.


    When the other party first appeared, Shanks even thought about this possibility, but in the end the other party''s strength made him choose not to believe it. He never thought that the other party actually came.


    "Next, let us get to know Shirahoshi, the mermaid princess from Mermaid Ind. She is also the only being in this world who can control the Neptune species. She also represents sea creatures and is here to participate in this meeting!"


    "Nani!!!"


    After Gogoya finished speaking, what greeted him was no longer apuse from everyone, but more and more surprise.


    When this little girl first came on stage, others had already begun to wonder why the princess of Mermaid Ind actually appeared on the podium?


    But if this situation is true, how powerful would it be for a being that can control Neptune?


    Especially for pirates, one can clearly see the twitching of the corners of their mouths. After all, these guys are the ones who basically deal with the sea every day.


    Bai Xing was a little embarrassed when he saw no movement from the people below. Just when he was about to stand up and say hello, Chang Nuo smiled slightly and said, "Sit down!"


    In the end, she could only continue to sit down helplessly, quietly looking at the many people below.


    "As for the World Government, Marshal Kong, Commander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces, must be familiar to many people, right? He has absolute power to control the military, and at the same time, it can be regarded as the end of an era!"


    As Gogoya introduced, Cyborg Kong stood up and stared down with a domineering expression.


    "The president of the Labor Union of the Tru Empire represents the people''s livelihood and public opinion. He will also speak on behalf of the people at the bottom. At the same time, he will also serve as the representative of people''s livelihood in the entire world in the future. The details can be reflected in subsequent meetings. "


    After saying that, Gogoya paused, looked around and then continued, "The next person, I''m afraid many people may be unfamiliar with, and that is the representative of pirates, the great pirate Rocks of the old era!"


    "captain!!!!"


    As soon as Gogoya finished speaking, Kaido couldn''t help but stood up and shouted loudly towards the stage.


    "Shut up!"


    Feido looked at Kaido''s behavior boredly, and opened his mouth slightly to speak, but an invisible force instantly pressed on Kaido.

 Chapter 619 World Alliance

    <h4>Chapter 619 World Alliance</h4>


    But this method does not mean any attack, it is just to remind the other party on such asions.


    "Rocks!!!"


    Katakuri also had difficulty opening his mouth to say this, and the shock in his eyes was already obvious.


    "Do you know the other person?" Perros asked.


    "Mom used to be a captain. I didn''t expect that he was not dead yet. I just heard that his strength was an extremely terrifying existence!"


    Katakuri said.


    "What is this meeting about now? Even the pirate representatives can sit on it. I really don''t know what the purpose of this meeting is?"


    A voice came directly from the auditorium below, and it came from the king of another country.


    The guy who spoke leaned back on his chair leisurely and looked in the direction of the podium with a look of disdain.


    Maybe he is used to being arrogant and domineering, but he didn''t expect to dare to say such words in this ce.


    "Please don''t open your mouth to speak. If you feel that your position is ufortable, maybe we can ask you to find a morefortable ce to lie down!"


    Gogoya looked directly at the other party and said with a cold voice.


    "Father, what does she mean?"


    Vivi, the princess of basta, directly asked Kobra next to her in a low voice.


    "Don''t talk. The other party''s intention is very obvious. If someone disrupts this meeting, the other party may really not mind killing people!" Kobra said with a frown.


    "Is it possible that they really dare to kill the kings of other countries? Is this being broadcast live all over the world?" Weiwei said again.


    "Stop talking. The main purpose of this meeting is to show them. It must be for this reason. Even if they kill the kings, there probably won''t be any objections from the people!"


    Cobra stuck to the point and spoke with a helpless expression.


    Among the many kings present, he was not the only one who understood this. Many people had grown up in power, and there was definitely more than one king who could understand this meeting.


    So many kings sat upright there, quietly watching the scene in front of them. They directly ignored the image of the dude in their own kingdom, and instead acted like a student in ss.


    "The ones on the far left are the military and political ministers of the Tru Empire, and the ones on the right are the military and political ministers of the current world government."


    Gogoya kept it simple, as he didn''t even say their names, but even if he did, what could he do, not many people knew them anyway.


    I already know everyone I should know, and it��s useless to name those I shouldn��t know.


    In any case, this meeting has caused an uproar. Whether it is those present or those watching the live broadcast outside the venue, even the reporters who came to participate in this meeting actually had a slightly trembling hand when picking up the camera.


    I always feel that my angle is not very good, but I don''t dare to move my body at all.


    Other positions have long been upied by other reporters, and they are also subject to great restrictions here. They can only maintain their excitement, continue to stay in their original positions, and strive to find a better one. Filming or live streaming effects.


    After the former''s words fell, nearly hundreds of service staff appeared in the entire conference venue. Each of them wore gloves and held a thick pile of materials in their hands, each of which was wrapped in a heavy clip.


    They were ced at the table one by one from the front position directly in front of their principal.


    As soon as it was ced at the front, someone was already curious and opened it directly. The content above was very simple, which was the main process of this meeting. As for the handover content of the world government, it must be ced first.


    As for the next step is to carry out the main handover process, now the pirates, navy, revolutionary army, world government and Lu Empire, all the major forces in the world have gathered together, the color rendering of this meeting itself has reached supreme.


    Those who stayed outside to watch the live meeting, in fact most of the people clenched their fists nervously.


    I just want to know for the first time what impact this handover meeting will have on me?


    In fact, they don''t know, and they don''t dare to guess about these people who have always been at the top of the world. Even if pirates can participate in such a meeting, they don''t feel ufortable in their hearts.


    I just want to know how the meeting will develop in the end?


    Even if they watch the content of this meeting through live broadcast, most people seem to be immersed in it. After all, a simple sentence in such a meeting can change the fate of many people, and this live broadcast tform has great poprity around the world. Many ces have it.


    Although it is not possible for everyone in the world to see it, in theing time, most people in the world should be able to understand the full minutes of this meeting.


    During the eight days, this meeting was mainly focused on, and the level of attention from the outside world had already reached an unprecedented level.


    The handover between the World Government and the Tru Empire was very simple, and there were no special circumstances at all.


    As long as Feiduo stays here, he alone can represent the world government, and his attitude can determine everything.


    As a person of the era, Rocks has long lost his fame as before, but in the world of pirates, if you have never heard of this person''s name, you are almost not worthy of being regarded as a real pirate.


    Therefore, his appearance directly shocked the entire pirate world. Of course, the biggest role of his appearance was almost to stabilize the current chaotic situation of pirates.


    The folder that was handed to everyone before contained a lot of meeting content in addition to the meeting content. These things were ced directly in front of everyone, even before the handover meeting between the two sides started. The direction of what they are about to sign has been decided.


    Some people were happy and some were worried about the content of this meeting. The most important thing was that there was only one option before them all, which was to put down all the power in their hands.


    At the end of the meeting, the most important thing was finally achieved, which was to abolish the current world government and change it into a world alliance, which included pirates, navy and revolutionary army, as well as kings of various countries.


    The World Alliance, this kind of thing ispletely different from the previous world government. This time, in addition to the founder being in power, the robots are also in power. They have fixed thinking, and no matter how many years, it will not happen at all. Change.

 Chapter 620 Implementation

    <h4>Chapter 620 Implementation</h4>


    This is also something that surprises everyone. Mechanical troops will enter every country, but they have amon name, which is the World Alliance Peacekeeping Force.


    There will be no human beings among such troops, so they can maintain absolute justice and will not add any exaggeration to this justice.


    In every country, such troops can number at least several thousand people. They are centrally integrated and controlled, and there is no need to worry about anyone''s possible rewriting.


    This is also a n that Chang Nuo has worked hard toe up with. On the one hand, it directly restricts the substantive rights of the king of each country, which can greatly improve the people''s livelihood and environment.


    Not only can there be no more wars between each country, but it can also monitor the living conditions of the people.


    The role of the trade unions was reflected at this time. They represented themon people themselves. ording to the current development volume of the Tru Empire, they are fully capable of using economic power to drive the development of the entire world after bing the master of the World Alliance.


    In the meeting, the reason why the kings of those countries did not want to agree to such a request was because their status as kings had almost all been ignored, and they had no effect except for disy.


    These people cannot control the troops or abuse the people. In addition to bing symbols, their power in many aspects is not even as good as that of the country''s ministers.


    But those who agreed to such conditions were surprisingly the Revolutionary Army. They were the first to unconditionally agree to such an arrangement. Although there was a feeling of a knife on their necks, they had to ept even if they agreed, and they needed to ept even if they disagreed. Revolutionary The leader of the army, Long, at least agreed with this arrangement from the bottom of his heart.


    If he wants to make the world a better ce, even if he has been thinking about it for decades, he still doesn''t know how to solve such a problem. After all, this is essentially a huge project.


    Not to mention their revolutionary army, even if the Tru Empire now directly takes over the size of the entire world, it still feels very strenuous.


    The world government is taking over, and the positions of those people have almost remained unchanged. Although the Five Old Stars have always been at the top, it is undeniable that they do have a certain degree of strength and ability.


    Admiral Akainu of the Navy Headquarters is still their Admiral, and the internal rtionship has hardly changed.


    The difference is that in the original system, a staff position was added to each level. The purpose was to restrict and prevent decisive errors from urring.


    For this reason, Akainu essentially has no objection to this kind of thing. He understands that his character is too excited and sometimes even does things that are too extreme. This arrangement may be able to better maintain the development of the Navy.


    During the eight-day meeting, in addition to the handover ceremony of the world government on the first day, the rest of the day was almost spent discussing the future direction of the world.


    The next day, we began to discuss the world government and the personnel arrangements of the Tru Empire. Today, the Tru Empire is still located in the South China Sea, which is not very convenient for controlling the entire world. Judicial Ind can perfectly solve this series of problems.


    Space portals can now be established in every country and every corner of the world.


    Originally, the army of the Tru Empire still maintained a naval structure, but it was called the Peace Army. General Yixiao became themander of this army. Their main task was to drive steel battleships and wander around any corner of the world. Used to deter or deter possible criminals.


    On the third day, when nning the current pattern of pirates, red-nosed Bucky was among the first batch of beings who could directly break away from this identity. Not only did he not have any wanted bounties, but he also established his ownpany as soon as possible.


    A shippingpany that directly connects all sea voyages, so for Bucky, who only pursues money, the three people simply raised their hands in approval.


    As for the rest, Kaido is still back to his old business, developing the sea floor stone industry. The Big Mom Pirates directly started their pastry and food business. Red-haired Shanks has no business on his side. mind, and finally chose to continue wandering on the sea as an adventurer.


    As for the Revolutionary Army, their way of doing things is simple and crude. They have almost directly merged all their forces into the World Alliance, and are willing to be supervisors between various countries and supervise all actions.


    As for the kings of those countries who were in the audience, none of them had any right to speak at all. In the end, all they could do was sign the consent form in their hands.


    If everyone agrees directly, it is definitely impossible and unrealistic. Most kings do not agree with this situation, but the final oue is just a matter of a casual look from Chang Nuo sitting on the rostrum.


    When the meeting ended, the whole world was almost plunged into an unprecedentedmotion.


    The World Economic Report newspaper can be posted almost every half hour. The overwhelming newspapers have almostpletely different content every moment. Even just reading with the newspaper can make people feel excited.


    Countless people who are in suffering seem to havepletely seen the light at this moment. At least what they think is the endless deprivation of those in power is finally beginning to disappear.


    However, people living in various parts of the world who are engaged in farming or whose annual ie is within a certain range do not need to pay any taxes. As long as they exceed this level, a certain proportion will be paid to them. national government.


    This is what excites all the people, and it will only be supervised by the union. Even if the world is big enough, they also have enough people at the same time.


    It was not until the end of the meeting that someone began to slowly raise the issue of how to deal with the Celestial Dragons. In the end, although it was just an understatement, dozens of these moths were still selected, and Fei Duo had no objections. , these people, without exception, are all victims of this political struggle.


    Although the entire meeting onlysted eight days, it is initially estimated that the contents of this meeting will be implemented at least in about 20 years.


    This is also their optimistic side. Just the problems left by the pirates are enough for them to deal with for a long time.

 Chapter 621 The goal of the protagonist group

    <h4>Chapter 621 The goal of the protagonist group</h4>


    Many people are not as anxious about this as they imagined, but even their objections have no effect.


    Today''s Toru Empire not only controls the world government, but is also a powerful force in itself. Coupled with the coboration of the pirates, it has be a huge group force that cannot resist at all.


    Most of the pirates living in this world were forced to go this way because of the pressure of life.


    As soon as this meeting ended, it was directly announced that the bounties on most of the pirates were cancelled, and as long as they were willing to return to normal life, everything would be forgotten.


    In an instant, countless pirates began to swarm in, each one willing to return to a normal life without being hunted by bounties. Most of the pirates even used their own pirate ships to start other businesses.


    They may have no other abilities, more than just the experience of sailing on the sea.


    After the meeting ended, only half a monthter, the sea suddenly opened up, showing that the sea was calm, and the number of merchant ships sailing on the sea began to increase one by one.


    Although many merchant ships are refurbished from previous pirate ships, at least it can prove that they are not inherently bad.


    As for ckbeard, who became the Four Emperors, this guy''s fate may not be as good as imagined. The people under him are almost the most evil people in the world. They kill people without blinking an eye. There is no hope that they can Change from the original character.


    So the only thing they can do now is to find another ce and lie there properly.


    Fei Duo took over this task before, but in terms of his status, he didn''t want to do it personally, so it was directly up to the entire t department to do this kind of thing.


    Number 1 was originally abative person, so he was naturally willing to ept such a task.


    But ckbeard''s strength is not weak in nature, coupled with the power of the Shock Fruit, and he also has a group of subordinates who are not weak in strength. If these people unite, there is nothing wrong with him bing the Four Emperors.


    The key problem is that they are not very united. The reason why they are gathered together now is that they almost all have their own ideas. Now being together can ensure their own safety, which is their main goal and purpose.


    After the meeting, they were not unclear about their situation. Nowadays, the entire pirates and pirates in the world have begun to gradually give up the days of burning, killing and looting in their hands, and more of them have begun to return to normal life. , there is only a small amount of existence, and they are still living their own way of life before.


    However, all this does not have any end time. At least now, between the World Government Navy and the Tru Empire Navy, the two have begun to form alternating camps, and one has begun to move from the front to the end of the Grand Line, and the other has begun to move from the end to the front. The purpose of setting off is very clear, that is, to directly eliminate all the pirates belonging to the first half of the Grand Route at once.


    The big pirates who stay in the new world are all very clear, and I''m afraid it won''t be too long before their turnes.


    Now in the new world, the Yonko Group, Red-haired Shanks, took the lead to set an example and began to clean up the pirates in the new world who had lists in their hands. The Yonko Kaido also began to respond to this call.


    Even the Big Mom Pirates, who have always been on Cake Ind and have been unwilling to have any disputes, are now willing to clean up outsiders in their own territory.


    As for our protagonist group, the Straw Hats, they also arrived where they were as expected.


    After such a long time, they finally saw the secret treasure of One Piece that they had dreamed of.


    As for Luffy, he didn''t have much expectation to see any gold and silver treasures here, so even if a bare scene appeared in front of him, he didn''t show any disappointment.


    Nami looked even more disappointed.


    He sat feebly on a stone, looking with tears in his eyes as he looked at the four squares in the middle, which had many words written on them.


    "Why is this happening? Doesn''t it mean that OnePiece will have a lot of money? Why is it like this in the end?" Nami said weakly and frustrated.


    However, she was the only one among these people, and the others gathered around the square pir with serious faces.


    Even Robin waspletely surprised when he saw these things in front of him.


    All along, their O''Hara schrs all died while studying this thing. They didn''t expect that the final answer would be revealed here.


    This was something that Robin had never thought about, but everything in front of him had indeed been written down.


    "Robin, what exactly does this say?"


    Luffy asked seriously.


    "A nk 100 years of history, and everything that happened during these 100 years!"


    Robin tried his best to stay calm and said in a calm tone.


    "I didn''t expect that One Piece''s treasure would look like this? But it makes people wonder, why would this thing appear in Rafdru?" Jinbei, as the helmsman, asked with the same puzzled expression.


    "It seems that knowing this is of no use now, so what if we know the content above? Is it possible that we can do something else?


    Ah! Everyone, now I finally know why the previous Pirate King Roger kept this secret at the cost of his own life? That''s because no one can break the rules above. "


    Robin said with a wry smile.


    "What exactly is it?"


    Zoro also asked seriously.


    "Since you want to know, what can I do if I tell you? It records that there is actually someone behind the current world government, a person who does not belong to this world at all, but he rules and dominates the entire world, and the ancient weapon Pluto and the King of Heaven werepletely created by each other!"


    Robin said.


    "There are actually people behind the World Government? It seems that is indeed the case." Jinbei seemed to have known about this kind of thing for a long time, and did not show any shock.


    Luffy and the others kept their expressions down, but at the same time they didn''t know what this could mean.


    For these guys who always just want to sail on the sea and have adventures, they don''t worry about what kind of existence is behind the world government, so they seem a little confused and at a loss for such a topic that they have no concept of.

 Chapter 622 Final Chapter

    <h4>Chapter 622 Final Chapter</h4>


    For them, they have been staying here and have not learned about the situation outside. Now it is even less possible to know what happened to the Tru Empire, and they do not know that the World Government has quietly changed its owner.


    But for them, their adventure hase to an end here.


    It is estimated that when they return to the new world again, they will be left with endless surprises. The sudden change in the world will definitely refresh their three views again.


    However, even in this silent change, time began to pass gradually.


    After the Straw Hats got out of Rafdru, they indeed became the Pirate Kings in name only, but so what?


    When I first came, I found that the whole world had changed. The pirate had already changed his form. Everything seemed so unprepared.


    Without even the slightest preparation, they had to change their lives, switch to another identity, and continue living.


    In the entire sea, the one with the fastest transformation speed and the most sess should belong to Bucky. This guy is not very strong, but he is extremely lucky. With his own logisticspany on the sea, he has already transformed in a short period of time. Let yourself umte a lot of wealth.


    At the same time, they can easily enter the high-end group directly. The changes on the cake ind can also be said to be unexpected. Elegant desserts are apanied by exquisite craftsmanship. They have never sold them to the outside world. For the first time, they feel that besides local Besides pirates robbing merchant ships, how can this kind of business be so profitable?


    The revolutionary army''s current position is equivalent to a disciplinary inspection, and they travel back and forth to various countries. In less than half a year, they have seen considerable results, and each of them finally showed a long-lost smile to each other.


    As for Sabo, Chief of Staff of the Revolutionary Army, he can now stay with his brother Ace freely. The two of them have nothing to do every day. However, due to the original capabilities of the Whitebeard Pirates, the two of them do not have to worry about food. wear.


    In a short period of time, the world has returned to the kind of peace that everyone expected, without any oppression, and living a fulfilling life every day. This is the ideal life that many people dream of.


    After the Toru Empire took over the World Government, the headquarters did not choose to be in Mary Bridge. Instead, it was located on the Judiciary Ind where they held the meeting. Now there are space portals installed almost everywhere in the world. In this case, the headquarters is located in It doesn''t matter where you are, you can reach it directly in the blink of an eye.


    When nature begins to live and work in peace and contentment without any disturbance, the current World Alliance ignores those who already possess Devil Fruit and have done no evil. However, after waiting for their natural demise, Devil Fruit reappears in the world. But no ordinary person is allowed to own it.


    All Devil Fruit types, whether native or acquired, will eventually be brought under the World Alliance.


    On this basis, all aspects of the practice of domineering are now in the hands of these people through the rights and interests of all parties. Even those who are hidden outside, they have all been notified one by one, and are strictly prohibited from teaching it to anyone. Anyone else talks about the practice of domineering.


    From a certain point of view, if ordinary people do not have ess to such opportunities, then they will basically not have any troubles. Even if there is chaos, then with the strength of today''s World Alliance, these can be instantly All problems solved.


    This is also the most important move they have made. They have already started arranging this way. As far as the entire world is concerned, those who create chaos basically belong to those strong ones. But now all the strong ones fall into one category. Naturally Then no one will use this to cause trouble.


    After all the disputes have been resolved, the next thing to deal with is basically the economic division of each country. Themercial economy of the Tru Empire has now spread almost all over the world at the fastest speed. ording to the specialties of each ce, Develop an overall n for their country.


    And there will not be any disputes or differences with their country, and the ownership rights belong to the country.


    A yearter, there were gradually more ships on the sea, but most of them were merchant ships, and the ships flying pirate gs had basically disappeared.


    As one of those pirates from the extremely evil era, Kidd himself was sent out by the Toru Empire. Now that the mission waspleted, he naturally returned to the Toru Empire, and with his strength, he directly became the captain of the National Guard. His strength is also considered to be particrly outstanding. huge.


    Trafalgar Law, a user with the power of surgical fruit, also went directly to the Shampoo Inds to open a medical center. His shocking medical methods kept his business busy from morning to night, even for people from all over the world. People among them may be willing to travel thousands of miles toe to his ce.


    Each of the other pirates actually has their own abilities, whether it is the ability of the devil fruit or the inherent leadership, which allows them to thrive in one field. Water rises.


    As for our protagonist group, it is now considered to be falling apart. After bing the Pirate King, their adventure from beginning to end ispletely over. Nami returned to the East China Sea area and directly built an orange grove, which she also nned to make a living from.


    Zoro returned to his original kendo ce, followed his teacher and began to teach other disciples, which can be regarded as practicing his persistence in kendo.


    Robin returned to her pce without any ident, and continued to be a virtuous and virtuous mother, no longer interfering with any rights and wrongs in the outside world.


    ��


    Everyone has returned to where they were before, and is no longer restless. At least they are very satisfied with the management of the world today.


    15 yearster.


    Chang Nuo still looked as young as before, without even any special unexpected changes. It was just that while he was processing the file in his hand, he suddenly raised his head and looked up at the sky.


    The next moment, his entire body disappeared from the same spot, and when he reappeared, he was already in space.


    Also appearing together was his old rival Fei Duo, but this guy looked toofortable.


    No one knows where he has been living for more than ten years, but just by virtue of the clothes he wears that look so sloppy and the buttons on the chest have not been fastened, it feels like he has just climbed out of bed.


    "Now, you didn''t expect it to be so fast, but are you really sure this time?"


    Fei Duo was suspended there with a smile on his face and said.


    "I''m still a little sure, and I don''t know if this is just the beginning or the end!"


    Changnuo sighed helplessly. He only had a circle-shaped samsara eye. The next moment, there were nine more magatama eyes on it. Even an eye began to slowly grow on his forehead. The blood-red appearance could directly shock everyone. Human heart and soul.


    Even Fei Duo, who was watching this scene from a distance, began to feel some uncontroble fear in his heart.


    Chang Nuo looked up and saw that a ck hole gradually began to appear in the space in the distance. A huge and even invisible technological product slowly started from the entrance of the hole and moved towards today''s world.


    "The Art of Six Spaces ~ ck Hole!"


    Chang Nuo directly manipted it with both hands, and a dark vortex immediately appeared in his hands. He slowly raised his hands, and then a huge ck hole directly enveloped the ck hole passing through in front of him.


    "I am the master of this world, and I will destroy you all next time!"


    Chang Nuo said calmly, and then the dark screen on the opponent''s space warship suddenly became bright. A guy in military uniform performed a military salute on the huge screen, and then the entire warship disappeared into the void again.


    An unprecedented crisis ended calmly, without causing a ripple, and without affecting the lives of anyone in this world.


    Fei Duo was stunned for a long time, but then a slight smile appeared on the corner of his mouth.


    ����The end of the book����


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!